Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

CHAPTER 3 - SPECIALIST LIABILITY RULES  

PART 3-1 - CAPITAL GAINS AND LOSSES: GENERAL TOPICS  

Division 100 - A Guide to capital gains and losses  

SECTION 100-1   What this Division is about  

This Division is a simplified outline of the capital gains and capital losses provisions, commonly referred to as capital gains tax ( CGT ). It will help you to understand your current liabilities, and to factor CGT into your on-going financial affairs.

SECTION 100-5  

100-5   Effect of this Division  
This Division is a *Guide.

Note:

In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may be considered only for limited purposes: see section 950-150 .

SECTION 100-10   Fundamentals of CGT  

100-10(1)    
CGT affects your income tax liability because your assessable income includes your net capital gain for the income year. Your net capital gain is the total of your capital gains for the income year, reduced by certain capital losses you have made.

See later in this Guide (section 100-50) for more detail.


100-10(2)    
When you prepare your income tax return, you need to check whether you have made any capital gains for the income year.

You also need to check whether you have made any capital losses. You cannot deduct a capital loss from your assessable income, but it will reduce your capital gain in the current income year or later income years.


100-10(3)    


You will also need to consider the impact of CGT when doing your financial planning. In particular, you will need adequate record-keeping to deal most effectively with any immediate or future CGT liability.

To give you a sense of the range of things affected by CGT, if you are involved with any of the following, you may have a CGT liability now or at some time in the future:


• leases • marriage or relationship breakdown
• inheritance • working from home
• subdividing land • shares
• goodwill • a civil court case
• contracts • trusts
• options • bankruptcy
• a company liquidation • incorporating a company
• leaving Australia  


SECTION 100-15   Overview of Steps 1 and 2  


Note:

Capital proceeds and cost base are not relevant for some CGT events, for example CGT event K7 or any of the CGT events created by Subdivision 104-L .

Step 1 - Have you made a capital gain or a capital loss?  

SECTION 100-20   What events attract CGT?  

100-20(1)    
You can make a capital gain or loss only if a CGT event happens.

100-20(2)    
There are a wide range of CGT events. Some happen often and affect many different taxpayers. Others are rare and affect only a few.


Some examples of CGT events
Situation Event Which CGT event?
You own shares you acquired on or after 20 September 1985 You sell them CGT event A1
.
You sell a business You agree with the purchaser not to operate a similar business in the same area CGT event D1
.
You are a lessor You receive a payment for changing the lease CGT event F5
.
You own shares in a company The company makes a payment (not a dividend) to you as a shareholder CGT event G1

A summary of all the CGT events is in section 104-5 .



Identifying the time of a CGT event

100-20(3)    
The specific time when a CGT event happens is important for various reasons: in particular, for working out whether a capital gain or loss from the event affects your income tax for the current or another income year.

If a CGT event involves a contract, the time of the event will often be when the contract is made , not when it is completed.

The time of each CGT event is explained early in the relevant section in Division 104 .


SECTION 100-25   What are CGT assets?  

100-25(1)    
Most CGT events involve a CGT asset. (For many, there is an exception if the CGT asset was acquired before 20 September 1985.) However, many CGT events are concerned directly with capital receipts and do not involve a CGT asset.

See the summary of the CGT events in section 104-5 .


100-25(2)    
Some CGT assets are reasonably well-known:

  • • land and buildings, for example, a weekender;
  • • shares;
  • • units in a unit trust;
  • • collectables which cost over $500, for example, jewellery or an artwork;
  • • personal use assets which cost over $10,000, for example, a boat.

  • 100-25(3)    
    Other CGT assets are not so well-known. For example:

  • • your home;
  • • contractual rights;
  • • goodwill;
  • • foreign currency.
  • For a full explanation of what things are CGT assets: see Division 108 .


    SECTION 100-30   Does an exception or exemption apply?  

    100-30(1)    
    Once you identify a CGT event which applies to you, you need to know if there is an exception or exemption that would reduce the capital gain or loss or allow you to disregard it.

    100-30(2)    


    There are 4 categories of exemptions:


    1. exempt assets: for example, cars;


    2. exempt or loss-denying transactions: for example, compensation for personal injury or your tenancy comes to an end;


    3. anti-overlap provisions (that reduce your capital gain by the amount that is otherwise assessable);


    4. small business relief.

    Note:

    Most of the exceptions are in Division 104 . You will find most of the possible exemptions in Division 118 . The small business relief provisions are in Division 152 .



    Some exemptions are limited

    100-30(3)    
    Take the family home for example. Generally, you are exempt from CGT when you make a capital gain on disposing of your main residence.

    But this can change depending on how you came to own the house and what you have done with it. For example, if you rent it out, you may be liable to CGT when you sell it.

    For the limits on the general exemption of your main residence: see Subdivision 118-B .


    SECTION 100-33   Can there be a roll-over?  

    100-33(1)    


    Roll-overs allow you to defer or disregard a capital gain or loss from a CGT event. They apply in specific situations. Some require a choice (for example, where an asset is compulsorily acquired: see Subdivision 124-B ) and some are automatic (for example, where an asset is transferred because of marriage or relationship breakdown: see Subdivision 126-A ).

    100-33(2)    
    There are 2 types of roll-over:


    1. a replacement-asset roll-over allows you to defer a capital gain or loss from one CGT event until a later CGT event happens where a CGT asset is replaced with another one;


    2. a same-asset roll-over allows you to disregard a capital gain or loss from a CGT event where the same CGT asset is involved.

    Note:

    The replacement-asset roll-overs are listed in section 112-115, and the same-asset roll-overs are listed in section 112-150 .


    Step 2 - Work out the amount of the capital gain or loss

    SECTION 100-35  

    100-35   What is a capital gain or loss?  
    For most CGT events:

  • • You make a capital gain if you receive (or are entitled to receive) capital amounts from the CGT event which exceed your total costs associated with that event.
  • • You make a capital loss if your total costs associated with the CGT event exceed the capital amounts you receive (or are entitled to receive) from the event.
  • SECTION 100-40   What factors come into calculating a capital gain or loss?  
    Capital proceeds

    100-40(1)    
    For most CGT events, the capital amounts you receive (or are entitled to receive) from the event are called the capital proceeds .

    To work out the capital proceeds: see Division 116 .



    Cost base and reduced cost base

    100-40(2)    


    For most CGT events, your total costs associated with the event are worked out in 2 different ways:
  • • For the purpose of working out a capital gain , those costs are called the cost base of the CGT asset.
  • • For the purpose of working out a capital loss , those costs are called the reduced cost base of the asset.
  • One of the main differences is that the costs may be indexed for inflation occurring before 1 October 1999 in working out a capital gain for a CGT asset acquired at or before 11.45 am on 21 September 1999 (which reduces the size of the gain), but not in working out a capital loss .

    To work out the cost base and reduced cost base: see Division 110 .


    SECTION 100-45  

    100-45   How to calculate the capital gain or loss for most CGT events  

    1. Work out your capital proceeds from the CGT event.


    2. Work out the cost base for the CGT asset.


    3. Subtract the cost base from the capital proceeds.


    4. If the proceeds exceed the cost base, the difference is your capital gain .


    5. If not, work out the reduced cost base for the asset.


    6. If the reduced cost base exceeds the capital proceeds, the difference is your capital loss .


    7. If the capital proceeds are less than the cost base but more than the reduced cost base, you have neither a capital gain nor a capital loss .

    Step 3 - Work out your net capital gain or loss for the income year

    SECTION 100-50  

    100-50   How to work out your net capital gain or loss  



    1. Reduce your capital gains for the income year, in the order you choose, by your capital losses for the income year. (If the capital losses for the income year exceed the capital gains, the difference is your net capital loss. You cannot deduct a net capital loss from your assessable income.)


    2. Reduce any remaining capital gains, in the order you choose, by any unapplied net capital losses for previous income years.


    3. Reduce any remaining discount capital gains by the discount percentage.

    To find out what is a discount capital gain and the discount percentage: see Division 115 .


    4. If you carry on a small business, apply the small business concessions in further reduction of your capital gains (whether or not the gains are discount capital gains).

    For the small business concessions: see Division 152 .


    5. Add up:


    (a) any remaining capital gains that are not discount capital gains; and

    (b) any remaining discount capital gains.
    The total is your net capital gain.

    For the rules on working out your net capital gain or loss: see Division 102 .

    SECTION 100-55  

    100-55   How do you comply with CGT?  
    Declare any net capital gain as assessable income in your income tax return.

    Defer any net capital loss to the next income year for which you have capital gains that exceed the capital losses for that income year.

    Keeping records for CGT purposes

    SECTION 100-60  

    100-60   Why keep records?  

    1. To ensure you do not disadvantage yourself.


    2. To comply as easily as possible.


    3. To plan for your CGT position in future income years.


    4. The law requires you to: see Division 121 .

    SECTION 100-65  

    100-65   What records?  
    Keeping full records will make it easier for you to comply. For example, keep records of:

  • • receipts of purchase or transfer;
  • • interest on money you borrowed;
  • • costs of agents, accountants, legal, advertising etc.;
  • • insurance costs and land rates or taxes;
  • • any market valuations;
  • • costs of maintenance, repairs or modifications;
  • • brokerage on shares;
  • • legal costs.
  • SECTION 100-70  

    100-70   How long you need to keep records  
    The law requires you to keep records for 5 years after a CGT event has happened.

    Division 102 - Assessable income includes net capital gain  

    Guide to Division 102  

    SECTION 102-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division tells you how to work out if you have made a net capital gain or a net capital loss for the income year. A net capital gain is included in your assessable income. However, you cannot deduct a net capital loss. (Amounts otherwise included in your assessable income do not form part of a net capital gain.)

    SECTION 102-3   Concessions in working out your net capital gain  

    102-3(1)    
    Concessional rules apply to working out the net capital gain of some entities (see subsection (2)) if:


    (a) they have a capital gain (a discount capital gain ) from a CGT asset acquired at least 12 months before the CGT event that caused the capital gain; and


    (b) they have not chosen to include indexation in the cost base of the asset for working out the capital gain (if relevant).

    Note 1:

    Division 115 explains what is a discount capital gain.

    Note 2:

    Under Division 110 , the entity can choose to include indexation in the cost base of a CGT asset acquired at or before 11.45 am on 21 September 1999.


    102-3(2)    
    Only these entities get the concession:


    (a) individuals;


    (b) complying superannuation entities;


    (c) trusts;


    (d) life insurance companies, in relation to discount capital gains for CGT events in respect of CGT assets that are complying superannuation assets.

    Note:

    Shareholders in a listed investment company can also receive a concession equivalent to a discount capital gain: see Subdivision 115-D .


    102-3(3)    
    The concession is that the net capital gain includes only part of the amount of the discount capital gain left after applying capital losses and net capital losses from earlier income years.

    See subsection 102-5(1) .




    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    102-5 Assessable income includes net capital gain
    102-10 How to work out your net capital loss
    102-15 How to apply net capital losses
    102-20 Ways you can make a capital gain or a capital loss
    102-22 Amounts of capital gains and losses
    102-23 CGT event still happens even if gain or loss disregarded
    102-25 Order of application of CGT events
    102-30 Exceptions and modifications

    Operative provisions  

    SECTION 102-5   Assessable income includes net capital gain  

    102-5(1)    


    Your assessable income includes your net capital gain (if any) for the income year. You work out your net capital gain in this way: Working out your net capital gain

    Step 1.

    Reduce the *capital gains you made during the income year by the *capital losses (if any) you made during the income year.

    Note 1:

    You choose the order in which you reduce your capital gains. You have a net capital loss for the income year if your capital losses exceed your capital gains: see section 102-10 .

    Note 2:

    Some provisions of this Act (such as Divisions 104 and 118 ) permit or require you to disregard certain capital gains or losses when working out your net capital gain. Subdivision 152-B permits you, in some circumstances, to disregard a capital gain on an asset you held for at least 15 years.


    Step 2.

    Apply any previously unapplied *net capital losses from earlier income years to reduce the amounts (if any) remaining after the reduction of *capital gains under step 1 (including any capital gains not reduced under that step because the *capital losses were less than the total of your capital gains).

    Note 1:

    Section 102-15 explains how to apply net capital losses.

    Note 2:

    You choose the order in which you reduce the amounts.


    Step 3.

    Reduce by the *discount percentage each amount of a *discount capital gain remaining after step 2 (if any).

    Note:

    Only some entities can have discount capital gains, and only if they have capital gains from CGT assets acquired at least a year before making the gains. See Division 115 .


    Step 4.

    If any of your *capital gains (whether or not they are *discount capital gains) qualify for any of the small business concessions in Subdivisions 152-C , 152-D and 152-E , apply those concessions to each capital gain as provided for in those Subdivisions.

    Note 1:

    The basic conditions for getting these concessions are in Subdivision 152-A .

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 152-C does not apply to CGT events J2, J5 and J6. In addition, Subdivision 152-E does not apply to CGT events J5 and J6.


    Step 5.

    Add up the amounts of *capital gains (if any) remaining after step 4. The sum is your net capital gain for the income year.

    Note:

    For exceptions and modifications to these rules: see section 102-30 .


    102-5(2)    
    However, if during the income year:


    (a) you became bankrupt; or


    (b) you were released from debts under a law relating to bankruptcy;

    any *net capital loss you made for an earlier income year must be disregarded in working out whether you made a *net capital gain for the income year or a later one.


    102-5(3)    
    Subsection (2) applies even though your bankruptcy is annulled if:


    (a) the annulment happens under section 74 of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 ; and


    (b) under the composition or scheme of arrangement concerned, you were, will be or may be released from debts from which you would have been released if instead you had been discharged from the bankruptcy.


    SECTION 102-10   How to work out your net capital loss  

    102-10(1)    
    You work out if you have a net capital loss for the income year in this way: Working out your net capital loss


    Step 1.

    Add up the *capital losses you made during the income year. Also add up the *capital gains you made.


    Step 2.

    Subtract your *capital gains from your *capital losses.


    Step 3.

    If the Step 2 amount is more than zero, it is your net capital loss for the income year.

    Note:

    For exceptions and modifications to these rules: see section 102-30 .


    102-10(2)    
    You cannot deduct from your assessable income a *net capital loss for any income year.


    SECTION 102-15  

    102-15   How to apply net capital losses  


    In working out if you have a * net capital gain, your * net capital losses are applied in the order in which you made them.
    Note 1:

    A net capital loss can be applied only to the extent that it has not already been utilised: see subsection 960-20(1) .

    Note 2:

    For applying a net capital loss for the 1997-98 income year or an earlier income year, see section 102-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    SECTION 102-20  

    102-20   Ways you can make a capital gain or a capital loss  
    You can make a *capital gain or *capital loss if and only if a *CGT event happens. The gain or loss is made at the time of the event.

    Note 1:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .

    Note 2:

    The gain or loss may be affected by an exemption, or may be able to be rolled-over. For exemptions generally, see Division 118 . For roll-overs, see Divisions 122 , 123 , 124 and 126 .

    Note 3:

    You may make a capital gain or capital loss as a result of a CGT event happening to another entity: see subsections 115-215(3) , 170-275(1) and 170-280(3) .

    Note 4:

    You cannot make a capital loss from a CGT event that happens to your original interests during a trust restructuring period if you choose a roll-over under Subdivision 124-N .

    Note 5:

    The capital loss may be affected if the CGT asset was owned by a member of a demerger group just before a demerger: see section 125-170 .

    Note 6:

    Under subsection 230-310(4) gains and losses are taken to arise from a CGT event in particular circumstances.

    Note 7:

    This section does not apply in relation to the capital gain mentioned in paragraph 294-120(5)(b) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    SECTION 102-22  

    102-22   Amounts of capital gains and losses  
    Most *CGT events provide for calculating a *capital gain or *capital loss by comparing 2 different amounts. The amount of the gain or loss is the difference between those amounts.

    SECTION 102-23  

    102-23   CGT event still happens even if gain or loss disregarded  
    A *CGT event still happens even if:


    (a) it does not result in a *capital gain or *capital loss; or


    (b) a capital gain or capital loss from the event is disregarded.

    Example:

    Lindy sells a car. Section 118-5 says that any capital gain or loss from a CGT event happening to a car is disregarded. However, the sale is still an example of CGT event A1.

    SECTION 102-25   Order of application of CGT events  

    102-25(1)    
    Work out if a *CGT event (except *CGT events D1 and H2) happens to your situation. If more than one event can happen, the one you use is the one that is the most specific to your situation.

    102-25(2)    


    However, there are 3 exceptions: one for *CGT event J2, one for CGT event K5 and one for CGT event K12.

    102-25(2A)    


    If the circumstances that gave rise to *CGT event J2 constitute another CGT event, CGT event J2 applies in addition to the other event.
    Example:

    CGT event J2 happens because a replacement asset for a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E becomes your trading stock (in circumstances where CGT event K4 happens). Both CGT events apply.


    102-25(2B)    
    *CGT event K5 happens if CGT event A1, C2 or E8 happens. CGT event K5 applies in addition to the other event.


    102-25(2C)    


    If:


    (a) *CGT events happen for which you make *capital gains or *capital losses; and


    (b) the capital gains or losses are taken into account in working out a *foreign hybrid net capital loss amount; and


    (c) the foreign hybrid net capital loss amount is itself taken into account in determining that *CGT event K12 happens;

    CGT event K12 applies in addition to the other CGT events.


    102-25(3)    
    If no *CGT event (except *CGT events D1 and H2) happens:


    (a) work out if CGT event D1 happens and use that event if it does; and


    (b) if it does not, work out if CGT event H2 happens and use that event if it does.

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    SECTION 102-30  

    102-30   Exceptions and modifications  


    Provisions of this Act are in normal text. The other provisions, in bold , are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    Special rules affecting capital gains and capital losses
    Item For this kind of entity: There are these special rules: See:
    1 All entities You can subtract capital losses from collectables only from your capital gains from collectables. section108-10
    .
    2 All entities Disregard capital losses you make from personal use assets. section 108-20
    .
    2AA Beneficiary of trust that makes a capital gain taken into account in working out the net income of the trust The beneficiary is treated as having an extra capital gain corresponding to the beneficiary ' s share of the capital gain (taking into account adjustments in respect of the CGT discount and small business concessions). Subdivision 115-C
    .
    2A (Repealed by No 165 of 1999)  
    2B (Repealed by No 165 of 1999)  
    .
    3 All entities If any of your commercial debts have been forgiven in the income year, your net capital losses (including net capital losses from collectables) may be reduced. sections 245-130 and 245-135
    .
    4 A company If it has a change of ownership or control during the income year, and has not satisfied the business continuity test, it works out its net capital gain and net capital loss in a special way. Subdivision 165-CB
    .
    5 A company It cannot apply a net capital loss unless: Subdivision 165-CA
        the same people owned the company during the loss year, the income year and any intervening year; and  
        no person controlled the company ' s voting power at any time during the income year who did not also control it during the whole of the loss year and any intervening year;  
        or the company has satisfied the business continuity test.  
    .
    6 A company If one or more of these things happen: Division 175
        a capital gain or loss is injected into it;  
        a tax benefit is obtained from its available net capital losses or current year capital losses;  
        a tax benefit is obtained because of its available capital gains;  
        the Commissioner can disallow its net capital losses or current year capital losses, and it may have to work out its net capital loss in a special way.  
    .
    7 A company A company can transfer a surplus amount of its net capital loss to another company so that the other company can apply the amount in the income year of the transfer. (Both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group.) Subdivision 170-B
    .
    7A The head company of a consolidated group or a MEC group The head company of a consolidated group or a MEC group must apply the capital loss from CGT event L1 over at least 5 income years section 104-500
    .
    8 A PDF If it is a PDF at the end of an income year for which it has a net capital loss, it can apply the loss in a later income year only if it is a PDF throughout the last day of the later income year. section 195-25
    .
    9 A PDF If it becomes a PDF during an income year, it works out its net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year in a special way. section 195-35
    .
    10 Body that has ceased to be an STB Net capital losses made before cessation disregarded. Special rules apply in cessation year where net capital gain before cessation and net capital loss after cessation. section 24AX
    .
    10A All entities Division 316 contains special rules affecting capital gains and capital losses connected with demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurers. Division 316
    .
    11 A life insurance company Division 320 contains special rules that apply to capital gains and capital losses Division 320
    .
    12 A company The capital gain or capital loss a company makes from a CGT event that happened to a share in a company that is a foreign resident may be reduced. Subdivision 768-G
    .
    13 A PDF Sections 102-5 and 102-10 do not apply to the calculation of net capital gains and losses. Capital gains and losses are instead allocated to separate classes of income. Subdivision C of Division 10E of Part III
    .
    14 A CFC In calculating the CFC ' s attributable income, pre-1 July 1990 capital losses are disregarded. section 409

    Division 103 - General rules  

    SECTION 103-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division sets out some general rules that apply to the provisions dealing with capital gains and capital losses.

    Operative provisions  

    SECTION 103-5  

    103-5   Giving property as part of a transaction  


    There are a number of provisions in this Part and Part 3-3 that say that a payment, cost or expenditure can include giving property.

    To the extent that such a provision does say that a payment, cost or expenditure can include giving property, use the *market value of the property in working out the amount of the payment, cost or expenditure.

    SECTION 103-10   Entitlement to receive money or property  

    103-10(1)    
    This Part and Part 3-3 apply to you as if you had received money or other property if it has been applied for your benefit (including by discharging all or part of a debt you owe) or as you direct.

    103-10(2)    
    Those Parts apply to you as if you are entitled to receive money or other property:


    (a) if you are entitled to have it so applied; or


    (b) if:


    (i) you will not receive it until a later time; or

    (ii) the money is payable by instalments.

    SECTION 103-15  

    103-15   Requirement to pay money or give property  
    This Part and Part 3-3 apply to you as if you are required to pay money or give other property even if:


    (a) you do not have to pay or give it until a later time; or


    (b) the money is payable by instalments.

    103-20   (Repealed) SECTION 103-20 Amounts to be expressed in Australian currency  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2003)

    SECTION 103-25   Choices  

    103-25(1)    
    A choice you can make under this Part or Part 3-3 must be made:


    (a) by the day you lodge your *income tax return for the income year in which the relevant *CGT event happened; or


    (b) within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.


    103-25(2)    
    The way you (and any other entity making the choice) prepare your *income tax returns is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

    103-25(3)    


    However, there are some exceptions:


    (aa) subsection 115-230(3) (relating to assessment of *capital gains of resident testamentary trusts) requires a trustee to make a choice by the time specified in subsection 115-230(5) ; and


    (a) (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)


    (b) subsections 152-315(4) and (5) (relating to the small business retirement exemption) require a choice to be made in writing.


    (c) (Repealed by No 55 of 2007 )

    Note:

    This section is modified in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 421 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    SECTION 103-30  

    103-30   Reduction of cost base etc. by net input tax credits  


    Reduce the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a *CGT asset, and any other amount that could be involved in the calculation of an entity's *capital gain or *capital loss, by the amount of any *net input tax credit of the entity in relation to that amount.
    Example:

    The other amount could be expenditure in the case of some CGT events (see, for example, CGT event D1).

    Note:

    Subsection 116-20(5) deals with the effect of net GST on supplies for the purposes of capital proceeds.

    Division 104 - CGT events  

    Guide to Division 104  

    SECTION 104-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division sets out all the CGT events for which you can make a capital gain or loss. It tells you how to work out if you have made a gain or loss from each event and the time of each event. It also contains exceptions for gains and losses for many events (such as the exception for CGT assets acquired before 20 September 1985) and some cost base adjustment rules.

    SECTION 104-5   Summary of the CGT events  



    CGT events
    Event number and description Time of event is: Capital gain is: Capital loss is:
    A1 Disposal of a CGT asset when disposal contract is entered into or, if none, when entity stops being asset ' s owner capital proceeds from disposal less asset ' s cost base asset ' s reduced cost base less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-10 ]
    .
    B1 Use and enjoyment before title passes when use of CGT asset passes capital proceeds less asset ' s cost base asset ' s reduced cost base less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-15 ]
    .
    C1 Loss or destruction of a CGT asset when compensation is first received or, if none, when loss discovered or destruction occurred capital proceeds less asset ' s cost base asset ' s reduced cost base less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-20 ]
    .
    C2 Cancellation, surrender and similar endings when contract ending asset is entered into or, if none, when asset ends capital proceeds from ending less asset ' s cost base asset ' s reduced cost base less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-25 ]
    .
    C3 End of option to acquire shares etc. when option ends capital proceeds from granting option less expenditure in granting it expenditure in granting option less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-30 ]
    .
    D1 Creating contractual or other rights when contract is entered into or right is created capital proceeds from creating right less incidental costs of creating it incidental costs of creating right less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-35 ]
    .
    D2 Granting an option when option is granted capital proceeds from grant less expenditure to grant it expenditure to grant option less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-40 ]
    .
    D3 Granting a right to income from mining when contract is entered into or, if none, when right is granted capital proceeds from grant of right less expenditure to grant it expenditure to grant right less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-45 ]
    .
    D4 Entering into a conservation covenant when covenant is entered into capital proceeds from covenant less cost base apportioned to the covenant reduced cost base apportioned to the covenant less capital proceeds from covenant
    [ See section 104-47 ]
    .
    E1 Creating a trust over a CGT asset when trust is created capital proceeds from creating trust less asset ' s cost base asset ' s reduced cost base less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-55 ]
    .
    E2 Transferring a CGT asset to a trust when asset transferred capital proceeds from transfer less asset ' s cost base asset ' s reduced cost base less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-60 ]
    .
    E3 Converting a trust to a unit trust when trust is converted market value of asset at that time less its cost base asset ' s reduced cost base less that market value
    [ See section 104-65 ]
    .
    E4 Capital payment for trust interest when trustee makes payment non-assessable part of the payment less cost base of the trust interest no capital loss
    [ See section 104-70 ]
    .
    E5 Beneficiary becoming entitled to a trust asset when beneficiary becomes absolutely entitled for trustee - market value of CGT asset at that time less its cost base; for beneficiary - that market value less cost base of beneficiary ' s capital interest for trustee - reduced cost base of CGT asset at that time less that market value; for beneficiary - reduced cost base of beneficiary ' s capital interest less that market value
    [ See section 104-75 ]
    .
    E6 Disposal to beneficiary to end income right the time of the disposal for trustee - market value of CGT asset at that time less its cost base; for beneficiary - that market value less cost base of beneficiary ' s right to income for trustee - reduced cost base of CGT asset at that time less that market value; for beneficiary - reduced cost base of beneficiary ' s right to income less that market value
    [ See section 104-80 ]
    .
    E7 Disposal to beneficiary to end capital interest the time of the disposal for trustee - market value of CGT asset at that time less its cost base; for beneficiary - that market value less cost base of beneficiary ' s capital interest for trustee - reduced cost base of CGT asset at that time less that market value; for beneficiary - reduced cost base of beneficiary ' s capital interest less that market value
    [ See section 104-85 ]
    .
    E8 Disposal by beneficiary of capital interest when disposal contract entered into or, if none, when beneficiary ceases to own CGT asset capital proceeds less appropriate proportion of the trust ' s net assets appropriate proportion of the trusts ' s net assets less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-90 ]
    .
    E9 Creating a trust over future property when entity makes agreement market value of the property (as if it existed when agreement made) less incidental costs in making agreement incidental costs in making agreement less market value of the property (as if it existed when agreement made)
    [ See section 104-105 ]
    .
    E10 Annual cost base reduction exceeds cost base of interest in AMIT when reduction happens excess of cost base reduction over cost base no capital loss
    [See section 104-107A]
    .
    F1 Granting a lease for grant of lease - when entity enters into lease contract or, if none, at start of lease; for lease renewal or extension - at start of renewal or extension capital proceeds less expenditure on grant, renewal or extension expenditure on grant, renewal or extension less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-110 ]
    .
    F2 Granting a long term lease for grant of lease - when lessor grants lease; for lease renewal or extension - at start of renewal or extension capital proceeds from grant, renewal or extension less cost base of leased property reduced cost base of leased property less capital proceeds from grant, renewal or extension
    [ See section 104-115 ]
    .
    F3 Lessor pays lessee to get lease changed when lease term is varied or waived no capital gain amount of expenditure to get lessee ' s agreement
    [ See section 104-120 ]
    .
    F4 Lessee receives payment for changing lease when lease term is varied or waived capital proceeds less cost base of lease no capital loss
    [ See section 104-125 ]
    .
    F5 Lessor receives payment for changing lease when lease term is varied or waived capital proceeds less expenditure in relation to variation or waiver expenditure in relation to variation or waiver less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-130 ]
    .
    G1 Capital payment for shares when company pays non-assessable amount payment less cost base of shares no capital loss
    [ See section 104-135 ]
    .
    G2 (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)
    .
    G3 Liquidator or administrator declares shares or financial instruments worthless when declaration was made no capital gain shares ' or financial instruments ' reduced cost base
    [ See section 104-145 ]
    .
    H1 Forfeiture of a deposit when deposit is forfeited deposit less expenditure in connection with prospective sale expenditure in connection with prospective sale less deposit
    [ See section 104-150 ]
    .
    H2 Receipt for event relating to a CGT asset when act, transaction or event occurred capital proceeds less incidental costs incidental costs less capital proceeds
    [ See section 104-155 ]
    .
    I1 Individual or company stops being an Australian resident when individual or company stops being Australian resident for each CGT asset the person owns, its market value less its cost base for each CGT asset the person owns, its reduced cost base less its market value
    [ See section 104-160 ]
    .
    I2 Trust stops being a resident trust when trust ceases to be resident trust for CGT purposes for each CGT asset the trustee owns, its market value of asset less its cost base for each CGT asset the trustee owns, its reduced cost base less its market value
    [ See section 104-170 ]
    .
    J1 Company stops being member of wholly-owned group after roll-over when the company stops market value of asset at time of event less its cost base reduced cost base of asset less that market value
    [ See section 104-175 ]
    .
    J2 Change in relation to replacement asset or improved asset after a roll-over under Subdivision 152-E when the change happens the amount mentioned in subsection 104-185(5) no capital loss
    [ See section 104-185 ]
    .
    J3 (Repealed by No 55 of 2007 )
    .
    J4 Trust fails to cease to exist after a roll-over under Subdivision 124-N when the failure happens market value of asset less asset ' s cost base reduced cost base of asset less asset ' s market value
    [ See section 104-195 ]
    .
    J5 Failure to acquire replacement asset and to incur fourth element expenditure after a roll-over under Subdivision 152-E at the end of the replacement asset period the amount of the capital gain that you disregarded under Subdivision 152-E no capital loss
    [ See section 104-197 ]
    .
    J6 Cost of acquisition of replacement asset or amount of fourth element expenditure, or both, not sufficient to cover disregarded capital gain at the end of the replacement asset period the amount mentioned in subsection 104-198(3) no capital loss
    [ See section 104-198 ]
    .
    K1 As the result of an incoming international transfer of a Kyoto unit or an Australian carbon credit unit from your foreign account or your nominee ' s foreign account, you start to hold the unit as a registered emissions unit
    [See section 104-205]
    when you start to hold the unit as a registered emissions unit market value of unit less its cost base reduced cost base of unit less its market value
    .
    K2 Bankrupt pays amount in relation to debt when payment is made no capital gain so much of payment as relates to denied part of a net capital loss
    [ See section 104-210 ]
    .
    K3 Asset passing to tax-advantaged entity when individual dies market value of asset at death less its cost base reduced cost base of asset less that market value
    [ See section 104-215 ]
    .
    K4 CGT asset starts being trading stock when asset starts being trading stock market value of asset less its cost base reduced cost base of asset less its market value
    [ See section 104-220 ]
    .
    K5 Special capital loss from collectable that has fallen in market value when CGT event A1, C2 or E8 happens to shares in the company, or an interest in the trust, that owns the collectable no capital gain market value of the shares or interest (as if the collectable had not fallen in market value) less the capital proceeds from CGT event A1, C2 or E8
    [ See section 104-225 ]
    .
    K6 Pre-CGT shares or trust interest when another CGT event involving the shares or interest happens capital proceeds from the shares or trust interest (so far as attributable to post-CGT assets owned by the company or trust) less the assets ' cost bases no capital loss
    [ See section 104-230 ]
    .
    K7 Balancing adjustment occurs for a depreciating asset that you used for purposes other than taxable purposes When balancing adjustment event occurs Termination value less cost times fraction Cost less termination value times fraction
    [ See section 104-235 ]
    .
    K8 Direct value shifts affecting your equity or loan interests in a company or trust the decrease time for the interests the gain worked out under section 725-365 no capital loss
    [ See section 104-250 and Division 725 ]
    .
    K9 Entitlement to receive payment of a carried interest when you become entitled to receive payment capital proceeds from entitlement no capital loss
    [ See section 104-255 ]
    .
    K10 You make a forex realisation gain covered by item 1 of the table in subsection 775-70(1) when the forex realisation event happens the forex realisation gain no capital loss
    [ See section 104-260 ]
    .
    K11 You make a forex realisation loss covered by item 1 of the table in subsection 775-75(1) when the forex realisation event happens no capital gain the forex realisation loss
    [ See section 104-265 ]
    .
    K12 Foreign hybrid loss exposure adjustment just before the end of the income year no capital gain the amount stated in subsection 104-270(3)
    [ See section 104-270 ]
    .
    L1 Reduction under section 705-57 in tax cost setting amount of assets of entity becoming subsidiary member of consolidated group or MEC group Just after entity becomes subsidiary member no capital gain amount of reduction
    [ See section 104-500 ]
    .
    L2 Amount remaining after step 3A etc. of joining allocable cost amount is negative Just after entity becomes subsidiary member amount remaining no capital loss
    [ See section 104-505 ]
    .
    L3 Tax cost setting amounts for retained cost base assets exceed joining allocable cost amount Just after entity becomes subsidiary member amount of excess no capital loss
    [ See section 104-510 ]
    .
    L4 No reset cost base assets against which to apply excess of net allocable cost amount on joining Just after entity becomes subsidiary member no capital gain amount of excess
    [ See section 104-515 ]
    .
    L5 Amount remaining after step 4 of leaving allocable cost amount is negative When entity ceases to be subsidiary member amount remaining no capital loss
    [ See section 104-520 ]
    .
    L6 Error in calculation of tax cost setting amount for joining entity ' s assets: CGT event L6 start of the income year when the Commissioner becomes aware of the errors the net overstated amount resulting from the errors, or a portion of that amount the net understated amount resulting from the errors, or a portion of that amount
    [ See section 104-525 ]
    .
    L7 (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)
    .
    L8 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets on joining cannot be allocated Just after entity becomes subsidiary member no capital gain amount of reduction that cannot be allocated
    [ See section 104-535 ]

    Note:

    Subsection 230-310(4) (which deals with hedging financial arrangements) provides that in certain circumstances a CGT event is taken to have occurred in relation to a hedging financial arrangement at the same time as a CGT event actually occurs in relation to a hedged item covered by the arrangement.

    Subdivision 104-A - Disposals  

    SECTION 104-10   Disposal of a CGT asset: CGT event A1  

    104-10(1)    
    CGT event A1 happens if you *dispose of a *CGT asset.

    104-10(2)    


    You dispose of a *CGT asset if a change of ownership occurs from you to another entity, whether because of some act or event or by operation of law. However, a change of ownership does not occur if you stop being the legal owner of the asset but continue to be its beneficial owner.
    Note:

    A change in the trustee of a trust does not constitute a change in the entity that is the trustee of the trust (see subsection 960-100(2) ). This means that CGT event A1 will not happen merely because of a change in the trustee.


    104-10(3)    
    The time of the event is:


    (a) when you enter into the contract for the *disposal; or


    (b) if there is no contract - when the change of ownership occurs.

    Example:

    In June 1999 you enter into a contract to sell land. The contract is settled in October 1999. You make a capital gain of $50,000.

    The gain is made in the 1998-99 income year (the year you entered into the contract) and not the 1999-2000 income year (the year that settlement takes place).

    Note 1:

    If the contract falls through before completion, this event does not happen because no change in ownership occurs.

    Note 2:

    If the asset was compulsorily acquired from you: see subsection (6).


    104-10(4)    


    You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the disposal are more than the asset ' s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base.

    Exceptions

    104-10(5)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if:


    (a) you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985; or


    (b) for a lease that you granted:


    (i) it was granted before that day; or

    (ii) if it has been renewed or extended - the start of the last renewal or extension occurred before that day.
    Note 1:

    You can make a gain if you dispose of shares in a company, or an interest in a trust, that you acquired before that day: see CGT event K6.

    Note 2:

    A capital gain or loss you make because you assign a right under or in relation to a general insurance policy you held with an HIH company to the Commonwealth, the trustee of the HIH Trust or a prescribed entity is also disregarded: see section 322-15.

    Note 3:

    A capital gain or loss made by a demerging entity from CGT event A1 happening as a result of a demerger is also disregarded: see section 125-155 .

    Note 4:

    A capital gain or loss you make because of section 16AI of the Banking Act 1959 is disregarded: see section 253-10 of this Act. Section 16AI of the Banking Act 1959 :

  • (a) reduces your right to be paid an amount by an ADI in connection with an account to the extent of your entitlement under Division 2AA of Part II of that Act to be paid an amount by APRA; and
  • (b) provides that, to the extent of the reduction, the right becomes a right of APRA.
  • Note 5:

    A capital gain or loss you make because, under section 62ZZL of the Insurance Act 1973 , you dispose of a CGT asset consisting of your rights against a general insurance company to APRA is disregarded: see section 322-30 of this Act.



    Compulsory acquisition

    104-10(6)    
    If the asset was *acquired from you by an entity under a power of compulsory acquisition conferred by an *Australian law or a *foreign law, the time of the event is the earliest of:


    (a) when you received compensation from the entity; or


    (b) when the entity became the asset ' s owner; or


    (c) when the entity entered it under that power; or


    (d) when the entity took possession under that power.

    Note:

    You may be able to choose a roll-over if an asset is compulsorily acquired: see Subdivision 124-B .


    104-10(7)    
    (Repealed by No 119 of 2013)


    Subdivision 104-B - Use and enjoyment before title passes  

    SECTION 104-15   Use and enjoyment before title passes: CGT event B1  

    104-15(1)    
    CGT event B1 happens if you enter into an agreement with another entity under which:


    (a) the right to the use and enjoyment of a *CGT asset you own passes to the other entity; and


    (b) title in the asset will or may pass to the other entity at or before the end of the agreement.

    Note:

    Division 240 provides for the inclusion of amounts under hire purchase agreements in assessable income.


    104-15(2)    
    The time of the event is when the other entity first obtains the use and enjoyment of the asset.

    104-15(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the agreement are more than the asset ' s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base.

    Exceptions

    104-15(4)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if:


    (a) title in the asset does not pass to the other entity at or before the end of the agreement; or


    (b) you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.


    Subdivision 104-C - End of a CGT asset  

    SECTION 104-20   Loss or destruction of a CGT asset: CGT event C1  

    104-20(1)    
    CGT event C1 happens if a *CGT asset you own is lost or destroyed.

    Note:

    This event can apply to part of a CGT asset: see section 108-5 (definition of CGT asset ).


    104-20(2)    
    The time of the event is:


    (a) when you first receive compensation for the loss or destruction; or


    (b) if you receive no compensation - when the loss is discovered or the destruction occurred.

    104-20(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the loss or destruction are more than the asset ' s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base.

    Exception

    104-20(4)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    SECTION 104-25   Cancellation, surrender and similar endings: CGT event C2  

    104-25(1)    
    CGT event C2 happens if your ownership of an intangible *CGT asset ends by the asset:


    (a) being redeemed or cancelled; or


    (b) being released, discharged or satisfied; or


    (c) expiring; or


    (d) being abandoned, surrendered or forfeited; or


    (e) if the asset is an option - being exercised; or


    (f) if the asset is a *convertible interest - being converted.


    104-25(2)    
    The time of the event is:


    (a) when you enter into the contract that results in the asset ending; or


    (b) if there is no contract - when the asset ends.

    104-25(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the ending are more than the asset ' s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base.
    Note:

    The capital proceeds referred to in this subsection are reduced if the gain or loss was for shares and an amount was taken into account as a capital gain for the shares under former section 160ZL of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the 1997-98 income year or an earlier income year: see section 104-25 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    104-25(4)    
    A lease is taken to have expired even if it is extended or renewed.

    Exceptions

    104-25(5)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if:


    (a) you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985; or


    (b) for a lease that you granted:


    (i) it was granted before that day; or

    (ii) if it has been renewed or extended - the start of the last renewal or extension occurred before that day.
    Note 1:

    There are other exceptions if:

  • • your lease expires and you did not use it mainly to produce assessable income: see section 118-40 ; or
  • • you exercise rights to acquire shares or units: see section 130-40 ; or
  • • you acquire shares or units by converting a convertible interest: see section 130-60 ; or
  • • you exercise an option: see section 134-1 .
  • Note 2:

    A company can agree to forgo any capital loss it makes as a result of forgiving a commercial debt owed to it by another company where the companies are under common ownership: see section 245-90 .

    Note 3:

    A capital gain or loss a company makes because shares in its 100% subsidiary are cancelled (an example of CGT event C2) on the liquidation of the subsidiary may be reduced if there was a roll-over for a CGT asset under Subdivision 126-B : see section 126-85 .

    Note 5:

    Cost base adjustments are made only under Subdivision 125-B if there is a roll-over under that Subdivision for CGT event C2 happening as a result of a demerger.

    Note 6:

    A capital gain or loss made by a demerging entity from CGT event C2 happening as a result of a demerger is also disregarded: see section 125-155 .

    Note 7:

    A capital gain or loss you make from the meeting of your entitlement under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 or Part VC (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent general insurers) of the Insurance Act 1973 is disregarded: see sections 253-10 and 322-30 of this Act.


    SECTION 104-30   End of option to acquire shares etc.: CGT event C3  

    104-30(1)    
    CGT event C3 happens if an option a company or a trustee of a unit trust granted to an entity to *acquire a *CGT asset that is:


    (a) *shares in the company or units in the unit trust; or


    (b) *debentures of the company or unit trust;

    ends in one of these ways:


    (c) it is not exercised by the latest time for its exercise;


    (d) it is cancelled;


    (e) it is released or abandoned.


    104-30(2)    
    The time of the event is when the option ends.

    104-30(3)    


    The company or trustee makes a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the grant of the option are more than the expenditure incurred in granting it. It makes a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less .

    104-30(4)    
    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 . However, it does not include an amount you have received as *recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income.

    Exception

    104-30(5)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the company or trustee makes is disregarded if it granted the option before 20 September 1985.

    Note:

    This subsection is modified for the purpose of calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 418 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    Subdivision 104-D - Bringing into existence a CGT asset  

    SECTION 104-35   Creating contractual or other rights: CGT event D1  

    104-35(1)    
    CGT event D1 happens if you create a contractual right or other legal or equitable right in another entity.

    Example:

    You enter into a contract with the purchaser of your business not to operate a similar business in the same town. The contract states that $20,000 was paid for this.

    You have created a contractual right in favour of the purchaser. If you breach the contract, the purchaser can enforce that right.


    104-35(2)    
    The time of the event is when you enter into the contract or create the other right.

    104-35(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from creating the right are more than the *incidental costs you incurred that relate to the event. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less .
    Example:

    To continue the example: If you paid your lawyer $1,500 to draw up the contract, you make a capital gain of:


    $20,000   −   $1,500   =   $18,500


    104-35(4)    
    The costs can include giving property: see section 103-5 . However, they do not include an amount you have received as *recoupment of them and that is not included in your assessable income, or an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

    Exceptions

    104-35(5)    
    CGT event D1 does not happen if:


    (a) you created the right by borrowing money or obtaining credit from another entity; or


    (b) the right requires you to do something that is another *CGT event that happens to you; or


    (c) a company issues or allots *equity interests or *non-equity shares in the company; or


    (d) the trustee of a unit trust issues units in the trust; or


    (e) a company grants an option to acquire equity interests, non-equity shares or *debentures in the company; or


    (f) the trustee of a unit trust grants an option to acquire units or debentures in the trust; or


    (g) you created the right by creating in another entity a right to receive an *exploration benefit under a *farm-in farm-out arrangement.

    Example:

    You agree to sell land. You have created a contractual right in the buyer to enforce completion of the transaction. The sale results in you disposing of the land, an example of CGT event A1. This means that CGT event D1 does not happen.


    SECTION 104-40   Granting an option: CGT event D2  

    104-40(1)    
    CGT event D2 happens if you grant an option to an entity, or renew or extend an option you had granted.

    Note:

    Some options are not covered: see subsections (6) and (7).


    104-40(2)    
    The time of the event is when you grant, renew or extend the option.

    104-40(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the grant, renewal or extension of the option are more than the expenditure you incurred to grant, renew or extend it. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less .

    104-40(4)    
    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 . However, it does not include an amount you have received as *recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income, or an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

    Exceptions

    104-40(5)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the grant, renewal or extension of the option is disregarded if the option is exercised.

    Note 1:

    Section 134-1 sets out the consequences of an option being exercised.

    Note 2:

    A capital gain or capital loss you made for the 1997-98 income year or an earlier income year under former Part IIIA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is also disregarded where the option is exercised in the 1998-99 income year or a later one: see section 104-40 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    104-40(6)    
    This section does not apply to an option granted, renewed or extended by a company or the trustee of a unit trust to *acquire a *CGT asset that is:


    (a) *shares in the company or units in the unit trust; or


    (b) debentures of the company or unit trust.

    Note:

    Section 104-30 deals with this situation.


    104-40(7)    
    Nor does it apply to an option relating to a *personal use asset or a *collectable.

    SECTION 104-45   Granting a right to income from mining: CGT event D3  

    104-45(1)    
    CGT event D3 happens if you own a *prospecting entitlement or *mining entitlement, or an interest in one, and you grant another entity a right to receive *ordinary income or *statutory income from operations permitted to be carried on by the entitlement.

    Note:

    If this event applies, there is no disposal of the entitlement.


    104-45(2)    
    The time of the event is:


    (a) when you enter into the contract with the other entity; or


    (b) if there is no contract - when you grant the right to receive *ordinary income or *statutory income.

    104-45(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the grant of the right are more than the expenditure you incurred in granting it. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less .

    104-45(4)    
    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 . However, it does not include an amount you have received as *recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income, or an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.


    SECTION 104-47   Conservation covenants: CGT event D4  

    104-47(1)    
    CGT event D4 happens if you enter into a *conservation covenant over land you own.

    104-47(2)    
    The time of the event is when you enter into the covenant.

    104-47(3)    
    You make a *capital gain if the *capital proceeds from entering into the covenant are more than that part of the *cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant. You make a *capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the part of the *reduced cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant.

    Note:

    The capital proceeds from entering into the covenant are modified if you do not receive anything for entering into the covenant: see section 116-105 .


    104-47(4)    
    The part of the *cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant is worked out in this way:


    *Cost base of land × *Capital proceeds from entering into the covenant
    Those capital proceeds plus the *market value of
      the land just after you enter into the covenant

    The part of the *reduced cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant is worked out similarly.


    104-47(5)    


    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the land are reduced by the part of the cost base or reduced cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant.
    Example:

    Lisa receives $10,000 for entering into a conservation covenant that covers 15% of the land she owns. Lisa uses the following figures in calculating the cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant:

    The cost base of the entire land is $200,000.

    The market value of the entire land before entering into the covenant is $300,000, and its market value after entering into the covenant is $285,000.

    Lisa calculates the cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant to be:

    $200,000 × 10,000 ÷ [ 10,000 + 285,000] = $6,780

    She reduces the cost base of the land by the part that is apportioned to the covenant:

    $200,000 − $6,780 = $193,220



    Exceptions

    104-47(6)    
    *CGT event D4 does not happen if:


    (a) you did not receive any *capital proceeds for entering into the covenant; and


    (b) you cannot deduct an amount under Division 31 for entering into the covenant.

    Note:

    In this case, CGT event D1 will apply.


    104-47(7)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the land before 20 September 1985.

    Subdivision 104-E - Trusts  

    SECTION 104-55   Creating a trust over a CGT asset: CGT event E1  

    104-55(1)    
    CGT event E1 happens if you create a trust over a *CGT asset by declaration or settlement.

    Note:

    A change in the trustee of a trust does not constitute a change in the entity that is the trustee of the trust (see subsection 960-100(2) ). This means that CGT event E1 will not happen merely because of a change in the trustee.


    104-55(2)    
    The time of the event is when the trust over the asset is created.

    104-55(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the creation are more than the asset ' s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base.

    Cost base rule

    104-55(4)    


    If you are the trustee of the trust and no beneficiary is absolutely entitled to the asset as against you (disregarding any legal disability), the first element of the asset ' s *cost base and *reduced cost base in your hands is its *market value when the trust is created.

    Exceptions

    104-55(5)    


    CGT event E1 does not happen if you are the sole beneficiary of the trust and:


    (a) you are absolutely entitled to the asset as against the trustee (disregarding any legal disability); and


    (b) the trust is not a unit trust.


    104-55(6)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    SECTION 104-60   Transferring a CGT asset to a trust: CGT event E2  

    104-60(1)    
    CGT event E2 happens if you transfer a *CGT asset to an existing trust.

    Note:

    A change in the trustee of a trust does not constitute a change in the entity that is the trustee of the trust (see subsection 960-100(2) ). This means that CGT event E2 will not happen merely because of a change in the trustee.


    104-60(2)    
    The time of the event is when the asset is transferred.

    104-60(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the transfer are more than the asset ' s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base.

    104-60(4)    


    If you are the trustee of the trust and no beneficiary is absolutely entitled to the asset as against you (disregarding any legal disability), the first element of the asset ' s *cost base and *reduced cost base in your hands is its *market value when the asset is transferred.

    Exceptions

    104-60(5)    


    CGT event E2 does not happen if you are the sole beneficiary of the trust and:


    (a) you are absolutely entitled to the asset as against the trustee (disregarding any legal disability); and


    (b) the trust is not a unit trust.


    104-60(6)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    SECTION 104-65   Converting a trust to a unit trust: CGT event E3  

    104-65(1)    
    CGT event E3 happens if:


    (a) a trust (that is not a unit trust) over a *CGT asset is converted to a unit trust; and


    (b) just before the conversion, a beneficiary under the trust was absolutely entitled to the asset as against the trustee (disregarding any legal disability the beneficiary is under).

    104-65(2)    
    The time of the event is when the trust is converted.

    104-65(3)    


    The beneficiary makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (when the trust is converted) is more than the asset's *cost base. The beneficiary makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset's *reduced cost base.

    Exception

    104-65(4)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the beneficiary makes is disregarded if it *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    SECTION 104-70   Capital payment for trust interest: CGT event E4  

    104-70(1)    
    CGT event E4 happens if:


    (a) the trustee of a trust makes a payment to you in respect of your unit or your interest in the trust (except for *CGT event A1, C2, E1, E2, E6 or E7 happening in relation to it); and


    (b) some or all of the payment (the non-assessable part ) is not included in your assessable income.

    To avoid doubt, in applying paragraph (b) to work out what part of the payment is included in your assessable income, disregard your share of the trust ' s net income that is subject to the rules in subsection 115-215(3).

    Note 1:

    Subsections 104-71(1) (tax-exempted amounts), 104-71(3) (tax-free amounts) and 104-71(4) (CGT concession amounts) can affect the calculation of the non-assessable part.

    Note 2:

    The non-assessable part includes amounts (tax-deferred amounts) associated with the small business 50% reduction, frozen indexation, building allowance and accounting differences in income.

    Note 3:

    A payment made to you after you stop owning the unit or interest in the trust forms part of the capital proceeds for the CGT event that happened when you stopped owning it.


    104-70(1A)    


    However, CGT event E4 does not happen if the unit or interest mentioned in subsection (1) is a unit or interest in an *AMIT.

    104-70(2)    


    The payment can include giving property (see section 103-5).

    104-70(3)    
    The time of the event is:


    (a) just before the end of the income year in which the trustee makes the payment ; or


    (b) if another *CGT event (except CGT event E4) happens in relation to the unit or interest or part of it after the trustee makes the payment but before the end of that income year - just before the time of that other CGT event.

    104-70(4)    


    You make a capital gain if the sum of the amounts of the non-assessable parts of the payments made in the income year made by the trustee in respect of the unit or interest is more than its *cost base.
    Note:

    You cannot make a capital loss.


    104-70(5)    
    If you make a *capital gain, the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the unit or interest are reduced to nil.

    Note:

    A capital gain under former section 160ZM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is also taken into account for the purposes of this subsection: see subsection 104-70(3) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    104-70(6)    
    However, if that sum is not more than the *cost base:


    (a) the cost base is reduced by that sum; and


    (b) the *reduced cost base is reduced by that sum (without the adjustment in subsection 104-71(3)).

    Example:

    Mandy owns units in a unit trust that she bought on 1 July 1998 for $10 each. During the 1999-2000 income year the trustee makes 4 non-assessable payments of $0.50 per unit. If at the end of the income year Mandy ' s cost base for each unit (including indexation) would otherwise be $10.10, the payments require that it be reduced by $2, giving a new cost base of $8.10. If Mandy sells the units (CGT event A1) in the 2000-01 year for more than their cost base at that time, she will make a capital gain equal to the difference.

    Note:

    Cost base adjustments are made only under Subdivision 125-B if there is a roll-over under that Subdivision for CGT event E4 happening as a result of a demerger.



    Exceptions

    104-70(7)    


    A *capital gain you make from *CGT event E4 is disregarded if you *acquired the *CGT asset that is the unit or interest before 20 September 1985.

    104-70(8)    


    CGT event E4 does not happen to the extent that the payment is reasonably attributable to a *LIC capital gain.

    104-70(9)    


    CGT event E4 does not happen for a payment made to a foreign resident to the extent that the payment is reasonably attributable to *ordinary income or *statutory income from sources other than an *Australian source. However, this exception does not apply if the trust is a *public trading trust.

    SECTION 104-71   Adjustment of non-assessable part  

    104-71(1)    
    In working out the non-assessable part referred to in section 104-70 , disregard any part of the payment that is:


    (a) *non-assessable non-exempt income; or


    (b) (Omitted by No 66 of 2003)


    (c) paid from an amount that has been assessed to the trustee; or


    (d) paid from an amount that is *personal services income included in your assessable income, or another entity ' s assessable income, under section 86-15 ; or


    (da) a payment to which paragraph 118-37(1)(ba) applies (about compensation paid through a trust); or


    (db) a payment to which subsection 118-300(1A) applies (about insurance and annuity payments paid through a trust); or


    (e) repaid by you; or


    (f) compensation you paid that can reasonably be regarded as a repayment of all or part of the payment; or


    (g) an amount referred to in section 152-125 (which exempts a payment of a small business 15-year exemption amount) as an exempt amount.

    The payment can include giving property (see section 103-5 ).


    104-71(2)    
    However, the non-assessable part is not reduced by any part of the payment that you can deduct.

    104-71(3)    
    The amount of the non-assessable part referred to in section 104-70 is adjusted to exclude any part of it that is attributable to:


    (a) an amount that is not included in the assessable income of an entity because of section 124ZM or 124ZN (which exempt income arising from *shares in a *PDF) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or


    (aa) an amount that is not included in the assessable income of an entity because of section 51-52 or subsection 51-54(1) or (1A) of this Act; or


    (b) *capital proceeds from a *CGT event that happens in relation to *shares in a company that was a *PDF when that event happened; or


    (c) capital proceeds from a CGT event if:


    (i) the CGT event relates to an *eligible venture capital investment; and

    (ii) the share of a partner in an ESVCLP in a *capital gain or *capital loss from the CGT event is disregarded under section 118-407 ; or


    (d) that part of the capital proceeds from a CGT event, relating to an eligible venture capital investment, for which there is a partial exemption under section 118-408 ; or


    (e) capital proceeds from a CGT event if a capital gain made from the event may be disregarded under subsection 360-50(4) .


    104-71(4)    
    The amount of the non-assessable part referred to in section 104-70 for an entity shown in the table is adjusted to exclude the amount or amounts applicable to the entity under the table.


    Adjustment of non-assessable part
    Item Entity Amount excluded
    1 Any entity So much of the amount of a *discount capital gain excluded from the *net capital gain of the trust making the payment because of step 3 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) and that is reflected in the payment to the entity
    2 Individual, company or trust that has a *capital loss or *net capital loss to reduce its *capital gain described in paragraph 115-215(3)(b) where the trust gain referred to in subsection 115-215(3) is reduced under Subdivision 152-C ½ of the amount of the capital loss or net capital loss
    3 Individual or trust that has a *capital loss or *net capital loss to reduce its *capital gain described in paragraph 115-215(3)(c) ¼ of the amount of the capital loss or net capital loss
    4 Company that has a *capital loss or *net capital loss to reduce its *capital gain described in paragraph 115-215(3)(c) where: The excess of the reduction amount over the Subdivision 152-C reduction to the paragraph 115-215(3)(c) amount
      (a) that capital loss or net capital loss is more than ½ of the trust gain referred to in subsection 115-215(3); and  
      (b) that trust gain is reduced by an amount (the reduction amount) under Subdivision 152-C  
    5 *Complying superannuation entity that has a *capital loss or *net capital loss to reduce its *capital gain described in paragraph 115-215(3)(b) where: ½ of the amount of the capital loss or net capital loss
      (a) that capital loss or net capital loss is more than ½ of the trust gain referred to in subsection 115-215(3); and  
      (b) that trust gain is reduced under Subdivision 152-C  
    6 *Complying superannuation entity that has a *capital loss or *net capital loss to reduce its *capital gain described in paragraph 115-215(3)(c) where: The excess of the reduction amount over the Subdivision 152-C reduction to the paragraph 115-215(3)(c) amount
      (a) that capital loss or net capital loss is more than ¼ of the trust gain referred to in subsection 115-215(3); and  
      (b) that trust gain is reduced by an amount (also the reduction amount) under Subdivision 152-C  
    7 Any entity receiving the payment where the trust making the payment, or another trust that is part of the same *chain of trusts, has a *capital loss or *net capital loss to reduce its *capital gain described in subsection 115-215(3) The proportion of the capital loss or net capital loss reflected in the payment

    Example:

    Claude is paid $100 by the trustee of a unit trust. The trustee advises that the amount comprises $50 CGT discount, $25 small business 50% reduction and $25 net income from a capital gain made by the trust.

    In applying the rules in Subdivision 115-C of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 , Claude reduces his capital gain of $100 by a $20 net capital loss from an earlier year. He then reduces the remaining $80 gain by $40 (CGT discount) and $20 (small business 50% reduction) leaving a net capital gain of $20.

    In applying the rules in CGT event E4, the $100 payment is reduced by $25 (being the amount assessed under section 97 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ). It is further reduced by $50 under item 1 of the table and $5 under item 3. Claude ' s non-assessable part is $20.

    Effectively, CGT event E4 applies to the $20 small business 50% reduction allowed to Claude in applying Subdivision 115-C of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 .

    Note 1:

    Step 3 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) (see table item 1) reduces by 50% the trust ' s discount capital gains remaining after applying capital losses and earlier net capital losses. That 50% is excluded from the trust ' s net capital gain.

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 152-C (small business 50% reduction - see table items 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7) reduces by 50% the trust ' s capital gains or discount capital gains remaining after applying step 3 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) . That 50% is also excluded from the trust ' s net capital gain.

    Note 3:

    Paragraph 115-215(3)(b) or (c) (see table items 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6) treats a beneficiary as having an extra capital gain if an amount of the trust ' s net income that is included in the beneficiary ' s assessable income is attributable to trust gains that were reduced by step 3 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) and/or the small business 50% reduction.


    104-71(5)    
    A chain of trusts consists of 2 or more trusts where at least one of these conditions is satisfied for each of the trusts:


    (a) the trustee of the trust owns units or interests in another of the trusts; or


    (b) the trustee of another of the trusts owns units or interests in the trust.

    104-71(6)    


    Item 7 of the table in subsection (4) does not apply if the entity making the payment is a *managed investment trust.

    SECTION 104-72   Reducing your capital gain under CGT event E4 if you are a trustee  

    104-72(1)    
    A *capital gain you make under subsection 104-70(4) is reduced if:


    (a) you are the trustee of another trust that is a *fixed trust and is not a *complying superannuation entity; and


    (b) you are taken to have a *capital gain under paragraph 115-215(3)(b) or (c) (your notional gain ) in respect of a corresponding trust gain (the trust gain ); and


    (c) some or all (the attributable amount ) of the total of the non-assessable parts referred to in subsection 104-70(4) is attributable to proceeds from the trust gain.

    104-72(2)    
    The *capital gain is reduced (but not below 0) by the lesser of:


    (a) your notional gain; and


    (b) the attributable amount.


    SECTION 104-75   Beneficiary becoming entitled to a trust asset: CGT event E5  

    104-75(1)    
    CGT event E5 happens if a beneficiary becomes absolutely entitled to a *CGT asset of a trust (except a unit trust or a trust to which Division 128 applies) as against the trustee (disregarding any legal disability the beneficiary is under).

    Note:

    Division 128 deals with the effect of death.


    104-75(2)    
    The time of the event is when the beneficiary becomes absolutely entitled to the asset.

    Trustee makes a capital gain or loss

    104-75(3)    


    The trustee makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the event) is more than its *cost base. The trustee makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base.

    Exception for trustee

    104-75(4)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes is disregarded if it *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    Note:

    There is also an exception for employee share trusts: see section 130-80 .



    Beneficiary makes a capital gain or loss

    104-75(5)    


    The beneficiary makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the event) is more than the *cost base of the beneficiary ' s interest in the trust capital to the extent it relates to the asset.

    The beneficiary makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the *reduced cost base of that beneficiary ' s interest in the trust capital to the extent it relates to the asset.



    Exceptions for beneficiary

    104-75(6)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the beneficiary makes is disregarded if:


    (a) the beneficiary *acquired the *CGT asset that is the interest (except by way of an assignment from another entity) for no expenditure; or


    (b) the beneficiary acquired it before 20 September 1985; or


    (c) all or part of the capital gain or capital loss the trustee makes from the *CGT event is disregarded under Subdivision 118-B (about main residence).

    Expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    Note 1:

    For provisions affecting the application of Subdivision 118-B to the trustee, see sections 118-215 to 118-230 .

    Note 2:

    There are also exceptions for employee share trusts: see sections 130-80 and 130-90 .


    SECTION 104-80   Disposal to beneficiary to end income right: CGT event E6  

    104-80(1)    
    CGT event E6 happens if the trustee of a trust (except a unit trust or a trust to which Division 128 applies) *disposes of a *CGT asset of the trust to a beneficiary in satisfaction of the beneficiary's right, or part of it, to receive *ordinary income or *statutory income from the trust.

    Note:

    Division 128 deals with the effect of death.


    104-80(2)    
    The time of the event is when the disposal occurs.

    Trustee makes a capital gain or loss

    104-80(3)    


    The trustee makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the disposal) is more than its *cost base. It makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset's *reduced cost base.

    Exception for trustee

    104-80(4)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes is disregarded if it *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    Beneficiary makes a capital gain or loss

    104-80(5)    


    The beneficiary makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the disposal) is more than the *cost base of the right, or thepart of it. The beneficiary makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the *reduced cost base of the right or part.
    Note:

    If the beneficiary did not pay anything for the right, the market value substitution rule does not apply: see section 112-20 .



    Exception for beneficiary

    104-80(6)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the beneficiary makes is disregarded if it *acquired the *CGT asset that is the right before 20 September 1985.

    SECTION 104-85   Disposal to beneficiary to end capital interest: CGT event E7  

    104-85(1)    
    CGT event E7 happens if the trustee of a trust (except a unit trust or a trust to which Division 128 applies) *disposes of a *CGT asset of the trust to a beneficiary in satisfaction of the beneficiary's interest, or part of it, in the trust capital.

    Note:

    Division 128 deals with the effect of death.


    104-85(2)    
    The time of the event is when the disposal occurs.

    Trustee makes a capital gain or loss

    104-85(3)    


    The trustee makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the disposal) is more than its *cost base. It makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset's *reduced cost base.

    Exception for trustee

    104-85(4)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes is disregarded if it *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    Beneficiary makes a capital gain or loss

    104-85(5)    


    The beneficiary makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the disposal) is more than the *cost base of the interest, or the part of it, being satisfied. The beneficiary makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the *reduced cost base of that interest or part.

    Exceptions for beneficiary

    104-85(6)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the beneficiary makes is disregarded if:


    (a) the beneficiary *acquired the *CGT asset that is the interest (except by way of an assignment from another entity) for no expenditure; or


    (b) the beneficiary acquired it before 20 September 1985; or


    (c) all or part of the capital gain or capital loss the trustee makes from the *CGT event is disregarded under Subdivision 118-B (about main residence).

    Expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    Note 1:

    For provisions affecting the application of Subdivision 118-B to the trustee, see sections 118-215 to 118-230 .

    Note 2:

    There is also an exception for employee share trusts: see section 130-90 .


    SECTION 104-90   Disposal by beneficiary of capital interest: CGT event E8  

    104-90(1)    
    CGT event E8 happens if:


    (a) you are the beneficiary under a trust (except a unit trust or a trust to which Division 128 applies); and


    (b) you did not give any money or property to *acquire the *CGT asset that is your interest in the trust capital and you did not acquire it by assignment; and


    (c) you *dispose of the interest, or part of it (but not to the trustee).

    Note:

    Division 128 deals with the effect of death.


    104-90(2)    
    The time of the event is:


    (a) when you enter into the contract for the *disposal; or


    (b) if there is no contract - when you stop owning the interest or part.

    Note 1:

    You work out if you have made a capital gain or capital loss under sections 104-95 and 104-100 .

    Note 2:

    There is a special indexation rule for this event: see section 114-10 .


    SECTION 104-95   Making a capital gain  
    You are the only beneficiary

    104-95(1)    
    If you are the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of that interest, you work out if you have made a *capital gain in this way: Working out your capital gain


    Step 1.

    Work out the *capital proceeds from the *disposal.


    Step 2.

    Work out the *net asset amount.


    Step 3.

    If the Step 1 amount is greater , you make a capital gain equal to the difference.


    104-95(2)    


    The net asset amount is worked out in this way: Working out the net asset amount

    Step 1.

    Work out the total of the *cost bases (at the time of the disposal) of the *CGT assets that the trustee *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 and that formed part of the trust capital at that time.


    Step 2.

    Work out the total of the *market values (at the time of the disposal) of the *CGT assets that the trustee *acquired before 20 September 1985 and that formed part of the trust capital at that time.


    Step 3.

    Work out the amount of money that formed part of the trust capital at the time of the disposal.


    Step 4.

    Add up the Step 1, 2 and 3 amounts.


    Step 5.

    Subtract from the Step 4 amount any liabilities of the trust at the time of the disposal.


    Step 6.

    The result is the net asset amount .

    Example:

    You dispose of your interest in the trust capital for $10,000 (the capital proceeds).

    The total of the cost bases of the CGT assets that the trustee acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is $6,000.

    The total of the market values of the CGT assets that the trustee acquired before 20 September 1985 is $2,500.

    There is $1,000 in the trust. The trust liabilities are $500.

    The net asset amount is:


    $6,000   +   $2,500   +   $1,000   −   $500   =   $9,000

    You make a capital gain of:


    $10,000   −   $9,000   =   $1,000


    104-95(3)    
    If you *dispose of only part of that interest, any *capital gain is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:


    The net asset
    amount  
    ×   The part of the interest
      you are disposing of
    (expressed as a fraction)

    Example:

    To vary the example in subsection (2), suppose you dispose of 50% of your interest for $5,000 (the capital proceeds).

    The Step 2 amount becomes:


    $9,000   ×   50%   =   $4,500

    You make a capital gain of:


    $5,000   −   $4,500   =   $500



    There is more than one beneficiary

    104-95(4)    
    If you are not the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of your interest, any *capital gain is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:


    The net asset
    amount  
    × Your interest in the trust capital
        (expressed as a fraction)

    Example:

    To vary the example in subsection (2), suppose you have a 20% interest in the trust capital and you dispose of it for $4,000 (the capital proceeds).

    The Step 2 amount becomes:


    $9,000   ×   20%   =   $1,800

    You make a capital gain of:


    $4,000   −   $1,800   =   $2,200


    104-95(5)    
    If you are not the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of part of your interest, any *capital gain is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:


    The net asset
    amount  
    × Your interest in
    the trust capital
    (expressed as a fraction)
    × The part of the interest
      you are disposing of
    (expressed as a fraction)

    Example:

    To vary the example in subsection (2), suppose you have a 50% interest in the trust capital. You dispose of 20% of it for $1,000 (the capital proceeds).

    The Step 2 amount becomes:


    $9,000   ×   50%   ×   20%   =   $900

    You make a capital gain of:


    $1,000   −   $900   =   $100



    Exception

    104-95(6)    
    A *capital gain you make is disregarded if you *acquired the *CGT asset that is the interest in the trust capital before 20 September 1985.

    Note:

    You can make a gain if you dispose of an interest in a trust that you acquired before that day: see CGT event K6.


    SECTION 104-100   Making a capital loss  
    You are the only beneficiary

    104-100(1)    
    If you are the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of that interest, you work out if you have made a *capital loss in this way: Working out your capital loss


    Step 1.

    Work out the *capital proceeds from the *disposal.


    Step 2.

    Work out the *reduced net asset amount.


    Step 3.

    If the Step 1 amount is less , you make a capital loss equal to the difference.


    104-100(2)    


    The reduced net asset amount is worked out in this way: Working out the reduced net asset amount

    Step 1.

    Work out the total of the *reduced cost bases (at the time of the disposal) of the *CGT assets that the trustee *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 and that formed part of the trust capital at that time.


    Step 2.

    Work out the total of the *market values (at the time of the disposal) of the *CGT assets that the trustee *acquired before 20 September 1985 and that formed part of the trust capital at that time.


    Step 3.

    Work out the amount of money that formed part of the trust capital at the time of the disposal.


    Step 4.

    Add up the Step 1, 2 and 3 amounts.


    Step 5.

    Subtract from the Step 4 amount any liabilities of the trust at the time of the disposal.


    Step 6.

    The result is the reduced net asset amount .


    104-100(3)    
    If you *dispose of only part of that interest, any *capital loss is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:


    The reduced net asset amount × The part of the interest
      you are disposing of
    (expressed as a fraction)



    There is more than one beneficiary

    104-100(4)    
    If you are not the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of your interest, any *capital loss is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:


    The reduced net asset amount × Your interest in the trust capital
        (expressed as a fraction)


    104-100(5)    
    If you are not the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of part of your interest, any *capital loss is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:


    The reduced net
    asset amount  
    × Your interest in
    the trust capital
    (expressed as a fraction)
    × The part of the interest
      you are disposing of
    (expressed as a fraction)



    Exception

    104-100(6)    
    A *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the *CGT asset that is the interest in the trust capital before 20 September 1985.

    SECTION 104-105   Creating a trust over future property: CGT event E9  

    104-105(1)    
    CGT event E9 happens if:


    (a) you agree for consideration that when property comes into existence you will hold it on trust; and


    (b) at the time of the agreement, no potential beneficiary under the trust has a beneficial interest in the rights created by the agreement.

    104-105(2)    
    The time of the event is when you made the agreement.

    104-105(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the *market value the property would have had if it had existed when you made the agreement is more than any *incidental costs you incurred that relate to the event. You make a capital loss if that market value is less .

    104-105(4)    
    The costs can include giving property: see section 103-5 . However, they do not include an amount you have received as *recoupment of them and that is not included in your assessable income, or an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.


    SECTION 104-107A   AMIT - cost base reduction exceeds cost base: CGT event E10  

    104-107A(1)    
    CGT event E10 happens if:


    (a) you are a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year because you have a *CGT asset that is your unit or your interest in the AMIT; and


    (b) either:


    (i) the *cost base of that asset is reduced under subsection 104-107B(2) during the income year; or

    (ii) the cost base of that asset is nil at the start of the income year; and


    (c) the asset ' s *AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is the excess mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(a) ; and


    (d) the asset ' s AMIT cost base net amount for the income year exceeds the cost base of the asset.


    104-107A(2)    


    The time of the event is:


    (a) if subparagraph (1)(b)(i) applies - the time at which the reduction occurs under section 104-107B ; or


    (b) if subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) applies - the time at which the *cost base would have been reduced under subsection 104-107B(2) during the income year if the cost base had been greater than nil at the start of the income year.


    104-107A(3)    


    You make a capital gain equal to:


    (a) if the *cost base of the asset is nil - the excess mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(a) ; or


    (b) if the cost base of the asset is not nil - the excess mentioned in paragraph (1)(d) of this section.

    Note 1:

    If you make a capital gain, the cost base and reduced cost base of the CGT asset are reduced to nil (see paragraph 104-107B(2)(a) ).

    Note 2:

    You cannot make a capital loss.



    Exceptions

    104-107A(4)    
    A *capital gain you make from *CGT event E10 is disregarded if you *acquired the *CGT asset that is the unit or interest before 20 September 1985.

    SECTION 104-107B   Annual cost base adjustment for member ' s unit or interest in AMIT  

    104-107B(1)    
    This section applies if you are a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year because you have a *CGT asset that is your unit or your interest in the AMIT.

    104-107B(2)    
    If the *CGT asset ' s *AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is the excess mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(a) :


    (a) in a case where that AMIT cost base net amount exceeds the *cost base of the asset - reduce the cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset to nil; or


    (b) otherwise - reduce the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset by that AMIT cost base net amount.

    Note:

    If that AMIT cost base net amount exceeds the cost base of the asset, CGT event E10 will happen (see section 104-107A ).


    104-107B(3)    
    If the *CGT asset ' s *AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is the shortfall mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(b) , increase the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset by that AMIT cost base net amount.

    104-107B(4)    
    The time of the reduction or increase is:


    (a) unless paragraph (b) applies - just before the end of the income year; or


    (b) if a *CGT event happens to the *CGT asset at a time when you hold it before the end of the income year - just before the time of that CGT event.

    SECTION 104-107C  

    104-107C   AMIT cost base net amount  


    The *CGT asset ' s AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is:


    (a) if the CGT asset ' s *AMIT cost base reduction amount for the income year exceeds the CGT asset ' s *AMIT cost base increase amount for the income year - the amount of the excess; or


    (b) if the CGT asset ' s AMIT cost base reduction amount for the income year falls short of the CGT asset ' s AMIT cost base increase amount for the income year - the amount of the shortfall.

    SECTION 104-107D   AMIT cost base reduction amount  

    104-107D(1)    
    The *CGT asset ' s AMIT cost base reduction amount for the income year is the total of:


    (a) money, and the *market value of any property, if:


    (i) you start to have a right to receive the money or property from the trustee of the *AMIT in the income year; and

    (ii) that right is indefeasible (disregarding section 276-55 ) or is reasonably likely not to be defeated; and


    (b) all amounts of *tax offset that you have for the income year in respect of the AMIT because of the operation of section 276-80 ;

    to the extent that the total is reasonably attributable to the CGT asset.


    104-107D(2)    
    If:


    (a) *CGT event A1, C2, E1, E2, E6 or E7 happens to the *CGT asset before the end of the income year; and


    (b) as a result, the time of the reduction or increase mentioned in subsection 104-107B(4) is just before the time of that CGT event;

    do not include in the CGT asset ' s AMIT cost base reduction amount for the income year any *capital proceeds from that CGT event.


    SECTION 104-107E   AMIT cost base increase amount  

    104-107E(1)    
    The *CGT asset ' s AMIT cost base increase amount for the income year is the total of the 2 amounts set out in the following subsections.

    First amount - total of amounts not related to capital gains

    104-107E(2)    
    The first amount is the total of all of the following amounts included in your assessable income or *non-assessable non-exempt income for the income year in respect of the *AMIT, to the extent that they are reasonably attributable to the *CGT asset:


    (a) amounts so included because of the operation of section 276-80 ;


    (b) amounts so included otherwise than because of the operation of section 276-80 (as reduced in accordance with section 276-100 ).

    104-107E(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (2), disregard the *AMIT ' s *net capital gain (if any) for the income year.

    Second amount - total of amounts related to capital gains

    104-107E(4)    
    The second amount is the total of each *determined member component of a character relating to *capital gains that:


    (a) you have for the income year in respect of the *AMIT; and


    (b) is taken into account under section 276-80 .

    Residence assumption

    104-107E(5)    
    For the purposes of working out amounts under subsections (2) and (4), assume that you are an Australian resident.

    SECTION 104-107F   Receipt of money etc. increasing AMIT cost base reduction amount not to be treated as income  

    104-107F(1)    
    Subsections (2) and (3) apply if:


    (a) you start to have a right to receive any money or any property from the trustee of an *AMIT in an income year; and


    (b) the right is indefeasible (disregarding section 276-55 ) or is reasonably likely not to be defeated; and


    (c) the right is not remuneration or consideration for you providing finance, services, goods or property to the trustee of the AMIT or to another person; and


    (d) the right is reasonably attributable to a *CGT asset that is a *membership interest in the AMIT; and


    (e) the CGT asset is neither *trading stock nor a *Division 230 financial arrangement; and


    (f) as a result of you starting to have the right, the CGT asset ' s *AMIT cost base reduction amount for the income year is increased because of the operation of section 104-107D .


    104-107F(2)    
    These provisions do not apply to you starting to have the right:


    (a) sections 6-5 (about *ordinary income), 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct), 15-15 and 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans);


    (b) sections 25A and 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about profit-making undertakings or schemes).

    104-107F(3)    
    Section 6-10 (about *statutory income) does not apply to you starting to have the right except so far as that section applies in relation to section 102-5 (about net capital gains).

    SECTION 104-107G   Effect of AMIT cost base net amount on cost of AMIT membership interest or unit that is a revenue asset - adjustment of cost of asset  

    104-107G(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you are a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year because you have a *CGT asset that is your unit or your interest in the AMIT; and


    (b) the CGT asset is a *revenue asset; and


    (c) the CGT asset is not a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

    104-107G(2)    
    Make the adjustments in subsection (3) for the purposes of working out an amount included in your assessable income (or working out an amount treated as a deduction) under any of these provisions:


    (a) sections 6-5 (about *ordinary income), 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct), 15-15 and 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans);


    (b) sections 25A and 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about profit-making undertakings or schemes).

    104-107G(3)    
    If the *CGT asset ' s *AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is the excess mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(a) :


    (a) in a case where that AMIT cost base net amount exceeds the cost of the asset - reduce the cost of the asset to nil; or


    (b) otherwise - reduce the cost of the asset by that AMIT cost base net amount.

    Note:

    If the AMIT cost base net amount exceeds the cost of the asset, see section 104-107H .


    104-107G(4)    
    If the *CGT asset ' s *AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is the shortfall mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(b) , increase the cost of the asset by that AMIT cost base net amount.

    104-107G(5)    
    The time of the reduction or increase is:


    (a) unless paragraph (b) applies - just before the end of the income year; or


    (b) if a *CGT event happens to the *CGT asset at a time when you hold it before the end of the income year - just before the time of that CGT event.

    104-107G(6)    
    For the purposes of this section and section 104-107H , in working out the *CGT asset ' s *AMIT cost base net amount for the income year, disregard any right that you start to have in the income year if:


    (a) the right is for you to receive any money or any property from the trustee of the *AMIT; and


    (b) the right is remuneration or consideration for you providing finance, services, goods or property to the trustee of the AMIT or to another person.

    104-107G(7)    
    For the purposes of section 118-20 , treat this section as being outside of this Part.

    Note:

    Section 118-20 deals with reducing capital gains if an amount is otherwise assessable.


    SECTION 104-107H   Effect of AMIT cost base net amount on cost of AMIT membership interest or unit that is a revenue asset - amount included in assessable income  

    104-107H(1)    
    Subsection (2) applies if:


    (a) paragraph 104-107G(3)(a) applies in respect of the *CGT asset ' s *AMIT cost base net amount for the income year; and


    (b) that AMIT cost base net amount exceeds the cost of the *CGT asset just before the time mentioned in subsection 104-107G(5) .

    104-107H(2)    
    Include in your assessable income for the income year in which that time occurs:


    (a) if the cost of the *CGT asset was nil just before that time - the cost reduction amount; or


    (b) otherwise - the excess mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

    104-107H(3)    
    Subsection (2) applies despite subsection 104-107F(3) .

    104-107H(4)    
    For the purposes of section 118-20 , treat this section as being outside of this Part.

    Note:

    Section 118-20 deals with reducing capital gains if an amount is otherwise assessable.


    Subdivision 104-F - Leases  

    SECTION 104-110   Granting a lease: CGT event F1  

    104-110(1)    
    CGT event F1 happens if a lessor grants, renews or extends a lease.

    Note 1:

    Other CGT events can apply to leases. An assignment of a lease is an example of CGT event A1.

    Note 2:

    There are special rules that apply to some lease transactions: see Division 132 .


    104-110(2)    
    The time of the event is:


    (a) for the grant of a lease:


    (i) when the contract for the lease is entered into; or

    (ii) if there is no contract - at the start of the lease; or


    (b) for a renewal or extension - at the start of the renewal or extension.

    104-110(3)    


    The lessor makes a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the grant, renewal or extension are more than the expenditure it incurred on the grant, renewal or extension. It makes a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less .

    104-110(4)    
    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 . However, it does not include an amount you have received as *recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income, or an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

    Exception

    104-110(5)    
    The lessor can choose to apply section 104-115 to certain long term leases. If it does so, this section does not apply.

    SECTION 104-115   Granting a long-term lease: CGT event F2  

    104-115(1)    
    CGT event F2 happens if:


    (a) a lessor grants a lease over land (whether or not the lessor owns an estate in fee simple in the land), or renews or extends a lease over land; and


    (b) the lease, renewal or extension is for at least 50 years and:


    (i) at the time of the grant, renewal or extension, it was reasonable to expect that it would continue for at least 50 years; and

    (ii) the terms of the lease, renewal or extension as they apply to the lessee are substantially the same as those under which the lessor owned the land or held a lease of the land; and


    (c) the lessor chooses to apply this section instead of section 104-110 .

    Note:

    Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.


    104-115(2)    
    The time of the event is when the lessor grants the lease, or at the start of the renewal or extension, as appropriate.

    104-115(3)    


    The lessor makes a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the event are more than the *cost base of the lessor ' s interest in the land. The lessor makes a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the *reduced cost base of that interest.

    Exceptions

    104-115(4)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the lessor makes is disregarded if:


    (a) it *acquired the *CGT asset that is the land, or the lease to the lessor was granted, before 20 September 1985; or


    (b) the lease to the lessor has been renewed or extended and the last renewal or extension started before that day.

    Note:

    For any later CGT event that happens to the land or the lessor ' s lease of it: see section 132-10 .


    SECTION 104-120   Lessor pays lessee to get lease changed: CGT event F3  

    104-120(1)    
    CGT event F3 happens if a lessor incurs expenditure in getting the lessee's agreement to vary or waive a term of the lease. The lessor makes a capital loss equal to the amount of expenditure it incurred. (The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .)

    104-120(2)    
    The time of the event is when the term is varied or waived.

    Exception

    104-120(3)    
    However, this event does not apply to expenditure for a lease to which the lessor has chosen to apply section 104-115 .

    SECTION 104-125   Lessee receives payment for changing lease: CGT event F4  

    104-125(1)    
    CGT event F4 happens if a lessee receives a payment from the lessor for agreeing to vary or waive a term of the lease.

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    104-125(2)    
    The time of the event is when the term is varied or waived.

    104-125(3)    
    The lessee makes a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the event are more than the lease's *cost base (at the time of the event). If the lessee makes a *capital gain, the lease's cost base is also reduced to nil.

    Note:

    The lessee cannot make a capital loss.


    104-125(4)    
    On the other hand, if those *capital proceeds are less , the lease's *cost base is reduced by that amount at the time of the event.

    Example:

    On 1 January 1999 a lessee enters a lease. On 1 May 1999 the lessee agrees to waive a term. The lessor pays the lessee $1,000 for this.

    If the lease's cost base at the time of the waiver is $2,500, it is reduced from $2,500 to $1,500.

    On 1 September 1999 the lessee agrees to waive another term. The lessor pays the lessee $2,000 for this.

    If the lease's cost base at the time of the waiver is $1,500, the lessee makes a capital gain of $500, and the cost base is reduced to nil.



    Exceptions

    104-125(5)    
    A *capital gain the lessee makes is disregarded if:


    (a) the lease was granted before 20 September 1985; or


    (b) for a lease that has been renewed or extended - the start of the last renewal or extension occurred before that day.

    SECTION 104-130   Lessor receives payment for changing lease: CGT event F5  

    104-130(1)    
    CGT event F5 happens if a lessor receives a payment from the lessee for agreeing to vary or waive a term of the lease.

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    104-130(2)    
    The time of the event is when the term is varied or waived.

    104-130(3)    


    The lessor makes a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the event are more than the expenditure the lessor incurs in relation to the variation or waiver. The lessor makes a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less .
    Example:

    You own a shopping centre. The lessee of a shop in the centre pays you $10,000 for agreeing to change the terms of its lease. You incur expenses of $1,000 for a solicitor and $500 for a valuer. You make a capital gain of $8,500.


    104-130(4)    
    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 . However, it does not include an amount you have received as *recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income.

    Exceptions

    104-130(5)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the lessor makes is disregarded if:


    (a) the lease was granted before 20 September 1985; or


    (b) for a lease that has been renewed or extended - the start of the last renewal or extension occurred before that day.

    Subdivision 104-G - Shares  

    SECTION 104-135   Capital payment for shares: CGT event G1  

    104-135(1)    
    CGT event G1 happens if:


    (a) a company makes a payment to you in respect of a *share you own in the company (except for *CGT event A1 or C2 happening in relation to the share); and


    (b) some or all of the payment (the non-assessable part ) is not a *dividend, or an amount that is taken to be a dividend under section 47 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and


    (c) the payment is not included in your assessable income.

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    104-135(1A)    


    In working out the non-assessable part, disregard any part of the payment that is:


    (aa) *non-assessable non-exempt income; or


    (a) repaid by you; or


    (b) compensation you paid that can reasonably be regarded as a repayment of all or part of the payment; or


    (c) an amount referred to in section 152-125 (which exempts a payment of a small business 15-year exemption amount) as an exempt amount.

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    104-135(1B)    


    However, the non-assessable part is not reduced by any part of the payment that you can deduct.

    104-135(2)    
    The time of the event is when the company makes the payment.

    104-135(3)    
    You make a capital gain if the amount of the non-assessable part is more than the *share ' s *cost base. If you make a *capital gain, the share ' s *cost base and *reduced cost base are reduced to nil.

    Note 1:

    You cannot make a capital loss.

    Note 2:

    A capital gain under former section 160ZL of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is also taken into account for the purposes of this subsection: see section 104-135 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    104-135(4)    
    However, if the amount of the non-assessable part is not more than the *share ' s *cost base, that cost base and its *reduced cost base are reduced by the amount of the non-assessable part.

    Note:

    Cost base adjustments are made only under Subdivision 125-B if there is a roll-over under that Subdivision for CGT event G1 happening as a result of a demerger.



    Exceptions

    104-135(5)    
    A *capital gain you make is disregarded if you *acquired the *CGT asset that is the *share before 20 September 1985.

    104-135(6)    


    You disregard a payment by a liquidator for the purposes of this section if the company ceases to exist within 18 months of the payment.
    Note:

    The payment will be part of your capital proceeds for CGT event C2 happening when the share ends.


    104-135(7)    


    You also disregard a payment that is *personal services income included in your assessable income, or another entity ' s assessable income, under section 86-15 .

    104-140   (Repealed) SECTION 104-140 Shifts in share values: CGT event G2  
    (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)

    SECTION 104-145   Liquidator or administrator declares shares or financial instruments worthless: CGT event G3  

    104-145(1)    
    CGT event G3 happens if you own *shares in a company, or financial instruments issued by or created by or in relation to a company, and a liquidator or administrator of the company declares in writing that the liquidator or administrator has reasonable grounds to believe (as at the time of the declaration) that:


    (a) for shares - there is no likelihood that shareholders in the company, or shareholders of the relevant class of shares, will receive any further distribution for their shares; or


    (b) for financial instruments - the instruments, or a class of instruments that includes instruments of that kind, have no value or have only negligible value.

    104-145(2)    
    The time of the event is when the declaration was made.

    104-145(3)    
    Examples of financial instruments referred to in subsection (1) are:


    (a) *debentures, bonds or promissory notes issued by the company; and


    (b) loans to the company; and


    (c) futures contracts, forward contracts or currency swap contracts relating to the company; and


    (d) rights or options to acquire an asset referred to in a preceding paragraph of this subsection; and


    (e) rights or options to acquire *shares in the company.

    104-145(4)    
    You can choose to make a capital loss equal to the *reduced cost base of your *shares or financial instruments (as at the time of the declaration).

    104-145(5)    
    If you make the choice, the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *shares or financial instruments are reduced to nil just after the declaration was made.

    Note:

    This is for the purpose of working out if you make a capital gain or loss from any later CGT event in relation to the shares or financial instruments.



    Exceptions

    104-145(6)    
    You cannot choose to make a *capital loss if:


    (a) you *acquired the shares or financial instruments before 20 September 1985; or


    (b) the shares or financial instruments were *revenue assets at the time when the declaration was made.

    104-145(7)    


    You cannot choose to make a *capital loss for a *share, or a right to acquire a beneficial interest in a share, if:


    (a) you acquired the beneficial interest (the ESS interest ) in the share or right under an *employee share scheme; and


    (b) subsequent to an amount being included in your assessable income under Division 83A (about employee share schemes) in relation to the ESS interest, section 83A-310 (about forfeiture) applies in relation to ESS interest.


    104-145(8)    
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)


    Subdivision 104-H - Special capital receipts  

    SECTION 104-150   Forfeiture of deposit: CGT event H1  

    104-150(1)    
    CGT event H1 happens if a deposit paid to you is forfeited because a prospective sale or other transaction does not proceed.

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    Example:

    You decide to sell land. Before entering into a contract of sale, the prospective purchaser pays you a 2 month holding deposit of $1,000.

    The negotiations fail and the deposit is forfeited.


    104-150(1A)    


    The amount of the deposit is reduced by any part of the deposit that is:


    (a) repaid by you; or


    (b) compensation you paid that can reasonably be regarded as a repayment of all or part of the deposit.

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    104-150(1B)    


    However, the deposit is not reduced by any part of the payment that you can deduct.

    104-150(2)    
    The time of the event is when the deposit is forfeited.

    104-150(3)    
    You make a capital gain if the deposit is more than the expenditure you incur in connection with the prospective sale or other transaction. You make a capital loss if the deposit is less .

    104-150(4)    
    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 . However, it does not include an amount you have received as *recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income.

    Example:

    To continuethe example: if you gave a lawyer wine worth $400 in connection with the prospective sale, you make a capital gain of:


    $1,000   −   $400   =   $600


    SECTION 104-155   Receipt for event relating to a CGT asset: CGT event H2  

    104-155(1)    
    CGT event H2 happens if:


    (a) an act, transaction or event occurs in relation to a *CGT asset that you own; and


    (b) the act, transaction or event does not result in an adjustment being made to the asset ' s *cost base or *reduced cost base.

    Example:

    You own land on which you intend to construct a manufacturing facility. A business promotion organisation pays you $50,000 as an inducement to start construction early.

    No contractual rights or obligations are created by the arrangement.

    The payment is made because of an event (the inducement to start construction early) in relation to your land.

    Note:

    This event does not apply if any other CGT event applies: see section 102-25 .


    104-155(2)    
    The time of the event is when the act, transaction or event occurs.

    104-155(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds because of the *CGT event are more than the *incidental costs you incurred that relate to the event. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less .

    104-155(4)    
    The costs can include giving property: see section 103-5 . However, they do not include an amount you have received as *recoupment of them and that is not included in your assessable income.

    Exceptions

    104-155(5)    
    CGT event H2 does not happen if:


    (a) the act, transaction or event is the borrowing of money or the obtaining of credit from another entity; or


    (b) the act, transaction or event requires you to do something that is another *CGT event that happens to you; or


    (c) a company issues or allots *equity interests or *non-equity shares in the company; or


    (d) the trustee of a unit trust issues units in the trust; or


    (e) a company grants an option to acquire equity interests, non-equity shares or *debentures in the company; or


    (ea) a company grants an option to dispose of *shares in the company to the company; or


    (f) the trustee of a unit trust grants an option to acquire units or debentures in the trust; or


    (g) a company or a trust that is a member of a *demerger group issues new *ownership interests under a *demerger.

    Note:

    For demergers, see Division 125 .


    Subdivision 104-I - Australian residency ends  

    SECTION 104-160   Individual or company stops being an Australian resident: CGT event I1  

    104-160(1)    


    CGT event I1 happens if you stop being an Australian resident.

    104-160(2)    
    The time of the event is when you stop being one.

    104-160(3)    


    You need to work out if you have made a *capital gain or a *capital loss for each *CGT asset that you owned just before the time of the event, except one that is *taxable Australian property:


    (a) covered by item 1 or 3 of the table in section 855-15 ; or


    (b) covered by item 4 of that table because it is an option or right to *acquire a *CGT asset covered by item 1 or 3 of that table.


    104-160(4)    


    You make a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the event) is more than its *cost base. You make a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base.

    104-160(4A)    


    If the asset is an *indirect Australian real property interest, or an option or right to acquire such an interest, this Part and Part 3-3 apply to the asset as if the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset (just after the time of the event) were its *market value at the time of the event.

    104-160(4B)    


    Subsection (4A) does not apply if the *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded under subsection (5) or (6), or subsection 104-165(2) .

    Exceptions

    104-160(5)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    104-160(6)    
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)


    SECTION 104-165   Exception for individuals  

    104-165(1)    
    (Repealed by No 32 of 2006)



    Choosing to disregard making a gain or loss

    104-165(2)    
    If you are an individual, you can choose to disregard making a *capital gain or a *capital loss from all *CGT assets covered by *CGT event I1.

    104-165(3)    


    If you do so choose, each of those assets is taken to be *taxable Australian property until the earlier of:


    (a) a *CGT event happening in relation to the asset, if the CGT event involves you ceasing to own the asset;


    (b) you again becoming an Australian resident.

    Note:

    If you are an individual who was in Australia on 6 April 2006, and you remain an Australian resident from that day until you stop being one, and you were an Australian resident for less than 5 years during the 10 years before you stopped being one, see section 104-166 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    104-166   (Repealed) SECTION 104-166 Subsection 104-165(1) still applies if you continue to be a short term Australian resident  
    (Repealed by No 168 of 2006 )

    SECTION 104-170   Trust stops being a resident trust: CGT event I2  

    104-170(1)    
    CGT event I2 happens if a trust stops being a *resident trust for CGT purposes.

    104-170(2)    
    The time of the event is when the trust stops being one.

    104-170(3)    


    The trustee needs to work out if it has made a *capital gain or a *capital loss for each *CGT asset that it owned (in the capacity as trustee of the trust) just before the time of the event except one that is *taxable Australian property:


    (a) covered by item 1 or 3 of the table in section 855-15 ; or


    (b) covered by item 4 of that table because it is an option or right to *acquire a *CGT asset covered by item 1 or 3 of that table.


    104-170(4)    


    The trustee makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the event) is more than the asset ' s *cost base. The trustee makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base.

    104-170(4A)    


    If the asset is an *indirect Australian real property interest, or an option or right to acquire such an interest, this Part and Part 3-3 apply to the asset as if the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset (just after the time of the event) were its *market value at the time of the event.

    104-170(4B)    


    Subsection (4A) does not apply if the *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes is disregarded under subsection (5).

    Exception

    104-170(5)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes is disregarded if it *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    Subdivision 104-J - CGT events relating to roll-overs  

    SECTION 104-175   Company ceasing to be member of wholly-owned group after roll-over: CGT event J1  

    104-175(1)    
    CGT event J1 happens if:


    (a) there is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B for a *CGT event (the roll-over event ) that happens in relation to a *CGT asset (the roll-over asset ) involving 2 companies that are members of the same *wholly-owned group; and


    (b) the company (the recipient company ) that owns the roll-over asset just after the roll-over stops being a 100% subsidiary of a company in the group in the circumstances set out in subsection (2) or (3); and


    (c) at the time of the roll-over, the recipient company was a *100% subsidiary of:


    (i) the other company involved in the roll-over event (the originating company ); or

    (ii) another member of the same *wholly-owned group.
    Note:

    If the roll-over was under former section 160ZZO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , CGT event J1 does not happen if there would not have been a deemed disposal and re-acquisition under that Act: see section 104-175 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    104-175(2)    
    This condition applies if there has been only one roll-over within the *wholly-owned group under Subdivision 126-B involving the roll-over asset.

    The recipient company must stop, at a time (the break-up time ) when it still owns the roll-over asset, being a *100% subsidiary of a member of the group (the ultimate holding company ) that is not a 100% subsidiary of any other member of the group at the time of the roll-over event.


    104-175(3)    
    This condition applies if the roll-over event was the last in a series of *CGT events involving the roll-over asset and there was a roll-over within the *wholly-owned group under Subdivision 126-B for all the events.

    The recipient company must stop, at a time (also the break-up time ) when it still owns the roll-over asset, being a *100% subsidiary of another member of the group (also the ultimate holding company ) that was not a 100% subsidiary of any other member of the group at the time of the first of the events.


    104-175(4)    
    The time of the event is the break-up time.

    104-175(5)    


    The recipient company makes a capital gain if the roll-over asset ' s *market value (at the break-up time) is more than its *cost base. It makes a capital loss if that market value is less than its *reduced cost base.

    Exceptions

    104-175(6)    


    CGT event J1 does not happen if the conditions in section 104-180 or 104-182 are satisfied.

    104-175(7)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss the recipient company makes is disregarded if the roll-over asset is taken to have been *acquired by it before 20 September 1985 under Subdivision 126-B (except where the roll-over asset has stopped being a *pre-CGT asset, for example, because of Division 149 ).
    Note:

    CGT event J1 does not happen to a demerged entity or a member of a demerger group if CGT event A1 or C2 happens to a demerging entity under a demerger: see section 125-160 .



    Acquisition rule

    104-175(8)    
    The recipient company is taken to have *acquired the roll-over asset at the break-up time.

    Cost base adjustment

    104-175(9)    
    The first element of the recipient company ' s *cost base and *reduced cost base of the roll-over asset (just after the break-up time) is its *market value (at the break-up time).


    SECTION 104-180   Sub-group break-up  

    104-180(1)    
    The condition in subsection (2) must have been satisfied at each time when there is a roll-over within the *wholly-owned group under Subdivision 126-B for a *CGT event happening in relation to the roll-over asset.

    104-180(2)    
    The originating company and the recipient company must have been members of a group of 2 or more companies (the sub-group ) within the *wholly-owned group (excluding the ultimate holding company) for which one of these is satisfied:


    (a) if the sub-group consists of 2 companies, either the recipient company is a 100% subsidiary of the other company (the holding company ), or the other company is a 100% subsidiary of the recipient company (also the holding company );


    (b) if the sub-group consists of 3 or more companies:


    (i) the recipient company is a 100% subsidiary of one of those other companies (also the holding company ) and so are the other companies (except the holding company) in the sub-group; or

    (ii) each of the companies in the sub-group (except the recipient company) is a 100% subsidiary of the recipient company (also the holding company ).

    104-180(3)    
    If the roll-over event was the last in a series of *CGT events involving the roll-over asset and there was a roll-over within the *wholly-owned group under Subdivision 126-B for all the events, each company that was the originating company or the recipient company for the purposes of that Subdivision for one of those roll-overs must have been members of the sub-group at the time of each of the roll-overs.

    104-180(4)    
    The conditions in subsection (5) or (6) must be satisfied just after the break-up time.

    104-180(5)    
    If the recipient company was the holding company of the sub-group, none of its *shares can be owned by:


    (a) the ultimate holding company; or


    (b) a company that is a *100% subsidiary of the ultimate holding company just after the break-up time.

    104-180(6)    
    If the recipient company was not the holding company of the sub-group, no *shares in it or in the holding company can be owned by:


    (a) the ultimate holding company; or


    (b) a company that is a *100% subsidiary of the ultimate holding company just after the break-up time.


    SECTION 104-182  

    104-182   Consolidated group break-up  


    *CGT event J1 does not happen if the recipient company ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at the break-up time (whether or not it becomes a subsidiary member of another consolidated group at that time).

    SECTION 104-185   Change in relation to replacement asset or improved asset after a roll-over under Subdivision 152-E: CGT event J2  

    104-185(1)    


    CGT event J2 happens if you choose a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E for a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset in an income year and:


    (a) you *acquire a replacement asset (the replacement asset ), or you incur *fourth element expenditure in relation to a CGT asset (also the replacement asset ), or you do both, by the end of the *replacement asset period; and


    (b) the replacement asset is your *active asset at the end of the replacement asset period; and


    (c) if the replacement asset is a *share in a company or an interest in a trust, at the end of the replacement asset period:


    (i) either you, or an entity *connected with you, is a *CGT concession stakeholder in the company or trust; or

    (ii) CGT concession stakeholders in the company or trust have a *small business participation percentage in you of at least 90%; and


    (d) a change of a kind specified in subsection (2) or (3) happens after the end of the replacement asset period.

    Note 1:

    The replacement asset period may be modified or extended, see section 104-190 .

    Note 2:

    There is an exception: see subsection (8).

    Note 3:

    There may be 2 or more replacement assets.

    Note 4:

    CGT event J2 can also happen in relation to a capital gain you rolled-over under Division 17A of former Part IIIA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or Division 123 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 if the status of the replacement asset changes: see section 104-185 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    104-185(2)    
    For any replacement asset that satisfied paragraph (1)(b) and, if applicable, paragraph (1)(c), the change is:


    (a) the asset stops being your *active asset; or


    (b) the asset becomes your *trading stock; or


    (c) (Repealed by No 12 of 2012)


    (d) you start to use the asset solely to produce your *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income.


    104-185(3)    


    In addition, for a *share in a company or an interest in a trust, the change is:


    (a) *CGT event G3 or I1 happens in relation to it; or


    (b) paragraph (1)(c) stops being satisfied.

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    104-185(4)    
    The time of the event is when the change happens.

    104-185(5)    
    You make a capital gain equal to:


    (a) if there is only one replacement asset that satisfied paragraph (1)(b) and, if applicable, paragraph (1)(c) - the amount of the capital gain that you disregarded under Subdivision 152-E (the 152-E amount ); or


    (b) if there are 2 or more replacement assets that satisfied paragraph (1)(b) and, if applicable, paragraph (1)(c) and a change of a kind specified in subsection (2) or (3) occurs for all of them - the 152-E amount; or


    (c) if there are 2 or more replacement assets that satisfied paragraph (1)(b) and, if applicable, paragraph (1)(c) and such a change occurs for one or more but not all of them - so much (if any) of the 152-E amount as exceeds the sum of the following:


    (i) the first element of the *cost base of each of those replacement assets *acquired;

    (ii) the *incidental costs you incurred to acquire each of those replacement assets (which can include giving property, see section 103-5 );

    (iii) the amount of *fourth element expenditure incurred in relation to each of those replacement assets;
    in relation to which such a change did not occur.

    104-185(6)    
    If *CGT event J6 has happened in relation to the small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E , subsection (5) applies to the 152-E amount reduced by the amount of the capital gain under that event.

    104-185(7)    
    If *CGT event J2 happens again in a later income year in relation to the small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E , subsection (5) applies to any remaining part of the 152-E amount reduced by the amount of the capital gain under the earlier event.

    104-185(8)    
    CGT event J2 does not happen because of paragraph (2)(a) for a *share in a company or an interest in a trust if the share or interest ceased to be an *active asset only because of changes in the *market values of assets that were owned by the company or trust when you *acquired the share or interest or incurred the *fourth element expenditure.

    104-185(9)    
    You incur fourth element expenditure in relation to a *CGT asset if you incur capital expenditure that is included, under subsection 110-25(5) , in the fourth element of the *cost base of the asset.

    SECTION 104-190   Replacement asset period  

    104-190(1A)    


    If you choose a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E for a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset in an income year, the replacement asset period is the period:


    (a) starting one year before the last CGT event in the income year for which you obtain the roll-over; and


    (b) ending at the later of:


    (i) 2 years after that last CGT event; and

    (ii) if the first-mentioned CGT event happened because you *disposed of the CGT asset - 6 months after the latest time a possible *financial benefit becomes or could become due under a *look-through earnout right relating to the CGT asset and the disposal.

    104-190(1)    


    The replacement asset period is modified if your *capital proceeds for the *CGT event are increased under subsection 116-45(2) or 116-60(3) after the end of that period. Instead, you have until 12 months after you receive those additional proceeds to *acquire a replacement asset, or incur *fourth element expenditure in relation to a *CGT asset, or do both.
    Note:

    Section 116-45 applies if you do not receive your capital proceeds despite having taken all reasonable steps to get them, and section 116-60 applies if your capital proceeds are misappropriated by your employee or agent.


    104-190(2)    


    The Commissioner may extend the replacement asset period , or that period as modified by subsection (1).

    SECTION 104-195   Trust failing to cease to exist after roll-over under Subdivision 124-N: CGT event J4  

    104-195(1)    
    CGT event J4 happens if:


    (a) there is a roll-over under Subdivision 124-N for a trust *disposing of a *CGT asset to a company under a trust restructure; and


    (b) the trust fails to cease to exist:


    (i) within 6 months after the start of the *trust restructuring period; or

    (ii) if that is not possible because of circumstances outside the control of the trustee - as soon as practicable after the end of that 6 month period; and


    (c) the company owns the asset when the failure happens.

    Example:

    Circumstances would be outside the control of the trustee if the trustee is involved in litigation concerning the trust and cannot wind up the trust until the litigation is finished.


    104-195(2)    
    CGT event J4 also happens if:


    (a) there is a roll-over under Subdivision 124-N for an entity (the shareholding entity ) receiving a *share in a company in exchange for a unit or interest in a trust under a trust restructure; and


    (b) the trust fails to cease to exist:


    (i) within 6 months after the start of the *trust restructuring period; or

    (ii) if that is not possible because of circumstances outside the control of the trustee - as soon as practicable after the end of that 6 month period; and


    (c) the shareholding entity owns the share when the failure happens.

    104-195(3)    
    The time of the event is when the failure to cease to exist happens.

    104-195(4)    
    The company makes a capital gain if the *CGT asset ' s *market value at the time the company *acquired the asset is more than its *cost base at that time. The company makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base at that time.

    104-195(5)    
    This Part and Part 3-3 apply to the company from just after the time of the event as if the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset were its *market value at the time the company *acquired the asset.

    104-195(6)    
    The shareholding entity makes a capital gain if the *share ' s *market value at the time the entity *acquired the share is more than its *cost base at that time. The shareholding entity makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the share ' s *reduced cost base at that time.

    104-195(7)    
    This Part and Part 3-3 apply to the shareholding entity from just after the time of the event as if the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *share were its *market value at the time the entity *acquired the share.

    Exception

    104-195(8)    
    This section does not apply to a *CGT asset acquired under a trust restructure that happened before the day on which the Taxation Laws Amendment Act (No. 4) 2002 received the Royal Assent.


    SECTION 104-197   Failure to acquire replacement asset and to incur fourth element expenditure after a roll-over under Subdivision 152-E: CGT event J5  

    104-197(1)    


    CGT event J5 happens if you choose a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E for a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset in an income year and, by the end of the *replacement asset period:


    (a) you have not *acquired a replacement asset (the replacement asset ), and have not incurred *fourth element expenditure in relation to a CGT asset (also the replacement asset ); or


    (b) the replacement asset does not satisfy the conditions set out in subsection (2).

    Note:

    You do not have to satisfy the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A for the gain in relation to CGT event J5 (see subsection 152-305(4) ).


    104-197(2)    
    The conditions are:


    (a) the replacement asset must be your *active asset; and


    (b) if the replacement asset is a *share in a company or an interest in a trust:


    (i) you, or an entity *connected with you, must be a *CGT concession stakeholder in the company or trust; or

    (ii) CGT concession stakeholders in the company or trust must have a *small business participation percentage in you of at least 90%.
    Example:

    Joseph owns 50% of the shares in Company A and Company B. He is therefore a CGT concession stakeholder in the companies: see section 152-60 . The companies are connected with Joseph (see section 328-125 ) because he controls both of them.

    Company A owns land which it leases to Joseph for use in a business. It sells the land at a profit and buys shares in Company B.

    Subsection (2) is satisfied for the shares because Joseph is connected with Company A and is a CGT concession stakeholder in Company B.


    104-197(3)    


    The time of the event is at the end of the *replacement asset period.

    104-197(4)    
    You make a capital gain equal to the amount of the *capital gain that you disregarded under Subdivision 152-E .

    104-197(5)    


    The *replacement asset period may be modified or extended as mentioned in section 104-190 .

    SECTION 104-198   Cost of acquisition of replacement asset or amount of fourth element expenditure, or both, not sufficient to cover disregarded capital gain: CGT event J6  

    104-198(1)    
    CGT event J6 happens if you choose a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E for a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset in an income year and:


    (a) by the end of the *replacement asset period, you have done either or both of the following:


    (i) *acquired a replacement asset (the replacement asset );

    (ii) incurred *fourth element expenditure in relation to a CGT asset (also the replacement asset ); and


    (b) at the end of the replacement asset period, the replacement asset is your *active asset; and


    (c) if the replacement asset is a *share in a company or an interest in a trust, at the end of the replacement asset period:


    (i) you, or an entity *connected with you, are a *CGT concession stakeholder in the company or trust; or

    (ii) CGT concession stakeholders in the company or trust have a *small business participation percentage in you of at least 90%; and


    (d) the total (the amount incurred ) of the following, in relation to each replacement asset that satisfied paragraph (b) and, if applicable, paragraph (c), is less than the amount of the capital gain that you disregarded:


    (i) the first element of the *cost base;

    (ii) the *incidental costs you incurred (which can include giving property, see section 103-5 );

    (iii) the amount of fourth element expenditure incurred.
    Note:

    You do not have to satisfy the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A for the gain in relation to CGT event J6 (see subsection 152-305(4) ).


    104-198(2)    


    The time of the event is at the end of the *replacement asset period.

    104-198(3)    
    You make a capital gain equal to the difference between:


    (a) the amount of the *capital gain that you disregarded under Subdivision 152-E ; and


    (b) the amount incurred.

    104-198(4)    


    The *replacement asset period may be modified or extended as mentioned in section 104-190 .

    Subdivision 104-K - Other CGT events  

    SECTION 104-205   Incoming international transfer of emissions unit: CGT event K1  

    104-205(1)    
    CGT event K1 happens if:


    (a) any of the following conditions is satisfied:


    (i) - (ii) (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)

    (iii) a *Kyoto unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

    (iv) a Kyoto unit is transferred from your nominee ' s foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

    (v) an *Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 );

    (vi) an *Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your nominee ' s foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ); and


    (b) as a result of the transfer, you start to *hold the unit as a *registered emissions unit; and


    (c) just before the transfer, the unit was neither your *trading stock nor your *revenue asset.


    104-205(2)    
    The time of the event is when you start to *hold the unit as a *registered emissions unit.

    104-205(3)    
    You make a capital gain if the unit ' s *market value (just before you started to *hold the unit as a *registered emissions unit) is more than its *cost base. You make a capital loss if that market value is less than its *reduced cost base.

    SECTION 104-210   Bankrupt pays amount in relation to debt: CGT event K2  

    104-210(1)    
    CGT event K2 happens if:


    (a) you made a *net capital loss for an income year that, because of subsection 102-5(2) , cannot be applied in working out whether you made a *net capital gain for the income year or a later one; and


    (b) you make a payment in an income year (the payment year ) in respect of a debt that was taken into account in working out the amount of that net capital loss; and


    (c) ignoring subsection 102-5(2) , some part of the net capital loss (the denied part ) would have been applied (if you had made sufficient *capital gains) in working out whether you had made a *net capital gain for the payment year.

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    104-210(2)    
    The time of the event is when you make the payment.

    104-210(3)    
    You make a capital loss equal to the smallest of:


    (a) the amount you paid; or


    (b) that part of it that was taken into account in working out the denied part; or


    (c) the denied part less the sum of *capital losses you made as a result of previous payments you made in respect of the debt that was taken into account in working out the denied part.

    104-210(4)    
    In calculating that capital loss , disregard any amount you have received as *recoupment of the payment and that is not included in your assessable income.


    SECTION 104-215   Asset passing to tax-advantaged entity: CGT event K3  

    104-215(1)    
    CGT event K3 happens if you die and a *CGT asset you owned just before dying *passes to a beneficiary in your estate who (when the asset passes):


    (a) is an *exempt entity; or


    (b) is the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity; or


    (c) is a foreign resident.


    (d) (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)


    (e) (Repealed by No 41 of 2005)


    104-215(2)    


    If the asset passes to a beneficiary who is a foreign resident, CGT event K3 happens only if:


    (a) you were an Australian resident just before dying; and


    (b) the asset (in the hands of the beneficiary) is not *taxable Australian property.


    104-215(3)    
    The time of the event is just before you die.

    104-215(4)    


    A capital gain is made if the *market value of the asset on the day you died is more than the asset ' s *cost base. A capital loss is made if that market value is less than the asset ' s *reduced cost base.
    Note:

    The trustee of the estate must include in the date of death return any net capital gain for the income year when you died.



    Exception

    104-215(5)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    Note:

    There is also an exception for certain philanthropic testamentary gifts: see section 118-60 .


    SECTION 104-220   CGT asset starts being trading stock: CGT event K4  

    104-220(1)    
    CGT event K4 happens if:


    (a) you start holding as *trading stock a *CGT asset you already own but do not hold as trading stock; and


    (b) you elect under paragraph 70-30(1)(a) to be treated as having sold the asset for its *market value.

    Note 1:

    Paragraph 70-30(1)(a) allows you to elect the cost of the asset, or its market value, just before it became trading stock.

    Note 2:

    There is an exemption if you elect its cost: see section 118-25 .


    104-220(2)    
    The time of the event is when you start.

    104-220(3)    


    You make a capital gain if the asset ' s *market value (just before it became *trading stock) is more than its *cost base. You make a capital loss if that market value is less than its *reduced cost base.

    Exception

    104-220(4)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    SECTION 104-225   Special collectable losses: CGT event K5  

    104-225(1)    
    CGT event K5 happens if the requirements in subsections (2), (3) and (4) are satisfied.

    104-225(2)    


    There is a fall in the *market value of a *collectable of a company or trust.

    104-225(3)    
    *CGT event A1, C2 or E8 happens to:


    (a) *shares you own in the company (or in a company that is a member of the same *wholly-owned group); or


    (b) an interest you have in the trust;

    and there is no roll-over for that CGT event.


    104-225(4)    
    As a result of the *capital proceeds from that event being replaced under section 116-80 :


    (a) you make a *capital gain that you would not otherwise have made; or


    (b) you do not make the *capital loss you would otherwise have made; or


    (c) you make a capital loss that is less than you would otherwise have made.

    Note:

    The capital proceeds from that event are replaced with the market value of the shares or the interest in the trust as if the fall in the market value of collectables and personal use assets had not occurred: see section 116-80 .


    104-225(5)    
    The time of CGT event K5 is the time of *CGT event A1, C2 or E8.

    104-225(6)    


    You make a capital loss from a *collectable equal to:
  • • the *market value of the *shares or the interest in the trust (worked out as at the time of *CGT event A1, C2 or E8 as if the fall in market value of the collectable had not occurred);
  • less:

  • • the actual *capital proceeds from CGT event A1, C2 or E8.
     
    Example:

    You own 50% of the shares in a company. You bought them in 1999 for $60,000. The company owns a painting worth $100,000 and another asset worth $20,000. The painting falls in value to $50,000.

    In 1999 you sell your shares for $35,000 (the actual capital proceeds). You would otherwise make a capital loss of $25,000.

    However, the actual capital proceeds are replaced with $60,000 (the market value of the shares if the painting had not fallen in value). You do not make a capital loss from selling the shares.

    You do make a collectable loss equal to:


    $60,000   −   $35,000   =   $25,000

  • Note:

    You can subtract capital losses from collectables only from your capital gains from collectables: see section 108-10 .


    SECTION 104-230   Pre-CGT shares or trust interest: CGT event K6  

    104-230(1)    
    CGT event K6 happens if:


    (a) you own *shares in a company or an interest in a trust you *acquired before 20 September 1985; and


    (b) *CGT event A1, C2, E1, E2, E3, E5, E6, E7, E8, J1 or K3 happens in relation to the shares or interest; and


    (c) there is no roll-over for the other CGT event; and


    (d) the applicable requirement in subsection (2) is satisfied.

    104-230(2)    
    Just before the other event happened:


    (a) the *market value of property of the company or trust (that is not its *trading stock) that was *acquired on or after 20 September 1985; or


    (b) the market value of interests the company or trust owned through interposed companies or trusts in property (except trading stock) that was *acquired on or after 20 September 1985;

    must be at least 75% of the *net value of the company or trust.


    104-230(5)    
    The time of CGT event K6 is when the other event happens.

    104-230(6)    


    You make a *capital gain equal to that part of the *capital proceeds from the *share or interest that is reasonably attributable to the amount by which the *market value of the property referred to in subsection (2) is more than the sum of the *cost bases of that property.
    Note:

    You cannot make a capital loss.


    104-230(7)    


    This section applies to property that a company that is a foreign resident *acquired after 15 August 1989 from another company as if it were acquired before 20 September 1985 if:


    (a) the other company acquired it before 20 September 1985; and


    (b) the companies are members of the same *wholly-owned group; and


    (c) the property is not *taxable Australian property.


    104-230(8)    
    In working out the *net value of a company or trust for the purposes of subsection (2), disregard:


    (a) the discharge or release of any liabilities; or


    (b) the *market value of any *CGT assets acquired;

    if the discharge or release, or the *acquisition, was done for a purpose that included ensuring that the requirement in subsection (2) would not be satisfied in a particular situation.



    Exceptions

    104-230(9)    
    CGT event K6 does not happen if:


    (a) for a company referred to in subsection (2) - some of its *shares were listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country at the time of the other event and at all times in the period of 5 years before the time of the other event; or


    (b) for a trust referred to in subsection (2) that is a unit trust - some of its units were so listed, or were ordinarily available to the public for subscription or purchase, at the time of the other event and at all times in that period.

    104-230(9A)    


    Paragraph (9)(a) applies to a case where:


    (a) the company referred to in subsection (2) is a *demerged entity; and


    (b) *shares in the demerged entity do not satisfy the test referred to in that paragraph; and


    (c) the demerger happened not more than 5 years before the other CGT event happened;

    as if shares in the demerged entity were listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country at all times when some of the shares in the *head entity of the *demerger group were so listed.

    Example:

    Louise owns shares in a company which has been listed for 3 years. The company is the head entity of a demerger group. As part of a demerger, she receives new interests in a demerged entity. The demerged entity then lists in its own right.

    Since the head entity was listed for only 3 years, the demerged entity must remain listed for 2 years before Louise ' s new interests become eligible for the exception from CGT event K6.


    104-230(9B)    


    Paragraph (9)(b) applies to a case where:


    (a) the trust referred to in subsection (2) is a *demerged entity and a unit trust; and


    (b) units in the demerged entity do not satisfy the test referred to in that paragraph; and


    (c) the demerger happened not more than 5 years before the other CGT event happened;

    as if units in the demerged entity were listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country, or were ordinarily available to the public for subscription or purchase, at all times when some of the units in the *head entity of the *demerger group were so listed or available.


    104-230(10)    


    A *capital gain is disregarded for a *share in a company or an interest in a trust to the extent that, had you *acquired it on or after 20 September 1985, you could have chosen a roll-over for the other *CGT event under Subdivision 124-M (scrip for scrip roll-over).
    Example:

    Bill owns a unit in a trust that he acquired before 20 September 1985. He exchanges the unit for a unit in another trust worth $60 and $40 cash. He makes a capital gain of $50 because of CGT event K6.

    Had the unit been acquired after 20 September 1985, Bill would have been entitled to a partial roll-over of the capital gain under Subdivision 124-M to the extent that his capital proceeds constituted a replacement unit.

    Bill can therefore disregard 60/100 of the $50 gain ($30). The cost base of Bill ' s replacement unit is reduced by this amount. Bill must include the remaining $20 of the CGT event K6 gain in the calculation of his net capital gain or loss for the year.

    Note:

    A capital gain or loss made by a demerging entity from CGT event K6 happening as a result of a demerger is also disregarded: see section 125-155 .


    SECTION 104-235   Balancing adjustment events for depreciating assets and certain assets used for R & D: CGT event K7  

    104-235(1)    
    CGT event K7 happens if:


    (a) a *balancing adjustment event occurs for a *depreciating asset you *held; and


    (b) at some time when you held the asset, you used it, or had it *installed ready for use, for:


    (i) a purpose other than a *taxable purpose; or

    (ii) the purpose to which paragraphs 40-27(2)(a) and (b) relate (about second-hand assets in residential property).

    104-235(1A)    


    However, subsection (1) does not apply if:


    (a) you are an *R & D entity and you could deduct an amount under section 40-25 for the *depreciating asset if the following assumptions were made:


    (i) despite paragraph 40-30(1)(c) and subsection 40-30(2) , all intangible assets were excluded from the definition of depreciating asset in section 40-30 ;

    (ii) subsection 40-45(2) did not, except in the case of buildings, prevent Division 40 from applying to capital works to which Division 43 applies, or to which Division 43 would apply but for expenditure being incurred, or capital works being started, before a particular day;

    (iii) you satisfied any relevant requirement for deductibility under Division 40 ; or


    (b) there is roll-over relief for the *balancing adjustment event under section 40-340 of this Act; or


    (c) the asset is one for which you or another entity has deducted or can deduct amounts under Subdivision 40-F or 40-G .


    104-235(1AA)    


    Without limiting subsection (1A), if the asset is a vessel for which:


    (a) you have a * shipping exempt income certificate; or


    (b) you have at any time had such a certificate;

    subsection (1) does not apply in relation to the asset to the extent that you are using, or at any time have used, it to produce income that is exempt under section 51-100 .


    104-235(1B)    


    CGT event K7 also happens if:


    (a) you are an *R & D entity; and


    (b) a *balancing adjustment event occurs for a *depreciating asset you *held; and


    (c) when you held the asset, you could deduct an amount under section 40-25 for the asset if the assumptions set out in paragraph (1A)(a) were made; and


    (d) at some time when you held the asset:


    (i) you used it other than for a taxable purpose or for the purpose of conducting *R & D activities for which you were registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 ; or

    (ii) you had it installed ready for use other than for a taxable purpose.
    Note:

    For subparagraph (d)(i), disregard any use of the asset for the purpose of carrying on research and development activities (within the meaning of former section 73B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ): see section 104-235 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    104-235(2)    
    The time of *CGT event K7 is when the *balancing adjustment event occurs.

    104-235(3)    
    Any *capital gain or *capital loss is worked out:


    (a) under section 104-240 ; or


    (b) under section 104-245 if the *depreciating asset was allocated to a low-value pool.

    104-235(4)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if:


    (a) the *depreciating asset covered by subsection (1) or (1B) is a *pre-CGT asset; or


    (b) you can deduct an amount for the asset under Division 328 (about the small business entities) for the income year in which the *balancing adjustment event occurred.


    SECTION 104-240   Working out capital gain or loss for CGT event K7: general case  

    104-240(1)    


    You make a capital gain if the *termination value of the *depreciating asset covered by subsection 104-235(1) or (1B) is more than its *cost. The amount of the *capital gain is:

    where:

    sum of reductions
    is the sum of:


    (a) if the *depreciating asset is covered by subsection 104-235(1) - the reductions in your deductions for the asset under sections 40-25 and 40-27 ; or


    (b) if the depreciating asset is covered by subsection 104-235(1B) - the reductions that would have been required under section 40-25 on the assumption that using the asset for a *taxable purpose included using it for the purpose of conducting *R & D activities for which you were registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 .

    total decline
    is the decline in value of the *depreciating asset since you started to *hold it.

    Note 1:

    This subsection applies in a modified way if you used the asset for the purpose of carrying on research and development activities (within the meaning of former section 73B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ): see section 104-235 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Note 2:

    The CGT concepts of cost base and capital proceeds are not relevant for this event.


    104-240(2)    


    You make a capital loss if the *cost of the *depreciating asset covered by subsection 104-235(1) or (1B) is more than its *termination value. The amount of the *capital loss is:

    where:

    sum of reductions and total decline have the same meanings as in subsection (1).


    104-240(3)    


    In applying subsection (1) or (2) , reduce the *termination value of the *depreciating asset by so much of an amount misappropriated by your employee or *agent (whether by theft, embezzlement, larceny or otherwise) as represents an amount applicable to you under:


    (a) item 8 of the table in subsection 40-300(2) ; or


    (b) item 1, 3, 4 or 6 of the table in subsection 40-305(1) ;

    in relation to the *balancing adjustment event.


    104-240(4)    


    If you later receive an amount as *recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated, the amount applicable under subsection (3) is increased by the amount received.

    104-240(5)    


    Section 170 of the Income TaxAssessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purposes of giving effect to this section for an income year if:


    (a) you discover the misappropriation, or you receive an amount as *recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated, after you lodged your *income tax return for the income year; and


    (b) the amendment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after you discover the misappropriation or receive the amount.


    SECTION 104-245   Working out capital gain or loss for CGT event K7: pooled assets  

    104-245(1)    
    You make a capital gain if the *depreciating asset ' s *termination value is more than its *cost. The amount of the *capital gain is:


    [*Termination value   −   *Cost]   ×   [1   −   Taxable use fraction]

    where:

    taxable use fraction
    is the taxable use percentage (expressed as a fraction) that you estimated for the asset when you allocated it to the pool.

    Note:

    The CGT concepts of cost base and capital proceeds are not relevant for this event.


    104-245(2)    
    You make a capital loss if the *depreciating asset ' s *cost is more than its *termination value. The amount of the *capital loss is:


    [*Cost   −   *Termination value]   ×   [1   −   Taxable use fraction]

    where:

    taxable use fraction
    has the same meaning as in subsection (1).


    104-245(3)    


    In applying subsection (1) or (2) , reduce the *termination value of the *depreciating asset by so much of an amount misappropriated by your employee or *agent (whether by theft, embezzlement, larceny or otherwise) as represents an amount applicable to you under:


    (a) item 8 of the table in subsection 40-300(2) ; or


    (b) item 1, 3, 4 or 6 of the table in subsection 40-305(1) ;

    in relation to the *balancing adjustment event.


    104-245(4)    


    If you later receive an amount as *recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated, the amount applicable under subsection (3) is increased by the amount received.

    104-245(5)    


    Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purposes of giving effect to this section for an income year if:


    (a) you discover the misappropriation, or you receive an amount as *recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated, after you lodged your *income tax return for the income year; and


    (b) the amendment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after you discover the misappropriation or receive the amount.


    SECTION 104-250   Direct value shifts: CGT event K8  

    104-250(1)    
    CGT event K8 happens if there is a *taxing event generating a gain for a *down interest under section 725-245 .

    Note:

    That section sets out some of the CGT consequences of a direct value shift for affected owners of down interests. See also the rest of Division 725 .


    104-250(2)    
    The time of the event is the *decrease time for the *down interest.

    104-250(3)    
    You make a capital gain equal to the gain generated for the taxing event.

    Note:

    You cannot make a capital loss.


    104-250(4)    
    If, because of the same *direct value shift, there are 2 or more *taxing events generating a gain that are covered by subsection (1), CGT event K8 happens for each of those taxing events, and you make a separate capital gain for each.

    Exceptions

    104-250(5)    
    A *capital gain is disregarded if the *down interest is a *pre-CGT asset.

    SECTION 104-255   Carried interests: CGT event K9  

    104-255(1)    


    CGT event K9 happens if you become entitled to receive a *payment of a *carried interest of a *general partner in a *VCLP, an *ESVCLP or an *AFOF or a *limited partner in a *VCMP.

    104-255(2)    


    The time of the event is the time you become entitled to receive the *payment.

    104-255(3)    
    You make a capital gain equal to the *capital proceeds from the *CGT event.

    Note:

    You cannot make a capital loss.



    Meaning of carried interest

    104-255(4)    


    The carried interest of a *general partner in a *VCLP, an *ESVCLP or an *AFOF is the partner ' s entitlement to a distribution from the VCLP, ESVCLP or AFOF, to the extent that the distribution is contingent upon the attainment of profits for the *limited partners in the VCLP, ESVCLP or AFOF.

    104-255(5)    


    The carried interest of a *limited partner in a *VCMP is the partner ' s entitlement to a distribution from the VCMP, to the extent that the distribution is contingent upon the attainment of profits for the *limited partners in the VCLP, ESVCLP or AFOF in which the VCMP is a *general partner.

    104-255(6)    
    The carried interest does not include:


    (a) any part of the partner ' s entitlement to that distribution that is attributable to a fee (by whatever name called) for the management of the *VCLP, *ESVCLP, *AFOF or *VCMP; or


    (b) any part of the partner ' s entitlement to that distribution that is attributable to the partner ' s *equity interest in the VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or VCMP.



    Meaning of payment of carried interest

    104-255(7)    
    Payment , of a *carried interest, includes:


    (a) a payment that is attributable to the carried interest; or


    (b) the giving of property in satisfaction of the carried interest: see section 103-5 ; or


    (c) the giving of property in satisfaction of an entitlement thatis attributable to the carried interest: see section 103-5 .

    SECTION 104-260   Certain short-term forex realisation gains: CGT event K10  

    104-260(1)    
    CGT event K10 happens if:


    (a) you make a *forex realisation gain as a result of forex realisation event 2; and


    (b) item 1 of the table in subsection 775-70(1) applies.

    104-260(2)    
    The time of the event is when the forex realisation event happens.

    104-260(3)    
    You make a capital gain equal to the *forex realisation gain.

    Note:

    You cannot make a capital loss under CGT event K10. However, if you make a forex realisation loss covered by item 1 of the table in subsection 775-75(1) , you will make a capital loss under CGT event K11 (see section 104-265 ).


    SECTION 104-265   Certain short-term forex realisation losses: CGT event K11  

    104-265(1)    
    CGT event K11 happens if:


    (a) you make a *forex realisation loss as a result of forex realisation event 2; and


    (b) item 1 of the table in subsection 775-75(1) applies.

    104-265(2)    
    The time of the event is when the forex realisation event happens.

    104-265(3)    
    You make a capital loss equal to the *forex realisation loss.

    Note:

    You cannot make a capital gain under CGT event K11. However, if you make a forex realisation gain covered by item 1 of the table in subsection 775-70(1) , you will make a capital gain under CGT event K10 (see section 104-260 ).


    SECTION 104-270   Foreign hybrids: CGT event K12  

    104-270(1)    
    CGT event K12 happens if, in accordance with paragraph 830-50(2)(b) or (3)(b), you make a *capital loss under this section for an income year.

    104-270(2)    
    The time of the event is just before the end of the income year.

    104-270(3)    
    You make a capital loss equal to the amount applicable under paragraph 830-50(2)(b) or (3)(b).


    Subdivision 104-L - Consolidated groups and MEC groups  

    SECTION 104-500   Loss of pre-CGT status of membership interests in entity becoming subsidiary member: CGT event L1  

    104-500(1)    


    CGT event L1 happens if, under section 705-57 (including in its application in accordance with Subdivisions 705-B to 705-E ), there is a reduction in the *tax cost setting amount of assets of an entity that becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group.

    104-500(2)    
    The time of the event is just after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

    104-500(3)    
    For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2) , the *head company makes a capital loss equal to the reduction.

    104-500(4)    
    The amount of the capital loss that can be applied to reduce the head company ' s *capital gains for the first income year ending after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group (the first income year ) cannot exceed ⅕ of the *capital loss.

    104-500(5)    
    The amount of the *net capital loss from the first income year, to the extent the amount is attributable to the *capital loss (the extent being the event L1 attributable loss ), that can be applied to reduce the head company ' s *capital gains for a later income year cannot exceed the amount worked out for the year using the following table:


    Limit on applying event L1 attributable loss
    Item For this income year: The amount of the event L1 attributable loss that can be applied cannot exceed:
    1 For the second income year ending after the entity became a *subsidiary member The difference between:

    (a) ⅖ of the *capital loss; and

    (b) the amount of the capital loss that was applied in accordance with subsection (4) for the first income year.
    2 For the third income year ending after the entity became a *subsidiary member The difference between:

    (a) ⅗ of the *capital loss; and

    (b) the sum of the amount mentioned in paragraph (b) of item 1 and the amount of the event L1 attributable loss that was applied to reduce the entity ' s *capital gains for the next income year after the first income year.
    3 For the fourth income year ending after the entity became a *subsidiary member The difference between:

    (a) ⅘ of the *capital loss; and

    (b) the sum of the amount mentioned in paragraph (b) of item 1 and the amounts of the event L1 attributable loss that were applied to reduce the entity ' s *capital gains for earlier income years ending after the first income year.
    4 For the fifth income year ending after the entity became a *subsidiary member, or for any later income year The difference between:

    (a) the *capital loss; and

    (b) the sum of the amount mentioned in paragraph (b) of item 1 and the amounts of the event L1 attributable loss that were applied to reduce the entity ' s *capital gains for earlier income years ending after the first income year.


    SECTION 104-505   Where pre-formation intra-group roll-over reduction results in negative allocable cost amount: CGT event L2  

    104-505(1)    
    CGT event L2 happens if:


    (a) an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group; and


    (b) in working out the group ' s *allocable cost amount for the entity, the amount remaining after applying step 3A of the table in section 705-60 is negative.


    104-505(2)    
    The time of the event is just after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

    104-505(3)    
    For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2) , the *head company makes a capital gain equal to the amount remaining.


    SECTION 104-510   Where tax cost setting amounts for retained cost base assets exceeds joining allocable cost amount: CGT event L3  

    104-510(1)    
    CGT event L3 happens if:


    (a) an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group; and


    (b) the sum of the *tax cost setting amounts for all *retained cost base assets that are taken into account under paragraph 705-35(1)(b) in working out the tax cost setting amount of each reset cost base asset of the entity exceeds the group ' s *allocable cost amount for the entity.


    104-510(2)    
    The time of the event is just after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

    104-510(3)    
    For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2) , the *head company makes a capital gain equal to the excess.


    SECTION 104-515   Where no reset cost base assets and excess of net allocable cost amount on joining: CGT event L4  

    104-515(1)    
    CGT event L4 happens if:


    (a) an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group; and


    (b) in working out the *tax cost setting amount for assets of the entity in accordance with section 705-35 (including in its application in accordance with Subdivisions 705-B to 705-D ), there is an amount that results after applying paragraphs 705-35(1)(b) and (c) (including in their application in accordance with those Subdivisions); and

    Note:

    Section 705-35 is about the tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets.


    (c) it is not possible to allocate, in accordance with the latter paragraph, the amount that results because there are no reset cost base assets of the kind mentioned in that paragraph.


    104-515(2)    
    The time of the event is just after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

    104-515(3)    
    For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2) , the *head company makes a capital loss equal to the amount that results.


    SECTION 104-520   Where amount remaining after step 4 of leaving allocable cost amount is negative: CGT event L5  

    104-520(1)    
    CGT event L5 happens if:


    (a) an entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group; and


    (b) in working out the group ' s *allocable cost amount for the entity, the amount remaining after applying step 4 of the table in section 711-20 is negative.


    104-520(2)    
    The time of the event is when the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group.

    104-520(3)    
    For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2) , the *head company makes a capital gain equal to the amount remaining.

    Note:

    The amount remaining may be reduced under section 707-415 .


    SECTION 104-525   Error in calculation of tax cost setting amount for joining entity ' s assets: CGT event L6  

    104-525(1)    
    CGT event L6 happens if:


    (a) you are the *head company of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group; and


    (b) the conditions in section 705-315 (about errors in tax cost setting amounts) are satisfied for a *subsidiary member of the group; and


    (c) you have a *net overstated amount or a *net understated amount for the subsidiary member.


    104-525(2)    
    The time of the event is the start of the income year in which the Commissioner becomes aware of the errors.

    104-525(3)    
    You work out whether you have a net overstated amount or net understated amount using this table:


    Meaning of net overstated amount and net understated amount
    Item In this situation: There is this result:
    1 There are one or more overstated amounts under section 705-315 for the *subsidiary member but no understated amount under that section for the subsidiary member There is a net overstated amount . It is the overstated amount, or the sum of the overstated amounts.
    2 There are one or more understated amounts under section 705-315 for the *subsidiary member but no overstated amount under that section for the subsidiary member There is a net understated amount . It is the understated amount, or the sum of the understated amounts.
    3 There are both one or more overstated amounts and one or more understated amounts under section 705-315 for the *subsidiary member and the sum of the overstated amounts exceeds the sum of the understated amounts There is a net overstated amount . It is the difference between those sums
    4 There are both one or more overstated amounts and one or more understated amounts under section 705-315 for the *subsidiary member and the sum of the overstated amounts is less than the sum of the understated amounts There is a net understated amount . It is the difference between those sums


    104-525(4)    
    If the time when the Commissioner becomes aware of the errors is within the period within which the Commissioner may amend all of the assessments necessary to correct the errors, then, for the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2) :


    (a) if you have a *net overstated amount - you make a capital gain equal to that amount; or


    (b) if you have a *net understated amount - you make a capital loss equal to that amount.

    104-525(5)    
    If the time when the Commissioner becomes aware of the errors is not within that period, then, for the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2) :


    (a) if you have a *net overstated amount - you make a capital gain of the amount worked out under subsection (6); or


    (b) if you have a *net understated amount - you make a capital loss of the amount worked out under subsection (6).

    104-525(6)    


    The amount of the *capital gain or *capital loss is worked out as follows:


    Stated amount × Current asset setting amount
    Original asset setting amount

    where:

    current asset setting amount
    means the *tax cost setting amount for all assets referred to in subsection 705-315(2) as reset cost baseassets that the *head company of the *consolidated group or the *MEC group held continuously from the time when the *subsidiary member joined the group until the start of the head company ' s income year that is the earliest income year for which the Commissioner could amend the head company ' s assessment to correct any of the errors.

    original asset setting amount
    means the *tax cost setting amount for all assets referred to in subsection 705-315(2) as reset cost base assets that the *subsidiary member held at the time it joined the group.

    stated amount
    means the *net overstated amount or the *net understated amount, as the case requires.


    104-530   (Repealed) SECTION 104-530 Discharged amount of liability differs from amount for allocable cost amount purposes: CGT event L7  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

    SECTION 104-535   Where reduction in tax cost setting amounts for reset cost base assets cannot be allocated: CGT event L8  

    104-535(1)    
    CGT event L8 happens if:


    (a) an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group; and


    (b) the *tax cost setting amount for a reset cost base asset of the entity is reduced under subsection 705-40(1) (including in its application in accordance with Subdivisions 705-B to 705-D ); and


    (c) some or all (the unallocated amount ) of the reduction cannot be allocated as mentioned in subsection 705-40(2) .

    104-535(2)    
    The time of the event is just after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

    104-535(3)    
    For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2) , the *head company makes a capital loss equal to the unallocated amount.


    Division 106 - Entity making the gain or loss  

    Guide to Division 106  

    SECTION 106-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division sets out the cases where a capital gain or loss is made by someone other than the entity to which a CGT event happens.

    The entities affected are:

  • • partnerships (Subdivision 106-A);
  • • bankruptcy trustees and company liquidators (Subdivision 106-B);
  • • trustees where there is an absolutely entitled beneficiary (Subdivision 106-C);
  • • security holders (Subdivision 106-D).
  • Subdivision 106-A - Partnerships  

    SECTION 106-5   Partnerships  

    106-5(1)    
    Any *capital gain or *capital loss from a *CGT event happening in relation to a partnership or one of its *CGT assets is made by the partners individually.

    Each partner ' s gain or loss is calculated by reference to the partnership agreement, or partnership law if there is no agreement.

    Example 1:

    A partnership creates contractual rights in another entity (CGT event D1). Each partner ' s capital gain or loss is calculated by allocating an appropriate share of the capital proceeds from the event and the incidental costs that relate to the event (according to the partnership agreement, or partnership law if there is no agreement).

    Example 2:

    Helen and Clare set up a business in partnership. Helen contributes a block of land to the partnership capital. Their partnership agreement recognises that Helen has a 75% interest in the land and Clare 25%. The agreement is silent as to their interests in other assets and profit sharing.

    When the land is sold, Helen ' s capital gain or loss will be determined on the basis of her 75% interest. For other partnership assets, Helen ' s gain or loss will be determined on the basis of her 50% interest (under the relevant Partnership Act).


    106-5(2)    
    Each partner has a separate *cost base and *reduced cost base for the partner ' s interest in each *CGT asset of the partnership.

    106-5(3)    
    If a partner leaves a partnership, a remaining partner *acquires a separate *CGT asset to the extent that the remaining partner acquires a share of the departing partner ' s interest in a partnership asset.

    Note:

    The remaining partners would not be affected if the departing partner sells its interests to an entity that was not a partner.

    Example:

    (Indexation is ignored for the purpose of this example).

    John, Wil and Patricia form a partnership (in equal shares).

    John contributes a building (which is a pre-20 September 1985 asset) having a market value of $200,000. Wil and Patricia contribute $200,000 each in cash.

    The partnership buys another asset for $400,000.

    John is taken to have disposed of 2/3 of his interest in the building (1/3 to Wil and 1/3 to Patricia). His remaining 1/3 share in the building remains a pre-CGT asset. The 1/3 shares that Wil and Patricia acquire are post-CGT assets.

    Wil retires from the partnership when the partnership assets have a market value of $1,200,000 ($500,000 for the building and $700,000 for the other asset). John and Patricia pay Wil $400,000 for his interest in the partnership.

    Wil has a capital gain of $100,000 on the building and $100,000 on the other asset. John and Patricia each acquire an additional 1/6 interest in the partnership assets. These additional interests are separate assets and post-CGT assets.


    106-5(4)    
    If a new partner is admitted to a partnership:


    (a) the new partner *acquires a share (according to the partnership agreement, or partnership law if there is no agreement) of each partnership asset; and


    (b) the existing partners are treated as having *disposed of part of their interest in each partnership asset to the extent that the new partner has acquired it.

    Example:

    (Indexation is ignored for the purpose of this example).

    Lyn and Barry form a partnership, each contributing $15,000 to its capital. The partnership buys land for $30,000.

    The land increases in value to $300,000.

    Andrew is admitted as an equal partner, paying Lyn and Barry $50,000 each to acquire a 1/3 share in the land. His cost base is $100,000.

    Lyn and Barry have each disposed of 1/3 of their interest in the land. Each has a cost base for that interest of $5,000, and capital proceeds of $50,000, leaving them with a capital gain of $45,000 each on Andrew ' s admission to the partnership.

    The land is sold for its market value.

    Andrew has no capital gain on the land.

    Lyn and Barry have disposed of their remaining 2/3 original interest in the land for capital proceeds of $100,000, leaving each of them with a capital gain of:


    $100,000   −   ($15,000   −   $5,000)   =   $90,000


    106-5(5)    
    (Repealed by No 119 of 2002)


    Subdivision 106-B - Bankruptcy and liquidation  

    SECTION 106-30   Effect of bankruptcy  

    106-30(1)    


    For the purposes of this Part and Part 3-3 (about capital gains and losses) and Subdivision 328-C (What is a small business entity), the vesting of the individual ' s *CGT assets in the trustee under the Bankruptcy Act 1966 or under a similar foreign law is ignored.

    106-30(2)    


    This Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 328-C apply to an act done in relation to a *CGT asset of an individual in these circumstances as if the act had been done by the individual (instead of by the trustee etc.):


    (a) as a result of the bankruptcy of the individual by the Official Trustee in Bankruptcy or a registered trustee, or the holder of a similar office under a *foreign law;


    (b) by a trustee under a personal insolvency agreement made under Part X of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 , or under a similar instrument under a foreign law;


    (c) by a trustee as a result of an arrangement with creditors under that Act or a foreign law.

    Example:

    A CGT asset of an individual vests in a trustee because of the bankruptcy of the individual. No CGT event happens as a result of the vesting.

    The trustee later sells the CGT asset. Any capital gain or loss is made by the individual, not the trustee.


    SECTION 106-35   Effect of liquidation  

    106-35(1)    
    For the purposes of this Part and Part 3-3 (about capital gains and losses) and Subdivision 328-C (What is a small business entity), the vesting of a company ' s * CGT assets in a liquidator, or the holder of a similar office under a * foreign law , is ignored.

    106-35(2)    
    This Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 328-C apply to an act done by a liquidator of a company, or the holder of a similar office under a * foreign law , as if the act had been done by the company (instead of by the liquidator etc.).

    Example:

    Ben, a liquidator of a company, sells a CGT asset of the company. Any capital gain or loss is made by the company, not by Ben.


    Subdivision 106-C - Absolutely entitled beneficiaries  

    SECTION 106-50   Absolutely entitled beneficiaries  

    106-50(1)    
    For the purposes of this Part and Part 3-3 (about capital gains and losses) and Subdivision 328-C (What is a small business entity), from just after the time you become absolutely entitled to a * CGT asset as against the trustee of a trust (disregarding any legal disability), the asset is treated as being your asset (instead of being an asset of the trust).

    106-50(2)    
    This Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 328-C apply, from just after the time you become absolutely entitled to a * CGT asset as against the trustee of a trust (disregarding any legal disability), to an act done in relation to the asset by the trustee as if the act had been done by you (instead of by the trustee).

    Example:

    An individual becomes absolutely entitled to a CGT asset of a trust. The trustee later sells the asset. Any capital gain or loss from the sale is made by the individual, not the trustee.


    Subdivision 106-D - Securities, charges and encumbrances  

    SECTION 106-60   Securities, charges and encumbrances  

    106-60(1)    
    For the purposes of this Part and Part 3-3 (about capital gains and losses) and Subdivision 328-C (What is a small business entity):


    (a) the vesting of a * CGT asset in an entity is ignored, if:


    (i) the vesting is for the purpose of enforcing, giving effect to or maintaining a security, charge or encumbrance over the asset; and

    (ii) the security, charge or encumbrance remains over the asset just after the vesting; and


    (b) a CGT asset is treated as vesting in an entity at the time a security, charge or encumbrance ceases to be over the asset, if:


    (i) the entity holds the asset just after that time because the asset vested in the entity at an earlier time; and

    (ii) that earlier vesting was ignored under paragraph (a) because it was for the purpose of enforcing, giving effect to or maintaining the security, charge or encumbrance.

    106-60(2)    
    This Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 328-C apply to an act done by an entity (or an * agent of the entity) in relation to a * CGT asset for the purpose of enforcing, giving effect to or maintaining a security, charge or encumbrance over the asset as if the act had been done by the entity that provided the security (instead of by the first-mentioned entity or its agent).

    Example:

    A CGT asset of a borrower vests in a lender as security for a loan. No CGT event happens as a result of the vesting.

    If the borrower fails to make payments on the loan and the lender sells the CGT asset under the security arrangement, any capital gain or loss is made by the borrower, not the lender.


    Division 108 - CGT assets  

    Guide to Division 108  

    SECTION 108-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division defines the various categories of assets that are relevant to working out your capital gains and losses. They are CGT assets, collectables and personal use assets.

    It also tells you how capital losses from collectables and personal use assets are relevant to working out your net capital gain or loss.

    It also sets out when land, buildings and capital improvements are taken to be separate CGT assets.

    Subdivision 108-A - What a CGT asset is  

    SECTION 108-5   CGT assets  

    108-5(1)    
    A CGT asset is:


    (a) any kind of property; or


    (b) a legal or equitable right that is not property.

    108-5(2)    
    To avoid doubt, these are CGT assets :


    (a) part of, or an interest in, an asset referred to in subsection (1);


    (b) goodwill or an interest in it;


    (c) an interest in an asset of a partnership;


    (d) an interest in a partnership that is not covered by paragraph (c).

    Note 1:

    Examples of CGT assets are:

  • • land and buildings;
  • • shares in a company and units in a unit trust;
  • • options;
  • • debts owed to you;
  • • a right to enforce a contractual obligation;
  • • foreign currency.
  • Note 2:

    An asset is not a CGT asset if the asset was last acquired before 26 June 1992 and was not an asset for the purposes of former Part IIIA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 : see section 108-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    SECTION 108-7  

    108-7   Interest in CGT assets as joint tenants  
    Individuals who own a *CGT asset as joint tenants are treated as if they each owned a separate CGT asset constituted by an equal interest in the asset and as if each of them held that interest as a tenant in common.

    Note:

    Section 128-50 contains rules that apply when a joint tenant dies.

    Subdivision 108-B - Collectables  

    SECTION 108-10   Losses from collectables to be offset only against gains from collectables  

    108-10(1)    
    In working out your *net capital gain or *net capital loss for the income year, *capital losses from *collectables can be used only to reduce *capital gains from collectables.

    Note:

    You choose the order in which you reduce your capital gains from collectables by your capital losses from collectables.

    Example:

    Your capital gains from collectables total $200 and your capital losses from collectables total $400. You have other capital gains of $500. You have a net capital gain of $500 and a net capital loss from collectables of $200.

    The losses from collectables cannot be used to reduce the $500 capital gain.


    108-10(2)    
    A collectable is:


    (a) *artwork, jewellery, an antique, or a coin or medallion; or


    (b) a rare folio, manuscript or book; or


    (c) a postage stamp or first day cover;

    that is used or kept mainly for your (or your *associate's) personal use or enjoyment.


    108-10(3)    
    These are also collectables :


    (a) an interest in any of the things covered by subsection (2); or


    (b) a debt that arises from any of those things; or


    (c) an option or right to *acquire any of those things.

    Note:

    Collectables acquired for $500 or less are exempt. However, you get an exemption for an interest in one only if the market value of all the interests combined is $500 or less: see Subdivision 118-A .


    108-10(4)    
    If some or all of a *capital loss from a *collectable cannot be applied in an income year, the unapplied amount can be applied in the next income year for which your *capital gains from *collectables exceed your *capital losses (if any) from collectables.

    Example:

    You have a capital gain from a collectable for the income year of $200 and a capital loss from another collectable of $600.

    Your capital loss from one collectable reduces your capital gain from the other to zero. You cannot apply the remaining $400 of the capital loss in this income year, but you can apply it in a later income year.


    108-10(5)    
    If you have 2 or more unapplied *net capital losses from *collectables, you must apply them in the order you made them.


    SECTION 108-15   Sets of collectables  

    108-15(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if:


    (a) you own *collectables that are a set; and


    (b) they would ordinarily be *disposed of as a set; and


    (c) you dispose of them in one or more transactions for the purpose of trying to obtain the exemption in section 118-10 .

    Example:

    You buy a set of 3 books for $900. You apportion the $900 among each book: see section 112-30 . If the books are of equal value, you have acquired each one for $300.

    If you dispose of each book individually, you would ordinarily obtain the exemption in section 118-10 , because you acquired each one for less than $500.


    108-15(2)    
    The set of *collectables is taken to be a single *collectable and each of your *disposals is a disposal of part of that collectable.

    Example:

    To continue the example, the 3 books are taken to be a single collectable. You will not obtain the exemption in section 118-10 , because you acquired the set for more than $500.

    You work out if you make a capital gain or loss from a disposal of part of an asset by comparing the capital proceeds from it with the cost base or reduced cost base (as appropriate) of the disposed part.

    Note 1:

    Section 112-30 tells you how to apportion the cost base and reduced cost base of a CGT asset on a disposal of part of an asset.

    Note 2:

    This section does not apply to a collectable you last acquired before 16 December 1995: see section 108-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    SECTION 108-17  

    108-17   Cost base of a collectable  


    In working out the *cost base of a *collectable, disregard the third element (about costs of ownership).

    Subdivision 108-C - Personal use assets  

    SECTION 108-20   Losses from personal use assets must be disregarded  

    108-20(1)    
    In working out your *net capital gain or *net capital loss for the income year, any *capital loss you make from a *personal use asset is disregarded.

    108-20(2)    
    A personal use asset is:


    (a) a *CGT asset (except a *collectable) that is used or kept mainly for your (or your *associate's) personal use or enjoyment; or


    (b) an option or right to *acquire a *CGT asset of that kind; or


    (c) a debt arising from a *CGT event in which the *CGT asset the subject of the event was one covered by paragraph (a); or


    (d) a debt arising other than:


    (i) in the course of gaining or producing your assessable income; or

    (ii) from your carrying on a *business.
    Note 1:

    There is an exemption for a personal use asset you acquire for $10,000 or less: see section 118-10 .

    Note 2:

    A debt arising from a CGT event involving a CGT asset kept mainly for your personal use and enjoyment is a personal use asset to prevent any loss arising from the debt being a normal capital loss.


    108-20(3)    
    A personal use asset does not include land, a *stratum unit or a building or structure that is taken to be a separate *CGT asset because of Subdivision 108-D .


    SECTION 108-25   Sets of personal use assets  

    108-25(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if:


    (a) you own *personal use assets that are a set; and


    (b) they would ordinarily be *disposed of as a set; and


    (c) you dispose of them in one or more transactions for the purpose of trying to obtain the exemption in section 118-10 .

    108-25(2)    
    The set of *personal use assets is taken to be a single *personal use asset and each of your *disposals is a disposal of part of that asset.


    SECTION 108-30  

    108-30   Cost base of a personal use asset  


    In working out the *cost base of a *personal use asset, disregard the third element (about the costs of ownership).

    Subdivision 108-D - Separate CGT assets  

    Guide to Subdivision 108-D

    SECTION 108-50   What this Subdivision is about  

    For CGT purposes, there are:

  • • exceptions to the common law principle that what is attached to the land is part of the land; and
  • • special rules about buildings and adjacent land; and
  • • rules about when a capital improvement to a CGT asset is treated as a separate CGT asset.
  • Note:

    In addition to the circumstances set out in this Subdivision, separate asset treatment can apply under section 124-595 (about a roll-over for a Crown lease) and section 124-725 (about a roll-over for a prospecting or mining entitlement).


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    108-55 When is a building a separate asset from land?
    108-60 Depreciating asset that is part of a building is a separate asset
    108-65Land adjacent to land acquired before 20 September 1985
    108-70 When is a capital improvement a separate asset?
    108-75 Capital improvements to CGT assets for which a roll-over may be available
    108-80 Deciding if capital improvements are related to each other
    108-85 Meaning of improvement threshold

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 108-55   When is a building a separate asset from land?  

    108-55(1)    


    A building or structure on land that you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is taken to be a separate *CGT asset from the land if one of these balancing adjustment provisions applies to the building or structure (whether or not there is a balancing adjustment):


    (a) Subdivision 40-D ; or


    (b) section 355-315 or 355-525 (about R & D).

    Example:

    You construct a timber mill building on land you own. The building is subject to a balancing adjustment on its disposal, loss or destruction. It is taken to be a separate CGT asset from the land.


    108-55(2)    
    A building or structure that is constructed on land that you *acquired before 20 September 1985 is taken to be a separate *CGT asset from the land if:


    (a) you entered into a contract for the construction on or after that day; or


    (b) if there is no contract - the construction started on or after that day.

    Example:

    You bought a block of land with a building on it on 10 August 1984. On 1 December 1999 you construct another building on the land. The other building is taken to be a separate CGT asset from the land.


    SECTION 108-60  

    108-60   Depreciating asset that is part of a building is a separate asset  


    A *depreciating asset that is part of a building or structure is taken to be a separate *CGT asset from the building or structure.
    Example:

    You own a factory from which you carry on a business. You install rest rooms for your employees. The plumbing fixtures and fittings are depreciating assets. These are taken to be a separate CGT asset from the factory.

    SECTION 108-65  

    108-65   Land adjacent to land acquired before 20 September 1985  
    Land that you *acquire on or after 20 September 1985 that is adjacent to land (the original land ) you acquired before that day is taken to be a separate *CGT asset from the original land if it and the original land are amalgamated into one title.

    Example:

    On 1 April 1984 you bought a block of land. On 1 June 1999 you bought another block of land adjacent to the first block. You amalgamate the titles to the 2 blocks into 1 title.

    The second block is treated as a separate CGT asset. You can make a capital gain or loss from it if you sell the whole area of land.

    SECTION 108-70   When is a capital improvement a separate asset?  
    Improvements to land

    108-70(1)    


    A capital improvement to land is taken to be a separate *CGT asset from the land if one of the balancing adjustment provisions set out in subsection 108-55(1) applies to the improvement (whether or not there is a balancing adjustment).
    Example:

    You own land that you use for pastoral operations. You build some fences that are destroyed by fire. The fences are depreciating assets and are subject to a balancing adjustment on their destruction under Division 40 . The fences are taken to be a separate CGT asset from the land.



    Unrelated improvements to pre-CGT assets

    108-70(2)   


    A capital improvement to a *CGT asset (the original asset ) that you *acquired before 20 September 1985 (that is not related to any other capital improvement to the asset) is taken to be a separate *CGT asset if its *cost base (assuming it were a separate CGT asset) when a *CGT event happens (except one that happens because of your death) in relation to the original asset is:


    (a) more than the *improvement threshold for the income year in which the event happened; and


    (b) more than 5% of the *capital proceeds from the event.

    Example:

    In 1983 you bought a boat. In 1999 you install a new mast (a capital improvement) for $30,000. Later, you sell the boat for $150,000.

    If the cost base of the improvement in the sale year is $41,000 and the improvement threshold for that year is $96,000, the improvement will not be treated as a separate asset.

    Note 1:

    Section 108-80 sets out the factors for deciding whether capital improvements are related to each other.

    Note 2:

    If the improvement is a separate asset, the capital proceeds from the event must be apportioned between the original asset and the improvement: see section 116-40 .



    Related improvements to pre-CGT assets

    108-70(3)    
    Capital improvements to a *CGT asset (the original asset ) that you *acquired before 20 September 1985 that are related to each other are taken to be a separate *CGT asset if the total of their *cost bases (assuming each one were a separate CGT asset) when a *CGT event happens in relation to the original asset is:


    (a) more than the *improvement threshold for the income year in which the event happened; and


    (b) more than 5% of the *capital proceeds from the event.

    Note:

    If the improvements are a separate asset, the capital proceeds from the event must be apportioned between the original asset and the improvements: see section 116-40 .



    Some improvements not relevant

    108-70(4)    
    This section does not apply to a capital improvement:


    (a) that took place under a contract that you entered into before 20 September 1985; or


    (b) if there is no contract - that started or occurred before that day.

    108-70(5)    
    Subsections (2) and (3) do not apply if the capital improvement is made to:


    (a) a *Crown lease; or


    (b) a *prospecting entitlement or *mining entitlement; or


    (c) a *statutory licence; or


    (d) a *depreciating asset to which Subdivision 124-K applies.

    Note:

    Section 108-75 deals with this situation.


    108-70(6)    
    This section does not apply to a capital improvement consisting of repairs to or restoration of a *CGT asset *acquired before 20 September 1985 in circumstances where there is a roll-over under Subdivision 124-B .

    SECTION 108-75   Capital improvements to CGT assets for which a roll-over may be available  

    108-75(1)    
    This section is relevant only if a *CGT event happens in relation to a *CGT asset that is:


    (a) a *Crown lease; or


    (b) a *prospecting entitlement or *mining entitlement; or


    (c) a *statutory licence; or


    (d) a *depreciating asset to which Subdivision 124-K applies.

    You must have *acquired it before 20 September 1985.

    Note:

    Division 124 treats you as having acquired a CGT asset before that day in some situations.


    108-75(2)    


    There are possible consequences if there has been one or more capital improvements to:


    (a) the *CGT asset the subject of the *CGT event; or


    (b) any *CGT assets of the same kind that were in existence before the CGT asset and came to an end where a roll-over was obtained under a provision set out in this table:


    Roll-over provisions
    Item For this CGT asset: Roll-over is obtained under this provision:
    1 A *Crown lease Subdivision 124-J
    .
    2 A prospecting or mining entitlement Subdivision 124-L
    .
    3 A *statutory licence Subdivision 124-C or former Subdivision 124-O
    .
    4 A *depreciating asset Subdivision 124-K

    Note:

    Roll-overs under former sections 160ZWA , 160ZZF , 160ZZPE and 160ZWC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are also relevant: see section 108-75 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Example:

    In 1984 you acquired a commercial fishing licence. In 1986 you paid $62,000 to get an extra right (a capital improvement) attached to the licence.

    In June 1999 the licence expired and you got a new licence. You obtained a roll-over for the old licence expiring. In April 2000 you sold the new fishing licence for $200,000.


    108-75(3)    
    Any capital improvement that is not related to another capital improvement is taken to be a separate *CGT asset if its *cost base (assuming it were a separate CGT asset) when the *CGT event happens is:


    (a) more than the *improvement threshold for the income year in which the event happened; and


    (b) more than 5% of the *capital proceeds from the event.

    Example:

    To continue the example, suppose the cost base of the right is $101,000 and the improvement threshold for the 1999-2000 income year is $96,000.

    Since the cost base of the right is more than the improvement threshold and more than 5% of the capital proceeds, the right is taken to be a separate CGT asset.

    Note 1:

    Section 108-80 sets out the factors for deciding whether capital improvements are related to each other.

    Note 2:

    If the improvement is a separate asset, the capital proceeds from the event must be apportioned between the asset and the improvement: see section 116-40 .


    108-75(4)    
    Any capital improvements that are related to each other are taken to be a separate *CGT asset if the total of their *cost bases (assuming each one were a separate CGT asset) when the *CGT event happens is:


    (a) more than the *improvement threshold for the income year in which the event happened; and


    (b) more than 5% of the *capital proceeds from the event.

    Note:

    If the improvements are a separate asset, the capital proceeds from the event must be apportioned between the asset and the improvements: see section 116-40 .


    108-75(5)    
    This section does not apply to any capital improvement:


    (a) that took place under a contract that you entered into before 20 September 1985; or


    (b) if there is no contract - that started or occurred before that day.


    SECTION 108-80  

    108-80   Deciding if capital improvements are related to each other  
    In deciding whether capital improvements are related to each other, the factors to be considered include:


    (a) the nature of the *CGT asset to which the improvements are made; and


    (b) the nature, location, size, value, quality, composition and utility of each improvement; and


    (c) whether an improvement depends in a physical, economic, commercial or practical sense on another improvement; and


    (d) whether the improvements are part of an overall project; and


    (e) whether the improvements are of the same kind; and


    (f) whether the improvements are made within a reasonable period of time of each other.

    SECTION 108-85   Meaning of improvement threshold  

    108-85(1)    
    The improvement threshold for the 1997-98 income year is $89,992.

    108-85(2)    
    The *improvement threshold is indexed annually.

    Note:

    Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts.


    108-85(3)    
    The Commissioner must publish before the beginning of each *financial year the *improvement threshold for that year.


    Division 109 - Acquisition of CGT assets  

    Guide to Division 109  

    SECTION 109-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division sets out the ways in which you can acquire a CGT asset and the time of acquisition.

    The time of acquisition is important for indexation, and for the exemption of assets acquired before 20 September 1985.

    Generally, you acquire a CGT asset when you become its owner. You can also acquire a CGT asset:

  • • as a result of a CGT event happening: see section 109-5 ; or
  • • in other circumstances: see section 109-10 .
  • This Division also directs you to special acquisition rules in other Divisions.

    Subdivision 109-A - Operative rules  

    SECTION 109-5   General acquisition rules  

    109-5(1)    


    In general, you acquire a *CGT asset when you become its owner. In this case, the time when you *acquire the asset is when you become its owner.

    109-5(2)    


    This table sets out specific rules for the circumstances in which, and the time at which, you acquire a *CGT asset as a result of a *CGT event happening.
    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    Acquisition rules (CGT events)
    Event Number In these circumstances: You acquire the asset at this time:
    A1
    (case 1)
    An entity *disposes of a CGT asset to you (except where you compulsorily acquire it) when the disposal contract is entered into or, if none, when the entity stops being the asset's owner
    .
    A1
    (case 2)
    You compulsorily acquire a *CGT asset from another entity the earliest of:
        (a) when you paid compensation to the entity; or
        (b) when you became the asset's owner; or
        (c) when you entered the asset under the power of compulsory acquisition; or
        (d) when you took possession of it under that power
    .
    B1 You enter into an agreement to obtain the use and enjoyment of a *CGT asset when you first obtain the use and enjoyment of the asset (unless title does not pass to you at or before the end of the agreement)
    .
    D1 An entity creates contractual or other rights in you when the contract is entered into or the right created
    .
    D2 An entity grants an option to you when the option is granted
    .
    D3 An entity grants you a right to receive *ordinary income from mining when the contract is entered into or, if none, when the right is granted
    .
    D4 You enter into a *conservation covenant as a covenantee when the covenant is entered into
    .
    E1 An entity creates a trust over a *CGT asset and you are the trustee when the trust is created
    .
    E2 An entity transfers a *CGT asset to a trust and you are the trustee when the asset is transferred
    .
    E3 A trust over a *CGT asset is converted to a unit trust and you are the trustee when the trust is converted
    .
    E5 You as beneficiary under a trust become absolutely entitled to a *CGT asset of the trust as against the trustee (disregarding any legal disability) when you become absolutely entitled
    .
    E6 Trustee *disposes of a *CGT asset of the trust to you to satisfy a right you had to receive *ordinary income from the trust when the *disposal occurs
    .
    E7 Trustee *disposes of a *CGT asset of the trust to you to satisfy your interest, or part of it, in trust capital when the *disposal occurs
    .
    E8 Beneficiary under a trust *disposes of its interest, or part of it, in trust capital to you when disposal contract is entered into or, if none, when beneficiary stops being interest's owner
    .
    E9 An entity creates a trust over future property and you are the trustee when the entity makes the agreement to create the trust
    .
    F1 A lessor grants a lease to you, or renews or extends a lease for grant of lease - when the contract is entered into or, if none, at the start of lease;
    for lease renewal or extension - at the start of renewal or extension
    .
    F2 A lessor grants a lease to you, or renews or extends a lease, and term is at least 50 years for grant of lease - when lessor grants the lease;
    for lease renewal or extension - at the start of renewal or extension
    .
    K1 (Repealed by No 77 of 2001)    
    .
    K3 An individual dies and a *CGT asset of the individual *passes to you (as a tax advantaged entity) when the individual dies
    .
    K6 A *CGT event happens to *shares or an interest in a trust you own when the other CGT event happens

    Note 1:

    For CGT events E1, E2 and E3, if the circumstances specified in the second column of the table happened to an asset before 12 January 1994, there may be no acquisition: see section 109-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Note 2:

    The acquisition rule for CGT event E9 in the table does not apply to you as trustee if the agreement to create the trust was made before 12 noon on 12 January 1994: see section 109-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    SECTION 109-10  

    109-10   When you acquire a CGT asset without a CGT event  


    This table sets out some specific rules for the circumstances in which, and the time at which, you acquire a *CGT asset otherwise than as a result of a *CGT event happening.


    Acquisition rules (no CGT event)
    Item In these circumstances: You acquire the asset at this time:
    1 You (or your *agent) construct or create a *CGT asset, and you own it when the construction is finished or the asset is created when the construction, or work that resulted in the creation, started
    .
    2 A company issues or allots *equity interests or *non-equity shares in the company to you when contract is entered into or, if none, when equity interests or non-equity shares issued or allotted
    .
    3 A trustee of a unit trust issues units in the trust to you when contract is entered into or, if none, when units issued

    109-15   (Repealed) SECTION 109-15 Exceptions  
    (Repealed by No 119 of 2013)

    Subdivision 109-B - Signposts to other acquisition rules  

    SECTION 109-50  

    109-50   Effect of this Subdivision  
    This Subdivision is a *Guide.

    SECTION 109-55  

    109-55   Other acquisition rules  


    This table sets out other acquisition rules in this Part and Part 3-3. Some of the rules have effect only for limited purposes.


    Other acquisition rules
    Item In these circumstances: You acquire the asset at this time: See:
    1 A CGT asset devolves to you as legal personal representative of a deceased individual when the individual died section 128-15
    .
    2 A CGT asset passes to you as beneficiary in the estate of a deceased individual when the individual died sections 128-15 and 128-25
    .
    3 A surviving joint tenant acquires deceased joint tenant ' s interest in a CGT asset when the deceased died section 128-50
    .
    4 You get only a partial exemption under Subdivision 118-B for a CGT event happening to a CGT asset that is a dwelling, but you would have got a full exemption if the CGT event had happened just before the first time the dwelling was used for that purpose at that time section 118-192
    .
    5 The trustee of a deceased estate acquires a dwelling under the deceased ' s will for you to occupy, and you obtain an interest in it when the trustee acquired it section 118-210
    .
    6 You obtain a replacement-asset roll-over for replacing an asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 before 20 September 1985 Divisions 122 and 124
    .
    6A (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)    
    .
    7 You obtain a replacement-asset roll-over for a Crown lease, or a prospecting or mining entitlement that is renewed or replaced and part of the new entitlement relates to a part of the old one that you acquired before 20 September 1985 before 20 September 1985 (for that part of the new entitlement that relates to the pre-CGT part of the old one) sections 124-595 and 124-725
    .
    7A - 7B (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)    
    .
    8 You obtain a same-asset roll-over for a CGT asset the transferor acquired before 20 September 1985 before 20 September 1985 Subdivision 124-N and Divisions 122 and 126
    .
    8A There is a same-asset roll-over for a CGT event that happens to a CGT asset (acquired on or after 20 September 1985) because the trust deed of a fund is changed and you are the fund that owns the asset after the CGT event at the time of the CGT event Subdivision 126-C
    .
    8B There is a same-asset roll-over for a CGT event that happens to a CGT asset when the entity that owned the asset before the roll-over acquired it section 115-30
    .
    8C You obtain a replacement-asset roll-over (other than a roll-over covered by section 115-34) for replacing a CGT asset when you acquired the original asset involved in the roll-over section 115-30
    .
    8D A CGT asset devolves to you as legal personal representative of a deceased individual when the deceased acquired the asset (unless it was a pre-CGT asset just before his or her death) section 115-30
    .
    8E A CGT asset passes to you as beneficiary in the estate of a deceased individual when the deceased acquired the asset (unless it was a pre-CGT asset just before his or her death) section 115-30
    .
    8F A surviving joint tenant acquires a deceased joint tenant ' s interest in a CGT asset when the deceased acquired the interest section 115-30
    .
    8G You hold a membership interest in the receiving trust involved in a roll-over under Subdivision 126-G when you acquired the corresponding membership interest in the transferring trust involved in the roll-over section 115-30
    .
    9 A company or trustee of a unit trust issues you with bonus equities and no amount is included in your assessable income if the original equities are post-CGT assets, or are pre-CGT assets and fully paid - when you acquired the original equities; or
    if the original equities are pre-CGT assets and you had to pay an amount for the bonus equities - when the liability to pay arose
    section 130-20
    .
    10 You own shares in a company or units in a unit trust and you exercise rights to acquire new equities in the company or trust for the rights if you acquired them from the company or trustee - when you acquired the original equities; or
    for the new equities - when you exercise the rights
    section 130-40
    .
    11 You acquire shares in a company or units in a unit trust by converting a convertible interest when the conversion of the convertible interest happened section 130-60
    .
    11A You acquire shares in a company in exchange for the disposal of an exchangeable interest, and the disposal of the exchangeable interest was to: when the disposal of the exchangeable interest happened section 130-105
      (a) the issuer of the exchangeable interest; or    
      (b) a connected entity of the issuer of the exchangeable interest    
    .
    11B You acquire shares in a company in exchange for the redemption of an exchangeable interest when the redemption of the exchangeable interest happened section 130-105
    .
    12 (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)    
    .
    13 You (as a lessee of land) acquire the reversionary interest of the lessor and there is no roll-over for the acquisition if term of lease was for 99 years or more - when the lease was granted or assigned to you; or
    if term of lease less than 99 years - when the reversionary interest acquired
    section 132-15
    .
    14 You acquired a CGT asset before 20 September 1985, and there has since been a change in the majority underlying interests in the asset at the time of the change Division 149
    .
    15 You become an Australian resident (but not a temporary resident) and you owned a CGT asset that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985 and that was not *taxable Australian property when you become an Australian resident (but not a temporary resident) section 855-45
    .
    15A You are a temporary resident, you then cease to be a temporary resident (but remain, at that time, an Australian resident) and you owned a CGT asset that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985 and that was not *taxable Australian property when you cease to be a temporary resident section 768-955
    .
    16 A trust of which you are trustee becomes a resident trust for CGT purposes and you owned a CGT asset that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985 and that was not *taxable Australian property when the trust becomes a resident trust for CGT purposes section 855-50
    .
    17 There is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B for a CGT event and you are the company owning the roll-over asset just after the roll-over and you stop being a 100% subsidiary of another company in the wholly-owned group when you stop section 104-175

    Note:

    Section 115-34 sets out other acquisition rules for certain cases involving replacement-asset roll-overs covered by that section.

    SECTION 109-60  

    109-60   Acquisition rules outside this Part and Part 3-3  


    This table sets out other acquisition rules outside this Part and Part 3-3.

    Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are in bold .


    Other acquisition rules
    Item In these circumstances: The asset is acquired at this time: See:
    1 CGT event happens to Cocos (Keeling) Islands asset 30 June 1991 subsection 102-25(1) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997
    .
    1A (Repealed by No 20 of 2016)    
    .
    2 Lender acquires a replacement security before 20 September 1985 subsection 26BC(6A)
    .
    3 Trust ceases to be a resident trust for CGT purposes and there is an attributable taxpayer when it ceases section 102AAZBA
    .
    4 CGT event happens to CGT asset in connection with the demutualisation of an insurance company except a friendly society health or life insurer on the demutualisation resolution day section 121AS
    .
    5 CGT event happens to assets of NSW State Bank at the first taxing time section 121EN
    .
    6 You own shares in a company that stops being a PDF just after it stops section 124ZR
    .
    7 (Repealed by No 23 of 2018)    
    .
    8 A CGT asset of a CFC (that it owned on its commencing day) on the CFC ' s commencing day section 411
    .
    9 A CGT asset is owned by a tax exempt entity and it becomes taxable at the transition time section 57-25 in Schedule 2D
    .
    10 CGT event happens to CGT asset in connection with the demutualisation of a mutual entity other than an insurance company, health insurer and friendly society health or life insurer on the demutualisation resolution day Division 326 in Schedule 2H
    .
    11 You stop holding an item as trading stock when you stop paragraph 70-110(1)(b)
    .
    11A You acquire an *ESS interest and Subdivision 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the interest at the *ESS deferred taxing point for the interest section 83A-125
    .
    12 CGT event happens to 30 June 1988 asset of a complying superannuation entity 30 June 1988 section 295-90
    .
    13 You are issued with a share or right under a demutualisation of a health insurer except a friendly society health or life insurer the time the share or right is issued sections 315-80, 315-210 and 315-260
    .
    14 You are transferred a share or right by a lost policy holders trust under a demutualisation of a health insurer except a friendly society health or life insurer the time the share or right is issued sections 315-145, 315-210 and 315-260
    .
    14A You are issued with a share, or a right to acquire shares, under a demutualisation of a friendly society health or life insurer the time the share or right is issued section 316-105
    .
    14B You are transferred a share, or right to acquire shares, by a lost policy holders trust under a demutualisation of a friendly society health or life insurer the time the share or right is issued to the trustee section 316-170
    .
    15 A CGT asset is transferred to or from a life insurance company ' s complying superannuation asset pool at the time of the transfer Division 320
    .
    16 A CGT asset is transferred to or from the segregated exempt assets of a life insurance company at the time of the transfer Division 320
    .
    17 Entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group at the time it becomes a subsidiary member 701-5
    .
    18 Entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group at the time it ceases 701-40

    Division 110 - Cost base and reduced cost base  

    Guide to Division 110  

    SECTION 110-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division tells you how to work out the cost base and reduced cost base of a CGT asset. You need to know these to work out if you make a capital gain or loss from most CGT events.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    110-5 Modifications to general rules
    110-10 Rules about cost base not relevant for some CGT events

    SECTION 110-5  

    110-5   Modifications to general rules  
    After you have read the general rules, you need to know if there are any modifications to them. Division 112 lists each situation that may result in a modification and tells you where you can find the detailed provisions for each situation.

    SECTION 110-10  

    110-10   Rules about cost base not relevant for some CGT events  


    This table sets out each CGT event for which you do not need to know what the cost base or reduced cost base of a CGT asset is to work out if you make a capital gain or loss. The section describing the event tells you what amount is relevant instead.


    Rules about cost base not relevant for some CGT events
    Event Number Description of event: See section:
    C3 End of option to acquire shares etc. 104-30  
    .
    D1 Creating contractual or other rights 104-35  
    .
    D2 Granting an option 104-40  
    .
    D3 Granting a right to income from mining 104-45  
    .
    E9 Creating a trust over future property 104-105  
    .
    F1 Granting a lease 104-110  
    .
    F3 Lessor pays lessee to get lease changed 104-120  
    .
    F5 Lessor receives payment for changing lease 104-130  
    .
    H1 Forfeiture of deposit 104-150  
    .
    H2 Receipt for event relating to a CGT asset 104-155  
    .
    J5 Failure to acquire replacement asset and to incur fourth element expenditure after a roll-over 104-197  
    .
    J6 Cost of acquisition of replacement asset or amount of fourth element expenditure, or both, not sufficient to cover disregarded capital gain104-198  
    .
    K2 Bankrupt pays amount in relation to debt 104-210  
    .
    K7 Balancing adjustment event happens to depreciating asset 104-235  
    .
    K9 Carried interests 104-255  
    .
    K10 You make a forex realisation gain covered by item 1 of the table in subsection 775-70(1) 104-260  
    .
    K11 You make a forex realisation loss covered by item 1 of the table in subsection 775-75(1) 104-265  
    .
    K12 Foreign hybrid loss exposure adjustment 104-270  
    .
    L1 Reduction under section 705-57 in tax cost setting amount of assets of entity becoming subsidiary member of consolidated group or MEC group 104-500  
    .
    L2 Amount remaining after step 3A etc. of joining allocable cost amount is negative 104-505  
    .
    L3 Tax cost setting amounts for retained cost base assets exceed joining allocable cost amount 104-510  
    .
    L4 No reset cost base assets against which to apply excess of net allocable cost amount on joining 104-515  
    .
    L5 Amount remaining after step 4 of leaving allocable cost amount is negative 104-520  
    .
    L6 Errors in tax cost setting amounts for entity joining consolidated group or MEC group 104-525  
    .
    L7 (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)    
    L8 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets on joining cannot be allocated 104-535  

    Subdivision 110-A - Cost base  

    SECTION 110-25   General rules about cost base  

    110-25(1)    


    The cost base of a *CGT asset consists of 5 elements.
    Note 1:

    You need to keep records of each element: see Division 121 .

    Note 2:

    The cost base is reduced by net input tax credits: see section 103-30 .

    Note 3:

    An amount that makes up all or part of an element of the cost base of an asset may be determined under section 230-505 , if the amount is provided for acquiring a thing, and you start or cease to have a Division 230 financial arrangement as consideration for the acquisition of the thing.



    5 elements of the cost base

    110-25(2)    
    The first element is the total of:


    (a) the money you paid, or are required to pay, in respect of *acquiring it; and


    (b) the *market value of any other property you gave, or are required to give, in respect of acquiring it (worked out as at the time of the acquisition).

    Note 1:

    There are special rules for working out when you are required to pay money or give other property: see section 103-15 .

    Note 2:

    This element is replaced with another amount in many situations: see Division 112 .


    110-25(3)    


    The second element is the *incidental costs you incurred. These costs can include giving property: see section 103-5 .
    Note:

    There is one situation to do with options in which the incidental costs relating to the CGT event are modified: see section 112-85 .


    110-25(4)    


    The third element is the costs of owning the *CGT asset you incurred (but only if you *acquired the asset after 20 August 1991). These costs include:


    (a) interest on money you borrowed to acquire the asset; and


    (b) costs of maintaining, repairing or insuring it; and


    (c) rates or land tax, if the asset is land; and


    (d) interest on money you borrowed to refinance the money you borrowed to acquire the asset; and


    (e) interest on money you borrowed to finance the capital expenditure you incurred to increase the asset ' s value.

    These costs can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    Note:

    This element does not apply to personal use assets or collectables: see sections 108-17 and 108-30 .


    110-25(5)    


    The fourth element is capital expenditure you incurred:


    (a) the purpose or the expected effect of which is to increase or preserve the asset ' s value; or


    (b) that relates to installing or moving the asset.

    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    Note:

    There are 3 situations involving leases in which this element is modified: see section 112-80 .


    110-25(5A)    


    Subsection (5) does not apply to capital expenditure incurred in relation to goodwill.

    110-25(6)    
    The fifth element is capital expenditure that you incurred to establish, preserve or defend your title to the asset, or a right over the asset. (The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .)

    110-25(7)    
    (Repealed by No 32 of 2006)


    110-25(8)    
    (Repealed by No 32 of 2006)


    110-25(9)    
    (Repealed by No 32 of 2006)


    110-25(10)    
    (Repealed by No 32 of 2006)


    110-25(11)    
    (Repealed by No 32 of 2006)



    Assume a CGT event for purposes of working out cost base at a particular time

    110-25(12)    


    If:


    (a) it is necessary to work out the *cost base at a particular time; and


    (b) a *CGT event does not happen in relation to the asset at or just after that time;

    assume, for the purpose only of working out the cost base at the particular time, that such an event does happen in relation to the asset at or just after that time.

    Note 1:

    For example, in order to apply subsection 110-37(1) , it is necessary for there to be a CGT event.

    Note 2:

    The assumption that a CGT event happens does not have any consequence beyond that stated. For example, it does not mean that the asset is afterwards to be treated as having been acquired at the particular time with a first element of cost base equal to all of its former cost base elements.


    110-30   (Repealed) SECTION 110-30 Cost base of partnership assets  
    (Repealed by No 16 of 1999)

    SECTION 110-35   Incidental costs  

    110-35(1)    


    There are a number of incidental costs you may have incurred. Except for the ninth , they are costs you may have incurred:


    (a) to *acquire a *CGT asset; or


    (b) that relate to a *CGT event.


    110-35(2)    


    The first is remuneration for the services of a surveyor, valuer, auctioneer, accountant, broker, *agent, consultant or legal adviser. However, remuneration for professional advice about the operation of this Act is not included unless it is provided by a *recognised tax adviser.
    Note:

    Expenditure for professional advice about taxation incurred before 1 July 1989 does not form part of the cost base of a CGT asset: see section 110-35 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    110-35(3)    
    The second is costs of transfer.

    110-35(4)    
    The third is stamp duty or other similar duty.

    110-35(5)    
    The fourth is:


    (a) if you *acquired a *CGT asset - costs of advertising or marketing to find a seller; or


    (b) if a *CGT event happened - costs of advertising or marketing to find a buyer.


    110-35(6)    
    The fifth is costs relating to the making of any valuation or apportionment for the purposes of this Part or Part 3-3.

    110-35(7)    


    The sixth is search fees relating to a *CGT asset.

    110-35(8)    


    The seventh is the cost of a conveyancing kit (or a similar cost).

    110-35(9)    


    The eighth is borrowing expenses (such as loan application fees and mortgage discharge fees).

    110-35(10)    


    The ninth is expenditure that:


    (a) is incurred by the *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group to an entity that is not a *member of the group; and


    (b) reasonably relates to a *CGT asset *held by the head company; and


    (c) is incurred because of a transaction that is between members of the group.

    Example:

    Land is transferred by one company to another company. The companies are members of a consolidated group. Stamp duty is payable as a result of the transaction.

    The transaction has no taxation consequences because of its intra-group nature.

    The stamp duty is included in the cost base and reduced cost base of the land.

    Note:

    Intra-group assets are not held by the head company because of the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule). An example of an intra-group asset is a debt owed by a member of the consolidated group to another member of the group.


    110-35(11)    


    The tenth is termination or other similar fees incurred as a direct result of your ownership of a *CGT asset ending.

    SECTION 110-36   Indexation  

    110-36(1)    
    The cost base of a *CGT asset *acquired at or before 11.45 am (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 21 September 1999 also includes indexation of the elements of the cost base (except the third element) if the requirements of Division 114 are met.

    110-36(2)    
    However, for the purposes of working out the *capital gain of an entity mentioned in an item of the table from a *CGT event happening after 11.45 am (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 21 September 1999, the cost base includes indexation only if the entity mentioned in the item chooses that the cost base includes indexation.


    Choice of indexation
    Item For the purposes of working out the capital gain of this entity: The cost base includes indexation only if this entity chooses so:
    1 An individual The individual
    2 A *complying superannuation entity The trustee of the complying superannuation entity
    3 A trust The trustee of the trust
    4 A listed investment company The company

    Note 1:

    Section 103-25 specifies when you must make the choice and provides that the way you prepare your income tax return is evidence of your choice.

    Note 2:

    For each CGT asset whose cost base you need to work out, you may either choose to index the expenditure included in the asset ' s cost base or not make that choice. If you do not choose to index the expenditure, your net capital gain includes only part of your capital gain on the CGT asset as worked out on the basis of the cost base not including indexation and reduced by your capital losses.


    110-36(3)    


    Also, for the purpose of working out the *capital gain of a *life insurance company from a *CGT event happening after 30 June 2000 in respect of a *CGT asset that is a *complying superannuation asset, the cost base includes indexation only if the life insurance company chooses that the cost base includes indexation.
    Note:

    Section 110-25 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides that, in working out the capital gain from a CGT event after 11.45 am on 21 September 1999 and before 1 July 2000 in respect of an asset of a life insurance company or registered organisation, the cost base includes indexation only if the company or organisation chooses it.


    What does not form part of the cost base

    SECTION 110-37   Expenditure forming part of cost base or element  

    110-37(1)    
    If a later provision of this Subdivision says that:


    (a) certain expenditure does not form part of the *cost base of a *CGT asset; or


    (b) the cost base is reduced by certain expenditure;

    the expenditure is initially included in the cost base, which is then reduced by the amount of the expenditure just before a *CGT event happens in relation to the asset.

    Note:

    This has the effect of recognising in the cost base any indexed component relating to the expenditure.


    110-37(2)    
    On the other hand, if such a provision says that:


    (a) certain expenditure does not form part of one or more elements of the *cost base of a *CGT asset; or


    (b) one or more elements of the cost base are reduced by certain expenditure;

    the expenditure is never included in the relevant elements of the cost base.

    Note:

    This has the effect of not recognising to any extent this expenditure in the cost base.


    SECTION 110-38   Exclusions  

    110-38(1)    
    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-54 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).

    Note:

    Section 26-54 prevents deductions for expenditure related to certain offences.


    110-38(2)    


    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that it is a *bribe to a foreign public official or a *bribe to a public official.

    110-38(3)    


    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that it is in respect of providing *entertainment.

    110-38(4)    


    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-5 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).
    Note:

    Section 26-5 denies deductions for penalties.


    110-38(4A)    


    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-31 prevents it being deducted.
    Note:

    Section 26-31 denies deductions for travel related to the use of residential premises as residential accommodation.


    110-38(5)    


    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-47 prevents it being deducted.
    Note:

    Section 26-47 denies deductions for the excess of boat expenditure over boat income.


    110-38(6)    


    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-22 prevents it being deducted.
    Note:

    Section 26-22 denies deductions for political contributions and gifts.


    110-38(7)    


    Expenditure does not form any part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-97 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).
    Note:

    Section 26-97 denies deductions for National Disability Insurance Scheme expenditure.


    110-38(8)    


    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-100 prevents it being deducted.
    Note:

    Section 26-100 denies deductions for certain expenditure on water infrastructure improvements.


    110-38(9)    


    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that a provision of Division 832 (about hybrid mismatch rules) prevents it being deducted.

    SECTION 110-40   Assets acquired before 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997  

    110-40(1)    


    This section prevents some expenditure from forming part of one or more elements of the *cost base of a *CGT asset *acquired at or before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997. (The expenditure mentioned in this section can include giving property: see section 103-5 .)
    Note:

    For the cost base of a partnership interest you acquire at or before that time, see section 110-43 .


    110-40(2)    
    Expenditure does not form part of the second or third element of the cost base to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

    110-40(3)    
    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent of any amount you have received as *recoupment of it, except so far as the amount is included in your assessable income.

    110-40(4)    


    Subsection (2) does not apply in relation to amounts that you have deducted or can deduct under Division 243 .

    SECTION 110-43   Partnership interests acquired before 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997  

    110-43(1)    


    This section prevents some expenditure from forming part of one or more elements of the *cost base of your interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership if you *acquired the interest at or before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997. (The expenditure mentioned in this section can include giving property: see section 103-5 .)

    110-43(2)    
    Expenditure does not form part of the second or third element of the cost base to the extent that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have deducted or can deduct it.

    110-43(3)    
    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent of any amount that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have received as *recoupment of the expenditure, except so far as the amount is included in your assessable income or the partnership's assessable income.

    110-43(4)    


    Subsection (2) does not apply in relation to amounts that you have deducted or can deduct under Division 243 .

    SECTION 110-45   Assets acquired after 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997  

    110-45(1)    


    This section prevents some expenditure from forming part of the *cost base, or of an element of the cost base, of a *CGT asset *acquired after 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997. (The expenditure mentioned in this section can include giving property: see section 103-5 .)

    For the cost base of interests in partnership assets acquired after that time, see section 110-50 .

    For exceptions to the application of this section, see section 110-53 .


    110-45(1A)    


    This section also applies to expenditure incurred after 30 June 1999 on land or a building if:


    (a) the land or building was *acquired at or before the time mentioned in subsection (1); and


    (b) the expenditure forms part of the fourth element of the *cost base of the land or building.



    Deductible expenditure excluded from second and third elements

    110-45(1B)    
    Expenditure does not form part of the second or third element of the cost base to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.



    Other deductible expenditure

    110-45(2)    


    Expenditure (except expenditure excluded by subsection (1B)) does not form part of the cost base to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it for an income year, except so far as:


    (a) the deduction has been reversed by an amount being included in your assessable income for an income year by a provision of this Act (outside this Part and Part 3-3 and Division 243 ); or

    Note:

    Division 20 contains some of the provisions that reverse deductions. Section 20-5 lists some others.


    (ab) the deduction is under Division 243 ; or


    (b) the deduction would have been so reversed apart from a provision listedin the table (relief from including a balancing charge in your assessable income).


    Provisions for relief from including a balancing charge in your assessable income
    Item Provision Subject matter
    1 section 40-340 Roll-over relief for *depreciating asset
    .
    2 section 40-365 Involuntary disposal of *depreciating asset
    .
    3 (Repealed by No 93 of 2011)



    Recouped expenditure

    110-45(3)    


    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent of any amount you have received as *recoupment of it, except so far as the amount is included in your assessable income.

    110-45(3A)    
    (Repealed by No 95 of 2004)



    Capital expenditure by previous owner that you can deduct after acquisition

    110-45(4)    
    The cost base is reduced to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct for an income year capital expenditure incurred by another entity in respect of the *CGT asset. (This rule does not apply so far as the deduction is covered by paragraph (2)(a) or (b).)

    Example:

    Under Division 43 you can deduct expenditure incurred by a previous owner of capital works you own.



    Landcare and water facility expenditure giving rise to a tax offset

    110-45(5)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the cost base to the extent that you choose a *tax offset for it under the former section 388-55 (about the landcare and water facility tax offset) instead of deducting it.

    Heritage conservation expenditure giving rise to a tax offset

    110-45(6)    
    Expenditure does not form part of the cost base to the extent that:


    (a) it is eligible heritage conservation expenditure (as determined under former section 159UO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ); and


    (b) you could have deducted it for an income year under any of these Divisions (about capital works):


    (i) Division 43 of this Act;

    (ii) former Division 10C or 10D of Part III of that Act;
    but for the exclusions in paragraph 43-70(2)(h) of this Act and former subsections 124ZB(4) and 124ZG(5) of that Act.
    Note:

    Because eligible heritage conservation expenditure is the subject of a tax offset, it is also not deductible.


    SECTION 110-50   Partnership interests acquired after 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997  

    110-50(1)    


    This section prevents some expenditure from forming part of the *cost base, or of an element of the cost base, of your interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership if you *acquired the interest after 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997. (The expenditure mentioned in this section can include giving property: see section 103-5 .)

    For exceptions to the application of this section, see section 110-53 .


    110-50(1A)    


    This section also applies to expenditure incurred after 30 June 1999 on land or a building if:


    (a) the land or building was *acquired at or before the time mentioned in subsection (1); and


    (b) the expenditure forms part of the fourth element of the *cost base of the land or building.



    Deductible expenditure excluded from second and third elements

    110-50(1B)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the second or third element of the cost base to the extent that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have deducted or can deduct it.

    Other deductible expenditure

    110-50(2)    


    Expenditure (except expenditure excluded by subsection (1B) does not form part of the cost base to the extent that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have deducted or can deduct it for an income year, except so far as:


    (a) the deduction has been reversed by an amount being included in your assessable income for an income year, or in the assessable income of a partnership in which you are or were a partner, by a provision of this Act (outside this Part and Part 3-3 and Division 243 ); or

    Note:

    Division 20 contains some of the provisions that reverse deductions. Section 20-5 lists some others.


    (ab) the deduction is under Division 243 ; or


    (b) the deduction would have been so reversed apart from a provision listed in the table in subsection 110-45(2) (relief from including a balancing charge in your assessable income).



    Recouped expenditure

    110-50(3)    


    Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent of any amount that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have received as *recoupment of it, except so far as the amount is included in your assessable income or the partnership's assessable income.

    110-50(3A)    


    (Repealed by No 95 of 2004)

    Capital expenditure by previous owner of the asset

    110-50(4)    
    The cost base is reduced to the extent that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have deducted or can deduct for an income year capital expenditure incurred by another entity in respect of the *CGT asset. (This rule does not apply so far as the deduction is covered by paragraph (2)(a) or (b).)

    Example:

    Under Division 43 an entity can deduct expenditure incurred by a previous owner of capital works that the entity owns.



    Landcare and water facility expenditure giving rise to a tax offset

    110-50(5)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the cost base to the extent that you choose a *tax offset for it under the former section 388-55 (about the landcare and water facility tax offset) instead of deducting it.

    Heritage conservation expenditure giving rise to a tax offset

    110-50(6)    
    Expenditure does not form part of the cost base to the extent that:


    (a) it is eligible heritage conservation expenditure (as determined under former section 159UO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ); and


    (b) you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, could have deducted it for an income year under any of these Divisions (about capital works):


    (i) Division 43 of this Act;

    (ii) former Division 10C or 10D of Part III of that Act;
    but for the exclusions in paragraph 43-70(2)(h) of this Act and former subsections 124ZB(4) and 124ZG(5) of that Act.
    Note:

    Because eligible heritage conservation expenditure is the subject of a tax offset, it is also not deductible.


    SECTION 110-53   Exceptions to application of sections 110-45 and 110-50  

    110-53(1)    


    Subsection 110-45(2), (4), (5) or (6) or 110-50(2), (4), (5) or (6) does not prevent expenditure from forming part of the cost base to the extent that the deduction mentioned in that subsection could reasonably be regarded as arising before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997, or as relating to a period before that time.

    110-53(2)    
    Subsections 110-45(5) and (6) and 110-50(5) and (6) do not apply to expenditure incurred before the day on which the Bill that became the Taxation Laws Amendment Act (No. 1) 1999 was introduced into the House of Representatives.

    110-53(3)    


    (Repealed by No 114 of 2000)

    SECTION 110-54  

    110-54   Debt deductions disallowed by thin capitalisation rules  


    Expenditure does not form part of the third element of the cost base to the extent that Division 820 (Thin capitalisation rules) prevented or prevents you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, from deducting it.

    Subdivision 110-B - Reduced cost base  

    SECTION 110-55   General rules about reduced cost base  

    110-55(1)    
    The reduced cost base of a *CGT asset consists of 5 elements. It does not include indexation of those elements.

    Note:

    The reduced cost base is reduced by net input tax credits: see section 103-30 .



    5 elements of the reduced cost base

    110-55(2)    
    All of the elements (except the third one) of the reduced cost base of a *CGT asset are thesame as those for the *cost base.

    110-55(3)    
    The third element is:


    (a) any amounts worked out under whichever of the following subparagraphs applies:


    (i) if Division 58 does not apply to the asset - any amount included in your assessable income for any income year because of a balancing adjustment for the asset;

    (ii) if Division 58 applies to the asset and an amount has been included in your assessable income for an income year because of a balancing adjustment for the asset - any part of that amount that was attributable to amounts you have deducted or can deduct for the decline in value of the asset; and


    (b) any amount that would have been so included apart from any of these (which provide relief from including a balancing charge in your assessable income):


    (i) section 40-365 ; or

    (ii) any of these former sections - section 42-285 , 42-290 or 42-293 ; or

    (iii) former subsection 59(2A) or (2D) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    What does not form part of the reduced cost base

    110-55(4)    
    The reduced cost base does not include an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it (including because of a balancing adjustment) or could have deducted apart from paragraph 43-70(2)(h) .

    Note:

    That paragraph excludes from deductibility under Division 43 expenditure that qualifies for the heritage conservation rebate.


    110-55(5)    


    The reduced cost base does not include an amount that you could have deducted for a *CGT asset had you used it wholly for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

    110-55(6)    
    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent of any amounts you have received as *recoupment of it. However, this rule does not apply to the extent that the amounts are included in your assessable income.

    110-55(6A)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that you chose a *tax offset for it under the former section 388-55 (about the landcare and water facility tax offset) instead of deducting it.

    110-55(7)    
    If your *CGT asset is a *share in a company, its reduced cost base is reduced by the amount calculated under subsection (8) if:


    (aa) you are a *corporate tax entity; and


    (a) the company makes a distribution to you under an *arrangement; and


    (b) an amount (the attributable amount ) representing the distribution or part of it is reasonably attributable to profits *derived by the company before you *acquired the share; and


    (c) you are entitled to a *tax offset under Division 207 on the part of the distribution that is a *dividend (the dividend amount ); and


    (d) you were a *controller (for CGT purposes) of the company, or an *associate of such a controller, when the arrangement was made or carried out.


    110-55(8)    


    The amount of the reduction is:


    Attributable amount ×         Amount of *tax offset        
    Dividend amount × *Corporate tax rate


    110-55(9)    


    The reduced cost base is to be reduced by any amount that you have deducted or can deduct, or could have deducted except for Subdivision 170-D , as a result of a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset. However, do not make a reduction for an amount that relates to a cost that could never have formed part of the reduced cost base or is excluded from the reduced cost base as a result of another provision of this section.

    110-55(9A)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-54 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).
    Note:

    Section 26-54 prevents deductions for expenditure related to certain offences.


    110-55(9B)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that it is a *bribe to a foreign public official or a *bribe to a public official.

    110-55(9C)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that it is in respect of providing *entertainment.

    110-55(9D)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-5 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).
    Note:

    Section 26-5 denies deductions for penalties.


    110-55(9E)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-47 prevents it being deducted.
    Note:

    Section 26-47 denies deductions for the excess of boat expenditure over boat income.


    110-55(9F)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-22 prevents it being deducted.
    Note:

    Section 26-22 denies deductions for political contributions and gifts.


    110-55(9G)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-100 prevents it being deducted.
    Note:

    Section 26-100 denies deductions for certain expenditure on water infrastructure improvements.


    110-55(9H)    


    Expenditure does not form any part of any element of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-97 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).
    Note:

    Section 26-97 denies deductions for National Disability Insurance Scheme expenditure.


    110-55(9J)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-31 prevents it being deducted.
    Note:

    Section 26-31 denies deductions for travel related to the use of residential premises as residential accommodation.


    110-55(9K)    


    Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that a provision of Division 832 (about hybrid mismatch rules) prevents it being deducted.

    Assume a CGT event for purposes of working out reduced cost base at a particular time

    110-55(10)    


    If:


    (a) it is necessary to work out the *reduced cost base at a particular time; and


    (b) a *CGT event does not happen in relation to the asset at or just after that time;

    assume, for the purpose only of working out the reduced cost base at the particular time, that such an event does happen in relation to the asset at or just after that time.


    SECTION 110-60   Reduced cost base for partnership assets  

    110-60(1)    
    The third element of an entity ' s reduced cost base for its interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership is the entity ' s share of:


    (a) any amounts worked out under whichever of the following subparagraphs applies:


    (i) if Division 58 does not apply to the asset - any amount included in the assessable income of the partnership for any income year because of a balancing adjustment for the asset;

    (ii) if Division 58 applies to the asset and an amount has been included in the assessable income of the partnership for an income year because of a balancing adjustment for the asset - any part of that amount that was attributable to amounts that the partnership has deducted or can deduct for depreciation of the asset; and


    (b) any amount that would have been so included apart from any of these (which provide relief from including a balancing charge in your assessable income):


    (i) section 40-365 ; or

    (ii) any of these former sections - section 42-285 , 42-290 or 42-293 ; or

    (iii) former subsection 59(2A) or (2D) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;

    calculated according to the entity ' s share in the partnership net income or net loss.


    110-60(2)    
    Expenditure does not form part of an entity ' s reduced cost base for its interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership to the extent that a partnership in which the entity is or was a partner has deducted or can deduct it (including because of a balancing adjustment), or could have deducted it apart from paragraph 43-70(2)(h) .

    110-60(3)    


    Expenditure does not form part of an entity ' s reduced cost base for its interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership to the extent that a partnership in which the entity is or was a partner could have deducted an amount for the asset if it had used it wholly for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

    110-60(4)    
    Expenditure does not form part of an entity ' s reduced cost base for its interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership to the extent of any amounts that a partnership in which the entity is or was a partner has received as *recoupment of it and that are not included in the assessable income of the partnership.

    110-60(4A)    


    Expenditure does not form part of an entity ' s reduced cost base for its interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership to the extent that the entity chose a *tax offset for the expenditure under the former section 388-55 (about the landcare and water facility tax offset) instead of deducting it.

    110-60(5)    
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

    110-60(6)    
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

    110-60(7)    


    The reduced cost base of an entity ' s interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership is to be reduced by the entity ' s share of any amount that the partnership has deducted or can deduct, or could have deducted except for Subdivision 170-D , as a result of a *CGT event that happens in relation to the asset. However, a reduction is not to be made for an amount that relates to a cost that could never have formed part of the reduced cost base or is excluded from the reduced cost base as a result of another provision of this section.

    Division 112 - Modifications to cost base and reduced cost base  

    Guide to Division 112  

    SECTION 112-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division tells you the situations that may modify the general rules about the cost base and reduced cost base of a CGT asset.

    SECTION 112-5   Discussion of modifications  

    112-5(1)    
    Modifications can occur from the time you acquired the CGT asset to when a CGT event happens in relation to it.

    Note:

    You should keep records of the modifications: see Division 121 .


    112-5(2)    
    Most modifications replace the first element (what you paid for a CGT asset) of the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset.

    112-5(3)    
    Subdivision 112-A contains operative provisions setting out the general situations that may result in a modification to the general rules.

    112-5(4)    
    Subdivision 112-B (which is a guide) has a number of tables (each one covering a specialist topic) that tell you each situation that may result in a modification to the general rules.

    112-5(5)    
    Subdivision 112-C (which is a guide) explains what a replacement-asset roll-over is and how it can modify the cost base or reduced cost base.

    112-5(6)    
    Subdivision 112-D (which is a guide) explains what a same-asset roll-over is and how it can modify the cost base or reduced cost base.

    112-5(7)    


    Section 230-505 provides special rules for working out the amount of consideration for an asset if the asset is a *Division 230 financial arrangement or a Division 230 financial arrangement is involved in that consideration.

    Subdivision 112-A - General modifications  

    SECTION 112-15  

    112-15   General rule for replacement modifications  
    If a cost base modification replaces an element of the *cost base of a *CGT asset with an amount, this Part and Part 3-3 apply to you as if you had paid that amount.

    Example:

    An individual pays $10,000 to acquire an option. The individual dies and the option devolves to his legal personal representative, who exercises the option.

    Section 134-1 applies to the legal personal representative as if the representative had paid $10,000 for the option.

    SECTION 112-20   Market value substitution rule  

    112-20(1)    


    The first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base of a *CGT asset you *acquire from another entity is its *market value (at the time of acquisition) if:


    (a) you did not incur expenditure to acquire it, except where your acquisition of the asset resulted from:


    (i) *CGT event D1 happening; or

    (ii) another entity doing something that did not constitute a CGT event happening; or


    (b) some or all of the expenditure you incurred to acquire it cannot be valued; or


    (c) you did not deal at *arm ' s length with the other entity in connection with the acquisition.

    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    112-20(2)    


    Despite paragraph (1)(c), if:


    (a) you did not deal at *arm ' s length with the other entity; and


    (b) your *acquisition of the *CGT asset resulted from another entity doing something that did not constitute a CGT event happening;

    the *market value is substituted only if what you paid to acquire the CGT asset was more than its market value (at the time of acquisition).

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    112-20(3)    


    There are some situations in which the rule in subsection (1) does not apply. They include the situations set out in this table:


    Exceptions to the market value substitution rule
    Item You *acquired this CGT asset: ...in this situation:
    1 A right to receive *ordinary income or *statutory income from a trust (except a unit trust or a trust that arises because of someone ' s death) (a) you did not pay or give anything for the right; and
          (b) you did not acquire the right by way of an assignment from another entity
    2 A decoration awarded for valour or brave conduct you did not pay or give anything for it
    3 A contractual or other legal or equitable right resulting from *CGT event D1 happening you did not pay or give anything for it
    4 Rights to *acquire: you did not pay or give anything for the rights
      (a) *shares, or options to acquire *shares, in a company; or    
      (b) units, or options to acquire units, in a unit trust;    
      in a situation covered by Subdivision 130-B    
    5 A *share in a company or a right to *acquire a share or *debenture in a company it was issued or allotted to you by the company and you did not pay or give anything for it
    6 A unit in a unit trust or a right to *acquire a unit or debenture in a unit trust it was issued to you by the trustee of the unit trust and you did not pay or give anything for it
    7 A right to *dispose of a *share in a company it was issued to you by the company and was exercised by you or by another entity who became the owner of the right

    Note 1:

    Disregard subsections (2) and (3) for shares or units that you acquired before 16 August 1989: see section 112-20 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Note 2:

    This section does not apply to ESS interests acquired under employee share schemes: see subsection 130-80(4) .


    SECTION 112-25   Split, changed or merged assets  
    Split or changed assets

    112-25(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if:


    (a) a *CGT asset (the original asset ) is split into 2 or more assets (the new assets ); or


    (b) a *CGT asset (also the original asset ) changes in whole or in part into an asset (also the new asset ) of a different nature;

    and you are the beneficial owner of the original asset and each new asset.

    Example:

    You subdivide a block of land into 3 separate blocks. Each of those blocks is a new asset .


    112-25(2)    
    The splitting or change is not a *CGT event.

    112-25(3)    
    You work out the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each new asset as follows: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Work out each element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the original asset at the time of the event referred to in subsection (1).


    Step 2.

    Apportion in a reasonable way each element to each new asset. The result is each corresponding element of the new asset's *cost base and *reduced cost base.



    Merged assets

    112-25(4)    
    If 2 or more *CGT assets (the original assets ) are merged into a single asset (the new asset ) and you are the beneficial owner of the original assets and the new asset:


    (a) the merger is not a *CGT event; and


    (b) each element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the new asset (at the time of the merging) is the sum of the corresponding elements of each original asset.

    SECTION 112-30   Apportionment rules  
    Apportionment on acquisition of an asset

    112-30(1)    
    If you *acquire a *CGT asset because of a transaction and only part of the expenditure you incurred under the transaction relates to the acquisition of the asset, the first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset is that part of the expenditure that is reasonably attributable to the acquisition of the asset.

    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .



    Apportionment of expenditure in other elements

    112-30(1A)    
    If you incur expenditure and only part of it relates to another element of the *cost base or *reduced cost base of a *CGT asset, that element includes that part of the expenditure that is reasonably attributable to that element.

    Apportionment for CGT asset that was part of another asset

    112-30(2)    
    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of a *CGT asset is apportioned if a *CGT event happens to some part of the asset, but not to the remainder of it.

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    112-30(3)    
    The *cost base for the *CGT asset representing the part to which the *CGT event happened is worked out using the formula:


    Cost base of the asset ×   Capital proceeds for the CGT event
            happening to the part        
      Those capital proceeds plus the market
      value of the remainder of the asset

    The *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.


    112-30(4)    
    The remainder of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset is attributed to the part that remains.

    Example:

    You acquire a truck for $24,000 and sell its motor for $9,000. Suppose the market value of the remainder of the truck is $16,000.

    Under subsection (3), the cost base of the motor is:


    $24,000 ×       $9,000      
    $9,000 + $16,000
    = $8,640

    Under subsection (4), the cost base of the remainder of the truck is:


    $24,000   −   $8,640   =   $15,360


    112-30(5)    
    However, an amount forming part of the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the asset is not apportioned if, on the facts, that amount is wholly attributable to the part to which the *CGT event happened or to the remaining part.

    SECTION 112-35  

    112-35   Assumption of liability rule  
    If you *acquire a *CGT asset from another entity that is subject to a liability, the first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset includes the amount of the liability you assume.

    Example:

    You acquire a block of land for $150,000. You pay $50,000 and assume a liability for an outstanding mortgage of $100,000. The first element of your cost base and reduced cost base is $150,000.

    Note:

    The first element of cost base is dealt with in subsection 110-25(2) . The first element of reduced cost base is the same: see subsection 110-55(2) .

    SECTION 112-36   Acquisitions of assets involving look-through earnout rights  


    Consequences for cost base and reduced cost base

    112-36(1)    
    If you *acquire a *CGT asset because an entity *disposes of the CGT asset to you, and that disposal causes *CGT event A1 (the first CGT event ) to happen:


    (a) neither the *cost base nor the *reduced cost base of the CGT asset includes the value of any *look-through earnout right relating to the CGT asset and the acquisition; and


    (b) include in the first element of the CGT asset ' s cost base and reduced cost base any *financial benefit that you provide under such a look-through earnout right; and


    (c) reduce the first element of the CGT asset ' s cost base and reduced cost base by an amount equal to the amount of any financial benefit that you receive under such a look-through earnout right.

    Remaking choices affected by the look-through earnout right

    112-36(2)    
    Despite section 103-25 , you may remake any choice you made under this Part or Part 3-3 for a later *CGT event involving the *CGT asset if:


    (a) after the later CGT event, you provide or receive a *financial benefit under such a *look-through earnout right; and


    (b) you remake the choice at or before the time you are required to lodge your *income tax return for the income year in which the financial benefitis provided or received.

    Amending assessments affected by the look-through earnout right

    112-36(3)    
    The Commissioner may amend an assessment of a *tax-related liability if:


    (a) an entity provides or receives a *financial benefit under such a *look-through earnout right; and


    (b) the amount of the tax-related liability:


    (i) depends on that entity ' s taxable income for an income year in which a *CGT event, involving the *CGT asset, happens after the first CGT event but before the financial benefit is provided or received; or

    (ii) is otherwise affected by that right ' s character as a look-through earnout right; and


    (c) the Commissioner makes the amendment before the end of the 4-year period starting at the end of the income year in which the last possible financial benefit becomes or could become due under the look-through earnout right.

    The tax-related liability need not be a liability of that entity.

    Note:

    Subparagraph (b)(ii) covers changes to the amount of that tax-related liability that happen directly or indirectly because of subsection (1) or (2).


    112-36(4)    
    If at a particular time a right is taken never to have been a *look-through earnout right because of subsection 118-565(2) , the Commissioner may amend an assessment of a *tax-related liability for up to 4 years after that time if:


    (a) an entity provides or receives a *financial benefit under the right; and


    (b) the amount of the tax-related liability:


    (i) depends on that entity ' s taxable income for an income year in which a *CGT event, involving the *CGT asset, happens after the first CGT event but before the financial benefit is provided or received; or

    (ii) was otherwise affected by that right ' s character as a look-through earnout right before subsection 118-565(2) applied.

    The tax-related liability need not be a liability of that entity.

    Note:

    Subsection 118-565(2) restricts look-through earnout rights to rights to financial benefits over a period not exceeding 5 years from the end of the income year in which the first CGT event happens.


    112-36(5)    
    If, after providing or receiving a *financial benefit under a right referred to in subsection (3) or (4):


    (a) you are dissatisfied with an assessment referred to in that subsection; and


    (b) the Commissioner notifies you that the Commissioner has decided under that subsection not to amend your assessment;

    you may object against the assessment, to the extent that it does not take account of that right ' s character (as a *look-through earnout right or not such a right), in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    SECTION 112-37  

    112-37   Put options  


    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a right to *dispose of a *share in a company that you *acquire as a result of *CGT event D2 happening to the company is the sum of:


    (a) the amount that is included in your assessable income as ordinary income as a result of your acquisition of the right; and


    (b) the amount (if any) that you paid to acquire the right.

    112-38   (Repealed) SECTION 112-38 Geothermal extraction rights  
    (Repealed by No 96 of 2014)

    Subdivision 112-B - Finding tables for special rules  

    SECTION 112-40   Effect of this Subdivision  

    112-40(1)    
    This Subdivision is a *Guide.

    Note:

    In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may be considered only for limited purposes: see section 950-150 .


    112-40(2)    
    It sets out which element of the cost base or reduced cost base of a CGT asset is affected by various situations.


    SECTION 112-45   CGT events  



    CGT events
    Event number In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    D4 A conservation covenant is entered into over land The total cost base and reduced cost base 104-47
    .
    E1 A trust is created over a CGT asset First element of cost base and reduced cost base 104-55
    .
    E2 A CGT asset is transferred to a trust First element of cost base and reduced cost base 104-60
    .
    E4 A trustee makes a capital payment to you in relation to units or an interest in the trust The total cost base and reduced cost base 104-70
    .
    F4 A lessee receives payment for changing lease The total cost base 104-125
    .
    G1 A company makes a capital payment to you in relation to your shares The total cost base and reduced cost base 104-135
    .
    G2 (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)    
    .
    G3 A liquidator or administrator declares shares or financial instruments to be worthless The total cost base and reduced cost base 104-145
    .
    J4 Trust fails to cease to exist after a roll-over under Subdivision 124-N First element of cost base and reduced cost base 104-195
    .
    K1 (Repealed by No 77 of 2001)    
    .
    K8 Direct value shifts affecting your equity or loan interests in a company or trust The total cost base and reduced cost base Subdivision 725-D

    SECTION 112-46   Annual cost base adjustment for member ' s unit or interest in AMIT  



    Annual cost base adjustment for member ' s unit or interest in AMIT
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 Annual cost base adjustment for member ' s unit or interest in AMIT The total cost base and reduced cost base 104-107B

    SECTION 112-48   Gifts acquired by associates  



    Gifts acquired by associates
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 A gift of property is covered by subsection 118-60(1) or (2) and the property is later *acquired by an associate for less than market value First element of cost base and reduced cost base 118-60

    SECTION 112-50   Main residence  


    Main residence
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 A dwelling that is your main residence begins to be used for the first time for the purpose of producing assessable income The total cost base and reduced cost base 118-192

    SECTION 112-53   Scrip for scrip roll-over  



    Scrip for scrip roll-over
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 Interest is acquired by an entity where there is a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M and there is a significant or common stakeholder under an arrangement First element of cost base and reduced cost base 124-782
    .
    2 Equity or debt is acquired by a member of a wholly-owned group under that arrangement from another member of the group First element of cost base and reduced cost base 124-784
    .
    2A Interest is acquired by an entity where there is a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M and the arrangement is taken to be a restructure First element of cost base and reduced cost base 124-784B
    .
    3 You exchange an interest you acquired before 20 September 1985 for an interest in another entity The total cost base and reduced cost base 124-800

    SECTION 112-53AA   Statutory licences  



    New statutory licence
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 New statutory licences First element of cost base and reduced cost base 124-150, 124-155 and 124-160

    SECTION 112-53AB   Change of incorporation  



    Change of incorporation
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 Shares in company that has changed its incorporation or has ownership not significantly different from that of a former body incorporated under another law First element of cost base and reduced cost base 124-530

    SECTION 112-53A   MDO roll-over  



    MDO roll-over
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 Exchange of an interest in an MDO for an interest in another MDO First element of cost base and reduced cost base 124-985

    SECTION 112-53B   Exchange of stapled ownership interests for units in a unit trust  



    Exchange of stapled ownership interests for units in a unit trust
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 Exchange of stapled ownership interests First element of cost base and reduced cost base 124-1055 and 124-1060

    SECTION 112-53C   Water entitlement roll-overs  



    Roll-over for water entitlements
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 You replace one or more water entitlements with one or more new water entitlements First element of cost base and reduced cost base 124-1120 and 124-1130
    2 You have a reduction in one or more water entitlements that you own First element of cost base and reduced cost base 124-1145 and 124-1150
    3 A CGT event happens to an asset you own as a result of the replacement of water entitlements First element of cost base and reduced cost base 124-1165

    SECTION 112-54   Demergers  



    Demergers
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 There is a roll-over under Subdivision 125-B after a demerger First element of cost base and reduced cost base of new interests and remaining original interests 125-80
    2 There is a CGT event under a demerger but no roll-over under Subdivision 125-B First element of cost base and reduced cost base of new interests and remaining original interests 125-85
    3 There is a cost base adjustment under Subdivision 125-B but no CGT event under a demerger First element of cost base and reduced cost base of new interests and remaining original interests 125-90

    SECTION 112-54A   Transfer of assets between certain trusts  



    Transfer of assets between certain trusts
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See sections:
    1 There is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-G relating to the transfer of a CGT asset between certain trusts First element of cost base and reduced cost base of the CGT asset 126-240
    2 There is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-G relating to the transfer of a CGT asset between certain trusts Cost base and reduced cost base of membership interests in each trust 126-245 and 126-250

    SECTION 112-55   Effect of you dying  



    Effect of an individual dying
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 CGT asset devolves to the legal personal representative First element of cost base and reduced cost base 128-15
    .
    2 CGT asset passes to a beneficiary First element of cost base and reduced cost base 128-15
    .
    3 CGT asset passes to a trustee of a complying superannuation entity First element of cost base and reduced cost base 128-25
    .
    4 Surviving joint tenant acquires deceased joint tenant's interest in CGT asset First element of cost base and reduced cost base 128-50

    SECTION 112-60   Bonus shares or units  



    Bonus shares or units
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 A company issues you with bonus shares First element of cost base and reduced cost base 130-20
    .
    2 A unit trust issues you with bonus units First element of cost base and reduced cost base 130-20

    SECTION 112-65   Rights  


    Exercise of rights
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 You exercise rights to acquire shares, or options to acquire shares, in a company First element of cost base and reduced cost base 130-40
    .
    2 You exercise rights to acquire units, or options to acquire units, in a unit trust First element of cost base and reduced cost base 130-40

    SECTION 112-70   Convertible interests  



    Convertible interests
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 You acquire shares, or units in a unit trust, by converting a convertible interest First element of cost base and reduced cost base 130-60

    112-75   (Repealed) SECTION 112-75 Employee share schemes  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)

    SECTION 112-77   Exchangeable interests  



    Exchangeable interests
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 You acquire shares in a company in exchange for the disposal of an exchangeable interest, and the disposal of the exchangeable interest was to: First element of cost base and reduced cost base 130-105
      (a) the issuer of the exchangeable interest; or    
      (b) a connected entity of the issuer of the exchangeable interest    
    2 You acquire shares in a company in exchange for the redemption of an exchangeable interest First element of cost base and reduced cost base 130-105

    SECTION 112-78   Exploration investments  



    Exploration investments
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 An exploration investment in the form of a share is disposed of The total reduced cost base 130-110

    SECTION 112-80   Leases  


    Leases
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 A lessee incurs expenditure in obtaining the lessor's agreement to vary or waive a term of the lease Fourth element of cost base and reduced cost base 132-1
    .
    2 A lessor pays an amount to the lessee for improvements made by the lessee to the property Fourth element of cost base and reduced cost base 132-5
    .
    3 A lessor of a long-term lease incurs expenditure in obtaining the lessee's agreement to vary or waive a term of the lease or to forfeit or surrender the lease Fourth element of cost base and reduced cost base 132-10
    .
    4 A lessee of land acquires the reversionary interest of the lessor First element of cost base and reduced cost base 132-15

    SECTION 112-85   Options  


    Exercise of options
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 Grantee of option acquires the CGT asset the subject of the option First element of cost base and reduced cost base 134-1
    .
    2 Grantor of option acquires the CGT asset the subject of the option For the grantor - the first element of cost base and reduced cost base;
    For the grantee - the second element of cost base and reduced cost base
    134-1

    SECTION 112-87   Residency  



    Residency
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 An individual or company becomes an Australian resident (but not a temporary resident) First element of cost base and reduced cost base 855-45
    .
    1A A temporary resident ceases to be a temporary resident (but remains, at that time, an Australian resident) First element of cost base and reduced cost base 768-955
    .
    2 A trust becomes a resident trust for CGT purposes First element of cost base and reduced cost base 855-50

    SECTION 112-90   An asset stops being a pre-CGT asset  


    An asset stops being a pre-CGT asset
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 An asset of a non-public entity stops being a pre-CGT asset The total cost base and reduced cost base 149-35
    .
    2 An asset of a public entity stops being a pre-CGT asset The total cost base and reduced cost base 149-75

    SECTION 112-92   Demutualisation of certain entities  



    Demutualisation of certain entities
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 Just before the mutual entity known in New Zealand as Tower Corporation ceased to be a mutual entity, you had membership rights in that entity The total cost base and reduced cost base 118-550

    SECTION 112-95   Transfer of tax losses and net capital losses within wholly-owned groups of companies  



    Transfer of tax losses and net capital losses within wholly-owned groups of companies
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See section:
    1 An amount of a tax loss is transferred and a company has a direct or indirect equity interest in the loss company The total cost base and reduced cost base 170-210
    .
    2 An amount of a tax loss is transferred and a company has a direct or indirect debt interest in the loss company The reduced cost base 170-210
    .
    3 An amount of a tax loss is transferred and a company has a direct or indirect equity or debt interest in the income company The total cost base and reduced cost base 170-215
    .
    4 An amount of a net capital loss is transferred and a company has a direct or indirect equity interest in the loss company The total cost base and reduced cost base 170-220
    .
    5 An amount of a net capital loss is transferred and a company has a direct or indirect debt interest in the loss company The reduced cost base 170-220
    .
    6 An amount of a net capital loss is transferred and a company has a direct or indirect equity or debt interest in the gain company The total cost base and reduced cost base 170-225

    SECTION 112-97  

    112-97   Modifications outside this Part and Part 3-3  


    This table sets out other cost base modifications outside this Part and Part 3-3.

    Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are in bold .


    Modifications outside this Part and Part 3-3
    Item In this situation: Element affected: See:
    1A You receive, under a *farm-in farm-out arrangement, an *exploration benefit or an entitlement to an exploration benefit First element of cost base and reduced cost base Section 40-1120
    1 You stop holding an item as trading stock First element of cost base and reduced cost base Paragraph 70-110(1)(b)
    .
    2 CGT event happens to Cocos (Keeling) Islands asset First element of cost base and reduced cost base subsection 102-25(1) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997
    .
    2AA (Repealed by No 20 of 2016)    
    .
    2A Lender acquires a replacement security First element of cost base and reduced cost base subsection 26BC(6B)
    .
    3 CGT event happens by the borrower disposing of the borrowed security to a third party First element of cost base and reduced cost base paragraph 26BC(9)(a)
    .
    4 CGT event happens to replacement security and compensatory payment was incurred by the borrower Second element of cost base and reduced cost base subsection 26BC(9A)
    .
    5 CGT event happens to CGT asset in connection with the demutualisation of an insurance company except a friendly society health or life insurer First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 121AS
    .
    5A CGT event happens to CGT asset in connection with the demutualisation of a mutual entity other than an insurance company, health insurer and friendly society health or life insurer First element of cost base and reduced cost base Division 326 in Schedule 2H
    .
    6 CGT event happens to assets of NSW State Bank First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 121EN
    .
    7 Trust ceases to be a resident trust for CGT purposes and there is an attributable taxpayer The total cost base and reduced cost base section 102AAZBA
    .
    8 You own shares in a company that stops being a PDF First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 124ZR
    .
    9 (Repealed by No 23 of 2018)    
    .
    10 CGT event happens to CGT asset used in gold mining First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 112-100 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997
    .
    11 (Repealed by No 101 of 2006 )    
    .
    12 Shares in a holding company are cancelled The total cost base and reduced cost base section 159GZZZH
    .
    12A (Repealed by No 4 of 2018)    
    .
    12B Entity has interest in loss company immediately before alteration time The total reduced cost base sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB
    .
    13 CGT event happens to 30 June 1988 asset of a complying superannuation entity First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 295-85 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997
    .
    14 CGT event happens to CGT asset of a complying superannuation entity First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 295-100 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997
    .
    15 A CGT asset of a CFC is taken into account in calculating its attributable income First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 412
    .
    16 A CGT asset of a CFC is taken into account in calculating its attributable income First element of cost base and reduced cost base subsection 413(2)
    .
    17 A CGT asset of a CFC is taken into account in calculating its attributable income First element of cost base and reduced cost base subsection 413(3)
    .
    18 A CGT asset of a CFC is taken into account in calculating its attributable income First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 414
    .
    18A You cease to hold a registered emissions unit as the result of an outgoing international transfer of a Kyoto unit First element of cost base and reduced cost base Section 420-35
    .
    19 A commercial debt is forgiven The total cost base and reduced cost base of certain CGT assets of the debtor sections 245-175 to 245-190
    .
    20 A tax exempt entity becomes taxable First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 57-25 in Schedule 2D
    .
    20A An entity becomes or ceases to be a foreign hybrid The total cost base and reduced cost base Sections 830-80 and 830-85
    .
    21 A CGT asset is transferred to or from a life insurance company ' s complying superannuation asset pool First element of cost base and reduced cost base subsection 320-200(2)
    .
    22 A CGT asset is transferred to or from the segregated exempt assets of a life insurance company First element of cost base and reduced cost base subsection 320-255(2)
    .
    22A A CGT event happens in relation to forestry interest in a forestry managed investment scheme for a subsequent participant The total cost base and reduced cost base Subsection 394-30(9)
    .
    22B You start or cease to have a *Division 230 financial arrangement as consideration for the acquisition of a thing All elements of cost base and reduced cost base section 230-505
    .
    23 The arrangement period for the tax preferred use of an asset ends The total cost base and reduced cost base subsection 250-285(3)
    24 An entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group The total cost base and reduced cost base for the head company of the subsidiary ' s assets Section 701-10
    24A An entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group The total cost base and reduced cost base for the head company of membership interests in the subsidiary Section 701-15
    24B An entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group The total cost base and reduced cost base for the head company of liabilities owed by the subsidiary Section 701-20
    24C An entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group and an asset becomes an asset of the entity because the single entity rule ceases to apply The total cost base and reduced cost base for the entity of a liability owed to the entity Section 701-45
    24D 2 or more entities cease to be subsidiary members of a consolidated groupThe total cost base and reduced cost base of the membership interests that one subsidiary member holds in another Section 701-50
    24E Determining an asset ' s tax cost setting amount The total cost base and reduced cost base of the asset Section 701-55
    24F Eligible tier-1 company ceases to be a subsidiary member of a MEC group or a CGT event happens to a pooled interest in the company The total cost base and reduced cost base Section 719-565
    .
    24 (Repealed by No 41 of 2005)    
    .
    25 You make a forex realisation gain as a result of forex realisation event 4, and: total cost base and reduced cost base section 775-70
      (a) you incurred the obligation to pay foreign currency:    
        (i) in return for the acquisition of a CGT asset; or    
        (ii) as the second, third, fourth or fifth element of the cost base of a CGT asset; and    
      (b) the foreign currency became due for payment within 12 months after the time when:    
        (i) in the case of the acquisition of a CGT asset - you acquired the CGT asset; or    
        (ii) in the case of the second, third, fourth or fifth element of the cost base of a CGT asset - you incurred the relevant expenditure    
    .
    26 You make a forex realisation loss as a result of forex realisation event 4, and: total cost base and reduced cost base section 775-75
      (a) you incurred the obligation to pay foreign currency:    
        (i) in return for the acquisition of a CGT asset; or    
        (ii) as the second, third, fourth or fifth element of the cost base of a CGT asset; and    
      (b) the foreign currency became due for payment within 12 months after the time when:    
        (i) in the case of the acquisition of a CGT asset - you acquired the CGT asset; or    
        (ii) in the case of the second, third, fourth or fifth element of the cost base of a CGT asset - you incurred the relevant expenditure    
    .
    27 You acquire foreign currency as a result of forex realisation event 2 first element of cost base and reduced cost base section 775-125
    28 On 10 May 2005, a foreign resident holds certain membership interests first element of *cost base and *reduced cost base subsection 855-25(3)
    29 You are issued with an asset under a demutualisation of a health insurer except a friendly society health or life insurer First element of cost base and reduced cost base sections 315-80, 315-210 and 315-260
    30 You are transferred an asset by a lost policy holders trust under a demutualisation of a health insurer except a friendly society health or life insurer First element of cost base and reduced cost base sections 315-145, 315-210 and 315-260
    30A A CGT event occurs under a demutualisation of a friendly society health or life insurer and the capital proceeds from the event include money All elements of cost base section 316-60
    30B You are issued with an asset under a demutualisation of a friendly society health or life insurer First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 316-105
    30C A CGT event happens to an interest in a lost policy holders trust and the capital proceeds from the event include money All elements of cost base section 316-165
    30D You are transferred a share, or right to acquire shares, by a lost policy holders trust under a demutualisation of a friendly society health or life insurer The total cost base and reduced cost base section 316-170
    31 An entitlement arises under Division 2AA of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 in connection with an account holder ' s account with an ADI The total cost base, and reduced cost base, of the entitlement and of the remainder (if any) of the right to be paid by the ADI in connection with the account Section 253-15
    32 You acquire an *ESS interest and Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the interest First element of cost base and reduced cost base sections 83A-30 and 83A-125
    33 An entity chooses a roll-over under Subdivision 310-D and the entity chooses section 310-55 to apply to assets First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 310-55
    34 An entity chooses a roll-over under Subdivision 310-D, but the entity does not choose section 310-55 to apply to assets First element of cost base and reduced cost base section 310-60
    35 A CGT asset is held by a company that has ownership not significantly different from that of a former body that held the asset and was incorporated under another law First element of cost base and reduced cost base Section 620-25
    36 (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)    
    37 The issuing of a share gives rise to an entitlement to a tax offset under Subdivision 360-A First element of cost base and reduced cost base Sections 360-50, 360-55, 360-60 and 360-65

    Subdivision 112-C - Replacement-asset roll-overs  

    SECTION 112-100  

    112-100   Effect of this Subdivision  
    This Subdivision is a *Guide.

    Note:

    In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may be considered only for limited purposes: see section 950-150 .

    SECTION 112-105   What is a replacement-asset roll-over?  

    112-105(1)    
    A replacement-asset roll-over allows you to defer the making of a capital gain or a capital loss from one CGT event until a later CGT event happens.

    112-105(2)    
    It involves your ownership of one CGT asset (the original asset ) ending and you acquiring another one (the replacement asset ).

    112-105(3)    


    All replacement-asset roll-overs are set out in the table in section 112-115 .

    SECTION 112-110  

    112-110   How is the cost base of the replacement asset modified?  
    If you acquired the original asset on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of the replacement asset ' s cost base is replaced by the original asset ' s cost base at the time you acquired the replacement asset; and


    (b) the first element of the replacement asset ' s reduced cost base is replaced by the original asset ' s reduced cost base at the time you acquired the replacement asset.

    Note 1:

    Some replacement-asset roll-overs involve other rules that affect the cost base or reduced cost base of the replacement asset.

    Note 2:

    If you acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the replacement asset before that day: see Subdivision 124-A .

    Note 3:

    The reduced cost base may be further modified if the replacement asset roll-over happens after a demerger: see section 125-170 .

    SECTION 112-115  

    112-115   Table of replacement-asset roll-overs  


    This table sets out all the replacement-asset roll-overs and tells you where you can find more detail about each one.

    Provisions of this Act are in normal text. The other provisions, in bold , are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    Replacement-asset roll-overs
    Item For the rules about this roll-over: See:
    1 Disposal or creation of assets by individual or trustee to a wholly-owned company sections 122-40 to 122-65
    .
    2 Disposal or creation of assets by partners to a wholly-owned company sections 122-150 to 122-195
    .
    3 (Repealed by No 55 of 2007 )  
    .
    4 Asset compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed Subdivision 124-B
    .
    5 New statutory licences Subdivision 124-C
    .
    6 Strata title conversion Subdivision 124-D
    .
    7 Exchange of shares in the same company or units in the same unit trust Subdivision 124-E
    .
    8 Exchange of rights or options to acquire shares in a company or units in a unit trust Subdivision 124-F
    .
    9 (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)  
    .
    10 (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)  
    .
    11 Change of incorporation Subdivision 124-I
    .
    12 Crown leases Subdivision 124-J
    .
    13 Depreciating assets Subdivision 124-K
    .
    14 Prospecting and mining entitlements Subdivision 124-L
    .
    14A Scrip for scrip Subdivision 124-M
    .
    14B Exchange of interests in a trust as a result of a trust restructure Subdivision 124-N
    .
    14BA (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)  
    .
    14BB Exchange of an interest in an MDO for an interest in another MDO Subdivision 124-P
    .
    14BC Exchange of stapled ownership interests Subdivision 124-Q
    .
    14BD Water entitlements Subdivision 124-R
    .
    14C Demergers Division 125
    .
    14D Exchange of shares in one company for shares in an interposed company Division 615
    14E Exchange of units in a unit trust for shares in a company Division 615
    15 Disposal of a security under a securities lending arrangement section 26BC

    Subdivision 112-D - Same-asset roll-overs  

    SECTION 112-135  

    112-135   Effect of this Subdivision  
    This Subdivision is a *Guide.

    Note:

    In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may be considered only for limited purposes: see section 950-150 .

    SECTION 112-140  

    112-140   What is a same-asset roll-over?  


    A same-asset roll-over allows one entity (the transferor ) to disregard a capital gain or loss it makes from disposing of a CGT asset to, or creating a CGT asset in, another entity (the transferee ). Any gain or loss is deferred until another CGT event happens in relation to the asset (in the hands of the transferee).

    All same-asset roll-overs are set out in the table in section 112-150 .

    SECTION 112-145  

    112-145   How is the cost base of the asset modified?  
    If the transferor acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of the asset ' s cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is replaced by the asset ' s cost base at the time the transferee acquired it; and


    (b) the first element of the asset ' s reduced cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is replaced by the asset ' s reduced cost base at the time the transferee acquired it.

    Note 1:

    If the transferor acquired the asset before 20 September 1985, the transferee is taken to have acquired it before that day: see Subdivision 126-A .

    Note 2:

    The reduced cost base may be further modified if the same asset roll-over happens after a demerger: see section 125-170 .

    SECTION 112-150  

    112-150   Table of same-asset roll-overs  


    This table sets out all the same-asset roll-overs and tells you where you can find more detail about each one.


    Same-asset roll-overs
    Item For the rules about this roll-over: See:
    1 Transfer of a CGT asset from one spouse to the other because of a marriage or relationship breakdown Subdivision 126-A
    .
    2 Transfer of a CGT asset from a company or trust to a spouse because of a marriage or relationship breakdown Subdivision 126-A
    .
    3 Transfer of a CGT asset to a wholly-owned company sections 122-70 and 122-75
    .
    4 Transfer of a CGT asset of a partnership to a wholly-owned company sections 122-200 and 122-205
    .
    4A Transfer of a CGT asset of a trust to a company under a trust restructure Subdivision 124-N
    .
    5 Transfer of a CGT asset between certain related companies Subdivision 126-B
    .
    6 CGT event happens because a trust deed of a complying approved deposit fund, a complying superannuation fund or a fund that accepts worker entitlement contributions is changed Subdivision 126-C
    .
    7 Transfer of a CGT asset from a small superannuation fund to another complying superannuation fund because of a marriage or relationship breakdown Subdivision 126-D
    .
    7 (Repealed by No 58 of 2006)  
    .
    8 Beneficiary becomes absolutely entitled to a share following a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M Subdivision 126-E
    .
    9 (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)  
    .
    10 Transfer of a CGT asset between certain trusts Subdivision 126-G
    .
    11 Corporations covered by Subdivision 124-I sections 620-10, 620-15, 620-20 and 620-25

    Division 114 - Indexation of cost base  

    SECTION 114-1  

    114-1   Indexing elements of cost base  


    In working out the *cost base of a *CGT asset *acquired at or before 11.45 am (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 21 September 1999, index expenditure incurred at or before that time in each element. (The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 ).
    Note 1:

    Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts. The indexation does not take account of inflation after 30 September 1999.

    Note 2:

    You have to work out the cost base of a CGT asset if a CGT event happens in relation to it or if there is a cost base modification.

    Note 3:

    You cannot index expenditure in the third element (costs of ownership): see subsection 960-275(4) .

    Note 4:

    Indexation is not relevant to expenditure incurred after 11.45 am on 21 September 1999 or any expenditure relating to a CGT asset acquired after that time.

    Example:

    Peter purchases a building as an investment on 1 January 1994 for $250,000. This amount forms the first element of his cost base.

    He sold the building on 1 February 1996.

    The index number for the quarter in which he sold the building (the March quarter 1996) is 119.0. The index number for the quarter in which he purchased the building (the March quarter 1994) is 110.4.

    Applying section 960-275 , work out the indexation factor as follows:


    119.0
    110.4
    = 1.078

    The indexed first element of Peter ' s cost base is:


    $250,000   ×   1.078   =   $269,500

    SECTION 114-5   When indexation relevant  

    114-5(1)    
    Indexation is only relevant if the *cost base of a *CGT asset is relevant to a *CGT event.

    Note 1:

    The table in section 110-10 sets out the CGT events for which cost base is not relevant.

    Note 2:

    Indexation is not relevant to the reduced cost base of a CGT asset.



    Indexation for some entities only if indexation chosen

    114-5(2)    


    Indexation is not relevant to the *capital gain of an entity mentioned in an item of the table from a *CGT event happening after 11.45 am (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 21 September 1999, unless the relevant entity mentioned in that item has chosen that the *cost base include indexation:


    Entities for which indexation is not relevant unless chosen
    Item Indexation is not relevant to the capital gain of this entity: Unless this entity has chosen that the cost base include indexation:
    1 An individual The individual
    .
    2 A *complying superannuation entity The trustee of the complying superannuation entity
    .
    3 A trust The trustee of the trust
    .
    4 A listed investment company The company


    114-5(3)    


    Indexation is not relevant to the *capital gain of a *life insurance company from a *CGT event happening after 30 June 2000 in respect of a *CGT asset that is a *complying superannuation asset unless the company has chosen that the *cost base include indexation.
    Note:

    Section 114-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides that indexation is not relevant to the capital gain of a life insurance company or registered organisation from a CGT event after 11.45 am on 21 September 1999 and before 1 July 2000 unless the company or organisation chooses it.


    SECTION 114-10   Requirement for 12 months ownership  

    114-10(1)    


    You only index expenditure in the *cost base of a *CGT asset for a *CGT event happening in relation to the asset if you, or the entity whose cost base is being worked out, had *acquired the asset at or before 11.45 am (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 21 September 1999 and at least 12 months before the time of that *CGT event.
    Note:

    Generally, expenditure is indexed from when it is incurred: see subsection 960-275(2) . The exception is when there is an acquisition that did not result from a CGT event. The first element in this case is indexed from when the expenditure was paid: see subsection 960-275(3) .


    114-10(2)    
    There are 5 exceptions:

  • • one for *CGT event E8: see subsection (3); and
  • • one for roll-overs: see subsections (4) and (5); and
  • • one for deceased estates: see subsection (6); and
  • • one for a surviving joint tenant: see subsection (7); and
  • • one for *CGT event J1: see subsection (8).


  • CGT event E8

    114-10(3)    
    For *CGT event E8, the beneficiary indexes the *cost bases of the *CGT assets of the trust only if the beneficiary *acquired the *CGT asset that is the interest in the trust capital at least 12 months before *disposing of it.

    It does not matter (for indexation from the beneficiary ' s point of view) how long the trustee owned any of the assets of the trust.



    Same asset roll-overs

    114-10(4)    
    The 12 month rule is satisfied for both the entity that owned a *CGT asset before a *same-asset roll-over and the entity that owned it after the roll-over if the sum of their periods of ownership of the asset (and the sum of the periods of ownership of the asset of other entities involved in an unbroken series of roll-overs) is at least 12 months.

    Replacement asset roll-overs

    114-10(5)    


    The 12 month rule is satisfied for an entity obtaining a *replacement-asset roll-over for a *CGT event happening in relation to a *CGT asset if the period of the entity ' s ownership of the original asset (and of other assets for an unbroken series of replacement-asset roll-overs) and of the replacement asset are together at least 12 months.
    Example:

    Company A transfers a CGT asset to Company B (which is a member of the same wholly-owned group and a foreign resident) 5 months after acquiring it. There is a roll-over for the transfer under Subdivision 126-B .

    Company B sells the asset 8 months after the transfer.

    Company A indexes expenditure in its cost base up to the transfer. That cost base becomes the first element of Company B ' s cost base. Company B indexes its cost base from the transfer to the sale.



    Deceased estates

    114-10(6)    
    If a *CGT asset you owned just before dying devolves to your *legal personal representative or *passes to a beneficiary in your estate, the 12 month rule applies to the legal personal representative or the beneficiary as if that entity had *acquired the asset when you acquired it.

    Surviving joint tenant

    114-10(7)    
    If individuals own a *CGT asset as joint tenants and one of them dies, the 12 month rule applies to the surviving joint tenant as if the surviving joint tenant had *acquired the deceased ' s interest in the asset when the deceased acquired it.

    Note:

    The surviving joint tenant is taken to have acquired the deceased ' s interest in the asset: see section 128-50 .



    CGTevent J1

    114-10(8)    
    If *CGT event J1 happens, the company that owns the roll-over asset ignores (for indexation purposes) the acquisition rule in subsection 104-175(8) .

    SECTION 114-15   Cost base modifications  

    114-15(1)    
    There are a number of modifications to the *cost base of *CGT assets (see sections 112-20 and 112-35 and Subdivisions 112-B , 112-C and 112-D ). These affect the way indexation works.

    114-15(2)    


    If a cost base modification replaces an element of the *cost base of a *CGT asset with an amount, or includes an amount in such an element, you index the element or the amount as if expenditure equal to the amount had been incurred in the *quarter in which the modification occurred.
    Example:

    A trust is declared over a CGT asset (an example of CGT event E1). The first element of the cost base in the hands of the trustee is its market value. The trustee indexes that market value from the quarter in which the trust was declared.


    114-15(3)    


    A different rule applies if a cost base modification reduces the total *cost base of a *CGT asset. Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out the *cost base (all elements) of the asset as at the *quarter in which the modification occurred.


    Step 2.

    Subtract the amount of the reduction.


    Step 3.

    The Step 2 amount forms a new first element of your *cost base, and is later indexed as if you had incurred expenditure equal to that amount in the *quarter in which the modification occurred.

    Example:

    Margaret receives a capital payment of $1,000 for shares (an example of CGT event G1). The first element of her cost base is $10,250 (indexed to the quarter in which the payment was made) and the second element (similarly indexed) is $210. Add those amounts ($10,460) and subtract the $1,000. Her new first element of the cost base is $9,460. There are no other elements at that time.


    114-15(4)    


    Despite subsection (2), there are different rules for the exercise of an option or the conversion of a *convertible interest.

    Exercise of options

    114-15(5)    


    The amount you paid for the option, and the amount you paid to exercise it, are indexed from the *quarter in which the liabilities to pay the amounts were incurred.
    Example:

    On 1 April 1997, Robyn grants Andrew an option to buy land she owns. The option fee is $10,000, and the option is to buy the land on 30 June 1998 for $100,000.

    Andrew exercises the option and acquires the land on 30 June 1998. To work out whether there is a capital gain when Andrew disposes of the land, indexation is available if the land is disposed of 12 months or more after its acquisition.

    The $10,000 option fee can be indexed from 1 April 1997 (when the liability to pay it was incurred). The $100,000 exercise price can be indexed from 30 June 1998 (when the liability to pay the price was incurred).



    Convertible interests

    114-15(6)    


    If you *acquire *shares in a company or units in a unit trust by converting a *convertible interest, the amount paid for the convertible interest, and the amount paid to convert it, are indexed from the *quarter in which the liabilities to pay the amounts were incurred.
    Note:

    If shares or units are acquired as a result of the exercise of the option or the conversion of the convertible interest, and an amount is paid to the company or trust on the shares or units after the day of acquisition, that amount is indexed from the time it is paid: see subsection 960-275(3) .


    SECTION 114-20  

    114-20   When expenditure is incurred for roll-overs  


    If there is a roll-over for a *CGT event happening in relation to a *CGT asset and the first element of the *cost base of the asset is the whole of the cost base of:


    (a) for a *replacement-asset roll-over, the original asset; or


    (b) for a *same-asset roll-over, the CGT asset;

    you index that element as if expenditure equal to the amount in that element had been incurred in the *quarter in which the CGT event happened.

    Division 115 - Discount capital gains and trusts ' net capital gains  

    Guide to Division 115  

    SECTION 115-1   What this Division is about  


    A discount capital gain remaining after the application of any capital losses and net capital losses from previous income years is reduced by the discount percentage when working out your net capital gain.

    A capital gain from a CGT asset is a discount capital gain only if the entity making the gain acquired the asset at least a year before the CGT event causing the gain and no choice has been made to include indexation in the cost base of the asset.

    Special rules apply to the net income of trusts with net capital gains, to ensure that the appropriate discount percentage is applied and to let beneficiaries apply their capital losses against their share of the trust's capital gains.

    Special rules apply to certain capital gains made by listed investment companies to enable shareholders receiving dividends that include these gains to obtain benefits similar to those conferred by the CGT discount.

    Subdivision 115-A - Discount capital gains  

    What is a discount capital gain?

    SECTION 115-5  

    115-5   What is a discount capital gain ?  


    A discount capital gain is a *capital gain that meets the requirements of sections 115-10 , 115-15 , 115-20 and 115-25 .
    Note:

    Sections 115-40 , 115-45 and 775-70 identify capital gains that are not discount capital gains, despite this section.

    SECTION 115-10  

    115-10   Who can make a discount capital gain?  


    To be a *discount capital gain, the *capital gain must be made by:


    (a) an individual; or


    (b) a *complying superannuation entity; or


    (c) a trust; or


    (d) a *life insurance company in relation to a *discount capital gain from a *CGT event in respect of a *CGT asset that is a *complying superannuation asset.

    SECTION 115-15  

    115-15   Discount capital gain must be made after 21 September 1999  


    To be a *discount capital gain, the *capital gain must result from a *CGT event happening after 11.45 am (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 21 September 1999.

    SECTION 115-20   Discount capital gain must not have indexed cost base  

    115-20(1)    


    To be a *discount capital gain, the *capital gain must have been worked out:


    (a) using a *cost base that has been calculated without reference to indexation at any time; or


    (b) for a capital gain that arose under *CGT event K7 - using the *cost of the *depreciating asset concerned.

    Note:

    A listed investment company must also calculate capital gains without reference to indexation in order to allow its shareholders to access the concessions in Subdivision 115-D .


    115-20(2)    


    For the purposes of working out whether the *capital gain is a *discount capital gain and the amount of that gain, the *cost base taken into account in working out the capital gain may be recalculated without reference to indexation if the cost base had an element including indexation because of another provision of this Act. This subsection has effect despite that other provision.
    Note:

    This lets a capital gain of an entity (the gain entity ) on a CGT asset be a discount capital gain even if:

  • (a) another provision of this Act (such as a provision for a same-asset roll-over or Division 128 ) set the gain entity ' s cost base for the asset by reference to the cost base for the asset when it was owned by another entity (the earlier owner ), and the earlier owner ' s cost base for the asset included indexation; or
  • (b) another provision of this Act (such as a provision for a replacement-asset roll-over) set the cost base of the asset by reference to the cost base of the original asset involved in the roll-over, and the original asset ' s cost base included indexation.
  • Example:

    In 1995 Elizabeth acquired land from her ex-husband under an order made by a court under the Family Law Act 1975 . Former section 160ZZM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 treated her as having paid $56,000 for the land, equal to her ex-husband ' s indexed cost base for it. His cost base for the land then was $40,000.

    In 2000, she sold the land for capital proceeds of $150,000.

    Her discount capital gain on the land is $110,000 (equal to the capital proceeds less the cost base for the land without indexation).


    115-20(3)    


    This section does not apply to a *capital gain worked out under subsection 104-255(3) (about carried interests).

    SECTION 115-25   Discount capital gain must be on asset acquired at least 12 months before  

    115-25(1)    
    To be a *discount capital gain, the *capital gain must result from a *CGT event happening to a *CGT asset that was *acquired by the entity making the capital gain at least 12 months before the CGT event.

    Note 1:

    Even if the capital gain results from a CGT event happening at least a year after the CGT asset was acquired, the gain may not be a discount capital gain, depending on the cause of the CGT event (see section 115-40 ) and the nature of the asset (see sections 115-45 and 115-50 ).

    Note 2:

    Section 115-30 or 115-34 may affect the time when the entity is treated as having acquired the CGT asset.


    115-25(2)    


    To avoid doubt, subsection (1) applies to the *CGT asset shown in the table for a *CGT event listed in the table.


    CGT assets to which subsection (1) applies
    Item CGT event CGT asset to which subsection (1) applies
    1A D4 the land over which the *conservation covenant is entered into
    1 E8 the interest or part interest in the trust capital
    2 K6 the *share or interest *acquired before 20 September 1985


    115-25(2A)    


    If the *capital gain results from a *CGT event K9 happening:


    (a) subsection (1) does not apply; and


    (b) to be a *discount capital gain, the *carried interest to which the CGT event relates must arise under a partnership agreement entered into at least 12 months before the CGT event.


    115-25(3)    


    A *capital gain from one of these *CGT events is not a discount capital gain (despite section 115-5 ):


    (a) *CGT event D1;


    (b) *CGT event D2;


    (c) *CGT event D3;


    (d) *CGT event E9;


    (e) *CGT event F1;


    (f) *CGT event F2;


    (g) *CGT event F5;


    (h) *CGT event H2;


    (ha) *CGT event J2;


    (hb) *CGT event J5;


    (hc) *CGT event J6;


    (i) *CGT event K10.

    Note:

    Capital gains from the CGT events mentioned in paragraphs (3)(a) to (f) are not discount capital gains because the CGT asset involved in the CGT event comes into existence at the time of the event, so it is impossible to meet the requirement in this section that the asset have been acquired at least 12 months before the event.


    SECTION 115-30   Special rules about time of acquisition  


    Entity is treated as acquiring some CGT assets early

    115-30(1)    


    Sections 115-25 , 115-40 , 115-45 , 115-105 , 115-110 and 115-115 (the affected sections ) apply as if an entity (the acquirer ) had acquired a *CGT asset described in an item of the table at the time mentioned in the item:


    When the acquirer is treated as having acquired a CGT asset
    Item The affected sections apply as if the acquirer had acquired this CGT asset: At this time:
    1 A *CGT asset the acquirer *acquired in circumstances giving rise to a *same-asset roll-over (a) when the entity that owned the CGT asset before the roll-over *acquired it; or
          (b) if the asset has been involved in an unbroken series of roll-overs - when the entity that owned it before the first roll-over in the series *acquired it
    .
    2 A *CGT asset that the acquirer *acquired as a replacement asset for a *replacement-asset roll-over (other than a roll-over covered by paragraph 115-34(1)(c)) (a) when the acquirer acquired the original asset involved in the roll-over; or
          (b) if the acquirer acquired the replacement asset for a roll-over that was the last in an unbroken series of replacement-asset roll-overs (other than roll-overs covered by paragraph 115-34(1)(c)) - when the acquirer acquired the original asset involved in the first roll-over in the series
    .
    3 A *CGT asset the acquirer *acquired as the *legal personal representative of a deceased individual, except one that was a *pre-CGT asset of the deceased immediately before his or her death When the deceased *acquired the asset
    .
    4 A *CGT asset that *passed to the acquirer as the beneficiary of a deceased individual ' s estate, except one that was a *pre-CGT asset of the deceased immediately before his or her death When the deceased *acquired the asset
    .
    5A *CGT asset that: When the deceased died
      (a) the acquirer *acquired as the *legal personal representative of a deceased individual; and    
      (b) was a *pre-CGT asset of the deceased immediately before his or her death    
    .
    6 A *CGT asset that: When the deceased died
      (a) *passed to the acquirer as the beneficiary of a deceased individual ' s estate; and    
      (b) was a *pre-CGT asset of the deceased immediately before his or her death    
    .
    7 The interest (or share of an interest) the acquirer is taken under section 128-50 to have *acquired in another *CGT asset that the acquirer and another individual held as joint tenants immediately before he or she died When the deceased *acquired his or her interest in the other CGT asset
    .
    8 (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)  
    .
    9 A *CGT asset that:  
      (a) is a *membership interest in the receiving trust involved in a roll-over under Subdivision 126-G; and (a) when the acquirer *acquired the corresponding membership interest (or membership interests) in the transferring trust involved in the roll-over; or
      (b) is held by the acquirer just after the transfer time for the roll-over (b) if the roll-over asset for the roll-over has been involved in an unbroken series of roll-overs under Subdivision 126-G - when the acquirer acquired the corresponding membership interest (or membership interests) in the transferring trust involved in the first roll-over in the series
    .
    9A A *share the acquirer *acquires by exercising an *ESS interest if: When the acquirer *acquired the *ESS interest
      (a) section 83A-33 (about start ups) reduces the amount to be included in the acquirer ' s assessable income in relation to the ESS interest; and    
      (b) exercising the ESS interest causes Subdivision 130-B or Division 134 to apply    
    10 A *CGT asset that the acquirer *acquired as a received asset for a roll-over under Subdivision 310-D (a) when the transferring entity for the roll-over acquired the corresponding original asset for the roll-over; or
    (b) if that original asset (or any asset corresponding to it) has been involved in an unbroken series of roll-overs - when the entity that owned the applicable asset before the first roll-over in the series acquired it
    .
    11 (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)  

    Note:

    Under section 128-50 , the acquirer is taken to acquire the interest of a deceased individual in a CGT asset the acquirer and the deceased held as joint tenants immediately before the deceased ' s death (or an equal share of that interest if there are other surviving joint tenants).


    115-30(1A)    


    For the purposes of sections 115-105 , 115-110 and 115-115 , item 2 of the table in subsection (1) applies in relation to all * replacement-asset roll-overs, including those covered by paragraph 115-34(1)(c) .

    115-30(1B)    
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)



    CGT event E8

    115-30(2)    
    For the purposes of applying sections 115-25 and 115-40 in relation to *CGT event E8 and the *CGT asset consisting of a beneficiary ' s interest in trust capital, it does not matter how long the trustee owned any of the assets of the trust.

    Note:

    Section 115-45 limits the effect of this subsection in some cases.



    Relationship with Subdivision 109-A and Division 128

    115-30(3)    
    This section has effect despite Subdivision 109-A and Division 128 (which contain rules about the time when you *acquire a *CGT asset).

    SECTION 115-32   Special rule about time of acquisition for certain replacement-asset roll-overs  

    115-32(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a *CGT event happens to:


    (i) your *share in a company; or

    (ii) your *trust voting interest, unit or other fixed interest in a trust; and


    (b) you *acquired the share or interest as a replacement asset for a *replacement-asset roll-over (other than a roll-over covered by paragraph 115-34(1)(c) ); and


    (c) at the time of the CGT event, the company or trust:


    (i) owns a *membership interest in an entity (the original entity ); and

    (ii) has owned that membership interest for less than 12 months; and


    (d) that membership interest is the original asset for the roll-over.

    Note:

    This section does not affect the time when you are treated as having acquired the replacement asset. That time is worked out under item 2 of the table in subsection 115-30(1) .



    Application of tests about the assets of the company or trust

    115-32(2)    
    Subsection 115-45(4) applies as if the company or trust had *acquired the original asset at least 12 months before the *CGT event, if the condition in that subsection would not be met were it to be applied to the original entity and the CGT event.

    115-32(3)    
    Subsection 115-45(6) applies as if the company or trust had *acquired the original asset at least 12 months before the *CGT event, if the condition in subsection 115-45(5) would not be met were it to be applied to the original entity and the CGT event.

    SECTION 115-34   Further special rule about time of acquisition for certain replacement-asset roll-overs  

    115-34(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a *CGT event happens to your *share in a company; and


    (b) at the time of the CGT event, you had owned the share for less than 12 months; and


    (c) you *acquired the share as a replacement asset for:


    (i) a *replacement-asset roll-over under Subdivision 122-A (disposal of assets by individuals or trustees to a wholly-owned company) for which you *disposed of a *CGT asset, or all theassets of a *business, to the company; or

    (ii) a replacement-asset roll-over under Subdivision 122-B (disposal of assets by partners to a wholly-owned company) for which you disposed of your interests in a CGT asset, or your interests in all the assets of a business, to the company; or

    (iii) a replacement-asset roll-over under Subdivision 124-N (disposal of assets by trusts to a company) for which a trust of which you were a beneficiary disposed of all of its CGT assets to the company.


    Application of tests about when you acquired the share

    115-34(2)    
    Sections 115-25 and 115-40 apply as if you had *acquired the *share at least 12 months before the *CGT event.

    Application of tests about the company's assets

    115-34(3)    
    For each asset mentioned in subparagraph (1)(c)(i), subsections 115-45(4) and (6) apply as if the company had *acquired that asset when you acquired it.

    115-34(4)    
    For each asset mentioned in subparagraph (1)(c)(ii), subsections 115-45(4) and (6) apply as if the company had *acquired that asset when you acquired your interests in it.

    115-34(5)    
    For each asset mentioned in subparagraph (1)(c)(iii), subsections 115-45(4) and (6) apply as if the company had *acquired that asset when the trust acquired it.

    Relationship with Subdivision 109-A

    115-34(6)    
    This section has effect despite Subdivision 109-A (which contains rules about the time of acquisition of CGT assets).

    What are not discount capital gains?

    SECTION 115-40  

    115-40   Capital gain resulting from agreement made within a year of acquisition  


    Your *capital gain on a *CGT asset from a *CGT event is not a discount capital gain (despite section 115-5 ) if the CGT event occurred under an agreement you made within 12 months of *acquiring the CGT asset.
    Note:

    Section 115-30 or 115-34 may affect the time when you are treated as having acquired the CGT asset.

    SECTION 115-45   Capital gain from equity in an entity with newly acquired assets  


    Purpose of this section

    115-45(1)    
    The purpose of this section is to deny you a *discount capital gain on your *share in a company or interest in a trust if you would not have had *discount capital gains on the majority of *CGT assets (by cost and by value) underlying the share or interest if:


    (a) you had owned them for the time the company or trust did; and


    (b) *CGT events had happened to them when the CGT event happened to your share or interest.

    When a capital gain is not a discount capital gain

    115-45(2)    
    Your *capital gain from a *CGT event happening to:


    (a) your *share in a company; or


    (b) your *trust voting interest, unit or other fixed interest in a trust;

    is not a discount capital gain if the 3 conditions in subsections (3), (4) and (5) are met. This section has effect despite section 115-5 and subsection 115-30(2) .

    Note:

    This section does not prevent a capital gain from being a discount capital gain if there are at least 300 members or beneficiaries of the company or trust and control of the company or trust is not and cannot be concentrated (see section 115-50 ).



    You had at least 10% of the equity in the entity before the event

    115-45(3)    
    The first condition is that, just before the *CGT event, you and your *associates beneficially owned:


    (a) at least 10% by value of the *shares in the company (except shares that carried a right only to participate in a distribution of profits or capital to a limited extent); or


    (b) at least 10% of the *trust voting interests, issued units or other fixed interests (as appropriate) in the trust.

    Cost bases of new assets are more than 50% of all cost bases of entity ' s assets

    115-45(4)    
    The second condition is that the total of the *cost bases of *CGT assets that the company or trust owned at the time of the *CGT event and had *acquired less than 12 months before then is more than half of the total of the *cost bases of the *CGT assets the company or trust owned at the time of the event.

    Note:

    Sections 115-30 and 115-32 , or section 115-34 , may affect the time when the company or trust is treated as having acquired a CGT asset.



    Net capital gain on entity ' s new assets would be more than 50% of net capital gain on all the entity ' s assets

    115-45(5)    
    The third condition is that the amount worked out under subsection (6) is more than half of the amount worked out under subsection (7).

    115-45(6)    
    Work out the amount that would be the *net capital gain of the company or trust for the income year if:


    (a) just before the *CGT event, the company or trust had *disposed of all of the *CGT assets that it owned then and had *acquired less than 12 months before the *CGT event; and


    (b) it had received the *market value of those assets for the disposal; and


    (c) the company or trust did not have any *capital gains or *capital losses from *CGT events other than the disposal; and


    (d) the company or trust did not have a *net capital loss for an earlier income year.

    Note:

    Sections 115-30 and 115-32 , or section 115-34 , may affect the time when the company or trust is treated as having acquired a CGT asset.


    115-45(7)    
    Work out the amount that would be the *net capital gain of the company or trust for the income year if:


    (a) just before the *CGT event, the company or trust had *disposed of all of the *CGT assets that it owned then; and


    (b) it had received the *market value of those assets for the disposal; and


    (c) all of the *capital gains and *capital losses from those assets were taken into account in working out the net capital gain, despite any rules providing that one or more of those capital gains or losses are not to be taken into account in working out the net capital gain; and


    (d) the company or trust did not have any *capital gains or *capital losses from *CGT events other than the disposal; and


    (e) the company or trust did not have a *net capital loss for an earlier income year.

    SECTION 115-50   Discount capital gain from equity in certain entities  


    Capital gain from share in company with 300 members

    115-50(1)    
    Section 115-45 does not prevent a *capital gain from a *CGT event happening to a *share in a company with at least 300 *members from being a *discount capital gain, unless subsection (3) or (6) applies in relation to the company.

    Capital gain from interest in fixed trust with 300 beneficiaries

    115-50(2)    
    Section 115-45 does not prevent a *capital gain from a *CGT event happening to an interest in a trust from being a *discount capital gain if:


    (a) entities have *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the trust; and


    (b) the trust has at least 300 beneficiaries; and


    (c) neither subsection (4) nor subsection (6) applies in relation to the trust.



    No discount capital gain if ownership is concentrated

    115-50(3)    
    Section 115-45 may prevent a *capital gain from a *share in a company from being a *discount capital gain if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, *shares in the company:


    (a) carrying *fixed entitlements to:


    (i) at least 75% of the company's income; or

    (ii) at least 75% of the company's capital; or


    (b) carrying at least 75% of the voting rights in the company.


    115-50(4)    
    Section 115-45 may prevent a *capital gain from an interest in a trust from being a *discount capital gain if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, interests in the trust:


    (a) carrying *fixed entitlements to:


    (i) at least 75% of the trust's income; or

    (ii) at least 75% of the trust's capital; or


    (b) if beneficiaries of the trust have a right to vote in respect of activities of the trust - carrying at least 75% of those voting rights.


    115-50(5)    
    Subsections (3) and (4) operate as if all of these were a single individual:


    (a) an individual, whether or not the individual holds *shares in the company or interests in the trust (as appropriate);


    (b) the individual's *associates;


    (c) for any *shares or interests in respect of which other individuals are nominees of the individual or of the individual's associates - those other individuals.

    No discount capital gain if rights can be varied to concentrate ownership

    115-50(6)    
    Section 115-45 may prevent a *capital gain from a *share in a company, or from an interest in a trust, from being a *discount capital gain if, because of anything listed in subsection (7), it is reasonable to conclude that the rights attaching to any of the *shares in the company or interests in the trust (as appropriate) can be varied or abrogated in such a way that subsection (3) or (4) would be satisfied.

    115-50(7)    
    These are the things:


    (a) any provision in the constituent document of the company or trust, or in any contract, agreement or instrument:


    (i) authorising the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to any of the *shares in the company or interests in the trust (as appropriate); or

    (ii) relating to the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of any of those shares or interests;


    (b) any contract, *arrangement, option or instrument under which a person has power to acquire any of those shares or interests;


    (c) any power, authority or discretion in a person in relation to the rights attaching to any of those shares or interests.

    115-50(8)    
    It does not matter for the purposes of subsection (6) whether or not the rights attaching to any of the *shares or interests are varied or abrogated in the way described in that subsection.

    SECTION 115-55  

    115-55   Capital gains involving money received from demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurer  


    Your *capital gain from a *CGT event is not a discount capital gain if it is affected by section 316-60 or 316-165 .
    Note:

    Those sections affect capital gains involving the receipt of money as a result of the demutualisation of a friendly society health or life insurer.

    115-60   (Repealed) SECTION 115-60 Discount capital gain from CGT event E4  
    (Repealed by No 168 of 2001)

    Subdivision 115-B - Discount percentage  

    SECTION 115-100  

    115-100   What is the discount percentage for a discount capital gain  


    The discount percentage for an amount of a *discount capital gain is:


    (a) 50% if the gain is made:


    (i) by an individual and neither section 115-105 nor 115-110 (about foreign or temporary residents) applies to the gain; or

    (ii) by a trust (other than a trust that is a *complying superannuation entity) and section 115-120 (about foreign or temporary residents) does not apply to the gain; or


    (b) 33 ⅓ % if the gain is made:


    (i) by a complying superannuation entity; or

    (iia) (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    (ii) by a *life insurance company from a *CGT asset that is a *complying superannuation asset; or


    (c) the percentage resulting from section 115-115 if section 115-105 or 115-110 applies to the gain; or


    (d) the percentage resulting from section 115-120 if that section applies to the gain; or


    (e) the percentage resulting from section 115-125 if that section applies to the gain.

    SECTION 115-105   Foreign or temporary residents - individuals with direct gains  


    Object

    115-105(1)    
    The object of this section (with section 115-115) is to adjust the discount percentage so as to deny you a discount to the extent that you accrued a * capital gain while a foreign resident or * temporary resident.

    When this section applies

    115-105(2)    
    This section applies to a * discount capital gain if:


    (a) you are an individual; and


    (b) you * acquire a * CGT asset; and


    (c) you make the discount capital gain from a * CGT event happening in relation to the CGT asset; and


    (d) the period (the discount testing period ):


    (i) starting on the day you acquired the CGT asset; and

    (ii) ending on the day the CGT event happens;
    ends after 8 May 2012; and


    (e) you were a foreign resident or * temporary resident during some or all of so much of that period as is after 8 May 2012.

    Note:

    Section 115-30 has special rules about when assets are acquired.



    Changed residency status

    115-105(3)    
    For the purposes of this section and section 115-115 , if:


    (a) another individual owned the * CGT asset on a particular day before the discount testing period ends; and


    (b) on that day, that individual was one of the following (that individual ' s residency status ):


    (i) an Australian resident (but not a * temporary resident);

    (ii) a temporary resident;

    (iii) a foreign resident; and


    (c) section 115-30 treats you as having * acquired the CGT asset when that individual, or an earlier owner of the CGT asset, acquired it;

    you are treated as having the same residency status on that day as that individual had on that day.


    SECTION 115-110   Foreign or temporary residents - individuals with trust gains  


    Object

    115-110(1)    
    The object of this section (with section 115-115 ) is to adjust the discount percentage so as to deny you a discount for a * capital gain you make because of section 115-215 to the extent that the gain was accrued while you were a foreign resident or * temporary resident.

    When this section applies

    115-110(2)    
    This section applies to a * discount capital gain if:


    (a) you are an individual and a beneficiary of a trust ( your trust ); and


    (b) because of section 115-215 , Division 102 applies to you as if you had made the discount capital gain on a particular day ( your gain day ) for a * capital gain (the relevant trust gain ) of the trust estate; and


    (c) the period (the discount testing period ) worked out from the following table ends after 8 May 2012; and


    (d) you were a foreign resident or * temporary resident during some or all of so much of that period as is after 8 May 2012.


    Working out the discount testing period
    Item Column 1 Column 2
    If this is the case: the discount testing period is:
    1 your trust is a * fixed trust the period:
    (a) starting on the most recent day (before your gain day) that you became a beneficiary of your trust; and
    (b) ending on your gain day.
    2 your trust is not a * fixed trust and the relevant trust gain: the period:
    (a) is made because a * CGT event happened in relation to a * CGT asset * acquired by the trustee of your trust; or (a) starting on the day of that acquisition; and
    (b) is referable (either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed trusts that are not fixed trusts) to a * capital gain made by the trustee of another trust that is not a fixed trust because a CGT event happened in relation to a CGT asset acquired by that trustee (b) ending on your gain day.
    3 your trust is not a * fixed trust and the relevant trust gain is referable (either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed trusts that are not fixed trusts) to a * capital gain made by a fixed trust the period:
    (a) starting on the most recent day (before your gain day) that the trust whose capital gain is directly referable to the capital gain made by the fixed trust became a beneficiary of the fixed trust; and
    (b) ending on your gain day.

    Note:

    Section 115-30 has special rules about when assets (including membership interests in trusts) are acquired.



    Changed residency status

    115-110(3)    
    For the purposes of this section and section 115-115 , if:


    (a) your trust is a * fixed trust and another individual owned your * membership interest in your trust on a particular day before the discount testing period ends; and


    (b) on that day, that individual was one of the following (that individual ' s residency status ):


    (i) an Australian resident (but not a * temporary resident);

    (ii) a temporary resident;

    (iii) a foreign resident; and


    (c) section 115-30 treats you as having * acquired your membership interest in your trust when that individual, or an earlier owner of that membership interest, acquired it;

    you are treated as having the same residency status on that day as that individual had on that day.


    SECTION 115-115   Foreign or temporary residents - percentage for individuals  

    115-115(1)    
    This section applies if section 115-105 or 115-110 applies to a * discount capital gain.

    Periods starting after 8 May 2012

    115-115(2)    
    If the discount testing period starts after 8 May 2012, the following (expressed as a percentage) is the percentage resulting from this section:


    Number of days during discount testing period that you
    were an Australian resident (but not a *temporary resident)
    2 × Number of days in discount testing period

    Note 1:

    The percentage will be 0 % if you were a foreign resident or temporary resident during all of the discount testing period.

    Note 2:

    Subsection 115-105(3) or 115-110(3) may change your residency status for this formula.



    Periods starting earlier - Australian residents

    115-115(3)    
    If:


    (a) the discount testing period starts on or before 8 May 2012; and


    (b) you were an Australian resident (but not a * temporary resident) on 8 May 2012;

    the following (expressed as a percentage) is the percentage resulting from this section:


      Number of days in discount testing period Number of apportionable days that you
    were a foreign resident or *temporary resident
      2 × Number of days in discount testing period

    where:

    apportionable day
    means a day, after 8 May 2012, during the discount testing period.

    Note:

    Subsection 115-105(3) or 115-110(3) may change your residency status for this formula.



    Periods starting earlier - other residents may choose market value

    115-115(4)    
    The percentage resulting from this section is worked out from the following table if:


    (a) the discount testing period starts on or before 8 May 2012; and


    (b) you were a foreign resident or * temporary resident on 8 May 2012; and


    (c) the most recent * acquisition (before the * CGT event) of the * CGT asset happened on or before 8 May 2012; and


    (d) the CGT asset ' s * market value on 8 May 2012 exceeds the amount that was its * cost base at the end of that day; and


    (e) you choose for this subsection to apply.

    Note 1:

    The CGT event and CGT asset are those expressly or impliedly referred to in section 115-105 or 115-110 .

    Note 2:

    Section 115-30 has special rules about when assets are acquired.


    Percentage using market value
    Item Column 1 Column 2
    If the excess from paragraph (d): then, the percentage is:
    1 is equal to or greater than the amount of the * discount capital gain 50 % .
    2 falls short of the amount of the * discount capital gain worked out under subsection (5).


    115-115(5)    
    For the purposes of table item 2 in subsection (4), the following (expressed as a percentage) is the percentage resulting from this section:


    where:

    apportionable day
    means a day, after 8 May 2012, during the discount testing period.

    eligible resident
    means an Australian resident who is not a * temporary resident.

    excess
    means the excess from paragraph (4)(d).

    shortfall
    means the amount that the excess falls short of the amount of the * discount capital gain.

    Note:

    Subsection 115-105(3) or 115-110(3) may change your residency status for this formula.



    Periods starting earlier - other residents not choosing market value

    115-115(6)    
    If:


    (a) the discount testing period starts on or before 8 May 2012; and


    (b) you were a foreign resident or * temporary resident on 8 May 2012; and


    (c) subsection (4) does not apply;

    the following (expressed as a percentage) is the percentage resulting from this section:


    Number of apportionable days that you were an
    Australian resident (but not a *temporary resident)
    2 × Number of days in discount testing period

    where:

    apportionable day
    means a day, after 8 May 2012, during the discount testing period.

    Note 1:

    The percentage will be 0 % if you were a foreign resident or temporary resident on each of the apportionable days.

    Note 2:

    Subsection 115-105(3) or 115-110(3) may change your residency status for this formula.


    SECTION 115-120   Foreign or temporary residents - trusts with certain gains  

    115-120(1)    
    The object of this section is to adjust the discount percentage so as to deny a trustee a discount for a * capital gain for which the trustee is liable:


    (a) to be assessed; and


    (b) to pay tax;

    under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the trust estate in respect of a beneficiary to the extent that the beneficiary was a foreign resident or * temporary resident.


    115-120(2)    
    This section applies to a * discount capital gain of a trust estate if:


    (a) you are the trustee of that trust; and


    (b) section 115-220 applies to you in relation to the discount capital gain and a beneficiary of the trust who is an individual.

    115-120(3)    
    The percentage resulting from this section is the same as the * discount percentage for the corresponding * discount capital gain the beneficiary would have made for the purposes of Division 102 had section 115-215 applied to the beneficiary.


    SECTION 115-125   Investors disposing of property used for affordable housing  


    Object

    115-125(1)    
    The object of this section is to increase the discount percentage to the extent that the *discount capital gain relates to a *dwelling used to *provide affordable housing.

    When this section applies

    115-125(2)    
    This section applies to a *discount capital gain if:


    (a) you are an individual; and


    (b) either:


    (i) you make the discount capital gain from a *CGT event happening in relation to a *CGT asset that is your *ownership interest in a *dwelling; or

    (ii) because of section 115-215 , Division 102 applies to you as if you had made the discount capital gain for a *capital gain of a trust covered by subsection (3); and


    (c) where subparagraph (b)(ii) applies - the trust ' s capital gain was made directly, or indirectly through one or more entities that are all covered by subsection (3), from a CGT event happening in relation to a CGT asset that is an ownership interest in a dwelling; and


    (d) the dwelling was used to *provide affordable housing on at least 1095 days:


    (i) before the CGT event; and

    (ii) during your, or the relevant trustee ' s or partner ' s, *ownership period of that dwelling; and

    (iii) on or after 1 January 2018.

    The days mentioned in paragraph (d) need not be consecutive.

    Note:

    1095 days is the same as 3 years.


    115-125(3)    
    This subsection covers the following:


    (a) a trust, other than a *superannuation fund or a public unit trust (within the meaning of section 102P of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 );


    (b) a *managed investment trust;


    (c) a partnership.

    Discount percentage

    115-125(4)    
    The percentage resulting from this section is the sum of:


    (a) the *discount percentage that would apply to the *discount capital gain apart from this section; and


    (b) the result (expressed as a percentage) of subsection (5).

    115-125(5)    
    Work out the following:


    *Discount percentage that would apply to the *discount capital gain apart from this section × Affordable housing days
    5 Total ownership days

    where:

    affordable housing days
    means the number of days during that *ownership period (see paragraph (2)(d)) of the *dwelling, and on or after 1 January 2018, on which:


    (a) the dwelling was used to *provide affordable housing; and


    (b) you were neither a foreign resident nor a *temporary resident.

    total ownership days
    means the number of days during that *ownership period (see paragraph (2)(d)) of the *dwelling, less the number of days after 8 May 2012 during that ownership period that you were a foreign resident or a *temporary resident.


    Subdivision 115-C - Rules about trusts with net capital gains  

    Guide to Subdivision 115-C

    SECTION 115-200   What this Division is about  


    This Subdivision sets out rules for dealing with the net income of a trust that has a net capital gain. The rules treat parts of the net income attributable to the trust ' s net capital gain as capital gains made by the beneficiary entitled to those parts. This lets the beneficiary reduce those parts by any capital losses and unapplied net capital losses it has.

    If the trust ' s capital gain was reduced by either the general 50% discount in step 3 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) or by the small business 50% reduction in Subdivision 152-C (but not both), then the gain is doubled. The beneficiary can then apply its capital losses to the gain before applying the appropriate discount percentage (if any) or the small business 50% reduction.

    If the trust ' s capital gain was reduced by both the general 50% discount and the small business 50% reduction, then the gain is multiplied by 4. The beneficiary can then apply its capital losses to the gain before applying the appropriate discount percentage (if any) and the small business 50% reduction.

    Division 6E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 will exclude amounts from the beneficiary ' s assessable income if necessary to prevent it from being taxed twice on the same parts of the trust ' s net income.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    115-210 When this Subdivision applies
    115-215 Assessing presently entitled beneficiaries
    115-220 Assessing trustees under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
    115-222 Assessing trustees under section 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
    115-225 Attributable gain
    115-227 Share of a capital gain
    115-228 Specifically entitled to an amount of a capital gain
    115-230 Choice for resident trustee to be specifically entitled to capital gain

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 115-210   When this Subdivision applies  

    115-210(1)    
    This Subdivision applies if a trust estate has a *net capital gain for an income year that is taken into account in working out the trust estate's net income (as defined in section 95 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) for the income year.

    115-210(2)    
    If the trust estate has a beneficiary that is a *complying superannuation entity that is a trust, this Subdivision applies in relation to the complying superannuation entity as a beneficiary but not as a trust estate. This Subdivision does not apply otherwise to a *complying superannuation entity that is a trust.


    SECTION 115-215   Assessing presently entitled beneficiaries  


    Purpose

    115-215(1)    
    The purpose of this section is to ensure that appropriate amounts of the trust estate ' s net income attributable to the trust estate ' s *capital gains are treated as a beneficiary ' s capital gains when assessing the beneficiary, so:


    (a) the beneficiary can apply *capital losses against gains; and


    (b) the beneficiary can apply the appropriate *discount percentage (if any) to gains.

    115-215(2)    
    (Repealed by No 62 of 2011)



    Extra capital gains

    115-215(3)    


    If you are a beneficiary of the trust estate, for each *capital gain of the trust estate, Division 102 applies to you as if you had:


    (a) if the capital gain was not reduced under either step 3 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) (discount capital gains) or Subdivision 152-C (small business 50% reduction) - a capital gain equal to the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) ; and


    (b) if the capital gain was reduced under either step 3 of the method statement or Subdivision 152-C but not both (even if it was further reduced by the other small business concessions) - a capital gain equal to twice the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) ; and


    (c) if the capital gain was reduced under both step 3 of the method statement and Subdivision 152-C (even if it was further reduced by the other small business concessions) - a capital gain equal to 4 times the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) .

    Note:

    This subsection does not affect the amount (if any) included in your assessable income under Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 because of the capital gain of the trust estate. However, Division 6E of that Part may have the effect of reducing the amount included in your assessable income under Division 6 of that Part by an amount related to the capital gain you have under this subsection.


    115-215(4)    
    For each *capital gain of yours mentioned in paragraph (3)(b) or (c):


    (a) if the relevant trust gain was reduced under step 3 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) - Division 102 also applies to you as if your capital gain were a *discount capital gain, if you are the kind of entity that can have a discount capital gain; and


    (b) if the relevant trust gain was reduced under Subdivision 152-C - the capital gain remaining after you apply step 3 of the method statement is reduced by 50%.

    Note:

    This ensures that your share of the trust estate ' s net capital gain is taxed as if it were a capital gain you made (assuming you made the same choices about cost bases including indexation as the trustee).


    115-215(4A)    


    To avoid doubt, subsection (3) treats you as having a *capital gain for the purposes of Division 102 , despite section 102-20 .

    Section 118-20 does not reduce extra capital gains

    115-215(5)    
    To avoid doubt, section 118-20 does not reduce a *capital gain that subsection (3) treats you as having for the purpose of applying Division 102 .

    115-215(6)    
    (Repealed by No 62 of 2011)


    SECTION 115-220   Assessing trustees under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936  

    115-220(1)    


    This section applies if:


    (a) you are the trustee of the trust estate; and


    (b) on the assumption that there is a share of the income of the trust to which a beneficiary of the trust is presently entitled, you would be liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the trust estate in respect of the beneficiary.

    115-220(2)    


    For each *capital gain of the trust estate, increase the amount (the assessable amount ) in respect of which you are actually liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the trust estate in respect of the beneficiary by:


    (a) unless paragraph (b) applies - the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) in relation to the beneficiary; or


    (b) if the liability is under paragraph 98(3)(b) or subsection 98(4) , and the capital gain was reduced under step 3 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) (discount capital gains) - twice the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) in relation to the beneficiary.

    115-220(3)    
    To avoid doubt, increase the assessable amount under subsection (2) even if the assessable amount is nil.

    SECTION 115-222   Assessing trustees under section 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936  

    115-222(1)    
    Subsection (2) applies if:


    (a) you are the trustee of the trust estate; and


    (b) section 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply in relation to the trust estate in relation to the relevant income year.

    115-222(2)    
    For each *capital gain ofthe trust estate, increase the amount (the assessable amount ) in respect of which you are liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 99 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the trust estate by the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) .

    115-222(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies if:


    (a) you are the trustee of the trust estate; and


    (b) subsection (2) does not apply.

    115-222(4)    
    For each *capital gain of the trust estate, increase the amount (the assessable amount ) in respect of which you are liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the trust estate by:


    (a) if the capital gain was not reduced under either step 3 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) (discount capital gains) or Subdivision 152-C (small business 50% reduction) - the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) ; and


    (b) if the capital gain was reduced under either step 3 of the method statement or Subdivision 152-C but not both (even if it was further reduced by the other small business concessions) - twice the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) ; and


    (c) if the capital gain was reduced under both step 3 of the method statement and Subdivision 152-C (even if it was further reduced by the other small business concessions) - 4 times the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) .

    115-222(5)    
    To avoid doubt, increase the assessable amount under subsection (2) or (4) even if the assessable amount is nil.

    SECTION 115-225   Attributable gain  

    115-225(1)    
    The amount is the product of:


    (a) the amount of the *capital gain remaining after applying steps 1 to 4 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) ; and


    (b) your *share of the capital gain (see section 115-227 ), divided by the amount of the capital gain.

    115-225(2)    
    Subsection (3) applies if the net income of the trust estate (disregarding the amount of any *franking credits) for the relevant income year falls short of the sum of:


    (a) the *net capital gain (if any) of the trust estate for the income year; and


    (b) the total of all *franked distributions (if any) included in the assessable income of the trust estate for the income year (to the extent that an amount of the franked distributions remained after reducing them by deductions that were directly relevant to them).

    115-225(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), replace paragraph (a) of that subsection with the following paragraph:


    (a) the product of:


    (i) the amount of the *capital gain remaining after applying steps 1 to 4 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) ; and

    (ii) the *net income of the trust estate for that income year (disregarding the amount of any *franking credits), divided by the sum mentioned in subsection (2); and

    SECTION 115-227  

    115-227   Share of a capital gain  


    An entity that is a beneficiary or the trustee of a trust estate has a share of a *capital gain that is the sum of:


    (a) the amount of the capital gain to which the entity is *specifically entitled; and


    (b) if there is an amount of the capital gain to which no beneficiary of the trust estate is specifically entitled, and to which the trustee is not specifically entitled - that amount multiplied by the entity ' s *adjusted Division 6 percentage of the income of the trust estate for the relevant income year.

    SECTION 115-228   Specifically entitled to an amount of a capital gain  

    115-228(1)    


    A beneficiary of a trust estate is specifically entitled to an amount of a *capital gain made by the trust estate in an income year equal to the amount calculated under the following formula:


    *Capital gain × Share of net financial benefit
        Net financial benefit    

    where:

    net financial benefit
    means an amount equal to the *financial benefit that is referable to the *capital gain (after any application by the trustee of losses, to the extent that the application is consistent with the application of capital losses against the capital gain in accordance with the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) ).

    share of net financial benefit
    means an amount equal to the *financial benefit that, in accordance with the terms of the trust:


    (a) the beneficiary has received, or can be reasonably expected to receive; and


    (b) is referable to the *capital gain (after application by the trustee of any losses, to the extent that the application is consistent with the application of capital losses against the capital gain in accordance with the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) ); and


    (c) is recorded, in its character as referable to the capital gain, in the accounts or records of the trust no later than 2 months after the end of the income year.

    Note:

    A trustee of a trust estate that makes a choice under section 115-230 is taken to be specifically entitled to a capital gain.


    115-228(2)    
    To avoid doubt, for the purposes of subsection (1), something is done in accordance with the terms of the trust if it is done in accordance with:


    (a) the exercise of a power conferred by the terms of the trust; or


    (b) the terms of the trust deed (if any), and the terms applicable to the trust because of the operation of legislation, the common law or the rules of equity.

    115-228(3)    
    For the purposes of this section, in calculating the amount of the *capital gain, disregard sections 112-20 and 116-30 (Market value substitution rule) to the extent that those sections have the effect of increasing the amount of the capital gain.

    SECTION 115-230   Choice for resident trustee to be specifically entitled to capital gain  


    Purpose

    115-230(1)    


    The purpose of this section is to allow a trustee of a resident trust to make a choice that has the effect that the trustee will be assessed on a *capital gain of the trust if no trust property representing the capital gain has been paid to or applied for the benefit of a beneficiary of the trust.

    Trusts for which choice can be made

    115-230(2)    


    A trustee can only make a choice under this section in relation to a trust estate that is, in the income year in respect of which the choice is made, a resident trust estate (within the meaning of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ).

    Circumstances in which choice can be made

    115-230(3)    


    If:


    (a) a *capital gain is taken into account in working out the *net capital gain of a trust for an income year; and


    (b) trust property representing all or part of that capital gain has not been paid to or applied for the benefit of a beneficiary of the trust by the end of 2 months after the end of the income year;


    (c) (Repealed by No 62 of 2011)

    the trustee may, no later than the deadline in subsection (5), make a choice that subsection (4) applies in respect of the capital gain.



    Consequences if trustee makes choice

    115-230(4)    


    These are the consequences if the trustee makes a choice that this subsection applies in respect of a *capital gain:


    (a) sections 115-215 and 115-220 do not apply in relation to the capital gain;


    (b) for the purposes of this Act, the trustee is taken to be *specifically entitled to all of the capital gain.



    Deadline for making choice

    115-230(5)    
    The deadline for the purposes of subsection (3) is:


    (a) the day 2 months after the last day of the income year; or


    (b) a later day allowed by the Commissioner.

    Note:

    This deadline is an exception to the general rule about choices in section 103-25 .


    Subdivision 115-D - Tax relief for shareholders in listed investment companies  

    SECTION 115-275   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision allows shareholders of certain listed companies to obtain benefits similar to those conferred by discount capital gains.

    The benefits accrue where dividends paid by those companies represent capital gains that would be discount capital gains had they been made by an individual, a trust or a complying superannuation entity.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 115-280   Deduction for certain dividends  

    115-280(1)    


    You can deduct an amount for a *dividend paid to you by a company (the payment company ) if:


    (a) you are:


    (i) an individual, a *complying superannuation entity, a trust or a partnership; or

    (ia) (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    (ii) a *life insurance company where the dividend is in respect of *shares that are *complying superannuation assets; and


    (b) when the dividend is paid, either you are an Australian resident or you are an individual who is a foreign resident and carries on business in Australia at or through your permanent establishment in Australia, being a permanent establishment within the meaning of:


    (i) a double tax agreement (as defined in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) that relates to a foreign country and affects the individual; or

    (ii) subsection 6(1) of that Act, if there is no such agreement; and


    (ba) if, when the dividend is paid, you are an individual who is a foreign resident and has in Australia such a permanent establishment - the dividend is attributable to the permanent establishment; and


    (c) all or some part of the dividend is reasonably attributable to a *LIC capital gain made by a *listed investment company; and


    (d) in a case where the LIC capital gain was made by a company other than the payment company - the payment company was a listed investment company when it received a dividend part of which is attributable to the LIC capital gain.

    Note:

    The concession is available for LIC capital gains made directly by a listed investment company, and for LIC capital gains that company receives as a dividend through one or more other listed investment companies.


    115-280(2)    
    The amount you can deduct is:


    (a) 50% of your share of the amount (the attributable part ) worked out under subsection (3) if you are an individual, a trust (except a trust that is a *complying superannuation entity) or a partnership; or


    (b) 33 ⅓ % of your share of the attributable part if you are a complying superannuation entity or a *life insurance company.

    Note 1:

    The listed investment company will advise you of your share of the attributable part.

    Note 2:

    If a shareholder in a listed investment company is a trust or partnership, a beneficiary of the trust or a partner in the partnership has no share of the attributable part.


    115-280(3)    


    The attributable part is worked out using this formula:

    where:

    after tax gain
    is the after tax *LIC capital gain.

    Example:

    A listed investment company (which is not a base rate entity) disposes of a CGT asset for $30,000. The asset had a cost base of $10,000. The capital gain is therefore $20,000. The company applies a capital loss of $10,000 against the gain. Its net capital gain is $10,000.

    The net capital gain is subject to tax at 30%. The after tax gain is therefore $7,000.

    The company pays a fully frankeddividend to Daryl, one of its shareholders. It advises Daryl that his share of the attributable part of the dividend is:

    $7 + [ ($7 × 0.3) ÷ (1 − 0.3)] = $10

    Daryl, being an individual, can deduct 50% of $10, which is $5.


    115-280(4)    
    An amount is included in your assessable income if:


    (a) a deduction is allowed under subsection (1) to a trust or a partnership; and


    (b) you are a beneficiary of the trust or a partner in the partnership and you are not an individual; and


    (c) the income of the trust or partnership is reduced by an amount because of that deduction; and


    (d) a part of the deduction (the reduction amount ) is reflected in your share of the net income of the trust or partnership.

    115-280(5)    
    The amount included is:


    (a) the reduction amount if you are a company, a trust (except a trust that is a *complying superannuation entity) or a partnership; or


    (b) one-third of the reduction amount if you are a complying superannuation entity or a *life insurance company.

    Example:

    The Burnett Partnership received a dividend from a listed investment company. The dividend statement advised that the dividend included a $100 attributable part. The partnership deducted $50 under this section in calculating its net income.

    The partnership has 2 equal partners, Amy Burnett and Burnett Consulting Pty Ltd.

    Burnett Consulting ' s assessable income includes its share of the net income of the partnership plus $25 (being that part of the $50 deduction allowed to the partnership that is reflected in the company ' s share of the partnership net income).

    Subsections (4) and (5) do not apply to Amy because she is an individual.


    SECTION 115-285   Meaning of LIC capital gain  

    115-285(1)    
    A LIC capital gain is a *capital gain:


    (a) from a *CGT event that happens on or after 1 July 2001; and


    (b) that is made by a company that is a *listed investment company from a *CGT asset that is an investment to which paragraph 115-290(1)(c) applies; and


    (c) that meets the requirements of sections 115-20 and 115-25 ; and


    (d) that is not a capital gain that could not be a *discount capital gain had it been made by an individual because of section 115-40 or 115-45 ; and


    (e) that is included in the *net capital gain of the company; and


    (f) that is reflected in the taxable income of the company for the income year in which the company had the net capital gain.

    Note 1:

    The listed investment company must be able to demonstrate that at least some part of the LIC capital gain, whether made by the company itself or by another listed investment company, remains after claiming deductions and losses against that income for the income year.

    Note 2:

    Section 115-30 may affect the date of acquisition of a CGT asset for the purposes of sections 115-25 , 115-40 and 115-45 .


    115-285(2)    
    However, a *capital gain made by a company is not a LIC capital gain if the company:


    (a) became a *listed investment company after 1 July 2001; and


    (b) *acquired the *CGT asset concerned before the day on which it became a listed investment company.

    115-285(3)    
    In applying subsection (2), a *CGT asset is treated as if it had been *acquired by the company before it became a *listed investment company if the asset would otherwise be treated as being acquired after that time because of one of these provisions:


    (a) section 70-110 (about trading stock);


    (b) Subdivision 124-E or 124-F (replacement asset roll-overs for exchange of *shares, units, rights or options);


    (ba) Subdivision 124-Q (exchange of stapled ownership interests);


    (c) Subdivision 126-B (same-asset roll-over for transfers within certain wholly-owned groups).


    SECTION 115-290   Meaning of listed investment company  

    115-290(1)    
    A listed investment company is a company:

    (a)    that is an Australian resident; and

    (b)    

    *shares in which are listed for quotation on the official list of ASX Limited or an *approved stock exchange; and

    (c)    at least 90% of the *market value of whose *CGT assets consists of investments permitted by subsection (4) .


    115-290(2)    
    A company is also a listed investment company if:

    (a)    it is a 100% subsidiary of a company that is a *listed investment company because of subsection (1) ; and

    (b)    the subsidiary would be a listed investment company because of subsection (1) if it were able to comply with paragraph (1)(b) .

    115-290(3)    
    This Subdivision applies to a company that does not comply with paragraph (1)(c) as if it did comply if the failure:

    (a)    was of a temporary nature only; and

    (b)    was caused by circumstances outside its control.

    115-290(4)    
    The permitted investments are:

    (a)    *shares, units, options, rights or similar interests to the extent permitted by subsections (5) , (6) , (7) and (8) ; or

    (b)    financial instruments (such as loans, debts, debentures, bonds, promissory notes, futures contracts, forward contracts, currency swap contracts and a right or option in respect of a share, security, loan or contract); or

    (c)    

    an asset whose main use by the company in the course of carrying on its *business is to *derive interest, an annuity, rent, royalties or foreign exchange gains unless:

    (i) the asset is an intangible asset and has been substantially developed, altered or improved by the company so that its *market value has been substantially enhanced; or

    (ii) its main use for deriving rent was only temporary; or

    (d)    goodwill.

    115-290(5)    
    The company can own a *100% subsidiary if the subsidiary is a listed investment company because of subsection (2) .

    115-290(6)    
    The company can own (directly or indirectly) any percentage of another *listed investment company that is not the company's *100% subsidiary.

    115-290(7)    
    Otherwise, the company cannot own (directly or indirectly) more than 10% of another company or trust.

    115-290(8)    
    In working out whether a company indirectly owns any part of another company or trust:

    (a)    disregard any ownership it has indirectly through a *listed public company or a *publicly traded unit trust; and

    (b)    if the company owns not more than 50% of another *listed investment company - disregard any ownership it has indirectly through the other company.


    SECTION 115-295  

    115-295   Maintaining records  


    A *listed investment company must maintain records showing the balance of its *LIC capital gains available for distribution.

    Division 116 - Capital proceeds  

    SECTION 116-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division tells you how to work out what the capital proceeds from a CGT event are. You need to know this to work out if you made a capital gain or loss from the event.

    SECTION 116-5  

    116-5   General rules  
    Section 116-20 sets out the general rules about capital proceeds. They are relevant to each CGT event that is listed in the table in section 116-25 .

    SECTION 116-10   Modifications to general rules  

    116-10(1)    


    There are 6 modifications to the general rules that may be relevant. The table in section 116-25 lists which ones may be relevant to each CGT event listed in the table.

    Explanation of modifications

    116-10(2)    
    The first is a market value substitution rule. It is relevant if:

  • • you receive no capital proceeds from a CGT event; or
  • • some or all of the capital proceeds cannot be valued; or
  • • you did not deal at arm ' s length with another entity in connection with the event.

  • 116-10(3)    
    The second is an apportionment rule. It is relevant if a payment you receive in connection with a transaction relates in part only to a CGT event.

    Example:

    You sell 3 CGT assets for a total of $100,000. The $100,000 needs to be apportioned between the 3 assets.


    116-10(4)    
    The third is a non-receipt rule. It is relevant if you do not receive, or are not likely to receive, some or all of the capital proceeds from a CGT event.

    116-10(5)    
    The fourth is a repaid rule. It is relevant if you are required to repay some or all of the capital proceeds from a CGT event.

    116-10(6)    
    The fifth is relevant only if another entity assumes a liability in connection with a CGT event.

    116-10(7)    


    The sixth relates to misappropriation by an employee or agent. It is relevant if your employee or agent misappropriates all or part of the capital proceeds from a CGT event.
    Note 1:

    Also, these provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 modify capital proceeds:

  • (a) section 23B (undistributed FIF attribution income on disposal of an interest in a FIF);
  • (b) sections 159GZZZF and 159GZZZG (cancellation of shares in a holding company);
  • (c) sections 159GZZZQ and 159GZZZS (buy-backs of shares);
  • (d) sections 401 , 422 , 423 and 461 (CFCs).
  • Note 2:

    Section 230-505 of this Act (Division 230 financial arrangement as consideration for provision or acquisition of a thing) also modifies capital proceeds.


    General rules  

    SECTION 116-20   General rules about capital proceeds  

    116-20(1)    
    The capital proceeds from a *CGT event are the total of:


    (a) the money you have received, or are entitled to receive, in respect of the event happening; and


    (b) the *market value of any other property you have received, or are entitled to receive, in respect of the event happening (worked out as at the time of the event).

    Note 1:

    The timing rules for each event are in Division 104 .

    Note 2:

    In some situations you are treated as having received money or other property, or being entitled to receive it: see section 103-10 .

    Note 3:

    If you dispose of shares in a buy-back, the capital proceeds are worked out under Division 16K of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    116-20(2)    


    This table sets out what the capital proceeds from *CGT events F1, F2, H2 and K9 are:


    General rules about capital proceeds
    Event number Description of event: The capital proceeds are:
    F1 Granting, renewing or extending a lease Any premium paid or payable to you for the grant, renewal or extension
    .
    F2 Granting, renewing or extending a long-term lease The greatest of:
        (a) the *market value of the estate in fee simple or head lease (worked out when you grant, renew or extend the lease); and
        (b) what would have been that market value if you had not granted, renewed or extended the lease; and
        (c) any premium paid or payable to you for the grant, renewal or extension
    .
    H2 Receipt for event relating to a CGT asset The money or other consideration you received, or are entitled to receive, because of the act, transaction or event
    .
    K9 Entitlement to receive payment of a *carried interest The amount of the payment, to the extent that it is a payment of the *carried interest


    116-20(3)    


    In working out the *market value of the property the subject of the grant, renewal or extension of a long-term lease:


    (a) include the market value of any building, part of a building, structure or improvement that is treated as a separate *CGT asset from the property; and


    (b) disregard any *depreciating assets for whose decline in value the lessor has deducted or can deduct an amount under this Act.

    Note:

    Subdivision 108-D sets out when a building, structure or improvement is treated as a separate CGT asset.


    116-20(4)    


    In working out the amount of any premium paid or payable to the lessor for the grant, renewal or extension of a long-term lease, disregard any part of it that is attributable to a *depreciating asset of that kind.

    The payment of any premium can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    116-20(5)    


    In working out the proceeds of a *CGT event that is a *supply, disregard the amount of your *net GST (if any) on the supply.

    Modifications to general rules  

    SECTION 116-25  

    116-25   Table of modifications to the general rules  


    There are 6 modifications to the general rules that may be relevant to a *CGT event. This table tells you:
  • • each *CGT event for which the general rules about *capital proceeds are relevant; and
  • • the modifications that can apply to that event; and
  • • any special rules that apply to that event.


    Capital proceeds modifications
    Event number Description of event: Only these modifications can apply: Special rules:
    A1 Disposal of a CGT asset 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 If the *disposal is because another entity exercises an option: see section 116-65
    If the disposal is of *shares or an interest in a trust: see section 116-80
    If the disposal is a gift for which a section 30-212 valuation is obtained: see section 116-100
    If a roll-over under Subdivision 310-D applies: see section 116-110
    If the disposal is a disposal of part of an interest in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right under a *farm-in farm-out arrangement: see section 116-115
    If the disposal involves a *look-through earnout right: see section 116-120
    .
    B1 Use and enjoyment before title passes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 None
    .
    C1 Loss or destruction of a CGT asset 2, 3, 4, 6 None
    .
    C2 Cancellation, surrender and similar endings 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 See sections 116-75, 116-80, 116-110 and 116-115
    .
    C3 End of option to acquire shares etc. 2, 3, 4, 6 None
    .
    D1 Creating contractual or other rights 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 None
    .
    D2 Granting an option 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 See section 116-70
    .
    D3 Granting a right to income from mining 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 None
    .
    D4 Entering into a conservation covenant 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 116-105
    .
    E1 Creating a trust over a CGT asset 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 None
    .
    E2 Transferring a CGT asset to a trust 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 If a roll-over under Subdivision 310-D applies: see section 116-110
    .
    E8 Disposal by beneficiary of capital interest 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 See section 116-80
    .
    F1 Granting a lease 2, 3, 4, 6 None
    .
    F2 Granting a long-term lease 2, 3, 4, 6 None
    .
    F4 Lessee receives payment for changing lease 2, 3, 4, 6 None
    .
    F5 Lessor receives payment for changing lease 2, 3, 4, 6 None
    .
    H2 Receipt for event relating to a CGT asset 2, 3, 4, 6 None
    .
    K1 (Repealed by No 77 of 2001)    
    .
    K6 Pre-CGT shares or trust interest 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 None
    .
    K7 (Repealed by No 119 of 2002)    
    .
    K9 Entitlement to receive payment of a *carried interest 2, 3, 4, 6 None

  • SECTION 116-30   Market value substitution rule: modification 1  
    No capital proceeds

    116-30(1)    


    If you received no *capital proceeds from a *CGT event, you are taken to have received the *market value of the *CGT asset that is the subject of the event. (The market value is worked out as at the time of the event.)
    Example:

    You give a CGT asset to another entity. You are taken to have received the market value of the CGT asset.



    There are capital proceeds

    116-30(2)    


    The *capital proceeds from a *CGT event are replaced with the *market value of the *CGT asset that is the subject of the event if:


    (a) some or all of those proceeds cannot be valued; or


    (b) those capital proceeds are more or less than the market value of the asset and:


    (i) you and the entity that *acquired the asset from you did not deal with each other at *arm ' s length in connection with the event; or

    (ii) the CGT event is CGT event C2 (about cancellation, surrender and similar endings).

    (The market value is worked out as at the time of the event.)


    116-30(2A)    


    Subsection (2) does not apply if there is a partial roll-over for the *CGT event because of section 124-150 .

    116-30(2B)    


    Subsection (2) does not apply to a situation that would otherwise be covered by paragraph (2)(b) if the *CGT event is *CGT event C2 (about cancellation, surrender and similar endings) and the *CGT asset that is the subject of the event is:


    (a) a *share in a company that has at least 300 *members and is not a company that is covered by section 116-35 ; or


    (b) a unit in a unit trust that has at least 300 unit holders and is not a trust that is covered by section 116-35 .

    Note:

    So, for one of these assets, the capital proceeds for the cancellation will be what you actually received.


    116-30(2C)    


    Subsection (2) does not apply if:

    (a)    you are a *complying superannuation fund, a *complying approved deposit fund or a *pooled superannuation trust; and

    (b)    the *capital proceeds from the *CGT event exceed the *market value of the *CGT asset; and

    (c)    assuming the capital proceeds were your *statutory income, the proceeds would be *non-arm ' s length income.



    Market value for CGT events C2 and D1

    116-30(3)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to:


    (a) these examples of *CGT event C2:


    (i) the expiry of a *CGT asset you own;

    (ii) the cancellation of your *statutory licence; or


    (b) *CGT event D1 (about creating contractual or other rights).


    116-30(3A)    


    If you need to work out the *market value of a *CGT asset that is the subject of *CGT event C2, work it out as if the event had not occurred and was never proposed to occur.
    Example:

    A company cancels shares you own in it. You work out the market value of the shares by disregarding the cancellation.



    CGT assets the subject of certain events

    116-30(4)    


    To avoid doubt, the *CGT asset that is the subject of a *CGT event specified in this table is the asset so specified.


    *CGT assets the subject of certain events
    For this *CGT event: This asset is the subject of the event:
    D1 the right you created
    .
    D2 the option you granted
    .
    D3 the right you granted
    .
    E8 your interest or part interest in the trust capital
    .
    K1 (Repealed by No 77 of 2001)
    .
    K6 the *share or interest you *acquired before 20 September 1985



    Carried interests

    116-30(5)    


    This section does not apply to *CGT event A1 or C2 to the extent that the CGT event is constituted by ceasing to own:


    (a) the *carried interest of a *general partner in a *VCLP, an *ESVCLP or an *AFOF or a *limited partner in a *VCMP; or


    (b) an entitlement to receive a payment of such a carried interest.

    Note:

    This section does not apply to ESS interests acquired under employee share schemes: see subsection 130-80(4) .


    SECTION 116-35   Companies and trusts that are not widely held  


    Coverage

    116-35(1)    
    A company is covered by this section if subsection (3) or (5) applies to the company.

    116-35(2)    
    A unit trust is covered by this section if subsection (4) or (5) applies to the trust.

    Concentrated ownership

    116-35(3)    
    This subsection applies to a company if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, *shares in the company:


    (a) carrying *fixed entitlements to at least 75% of the company ' s income or at least 75% of the company ' s capital; or


    (b) carrying at least 75% of the voting power in the company.

    116-35(4)    
    This subsection applies to a trust if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, units in the trust:


    (a) carrying *fixed entitlements to at least 75% of the trust ' s income or at least 75% of the trust ' s capital; or


    (b) if unit holders of the trust have a right to vote in respect of activities of the trust - carrying at least 75% of the voting power in the trust.

    Possible variation of rights

    116-35(5)    
    This subsection applies to a company or trust if, because of:


    (a) any provision in the entity ' s constituent document, or in any contract, agreement or instrument:


    (i) authorising the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to any of the *shares or units in the entity; or

    (ii) relating to the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of any of those shares or units; or


    (b) any contract, *arrangement, option or instrument under which a person has power to acquire any of those shares or units; or


    (c) any power, authority or discretion in a person in relation to the rights attaching to any of those shares or units;

    it is reasonable to conclude that the rights attaching to any of those shares or units are capable of being varied or abrogated in such a way (even if they are not in fact varied or abrogated in that way) that, directly or indirectly, subsection (3) or (4) would apply to the entity.



    Single individual

    116-35(6)    
    For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4) , all of the following are taken to be a single individual:


    (a) an individual, whether or not the individual holds *shares or units in the entity concerned;


    (b) the individual ' s *associates;


    (c) for any shares or units in respect of which other individuals are nominees of the individual or of the individual ' s associates - those other individuals.

    SECTION 116-40   Apportionment rule: modification 2  

    116-40(1)    
    If you receive a payment in connection with a transaction that relates to more than one *CGT event, the capital proceeds from each event are so much of the payment as is reasonably attributable to that event.

    Example:

    You sell a block of land and a boat for a total of $100,000. This transaction involves 2 CGT events.

    The $100,000 must be divided among the 2 events. The capital proceeds from the disposal of the land are so much of the $100,000 as is reasonably attributable to it. The rest relates to the boat.


    116-40(2)    
    If you receive a payment in connection with a transaction that relates to one *CGT event and something else, the capital proceeds from the event are so much of the payment as is reasonably attributable to the event.

    Example:

    You are an architect. You receive $70,000 for selling a block of land and giving advice to the new owner. This transaction involves one CGT event: the disposal of the land.

    The capital proceeds from the disposal of the land is so much of the $70,000 as is reasonably attributable to that disposal.


    116-40(3)    
    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    SECTION 116-45   Non-receipt rule: modification 3  

    116-45(1)    


    The *capital proceeds from a *CGT event are reduced if:


    (a) you are not likely to receive some or all (the unpaid amount ) of those proceeds; and


    (b) this is not because of anything you (or your *associate) have done or omitted to do; and


    (c) you took all reasonable steps to get the unpaid amount paid.

    The capital proceeds are reduced by the unpaid amount.

    Note:

    This rule exists because the general rules treat you as having received an amount when you are entitled to receive it.

    Example:

    You sell a painting to another entity for $5,000 (the capital proceeds). You agree to accept monthly instalments of $100.

    You receive $2,000, but then the other entity stops making payments. It becomes clear that you are not likely to receive the remaining $3,000. The capital proceeds are reduced to $2,000.


    116-45(2)    
    There is a further consequence if:


    (a) those proceeds are reduced by the unpaid amount; but


    (b) you later receive a part of that amount.

    Those proceeds are increased by that part.


    116-45(3)    
    This Part and Part 3-3 apply to the debt owed to you (the unpaid amount) as if it were not a *CGT asset.


    SECTION 116-50   Repaid rule: modification 4  

    116-50(1)    


    The *capital proceeds from a *CGT event are reduced by:


    (a) any part of them that you repay; or


    (b) any compensation you pay that can reasonably be regarded as a repayment of part of them.

    However, the capital proceeds are not reduced by any part of the payment that you can deduct.

    Example:

    You sell a block of land for $50,000 (the capital proceeds). The purchaser later finds out that you misrepresented a term in the contract. The purchaser sues you and the court orders you to pay $10,000 in damages to the purchaser.

    The capital proceeds are reduced by $10,000.


    116-50(2)    
    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    SECTION 116-55  

    116-55   Assumption of liability rule: modification 5  
    The *capital proceeds from a *CGT event are increased if another entity *acquires the *CGT asset (the subject of the event) subject to a liability by way of security over the asset.

    They are increased by the amount of the liability the other entity assumes.

    Example:

    You sell land for $150,000. You receive $50,000 (the capital proceeds) and the buyer becomes responsible for a $100,000 liability under an outstanding mortgage. The capital proceeds are increased by $100,000 to $150,000.

    SECTION 116-60   Misappropriation rule: modification 6  

    116-60(1)    
    The *capital proceeds from a *CGT event are reduced if your employee or *agent misappropriates (whether by theft, embezzlement, larceny or otherwise) all or part of those proceeds.

    Note:

    This rule exists because the general rules treat you as having received an amount when you are entitled to receive it.


    116-60(2)    
    The *capital proceeds are reduced by the amount misappropriated.

    116-60(3)    
    There is a further consequence if:


    (a) those proceeds are reduced by the amount misappropriated; and


    (b) you later receive an amount as *recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated.

    Those proceeds are increased by the amount received.


    116-60(4)    
    This Part and Part 3-3 apply to the debt owed to you (the amount misappropriated) as if it were not a *CGT asset.

    116-60(5)    
    Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purposes of giving effect to this section for an income year if:


    (a) you discover the misappropriation, or you receive an amount as *recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated, after you lodged your *income tax return for the income year; and


    (b) the amendment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after you discover the misappropriation or receive the amount.

    Special rules  

    SECTION 116-65   Disposal etc. of a CGT asset the subject of an option  

    116-65(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you granted, renewed or extended an option to create (including grant or issue) or *dispose of a *CGT asset; and


    (b) another entity exercises the option; and


    (c) because of the exercise of the option, you create (including grant or issue) or dispose of the CGT asset.

    116-65(2)    
    The *capital proceeds from the creation (including grant or issue) or disposal include any payment you received for granting, renewing or extending the option.

    116-65(3)    
    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    SECTION 116-70   Option requiring both acquisition and disposal etc.  

    116-70(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you granted, renewed or extended an option; and


    (b) the option requires you both to *acquire, and to create (including grant or issue) or *dispose of, a *CGT asset.

    116-70(2)    
    The option is treated as 2 separate options and half of the *capital proceeds from the grant, renewal or extension is attributed to each option.

    SECTION 116-75  

    116-75   Special rule for CGT event happening to a lease  


    The *capital proceeds from the expiry, surrender or forfeiture of a lease include any payment (because of the lease ending) by the lessor to the lessee for expenditure of a capital nature incurred by the lessee in making improvements to the leased property.

    The payment or expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    SECTION 116-80   Special rule if CGT asset is shares or an interest in a trust  

    116-80(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if:


    (a) there is a fall in the *market value of a *personal use asset (other than a car, motor cycle or similar vehicle) or a *collectable of a company or trust; and


    (b) *CGT event A1, C2 or E8 happens to:


    (i) *shares you own in the company (or in a company that is a member of the same *wholly-owned group); or

    (ii) an interest you have in the trust.
    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    116-80(2)    


    The *capital proceeds from the event are replaced with the *market value of the *shares, or the interest in the trust.

    The market value is worked out as at the time of the event as if the fall in market value of the *personal use asset or *collectable had not occurred.

    Note:

    You may also make a collectable loss: see CGT event K5.


    SECTION 116-85   Section 47A of 1936 Act applying to rolled-over asset  

    116-85(1)    


    You reduce the *capital proceeds from a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset you have if the conditions in this table are satisfied.


    Conditions for reduction
    Item Condition
    1 You must have *acquired the asset from a company or *CFC
    2 Either:
      (a) the company obtained a roll-over for the *CGT event that resulted in your *acquisition of the asset; or
      (b) the *CFC obtained a roll-over for that event in applying Division 7 of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the purpose of working out the *attributable income of a company in relation to any entity except a roll-over under Subdivision 124-J (about Crown leases), 124-K (about depreciating assets) or 124-L (about prospecting and mining entitlements)
    3 The company or *CFC is taken, under section 47A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , to have paid you a dividend in relation to that event, and some or all of the dividend is included in your assessable income under section 44 of that Act

    Note:

    For roll-overs: see Divisions 122 , 124 and 126 .


    116-85(2)    
    The reduction is the lesser of:


    (a) the amount of the dividend; and


    (b) the amount of any *capital gain that, apart from the roll-over, the company or *CFC would have made from the *CGT event if its *capital proceeds from the event had been the asset's *market value (at the time of the event).

    Note:

    This section is disregarded in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 410 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    116-85(3)    
    (Repealed by No 96 of 2004)

    SECTION 116-95   Company changes residence from an unlisted country  

    116-95(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if:


    (a) a *CFC ceases at a time (the residency change time ) to be a resident of an *unlisted country and becomes a resident of a *listed country; and


    (aa) subsection 457(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply to the change of residence; and


    (b) because of the change in its residency status, an amount is included in an entity ' s assessable income under section 457 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (including because of paragraph 58(1)(d) of the Taxation Laws Amendment (Foreign Income) Act 1990 ); and


    (c) a *CGT event happens in relation to a *CGT asset (the CFC asset ) that is *taxable Australian property and that the CFC owned since the residency change time.


    116-95(2)    
    If the conditions in subsection (3) are satisfied, the *capital proceeds from the *CGT event are reduced by the amount worked out under subsection (4). If the conditions in subsection (5) are satisfied, those capital proceeds are increased by the amount worked out under subsection (6).

    Reduction of capital proceeds

    116-95(3)    


    If all the *CFC ' s assets were *disposed of at the residency change time for their *market values in the circumstances mentioned in subparagraph 457(2)(a) (ii) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 :


    (a) *distributable profits of the CFC of a particular amount (the distributable profit amount ) would be created, or its distributable profits would be increased by an amount (also the distributable profit amount ); and


    (b) the CFC would have made a profit (the CFC asset profit ) on the disposal of the CFC asset.


    116-95(4)    


    The *capital proceeds are reduced by:


    Distributable profit amount ×   CFC asset profit  
      Total asset profits

    where:

    total asset profits
    is the sum of the profits that the CFC would have made if all its assets were *disposed of at the residency change time for their *market values (ignoring disposals that would not result in a profit).



    Increase in capital proceeds

    116-95(5)    


    If all the *CFC ' s assets were *disposed of at the residency change time for their *market values in the circumstances mentioned in subparagraph 457(2)(a) (ii) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 :


    (a) the *distributable profits of the CFC would be reduced by an amount (the distributable profit reduction amount ); and


    (b) the CFC would have made a loss (the CFC asset loss ) on the disposal of the CFC asset.


    116-95(6)    


    The *capital proceeds are increased by:


    Distributable profit
    reduction amount  
    ×   CFC asset loss  
      Total asset losses

    where:

    total asset losses
    is the sum of the losses that the CFC would have made if all its assets were *disposed of at the residency change time for their *market values (ignoring disposals that would not result in a loss).

    Note:

    This section is disregarded in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 410 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    SECTION 116-100   Gifts of property  

    116-100(1)    
    If CGT event A1 is the giving of a gift of property by you for which a valuation under section 30-212 is obtained, you may choose that the *capital proceeds from the event are replaced with the value of the property as determined under the valuation.

    116-100(2)    
    You can only make this choice if the valuation was made no more than 90 days before or after the CGT event.


    SECTION 116-105  

    116-105   Conservation covenants  


    If *CGT event D4 happens because you enter into a *conservation covenant over land you own and you can deduct an amount under Division 31 because you enter into the covenant, the *capital proceeds from the event are the amount you can deduct.
    Note:

    To get a deduction under Division 31 , you must not receive money, property or other material benefit for entering into the covenant.

    SECTION 116-110  

    116-110   Roll-overs for merging superannuation funds  


    If a roll-over is chosen under Subdivision 310-D in relation to *CGT event A1, C2 or E2, the *capital proceeds of the transferring entity (within the meaning of that Division) from the event are the amount worked out under subsection 310-55(1) or 310-60(3) .

    SECTION 116-115   Farm-in farm-out arrangements  

    116-115(1)    
    If:


    (a) *CGT event A1 is the *disposal of part of your interest in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right; and


    (b) the part is disposed of under a *farm-in farm-out arrangement; and


    (c) you have received an *exploration benefit in respect of the event happening;

    in working out the *capital proceeds for the CGT event, treat as zero the *market value of the exploration benefit.


    116-115(2)    
    If:


    (a) *CGT event C2 arises as a result of an *exploration benefit being provided to you; and


    (b) the exploration benefit is provided under a *farm-in farm-out arrangement;

    in working out the *capital proceeds for the CGT event, treat as zero the *market value of the exploration benefit.


    SECTION 116-120   Disposals of assets involving look-through earnout rights  


    Consequences for capital proceeds

    116-120(1)    
    If *CGT event A1 happens because you *dispose of a *CGT asset, your *capital proceeds from the disposal:


    (a) do not include the value of any *look-through earnout right relating to the CGT asset and the disposal; and


    (b) are increased by any *financial benefit that you receive under such a look-through earnout right; and


    (c) are reduced by any financial benefit that you provide under such a look-through earnout right.

    Remaking choices affected by the look-through earnout right

    116-120(2)    
    Despite section 103-25 , you may remake any choice you made under this Part or Part 3-3 in relation to the *CGT event if:


    (a) you provide or receive a *financial benefit under such a *look-through earnout right; and


    (b) you remake the choice at or before the time you are required to lodge your *income tax return for the income year in which the financial benefit is provided or received.

    Amending assessments affected by the look-through earnout right

    116-120(3)    
    The Commissioner may amend an assessment of a *tax-related liability if:


    (a) an entity provides or receives a *financial benefit under such a *look-through earnout right; and


    (b) the amount of the tax-related liability:


    (i) depends on that entity ' s taxable income for the income year in which the *CGT event happens; or

    (ii) is otherwise affected by that right ' s character as a look-through earnout right; and


    (c) the Commissioner makes the amendment before the end of the 4-year period starting at the end of the income year in which the last possible financial benefit becomes or could become due under the look-through earnout right.

    The tax-related liability need not be a liability of that entity.

    Note:

    Subparagraph (b)(ii) covers changes to the amount of that tax-related liability that happen directly or indirectly because of subsection (1) or (2).


    116-120(4)    
    If at a particular time a right is taken never to have been a *look-through earnout right because of subsection 118-565(2) , the Commissioner may amend an assessment of a *tax-related liability for up to 4 years after that time if:


    (a) an entity provides or receives a *financial benefit under the right; and


    (b) the amount of the tax-related liability:


    (i) depends on that entity ' s taxable income for the income year in which the *CGT event happens; or

    (ii) was otherwise affected by that right ' s character as a look-through earnout right before subsection 118-565(2) applied.

    The tax-related liability need not be a liability of that entity.

    Note:

    Subsection 118-565(2) restricts look-through earnout rights to rights to financial benefits over a period not exceeding 5 years from the end of the income year in which the CGT event happens.


    116-120(5)    
    If, after providing or receiving a *financial benefit under a right referred to in subsection (3) or (4):


    (a) you are dissatisfied with an assessment referred to in that subsection; and


    (b) the Commissioner notifies you that the Commissioner has decided under that subsection not to amend your assessment;

    you may object against the assessment, to the extent that it does not take account of that right ' s character (as a *look-through earnout right or not such a right), in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    Division 118 - Exemptions  

    Guide to Division 118  

    SECTION 118-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out various exemptions for many capital gains and losses.

    There are other provisions that provide exemptions from CGT liability, for example, Division 104 (exceptions from CGT events), Division 152 (small business relief) and Division 50 (exempt entities).

    Note 1:

    There are also these exemptions in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 :

  • • section 23AH (about foreign branch gains and losses of companies);
  • • section 26BC (about securities lending arrangements);
  • • section 121AS (about demutualisation of insurance companies);
  • • sections 121EL , 121ELA and 121ELB (about offshore banking units);
  • • section 159GZZZN (about buy-back and cancellation of shares);
  • • section 315 (about superannuation and related businesses);
  • • section 408 (about calculating the attributable income of a CFC).
  • Note 2:

    There are also exemptions in Division 54 .

    Note 3:

    There are also exemptions in Divisions 315 and 316 (about demutualisation of certain insurers).

    Subdivision 118-A - General exemptions  

    Exempt assets

    SECTION 118-5  

    118-5   Cars, motor cycles and valour decorations  
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from any of these *CGT assets is disregarded:


    (a) a *car, motor cycle or similar vehicle;


    (b) a decoration awarded for valour or brave conduct (unless you paid money or gave any other property for it).

    SECTION 118-10   Collectables and personal use assets  

    118-10(1)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *collectable is disregarded if the first element of its *cost base, or the first element of its *cost if it is a *depreciating asset, is $500 or less.
    Example:

    On 10 July 2001, Gayle buys a print for $450 and hangs it in her home. On 30 November 2001 she takes the print to her office and hangs it in the lobby. Gayle self assesses the effective life of the print to be 7 years.

    Gayle sells the print to Anna for $700 on 2 January 2002.

    How much can Gayle deduct for the 2001-02 income year?

    The cost of the print is $450. Gayle chooses to use the prime cost method to calculate its decline in value.

    The print's decline in value is:


    $450 × 177
    365 ×   100%  
      7 years = $31        

    Gayle can deduct $6 as the taxable use portion of the decline in value under Division 40 :


      34  
    177  
    × 31

    Due to the balancing adjustment event that occurred on 2 January 2002, $54 is included in Gayle's assessable income for the 2001-02 income year under section 40-285 . The amount is reduced for non-taxable use by section 40-290 .

    A capital gain of $202 is disregarded under this section because the asset is a collectable acquired for less than $500.


    118-10(2)    


    However, there is a special rule if the *collectable is an interest in one of these *CGT assets:


    (a) *artwork, jewellery, an antique, or a coin or medallion;


    (b) a rare folio, manuscript or book;


    (c) a postage stamp or first day cover.

    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the interest is disregarded only if the *market value of the asset (when you *acquired the interest) is $500 or less.

    Note:

    If you last acquired the interest before 16 December 1995, a capital gain or loss is disregarded if you acquired the interest for $500 or less: see section 118-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    118-10(3)    


    A *capital gain you make from a *personal use asset, or part of the asset, is disregarded if the first element of the asset's *cost base, or the first element of its *cost if it is a *depreciating asset, is $10,000 or less.
    Note:

    A capital loss you make from a personal use asset is disregarded: see subsection 108-20(1) .


    SECTION 118-12   Assets used to produce exempt income etc.  

    118-12(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT asset that you used solely to produce your *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income is disregarded.

    118-12(2)    
    However, the exemption does not apply if the asset was used to gain or produce an amount that is *non-assessable non-exempt income because of:


    (a) any of these provisions of this Act:


    (i) section 59-15 (mining payments);

    (ia) section 59-35 (amounts that would be mutual receipts but for prohibition on distributions to members or issue of MCIs);

    (ii) subsection 70-90(2) (disposing of trading stock outside the ordinary course of business);

    (iii) section 86-30 (income of a personal services entity);

    (iv) subsection 86-35(1) (payment by a personal services entity);

    (v) subsection 86-35(2) (share of personal services entity ' s net income);

    (vi) section 240-40 (treatment of arrangement payments);

    (via) section 242-40 (about luxury car lease payments);

    (vib) section 768-5 (foreign equity distributions on participation interests);

    (vii) section 802-15 (foreign residents - exempting CFI from Australian tax);

    (viii) section 840-815 (foreign residents - final withholding tax on managed investment trust income); or


    (b) any of these provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 :


    (i) section 23AH (foreign branch profits of Australian companies);

    (ii) section 23AI (amounts paid out of attributed income);

    (iii) (Repealed by No 110 of 2014)

    (iv) section 23AK (attributed foreign investment fund income);

    (v) subsection 23L(1) (fringe benefits);

    (vi) subsection 99B(2A) (attributed trust income);

    (vii) section 128D (dividends, royalties and interest subject to withholding tax);

    (viii) subsection 271-105(3) in Schedule 2F (amounts subject to family trust distribution tax).

    (ix) (Repealed by No 79 of 2010 )
    Note:

    These provisions make amounts non-assessable non-exempt income to prevent them being double taxed rather than to remove them entirely from the taxation system. Therefore, the policy reason for disregarding gains and losses does not apply to assets used to produce those amounts.


    SECTION 118-13  

    118-13   Shares in a PDF  
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event happening in relation to *shares in a *PDF is disregarded.

    SECTION 118-15   Registered emissions units  

    118-15(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *registered emissions unit is disregarded.

    118-15(2)    
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)


    118-15(3)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a right to receive an *Australian carbon credit unit is disregarded.

    Anti-overlap provisions

    SECTION 118-20   Reducing capital gains if amount otherwise assessable  

    118-20(1)    
    A *capital gain you make from a *CGT event is reduced if, because of the event, a provision of this Act (outside of this Part) includes an amount (for any income year) in:

    (a)    your assessable income or *exempt income; or

    (b)    if you are a partner in a partnership, the assessable income or exempt income of the partnership.

    118-20(1A)    
    Subsection (1) applies to an amount that, under a provision of this Act (outside of this Part), is included in:

    (a)    your assessable income or *exempt income; or

    (b)    if you are a partner in a partnership, the assessable income or exempt income of the partnership;

    in relation to a *CGT asset as if it were so included because of the *CGT event referred to in that subsection if the amount would also be taken into account in working out the amount of a *capital gain you make.

    Note:

    An example is an amount assessable under Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , which deals with accruals taxation of certain securities.


    118-20(1B)    
    The rule in subsection (1) does not apply to:

    (a)    an amount that is taken to be a dividend under section 159GZZZP of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which relates to buy-backs of *shares); or

    (b)    

    an amount included in assessable income under subsection 207-20(1) , 207-35(1) or 207-35(3) of this Act (which relate to franked distributions).

    118-20(2)    
    The gain is reduced to zero if it does not exceed:

    (a)    the amount included; or

    (b)    if you are a partner, your share (the partner ' s share ) of the amount included in the assessable income or *exempt income of the partnership (calculated according to your entitlement to share in the partnership net income or loss).

    Example:

    Liz bought some land in 1990, as part of a profit-making scheme. In December 1998 she sells it.

    Her profit from the sale is $40,000 and is included in her assessable income under section 6-5 (about ordinary income).

    Suppose she made a capital gain from the sale of $30,000. It is reduced to zero because it is does not exceed the amount included.


    118-20(3)    
    The gain is reduced by the amount included, or the amount of the partner ' s share, if the gain exceeds that amount.

    Note:

    These rules are modified for complying superannuation funds that become non-complying and for foreign superannuation funds that become Australian superannuation funds: see Division 295 .


    118-20(4)    


    A *capital gain you make from a *CGT event is reduced by the extent that a provision of this Act (except sections 59-40 and 316-255 ) treats:

    (a)    

    an amount of your *ordinary income or *statutory income from the event as being *non-assessable non-exempt income; or

    (b)    

    if you are a partner, your share of the ordinary income or *statutory income of the partnership from the event (calculated according to your entitlement to share in the partnership net income or loss) as being non-assessable non-exempt income of the partnership.

    118-20(4A)    


    A *capital gain the trustee of a *superannuation fund makes from a *CGT event happening in relation to a *CGT asset in an income year is reduced if the asset ' s *market value was taken into account in working out the fund ' s income from previous years under section 295-325 or 295-330 .

    118-20(4B)    


    The gain is reduced to zero if it does not exceed the amount that would have been the *capital gain from the *CGT event if the *capital proceeds from the event were the asset ' s *market value that was taken into account in working out that net previous income.

    If the gain exceeds that amount, it is reduced by that amount.



    Exceptions

    118-20(5)    
    The gain is not reduced if an amount is included in your assessable income, or the assessable income of the partnership, for any income year because of a balancing adjustment.

    118-20(6)    


    The gain is not reduced if an amount is included in your *non-assessable non-exempt income under section 768-5 (about foreign equity distributions on participation interests) because a company makes a *foreign equity distribution that is:

    (a)    

    debited against a *share capital account of the company; or


    (b) (Omitted by No 63 of 1998)

    (c)    debited against an asset revaluation reserve of the company; or

    (d)    directly or indirectly attributable to amounts transferred from such an account or reserve of the company.


    SECTION 118-21   Carried interests  


    CGT events relating to carried interests not to be treated as income

    118-21(1)    


    The modifications in subsections (2) and (3) apply if *CGT event K9 happens in relation to your entitlement to receive a payment of the *carried interest of a *general partner in a *VCLP, an *ESVCLP or an *AFOF or a *limited partner in a *VCMP.

    118-21(2)    
    These provisions do not apply to the CGT event:


    (a) sections 6-5 (about *ordinary income), 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct), 15-15 and 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans) and 118-20 (reducing capital gains if amount otherwise assessable);


    (b) sections 25A and 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about profit-making undertakings or schemes).

    118-21(3)    
    Section 6-10 (about *statutory income) does not apply to the *CGT event except so far as that section applies in relation to section 102-5 (about net capital gains).

    SECTION 118-22  

    118-22   Superannuation lump sums and employment termination payments  


    In applying section 118-20 , treat a *superannuation lump sum or an *employment termination payment that you receive as being included in your assessable income.

    SECTION 118-24   Depreciating assets  

    118-24(1)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event (that is also a *balancing adjustment event) that happens to a *depreciating asset is disregarded if the asset was:


    (a) an asset you *held; or


    (b) if you are a partner, an asset of the partnership; or


    (c) if you are absolutely entitled to the asset as against the trustee of a trust (disregarding any legal disability), an asset of the trustee;

    where the decline in value of the asset was worked out under Division 40 (including that Division as it applies under Division 355 ), or the deduction for the asset was calculated under Division 328 , or would have been if the asset had been used.


    118-24(2)    
    However, subsection (1) does not apply to:


    (a) a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from *CGT event J2 or *CGT event K7 happening; or


    (b) a *depreciating asset for which you or another entity has deducted or can deduct amounts under Subdivision 40-F or 40-G .


    SECTION 118-25   Trading stock  

    118-25(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT asset is disregarded if, at the time of the *CGT event, the asset is:


    (a) your *trading stock; or


    (b) if you are a partner, trading stock of the partnership; or


    (c) if you are absolutely entitled to the asset as against the trustee of a trust (disregarding any legal disability), trading stock of the trustee.

    118-25(2)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make in these circumstances is disregarded:


    (a) you start holding as *trading stock a *CGT asset you already own but do not hold as trading stock; and


    (b) you elect under paragraph 70-30(1)(a) to be treated as having sold the asset for its cost (worked out under that section).

    Note 1:

    Paragraph 70-30(1)(a) allows you to elect the cost of the asset, or its market value, just before it became trading stock.

    Note 2:

    You may make a capital gain or loss if you elect its market value: see CGT event K4.


    SECTION 118-27   Division 230 financial arrangements and financial arrangements to which Subdivision 250-E applies  

    118-27(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make:


    (a) from a *CGT asset; or


    (b) in creating a CGT asset; or


    (c) from the discharge of a liability;

    is disregarded if, at the time of the *CGT event, the asset or liability is, or is part of, a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

    Note 1:

    Paragraph (b) is relevant for CGT event D1.

    Note 2:

    Paragraph (c) is relevant for CGT event L7.


    118-27(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to the following:


    (a) a gain or loss that subsection 230-310(4) (which deals with hedging financial arrangements) provides is to be treated as a *capital gain or *capital loss;


    (b) a loss that is reduced under subsection 230-465(2) , to the extent of that reduction (this is the extent to which the loss is of a capital nature).

    118-27(3)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply if the situation that gives rise to the *CGT event does not result in a gain from the arrangement being included in your assessable income under Division 230 , or in a loss from the arrangement entitling you to a deduction under Division 230 .

    118-27(4)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT asset is disregarded if, at the time of the *CGT event, the asset is, or is part of, a *financial arrangement to which Subdivision 250-E applies.

    SECTION 118-30   Film copyright  

    118-30(1)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event relating to your interest in the copyright in a film is disregarded if an amount is included in your assessable income under section 26AG (about film proceeds) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 because of the event.

    118-30(2)    


    If you are a partner in a partnership, a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event relating to the partnership's interest in the copyright in a film is disregarded if an amount is included in the assessable income of a partner (including you) under section 26AG of that Act because of the event.

    118-30(3)    


    If you are absolutely entitled to an interest in the copyright in a film as against the trustee of a trust (disregarding any legal disability), a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event relating to the interest is disregarded if an amount is included in your assessable income or the net income of the trust under section 26AG of that Act because of the event.

    SECTION 118-35  

    118-35   R & D  


    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss from a *CGT event if an amount is included in your assessable income in any income year under section 355-410 (about disposal of R & D results) because of that CGT event.

    Exempt or loss-denying transactions

    SECTION 118-37   Compensation, damages etc.  

    118-37(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event relating directly to any of these is disregarded:


    (a) compensation or damages you receive for:


    (i) any wrong or injury you suffer in your occupation; or

    (ii) any wrong, injury or illness you or your *relative suffers personally;


    (b) compensation or damages you receive as the trustee of a trust (other than a trust that is a *complying superannuation entity) for:


    (i) any wrong or injury a beneficiary of the trust suffers in his or her occupation; or

    (ii) any wrong, injury or illness a beneficiary of the trust, or the beneficiary ' s relative, suffers personally;


    (ba) a *CGT asset you receive, as a beneficiary of a trust, from the trustee of the trust to the extent that the CGT asset is attributable to compensation or damages that the trustee receives as described in paragraph (b) for:


    (i) any wrong or injury you suffer in your occupation; or

    (ii) any wrong, injury or illness you or your relative suffers personally;


    (c) gambling, a game or a competition with prizes;


    (d) (Repealed by No 13 of 2014)


    (e) (Repealed by No 123 of 2008)


    (f) (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)


    (g) a tobacco industry exit grant that you receive under the program known as the Tobacco Growers Adjustment Assistance Programme 2006 if, as a condition of receiving the grant, you entered into an undertaking not to become the owner or operator of any agricultural *enterprise within 5 years after receiving the grant;


    (ga) a * water entitlement, to the extent that the CGT event happens because an entity * derives a * SRWUIP payment that is * non-assessable non-exempt income under section 59-65 ;


    (gb) a * SRWUIP payment you derive that is non-assessable non-exempt income under section 59-65 ;


    (h) a right or entitlement to a *tax offset, a *deduction, or a similar benefit under an *Australian law, a *foreign law or a law of part of a foreign country;


    (i) a variation, transfer or revocation of an allocation (within the meaning of the National Rental Affordability Scheme Act 2008 );


    (j) anything of economic value provided to you (whether directly or indirectly, such as through an *NRAS consortium of which you are a *member) by:


    (i) a Department of a State or Territory; or

    (ii) a body (whether incorporated or not) established for a public purpose by or under a law of a State or Territory;
    in relation to your participation in the *National Rental Affordability Scheme.

    118-37(2)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss is disregarded if you make it as a result of receiving a payment or property as reimbursement or payment of your expenses, or receiving or using a voucher or certificate, under:


    (a) a scheme established by an *Australian government agency, a *local governing body or a *foreign government agency under an enactment or an instrument of a legislative character; or


    (b) the General Practice Rural Incentives Program or the Rural and Remote General Practice Program; or


    (c) the Sydney Aircraft Noise Insulation Project; or


    (d) the M4/M5 Cashback Scheme; or


    (e) the Unlawful Termination Assistance Scheme or the Alternative Dispute Resolution Assistance Scheme.


    118-37(3)    


    A *capital gain you make from compensation you receive under the *firearms surrender arrangements is disregarded.

    118-37(4)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a payment you receive is disregarded if:


    (a) you are an Australian resident; and


    (b) you receive the payment:


    (i) under the program known as the " German Forced Labour Compensation Programme " ; and

    (ii) from the Foundation known as " Remembrance, Responsibility and Future " or any of the Foundation ' s partner organisations; and


    (c) the payment is in the nature of compensation for:


    (i) any wrong or injury; or

    (ii) any loss of, or damage to, property;
    that you, or another person, suffered as a result of injustices committed during the National Socialist period.

    118-37(5)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make as a result of receiving a payment or property is disregarded if:


    (a) you are an individual who is an Australian resident; and


    (b) you receive the payment or property from a source in a foreign country; and


    (c) you do not receive the payment or property directly or indirectly from an *associate of yours; and


    (d) the payment or property you receive is in connection with:


    (i) any wrong or injury; or

    (ii) any loss of, or damage to, property; or

    (iii) any other detriment;
    that you, or another individual, suffered as a result of:

    (iv) persecution by the National Socialist regime of Germany during the National Socialist period; or

    (v) persecution by any other enemy of the Commonwealth during the Second World War; or

    (vi) persecution by an enemy-associated regime during the Second World War; or

    (vii) flight from persecution mentioned in subparagraph (iv), (v) or (vi); or

    (viii) participation in a resistance movement during the Second World War against forces of the National Socialist regime of Germany; or

    (ix) participation in a resistance movement during the Second World War against forces of any other enemy of the Commonwealth.

    118-37(6)    


    For the purposes of subsection (5), the duration of the Second World War includes:


    (a) the period immediately before the Second World War; and


    (b) the period immediately after the Second World War.


    118-37(7)    


    For the purposes of subsection (5), a regime is an enemy-associated regime if, and only if, it was:


    (a) in alliance with; or


    (b) occupied by; or


    (c) effectively controlled by; or


    (d) under duress from; or


    (e) surrounded by;

    either or both of the following:


    (f) the National Socialist regime of Germany;


    (g) any other enemy of the Commonwealth.


    118-37(8)    


    Subsection (5) applies to a payment or property received by the *legal personal representative of an individual in a corresponding way to the way in which that subsection would have applied if the payment or property had been received by the individual.

    118-37(9)    


    Subsection (5) applies to a payment or property received by:


    (a) the *legal personal representative of a deceased individual; or


    (b) the trustee of a trust established by the will of a deceased individual;

    in a corresponding way to the way in which that subsection would have applied if:


    (c) the individual had not died; and


    (d) the payment or property had been received by the individual.


    SECTION 118-40  

    118-40   Expiry of a lease  
    A *capital loss a lessee makes from the expiry, surrender, forfeiture or assignment of a lease (except one granted for 99 years or more) is disregarded if the lessee did not use the lease solely or mainly for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

    SECTION 118-42  

    118-42   Transfer of stratum units  
    If:


    (a) you own land on which there is a building; and


    (b) you subdivide the building into *stratum units; and


    (c) you transfer each unit to the entity who had the right to occupy it just before the subdivision;

    a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from transferring the unit is disregarded.

    SECTION 118-45  

    118-45   Sale of rights to mine  


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the sale, transfer or assignment of your rights to mine in a particular area in Australia is disregarded if you have *exempt income for the income year (because of the former section 330-60 ) from the sale, transfer or assignment.

    SECTION 118-55  

    118-55   Foreign currency hedging gains and losses  
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a contract you entered into solely to reduce the risk of financial loss you may suffer from currency exchange rate fluctuations is disregarded if the contract relates to:


    (a) a liability you have to make a payment under another contract; or


    (b) a *CGT asset that is a right you *acquired before 20 September 1985 to receive money under another contract.

    SECTION 118-60   Certain gifts  

    118-60(1)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss made from a testamentary gift of property that would have been deductible under section 30-15 if it had not been a testamentary gift is disregarded.

    118-60(1A)    


    If the only reason the gain or loss is not disregarded under subsection (1) is because the property has not been valued by the Commissioner at more than $5,000, then, for the purposes of that subsection, it is taken to have been so valued.

    118-60(2)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss made from a gift of property that is deductible under section 30-15 because of item 4 or 5 in the table in that section is disregarded.

    118-60(3)    


    However, subsection (2) does not apply if the gift was not a testamentary gift and the property is later *acquired for less than *market value by the person who made the gift or an *associate of that person.

    118-60(4)    


    If the gift was a testamentary gift and the property is later *acquired for less than *market value by the deceased person ' s estate or a person (the deceased ' s associate ) who:


    (a) is an *associate of the deceased person ' s estate; or


    (b) was an associate of the deceased person immediately before the deceased person ' s death;

    the *cost base and the *reduced cost base of the property in the hands of the estate or the deceased ' s associate is worked out under section 128-15 as if the property had passed in the estate to the estate or the deceased ' s associate.


    SECTION 118-65  

    118-65   Later distributions of personal services income  


    A *capital loss you make from a payment is disregarded if it is a payment to any entity of:


    (a) *personal services income included in an individual's assessable income under section 86-15 ; or


    (b) any other amount that is attributable to that income.

    SECTION 118-70  

    118-70   Transactions by exempt entities  


    A *capital loss made by an entity is disregarded if it was an *exempt entity at the time it made the loss.

    SECTION 118-75   Marriage or relationship breakdown settlements  

    118-75(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make as a result of *CGT event C2 happening is disregarded if:


    (a) you make the gain or loss in relation to a right that directly relates to the breakdown of a relationship between *spouses; and


    (b) at the time of the CGT event:


    (i) you and your spouse or former spouse are separated; and

    (ii) there is no reasonable likelihood of cohabitation being resumed.
    Example:

    Maude receives an amount from Claude by way of a settlement directly related to the breakdown of their marriage. CGT event C2 would happen to Maude on satisfaction of her legally enforceable right to the amount. Any capital gain or loss that Maude makes in these circumstances is disregarded.


    118-75(2)    
    For the purposes of this section, the question whether *spouses or former spouses have separated is to be determined in the same way as it is for the purposes of section 48 of the Family Law Act 1975 (as affected by sections 49 and 50 of that Act).

    SECTION 118-77   Native title and rights to native title benefits  

    118-77(1)    
    A * capital gain or * capital loss you make is disregarded if:


    (a) you are an * Indigenous person or an * Indigenous holding entity; and


    (b) you make the gain or loss because one of the following things happens in relation to a * CGT asset mentioned in subsection (2):


    (i) you transfer the CGT asset to one or more entities that are either Indigenous persons or Indigenous holding entities;

    (ii) you create a trust, that is an Indigenous holding entity, over the CGT asset;

    (iii) your ownership of the CGT asset ends, resulting in * CGT event C2 happening in relation to the CGT asset.

    118-77(2)    
    The * CGT assets are as follows:


    (a) * native title;


    (b) the right to be provided with a * native title benefit.

    Note:

    Paragraph (a) does not require a determination of native title under the Native Title Act 1993 .


    Boat capital gains

    SECTION 118-80  

    118-80   Reduction of boat capital gain  


    A *capital gain you make from a *CGT event happening in relation to a boat for an income year is reduced by an amount that is a quarantined amount for you for the income year under subsection 26-47(2) .
    Note:

    Section 26-47 denies deductions for the excess of boat expenditure over boat income.

    Special disability trusts

    SECTION 118-85   Special disability trusts  

    118-85(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you make it from transferring a *CGT asset for no consideration to:


    (a) a *special disability trust; or


    (b) a trust that becomes a special disability trust as soon as practicable after the transfer.

    118-85(2)    
    In working out whether the transfer was for consideration, disregard any interest in the trust.

    Subdivision 118-B - Main residence  

    SECTION 118-100   What this Subdivision is about  


    You can ignore a capital gain or capital loss you make from a CGT event that happens to a dwelling that is your main residence.

    However, this exemption may not apply if you are a foreign resident, and may not apply in full if:

  • • it was your main residence during part only of your ownership period; or
  • • it was used for the purpose of producing assessable income.
  • There are special rules for dwellings passed from, or owned by a trustee of, a deceased estate.

    There is a similar exemption for a CGT event that is a compulsory acquisition (or similar arrangement) happening to adjacent land but not also to the dwelling itself.

    SECTION 118-105   Map of this Subdivision  



    Note:

    The exemption may not be available for the main residence of a foreign resident.

    Basic case and concepts

    SECTION 118-110   Basic case  

    118-110(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset that is a *dwelling or your *ownership interest in it is disregarded if:


    (a) you are an individual; and


    (b) the dwelling was your main residence throughout your *ownership period; and


    (c) the interest did not *pass to you as a beneficiary in, and you did not *acquire it as a trustee of, the estate of a deceased person.

    Note 1:

    You may make a capital gain or capital loss even though you comply with this section if the dwelling was used for the purpose of producing assessable income: see section 118-190 .

    Note 2:

    There is a separate rule for beneficiaries and trustees of deceased estates: see section 118-195 .

    Note 3:

    There is a separate rule for a CGT event that is a compulsory acquisition (or similar arrangement) happening to adjacent land but not also to the dwelling itself: see section 118-245 .


    118-110(2)    
    Only these *CGT events are relevant:


    (a) CGT events A1, B1, C1, C2, E1, E2, F2, K3, K4 and K6 (except one involving the forfeiting of a deposit); and


    (b) a CGT event that involves the forfeiting of a deposit as part of an uninterrupted sequence of transactions ending in one of the events specified in paragraph (a) subsequently happening.

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    118-110(3)    


    However, this section does not apply if, at the time the *CGT event happens, you:


    (a) are an *excluded foreign resident; or


    (b) are a foreign resident who does not satisfy the *life events test.


    118-110(4)    


    You are an excluded foreign resident , at a particular time, if:


    (a) you are a foreign resident at that time; and


    (b) the continuous period ending at that time for which you have been a foreign resident is more than 6 years.


    118-110(5)    


    You satisfy the life events test , at the time a *CGT event happens, if:


    (a) the continuous period ending at that time for which you have been a foreign resident is 6 years or less; and


    (b) you are covered by any of the following subparagraphs:


    (i) you or your *spouse has had a *terminal medical condition that existed at any time during that period of foreign residency;

    (ii) your *child has had a terminal medical condition that existed at any time during that period of foreign residency, and that child was under 18 years of age at at least one such time;

    (iii) your spouse, or your child who was under 18 years of age at death, has died during that period of foreign residency;

    (iv) the CGT event happens because of a matter referred to in a paragraph of subsection 126-5(1) involving you and your spouse (or former spouse).

    SECTION 118-115   Meaning of dwelling  

    118-115(1)    
    A dwelling includes:


    (a) a unit of accommodation that:


    (i) is a building or is contained in a building; and

    (ii) consists wholly or mainly of residential accommodation; and


    (b) a unit of accommodation that is a caravan, houseboat or other mobile home; and


    (c) any land immediately under the unit of accommodation.

    118-115(2)    
    However, except as provided in section 118-120 , a dwelling does not include any land adjacent to a building.


    SECTION 118-120   Extension to adjacent land etc.  


    Adjacent land

    118-120(1)    
    This Subdivision applies to a *dwelling ' s *adjacent land (if the same *CGT event happens to that land or your *ownership interest in it) as if it were a dwelling.

    118-120(2)    
    Land adjacent to a *dwelling is its adjacent land to the extent that the land was used primarily for private or domestic purposes in association with the dwelling.

    118-120(3)    
    The maximum area of *adjacent land covered by the exemption for the *CGT event (the current event ) is 2 hectares, less the area of the land immediately under the *dwelling.

    118-120(4)    
    However, if subsection 118-245(2) applied to you for an earlier *CGT event that happened in relation to:


    (a) other land that was part of the *dwelling ' s *adjacent land at the time of the earlier CGT event; or


    (b) your *ownership interest in that other land at that time;

    the maximum area of land covered by the exemption for the current event is the *maximum exempt area for the current event and the dwelling.



    Adjacent structures

    118-120(5)    
    This Subdivision applies to an *adjacent structure of a flat or home unit (if the same *CGT event happens to that structure or your *ownership interest in it) as if it were a *dwelling.

    118-120(6)    
    A garage, storeroom or other structure associated with a flat or home unit is an adjacent structure of the flat or home unit to the extent that the structure was used primarily for private or domestic purposes in association with the flat or home unit.

    SECTION 118-125  

    118-125   Meaning of ownership period  
    Your ownership period of a *dwelling is the period on or after 20 September 1985 when you had an *ownership interest in:


    (a) the dwelling; or


    (b) land (*acquired on or after 20 September 1985) on which the dwelling is later built.

    SECTION 118-130   Meaning of ownership interest in land or a dwelling  

    118-130(1)    
    You have an ownership interest in land or a *dwelling if:


    (a) for land - you have a legal or equitable interest in it or a right to occupy it; or


    (b) for a dwelling that is not a flat or home unit - you have a legal or equitable interest in the land on which it is erected, or a licence or right to occupy it; or


    (c) for a flat or home unit - you have:


    (i) a legal or equitable interest in a *stratum unit in it; or

    (ii) a licence or right to occupy it; or

    (iii) a *share in a company that owns a legal or equitable interest in the land on which the flat or home unit is erected and that gives you to a right to occupy it.

    118-130(2)    
    For land or a *dwelling that you *acquire under a contract, you have an ownership interest in it from:


    (a) the time when you obtain legal ownership of it; or


    (b) if the contract or a related contract gives you a right to occupy it at an earlier time - the earlier time.

    118-130(3)    
    For land or a *dwelling where you have a contract for the happening of the *CGT event, you have an ownership interest in it until your legal ownership of it ends.


    Rules that may extend the exemption

    SECTION 118-135  

    118-135   Moving into a dwelling  
    If a *dwelling becomes your main residence by the time it was first practicable for you to move into it after you *acquired your *ownership interest in it, the dwelling is treated as your main residence from when you acquired the interest until it actually became your main residence.

    SECTION 118-140   Changing main residences  

    118-140(1)    
    If you *acquire an *ownership interest in a *dwelling that is to become your main residence and you still have your ownership interest in your existing main residence, both dwellings are treated as your main residence for the shorter of:


    (a) 6 months ending when your ownership interest in your existing main residence ends; or


    (b) the period between the acquisition of the new ownership interest and the time when the ownership interest referred to in paragraph (a) ends.

    118-140(2)    
    Subsection (1) only applies if:


    (a) your existing main residence was your main residence for a continuous period of at least 3 months in the 12 months ending when your ownership interest in it ends; and


    (b) your existing main residence was not used for the *purpose of producing assessable income in any part of that 12 month period when it was not your main residence.


    SECTION 118-145   Absences  

    118-145(1)    
    If a *dwelling that was your main residence ceases to be your main residence, you may choose to continue to treat it as your main residence.

    118-145(2)    
    If you use the part of the *dwelling that was your main residence for the *purpose of producing assessable income, the maximum period that you can treat it as your main residence under this section while you use it for that purpose is 6 years. You are entitled to another maximum period of 6 years each time the dwelling again becomes and ceases to be your main residence.

    118-145(3)    
    If you do not use the *dwelling for that purpose, you can treat it as your main residence under this section indefinitely.

    118-145(3A)    


    This section does not apply if the *dwelling was your main residence because of section 118-147 and ceases to be your main residence because of subsections 118-147(3) and (4) .

    118-145(4)    


    If you make the choice, you cannot treat any other *dwelling as your main residence while you apply this section, except if section 118-140 (about changing main residences) applies.
    Example:

    You live in a house for 3 years. You are posted overseas for 5 years and you rent it out during your absence. On your return you move back into it for 2 years. You are then posted overseas again for 4 years (again renting it out). You then move back into it for 3 years, after which you sell the house.

    You have not treated any other dwelling as your main residence during your absences.

    You may choose to continue to treat the house as your main residence during both absences because each absence is less than 6 years.

    You can make this choice when preparing your income tax return for the income year in which you sold the house.


    SECTION 118-147   Absence from dwelling replacing main residence that was compulsorily acquired, destroyed etc.  

    118-147(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a *dwelling (the old dwelling ) is treated as your main residence because of your choice under section 118-145 ; and


    (b) because of an event (the key event ) described in subsection 124-70(1) :


    (i) you cease to have any *ownership interest in the old dwelling; or

    (ii) the old dwelling is lost or destroyed; and


    (c) after the key event you have an ownership interest (the substitute property interest ) in:


    (i) a dwelling (the substitute dwelling ); or

    (ii) land (the substitute land ) that did not have a dwelling on it at the later of the time just after the key event and the time you *acquired the interest; and


    (d) you acquired the substitute property interest at a time (the substitute property acquisition time ) no later than one year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows in special circumstances, after the end of the income year in which the key event happens.

    Note 1:

    Subsections 124-70(1) deals with compulsory acquisitions, disposals in circumstances involving powers of compulsory acquisition, expiry of leases granted by Australian government agencies and loss or destruction of a CGT asset.

    Note 2:

    The substitute property acquisition time may be before, at or after the time the key event happened. The old dwelling and the substitute dwelling may be different or the same. The land on which the old dwelling is erected and the substitute land may be different or the same.


    118-147(2)    
    You may choose to treat the substitute dwelling, or a *dwelling you built on the substitute land within 4 years after the later of the time of the key event and the substitute property acquisition time, as your main residence from the later of the following times (or from either of them if they are the same):


    (a) the substitute property acquisition time;


    (b) the time one year before the key event happened.

    118-147(3)    
    Subsection (4) limits the time you can treat a *dwelling as your main residence under this section if you use all or part of it or the substitute land, after the later of the key event and the substitute property acquisition time, for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

    118-147(4)    
    The maximum period you can treat the *dwelling that way while you use it or the substitute land as described in subsection (3) is:


    (a) 6 years; or


    (b) if, just before the key event, you used all or part of the old dwelling for that purpose - so much of the period of 6 years described in subsection 118-145(2) in relation to the old dwelling as had not passed before the event.

    118-147(5)    
    If you do not use the *dwelling or substitute land as described in subsection (3) you can treat the dwelling as your main residence under this section indefinitely.

    118-147(6)    
    If you make the choice:


    (a) you cannot treat any other *dwelling as your main residence while you apply this section; and


    (b) section 118-140 does not apply in relation to your *acquisition, while you still have an *ownership interest in the old dwelling, of an ownership interest in the dwelling you choose to treat as your main residence under this section; and


    (c) section 118-150 does not apply after the key event to the land on which the old dwelling is erected or the substitute land; and


    (d) section 118-155 does not apply after the key event in relation to the old dwelling, the substitute dwelling or a dwelling built on the substitute land.

    118-147(7)    
    Paragraph (6)(a) does not prevent the old dwelling from being your main residence at any time before the key event happened.

    SECTION 118-150   If you build, repair or renovate a dwelling  

    118-150(1)    
    This section applies to land in which you have an *ownership interest (except a life interest) if you build a *dwelling on the land, or repair, renovate or finish building a dwelling on the land.

    118-150(2)    
    You can choose to apply this Subdivision as if the *dwelling that you are building, repairing or renovating on the land were your main residence from the time you *acquired the *ownership interest.

    118-150(3)    
    You can make the choice only if:


    (a) a *dwelling on the land that you construct, repair or renovate becomes your main residence (except because of section 118-147 ) as soon as practicable after the work is finished; and


    (b) it continues to be your main residence for at least 3 months.


    118-150(4)    
    There is a time limit during which the choice can operate. This is the shorter of:


    (a) 4 years, or a longer time allowed by the Commissioner, before the *dwelling becomes your main residence; and


    (b) the period starting when you *acquired your *ownership interest in the land and ending when the dwelling becomes your main residence.


    118-150(5)    
    If there was already a *dwelling on the land when you *acquired your *ownership interest and you or someone else occupied it after that time, the period in subsection (2) and paragraph (4)(b) starts when the dwelling ceased to be occupied.


    118-150(6)    
    Once you make the choice, no other *dwelling can be treated as your main residence during the period referred to in subsection (4), except if section 118-140 (about changing main residences) applies.


    SECTION 118-155   Where individual referred to in section 118-150 dies  

    118-155(1)    
    This section applies if the individual referred to in subsection 118-150(1) dies:


    (a) after the work began, or the individual entered into a contract for it to be done, but before it was finished; or


    (b) after the work was finished but before it was practicable for the *dwelling to become the individual's main residence; or


    (c) during the period of 3 months referred to in paragraph 118-150(3)(b) .

    118-155(2)    
    If the individual owned the interest in the land as a joint tenant, the surviving joint tenant or, if none, the trustee of the individual's estate, can choose to apply this Subdivision as if the *dwelling were the main residence of the individual:


    (a) when the individual died; and


    (b) for the shorter of:


    (i) 4 years before the individual's death; or

    (ii) the period starting when the individual *acquired the interest in the land and ending when the individual died.

    118-155(3)    
    If there was already a *dwelling on the land when the individual *acquired the interest in the land and someone occupied it after that time, the period in subparagraph (2)(b)(ii) starts when the dwelling ceased to be occupied sothat it could be repaired or renovated.

    118-155(4)    
    If the *dwelling is treated as the deceased's main residence under this section, no other dwelling can be treated as the deceased's main residence at the same time.

    118-155(5)    


    However, this section does not apply if, just before the individual ' s death, the individual was an *excluded foreign resident.

    SECTION 118-160   Destruction of dwelling and sale of land  

    118-160(1)    
    This section applies if a *dwelling that is your main residence is accidentally destroyed and a *CGT event happens in relation to the land on which it was built without you erecting another dwelling on the land.

    118-160(2)    
    You can choose to apply this Subdivision to the land as if, from the time of the destruction until your *ownership interest in the land ends, the *dwelling had not been destroyed and were your main residence.

    118-160(3)    
    If you do so, you cannot treat any other *dwelling as your main residence during that period, except under section 118-140 (about changing main residences).


    Rules that may limit the exemption

    SECTION 118-165  

    118-165   Separate CGT event for adjacent land or other structures  
    The exemption does not apply to a *CGT event that happens in relation to land, or a garage, storeroom or other structure, to which the exemption can extend under section 118-120 (about adjacent land) if that event does not also happen in relation to the *dwelling or your *ownership interest in it.

    Note:

    There is a separate rule for a CGT event that is a compulsory acquisition (or similar arrangement) happening to adjacent land but not also to the dwelling itself: see section 118-245 .

    SECTION 118-170   Spouse having different main residence  

    118-170(1)    
    If, during a period, a *dwelling is your main residence and another *dwelling is the main residence of your *spouse (except a spouse living permanently separately and apart from you), you and your spouse must either:


    (a) choose one of the dwellings as the main residence of both of you for the period; or


    (b) nominate the different dwellings as your main residences for the period.

    118-170(2)    
    If you nominate the different *dwellings as your main residences for the period, you split the exemption in accordance with subsections (3) and (4).

    118-170(3)    
    If your interest in the *dwelling you chose was not, during the period, more than half of the total interests in the dwelling, the dwelling is taken to have been your main residence during the period. Otherwise, the dwelling is taken to have been your main residence for half of the period.

    118-170(4)    


    If your *spouse ' s interest in the *dwelling your spouse chose was not, during the period, more than half of the total interests in the dwelling, the dwelling is taken to have been your spouse ' s main residence during the period. Otherwise, the dwelling is taken to have been your spouse ' s main residence for half of the period.
    Example:

    You and your spouse (who are Australian residents) own a town house as tenants in common in equal shares. You and your spouse also own a beach house as tenants in common, with your interest being 30% and your spouse ' s 70%. From 1 July 1999, you live mainly in the town house and your spouse lives mainly in the beach house. On 1 July 2000 you and your spouse dispose of both dwellings.

    For the period 1 July 1999-30 June 2000 you nominate the town house as your main residence and your spouse nominates the beach house. The town house is taken to be your main residence during the period. The beach house is taken to be your spouse ' s main residence during half the period.


    SECTION 118-175  

    118-175   Dependent child having different main residence  
    If, at a particular time, a *dwelling is your main residence and another *dwelling is the main residence of a *child of yours who is under 18 and is dependent on you for economic support, you must choose one of them as the main residence of both of you.

    Roll-overs under Subdivision 126-A

    SECTION 118-178   Previous roll-over under Subdivision 126-A  

    118-178(1)    
    This section applies to you if:


    (a) you *acquired an *ownership interest in a *dwelling from another person (your former partner ) as a result of a *CGT event (the earlier event ); and


    (b) your former partner acquired the ownership interest on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (c) there was a roll-over under Subdivision 126-A (marriage or relationship breakdown roll-over) for the earlier event; and


    (d) a CGT event (the later event ) happens in relation to the ownership interest.


    118-178(2)    


    This Subdivision applies to the later event in the way that it would if:


    (a) your *ownership interest had commenced when your former partner ' s ownership interest commenced (the acquisition time ); and


    (b) from the acquisition time until the time your former partner ' s ownership interest ended:


    (i) you had used the *dwelling in the same way that your former partner used it; and

    (ii) the dwelling had been your main residence for the same number of days as it was your former partner ' s main residence.
    EXAMPLES
    Example 1:

    Peter (the transferor spouse) is the 100% owner of a dwelling that he uses only as a main residence before transferring it to Susan (the transferee spouse). Susan uses the dwelling only as a rental property.

    Susan will be eligible for a partial main residence exemption having regard to how both Peter and Susan used the dwelling if, at the time the dwelling is sold, Susan is an Australian resident.

    Example 2:

    Caroline (the transferor spouse) is the 100% owner of a dwelling that she uses only as a rental property before transferring it to David (the transferee spouse). David uses the dwelling only as a main residence.

    David will be eligible for only a partial main residence exemption having regard to how both Caroline and David used the dwelling if, at the time the dwelling is sold, David is an Australian resident.


    SECTION 118-180   Acquisition of dwelling from company or trust on marriage or relationship breakdown - roll-over provision applying  

    118-180(1)    
    This Subdivision applies to you as if you owned an *ownership interest in land or a dwelling during a period when it was actually owned by a company or trustee if:


    (a) you *acquired the interest from the company or trustee; and


    (b) it was acquired by the company or trustee on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (c) a roll-over was available to the company or trustee under Subdivision 126-A .

    118-180(2)    
    If subsection (1) applies to a *dwelling, it cannot be treated as your main residence during the period, despite other provisions of this Subdivision that would allow you to treat it as your main residence during the period.

    Partial exemption rules

    SECTION 118-185   Partial exemption where dwelling was your main residence during part only of ownership period  

    118-185(1)    
    You get only a partial exemption for a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *dwelling or your *ownership interest in it if:


    (a) you are an individual; and


    (b) the dwelling was your main residence for part only of your *ownership period; and


    (c) the interest did not *pass to you as a beneficiary in, and you did not *acquire it as a trustee of, the estate of a deceased person.

    118-185(2)    


    You calculate your *capital gain or *capital loss using the formula:


    CG or CL amount ×     Non-main residence days    
    Days in your *ownership period

    where:

    CG or CL amount
    is the *capital gain or *capital loss you would have made from the *CGT event apart from this Subdivision.

    non-main residence days
    is the number of days in your *ownership period when the *dwelling was not your main residence.

    Note:

    The capital gain or loss may be further adjusted if the dwelling was used to produce assessable income: see section 118-190 .

    Example:

    You bought a house in July 2020 and moved in immediately. In July 2023, you moved out and began to rent it. You sold it in July 2030, making (apart from this Subdivision) a capital gain of $10,000. At the time you sold the house, you were an Australian resident.

    You choose to continue to treat the dwelling as your main residence under section 118-145 (about absences) for the first 6 of the 7 years during which you rented the house out.

    Under this section, you will be taken to have made a capital gain of:


      $10,000   ×   365  
    3,650
    =   $1,000  


    118-185(3)    


    However, this section does not apply if, at the time the *CGT event happens, you:


    (a) are an *excluded foreign resident; or


    (b) are a foreign resident who does not satisfy the *life events test.


    SECTION 118-190   Use of dwelling for producing assessable income  

    118-190(1)    
    You get only a partial exemption for a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *dwelling or your *ownership interest in it if:


    (a) apart from this section, because the dwelling was your main residence or someone else's during a period:


    (i) you would not make a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event; or

    (ii) you would make a lesser capital gain or loss than if this Subdivision had not applied; and


    (b) the dwelling was used for the *purpose of producing assessable income during all or a part of that period; and


    (c) if you had incurred interest on money borrowed to *acquire the dwelling, or your ownership interest in it, you could have deducted some or all of that interest.

    Example:

    You acquire a house as a beneficiary in a deceased estate, rent it out for 12 months and sell it within 2 years of the deceased's death. You can ignore the rental because the exemption does not require the house to be your main residence during the 2 years after the death.


    118-190(2)    
    The *capital gain or *capital loss that you would have made apart from this section from the *CGT event is increased by an amount that is reasonable having regard to the extent to which you would have been able to deduct that interest.

    118-190(3)    
    However, you ignore any use of the *dwelling for the *purpose of producing assessable income during any period that you continue to treat it as your main residence under section 118-145 (about absences) to the extent that any part of it was not used for that purpose just before it last ceased to be your main residence.

    Example:

    To continue the example from section 118-185 , assume that, when you moved in, you used ¼ of the house as a doctor's surgery.

    Under section 118-185 , your capital gain was $1,000.

    Under this section, it would be reasonable to add an amount of:


      $10,000   ×   9  
    10
    ×   1  
    4
    =   $2,250  

    You have a total capital gain of $3,250 on the sale of the house.


    118-190(3A)    


    Also, you ignore any use of the *dwelling for the *purpose of producing assessable income during any period that you treat it as your main residence under section 118-147 (about absences) to the extent that any part of the old dwelling mentioned in that section was not used for that purpose just before the old dwelling last ceased to be your main residence.

    118-190(4)    
    If a *dwelling or your *ownership interest in a dwelling *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate, or you owned it as the trustee of a deceased estate, you ignore any use of the *dwelling for the *purpose of producing assessable income before the deceased's death if:


    (a) the dwelling was the deceased's main residence just before the death; and


    (b) it was not being used for that purpose just before the death, or any use for that purpose just before the death was ignored because of subsection (3).


    SECTION 118-192   Special rule for first use to produce income  

    118-192(1)    
    There is a special rule if:


    (a) you would get only a partial exemption under this Subdivision for a *CGT event happening in relation to a *dwelling or your *ownership interest in it because the dwelling was used for the *purpose of producing assessable income during your *ownership period; and


    (aa) that use occurred for the first time after 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 20 August 1996; and


    (b) you would have got a full exemption under this Subdivision if the CGT event had happened just before the first time (the income time ) it was used for that purpose during your ownership period.


    118-192(2)    


    You are taken to have *acquired the *dwelling or your *ownership interest at the income time for its *market value at that time.

    118-192(3)    
    If your *ownership interest in the *dwelling *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased's estate, or you owned it as the trustee of a deceased estate and the *CGT event did not happen within 2 years of the deceased's death, you apply this Subdivision as if:


    (a) you had *acquired the interest as an individual and not as a beneficiary or trustee of a deceased estate; and


    (b) for applying the formula in section 118-185 , your non-main residence days were the number of days in your *ownership period when the dwelling was not the main residence of an individual referred to in item 2, column 3 of the table in section 118-195 .

    Note:

    There are special rules for dwellings acquired before 7.30 pm on 20 August 1996: see section 118-195 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    Dwellings acquired from deceased estates

    SECTION 118-195   Dwelling acquired from a deceased estate  

    118-195(1)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *dwelling or your *ownership interest in it is disregarded if:


    (a) you are an individual and the interest *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate, or you owned it as the trustee of a deceased estate; and


    (b) at least one of the items in column 2 and at least one of the items in column 3 of the table are satisfied; and


    Beneficiary or trustee of deceased estate acquiring interest
    Item One of these items is satisfied And also one of these items
    1 the deceased *acquired the *ownership interest on or after 20 September 1985 and the *dwelling was the deceased's main residence just before the deceased's death and was not then being used for the *purpose of producing assessable income your *ownership interest ends within 2 years of the deceased's death, or within a longer period allowed by the Commissioner
    .
    2 the deceased *acquired the *ownership interest before 20 September 1985 the *dwelling was, from the deceased's death until your *ownership interest ends, the main residence of one or more of:
        (a) the spouse of the deceased immediately before the death (except a spouse who was living permanently separately and apart from the deceased); or
        (b) an individual who had a right to occupy the dwelling under the deceased's will; or
        (c) if the *CGT event was brought about by the individual to whom the *ownership interest *passed as a beneficiary - that individual


    (c) the deceased was not an *excluded foreign resident just before the deceased ' s death.

    Note 1:

    You may make a capital gain or capital loss if the dwelling was used for the purpose of producing assessable income: see section 118-190 .

    Note 2:

    In some cases the use of a dwelling to produce assessable income can be disregarded: see sections 118-145 and 118-190 .

    Note 3:

    There are special rules for dwellings acquired before 7.30 pm on 20 August 1996. These rules also affect the operation of section 118-192 and subsections 118-190(4) and 118-200(4) : see section 118-195 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    118-195(1A)    


    For the purposes of a provision of this Subdivision that applies the table in subsection (1):


    (a) disregard paragraphs (a) and (b) in column 3 of item 2 of the table if, just before the deceased ' s death, the deceased was an *excluded foreign resident; and


    (b) disregard paragraph (c) in column 3 of item 2 of the table if, at the time the relevant *CGT event happened, the individual was an excluded foreign resident.

    Note:

    The other provisions that apply the table include paragraph 118-192(3)(b) , subsection 118-200(2) , paragraph 118-225(3)(c) and section 118-260 .


    118-195(2)    
    Only these *CGT events are relevant:


    (a) CGT events A1, B1, C1, C2, E1, E2, F2, K3, K4 and K6 (except one involving the forfeiting of a deposit); and


    (b) a CGT event that involves the forfeiting of a deposit as part of an uninterrupted sequence of transactions ending in one of the events specified in paragraph (a) subsequently happening.

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    SECTION 118-197  

    118-197   Special rule for surviving joint tenant  


    This Subdivision applies to you as if the *ownership interest of another individual in a *dwelling had *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate if:


    (a) you and the other individual owned ownership interests in the dwelling as joint tenants; and


    (b) the other individual dies.

    SECTION 118-200   Partial exemption for deceased estate dwellings  

    118-200(1)    
    You get only a partial exemption (or no exemption) if:


    (a) you are an individual and your *ownership interest in a *dwelling *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate, or you owned it as the trustee of a deceased estate; and


    (b) section 118-195 does not apply.

    118-200(2)    


    You calculate your *capital gain or *capital loss using the formula:


    CG or CL amount × Non-main residence days
          Total days

    where:

    CG or CL amount
    is the *capital gain or *capital loss you would have made from the *CGT event apart from this Subdivision.

    non-main residence days
    is the sum of:


    (a) if the deceased *acquired the *ownership interest on or after 20 September 1985 - the number of days in the deceased ' s *ownership period when the *dwelling was not the deceased ' s main residence; and


    (aa) if the deceased acquired the ownership interest on or after 20 September 1985 and, just before the deceased ' s death, the deceased was an *excluded foreign resident - the number of remaining days in the deceased ' s ownership period; and


    (b) the number of days in the period from the death until your ownership interest ends when the dwelling was not the main residence of an individual referred to in item 2, column 3 of the table in section 118-195 .

    total days
    is:


    (a) if the deceased *acquired the *ownership interest before 20 September 1985 - the number of days in the period from the death until your ownership interest ends; or


    (b) if the deceased acquired the ownership interest on or after that day - the number of days in the period from the acquisition of the dwelling by the deceased until your ownership interest ends.


    118-200(3)    


    However, you can adjust the formula by ignoring any non-main residence days and total days in the period from the deceased ' s death until your *ownership interest ended, if:


    (a) the deceased *acquired the ownership interest on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (b) your ownership interest ends within:


    (i) 2 years of the deceased ' s death; or

    (ii) a longer period allowed by the Commissioner; and


    (c) you get a more favourable result by doing so; and


    (d) the deceased was not an *excluded foreign resident just before the deceased ' s death.

    Note 1:

    The formula in this section will be adjusted (or further adjusted) under section 118-205 if the deceased acquired the dwelling through a deceased estate.

    Note 2:

    There may be a further adjustment if the dwelling was used for the purpose of producing assessable income: see section 118-190 .


    118-200(4)    
    You ignore any non-main residence days before the deceased ' s death if:


    (a) the *dwelling was the deceased ' s main residence just before the death; and


    (b) the dwelling was not being used for the *purpose of producing assessable income just before the death, or any use for that purpose just before the death was ignored because of subsection 118-190(3) or (3A) ; and


    (c) the deceased was not an *excluded foreignresident just before the deceased ' s death.


    SECTION 118-205   Adjustment if dwelling inherited from deceased individual  

    118-205(1)    
    You must adjust the formula in subsection 118-200(2) if the *ownership interest of the deceased individual referred to in section 118-200 (the most recently deceased ) *passed to the individual on or after 20 September 1985 as a beneficiary in, or the individual owned it as trustee of, a deceased estate.

    Note:

    Any gains or losses of individuals earlier in the inheritance chain are included in the gain or loss you would have made apart from this Subdivision. This section adjusts the formula to take account of times when the dwelling was the main residence of the individuals.


    118-205(2)    
    Add to the component total days in the formula the fewer of:


    (a) the number of days between 20 September 1985 and the day when the interest *passed to or was *acquired as trustee by the most recently deceased; and


    (b) the number of days between the time when an *ownership interest in the *dwelling was last acquired on or after 20 September 1985 by an individual except as a beneficiary in a deceased estate or as trustee of a deceased estate and the day when the interest passed to or was acquired as trustee by the most recently deceased.

    118-205(3)    
    Add to the component non-main residence days in the formula the number of days in the period applicable under subsection (2) that the *dwelling was not the main residence of one or more of:


    (a) an individual who owned the dwelling at the time of the individual ' s death; or


    (b) an individual who, immediately before the death of an individual referred to in paragraph (a), was the spouse of that individual (except a spouse who was living permanently separately and apart from the individual); or


    (c) an individual who had a right to occupy the dwelling under a will; or


    (d) an individual to whom an *ownership interest in the dwelling *passed as a beneficiary in, or who *acquired an ownership interest in the dwelling as trustee of, a deceased estate.

    118-205(4)    


    Add to the component non-main residence days in the formula the number of days in the period applicable under subsection (2) that the *dwelling was the main residence of an individual who:


    (a) owned the dwelling; and


    (b) was an *excluded foreign resident;

    just before the individual ' s death.


    SECTION 118-210   Trustee acquiring dwelling under will  

    118-210(1)    
    This section applies if you are the trustee of a deceased estate and, under the deceased's will, you *acquire an *ownership interest in a *dwelling for occupation by an individual.

    118-210(2)    
    If a *CGT event happens to the interest in relation to the individual and you receive no money or property for it:


    (a) a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the event is disregarded; and


    (b) the first element of the *dwelling's *cost base and *reduced cost base in the hands of the individual is its cost base and reduced cost base in your hands at the time of the event; and


    (c) the individual is taken to have *acquired it when you did.

    118-210(3)    
    If:


    (a) you receive money or property for the *CGT event happening or the event happens in relation to another entity; and


    (b) the dwelling was the main residence of the individual from the time you *acquired the interest until the time of the event;

    you do not make a *capital gain or *capital loss from the CGT event.


    118-210(4)    
    However, if the *dwelling was the main residence of the individual during part only of that period, you make a *capital gain or *capital loss worked out using the formula:


    CG or CL amount × Non-main residence days
      Days in that period

    where:

    CG or CL amount
    is the *capital gain or *capital loss you would have made from the *CGT event apart from this Subdivision.

    non-main residence days
    is the number of days in that period when the *dwelling was not the individual's main residence.


    118-210(5)    
    Only these *CGT events are relevant:


    (a) CGT events A1, B1, C1, C2, E1, E2, E5, F2, K3, K4 and K6 (except one involving the forfeiting of a deposit); and


    (b) a CGT event that involves the forfeiting of a deposit as part of an uninterrupted sequence of transactions ending in one of the events specified in paragraph (a) subsequently happening.

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    118-210(6)    


    However, this section does not apply if, just before the deceased ' s death, the deceased was an *excluded foreign resident.

    Special disability trusts

    SECTION 118-215   What the following provisions are about  

    The trustee of a trust that is or has been a special disability trust may be eligible for an exemption to the extent that a dwelling is the main residence of the individual who is or has been the principal beneficiary of the trust.

    Another beneficiary of the trust may be eligible for an exemption if the dwelling is distributed to that other beneficiary at or after the principal beneficiary ' s death.

    Note 1:

    The following provisions also apply to the exemption about compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land (see section 118-245 ).

    Note 2:

    The exemptions may not apply if the principal beneficiary of the trust is a foreign resident.

    SECTION 118-218   Exemption available to trustee - main case  

    118-218(1)    
    This section applies to you in relation to a *CGT event if:


    (a) the CGT event happens in relation to a *CGT asset; and


    (b) just before the CGT event happens, you hold the CGT asset as trustee of a trust; and


    (c) the trust was a *special disability trust on at least one of the days on which you held the CGT asset.

    Note:

    This section may not apply if the principal beneficiary of the trust is a foreign resident (see subsection (5)).


    118-218(2)    
    For the purposes of applying this Subdivision in relation to the *CGT event, on each day to which paragraph (1)(c) applies:


    (a) treat yourself as holding the *CGT asset personally (and not as trustee of the trust); and


    (b) if the *principal beneficiary of the trust uses the applicable *dwelling in a particular way on that day - treat yourself as using the dwelling in that way on that day.

    Example:

    If the principal beneficiary uses the dwelling as his or her main residence on the day, then treat yourself as using the dwelling as your main residence on that day.

    Note 1:

    The CGT asset need not be a dwelling (or an ownership interest in a dwelling) if it is land adjacent to a dwelling, an adjacent structure of a flat or home unit, or an ownership interest in such an asset.

    Note 2:

    If the trustee is an individual, the individual ' s actual circumstances are ignored. Similarly, this subsection does not affect how this Subdivision applies for the individual ' s actual circumstances. See section 960-100 .


    118-218(3)    
    If you are not an individual, treat yourself as being an individual for the purposes of applying this Subdivision in relation to the *CGT event.

    118-218(4)    
    If the *CGT asset, or your *ownership interest in it, *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate:


    (a) treat the deceased as never having used the applicable *dwelling for the *purpose of producing assessable income; and


    (b) treat the dwelling as being the deceased ' s main residence on each day during the deceased ' s *ownership period;

    for the purposes of applying this Subdivision in relation to the *CGT event.


    118-218(5)    


    Despite subsection (1), this section does not apply if, at the time the *CGT event happens, the *principal beneficiary of the trust:


    (a) is an *excluded foreign resident; or


    (b) is a foreign resident who does not satisfy the *life events test.


    SECTION 118-220  

    118-220   Exemption available to trustee - after the principal beneficiary ' s death  
    This section applies to you in relation to a *CGT event if:


    (a) the trustee of a trust holds a *CGT asset on a particular day (the transition day ); and


    (b) on the transition day, or on an earlier day on which the CGT asset was held by the trustee of the trust, the trust is a *special disability trust; and


    (c) the individual who is or has been the *principal beneficiary of the trust dies on the transition day; and


    (d) the CGT event happens in relation to the CGT asset at or after the deceased ' s death; and


    (e) the CGT event happens while you hold the CGT asset:


    (i) as trustee of the trust; or

    (ii) as trustee of an implied trust arising because of the deceased ' s death.

    SECTION 118-222  

    118-222   Exemption available to other beneficiary who acquires the CGT asset after the principal beneficiary ' s death  
    This section applies to you in relation to a *CGT event if:


    (a) the CGT event happens in relation to a *CGT asset; and


    (b) you *acquired the CGT asset or your *ownership interest in it:


    (i) as a result of an earlier CGT event; and

    (ii) as a beneficiary of a trust; and


    (c) section 118-220 applied to the trustee of the trust in relation to the earlier CGT event and the CGT asset.

    SECTION 118-225   Amount of exemption available after the principal beneficiary ' s death - general  
    Full exemption for trustee unless sells asset for proceeds etc.

    118-225(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event is disregarded if:


    (a) section 118-220 applies to you in relation to the CGT event; and


    (b) as a result of the CGT event, an entity *acquires the *CGT asset:


    (i) as trustee of an implied trust arising because of the deceased ' s death; or

    (ii) as a beneficiary of the relevant trust referred to in paragraph 118-220(e) .


    Exemption for beneficiary, or trustee selling asset for proceeds etc.

    118-225(2)    
    If:


    (a) section 118-220 applies to you in relation to a *CGT event, but paragraph (1)(b) does not; or


    (b) section 118-222 applies to you in relation to a CGT event;

    the amount of the *capital gain or *capital loss that you would have made apart from this section from the CGT event is decreased by an amount that is reasonable.


    118-225(3)    
    In determining what is a reasonable decrease:


    (a) if section 118-220 applies to you, but paragraph (1)(b) does not - treat yourself as being an individual who owned the *CGT asset as the trustee of the deceased ' s estate; and


    (b) if section 118-222 applies to you - treat yourself as being an individual and treat the CGT asset or your *ownership interest in it as having *passed to you as a beneficiary in the deceased ' s estate; and


    (c) have regard to the principles in this Subdivision, and to:


    (i) the extent that the applicable *dwelling was the deceased ' s main residence for the relevant period; and

    (ii) the extent that the dwelling was used for the *purpose of producing assessable income during the relevant period.

    118-225(4)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (3)(c)(i), assume the *dwelling was not the deceased ' s main residence on each day the trust referred to in paragraph 118-220(b) was not a *special disability trust.

    118-225(5)    


    However, subsection (2) does not apply if, just before the deceased ' s death, the deceased was an *excluded foreign resident.

    SECTION 118-227   Amount of exemption available after the principal beneficiary ' s death - cost base and reduced cost base  

    118-227(1)    
    If section 118-220 applies to you and:


    (a) the applicable *dwelling was the deceased ' s main residence just before the deceased ' s death; and


    (b) that dwelling was not then being used for the *purpose of producing assessable income; and


    (c) the trust referred to in paragraph 118-220(b) was then a *special disability trust; and


    (ca) the deceased was not an *excluded foreign resident just before the deceased ' s death;

    then:


    (d) the first element of the *CGT asset ' s *cost base, in your hands, is the CGT asset ' s *market value just before the deceased ' s death; and


    (e) the first element of the CGT asset ' s *reduced cost base, in your hands, is worked out similarly.


    118-227(2)    
    However, if section 118-220 applies to you as trustee of an implied trust arising because of the deceased ' s death, but subsection (1) does not, then:


    (a) the first element of the *CGT asset ' s *cost base, in your hands, is the CGT asset ' s cost base just before the deceased ' s death; and


    (b) the first element of the CGT asset ' s *reduced cost base, in your hands, is worked out similarly.

    118-227(3)    
    If section 118-222 applies to you:


    (a) the first element of the *CGT asset ' s *cost base, in your hands, is the CGT asset ' s cost base just before the earlier *CGT event happened that resulted in you *acquiring the CGT asset or your *ownership interest in it; and


    (b) the first element of the CGT asset ' s *reduced cost base, in your hands, is worked out similarly.

    SECTION 118-230  

    118-230   Application of CGT events E5 and E7 in relation to main residence exemption and special disability trusts  


    If *CGT event E5 or E7 happens in relation to a *CGT asset held by a trust that is or has been a *special disability trust, treat the lists of CGT events in paragraphs 118-110(2)(a) and 118-195(2)(a) as including a reference to that CGT event.

    Compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land only

    SECTION 118-240  

    118-240   What the following provisions are about  


    You can ignore a capital gain or capital loss you make from a compulsory acquisition (or similar arrangement) that happens only to land that is adjacent to:

  • (a) a dwelling that is your main residence; or
  • (b) a dwelling that passed to you as a beneficiary, or trustee, of a deceased estate;
  • to the extent that the land was used primarily for private or domestic purposes in association with the dwelling.

    There is a limit on the maximum area of land covered by the exemption.

    Note 1:

    The exemption may not apply in full if the dwelling:

  • (a) was not always a main residence; or
  • (b) was used for the purpose of producing assessable income.
  • Note 2:

    The exemption may not apply at all if you are a foreign resident.

    SECTION 118-245   CGT events happening only to adjacent land  


    Total adjacent land is 2 hectares or less

    118-245(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event that happens in relation to land (the exempt land ), or your *ownership interest in it, is disregarded if:


    (a) you are an individual; and


    (b) the exempt land is all or part of a *dwelling ' s *adjacent land at the time of the CGT event; and


    (c) the CGT event does not happen in relation to the dwelling and does not happen in relation to your ownership interest in the dwelling; and


    (d) one of the following subparagraphs applies:


    (i) the dwelling was your main residence throughout all or part of your *ownership period of the dwelling;

    (ii) your ownership interest in the dwelling *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate;

    (iii) you own your ownership interest in the dwelling as the trustee of a deceased estate; and


    (e) section 118-250 (about compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land) applies to the CGT event and the exempt land; and


    (f) the sum of the following is 2 hectares or less:


    (i) the area of all of the dwelling ' s adjacent land at the time of the CGT event;

    (ii) the area of the land immediately under the dwelling;

    (iii) if this section applied to you for an earlier CGT event that involved reducing the area of the dwelling ' s adjacent land at the time of that earlier CGT event - that reduction in area.
    Note:

    You may get only a partial exemption for the gain or loss (see section 118-260 ).



    Total adjacent land is more than 2 hectares

    118-245(2)    
    If:


    (a) apart from paragraph (1)(f), subsection (1) would apply to the gain or loss; and


    (b) you choose this subsection to apply to the gain or loss;

    disregard so much of the gain or loss that relates to land (the exempt land ) within the *maximum exempt area for the *CGT event and the *dwelling.

    Note:

    You may get only a partial exemption for this portion of the gain or loss (see section 118-260 ).



    No exemption if you are an excluded foreign resident

    118-245(3)    


    However, this section does not apply if, at the time the *CGT event happens, you:


    (a) are an *excluded foreign resident; or


    (b) are a foreign resident who does not satisfy the *life events test.


    SECTION 118-250   Compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land  

    118-250(1)    


    This section applies to the *CGT event and the exempt land if the CGT event involves:


    (a) the compulsory *acquisition of the exempt land by:


    (i) an *Australian government agency; or

    (ii) an entity under a power conferred by an *Australian law; or


    (b) you *disposing of the exempt land to an entity in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:


    (i) the disposal takes place after a notice was served on you by or on behalf of the entity;

    (ii) the notice invited you to negotiate with the entity with a view to the entity acquiring the exempt land by agreement;

    (iii) the notice informed you that if the negotiations were unsuccessful, the exempt land would be compulsorily acquired by the entity;

    (iv) the compulsory acquisition would have been under a power of compulsory acquisition conferred by an Australian law.
    Note:

    For paragraph (b), the entity may be an Australian government agency.


    118-250(2)    


    This section applies to the *CGT event and the exempt land if the CGT event involves:


    (a) your *ownership interest in the exempt land being compulsorily cancelled (however described) or varied (however described) by:


    (i) an *Australian government agency; or

    (ii) an entity under a power conferred by an *Australian law; or


    (b) you surrendering (however described) or varying (however described) your ownership interest in the exempt land in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:


    (i) the surrender or variation takes place after a notice was served on you by or on behalf of an entity;

    (ii) the notice invited you to negotiate with the entity with a view to you agreeing to surrender or vary your ownership interest;

    (iii) the notice informed you that if the negotiations were unsuccessful, your ownership interest would be compulsorily cancelled, or varied, under a power conferred by an Australian law.
    Note:

    For paragraph (b), the entity may be an Australian government agency.


    118-250(3)    


    This section applies to the *CGT event and the exempt land if the CGT event involves:


    (a) an interest or right in or relating to the exempt land being compulsorily conferred on:


    (i) an *Australian government agency; or

    (ii) an entity under a power conferred by an *Australian law; or


    (b) you conferring on an entity an interest or right in or relating to the exempt land in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:


    (i) the conferral takes place after a notice was served on you by or on behalf of an entity;

    (ii) the notice invited you to negotiate with the entity with a view to you agreeing to confer an interest or right in or relating to the exempt land;

    (iii) the notice informed you that if the negotiations were unsuccessful, an interest or right in or relating to the exempt land would be compulsorily conferred on the entity under a power conferred by an Australian law.
    Note:

    For paragraph (b), the entity may be an Australian government agency.


    118-250(4)    


    This section applies to the *CGT event and the exempt land if:


    (a) your *ownership interest in the exempt land:


    (i) was conferred on you by an *Australian government agency; and

    (ii) had a limited, but renewable, period of operation; and


    (b) the CGT event involves that ownership interest not being renewed by that agency.


    SECTION 118-255  

    118-255   Maximum exempt area  


    Your maximum exempt area for the *CGT event and the *dwelling is 2 hectares less the amount worked out as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Identify each earlier *CGT event (if any) that:

  • (a) happened in relation to land that was part of the *dwelling ' s *adjacent land at the time of the earlier CGT event, or happened in relation to your *ownership interest in that land at that time; and
  • (b) resulted in you losing rights to the substantial use and enjoyment of that land either completely or for at least 10 years;
  • for which you made a *capital gain or *capital loss that was wholly or partly disregarded because of the application of subsection 118-245(2) .


    Step 2.

    For each earlier *CGT event covered by step 1, work out the area of the exempt land for that application of subsection 118-245(2) .


    Step 3.

    Add the results from step 2 to the area of the land immediately under the *dwelling.

    SECTION 118-260   Partial exemption rules  

    118-260(1)    


    If section 118-245 applies to a *CGT event, the amount of the *capital gain or *capital loss that you would have made apart from this section from the CGT event is increased by an amount that is reasonable having regard to the following:


    (a) the extent that the *dwelling was not a main residence for the relevant period;


    (b) the extent that the dwelling was used for the *purpose of producing assessable income during the relevant period.

    118-260(2)    


    In determining what is a reasonable increase, have regard to the principles in this Subdivision applicable to *CGT events happening in relation to a *dwelling or your *ownership interest in it.

    SECTION 118-265  

    118-265   Extension to adjacent structures  


    Sections 118-245 to 118-260 (with appropriate modifications) apply to an *adjacent structure of a flat or home unit in a corresponding way to the way they apply to a *dwelling ' s *adjacent land.

    (Repealed) Subdivision 118-C - Goodwill  

    Subdivision 118-D - Insurance and superannuation  

    SECTION 118-300   Insurance policies  

    118-300(1)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event happening in relation to a *CGT asset that is your interest in rights under a *general insurance policy, a *life insurance policy or an *annuity instrument is disregarded in the situations set out in this table.


    Insurance policies
    Item The *CGT event happens to this type of policy: … and you are
    1 Any insurance policy or *annuity instrument the insurer or the entity that issued the instrument
    .
    2 A *general insurance policy for property where, if a *CGT event happened in relation to the property, any *capital gain or *capital loss would be disregarded the insured
    .
    3 A policy of insurance on the life of an individual or an *annuity instrument the original owner of the policy or instrument (other than the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity)
    .
    4 A policy of insurance on the life of an individual or an *annuity instrument an entity that *acquired the interest in the policy or instrument for no consideration
    .
    5 A policy of insurance on the life of an individual or an *annuity instrument the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity for the income year in which the *CGT event happened
    .
    6 A policy of insurance on the life of an individual or an *annuity instrument, where the *life insurance company ' s liabilities under the policy or instrument are to be discharged out of *complying superannuation assets or *segregated exempt assets the life insurance company
    .
    7 A policy of insurance against an individual suffering an illness or injury the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity for the income year in which the *CGT event happened

    EXAMPLES
    Example 1:

    Brian (as the insured) receives an insurance payment from his insurer for the destruction of a building he owned as an investment. The payment constitutes capital proceeds on the destruction (CGT event C1). The discharge of the insurance policy (CGT event C2) has no CGT consequences.

    Example 2:

    Peter is the original beneficial owner of the rights under a policy of insurance on the life of an individual. He transfers the rights to his spouse for nothing. There are no CGT consequences for him, and none for his spouse if he dies.



    Payment to trust beneficiary (or representative) if trustee owns the policy or instrument

    118-300(1A)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event happening because you receive a *CGT asset from the trustee of a trust is disregarded if:


    (a) you receive the CGT asset as:


    (i) a beneficiary of the trust; or

    (ii) a *legal personal representative of a beneficiary of the trust; and


    (b) the CGT asset is attributable to another CGT event and CGT asset to which table item 3 in subsection (1) applies for the trustee.


    118-300(2)    
    Only these *CGT events are relevant: CGT events A1, B1, C2, E1, E2, E3, E5, E6, E7, E8, I1, I2, K3 and K4.

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    SECTION 118-305   Superannuation  

    118-305(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss is disregarded if you make it from a *CGT event happening in relation to any of the following:


    (a) a right to an allowance, annuity or capital amount payable out of a *superannuation fund or *approved deposit fund;


    (b) a right to an asset of such a fund;


    (c) a right to any part of such an allowance, annuity, capital amount or asset.

    Example:

    Angela retires from her employment and receives a lump sum payment from her superannuation fund. This is an example of CGT event C2 (her rights to receive the payment ending). There are no CGT consequences for Angela.


    118-305(2)    
    However, this exemption is not available if:


    (a) you are the trustee of the fund and a *CGT event happens in relation to a *CGT asset of the fund; or


    (b) an entity receives a payment or property where:


    (i) the entity was not a member of the fund; and

    (ii) the entity *acquired the right to the payment or property for consideration.

    118-305(3)    


    Subsection (2) does not apply if:


    (a) a *payment split applies to a *splittable payment; and


    (b) as a result, a payment is made to the *non-member spouse (or to his or her *legal personal representative if the non-member spouse has died).


    SECTION 118-310  

    118-310   RSA's  
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event happening in relation to a right to, or any part of, an *RSA is disregarded.

    SECTION 118-313  

    118-313   Superannuation agreements under the Family Law Act  


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from *CGT event C2 or D1 relating directly to any of the following is disregarded:

    (a)    

    the making of a superannuation agreement (within the meaning of Part VIIIB or VIIIC of the Family Law Act 1975 );

    (b)    the termination, or setting aside, of such an agreement;

    (c)    such an agreement otherwise coming to an end.

    SECTION 118-315  

    118-315   Segregated exempt assets of life insurance companies  


    A *capital gain or *capital loss that a *life insurance company makes from a *CGT event happening in relation to a *segregated exempt asset is disregarded.

    SECTION 118-320   Segregated current pension assets of a complying superannuation entity  

    118-320(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss that a *complying superannuation entity makes from a *CGT event happening in relation to a *segregated current pension asset is disregarded.


    118-320(2)    


    However, subsection (1) does not apply to a *capital gain if the capital gain would, if it were an amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income received by the *complying superannuation fund, be *non-arm ' s length income.

    Subdivision 118-E - Units in pooled superannuation trusts  

    SECTION 118-350   Units in pooled superannuation trusts  

    118-350(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss an entity makes from a *CGT event happening in relation to a unit in a unit trust is disregarded if:


    (a) the trust is a *pooled superannuation trust for the income year in which the event happened; and


    (b) one of the conditions in subsection (2) is satisfied.

    118-350(2)    


    The entity must be:


    (a) the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity for the income year in which the *CGT event happened; or


    (b) a *life insurance company and, just before the event happened, the unit must have been a *complying superannuation asset or a *segregated exempt asset of the company.


    118-355   (Repealed) SECTION 118-355 Segregated exempt superannuation assets of pooled superannuation trust  
    (Repealed by No 58 of 2006 )

    Subdivision 118-F - Venture capital investment  

    SECTION 118-400   What this Subdivision is about  


    You can ignore capital gains and capital losses from CGT events that relate to investments, in Australian companies and unit trusts (and in some cases foreign holding companies), that meet the requirements of this Subdivision.

    These investments are made:

  • (a) through limited partnerships, known as venture capital limited partnerships or early stage venture capital limited partnerships, that are unconditionally registered under Part 2 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 ; or
  • (b) through limited partnerships, known as Australian venture capital funds of funds, that are unconditionally registered under that Part; or
  • (c) directly by foreign residents who are registered under Part 3 of that Act.
  • However, unless investments are made through early stage venture capital limited partnerships, you must be a foreign resident for this Subdivision to apply.

    Note:

    Registration of a limited partnership under Part 2 of that Act also leads to its income and losses being assessed under Division 5 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 on the basis that it is a partnership.

    This is an exception to the general rule, under Division 5A of that Part, that limited partnerships are assessed as companies.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 118-405   Exemption for certain foreign venture capital investments through venture capital limited partnerships  


    General

    118-405(1)    
    All of your share in a *capital gain or a *capital loss from a *CGT event is disregarded if:


    (a) you are an *eligible venture capital partner in a *limited partnership; and


    (b) the CGT event relates to an investment that the partnership made that is an *eligible venture capital investment; and


    (c) when the partnership made the investment, the partnership was a *venture capital limited partnership that was *unconditionally registered; and


    (d) at the time of the CGT event, the partnership:


    (i) owned the investment; and

    (ii) had owned the investment for at least 12 months; and

    (iii) was a venture capital limited partnership that was unconditionally registered; and

    (iv) in the case of a capital gain - met all of the *registration requirements of a VCLP that are not *investment registration requirements.
    Note:

    The registration requirements of a VCLP are set out in section 9-1 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 . It is important to understand that this is a separate requirement from registration under Part 2 of that Act (which effectively determines whether an entity is a VCLP).

    It is technically possible to be registered under Part 2 of that Act without meeting the registration requirements of a VCLP, but you might still not be entitled to exemption under this section.



    Meaning of venture capital limited partnership

    118-405(2)    
    A *limited partnership is a venture capital limited partnership at a particular time if, at that time, the partnership ' s registration as a venture capital limited partnership under Part 2 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 is, or is taken to have been, in force.

    For when the registration is, or is taken to have been, in force, see section 13-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 .

    Note:

    In this Act and the Venture Capital Act 2002 , the term " venture capital limited partnership " is usually abbreviated to " VCLP " .



    Effect of converting convertible notes etc.

    118-405(3)    
    A partnership that acquired a *share in a company by converting a *convertible note, or a convertible preference share, issued by the company is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as having owned the share from the time when it last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share.

    118-405(4)    


    A partnership that acquired a unit in a unit trust by converting a *convertible note issued by or on behalf of the trustee of the unit trust is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as having owned the unit from the time when it last acquired the convertible note.

    118-405(5)    


    Subsection (3) or (4) applies whether or not the acquisition of the *convertible note, or convertible preference share, was an *eligible venture capital investment.

    118-405(6)    


    A partnership that converts a *convertible note into a share or a unit is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as continuing to own the convertible note until the partnership no longer owns the share or unit.

    SECTION 118-407   Exemption for certain venture capital investments through early stage venture capital limited partnerships  


    General

    118-407(1)    
    All of your share in a *capital gain or a *capital loss from a *CGT event is disregarded if:


    (a) you are a partner in a *limited partnership; and


    (b) the CGT event relates to an investment that the partnership made that:


    (i) is an *eligible venture capital investment; and

    (ii) meets all of the *additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs for the investment; and


    (c) when the partnership made the investment, the partnership was an *early stage venture capital limited partnership that was *unconditionally registered; and


    (d) at the time of the CGT event, the partnership:


    (i) owned the investment; and

    (ii) had owned the investment for at least 12 months; and

    (iii) was an early stage venture capital limited partnership that was unconditionally registered; and

    (iv) in the case of a capital gain - met all of the *registration requirements of an ESVCLP that are not *investment registration requirements.
    Note 1:

    The registration requirements of an ESVCLP are set out in section 9-3 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 . It is important to understand that this is a separate requirement from registration under Part 2 of that Act (which effectively determines whether an entity is an ESVCLP).

    It is technically possible to be registered under Part 2 of that Act without meeting the registration requirements of an ESVCLP, but you might still not be entitled to exemption under this section.

    Note 2:

    This section does not apply if you get a partial exemption in relation to a CGT event under section 118-408 .



    Residency requirements for general partners

    118-407(2)    
    However, if you are a *general partner in the partnership, subsection (1) does not apply to you unless you are:


    (a) an Australian resident; or


    (b) a resident of a foreign country in respect of which a double tax agreement (as defined in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) is in force that is an agreement of a kind referred to in subparagraph (b)(i), (ia), (ii), (iii), (iv) or (v) of that definition.

    118-407(3)    
    For the purposes of this section, the place of residence of a *general partner in a *limited partnership:


    (a) that is a company or limited partnership; and


    (b) that is not an Australian resident;

    is the place in which the general partner has its central management and control.



    Meaning of early stage venture capital limited partnership

    118-407(4)    
    A *limited partnership is an early stage venture capital limited partnership at a particular time if, at that time, the partnership's registration as an early stage venture capital limited partnership under Part 2 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 is, or is taken to have been, in force.

    Note 1:

    For when the registration is, or is taken to have been, in force, see section 13-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 .

    Note 2:

    In this Act and the Venture Capital Act 2002 , the term " early stage venture capital limited partnership " is usually abbreviated to " ESVCLP " .


    118-407(5)    
    (Repealed by No 54 of 2016)



    Effect of converting convertible notes etc.

    118-407(6)    
    A partnership that acquired a *share in a company by converting a *convertible note, or a convertible preference share, issued by the company is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as having owned the share from the time when it last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share.

    118-407(7)    
    A partnership that acquired a unit in a unit trust by converting a *convertible note issued by the trustee of the unit trust is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as having owned the unit from the time when it last acquired the convertible note.

    118-407(8)    
    Subsection (6) or (7) applies whether or not the acquisition of the *convertible note, or convertible preference share, was an *eligible venture capital investment.

    118-407(9)    
    A partnership that converts a *convertible note into a share or a unit is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as continuing to own the convertible note until the partnership no longer owns the share or unit.

    SECTION 118-408   Partial exemption for some capital gains otherwise fully exempt under section 118-407  

    118-408(1)    
    Despite section 118-407 , you get only a partial exemption for a *capital gain from a *CGT event relating to an *eligible venture capital investment if:


    (a) apart from this section, all of your share in the capital gain from the CGT event relating to the investment would be disregarded under section 118-407 ; and


    (b) at the end of an income year to which subsection (4) applies (a valuation year ), the sum of the values of:


    (i) the assets of the company or unit trust in which the investment is made; and

    (ii) the assets of each other entity that is a *connected entity of the company or unit trust;
    exceeds $250 million; and


    (c) the CGT event happens after:


    (i) if there is only one valuation year - the end of the period of 6 months after the end of that valuation year; or

    (ii) if there is more than one valuation year - the end of the period of 6 months after the end of the earliest of those valuation years.

    118-408(2)    
    If subsection (1) applies, work out your *capital gain using the formula:

    Normal capital gain − Valuation year capital gain

    where:

    normal capital gain
    is what your *capital gain from the *CGT event would be apart from section 118-407 and this section.

    valuation year capital gain
    is the capital gain you would have made in relation to the *CGT event if the CGT event had happened:


    (a) if there is only one valuation year - at the end of the period of 6 months after the end of that valuation year; or


    (b) if there is more than one valuation year - at the end of the period of 6 months after the end of the earliest of those valuation years.

    Work out the capital gain based on what the *capital proceeds would have been, and on other matters relating to the amount of the gain being determined on a reasonable basis, if the CGT event resulting in the gain had happened at the end of that period.


    118-408(3)    
    Despite subsection (2), you are taken not to have a *capital gain, or a *capital loss, from the *CGT event if the amount worked out under the formula in that subsection would be less than zero.

    118-408(4)    
    This subsection applies to any income year that:


    (a) precedes the income year in which the *CGT event happens; but


    (b) does not precede the income year in which the investment was made.

    Note:

    There must always be at least one valuation year, because paragraph 118-407(1)(d) ensures the CGT event will not happen in the year the investment was made.


    118-408(5)    
    Section 118-407 does not apply in relation to a *CGT event if this section applies in relation to the CGT event.

    SECTION 118-410   Exemption for certain foreign venture capital investments through Australian venture capital funds of funds  


    Gains or losses as a partner in a VCLP or an ESVCLP

    118-410(1)    
    All of your share in a *capital gain or a *capital loss from a *CGT event is disregarded if:


    (a) you are an *eligible venture capital partner in a *limited partnership; and


    (b) the CGT event relates to an *eligible venture capital investment made by a *VCLP, or an *ESVCLP in which the partnership is a partner; and


    (c) when the investment was made, the partnership was an *Australian venture capital fund of funds that was *unconditionally registered; and


    (d) when the investment was made, the VCLP or ESVCLP was unconditionally registered; and


    (e) at the time of the CGT event, the partnership:


    (i) was an Australian venture capital fund of funds that was unconditionally registered; and

    (ii) in the case of a capital gain - met all of the *registration requirements of an AFOF that are not *investment registration requirements; and


    (f) at the time of the CGT event, the VCLP or ESVCLP:


    (i) owned the investment; and

    (ii) had owned the investment for at least 12 months; and

    (iii) was unconditionally registered; and

    (iv) in the case of a capital gain - met all of the *registration requirements of a VCLP, or all of the *registration requirements of an ESVCLP, (as the case requires) that are not investment registration requirements.
    Note:

    The registration requirements of an AFOF are set out in section 9-5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 . It is important to understand that this is a separate requirement from registration under Part 2 of that Act (which effectively determines whether an entity is an AFOF).

    It is technically possible to be registered under Part 2 of that Act without meeting the registration requirements of an AFOF, but you might still not be entitled to exemption under this section.



    Gains or losses from direct investments

    118-410(2)    
    All of your share in a *capital gain or a *capital loss from a *CGT event is disregarded if:


    (a) you are an *eligible venture capital partner in a *limited partnership; and


    (b) in the case of a capital gain - the CGT event relates to an *eligible venture capital investment that the partnership made in a company, or a unit trust, in which a *VCLP, or an *ESVCLP, of which the partnership is a partner, owns one or more eligible venture capital investments; and


    (c) when the investment was made, the partnership was an *Australian venture capital fund of funds that was *unconditionally registered; and


    (d) when the investment was made, the VCLP or ESVCLP owned one or more eligible venture capital investments in the company referred to in paragraph (b); and


    (e) at the time of the CGT event, the partnership:


    (i) owned the investment; and

    (ii) had owned the investment for at least 12 months; and

    (iii) was an Australian venture capital fund of funds that was unconditionally registered; and

    (iv) in the case of a capital gain - met all of the *registration requirements of an AFOF that are not *investment registration requirements.
    Note:

    The registration requirements of an AFOF are set out in section 9-5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 . It is important to understand that this is a separate requirement from registration under Part 2 of that Act (which effectively determines whether an entity is an AFOF).

    It is technically possible to be registered under Part 2 of that Act without meeting the registration requirements of an AFOF, but you might still not be entitled to exemption under this section.



    Meaning of Australian venture capital fund of funds

    118-410(3)    


    A *limited partnership is an Australian venture capital fund of funds at a particular time if, at that time, the partnership ' s registration as an Australian venture capital fund of funds under Part 2 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 is, or is taken to have been, in force.

    For when the registration is, or is taken to have been, in force, see section 13-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 .

    Note:

    In this Act and the Venture Capital Act 2002 , the term " Australian venture capital fund of funds " is usually abbreviated to " AFOF " .



    Effect of converting convertible notes etc.

    118-410(4)    
    A partnership that acquired a *share in a company by converting a *convertible note, or a convertible preference share, issued by the company is treated, for the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(f)(ii) and (2)(e)(ii), as having owned the share from the time when it last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share.

    118-410(5)    


    A partnership that acquired a unit in a unit trust by converting a *convertible note issued by or on behalf of the trustee of the unit trust is treated, for the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(f)(ii) and (2)(e)(ii), as having owned the unit from the time when it last acquired the convertible note.

    118-410(6)    


    Subsection (4) or (5) applies whether or not the acquisition of the *convertible note, or convertible preference share, was an *eligible venture capital investment.

    118-410(7)    


    A partnership that converts a *convertible note into a share or a unit is treated, for the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(f)(ii) and (2)(e)(ii), as continuing to own the convertible note until the partnership no longer owns the share or unit.

    SECTION 118-415   Exemption for certain venture capital investments by foreign residents  


    General

    118-415(1)    
    A *capital gain or a *capital loss from a *CGT event is disregarded if:


    (a) the CGT event relates to an investment that you made that is an *eligible venture capital investment; and


    (b) you were an *eligible venture capital investor when you made the investment; and


    (c) at the time of the CGT event:


    (i) you owned the investment; and

    (ii) you had owned the investment for at least 12 months; and

    (iii) you were an eligible venture capital investor.


    Meaning of eligible venture capital investor

    118-415(2)    
    An entity is an eligible venture capital investor at a particular time if, at that time, the entity:


    (a) is a *tax-exempt foreign resident; and


    (b) is registered under Part 3 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 .



    Effect of converting convertible notes etc.

    118-415(3)    
    An entity that acquired a *share in a company by converting a *convertible note, or a convertible preference share, issued by the company is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(c)(ii), as having owned the share from the time when it last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share.

    118-415(4)    


    An entity that acquired a unit in a unit trust by converting a *convertible note issued by or on behalf of the trustee of the unit trust is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(c)(ii), as having owned the unit from the time when it last acquired the convertible note.

    118-415(5)    


    Subsection (3) or (4) applies whether or not the acquisition of the *convertible note, or convertible preference share, was an *eligible venture capital investment.

    118-415(6)    


    An entity that converts a *convertible note into a share or a unit is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(c)(ii), as continuing to own the convertible note until the entity no longer owns the share or unit.

    SECTION 118-420   Meaning of eligible venture capital partner etc.  

    118-420(1)    
    A partner in a *limited partnership is an eligible venture capital partner if:


    (a) the partner is a *tax-exempt foreign resident; or


    (b) the partner is a *foreign venture capital fund of funds, and the sum of:


    (i) the partner ' s *committed capital in the partnership; and

    (ii) the sum of the amounts of committed capital in the partnership of any entities that are *connected entities of the partner;
    does not exceed 30% of the partnership ' s committed capital; or


    (ba) the partner is a *widely held foreign venture capital fund of funds; or


    (c) the partner is a foreign resident who is not a *general partner of a *VCLP or an *ESVCLP and is neither a *tax-exempt foreign resident nor a *foreign venture capital fund of funds, and the sum of:


    (i) the partner ' s committed capital in the partnership; and

    (ii) the sum of the amounts of committed capital in the partnership of any entities that are connected entities of the partner;
    is less than 10% of the partnership ' s committed capital.
    Note:

    Subsection (7) prevents some trusts from being eligible venture capital partners.


    118-420(2)    
    An entity that is an *associate of the partner only because the entity is a partner in the partnership in question is taken not to be a *connected entity of the partner for the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(b)(ii) and (c)(ii).

    118-420(3)    


    An entity is a tax-exempt foreign resident if:


    (a) the entity is a foreign resident; and


    (b) the entity is not a *general partner of a *VCLP or an *ESVCLP; and


    (c) the entity ' s income is exempt, or effectively exempt, from taxation in the entity ' s country of residence.


    118-420(4)    
    An entity that is a *limited partnership is a foreign venture capital fund of funds if:


    (a) the partnership was established in a foreign country; and


    (b) every partner who is a *general partner is a foreign resident; and


    (c) the partnership is not a general partner of a *VCLP or an *ESVCLP.


    118-420(5)    
    An entity that is not a *limited partnership is a foreign venture capital fund of funds if:


    (a) whether by operation of law or by election, the entity is not taxed as an entity in its country of residence, but the entity ' s income is taxed to its members according to their interests in the entity; and


    (b) the entity was established in a foreign country; and


    (c) the entity is a foreign resident; and


    (d) the entity is not a *general partner of a *VCLP or an *ESVCLP.


    118-420(6)    


    An entity is a widely held foreign venture capital fund of funds if:


    (a) the entity is a *foreign venture capital fund of funds; and


    (b) the entity is a *widely held entity; and


    (c) *eligible venture capital partners (other than foreign venture capital fund of funds) ultimately hold the rights to at least 90% of the entity ' s income; and


    (d) each other entity who:


    (i) if the entity is a *limited partnership - is a *general partner of the partnership; or

    (ii) otherwise - exercises day to day control of the entity;
    is a *foreign resident.

    118-420(7)    
    A trust is not an eligible venture capital partner if an Australian resident:


    (a) is or is likely to become presently entitled, for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , to; or


    (b) has or is likely to have an individual interest, for the purposes of Division 5 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , in;

    a share of income of the trust, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed partnerships or trusts.


    118-420(8)    


    For the purposes of this section, the place of residence of a *generalpartner of a *limited partnership:


    (a) that is a company or a limited partnership; and


    (b) that is a foreign resident;

    is the place in which the general partner has its central management and control.


    118-420(9)    


    For the purposes of this section, the place of residence of an entity referred to in paragraph (5)(a) is the place in which the entity has its central management and control.

    SECTION 118-425   Meaning of eligible venture capital investment - investments in companies  


    Requirements for an eligible venture capital investment

    118-425(1)    
    An investment is an eligible venture capital investment if:

    (a)    it is *at risk; and

    (b)    

    it is:

    (i) an acquisition of *shares in a company; or

    (ii) an acquisition of options (including warrants) originally issued by a company to acquire shares in the company; or

    (iii) an acquisition of *convertible notes (other than convertible notes that are *debt interests) issued by a company; and

    (c)    the company meets the requirements of subsections (2) to (7) ; and

    (d)    the sum of:


    (i) the total amount that the partnership has invested in all the *equity interests and *debt interests that the partnership owns in the company; and

    (ii) the total amount that the partnership has invested in all the equity interests and debt interests that the partnership owns in any entities that are *connected entities of the company;
    does not exceed 30% of the partnership ' s *committed capital.

    Certain entities not treated as connected entities

    118-425(1A)    


    In applying subparagraph (1)(d)(ii) , ignore an entity that is a *connected entity of the company only because it is an *associate of the company because of an investment made in the entity by the partnership.

    Location within Australia

    118-425(2)    


    The company:

    (a)    must, at the time the investment is made, be an Australian resident; and

    (b)    

    if at that time the entity making the investment does not own any other investments in the company - must meet the following requirements:

    (i) more than 50% of the people who are currently engaged by the company to perform services must perform those services primarily in Australia;

    (ii) more than 50% of its assets (determined by value) must be situated in Australia;
    during the whole of the period of 12 months, or such shorter period as *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 , starting from the time the investment is made.

    However, subparagraph (b)(i) or (ii) does not apply to the company if Industry Innovation and Science Australia so determines under section 25-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 .

    See subsection (10) for the value of assets.

    Note:

    A company that fails to meet the requirements of this subsection can still be eligible in certain circumstances: see subsection (12A) .



    Predominant activity

    118-425(3)    


    The company must satisfy at least 2 of these requirements:

    (a)    more than 75% of the assets (determined by value) that are assets of either:


    (i) the company; or

    (ii) any entity controlled by the company in a way described in section 328-125 (a controlled entity );
    must be used primarily in activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) of this section;

    (b)    more than 75% of the persons who are employees of either or both of the following:


    (i) the company;

    (ii) any one or more of its controlled entities;
    must be engaged (as such employees) primarily in activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) of this section;

    (c)    more than 75% of the total assessable income, *exempt income and *non-assessable non-exempt income of:


    (i) the company; and

    (ii) each of its controlled entities;
    must come from activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) of this section.
    Note 1:

    This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.

    Note 2:

    See subsection (10) for the value of assets.

    Note 3:

    A company that fails to meet at least 2 of the requirements can still be eligible if:

  • (a) Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines that the company ' s primary activity is not ineligible and the failure is temporary: see subsection (14) ; or
  • (b) all amounts invested in the company are appropriately invested within the first 6 months: see subsection (14A) .
  • Industry Innovation and Science Australia may also determine that the activities of a controlled entity of the company are to be disregarded in applying this section to the company: see subsection (14B) .



    Investment in other entities

    118-425(4)    


    The company must not invest, in another entity, any part of the amount invested, unless:

    (a)    

    the other entity:

    (i) is *connected with the company (but not because the other entity is an *associate of the company as a result of an investment made in the other entity by the partnership); and

    (ii) meets the requirements of subsections (3) to (7) ; or

    (b)    the other entity:


    (i) is, after the investment is made, controlled by the company in a way described in section 328-125 ; and

    (ii) meets the requirements of subsections (2) to (7) of this section (other than subsection (3) ).

    However, this subsection does not prevent the company from depositing money with an *ADI, or with a body authorised by or under a law of a foreign country to carry on banking business in that country.

    Note 1:

    This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.

    Note 2:

    The other entity can be taken to meet the requirements of subsection (2) if Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines that its activities are complementary to activities of the company or other controlled entities and that the company meets those requirements at the time of the investment: see subsection (14C) .



    Investment in the capacity of a trustee

    118-425(4A)    


    The company must not, in the capacity of a trustee, use any part of the amount invested.
    Note:

    This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.



    Registered auditor

    118-425(5)    


    The company must have as its auditor a *registered auditor at all times (if any) referred to in subsection (5A) during which the company:

    (a)    

    is not a proprietary company within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (b)    

    is a large proprietary company within the meaning of that Act; or

    (c)    would exceed the *permitted entity value if the amount provided for under subsection 118-440(9) were $12.5 million.

    Note:

    This requirement is ongoing.


    118-425(5A)    


    The times are:

    (a)    the end of the income year in which the investment is made; and

    (b)    all times after the end of that income year.



    Permitted entity value

    118-425(6)    
    The company must not, immediately before the investment is made, exceed the *permitted entity value.

    Listing

    118-425(7)    


    The company must be a company whose *shares:

    (a)    are, at the time the investment is made, not listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country; or

    (b)    are so listed at that time, but cease to be so listed at any time during the 12 months after the investment is made.

    However, the company is taken to meet the requirements of this subsection in relation to any investment made by an *ESVCLP (whether or not shares in the company are so listed).

    Note:

    The additional requirements for ESVCLPs deal with listing in relation to initial investments by ESVCLPs in companies: see paragraph 118-428(1)(a) .



    Scrip for scrip investments

    118-425(8)    
    However, a company is taken to meet the requirements of subsections (2) to (7) if:

    (a)    the investment is an acquisition of *shares in that company in exchange for shares in another company; and

    (b)    

    at the time that the *VCLP, *ESVCLP, *AFOF or *eligible venture capital investor in question acquired the shares being exchanged, the other company meets the requirements of subsections (2) to (7) , but not only because this subsection applies to the other company; and

    (c)    the shares in the other company that are being exchanged are all of the shares in the other company that the entity making the investment owned at the time of the exchange.



    Debt interests

    118-425(9)    


    To avoid doubt, a *debt interest cannot be an eligible venture capital investment.

    The value of an asset or investment

    118-425(10)    


    The value of an asset, or an investment, of an entity at a particular time for the purposes of this section is the value of the asset or investment as shown in:

    (a)    the last audited accounts prepared for the entity for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001 that relates to a period ending less than 18 months before that time; or

    (b)    if there are no such audited accounts - a statement, prepared in accordance with the *accounting standards and audited by the entity ' s auditor, showing that value as at a time no longer than 12 months before that time.


    118-425(10A)    


    However, for the purposes of this section, the value of the asset or investment at that time is the value provided for by section 118-450 if:

    (a)    there are no such audited accounts; and

    (b)    the entity does not have an auditor at that time; and

    (c)    the entity is not required under subsection (5) of this section to have an auditor at that time.


    118-425(11)    
    (Repealed by No 54 of 2016)



    Application to consolidated or consolidatable groups

    118-425(12)    


    This section applies to a *consolidated group or *consolidatable group as if:

    (a)    the *head company of the group carried on all of the activities that are carried on by *subsidiary members of the group; and

    (b)    the assets, employees and income of the subsidiary members of the group were assets, employees and income of the head company; and

    (c)    each subsidiary member of the group were parts of the head company rather than separate entities.



    Exception to requirements relating to location within Australia

    118-425(12A)    


    A company is taken to meet the requirements of subsection (2) in relation to an investment made by an entity if the sum of:

    (a)    the value of the investment at the time the entity makes it; and

    (b)    the total value of all the other investments that the entity owns at that time that do not, or apart from this subsection would not, meet those requirements;

    does not exceed 20% of the partnership ' s *committed capital.

    Note:

    See subsection (10) for the value of investments.



    Ineligible activities

    118-425(13)    


    These activities are ineligible activities:

    (a)    property development or land ownership;

    (b)    finance, to the extent that it is any of the following:


    (i) banking;

    (ii) providing capital to others;

    (iii) leasing;

    (iv) factoring;

    (v) securitisation;

    (c)    insurance;

    (d)    

    construction (including extension, improvement or up-grading) or acquisition of infrastructure facilities (within the meaning of section 93L of the Development Allowance Authority Act 1992 , as in force just before the commencement of Schedule 6 to the Statute Update (Smaller Government) Act 2018 ) or related facilities (within the meaning of section 93M of that Act), or both;

    (e)    making investments, whether made directly or indirectly, that are directed to deriving income in the nature of interest, rents, dividends, royalties or lease payments.

    For the purposes of this subsection, activities that are ancillary or incidental to a particular activity are taken to form part of that activity.

    Note:

    Under Division 362 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , Industry Innovation and Science Australia can make rulings that activities, or classes of activities, are not ineligible activities.


    118-425(13A)    


    However, none of the following activities are ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) :

    (a)    developing technology for use in relation to an activity referred to in paragraph (13)(b) , (c) or (e) ;

    (b)    an activity that is ancillary or incidental to the activity of developing technology referred to in paragraph (a) of this subsection;

    (c)    an activity referred to in paragraph (13)(b) , (c) or (e) that is the subject of a finding in force under section 118-432 at the time the investment is made.


    118-425(13B)    


    Subsection (13A) does not apply in circumstances prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

    Industry Innovation and Science Australia discretion

    118-425(14)    


    A company is taken to meet the requirements of subsection (3) even if it fails to satisfy at least 2 of the requirements in that subsection if *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

    (a)    the company ' s primary activity is not an ineligible activity mentioned in subsection (13) ; and

    (b)    the failure is temporary and did not exist at the time the investment referred to in subsection (1) was made and, if it has been disposed of, when it was disposed of.



    Temporary exception to the requirements for predominant activity

    118-425(14A)    


    A company is taken to meet the requirements of subsection (3) even if it fails to satisfy at least 2 of the requirements in that subsection if:

    (a)    the company ' s sole purpose is making one or more investments that are *eligible venture capital investments, or would be eligible venture capital investments apart from paragraph (1)(d) ; and

    (b)    during the 6 month period starting immediately before the first investment made by a *VCLP, *ESVCLP, *AFOF or *eligible venture capital investor, the company has used all of the amounts invested in it:


    (i) to make investments of a kind referred to in paragraph (a) ; or

    (ii) to engage in activities that are ancillary or incidental to making those investments.

    However, this subsection applies to the company only for that 6 month period.



    Activities disregarded in applying the predominant activity test

    118-425(14B)    


    If *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

    (a)    the activities of the controlled entity of a company are complementary to one or more of the activities, of the company or its other controlled entities, that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) of this section; and

    (b)    the activities that, taken together, constitute the principal activities of the company and all of its controlled entities are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) of this section; and

    (c)    in all the circumstances, it is appropriate that, for a period specified in the determination, the activities of the controlled entity are disregarded when applying subsection (3) of this section to the company;

    in applying subsection (3) of this section to the company, disregard, for the period specified in the determination, the activities of the controlled entity.



    Other entity can be taken to meet requirements relating to location in Australia

    118-425(14C)    


    In applying subsection (4) to a company in relation to its investment in another entity, the other entity is taken, for the purposes of subparagraph (4)(b)(ii) , to meet the requirements of subsection (2) if *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

    (a)    the activities of the other entity are complementary to one or more of the activities of the company or its other controlled entities; and

    (b)    the company meets the requirements of subsection (2) of this section at the time the investment is made, or will meet those requirements at the time the investment is proposed to be made.



    Convertible notes and convertible preference shares

    118-425(15)    


    To the extent that an investment by an entity consists of the acquisition of a *share in a company by converting a *convertible note, or a convertible preference share, issued by the company, the investment is, for the purpose of determining whether the company meets the requirements of subsections (2) to (7) , taken to have been made at the time when the entity last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share.

    118-425(16)    
    (Repealed by No 54 of 2016)


    SECTION 118-427   Meaning of eligible venture capital investment - investments in unit trusts  


    Requirements for an eligible venture capital investment

    118-427(1)    
    An investment is an eligible venture capital investment if:

    (a)    it is *at risk; and

    (b)    it is either:


    (i) an acquisition of units in a unit trust; or

    (ii) an acquisition of options (including warrants) originally issued by or on behalf of the trustee of a unit trust to acquire units in the unit trust; or

    (iii) an acquisition of *convertible notes (other than convertible notes that are *debt interests) issued by or on behalf of the trustee of a unit trust; and

    (c)    the unit trust meets the requirements of subsections (3) to (8) ; and

    (d)    the sum of:


    (i) the total amount that the partnership has invested in all the *equity interests and *debt interests that the partnership owns in the unit trust; and

    (ii) the total amount that the partnership has invested in all the equity interests and debt interests that the partnership owns in any entities that are *connected entities of the unit trust;
    does not exceed 30% of the partnership ' s *committed capital.

    Certain entities not treated as connected entities

    118-427(2)    
    In applying subparagraph (1)(d)(ii) , ignore an entity that is a *connected entity of the unit trust only because it is an *associate of the unit trust because of an investment made in the entity by the partnership.

    Location within Australia

    118-427(3)    


    The unit trust:

    (a)    must, at the time the investment is made, carry on *business in Australia; and

    (b)    must, at that time, meet at least one of the following requirements:


    (i) the central management and control of the unit trust is in Australia;

    (ii) more than 50% of the beneficial interests in the income of the unit trust are held by Australian residents;

    (iii) more than 50% of the beneficial interests in the property of the unit trust are held by Australian residents; and

    (c)    

    if at that time the entity making the investment does not own any other investments in the unit trust - must meet the following requirements:

    (i) more than 50% of the people who are currently engaged by the trustee of the unit trust to perform services must perform those services primarily in Australia;

    (ii) more than 50% of its assets (determined by value) must be situated in Australia;
    during the whole of the period of 12 months, or such shorter period as *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 , starting from the time the investment is made.

    However, subparagraph (c)(i) or (ii) does not apply to the unit trust if Industry Innovation and Science Australia so determines under section 25-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 .

    Note:

    A company that fails to meet the requirements of this subsection can still be eligible in certain circumstances: see subsection (13) .



    Predominant activity

    118-427(4)    


    The unit trust must satisfy at least 2 of these requirements:

    (a)    

    more than 75% of the assets (determined by value) that are assets of either:

    (i) the unit trust; or

    (ii) any entity controlled by the unit trust in a way described in section 328-125 (a controlled entity );
    must be used primarily in activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) of this section;

    (b)    

    more than 75% of the persons who are employees of either or both of the following:

    (i) the trustee of the unit trust;

    (ii) any one or more of the unit trust ' s controlled entities;
    must be engaged (as such employees) primarily in activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) of this section;

    (c)    

    more than 75% of the total assessable income, *exempt income and *non-assessable non-exempt income of:

    (i) the unit trust; and

    (ii) each of its controlled entities;
    must come from activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) of this section.
    Note 1:

    This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.

    Note 2:

    See subsection (11) for the value of assets.

    Note 3:

    A unit trust that fails to meet at least 2 of the requirements can still be eligible if Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines that the unit trust ' s primary activity is not ineligible and the failure is temporary: see subsection (15) .

    Note 4:

    Industry Innovation and Science Australia may also determine that the activities of a controlled entity of the unit trust are to be disregarded in applying this section to the unit trust: see subsection (15A) .



    Investment in other entities

    118-427(5)    


    The unit trust must not invest, in another entity, any part of the amount invested, unless:

    (a)    the other entity:


    (i) is *connected with the unit trust (but not because the other entity is an *associate of the unit trust as a result of an investment made in the other entity by the partnership); and

    (ii) meets the requirements of subsections (4) to (8) ; or

    (b)    the other entity:


    (i) is, after the investment is made, controlled by the unit trust in a way described in section 328-125 ; and

    (ii) meets the requirements of subsections (3) to (8) of this section (other than subsection (4) ).

    However, this subsection does not prevent the unit trust from depositing money with an *ADI, or with a body authorised by or under a law of a foreign country to carry on banking business in that country.

    Note 1:

    This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.

    Note 2:

    The other entity can be taken to meet the requirements of subsection (3) if Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines that its activities are complementary to activities of the unit trust or other controlled entities and that the unit trust meets those requirements at the time of the investment: see subsection (15B) .



    Investment in the capacity of a trustee

    118-427(5A)    


    The unit trust must not, in the capacity of a trustee, use any part of the amount invested.
    Note:

    This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.



    Registered auditor

    118-427(6)    


    The unit trust must have as its auditor a *registered auditor at all times (if any) referred to in subsection (6A) during which the unit trust:

    (a)    if it were a company:


    (i) would not be a proprietary company within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) would be a large proprietary company within the meaning of that Act; or

    (b)    would exceed the *permitted entity value if the amount provided for under subsection 118-440(9) were $12.5 million.

    Note:

    This requirement is ongoing.


    118-427(6A)    


    The times are:

    (a)    the end of the income year in which the investment is made; and

    (b)    all times after the end of that income year.



    Permitted entity value

    118-427(7)    
    The unit trust must not, immediately before the investment is made, exceed the *permitted entity value.

    Listing

    118-427(8)    
    The unit trust must be a unit trust whose units:

    (a)    are, at the time the investment is made, not listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country; or

    (b)    are so listed at that time, but cease to be so listed at any time during the 12 months after the investment is made.

    However, the unit trust is taken to meet the requirements of this subsection in relation to any investment made by an *ESVCLP (whether or not units in the unit trust are so listed).

    Note:

    The additional requirements for ESVCLPs deal with listing in relation to initial investments by ESVCLPs in unit trusts: see paragraph 118-428(1)(a) .



    Scrip for scrip investments

    118-427(9)    
    However, a unit trust is taken to meet the requirements of subsections (3) to (8) if:

    (a)    the investment is an acquisition of units in that unit trust in exchange for units in another unit trust; and

    (b)    at the time that the *VCLP, *ESVCLP, *AFOF or *eligible venture capital investor in question acquired the units being exchanged, the other unit trust meets the requirements of subsections (3) to (8) , but not only because this subsection applies to the other unit trust; and

    (c)    the units in the other unit trust that are being exchanged are all of the units in the other unit trust that the entity making the investment owned at the time of the exchange.

    Debt interests

    118-427(10)    
    To avoid doubt, a *debt interest cannot be an *eligible venture capital investment.

    The value of an asset or investment

    118-427(11)    


    The value of an asset or investment of an entity at a particular time for the purposes of this section is:

    (a)    the value of the asset or investment as shown in a statement, prepared in accordance with the *accounting standards and audited by the entity ' s auditor, showing that value as at a time no longer than 12 months before that time; or

    (b)    the value provided for by section 118-450 if:


    (i) the entity does not have an auditor at that time; and

    (ii) the entity is not required under subsection (6) of this section to have an auditor at that time.


    Application to groups

    118-427(12)    
    If a group of entities:

    (a)    is treated as a *consolidated group because of a choice that a unit trust has made under section 713-130 ; or

    (b)    

    would be treated as a consolidated group because of such a choice:

    (i) if a unit trust were to make such a choice; or

    (ii) if a unit trust that is not a *public trading trust were such a trust and were to make such a choice;

    this section applies in relation to the entities as if:

    (c)    the unit trust carried on, as the *head company of the consolidated group or consolidatable group, all of the activities that are carried on by the other members of the group; and

    (d)    the assets, employees and income of the other members of the group were assets, employees and income of the unit trust; and

    (e)    each of the other members of the group were parts of the unit trust rather than separate entities.



    Exception to requirements relating to location within Australia

    118-427(13)    
    A unit trust is taken to meet the requirements of subsection (3) in relation to an investment made by an entity if the sum of:

    (a)    the value of the investment at the time the entity makes it; and

    (b)    the total value of all the other investments that the entity owns at that time that do not, or apart from this subsection would not, meet those requirements;

    does not exceed 20% of the partnership ' s *committed capital.

    Note:

    See subsection (11) for the value of investments.



    Ineligible activities

    118-427(14)    


    These activities are ineligible activities:

    (a)    property development or land ownership;

    (b)    finance, to the extent that it is any of the following:


    (i) banking;

    (ii) providing capital to others;

    (iii) leasing;

    (iv) factoring;

    (v) securitisation;

    (c)    insurance;

    (d)    

    construction (including extension, improvement or up-grading) or acquisition of infrastructure facilities (within the meaning of section 93L of the Development Allowance Authority Act 1992 , as in force just before the commencement of Schedule 6 to the Statute Update (Smaller Government) Act 2018 ) or related facilities (within the meaning of section 93M of that Act), or both;

    (e)    making investments, whether made directly or indirectly, that are directed to deriving income in the nature of interest, rents, dividends, royalties or lease payments.

    For the purposes of this subsection, activities that are ancillary or incidental to a particular activity are taken to form part of that activity.

    Note:

    Under Division 362 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , Industry Innovation and Science Australia can make rulings that activities, or classes of activities, are not ineligible activities.


    118-427(14A)    


    However, none of the following activities are ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) :

    (a)    developing technology for use in relation to an activity referred to in paragraph (14)(b) , (c) or (e) ;

    (b)    an activity that is ancillary or incidental to the activity of developing technology referred to in paragraph (a) of this subsection;

    (c)    an activity referred to in paragraph (14)(b) , (c) or (e) that is the subject of a finding in force under section 118-432 at the time the investment is made.


    118-427(14B)    


    Subsection (14A) does not apply in circumstances prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

    Industry Innovation and Science Australia discretion

    118-427(15)    


    A unit trust is taken to meet the requirements of subsection (4) even if it fails to satisfy at least 2 of the requirements in that subsection if *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

    (a)    the unit trust ' s primary activity is not an ineligible activity mentioned in subsection (14) ; and

    (b)    the failure is temporary and did not exist at the time the investment referred to in subsection (1) was made and, if it has been disposed of, when it was disposed of.



    Activities disregarded in applying the predominant activity test

    118-427(15A)    


    If *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

    (a)    the activities of the controlled entity of a unit trust are complementary to one or more of the activities, of the unit trust or its other controlled entities, that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) of thissection; and

    (b)    the activities that, taken together, constitute the principal activities of the unit trust and all of its controlled entities are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) of this section; and

    (c)    in all the circumstances, it is appropriate that, for a period specified in the determination, the activities of the controlled entity are disregarded when applying subsection (4) of this section to the unit trust;

    in applying subsection (4) of this section to the unit trust, disregard, for the period specified in the determination, the activities of the controlled entity.



    Other entity can be taken to meet requirements relating to location in Australia

    118-427(15B)    


    In applying subsection (5) to a unit trust in relation to its investment in another entity, the other entity is taken, for the purposes of subparagraph (5)(b)(ii) , to meet the requirements of subsection (3) if *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

    (a)    the activities of the other entity are complementary to one or more of the activities of the unit trust or its other controlled entities; and

    (b)    the unit trust meets the requirements of subsection (3) of this section at the time the investment is made, or will meet those requirements at the time the investment is proposed to be made.



    Convertible notes

    118-427(16)    
    To the extent that an investment by an entity consists of the acquisition of a unit in a unit trust by converting a *convertible note issued by or on behalf of the trustee of the unit trust, the investment is, for the purpose of determining whether the unit trust meets the requirements of subsections (3) to (8) , taken to have been made at the time when the entity last acquired the convertible note.

    118-427(17)    
    Subsection (16) applies whether or not the acquisition of the *convertible note was an *eligible venture capital investment.

    SECTION 118-428   Additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs  

    118-428(1)    
    The additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs , for an investment in a company or in a unit trust, are:


    (a) if the entity making the investment does not, when the investment is made, own any other investment in the company or unit trust:


    (i) *shares in the company; or

    (ii) units in the unit trust;
    are not, when the investment is made, listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country; and


    (b) if the investment is *pre-owned when the investment is made:


    (i) the entity already owns investments in the company or unit trust; or

    (ii) the entity will, in connection with making the investment, make other investments in the company or unit trust, some or all of which are not pre-owned; and


    (c) if the investment is pre-owned when the investment is made - the sum of:


    (i) the value of the investment when the entity makes it; and

    (ii) the total value of all the other pre-owned investments that the entity owns at that time;
    does not exceed 20% of the partnership ' s *committed capital.
    Note:

    See subsection (3) for the value of investments.


    118-428(2)    
    An investment is pre-owned if it was issued or allotted to an entity other than the entity that owns the investment. However, the investment is not pre-owned if it:


    (a) was issued:


    (i) to an underwriter or sub-underwriter of the issue of the investment; or

    (ii) to a person for the purpose of being offered for sale; and


    (b) was still held by the underwriter, sub-underwriter or person immediately before being acquired by the entity that now owns the investment.

    118-428(3)    
    The value of an investment of an entity at a particular time for the purposes of this section is the value of the investment as shown in:


    (a) the last audited accounts prepared for the entity for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001 that relates to a period ending lessthan 18 months before that time; or


    (b) a statement, prepared in accordance with the *accounting standards and audited by the entity ' s auditor, showing that value as at a time no longer than 12 months before that time.

    118-428(4)    


    However, for the purposes of this section, the value of the investment at that time is the value provided for by section 118-450 if:


    (a) there are no such audited accounts; and


    (b) the entity does not have an auditor at that time.


    SECTION 118-430  

    118-430   Meaning of at risk  


    An *eligible venture capital investment is at risk if the entity that owns the investment had no *arrangement as to:


    (a) the maintenance of the value of the investment; or


    (b) the maintenance of any earnings or other return that might be made from owning the investment, including (if the investment relates to a unit trust) the maintenance of any conferrals of present entitlement to income or capital of the unit trust or to any distributions of income or capital of the unit trust.

    SECTION118-432   Findings of substantially novel applications of technology  


    Public findings

    118-432(1)    


    *Industry Innovation and Science Australia may, by legislative instrument, find that each activity within a specified class is a substantially novel application of one or more technologies.
    Note:

    A substantially novel application of a technology could, for example, take the form of a substantially novel product or service.



    Private findings

    118-432(2)    


    *Industry Innovation and Science Australia may, on application by a company or unit trust, make a written decision:

    (a)    finding that a specified activity is a substantially novel application of one or more technologies; or

    (b)    refusing to make such a finding about a specified activity.

    Note:

    A refusal to make a finding is reviewable (see Part 5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 ).



    Period for which a finding is in force

    118-432(3)    
    Subject to variation or revocation, a finding under subsection (1) or paragraph (2)(a) is in force for the period specified in the finding.

    Note:

    For variation and revocation, see subsection 33(3) of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901 .



    Applications for private findings

    118-432(4)    


    An application for a finding under paragraph (2)(a) must be in the *form approved by Industry Innovation and Science Australia.

    118-432(5)    


    *Industry Innovation and Science Australia must notify the applicant in writing of any decision under subsection (2) about the application.

    118-432(6)    
    A failure to comply with subsection (5) does not affect the validity of a finding or decision.

    SECTION 118-435   Special rule relating to investment in foreign resident holding companies  

    118-435(1)    


    A company that meets the requirements of subsections 118-425(6) and (7) is treated as also meeting the requirements of subsections 118-425(2) , (3) , (4) , (4A) and (5) if:


    (a) it is a resident of:


    (i) Canada; or

    (ii) France; or

    (iii) Germany; or

    (iv) Japan; or

    (v) the United Kingdom; or

    (vi) the United States of America; or

    (vii) any other foreign country prescribed by the regulations; and


    (b) it beneficially owns all the *shares in another company or all the units in a unit trust; and


    (c) it does not carry on any *business other than to support the primary activity of the other company or unit trust; and


    (d) the other company meets the requirements of subsections 118-425(2) to (7), or the unit trust meets the requirements of subsections 118-427(3) to (8) , as the case requires.


    118-435(2)    
    However, if:


    (a) the company is so treated as meeting those requirements; and


    (b) at any time within the period of 12 months after the day on which the first *eligible venture capital investment was made in the company:


    (i) the other company ceases to be an Australian resident; or

    (ii) the unit trust ceases to carry on *business in Australia;
    as the case requires;

    then:


    (c) any eligible venture capital investments already made in the company or unit trust cease to be eligible venture capital investments; and


    (d) any further investments made in the company or unit trust are not eligible venture capital investments.


    SECTION 118-440   Meaning of permitted entity value  

    118-440(1)    


    An entity exceeds the permitted entity value immediately before a proposed investment is made in the entity if, at that time, the sum of the following exceeds the amount provided for under subsection (9):


    (a) the total value of the entity ' s assets;


    (b) the total value of the assets of any other entity *connected with the entity to the extent that they are not reflected in the value of any assets referred to in paragraph (a).

    Note:

    The time the entity makes the investment is, for a share acquired by converting a convertible note or convertible preference share or for a unit in a unit trust acquired by converting a convertible note, the time when the entity last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share: see subsections 118-425(15) and 118-427(16) .


    118-440(2)    
    The total value of the assets of an entity is the total value of its assets (both current and non-current) as shown in:


    (a) the last audited accounts prepared for the entity for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001 that relates to a period ending less than 18 months before that time; or


    (b) if there are no such audited accounts - a statement, prepared in accordance with the *accounting standards and audited by the entity ' s auditor, showing that value as at a time no longer than 12 months before that time.

    118-440(2A)    


    However, for the purposes of this section, the total value of its assets at that time is the sum of the values of those assets provided for by section 118-450 if:


    (a) there are no such audited accounts; and


    (b) the entity does not have an auditor at that time; and


    (c) the entity is not required under subsection 118-425(5) or 118-427(6) to have an auditor at that time.


    118-440(3)    


    In applying paragraphs (1)(b), (5)(b) and (7)(c), ignore the total value of the assets of an entity that is *connected with the entity first-mentioned in subsection (1) (the target entity ) either immediately before or immediately after the investment referred to in that subsection if it is so connected only because of *eligible venture capital investments made in both of those entities by the same *VCLP, *ESVCLP, *AFOF or *eligible venture capital investor.

    118-440(4)    


    In applying paragraphs (1)(b), (5)(b) and (7)(c), ignore the total value of the assets of an entity that, immediately after the investment is made, is not *connected with the target entity.

    118-440(5)    


    Despite the previous provisions of this section, the target entity exceeds the permitted entity value immediately before the time (the investment time ) when the *VCLP, *ESVCLP, *AFOF or *eligible venture capital investor made the investment in the target entity if:


    (a) the target entity was *connected with an entity (the linked entity ) in which the VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or eligible venture capital investor had made an *eligible venture capital investment at some time in the period of 12 months before the investment time; and


    (b) the sum of the total value of the assets of the target entity and of any entity *connected with the target entity (at the investment time) and the linked entity and of any entity connected with the linked entity (at the time that the entity making the investment made its investment in the linked entity) exceeds the amount provided for under subsection (9).


    118-440(6)    


    The Commissioner may determine that subsection (5) does not apply if the Commissioner is satisfied that:


    (a) the activities of the target entity are not the same as, not an integral part of and not a necessary support for the activities of the linked entity; and


    (b) the making of the investment in the target entity is not part of a *scheme to acquire interests in all or a substantial part of a group of companies that are *connected with each other.


    118-440(7)    


    Despite the previous provisions of this section, the target entity exceeds the permitted entity value immediately before the investment time if:


    (a) the target entity was *connected with an entity (also the linked entity ) in which the *VCLP, *ESVCLP, *AFOF or *eligible venture capital investor had made an *eligible venture capital investment more than 12 months before the investment time; and


    (b) the activities of the target entity are the same as, are an integral part of or are a necessary support for the activities of the linked entity; and


    (c) the sum of the total value of the assets of the target entity and of any entity *connected with the target entity (at the investment time) and the linked entity and of any entity connected with the linked entity (at the time that the entity making the investment made its investment in the linked entity) exceeds the amount provided for under subsection (9).


    118-440(8)    


    In applying paragraphs (5)(b) and (7)(c), ignore the total value of the assets of an entity that is *connected with the linked entity either immediately before or immediately after the investment in the linked entity if it is so connected only because of *eligible venture capital investments made in both of those entities by the same *VCLP, *ESVCLP , *AFOF or *eligible venture capital investor.

    118-440(9)    


    The amount in relation to a proposed investment is:


    (a) if an *ESVCLP is to make the proposed investment - $50 million; or


    (b) in any other case - $250 million.


    SECTION 118-445   Meaning of committed capital  

    118-445(1)    
    A partner ' s committed capital in a partnership is the sum of the amounts that the partner may, under the partnership agreement establishing the partnership, become obliged to contribute to the partnership.

    118-445(2)    
    It does not matter whether:


    (a) the partner contributes all of those amounts; or


    (b) any amounts contributed are subsequently returned to the partner; or


    (c) the contributions give rise to *equity interests or *debt interests in the partnership, or both.

    118-445(3)    
    A partnership ' s committed capital is the sum of the committed capital of all of the partnership ' s partners.

    SECTION 118-450   Values of assets and investments of entities without auditors  

    118-450(1)    
    If, under a provision of this Subdivision, the value of an asset or investment at a particular time is the value provided for by this section, that value is:


    (a) if paragraph (b) does not apply - its *market value at that time; or


    (b) the amount stated to be its current market value, at that time or a time in the 12 months preceding that time, in a statutory declaration by:


    (i) if the entity is a company - the directors of the company; or

    (ii) if the entity is a unit trust - the trustees of the unit trust.

    118-450(2)    
    Paragraph (1)(b) does not apply if the Commissioner reasonably believes that the amount stated in the statutory declaration to be the *market value of the asset or investment at the relevant time is inaccurate.

    SECTION 118-455   Impact Assessment of this Subdivision  

    118-455(1)    
    As soon as practicable after 24 months after the Treasury Laws Amendment (Tax Integrity and Other Measures) Act 2018 receives the Royal Assent, the Minister must cause an impact assessment of the operation of this Subdivision and other related tax concessions to be conducted.

    118-455(2)    
    The impact assessment must:

    (a)    examine the operation of the tax concession regime for:


    (i) investments made through a *VCLP, *ESVCLP or *AFOF; and

    (ii) investments made directly by foreign residents registered under Part 3 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 ; and

    (b)    

    be conducted by the Department and Industry Innovation and Science Australia; and

    (c)    make provision for public consultation.


    118-455(3)    


    For the purposes of conducting the impact assessment, the reference to Industry Innovation and Science Australia in item 6 of the table in subsection 355-65(4) of Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 is taken to include the Secretary of the Department.

    118-455(4)    
    The Minister must cause a written report about the impact assessment to be prepared.

    118-455(5)    
    The Minister must cause a copy of the report to be tabled in each House of the Parliament within 15 sitting days of that House after the day on which the report is given to the Minister.

    Subdivision 118-G - Venture capital: investment by superannuation funds for foreign residents  

    SECTION 118-500   What this Subdivision is about  


    A foreign resident tax exempt pension fund that invests in venture capital equity in an Australian company or fixed trust (a resident investment vehicle) can disregard a capital gain or capital loss it makes from a CGT event that happens to that equity if:

  • (a) the entity is registered under the Pooled Development Funds Act 1992 ; and
  • (b) the entity owned the equity for at least 12 months.
  • SECTION 118-505   Exemption for certain foreign venture capital  

    118-505(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss is disregarded if it is made from a *CGT event happening in relation to a *CGT asset that is *venture capital equity where the asset:


    (a) was *acquired by a *venture capital entity; and


    (b) at the time of the CGT event:


    (i) was owned by that entity; and

    (ii) had been owned by that entity for at least 12 months.

    118-505(2)    
    The *venture capital entity must be registered under Part 7A of the Pooled Development Funds Act 1992 at the time of the *CGT event.


    SECTION 118-510   Meaning of resident investment vehicle  

    118-510(1)    
    A resident investment vehicle is a company that is an Australian resident, or a trust that is a *resident trust for CGT purposes, if:


    (a) the sum of:


    (i) the total value of the assets of the company or trust, and

    (ii) the total value of the assets of any company or trust *connected with the first company or trust; and

    (iii) the amount of the investment proposed to be made in venture capital equity in the company or trust by the relevant *venture capital entity;
    is not more than $50,000,000 just before the time (the acquisition time ) when the relevant venture capital entity acquires venture capital equity in the company or trust; and


    (b) the primary activity of the company or trust is not, at any time, property development or land ownership.

    118-510(2)    
    However, a trust is not a resident investment vehicle unless entities have *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the trust.

    118-510(3)    
    The total value of the assets of a company or trust is the total value of its assets (both current and non-current) as shown in:


    (a) the last audited accounts prepared for the company or trust for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001 that relates to a period ending less than 18 months before the acquisition time; or


    (b) if there are no such audited accounts - a statement audited by the company's or trust's auditor showing that value as at a time no longer than 12 months before the acquisition time.


    SECTION 118-515   Meaning of venture capital entity  

    118-515(1)    
    An entity (except a partner in a partnership) is a venture capital entity if:


    (a) it is a foreign resident; and


    (b) it is a *superannuation fund for foreign residents; and


    (c) it is not a *prescribed dual resident; and


    (d) it is a resident of:


    (i) Canada; or

    (ii) France; or

    (iii) Germany; or

    (iv) Japan; or

    (v) the United Kingdom; or

    (vi) the United States of America; or

    (vii) some other foreign country prescribed by the regulations; and


    (e) its income is exempt, or effectively exempt, from taxation in its country of residence.


    118-515(2)    
    A partner in a partnership is a venture capital entity if:


    (a) all of the partners in it are entities that are *venture capital entities under subsection (1); or


    (b) the partnership is a *limited partnership and:


    (i) all of the partners in it (except its general partner or managing partner) are venture capital entities under subsection (1); and

    (ii) its general partner or managing partner has interests in less than 10% of the total value of the assets of the partnership.

    SECTION 118-520   Meaning of superannuation fund for foreign residents  

    118-520(1)    
    A fund is a superannuation fund for foreign residents at a time if:


    (a) at that time, it is:


    (i) an indefinitely continuing fund; and

    (ii) a provident, benefit, superannuation or retirement fund; and


    (b) it was established in a foreign country; and


    (c) it was established, and is maintained at that time, only to provide benefits for individuals who are not Australian residents; and


    (d) at that time, its central management and control is carried on outside Australia by entities none of whom is an Australian resident.


    118-520(2)    
    However, a fund is not a superannuation fund for foreign residents if:


    (a) an amount paid to the fund or set aside for the fund has been or can be deducted under this Act; or


    (b) a * tax offset has been allowed or is allowable for such an amount.


    SECTION 118-525   Meaning of venture capital equity  

    118-525(1)    
    A *CGT asset is venture capital equity for a *venture capital entity if it is a *share in a company or an interest in a trust where:


    (a) the company or trust is a *resident investment vehicle; and


    (b) the share or interest was issued or allotted to the entity by the company or trust; and


    (c) the entity was at risk in owning the share or interest in that it had no *arrangement (either before or after the share or interest was issued or allotted) as to:


    (i) the maintenance of the value of the share or interest; or

    (ii) any earnings or other return that might be made from owning it; or

    (iii) protection from commercial loss because of owning it.
    Example:

    A company borrows money to purchase some shares. The terms of the loan include a term that, if the value of the shares falls below the amount of the loan, the company can repay the loan by transferring the shares to the lender.

    The company ' s ownership of the shares is not at risk, because there is no possibility that it can lose money under the transaction.


    118-525(2)    
    However, *shares or interests in the *resident investment vehicle issued or allotted to a *venture capital entity are not venture capital equity for the entity if:


    (a) one or more of these events happens:


    (i) a share or interest in the resident investment vehicle that was *acquired by some other entity before that issue or allotment is cancelled or redeemed; or

    (ii) there is a return of some of the capital of the resident investment vehicle that was acquired before that issue or allotment; or

    (iii) value is shifted out of a share or interest in that vehicle that was acquired before that issue or allotment; and


    (b) it is reasonable to conclude that the happening of the event referred to in paragraph (a) is connected to that issue or allotment, or to some *arrangement between the entities concerned.

    Example:

    The capital of an Australian company is 100,000 shares, with a market value of $1 per share. The shares have full voting and dividend rights.

    The Australian company issues another 100,000 shares to a foreign company. The new shares are issued at one cent each, but have very limited voting and dividend rights.

    The Australian company then changes the rights attaching to its shares so that the new shares have full voting and dividend rights, and the original shares have none.

    Value has been shifted out of the original shares, effectively converting " old equity " to " new equity " .


    118-525(3)    
    In deciding whether it is reasonable to reach the conclusion referred to in paragraph (2)(b), these matters are relevant:


    (a) whether the amount of the decrease in the *net value of the *resident investment vehicle because of the happening of the event referred to in paragraph (2)(a) is the same as, or is calculated by reference to, the value of the issue or allotment of *shares or interests to the *venture capital entity; and


    (b) the time lapse between the happening of that event and that issue or allotment.


    Subdivision 118-H - Demutualisation of Tower Corporation  

    SECTION 118-550   Demutualisation of Tower Corporation  

    118-550(1)    
    This section applies if, just before the mutual entity known in New Zealand as Tower Corporation ceased to be a mutual entity, you had membership rights in that entity.

    Note:

    Tower Corporation demutualised on 1 October 1999.



    No capital gain or capital loss from end of membership rights

    118-550(2)    
    Disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss that resulted from any of your membership rights in Tower Corporation ceasing to exist when that entity ceased to be a mutual entity.

    Note:

    Subsection (2) applies to you even if, because you could not be located at the time of demutualisation, you were not immediately issued with shares in the demutualised entity in substitution for your old membership rights, and rights to shares were instead put aside in a trust.



    Cost base of replacement assets

    118-550(3)    
    The *cost base and the *reduced cost base of any *shares or other *CGT assets that you *acquire in substitution for the membership rights that have ceased to exist do not include any amounts that you paid in acquiring or maintaining those old rights.


    Subdivision 118-I - Look-through earnout rights  

    SECTION 118-560   Object  

    118-560(1)    
    This Subdivision and its related provisions set out special rules for *look-through earnout rights. The object of these rules is to avoid unnecessary compliance costs and disadvantageous tax outcomes when entities involved in the sale of a business:


    (a) cannot agree on the current value of some or all of the business ' assets due to uncertainty about the future economic performance of the business; and


    (b) resolve this uncertainty by agreeing to potentially provide future additional consideration linked to this performance.

    118-560(2)    
    These rules achieve this object by:


    (a) disregarding any *capital gain or *capital loss relating to the creation of a *look-through earnout right; and


    (b) for the acquirer of the business - treating any *financial benefits provided (or received) under the right as forming part of (or reducing) the cost base or reduced cost base of the business assets; and


    (c) for the seller of the business - treating any financial benefits received (or provided) under the right as increasing (or reducing) the capital proceeds for the business assets.

    Note:

    Sections 112-36 and 116-120 are 2 of the more important related provisions that set out these rules.


    SECTION 118-565   Look-through earnout rights  


    Look-through earnout rights - main case

    118-565(1)    
    A look-through earnout right is a right for which the following conditions are met:


    (a) the right is a right to future *financial benefits that are not reasonably ascertainable at the time the right is created;


    (b) the right is created under an *arrangement that involves the *disposal of a *CGT asset;


    (c) the disposal causes *CGT event A1 to happen;


    (d) just before the CGT event, the CGT asset was an *active asset of the entity who disposed of the asset;

    Note:

    For extra ways to be an active asset, see section 118-570 .


    (e) all of the financial benefits that can be provided under the right are to be provided over a period ending no later than 5 years after the end of the income year in which the CGT event happens;


    (f) those financial benefits are contingent on the economic performance of:


    (i) the CGT asset; or

    (ii) a business for which it is reasonably expected that the CGT asset will be an active asset for the period to which those financial benefits relate;


    (g) the value of those financial benefits reasonably relates to that economic performance;


    (h) the parties to the arrangement deal with each other at *arm ' s length in making the arrangement.

    Matters affecting the 5-year maximum period

    118-565(2)    
    The condition in paragraph (1)(e) is not met, and is treated as never having been met, for the right if:


    (a) the *arrangement includes an option to extend or renew the arrangement; or


    (b) the parties to the arrangement vary the arrangement; or


    (c) those parties enter into another arrangement over the *CGT asset or a business for which it is reasonably expected that the CGT asset will be an *active asset;

    so that a party could, or does, provide *financial benefits under the right (or one or more equivalent rights) over a total period ending later than 5 years after the end of the income year in which the *CGT event happens.


    118-565(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(e) or subsection (2), in working out the period over which *financial benefits under a right can be provided, disregard any part of an *arrangement that allows for an entity to defer providing such a financial benefit if:


    (a) the deferral is contingent on an event happening that is beyond the control of the parties to the arrangement; and


    (b) the deferral cannot change the amount of any financial benefit provided, or to be provided, under the right; and


    (c) when the arrangement is entered into, the contingent event is not reasonably expected to happen.

    Look-through earnout rights - rights for ending other rights

    118-565(4)    
    A look-through earnout right is a right to receive one or more future *financial benefits that:


    (a) are for ending a right to which subsection (1) applies; and


    (b) are certain.

    Note:

    This subsection will not apply if the old right ends as described in subsection (2), as subsection (2) causes the old right to be treated as if it had never been a right to which subsection (1) applies.


    SECTION 118-570   Extra ways a CGT asset can be an active asset  

    118-570(1)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, treat a *CGT asset as if it were an active asset of an entity at a particular time, if:


    (a) the entity owns it at that time; and


    (b) it is either a *share in a company, or an interest in a trust; and


    (c) at that time, the entity:


    (i) is a *CGT concession stakeholder of the company or trust; or

    (ii) if the entity is not an individual - has a *small business participation percentage in the company or trust of at least 20%; and


    (d) at that time, the company or trust:


    (i) is carrying on a *business, and has been carrying on a business since the start of the most recent income year ending before that time; and

    (ii) is not a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group; and


    (e) the assessable income of the company or trust for that most recent income year was greater than nil, and at least 80% of that assessable income was:


    (i) from the carrying on of one or more businesses; but

    (ii) not *derived (directly or indirectly) from an asset of a kind to which paragraph 152-40(4)(d) or (e) applies.
    Note:

    Paragraphs 152-40(4)(d) and (e) refer to financial instruments and assets used to derive interest, annuities, rent, royalties or foreign exchange gains.


    118-570(2)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, treat a *CGT asset as if it were an active asset of an entity at a particular time, if subsection 152-40(3) would have been satisfied for the asset at that time had paragraph 152-40(3)(a) only required the asset to be:


    (a) a *share in a company; or


    (b) an interest in a trust.

    Note:

    This enables shares and interests in foreign entities to be active assets for the purposes of this Subdivision.


    118-570(3)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) do not limit section 152-40 (about active assets).

    SECTION 118-575  

    118-575   Creating and ending look-through earnout rights  


    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss you make because:


    (a) *CGT event C2 happens in relation to a *look-through earnout right you receive; or


    (b) CGT event D1 happens when you create a look-through earnout right in another entity.

    SECTION 118-580   Temporarily disregard capital losses affected by look-through earnout rights  

    118-580(1)    
    Temporarily disregard a portion of a *capital loss you make from *disposing of a *CGT asset if the capital loss could be reduced by you receiving one or more *financial benefits under a *look-through earnout right relating to the CGT asset and the disposal.

    118-580(2)    
    The portion of the *capital loss that is temporarily disregarded is:


    (a) if those *financial benefits can never exceed a maximum amount that is certain - so much of the capital loss as is equal to that maximum amount; or


    (b) otherwise - all of the capital loss.

    Note:

    When you receive a financial benefit under the look-through earnout right:

  • (a) you cease to disregard under this section a portion of your loss related to the amount of that financial benefit; and
  • (b) your capital proceeds for the disposal increase (see paragraph 116-120(1)(b) ), causing a reduction in the amount of your loss.

  • Division 121 - Record keeping  

    SECTION 121-10   What this Division is about  

    You must keep records of matters that affect the capital gains and losses you make. You must retain them for 5 years after the last relevant CGT event.

    Operative provisions  

    SECTION 121-20   What records you must keep  

    121-20(1)    


    You must keep records of every act, transaction, event or circumstance that can reasonably be expected to be relevant to working out whether you have made a *capital gain or *capital loss from a *CGT event. (It does not matter whether the CGT event has already happened or may happen in the future.)
    Note 1:

    There are exceptions: see section 121-30 .

    EXAMPLES
    Example 1:

    You dispose of a CGT asset. The records that are relevant to working out your capital gain or loss are records of:

  • • the date you acquired the asset;
  • • the date you disposed of it;
  • • each element of its cost base and reduced cost base and the effect of indexation on those elements;
  • • what you sold it for (the capital proceeds).
  • Example 2:

    Company A disposes of a CGT asset it acquired from company B (a member of the same wholly-owned group and a foreign resident) where company B obtained a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B . In addition to the records mentioned in example 1, company A needs records showing:

  • • the status of the 2 companies as members of the group;
  • • which company is the ultimate holding company in the group;
  • • the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of company B just before the roll-over (because these become company A ' s cost base and reduced cost base).
  • Example 3:

    CGT event G2 (about shifts in share values) happens involving company X and Greg (a controller (for CGT purposes) of company X). Z Nominees Pty Ltd (an associate of Greg ' s) suffers a material decrease in the value of its shares in company X as a result of the shift. Z Nominees needs records showing:

  • • the essential elements of the relevant scheme;
  • • the date when the share value shift occurred;
  • • the amounts of the decreases and increases in the market values of all shares involved in the scheme;
  • • if shares are issued at a discount under the scheme, the amount of the discount;
  • • the cost bases and market values of the shares that decreased in value.
  • Note 2:

    There is an administrative penalty if you do not keep records as required by this Division: see section 288-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    121-20(2)    
    The records must be in English, or be readily accessible and convertible into English. They must show what is described in this section. (They show something if they include whatever material is necessary for that thing to be easily identified or worked out.)

    121-20(3)    
    They must show the nature of the act, transaction, event or circumstance, the day when it happened or arose and:


    (a) in the case of an act - who did it; and


    (b) in the case of a transaction - who were the parties to it.

    121-20(4)    
    They must show details (including relevant amounts) of how the act, transaction, event or circumstance is relevant (or can reasonably be expected to be relevant) to working out whether you have made a *capital gain or *capital loss from a *CGT event.

    121-20(5)    


    If the necessary records of an act, transaction, event or circumstance do not already exist, you must reconstruct them or have someone else reconstruct them.
    Example:

    Your capital gain or capital loss from a CGT event may depend on the market value of property at a particular time. To record that market value properly, you may need to get a valuation done.

    Penalty: 30 penalty units.

    Note:

    See section 4AA of the Crimes Act 1914 for the current value of a penalty unit.


    121-20(6)    


    An offence under this section is an offence of strict liability.
    Note:

    For strict liability , see section 6.1 of the Criminal Code .


    SECTION 121-25   How long you must retain the records  

    121-25(1)    
    You must retain records that section 121-20 requires you to keep.

    121-25(2)    
    You must retain them until the end of 5 years after it becomes certain that no *CGT event (or no further *CGT event) can happen such that the records could reasonably be expected to be relevant to working out whether you have made a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event.

    121-25(2A)    


    An offence under this section is an offence of strict liability.
    Note:

    For strict liability , see section 6.1 of the Criminal Code .


    121-25(3)    
    This section has effect despite subsection 262A(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which requires records to be retained for a different period).

    121-25(4)    
    However, it is not necessary to retain records:


    (a) if the Commissioner notifies you that you do not need to retain them; or


    (b) for a company that has finally ceased to exist.

    Note 1:

    There are special record keeping rules where there has been a roll-over fora merger between superannuation funds under former section 160ZZPI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 : see section 121-25 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Penalty: 30 penalty units.

    Note 2:

    See section 4AA of the Crimes Act 1914 for the current value of a penalty unit.


    SECTION 121-30   Exceptions  

    121-30(1)    
    You do not need to keep records under section 121-20 if:


    (a) for each *CGT event (if any) that has happened such that the records are relevant (or could reasonably be expected to be relevant) to working out whether you have made a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event; and


    (b) for each *CGT event that may happen in the future such that the records could reasonably be expected to be relevant to working out whether you might make a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event;

    any capital gain or capital loss you made (or might make) from it is to be (or would be) disregarded, except because of a roll-over.


    121-30(2)    


    However, the exceptions in this section do not apply to a *CGT event as a result of which a *capital gain or *capital loss is disregarded under section 855-40 (about capital gains and losses of foreign residents through *fixed trusts).

    SECTION 121-35   Asset register entries  

    121-35(1)    
    You satisfy a requirement under this Division to retain records for a period if you:


    (a) retain for that period an entry in a register for the records that satisfies the requirements in subsection (2), or a combination of the records and such an entry for them, containing all the information required to be contained in the records; and


    (b) retain those of the records that contain the information entered in the register for at least 5 years after the requirement in paragraph (2)(b) is satisfied.

    121-35(2)    
    The requirements are:


    (a) you must make an entry in a register, in English, setting out some or all of the information contained in the records; and


    (b) another entity who is a *registered tax agent or some other person approved by the Commissioner must certify in the register that the information entered is information from those records.


    PART 3-3 - CAPITAL GAINS AND LOSSES: SPECIAL TOPICS  

    Division 122 - Roll-over for the disposal of assets to, or the creation of assets in, a wholly-owned company  

    Guide to Division 122  

    SECTION 122-1   What this Division is about  

    A roll-over can delay the making of a capital gain or loss if:

  • • you dispose of a CGT asset, or all the assets of a business, to a company in which you own all the shares; or
  • • you create a CGT asset in such a company; or
  • • all the partners in a partnership dispose of partnership property to a company in which they own all the shares; or
  • • the partners create a CGT asset in such a company.
  • Subdivision 122-A - Disposal or creation of assets by an individual or trustee to a wholly-owned company  

    SECTION 122-5   What this Subdivision is about  

    This Subdivision sets out when you can obtain a roll-over if you transfer a CGT asset, or all the assets of a business, to a company. It also deals with the creation of a CGT asset in a company. There are consequences for the company also.

    When is a roll-over available

    SECTION 122-15  

    122-15   Disposal or creation of assets - wholly-owned company  
    If you are an individual or a trustee, you can choose to obtain a roll-over if one of the *CGT events (the trigger event ) specified in this table happens involving you and a company in the circumstances set out in sections 122-20 to 122-35 .


    Relevant *CGT events
    Event No. What you do
    A1 *Dispose of a CGT asset, or all the assets of a business, to the company
    .
    D1 Create contractual or other rights in the company
    .
    D2 Grant an option to the company
    .
    D3 Grant the company a right to income from mining
    .
    F1 Grant a lease to the company, or renew or extend a lease

    Note 1:

    The roll-over starts at section 122-40 .

    Note 2:

    Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

    Note 3:

    A roll-over may also be available under Subdivision 328-G (Restructures of small businesses).

    Example:

    Gavin runs a plumbing business. He wants to incorporate it so he disposes of all its assets to a company. He becomes the sole shareholder of the company.

    SECTION 122-20   What you receive for the trigger event  

    122-20(1)    
    The consideration you receive for the trigger event happening must be only:


    (a) *shares in the company; or


    (b) for a *disposal of a *CGT asset, or all the assets of a business, to the company (a disposal case ) - shares in the company and the company undertaking to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of the asset or assets of the *business (as appropriate).

    Note:

    There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset: see section 122-37 .


    122-20(2)    
    The *shares cannot be *redeemable shares.

    122-20(3)    


    The *market value of the *shares you receive for the trigger event happening must be substantially the same as:


    (a) for a disposal case - the market value of the asset or assets you disposed of, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of the asset or assets (as appropriate); or


    (b) for another trigger event (a creation case ) - the market value of the CGT asset created in the company (the created asset ).

    122-20(4)    


    In working out if the requirement in paragraph (3)(a) is satisfied, if the *market value of the *shares is different to what it would otherwise be only because of the possibility of liabilities attaching to the asset or assets, disregard the difference.
    Note:

    The company may have to pay income tax if an amount is included in its assessable income because of a CGT event happening to an asset you disposed of, or it may have a liability because of accrued leave entitlements of employees. The market value of the shares will reflect these contingent liabilities.


    SECTION 122-25   Other requirements to be satisfied  

    122-25(1)    
    You must own all the *shares in the company just after the time of the trigger event.

    Note:

    You must own the shares in the same capacity as you owned or created the assets that the company now owns.


    122-25(2)    


    This Subdivision does not apply to the *disposal or creation of any of the assets specified in this table:


    Assets to which Subdivision does not apply
    Item In this situation: This Subdivision does not apply to:
    1 You *dispose of a *CGT asset to the company or create a CGT asset in the company (a) a *collectable or a *personal use asset; or
        (b) a decoration awarded for valour or brave conduct (except if you paid money or gave any other property for it); or
        (c) a *precluded asset; or
        (d) an asset that becomes *trading stock of the company just after the *disposal or creation; or
        (e) an asset that becomes a *registered emissions unit *held by the company just after the *disposal or creation
    .
    2 You *dispose of all the assets of a *business to the company (a) a *collectable or a *personal use asset; or
        (b) a decoration awarded for valour or brave conduct (except if you paid money or gave any other property for it); or
        (c) an asset that becomes *trading stock of the company just after the disposal or creation (unless it was your trading stock when you disposed of it); or
        (d) an asset that becomes a *registered emissions unit *held by the company just after the *disposal or creation (unless it was a registered emissions unit held by you when you disposed of it)


    122-25(3)    


    A precluded asset is:


    (a) a *depreciating asset; or


    (b) *trading stock; or


    (c) an interest in the copyright in a *film referred to in section 118-30 ; or


    (d) a *registered emissions unit.


    122-25(4)    
    If:


    (a) the *CGT asset or any of the assets of the *business is a right, option, *convertible interest or *exchangeable interest; and


    (b) the company *acquires another CGT asset by exercising the right or option or by converting the convertible interest or in exchange for the disposal or redemption of the exchangeable interest;

    the other asset cannot become *trading stock of the company just after the company acquired it.


    122-25(5)    
    The *ordinary income and *statutory income of the company must not be exempt from income tax because it is an *exempt entity for the income year of the trigger event.


    122-25(6)    


    If you are an individual at the time of the trigger event, either:


    (a) you and the company must both be Australian residents at that time; or


    (b) both of the following requirements must be satisfied:


    (i) each asset must be *taxable Australian property at that time;

    (ii) the shares in the company mentioned in subsection 122-20(1) must be taxable Australian property just after that time.

    122-25(7)    


    If you are a trustee of a trust at the time of the trigger event, either:


    (a) at that time, the trust must be a *resident trust for CGT purposes and the company must be an Australian resident; or


    (b) both of the following requirements must be satisfied:


    (i) each *CGT asset must be a CGT asset of the trust that is *taxable Australian property at that time; and

    (ii) the shares in the company mentioned in subsection 122-20(1) must be taxable Australian property just after that time.

    SECTION 122-35   What if the company undertakes to discharge a liability (disposal case)  
    Disposal of a CGT asset

    122-35(1)    


    One of the requirements in this table must be satisfied if:


    (a) you *dispose of a *CGT asset; and


    (b) the company undertakes to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of it.

    (The *market value, or the *cost base, of an asset is worked out when you disposed of it.)


    What amount the liabilities cannot exceed
    Item In this situation: The liabilities cannot exceed:
    1 You *acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985 The *cost base of the asset
    .
    2 You *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985 The *market value of the asset

    Note:

    There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset: see section 122-37 .



    Disposal of all the assets of a business

    122-35(2)    


    One of the requirements in this table must be satisfied if:


    (a) you *dispose of all the assets of a *business; and


    (b) the company undertakes to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of the assets of the business.

    (The *market value, or the *cost base, of an asset is worked out when you disposed of it.)


    What amount the liabilities cannot exceed
    Item In this situation: The liabilities cannot exceed:
    1 You *acquired all the assets on or after 20 September 1985 The sum of the *market values of the *precluded assets and the *cost bases of the other assets
    .
    2 You *acquired all the assets before 20 September 1985 The sum of the *market values of the assets
    .
    3 You *acquired at least one asset on or after 20 September 1985 and at least one before that day For liabilities in respect of assets you *acquired on or after that day - the sum of the *market values of the *precluded assets and the *cost bases of the other assets;
        For liabilities in respect of assets you *acquired before that day - the sum of the market values of those assets


    SECTION 122-37   Rules for working out what a liability in respect of an asset is  

    122-37(1)    
    These rules are relevant to working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset.

    122-37(2)    
    A liability incurred for the purposes of a *business that is not a liability in respect of a specific asset or assets of the business is taken to be a liability in respect of all the assets of the business.

    Note:

    An example is a bank overdraft.


    122-37(3)    


    If a liability is in respect of 2 or more assets, the proportion of the liability that is in respect of any one of those assets is equal to:


                      The *market value of the asset                  
    The total of the market values of all the
    assets that the liability is in respect of


    Replacement-asset roll-over if you dispose of a CGT asset

    SECTION 122-40   Disposal of a CGT asset  

    122-40(1)    
    If you choose a roll-over, a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the trigger event is disregarded.

    122-40(2)    
    If you *acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of each *share's *cost base is the asset's cost base when you *disposed of it (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of it) divided by the number of shares; and


    (b) the first element of each share's *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Note 1:

    There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset: see section 122-37 .

    Note 2:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .


    122-40(3)    
    If you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the *shares before that day.


    Replacement-asset roll-over if you dispose of all the assets of a business

    SECTION 122-45   Disposal of all the assets of a business  

    122-45(1)    
    If you choose a roll-over for *disposing of all the assets of a *business to the company, a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from each of the assets of the business is disregarded.

    122-45(2)    
    The other consequences relate to the *shares you receive and depend on when you *acquired the assets of the *business.

    Note 1:

    There are 3 possible cases:

  • • you acquired all the assets on or after 20 September 1985: see section 122-50 ;
  • • you acquired all the assets before that day: see section 122-55 ;
  • • you acquired some of the assets on or after that day: see section 122-60 .
  • Note 2:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .

    Note 3:

    There are other consequences for you and the company if you dispose of trading stock: see Division 70 .


    SECTION 122-50   All assets acquired on or after 20 September 1985  

    122-50(1)    
    If you *acquired all of the assets of the *business on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of each *share ' s *cost base is the sum of the *market values of the *precluded assets and the cost bases of the other assets (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of all of those assets) divided by the number of shares; and


    (b) the first element of each share ' s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Note 1:

    There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset: see section 122-37 .

    Note 2:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .

    Example:

    Nick is a small trader. He wants to incorporate his business. He disposes of all its assets to a company and receives 10 shares in return.

    Nick acquired all the assets of the business after 20 September 1985.

    Trading stock, plant and equipment and office furniture are precluded assets.

    The market value of Nick ' s trading stock when he disposed of it is $20,000. The market value of his plant and equipment at that time is $50,000 and the market value of his office furniture at that time is $10,000.

    The cost bases of Nick ' s land and buildings at that time total $120,000.

    Nick has a business overdraft of $15,000. It is taken to be a liability in respect of all the assets of his business.

    The first element of the cost base of the 10 shares is:


    ($20,000   +   $50,000   +   $10,000   +   $120,000)   −   $15,000   =   $185,000

    The first element of the reduced cost base of the 10 shares is worked out similarly.


    122-50(2)    


    The *market value of an asset is worked out when you *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an asset is worked out at the same time.

    SECTION 122-55   All assets acquired before 20 September 1985  

    122-55(1)    
    You are taken to have *acquired all of the *shares before 20 September 1985 if you acquired all the assets of the *business before that day and none of the assets is a *precluded asset.

    122-55(2)    


    However, if at least one of the assets is a *precluded asset, you are taken to have *acquired a whole number of the *shares (but not all of them) before that day. The number is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the shares) does not exceed:
  • • the total of the *market values of the assets that are not *precluded assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those assets;
  • expressed as a percentage of:

  • • the total of the market values of all the assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those assets.
  • Note:

    There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset: see section 122-37 .


    122-55(3)    


    The first element of each other *share's *cost base and *reduced cost base is the total of the *market values of the *precluded assets (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those assets) divided by the number of those other shares.

    122-55(4)    


    The *market value of an asset is worked out when you *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an asset is worked out at the same time.

    SECTION 122-60   Assets acquired before and after 20 September 1985  

    122-60(1)    


    If you *acquired some of the assets on or after 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired a whole number of the *shares (but not all of them) before that day. The number is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the shares) does not exceed:
  • • the total of the *market values of the assets (except any *precluded assets) that you acquired before that day, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those assets;
  • expressed as a percentage of:

  • • the total of the market values of all the assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those assets.

  • 122-60(2)    


    The first element of each other *share's *cost base is the sum of the *market values of the *precluded assets and the cost bases of the other assets that you *acquired on or after that day (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of all of those assets) divided by the number of those other shares.
    Note:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .


    122-60(3)    
    The first element of each other *share's *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    122-60(4)    


    The *market value of an asset is worked out when you *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an asset is worked out at the same time.

    Replacement-asset roll-over for a creation case

    SECTION 122-65   Creation of asset  

    122-65(1)    
    If you choose a roll-over, a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the trigger event is disregarded.

    122-65(2)    
    The first element of each *share's *cost base is the amount applicable under this table divided by the number of shares. The first element of each share's *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.


    Creation case
    Event No. Applicable amount
    D1 the *incidental costs you incurred that relate to the trigger event
    .
    D2 the expenditure you incurred to grant the option
    .
    D3 the expenditure you incurred to grant the right
    .
    F1 the expenditure you incurred on the grant, renewal or extension of the lease

    The expenditure can include a transfer of property: see section 103-5 .

    Example:

    Bill grants a licence (CGT event D1) to Tiffin Pty Ltd (a company he owns). The company issues him with 2 additional shares. He incurs legal expenses of $1,000 to grant the licence.

    Bill's cost base for each of the shares is $500.


    Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (disposal case)

    SECTION 122-70   Consequences for the company (disposal case)  

    122-70(1)    
    There are these consequences for the company in a disposal case if you choose to obtain a roll-over. They are relevant for each *CGT asset (except a *precluded asset) that you *disposed of to the company.

    Note:

    A capital gain or loss from a precluded asset can be disregarded: see Subdivision 118-A .



    Asset acquired on or after 20 September 1985

    122-70(2)    
    If you *acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of the asset ' s *cost base (in the hands of the company) is the asset ' s cost base when you disposed of it; and


    (b) the first element of the asset ' s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the company) is the asset ' s reduced cost base when you disposed of it.

    Note 1:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .

    Note 2:

    The reduced cost base may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-170 .



    Asset acquired before 20 September 1985

    122-70(3)    
    If you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985, the company is taken to have acquired it before that day.

    Note:

    A capital gain or loss from a CGT asset acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104 . This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149 .


    Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (creation case)

    SECTION 122-75   Consequences for the company (creation case)  

    122-75(1)    
    There are these consequences for the company in a creation case if you choose to obtain a roll-over.

    122-75(2)    
    The first element of the created asset's *cost base (in the hands of the company) is the applicable amount from the table in subsection 122-65(2) .

    Example:

    To continue the example in section 122-65 , the cost base of the licence in Tiffin Pty Ltd's hands is $1,000.


    122-75(3)    
    The first element of the created asset's *reduced cost base (in the hands of the company) is worked out similarly.


    Subdivision 122-B - Disposal or creation of assets by partners to a wholly-owned company  

    SECTION 122-120   What this Subdivision is about  

    This Subdivision sets out when the partners in a partnership can obtain a roll-over on transferring a CGT asset, or all the assets of a business, to a company. It also deals with the creation of a CGT asset in a company. There are consequences for the company also.

    When is a roll-over available

    SECTION 122-125  

    122-125   Disposal or creation of assets - wholly-owned company  
    All of the partners in a partnership can choose to obtain a roll-over if one of the *CGT events (the trigger event ) specified in this table happens involving the partners and a company in the circumstances set out in sections 122-130 to 122-140 .


    Relevant *CGT events
    Event No. What the partners do
    A1 *Dispose of their interests in a *CGT asset of the partnership, or all the assets of a business carried on by the partnership, to the company
    .
    D1 Create contractual or other rights in the company
    .
    D2 Grant an option to the company
    .
    D3 Grant the company a right to income from mining
    .
    F1 Grant a lease to the company, or renew or extend a lease

    Note 1:

    The roll-over starts at section 122-150 .

    Note 2:

    Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

    Example:

    Michael and Sandra operate a fish shop in partnership. They agree to incorporate the business so they dispose of their interests in all its assets to a company. They are the only shareholders of the company.

    SECTION 122-130   What the partners receive for the trigger event  

    122-130(1)    
    The consideration the partners receive must be only:


    (a) *shares in the company; or


    (b) for a *disposal of their interests in a *CGT asset, or in all the assets of a business, to the company (a disposal case ) - shares in the company and the company undertaking to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of their interests.

    Note:

    There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an interest in an asset: see section 122-145 .


    122-130(2)    
    The *shares cannot be *redeemable shares.

    122-130(3)    


    The *market value of the *shares each partner receives for the trigger event happening must be substantially the same as:


    (a) for a disposal case - the market value of the interests in the asset or assets the partner disposed of, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of the interests in the asset or assets (as appropriate); or


    (b) for another trigger event (a creation case ) - the market value of what would have been the partner's interest in the *CGT asset created in the company (the created asset ) if it were an asset of the partnership.

    122-130(4)    


    In working out if the requirement in paragraph (3)(a) is satisfied, if the *market value of the *shares is different to what it would otherwise be only because of the possibility of liabilities attaching to the asset or assets, disregard the difference.
    Note:

    The company may have to pay income tax if an amount is included in its assessable income because of a CGT event happening to an asset a partner disposed of, or it may have a liability because of accrued leave entitlements of employees. The market value of the shares will reflect these contingent liabilities.


    SECTION 122-135   Other requirements to be satisfied  

    122-135(1)    
    The partners must own all the *shares in the company just after the time of the trigger event.

    122-135(2)    
    Each partner must own the *shares the partner received for the trigger event happening in the same capacity that the partner:


    (a) owned the partner ' s interests in the assets that the company now owns; or


    (b) participated in the creation of the asset in the company.

    Note:

    If a partner ' s interests were owned as trustee, the partner must receive shares as trustee.


    122-135(3)    
    This Subdivision does not apply to the *disposal or creation of any of the assets specified in this table:


    Assets to which Subdivision does not apply
    Item In this situation: This Subdivision does not apply to:
    1 The partners *dispose of their interests in a *CGT asset to, or create a CGT asset in, the company (a) a *collectable or a *personal use asset; or
        (b) a decoration awarded for valour or brave conduct (except if a partner paid money or gave any other property for it); or
        (c) a *precluded asset; or
        (d) an asset that becomes *trading stock of the company just after the *disposal or creation
    .
    2 The partners *dispose of their interests in all the assets of a business (a) a *collectable or a *personal use asset; or
        (b) a decoration awarded for valour or brave conduct (except if a partner paid money or gave any other property for it); or
        (c) an asset that becomes *trading stock of the company just after the disposal or creation (unless it was trading stock of the partnership when it was disposed of)


    122-135(4)    
    If:


    (a) the *CGT asset or any of the assets of the *business is a right, option, *convertible interest or *exchangeable interest; and


    (b) the company *acquires another CGT asset by exercising the right or option or by converting the convertible interest or in exchange for the disposal or redemption of the exchangeable interest;

    the other asset cannot become *trading stock of the company just after the company acquired it.


    122-135(5)    


    The *ordinary income and *statutory income of the company must not be exempt from income tax because it is an *exempt entity for the income year of the trigger event.

    122-135(6)    


    For a partner who is not a trustee of a trust at the time of the trigger event, either:


    (a) the partner and the company must both be Australian residents at that time; or


    (b) both of the following requirements must be satisfied:


    (i) each asset must be *taxable Australian property at that time; and

    (ii) the shares in the company mentioned in subsection 122-130(1) must be taxable Australian property just after that time.

    122-135(7)    


    For a partner who is a trustee of a trust at the time of the trigger event, either:


    (a) at that time, the trust must be a *resident trust for CGT purposes and the company must be an Australian resident; or


    (b) both of the following requirements must be satisfied:


    (i) each *CGT asset must be a CGT asset of the trust that is *taxable Australian property at that time; and

    (ii) the shares in the company mentioned in subsection 122-130(1) must be taxable Australian property just after that time.

    SECTION 122-140   What if the company undertakes to discharge a liability (disposal case)  
    Disposal of a CGT asset

    122-140(1)    


    One of these requirements must be satisfied (for each partner) if:


    (a) the partners *dispose of their interests in a *CGT asset; and


    (b) the company undertakes to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of the interests in the asset.

    (The *market value, or the *cost base, of an interest is worked out at the time of the disposal.)


    What amount the liabilities cannot exceed
    Item In this situation: the liabilities cannot exceed:
    1 A partner *acquired the interest on or after 20 September 1985 The *cost base of the interest
    .
    2 A partner *acquired the interest before 20 September 1985 The *market value of the interest

    Note:

    There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an interest in an asset: see section 122-145 .



    Disposal of all the assets of a business

    122-140(2)    


    One of these requirements must be satisfied (for each partner) if:


    (a) the partners *dispose of their interests in all the assets of a *business; and


    (b) the company undertakes to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of the interests in the assets.

    (The *market value, or the *cost base, of an interest is worked out at the time of the disposal.)


    What amount the liabilities cannot exceed
    Item In this situation: the liabilities cannot exceed:
    1 A partner *acquired all the interests on or after 20 September 1985 The sum of the *market values of the partner ' s interests in *precluded assets and the *cost bases of the partner ' s interests in other assets
    .
    2 A partner *acquired all the interests before 20 September 1985 The sum of the *market values of the interests
    .
    3 A partner *acquired at least one interest on or after 20 September 1985 and at least one before that day For liabilities in respect of interests *acquired on or after that day - the sum of the *market values of the partner ' s interests in *precluded assets and the *cost bases of the partner ' s interests in other assets
        For liabilities in respect of interests *acquired before that day - the sum of the market values of those interests


    SECTION 122-145   Rules for working out what a liability in respect of an interest in an asset is  

    122-145(1)    
    These rules are relevant to working out what are the liabilities in respect of a partner's interests in an asset.

    122-145(2)    
    A liability incurred for the purposes of a *business that is not a liability in respect of interests in a specific asset or assets of the business is taken to be a liability in respect of the partner's interests in all the assets of the business.

    Note:

    An example is a bank overdraft.


    122-145(3)    


    If a liability is in respect of both:


    (a) the partner's interests in one or more assets that the partner *acquired on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (b) the partner's interests in one or more assets that the partner acquired before that day;

    the proportion of the liability that is in respect of the partner's interests that the partner acquired on or after that day is equal to:


    The *market value of the partner's interest
                that the partner *acquired on or after that day            
    The total of the market values of all the partner's
    interest in assets that the liability is in respect of


    Replacement-asset roll-over if partners dispose of a CGT asset

    SECTION 122-150  

    122-150   Capital gain or loss disregarded  
    If the partners choose a roll-over for *disposing of their interests in a CGT asset to the company, a *capital gain or *capital loss any partner makes from the disposal is disregarded.

    SECTION 122-155   Disposal of post-CGT or pre-CGT interests  

    122-155(1)    
    If a partner *acquired all the partner's interests in the asset on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of each *share's *cost base is the sum of the cost bases of the interests when the partner *disposed of them (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of them) divided by the number of the partner's shares; and


    (b) the first element of each share's *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Note 1:

    There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an interest in an asset: see section 122-145 .

    Note 2:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .


    122-155(2)    
    If a partner *acquired all the partner's interests in the asset before 20 September 1985, the partner is taken to have acquired the *shares before that day.


    SECTION 122-160   Disposal of both post-CGT and pre-CGT interests  

    122-160(1)    


    If a partner *acquired some of the partner's interests in the asset on or after 20 September 1985 and some before that day, the partner is taken to have acquired a whole number of the *shares (but not all of them) before that day. The number is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the shares the partner acquires) does not exceed:
  • • the *market value of the interests in the asset that the partner acquired before that day;
  • expressed as a percentage of:

  • • the total of the market values of all the partner's interests in the asset.

  • 122-160(2)    
    The first element of each other *share's *cost base is the sum of the cost bases of the partner's interests that the partner *acquired on or after that day (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of all of those interests) divided by the number of the other shares.

    Note:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .


    122-160(3)    
    The first element of each other *share's *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    122-160(4)    


    The *market value of an interest in an asset is worked out when the partner *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an interest in an asset is worked out at the same time.

    Replacement-asset roll-over if the partners dispose of all the assets of a business

    SECTION 122-170  

    122-170   Capital gain or loss disregarded  
    If the partners choose a roll-over for *disposing of their interests in all the assets of a *business to the company, a *capital gain or *capital loss any partner makes from the disposal is disregarded.

    SECTION 122-175  

    122-175   Other consequences  
    The other consequences relate to the *shares the partners receive and depend on when they *acquired their interests in the assets of the *business.

    Note 1:

    There are 3 possible cases:

  • • a partner acquired all the interests on or after 20 September 1985: see section 122-180 ;
  • • a partner acquired all the interests before that day: see section 122-185 ;
  • • a partner acquired some of the interests on or after that day: see section 122-190 .
  • Note 2:

    There are other consequences for the partnership and the company if the partners dispose of their interests in trading stock of the partnership: see Division 70 .

    SECTION 122-180   All interests acquired on or after 20 September 1985  

    122-180(1)    


    If a partner *acquired all of the partner's interests in the assets of the *business on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of the partner's *cost base of each *share is the sum of the *market values of the partner's interests in the *precluded assets and the cost bases of the partner's interests in the other assets (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of all of those interests) divided by the number of the partner's shares; and


    (b) the first element of the partner's *reduced cost base of each *share is worked out similarly.

    Note 1:

    There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of interests: see section 122-145 .

    Note 2:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .


    122-180(2)    


    The *market value of an interest in an asset is worked out when the partner *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an interest is worked out at the same time.

    SECTION 122-185   All interests acquired before 20 September 1985  

    122-185(1)    
    A partner is taken to have *acquired all of the *shares before 20 September 1985 if the partner acquired all the partner's interests in the assets of the *business before that day and none of the assets is a *precluded asset.

    122-185(2)    


    However, if at least one of the assets is a *precluded asset, the partner is taken to have *acquired a whole number of the *shares (but not all of them) before that day. The number is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the shares) does not exceed:
  • • the total of the *market values of the partner's interests in the assets that are not *precluded assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those interests;
  • expressed as a percentage of:

  • • the total of the market values of the partner's interests in all the assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those interests.
  • Note:

    There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an interest: see section 122-145 .


    122-185(3)    


    The first element of the partner's *cost base and *reduced cost base of each other *share is the total of the *market values of the partner's interests in the *precluded assets (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those interests) divided by the number of the other shares.

    122-185(4)    


    The *market value of an interest in an asset is worked out when the partner *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an interest is worked out at the same time.

    SECTION 122-190   Interests acquired before and after 20 September 1985  

    122-190(1)    


    If a partner *acquired some of the interests in the assets on or after 20 September 1985, the partner is taken to have acquired a whole number of the *shares (but not all of them) before that day. The number is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the shares) does not exceed:
  • • the total of the *market values of the partner's interests in the assets (except any *precluded assets) that the partner acquired before that day, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those interests;
  • expressed as a percentage of:

  • • the total of the market values of all the partner's interests in the assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those interests.

  • 122-190(2)    


    The first element of the partner's *cost base of each other *share is the sum of the *market values of the partner's interests in the *precluded assets and the cost bases of the partner's interests in the other assets that the partner *acquired on or after that day (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of all of those interests) divided by the number of the other shares.
    Note:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .


    122-190(3)    
    The first element of the partner's *reduced cost base of each other *share is worked out similarly.

    122-190(4)    


    The *market value of an interest in an asset is worked out when the partner *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an interest in an asset is worked out at the same time.

    Replacement-asset roll-over for a creation case

    SECTION 122-195   Creation of asset  

    122-195(1)    
    If the partners choose a roll-over, a *capital gain or *capital loss any partner makes from the trigger event is disregarded.

    122-195(2)    
    The first element of the partner's *cost base of each *share is the amount applicable under this table divided by the number of shares. The first element of each share's *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.


    Creation case
    Event No. Applicable amount
    D1 the partner's share of the *incidencal costs incurred that relate to the trigger event
    .
    D2 the partner's share of the expenditure incurred to grant the option
    .
    D3 the partner's share of the expenditure incurred to grant the right
    .
    F1 the partner's share of the expenditure incurred on the grant, renewal or extension of the lease

    The expenditure can include a transfer of property: see section 103-5 .


    Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (disposal case)

    SECTION 122-200   Consequences for the company (disposal case)  

    122-200(1)    
    There are these consequences for the company in a disposal case if the partners choose to obtain a roll-over. They are relevant for interests in each *CGT asset (except a *precluded asset) that the partners *disposed of to the company.

    Note 1:

    A capital gain or loss from a precluded asset can be disregarded: see Subdivision 118-A .

    Note 2:

    The reduced cost base (as determined under this section) may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-170 .



    Interests acquired on or after 20 September 1985

    122-200(2)    
    If all of the partners ' interests in an asset were *acquired on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of the asset ' s *cost base (in the hands of the company) is the sum of the cost bases of the partners ' interests in the asset when it was disposed of; and


    (b) the first element of the asset ' s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the company) is the sum of the reduced cost bases of the partners ' interests in the asset when it was disposed of.

    Note:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .



    Interests acquired before 20 September 1985

    122-200(3)    
    If all of the partners ' interests in an asset were *acquired before 20 September 1985, the company is taken to have acquired it before that day.

    Note:

    A capital gain or loss from a CGT asset acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104 . This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149 .



    Interests acquired on or after and before 20 September 1985

    122-200(4)    
    If some of the partners ' interests in an asset (the original asset ) were *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 and some before that day, the company is taken to have acquired 2 separate *CGT assets:


    (a) one (which the company is taken to have acquired on or after 20 September 1985) representing the extent to which the partners ' interests in the original asset were acquired by the partners on or after that day; and


    (b) another (which the company is taken to have acquired before that day) representing the extent to which the partners ' interests in the original asset were acquired by the partners before that day.

    122-200(5)    
    The first element of the *cost base of the separate asset that the company is taken to have *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is the sum of the cost bases of the partners ' interests in the original asset that they acquired on or after that day.

    Note:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .


    122-200(6)    
    The first element of its *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (creation case)

    SECTION 122-205   Consequences for the company (creation case)  

    122-205(1)    
    There are these consequences for the company in a creation case if the partners choose to obtain a roll-over.

    122-205(2)    
    The first element of the created asset's *cost base (in the hands of the company) is the applicable amount from this table.


    Creation case
    Event No. Applicable amount
    D1 the total *incidental costs incurred that relate to the trigger event
    .
    D2 the total expenditure incurred to grant the option
    .
    D3 the total expenditure incurred to grant the right
    .
    F1 the total expenditure incurred on the grant, renewal or extension of the lease

    The expenditure can include a transfer of property: see section 103-5 .


    122-205(3)    
    The first element of the created asset's *reduced cost base (in the hands of the company) is worked out similarly.


    (Repealed) Division 123 - Small business roll-over  

    Division 124 - Replacement-asset roll-overs  

    Guide to Division 124  

    SECTION 124-1   What this Division is about  

    A replacement-asset roll-over allows you, in special cases, to defer the making of a capital gain or loss from one CGT event until a later CGT event happens. It involves your ownership of one CGT asset ending and you acquiring another one.

    SECTION 124-5   How to find your way around this Division  

    124-5(1)    


    First, find out if you can obtain a roll-over when your ownership of one or more CGT assets ends and you acquire one or more CGT assets: see Subdivisions 124-B to 124-R .
    Note:

    If you carry on a small business, you may also be able to obtain a roll-over under Subdivision 152-E .


    124-5(2)    
    Second, find out what the consequences are for being able to obtain a roll-over: see Subdivision 124-A .

    Note:

    The consequences of a scrip for scrip roll-over are set out in Subdivision 124-M . The consequences of replacing a statutory licence by a new statutory licence are set out in Subdivision 124-C . The consequences of an exchange of a membership interest in an MDO are set out in Subdivision 124-P . The consequences of an exchange of stapled ownership interests are set out in Subdivision 124-Q . The consequences of a roll-over for water entitlements are set out in Subdivision 124-R .


    124-5(3)    
    Third, find out if there are any special rules relevant to your situation: see the Subdivision under which you can get the roll-over.

    Subdivision 124-A - General rules  

    SECTION 124-10   Your ownership of one CGT asset ends  

    124-10(1)    


    There are these consequences (in most cases) if you can obtain a roll-over when your ownership of a *CGT asset (the original asset ) ends and you *acquire one or more CGT assets (the new assets ) in a situation covered by this Division.

    124-10(1A)    


    A *car, motor cycle or similar vehicle must not be one of the new assets.

    124-10(2)    
    A *capital gain or a *capital loss you make from the original asset is disregarded.

    124-10(3)    


    If you *acquired the original asset on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of each new asset ' s *cost base is:


    The original asset ' s cost base
    (worked out when your ownership of it ended)
    Number of new assets

    The first element of each new asset ' s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Note 1:

    In some cases the amount you paid to acquire the new asset also forms part of the first element: see Subdivision 124-D (about strata title conversion).

    Note 2:

    There are modifications to the consequences in Subdivision 124-B (about compulsory acquisition, loss or destruction), Subdivision 124-C (about statutory licences), Subdivision 124-J (about Crown leases) and Subdivision 124-L (about prospecting and mining).

    Note 3:

    No other elements of the cost base of the new asset are affected by the roll-over.

    Note 4:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .

    Note 5:

    The reduced cost base may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-170 .


    124-10(4)    
    If you *acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired each new asset before that day.

    Note:

    A capital gain or loss you make from a CGT asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104 . This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149 .


    124-10(5)    


    However, subsection (4) is taken never to have applied to a *share to which subsection 104-195(6) applies (CGT event J4).

    SECTION 124-15   Your ownership of more than one CGT asset ends  

    124-15(1)    
    There are these consequences (in most cases) if you can obtain a roll-over when your ownership of more than one *CGT asset (the original assets ) ends and you acquire one or more CGT assets (the new assets ) in a situation covered by this Division.

    Example:

    You own 100 shares in a company. The company cancels these shares and issues you with 10 shares in return.


    124-15(1A)    


    A *car, motor cycle or similar vehicle must not be one of the new assets.

    124-15(2)    
    A *capital gain or a *capital loss you make from each original asset is disregarded.

    124-15(3)    
    If you *acquired all the original assets on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of each new asset ' s cost base is:


    The total of the cost bases of all the original assets
      (worked out when your ownership of them ended)  
    Number of new assets

    The first element of each new asset ' s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Note 1:

    No other elements of the cost base of the new asset are affected by the roll-over.

    Note 2:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .


    124-15(4)    
    If you *acquired all the original assets before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired each new asset before that day.

    Note:

    A capital gain or loss you make from a CGT asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104 . This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149 .


    124-15(5)    
    If you *acquired some of the original assets before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired a number of new assets before that day. It is the maximum possible that does not exceed:


    The number of new assets ×   The number of original assets you
    *acquired before 20 September 1985
      The total number of original assets

    If the result is less than one, none of the new assets are taken to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985.

    Example:

    To continue the example, suppose you acquired 67 of the 100 original shares before 20 September 1985. The number of new shares that you are taken to have acquired before that day cannot exceed:


      10   ×   67  
    100
    =   6.7  

    So, you are taken to have acquired 6 of the 10 shares before that day.


    124-15(6)    
    These rules are relevant to each remaining new asset. The first element of each one ' s *cost base is:


    The total of the cost bases of all the original assets
    that you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985
    (worked out when your ownership of them ended)
    Number of remaining new assets

    The first element of each one ' s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Note:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .

    Example:

    To continue the example, suppose the total of the cost bases of the 33 shares you acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is $400.

    The first element of the cost base of each of the remaining 4 shares is:


      $400
    4  
    =   $100  

    The first element of the reduced cost base of those 4 shares is worked out similarly.


    124-15(7)    


    However, subsections (4) and (5) are taken never to have applied to a *share to which subsection 104-195(6) applies (CGT event J4).

    SECTION 124-20   Share and interest sale facilities  


    Share and interest sale facilities

    124-20(1)    
    An entity (the investor ) is treated as owning an *ownership interest (the roll-over interest ) in a company or trust (the issuer ) at a time (the deeming time ), if:


    (a) the investor owned an ownership interest (the original interest ) in a company or trust; and


    (b) a transaction happened in relation to the original interest; and


    (c) because:


    (i) a *foreign law impedes the ability of the issuer to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor; or

    (ii) it would be impractical or unreasonably onerous to determine whether a foreign law impedes the ability of the issuer to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor;
    it is *arranged that the issuer will issue or transfer the roll-over interest to another entity (the facility ) under the transaction instead of to the investor; and


    (d) in accordance with that arrangement and as a result of the transaction, the facility:


    (i) becomes the owner of the roll-over interest; and

    (ii) owns the roll-over interest at the deeming time; and


    (e) under the arrangement, the investor is entitled to receive from the facility:


    (i) an amount equivalent to the *capital proceeds of any *CGT event that happens in relation to the roll-over interest (less expenses); or

    (ii) if a CGT event happens in relation to the roll-over interest together with CGT events happening in relation to other ownership interests - an amount equivalent to the investor ' s proportion of the total capital proceeds of the CGT events (less expenses).

    124-20(2)    
    The facility is treated as not owning the roll-over interest at the deeming time.

    124-20(3)    
    This section applies for the purposes of:


    (a) applying one of the following provisions (the roll-over provision ) in relation to the transaction:


    (i) - (ii) (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (iii) Subdivision 124-I (Change of incorporation);

    (iv) Subdivision 124-N (Disposal of assets by a trust to a company);

    (v) Subdivision 124-Q (Exchange of stapled ownership interests for ownership interests in a unit trust);

    (vi) Division 615 (Roll-overs for business restructures); and


    (b) the following provisions, to the extent that they relate to a roll-over under the roll-over provision that involves the transaction:


    (i) item 2 of the table in subsection 115-30(1) ;

    (ii) sections 124-10 and 124-15 .


    Incorporated bodies

    124-20(4)    
    Without limiting this section, it also has effect, in a case covered by subparagraph (3)(a)(iii) (about Subdivision 124-I ), as if each reference in this section to an *ownership interest in a company or trust were a reference to:


    (a) an interest in an incorporated body; and


    (b) any rights relating to the body owned by the entity that owns that interest.

    124-20(5)    
    This section applies, in a case covered by subparagraph (3)(a)(iii) (about Subdivision 124-I ), in relation to rights as a *member of a company incorporated under the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006 in the same way as it applies in relation to *shares in a company.


    Subdivision 124-B - Asset compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed  

    When a roll-over is available

    SECTION 124-70   Events giving rise to a roll-over  

    124-70(1)    
    You may be able to choose a roll-over if one of these events happens to a *CGT asset (the original asset ) you own:


    (a) it is compulsorily *acquired by an *Australian government agency;


    (aa) it is compulsorily acquired by an entity (other than an Australian government agency or a *foreign government agency) under a power of compulsory acquisition conferred by a law covered under subsection (1A);


    (b) it, or part of it, is lost or destroyed;


    (c) you *dispose of it to an entity (other than a foreign government agency) in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:


    (i) the disposal takes place after a notice was served on you by or on behalf of the entity;

    (ii) the notice invited you to negotiate with the entity with a view to the entity acquiring the asset by agreement;

    (iii) the notice informed you that if the negotiations were unsuccessful, the asset would be compulsorily acquired by the entity;

    (iv) the compulsory acquisition would have been under a power of compulsory acquisition conferred by a law covered under subsection (1A);


    (ca) you dispose of it to an entity (other than a foreign government agency) in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:


    (i) the asset is land over which a mining lease was compulsorily granted;

    (ii) the lease significantly affected your use of the land;

    (iii) the lease was in force just before the disposal;

    (iv) the entity to which you dispose of the land was the lessee under the lease;


    (cb) you dispose of it to an entity (other than a foreign government agency) in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:


    (i) the asset is land over which a mining lease would have been compulsorily granted if you had not disposed of it;

    (ii) that lease would have significantly affected your use of the land;

    (iii) the entity to which you dispose of the land would have been the lessee under the lease.


    (d) if it is a lease granted to you by an *Australian government agency under an *Australian law - the lease expires and is not renewed.

    Note 1:

    There are no roll-over consequences if you make a capital loss from the event.

    Note 2:

    Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.


    124-70(1A)    


    A law is covered under this subsection if it is:


    (a) an *Australian law (other than Chapter 6A of the Corporations Act 2001 ); or


    (b) a *foreign law (other than a foreign law corresponding to Chapter 6A of the Corporations Act 2001 ).


    124-70(2)    


    You must receive money or another *CGT asset (except a *car, motor cycle or similar vehicle), or both:


    (a) as compensation for the event happening; or


    (b) under an insurance policy against the risk of loss or destruction of the original asset.

    Note:

    There are other requirements that must be satisfied if:

  • • you receive money: see section 124-75 ; or
  • • you receive another CGT asset: see section 124-80 .

  • 124-70(3)    
    The requirement in subsection (4) must be satisfied if:


    (a) you are a foreign resident just before the event happens; or


    (b) you are the trustee of a trust that is a *foreign trust for CGT purposes for the income year in which the event happens.


    124-70(4)    


    The original asset must be *taxable Australian property just before the event happens. The other asset must be taxable Australian property just after you *acquire it.

    SECTION 124-75   Other requirements if you receive money  

    124-75(1)    
    If you receive money for the event happening, you can choose to obtain a roll-over only if these other requirements are satisfied.

    Note:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in section 124-85 .


    124-75(2)    
    You must:


    (a) incur expenditure in *acquiring another *CGT asset (except a *depreciating asset whose decline in value is worked out under Division 40 or deductions for which are calculated under Division 328 ); or


    (b) if part of the original asset is lost or destroyed - incur expenditure of a capital nature in repairing or restoring it.


    124-75(3)    
    At least some of the expenditure must be incurred:


    (a) no earlier than one year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows in special circumstances, before the event happens; or


    (b) no later than one year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows in special circumstances, after the end of the income year in which the event happens.

    Special rules if you acquire another asset

    124-75(4)    
    If just before the event happened the original asset:


    (a) was used in your *business; or


    (b) was *installedready for use in your business; or


    (c) was in the process of being *installed ready for use in your business;

    the other asset must be used in the business, or be installed ready for use in the business, for a reasonable time after you *acquired it.

    Otherwise, you must use the other asset (for a reasonable time after you *acquired it) for the same purpose as, or for a similar purpose to, the purpose for which you used the original asset just before the event happened.


    124-75(5)    


    The other asset cannot become an item of your *trading stock just after you *acquire it, nor can it be a *depreciating asset whose decline in value is worked out under Division 40 or deductions for which are calculated under Division 328 .

    124-75(6)    


    The other asset cannot become a *registered emissions unit *held by you just after you *acquire it.

    SECTION 124-80   Other requirements if you receive an asset  

    124-80(1)    
    If you receive another *CGT asset for the event happening, you can choose to obtain a roll-over only if these other requirements are satisfied.

    Note:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in section 124-90 .


    124-80(2)    


    The other asset cannot become an item of your *trading stock just after you *acquire it, nor can it be a *depreciating asset whose decline in value is worked out under Division 40 or deductions for which are calculated under Division 328 nor can it be a *registered emissions unit.

    124-80(3)    


    The *market value of the other asset (when you *acquire it) must be more than the *cost base of the original asset just before the event happens.

    The consequences of a roll-over being available

    SECTION 124-85   Consequences for receiving money  

    124-85(1)    
    If you receive money for the event happening, there are these consequences if you choose to obtain a roll-over.

    Original asset acquired on or after 20 September 1985

    124-85(2)    


    If you make a *capital gain from the event, this table sets out in what situations the gain is reduced, not reduced or disregarded.

    It also sets out in what situations the expenditure you incurred to *acquire another *CGT asset or to repair or restore the original asset is reduced.


    You make a capital gain from the event
    Item In this situation: There are these consequences:
    1 The money exceeds the expenditure you incurred to *acquire another CGT asset or to repair or restore the original asset If the gain is more than the excess:
        (a) the gain is reduced to the amount by which the money exceeds that expenditure; and
        (b) that expenditure is reduced by the amount by which the gain (before it is reduced) is more than the excess
    .
    2 The money exceeds that expenditure If the gain is less than or equal to the excess, the gain is not reduced
    .
    3 The money does not exceed that expenditure The gain is disregarded in working out your *net capital gain or *net capital loss for the income year. That expenditure is reduced by the amount of the gain

    Example:

    In 1999 Simon bought a small factory. In 2000 a fire destroys part of it. He receives $100,000 under an insurance policy.

    The capital gain is worked out under section 112-30 .

    Suppose the factory ' s cost base at the time of the fire is $75,000 and the market value of the part that is not destroyed is $150,000. The cost base of the part that is destroyed is:


    $75,000×       $100,000      
    $100,000 + $150,000
    = $30,000

    The capital gain is:

    $100,000 − $30,000 = $70,000

    Case 1

    Suppose Simon spent $80,000 on repairing the factory. The money he received under the insurance policy exceeds the repair cost by $20,000. The gain exceeds that by $50,000.

    The result is that the gain is reduced to $20,000 and the $80,000 he spent on repairs is reduced to $30,000.

    Case 2

    Suppose Simon spent $15,000 on repairs instead. The money he received under the policy exceeds that amount by $85,000. This is more than the gain he made.

    The gain is relevant to working out Simon ' s net capital gain or loss for the income year and the $15,000 he spent on repairs forms part of the factory ' s cost base.

    Case 3

    Suppose Simon spent $120,000 on repairs instead. The gain is disregarded and the $120,000 is reduced to $50,000.



    Original asset acquired before 20 September 1985

    124-85(3)    
    If you *acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985 and you incurred expenditure in acquiring another *CGT asset, you are taken to have acquired the other asset before that day if:


    (a) the expenditure is not more than 120% of the *market value of the original asset when the event happened; or


    (b) a natural disaster happened so that the original asset, or part of it, is lost or destroyed and it is reasonable to treat the other asset as substantially the same as the original asset.

    124-85(4)    
    If you *acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985 and you incurred expenditure of a capital nature in repairing or restoring it, you are taken to have acquired the original asset (as repaired or restored) before that day.

    SECTION 124-90   Consequences for receiving an asset  

    124-90(1)    
    If you receive another *CGT asset for the event happening, there are these consequences if you choose to obtain a roll-over.

    124-90(2)    
    A *capital gain you make from the original asset is disregarded.

    124-90(3)    
    If you *acquired the original asset on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of the other asset's *cost base is the original asset's cost base at the time of the event; and


    (b) the first element of the other asset's *reduced cost base is the original asset's reduced cost base at the time of the event.

    Note:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .

    Example:

    Steven bought land in 1999 for $100,000. In 2001 the government compulsorily acquires the land and gives him new land in return.

    A capital gain he makes from the original land is disregarded. Suppose the original land's cost base when it is acquired is $120,000. The first element of the new land's cost base becomes $120,000.


    124-90(4)    
    If you acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have *acquired the other asset before that day.


    SECTION 124-95   You receive both money and an asset  

    124-95(1)    


    If you receive both money and another *CGT asset for the event happening and choose to obtain a roll-over, the requirements and consequences are different for each part of the compensation attributable to the original asset (having regard to the amount of money and the *market value of the other asset).

    The other asset as a part of compensation

    124-95(2)    


    The *market value of the other asset (when you *acquire it) must be more than that part of the *cost base of the original asset that is attributable to the new asset.
    Note:

    This requirement is different to that in subsection 124-80(3) . It requires a proportional attribution of the cost base of the original asset.


    124-95(3)    
    If you *acquired the original asset on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of the other asset ' s *cost base is that part of the original asset ' s cost base at the time of the event that is attributable to the new asset; and


    (b) the first element of the other asset ' s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Note:

    These consequences are different to those in subsection 124-90(3) . They require a proportional attribution of the cost base of the original asset.


    124-95(4)    
    If you *acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the new asset before that day.

    Money as a part of compensation

    124-95(5)    
    If you make a *capital gain from the event, this table sets out in what situations that part of the gain on the original asset that is attributable to the amount of money you received is reduced, not reduced or disregarded.

    It also sets out in what situations the expenditure you incurred to *acquire another *CGT asset or to repair or restore the original asset is reduced.


    You make a capital gain from the event
    Item In this situation: There are these consequences:
    1 The money exceeds the expenditure you incurred to *acquire another CGT asset or to repair or restore the original asset If that part of the gain that is attributable to the amount of money is more than the excess:
        (a) that part of the gain is reduced to the amount by which the money exceeds that expenditure; and
       (b) that expenditure is reduced by the amount by which that part of the gain (before it is reduced) is more than the excess
    .
    2 The money exceeds that expenditure If that part of the gain that is attributable to the amount of money is less than or equal to the excess, the gain is not reduced
    .
    3 The money does not exceed that expenditure That part of the gain that is attributable to the amount of money is disregarded in working out your *net capital gain or *net capital loss for the income year. That expenditure is reduced by the amount of that part of the gain

    Note:

    These consequences are different to those in subsection 124-85(2) . They require a proportional attribution of capital gain on the original asset.


    124-95(6)    
    If you *acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985 and you incurred expenditure in acquiring another *CGT asset, you are taken to have acquired the other asset before that day if:


    (a) the expenditure you incurred in acquiring the other asset is not more than 120% of the *market value of that part of the original asset that is attributable to the other asset when the event happened; or


    (b) a natural disaster happened so that the original asset, or part of it, is lost or destroyed and it is reasonable to treat the other asset as substantially the same as that part of the original asset that is attributable to the new asset.

    Note 1:

    The consequences in paragraph (6)(a) are different to those in paragraph 124-85(3)(a) . They require a proportional attribution of the market value of the original asset.

    Note 2:

    The consequences in paragraph (6)(b) are different to those in paragraph 124-85(3)(b) . They require a proportional attribution of the original asset.

    Example:

    Kris owns land, which he acquired in 1998. It is compulsorily acquired, and Kris receives $80,000 in cash and replacement land with a market value of $80,000.

    The cost base of the original land is $150,000.

    Kris buys additional land for $80,000.

    Subsection (2) is satisfied because the market value of the replacement land ($80,000) is more than the part of the cost base of the original land that is attributable to the replacement land:


    50%   ×   $150,000   =   $75,000

    Applying subsection (5), the other part of the gain is disregarded, and the first element of the cost base of the replacement land is the part of the cost base of the original land that is attributable to the replacement land:


    50%   ×   $150,000   =   $75,000

    Applying subsection (3), the money he received ($80,000) is the same as the expenditure he incurred to buy the additional land. Item 3 in the table applies. The part of the gain that is attributable to that money is disregarded:


    50%   ×   $10,000   =   $5,000

    The expenditure is reduced by $5,000.


    Subdivision 124-C - Statutory licences  

    SECTION 124-140   New statutory licences  

    124-140(1)    


    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) your ownership of one or more *statutory licences (each of which is an original licence ) ends, resulting in *CGT event C2 happening to the licence (or to each of the licences as part of an *arrangement); and


    (b) as a result of the CGT event or events, you are issued one or more new licences (each of which is a new licence ) for the original licence (or original licences); and


    (c) the new licence authorises (or the new licences taken together authorise) substantially similar activity as that authorised by the original licence (or by the original licences taken together).

    Note 1:

    If there has been a capital improvement to the original licence: see section 108-75 .

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 124-C of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 modifies this roll-over for certain water-related licences. A separate roll-over for other water entitlements is provided in Subdivision 124-R of this Act.


    124-140(1A)    


    If:


    (a) you are a foreign resident just before the *CGT event happens (or just before one or more of the CGT events happens); or


    (b) you are the trustee of a trust that is a *foreign trust for CGT purposes for the income year in which the event happens (or for an income year in which one or more of those events happens);

    there is no roll-over under this section unless the conditions in subsection (1B) are satisfied.


    124-140(1B)    


    The conditions are that:


    (a) if there was only one original licence - the licence must be *taxable Australian property just before the *CGT event happens; and


    (b) if there was more than one original licence - each original licence must be taxable Australian property just before the CGT event in relation to it happens; and


    (c) if there is only one new licence - the licence must be taxable Australian property just after you *acquire it; and


    (d) if there is more than one new licence - each new licence must be taxable Australian property just after you acquire it.


    124-140(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the new licence includes any amount you paid to get it (which can include giving property: see section 103-5 ).


    124-140(3)    
    A statutory licence is an authority, licence, permit or quota (except a lease or a *mining entitlement or *prospecting entitlement) granted by:


    (a) an *Australian government agency under an *Australian law; or


    (b) a *foreign government agency under a *foreign law.

    SECTION 124-145  

    124-145   Rollover consequences - capital gain or loss disregarded  


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the original licence (or from each of the original licences) is disregarded.

    SECTION 124-150   Rollover consequences - partial roll-over  

    124-150(1)    
    You can obtain only a partial roll-over in relation to an original licence if the *capital proceeds for that licence includes something (the ineligible proceeds ) other than a new licence or new licences. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part ) of the licence for which you received the ineligible proceeds.

    Note:

    If there is more than one original licence, some or all of those original licences may each have an ineligible part.


    124-150(2)    
    The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of the original licence as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

    124-150(3)    
    The *reduced cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the reduced cost base of the original licence as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

    124-150(4)    
    For the purposes of sections 124-155 and 124-165 , for each original licence that has an ineligible part:


    (a) reduce the *cost base of that licence (just before the *CGT event that happened in relation to it) by so much of that cost base as is attributable to that ineligible part; and


    (b) reduce the *reduced cost base of that licence (just before the CGT event that happened in relation to it) by so much of that reduced cost base as is attributable to that ineligible part.

    SECTION 124-155   Roll-over consequences - all original licences were post-CGT  

    124-155(1)    
    This section applies if you *acquired the original licence (or all of the original licences) on or after 20 September 1985.

    124-155(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base of the new licence (or of each of the new licences) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the cost bases of all the original licences; and


    (b) the number, *market value and character of the original licences; and


    (c) the number, market value and character of the new licences.

    124-155(3)    
    The first element of the *reduced cost base of the new licence (or of each of the new licences) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the reduced cost bases of all the original licences; and


    (b) the number, *market value and character of the original licences; and


    (c) the number, market value and character of the new licences.

    SECTION 124-160  

    124-160   Roll-over consequences - all original licences were pre-CGT  


    If you *acquired the original licence (or all of the original licences) before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the new licence (or all of the new licences) before that day.

    SECTION 124-165   Roll-over consequences - some original licences were pre-CGT, others were post-CGT  

    124-165(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) there was more than one original licence; and


    (b) you *acquired one or more of the original licences before 20 September 1985; and


    (c) you acquired one or more of the original licences on or after that day.

    124-165(2)    
    Each new licence is taken to be 2 separate *CGT assets that are both *statutory licences:


    (a) one (which you are taken to have *acquired on or after 20 September 1985) representing the extent to which you acquired the original licences on or after that day; and


    (b) another (which you are taken to have acquired before that day) representing the extent to which you acquired the original licences before that day.

    124-165(3)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *CGT asset mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) in relation to a new licence is worked out under the formula:


     
      Total post-CGT cost base × Market value of new licence  
      Market value of all new licences

    where:

    market value of all new licences
    is the total of the *market values of all of the new licences.

    market value of new licence
    is the *market value of the new licence to which the *CGT asset mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) relates.

    total post-CGT cost base
    is the total of the *cost bases of all the original licences that you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985.


    Subdivision 124-D - Strata title conversion  

    SECTION 124-190   Strata title conversion  

    124-190(1)    
    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:


    (a) you own property that gives you a right to occupy a unit in a building; and


    (b) the building's owner subdivides it into *stratum units; and


    (c) the owner transfers to you the stratum unit that corresponds to the unit you had the right to occupy just before the subdivision.

    Note 1:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in section 124-10 . The original asset is the property that gave you the right to occupy a unit in the building. The new asset is the stratum unit.

    Note 2:

    Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.


    124-190(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *stratum unit includes any amount you paid to get it (which can include giving property: see section 103-5 ).

    Note:

    The rest of the first element is worked out under Subdivision 124-A .


    124-190(3)    
    A stratum unit is a lot or unit (however described in an *Australian law or a *foreign law relating to strata title or similar title) and any accompanying common property.


    Subdivision 124-E - Exchange of shares or units  

    SECTION 124-240  

    124-240   Exchange of shares in the same company  
    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:


    (a) you own *shares (the original shares ) of a certain class in a company; and


    (b) the company redeems or cancels all shares of that class; and


    (c) the company issues you with new shares (and you receive nothing else) in substitution for the original shares; and


    (d) the *market value of the new shares just after they were issued is at least equal to the market value of the original shares just before they were redeemed or cancelled; and


    (e) the *paid-up share capital of the company just after the new shares were issued is the same as just before the original shares were redeemed or cancelled; and


    (f) one of these requirements is satisfied:


    (i) you are an Australian resident at the time of the redemption or cancellation; or

    (ii) if you are a foreign resident at that time - the original shares were *taxable Australian property just before that time and the new shares are taxable Australian property when they are issued.
    Note 1:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A . The original assets are the original shares. The new assets are the new shares.

    Note 2:

    Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

    SECTION 124-245  

    124-245   Exchange of units in the same unit trust  
    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:


    (a) you own units (the original units ) of a certain class in a unit trust; and


    (b) the trustee redeems or cancels all units of that class; and


    (c) the trustee issues you with new units (and you receive nothing else) in substitution for the original units; and


    (d) the *market value of the new units just after they were issued is at least equal to the market value of the original units just before they were redeemed or cancelled; and


    (e) one of these requirements is satisfied:


    (i) you are an Australian resident at the time of the redemption or cancellation; or

    (ii) if you are a foreign resident at that time - the original units were *taxable Australian property just before that time and the new units are taxable Australian property when they are issued.
    Note:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A . The original assets are the original units. The new assets are the new units.

    Subdivision 124-F - Exchange of rights or options  

    SECTION 124-295   Exchange of rights or option to acquire shares in a company  

    124-295(1)    
    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:


    (a) you own rights (the original rights ) to *acquire *shares in a company or to acquire an option to acquire *shares in a company; or


    (b) you own an option (the original option ) to acquire *shares in a company;

    and these other requirements are satisfied.

    Note:

    Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.


    124-295(2)    
    The *shares must:


    (a) be consolidated and divided into new shares of a larger amount; or


    (b) be subdivided into new shares of a smaller amount.

    124-295(3)    
    The company must cancel the original rights or original option because of the consolidation or subdivision.

    124-295(4)    
    The company must:


    (a) issue you with new rights (relating to the new *shares) in substitution for the original rights; or


    (b) issue you with a new option (relating to the new shares) in substitution for the original option.

    124-295(5)    
    You must receive nothing else in substitution for the original rights or original option.

    124-295(6)    


    The *market value of the new rights or new option just after it was issued must be at least equal to the market value of the original rights or original option just before it was cancelled.

    124-295(7)    
    One of these requirements must be satisfied:


    (a) you must be an Australian resident at the time of the cancellation; or


    (b) if you are a foreign resident at that time:


    (i) the original rights or original option were *taxable Australian property just before that time; and

    (ii) the new rights or new option are taxable Australian property when they are issued.
    Note:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A . The original asset is the original rights or original option. The new asset is the new rights or new option.


    SECTION 124-300   Exchange of rights or option to acquire units in a unit trust  

    124-300(1)    
    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:


    (a) you own rights (the original rights ) to *acquire units in a unit trust or to acquire an option to acquire units in a unit trust; or


    (b) you own an option (the original option ) to acquire units in a unit trust;

    and these other requirements are satisfied.

    Note:

    Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.


    124-300(2)    
    The units must:


    (a) be consolidated and divided into new units of a larger amount; or


    (b) be subdivided into new units of a smaller amount.

    124-300(3)    
    The trustee must cancel the original rights or original option because of the consolidation or subdivision.

    124-300(4)    
    The trustee must:


    (a) issue you with new rights (relating to the new units) in substitution for the original rights; or


    (b) issue you with a new option (relating to the new units) in substitution for the original option.

    124-300(5)    
    You must receive nothing else in substitution for the original rights or original option.

    124-300(6)    


    The *market value of the new rights or new option just after it was issued must be at least equal to the market value of the original rights or original option just before it was cancelled.

    124-300(7)    
    One of these requirements must be satisfied:


    (a) you must be an Australian resident at the time of the cancellation; or


    (b) if you are a foreign resident at that time:


    (i) the original rights or original option were *taxable Australian property just before that time; and

    (ii) the new rights or new option are taxable Australian property when they are issued.
    Note:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A . The original asset is the original rights or original option. The new asset is the new rights or new option.


    (Repealed) Subdivision 124-G - Exchange of shares in one company for shares in another company  

    124-350   (Repealed) SECTION 124-350 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    124-355   (Repealed) SECTION 124-355 Summary of rules  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Disposal case

    124-360   (Repealed) SECTION 124-360 Disposal of shares in one company for shares in another one  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    124-365   (Repealed) SECTION 124-365 Other requirements to be satisfied  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Redemption or cancellation case

    124-370   (Repealed) SECTION 124-370 Redemption or cancellation of shares in one company for shares in another one  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    124-375   (Repealed) SECTION 124-375 Other requirements to be satisfied  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Rules applying to both cases

    124-380   (Repealed) SECTION 124-380 Requirements to be satisfied in both cases  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    124-382   (Repealed) SECTION 124-382 Special rules for ADI restructures  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Consequences for the interposed company unless consolidated group continues

    124-385   (Repealed) SECTION 124-385 Consequences for the interposed company  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Additional consequences for member if shares are trading stock or revenue assets

    124-390   (Repealed) SECTION 124-390 Deferral of profit or loss on shares  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 124-H - Exchange of units in a unit trust for shares in a company  

    124-435   (Repealed) SECTION 124-435 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    124-440   (Repealed) SECTION 124-440 Summary of rules  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Disposal case

    124-445   (Repealed) SECTION 124-445 Disposal of units in a unit trust for shares in a company  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    124-450   (Repealed) SECTION 124-450 Other requirements to be satisfied  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Redemption or cancellation case

    124-455   (Repealed) SECTION 124-455 Redemption or cancellation of units in a unit trust for shares in a company  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    124-460   (Repealed) SECTION 124-460 Other requirements to be satisfied  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Rules applying to both cases

    124-465   (Repealed) SECTION 124-465 Requirements to be satisfied in both cases  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Consequences for the company

    124-470   (Repealed) SECTION 124-470 Consequences for the company  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2014)

    Subdivision 124-I - Change of incorporation  

    Guide to Subdivision 124-I

    SECTION 124-510  

    124-510   What this Subdivision is about  

    Roll-over relief is available for members of a body that is incorporated under one law and is converted to, or replaced with, a body incorporated under another law.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Object of this Subdivision
    124-515 Object of this Subdivision
    Change of incorporation without change of entity
    124-520 Change of incorporation without change of entity
    Old corporation wound up
    124-525 Old corporation wound up
    Special consequences of some roll-overs
    124-530 Shares in company replacing pre-CGT and post-CGT mix of interest and rights in body
    124-535 Rights as member of Indigenous corporation replacing pre-CGT and post-CGT mix of interest and rights in body

    Object of this Subdivision

    SECTION 124-515  

    124-515   Object of this Subdivision  


    The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that CGT considerations for *members of a body incorporated under a law do not impede a change of incorporation involving converting the body to, or replacing it with, a company incorporated under:


    (a) the Corporations Act 2001 or a similar *foreign law; or


    (b) the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006 .

    Note:

    Subdivision 620-A provides a roll-over for the assets of the body.

    Change of incorporation without change of entity

    SECTION 124-520   Change of incorporation without change of entity  

    124-520(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you are a *member of a body incorporated under a law described in column 1 of an item of the table; and


    (b) the body is converted into a company incorporated under a law described in column 2 of the item, without creating a new legal entity; and


    (c) it is reasonable to conclude that there is no significant difference:


    (i) between the ownership of the body, and of rights relating to the body held by entities that owned the body, just before the conversion and the ownership of the company just after the conversion; or

    (ii) between the mix of ownership of the body, and of rights relating to the body held by entities that owned the body, just before the conversion and the mix of ownership of the company just after the conversion.
    Note:

    See section 124-20 if an entity uses a share or interest sale facility.


    Laws the body and company are incorporated under
    Column 1
    Body incorporated under this law
    Column 2
    Company incorporated under this law
    1 A law other than the Corporations Act 2001 and a similar *foreign law relating to companies The Corporations Act 2001 or a similar foreign law relating to companies
    2 A law other than the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006 The Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006


    124-520(2)    


    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:


    (a) as a result of the conversion you are issued with *shares in the company and you receive nothing else; and


    (b) either you are an Australian resident at the time of the conversion or, if you are a foreign resident at that time:


    (i) each of your interest and your other rights (if any) relating to the body was *taxable Australian property just before that time; and

    (ii) the shares are taxable Australian property when they are issued.
    Note 1:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A and section 124-530 .

    Note 2:

    Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.


    124-520(3)    


    If the company is incorporated under the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006 , subsection (2) applies in relation to rights as a *member of the company in the same way as that subsection applies to *shares in a company.
    Note:

    This may allow you to choose to obtain a roll-over. The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A and section 124-535 .



    Exception for demutualisation of certain bodies

    124-520(4)    
    This section does not apply to demutualisation of a body if Division 326 in Schedule 2H to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the demutualisation.

    Note:

    That Division deals with demutualisation of entities other than insurance companies and health insurers.


    Old corporation wound up

    SECTION 124-525   Old corporation wound up  

    124-525(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a body is incorporated under a law described in column 1 of an item of the table; and


    (b) a company is incorporated under a law described in column 2 of the item; and


    (c) the body ceases to exist, but the company continues to exist, after the time (the switch time ) the *members of the body receive *shares in the company, or rights as members of it if it is incorporated under the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006 , on account of:


    (i) their interests in the body; and

    (ii) their other rights (if any) relating to the body; and


    (d) the members of the body do not receive anything else on account of the expected ending of those interests and rights; and


    (e) it is reasonable to conclude that there is no significant difference:


    (i) between the ownership of the body, and of rights relating to the body held by entities that owned the body, just before the switch time and the ownership of the company just after the switch time; or

    (ii) between the mix of ownership of the body, and of rights relating to the body held by entities that owned the body, just before the switch time and the mix of ownership of the company just after the switch time; and
    Note:

    See section 124-20 if an entity uses a share or interest sale facility.


    (f) the body *disposes of all its *CGT assets to the company, except any assets expected to be needed to meet the body ' s existing or expected liabilities before it ceases to exist.


    Laws the body and company are incorporated under
    Column 1
    Body incorporated under this law
    Column 2
    Company incorporated under this law
    1 A law other than the Corporations Act 2001 and a similar *foreign law relating to companies The Corporations Act 2001 or a similar foreign law relating to companies
    2 A law other than the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006 The Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006


    124-525(2)    
    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:


    (a) you were a *member of the body just before the switch time; and


    (b) your ownership of your interest in the body ends at a time (the end time ) after the switch time; and


    (c) at the end time you have the *shares in the company that you received at the switch time; and


    (d) either you are an Australian resident at the end time or, if you are a foreign resident at the end time:


    (i) each of your interest in the body and your other rights (if any) relating to the body was *taxable Australian property just before the end time; and

    (ii) the shares in the company that you received at the switch time are taxable Australian property at the end time.
    Note 1:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A and section 124-530 .

    Note 2:

    Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.


    124-525(3)    
    If the company is incorporated under the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006 , subsection (2) applies in relation to rights as a *member of the company in the same way as that subsection applies to *shares in a company.

    Note:

    This may allow you to choose to obtain a roll-over. The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A and section 124-535 .


    Special consequences of some roll-overs

    SECTION 124-530   Shares in company replacing pre-CGT and post-CGT mix of interest and rights in body  

    124-530(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you choose to obtain a roll-over under section 124-520 or 124-525 relating to *shares you have in the company on account of the following (your original assets ):


    (i) your interest in the body mentioned in that section;

    (ii) your other rights relating to the body mentioned in that section; and


    (b) you *acquired some of your original assets before 20 September 1985 and the rest of them on or after that day.

    124-530(2)    
    You are taken to have *acquired so many of the *shares before 20 September 1985 as is reasonable, having regard to:


    (a) the number and *market value of your original assets; and


    (b) the number and market value of the shares.

    124-530(3)    
    The first element of the *cost base of each of the *shares not taken by subsection (2) to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 (your post-CGT shares ) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the cost bases of your original assets that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (b) the number and *market value of your post-CGT shares.

    124-530(4)    
    The reduced cost base of each of your post-CGT shares is worked out similarly.

    124-530(5)    
    This section has effect despite subsections 124-15(5) and (6) .


    SECTION 124-535   Rights as member of Indigenous corporation replacing pre-CGT and post-CGT mix of interest and rights in body  

    124-535(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you choose to obtain a roll-over under section 124-520 or 124-525 relating to rights (the replacement rights ) you have as a *member of a company incorporated under the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006 on account of the following (your original assets ):


    (i) your interest in the body mentioned in that section;

    (ii) your other rights relating to the body mentioned in that section; and


    (b) you *acquired any of your original assets before 20 September 1985.

    124-535(2)    
    You are taken to have *acquired the replacement rights before 20 September 1985.

    124-535(3)    
    This section has effect despite subsection 124-15(5) .


    Subdivision 124-J - Crown leases  

    SECTION 124-570   What this Subdivision is about  

    This Subdivision sets out the situations in which the holder of a Crown lease over land obtains a replacement asset roll-over when the lease is, among other things, renewed, extended or converted to an estate in fee simple.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 124-575   Extension or renewal of Crown lease  

    124-575(1)    
    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) you hold one or more *CGT assets that are *Crown leases over land (the original right ); and


    (b) the original right expires or you surrender it; and


    (c) you are granted one or more new Crown leases over land or one or more estates in fee simple in land, or both (the new right ); and


    (d) the new right relates to the same land as the original right.

    Note 1:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A . They might be modified: see section 124-600 .

    Note 2:

    If there has been a capital improvement to the Crown lease: see section 108-75 .


    124-575(2)    
    The new right must have been granted in one of these ways:


    (a) by renewing or extending the term of the original right where the renewal or extension is mainly due to your having held the original right; or


    (b) by changing the purpose for which the land to which the original right related can be used; or


    (c) by converting the original right to a *Crown lease in perpetuity; or


    (d) by converting the original right to an estate in fee simple; or


    (e) by consolidating, or consolidating and dividing, the original right; or


    (f) by subdividing the original right; or


    (g) by excising or relinquishing a part of the land to which the original right related; or


    (h) by expanding the area of that land.


    SECTION 124-580  

    124-580   Meaning of Crown lease  
    A Crown lease is:


    (a) a lease of land granted by the Crown under an *Australian law (other than the common law); or


    (b) a similar lease granted under a *foreign law.

    SECTION 124-585   Original right differs in area from new right  

    124-585(1)    
    Even if the new right relates to different land to that to which the original right related, this Subdivision applies as if it relates to the same land in these cases:


    (a) the difference in area is not significant;


    (b) the difference in *market value is not significant;


    (c) the new right was granted to correct errors in or omissions from the original right;


    (d) the new right relates to a significantly different area of land but you had made reasonable efforts to ensure that the area was the same;


    (e) it is otherwise reasonable for this Subdivision to apply in that way.

    124-585(2)    
    However, the rule in subsection (1) does not apply if section 124-590 applies.


    SECTION 124-590   Part of original right excised  

    124-590(1)    
    There is a partial roll-over if you *acquired the original right on or after 20 September 1985 and:


    (a) the land to which the new right relates is different in area to the land the subject of the original right because a part (the excised part ) of the land to which the original right related was excised or you relinquished it; and


    (b) you received a payment for the expiry or surrender of the original right.

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    Note:

    Section 124-600 sets out the effect on your cost base.


    124-590(2)    
    There is no roll-over for the excised part. The *cost base of the excised part is so much of the *cost base of the relevant *Crown lease as is attributable to the excised part.

    Its *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Note:

    You may make a capital gain or loss on the excised part because of CGT event C2.


    SECTION 124-595   Treating parts of new right as separate assets  

    124-595(1)    
    Each part of a *Crown lease or an estate in fee simple that is part of the new right is taken to be a separate *CGT asset to the extent that it relates to:


    (a) land to which a Crown lease (that was part of the original right) related where you *acquired the lease before 20 September 1985; and


    (b) land to which a Crown lease (that was part of the original right) related where you acquired the lease on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (c) other land.

    124-595(2)    
    You are taken to have *acquired each asset that is a separate *CGT asset because of paragraph (1)(a) before 20 September 1985.


    SECTION 124-600   What is the roll-over?  

    124-600(1)    
    The roll-over is mainly as specified in Subdivision 124-A .

    124-600(2)    
    However, you work out the *cost base and *reduced cost base of *CGT assets (that you are not taken to have *acquired before 20 September 1985) and that are part of the new right a bit differently where section 124-590 or 124-595 applies.

    124-600(3)    


    The first element of your *cost base for each of those assets is:


    CB of post-CGT original right × Market value of separate asset
    Market value of all new assets

    where:

    CB of post-CGT original right
    is the sum of the *cost bases of the *Crown leases (that were part of the original right) and that you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 (just before the original right expired or was surrendered) reduced, if there is an excised part, by so much of those cost bases as is attributable to the excised part.

    market value of all new assets
    is the *market value of all *CGT assets (that you are not taken to have *acquired before 20 September 1985) that are part of the new right just after you acquired them.

    market value of separate asset
    is the *market value of the particular asset just after you *acquired it.


    124-600(4)    
    The first element of the *reduced cost base of each of those assets is worked out similarly.


    SECTION 124-605   Change of lessor  

    124-605(1)    
    You treat a lease of land (whether or not it is a *Crown lease) granted to you (the fresh lease ) as being a renewal of your original right if:


    (a) after the grant of the original right, the land (the original land ) to which it related became vested in an *Australian government agency (other than the one that granted the original right); and


    (b) the second agency granted you the fresh lease over:


    (i) the original land; or

    (ii) the original land less an excised area; or

    (iii) the original land and other land; and


    (c) the fresh lease was granted under an *Australian law (other than the common law).

    124-605(2)    
    You do this even if there is a period between the end of the original right and the grant of the fresh lease if you continued to occupy the original land during that period under a permission, licence or authority granted by the second agency.


    Subdivision 124-K - Depreciating assets  

    SECTION 124-655  

    124-655   Roll-over for depreciating assets  


    There is a roll-over for a *depreciating asset if:


    (a) the asset is attached to land you hold under a *quasi-ownership right granted by an *exempt Australian government agency or an *exempt foreign government agency; and


    (b) you *hold the asset because of section 40-40 ; and


    (c) the quasi-ownership right expires or is terminated or you surrender it; and


    (d) you are granted a new quasi-ownership right over the land or an estate in fee simple in the land; and


    (e) there is no roll-over for you under Subdivision 124-J (about Crown leases) or Subdivision 124-L (about prospecting and mining entitlements).

    Note 1:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A .

    Note 2:

    This section provides a roll-over for a depreciating asset in the limited circumstances where Subdivision 124-J cannot because a quasi-ownership right over land covers situations that a Crown lease does not (for example, an easement over land).

    Note 3:

    If there has been a capital improvement to the quasi-ownership right: see section 108-75 .

    SECTION 124-660  

    124-660   Right granted to associate  
    If the *quasi-ownership right or estate in fee simple is instead granted to an *associate or an *associated government entity of yours:


    (a) your *reduced cost base of the *depreciating asset is reduced by the *adjustable value of the asset just before the original quasi-ownership right expired or was surrendered or terminated; and


    (b) there is no roll-over.

    Subdivision 124-L - Prospecting and mining entitlements  

    SECTION 124-700   What this Subdivision is about  

    This Subdivision sets out the situations in which there is a roll-over if a prospecting or mining entitlement expires or is surrendered and it is replaced by a new one.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 124-705   Extension or renewal of prospecting or mining entitlement  

    124-705(1)    
    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) you hold one or more *CGT assets that are *prospecting entitlements or *mining entitlements (the original entitlement ); and


    (b) the original entitlement expires or you surrender it; and


    (c) you are granted one or more new prospecting entitlements or mining entitlements (the new entitlement ); and


    (d) the new entitlement relates to the same land as the original entitlement.

    Note 1:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A . They might be modified: see section 124-730 .

    Note 2:

    If there has been a capital improvement to the entitlement: see section 108-75 .


    124-705(2)    
    The new entitlement must have been granted in one of these ways:


    (a) by renewing or extending the term of the original entitlement where the renewal or extension is mainly due to your having held the original entitlement; or


    (b) by consolidating, or consolidating and dividing, the original entitlement; or


    (c) by subdividing the original entitlement; or


    (d) by converting a *prospecting entitlement to a *mining entitlement, or a mining entitlement to a prospecting entitlement; or


    (e) by excising or relinquishing a part of the land to which the original entitlement related; or


    (f) by expanding the area of that land.


    SECTION 124-710   Meaning of prospecting entitlement and mining entitlement  

    124-710(1)    
    A prospecting entitlement is:


    (a) an authority, licence, permit or entitlement under an *Australian law or *foreign law to prospect or explore for *minerals in an area; or


    (aa) an authority, licence, permit or entitlement under an Australian law to prospect or explore for *geothermal energy resources in an area; or


    (b) a lease of land that allows the lessee to prospect or explore for minerals or geothermal energy resources on the land; or


    (c) an interest in a thing referred to in paragraph (a), (aa) or (b).


    124-710(2)    
    A mining entitlement is:


    (a) an authority, licence, permit or entitlement under an *Australian law or *foreign law to mine for *minerals in an area; or


    (aa) an authority, licence, permit or entitlement under an Australian law to extract energy from *geothermal energy resources in an area; or


    (b) a lease of land that allows the lessee to mine for minerals, or extract energy from geothermal energy resources, on the land; or


    (c) an interest in a thing referred to in paragraph (a), (aa) or (b).


    SECTION 124-715   Original entitlement differs in area from new entitlement  

    124-715(1)    
    Even if the new entitlement relates to different land to that to which the original entitlement related, this Subdivision applies as if it relates to the same land in these cases:


    (a) the difference in area is not significant;


    (b) the difference in *market value is not significant;


    (c) the new entitlement was granted to correct errors in or omissions from the original entitlement;


    (d) it is otherwise reasonable for this Subdivision to apply in that way.

    124-715(2)    
    However, the rule in subsection (1) does not apply if section 124-720 applies.


    SECTION 124-720   Part of original entitlement excised  

    124-720(1)    
    There is partial roll-over if you *acquired the original entitlement on or after 20 September 1985 and:


    (a) the land to which the new entitlement relates is different in area to the land the subject of the original entitlement because a part (the excised part ) of the land to which the original entitlement related was excised or you relinquished it; and


    (b) you received a payment for the expiry or surrender of the original entitlement.

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    Note:

    Section 124-730 sets out the effect on your cost base.


    124-720(2)    
    There is no roll-over for the excised part. The *cost base of the excised part is so much of the *cost base of the original entitlement as is attributable to the excised part.

    Its *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Note:

    You may make a capital gain or loss on the excised part because of CGT event C2.


    SECTION 124-725   Treating parts of new entitlement as separate assets  

    124-725(1)    
    Each part of a *prospecting entitlement or *mining entitlement that is part of the new entitlement is taken to be a separate *CGT asset to the extent that it relates to:


    (a) land to which a prospecting entitlement or mining entitlement (that was part of the original entitlement) related where you *acquired the entitlement before 20 September 1985; and


    (b) land to which a prospecting entitlement or mining entitlement (that was part of the original entitlement) related where you acquired the entitlement on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (c) other land.

    124-725(2)    
    You are taken to have *acquired each asset that is a separate *CGT asset because of paragraph (1)(a) before 20 September 1985.


    SECTION 124-730   What is the roll-over?  

    124-730(1)    
    The roll-over is mainly as specified in Subdivision 124-A .

    124-730(2)    
    However, you work out the *cost base and *reduced cost base of *CGT assets (that you arenot taken to have *acquired before 20 September 1985) and that are part of the new entitlement a bit differently where section 124-720 or 124-725 applies.

    124-730(3)    


    The first element of your *cost base for each of those assets is:


    CB of post-CGT original entitlement × Market value of separate asset
    Market value of all new assets

    where:

    CB of post-CGT original entitlement
    is the sum of the *cost bases of the prospecting entitlements or mining entitlements (that were part of the original entitlement) and that you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 (just before the original entitlement expired or was surrendered) reduced, if there is an excised part, by so much of those cost bases as is attributable to the excised part.

    market value of all new assets
    is the *market value of all *CGT assets (that you are not taken to have *acquired before 20 September 1985) that are part of the new entitlement just after you acquired them.

    market value of separate asset
    is the *market value of the particular asset just after you *acquired it.


    124-730(4)    
    The first element of the *reduced cost base of each of those assets is worked out similarly.


    Subdivision 124-M - Scrip for scrip roll-over  

    SECTION 124-775   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision allows you to choose a roll-over where post-CGT shares or trust interests you own are replaced with other shares or trust interests, for example, where there is a company takeover.

    You can only choose the roll-over if you would have made a capital gain from the exchange.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 124-780   Replacement of shares  

    124-780(1)    


    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) an entity (the original interest holder ) exchanges:


    (i) a *share (the entity ' s original interest ) in a company (the original entity ) for a share (the holder ' s replacement interest ) in another company; or

    (ii) an option, right or similar interest (also the holder ' s original interest ) issued by the original entity that gives the holder an entitlement to acquire a share in the original entity for a similar interest (also the holder ' s replacement interest ) in another company; and


    (b) the exchange is in consequence of a single *arrangement that satisfies subsection (2) or (2A); and


    (c) the conditions in subsection (3) are satisfied; and


    (d) if subsection (4) applies, the conditions in subsection (5) are satisfied.

    Note 1:

    There are some exceptions: see section 124-795 .

    Note 2:

    The original interest holder can obtain only a partial roll-over if the capital proceeds for its original interest include something other than its replacement interest: see section 124-790 .

    Note 3:

    A trustee who gets a roll-over under this Subdivision for an original interest consisting of shares issued as part of a demutualisation may be eligible for a further roll-over under Subdivision 126-E when a beneficiary becomes absolutely entitled to the replacement shares.

    EXAMPLES
    Example 1:

    You can get a roll-over if you exchange your shares in one entity for shares in another entity or if you exchange options in one entity for options in another entity. You cannot get a roll-over if you exchange options for shares.

    Example 2:

    Examples of arrangements that could be involved include:

  • • a company takeover, whether or not it is regulated by the Corporations Act 2001 , resulting in a company owning 80% or more of another company ' s shares.
  • • a scheme of arrangement governed by the Corporations Act 2001 that involves a cancellation of some interests in an original entity resulting in another entity owning 80% or more of the interests in the original entity.


  • Conditions for arrangement

    124-780(2)    
    The *arrangement must:


    (a) result in:


    (i) a company (the acquiring entity ) that is not a member of a *wholly-owned group becoming the owner of 80% or more of the *voting shares in the original entity; or

    (ii) a company (also an acquiring entity ) that is a member of such a group increasing the percentage of voting shares that it owns in the original entity, and that company or members of the group becoming the owner of 80% or more of those shares; and


    (b) be one in which at least all owners of *voting shares in the original entity (except a company referred to in paragraph (a)) could participate; and


    (c) be one in which participation was available on substantially the same terms for all of the owners of interests of a particular type in the original entity.

    Note 1:

    The 80% or more requirement is satisfied if the acquiring entity ends up owning at least 80% of the voting shares in the original entity. This may include shares held before the arrangement started.

    Note 2:

    Participation will be on substantially the same terms if, for example, matters such as those referred to in subsections 619(2) and (3) of the Corporations Act 2001 affect the capital proceeds that each participant can receive.



    Conditions for arrangement - takeover bids and arrangements

    124-780(2A)    


    The *arrangement must:


    (a) satisfy paragraph (2)(a); and


    (b) be, be part of, or include one or more of the following:


    (i) a takeover bid (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ) for the original interests by the acquiring entity that is not carried out in contravention of the provisions mentioned in paragraphs 612(a) to (g) of that Act;
    Note:

    For exemption and modification of provisions by ASIC (and review by the takeovers panel) see Part 6.10 of the Corporations Act 2001 . For Court declarations excusing contraventions see section 1325D of that Act.


    (ii) a compromise or arrangement entered into by the original entity under Part 5.1 of the Corporations Act 2001 , approved by order of a court made for the purposes of paragraph 411(4)(b) of that Act.


    Conditions for roll-over

    124-780(3)    
    The conditions are:


    (a) the original interest holder *acquired its original interest on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (b) apart from the roll-over, it would make a *capital gain from a *CGT event happening in relation to its original interest; and


    (c) its replacement interest is in a company (the replacement entity ) that is:


    (i) the company referred to in subparagraph (2)(a)(i); or

    (ii) in any other case - the *ultimate holding company of the *wholly-owned group; and


    (d) the original interest holder chooses to obtain the roll-over or, if section 124-782 applies to it for the *arrangement, it and the replacement entity jointly choose to obtain the roll-over; and


    (e) if that section applies, the original interest holder informs the replacement entity in writing of the *cost base of its original interest worked out just before a CGT event happened in relation to it; and


    (f) if an acquiring entity is a member of a wholly-owned group - no member of the group issues equity (other than a replacement interest), or owes new debt, under the arrangement:


    (i) to an entity that is not a member of the group; and

    (ii) in relation to the issuing of the replacement interest.
    Note:

    If the original interest holder also exchanges a CGT asset that it acquired before 20 September 1985, the cost base of any interest received in exchange for it is worked out under section 124-800 .



    Further roll-over conditions in certain cases

    124-780(4)    
    The conditions specified in subsection (5) must be satisfied if the original interest holder and an acquiring entity did not deal with each other at *arm ' s length and:


    (a) neither the original entity nor the replacement entity had at least 300 *members just before the *arrangement started; or


    (b) the original interest holder, the original entity and an acquiring entity were all members of the same *linked group just before that time.

    Note:

    There are some cases where a company will not be regarded as having 300 members: see section 124-810 .


    124-780(5)    
    The conditions are:


    (a) the *market value of the original interest holder ' s *capital proceeds for the exchange is at least substantially the same as the market value of its original interest; and


    (b) its replacement interest carries the same kind of rights and obligations as those attached to its original interest.

    CUFS

    124-780(6)    
    This section applies to the holder of a Chess Unit of Foreign Security as if the holder held the underlying interests that the unit represents.

    Note:

    A Chess Unit of Foreign Security is an interest, traded on the stock market operated by ASX Limited, in a foreign share, unit or interest.


    124-780(7)    
    A company is the ultimate holding company of a *wholly-owned group if it is not a *100% subsidiary of another company in the group.

    SECTION 124-781   Replacement of trust interests  

    124-781(1)    
    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) an entity (also the original interest holder ) exchanges:


    (i) a unit or other interest (also the holder ' s original interest ) in a trust (also the original entity ) for a unit or other interest (also the holder ' s replacement interest ) in another trust (also the acquiring entity and the replacement entity ); or

    (ii) an option, right or similar interest (also the holder ' s original interest ) issued by the original entity that gives the holder an entitlement to acquire a unit or other interest in the original entity for a similar interest (also the holder ' s replacement interest ) in another trust (also the acquiring entity and the replacement entity ); and


    (b) entities have *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the original entity and the acquiring entity; and


    (c) the exchange is in consequence of an *arrangement that satisfies subsection (2) or (2A); and


    (d) the conditions in subsections (3) and (4) are satisfied.

    Note 1:

    There are some exceptions: see section 124-795 .

    Note 2:

    The original interest holder can obtain only a partial roll-over if the capital proceeds for its original interest include something other than its replacement interest: see section 124-790 .



    Conditions for arrangement

    124-781(2)    
    The *arrangement must:


    (a) result in the acquiring entity owning 80% or more of the *trust voting interests in the original entity or, if there are none, 80% or more of the units or other interests in the original entity; and


    (b) be one in which at least all owners of trust voting interests (or of units or other interests) in the original entity (except the acquiring entity) could participate; and


    (c) be one in which participation was available on substantially the same terms for all of the owners of interests or units of a particular type in the original entity.

    Conditions for arrangement - takeover bids

    124-781(2A)    


    The *arrangement must:


    (a) satisfy paragraph (2)(a); and


    (b) be, be part of, or include a takeover bid (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ) for the original interests by the acquiring entity that is not carried out in contravention of the provisions mentioned in paragraphs 612(a) to (g) of that Act.

    Note:

    For exemption and modification of provisions by ASIC (and review by the takeovers panel) see Part 6.10 of the Corporations Act 2001 . For Court declarations excusing contraventions see section 1325D of that Act.



    Conditions for roll-over

    124-781(3)    
    The conditions are:


    (a) the original interest holder *acquired its original interest on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (b) apart from the roll-over, it would make a *capital gain from a *CGT event happening in relation to its original interest; and


    (c) it chooses to obtain the roll-over or, if section 124-782 applies to it for the *arrangement, it and the trustee of the acquiring entity jointly choose to obtain the roll-over; and


    (d) if that section applies to it, it informs that trustee in writing of the *cost base of its original interest as at the time just before a CGT event happened in relation to it.

    Note:

    If the original interest holder also exchanges a CGT asset that it acquired before 20 September 1985, the cost base of any interest received in exchange for it is worked out under section 124-800 .



    Further roll-over conditions in certain cases

    124-781(4)    
    These conditions must be satisfied if the original interest holder and the trustee of the acquiring entity did not deal with each other at *arm ' s length and neither the original entity nor the acquiring entity had at least 300 beneficiaries just before the *arrangement started:


    (a) the *market value of the original interest holder ' s *capital proceeds for the exchange is at least substantially the same as the market value of its original interest; and


    (b) its replacement interest carries the same kind of rights and obligations as those attached to its original interest.

    Note:

    There are some cases where a trust will not be regarded as having 300 beneficiaries: see section 124-810 .



    CUFS

    124-781(5)    
    This section applies to the holder of a Chess Unit of Foreign Security as if the holder held the underlying interests that the unit represents.

    Note:

    A Chess Unit of Foreign Security is an interest, traded on the stock market operated by ASX Limited, in a foreign share, unit or interest.



    Meaning of trust voting interest

    124-781(6)    
    A trust voting interest in a trust is an interest in the trust that confers rights of the same or a similar kind as the rights conferred by a *voting share in a company.

    SECTION 124-782   Transfer or allocation of cost base of shares acquired by acquiring entity etc.  


    Transfer of cost base

    124-782(1)    
    The *cost base of an original interest *acquired by an acquiring entity under the *arrangement from an original interest holder becomes the first element of the cost base and *reduced cost base of the acquiring entity for the interest if:


    (a) the original interest holder obtains a roll-over; and


    (b) the holder is a *significant stakeholder or a *common stakeholder for the arrangement.

    Note 1:

    For other interests, for example, interests for which the roll-over is not chosen, the cost base will be worked out under the ordinary cost base rules in Divisions 110 and 112 .

    Note 2:

    There is a special rule to determine the cost base of equity or debt given to a member of an acquiring wholly-owned group by another member of the group under an arrangement: see section 124-784 .



    Allocation of cost base in cancellation case

    124-782(2)    
    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of any interests (the new interests ) issued by the original entity to an acquiring entity under the *arrangement is worked out under subsection (3) if:


    (a) original interests of an original interest holder are cancelled under the arrangement; and


    (b) the holder obtains a roll-over for the cancellation; and


    (c) the holder is a *significant stakeholder or a *common stakeholder for the arrangement.

    124-782(3)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the new interests of an acquiring entity is that part of the cost base of the cancelled interests as can be reasonably allocated to the new interests, having regard to:


    (a) the nature of the *arrangement; and


    (b) the number, type and relative *market values of the cancelled interests and the new interests; and


    (c) any other relevant matters.

    Example:

    Robert Co has 3 shareholders: Antill Co with 300 shares, Rachael Co 400 shares and Margaret Co 300 shares. The cost base of each share is $1 and market value is $2. Margaret Co is owned by two shareholders, John and Paul, who each have 50 shares. The market value of each share is $20.

    Under an arrangement, Robert Co cancels the shares of Antill Co and Rachael Co. They receive 30 and 40 shares respectively in Margaret Co, which becomes the sole shareholder in Robert Co. The market value of Antill Co ' s and Rachael Co ' s shares in Margaret Co is equivalent to the market value of their cancelled shares in Robert Co.

    Robert Co also issues 700 shares to Margaret Co, reflecting the $1,400 total market value of the shares issued by Margaret Co to Antill Co and Rachael Co. Before and after the arrangement, Margaret Co ' s shares in Robert Co were worth $2 each.

    It is necessary to reasonably allocate the cost bases of the cancelled shares (700 × $1) to the 700 shares issued by Robert Co to Margaret Co. In this case, an allocation of $1 per share would be reasonable.

    Note:

    If no new shares are issued by Robert Co, the cost base of the original shares that Margaret Co holds would not be adjusted.


    124-782(4)    


    The amount allocated to a new interest under subsection (3) must not be more than its *market value just after the *arrangement was completed.

    SECTION 124-783   Meaning of significant stakeholder , common stakeholder , significant stake and common stake  


    Significant stakeholder

    124-783(1)    
    An original interest holder is a significant stakeholder for an *arrangement if it had:


    (a) a *significant stake in the original entity just before the arrangement started; and


    (b) a significant stake in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed.

    124-783(2)    
    Also, if an original interest holder is an acquiring entity, any other original interest holder is a significant stakeholder for an *arrangement if it:


    (a) had a *significant stake in the original entity just before the *arrangement started; and


    (b) is an *associate of the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed.

    Common stakeholder

    124-783(3)    
    An original interest holder is a common stakeholder for an *arrangement if it had:


    (a) a *common stake in the original entity just before the arrangement started; and


    (b) a common stake in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed.

    124-783(4)    
    If an acquiring entity for an *arrangement is an original interest holder, each other original interest holder that has a replacement interest is a common stakeholder for the arrangement.

    124-783(5)    
    No original interest holder is a common stakeholder for an *arrangement if either the original entity or the replacement entity had at least 300 *members (for a company) or 300 beneficiaries (for a trust) just before the arrangement started.

    Significant stake

    124-783(6)    
    An entity has a significant stake in a company at a time if the entity, or the entity and the entity ' s *associates between them:


    (a) have at that time *shares carrying 30% or more of the voting rights in the company; or


    (b) have at that time the right to receive 30% or more of any *dividends that the company may pay; or


    (c) have at that time the right to receive 30% or more of any distribution of capital of the company.

    Example:

    There are 4 shareholders in YZT Company: Sonja has 60%, Mario has 20%, Peter has 10% and Dave has 10%.

    Sonja, Mario and Peter are associates. They each have a significant stake in YZT because, on an associate inclusive basis, they each have a 90% stake in YZT. Dave does not have a significant stake because his total stake, on an associate inclusive basis, is 10%.


    124-783(7)    


    An entity has a significant stake in a trust at a time if the entity, or the entity and the entity ' s *associates between them, had at that time the right to receive 30% or more of any distribution to beneficiaries of the trust of income or capital of the trust.

    124-783(8)    
    No original interest holder has a significant stake in a company that has at least 300 *members or a trust that has at least 300 beneficiaries if it is reasonable for the company or the trustee of the trust to conclude that this is the case on the information available to it.

    Note:

    There are some cases where a company or trust will not be regarded as having 300 members or beneficiaries: see section 124-810 .



    Common stake

    124-783(9)    
    If the original entity and the replacement entity are companies, an entity, or 2 or more entities, have a common stake in the original entity just before the *arrangement started and in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed if the entity or entities, and their *associates, between them:


    (a) had 80% or more of:


    (i) the voting rights in the original entity just before the arrangement started; and

    (ii) the voting rights in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed; or


    (b) had the right to receive 80% or more of:


    (i) any *dividends that the original entity may pay just before the arrangement started; and

    (ii) any dividends that the replacement entity may pay just after the arrangement was completed; or


    (c) had the right to receive 80% or more of:


    (i) any distribution of capital of the original entity just before the arrangement started; and

    (ii) any distribution of capital of the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed.

    124-783(10)    
    If the original entity and the replacement entity are trusts, an entity, or 2 or more entities, have a common stake in the original entity just before the *arrangement started and in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed if the entity or entities, and their *associates, between them:


    (a) had, just before the arrangement started, the right to receive 80% or more of any distribution to beneficiaries of the original entity of income or capital of the original entity; and


    (b) had, just after the arrangement was completed, the right to receive 80% or more of any distribution to beneficiaries of the replacement entity of income or capital of that entity.


    SECTION 124-783A   Rights that affect stakes  

    124-783A(1)    
    An entity has a significant stake in another entity if:


    (a) the first entity has one or more *stake options in the other entity; and


    (b) the first entity would have such a stake (under section 124-783 ) if the first entity acquired *stake interests in the other entity under any of those stake options.

    Note:

    Paragraph (b) is satisfied if there are any circumstances (e.g. the first entity exercises some but not all of the stake options) in which the first entity would have a significant stake in the other entity, even if in other circumstances the first entity would not have such a stake.


    124-783A(2)    
    An entity, or 2 or more entities, have a common stake in the original entity just before the *arrangement started and in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed if:


    (a) the entities:


    (i) had one or more *stake options in the original entity before the arrangement started; or

    (ii) have one or more stake options in the replacement entity; and


    (b) the entities would have such stakes (under section 124-783 ) if:


    (i) the entities had acquired *stake interests in the original entity under any of the stake options mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i); or

    (ii) the entities acquired stake interests in the replacement entity under some or all of the stake options mentioned in subparagraph (a)(ii).

    124-783A(3)    
    Something is a stake option an entity has in another entity if it gives the first entity, or its *associates, a right to acquire the following ( stake interests ):


    (a) if the other entity is a company:


    (i) voting rights in the company; or

    (ii) the right to receive any part of any *dividends that the company may pay; or

    (iii) the right to receive any part of any distribution of capital of the company;


    (b) if the other entity is a trust - the right to receive any part of any distribution to beneficiaries of the trust of income or capital of the trust;

    and the acquisition could occur before the end of 5 years after the *arrangement was completed.

    Example 1:

    An option.

    Example 2:

    A share that gives a voting right that is temporarily supressed.


    124-783A(4)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), treat the reference in subparagraph (3)(a)(i) to voting rights as being a reference to *shares carrying voting rights.

    124-783A(5)    
    This section does not limit subsections 124-783(6) to (10) .

    SECTION 124-784   Cost base of equity or debt given within acquiring group  


    Purpose

    124-784(1)    
    This section allocates an appropriate *cost base to equity issued, or new debt owed, under the *arrangement, by a member of a *wholly-owned group to another member (the recipient ) of the group, if:


    (a) the acquiring entity is a member of the group; and


    (b) the cost base of an original interest was transferred or allocated under section 124-782 because the original interest holder is a *significant stakeholder or a *common stakeholder for the arrangement.

    Allocation of cost base

    124-784(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base of the equity or debt for the recipient is that part of the cost base of the original interest transferred or allocated under section 124-782 as:


    (a) may be reasonably allocated to the equity or debt; and


    (b) is not more than the *market value of the equity or debt just after the *arrangement was completed.


    SECTION 124-784A   When arrangement is a restructure  

    124-784A(1)    
    This section applies in relation to a single *arrangement if:


    (a) the replacement entity for the arrangement knows, or could reasonably be expected to know:


    (i) that a roll-over under section 124-780 or 124-781 has been, or will be, obtained in relation to the arrangement; and

    (ii) that there is a *common stakeholder for the arrangement (disregarding subsections 124-783(4) and (5) ); and


    (b) subsection (2) is satisfied for the arrangement.

    Note:

    If this section applies, the first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of interests in the original entity acquired under the arrangement is worked out under section 124-784B .


    124-784A(2)    


    This subsection is satisfied for the *arrangement if the result of step 2 is more than 80% of the result of step 3. Method statement

    Step 1.

    Add up the *market value just after the *arrangement was completed (the completion time ) of all of the replacement interests issued by the replacement entity under the arrangement in exchange for the following interests (the qualifying interests ):

  • (a) original interests in the original entity;
  • (b) any interests issued by the original entity to an acquiring entity under the arrangement in respect of other original interests in the original entity cancelled under the arrangement.

  • Step 2.

    Add to the result of step 1 the *market value at the completion time of all of the replacement interests issued by the replacement entity under any earlier arrangement for which this section applied in exchange for qualifying interests in the original entity.


    Step 3.

    Add up the *market value at the completion time of all of the:

  • (a) if the replacement entity is a company - *shares *on issue by the replacement entity; and
  • (b) if the replacement entity is a company - options, rights and similar interests issued by the replacement entity that give the holder an entitlement to acquire a share in the replacement entity at or after the completion time; and
  • (c) if the replacement entity is a trust - units or other interests in the replacement entity; and
  • (d) if the replacement entity is a trust - options, rights or similar interests issued by the replacement entity that gives the holder an entitlement to acquire a unit or other interest in the replacement entity at or after the completion time.


  • Application if an entity is listed

    124-784A(3)    
    For the purposes of:


    (a) subsection (2); and


    (b) step 5 of the method statement in subsection 124-784B(2) ;

    if interests in an entity are listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange at the completion time, then the replacement entity may choose that the *market value at that time of an interest in the first-mentioned entity is taken to be the *officially quoted price of the interest at that time.



    Application if more than one original entity

    124-784A(4)    
    If qualifying interests in more than one original entity are *acquired under the *arrangement, then, for the purposes of subsections (1) and (2):


    (a) those interests of each of those original entities are taken to have been acquired under separate arrangements; and


    (b) those separate arrangements are taken to have happened in the same order as the acquisitions.

    124-784A(5)    
    If qualifying interests in more than one original entity:


    (a) would be taken by subsection (4) to have been *acquired under separate *arrangements happening at the same time; or


    (b) are acquired under separate arrangements that commence at the same time;

    then, for the purposes of subsections (1) and (2), the replacement entity must choose the order in which those separate arrangements are to have happened.



    Meaning of officially quoted price

    124-784A(6)    
    An interest in an entity has an officially quoted price at a particular time if, during the one week period starting on the day in which that time occurred, there was at least one transaction on the relevant stock exchange in interests of that class. That price is the weighted average of the prices at which those interests were traded on that stock exchange during that period.

    124-784A(7)    
    For the purposes of subsection (6), if an interest is quoted on 2 or more *approved stock exchanges on that day, the officially quoted price of the interest is determined under subsection (6) in respect of whichever of those the entity chooses.

    SECTION 124-784B   What is the cost base and reduced cost base when arrangement is a restructure?  

    124-784B(1)    
    This section applies in relation to each qualifying interest in the original entity:


    (a) *acquired by an acquiring entity under an *arrangement to which section 124-784A applies; and


    (b) for which the first element of the *cost base of the acquiring entity is not worked out under section 124-782 .

    Note:

    Section 124-782 applies when an original interest holder is a significant stakeholder or a common stakeholder.



    First element of cost base - qualifying interests acquired in exchange for replacement interests only

    124-784B(2)    


    The first element of the *cost base of the acquiring entity for the qualifying interest in the original entity is worked out as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Add up:

  • (a) the *market value, at the completion time, of the original entity's *pre-CGT assets (except *trading stock); and
  • (b) the *cost bases, at the completion time, of the original entity's *post-CGT assets (except trading stock); and
  • (c) for the original entity's *CGT assets (except trading stock) that had no cost base - the maximum amount of consideration the original entity would need to receive if it were to dispose, at the completion time, of those assets without an amount being assessable income of, or deductible to, the original entity; and
  • (d) the amount worked out under steps 2 and 3.

  • Step 2.

    For the original entity's *trading stock, add up:

  • (a) the *value of the trading stock at the start of the income year containing the completion time; and
  • (b) for *live stock acquired by natural increase during that income year but before the completion time - the *cost of that live stock; and
  • (c) the amount of any outgoing incurred in connection with acquiring an item of trading stock during that income year but before the completion time (except live stock acquired by natural increase); and
  • (d) the amount of any outgoings forming part of the cost of the trading stock incurred by the entity during its current holding of the trading stock but before the completion time.

  • Step 3.

    For any asset of the original entity not covered by steps 1 and 2, work out the amount that would be the asset's *cost base at the completion time if it were a *CGT asset.


    Step 4.

    Subtract from the result of step 1 the original entity's liabilities (if any) at the completion time in respect of those assets.


    Step 5.

    If there is one class of *membership interests in the original entity, divide the result of step 4 by the total number of those membership interests at the completion time.

    If there are 2 or more classes of membership interests in the original entity, allocate a portion of the result of step 4 to each class in proportion to the *market value of all the membership interests in that class and divide that result by the total number of membership interests in that class at the completion time.

    Note 1:

    For the purposes of this subsection, Division 701 (Core rules for consolidated groups) is disregarded for an original entity that becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group under the arrangement (see paragraph 715-910(1)(a) ).

    Note 2:

    If the original entity is the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group, then subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) and section 701-5 (the entry history rule) apply in relation to that group when working out steps 1 and 2 (see subsection 715-910(2) ).

    Note 3:

    For step 5, the replacement entity may choose to use the officially quoted price of the qualifying interests as their market value (see subsection 124-784A(3) ).



    First element of cost base - interests acquired in exchange for replacement interests and cash etc.

    124-784B(3)    
    However, if the qualifying interest was acquired under the *arrangement partly in exchange for one or more replacement interests and partly for something else, subsection (2) applies only for working out the first element of that part of the *cost base of the qualifying interest that is attributable to the replacement interests.

    Note 1:

    This means that the acquiring entity will have to apportion the cost base amount worked out under subsection (2) according to the relative values of the replacement interests and the other component.

    Note 2:

    The first element of that part of the cost base, and reduced cost base, of the qualifying interest that is attributable to cash etc. is worked out using the general rules about cost base.



    Liabilities

    124-784B(4)    
    For the purposes of step 4 of subsection (2), a liability of the original entity that is not a liability in respect of a specific asset or assets of the entity is taken to be a liability in respect of all the assets of the entity.

    124-784B(5)    
    If a liability is in respect of 2 or more assets, the proportion of the liability that is in respect of any one of those assets is equal to:


    The *market value of the asset
    The total of the *market values
    of all the assets that the
    liability is in respect of



    First element of reduced cost base

    124-784B(6)    
    The first element of the *reduced cost base of the acquiring entity for the qualifying interest in the original entity is worked out similarly.

    Rights and options to acquire membership interests

    124-784B(7)    
    For the purposes of step 5 of subsection (2), if at the completion time a person holds an option, right or similar interest (including a contingent option, right or interest), created or issued by the original entity, to acquire a *membership interest in the original entity, that option, right or interest is treated as if it were a membership interest in the original entity.

    SECTION 124-784C   Cost base of equity or debt given within acquiring group  


    Purpose

    124-784C(1)    
    This section allocates an appropriate *cost base to equity issued, or new debt owed, under the *arrangement by a member of a *wholly-owned group to another member (the holder ) of the group, if:


    (a) an acquiring entity is a member of the group; and


    (b) the cost base of the acquiring entity for a qualifying interest was worked out under section 124-784B .

    Allocation of cost base

    124-784C(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base of the equity or debt for the holder is that part of the cost base of the qualifying interest worked out under section 124-784B as:


    (a) may be reasonably allocated to the equity or debt; and


    (b) is not more than the *market value of the equity or debt at the completion time.

    SECTION 124-785   What is the roll-over?  

    124-785(1)    
    A *capital gain you make from your original interest is disregarded.

    124-785(2)    
    You work out the first element of the *cost base of each *CGT asset you received as a result of the exchange by reasonably attributing to it the cost base (or the part of it) of your original interest for which it was exchanged and for which you obtained the roll-over.

    124-785(3)    
    In applying subsection (2), you reduce the *cost base of your original interest (just before you stop owning it) by so much of that cost base as is attributable to an ineligible part (see section 124-790 ).

    124-785(4)    
    The first element of the *reduced cost base is worked out similarly. EXAMPLES

    Example 1:

    Lyn exchanges 1 share with a cost base of $10 for another share. The cost base of the new share is $10.

    Example 2:

    Glenn exchanges 2 shares with cost bases of $10 and $11 respectively for one new share. The cost base of the new share is $21.

    Example 3:

    Wayne exchanges 1 share with a cost base of $9 for share A with a market value of $5 and share B with a market value of $10. The cost base of share A is $3 and the cost base of share B is $6.


    SECTION 124-790   Partial roll-over  

    124-790(1)    


    The original interest holder can obtain only a partial roll-over if its *capital proceeds for its original interest include something (the ineligible proceeds ) other than its replacement interest. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part ) of its original interest for which it received ineligible proceeds.

    124-790(2)    
    The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of your original interest as is reasonably attributable to it.

    Example:

    Ken owns 100 shares in Aim Ltd. Those shares have a cost base of $2.

    Ken accepts an offer from LBZ Ltd to acquire those shares. The offer is 1 share in LBZ (market value $4) plus $1 for each Aim share.

    Ken chooses the roll-over to the extent that he can.

    The cost base of the ineligible part is [ $100 × $200 ] ÷ $500 = $40.

    Ken makes a capital gain of $100 − $40 = $60.


    124-790(3)    
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2000)

    SECTION 124-795  

    124-795(1)   Exceptions   View history reference


    You cannot obtain the roll-over if, just before you stop owning your original interest, you are a foreign resident unless, just after you *acquire your replacement interest, the replacement interest is *taxable Australian property.

    124-795(2)    
    You cannot obtain the roll-over if:


    (a) any *capital gain you might make from your replacement interest would be disregarded (except because of a roll-over); or


    (b) you and the acquiring entity are members of the same *wholly-owned group just before you stop owning your original interest and the acquiring entity is a foreign resident.

    Example:

    An example of a capital gain or loss being disregarded as mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) is because the asset is trading stock.

    Note:

    A roll-over may be available under Subdivision 126-B in the circumstances mentioned in paragraph (2)(b).


    124-795(3)    


    You cannot obtain the roll-over for the *CGT event happening in relation to the exchange of your original interest if you can choose a roll-over under Division 122 or 615 for that event.
    Note:

    Division 122 deals with the disposal of assets to a wholly-owned company, and Division 615 deals with business restructures.


    124-795(4)    


    You cannot obtain the roll-over for the *CGT event happening in relation to the exchange of your qualifying interest if:


    (a) the replacement entity makes a choice to that effect under this subsection; and


    (b) that entity or the original entity notifies you in writing of the choice before the exchange.


    124-795(5)    
    (Repealed by No 168 of 2006 )


    SECTION 124-800   Interest received for pre-CGT interest  

    124-800(1)    


    If, in consequence of the *arrangement, you exchange an interest that you *acquired before 20 September 1985 for an interest in the replacement entity, the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the interest in the replacement entity is its *market value just after you acquired it.

    124-800(2)    
    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the interest in the replacement entity is reduced if all or part of a *capital gain from *CGT event K6 happening is disregarded because of subsection 104-230(10) . The amount of the reduction is the amount of the *capital gain you disregard under that subsection.

    Note 1:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .

    Note 2:

    Subsection 104-230(10) provides that a capital gain from CGT event K6 is disregarded to the extent that you could have chosen a roll-over under this Subdivision if your original interest had been post-CGT.


    124-805   (Repealed) SECTION 124-805 Meaning of trust voting interest  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2000)

    SECTION 124-810   Certain companies and trusts not regarded as having 300 members or beneficiaries  

    124-810(1)    


    For the purposes of this Subdivision, a company is treated as if it did not have at least 300 *members if subsection (3) or (5) applies to it.

    124-810(2)    


    For the purposes of this Subdivision, a trust is treated as if it did not have at least 300 beneficiaries if subsection (4) or (5) applies to it.

    Concentrated ownership

    124-810(3)    
    This subsection applies to a company if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, *shares in the company:


    (a) carrying *fixed entitlements to:


    (i) at least 75% of the company ' s income; or

    (ii) at least 75% of the company ' s capital; or


    (b) carrying at least 75% of the voting rights in the company.


    124-810(4)    
    This subsection applies to a trust if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, units or other fixed interests in the trust:


    (a) carrying *fixed entitlements to:


    (i) at least 75% of the trust ' s income; or

    (ii) at least 75% of the trust ' s capital; or


    (b) if beneficiaries of the trust have a right to vote in respect of activities of the trust - carrying at least 75% of those voting rights.

    Possible variation of rights etc.

    124-810(5)    
    This subsection applies to a company or trust if, because of:


    (a) any provision in the entity ' s constituent document, or in any contract, agreement or instrument:


    (i) authorising the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to any of the *shares, units or other fixed interests in the entity; or

    (ii) relating to the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of any of those interests; or


    (b) any contract, *arrangement, option or instrument under which a person has power to acquire any of those interests; or


    (c) any power, authority or discretion in a person in relation to the rights attaching to any of those shares, units or interests;

    it is reasonable to conclude that the rights attaching to any of those interests are capable of being varied or abrogated in such a way (even if they are not in fact varied or abrogated in that way) that, directly or indirectly, subsection (3) or (4) would apply to the entity.



    Single individual

    124-810(6)    
    For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), all of the following are taken to be a single individual:


    (a) an individual, whether or not the individual holds *shares, units or other interests in the entity concerned;


    (b) the individual ' s *associates;


    (c) for any shares, units or interests in respect of which other individuals are nominees of the individual or of the individual ' s associates - those other individuals.

    Subdivision 124-N - Disposal of assets by a trust to a company  

    SECTION 124-850   What this Subdivision is about  


    Entities can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

  • (a) a trust disposes of all of its assets to a company; and
  • (b) units and interests in the trust are replaced by shares in the company.
  • The roll-over may also be available for 2 or more trusts disposing of all their assets to a single company.

    Note:

    The effect of the roll-over may be reversed if the trust does not cease to exist within 6 months: see section 104-195 .

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 124-855   What this Subdivision deals with  

    124-855(1)    
    A roll-over may be available for a restructuring (a trust restructure ) if:


    (a) a trust, or 2 or more trusts, (the transferor ) *dispose of all of their *CGT assets to a company limited by *shares (the transferee ); and


    (b) *CGT event E4 is capable of applying to all of the units and interests in the transferor; and


    (c) the requirements in section 124-860 are met.

    Note:

    A roll-over is not available for a restructure undertaken by a discretionary trust.


    124-855(2)    
    For 2 or more transferors, units and interests in each transferor must be owned in the same proportions by the same beneficiaries.

    Example:

    Matthew and Jaclyn each own 50% of the units in the Spring Unit Trust and the Dale Unit trust. All of the assets of both trusts are disposed of to Jonathon Pty Ltd. A roll-over for a trust restructure is available if the other requirements of this Subdivision are met.


    SECTION 124-860   Requirements for roll-over  

    124-860(1)    
    All of the *CGT assets owned by the transferor must be disposed of to the transferee during the *trust restructuring period. However, ignore any CGT assets retained by the transferor to pay existing or expected debts of the transferor.

    124-860(2)    
    The trust restructuring period for a trust restructure:


    (a) starts just before the first *CGT asset is *disposed of to the transferee under the trust restructure, which must happen on or after 11 November 1999; and


    (b) ends when the last CGT asset of the transferor is disposed of to the transferee.

    124-860(3)    
    The transferee must not be an *exempt entity.

    124-860(4)    
    The transferee must be a company that:


    (a) has never carried on commercial activities; and


    (b) has no *CGT assets, other than any or all of the following:


    (i) small amounts of cash or debt;

    (ii) its rights under an *arrangement, if (collectively) those rights only facilitate the transfer of assets to the transferee from the transferor; and


    (c) has no losses of any kind.

    Example:

    It could be a shelf company.


    124-860(5)    
    Subsection (4) does not apply to a transferee that is the trustee of the transferor.

    124-860(6)    
    Just after the end of the *trust restructuring period:


    (a) each entity that owned interests in a transferor just before the start of the trust restructuring period must own replacement interests in the transferee in the same proportion as it owned those interests in that transferor; and


    (b) the *market value of the replacement interests each of those entities owns in the transferee must be at least substantially the same as the market value of the interests it owned in the transferor or transferors just before the start of the trust restructuring period.

    Note 1:

    Any assets in the company just before the start of the trust restructuring period may affect the ability of owners of units or interests to comply with paragraph (6)(b).

    Note 2:

    See section 124-20 if an entity uses an interest sale facility.


    124-860(7)    
    For the purposes of subsection (6), ignore any *shares in the transferee that:


    (a) just before the start of the *trust restructuring period, were owned by entities who together owned no more than 5 shares; and


    (b) just after the end of that period, represented such a low percentage of the total *market value of all the shares that it is reasonable to treat other entities as if they owned all the shares in the transferee.

    Example:

    To continue the example in subsection 124-855(2) , assume that Jonathon Pty Ltd was a shelf company organised for Matthew and Jaclyn by their solicitor, Indira.

    Indira owned the 2 shares in Jonathon Pty Ltd before the trust restructuring period. The company issues Matthew and Jaclyn 5,000 shares each.

    In these circumstances, it is reasonable to treat Matthew and Jaclyn as if they owned all the shares in Jonathon Pty Ltd.


    124-860(8)    
    (Repealed by No 168 of 2006 )


    SECTION 124-865  

    124-865   Entities both choose the roll-over  


    A roll-over is only available for the transferor and transferee if both the transferor and transferee choose to obtain it.
    Note 1:

    If they do so, the consequences for the transferor and transferee are set out in section 124-875 .

    Note 2:

    An entity that owns a unit or interest in the transferor can also choose to obtain a roll-over: see section 124-870 .

    SECTION 124-870   Roll-over for owner of units or interests in a trust  

    124-870(1)    
    You can choose to obtain a roll-over (whether or not the transferor and transferee choose to obtain a roll-over, and even if *CGT event J4 applies) if:


    (a) you own units or interests in the transferor (your original interests ); and


    (b) the ownership of all your units or interests ends under a trust restructure in exchange for *shares in the transferee (your replacement interests ).

    Note 1:

    The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A . The original assets are your units and interests in the transferor. The new assets are your shares in the transferee.

    Note 2:

    The effect of the roll-over may be reversed if the transferor does not cease to exist within 6 months: see section 104-195 .


    124-870(2)    
    You must make the choice for each of your original interests.

    124-870(3)    


    An entity that is a foreign resident cannot choose a roll-over under this section unless the replacement interests the entity *acquires in the transferee are *taxable Australian property just after their acquisition.

    124-870(4)    
    If you choose a roll-over, you cannot make a *capital loss from a *CGT event that happens to your original interests during the *trust restructuring period.

    Note:

    The rule in subsection (4) prevents a capital loss arising on your units or interests after the trust assets have been disposed of to the company but before your shares are issued to you.



    Exception: trading stock

    124-870(5)    
    This section does not apply to your ownership of an original interest ending if:


    (a) the interest was an item of your *trading stock and the corresponding replacement interest becomes an item of your trading stock when you *acquire it; or


    (b) the interest was not an item of your trading stock but the corresponding replacement interest becomes an item of your trading stock when you acquire it.


    SECTION 124-875   Effect on the transferor and transferee  


    Capital gains and losses disregarded

    124-875(1)    
    Any *capital gain or *capital loss from *CGT event A1 happening to the transferor under the trust restructure is disregarded (even if *CGT event J4 applies).

    Note:

    The effect of the roll-over may be reversed if the transferor does not cease to exist within 6 months: see section 104-195 .



    Cost base is transferred

    124-875(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base (for the transferee) of each *CGT asset that the transferee *acquires under the trust restructure is the same as the cost base and reduced cost base of that asset (for the transferor) just before that acquisition.

    Note:

    For the cost base and reduced cost base of interests in the transferee: see Subdivision 124-A .



    Pre-CGT assets retain their status

    124-875(3)    
    If the transferor *acquired any of the *CGT assets *disposed of to the transferee under the trust restructure before 20 September 1985, the transferee is taken to have acquired it before that day.

    124-875(4)    
    However, subsection (3) is taken never to have applied to such an asset of the transferee if subsection 104-195(4) (CGT event J4) applies to the transferee in relation to the asset.

    Exception: trading stock

    124-875(5)    
    This section does not apply to a *CGT asset if:


    (a) the asset was an item of *trading stock of the transferor and becomes an item of trading stock of the transferee; or


    (b) the asset was not an item of trading stock of the transferor but becomes an item of trading stock of the transferee when the transferee *acquires it.

    Exception: asset must be taxable Australian property for foreign resident transferee

    124-875(6)    


    For a transferee that is a foreign resident, this section only applies to a *CGT asset that is *taxable Australian property just after the transferee *acquires it under the trust restructure.

    (Repealed) Subdivision 124-O - FSR (financial services reform) transitions  

    (Repealed) Same owner roll-overs

    124-880   (Repealed) SECTION 124-880 Old licence roll-over (same owner)  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    124-885   (Repealed) SECTION 124-885 Qualified licence roll-over (same owner)  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    124-890   (Repealed) SECTION 124-890 Rights roll-over (same owner)  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    124-895   (Repealed) SECTION 124-895 Consequences of a same owner roll-over  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    (Repealed) New owner roll-overs

    124-900   (Repealed) SECTION 124-900 Old licence roll-over (new owner)  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    124-905   (Repealed) SECTION 124-905 Qualified licence roll-over (new owner)  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    124-910   (Repealed) SECTION 124-910 Rights roll-over (new owner)  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    124-915   (Repealed) SECTION 124-915 Consequences of a new owner roll-over (where one CGT asset comes to an end)  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    124-920   (Repealed) SECTION 124-920 Consequences of a new owner roll-over (where more than one CGT asset comes to an end)  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Extension of FSR transition period

    124-925   (Repealed) SECTION 124-925 Special extension of the 10 March 2004 cut-off date (same owner roll-overs)  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    124-930   (Repealed) SECTION 124-930 Special extension of the 10 March 2004 cut-off date (new owner roll-overs)  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    Subdivision 124-P - Exchange of a membership interest in an MDO for a membership interest in another MDO  

    Guide to Subdivision 124-P

    SECTION 124-975   What this Subdivision is about  


    You can choose a roll-over if you exchange your interest as a member of an MDO for an interest as a member of another MDO.

    You can only choose the roll-over if you would have made a capital gain from the exchange.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    124-980 Exchange of membership interests in an MDO
    124-985 What the roll-over is for post-CGT interests
    124-990 Partial roll-over
    124-995 Pre-CGT interests

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 124-980   Exchange of membership interests in an MDO  

    124-980(1)    
    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) an entity exchanges:


    (i) an interest (the original interest ) in an *MDO (the original MDO ) as a member of the original MDO; for

    (ii) a similar interest (the replacement interest ) in another MDO (the new MDO ) as a member of the new MDO; and


    (b) both the original MDO and the new MDO are companies limited by guarantee; and


    (c) the exchange is in consequence of a single *arrangement that satisfies subsection (3); and


    (d) apart from the roll-over, the entity would make a *capital gain from a *CGT event happening in relation to its original interest; and


    (e) the entity chooses to obtain the roll-over; and


    (f) the entity acquired the original interest on or after 20 September 1985.

    Note:

    The entity can obtain only a partial roll-over if the capital proceeds for its original interest include something other than its replacement interest: see section 124-990 .


    124-980(2)    
    In working out whether an original interest is exchanged for a similar interest, disregard a difference that consists only of a right to receive distributions of income or capital.

    Conditions for arrangement

    124-980(3)    
    The *arrangement must:


    (a) result in the new *MDO becoming the sole *member of the original MDO; and


    (b) be one in which participation was available on substantially the same terms for all of the holders of interests as members of the original MDO of a particular type.

    SECTION 124-985   What the roll-over is for post-CGT interests  

    124-985(1)    
    A *capital gain the entity makes from an original interest *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is disregarded.

    124-985(2)    
    The entity works out the first element of the *cost base of each replacement interest the entity received as a result of the exchange by reasonably attributing to it the cost base (or the part of it) of the entity ' s original interest for which it was exchanged and for which the entity obtained the roll-over.

    124-985(3)    
    In applying subsection (2), the entity reduces (but not below zero) the *cost base of the original interest (just before stopping owning it) by so much of that cost base as is attributable to an ineligible part (see section 124-990 ).

    124-985(4)    
    The first element of the *reduced cost base of a replacement interest is worked out similarly.

    S 124-985 inserted by No 143 of 2007 , s 3 and Sch 2 item 5, applicable to CGT events happening on or after 14 February 2007.

    SECTION 124-990   Partial roll-over  

    124-990(1)    
    The entity can obtain only a partial roll-over if its *capital proceeds for its original interest include something (the ineligible proceeds ) other than its replacement interest. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part ) of its original interest for which it received ineligible proceeds.

    124-990(2)    
    The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of the original interest as is reasonably attributable to it.

    SECTION 124-995  

    124-995   Pre-CGT interests  


    If the entity exchanges an original interest that the entity *acquired before 20 September 1985 for its replacement interest, the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the replacement interest is zero.

    Subdivision 124-Q - Exchange of stapled ownership interests for ownership interests in a unit trust  

    Guide to Subdivision 124-Q

    SECTION 124-1040   What this Subdivision is about  


    There is a roll-over if you own ownership interests that are stapled and, as a result of a reorganisation, you stop owning those interests and you acquire or own ownership interests in an interposed unit trust.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    124-1045 Exchange of stapled securities
    124-1050 Conditions
    124-1055 Consequences of the roll-over for exchanging members
    124-1060 Consequences of the roll-over for interposed trust
    124-1065 (Repealed by No 12 of 2012 )

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 124-1045   Exchange of stapled securities  

    124-1045(1)    
    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) you own *ownership interests in 2 or more trusts, or in one or more companies and one or more trusts, and those interests are stapled together to form stapled securities; and


    (b) at least one of the trusts is a trust whose trustee is not assessed and liable to pay tax under Division 6C of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and


    (c) if no company is involved - at least one of the trusts is a trust whose trustee is assessed and liable to pay tax under Division 6C of Part III of that Act; and


    (d) under a *scheme for reorganising the affairs of the relevant *stapled entities, you and the other entities that own the ownership interests in the stapled entities (together the exchanging members ):


    (i) stop being the owner of those ownership interests and acquire ownership interests in a new unit trust (the interposed trust ) and nothing else (a new trust case ); or

    (ii) retain their ownership interests in one of those trusts (also the interposed trust ), stop being the owner of the remaining ownership interests that form the stapled securities and receive nothing other than ownership interests in the interposed trust, or an increase in value of their existing ownership interests in the interposed trust, or both (an existing trust case ); and
    Note:

    See section 124-20 if an exchanging member uses an interest sale facility.


    (e) under the scheme, the interposed trust becomes the owner of:


    (i) for a new trust case - all of the ownership interests in the stapled entities; or

    (ii) for an existing trust case - all of the ownership interests in the other stapled entities; and


    (f) the conditions in section 124-1050 are satisfied.

    Note:

    Division 6C of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 deals with taxing public trading trusts in the same way as companies.


    124-1045(2)    
    An entity is a stapled entity in relation to stapled securities if *ownership interests in the entity form part of the stapled securities.

    124-1045(3)    
    Ignore for the purposes of subsection (1) *ownership interests held by one *stapled entity in another stapled entity as at the start of the day on which the Bill for this Act was introduced into the Parliament.

    SECTION 124-1050   Conditions  

    124-1050(1)    
    Just after the *scheme is completed (the completion time ), each exchanging member must own a percentage of the *ownership interests in the interposed trust that reasonably equates to the percentage of the ownership interests that the member owned in the *stapled entities.

    Example:

    Public Company A, Unit Trust No 1 and Unit Trust No 2 are stapled entities. Each stapled entity has 4,000 ownership interests on issue. There are no ownership interests in any of the stapled entities other than shares in the company and units in the trusts.

    Under a scheme for reorganising the stapled entities, Unit Trust No 3 is interposed between the stapled entities and the owners of the interests in those entities. Unit Trust No 3 (the interposed trust) becomes the owner of all of the interests in each of the three stapled entities. Exchanging members receive one unit in the interposed trust for each stapled security they owned. All units in the interposed trust are of the same class.

    Naomi owned 200 shares in Public Company A, 200 units in Unit Trust No 1 and 200 units in Unit Trust No 2. Naomi therefore owned 5% of the ownership interests in each of the stapled entities. Under the scheme, Naomi receives 100 units in Unit Trust No 3 (out of a total of 2,000 units) in exchange for her ownership interests in the stapled entities. Naomi now owns 5% of the ownership interests in the interposed trust and meets the condition in subsection (1).


    124-1050(2)    
    Just after the completion time, each exchanging member must have the same, or as nearly as practicable the same, proportionate *market value of *ownership interests in the interposed trust as the member had in the *stapled entities just before that time.

    124-1050(3)    
    In working out whether an exchanging member complies with subsection (2), an anticipated reasonable approximation of the *market value of *ownership interests just after the completion time is sufficient.

    Note:

    An anticipated reasonable approximation of market values of ownership interests may include valuations provided to exchanging members in scheme documents.


    124-1050(4)    
    You must be an Australian resident at the completion time or, if you are a foreign resident at that time:


    (a) some or all of your *ownership interests in the *stapled entities must have been *taxable Australian property just before that time; and


    (b) your ownership interests in the interposed trust must be taxable Australian property just after that time.

    SECTION 124-1055   Consequences of the roll-over for exchanging members  

    124-1055(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make as a result of the *scheme from each of your *ownership interests is disregarded.

    124-1055(2)    
    If you *acquired all of your *ownership interests in the *stapled entities on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each of your ownership interests in the interposed trust is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the *cost bases of all of your ownership interests in the *stapled entities; and


    (b) the number, *market value and character of your ownership interests in the interposed trust.

    Example:

    Naomi had a cost base of $2.00 for each of her 200 Public Company A shares, $1.50 for each of her 200 Unit Trust No 1 units and $0.50 for each of her 200 Unit Trust No 2 units. The total of the cost bases of all of her membership interests is $800.00.

    It is reasonable to allocate $8.00 to each of the 100 units in the interposed trust that she receives under the reorganisation.


    124-1055(3)    
    If you *acquired all of your *ownership interests in the *stapled entities before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired all of your ownership interests in the interposed trust before that day.

    124-1055(4)    
    If you *acquired some of your *ownership interests in the *stapled entities before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired so many of your ownership interests in the interposed trust as is reasonable before that day having regard to:


    (a) the number, *market value and character of your ownership interests in the stapled entities; and


    (b) the number, market value and character of your ownership interests in the interposed trust.

    Note:

    Generally, a capital gain or capital loss from a CGT asset acquired before 20 September 1985 can be disregarded: see Division 104.


    124-1055(5)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each of your *ownership interests in the interposed trust that is not taken by subsection (4) to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 (your post-CGT interests ) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the cost bases of your ownership interests in the *stapled entities that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (b) the number, *market value and character of your post-CGT interests.

    SECTION 124-1060   Consequences of the roll-over for interposed trust  

    124-1060(1)    
    Apply this section separately for the interposed trust in relation to the *ownership interests in each *stapled entity that the trustee of the interposed trust *acquires under the *scheme.

    124-1060(2)    
    A whole number of *ownership interests in a *stapled entity that the trustee *acquires under the *scheme are taken to have been acquired before 20 September 1985 if any of the stapled entity ' s assets as at the completion time were acquired by it before that day.

    Note:

    Generally, a capital gain or capital loss from a CGT asset acquired before 20 September 1985 can be disregarded: see Division 104 .


    124-1060(3)    
    The number (worked out as at the completion time) is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the *ownership interests in the *stapled entity *acquired by the trustee) does not exceed:


    (a) the *market value of the stapled entity ' s assets that it acquired before 20 September 1985; less


    (b) its liabilities (if any) in respect of those assets;

    expressed as a percentage of the market value of all the stapled entity ' s assets less all of its liabilities. The amounts in paragraphs (a) and (b) are to be worked out as at the completion time.


    124-1060(4)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each of the trustee ' s *ownership interests in that *stapled entity that are not taken by subsection (3) to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 is such proportion as is reasonable of the total of the cost bases (as at the completion time) of that stapled entity ' s assets that it acquired on or after that day less its liabilities (if any) in respect of those assets.

    124-1060(5)    
    In applying this section:


    (a) a liability of a *stapled entity that is not a liability in respect of a specific asset or assets of the stapled entity is a liability in respect of all the assets of the stapled entity; and


    (b) if a liability is in respect of 2 or more assets, the proportion of the liability that is in respect of any one of those assets is such amount as is reasonable having regard to the *market values of each of those assets.

    124-1065   (Repealed) SECTION 124-1065 Certain foreign holders disregarded  
    (Repealed by No 12 of 2012)

    Subdivision 124-R - Water entitlements  

    Guide to Subdivision 124-R

    SECTION 124-1100   What this Subdivision is about  


    There is a roll-over if a CGT event happens to you because of something occurring in relation to one or more water entitlements. You do not need to own water entitlements for the event to happen to you.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Replacement case
    124-1105 Replacement water entitlements roll-over
    124-1110 Roll-over consequences - capital gain or loss disregarded
    124-1115 Roll-over consequences - partial roll-over
    124-1120 Roll-over consequences - all original entitlements post-CGT
    124-1125 Roll-over consequences - all original entitlements pre-CGT
    124-1130 Roll-over consequences - some original entitlements pre-CGT, others post-CGT
    Reduction case
    124-1135 Reduction in water entitlements roll-over
    124-1140 Roll-over consequences - capital gain or loss disregarded
    124-1145 Roll-over consequences - all original entitlements post-CGT
    124-1150 Roll-over consequences - some original entitlements pre-CGT, others post-CGT
    Variation to CGT asset case
    124-1155 Roll-over for variation to CGT asset
    124-1160 Roll-over consequences
    124-1165 Roll-over consequences - partial roll-over

    Replacement case

    SECTION 124-1105   Replacement water entitlements roll-over  


    Automatic roll-over for single water entitlements

    124-1105(1)    
    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) your ownership of a *water entitlement (the original entitlement ) ends, resulting in a *CGT event happening; and


    (b) as a result of your ownership of the original entitlement ending, you *acquire one or more water entitlements (each of which is a new entitlement ); and


    (c) if you are a foreign resident just before your ownership of the original entitlement ends, or you are the trustee of a trust that is a *foreign trust for CGT purposes for the income year in which your ownership of the original entitlement ends:


    (i) the original entitlement was *taxable Australian property just before you stopped owning it; and

    (ii) if there is only one new entitlement - the new entitlement is taxable Australian property just after you acquire it; and

    (iii) if there is more than one new entitlement - each new entitlement is taxable Australian property just after you acquire it; and


    (d) you have not chosen a roll-over in relation to the original entitlement under subsection (2).

    Elective roll-over for bundled water entitlements

    124-1105(2)    
    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) your ownership of more than one *water entitlement (each of which is an original entitlement ) ends, resulting in a *CGT event happening; and


    (b) as a result of your ownership of the original entitlements ending, you *acquire one or more water entitlements (each of which is a new entitlement ); and


    (c) if you are a foreign resident just before your ownership of the original entitlements ends, or you are the trustee of a trust that is a *foreign trust for CGT purposes for the income year in which your ownership of the original entitlements ends:


    (i) each original entitlement was *taxable Australian property just before you stopped owning it; and

    (ii) if there is only one new entitlement - the new entitlement is taxable Australian property just after you acquire it; and

    (iii) if there is more than one new entitlement - each new entitlement is taxable Australian property just after you acquire it; and


    (d) you choose to obtain the roll-over.

    Note:

    Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.



    No roll-over if Subdivision 124-C applies

    124-1105(3)    
    However, there is no roll-over in relation to a *water entitlement under this section if there is a roll-over in relation to the water entitlement under Subdivision 124-C (statutory licences).

    Meaning of water entitlement

    124-1105(4)    
    A water entitlement is a legal or equitable right that an entity owns that relates to water, including a right to:


    (a) receive water; or


    (b) take water from a water resource; or


    (c) have water delivered; or


    (d) deliver water;

    and includes a right that must be owned by the entity in order to own a right covered by paragraph (a), (b), (c) or (d).

    Example:

    Philip owns a share in Big Pump Irrigation Ltd. The share provides Philip with the right to receive dividends, to participate in the running of the company and to have a separate contractual agreement with Big Pump Irrigation Ltd for the delivery of 1 megalitre of water. Philip has such an agreement. Philip ' s agreement is a water entitlement . Philip ' s share is also a water entitlement because he must own the share in order to have a contractual arrangement with Big Pump Irrigation Ltd for the delivery of water.


    SECTION 124-1110  

    124-1110   Roll-over consequences - capital gain or loss disregarded  


    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from each original entitlement that qualifies for a roll-over.

    SECTION 124-1115   Roll-over consequences - partial roll-over  

    124-1115(1)    
    You can obtain only a partial roll-over in relation to an original entitlement if the *capital proceeds for that entitlement includes something (the ineligible proceeds ) other than a new entitlement or new entitlements. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part ) of the entitlement for which you received the ineligible proceeds.

    Note:

    If the roll-over is under subsection 124-1105(2) , some or all of the original entitlements may each have an ineligible part.


    124-1115(2)    
    The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of the original entitlement as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

    124-1115(3)    
    The *reduced cost base of the ineligible part is worked out similarly.

    124-1115(4)    
    In working out what is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part for the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), have regard to the *market value of the new entitlement relative to the market value of the ineligible proceeds.

    124-1115(5)    
    If the roll-over is under subsection 124-1105(2) , for the purposes of sections 124-1120 and 124-1130 , for each original entitlement that has an ineligible part:


    (a) reduce the *cost base of that entitlement (just before you stopped owning it) by so much of that cost base as is attributable to that ineligible part; and


    (b) reduce the *reduced cost base of that entitlement similarly.

    SECTION 124-1120   Roll-over consequences - all original entitlements post-CGT  

    124-1120(1)    
    In a situation covered by subsection 124-1105(1) , if you *acquired the original entitlement on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of the *cost base of the new entitlement (or of each of the new entitlements) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the cost base and *market value of the original entitlement; and


    (b) the number and market value of the new entitlements; and


    (c) any amount you paid to get the new entitlement (which can include giving property: see section 103-5 ).

    124-1120(2)    
    In a situation covered by subsection 124-1105(2) , if you *acquired the original entitlements on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of the *cost base of the new entitlement (or of each of the new entitlements) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the cost bases of all the original entitlements; and


    (b) the number and *market value of the original entitlements; and


    (c) the number and market value of the new entitlements; and


    (d) any amount you paid to get the new entitlements (which can include giving property: see section 103-5 ).

    124-1120(3)    
    In the situation covered by subsection 124-1105(1) or (2) , the first element of the *reduced cost base of the new entitlement (or of each of the new entitlements) is worked out similarly.

    124-1120(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(b) and (2)(c), the *market value of the new entitlements is their *market value at the time you *acquired them.

    SECTION 124-1125   Roll-over consequences - all original entitlements pre-CGT  

    124-1125(1)    
    In the situation covered by subsection 124-1105(1) , if you *acquired the original entitlement before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the new entitlement (or all of the new entitlements) before that day.

    124-1125(2)    
    In the situation covered by subsection 124-1105(2) , if you *acquired the original entitlements before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the new entitlement (or all of the new entitlements) before that day.

    SECTION 124-1130   Roll-over consequences - some original entitlements pre-CGT, others post-CGT  

    124-1130(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the roll-over is under subsection 124-1105(2) ; and


    (b) you *acquired one or more of the original entitlements before 20 September 1985; and


    (c) you acquired one or more of the original entitlements on or after that day.

    124-1130(2)    
    You are taken to have *acquired so many of your new entitlements before 20 September 1985 as is reasonable, having regard to:


    (a) the number and *market value of your original entitlements; and


    (b) the number and market value of your new entitlements.

    124-1130(3)    
    The first element of the *cost base of each of your new entitlements that are not taken by subsection (2) to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 (your post-CGT entitlements ) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the cost bases of the original entitlements you acquired on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (b) the number and *market value of your post-CGT entitlements; and


    (c) any amount you paid to get the new entitlements (which can include giving property: see section 103-5 ).

    124-1130(4)    
    The reduced cost base of each of your post-CGT entitlements is worked out similarly.

    Reduction case

    SECTION 124-1135  

    124-1135   Reduction in water entitlements roll-over  


    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) you own more than one *water entitlement; and


    (b) under an *arrangement:


    (i) your ownership of one or more of the water entitlements (each of which is an original entitlement ) ends, resulting in a *CGT event happening; and

    (ii) you do not receive anything for the original entitlement or entitlements; and

    (iii) you retain one or more of your original entitlements (the retained entitlements ); and


    (c) the total of the *market values of all of the retained entitlements immediately after the CGT event happens is substantially the same as the total of the market values of all of the original entitlements immediately before the CGT event happened.

    SECTION 124-1140  

    124-1140   Roll-over consequences - capital gain or loss disregarded  


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from your ownership of the original entitlements ending is disregarded.

    SECTION 124-1145   Roll-over consequences - all original entitlements post-CGT  

    124-1145(1)    
    This section applies if you *acquired the original entitlement (or all of the original entitlements) on or after 20 September 1985.

    124-1145(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base of the retained entitlement (or of each of the retained entitlements) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the cost bases of all the original entitlements; and


    (b) the number and *market value of the original entitlements; and


    (c) the number and market value of the retained entitlements.

    124-1145(3)    
    The first element of the *reduced cost base of the retained entitlements is worked out similarly.

    124-1145(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(c), the *market value of the retained entitlements is their market value just after the *CGT event referred to in section 124-1135 happens.

    SECTION 124-1150   Roll-over consequences - some original entitlements pre-CGT, others post-CGT  

    124-1150(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you *acquired one or more of the original entitlements before 20 September 1985; and


    (b) you acquired one or more of the original entitlements on or after that day.

    124-1150(2)    
    You are taken to have *acquired so many of your retained entitlements before 20 September 1985 as is reasonable, having regard to:


    (a) the number and *market value of your original entitlements; and


    (b) the number and market value of your retained entitlements.

    124-1150(3)    
    The first element of the *cost base of each of your retained entitlements that are not taken by subsection (2) to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 (your post-CGT entitlements ) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the cost bases of the original entitlements you acquired on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (b) the number and *market value of the your post-CGT entitlements.

    124-1150(4)    
    The reduced cost base of each of your post-CGT entitlements is worked out similarly.

    Variation to CGT asset case

    SECTION 124-1155  

    124-1155   Roll-over for variation to CGT asset  


    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) a *CGT event happens to a *CGT asset that you own; and


    (b) the CGT event happens as a direct result of the circumstances that gave rise to a roll-over under section 124-1105 ; and


    (c) you continue to be the owner of the asset (the retained asset ) immediately after the CGT event has happened.

    SECTION 124-1160  

    124-1160   Roll-over consequences  


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the *CGT event is disregarded.

    SECTION 124-1165   Roll-over consequences - partial roll-over  

    124-1165(1)    
    You can obtain only a partial roll-over in relation to a *CGT asset if the *capital proceeds for that asset includes something (the ineligible proceeds ) other than your retained asset. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part ) of the asset for which you received the ineligible proceeds.

    124-1165(2)    
    The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of the *CGT asset as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

    124-1165(3)    
    The *reduced cost base of the ineligible part is worked out similarly.

    124-1165(4)    
    In working out what is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part for the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), have regard to the *market value of the retained asset relative to the market value of the ineligible proceeds.

    Subdivision 124-S - Interest realignment arrangements  

    Guide to Subdivision 124-S

    SECTION 124-1220   What this Subdivision is about  


    There is roll-over relief if an interest in a mining, quarrying or prospecting right is disposed of under an interest realignment arrangement.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    124-1225 Disposals of interests under interest realignment arrangements
    124-1230 Roll-over consequences - partial roll-over
    124-1235 Roll-over consequences - all original interests were post-CGT and pre-UCA
    124-1240 Roll-over consequences - all original interests were pre-CGT
    124-1245 Roll-over consequences - original interests were of mixed CGT status, all were pre-UCA
    124-1250 Roll-over consequences - some original interests were pre-UCA

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 124-1225   Disposals of interests under interest realignment arrangements  

    124-1225(1)    
    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) *CGT event A1 happens because you *dispose of one or more assets each of which:


    (i) is an interest (an original interest ) in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right; and

    (ii) is an interest that you started to *hold before 1 July 2001; and


    (b) the disposal occurs under an *interest realignment arrangement.

    124-1225(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of an interest (a new interest ) in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right that you acquire under the *interest realignment arrangement includes any amount you paid to acquire the new interest.

    Note 1:

    The rest of the first element is worked out under Subdivision 124-A .

    Note 2:

    Under subsections 124-10(2) and 124-15(2) , a capital gain or capital loss you make from the original interest is disregarded.


    124-1225(3)    
    The amount can include giving property: see section 103-5 . However, it does not include a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right that you dispose of under the *interest realignment arrangement.

    SECTION 124-1230   Roll-over consequences - partial roll-over  

    124-1230(1)    
    You can obtain only a partial roll-over in relation to an original interest if the *capital proceeds for that interest includes something (the ineligible proceeds ) other than a new interest or new interests. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part ) of the interest for which you received the ineligible proceeds.

    Note:

    If there is more than one original interest, some or all of those original interests may each have an ineligible part.


    124-1230(2)    
    The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of the original interest as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

    124-1230(3)    
    The *reduced cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the reduced cost base of the original interest as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

    124-1230(4)    
    For the purposes of sections 124-1235 and 124-1245 , for each original interest that has an ineligible part:


    (a) reduce the *cost base of that interest (just before the *CGT event that happened in relation to it) by so much of that cost base as is attributable to that ineligible part; and


    (b) reduce the *reduced cost base of that interest (just before the CGT event that happened in relation to it) by so much of that reduced cost base as is attributable to that ineligible part.

    SECTION 124-1235   Roll-over consequences - all original interests were post-CGT and pre-UCA  

    124-1235(1)    
    If you acquire the new interest in exchange for:


    (a) one original interest that you started to *hold on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001; or


    (b) 2 or more original interests, each of which you started to hold on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001;

    you are taken to have started to hold the new interest (or all of the new interests) on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001.


    124-1235(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base of the new interest (or of each of the new interests) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the cost bases of all the original interests; and


    (b) the number, *market value and character of the original interests; and


    (c) the number, market value and character of the new interests.

    124-1235(3)    
    The first element of the *reduced cost base of the new interest (or of each of the new interests) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the total of the reduced cost bases of all the original interests; and


    (b) the number, *market value and character of the original interests; and


    (c) the number, market value and character of the new interests.

    SECTION 124-1240  

    124-1240   Roll-over consequences - all original interests were pre-CGT  


    If you acquire the new interest in exchange for:


    (a) one original interest that you started to *hold before 20 September 1985; or


    (b) 2 or more original interests, each of which you started to hold before 20 September 1985;

    you are taken to have started to hold the new interest (or all of the new interests) before that day.

    SECTION 124-1245   Roll-over consequences - original interests were of mixed CGT status, all were pre-UCA  

    124-1245(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you acquire the new interest in exchange for more than one original interest; and


    (b) you started to *hold one or more of the original interests before 20 September 1985; and


    (c) you started to hold one or more of the original interests on or after that day; and


    (d) you did not start to hold any of the original interests on or after 1 July 2001.

    124-1245(2)    
    Each new interest is taken to be 2 separate *CGT assets that are both new interests:


    (a) one (which you are taken to have started to *hold on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which you started to hold the original interests on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001; and


    (b) another (which you are taken to have started to hold before 20 September 1985) representing the extent to which you started to hold the original interests before that day.

    124-1245(3)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *CGT asset mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) in relation to a new interest is worked out under the formula:


      Total post-CGT cost base ×       Market value of new interest      
    Market value of all new interests
     

    where:

    market value of all new interests
    is the total of the *market values of all of the new interests.

    market value of new interest
    is the *market value of the new interest to which the *CGT asset mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) relates.

    total post-CGT cost base
    is the total of the *cost bases of all the original interests that you started to *hold on or after 20 September 1985.


    SECTION 124-1250   Roll-over consequences - some original interests were pre-UCA  

    124-1250(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you acquire the new interest in exchange for more than one original interest; and


    (b) you started to *hold one or more of the original interests ( pre-UCA interests ) before 1 July 2001; and


    (c) you started to hold one or more of the original interests ( post-UCA interests ) on or after that day.

    124-1250(2)    
    If you started to *hold all of the pre-UCA interests on or after 20 September 1985, each new interest is taken to be 2 separate assets that are both new interests:


    (a) one (which you are taken to have started to hold on or after that day and before 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which the original interests are pre-UCA interests; and


    (b) another (which you are taken to have started to hold on or after 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which the original interests are post-UCA interests.

    Apply section 124-1235 to the interest referred to in paragraph (a) as if the pre-UCA interests were the only original interests. Apply Division 40 to the interests referred to in paragraph (b).


    124-1250(3)    
    If you started to *hold all of the pre-UCA interests before 20 September 1985, each new interest is taken to be 2 separate assets that are both new interests:


    (a) one (which you are taken to have started to hold before that day) representing the extent to which the original interests are pre-UCA interests; and


    (b) another (which you are taken to have started to hold on or after 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which the original interests are post-UCA interests.

    Apply section 124-1240 to the new interest referred to in paragraph (a) as if the pre-UCA interests were the only original interests. Apply Division 40 to the new interest referred to in paragraph (b).


    124-1250(4)    
    If you started to *hold one or more of the pre-UCA interests before 20 September 1985 and one or more of the pre-UCA interests on or after that day, each new interest is taken to be 3 separate assets that are all new interests:


    (a) one (which you are taken to have started to hold on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which the original interests that you started to hold on or after 20 September 1985 are pre-UCA interests; and


    (b) another (which you are taken to have started to hold before 20 September 1985) representing the extent to which the original interests that you started to hold before 20 September 1985 are pre-UCA interests; and


    (c) another (which you are taken to have started to hold on or after 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which the original interests are post-UCA interests.

    Apply section 124-1245 to the new interests referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b) as if the pre-UCA interests were the only original interests. Apply Division 40 to the new interest referred to in paragraph (c).


    Division 125 - Demerger relief  

    Guide to Division 125  

    SECTION 125-1   What this Division is about  


    Entities can obtain CGT relief for a demerger.

    Owners of ownership interests in the head entity of a demerger group can obtain a roll-over to defer CGT consequences for the CGT events that happen to their interests under the demerger (see Subdivision 125-B ).

    Capital gains and capital losses made by members of the demerger group from certain CGT events that happen under the demerger are disregarded (see Subdivision 125-C ).

    Note:

    Dividend relief is also available: see section 44 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Subdivision 125-A - Object of this Division  

    SECTION 125-5  

    125-5   Object of this Division  


    The object of this Division is to facilitate the demerging of entities by ensuring that capital gains tax considerations are not an impediment to restructuring a *business.

    Subdivision 125-B - Consequences for owners of interests  

    SECTION 125-50   Guide to Subdivision 125-B  


    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if a CGT event happens to your interests in a company or trust because of a demerger of an entity from the group of which the company or trust is the head entity.

    There are cost base adjustments if you receive new interests under a demerger and no CGT event happens to your original interests.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 125-55   When a roll-over is available for a demerger  

    125-55(1)    
    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:


    (a) you own an *ownership interest in a company or trust (your original interest ); and


    (b) the company or trust is the *head entity of a *demerger group; and


    (c) a *demerger happens to the demerger group; and


    (d) under the demerger, a *CGT event happens to your original interest and you *acquire a new or replacement interest (your new interest ) in the *demerged entity.

    Note 1:

    Section 125-80 sets out what the roll-over is.

    Note 2:

    You have to make cost base adjustments even if there is no CGT event: see section 125-90 .

    Example:

    Peter owns shares (his original interests) in Company A, a public company. Company B is a wholly owned subsidiary of Company A. Company A announces a demerger utilising a proportionate capital reduction and the disposal of all its shares in Company B to its 320,000 shareholders. Following the demerger all of the shareholders in Company A, including Peter, will own all of the shares in Company B (their new interests).


    125-55(2)    
    You cannot choose to obtain a roll-over under this Subdivision for an original interest if:


    (a) you are a foreign resident; and


    (b) the new interest you *acquire under the *demerger in exchange for that original interest is not *taxable Australian property just after you acquire it.

    Note:

    For taxable Australian property , see section 855-15 .


    SECTION 125-60   Meaning of ownership interest and related terms  

    125-60(1)    
    An ownership interest in a company or trust is:


    (a) for a company, a *share in the company or an option, right or similar interest issued by the company that gives the owner an entitlement to *acquire a share in the company; and


    (b) for a trust, a unit or other interest in the trust or an option, right or similar interest issued by the trustee that gives the owner an entitlement to acquire a unit or other interest in the trust.

    125-60(2)    


    However, this Subdivision applies to a *dual listed company voting share in a company that is the *head entity of a *demerger group asif it were not an ownership interest if there are not more than 5 of those *shares in the company.

    125-60(3)    
    A dual listed company voting share is a *share in a company:


    (a) issued:


    (i) (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

    (ii) as part of a *dual listed company arrangement; and

    (iii) mainly for the purpose of ensuring that shareholders of both companies involved in the arrangement vote as a single decision-making body on matters affecting them; and


    (b) that does not carry rights to financial entitlements (except the return of the amount paid up on the share and a dividend that is the equivalent of a dividend paid on an ordinary share).


    125-60(4)    
    A dual listed company arrangement is an *arrangement under which 2 publicly listed companies, while maintaining their separate legal entity status, shareholdings and listings, align their strategic directions and the economic interests of their respective shareholders through:


    (a) the appointment of common (or almost identical) boards of directors, except where the effect of the relevant regulatory requirements prevents this; and


    (b) management of the operations of the 2 companies on a unified basis; and


    (c) the shareholders of both companies voting in effect as a single decision-making body on substantial issues affecting their combined interests; and


    (d) equalised distributions to shareholders in accordance with an equalisation ratio applying between the 2 companies, both generally and in the event of a winding up of one or both of the companies; and


    (e) cross-guarantees as to, or similar financial support for, each other ' s substantial obligations or operations, except where the effect of the relevant regulatory requirements prevents those guarantees or that financial support.


    125-60(5)    
    However, an arrangement is not a dual listed company arrangement unless one but not both of the companies is an Australian resident.

    SECTION 125-65   Meanings of demerger group , head entity and demerger subsidiary  

    125-65(1)    
    A demerger group comprises the *head entity of the group and one or more *demerger subsidiaries.

    Note:

    An entity may be a member of one or more demerger groups.


    125-65(2)    
    A trust cannot be a member of a demerger group unless *CGT event E4 is capable of applying to all of the units and interests in the trust.

    Note:

    A discretionary trust cannot be a member of a demerger group.


    125-65(2A)    


    Neither a corporation sole nor a *complying superannuation entity is a member of a *demerger group.

    125-65(3)    
    A company or trust is the head entity of a *demerger group if no other member of the group owns *ownership interests in the company or trust.

    125-65(4)    
    If apart from this subsection, a company or trust would be the *head entity of a *demerger group and the company or trust, and all of its *demerger subsidiaries, are also demerger subsidiaries of another company or trust in another demerger group, the first-mentioned company or trust is not the head entity of a demerger group.

    125-65(5)    
    A company or trust (the first company or trust ) that would, apart from this subsection, be a member of a demerger group is not a member of the demerger group if:


    (a) the firstcompany or trust owns, either alone or together with another company or trust that would, apart from this subsection, be a member of the *demerger group, more than 20% but less than 80% of the *ownership interests in a *listed public company or *listed widely held trust; and


    (b) the listed public company or listed widely held trust chooses that the first company or trust not be a member of the demerger group.

    125-65(6)    
    A company is a demerger subsidiary of another company or a trust that is a member of a *demerger group if the other company or the trust, either alone or together with other members of the group, owns, or has the right to *acquire, *ownership interests in the company that carry between them:


    (a) the right to receive more than 20% of any distribution of income or capital by the company; or


    (b) the right to exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 20% of the voting power of the company.

    125-65(7)    
    A trust is a demerger subsidiary of another trust or a company that is a member of a *demerger group if the other trust or the company, either alone or together with other members of the group, owns, or has the right to *acquire, *ownership interests in the trust that carry between them the right to receive more than 20% of any distribution of income or capital by the trustee.


    SECTION 125-70   Meanings of demerger , demerged entity and demerging entity  

    125-70(1)    
    A demerger happens to a *demerger group if:


    (a) there is a restructuring of the demerger group; and


    (b) under the restructuring:


    (i) members of the demerger group *dispose of at least 80% of their total *ownership interests in another member of the demerger group to owners of original interests in the *head entity of the demerger group; or

    (ii) at least 80% of the total ownership interests of members of the demerger group in another member of the demerger group end and new interests are issued to owners of original interests in the head entity; or

    (iii) the demerged entity issues sufficient new ownership interests in itself with the result that owners of original interests in the head entity own at least 80% of the total ownership interests in the demerged entity; or

    (iv) some combination of the processes referred to in subparagraphs (i), (ii) and (iii) happens with the effect that members of the demerger group stop owning at least 80% of the total ownership interests owned by members of the demerger group in another member of the group; and
    Note:

    CGT event C2 and CGT event C3 are the only relevant CGT events in a subparagraph (ii) case.


    (c) under the restructuring:


    (i) a *CGT event happens to an original interest owned by an entity in the head entity of the group and the entity *acquires a new interest and nothing else; or

    (ii) no CGT event happens to an original interest owned by an entity in the head entity of the group and the entity acquires a new interest and nothing else; and


    (d) the acquisition by entities of new interests happens only because those entities own or owned original interests; and


    (e) the new interests acquired are:


    (i) if the head entity is a company - ownership interests in a company; or

    (ii) if the head entity is a trust - ownership interests in a trust; and


    (f) (Repealed by No 168 of 2006 )


    (g) neither the original interests nor the new interests are in a trust that is a *non-complying superannuation fund; and


    (h) the requirements of subsection (2) are met.

    Example:

    To continue the example from subsection 125-55(1) , Peter owns 400 post-CGT shares in Company A. Companies A and B are both members of a demerger group. Company A is the head entity of the demerger group and Company B is a demerger subsidiary.

    Company A proceeds to demerge 100% of its shares in Company B to its shareholders.

    Company A enters into a proportionate capital reduction, returning 40 cents per share to its ordinary shareholders. Peter is entitled to $160 (40c times 400 shares) under the capital reduction.

    For Peter, the capital reduction amount of $160 is compulsorily applied to acquire Company A ' s shares in Company B, at $6.75 (a discount of 10% to current market value). Company A rounds up the fractional amounts in calculating the number of whole shares to be distributed to each shareholder. This gives Peter 24 shares in Company B (160 divided by 6.75, rounded up to the nearest whole number).

    Note:

    Acquiring new interests by an owner of original interests may include the allocation of the owner ' s entitlement to new interests to a nominee:

  • • to sell on the owner ' s behalf; or
  • • to hold pending the owner being located.

  • 125-70(2)    
    Each owner (an original owner ) of original interests in the *head entity of the *demerger group must:


    (a) *acquire, under the *demerger, the same proportion, or as nearly as practicable the same proportion, of new interests in the *demerged entity as the original owner owned in the head entity just before the demerger; and


    (b) just after the demerger, have the same proportionate total *market value of *ownership interests in the head entity and demerged entity as the original owner owned in the head entity just before the demerger.

    Note 1:

    There is an exception: see section 125-75 .

    Note 2:

    Dual listed company voting shares are not treated as ownership interests: see section 125-60 .

    Note 3:

    Fractional interests will generally not affect your ability to choose a roll-over.

    Example:

    To continue the example from subsection (1), Company A concludes, given the circumstances of the demerger, that the market values of Peter ' s and the other shareholders ' shares in A and B are expected to be in proportion with their original interests in Company A, and advises the shareholders of this position.


    125-70(3)    
    In working out whether an original owner complies with subsection (2):


    (a) disregard *ownership interests that are original interests the owner owns in the *demerged entity; and


    (b) an anticipated reasonable approximation of the *market value of ownership interests is sufficient.

    Example:

    An anticipated reasonable approximation of market values of ownership interests may include:

  • • valuations provided to shareholders in scheme documents;
  • • the price selected for use under a sale facility;
  • and may be made by reference to long-term value.



    Exception: off-market buy-backs

    125-70(4)    
    A buy-back of *shares that is an off-market purchase for the purposes of Division 16K of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is not a *demerger.

    Exception: roll-over available under another provision

    125-70(5)    
    Circumstances where an owner of original interest can obtain a roll-over under a provision of this Act outside this Division for all of the CGT events that happened to the owner ' s original interests under the circumstances cannot be a demerger .

    Note:

    An owner might be able to obtain a roll-over for the CGT events under Subdivision 124-E , or 124-M or Division 615 .



    Meaning of demerged entity

    125-70(6)    
    An entity that is a former member of a *demerger group is a demerged entity if, under a *demerger that happens to the group, *ownership interests in the entity are acquired by:


    (a) shareholders in the *head entity of the group; or


    (b) unitholders or holders of interests in the head entity of the group.

    Meaning of demerging entity

    125-70(7)    
    An entity that is a member of a *demerger group just before the *CGT event referred to in section 125-155 happens is a demerging entity if, under a *demerger that happens to the group:


    (a) the entity (either alone or together with other members of the demerger group) *dispose of at least 80% of their total *ownership interests in another member of the demerger group to owners of original interests in the *head entity of the demerger group; or


    (b) at least 80% of the total ownership interests of that entity and of other members of the demerger group in another member of the demerger group end and new interests are issued to owners of original interests in the head entity; or

    Note:

    CGT event C2 and CGT event C3 are the only relevant CGT events.


    (c) the demerged entity issues sufficient new ownership interests in itself with the result that owners of original interests in the head entity own at least 80% of the total ownership interests in the demerged entity; or


    (d) some combination of the processes referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) happens with the effect that members of the demerger group stop owning at least 80% of the total ownership interests owned by members of the demerger group in another member of the group.

    SECTION 125-75   Exceptions to subsection 125-70(2)  


    Employee share schemes

    125-75(1)    
    In working out whether the requirements in subsection 125-70(2) are met, disregard each of the *ownership interests described in subsections (2) and (3) if, just before the *demerger, those interests (taking into account either or both of their number and value) represented not more than 3% of the total *ownership interests in the entity.

    125-75(2)    


    An *ownership interest, in a company, that is owned by an entity is disregarded under subsection (1) if:


    (a) the entity acquired a beneficial interest in the ownership interest under an *employee share scheme; and


    (b) these provisions apply to the beneficial interest:


    (i) Subdivision 83A-B and the provisions referred to in paragraphs 83A-33(1)(a) to (c); or

    (ii) Subdivision 83A-B and the provisions referred to in paragraphs 83A-35(1)(a) and (b); or

    (iii) Subdivision 83A-C ; and


    (c) the ownership interest is not a fully-paid ordinary *share.


    125-75(3)    


    An *ownership interest, in a trust, that is owned by an entity is disregarded under subsection (1) if:


    (a) both of the following would apply if Division 83A (about employee share schemes) applied to ownership interests in trusts in the same way as it applies to *shares:


    (i) the entity acquired a beneficial interest in the ownership interest under an *employee share scheme;

    (ii) the provisions referred to in subparagraph (2)(b)(i), (ii) or (iii) apply to the beneficial interest; and


    (b) the ownership interest is not a fully-paid unit.



    Adjusting instruments

    125-75(4)    
    In working out whether the requirements in subsection 125-70(2) are met, disregard each of the *ownership interests described in subsection (5) ( adjusting instruments ) if, just before the *demerger, those interests represented not more than 10%, or such greater percentage (not exceeding 17%) as is prescribed, of the ownership interests in the entity.

    125-75(5)    
    An *ownership interest in a *listed public company or a *listed widely held trust that is the *head entity of a *demerger group is disregarded under subsection (4) if:


    (a) the adjusting instrument was issued on terms that ensure that its value is not adversely affected by an *arrangement undertaken by the company or trust in relation to other ownership interests in the company or trust; and


    (b) if the adjusting instrument can be converted into an ordinary *share in the company or an ordinary unit in the trust, any conversion will occur on a basis:


    (i) that is set out in the terms of the issue of the instrument; and

    (ii) that is adjusted to take into account a capital reduction or a capital reconstruction; and


    (c) before conversion, the owner of the adjusting instrument does not have a right to participate in distributions of profit or capital except as set out in the terms of the issue of the instrument; and


    (d) the adjusting instrument deals with the effect of a *demerger that happens to the demerger group on the value of the instrument.

    Example:

    Some examples of adjusting instruments are:

  • • convertible preference shares, including reset preference shares;
  • • convertible notes;
  • • partly paid shares where the paid-up amount is adjusted to reflect a capital reduction.


  • Additional exceptions

    125-75(6)    
    The regulations may provide that, in working out whether the requirements in subsection 125-70(2) are met, other *ownership interests of a kind specified in the regulations are to be disregarded if, just before the *demerger, those interests represented not more than a prescribed percentage of the ownership interests in the entity.

    125-75(7)    
    However, the total percentage of *ownership interests to be disregarded under this section must not exceed 20% of the ownership interests in the entity.

    SECTION 125-80   What is the roll-over?  

    125-80(1)    
    If you choose the roll-over, a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event happening under the *demerger to an original interest you own is disregarded.

    125-80(2)    
    If you choose the roll-over, the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of:


    (a) each new interest that you are not taken to have *acquired before 20 September 1985; and


    (b) if not all of your original interests ended under the *demerger - each of your remaining original interests that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985;

    is such proportion of the sum of the cost bases of all your original interests that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985 (worked out just before the demerger) as is reasonable having regard to the matters specified in subsection (3).

    Note 1:

    These rules replace the cost base and reduced cost base adjustments in CGT event E4 and CGT event G1.

    Note 2:

    The head entity or the demerging entity may advise you of the proportions.


    125-80(3)    
    The matters are:


    (a) the *market values of your remaining original interests just after the *demerger, or an anticipated reasonable approximation of those market values; and


    (b) the market values of your new interests just after the demerger, or an anticipated reasonable approximation of those market values.

    Example:

    To continue the example from subsection 125-70(2) , Company A advises its shareholders that Company B at that time represents 5% of the market value of the group as a whole. Peter ' s cost base for each of his shares in A is $4.60, and Peter recalculates his cost base as follows:


    Total cost base   =   $1840 (4.60   ×  400 shares)

    to be spread over 400 shares in A and 24 shares in B.


      5% of 1840 = 92
      92 ÷ 24 shares = $3.83 per B share
      1840 − 92 = 1748
      1748 ÷ 400 = $4.37 per A share



    Pre-CGT interests

    125-80(4)    
    The following subsections apply if you choose the roll-over and you *acquired some or all of your original interests before 20 September 1985.

    125-80(5)    
    If you *acquired all of your original interests before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired all of your new interests before that day.

    125-80(6)    
    If you *acquired some of your original interests before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired a reasonable whole number of your new interests before that day having regard to:


    (a) the *market values of your original interests and your remaining original interests just after the *demerger, or an anticipated reasonable approximation of those market values; and


    (b) the market values of your new interests just after the demerger, or an anticipated reasonable approximation of those market values.

    125-80(7)    


    If a proportion, but not all, of your original interests ends under the *demerger and you *acquired some of your original interests before 20 September 1985, that same proportion of those interests you acquired before that day ends.
    Note:

    CGT event K6 may be relevant if you later dispose of your interests that are treated as being pre-CGT.

    Example:

    Bert owned 100 shares in a company of which 50 were acquired pre-CGT. Under a demerger 20 of Bert ' s 100 shares were cancelled in exchange for new interests. As 20% of his shares were cancelled, 10 of his pre-CGT shares are taken to have been cancelled.



    Partial roll-over

    125-80(8)    
    If you choose a roll-over for some but not all of your original interests, you apply the rules in this section as if your original interests for which you chose the roll-over were your only original interests.


    SECTION 125-85   Cost base adjustments where CGT event happens but no roll-over chosen  

    125-85(1)    
    You must adjust the *cost base and *reduced cost base of an *ownership interest you own in a company or trust if:


    (a) a *demerger happens to a *demerger group of which the company or trust is a member; and


    (b) you owned an original interest in the *head entity of the demerger group just before the demerger; and


    (c) a *CGT event happens to the original interest and you *acquire a new interest under the demerger; and


    (d) you do not choose a roll-over under this Subdivision for the original interest.

    125-85(2)    
    The adjustments you must make are the same as the adjustments you would have to make under section 125-80 for the *cost bases and *reduced cost bases of the remaining original interests and new interests just after the *CGT event if you could have chosen a roll-over under this Subdivision for the *demerger and you had done so.


    SECTION 125-90   Cost base adjustments where no CGT event  

    125-90(1)    
    You must adjust the *cost base and *reduced cost base of an *ownership interest you own in a company or trust if:


    (a) a *demerger happens to a *demerger group of which the company or trust is a member; and


    (b) you owned an original interest in the *head entity of the demerger group just before the demerger; and


    (c) no *CGT event happens to the original interest, but you *acquire a new interest under the demerger.

    125-90(2)    
    The adjustments you must make are the same as the adjustments you would have to make under section 125-80 if you could have chosen a roll-over under this Subdivision for the *demerger and you had done so.


    SECTION 125-95  

    125-95   No other cost base adjustment after demerger  


    If you have to make adjustments to the *cost base and *reduced cost base of your *ownership interests under section 125-80 , 125-85 or 125-90 because of a *demerger, no other adjustment can be made under this Act to those cost bases and reduced cost bases because of something that happens under the demerger.
    Note:

    Those sections deal with any value shift that might occur under the demerger and avoid the need for the general value shifting regime to apply.

    SECTION 125-100  

    125-100   No further demerger relief in some cases  


    This Division does not apply to the remaining *ownership interests in a *demerged entity if one or more members of the *demerger group *disposed of or cancelled less than 100% of the total ownership interests of that group in the demerged entity.
    Note:

    After the demerger, a former member of the demerger group can undertake a further demerger to which this Division can apply.

    Subdivision 125-C - Consequences for members of demerger group  

    SECTION 125-150   Guide to Subdivision 125-C  


    Certain capital gains and capital losses that members of a demerger group make under a demerger are disregarded.

    Certain capital losses made under a demerger are reduced where the demerger results in a value shift.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 125-155  

    125-155   Certain capital gains or losses disregarded for demerging entity  


    Any *capital gain or *capital loss a *demerging entity makes from *CGT event A1, *CGT event C2, *CGT event C3 or *CGT event K6 happening to its *ownership interests in a *demerged entity under a *demerger is disregarded.
    Note 1:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .

    Note 2:

    This section will not apply if section 125-100 applies.

    SECTION 125-160  

    125-160   No CGT event J1  


    *CGT event J1 does not happen to a *demerged entity or a member of a *demerger group under a *demerger.

    SECTION 125-165  

    125-165   Adjusted capital loss for value shift under a demerger  


    A *capital loss made by an entity that was a member of a *demerger group from a *CGT event happening to a *CGT asset under a *demerger or after a demerger is reduced to the extent that the capital loss is reasonably attributable to a reduction in the *market value of the asset because of the demerger.
    Example:

    The market value of equity or loan interests in the demerging entity may be reduced by the disposal, for inadequate value, of ownership interests of another member of the demerger group to owners of original interests in the head entity of the group.

    SECTION 125-170   Reduced cost base reduction if demerger asset subject to roll-over  

    125-170(1)    
    The *reduced cost base of a *CGT asset is reduced if:


    (a) the *market valueof the asset is reduced because of a *demerger; and


    (b) after the demerger the asset is *acquired by an entity from another entity (the transferor ) in a situation where the transferor obtained a roll-over for the disposal; and


    (c) the reduction occurred when the transferor owned the asset.

    125-170(2)    
    The *reduced cost base of the asset as determined under the roll-over is reduced just after the roll-over to the extent of the reduction in *market value caused by the *demerger.

    Note:

    The rules in section 125-165 and this section deal with any value shift that might occur under the demerger and avoid the need for the general value shifting regime to apply.


    125-170(3)    
    If the *reduced cost base of a *CGT asset is reduced under this section because of a *demerger, no other adjustment can be made under this Act to that reduced cost base because of something that happens under the demerger.


    Subdivision 125-D - Public trading trusts  

    SECTION 125-225   Guide to Subdivision 125-D  


    This Division applies to corporate unit trusts and public trading trusts as if they were companies.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 125-230  

    125-230   Application of Division to public trading trusts  


    This Division applies to a trust to which section 102S of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for an income year in which a *demerger happens as if:


    (a) the trust were a company; and


    (b) *ownership interests in it were interests in a company.

    Subdivision 125-E - Miscellaneous  

    SECTION 125-235   Share and interest sale facilities  


    Share and interest sale facilities

    125-235(1)    
    An entity (the investor ) is treated as owning an *ownership interest (the roll-over interest ) in a *demerged entity at a time (the deeming time ), if:


    (a) the investor owned an ownership interest in a company or trust that was the *head entity of a *demerger group; and


    (b) a *demerger happens to the demerger group; and


    (c) because:


    (i) a *foreign law impedes the ability of a member of the demerger group to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor; or

    (ii) it would be impractical or unreasonably onerous to determine whether a foreign law impedes the ability of a member of the demerger group to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor;
    it is *arranged that the member will issue or transfer the roll-over interest to another entity (the facility ) under the demerger instead of to the investor; and


    (d) in accordance with that arrangement and as a result of the demerger, the facility:


    (i) becomes the owner of the roll-over interest (which is a new or replacement interest in the demerged entity); and

    (ii) owns the roll-over interest at the deeming time; and


    (e) under the arrangement, the investor is entitled to receive from the facility:


    (i) an amount equivalent to the *capital proceeds of any *CGT event that happens in relation to the roll-over interest (less expenses); or

    (ii) if a CGT event happens in relation to the roll-over interest together with CGT events happening in relation to other ownership interests - an amount equivalent to the investor ' s proportion of the total capital proceeds of the CGT events (less expenses).

    125-235(2)    
    The facility is treated as not owning the roll-over interest at the deeming time.

    125-235(3)    
    This section applies for the purposes of:


    (a) applying this Division in relation to the demerger; and


    (b) item 2 of the table in subsection 115-30(1) , to the extent that it relates to a roll-over under this Division that involves the demerger.


    Division 126 - Same-asset roll-overs  

    Guide to Division 126  

    SECTION 126-1   What this Division is about  

    A same-asset roll-over allows a capital gain or loss an entity makes from disposing of a CGT asset to, or creating a CGT asset in, another entity to be disregarded. For a disposal, certain attributes of the asset are transferred to the receiving entity.

    Subdivision 126-A - Marriage or relationship breakdowns  

    SECTION 126-5   CGT event involving spouses  

    126-5(1)    
    There is a roll-over if a *CGT event (the trigger event ) happens involving an individual (the transferor ) and his or her *spouse (the transferee ), or a former *spouse (also the transferee ), because of:


    (a) a court order under the Family Law Act 1975 or under a *State law, *Territory law or *foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between spouses; or


    (b) a maintenance agreement approved by a court under section 87 of the Family Law Act 1975 or a corresponding agreement approved by a court under a corresponding *foreign law; or


    (c) (Repealed by No 144 of 2008)


    (d) something done under:


    (i) a financial agreement made under Part VIIIA of the Family Law Act 1975 that is binding because of section 90G of that Act; or

    (ii) a corresponding written agreement that is binding because of a corresponding foreign law; or


    (da) something done under:


    (i) a Part VIIIAB financial agreement (within the meaning of the Family Law Act 1975 ) that is binding because of section 90UJ of that Act; or

    (ii) a corresponding written agreement that is binding because of a corresponding foreign law; or


    (e) something done under:


    (i) an award made in an arbitration referred to in section 13H of the Family Law Act 1975 ; or

    (ii) a corresponding award made in an arbitration under a corresponding State law, Territory law or foreign law; or


    (f) something done under a written agreement:


    (i) that is binding because of a State law, Territory law or foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between spouses; and

    (ii) that, because of such a law, prevents a court making an order about matters to which the agreement applies, or that is inconsistent with the terms of the agreement in relation to those matters, unless the agreement is varied or set aside.

    126-5(2)    
    Only these *CGT events are relevant:


    (a) CGT events A1 and B1 (a disposal case ); and


    (b) CGT events D1, D2, D3 and F1 (a creation case ).

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    126-5(3)    
    However, there is no roll-over if:


    (a) the *CGT asset involved is *trading stock of the transferor; or


    (b) for *CGT event B1 - title in the CGT asset does not pass to the transferee at or before the end of the agreement.


    126-5(3A)    


    There is no roll-over because of paragraph (1)(d), (da) or (f) unless the conditions set out in section 126-25 are met.

    126-5(4)    
    A *capital gain or a *capital loss the transferor makes from the *CGT event is disregarded.

    Consequences for the transferee (disposal case)

    126-5(5)    
    For a disposal case where the transferor *acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of the asset ' s *cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is the asset ' s cost base (in the hands of the transferor) at the time the transferee acquired it; and


    (b) the first element of the asset ' s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is worked out similarly.

    Example:

    Your spouse transfers land to you because of a court order under the Family Law Act 1975 . Any capital gain or loss your spouse makes is disregarded.

    If the land ' s cost base at the time you acquired it is $10,000, the first element of the land ' s cost base in your hands becomes $10,000.

    Note 1:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .

    Note 2:

    A roll-over under this Subdivision may have an effect on the transferee ' s main residence exemption: see sections 118-178 and 118-180 .


    126-5(6)    
    For a disposal case where the transferor *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985, the transferee is taken to have acquired it before that day.

    Note:

    A capital gain or loss you make from a CGT asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104 . This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149 .


    126-5(7)    
    For a disposal case where the transferor *disposed of a *collectable or *personal use asset, the transferee is taken to have *acquired one.

    Note 1:

    Capital losses from collectables can be subtracted only from capital gains from collectables: see section 108-10 .

    Note 2:

    Capital losses from personal use assets are disregarded: see section 108-20 .



    Consequences for the transferee (creation case)

    126-5(8)    
    For a creation case, the first element of the asset ' s *cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is the amount applicable under this table. The first element of its *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.


    Creation case
    Event No. Applicable amount
    D1 the *incidental costs the transferor incurred that relate to the trigger event
    .
    D2 the expenditure the transferor incurred to grant the option
    .
    D3 the expenditure the transferor incurred to grant the right
    .
    F1 the expenditure the transferor incurred on the grant, renewal or extension of the lease

    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    SECTION 126-15   CGT event involving company or trustee  

    126-15(1)    
    There are the roll-over consequences in section 126-5 if the trigger event involves a company (the transferor ) or a trustee (also the transferor ) and a *spouse or former spouse (the transferee ) of another individual because of:

    (a)    

    a court order under the Family Law Act 1975 or under a *State law, *Territory law or *foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between spouses; or

    (b)    

    a maintenance agreement approved by a court under section 87 of the Family Law Act 1975 or a corresponding agreement approved by a court under a corresponding *foreign law; or


    (c) (Repealed by No 144 of 2008)

    (d)    

    something done under:

    (i) a financial agreement made under Part VIIIA of the Family Law Act 1975 that is binding because of section 90G of that Act; or

    (ii) a corresponding written agreement that is binding because of a corresponding foreign law; or

    (da)    

    something done under:

    (i) a Part VIIIAB financial agreement (within the meaning of the Family Law Act 1975 ) that is binding because of section 90UJ of that Act; or

    (ii) a corresponding written agreement that is binding because of a corresponding foreign law; or

    (e)    

    something done under:

    (i) an award made in an arbitration referred to in section 13H of the Family Law Act 1975 ; or

    (ii) a corresponding award made in an arbitration under a corresponding State law, Territory law or foreign law; or

    (f)    

    something done under a written agreement:

    (i) that is binding because of a State law, Territory law or foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between spouses; and

    (ii) that, because of such a law, prevents a court making an order about matters to which the agreement applies, or that is inconsistent with the terms of the agreement in relation to those matters, unless the agreement is varied or set aside.

    126-15(2)    


    There are other consequences if:

    (a)    just before the time of the trigger event, an entity (including the transferee) owned another *CGT asset of a kind covered by this table; and

    (b)    the entity *acquired it on or after 20 September 1985; and

    (c)    a *CGT event happens in relation to it.


    Relevant CGT assets
    Item For this transferor: The entity can own these assets:
    1 Company (a) a *share in the company; or
        (b) a loan to the company; or
        (c) an indirect interest (through one or more interposed companies or trusts) in a *share in, or loan to, the company
    2 Trustee (a) an interest or unit in the trust; or
        (b) a loan to the trustee; or
        (c) an indirect interest (through one or more interposed companies or trusts) in an interest or unit in the trust or in a loan to the trustee

    Example:

    An individual owns all the shares in a company. The company owns land. The individual ' s marriage breaks down. A court orders that the company transfer the land it owns to the individual ' s spouse. The individual later sells the shares.


    126-15(3)    


    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the other asset are reduced by an amount that reasonably reflects the fall in its *market value because of the trigger event. The reduction occurs at the time of the trigger event.

    126-15(4)    
    If the entity owning the other asset is also the transferee, the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the other asset are then increased by any amount that is included in the entity ' s assessable income for any income year because of the trigger event.

    Note:

    The reduced cost base may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-170 .


    126-15(5)    


    There is no roll-over because of paragraph (1)(d), (da) or (f) unless the conditions set out in section 126-25 are met.

    SECTION 126-20   Subsequent CGT event happening to roll-over asset where transferor was a CFC or a non-resident trust  

    126-20(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) there is a roll-over for the trigger event under section 126-15 ; and


    (b) the transferor was:


    (i) a *CFC; or

    (ii) a trustee of a trust that is a non-resident trust estate within the meaning of section 102AAB of theIncome Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the income year of the trigger event; and


    (c) section 126-15 is relevant to:


    (i) the calculation of the *attributable income of the CFC under Division 7 of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) the calculation of the attributable income of the trust under Subdivision D of Division 6AAA of Part III of that Act;
    because (ignoring the residency assumptions in that Division or Subdivision) the roll-over asset was not *taxable Australian property; and


    (d) a subsequent *CGT event happens in relation to the roll-over asset.


    126-20(2)    
    In working out the amount of any *capital gain or *capital loss the transferee (or a subsequent owner of the roll-over asset if there is a series of roll-overs until there is no roll-over) makes when a subsequent *CGT event happens in relation to the asset, the modifications specified in Division 7 of Part X, or Subdivision D of Division 6AAA of Part III, of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 apply.


    SECTION 126-25  

    126-25(1)   Conditions for the purposes of subsections 126-5(3A) and 126-15(5)  


    The conditions referred to in subsections 126-5(3A) and 126-15(5) are that:


    (a) at the time of the trigger event:


    (i) the *spouses, or former spouses, involved are separated; and

    (ii) there is no reasonable likelihood of cohabitation being resumed; and


    (b) the trigger event happened because of reasons directly connected with the breakdown of the relationship between the spouses or former spouses.

    126-25(2)    
    For the purposes of this section, the question whether *spouses or former spouses have separated is to be determined in the same way as it is for the purposes of section 48 of the Family Law Act 1975 (as affected by sections 49 and 50 of that Act).

    Subdivision 126-B - Companies in the same wholly-owned group  

    SECTION 126-40   What this Subdivision is about  


    A roll-over may be available for the transfer of a CGT asset between 2 companies, or the creation of a CGT asset by one company in another, if:

  • (a) both companies are members of the same wholly-owned group; and
  • (b) at least one of the companies is a foreign resident.
  • Operative provisions

    SECTION 126-45   Roll-over for members of wholly-owned group  

    126-45(1)    
    There may be a roll-over if a *CGT event (the trigger event ) happens involving a company (the originating company ) and another company (the recipient company ) in the circumstances set out in section 126-50 .

    126-45(2)    
    Only these *CGT events are relevant:


    (a) CGT events A1 and B1 (a disposal case ); and


    (b) CGT events D1, D2, D3 and F1 (a creation case ).

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    126-45(3)    


    However, there is no roll-over for *CGT event B1 if title in the *CGT asset does not pass to the transferee at or before the end of the agreement.
    Note:

    CGT event J1 can happen if the recipient company stops being a 100% subsidiary of a company in the relevant group: see section 104-175.


    SECTION 126-50   Requirements for roll-over  

    126-50(1)    
    The originating company and recipient company must be members of the same *wholly-owned group at the time of the trigger event.

    Note:

    This requirement is taken to be satisfied in the case of the transfer of the life insurance business of a life insurance company: see section 121AS of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    126-50(2)    


    The *CGT asset involved (the roll-over asset ) must not be:


    (a) *trading stock of the recipient company just after the time of the trigger event; or


    (b) a *registered emissions unit *held by the recipient company just after the time of the trigger event.


    126-50(3)    
    If:


    (a) the roll-over asset is a right or *convertible interest referred to in Division 130 , or an option referred to in Division 134 , or an *exchangeable interest; and


    (b) the recipient company *acquires another *CGT asset by exercising the right or option or by converting the convertible interest or in exchange for the disposal or redemption of the exchangeable interest;

    the other asset cannot become *trading stock of the recipient company just after the recipient company acquired it.


    126-50(3A)    


    If:


    (a) the roll-over asset is an option referred to in Division 134 ; and


    (b) the recipient company *acquires another *CGT asset by exercising the option;

    the other asset cannot become a *registered emissions unit *held by the recipient company just after the recipient company acquired it.


    126-50(4)    
    The *ordinary income and *statutory income of the recipient company must not be exempt from income tax because it is an *exempt entity for the income year of the trigger event.


    126-50(5)    


    The requirements in one of the items in this table must be satisfied.


    Additional requirements
    Item At the time of the trigger event the originating company must be: At the time of the trigger event the recipient company must be: The roll-over asset must be taxable Australian property:
    1 Either:

    (a) a foreign resident; or

    (b) an Australian resident but not a *prescribed dual resident
    A foreign resident Either:

    (a) just before and just after the trigger event, for a disposal case; or

    (b) just after that event, for a creation case
    2 A foreign resident An Australian resident but not a *prescribed dual resident Either:

    (a) just before the trigger event, for a disposal case; or

    (b) just after that event, for a creation case


    126-50(6)    


    If the originating company or the recipient company is an Australian resident at the time of the trigger event, that company must:


    (a) be a *member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group at that time; or


    (b) not be a member of a *consolidatable group at that time.


    126-50(7)    


    If the originating company is a foreign resident, it must not have *acquired the *CGT asset described in subsection (8) because of:


    (a) a single *CGT event giving rise to a roll-over under a previous application of this Subdivision (as amended by the New Business Tax System (Consolidation) Act (No. 1) 2002 ) involving an Australian resident originating company other than the company that is the recipient company for the current application of this Subdivision; or


    (b) a series (whether or not it is the longest possible series) of consecutive CGT events giving rise to roll-overs under previous applications of this Subdivision (as amended by the New Business Tax System (Consolidation) Act (No 1) 2002) , the earliest involving an Australian resident originating company other than the company that is the recipient company for the current application of this Subdivision.


    126-50(8)    


    Subsection (7) operates in relation to the *CGT asset:


    (a) that was involved in the trigger event in a disposal case; or


    (b) because of which the originating company was able to create the CGT asset that was involved in the trigger event in a creation case.


    126-50(9)    


    Subsection (7) does not apply if each of the following companies mentioned in that subsection:


    (a) the recipient company for the roll-over under the current application of this Subdivision;


    (b) the Australian resident originating company for the roll-over under:


    (i) for paragraph (7)(a) - the previous application of this Subdivision; or

    (ii) for paragraph (7)(b) - the earliest previous application of this Subdivision for that series of consecutive *CGT events;

    was, at the time of its roll-over, the *head company of the same *MEC group.


    SECTION 126-55   When there is a roll-over  
    Capital gain or no loss

    126-55(1)    
    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) either:


    (i) the trigger event would have resulted in the originating company making a *capital gain, or making no *capital loss and not being entitled to a deduction; or

    (ii) the originating company *acquired the roll-over asset before 20 September 1985; and


    (b) the originating company and recipient company both choose to obtain it.

    Note:

    Section 103-25 sets out when the choice must be made.


    126-55(2)    


    (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)

    SECTION 126-60   Consequences of roll-over  
    Consequences for the originating company in all cases

    126-60(1)    


    A *capital gain the originating company makes from the trigger event is disregarded.

    Consequences for the recipient company (disposal case)

    126-60(2)    
    For a disposal case, if the originating company *acquired the roll-over asset on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of the asset ' s *cost base (in the hands of the recipient company) is the asset ' s cost base (in the hands of the originating company) when the recipient company acquired it; and


    (b) the first element of the asset ' s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the recipient company) is worked out similarly.

    Note 1:

    There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114 .

    Note 2:

    The reduced cost base may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-170 .


    126-60(3)    
    If the originating company *acquired the roll-over asset before 20 September 1985, the recipient company is taken to have acquired it before that day.

    Note 1:

    A capital gain or loss you make from a CGT asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104 . This exemption is removed in some situations: see, for example, Division 149 .

    Note 2:

    Under section 716-855 , where there have been certain roll-overs, the cost base and reduced cost base of pre-CGT assets for the purposes of Part 3-90 (Consolidated groups) are worked out by applying subsection (2), rather than subsection (3), of this section.


    126-60(4)    
    If the trigger event involved a *personal use asset of the originating company, the recipient company is taken to have *acquired one.



    Consequences for the recipient company (creation case)

    126-60(5)    
    For a creation case, the first element of the asset ' s *cost base (in the hands of the recipient company) is the amount applicable under this table. The first element of its *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.


    Creation case
    Event No. Applicable amount
    D1 the *incidental costs the originating company incurred that relate to the trigger event
    .
    D2 the expenditure the originating company incurred to grant the option
    .
    D3 the expenditure the originating company incurred to grant the right
    .
    F1 the expenditure the originating company incurred on the grant, renewal or extension of the lease

    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    Note:

    CGT event J1 may occur if the recipient company stops being a member of the wholly-owned group while still owning the roll-over asset: see section 104-175 .


    126-65   (Repealed) SECTION 126-65 Choosing for no roll-over in loss situation  
    (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)

    126-70   (Repealed) SECTION 126-70 Loss disregarded if intention not realised  
    (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)

    SECTION 126-75   Originating company is a CFC  

    126-75(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) there is a roll-over for the trigger event under this Subdivision; and


    (b) the originating company was a *CFC at the time of the trigger event; and


    (c) this Subdivision is relevant to the calculation of the *attributable income of the originating company under Division 7 of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 because (ignoring the residency assumptions in that Division) the roll-over asset was not *taxable Australian property for the originating company; and


    (d) a subsequent *CGT event happens in relation to the roll-over asset.


    126-75(2)    
    In working out the amount of any *capital gain or *capital loss the recipient company (or a subsequent owner of the roll-over asset if there is a series of roll-overs until there is no roll-over) makes when a subsequent *CGT event happens in relation to the asset, the modifications specified in Division 7 of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 apply.


    126-80   (Repealed) SECTION 126-80 Roll-over asset is an interest in a CFC or FIF  
    (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)

    SECTION 126-85   Effect of roll-over on certain liquidations  

    126-85(1)    


    A *capital gain a company (the holding company ) makes because *shares in its *100% subsidiary are cancelled (an example of *CGT event C2: see section 104-25 ) on the liquidation of the subsidiary is reduced if the conditions in subsection (2) are satisfied. The reduction is worked out under subsection (3).

    126-85(2)    
    These conditions must be satisfied:


    (a) there must be a roll-over under this Subdivision for at least one *CGT asset that the subsidiary *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 (the CGT roll-over asset ) being *disposed of by the subsidiary to the holding company in the course of the liquidation of the subsidiary;


    (b) (Omitted by No 94 of 1999)


    (c) the disposals must either:


    (i) be part of the liquidator's final distribution in the course of the liquidation; or

    (ii) have occurred within 18 months of the dissolution of the subsidiary if they are part of an interim distribution in the course of the liquidation;


    (d) the holding company must have beneficially owned all of the shares in the subsidiary for the whole period from the time of the disposal, or the first disposal, of a CGT roll-over asset until the cancellation of the shares;


    (e) the *market value of the CGT roll-over asset or assets must comprise at least part of the *capital proceeds for the cancellation of the shares in the subsidiary that are beneficially owned by the holding company;


    (f) one or more of the shares that were cancelled (the post-CGT shares ) must have been acquired by the holding company on or after 20 September 1985.


    126-85(3)    


    The reduction of the *capital gain is worked out in this way. Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out (disregarding this section) the sum of the *capital gains and the sum of the *capital losses the holding company would make on the cancellation of its shares in the subsidiary.


    Step 2.

    Work out (disregarding this Subdivision):

  • (a) the sum of the *capital gains the subsidiary would make on the *disposal of its CGT roll-over assets to the holding company; and
  • (b) the sum of the *capital losses it would make except for Subdivision 170-D on the disposal of its *CGT assets to the holding company;
  • in the course of the liquidation assuming the *capital proceeds were the assets ' *market values at the time of the disposal.


    Step 3.

    If, after subtracting the sum of the *capital losses from the sum of the *capital gains, there is an overall capital gain from step 1 and an overall capital gain from step 2, then continue. Otherwise there is no adjustment.


    Step 4.

    Express the number of post-CGT shares as a fraction of the total number of shares the holding company owned in the subsidiary.


    Step 5.

    Multiply the overall *capital gain from Step 2 by the fraction from Step 4.


    Step 6.

    Reduce the overall *capital gain from Step 1 by the amount from Step 5. The result is the *capital gain the holding company makes from the cancellation of its shares in the subsidiary.

    Note:

    This Subdivision is modified in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 419 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    Subdivision 126-C - Changes to trust deeds  

    SECTION 126-125   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision sets out when there is a roll-over for a CGT event that happens because of an amendment to or replacement of the trust deed of a complying approved deposit fund, a complying superannuation fund or a fund that accepts worker entitlement contributions.

    SECTION 126-130   Changes to trust deeds  

    126-130(1)    
    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) *CGT event E1 or E2 happens in relation to a *CGT asset because the trust deed of a *complying approved deposit fund or *complying superannuation fund is amended or replaced; and


    (b) the amendment or replacement is done for the purpose of:


    (i) complying with the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ; or

    (ii) enabling a *complying approved deposit fund to become a *complying superannuation fund; and


    (c) the assets and members of the fund do not change as a consequence of the amendment or replacement.

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    126-130(2)    


    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) *CGT event E1 or E2 happens in relation to a *CGT asset because the trust deed of a fund is amended or replaced; and


    (b) the amendment or replacement is done for the purpose of having:


    (i) the fund endorsed as an approved worker entitlement fund under subsection 58PB(3) of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986 ; or

    (ii) the entity that operates the fund endorsed for the operation of the fund as an approved worker entitlement fund under subsection 58PB(3A) of that Act.


    (c) the assets and members of the fund do not change as a consequence of the amendment or replacement.

    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    SECTION 126-135   Consequences of roll-over  

    126-135(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss made from the *CGT event is disregarded.

    126-135(2)    
    If the fund that owned the *CGT asset just before the time of the *CGT event *acquired it before 20 September 1985, the asset retains its status as a *pre-CGT asset in the hands of the fund that owned it after the time of the event.

    126-135(3)    
    If the fund that owned the *CGT asset just before the time of the *CGT event *acquired it on or after 20 September 1985:


    (a) the first element of the asset's *cost base (in the hands of the fund that owned the asset after the time of the event) is its cost base just before that time; and


    (b) the first element of the asset's *reduced cost base asset is worked out similarly; and


    (c) the fund that owned the asset after the time of the event is taken to have acquired the asset at that time.


    Subdivision 126-D - Small superannuation funds  

    SECTION 126-140   CGT event involving small superannuation funds  


    Payment splits under Family Law Act

    126-140(1)    
    There is a roll-over if:

    (a)    an interest in a *small superannuation fund is subject to a *payment split; and

    (b)    

    the *non-member spouse in relation to that interest serves a waiver notice under section 90XZA or 90YZQ of the Family Law Act 1975 in respect of that interest; and

    (c)    

    as a result of serving the notice, the trustee (the transferor ) of the fund transfers a *CGT asset to the trustee (the transferee ) of another *complying superannuation fund for the benefit of the non-member spouse.
    Note:

    CGT event E2 may apply to the transfer.



    Payment splits under the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations

    126-140(2)    
    There is also a roll-over if:

    (a)    an interest in a *small superannuation fund (the first fund ) is subject to a *payment split; and

    (b)    

    as a result of the payment split, thereis a transfer or roll over of benefits, for the benefit of the *non-member spouse, from the first fund to another *complying superannuation fund; and

    (c)    the transfer is under provisions of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 dealing with superannuation interests that are subject to payment splits; and

    (d)    in order to give effect to the payment split, the trustee (the transferor ) of the first fund transfers a *CGT asset to the trustee (the transferee ) of the other fund for the benefit of the non-member spouse.

    Note:

    CGT event E2 may apply to the transfer.



    Transfer of own interest in a small superannuation fund

    126-140(2A)    


    There is also a roll-over if:

    (a)    an individual has an interest in a *small superannuation fund (the first fund ); and

    (b)    the individual ' s *spouse, or former spouse, also has an interest in the first fund; and

    (c)    the trustee (the transferor ) of the first fund transfers a *CGT asset to the trustee (the transferee ) of another *complying superannuation fund for the benefit of the individual; and

    (d)    the transfer is in accordance with an award, order or agreement mentioned in subsection (2B) ; and

    (e)    if the transfer is part of a series of transfers in accordance with the award, order or agreement - the individual will no longer have an interest in the first fund when the series of transfers is complete; and

    (f)    if the transfer is not part of a series of transfers in accordance with the award, order or agreement - as a result of the transfer, the individual no longer has an interest in the first fund; and

    (g)    there has not been a roll-over under subsection (1) or (2) or this subsection in relation to the transfer of another CGT asset from the first fund, where the transfer was:


    (i) made because of the award, order or agreement; and

    (ii) for the benefit of that spouse, or former spouse; and

    (h)    

    if the transfer is in accordance with an agreement mentioned in paragraph (2B)(d) , (da) or (e) , the conditions in subsection (2C) are satisfied.
    Note:

    CGT event E2 may apply to the transfer.


    126-140(2B)    


    The awards, orders and agreements are:

    (a)    an award made in an arbitration referred to in section 13H of the Family Law Act 1975 or a corresponding award made in an arbitration under a corresponding *State law, *Territory law or *foreign law; or

    (b)    

    a court order made under section 79 , subsection 90AE(2) or 90AF(2) or section 90SM or 90YX of the Family Law Act 1975 ; or

    (c)    

    a court order made under a State law, Territory law or foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between *spouses that corresponds to an order made under subsection 90AE(2) or 90AF(2) or section 90SM of the Family Law Act 1975 ; or

    (d)    a financial agreement made under Part VIIIA of the Family Law Act 1975 that is binding because of section 90G of that Act or a corresponding written agreement that is binding because of a corresponding foreign law; or

    (da)    

    a Part VIIIAB financial agreement (within the meaning of the Family Law Act 1975 ) that is binding because of section 90UJ of that Act; or

    (e)    

    a written agreement:

    (i) that is binding under a State law, Territory law or foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between spouses; and

    (ii) that, because of such a law, prevents a court making an order about matters to which the agreement applies, or that is inconsistent with the terms of the agreement in relation to those matters, unless the agreement is varied or set aside.

    126-140(2C)    


    The conditions are that:

    (a)    at the time of the transfer:


    (i) the *spouses, or former spouses, involved are separated; and

    (ii) there is no reasonable likelihood of cohabitation being resumed; and

    (b)    

    the transfer happened because of reasons directly connected with the breakdown of the relationship between the spouses or former spouses.

    126-140(2D)    


    For the purposes of subsection (2C) , the question whether *spouses, or former spouses, have separated is to be determined in the same way as it is for the purposes of section 48 of the Family Law Act 1975 (as affected by sections 49 and 50 of that Act).

    Roll-over consequences

    126-140(3)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the transferor makes from the transfer of the asset is disregarded.

    126-140(4)    
    If the transferor *acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985:

    (a)    the first element of the asset ' s *cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is the asset ' s cost base (in the hands of the transferor) at the time the transferee acquired it; and

    (b)    the first element of the asset ' s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is worked out similarly.

    126-140(5)    
    If the transferor *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985, the transferee is taken to have acquired it before that day.

    Note:

    A capital gain or loss you make from a CGT asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104 . This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149 .


    Subdivision 126-E - Entitlement to shares after demutualisation and scrip for scrip roll-over  

    SECTION 126-185   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision sets out when there is a roll-over for a CGT event that happens because a beneficiary becomes absolutely entitled to a share as against the trustee where the trustee obtained a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M following a demutualisation.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 126-190  

    126-190   When there is a roll-over  


    There is a roll-over if:


    (a) an insurance company demutualises; and


    (b) the trustee of a trust holds a *share issued under the demutualisation in trust for an entity to whom the share would have been issued if the entity could, and were in a position to, prove the entity's entitlement to the share; and


    (c) the trustee obtains a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M of this Act (Scrip for scrip roll-over) for the share because the trustee exchanges the share for a share (the replacement share ) in another company (whether or not the trustee receives something in addition to the replacement share); and


    (d) a *CGT event happens in relation to the replacement share because the entity becomes absolutely entitled to the share as against the trustee.

    Note:

    This Subdivision does not apply to the demutualisation of a private health insurer: see section 315-160 .

    SECTION 126-195   Consequences of roll-over  

    126-195(1)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes from the *CGT event is disregarded.

    126-195(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base of the replacement share for the entity is the cost base of the replacement share in the hands of the trustee just before the *CGT event happened. The first element of the *reduced cost base of the replacement share for the entity is worked out similarly.

    Example:

    The JB mutual insurance company demutualises, issuing shares in JB Limited to its policyholders. It is unable to locate some of its policyholders so it establishes a trust and issues shares to the trustee on behalf of those policyholders. Steve is one of those policyholders (being potentially entitled to 50 shares).

    JB Limited is taken over by PVDM Limited. Members of JB are issued with 2 shares in PVDM for each share they have in JB. The trustee obtains a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M for the exchange. Each PVDM share held by the trustee has a cost base and reduced cost base of $15.

    Steve writes to the trustee and proves his entitlement to the shares held in trust for him.

    There is a roll-over under this Subdivision so that any capital gain or loss made by the trustee is disregarded. The first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of each of Steve ' s PVDM shares is $15.


    (Repealed) Subdivision 126-F - Transfer of assets of superannuation funds to meet licensing requirements  

    126-200   (Repealed) SECTION 126-200 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    (Repealed) Operative provisions

    126-205   (Repealed) SECTION 126-205 Object of this Subdivision  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    126-210   (Repealed) SECTION 126-210 When there is a roll-over and what its effects are  
    (Repealed by No 109 of 2014)

    Subdivision 126-G - Transfer of assets between certain trusts  

    Guide to Subdivision 126-G

    SECTION 126-215  

    126-215   What this Subdivision is about  


    Roll-overs may be available when CGT assets are transferred between certain trusts.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    126-220 Object of this Subdivision
    126-225 When a roll-over may be chosen
    126-230 Beneficiaries ' entitlements not be discretionary etc.
    126-235 Exceptions for roll-over
    126-240 Consequences for the trusts
    126-245 Consequences for beneficiaries - general approach for working out cost base etc.
    126-250 Consequences for beneficiaries - other approach for working out cost base etc.
    126-255 No other cost base etc. adjustment for beneficiaries
    126-260 Giving information to beneficiaries
    126-265 Interest sale facilities

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 126-220  

    126-220   Object of this Subdivision  


    The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that CGT considerations are not an impediment to the restructure of trusts, whilst ensuring that subsequent changes to the manner and extent to which beneficiaries can benefit from the trusts are subject to appropriate tax consequences.

    SECTION 126-225   When a roll-over may be chosen  

    126-225(1)    
    A roll-over may be chosen for a *CGT asset (the roll-over asset ) if:


    (a) the trustee of a trust (the transferring trust ):


    (i) creates a trust (the receiving trust ), by declaration or settlement, over one or more CGT assets that include the roll-over asset; or

    (ii) transfers the roll-over asset to an existing trust (the receiving trust );
    at a particular time (the transfer time ); and


    (b) if subparagraph (a)(ii) applies - the receiving trust has no CGT assets immediately before the transfer time, other than any or all of the following:


    (i) small amounts of cash or debt;

    (ii) its rights under an *arrangement, if (collectively) those rights only facilitate the transfer of assets to it from the transferring trust; and


    (c) just after the transfer time:


    (i) each of the trusts has the same beneficiaries; and

    (ii) the receiving trust has the same *classes of *membership interests that the transferring trust had just before, and has just after, the transfer time; and

    (iii) the sum of the *market values of each beneficiary ' s membership interests of a particular class in both trusts is substantially the same as the sum of the market values, just before the transfer time, of the beneficiary ' s membership interests of that class in both trusts; and


    (d) the requirement in section 126-230 is met; and


    (e) the exceptions in section 126-235 do not apply.



    Exception if other roll-over assets already transferred

    126-225(2)    
    However, paragraph (1)(b) does not apply if:


    (a) the roll-over asset is transferred to the receiving trust under an *arrangement; and


    (b) the roll-over asset was an asset of the transferring trust just before the arrangement was made; and


    (c) at least one other asset of the receiving trust:


    (i) is an asset for which a roll-over was obtained under this Subdivision for the trusts; and

    (ii) is an asset over which the receiving trust was created, or was transferred by the transferring trust to the receiving trust under the arrangement; and


    (d) the transfer time is in the income year for the transferring trust that includes the earliest transfer time (the start time ) for the assets covered by paragraph (c).

    Obtaining the roll-over

    126-225(3)    
    The roll-over only happens if both the trustee of the transferring trust and the trustee of the receiving trust choose to obtain it.

    SECTION 126-230   Beneficiaries ' entitlements not be discretionary etc.  

    126-230(1)    
    The conditions in subsections (2) and (3) must be met:


    (a) if subsection 126-225(2) applies - at all times during the period:


    (i) starting at the start time; and

    (ii) ending at the transfer time; and


    (b) otherwise - at the transfer time.

    CGT event E4 is capable of happening

    126-230(2)    
    The first condition is met at a particular time if, at that time, *CGT event E4 is capable of happening to all of the *membership interests in each of the trusts.

    Note:

    A roll-over cannot be chosen if either trust is a discretionary trust.



    Beneficiaries ' entitlements not discretionary

    126-230(3)    
    The second condition is met at a particular time if, at that time, the manner or extent to which each beneficiary of each trust can benefit from the trust is not capable of being significantly affected by the exercise, or non-exercise, of a power.

    126-230(4)    
    However, if both trusts are *managed investment trusts, disregard a power if the power ' s existence at that time does not significantly affect the *market value at that time of each *membership interest in each of the trusts.

    SECTION 126-235   Exceptions for roll-over  


    Foreign trusts

    126-235(1)    
    An exception applies for a *CGT asset if:


    (a) the receiving trust is a *foreign trust for CGT purposes for the income year that includes the transfer time; and


    (b) the roll-over asset is not *taxable Australian property just after the transfer time.

    Public trading trusts

    126-235(2)    


    Another exception applies if either trust is a trust to which section 102S of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the income year that includes the transfer time.

    Choices

    126-235(3)    
    Another exception applies if, just after the transfer time:


    (a) a choice (however described) under a provision of a *taxation law is in force for either of the trusts in relation to particular circumstances; and


    (b) the same choice (however described) under that provision for the other trust in relation to those circumstances (a mirror choice ) is not also in force; and


    (c) the absence of a mirror choice would or could have an ongoing effect on the calculation of an entity's *net income, or taxable income, for:


    (i) the entity's income year that includes the transfer time; or

    (ii) a later income year.

    126-235(4)    
    However, the exception in subsection (3) does not apply if:


    (a) the other trust makes a mirror choice before the first time after the transfer time when the absence of the mirror choice would affect the calculation of an entity's *net income, or taxable income, for an income year; or


    (b) it would not be reasonable for subsection (3) to apply.

    Note:

    For paragraph (a), the other trust must still be able, under the relevant provision of the taxation law, to make the mirror choice.


    126-235(5)    
    If, just after the transfer time:


    (a) a choice (however described) referred to in paragraph (3)(a) is in force for either of the trusts (the first choice ); and


    (b) a provision of a *taxation law:


    (i) prevents the revocation or variation of that choice; or

    (ii) sets out a consequence for an entity if that choice is revoked or varied;

    that provision is taken to apply for a mirror choice, in force for the other trust at or after that time, in a way corresponding to the way in which it applies for the first choice.

    Note:

    For example, if the provision sets out consequences that flow from the revocation of the first choice, then those consequences will also flow if the mirror choice is revoked.


    SECTION 126-240   Consequences for the trusts  


    Disregard any capital gain or loss

    126-240(1)    
    If the roll-over is chosen, disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee of the transferring trust makes from:


    (a) creating the receiving trust over the roll-over asset; or


    (b) transferring the roll-over asset to the receiving trust;

    at the transfer time.



    Adjust roll-over asset's cost base and reduced cost base

    126-240(2)    
    If the roll-over is chosen:


    (a) the first element of the roll-over asset's *cost base, in the hands of the receiving trust, is its cost base just before the transfer time; and


    (b) the first element of the roll-over asset's *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    Any pre-transfer losses of receiving trust cannot be utilised

    126-240(3)    
    If the roll-over is chosen:


    (a) any *net capital loss of the receiving trust for an income year ending before the transfer time cannot be applied after the transfer time to reduce an amount of that trust's *capital gains; and


    (b) the sum of the receiving trust's *capital losses for the income year that includes the transfer time (the transfer year ) is reduced by an amount equal to any net capital loss that the trust would have had for that year had that year ended just before the transfer time; and


    (c) any *tax loss of the receiving trust for an income year ending before the transfer time cannot be deducted after the transfer time from an amount of that trust's assessable income or *net exempt income; and


    (d) the sum of the receiving trust's deductions for the transfer year is reduced by an amount equal to any tax loss that the trust would have had for that year had that year ended just before the transfer time.

    References in this subsection to the transfer time are to be read as references to the start time if subsection 126-225(2) applies.

    Note:

    Subsection 126-225(2) applies if the roll-over asset is transferred to the receiving trust after an earlier roll-over under this Subdivision, for another asset, was obtained for the trusts.



    Pre-CGT assets

    126-240(4)    
    If:


    (a) the roll-over is chosen; and


    (b) the transferring trust last *acquired the roll-over asset before 20 September 1985;

    the receiving trust is taken to have acquired it before that day.


    SECTION 126-245   Consequences for beneficiaries - general approach for working out cost base etc.  

    126-245(1)    
    If the roll-over is chosen, each of the following:


    (a) the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each of a beneficiary ' s *membership interests in each trust;


    (b) the time each of the beneficiary ' s membership interests in the receiving trust is treated as having been *acquired;

    is adjusted under this section for the transfer time unless the beneficiary has chosen for them to be adjusted under section 126-250 .

    Note:

    The beneficiary can choose for these things to be adjusted once for several consecutive transfer times (for multiple roll-over assets) if the beneficiary owned the interests at all of those times (see section 126-250 ).



    First element of cost base of interests in transferring trust

    126-245(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base, just after the transfer time, of each of the beneficiary ' s *membership interests in the transferring trust is an amount equal to such proportion of the interest ' s cost base just before the transfer time as is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the *market value of the interest just after the transfer time, or areasonable approximation of that market value; and


    (b) the market value of the interest just before the transfer time, or a reasonable approximation of that market value.

    First element of cost base of interests in receiving trust

    126-245(3)    
    The first element of the *cost base, just after the transfer time, of each of the beneficiary ' s *membership interests in the receiving trust is such amount so that the sum of:


    (a) the cost base, just before the transfer time, of that membership interest in the receiving trust; and


    (b) if, just after the transfer time, that interest in the receiving trust corresponds to at least one of the beneficiary ' s membership interests in the transferring trust - the cost base, just before the transfer time, of each of those corresponding membership interests in the transferring trust; and


    (c) if, just after the transfer time, that interest in the receiving trust corresponds to a proportion of one of the beneficiary ' s membership interests in the transferring trust - that proportion of the cost base, just before the transfer time, of that corresponding membership interest in the transferring trust;

    reasonably approximates:


    (d) if paragraph (b) applies - the sum of the cost bases, just after the transfer time, of each of the interests referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b); and


    (e) if paragraph (c) applies - the sum of:


    (i) the cost base, just after the transfer time, of the interest referred to in paragraph (a); and

    (ii) the proportion of the cost base, just after the transfer time, of the interest referred to in paragraph (c).


    First element of reduced cost base of interests in each trust

    126-245(4)    
    The first element of the *reduced cost base, just after the transfer time, of each of the beneficiary ' s *membership interests in each trust is worked out similarly.

    Time of acquisition for interests in the receiving trust

    126-245(5)    
    Each of the beneficiary ' s *membership interests in the receiving trust is treated as having been *acquired just after the transfer time.

    Time of acquisition for pre-CGT interests in the receiving trust

    126-245(6)    
    However, if one or more of the beneficiary ' s *membership interests in the transferring trust were *pre-CGT assets just before the transfer time, the beneficiary is treated as having *acquired before 20 September 1985 its interests in the receiving trust that correspond to those interests in the transferring trust.

    SECTION 126-250   Consequences for beneficiaries - other approach for working out cost base etc.  

    126-250(1)    
    This section applies if the beneficiary owns one or more *membership interests in the transferring trust at all times during the period:


    (a) starting just before this time (the starting time ):


    (i) the transfer time; or

    (ii) the transfer time for an asset referred to in paragraph 126-225(2)(c) (assuming subsection 126-225(2) applies); and


    (b) ending just after this time (the ending time ):


    (i) the transfer time (assuming this is not also the starting time); or

    (ii) a later time in the transfer year that is the transfer time for another asset for which a roll-over is obtained under this Subdivision for the trusts.
    Note:

    Subsection 126-225(2) applies if the roll-over asset is transferred to the receiving trust after an earlier roll-over under this Subdivision, for another asset, was obtained for the trusts.


    126-250(2)    
    The beneficiary may choose for each of the following:


    (a) the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each of those *membership interests and of the beneficiary ' s corresponding membership interests in the receiving trust;


    (b) the time each of those corresponding interests in the receiving trust is treated as having been *acquired;

    to be adjusted under subsection (3) for the period.


    126-250(3)    
    For each of the interests referred to in subsection (2), subsections 126-245(2) , (3) , (4) , (5) and (6) apply as if:


    (a) references in those subsections to just before the transfer time were references to just before the starting time; and


    (b) references in those subsections to just after the transfer time were references to just after the ending time.

    SECTION 126-255  

    126-255   No other cost base etc. adjustment for beneficiaries  


    If a beneficiary of the trusts makes adjustments under section 126-245 or 126-250 to the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the beneficiary's *membership interests in relation to the *CGT event that is:


    (a) the creation of the receiving trust over the roll-over asset; or


    (b) the transfer of the roll-over asset to the receiving trust;

    no other adjustment is to be made under this Act to those cost bases and reduced cost bases because of something that happens in relation to that event.

    Note:

    This section prevents the general value shifting regime from applying in relation to the event because sections 126-245 and 126-250 deal with any value shift that might occur.

    SECTION 126-260   Giving information to beneficiaries  


    Beneficiaries must be given particulars of the roll-over

    126-260(1)    
    If the roll-over is chosen, the trustee of the transferring trust must, within 3 months after the end of the transfer year, send written notice of the particulars set out in subsection (2) to each of the trust's beneficiaries:


    (a) by post to the address most recently notified by the beneficiary as the beneficiary's address; or


    (b) by any other means notified by the beneficiary for receiving correspondence from the trust.

    Note:

    The trustee may also notify beneficiaries of other details of the roll-over.



    The particulars that must be given

    126-260(2)    
    The particulars are as follows:


    (a) the roll-over asset's transfer time;


    (b) sufficient information to enable a beneficiary to work out which of the beneficiary's *membership interests in the receiving trust correspond to each of the beneficiary's membership interests in the transferring trust;


    (c) the *market value of each of the membership interests held by the beneficiary in the transferring trust just after the roll-over asset's transfer time, or a reasonable approximation of that market value;


    (d) the market value of each of the membership interests held by the beneficiary in the transferring trust just before the roll-over asset's transfer time, or a reasonable approximation of that market value.

    Offence

    126-260(3)    
    A trustee commits an offence if the trustee contravenes subsection (1).

    Penalty: 30 penalty units.


    126-260(4)    
    An offence against subsection (3) is an offence of strict liability.

    Note:

    For strict liability, see section 6.1 of the Criminal Code .



    If the transferring trust has multiple trustees

    126-260(5)    
    If the transferring trust has 2 or more trustees, the obligation imposed by subsection (1) is imposed on each of the trustees, but may be discharged by any of the trustees.

    Note:

    Each of the trustees commits an offence against subsection (3) if none of them discharges the obligation imposed by subsection (1).


    126-260(6)    
    In a prosecution of a trustee for an offence against subsection (3) for an act or omission contravening subsection (1), it is a defence if the trustee proves that the trustee:


    (a) did not aid, abet, counsel or procure the act or omission; and


    (b) was not in any way knowingly concerned in, or party to, the act or omission (whether directly or indirectly and whether by any act or omission of the trustee).

    Note:

    A defendant bears a legal burden in relation to the matters in subsection (6): see section 13.4 of the Criminal Code .



    Obligations of beneficiary unaffected if not notified of roll-over

    126-260(7)    
    A failure by a trustee to comply with subsection (1) does not affect the application of section 126-245 to the beneficiary.

    SECTION 126-265   Interest sale facilities  


    Interest sale facilities

    126-265(1)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, an entity (the investor ) is treated as owning a *membership interest (the roll-over interest ) in the receiving trust at a time (the deeming time ), if:


    (a) the investor owned a membership interest in the transferring trust; and


    (b) a trust is created, or a transfer happens, (the transaction ) as mentioned in paragraph 126-225(1)(a) in relation to *CGT assets of the transferring trust; and


    (c) because:


    (i) a *foreign law impedes the ability of the receiving trust to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor; or

    (ii) it would be impractical or unreasonably onerous to determine whether a foreign law impedes the ability of the receiving trust to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor;
    it is *arranged that the receiving trust will issue or transfer the roll-over interest to another entity (the facility ) under the transaction instead of to the investor; and


    (d) in accordance with that arrangement and as a result of the transaction, the facility:


    (i) becomes the owner of the roll-over interest; and

    (ii) owns the roll-over interest at the deeming time; and


    (e) under the arrangement, the investor is entitled to receive from the facility:


    (i) an amount equivalent to the *capital proceeds of any *CGT event that happens in relation to the roll-over interest (less expenses); or

    (ii) if a CGT event happens in relation to the roll-over interest together with CGT events happening in relation to other membership interests - an amount equivalent to the investor ' s proportion of the total capital proceeds of the CGT events (less expenses).

    126-265(2)    
    The facility is treated as not owning the roll-over interest at the deeming time.


    Division 128 - Effect of death  

    SECTION 128-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division sets out what happens when you die and a CGT asset you owned just before dying devolves to your legal personal representative or passes to a beneficiary in your estate.

    It also contains rules about what happens when a joint tenant dies.

    General rules  

    SECTION 128-10  

    128-10   Capital gain or loss when you die is disregarded  
    When you die, a *capital gain or *capital loss from a *CGT event that results for a *CGT asset you owned just before dying is disregarded.

    Note 1:

    Section 104-215 sets out an exception to this rule if the CGT asset passes to a beneficiary in your estate who is:

  • • an exempt entity; or
  • • the trustee of a complying superannuation entity; or
  • • a foreign resident.
  • Note 2:

    There is a special indexation rule for deceased estates: see section 114-10 .

    SECTION 128-15   Effect on the legal personal representative or beneficiary  

    128-15(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if a *CGT asset you owned just before dying:


    (a) devolves to your *legal personal representative; or


    (b) *passes to a beneficiary in your estate.

    Note 1:

    Section 128-25 has different rules if the asset passes to a beneficiary in your estate who is the trustee of a complying superannuation entity.

    Note 2:

    If the beneficiary is an exempt entity, Division 57 in Schedule 2D to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 has rules about exempt entities that become taxable. It sets out what the entity is taken to have purchased its assets for when it becomes taxable.

    Note 3:

    If the beneficiary is a foreign resident, Subdivision 855-B sets out what happens if the beneficiary becomes an Australian resident. The beneficiary is taken to have acquired each asset owned just before becoming an Australian resident for the market value of the asset at that time.


    128-15(2)    
    The *legal personal representative, or beneficiary, is taken to have *acquired the asset on the day you died.

    Special rule for legal personal representative

    128-15(3)    
    Any *capital gain or *capital loss the *legal personal representative makes if the asset *passes to a beneficiary in your estate is disregarded.

    Cost base rules for both

    128-15(4)    


    This table sets out the modifications to the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *CGT asset in the hands of the *legal personal representative or beneficiary.


    Modifications to cost base and reduced cost base
    Item For this kind of CGT asset: The first element of the asset ' s cost base is: The first element of the asset ' s reduced cost base is:
    1 One you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985, except one covered by item 2, 3, 3A or 3B the *cost base of the asset on the day you died the *reduced cost base of the asset on the day you died
    2 One that was *trading stock in your hands just before you died the amount worked out under section 70-105 the amount worked out under section 70-105
    3 A *dwelling that was your main residence just before you died if:
    (a) the dwelling was not then being used for the *purpose of producing assessable income; and
    (b) you were not then an *excluded foreign resident
    the *market value of the *dwelling on the day you died the market value of the *dwelling on the day you died
    3A If you were a foreign resident just before you died - an asset that was not *taxable Australian property just before you died, except one covered by item 2 the *market value of the asset on the day you died the market value of the asset on the day you died
    3B One that *passes to a trustee of a *special disability trust the *market value of the asset on the day you died the market value of the asset on the day you died
    4 One you *acquired before 20 September 1985 the *market value of the asset on the day you died the market value of the asset on the day you died

    Note 1:

    Section 70-105 has a general rule that the person on whom the trading stock devolves is taken to have bought it for its market value. There are some exceptions though.

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 118-B contains other rules about dwellings acquired through deceased estates.

    Note 3:

    The rule in item 3 in the table does not apply to a dwelling that devolved to your legal personal representative, or passed to a beneficiary in your estate, on or before 7.30 pm on 20 August 1996: see section 128-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .



    Further rule for a beneficiary

    128-15(5)    
    A beneficiary can include in the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the asset any expenditure that the *legal personal representative would have been able to include at the time the asset *passes to the beneficiary. The beneficiary can include the expenditure on the day the representative incurred it.

    Example:

    You die on 1 May 1995 owning land. On 15 June 1995 your legal personal representative pays $500 council rates for the land.

    On 31 July 1995 your representative transfers it to a beneficiary in your estate, who is taken to have acquired it on 1 May 1995.

    The beneficiary can include the $500 in the third element of the cost base of the land. It is included on 15 June 1995.



    Collectables and personal use assets

    128-15(6)    
    The *legal personal representative or beneficiary is taken to have *acquired a *collectable or a *personal use asset if:


    (a) you acquired it on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (b) it was a *collectable or a *personal use asset (as appropriate) in your hands when you died.

    Note 1:

    Capital losses from collectables can be used only to reduce capital gains from collectables: see section 108-10 .

    Note 2:

    Capital losses from personal use assets are disregarded: see section 108-20 .


    SECTION 128-20   When does an asset pass to a beneficiary?  

    128-20(1)    
    A *CGT asset passes to a beneficiary in your estate if the beneficiary becomes the owner of the asset:


    (a) under your will, or that will as varied by a court order; or


    (b) by operation of an intestacy law, or such a law as varied by a court order; or


    (c) because it is appropriated to the beneficiary by your legal personal representative in satisfaction of a pecuniary legacy or some other interest or share in your estate; or


    (d) under a deed of arrangement if:


    (i) the beneficiary entered into the deed to settle a claim to participate in the distribution of your estate; and

    (ii) any consideration given by the beneficiary for the asset consisted only of the variation or waiver of a claim to one or more other *CGT assets that formed part of your estate.

    (It does not matter whether the asset is transmitted directly to the beneficiary or is transferred to the beneficiary by your *legal personal representative.)


    128-20(2)    
    A *CGT asset does not pass to a beneficiary in your estate if the beneficiary becomes the owner of the asset because your *legal personal representative transfers it under a power of sale.


    SECTION 128-25   The beneficiary is a trustee of a superannuation fund etc.  

    128-25(1)    


    This section has rules about *cost base and *reduced cost base that are relevant if you die and a *CGT asset you owned just before dying *passes to a beneficiary in your estate who (when the asset passes) is the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity.
    Note:

    A capital gain or loss is also made: see section 104-215 .


    128-25(2)    


    The beneficiary is taken to have *acquired the asset on the day you died. The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset is its *market value on that day.

    128-25(3)    
    The beneficiary can include in the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the asset any expenditure that your *legal personal representative would have been able to include at the time the asset *passes to the beneficiary. The beneficiary can include the expenditure on the day the representative incurred it.


    Special rules for joint tenants  

    SECTION 128-50   Joint tenants  

    128-50(1)    
    This section has rules that are relevant if a *CGT asset is owned by joint tenants and one of them dies.

    128-50(2)    
    The survivor is taken to have *acquired (on the day the individual died) the individual's interest in the asset. If there are 2 or more survivors, they are taken to have acquired that interest in equal shares.

    Note:

    Joint tenants are treated as owning a CGT asset in equal shares: see section 108-7 .


    128-50(3)    
    If the individual who died *acquired his or her interest in the asset on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of the *cost base of the interest each survivor is taken to have acquired is:


    Cost base of the interest of the individual who died
        (worked out on the day the individual died)    
    Number of survivors

    The first element of the *reduced cost base of the interest each survivor is taken to have *acquired is worked out similarly.

    Example:

    In 1999 2 individuals buy land for $50,000 as joint tenants. Each one is taken to have a 50% interest in it. On 1 May 2001 one of them dies.

    The survivor is taken to have acquired the interest of the individual who died on 1 May 2001. If the cost base of that interest on that day is $27,000, the survivor is taken to have acquired that interest for that amount.


    128-50(4)    


    If the individual who died *acquired his or her interest in the asset before 20 September 1985, the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the interest each survivor is taken to have acquired is:


    *Market value of the interest of the individual who died
          (worked out on the day the individual died)      
    Number of survivors

    Note:

    There is a special indexation rule for surviving joint tenants: see section 114-10 .


    Division 130 - Investments  

    Guide to Division 130  

    SECTION 130-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out the rules for these kinds of investments:

  • • bonus shares and units; and
  • • rights; and
  • • convertible interests; and
  • • shares acquired under an employee share scheme; and
  • • exchangeable interests; and
  • • exploration investments.
  • Most are about modifying the cost base and reduced cost base of a CGT asset.

    Subdivision 130-A - Bonus shares and units  

    SECTION 130-15   Acquisition time and cost base of bonus equities  




    Operative provisions

    SECTION 130-20   Issue of bonus shares or units  

    130-20(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if:


    (a) you own *shares in a company or units in a unit trust (the original equities ); and


    (b) the company issues other shares, or the trustee issues other units, (the bonus equities ) to you in relation to the original equities.


    130-20(2)    
    The first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base for the bonus equities includes:


    (a) for *shares - any part of the shares that are a *dividend (or taken to be a dividend under subsection 45(2) or 45C(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ); and


    (b) for units - any part of the other units that are or will be included in your assessable income.

    You are taken to have *acquired the bonus equities when they were issued.

    Note 1:

    There are special indexation rules for cost base modifications: see Division 114 .

    Note 2:

    The amounts of calls you pay on partly-paid equities will also form part of the first element of their cost base and reduced cost base.

    Note 3:

    There is a special rule for shares issued on or before 30 June 1987: see subsection 130-20(2) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Note 4:

    Certain capital distributions are taken to be dividends under subsections 45(2) and 45C(1) if a company has entered into a capital streaming or dividend substitution arrangement.


    130-20(3)    


    This table sets out what happens if:


    (a) none of the shares are a *dividend (or taken to be a dividend under subsection 45(2) or 45C(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ); or


    (b) none of the other units are or will be included in your assessable income.

    Note:

    Certain capital distributions are taken to be dividends under subsections 45(2) and 45C(1) if a company has entered into a capital streaming or dividend substitution arrangement.


    Modifications where neither a dividend nor assessable
    Item In this situation: You are taken to have *acquired the bonus equities when: There is this effect:
    1 You *acquire the original equities on or after 20 September 1985 You *acquired the original equities You apportion the first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base for the original equities in a reasonable way over both the original and bonus equities
    .
    2 You *acquire the original equities before 20 September 1985 and an amount has been paid for the bonus equities that you were required to pay The liability to pay the amount arose The first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base for the bonus equities includes their *market value just before that time
    .
    3 You *acquire the original equities before 20 September 1985 and the bonus equities are fully paid You *acquired the original equities Any *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the bonus equities is disregarded
    .
    4 You *acquire the original equities before 20 September 1985 and the bonus equities are partly paid but no amount has been paid since the issue of the bonus equities You *acquired the original equities Any *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the bonus equities is disregarded

    The amount paid or payable can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    Note 1:

    The amounts of calls you pay on partly-paid equities will also form part of the first element of their cost base and reduced cost base.

    Note 2:

    There is a special rule for bonus equities issued on or before 1 pm on 10 December 1986 that affects item 2 of the table: see subsection 130-20(3) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    130-20(3A)    


    If only a part of a capital benefit that is bonus equities is a *dividend, or is taken to be a dividend under subsection 45(2) or 45C(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , you apportion the first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base for the original equities in a reasonable way over both the original equities and the bonus equities.

    130-20(4)    


    The modifications in this section are not made if, for the income year in which the bonus equities are issued, the unit trust is a public trading trust within the meaning of section 102R of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .
    Note:

    Subsection 26BC(9E) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about securities lending arrangements) modifies the operation of this section.


    Subdivision 130-B - Rights  

    SECTION 130-40   Exercise of rights  

    130-40(1)    
    The table in this section sets out the modifications to the rules about *cost base and *reduced cost base that happen if you exercise rights to *acquire:


    (a) *shares, or options to acquire shares, in a company; or


    (b) units, or options to acquire units, in a unit trust.

    Note:

    For rights acquired under employee share schemes, see Division 83A , Subdivision 130-D and Division 134 .


    130-40(2)    
    The modifications happen only if:


    (a) you did not pay for the rights and the condition in subsection (3) is satisfied; or


    (b) the condition in subsection (4) is satisfied.

    The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    130-40(3)    
    When you were issued the rights, you must:


    (a) already own shares in, or *convertible interests issued by, the company or a company that is a member of the same *wholly-owned group (the original shares or interests ); or


    (b) already own units in, or convertible interests issued by the trustee of, the unit trust (the original units or interests ).


    130-40(4)    


    You must have *acquired the rights from an entity that already owned shares, units or convertible interests of the kind referred to in subsection (3).

    130-40(5)    
    The company that is a member of the same *wholly-owned group mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) includes a company that would cease to be a member of that group by the exercise of the rights.

    130-40(6)    


    The rights to *acquire units or to acquire an option to acquire units in a unit trust must have been issued by the trustee after 28 January 1988.


    Modifications on exercise of rights
    Item In this situation: The modification is...
    1 You exercise rights issued to you to *acquire the *shares, units or options. The first element of your *cost base for the shares, units or options is the sum of:
        (a) the cost base of the rights at the time of exercise; and
        (b) any amount paid to exercise the rights, except to the extent that the amount is represented in the paragraph (a) amount; and
        (c) all the amounts to be added under subsection (6A).
        The first element of their *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.
    2 You exercise rights you *acquired from another entity to acquire the *shares, units or options. The first element of your *cost base for the shares, units or options is the sum of:
        (a) the cost base of the rights at the time of exercise; and
        (b) any amount paid to exercise the rights, except to the extent that the amount is represented in the paragraph (a) amount; and
        (c) all the amounts to be added under subsection (6A).
        The first element of their *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.
    3 You exercise rights issued to you to *acquire the *shares, units or options, and you acquired the original shares or *convertible interests, or the original units or convertible interests, before 20 September 1985. The first element of your *cost base for the shares, units or options is the sum of:
    (a) the *market value of the rights when they were exercised; and
        (b) any amount paid to exercise the rights, except to the extent that the amount is represented in the paragraph (a) amount; and
        (c) all the amounts to be added under subsection (6A).
        The first element of their *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.


    130-40(6A)    
    An amount is to be added under this subsection if a *capital gain made from the right has been reduced under section 118-20 . This is so even though a capital gain that is made on exercise is disregarded under subsection (7). The amount to be added is the amount of the reduction.

    Note:

    For example, a capital gain made on the exercise of the right under section 118-20 may be reduced because an amount is included in the owner ' s assessable income under subsection 26BB(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about assessing a gain on disposal or redemption of a traditional security) or section 159GS of that Act (about balancing adjustments on transfer of a qualifying security).


    130-40(7)    
    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the exercise of the rights is disregarded.

    Note 1:

    The exercise of the rights would be an example of CGT event C2 (about a CGT asset ending).

    Note 2:

    There are transitional rules for some rights: see section 130-40 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Note 3:

    The effect of this Subdivision is modified in 2 cases by sections 102AAZBA (about non-resident trusts) and 414 (about CFC ' s) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    SECTION 130-45   Timing rules  
    Acquisition of rights

    130-45(1)    


    If you *acquired the rights from the company or trustee, you are taken to have acquired the rights when you acquired the original shares or interests or the original units or interests.

    Acquisition of shares, units or options on exercise of rights

    130-45(2)    
    You are taken to have *acquired the new *shares, units or options when you exercise the rights.


    SECTION 130-50  

    130-50   Application to options  
    This Subdivision applies to options in the same way that it applies to rights.

    Subdivision 130-C - Convertible interests  

    SECTION 130-60   Shares or units acquired by converting a convertible interest  

    130-60(1)    


    This table sets out the modification to the rules about *cost base and *reduced cost base that happens if you *acquire *shares, or units in a unit trust, by converting a *convertible interest.


    Conversion of a convertible interest
    Item In this situation: The modification is...
    1 You *acquire *shares or units in a unit trust by converting a *convertible interest that is a *traditional security. The first element of the *cost base of the shares or units is the sum of:
    (a) the cost base of the convertible interest at the time of conversion; and
        (b) any amount paid to convert the convertible interest, except to the extent that the amount is represented in the paragraph (a) amount; and
        (c) all the amounts to be added under subsection (1A).
        The first element of their *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.
    2 You *acquire *shares (except shares acquired under an *employee share scheme) by converting a *convertible interest that is not a *traditional security. The first element of the *cost base of the shares is the sum of:
    (a) the cost base of the convertible interest at the time of conversion; and
    (b) any amount paid to convert the convertible interest, except to the extent that the amount is represented in the paragraph (a) amount; and
        (c) all the amounts to be added under subsection (1A).
        The first element of their *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.
    3 You *acquire units in a unit trust by converting a *convertible interest (except one that is a *traditional security) that was issued by the trustee of the unit trust after 28 January 1988. The first element of the *cost base of the units is the sum of:
    (a) the cost base of the convertible interest at the time of conversion; and
    (b) any amount paid to convert the convertible interest, except to the extent that the amount is represented in the paragraph (a) amount; and
        (c) all the amounts to be added under subsection (1A).
        The first element of their *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.


    130-60(1A)    


    An amount is to be added under this subsection if a *capital gain from the *convertible interest has been reduced under section 118-20 . This is so even though a capital gain that is made on conversion is disregarded under subsection (3). The amount to be added is the amount of the reduction.
    Note:

    For example, a capital gain made on the conversion under section 118-20 may be reduced because an amount is included in the owner ' s assessable income under subsection 26BB(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about assessing a gain on disposal or redemption of a traditional security) or section 159GS of that Act (about balancing adjustments on transfer of a qualifying security).

    S 130-60(1A) inserted by No 163 of 2001, s 3 and Sch 1 item 29. For application provisions, see note under Div 974 heading.


    130-60(1B)    


    The payment to convert the convertible interest can include giving property (see section 103-5 ).

    130-60(2)    


    You are taken to have *acquired the shares or units when the conversion of the convertible interest happened.

    S 130-60(2) amended by No 163 of 2001, s 3 and Sch 1 item 30, by substituting " interest " for " note " . For application provisions, see note under Div 974 heading.

    S 130-60(2) amended by No 114 of 2000.


    130-60(3)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from converting the convertible interest is disregarded.
    Note 1:

    The conversion of the convertible interest would be an example of CGT event C2 (about a CGT asset ending).

    Note 2:

    There are transitional rules for some convertible notes: see section 130-60 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    Subdivision 130-D - Employee share schemes  

    SECTION 130-75  

    130-75   Objects of Subdivision  


    The objects of this Subdivision are:


    (a) to recognise that:


    (i) Division 83A contains the primary rules for taxing gains on *ESS interests acquired under *employee share schemes; and

    (ii) *capital gains and *capital losses on such interests should usually be disregarded during the period in which Division 83A applies to them; and


    (b) to align the treatment of ESS interests under Division 83A and the CGT provisions by, for example:


    (i) turning off certain special CGT rules; and

    (ii) extending some of the deeming provisions of that Division into the CGT provisions; and


    (c) to disregard *employee share trusts for most CGT purposes, by treating ESS interests owned by such trusts as being directly owned by the beneficiaries of the trusts.

    SECTION 130-80   ESS interests acquired under employee share schemes  


    Capital gains and losses

    130-80(1)    


    Disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss to the extent that it results from a *CGT event if:


    (a) the CGT event happens in relation to an *ESS interest you *acquire under an *employee share scheme; and


    (b) the CGT event is not CGT event E4, G1 or K8; and


    (c) if Subdivision 83A-B applies to the interest - the time of the acquisition is the time when the CGT event happens; and


    (d) if Subdivision 83A-C applies to the interest:


    (i) the time of the acquisition is the time when the CGT event happens; or

    (ii) the CGT event happens on or before the *ESS deferred taxing point for the ESS interest.

    130-80(2)    


    Subsection (1) does not apply if:


    (a) Subdivision 83A-C applies to the *ESS interest; and


    (b) the *CGT event happens because you forfeit or lose the ESS interest (other than by disposing of it) on or before the *ESS deferred taxing point for the interest.

    General acquisition rule

    130-80(3)    


    Subsection 109-5(2) (about when you acquire a CGT asset) does not apply to a *CGT asset and a *CGT event if:


    (a) the CGT asset is:


    (i) a *share; or

    (ii) a right to acquire a beneficial interest in a share; and


    (b) the CGT event is CGT event A1; and


    (c) you acquire an *ESS interest; and


    (d) the ESS interest is a beneficial interest in the share or right; and


    (e) Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the ESS interest.

    Market value substitution rule

    130-80(4)    


    Sections 112-20 and 116-30 (about the market value substitution rule) do not apply to the extent that they relate to:


    (a) you acquiring an *ESS interest to which Subdivision 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies; or


    (b) you:


    (i) forfeiting an ESS interest; or

    (ii) forfeiting or losing an ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right (without you having disposed of the interest or exercised the right);
    if Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C applies to the ESS interest (ignoring section 83A-310 ); or


    (c) you acquiring an ESS interest that:


    (i) is a beneficial interest in a right; and

    (ii) is an ESS interest to which the provisions referred to in paragraphs 83A-33(1)(a) to (c) (about start ups) apply.

    SECTION 130-85   Interests in employee share trusts  


    Scope

    130-85(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you *acquire an *ESS interest under an *employee share scheme; and


    (b) Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C applies to the ESS interest; and


    (c) the ESS interest is, or arises because of, an interest you hold in an *employee share trust.

    Application of Division 83A, Part 3-1 and this Part

    130-85(2)    
    Division 83A (Employee share schemes), Part 3-1 (Capital gains and losses: general topics) and this Part apply as if you were absolutely entitled to the relevant *share or right:


    (a) from the time of acquisition of the *ESS interest; and


    (b) until you no longer have an ESS interest in the share or right.

    Note 1:

    An interest you hold in an employee share trust may give rise to an ESS interest because of the operation of section 83A-320 .

    Note 2:

    As a result of subsection (2) of this section, CGT event E5 might happen at the time of acquisition. This may result in the trustee making a capital gain. However, any capital gain made by the beneficiary would be disregarded under section 130-80 .


    130-85(3)    


    However, if this section applies to you because an *associate of yours *acquired the *ESS interest, Division 83A , this Part and Part 3-3 apply as if your associate were absolutely entitled to the relevant *share or right (instead of you):


    (a) either:


    (i) if Subdivision 83A-B applies to the ESS interest - from the time of acquisition; or

    (ii) if Subdivision 83A-C applies to the ESS interest - from immediately after the *ESS deferred taxing point for the ESS interest; and


    (b) until your associate no longer has an ESS interest in the share or right.

    Note:

    Once the ESS interest has been taxed to you under Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C , section 83A-305 (which treats the interest as having been acquired by you, rather than your associate) is no longer relevant. Subsection (3) of this section ensures that your associate then gets the same tax treatment as you would have, had you originally acquired the interest. This does not, however, imply a disposal from you to your associate.



    Meaning of employee share trust

    130-85(4)    


    An employee share trust , for an *employee share scheme, is a trust whose sole activities are:


    (a) obtaining *shares or rights in a company; and


    (b) ensuring that *ESS interests in the company that are beneficial interests in those shares or rights are provided under the employee share scheme to employees, or to *associates of employees, of:


    (i) the company; or

    (ii) a *subsidiary of the company; and


    (c) other activities that are merely incidental to the activities mentioned in paragraphs (a) and (b).


    SECTION 130-90   Shares held by employee share trusts  


    Shares held for future acquisition under employee share schemes

    130-90(1A)    


    Disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss made by an *employee share trust to the extent that it results from a *CGT event, if:


    (a) immediately before the event happens, an *ESS interest is a *CGT asset of the trust; and


    (b) either of the following subparagraphs applies:


    (i) the event is CGT event E5, and the event happens because a beneficiary of the trust becomes absolutely entitled to the ESS interest as against the trustee;

    (ii) the event is CGT event E7, and the event happens because the trustee *disposes of the ESS interest to a beneficiary of the trust; and


    (c) Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the ESS interest.



    Shares held to satisfy the future exercise of rights acquired under employee share schemes

    130-90(1)    


    Disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss made by an *employee share trust, or a beneficiary of the trust, to the extent that it results from a *CGT event, if:


    (a) the CGT event is CGT event E5 or E7; and


    (b) the CGT event happens in relation to a *share; and


    (c) the beneficiary had acquired a beneficial interest in the share by exercising a right; and


    (d) the beneficiary ' s beneficial interest in the right was an *ESS interest to which Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applied.

    130-90(2)    


    Subsection (1A) or (1) does not apply if the beneficiary acquired the beneficial interest in the *share for more than its *cost base in the hands of the *employee share trust at the time the *CGT event happens.

    SECTION 130-95  

    130-95   Shares and rights in relation to ESS interests  


    For the purposes of Part 3-1 (Capital gains and losses: general topics) and this Part, treat a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *share or right in the same way as a CGT event that happens in relation to an *ESS interest, if:


    (a) Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the ESS interest; and


    (b) the ESS interest forms part of the share or right.

    SECTION 130-97  

    130-97   Application of certain provisions of Division 83A  


    The following provisions have effect for the purposes of this Subdivision in the same way as they have for the purposes of Division 83A :


    (a) section 83A-130 (about takeovers and restructures);


    (b) section 83A-305 (about associates);


    (c) section 83A-320 (about trusts);


    (d) section 83A-325 (about relationships similar to employment);


    (e) section 83A-335 (about stapled securities);


    (f) section 83A-340 (about indeterminate rights).

    Subdivision 130-E - Exchangeable interests  

    SECTION 130-100  

    130-100   Exchangeable interest  


    An exchangeable interest is a *traditional security or *qualifying security that:


    (a) was issued on the basis that it will or may be:


    (i) disposed of to the issuer of the traditional security or the qualifying security or to a *connected entity of the issuer of the traditional security or the qualifying security; or

    (ii) redeemed;
    in exchange for *shares in a company that is neither:

    (iii) the issuer of the traditional security or the qualifying security; nor

    (iv) a connected entity of the issuer of the traditional security or the qualifying security; and


    (b) was issued on or after 1 July 2001.

    SECTION 130-105   Shares acquired in exchange for the disposal or redemption of an exchangeable interest  


    Cost base and reduced cost base

    130-105(1)    
    The table has effect:


    Exchange of an exchangeable interest
    Item In this situation: The rules about cost base and reduced cost base are modified in this way...
    1 You *acquire shares in a company in exchange for the disposal of an *exchangeable interest, and the disposal of the exchangeable interest was to:

    (a) the issuer of the exchangeable interest; or

    (b) a *connected entity of the issuer of the exchangeable interest.
    The first element of the *cost base of the shares is the sum of:

    (a) the cost base of the exchangeable interest at the time of the disposal; and

    (b) any amount paid for the exchange, except to the extent that the amount is represented in the paragraph (a) amount; and

    (c) all the amounts to be added under subsection (2).

    The first element of their *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.
    2 You *acquire shares in a company in exchange for the redemption of an *exchangeable interest. The first element of the *cost base of the shares is the sum of:

    (a) the cost base of the exchangeable interest at the time of the redemption; and
        (b) any amount paid for the exchange, except to the extent that the amount is represented in the paragraph (a) amount; and
        (c) all the amounts to be added under subsection (2).
        The first element of their *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.


    130-105(2)    
    An amount is to be added under this subsection if a *capital gain on the disposal or redemption of the exchangeable interest has been reduced under section 118-20 . This is so even though a capital gain that is made on the disposal or redemption of the exchangeable interest is disregarded under subsection (4). The amount to be added is the amount of the reduction.

    130-105(3)    
    The payment for the exchange can include giving property (see section 103-5 ).

    Other CGT consequences

    130-105(4)    
    The table has effect:


    Exchange of an exchangeable interest
    Item In this situation: This is the result:
    1 You *acquire shares in a company in exchange for the disposal of an *exchangeable interest, and the disposal of the exchangeable interest was to:

    (a) the issuer of the exchangeable interest; or

    (b) a *connected entity of the issuer of the exchangeable interest.
    (a) you are taken to have acquired the shares when the disposal of the exchangeable interest happened; and

    (b) a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the disposal of the exchangeable interest is disregarded.
    2 You *acquire shares in a company in exchange for the redemption of an *exchangeable interest. (a) you are taken to have acquired the shares when the redemption of the exchangeable interest happened; and

    (b) a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the redemption of the exchangeable interest is disregarded.



    Application

    130-105(5)    
    This section applies to the disposal or redemption of an *exchangeable interest on or after 1 July 2001.


    Subdivision 130-F - Exploration investments  

    SECTION 130-110   Reducing the reduced cost base before disposal  

    130-110(1)    
    This section applies if:

    (a)    

    an entity (the minerals explorer ) issues a *share in the minerals explorer to another entity (the investor ) during the 2017-18, 2018-19, 2019-20, 2020-21, 2021-22, 2022-23, 2023-24 or 2024-25 income year; and

    (b)    the Commissioner makes a determination under section 418-101 allocating exploration credits to the minerals explorer for the income year in which the share is issued; and

    (c)    the share is issued to the investor on or after the day on which the Commissioner ' s determination is made; and

    (d)    the share is an *equity interest.


    130-110(2)    
    The *reduced cost base of the *share is to be reduced immediately before the disposal of the share by the amount worked out as follows:


    The *corporate tax rate for the minerals explorer for the income year in which the *share is issued × The amount paid up by the investor on the share during the investment period

    where:

    investment period
    means the period, within the income year in which the *share is issued to the investor, that:


    (a) begins on the day on which the Commissioner makes the determination mentioned in paragraph (1)(b); and


    (b) ends at the end of the income year.


    Division 132 - Leases  

    SECTION 132-1  

    132-1   Lessee incurs expenditure to get lease term varied or waived  
    If the lessee of property incurs expenditure in obtaining the consent of the lessor to vary or waive a term of the lease, the fourth element of the lease's *cost base and *reduced cost base includes the amount of that expenditure.

    The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    SECTION 132-5  

    132-5   Lessor pays lessee for improvements  
    The fourth element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of property that was subject to a lease includes any payment (because of the lease expiring or being surrendered or forfeited) by the lessor to the lessee for expenditure of a capital nature incurred by the lessee in making improvements to the lease property.

    The payment or expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    SECTION 132-10   Grant of a long-term lease  

    132-10(1)    
    These rules apply if *CGT event F2 happens for a lessor of property.

    132-10(2)    
    For any later *CGT event that happens to the land or the lessor ' s lease of it, its *cost base and *reduced cost base (including the cost base and reduced cost base of any building, part of a building, structure or improvement that is treated as a separate *CGT asset) excludes:


    (a) any expenditure incurred before *CGT event F2 happens; and


    (b) the *cost of any *depreciating asset for which the lessor has deducted or can deduct an amount for the asset ' s decline in value under this Act.

    Note:

    Subdivision 108-D sets out when a building, structure or improvement is treated as a separate CGT asset.


    132-10(3)    


    The fourth element of the property ' s *cost base and *reduced cost base includes any payment by the lessor to the lessee to vary or waive a term of the lease or for the forfeiture or surrender of the lease, reduced by the amount of any *input tax credit to which the lessor is entitled for the variation or waiver.

    132-10(4)    
    The expenditure or payment can include giving property: see section 103-5 .


    SECTION 132-15   Lessee of land acquires reversionary interest of lessor  

    132-15(1)    


    This table sets out what happens if:


    (a) the lessee of land *acquires the reversionary interest of the lessor in the land; and


    (b) Subdivision 124-J (roll-over provisions for Crown leases) does not apply to the acquisition.


    Lessee acquires reversionary interest of lessor
    Item In this situation: The lessee is taken to have *acquired the land at this time: The lessee is taken to have acquired the land for:
    1 The lease was originally granted for 99 years or more When the lease was granted or assigned to the lessee Any premium the lessee paid for the grant or assignment of the lease, plus the amount the lessee paid to *acquire the reversionary interest
    .
    2 The lease was originally granted for less than 99 years When the lessee *acquired the reversionary interest (a) if the lessee *acquired the lease after 19 September 1985 - any premium the lessee paid for the grant or assignment of the lease, plus the amount the lessee paid to acquire the reversionary interest; or
          (b) if the lessee acquired the lease before 20 September 1985 - the *market value of the land when the lessee acquired it


    132-15(2)    
    All the payments can include giving property: see section 103-5 .

    Note:

    CGT events F1 to F5 deal specifically with leases. See also (in particular) CGT event C2 (about cancellation, surrender and similar endings).


    Division 134 - Options  

    SECTION 134-1   Exercise of options  

    134-1(1)    


    This table sets out the effects of the exercise of an option (including an option that has been renewed or extended) on the *cost bases and *reduced cost bases of the grantor and the entity that exercises the option (the grantee ).


    Exercise of options
    Item In this situation: Effect of cost base and reduced cost base:
    1 Option binds grantor to:
    (a) *dispose of a *CGT asset; or
    (b) create (including grant or issue) a CGT asset (call option)
    For the grantee
    The first element of the grantee ' s *cost base and *reduced cost base for the CGT asset is what the grantee paid for the option (or to renew or extend it) plus any amount the grantee paid to exercise it
    For the grantor
    See section 116-65
    2 Option binds grantor to *acquire a *CGT asset (put option) For the grantor
    The first element of the grantor ' s *cost base and *reduced cost base for the asset acquired is any amount paid to exercise the option reduced by any payment received by the grantor for the option (or to renew or extend it)
    For the grantee
    The second element of the grantee ' s cost base and reduced cost base for the asset acquired by the grantor includes any payment the grantee made to acquire the option (or to renew or extend it)

    Note 1:

    If you granted, renewed or extended an option, CGT event C3 or D2 may happen.

    Note 2:

    Item 1 in the table is modified for certain options granted before 20 September 1985: see section 134-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Note 3:

    Item 1 in the table is modified for ESS interests acquired under employee share schemes: see Division 83A and section 112-97 .

    Note 4:

    This Division has no operation in relation to an option acquired under an employee share scheme if the option is exercised before the ESS deferred taxing point for the option: see Subdivision 130-D . Division 83A applies instead.


    134-1(2)    
    All the payments can include giving property: see section 103-5 . EXAMPLES

    Example 1:

    Steven obtains an option to buy a yacht (for $75,000) from Tom. Steven pays $5,000 for the option.

    Steven exercises the option. The first element of his cost base and reduced cost base for the yacht includes the expenditure he incurred for the option.

    So, the first element of his cost base and reduced cost base for the yacht is:


      $75,000   +   $5,000   =   $80,000  

    Example 2:

    An entity owns 1,000 shares in a company. Bill grants the entity an option which, if exercised, would require him to buy the shares for $2 each. The entity pays Bill 10 cents per share for the option.

    The entity exercises the option. Bill paid $2,000 for the shares. He received $100 from the entity for granting the option.

    The first element of Bill ' s cost base and reduced cost base for the shares is:


      $2,000   −   $100   =   $1,900  

    In working out whether the entity made a capital gain or loss on the sale of the shares, the second element of its cost base (and reduced cost base) includes the $100 the entity paid for the option.


    134-1(4)    


    A *capital gain or *capital loss the grantee makes from exercising the option is disregarded. However, this rule does not apply if the grantee *acquired the option under a trust restructure (see Subdivision 124-N ) and, on exercising the option, held the resulting asset as an item of *trading stock.
    Note 1:

    The exercise of the option would be an example of CGT event C2 (about a CGT asset ending).

    Note 2:

    There is an exemption for the grantor if the option is exercised: see subsection 104-40(5) .


    134-1(5)    
    This Division does not apply to rights or options to which Subdivision 130-B applies.

    Note:

    Subdivision 130-B deals (amongst other things) with rights and options issued by a company or trust where you did not pay or give anything to acquire them.


    134-1(6)    


    This Division does not apply to:


    (a) an option to the extent that the option binds the grantor to *dispose of *foreign currency; or


    (b) an option to the extent that the option binds the grantor to *acquire *foreign currency.


    (Repealed) Division 136 - Foreign residents  

    Division 137 - Granny flat arrangements  

    Subdivision 137-A - When CGT events do not happen  

    SECTION 137-1   What this Subdivision is about  


    A CGT event does not happen when certain granny flat arrangements are entered into, varied or terminated.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 137-10   Meaning of key terms  

    137-10(1)    
    An individual holds a granny flat interest in a *dwelling under an *arrangement if the individual has a right to occupy the dwelling for life that has been conferred by the arrangement.

    137-10(2)    
    An individual is eligible for a granny flat interest at a particular time if:

    (a)    the individual reached *pension age at or before that time; or

    (b)    the individual:


    (i) needs, because of a disability, assistance to carry out most day-to-day activities; and

    (ii) is likely to continue to need that assistance, because of that disability, for at least 12 months after that time.

    137-10(3)    
    This Subdivision applies:

    (a)    to a *dwelling ' s *adjacent land in a corresponding way to the way Subdivision 118-B applies to the adjacent land; or

    (b)    to an *adjacent structure of a flat or home unit in a corresponding way to the way Subdivision 118-B applies to the adjacent structure.

    Note:

    Subsections 118-120(1) and (5) provide that Subdivision 118-B (about main residences) applies to adjacent land and adjacent structures as if they were a dwelling.


    SECTION 137-15  

    137-15   CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is entered into  


    A *CGT event does not happen, to the extent it relates to creating a *granny flat interest in a *dwelling under an *arrangement by entering into the arrangement at a particular time (the start time ), if:

    (a)    the individual who holds, or who is to hold, the granny flat interest under the arrangement is *eligible for a granny flat interest at the start time; and

    (b)    another individual:


    (i) holds an *ownership interest in the dwelling at the start time; or

    (ii) agrees, under the arrangement, to *acquire an ownership interest in a dwelling that is to be the dwelling in which the first-mentioned individual is to hold the granny flat interest; and

    (c)    at the start time, both individuals are parties to the arrangement; and

    (d)    the arrangement:


    (i) is in writing; and

    (ii) indicates an intention for the parties to the arrangement to be legally bound by it; and

    (e)    the arrangement is not of a commercial nature.

    SECTION 137-20  

    137-20   CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is varied  


    A *CGT event does not happen, to the extent it relates to creating or varying a *granny flat interest in a *dwelling under an *arrangement by varying the arrangement at a particular time (the variation time ), if:

    (a)    the individual who holds, or who is to hold, the granny flat interest under the arrangement (as varied) is *eligible for a granny flat interest at the variation time; and

    (b)    another individual:


    (i) holds an *ownership interest in the dwelling at the variation time; or

    (ii) agrees, under the arrangement (as varied), to *acquire an ownership interest in a dwelling that is to be the dwelling in which the first-mentioned individual is to hold the granny flat interest; and

    (c)    at the variation time, both individuals are parties to the arrangement (as varied); and

    (d)    the arrangement (as varied):


    (i) is in writing; and

    (ii) indicates an intention for the parties to the arrangement to be legally bound by it; and

    (e)    the arrangement (as varied) is not of a commercial nature.

    SECTION 137-25  

    137-25   CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is terminated  


    A *CGT event does not happen, to the extent that it relates to terminating a *granny flat interest in a *dwelling under an *arrangement by terminating the arrangement, if:

    (a)    section 137-15 applied so that a CGT event did not happen when the arrangement was entered into; or

    (b)    section 137-20 applied so that a CGT event did not happen when the arrangement was varied.

    (Repealed) Division 138 - Value shifts between companies under common ownership  

    (Repealed) Division 139 - Value shifting through debt forgiveness  

    (Repealed) Division 140 - Share value shifting  

    Division 149 - When an asset stops being a pre-CGT asset  

    Subdivision 149-A - Key concepts  

    SECTION 149-10  

    149-10   What is a pre-CGT asset?  
    A *CGT asset that an entity owns is a pre-CGT asset if, and only if:


    (a) the entity last acquired the asset before 20 September 1985; and


    (b) the entity was not, immediately before the start of the 1998-99 income year, taken under:


    (i) former subsection 160ZZS(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) Subdivision C of Division 20 of former Part IIIA of that Act;
    to have acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (c) the asset has not stopped being a pre-CGT asset of the entity because of this Division.

    Note:

    There are transitional rules for assets that stopped being pre-CGT assets under the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 : see section 149-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    SECTION 149-15   Majority underlying interests in a CGT asset  

    149-15(1)    
    Majority underlying interests in a *CGT asset consist of:


    (a) more than 50% of the beneficial interests that *ultimate owners have (whether directly or *indirectly) in the asset; and


    (b) more than 50% of the beneficial interests that ultimate owners have (whether directly or indirectly) in any *ordinary income that may be *derived from the asset.

    149-15(2)    
    An underlying interest in a *CGT asset is a beneficial interest that an *ultimate owner has (whether directly or *indirectly) in the asset or in any *ordinary income that may be *derived from the asset.

    149-15(3)    
    An ultimate owner is:


    (a) an individual; or


    (b) a company whose *constitution prevents it from making any distribution, whether in money, property or otherwise, to its members; or


    (c) the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory; or


    (d) a municipal corporation; or


    (e) a *local governing body; or


    (f) the government of a foreign country, or of part of a foreign country.


    149-15(4)    


    An *ultimate owner indirectly has a beneficial interest in a *CGT asset of another entity (that is not an ultimate owner) if he, she or it would receive for his, her or its own benefit any of the capital of the other entity if:


    (a) the other entity were to distribute any of its capital; and


    (b) the capital were then successively distributed by each entity interposed between the other entity and the ultimate owner.

    149-15(5)    


    An *ultimate owner indirectly has a beneficial interest in *ordinary income that may be *derived from a *CGT asset of another entity (that is not an ultimate owner) if he, she or it would receive for his, her or its own benefit any of a *dividend or income if:


    (a) the other entity were to pay that dividend, or otherwise distribute that income; and


    (b) the dividend or income were then successively paid or distributed by each entity interposed between the other entity and the ultimate owner.


    Subdivision 149-B - When asset of non-public entity stops being a pre-CGT asset  

    SECTION 149-25  

    149-25   Which entities are affected  
    This Subdivision provides for when a *CGT asset of an entity stops being a *pre-CGT asset (unless the entity is covered by section 149-50 ).

    Note:

    Subdivision 149-C deals with when an asset of such an entity stops being a pre-CGT asset.

    SECTION 149-30   Effects if asset no longer has same majority underlying ownership  

    149-30(1)    


    The asset stops being a *pre-CGT asset at the earliest time when *majority underlying interests in the asset were not had by *ultimate owners who had *majority underlying interests in the asset immediately before 20 September 1985.

    149-30(1A)    


    Also, Part 3-1 and this Part (except this Division) apply to the asset as if the entity had acquired it at that earliest time.

    149-30(2)    


    If the Commissioner is satisfied, or thinks it reasonable to assume, that at all times on and after 20 September 1985 and before a particular time *majority underlying interests in the asset were had by *ultimate owners who had *majority underlying interests in the asset immediately before that day, subsections (1) and (1A) apply as if that were in fact the case.

    New owner standing in shoes of former owner

    149-30(3)    


    Subsection (4) affects how the *majority underlying interests in the asset are worked out if an *ultimate owner (the new owner ) has acquired a percentage (the acquired percentage ) of the *underlying interests in the asset because of an event described in column 2 of an item in the table. The former owner is the entity described in column 3 of that item.


    Events leading to new owner standing in for former owner
    Item For this kind of event: The former owner is:
    1 *CGT event A1 or B1 if there is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-A (about marriage or relationship breakdowns) for the event the entity that, immediately before the event happened, owned the *CGT asset to which the event relates
    .
    2 the death of a person that person


    149-30(4)    
    This section applies as if the new owner had (in addition to any other *underlying interests), at any time when the former owner had a percentage (the former owner's percentage ) of the underlying interests in the asset, a percentage of the underlying interests in the asset equal to the acquired percentage, or the former owner's percentage at that time, whichever is the less.

    SECTION 149-35   Cost base elements of asset that stops being a pre-CGT asset  

    149-35(1)    
    This section affects the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset if it stops being a *pre-CGT asset.

    149-35(2)    
    The first element of each is the asset's *market value at the time referred to in subsection 149-30(1).


    Subdivision 149-C - When asset of public entity stops being a pre-CGT asset  

    SECTION 149-50   Which entities are affected  

    149-50(1)    
    This Subdivision provides for when a *CGT asset of an entity of any of these kinds stops being a *pre-CGT asset:


    (a) a company *shares in which (except shares that carry the right to a fixed rate of *dividend) are listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange;


    (b) a *publicly traded unit trust;


    (c) a *mutual insurance company;


    (d) a *mutual affiliate company;


    (e) a company (other than one covered by paragraph (a)) all the *shares in which are beneficially owned, whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, by one or more of the following:


    (i) a company covered by paragraph (a);

    (ii) a *mutual insurance company;

    (iii) a *mutual affiliate company;

    (iv) a *publicly traded unit trust;


    (f) (Omitted by No 94 of 1999)


    149-50(2)    
    A publicly traded unit trust is a unit trust the units in which:


    (a) are listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange; or


    (b) are ordinarily available for subscription or purchase by the public.

    149-50(3)    
    This Division applies as if what is done or not done by the trustee of a *publicly traded unit trust had been done or not done by the trust.


    SECTION 149-55   Entity to give the Commissioner evidence periodically as to whether asset still has same majority underlying ownership  

    149-55(1)    
    Within 6 months after each *test day, the entity must give the Commissioner written evidence about the *majority underlying interests in the asset at the end of that day. (The Commissioner can extend the period for doing so.)


    149-55(1A)    
    The evidence must be given in a form that makes the information about those interests readily apparent.


    149-55(1B)    
    The only consequences of failing to give the evidence are those set out in section 149-70 . It is not an offence to fail to give the evidence.



    Test days

    149-55(2)    
    Each of these days is a test day :


    (aa) 30 June 1999;


    (a) a day that is 5 years (or a multiple of 5 years) after 30 June 1999 (but see subsection (3));


    (b) if the entity is covered by paragraph 149-50(1)(a) or (e) - a day on which there is *abnormal trading in *shares in the company;


    (c) if the entity is a *publicly traded unit trust - a day on which there is *abnormal trading in units in the trust;


    (d) if the entity is a company all the *shares in which are beneficially owned, whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, by one or more of the following:


    (i) a company *shares in which (except shares that carry the right to a fixed rate of *dividend) are listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange;

    (ii) a *publicly traded unit trust;
    a day on which there is *abnormal trading in *shares in the other company or in units in that unit trust.


    (e) (Omitted by No 94 of 1999)

    Note:

    Subsections (6) and (7) change the normal rules about abnormal trading.


    149-55(3)    
    If a day (the fifth anniversary ) that would otherwise be a *test day because of paragraph (2)(a) is:


    (a) a Saturday; or


    (b) a Sunday; or


    (c) a day that is a public holiday or a bank holiday in the place where the records of ownership of shares or other interests in the entity are kept;

    the next day that is not covered by a paragraph of this subsection is a test day instead of the fifth anniversary.



    Determining the end of a day

    149-55(4)    
    For the purposes of this section, the end of a day is determined according to legal time in the place where the records of ownership of shares or other interests in the entity are kept.

    Special rules about abnormal trading

    149-55(5)    
    Subsections (6) and (7) change how Subdivision 960-H applies for the purposes of determining under this section whether there is *abnormal trading in *shares in a company or in units in a unit trust.

    149-55(6)    
    An issue, redemption or transfer, or any other dealing, is a trading if, and only if, it changes the respective proportions in which *ultimate owners have *underlying interests in *CGT assets of the company or trust.

    149-55(7)    
    Section 960-235 (about suspected transactions involving 5% or more of *shares in the company or units in the trust) is disregarded.

    SECTION 149-60   What the evidence must show  

    149-60(1A)    
    To avoid the consequences in section 149-70 , the following condition must be complied with.


    149-60(1)    
    On the basis solely of the evidence given to the Commissioner under subsection 149-55(1), the Commissioner must be satisfied that, or think it reasonable to assume that, at the end of the *test day, *majority underlying interests in the asset were had by *ultimate owners who also had *majority underlying interests in the asset at the end of the starting day. The starting day is:


    (a) a day the entity chooses under subsection (2); or


    (b) if no day is so chosen - 19 September 1985.


    149-60(2)    
    The day chosen:


    (a) must be no earlier than 1 July 1985 and no later than 30 June 1986; and


    (b) must be one the choice of which will allow evidence to be given that enables a reasonable approximation of the *ultimate owners who had *underlying interests in the assets of the entity at the end of 19 September 1985.



    How unidentified owners are treated

    149-60(3)    
    So far as the evidence does not show who had *underlying interests in the asset at the end of the *starting day, the evidence must be treated on the assumption that those interests were then had by *ultimate owners who did not have *underlying interests in the asset at the end of the *test day.



    New owner standing in the shoes of former owner

    149-60(4)    


    Subsection (5) affects how the evidence must be treated if an *ultimate owner (the new owner ) has acquired a percentage (the acquired percentage ) of the *underlying interests in the asset because of an event described in column 2 of an item in the table. The former owner is the entity described in column 3 of that item.


    Events leading to new owner standing in for former owner
    Item For this kind of event: The former owner is:
    1 *CGT event A1 or B1 if there is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-A (about marriage or relationship breakdowns) for the event the entity that, immediately before the event happened, owned the *CGT asset to which the event relates
    .
    2 the death of a person that person


    149-60(5)    
    The evidence must be treated on the assumption that the new owner had (in addition to any other *underlying interests), at any time when the former owner had a percentage (the former owner ' s percentage ) of the *underlying interests in the asset, a percentage of the underlying interests in the asset equal to the acquired percentage, or the former owner ' s percentage at that time, whichever is the less.



    Determining the end of a day

    149-60(6)    
    For the purposes of this section, the end of a day is determined according to legal time in the place where the records of ownership of shares or other interests in the entity are kept.

    149-65   (Repealed) SECTION 149-65 Effects of not making the determination  
    (Repealed by No 94 of 1999)

    SECTION 149-70   Effects if asset no longer has same majority underlying ownership  

    149-70(1)    
    The asset stops being a *pre-CGT asset if the condition in subsection 149-60(1) is not satisfied.


    149-70(2)    
    Also, Part 3-1 and this Part (except this Division) apply to the asset as if the entity had acquired it at the end of the *test day (as determined under subsection 149-55(4) ).

    149-70(3)    
    (Repealed by No 94 of 1999)


    SECTION 149-75   Cost base elements of asset that stops being a pre-CGT asset  

    149-75(1)    
    This section affects the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset if it stops being a *pre-CGT asset.

    149-75(2)    


    The first element of each is the asset's *market value at the time referred to in subsection 149-70(2) .

    149-75(3)    
    (Repealed by No 94 of 1999)


    SECTION 149-80  

    149-80   No more evidence needed after asset stops being a pre-CGT asset  
    After the asset stops being a *pre-CGT asset, the entity need not give the Commissioner any more evidence about it under section 149-55 .

    (Repealed) Subdivision 149-D - How to treat holdings of less than 1% in certain entities  

    (Repealed) Subdivision 149-E - How to treat certain interposed funds, companies and government bodies  

    Subdivision 149-F - How to treat a ``demutualised'' public entity  

    SECTION 149-162   Subdivision applies only if entity gives sufficient evidence  

    149-162(1)    
    This Subdivision applies only if, on the basis solely of evidence the entity gives the Commissioner, the Commissioner is satisfied, or thinks it reasonable to assume, that this Subdivision applies to the entity.

    149-162(2)    
    The evidence must be given in a form that makes it readily apparent whether this Subdivision applies.


    SECTION 149-165   Members treated as having underlying interests in assets until demutualisation  

    149-165(1)    
    This section modifies the treatment of evidence that an entity gives the Commissioner under section 149-55 as to the *ultimate owners who had *underlying interests in the asset at a particular time if the entity:


    (a) was:


    (i) a *mutual insurance company; or

    (ii) a *mutual affiliate company;
    at the end of the *starting day (as determined under subsection 149-60(6) ); and


    (b) has since stopped being a company of either of those kinds, but either:


    (i) has continued in existence as a company covered by paragraph 149-50(1)(a) or (e) or a *publicly traded unit trust; or

    (ii) has undergone a demutualisation in relation to which Division 316 (Demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurers) applied and has continued in existence as a company; and


    (c) when it stopped being an entity of either of those kinds (the stopping time ), had more than 50 members.


    149-165(2)    
    The entity may require the Commissioner to treat the evidence on the assumption that an *ultimate owner who:


    (a) immediately before the stopping time was a member of the entity; and


    (b) immediately after the stopping time had an *underlying interest in the asset;

    had the interest at all times from and including the end of the *starting day until immediately after the stopping time.


    SECTION 149-170   Effect of demutualisation of interposed company  

    149-170(1)    
    This section modifies the treatment of evidence that an entity (the head entity ) gives the Commissioner under section 149-55 as to the *ultimate owners who had *underlying interests in the asset at a particular time if another entity (the interposed company ):


    (a) was:


    (i) a *mutual insurance company; or

    (ii) a *mutual affiliate company;
    at the end of the *starting day (as determined under subsection 149-60(6)) for the head entity; and


    (b) has since stopped being a company of either of those kinds, but either:


    (i) has continued in existence as a company covered by paragraph 149-50(1)(a) or (e) or a *publicly traded unit trust; or

    (ii) has undergone a demutualisation in relation to which Division 316 (Demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurers) applied and has continued in existence as a company; and


    (c) when it stopped being an entity of either of those kinds (the stopping time ), had more than 50 members.


    149-170(2)    
    The head entity may require the Commissioner to treat the evidence on the assumption that an *ultimate owner who:


    (a) immediately before the stopping time was a member of the interposed company; and


    (b) immediately after the stopping time had, through the interposed company, an *underlying interest in the asset;

    had the interest at all times from and including the end of the *starting day until immediately after the stopping time.


    Division 152 - Small business relief  

    SECTION 152-1   What this Division is about  


    To help small business, if the basic conditions for relief are satisfied, capital gains can be reduced by the various concessions in this Division. Those basic conditions are in Subdivision 152-A . Some of the concessions have additional, specific conditions that must also be satisfied.

    The 4 available small business concessions are:

  • (a) the 15-year exemption (in Subdivision 152-B );
  • (b) the 50% reduction (in Subdivision 152-C );
  • (c) the retirement concession (in Subdivision 152-D );
  • (d) the roll-over (in Subdivision 152-E ).
  • A capital gain that qualifies for the 15-year exemption is disregarded entirely and is not taken into account under the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) . By contrast, the other concessions are only activated by step 4 of that method statement. This means that you must apply all available capital losses against your capital gains (under steps 1 and 2) before you can reduce them using those 3 concessions.

    Subdivision 152-A - Basic conditions for relief under this Division  

    SECTION 152-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision sets out some basic conditions for relief. If the basic conditions are satisfied, an entity may be able to reduce its capital gains using the small business concessions in this Division.

    The 2 major basic conditions are:

  • (a) the entity must be a CGT small business entity or a partner in a partnership that is a CGT small business entity, or the net value of assets that the entity and related entities own must not exceed $6,000,000; and
  • (b) the CGT asset must be an active asset.
  • Additional basic conditions must be satisfied in the following circumstances:

  • (a) the CGT asset is a share in a company or an interest in a trust;
  • (b) the CGT event involves certain rights or interests in relation to the income or capital of a partnership.
  • Some of the concessions have additional, specific conditions that also must be satisfied. For example, the 15-year exemption applies only if you have held the CGT asset for at least 15 years and you retire.

    There are limitations on the availability of the small business concessions for CGT events J2, J5 and J6.

    You do not need to satisfy the basic conditions for the retirement exemption in relation to CGT events J5 and J6.

    Basic conditions for relief

    SECTION 152-10   Basic conditions for relief  

    152-10(1)    


    A *capital gain (except a capital gain from *CGT event K7) you make may be reduced or disregarded under this Division if the following basic conditions are satisfied for the gain:


    (a) a *CGT event happens in relation to a *CGT asset of yours in an income year;

    Note:

    This condition does not apply in the case of CGT event D1: see section 152-12 .


    (b) the event would (apart from this Division) have resulted in the gain;


    (c) at least one of the following applies:


    (i) you are a *CGT small business entity for the income year;

    (ii) you satisfy the maximum net asset value test (see section 152-15 );

    (iii) you are a partner in a partnership that is a CGT small business entity for the income year and the CGT asset is an interest in an asset of the partnership;

    (iv) the conditions mentioned in subsection (1A) or (1B) are satisfied in relation to the CGT asset in the income year;


    (d) the CGT asset satisfies the active asset test (see section 152-35 ).

    Note:

    This condition does not apply in the case of CGT event D1: see section 152-12 .



    CGT small business entity

    152-10(1AA)    


    You are a CGT small business entity for an income year if:


    (a) you are a *small business entity for the income year; and


    (b) you would be a small business entity for the income year if each reference in section 328-110 to $10 million were a reference to $2 million.

    Note:

    For the purposes of subsection (1A) or (1B), in determining whether an entity would be a small business entity, see also sections 152-48 and 152-78 .



    Passively held assets - affiliates and entities connected with you

    152-10(1A)    


    The conditions in this subsection are satisfied in relation to the *CGT asset in the income year if:


    (a) your *affiliate, or an entity that is *connected with you, is a *CGT small business entity for the income year; and


    (b) you do not carry on a *business in the income year (other than in partnership); and


    (c) if you carry on a business in partnership - the CGT asset is not an interest in an asset of the partnership; and


    (d) in any case - the CGT small business entity referred to in paragraph (a) is the entity that, at a time in the income year, carries on the business (as referred to in subparagraph 152-40(1)(a)(ii) or (iii) or paragraph 152-40(1)(b) ) in relation to the CGT asset.

    Note 1:

    The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78 .

    Note 3:

    For businesses that are winding up, see section 152-49 and subsection 328-110(5) .



    Passively held assets - partnerships

    152-10(1B)    


    The conditions in this subsection are satisfied in relation to the *CGT asset in the income year if:


    (a) you are a partner in a partnership in the income year; and


    (b) the partnership is a *CGT small business entity for the income year; and


    (c) you do not carry on a *business in the income year (other than in partnership); and


    (d) the CGT asset is not an interest in an asset of the partnership; and


    (e) the business you carry on as a partner in the partnership referred to in paragraph (a) is the business that you, at a time in the income year, carry on (as referred to in subparagraph 152-40(1)(a)(i) or paragraph 152-40(1)(b) ) in relation to the CGT asset.

    Note:

    For businesses that are winding up, see section 152-49 and subsection 328-110(5) .



    Additional basic conditions for shares in a company or interests in a trust

    152-10(2)    


    The following additional basic conditions must be satisfied if the *CGT asset is a *share in a company, or an interest in a trust, (the object entity ):


    (a) the CGT asset would still satisfy the active asset test (see section 152-35 ) if the assumptions in subsection (2A) were made;


    (b) if you do not satisfy the maximum net asset value test (see section 152-15 ) - you are carrying on a *business just before the *CGT event;


    (c) either:


    (i) the object entity would be a *CGT small business entity for the income year; or

    (ii) the object entity would satisfy the maximum net asset value test (see section 152-15 );
    if the following assumptions were made:

    (iii) the only CGT assets or *annual turnovers considered were those of the object entity, each affiliate of the object entity, and each entity controlled by the object entity in a way described in section 328-125 ;

    (iv) each reference in section 328-125 to 40% were a reference to 20%;

    (v) no determination under subsection 328-125(6) were in force;


    (d) just before the CGT event, either:


    (i) you are a *CGT concession stakeholder in the object entity; or

    (ii) CGT concession stakeholders in the object entity together have a *small business participation percentage in you of at least 90%.

    152-10(2A)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), in working out whether subsection 152-40(3) applies at a given time (the test time ) assume that:


    (a) an asset of a company or trust is covered by neither:


    (i) subparagraph 152-40(3)(b)(ii) (about financial instruments); nor

    (ii) subparagraph 152-40(3)(b)(iii) (about cash);
    if the company or trust acquired that asset for a purpose that included assisting an entity to otherwise satisfy paragraph (2)(a) of this section; and


    (b) paragraph 152-40(3)(b) does not cover an asset that:


    (i) is a share in a company, or an interest in a trust, (the later entity ); and

    (ii) is held at the test time by the object entity directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities); and


    (c) subparagraph 152-40(3)(b)(i) also covers each asset that:


    (i) is held at the test time by a later entity covered by subsection (2B); and

    (ii) is, for that later entity, an asset of a kind referred to in subparagraph 152-40(3)(b)(i) , (ii) or (iii), as modified by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this subsection; and


    (d) subject to paragraph (b) of this subsection, all of the assets of the object entity at the test time included all of the assets of each later entity at the test time; and


    (e) for the purposes of paragraph 152-40(3)(b) , the *market value at the test time of an asset held by a later entity were the product of:


    (i) the asset ' s market value, apart from this paragraph, at the test time; and

    (ii) the object entity ' s *small business participation percentage in the later entity at the test time.

    152-10(2B)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (2A)(c), this subsection covers a later entity if:


    (a) at the test time:


    (i) your *small business participation percentage in the later entity is at least 20%; or

    (ii) you are a *CGT concession stakeholder of the later entity; and


    (b) either:


    (i) the later entity would be a *CGT small business entity for the income year that includes the test time; or

    (ii) the later entity would satisfy the maximum net asset value test (see section 152-15 ) for a notional CGT event taken to have happened at the test time;
    if the following assumptions were made:

    (iii) the only *CGT assets or *annual turnovers considered were those of the later entity and of the entities referred to in subparagraph (2)(c)(iii);

    (iv) each reference in section 328-125 to 40% were a reference to 20%;

    (v) no determination under subsection 328-125(6) were in force.


    Additional basic condition for CGT events involving certain rights or interests in relation to the income or capital of a partnership

    152-10(2C)    


    If the *CGT event involves the creation, transfer, variation or cessation of a right or interest that would entitle an entity to:


    (a) an amount of the income or capital of a partnership; or


    (b) an amount calculated by reference to a partner ' s entitlement to an amount of income or capital of a partnership;

    it is an additional basic condition that the right or interest is a *membership interest of the entity in the partnership:


    (c) immediately after the CGT event happens; or


    (d) if the CGT event involved the cessation of the right or interest - immediately before the CGT event happens.



    Extra conditions for some concessions

    152-10(3)    


    In addition to the basic conditions in this section, some of the concessions in this Division have extra conditions that must be satisfied for the concession to be available. These extra conditions are set out in the relevant Subdivisions.

    Special rules for certain CGT events

    152-10(4)    


    Subdivisions 152-B and 152-C do not apply to *CGT events J2, J5 and J6. In addition, Subdivision 152-E does not apply to CGT events J5 and J6.
    Note 1:

    Those CGT events are about previous applications of the roll-over in Subdivision 152-E .

    Note 2:

    This Subdivision does not apply to CGT events J5 and J6 in relation to the retirement exemption (see subsection 152-305(4) ).


    SECTION 152-12   Special conditions for CGT event D1  

    152-12(1)    
    Paragraphs 152-10(1)(a) and (d) do not apply in the case of *CGT event D1.

    152-12(2)    
    Instead, it is a basic condition that the right you create that triggers the *CGT event must be inherently connected with a *CGT asset of yours that satisfies the active asset test (see section 152-35 ).


    Maximum net asset value test

    SECTION 152-15  

    152-15   Maximum net asset value test  


    You satisfy the maximum net asset value test if, just before the *CGT event, the sum of the following amounts does not exceed $6,000,000:


    (a) the *net value of the CGT assets of yours;


    (b) the net value of the CGT assets of any entities *connected with you;


    (c) the net value of the CGT assets of any *affiliates of yours or entities connected with your affiliates (not counting any assets already counted under paragraph (b)).

    Note 1:

    Some assets are not included in the definition of net value of the CGT assets : see subsections 152-20(2) , (3) and (4) .

    Note 2:

    The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78 .

    SECTION 152-20   Meaning of net value of the CGT assets  


    Meaning of net value of the CGT assets

    152-20(1)    


    The net value of the CGT assets of an entity is the amount (whether positive, negative or nil) obtained by subtracting from the sum of the *market values of those assets the sum of:


    (a) the liabilities of the entity that are related to the assets; and


    (b) the following provisions made by the entity:


    (i) provisions for annual leave;

    (ii) provisions for long service leave;

    (iii) provisions for unearned income;

    (iv) provisions for tax liabilities.


    Assets to be disregarded

    152-20(2)    
    In working out the net value of the CGT assets of an entity:


    (a) disregard *shares, units or other interests (except debt) in another entity that is *connected with the first-mentioned entity or with an *affiliate of the first-mentioned entity, but include any liabilities related to any such shares, units or interests; and


    (b) if the entity is an individual, disregard:


    (i) assets being used solely for the personal use and enjoyment of the individual, or the individual's *affiliate (except a *dwelling, or an *ownership interest in a dwelling, that is the individual's main residence, including any adjacent land to which the main residence exemption can extend because of section 118-120 ); and

    (ii) except for an amount included under subsection (2A), the *market value of a dwelling, or an ownership interest in a dwelling, that is the individual's main residence (including any relevant adjacent land); and

    (iii) a right to, or to any part of, any allowance, annuity or capital amount payable out of a *superannuation fund or an *approved deposit fund; and

    (iv) a right to, or to any part of, an asset of a superannuation fund or of an approved deposit fund; and

    (v) a policy of insurance on the life of an individual.
    Note:

    The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78 .



    Individual's dwelling

    152-20(2A)    


    In working out the net value of the CGT assets of an individual, if:


    (a) a *dwelling of the individual, an *ownership interest in such a dwelling or any relevant adjacent land, was used, during all or part of the *ownership period of the dwelling, by the individual to produce assessable income to a particular extent; and


    (b) the individual satisfied paragraph 118-190(1)(c) (about interest deductibility) at least to some extent;

    include such amount as is reasonable having regard to the extent to which that paragraph was satisfied.

    Note:

    The net value of the CGT assets of the individual will be reduced by the same proportion of the individual's liabilities related to the dwelling, ownership interest or adjacent land.



    Net value of the CGT assets of others

    152-20(3)    


    In working out the net value of the CGT assets of:


    (a) your *affiliate; or


    (b) an entity that is *connected with your affiliate;

    include only those assets that are used, or held ready for use, in the carrying on of a *business by you or another entity *connected with you (whether the business is carried on alone or jointly with others).

    Note:

    The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78 .


    152-20(4)    


    However, disregard assets under subsection (3) that are used, or held ready for use, in the carrying on of a *business by an entity that is *connected with you only because of your *affiliate.
    Example:

    You and your husband sell a florist ' s business that you jointly carry on. Your husband also wholly owns a company that carries on a newsagency business. You yourself have no other involvement with the newsagency business.

    Under subsection (4), you disregard the newsagency company's assets in working out whether you satisfy the maximum net asset value test because, although the company is " connected " with you, it is so connected only because of your affiliate (your husband).

    Note:

    The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78 .



    Effect of look-through earnout rights

    152-20(5)    


    Despite subsections (1) to (4), in working out the net value of the CGT assets of an entity at the time just before the *CGT event (the valuing time ), you can make a choice under subsection (6) if:


    (a) at the valuing time, one or more of the entity ' s *CGT assets were assets for which the entity later provided, or was later provided with, one or more *financial benefits under one or more *look-through earnout rights that were in existence at the valuing time; or


    (b) at the valuing time, one or more of the entity ' s CGT assets were look-through earnout rights relating to CGT assets of:


    (i) one or more of the other entities referred to in section 152-15 ; or

    (ii) one or more entities not referred to in that section; or


    (c) you are the entity, and:


    (i) the CGT event referred to in section 152-15 happened because you *disposed of a CGT asset; and

    (ii) your *capital proceeds from the disposal were affected by one or more financial benefits provided to, or by, you under one or more look-through earnout rights;

    and no further financial benefits can be provided under any of those look-through earnout rights.

    Note:

    For paragraph (c), capital proceeds can be affected by financial benefits provided under a look-through earnout right (see section 116-120 ).


    152-20(6)    


    You can choose to treat the *market value of each of the *CGT assets first mentioned in the applicable paragraph of subsection (5) as if it were, at the valuing time, equal to:


    (a) if paragraph (5)(a) applies - the first element of the CGT asset ' s *cost base at the valuing time; or


    (b) if subparagraph (5)(b)(i) applies - nil; or


    (c) if subparagraph (5)(b)(ii) applies - the total of the financial benefits provided under the *look-through earnout right after the valuing time; or


    (d) if paragraph (5)(c) applies - those *capital proceeds.

    Note:

    For paragraph (a), the first element of a CGT asset ' s cost base can be affected by financial benefits provided under a look-through earnout right (see section 112-36 ).


    152-20(7)    


    In working out the net value of the CGT assets of an entity at the valuing time, if:


    (a) you make a choice under subsection (6) about a *CGT asset of the entity that is a CGT asset covered by paragraph (5)(a) or (c); and


    (b) a *look-through earnout right covered by that paragraph is also a CGT asset of the entity;

    treat the *market value of that right as if it were nil at the valuing time.


    152-25   (Repealed) SECTION 152-25 Meaning of small business CGT affiliate  
    (Repealed by No 80 of 2007 )

    152-30   (Repealed) SECTION 152-30 Meaning of connected with the entity  
    (Repealed by No 80 of 2007 )

    Active asset test

    SECTION 152-35   Active asset test  

    152-35(1)    
    A *CGT asset satisfies the active asset test if:


    (a) you have owned the asset for 15 years or less and the asset was an *active asset of yours for a total of at least half of the period specified in subsection (2); or


    (b) you have owned the asset for more than 15 years and the asset was an active asset of yours for a total of at least 7 ½ years during the period specified in subsection (2).

    152-35(2)    
    The period:


    (a) begins when you *acquired the asset; and


    (b) ends at the earlier of:


    (i) the *CGT event; and

    (ii) if the relevant business ceased to be carried on in the 12 months before that time or any longer period that the Commissioner allows - the cessation of the business.

    SECTION 152-40   Meaning of active asset  

    152-40(1)    


    A *CGT asset is an active asset at a time if, at that time:


    (a) you own the asset (whether the asset is tangible or intangible) and it is used, or held ready for use, in the course of carrying on a *business that is carried on (whether alone or in partnership) by:


    (i) you; or

    (ii) your *affiliate; or

    (iii) another entity that is *connected with you; or


    (b) if the asset is an intangible asset - you own it and it is inherently connected with a business that is carried on (whether alone or in partnership) by you, your affiliate, or another entity that is connected with you.

    Note 1:

    An intangible asset need satisfy only paragraph (a) or paragraph (b).

    Note 2:

    The meaning of connected with in subparagraph (1)(a)(iii) and paragraph (b) is affected by section 152-78 .

    Note 3:

    An example of an asset that is inherently connected with a business is goodwill or the benefit of a restrictive covenant.

    Note 4:

    For businesses that are winding up, see section 152-49 and subsection 328-110(5) .


    152-40(1A)    
    (Repealed by No 42 of 2009)


    152-40(2)    


    Subsection 392-20(1) is disregarded in determining, for the purposes of subsection (1) of this section, whether an entity is carrying on a *business.
    Note:

    An entity would be taken to be carrying on a primary production business under subsection 392-20(1) if the business is carried on by a trust and the entity is presently entitled to trust income.


    152-40(3)    
    A *CGT asset is also an active asset at a given time if, at that time, you own it and:


    (a) it is either a *share in a company that is an Australian resident at that time or an interest in a trust that is a *resident trust for CGT purposes for the income year in which that time occurs; and


    (b) the total of:


    (i) the *market values of the active assets of the company or trust; and

    (ii) the market value of any financial instruments of the company or trust that are inherently connected with a business that the company or trust carries on; and

    (iii) any cash of the company or trust that is inherently connected with such a business;
    is 80% or more of the market value of all of the assets of the company or trust.

    152-40(3A)    


    A *share in a company, or an interest in a trust, mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) is an active asset at a time (the later time ) if:


    (a) the share or interest was an active asset at an earlier time; and


    (b) it is reasonable to conclude that the share or interest is still an active asset at the later time.

    Note:

    This ensures that the 80% test does not need to be applied on a day to day basis.


    152-40(3B)    


    A *share in a company, or an interest in a trust, mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) is an active asset at a time if:


    (a) the share or interest fails to meet the requirements under subsection (3) at that time; and


    (b) the failure is of a temporary nature only.

    Note:

    If a share in a company or an interest in a trust is chosen as a replacement asset, this ensures that a temporary failure of the 80% test does not automatically lead to CGT event J2 happening.



    Exceptions

    152-40(4)    
    However, the following *CGT assets cannot be active assets :


    (a) interests in an entity that is *connected with you, other than *shares and interests covered by subsection (3);


    (b) shares in a company, other than:


    (i) shares in a *widely held company that are covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (3B) and held by a *CGT concession stakeholder of the company; and

    (ii) shares in any other company that are covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (3B);


    (c) interests in a trust, other than:


    (i) interests in a trust to which subsection (5) applies that are covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (3B) and held by a CGT concession stakeholder of the trust; and

    (ii) interests in any other trust that are covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (3B);


    (d) financial instruments (such as loans, debentures, bonds, promissory notes, futures contracts, forward contracts, currency swap contracts and a right or option in respect of a share, security, loan or contract);


    (e) an asset whose main use by you is to *derive interest, an annuity, rent, royalties or foreign exchange gains unless:


    (i) the asset is an intangible asset and has been substantially developed, altered or improved by you so that its *market value has been substantially enhanced; or

    (ii) its main use for deriving rent was only temporary.
    Example:

    A company uses a house purely as an investment property and rents it out. The house is not an active asset because the company is not using the house in the course of carrying on a business. If, on the other hand, the company ran the house as a guest house the house would be an active asset because the company would be using it to carry on a business and not to derive rent.

    Note:

    The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78 .


    152-40(4A)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (4)(e), in determining the main use of an asset:


    (a) disregard any personal use or enjoyment of the asset by you; and


    (b) treat any use by your *affiliate, or an entity that is *connected with you, as your use.

    Note:

    The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78 .


    152-40(5)    


    This subsection applies to a trust if:


    (a) interests in the trust are listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange; or


    (b) the trust has more than 50 *members, unless the trust is a discretionary trust or a trust where at least one of the following conditions is met during an income year:


    (i) no more than 20 persons held, or had the right to acquire or become the holders of, *membership interests representing at least 75% of the value of the membership interests in the trust;

    (ii) if there are *trust voting interests in the trust - at least 75% of the trust voting interests in the trust was capable of being controlled by no more than 20 persons;

    (iii) at least 75% of the amount of any distribution made by the trustee during the year was made to no more than 20 persons;

    (iv) if no distribution was made by the trustee during the year - the Commissioner is of the opinion that, if a distribution had been made during the year, at least 75% of the distribution would have been made to no more than 20 persons.

    152-42   (Repealed) SECTION 152-42 Trustee of discretionary trust may nominate beneficiaries to be controllers of trust  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    SECTION 152-45   Continuing time periods for involuntary disposals  


    Asset compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed

    152-45(1)    
    If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset ) you acquired to satisfy the requirement in subsection 124-70(2) or 124-75(2) for a roll-over under Subdivision 124-B , then the active asset test in section 152-35 applies as if:


    (a) you had acquired the new asset when you acquired the old asset; and


    (b) the new asset had been your *active asset at all times when the original asset was your active asset; and


    (c) the new asset had not been your active asset at all times when the original asset was not your active asset.

    Note 1:

    Subdivision 124-B allows you to choose a roll-over if your CGT asset is compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed.

    Note 2:

    If this subsection applies to a CGT asset, then section 152-115 (which is about continuing time periods) will apply for the 15-year exemption.



    Assets replaced during FSR transition (same owner roll-overs)

    152-45(1A)    


    If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset ) you acquired in a situation covered by former section 124-880 , 124-885 or 124-890 , then the active asset test in section 152-35 applies as if:


    (a) you had acquired the new asset when you acquired the original asset; and


    (b) the new asset had been your *active asset at all times when the original asset was your active asset; and


    (c) the new asset had not been your active asset at all times when the original asset was not your active asset.

    Note 1:

    Former Subdivision 124-O provided a roll-over for certain CGT assets that came to an end as a result of an FSR transition.

    Note 2:

    If this subsection applies to a CGT asset, then section 152-115 (which is about continuing time periods) will apply for the 15-year exemption.



    Assets replaced during FSR transition (new owner roll-overs)

    152-45(1B)    


    If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset ) acquired in a situation covered by former section 124-900 , 124-905 or 124-910 , then the active asset test in section 152-35 applies as if:


    (a) the new owner had acquired the new asset when the original owner acquired the original asset; and


    (b) the new asset had been the *active asset of the new owner at all times when the original asset was the original owner ' s active asset; and


    (c) the new asset had not been the active asset of the new owner at all times when the original asset was not the original owner ' s active asset.

    Note 1:

    Former Subdivision 124-O provided a roll-over for certain CGT assets that came to an end as a result of an FSR transition.

    Note 2:

    If this subsection applies to a CGT asset, then section 152-115 (which is about continuing time periods) will apply for the 15-year exemption.



    Marriage or relationship breakdowns

    152-45(2)    
    If you were the transferee of a *CGT asset for which there has been a roll-over under Subdivision 126-A , then you may choose that the active asset test in section 152-35 applies as if:


    (a) you had acquired the asset when the transferor acquired the asset; and


    (b) the asset had been an *active asset of yours at all times when the asset was an active asset of the transferor; and


    (c) the asset had not been an active asset of yours at all times when the asset was not an active asset of the transferor.

    Note 1:

    Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.

    Note 2:

    There is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-A if CGT assets are transferred because of a marriage or relationship breakdown.

    Note 3:

    If you don ' t make the choice, the time of acquisition is simply the time of the transfer.

    Note 4:

    Making the choice here has certain consequences for the 15-year exemption: see section 152-115 .


    Treatment of passively held CGT assets

    SECTION 152-47   Spouses or children taken to be affiliates for certain passively held CGT assets  

    152-47(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) one entity (the asset owner ) owns a *CGT asset (whether the asset is tangible or intangible); and


    (b) either:


    (i) the asset is used, or held ready for use, in the course of carrying on a *business in an income year by another entity (the business entity ); or

    (ii) the asset is inherently connected with a business that is carried on in an income year by another entity (the business entity ); and


    (c) the business entity is not (apart from this section) an *affiliate of, or *connected with, the asset owner.

    Note:

    The meaning of connected with an entity is affected by section 152-78 .


    152-47(2)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, in determining whether the business entity is an *affiliate of, or is *connected with, the asset owner, take the following to be affiliates of an individual:


    (a) a *spouse of the individual;


    (b) a *child of the individual, being a child who is under 18 years.

    152-47(3)    
    If an entity is an *affiliate of, or *connected with, another entity as a result of subsection (2), then the *spouse or *child mentioned in that subsection is, in addition, taken to be an affiliate of the individual for the purposes of this Subdivision, and for the purposes of sections 328-110 to 328-125 to the extent that they relate to this Subdivision.

    Example:

    The spouse or child mentioned in subsection (2) is taken to be an affiliate of the individual for the purposes of working out which entities are affiliates of or connected with entities under section 152-48 .


    152-47(4)    
    To avoid doubt, subsection (2) applies:


    (a) for the purposes of reducing or disregarding, under this Division, any *capital gain from any *CGT asset; but


    (b) only while:


    (i) a *spouse remains a spouse; or

    (ii) a *child remains a child who is under 18 years.

    SECTION 152-48   Working out an entity ' s aggregated turnover for passively held CGT assets  

    152-48(1)    


    This section applies for the purposes of section 328-115 to determine whether an entity (the test entity ) is a *CGT small business entity for the purposes of subsection 152-10(1A) or (1B) .

    152-48(2)    
    An entity (the deemed entity ) is taken to be an *affiliate of, or *connected with, the test entity (as the case requires) if:


    (a) the deemed entity is an affiliate of, or connected with, the entity that owns the *CGT asset referred to in subsection 152-10(1A) or (1B) ; and


    (b) the deemed entity is not (apart from this section) an affiliate of, or connected with, the test entity.

    Note:

    Paragraphs (a) and (b) - the meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78 .


    152-48(3)    
    If:


    (a) the entity that owns the *CGT asset referred to in subsection 152-10(1B) is a partner in 2 or more partnerships; and


    (b) the asset is:


    (i) used, or held ready for use, in the course of carrying on a *business that is carried on by at least 2 of those partnerships; or

    (ii) inherently connected with businesses that are carried on by at least 2 of those partnerships;

    then, each partnership referred to in paragraph (b) that is not (apart from this section) *connected with the test entity is taken to be connected with the test entity.


    SECTION 152-49   Businesses that are winding up  

    152-49(1)    
    This section applies to an entity in an income year (the CGT event year ) if:


    (a) a *business that the entity previously carried on (including in partnership) is being wound up in that year; and


    (b) either:


    (i) the asset was used, or held ready for use, in the course of carrying on the business at a time in the income year in which the business stopped being carried on; or

    (ii) if the asset is an intangible asset - the asset was inherently connected with the business that was carried on at a time in the income year in which the business stopped being carried on.

    152-49(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs 152-40(1)(a) and (b) as they apply for the purposes of paragraphs 152-10(1A)(d) and (1B)(e) :


    (a) the entity is taken to carry on the *business at a time in the CGT event year; and


    (b) either:


    (i) the *CGT asset is taken to be used, or held ready for use, in the course of carrying on the business at that time; or

    (ii) if the asset is an intangible asset - the CGT asset is taken to be inherently connected with the business at that time.
    Note:

    The entity might also be taken to be a small business entity in the CGT event year (see subsection 328-110(5) ).


    Significant individual test

    SECTION 152-50  

    152-50   Significant individual test  


    An entity satisfies the significant individual test if the entity had at least one *significant individual just before the *CGT event.

    SECTION 152-55  

    152-55   Meaning of significant individual  


    An individual is a significant individual in a company or a trust at a time if, at that time, the individual has a *small business participation percentage in the company or trust of at least 20%.

    CGT concession stakeholder

    SECTION 152-60  

    152-60   Meaning of CGT concession stakeholder  


    An individual is a CGT concession stakeholder of a company or trust at a time if the individual is:


    (a) a *significant individual in the company or trust; or


    (b) a spouse of a significant individual in the company or trust, if the spouse has a *small business participation percentage in the company or trust at that time that is greater than zero.

    Small business participation percentage

    SECTION 152-65  

    152-65   Small business participation percentage  


    An entity ' s small business participation percentage in another entity at a time is the percentage that is the sum of:


    (a) the entity ' s *direct small business participation percentage in the other entity at that time; and


    (b) the entity ' s *indirect small business participation percentage in the other entity at that time.

    SECTION 152-70   Direct small business participation percentage  

    152-70(1)    


    An entity holds a direct small business participation percentage at the relevant time in an entity equal to the percentage worked out using this table:


    An entity ' s direct small business participation percentage
    In this entity: Is:
    1 A company This percentage that the entity has because of holding the legal and equitable interests in *shares in the company:
        (a) the percentage of the voting power in the company; or
        (b) the percentage of any *dividend that the company may pay; or
        (c) the percentage of any distribution of capital that the company may make;
        or, if they are different, the smaller or smallest.
    2 A trust (where entities have entitlements to all the income and capital of the trust) This percentage:
      (a) the percentage ofany distribution of income that the trustee may make to which the entity would be beneficially entitled; or
      (b) the percentage of any distribution of capital that the trustee may make to which the entity would be beneficially entitled;
        or, if they are different, the smaller.
    3 A trust (where entities do not have entitlements to all the income and capital of the trust) This percentage:
      (a) if the trustee makes distributions of income during the income year (the relevant year ) in which that time occurs - the percentage of the distributions to which the entity was beneficially entitled; or
      (b) if the trustee makes distributions of capital during the relevant year - the percentage of the distributions to which the entity was beneficially entitled;
        or, if 2 different percentages are applicable, the smaller.



    Companies

    152-70(2)    


    For item 1 of the table, ignore *redeemable shares.

    152-70(3)    


    Paragraph (a) of item 1 of the table does not apply if the entity holds the legal and equitable interests in the *shares jointly with another entity.

    Discretionary trusts

    152-70(4)    


    Subsections (5) and (6) apply for the purpose of working out the *direct small business participation percentage in an entity in connection with a *CGT event that happened in an income year (the CGT event year ), if:


    (a) the entity is a trust (where entities do not have entitlements to all the income and capital of the trust); and


    (b) during the relevant year mentioned in item 3 of the table in subsection (1) (disregarding subsection (5)), the trustee mentioned in that item:


    (i) does not make a distribution of income; and

    (ii) does not make a distribution of capital.

    152-70(5)    


    Treat the references in that item to the relevant year as being references to:


    (a) if the trustee made a distribution of income or capital during the CGT event year - the CGT event year; or


    (b) otherwise - the last income year before the CGT event year in which the trustee did make a distribution of income or capital.


    152-70(6)    


    Despite subsection (5), an entity holds a direct small business participation percentage of 0% in the trust at the relevant time if either:


    (a) the trust:


    (i) had a *net income for the relevant year; and

    (ii) did not have a *tax loss for the relevant year; or


    (b) the trustee did not make a distribution of income or capital at any time before the end of the CGT event year.


    SECTION 152-75   Indirect small business participation percentage  

    152-75(1)    
    Work out the indirect small business participation percentage that an entity (the holding entity ) holds at a particular time in another entity (the test entity ) by multiplying:


    (a) the holding entity ' s *direct small business participation percentage (if any) in another entity (the intermediate entity ) at that time; by


    (b) the sum of:


    (i) the intermediate entity ' s direct small business participation percentage (if any) in the test entity at that time; and

    (ii) the intermediate entity's indirect small business participation percentage (if any) in the test entity at that time (as worked out under one or more other applications of this section).
    Note:

    When testing an intermediate entity ' s indirect small business participation percentage in another entity, the intermediate entity becomes the holding entity.


    152-75(2)    
    If there is more than one intermediate entity to which paragraph (1)(a) applies at that time, the holding entity ' s indirect small business participation percentage is the sum of the percentages worked out under subsection (1) in relation to each of those intermediate entities.

    Example:

    The individual mentioned in the diagram has an indirect small business participation percentage in the unit trust.


    Multiplying the percentages as mentioned in subsection (1) produces small business participation percentage of 43.2%.

    If the individual had a direct small business participation percentage of 10% in the unit trust, that would be added to the individual's indirect small business participation percentage to produce a small business participation percentage in the trust of 53.2%.


    Nomination of controllers of discretionary trust

    SECTION 152-78   Trustee of discretionary trust may nominate beneficiaries to be controllers of trust  

    152-78(1)    
    This section applies for the purposes of determining whether an entity is *connected with you, for the purposes of:


    (a) this Subdivision; and


    (b) sections 328-110 , 328-115 and 328-125 so far as they relate to this Subdivision.

    152-78(2)    
    The trustee of a discretionary trust may nominate not more than 4 beneficiaries as being controllers of the trust for an income year (the relevant income year ) for which the trustee did not make a distribution of income or capital if the trust had a *tax loss, or no *net income, for that year.

    152-78(3)    
    A nomination under subsection (2) has effect as if each nominated beneficiary controlled the trust for the relevant income year in a way described in section 328-125 .

    Note:

    This means each nominated beneficiary is connected with the trust.


    152-78(4)    
    A nomination under subsection (2) must:


    (a) be in writing; and


    (b) be signed by the trustee and by each nominated beneficiary.

    CGT event happens to asset or interest within 2 years of an individual's death

    SECTION 152-80   CGT event happens to an asset or interest within 2 years of individual ' s death  

    152-80(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a *CGT asset:


    (i) forms part of the estate of a deceased individual; or

    (ii) was owned by joint tenants and one of them dies; and


    (b) any of the following applies:


    (i) the asset devolves to the individual ' s *legal personal representative;

    (ii) the asset *passes to a beneficiary of the individual;

    (iii) an interest in the asset is *acquired by the surviving joint tenant or tenants (as the case may be) as mentioned in section 128-50 ;

    (iv) the asset devolves to a trustee of a trust established by the will of the individual; and


    (c) the deceased individual referred to in subparagraph (a)(i) or (ii) would have been entitled to reduce or disregard a *capital gain under this Division if a *CGT event had happened in relation to the CGT asset immediately before his or her death; and


    (d) a CGT event happens in relation to the CGT asset within 2 years of the individual ' s death.


    152-80(2)    


    A person mentioned in subsection (2A) is entitled to reduce or disregard a *capital gain under this Division in the same way as the deceased individual would have been entitled to as if:


    (a) paragraph 152-105(d) only required the deceased individual to have been 55 or over, or permanently incapacitated, at the time of the *CGT event referred to in paragraph (1)(c) of this section; and


    (b) paragraph 152-305(1)(b) did not apply.


    152-80(2A)    


    The following persons (as the case requires) are entitled to reduce or disregard a *capital gain under this Division in accordance with subsection (2):


    (a) the *legal personal representative of the individual;


    (b) the beneficiary of the individual;


    (c) the surviving joint tenant or tenants;


    (d) the trustee or a beneficiary of the trust.


    152-80(3)    
    The Commissioner may extend the time limit in paragraph (1)(d).

    Subdivision 152-B - Small business 15-year exemption  

    SECTION 152-100   Whatthis Subdivision is about  


    A CGT small business entity can disregard a capital gain arising from a CGT asset that it has owned for at least 15 years if certain conditions are met. Capital losses are not affected.

    Also, any amount of income a company or trust derives from a CGT event covered by this Subdivision is neither assessable income nor exempt income. If the company or trust makes payments to its CGT concession stakeholders that are attributable to the exempt amount, the payments will not be taken into account in determining the taxable income of the company, trust or recipient.

    The main conditions are that:

  • • the basic conditions for relief in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied;
  • • the entity continuously owned the asset for the 15-year period leading up to the CGT event;
  • • if the entity is an individual, the individual retires or is permanently incapacitated;
  • • if the entity is a company or trust, the entity had a significant individual for a total of at least 15 years during which the entity owned the asset and the individual who was the significant individual just before the CGT event retires or is permanently incapacitated.
  • The Subdivision also allows time periods to continue to run if there has been a roll-over because of marriage or relationship breakdown or compulsory acquisition.

    SECTION 152-105  

    152-105   15-year exemption for individuals  


    If you are an individual, you can disregard any *capital gain arising from a *CGT event if all of the following conditions are satisfied:


    (a) the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain;


    (b) you continuously owned the *CGT asset for the 15-year period ending just before the CGT event;

    Note:

    Section 152-115 allows for continuation of the period if there is an involuntary disposal of the asset.


    (c) if the CGT asset is a *share in a company or an interest in a trust - the company or trust had a *significant individual for a total of at least 15 years (even if the 15 years was not continuous and it was not always the same significant individual) during which you owned the CGT asset;


    (d) either:


    (i) you are 55 or over at the time of the CGT event and the event happens in connection with your retirement; or

    (ii) you are permanently incapacitated at the time of the CGT event.

    SECTION 152-110   15-year exemption for companies and trusts  

    152-110(1)    
    An entity that is a company or trust can disregard any *capital gain arising from a *CGT event if all of the following conditions are satisfied:


    (a) the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain;


    (b) the entity continuously owned the *CGT asset for the 15-year period ending just before the CGT event;

    Note:

    Section 152-115 allows for continuation of the period if there is an involuntary disposal of the asset.


    (c) the entity had a *significant individual for a total of at least 15 years (even if the 15 years was not continuous and it was not always the same significant individual) during which the entity owned the CGT asset;


    (d) an individual who was a significant individual of the company or trust just before the CGT event either:


    (i) was 55 or over at that time and the event happened in connection with the individual ' s retirement; or

    (ii) was permanently incapacitated at that time.

    152-110(1A)    


    For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(b) and (c), disregard subsection 149-30(1A) (which applies if an asset stops being a pre-CGT asset).

    152-110(2)    


    Any *ordinary income or *statutory income the company or trust *derives from a *CGT event that would be covered by subsection (1) (assuming the event gave rise to a *capital gain, even if it didn ' t) is neither assessable income nor *exempt income.

    Exception

    152-110(3)    


    However, subsection (2) does not apply to income *derived by a company or trust as a result of a *balancing adjustment event occurring to a *depreciating asset:


    (a) whose decline in value is worked out under Division 40 ; or


    (b) deductions for which are calculated under Division 328 .


    SECTION 152-115   Continuing time periods for involuntary disposals  


    Asset compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed

    152-115(1)    
    If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset ) you acquired to satisfy the requirement in subsection 124-70(2) or 124-75(2) for a roll-over under Subdivision 124-B , then paragraphs 152-105(b) and 152-110(1)(b) and (c) (the 15-year and significant individual rules) apply as if you had acquired the new asset when you acquired the original asset.

    Note:

    Subdivision 124-B allows you to choose a roll-over if your CGT asset is compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed.



    Assets replaced during FSR transition (same owner roll-overs)

    152-115(1A)    


    If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset ) you acquired in a situation covered by former section 124-880 , 124-885 or 124-890 , then paragraphs 152-105(b) and 152-110(1)(b) and (c) (the 15-year and significant individual rules) apply as if you had acquired the new asset when you acquired the original asset.
    Note:

    Former Subdivision 124-O provided a roll-over for certain CGT assets that came to an end as a result of an FSR transition.



    Asset replaced during FSR transition (new owner roll-overs)

    152-115(1B)    


    If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset ) acquired in a situation covered by former section 124-900 , 124-905 or 124-910 , then paragraphs 152-105(b) and 152-110(1)(b) and (c) (the 15-year and significant individual rules) apply as if the new owner had acquired the new asset when the original owner acquired the original asset.
    Note:

    Former Subdivision 124-O provided a roll-over for certain CGT assets that came to an end as a result of an FSR transition.



    Marriage or relationship breakdowns

    152-115(2)    
    If you made the choice mentioned in subsection 152-45(2) for a *CGT asset, then paragraphs 152-105(b) and (c) and 152-110(1)(b) and (c) (the 15-year and significant individual rules) apply as if you had acquired the asset when the transferor acquired it.

    Note:

    There is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-A if CGT assets are transferred because of a marriage or relationship breakdown.



    Restructures of small businesses

    152-115(3)    


    If section 328-450 or 328-455 applies in relation to the transfer of an asset to you, then paragraphs 152-105(b) and (c) and 152-110(1)(b) and (c) (the 15-year and significant individual rules) apply as if:


    (a) you had acquired the asset when the entity transferring the asset acquired it; or


    (b) in a case where, for the purposes of applying those paragraphs, the time when that entity acquired the asset was provided for by this subsection - you had acquired the asset at that time.


    152-120   (Repealed) SECTION 152-120 Discretionary trusts need not have a significant individual in a loss year or nil income year  
    (Repealed by No 12 of 2012)

    SECTION 152-125   Payments to company ' s or trust ' s CGT concession stakeholders are exempt  

    152-125(1)    


    This section applies if:


    (a) one or more of the following apply:


    (i) under section 152-110 , a *capital gain (the exempt amount ) of a company or trust is disregarded;

    (ii) under section 152-110 , an amount of income (the exempt amount ) is *non-assessable non-exempt income of a company or trust;

    (iii) subparagraph (i) of this paragraph would have applied to an amount (the exempt amount ) except that the capital gain was disregarded anyway because the relevant *CGT asset was *acquired before 20 September 1985;

    (iv) subparagraph (i) of this paragraph would have applied to an amount (the exempt amount ) if subsection 149-30(1A) and section 149-35 had not applied to the relevant asset; and


    (b) the company or trust makes one or more payments relating to the exempt amount to an individual (whether directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) before the later of:


    (i) 2 years after the relevant *CGT event; and

    (ii) if the relevant CGT event happened because the company or trust *disposed of the relevant CGT asset - 6 months after the latest time a possible *financial benefit becomes or could become due under a *look-through earnout right relating to that CGT asset and the disposal; and


    (c) the individual was a *CGT concession stakeholder of the company or trust just before the relevant CGT event.

    Note:

    A normal business payment, for example, a payment of wages, would not be made " in relation to the exempt amount " .


    152-125(2)    
    In determining the taxable income of the company, the trust, the individual, or any of the interposed entities, disregard the total amount of the payment or payments made to the *CGT concession stakeholder, up to the following limit:


      Stakeholder ' s participation
    percentage
    × Exempt amount  

    where:

    stakeholder ' s participation percentage
    means:


    (a) in the case of a company or a trust referred to in item 2 of the table in subsection 152-70(1) - the stakeholder ' s *small business participation percentage in the company or trust just before the relevant *CGT event; or


    (b) in the case of a trust referred to in item 3 of that table - the amount (expressed as a percentage) worked out using the following formula:


      100  
      Number of *CGT concession
    stakeholders of the trust
    just before the *CGT event
     


    152-125(3)    
    If a company makes such a payment, this Act applies to the payment, to the extent that it is less than or equal to the limit mentioned in subsection (2), as if:


    (a) it were not a *dividend; and


    (b) it were not a *frankable distribution.

    152-125(4)    
    The Commissioner may extend the time limit under paragraph (1)(b).

    Subdivision 152-C - Small business 50% reduction  

    SECTION 152-200   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision tells you how to apply the small business CGT concessions mentioned in step 4 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) .

    A capital gain is reduced by 50% if the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied.

    If the capital gain has already been reduced by the discount percentage, the 50% reduction under this Subdivision applies to that reduced gain.

    The capital gain may be further reduced by the small business retirement exemption or a small business rollover, orboth.

    Alternatively, you may choose not to apply the 50% reduction and instead apply the small business retirement exemption or small business rollover.

    None of these rules apply if the 15-year exemption already applies to the capital gain, since such a gain is disregarded anyway.

    SECTION 152-205  

    152-205   You get the small business 50% reduction  


    The amount of a *capital gain remaining after applying step 3 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) is reduced by 50%, if the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain.
    Example:

    For an individual (other than one who opts to claim indexation instead of the discount), the discount percentage that applies under step 3 of the method statement is 50%. Therefore, the combined effect of the discount percentage and this section would be to reduce the original capital gain by a total of 75%.

    For an individual who opts to claim indexation, or a company, there is no discount percentage, so the individual or company would simply get the 50% reduction under this section.

    SECTION 152-210   You may also get the small business retirement exemption and small business roll-over relief  

    152-210(1)    
    The *capital gain, as reduced under section 152-205 , may also qualify for:


    (a) the small business retirement exemption (see Subdivision 152-D ); or


    (b) a small business roll-over (see Subdivision 152-E );

    or both.


    152-210(2)    
    If it qualifies for both of those concessions, you may choose which order to apply them in.


    SECTION 152-215  

    152-215   15-year rule has priority  


    This Subdivision does not apply to a *capital gain to which Subdivision 152-B (15-year exemption) applies.
    Note:

    Under that Subdivision, such a gain is entirely disregarded, so there is no need for any further concession to apply.

    SECTION 152-220  

    152-220   You may choose not to apply this Subdivision  


    You may choose not to apply the reduction mentioned in section 152-205 to a particular *capital gain.
    Note:

    Making this choice might allow a company or trust to make larger tax-free payments under the small business retirement exemption: see section 152-325 .

    Subdivision 152-D - Small business retirement exemption  

    SECTION 152-300   What this Subdivision is about  


    You can choose to disregard a capital gain from a CGT event happening to a CGT asset of your small business if the capital proceeds from the event are used in connection with your retirement.

    There is a lifetime limit of $500,000 for all choices that can be made in respect of an individual under this Subdivision.

    You may choose not to apply the concession in section 152-205 (small business 50% reduction) before this one. For an additional concession, see also Subdivision 152-E (small business roll-over).

    You do not need to satisfy the basic conditions for this exemption in relation to CGT events J5 and J6.

    SECTION 152-305   Choosing the exemption  


    Individual

    152-305(1)    
    If you are an individual, you can choose to disregard all or part of a *capital gain if:


    (a) the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain; and


    (b) if you are under 55 just before you make the choice - you contribute an amount equal to the asset ' s *CGT exempt amount to a *complying superannuation fund or an *RSA; and

    Note:

    For the non-deductibility of the contribution, see subsection 290-150(4) .


    (c) the contribution is made:


    (i) if the relevant CGT event is CGT event J2, J5 or J6 - when you made the choice; or

    (ii) otherwise - at the later of when you made the choice and when you received the proceeds.
    Note 1:

    Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.


    152-305(1A)    


    If you receive the *capital proceeds from the *CGT event in instalments, paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) apply to each instalment in succession (up to the asset's *CGT exempt amount).

    152-305(1B)    


    For the purposes of (but without limiting) subsection (1A), you are treated as receiving the *capital proceeds in instalments if:


    (a) the *CGT event happened because you *disposed of the *CGT asset; and


    (b) the capital proceeds from the disposal are increased by one or more *financial benefits that you receive under a *look-through earnout right.



    Company or trust

    152-305(2)    
    A company or a trust (except a public entity - see subsection (3)) can also choose to disregard such an amount if:


    (a) the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the *capital gain; and


    (b) the entity satisfies the significant individual test (see section 152-50 ); and


    (c) the company or trust conditions in section 152-325 are satisfied.

    Note:

    Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.


    152-305(3)    


    Entities of a kind referred to in subsection 328-125(8) cannot make the choice.

    152-305(4)    


    Paragraphs (1)(a) and (2)(a) do not apply if the *capital gain arose from *CGT event J5 or J6.

    SECTION 152-310   Consequences of choice  


    Consequences in all cases

    152-310(1)    
    If the individual, company or trust makes the choice mentioned in section 152-305 for any part of the *capital gain from the *CGT asset, that part of the capital gain equal to its *CGT exempt amount is disregarded.

    Additional consequences in relation to company or trust

    152-310(2)    


    Any payment or part of one the company or trust makes to comply with section 152-325 :


    (a) is not assessable income, and is not *exempt income, of the *CGT concession stakeholder to whom it is made; and


    (b) cannot be deducted from the company ' s or trust ' s assessable income.



    Additional consequences in relation to interposed entities

    152-310(3)   


    If:


    (a) an entity (the paying entity ) receives a payment (whether directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) that a company or trust makes to comply with section 152-325 ; and


    (b) the paying entity passes on the payment to the *CGT concession stakeholder or another interposed entity;

    then:


    (c) the payment cannot be deducted from the paying entity's assessable income; and


    (d) the payment received by the paying entity is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.


    152-310(4)    
    (Repealed by No 15 of 2007)


    152-310(5)    
    (Repealed by No 15 of 2007)


    SECTION 152-315   Choosing the amount to disregard  

    152-315(1)    
    You can choose to disregard all or part of each *capital gain to which this Subdivision applies.

    Note 1:

    You make capital gains equal to any parts that you do not choose to disregard.

    Note 2:

    Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.


    152-315(2)    
    However, the choice must be made in a way that ensures that:


    (a) for an individual - your *CGT retirement exemption limit is not exceeded; or


    (b) for a company or trust - the CGT retirement exemption limit of each individual for whom the choice is made is not exceeded.

    152-315(3)    
    The amount chosen for the asset is its CGT exempt amount .

    152-315(4)    
    The *CGT exempt amount must be specified in writing.

    152-315(5)    


    If a company or trust is making the choice and it has more than one *CGT concession stakeholder, it must specify in writing the percentage of each *CGT asset ' s *CGT exempt amount that is attributable to each of those stakeholders. One or more of the percentages may be nil, but all of the percentages must add up to 100%.
    Example:

    Daryl is a significant individual in a company. The company specifies 90% for Daryl under subsection (5) (which means that the percentage specified for the other stakeholder must be 10%). Daryl ' s retirement exemption limit is $500,000.

    To determine whether subsection (2) is complied with, Daryl would take 90% of the asset ' s CGT exempt amount, add that to amounts previously specified in choices made by or for him under this Subdivision and see whether the total exceeds $500,000.

    Note:

    Subsections (4) and (5) are exceptions to the general rule about choices in section 103-25 .


    SECTION 152-320   Meaning of CGT retirement exemption limit  

    152-320(1)    
    An individual ' s CGT retirement exemption limit at a time is $500,000 reduced by the *CGT exempt amounts of *CGT assets specified in choices previously made by or for the individual under this Subdivision.

    Note:

    The $500,000 is also reduced by any reduction under old provisions about reduction of the CGT retirement exemption limit: see item 62 of Schedule 1 to the New Business Tax System (Capital Gains Tax) Act 1999 .


    152-320(2)    


    If the individual was one of at least 2 *CGT concession stakeholders of a company or trust, and the company or trust made a choice for the individual, only the individual ' s percentage (see subsection 152-315(5) ) of the assets ' *CGT exempt amounts is taken into account under subsection (1) for that choice.

    SECTION 152-325   Company or trust conditions  


    Company or trust to make payments

    152-325(1)    


    A company or trust must make a payment (whether directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) to at least one of its *CGT concession stakeholders if:


    (a) the company or trust makes a choice under this Subdivision to disregard a *capital gain from *CGT event J2, J5 or J6; or


    (b) the company or trust receives an amount of *capital proceeds from a *CGT event for which it makes a choice under this Subdivision.


    152-325(2)    
    If the company or trust receives the *capital proceeds from the CGT event in instalments, subsection (1) applies to each instalment in succession (up to the relevant *CGT exempt amount).

    152-325(2A)    


    For the purposes of (but without limiting) subsection (2), the company or trust is treated as receiving the *capital proceeds in instalments if:


    (a) the *CGT event happened because the company or trust *disposed of the *CGT asset; and


    (b) the capital proceeds from the disposal are increased by one or more *financial benefits that the company or trust receives under a *look-through earnout right.



    Amount and timing of payments

    152-325(3)    
    If a payment is made to more than one *CGT concession stakeholder, the amount of each such payment is to be worked out by reference to each individual ' s percentage (see subsection 152-315(5) ) of the relevant *CGT exempt amount.

    152-325(3A)    


    If the *CGT concession stakeholder to whom the payment is made is an employee of the company or trust, the payment must not be of a kind mentioned in section 82-135 (disregarding paragraph (fa) of that section).

    152-325(4)    


    The payment must be made by:


    (a) if paragraph (1)(a) applies - 7 days after the company or trust makes the choice; and


    (b) otherwise - the later of:


    (i) 7 days after the company or trust makes the choice; and

    (ii) 7 days after the company or trust receives an amount of *capital proceeds from the *CGT event.

    152-325(5)    
    The amount of the payment, or the sum of the amounts of the payments, required to be made under this section must be equal to the lesser of:


    (a) either:


    (i) if paragraph (1)(a) applies - the amount of the *capital gain from the *CGT event that the company or trust disregarded; or

    (ii) otherwise - the amount of *capital proceeds received; and


    (b) the relevant *CGT exempt amount.

    Payments may be joint or separate

    152-325(6)    
    If this section requires the company or trust to make 2 or more payments to a single *CGT concession stakeholder (whether or not by the same time), the company or trust may meet that requirement by making one payment or by making separate payments.

    152-325(7)    


    If a *CGT concession stakeholder is under 55 just before a payment is made under this section in relation to him or her:


    (a) the company or trust must make the payment to the CGT concession stakeholder by contributing it for the stakeholder to a *complying superannuation fund or an *RSA in respect of the stakeholder; and


    (b) the company or trust must notify the trustee of the fund or the *RSA provider at the time the contribution is made that the contribution is made in accordance with this section.

    Note:

    For the non-deductibility of the contribution, see subsection 290-150(4) .


    152-325(8)    


    For the purposes of Part 3-30 , treat a payment mentioned in paragraph (7)(a), made in accordance with this section, as a contribution made by the *CGT concession stakeholder.

    Payments are not dividends or frankable distributions

    152-325(9)    


    Subsection (10) applies if:


    (a) a company makes a payment to comply with subsection (1) to:


    (i) a *CGT concession stakeholder; or

    (ii) an interposed entity, in relation to a CGT concession stakeholder; or


    (b) both of the following apply:


    (i) an interposed entity receives a payment (whether directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) that a company or trust makes to comply with subsection (1), in relation to a CGT concession stakeholder;

    (ii) the interposed entity passes on the payment to the CGT concession stakeholder or another interposed entity.

    152-325(10)    


    This Act applies to the payment, to the extent that it is less than or equal to the amount mentioned in subsection (3) for the stakeholder, as if:


    (a) it were not a *dividend; and


    (b) it were not a *frankable distribution.


    152-325(11)    


    Subsection (10) applies in relation to the payment despite section 109 and Division 7A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    SECTION 152-330  

    152-330   15-year rule has priority  


    This Subdivision does not apply to a *capital gain to which Subdivision 152-B (15-year exemption) applies.
    Note:

    Under that Subdivision, such a gain is entirely disregarded, so there is no need for any further concession to apply.

    Subdivision 152-E - Small business roll-over  

    Guide to Subdivision 152-E

    SECTION 152-400   What this Subdivision is about  


    A small business roll-over allows you to defer the making of a capital gain from a CGT event happening in relation to one or more small business assets if the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain.

    You may choose not to apply the concession in section 152-205 (small business 50% reduction) before this one. For an additional exemption, see also Subdivision 152-D (small business retirement exemption).


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    152-405 (Repealed by No 55 of 2007 )
    152-410 When you can obtain the roll-over
    152-415 What the roll-over consists of
    152-420 Rules where an individual who has obtained a roll-over dies
    152-425 (Repealed by No 55 of 2007 )
    152-430 15-year rule has priority

    152-405   (Repealed) SECTION 152-405 Basic principles for the small business roll-over  
    (Repealed by No 55 of 2007 )

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 152-410  

    152-410   When you can obtain the roll-over  


    You can choose to obtain a roll-over under this Subdivision for a *capital gain if the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain.
    Note 1:

    You can choose the roll-over even if you have not yet acquired a replacement asset or incurred fourth element expenditure, but:

  • (a) CGT event J5 happens if, by the end of the replacement asset period, you do not acquire the asset or incur the expenditure (see section 104-197 ); and
  • (b) CGT event J6 happens if, by the end of the replacement asset period, the cost of the replacement asset or the amount of fourth element expenditure incurred (or both) is less than the amount of the capital gain that you disregarded (see section 104-198 ).
  • Note 2:

    If you have acquired a replacement asset or incurred fourth element expenditure but there is a change in relation to the replacement asset or improved asset after the end of the replacement asset period, CGT event J2 may happen: see section 104-185 .

    SECTION 152-415  

    152-415   What the roll-over consists of  


    If you choose the roll-over, you can choose to disregard all or part of each *capital gain to which this Subdivision applies.
    Note:

    If you choose to disregard only some of the capital gain, you make a capital gain equal to the remaining amount.

    Example:

    The original capital gain was $100,000. You have reduced it to $25,000 under other concessions (apart from the roll-over). If you choose to disregard $20,000, you are left with a final capital gain of $5,000.

    SECTION 152-420   Rules where an individual who has obtained a roll-over dies  

    152-420(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a replacement asset, or an asset in relation to which *fourth element expenditure has been incurred, formed part of the estate of an individual who has died; and


    (b) either or both of the following apply:


    (i) the asset has devolved to the deceased ' s *legal personal representative;

    (ii) the asset has *passed to a beneficiary of the deceased; and


    (c) a change covered by subsection 104-185(2) or (3) did not happen while the deceased owned it or, if the asset has passed to a beneficiary, while the asset was in the hands of the deceased ' s legal personal representative.

    152-420(2)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, anything done or not done by the deceased in relation to the asset is treated as though it had been done or not done by the *legal personal representative.

    152-420(3)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, if the asset has *passed to a beneficiary, anything done or not done by the deceased or by the deceased ' s *legal personal representative (including because of the operation of subsection (2)) in relation to the asset is treated as though it had been done or not done by the beneficiary.

    152-425   (Repealed) SECTION 152-425 Rules where an individual who has obtained a roll-over dies  
    (Repealed by No 55 of 2007 )

    SECTION 152-430  

    152-430   15-year rule has priority  


    This Subdivision does not apply to a *capital gain to which Subdivision 152-B (15-year exemption) applies.
    Note:

    Under that Subdivision, such a gain is entirely disregarded, so there is no need for any further concession to apply.

    PART 3-5 - CORPORATE TAXPAYERS AND CORPORATE DISTRIBUTIONS  

    Division 160 - Corporate loss carry back tax offset for 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 for businesses with turnover under $5 billion  

    Guide to Division 160  

    SECTION 160-1   What this Division is about  


    A corporate tax entity can choose to " carry back " a tax loss it had for 2019-20, 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 against the income tax liability it had for 2018-19, 2019-20, 2020-21 or 2021-22.

    The entity gets a refundable tax offset for 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 that is a proxy for the tax the entity would save if it deducted the loss in the income year to which the loss is " carried back " .

    The refundable tax offset:

  • (a) is capped at the entity ' s franking account balance; and
  • (b) is only available for losses for years for which the entity ' s turnover was less than $5 billion.
  • Subdivision 160-A - Entitlement to and amount of loss carry back tax offset  

    SECTION 160-5  

    160-5   Entitlement to loss carry back tax offset  


    An entity is entitled to a *tax offset (the loss carry back tax offset ) for the *current year if the following conditions are satisfied:

    (a)    

    the current year is:

    (i) the 2020-21 income year; or

    (ii) the 2021-22 income year; or

    (iii) the 2022-23 income year;

    (b)    the entity is a *corporate tax entity throughout the current year;

    Note:

    See also section 160-25 .

    (c)    

    any or all of the following income years were *loss years:

    (i) the 2019-20 income year;

    (ii) the 2020-21 income year;

    (iii) if the current year is the 2021-22 income year - the 2021-22 income year;

    (iv) if the current year is the 2022-23 income year - the 2022-23 income year or the 2021-22 income year;

    (d)    

    the entity had an *income tax liability for any or all of the following income years:

    (i) the 2018-19 income year;

    (ii) the 2019-20 income year;

    (iii) if the current year is the 2021-22 income year and the 2021-22 income year was a loss year - the 2020-21 income year;

    (iv) if the current year is the 2022-23 income year and the 2022-23 income year was a loss year - the 2021-22 income year or the 2020-21 income year;

    (v) if the current year is the 2022-23 income year and the 2021-22 income year was a loss year - the 2020-21 income year;

    (e)    any of the following requirements are satisfied for the current year and each of the 5 income years before the current year:


    (i) the entity has lodged its *income tax return for the year;

    (ii) the entity was not required to lodge an income tax return for the year;

    (iii) the Commissioner has made an assessment of the entity ' s income tax for the year;

    (f)    the entity makes a *loss carry back choice for the current year in accordance with Subdivision 160-B .

    Note 1:

    The entity can be entitled to only one loss carry back tax offset for 2020-21. However, that offset has 2 components: one relating to 2018-19 and one relating to 2019-20: see section 160-10 .

    Note 2:

    The entity can be entitled to only one loss carry back tax offset for 2021-22. However, that offset has 3 components: one relating to 2018-19, one relating to 2019-20 and one relating to 2020-21: see section 160-10 .

    Note 2A:

    The entity can be entitled to only one loss carry back tax offset for 2022-23. However, that offset has 4 components: one relating to 2018-19, one relating to 2019-20, one relating to 2020-21 and one relating to 2021-22: see section 160-10 .

    Note 3:

    The loss carry back tax offset is a refundable tax offset: see section 67-23 .

    SECTION 160-10   Amount of loss carry back tax offset  

    160-10(1)    
    The amount of the entity ' s *loss carry back tax offset for the *current year is the lesser of the following amounts:

    (a)    

    the sum of the *loss carry back tax offset components for:

    (i) the 2018-19 income year; and

    (ii) the 2019-20 income year; and

    (iii) if the current year is the 2021-22 income year - the 2020-21 income year; and

    (iv) if the current year is the 2022-23 income year - the 2021-22 income year and the 2020-21 income year;

    (b)    the entity ' s *franking account balance at the end of the current year.



    Meaning of loss carry back tax offset component

    160-10(2)    
    For the purposes of working out the amount of the entity ' s *loss carry back tax offset for the *current year, the entity ' s loss carry back tax offset component for an income year is:

    (a)    if the entity does not, in its *loss carry back choice for the current year, *carry back any *tax losses to the income year - nil; or

    (b)    

    otherwise - so much of the entity ' s *income tax liability for the income year as does not exceed:

    (i) if, in its loss carry back choice for the current year, the entity carries back only one tax loss to the income year - the amount worked out at step 3 of the following method statement in relation to the tax loss; or

    (ii) if, in its loss carry back choice for the current year, the entity carries back tax losses for 2, 3 or 4 *loss years to the income year - the sum of the amounts worked out at step 3 of the following method statement in relation to each of those tax losses.
    Method statement

    Step 1.

    Start with the amount of the *tax loss the entity *carries back to the income year.


    Step 2.

    Reduce the step 1 amount by the entity ' s *net exempt income for the income year.

    Note:

    Do not reduce the step 1 amount by the entity ' s net exempt income to the extent the net exempt income has already been utilised: see section 960-20 .


    Step 3.

    Multiply the step 2 amount by the *corporate tax rate for the *loss year.

    Example:

    Company A (which is not a base rate entity) has at the end of the 2020-21 income year:

  • (a) a tax loss of $900,000 for that year and a franking account balance of $280,000; and
  • (b) for the 2018-19 income year - an income tax liability of $120,000 and net exempt income of $5,000; and
  • (c) for the 2019-20 income year - an income tax liability of $210,000.
  • Company A chooses to carry back $405,000 of its tax loss for the 2020-21 year to the 2018-19 year and $495,000 of that loss to the 2019-20 year.

    Company A ' s loss carry back tax offset for the 2020-21 year is $268,500, worked out as follows:

  • (a) an offset component for the 2018-19 income year of $120,000, calculated by starting with the $405,000 carried back, reducing that at step 2 by $5,000, and multiplying the result by 30%;
  • (b) an offset component for the 2019-20 income year of $148,500, calculated by starting with the $495,000 carried back and multiplying the result by 30%.
  • The sum of the 2 components is $268,500 (which is less than Company A ' s $280,000 franking account balance at the end of the 2020-21 year). If that sum had exceeded that balance, the amount of the offset would have been limited under paragraph (1)(b) of this section to that balance.



    Income tax liability for the 2018-19 or 2019-20 income year already utilised - entitlement to loss carry back tax offset for 2021-22 income year

    160-10(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies in relation to applying paragraph (2)(b) to work out the entity ' s *loss carry back tax offset component for the 2018-19 or 2019-20 income year (the gain year ) as part of working out the entity ' s entitlement to a *loss carry back tax offset for the 2021-22 income year.

    160-10(4)    
    Disregard so much of the entity ' s *income tax liability for the gain year as has previously been included (as part of working out the entity ' s entitlement to a *loss carry back tax offset for the 2020-21 income year) in a *loss carry back tax offset component.

    Income tax liability for the 2018-19, 2019-20 or 2020-21 income year already utilised - entitlement to loss carry back tax offset for 2022-23 income year

    160-10(4A)    
    Subsection (4B) applies in relation to applying paragraph (2)(b) to work out the entity ' s *loss carry back tax offset component for the 2018-19, 2019-20 or 2020-21 income year (the gain year ) as part of working out the entity ' s entitlement to a *loss carry back tax offset for the 2022-23 income year.


    160-10(4B)    
    Disregard so much of the entity ' s *income tax liability for the gain year as has previously been included (as part of working out the entity ' s entitlement to a *loss carry back tax offset for the 2020-21 or 2021-22 income year) in a *loss carry back tax offset component.



    Foreign residents

    160-10(5)    
    Paragraph (1)(b) does not apply if the entity was a foreign resident (other than an *NZ franking company) for:

    (a)    if the entity *carries back an amount to the 2018-19 income year - more than half of the 2018-19 income year; and

    (b)    if the entity carries back an amount to the 2019-20 income year - more than half of the 2019-20 income year; and

    (c)    if the *current year is the 2021-22 income year and the entity carries back an amount to the 2020-21 income year - more than half of the 2020-21 income year; and

    (d)    if the current year is the 2022-23 income year:


    (i) where the entity carries back an amount to the 2021-22 income year - more than half of the 2021-22 income year; and

    (ii) where the entity carries back an amount to the 2020-21 income year - more than half of the 2020-21 income year.

    Subdivision 160-B - Loss carry back choice  

    SECTION 160-15   Loss carry back choice  

    160-15(1)    


    If the *current year is the 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 income year, the entity may make a loss carry back choice for the current year that specifies the following:

    (a)    

    if the current year is the 2021-22 income year:

    (i) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s *tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be *carried back to the 2020-21 income year; and

    (ii) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be carried back to the 2019-20 income year; and

    (iii) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be carried back to the 2018-19 income year;

    (aa)    

    if the current year is the 2022-23 income year and the 2022-23 income year was a loss year:

    (i) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2022-23 income year is to be carried back to the 2021-22 income year; and

    (ii) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2022-23 income year is to be carried back to the 2020-21 income year; and

    (iii) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2022-23 income year is to be carried back to the 2019-20 income year; and

    (iv) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2022-23 income year is to be carried back to the 2018-19 income year;

    (ab)    

    if the current year is the 2022-23 income year and the 2021-22 income year was a loss year:

    (i) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be carried back to the 2020-21 income year; and

    (ii) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be carried back to the 2019-20 income year; and

    (iii) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be carried back to the 2018-19 income year;

    (b)    

    in any case:

    (i) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2020-21 income year is to be carried back to the 2019-20 income year; and

    (i) how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2020-21 income year is to be carried back to the 2018-19 income year;

    (c)    

    in any case - how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity ' s tax loss (if any) for the 2019-20 income year is to be carried back to the 2018-19 income year.

    160-15(2)    
    The choice under subsection (1) must be made in the *approved form by:

    (a)    the day the entity lodges its *income tax return for the *current year; or

    (b)    such later day as the Commissioner allows.

    SECTION 160-16   Changing a loss carry back choice  

    160-16(1)    
    An entity may change a *loss carry back choice for the 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 income year by notice, in the *approved form, given to the Commissioner.


    160-16(2)    
    The notice to change a *loss carry back choice for an income year must be given to the Commissioner within the limited amendment period (within the meaning of section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) for an assessment for that income year.

    160-16(3)    
    To avoid doubt, the change takes effect from the day the entity made the original *loss carry back choice under section 160-15 .

    SECTION 160-20  

    160-20   Entity must have had turnover less than $5 billion for loss year  


    The entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss for an income year unless the entity:

    (a)    was a *small business entity for the income year; or

    (b)    would have been a small business entity for the income year if:


    (i) each reference in Subdivision 328-C (about what is a small business entity) to $10 million were instead a reference to $5 billion; and

    (ii) the reference in paragraph 328-110(5)(b) to a small business entity were instead a reference to an entity covered by this section.

    SECTION 160-25   Entity must have been a corporate tax entity during relevant years  

    160-25(1)    
    If the *current year is the 2020-21 income year:

    (a)    the entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss to the 2018-19 income year unless the entity was a *corporate tax entity throughout:


    (i) the 2018-19 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

    (ii) the 2019-20 income year; and

    (b)    the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2019-20 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout the 2019-20 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence).

    Note:

    The entity must be a corporate tax entity throughout 2020-21: see paragraph 160-5(b) .


    160-25(2)    
    If the *current year is the 2021-22 income year:

    (a)    the entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss to the 2018-19 income year unless the entity was a *corporate tax entity throughout:


    (i) the 2018-19 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

    (ii) the 2019-20 income year; and

    (iii) the 2020-21 income year; and

    (b)    the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2019-20 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout:


    (i) the 2019-20 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

    (ii) the 2020-21 income year; and

    (c)    the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2020-21 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout the 2020-21 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence).

    Note:

    The entity must be a corporate tax entity throughout 2021-22: see paragraph 160-5(b) .


    160-25(3)    


    If the *current year is the 2022-23 income year:

    (a)    the entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss to the 2018-19 income year unless the entity was a *corporate tax entity throughout:


    (i) the 2018-19 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

    (ii) the 2019-20 income year; and

    (iii) the 2020-21 income year; and

    (iv) the 2021-22 income year; and

    (b)    the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2019-20 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout:


    (i) the 2019-20 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

    (ii) the 2020-21 income year; and

    (iii) the 2021-22 income year; and

    (c)    the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2020-21 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout:


    (i) the 2020-21 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

    (ii) the 2021-22 income year; and

    (d)    the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2021-22 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout the 2021-22 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence).

    Note:

    The entity must be a corporate tax entity throughout 2022-23: see paragraph 160-5(b) .


    SECTION 160-30   Transferred tax losses, income tax liabilities etc. not included  

    160-30(1)    
    The entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss for an income year, to the extent that the loss:

    (a)    was transferred to or from the entity under Division 170 or Subdivision 707-A (about certain company groups); or

    (b)    exceeds the amount that would be the entity ' s tax loss for the year if section 36-55 (about excess franking offsets) were disregarded.

    160-30(2)    
    For the purposes of this Division, disregard the *income tax liability of the entity for an income year to the extent that it consists of an income tax liability of a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group that is taken to be an income tax liability of the entity because of section 701-5 (the entry history rule).

    SECTION 160-35   Integrity rule - no loss carry back tax offset if scheme entered into  


    No loss carry back tax offset if scheme entered into

    160-35(1)    
    The *corporate tax entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss to an income year (the gain year ) if:

    (a)    there is a *scheme for a disposition of *membership interests, or an *interest in membership interests, in:


    (i) the corporate tax entity; or

    (ii) an entity that has a direct or indirect interest in the corporate tax entity; and

    (b)    the scheme is entered into or carried out during the period:


    (i) starting at the start of the gain year; and

    (ii) ending at the end of the *current year; and

    (c)    the disposition results in a change in who controls, or is able to control, (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) the voting power in the corporate tax entity; and

    (d)    another entity receives, in connection with the scheme, a *financial benefit calculated by reference to one or more *loss carry back tax offsets to which it was reasonable, at the time the scheme was entered into or carried out, to expect the corporate tax entity would be entitled; and

    (e)    having regard to the relevant circumstances of the scheme, it would be concluded that a person, or one of the persons, who entered into or carried out the scheme or any part of the scheme did so for a purpose (whether or not the dominant purpose but not including an incidental purpose) of enabling the corporate tax entity to get a loss carry back tax offset.

    Relevant circumstances

    160-35(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(e), the relevant circumstances of the *scheme for a disposition include the following:

    (a)    the extent to which the *corporate tax entity continued to conduct the same activities after the scheme as it did before the scheme;

    (b)    if the corporate tax entity continued to use the same assets after the scheme as it did before the scheme - the extent to which those assets were assets for which equivalents were not readily available at the time of the scheme;

    (c)    the matters referred to in subsection 177D(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (applying paragraph 177D(2)(d) as if the reference in that paragraph to Part IVA of that Act were instead a reference to this section).

    Application of this section to non-share equity interests

    160-35(3)    
    This section:

    (a)    applies to a *non-share equity interest in the same way as it applies to a *membership interest; and

    (b)    applies to an *equity holder in the same way as it applies to a *member.

    Division 164 - Non-share capital accounts for companies  

    SECTION 164-1   What this Division is about  

    A company that issues non-share equity interests will have a notional account called a non-share capital account . This account records contributions to the company in relation to those non-share equity interests and returns made by the company of those contributions.

    A non-share distribution that represents a return of contributions is not taxed as a dividend (subject to the anti-avoidance provisions dealing with dividend substitution). In certain circumstances a company may use its share capital account as the source for such distributions.

    Operative provisions  

    SECTION 164-5   Object  

    164-5(1)    
    This Division provides for the *non-share capital account through which a company records contributions made to it in respect of *non-share equity interests and returns by it of those contributions.

    164-5(2)    
    This allows a *non-share distribution to be characterised as either:


    (a) a *non-share dividend; or


    (b) a *non-share capital return.


    SECTION 164-10   Non-share capital account  

    164-10(1)    
    A company has a non-share capital account if:


    (a) the company issues a *non-share equity interest in the company on or after 1 July 2001; or


    (b) the company has issued a non-share equity interest in the company before 1 July 2001 that is still in existence on 1 July 2001; or


    (c) a *debt interest in the company changes at a particular time (the change time ) to an *equity interest in the company because of subsection 974-110(1) or (2) ; or


    (d) the following conditions are satisfied in relation to an interest in the company:


    (i) immediately before subsection 974-75(4) ceases to have effect, the interest is taken to be a debt interest in the company because of that subsection;

    (ii) the interest is an equity interest in the company at the time (the change time ) that is immediately after that cessation;

    (iii) subsection 974-75(6) does not apply to the interest in relation to the income year that includes the change time; or


    (e) the following conditions are satisfied in relation to an interest in the company:


    (i) subsection 974-75(6) applies to the interest in relation to a particular income year;

    (ii) that subsection does not apply to the interest in relation to the next income year;

    (iii) the interest is an equity interest in the company at the time (the change time ) that is the start of that next income year.

    164-10(2)    
    The account continues in existence even if the company ceases to have any *non-share equity interests on issue.

    164-10(3)    
    The balance of the account cannot fall below nil.

    164-10(4)    
    The only credits and debits that may be made to the account are those provided for in sections 164-15 and 164-20 .


    SECTION 164-15   Credits to non-share capital account  

    164-15(1)    


    If the company issues a *non-share equity interest in the company on or after 1 July 2001, there is a credit to the *non-share capital account equal to:

    Amount received − Share capital account credit

    where:

    amount received
    is the *market value, when it is provided, of the consideration the company receives for the issue of the interest.

    share capital account credit
    is the amount of any credit made to the company ' s *share capital account in respect of the issue of the interest.

    Note:

    The issue of a non-share equity interest can give rise to a credit to the company ' s share capital account if the interest consists, for example, of a stapled security that includes a share in the company ' s capital.


    164-15(2)    


    If paragraph 164-10(1)(c), (d) or (e) applies in relation to a particular interest in the company, there is a credit to the *non-share capital account at the change time referred to in that paragraph of an amount equal to:


    Amount received Share capital account credit Amount returned

    where:

    amount received
    is the *market value, when it was provided, of the consideration the company received for the issue of the interest.

    amount returned
    is so much of the amount received as has been returned to a holder of the interest before the change time.

    share capital account credit
    is the amount of any credit made to the company ' s *share capital account in respect of the issue of the interest.


    164-15(3)    
    If the company has a *non-share capital account at the beginning of 1 July 2001 because of a *non-share equity interest the company issued before 1 July 2001, there is a credit to the non-share capital account on that day for each non-share equity interest in the company that:


    (a) was issued before 1 July 2001; and


    (b) is still in existence on 1 July 2001.

    164-15(4)    


    The amount of the credit under subsection (3) is:

    Amount received − Return of amount received − Share capital account credit

    where:

    amount received
    is the *market value, when it is provided, of the consideration the company receives for the issue of the interest.

    return of amount received
    is the sum of the amounts paid before 1 July 2001 by way of return, in whole or in part, of the amount received.

    share capital account credit
    is the sum of any amounts credited before 1 July 2001 to the company ' s *share capital account in respect of the issue of the interest.


    164-15(5)    


    To avoid doubt, if:


    (a) it appears that a credit to the company ' s *non-share capital account has arisen under this section because an interest in the company appears to be, or have become, an *equity interest at a time in a particular income year; and


    (b) because subsection 974-75(6) or 974-110(1A) is subsequently found to apply in relation to the interest and that income year, the interest was not in fact, or did not in fact become, an equity interest at that time;

    the credit referred to in paragraph (a) is taken never to have arisen.


    SECTION 164-20   Debits to non-share capital account  

    164-20(1)    
    The company may debit the whole or a part of a *non-share distribution against the company ' s *non-share capital account:


    (a) to the extent to which the distribution is made as consideration for the surrender, cancellation or redemption of a *non-share equity interest in the company; or


    (b) to the extent to which:


    (i) the distribution is made in connection with a reduction in the *market value of a non-share equity interest in the company; and

    (ii) the amount of the distribution is equal to the amount of the reduction in market value.

    164-20(2)    
    The total of the amounts debited to the account in respect of a particular *non-share equity interest must not exceed the total of the amounts credited to the account in respect of the interest.

    164-20(3)    


    If:


    (a) an *equity interest in the company changes at a particular time (the change time ) to a *debt interest in the company because of subsection 974-110(1) or (2) ; or


    (b) an equity interest in the company changes to a debt interest in the company, with effect from a time (the change time ) that is the start of a particular income year, because of subsection 974-110(1A) ; or


    (c) the following conditions are satisfied in relation to an interest in the company:


    (i) subsection 974-75(6) does not apply to the interest in relation to a particular income year;

    (ii) the interest is an equity interest in the company at the end of that income year;

    (iii) subsection 974-75(6) applies to the interest from the time (the change time ) that is the start of the next income year;

    there is, or is taken to have been, a debit to the *non-share capital account at the change time equal to:


      Credits in relation to the interest Debits in relation to the interest  

    where:

    credits in relation to the interest
    is the sum of all the credits that have been made to the *non-share capital account in relation to the interest before the change time.

    debits in relation to the interest
    is the sum of all the debits that have been made to the *non-share capital account in relation to the interest before the change time.


    164-20(4)    


    To avoid doubt, if:


    (a) it appears that a debit to the company ' s *non-share capital account has arisen because an interest in the company appears to be, or have become, a *debt interest at a time in a particular income year; and


    (b) because subsection 974-75(6) or 974-110(1A) is subsequently found not to apply in relation to the interest and that income year, the interest was not in fact, or did not in fact become, a debt interest at that time;

    the debit referred to in paragraph (a) is taken never to have arisen.


    Division 165 - Income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company  

    Guide to Division 165  

    SECTION 165-1   What this Division is about  

    A change in the ownership or control of a company can affect:

  • • whether it can deduct its tax losses of earlier income years; and
  • • how it calculates its taxable income and tax loss for the income year of the change; and
  • • whether it can deduct debts owed to it that are written off as bad.
  • Subdivision 165-A - Deducting tax losses of earlier income years  

    Guide to Subdivision 165-A

    SECTION 165-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    A company cannot deduct a tax loss unless:

  • (a) it has the same owners and the same control throughout the period from the start of the loss year to the end of the income year; or
  • (b) it satisfies the business continuity test by carrying on the same business (including entering into no new kinds of transactions and conducting no new kinds of business), or by carrying on a similar business (on or after 1 July 2015).
  • Note:

    The exceptions mentioned in this section apply differently in relation to designated infrastructure project entities: see section 415-35 .


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    165-10 To deduct a tax loss
    165-12 Company must maintain the same owners
    165-13 Alternatively, the company must satisfy the business continuity test
    165-15 The same people must control the voting power, or the company must satisfy the business continuity test
    165-20 When company can deduct part of a tax loss

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 165-10  

    165-10   To deduct a tax loss  
    A company cannot deduct a *tax loss unless either:


    (a) it meets the conditions in section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners); or

    Note:

    See section 165-215 for a special alternative to these conditions.


    (b) it meets the condition in section 165-13 (which is about the company satisfying the business continuity test).

    Note:

    In the case of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company, Subdivision 166-A modifies how this Subdivision applies, unless the company chooses otherwise.

    SECTION 165-12   Company must maintain the same owners  


    Ownership test period

    165-12(1)    
    In determining whether section 165-10 prevents a company from deducting a *tax loss, the ownership test period is the period from the start of the *loss year to the end of the income year.

    Note:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.



    Voting power

    165-12(2)    
    There must be persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company at all times during the *ownership test period.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-150 to work out who had more than 50% of the voting power.

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.



    Rights to dividends

    165-12(3)    
    There must be persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s dividends at all times during the *ownership test period.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-155 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company ' s dividends.

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to dividends in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to dividends.



    Rights to capital distributions

    165-12(4)    
    There must be persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions at all times during the *ownership test period.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-160 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions.

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to capital distributions.



    When to apply the primary test

    165-12(5)    
    To work out whether a condition in this section was satisfied at all times during the *ownership test period, apply the primary test for that condition unless subsection (6) requires the alternative test to be applied.

    Note:

    For the primary test, see subsections 165-150(1) , 165-155(1) and 165-160(1) .



    When to apply the alternative test

    165-12(6)    


    Apply the alternative test for that condition if one or more other companies beneficially owned *shares or interests in shares in the company at any time during the *ownership test period.
    Note:

    For the alternative test, see subsections 165-150(2) , 165-155(2) and 165-160(2) .



    Conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (4) may be treated as having been satisfied in certain circumstances

    165-12(7)    


    If any of the conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (4) have not been satisfied, those conditions are taken to have been satisfied if:


    (a) they would have been satisfied except for the operation of section 165-165 ; and


    (b) the company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that less than 50% of the *tax loss has been reflected in deductions, capital losses, or reduced assessable income, that occurred, or could occur in future, because of the happening of any *CGT event in relation to any *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests in the company during the *ownership test period.


    165-12(7A)    


    If the company is:


    (a) a *non-profit company; or


    (b) a *mutual affiliate company; or


    (c) a *mutual insurance company;

    during the whole of the *ownership test period, the conditions in subsections (3) and (4) are taken to have been satisfied by the company.



    Time of happening of CGT event

    165-12(8)    


    The happening of a *CGT event in relation to a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest in the company that results in the failure of the company to satisfy a condition in subsection (2), (3) or (4) is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (7)(b), to have occurred during the *ownership test period.

    165-12(9)    
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )


    SECTION 165-13   Alternatively, the company must satisfy the business continuity test  

    165-13(1)    


    This section sets out the condition that a company must meet to be able to deduct the *tax loss if:


    (a) the company fails to meet a condition in subsection 165-12(2) , (3) or (4); or


    (b) it is not practicable to show that the company meets the conditions in those subsections.

    Note:

    Other provisions may treat the company as meeting, or failing to meet, the conditions in subsections 165-12(2), (3) and (4) .


    165-13(2)    


    The company must satisfy the *business continuity test for the income year (the business continuity test period ). Apply the test to the *business the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time ) shown in the relevant item of the table.


    Table
    Table
    Test time
    Item If: The test time is:
    1 It is practicable to show there is a period that meets these conditions:

    (a) the period starts at the start of the *ownership test period or, if the company came into being during the *loss year, at the time the company came into being;

    (b) the company would meet the conditions in subsections 165-12(2), (3) and (4) if the period were the ownership test period for the purposes of this Act
    The latest time that it is practicable to show is in the period
    2 Item 1 does not apply and the company was in being throughout the *loss year The start of the loss year
    3 Item 1 does not apply and the company came into being during the *loss year The end of the loss year

    For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E .


    SECTION 165-15   The same people must control the voting power, or the company must satisfy the business continuity test  

    165-15(1)    
    Even if a company meets the conditions in section 165-12 or 165-13 , it cannot deduct the *tax loss if:


    (a) for some or all of the part of the *ownership test period that started at the end of the *loss year, a person controlled, or was able to control, the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); and


    (b) for some or all of the *loss year, that person did not control, and was not able to control, that voting power (directly, or indirectly in that way); and


    (c) that person began to control, or became able to control, that voting power (directly, or indirectly in that way) for the purpose of:


    (i) getting some benefit or advantage in relation to how this Act applies; or

    (ii) getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else;
    or for purposes including that purpose.
    Note:

    A person can still control the voting power in a company that is in liquidation etc.: see section 165-250 .


    165-15(2)    


    However, that person ' s control of the voting power, or ability to control it, does not prevent the company from deducting the *tax loss if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the income year (the business continuity test period ).

    165-15(3)    


    Apply the *business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time ) when the person began to control that voting power, or became able to control it.

    For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E .


    SECTION 165-20   When company can deduct part of a tax loss  

    165-20(1)    
    If section 165-10 (which is about deducting a tax loss) prevents a company from deducting a *tax loss, the company can deduct the part of the tax loss that was incurred during a part of the loss year .

    165-20(2)    


    However, the company can do this only if, assuming that part of the *loss year had been treated as the whole of the loss year for the purposes of section 165-10 , the company would have been entitled to deduct the *tax loss.

    Subdivision 165-B - Working out the taxable income and tax loss for the income year of the change  

    SECTION 165-23   What this Subdivision is about  


    A company that has not had the same ownership and control during the income year, and has not satisfied the business continuity test, works out its taxable income and tax loss under this Subdivision.

    SECTION 165-25   Summary of this Subdivision  

    165-25(1)    
    The company calculates its taxable income for the income year in this way: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Divide the income year into periods: each change in ownership or control is a dividing point between periods.


    Step 2.

    Treat each period as if it were an income year and work out the notional loss or notional taxable income for that period.


    Step 3.

    Work out the taxable income for the year of the change by adding up:

  • • each notional taxable income; and
  • • any full year amounts (amounts of assessable income not taken into account at Step 2);
  • and then subtracting any full year deductions (deductions not taken into account at Step 2).

    Note:

    Do not take into account any notional loss.


    165-25(2)    
    As well as a taxable income, the company will have a tax loss. It is the total of:

  • • each notional loss; and
  • • excess full year deductions of particular kinds.

  • 165-25(3)    
    Special rules apply if the company was in partnership at some time during the income year.

    For the special rules that apply if the company was in partnership: see sections 165-75 to 165-90 .


    SECTION 165-30   Flow chart showing the application of this Subdivision  



    Note:

    If the company was a partner during the income year, special rules apply to calculating a notional loss or notional taxable income.

    When a company must work out its taxable income and tax loss under this Subdivision

    SECTION 165-35  

    165-35   On a change of ownership, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test  


    A company must calculate its taxable income and *tax loss under this Subdivision unless:


    (a) there are persons who had *more than a 50% stake in the company during the whole of the income year; or

    Note:

    See section 165-220 for a special alternative to the condition in this paragraph.


    (b) there is only part of the income year (a part that started at the start of the income year) during which the same persons had *more than a 50% stake in the company, but the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the rest of the income year (the business continuity test period ); or


    (c) the company was a * designated infrastructure project entity during the whole of the income year.

    Note:

    See subsection 415-35(7) if there is only part of the income year during which the company was a designated infrastructure project entity.

    For the purposes of paragraph (b), apply the business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time ) when that part ended.

    Note 1:

    For the business continuity test, see Subdivision 165-E .

    Note 2:

    In the case of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company, Subdivision 166-B modifies how this Subdivision applies, unless the company chooses otherwise.

    SECTION 165-37   Who has more than a 50% stake in the company during a period  

    165-37(1)    


    If:


    (a) there are persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company during the whole of a period (the ownership test period ) consisting of the income year or a part of it; and


    (b) there are persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s dividends during the whole of the ownership test period; and


    (c) there are persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions during the whole of the ownership test period;

    those persons had more than a 50% stake in the company during the ownership test period.

    Note:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    165-37(2)    
    To work out whether a condition in subsection (1) was satisfied during the *ownership test period, apply the primary test for that condition unless subsection (3) requires the alternative test to be applied.

    For the primary tests: see subsections 165-150(1) , 165-155(1) and 165-160(1) .


    165-37(3)    


    Apply the alternative test for that condition if one or more other companies beneficially owned *shares, or interests in shares, in the company at any time during the *ownership test period.

    For the alternative tests: see subsections 165-150(2) , 165-155(2) and 165-160(2) .



    Conditions in subsection (1) may be treated as having been satisfied in certain circumstances

    165-37(4)    


    If any of the conditions in subsection (1) have not been satisfied, those conditions are taken to have been satisfied if:


    (a) they would have been satisfied except for the operation of section 165-165 ; and


    (b) the company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that less than 50% of the *notional loss for the *ownership test period has been reflected in deductions, capital losses, or reduced assessable income, that occurred, or could occur in future, because of the happening of any *CGT event in relation to any *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests in the company during that period.


    165-37(4A)    


    If the company is:


    (a) a *non-profit company; or


    (b) a *mutual affiliate company; or


    (c) a *mutual insurance company;

    during the whole of the *ownership test period, the conditions in paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to have been satisfied by the company.



    Time of happening of CGT event

    165-37(5)    


    The happening of a *CGT event in relation to a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest in the company that results in the failure of the company to satisfy a condition in subsection (1) is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (4)(b), to have occurred during the *ownership test period.

    165-37(6)    
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )


    SECTION 165-40   On a change of control of the voting power in the company, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test  

    165-40(1)    
    A company must calculate its taxable income and tax loss under this Subdivision if, during the income year, a person begins to control, or becomes able to control, the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of:


    (a) getting some benefit or advantage in relation to how this Act applies; or


    (b) getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else.

    Note 1:

    A person can still control the voting power in a company that is in liquidation etc.:see section 165-250 .

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.


    165-40(2)    


    However, that person ' s control of the voting power, or ability to control it, does not require the company to calculate its taxable income under this Subdivision if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the rest of the income year (the business continuity test period ).

    165-40(3)    


    Apply the business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time ) when the person began to control that voting power, or became able to control it.

    For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E .


    Working out the company's taxable income

    SECTION 165-45   First, divide the income year into periods  

    165-45(1)    
    Divide the income year into periods as follows.

    165-45(2)    
    The first period starts at the start of the income year. Each later period starts immediately after the end of the previous period.

    165-45(3)    
    The last period ends at the end of the income year. Each period (except the last) ends at the earlier of:


    (a) the latest time that would result in persons having *more than a 50% stake in the company during the whole of the period; or


    (b) the earliest time when a person begins to control, or becomes able to control, the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of:


    (i) getting some benefit or advantage to do with how this Act applies; or

    (ii) getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else.
    Note:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete periods.


    165-45(4)    


    However, what would otherwise be 2 or more successive periods are treated as a single period if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for all of them, considered as a single period (the business continuity test period ). Apply the business continuity test to the *business the company carried on immediately before the end of the first of the periods (the test time ).
    Note 1:

    For the business continuity test, see Subdivision 165-E .

    Note 2:

    See section 165-225 for a special alternative to subsections (3) and (4) of this section.


    SECTION 165-50   Next, calculate the notional loss or notional taxable income for each period  

    165-50(1)    
    The company has a *notional loss for a period if the deductions attributed to the period under section 165-55 exceed the assessable income attributed to the period under section 165-60. The notional loss is the amount of the excess.

    For a period during which the company was in partnership, the notional loss is worked out under section 165-75 .


    165-50(2)    
    On the other hand, if that assessable income exceeds those deductions, the company has a notional taxable income for the period, equal to the excess.

    For a period during which the company was in partnership, the notional taxable income is worked out under section 165-75 .


    165-50(3)    
    If the company has a *notional loss for none of the periods in the income year, this Subdivision has no further application, and the company's taxable income for the income year is calculated in the usual way.

    The usual way of working out taxable income is set out in section 4-15 .


    SECTION 165-55   How to attribute deductions to periods  

    165-55(1)    
    The company ' s deductions for the income year are attributed to periods in the income year as follows.

    165-55(2)    
    The following deductions are attributed to each period in proportion to the length of the period:


    (a) deductions for the decline in value of a *depreciating asset;

    See Division 40 .


    (b) deductions for *exploration or prospecting, or *mining capital expenditure, in connection with mining or quarrying;

    See section 40-80 and Subdivisions 40-H and 40-I .


    (ba) (Repealed by No 96 of 2014)


    (c) deductions for expenditure, deductions for which are spread over 2 or more income years, but not:


    (i) deductions for exploration or prospecting, or capital expenditure, in connection with mining or quarrying; or

    See Subdivision 40-I .


    (ii) *full year deductions (see subsection (5));


    (d) deductions for expenditure of capital monies in connection with an Australian *film.

    See former section 124ZAFA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    165-55(3)    
    All other deductions (except *full year deductions) are attributed to periods as if each period were an income year.

    165-55(4)    
    *Full year deductions are not attributed to any of the periods. They are brought in at a later stage of the process of calculating the company ' s taxable income for the income year.

    165-55(5)    
    These are full year deductions :


    (a) deductions for bad debts under section 8-1 (about general deductions) or section 25-35 (about bad debts);


    (b) deductions for losses on debt/equity swaps under section 63E of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;


    (c) deductions, so far as they are allowable under Division 8 (which is about deductions) because Subdivision H (Period of deductibility of certain advance expenditure) of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the company in relation to the income year;


    (d) (Repealed by No 101 of 2006 )


    (e) (Repealed by No 101 of 2006 )


    (fa) deductions for payments of pensions, gratuities or retiring allowances under section 25-50 ;


    (fb) deductions for gifts under Division 30 ;


    (f) deductions for *tax losses of earlier income years.

    See Division 36 .


    (g) (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)


    (h) (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)


    (i) (Repealed by No 101 of 2006 )


    (j) (Repealed by No 34 of 2014)


    165-55(6)    


    However, a deduction for the balance of capital expenditure is not a full year deduction if the deduction results from the disposal, loss, lapse, termination of use or destruction of the property.

    SECTION 165-60   How to attribute assessable income to periods  

    165-60(1)    
    The company ' s assessable income for the income year is attributed to periods in the income year as follows.

    165-60(2)    
    The following amounts are attributed to periods so far as they are reasonably attributable to those periods:


    (a) amounts included in the company ' s assessable income under section 97 (Beneficiary of a trust estate who is not under a legal disability) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or


    (b) amounts included in the company ' s assessable income under section 98A (Non-resident beneficiaries assessable in respect of certain income) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    165-60(2A)    


    However, so much of an amount included in the company ' s assessable income under section 97 or 98A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as is a *capital gain that forms part of a *net capital gain is not attributed to a period.

    165-60(3)    
    The following items of assessable income are attributed to each period in proportion to the length of the period:


    (a) insurance recoveries for loss of *live stock or trees;

    See section 385-130 .


    (b) amounts included in assessable income as a result of elections relating to the forced disposal of live stock;

    See Subdivision 385-E and section 385-160 .


    (c) recoupment of mains electricity connection expenditure.

    See items 1.16 and 2.5 in section 20-30 , which lists deductions for which recoupments are assessable under Subdivision 20-A .


    165-60(4)    


    An amount included in the company ' s assessable income under section 385-135 (Election to defer including profit on second wool clip) is attributed to the period when the wool would ordinarily have been shorn.

    165-60(5)    
    An amount included in the company ' s assessable income that is a *dividend under:


    (a) section 65 (Payments to associated persons); or


    (b) (Repealed by No 79 of 2007 )


    (c) section 109 (Excessive payments to shareholders and associates);

    of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is attributed to the period when the amount was paid or credited, whichever occurred first.


    165-60(6)    
    All other items of assessable income (except *full year amounts) are attributed to periods as if each period were an income year.

    165-60(6A)    


    A *net capital gain is not attributed to a period.
    Note:

    This is because Subdivision 165-CB provides for how the company must work out its net capital gain for the income year.


    165-60(7)    


    Full year amounts are amounts referred to in paragraphs (2)(a) and (b), so far as they are not reasonably attributable to a period, but do not include any part of a *capital gain that forms part of a *net capital gain. Full year amounts are brought in at a later stage of the process of calculating the company ' s taxable income for the income year.

    SECTION 165-65   How to calculate the company's taxable income for the income year  

    165-65(1)    
    The company's taxable income for the income year is calculated as follows.

    165-65(2)    
    Add up the *notional taxable incomes (if any) worked out under section 165-50 or 165-75 .

    Note:

    A notional loss for a period is not taken into account, but counts towards the company's tax loss for the income year.


    165-65(3)    


    Add the *full year amounts referred to in subsection 165-60(7) (if any) and any *net capital gain of the company for the income year.

    165-65(4)    
    Subtract the company's *full year deductions of these kinds:


    (a) deductions for bad debts under section 8-1 (about general deductions) or section 25-35 (about bad debts);


    (b) (Omitted by No 121 of 1997);


    (c) deductions, so far as they are allowable under Division 8 (which is about deductions) because Subdivision H (Period of deductibility of certain advance expenditure) of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the company in relation to the income year;

    unless they exceed the total of the *notional taxable incomes and the *full year amounts. (If they equal or exceed that total, the company does not have a taxable income for the income year.)


    165-65(5)    
    If an amount remains, subtract from it the company's other *full year deductions, in the order shown in subsection 165-55(5), unless they exceed the amount remaining. (If they equal or exceed that amount, the company does not have a taxable income for the income year.)

    165-65(6)    
    If an amount remains, it is the company's taxable income for the income year.

    Working out the company's tax loss

    SECTION 165-70   How to calculate the company's tax loss for the income year  

    165-70(1)    
    The company's tax loss for the income year is calculated as follows.

    165-70(2)    
    Total the *notional losses worked out under section 165-50 or 165-75 .

    165-70(3)    
    Add to the total in subsection (2) the amount (if any) by which the company's *full year deductions of these kinds:


    (a) deductions for bad debts under section 8-1 (about general deductions) or section 25-35 (about bad debts);


    (b) (Omitted by No 121 of 1997)


    (c) deductions, so far as they are allowable under Division 8 (which is about deductions) because Subdivision H (Period of deductibility of certain advance expenditure) of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the company in relation to the income year;

    exceed the total of:


    (d) the *notional taxable incomes (if any); and

    To work out the notional taxable income: see section 165-50 .


    (e) the *full year amounts referred to in section 165-60 (if any); and


    (f) any *net capital gain of the company for the income year.


    165-70(4)    
    If the company *derived exempt income, subtract its *net exempt income (worked out under section 36-20 ).

    165-70(5)    
    Any amount remaining is the company's tax loss for the income year, which is called a loss year .

    Note:

    The meanings of tax loss and loss year are modified by section 36-55 for a corporate tax entity that has an amount of excess franking offsets.

    To find out how much of the tax loss can be deducted in later income years: see Subdivision 165-A .

    To find out how to deduct it: see section 36-17 .


    Special rules that apply if the company is in partnership

    SECTION 165-75   How to calculate the company's notional loss or notional taxableincome for a period when the company was a partner  

    165-75(1)    
    This section applies if at any time during a period the company was a partner in one or more partnerships.

    165-75(2)    
    The company has a *notional loss for the period if the total (the loss total ) of:


    (a) the deductions attributed to the period under section 165-55; and


    (b) the *company's share of each *notional loss (if any) of a partnership for the period;

    exceeds the total (the income total ) of:


    (c) the assessable income attributed to the period under section 165-60; and


    (d) the *company's share of each *notional net income (if any) of a partnership for the period.

    The notional loss is the amount of the excess.

    Note:

    A notional loss is taken into account in working out the company's tax loss under section 165-70 .


    165-75(3)    
    On the other hand, if the income total exceeds the loss total, the company has a notional taxable income for the period, equal to the excess.

    Note:

    A notional taxable income is taken into account in working out the company's taxable income under section 165-65 .


    165-75(4)    
    If the company has a *notional taxable income for all periods in the income year, this Subdivision has no further application, and the company's taxable income for the income year is calculated in the usual way.

    Note:

    The usual way of working out taxable income is set out in section 4-15 .


    SECTION 165-80   How to calculate the company's share of a partnership's notional loss or notional net income for a period if both entities have the same income year  

    165-80(1)    
    This section applies if at any time during a period the company is a partner in a partnership that has an income year that starts and ends when the company's income year starts and ends.

    165-80(2)    
    The partnership's notional loss or notional net income for the period is calculated in the same way as the *notional loss or *notional taxable income of a company.

    165-80(3)    
    The company's share is calculated by dividing:

  • • the company's interest in the partnership's net income or partnership loss of the income year;
  • by

  • • the amount of that net income or partnership loss;
  • and expressing the result as a percentage.


    165-80(4)    
    However, if the partnership had neither a net income nor a partnership loss, the company's share is a percentage that is fair and reasonable having regard to the extent of the company's interest in the partnership.

    SECTION 165-85   How to calculate the company's share of a partnership's notional loss or notional net income for a period if the entities have different income years  

    165-85(1)    
    This section applies if at any time during a period the company is a partner in a partnership that has an income year that starts and ends at a different time from when the company's income year starts and ends.

    165-85(2)    
    So much of the partnership's net income or partnership loss of an income year as was *derived during the period is a notional net income or notional loss of the partnership for the period. (For the purposes of this subsection, the partnership's net income or partnership loss is calculated without taking account of the partnership's *full year deductions for that income year.)

    Note:

    The partnership's full year deductions are dealt with in section 165-90 .


    165-85(3)    
    The company's share is calculated by dividing:

  • • the company's interest in the partnership's net income or partnership loss of that income year;
  • by

  • • the amount of that net income or partnership loss;
  • and expressing the result as a percentage.


    SECTION 165-90   Company's full year deductions include a share of partnership's full year deductions  

    165-90(1)    
    This section applies if at any time during the income year the company is a partner in a partnership that has one or more *full year deductions for the income year of the partnership that corresponds to the income year of the company.

    165-90(2)    
    The partnership's *full year deductions are treated as full year deductions of the company, but only to the extent of the *company's share.

    165-90(3)    
    If the partnership's income year is the same as the company's, the company's share is calculated by dividing:

  • • the company's interest in the partnership's net income or partnership loss of the income year;
  • by

  • • the amount of that net income or partnership loss;
  • and expressing the result as a percentage.


    165-90(4)    
    However, if the partnership had neither a net income nor a partnership loss, the company's share is a percentage that is fair and reasonable having regard to the extent of the company's interest in the partnership.

    165-90(5)    
    If the partnership's income year does not start and end at the same time as the company's income year, the company's share is a percentage that is fair and reasonable having regard to all relevant circumstances.

    Subdivision 165-CA - Applying net capital losses of earlier income years  

    Guide to Subdivision 165-CA

    SECTION 165-93   What this Subdivision is about  


    In working out its net capital gain for an income year, a company cannot apply a net capital loss for an earlier income year unless:

  • (a) it has the same owners and the same control from the start of the loss year to the end of the income year; or
  • (b) it satisfies the business continuity test by carrying on the same business (including entering into no new kinds of transactions and conducting no new kinds of business), or by carrying on a similar business (on or after 1 July 2015).

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    165-96 When a company cannot apply a net capital loss

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 165-96   When a company cannot apply a net capital loss  

    165-96(1)    


    In working out its *net capital gain for the *current year, a company cannot apply a *net capital loss it has for an earlier income year if Subdivision 165-A would prevent it from deducting the loss for the current year if:


    (a) the loss were a *tax loss of the company for that earlier income year; and


    (b) section 165-20 (about deducting part of a tax loss) were disregarded.

    Note 1:

    A company ' s net capital gain for an income year is usually worked out under section 102-5 .

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 165-A deals with the deductibility of a company ' s tax loss for an earlier income year if there has been a change in the ownership or control of the company in the period from the start of the loss year to the end of the income year.

    Note 3:

    Subdivision 165-F may affect the application of Subdivision 165-A .


    165-96(2)    
    If subsection (1) prevents the company from applying the *net capital loss, it can apply the part of the loss that it made during a part of that earlier income year, but only if, assuming that part of that income year had been treated as the whole of it, the company would have been entitled to apply the net capital loss.


    Subdivision 165-CB - Working out the net capital gain and the net capital loss for the income year of the change  

    Guide to Subdivision 165-CB

    SECTION 165-99   What this Subdivision is about  


    A company that has not had the same ownership and control during the income year, and has not satisfied the business continuity test, works out its net capital gain and net capital loss under this Subdivision.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    When a company must work out its net capital gain and net capital loss under this Subdivision
    165-102 On a change of ownership, or of control of voting power, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test
    Working out the company ' s net capital gain and net capital loss
    165-105 First, divide the income year into periods
    165-108 Next, calculate the notional net capital gain or notional net capital loss for each period
    165-111 How to work out the company ' s net capital gain
    165-114 How to work out the company ' s net capital loss

    When a company must work out its net capital gain and net capital loss under this Subdivision

    SECTION 165-102  

    165-102  On a change of ownership, or of control of voting power, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test  
    A company must calculate its *net capital gain and *net capital loss for the income year under this Subdivision if:


    (a) it must calculate its taxable income and *tax loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-B ; or

    Note:

    Subdivision 165-F may affect the application of Subdivision 165-B .


    (b) it would be required to calculate them under that Subdivision but for subsection 165-50(3) (about cases where that Subdivision would make no difference to the taxable income).

    Note:

    In the case of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company, Subdivision 166-B modifies how this Subdivision applies, unless the company chooses otherwise.

    Working out the company's net capital gain and net capital loss

    SECTION 165-105  

    165-105   First, divide the income year into periods  
    Divide the income year into periods according to section 165-45 (which is about working out the company's taxable income under Subdivision 165-B ).

    SECTION 165-108   Next, calculate the notional net capital gain or notional net capital loss for each period  

    165-108(1)    
    The company has a notional net capital gain for a period if the total of the *capital gains it made during the period exceeds the total of the *capital losses it made during the period. The notional net capital gain is the amount of the excess.

    165-108(2)    
    On the other hand, if the total of those losses exceeds the total of those gains, the company has a notional net capital loss for the period, equal to the excess.

    165-108(3)    
    If the company has a *notional net capital loss for none of the periods in the income year, this Subdivision has no further application, and the company's *net capital gain for the income year is calculated in the usual way.

    The usual way of working out the net capital gain is set out in section 102-5 .



    Trust's capital gain attributed to company beneficiary

    165-108(4)    
    If some or all (the attributable amount ) of an amount included in the company's assessable income for the income year under:


    (a) section 97 (Beneficiary of a trust estate who is not under a legal disability) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or


    (b) section 98A (Non-residentbeneficiaries assessable in respect of certain income) of that Act;

    is attributable to a *capital gain that the trust made at a particular time during the period, this section applies to the attributable amount as if it were a *capital gain made by the company at that time.


    SECTION 165-111  

    165-111   How to work out the company ' s net capital gain  
    The company ' s net capital gain for the income year is worked out in this way: Working out the company ' s net capital gain


    Step 1.

    Add up the *notional net capital gains (if any) worked out under section 165-108 .

    Note:

    A notional net capital loss for a period is not taken into account, but counts towards the company ' s net capital loss for the income year.


    Step 2.

    Add to the Step 1 amount so much of each amount included in the company ' s assessable income for the income year under:

  • (a) section 97 (Beneficiary of a trust estate who is not under a legal disability) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or
  • (b) section 98A (Non-resident beneficiaries assessable in respect of certain income) of that Act;
  • as is attributable to a *capital gain that the trust made outside the income year.

    Note:

    This is relevant only if the trust has an income year that starts and ends at a different time from when the company ' s income year starts and ends.


    Step 3.

    If the Step 2 amount is more than zero, reduce it by applying any unapplied *net capital losses from previous income years. (If this reduces it to zero, the company has no net capital gain for the income year.)

    Note:

    To apply net capital losses: see section 102-15 .


    Step 4.

    If the Step 3 amount is more than zero, it is the company ' s net capital gain .

    Note:

    For exceptions and modifications to these rules: see section 102-30 .

    SECTION 165-114  

    165-114   How to work out the company's net capital loss  
    The company's net capital loss for the income year is worked out in this way: Working out the company's net capital loss


    Step 1.

    Add up the *notional net capital losses (if any) worked out under section 165-108 .


    Step 2.

    If the Step 1 amount is more than zero, it is the company's net capital loss .

    Note:

    For exceptions and modifications to these rules: see section 102-30 .

    Subdivision 165-CC - Change of ownership or control of company that has an unrealised net loss  

    Guide to Subdivision 165-CC

    SECTION 165-115   What this Subdivision is about  


    If a change occurs in the ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss, the company cannot, to the extent of the unrealised net loss, have capital losses taken into account, or deduct revenue losses, in respect of CGT events that happen to CGT assets that it owned at the time of the change, unless it satisfies the business continuity test.

    SECTION 165-115AA   Special rules to save compliance costs  

    165-115AA(1)    


    A company is exempt from these rules if, at the time of the change in ownership or control, it (together with certain related entities) has a net asset value of not more than $6,000,000 under the test in section 152-15 (for small business CGT relief).

    165-115AA(2)    


    In working out whether it has an unrealised net loss, a company can choose to work out the market value of each of its assets individually, or of all of its assets together.

    165-115AA(3)    


    If a company works out the market value of each of its assets individually, it may choose to exclude every asset that it acquired for less than $10,000, in which case:


    (a) unrealised losses and gains on the excluded assets will not be taken into account in calculating the company ' s unrealised net loss; and


    (b) losses on the excluded assets will be allowed without the company being subject to the business continuity test.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    165-115A Application of Subdivision
    165-115B What happens when the company makes a capital loss or becomes entitled to a deduction in respect of a CGT asset after a changeover time
    165-115BA What happens when a CGT event happens after a changeover time to a CGT asset of the company that is trading stock
    165-115BB Order of application of assets: residual unrealised net loss
    165-115C Changeover time - change in ownership of company
    165-115D Changeover time - change in control of company
    165-115E What is an unrealised net loss
    165-115F Notional gains and losses


    Operative provisions

    SECTION 165-115A   Application of Subdivision  


    Application

    165-115A(1)    
    This Subdivision applies to a company if:


    (a) a changeover time has occurred or occurs in relation to the company after the commencement time; and


    (b) at the changeover time the company had an unrealised net loss (see section 165-115E ); and


    (c) either of the following applies:


    (i) the company makes a *capital loss, or apart from this Subdivision would be entitled to a deduction, in respect of a *CGT event that happens to a *CGT asset referred to in subsection (1A);

    (ii) the company makes a *trading stock loss in respect of a CGT asset referred to in subsection (1A) that is an item of *trading stock; and


    (d) the company would not, at the changeover time, satisfy the maximum net asset value test under section 152-15 .



    CGT assets in respect of which Subdivision applies

    165-115A(1A)    


    The *CGT assets for the purposes of paragraph (1)(c) are:


    (a) any CGT asset that the company owned at the changeover time; and


    (b) any CGT asset that the company did not own at the changeover time but had owned at a previous time, where:


    (i) a deferral event referred to in subsection 170-255(1) happened before the changeover time; and

    (ii) the deferral event involved the company as the originating company referred to in that subsection; and

    (iii) the deferral event would have resulted in the company making a *capital loss, or becoming entitled to a deduction, in respect of the CGT asset except for section 170-270 ; and

    (iv) the company is not taken to have made a capital loss at or before the changeover time, or to have become entitled to a deduction at that time, under section 170-275 in respect of the asset.


    Company may choose to disregard CGT assets acquired for less than $10,000

    165-115A(1B)    


    A company may choose, for the purposes of the application of this Subdivision to it in respect of a particular changeover time, that every *CGT asset that has been acquired by it for less than $10,000 is to be disregarded.

    However, the choice does not affect the application of the *global method of working out whether the company has an unrealised net loss (see subsection 165-115E(2) ).



    Time for making choice

    165-115A(1C)    


    A choice under subsection (1B) must be made on or before:


    (a) the day on which the company lodges its *income tax return for the income year in which the relevant changeover time occurred; or


    (b) such later day as the Commissioner allows.



    Trading stock loss

    165-115A(1D)    


    A company is taken to have made a trading stock loss in respect of an asset that is an item of *trading stock if, and only if:


    (a) one of the following applies:


    (i) the company *disposes of the item;

    (ii) the item stops being trading stock (within the meaning of section 70-80 );

    (iii) the item is revalued under Division 70 ; and


    (b) if subparagraph (a)(i) or (ii) applies - the item ' s *market value at the time when it is disposed of or stops being trading stock is less than:


    (i) in respect of an item that has been valued under Division 70 - its latest value under the Division; or

    (ii) otherwise - its cost at that time; and


    (c) if subparagraph (a)(iii) applies - the item ' s value under the revaluation is less than:


    (i) in respect of an item that has previously been valued under Division 70 - its latest value under that Division before the revaluation; or

    (ii) otherwise - its cost at the time of the revaluation.

    The difference worked out under paragraph (b) or (c), as the case may be, constitutes the amount of the *trading stock loss.



    Commencement time

    165-115A(2)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, the commencement time of a company is:


    (a) if the company was in existence at 1 pm (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 11 November 1999 - that time; or


    (b) if the company came into existence after that time - the time when it came into existence.



    Reference time

    165-115A(2A)    


    For the purposes of the application of this Subdivision to a company in relation to a particular time (the test time ), the reference time is:


    (a) if no changeover time occurred in respect of the company before the test time - the commencement time; or


    (b) otherwise - the time immediately after the last changeover time that occurred in respect of the company before the test time.



    Asset owned at more than one changeover time

    165-115A(3)    
    If:


    (a) 2 or more changeover times haveoccurred or occur in relation to a company; and


    (b) the company owned a particular asset at more than one of those changeover times;

    this Subdivision applies to the company in respect of that asset only in relation to the later or latest of those changeover times.

    Note:

    For changeover time see sections 165-115C and 165-115D .


    SECTION 165-115B   What happens when the company makes a capital loss or becomes entitled to a deduction in respect of a CGT asset after a changeover time  


    Where capital loss or deduction is equal to or less than residual unrealised net loss

    165-115B(1)    


    If the *capital loss or deduction referred to in subparagraph 165-115A(1)(c) (i) is equal to or less than the company ' s residual unrealised net loss at the time of the occurrence of the event that resulted in the capital loss or entitled the company to the deduction:


    (a) the capital loss is taken to have been a *net capital loss; or


    (b) the deduction is taken to have been a *tax loss;

    of the company for the income year immediately before the income year in which the changeover time occurred.



    Where capital loss or deduction is greater than residual unrealised net loss

    165-115B(2)    


    If the *capital loss or deduction referred to in subparagraph 165-115A(1)(c)(i) is greater than the company ' s residual unrealised net loss at the time of the occurrence of the event that resulted in the capital loss or entitled the company to the deduction:


    (a) the part of the capital loss that is equal to the residual unrealised net loss is taken to have been a *net capital loss; or


    (b) the part of the deduction that is equal to the residual unrealised net loss is taken to have been a *tax loss;

    of the company for the income year immediately before the income year in which the changeover time occurred.



    Company does not meet certain conditions in relation to net capital loss or tax loss

    165-115B(3)    


    The company is taken not to have met, at the changeover time, the conditions in subsections 165-12(2) , (3) and (4) in relation to the *net capital loss or the *tax loss. The changeover time is the test time for applying section 165-13 to the company.

    Need to meet business continuity test

    165-115B(4)    


    The effect of subsection (3) is that the company cannot apply the *net capital loss (see section 165-10 as it applies because of section 165-96 ), or deduct the *tax loss (see section 165-10 ), unless it meets the condition in section 165-13 (the business continuity test).

    Consequences for net capital loss

    165-115B(5)    


    The *net capital loss cannot be applied against *capital gains made in an income year before the income year in which the company made the capital loss referred to in subparagraph 165-115A(1)(c)(i) .

    Consequences for tax loss

    165-115B(6)    


    The *tax loss cannot be deducted from assessable income *derived in an income year before the income year in which the company would have been entitled to the deduction referred to in subparagraph 165-115A(1)(c)(i) .
    Note:

    For changeover time see sections 165-115C and 165-115D .


    165-115B(7)    
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2000)

    165-115B(8)    
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2000)


    SECTION 165-115BA   What happens when a CGT event happens after a changeover time to a CGT asset of the company that is trading stock  


    Application

    165-115BA(1)    
    This section applies to the company if, after the changeover time, the company makes a *trading stock loss in respect of an item of *trading stock as mentioned in subparagraph 165-115A(1)(c)(ii) .

    Where trading stock loss is equal to or less than residual unrealised net loss

    165-115BA(2)    
    If the *trading stock loss is equal to or less than the company ' s residual unrealised net loss at the time of the occurrence of the trading stock loss, the amount of the trading stock loss is to be included in the company ' s assessable income.

    Where trading stock loss is greater than unrealised net loss

    165-115BA(3)    
    If the *trading stock loss is greater than the company ' s residual unrealised net loss at the time of the occurrence of the trading stock loss, the part of the trading stock loss that is equal to the residual unrealised net loss is to be included in the company ' s assessable income.

    No increase in assessable income if company satisfies the business continuity test

    165-115BA(4)    


    Neither subsection (2) nor (3) applies to the company if the company meets the condition in section 165-13 (the business continuity test).

    Assumptions for purposes of business continuity test

    165-115BA(5)    
    In determining whether the company meets the condition in section 165-13 , assume:


    (a) that the *trading stock loss (if subsection (2) applies) or the part of the trading stock loss (if subsection (3) applies) is a *net capital loss of the company for the income year immediately before the income year in which the changeover time occurred; and


    (b) that the company failed, at the changeover time, to meet the condition in subsections 165-12(2) , (3) and (4) in relation to the net capital loss referred to in paragraph (a); and


    (c) that the changeover time is the test time ; and


    (d) that the *business continuity test period is the income year in which the loss occurred.


    SECTION 165-115BB   Order of application of assets: residual unrealised net loss  


    Order in which assets are to be applied

    165-115BB(1)    
    In applying subsection 165-115B(2) or 165-115BA(3) in respect of assets that the company owned at the changeover time:


    (a) the company ' s *capital losses are taken to have been made, the company is taken to have become entitled to deductions and the company is taken to have made *trading stock losses in the order in which the events that resulted in the capital losses, deductions or trading stock losses occurred; and


    (b) if 2 or more such events occurred at the same time, they are taken to have occurred in such order as the company determines.

    Residual unrealised net loss

    165-115BB(2)    


    The company ' s residual unrealised net loss , at the time of an event (the relevant event ) that resulted in the company making a *capital loss, becoming entitled to a deduction or making a *trading stock loss, in respect of an asset, is the amount worked out using the following formula:


      Unrealised net loss   − Previous capital losses, deductions
    or trading stock losses
     

    where:

    previous capital losses, deductions or trading stock losses
    means the total of the following:


    (a) capital losses that the company made, deductions to which the company became entitled, or *trading stock losses that the company made, as a result of events earlier than the relevant event in respect of assets that the company owned at the *changeover time;


    (b) each reduction that section 715-105 (as applying to the company as the *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group) makes in respect of such an asset because an entity ceased before the time of the relevant event to be a *subsidiary member of the group (but counting only the greater or greatest such reduction if 2 or more are made for the same asset);

    or nil if there are none.

    unrealised net loss
    means the company ' s unrealised net loss at the last changeover time that occurred before the relevant event.

    Note:

    For changeover time see sections 165-115C and 165-115D .


    SECTION 165-115C   Changeover time - change in ownership of company  

    165-115C(1)    
    A time (the test time ) is a changeover time in respect of a company if:


    (a) persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company at the reference time do not have more than 50% of that voting power immediately after the test time; or


    (b) persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s dividends at the reference time do not have rights to more than 50% of those dividends immediately after the test time; or


    (c) persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions at the reference time do not have rights to more than 50% of those distributions immediately after the test time.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-150 to work out who had more than 50% of the voting power in the company.

    Note 2:

    See section 165-155 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company ' s dividends.

    Note 3:

    See section 165-160 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions.

    Note 4:

    For reference time see subsection 165-115A(2A) .

    Note 5:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    165-115C(2)    
    To work out whether paragraph (1)(a), (b) or (c) applied at a particular time, apply the primary test unless subsection (3) requires the alternative test to be applied.

    Note:

    For the primary test see subsections 165-150(1) , 165-155(1) and 165-160(1) .


    165-115C(3)    


    Apply the alternative test if one or more other companies beneficially owned *shares or interests in shares in the company at any time during the period from the reference time to the *test time.
    Note:

    For the alternative test see subsections 165-150(2) , 165-155(2) and 165-160(2) .


    165-115C(4)    
    A *test time that would, apart from this subsection, be a changeover time in respect of the company because of the application of subsection (1) is taken not to be a changeover time if:


    (a) that subsection would not have applied except for the operation of section 165-165 ; and


    (b) the company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that less than 50% of the company ' s unrealised net loss at the test time has been reflected in deductions, capital losses, or reduced assessable income, that occurred, or could occur in future, because of the happening of any *CGT event in relation to any *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests in the company during the period from the reference time to the test time.


    165-115C(4A)    


    If the company is:


    (a) a *non-profit company; or


    (b) a *mutual affiliate company; or


    (c) a *mutual insurance company;

    during the whole of the period from the reference time to the *test time, the test time is taken not to be a *changeover time in respect of the company because of the application of paragraphs (1)(b) and (c).


    165-115C(5)    


    The happening of any *CGT event in relation to a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest in the company that results in the time of the happening of the event being a changeover time in respect of the company is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (4)(b), to have occurred during the period referred to in that paragraph.

    165-115C(6)    
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )


    165-115C(7)    
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )


    SECTION 165-115D   Changeover time - change in control of company  

    165-115D(1)    
    A time (the test time ) is also a changeover time in respect of a company if, at the test time:


    (a) a person or persons who did not control, and were not able to control, the voting power in the company at the reference time began to control, or became able to control, that voting power immediately after the test time; and


    (b) that person or those persons so began, or became able, to control that voting power for the purpose of:


    (i) getting some benefit or advantage in relation to how this Act applies; or

    (ii) getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else;
    or for purposes including that purpose.
    Note 1:

    A person can still control the voting power in a company that is in liquidation etc.: see section 165-250 .

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.


    165-115D(2)    
    In this section:

    control
    of the voting power in a company means control of that voting power either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities.


    SECTION 165-115E   What is an unrealised net loss  

    165-115E(1)    
    The question whether a company has an unrealised net loss at a particular time (the relevant time ) is worked out in this way (the individual asset method ), unless the company chooses to work it out using the *global method (set out in subsection (2)). Method statement


    Step 1.

    Work out under section 165-115F in respect of each *CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant time any notional capital gain or notional revenue gain or any notional capital loss or notional revenue loss that the company has at that time in respect of the asset.

    The sum of the notional capital gains is the company ' s unrealised capital gain at the relevant time.

    The sum of the notional capital losses is the company ' s unrealised capital loss at the relevant time.

    The sum of the notional revenue gains is the company ' s unrealised revenue gain at the relevant time.

    The sum of the notional revenue losses is the company ' s unrealised revenue loss at the relevant time.


    Step 2.

    Add up the unrealised capital gain and the unrealised revenue gain at the relevant time. The total is the unrealised gross gain at that time.


    Step 3.

    Add up the unrealised capital loss and the unrealised revenue loss at the relevant time. The total is the unrealised gross loss at that time.


    Step 4.

    If the unrealised gross loss at the relevant time exceeds the unrealised gross gain at that time, the excess is the company ' s preliminary unrealised net loss at that time.


    Step 5.

    Add up the company ' s preliminary unrealised net loss and any *capital loss, deduction or share of a deduction disregarded under section 170-270 in relation to an asset referred to in paragraph 165-115A(1A)(b) . The total is the company ' s unrealised net loss at the relevant time.


    165-115E(2)    


    The global method of working out whether the company has an unrealised net loss at the relevant time is as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out the total *market value of all *CGT assets that the company owned at the relevant time (including those it *acquired for less than $10,000), using a valuation method that would generally be regarded as appropriate in the circumstances.


    Step 2.

    Work out the total of the *cost bases of those *CGT assets at the relevant time.

    Note:

    If a CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant time was also trading stock or a revenue asset at that time, see subsection (3) of this section.


    Step 3.

    If the step 2 amount exceeds the step 1 amount, the excess is the company ' s preliminary unrealised net loss at the relevant time.


    Step 4.

    Add up the company ' s preliminary unrealised net loss and any *capital loss, deduction or share of a deduction disregarded under section 170-270 in relation to an asset referred to in paragraph 165-115A(1A)(b) . The total is the company ' s unrealised net loss at the relevant time.


    165-115E(3)    
    If:


    (a) a *CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant time was also *trading stock or a *revenue asset at that time; and


    (b) the asset ' s *cost base at the relevant time is less than the amount that would be compared under section 165-115F with the asset ' s *market value in working out a notional revenue gain or notional revenue loss that the company has at the relevant time in respect of the asset;

    then, for the purposes of step 2 of the method statement in subsection (2) of this section, the amount that would be so compared is to be taken into account instead of that cost base.


    165-115E(4)    
    A choice to use the *global method must be made on or before:


    (a) the day on which the company lodges its *income tax return for the income year in which the relevant time occurred; or


    (b) such later day as the Commissioner allows.


    SECTION 165-115F   Notional gains and losses  

    165-115F(1)    
    This section applies for the purpose of calculating whether a company has at a particular time (the relevant time ) a notional capital gain, a notional capital loss, a notional revenue gain or a notional revenue loss in respect of a *CGT asset that it owned at that time.

    165-115F(2)    


    The calculation is to be made on the assumption that the company disposed of the asset at its *market value at the relevant time.

    165-115F(3)    


    In relation to an asset other than an item of *trading stock:


    (a) if the company would make a *capital gain in respect of the disposal of the asset - the company has at the relevant time in respect of the asset a notional capital gain equal to the amount of the capital gain; or


    (b) if an amount (other than a capital gain) would be included in the company ' s assessable income in respect of the disposal of the asset - the company has at the relevant time in respect of the asset a notional revenue gain equal to the amount so included; or


    (c) if the company would make a *capital loss in respect of the disposal of the asset - the company has at the relevant time in respect of the asset a notional capital loss equal to the amount of the capital loss; or


    (d) if the company would be entitled to a deduction in respect of the disposal of the asset - the company has at the relevant time in respect of the asset a notional revenue loss equal to the amount of the deduction.


    165-115F(4)    


    In relation to an asset that is an item of *trading stock:


    (a) if the item ' s *market value at the relevant time exceeds:


    (i) in respect of an item that has been valued under Division 70 - the item ' s latest valuation under that Division; or

    (ii) otherwise - the *cost of the item at the relevant time;
    the company has at the relevant time in respect of the article a notional revenue gain equal to the excess; or


    (b) if the item ' s market value at the relevant time is less than:


    (i) in respect of an item that has been valued under Division 70 - the item ' s latest valuation under that Division; or

    (ii) otherwise - the *cost of the item at the relevant time;
    the company has at the relevant time in respect of the article a notional revenue loss equal to the difference.

    165-115F(5)    


    A company may choose that this section is to apply to the company at the relevant time in respect of an asset to which subsection (6) applied at that time as if references to the *market value of the asset were references to its *written down value.

    165-115F(6)    


    This subsection applies to an asset at the relevant time if:


    (a) the asset is a *depreciating asset (not a building or structure) for whose decline in value the company has deducted or can deduct an amount; and


    (b) the expenditure incurred by the company to *acquire the asset was less than $1,000,000 (the expenditure can include the giving of property: see section 103-5 ); and


    (c) it would be reasonable for the company to conclude that the *market value of the asset at that time was not less than 80% of its *written down value at that time.


    165-115F(7)    
    (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)


    Subdivision 165-CD - Reductions after alterations in ownership or control of loss company  

    Guide to Subdivision 165-CD

    165-115G   (Repealed) SECTION 165-115G What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)

    SECTION 165-115GA   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision prevents multiple recognition of a company ' s losses when significant equity and debt interests that entities (not individuals) have in the company are realised.

    SECTION 165-115GB   When adjustments must be made  

    165-115GB(1)    
    The operation of this Subdivision is triggered at an alteration time, which is when:


    (a) an alteration takes place in the ownership or control of the company; or


    (b) a liquidator or administrator of the company declares that shares or financial instruments are worthless (CGT event G3).


    165-115GB(2)    
    An alteration time is the trigger for making reductions and other adjustments to the reduced cost base of significant equity and debt interests in the company that are owned by an entity (not an individual) that, alone or with its associates, has a controlling stake in the company and either:


    (a) has a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest of at least 10% in the company; or


    (b) is owed a debt of at least $10,000 by the company or by another entity that has a significant equity or debt interest in the company.

    Deductions that relate to such interests held as trading stock or otherwise on revenue account are also reduced.


    165-115GB(3)    
    Adjustments may also be made when such an entity ' s interests in the company are partly realised within 12 months before an alteration time or if, under an arrangement, such interests are realised partly within that period or at the alteration time and partly at an earlier time.

    165-115GB(4)    
    However, entities in which there are no interests in respect of which the company ' s losses have been, or can be, duplicated are not affected by this Subdivision.


    SECTION 165-115GC   How adjustments are calculated  

    165-115GC(1)    
    Adjustments are based on the overall loss of the company. This comprises its realised losses and unrealised losses on CGT assets.

    165-115GC(2)    
    Special rules, directed at saving compliance costs, apply to determine whether unrealised losses have to be counted at an alteration time and, if so, how to work them out.

    165-115GC(3)    
    The company may not have to calculate its unrealised losses if the alteration time is not also a changeover time for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC (about change of ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss), and the company has no realised losses.

    165-115GC(4)    


    The company does not have to count unrealised losses at an alteration time if (together with certain related entities) it has a net asset value of not more than $6,000,000 under the test in section 152-15 (for small business CGT relief).

    165-115GC(5)    


    In working out its unrealised losses on CGT assets, the company can choose to work out the *market value of each of its assets individually, or of all of its assets together.

    165-115GC(6)    


    If the company works out the *market value of each of its assets individually, unrealised losses on assets acquired for less than $10,000 do not have to be calculated at any time.

    165-115GC(7)    


    Amounts (whether realised or unrealised) counted at a previous alteration time are not counted again at a later alteration time. (This does not apply to unrealised losses worked out by reference to the *market value of all the company ' s assets together.)

    165-115GC(8)    


    However, if unrealised amounts are not counted at a previous alteration time (for example, because of the $10,000 exclusion, or because you satisfy the maximum net asset value test in section 152-15 ) and are not required to be taken into account in adjustments made at that time, they may be counted at a later time as part of a realised loss.

    165-115GC(9)    
    A formula is provided for making adjustments in straightforward cases if applying the formula gives a reasonable result having regard to the object of the Subdivision. Otherwise, reasonable adjustments must be made having regard to a number of stated factors.

    165-115GC(10)    
    To help entities to make the adjustments, any entity that, in its own right, has a controlling stake in the company is required to provide a written notice to its associates setting out relevant information. In limited circumstances, the company itself may have to provide a written notice to entities that, to its knowledge, have a significant equity or debt interest in it.


    SECTION 165-115H   How this Subdivision applies  

    165-115H(1)    
    This Subdivision provides for certain taxation consequences for an entity (not an individual) that had a significant equity or debt interest in a loss company immediately before an alteration time occurred in respect of the company.

    165-115H(2)    


    The following flowchart explains how to work out whether this Subdivision applies to an entity.


    165-115H(3)    
    If this Subdivision applies to an entity, reductions are made to:


    (a) the reduced cost base of the entity ' s equity or debt (see subsection 165-115ZA(3) ); or


    (b) any deduction to which the entity is entitled in respect of the disposal of the equity or debt (see subsection 165-115ZA(4) ); or


    (c) deductions in respect of, and the cost of, any of the equity or debt that is trading stock (see subsection 165-115ZA(5) ).

    Example:

    The following is an example of how this Subdivision operates:


    Facts: Alpha Co acquired 80% of the shares in Beta Co on 5 May 1998 for $1,000.
    Gamma Co owns 20% of the shares in Beta Co.
    On 6 February 2000, Alpha Co disposed of its shares for $600.
    At the beginning of the 1999-2000 income year, Beta Co had an unapplied net capital loss of $500 from the 1998-99 income year. This loss was fully reflected in the market value of shares in Beta Co.
    Alpha Co and Gamma Co are not associated in any way.
    Result:  
    Step 1: An alteration time occurred in respect of Beta Co as a result of the change in ownership that occurred when Alpha Co sold its shares.
    Step 2: Beta Co was a loss company at the alteration time because it had an unapplied net capital loss from an earlierincome year.
    Step 3: Alpha Co had a relevant equity interest in Beta Co immediately before the alteration time because it had a controlling stake and significant interest (80% equity interest). Gamma Co did not have a relevant equity interest in Beta Co because it did not have a controlling stake.
    Step 4: Because Alpha Co had a relevant equity interest in Beta Co, the reduced cost bases of its shares in Beta Co are reduced by 80% of Beta Co ' s net capital loss:
    80%   ×   $500   =   $400
    Alpha Co does not make a capital gain on the disposal of its shares in Beta Co because the capital proceeds ($600) are less than the cost bases ($1,000).
    Nor did Alpha Co make a capital loss on the disposal of its shares in Beta Co because the capital proceeds ($600) are not less than the reduced cost bases as further reduced by this Subdivision ($600).
    The net capital loss in Beta Co is not duplicated on the sale of Alpha Co ' s shares in Beta Co.
    Step 5: There are no notice requirements in this simple case. If Gamma Co and Alpha Co were associates (so that Gamma Co had a relevant equity interest in Beta Co), Alpha Co would need to provide the following information to Gamma Co:
    (a) the alteration time: 6 February 2000;
    (b) Beta Co ' s overall loss at the alteration time: $500;
    (c) details of the overall loss: a net capital loss of $500 for the 1998-99 income year.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    165-115J Object of Subdivision
    165-115K Application and interpretation
    165-115L Alteration time - alteration in ownership of company
    165-115M Alteration time - alteration in control of company
    165-115N Alteration time - declaration by liquidator or administrator
    165-115P Notional alteration time - disposal of interests in company within 12 months before alteration time
    165-115Q Notional alteration time - disposal of interests in company earlier than 12 months before alteration time
    165-115R When company is a loss company at first or only alteration time in income year
    165-115S When company is a loss company at second or later alteration time in income year
    165-115T Reduction of certain amounts included in company ' s overall loss at alteration time
    165-115U Adjusted unrealised loss
    165-115V Notional losses
    165-115W Calculation of trading stock decrease
    165-115X Relevant equity interest
    165-115Y Relevant debt interest
    165-115Z What constitutes a controlling stake in a company
    165-115ZA Reductions and other consequences if entity has relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in loss company immediately before alteration time
    165-115ZB Adjustment amounts for the purposes of section 165-115ZA
    165-115ZC Notices to be given
    165-115ZD Adjustment (or further adjustment) for interest realised at a loss after global method has been used


    Operative provisions

    SECTION 165-115J  

    165-115J   Object of Subdivision  


    The main object of this Subdivision is to make appropriate adjustments (under section 165-115ZA ) to the tax values of significant equity and debt interests held directly or indirectly by entities other than individuals in a *loss company whose ownership or control alters.

    The purpose of the adjustments is to prevent the duplication of the company's realised and unrealised losses when any of those interests are *disposed of or otherwise realised. This happens because the company's losses are reflected in the values of the interests.

    SECTION 165-115K   Application and interpretation  


    Application

    165-115K(1)    
    This Subdivision applies if:


    (a) an alteration time occurs in respect of a company; and


    (b) the company is a *loss company at the alteration time; and


    (c) one or more entities had relevant equity interests or relevant debt interests in the company immediately before the alteration time.

    Note 1:

    For alteration time , see sections 165-115L , 165-115M , 165-115N , 165-115P and 165-115Q .

    Note 2:

    For relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests , see sections 165-115X and 165-115Y .



    Alteration time before commencement time to be disregarded

    165-115K(2)    
    An alteration time does not include a time before the commencement time.

    Commencement time

    165-115K(3)    
    The commencement time for a company is:


    (a) if the company was in existence at 1 pm (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 11 November 1999 - that time; or


    (b) if the company came into existence after that time - the time when it came into existence.

    Certain alteration times to be disregarded

    165-115K(4)    
    If:


    (a) a time (the test time ) would, apart from this subsection, be an alteration time in relation to a company; and


    (b) the company does not have any losses of the kinds referred to in paragraphs 165-115R(3)(a) , (b), (c) and (d) and 165-115S(3)(a) and (b); and


    (c) the test time is not a changeover time in relation to the company under Subdivision 165-CC ; and


    (d) if the test time were such a changeover time, it would be reasonable for the company to conclude that it would not have an unrealised net loss at that time under section 165-115E ;

    the test time is taken not to be an alteration time in relation to the company.



    Application to CGT events other than disposals

    165-115K(5)    
    This Subdivision applies to a *CGT event (other than a *disposal) happening in relation to a CGT asset (for example, an interest in a company that is constituted by an equity or debt):


    (a) in the same way as it applies to a disposal of a CGT asset; and


    (b) as if the asset had been disposed of at the time when the CGT event happens.

    SECTION 165-115L   Alteration time - alteration in ownership of company  

    165-115L(1)    
    A time (the test time ) is an alteration time in respect of a company if:


    (a) persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company at the reference time do not have more than 50% of that voting power immediately after the test time; or


    (b) persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s dividends at the reference time do not have rights to more than 50% of those dividends immediately after the test time; or


    (c) persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions at the reference time do not have rights to more than 50% of those distributions immediately after the test time.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-150 to work out who had more than 50% of the voting power in the company.

    Note 2:

    See section 165-155 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company ' s dividends.

    Note 3:

    See section 165-160 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions.

    Note 4:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    165-115L(2)    
    The reference time is:


    (a) if no alteration time occurred in respect of the company before the *test time - the commencement time; or


    (b) otherwise - the time immediately after the last alteration time.

    165-115L(3)    
    To work out whether paragraph (1)(a), (b) or (c) applied at a particular time, apply the primary test unless subsection (4) requires the alternative test to be applied.

    Note:

    For the primary test see subsections 165-150(1) , 165-155(1) and 165-160(1) .


    165-115L(4)    


    Apply the alternative test if one or more other companies beneficially owned *shares or interests in shares in the company at any time during the period from the reference time to the *test time.
    Note:

    For the alternative test see subsections 165-150(2) , 165-155(2) and 165-160(2) .


    165-115L(5)    


    If the company is:


    (a) a *non-profit company; or


    (b) a *mutual affiliate company; or


    (c) a *mutual insurance company;

    during the whole of the period from the reference time to the *test time, the test time is taken not to be an *alteration time in respect of the company because of the application of paragraphs (1)(b) and (c).


    SECTION 165-115M   Alteration time - alteration in control of company  

    165-115M(1)    
    A time (the test time ) is also an alteration time in respect of a company if, at the test time:


    (a) a person or persons who did not control, and were not able to control, the voting power in the company at the reference time began to control, or became able to control, that voting power immediately after the test time; and


    (b) that person or those persons so began, or became able, to control that voting power for the purpose of:


    (i) getting some benefit or advantage in relation to how this Act applies; or

    (ii) getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else;
    or for purposes including that purpose.
    Note 1:

    A person can still control the voting power in a company that is in liquidation etc.: see section 165-250 .

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.


    165-115M(2)    
    The reference time is:


    (a) if no alteration time occurred in respect of the company before the *test time - the commencement time; or


    (b) otherwise - the time immediately after the last alteration time.

    165-115M(3)    
    In this section:

    control
    of the voting power in a company means control of that voting power either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities.


    SECTION 165-115N  

    165-115N   Alteration time - declaration by liquidator or administrator  


    If a liquidator or administrator makes a declaration referred to in section 104-145 in relation to a company, the time of the declaration is also an alteration time in respect of the company.

    SECTION 165-115P   Notional alteration time - disposal of interests in company within 12 months before alteration time  

    165-115P(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) an alteration time occurs in respect of a *loss company; and


    (b) an entity *disposed of an interest in the company (an equity ) or a debt (a debt ) at a time (the disposal time ) within 12 months before the alteration time but not earlier than the commencement time; and


    (c) immediately before the disposal time, the entity had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company that included the equity or debt, or would have had such an interest if any previous disposals of interests or debts by the entity had not occurred; and


    (d) immediately before the alteration time, the entity had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company, or would have had such an interest if any previous disposals of interests or debts by the entity had not occurred.

    165-115P(2)    
    The references in paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) to previous *disposals of interests or debts by the entity are references to:


    (a) previous disposals within the period referred to in paragraph (1)(b); and


    (b) previous disposals before that period if those previous disposals and any one or more of the following:


    (i) the disposal of the equity or debt;

    (ii) a disposal referred to in paragraph (a);

    (iii) a disposal at the alteration time;
    occurred as part of an *arrangement.

    165-115P(3)    
    The time immediately before the *disposal of the equity or debt is taken to have been an alteration time (a notional alteration time ) in respect of the company.

    165-115P(4)    
    The entity:


    (a) is taken to have had, immediately before the notional alteration time, a relevant equity interest in the company constituted by the equity or a relevant debt interest in the company constituted by the debt, as the case may be; and


    (b) is taken not to have had, immediately before the notional alteration time, any other relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in the company.

    165-115P(5)    
    No entity (other than the entity referred to in paragraph (1)(b)) is taken to have had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company immediately before the notional alteration time.

    165-115P(6)    
    In applying this Subdivision in relation to the company in respect of a time after a notional alteration time, the notional alteration time is taken not to have occurred.

    Note:

    For relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests , see sections 165-115X and 165-115Y .


    SECTION 165-115Q   Notional alteration time - disposal of interests in company earlier than 12 months before alteration time  

    165-115Q(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) an alteration time occurs in respect of a *loss company; and


    (b) an entity that *disposed of an interest in the company (the later equity ) or a debt (the later debt ) at, or within 12 months before, the alteration time also disposed of an interest in the company (the earlier equity ) or a debt (the earlier debt ) at a time (the earlier disposal time ) earlier than 12 months before the alteration time but not earlier than the commencement time; and


    (c) the disposal of the later equity or later debt and the disposal of the earlier equity or earlier debt occurred as part of an *arrangement; and


    (d) immediately before the earlier disposal time, the entity had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company that included the earlier equity or earlier debt, or would have had such an interest if any previous disposals of interests or debts by the entity had not occurred; and


    (e) immediately before the alteration time, the entity had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company, or would have had such an interest if any previous disposals of interests or debts by the entity had not occurred.

    165-115Q(2)    
    The references in paragraphs (1)(d) and (e) to previous *disposals of interests or debts by the entity are references to:


    (a) previous disposals within the period referred to in paragraph (1)(b); and


    (b) previous disposals before that period if those previous disposals and any one or more of the following:


    (i) the disposal of the equity or debt;

    (ii) a disposal referred to in paragraph (a);

    (iii) a disposal at the alteration time;
    occurred as part of an *arrangement.

    165-115Q(3)    
    The time immediately before the *disposal of the earlier equity or earlier debt is taken to have been an alteration time (a notional alteration time ) in respect of the company.

    165-115Q(4)    
    The entity:


    (a) is taken to have had, immediately before the notional alteration time, a relevant equity interest in the company constituted by the earlier equity or a relevant debt interest in the company constituted by the earlier debt, as the case may be; and


    (b) is taken not to have had, immediately before the notional alteration time, any other relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in the company.

    165-115Q(5)    
    No entity (other than the entity referred to in paragraph (1)(b)) is taken to have had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company immediately before the notional alteration time.

    165-115Q(6)    
    In applying this Subdivision in relation to the company in respect of a time after a notional alteration time, the notional alteration time is taken not to have occurred.

    Note:

    For relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests , see sections 165-115X and 165-115Y .


    SECTION 165-115R   When company is a loss company at first or only alteration time in income year  


    Application

    165-115R(1)    
    The question whether a company is a loss company at the first or only alteration time in a particular income year is to be worked out in this way.

    Assumed income year

    165-115R(2)    
    Assume that the period that started at the beginning of the income year and ended at the alteration time is an income year and apply paragraphs (3)(a), (b), (c) and (d) on that assumption.

    What is a loss company

    165-115R(3)    
    The company is a loss company at the alteration time if:


    (a) at the beginning of the income year it had a * tax loss or tax losses for an earlier income year or earlier income years; or


    (b) at the beginning of the income year it had a * net capital loss or net capital losses for an earlier income year or earlier income years; or


    (c) it has a tax loss for the income year, calculated as if the income year were a period for the purposes of Subdivision 165-B ; or


    (d) it has a net capital loss for the income year, calculated as if the income year were a period for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CB ; or


    (e) it has an adjusted unrealised loss at the alteration time.

    Note:

    For adjusted unrealised loss , see section 165-115U .



    How losses are to be calculated

    165-115R(4)    
    In applying subsection (3):


    (a) a * tax loss or *net capital loss that was taken into account in working out under this section whether the company was a *loss company at an alteration time in a previous income year is to be disregarded; and


    (b) Subdivision 170-D is to be disregarded.



    Overall loss

    165-115R(5)    
    The sum of:


    (a) the amount or amounts of any *tax loss or tax losses referred to in paragraph (3)(a); and


    (b) the amount or amounts of any *net capital loss or net capital losses referred to in paragraph (3)(b); and


    (c) the amount of any tax loss referred to in paragraph (3)(c); and


    (d) the amount of any net capital loss referred to in paragraph (3)(d); and


    (e) the amount of any adjusted unrealised loss referred to in paragraph (3)(e);

    is the *loss company ' s overall loss at the alteration time.

    Note:

    The loss company ' s overall loss is relevant for the purposes of subsections 165-115ZB(3) and (6).



    Certain losses to be disregarded

    165-115R(6)    
    A reference in a paragraph of subsection (3) and in the corresponding paragraph of subsection (5) to a particular loss is a reference only to a loss to the extent to which it represents an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the company.

    Note:

    Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.


    165-115R(6A)    


    Subsection (6) does not apply to paragraphs (3)(e) and (5)(e) if the company has chosen to use the *global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at the alteration time.

    Amounts of losses may be reduced

    165-115R(7)    
    The amounts referred to in paragraphs (5)(a) to (d) may be reduced under section 165-115T .

    SECTION 165-115S   When company is a loss company at second or later alteration time in income year  


    Application

    165-115S(1)    
    The question whether a company is a loss company at an alteration time (the current alteration time ) that is the second or a later alteration time in the same income year is to be worked out in this way.

    Assumed income year

    165-115S(2)    
    Assume that the period that started immediately after the last alteration time and ended at the current alteration time is an income year and apply paragraphs (3)(a) and (b) on that assumption.

    What is a loss company

    165-115S(3)    
    The company is a loss company at the current alteration time if:


    (a) it has a *tax loss for the income year, calculated as if the income year were a period for the purposes of Subdivision 165-B ; or


    (b) it has a *net capital loss for the income year, calculated as if the income year were a period for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CB ; or


    (c) it has an adjusted unrealised loss at the current alteration time.

    Note:

    For adjusted unrealised loss , see section 165-115U .



    How losses are to be calculated

    165-115S(4)    
    In applying subsection (3), Subdivision 170-D is to be disregarded.

    Overall loss

    165-115S(5)    
    The sum of:


    (a) the amount of any *tax loss referred to in paragraph (3)(a); and


    (b) the amount of any *net capital loss referred to in paragraph (3)(b); and


    (c) the amount of any adjusted unrealised loss referred to in paragraph (3)(c);

    is the *loss company ' s overall loss at the current alteration time.

    Note:

    The loss company ' s overall loss is relevant for the purposes of subsections 165-115ZB(3) and (6).



    Certain losses to be disregarded

    165-115S(6)    
    A reference in a paragraph of subsection (3) and in the corresponding paragraph of subsection (5) to a particular loss is a reference only to a loss to the extent to which it represents an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the company.

    Note:

    Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.


    165-115S(6A)    


    Subsection (6) does not apply to paragraphs (3)(c) and (5)(c) if the company has chosen to use the *global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at the current alteration time.

    Amounts of losses may be reduced

    165-115S(7)    
    The amounts referred to in paragraphs (5)(a) and (b) may be reduced under section 165-115T .

    SECTION 165-115T   Reduction of certain amounts included in company's overall loss at alteration time  

    165-115T(1)    
    In working out under section 165-115R or 165-115S whether a company was a *loss company at an alteration time (the current alteration time ), if a loss (the realised loss ) referred to in paragraph 165-115R(3)(a), (b), (c) or (d) or 165-115S(3)(a) or (b) that the company had at the current alteration time reflected an amount of a notional revenue loss, a trading stock decrease or a notional capital loss included in an adjusted unrealised loss, that the company had at a previous alteration time, the realised loss is taken to be reduced by that amount.

    Note 1:

    For notional revenue loss and notional capital loss see section 165-115V .

    Note 2:

    For trading stock decrease see section 165-115W .


    165-115T(2)    


    Subsection (1) does not apply to an adjusted unrealised loss that the company had at a previous alteration time if the company has chosen to use the *global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at that previous time.

    SECTION 165-115U   Adjusted unrealised loss  

    165-115U(1)    


    The question whether a company has an adjusted unrealised loss at an alteration time (the relevant alteration time ) is worked out in this way (the individual asset method ), unless the company chooses to work it out using the *global method (set out in subsection (1B)). Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out under section 165-115V or 165-115W in respect of each *CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant alteration time any notional capital loss, notional revenue loss or trading stock decrease that the company has at that time in respect of the asset.

    To the extent that a notional capital loss or a notional revenue loss in respect of an asset at the relevant alteration time reflected an amount that was counted at an earlier alteration time, do not count it again at the relevant alteration time.


    Step 2.

    Add up the notional capital losses and the notional revenue losses that the company had at the relevant alteration time. The total is the company ' s nominal unrealised loss at that time.


    Step 3.

    Add up the trading stock decreases that the company had at the relevant alteration time. The total is the company ' s overall trading stock decrease at that time.


    Step 4.

    The sum of the company ' s nominal unrealised loss and overall trading stock decrease at the relevant time is the company ' s adjusted unrealised loss at that time.

    Note:

    Certain alteration times are disregarded (see subsections 165-115K(2) and (4)).


    165-115U(1A)    
    Step 1 in the method statement in subsection (1) does not apply to an amount that was counted at an earlier alteration time if the company has chosen to use the *global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at that earlier time.


    165-115U(1B)    


    The global method of working out whether the company has an adjusted unrealised loss at the relevant alteration time is as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out the total *market value of all *CGT assets that the company owned at the relevant alteration time (including those it *acquired for less than $10,000), using a valuation method that would generally be regarded as appropriate in the circumstances.


    Step 2.

    Work out the total of the *cost bases of those *CGT assets at the relevant time.

    Note:

    If a CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant time was also trading stock or a revenue asset at that time, see subsection (1C) of this section.


    Step 3.

    If the step 2 amount exceeds the step 1 amount, the excess is the company ' s adjusted unrealised loss at the relevant time.


    165-115U(1C)    
    If:


    (a) a *CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant alteration time was also *trading stock or a *revenue asset at that time; and


    (b) the asset ' s *cost base at the relevant alteration time is less than the amount that, if the relevant alteration time were a changeover time, would be compared under section 165-115F with the asset ' s *market value in working out a notional revenue gain or notional revenue loss that the company would have at the changeover time in respect of the asset;

    then, for the purposes of step 2 of the method statement in subsection (1B) of this section, the amount that would be so compared is to be taken into account instead of that cost base.


    165-115U(1D)    
    A choice to use the *global method must be made on or before:


    (a) the day on which the company lodges its *income tax return for the income year in which the relevant alteration time occurred; or


    (b) such later days as the Commissioner allows.


    165-115U(2)    
    However, the company does not have an adjusted unrealised lossat the relevant alteration time if the company would, at that time, satisfy the maximum net asset value test under section 152-15 .


    SECTION 165-115V   Notional losses  

    165-115V(1)    
    This section applies for the purpose of calculating whether a company has at an alteration time a notional capital loss or a notional revenue loss in respect of a *CGT asset that it owned at that time.

    165-115V(2)    
    However, a company does not have a notional capital loss or a notional revenue loss at an alteration time in respect of a CGT asset that it *acquired for less than $10,000.

    165-115V(3)    


    The calculation is to be made on the assumption that the company disposed of the asset at its *market value at the alteration time.

    165-115V(4)    
    If the company would make a *capital loss in respect of the disposal of the asset, the company has at the alteration time in respect of the asset a notional capital loss equal to the amount of the capital loss.

    165-115V(5)    
    If the company would be entitled to a deduction in respect of the disposal of the asset, the company has at the alteration time in respect of the asset a notional revenue loss equal to the amount of the deduction.

    165-115V(6)    


    A company may choose that this section is to apply to the company at the alteration time in respect of an asset to which subsection (7) applied at that time as if the reference in subsection (3) to the *market value of the asset were a reference to its *written down value.

    165-115V(7)    


    This subsection applies to an asset at the alteration time if:


    (a) the asset is a *depreciating asset (not a building or structure) for whose decline in value the company has deducted or can deduct an amount; and


    (b) the expenditure incurred by the company to *acquire the asset was less than $1,000,000 (the expenditure can include the giving of property: see section 103-5 ); and


    (c) it would be reasonable for the company to conclude that the *market value of the asset at the alteration time was not less than 80% of its *written down value at that time.


    165-115V(8)    


    (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)

    SECTION 165-115W   Calculation of trading stock decrease  

    165-115W(1)    


    The question whether there is a trading stock decrease in relation to a company at an alteration time for a *CGT asset of the company that was an item of *trading stock at that time is worked out in this way. Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out whether the item ' s *market value immediately before the alteration time was less than:

  • (a) if there was no earlier alteration time in the income year in which that alteration time occurred - the item ' s value under subsection 70-40(1) at the start of that income year or its cost if subsection 70-40(2) applies; or
  • (b) if there was an earlier alteration time or there were earlier alteration times in that income year - the item ' s market value immediately before that earlier alteration time or the later or latest of those earlier alteration times, as the case may be, or its cost if the company did not own it at that time.

  • Step 2.

    If the item ' s *market value immediately before the alteration time was less than:

  • (a) the item ' s value or cost referred to in paragraph (a) in step 1; or
  • (b) its market value or cost (as applicable) in paragraph (b) in step 1;
  • as the case requires, the difference is the trading stock decrease for the item.

    To the extent (if any) to which the difference reflects an amount counted at an earlier alteration time, do not count that amount again.

    Note:

    Certain alteration times are disregarded (see subsections 165-115K(2) and (4)).


    165-115W(1A)    


    Step 2 in the method statement in subsection (1) does not apply to an amount counted at an earlier alteration time if the company has chosen to use the *global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at that earlier time.

    165-115W(2)    
    However, a company does not have a trading stock decrease at an alteration time in respect of an item of *trading stock that it *acquired for less than $10,000.


    SECTION 165-115X   Relevant equity interest  

    165-115X(1)    
    An entity (not an individual) has a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at a particular time if:


    (a) at that time the entity has a controlling stake in the loss company (see section 165-115Z ); and


    (b) at that time the entity has an interest (an equity ) that gives, or interests (each of which is also called an equity ) that between them give, the entity:


    (i) the control of, or the ability to control, 10% or more of the voting power in the loss company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or

    (ii) the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) 10% or more of any dividends that the loss company may pay; or

    (iii) the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) 10% or more of any distribution of capital of the loss company; and


    (c) the equity or each equity is either:


    (i) an interest (including a *share or shares, or an option or right to acquire a share or shares) in the loss company; or

    (ii) an interest (including an option or right to acquire an interest) held by the entity directly in another entity that has a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in the loss company.
    Note:

    For paragraph (b), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    165-115X(2)    
    The equity or equities constitute the entity ' s relevant equity interest in the *loss company.

    165-115X(2A)    


    A *widely held company that, apart from this subsection, would have a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at a particular time does not have such an interest at that time.

    165-115X(2B)    


    Subsection (2A) does not apply if:


    (a) an entity has a controlling stake in the loss company (see section 165-115Z ); and


    (b) that entity has a direct or indirect interest in, or is owed a debt by, the *widely held company, being an interest or debt in respect of which:


    (i) the entity could, if a *CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, make a *capital loss (other than a capital loss that would be disregarded) that reflects any part of the loss company ' s overall loss; or

    (ii) the entity has deducted or can deduct, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company ' s overall loss.

    165-115X(2C)    


    Subsection (2A) does not apply in respect of a particular time if an entity that had a direct or indirect interest in, or was owed a debt by, the *widely held company at an earlier time, and had a controlling stake in the loss company (see section 165-115Z ) at the earlier time:


    (a) made a capital loss (other than a capital loss that was disregarded) because a *CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, where the capital loss reflected any part of the *loss company ' s overall loss; or


    (b) has deducted or could have deducted at an earlier time, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company ' s overall loss.


    165-115X(3)    
    An entity (the first entity ) that, apart from this subsection, would have a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at a particular time does not have such an interest if, at that time, there is no other entity that has a direct or indirect interest in, or is owed a debt by, the first entity, being an interest or debt in respect of which:


    (a) the other entity could, if a *CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, make a *capital loss (other than a capital loss that would be disregarded) that reflects any part of the loss company ' s overall loss; or


    (b) the other entity has deducted or can deduct, or could deduct at a later time:


    (i) an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition of the interest or debt; or

    (ii) a net loss on the *disposal of the interest or debt;
    where the deduction reflected, or would reflect, any part of the loss company ' s overall loss.

    165-115X(3A)    


    Subsection (3) does not apply if the first entity is a *widely held company.

    165-115X(4)    


    Subsection (3) does not apply to the first entity in respect of a particular time if an entity that had a direct or indirect interest in, or was owed a debt by, the first entity at an earlier time:


    (a) made a capital loss (other than a capital loss that was disregarded) because a *CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, where the capital loss reflected any part of the *loss company ' s overall loss; or


    (b) has deducted or could have deducted at an earlier time, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company ' s overall loss.


    165-115X(5)    
    An individual is not taken to have a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at any time.

    165-115X(6)    
    A partnership that consists only of individuals is not taken to have a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at any time.

    165-115X(7)    
    If section 106-30 , 106-50 or 106-60 would treat an act referred to in that section that is done in relation to an interest as having been done by an individual, the interest is not a relevant equity interest.

    SECTION 165-115Y   Relevant debt interest  

    165-115Y(1)    
    An entity (not an individual) has a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time if, at that time:


    (a) the entity has a controlling stake in the loss company (see section 165-115Z ); and


    (b) the entity is owed by the loss company a debt of not less than $10,000 (a debt ) or debts at least one of which is not less than $10,000 (each debt of not less than $10,000 is also called a debt ).

    165-115Y(2)    
    An entity (not an individual) also has a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time if, at that time:


    (a) the entity has a controlling stake in the loss company; and


    (b) the entity is owed by an entity (the debtor entity ) other than the loss company a debt of not less than $10,000 (also a debt ) or debts at least one of which is not less than $10,000 (each debt of not less than $10,000 is also called a debt ); and


    (c) the debtor entity has a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the loss company.

    165-115Y(3)    
    The total of the debts referred to in subsections (1) and (2) constitutes the entity ' s relevant debt interest in the *loss company.

    165-115Y(3A)    


    A *widely held company that, apart from this subsection, would have a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time does not have such an interest at that time.

    165-115Y(3B)    


    Subsection (3A) does not apply if:


    (a) an entity has a controlling stake in the loss company (see section 165-115Z ); and


    (b) that entity has a direct or indirect interest in, or is owed a debt by, the *widely held company, being an interest or debt in respect of which:


    (i) the entity could, if a *CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, make a *capital loss (other than a capital loss that would be disregarded) that reflects any part of the loss company ' s overall loss; or

    (ii) the entity has deducted or can deduct, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company ' s overall loss.

    165-115Y(3C)    


    Subsection (3A) does not apply in respect of a particular time if an entity that had a direct or indirect interest in, or was owed a debt by, the *widely held company at an earlier time, and had a controlling stake in the *loss company (see section 165-115Z ) at the earlier time;


    (a) made a *capital loss (other than a capital loss that was disregarded) because a *CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, where the capital loss reflected any part of the loss company ' s overall loss; or


    (b) has deducted or could have deducted at an earlier time, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company ' s overall loss.


    165-115Y(4)    
    An entity (the first entity ) that, apart from this subsection, would have a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time does not have such an interest if, at that time, there is no other entity that has a direct or indirect interest in, or is owed a debt by, the first entity, being an interest or debt in respect of which:


    (a) the other entity could, if a *CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, make a *capital loss (other than a capital loss that would be disregarded) that reflects any part of the loss company ' s overall loss; or


    (b) the other entity could deduct, or can deduct or could deduct at a later time:


    (i) an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition of the interest or debt; or

    (ii) a net loss on the *disposal of the interest or debt;
    where the deduction reflects, or would have reflected, any part of the loss company ' s overall loss.

    165-115Y(4A)    


    Subsection (4) does not apply if the first entity is a *widely held company.

    165-115Y(5)    


    Subsection (4) does not apply to the first entity in respect of a particular time if an entity that had a direct or indirect interest in, or was owed a debt by, the first entity at an earlier time:


    (a) made a capital loss (other than a capital loss that would be disregarded) at an earlier time because a *CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, where the capital loss reflected any part of the *loss company ' s overall loss; or


    (b) has deducted or could have deducted at an earlier time, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company ' s overall loss.


    165-115Y(6)    
    An individual is not taken to have a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at any time.

    165-115Y(7)    


    A partnership that consists only of individuals is not taken to have a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at any time.

    165-115Y(8)    
    If section 106-30 , 106-50 or 106-60 would treat an act referred to in that section that is done in relation to a debt as having been done by an individual, the debt is not a relevant debt interest.


    SECTION 165-115Z   What constitutes a controlling stake in a company  

    165-115Z(1)    
    An entity has a controlling stake in a company at a particular time if the entity, or the entity and the entity ' s *associates between them:


    (a) are able at that time to exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 50% of the voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or


    (b) have at that time the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any dividends that the company may pay; or


    (c) have at that time the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company.

    Note 1:

    The effect of subsection (1) is that, if an entity has a controlling stake in a company, each associate of the entity also has a controlling stake in the company.

    Note 2:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    165-115Z(2)    
    If:


    (a) apart from this subsection, an interest that gives an entity and its *associates (if any):


    (i) the ability to exercise, or control the exercise of, any of the voting power in a company; or

    (ii) the right to receive dividends that a company may pay; or

    (iii) the right to receive a distribution of capital of a company;
    would, in the application of paragraph (1)(a), (b) or (c), be counted more than once; and


    (b) the interest is both direct and indirect;

    only the direct interest is to be counted.


    SECTION 165-115ZA   Reductions and other consequences if entity has relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in loss company immediately before alteration time  


    Application of section

    165-115ZA(1)    
    This section applies to an entity (an affected entity ) that has a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest, or both, in a *loss company immediately before a time (a relevant time ) that is an alteration time in respect of the loss company.

    Note:

    This section and section 165-115ZB can apply differently for a company that has used the global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at an alteration time. See section 165-115ZD .



    Application of section nullified in certain circumstances

    165-115ZA(2)    
    However, if:


    (a) this section has applied to an entity in respect of a debt owed to the entity; and


    (b) Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G (which relate to the forgiveness of commercial debts) also applied in respect of the debt at the same time or at a later time;

    any reductions or other consequences affecting the entity in respect of the debt under this section are taken not to have occurred or to have been required to occur.

    Note:

    An amendment of an assessment can be made at any time to give effect to this subsection (see subsection 170(10AA) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ).



    Reduction of reduced cost base

    165-115ZA(3)    
    The *reduced cost base of an equity or debt that was *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is to be reduced immediately before the relevant time by the adjustment amount calculated under section 165-115ZB .

    Reduction of deduction - equity or debt is not trading stock

    165-115ZA(4)    
    If an equity or debt is not an item of *trading stock of the affected entity immediately before the relevant time, any amount that the entity can deduct in respect of the disposal of any of the equity or debt is to be reduced by the adjustment amount calculated under section 165-115ZB .

    Reduction of cost - equity or debt is trading stock

    165-115ZA(5)    
    If:


    (a) an equity or debt is an item of *trading stock of the affected entity immediately before the relevant time; and


    (b) the *cost for the purposes of Division 70 of the equity or debt exceeds its *market value immediately before the relevant time;

    then, subject to any later application or applications of this Subdivision, the cost of the equity or debt for the purposes of Division 70 , and any deduction for an outlay to *acquire it, are reduced by the lesser of the following amounts or, if they are equal, by one of them:


    (c) the adjustment amount calculated under section 165-115ZB ;


    (d) the amount of the excess referred to in paragraph (b).

    Subsection (4) to apply only in respect of certain income years

    165-115ZA(6)    
    For the purpose of working out:


    (a) deductions under section 8-1 ; or


    (b) whether an amount is included in assessable income under subsection 70-35(2) ; or


    (c) whether an amount can be deducted under subsection 70-35(3) ;

    subsection (5) applies only in respect of income years ending after the later of the following:


    (d) the commencement time;


    (e) the time 12 months before the relevant time.

    Further election to value trading stock

    165-115ZA(7)    
    If an election has been made under section 70-45 to value an item of *trading stock on hand at the end of an income year otherwise than at its *cost and subsection (5) applies in respect of it, a further election may be made under that section to value the item of trading stock at cost.

    Previous applications of this section in relation to trading stock to be taken into account

    165-115ZA(8)    
    In applying this section to the affected entity in respect of an equity or debt that is *trading stock of the entity, any previous applications of this section to the entity in respect of the equity or debt are to be taken into account.

    Cost of equity or debt that becomes trading stock after relevant time

    165-115ZA(9)    
    If:


    (a) an equity or debt becomes an item of *trading stock of the affected entity after the relevant time; and


    (b) had the equity or debt been an item of trading stock of the affected entity at an earlier time that was, or at 2 or more earlier times each of which was, the relevant time for the purposes of a previous application or previous applications of this section, its *cost for the purposes of Division 70 would have exceeded its *market value at the earlier time or at one of the earlier times;

    its cost for the purposes of Division 70 is taken to be its market value at the earlier time or the smallest of its market values at the earlier times.



    Reduction of proceeds of disposal of trading stock

    165-115ZA(10)    
    If:


    (a) an equity or debt was an item of *trading stock of the affected entity immediately before a relevant time or became such an item of trading stock after a relevant time; and


    (b) the equity or debt is *disposed of by the entity after the relevant time concerned; and


    (c) the equity or debt is an item of trading stock of the affected entity at the time of the disposal; and


    (d) the proceeds of the disposal exceed the *market value of the equity or debt immediately before the relevant time concerned or the market value of the equity or debt immediately before any previous relevant time;

    the proceeds of the disposal are taken to be reduced by so much of the amount or the total of the amounts of any reductions made by any previous application or applications of subsection (5) in relation to the affected entity in respect of the equity or debt as does not exceed the excess amount or the greater or greatest of the excess amounts referred to in paragraph (d).


    SECTION 165-115ZB   Adjustment amounts for the purposes of section 165-115ZA  

    165-115ZB(1A)    


    This section has effect for the purposes of:


    (a) section 165-115ZA ; and


    (b) sections 715-255 and 715-270 (about effect of alteration time for head company on membership interests of leaving entity just before leaving time).



    Calculation of adjustment amount

    165-115ZB(1)    


    An adjustment amount in relation to an equity or debt is to be worked out by the affected entity, and applied by it in making reductions:


    (a) if subsection (2) applies - in accordance with subsection (3); or


    (b) otherwise - in accordance with subsection (6).



    Selection of method of calculation

    165-115ZB(2)    
    This subsection applies if:


    (a) the affected entity has a relevant equity interest, but does not have a relevant debt interest, in the *loss company immediately before the alteration time and:


    (i) all the *shares in the loss company are of the same class and have the same *market value; and

    (ii) the equity consists only of a share or shares in the loss company; or


    (b) the affected entity has both a relevant equity interest, and a relevant debt interest under subsection 165-115Y(1) , in the loss company immediately before the alteration time and:


    (i) all the shares in the loss company are of the same class and have the same market value; and

    (ii) the equity consists only of a share or shares in the loss company; and

    (iii) the debt consists of a single debt or 2 or more debts of the same kind;

    and the reductions that would result from the application of subsection (3) would be reasonable in the circumstances.



    Formula method

    165-115ZB(3)    
    The adjustment amount to be worked out under this subsection is the amount worked out using the formula:


      The number of shares in the loss
    company constituted by the equity
    immediately before the
            alteration time        
    The total number of shares in the
    loss company immediately before
    the alteration time
    × The amount of the loss
    company ' s overall loss
    at the alteration time
     

    and the amount so worked out is to be applied in making reductions as follows:


    (a) the adjustment amount is to be applied in relation to the *share or shares constituting the equity; and


    (b) if there is an amount remaining after making reductions in relation to those shares - the amount remaining is to be applied in relation to any debt or, if there is a debt consisting of 2 or more separate debts, in relation to those debts.

    Applying adjustment amount under formula method to shares

    165-115ZB(4)    
    If the adjustment amount referred to in subsection (3) is to be applied in relation to an equity consisting of 2 or more *shares:


    (a) it is to be applied equally among the shares; and


    (b) if there is any amount remaining after the application of part of the adjustment amount to a share, the amount remaining is to be applied to any other share, or equally among any other shares, to the maximum extent possible.

    Applying adjustment amount under formula method to debt

    165-115ZB(5)    
    If the adjustment amount referred to in subsection (3) or part of it is to be applied in relation to a debt (the overall debt ) and the overall debt consists of 2 or more debts (the constituent debts ), the amount to be applied in relation to each constituent debt is the amount worked out using the formula:


      The adjustment amount or part
    of the adjustment amount
    ×   The amount of the constituent debt  
    The amount of the overall debt
     



    Non-formula method

    165-115ZB(6)    
    The adjustment amount to be worked out under this subsection is the amount that is appropriate having regard to:


    (a) the object of this Subdivision and other matters set out in section 165-115J ; and


    (b) the extent of the affected entity ' s relevant equity interests or relevant debt interests, as the case may be, in the *loss company immediately before the alteration time; and


    (c) when, and under what circumstances, the relevant equity interests or relevant debt interests were *acquired by the affected entity; and


    (d) the loss company ' s overall loss at the alteration time; and


    (e) the extent to which that overall loss has reduced the *market values of the equity or debt; and


    (f) to prevent double counting, the extent of any adjustments required under this Subdivision because of any application of this Subdivision to another loss company in which the affected entity has a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest;

    and the amount so worked out is to be applied in making reductions in an appropriate way.



    How to work out the extent to which the overall loss has reduced the market value of an equity or debt

    165-115ZB(7)    


    To avoid doubt in applying paragraph (6)(e) in relation to an equity or a debt, if factors other than an overall loss altered the *market value of the equity or debt, the extent to which the overall loss reduced that market value is taken to be the extent to which that market value would have been reduced apart from those other factors.
    Note 1:

    For a company ' s overall loss see subsections 165-115R(5) and 165-115S(5) .

    Note 2:

    An example of a factor other than the overall loss is the unrealised value of assets (including assets in respect of which there is an unrealised gain) of the loss company, whether or not generated by outlays or economic losses reflected in the loss for income tax purposes.


    SECTION 165-115ZC   Notices to be given  


    Application

    165-115ZC(1)    
    This section applies when an alteration time occurs in respect of a *loss company.

    Note:

    Section 165-115ZC of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 affects the operation of this section.



    Controlling entity

    165-115ZC(2)    
    For the purposes of this section, an entity is a controlling entity of a *loss company if:


    (a) the entity is not an individual; and


    (b) the entity, disregarding any of its *associates, has a controlling stake in the loss company; and


    (c) no other entity (except an individual or 2 or more individuals between them) has a controlling stake in the entity.

    Foreign resident controlling entity to be disregarded in certain circumstances

    165-115ZC(3)    


    If:


    (a) apart from this subsection, an entity that is a foreign resident would be a controlling entity of a *loss company; and


    (b) there is an entity that is an Australian resident and would be a controlling entity of the loss company if all the foreign residents that held direct or indirect interests in the Australian resident were individuals;

    then, for the purposes of this section, the entity referred to in paragraph (a) is taken not to be a controlling entity of the company but the Australian resident is taken to be a controlling entity of the company.



    Notice by controlling entity of loss company

    165-115ZC(4)    


    An entity that was a controlling entity of the *loss company immediately before the alteration time must, before the end of 6 months after the latest of the following:


    (a) the alteration time;


    (b) the day on which the New Business Tax System (Miscellaneous) Act (No. 2) 2000 received the Royal Assent;


    (c) the time (if any) specified by the Commissioner;

    give a written notice, setting out the information mentioned in subsection (6), to each of its *associates that, to the loss company ' s knowledge, had a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in the loss company immediately before the alteration time.

    Penalty: 30 penalty units.



    Notice by loss company

    165-115ZC(5)    


    If:


    (a) there was no controlling entity of the *loss company immediately before the alteration time; or


    (b) no entity that was a controlling entity of the loss company immediately before the alteration time told the loss company in writing, within 2 months after the later of the following:


    (i) the alteration time;

    (ii) the day on which the New Business Tax System (Miscellaneous) Act (No. 2) 2000 received the Royal Assent;
    that it had given, or proposed to give, notices to its associates under subsection (4);

    the loss company must, before the end of 6 months after the latest of the following:


    (c) the alteration time;


    (d) the day on which the New Business Tax System (Miscellaneous) Act (No. 2) 2000 received the Royal Assent;


    (e) the time (if any) specified by the Commissioner;

    give a written notice, setting out the information mentioned in subsection (6), to each entity that, to the loss company ' s knowledge, had a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in the company immediately before the alteration time.

    Penalty: 30 penalty units.



    Offences are strict liability

    165-115ZC(5A)    


    An offence under subsection (4) or (5) is an offence of strict liability.
    Note:

    For strict liability , see section 6.1 of the Criminal Code .



    Information to be included in notice

    165-115ZC(6)    
    The information to be contained in a notice given under subsection (4) or (5) must include:


    (a) the time that is the alteration time; and


    (b) the amount of the *loss company ' s overall loss at that time; and


    (c) for each income year for which the loss company had at that time a *tax loss or *net capital loss referred to in subsection 165-115R(3) or 165-115S(3) - the type and amount of the loss; and


    (d) the amount of any adjusted unrealised loss that the loss company had at that time; and


    (e) particulars (for the purpose of assisting the entity to whom the notice is given (the recipient ) to comply with the requirements of this Subdivision) of the amounts, proportions, and times of *acquisition, of all relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests in the loss company held by entities through which the recipient had relevant equity interests or relevant debt interests in the loss company.

    Entity or loss company not required to give information about matters that are not known to it

    165-115ZC(7)    
    An entity or *loss company is not required by this section to set out information in a notice unless:


    (a) the information is known to the entity or company; or


    (b) the entity or company could reasonably be expected to know the information and can readily obtain it.

    Commissioner ' s power to specify a later time for giving notice

    165-115ZC(7A)    


    The Commissioner may, by written notice given to an entity, or *loss company, that is required to give a notice under subsection (4) or (5), specify a time later than the alteration time as the start of the 6 months mentioned in the subsection.

    Commissioner ' s power to waive requirement for notice

    165-115ZC(7B)    


    The Commissioner may give an entity or *loss company a written declaration that subsection (4) or (5) does not apply to require the entity or company to give a notice relating to the alteration time. If the Commissioner does so, the subsection does not apply in relation to the alteration time.

    Considerations relating to Commissioner ' s powers

    165-115ZC(7C)    


    In deciding whether to specify a time for the purposes of subsection (4) or (5) or declare that the subsection does not apply, the Commissioner must consider:


    (a) the consequences of doing so for each entity to which notice must be given under the subsection (apart from any such declaration); and


    (b) any other matters that the Commissioner considers relevant.



    Obligations of person not affected by failure to give notice

    165-115ZC(8)    
    Any failure by an entity or the *loss company to give a notice to a person under this section does not affect any obligation of the person to comply with the requirements of this Subdivision.

    SECTION 165-115ZD   Adjustment (or further adjustment) for interest realised at a loss after global method has been used  

    165-115ZD(1)    


    This section affects how sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB apply to an interest (the equity ) in, or a debt owed by, a company if, apart from this section, a loss (the realised loss ):


    (a) would be *realised for income tax purposes by a *realisation event that happens to the equity or debt; or


    (b) would be so realised but for Subdivision 170-D (which defers realisation of capital losses and deductions);

    and the company chose to use the *global method of working out whether it had an adjusted unrealised loss at the last alteration time:


    (c) that happened for the company before the realisation event; and


    (d) immediately before which the equity or debt was, or was part of:


    (i) if the company was a *loss company at that alteration time - a relevant equity interest, or a relevant debt interest, that an entity had in the company; or

    (ii) otherwise - what would have been such an interest if the company had been a loss company at that alteration time.
    Note:

    If that last alteration time is before the day on which the New Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting, Demergers and Other Measures) Act 2002 received the Royal Assent, the owner of the equity or debt may choose to apply section 165-115ZD of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 instead of this section.


    165-115ZD(2)    
    In addition to any application to the equity or debt, in relation to that last alteration time, that sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB have apart from this section, those sections apply (and are taken always to have applied) to the equity or debt, in relation to that last alteration time, as if:


    (a) the company had an adjusted unrealised loss at that time worked out under this section; and


    (b) the company were therefore a *loss company at that time; and


    (c) that adjusted unrealised loss were the company ' s overall loss at that time.

    165-115ZD(3)    
    For the purposes of how sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB apply because of this section, the adjustment amount under section 165-115ZB is to be worked out and applied in accordance with subsection 165-115ZB(6) (the non-formula method).

    Adjusted unrealised loss worked out under this section

    165-115ZD(4)    


    The adjusted unrealised loss referred to in paragraph (2)(a) is worked out using this method statement: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Add up the amount or value of each thing covered by subsection (5). (If the total exceeds the realised loss, reduce the total by the excess.)


    Step 2.

    Reduce the step 1 amount by so much of the realised loss as it is reasonable to conclude is attributable to none of these:

  • (a) a notional capital loss, or a notional revenue loss, that the company has at that last alteration time in respect of a *CGT asset;
  • (b) a trading stock decrease in relation to that time for a CGT asset that was *trading stock of the company at that time.
  • Note:

    If the equity or debt is a revenue asset, the realised loss is different from the loss referred to in subsection (1): see subsection (9).


    165-115ZD(5)    
    This subsection covers each thing covered by an item in the table, except to the extent that:


    (a) it is reasonable to conclude that the thing was not attributable to value that is reflected in what would, if that last alteration time had been a *changeover time for the company, be a notional capital gain or notional revenue gain that the company had under section 165-115F at that changeover time in respect of a *CGT asset; or


    (b) the thing has resulted in a reduction of the *reduced cost base of the equity or debt.


    Things that might expose an unrealised loss netted off by use of global method
    Item Thing covered
    1 A *dividend that the company pays during the period referred to in subsection (6)
    2 A thing that is taken under this Act to be a dividend and that the company pays during the period referred to in subsection (6)
    3 A distribution of income or capital to a *member that the company makes during the period referred to in subsection (6) and is not covered by item 1 or 2
    4 An amount of income tax to which the company becomes liable at any time, to the extent that it is reasonably attributable to a realisation event that happens, during the period referred to in subsection (6), to a *CGT asset (in its character as a CGT asset, *trading stock or a *revenue asset) that the company owned at that last alteration time and *acquired for not less than $10,000
    5 A loss or outgoing to which the company becomes liable at any time, to the extent that it is reasonably attributable to a realisation event of the kind referred to in item 4
    6 The difference between:
      (a) the *capital proceeds (as worked out under subsection (7)) of a *CGT event:
        (i) that happens, during the period referred to in subsection (6), to a *CGT asset that the company owned at that last alteration time and *acquired for not less than $10,000; and
        (ii) as a result of which the asset is *acquired by an entity that is an *associate of the company at the time of the CGT event; and
      (b) the *market value of the asset at the time of the CGT event;
      but only if those capital proceeds are less than that market value


    165-115ZD(6)    
    The period starts at that last alteration time and ends at the earlier of:


    (a) the time of the *realisation event referred to in paragraph (1)(a); or


    (b) the time immediately before the earliest time when the equity or debt is no longer, or is no longer part of:


    (i) if the company was a *loss company at that last alteration time - a relevant equity interest, or a relevant debt interest, that an entity has in the company; or

    (ii) otherwise - what would have been such an interest if the company had been a loss company at that last alteration time.

    165-115ZD(7)    
    For the purposes of item 6 of the table in subsection (5), the *capital proceeds of the *CGT event are to be worked out:


    (a) under subsection 116-20(1) only; and


    (b) disregarding subsection 103-10(1) and paragraph 103-10(2)(a) (about entitlement to receive money or property).

    Notices under section 165-115ZC not affected

    165-115ZD(8)    
    To avoid doubt:


    (a) a notice need not be given under section 165-115ZC because of this section; and


    (b) this section does not affect the requirements that apply to a notice that otherwise must be given under that section.

    If equity or debt is a revenue asset

    165-115ZD(9)    


    If the equity or debt is a *revenue asset at the time of the *realisation event, subsection (4) applies on the basis that the realised loss is the total of:


    (a) the loss (if any) *realised for income tax purposes by the realisation event happening to the equity or debt in its character as a *CGT asset; and


    (b) the loss (if any) realised for income tax purposes by the realisation event happening to the equity or debt in its character as a revenue asset.


    Subdivision 165-C - Deducting bad debts  

    SECTION 165-117   What this Subdivision is about  


    A company cannot deduct a bad debt unless:

  • (a) if the debt was incurred in an earlier income year - the company had the same owners and the same control throughout the period from the day on which the debt was incurred to the end of the income year in which it writes off the debt as bad; or
  • (b) if the debt was incurred in the current year - the company had the same owners and the same control during the income year both before and after the debt was incurred;
  • or, if there has been a change of ownership or control, the company satisfies the business continuity test by carrying on the same business (including entering into no new kinds of transactions and conducting no new kinds of business), or by carrying on a similar business (on or after 1 July 2015).

    Note:

    The exceptions mentioned in this section apply differently in relation to designated infrastructure project entities: see section 415-40 .

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 165-119  

    165-119   Application of Subdivision  


    This Subdivision applies to a debt only to the extent (if any) to which Subdivision 165-CC does not apply in respect of the debt.
    Note:

    Subdivision 165-CC applies to certain capital losses or tax losses of a company to the extent to which the capital loss or tax loss does not exceed the company ' s unrealised net loss.

    SECTION 165-120   To deduct a bad debt  

    165-120(1)    
    A company cannot deduct a debt (or part of a debt) that it writes off as bad in the *current year unless:


    (a) it meets the conditions in section 165-123 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners); or

    Note:

    See section 165-230 for a special alternative to the condition in this paragraph.


    (b) the Commissioner thinks it would be unreasonable to require the company to meet the conditions in that section, having regard to the entities that beneficially owned the shares in the company when (in the Commissioner ' s opinion) the debt (or part) became bad; or


    (c) the company meets the condition in section 165-126 (which is about the company satisfying the business continuity test).

    Note 1:

    In the case of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company, Subdivision 166-C modifies how this Subdivision applies, unless the company chooses otherwise.

    Note 2:

    Normally bad debts are deductible under section 8-1 or 25-35 .

    Note 3:

    Subdivisions 709-D and 719-I modify how this Subdivision operates in relation to a company that used to be a member of a consolidated group or MEC group and that writes off as bad a debt that used to be owed to a member of the group.


    165-120(2)    
    The conditions in section 165-123 or 165-126 apply to different periods, depending on whether the debt was incurred in the *current year or an earlier income year:


    Meaning of first continuity period and second continuity period
    In this case: the first continuity period : and the second continuity period :
    the debt was incurred in an earlier income year starts on the day when the debt was incurred; and is the *current year
      ends at the end of that income year    
    .
    the debt was incurred in the *current year (but not on the last day of it) starts on the first day of the *current year; and starts on the day after the debt was incurred; and
      ends on the day when the debt was incurred ends on the last day of the *current year


    165-120(3)    
    A company cannot deduct a debt (or part of a debt) that it writes off as bad on the last day of the *current year if the debt was also incurred on that day.


    SECTION 165-123   Company must maintain the same owners  


    Ownership test period

    165-123(1)    
    In determining whether section 165-120 prevents a company from deducting a debt or a part of a debt, the ownership test period is the period from the start of the *first continuity period to the end of the *second continuity period.

    Note:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.



    Voting power

    165-123(2)    
    There must be persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company at all times during the *ownership test period.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-150 to work out who had more than 50% of the voting power.

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.



    Rights to dividends

    165-123(3)    
    There must be persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s dividends at all times during the *ownership test period.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-155 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company ' s dividends.

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to dividends in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to dividends.



    Rights to capital distributions

    165-123(4)    
    There must be persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions at all times during the *ownership test period.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-160 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions.

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to capital distributions.



    When to apply the primary test

    165-123(5)    
    To work out whether a condition in this section was satisfied at all times during the *ownership test period, apply the primary test for that condition unless subsection (6) requires the alternative test to be applied.

    Note:

    For the primary test, see subsections 165-150(1) , 165-155(1) and 165-160(1) .



    When to apply the alternative test

    165-123(6)    


    Apply the alternative test for that condition if one or more other companies beneficially owned *shares or interests in shares in the company at any time during the *ownership test period.
    Note:

    For the alternative test, see subsections 165-150(2) , 165-155(2) and 165-160(2) .



    Conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (4) may be treated as having been satisfied in certain circumstances

    165-123(7)    


    If any of the conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (4) have not been satisfied, those conditions are taken to have been satisfied if:


    (a) they would have been satisfied except for the operation of section 165-165 ; and


    (b) the company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that less than 50% of the debt or of the part of a debt has been reflected in deductions, capital losses, or reduced assessable income, that occurred, or could occur in future, because of the happening of any *CGT event in relation to any *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests in the company during the *ownership test period.


    165-123(7A)    


    If the company is:


    (a) a *non-profit company; or


    (b) a *mutual affiliate company; or


    (c) a *mutual insurance company;

    during the whole of the *ownership test period, the conditions in subsections (3) and (4) are taken to have been satisfied by the company.



    Time of happening of CGT event

    165-123(8)    


    The happening of any *CGT event in relation to a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest in the company that results in the failure of the company to satisfy a condition in subsection (2), (3) or (4) is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (7)(b), to have occurred during the *ownership test period.

    165-123(9)    
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )


    165-123(10)    
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )


    SECTION 165-126   Alternatively, the company must satisfy the business continuity test  

    165-126(1)    


    This section sets out the condition that a company must meet to be able to deduct a debt or part of a debt that it writes off as bad in the *current year if:


    (a) either:


    (i) the company fails to meet a condition in subsection 165-123(2) , (3) or (4) ; or

    (ii) it is not practicable to show that the company meets the conditions in those subsections; and


    (b) paragraph 165-120(1)(b) (about the Commissioner thinking it is unreasonable to require the company to meet the conditions in section 165-123 ) does not apply.

    Note:

    Other provisions may treat the company as meeting, or failing to meet, the conditions in subsections 165-123(2) , (3) and (4) .


    165-126(2)    


    The company must satisfy the *business continuity test for the *second continuity period (the business continuity test period ). Apply the test to the *business the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time ) shown in the relevant item of the table.


    Test time
    Item If: The test time is:
    1 It is practicable to show there is a period that meets these conditions:

    (a) the period starts at the start of the *first continuity period;

    (b) the company would meet the conditions in subsections 165-123(2), (3) and (4) if the period were the *ownership test period for the purposes of this Act
    The latest time that it is practicable to show is in the period
    2 Item 1 does not apply and either:

    (a) the debt was incurred before the *current year; or

    (b) the company came into being during the current year
    The end of the day on which the debt was incurred
    3 All these conditions are met:

    (a) item 1 does not apply;

    (b) the debt was incurred in the *current year;

    (c) the company was in being throughout the current year
    The start of the current year

    For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E .


    SECTION 165-129   Same people must control the voting power, or the company must satisfy the business continuity test  

    165-129(1)    
    Even if section 165-120 does not prevent a company from deducting a bad debt (or part of one), it cannot deduct the bad debt (or that part of it) if:


    (a) for some or all of the part of the *ownership test period that started at the end of the *first continuity period, a person controlled, or was able to control, the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); and


    (b) for some or all of the *first continuity period, that person did not control, and was not able to control, that voting power (directly, or indirectly in that way); and


    (c) that person began to control, or became able to control, that voting power (directly, or indirectly in that way) for the purpose of:


    (i) getting some benefit or advantage in relation to how this Act applies; or

    (ii) getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else;
    or for purposes including that purpose.
    Note 1:

    A person can still control the voting power in a company that is in liquidation etc.: see section 165-250 .

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.


    165-129(2)    


    However, that person ' s control of the voting power, or ability to control it, does not prevent the company from deducting the bad debt (or that part of it) if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the *second continuity period (the business continuity test period ).

    165-129(3)    


    Apply the *business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time ) when the person began to control that voting power, or became able to control it.

    For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E .


    SECTION 165-132   When tax losses resulting from bad debts cannot be deducted  

    165-132(1)    


    If:


    (a) a company can deduct a debt (or part of a debt) that it wrote off as bad in an income year; and


    (b) because the company failed to meet a condition in section 165-123 (about the company maintaining the same owners), it could not have deducted the debt (or part) apart from section 165-126 (about the company satisfying the business continuity test); and


    (c) the company wrote off the debt after the *test time worked out under section 165-126 ; and


    (d) because of the deduction, the company has a *tax loss for that income year, or there was an increase in the amount of its *tax loss for that income year; and


    (e) the company carried on a *business during that income year for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of securing a deduction for the debt (or part) by relying on section 165-126 ;

    the company cannot deduct the *tax loss for a later income year, or cannot deduct it to the extent of the increase, unless it also satisfies the *business continuity test for the later income year (the business continuity test period ).


    165-132(2)    


    Apply the test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the *test time worked out for section 165-126 .

    For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E .


    Subdivision 165-D - Tests for finding out whether the company has maintained the same owners  

    The primary and alternative tests

    SECTION 165-150   Who has more than 50% of the voting power in the company  


    The primary test

    165-150(1)    
    Applying the primary test: if there are persons who, at a particular time, beneficially own (between them) *shares that carry (between them) the right to exercise more than 50% of the voting power in the company, those persons have more than 50% of the voting power in the company at that time.

    The alternative test

    165-150(2)    
    Applying the alternative test: if it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume, that there are persons (none of them companies or *trustees) who (between them) at a particular time control, or are able to control (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) the voting power in the company, those persons have more than 50% of the voting power in the company at that time.

    SECTION 165-155   Who has rights to more than 50% of the company ' s dividends  


    The primary test

    165-155(1)    
    Applying the primary test: if there are persons who, at a particular time, beneficially own (between them) *shares that carry (between them) the right to receive more than 50% of any *dividends that the company may pay, those persons have rights to more than 50% of the company ' s dividends at that time.

    The alternative test

    165-155(2)    
    Applying the alternative test: if it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume, that there are persons (none of them companies) who (between them) at a particular time have the right to receive for their own benefit (whether directly or *indirectly) more than 50% of any *dividends that the company may pay, those persons have rights to more than 50% of the company ' s dividends at that time.

    SECTION 165-160   Who has rights to more than 50% of the company's capital distributions  


    The primary test

    165-160(1)    
    Applying the primary test: if there are persons who, at a particular time, beneficially own (between them) *shares that carry (between them) the right to receive more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company, those persons have rights to more than 50% of the company's capital distributions at that time.

    The alternative test

    165-160(2)    
    Applying the alternative test: if it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume, that there are persons (none of them companies) who (between them) at a particular time have the right to receive for their own benefit (whether directly or *indirectly) more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company, those persons have rights to more than 50% of the company's capital distributions at that time.

    SECTION 165-165   Rules about tests for a condition or occurrence of a circumstance  


    Exactly the same shares or interests must continue to be held

    165-165(1)    
    For the purpose of determining whether a company has satisfied a condition or whether a time is a changeover time or an alteration time in respect of a company:


    (a) a condition that has to be satisfied is not satisfied; or


    (b) a time that, apart from this subsection, would not be a changeover time or alteration time is taken to be a changeover time or alteration time, as the case may be;

    unless, at all relevant times:


    (c) the only *shares in the company that are taken into account are exactly the same shares and are held by the same persons; and


    (d) the only interests in any other entity (including shares in another company) that are taken into account are exactly the same interests and are beneficially owned by the same persons.

    What happens in case of share splitting

    165-165(2)    
    If:


    (a) a particular *share (an old share ) in a company of which a person is the beneficial owner at the start of a *test period is divided into 2 or more new shares; and


    (b) the person becomes the beneficial owner of each of the new shares immediately after the division takes place and remains the beneficial owner until the end of that period;

    the new shares are taken to be exactly the same shares as the old share.



    What happens in case of splitting of units in a unit trust

    165-165(3)    
    If:


    (a) a particular unit (the old unit ) in a unit trust of which a person is the holder at the start of a *test period is divided into 2 or more new units; and


    (b) the person becomes the holder of each of the new units immediately after the division takes place and remains the holder until the end of that period;

    the new units are taken to be exactly the same units as the old unit.



    What happens in case of consolidation of shares

    165-165(4)    
    If:


    (a) a particular *share (an old share ) in a company of which a person is the beneficial owner at the start of a *test period, and other shares (each of which also called an old share ) in the company of which the person is the beneficial owner at the start of that period, are consolidated into a new share; and


    (b) the person becomes the beneficial owner of the new share immediately after the consolidation takes place;

    the new share is taken to be exactly the same share as the old shares.



    What happens in case of consolidation of units in a unit trust

    165-165(5)    
    If:


    (a) a particular unit (an old unit ) in a unit trust of which a person is the holder at the start of a *test period and other units (each of which also called an old unit ) in the trust of which the person is the holder at the start of that period are consolidated into a new unit; and


    (b) the person becomes the holder of the new unit immediately after the consolidation takes place;

    the new unit is taken to be exactly the same unit as the old units.



    Test period

    165-165(6)    
    A test period is:


    (a) for the purpose of determining whether a condition in section 165-12 has been satisfied - the *ownership test period; or


    (b) for the purpose of determining whether a test time is a changeover time for the purposes of section 165-115C - the period between the reference time referred to in subsection 165-115A(2A) and the test time; or


    (c) for the purpose of determining whether a test time is an alteration time for the purposes of section 165-115L - the period between the reference time referred to in subsection 165-115L(2) and the test time.

    Satisfaction by primary test by public company

    165-165(7)    
    A *public company is taken to satisfy the primary test if it is reasonable to assume that the test is satisfied.

    SECTION 165-175  

    165-175   Tests can be satisfied by a single person  
    To avoid doubt, a test for a condition can be satisfied by one person.

    Rules affecting the operation of the tests

    SECTION 165-180   Arrangements affecting beneficial ownership of shares  

    165-180(1)    


    For the purposes of a test, the Commissioner may treat a person as not having beneficially owned particular *shares at a particular time if the conditions in subsections (2) and (3) are met.
    Example:

    The Commissioner may treat a person as not having beneficially owned redeemable shares at a particular time if the conditions in subsections (2) and (3) are met in respect of those shares.


    165-180(2)    


    An *arrangement must have been entered into at some time that in any way (directly or indirectly) related to, affected, or depended for its operation on:


    (a) the beneficial interest in the *shares, or the value of that beneficial interest; or


    (b) a right carried by, or relating to, the shares; or


    (c) the exercise of such a right.


    165-180(3)    


    The *arrangement must also have been entered into for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of eliminating or reducing a liability of an entity to pay income tax for a *financial year.

    SECTION 165-185   Shares treated as not having carried rights  

    165-185(1)    
    In applying a test for the purposes of this Division other than Subdivision 165-CC , *shares are taken not to have carried particular rights during a part of the *ownership test period if the Commissioner is satisfied that:


    (a) the shares stopped carrying those rights after the ownership test period; or


    (b) the shares will or may stop carrying those rights after the ownership test period;

    because of:


    (c) the company's *constitution as in force at some time during the ownership test period; or


    (d) an *arrangement entered into before or during the ownership test period.

    165-185(2)    
    In applying a test for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC , *shares are taken not to have carried particular rights after a particular time if the Commissioner is satisfied that:


    (a) the shares stopped carrying those rights after that time; or


    (b) the shares will or may stop carrying those rights after that time;

    because of:


    (c) the company's *constitution as in force at any time; or


    (d) an *arrangement entered into at any time.


    SECTION 165-190   Shares treated as always having carried rights  

    165-190(1)    
    In applying a test for the purposes of this Division other than Subdivision 165-CC , *shares are taken to have carried particular rights at all times during a part of the *ownership test period if the Commissioner is satisfied that:


    (a) the shares started to carry those rights after the ownership test period; or


    (b) the shares will or may start to carry those rights after the ownership test period;

    because of:


    (c) the company's *constitution as in force at some time during the ownership test period; or


    (d) an *arrangement entered into before or during the ownership test period.

    165-190(2)    
    In applying a test for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC , *shares are taken to have carried particular rights after a particular time if the Commissioner is satisfied that:


    (a) the shares started to carry those rights after that time; or


    (b) the shares will or may startto carry those rights after that time;

    because of:


    (c) the company's *constitution as in force at any time; or


    (d) an *arrangement entered into at any time.


    165-195   (Repealed) SECTION 165-195 Disregard redeemable shares  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

    SECTION 165-200   Rules do not affect totals of shares, units in unit trusts or rights carried by shares and units  

    165-200(1)    


    Sections 165-165 , 165-180 , 165-185 and 165-190 do not affect how *shares, and rights carried by *shares, are counted for the purposes of determining:


    (a) the total voting power in the company; or


    (b) the total *dividends that the company may pay; or


    (c) the total distributions of capital of the company.


    165-200(2)    


    Section 165-165 does not affect how units in a unit trust, or the rights carried by such units, are counted for the purposes of determining the total rights, or the total rights of a particular kind, in the trust of the holders of such units.

    SECTION 165-202   Shares held by government entities and charities etc.  

    165-202(1)    
    For the purposes of a test, *shares that are beneficially owned by each of the following entities are taken to be beneficially owned instead by a person (who is not a company):


    (a) the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory;


    (b) a municipal corporation;


    (c) a *local governing body;


    (d) the government of a foreign country, or of part of a foreign country;


    (e) a company, established under a law, in which no person has a *membership interest;


    (f) a *non-profit company;


    (g) a charity that is not a trust;


    (h) a *complying superannuation fund;


    (i) a superannuation fund that is established in a foreign country and is regulated under a *foreign law;


    (j) a *complying approved deposit fund;


    (k) a *special company;


    (l) a *managed investment scheme.


    165-202(2)    


    For the purposes of a test, *shares that are beneficially owned through a charity that is a trust are taken to be beneficially owned instead by a person (who is neither a company nor a trustee).

    SECTION 165-203  

    165-203   Companies where no shares have been issued  


    For the purposes of a test, if no *shares have been issued in a company, each *membership interest in the company is taken to be a share in the company.

    SECTION 165-205   Death of share owner  

    165-205(1)    
    If an individual beneficially owns *shares in a company when he or she dies, this section applies if and while the shares:


    (a) are owned by the trustee of the deceased ' s estate; or


    (b) are beneficially owned by someone who receives them as a beneficiary of the deceased ' s estate.

    165-205(2)    
    For the purposes of a test:


    (a) the *shares are taken to continue to be beneficially owned by the deceased; and


    (b) as a result of being taken to continue to beneficially own the shares, the deceased is taken to continue:


    (i) to have any rights to exercise, or to be able to control (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities), any of the voting power in the company; and

    (ii) to have any rights to receive for the deceased ' s own benefit (whether directly or *indirectly) any *dividends that the company may pay; and

    (iii) to have any rights to receive for the deceased ' s own benefit (whether directly or indirectly) any distributions of capital of the company.

    SECTION 165-207   Trustees of family trusts  

    165-207(1)    
    This section applies if one or more trustees of a *family trust:


    (a) owns *shares in a company; or


    (b) controls, or is able to control, (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) voting power in a company; or


    (c) has a right to receive (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities) a percentage of a *dividend or a distribution of capital of a company.

    165-207(2)    
    For the purposes of a primary test, a single notional entity that is a person (but is neither a company nor a trustee) is taken to own the *shares beneficially.

    Note:

    For a primary test, see subsections 165-150(1) , 165-155(1) and 165-160(1) .


    165-207(3)    
    For the purposes of an alternative test, a single notional entity that is a person (but is neither a company nor a trustee) is taken:


    (a) to control, or have the ability to control, the voting power in the company; or


    (b) to have the right to receive (whether directly or *indirectly) the percentage of the *dividend or distribution for the entity's own benefit.

    Note:

    For an alternative test, see subsections 165-150(2) , 165-155(2) and 165-160(2) .


    165-207(4)    
    If a trustee of the trust is subsequently replaced by another trustee of the trust, the same single notional entity is taken:


    (a) to own the *shares beneficially; or


    (b) to control, or have the ability to control, the voting power in the company; or


    (c) to have the right to receive (whether directly or *indirectly) the percentage of the *dividend or distribution for the entity's own benefit.


    SECTION 165-208   Companies in liquidation etc.  

    165-208(1)    
    For the purposes of a primary test or an alternative test, an entity is not prevented from:


    (a) beneficially owning *shares in a company; or


    (b) having the right to exercise, controlling, or being able to control, voting power in a company; or


    (c) having the right to receive any *dividends that a company may pay; or


    (d) having the right to receive any distribution of capital of a company;

    merely because:


    (e) the company is or becomes:


    (i) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) an entity with a similar status under a *foreign law to a Chapter 5 body corporate; or


    (f) either:


    (i) a provisional liquidator is appointed to the company under section 472 of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) a person with a similar status under a foreign law to a provisional liquidator is appointed to the company.
    Note 1:

    For a primary test, see subsections 165-150(1) , 165-155(1) and 165-160(1) .

    Note 2:

    For an alternative test, see subsections 165-150(2) , 165-155(2) and 165-160(2) .


    165-208(2)    
    For the purposes of a primary test or an alternative test, a company (the stakeholding company ) is not prevented from:


    (a) beneficially owning *shares in another company, or any other interest in another entity; or


    (b) having the right to exercise, controlling, or being able to control, voting power in another company or any other entity; or


    (c) having the right to receive any *dividends that another company or any other entity may pay; or


    (d) having the right to receive any distribution of capital of another company or of any other entity;

    merely because:


    (e) the stakeholding company is or becomes:


    (i) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) an entity with a similar status under a *foreign law to a Chapter 5 body corporate; or


    (f) either:


    (i) a provisional liquidator is appointed to the stakeholding company under section 472 of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) a person with a similar status under a foreign law to a provisional liquidator is appointed to the stakeholding company.

    SECTION 165-209  

    165-209   Dual listed companies  


    Section 165-150 does not apply to *shares that are *dual listed company voting shares.

    Subdivision 165-E - Business continuity test  

    SECTION 165-210   The business continuity test - carrying on the same business  

    165-210(1)    


    A company satisfies the business continuity test if throughout the *business continuity test period it carries on the same *business as it carried on immediately before the *test time.

    165-210(2)    


    However, the company does not satisfy the *business continuity test under this section if, at any time during the *business continuity test period, it *derives assessable income from:


    (a) a *business of a kind that it did not carry on before the *test time; or


    (b) a transaction of a kind that it had not entered into in the course of its business operations before the *test time.


    165-210(3)    


    The company also does not satisfy the *business continuity test under this section if, before the *test time, it:


    (a) started to carry on a *business it had not previously carried on; or


    (b) in the course of its business operations, entered into a transaction of a kind that it had not previously entered into;

    and did so for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of being taken to have carried on throughout the *business continuity test period the same business as it carried on immediately before the test time.


    165-210(4)    


    So far as the *business continuity test under this section is applied for the purpose of Subdivision 165-B (which is about working out the taxable income and *tax loss for the income year of change of ownership or control), the company also does not satisfy the test if, at any time during the *business continuity test period, it incurs expenditure:


    (a) in carrying on a *business of a kind that it did not carry on before the *test time; or


    (b) as a result of a transaction of a kind that it had not entered into in the course of its business operations before the test time.


    SECTION 165-211   The business continuity test - carrying on a similar business  

    165-211(1)    
    A company also satisfies the business continuity test in relation to:


    (a) a *tax loss for an income year starting on or after 1 July 2015; or


    (b) taxable income for an income year starting on or after 1 July 2015; or


    (c) a *net capital loss for an income year starting on or after 1 July 2015; or


    (d) a debt, incurred in an income year starting on or after 1 July 2015, that the company writes off as bad;

    if throughout the *business continuity test period it carries on a business (its current business ) that is similar to the *business it carried on immediately before the *test time (its former business ).


    165-211(2)    
    Without limiting the matters that may be taken into account in ascertaining whether the company ' s current business is similar to its former business, the following must be taken into account:


    (a) the extent to which the assets (including goodwill) that are used in its current business to generate assessable income throughout the *business continuity test period were also used in its former business to generate assessable income;


    (b) the extent to which the activities and operations from which its current business generated assessable income throughout the business continuity test period were also the activities and operations from which its former business generated assessable income;


    (c) the identity of its current business and the identity of its former business;


    (d) the extent to which any changes to its former business result from development or commercialisation of assets, products, processes, services or marketing or organisational methods of the former business.

    165-211(3)    
    However, the company does not satisfy the *business continuity test under this section if, before the *test time, it:


    (a) started to carry on a *business it had not previously carried on; or


    (b) in the course of its business operations, entered into a transaction of a kind that it had not previously entered into;

    and did so for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of being taken to have carried on throughout the *business continuity test period a business that is similar to the business it carried on immediately before the test time.


    165-212A   (Repealed) SECTION 165-212A Some companies cannot satisfy the same business test  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007 )

    165-212B   (Repealed) SECTION 165-212B Definition of total income  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007 )

    165-212C   (Repealed) SECTION 165-212C Total income of companies who cannot work out their total income for a 12 month period  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007 )

    SECTION 165-212D   Restructure of MDOs etc.  

    165-212D(1)    


    An *MDO does not fail to satisfy the *business continuity test merely because, before 1 July 2003:


    (a) the MDO restructured the way it *provides medical indemnity cover; or


    (b) the MDO ceased to provide medical indemnity cover;

    in order to comply with the Medical Indemnity (Prudential Supervision and Product Standards) Act 2003 .


    165-212D(2)    


    A *general insurance company which is an *associate of an *MDO does not fail to satisfy the *business continuity test merely because, before 1 July 2003:


    (a) the MDO restructured the way it *provides medical indemnity cover; or


    (b) the MDO ceased to provide medical indemnity cover;

    in order to comply with the Medical Indemnity (Prudential Supervision and Product Standards) Act 2003 .


    SECTION 165-212E  

    165-212E   Entry history rule does not apply for the purposes of sections 165-210 and 165-211  


    For the purposes of sections 165-210 and 165-211 , section 701-5 (the entry history rule) does not operate in relation to an entity becoming a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group.

    Subdivision 165-F - Special provisions relating to ownership by non-fixed trusts  

    SECTION 165-215   Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-A  

    165-215(1)    
    If a company does not meet the conditions in section 165-12 , it is nevertheless taken to meet the conditions if it meets the conditions in this section.

    First condition

    165-215(2)    


    At all times during the *ownership test period:


    (a) both:


    (i) persons must have held *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

    (ii) *non-fixed trusts, other than *family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the company; or


    (b) both:


    (i) a *fixed trust or a company (which trust or company is the holding entity ) must have held, directly or indirectly, fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

    (ii) non-fixed trusts, other than *family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the holding entity.


    Second condition

    165-215(3)    


    The persons holding *fixed entitlements to shares of the income, and the persons holding fixed entitlements to shares of the capital, of:


    (a) in a paragraph (2)(a) case - the company; or


    (b) in a paragraph (2)(b) case - the holding entity;

    at the beginning of the *loss year must have held those entitlements to those shares at all times during the *ownership test period.



    Third condition

    165-215(4)    
    At the beginning of the *loss year:


    (a) individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, *fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the income of the company; or


    (b) individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the capital of the company.



    Fourth condition

    165-215(5)    


    It must be the case that, for each *non-fixed trust (other than an *excepted trust) that, at any time during the *ownership test period, held directly or indirectly a *fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the company, section 267-20 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 would not have prevented the non-fixed trust from deducting the *tax loss concerned if it, rather than the company, had incurred the tax loss.
    Note:

    See section 165-245 for when an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company.


    SECTION 165-220   Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-B  

    165-220(1)    
    If the company does not meet the condition in paragraph 165-35(a) , it is nevertheless taken to meet the condition if it meets the conditions in this section.

    First condition

    165-220(2)    
    At all times during the income year:


    (a) both:


    (i) persons must have held *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

    (ii) *non-fixed trusts, other than *family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the company; or


    (b) both:


    (i) a *fixed trust or a company (which trust or company is the holding entity ) must have held, directly or indirectly, fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

    (ii) non-fixed trusts, other than family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the holding entity.


    Second condition

    165-220(3)    


    The persons holding *fixed entitlements to shares of the income, and the persons holding fixed entitlements to shares of the capital, of:


    (a) in a paragraph (2)(a) case - the company; or


    (b) in a paragraph (2)(b) case - the holding entity;

    at the beginning of the income year must have held those entitlements to those shares at all times during the income year.



    Third condition

    165-220(4)    
    At the beginning of the income year:


    (a) individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, *fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the income of the company; or


    (b) individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the capital of the company.



    Fourth condition

    165-220(5)    


    It must be the case that, for each *non-fixed trust (other than an *excepted trust) that, at any time in the income year, held directly or indirectly a *fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the company, section 267-60 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not require the non-fixed trust to work out its net income and *tax loss for the income year under Division 268 .
    Note:

    See section 165-245 for when an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company.


    SECTION 165-225   Special way of dividing the income year under Subdivision 165-B  

    165-225(1)    
    If:


    (a) the company is required to calculate:


    (i) its taxable income and *tax lossfor the income year under Subdivision 165-B ; and

    (ii) its *net capital gain and *net capital loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-CB ; and


    (b) the company meets the requirements of subsections 165-220(2) and (4) ;

    then, in dividing the income year into periods, apply subsection (2) of this section instead of subsections 165-45(3) and (4) .


    165-225(2)    
    The last period ends at the end of the income year. Each period (except the last) ends at the earliest of:


    (a) the latest time that would result in the persons holding *fixed entitlements to shares of the income or shares of the capital of:


    (i) if the company meets the requirements of paragraph 165-220(2)(a) - the company; or

    (ii) if the company meets the requirements of paragraph 165-220(2)(b) - the holding entity mentioned in that paragraph;
    and the percentages of the shares that they hold, remaining the same during the whole of the period; and


    (b) the times that, for all of the *non-fixed trusts, other than *excepted trusts, holding directly or indirectly a fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the company at any time during the income year, are the latest times that would result in individuals having *more than a 50% stake in their income or capital; and


    (c) the earliest time in the period when a group (within the meaning of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) begins to *control a non-fixed trust, other than an excepted trust, that holds directly or indirectly a fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the company at any time during the income year.

    Note:

    See section 165-245 for when an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company.


    SECTION 165-230   Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-C  

    165-230(1)    
    If a company does not meet the conditions in section 165-123 , it is nevertheless taken to meet the conditions if it meets the conditions in this section.

    First condition

    165-230(2)    


    At all times during the *ownership test period:


    (a) both:


    (i) persons must have held *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

    (ii) *non-fixed trusts, other than *family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the company; or


    (b) both:


    (i) a *fixed trust or a company (which trust or company is the holding entity ) must have held, directly or indirectly, fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

    (ii) non-fixed trusts, other than family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the holding entity.


    Second condition

    165-230(3)    


    The persons holding *fixed entitlements to shares of the income, and the persons holding fixed entitlements to shares of the capital, of:


    (a) in a paragraph (2)(a) case - the company; or


    (b) in a paragraph (2)(b) case - the holding entity;

    at the beginning of the *first continuity period must have held those entitlements to those shares at all times during the *ownership test period.



    Third condition

    165-230(4)    
    At the beginning of the *first continuity period:


    (a) individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, *fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the income of the company; or


    (b) individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the capital of the company.



    Fourth condition

    165-230(5)    


    It must be the case that, for each *non-fixed trust (other than an *excepted trust) that, at any time during the *ownership test period, held directly or indirectly a *fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the company, section 267-25 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 would not have prevented the non-fixed trust from deducting the amount in respect of the debt if it, rather than the company, would otherwise be entitled to deduct the amount.
    Note:

    See section 165-245 for when an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company.


    SECTION 165-235   Information about non-fixed trusts with interests in company  
    Notice about foreign resident non-fixed trust

    165-235(1)    
    The Commissioner may give the company a notice in accordance with section 165-240 if the requirements of subsections (2) to (5) of this section are met.

    Tax detriment under Division 165

    165-235(2)    


    In its *income tax return for the income year:


    (a) the company must have deducted a *tax loss from a *loss year where it would not be allowed to deduct the tax loss unless it met the conditions in section 165-215 ; or


    (b) the company must not have calculated:


    (i) its taxable income and tax loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-B ; and

    (ii) its *net capital gain and *net capital loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-CB ;
    where it would have been required to calculate them unless it met the conditions in section 165-220 ; or


    (c) the company must have applied a net capital loss for an earlier income year in working out its net capital gain where it would not have been allowed to apply the loss unless it met the conditions in section 165-215 as applied on the assumption mentioned in subsection 165-96(1) ; or


    (d) the company must have deducted a debt that it wrote off as bad in the income year where it would not be allowed to deduct the debt unless it met the conditions in section 165-230 .



    Information about non-fixed trust

    165-235(3)    


    In order to determine whether it meets the conditions concerned, the Commissioner must need information about a *non-fixed trust mentioned in:


    (a) if paragraph (2)(a) applies - subsection 165-215(5) ; or


    (b) if paragraph (2)(b) applies - subsection 165-220(5) ; or


    (c) if paragraph (2)(c) applies - subsection 165-215(5) as applied on the assumption mentioned in subsection 165-96(1) ; or


    (d) if paragraph (2)(d) applies - subsection 165-230(5) .



    Foreign resident trust

    165-235(4)    
    When the Commissioner gives the notice:


    (a) a trustee of the *non-fixed trust must be a foreign resident; or


    (b) the central management and control of the non-fixed trust must be outside Australia.



    When notice must be given

    165-235(5)    
    The Commissioner must give the notice before the later of:


    (a) 5 years after the income year; and


    (b) the end of the period during which the company is required by section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to retain records in relation to that income year.

    SECTION 165-240   Notices where requirements of section 165-235 are met  
    Information required

    165-240(1)    


    The notice that the Commissioner may give if the requirements of subsections 165-235(2) to (5) are met must require the company to give the Commissioner specified information that is relevant in determining whether:


    (a) if paragraph 165-235(2)(a) applies - the requirements of subsection 165-215(5) ; or


    (b) if paragraph 165-235(2)(b) applies - the requirements of subsection 165-220(5) ; or


    (c) if paragraph 165-235(2)(c) applies - the requirements of subsection 165-215(5) as applied on the assumption mentioned in subsection 165-96(1) ; or


    (d) if paragraph 165-235(2)(d) applies - the requirements of subsection 165-230(5) ;

    are satisfied in relation to the *non-fixed trust mentioned in subsections 165-235(3) and (4) .



    Company knowledge

    165-240(2)    
    The information need not be within the knowledge of the company at the time the notice is given.

    Period for giving information

    165-240(3)    
    The notice must specify a period within which the company is to give the information. The period must not end earlier than 21 days after the day on which the Commissioner gives the notice.

    Consequence of not giving the information

    165-240(4)    
    If the company does not give the information within the period or within such further period as the Commissioner allows, the company is taken not to meet, and never to have met, the conditions mentioned in whichever paragraph of subsection 165-235(2) is applicable.

    Application of Subdivision 165-B

    165-240(5)    
    If, because of subsection (4), the company is required to calculate under Subdivision 165-B its taxable income and *tax loss for the income year concerned, that Subdivision is to be applied as if it required the income year to be divided into such periods as would result in the highest possible taxable income for the income year.

    Application of Subdivision 165-CB

    165-240(6)    
    If, because of subsection (4), the company is required to calculate under Subdivision 165-CB its *net capital gain and *net capital loss for the income year concerned, that Subdivision is to be applied as if it required the income year to be divided into such periods as would result in the highest net capital gain for the income year.

    SECTION 165-245  

    165-245   When an entity has a fixed entitlement to income or capital of a company  


    For the purposes of this Act, an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a *fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company at a time if and only if the entity held or had, directly or indirectly, that fixed entitlement at that time for the purposes of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Subdivision 165-G - Other special provisions  

    SECTION 165-250   Control of companies in liquidation etc.  

    165-250(1)    
    For the purposes of sections 165-15 , 165-40 , 165-115D , 165-115M and 165-129 , a person is not prevented from controlling, or being or becoming able to control, voting power in a company merely because:


    (a) the company is or becomes:


    (i) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) an entity with a similar status under a *foreign law to a Chapter 5 body corporate; or


    (b) either:


    (i) a provisional liquidator is appointed to the company under section 472 of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) a person with a similar status under a foreign law to a provisional liquidator is appointed to the company.

    165-250(2)    
    For the purposes of sections 165-15 , 165-40 , 165-115D , 165-115M and 165-129 , a company (the stakeholding company ) is not prevented from controlling, or being or becoming able to control, voting power in another company merely because:


    (a) the stakeholding company is or becomes:


    (i) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) an entity with a similar status under a *foreign law to a Chapter 5 body corporate; or


    (b) either:


    (i) a provisional liquidator is appointed to the stakeholding company under section 472 of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) a person with a similar status under a foreign law to a provisional liquidator is appointed to the stakeholding company.

    SECTION 165-255   Incomplete periods  

    165-255(1)    
    If:


    (a) this Division or Division 166 requires a company to meet or satisfy a condition or test, or work out an amount, for a period; and


    (b) the company is only in existence after the beginning of the period;

    then the period is taken to start on the first day that the company is in existence.


    165-255(2)    
    If:


    (a) this Division or Division 166 requires a company to meet or satisfy a condition or test, or work out an amount, for a period; and


    (b) the company ceases to be in existence before the end of the period;

    then the period is taken to end on the day the company ceases to be in existence.


    Division 166 - Income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company  

    Guide to Division 166  

    SECTION 166-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division modifies the way the rules in Division 165 apply to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company by making it easier for the company to apply the rules.

    If the company has maintained the same owners as between certain points of time, it does not need to prove it has maintained the same owners throughout the periods in between.

    In certain cases, special concessional tracing rules deem entities to hold voting, dividend or capital stakes in the company so that the company does not have to trace through to the ultimate beneficial owners of the stakes.

    Subdivision 166-AA - The object of this Division  

    SECTION 166-3   The object of this Division  

    166-3(1)    
    The object of this Division is to make it easier for a *widely held company, or an *eligible Division 166 company, to apply the rules in Division 165 (because of the difficulty the company might have under that Division in actually tracing through to the ultimate beneficial owners of *voting stakes, *dividend stakes and *capital stakes in the company).

    166-3(2)    
    This Division makes it easier to apply the rules in Division 165 by:


    (a) making it unnecessary for the company to prove that it has maintained the same owners throughout a period, if the company had the same owners at certain test times; and


    (b) making it unnecessary for the company to trace through to the ultimate beneficial owners of:


    (i) *voting stakes, *dividend stakes and *capital stakes in the company held by certain entities (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities); and

    (ii) small voting stakes, dividend stakes and capital stakes in the company.

    Subdivision 166-A - Deducting tax losses of earlier income years  

    SECTION 166-5   How Subdivision 165-A applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company  

    166-5(1)    
    This Subdivision modifies the way Subdivision 165-A applies to a company that is:


    (a) a *widely held company at all times during the income year; or


    (b) an *eligible Division 166 company at all times during the income year; or


    (c) a widely held company for a part of the income year and an eligible Division 166 company for the rest of the income year.

    Note 1:

    Subdivision 165-A is about the conditions a company must meet before it can deduct a tax loss for an earlier income year.

    Note 2:

    A company can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to it: see section 166-15 .

    Note 3:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete income years.



    Meaning of test period

    166-5(2)    
    The company ' s test period is the period consisting of the *loss year, the income year and any intervening period.

    Note:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.



    Substantial continuity of ownership

    166-5(3)    
    The company is taken to have met the conditions in section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners) if there is *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and:


    (a) the end of each income year in that period; and


    (b) the *end of each *corporate change in that period.

    Note:

    See sections 166-145 and 166-175 to work out whether there is substantial continuity of ownership and a corporate change.



    No substantial continuity of ownership

    166-5(4)    
    The company is taken to have failed to meet the conditions in section 165-12 if there is no *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and:


    (a) the end of an income year in that period; or


    (b) the *end of a *corporate change in that period.

    Satisfies the business continuity test

    166-5(5)    


    However, if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the income year (the business continuity test period ), it is taken to have satisfied the condition in section 165-13 .
    Note 1:

    For the business continuity test, see Subdivision 165-E .

    Note 2:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.


    166-5(6)    


    Apply the *business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the earlier of the following times (the test time ):


    (a) the end of the first income year;


    (b) the first time in the test period that a *corporate change in the company *ends;

    for which there is no *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and that time.


    SECTION 166-15   Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them  

    166-15(1)    
    The company can choose that Subdivision 165-A is to apply to it for the income year without the modifications made by this Subdivision.

    166-15(2)    
    The company must choose on or before the day it lodges its *income tax return for the income year, or before a later day if the Commissioner allows.

    Subdivision 166-B - Working out the taxable income, tax loss, net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year of the change  

    SECTION 166-20   How Subdivisions 165-B and 165-CB apply to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company  

    166-20(1)    
    This Subdivision modifies how Subdivisions 165-B and 165-CB apply to a company that is:


    (a) a *widely held company at all times during the income year (the test period ); or


    (b) an *eligible Division 166 company at all times during the income year (the test period ); or


    (c) a widely held company for a part of the income year and an eligible Division 166 company for the rest of the income year (the whole year being the test period ).

    Note 1:

    Subdivision 165-B is about when a company must calculate its taxable income and tax loss for the income year in a special way. Subdivision 165-CB is about when a company must calculate its net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year in a special way.

    Note 2:

    A company can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to it: see section 166-35 .

    Note 3:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.



    No corporate change etc.

    166-20(2)    
    If:


    (a) no *corporate change in the company *ends at any time in the *test period; or


    (b) a corporate change in the company *ends during the test period, but there is *substantial continuity of ownership as between the start of the test period and immediately after the corporate change ends;

    the company is taken to have met the condition in paragraph 165-35(a) (which is about there being persons having *more than a 50% stake in it during the whole of the income year).

    Note:

    See sections 166-145 and 166-175 to work out whether there is substantial continuity of ownership and a corporate change.



    Corporate change

    166-20(3)    
    If:


    (a) a *corporate change in the company *ends at any time in the *test period; and


    (b) there is no *substantial continuity of ownership as between the start of the test period and immediately after the corporate change ends;

    then the company is taken to have failed to meet the condition in paragraph 165-35(a) .



    Satisfies the business continuity test

    166-20(4)    


    However, if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the rest of the income year (the business continuity test period ) after the first time (the test time ) in the *test period that a *corporate change in the company *ended, the company is taken to have satisfied the condition in paragraph 165-35(b) .
    Note 1:

    For the business continuity test, see Subdivision 165-E .

    Note 2:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.


    166-20(5)    


    Apply the *business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the *test time.

    SECTION 166-25   How to work out the taxable income, tax loss, net capital gain and net capital loss  

    166-25(1)    
    If the company must calculate its taxable income and *tax loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-B , and its *net capital gain and *net capital loss under Subdivision 165-CB , then, in dividing the income year into periods, apply subsection (2) of this section instead of subsection 165-45(3) .

    166-25(2)    
    The last period ends at the end of the income year. Each period (except the last) ends at the earlier of:


    (a) the earliest time when:


    (i) a *corporate change in the company *ends; and

    (ii) there is no *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and that time; or


    (b) the earliest time when a person begins to control, or becomes able to control, the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of:


    (i) getting some benefit or advantage to do with how this Act applies; or

    (ii) getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else.
    Note:

    See sections 166-145 and 166-175 to work out whether there is substantial continuity of ownership and a corporate change.


    SECTION 166-35   Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them  

    166-35(1)    
    The company can choose that Subdivisions 165-B and 165-CB are to apply to it for the income year without the modifications made by this Subdivision.

    166-35(2)    
    The company must choose on or before the day it lodges its *income tax return for the income year, or before a later day if the Commissioner allows.

    Subdivision 166-C - Deducting bad debts  

    SECTION 166-40   How Subdivision 165-C applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company  

    166-40(1)    
    This Subdivision modifies the way Subdivision 165-C applies to a company that is:


    (a) a *widely held company at all times during the *current year; or


    (b) an *eligible Division 166 company at all times during the current year; or


    (c) a widely held company for a part of the current year and an eligible Division 166 company for the rest of the current year.

    Note 1:

    Subdivision 165-C is about the conditions a company must meet before it can deduct a bad debt.

    Note 2:

    A company can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to it: see section 166-50 .

    Note 3:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete current years.



    Meaning of test period

    166-40(2)    
    The company's test period is the period:


    (a) that begins at whichever of the following times the company chooses:


    (i) the start of the income year in which the debt was incurred;

    (ii) the start of the *first continuity period; and


    (b) that ends at the end of the *second continuity period;

    and includes any intervening period.

    Note:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.



    Substantial continuity of ownership

    166-40(3)    
    The company is taken to have met the conditions in section 165-123 (about the company maintaining the same owners) if there is *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and:


    (a) the end of each income year in that period; and


    (b) the *end of each *corporate change in that period.

    Note:

    See sections 166-145 and 166-175 to work out whether there is substantial continuity of ownership and a corporate change.



    No substantial continuity of ownership

    166-40(4)    
    The company is taken to have failed to meet the conditions in section 165-123 if there is no *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and:


    (a) the end of an income year in that period; or


    (b) the *end of a *corporate change in that period.

    Satisfies the business continuity test

    166-40(5)    


    However, if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the *second continuity period (the business continuity test period ), it is taken to have satisfied the condition in section 165-126 .
    Note 1:

    For the business continuity test, see Subdivision 165-E .

    Note 2:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.


    166-40(6)    


    Apply the *business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the earlier of the following times (the test time ):


    (a) the end of the first income year;


    (b) the first time in the test period that a *corporate change in the company *ends;

    for which there is no *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and that time.


    SECTION 166-50   Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them  

    166-50(1)    
    The company can choose that Subdivision 165-C is to apply to it for the income year without the modifications made by this Subdivision.

    166-50(2)    
    The company must choose on or before the day it lodges its *income tax return for the income year, or before a later day if the Commissioner allows.

    Subdivision 166-CA - Changeover times and alteration times  

    SECTION 166-80   How Subdivision 165-CC or 165-CD applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company  

    166-80(1)    
    This Subdivision modifies the way in which:


    (a) Subdivision 165-CC applies in determining whether a changeover time (within the meaning of section 165-115C ) has occurred; or


    (b) Subdivision 165-CD applies in determining whether an alteration time (within the meaning of section 165-115L ) has occurred;

    in relation to a company that is:


    (c) a *widely held company at all times during the income year; or


    (d) an *eligible Division 166 company at all times during the income year; or


    (e) a widely held company for a part of the income year and an eligible Division 166 company for the rest of the income year.

    Note 1:

    Subdivision 165-CC is about the conditions a company that has an unrealised net loss must satisfy before it can have capital losses taken into account or deduct revenue losses. Subdivision 165-CD provides for reductions in cost bases and certain other reductions after alterations have occurred in the ownership or control of a loss company.

    Note 2:

    A company can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to it: see section 166-90 .

    Note 3:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete income years.



    Meaning of test period and test time

    166-80(2)    
    The company's test period is the period starting at the time that is the reference time for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC or section 165-115L , as the case may be, and ending at each of the following times (the test time ):


    (a) the end of the income year in which the reference time occurred;


    (b) the end of a later income year;


    (c) the *end of a *corporate change in the company.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

    Note 2:

    See section 166-175 to work out whether there is a corporate change.



    Substantial continuity of ownership

    166-80(3)    
    A changeover time or an alteration time is taken not to have occurred in respect of the company during the test period if there is *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and the *test time.

    Note:

    See section 166-145 to work out whether there is substantial continuity of ownership.



    No substantial continuity of ownership

    166-80(4)    
    Subsections (5) and (6) have effect if there is no *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and the *test time.

    166-80(5)    
    The *test time is taken to have been a changeover time or an alteration time, as the case may be, in respect of the company.

    166-80(6)    
    No other time during the *test period is a changeover time or an alteration time in respect of the company.

    SECTION 166-90   Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them  

    166-90(1)    
    The company can choose that Subdivision 165-CC or 165-CD is to apply to it in respect of a *test period for the purposes of section 166-80 without the modifications made by this Subdivision.

    166-90(2)    
    The company must choose on or before the day it lodges its *income tax return for the income year in which the *test period begins, or before a later day if the Commissioner allows.

    Subdivision 166-D - Tests for finding out whether the widely held or eligible Division 166 company has maintained the same owners  

    SECTION 166-135   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision has the tests to work out whether a widely held or eligible Division 166 company has maintained the same owners as between different times. (Subdivision 166-E has rules which make it easier for the company to satisfy these tests.)

    This Subdivision also defines when there has been a corporate change in the company.

    The ownership tests: substantial continuity of ownership

    SECTION 166-145   The ownership tests: substantial continuity of ownership  

    166-145(1)    
    There is substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and another time in the test period if (and only if) the conditions in this section are met.

    Note:

    Section 166-165 , and Subdivision 166-E , affect how this section is applied.



    Voting power

    166-145(2)    


    There must be persons (none of them companies or trustees) who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company at the start of the *test period. Also, those persons must have had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company immediately after the other time in the test period.
    Note 1:

    To work out who had more than 50% of the voting power, see section 165-150 .

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.



    Rights to dividends

    166-145(3)    


    There must be persons (none of them companies) who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s dividends at the start of the *test period. Also, those persons must have had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s dividends immediately after the other time in the test period.
    Note 1:

    To work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company ' s dividends, see section 165-155 .

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to dividends in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to dividends.



    Rights to capital distributions

    166-145(4)    


    There must be persons (none of them companies) who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions at the start of the *test period. Also, those persons must have had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions immediately after the other time in the test period.
    Note 1:

    To work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions, see section 165-160 .

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to capital distributions.



    When to apply the test

    166-145(5)    
    To work out whether a condition in this section was satisfied at a time (the ownership test time ), apply the alternative test for that condition.

    Note:

    For the alternative test, see subsections 165-150(2) , 165-155(2) and 165-160(2) .



    Conditions in subsections (3) and (4) satisfied by non-profit and mutual companies

    166-145(6)    
    If the company is:


    (a) a *non-profit company; or


    (b) a *mutual affiliate company; or


    (c) a *mutual insurance company;

    during the whole of the *test period, the conditions in subsections (3) and (4) are taken to have been satisfied by the company.


    SECTION 166-165   Relationship with rules in Division 165  

    166-165(1)    


    The provisions of Subdivision 165-D (other than section 165-165) apply for the purposes of the tests in section 166-145 .

    166-165(2)    


    The following provisions apply for the purposes of the tests in section 166-145 as if the reference to a particular time were a reference to the *ownership test time:


    (a) section 165-180 (which is about arrangements affecting beneficial ownership of shares);


    (b) subsection 165-185(2) (which treats some shares as never having carried rights);


    (c) subsection 165-190(2) (which treats some shares as always having carried rights).

    Corporate change in a company

    SECTION 166-175   Corporate change in a company  


    Meaning of corporate change

    166-175(1)    
    There is a corporate change in a company if:


    (a) there is a *takeover bid for *shares in the company; or


    (b) there is a scheme of arrangement, involving more than 50% of the company ' s shares, that has been approved by a court; or


    (c) there is any other arrangement, involving the acquisition of more than 50% of the company ' s shares, that is regulated under the Corporations Act 2001 or a *foreign law; or


    (d) there is an issue of *shares in the company that results in an increase of 20% or more in:


    (i) the issued share capital of the company; or

    (ii) the number of the company ' s shares on issue; or


    (e) there is a corporate change in another company which beneficially owns one or more of the following stakes in the first company:


    (i) a *voting stake that carries rights to more than 50% of the voting power of the first company;

    (ii) a *dividend stake that carries rights to receive more than 50% of any dividends the first company may pay;

    (iii) a *capital stake that carries rights to receive more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the first company;
    (whether the other company owns those stakes directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities).
    Note:

    For paragraph (e), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.



    When a corporate change ends

    166-175(2)    
    A *corporate change ends :


    (a) if paragraph (1)(a) applies (or paragraph (1)(e) applies because of paragraph (1)(a)) - at the latest time when a *bid period of the *takeover bid ends; and


    (b) if paragraph (1)(b) or (c) applies (or paragraph (1)(e) applies because of paragraph (1)(b) or (c)) - when the scheme of arrangement or other arrangement ends; and


    (c) if paragraph (1)(d) applies (or paragraph (1)(e) applies because of paragraph (1)(d)) - when the offer period for the issue of *shares ends.

    Subdivision 166-E - Concessional tracing rules  

    SECTION 166-215   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision has rules which make it easier for a widely held or eligible Division 166 company to satisfy the ownership tests in Subdivision 166-D .

    Special concessional tracing rules deem entities to hold the following stakes in the company so that the company does not have to trace through to the beneficial owners of the stakes:

  • (a) stakes of less than 10% in the company;
  • (b) stakes of between 10% and 50% that are held by widely held companies;
  • (c) stakes that are held by complying superannuation funds, complying approved deposit funds, special companies and managed investment schemes;
  • (d) stakes in interposed foreign listed companies that are held as bearer shares;
  • (e) stakes in interposed foreign listed companies that are held by depository entities.
  • Application of this Subdivision

    SECTION 166-220  

    166-220   Application of this Subdivision  


    This Subdivision applies to a company (the tested company ) that is:


    (a) a *widely held company at all times during the income year; or


    (b) an *eligible Division 166 company at all times during the income year; or


    (c) a widely held company for a part of the income year and an eligible Division 166 company for the rest of the income year.

    Note:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete income years.

    Stakes of less than 10% in the tested company

    SECTION 166-225   Direct stakes of less than 10% in the tested company  

    166-225(1)    


    This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if:


    (a) a *voting stake that carries rights to less than 10% of the voting power in the company is held directly in the company; or


    (b) a *dividend stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any dividends that the company may pay is held directly in the company; or


    (c) a *capital stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any distribution of capital of the company is held directly in the company.

    Note 1:

    Other rules might affect this provision: see sections 166-270 , 166-275 and 166-280 .

    Note 2:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.



    Notional shareholder

    166-225(2)    


    The tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the *ownership test time, a single notional entity:


    (a) directly controlled the voting power that is carried by each such *voting stake; and


    (b) had the right to receive, for its own benefit and directly:


    (i) any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of each such *dividend stake; and

    (ii) any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of each such *capital stake; and


    (c) were a person (other than a company).

    Note:

    The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265 .


    166-225(3)    
    To avoid doubt, the single notional entity mentioned in subsection (2) is a different single notional entity from the one mentioned in section 165-207 and the one mentioned in section 166-255 .

    SECTION 166-230   Indirect stakes of less than 10% in the tested company  

    166-230(1)    


    This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume that:


    (a) an entity (the stakeholder ) indirectly holds any of these stakes in the tested company:


    (i) a *voting stake that carries rights to less than 10% of the voting power in the company; or

    (ii) a *dividend stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any dividends that the company may pay; or

    (iii) a *capital stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any distribution of capital of the company; and


    (b) either:


    (i) the stakeholder indirectly holds the stake in the tested company by holding *shares directly in a company (the top interposed entity ) that is interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company; or

    (ii) the stakeholder indirectly holds the stake in the tested company by holding another interest directly in an entity (the top interposed entity ) that is not a company and that is interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company.
    Note 1:

    There might also be other entities interposed between the top interposed entity and the tested company.

    Note 2:

    Other rules might affect this provision: see subsection (3) and sections 166-272 , 166-275 and 166-280 .

    Note 3:

    For paragraph (a), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.



    Top interposed entity deemed to hold stakes directly in the tested company

    166-230(2)    


    The tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the *ownership test time:


    (a) if the stake is a *voting stake - the top interposed entity controls, or is able to control, the voting power in the tested company that is carried by that stake at that time; and


    (b) if the stake is a *dividend stake - the top interposed entity *indirectly had the right to receive, for its own benefit, any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of that stake at that time; and


    (c) if the stake is a *capital stake - the top interposed entity indirectly had the right to receive, for its own benefit, any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of that stake at that time; and


    (d) in any case - the top interposed entity were a person (other than a company).

    Note:

    The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265 .



    Acquisition of top interposed entity by another entity

    166-230(3)    


    If:


    (a) a new entity (the new interposed entity ) acquires all the *shares or other interests in the top interposed entity (the old interposed entity ); and


    (b) the new interposed entity has the same classes of shares or other interests as the old interposed entity; and


    (c) if the new interposed entity is a company - the shares are not *redeemable shares; and


    (d) in any case - each stakeholder holds the same proportion, or a reasonably equivalent proportion, of the total *voting stakes, *dividend stakes or *capital stakes in the new interposed entity immediately after the acquisition as the stakeholder held in the old interposed entity immediately before the acquisition;

    then, at all times that the old interposed entity held or is taken to have held a stake in the tested company, the new interposed entity is taken to have held that stake.


    166-230(4)    
    Except for the purposes of determining whether a time is an alteration time (within the meaning of section 165-115L ), section 166-272 (which is about the same shares or interests) is to be disregarded when applying subsection (3).

    Acquisition of tested company by new interposed entity

    166-230(5)    
    If:


    (a) a new entity (the new interposed entity ) that is a company acquires all the *shares in the tested company; and


    (b) assuming that the time immediately before the acquisition had been an *ownership test time, section 166-225 would have applied the tests to the tested company as if there were a single notional entity as described in subsection 166-225(2) in respect of some or all of the *voting stakes, *dividend stakes or *capital stakes in the tested company; and


    (c) the new interposed entity has the same classes of shares as the tested company; and


    (d) the shares are not *redeemable shares; and


    (e) each entity that held a proportion of the voting stakes, dividend stakes or capital stakes in the tested company immediately before the acquisition (disregarding section 166-225 ) holds the same proportion, or a reasonably equivalent proportion, of that kind of stake in the new interposed entity immediately after the acquisition;

    then, at all times that the single notional entity mentioned in paragraph (b) held or is taken to have held a stake in the tested company, the new interposed entity is taken to have held that stake.


    166-230(6)    
    Except for the purposes of determining whether a time is an alteration time (within the meaning of section 165-115L ), section 166-272 (which is about the same shares or interests) is to be disregarded when applying subsection (5) of this section.


    SECTION 166-235   Voting, dividend and capital stakes  


    Meaning of voting stake

    166-235(1)    


    An entity holds a voting stake in a company if:


    (a) the entity is the registered holder of *shares in the company; and


    (b) the shares carry rights to exercise voting power in the company.

    166-235(2)    


    An entity (the stakeholder ) also holds a voting stake in a company if:


    (a) one or more other entities are interposed between the company and the stakeholder; and


    (b) the stakeholder controls, or is able to control, voting power in the company indirectly through the interposed entity or entities.

    Note:

    For working out the size of a voting stake (for example, for paragraph 166-225(1)(a) ), Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.



    Meaning of dividend stake

    166-235(3)    
    An entity holds a dividend stake in a company if:


    (a) the entity is the registered holder of *shares in the company; and


    (b) the shares carry rights to all or any *dividends that the company may pay.

    166-235(4)    
    An entity (the stakeholder ) also holds a dividend stake in a company if:


    (a) one or more other entities are interposed between the company and the stakeholder; and


    (b) the stakeholder has the right to receive, for its own benefit and *indirectly through the interposed entity or entities, all or any *dividends that the company may pay.

    Note:

    For working out the size of a dividend stake (for example, for paragraph 166-225(1)(b) ), Subdivision 167-A has special rules for a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to dividends.



    Meaning of capital stake

    166-235(5)    
    An entity holds a capital stake in a company if:


    (a) the entity is the registered holder of *shares in the company; and


    (b) the shares carry rights to all or any of a distribution of capital of the company.

    166-235(6)    
    An entity (the stakeholder ) also holds a capital stake in a company if:


    (a) one or more other entities are interposed between the company and the stakeholder; and


    (b) the stakeholder has the right to receive, for its own benefit and *indirectly through the interposed entity or entities, all or any of a distribution of capital of the company.

    Note:

    For working out the size of a capital stake (for example, for paragraph 166-225(1)(c) ), Subdivision 167-A has special rules for a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to capital distributions.



    Stakes held by nominees

    166-235(7)    
    For the purposes of sections 166-225 and 166-230 , if:


    (a) an entity (the nominee entity ) holds a *voting stake, a *dividend stake, or a *capital stake, in a company; and


    (b) the nominee entity is itself a company; and


    (c) the nominee entity holds the stake as a nominee for more than one other entity;

    then, for each entity for whom a part of the stake is held by the nominee entity, that entity ' s part of the stake may be treated instead as a separate stake.


    Stakes held directly and/or indirectly by widely held companies

    SECTION 166-240   Stakes held directly and/or indirectly by widely held companies  

    166-240(1)    
    This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if a *widely held company directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities), or both directly and indirectly, holds any of the following:


    (a) a *voting stake that carries rights to between 10% and 50% (inclusive) of the voting power in the company;


    (b) a *dividend stake that carries the right to receive between 10% and 50% (inclusive) of any dividends that the company may pay;


    (c) a *capital stake that carries the right to receive between 10% and 50% (inclusive) of any distribution of capital of the company.

    Note 1:

    Other rules might affect this provision: see subsections (3) and (4) and sections 166-272 , 166-275 and 166-280 .

    Note 2:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    166-240(2)    
    The tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the *ownership test time:


    (a) if the stake is a *voting stake - the *widely held company controls, or is able to control, the voting power in the tested company that is carried by that stake at that time; and


    (b) if the stake is a *dividend stake - the widely held company had the right to receive (whether directly or *indirectly), for its own benefit, any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of that stake at that time; and


    (c) if the stake is a *capital stake - the widely held company had the right to receive (whether directly or indirectly), for its own benefit, any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of that stake at that time; and


    (d) in any case - the widely held company were a person (other than a company).

    Note:

    The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265 .



    Exception

    166-240(3)    
    This section does not apply in respect of a *widely held company if the company is not a widely held company for the whole income year in which the *ownership test time occurs.

    Note:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete periods.



    Acquisition of widely held company by another entity

    166-240(4)    
    If:


    (a) a new company acquires all the *shares in the *widely held company; and


    (b) immediately before the acquisition, the shares in the widely held company were listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange; and


    (c) immediately after the acquisition, the shares in the new company are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; and


    (d) the new company has the same classes of shares (not being *redeemable shares) as the widely held company; and


    (e) each entity that held stakes in the widely held company immediately before the acquisition holds the same proportion of the total *voting stakes, *dividend stakes or *capital stakes in the new company immediately after the acquisition as the entity held in the widely held company immediately before the acquisition;

    then, at all times that the widely held company held or is taken to have held a stake in the tested company, the new company is taken to have held that stake.


    166-240(5)    
    Except for the purposes of determining whether a time is analteration time (within the meaning of section 165-115L ), section 166-272 (which is about same shares or interests) is to be disregarded when applying subsection (4).

    SECTION 166-245   Stakes held by other entities  

    166-245(1)    
    This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if:


    (a) an entity mentioned in subsection (2) directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) holds a *voting stake, a *dividend stake or a *capital stake in the company; and


    (b) neither the entity nor another entity has, under section 166-225 , 166-230 or 166-240 , been taken to control voting power or have rights in respect of the stake; and


    (c) the entity mentioned in subsection (2) satisfies the condition in subsection (3).

    Note:

    Other rules might affect this provision: see sections 166-272 , 166-275 and 166-280 .


    166-245(2)    


    For the purposes of subsection (1), these are the entities:


    (a) a *superannuation fund; and


    (b) an *approved deposit fund; and


    (ba) (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)


    (c) a *special company; and


    (d) a *managed investment scheme; and


    (e) any other entity, or entity of a kind, prescribed by the regulations.


    166-245(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), an entity satisfies the condition in this subsection if at all times during the income year of the tested company in which the *ownership test time occurs:


    (a) if the entity is a *superannuation fund:


    (i) the fund is a *complying superannuation fund; or

    (ii) the fund is a superannuation fund that is established in a foreign country and is regulated under a *foreign law; or


    (b) if the entity is an *approved deposit fund - the fund is a *complying approved deposit fund; or


    (ba) (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)


    (c) if the entity is a *special company - the company is a special company; or


    (d) if the entity is a *managed investment scheme:


    (i) the scheme is registered under the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) the entity is recognised, under a *foreign law relating to corporate regulation, as an entity with a similar status to a managed investment scheme; or


    (e) if the entity is an entity, or an entity of a kind, prescribed by the regulations - the entity meets any conditions prescribed by the regulations.

    Note:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete periods.



    If the entity has 10 members or fewer

    166-245(4)    
    If the entity has 10 *members or fewer, the tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the *ownership test time:


    (a) if the stake is a *voting stake - each member controls, or is able to control, an equal proportion of the voting power in the tested company that is carried by that stake at that time; and


    (b) if the stake is a *dividend stake - each member had the right to receive (whether directly or *indirectly), for its own benefit, an equal proportion of any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of that stake at that time; and


    (c) if the stake is a *capital stake - each member had the right to receive (whether directly or indirectly), for its own benefit, an equal proportion of any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of that stake at that time; and


    (d) in any case - each member were a person (other than a company or a trustee).

    Note 1:

    If each member ' s proportion of the voting power, the dividends or the distributions is less than 10%, then subsections (5) and (6) apply instead.

    Note 2:

    The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265 .



    If the entity has more than 10 members etc.

    166-245(5)    
    The ownership tests are applied as set out in subsection (6) if:


    (a) the entity has more than 10 *members; or


    (b) under subsection (4):


    (i) the proportion of the voting power in the company that each member controls, or is able to control, is less than 10% of the total voting power; or

    (ii) the proportion of the *dividends that the tested company may pay for the benefit of each member is less than 10% of the total dividends; or

    (iii) the proportion of the distributions of capital that the tested company may pay for the benefit of each member is less than 10% of the total distributions.

    166-245(6)    
    The ownership tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the *ownership test time:


    (a) if the stake is a *voting stake - the entity controls, or is able to control, the voting power in the tested company that is carried by that stake at that time; and


    (b) if the stake is a *dividend stake - the entity had the right to receive (whether directly or *indirectly), for its own benefit, any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of that stake at that time; and


    (c) if the stake is a *capital stake - the entity had the right to receive (whether directly or indirectly), for its own benefit, any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of that stake at that time; and


    (d) in any case - the entity were a person (other than a company or a trustee).

    Note:

    The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265 .


    When identity of foreign stakeholders is not known

    SECTION 166-255   Bearer shares in foreign listed companies  

    166-255(1)    
    This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if:


    (a) at the *ownership test time, it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume, that persons (none of them companies or trustees) hold a *voting stake, a *dividend stake or a *capital stake in the tested company; and


    (b) an entity has not, under section 166-225 , 166-230 , 166-240 or 166-245 , been taken to control voting power or have rights in respect of the stake; and


    (c) another company (the foreign listed company ) is interposed, at that time, between those persons and the tested company; and


    (d) at all times during the income year of the tested company in which the ownership test time occurs, the *principal class of shares in the foreign listed company is listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange; and


    (e) at the ownership test time:


    (i) voting stakes that carry rights to 50% or more of the voting power in the foreign listed company; or

    (ii) dividend stakes that carry rights to receive 50% or more of any dividends that the foreign listed company may pay; or

    (iii) capital stakes that carry rights to receive 50% or more of any distribution of capital of the foreign listed company;
    as the case requires, are directly held by way of bearer shares; and


    (f) the beneficial owners of some or all of those bearer shares have not been disclosed to the foreign listed company.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

    Note 2:

    Other rules might affect this provision: see sections 166-270 , 166-275 and 166-280 .

    Note 3:

    For paragraph (e), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    166-255(2)    
    The tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the *ownership test time, for each of those bearer shares whose owners have not been disclosed:


    (a) a single notional entity controls, or is able to control, the voting power in the tested company that is carried by those shares at that time; and


    (b) the entity *indirectly had the right to receive, for its own benefit:


    (i) any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of those shares at that time; and

    (ii) any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of those shares at that time; and


    (c) the entity were a person (other than a company).

    Note:

    The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265 .


    166-255(3)    
    To avoid doubt, the single notional entity mentioned in subsection (2) is a different single notional entity from the one mentioned in section 165-207 and the one mentioned in section 166-225 .

    SECTION 166-260   Depository entities holding stakes in foreign listed companies  

    166-260(1)    
    This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if:


    (a) at the *ownership test time, it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume, that persons (none of them companies or trustees) have a *voting stake, a *dividend stake or a *capital stake in the tested company; and


    (b) an entity has not, under section 166-225 , 166-230 , 166-240 , 166-245 or 166-255 , been taken to control voting power or have rights in respect of the stake; and


    (c) another company (the foreign listed company ) is interposed, at that time, between those persons and the tested company; and


    (d) at all times during the income year of the tested company in which the ownership test time occurs, the *principal class of shares in the foreign listed company is listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange; and


    (e) at the ownership test time:


    (i) voting stakes that carry rights to 50% or more of the voting power in the foreign listed company; or

    (ii) dividend stakes that carry rights to receive 50% or more of any dividends that the foreign listed company may pay; or

    (iii) capital stakes that carry rights to receive 50% or more of any distribution of capital of the foreign listed company;
    as the case requires, are directly held by one or more *depository entities (see subsection (3)); and


    (f) a law of a foreign country, or a part of a foreign country, in which the approved stock exchange is located, prevents the disclosure of the beneficial owners of some or all of those shares that are held by the depository entities; and


    (g) the beneficial owners of some or all of the shares held by the depository entities have not been disclosed to the foreign listed company.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

    Note 2:

    This rule might not apply in all circumstances: see sections 166-275 and 166-280 .

    Note 3:

    For paragraph (e), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    166-260(2)    
    The tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the *ownership test time, for each of those *shares held by a *depository entity whose owners have not been disclosed, the depository entity:


    (a) controls, or is able to control, the voting power in the tested company that is carried by those shares at that time; and


    (b) *indirectly had the right to receive, for its own benefit:


    (i) any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of those shares at that time; and

    (ii) any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of those shares at that time; and


    (c) were a person (other than a company).

    Note:

    The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265 .


    166-260(3)    
    If the effect of subsection (2) is that the *depository entity is taken to hold:


    (a) a *voting stake that carries rights to less than 10% of the voting power in the tested company; or


    (b) a *dividend stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any dividends that the tested company may pay; or


    (c) a *capital stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any distribution of capital of the tested company;

    then neither section 166-225 nor section 166-230 applies in respect of that stake.

    Note:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    166-260(4)    
    If the *depository entity (the old depository entity ) is subsequently replaced by another depository entity (the new depository entity ), then, at all times that the old depository entity held or is taken to have held a stake in the tested company, the new entity is taken to have held that stake.

    166-260(5)    
    A depository entity is an entity:


    (a) that is a central securities repository; and


    (b) that provides custody of share certificates; and


    (c) that provides services for the exchange of shares.

    Other rules relating to voting power and rights

    SECTION 166-265  

    166-265   Persons who actually control voting power or have rights are taken not to control power or have rights  


    If any of sections 166-225 , 166-230 , 166-240 , 166-245 , 166-255 or 166-260 apply, the ownership tests in section 166-145 are also applied to the tested company as if, at the *ownership test time:


    (a) the persons who control, or are able to control, the voting power in the tested company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) that is carried by each *voting stake in the tested company mentioned in that section had not had that control; and


    (b) the persons who have the right to receive for their own benefit (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities):


    (i) any *dividends that the tested company may pay in respect of each *dividend stake in the tested company mentioned in that section; and

    (ii) any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of each *capital stake in the tested company mentioned in that section;
    had not had that right.

    SECTION 166-270   Single notional entity stakeholders taken to have minimum voting control, dividend rights and capital rights  


    Minimum control of voting power

    166-270(1)    
    If:


    (a) the *ownership test time is after the start of the *test period; and


    (b) a single notional entity mentioned in section 166-225 or 166-255 has voting power in a company; and


    (c) the voting power that the entity has at the ownership test time is greater than the voting power that the entity had at the start of the test period;

    then the entity is taken to have voting power in the company at the ownership test time only to the extent that it had it at the start of the test period.



    Minimum percentage of rights to dividends and capital

    166-270(2)    
    If:


    (a) the *ownership test time is after the start of the *test period; and


    (b) a single notional entity mentioned in section 166-225 or 166-255 has a percentage of rights to the *dividends or distributions of capital of a company; and


    (c) the percentage that the entity has rights to at the ownership test time is greater than the percentage (the lower percentage ) of the dividends or distributions of capital of the company that the entity had rights to at the start of the test period;

    then the entity is taken to have rights to the lower percentage of the dividends or distributions of capital at the ownership test time.



    Acquisition of tested company by new interposed entity - minimum control of voting power

    166-270(3)    
    If:


    (a) the *ownership test time is after the start of the *test period; and


    (b) at the start of the test period, a single notional entity mentioned in section 166-225 had voting power in a company (disregarding subsection 166-230(5) ); and


    (c) under subsection 166-230(5) , a new interposed entity is taken to have held that voting power at the start of the test period; and


    (d) at the ownership test time, the voting power in the company held indirectly by stakeholders covered by subsection 166-230(1) is greater than the voting power that the single notional entity had at the start of the test period;

    then the stakeholders referred to in paragraph (d) are, collectively, taken to have indirect voting power in the company at the ownership test time only to the extent that the single notional entity had it at the start of the test period.



    Acquisition of tested company by new interposed entity - minimum percentage of rights to dividends and capital

    166-270(4)    
    If:


    (a) the *ownership test time is after the start of the *test period; and


    (b) at the start of the test period, a single notional entity mentioned in section 166-225 had a percentage of rights to the *dividends or distributions of capital of a company (disregarding subsection 166-230(5) ); and


    (c) under subsection 166-230(5) , a new interposed entity is taken to have had those rights at the start of the test period; and


    (d) the percentage that stakeholders covered by subsection 166-230(1) have rights to indirectly at the ownership test time is greater than the percentage (the lower percentage ) of the dividends or distributions of capital of the company that the single notional entity had rights to at the start of the test period;

    then the stakeholders referred to in paragraph (d) are, collectively, taken to have indirect rights to the lower percentage of the dividends or distributions of capital at the ownership test time.


    SECTION 166-272   Same shares or interests to be held  


    Application

    166-272(1)    
    This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to a *voting stake, a *dividend stake or a *capital stake in the tested company held by one of the following entities (the stakeholder ):


    (a) a top interposed entity mentioned in section 166-230 (which is about indirect stakes of less than 10%);


    (b) a *widely held company mentioned in section 166-240 ;


    (c) an entity mentioned in subsection 166-245(2) (which is about stakes held by other entities);


    (d) a *depository entity mentioned in section 166-260 ;

    (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities).



    Exactly the same shares or interests must continue to be held

    166-272(2)    
    For the purpose of determining whether the tested company has satisfied a condition or whether a time is a changeover time or an alteration time in respect of the tested company:


    (a) a condition that has to be satisfied is not satisfied; or


    (b) a time that, apart from this subsection, would not be a changeover time or alteration time is taken to be a changeover time or alteration time, as the case may be;

    unless, at all relevant times:


    (c) the only *shares in the tested company that are taken into account are exactly the same shares and are held by the same persons; and


    (d) the only interests (including shares) in any other entity that is interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company that are taken into account are exactly the same interests and are held by the same persons.

    What happens in case of share splitting

    166-272(3)    
    If:


    (a) a particular *share (an old share ) in a company of which the stakeholder, or an entity interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company, is the holder at the start of the *test period is divided into 2 or more new shares during that period; and


    (b) the stakeholder or entity becomes the holder of each of the new shares immediately after the division takes place and remains the holder until the end of that period;

    the new shares are taken to be exactly the same shares as the old share.



    What happens in case of splitting of units in a unit trust

    166-272(4)    
    If:


    (a) a particular unit (an old unit ) in a unit trust of which the stakeholder, or an entity interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company, is the holder at the start of the *test period is divided into 2 or more new units during that period; and


    (b) the stakeholder or entity becomes the holder of each of the new units immediately after the division takes place and remains the holder until the end of that period;

    the new units are taken to be exactly the same units as the old unit.



    What happens in case of consolidation of shares

    166-272(5)    
    If:


    (a) a particular *share (an old share ) in a company of which the stakeholder, or an entity interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company, is the holder at the start of the *test period, and other shares (each of which is also called an old share ) in the company of which the stakeholder or entity is the holder at the start of that period, are consolidated into a new share during that period; and


    (b) the stakeholder or entity becomes the holder of the new share immediately after the consolidation takes place;

    the new share is taken to be exactly the same share as the old shares.



    What happens in case of consolidation of units in a unit trust

    166-272(6)    
    If:


    (a) a particular unit (an old unit ) in a unit trust of which the stakeholder, or an entity interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company, is the holder at the start of the *test period and other units (each of which is also called an old unit ) in the trust of which the stakeholder or entity is the holder at the start of that period are consolidated into a new unit during that period; and


    (b) the stakeholder or entity becomes the holder of the new unit immediately after the consolidation takes place;

    the new unit is taken to be exactly the same unit as the old units.



    Totals of shares or rights not affected

    166-272(7)    
    This section does not affect how *shares, and rights carried by shares, are counted for the purpose of determining:


    (a) the total voting power in the tested company; or


    (b) the total dividends that the tested company may pay; or


    (c) the total distributions of capital of the tested company.

    Conditions in section 166-145 may be treated as having been satisfied in certain circumstances

    166-272(8)    
    If any of the conditions in section 166-145 have not been satisfied, those conditions are taken to have been satisfied if:


    (a) they would have been satisfied except for the operation of subsection (2) of this section; and


    (b) the tested company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that less than 50% of:


    (i) the *tax loss; or

    (ii) the *notional loss; or

    (iii) the bad debt; or

    (iv) the unrealised net loss (within the meaning of section 165-115E );
    as the case requires, has been reflected in deductions, capital losses, or reduced assessable income, that occurred, or could occur in future, because of the happening of any *CGT event in relation to any *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests held in the tested company by the stakeholder, or an entity interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company, during the *test period.

    Subsection (8) not to apply for purpose of determining whether an alteration time has occurred

    166-272(9)    
    However, subsection (8) does not apply in relation to any of the conditions in section 166-145 in so far as those conditions have effect for the purpose of determining whether an alteration time (within the meaning of section 165-115L ) has occurred.

    Time of happening of CGT event

    166-272(10)    


    The happening of any *CGT event in relation to a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest in the tested company that results in the failure of the tested company to satisfy a condition in section 166-145 is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (8)(b), to have occurred during the *test period.

    166-272(11)    
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )


    When the rules in this Subdivision do not apply

    SECTION 166-275  

    166-275   Rules in this Subdivision intended to be concessional  
    A company is taken to have met the conditions in section 165-12 , paragraph 165-35(a) or section 165-123 , or a changeover time or an alteration time is taken not to have occurred in respect of a company, (as the case requires), if:


    (a) a *tracing rule modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 apply to the tested company in respect of a *voting stake, a *dividend stake or a *capital stake; and


    (b) the company fails the tests (whether at the time of applying the tracing rule or at another time); and


    (c) the company believes, on reasonable grounds, that if the tracing rule did not modify how the tests apply to the company in respect of that stake, it would not fail the tests.

    Example:

    11 people own shareholdings of 9% in the listed company. Under section 166-225 , one notional shareholder is deemed to hold all of those shareholdings. 2 of the people sell their shareholdings so that 9 of the original 11 people now own shareholdings of 11%. Without the rule in this section, the company would fail the ownership tests (as the rule in section 166-225 no longer applies).

    SECTION 166-280  Controlled test companies  

    166-280(1)    
    A *tracing rule does not modify how the ownership tests in section 166-145 apply to the tested company in respect of all or part of the voting power in the tested company, or all or some of the rights to *dividends of, or capital in, the tested company, if:


    (a) either:


    (i) an entity (the controlling entity ) directly holds that power or has those rights; or

    (ii) an entity (the controlling entity ) indirectly holds that power or has those rights through one or more interposed entities; and


    (b) the tested company is sufficiently influenced (within the meaning of paragraph 318(6)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) by the controlling entity.

    Note:

    However, a tracing rule can modify how the ownership tests in section 166-145 apply to the tested company in respect of voting power or dividend or capital rights held by entities other than controlling entities.


    166-280(2)    
    A *tracing rule does not modify how the ownership tests in section 166-145 apply to the tested company in respect of all or part of the voting power in the tested company if:


    (a) the tested company is a *widely held company; and


    (b) that voting power:


    (i) is more than 25% of the total voting power in the tested company and is controlled (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) by a natural person, together with his or her *associates; or

    (ii) is more than 50% of the total voting power in the tested company and is controlled (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) by a trustee or company, together with its associates.

    Division 167 - Companies whose shares carry unequal rights to dividends, capital distributions or voting power  

    Guide to Division 167  

    SECTION 167-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division modifies the way conditions relating to this Part apply to companies whose shares:

  • (a) do not all carry the same rights to dividends or capital distributions; or
  • (b) do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.
  • Subdivision 167-A - Rights to dividends or capital distributions  

    Guide to Subdivision 167-A

    SECTION 167-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    Companies whose shares do not all carry the same rights to dividends or capital distributions may test the possession of those rights similarly to companies whose shares are all of a single class with the same rights.

    SECTION 167-7   Simplified outline of this Subdivision  


    If a condition of the continuity of ownership test cannot be worked out for a company:

  • (a) because of its unequal share structure; or
  • (b) because of a holding company ' s unequal share structure;
  • an entity can choose to reconsider that condition in up to 3 ways.

    The first way involves disregarding debt interests.

    The second way involves disregarding debt interests and secondary share classes.

    The third way involves disregarding those shares, and treating the remaining shares as carrying certain percentages of the rights to receive dividends and capital distributions.

    The second way can only be tried after the first way, while the third way can only be tried after the second way.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    167-10 When this Subdivision applies
    167-15 First way - disregard debt interests
    167-20 Second way - also disregard secondary share classes
    167-25 Third way - treat remaining shares as having fixed rights to dividends and capital distributions
    167-30 Fixing rights if practicable to work out market values
    167-35 Fixing rights if impracticable to work out market values etc.
    167-40 The valuing times for conditions listed in subsection 167-10(1)

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 167-10   When this Subdivision applies  


    When this Subdivision applies

    167-10(1)    
    This Subdivision applies in relation to a company if:


    (a) as described in the following table, a condition (the unsatisfied condition ) cannot be worked out for the company for a particular period (the test period ); and


    (b) at one or more times during the test period:


    (i) the company; or

    (ii) a company that has a *shareholding interest in it;
    (an unequally structuredcompany ) has an *unequal share structure.


    Conditions that can be reconsidered under this Subdivision
    Item Column 1
    Each of the following provisions contains a condition:
    Column 2
    that cannot be worked out for:
    1 (a) subsection 165-12(3) or (4) ; a period that is all or part of the period to which that provision relates
      (b) paragraph 165-37(1)(b) or (c);
      (c) subsection 165-123(3) or (4) ;
      (d) paragraph 175-10(3)(b) or (c), 175-45(3)(b) or (c) or 175-85(3)(b) or (c);
      (e) subparagraph (b)(ii) or (iii) of the definition of eligible Division 166 company in subsection 995-1(1)

    Note:

    Each of these conditions is about rights to the company ' s dividends or capital distributions.


    167-10(2)    
    This Subdivision also applies in relation to a company if:


    (a) as described in the following table, a condition (the unsatisfied condition ) cannot be worked out for the company for a particular time (the test time ); and


    (b) at the test time, the company, or a company that has a *shareholding interest in it, (an unequally structured company ) has an *unequal share structure.


    Conditions that can be reconsidered under this Subdivision
    Item Column 1
    Each of the following provisions contains a condition:
    Column 2
    that cannot be worked out for:
    1 (a) paragraph 165-115C(1)(b) or (c) or 165-115L(1)(b) or (c); a time that is the time, or one of the times, to which that provision relates
      (b) subparagraph 165-115X(1)(b)(ii) or (iii);
      (c) paragraph 165-115Z(1)(b) or (c);
      (d) subsection 166-145(3) or (4) ;
      (e) subparagraph 166-175(1)(e)(ii) or (iii);
      (f) paragraph 166-225(1)(b) or (c);
      (g) subparagraph 166-230(1)(a)(ii) or (iii);
      (h) paragraph 166-240(1)(b) or (c);
      (i) subparagraph 166-255(1)(e)(ii) or (iii) or 166-260(1)(e)(ii) or (iii);
      (j) paragraph 166-260(3)(b) or (c) or 166-270(2)(c) ;
      (k) paragraph 170-260(3)(b) or (c) or 170-265(2)(b) or (c)

    Note 1:

    Each of these conditions is about rights to the company ' s dividends or capital distributions.

    Note 2:

    If a condition cannot be worked out for several of the times to which the provision relates, apply this Subdivision separately for each of those times.



    Meaning of unequal share structure

    167-10(3)    
    A company has an unequal share structure at a particular time if, at that time:


    (a) the company ' s *shares do not all carry the same rights to *dividends, or capital distributions, of the company; or


    (b) some or all of the company ' s shares carry discretionary rights to dividends, or capital distributions, of the company; or


    (c) the company is a *co-operative company that has *on issue one or more interests (other than shares) in the company ' s capital.

    SECTION 167-15   First way - disregard debt interests  

    167-15(1)    
    The unsatisfied condition may be reconsidered by disregarding any *debt interests in each unequally structured company.

    167-15(2)    
    The way an entity prepares its *income tax return is sufficient evidence of it choosing to work out the unsatisfied condition under subsection (1).

    SECTION 167-20   Second way - also disregard secondary share classes  

    167-20(1)    
    This section applies in relation to each unequally structured company if:


    (a) despite section 167-15 , the unsatisfied condition cannot be worked out; and


    (b) on the last day of the test period or at the test time (as appropriate), there is *on issue in that company one or more classes of *shares (the secondary share classes ) other than:


    (i) the class or classes of ordinary or common shares that represent the majority of that company ' s value; and

    (ii) *debt interests; and


    (c) it is reasonable to conclude that the total *market value of the secondary share classes does not exceed 25% of the total market value of all of that company ' s shares (other than debt interests); and


    (d) for one or more of the secondary share classes, it is reasonable to conclude that the market value of each of them does not exceed 10% of the total market value of all of that company ' s shares (other than debt interests).

    Note:

    This section can apply separately for each unequally structured company.


    167-20(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), use *market values on the last day of the test period, or at the test time, (as appropriate).

    167-20(3)    
    The unsatisfied condition may be reconsidered by disregarding:


    (a) those of the secondary share classes that, under paragraph (1)(d), caused this section to apply; and


    (b) any *debt interests in that company.

    167-20(4)    
    The way an entity prepares its *income tax return is sufficient evidence of it choosing to work out the unsatisfied condition under subsection (3).

    SECTION 167-25   Third way - treat remaining shares as having fixed rights to dividends and capital distributions  


    When this section applies

    167-25(1)    
    This section applies if, despite sections 167-15 and 167-20 , the unsatisfied condition cannot be worked out for the test period or test time (as appropriate).

    How to fix rights to dividends and capital distributions

    167-25(2)    
    The unsatisfied condition may be reconsidered by applying subsections (3) and (4) to each unequally structured company. When doing this for an unsatisfied condition listed in subsection 167-10(1) , assume:


    (a) that the test period consists only of the valuing times worked out under section 167-40 ; and


    (b) that each of those valuing times is a test time.

    167-25(3)    
    Firstly, disregard any *debt interests in that company and any of its *shares that can be disregarded under subsection 167-20(3) .

    167-25(4)    
    Secondly, treat each of that company ' s remaining *shares *on issue at the test time as having at that time the percentage of the rights to receive *dividends, and capital distributions, worked out either:


    (a) under section 167-30 ; or


    (b) under section 167-35 if:


    (i) it is not reasonably practicable to work out the market values of each of those remaining shares; or

    (ii) the sum of the *market values of all of those remaining shares is nil.
    Note:

    The remaining shares are those remaining after disregarding the shares mentioned in subsection (3).



    Evidence of a choice under this section

    167-25(5)    
    The way an entity prepares its *income tax return is sufficient evidence of it choosing to work out the unsatisfied condition under this section.

    SECTION 167-30  

    167-30   Fixing rights if practicable to work out market values  


    Each remaining *share is treated at the test time as carrying the following percentage of the rights to receive *dividends, and capital distributions, from the company:


     
    *Share ' s *market value
    ×   100
      Sum of market values of all of the remaining shares in the company

    where market value is worked out at the test time.

    SECTION 167-35   Fixing rights if impracticable to work out market values etc.  

    167-35(1)    
    Each remaining *share is treated at the test time as carrying such a percentage of the rights to receive *dividends, and capital distributions, from the company as is reasonable worked out:


    (a) at the test time; and


    (b) having regard to the purpose of the unsatisfied condition.

    167-35(2)    
    In working out what is reasonable for subsection (1), have regard to the following:


    (a) the company ' s *constitution;


    (b) any agreements between the company and either or both of the following:


    (i) any or all of the shareholders in the company;

    (ii) any or all of the *associates of a shareholder in the company;


    (c) any statement by the company of its policy in paying *dividends or making capital distributions;


    (d) the ability of an entity to control (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) how the company pays dividends or makes capital distributions;


    (e) how the company has previously paid dividends or made capital distributions;


    (f) whether all classes of *shares carry substantially the same rights to receive dividends and capital distributions;


    (g) the principle that:


    (i) a *tax loss or bad debt should only be deductible; and

    (ii) a *net capital loss should only be applied;
    if a majority of the persons entitled to the benefits of dividend and capital distributions of the company is maintained.

    SECTION 167-40   The valuing times for conditions listed in subsection 167-10(1)  

    167-40(1)    
    For the purposes of subsection 167-25(2) , the valuing times for the test period are:


    (a) the time the test period starts; and


    (b) the time just before, and the time just after, any of the following events that happen during the test period:


    (i) the issue of *shares of a class of remaining shares;

    (ii) the variation of rights attached to any remaining shares to receive *dividends or capital distributions;

    (iii) the redemption or cancellation of any remaining shares; and


    (c) the time the test period ends.

    167-40(2)    
    For paragraph (1)(b), disregard a time if it is outside the test period.

    Subdivision 167-B - Voting power  

    Guide to Subdivision 167-B

    SECTION 167-75   What this Subdivision is about  


    Companies whose shares:

  • (a) do not all carry the same voting rights; or
  • (b) do not carry all of the voting rights in the company;
  • may test the possession of voting rights similarly to companies whose shares are all of a single class with the same rights.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    167-80 When this Subdivision applies
    167-85 Different method for working out voting power
    167-90 Dual listed companies

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 167-80   When this Subdivision applies  

    167-80(1)    
    For the purposes of this Part, voting power in a company at one or more times can be worked out under section 167-85 if:


    (a) the company ' s *shares do not all, at those times, carry the same voting rights for all matters affecting the company; or


    (b) the company ' s shares do not carry all of the voting rights in the company;

    whether this is because of the company ' s *constitution, an *arrangement or some other reason.

    Note:

    Disregard dual listed company voting shares (see section 167-90 ).


    167-80(2)    
    Further, if those times are consecutive times during a period, the voting power in the company can be worked out under section 167-85 as if that period consists only of:


    (a) the time that period starts; and


    (b) each later time (if any) during that period when there is a change in the maximum number of votes any entity could cast on a poll described in paragraph 167-85(1)(a) or (b).

    SECTION 167-85   Different method for working out voting power  

    167-85(1)    
    An entity may choose whether voting power in the company at a particular time is worked out solely by reference to:


    (a) the maximum number of votes that could be cast on a poll on the election of a director of the company, if such a poll were to be held at that time; or


    (b) the maximum number of votes that could be cast on a poll on an amendment to the company ' s *constitution, other than an amendment altering:


    (i) the rights carried by any of the company ' s *shares; or

    (ii) other forms of voting power in the company;
    if such a poll were to be held at that time.

    167-85(2)    
    The way the entity prepares its *income tax return is sufficient evidence of it making a choice under subsection (1).

    SECTION 167-90  

    167-90   Dual listed companies  


    For the purposes of this Subdivision, disregard *shares that are *dual listed company voting shares.

    Division 170 - Treatment of certain company groups for income tax purposes  

    Subdivision 170-A - Transfer of tax losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies  

    Guide to Subdivision 170-A

    SECTION 170-1   What this Subdivision is about  


    A company can transfer a surplus amount of its tax loss to another company so that the other company can deduct the amount in the income year of the transfer. One of the companies must be an Australian branch of a foreign bank, and both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    170-5 Basic principles for transferring tax losses
    Effect of transferring a tax loss
    170-10 When a company can transfer a tax loss
    170-15 Income company is taken to have incurred transferred loss
    170-20 Who can deduct transferred loss
    170-25 Tax treatment of consideration for transferred tax loss
    Conditions for transfer
    170-30 Companies must be in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group etc.
    170-32 Tax loss incurred by the loss company because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A
    170-33 Alternative test of relations between the loss company and other companies
    170-35 The loss company
    170-40 The income company
    170-42 If the income company has become the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group
    170-45 Maximum amount that can be transferred
    170-50 Transfer by written agreement
    170-55 Losses must be transferred in order they are incurred
    170-60 Income company cannot transfer transferred tax loss
    Effect of agreement to transfer more than can be transferred
    170-65 Agreement transfers as much as can be transferred
    170-70 Amendment of assessments
    Australian permanent establishments of foreign financial entities
    170-75 Treatment like Australian branches of foreign banks

    SECTION 170-5   Basic principles for transferring tax losses  

    170-5(1)    
    A company can transfer a tax loss to another company so that the other company can deduct it in the income year of the transfer.

    170-5(2)    


    Both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group. There are other eligibility requirements that they must also satisfy.

    170-5(2A)    


    One of the companies must be an Australian branch of a foreign bank. The other company must be:


    (a) the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; or


    (b) not a member of a consolidatable group.

    Note:

    This Subdivision applies to Australian permanent establishments of foreign entities that are financial entities in the same way as it applies to Australian branches of foreign banks. See section 170-75 .


    170-5(3)    
    The transferred loss must be " surplus " in the sense that the transferring company cannot use it because there is not enough assessable income to offset it. The other company must have enough assessable income to offset the transferred tax loss.

    170-5(4)    
    Neither company must be prevented from deducting the loss by Division 165 or 175 .

    Note:

    Division 165 deals with the income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company. Division 175 deals with using a company ' s tax losses to avoid income tax.


    170-5(5)    
    The tax loss is transferred by an agreement between the 2 companies.

    170-5(6)    
    The tax loss can be transferred in the same year as it is incurred. In that case different rules apply.


    Effect of transferring a tax loss

    SECTION 170-10   When a company can transfer a tax loss  

    170-10(1)    
    A company (the loss company ) can transfer an amount of its *tax loss for an income year (the loss year ) to another company (the income company ) if the conditions in this Subdivision are met.

    170-10(2)    
    The amount transferred can be the whole or part of the *tax loss.

    Note:

    A PDF cannot transfer a tax loss, except one for a period before it became a PDF: see section 195-10 .


    SECTION 170-15   Income company is taken to have incurred transferred loss  

    170-15(1)    


    If an amount of a *tax loss is transferred, the amount is taken to be a tax loss incurred by the *income company in the *loss year.

    170-15(2)    


    However, if the *loss year is the same as the income year of the transfer, the *income company is taken to have incurred the *tax loss in the income year before the loss year.
    Note:

    This rule is needed because Division 36 allows a tax loss to be deducted only if it was incurred in an earlier income year.


    170-15(3)    


    Despite subsection (1), if the *tax loss is transferred because the conditions in section 170-32 are met, the *income company is taken to have incurred the tax loss for the income year for which the first prior transferor mentioned in that section incurred the tax loss.

    170-15(4)    


    Despite subsection (1), if the *tax loss is transferred because the condition in subsection 170-42(4) is met, the *income company is taken to have incurred the tax loss for the income year for which that subsection assumes the income company incurred the tax loss.

    SECTION 170-20   Who can deduct transferred loss  

    170-20(1)    


    If an amount of a *tax loss is transferred, the *income company can deduct the amount in accordance with section 36-17 (which is about how to deduct a tax loss), but only for the income year of the income company for which the amount is transferred. That income year is called the deduction year .

    170-20(2)    


    The *loss company can no longer * utilise the transferred amount and is taken not to have incurred the *tax loss to the extent of that amount.

    SECTION 170-25   Tax treatment of consideration for transferred tax loss  

    170-25(1)    
    If the *loss company receives any consideration from the *income company for the amount of the *tax loss:


    (a) so much of the consideration as is given for the amount of the tax loss is neither assessable income nor exempt income of the loss company; and


    (b) a *capital gain does not accrue to the loss company because of the receipt of the consideration.

    Note:

    However, the consideration may affect how section 170-210 modifies the cost base of direct and indirect interests in the loss company.


    170-25(2)    
    If the *income company gives any consideration to the *loss company for the amount of the *tax loss:


    (a) the income company cannot deduct the amount or value of the consideration; and


    (b) the income company does not incur a *capital loss because of the giving of the consideration.

    Note:

    However, the consideration may affect how section 170-215 modifies the cost base of direct and indirect interests in the income company.


    Conditions for transfer

    SECTION 170-30   Companies must be in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group etc.  

    170-30(1)    


    Both companies must be in existence during at least part of each of the following income years:


    (a) the *loss year; and


    (b) the *deduction year; and


    (c) any intervening income year.

    Note:

    In some cases, this condition may not apply, or may be taken to be met even if it is not actually met. See sections 170-32 and 170-33 .


    170-30(2)    


    Also, both companies must be members of the same *wholly-owned group during the whole or part of those income years when both companies were in existence.
    Note:

    In some cases, this condition may not apply, or may be taken to be met even if it is not actually met. See sections 170-32 and 170-33 .


    170-30(3)    


    One of the companies must be an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) of a *foreign bank.
    Note:

    The Australian branch can be taken to be a separate entity from the foreign bank for this Subdivision. See Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    170-30(4)    


    The other company must be covered by an item of this table.


    The other company
    Item The other company must: At this time:
    1 Be the *head company of a *consolidated group The end of the *deduction year or, if the company ceases to be in existence during the deduction year, just before the cessation
    2 Be the *head company of a *MEC group The end of the *deduction year or, if the group ceases to exist during the deduction year because the company ceases to be in existence, just before the cessation
    3 Not be a *member of a *consolidatable group The end of the *deduction year or, if the company ceases to be in existence during the deduction year, just before the cessation


    SECTION 170-32   Tax loss incurred by the loss company because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A  


    When the conditions in this section apply

    170-32(1)    
    The conditions in this section apply instead of the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) if:


    (a) the *income company is an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) of a *foreign bank; and


    (b) the *loss company incurred the *tax loss because of one or more transfers of the tax loss under Subdivision 707-A .

    Conditions

    170-32(2)    
    Each transferor ( prior transferor ) of the *tax loss under Subdivision 707-A must have been a company.

    170-32(3)    
    It must have been possible to meet the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) in relation to the *loss company and the *income company assuming:


    (a) the *loss year were so much of the income year in which the *tax loss was transferred to the loss company under Subdivision 707-A as occurred after the transfer; and


    (b) so much (if any) of the *deduction year as occurred before the transfer were disregarded.

    170-32(4)    


    The *income company and each prior transferor must both be in existence during at least part of each of these periods:


    (a) the period consisting of:


    (i) if the prior transferor incurred the *tax loss apart from Subdivision 707-A - the *loss year; or

    (ii) if the prior transferor incurred the tax loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A (other than a transfer from the prior transferor to itself) - so much of the income year in which the transfer occurred as was after the transfer (but before any later transfer of the loss from the prior transferor under that Subdivision);


    (b) so much of the income year during which the tax loss was transferred under Subdivision 707-A from the prior transferor to another company as occurs before the transfer (but after the start of the period described in paragraph (a));


    (c) any intervening income year.


    170-32(5)    


    The *income company must be a member of the same *wholly-owned group as each prior transferor during the whole or part of the periods described in subsection (4) for the prior transferor when both were in existence.

    SECTION 170-33   Alternative test of relations between the loss company and other companies  

    170-33(1)    
    The conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) are taken to be met in relation to the *loss company and the *income company if:


    (a) the loss company is an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) of a *foreign bank; and


    (b) the income company is covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 170-30(4) (because the company is the *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group at the time described in that item); and


    (c) the relevant circumstances in this section exist.

    Circumstances

    170-33(2)    
    One circumstance is that there is another company (the first link company ) in relation to which all these conditions are met:


    (a) the first link company became a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group after the start of the *loss year but before the time described in the item of the table in subsection 170-30(4) that covers the *income company;


    (b) the *tax loss could have been transferred from the *loss company to the first link company under this Subdivision (apart from subsection 170-30(4) and this section) for a *deduction year consisting of the *trial year for the first link company becoming a subsidiary member of that group had:


    (i) the first link company continued to be *in existence as a separate entity (rather than being part of the head company of that group) when it was a subsidiary member of that group; and

    (ii) the trial year not started before the start of the loss year; and

    (iii) the first link company had enough assessable income for the trial year;


    (c) the tax loss would have been incurred by the income company because of one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A assuming the tax loss had been made by the first link company (apart from that Subdivision) for the loss year.

    170-33(3)    
    If the condition in paragraph (2)(c) could be met only if there had been a transfer described in that paragraph involving a company other than the first link company and the *income company, another circumstance is that the other company and the *loss company were *in existence and members of the same *wholly-owned group for the period:


    (a) starting when the *tax loss would have been transferred under Subdivision 707-A to the other company as described in that paragraph; and


    (b) ending when the tax loss would have been transferred under Subdivision 707-A from the other company as described in that paragraph.

    170-33(4)    
    It does not matter whether or not any of the transfers mentioned in subsection (3) would have involved the first link company or the *income company as well as the other company.

    170-33(5)    
    Another circumstance is that the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) would have been met for the *loss company and the *income company assuming:


    (a) the *loss year consisted of the part of the income year in which the *tax loss would have been transferred to the income company under Subdivision 707-A as described in paragraph (2)(c) occurring after the time the transfer would have occurred; and


    (b) so much (if any) of the *deduction year as occurred before the time the transfer would have occurred were disregarded.


    SECTION 170-35   The loss company  

    170-35(1)    
    The *loss company:


    (a) must be an Australian resident and not a *prescribed dual resident; and


    (b) must not be a *dual resident investment company in either the *loss year or the *deduction year.


    170-35(2)    
    If the *loss year and the *deduction year are the same, it must be the case that the *loss company was not required to calculate the *tax loss:


    (a) under section 165-70 (because of a change in ownership or control); or


    (b) under section 175-35 (because of injected income or deductions).

    170-35(3)    
    Also, it must be the case that neither Subdivision 165-A nor Subdivision 175-A would have prevented the *loss company from deducting the *tax loss in the *deduction year if it had hadenough assessable income (including *assessable film income) to offset the tax loss.

    Note 1:

    Subdivision 165-A deals with the deductibility of a company's tax loss for an earlier income year if there has been a change in the ownership or control of the company in the loss year or the income year. Subdivision 175-A is about the Commissioner preventing a company from getting certain tax benefits through its unused tax losses.

    Note 2:

    Division 707 affects the operation of Subdivision 165-A if the loss company incurred the tax loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A .


    SECTION 170-40   The income company  

    170-40(1)    
    The *income company must be an Australian resident and not a *prescribed dual resident.


    170-40(2)    
    It must not be prevented by Division 165 or 175 from deducting the transferred amount in the *deduction year. Those Divisions do not apply to the *income company if the *loss year and the *deduction year are the same.

    Note 1:

    Division 165 deals with the income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company. Division 175 deals with using a company's tax losses to avoid income tax.

    Note 2:

    The condition in subsection (2) may not apply in some cases. See section 170-42 .


    SECTION 170-42   If the income company has become the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group  

    170-42(1)    
    The condition in subsection (2) of this section applies to the *income company instead of the condition in subsection 170-40(2) if the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) are met in relation to the *loss company and the income company apart from section 170-33 and either:


    (a) both these circumstances exist:


    (i) after the start of the *loss year butbefore the relevant time described in subsection 170-30(4) , the income company became the *head company of a *consolidated group or of a *MEC group that came into existence after the start of the loss year;

    (ii) the loss year and *deduction year are not the same; or


    (b) all these circumstances exist:


    (i) the income company is, at the relevant time described in subsection 170-30(4) , the head company of a MEC group;

    (ii) before that time but after the end of the loss year, the MEC group was involved in an application event described in section 719-300 (but not covered by subsection 719-300(4) or (5));

    (iii) the income company would be taken under section 719-305 to have transferred losses to itself under Subdivision 707-A , assuming it had made losses while head company of the group or of a consolidated group involved in the event;

    (iv) the MEC group or consolidated group came into existence before the start of the *loss year.
    Note:

    An application event involves either expanding an existing MEC group by including extra eligible tier-1 companies of the top company for the group or creating a MEC group because more companies become eligible tier-1 companies of the top company of which the head company of a consolidated group is an eligible tier-1 company.


    170-42(2)    
    The *income company must have been able to deduct the *tax loss in the *deduction year assuming that it had incurred the tax loss for the *loss year.

    170-42(3)    
    The condition in subsection (4) of this section applies to the *income company instead of the condition in subsection 170-40(2) if the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) are met in relation to the *loss company and the income company because of section 170-33 .

    170-42(4)    
    The *income company must have been able to deduct the *tax loss in the *deduction year assuming that it had incurred the tax loss, for the income year in which the loss would have been transferred to it as described in paragraph 170-33(2)(c) , because of one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A described in that paragraph.


    SECTION 170-45   Maximum amount that can be transferred  
    Loss company can only transfer what it cannot use itself

    170-45(1)    


    The amount transferred cannot exceed what would be the amount of the * loss company ' s * unutilised * tax loss at the end of the * deduction year if the loss company utilised the tax loss to the greatest extent possible.

    Transferred loss must not exceed what the income company can use

    170-45(2)    
    The amount transferred also cannot exceed the amount worked out as follows: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Add together the *income company ' s assessable income and *net exempt income (if any) for the *deduction year.


    Step 2.

    Subtract the *income company ' s deductions for the *deduction year, except deductions for amounts of *tax losses transferred to the income company (by the *loss company or any other company).


    Step 3.

    Subtract the *income company ' s deductions for the *deduction year for amounts of *tax losses transferred to the income company (by the *loss company or any other company) by agreements made before the agreement by which the first amount is transferred.

    Example:

    In the deduction year:

  • • the income company has assessable income of $60,000, net exempt income of $10,000 and deductions of $25,000 (apart from the transferred loss); and
  • • another company, being a member of the same wholly-owned group as the income company, transferred a tax loss of $15,000 to the income company; and
  • • the loss company incurred a tax loss of $50,000.
  • Of the $50,000 loss, the loss company can transfer no more than $30,000 ($60,000 + $10,000 − $25,000 − $15,000) to the income company.


    170-45(3)    
    Subsection (2) does not apply if the *tax loss is a *film loss. In that case, the amount transferred also cannot exceed the amount worked out as follows: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Add together the *income company ' s *net assessable film income and *net exempt film income (if any) for the *deduction year.


    Step 2.

    Subtract the *income company ' s deductions for the *deduction year for amounts of *film losses transferred to the income company (by the *loss company or any other company) by agreements made before the agreement by which the first amount is transferred.


    170-45(4)    


    Subsections (2) and (3) do not apply if the transfer occurs because either or both of the conditions in subsections 170-42(2) and (4) are met. In that case, the amount transferred also cannot exceed the amount worked out as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Identify each *bundle of losses that, on the assumption in subsection 170-42(2) or (4) (as appropriate), would have included the *tax loss or *film loss (as appropriate).

    Note 1:

    There will be 2 or more bundles of losses identified if both of the conditions in subsections 170-42(2) and (4) are met.

    Note 2:

    There will be more than 1 bundle of losses identified on the basis of the assumption in paragraph 170-42(4) if the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) are met in relation to the loss company and the income company because of multiple applications of section 170-33 each involving a different first link company.


    Step 2.

    For each *bundle identified, work out how much of the *tax loss or *film loss (as appropriate) the *income company would have been able to deduct in the *deduction year assuming that:

  • (a) the loss could have been deducted in that year only after the deduction in that year of any other losses of that *sort that would have been included in the bundle, other than losses (the transferable losses ) that could be transferred from the *loss company to the income company for that year; and
  • (b) if the bundle would have included 2 or more transferable losses of that sort - those losses could have been deducted only in the order in which the loss company incurred them.
  • Note 1:

    If the assumption in subsection 170-42(2) is relevant to the bundle, it would have included losses incurred by the income company and transferred (or taken to be transferred) to the company (from itself) under Subdivision 707-A .

    Note 2:

    If the assumption in paragraph 170-42(4) is relevant to the bundle, it would have included losses actually incurred by the first link company and transferred (by one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A ) to the income company.


    Step 3.

    Total every result of step 2 for the *tax loss or *film loss (as appropriate).


    SECTION 170-50   Transfer by written agreement  

    170-50(1)    
    The transfer must be made by a written agreement between the *loss company and the *income company.

    170-50(2)    
    The agreement must:


    (a) specify the income year of the transfer (which may be earlier than the income year in which the agreement is made); and


    (b) specify the amount of the *tax loss being transferred; and


    (c) be signed by the public officer of each company; and


    (d) be made on or before the day of lodgement of the *income company's *income tax return for the *deduction year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows.

    Note:

    The agreement will usually be made in the next income year after the one for which the income company will deduct the loss.


    SECTION 170-55   Losses must be transferred in order they are incurred  

    170-55(1)    
    If the *loss company has 2 or more *tax losses (other than *film losses) that it can transfer in the *deduction year, it can transfer them only in the order in which it incurred them.

    170-55(2)    
    If the *loss company has 2 or more *film losses that it can transfer in the *deduction year, it can transfer them only in the order in which it incurred them.

    170-55(3)    


    If:


    (a) the *loss company has 2 or more *tax losses, or 2 or more *film losses, it can transfer for the *deduction year; and


    (b) it incurred at least one of those losses apart from Subdivision 707-A and at least one of those losses because of a transfer under that Subdivision;

    it can transfer under this Subdivision the losses it incurred because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A only after transferring under this Subdivision the losses it incurred apart from that Subdivision.


    170-55(4)    


    For the purposes of subsection (3), treat a loss incurred by the company both apart from that Subdivision and because of a transfer under that Subdivision as a loss incurred because of a transfer under that Subdivision.

    170-55(5)    


    Subsections (1) and (2) have effect subject to subsection (3).

    SECTION 170-60  

    170-60   Income company cannot transfer transferred tax loss  
    The *income company cannot transfer an amount of a *tax loss transferred to it, or any part of the amount.

    Effect of agreement to transfer more than can be transferred

    SECTION 170-65   Agreement transfers as much as can be transferred  

    170-65(1)    
    If the amount specified in an agreement exceeds the maximum amount that the *loss company can transfer to the *income company in the *deduction year, only that maximum amount is taken to have been transferred.

    170-65(2)    
    One reason why an agreement might specify more than can be transferred is that an assessment has been amended since the agreement.

    SECTION 170-70  

    170-70   Amendment of assessments  
    The Commissioner may amend an assessment to disallow a deduction for a transferred amount of a *tax loss:


    (a) if the agreement to transfer the tax loss is ineffective because the *loss company did not actually incur the loss; or


    (b) to the extent that section 170-65 reduces the transferred amount of a tax loss because the loss company did not actually incur some of it.

    The Commissioner may do so despite section 170 (Amendment of assessments) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Australian permanent establishments of foreign financial entities

    SECTION 170-75   Treatment like Australian branches of foreign banks  

    170-75(1)    
    The object of this section is to let *tax losses be transferred under this Subdivision to and from *Australian permanent establishments of *foreign entities that are *financial entities in the same way as tax losses can be transferred to and from Australian branches of *foreign banks.

    170-75(2)    
    This Subdivision (except this section) applies to an *Australian permanent establishment of a *foreign entity that is a *financial entity in the same way as this Subdivision applies to an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) of a *foreign bank.


    Subdivision 170-B - Transfer of net capital losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies  

    SECTION 170-101   What this Subdivision is about  


    A company can transfer a surplus amount of its net capital loss to another company so that the other company can apply the amount in working out its net capital gain for the income year of the transfer. One of the companies must be an Australian branch of a foreign bank, and both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group.

    SECTION 170-105   Basic principles for transferring a net capital loss  

    170-105(1)    
    A company can transfer a net capital loss (except a net capital loss from collectables) to another company so that the other company can apply it in working out its net capital gain for the income year of the transfer.

    170-105(2)    
    Both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group. There are other eligibility requirements that they must also satisfy.

    170-105(2A)    


    One of the companies must be an Australian branch of a foreign bank. The other company must be:


    (a) the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; or


    (b) not a member of a consolidatable group.

    Note:

    This Subdivision applies to Australian permanent establishments of foreign entities that are financial entities in the same way as it applies to Australian branches of foreign banks. See section 170-174 .


    170-105(3)    
    The transferred loss must be " surplus " in the sense that, for the income year of the transfer, the transferring company does not have enough capital gains against which to apply it. The other company must have enough capital gains against which to apply it.

    170-105(4)    


    (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)

    170-105(5)    
    Neither company must be prevented by Subdivision 165-CA or 175-CA from applying the loss in working out its net capital gain for the income year of the transfer.

    Note:

    Subdivision 165-CA deals with the consequences of changing ownership or control of a company. Subdivision 175-CA deals with using a company ' s net capital losses to avoid income tax.


    170-105(6)    
    The net capital loss is transferred by an agreement between the 2 companies.

    170-105(7)    
    The net capital loss can be transferred in the same year as it is made. In that case different rules apply.


    170-105(8)    


    The provisions of Subdivision 170-C (so far as they relate to the transfer of net capital losses) are to be disregarded in applying the provisions of this Subdivision where the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-150 was made before 22 February 1999.

    Effect of transferring a net capital loss

    SECTION 170-110   When a company can transfer a net capital loss  

    170-110(1)    
    A company (the loss company ) can transfer an amount of its *net capital loss for an income year (the capital loss year ) to another company (the gain company ) if the conditions in this Subdivision are met.

    170-110(2)    
    The amount transferred can be the whole or part of the *net capital loss.

    Note:

    A PDF cannot transfer a net capital loss, except one for a period before it became a PDF: see section 195-30 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 .


    SECTION 170-115   Who can apply transferred loss  

    170-115(1)    
    If an amount of a *net capital loss is transferred, the gain company can apply the amount in working out its *net capital gain, but only for the income year of the gain company for which the amount is transferred. That income year is called the application year .

    Note:

    A company ' s net capital gain or net capital loss for an income year is usually worked out under section 102-5 or 102-10 .


    170-115(2)    


    The loss company can no longer * utilise the transferred amount and is taken not to have made the *net capital loss to the extent of that amount.

    170-115(3)    


    Despite subsection (1), if the *net capital loss is transferred because the conditions in section 170-132 are met, the gain company is taken to have made the net capital loss for the income year for which the first prior transferor mentioned in that section made the net capital loss.

    170-115(4)    


    Despite subsection (1), if the *net capital loss is transferred because the condition in subsection 170-142(4) is met, the gain company is taken to have made the net capital loss for the income year for which that subsection assumes the gain company made the net capital loss.

    SECTION 170-120   Gain company is taken to have made transferred loss  

    170-120(1)    
    If an amount of a *net capital loss is transferred, the amount is taken to be a *net capital loss of the gain company for the capital loss year.

    170-120(2)    
    However, if the capital loss year is the same as the application year, the amount is taken to be a *capital loss of the gain company for the application year.


    SECTION 170-125   Tax treatment of consideration for transferred tax loss  

    170-125(1)    
    If the loss company receives consideration from the gain company for the transferred amount:


    (a) the consideration is neither assessable income nor *exempt income of the loss company; and


    (b) the loss company does not make a *capital gain because of receiving the consideration.

    Note:

    However, the consideration may affect how section 170-220 modifies the cost base of direct and indirect interests in the loss company.


    170-125(2)    
    If the gain company gives consideration to the loss company for the transferred amount:


    (a) the gain company cannot deduct the consideration; and


    (b) the gain company does not make a *capital loss because of giving the consideration.

    Note:

    However, the consideration may affect how section 170-225 modifies the cost base of direct and indirect interests in the gain company.


    Conditions for transfer

    SECTION 170-130   Companies must be in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group etc.  

    170-130(1)    


    Both companies must be in existence during at least part of each of the following income years:


    (a) the capital loss year; and


    (b) the application year; and


    (c) any intervening income year.

    Note:

    In some cases, this condition may not apply, or may be taken to be met even if it is not actually met. See sections 170-132 and 170-133 .


    170-130(2)    


    Also, both companies must be members of the same *wholly-owned group at all times during those income years when both companies were in existence.
    Note:

    In some cases, this condition may not apply, or may be taken to be met even if it is not actually met. See sections 170-132 and 170-133 .


    170-130(3)    


    One of the companies must be an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) of a *foreign bank.
    Note:

    The Australian branch can be taken to be a separate entity from the foreign bank for this Subdivision. See Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    170-130(4)    


    The other company must be covered by an item of this table.


    The other company
    Item The other company must: At this time:
    1 Be the *head company of a *consolidated group The end of the application year or, if the company ceases to be in existence during the application year, just before the cessation
    2 Be the *head company of a *MEC group The end of the application year or, if the group ceases to exist during the application year because the company ceases to be in existence, just before the cessation
    3 Not be a *member of a *consolidatable group The end of the application year or, if the company ceases to be in existence during the application year, just before the cessation


    SECTION 170-132   Net capital loss made by the loss company because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A  


    When the conditions in this section apply

    170-132(1)    
    The conditions in this section apply instead of the conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) if:


    (a) the gain company is an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) of a *foreign bank; and


    (b) the *loss company made the *net capital loss because of one or more transfers of the net capital loss under Subdivision 707-A .

    Conditions

    170-132(2)    
    Each transferor ( prior transferor ) of the *net capital loss under Subdivision 707-A must have been a company.

    170-132(3)    
    It must have been possible to meet the conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) in relation to the *loss company and the gain company assuming:


    (a) the capital loss year were so much of the income year in which the *net capital loss was transferred to the loss company under Subdivision 707-A as occurred after the transfer; and


    (b) so much (if any) of the application year as occurred before the transfer were disregarded.

    170-132(4)    


    The gain company and each prior transferor must both be in existence during at least part of each of these periods:


    (a) the period consisting of:


    (i) if the prior transferor made the *net capital loss apart from Subdivision 707-A - the capital loss year; or

    (ii) if the prior transferor made the net capital loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A (other than a transfer from the prior transferor to itself) - so much of the income year in which the transfer occurred as was after the transfer (but before any later transfer of the loss from the prior transferor under that Subdivision);


    (b) so much of the income year during which the net capital loss was transferred under Subdivision 707-A from the prior transferor to another company as occurs before the transfer (but after the start of the period described in paragraph (a));


    (c) any intervening income year.


    170-132(5)    


    The gain company must be a member of the same *wholly-owned group as each prior transferor during the whole or part of the periods described in subsection (4) for the prior transferor when both were in existence.

    SECTION 170-133   Alternative test of relations between the loss company and other companies  

    170-133(1)    
    The conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) are taken to be met in relation to the *loss company and the gain company if:


    (a) the loss company is an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) of a *foreign bank; and


    (b) the gain company is covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 170-130(4) (because the company is the *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group at the time described in that item); and


    (c) the relevant circumstances in this section exist.

    Circumstances

    170-133(2)    


    One circumstance is that there is another company (the first link company ) in relation to which all these conditions are met:


    (a) the first link company became a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group after the start of the capital loss year but before the time described in the item of the table in subsection 170-130(4) that covers the gain company;


    (b) the *net capital loss could have been transferred from the *loss company to the first link company under this Subdivision (apart from subsection 170-130(4) and this section) for an application year consisting of the *trial year for the first link company becoming a subsidiary member of that group had:


    (i) the first link company continued to be in existence as a separate entity (rather than being part of the head company of that group) when it was a subsidiary member of that group; and

    (ii) the trial year not started before the start of the capital loss year; and

    (iii) the first link company had enough *capital gains for the trial year;


    (c) the net capital loss would have been made by the gain company because of one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A assuming the net capital loss had been made by the first link company (apart from that Subdivision) for the capital loss year.


    170-133(3)    


    If the condition in paragraph (2)(c) could be met only if there had been a transfer described in that paragraph involving a company other than the first link company and the gain company, another circumstance is that the other company and the *loss company were in existence and members of the same *wholly-owned group for the period:


    (a) starting when the *net capital loss would have been transferred under Subdivision 707-A to the other company as described in that paragraph; and


    (b) ending when the net capital loss would have been transferred under Subdivision 707-A from the other company as described in that paragraph.


    170-133(4)    
    It does not matter whether or not any of the transfers mentioned in subsection (3) would have involved the first link company or the gain company as well as the other company.

    170-133(5)    
    Another circumstance is that the conditions in subsection 170-130(1) and (2) would have been met for the *loss company and the gain company assuming:


    (a) the capital loss year consisted of the part of the income year in which the *net capital loss would have been transferred to the gain company under Subdivision 707-A as described in paragraph (2)(c) occurring after the time the transfer would have occurred; and


    (b) so much (if any) of the application year as occurred before the time the transfer would have occurred were disregarded.

    SECTION 170-135   The loss company  

    170-135(1)    
    The loss company:


    (a) must be an Australian resident (but not a *prescribed dual resident) throughout the capital loss year; and


    (b) must not be a *dual resident investment company in either the capital loss year or the application year.


    170-135(2)    
    It must be the case that the loss company was not required to calculate the *net capital loss:


    (a) under section 165-114 (because of a change in ownership or control); or


    (b) under section 175-75 (because of an injected capital gain or loss).

    170-135(3)    


    Also, it must be the case that neither Subdivision 165-CA nor Subdivision 175-CA would have prevented the loss company from applying the *net capital loss in working out its *net capital gain for the application year if it had made enough *capital gains in that year.
    Note 1:

    Subdivision 165-CA deals with the consequences of changing ownership or control of a company. Subdivision 175-CA deals with using a company ' s net capital losses to avoid income tax.

    Note 2:

    Division 707 affects the operation of Subdivision 165-CA if the loss company made the net capital loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A .

    Note 3:

    A company ' s net capital gain or net capital loss for an income year is usually worked out under section 102-5 or 102-10 .


    SECTION 170-140   The gain company  

    170-140(1)    
    The gain company must be an Australian resident throughout the application year.

    170-140(2)    
    If the capital loss year and the application year are not the same, the gain company must not be prevented by Subdivision 165-CA or 175-CA from applying the transferred amount in working out its *net capital gain for the application year.

    Note 1:

    Subdivision 165-CA deals with the consequences of changing ownership or control of a company. Subdivision 175-CA deals with using a company ' s net capital losses to avoid income tax.

    Note 2:

    A company ' s net capital gain or net capital loss for an income year is usually worked out under section 102-5 or 102-10 .

    Note 3:

    The condition in subsection (2) may not apply in some cases. See section 170-142 .


    170-140(3)    
    If the capital loss year and the application year are the same, it must be the case that the gain company was not required to calculate its own *net capital gain or *net capital loss for the application year:


    (a) under Subdivision 165-CB (because of a change in ownership or control); or


    (b) under section 175-75 (because of an injected capital gain or loss).

    Note:

    In deciding whether paragraph (b) applies, remember that the transferred amount is taken to be a capital loss of the gain company for the application year (because of subsection 170-120(2) ).


    SECTION 170-142   If the gain company has become the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group  

    170-142(1)    
    The condition in subsection (2) of this section applies to the gain company instead of the condition in subsection 170-140(2) if the conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) are met in relation to the *loss company and the gain company apart from section 170-133 and either:


    (a) both these circumstances exist:


    (i) after the start of the capital loss year but before the relevant time described in subsection 170-130(4) , the gain company became the *head company of a *consolidated group or of a *MEC group that came into existence after the start of the capital loss year;

    (ii) the capital loss year and application year are not the same; or


    (b) all these circumstances exist:


    (i) the gain company is, at the relevant time described in subsection 170-130(4) , the head company of a MEC group;

    (ii) before that time but after the end of the capital loss year, the MEC group was involved in an application event described in section 719-300 (but not covered by subsection 719-300(4) or (5));

    (iii) the gain company would be taken under section 719-305 to have transferred losses to itself under Subdivision 707-A , assuming it had made losses while head company of the group or of a consolidated group involved in the event;

    (iv) the MEC group or consolidated group came into existence before the start of the capital loss year.
    Note:

    An application event involves either expanding an existing MEC group by including extra eligible tier-1 companies of the top company for the group or creating a MEC group because more companies become eligible tier-1 companies of the top company of which the head company of a consolidated group is an eligible tier-1 company.


    170-142(2)    
    The gain company must have been able to apply the *net capital loss in working out its *net capital gain for the application year assuming that it had made the net capital loss for the capital loss year.

    170-142(3)    
    The condition in subsection (4) of this section applies to the gain company instead of the condition in subsection 170-140(2) if the conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) are met in relation to the *loss company and the gain company because of section 170-133 .

    170-142(4)    
    The gain company must have been able to apply the *net capital loss in working out its *net capital gain for the application year assuming that it had made the net capital loss, for the income year in which the loss would have been transferred to it as described in paragraph 170-133(2)(c) , because of one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A described in that paragraph.


    SECTION 170-145   Maximum amount that can be transferred  
    Loss company can only transfer what it cannot use itself

    170-145(1)    


    The amount transferred cannot exceed what would be the amount of the * loss company ' s * unutilised * net capital loss at the end of the application year if the loss company utilised the net capital loss to the greatest extent possible.
    Note:

    If the capital loss year and the application year are the same, the whole of the net capital loss would be unutilised, because section 102-5 does not allow a net capital loss to be applied in the income year in which it was made.

    Example:

    In the application year the loss company has:

  • • a net capital loss from an earlier income year of $25,000; and
  • • other capital losses totalling $10,000; and
  • • capital gains totalling $20,000;
  • Of the $25,000 loss, the loss company can transfer to the gain company no more than:


    $25,000   −   ($20,000   −   $10,000)   =   $15,000


    170-145(2)    


    (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)

    170-145(3)    


    (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)

    170-145(4)    


    (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)

    Transferred loss must not exceed what the gain company can use

    170-145(5)    
    No amount can be transferred if, apart from the operation of this section, the gain company would not have a *net capital gain for the application year.

    170-145(6)    
    The amount transferred also cannot exceed the amount worked out as follows: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Work out what, apart from the operation of this section, would have been the gain company ' s *net capital gain for the application year.


    Step 2.

    Subtract each amount that:

  • (a) the gain company can apply under section 170-115 in working out its *net capital gain for the application year; and
  • (b) was transferred to the gain company (by the loss company or any other company) by an agreement made before the agreement by which the first amount is transferred.
  • Example:

    In the application year:

  • • the gain company has capital gains totalling $60,000 and capital losses totalling $25,000; and
  • • another company, being a member of the same wholly-owned group as the gain company, transferred a net capital loss of $15,000 to the gain company; and
  • • the loss company incurred a net capital loss of $50,000.
  • Of the $50,000 loss, the loss company can transfer to the gain company no more than:


    $60,000   −   $25,000   −   $15,000   =   $20,000


    170-145(7)    


    Subsection (6) does not apply if the transfer occurs because either or both of the conditions in subsections 170-142(2) and (4) are met. In that case, the amount transferred also cannot exceed the amount worked out as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Identify each *bundle of losses that, on the assumption in subsection 170-142(2) or (4) (as appropriate), would have included the *net capital loss.

    Note 1:

    There will be 2 or more bundles of losses identified if both of the conditions in subsections 170-142(2) and (4) are met.

    Note 2:

    There will be more than 1 bundle of losses identified on the basis of the assumption in paragraph 170-142(4) if the conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) are met in relation to the loss company and the gain company because of multiple applications of section 170-133 each involving a different first link company.


    Step 2.

    For each *bundle identified, work out how much of the *net capital loss the gain company would have been able to apply in working out its *net capital gain for the application year assuming that:

  • (a) the loss could have been applied in that year only after the application in that year of any other losses of that *sort that would have been included in the bundle, other than losses (the transferable losses ) that could be transferred from the *loss company to the gain company for that year; and
  • (b) if the bundle would have included 2 or more transferable losses of that sort - those losses could have been applied only in the order in which the loss company made them.
  • Note 1:

    If the assumption in subsection 170-142(2) is relevant to the bundle, it would have included losses made by the gain company and transferred (or taken to be transferred) to the company (from itself) under Subdivision 707-A .

    Note 2:

    If the assumption in paragraph 170-142(4) is relevant to the bundle, it would have included losses actually made by the first link company and transferred (by one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A ) to the gain company.


    Step 3.

    Total every result of step 2 for the *net capital loss.


    SECTION 170-150   Transfer by written agreement  

    170-150(1)    
    The transfer must be made by a written agreement between the loss company and the gain company.

    170-150(2)    
    The agreement must:


    (a) specify the income year of the transfer (which may be earlier than the income year in which the agreement is made); and


    (b) specify the amount of the *net capital loss being transferred; and


    (c) be signed by the public officer of each company; and


    (d) be made on or before theday of lodgment of the gain company ' s *income tax return for the application year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows.

    Note:

    The agreement will usually be made in the next income year after the one for which the gain company will apply the loss.


    SECTION 170-155   Losses must be transferred in order they are made  

    170-155(1)    
    If the loss company has 2 or more *net capital losses that it can transfer in the application year, it can transfer them only in the order in which it made them.

    170-155(2)    


    If:


    (a) the *loss company has 2 or more *net capital losses it can transfer for the application year; and


    (b) it made at least one of those losses apart from Subdivision 707-A and at least one of those losses because of a transfer under that Subdivision;

    it can transfer under this Subdivision the losses it made because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A only after transferring under this Subdivision the losses it made apart from that Subdivision.


    170-155(3)    


    For the purposes of subsection (2), treat a loss made by the company both apart from Subdivision 707-A and because of a transfer under that Subdivision as a loss made because of a transfer under that Subdivision.

    170-155(4)    


    Subsection (1) has effect subject to subsection (2).

    SECTION 170-160  

    170-160   Gain company cannot transfer transferred net capital loss  
    The gain company cannot transfer an amount of a *net capital loss transferred to it, or any part of the amount.

    Effect of agreement to transfer more than can be transferred

    SECTION 170-165   Agreement transfers as much as can be transferred  

    170-165(1)    
    If the amount specified in an agreement exceeds the maximum amount that the loss company can transfer to the gain company in the application year, only that maximum amount is taken to have been transferred.

    170-165(2)    
    One reason why an agreement might specify more than can be transferred is that an assessment has been amended since the agreement.


    SECTION 170-170  

    170-170   Amendment of assessments  
    The Commissioner may amend an assessment to *disallow a transferred amount of a *net capital loss:


    (a) if the agreement to transfer the net capital loss is ineffective because the loss company did not actually make the loss; or


    (b) to the extent that section 170-165 reduces the transferred amount because the loss company did not actually make some of it.

    The Commissioner may do so despite section 170 (Amendment of assessments) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Note:

    This Subdivision is disregarded in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 410 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Australian permanent establishments of foreign financial entities

    SECTION 170-174   Treatment like Australian branches of foreign banks  

    170-174(1)    
    The object of this section is to let *net capital losses be transferred under this Subdivision to and from *Australian permanent establishments of *foreign entities that are *financial entities in the same way as net capital losses can be transferred to and from Australian branches of *foreign banks.

    170-174(2)    
    This Subdivision (except this section) applies to an *Australian permanent establishment of a *foreign entity that is a *financial entity in the same way as this Subdivision applies to an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) of a *foreign bank.


    170-175   (Repealed) SECTION 170-175 Direct and indirect interests in the loss company  
    (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)

    170-180   (Repealed) SECTION 170-180 Direct and indirect interests in the gain company  
    (Repealed by No 169 of 1999)

    Subdivision 170-C - Provisions applying to both transfers of tax losses and transfers of net capital losses within wholly-owned groups of companies  

    SECTION 170-201   What this Subdivision is about  


    If a tax loss or a net capital loss is transferred between companies in the same wholly-owned group, this Subdivision provides for adjustments to:

  • (a) the cost base and reduced cost base of direct and indirect equity interests held by group companies in the loss company, or in the income company or gain company; and
  • (b) the reduced cost base of direct and indirect debt interest held by group companies in the loss company; and
  • (c) the cost base and reduced cost base of direct and indirect debt interests held by group companies in the income company or gain company.
  • Operative provisions

    SECTION 170-205   Object of Subdivision  


    Interests in the loss company

    170-205(1)    
    The main object of this Subdivision is to ensure that, if an amount of a *tax loss or *net capital loss is transferred by a company to another company in the same *wholly-owned group, the loss transferred is not duplicated by a member of the group.

    170-205(2)    
    Duplication could occur by the making of a *capital loss, or the reduction of a *capital gain, from a *CGT event that happens in relation to an equity interest held (directly or indirectly) in the loss company or by the making of a capital loss in relation to a debt interest held (directly or indirectly) in the loss company.

    Interests in the income company or gain company

    170-205(3)    
    This Subdivision may also require an adjustment to the cost base and reduced cost base of an equity or debt interest held (directly or indirectly) by a group company in the income company or gain company.

    170-205(4)    


    This adjustment is to reflect an increase in the *market value of the interest because of the transfer of the loss if the increase is still reflected in the market value of the interest when a *CGT event happens in relation to the interest.

    SECTION 170-210   Transfer of tax loss: direct and indirect interests in the loss company  

    170-210(1)    
    If:


    (a) an amount of a *tax loss is transferred by a company to another company; and


    (b) Subdivision 170-A applies in respect of the transfer; and


    (c) a company (the group company ) holds a *share in the loss company or is owed a debt by the loss company in respect of a loan; and


    (d) the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (e) throughout the deduction year, the group company is a member of the same *wholly-owned group as the loss company (disregarding a period when either was not in existence); and


    (f) a *CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt on or after the commencement of this section; and


    (g) the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-50 is made on or after that commencement;

    the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced in accordance with subsection (3).


    170-210(2)    
    If:


    (a) an amount of a *tax loss is transferred by a company to another company; and


    (b) Subdivision 170-A applies in respect of the transfer; and


    (c) a company (the group company ) holds a *share in another company or is owed a debt by another company in respect of a loan; and


    (d) the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (e) the money that the group company paid for the share, or the borrowed money, has been applied (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities):


    (i) in the other company or a third company acquiring shares in the loss company; or

    (ii) in a *borrowing by the loss company from the other company or from a third company; and


    (f) throughout the deduction year, the group company, the other company and the third company (if any) are all members of the same *wholly-owned group as the loss company (disregarding, for a particular company, a period when it was not in existence); and


    (g) a *CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt on or after the commencement of this section; and


    (h) the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-50 is made on or after that commencement;

    the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced in accordance with subsection (3).


    170-210(3)    
    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced by an amount that is appropriate having regard to:


    (aa) the main object of this Subdivision and other matters mentioned in subsections 170-205(1) and (2); and


    (a) the group company ' s direct or indirect interest in the loss company; and


    (ba) any reduction in the reduced cost base made under Subdivision 165-CD ; and


    (b) the amount of the loss transferred; and


    (c) the extent to which the loss reduced the *market value of the share or debt; and


    (d) any consideration received by the loss company for the loss transferred; and


    (e) whether, because of a dividend or dividends paid by the loss company, the consideration is no longer reflected (wholly or partly) in the market value of the share or debt when a *CGT event happens in relation to it.


    170-210(3A)    


    To avoid doubt in applying paragraph (3)(c) in relation to a *share or debt, if factors other than the loss altered the *market value of the share or debt, the extent to which the loss reduced that market value is taken to be the extent to which that market value would have been reduced apart from those other factors.
    Note:

    An example of a factor other than the loss is the unrealised value of assets (including assets in respect of which there is an unrealised gain) of the loss company, whether or not generated by outlays or economic losses reflected in the loss for income tax purposes.


    170-210(3B)    


    This section applies to a *tax loss only to the extent that the loss represents an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the *loss company.
    Note:

    Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.


    170-210(4)    
    Any reduction is to be made immediately before a *CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt and is to have effect from that time or the end of the deduction year, whichever is the earlier.

    Note 1:

    For deduction year see subsection 170-20(1) .

    Note 2:

    Subsection (4) is relevant for indexing elements of a cost base (see sections 114-1 and 114-15 ).


    SECTION 170-215   Transfer of tax loss: direct and indirect interests in the income company  

    170-215(1)    
    If:


    (a) an amount of a *tax loss is transferred by a company to another company; and


    (b) Subdivision 170-A applies in respect of the transfer; and


    (c) a company (the group company ) holds a *share in the income company or is owed a debt by the income company in respect of a loan; and


    (d) the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (e) throughout the deduction year, the group company is a member of the same *wholly-owned group as the income company (disregarding a period when either was not in existence); and


    (f) a *CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt on or after the commencement of this section; and


    (g) the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-50 is made on or after that commencement; and


    (h) there are shares in, or debts owed by, the *loss company the *reduced cost base of at least one of which has been reduced by subsection 170-210(1) or (2);

    the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or debt are increased in accordance with subsection (3).


    170-215(2)    
    If:


    (a) an amount of a *tax loss is transferred by a company to another company; and


    (b) Subdivision 170-A applies in respect of the transfer; and


    (c) a company (the group company ) holds a *share in another company or is owed a debt by another company in respect of a loan; and


    (d) the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (e) the money that the group company paid for the share, or the borrowed money, has been applied (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities):


    (i) in the other company or a third company acquiring shares in the income company; or

    (ii) in a *borrowing by the income company from the other company or from a third company; and


    (f) throughout the deduction year, the group company, the other company and the third company (if any) are all members of the same *wholly-owned group as the income company (disregarding, for a particular company, a period when it was not in existence); and


    (g) a *CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt on or after the commencement of this section; and


    (h) the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-50 is made on or after that commencement; and


    (i) there are shares in, or debts owed by, the *loss company the *reduced cost base of at least one of which has been reduced by subsection 170-210(1) or (2);

    the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or debt are increased in accordance with subsection (3).


    170-215(3)    
    The *cost base and *reduced cost base are increased by an amount that is appropriate having regard to:


    (aa) the matters mentioned in subsections 170-205(3) and (4); and


    (ab) the amounts of any reductions to the cost base and reduced cost base of *shares, and to the reduced cost base of debts, under subsection 170-210(3) ; and


    (a) the group company ' s direct or indirect interest in the income company; and


    (b) the amount of the loss transferred; and


    (c) any consideration given by the income company for the loss transferred.

    Note:

    This is because the consideration may be less than the commercial value of the loss transferred.


    170-215(4)    


    However, the increase cannot exceed the increase in the *market value of the *share or debt that results from the transfer of the loss. (If no increase in that market value results, for example because the consideration paid for the transfer of the loss equals the commercial value of the loss transferred, then there is no increase in the *cost base and *reduced cost base.)

    170-215(4A)    


    No increase is to be made to the extent that the *tax loss transferred does not represent an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the company that transferred the tax loss.
    Note:

    Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.


    170-215(5)    
    Any increase is to be made immediately before a *CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt and is to have effect from that time or the end of the deduction year, whichever is the earlier.

    Note:

    This subsection is relevant for indexing elements of a cost base (see sections 114-1 and 114-15 ).


    170-215(6)    


    No increase is to be made to the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a share or debt to the extent to which, because of a dividend or dividends paid by the income company, the increase in the *market value of the share or debt that resulted from the transfer of the loss is no longer in existence at the time when a *CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt.
    Note:

    For deduction year see subsection 170-20(1) .


    SECTION 170-220   Transfer of net capital loss: direct and indirect interests in the loss company  

    170-220(1)    


    If:


    (a) an amount of a *net capital loss is transferred by a company to another company; and


    (b) Subdivision 170-B applies in respect of the transfer; and


    (c) a company (the group company ) holds a *share in the loss company or is owed a debt by the loss company in respect of a loan; and


    (d) the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (e) throughout the application year, the group company is a member of the same *wholly-owned group as the loss company (disregarding a period when either was not in existence); and


    (f) the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-150 is made on or after the commencement of this section;

    the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced in accordance with subsection (3).


    170-220(2)    


    If:


    (a) an amount of a *net capital loss is transferred by a company to another company; and


    (b) Subdivision 170-B applies in respect of the transfer; and


    (c) a company (the group company ) holds a *share in another company or is owed a debt by another company in respect of a loan; and


    (d) the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (e) the money that the group company paid for the share, or the borrowed money, has been applied (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities):


    (i) in the other company or a third company acquiring shares in the loss company; or

    (ii) in a *borrowing by the loss company from the other company or from a third company; and


    (f) throughout the application year, the group company, the other company and the third company (if any) are all members of the same *wholly-owned group as the loss company (disregarding, for a particular company, a period when it was not in existence); and


    (g) the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-150 is made on or after the commencement of this section;

    the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced in accordance with subsection (3).


    170-220(3)    


    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced by an amount that is appropriate having regard to:


    (aa) the main object of this Subdivision and other matters mentioned in subsections 170-205(1) and (2); and


    (a) the group company ' s direct or indirect interest in the loss company; and


    (ba) any reduction in the reduced cost base made under Subdivision 165-CD ; and


    (b) the amount of the loss transferred; and


    (c) the extent to which the loss reduced the *market value of the share or debt; and


    (d) any consideration received by the loss company for the loss transferred; and


    (e) whether, because of a dividend or dividends paid by the loss company, the consideration is no longer reflected (wholly or partly) in the market value of the share or debt when a *CGT event happens in relation to it.


    170-220(3A)    


    To avoid doubt in applying paragraph (3)(c) in relation to a *share or debt, if factors other than the loss altered the *market value of the share or debt, the extent to which the loss reduced that market value is taken to be the extent to which that market value would have been reduced apart from those other factors.
    Note:

    An example of a factor other than the loss is the unrealised value of assets (including assets in respect of which there is an unrealised gain) of the loss company, whether or not generated by outlays or economic losses reflected in the loss for income tax purposes.


    170-220(3B)    


    This section applies to a *net capital loss only to the extent that the loss represents an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the *loss company.
    Note:

    Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.


    170-220(4)    
    Any reduction is to be made immediately before a *CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt and is to have effect from that time or the end of the application year, whichever is the earlier.

    Note 1:

    Subsection (4) is relevant for indexing elements of a cost base (see sections 114-1 and 114-15 ).

    Note 2:

    Reductions under former subsection 160ZP(13) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are also relevant: see section 170-220 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Note 3:

    For applicable year see subsection 170-115(1) .


    SECTION 170-225   Transfer of net capital loss: direct and indirect interests in the gain company  

    170-225(1)    
    If:


    (a) an amount of a *net capital loss is transferred by a company to another company; and


    (b) Subdivision 170-B applies in respect of the transfer; and


    (c) a company (the group company ) holds a *share in the gain company or is owed a debt by the gain company in respect of a loan; and


    (d) the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (e) throughout the application year, the group company is a member of the same *wholly-owned group as the gain company (disregarding a period when either was not in existence); and


    (f) the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-150 is made on or after the commencement of this section; and


    (g) there are shares in, or debts owed by, the *loss company the *cost base and *reduced cost base of at least one of which have been reduced by subsection 170-220(1) or (2);

    the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or debt are increased in accordance with subsection (3).


    170-225(2)    


    If:


    (a) an amount of a *net capital loss is transferred by a company to another company; and


    (b) Subdivision 170-B applies in respect of the transfer; and


    (c) a company (the group company ) holds a *share in another company or is owed a debt by another company in respect of a loan; and


    (d) the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and


    (e) the money that the group company paid for the share, or the borrowed money, has been applied (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities):


    (i) in the other company or a third company acquiring shares in the gain company; or

    (ii) in a *borrowing by the gain company from the other company or from a third company; and


    (f) throughout the application year, the group company, the other company and the third company (if any) are all members of the same *wholly-owned group as the gain company (disregarding, for a particular company, a period when it was not in existence); and


    (g) the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-150 is made on or after the commencement of this section; and


    (h) there are shares in, or debts owed by, the *loss company the *cost base and *reduced cost base of at least one of which have been reduced by subsection 170-220(1) or (2);

    the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or debt are increased in accordance with subsection (3).


    170-225(3)    
    The *cost base and *reduced cost base are increased by an amount that is appropriate having regard to:


    (aa) the matters mentioned in subsections 170-205(3) and (4); and


    (ab) the amounts of any reductions to the cost base and reduced cost base of *shares, and to the reduced cost base of debts, under subsection 170-220(3) ; and


    (a) the group company ' s direct or indirect interest in the gain company; and


    (b) the amount of the loss transferred; and


    (c) any consideration given by the gain company for the loss transferred.

    Note:

    This is because the consideration may be less than the commercial value of the loss transferred.


    170-225(4)    


    However, the increase cannot exceed the increase in the *market value of the *share or debt that results from the transfer of the loss. (If no increase in that market value results, for example because the consideration paid for the transfer of the loss equals the commercial value of the loss transferred, then there is no increase in the *cost base and *reduced cost base.)

    170-225(4A)    


    No increase is to be made to the extent that the *net capital loss transferred does not represent an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the company that transferred the net capital loss.
    Note:

    Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.


    170-225(5)    
    Any increase is to be made immediately before a *CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt and is to have effect from that time or the end of the application year, whichever is the earlier.

    Note:

    This subsection is relevant for indexing elements of a cost base (see sections 114-1 and 114-15 ).


    170-225(6)    


    No increase is to be made to the *cost base and *reduced cost base of ashare or debt to the extent to which, because of a dividend or dividends paid by the gain company, the increase in the *market value of the share or debt that resulted from the transfer of the loss is no longer in existence at the time when a *CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt.
    Note:

    Increases under former subsections 160ZP(14) and (15) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are also relevant: see section 170-225 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    Subdivision 170-D - Transactions by a company that is a member of a linked group  

    SECTION 170-250   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision provides that there is a deferral of a *capital loss or deduction if a company (the originating company ) that is a member of a *linked group disposes of a *CGT asset to, or creates a CGT asset in, another entity that:

  • (a) is a company that is also a member of the linked group; or
  • (b) is a connected entity of the originating company or an *associate of such a connected entity;
  • and the disposal or creation of the asset would have resulted in the originating company making a capital loss or becoming entitled to a deduction.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 170-255   Application of Subdivision  

    170-255(1)    
    This Subdivision applies if:


    (a) an event (the deferral event ) happens involving a company (the originating company ) and another entity; and


    (b) one or more of the following apply:


    (i) the deferral event is a *CGT event that would have resulted in the originating company making a *capital loss (except a capital loss that would be disregarded under a provision of this Act other than this Subdivision);

    (ii) the deferral event would have resulted in the originating company becoming entitled to a deduction in respect of the disposal of a CGT asset or of an interest in a CGT asset;

    (iii) if the originating company is a partner in a partnership - the deferral event would have resulted in the partnership becoming entitled to a deduction in respect of the disposal of a CGT asset or of an interest in a CGT asset; and


    (c) if subparagraph (b)(i) applies - the CGT event is one of the following:


    (i) CGT events A1 and B1 (a disposal case );

    (ii) CGT events D1, D2, D3 and F1 (a creation case ); and
    Note:

    The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5 .


    (d) one of the following applies:


    (i) the originating company is an Australian resident at the time of the deferral event;

    (ii) if the deferral event is a CGT event D1 - the *CGT asset that is the subject of the creation of the contractual or other rights is *taxable Australian property;

    (iii) if the deferral event is a CGT event A1, B1 or F1 - the asset or the subject of the lease, as the case may be, was *taxable Australian property immediately before the deferral event;

    (iv) if the deferral event is a CGT event D2 - the option was *taxable Australian property immediately after the deferral event;

    (v) if subparagraph (b)(ii) or (iii) applies - the originating company is a foreign resident at the time of the deferral event; and


    (e) at the time of the deferral event, the originating company is a member of a *linked group and one of the following applies:


    (i) the other entity is a company that is not a connected entity of the originating company and is a member of that linked group;

    (ii) the other entity is a connected entity of the originating company;

    (iii) the other entity is an *associate of such a connected entity.

    170-255(2)    
    Despite subsection (1):


    (a) this Subdivision does not apply because of *CGT event B1 if title in the *CGT asset does not pass to the other entity when the agreement ends; and


    (b) this Subdivision does not apply if the deferral event involves the *acquisition of a greater than 50% interest in a CGT asset by an entity other than an entity referred to in subparagraph (1)(e)(i), (ii) or (iii).


    SECTION 170-260   Linked group  

    170-260(1)    
    Companies that are linked to one another are a linked group .

    170-260(2)    
    Two companies are linked to each other if:


    (a) one of them has a controlling stake in the other; or


    (b) the same entity has a controlling stake in each of them.

    170-260(3)    
    For the purposes of this section, an entity has a controlling stake in a company at a particular time if the entity, or the entity and the entity ' s *associates between them:


    (a) are able at that time to exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 50% of the voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or


    (b) have at that time the right to receive for their own benefit (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any dividends that the company may pay; or


    (c) have at that time the right to receive for their own benefit (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company.

    Note:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    170-260(4)    
    If:


    (a) apart from this subsection, an interest that gives an entity and its *associates (if any):


    (i) the ability to exercise, or control the exercise of, any of the voting power in a company; or

    (ii) the right to receive dividends that a company may pay; or

    (iii) the right to receive a distribution of capital of a company;
    would, in the application of paragraph (3)(a), (b) or (c), be counted more than once; and


    (b) the interest is both direct and indirect;

    only the direct interest is to be counted.


    SECTION 170-265   Connected entity  

    170-265(1)    
    An entity is a connected entity of the originating company at a particular time if, at that time:


    (a) the entity is a trustee of a trust and either:


    (i) if the trust is a *fixed trust - one or more companies that are members of the *linked group of which the originating company is a member, or one or more of those companies and their *associates, between them have the right to receive for their own benefit (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any distribution to beneficiaries of the trust of income or corpus of the trust; or

    (ii) if the trust is not a fixed trust - any company that is a member of the linked group of which the originating company is a member or any associate of such a company benefits or is capable of benefiting under the trust; or


    (b) the entity is an individual who has a controlling stake in the company.

    170-265(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), an individual has a controlling stake in a company at a particular time if the individual, or the individual and his or her *associates between them:


    (a) are able at that time to exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 50% of the voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or


    (b) have at that time the right to receive for their own benefit (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any dividends that the company may pay; or


    (c) have at that time the right to receive for their own benefit (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company.

    Note:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    170-265(3)    
    If:


    (a) apart from this subsection, an interest that gives an entity and its *associates (if any):


    (i) the ability to exercise, or control the exercise of, any of the voting power in a company; or

    (ii) the right to receive dividends that a company may pay; or

    (iii) the right to receive a distribution of capital of a company;
    would, in the application of paragraph (2)(a), (b) or (c), be counted more than once; and


    (b) the interest is both direct and indirect;

    only the direct interest is to be counted.


    SECTION 170-270   Immediate consequences for originating company  

    170-270(1)    
    If, apart from this Subdivision:


    (a) the originating company would have made a *capital loss (except a capital loss that would be disregarded under a provision of this Act other than this Subdivision) as a result of the deferral event; or


    (b) the originating company would have become entitled to a deduction in respect of the deferral event; or


    (c) where the originating company is a partner in a partnership - the partnership would have become entitled to a deduction in respect of the deferral event;

    the capital loss, the deduction or the partner ' s share of the deduction, as the case may be, is disregarded.


    170-270(2)    


    To avoid doubt, the amount of the *capital loss, deduction, or partnership deduction, referred to in this section is:


    (a) the amount remaining after applying Division 723 or section 727-615 ; or


    (b) nil, if none of the amount remains after applying that section or Division.

    Note:

    Division 723 and section 727-615 reduce a loss realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event happening to a non-depreciating asset (in the case of Division 723 ) or an affected interest in a losing entity under an indirect value shift (in the case of section 727-615 ).


    SECTION 170-275   Subsequent consequences for originating company  

    170-275(1)    
    If, at a time after the deferral event, any one or more of the following events (the new events ) happens:


    (a) the *CGT asset *acquired by the other entity referred to in paragraph 170-255(1)(a) (the relevant CGT asset ), or a greater than 50% interest in it, ceases to exist;


    (b) the relevant CGT asset, or a greater than 50% interest in it, is acquired by an entity that is none of the following:


    (i) a member of the *linked group of which the originating company is a member;

    (ii) a connected entity of the originating company;

    (iii) an *associate of such a connected entity;


    (c) if the relevant CGT asset is acquired by a company that is a member of that linked group - that company ceases to be a member of that linked group;


    (d) the originating company ceases to be a member of that linked group;


    (e) if the relevant CGT asset is acquired by an entity that is a connected entity of the originating company or is an associate of such a connected entity - that entity ceases to be such a connected entity or ceases to be an associate of such a connected entity, as the case may be;

    the originating company is taken, immediately before the time of the happening of the new event or the earliest of the new events, as the case may be, to have made a *capital loss equal to the amount of the capital loss referred to in section 170-270 or to have become entitled to a deduction equal to the deduction, or the share of the deduction, referred to in that section, as the case may be.


    170-275(2)    
    If the *capital loss referred to in section 170-270 would have been made from a *personal use asset or from a *collectable, any corresponding capital loss that the originating company is taken by subsection (1) of this section to have made is taken to have been made from a personal use asset or from a collectable, as the case may be.


    SECTION 170-280   What happens if certain events happen in respect of the asset  

    170-280(1)    


    This section applies if, as a result of the occurrence of a new event in respect of a *CGT asset, the originating company is taken by subsection 170-275(1) to have made a *capital loss or to be entitled to a deduction and, within 4 years after the occurrence of the new event, one of the following events ( further events ) occurs:


    (a) the asset or a greater than 50% interest in it is *acquired by the originating company or by an entity that, at the time of the acquisition, is:


    (i) a company that is a member of the *linked group of which the originating company is a member; or

    (ii) a connected entity of the originating company; or

    (iii) an *associate of such a connected entity;


    (b) a company that owns the asset or a greater than 50% interest in it becomes a member of the linked group of which the originating company is a member;


    (c) the originating company becomes a member of a linked group another member of which owns the asset or a greater than 50% interest in it;


    (d) an entity that owns the asset or a greater than 50% interest in it becomes:


    (i) a connected entity of the originating company; or

    (ii) an associate of such a connected entity.

    170-280(1A)    


    If the originating company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that, if the *CGT asset involved were owned by the originating company immediately after the further event, *majority underlying interests in the asset immediately after the further event would not have been had by *ultimate owners who had majority underlying interests in the asset immediately before the deferral event, the further event is taken not to have occurred.

    170-280(2)    
    The company is taken not to have made the *capital loss or not to have been entitled to the deduction, as the case may be.

    170-280(3)    


    If, at a time after the further event, any one or more of the following events (the realisation events ) happens:


    (a) the *CGT asset referred to in subsection (1) (the relevant CGT asset ), or a greater than 50% interest in it, ceases to exist;


    (b) the relevant CGT asset, or a greater than 50% interest in it, is *acquired by an entity that is none of the following:


    (i) a member of the linked group of which the originating company is a member;

    (ii) a connected entity of the originating company;

    (iii) an *associate of such a connected entity;


    (c) if the relevant CGT asset is acquired by a company that is a member of that linked group - that company ceases to be a member of that linked group;


    (d) the originating company ceases to be a member of that linked group;


    (e) if the relevant CGT asset is acquired by an entity that is a connected entity of the originating company or is an associate of such a connected entity - that entity ceases to be such a connected entity or ceases to be an associate of such a connected entity, as the case may be;

    the originating company is taken, immediately before the time of the happening of the realisation event or the earliest of the realisation events, as the case may be, to have made a *capital loss equal to the amount of the capital loss referred to in subsection (2) or to have become entitled to a deduction equal to the deduction referred to in that subsection, as the case may be.


    170-280(4)    
    If the *capital loss referred to in subsection (2) would have been made from a *personal use asset or from a *collectable, any corresponding capital loss that the originating company is taken by subsection (3) to have made is taken to have been made from a personal use asset or from a collectable, as the case may be.


    Division 175 - Use of a company ' s tax losses or deductions to avoid income tax  

    Guide to Division 175  

    SECTION 175-1   What this Division is about  

    The Commissioner can reverse the effect of schemes that, in order to avoid tax, bring together in the same company:

  • • assessable income; and
  • • tax losses, current year deductions, or deductions for bad debts, that apart from the scheme would not be fully used.
  • Subdivision 175-A - Tax benefits from unused tax losses  

    SECTION 175-5   When Commissioner can disallow deduction for tax loss  

    175-5(1)    
    This Subdivision sets out cases where the Commissioner may disallow some or all of a *tax loss (or of part of a tax loss) (the excluded loss ) as a deduction in calculating a company ' s taxable income of an income year after the *loss year.

    175-5(2)    
    However, the Commissioner cannot disallow the *excluded loss if the company:


    (a) fails to meet a condition in section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners) in respect of the *loss year or the income year; but


    (b) meets the condition in section 165-13 in respect of the income year by satisfying the *business continuity test under section 165-210 .


    SECTION 175-10   First case: income or capital gain injected into company because of available tax loss  

    175-10(1)    


    The Commissioner may disallow the *excluded loss if, during the income year, the company *derived assessable income, or a *capital gain accrued to the company, some or all of which (the injected amount ) would not have been derived, or would not have accrued, if the excluded loss had not been available to be taken into account for the purposes of:
  • • Division 36 (which is about tax losses of earlier years);
  • • Division 165 (which is about the income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company);
  • • former Subdivision 375-G (which is about film losses).

  • 175-10(2)    


    However, the Commissioner cannot disallow the *excluded loss if the *continuing shareholders will benefit from the derivation or accrual of the *injected amount to an extent that the Commissioner thinks fair and reasonable having regard to their respective rights and interests in the company.
    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow an excluded loss of an insolvent company.


    175-10(3)    
    The continuing shareholders are:


    (a) all of the persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company during the whole (or the relevant part) of the *loss year and during the whole of the income year; and


    (b) all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s dividends during the whole (or the relevant part) of the loss year and during the whole of the income year; and


    (c) all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions during the whole (or the relevant part) of the loss year and during the whole of the income year.

    To find out who they were, apply whichever tests are applied in order to determine whether the company can deduct the *tax loss (or the part of the tax loss) in the first place.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners).

    Note 2:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    SECTION 175-15   Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of tax loss available to company  

    175-15(1)    
    The Commissioner may disallow the *excluded loss if:


    (a) a person has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and


    (b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the excluded loss had not been available to be taken into account for the purposes of:

  • • Division 36 (which is about tax losses of earlier years);
  • • Division 165 (which is about the income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company);
  • • former Subdivision 375-G (which is about film losses).

  • 175-15(2)    
    However, the Commissioner cannot disallow the *excluded loss if:


    (a) the person had a *shareholding interest in the company at some time during the income year; and


    (b) the Commissioner considers the tax benefit to be fair and reasonable having regard to that shareholding interest.

    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow an excluded loss of an insolvent company.


    175-15(3)    
    An expression means the same in this section as in Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Subdivision 175-B - Tax benefits from unused deductions  

    SECTION 175-20   Income or capital gain injected into company because of available deductions  

    175-20(1)    


    The Commissioner may disallow deductions of a company (or parts of them) for an income year if:


    (a) the company has *derived assessable income, or a *capital gain accrued to the company, some or all of which (the injected amount ) would not have been derived, or would not have accrued, if the company did not have those deductions; and


    (b) the income was derived, or the capital gain accrued, in that income year.

    The disallowed deductions and parts of deductions may exceed the *injected amount.

    Note:

    The disallowance may result in a tax loss for the income year. See section 175-35 .


    175-20(2)    


    The Commissioner cannot disallow the deductions or parts of the deductions if the *continuing shareholders will benefit from the derivation of the *injected amount to an extent that the Commissioner thinks fair and reasonable having regard to their respective *shareholding interests in the company.
    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow the whole or part of any deductions of an insolvent company.


    175-20(3)    


    The continuing shareholders are the individuals who had *shareholding interests in the company both immediately before the *injected amount was *derived, and immediately afterwards.

    SECTION 175-25   Deduction injected into company because of available income or capital gain  

    175-25(1)    
    The Commissioner may disallow a deduction of a company for an income year to the extent that the company would not have incurred the loss, outgoing or expenditure that the deduction is for if it had not *derived some or all of the assessable income it derived in that income year, or had not made some or all of a *capital gain it made in that income year.

    Note:

    The disallowance may result in a tax loss for the income year. See section 175-35 .


    175-25(2)    
    The Commissioner cannot disallow any of the deduction if:


    (a) the *continuing shareholders will benefit from any profit or advantage that has arisen or might arise directly or indirectly from the loss, outgoing or expenditure being incurred; and


    (b) the Commissioner thinks that the extent to which they will benefit is fair and reasonable having regard to their respective *shareholding interests in the company.

    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow a deduction of an insolvent company.


    175-25(3)    
    The continuing shareholders are the individuals who had *shareholding interests in the company both immediately before the loss, outgoing or expenditure was incurred, and immediately afterwards.

    SECTION 175-30   Someone else obtains a tax benefit because of a deduction, income or capital gain available to company  

    175-30(1)    
    The Commissioner may disallow a deduction of a company if:


    (a) a person (other than the company) has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and


    (b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the company had not incurred some or all (the available expense ) of the loss, outgoing or expenditure that the deduction is for.

    However, the deduction may be disallowed only to the extent of the available expense.


    175-30(2)    


    The Commissioner may disallow deductions of a company (or parts of them) if:


    (a) a person has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and


    (b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if some or all (the available amount ) of the assessable income that the company *derived or of a *capital gain that accrued to the company:


    (i) before it incurred the losses, outgoings or expenditure that the deductions were for; and

    (ii) in the same income year as it incurred them;
    had not been derived or had not accrued, as the case may be.

    The disallowed deductions and parts of deductions may exceed the available amount.

    Note:

    The disallowance may result in a tax loss for the income year. See section 175-35 .


    175-30(3)    
    An expression means the same in this section as in Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    175-30(4)    
    The Commissioner cannot disallow under this section if:


    (a) the person who has obtained or will obtain the tax benefit had a *shareholding interest in the company at some time during the income year; and


    (b) the Commissioner considers the tax benefit to be fair and reasonable having regard to that shareholding interest.

    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow the whole or part of any deductions of an insolvent company.


    SECTION 175-35   Tax loss resulting from disallowed deductions  

    175-35(1)    


    If a company has a taxable income for an income year because the Commissioner disallows under this Subdivision deductions of the company for the income year (or parts of them), the company may also have a *tax loss for the income year.

    175-35(2)    
    The company's tax loss for the income year is calculated as follows.

    175-35(3)    
    Total what the Commissioner has disallowed under this Subdivision.

    175-35(4)    


    If the company has *exempt income for the income year, subtract its * net exempt income .

    175-35(5)    
    Any amount remaining is the company's tax loss for the income year, which is called a loss year .

    Note:

    The meanings of tax loss and loss year are modified by section 36-55 for a corporate tax entity that has an amount of excess franking offsets.

    To find out how much of the tax loss can be deducted in later income years: see Subdivision 165-A .

    To find out how to deduct it: see section 36-17 .


    Subdivision 175-CA - Tax benefits from unused net capital losses of earlier income years  

    SECTION 175-40   When Commissioner can disallow net capital loss of earlier income year  

    175-40(1)    


    This Subdivision sets out cases where the Commissioner may prevent a company, in working out its *net capital gain for an income year, from applying some or all of a *net capital loss it has for an earlier income year (or of part of one) (the excluded loss ). This is called disallowing the excluded loss.
    Note:

    A company ' s net capital gain for an income year is usually worked out under section 102-5 .


    175-40(2)    
    However, the Commissioner cannot *disallow the *excluded loss if, in determining (under section 165-96 ) whether Subdivision 165-A would prevent the company from deducting the loss (or the part of the loss) for the income year if the loss were a *tax loss of the company for that earlier income year, the company:


    (a) would fail to meet a condition in section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners) in respect of the income year; but


    (b) would meet the condition in section 165-13 in respect of the income year by satisfying the *business continuity test under section 165-210 .

    Note:

    Subdivision 165-A deals with the deductibility of a company ' s tax loss for an earlier income year if there has been a change in the ownership or control of the company in the period from the start of the loss year to the end of the income year.


    SECTION 175-45   First case: capital gain injected into company because of available net capital loss  

    175-45(1)    


    The Commissioner may *disallow the *excluded loss if, during the income year, the company made a *capital gain some or all of which (the injected capital gain ) it would not have made if the excluded loss had not been available to be applied in working out the company ' s *net capital gain for the income year (or for some other income year).

    175-45(2)    
    However, the Commissioner cannot *disallow the *excluded loss if the *continuing shareholders will benefit from the making of the injected capital gain to an extent that the Commissioner thinks fair and reasonable having regard to their respective rights and interests in the company.

    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow an excluded loss of an insolvent company.


    175-45(3)    
    The continuing shareholders are:


    (a) all of the persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company during the whole (or the relevant part) of the earlier income year and during the whole of the income year; and


    (b) all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s dividends during the whole (or the relevant part) of the earlier income year and during the whole of the income year; and


    (c) all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions during the whole (or the relevant part) of the earlier income year and during the whole of the income year.

    To find out who they were, apply whichever tests are applied in order to determine (under section 165-96 ) whether Subdivision 165-A would prevent the company from deducting the loss for the current year if it were a *tax loss of the company for that earlier income year.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners).

    Note 2:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    SECTION 175-50   Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of net capital loss available to company  

    175-50(1)    
    The Commissioner may *disallow the *excluded loss if:


    (a) a person has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and


    (b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the excluded loss had not been available to be applied in working out the company ' s *net capital gain for the income year (or for some other income year).


    175-50(2)    
    However, the Commissioner cannot *disallow the *excluded loss if:


    (a) the person had a *shareholding interest in the company at some time during the income year; and


    (b) the Commissioner considers the tax benefit to be fair and reasonable having regard to that shareholding interest.

    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow an excluded loss of an insolvent company.


    175-50(3)    
    An expression means the same in this section as in Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    Subdivision 175-CB - Tax benefits from unused capital losses of the current year  

    SECTION 175-55  

    175-55   When Commissioner can disallow capital loss of current year  
    This Subdivision sets out cases where the Commissioner may prevent a company, in working out its *net capital gain or *net capital loss for an income year, from applying all or part of a capital loss it made during the income year. This is called disallowing the capital loss or part.

    SECTION 175-60   Capital gain injected into company because of available capital loss  

    175-60(1)    
    The Commissioner may *disallow *capital losses of a company (or parts of them) for an income year if:


    (a) the company has made a *capital gain some or all of which (the injected capital gain ) it would not have made if it did not have those capital losses; and


    (b) the injected capital gain was made in that income year.

    The disallowed capital losses and parts of capital losses may exceed the amount of the injected capital gain.

    Note:

    The disallowance may result in a net capital loss for the income year: see section 175-75 .


    175-60(2)    


    The Commissioner cannot *disallow the *capital losses or parts of the capital losses if the *continuing shareholders will benefit from the making of the injected capital gain to an extent that the Commissioner thinks fair and reasonable having regard to their respective *shareholding interests in the company.
    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow capital losses or parts of capital losses of an insolvent company.


    175-60(3)    
    The continuing shareholders are the individuals who had *shareholding interests in the company both immediately before the *injected capital gain was made, and immediately afterwards.


    SECTION 175-65   Capital loss injected into company because of available capital gain  

    175-65(1)    
    The Commissioner may *disallow a *capital loss of a company for an income year to the extent that the company would not have made the loss if it had not also made some or all of a *capital gain it made in that income year.

    Note:

    The disallowance may result in a tax loss for the income year: see section 175-75 .


    175-65(2)    


    The Commissioner cannot *disallow any of the *capital loss if:


    (a) the *continuing shareholders will benefit from any profit or advantage that has arisen or might arise directly or indirectly from the loss being made; and


    (b) the Commissioner thinks that the extent to which they will benefit is fair and reasonable having regard to their respective *shareholding interests in the company.

    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow a capital loss of an insolvent company.


    175-65(3)    
    The continuing shareholders are the individuals who had *shareholding interests in the company both immediately before the *capital loss was made, and immediately afterwards.


    SECTION 175-70   Someone else obtains a tax benefit because of capital loss or gain available to company  

    175-70(1)    
    The Commissioner may *disallow a *capital loss of a company if:


    (a) a person (other than the company) has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and


    (b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the company had not made some or all (theavailable capital loss ) of the capital loss.

    However, the capital loss may be disallowed only to the extent of the available capital loss.


    175-70(2)    
    The Commissioner may *disallow *capital losses of a company (or parts of them) if:


    (a) a person has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and


    (b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the company had not made some or all (the available capital gains ) of the *capital gains it made:


    (i) before it made the capital losses; and

    (ii) in the same income year as it made them.

    The disallowed capital losses and parts of capital losses may exceed the amount of the available capital gains.

    Note:

    The disallowance may result in a tax loss for the income year: see section 175-75 .


    175-70(3)    
    An expression means the same in this section as in Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    175-70(4)    
    The Commissioner cannot *disallow under this section if:


    (a) the person who has obtained or will obtain the tax benefit had a *shareholding interest in the company at some time during the income year; and


    (b) the Commissioner considers the tax benefit to be fair and reasonable having regard to that shareholding interest.

    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow the whole or part of any capital losses of an insolvent company.


    SECTION 175-75  

    175-75   Net capital loss resulting from disallowed capital losses  
    If a company has a *net capital gain for an income year because the Commissioner *disallows under this Subdivision *capital losses of the company for the income year (or parts of them), the company also has a net capital loss for the income year equal to the total of those losses and parts of losses.

    To find out how much of the net capital loss can be applied in later income years: see Subdivision 165-CA .

    To find out how to apply it: see sections 102-5 and 102-15 .

    Subdivision 175-C - Tax benefits from unused bad debt deductions  

    SECTION 175-80   When Commissioner can disallow deduction for bad debt  

    175-80(1)    
    This Subdivision sets out cases where the Commissioner may disallow some or all of a deduction for a debt (or part of a debt) that is owed to a company and is written off as bad in the income year.

    175-80(2)    


    However, the Commissioner cannot disallow any of the deduction if the company:


    (a) fails to meet a condition in section 165-123 (about the company maintaining the same owners) in respect of the *first continuity period or the *second continuity period; but


    (b) meets the condition in section 165-126 by satisfying the *business continuity test under section 165-210 .


    SECTION 175-85   First case: income or capital gain injected into company because of available bad debt  

    175-85(1)    
    The Commissioner may disallow some or all of the deduction if the company would not have had some or all (the injected amount ) of its assessable income or *capital gains for the income year if:


    (a) the debt had not been incurred; and


    (b) the debt (or the relevant part of the debt) had not been written off (or able to be written off) as bad.

    175-85(2)    
    However, the Commissioner cannot disallow any of the deduction if the *continuing shareholders will benefit from the company having the injected amount to an extent that the Commissioner thinks fair and reasonable having regard to their respective rights and interests in the company.

    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow some or all of a deduction of an insolvent company.


    175-85(3)    
    The continuing shareholders are:


    (a) all of the persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company throughout the *first continuity period and the *second continuity period; and


    (b) all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s dividends throughout the *first continuity period and the *second continuity period; and


    (c) all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company ' s capital distributions throughout the *first continuity period and the *second continuity period.

    To find out who they were, apply whichever tests are applied in order to determine whether the company can deduct the debt (or the relevant part of the debt) in the first place.

    Note 1:

    See section 165-123 (about the company maintaining the same owners).

    Note 2:

    Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.


    SECTION 175-90   Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of bad debt deduction available to company  

    175-90(1)    
    The Commissioner may disallow some or all of the deduction if:


    (a) a person has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and


    (b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the debt had not been incurred and the debt (or the relevant part of the debt) had not been written off (or able to be written off) as bad.

    175-90(2)    
    However, the Commissioner cannot disallow any of the deduction if:


    (a) the person had a *shareholding interest in the company at some time during the income year; and


    (b) the Commissioner considers the tax benefit to be fair and reasonable having regard to that shareholding interest.

    Note:

    Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow some or all of a deduction of an insolvent company.


    175-90(3)    
    An expression means the same in this section as in Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    Subdivision 175-D - Common rules  

    SECTION 175-95   When a person has a shareholding interest in the company  

    175-95(1)    


    A person has a shareholding interest in the company if the person is:


    (a) the beneficial owner; or


    (b) the trustee of a *family trust who is the owner;

    of:


    (c) *shares in the company; or


    (d) an interest in *shares in the company.


    175-95(2)    
    A person also has a shareholding interest in the company if:


    (a) the person has a shareholding interest in another company; and


    (b) the other company has a shareholding interest in the company (including one resulting from any other application or applications of this subsection).


    SECTION 175-100  

    175-100   Commissioner may disallow excluded losses etc. of insolvent companies  


    Despite a subsection listed in column 1, the Commissioner may, under a subsection listed in column 2, disallow some or all of an *excluded loss, deduction, or *capital loss, of a company (as the case requires) if:

    (a)    the company is or becomes:


    (i) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or

    (ii) an entity with a similar status under a *foreign law to a Chapter 5 body corporate; and

    (b)    

    the company is insolvent (within the meaning of section 9 of the Corporations Act 2001 ) when the company becomes an entity mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i) or (ii) .


    Commissioner may disallow excluded losses etc. for insolvent companies
    Item Column 1 Column 2
    Despite this subsection... the Commissioner may disallow under this subsection:
      1 Subsection 175-10(2) Subsection 175-10(1)
      2 Subsection 175-15(2) Subsection 175-15(1)
      3 Subsection 175-20(2) Subsection 175-20(1)
      4 Subsection 175-25(2) Subsection 175-25(1)
      5 Subsection 175-30(4) Subsection 175-30(1) or (2)
      6 Subsection 175-45(2) Subsection 175-45(1)
      7 Subsection 175-50(2) Subsection 175-50(1)
      8 Subsection 175-60(2) Subsection 175-60(1)
      9 Subsection 175-65(2) Subsection 175-65(1)
    10 Subsection 175-70(4) Subsection 175-70(1) or (2)
    11 Subsection 175-85(2) Subsection 175-85(1)
    11 Subsection 175-90(2) Subsection 175-90(1)

    Division 180 - Information about family trusts with interests in companies  

    SECTION 180-1   What this Division is about  


    If a company would only avoid the tax consequences of Division 165 or 175 because of interests held by a foreign resident family trust, the Commissioner may require the company to give certain information about the family trust. If it is not given, the company does not avoid the tax consequences of that Division.

    Subdivision 180-A - Information relevant to Division 165  

    SECTION 180-5   Information about family trusts with interests in companies  


    Notice about company

    180-5(1)    
    The Commissioner may give a company a notice in accordance with section 180-10 if the requirements of this section are met.

    Tax detriment under Division 165

    180-5(2)    


    In its *income tax return for an income year:


    (a) the company must have deducted a *tax loss from a *loss year where it would not be allowed to deduct the tax loss if it did not meet the conditions in section 165-12 ; or


    (b) the company must not have calculated:


    (i) its taxable income and tax loss under Subdivision 165-B ; and

    (ii) its *net capital gain and *net capital loss under Subdivision 165-CB ;
    where it would have been required to calculate them under that Subdivision if it did not satisfy the requirements of paragraph 165-35(a) ; or


    (c) the company must have applied a *net capital loss from an earlier income year in working out its net capital gain where it would not have been allowed to apply the loss if it did not meet the condition in section 165-12 as applied on the assumption mentioned in subsection 165-96(1) ; or


    (d) the company must have deducted a debt that it wrote off as bad in the income year where it would not be allowed to deduct the debt if it did not satisfy the requirements of paragraph 165-120(1)(a) or (b).



    Role of family trust

    180-5(3)    
    The Commissioner must be satisfied that the company:


    (a) if paragraph (2)(a) applies - meets the conditions in section 165-12 ; or


    (b) if paragraph (2)(b) applies - satisfies the requirements of paragraph 165-35(a) ; or


    (c) if paragraph (2)(c) applies - meets the conditions in section 165-12 as applied on the assumption mentioned in subsection 165-96(1) ; or


    (d) if paragraph (2)(d) applies - satisfies the requirements of paragraph 165-120(1)(a) or (b);

    but it would not do so unless one or more trusts were *family trusts.



    Foreign resident trust

    180-5(4)    
    When the Commissioner gives the notice, for at least one of the *family trusts:


    (a) a trustee of the trust must be a foreign resident; or


    (b) the central management and control of the trust must be outside Australia.



    When notice must be given

    180-5(5)    
    The Commissioner must give the notice before the later of:


    (a) 5 years after the income year to which the return relates; and


    (b) the end of the period during which the company is required by section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to retain records in relation to that income year.

    SECTION 180-10   Notice where requirements of section 180-5 are met  


    Information required

    180-10(1)    


    The notice that the Commissioner may give if the requirements of section 180-5 are met must require the company to give the Commissioner specified information about conferrals of present entitlements to, and distributions (within the meaning of Subdivision 272-B in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) of, income and capital, since the start of:


    (a) if paragraph 180-5(2)(a) applies - the *loss year mentioned in that paragraph; or


    (b) if paragraph 180-5(2)(b) applies - the income year for which that paragraph is being applied; or


    (c) if paragraph 180-5(2)(c) applies - the earlier income year mentioned in that paragraph; or


    (d) if paragraph 180-5(2)(d) applies:


    (i) where the debt mentioned in that paragraph was incurred in an earlier income year - the day on which the debt was incurred; or

    (ii) where the debt mentioned in that paragraph was incurred in the income year mentioned in that paragraph - that income year;

    by all of the *family trusts meeting the requirements of paragraph 180-5(4)(a) or (b).



    Company knowledge

    180-10(2)    
    The information need not be within the knowledge of the company at the time the notice is given.

    Period for giving information

    180-10(3)    
    The notice must specify a period within which the company is to give the information. The period must not end earlier than 21 days after the day on which the Commissioner gives the notice.

    Consequence of not giving the information

    180-10(4)    
    If the company does not give the information within the period or within such further period as the Commissioner allows:


    (a) if paragraph 180-5(2)(a) applies - the company is not entitled, and is taken never to have been entitled, to deduct the *tax loss; or


    (b) if paragraph 180-5(2)(b) applies - the company is required, and taken always to have been required:


    (i) to calculate its taxable income and tax loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-B ; and

    (ii) to calculate its *net capital gain and *net capital loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-CB ; or


    (c) if paragraph 180-5(2)(c) applies - the company is not entitled, and is taken never to have been entitled, to apply the net capital loss; or


    (d) if paragraph 180-5(2)(d) applies - the company is not entitled, and is taken never to have been entitled, to deduct the debt.

    180-10(5)    
    If, because of paragraph (4)(b), the company is required to calculate under Subdivision 165-B its taxable income and *tax loss for the income year concerned, that Subdivision is to be applied as if it required the income year to be divided into such periods as would result in the highest possible taxable income for the income year.

    180-10(6)    
    If, because of paragraph (4)(b), the company is required to calculate under Subdivision 165-CB its *net capital gain and *net capital loss for the income year concerned, that Subdivision is to be applied as if it required the income year to be divided into such periods as would result in the highest net capital gain for the income year.

    No offences or penalties

    180-10(7)    


    To avoid doubt, subsections (4) to (6) do not cause the company to commit any offence or be liable to any penalty under Part 4-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for:


    (a) deducting the *tax loss; or


    (b) not calculating its taxable income and tax loss under Subdivision 165-B as it applies in accordance with subsection (5) of this section; or


    (c) not calculating its *net capital gain and *net capital loss under Subdivision 165-CB as it applies in accordance with subsection (6) of this section; or


    (d) applying the net capital loss; or


    (e) deducting the debt;

    in the company ' s *income tax return.


    Subdivision 180-B - Information relevant to Division 175  

    SECTION 180-15   Information about family trusts with interests in companies  


    Notice about company

    180-15(1)    
    The Commissioner may give a company a notice in accordance with section 180-20 if the requirements of this section are met.

    Tax detriment under Division 175

    180-15(2)    
    The Commissioner:


    (a) must have been prevented by subsection 175-10(2) or 175-15(2) from disallowing, as a deduction for an income year, the whole or part of a *tax loss from a *loss year; or


    (b) must have been prevented by subsection 175-20(2) , 175-25(2) or 175-30(4) from disallowing the whole or part of a deduction for an income year; or


    (c) must have been prevented by subsection 175-45(2) or 175-50(2) from disallowing, in working out the *net capital gain or *net capital loss for an income year, the whole or part of a *net capital loss for an earlier income year (or a part of one); or


    (d) must have been prevented by subsection 175-60(2) , 175-65(2) or 175-70(4) from disallowing, in working out its net capital gain or net capital loss for an income year, the whole or part of a *capital loss made during the income year; or


    (e) must have been prevented by subsection 175-85(2) or 175-90(2) from disallowing, as a deduction for an income year, the whole or part of a debt.

    Role of family trust

    180-15(3)    
    A *family trust must have been:


    (a) one of the *continuing shareholders mentioned in subsection 175-10(2) , 175-20(2) , 175-25(2) , 175-45(2) , 175-60(2) , 175-65(2) or 175-85(2) ; or


    (b) the person who had the *shareholding interest mentioned in subsection 175-15(2) , 175-30(4) , 175-50(2) , 175-70(4) or 175-90(2) ;

    as the case requires.



    Foreign resident trust

    180-15(4)    
    When the Commissioner gives the notice:


    (a) a trustee of the *family trust must be a foreign resident; or


    (b) the central management and control of the *family trust must be outside Australia.



    When notice must be given

    180-15(5)    
    The Commissioner must give the notice before the later of:


    (a) 5 years after the income year mentioned in subsection (2); and


    (b) the end of the period during which the company is required by section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to retain records in relation to that income year.

    SECTION 180-20   Notice where requirements of section 180-15 are met  


    Information required

    180-20(1)    


    The notice that the Commissioner may give if the requirements of section 180-15 are met must require the company to give the Commissioner specified information about conferrals of present entitlements to, and distributions (within the meaning of Subdivision 272-B in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) of, income and capital by the *family trust since the start of:


    (a) the *loss year mentioned in paragraph 180-15(2)(a) ; or


    (b) the income year mentioned in paragraph 180-15(2)(b) or (d); or


    (c) the earlier income year mentioned in paragraph 180-15(2)(c) ; or


    (d) if the debt mentioned in paragraph 180-15(2)(e) was incurred in the income year mentioned in that paragraph - that income year; or


    (e) if the debt mentioned in paragraph 180-15(2)(e) was incurred in an earlier income year than the one mentioned in that paragraph - the day on which the debt was incurred.



    Company knowledge

    180-20(2)    
    The information need not be within the knowledge of the company at the time the notice is given.

    Period for giving information

    180-20(3)    
    The notice must specify a period within which the company is to give the information. The period must not end earlier than 21 days after the day on which the Commissioner gives the notice.

    Consequence of not giving the information

    180-20(4)    
    If the company does not give the information within the period or within such further period as the Commissioner allows:


    (a) subsection 175-10(2) , 175-15(2) , 175-20(2) , 175-25(2) , 175-30(4) , 175-85(2) or 175-90(2) does not prevent the Commissioner from disallowing the deduction; or


    (b) subsection 175-45(2) or 175-50(2) does not prevent the Commissioner from *disallowing the *net capital loss; or


    (c) subsection 175-60(2) , 175-65(2) or 175-70(4) does not prevent the Commissioner from *disallowing the *capital loss;

    as the case requires.



    No offences or penalties

    180-20(5)    


    To avoid doubt, subsection (4) does not cause the company to commit any offence or be liable to any penalty under Part 4-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for claiming the deduction, or applying the *net capital loss or *capital loss, in the company ' s *income tax return.

    Division 195 - Special types of company  

    Subdivision 195-A - Pooled development funds (PDFs)  

    Guide to Subdivision 195-A

    SECTION 195-1   What this Subdivision is about  

    This Subdivision contains rules about the income tax treatment of:

  • • pooled development funds (PDFs)
  • • shares in PDFs.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Working out a PDF ' s taxable income and tax loss
    195-5 Deductibility of PDF tax losses
    195-10 PDF cannot transfer tax loss
    195-15 Tax loss for year in which company becomes a PDF
    Working out a PDF ' s net capital gain and net capital loss
    195-25 Applying a PDF ' s net capital losses
    195-30 PDF cannot transfer net capital loss
    195-35 Net capital loss for year in which company becomes a PDF
    Working out a PDF ' s loss carry back tax offset
    195-37 PDF cannot carry back tax loss

    Working out a PDF's taxable income and tax loss

    SECTION 195-5  

    195-5   Deductibility of PDF tax losses  
    If a company is a *PDF at the end of an income year for which it has a *tax loss, it can deduct the tax loss in a later income year only if it is a PDF throughout the later income year.

    SECTION 195-10  

    195-10   PDF cannot transfer tax loss  


    If a company is a *PDF at the end of an income year for which it has a *tax loss, it cannot transfer any amount of the tax loss under Subdivision 170-A (which is about the transfer of tax losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies).

    SECTION 195-15   Tax loss for year in which company becomes a PDF  

    195-15(1)    
    This section applies if a company becomes a *PDF during an income year and is still a PDF at the end of it.

    195-15(2)    
    Divide the income year into periods as follows:

    (a)    the non-PDF period is the period beginning at the start of the income year and ending when the company becomes a *PDF;

    (b)    the PDF period is the rest of the income year.

    195-15(3)    
    For each period, work out whether the company has a taxable income or a *tax loss (or both), treating each period as if it were an income year.

    195-15(4)    
    If the company has:

    (a)    a taxable income for the non-PDF period; and

    (b)    a *tax loss for the PDF period;

    that tax loss is a tax loss of the company for the income year.

    Note:

    The company can only deduct the tax loss while it is a PDF: see section 195-5 .


    195-15(5)    
    If the company has a *tax loss for the non-PDF period:

    (a)    section 195-5 does not prevent the company from deducting its tax loss for the income year in a later income year; and

    (b)    

    section 195-10 does not prevent the company from transferring an amount of the tax loss under Subdivision 170-A (which is about the transfer of tax losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies); and

    (c)    

    section 195-37 does not prevent the company from *carrying back its tax loss for the purpose of working out the amount of the company ' s *loss carry back tax offset for the 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 income year;

    to the extent that the tax loss does not exceed the tax loss for the non-PDF period.


    195-15(6)    
    These rules apply in addition to the other rules about how *tax losses are applied or transferred.

    The other rules start in Division 36 (which is about tax losses of earlier income years).


    Working out a PDF's net capital gain and net capital loss

    SECTION 195-25  

    195-25   Applying a PDF's net capital losses  
    If a company is a *PDF at the end of an income year for which it has a *net capital loss, it can apply the loss in working out its *net capital gain for a later income year only if it is a PDF throughout the last day of the later income year.

    SECTION 195-30  

    195-30   PDF cannot transfer net capital loss  


    If a company is a *PDF at the end of an income year for which it has a *net capital loss, it cannot transfer any amount of the loss under Subdivision 170-B (which is about the transfer of net capital losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies).

    SECTION 195-35   Net capital loss for year in which company becomes a PDF  

    195-35(1)    
    This section applies if a company becomes a *PDF during an income year and is still a PDF at the end of it.

    195-35(2)    
    Divide the income year into periods according to subsection 195-15(2) (about working out the company's tax loss for the income year).

    195-35(3)    
    For each period, work out whether the company has a *net capital gain or a *net capital loss (or both), treating each period as if it were an income year.

    195-35(4)    
    If the company has:


    (a) a *net capital gain for the non-PDF period; and


    (b) a *net capital loss for the PDF period;

    that loss is a net capital loss of the company for the income year.

    Note:

    The company can only apply the loss while it is a PDF: see section 195-25 .


    195-35(5)    
    If the company has a *net capital loss for the non-PDF period:


    (a) section 195-25 does not prevent the company from applying its *net capital loss for the income year in working out its *net capital gain for a later income year; and


    (b) section 195-30 does not prevent the company from transferring an amount of its net capital loss for the income year under Subdivision 170-B (which is about the transfer of net capital losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies);

    to the extent that its net capital loss for the income year does not exceed its net capital loss for the non-PDF period.


    195-35(6)    
    These rules apply in addition to the other rules about how *net capital losses are applied or transferred.

    The other rules start in Division 102 (about net capital gains and losses).


    Working out a PDF ' s loss carry back tax offset

    SECTION 195-37  

    195-37   PDF cannot carry back tax loss  


    A company that:

    (a)    has a *tax loss for an income year; and

    (b)    is a *PDF at the end of the income year;

    cannot *carry back the loss to an earlier income year for the purposes of working out the amount of the company ' s *loss carry back tax offset for the 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 income year (the offset year ) unless the company is a PDF throughout the earlier income year and the offset year.

    Subdivision 195-B - Limited partnerships  

    Guide to Subdivision 195-B

    SECTION 195-60   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision contains rules about the income tax treatment of limited partnerships that become, or cease to be, venture capital limited partnerships, early stage venture capital limited partnerships, Australian venture capital funds of funds or venture capital management partnerships.

    It also allows the Commissioner to determine how to take account of limited partnerships having income years of less than 12 months when they become, or cease to be, venture capital limited partnerships, early stage venture capital limited partnerships, Australian venture capital funds of funds or venture capital management partnerships.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    195-65 Tax losses cannot be transferred to a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP
    195-70 Previous tax losses can be deducted after ceasing to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP
    195-72 Tax losses cannot be carried back to before ceasing to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP
    195-75 Determinations to take account of income years of less than 12 months

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 195-65  

    195-65   Tax losses cannot be transferred to a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP  


    A *limited partnership ' s *tax loss for a *loss year cannot be deducted in a later income year during which the partnership is a *VCLP, an *ESVCLP, an *AFOF or a *VCMP.

    SECTION 195-70  

    195-70   Previous tax losses can be deducted after ceasing to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP  


    This Subdivision does not prevent a *limited partnership that has ceased to be a *VCLP, an *ESVCLP, an *AFOF or a *VCMP from deducting, in an income year, a *tax loss for a *loss year that occurred before the partnership was a VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or VCMP.

    SECTION 195-72  

    195-72   Tax losses cannot be carried back to before ceasing to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP  


    A *limited partnership ' s *tax loss for a *loss year cannot be *carried back to an income year during which the partnership was a *VCLP, an *ESVCLP, an *AFOF or a *VCMP.

    SECTION 195-75   Determinations to take account of income years of less than 12 months  

    195-75(1)    


    The Commissioner may, by legislative instrument, make a determination modifying the operation of one or more provisions of this Act in relation to limited partnerships whose accounting periods commence or end under section 18A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    195-75(2)    
    A determination can only be made in order to take account of the fact that such accounting periods are of less than 12 months ' duration.

    195-75(3)    
    (Repealed by No 58 of 2006 )


    Subdivision 195-C - Corporate collective investment vehicles  

    Guide to Subdivision 195-C

    SECTION 195-100   What this Subdivision is about  


    The business, assets and liabilities of each sub-fund of a CCIV are taken to constitute the trust estate of a separate trust (a CCIV sub-fund trust), of which the CCIV is the trustee and the members of the sub-fund are the beneficiaries.

    This Subdivision sets out further rules to facilitate the CCIV, and the sub-fund and its members, being taxed on this basis, including:

  • • modifications of the rules for determining whether the CCIV sub-fund trust is a managed investment trust (under Division 275 ) and an attribution managed investment trust (under Division 276 ); and
    Note:

    These modifications also affect whether the trust is a withholding MIT under Subdivision 12-H in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

  • • rules to support the application of Division 6 or 6C of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , to the extent that Division applies to the trust; and
  • • rules to support the application to the trust of relevant rules about trust losses and capital gains.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    195-105 Effect of this Subdivision
    195-110 Each sub-fund of a CCIV is taken to be a separate trust
    195-115 A CCIV sub-fund trust is a unit trust
    195-120 Beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust has fixed entitlements to shares of income and capital of the trust
    195-123 How to work out the income of the trust estate of a CCIV sub-fund trust for an income year
    195-125 When a beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust is presently entitled to trust income
    195-127 When a beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust has an individual interest in exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust estate
    195-130 Application of Division 275 (managed investment trusts) to a CCIV sub-fund trust
    195-135 Application of Division 276 (AMITs) to a CCIV sub-fund trust
    195-140 Entry on Australian Business Register

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 195-105   Effect of this Subdivision  

    195-105(1)    
    This Subdivision has effect for the purposes of all *taxation laws, to the exclusion of those laws as they would otherwise apply in relation to *CCIVs and their members (in their capacity as such).

    Note:

    Subsection (3) excludes some taxation laws from this subsection.


    195-105(2)    
    Without limiting the generality of subsection (1) , the purposes referred to in that subsection include how *taxation laws apply in relation to other entities, in so far as that application is affected by the application of those laws in relation to *CCIVs and their members (in their capacity as such).

    Note:

    For example, in applying subsection 318(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to determine whether a CCIV is an associate of a natural person for the purposes of a provision affecting the income tax payable by that person:

  • (a) paragraph 318(1)(d) of that Act (providing for when a trustee of a trust is an associate of the natural person) would apply; and
  • (b) paragraph 318(1)(e) of that Act (providing for when a company is an associate of the natural person) would not apply.

  • 195-105(3)    
    Subsections (1) and (2)do not apply to the following *taxation laws:

    (a)    the Foreign Acquisitions and Takeovers Act 1975 ;

    (b)    legislative instruments made under that Act.

    SECTION 195-110   Each sub-fund of a CCIV is taken to be a separate trust  

    195-110(1)    
    For each *sub-fund of a *CCIV, the business, *assets and *liabilities of the sub-fund are taken to constitute the trust estate of a separate trust, of which the CCIV is the trustee and the *members of the sub-fund are the beneficiaries.

    195-110(2)    
    A trust that is taken to exist because of the application of subsection (1) to a *sub-fund of a *CCIV is a CCIV sub-fund trust .

    Note:

    The combined effect of this section and subsections 960-100(2) and (3) is that a CCIV is a different entity in its capacity as trustee of each of its CCIV sub-fund trusts.

    Because of subsection 195-105(1) , the tax treatment of the CCIV in those capacities excludes the tax treatment that would otherwise apply to the CCIV as a company. Also, the tax treatment of members of the CCIV is based on them being treated as beneficiaries of their respective CCIV sub-fund trusts, to the exclusion of the tax treatment that would otherwise apply to them as members of a company.

    Example 1:

    CCIV A has only one sub-fund (sub-fund A). CCIV B has only one sub-fund (sub-fund B).

    CCIV A holds shares in CCIV B. The shares are referable to sub-fund B. They are assets of sub-fund A.

    In its capacity as trustee of the CCIV sub-fund trust for sub-fund A, CCIV A is a beneficiary of the CCIV sub-fund trust for sub-fund B.

    Example 2:

    A CCIV has 2 sub-funds: sub-fund A and sub-fund B.

    As permitted by section 1230Q of the Corporations Act 2001 , the CCIV acquires, in respect of sub-fund A, shares that are referable to sub-fund B. The shares are assets of sub-fund A.

    In its capacity as trustee of the CCIV sub-fund trust for sub-fund A, the CCIV is a beneficiary of the CCIV sub-fund trust for sub-fund B.


    SECTION 195-115   A CCIV sub-fund trust is a unit trust  

    195-115(1)    
    A *CCIV sub-fund trust is taken to be a unit trust.

    Note:

    One consequence of this subsection is that a CCIV sub-fund trust can be a public unit trust if it meets the other tests in section 102P of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    195-115(2)    
    The *shares that are *referable to the *sub-fund are taken to be the units in the trust.

    195-115(3)    
    The rights, obligations and other characteristics attaching to a unit in the trust are taken to be the same, as nearly as practicable, as the rights, obligations and other characteristics attaching to the share that is taken to be that unit.

    Note:

    One consequence of this section is that if shares that are referable to the sub-fund are listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange, the units in the sub-fund trust that those shares are taken to be will likewise be taken to be listed in that official list.

    Examples of provisions to which this is relevant are:

  • (a) paragraph 275-20(2)(a) (widely-held requirement for managed investment trusts) of this Act; and
  • (b) paragraph 102P(1)(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (public unit trusts).

  • SECTION 195-120   Beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust has fixed entitlements to shares of income and capital of the trust  

    195-120(1)    
    A *beneficiary of a *CCIV sub-fund trust is taken to have a fixed entitlement to a share of income of the trust that the trust derives from time to time. At a particular time, that share is equal to the percentage worked out using the formula:


    Beneficiary dividends × 100
    Total dividends

    where:

    beneficiary dividends
    is the total of the *dividends that the *beneficiary has a right to receive because of *shares that the beneficiary holds at that time and are *referable to the *sub-fund.

    total dividends
    is the total of all *dividends that are payable on all *shares that are on issue at that time and are *referable to the *sub-fund.


    195-120(2)    
    A *beneficiary of a *CCIV sub-fund trust is taken to have a fixed entitlement to a share of the capital of the trust at a particular time equal to the percentage worked out using the formula:


    Beneficiary capital distribution × 100
    Total capital distribution

    where:

    beneficiary capital distribution
    is the amount of a distribution of paid-up capital (in the event of a return of capital) that the *beneficiary has a right to receive because of *shares that the beneficiary holds at that time and are *referable to the *sub-fund.

    total capital distribution
    is the total distribution of paid-up capital (in that event) payable on all *shares that are on issue at that time and are *referable to the *sub-fund.


    195-120(3)    
    A fixed entitlement that exists because of this section is taken to be a fixed entitlement within the meaning given by sections 272-5 , 272-10 , 272-15 and 272-40 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Note:

    This is relevant to, for example, the definition of fixed entitlement in subsection 102UC(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    SECTION 195-123   How to work out the income of the trust estate of a CCIV sub-fund trust for an income year  

    195-123(1)    
    The income (the trust income ) of the trust estate of a *CCIV sub-fund trust for an income year is worked out in accordance with this section.

    Note:

    This is relevant to working out the income tax position of the CCIV sub-fund trust and its beneficiaries under Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    195-123(2)    
    If:

    (a)    the *CCIV is a *retail CCIV at the end of the income year; and

    (b)    the amount of the *sub-fund ' s profit for the income year, as required to be stated in the financial statements included in the financial report for the sub-fund for the income year that the CCIV is required to prepare because of paragraph 1232C(1)(a) of the Corporations Act 2001 , is greater than nil;

    the trust income is that profit.


    195-123(3)    
    If:

    (a)    the *CCIV is not a *retail CCIV at the end of the income year; and

    (b)    the amount of the *sub-fund ' s profit for the income year that would, if the CCIV had been a retail CCIV at the end of the income year, be required to be stated as mentioned in paragraph (2)(b) is greater than nil;

    the trust income is that profit.


    195-123(4)    
    If neither of subsections (2) and (3) applies, the trust income is nil.

    SECTION 195-125   When a beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust is presently entitled to trust income  

    195-125(1)   
    A *beneficiary of a *CCIV sub-fund trust is taken to be presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust estate for an income year if any of the *sub-fund ' s profit for the income year was or is payable to the beneficiary by way of one or more *dividends declared during, or within 3 months after, the income year.

    195-125(2)    
    That share consists of so much of that profit as was or is payable to the beneficiary by way of one or more such *dividends.

    Note:

    To the extent that any of that profit is not payable to a beneficiary by way of such dividends, it will be income to which no beneficiary is presently entitled. This can have consequences under section 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    195-125(3)    
    Within 3 months after the end of the income year, the *CCIV must notify the *beneficiary, in the *approved form, of the following matters:

    (a)    whether the beneficiary is presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust estate for the income year and, if so, the amount of that share;

    (b)    for each *dividend that was declared during, or within 3 months after, the income year on *shares referable to the *sub-fund, and was or is payable to the beneficiary:


    (i) the amount of the dividend; and

    (ii) how much of the dividend consists of any of the *sub-fund ' s profit for the income year.
    Note:

    Failure to comply with this section may constitute an offence against subsection 8C(1) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    195-125(4)    
    For the purposes of this section, an amount is taken to be payable to the *beneficiary if it is required to be applied or dealt with in any way on the beneficiary ' s behalf or as the beneficiary directs.

    195-125(5)    
    Except as provided in this section, a *beneficiary of a *CCIV sub-fund trust is not taken to be presently entitled to a share of income of the trust estate.

    SECTION 195-127   When a beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust has an individual interest in exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust estate  

    195-127(1)    
    A *beneficiary of a *CCIV sub-fund trust:

    (a)    is taken to have an individual interest in the exempt income of the trust estate from time to time; and

    (b)    is taken to have an individual interest in the *non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust estate from time to time.

    195-127(2)    
    The individual interest referred to in paragraph (1)(a) or (b) is the same as the share (of income that the trust derives from time to time) to which the beneficiary has a *fixed entitlement under subsection 195-120(1) .

    195-127(3)    
    Except as provided in this section, a *beneficiary of a *CCIV sub-fund trust is not taken to have an individual interest in the exempt income, or *non-assessable non-exempt income, of the trust estate.

    SECTION 195-130   Application of Division 275 (managed investment trusts) to a CCIV sub-fund trust  

    195-130(1)    
    This section sets out how to apply Division 275 to a trust that is a *CCIV sub-fund trust.

    Determining whether the trust is a managed investment trust

    195-130(2)    
    Section 275-10 has effect in relation to the trust as if the following paragraph were substituted for paragraph 275-10(3)(c) :

    (c)    at the time the payment is made, the *sub-fund is being used for collective investment by pooling the contributions of the *members of the sub-fund as consideration to acquire rights to benefits produced from those contributions; and

    195-130(3)    
    In applying section 275-10 to the trust, disregard the following provisions:

    (a)    paragraph 275-10(3)(d) ;

    (b)    paragraph 275-10(3)(g) .

    195-130(4)    
    Section 275-10 has effect in relation to the trust as if the following paragraph were substituted for paragraph 275-10(3)(e) :

    (e)    the trust satisfies, in relation to the income year:


    (i) if, at the time the payment is made, the trust is covered by section 275-15 - either or both of the widely-held requirements in subsection 275-20(1) and 275-25(1) ; or

    (ii) if, at the time the payment is made, the trust is not covered by section 275-15 - either or both of the widely-held requirements in subsections 275-20(2) and 275-25(1) ; and


    Determining whether the trust is a trust with wholesale membership

    195-130(5)    
    In applying section 275-15 to the trust, disregard paragraph 275-15(a) .

    Determining whether the trust satisfies the widely-held requirements

    195-130(6)    
    In applying section 275-45 to the trust, disregard paragraph 275-45(1)(d) .

    SECTION 195-135   Application of Division 276 (AMITs) to a CCIV sub-fund trust  

    195-135(1)    
    This section sets out how to apply Division 276 to a trust that is a *CCIV sub-fund trust.

    Determining whether the trust is an attribution managed investment trust (AMIT)

    195-135(2)    
    In applying section 276-10 to the trust, disregard the following provisions:

    (a)    paragraph 276-10(1)(b) ;

    (b)    paragraph 276-10(1)(e) .

    Note:

    The effect of disregarding paragraph 276-10(1)(e) is that the trustee of a *CCIV sub-fund trust does not have a choice as to whether the trust is an AMIT.



    Trustee cannot choose to treat classes of membership interests as separate AMITs

    195-135(3)    
    In applying Division 276 to the trust, disregard section 276-20 .

    SECTION 195-140   Entry on Australian Business Register  

    195-140(1)    
    If a *CCIV sub-fund trust has an *ABN, the *Australian Business Registrar must enter in the *Australian Business Register in relation to the trust a statement that:

    (a)    indicates that the trust is taken to exist for tax purposes because of the application of section 195-110 to a *sub-fund of a *CCIV; and

    (b)    sets out the sub-fund ' s ARFN (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ).

    Note:

    ARFN is short for Australian Registered Fund Number.


    195-140(2)    
    The *Australian Business Registrar must take reasonable steps to ensure that information entered in the *Australian Business Register under this section is accurate. For this purpose, the Registrar may correct or update the information.


    Division 197 - Tainted share capital accounts  

    Guide to Division 197  

    SECTION 197-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division:

  • (a) applies to certain amounts transferred to a company ' s share capital account (see Subdivision 197-A ); and
  • (b) provides for a franking debit to arise if such an amount is transferred to the share capital account (see Subdivision 197-B ); and
  • (c) provides for the tainting of the share capital account if such an amount is transferred, for how the account may be untainted, and for consequences that flow from untainting the account (see Subdivision 197-C ).
  • Subdivision 197-A - What transfers into a company ' s share capital account does this Division apply to?  

    SECTION 197-5   Division generally applies to an amount transferred to share capital account from another account  

    197-5(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2), this Division applies to an amount (the transferred amount ) that is transferred to a company ' s *share capital account from another of the company ' s accounts, if the company was an Australian resident immediately before the time of the transfer.

    Note: If a company has 2 or more share capital accounts, those accounts are taken to be a single account (see subsection 975-300(2) ).


    197-5(2)    
    The other provisions of this Subdivision may stop this Division from applying to some or all of the transferred amount. If those other provisions stop this Division from applying to only some of the transferred amount, this Division (other than this Subdivision) applies to the balance of the transferred amount as if only that balance of the amount had been transferred to the company ' s *share capital account.

    SECTION 197-10  

    197-10   Exclusion for amounts that could be identified as share capital  


    This Division does not apply to the transferred amount if it could, at all times before the transfer, be identified in the books of the company as an amount of share capital.

    SECTION 197-15   Exclusion for amounts transferred under debt/equity swaps  

    197-15(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:


    (a) the transfer is under an *arrangement under which:


    (i) a person discharges, releases or otherwise extinguishes the whole or a part of a debt that the company owes to the person; and

    (ii) the discharge, release or extinguishment is in return for the company issuing *shares (other than redeemable preference shares) in the company to the person; and


    (b) the transfer is a credit to the *share capital account that is made because of the issue of the shares in return for the discharge, release or extinguishment of the debt.

    197-15(2)    
    If the transferred amount exceeds the lesser of:


    (a) the *market value of the *shares issued by the company; and


    (b) so much of the debt as is discharged, released or extinguished in return for the shares;

    subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to the amount of the excess.



    SECTION 197-20  

    197-20   Exclusion for amounts transferred leading to there being no shares with a par value - non-Corporations Act companies  


    This Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:


    (a) immediately before the transfer of the amount, the company was not incorporated under the Corporations Act 2001 ; and


    (b) the transfer is under, or in accordance with, an *Australian law that requires or allows either or both of the following to become part of the company ' s *share capital account:


    (i) the company ' s share premium account;

    (ii) the company ' s capital redemption reserve; and


    (c) the transfer is made as part of a process that leads to there being no *shares in the company that have a par value; and


    (d) the amount is transferred from the company ' s share premium account or capital redemption reserve.

    SECTION 197-25  

    197-25   Exclusion for transfers from option premium reserves  


    This Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:


    (a) it is transferred from an option premium reserve of the company; and


    (b) the transfer is because of the exercise of options to acquire *shares in the company; and


    (c) premiums in respect of those options were credited to the option premium reserve.

    SECTION 197-30   Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of non-insurance etc. companies  

    197-30(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:


    (a) the amount is transferred in connection with a demutualisation of the company; and


    (b) Division 326 in Schedule 2H to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the demutualisation; and


    (c) the transfer occurs within the limitation period in relation to the demutualisation (see subsection 326-20(3) in that Schedule).

    197-30(2)    
    If the sum of:


    (a) the transferred amount; and


    (b) any other amounts that were previously transferred to the company ' s *share capital account, from another account of the company, in connection with the demutualisation;

    exceeds the total capital contributions amount described in whichever of subsections (3) and (4) applies, subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to so much of the transferred amount as equals the lesser of the transferred amount and the amount of the excess.

    Note:

    If there are several transfers of amounts to the company ' s share capital account in connection with the demutualisation, this section must be applied separately in relation to each transferred amount, in the order in which the transfers are made.


    197-30(3)    
    If the company was not formed by the merger of 2 or more mutual entities, the total capital contributions amount referred to in subsection (2) is the sum of all the capital amounts:


    (a) that were contributed to the company by *members of the company before its demutualisation; and


    (b) in respect of which deductions are not allowable to the members; and


    (c) that were not payments for goods or services provided by the company.

    197-30(4)    
    If the company was formed by the merger of 2 or more mutual entities, the total capital contributions amount referred to in subsection (2) is the sum of:


    (a) all the capital amounts:


    (i) that were contributed to the company, before its demutualisation, by persons who became *members of the company at or after the time when the merger took place; and

    (ii) in respect of which deductions are not allowable to those members; and

    (iii) that were not payments for goods or services provided by the company; and


    (b) the *market values, at the time of the merger, of the entities that merged to form the company, as determined by a qualified valuer.

    SECTION 197-35   Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of insurance etc. companies  

    197-35(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:


    (a) the amount is transferred in connection with the demutualisation of a company; and


    (b) the demutualisation is implemented in accordance with a demutualisation method specified in Division 9AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and


    (c) the transfer occurs within the listing period in relation to the demutualisation (see subsection 121AE(6) of that Act); and


    (d) the company (the issuing company ) to whose *share capital account the amount is transferred is:


    (i) if the demutualisation method is the method specified in section 121AF or 121AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 - the demutualisation company; or

    (ii) if the demutualisation method is the method specified in section 121AH , 121AI , 121AJ , 121AK or 121AL of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 - the company issuing the ordinary shares referred to in that section.

    197-35(2)    
    If the sum of:


    (a) the transferred amount; and


    (b) all amounts that were previously transferred to the issuing company ' s *share capital account, from another account of the company, in connection with the demutualisation; and


    (c) all amounts that were previously transferred to the issuing company ' s retained profit account in connection with the demutualisation;

    exceeds the listing day company valuation amount (see subsection (3)), subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to so much of the transferred amount as equals the lesser of the transferred amount and the amount of the excess.

    Note:

    If there are several transfers of amounts to the issuing company ' s share capital account, this section must be applied separately in relation to each transferred amount, in the order in which the transfers are made.


    197-35(3)    
    The listing day company valuation amount has the same meaning as it has for the purposes of table 1 in section 121AS of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , as that table applies in relation to the demutualisation company (see note 3 to that table).

    SECTION 197-37   Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of private health insurers  

    197-37(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:


    (a) the amount is transferred in connection with a demutualisation of a company; and


    (b) Division 315 (about demutualisations of private health insurers) applies to the demutualisation; and


    (c) the company (the issuing company ) to whose *share capital account the amount is transferred is either:


    (i) the demutualisation health insurer; or

    (ii) the company mentioned in subparagraph 315-85(1)(a)(iii) issuing shares that are assets covered by section 315-85 ( demutualisation assets ).

    197-37(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to so much, if any, of the transferred amount as exceeds the sum of the amounts worked out under subsection (3) for each demutualisation asset that is a share issued:


    (a) by the issuing company under the demutualisation; and


    (b) to an entity that is either:


    (i) covered by section 315-90 (about participating policy holders); or

    (ii) the trustee of a trust covered by Subdivision 315-C (about the lost policy holders trust).

    197-37(3)    
    The amount worked out under this subsection for a share is:


    (a) the *market value of the share on the day it is issued; or


    (b) if the share is in a company covered by subparagraph 315-85(1)(a)(iii) that owns other assets in addition to the shares in the demutualising health insurer - worked out using the method statement in subsection 315-210(2) .

    SECTION 197-38   Exclusion for transfers connected with demutualisations of friendly society health or life insurers  

    197-38(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:


    (a) the amount is transferred in connection with a demutualisation of a company; and


    (b) Division 316 (about demutualisations of friendly society health and life insurers) applies in relation to the demutualisation; and


    (c) the company (the issuing company ) to whose *share capital account the amount is transferred is either:


    (i) the *friendly society described in that Division; or

    (ii) the company that owns all the shares in the friendly society.

    197-38(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to so much, if any, of the transferred amount as exceeds the sum of the *cost bases of *shares in the issuing company that:


    (a) are demutualisation assets (see section 316-110 ); and


    (b) are issued to an entity covered by section 316-115 .

    Note:

    Section 316-115 identifies entities connected directly or indirectly with the friendly society and affected by the special cost base rules in section 316-105 .


    197-38(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (2), work out the *cost base of a *share on the day on which it is issued, taking account of section 316-105 .

    SECTION 197-40   Exclusion for post-demutualisation transfers relating to life insurance companies  

    197-40(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:


    (a) a *life insurance company (the demutualised company ) has demutualised; and


    (b) the demutualisation was implemented in accordance with a demutualisation method specified in Division 9AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and


    (c) the amount is transferred after the end of the listing period in relation to the demutualisation (see subsection 121AE(6) of that Act); and


    (d) the company transferring the amount to its *share capital account is either:


    (i) the demutualised company (whichever demutualisation method was used); or

    (ii) if the demutualisation method was the method specified in section 121AH , 121AI , 121AJ , 121AK or 121AL of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 - the company (the issuing company ) that issued the ordinary shares referred to in that section; and


    (e) if subparagraph (d)(i) applies - the following conditions are satisfied in relation to the transferred amount:


    (i) the amount is transferred from an account of the demutualised company consisting of shareholders ' capital (within the meaning of the Life Insurance Act 1995 ) in relation to a statutory fund (within the meaning of that Act);

    (ii) the amount was part of such an account at the time of the demutualisation; and


    (f) if subparagraph (d)(ii) applies - the amount is transferred from a capital reserve created at the time of or in connection with the demutualisation.

    197-40(2)    
    If the sum of:


    (a) the transferred amount; and


    (b) all amounts that were previously transferred to the demutualised company ' s *share capital account, from another account of the demutualised company, as described in subsection (1); and


    (c) if the demutualisation method was the method specified in section 121AH , 121AI , 121AJ , 121AKor 121AL of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 - all amounts that were previously transferred to the issuing company ' s share capital account, from another account of the issuing company, as described in subsection (1); and


    (d) all amounts that were previously transferred, in connection with the demutualisation, to the share capital account of the issuing company (within the meaning of section 197-35 ) as described in subsection 197-35(1) , or to its retained profit account as described in paragraph 197-35(2)(c) ;

    exceeds the listing day company valuation amount (see subsection (3)), subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to so much of the transferred amount as equals the lesser of the transferred amount and the amount of the excess.

    Note:

    If there are several transfers of amounts to the share capital account of the demutualised company or the issuing company, this section must be applied separately in relation to each transferred amount, in the order in which the transfers are made.


    197-40(3)    
    The listing day company valuation amount has the same meaning as it has for the purposes of table 1 in section 121AS of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , as that table applies in relation to the demutualised company (see note 3 to that table).

    SECTION 197-42  

    197-42   Exclusion for exploration credits  


    This Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:

    (a)    the company transferring the amount is a *greenfields minerals explorer; and

    (b)    the amount is transferred in connection with the creation of *exploration credits.

    Subdivision 197-B - Consequence of transfer: franking debit arises  

    SECTION 197-45   A franking debit arises in relation to the transfer  

    197-45(1)    
    A *franking debit arises in a company ' s *franking account if an amount (the transferred amount ) to which this Division applies is transferred to the company ' s *share capital account. The debit arises immediately before the end of the *franking period in which the transfer of the amount occurs.

    197-45(2)    


    The amount of the *franking debit is calculated in accordance with the formula:


      Transferred amount × Applicable franking percentage  
      Applicable gross-up rate  

    where:

    applicable franking percentage
    means:


    (a) if, before the debit arises, the *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the transfer of the amount occurs has already been set by section 203-30 - that percentage; or


    (b) otherwise - 100%.

    applicable gross-up rate
    means the company ' s *corporate tax gross-up rate for the income year in which the franking debit arises.



    Subdivision 197-C - Consequence of transfer: tainting of share capital account  

    SECTION 197-50   The share capital account becomes tainted (if it is not already tainted)  

    197-50(1)    
    A company ' s *share capital account becomes tainted when an amount to which this Division applies is transferred to the account, if, at the time of the transfer, the account is not already tainted (because of the application of this section in relation to a previous transfer).

    Note:

    If a company ' s share capital account is tainted, then a distribution from the account is taxed as a dividend in the hands of the shareholder. This is because a tainted share capital account does not count as a share capital account for the purposes of paragraph (d) of the definition of dividend in subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see subsection 975-300(3) of this Act). However, although the distribution is taxed as a dividend, the company cannot pass on to the shareholder the benefit of the tax it has paid, because a distribution from a share capital account (whether or not tainted) is unfrankable (see paragraphs 202-45(e) and 975-300(3)(ba) of this Act).


    197-50(2)    
    The *share capital account remains tainted until the company chooses to untaint the account (see section 197-55 ).

    Note:

    If, after a choice to untaint is made, the company ' s share capital account becomes tainted again, the account remains tainted until a fresh choice to untaint is made.


    197-50(3)    
    The tainting amount , for a company ' s *share capital account that is *tainted at a particular time, means the sum of:


    (a) the amount transferred to the company ' s share capital account that most recently caused the account to become tainted; and


    (b) any other amounts to which this Division applies that have been transferred to the company ' s share capital account since the transfer referred to in paragraph (a) and before the particular time.

    SECTION 197-55   Choosing to untaint a tainted share capital account  

    197-55(1)    
    A company with a *share capital account that is *tainted may make a choice in the *approved form given to the Commissioner to untaint the account.

    197-55(2)    
    The choice can be made at any time, but cannot be revoked.

    Note:

    The choice has no effect in relation to a subsequent tainting of the share capital account that occurs after the choice is made.



    SECTION 197-60   Choosing to untaint - liability to untainting tax  


    Definitions

    197-60(1)    
    For the purpose of this section:


    (a) a company whose *share capital account is *tainted is a company with only lower tax members in relation to the tainting period if, throughout the tainting period, all *members of the company were covered by one, or a combination of 2 or more, of the following subparagraphs:


    (i) other companies;

    (ii) *complying superannuation entities;

    (iii) foreign residents; and


    (b) a company whose share capital account is tainted is a company with higher tax members in relation to the tainting period if it is not a company with only lower tax members in relation to the tainting period.

    For this purpose, the tainting period is the period beginning when the share capital account most recently became tainted and ending when the company chooses to untaint the account.



    Liability to untainting tax

    197-60(2)    
    A company that chooses to untaint its *share capital account is liable to pay tax, known as untainting tax , equal to the amount calculated in accordance with the formula:


    where:

    applicable tax amount
    has the meaning given by subsection (3).

    section 197-45 franking debits
    means the total *franking debits arising under section 197-45 because of the transfer of the amounts that made up the *tainting amount at the time of the choice.

    section 197-65 franking debits
    means the total (if any) *franking debits arising under section 197-65 because of the choice to untaint.

    Note:

    The payment of untainting tax does not give rise to a franking credit.


    197-60(3)    


    In subsection (2), the applicable tax amount is the amount calculated in accordance with the formula:

    where:

    applicable tax rate
    means:


    (a) for a company with only lower tax members in relation to the tainting period - the company ' s *corporate tax rate for imputation purposes for the income year in which the choice is made; or


    (b) for a company with higher tax members in relation to the tainting period - the sum of:


    (i) the maximum rate specified in column 2 of the table in Part 1 of Schedule 7 to the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 that applies for the income year in which the choice is made; and

    (ii) 3%.
    Note:

    The 3% referred to in subparagraph (b)(ii) relates to rates of Medicare levy and surcharge.

    notional franking amount
    has the meaning given by subsection (4).


    197-60(4)    


    In subsection (3), the notional franking amount is the amount calculated in accordance with the formula:


      *Tainting amount at time of choice to untaint × 1  
      Applicable gross-up rate  

    where:

    applicable gross-up rate
    means the company ' s *corporate tax gross-up rate for the income year in which the choice is made.



    Temporary budget repair levy

    197-60(5)    
    If the income year in which the choice is made corresponds to a temporary budget repair levy year (within the meaning of section 4-11 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ), increase the applicable tax rate calculated under subsection (3) by 2 percentage points.



    SECTION 197-65   Choosing to untaint - further franking debits may arise  


    When this section applies

    197-65(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a company chooses to untaint its *share capital account; and


    (b) the applicable franking percentage (within the meaning of subsection (3)) is higher than the percentage that was the *benchmark franking percentage in relation to the *franking period in which the transfer of an amount (the transferred amount ) that is, or is part of, the *tainting amount occurred.

    Note:

    If paragraph (b) is satisfied in relation to 2 or more amounts, this section is to be applied separately in relation to each of those amounts (so a separate franking debit will arise in relation to each of those amounts).



    Franking debit arises in relation to making the choice

    197-65(2)    
    A *franking debit arises in the company ' s *franking account in relation to the transferred amount. The debit arises immediately before the end of the *franking period in which the choice to untaint is made.

    197-65(3)    


    The amount of the *franking debit is the amount by which the amount calculated in accordance with the following formula exceeds the amount of the franking debit that arose under section 197-45 in relation to the transferred amount:


      Transferred amount × Applicable franking percentage  
      Applicable gross-up rate  

    where:

    applicable franking percentage
    means:


    (a) if, before the debit arises, the *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the choice to untaint is made has already been set by section 203-30 - that percentage; or


    (b) otherwise - 100%.

    applicable gross-up rate
    means the company ' s *corporate tax gross-up rate for the income year in which the franking debit arises.



    SECTION 197-70  

    197-70   Due date for payment of untainting tax  


    *Untainting tax is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the end of the *franking period in which the choice to untaint was made.
    Note:

    For provisions about collection and recovery of untainting tax, see Part 4-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 197-75  

    197-75   General interest charge for late payment of untainting tax  


    If any of the *untainting tax that a company is liable to pay remains unpaid 60 days after the day by which it is due to be paid, the company is liable to pay the *general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:


    (a) started at the beginning of the 60th day after the day by which the untainting tax was due to be paid; and


    (b) ends at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:


    (i) the untainting tax;

    (ii) general interest charge on any of the untainting tax.

    SECTION 197-80   Notice of liability to pay untainting tax  

    197-80(1)    
    The Commissioner may give a company, by post or otherwise, a notice specifying:


    (a) the amount of any *untainting tax that the Commissioner has ascertained is payable by the company; and


    (b) the day on which that tax became or will become due and payable.

    Effect of notice on liability etc.

    197-80(2)    
    Subject to section 197-85 , the amount of the liability of a company to *untainting tax, and the due date for payment of the tax, are not dependent on, or in any way affected by, the giving of a notice.

    Amendment of notice

    197-80(3)    
    The Commissioner may at any time amend a notice. An amended notice is a notice for the purposes of this section.

    Inconsistency between notices

    197-80(4)    
    If there is an inconsistency between notices that relate to the same subject matter, the later notice prevails to the extent of the inconsistency.

    Objections

    197-80(5)    
    A company that is dissatisfied with a notice made in relation to the company may object against the notice in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 197-85   Evidentiary effect of notice of liability to pay untainting tax  

    197-85(1)    
    The production of:


    (a) a notice given under section 197-80 ; or


    (b) a document that is signed by the Commissioner and appears to be a copy of such a notice;

    is conclusive evidence that:


    (c) the notice was duly given; and


    (d) the amount of *untainting tax specified in the notice became due and payable by the company to which it was given on the day specified in the notice.

    197-85(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply in proceedings under Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 on a review or appeal relating to the review.

    PART 3-6 - THE IMPUTATION SYSTEM  

    Division 200 - Guide to Part 3-6  

    SECTION 200-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division provides an overview of the imputation system.

    SECTION 200-5  

    200-5   The imputation system  


    The *imputation system partially integrates the income tax liabilities of an Australian corporate tax entity and its members by:


    (a) allowing the entity, when distributing profits to its members, to pass to those members credit for income tax paid by the entity on those profits; and


    (b) allowing the entity ' s Australian members to claim a tax offset for that credit; and


    (c) allowing the entity ' s Australian members to claim a refund if they are unable to fully utilise the tax offset in reducing their income tax.

    SECTION 200-10  

    200-10   Franking a distribution  


    When an Australian corporate tax entity distributes profits to its members, the entity has the option of passing to those members credit for income tax paid by the entity on the profits. This is done by franking the distribution.

    SECTION 200-15   The franking account  

    200-15(1)    
    A franking account is used to keep track of income tax paid by the entity, so that the entity can pass to its members the benefit of having paid that tax when a distribution is made.

    200-15(2)    
    Each corporate tax entity has a franking account.

    200-15(3)    
    Typically, a corporate tax entity receives a credit in the account if the entity pays income tax or receives a franked distribution. A credit in the franking account is called a franking credit.

    200-15(4)    
    Typically, a corporate tax entity receives a debit in the account if the entity receives a refund of tax or franks a distribution to its members. A debit in the franking account is called a franking debit.


    SECTION 200-20   How a distribution is franked  

    200-20(1)    
    A corporate tax entity franks a distribution by allocating a franking credit to it.

    200-20(2)    
    The amount of the franking credit on the distribution is the amount specified in a statement that accompanies the distribution.

    200-20(3)    
    Only some kinds of distribution can be franked. These are called frankable distributions.


    SECTION 200-25   A corporate tax entity must not give its members credit for more tax than the entity has paid  

    200-25(1)    


    A corporate tax entity must not frank a distribution from profits with a franking credit that exceeds the maximum amount of income tax that could have been paid, at the entity ' s corporate tax rate for imputation purposes for the income year in which the distribution is made, on the profits distributed.

    200-25(2)    
    If a distribution is franked in excess of this limit, the entity will be taken to have franked the distribution with the maximum franking credit for the distribution.

    SECTION 200-30   Benchmark rule  

    200-30(1)    
    All frankable distributions made within a particular period must be franked to the same extent. This is the benchmark rule.

    200-30(2)    
    It is designed to ensure that one member of a corporate tax entity is not preferred over another by the manner in which distributions are franked.


    SECTION 200-35   Effect of receiving a franked distribution  

    200-35(1)    
    Under Division 207 , if an Australian member of a corporate tax entity receives a franked distribution, the member can usually offset, against the member ' s own income tax liability, income tax paid by the entity on the profits underlying the distribution.

    200-35(2)    
    The tax offset to which the member is entitled is equal to the franking credit on the distribution.

    Note 1:

    A member may be entitled to a refund under Division 67 if the sum of the tax offset and certain other tax offsets exceeds the amount of income tax that the member would have to pay if the member had not got those tax offsets.

    Note 2:

    If the member is not a resident, the tax effects of receiving a distribution will be dealt with under Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , and Subdivision 207-D of this Part.


    SECTION 200-40  

    200-40   An Australian corporate tax entity can pass the benefit of having received a franked distribution on to its members  


    If an Australian corporate tax entity receives a franked distribution, it can pass the benefit of having received a franking credit on the distribution to its own members by franking distributions to those members.

    SECTION 200-45  

    200-45   Special rules for franking by some entities  


    There are special rules to deal with:


    (a) venture capital franking by a pooled development fund; and


    (b) franking by life insurance companies; and


    (c) franking by exempting companies and former exempting companies; and


    (d) franking by co-operative companies; and


    (e) franking by companies that are NZ residents or members of the same wholly-owned group as one or more companies that are NZ residents.

    Division 201 - Objects and application of Part 3-6  

    SECTION 201-1   Objects  

    201-1(1)    
    The main object of this Part is to allow certain *corporate tax entities to pass to their *members the benefit of having paid income tax on the profits underlying certain *distributions.

    201-1(2)    
    The other objects of this Part are to ensure that:


    (a) the imputation system is not used to give the benefit of income tax paid by a *corporate tax entity to *members who do not have a sufficient economic interest in the entity; and


    (b) the imputation system is not used to prefer some members over others when passing on the benefits of having paid income tax; and


    (c) the *membership of a corporate tax entity is not manipulated to create either of the outcomes mentioned in paragraphs (a) and (b).


    SECTION 201-5  

    201-5   Application of this Part  


    Subject to the rules on the application of this Part set out in the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 , this Part applies to events that occur on or after 1 July 2002.

    Division 202 - Franking a distribution  

    Subdivision 202-A - Franking a distribution  

    SECTION 202-1   What this Subdivision is about  


    An entity can only frank a distribution if certain conditions are met. These conditions are set out in this Subdivision.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 202-5  

    202-5   Franking a distribution  


    An entity franks a *distribution if:


    (a) the entity is a *franking entity that satisfies the *residency requirement when the distribution is made; and


    (b) the distribution is a *frankable distribution; and


    (c) the entity allocates a *franking credit to the distribution.

    Note 1:

    Division 205 deals with a corporate tax entity ' s franking account and sets out when credits, known as franking credits, and debits, known as franking debits, arise in that account.

    Note 2:

    The mechanism by which an entity allocates a franking credit to a distribution (for example, whether it is done by resolution or some other means) is determined by the entity.

    Subdivision 202-B - Who can frank a distribution?  

    SECTION 202-10   What this Subdivision is about  


    Generally, a corporate tax entity that is an Australian resident at the time a distribution is made, can frank the distribution.

    There are some exceptions.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 202-15  

    202-15   Franking entities  


    An entity is a franking entity at a particular time if:


    (a) it is a *corporate tax entity at that time; and


    (b) it is not a *life insurance company that is a *mutual insurance company at that time; and


    (c) in a case where the entity is a company that is a trustee of a trust - it is not acting in its capacity as trustee of the trust at that time.

    SECTION 202-20  

    202-20   Residency requirement when making a distribution  


    An entity satisfies the residency requirement when making a *distribution if:


    (a) in the case of a company - the company is an Australian resident at that time; and


    (b) in the case of a *corporate limited partnership - the corporate limited partnership is an Australian resident at that time; and


    (c) (Repealed by No 53 of 2016)


    (d) in the case of a *public trading trust - the public trading trust is a resident unit trust for the income year in which that time occurs.

    Subdivision 202-C - Which distributions can be franked?  

    SECTION 202-25   What this Subdivision is about  


    Generally, distributions that are made out of realised profits can be franked.

    Those distributions that are not frankable are identified.

    SECTION 202-30  

    202-30   Frankable distributions  


    Distributions and non-share dividends are frankable unless it is specified that they are unfrankable.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 202-35  

    202-35   Object  


    The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that only distributions equivalent to realised taxed profits can be franked.

    SECTION 202-40   Frankable distributions  

    202-40(1)    
    A *distribution is a frankable distribution , to the extent that it is not unfrankable under section 202-45 .

    202-40(2)    
    A *non-share dividend is a frankable distribution , to the extent that it is not unfrankable under section 202-45 .


    SECTION 202-45  

    202-45   Unfrankable distributions  


    The following are unfrankable :


    (a) (Repealed by No 101 of 2003)


    (b) (Repealed by No 53 of 2015)

    (c)    where the purchase price on the buy-back of a *share by a *company from one of its *members is taken to be a dividend under section 159GZZZP of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 - so much of that purchase price as exceeds what would be the market value (as normally understood) of the share at the time of the buy-back if the buy-back did not take place and were never proposed to take place;

    (d)    a *distribution in respect of a *non-equity share;

    (e)    

    a distribution that is sourced, directly or indirectly, from a company ' s *share capital account;

    (ea)    a distribution or a part of a distribution to which subsection 207-159(1) of this Act applies (distributions funded by capital raising);

    (f)    

    an amount that is taken to be an unfrankable distribution under section 215-10 or 215-15 of this Act;

    (g)    

    an amount that is taken to be a dividend for any purpose under any of the following provisions:

    (i) unless subsection 109RB(6) or 109RC(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to the amount - Division 7A of Part III of that Act (distributions to entities connected with a *private company);

    (ii) (Repealed by No 79 of 2007 )

    (iii) section 109 of that Act (excessive payments to shareholders, directors and associates);

    (iv) section 47A of that Act (distribution benefits - CFCs);

    (h)    an amount that is taken to be an unfranked dividend for any purpose:


    (i) under section 45 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (streaming bonus shares and unfranked dividends);

    (ii) because of a determination of the Commissioner under section 45C of that Act (streaming dividends and capital benefits);

    (i)    a *demerger dividend;

    (j)    

    a distribution that section 152-125 or 220-105 of this Act says is unfrankable;

    (k)    a distribution by a *listed public company that is consideration for the cancellation of a *membership interest in the company as part of a selective reduction of capital, including a selective reduction within the meaning of section 256B of the Corporations Act 2001 .

    SECTION 202-47   Distributions of certain ADI profits following restructure  

    202-47(1)    
    This section applies to an amount paid by a body corporate if:


    (a) the body corporate is a non-operating holding company within the meaning of the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999 ; and


    (b) a restructure instrument under Part 4A of that Act is in force in relation to the body; and


    (c) because of the restructure to which the instrument relates, an *ADI becomes a subsidiary (within the meaning of that Act) of the body; and


    (d) the amount is sourced, directly or indirectly, from the profits of the ADI before the restructure instrument came into force; and


    (e) the amount would have been a *frankable distribution if it had been distributed by the ADI before the restructure instrument came into force.


    202-47(2)    
    The amount:


    (a) is taken to be a dividend paid by the body, for the purposes of this Act (and so is a *distribution by the body); and


    (b) is not taken to be an *unfrankable distribution by the body just because of paragraph 202-45(e) (which makes distributions from *share capital accounts unfrankable).

    Subdivision 202-D - Amount of the franking credit on a distribution  

    Guide to Subdivision 202-D

    SECTION 202-50   What this Subdivision is about  


    The amount of the franking credit on a distribution is that stated in the distribution statement, unless the amount stated exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution.

    In that case, the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is taken to be the maximum franking credit for the distribution, worked out under this Subdivision.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    202-55 What is the maximum franking credit for a frankable distribution?
    Operative provisions
    202-60 Amount of the franking credit on a distribution
    202-65 Where the franking credit stated in the distribution statement exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution

    SECTION 202-55  

    202-55   What is the maximum franking credit for a frankable distribution?  


    The maximum franking credit for a distribution is equivalent to the maximum amount of income tax that the entity making the distribution could have paid, at the entity ' s corporate tax rate for imputation purposes for the income year in which the distribution is made, on the profits underlying the distribution.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 202-60   Amount of the franking credit on a distribution  

    202-60(1)    
    The amount of the *franking credit on a *distribution is that stated in the *distribution statement for the distribution, unless that amount exceeds the *maximum franking credit for the distribution.

    202-60(2)    


    The maximum franking credit for a *distribution is worked out using the formula:


      Amount of the *frankable distribution × 1  
      Applicable gross-up rate  

    where:

    applicable gross-up rate
    means the *corporate tax gross-up rate of the entity making the distribution for the income year in which the distribution is made.


    SECTION 202-65  

    202-65   Where the franking credit stated in the distribution statement exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution  


    If the amount of a *franking credit stated in a *distribution statement for a *distribution exceeds the *maximum franking credit for the distribution, the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is taken to be the amount of the maximum franking credit for the distribution, and not the amount stated in the distribution statement.

    Subdivision 202-E - Distribution statements  

    SECTION 202-70   What this Subdivision is about  


    An entity that makes a frankable distribution must give the recipient a statement setting out details of the distribution.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 202-75   Obligation to give a distribution statement  

    202-75(1)    
    An entity that makes a *frankable distribution must give the recipient a *distribution statement.

    202-75(2)    


    The statement must be given on or before the day on which the *distribution is made, unless the entity is allowed to give the statement at a later time under subsection (3).

    202-75(3)    


    If the entity is a *private company for the income year in which the *distribution is made, the statement must be given:


    (a) before the end of 4 months after the end of the income year in which the distribution is made; or


    (b) before the time determined by the Commissioner under subsection (5);

    whichever is later.


    202-75(4)    


    However, the entity is not allowed to give the statement at a later time under subsection (3) if the statement indicates that a *franking credit has been allocated to the *distribution and the franking credit would, either alone or when added to other franking credits allocated to other distributions made by the entity during the income year, result in the entity having a liability for *franking deficit tax, or an increased liability for franking deficit tax, at the end of the income year.
    Note:

    The combined effect of subsections (3) and (4) is that a private company can retrospectively frank a distribution, but not so as to create or increase a liability for franking deficit tax.


    202-75(5)    


    The Commissioner may determine in writing that a *private company may give the statement before a time specified in the determination.

    SECTION 202-80   Distribution statement  

    202-80(1)    
    A distribution statement is a statement made in accordance with this section.

    202-80(2)    
    The statement must be in the *approved form.

    202-80(3)    
    The statement must:


    (a) identify the entity making the distribution; and


    (b) state the date on which the distribution is made; and


    (c) state the amount of the distribution; and


    (d) state that there is a *franking credit of an amount specified on the distribution; and


    (e) state the *franking percentage for the distribution; and


    (f) state the amount of any *withholding tax that has been deducted from the distribution by the entity; and


    (g) include any other information required by the *approved form that is relevant to imputation generally or the distribution.

    Note:

    Under the Taxation Administration Act 1953 it is an offence to fail to give a statement required under this Subdivision, or make a misleading statement in connection with a distribution (whether franked or not).


    SECTION 202-85   Changing the franking credit on a distribution by amending the distribution statement  


    Changing the franking credit on a specified distribution

    202-85(1)    
    The Commissioner may, on application by an entity, determine in writing that the entity may change the *franking credit on a specified *distribution by amending the *distribution statement for the distribution.

    202-85(2)    
    In deciding whether to make a determination under subsection (1), the Commissioner must have regard to:


    (a) whether the date for lodgment of an *income tax return by the recipient of the specified *distribution for the income year in which the distribution was made has passed; and


    (b) whether, if the *franking credit on the specified distribution were changed in accordance with the entity's application, there would be any difference in the *withholding tax liability of the recipient; and


    (c) whether amending the distribution statement as requested by the entity would lead to a breach of the *benchmark rule, or any of the rules in Division 204 (the anti-streaming rules); and


    (d) whether amending the distribution statement as requested by the entity would lead to a new *benchmark franking percentage being set for the entity for the *franking period in which the distribution was made; and


    (e) any other matters that the Commissioner considers relevant.

    Changing the franking credits on a specified class of distributions

    202-85(3)    
    The Commissioner may, on application by an entity, determine in writing that the entity may change the *franking credits on *distributions of a specified class by amending the *distribution statements for the distributions.

    202-85(4)    
    In deciding whether to make a determination under subsection (3), the Commissioner must have regard to:


    (a) the number of recipients to whom an amended *distribution statement would be made; and


    (b) whether the date for lodgment of *income tax returns by recipients of *distributions of the specified class for the income year in which the distributions were made has passed; and


    (c) whether, if the *franking credit on the specified distributions were changed in accordance with the entity's application, there would be any difference in the *withholding tax liability of the recipients; and


    (d) whether amending the distribution statements as requested by the entity would lead to a breach of the *benchmark rule, or any of the rules in Division 204 (the anti-streaming rules); and


    (e) whether amending the distribution statements as requested by the entity would lead to a new *benchmark franking percentage being set for the entity for the *franking period in which the distributions were made; and


    (f) any other matters that the Commissioner considers relevant.

    Applying to the Commissioner

    202-85(5)    
    The entity must:


    (a) make its application under this section in writing; and


    (b) include in the application all information relevant to the matters to which the Commissioner must have regard under:


    (i) subsection (2), if the application relates to a *distribution; or

    (ii) subsection (4), if the application relates to a class of distributions.


    Review

    202-85(6)    
    If the entity or a *member of the entity is dissatisfied with a determination under subsection (3), the entity or member may object to it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Division 203 - Benchmark rule  

    SECTION 203-1   What this Division is about  


    Distributions within a particular period must all be franked to the same extent.

    SECTION 203-5   Benchmark rule  

    203-5(1)    
    A corporate tax entity must frank all frankable distributions made within a particular period at a franking percentage set as the benchmark for that period. This is the benchmark rule.

    203-5(2)    
    The benchmark rule does not apply to some corporate tax entities. Those entities are identified in section 203-20 .


    SECTION 203-10   Benchmark franking percentage  

    203-10(1)    
    The benchmark franking percentage for an entity is set by reference to the franking percentage for the first frankable distribution made by the entity during the relevant period.

    203-10(2)    
    An entity has a benchmark franking percentage, even if it is not subject to the benchmark rule.


    Operative provisions  

    SECTION 203-15  

    203-15   Object  


    The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that one *member of a *corporate tax entity is not preferred over another when the entity *franks *distributions.

    SECTION 203-20   Application of the benchmark rule  

    203-20(1)    
    The *benchmark rule does not apply to a company in a *franking period if either:


    (a) the company satisfies each of the following criteria:


    (i) at all times during the franking period, the company is a *listed public company;

    (ii) the company cannot make a *distribution on one *membership interest during the franking period without making a distribution under the same resolution on all other membership interests;

    (iii) the company cannot *frank a distribution made on one membership interest during the franking period without franking distributions made on all other membership interests under the same resolution with a *franking credit worked out using the same *franking percentage; or


    (b) the entity is a *100% subsidiary of a company that satisfies the criteria set out in paragraph (a).

    203-20(2)    
    The following are examples of cases in which a company satisfies the criteria set out in paragraph (1)(a):


    (a) the company is a *listed public company with a single *class of *membership interest at all times during the relevant *franking period;


    (b) the company is a listed public company that, under its constituent documents, must not:


    (i) make a *distribution on one membership interest during the relevant franking period without making a distribution under the same resolution on all other membership interests; or

    (ii) *frank a distribution made on one membership interest during the relevant franking period without franking distributions made on all other membership interests under the same resolution with a *franking credit worked out using the same *franking percentage;


    (c) the company is a listed public company with more than one class of membership interest, but the rights in relation to distributions and the franking of distributions are the same for each class of membership interest.

    This is not an exhaustive list.


    203-20(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), ignore *membership interests that do not carry a right to receive *distributions (other than distributions on the winding up of the company).


    SECTION 203-25  

    203-25   Benchmark rule  


    An entity must not make a *frankable distribution whose *franking percentage differs from the entity ' s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the distribution is made. This is the benchmark rule .
    Note:

    If a corporate tax entity franks a distribution in breach of this rule, the distribution will still be a franked distribution, although consequences will flow under section 203-50 .

    SECTION 203-30  

    203-30   Setting a benchmark franking percentage  


    The benchmark franking percentage for an entity for a *franking period is the same as the *franking percentage for the first *frankable distribution made by the entity within the period.
    Note:

    If no frankable distribution is made during the period, there is no benchmark franking percentage for the period.

    SECTION 203-35   Franking percentage  

    203-35(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2), the franking percentage for a *frankable distribution is worked out using the formula:


    *Franking credit allocated to the *frankable distribution
    *Maximum franking credit for the distribution
    × 100


    203-35(2)    
    If the *franking percentage for a *frankable distribution would exceed 100% if it were worked out under subsection (1), it is taken to be 100%.


    SECTION 203-40   Franking periods - where the entity is not a private company  

    203-40(1)    
    Use this section to work out the franking periods for an entity in an income year where the entity is not a *private company for the income year.

    203-40(2)    
    If the entity ' s income year is a period of 12 months, each of the following is a franking period for the entity in that year:


    (a) the period of 6 months beginning at the start of the entity ' s income year;


    (b) the remainder of the income year.

    203-40(3)    
    If the entity ' s income year is a period of 6 months or less, the franking period for the entity in that year is the same as the income year.

    203-40(4)    
    If the entity ' s income year is a period of more than 6 months and less than 12 months, each of the following is a franking period for the entity in that year:


    (a) the period of 6 months beginning at the start of the entity ' s income year;


    (b) the remainder of the income year.

    203-40(5)    
    If the entity ' s income year is a period of more than 12 months, each of the following is a franking period for the entity in that year:


    (a) the period of 6 months beginning at the start of the entity ' s income year (the first franking period );


    (b) the period of 6 months beginning immediately after the end of the first franking period;


    (c) the remainder of the income year.


    SECTION 203-45  

    203-45   Franking period - private companies  


    The franking period for an entity that is a *private company for an income year is the same as the income year.

    SECTION 203-50   Consequences of breaching the benchmark rule  

    203-50(1)    
    If an entity makes a *frankable distribution in breach of the *benchmark rule:


    (a) the entity is liable to pay over-franking tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Over-franking Tax) Act 2002 if the *franking percentage for the *distribution exceeds the entity ' s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the distribution is made; and


    (b) a *franking debit arises in the entity ' s *franking account if the franking percentage for the distribution is less than the entity ' s benchmark franking percentage for the franking period in which the distribution is made.

    203-50(2)    


    Use the following formula to work out:


    (a) in a case dealt with under paragraph (1)(a) - the amount of the *over-franking tax; and


    (b) in a case dealt with under paragraph (1)(b) - the amount of the *franking debit:


      Amount of the *frankable distribution × Franking % differential  
      Applicable gross-up rate  

    where:

    applicable gross-up rate
    means the *corporate tax gross-up rate of the entity making the distribution for the income year in which the distribution is made.

    franking % differential
    is the difference between:


    (a) the *franking percentage for the *frankable distribution; and


    (b) either:


    (i) if subparagraph (ii) does not apply - the entity ' s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the *distribution is made; or

    (ii) if the Commissioner in the exercise of the Commissioner ' s powers under subsection 203-55(1) , permits the entity to frank the distribution at a different franking percentage - that percentage.
    Example:

    An entity makes 3 successive frankable distributions in a franking period. Each of those distributions is represented in the following diagram. The franking percentage for the first distribution is 40%, and so the entity ' s benchmark franking percentage for the period is 40%.


    Note:

    Distribution 2 is under-franked to the extent of the franking % differential. This is used to work out the amount of the under-franking debit under subsection (2).

    Distribution 3 is over-franked to the extent of the franking % differential. This is used to work out the amount of over-franking tax on the distribution under the New Business Tax System (Over-franking Tax) Act 2002 . The amount of the tax is calculated using the same formula as that set out in subsection (2).


    203-50(3)    
    A *franking debit arising under paragraph (1)(b) is in addition to any franking debit that would otherwise arise for the entity because of the *distribution.

    203-50(4)    
    The *franking debit arises on the day on which the *frankable distribution is made.


    SECTION 203-55   Commissioner ' s powers to permit a departure from the benchmark rule  


    Powers of the Commissioner

    203-55(1)    
    The Commissioner may, on application by an entity, make a determination in writing permitting the entity to *frank a *distribution at a *franking percentage that differs from the entity ' s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the distribution is made.

    203-55(2)    
    Because the *benchmark rule is an integral part of the imputation system, the Commissioner ' s powers under this section may only be exercised in extraordinary circumstances.

    Matters to which the Commissioner must have regard in exercising the power

    203-55(3)    
    In deciding whether there are extraordinary circumstances justifying the exercise of the Commissioner ' s power to make a determination under subsection (1), the Commissioner must have regard to:


    (a) the entity ' s reasons for departing, or proposing to depart, from the *benchmark rule; and


    (b) the extent of the departure, or proposed departure, from the benchmark rule; and


    (c) if the circumstances that give rise to the entity ' s application are within the entity ' s control, the extent to which the entity has sought the exercise of the Commissioner ' s powers under this section in the past; and


    (d) whether a *member of the entity has been or will be disadvantaged as a result of the departure, or proposed departure, from the benchmark rule; and


    (e) whether a *member of the entity will receive greater *imputation benefits than another member of the entity because a distribution *franked at a *franking percentage that differs from the *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period is made to one of them; and


    (f) any other matters that the Commissioner considers relevant.

    When may the powers be exercised?

    203-55(4)    
    The Commissioner may make a determination under subsection (1) either before or after the *frankable distribution is made.

    Consequence of the Commissioner exercising the power under this section

    203-55(5)    
    An allocation of a *franking credit at a percentage specified by the Commissioner in a determination under subsection (1) is taken to comply with the *benchmark rule.

    Applying to the Commissioner

    203-55(6)    
    The entity must:


    (a) make its application under this section in writing; and


    (b) include in the application all information relevant to the matters to which the Commissioner must have regard under subsection (3).

    Review

    203-55(7)    
    If the entity or a *member of the entity is dissatisfied with the determination under subsection (1), the entity or member may object to it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Division 204 - Anti-streaming rules  

    Subdivision 204-A - Objects and application  

    SECTION 204-1  

    204-1   Objects  


    The objects of this Division are to ensure that:


    (a) an entity and its *members cannot avoid the effect of the *benchmark rule by exploiting the *benchmark franking percentage of another entity; and


    (b) an entity does not stream *franked distributions and *tax-exempt bonus shares; and


    (c) an entity does not stream *distributions to members of the entity who *derive a *greater benefit from franking credits than other members.

    SECTION 204-5   Application  

    204-5(1)    
    The rules in this Division will apply to an entity even if it is not subject to the benchmark rule.

    204-5(2)    
    This Division applies to non-share dividends in the same way as it applies to distributions.


    Subdivision 204-B - Linked distributions  

    SECTION 204-10   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision prevents the exploitation of a corporate tax entity ' s benchmark franking percentage by another corporate tax entity, or that other entity ' s members, by imposing a franking debit where there is exploitation.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 204-15   Linked distributions  


    Franking debit arises where a distribution by one entity is substituted for a distribution by another

    204-15(1)    
    This section gives rise to a *franking debit if:


    (a) the exercise of a choice or selection by a *member of an entity (the first entity ); or


    (b) the member ' s failure to exercise a choice or selection;

    has the effect of determining (to any extent) that another entity makes to one of its members a *distribution (the linked distribution ) that is:


    (c) in substitution (in whole or in part) for a distribution by the first entity to that member or any other member of the first entity; and


    (d) unfranked, or *franked at a *franking percentage that differs from the first entity ' s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the linked distribution is made.

    Note:

    Division 205 deals with a corporate tax entity ' s franking account and sets out when a debit, known as a franking debit, arises in that account.



    Franking account in which the debit arises

    204-15(2)    
    The debit arises in the *franking account of the entity with the higher *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the linked distribution is made.

    Amount of the debit

    204-15(3)    
    The debit is equal to the one that would arise in that *franking account if the entity had made a *franked distribution, equal to the linked distribution, with a *franking percentage equal to the *benchmark franking percentage for that entity.

    When does the debit arise

    204-15(4)    
    The debit arises onthe day on which the linked distribution is made.

    Debit is in addition to any other franking debit arising because of the linked distribution

    204-15(5)    
    The debit is in addition to any other debit that arises in an entity ' s *franking account because of the linked distribution.

    Where an entity has no benchmark franking percentage

    204-15(6)    
    If an entity has no *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the linked distribution is made, this section applies as if:


    (a) in a case where the linked distribution has a *franking percentage of less than 50% - the entity had a benchmark franking percentage of 100% for that period; and


    (b) in a case where the linked distribution has a franking percentage equal to or greater than 50% - the entity had a benchmark franking percentage of 0% for that period.

    Subdivision 204-C - Substituting tax-exempt bonus share for franked distributions  

    SECTION 204-20   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision prevents the substitution of a tax-exempt bonus share for a franked distribution by imposing a franking debit on the issue of the share as if it were a franked distribution.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 204-25   Substituting tax-exempt bonus shares for franked distributions  


    Franking debit arises if tax-exempt bonus shares are issued in substitution for a franked distribution

    204-25(1)    
    This section gives rise to a *franking debit in an entity ' s *franking account if:


    (a) the exercise of a choice or selection by a *member of the entity; or


    (b) the member ' s failure to exercise a choice or selection;

    has the effect of determining (to any extent) that the entity issues one or more *tax-exempt bonus shares, to that member or another member of the entity, in substitution (in whole or in part) for one or more *franked distributions by the entity to that member or another member.



    Amount of the debit

    204-25(2)    
    The debit is equal to the one that would arise in the entity ' s *franking account if the entity made a *distribution, equal to the *franked distributions referred to in subsection (1), franked at the entity ' s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the shares are issued.

    When does the debit arise

    204-25(3)    
    The debit arises on the day when the shares are issued.

    Meaning of tax-exempt bonus share

    204-25(4)    


    For a company whose *shares have no par value, tax-exempt bonus share means a share issued by the company in the circumstances mentioned in subsection 6BA(6) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    204-25(5)    


    For any other company, tax-exempt bonus share means a *share issued by the company to a *shareholder in the company where:


    (a) the amount or value of the share is debited against an amount standing to the credit of a share premium account of the company; and


    (b) no part of the paid-up value of the share is a dividend; and


    (c) the share is issued:


    (i) as a bonus share; or

    (ii) in the circumstances mentioned in subsection 6BA(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , as in force immediately before 1 July 1998.


    Where a company has no benchmark franking percentage for the franking period

    204-25(6)    


    If a company has no *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the *tax-exempt bonus share is issued, this section applies as if the entity had a benchmark franking percentage of 100% for that period.

    Subdivision 204-D - Streaming distributions  

    SECTION 204-26   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision prevents the streaming of imputation benefits to one member of a corporate tax entity in preference to another by either imposing a franking debit or denying an imputation benefit where there is streaming.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 204-30   Streaming distributions  


    Commissioner ' s power to make a determination when distributions or distributions and other benefits are streamed

    204-30(1)    
    This section empowers the Commissioner to make determinations if an entity streams one or more *distributions (or one or more distributions and the giving of other benefits), whether in a single *franking period or in a number of franking periods, in such a way that:


    (a) an *imputation benefit is, or apart from this section would be, received by a *member of the entity as a result of the distribution or distributions; and


    (b) the member would *derive a *greater benefit from franking credits than another member of the entity; and


    (c) the other member of the entity will receive lesser imputation benefits, or will not receive any imputation benefits, whether or not the other member receives other benefits.

    The member that derives the greater benefit from franking credits is the favoured member . The member that receives the lesser imputation benefits is the disadvantaged member .



    Examples of other benefits

    204-30(2)    
    These are examples of the giving of other benefits:


    (a) issuing bonus *shares;


    (b) returning *paid-up share capital;


    (c) *forgiving a debt;


    (d) the entity or another entity making a payment of any kind, or giving any property, to a *member or to another person on a member ' s behalf.



    Nature of the determination that the Commissioner may make

    204-30(3)    
    The Commissioner may make one or more of these determinations:


    (a) that a specified *franking debit arises in the *franking account of the entity, for a specified *distribution or other benefit to a disadvantaged member;


    (b) that a specified *exempting debit arises in the *exempting account of the entity, for a specified *distribution or other benefit to a disadvantaged member;


    (c) that no *imputation benefit is to arise in respect of a distribution that is made to a favoured member and specified in the determination.

    A determination must be in writing.


    204-30(4)    
    The Commissioner may:


    (a) specify the *franking debit under paragraph (3)(a) by specifying the *franking percentage to be used in working out the amount of the debit; and


    (b) specify the *exempting debit under paragraph (3)(b) by specifying the *exempting percentage to be used in working out the amount of the debit.


    204-30(5)    


    The Commissioner may specify the *distribution under paragraph (3)(a), (b) or (c) by specifying:


    (a) the date on which the distribution was made, or the period during which the distribution was made; and


    (b) the member, or class of members, to whom the distribution was made.



    What is an imputation benefit?

    204-30(6)    
    A *member of an entity receives an imputation benefit as a result of a distribution if:


    (a) the member is entitled to a *tax offset under Division 207 as a result of the distribution; or


    (b) an amount would be included in the member ' s assessable income as a result of the distribution because of the operation of section 207-35 ; or


    (c) a *franking credit would arise in the *franking account of the member as a result of the distribution; or


    (d) an *exempting credit would arise in the *exempting account of the member as a result of the distribution; or


    (e) the member would not be liable to pay *withholding tax on the distribution, because of the operation of paragraph 128B(3)(ga) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or


    (f) the member is entitled to a *tax offset under section 210-170 as a result of the distribution.



    When does a favoured member derive greater benefit from franking credits?

    204-30(7)    


    The following subsection lists some of the cases in which a *member of an entity *derives a greater benefit from franking credits than another member of the entity. It is not an exhaustive list.

    204-30(8)    


    A *member of an entity *derives a greater benefit from franking credits than anothermember of the entity if any of the following circumstances exist in relation to the other member in the income year in which the distribution giving rise to the benefit is made, and not in relation to the first member:


    (a) the other member is a foreign resident;


    (b) the other member would not be entitled to any *tax offset under Division 207 because of the distribution;


    (c) the amount of income tax that, apart from this Division, would be payable by the other member because of the distribution is less than the tax offset to which the other member would be entitled;


    (d) the other member is a *corporate tax entity at the time the distribution is made, but no *franking credit arises for the entity as a result of the distribution;


    (e) the other member is a *corporate tax entity at the time the distribution is made, but cannot use *franking credits received on the distribution to *frank distributions to its own members because:


    (i) it is not a *franking entity; or

    (ii) it is unable to make *frankable distributions;


    (f) the other member is an *exempting entity.


    204-30(9)    


    A *member of an entity *derives a greater benefit from franking credits than another member of the entity if any of the following circumstances exist in relation to the first member in the income year in which the *distribution giving rise to the benefit is made, and not in relation to the other member:


    (a) a *franking credit arises for the first member under item 5, 6 or 7 of the table in section 208-130 (distributions by *exempting entities to exempting entities);


    (b) a franking credit or *exempting credit arises for the first member because the distribution is *franked with an exempting credit;


    (c) the first member is entitled to a *tax offset because:


    (i) the distribution is a *franked distribution made by an exempting entity; or

    (ii) the distribution is *franked with an exempting credit.

    204-30(10)    


    A *member of an entity *derives a greater benefit from franking credits than another member if the first member is entitled to a *tax offset under section 210-170 as a result of the *distribution, and the other member is not.

    SECTION 204-35   When does a franking debit arise if the Commissioner makes a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(a)  

    204-35(1)    
    If the Commissioner makes a determination giving rise to a *franking debit in the *franking account of an entity under paragraph 204-30(3)(a) , the debit arises in the franking account of the entity on the day on which the notice of determination is given to the entity in accordance with section 204-50 .

    204-35(2)    


    If the Commissioner makes a determination giving rise to an *exempting debit in the *exempting account of an entity under paragraph 204-30(3)(b) , the debit arises in the exempting account of the entity on the day on which the notice of determination is given to the entity in accordance with section 204-50 .

    SECTION 204-40   Amount of the franking debit  

    204-40(1)    
    The amount of the *franking debit arising because of a determination by the Commissioner under paragraph 204-30(3)(a) must not exceed:


    (a) if the specified *distribution has been *franked - the difference between the amount of the *franking credit on the distribution and an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest *franking percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or


    (b) if the specified distribution, although *frankable, has not been franked - an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest franking percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or


    (c) if the specified distribution is *unfrankable - an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest franking percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or


    (d) if the specified benefit is the issue of bonus shares from a share premium account - an amount worked out by multiplying the amount debited to the share premium account in respect of the bonus shares by the highest franking percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or


    (e) if some other benefit is specified - an amount worked out by multiplying the value of the benefit by the highest franking percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked.

    204-40(2)    
    In specifying the *franking debit, the Commissioner must have regard to:


    (a) any *franking debit already arising in the *franking account of the entity under paragraph 203-50(1)(b) because the entity franked the specified *distribution in breach of the *benchmark rule; and


    (b) any franking debit already arising in the franking account of the entity, because of the specified distribution or benefit, under section 204-15 (about linked distributions) or section 204-25 (about substituting *tax-exempt bonus shares for *franked distributions).


    SECTION 204-41  

    204-41   Amount of the exempting debit  


    The amount of the *exempting debit arising because of a determination by the Commissioner under paragraph 204-30(3)(b) must not exceed:


    (a) if the specified *distribution has been *franked with an exempting credit - the difference between the amount of the *exempting credit on the distribution and an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest *exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or


    (b) if the specified distribution, although *frankable, has not been franked with an exempting credit - an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or


    (c) if the specified distribution is *unfrankable - an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or


    (d) if the specified benefit is the issue of bonus shares from a share premium account - an amount worked out by multiplying the amount debited to the share premium account in respect of the bonus shares by the highest exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or


    (e) if some other benefit is specified - an amount worked out by multiplying the value of the benefit by the highest exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked.

    SECTION 204-45  

    204-45   Effect of a determination about distributions to favoured members  


    If the Commissioner makes a determination denying an *imputation benefit under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) (about distributions to favoured members), the determination has effect according to its terms.

    SECTION 204-50   Assessment and notice of determination  

    204-50(1)    
    A determination under subsection 204-30(3) does not form part of an assessment.

    204-50(2)    
    The Commissioner must give notice in writing of the determination:

    (a)    in a case where the Commissioner determines that a *franking debit is to arise in the *franking account of an entity under paragraph 204-30(3)(a) - to the entity; and

    (b)    

    in a case where the Commissioner determines that an *exempting debit is to arise in the *exempting account of an entity under paragraph 204-30(3)(b) - to the entity; and

    (c)    

    in a case where a favoured member is denied an *imputation benefit under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) - to the favoured member.

    204-50(3)    


    If the Commissioner makes a determination denying an *imputation benefit under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) on a *distribution made by a *listed public company, the Commissioner is taken to have served notice in writing of the determination on the favoured member if the Commissioner causes a notice to be published in a manner that results in the notice being accessible to the public and reasonably prominent. The notice is taken to have been served on the day on which the publication takes place.

    204-50(4)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    SECTION 204-55  

    204-55   Right to review where a determination made  


    If a taxpayer to whom a determination relates is dissatisfied with the determination, the taxpayer may object to it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Subdivision 204-E - Disclosure requirements  

    SECTION 204-65   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision requires an entity to notify the Commissioner where there is a significant difference in its benchmark franking percentage over time, so that the Commissioner can assess whether there is streaming.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 204-70   Application of this Subdivision  

    204-70(1)    
    This Subdivision applies to an entity if the difference between:


    (a) the *benchmark franking percentage for the entity for a *franking period (the current franking period ); and


    (b) the benchmark franking percentage for the entity for the last franking period in which a *frankable distribution was made (the last relevant franking period );

    is more than the amount worked out using the following formula (whether the percentage for the current franking period is more than or less than the percentage for the last relevant franking period):


      Number of *franking periods starting immediately after the last relevant franking period and ending at the end of the current franking period × 20 percentage points  


    204-70(2)    
    However, this Subdivision does not apply to an entity to which the benchmark rule does not apply.

    Note:

    Section 203-20 identifies the entities to which the benchmark rule does not apply.


    SECTION 204-75   Notice to the Commissioner  

    204-75(1)    


    The entity must notify the Commissioner in writing of the difference.

    204-75(2)    
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)


    204-75(3)    
    The notice must also state:


    (a) the *benchmark franking percentage for the current franking period; and


    (b) the benchmark franking percentage for the last relevant franking period.

    204-75(4)    


    The notice must be in the *approved form and must be given to the Commissioner:


    (a) if the entity is required to give the Commissioner a *franking return for the income year in which the current franking period occurs - with that return; or


    (b) otherwise - within one month after the end of the income year in which the current franking period occurs.

    Note:

    See Subdivision 214-A for requirements to give the Commissioner franking returns.


    SECTION 204-80   Commissioner may require information where the Commissioner suspects streaming  

    204-80(1)    


    The Commissioner may request the entity to give the Commissioner the following information:


    (a) the entity ' s reasons for setting a benchmark franking percentage for the current franking period that differs significantly from the benchmark franking percentage for the last relevant franking period; and


    (b) the *franking percentages for all *frankable distributions made in the current franking period and the last relevant franking period; and


    (c) details of any other benefits given to the entity ' s *members, either by the entity or an *associate of the entity, during the period beginning at the beginning of the last relevant franking period and ending at the end of the current franking period; and


    (d) whether any member of the entity has *derived, or will derive, a *greater benefit from franking credits than another member of the entity as a result of the variation in the benchmark franking percentage between the current franking period and the last relevant franking period; and


    (e) any other information required by the *approved form that is relevant in determining whether the entity is streaming *distributions.


    204-80(2)    
    The entity must comply with the Commissioner ' s request.


    Division 205 - Franking accounts, franking deficit tax liabilities and the related tax offset  

    SECTION 205-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division:

  • • creates a franking account for each entity that is, or has been, a corporate tax entity; and
  • • identifies when franking credits and debits arise in those accounts and the amount of those credits and debits; and
  • • identifies when there is a franking surplus or deficit in the account; and
  • • creates a liability to pay franking deficit tax if the account is in deficit at certain times; and
  • • creates a tax offset for that liability.
  • SECTION 205-5   Franking accounts, franking deficit tax liabilities and the related tax offset  

    205-5(1)    
    Each entity that is, or has ever been, a corporate tax entity has a franking account.

    205-5(2)    
    The payment of a PAYG instalment or income tax will generate a franking credit in that account. The amount of the credit is equal to the amount of tax paid. The receipt of a franked distribution by an entity from another corporate tax entity will also generate a franking credit. There are other circumstances in which a franking credit arises.

    205-5(3)    
    The receipt of a refund of income tax or the payment of a franked distribution by a corporate tax entity will generate a franking debit. There are, however, other cases where a franking debit arises. For example, a franking debit might arise under a determination by the Commissioner because distributions have been streamed.

    205-5(4)    
    An entity must be a franking entity at certain times and satisfy certain residency requirements before a franking credit or debit arises in its account.

    205-5(5)    
    Franking deficit tax is payable if the franking account of an entity is in deficit at the end of the entity ' s income year, or when the entity ceases to be a franking entity.

    205-5(6)    


    A tax offset is available to an entity that has incurred a liability to pay franking deficit tax.

    Operative provisions  

    SECTION 205-10  

    205-10   Each entity that is or has been a corporate tax entity has a franking account  


    There is a franking account for each entity that is, or has at any time been, a *corporate tax entity.
    Note:

    The balance in the franking account on 1 July 2002 will either be nil or, if the entity had a franking surplus or deficit immediately before 1 July 2002 under the imputation scheme existing at that time, an amount calculated under the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    SECTION 205-15   Franking credits  

    205-15(1)    


    The following table sets out when a credit arises in the *franking account of an entity and the amount of the credit. The credit is called a franking credit .


    6B
    Credits in the franking account
    Item If: A credit of: Arises:
    1 the entity *pays a PAYG instalment; and
    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in relation to which the PAYG instalment is paid; and
    the entity is a *franking entity for the whole or part of the relevant *PAYG instalment period
    that part of the payment that is attributable to the period during which the entity was a franking entity, less any reduction under subsection (4) on the day on which the payment is made
    2 the entity *pays income tax; and
    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year for which the tax is paid; and
    the entity is a *franking entity for the whole or part of that income year
    that part of the payment that is attributable to the period during which the entity was a franking entity, less any reduction under subsection (4) on the day on which the payment is made
    3 a *franked distribution is made to the entity; and
    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made; and
    the entity is a *franking entity when it receives the distribution; and
    the entity is entitled to a *tax offset because of the distribution under Division 207
    the *franking credit on the distribution on the day on which the distribution is made
    4 a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity through a partnership or the trustee of a trust; and
    the entity is a *franking entity when the franked distribution is made; and
    the entity is entitled to a *tax offset because of the distribution under Division 207
    the entity ' s share of the *franking credit on the distribution at the time specified in subsection (2)
    4A a *franking debit arises under item 2 or 2A of the table in subsection 205-30(1) because the entity receives a *tax offset refund; and
    the entity ' s tax offset refund is subsequently reduced and the entity is liable to pay to the Commonwealth the amount of the excess mentioned in subsection 172A(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and
    the entity pays the amount of the excess
    the difference (if any) between:
    (a) the amount of the franking debit; and
    (b) the amount the franking debit would have been if the tax offset refund were reduced by the amount of the excess
    on the day on which the amount of the excess is paid
    5 the entity incurs a liability to pay *franking deficit tax under section 205-45 or 205-50 the amount of the liability immediately after the liability is incurred
    6 a *franking credit arises under section 316-275 for the *friendly society or one of its *wholly-owned subsidiaries because the society or subsidiary *receives a refund of income tax the amount of the debit specified in subsection 316-275(3) at the time provided by subsection 316-275(4)
    6A a *franking credit arises under paragraph 417-50(5)(b) in relation to a deduction transferred to a *corporate tax entity the amount of the *franking credit specified in subsection 417-50(6) at the time provided by paragraph 417-50(5)(b)
    a *franking credit arises under paragraph 417-100(1)(c) in relation to *tax loss transferred to a *corporate tax entity the amount of the *franking credit specified in subsection 417-100(3) at the time provided by paragraph 417-100(1)(c)
    7 a *franking credit arises under subsection 418-50(1) in relation to an *exploration credit the amount of the *franking credit specified in subsection 418-50(2) at the time provided by subsection 418-50(3)
    8 the entity *pays diverted profits tax; and
    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year for which the tax is paid; and
    the entity is a *franking entity for the whole or part of that income year
    that part of the payment that is attributable to the period during which the entity was a franking entity, multiplied by the proportion worked out under subsection (5) on the day on which the payment is made


    205-15(2)    


    A *franking credit covered by item 4 of the table arises at the end of the income year:

    (a)    

    that is an income year of the last partnership or trust interposed between:

    (i) the entity; and

    (ii) the *corporate tax entity that made the distribution; and

    (b)    during which the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity.


    205-15(3)    


    Despite item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection (1) , no credit arises on that part of the payment that is attributable to a payment of income tax in relation to an *RSA component.

    205-15(4)    


    An entity ' s *franking credit for a payment mentioned in item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection (1) is reduced by the amount (if any) worked out as follows, but not below zero. Method statement

    Step 1.

    Identify any income years ending before the payment was made for which the entity has *received a refund of income tax.


    Step 2.

    Add up the part (if any) of each of those refunds that is attributable to a *tax offset that is subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of section 67-30 (about R & D).


    Step 3.

    Subtract any reduction under this subsection of a *franking credit for any earlier payment by the entity. (For this purpose, assume a credit reduced to zero is still a franking credit.)


    205-15(5)    


    The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 divided by 40%.

    SECTION 205-20   Paying a PAYG instalment, income tax or diverted profits tax  

    205-20(1)    
    An entity pays a PAYG instalment if and only if:


    (a) the entity has a liability to pay the instalment; and


    (b) either:


    (i) the entity makes a payment to satisfy the liability (in whole or in part); or

    (ii) a credit, or an *RBA surplus, is applied to discharge or reduce the liability.
    Note:

    The requirement in paragraph (a) means that the entity cannot generate franking credits by making a " voluntary " payment of income tax (that is, paying an amount on account of income tax for which the entity is not liable at the time when the payment is made).


    205-20(2)    
    If an entity:


    (a) is liable to pay a *PAYG instalment; and


    (b) has a *PAYG instalment variation credit;

    the PAYG instalment variation credit must be fully applied to reduce the liability for the PAYG instalment before any other credit or payment can be applied to reduce that liability.


    205-20(3)    
    An entity pays income tax if and only if:


    (a) the entity has a liability to pay the income tax; and


    (b) either:


    (i) the entity makes a payment to satisfy the liability (in whole or in part); or

    (ii) a credit, or an *RBA surplus, is applied to discharge or reduce the liability.
    Note:

    The requirement in paragraph (a) means that the entity cannot generate franking credits by making a " voluntary " payment of income tax (that is, paying an amount on account of income tax for which the entity is not liable at the time when the payment is made).


    205-20(3A)    


    An entity pays diverted profits tax if and only if:


    (a) the entity has a liability to pay the *diverted profits tax; and


    (b) either:


    (i) the entity makes a payment to satisfy the liability (in whole or in part); or

    (ii) a credit, or an *RBA surplus, is applied to discharge or reduce the liability.

    205-20(4)    


    Subparagraphs (1)(b)(ii), (3)(b)(ii) and (3A)(b)(ii) do not apply to the application of a credit allowable under or by virtue of section 45-30 or 45-215 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (these sections deal with credits for *PAYG instalments payable and credit on using a varied rate in certain cases).

    205-20(5)    
    The amount of the *PAYG instalment or income tax paid is equal to:


    (a) the amount of the liability, if it is satisfied in full; or


    (b) the amount by which the liability is reduced, if it is not satisfied in full.

    205-20(6)    
    If:


    (a) a surplus in an *RBA of an entity is applied to satisfy a liability of the entity to *pay a PAYG instalment in respect of an income year; and


    (b) a credit allowable under section 45-30 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in respect of that income year is included in the RBA; and


    (c) the RBA does not include the liability to pay the *PAYG instalment; and


    (d) the amount of the credit exceeds the income tax assessed to the entity in respect of that income year;

    the amount of the PAYG instalment paid by virtue of the application of the surplus is reduced by the amount of the excess mentioned in paragraph (d).


    SECTION 205-25   Residency requirement for an event giving rise to a franking credit or franking debit  

    205-25(1)    


    An entity satisfies the residency requirement for an income year in which, or in relation to which, an event specified in a relevant table occurs if:


    (a) the entity is a company, or a *corporate limited partnership, to which at least one of the following subparagraphs applies:


    (i) the entity is an Australian resident for more than one half of the 12 months immediately preceding the event if the event occurs before the end of the income year;

    (ii) the entity is an Australian resident at all times during the income year when the entity exists if the event occurs at or after the end of the income year;

    (iii) the entity is an Australian resident for more than one half of the income year (whether or not the event occurs before the end of the income year); or


    (b) (Repealed by No 53 of 2016)


    (c) the entity is a *public trading trust for the income year.


    205-25(2)    


    The tables in sections 205-15 and 205-30 are relevant for the purposes of subsection (1).

    SECTION 205-30   Franking debits  

    205-30(1)    


    The following table sets out when a debit arises in the *franking account of an entity and the amount of the debit. The debit is called a franking debit .


    Debits in the franking account
    Item If: A debit of: Arises:
    1 the entity *franks a *distribution the amount of the *franking credit on the distribution on the day on which the distribution is made
    2 the entity *receives a refund of income tax; and
    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year to which the refund relates; and
    the entity was a *franking entity during the whole or part of the income year to which the refund relates
    that part of the refund that is attributable to the period during which the entity was a franking entity on the day on which the refund is received
    2A the entity * receives a * tax offset refund; and
    the entity does not satisfy the * residency requirement for the income year to which the refund relates; and
    the entity was a * franking entity during the whole or part of the income year to which the refund relates; and
    the entity ' s * franking account is in * surplus on the day on which the refund is received
    the lesser of:
    (a) that part of the refund that is attributable to the period during which the entity was a franking entity; and
    (b) the amount of the * franking surplus
    on the day on which the refund is received
    3 a *franking debit arises for the entity under paragraph 203-50(1)(b) (the entity *franks a *distribution in contravention of the *benchmark rule) the franking debit worked out under paragraph 203-50(2)(b) on the day specified in subsection 203-50(4)
    4 the entity ceases to be a *franking entity; and
    the entity ' s *franking account is in *surplus immediately before ceasing to be a franking entity
    the amount of the *franking surplus on the day on which the entity ceases to be a franking entity
    5 a *franking debit arises for the entity under section 204-15 (linked distributions) the franking debit specified in subsection 204-15(3) on the day specified in subsection 204-15(4)
    6 a *franking debit arises under section 204-25 (debit for substituting *tax-exempt bonus shares for *franked distributions) the amount of the debit specified in subsection 204-25(2) on the day specified in subsection 204-25(3)
    7 the Commissioner makes a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(a) giving rise to a *franking debit for the entity (streaming distributions) the amount of the debit specified in the determination on the day specified in section 204-35
    7A a *franking debit arises under subsection 197-45(1) because an amount to which Division 197 applies is transferred to a company ' s *share capital account the amount of the debit specified in subsection 197-45(2) at the time provided by subsection 197-45(1)
    7B a *franking debit arises under subsection 197-65(2) because a company chooses to untaint its *share capital account the amount of the debit specified in subsection 197-65(3) at the time provided by subsection 197-65(2)
    8 (Repealed by No 79 of 2007 )    
    9 (a) the entity purchases a *membership interest in itself; and
    (b) the purchase is an *on-market buy-back; and
    (c) the entity is a company
    an amount equal to the debit that would have arisen if:
    (a) the purchase of the interest were a *frankable distribution equal to the one that would have arisen if the entity:
    (i) purchased the interest *off-market; and
    (ii) in the case of a *listed public company - were not a listed public company; and
    (b) the distribution were *franked at the entity ' s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the purchase was made or, if the entity does not have a benchmark franking percentage for the period, at a *franking percentage of 100%
    on the day on which the interest is purchased
    9A (a) the entity purchases a *membership interest in itself; and
    (b) the purchase is an *off-market buy-back; and
    (c) the entity is a *listed public company
    an amount equal to the debit that would have arisen if:
    (a) the purchase of the interest were a *frankable distribution equal to the one that would have arisen if the entity were not a listed public company; and
    (b) the distribution were *franked at the entity ' s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the purchase was made or, if the entity does not have a benchmark franking percentage for the period, at a *franking percentage of 100%
    on the day on which the interest is purchased
    9B the entity makes a *distribution to which paragraph 202-45(k) applies (consideration for cancellation of membership interest as part of selective reduction of capital) an amount equal to the debit that would have arisen if:
    (a) the distribution were a *frankable distribution equal to the one that would have arisen if the entity were not a *listed public company; and
    (b) the distribution were *franked at the entity ' s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the distribution was made or, if the entity does not have a benchmark franking percentage for the period, at a *franking percentage of 100%
    on the day on which the distribution is made
    10 a *franking debit arises under section 316-260 for the *friendly society or one of its *wholly-owned subsidiaries because the *franking account of the society or subsidiary is in *surplus the amount of the debit specified in subsection 316-260(2) at the time provided by subsection 316-260(3)
    11 a *franking debit arises under section 316-265 for the *friendly society or one of its *wholly-owned subsidiaries because a *franking credit arises for the society or subsidiary the amount of the debit specified in subsection 316-265(3) at the time provided by subsection 316-265(4)
    12 a *franking debit arises under section 316-270 for the *friendly society or one of its *wholly-owned subsidiaries because a *franking credit arises for the society or subsidiary the amount of the debit specified in subsection 316-270(3) at the time provided by subsection 316-270(4)
    13 the entity *receives a refund of diverted profits tax; and
    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year to which the refund relates; and
    the entity was a *franking entity during the whole or part of the income year to which the refund relates
    that part of the refund that is attributable to the period during which the entity was a franking entity, multiplied by the proportion worked out under subsection (3) on the day on which the refund is received

    Note:

    For completeness, the table refers to some franking debits that arise under other sections of the Act. This does not mean that separate franking debits arise both under the relevant section and this table.


    205-30(2)    


    Despite item 2 of the table in subsection (1) , no debit arises on that part of the refund that is attributable to any of the following:

    (a)    

    a payment of income tax in relation to an *RSA component;

    (b)    a *tax offset that is subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of section 67-30 (about R & D).


    205-30(3)    


    The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) divided by 40%.

    SECTION 205-35   Refund of income tax or diverted profits tax  

    205-35(1)    
    An entity receives a refund of income tax if and only if:


    (a) either:


    (i) the entity receives an amount as a refund; or

    (ii) the Commissioner applies a credit, or an *RBA surplus, against a liability or liabilities of the entity; and


    (b) the refund of the amount, or the application of the credit, represents in whole or in part:


    (i) a return to the entity of an amount paid or applied to satisfy the entity ' s liability to pay income tax; or

    (ii) the amount remaining after applying a *loss carry back tax offset, or a *tax offset that is subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of section 67-30 (about R & D), against the entity ' s basic income tax liability.

    205-35(1A)    


    An entity receives a refund of diverted profits tax if and only if:


    (a) either:


    (i) the entity receives an amount as a refund; or

    (ii) the Commissioner applies a credit, or an *RBA surplus, against a liability or liabilities of the entity; and


    (b) the refund of the amount, or the application of the credit, represents in whole or in part a return to the entity of an amount paid or applied to satisfy the entity ' s liability to pay *diverted profits tax.


    205-35(2)    


    The amount of the refund is so much of the amount refunded or applied as represents the return, or amount remaining, referred to in paragraph (1)(b) or (1A)(b).

    SECTION 205-40   Franking surplus and deficit  

    205-40(1)    
    An entity ' s *franking account is in surplus at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *franking credits in the account exceeds the sum of the *franking debits in the account. The amount of the franking surplus is the amount of the excess.

    205-40(2)    
    An entity ' s *franking account is in deficit at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *franking debits in the account exceeds the sum of the *franking credits in the account. The amount of the franking deficit is the amount of the excess.


    SECTION 205-45   Franking deficit tax  


    Object

    205-45(1)    
    While recognising that an entity may anticipate *franking credits when *franking *distributions, the object of this section is to prevent those credits from being anticipated indefinitely by requiring the entity to reconcile its *franking account at certain times and levying tax if the account is in *deficit.

    Franking deficit at end of income year

    205-45(2)    
    An entity is liable to pay franking deficit tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Franking Deficit Tax) Act 2002 if its *franking account is in *deficit at the end of an income year.

    Corporate tax entity ceases to be a franking entity

    205-45(3)    
    An entity is liable to pay *franking deficit tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Franking Deficit Tax) Act 2002 if:


    (a) it ceases to be a *franking entity; and


    (b) immediately before it ceases to be a franking entity, its *franking account is in *deficit.

    Note:

    The tax is imposed in the New Business Tax System (Franking Deficit Tax) Act 2002 and the amount of the tax is set out in that Act.


    SECTION 205-50   Deferring franking deficit  


    Object

    205-50(1)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that an entity does not avoid *franking deficit tax by deferring the time at which a *franking debit occurs in its *franking account.

    End of year deficit deferred

    205-50(2)    


    An entity is taken to have *received a refund of income tax for an income year immediately before the end of that year for the purposes of subsection 205-45(2) if:


    (a) the refund is paid within 3 months after the end of that year; and


    (b) the *franking account of the entity would have been in *deficit, or in deficit to a greater extent, at the end of that year if the refund had been received in that year.



    Deficit on ceasing to be a franking entity deferred

    205-50(3)    


    If an entity ceases to be a *franking entity during an income year, the entity is taken to have *received a refund of income tax immediately before it ceased to be a franking entity for the purposes of subsection 205-45(3) if:


    (a) the refund is attributable to a period in the year during which the entity was a franking entity; and


    (b) the refund is paid within 3 months after the entity ceases to be a franking entity; and


    (c) the *franking account of the entity would have been in *deficit, or in deficit to a greater extent, immediately before it ceased to be a franking entity if the refund had been received before it ceased to be a franking entity.

    SECTION 205-70   Tax offset arising from franking deficit tax liabilities  


    When does the tax offset arise?

    205-70(1)    
    A *corporate tax entity is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year for which it satisfies the *residency requirement (the relevant year ) if at least one of the following applies:


    (a) the entity has incurred a liability to pay *franking deficit tax in the relevant year;


    (b) the entity incurred such a liability in a previous income year for which it did not satisfy the residency requirement, and that liability has not been taken into account in working out a tax offset under this section;


    (c) when the entity was last entitled to a tax offset under this section for a previous income year, some of the offset remained after applying section 63-10 (tax offset priority rules).



    The amount of the tax offset

    205-70(2)    


    Work out the amount of the *tax offset for the relevant year as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out the total amount of *franking deficit tax that is covered by paragraph (1)(a).

    Then, subject to subsections (5) and (6), reduce so much of it as is attributable to *franking debits to which subsection (8) applies by 30% if that part exceeds 10% of the total amount of *franking credits that arose in the entity ' s *franking account for the relevant year.


    Step 2.

    Work out the total amount of *franking deficit tax that is covered by paragraph (1)(b) for a previous income year.

    Then, subject to subsections (5) and (6), reduce so much of it as is attributable to *franking debits to which subsection (8) applies by 30% if that part exceeds 10% of the total amount of *franking credits that arose in the entity ' s *franking account for that previous income year.


    Step 3.

    Add up the results of step 2 for all the previous income years covered by paragraph (1)(b).


    Step 4.

    Work out the remaining amount of a *tax offset covered by paragraph (1)(c).


    Step 5.

    Add up the results of steps 1, 3 and 4. The result is the *tax offset to which the entity is entitled under this section for the relevant year.

    Note:

    This method statement is modified for certain late balancing entities: see section 205-70 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Example:

    The following apply to a corporate tax entity that satisfies the residency requirement for an income year:

  • • the entity ' s income tax liability for that year would be $100,000 if its tax offsets were disregarded;
  • • for that year, the entity has a tax offset of $60,000 under this section (the franking deficit offset ) and a tax offset of $80,000 in respect of foreign income tax paid by the entity (the foreign income tax offset ).
  • Under section 63-10 (about tax offset priority rules), the foreign income tax offset must be applied before the franking deficit offset is applied. As a result, that offset and $20,000 of the franking deficit offset combine to reduce the entity ' s income tax liability to nil. The remaining $40,000 of the franking deficit offset will be included in a franking deficit offset for the next income year for which the entity satisfies the residency requirement.


    205-70(3)    
    (Repealed by No 58 of 2006)



    Residency requirement

    205-70(4)    
    To determine whether the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the relevant year, section 205-25 has effect as if each of the following were an event specified in a relevant table for the purposes of that section:


    (a) the entity incurring a liability to pay *franking deficit tax in the relevant year;


    (b) the assessment of the entity ' s *income tax liability for the relevant year that is made on the *assessment day for that year.

     View history note


    30% reduction will generally not apply to private company ' s first year of tax liability

    205-70(5)    


    The 30% reductions in steps 1 and 2 of the method statement in subsection (2) do not apply in working out the amount of the *tax offset to which the entity is entitled for the relevant year if:


    (a) the entity is a *private company for the relevant year; and


    (b) if the company did not have the tax offset (but had all its other tax offsets) it would have had an *income tax liability for the relevant year; and


    (c) the company has not had an income tax liability for any income year before the relevant year; and


    (d) the amount of the liability referred to in paragraph (b) is at least 90% of the amount of the *deficit in the company ' s *franking account at the end of the relevant year.



    Commissioner ' s discretion

    205-70(6)    


    The 30% reductions in steps 1 and 2 of the method statement in subsection (2) do not apply in working out the amount of the *tax offset to which the entity is entitled for the relevant year if the Commissioner determines in writing, on application by the entity in the *approved form, that the excess referred to in those steps was due to events outside the control of the entity.

    205-70(7)    


    A determination under subsection (6) is not a legislative instrument.

    Applicable franking debits

    205-70(8)    


    This subsection applies to *franking debits in the *franking account of an entity:


    (a) that arise under table item 1, 3, 5 or 6 in section 205-30 for an income year; and


    (b) if the entity has franking debits covered by paragraph (a) for that income year - that arise under table item 2 in that section for that income year.


    Division 207 - Effect of receiving a franked distribution  

    Guide to Division 207  

    SECTION 207-5   Overview  

    207-5(1)    
    If a corporate tax entity makes a franked distribution to one of its members, then, as a general rule:


    (a) an amount equal to the franking credit on the distribution is included in the member ' s assessable income; and


    (b) the member is entitled to a tax offset equal to the same amount.

    207-5(2)    
    In some cases a residency requirement must be satisfied for the general rule to apply.

    207-5(3)    


    If a franked distribution is made to a member that is a partnership or the trustee of a trust, an amount equal to the franking credit on the distribution is also included in the member ' s assessable income as mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

    207-5(4)    


    However, a tax offset in relation to that distribution is only available to an entity (who may be a partner, beneficiary or a trustee) if the distribution flows indirectly to it and does not flow indirectly through it to another entity. The tax offset is equal to its share of the franking credit on the distribution.
    Note:

    That share is a notional amount and the entity can have that share without actually receiving any of that franking credit or distribution.


    207-5(5)    


    There are exceptions to both the general rule mentioned in subsection (1) and the special rule mentioned in subsection (4). Basically, these exceptions are created:


    (a) where the relevant entity would not have paid tax on the distribution or a share of the distribution (see Subdivisions 207-D and 207-E ); and


    (b) where there is a manipulation of the imputation system in a manner that is not permitted under the income tax law (see Subdivision 207-F ).


    Subdivision 207-A - Effect of receiving a franked distribution generally  

    SECTION 207-10   What this Subdivision is about  


    As a general rule, if a member of an entity receives a franked distribution:

  • • an amount equal to the franking credit on the distribution is included in the member ' s assessable income; and
  • • the member is entitled to a tax offset equal to the franking credit on the distribution.
  • Operative provisions

    SECTION 207-15   Applying the general rule  

    207-15(1)    
    This Subdivision sets out, as a general rule, the tax effect of receiving a *franked distribution.

    207-15(2)    


    This Subdivision does not apply to:


    (a) a partnership or trustee to whom a *franked distribution is made (except a partnership or trustee that is a *corporate tax entity, or a trustee of a trust that is a *complying superannuation entity, when the distribution is made); or


    (b) an entity to whom a franked distribution *flows indirectly.

    Note:

    Subject to the other provisions in this Division, Subdivision 207-B applies to an entity excluded from the application of this Subdivision because of this subsection.


    207-15(3)    


    This Subdivision applies subject to Subdivisions 207-C , 207-D , 207-E and 207-F .
    Note 1:

    Subdivision 207-C sets out the residency requirements that must be satisfied by an individual or a corporate tax entity that receives a franked distribution.

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 207-D sets out the cases in which the gross-up and tax offset rules in this Subdivision and Subdivision 207-B will not apply because the franked distribution (or a share of it) would not have been taxed in any case.

    Note 3:

    Subdivision 207-E sets out the exceptions to the rules in Subdivision 207-D.

    Note 4:

    Subdivision 207-F sets out the cases in which the gross-up and tax offset rules in this Subdivision and Subdivision 207-B will not apply because the imputation system has been manipulated in a way that is not permitted under the income tax law.


    SECTION 207-20   General rule - gross-up and tax offset  

    207-20(1)    
    If an entity makes a *franked distribution to another entity, the assessable income of the receiving entity, for the income year in which the distribution is made, includes the amount of the *franking credit on the distribution. This is in addition to any other amount included in the receiving entity's assessable income in relation to the distribution under any other provision of this Act.

    207-20(2)    
    The receiving entity is entitled to a *tax offset for the income year in which the distribution is made. The tax offset is equal to the *franking credit on the distribution.


    Subdivision 207-B - Franked distribution received through certain partnerships and trustees  

    SECTION 207-25   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision deals with an entity that receives a benefit of a franked distribution where:

  • (a) the distribution is made to a partnership or the trustee of a trust; and
  • (b) the benefit is received either directly or through other interposed partnerships or trusts.
  • The distribution is regarded as flowing indirectly to the entity under this Subdivision.

    On the basis of a notional amount of the entity's share of the distribution, the entity may be entitled to have an amount included in its assessable income and/or a tax offset under this Subdivision.

    Gross-up and tax offset

    SECTION 207-30  

    207-30   Applying this Subdivision  


    This Subdivision applies subject to Subdivisions 207-D , 207-E and 207-F .
    Note 1:

    Subdivision 207-D sets out the cases in which the gross-up and tax offset rules in this Subdivision and Subdivision 207-A will not apply because the franked distribution (or a share of it) would not have been taxed in any case.

    Note 2:

    Subdivision 207-E sets out the exceptions to the rules in Subdivision 207-D .

    Note 3:

    Subdivision 207-F sets out the cases in which the gross-up and tax offset rules in this Subdivision and Subdivision 207-A will not apply because the imputation system has been manipulated in a way that is not permitted under the income tax law.

    SECTION 207-35   Gross-up - distribution made to, or flows indirectly through, a partnership or trustee  


    Additional amount of assessable income

    207-35(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *franked distribution is made in an income year to an entity that is a partnership or the trustee of a trust; and


    (b) the entity is not a *corporate tax entity when the distribution is made; and


    (c) if the entity is the trustee of a trust - the trust is not a *complying superannuation entity when the distribution is made;

    the assessable income of the partnership or trust for that income year includes the amount of the *franking credit on the distribution.


    207-35(2)    
    The amount is in addition to any other amount included in that assessable income in relation to the distribution under any other provision of this Act.

    Note:

    The amount will affect the income tax liability of a partner in the partnership, or a beneficiary or the trustee of the trust: see Divisions 5 and 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    207-35(3)    


    Subsection (4) applies if:


    (a) a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly, to a partnership or the trustee of a trust in an income year; and


    (b) the assessable income of the partnership or trust for that year includes an amount (the franking credit amount ) that is all or a part of the additional amount of assessable income included under subsection (1) in relation to the distribution; and


    (c) the distribution flows indirectly to an entity that is a partner in the partnership, or a beneficiary or the trustee of the trust; and


    (d) disregarding Division 6E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , the entity has an amount of assessable income for that year that is attributable to all or a part of the distribution.


    207-35(4)    


    Despite any provisions in Divisions 5 and 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , the entity ' s assessable income for that year also includes:


    (a) in the case of an entity that is a partner in a partnership - so much of the franking credit amount as is equal to the entity ' s *share of the *franking credit on the distribution; and


    (b) in the case of an entity that is a beneficiary of a trust:


    (i) so much of the franking credit amount as is equal to the entity ' s share of the franking credit on the distribution; and

    (ii) the amount mentioned in section 207-37 .
    Example:

    A franked distribution of $70 is made to the trustee of a trust in an income year. The trust also has $100 of assessable income from other sources. Under subsection (1), the trust ' s assessable income includes an additional amount of $30 (which is the franking credit on the distribution). The trust has a net income of $200 for that income year.

    There are 2 beneficiaries of the trust, P and Q, who are presently entitled to the trust ' s income. Under the trust deed, P is entitled to all of the franked distribution and Q is entitled to all other income.

    The distribution flows indirectly to P (as P has a share of the trust ' s net income that is covered by paragraph 97(1)(a) and has a share of the distribution under section 207-55 equal to 100% of the distribution).

    Under this subsection, P ' s assessable income includes $70 (the amount mentioned in section 207-37 (attributable franked distribution)) and also includes the full amount of the franking credit (as P ' s share of the franking credit on the distribution is $30 under section 207-57 ). Q ' s assessable income does not include any of the amount of the franked distribution or the franking credit.


    207-35(5)    


    Subsection (6) applies if:


    (a) a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly, to the trustee of a trust in an income year; and


    (b) the assessable income of the trust for that year includes an amount (the franking credit amount ) that is all or a part of the additional amount of assessable income included under subsection (1) in relation to the distribution; and


    (c) disregarding Division 6E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , the trustee of the trust is liable to be assessed (and pay tax) in respect of an amount (the assessable amount ) under section 98 , 99 or 99A of that Act in relation to the trust.


    207-35(6)    


    Despite any provisions in Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , for the purposes of that Division, increase the assessable amount by so much of the franking credit amount as is equal to:


    (a) if the trustee of the trust is liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 98 of that Act - the sum of:


    (i) the trustee ' s *share of the *franking credit on the distribution in respect of the beneficiary; and

    (ii) the amount mentioned in section 207-37 ; or


    (b) if the trustee of the trust is liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 99 or 99A of that Act - the sum of:


    (i) the trustee ' s share of the franking credit on the distribution; and

    (ii) the amount mentioned in section 207-37 .

    SECTION 207-37   Attributable franked distribution - trusts  

    207-37(1)    
    The amount is the product of:


    (a) the amount of the *franked distribution (to the extent that an amount of the franked distribution remained after reducing it by deductions that were directly relevant to it); and


    (b) the beneficiary ' s or the trustee ' s (as the case requires) *share of the franked distribution (see section 207-55 ), divided by the amount of the franked distribution.

    207-37(2)    
    Subsection (3) applies if the net income of the trust estate (disregarding the amount of any *franking credits) for the relevant income year falls short of the sum of:


    (a) the *net capital gain (if any) of the trust estate for the income year; and


    (b) the total of all *franked distributions (if any) included in the assessable income of the trust estate for the income year (to the extent that an amount of the franked distributions remained after reducing them by deductions that were directly relevant to them).

    207-37(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), replace paragraph (a) of that subsection with the following paragraph:


    (a) the product of:


    (i) the amount of the *franked distribution (to the extent that an amount of the franked distribution remained after reducing it by deductions that were directly relevant to it); and

    (ii) the *net income of the trust estate for that income year (disregarding the amount of any *franking credits), divided by the sum mentioned in subsection (2); and

    SECTION 207-45  

    207-45   Tax offset - distribution flows indirectly to an entity  


    An entity to whom a *franked distribution *flows indirectly in an income year is entitled to a *tax offset for that income year that is equal to its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution, if it is:


    (a) an individual; or


    (b) a *corporate tax entity when the distribution flows indirectly to it; or


    (c)the trustee of a trust that is liable to be assessed on a share of, or all or a part of, the trust ' s *net income under section 98, 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for that income year; or


    (ca) (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)


    (d) the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity, a *non-complying superannuation fund or a *non-complying approved deposit fund in relation to that income year.

    Note:

    The entities covered by this section are the ultimate recipients of the distribution because the distribution does not flow indirectly through them to other entities. As a result they are also the ultimate taxpayers in respect of the distribution and are given the tax offset to acknowledge the income tax that has already been paid on the profits underlying the distribution.

    Key concepts

    SECTION 207-50   When a franked distribution flows indirectly to or through an entity  

    207-50(1)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, this section sets out the only circumstances in which a *franked distribution:


    (a) flows indirectly to an entity (subsection (2), (3) or (4)); or


    (b) flows indirectly through an entity (subsection (5)).

    Partners

    207-50(2)    
    A *franked distribution flows indirectly to a partner in a partnership in an income year if, and only if:


    (a) during that income year, the distribution is made to the partnership, or *flows indirectly to the partnership as a beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (3); and


    (b) the partner has an individual interest:


    (i) in the partnership ' s *net income for that income year that is covered by paragraph 92(1)(a) or (b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) in a *partnership loss of the partnership for that income year that is covered by paragraph 92(2)(a) or (b) of that Act;
    (whether or not that individual interest becomes assessable income in the hands of the partner); and


    (c) the partner ' s *share of the distribution under section 207-55 is a positive amount (whether or not the partner actually receives any of that share).

    Beneficiaries

    207-50(3)    
    A *franked distribution flows indirectly to a beneficiary of a trust in an income year if, and only if:


    (a) during that income year, the distribution is made to the trustee of the trust, or *flows indirectly to the trustee as a partner or beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (2) or this subsection; and


    (b) the beneficiary has this amount for that income year (the share amount ):


    (i) a share of the trust ' s *net income for that income year that is covered by paragraph 97(1)(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) an individual interest in the trust ' s net income for that income year that is covered by section 98A or 100 of that Act;
    (whether or not the share amount becomes assessable income in the hands of the beneficiary); and


    (c) the beneficiary ' s *share of the distribution under section 207-55 is a positive amount (whether or not the beneficiary actually receives any of that share).



    Trustees

    207-50(4)    
    A *franked distribution flows indirectly to the trustee of a trust in an income year if, and only if:


    (a) during that income year, the distribution is made to the trustee, or *flows indirectly to the trustee as a partner or beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (2) or (3); and


    (b) the trustee is liable or, but for another provision in this Act, would be liable, to be assessed in respect of an amount (the share amount ) that is:


    (i) a share of the trust ' s *net income for that income year under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) all or a part of the trust ' s net income for that income year under section 99 or 99A of that Act;
    (whether or not the share amount becomes assessable income in the hands of the trustee); and


    (c) the trustee ' s *share of the distribution under section 207-55 is a positive amount (whether or not the trustee actually receives any of that share).

    Note:

    A trustee to whom a franked distribution flows indirectly under this subsection is entitled to a tax offset under section 207-45 and the distribution does not flow indirectly through the trustee to another entity.


    207-50(5)    


    A *franked distribution flows indirectly through an entity (the first entity ) to another entity if, and only if:


    (a) the other entity is the focal entity in an item of the table in section 207-55 in relation to the distribution; and


    (b) that focal entity ' s *share of the distribution is based on the first entity ' s share of the distribution as an intermediary entity in that or another item of the table.

    Example:

    A franked distribution of $140 is made to a partnership. An amount equal to the franking credit on the distribution ($60) is included in the partnership ' s assessable income under section 207-35 . Because the partnership has losses of $300 from other sources, it has a partnership loss of $100 for the income year.

    The partnership has 2 equal partners. One partner is the trustee of a trust and the other partner is an individual. The distribution flows indirectly to each partner under subsection (2). Each partner has a share of the partnership loss ($50), a share of the distribution under sections 207-55 ($70) and a share of the franking credit under section 207-57 ($30).

    The individual partner is allowed a tax offset of $30 under section 207-45 .

    Because the trust has $100 of income from other sources, it has a net income of $50 for that income year ($100 minus the share of the partnership loss of $50).

    The trust has one individual as a beneficiary, to whom the distribution flows indirectly under subsection (3). The beneficiary ' s share of the franked distribution is therefore $70 under sections 207-55 and its share of the franking credit is $30 under section 207-57 . The beneficiary is also allowed a tax offset of $30 under section 207-45 .


    SECTION 207-55   Share of a franked distribution  


    Object of section

    207-55(1)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that:


    (a) the amount of a *franked distribution made to a partnership or the trustee of a trust is allocated notionally amongst entities who *derive benefits from that distribution; and


    (b) that allocation corresponds with the way in which those benefits were derived.

    Note:

    An entity can derive a benefit from the distribution (and therefore has a share of the distribution) without actually receiving any of the distribution: see subsection (2) of this section and the example at the end of section 207-50 .


    207-55(2)    
    An entity's share of a *franked distribution is an amount notionally allocated to the entity as its share of the distribution, whether or not the entity actually receives any of that distribution.

    207-55(3)    


    That amount is equal to the entity's share of the distribution as the focal entity in column 3 of an item of the table.
    Note:

    An entity's share of the distribution is based on the share of the distribution of each preceding intermediary entity through which the distribution flows, starting from the intermediary entity to whom the distribution is made.

    This means that in some cases (see items 2 and 4), more than one item of the table will need to be applied to work out the share of the distribution of an ultimate recipient of the distribution.


    Share of a franked distribution
    Item Column 1

    For this intermediary entity and this focal entity:
    Column 2

    The intermediary entity's share of the franked distribution is:
    Column 3

    The focal entity's share of the franked distribution is:
    1 a partnership is the intermediary entity and a partner in that partnership is the focal entity if:

    (a) a *franked distribution is made to the partnership; and

    (b) the partner has, in respect of the partnership, an individual interest mentioned in subsection 207-50(2)
    the amount of the franked distribution so much of the franked distribution as is taken into account in working out the amount of that individual interest
    2 a partnership is the intermediary entity and a partner in that partnership is the focal entity if:

    (a) a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the partnership as a beneficiary of a trust; and

    (b) the partner has, in respect of the partnership, an individual interest mentioned in subsection 207-50(2)
    the amount worked out under column 3 of item 3 or 4 of this table where the partnership, as a beneficiary, is the focal entity in that item so much of the amount worked out under column 2 of this item as is attributable to the partner, having regard to the partnership agreement and any other relevant circumstances
    3 the trustee of a trust is the intermediary entity and the trustee or a beneficiary of the trust is the focal entity if:

    (a) a *franked distribution is made to the trustee; and

    (b) the trustee or beneficiary has, in respect of the trust, a share amount mentioned in subsection 207-50(3) or (4)
    (a) if the trust has a positive amount of *net income for that year - the amount of the franked distribution; or

    (b) otherwise - nil
    the amount mentioned in subsection (4)
    4 the trustee of a trust is the intermediary entity and the trustee or a beneficiary of the trust is the focal entity if:

    (a) a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the trustee as a partner in a partnership or as a beneficiary of another trust; and

    (b) the trustee or beneficiary has, in respect of the trust, a share amount mentioned in subsection 207-50(3) or (4)
    the amount worked out under column 3 of:

    (a) item 1 or 2 of this table where the trustee, as a partner, is the focal entity in that item; or

    (b) item 3 or a previous application of this item where the trustee, as a beneficiary, is the focal entity in that item
    so much of the amount worked out under column 2 of this item as is attributable to the focal entity in this item, having regard to the trust deed and any other relevant circumstances

    Note:

    In item 3 or 4, the trustee of a trust can be both the intermediary entity and the focal entity in the same item.


    207-55(4)    


    For the purposes of column 3 of item 3 of the table in subsection (3), the amount is the sum of:


    (a) so much of the amount worked out under column 2 of item 3 of the table in subsection (3) to which:


    (i) unless subparagraph (ii) applies - the focal entity is *specifically entitled; or

    (ii) if the focal entity is the trustee and has the share amount because of the operation of section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in respect of a beneficiary (see subparagraph 207-50(4)(b)(i) ) - the beneficiary is specifically entitled; and


    (b) if there is an amount of the *franked distribution to which no beneficiary is specifically entitled - that amount multiplied by:


    (i) unless subparagraph (ii) applies - the focal entity ' s *adjusted Division 6 percentage of the income of the trust for the relevant income year; or

    (ii) if the focal entity is the trustee and has the share amount because of the operation of section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in respect of a beneficiary (see subparagraph 207-50(4)(b)(i) ) - the beneficiary ' s adjusted Division 6 percentage of the income of the trust for the relevant income year.

    SECTION 207-57   Share of the franking credit on a franked distribution  

    207-57(1)    
    An entity's share of a *franking credit on a *franked distribution is an amount notionally allocated to the entity as its share of that credit, whether or not the entity actually receives any of that credit or distribution.

    207-57(2)    
    Work out that amount as follows:


      Amount of the
    *franking credit
    on the
    *franked distribution
    × Entity's *share of the
      *franked distribution  
    Amount of the
    *franked distribution
     


    SECTION 207-58   Specifically entitled to an amount of a franked distribution  

    207-58(1)    
    A beneficiary of a trust estate is specifically entitled to an amount of a *franked distribution made to the trust estate in an income year equal to the amount calculated under the following formula:


      *Franked distribution × Share of net financial benefit
    Net financial benefit
     

    where:

    net financial benefit
    means an amount equal to the *financial benefit that is referable to the *franked distribution (after any application by the trustee of expenses that are directly relevant to the franked distribution).

    share of net financial benefit
    means an amount equal to the *financial benefit that, in accordance with the terms of the trust:


    (a) the beneficiary has received, or can be reasonably expected to receive; and


    (b) is referable to the *franked distribution (after application by the trustee of any expenses that are directly relevant to the franked distribution); and


    (c) is recorded, in its character as referable to the franked distribution, in the accounts or records of the trust no later than the end of the income year.


    207-58(2)    
    To avoid doubt, for the purposes of subsection (1), something is done in accordance with the terms of the trust if it is done in accordance with:


    (a) the exercise of a power conferred by the terms of the trust; or


    (b) the terms of the trust deed (if any), and the terms applicable to the trust because of the operation of legislation, the common law or the rules of equity.

    SECTION 207-59   Franked distributions within class treated as single franked distribution  

    207-59(1)    


    Subsection (2) applies if:


    (a) a trust receives 2 or more *franked distributions inan income year; and


    (b) all of the franked distributions that the trust receives in the income year are, in accordance with the terms of the trust, to the extent that they are distributed in that income year, distributed within a single class.


    207-59(2)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision and Division 6E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , treat all of the *franked distributions that the trust receives in the income year as one single franked distribution.

    207-59(3)    
    To avoid doubt, for the purposes of subsection (1), something is done in accordance with the terms of the trust if it is done in accordance with:


    (a) the exercise of a power conferred by the terms of the trust; or


    (b) the terms of the trust deed (if any), and the terms applicable to the trust because of the operation of legislation, the common law or the rules of equity.

    Subdivision 207-C - Residency requirements for the general rule  

    SECTION 207-60   What this Subdivision is about  


    Some recipients of a franked distribution must satisfy a residency requirement if their assessable income is to include the franking credit on the distribution, and they are to be entitled to a tax offset, under the general rule.

    SECTION 207-65   Satisfying the residency requirement  

    207-65(1)    
    This Subdivision sets out the residency requirements that must be satisfied by an individual or a corporate tax entity that receives a franked distribution, if the franking credit on the distribution is to be included in that entity ' s assessable income, or the entity is to be entitled to a tax offset, under the general rule.

    207-65(2)    
    It does not impose a residency requirement on other entities, because the significance of residency for those entities is dealt with elsewhere in this Act.

    207-65(3)    
    It does not impose a residency requirement where a distribution flows indirectly to an entity. This is also because the significance of residency is dealt with elsewhere, for the most part in Divisions 5 and 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    Operative provisions

    SECTION 207-70  

    207-70   Gross-up and tax offset under section 207-20  


    If an entity makes a *franked distribution to an individual or a *corporate tax entity:


    (a) no amount is included in the receiving entity ' s assessable income under subsection 207-20(1) ; and


    (b) the receiving entity is not entitled to a *tax offset under subsection 207-20(2) ;

    unless the receiving entity satisfies the *residency requirement at the time the distribution is made.

    SECTION 207-75   Residency requirement  

    207-75(1)    
    An entity that receives a *distribution satisfies the residency requirement at the time the distribution is made if:


    (a) in the case of an individual - the individual is an Australian resident at that time; and


    (b) in the case of a company - the company is an Australian resident at that time; and


    (c) in the case of a *corporate limited partnership - the corporate limited partnership is an Australian resident at that time; and


    (d) (Repealed by No 53 of 2016)


    (e) in the case of a *public trading trust - the public trading trust is a resident unit trust for the income year in which that time occurs.


    207-75(2)    
    An entity that receives a *distribution also satisfies the residency requirement at the time the distribution is made if the entity at that time:


    (a) is a company or an individual; and


    (b) is a foreign resident; and


    (c) carries on business in Australia at or through a permanent establishment of the entity in Australia, being a permanent establishment within the meaning of:


    (i) a double tax agreement (as defined in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) that relates to a foreign country and affects the entity; or

    (ii) subsection 6(1) of that Act, if there is no such agreement;

    and the distribution is attributable to the permanent establishment.


    Subdivision 207-D - No gross-up or tax offset where distribution would not be taxed  

    SECTION 207-80   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision creates the appropriate adjustment to cancel the effect of the gross-up and tax offset rules where a franked distribution (or a share of it) is, or would be, exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income in the relevant entity's hands (and therefore would not be taxed in any case).

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 207-85  

    207-85   Applying this Subdivision  


    This Subdivision applies subject to Subdivisions 207-E and 207-F .
    Note 1:

    Subdivision 207-E sets out exceptions to the rules in this Subdivision.

    Note 2:

    Where both this Subdivision and Subdivision 207-F apply to an entity, the application of this Subdivision is subject to the rules in Subdivision 207-F : see subsections 207-145(3) and 207-150(7) and (8).

    SECTION 207-90   Distribution that is made to an entity  


    Whole of distribution not assessable

    207-90(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *franked distribution is made to an entity; and


    (b) the distribution does not *flow indirectly through the entity to another entity; and


    (c) the distribution is *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income in the hands of the entity;

    then, for the purposes of this Act:


    (d) the amount of the *franking credit on the distribution is not included in the assessable income of the entity under section 207-20 ; and


    (e) the entity is not entitled to a *tax offset under this Division because of the distribution.



    Part of distribution not assessable

    207-90(2)    
    If:


    (a) a *franked distribution is made to an entity; and


    (b) the distribution does not *flow indirectly through the entity to another entity; and


    (c) a part of the distribution (the relevant part ) is *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income in the hands of the entity;

    then, for the purposes of this Act:


    (d) the amount of the distribution is taken to have been reduced by the relevant part; and


    (e) the amount of the *franking credit on the distribution is to be worked out as follows:


      *Franked distribution
    apart from this section − Relevant part
    *Franked distribution
    apart from this section
    × *Franking credit
    on the *franked distribution
    apart from this section
     


    SECTION 207-95   Distribution that flows indirectly to an entity  


    Whole of share of distribution not assessable

    207-95(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to an entity in an income year; and


    (b) the entity ' s *share of the distribution would, in its hands, be *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income (whether or not it had actually received that share);

    then, for the purposes of this Act:


    (c) subsection (2), (3) or (4) (as appropriate) applies to the entity in relation to that income year; and


    (d) the entity is not entitled to a *tax offset under this Division because of the distribution; and


    (e) if the distribution flows indirectly through the entity to another entity - subsection 207-35(3) and section 207-45 do not apply to that other entity.

    Note:

    This section can therefore apply, for example, where the entity is a partner in a partnership that has a partnership loss and the entity does not actually receive any of the distribution.



    Partner

    207-95(2)    
    If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as a partner in a partnership under subsection 207-50(2) , the entity can deduct an amount for that income year that is equal to its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution.

    Beneficiary

    207-95(3)    
    If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as a beneficiary of a trust under subsection 207-50(3) , the entity can deduct an amount for that income year that is equal to the lesser of:


    (a) its share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection; and


    (b) its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution.

    Trustee

    207-95(4)    


    If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as the trustee of a trust under subsection 207-50(4) , the entity ' s share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection is to be reduced by the lesser of:


    (a) that share amount; and


    (b) its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution.

    Example:

    A franked distribution of $70 is made to a partnership.

    Under section 207-35 , an additional amount of $30 is included in the partnership ' s assessable income because of the distribution.

    The partnership has 2 equal partners, X and Y. X is a foreign resident individual whose share of partnership ' s net income for the income year is $50 (share of distribution of $35 and share of franking credit of $15). That share of distribution is not assessable income and not exempt income under section 128D of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    X ' s assessable income of $15 (share of franking credit) is reduced to nil because of the deduction of $15 under subsection (2). Because of subsection (1), X is not entitled to a tax offset under section 207-45 .



    Part of share of distribution not assessable

    207-95(5)    
    If:


    (a) a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to an entity in an income year; and


    (b) a part of the entity ' s *share of the distribution (the relevant part ) would, in its hands, be *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income (whether or not it had actually received that part);

    then, subsection (2), (3) or (4) (as appropriate) applies to the entity on the basis that the amount of its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution is worked out as follows:


            Relevant part      
    Entity ' s *share
    of the *franked distribution
    × Entity ' s *share
    of the *franking credit on
    the *franked distribution
    apart from this section
     


    207-95(6)    
    In addition, the following apply to an entity covered by subsection (5):


    (a) if the distribution would otherwise *flow indirectly through the entity - the entity ' s *share of the distribution for the purposes of this Act (other than subsection (2), (3) or (4)) is to be reduced by the relevant part mentioned in subsection (5);


    (b) if the entity would otherwise be entitled to a *tax offset under this Division because of the distribution - the amount of the tax offset is to be worked out as follows:


      Entity ' s *share of
    the *franking credit on the
    *franked distribution apart from this section
    Amount worked out
    under subsection (5)
     


    Subdivision 207-E - Exceptions to the rules in Subdivision 207-D  

    Guide to Subdivision 207-E

    SECTION 207-105   What this Subdivision is about  


    Subdivision 207-D does not apply to certain exempt institutions, trusts and life insurance companies as set out in this Subdivision. Such an entity may be entitled to a tax offset under this Subdivision in relation to a franked distribution.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    207-110 Effect of non-assessable income on gross up and tax offset
    Exempt institutions
    207-115 Which exempt institutions are eligible for a refund?
    207-117 Residency requirement
    207-119 Entity not treated as exempt institution eligible for refund in certain circumstances
    207-120 Entity may be ineligible because of a distribution event
    207-122 Entity may be ineligible if distribution is in the form of property other than money
    207-124 Entity may be ineligible if other money or property also acquired
    207-125 (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)
    207-126 Entity may be ineligible if distributions do not match trust share amounts
    207-128 Reinvestment choice
    207-130 Controller ' s liability
    207-132 Treatment of benefits provided by an entity to a controller
    207-134 Entity ' s present entitlement disregarded in certain circumstances
    207-136 Review of certain decisions

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 207-110   Effect of non-assessable income on gross up and tax offset  

    207-110(1)    
    This section applies to an entity to whom a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly, in any of the following circumstances:


    (a) the entity is an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund and the distribution does not flow indirectly to the entity as a partner in a partnership under subsection 207-50(2) ;


    (b) the distribution is, or the entity ' s *share of the distribution would have been, this kind of income in its hands:


    (i) *exempt income under section 295-385 (about income from assets set aside to meet current pension liabilities), section 295-390 (about income from other assets used to meet current pension liabilities) or section 295-400 (about income of a PST attributable to current pension liabilities); or

    (ii) *non-assessable non-exempt income under paragraph 320-37(1)(a) (segregated exempt assets of a life insurance company) or paragraph 320-37(1)(d) (certain amounts received by a friendly society) of this Act.

    207-110(2)    
    The following have effect in relation to the entity:


    (a) section 207-90 or 207-95 (as appropriate) does not apply to the entity;


    (b) if the entity would, apart from section 207-90 or 207-95 , be entitled to a *tax offset under section 207-20 or 207-45 in relation to the distribution - the entity is entitled to that tax offset;


    (c) if the entity would not be entitled to such a tax offset, the entity is entitled to a tax offset under this section that is equal to:


    (i) if the distribution is made to the entity - the *franking credit on the distribution; or

    (ii) if the distribution *flows indirectly to the entity - the entity ' s *share of the franking credit on the distribution;


    (d) if the distribution flows indirectly through the entity to another entity - subsection 207-35(3) and section 207-45 do not apply to that other entity.

    Note:

    Paragraph (2)(c) only applies to an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund and that is not entitled to a tax offset under section 207-20 or 207-45 . An entity covered by paragraph (1)(b) will, in all cases, be entitled to a tax offset under section 207-20 or 207-45 .


    Exempt institutions

    SECTION 207-115   Which exempt institutions are eligible for a refund?  

    207-115(1)    
    This section sets out the only circumstances in which an entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund .

    Income tax exempt charities

    207-115(2)    
    An entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if it:

    (a)    

    is covered by item 1.1 of the table in section 50-5 ; and

    (b)    is endorsed as exempt from income tax under Subdivision 50-B ; and

    (c)    satisfies the *residency requirement.



    Income tax exempt deductible gift recipients

    207-115(3)    
    An entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if it:

    (a)    is endorsed under paragraph 30-120(a) ; and

    (b)    satisfies the *residency requirement.

    Income tax exempt specified deductible gift recipients

    207-115(4)    
    An entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if:

    (a)    the entity ' s name is specified in a table in a section in Subdivision 30-B ; and

    (b)    it has an ABN; and

    (c)    

    it satisfies the *residency requirement.

    207-115(5)    
    (Repealed by No 40 of 2023)



    Income tax exempt subsidiaries of the Future Fund Board

    207-115(5A)    


    An entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if it is covered by item 5.4 of the table in section 50-25 .

    Prescribed income tax exempt entities

    207-115(6)    
    An entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if the entity is prescribed as an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund by the regulations.

    207-115(7)    
    This section has effect subject to sections 207-119 to 207-136 .


    SECTION 207-117  

    207-117   Residency requirement  


    An entity satisfies the residency requirement for the purposes of determining whether, at the time a *franked distribution is made, the entity is an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if:


    (a) the entity has a physical presence in Australia; and


    (b) to that extent, incurs its expenditure and pursues its objectives principally in Australia;

    at all times during the income year in which the distribution is made.

    SECTION 207-119  

    207-119   Entity not treated as exempt institution eligible for refund in certain circumstances  


    For the purposes of this Act:


    (a) an entity must not be treated as an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund in relation to a *franked distribution if section 207-120 , 207-122 or 207-124 applies to the entity in relation to the distribution; and


    (b) a beneficiary of a trust must not be treated as an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund in relation to a franked distribution made in an income year if section 207-126 applies to the beneficiary in relation to that income year.

    SECTION 207-120   Entity may be ineligible because of a distribution event  

    207-120(1)    
    This section applies to an entity (the ineligible entity ) if:


    (a) a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly under subsection 207-50(3) or (4) , to the entity; and


    (b) subsection (2) of this section applies because of a *distribution event in relation to the distribution.


    207-120(2)    
    Subject to subsection (3) and to section 207-128 , this subsection applies if, because of a *distribution event in relation to the *franked distribution:


    (a) the ineligible entity or another entity:


    (i) makes, becomes liable to make, or may reasonably be expected to make or to become liable to make, a payment to any entity; or

    (ii) transfers, becomes liable to transfer, or may reasonably be expected to transfer or to become liable to transfer, any property to any entity; or

    (iii) incurs, becomes liable to incur, or may reasonably be expected to incur or to become liable to incur, any other detriment, disadvantage, liability or obligation; or


    (b) if the distribution is made to the ineligible entity - the amount or value of the benefit *derived by the ineligible entity from the distribution is, will be, or may reasonably be expected to be, less than the amount or value of the distribution as at the time the distribution is made; or


    (c) if the distribution *flows indirectly to the ineligible entity - the amount or value of the benefit derived by the ineligible entity from the ineligible entity ' s *trust share amount in relation to the distribution is, will be, or may reasonably be expected to be, less than the amount or value of the ineligible entity ' s trust share amount in relation to the distribution as at the time when that amount arises; or


    (d) any of the following entities has obtained, will obtain or may reasonably be expected to obtain, a benefit, advantage, right or privilege:


    (i) the entity making the distribution;

    (ii) an entity through which the distribution flows indirectly to the ineligible entity;

    (iii) an *associate of any of those entities.
    Note:

    For when paragraph (d) is satisfied, see also subsection 207-132(2) .



    Exception to paragraph (2)(b) or (c)

    207-120(3)    
    Paragraph (2)(b) or (c) does not apply if:


    (a) that paragraph would otherwise apply only because of expenses the ineligible entity has incurred, will incur, or may reasonably be expected to incur, for the purpose of obtaining the *franked distribution or *trust share amount mentioned in that paragraph; and


    (b) the Commissioner considers the expenses to be reasonable.

    Trust share amount

    207-120(4)    
    An entity ' s trust share amount in relation to a *franked distribution that *flows indirectly to the entity under subsection 207-50(3) or (4) is the entity ' s share amount that is mentioned in that subsection.

    Distribution event

    207-120(5)    
    A distribution event in relation to a *franked distribution is an act, transaction or circumstance that has happened, will happen, or may reasonably be expected to happen, as part of, in relation to or as a result of:


    (a) the payment or receipt of the distribution; or


    (b) if the distribution *flows indirectly to an entity under subsection 207-50(3) or (4) - the arising of, or the distribution or receipt of, the entity ' s *trust share amount in relation to the distribution; or


    (c) an *arrangement entered into in association with a matter mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b).

    SECTION 207-122  

    207-122   Entity may be ineligible if distribution is in the form of property other than money  


    This section applies to an entity (the ineligible entity ) to whom a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly under subsection 207-50(3) or (4) , if:


    (a) one of the following is in the form of property other than money:


    (i) if the distribution is made to the ineligible entity - all or part of the distribution;

    (ii) if the distribution flows indirectly to the ineligible entity through the trustee of a trust under subsection 207-50(3) or (4) - all or a part of a distribution (the trust distribution ) made by the trustee of the trust that relates to the ineligible entity ' s *trust share amount in relation to the franked distribution; and


    (b) the terms and conditions on which the franked distribution or trust distribution is made are such that the ineligible entity:


    (i) does not receive immediate custody and control of the property; or

    (ii) does not have the unconditional right to retain custody and control of the property in perpetuity; or

    (iii) does not obtain an immediate, indefeasible and unencumbered legal and equitable title to the property.

    SECTION 207-124  

    207-124   Entity may be ineligible if other money or property also acquired  


    Subject to section 207-128 , this section applies to an entity (the ineligible entity ) to whom a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly under subsection 207-50(3) or (4) , if:


    (a) the ineligible entity or another entity has entered into an *arrangement as part of, or in association with:


    (i) the distribution; or

    (ii) if the distribution flows indirectly to the ineligible entity - the ineligible entity ' s *trust share amount in relation to the distribution; and


    (b) because of the arrangement, the ineligible entity or another entity has acquired or will acquire (whether directly or indirectly) money or property, other than money or property comprising the distribution or the ineligible entity ' s trust share amount, from:


    (i) the entity making the distribution; or

    (ii) an entity through which the distribution flows indirectly to the ineligible entity; or

    (iii) an *associate of any of those entities (other than the ineligible entity).

    207-125   (Repealed) SECTION 207-125 Gross-up and tax offset allowed because entity is an exempt institution that is entitled to a refund  
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    SECTION 207-126   Entity may be ineligible if distributions do not match trust share amounts  

    207-126(1)    
    This section applies to a beneficiary of a trust in relation to an income year if:


    (a) the sum of the distributions:


    (i) made to the beneficiary during the income year by the trustee of the trust; and

    (ii) that relate to the beneficiary ' s *trust share amount in relation to a *franked distribution made during the income year;

    is less than:


    (b) that trust share amount.

    Commissioner ' s power to treat trust share amount as having been distributed during the income year

    207-126(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply if the Commissioner, having regard to all the circumstances, considers that it would be reasonable to treat the *trust share amount as having been distributed to the beneficiary in the income year.

    SECTION 207-128   Reinvestment choice  

    207-128(1)    
    If, apart from this section, paragraph 207-120(2) (a) or (d) or section 207-124 would apply to an entity (the receiving entity ) to whom a *franked distribution is made or *flows indirectly, that paragraph or section is taken not to apply to the receiving entity if:


    (a) instead of receiving the distribution, or the *trust share amount concerned, by a payment of money, the receiving entity chooses to be issued with:


    (i) if the distribution is made to the receiving entity - *shares in the *corporate tax entity making the distribution; or

    (ii) if the distribution flows indirectly to the receiving entity - a fixed interest in the trust in relation to which the trust share amount arises; and


    (b) the choice is genuine and furthers the purpose for which the entity was established; and


    (c) the choice is not made for the purpose, or purposes that include the purpose, of benefiting the corporate tax entity, trust or any of their *associates (other than the receiving entity); and


    (d) any benefit *derived by the corporate tax entity, trust or any of their associates (other than the receiving entity) because of that choice is one which is an ordinary incident of issuing the shares or interests to the receiving entity or of the receiving entity ' s holding of those shares or interests; and


    (e) the parties that were involved in the *distribution event or *arrangement concerned deal with one another on an *arm ' s length basis in relation to the event or arrangement.



    A vested and indefeasible interest constitutes a fixed interest

    207-128(2)    
    The receiving entity ' s interest in a trust is a fixed interest if the interest is a vested and indefeasible interest in the trust ' s capital.

    Special rule about whether interests in unit trusts are defeasible

    207-128(3)    
    If:


    (a) the trust is a unit trust and the receiving entity holds units in the unit trust; and


    (b) the units are redeemable or further units are able to be issued; and


    (c) the units held by the receiving entity will be redeemed, or any further units will be issued:


    (i) if units in the unit trust are listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange - for the price at which other units of the same kind in the unit trust are offered for sale on the exchange at the time of the redemption or issue; or

    (ii) if the units are not listed as mentioned in subparagraph (i) - for their *market value at the time of the redemption or issue;

    then the mere fact that the units are redeemable, or that the further units are able to be issued, does not mean that the receiving entity ' s interest, as a unit holder, in the trust' s capital is defeasible.



    Commissioner ' s power to treat an interest in a trust as being a fixed interest

    207-128(4)    
    If:


    (a) the receiving entity has an interest in the trust ' s capital; and


    (b) apart from this subsection, the interest would not be a vested or indefeasible interest; and


    (c) the Commissioner considers that the interest should be treated as being vested and indefeasible, having regard to:


    (i) the circumstances in which the interest is capable of not vesting, or the defeasance can happen; and

    (ii) the likelihood of the interest not vesting or the defeasance happening; and

    (iii) the nature of the trust; and

    (iv) any other matter the Commissioner thinks relevant;

    the Commissioner may determine that the interest is to be taken to be vested and indefeasible.


    207-128(5)    
    A determination made under subsection (4) has effect according to its terms.

    SECTION 207-130   Controller ' s liability  

    207-130(1)    
    A *controller (for imputation purposes) of an entity (the controlled entity ) is liable to pay an amount under this section in respect of a refund paid to the controlled entity under Division 67 if:


    (a) the controlled entity claimed the refund wholly or partly on the basis that:


    (i) the controlled entity was entitled to a *tax offset under section 207-20 , 207-45 or 207-110 in relation to a *franked distribution; and

    (ii) the controlled entity was an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund; and


    (b) because of the operation of section 207-120 , 207-122 , 207-124 or 207-126 in respect of a *distribution event or an *arrangement in relation to the distribution, the controlled entity is not entitled to the tax offset; and


    (c) the controller or an *associate of the controller benefited from that event or arrangement; and


    (d) some or all of the amount that the controlled entity is liable to pay in respect of the refund remains unpaid after the day on which the amount becomes due and payable; and


    (e) the Commissioner gives the controller written notice:


    (i) stating that the controller is liable to pay an amount under this section; and

    (ii) specifying that amount.

    Except as provided for in subsection (5), this subsection does not affect any liability the controlled entity has in relation to the refund.

    Note 1:

    Section 207-134 also provides that the controlled entity ' s present entitlement to a trust share amount is disregarded for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Note 2:

    For when paragraph (c) is satisfied, see also subsection 207-132(3) .


    207-130(2)    
    The amount that the *controller (for imputation purposes) is liable to pay under subsection (1):


    (a) is the amount specified under subparagraph (1)(e)(ii); and


    (b) becomes due and payable at the end of the period of 14 days that starts on the day on which the notice mentioned in paragraph (1)(e) is given.

    207-130(3)    
    The amount that the *controller (for imputation purposes) is liable to pay under subsection (1) must not exceed the total amount or value of the benefit that the controller and its *associates obtained from the *distribution event or *arrangement.

    207-130(4)    
    The total of:


    (a) the amounts that the Commissioner recovers under subsection (1) in relation to the refund from all of the controlled entity ' s *controllers (for imputation purposes); and


    (b) the amounts that the Commissioner recovers in relation to the refund from the controlled entity;

    must not exceed the amount that the controlled entity was liable to pay as mentioned in paragraph (1)(d).



    Controller of a company

    207-130(5)    
    An entity is a controller (for imputation purposes) of a company if the entity is a *controller of the company (for CGT purposes).

    Controller of an entity other than a company - basic meaning

    207-130(6)    
    Subject to subsections (7) and (8), an entity is a controller (for imputation purposes) of an entity other than a company (the controlled entity ) if:


    (a) a group in relation to the entity has the power, by means of the exercise of a power of appointment or revocation or otherwise, to obtain beneficial enjoyment (directly or indirectly) of the capital or income of the controlled entity; or


    (b) a group in relation to the entity is able (directly or indirectly) to control the application of the capital or income of the controlled entity; or


    (c) a group in relation to the entity is capable, under a *scheme, of gaining the beneficial enjoyment mentioned in paragraph (a) or the control mentioned in paragraph (b); or


    (d) the controlled entity or, if the controlled entity is a trust, the trustee of the trust:


    (i) is accustomed; or

    (ii) is under an obligation; or

    (iii) might reasonably be expected;
    to act in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of a group in relation to the entity; or


    (e) if the controlled entity is a trust - a group in relation to the entity is able (directly or indirectly) to remove or appoint the trustee of the trust; or


    (f) a group in relation to the entity has *more than a 50% stake in the income or capital of the controlled entity; or


    (g) entities in a group in relation to the entity are the only entities that, under the terms of:


    (i) the constitution of the controlled entity or the terms on which the controlled entity is established; or

    (ii) if the controlled entity is a trust - the terms of the trust;
    can obtain the beneficial enjoyment of the income or capital of the controlled entity.

    Group in relation to an entity

    207-130(7)    


    For the purposes of subsection (6), each of the following constitutes a group in relation to an entity:


    (a) the entity acting alone;


    (b) an *associate of the entity acting alone;


    (c) the entity and one or more associates of the entity acting together;


    (d) 2 or more associates of the entity acting together.

    Commissioner ' s power to take an entity not to be a controller (for imputation purposes)

    207-130(8)    
    If:


    (a) at a particular time, an entity (the first entity ) would, but for this subsection, be a *controller (for imputation purposes) of an entity other than a company (the second entity ); and


    (b) the Commissioner, having regard to all relevant circumstances, considers that it is reasonable that the first entity be taken not to be such a controller of the second entity at the particular time;

    the first entity is taken not to be a controller (for imputation purposes) of the second entity at the particular time.


    207-130(9)    
    Without limiting paragraph (8)(b), if the second entity is a trust, the Commissioner may have regard under that paragraph to the identity of the beneficiaries of the trust at any time (whether before or after the first entity began to be a *controller (for imputation purposes) of the second entity).

    SECTION 207-132   Treatment of benefits provided by an entity to a controller  

    207-132(1)    
    This section applies in relation to a benefit (the relevant benefit ) given by an entity to a *controller (for imputation purposes) of the entity, or to an *associate of such a controller, if:


    (a) the controller or associate:


    (i) makes a *franked distribution to the entity; or

    (ii) is the trustee of the trust in relation to which a *trust share amount of the entity arises in relation to a franked distribution that *flows indirectly to the entity; and


    (b) the benefit is, or was, given to the controller or associate at any time during the period that starts 3 years before, and ends 3 years after, the distribution is made or the trust share amount arises (as appropriate).

    207-132(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph 207-120(2) (d), the controller or *associate is taken to have obtained the relevant benefit because of a *distribution event in relation to the *franked distribution or *trust share amount.

    207-132(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph 207-130(1) (c), and at least to the extent of the relevant benefit, the controller or *associate is taken to have benefited from a *distribution event or *arrangement that caused section 207-120 to apply in relation to the *franked distribution or *trust share amount.

    Commissioner ' s power not to apply subsection (2) or (3)

    207-132(4)    
    Subsection (2) or (3) does not apply in relation to a benefit if the Commissioner is satisfied, having regard to all the circumstances, that it would be unreasonable to apply that subsection.

    SECTION 207-134  

    207-134   Entity ' s present entitlement disregarded in certain circumstances  


    The present entitlement of a beneficiary of a trust to a share of trust income is disregarded for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:


    (a) the beneficiary has claimed a *tax offset under section 207-45 or 207-110 of this Act on the basis that the beneficiary was an *exempt institution that was eligible for a refund in relation to a *trust share amount that is that share of trust income; but


    (b) the beneficiary was not entitled to that tax offset because of the operation of section 207-120 , 207-122 , 207-124 or 207-126 in respect of a *distribution event, or an *arrangement, to which the trust share amount is related.

    Note:

    This means that the trustee of the trust is liable to pay income tax on that share of the trust income.

    SECTION 207-136  

    207-136   Review of certain decisions  


    An entity that is dissatisfied with a decision of the Commissioner under any of the following provisions may object against it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 :


    (a) paragraph 207-120(3) (b);


    (b) subsection 207-126(2) ;


    (c) subsection 207-128(4) ;


    (d) paragraph 207-130(1) (e);


    (e) paragraph 207-130(8) (b);


    (f) subsection 207-132(4) .

    Subdivision 207-F - No gross-up or tax offset where the imputation system has been manipulated  

    Guide to Subdivision 207-F

    SECTION 207-140   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision creates the appropriate adjustment to cancel the effect of the gross-up and tax offset rules where the entity concerned has manipulated the imputation system in a manner that is not permitted under the income tax law.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    207-145 Distribution that is made to an entity
    207-150 Distribution that flows indirectly to an entity
    207-155 When is a distribution made as part of a dividend stripping operation?
    207-157 Distribution washing
    207-158 Distributions entitled to a foreign income tax deduction
    207-159 Distributions funded by capital raising
    207-160 Distribution that is treated as an interest payment
    207-165 (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)
    207-170 (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 207-145   Distribution that is made to an entity  


    Whole of distribution manipulated

    207-145(1)    
    If a *franked distribution is made to an entity in one or more of the following circumstances:


    (a) the entity is not a qualified person in relation to the distribution for the purposes of Division 1A of former Part IIIAA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;


    (b) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of that Act that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of the distribution for the entity;


    (c) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) of this Act that no *imputation benefit is to arise in respect of the distribution for the entity;


    (d) the distribution is made as part of a *dividend stripping operation;


    (da) the distribution is one to which section 207-157 (which is about distribution washing) applies;


    (db) the distribution is one to which section 207-158 (which is about foreign income tax deductions) applies;

    then, for the purposes of this Act:


    (e) the amount of the *franking credit on the distribution is not included in the assessable income of the entity under section 207-20 or 207-35 ; and


    (f) the entity is not entitled to a *tax offset under this Division because of the distribution; and


    (g) if the distribution *flows indirectly through the entity to another entity - subsection 207-35(3) and section 207-45 do not apply to that other entity.



    Part of share of distribution manipulated

    207-145(2)    
    If:


    (a) a *franked distribution is made to an entity; and


    (b) the Commissioner makes a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of a specified part of the distribution (the specified part ) for the entity;

    then, for the purposes of this Act:


    (c) the amount of the distribution is taken to have been reduced by the specified part; and


    (d) the amount of the *franking credit on the distribution is to be worked out as follows:


      *Franked distribution
    apart from this section − Specified part
    *Franked distribution
    apart from this section
    × *Franking credit
    on the *franked distribution
    apart from this section
     

    Example:

    A franked distribution of $70 is made to the trustee of a trust. Apart from this section, the franking credit on the distribution ($30) would be included in the assessable income of the trust under section 207-35 .

    The Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise for the trustee in respect of $49 of the distribution.

    Under this subsection, the amount included in the assessable income of the trust under section 207-35 because of the distribution is reduced from $30 to $9.

    If there is a beneficiary of the trust that is presently entitled to the trust ' s income, the amount of the distribution that flows indirectly to the beneficiary is reduced from $70 to $21 under this subsection.



    What happens if both subsection 207-90(2) and subsection (2) of this section would apply

    207-145(3)    
    If, apart from this subsection, both subsection 207-90(2) and subsection (2) of this section would apply to an entity in relation to a *franked distribution, then:


    (a) apply subsection 207-90(2) first; and


    (b) apply subsection (2) of this section on the basis that the amount of the *franked distribution had been reduced under subsection 207-90(2) .

    SECTION 207-150   Distribution that flows indirectly to an entity  


    Whole of share of distribution manipulated

    207-150(1)    
    If a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to an entity in an income year in one or more of the following circumstances:


    (a) the entity is not a qualified person in relation to the distribution for the purposes of Division 1A of former Part IIIAA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;


    (b) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of that Act that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of the distribution for the entity;


    (c) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) of this Act that no *imputation benefit is to arise in respect of the distribution for the entity;


    (d) the distribution is treated as an interest payment for the entity under section 207-160 of this Act;


    (e) the distribution is made as part of a *dividend stripping operation;


    (ea) the distribution is one to which section 207-157 (which is about distribution washing) applies;


    (eb) the distribution is one to which section 207-158 (which is about foreign income tax deductions) applies;

    then, for the purposes of this Act:


    (f) subsection (2), (3) or (4) (as appropriate) applies to the entity in relation to that income year; and


    (g) the entity is not entitled to a *tax offset under this Division because of the distribution; and


    (h) if the distribution *flows indirectly through the entity to another entity - subsection 207-35(3) and section 207-45 do not apply to that other entity.



    Partner

    207-150(2)    
    If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as a partner in a partnership under subsection 207-50(2) , the entity can deduct an amount for that income year that is equal to its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution.

    Beneficiary

    207-150(3)    
    If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as a beneficiary of a trust under subsection 207-50(3) , the entity can deduct an amount for that income year that is equal to the lesser of:


    (a) its share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection; and


    (b) its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution.

    Trustee

    207-150(4)    
    If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as the trustee of a trust under subsection 207-50(4) , the entity ' s share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection is to be reduced by the lesser of:


    (a) that share amount; and


    (b) its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution.

    Part of share of distribution manipulated

    207-150(5)    
    If:


    (a) a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to an entity in an income year; and


    (b) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of a specified part of the distribution (the specified part ) for the entity;

    then, subsection (2), (3) or (4) (as appropriate) applies to the entity on the basis that the amount of its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution is worked out as follows:


                        Specified part                  
    Entity ' s *share
    of the *franked distribution
    × Entity ' s *share
    of the *franking credit on
    the *franked distribution
    apart from this section
     


    207-150(6)    
    In addition, the following apply to an entity covered by subsection (5):


    (a) if the distribution would otherwise *flow indirectly through the entity - the entity ' s *share of the distribution for the purposes of this Act (other than subsection (2), (3) or (4)) is to be reduced by the specified part mentioned in subsection (5);


    (b) if the entity would otherwise be entitled to a *tax offset under this Division because of the distribution - the amount of the tax offset is to be worked out as follows:


      Entity ' s *share of
    the *franking credit on the
    *franked distribution apart
    from this section
    Amount worked out
    under subsection (5)
     

    Example:

    X is a partner in a partnership to which a franked distribution of $140 is made. The franking credit on the distribution ($60) is included in the assessable income of the partnership under section 207-35 . X ' s share of the distribution is $70 and its share of the franking credit on the distribution is $30.

    The Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise for X in respect of $42 of the distribution.

    Under subsection (5), X will be allowed a deduction of $18.

    X is the trustee of a trust and the distribution will flow indirectly through X to beneficiaries of the trust. For the purposes of working out a beneficiary ' s share of the distribution and its share of the franking credit, X ' s share of the franked distribution is reduced to $28 under this subsection.



    What happens if both subsection 207-95(1) and subsection (1) of this section would apply

    207-150(7)    
    If, apart from this subsection, both subsection 207-95(1) and subsection (1) of this section would apply to an entity in relation to a *franked distribution, then:


    (a) subsection (1) of this section applies to the entity; but


    (b) subsection 207-95(1) does not apply to the entity.

    What happens if both subsection 207-95(5) and subsection (5) of this section would apply

    207-150(8)    
    If, apart from this subsection, both subsection 207-95(5) and subsection (5) of this section would apply to an entity in relation to a *franked distribution, then:


    (a) apply subsections 207-95(5) and (6) first; and


    (b) apply subsections (5) and (6) of this section on the basis that:


    (i) the amount of the entity ' s *share of the *franking credit on the distribution had been reduced under subsection 207-95(5) ; and

    (ii) the amount of the entity ' s *share of the distribution had been reduced under subsection 207-95(6) .

    SECTION 207-155  

    207-155   When is a distribution made as part of a dividend stripping operation?  


    A distribution made to a *member of a *corporate tax entity is taken to be made as part of a dividend stripping operation if, and only if, the making of the distribution arose out of, or was made in the course of, a *scheme that:


    (a) was by way of, or in the nature of, dividend stripping; or


    (b) had substantially the effect of a scheme by way of, or in the nature of, dividend stripping.

    SECTION 207-157   Distribution washing  

    207-157(1)    
    This section applies to a *franked distribution received by a *member of a *corporate tax entity on a *membership interest (the washed interest ) if:


    (a) the washed interest was acquired after the member, or a *connected entity of the member, disposed of a substantially identical membership interest; and


    (b) a corresponding franked distribution is made to the member, or the connected entity, on the substantially identical interest.

    Further requirement for connected entities

    207-157(2)    
    However, if the entity that disposed of the substantially identical interest was a *connected entity of the member, this section does not apply to the *franked distribution unless:


    (a) it would be concluded that the disposal took place wholly or partly because there was an expectation that the acquisition would, or would be likely to, take place; or


    (b) it would be concluded that the acquisition took place wholly or partly because there was a belief that the disposal had taken place.

    Substantially identical interests

    207-157(3)    
    Without limiting paragraph (1)(a), for the purpose of that paragraph a *membership interest is substantially identical to the washed interest if it is any one or more of the following:


    (a) fungible with, or economically equivalent to, the washed interest;


    (b) a membership interest in the same *corporate tax entity as the washed interest and of a class that is the same as, or not materially different from, the washed interest;


    (c) a membership interest in the same corporate tax entity as the washed interest and of a class that is exchangeable at a fixed rate for an interest of the same class as the washed interest;


    (d) a membership interest in another corporate tax entity that holds predominantly membership interests that are covered by any of the preceding paragraphs;


    (e) a membership interest in another corporate tax entity that is exchangeable at a fixed rate for interests that are covered by any one or more of paragraphs (a) to (c).

    Exception for individuals who are small holders

    207-157(4)    
    Despite subsection (1), this section does not apply to a *franked distribution made to an individual in an income year if the sum of the *tax offsets to which the individual would be entitled, worked out on the basis mentioned in subsection (5), is $5000 or less.

    207-157(5)    
    Work out the sum of the *tax offsets:


    (a) disregarding this Subdivision, to the extent it applies to the individual; and


    (b) not disregarding this Subdivision, to the extent it applies to any other entity through which a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the individual.

    SECTION 207-158   Distributions entitled to a foreign income tax deduction  

    207-158(1)    
    This section applies to a *franked distribution if all or part of the distribution gives rise to a *foreign income tax deduction.

    Exception for distributions made under certain regulatory capital instruments

    207-158(2)    
    However, this section does not apply to a distribution made in respect of an *equity interest if the interest forms part of Additional Tier 1 capital for the purposes of:


    (a) applicable *prudential standards; or


    (b) applicable prudential standards determined by *APRA and in force under section 32 of the Insurance Act 1973 ; or


    (c) applicable prudential standards determined by APRA and in force under section 230A of the Life Insurance Act 1995 .

    SECTION 207-159   Distributions funded by capital raising  

    207-159(1)    
    This subsection applies to a distribution (the relevant distribution ) of a kind, or a part (the relevant part ) of a distribution (also a relevant distribution ) of a kind, made by an entity if all of the following conditions are satisfied:

    (a)    either:


    (i) the entity has a practice of making distributions of that kind on a regular basis and the relevant distribution is not made in accordance with that practice; or

    (ii) theentity does not have a practice of making distributions of that kind on a regular basis;

    (b)    there is an issue of *equity interests in the entity or any other entity (whether before, at or after the time at which the relevant distribution was made);

    (c)    it is reasonable to conclude having regard to all relevant circumstances that:


    (i) the principal effect of the issue of any of the equity interests was the direct or indirect funding of a substantial part of the relevant distribution or the relevant part; and

    (ii) any entity that issued, or facilitated the issue of, any of the equity interests did so for a purpose (other than an incidental purpose) of funding a substantial part of the relevant distribution or the relevant part;

    (d)    the issue of the equity interests was not a direct response in order to meet a requirement, direction or recommendation from *APRA or *ASIC.

    When an entity has a practice of making distributions of a certain kind on a regular basis

    207-159(2)    
    In considering whether the condition in paragraph (1)(a) is satisfied, take the following matters into account:

    (a)    the nature of distributions made by the entity before the time at which the relevant distribution was made (including the extent to which such distributions were a return on capital);

    (b)    the timing of such distributions;

    (c)    the amount of such distributions;

    (d)    any explanations given by the entity for making such distributions;

    (e)    the amount of the *franking credits on, and the *franking percentages for, such distributions;

    (f)    any other relevant consideration.

    Distributions funded by issuing equity interests are to be disregarded in determining past practice

    207-159(3)    
    In considering whether the condition in paragraph (1)(a) is satisfied, disregard a distribution if:

    (a)    the distribution:


    (i) is a *franked distribution; or

    (ii) would be a franked distribution if subsection (1) did not apply to it; and

    (b)    subsection (1) would apply to all or any part of the distribution if paragraph (1)(a) were omitted.

    When issue of equity interests has the effect or purpose of funding all or part of a distribution

    207-159(4)    
    In considering whether the condition in paragraph (1)(c) is satisfied, take the following matters into account:

    (a)    the extent to which the time (or times) at which any of the *equity interests mentioned in that paragraph were issued differs (or differ) from the time at which the relevant distribution was made;

    (b)    the extent to which the amount of the funds from the issue of any of those equity interests differs from the amount of the relevant distribution or the relevant part (as the case may be);

    (c)    the extent to which the financial position of any of the following entities changed as a result of the relevant distribution (or any part of the relevant distribution) and the issue of any of those equity interests:


    (i) the entity that made the relevant distribution;

    (ii) an entity that, before, at or after the time at which the relevant distribution was made, was a *connected entity of that entity;

    (iii) if the entity in which those equity interests were issued is not the entity that made the relevant distribution - the entity in which those equity interests were issued;

    (d)    the use of the funds from the issue of any of those equity interests;

    (e)    whether there are any reasons for the issue of any of those equity interests other than the funding of the relevant distribution (or any part of the relevant distribution);

    (f)    the extent to which the issue of any of those equity interests was underwritten (whether formally or informally);

    (g)    how the history of the amounts of *franking surplus or *franking deficit for the *franking account of the entity that made the relevant distribution compares to:


    (i) the history of profits and or loss of that entity; and

    (ii) the history of the balance of the share capital account of that entity;

    (h)    if the entity that made the relevant distribution is not the entity in which those equity interests were issued - the nature and extent of the relationship between those entities;

    (i)    the extent to which:


    (i) the entity to which the relevant distribution was made; and

    (ii) other entities to which analogous distributions were made;

    (iii) other entities to which analogous distributions were not made, but which were entitled to analogous distributions;
    are the same as the entities to which those equity interests were issued;

    (j)    other distributions (if any) made by the entity that made the relevant distribution (whether before, at or after the time at which the relevant distribution was made);

    (k)    any other relevant consideration.

    SECTION 207-160   Distribution that is treated as an interest payment  

    207-160(1)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, a *franked distribution is treated as an interest payment for an entity to whom the distribution *flows indirectly if:


    (a) all or a part of the entity ' s individual interest or share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in subsection 207-50(2) , (3) or (4) could reasonably be regarded as the payment of interest on a loan, having regard to:


    (i) the way in which that individual interest or share amount was calculated; and

    (ii) the conditions applying to the payment or application of that individual interest or share amount; and

    (iii) any other relevant matters; and


    (b) the entity ' s interest in the last intermediary entity (see subsection (2)):


    (i) was acquired, or was acquired for a period that was extended, at or after 7.30 pm by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory on 13 May 1997; or

    (ii) was acquired as part of a *financing arrangement for the entity (including an arrangement extending to an earlier arrangement) that was entered into at or after that time.

    207-160(2)    
    The entity ' s interest in the last intermediary entity is:


    (a) if the distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as a partner in a partnership under subsection 207-50(2) - the entity ' s interest in the partnership; or


    (b) if the distribution flows indirectly to the entity as a beneficiary of a trust under subsection 207-50(3) - the entity ' s interest in the trust; or


    (c) if the distribution flows indirectly to the entity as the trustee of a trust under subsection 207-50(4) - the entity ' s interest in the trust in respect of which the entity is liable to be assessed.


    207-165   (Repealed) SECTION 207-165 Interest payments - distributions that flow indirectly to the trustee of a trust  
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    207-170   (Repealed) SECTION 207-170 Interest payments - distributions that flow indirectly to a partner in a partnership  
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    Division 208 - Exempting entities and former exempting entities  

    SECTION 208-5   What is an exempting entity?  

    208-5(1)    


    An exempting entity is a corporate tax entity that is effectively owned by entities that, either because they are not Australian residents or because they receive distributions as exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income, would not be able to fully utilise franking credits on distributions by the corporate tax entity.

    208-5(2)    
    In deciding whether a corporate tax entity is effectively owned by such entities, these rules:


    (a) look at the membership interests in the entity that involve the holder of the interest in bearing the risks and accruing the opportunities of ownership of the entity; and


    (b) ask whether at least 95% of those membership interests, and 95% of any interests in those membership interests, are held by Australian residents or entities that receive distributions as exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.


    SECTION 208-10  

    208-10   Former exempting entities  


    When an entity ceases to be an exempting entity, it becomes a former exempting entity.

    SECTION 208-15  

    208-15   Distributions by exempting entities and former exempting entities  


    To ensure that franking credits accumulated by an exempting entity are not the target of franking credit trading, these rules:


    (a) limit the circumstances in which a distribution franked with those credits can give rise to benefits under the imputation system; and


    (b) quarantine those credits by moving them into a separate account, called the exempting account, when the entity ceases to be an exempting entity; and


    (c) deny a recipient of a distribution franked with a credit from that account any benefit under the imputation system as a result of that distribution, unless the recipient was a member of the entity immediately before it became a former exempting entity.

    Subdivision 208-A - What are exempting entities and former exempting entities?  

    SECTION 208-20  

    208-20   Exempting entities  


    A *corporate tax entity is an exempting entity at a particular time if, at that time, the entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons.
    Note:

    Prescribed persons are identified in sections 208-40 and 208-45 .

    SECTION 208-25   Effective ownership of entity by prescribed persons  

    208-25(1)    
    An entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons at a particular time if:


    (a) at that time:


    (i) not less than 95% of the *accountable membership interests in the entity; or

    (ii) not less than 95% of the *accountable partial interests in the entity;
    are held by, or held indirectly for the benefit of, prescribed persons; or


    (b) paragraph (a) does not apply but it would nevertheless be reasonable to conclude that, at that time, the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in the entity that are not held by, or directly or indirectly for the benefit of, prescribed persons are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, prescribed persons.

    208-25(2)    
    In deciding whether it would be reasonable to conclude as mentioned in paragraph (1)(b):


    (a) have regard to any *arrangement in respect of *membership interests (including unissued membership interests), or in respect of *partial interests, in the entity (including any derivatives held or issued in connection with those membership interests or partial interests) of which the entity is aware; but


    (b) do not have regard to risks involved in the ownership of membership interests, or partial interests, in the entity that are substantially borne by any person in the person ' s capacity as a secured creditor.

    208-25(3)    
    An entity has a partial interest in a *corporate tax entity if it has an interest in a *membership interest in the corporate tax entity.


    SECTION 208-30   Accountable membership interests  

    208-30(1)    
    The purpose of this section is to identify which *membership interests in an entity are relevant in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons.

    208-30(2)    
    A *membership interest in an entity is an accountable membership interest if it is not an excluded membership interest.

    208-30(3)    
    A *membership interest in an entity is an excluded membership interest if, having regard to:


    (a) the purposes for which the membership interest was issued; and


    (b) any special or limited rights connected with, arising from, or attached to:


    (i) the membership interest; or

    (ii) other membership interests in the entity held by the holder of the membership interest; or

    (iii) membership interests in the entity held by persons other than the holder of the membership interest; or

    (iv) interests in any of the above;
    including rights that are conferred or exercisable only if the holder of the membership interest or interests concerned is, or is not, a prescribed person; and


    (c) the extent to which any such special or limited rights are similar to or differ from the rights that are normally attached to the ownership of *ordinary membership interests in *corporate tax entities; and


    (d) the relationship between the value of the membership interest and the value of the entity; and


    (e) any relationship or connection (whether of a personal or business nature) between holders of membership interests in the entity of which the entity is aware; and


    (f) any *arrangement in respect of membership interests (including unissued membership interests) in the entity, or interests in membership interests in the entity, of which the entity is aware;

    it would be reasonable to conclude that the membership interest is not relevant in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons because holding the membership interest does not involve the holder bearing the risks, or result in the accrual to the holder of the opportunities, of ownership of the entity that ordinarily arise from, or are ordinarily attached to, the holding of ordinary membership interests in an entity.


    208-30(4)    
    In applying subsection (3), the fact that a person is a trustee is to be disregarded.

    208-30(5)    
    Without limiting subsection (3), a *membership interest in an entity held by a person who is not a prescribed person is an excluded membership interest if:


    (a) it is a finance membership interest; or


    (b) it is a distribution access membership interest; or


    (c) it does not carry the right to receive distributions; or


    (d) it was issued, transferred or acquired for a purpose (other than an incidental purpose) of ensuring that the entity is not effectively owned by prescribed persons.

    208-30(6)    
    A *membership interest is a finance membership interest if:


    (a) the membership interest is a *non-equity share in the entity; or


    (b) having regard to the rights attached to the membership interest and to any *arrangement with respect to the membership interest of which the entity is aware, the membership interest is equivalent to a debt owed by the entity to the holder of the membership interest.

    208-30(7)    
    A *membership interest to which subsection (6) does not apply is a finance membership interest if:


    (a) the manner in which the *distributions payable in respect of the membership interest are calculated, and the conditions applying to the payment of such distributions, indicate that the distributions paid are equivalent to the receipt by the person to whom they are paid of interest or an amount in the nature of or similar to interest; or


    (b) the capital invested by the holder of the membership interest will be redeemed or, because of an *arrangement between the holder and the entity or an *associate of the entity, it is reasonable for the holder to expect that the capital will be redeemed, for an amount that is not less than, or for property (including other membership interests in the entity) the value of which is not less than, the amount paid for the membership interest; or


    (c)the membership interest is redeemable by the entity by payment of a lump sum or by the transfer of property, or the membership interest has a preferred right to a repayment of capital on a winding up, where the amount of the lump sum or the value of the property, or the amount of the capital to be repaid, as the case may be, is to be calculated by reference to an implicit interest rate.

    208-30(8)    
    A *membership interest in an entity is a distribution access membership interest if, having regard to:


    (a) the terms of the issue of the membership interest, including any guarantee of payment of distributions; and


    (b) the amounts of the *distributions paid on the membership interest relative to the issue price of the membership interest; and


    (c) whether there is any guaranteed rate at which *franked distributions are to be paid on the membership interest; and


    (d) the duration of the period within which the membership interest was issued; and


    (e) the rights attached to other membership interests in the entity; and


    (f) any other relevant matters;

    it could be concluded that the membership interest was issued only for the purpose of paying distributions to the holder of the membership interest.


    SECTION 208-35   Accountable partial interests  

    208-35(1)    
    The purpose of this section is to identify which *partial interests in an entity are relevant in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons.

    208-35(2)    
    A *partial interest in an entity is an accountable partial interest if it is not an excluded partial interest.

    208-35(3)    
    A *partial interest in an entity is an excluded partial interest if, having regard to:


    (a) the purposes for which the interest was granted; and


    (b) the nature of the interest; and


    (c) any special or limited rights connected with or arising from:


    (i) the interest; or

    (ii) other *membership interests, or partial interests, in the entity held by the holder of the interest; or

    (iii) membership interests, or partial interests, in the entity held by persons other than the holder of the interest;
    including rights that are conferred or exercisable only if the holder of the membership interests or partial interests concerned is, or is not, a prescribed person; and


    (d) the extent to which the interest is similar to or differs from beneficial ownership; and


    (e) the relationship between the value of the interest and the value of the entity; and


    (f) any relationship or connection (whether of a personal or business nature) between holders of partial interests in the entity, and the holders of membership interests in the entity, of which the entity is aware; and


    (g) any *arrangement in respect of membership interests (including unissued membership interests) in the entity, or partial interests in the entity, of which the entity is aware;

    it would be reasonable to conclude that the partial interest is not relevant in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons because holding the membership interest to which the partial interest relates does not involve the holder bearing the risks, or result in the accrual to the holder of the opportunities, of ownership of the entity that ordinarily arise from, or are ordinarily attached to, the holding of *ordinary membership interests in an entity.


    208-35(4)    
    In applying subsection (3), the fact that a person is a trustee is to be disregarded.

    208-35(5)    
    Without limiting subsection (3), a *partial interest in an entity is also an excluded partial interest if it was granted or otherwise created, or was transferred or acquired, for a purpose (other than an incidental purpose) of ensuring that the entity is not effectively owned by prescribed persons.


    SECTION 208-40   Prescribed persons  

    208-40(1)    
    A company is a prescribed person in relation to another *corporate tax entity if:


    (a) the company is a foreign resident; or


    (b) were the company to receive a *distribution made by the other corporate tax entity, the distribution would be *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income of the company.


    208-40(2)    
    A trustee is a prescribed person in relation to a *corporate tax entity if:


    (a) all the beneficiaries in the trust are prescribed persons under other provisions of this section; or


    (b) were the trustee to receive a *distribution made by the corporate tax entity, the distribution would be *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust estate.


    208-40(3)    


    A partnership is a prescribed person in relation to a *corporate tax entity if:


    (a) all the partners are prescribed persons under other provisions of this section; or


    (b) were the partnership to receive a *distribution made by the corporate tax entity, the distribution would be *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income of the partnership.


    208-40(4)    
    An individual (other than a trustee) is a prescribed person in relation to a *corporate tax entity if:


    (a) he or she is a foreign resident; or


    (b) were he or she to receive a *distribution made by the corporate tax entity, the distribution would be *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income of the individual.


    208-40(5)    
    The Commonwealth, each of the States, the Australian Capital Territory, the Northern Territory and Norfolk Island are prescribed persons in relation to any *corporate tax entity.

    208-40(6)    


    An *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund cannot be a prescribed person in relation to a *corporate tax entity under this section.

    SECTION 208-45   Persons who are taken to be prescribed persons  

    208-45(1)    
    This section applies to a person that:


    (a) is a company, a trustee, or a partnership, that holds *membership interests (whether *accountable membership interests or excluded membership interests), or *partial interests (whether *accountable partial interests or excluded partial interests), in a *corporate tax entity (the relevant entity ); and


    (b) is not a prescribed person under section 208-40 .


    208-45(2)    


    A company that holds *membership interests, or *partial interests, in the relevant entity is taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the membership interests or partial interests are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more prescribed persons.

    208-45(3)    
    A trustee of a trust who holds *membership interests, or *partial interests, in the relevant entity is taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the membership interests or partial interests are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more prescribed persons.

    208-45(4)    
    A trustee of a trust who holds *membership interests, or *partial interests, in the relevant entity is taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity if:


    (a) unless subsection (7) applies, the trust is controlled by one or more persons who are prescribed persons; or


    (b) all the beneficiaries who are presently entitled to, or during the relevant income year become presently entitled to, income from the trust are prescribed persons.


    208-45(5)    
    In determining whether subsection (3) or (4) applies in respect of a trust that is controlled by a person, have regard to the way in which the person, or any *associate of the person, exercises powers in relation to the trust.

    208-45(6)    
    A person controls a trust if:


    (a) the person has the power, either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, to control the application of the income, or the distribution of the property, of the trust; or


    (b) the person has the power, either directly, or indirectly through one or more entities, to appoint or remove the trustee of the trust; or


    (c) the person has the power, either directly, or indirectly through one or more entities, to appoint or remove beneficiaries of the trust; or


    (d) the trustee of the trust is accustomed or under an obligation, whether formal or informal, to act according to the directions, instructions or wishes of the person or of an *associate of the person.

    208-45(7)    
    Paragraph (4)(a) does not apply in relation to a trust if some of the beneficiaries receiving income from the trust are not prescribed persons and the Commissioner considers that it is reasonable to conclude that the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the *membership interests or *partial interests in the relevant entity are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more persons who are not prescribed persons.

    208-45(8)    


    A partnership that holds *membership interests, or *partial interests, in the relevant entity is taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the membership interests or partial interests are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more prescribed persons.

    208-45(9)    
    If any of the prescribed persons referred to in subsection (2), (3), (4) or (8) is a *corporate tax entity, that subsection applies even if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding any of the *membership interests, or *partial interests, in that entity are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more persons who are not prescribed persons.

    208-45(10)    


    An *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund cannot be taken to be a prescribed person in relation to a *corporate tax entity under this section.

    SECTION 208-50   Former exempting companies  

    208-50(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2), a *corporate tax entity is a former exempting entity if it has, at any time, ceased to be an *exempting entity and is not again an exempting entity.

    208-50(2)    
    If an entity that, at any time, becomes effectively owned by prescribed persons ceases to be so effectively owned within 12 months after that time, the entity is not taken, by so ceasing, to become a former exempting entity.


    Subdivision 208-B - Franking with an exempting credit  

    SECTION 208-55   What this Subdivision is about  


    If a former exempting entity makes a distribution in circumstances where it could be franked, the entity can frank the distribution with an exempting credit.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 208-60  

    208-60   Franking with an exempting credit  


    An entity franks a *distribution with an exempting credit if:


    (a) the entity is a *former exempting entity when the distribution is made; and


    (b) the entity is a *franking entity that satisfies the *residency requirement when the distribution is made; and


    (c) the distribution is a *frankable distribution; and


    (d) the entity allocates an *exempting credit to the distribution.

    Note:

    The residency requirement for an entity making a distribution is set out in section 202-20 .

    Subdivision 208-C - Amount of the exempting credit on a distribution  

    SECTION 208-65   What this Subdivision is about  


    The amount of the exempting credit on a distribution is that stated in the distribution statement, unless the amount stated exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution. In that case, it is nil.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 208-70   Amount of the exempting credit on a distribution  

    208-70(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2), the amount of the *exempting credit on a *distribution is that stated in the *distribution statement for the distribution.

    208-70(2)    
    If the sum of the *franking credit and the *exempting credit stated in the *distribution statement for a *distribution exceeds the *maximum franking credit for the distribution, the amount of the exempting credit on the distribution is taken to be nil.

    Note:

    If the franking credit stated in the distribution statement exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution, the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is taken to equal that maximum under section 202-65 .


    Subdivision 208-D - Distribution statements  

    SECTION 208-75   Guide to Subdivision 208-D  


    Former exempting entities and exempting entities that make certain distributions must provide additional information in the distribution statement given to the recipient.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 208-80   Additional information to be included by a former exempting entity or exempting entity  

    208-80(1)    
    A *former exempting entity that makes a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit must include in the *distribution statement given to the recipient, a statement that there is an *exempting credit of a specified amount on the distribution.

    208-80(2)    


    An *exempting entity that makes a *frankable distribution to a *member must include in the *distribution statement given to the member, a statement to the effect that members who are Australian residents are not entitled to a *tax offset or *franking credit as a result of the distribution, except for certain *corporate tax entities, and employees who receive the distribution in connection with certain *employee share schemes.

    208-80(3)    
    If, under subsection (1) or (2), a statement must be included in a *distribution statement, the distribution statement is taken not to have been given unless the statement is included.


    Subdivision 208-E - Distributions to be franked with exempting credits to the same extent  

    SECTION 208-85   What this Subdivision is about  


    All frankable distributions made within a franking period must be franked to the same extent with an exempting credit.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 208-90   All frankable distributions made within a franking period must be franked to the same extent with an exempting credit  

    208-90(1)    
    If an entity *franks a *distribution with an exempting credit, it must frank each other *frankable distribution made within the same *franking period with an exempting credit worked out at the same *exempting percentage.

    208-90(2)    
    If an entity is not a *former exempting entity for the whole of a *franking period (the longer period ), then, for the purposes of subsection (1), each period within that longer period during which the entity is a former exempting entity is taken to be a franking period .


    SECTION 208-95  

    208-95   Exempting percentage  


    The exempting percentage for a *frankable distribution is worked out using the formula:


    Amount of the *exempting credit
                    on the distribution                
    *Maximum franking credit for
    the distribution
    × 100

    SECTION 208-100  

    208-100   Consequences of breaching the rule in section 208-90  


    If an entity *franks a *distribution with an exempting credit in breach of section 208-90 :


    (a) that distribution is taken not to have been franked with an exempting credit; and


    (b) each other *frankable distribution made by the entity within the relevant *franking period is taken not to have been franked with an exempting credit.

    Subdivision 208-F - Exempting accounts and franking accounts of exempting entities and former exempting entities  

    SECTION 208-105   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision:

  • • creates an exempting account for each former exempting entity; and
  • • identifies when exempting credits and debits arise in those accounts and the amount of those credits and debits; and
  • • identifies when there is an exempting surplus or deficit in the account; and
  • • identifies when franking credits and debits arise in the franking account of an entity because it is an exempting entity, or former exempting entity.
  • Operative provisions

    SECTION 208-110  

    208-110   Exempting account  


    Each *former exempting entity has an exempting account .

    SECTION 208-115   Exempting credits  

    208-115(1)    
    The following table sets out when a credit arises in the *exempting account of a *former exempting entity. A credit in the former exempting entity ' s account is called an exempting credit .


    Exempting Credits
    Item If: A credit of: Arises:
    1 the entity had a *franking surplus at the time it became a *former exempting entity (at the time of its transition ) an amount equal to:

    (a) in a case not covered by paragraph (b) - the franking surplus; or
    immediately after its transition
        (b) if the entity has been a former exempting entity at any time within a period of 12 months before its transition - so much of the franking surplus as would have been the entity ' s *exempting surplus had it remained a former exempting entity throughout the period  
    2 the entity receives a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit; and an amount worked out under subsection 208-165(1) on the day on which the distribution is made
      the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made and at the time the distribution is made; and    
      some part of the distribution is neither *exempt income nor *non-assessable non-exempt income of the entity; and    
      the entity is an *eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution; and    
      the distribution is not affected by a manipulation of the imputation system mentioned in section 208-160    
    3 the entity receives a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit; and an amount worked out under subsection 208-170(1) on the day on which the distribution is made
      the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made and at the time the distribution is made; and    
      some part of the distribution is neither *exempt income nor *non-assessable non-exempt income of the entity; and    
      the entity is an *eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution; and    
      the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no franking credit benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of a specified part of the distribution    
    4 a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit *flows indirectly to the entity (the ultimate recipient ); and

    the recipient of the distribution is an *eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution; and

    except for the fact that the ultimate recipient is not an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution, it would have been entitled to an *exempting credit because of the distribution had the distribution been made to the ultimate recipient
    an amount equal to the exempting credit that would have arisen for the ultimate recipient if:

    (a) the ultimate recipient had been an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution; and

    (b) the distribution had been made to the ultimate recipient; and

    (c) the distribution had been franked with an exempting credit equal to the ultimate recipient ' s *share of the actual exempting credit
    on the day on which the distribution is made
    5 the entity *pays a *PAYG instalment; and

    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in relation to which the PAYG instalment is paid; and

    the entity was an *exempting entity for the whole or part of the relevant *PAYG instalment period
    an amount equal to that part of the payment that is attributable to the period during which the entity was an exempting entity on the day on which the payment is made
    6 the entity *pays income tax; and

    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year for which the tax is paid; and

    the entity was an *exempting entity for the whole or part of that income year
    an amount equal to that part of the payment that is attributable to the period during which the entity was an exempting entity on the day on which the payment is made
    7 the *exempting account of the entity would, apart from this item, be in *deficit immediately before the end of an income year an amount equal to the deficit immediately before the end of the income year
    8 the entity becomes an *exempting entity; and

    the entity has an *exempting deficit at the time it becomes an exempting entity
    an amount equal to the exempting deficit immediately after the entity becomes an exempting entity
    9 the entity *pays diverted profits tax; and
    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year for which the tax is paid; and
    the entity was an *exempting entity for the whole or part of that income year
    an amount equal to that part of the payment that is attributable to the period during which the entity was an exempting entity, multiplied by the proportion worked out under subsection (2) on the day on which the payment is made


    208-115(2)    


    The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) divided by 40%.

    SECTION 208-120   Exempting debits  

    208-120(1)    
    The following table sets out when a debit arises in the *exempting account of the *former exempting entity. A debit in the *former exempting entity ' s exempting account is called an exempting debit .


    Exempting debits
    Item If: A debit of: Arises:
    1 the entity had a *franking deficit at the time it became a *former exempting entity (at the time of its transition ) an amount equal to:

    (a) in a case not covered by paragraph (b) - the franking deficit; or

    (b) if the entity has been a former exempting entity at any time within a period of 12 months before its transition - so much of the franking deficit as would have been the entity ' s *exempting deficit had it remained a former exempting entity throughout the period
    immediately after its transition
    2 the entity makes a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit an amount equal to the *exempting credit on the distribution on the day on which the distribution is made
    3 the entity *receives a refund of income tax; and
    the entity was an *exempting entity during all or part of the income year to which the refund relates; and
    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year to which the refund relates
    an amount equal to that part of the refund that is attributable to the period during which the entity is an exempting entity on the day on which the refund is received
    4 the Commissioner makes a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(b) giving rise to an *exempting debit for the entity (streaming distributions) the amount specified in the determination on the day specified in section 204-35
    5 a *franking debit arises for the entity under section 204-15 (linked distributions), 204-25 (substituting tax-exempt bonus shares for franked distributions) or a determination made under paragraph 204-30(3)(a) (streaming distributions); and an amount equal to that part of the franking debit that relates to the period during which the entity was an exempting entity when the franking debit arises
      the entity was an *exempting entity for the whole or part of the period to which the franking debit relates    
    6 the Minister makes a determination under paragraph 208-185(4)(a) giving rise to an *exempting debit for the entity the amount specified in the determination on the day specified in the determination
    7 the entity becomes an *exempting entity; and

    the entity has an *exempting surplus at the timeit becomes an exempting entity
    an amount equal to the exempting surplus immediately after the entity becomes an exempting entity
    8 the entity *receives a refund of diverted profits tax; and
    the entity was an *exempting entity during all or part of the income year to which the refund relates; and
    the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year to which the refund relates
    an amount equal to that part of the refund that is attributable to the period during which the entity is an exempting entity, multiplied by the proportion worked out under subsection (2) on the day on which the refund is received


    208-120(2)    


    The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) divided by 40%.

    SECTION 208-125   Exempting surplus and deficit  

    208-125(1)    
    An entity ' s *exempting account is in surplus at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *exempting credits in the account exceeds the sum of the *exempting debits in the account. The amount of the exempting surplus is the amount of the excess.

    208-125(2)    
    An entity ' s *exempting account is in deficit at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *exempting debits in the account exceeds the sum of the *exempting credits in the account. The amount of the exempting deficit is the amount of the excess.


    SECTION 208-130  

    208-130   Franking credits arisingbecause of status as exempting entity or former exempting entity  


    The following table sets out when a credit arises in the *franking account of an entity because of its status as an *exempting entity or *former exempting entity.


    Franking credits arising because of status as an exempting entity or former exempting entity
    Item If: A credit of: Arises:
    1 an entity becomes a *former exempting entity; and

    the entity has a *franking deficit at the time it becomes a former exempting entity
    an amount equal to the franking deficit immediately after the entity becomes a former exempting entity
    2 an entity receives a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit; and an amount worked out under subsection 208-165(1) on the day on which the distribution is made
      the entity is an *exempting entity at the time the distribution is made; and    
      the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made and at the time the distribution is made; and    
      some part of the distribution is neither *exempt income nor *non-assessable non-exempt income of the entity; and    
      the entity is an *eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution; and    
      the distribution is not affected by a manipulation of the imputation system mentioned in section 208-160    
    3 the entity receives a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit; and an amount worked out under subsection 208-170(1) on the day on which the distribution is made
      the entity is an *exempting entity at the time the distribution is made; and    
      the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made and at the time the distribution is made; and    
      some part of the distribution is neither *exempt income nor *non-assessable non-exempt income of the entity; and    
      the entity is an *eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution; and    
      the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no franking credit benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of a specified part of the distribution    
    4 a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit *flows indirectly to the entity (the ultimate recipient ); and

    the recipient of the distribution is an *eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution; and

    except for the fact that the ultimate recipient is not an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution, it would have been entitled to a *franking credit because of the distribution had the distribution been made to the ultimate recipient
    an amount equal to the franking credit that would have arisen for the ultimate recipient if:

    (a) the ultimate recipient had been an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution; and

    (b) the distribution had been made to the ultimate recipient; and

    (c) the distribution had been franked with a franking credit equal to the ultimate recipient ' s *share of the actual franking credit
    on the day on which the distribution is made
    5 an *exempting entity makes a *franked distribution to the entity (the recipient ); and

    at the time the distribution is made:
    an amount worked out using the formula in subsection 208-165(2) on the day on which the distribution is made
      (a) the recipient is an exempting entity; and    
      (b) the recipient satisfies the *residency requirement; and    
      (c) the relationship between the entities is of the type mentioned in section 208-135; and    
      the recipient satisfies the residency requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made; and    
      some part of the distribution is neither *exempt income nor *non-assessable non-exempt income of the recipient; and    
      the distribution is not affected by a manipulation of the imputation system mentioned in section 208-160    
    6 an *exempting entity makes a *franked distribution to the entity (the recipient ); and

    at the time the distribution is made:
    an amount worked out using the formula in subsection 208-170(2) on the day on which the distribution is made
      (a) the recipient is an exempting entity; and    
      (b) the recipient satisfies the *residency requirement; and    
      (c) the relationship between the entities is of the type mentioned in section 208-135; and    
      the recipient satisfies the residency requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made; and    
      some part of the distribution is neither *exempt income nor *non-assessable non-exempt income of the recipient; and    
      the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no franking credit benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of a specified part of the distribution    
    7 a *distribution made by an *exempting entity *flows indirectly to the entity (the ultimate recipient ); and

    the recipient of the distribution is an *eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution; and

    except for the fact that the ultimate recipient is not an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution, it would have been entitled to a *franking credit because of the distribution had the distribution been made to the ultimate recipient
    an amount equal to the franking credit that would have arisen for the ultimate recipient if:

    (a) the ultimate recipient had been an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution; and

    (b) the distribution had been made to the ultimate recipient; and

    (c) the distribution had been franked with a franking credit equal to the ultimate recipient ' s *share of the actual franking credit
    on the day on which the distribution is made
    8 the Minister makes a determination under paragraph 208-185(4)(b) giving rise to a *franking credit for the entity the amount of the credit specified in the determination on the day specified in the determination
    9 an *exempting debit arises for the entity under item 3, 5 or 8 of the table in section 208-120 an amount equal to the exempting debit when the exempting debit arises
    10 a *former exempting entity becomes an *exempting entity; and

    the entity has an *exempting surplus at the time it becomes an *exempting entity
    an amount equal to the *exempting surplus immediately after it becomes an exempting entity

    Note:

    Item 9 is designed to reverse out franking debits that arise in relation to a period during which the entity is an exempting entity. The entity will receive an exempting debit instead.

    SECTION 208-135   Relationships that will give rise to a franking credit under item 5 of the table in section 208-130  

    208-135(1)    
    A relationship between an entity making a *franked distribution and the recipient of the distribution is of a type that gives rise to a *franking credit under item 5 or 6 of the table in section 208-130 if either:


    (a) both entities are members of the same effectively wholly-owned group; or


    (b) the recipient holds more than 5% of the *membership interests in the entity making the distribution (other than finance membership interests or distribution access membership interests within the meaning of section 208-30 or membership interests that do not carry the right to receive distributions) and it would be reasonable to conclude that the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding those membership interests are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, the recipient.

    208-135(2)    
    In deciding whether it would be reasonable to make the conclusion mentioned in paragraph (1)(b):


    (a) have regard to any *arrangement in respect of the *membership interests (including unissued membership interests) in the entity making the distribution (including derivatives held or issued in connection with those membership interests); and


    (b) do not have regard to risks involved in the ownership of membership interests in the entity making the distribution that are substantially borne by any person in the person's capacity as a secured creditor.


    SECTION 208-140   Membership of the same effectively wholly-owned group  

    208-140(1)    
    Two *corporate tax entities are members of the same effectively wholly-owned group of entities on a particular day if:


    (a) throughout that day, not less than 95% of the *accountable membership interests in each of the entities, and not less than 95% of the *accountable partial interests in each of the entities, are held by, or are held indirectly for the benefit of, the same persons; or


    (b) paragraph (a) does not apply but it would nevertheless be reasonable to conclude, having regard to the matters mentioned in subsection (2), that, throughout that day, the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in each of the entities are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, the same persons.

    208-140(2)    
    The matters to which regard is to be had as mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) are:


    (a) any special or limited rights attaching to *accountable membership interests, or *accountable partial interests, in each of the entities held by persons other than the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their *associates; and


    (b) any special rights attaching only to accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in each of the entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates; and


    (c) the respective proportions:


    (i) that accountable membership interests in each of the entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates, and other accountable membership interests in the entity concerned, bear to all the accountable membership interests in that entity; and

    (ii) that accountable partial interests in each of the entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates, and other accountable partial interests in the entity concerned, bear to all the accountable partial interests in that entity; and


    (d) the respective proportions that:


    (i) the total value of accountable membership interests in each of the entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates, and the total value of other accountable membership interests in the entity concerned, bear to the total value of all the accountable membership interests in that entity; and

    (ii) the total value of accountable partial interests in each of the entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates, and the total value of other accountable partial interests in the entity concerned, bear to the total value of all the accountable partial interests in that entity; and


    (e) the purposes for which accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in each of the entities were issued or granted to persons other than the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates; and


    (f) any *arrangement in respect of accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in each of the entities held by persons other than the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates (including any derivatives held or issued in connection with those membership interests or interests) of which the entity concerned is aware.


    SECTION 208-145  

    208-145   Franking debits arising because of status as exempting entity or former exempting entity  


    The following table sets out when a debit arises in the *franking account of an entity because of its status as an *exempting entity or *former exempting entity.


    Franking debits arising because of status as an exempting entity or former exempting entity
    Item If: A debit of: Arises:
    1 an entity becomes a *former exempting entity; and

    the entity has a *franking surplus at the time it becomes a former exempting entity
    the amount of the franking surplus immediately after the entity becomes a former exempting entity
    2 the *exempting account of a *former exempting entity would, apart from item 7 of the table in section 208-115, be in *deficit immediately before the end of an income year an amount equal tothe deficit immediately before the end of the income year
    3 an *exempting credit arises in the *exempting account of the entity under item 5, 6 or 9 of the table in section 208-115 an amount equal to the exempting credit when the exempting credit arises
    4 a *former exempting entity becomes an *exempting entity; and

    the entity has an *exempting deficit at the time it becomes an *exempting entity
    an amount equal to the exempting deficit immediately after it becomes an exempting entity
    5 a *franking credit arises in the *franking account of an entity under item 3 or 4 of the table in section 205-15 because a *distribution is made by an *exempting entity to the entity, or a distribution made by an exempting entity *flows indirectly to the entity an amount equal to the amount of the franking credit when the franking credit arises

    Note 1:

    Item 3 of the table is designed to reverse out franking credits that arise in relation to a period during which the entity is an exempting entity. The entity will receive an exempting credit instead.

    Note 2:

    Item 5 of the table is designed to reverse out franking credits that arise under the core rules because an entity receives a franked distribution from an exempting entity. Only a recipient who is itself an exempting entity is entitled to a franking credit in these circumstances.

    SECTION 208-150  

    208-150   Residency requirement  


    The tables in sections 208-115 , 208-120 , 208-130 and 208-145 are relevant for the purposes of subsection 205-25(1) .
    Note 1:

    Subsection 205-25(1) sets out the residency requirement for an income year in which, or in relation to which, an event specified in one of the tables occurs.

    Note 2:

    Section 207-75 sets out the residency requirement that must be satisfied by the entity receiving a distribution when the distribution is made.

    SECTION 208-155   Eligible continuing substantial member  

    208-155(1)    
    A *member of a *former exempting entity is an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to a *distribution made by the entity if the following provisions apply.

    208-155(2)    
    At both the time when the *distribution was made, and the time immediately before the entity ceased to be an *exempting entity, the *member was entitled to not less than 5% of:


    (a) where the entity is a company:


    (i) if the voting shares (as defined in the Corporations Act 2001 ) in the relevant former exempting entity are not divided into classes - those voting shares; or

    (ii) if the voting shares (as so defined) in the relevant former exempting entity are divided into 2 or more classes - the shares in one of those classes; and


    (b) where the entity is a *public trading trust - the units in the trust; and


    (c) where the entity is a *corporate limited partnership - the income of the partnership.


    208-155(3)    
    At both the time when the *distribution was made, and the time immediately before the entity ceased to be an *exempting entity, the *member was a person referred to in one or more of the following paragraphs:


    (a) a person who is a foreign resident;


    (b) a *life insurance company;


    (c) an exempting entity;


    (d) a *former exempting entity;


    (e) a trustee of a trust in which an interest was held by a person referred to in any of paragraphs (a) to (d);


    (f) a partnership in which an interest was held by a person referred to in any of paragraphs (a) to (d).


    208-155(4)    


    If the assumptions set out in subsection (5) are made:


    (a) if the *member was a person referred to in any of paragraphs (3)(a) to (d) - the member; or


    (b) if the member was a trustee of a trust or a partnership, being a trust or partnership in which a person referred to in any of those paragraphs held an interest - the holder of the interest;

    would (if a foreign resident) be exempt from *withholding tax on the distribution or (if an Australian resident) be entitled to a *franking credit or a *tax offset in respect of the distribution.


    208-155(5)    
    The assumptions referred to in subsection (4) are that:


    (a) the relevant former exempting entity was an *exempting entity at the time it made the *distribution; and


    (b) the distribution was a *franked distribution made to the member; and


    (c) if the *member was a *former exempting entity - the member was an exempting entity; and


    (d) if the member was a trustee of a trust or partnership in which a former exempting entity had an interest - the former exempting entity was an exempting entity.


    208-155(6)    
    A person is taken to hold an interest in a trust, for the purposes of paragraph (3)(e), if:


    (a) the person is a beneficiary under the trust; or


    (b) the person *derives, or will derive, income indirectly, through interposed trusts or partnerships, from *distributions received by the trustee.


    208-155(7)    


    A person is taken to hold an interest in a partnership, for the purposes of paragraph (3)(f), if:


    (a) the person is a partner in the partnership; or


    (b) the person *derives, or will derive, income indirectly, through interposed trusts or partnerships, from *distributions received by the partnership.


    SECTION 208-160  

    208-160   Distributions that are affected by a manipulation of the imputation system  


    For the purposes of item 2 of the table in section 208-115 and items 2 and 5 of the table in section 208-130 , a *distribution to an entity is affected by a manipulation of the imputation system if:


    (a) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) that no *imputation benefit is to arise for the entity in respect of the distribution; or


    (b) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no franking credit benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of the distribution to the entity; or


    (c) the distribution is part of a *dividend stripping operation.

    SECTION 208-165   Amount of the exempting credit or franking credit arising because of a distribution franked with an exempting credit  

    208-165(1)    
    Use the following formula to work out:


    (a) the amount of an *exempting credit arising under item 2 of the table in section 208-115 because a *former exempting entity receives a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit; or


    (b) the amount of a *franking credit arising under item 2 of the table in section 208-130 because an *exempting entity receives a distribution franked with an exempting credit;


      *Exempting credit
    on the *distribution
    × Amount of the distribution
    that is not *exempt income
                          of the recipient                      
    Amount of the distribution
     


    208-165(2)    


    Use the following formula to work out the amount of a *franking credit arising under item 5 of the table in section 208-130 because an *exempting entity receives a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit:


      *Franking credit
    on the
    *distribution
    × Amount of the distribution that is not
    *exempt income of the recipient
    Amount of the distribution
     


    SECTION 208-170   Where a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 affects part of the distribution  

    208-170(1)    
    Use the following formula to work out:


    (a) the amount of an *exempting credit arising under item 3 of the table in section 208-115 because a *former exempting entity receives a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit; or


    (b) the amount of a *franking credit arising under item 3 of the table in section 208-130 because an *exempting entity receives a distribution franked with an exempting credit;



    208-170(2)    


    Use the following formula to work out the amount of a *franking credit arising under item 6 of the table in section 208-130 because an *exempting entity receives *a distribution *franked with an exempting credit:


      *Franking
    credit on the
    *distribution
    × Amount of the distribution
    that is not *exempt income
    of the recipient
    × Amount of the
    distribution

    Specified part of
    the distribution
          Amount of the distribution   Amount of the distribution


    SECTION 208-175  

    208-175   When does a distribution franked with an exempting credit flow indirectly to an entity?  


    A *distribution *franked with an exempting credit is taken to flow indirectly to an entity if, had it been a *franked distribution, it would have been taken to have flowed indirectly to the entity under section 207-50 .

    SECTION 208-180  

    208-180   What is an entity ' s share of the exempting credit on a distribution?  


    To work out an entity ' s share of the *exempting credit on a *distribution *franked with that credit, use sections 207-55 and 207-57 to work out what the entity ' s share of the credit would be it if were a *franking credit on a *franked distribution. The entity ' s share of the exempting credit is equal to that amount.

    SECTION 208-185   Minister may convert exempting surplus to franking credit of former exempting entity previously owned by the Commonwealth  

    208-185(1)    
    The Minister may make a determination or determinations under this section if:


    (a) at a particular time, a *corporate tax entity is an *exempting entity; and


    (b) at that time all of the *membership interests in the entity are owned by the Commonwealth; and


    (c) the Commonwealth has offered for sale or sold, or proposes to offer for sale, some or all of the membership interests; and


    (d) the Minister is satisfied, having regard to the matters mentioned in subsection (2), that it is desirable to make a determination or determinations under this section in relation to the entity.

    208-185(2)    
    The matters to which the Minister must have regard under paragraph (1)(d) are:


    (a) whether the making of the determination or determinations is necessary to enable the entity to make *distributions *franked at a *franking percentage of 100% after the sale; and


    (b) the extent to which the success of the sale or proposed sale depended or will depend upon the ability of the entity to make *franked distributions; and


    (c) the extent to which the reduction in receipts of income tax resulting from the making of the determination or determinations would be offset by the receipt of increased proceeds from the sale; and


    (d) any other matters that the Minister thinks relevant.

    208-185(3)    
    The following provisions of this section apply after the *exempting entity becomes a *former exempting entity.

    208-185(4)    
    If the *former exempting entity would, apart from this section, have an *exempting surplus at the end of an income year, the Minister may, in writing, determine that:


    (a) an *exempting debit of the entity (not exceeding the exempting surplus) specified in the determination is taken to have arisen immediately before the end of that income year; and


    (b) a *franking credit of the entity equal to the amount of the exempting debit is taken to have arisen immediately before the end of that income year.

    208-185(5)    
    A determination under this section may be expressed to be subject to compliance by the *former exempting entity with such conditions as are specified in the determination.

    208-185(6)    
    If a condition specified in a determination is not complied with, the Minister may revoke the determination and, if the Minister thinks it appropriate, make a further determination under subsection (4).

    208-185(7)    
    A determination, unless it is revoked, has effect according to its terms.


    Subdivision 208-G - Tax effects of distributions by exempting entities  

    SECTION 208-190   What this Subdivision is about  


    Generally, a franked distribution from an exempting entity will only generate a tax effect for the recipient under Division 207 if the recipient is also an exempting entity.

    A concession is made to employees of the entity who receive a franked distribution because they hold shares acquired under an eligible employee share scheme.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 208-195  

    208-195   Division 207 does not generally apply  


    Division 207 does not apply to a *distribution by an *exempting entity, unless expressly applied under this Subdivision.

    SECTION 208-200   Distributions to exempting entities  

    208-200(1)    
    Division 207 applies to a *franked distribution made by an *exempting entity to another exempting entity if the distribution gives rise to a *franking credit for the other exempting entity under item 5 or 6 of the table in section 208-130 .

    208-200(2)    
    Division 207 applies to a *franked distribution that is made by an *exempting entity and *flows indirectly to another exempting entity if the distribution gives rise to a *franking credit for that other entity under item 7 of the table in section 208-130 .


    SECTION 208-205  

    208-205   Distributions to employees acquiring shares under eligible employee share schemes  


    Division 207 also applies to a *franked distribution made by an *exempting entity if:


    (a) the distribution is made to an individual who, at the time the distribution is made, is an employee of:


    (i) the exempting entity; or

    (ii) a *subsidiary of the exempting entity; and


    (b) the employee acquired a beneficial interest in the *share on which the distribution is made:


    (i) under an *employee share scheme; and

    (ii) in circumstances specified as relevant in section 208-215 ; and


    (c) the employee does not hold that beneficial interest as a trustee.

    208-210   (Repealed) SECTION 208-210 Subsidiaries  
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)

    SECTION 208-215   Eligible employee share schemes  

    208-215(1)    
    An individual acquires a beneficial interest in a *share in a company under an *employee share scheme in circumstances that are relevant for the purposes of paragraphs 208-205(b) and 208-235(b) if:


    (a) all the *ESS interests available for acquisition under the scheme relate to:


    (i) ordinary shares; or

    (ii) preference shares to which are attached substantially the same rights as are attached to ordinary shares; and


    (b) immediately after the individual acquires the interest:


    (i) he or she does not hold a beneficial interest in more than 10% of the shares in the company; and

    (ii) he or she is not in a position to control, or to control the casting of, more than 10% of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general meeting of the company; and


    (c) the share is not a *non-equity share.


    208-215(2)    


    An individual also acquires a beneficial interest in a *share in a company under an *employee share scheme in circumstances that are relevant for the purposes of paragraphs 208-205(b) and 208-235(b) if:


    (a) the share is part of a stapled security; and


    (b) Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the beneficial interest in the stapled security.

    208-215(3)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), you are taken to:


    (a) hold a beneficial interest in any *shares in the company that you can acquire under an *ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right to acquire a beneficial interest in such shares; and


    (b) be in a position to cast votes as a result of holding that interest in those shares.


    Subdivision 208-H - Tax effect of a distribution franked with an exempting credit  

    SECTION 208-220   What this Subdivision is about  


    Generally, a distribution franked with an exempting credit will only generate a tax effect for the recipient under Division 207 if a tax effect would have been generated for the recipient had the recipient received a franked distribution when the distributing entity was an exempting entity.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 208-225  

    208-225   Division 207 does not generally apply  


    Division 207 does not apply to a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit, unless the Division is expressly applied to the distribution under this Subdivision.

    SECTION 208-230  

    208-230   Distributions to exempting entities and former exempting entities  


    Division 207 applies to a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit by a *former exempting entity as if it were a *franked distribution if:


    (a) the recipient of the distribution is a former exempting entity and the distribution gives rise to an *exempting credit for the recipient; or


    (b) the recipient of the distribution is an *exempting entity and the distribution gives rise to a *franking credit for the recipient; or


    (c) the distribution *flows indirectly to a former exempting entity and gives rise to an exempting credit for that entity; or


    (d) the distribution flows indirectly to an exempting entity and gives rise to a franking credit for that entity.

    SECTION 208-235  

    208-235   Distributions to employees acquiring shares under eligible employee share schemes  


    Division 207 also applies to a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit made by a *former exempting entity as if it were a *franked distribution if:


    (a) the distribution is made to an individual who, at the time the distribution is made, is an employee of:


    (i) the former exempting entity; or

    (ii) a *subsidiary of the former exempting entity; and


    (b) the employee acquired a beneficial interest in the *share on which the distribution is made:


    (i) under an *employee share scheme; and

    (ii) in circumstances specified as relevant in section 208-215 ; and


    (c) the employee does not hold that beneficial interest as a trustee.

    SECTION 208-240  

    208-240   Distributions to certain individuals  


    Division 207 also applies to a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit made by a *former exempting entity as if it were a *franked distribution if:


    (a) a *corporate tax entity other than a former exempting entity became an *exempting entity; and


    (b) immediately before the entity became an exempting entity all the accountable membership interests and accountable partial interests were beneficially owned (whether directly or indirectly) by individuals who were Australian residents; and


    (c) the entity became an exempting entity because some or all of the individuals ceased to be Australian residents; and


    (d) the entity becomes a former exempting entity because all of the individuals are or have become Australian residents; and


    (e) an amount attributable to a distribution *franked with an exempting credit made by the entity is included in the assessable income of such an individual; and


    (f) all the accountable membership interests or accountable partial interests in the entity were, throughout the period beginning when the entity became an exempting entity and ending when the amount was received by the individual mentioned in paragraph (e), beneficially owned (directly or indirectly) by that individual; and


    (g) the individual is an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution.

    Division 210 - Venture capital franking  

    Guide to Division 210  

    SECTION 210-1  

    210-1   Purpose of venture capital franking  


    The purpose of these rules is to encourage venture capital investment by superannuation funds and other entities that deal with superannuation.

    SECTION 210-5  

    210-5   How is this achieved?  


    This is done by giving tax benefits to those entities when they invest in PDFs, which are the vehicles for venture capital investment. If the PDF makes a distribution franked with a venture capital credit, the relevant venture capital investor receives a certain part of a distribution from the PDF as exempt income and, in addition, is entitled to a tax offset equal to the venture capital credit.

    SECTION 210-10   What is a venture capital credit?  

    210-10(1)    
    There is a venture capital franking sub-account in the franking account of each PDF.

    210-10(2)    
    Venture capital credits arise in the sub-account if the PDF pays income tax that is reasonably attributable to capital gains from venture capital investments.


    SECTION 210-15  

    210-15   What does the PDF have to do to distribute the credits?  


    Only a participating PDF can distribute venture capital credits. A PDF elects to participate by keeping a record of its venture capital sub-account.

    SECTION 210-20   Limits on venture capital franking  

    210-20(1)    
    The venture capital credit on a distribution cannot exceed the franking credit on the distribution. It is, in this sense, a species of franking credit.

    210-20(2)    
    A PDF can only distribute venture capital credits if it does it so that all members of the PDF receive venture capital credits in proportion to their holdings.

    210-20(3)    
    If a PDF has a venture capital surplus when it makes a distribution, it must frank the distribution with venture capital credits.

    210-20(4)    
    There are measures to ensure that a PDF does not maintain a venture capital deficit over a prolonged period.


    Subdivision 210-A - Franking a distribution with a venture capital credit  

    SECTION 210-25   What this Subdivision is about  


    A PDF can only frank a distribution with a venture capital credit if certain conditions are met. These conditions are set out in this Subdivision.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 210-30  

    210-30   Franking a distribution with a venture capital credit  


    An entity franks a *distribution with a venture capital credit if:


    (a) the entity is a *participating PDF at the time the distribution is made; and


    (b) the distribution is *frankable with a venture capital credit; and


    (c) the entity allocates a *venture capital credit to the distribution.

    Subdivision 210-B - Participating PDFs  

    SECTION 210-35   What this Subdivision is about  


    A PDF may participate if it elects to keep a record of its venture capital sub-account.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 210-40  

    210-40   What is a participating PDF  


    A *PDF is a participating PDF at a particular time if it keeps a record of its *venture capital sub-account at that time.

    Subdivision 210-C - Distributions that are frankable with a venture capital credit  

    SECTION 210-45   What this Subdivision is about  


    A distribution can only be franked with a venture capital credit if all members of the PDF receive distributions in proportion to their holdings.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 210-50  

    210-50   Which distributions can be franked with a venture capital credit?  


    A *distribution by a *participating PDF is frankable with a venture capital credit if:


    (a) the distribution is a *franked distribution; and


    (b) the distribution is made under a resolution under which:


    (i) distributions are made to all members of the PDF; and

    (ii) the amount of the distribution per *membership interest is the same for each of those distributions.

    Subdivision 210-D - Amount of the venture capital credit on a distribution  

    SECTION 210-55   What this Subdivision is about  


    The amount of the venture capital credit on a distribution is that stated in the distribution statement, unless the amount exceeds the franking credit on the distribution.

    In that case, the amount of the venture capital credit on the distribution is taken to be the same as the franking credit.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 210-60   Amount of the venture capital credit on a distribution  

    210-60(1)    
    The amount of the *venture capital credit on a *distribution is that stated in the *distribution statement for the distribution, unless that amount exceeds the *franking credit on the distribution.

    210-60(2)    
    If the amount of the *venture capital credit stated in the *distribution statement for a *distribution exceeds the *franking credit on the distribution, the amount of the venture capital credit is taken to be the same as the amount of the franking credit, and not the amount stated in the distribution statement.


    Subdivision 210-E - Distribution statements  

    SECTION 210-65   What this Subdivision is about  


    A participating PDF that makes a distribution franked with a venture capital credit must provide additional information in the distribution statement given to the recipient.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 210-70   Additional information to be included when a distribution is franked with a venture capital credit  

    210-70(1)    
    A *participating PDF that makes a *distribution *franked with a venture capital credit must include in the *distribution statement given to the recipient:


    (a) a statement that there is a *venture capital credit of a specified amount on the distribution; and


    (b) a statement to the effect that the venture capital credit is only relevant for a taxpayer who is:


    (i) the trustee of an entity that is a complying superannuation entity in relation to the income year in which the distribution is made and is not a *self managed superannuation fund; or

    (ii) (Repealed by No 64 of 2020)

    (iii) (Repealed by No 64 of 2020)

    (iv) a *life insurance company.

    210-70(2)    
    If, under subsection (1), a statement must be included in a *distribution statement, the distribution statement is taken not to have been given unless the statement is included.


    Subdivision 210-F - Rules affecting the allocation of venture capital credits  

    SECTION 210-75   What this Subdivision is about  


    If a PDF has a venture capital surplus when it makes a distribution frankable with venture capital credits, it must frank the distribution with venture capital credits.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 210-80   Draining the venture capital surplus when a distribution frankable with venture capital credits is made  

    210-80(1)    
    If a *participating PDF would otherwise have a *venture capital surplus at the time a *distribution that is *frankable with a venture capital credit is made, the PDF must either:


    (a) allocate a *venture capital credit to the distribution that is equal to the *franking credit on the distribution; or


    (b) allocate a venture capital credit to the distribution that either alone or when added to venture capital credits allocated to other distributions made under the resolution of the PDF under which the distribution in question is made, reduces the surplus to nil, or creates a *venture capital deficit.

    210-80(2)    
    A *venture capital debit arises for a *participating PDF when a *distribution is made if the PDF does not allocate a *venture capital credit in accordance with subsection (1). The amount of the debit is:


    Subsection (1) franked amount   −   Actual franked amount

    where:

    actual franked amount
    is the amount of the *venture capital credit that is allocated to the *distribution by the PDF (this may be nil).

    subsection (1) franked amount
    is the amount of the *venture capital credit that would have been allocated to the *distribution if the PDF had made the smallest allocation needed to satisfy subsection (1).


    SECTION 210-81   Distributions to be franked with venture capital credits to the same extent  

    210-81(1)    
    If a *PDF *franks a *distribution with a venture capital credit, it must frank each other distribution made under the same resolution with a venture capital credit worked out using the same venture capital percentage.

    210-81(2)    
    The venture capital percentage for a *distribution is worked out using the formula:


    Amount of the *venture capital credit
                                on the distribution                            
    Maximum franking credit for the
    distribution
    × 100


    SECTION 210-82  

    210-82   Consequences of breaching the rule in section 210-81  


    If a *PDF *franks a *distribution with a venture capital credit in breach of section 210-81 :


    (a) the distribution is taken not to have been franked with a venture capital credit; and


    (b) each other distribution made under the same resolution is taken not to have been franked with a venture capital credit.

    Subdivision 210-G - Venture capital sub-account  

    SECTION 210-85   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision:

  • • creates a venture capital sub-account for each PDF; and
  • • identifies when venture capital credits and debits arise in the sub-account and the amount of those credits and debits; and
  • • identifies when there is a venture capital surplus or deficit in the sub-account; and
  • • creates a liability to pay venture capital deficit tax if the account is in deficit at certain times.
  • SECTION 210-90   The venture capital sub-account  

    210-90(1)    
    Each PDF has a venture capital sub-account in its franking account. The sub-account exists even if the PDF does not elect to become a participating PDF by keeping a record of it.

    210-90(2)    
    To the extent that income tax is reasonably attributable to capital gains from venture capital investments, it generates a venture capital credit in the sub-account. There are other circumstances in which a venture capital credit arises.

    210-90(3)    
    If a PDF receives a refund of that tax, a venture capital debit will arise for the PDF. There are other circumstances in which a venture capital debit will arise, such as on the payment of a distribution franked with a venture capital credit.


    SECTION 210-95   Venture capital deficit tax  

    210-95(1)    
    Venture capital deficit tax is payable if a PDF's venture capital sub-account is in deficit at the end of the PDF's income year, or immediately before it ceases to be a PDF.

    210-95(2)    
    A PDF's venture capital sub-account may be in deficit, even if its franking account is not. This can happen because only income tax on income of a particular kind (capital gains on venture capital investments) gives rise to venture capital credits. This means that when a PDF anticipates a venture capital credit, it is not only anticipating that income tax will be paid, but that income tax on income of that kind will be paid. Although income tax may, in fact, later be paid, it will not necessarily be income of the kind that would give rise to a venture capital credit. This results in franking credits arising even while the venture capital sub-account remains in deficit.

    210-95(3)    
    The discrepancy between the franking account balance and the venture capital sub-account balance can also arise because venture capital credits do not necessarily arise at the same time as the relevant franking credits and debits (see item 1 of the table in section 210-105 and item 2 of the table in section 210-120 ).


    Operative provisions

    SECTION 210-100  

    210-100   Venture capital sub-account  


    Each *PDF has a venture capital sub-account within its *franking account.
    Note:

    The balance in the venture capital sub-account on 1 July 2002 will be either nil or, if the entity has a venture capital surplus or deficit immediately before 1 July 2002 under the imputation scheme existing at that time, an amount calculated under the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    SECTION 210-105  

    210-105   Venture capital credits  


    The table sets out when a credit arises in the *venture capital sub-account of a *PDF. A credit in a PDF's venture capital sub-account is called a venture capital credit .


    Credits in the venture capital sub-account
    Item If: A credit of: Arises on:
    1 the *PDF has a *franking credit because it has *paid a PAYG instalment; and

    the whole or part of the instalment is reasonably attributable to a *CGT event in relation to a *qualifying SME investment of the PDF
    that part of the franking credit that is reasonably attributable to the CGT event the day on which the franking credit arises; or

    if the PDF elects to have the *venture capital credit arise on the assessment day under section 210-115 - on that day
    2 the *PDF has a *franking credit because it has *paid income tax; and

    the whole or part of the payment is reasonably attributable to a *CGT event in relation to a *qualifying SME investment of the PDF
    that part of the franking credit that is reasonably attributable to the CGT event the day on which the franking credit arises; or

    if the PDF elects to have the *venture capital credit arise on the assessment day under section 210-115 - on that day
    3 the *PDF incurs a liability to pay *venture capital deficit tax the amount of the liability immediately after the liability is incurred

    SECTION 210-110  

    210-110   Determining the extent to which a franking credit is reasonably attributable to a particular payment of tax  


    In determining the extent to which a *franking credit is reasonably attributable to a *CGT event in relation to a *qualifying SME investment of the *PDF, have regard to:


    (a) the extent to which the credit can reasonably be attributed to the *payment of a PAYG instalment or the payment of income tax by the PDF in relation to its *section 124ZZB SME assessable income for an income year; and


    (b) the extent to which the section 124ZZB SME assessable income can reasonably be attributed to the CGT event.

    SECTION 210-115   Participating PDF may elect to have venture capital credits arise on its assessment day  

    210-115(1)    
    Before a *PDF's assessment day for an income year, the PDF may elect to have the *venture capital credits that arise because of the *payment of PAYG instalments and income tax during that income year arise on the assessment day.

    210-115(2)    
    The *PDF's assessment day for an income year is the earlier of:


    (a) the day on which the PDF furnishes its *income tax return for the income year; or


    (b) the day on which the Commissioner makes an assessment of the amount of the PDF's taxable income for that year under section 166 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    SECTION 210-120  

    210-120   Venture capital debits  


    The table sets out when a debit arises in the *venture capital sub-account of a *PDF. A debit in a PDF ' s venture capital sub-account is called a venture capital debit .


    Debits in the venture capital sub-account
    Item If: A debit of: Arises on:
    1 the *PDF makes a *distribution *franked with a venture capital credit the amount of the *venture capital credit the day on which the distribution is made
    2 the *PDF receives a *franking debit as a result of *receiving a refund of income tax; and
    all or part of the refund is attributable to a *payment of a PAYG instalment or a payment of income tax that gave rise to a *venture capital credit of the PDF
    that part of the refund that is attributable to a payment of a PAYG instalment or a payment of income tax that gave rise to a venture capital credit of the PDF the day on which the franking debit arises; or

    if the venture capital credit did not arise until a later day - that later day
    3 a *venture capital debit arises for the *PDF under subsection 210-80(2) the amount of the venture capital debit arising under that subsection the day on which the *distribution giving rise to the venture capital debit is made
    4 the Commissioner makes a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(a) giving rise to a *franking debit for the *PDF (streaming distributions); and
    the *imputation benefit underlying the determination is a *tax offset under section 210-170
    the amount of the tax offset on the day on which the franking debit arises
    5 a *venture capital debit arises for the *PDF under section 210-125 because its net venture capital credits for an income year exceed certain limits the amount of the excess the last day of the income year

    SECTION 210-125   Venture capital debit where CGT limit is exceeded  

    210-125(1)    
    A *venture capital debit arises for a *PDF where the PDF's net venture capital credits for the income year exceed whichever is the lesser of:


    (a) the PDF's CGT limit for that income year; and


    (b) the tax paid by the PDF on its *SME income component for that income year.

    Net venture capital credits

    210-125(2)    
    The *PDF's net venture capital credits for the income year is:


    Venture capital credits   −   Venture capital debits

    where:

    venture capital credits
    is the total *venture capital credits of the *PDF that relate to tax in relation to taxable income of that income year.

    venture capital debits
    is the total *venture capital debits of the *PDF that relate to tax in relation to taxable income of that income year.



    CGT limit

    210-125(3)    
    The *PDF's CGT limit for the income year is worked out using the formula:


    Ordinary capital gains from
    venture capital CGT events
    Ordinary capital gains from
    all SME CGT events
    × *Section 124ZZB SME
    assessable income
    ×   SME tax rate

    where:

    ordinary capital gains from all SME CGT events
    means the total of the *ordinary capital gains for the income year for *CGT events in relation to *SME investments of the *PDF.

    ordinary capital gains from venture capital CGT events
    means the total of *ordinary capital gains for the income year for *CGT events in relation to shares in companies that are *qualifying SME investments.

    SME tax rate
    is the tax rate applicable to the *SME income component of the *PDF for the income year.



    Tax paid by the PDF on its SME income component

    210-125(4)    
    The tax paid by the PDF on its SME income component for the income year is the tax paid by the *PDF on its *SME income component after allowing *tax offsets referred to in section 4-10 .


    SECTION 210-130   Venture capital surplus and deficit  

    210-130(1)    
    A *PDF's *venture capital sub-account is in surplus at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *venture capital credits in the account exceeds the sum of the *venture capital debits in the account. The amount of the venture capital surplus is the amount of the excess.

    210-130(2)    
    A *PDF's *venture capital sub-account is in deficit at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *venture capital debits in the account exceeds the sum of the *venture capital credits in the account. The amount of the venture capital deficit is the amount of the excess.

    210-130(3)    
    A *PDF's *venture capital sub-account may be in *deficit even though its *franking account as a whole is in *surplus. Similarly, a PDF's venture capital sub-account may be in surplus even though its franking account as a whole is in deficit.


    SECTION 210-135   Venture capital deficit tax  

    210-135(1)    
    While recognising that an entity may anticipate *venture capital credits when *franking *distributions, the object of this section is to prevent those credits from being anticipated indefinitely by requiring the entity to reconcile its *venture capital sub-account at certain times and levying tax if the account is in *deficit.

    210-135(2)    
    An entity is liable to pay *venture capital deficit tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Venture Capital Deficit Tax) Act 2003 if its *venture capital sub-account is in *deficit at the end of an income year.

    210-135(3)    
    An entity is liable to pay *venture capital deficit tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Venture Capital Deficit Tax) Act 2003 if:


    (a) it ceases to be a *PDF; and


    (b) immediately before it ceases to be a PDF, its *venture capital sub-account is in *deficit.


    SECTION 210-140   Effect of a liability to pay venture capital deficit tax on franking deficit tax  

    210-140(1)    
    If an entity is liable to pay *venture capital deficit tax under subsection 210-135(2) because its *venture capital sub-account is in *deficit at the end of an income year, the amount (if any) of *franking deficit tax that the entity would otherwise be liable to pay under subsection 205-45(2) because its *franking account is in *deficit at that time is reduced by the amount of the liability for venture capital deficit tax.

    210-140(2)    
    If an entity is liable to pay *venture capital deficit tax under subsection 210-135(3) because it ceases to be a *PDF during an income year, the amount (if any) of *franking deficit tax that the entity would otherwise be liable to pay under subsection 205-45(3) because it ceases to be a *franking entity at that time is reduced by the amount of the liability for *venture capital deficit tax.


    SECTION 210-145   Effect of a liability to pay venture capital deficit tax on the franking account  

    210-145(1)    
    If an entity incurs a liability to pay *venture capital deficit tax, a *franking credit arises for the entity immediately after the liability arises (the relevant day ).

    210-145(2)    
    The amount of the *franking credit is equal to:


    (a) if no liability to pay *franking deficit tax arises on the relevant day - the amount of the *venture capital deficit tax; or


    (b) if a liability to pay franking deficit tax also arises on the relevant day - the amount ofthe venture capital deficit tax reduced by the amount of the franking deficit tax.


    SECTION 210-150   Deferring venture capital deficit  

    210-150(1)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that an entity does not avoid *venture capital deficit tax by deferring the time at which a *venture capital debit occurs.

    210-150(2)    


    An entity is taken to have *received a refund of income tax for an income year immediately before the end of that year for the purposes of subsection 210-135(2) if:


    (a) the refund is paid within 3 months after the end of that year; and


    (b) the entity ' s *venture capital sub-account would have been in *deficit, or in deficit to a greater extent, at the end of the previous income year if the refund had been received in the previous income year.


    210-150(3)    


    If an entity ceases to be a *PDF during an income year, it is taken to have *received a refund of income tax immediately before it ceased to be a PDF for the purposes of subsection 210-135(3) if:


    (a) the refund is attributable to a period in the year during which the entity was a PDF; and


    (b) the refund is paid within 3 months after the entity ceases to be a PDF; and


    (c) the *venture capital sub-account of the entity would have been in *deficit, or in deficit to a greater extent, immediately before it ceased to be a PDF if the refund had been received before it ceased to be a PDF.


    Subdivision 210-H - Effect of receiving a distribution franked with a venture capital credit  

    SECTION 210-155   What this Subdivision is about  


    A superannuation fund or other entity that deals with superannuation that receives a distribution franked with a venture capital credit is entitled to a tax offset equal to the credit.

    SECTION 210-160   The significance of a venture capital credit  

    210-160(1)    
    The venture capital credit on a distribution is only significant in the hands of a relevant venture capital investor (basically a superannuation fund or other entity that deals with superannuation).

    210-160(2)    
    That investor receives a tax offset. In most cases, this will be equal to the venture capital credit.

    210-160(3)    
    Under section 124ZM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , that part of the distribution that is franked with a venture capital credit is also treated as exempt income in the hands of the entity.


    SECTION 210-165   Recipients for whom the venture capital credit is not significant  

    210-165(1)    
    For other entities, the fact that all or part of the franking credit on a distribution is also a venture capital credit can be ignored.

    210-165(2)    
    The franking credit will either generate a gross-up of the entity's assessable income and a corresponding tax offset under Division 207 or, if the right to make an election under section 124ZM of the Income Tax Assessment 1936 is exercised, the franked part of the distribution will be treated as exempt income.

    210-165(3)    
    The unfranked part of the distribution is treated as exempt income under section 124ZM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    Operative provisions

    SECTION 210-170   Tax offset for certain recipients of distributions franked with venture capital credits  

    210-170(1)    
    The recipient of a *distribution *franked with a venture capital credit is entitled to a *tax offset for the income year in which the distribution is made if:


    (a) the recipient is a relevant venture capital investor; and


    (b) the recipient is not:


    (i) a partnership; or

    (ii) a trustee (other than the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity, a *non-complying superannuation fund or a *non-complying approved deposit fund); and


    (c) the recipient satisfies the *residency requirement for an entity receiving a distribution; and


    (d) the distribution is not *exempt income of the recipient (ignoring section 124ZM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ); and


    (e) the recipient is a qualified person in relation to the distribution for the purposes of Division 1A of former Part IIIAA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and


    (f) the distribution is not part of a *dividend stripping operation; and


    (g) the Commissioner has not made a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) that no *imputation benefit is to arise for the receiving entity in respect of the distribution; and


    (h) the Commissioner has not made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) that no imputation benefit is to arise in respect of the distribution to the recipient.



    Relevant venture capital investors

    210-170(2)    
    The following entities are relevant venture capital investors :


    (a) the trustee of an entity that is a *complying superannuation entity in relation to the income year in which the *distribution is made and is not a *self managed superannuation fund;


    (b) (Repealed by No 64 of 2020)


    (c) (Repealed by No 64 of 2020)


    (d) a *life insurance company.


    SECTION 210-175   Amount of the tax offset  


    Where the recipient is not a life insurance company

    210-175(1)    
    If the entity receiving the *distribution is not a *life insurance company, the *tax offset is equal to the *venture capital credit on the distribution.

    Where the recipient is a life insurance company

    210-175(2)    


    If the entity receiving the *distribution is a *life insurance company, the *tax offset is worked out using the formula:


      Tax offset to which
    the entity would otherwise
    be entitled
    × *Complying superannuation
          class   of taxable income            
    Total income
     

    where:

    complying superannuation class of taxable income
    means the *complying superannuation class of taxable income of the company for the income year in which the *distribution is made.

    complying superannuation/FHSA class of taxable income
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    tax offset to which the entity would otherwise be entitled
    is the *tax offset that the company would be entitled to under subsection (1) if the entity were not a life insurance company.

    total income
    is the company ' s assessable income for the income year.


    SECTION 210-180  

    210-180   Application of Division 207 where the recipient is entitled to a tax offset under section 210-170  


    If the recipient of a *distribution *franked with a venture capital credit is entitled to a *tax offset under section 210-170 , Division 207 does not apply to that *part of the distribution that is venture capital franked.

    Division 214 - Administering the imputation system  

    Guide to Division 214  

    SECTION 214-1  

    214-1   Purpose of the system  


    These provisions:


    (a) allow the Commissioner to gather sufficient information to determine whether tax is payable by a corporate tax entity under the imputation system; and


    (b) provide for the Commissioner to assess the amount of tax that is payable; and


    (c) specify when the tax is payable; and


    (d) establish systems to support the assessment and collection of the tax.

    SECTION 214-5   Key features  

    214-5(1)    
    Initial information about a corporate tax entity ' s franking activities is provided by means of a return, called a franking return, given by the entity to the Commissioner.

    214-5(2)    
    The Commissioner is able to make a legislative instrument requiring corporate tax entities to give a franking return for an income year.


    214-5(3)    
    The Commissioner is also able to require a particular corporate tax entity to give a franking return for one or more income years. The Commissioner might do this, for example, if the Commissioner wishes to audit the corporate tax entity ' s franking activities over a number of years.

    214-5(4)    
    The Commissioner may assess whether tax is payable under the imputation system and the amount of that tax.

    214-5(5)    


    In most cases, this is done by treating the first franking return of a corporate tax entity for an income year as an assessment by the Commissioner. To this extent, there is self-assessment.

    214-5(6)    


    An assessment by the Commissioner is conclusive evidence of a corporate tax entity ' s tax liabilities under the imputation system, except for the purposes of objection, review and appeal processes under Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (see section 350-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 ).

    214-5(7)    
    Assessments can be amended by the Commissioner within certain time limits.

    Subdivision 214-A - Franking returns  

    SECTION 214-10   What this Subdivision is about  


    A franking return for an income year provides the Commissioner with information about a corporate tax entity's franking activities during that year.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 214-15   Requirement to give franking return - general  

    214-15(1)    
    The Commissioner may, by legislative instrument, require each *corporate tax entity to which the instrument applies to give the Commissioner a *franking return for a specified income year.

    214-15(2)    
    An entity to which the instrument applies must comply with the requirement within the time specified in the instrument.

    Note:

    The Commissioner may defer the time for giving the return: see section 388-55 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    SECTION 214-20   Notice to a specific corporate tax entity  

    214-20(1)    
    The Commissioner may give a *corporate tax entity a written notice requiring the entity to give the Commissioner a *franking return for an income year specified in the notice.

    214-20(2)    
    The entity must comply with the requirement within the time specified in the notice, or within any further time allowed by the Commissioner.

    214-20(3)    


    The entity must comply with the requirement regardless of whether the entity has given, or has been required to give, the Commissioner a *franking return.

    SECTION 214-25   Content and form of a franking return  

    214-25(1)    
    A *corporate tax entity must include the following information in its *franking return for an income year:


    (a) if the entity is a *franking entity at the end of the income year - its *franking account balance at the end of the income year; and


    (b) if the entity ceased to be a franking entity during the income year - its franking account balance immediately before it ceased to be a franking entity; and


    (c) if the entity is a *PDF at the end of the income year - its *venture capital sub-account balance at the end of the income year; and


    (d) if the entity ceased to be a PDF during the income year - its venture capital sub-account balance immediately before it ceased to be a PDF; and


    (e) the amounts (if any) of *franking tax which the entity is liable to pay because of events that have occurred, or are taken to have occurred, during the income year; and


    (f) any other information required by the Commissioner for the purposes of administering this Part.

    214-25(2)    


    The return must be in the *approved form.

    SECTION 214-30  

    214-30   Franking account balance  


    A *corporate tax entity's franking account balance at a particular time is:


    (a) if the entity has a *franking surplus or a *franking deficit at that time - the amount of the surplus or deficit; or


    (b) if the entity does not have a franking surplus or a franking deficit at that time - nil.

    SECTION 214-35  

    214-35   Venture capital sub-account balance  


    A *PDF's venture capital sub-account balance at a particular time is:


    (a) if the PDF has a *venture capital surplus or a *venture capital deficit at that time - the amount of the surplus or deficit; or


    (b) if the entity does not have a venture capital surplus or a venture capital deficit at that time - nil.

    SECTION 214-40  

    214-40   Meaning of franking tax  


    Each of the following is a franking tax :


    (a) *franking deficit tax;


    (b) *over-franking tax;


    (c) *venture capital deficit tax.

    SECTION 214-45   Effect of a refund on franking returns  


    If no franking return is outstanding

    214-45(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *corporate tax entity *receives a refund of income tax or *receives a refund of diverted profits tax; and


    (b) the receipt of the refund gives rise to a liability, or an increased liability, to pay *franking deficit tax because of the operation of subsection 205-50(2) or (3); and


    (c) when the refund is received, the entity does not have a *franking return that is *outstanding for the income year in which the liability arose;

    the entity must give the Commissioner a franking return for the income year within 14 days after the refund is received.



    Refund received within 14 days before an outstanding franking return is due

    214-45(2)    
    If:


    (a) an entity *receives a refund of income tax or *receives a refund of diverted profits tax; and


    (b) the receipt of the refund gives rise to a liability, or an increased liability, to pay *franking deficit tax because of the operation of subsection 205-50(2) or (3); and


    (c) when the refund is received, the entity has a *franking return that is *outstanding for the income year in which the liability arose; and


    (d) the entity receives the refund within the period of 14 days ending on the day by which the outstanding return must be given to the Commissioner;

    the entity may, instead of accounting for the liability, or increased liability, in the outstanding return, account for it in a further return given to the Commissioner within 14 days after the refund is received.



    Meaning of outstanding

    214-45(3)    
    A *franking return for an income year is outstanding at a particular time if each of the following is true at that time:


    (a) the *corporate tax entity has been required to give a *franking return for the income year;


    (b) the time within which the franking return must be given has not yet passed;


    (c) the franking return has not yet been given.

    214-50   (Repealed) SECTION 214-50 Evidence  
    (Repealed by No 2 of 2015)

    Subdivision 214-B - Franking assessments  

    SECTION 214-55   What this Subdivision is about  


    The Commissioner may make an assessment of a corporate tax entity ' s liability to pay franking tax, and the franking account balance and the venture capital sub-account balance on which that liability is based. An entity ' s first franking return for an income year is treated as an assessment by the Commissioner. To this extent, there is self-assessment.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 214-60   Commissioner may make a franking assessment  

    214-60(1)    
    The Commissioner may make an assessment of:


    (a) if a *corporate tax entity is a *franking entity at the end of the income year - its *franking account balance at the end of the income year; and


    (b) if a corporate tax entity ceased to be a franking entity during the income year - its franking account balance immediately before it ceased to be a franking entity; and


    (c) if a corporate tax entity is a *PDF at the end of the income year - its *venture capital sub-account balance at the end of the income year; and


    (d) if a corporate tax entity ceased to be a PDF during the income year - its venture capital sub-account balance immediately before it ceased to be a PDF; and


    (e) the amounts (if any) of *franking tax which the entity is liable to pay because of events that have occurred, or are taken to have occurred, during the income year.

    This is a franking assessment for the entity for the income year.


    214-60(1A)    


    However, the Commissioner must not make an assessment under subsection (1) for an entity for an income year if:


    (a) the entity is not required under Subdivision 214-A to give the Commissioner a *franking return for the income year; and


    (b) the entity is not required under Division 214 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 to give the Commissioner a franking return for the balancing period ending within the income year; and


    (c) the entity was required to lodge an *income tax return for the income year by a particular time; and


    (d) the entity has lodged that income tax return; and


    (e) 3 years have passed since the later of the following:


    (i) the time mentioned in paragraph (c);

    (ii) the time when the entity lodged that income tax return.

    214-60(2)    
    The Commissioner must give the entity notice of the assessment as soon as practicable after making the assessment.

    214-60(3)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    SECTION 214-65   Commissioner taken to have made a franking assessment on first return  

    214-65(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *corporate tax entity gives the Commissioner a *franking return for an income year on a particular day (the return day ); and


    (b) the return is the first franking return given by the entity for the year; and


    (c) the Commissioner has not already made a *franking assessment for the entity for the year;

    the Commissioner is taken to have made a franking assessment for the entity for the year on the return day, and to have assessed:


    (d) the entity's *franking account balance at a particular time as that stated in the return as the balance at that time; and


    (e) the entity's *venture capital sub-account balance (if any) at a particular time as that stated in the return as the balance at that time; and


    (f) the amounts (if any) of *franking tax payable by the entity because of events that have occurred, or are taken to have occurred, during that income year as those stated in the return.

    214-65(2)    
    The return is taken to be notice of the assessment signed by the Commissioner and given to the entity on the return day.


    SECTION 214-70   Part-year assessment  

    214-70(1)    
    The Commissioner may, at any time during an income year, make a *franking assessment for a *corporate tax entity for a particular period within that year as if the beginning and end of that period were the beginning and end of an income year.

    214-70(2)    
    This Part applies, for the purposes of that assessment, as if the beginning and end of the period were the beginning and end of an income year.


    SECTION 214-75  

    214-75   Validity of assessment  


    The validity of a *franking assessment is not affected because any of the provisions of this Act have not been complied with.

    SECTION 214-80  

    214-80   Objections  


    If a *corporate tax entity is dissatisfied with a *franking assessment made in relation to the entity, the entity may object against the assessment in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    214-85   (Repealed) SECTION 214-85 Evidence  
    (Repealed by No 2 of 2015)

    Subdivision 214-C - Amending franking assessments  

    SECTION 214-90   What this Subdivision is about  


    The Commissioner may amend franking assessments within certain time limits.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 214-95   Amendments within 3 years of the original assessment  

    214-95(1)    
    The Commissioner may amend a *franking assessment for a *corporate tax entity for an income year at any time during the period of 3 years after the *original franking assessment day for the entity for that year.

    214-95(2)    
    The original franking assessment day for a *corporate tax entity for an income year is the day on which the first *franking assessment for the entity for the income year is made.


    SECTION 214-100  

    214-100   Amended assessments are treated as franking assessments  


    Once an amended *franking assessment for a corporate tax entity for an income year is made, it is taken to be a franking assessment for the entity for the year.

    SECTION 214-105   Further return as a result of a refund affecting a franking deficit tax liability  

    214-105(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *franking assessment for a *corporate tax entity for an income year has been made; and


    (b) on a particular day (the further return day ) the entity gives the Commissioner a further *franking return for the income year under subsection 214-45(1) (because the entity has *received a refund of income tax that affects its liability to pay *franking deficit tax);

    the Commissioner is taken to have amended the entity ' s franking assessment on the further return day, and to have assessed:


    (c) the entity ' s *franking account balance at a particular time as that stated in the further return as the balance at that time; and


    (d) the entity ' s *venture capital sub-account balance (if any) at a particular time as that stated in the further return as the balance at that time; and


    (e) the amounts (if any) of *franking tax payable by the entity because of events that have occurred, or are taken to have occurred, during that income year as those stated in the further return.


    214-105(2)    
    The further return is taken to be notice of the amended assessment signed by the Commissioner and given to the entity on the further return day.

    SECTION 214-110  

    214-110   Later amendments - on request  


    The Commissioner may amend a *franking assessment for a *corporate tax entity for an income year after the end of the period of 3 years after the *original franking assessment day for the entity for the year if, within that 3 year period:


    (a) the entity applies for the amendment; and


    (b) the entity gives the Commissioner all the information necessary for making the amendment.

    SECTION 214-115   Later amendments - failure to make proper disclosure  

    214-115(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *corporate tax entity does not make a full and true disclosure to the Commissioner of the information necessary for a *franking assessment for the entity for an income year; and


    (b) in making the assessment, the Commissioner makes an *under-assessment; and


    (c) the Commissioner is not of the opinion that the under-assessment is due to fraud or evasion;

    the Commissioner may amend the assessment at any time during the period of 6 years after the *original franking assessment day for the entity for the year.


    214-115(2)    
    The Commissioner makes an under-assessment in a *franking assessment (the earlier assessment ) if, in amending the earlier assessment, the Commissioner would have to do one or more of the following for the amended assessment to be correct:


    (a) reduce the *franking surplus (including to a nil balance);


    (b) increase the *franking deficit (including from a nil balance);


    (c) increase *franking tax payable.


    SECTION 214-120  

    214-120   Later amendments - fraud or evasion  


    If:


    (a) a *corporate tax entity does not make a full and true disclosure to the Commissioner of the information necessary for a *franking assessment for the entity for an income year; and


    (b) in making the assessment, the Commissioner makes an *under-assessment; and


    (c) the Commissioner is of the opinion that the under-assessment is due to fraud or evasion;

    the Commissioner may amend the assessment at any time.

    SECTION 214-125   Further amendment of an amended particular  

    214-125(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *franking assessment has been amended (the first amendment ) in any particular; and


    (b) the Commissioner is of the opinion that it would be just to further amend the assessment in that particular so as to *reduce the assessment;

    the Commissioner may do so within a period of 3 years after the first amendment.


    214-125(2)    
    The Commissioner reduces a franking assessment if the Commissioner amends the assessment by doing one or more of the following:


    (a) increasing the *franking surplus (including from a nil balance);


    (b) decreasing the *franking deficit (including to a nil balance);


    (c) decreasing *franking tax payable.


    214-130   (Repealed) SECTION 214-130 Other later amendments  
    (Repealed by No 75 of 2010 )

    SECTION 214-135  

    214-135   Amendment on review etc.  


    Nothing in this Subdivision prevents the amendment of a *franking assessment:


    (a) to give effect to a decision on a review or appeal; or


    (b) to *reduce the assessment as a result of an objection made under this Act or pending an appeal or review.

    SECTION 214-140  

    214-140   Notice of amendments  


    If the Commissioner amends an entity ' s *franking assessment, the Commissioner must give the entity notice of the amendment as soon as practicable after making the amendment.

    214-140(2)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    Subdivision 214-D - Collection and recovery  

    SECTION 214-145   What this Subdivision is about  


    Franking tax is due and payable at certain times and the general interest charge applies to unpaid amounts.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 214-150   Due date for payment of franking tax  


    General rule

    214-150(1)    
    Unless this section provides otherwise, *franking tax assessed for a *corporate tax entity because of events that have occurred, or are taken to have occurred, during an income year is due and payable on the last day of the month immediately following the end of the income year.

    Part-year assessments

    214-150(2)    
    *Franking tax payable because of an assessment under section 214-70 (a part-year assessment) is due and payable on the day specified in the notice of assessment as the day on which it is due and payable.

    Amended assessments - other than because of deficit deferral

    214-150(3)    
    If:


    (a) the Commissioner amends a *franking assessment (the earlier assessment ) other than because of the operationof section 214-105 (an amendment because of a refund of tax that affects *franking deficit tax liability); and


    (b) the amount of *franking tax of a particular type payable under the amended assessment exceeds the amount of franking tax of that type payable under the earlier assessment;

    the excess amount is due and payable one month after the day on which the assessment was amended.



    Tax payable because of deficit deferral

    214-150(4)    
    If:


    (a) a *corporate tax entity *receives a refund of income tax or *receives a refund of diverted profits tax; and


    (b) the receipt of the refund gives rise to a liability, or an increased liability, to pay *franking deficit tax because of the operation of subsection 205-50(2) or (3);

    the franking deficit tax or, if there is an increase in an existing liability to pay franking deficit tax, the difference between the original liability and the increased liability, is due and payable on:


    (c) if the entity accounts for the liability, or increased liability, in a *franking return that is *outstanding for the income year in which the liability arose - the day on which the outstanding return is required to be given to the Commissioner; or


    (d) in any other case - 14 days after the day on which the refund was received.


    SECTION 214-155  

    214-155   General interest charge  


    If:


    (a) *franking tax of a particular type payable by a *corporate tax entity remains unpaid after the time by which it is due and payable; and


    (b) the Commissioner has not allocated the unpaid amount to an *RBA;

    the entity is liable to pay the *general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:


    (c) starts at the beginning of the day on which the franking tax was due to be paid; and


    (d) ends at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:


    (i) the franking tax;

    (ii) general interest charge on any of the franking tax.
    Note:

    The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 214-160  

    214-160   Refunds of amounts overpaid  


    Section 172 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the purposes of this Part as if references in that section to tax included references to *franking tax.

    214-165   (Repealed) SECTION 214-165 Security for payment of tax  
    (Repealed by No 79 of 2010 )

    Subdivision 214-E - Records  

    Guide to Subdivision 214-E

    SECTION 214-170   What this Subdivision is about  


    Generally applicable provisions to do with record keeping apply for the purposes of the imputation system.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    214-175 Record keeping
    214-180 (Repealed by No 2 of 2015)
    214-185 (Repealed by No 114 of 2009 )

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 214-175   Record keeping  

    214-175(1)    
    Section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the purposes of this Part as if:


    (a) the reference in that section to a person carrying on a business were a reference to a *corporate tax entity; and


    (b) the reference in paragraph (2)(a) of that section to the person's income and expenditure were a reference to:


    (i) the entity's *franking account balance; and

    (ii) the entity's liability to pay *franking tax; and


    (c) paragraph (5)(a) of that section were omitted.

    214-175(2)    
    A *PDF does not need to maintain records under section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to a *venture capital sub-account if the *PDF does not elect to be a *participating PDF.


    214-180   (Repealed) SECTION 214-180 Power of Commissioner to obtain information  
    (Repealed by No 2 of 2015)

    214-185   (Repealed) SECTION 214-185 Tax agents  
    (Repealed by No 114 of 2009)

    Division 215 - Consequences of the debt/equity rules  

    Subdivision 215-A - Application of the imputation system to non-share equity interests  

    SECTION 215-1   Application of the imputation system to non-share equity interests  

    215-1(1)    
    The *imputation system applies to a *non-share equity interest in the same way as it applies to a *membership interest.

    215-1(2)    
    The *imputation system applies to an equity holder in an entity who is not a member of the entity in the same way as it applies to a member of the entity.


    Subdivision 215-B - Non-share dividends that are unfrankable to some extent  

    SECTION 215-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    While non-share dividends are, as a general rule, frankable, all or part of some non-share dividends are taken to be unfrankable by virtue of these rules.

    SECTION 215-10   Certain non-share dividends by ADIs unfrankable  

    215-10(1)    
    A *non-share dividend paid by an ADI (an authorised deposit-taking institution) for the purposes of the Banking Act 1959 is unfrankable if:


    (a) the ADI is an Australian resident; and


    (b) the non-share dividend is paid in respect of a *non-share equity interest that:


    (i) by itself; or

    (ii) in combination with one or more *schemes that are *related schemes to the scheme under which the interest arises;
    forms part of the ADI ' s Tier 1 capital either on a solo or consolidated basis (within the meaning of the *prudential standards); and


    (c) the non-share equity interest is issued at or through a *permanent establishment of the ADI in a *listed country; and


    (d) the funds from the issue of the non-share equity interest are raised and applied solely for one or more purposes permitted under subsection (2) in relation to the non-share equity interest.


    215-10(2)    
    The permitted purposes in relation to the *non-share equity interest (the relevant interest ) are the following:


    (a) the purpose of the business of the ADI carried on at or through the permanent establishment other than the transfer of funds directly or indirectly to:


    (i) the Australian head office of the permanent establishment; or

    (ii) any *connected entity of the ADI that is an Australian resident; or

    (iii) a permanent establishment of the ADI, or of a connected entity of the ADI, located in Australia;


    (b) the purpose of redeeming:


    (i) a *debt interest; or

    (ii) a non-share equity interest;
    that is issued, before the relevant interest is issued, at or through the permanent establishment and is held by a connected entity of the ADI that is an Australian resident;


    (c) the purpose of returning funds to:


    (i) the Australian head office of the permanent establishment; or

    (ii) a permanent establishment of the ADI or of a connected entity of the ADI, located in Australia;
    if the funds are contributed, before the relevant interest is issued, for use in the business of the ADI carried on at or through the permanent establishment.

    SECTION 215-15   Non-share dividends are unfrankable if profits are unavailable  

    215-15(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *corporate tax entity pays a *non-share dividend; and


    (b) immediately before the payment, the amount of the *available frankable profits of the entity is nil, or less than nil;

    the non-share dividend is unfrankable .


    215-15(2)    
    If:


    (a) a *corporate tax entity pays a *non-share dividend that is not one of a number of non-share dividends paid at the same time; and


    (b) immediately before the payment, the amount of the *available frankable profits of the entity, although greater than nil, are less than the amount of the non-share dividend;

    the entity is taken to have made a frankable distribution equal to the amount of the available frankable profits. The remainder of the dividend is taken to be an unfrankable distribution.


    215-15(3)    
    If:


    (a) a *corporate tax entity pays a *non-share dividend that is one of a number paid at the same time; and


    (b) immediately before the payment, the amount of the *available frankable profits of the entity, although greater than nil are less than the sum of the amounts of the non-share dividends;

    the entity is taken to have made a frankable distribution equal to the amount worked out using the formula:


    Amount of the *non-share dividend
    Sum of the amounts of all the
    non-share dividends
    × *Available frankable profits

    The remainder of the dividend is taken to be an unfrankable distribution.


    SECTION 215-20   Working out the available frankable profits  

    215-20(1)    


    Use the following formula to work out the amount of a *corporate tax entity ' s available frankable profits at a particular time:

    where:

    committed share dividends
    means the sum of:


    (a) the amounts of any *distributions that are not *non-share dividends and are paid by the entity at that time; and


    (b) if the entity has announced that it will pay distributions that are not non-share dividends at a later time, or is committed or has resolved (formally or informally) to paying such distributions at a later time - the amounts of those distributions.

    maximum frankable amount
    means the maximum amount of *frankable *distributions (other than *non-share dividends) that the *corporate tax entity could pay at that time having regard to its available profits at that time.

    undebited non-share dividends
    means the sum of the amounts of the franked parts of the *non-share dividends (worked out under subsection (2)) that:


    (a) were not debited to available profits; and


    (b) were paid within the preceding 2 income years or were paid under the same *scheme under which the entity pays the non-share dividend.


    215-20(2)    


    The amount of the franked part of a *non-share dividend is worked out using the following formula:


      *Franking credit on the dividend × Applicable gross-up rate

    where:

    applicable gross-up rate
    means the *corporate tax gross-up rate of the entity making the distribution for the income year in which the distribution is made.


    SECTION 215-25   Anticipating available frankable profits  

    215-25(1)    


    A *corporate tax entity that pays a *non-share dividend may anticipate *available frankable profits if:


    (a) the entity:


    (i) has announced the payment of; or

    (ii) is committed or has resolved (formally or informally) to pay;
    *distributions other than non-share dividends (the committed distributions ) after payment of the non-share dividend; and


    (b) but for this subsection, section 215-15 would apply to the non-share dividend; and


    (c) the entity ' s available frankable profits would be greater than nil at the relevant time if the committed distributions were ignored; and


    (d) it is reasonable to expect that available profits will arise after payment of the non-share dividend and before payment of the committed distributions; and


    (e) it is reasonable to expect that, having regard to the available profits mentioned in paragraph (d), the amount of the entity ' s *adjusted available frankable profits immediately after each of the committed distributions is paid will be greater than nil.

    The available frankable profits immediately before the entity pays the non-share dividend is then the smallest of the amounts of the adjusted available frankable profits mentioned in paragraph (e).


    215-25(2)    


    The entity ' s adjusted available frankable profits immediately after a committed distribution is paid is the amount that would be its *available frankable profits at that time if all committed distributions to be paid after that time, and the *non-share dividend, were ignored.

    215-25(3)    
    A *franking debit arises for the entity if:


    (a) the entity anticipates *available frankable profits under subsection (1); and


    (b) the available frankable profits of the entity are less than nil:


    (i) immediately after the last of the committed distributions is made; or

    (ii) immediately before the end of the income year following the income year in which the *non-share dividend is paid;

    whichever is earlier.


    215-25(4)    
    The *franking debit is equal to the lesser of:


    (a) the amount by which the *available frankable profits is below nil; and


    (b) the amount of the franked part of the *non-share dividend (worked out using subsection 215-20(2) ) or, if more than one non-share dividend is made at the relevant time, the sum of the amounts of the franked parts of those non-share dividends.

    215-25(5)    
    In working out the entity ' s *available frankable profits for the purposes of subsection (3) or (4), disregard:


    (a) any *distributions that:


    (i) the entity announces, or becomes committed to or resolves (formally or informally) to pay after the payment of the *non-share dividend; and

    (ii) have not been paid; and


    (b) any estimate made by the entity under subsection (1) after the non-share dividend is paid.


    Division 216 - Cum dividend sales and securities lending arrangements  

    Subdivision 216-A - Circumstances where a distribution to a member of a corporate tax entity is treated as having been made to someone else  

    SECTION 216-1  

    216-1   When a distribution made to a member of a corporate tax entity is treated as having been made to someone else  


    There are 2 situations in which a *franked distribution, or a distribution *franked with an exempting credit, that is made to a *member of a *corporate tax entity is taken to have been made to another entity.

    SECTION 216-5   First situation (cum dividend sales)  

    216-5(1)    
    The first situation is one in which:


    (a) the *corporate tax entity makes a *franked distribution, or a *distribution franked with an exempting credit, to a *member of the entity in respect of a *membership interest in the entity; and


    (b) at the *distribution closing time, the member is under an obligation to transfer the membership interest to another person under a contract for the sale of the membership interest; and


    (c) the contract:


    (i) requires that the distribution be paid on to the other person; and

    (ii) is entered into in the ordinary course of trading on an *approved stock exchange in Australia or elsewhere.

    216-5(2)    
    The *distribution is taken to have been made to the other person as a *member of the entity (and not to the member).

    Note:

    As the other person is the entity receiving the distribution, there may be tax effects for the other person under Division 207 or 208 .


    216-5(3)    
    The *distribution referred to in paragraph (1)(a) includes a distribution that is taken to be made as a result of one or more previous applications of this section or section 216-10 .


    SECTION 216-10   Second situation (securities lending arrangements)  

    216-10(1)    
    The second situation is one in which:


    (a) the *corporate tax entity makes a *franked distribution, or a *distribution franked with an exempting credit, to a *member of the entity in respect of a *membership interest in the entity; and


    (b) at the time the distribution was made, the member was under an obligation to pay the distribution to another person under a securities lending arrangement; and


    (c) the obligation was incurred in the member's capacity as the borrower under the securities lending arrangement; and


    (d) the *distribution closing time occurred during the borrowing period.


    216-10(2)    
    The *distribution is taken to have been made to the other person as a *member of the entity (and not to the member).

    Note:

    As the other person is the entity receiving the distribution, there may be tax effects for the other person under Division 207 or 208 .


    216-10(3)    
    The distribution referred to in paragraph (1)(a) includes a distribution that is taken to be made as a result of one or more previous applications of this section or section 216-5 .


    SECTION 216-15  

    216-15   Distribution closing time  


    If *distributions by a *corporate tax entity are made to those *members who were members as at a particular time at or before the distribution is made, that time is the distribution closing time in relation to those distributions.

    Subdivision 216-B - Statements to be made where there is a cum dividend sale or securities lending arrangement  

    SECTION 216-20  

    216-20   Cum dividend sale - statement by securities dealer  


    If:


    (a) section 216-5 applies in relation to a *franked distribution or a *distribution franked with an exempting credit (cum dividend sales); and


    (b) a *securities dealer has acted for a particular party to the contract concerned;

    the securities dealer must, as soon as practicable after the making of the distribution, give to the other party to the contract a statement in the *approved form setting out such information in relation to the distribution as is required by the approved form.

    SECTION 216-25  

    216-25   Cum dividend sale - statement by party  


    If:


    (a) section 216-5 applies in relation to a *franked distribution or a *distribution franked with an exempting credit (cum dividend sales); and


    (b) a particular party to the contract concerned has not had a *securities dealer acting for him or her;

    that party must, as soon as practicable after the making of the distribution, give to the other party to the contract a statement in the *approved form setting out such information in relation to the distribution as is required by the approved form.

    SECTION 216-30  

    216-30   Securities lending arrangements - statement by borrower  


    If section 216-10 (securities lending arrangements) applies in relation to a *franked distribution, or a *distribution franked with an exempting credit, the borrower must, as soon as practicable after the making of the distribution, give to the lender a statement in the *approved form setting out such information in relation to the distribution as is required by the approved form.

    Division 218 - Application of imputation rules to co-operative companies  

    SECTION 218-5   Application of imputation rules to co-operative companies  

    218-5(1)    
    The *imputation system applies to a *co-operative company in the same way as it applies to any other company but with the modifications set out in this section.

    218-5(2)    
    Each reference to a *distribution is taken to include a reference to an amount distributed as mentioned in paragraph 120(1)(a) or (b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    218-5(3)    
    Despite subsection 202-75(1) (about giving distribution statements), a *co-operative company does not have to give the recipient of a *frankable distribution a *distribution statement unless the *franking percentage for the distribution is greater than zero.


    Division 219 - Imputation for life insurance companies  

    SECTION 219-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out how the imputation rules are applied to a life insurance company.

    Subdivision 219-A - Application of imputation rules to life insurance companies  

    SECTION 219-10   Application of imputation rules to life insurance companies  

    219-10(1)    
    This Part (except this Division) applies to a *life insurance company in the same way as it applies to any other company.

    219-10(2)    
    However, that application is subject to the modifications set out in this Division.


    Subdivision 219-B - Franking accounts of life insurance companies  

    SECTION 219-15   Franking credits  

    219-15(1)    
    The table in section 205-15 does not apply to a *life insurance company.

    219-15(2)    


    The following table sets out when a *franking credit arises under this section in the *franking account of a *life insurance company.


    Franking credits in the franking account
    Item If: A credit of: Arises:
    1 the company *pays a PAYG instalment; and

    the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in relation to which the PAYG instalment is paid; and

    the payment is made before the company ' s *assessment day for that income year; and

    the company is a *franking entity for the whole or part of the relevant *PAYG instalment period
    that part of the payment that:

    (a) the company estimates will be attributable to the *shareholders ' share of the *income tax liability of the company for that income year; and

    (b) is attributable to the period during which the company was a franking entity
    on the day on which the payment is made (see note 1 to this subsection)
    2 the company *paid a PAYG instalment; and

    the company satisfied the *residency requirement for the income year in relation to which the PAYG instalment was paid; and

    the payment was made before the company ' s *assessment day for that income year; and

    the company was a *franking entity for the whole or part of the relevant *PAYG instalment period
    that part of the payment that is attributable to:

    (a) the *shareholders ' share of the *income tax liability of the company for that income year; and

    (b) the period during which the company was a franking entity
    on the company ' s assessment day for that income year (see note 1 to this subsection)
    3 the company *pays a PAYG instalment; and

    the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in relation to which the PAYG instalment is paid; and

    the payment is made onor after the company ' s *assessment day for that income year; and

    the company is a *franking entity for the whole or part of the relevant *PAYG instalment period
    that part of the payment that is attributable to:

    (a) the *shareholders ' share of the *income tax liability of the company for that income year; and

    (b) the period during which the company was a franking entity
    on the day on which the payment is made
    4 the company *pays income tax; and

    the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year for which the tax is paid; and

    the company is a *franking entity for the whole or part of that income year
    that part of the payment that is attributable to:

    (a) the *shareholders ' share of the *income tax liability of the company for that income year; and

    (b) the period during which the company was a franking entity
    on the day on which the payment is made
    5 a *franked distribution is made to the company; and

    the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made; and
    the amount of the tax offset on the day on which the distribution is made
      the company is a *franking entity when it receives the distribution; and    
      the company is entitled to a *tax offset under Division 207 because of the distribution; and    
      the tax offset is not subject to the refundable tax offset rules (see Division 67 )    
    6 a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the company through a partnership or the trustee of a trust; and the amount of the tax offset at the time specified in subsection (3)
      the company is a *franking entity when the franked distribution is made; and    
      the company is entitled to a *tax offset under Division 207 because of the distribution; and    
      the tax offset is not subject to the refundable tax offset rules (see Division 67 )    
    6A a *franking debit arises under item 2 or 3 of the table in subsection 219-30(2) because the company receives a *tax offset refund; and
    the company ' s tax offset refund is subsequently reduced and the company is liable to pay to the Commonwealth the amount of the excess mentioned in subsection 172A(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and
    the company pays the amount of the excess
    the difference (if any) between:
    (a) the amount of the franking debit; and
    (b) the amount the franking debit would have been if the tax offset refund were reduced by the amount of the excess
    on the day on which the amount of the excess is paid
    7 the company incurs a liability to pay *franking deficit tax under section 205-45 or 205-50 the amount of the liability immediately after the liability is incurred
    8 a *franking credit arises under subsection 418-55(1) in relation to an *exploration credit the amount of the *franking credit specified in subsection 418-55(2) at the time provided by subsection 418-55(3)
    9 the company *pays diverted profits tax; and
    the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year for which the tax is paid; and
    the company is a *franking entity for the whole or part of that income year
    that part of the payment that is attributable to:
    (a) the *shareholders ' share of the *income tax liability of the company for that income year; and
    (b) the period during which the company was a franking entity;
    multiplied by the proportion worked out under subsection (4)
    on the day on which the payment is made

    Note 1:

    On the assessment day, a franking credit that arose under item 1 of the table:

  • • is reversed by a franking debit that arises under item 1 of the table in section 219-30 ; and
  • • is replaced with a franking credit that arises under item 2 of the table in this section.
  • Note 2:

    Section 219-50 tells you how to work out the part of an amount that is attributable to the shareholders ' share of the income tax liability of the company for the income year.

    Note 3:

    To find out whether a tax offset under Division 207 is subject to the refundable tax offset rules: see section 67-25 .


    219-15(3)    
    A *franking credit covered by item 6 of the table arises at the end of the income year:

    (a)    

    that is an income year of the last partnership or trust interposed between:

    (i) the *life insurance company; and

    (ii) the *corporate tax entity that made the distribution; and

    (b)    during which the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the life insurance company.


    219-15(4)    


    The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) divided by 40%.

    SECTION 219-30   Franking debits  

    219-30(1)    


    The table in section 205-30 (except items 2 and 2A) applies to a *life insurance company in the same way as it applies to any other company.

    219-30(2)    


    The following table sets out when a *franking debit arises under this section in the *franking account of a *life insurance company.


    Franking debits in the franking account
    Item If: A debit of: Arises:
    1 a *franking credit arises for the company under item 1 of the table in section 219-15 (*payment of a PAYG instalment) the amount of the franking credit on the company's *assessment day for the income year mentioned in that item
    2 the company *receives a refund of income tax; and

    the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year to which the refund relates; and

    the company was a *franking entity for the whole or part of that income year
    that part of the refund that is attributable to:

    (a) the *shareholders ' share of the *income tax liability of the company for that income year; and

    (b) the period during which the company was a franking entity
    on the day on which the refund is received
    3 the company *receives a *tax offset refund; and
    the company does not satisfy the *residency requirement for the income year to which the refund relates; and
    the company was a *franking entity for the whole or part of that income year; and
    the company ' s *franking account is in *surplus on the day on which the refund is received
    the lesser of:
    (a) that part of the refund that is attributable to:
        (i) the *shareholders ' share of the *income tax liability of the company for that income year; and
        (ii) the period during which the company was a franking entity; and
    (b) the amount of the *franking surplus
    on the day on which the refund is received
    4 the company *receives a refund of diverted profits tax; and
    the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year to which the refund relates; and
    the company was a *franking entity for the whole or part of that income year
    that part of the refund that is attributable to:
    (a) the *shareholders ' share of the *income tax liability of the company for that income year; and
    (b) the period during which the company was a franking entity;
    multiplied by the proportion worked out under subsection (3)
    on the day on which the refund is received

    Note 1:

    On the assessment day, a franking debit that arises under item 1 of this table reverses the effect of a franking credit that arose under item 1 of the table in section 219-15 .

    Note 2:

    Section 219-50 tells you how to work out the part of an amount that is attributable to the shareholders ' share of the income tax liability of the company for the income year.


    219-30(3)    


    The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) divided by 40%.

    SECTION 219-40  

    219-40   Residency requirement  


    The tables in sections 219-15 and 219-30 are relevant for the purposes of subsection 205-25(1) (about the residency requirement).

    SECTION 219-45  

    219-45   Assessment day  


    A *life insurance company's assessment day for an income year is the earlier of:


    (a) the day on which the company furnishes its *income tax return for that income year; or


    (b) the day on which the Commissioner makes an assessment of the amount of the company's taxable income for that income year under section 166 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    SECTION 219-50   Amount attributable to shareholders ' share of income tax liability  

    219-50(1)    
    Subsection (2) applies to a *life insurance company in relation to the payment or refund mentioned in an item of a table in this Subdivision (except item 1 of the table in section 219-15 ).

    Note:

    The operation of this section is affected by section 219-75 if a tax offset under section 205-70 is applied to work out the company ' s income tax liability.


    219-50(2)    


    For the purposes of this Part, the part of the payment or refund that is attributable to the *shareholders ' share of the *income tax liability of the company for an income year must be worked out as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out the part of the company ' s total *income tax liability for the income year that is attributable to the company ' s shareholders.

    The result of this step is the shareholders ' share of the income tax liability of the company for the income year.


    Step 2.

    Divide the step 1 result by that total *income tax liability.

    The result of this step is the shareholders ' ratio for the income year.


    Step 3.

    Multiply the amount of the payment or refund by the *shareholders ' ratio.

    The result of this step is the part of the payment or refund that is attributable to the *shareholders ' share of the *income tax liability of the company for the income year.


    219-50(3)    


    For the purposes of this Part, the estimate mentioned in item 1 of the table in section 219-15 (the part of a payment estimated to be attributable to the *shareholders ' share of a company ' s *income tax liability for an income year) must be worked out on the basis of:


    (a) subject to paragraph (b), the method statement in subsection (2); and


    (b) the company ' s reasonable estimate of the amounts that, on the company ' s *assessment day for the income year, will be:


    (i) its total income tax liability for the income year; and

    (ii) the part of that total income tax liability that is attributable to its shareholders.

    219-50(4)    


    In working out the part of the *income tax liability of a *life insurance company that is attributable to the shareholders of the company for the purposes of this section, regard is to be had to the accounting records of the company.

    SECTION 219-55   Adjustment resulting from an amended assessment  

    219-55(1)    
    This section applies in relation to the *franking account of a *life insurance company if:


    (a) the assessment of the company ' s *income tax liability for an income year is amended on a particular day (the adjustment day ); and


    (b) the *shareholders ' ratio (the new ratio ) based on the amended assessment is different from the shareholders ' ratio used previously in relation to that income year to work out a *franking credit or *franking debit for the company; and


    (c) the franking account would have a different balance on the adjustment day if the new ratio had been used to work out all the franking credits and franking debits covered by paragraph (b).

    Note:

    The operation of this section is affected by section 219-75 if a tax offset under section 205-70 is, or has been, applied to work out the company ' s income tax liability.


    219-55(2)    
    On the adjustment day, a *franking credit or *franking debit (as appropriate) of the amount worked out under subsection (3) arises in the *franking account.

    219-55(3)    
    The amount is an adjustment that will bring the *franking account to the balance that it would have on the adjustment day if the new ratio had been used to work out all the *franking credits and *franking debits covered by paragraph (1)(b).

    Example:

    On the basis of a shareholders ' ratio of 60% for the income year, franking credits of the amounts of $6,000, $6,000, $6,000 and $6,000 arose under item 2 of the table in section 219-15 for Company X.

    An amended assessment results in a new shareholders ' ratio of 70%. Under this section, a franking credit of $4,000 arises on the day of the amended assessment to bring the balance of the franking account from $24,000 to $28,000, which would be the account ' s balance if the new shareholders ' ratio had been used.


    SECTION 219-70   Tax offset under section 205-70  

    219-70(1)    
    For the purposes of paragraph 205-70(1)(c) , if a *life insurance company was entitled to a *tax offset under section 205-70 for a previous income year, assume section 63-10 applied to the part of the company ' s basic income tax liability for that previous income year that was attributable to its shareholders.

    219-70(2)    
    In working out the part of the company ' s basic income tax liability that was attributable to its shareholders, have regard to the company ' s accounting records.

    Example:

    The following apply to a life insurance company that satisfies the residency requirement for an income year:

  • (a) the company has a tax offset of $60,000 under section 205-70 (the franking deficit offset) for that year;
  • (b) the company ' s basic income tax liability for that year would be $100,000 if the franking deficit offset were disregarded;
  • (c) 20% of the $100,000 is attributable to the company ' s shareholders (the shareholders ' part).
  • As a result of applying $20,000 of the franking deficit offset to reduce the shareholders ' part to nil, the company ' s basic income tax liability becomes $80,000. The remaining $40,000 of the offset will be included in a franking deficit tax offset for the next income year for which the company satisfies the residency requirement.


    SECTION 219-75   Working out franking credits and franking debits where a tax offset under section 205-70 is applied  


    Revised shareholders ' ratio - modification of section 219-50

    219-75(1)    


    Subsection (2) applies to a *life insurance company if a *tax offset under section 205-70 is applied to work out the company ' s *income tax liability for an income year.
    Note:

    This means subsection (2) applies if the tax offset is applied to reduce the part of the company ' s basic income tax liability mentioned in subsection 219-70(1) in relation to the income year.


    219-75(2)    


    For the purposes of working out the amount of a *franking credit or *franking debit for the company in relation to the income year (other than a franking credit covered by item 1 of the table in section 219-15 ), section 219-50 has effect as if:


    (a) steps 1 and 2 of the method statement in section 219-50 were omitted; and


    (b) the reference in step 3 of that method statement to the *shareholders ' ratio were a reference to the revised shareholders ' ratio worked out as follows: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Work out the remainder (if any) of the part of the company ' s basic income tax liability mentioned in subsection 219-70(1) after the *tax offset is applied to reduce that part.

    Note:

    The part mentioned in that subsection is the part of an amount of the company ' s income tax liability for the income year that is attributable to its shareholders.


    Step 2.

    Divide the step 1 result by the company ' s total *income tax liability for the income year (after applying the *tax offset).

    The result (which can be nil) is the company ' s revised shareholders ' ratio for the income year.

    Example:

    For the 2002-2003 income year X Co (which is a life insurance company) has a tax offset of $68,000 under section 205-70 . Its income tax liability for that year would have been $400,000 on the assessment day (1 February 2004) if the tax offset were disregarded. Of that liability, $80,000 is attributable to the shareholders. The step 1 result is therefore $12,000 ($80,000 minus $68,000).

    X Co ' s income tax liability after applying the tax offset is $332,000 ($400,000 minus $68,000). The revised shareholders ' ratio is therefore 3/83 ($12,000 divided by $332,000).

    For that income year, the company paid $249,000 of PAYG instalments before the assessment day and $83,000 of income tax one month after that day.

    On the assessment day, a franking credit of $9,000 arises under item 2 of the table in section 219-15 ($249,000 multiplied by 3/83). On the day the additional amount of tax is paid, another franking credit of $3,000 arises under item 4 of that table ($83,000 multiplied by 3/83).



    Adjustment resulting from amended assessment - modification of section 219-55

    219-75(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies to a *life insurance company if:


    (a) the assessment of the company ' s *income tax liability for an income year (the previous assessment ) is amended; and


    (b) at least one of the following applies:


    (i) a *tax offset under section 205-70 is applied in making that amended assessment;

    (ii) a tax offset under section 205-70 was applied in making the previous assessment.

    219-75(4)    
    Section 219-55 has effect in relation to the company as if:


    (a) if subparagraph (3)(b)(i) of this section applies - a reference in that section to the new ratio were a reference to the revised shareholders ' ratio that is based on the amended assessment; and


    (b) if subparagraph (3)(b)(ii) of this section applies - the reference in paragraph (1)(b) of that section to the *shareholders ' ratio used previously were a reference to the revised shareholders ' ratio that is based on the previous assessment.

    Example:

    Continuing the example in subsection (2), the assessment of X Co for the 2002-2003 income year is amended on 31 March 2004. Under the amended assessment, X Co ' s income tax liability would be $300,000 if the tax offset were disregarded.

    Of that liability, $60,000 is attributable to the shareholders. That amount is reduced by the tax offset of $68,000 to nil.

    X Co ' s liability to pay income tax is therefore reduced to $240,000 ($300,000 minus $60,000) and it will receive a refund of $92,000 ($332,000 minus $240,000). As the revised shareholders ' ratio has become nil, no franking debit arises from the refund.

    The franking credits that previously arose from the payments of PAYG instalments and income tax would not have arisen if the new revised shareholders ' ratio had been used. Section 219-55 (as applied by subsection (4) of this section) therefore operates to create an adjustment to cancel those franking credits. The adjustment is a franking debit of $12,000 that arises on the day of the amendment of the assessment.


    Division 220 - Imputation for NZ resident companies and related companies  

    SECTION 220-1   What this Division is about  


    A company resident in New Zealand may choose that the imputation system apply in relation to it. If it does, the rest of this Part applies in relation to it as if it were an Australian resident company, but with modifications. Some of the modifications also affect:

  • (a) other companies that are members of the same wholly-owned group; or
  • (b) entities that receive distributions from the company resident in New Zealand.
  • Subdivision 220-A - Objects of this Division  

    SECTION 220-15   Objects  

    220-15(1)    
    The main objects of this Division are:


    (a) to allow a company that is an *NZ resident to choose that the *imputation system apply in relation to it; and


    (b) if the company makes that choice, to apply the rest of this Part in relation to the company generally as if it were an Australian resident.

    220-15(2)    
    Another object of this Division is to prevent the benefits of the *imputation system from being inappropriately made available to or through a *member of a company that is a foreign resident, by modifying the way in which the rest of this Part applies to:


    (a) a company that has chosen that the system apply in relation to it; and


    (b) other companies that are members of the same *wholly-owned group as that company; and


    (c) other entities that receive (directly or indirectly) *distributions from that company.


    SECTION 220-20   What is an NZ resident ?  


    Company

    220-20(1)    
    A company is an NZ resident if:


    (a) the company is incorporated in New Zealand; or


    (b) the company is not incorporated in New Zealand but carries on business there and either:


    (i) has its central management and control there; or

    (ii) has its voting power controlled by *members who are NZ residents.


    Natural person

    220-20(2)    
    A natural person is an NZ resident if he or she resides in New Zealand.

    220-20(3)    
    A natural person is also an NZ resident if his or her domicile is in New Zealand, unless the Commissioner is satisfied that the person's permanent place of abode is outside New Zealand.

    220-20(4)    
    A natural person is also an NZ resident if he or she has actually been in New Zealand, continuously or intermittently, during more than half of the income year, unless the Commissioner is satisfied that:


    (a) the person's usual place of abode is outside New Zealand; and


    (b) the person does not intend to take up residence in New Zealand.

    Not an NZ resident if an Australian resident

    220-20(5)    
    A person is not an NZ resident if the person is an Australian resident. This has effect despite subsections (1), (2), (3) and (4).

    Subdivision 220-B - NZ company treated as Australian resident for imputation system if company chooses  

    SECTION 220-25   Application of provisions of Part 3-6 outside this Division  

    220-25(1)    
    The provisions of Part 3-6 outside this Division apply in relation to a company that is an *NZ franking company at a time as if it were an Australian resident at that time.

    220-25(2)    
    They apply with the modifications made by the other sections of this Division.


    SECTION 220-30  

    220-30   What is an NZ franking company ?  


    A company is an NZ franking company at a time if, at the time, the company is an *NZ resident and has an *NZ franking choice in force.

    SECTION 220-35  

    220-35   Making an NZ franking choice  


    A company that is an *NZ resident may, by notice in the *approved form given to the Commissioner, choose that the *imputation system is to apply in relation to the company. The choice is an NZ franking choice .

    SECTION 220-40   When is an NZ franking choice in force?  

    220-40(1)    
    A company's *NZ franking choice comes into force:


    (a) at the start of the company's income year in which the notice was given to the Commissioner; or


    (b) at the start of a later income year specified in the notice.

    220-40(2)    
    The *NZ franking choice continues in force until it is revoked by the company or cancelled by the Commissioner.


    SECTION 220-45   Revoking an NZ franking choice  

    220-45(1)    
    A company may revoke its *NZ franking choice by notice in the *approved form given to the Commissioner.

    220-45(2)    
    To avoid doubt, the revocation takes effect when the notice is given to the Commissioner.


    SECTION 220-50   Cancelling an NZ franking choice  

    220-50(1)    
    The Commissioner may cancel a company's *NZ franking choice by written notice given to the company, but only if the Commissioner is satisfied that either:


    (a) the company was liable to pay *franking deficit tax or *over-franking tax (whether or not because of section 220-800 (about joint and several liability for the tax)) and the company did not pay the tax by the day on which it was due and payable; or


    (b) the company has not complied with subsection 214-15(2) or 214-20(2) (about giving the Commissioner a *franking return).

    220-50(2)    
    To avoid doubt, the cancellation takes effect when the notice is given to the company.

    Review of cancellation

    220-50(3)    
    If the company is dissatisfied with the cancellation of the choice, it may object against the cancellation in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note:

    That Part provides for review of the cancellation objected against.



    Effect of cancelling a choice on making another choice in future

    220-50(4)    
    If the company makes another *NZ franking choice, it does not come into force unless the Commissioner consents in writing to the choice coming into force.

    220-50(5)    
    In consenting, the Commissioner may specify when the choice is to come into force. The consent has effect according to its terms, despite section 220-40 .

    220-50(6)    
    The Commissioner must give a copy of the consent to the company.

    Subdivision 220-C - Modifications of other Divisions of this Part  

    Franking NZ franking companies' distributions

    SECTION 220-100   Residency requirement for franking  

    220-100(1)    
    An *NZ franking company satisfies the residency requirement when making a *distribution only if the distribution is made at least one month after the notice constituting the company's *NZ franking choice was given to the Commissioner.

    Note:

    This section is relevant to both section 202-5 and section 208-60 , which let a company frank a distribution, or frank a distribution with an exempting credit, only if the company satisfies the residency requirement when making the distribution.


    220-100(2)    
    Section 202-20, as applying because of section 220-25 , has effect subject to this section.

    Note:

    Section 202-20 sets out how a company satisfies the residency requirement when making a distribution.


    SECTION 220-105   Unfrankable distributions by NZ franking companies  

    220-105(1)    
    These *distributions by an *NZ franking company are *unfrankable:


    (a) a conduit tax relief additional dividend (as defined in section OB1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 of New Zealand);


    (b) a supplementary dividend (as defined in that section).

    220-105(2)    
    This section does not limit section 202-45 (about *unfrankable distributions).


    SECTION 220-110  

    220-110   Maximum franking credit under section 202-60  


    For the purposes of working out the *maximum franking credit for a *frankable distribution made by an *NZ franking company in a *foreign currency, translate the amount of the distribution into Australian currency at the exchange rate applicable at the time of the decision to make the *distribution.

    NZ franking companies ' franking accounts etc.

    220-200   (Repealed) SECTION 220-200 Keeping franking accounts in Australian currency  
    (Repealed by No 67 of 2003)

    SECTION 220-205   Franking credit for payment of NZ franking company's withholding tax liability  

    220-205(1)    
    A *franking credit arises in the *franking account of a company on the day a payment is made of *withholding tax that the company is liable under section 128B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to pay, if:


    (a) because of section 220-25 , the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in which it *derived the income on which it was liable to pay the withholding tax; and


    (b) the company is a *franking entity for the whole or part of that income year.

    The amount of the credit equals the amount of the payment.


    220-205(2)    
    For the purposes of determining whether the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year described in paragraph (1)(a), section 205-25 has effect as if the derivation of the income described in that paragraph were an event specified in a relevant table for the purposes of that section.


    SECTION 220-210   Effect of franked distribution to NZ franking company or flowing indirectly to NZ franking company  
    No tax offset for NZ franking company

    220-210(1)    
    An *NZ franking company to which a *franked distribution is made or *flows indirectly is not entitled under Division 207 to a *tax offset for the *distribution. That Division has effect subject to this section.

    Denial of tax offset does not stop franking credit or debit arising

    220-210(2)    
    However, subsection (1) does not prevent a *franking credit or *franking debit from arising in the *NZ franking company's *franking account under Division 205 or 208 . To avoid doubt, the amount of the credit or debit, and the time at which it arises, are the same as they would be apart from subsection (1).

    Note:

    This has the effect that the amount and timing of the credit or debit are worked out as if the NZ franking company had been entitled to the tax offset that subsection (1) prevents the company from being entitled to.


    SECTION 220-215   Effect on franking account if NZ franking choice ceases to be in force  

    220-215(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) a company has made an *NZ franking choice; and


    (b) the choice is revoked or cancelled at a time (the end time ); and


    (c) immediately before the end time the company is a foreign resident.



    Franking debit if franking surplus just before end time

    220-215(2)    
    A *franking debit arises in the company ' s *franking account on the day during which the end time occurs if the account was in *surplus immediately before that time. The amount of the debit equals the *franking surplus.

    Franking deficit tax if franking deficit just before end time

    220-215(3)    
    If the company ' s *franking account was in *deficit immediately before the end time, subsection 205-45(3) applies in relation to the company as if it ceased to be a *franking entity at the end time.

    Note:

    Subsection 205-45(3) makes an entity liable to pay franking deficit tax if the entity ceases to be a franking entity and had a franking deficit immediately before ceasing to be a franking entity.


    220-215(4)    
    Subsection (3) does not limit the effect of subsection 205-45(3) .

    Take account of franking debit arising under section 220-605

    220-215(5)    
    Take account of any *franking debit arising under section 220-605 because of the revocation or cancellation in working out for the purposes of this section whether the company ' s *franking account is in *surplus or *deficit immediately before the end time.

    Note:

    Section 220-605 provides for a franking debit to arise in the company ' s franking account immediately before the end time if, immediately before the end time, the company was a former exempting entity and its exempting account was in deficit.


    Franking accounts of NZ franking company and some of its 100% subsidiaries

    SECTION 220-300   NZ franking company ' s franking account affected by franking accounts of some of its 100% subsidiaries  

    220-300(1)    
    This section has effect if all these conditions are met in relation to a company (the franking donor company ) at a time:


    (a) the franking donor company is at the time:


    (i) an Australian resident or a *post-choice NZ franking company; and

    (ii) a *100% subsidiary of a post-choice NZ franking company (the parent company ) that is not a 100% subsidiary of another company that is a member of the same *wholly-owned group as the parent company;


    (b) the franking donor company is at the time a 100% subsidiary of a post-choice NZ franking company (the NZ recipient company ) in relation to which these requirements are met:


    (i) there must be no companies that are *NZ residents and 100% subsidiaries of the NZ recipient company interposed between it and the franking donor company;

    (ii) the NZ recipient company must be either the parent company or a 100% subsidiary of the parent company;


    (c) there are interposed between the NZ recipient company and the franking donor company at the time one or more companies, each of which:


    (i) is a 100% subsidiary of the NZ recipient company; and

    (ii) is neither an Australian resident nor an NZ resident.


    What is a post-choice NZ franking company ?

    220-300(2)    
    A company is a post-choice NZ franking company at a time if:


    (a) at the time, the company is an *NZ franking company; and


    (b) the notice constituting the *NZ franking choice that makes the company an NZ franking company at the time was given to the Commissioner at or before the time.

    Franking donor company ' s franking surplus when conditions met

    220-300(3)    
    If the franking donor company ' s *franking account is in *surplus at the first time all the conditions in subsection (1) are met:


    (a) a *franking debit equal to the surplus arises in the franking donor company ' s franking account immediately after that time; and


    (b) a *franking credit equal to the surplus arises in the NZ recipient company ' s franking account immediately after that time.

    Franking donor company ' s franking deficit when conditions met

    220-300(4)    
    If the franking donor company ' s *franking account is in *deficit at the first time all the conditions in subsection (1) are met, subsection 205-45(3) applies in relation to the franking donor company as if:


    (a) it ceased to be a *franking entity at that time; and


    (b) its franking account had been in deficit to the same extent immediately before that cessation.

    Note:

    Subsection 205-45(3) makes an entity liable to pay franking deficit tax if the entity ceases to be a franking entity and had a franking deficit immediately before ceasing to be a franking entity.



    NZ recipient company ' s franking account after conditions are met

    220-300(5)    
    If, apart from paragraph (a), a *franking credit or *franking debit would arise in the franking donor company ' s *franking account at a time (the accounting time ) that is a time when all the conditions in subsection (1) are met but after the first time at which all those conditions are met in relation to the franking donor company:


    (a) the credit or debit does not arise in the franking donor company ' s franking account; and


    (b) a credit or debit of the same amount arises at the accounting time in the NZ recipient company ' s franking account instead.

    220-300(6)    
    However, subsection (5) does not apply in relation to:


    (a) a *franking debit arising in the franking donor company ' s *franking account under subsection (3); or


    (b) a *franking credit arising in that account because of item 5 of the table in section 205-15 in conjunction with subsection (4) of this section; or


    (c) a franking debit arising in that account under paragraph 220-605(3)(a) .

    Note 1:

    Item 5 of the table in section 205-15 gives rise to a franking credit immediately after a liability to franking deficit tax arises. Subsection (4) of this section causes such a liability to arise under section 205-45 .

    Note 2:

    Paragraph 220-605(3)(a) gives rise to a franking debit if the NZ franking choice of a company that is a former exempting entity is revoked or cancelled and the company ' s exempting account is in deficit immediately before the revocation or cancellation.



    Franking donor company ' s benchmark franking percentage

    220-300(7)    
    Subsection (5) does not affect the franking donor company ' s *benchmark franking percentage.

    Special rules if franking donor company is former exempting entity

    220-300(8)    
    If the franking donor company becomes a *former exempting entity at the first time all the conditions in subsection (1) are met:


    (a) subsections (3) and (4) do not apply; and


    (b) subsection (5) does not apply in relation to:


    (i) a *franking credit arising in the franking donor company ' s *franking account under item 1 of the table in section 208-130 immediately after that time; or

    (ii) a *franking debit arising in the franking donor company ' s franking account under item 1 of the table in section 208-145 immediately after that time.
    Note:

    Subsection (8) ensures that the franking donor company ' s franking account has a nil balance immediately after the company becomes a former exempting entity and that there is an appropriate balance in the company ' s exempting account that is not made available for use by the NZ recipient company in franking distributions.


    Effect of NZ franking company making distribution that is non-assessable and non-exempt

    SECTION 220-350   Providing for a franking credit to arise  

    220-350(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) an *NZ franking company makes a *franked distribution to a company (the receiving company ); and


    (b) the distribution does not *flow indirectly through the receiving company to another entity; and


    (c) because of section 768-5 , or section 23AI or 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 :


    (i) all of the distribution is *exempt income, or is *non-assessable non-exempt income, in the hands of the receiving company; or

    (ii) part of the distribution is exempt income, or is non-assessable non-exempt income, in the hands of the receiving company.

    220-350(2)    
    A *franking credit arises in the receiving company ' s *franking account on the day on which the distribution is made.

    Note:

    If only part of the distribution is exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income:

  • (a) a franking credit in relation to the distribution will arise under this section in relation to the part of the distribution that is exempt income, or that is non-assessable non-exempt income; and
  • (b) another franking credit in relation to the distribution will arise under item 3 of the table in subsection 205-15(1) in relation to the part of the distribution that is not exempt income, or that is not non-assessable non-exempt income (see also subsection 207-90(2) ).

  • 220-350(3)    
    The amount of the *franking credit that so arises is:


    (a) if subparagraph (1)(c)(i) applies - the amount of the franking credit on the distribution made by the *NZ franking company; or


    (b) if subparagraph (1)(c)(ii) applies - so much of the franking credit on the distribution made by the NZ franking company as is attributable to the part of the distribution referred to in that subparagraph.

    220-350(4)    
    The table in subsection 205-15(1) has effect subject to this section.

    Effects of supplementary dividend from NZ franking company

    SECTION 220-400  Gross-up and tax offset for distribution from NZ franking company reduced by supplementary dividend  

    220-400(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) an *NZ franking company:


    (i) makes a *franked distribution to an entity (the recipient ) in an income year; and

    (ii) pays a supplementary dividend (as defined in section OB1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 of New Zealand) to the recipient in connection with the franked distribution; and


    (b) an amount is included in the recipient ' s assessable income for the income year under section 207-20 , and the recipient is entitled to a *tax offset for the income year under that section or section 207-110 ; and


    (c) the recipient is entitled to a tax offset under Division 770 because of the inclusion of the *distribution in the recipient ' s assessable income for the income year.


    (d) (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)



    Reduced gross-up

    220-400(2)    


    The amount included in the recipient ' s assessable income under section 207-20 is reduced by the amount of the supplementary dividend (but not below zero).

    Reduced tax offset

    220-400(3)    


    The amount of the *tax offset under section 207-20 is reduced by the amount of the supplementary dividend (but not below zero).

    What happens if certain provisions apply

    220-400(4)    


    Subsections (2) and (3) do not apply to the recipient in relation to the *franked distribution if one or more of the following provisions also apply to the recipient in relation to the distribution:


    (a) subsection 207-90(1) ;


    (b) subsection 207-90(2) ;


    (c) subsection 207-145(1) ;


    (d) subsection 207-145(2) .


    220-400(5)    


    If subsection 207-90(2) or 207-145(2) would also apply to the recipient in relation to the *franked distribution, apply that subsection on the basis that:


    (a) the amount of the *franking credit on the distribution;

    had been reduced by:


    (b) so much of the supplementary dividend as does not exceed that amount of the franking credit.



    Relationship with sections 207-20, 207-90 and 207-145

    220-400(6)    
    Sections 207-20 , 207-90 and 207-145 have effect subject to this section.


    SECTION 220-405   Franked distribution and supplementary dividend flowing indirectly  

    220-405(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) an *NZ franking company:


    (i) makes a *franked distribution; and

    (ii) pays a supplementary dividend (as defined in section OB1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 of New Zealand) in connection with the franked distribution; and


    (b) the franked distribution and the supplementary dividend *flow indirectly to an entity (the recipient ) in an income year because the recipient is a partner in a partnership or a beneficiary or trustee of a trust; and


    (c) the recipient is entitled under section 207-45 to a *tax offset in connection with the *distribution; and


    (d) the recipient is entitled to a tax offset under Division 770 for the income year because of the distribution.


    (e) (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)



    Recipient that is a partner or beneficiary

    220-405(2)    


    If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the recipient under subsection 207-50(2) or (3), then:


    (a) the recipient can deduct an amount for the income year that is equal to so much of its share of the supplementary dividend as does not exceed:


    (i) if the distribution flows indirectly to the recipient under subsection 207-50(2) - the recipient ' s individual interest in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection; or

    (ii) if the distribution flows indirectly to the recipient under subsection 207-50(3) - the recipient ' s share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection; and


    (b) the recipient ' s *tax offset under section 207-45 is reduced by so much of the deduction under paragraph (a) as does not exceed its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution.



    Recipient that is a trustee

    220-405(3)    


    If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the recipient under subsection 207-50(4) , then:


    (a) the share amount mentioned in that subsection in relation to the distribution is reduced by so much of the recipient ' s share of the supplementary dividend as does not exceed that share amount; and


    (b) the recipient ' s *tax offset under section 207-45 is reduced by so much of the reduction under paragraph (a) as does not exceed its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution.



    What happens if certain provisions apply

    220-405(4)    


    Subsection (2) or (3) (as appropriate) does not apply to the recipient in relation to the *franked distribution if one or more of the following provisions also apply to the recipient in relation to the distribution:


    (a) subsection 207-95(1) ;


    (b) subsection 207-95(5) ;


    (c) subsection 207-150(1) ;


    (d) subsection 207-150(5) .


    220-405(5)    


    If subsection 207-90(5) or 207-150(5) would also apply to the recipient in relation to the *franked distribution, apply that subsection on the basis that:


    (a) the amount of the recipient ' s *share of the *franking credit on the distribution;

    had been reduced by:


    (b) so much of the recipient ' s share of the supplementary dividend as does not exceed the amount of that share of the franking credit.



    When does a supplementary dividend flow to an entity?

    220-405(6)    


    A supplementary dividend flows indirectly to an entity if it would have *flowed indirectly to the entity under subsection 207-50(2) , (3) or (4), if:


    (a) the dividend had been a *franked distribution; and


    (b) a reference in that subsection to the entity ' s *share of the franked distribution had been a reference to the entity ' s share of the supplementary dividend.



    Share of supplementary dividend

    220-405(7)    


    The entity ' s share of the supplementary dividend is worked out as follows:


    Amount of the
    supplementary
    dividend
    × Entity ' s *share
      of the *franked distribution  
    Amount of the *franked distribution
     


    220-405(8)    


    Nothing in this section has the effect of including in the entity ' s assessable income its share of the supplementary dividend.

    Relationship with Subdivisions 207-B, 207-D, 207-E and 207-F

    220-405(9)    


    Subdivisions 207-B , 207-D , 207-E and 207-F have effect subject to this section.

    SECTION 220-410   Franking credit reduced if tax offset reduced  

    220-410(1)    
    If, under section 220-400 or 220-405 , a *corporate tax entity's *tax offset (the reduced tax offset ) for the *franked distribution described in that section is less than it would be apart from that section, the *franking credit arising in that entity's *franking account because of the *distribution is equal to the reduced tax offset.

    220-410(2)    


    The following provisions have effect subject to this section:


    (a) items 3 and 4 of the table in section 205-15 ;


    (b) items 5 and 6 of the table in section 219-15 .

    Note:

    Each of those items gives rise to a franking credit for a franked distribution if the recipient is entitled under Division 207 to a tax offset for the distribution. Those items provide that the amount of the credit equals the amount of that offset.


    Rules about exempting entities

    SECTION 220-500   Publicly listed post-choice NZ franking company and its 100% subsidiaries are not exempting entities  

    220-500(1)    
    A company is not an *exempting entity at a particular time if:


    (a) it is a *post-choice NZ franking company at the time; and


    (b) the company is a *listed public company at the time.

    220-500(2)    
    A company (the non-exempting company ) is not an *exempting entity at a particular time if at the time:


    (a) the non-exempting company is a *100% subsidiary of a company (the listed company ) that is not an exempting entity because of subsection (1); and


    (b) the non-exempting company is an Australian resident or a *post-choice NZ franking company; and


    (c) if:


    (i) there are one or more companies interposed between the non-exempting company and the listed company; and

    (ii) one or more of the interposed companies are *NZ residents;
    all of the interposed companies that are NZ residents are post-choice NZ franking companies.

    220-500(3)    
    This section has effect despite section 208-20 (about an entity being an *exempting entity).


    SECTION 220-505   Post-choice NZ franking company is not automatically prescribed person  

    220-505(1)    
    A *post-choice NZ franking company is not a prescribed person under section 208-40 for the purposes of working out whether another *corporate tax entity is an *exempting entity at a particular time because it is effectively owned by prescribed persons within the meaning of section 208-25 .

    220-505(2)    
    However, this section does not prevent the company from being taken under section 208-45 to be a prescribed person for those purposes.


    SECTION 220-510   Parent company ' s status as prescribed person sets status of all other members of same wholly-owned group  

    220-510(1)    
    This section has effect for the purposes of working out whether a company is an *exempting entity at a particular time because it is effectively owned by prescribed persons within the meaning of section 208-25 , if:


    (a) at the time the company is a *100% subsidiary of another company (the parent company ) that is not a 100% subsidiary of another member of the same *wholly-owned group; and


    (b) at the time the parent company is a *post-choice NZ franking company; and


    (c) there is at least one company (the non-Tasman company ) that meets all these conditions:


    (i) the non-Tasman company is neither an Australian resident nor an *NZ resident at the time;

    (ii) the non-Tasman company is a member of the same wholly-owned group at the time;

    (iii) the non-Tasman company is interposed between the parent company and a company that, at the time, is an Australian resident or a post-choice NZ franking company.

    220-510(2)    
    At the time, each company that is a *100% subsidiary of the parent company is a prescribed person if the parent company is a prescribed person at the time for those purposes because of section 208-40 or 208-45 (taking account of section 220-505 , if relevant).

    220-510(3)    
    At the time, each company that is a *100% subsidiary of the parent company is not a prescribed person if the parent company is not a prescribed person for those purposes because of section 208-40 or 208-45 (taking account of section 220-505 , if relevant).

    220-510(4)    
    This section has effect despite sections 208-40 , 208-45 and 220-505 so far as those sections apply in relation to a *100% subsidiary of the parent company.


    NZ franking companies' exempting accounts

    220-600   (Repealed) SECTION 220-600 Keeping exempting accounts in Australian currency  
    (Repealed by No 67 of 2003)

    SECTION 220-605   Effect on exempting account if NZ franking choice ceases to be in force  

    220-605(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) a company has made an *NZ franking choice; and


    (b) the choice is revoked or cancelled at a time (the end time ); and


    (c) immediately before the end time:


    (i) the company is a foreign resident; and

    (ii) the company is a *former exempting entity.


    Exempting debit if exempting surplus just before end time

    220-605(2)    
    An *exempting debit arises in the company ' s *exempting account at the end time if the account was in *surplus immediately before that time. The amount of the debit equals the *exempting surplus.

    If exempting deficit just before end time

    220-605(3)    
    If the company ' s *exempting account was in *deficit immediately before the end time:


    (a) a *franking debit equal to that deficit arises in the company ' s *franking account immediately before the end time; and


    (b) an *exempting credit equal to that deficit arises in the company ' s exempting account at the end time.

    Tax effect of distribution franked by NZ franking company with an exempting credit

    SECTION 220-700   Tax effect of distribution franked by NZ franking company with an exempting credit  

    220-700(1)    
    This section has effect if an *NZ franking company *franks with an exempting credit a *distribution the company makes when it is a *former exempting entity.

    220-700(2)    
    If, under Subdivision 208-H , Division 207 applies in relation to the *distribution, it applies subject to the provisions of this Division that modify the effect of that Division.

    Note 1:

    Subdivision 208-H provides in some cases for the tax effect of a distribution franked with an exempting credit by applying Division 207 as if the distribution were a franked distribution.

    Note 2:

    Sections 220-400 and 220-405 modify the effect of Division 207 so far as it relates to the tax effect of distributions by NZ franking companies that pay supplementary dividends in connection with the distributions.


    220-700(3)    
    Subdivision 208-H has effect subject to this section.


    Joint and several liability for NZ resident company's unmet franking liabilities

    SECTION 220-800   Joint and several liability for NZ resident company's franking tax etc.  

    220-800(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) a company (the defaulter ) became liable under another section to pay an amount described in subsection (2) because the company was an *NZ franking company; and


    (b) the amount was unpaid by the time (the defaulter's due time ) it was due and payable by the defaulter; and


    (c) at any time during the period for the amount (see subsection (2)), the defaulter was a member of the same *wholly-owned group as one or more other companies (each of which is a contributor ).

    220-800(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), the amount and period are shown in the table:


    Amount and period
    Item For an amount of this kind: The period is:
    1 *Franking deficit tax Whichever of these periods is relevant:

    (a) if the defaulter was liable to pay the tax because its franking account was in deficit at the end of an income year - that income year;

    (b) if the defaulter was liable to pay the tax because of another event - the period starting at the start of the income year in which the event occurred and ending when the event occurred
    2 *Over-franking tax The income year in which the defaulter made the *frankable distribution that made the defaulter liable to pay the tax
    3 *General interest charge on *franking deficit tax or *over-franking tax The period identified under item 1 or 2 for the tax
    4 Administrative penalty that:

    (a) is mentioned in section 284-75, 284-145, 286-75 or 288-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 ; and

    (b) relates entirely to *franking deficit tax or *over-franking tax
    The period identified under item 1 or 2 for the tax


    220-800(3)    
    Just after the defaulter's due time, these companies become jointly and severally liable to pay the unpaid amount:


    (a) the defaulter;


    (b) each contributor, other than one that, at that time:


    (i) is neither an Australian resident nor an *NZ resident; or

    (ii) is prohibited by an *Australian law or a law of New Zealand from entering into an *arrangement that would make the contributor jointly or severally liable for the unpaid amount.

    220-800(4)    
    The joint and several liability of a particular contributor becomes due and payable by the contributor 14 days after the Commissioner gives it written notice of the liability.

    Note 1:

    Two or more contributors will have different due and payable dates for the same liability if the Commissioner gives them notice of their liability on different days.

    Note 2:

    This section does not affect the time at which the liability for the unpaid amount arose for, or became due and payable by, the defaulter.


    220-800(5)    
    If:


    (a) the unpaid amount (the first interest amount ) is *general interest charge for a day in relation to another unpaid amount (the primary liability ) that consists of *franking deficit tax or *over-franking tax; and


    (b) on a day the Commissioner gives a particular contributor written notice under subsection (4) of the contributor's liability for the first interest amount; and


    (c) general interest charge arises:


    (i) for a day (the later day ) after the days mentioned in paragraphs (a) and (b); and

    (ii) in relation to the primary liability; and


    (d) the general interest charge for the later day has not been paid or otherwise discharged in full by the time it became due and payable;

    the Commissioner is taken to have given the contributor written notice under subsection (4) of the general interest charge for the later day on that later day.


    220-800(6)    
    Section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to the contributors ' liability as if it were a liability for tax.

    Note:

    Section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 deals with the payment of tax by agents and trustees.


    PART 3-10 - FINANCIAL TRANSACTIONS  

    Division 230 - Taxation of financial arrangements  

    Guide to Division 230  

    SECTION 230-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division is about the tax treatment of gains and losses from your financial arrangements.

    You recognise the gains and losses, as appropriate, over the life of a financial arrangement and ignore distinctions between income and capital unless specific rules apply.

    If it is sufficiently certain that you will make a gain or loss, you use a compounding accruals method to recognise the gain or loss. Otherwise you use a realisation method. Instead of either, you may be able to choose to use a fair value or hedging method or to rely on your financial reports. You may also be able to choose to recognise foreign exchange gains and losses using a retranslation method.

    SECTION 230-5   Scope of this Division  

    230-5(1)    
    You have a financial arrangement if you have one or more cash settlable legal or equitable rights and/or obligations to receive or provide a financial benefit.

    230-5(2)    
    This Division does not apply to all financial arrangements. The main exceptions are if:


    (a) you are:


    (i) an individual; or

    (ii) a superannuation entity or fund, managed investment scheme or an entity substantially similar to a managed investment scheme under foreign law with assets of less than $100 million; or

    (iii) an ADI, securitisation vehicle or other financial sector entity with an aggregated turnover of less than $20 million; or

    (iv) another entity with an aggregated turnover of less than $100 million, financial assets of less than $100 million and assets of less than $300 million;
    and either:

    (iva) the arrangement is to end not more than 12 months after you start to have it; or

    (v) the arrangement is not a qualifying security; or


    (b) the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc) and neither a fair value election, a hedging financial arrangement election nor an election to rely on financial reports applies to the arrangement.

    Note:

    Section 230-455 provides for the exceptions referred to in paragraph (a).


    Subdivision 230-A - Core rules  

    Objects

    SECTION 230-10  

    230-10   Objects of this Division  


    The objects of this Division are:


    (a) to minimise the extent to which the tax treatment of gains and losses from your *financial arrangements distorts, by providing inappropriate impediments and stimulation, your trading, financing and investment decisions and your risk taking and risk management; and


    (b) to do so by aligning more closely the tax and commercial recognition of gains and losses from your financial arrangements in the following ways:


    (i) by allocating the gains and losses to income years throughout the life of your financial arrangements on a reasonable basis;

    (ii) by generally recognising gains and losses on revenue rather than capital account; and


    (c) to appropriately take account of, and minimise, your compliance costs.

    Tax treatment of gains and losses from financial arrangements

    SECTION 230-15   Gains are assessable and losses deductible  


    Gains

    230-15(1)    
    Your assessable income includes a gain you make from a *financial arrangement.

    Note:

    This Division does not apply to gains that are subject to exceptions under Subdivision 230-H .



    Losses

    230-15(2)    
    You can deduct a loss you make from a *financial arrangement, but only to the extent that:


    (a) you make it in gaining or producing your assessable income; or


    (b) you necessarily make it in carrying on a *business for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable income.

    Note:

    This Division does not apply to losses that are subject to exceptions under Subdivision 230-H .


    230-15(3)    
    You can also deduct a loss you make from a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you are an *Australian entity; and


    (b) you make the loss in deriving income from a foreign source; and


    (c) the income is *non-assessable non-exempt income under section 768-5 , or section 23AI or 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and


    (d) the loss is, in whole or in part, a cost in relation to a *debt interest you issue that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a) .

    You can deduct the loss only to the extent to which it is a cost in relation to a *debt interest you issue that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a) .

    Note:

    This Division does not apply to losses that are subject to exceptions under Subdivision 230-H .


    230-15(4)    
    If the *financial arrangement is a *debt interest, the loss is not prevented from being deductible for an income year under subsection (2) merely because of either or both of the following:


    (a) one or more of the *financial benefits that are taken into account in working out the amount of the loss are *contingent on aspects of the economic performance (whether past, current or future) of:


    (i) you or a part of your activities; or

    (ii) a *connected entity of yours or a part of the activities of a connected entity of yours;


    (b) one or more of the financial benefits that are taken into account in working out the amount of the loss secure a permanent or enduring benefit for you or a connected entity of yours.


    230-15(4A)    


    A *dividend on a *debt interest is a loss you can deduct to the extent to which it would have been a deductible loss under subsection (2) if:


    (a) the payment of the amount of the dividend were the incurring of a liability to pay the same amount as interest; and


    (b) that interest were incurred in respect of the finance raised by you in respect of which the dividend was paid or provided; and


    (c) the debt interest retained its character as a debt interest for the purposes of subsection (4).


    230-15(5)    
    Subject to subsection (6), subsection (4) does not apply to the loss to the extent to which the annually compounded internal rate of return on the *debt interest exceeds the *benchmark rate of return for the debt interest increased by 150 basis points.

    230-15(6)    
    If:


    (a) regulations made for the purposes of subsection 25-85(6) provide that a specified number of basis points is to apply for the purposes of applying subsection 25-85(5) in particular circumstances; and


    (b) those circumstances exist in relation to the *debt interest;

    subsection (5) applies as if the reference in that subsection to 150 basis points were a reference to the number of basis points specified in the regulations.



    Division does not affect foreign residence rules

    230-15(7)    
    Nothing in this Division affects the operation of the provisions of Division 6 that provide for the significance of foreign residence for the assessability of ordinary and statutory income.

    Note 1:

    Gains that you make under this Division may be ordinary or statutory income for the purposes of Division 6 .

    Note 2:

    For the effect of a change of residence during an income year, see sections 230-485 and 230-490 .


    SECTION 230-20   Gain or loss to be taken into account only once under this Act  


    Application of section

    230-20(1)    
    This section applies to the following:


    (a) a gain that is included in your assessable income for an income year under this Division;


    (b) a loss that is allowable as a deduction to you for an income year under this Division;


    (c) a gain or a loss that is dealt with in accordance with subsection 230-310(4) in relation to an income year.

    Purpose of this section

    230-20(2)    
    The purpose of this section is to ensure that your gains and losses, and *financial benefits, to which this section applies are taken into account only once under this Act in working out your taxable income.

    Gain or loss to be taken into account only once

    230-20(3)    
    A gain or loss to which this section applies is not to be (to any extent):


    (a) included in your assessable income; or


    (b) allowable as a deduction to you; or


    (c) dealt with in accordance with subsection 230-310(4) ;

    again under this Division for the same or any other income year.


    230-20(4)    
    A gain or loss to which this section applies is not to be (to any extent):


    (a) included in your assessable income; or


    (b) allowable as a deduction to you;

    under any provisions of this Act outside this Division for the same or any other income year.



    Section does not give rise to exempt income

    230-20(5)    
    A gain is not to be treated as *exempt income merely because it is not included in your assessable income under this section.

    SECTION 230-25   Associated financial benefits to be taken into account only once under this Act  


    Application of section

    230-25(1)    
    This section applies to a *financial benefit whose amount or value is taken into account in working out whether you make, or the amount of, a gain or loss to which paragraph 230-20(1)(a), (b) or (c) applies.

    Associated financial benefit to be taken into account only once

    230-25(2)    
    A *financial benefit to which this section applies is not to be (to any extent):


    (a) included in your assessable income; or


    (b) allowable as a deduction to you;

    under any provision of this Act outside this Division for the same or any other income year.



    Exception for certain bad debts

    230-25(3)    
    If:


    (a) a *financial benefit has been included in your assessable income under a provision of this Act outside this Division; and


    (b) a bad debt deduction would have been allowed under section 25-35 in relation to the financial benefit;

    subsection (2) does not prevent that bad debt deduction from being allowed under section 25-35 in relation to the financial benefit as if the debt were still outstanding.



    Section does not give rise to exempt income

    230-25(4)    
    A *financial benefit is not to be treated as *exempt income merely because it is not included in your assessable income under this section.

    SECTION 230-30   Treatment of gains and losses related to exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income  

    230-30(1)    
    Despite section 230-15 , a gain that you make from a *financial arrangement:


    (a) to the extent that it reflects an amount that would be treated, or would reasonably expected to be treated, as *exempt income under a provision of this Act if this Division were disregarded - is exempt income; and


    (b) to the extent that it reflects an amount that would be treated or would reasonably expected to be treated, as *non-assesable non-exempt income under a provision of this Act if this Division were disregarded - is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

    230-30(2)    
    Despite section 230-15 , a gain that you make from a *financial arrangement:


    (a) to the extent that, if it had been a loss, you would have made it in gaining or producing *exempt income - is exempt income; and


    (b) to the extent to which, if it had been a loss, you would have made it in gaining or producing *non-assessable non-exempt income - is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

    230-30(3)    
    A loss you make from a *financial arrangement is not allowable as a deduction to you under any provision of this Act (other than subsection 230-15(3) ) to the extent that you make it in gaining or producing your:


    (a) *exempt income; or


    (b) *non-assessable non-exempt income.

    SECTION 230-35   Treatment of gains and losses of private or domestic nature  


    Borrowings etc. used for private or domestic purpose

    230-35(1)    
    Subsections (2) and (3) apply if:


    (a) a *borrowing is made by you, or credit is provided to you, under a *financial arrangement; and


    (b) you use some or all of the funds borrowed or the credit provided for a private or domestic purpose.

    230-35(2)    
    This Division does not apply to a gain you make from the arrangement to the extent that you use the funds raised or the credit provided for a private or domestic purpose.

    230-35(3)    
    A loss you make from the arrangement is not allowable as a deduction to you under any provision of this Act to the extent that you use the funds raised or the credit provided for a private or domestic purpose.

    Derivative financial arrangement held for private or domestic purpose

    230-35(4)    
    Subsections (5) and (6) apply if:


    (a) you are an individual; and


    (b) you make a gain or loss from a *derivative financial arrangement; and


    (c) the arrangement is held, wholly or in part, for a private or domestic purpose.

    230-35(5)    
    This Division does not apply to a gain you make from the arrangement to the extent that the arrangement is held or used for a private or domestic purpose.

    230-35(6)    
    A loss you make from the arrangement is not allowable as a deduction to you under any provision of this Act to the extent that the arrangement is held or used for a private or domestic purpose.

    Method to be applied to take account of gain or loss

    SECTION 230-40   Methods for taking gain or loss into account  


    Methods available

    230-40(1)    
    The methods that can be applied to take account of a gain or loss you make from a *financial arrangement are:


    (a) the accruals and realisation methods provided for in Subdivision 230-B ; or


    (b) the fair value method provided for in Subdivision 230-C ; or


    (c) the foreign exchange retranslation method provided for in Subdivision 230-D ; or


    (d) the hedging financial arrangement method provided for in Subdivision 230-E ; or


    (e) the method of relying on your financial reports provided for in Subdivision 230-F ; or


    (f) a balancing adjustment provided for in Subdivision 230-G .

    Note:

    The methods referred to in paragraphs (b) to (e) only apply if you make an election under the relevant Subdivision and you must meet certain requirements before you can make such an election.


    230-40(2)    
    A gain or loss is not taken into account under any of the methods referred to in paragraphs (1)(a), (b), (c) and (e) to the extent to which it is taken into account under the method referred to in paragraph (1)(f) (balancing adjustment).

    230-40(3)    
    A gain or loss is not taken into account under the method referred to in paragraph (1)(f) (balancing adjustment) to the extent to which it is taken into account under the method referred to in paragraph (1)(d) (hedging financial arrangement method).

    Note:

    The hedging financial arrangement method may take some account of the gain or loss by reference to the balancing adjustment method (see subsection 230-300(5) ).



    Elections override accruals and realisation methods

    230-40(4)    
    Subdivision 230-B (accruals and realisation method) does not apply to a gain or loss you make from a *financial arrangement:


    (a) to the extent that Subdivision 230-C (fair value method) applies to the gain or loss; or

    Note:

    See subsection (5) of this section and subsection 230-230(4) .


    (b) to the extent that Subdivision 230-D (foreign exchange retranslation method) applies to the gain or loss; or


    (c) to the extent that Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies to the arrangement; or


    (d) if Subdivision 230-F (method of relying on financial reports) applies to the arrangement; or


    (e) if the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc.).



    Priorities among election methods

    230-40(5)    
    Subdivision 230-C (fair value method) does not apply to a gain or loss you make from a *financial arrangement:


    (a) to the extent that Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies to the arrangement; or


    (b) if Subdivision 230-F (method of relying on financial reports) applies to the arrangement.

    230-40(6)    
    Subdivision 230-D (foreign exchange retranslation method) does not apply to a gain or loss you make from a *financial arrangement:


    (a) if Subdivision 230-C (fair value method) applies to the arrangement; or


    (b) to the extent that Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies to the arrangement; or


    (c) if Subdivision 230-F (method of relying on financial reports) applies to the arrangement.

    230-40(7)    
    Subdivision 230-F (method of relying on financial reports) does not apply to a gain or loss you make from a *financial arrangement to the extent that Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies to the arrangement.

    Financial arrangement concept

    SECTION 230-45   Financial arrangement  

    230-45(1)    
    You have a financial arrangement if you have, under an *arrangement:


    (a) a *cash settlable legal or equitable right to receive a *financial benefit; or


    (b) a cash settlable legal or equitable obligation to provide a financial benefit; or


    (c) a combination of one or more such rights and/or one or more such obligations;

    unless:


    (d) you also have under the arrangement one or more legal or equitable rights to receive something and/or one or more legal or equitable obligations to provide something; and


    (e) for one or more of the rights and/or obligations covered by paragraph (d):


    (i) the thing that you have the right to receive, or the obligation to provide, is not a financial benefit; or

    (ii) the right or obligation is not cash settlable; and


    (f) the one or more rights and/or obligations covered by paragraph (e) are not insignificant in comparison with the right, obligation or combination covered by paragraph (a), (b) or (c).

    The right, obligation or combination covered by paragraph (a), (b) or (c) constitutes the financial arrangement.

    Note 1:

    Whether your rights and/or obligations under an arrangement constitute a financial arrangement can change over time depending on changes either to the terms of the arrangement or external circumstances (such as particular rights or obligations under the arrangement being satisfied by the parties). For example, a contract may provide for the transfer of a boat in 6 months time and payment of the contract price at the end of 2 years. Until the boat is delivered, there is no financial arrangement because of the operation of paragraphs (d), (e) and (f) above. Once the boat is delivered, there is a financial arrangement because those paragraphs are no longer applicable.

    Note 2:

    The operative provisions of this Division do not apply to all financial arrangements, and only apply partially to some: see the exceptions in Subdivision 230-H .

    Note 3:

    There are some rules in this Division that tell you what happens if an arrangement ceases to be a financial arrangement (see Subdivision 230-G and section 230-505 ).


    230-45(2)    
    A right you have to receive, or an obligation you have to provide, a *financial benefit is cash settlable if, and only if:


    (a) the benefit is money or a *money equivalent; or


    (b) in the case of a right - you intend to satisfy or settle it by receiving money or a money equivalent or by starting to have, or ceasing to have, another *financial arrangement; or


    (c) in the case of an obligation - you intend to satisfy or settle it by providing money or a money equivalent or by starting to have, or ceasing to have, another financial arrangement; or


    (d) you have a practice of satisfying or settling similar rights or obligations as mentioned in paragraph (b) or (c) (whether or not you intend to satisfy or settle the right or obligation in that way); or


    (e) you deal with the right or obligation, or with similar rights or obligations, in order to generate a profit from short-term fluctuations in price, from a dealer ' s margin, or from both; or


    (f) none of paragraphs (a) to (e) applies but you satisfy subsection (3); or


    (g) you are able to settle the right or obligation as mentioned in paragraph (b) or (c) (whether or not you intend to satisfy or settle the right or obligation in that way) and you do not have, as your sole or dominant purpose for entering into the arrangement under which you are to receive or provide the financial benefit, the purpose of receiving or delivering the financial benefit as part of your expected purchase, sale or usage requirements.

    A reference in paragraph (b) or (c) to a financial arrangement does not include a reference to something that is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 .

    Note:

    Examples of dealing of the kind covered by paragraph (e) are:

  • (a) dealing with the right or obligation, or similar rights or obligations, on a frequent basis, a short-term basis or on a frequent and short-term basis; and
  • (b) acquiring the right or obligation, or similar rights or obligations, and managing the resulting risk by entering into offsetting arrangements that provide a profit margin.

  • 230-45(3)    
    You satisfy this subsection if:


    (a) the *financial benefit is readily convertible into money or a *money equivalent; and


    (b) there is a market for the financial benefit that has a high degree of liquidity; and


    (c) subsection (4) or (5) is satisfied.


    230-45(4)    


    This subsection is satisfied if, for the recipient of the *financial benefit, the amount of the money or *money equivalent referred to in paragraph (3)(a) is not subject to a substantial risk of substantial decrease in value.

    230-45(5)    


    This subsection is satisfied if your purpose, or one of your purposes, for entering into the arrangement under which you are to receive or provide the *financial benefit, is to receive or deliver the financial benefit:


    (a) to raise or provide finance; or


    (b) if paragraph (a) does not apply - so that it may be converted or liquidated into money or a money equivalent (other than as part of your expected purchase, sale or usage requirements).


    SECTION 230-50   Financial arrangement (equity interest or right or obligation in relation to equity interest)  

    230-50(1)    
    You also have a financial arrangement if you have an *equity interest. The equity interest constitutes the financial arrangement.

    230-50(2)    
    You also have a financial arrangement if:


    (a) you have, under an *arrangement:


    (i) a legal or equitable right to receive something that is a financialarrangement under this section; or

    (ii) a legal or equitable obligation to provide something that is a financial arrangement under this section; or

    (iii) a combination of one or more such rights and/or obligations; and


    (b) the right, obligation or combination does not constitute, or form part of, a financial arrangement under subsection 230-45(1) .

    The right, obligation or combination referred to in paragraph (a) constitutes the financial arrangement.

    Note 1:

    Paragraph 230-40(4)(e) prevents the accruals method or the realisation method being applied to something that is a financial arrangement under this section.

    Note 2:

    Subsection 230-270(1) prevents the retranslation method being applied to something that is a financial arrangement under this section.

    Note 3:

    Subsection 230-330(1) prevents the hedging method being applied to something that is a financial arrangement under this section.


    SECTION 230-55   Rights, obligations and arrangements (grouping and disaggregation rules)  


    Single right or obligation or multiple rights or obligations?

    230-55(1)    
    If you have a right to receive 2 or more *financial benefits, you are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have a separate right to receive each of those financial benefits.

    230-55(2)    
    If you have an obligation to provide 2 or more *financial benefits, you are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have a separate obligation to provide each of those financial benefits.

    230-55(3)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) apply for the avoidance of doubt.

    Matters relevant to determining what rights and/or obligations constitute particular arrangements

    230-55(4)    
    For the purposes of this Division, whether a number of rights and/or obligations are themselves an *arrangement or are 2 or more separate arrangements is a question of fact and degree that you determine having regard to the following:


    (a) the nature of the rights and/or obligations;


    (b) their terms and conditions (including those relating to any payment or other consideration for them);


    (c) the circumstances surrounding their creation and their proposed exercise or performance (including what can reasonably be seen as the purposes of one or more of the entities involved);


    (d) whether they can be dealt with separately or must be dealt with together;


    (e) normal commercial understandings and practices in relation to them (including whether they are regarded commercially as separate things or as a group or series that forms a whole);


    (f) the objects of this Division.

    In applying this subsection, have regard to the matters referred to in paragraphs (a) to (f) both in relation to the rights and/or obligations separately and in relation to the rights and/or obligations in combination with each other.

    Example 1:

    Your rights and obligations under a typical convertible note, including the right to convert the note into a share or shares, would constitute one arrangement.

    Example 2:

    Your rights and obligations under a typical price-linked or index-linked bond would constitute one arrangement.

    Note 1:

    If you raised funds by means of a contract that you would not have entered into without entering into another contract, and neither contract could be assigned to a third party without the other also being assigned, this would tend to indicate that your rights and obligations under the 2 contracts together constitute one arrangement.

    Note 2:

    If the commercial effect of your individual rights and/or obligations in a group or series cannot be understood without reference to the group or series as a whole, this would tend to indicate that all of your rights and/or obligations in the group or series together constitute one arrangement.


    General rules

    SECTION 230-60   When financial benefit provided or received under financial arrangement  


    Financial benefit provided under financial arrangement

    230-60(1)    
    You are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have (or to have had) an obligation to provide a *financial benefit under a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you have (or had) an obligation to provide the financial benefit in relation to the arrangement; and


    (b) the financial benefit would not otherwise be treated as one that you have (or had) an obligation to provide under the arrangement; and


    (c) the financial benefit plays an integral role in determining:


    (i) whether you make a gain or loss from the arrangement; or

    (ii) the amount of such a gain or loss.

    Paragraph (a) applies even if the entity to which you provide the financial benefit is not a party to the arrangement.

    Note:

    This means that the financial benefits you provide to acquire the financial arrangement (whether to the issuer, a previous holder or a third party) are taken to be financial benefits you provide under the arrangement. The financial benefits you provide may include, for example, fees paid or the forgoing of rights to receive a financial benefit.



    Financial benefit received under financial arrangement

    230-60(2)    
    You are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have (or to have had) a right to receive a *financial benefit under a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you have (or had) a right to receive the financial benefit in relation to the arrangement; and


    (b) the financial benefit would not otherwise be treated as one that you have (or had) a right to receive under the arrangement; and


    (c) the financial benefit plays an integral role in determining:


    (i) whether you make a gain or loss from the arrangement; or

    (ii) the amount of such a gain or loss.

    Paragraph (a) applies even if the entity that provides the financial benefit is not a party to the arrangement.

    Note:

    The financial benefits you receive may include, for example, the waiving of an obligation you have to provide a financial benefit.


    SECTION 230-65   Amount of financial benefit relating to more than one financial arrangement etc.  

    230-65(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a *financial benefit plays the integral role mentioned in paragraph 230-60(1)(c) or (2)(c) in relation to a *financial arrangement; and


    (b) either or both of the following apply:


    (i) the financial benefit plays that role in relation to one or more other financial arrangements;

    (ii) the financial benefit is provided or received for one or more other things that are not financial arrangements.

    230-65(2)    
    For the purposes of this Division, determine the amount of the *financial benefit that plays that role in relation to a particular *financial arrangement by apportioning the actual amount of the financial benefit, on a reasonable basis, between:


    (a) that financial arrangement; and


    (b) each other financial arrangement (if any) in relation to which the benefit plays that role; and


    (c) each other thing (if any) mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(ii).

    SECTION 230-70   Apportionment when financial benefit received or right ceases  

    230-70(1)    
    Apply subsection (2) in working out whether you make, or will make, a gain or loss (and the amount of the gain or loss) at a time when:


    (a) you receive a particular *financial benefit under a *financial arrangement; or


    (b) one of your rights under a financial arrangement ceases.

    The gain or loss is to be calculated in nominal (and not *present value) terms.


    230-70(2)    


    You must have regard to the extent to which the *financial benefits that you have provided, or are to provide or might provide, under the *financial arrangement are reasonably attributable, at the time mentioned in subsection (1), to the benefit or right referred to in paragraph (1)(a) or (b).

    230-70(3)    
    Any attribution made under subsection (2) must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles that properly take into account:


    (a) the nature of the rights and obligations under the *financial arrangement; and


    (b) the risks associated with each *financial benefit, right and obligation under the arrangement; and


    (c) the time value of money.

    230-70(4)    
    (Repealed by No 85 of 2013)


    Note:

    Generally, no financial benefit you have provided, or are to provide or might provide, under a financial arrangement is reasonably attributable to an amount you receive that is in the nature of interest.

    SECTION 230-75   Apportionment when financial benefit provided or obligation ceases  

    230-75(1)    
    Apply subsection (2) in working out whether you make, or will make, a gain or loss (and the amount of the gain or loss) at a time when:


    (a) you provide a particular *financial benefit under the *financial arrangement; or


    (b) one of your obligations under a financial arrangement ceases.

    The gain or loss is to be calculated in nominal (and not *present value) terms.


    230-75(2)    


    You must have regard to the extent to which the *financial benefits that you have received, or are to receive or might receive, under the *financial arrangement are reasonably attributable, at the time mentioned in subsection (1), to the benefit or obligation referred to in paragraph (1)(a) or (b).

    230-75(3)    
    Any attribution made under subsection (2) must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles that properly take into account:


    (a) the nature of the rights and obligations under the *financial arrangement; and


    (b) the risks associated with each *financial benefit, right and obligation under the arrangement; and


    (c) the time value of money.

    230-75(4)    
    (Repealed by No 85 of 2013)


    Note:

    Generally, no financial benefit you have received, or are to receive or might receive, under a financial arrangement is reasonably attributable to an amount you provide that is in the nature of interest.

    SECTION 230-80   Consistency in working out gains or losses (integrity measure)  


    Object of section

    230-80(1)    
    The object of this section is to stop you obtaining an inappropriate tax benefit from not working out your gains and losses in a consistent manner.

    Consistent treatment for particular financial arrangement

    230-80(2)    
    If:


    (a) this Division provides that a particular method applies to gains or losses you have from a *financial arrangement; and


    (b) that method allows you to choose the particular manner in which you apply that method;

    you must use that manner consistently for the arrangement for all income years.



    Consistent treatment for financial arrangements of essentially the same nature

    230-80(3)    
    If:


    (a) this Division provides that a particular method applies to gains or losses you have from 2 or more *financial arrangements; and


    (b) that method allows you to choose the particular manner in which you apply that method;

    you must use that same manner consistently for all of those financial arrangements that are essentially of the same nature.


    230-80(4)    


    Subsection (3) does not require you to use that same manner consistently for:


    (a) a * financial arrangement that you start to have on or after the time a * Commonwealth law that amends the method is made; and


    (b) a financial arrangement that you start to have before that time;

    if:


    (c) the Commonwealth law allows you to choose to apply the method in a particular manner (being a manner in which you are not, apart from the Commonwealth law, allowed to apply the method); and


    (d) the inconsistency is entirely due to you choosing to apply the method in that manner to the financial arrangement mentioned in paragraph (a).


    SECTION 230-85 

    230-85   Rights and obligations include contingent rights and obligations  


    To avoid doubt:


    (a) a right is treated as a right for the purposes of this Division even if it is subject to a contingency; and


    (b) an obligation is treated as an obligation for the purposes of this Division even if it is subject to a contingency.

    Subdivision 230-B - The accruals/realisation methods  

    Guide to Subdivision 230-B

    SECTION 230-90   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision applies the accruals method to determine the amount and timing of gains and losses from a financial arrangement if they are sufficiently certain for such accrual to be done.

    This Subdivision applies the realisation method to determine the amount and timing of gains and losses if they are not sufficiently certain to be dealt with under the accruals method.

    If the accruals method is applied to a gain or loss on the basis of an estimate of a financial benefit and the benefit when received or provided is more or less than the estimate, a balancing adjustment is made to correct for the underestimate or overestimate.

    If the accruals method is being applied to gains and losses from the arrangement and there is a material change to the arrangement, or the circumstances in which it operates, a reassessment is made of whether the accruals method or the realisation method should apply to gains and losses from the arrangement.

    A change in circumstances may also cause a re-estimation of gains and losses that the accruals method is being applied to.

    Objects of Subdivision

    SECTION 230-95  

    230-95   Objects of this Subdivision  


    The objects of this Subdivision are:


    (a) to properly recognise gains and losses from *financial arrangements by allocating them to appropriate periods of time; and


    (b) to reduce compliance costs by reflecting commercial accounting concepts where appropriate; and


    (c) to minimise tax deferral.

    When accruals method or realisation method applies

    SECTION 230-100   When accruals method or realisation method applies  


    When accruals method applies and when realisation method applies

    230-100(1)    
    This section tells you when to apply the accruals method and when to apply the realisation method if this Subdivision applies to gains and losses from a *financial arrangement.

    Accruals method - sufficiently certain overall gain or loss at start time

    230-100(2)    


    The accruals method provided for in this Subdivision applies to a gain or loss you have from a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the gain or loss is an overall gain or loss from the arrangement; and


    (b) the gain or loss is sufficiently certain at the time when you start to have the arrangement; and


    (c) you choose to apply the accruals method to the gain or loss, or subsection (4) applies to the gain or loss.

    Note:

    Subsection 230-105(1) tells you when you have a sufficiently certain overall gain or loss.



    Accruals method - sufficiently certain particular gain or loss

    230-100(3)    


    The accruals method provided for in this Subdivision also applies to a gain or loss you have from a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the gain or loss arises from a *financial benefit that you are to receive or are to provide under the arrangement; and


    (b) the gain or loss:


    (i) is sufficiently certain before or at the time when you start to have the arrangement and before you are to receive or provide the benefit; or

    (ii) becomes sufficiently certain after the time when you start to have the arrangement and before you are to receive or provide the benefit; and


    (c) the benefit has not already been taken into account in applying:


    (i) the accruals method provided for in this Subdivision; or

    (ii) the realisation method provided for in this Subdivision;
    to another gain or loss from the arrangement.

    This subsection has effect subject to subsection (4).

    Note:

    Subsection 230-110(1) tells you when you have a sufficiently certain gain or loss at a particular time.



    Accruals method - particular gain or loss becomes sufficiently certain

    230-100(3A)    


    The accruals method provided for in this Subdivision also applies to a gain or loss you have from a * financial arrangement if:


    (a) the gain or loss arises from a * financial benefit that you are to receive or are to provide under the arrangement; and


    (b) the gain or loss becomes sufficiently certain at the time you receive or provide the benefit; and


    (c) at least part of the period over which the gain or loss would be spread under that method (assuming that method applied) occurs after the time you receive or provide the benefit.

    This subsection has effect subject to subsection (4).

    Note 1:

    Subsection 230-110(1) tells you when you have a sufficiently certain gain or loss at a particular time.

    Note 2:

    For the period over which the gain or loss would be spread, see subsections 230-130(3) to (5) .



    Accruals method - particular gain or loss from qualifying security

    230-100(4)    


    Subsection (3) or (3A) does not apply to a gain or loss that you have from a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you are:


    (i) an individual; or

    (ii) an entity (other than an individual) that satisfies subsection 230-455(2) , (3) or (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and


    (b) the arrangement is a *qualifying security; and


    (c) you have not made an election under subsection 230-455(7) .



    Realisation method - gain or loss not sufficiently certain

    230-100(5)    


    The realisation method provided for in this Subdivision applies to a gain or loss that you have from a *financial arrangement if the accruals method provided for in this Subdivision does not apply to that gain or loss.
    Note:

    Section 230-180 tells you how to apply the realisation method to the gain or loss.


    SECTION 230-105   Sufficiently certain overall gain or loss  

    230-105(1)    
    You have a sufficiently certain overall gain or loss from a *financial arrangement at the time when you start to have the arrangement only if it is sufficiently certain at that time that you will make an overall gain or loss from the arrangement of:


    (a) a particular amount; or


    (b) at least a particular amount.

    The amount of the gain or loss is the amount referred to in paragraph (a) or (b).

    Note:

    Sections 230-70 and 230-75 (about apportionment of financial benefits) only apply in working out whether you make, or will make, a gainor loss (and the amount of the gain or loss) when particular events happen. They do not apply in working out, at the time when you start to have a financial arrangement, whether it is sufficiently certain that you will make an overall gain or loss from the arrangement.


    230-105(2)    
    In applying subsection (1), you must:


    (a) assume that you will continue to have the *financial arrangement for the rest of its life; and


    (b) have regard to the extent of the risk that a *financial benefit that you are not sufficiently certain to provide or receive under the arrangement may reduce the amount of the gain or loss.

    SECTION 230-110   Sufficiently certain gain or loss from particular event  

    230-110(1)    


    You have a sufficiently certain gain or loss from a *financial arrangement at a particular time if it is sufficiently certain at that time that you make, or will make, a gain or loss from the arrangement of:


    (a) a particular amount; or


    (b) at least a particular amount;

    when one of the following occurs:


    (c) you receive a particular *financial benefit under the arrangement or one of your rights under the arrangement ceases;


    (d) you provide a particular financial benefit under the arrangement or one of your obligations under the arrangement ceases.

    The amount of the gain or loss is the amount referred to in paragraph (a) or (b).


    230-110(2)    
    In applying subsection (1) to work out whether you have a sufficiently certain gain or loss at a particular time:


    (a) have regard to the extent of the risk that a *financial benefit that you are not sufficiently certain to provide or receive under the arrangement may reduce the amount of the gain or loss, and the extent to which such a financial benefit is, for the purposes of subsection 230-70(2) or 230-75(2) , reasonably attributable to the benefit, right or obligation mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) or (d) of this section at the time mentioned in subsection (1); and


    (b) disregard any financial benefit that has already been taken into account, under subsection 230-105(1) , in working out, at the time when you started to have the arrangement, the amount of a sufficiently certain overall gain or loss from the * financial arrangement to which the accruals method applies; and


    (c) disregard any financial benefit (or that part of any financial benefit) that has already been taken into account in working out the amount of a sufficiently certain gain or loss from the *financial arrangement under subsection (1).

    Note:

    Sections 230-70 and 230-75 allow you to apportion financial benefits provided and financial benefits received in working out the amount of a gain or loss.


    SECTION 230-115   Sufficiently certain financial benefits  

    230-115(1)    


    In deciding for the purposes of this Subdivision whether it is sufficiently certain at a particular time that you make, or will make, a gain or loss from a *financial arrangement:


    (a) have regard only to:


    (i) *financial benefits that you are sufficiently certain to receive; and

    (ii) financial benefits that you are sufficiently certain to provide; and


    (b) have regard to those financial benefits only to the extent that the amount or value of the benefits is, at that time, fixed or determinable with reasonable accuracy.

    Note:

    The particular time may be the time at which you start to have the arrangement.


    230-115(2)    
    A *financial benefit that you are to receive or provide is to be treated as one that you are sufficiently certain to receive or to provide only if:


    (a) it is reasonably expected that you will receive or provide the financial benefit (assuming that you will continue to have the *financial arrangement for the rest of its life); and


    (b) at least some of the amount or value of the benefit is, at that time, fixed or determinable with reasonable accuracy.

    230-115(3)    
    In applying subsection (2) to the *financial benefit:


    (a) you must have regard to:


    (i) the terms and conditions of the *financial arrangement; and

    (ii) accepted pricing and valuation techniques; and

    (iii) the economic or commercial substance and effect of the arrangement; and

    (iv) the contingencies that attach to the other financial benefits that are to be provided or received under the arrangement; and


    (b) you must treat the financial benefit as if it were not contingent if it is appropriate to do so having regard to the contingencies that attach to the other financial benefits that are to be received or provided under the arrangement.

    230-115(4)    
    In applying paragraph (2)(b) at a particular time (the reference time ) to a *financial benefit that depends on a variable that is based on:


    (a) an interest rate; or


    (b) a rate that solely or primarily reflects the time value of money; or


    (c) a rate that solely or primarily reflects a consumer price index; or


    (d) a rate that solely or primarily reflects an index prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph;

    you must assume that that variable will continue to have the value it has at the reference time.


    230-115(5)    
    Despite subsection (4), in applying paragraph (2)(b) at a particular time to a *financial benefit that depends on a rate of change to a variable that is based on:


    (a) a rate that solely or primarily reflects a consumer price index; or


    (b) a rate that solely or primarily reflects an index prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph;

    you must assume that the rate of change to that variable will continue to be the rate of change that is current at that time.


    230-115(6)    
    If subsection (4) or (5) applies to a gain or loss and you are determining the amount of the gain or loss at a particular time, you must also assume that that variable will continue to have the value that it has at that time.

    230-115(7)    
    Subsections (4) and (5) do not limit paragraph (2)(b).

    230-115(8)    


    If all of the *financial benefits provided and received under the *financial arrangement are denominated in a particular *foreign currency, those financial benefits are not to be translated into:


    (a) your *applicable functional currency; or


    (b) if you do not have an applicable functional currency - Australian currency;

    for the purposes of applying subsection (2) to the arrangement.


    230-115(9)    
    To avoid doubt:


    (a) a *financial benefit that you have already provided at a particular time is taken to be one that it is, at that time, a financial benefit that you are sufficiently certain to provide; and


    (b) a financial benefit that you have already received at a particular time is taken to be one that it is, at that time, a financial benefit that you are sufficiently certain to receive.

    SECTION 230-120   Financial arrangements with notional principal  

    230-120(1)    
    This section applies to a *financial arrangement that you have if, in substance or effect, and having regard to the pricing, terms and conditions of the arrangement:


    (a) the arrangement consists of these things:


    (i) a leg, the *financial benefits to be provided or received in respect of which are calculated by reference to, or are reasonably related to, a notional principal;

    (ii) another leg, the financial benefits to be provided or received in respect of which also are calculated by reference to, or are reasonably related to, a notional principal;

    (iii) if the arrangement includes one or more other things - those things; and


    (b) when you start to have the arrangement, the value of the notional principal in relation to one leg is equal to the value of the notional principal in relation to the other leg; and


    (c) all or part of the notional principal in relation to each leg is provided or received at a time, regardless of whether that time is different in relation to each leg.

    Example:

    A swap contract.


    230-120(2)    
    To avoid doubt, the *financial benefits mentioned in subparagraphs (1)(a)(i) and (ii), and the notional principal in relation to each leg, need not actually be provided or received.

    230-120(3)    
    In applying this Subdivision to the *financial arrangement:


    (a) work out the *financial benefits from the arrangement as follows:


    (i) work out the financial benefits from each thing of which the arrangement consists separately from the financial benefits from each other thing of which the arrangement consists;

    (ii) ensure that results under subparagraph (i) are consistent with the timing and amount of financial benefits to be actually provided or received under the arrangement; and


    (b) work out your gains and losses from the arrangement as follows:


    (i) work out the gains and losses from each thing of which the arrangement consists separately from the gains and losses from each other thing of which the arrangement consists;

    (ii) treat the gains and losses mentioned in subparagraph (i) for all of those things as your gains and losses from the arrangement; and


    (c) in working out a gain or loss from a thing for the purposes of subparagraph (b)(i), and, if the accruals method applies to the gain or loss, how it is to be spread and allocated:


    (i) if the thing is a leg - take into account the amount of the notional principal at a time and in a manner that properly reflects the way in which the financial benefits in respect of that leg are calculated; and

    (ii) if the thing is not a leg - take into account an amount relevant to the thing at a time and in a manner that properly reflects the way in which the financial benefits in respect of that thing are calculated.

    The accruals method

    SECTION 230-125  

    230-125   Overview of the accruals method  


    If the accruals method applies to a gain or loss you have from a *financial arrangement:


    (a) you use section 230-130 to work out the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread; and


    (b) you use section 230-135 to work out how to allocate the gain or loss to particular intervals within the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread; and


    (c) if an interval to which part of the gain or loss is allocated straddles 2 income years, you use section 230-170 to work out how to allocate that part of the gain or loss allocated between those 2 income years.

    SECTION 230-130   Applying accruals method to work out period over which gain or loss is to be spread  


    Period over which overall gain or loss is to be spread

    230-130(1)    
    If you have a sufficiently certain overall gain or loss from a *financial arrangement under subsection 230-105(1) , the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread is the period that:


    (a) starts when you start to have the arrangement; and


    (b) ends when you will cease to have the arrangement.

    In applying paragraph (b), you must assume that you will continue to have the arrangement for the rest of its life.


    230-130(2)    
    (Repealed by No 85 of 2013)



    Period over which particular gain or loss is to be spread

    230-130(3)    
    If you have a sufficiently certain gain or loss from a *financial arrangement under subsection 230-110(1) , the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread is the period to which the gain or loss relates. Have regard to the pricing, terms and conditions of the arrangement in working out the period to which the gain or loss relates. This subsection has effect subject to subsections (4) and (5).

    230-130(4)    
    The start of the period over which a gain or loss to which subsection (3) applies is to be spread must:


    (a) not start earlier than the time when you start to have the *financial arrangement; and


    (b) other than in the case of a gain or loss to which subsection 230-100(3A) or subsection (4A) of this section applies - not start earlier than the start of the income year during which it becomes sufficiently certain that you will make the gain or loss.


    230-130(4A)    


    Thissubsection applies to a gain or loss to which subsection (3) applies, if:


    (a) there is an impairment (within the meaning of the * accounting principles) of:


    (i) the * financial arrangement; or

    (ii) a financial asset or financial liability that forms part of the arrangement; and


    (b) because of the impairment, you make a reassessment under section 230-185 in relation to the arrangement; and


    (c) you determine on the reassessment that the gain or loss is not sufficiently certain (whether or not the gain or loss was sufficiently certain before the reassessment); and


    (d) there is a reversal of the impairment loss (within the meaning of the accounting principles) that resulted from the impairment; and


    (e) because of the reversal, you make a reassessment under section 230-185 in relation to the arrangement; and


    (f) you determine on the reassessment that the gain or loss has become sufficiently certain.

    Note:

    For the income years to which the gain or loss is allocated, see section 230-170 .


    230-130(5)    


    The end of the period over which a gain or loss to which subsection (3) applies is to be spread must not end later than the time when you will cease to have the * financial arrangement.

    SECTION 230-135   How gain or loss is spread  


    How to spread gain or loss

    230-135(1)    
    This section tells you how to spread a gain or loss to which the accruals method applies.

    Compounding accruals or approximation

    230-135(2)    
    The gain or loss is to be spread using:


    (a) compounding accruals; or


    (b) a method whose results approximate those obtained using the method referred to in paragraph (a) (having regard to the length of the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread).

    230-135(3)    
    The following subsections of this section clarify the way in which the gain or loss is to be spread in accordance with paragraph (2)(a).

    Intervals to which parts of gain or loss allocated

    230-135(4)    
    The intervals to which parts of the gain or loss are allocated must:


    (a) not exceed 12 months; and


    (b) all be of the same length.

    Paragraph (b) does not apply to the first and last intervals. These may be shorter than the other intervals.



    Fixing of amount and rate for interval

    230-135(5)    
    For each interval:


    (a) determine a rate of return; and


    (b) determine an amount to which you apply the rate of return.

    230-135(6)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (5)(b), in determining the amount to which you apply the rate of return for an interval, have regard to:


    (a) the amount or value; and


    (b) the timing;

    of *financial benefits that are to be taken into account in working out the amount of the gain or loss, and were provided or received by you during the interval.


    230-135(6A)    


    However, if there is only one * financial benefit that is to be taken into account in working out the amount of the gain or loss, then, for the purposes of paragraph (5)(b), in determining the amount to which you apply the rate of return, have regard to a notional principal:


    (a) by reference to which the financial benefit is calculated; or


    (b) which is reasonably related to the financial benefit.



    Assumption of continuing to hold arrangement for rest of its life

    230-135(7)    
    The gain or loss is to be spread assuming that you will continue to have the *financial arrangement for the rest of its life.

    Regard to be had to financial benefits provided or received in interval

    230-135(8)    
    In allocating the gain or loss to intervals, have regard to the *financial benefits to be provided or received in each of those intervals.

    SECTION 230-140   Method of spreading gain or loss - effective interest method  

    230-140(1)    
    This section clarifies that the method mentioned in subsection (2) of spreading gains and losses is a method covered by paragraph 230-135(2)(b) (methods approximating compounding accruals).

    230-140(2)    
    The method is the effective interest method mentioned in *accounting standard AASB 139 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection).

    230-140(3)    
    However, this section applies to a particular *financial arrangement you have only if:


    (a) in a case where there is a discount or premium under the arrangement - when you start to have the arrangement, the annually compounded rate of return applicable to the discount or premium does not exceed 1%; and


    (b) when you start to have the arrangement, neither the maximum life of the arrangement (as determined under the terms and conditions of the arrangement) nor the expected life of the arrangement exceeds:


    (i) unless subparagraph (ii) applies - 30 years; or

    (ii) if the regulations prescribe a different period for the purposes of this subparagraph - that period; and


    (c) each *financial benefit that you have an obligation to provide or a right to receive under the arrangement, and that gives rise to a gain or loss from the arrangement (other than a gain or loss that is attributable to any discount or premium):


    (i) relates to a period not exceeding 12 months; and

    (ii) is to be provided or received in the period to which it relates; and
    Note:

    Different financial benefits may relate to different periods.


    (d) you prepare a financial report for the year in which you start to have the arrangement; and


    (e) that financial report is:


    (i) prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(a) ; and

    (ii) audited in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(b) ; and


    (f) all gains and losses from the arrangement to which the accrual method applies are spread in a way that is consistent with that financial report.


    230-140(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (3)(a), assume that you will continue to have the arrangement for the rest of its expected life.

    SECTION 230-145   Application of effective interest method where differing income and accounting years  

    230-145(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year ); and


    (b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year ); and


    (c) your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and


    (d) both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:


    (i) prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(a) ; and

    (ii) audited in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(b) ; and


    (e) the auditor ' s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

    230-145(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph 230-140(3)(d) , treat yourself as having prepared a financial report for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement.

    230-145(3)    
    Work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the income year as follows:


    (a) firstly, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the first year in accordance with paragraph 230-140(3)(f) (treating the first year as an income year);


    (b) next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (a) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);


    (c) next, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the second year in accordance with paragraph 230-140(3)(f) (treating the second year as an income year);


    (d) next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (c) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);


    (e) next:


    (i) if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both gains - add them together to work out the gain from the arrangement for the income year; or

    (ii) if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both losses - add them together to work out the loss from the arrangement for the income year; or

    (iii) if one of the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) is a loss and the other is a gain - subtract the loss from the gain. If the result is positive, this is the gain from the arrangement for the income year. If the result is negative, this is the loss from the arrangement for the income year.

    230-145(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (d), work out how much of the gain or loss is attributable to the income year by:


    (a) using a methodology that is reasonable; and


    (b) using the same methodology for the first and second years.

    230-145(5)    
    (Repealed by No 136 of 2010 )


    SECTION 230-150   Election for portfolio treatment of fees  

    230-150(1)    
    You may make an election for an income year under this section if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for the income year in accordance with:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report - comparable standards for accounting made under a *foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law; and


    (b) the financial report is audited in accordance with:


    (i) the *auditing principles; or

    (ii) if the auditing principles do not apply to the auditing of the financial report - comparable standards for auditing made under a foreign law.

    230-150(2)    
    An election under this section is irrevocable.

    SECTION 230-155   Election for portfolio treatment of fees where differing income and accounting years  

    230-155(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year ); and


    (b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year ); and


    (c) your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and


    (d) both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:


    (i) prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-150(1)(a) ; and

    (ii) audited in accordance with paragraph 230-150(1)(b) ; and


    (e) the auditor ' s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

    230-155(2)    
    Treat yourself as eligible to make an election for the income year under subsection 230-150(1) .

    230-155(3)    
    Work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the income year as follows:


    (a) firstly, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the first year in accordance with subsections 230-160(3) and (4) or 230-165(3) and (4) (treating the first year as an income year);


    (b) next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (a) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);


    (c) next, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the second year in accordance with subsections 230-160(3) and (4) or 230-165(3) and (4) (treating the second year as an income year);


    (d) next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (c) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);


    (e) next:


    (i) if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both gains - add them together to work out the gain from the arrangement for the income year; or

    (ii) if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both losses - add them together to work out the loss from the arrangement for the income year; or

    (iii) if one of the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) is a loss and the other is a gain - subtract the loss from the gain. If the result is positive, this is the gain from the arrangement for the income year. If the result is negative, this is the loss from the arrangement for the income year.

    230-155(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (d), work out how much of the gain or loss is attributable to the income year by:


    (a) using a methodology that is reasonable; and


    (b) using the same methodology for the first and second years.

    230-155(5)    
    (Repealed by No 136 of 2010 )


    SECTION 230-160   Portfolio treatment of fees  

    230-160(1)    
    This section applies in relation to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you have made an election under section 230-150 in an income year; and


    (b) you start to have the financial arrangement in that income year or a later income year; and


    (c) the financial arrangement is part of a portfolio of similar financial arrangements; and


    (d) a gain or loss to which subsection 230-130(3) applies arises in part from fees in respect of the *financial arrangement; and


    (e) the fees play an integral role in determining the amount of the gain or loss; and


    (f) the net amount of the fees is not expected to be significant relative to an overall gain or loss from the arrangement.

    230-160(2)    
    For the purposes of this Division, split the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (1)(d) as follows:


    (a) to the extent that it arises from the fees, treat it as a gain or loss from the *financial arrangement (the fees gain or loss ) to which subsection 230-130(3) applies;


    (b) to the extent that it does not arise from the fees, treat it as a separate gain or loss from the financial arrangement to which subsection 230-130(3) applies.

    Note:

    The separate gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (b) may itself be split under subsection 230-165(2) (premium/discount gain or loss).



    Determination of period for fees gain or loss

    230-160(3)    
    The period over which the fees gain or loss is to be spread is the period that you determine to be the expected life of the portfolio, if:


    (a) the basis on which you determine the period accords with the spreading of the fees gain or loss for the purposes of the profit or loss statement of the financial report mentioned in paragraph 230-150(1)(a) ; and


    (b) the basis on which you determine the period is set and recorded before any fees in respect of the *financial arrangement fall due; and


    (c) the period can be justified objectively; and


    (d) the period is reasonable in the circumstances.

    Spreading the fees gain or loss

    230-160(4)    
    The method by which the fees gain or loss is to be spread is the method that you determine, if:


    (a) the basis on which you determine the method accords with the spreading of the fees gain or loss for the purposes of the profit or loss statement of the financial report mentioned in paragraph 230-150(1)(a) ; and


    (b) the method is determined before any fees in respect of the *financial arrangement fall due; and


    (c) the method can be justified objectively; and


    (d) the method is reasonable in the circumstances.

    230-160(5)    
    To avoid doubt, subsections (3) and (4) apply despite sections 230-130 and 230-135 .

    SECTION 230-165   Portfolio treatment of premiums and discounts for acquiring portfolio  

    230-165(1)    
    This section applies in relation to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you have made an election under section 230-150 in an income year; and


    (b) you start to have the financial arrangement in that income year or a later income year; and


    (c) the financial arrangement is part of a portfolio of similar financial arrangements; and


    (d) a gain or loss to which subsection 230-130(3) applies arises in part from a premium or discount in starting to have the portfolio; and


    (e) the gain or loss is not expected to be significant relative to the amount of the gain or loss on the portfolio.

    230-165(2)    
    For the purposes of this Division, split the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (1)(d) as follows:


    (a) to the extent that it arises from the premium or discount, treat it as a gain or loss from the *financial arrangement (the premium/discount gain or loss ) to which subsection 230-130(3) applies;


    (b) to the extent that it does not arise from the premium or discount, treat it as a separate gain or loss from the financial arrangement to which subsection 230-130(3) applies.

    Note:

    The separate gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (b) may itself be split under subsection 230-160(2) (portfolio fees gain or loss).



    Determination of period for premium/discount gain or loss

    230-165(3)    
    The period over which the premium/discount gain or loss is to be spread is the period that you determine to be the expected life of the portfolio, if:


    (a) the basis on which you determine the period accords with the spreading of the premium/discount gain or loss for the purposes of the profit or loss statement of the financial report mentioned in paragraph 230-150(1)(a) ; and


    (b) the basis on which you determine the period is set and recorded before you start to have the *financial arrangement; and


    (c) the period can be justified objectively; and


    (d) the period is reasonable in the circumstances.

    Spreading the premium/discount gain or loss

    230-165(4)    
    The method by which the premium/discount gain or loss is to be spread is the method that you determine, if:


    (a) the basis on which you determine the method accords with the spreading of the premium/discount gain or loss for the purposes of the profit or loss statement of the financial report mentioned in paragraph 230-150(1)(a) ; and


    (b) the method is determined before you start to have the *financial arrangement; and


    (c) the method can be justified objectively; and


    (d) the method is reasonable in the circumstances.

    230-165(5)    
    To avoid doubt, subsections (3) and (4) apply despite sections 230-130 and 230-135 .

    SECTION 230-170   Allocating gain or loss to income years  

    230-170(1)    
    You are taken, for the purposes of section 230-15 , to make, for an income year, a gain or loss equal to a part of a gain or loss if:


    (a) that part of the gain or loss is allocated to an interval under section 230-135 ; and


    (b) that interval falls wholly within that income year.

    230-170(2)    
    If:


    (a) a part of a gain or loss is allocated to an interval under section 230-135 ; and


    (b) that interval straddles 2 income years;

    you are taken, for purposes of section 230-15 , to make a gain or loss equal to so much of that part of the gain or loss as is allocated between those income years on a reasonable basis.


    230-170(2A)    


    Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a part of a gain or loss if:


    (a) subsection 230-100(3A) or 230-130(4A) applies to the gain or loss; and


    (b) that part of the gain or loss is allocated to an interval under section 230-135 ; and


    (c) that interval ends before or during the income year during which the gain or loss becomes sufficiently certain (as mentioned in paragraph 230-100(3A)(b) or 230-130(4A)(f) , whichever is applicable).

    Instead, you are taken, for the purposes of section 230-15 , to make, for that income year, a gain or loss equal to that part of that gain or loss.


    230-170(3)    
    If:


    (a) a *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group has a *financial arrangement; and


    (b) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the leaving time ); and


    (c) immediately after the leaving time, the head company no longer has the arrangement because the subsidiary member ceased to be a member of the group;

    an income year of the group is taken, for the purposes of applying this section to the group and the arrangement, to end at the leaving time.


    SECTION 230-172   Applying accruals method to loss resulting from impairment  

    230-172(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) there is an impairment (within the meaning of the * accounting principles) of:


    (i) a * financial arrangement; or

    (ii) a financial asset or financial liability that forms part of a financial arrangement; and


    (b) you make a loss from the financial arrangement as a result of the impairment; and


    (c) the accruals method applies to the loss.

    230-172(2)    
    You cannot deduct a loss you make for an income year under section 230-15 , to the extent that the loss results from the impairment (including as affected by any later reversal of the impairment loss (within the meaning of the * accounting principles) that resulted from the impairment).

    230-172(3)    
    Disregard subsection (2) for the purposes of paragraph (c) of step 1 of the method statement in subsection 230-445(1) .


    SECTION 230-175   Running balancing adjustments  


    Overestimate of financial benefit to be received

    230-175(1)    
    You are taken for the purposes of this Division to make a loss from a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) a provision of this Subdivision has applied on the basis that you were sufficiently certain, at a particular time, to receive a *financial benefit of, or of at least, a particular amount under the arrangement; and


    (b) when you receive the benefit (or the time comes for you to receive the benefit), the amount you receive (or are to receive) is nil or is less than the amount estimated.

    The amount of the loss is equal to the difference between the amount estimated and the amount you receive (or are to receive). You are taken to have made the loss for the income year in which you receive the benefit (or in which the time comes for you to receive the benefit).


    230-175(1A)    


    Subsection (1) does not apply to the extent that the difference results from:


    (a) an impairment (within the meaning of the * accounting principles) of:


    (i) the * financial arrangement; or

    (ii) a financial asset or financial liability that forms part of the arrangement; or


    (b) you writing off, as a bad debt, a right to a * financial benefit (or a part of a financial benefit).



    Underestimate of financial benefit to be received

    230-175(2)    
    You are taken for the purposes of this Division to make a gain from a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) a provision of this Subdivision has applied on the basis that you were sufficiently certain at a particular time to receive a *financial benefit of, or of at least, a particular amount under the arrangement; and


    (b) when you receive the benefit, or the time comes for you to receive the benefit, the amount you receive, or are to receive, is more than the amount estimated.

    The amount of the gain is equal to the difference between the amount estimated and the amount you receive or are to receive. You are taken to have made that gain in the income year in which you receive the benefit or in which the time comes for you to receive the benefit.


    230-175(2A)    


    Subsection (2) does not apply to the extent that the difference results from the reversal of an impairment loss (within the meaning of the * accounting principles) that resulted from an impairment (within the meaning of the accounting principles) of:


    (a) the * financial arrangement; or


    (b) a financial asset or financial liability that forms part of the arrangement.



    Overestimate of financial benefit to be provided

    230-175(3)    
    You are taken for the purposes of this Division to make a gain from a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) a provision of this Subdivision has applied on the basis that you were sufficiently certain at a particular time to provide a *financial benefit of, or of at least, a particular amount under the arrangement; and


    (b) when you provide the benefit, or the time comes for you to provide the benefit, the amount you provide, or are to provide, is nil or is less than the amount estimated.

    The amount of the gain is equal to the difference between the amount estimated and the amount you provide or are to provide. You are taken to have made that gain in the income year in which you provide the benefit or in which the time comes for you to provide the benefit.



    Underestimate of financial benefit to be provided

    230-175(4)    
    You are taken for the purposes of this Division to make a loss from a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) a provision of this Subdivision has applied on the basis that you were sufficiently certain at a particular time to provide a *financial benefit of, or of at least, a particular amount under the arrangement; and


    (b) when you provide the benefit, or the time comes for you to provide the benefit, the amount you are to provide is more than the estimated amount referred to in paragraph (a).

    The amount of the loss is equal to the difference between the amount estimated and the amount you are to provide. You are taken to have made that loss in the income year in which you provide the benefit or in which the time comes for you to provide the benefit.


    Realisation method

    SECTION 230-180   Realisation method  

    230-180(1)    
    If a gain or loss is to be taken into account using the realisation method, you are taken, for the purposes of section 230-15 , to make the gain or loss for the income year in which the gain or loss occurs.

    Note:

    Sections 230-70 and 230-75 allow you to apportion financial benefits provided and financial benefits received in working out the amount of the gain or loss.


    230-180(2)    


    For the purposes of subsection (1), a gain or loss from a * financial arrangement is taken to occur at:


    (a) if the last of the * financial benefits, rights and obligations taken into account in determining the amount of the gain or loss is a financial benefit - the time the financial benefit:


    (i) is provided; or

    (ii) if the financial benefit is not provided at the time when it is due to be provided under the arrangement and it is reasonable to expect that the financial benefit will be provided - is due to be provided; or


    (b) if the last of the financial benefits, rights and obligations taken into account in determining the amount of the gain or loss is a right to receive a financial benefit or an obligation to provide a financial benefit - the time:


    (i) if the right or obligation ceases before the financial benefit is provided - the right or obligation ceases; or

    (ii) otherwise - the financial benefit is provided.

    This subsection has effect subject to subsection (3).


    230-180(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), you make a loss from a *financial arrangement from writing off, as a bad debt, a right to a *financial benefit (or a part of a financial benefit) if:


    (a) the financial benefit was taken into account in working out the amount of a gain from the arrangement and the gain has been included in your assessable income under this Division; or


    (b) the right is one in respect of money that you lent in the ordinary course of your *business of lending money; or


    (c) the right is one that you bought in the ordinary course of your business of lending money.

    230-180(4)    
    The loss referred to in subsection (3) occurs when you write off the right to the *financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit) as a bad debt.

    230-180(5)    
    The amount of the loss referred to in subsection (3) is:


    (a) if paragraph (3)(a) applies - so much of the gain referred to in that paragraph as is reasonably attributable to the *financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit); or


    (b) if paragraph (3)(b) applies - the amount of the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit); or


    (c) if paragraph (3)(c) applies - the amount of the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit) but only up to the value of the financial benefit you provided to acquire the right to the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit).

    230-180(6)    
    For the purposes of this Act, a deduction for the loss referred to in subsection (3) is to be treated as a deduction of a bad debt.

    Note:

    Various provisions in this Act and the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 restrict the availability of deductions for bad debts and make provision in relation to the recoupment of amounts in relation to bad debts that have been written off. These provisions are set out in subsection 25-35(5) .


    Reassessment and re-estimation

    SECTION 230-185   Reassessment  

    230-185(1)    
    You must make a fresh assessment of which gains and losses from a *financial arrangement the accruals method should apply to, and which gains and losses from that arrangement the realisation method should apply to, if:


    (a) the accruals method, or the realisation method, provided for in this Subdivision applies to gains and losses from the arrangement; and


    (b) there is a material change to:


    (i) the terms and conditions of the arrangement; or

    (ii) circumstances that affect the arrangement.

    230-185(2)    
    Without limiting subsection (1), the following changes are material changes to the terms and conditions of, or circumstances that affect, the *financial arrangement:


    (a) a change to the terms or conditions of the arrangement in a way that alters the essential nature of the arrangement (for example, by altering it from a *debt interest to an *equity interest or from an equity interest to a debt interest);


    (b) a change to the terms or conditions of the arrangement in a way that materially affects the contingencies on which significant obligations and rights under the arrangement are dependent (for example, by introducing such a contingency or removing such a contingency);


    (c) a change in circumstances that makes something that:


    (i) materially affects significant obligations and rights under the arrangement; and

    (ii) was previously dependent on a contingency;
    no longer dependent on a contingency (because, for example, only one of a number of previously possible contingencies is realised);


    (d) a change to:


    (i) the terms on which credit is to be provided to an entity that is not a party to the arrangement; or

    (ii) the credit rating of an entity that is not a party to the arrangement;
    if a significant obligation or right under the arrangement is dependent on that credit being provided or that rating being maintained;


    (e) if the arrangement is, or includes, a financial asset or financial liability and you prepare your financial reports in accordance with:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report - comparable standards for accounting made under a *foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;
    a change to the terms or conditions of, or circumstances that affect, the arrangement that are sufficient for the financial asset or financial liability to be treated as impaired for the purposes of those principles or standards.

    230-185(3)    
    You do not need to make a reassessment under this section merely because of a change in the fair value of the *financial arrangement.

    SECTION 230-190   Re-estimation  


    When re-estimation necessary

    230-190(1)    
    You re-estimate a gain or loss from a *financial arrangement under subsection (5) if:


    (a) the accruals method applies to the gain or loss; and


    (b) circumstances arise that materially affect:


    (i) the amount or value; or

    (ii) the timing;
    of *financial benefits that were taken into account in working out the amount of the gain or loss; and


    (c) the circumstances do not give rise to a re-estimation under section 230-200 .


    (d) (Repealed by No 85 of 2013)


    230-190(2)    


    You must re-estimate the gain or loss as soon as reasonably practicable after you become aware of the circumstances referred to in paragraph (1)(b), if subsection (1) applies.

    230-190(3)    
    Without limiting subsection (1), the following are circumstances of the kind referred to in paragraph (1)(b):


    (a) a material change in market conditions that are relevant to the amount or value of the *financial benefits to be received or provided under the *financial arrangement;


    (b) cash flows that were previously estimated becoming known and the difference between the cash flows that become known and the cash flows that were previously estimates is not insignificant;


    (c) a right to, or a part of a right to, a financial benefit under the arrangement is written off as a bad debt;


    (d) you have made a reassessment under section 230-185 in relation to gains or losses under the arrangement and you have determined on the reassessment under that section that the accruals method should continue to apply to those gains or losses.

    230-190(3A)    


    You also re-estimate a gain or loss from a * financial arrangement under subsection (5) if:


    (a) the gain or loss is spread using the method referred to in paragraph 230-135(2)(b) in accordance with section 230-140 (effective interest method); and


    (b) you recalculate the effective interest rate in accordance with that method; and


    (c) the terms and conditions of the arrangement provide for reset dates to occur no more than 12 months apart; and


    (d) the maximum life of the arrangement (as determined under the terms and conditions of the arrangement) is more than 12 months.


    230-190(3B)    
    You must re-estimate the gain or loss at the relevant reset date if subsection (3A) applies.


    230-190(4)    
    You do not re-estimate the gain or loss from a *financial arrangement under subsection (5) merely because of a change in the credit rating, or the creditworthiness, of a party or parties to the arrangement.

    Nature of re-estimation

    230-190(5)    
    Making a re-estimation in relation to a gain or loss under this subsection involves:


    (a) a fresh determination of the amount of the gain or loss; and


    (b) a reapplication of the accruals method to the redetermined gain or loss to make a fresh allocation of the part of the redetermined gain or loss that has not already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made to intervals ending after the re-estimation is made.

    Basis for re-estimation

    230-190(6)    
    You may make the fresh allocation of the gain or loss under subsection (5) on these bases:


    (a) if you satisfy subsection (7) in relation to the *financial arrangement - by maintaining the rate of return being used and adjusting the amount to which you apply the rate of return to the present value of the estimated future cash flows discounted at the maintained rate of return;


    (b) in any case - by adjusting the rate of return and maintaining the amount to which the adjusted rate of return is to be applied.

    The object to be achieved by both bases is to allow you to bring the remainder of the gain or loss based on the new estimates properly to account over the remainder of the period over which you spread the gain or loss.

    Note:

    The amount referred to in paragraph (b) is the amount to which the previous rate of return was being applied immediately before the re-estimation.


    230-190(7)    
    You satisfy this subsection in relation to a *financial arrangement if every re-estimation you make under subsection (5) in relation to a gain or loss from the arrangement is made in accordance with:


    (a) financial reports of the kind referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) that are audited as referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(b) (regardless of whether Subdivision 230-F (reliance on financial reports method) is to apply to a particular financial arrangement); and


    (b) *accounting standard AASB 139 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph).


    230-190(8)    
    (Repealed by No 85 of 2013)


    230-190(9)    
    (Repealed by No 85 of 2013)


    230-190(10)    
    (Repealed by No 85 of 2013)


    SECTION 230-192   Re-estimation - impairments and reversals  

    230-192(1)    
    This section applies if the re-estimation mentioned in section 230-190 arises because of:


    (a) an impairment (within the meaning of the * accounting principles) of:


    (i) the * financial arrangement; or

    (ii) a financial asset or financial liability that forms part of the arrangement; or


    (b) a reversal of an impairment loss (within the meaning of the accounting principles) that resulted from such an impairment.

    230-192(2)    
    Despite paragraph 230-190(6)(a) , you must make the fresh allocation in accordance with paragraph 230-190(6)(b) .

    Losses non-deductible

    230-192(3)    
    You cannot deduct a loss you make for an income year under section 230-15 , to the extent that the loss results from:


    (a) the impairment (including as affected by any later reversal of the impairment loss that resulted from the impairment); or


    (b) the operation of subsection (7).

    230-192(4)    
    Disregard subsection (3) for the purposes of paragraph (c) of step 1 of the method statement in subsection 230-445(1) .

    Reversals

    230-192(5)    
    Subsections (7) and (8) apply to the part of the gain or loss that is to be reallocated in accordance with paragraph 230-190(6)(b) , if:


    (a) the fresh determination under paragraph 230-190(5)(a) that arose because of the reversal resulted in that part being a gain; and


    (b) there are losses that:


    (i) resulted from the impairment; and

    (ii) you could have deducted apart from subsection 230-172(2) or subsection (3) of this section.

    230-192(6)    
    Paragraph (5)(b) does not apply to a loss to the extent that:


    (a) the loss reflects the amount of a loss you make under paragraph 230-195(1)(b) or (c) ; and


    (b) the loss you make under paragraph 230-195(1)(b) or (c) relates to you writing off, as a bad debt, a right to receive a * financial benefit (or a part of a financial benefit).

    230-192(7)    
    Treat the fresh determination as having resulted in that part being a loss, if the total of the losses mentioned in paragraph (5)(b) of this section exceeds the amount of the gain mentioned in paragraph (5)(a). The amount of the loss is equal to the amount of the excess.

    230-192(8)    
    Otherwise, reduce the amount of that gain by the total of those losses.


    SECTION 230-195   Balancing adjustment if rate of return maintained on re-estimation  

    230-195(1)    
    If you make a fresh allocation of the gain or loss on the basis referred to in paragraph 230-190(6)(a) , you must make the following balancing adjustment:


    (a) if you re-estimate a gain and the amount to which you apply the rate of return increases - you make a gain from the *financial arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the increase;


    (b) if you re-estimate a gain and the amount to which you apply the rate of return decreases - you make a loss from the arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the decrease;


    (c) if you re-estimate a loss and the amount to which you apply the rate of return increases - you make a loss from the arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the increase;


    (d) if you re-estimate a loss and the amount to which you apply the rate of return decreases - you make a gain from the arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the decrease.

    230-195(2)    
    Subsection (3) applies if:


    (a) the re-estimation is made wholly or partly on the basis that you have written off, as a bad debt, a right to receive a *financial benefit (or a part of a financial benefit); and


    (b) the right:


    (i) is not one in respect of money that you lent in the ordinary course of your *business of lending money; and

    (ii) is not one that you bought in the ordinary course of your business of lending money.

    230-195(3)    
    The balancing adjustment to be made under paragraph (1)(b), to the extent that it relates to the writing off of the bad debt, must not exceed so much of the gain in relation to the *financial arrangement as:


    (a) has been assessed under this Division; and


    (b) is reasonably attributable to the *financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit).

    230-195(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies if:


    (a) the re-estimation is made wholly or partly on the basis that you have written off, as a bad debt, a right to receive a *financial benefit; and


    (b) the right is one that you bought in the ordinary course of your *business of lending money.

    230-195(5)    
    The balancing adjustment to be made under paragraph (1)(b), to the extent that it relates to the writing off of the bad debt, must not exceed the value of the *financial benefit you provided to acquire the right to the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit).

    230-195(6)    
    For the purposes of this Act, a deduction for the balancing adjustment referred to in subsection (3) is to be treated as a deduction of a bad debt.

    Note:

    Various provisions in this Act and the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 restrict the availability of deductions for bad debts and make provision in relation to the recoupment of amounts in relation to bad debts that have been written off. These provisions are set out in subsection 25-35(5) .


    SECTION 230-200   Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal  


    Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal

    230-200(1)    
    You also re-estimate a gain or loss from a *financial arrangement under subsection (2) if:


    (a) the accruals method applies to the gain or loss; and


    (b) a balancing adjustment is made in relation to the arrangement under Subdivision 230-G because you transfer to another entity:


    (i) a proportionate share of all of your rights and/or obligations under the arrangement; or

    (ii) a right or obligation that you have under the arrangement to a specifically identified *financial benefit; or

    (iii) a proportionate share of a right or obligation that you have under the arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit.

    You must re-estimate the gain or loss as soon as reasonably practicable after the transfer occurs.



    Nature of re-estimation

    230-200(2)    


    Making a re-estimation in relation to a gain or loss under this subsection involves:


    (a) a fresh determination of the amount of the gain or loss disregarding:


    (i) *financial benefits; and

    (ii) amounts of the gain or loss that have already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made;
    to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the proportionate share, or the right or obligation, referred to in paragraph (1)(b); and


    (b) a reapplication of the accruals method to the redetermined gain or loss to make a fresh allocation of the part of that gain or loss that has not already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made to intervals ending after the re-estimation is made.



    Basis for re-estimation

    230-200(3)    
    You make the fresh allocation of the gain or loss under subsection (2) by maintaining the rate of return being used and adjusting the amount to which you apply the rate of return to the present value of the estimated future cash flows discounted at the maintained rate of return. The object to be achieved by the fresh allocation is to allow you to bring the redetermined gain or loss properly to account over the remainder of the period over which you spread the gain or loss.

    Subdivision 230-C - Fair value method  

    SECTION 230-205  

    230-205   Objects of this Subdivision  


    The objects of this Subdivision are:


    (a) to allow you to align the tax treatment of gains and losses from *financial arrangements with the accounting treatment that applies where assets and liabilities are classified or designated as at fair value through profit or loss; and


    (b) to facilitate efficient price-making; and


    (c) to achieve the above objects without allowing you to obtain an inappropriate tax benefit.

    SECTION 230-210   Fair value election  


    Election

    230-210(1)    
    You may make a fair value election under this section if you are eligible under subsection (2) to make the election for the income year in which you make the election.

    Eligibility to make fair value election for an income year

    230-210(2)    
    You are eligible to make a fair value election for an income year if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for that income year in accordance with:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report - comparable standards for accounting made under a *foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law; and


    (b) the financial report is audited in accordance with:


    (i) the *auditing principles; or

    (ii) if the auditing principles do not apply to the auditing of the financial report - comparable standards for auditing made under a foreign law.
    Note:

    Section 230-500 allows regulations to be made specifying particular foreign accounting and auditing standards as ones that are to be treated as comparable with Australian accounting and auditing principles for the purposes of this Division.



    Election irrevocable

    230-210(3)    
    A *fair value election is irrevocable.

    Note:

    The election may cease to have effect, or cease to apply to a particular financial arrangement, under section 230-240 .


    SECTION 230-215   Fair value election where differing income and accounting years  

    230-215(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year ); and


    (b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year ); and


    (c) your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and


    (d) both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:


    (i) prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(a) ; and

    (ii) audited in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(b) ; and


    (e) the auditor ' s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

    230-215(2)    
    Treat yourself as eligible to make an election for the income year under subsection 230-210(2) .

    230-215(3)    
    Work out the gain or loss you make from the *financial arrangement for the income year as follows:


    (a) firstly, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the first year in accordance with section 230-230 (treating the first year as an income year);


    (b) next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (a) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);


    (c) next, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the second year in accordance with section 230-230 (treating the second year as an income year);


    (d) next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (c) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);


    (e) next:


    (i) if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both gains - add them together to work out the gain from the arrangement for the income year; or

    (ii) if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both losses - add them together to work out the loss from the arrangement for the income year; or

    (iii) if one of the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) is a loss and the other is a gain - subtract the loss from the gain. If the result is positive, this is the gain from the arrangement for the income year. If the result is negative, this is the loss from the arrangement for the income year.

    230-215(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (d), work out how much of the gain or loss is attributable to the income year by:


    (a) using a methodology that is reasonable; and


    (b) using the same methodology for the first and second years.

    230-215(5)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (4)(a), treat a methodology that attributes the gain or loss on a pro-rata basis as not being reasonable.

    SECTION 230-220   Financial arrangements to which fair value election applies  

    230-220(1)    
    A *fair value election applies in relation to *financial arrangements that:


    (a) are *Division 230 financial arrangements; and


    (b) are recognised in financial reports of the kind referred to in paragraph 230-210(2)(a) that are audited, or required to be audited, as referred to in paragraph 230-210(2)(b) ; and


    (c) are assets or liabilities that you are required (whether or not as a result of a choice you make) by:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report - comparable standards for accounting that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a *foreign law;
    to classify, designate or (in whole or in part) otherwise treat, in the financial reports, as at fair value through profit or loss; and


    (d) you start to have in the income year in which you make the election or in a later income year.

    This subsection has effect subject to section 230-225 .


    230-220(2)    
    If, but for this subsection, paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) would not be satisfied in relation to a *financial arrangement because the arrangement is an intra-group transaction for the purposes of:


    (a) *accounting standard AASB 127 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph); or


    (b) if that standard does not apply to the preparation of the financial report - a comparable accounting standard that applies to the preparation of the financial report under a *foreign law;

    paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.

    Note:

    Financial arrangements between members of a consolidated group or MEC group are not covered by this subsection because the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) operates to treat them as not being financial arrangements for the purposes of this Division.


    230-220(3)    
    If:


    (a) the *financial arrangement would not be a financial arrangement if the following provisions were disregarded:


    (i) Division 9A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which deals with offshore banking units);

    (ii) Part IIIB of that Act (which deals with Australian branches of foreign banks etc); and


    (b) paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) would be satisfied in relation to the financial arrangement if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities; and


    (c) the *fair value election is made by:


    (i) if section 121EB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies - the OBU mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section); or

    (ii) if section 160ZZW of that Act applies - the bank mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section);

    paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.


    SECTION 230-225   Financial arrangements to which election does not apply  

    230-225(1)    
    A *fair value election does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the arrangement is an *equity interest; and


    (b) you are the issuer of the equity interest.

    230-225(2)    
    A *fair value election does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you are:


    (i) an individual; or

    (ii) an entity (other than an individual) that satisfies subsection 230-455(2) , (3) or (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and


    (b) the arrangement is a *qualifying security; and


    (c) you have not made an election under subsection 230-455(7) .

    230-225(3)    
    A *fair value election does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the election is made by the *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group; and


    (b) the election specifies that the election is not to apply to financial arrangements in relation to *life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group; and


    (c) the arrangement is one that relates to the life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group.

    230-225(4)    
    A *fair value election does not apply to a *financial arrangement if the arrangement is associated with a business of a kind specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

    SECTION 230-230   Applying fair value method to gains and losses  

    230-230(1)    


    You make a gain or loss for an income year from a * financial arrangement to which a * fair value election applies if:


    (a) the principles or standards mentioned in paragraph 230-210(2)(a) require you to recognise a gain or loss in profit or loss for the income year from the asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) ; or


    (b) in the case of an arrangement to which subsection 230-220(2) applies - the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) would have required you to recognise a gain or loss in profit or loss for the year from the asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in paragraph 230-220(2)(b) ; or


    (c) in the case of an arrangement to which subsection 230-220(3) applies - the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) would have required you to recognise a gain or loss in profit or loss for the year from the asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities.

    Note:

    Subsection 230-40(7) provides that an election under Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) or Subdivision 230-F (method of relying on financial reports) may override a fair value election.


    230-230(1A)    


    The gain or loss you make is the gain or loss the principles or standards require, or would have required, you to recognise in profit or loss as mentioned in subsection (1).

    230-230(2)    
    Subsection (3) applies if:


    (a) a *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group has a *financial arrangement; and


    (b) a *fair value election applies to the arrangement; and


    (c) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the leaving time ); and


    (d) immediately after the leaving time, the head company no longer has the arrangement because the subsidiary member ceased to be a member of the group.

    230-230(3)    


    The gain or loss the group makes from the arrangement for the income year in which the leaving time occurs is taken to be the gain or loss that the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-210(2)(a) would require the group to recognise as at fair value through profit or loss for the income year from the asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) if:


    (a) the circumstances that existed in relation to the arrangement (including its value) immediately before the leaving time had continued to exist until the end of the income year; and


    (b) any circumstances that arise in relation to the financial arrangement after the leaving time were disregarded.



    Subdivision does not apply to extent gains or losses not recognised as at fair value

    230-230(4)    


    This Subdivision does not apply to a gain or loss you make from the * financial arrangement, to the extent:


    (a) you are required, as mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) , to otherwise treat as at fair value through profit and loss the assets or liabilities that the financial arrangement is; and


    (b) the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-210(2)(a) do not require you to recognise the gain or loss as at fair value through profit or loss.

    Note:

    See also subsection 230-40(5) .


    SECTION 230-235   Splitting financial arrangements into 2 financial arrangements  

    230-235(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *financial arrangement is constituted only in part by an asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) ; and


    (b) a *fair value election would apply to the arrangement if it were constituted solely by that asset or liability;

    the provisions of this Division (other than this section) apply to the arrangement as if it were instead 2 separate financial arrangements.


    230-235(2)    
    The 2 separate *financial arrangements are:


    (a) one consisting of the part referred to in paragraph (1)(a); and


    (b) one consisting of the remaining part.

    SECTION 230-240   When election ceases to apply  

    230-240(1)    
    A *fair value election ceases to have effect from the start of an income year if you cease to be eligible under subsection 230-210(2) to make the fair value election for that income year.

    230-240(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not prevent you from making a new *fair value election at a later time if you become, at that later time, eligible under subsection 230-210(2) to make a fair value election for an income year.

    Note:

    The new election will only apply to financial arrangements you start to have after the start of the income year in which the new election is made.


    230-240(3)    
    A *fair value election ceases to apply to a particular *financial arrangement from the start of an income year if the arrangement ceases to satisfy a requirement of paragraph 230-220(1)(b) or (c) during that income year.

    230-240(4)    
    If the election ceases to apply to a particular *financial arrangement under subsection (3), the election cannot subsequently reapply to that arrangement (even if the requirements of paragraphs 230-220(1)(b) and (c) are satisfied once more in relation to the arrangement).

    SECTION 230-245   Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply  

    230-245(1)    
    You must make balancing adjustments under subsection (2) if a *fair value election ceases to have effect under subsection 230-240(1) .

    230-245(2)    
    The balancing adjustments under this subsection are the balancing adjustments you would make under Subdivision 230-G for each of the *financial arrangements to which the election applied if you disposed of the arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to have effect.

    230-245(3)    
    You must make a balancing adjustment under subsection (4) if a *fair value election ceases to apply to a particular *financial arrangement under subsection 230-240(3) .

    230-245(4)    
    The balancing adjustment under this subsection is the balancing adjustment you would make under Subdivision 230-G if you disposed of the *financial arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to apply to the arrangement.

    230-245(5)    
    If a balancing adjustment is made under subsection (2) or (4) in relation to a *financial arrangement, you are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have reacquired the arrangement at its fair value immediately after the election ceased to have effect or ceased to apply to the arrangement.

    230-245(6)    


    In determining, for the purposes of the balancing adjustment under subsection (2) or (4) or for the purposes of subsection (5), the fair value of the * financial arrangement at a time, disregard any changes in the fair value to the extent that:


    (a) you are required, as mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) , to otherwise treat the financial arrangement as at fair value through profit and loss; and


    (b) the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-210(2)(a) do not require you to recognise the changes as at fair value through profit or loss.


    Subdivision 230-D - Foreign exchange retranslation method  

    SECTION 230-250  

    230-250   Objects of this Subdivision  


    The objects of this Subdivision are:


    (a) to allow you to align the tax treatment of gains and losses from foreign exchange rate changes with the accounting treatment of profits and losses from such changes; and


    (b) to achieve this without allowing you to obtain an inappropriate tax benefit.

    SECTION 230-255   Foreign exchange retranslation election  


    General election

    230-255(1)    
    You may make a foreign exchange retranslation election under this subsection if you are eligible under subsection (2) to make the election for the income year in which you make the election.

    Eligibility to make election

    230-255(2)    
    You are eligible to make a *foreign exchange retranslation election for an income year if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for that income year in accordance with:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report - comparable standards for accounting made under a *foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law; and


    (b) the *financial report is audited in accordance with:


    (i) the *auditing principles; or

    (ii) if the auditing principles do not apply to the auditing of the financial report - comparable standards for auditing made under a foreign law.
    Note:

    Section 230-500 allows regulations to be made specifying particular foreign accounting and auditing standards as ones that are to be treated as comparable with Australian accounting and auditing principles for the purposes of this Division.



    Election in relation to qualifying forex accounts

    230-255(3)    
    You may make a foreign exchange retranslation election under this subsection in relation to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the arrangement is a *qualifying forex account; and


    (b) you have not made a *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection (1) that applies to the account.

    You may make the election even if you start to have the arrangement before you make the election.



    Financial arrangements to which election in relation to qualifying forex accounts applies

    230-255(4)    
    The election under subsection (3) applies to the *financial arrangement:


    (a) from the time when you start to have the arrangement if the election is made before you start to have the arrangement; or


    (b) from the start of the income year in which the election is made if you make the election after you start to have the arrangement.

    Election irrevocable

    230-255(5)    
    A *foreign exchange retranslation election is irrevocable.

    Note:

    The election may cease to apply under section 230-285 .


    SECTION 230-260   Foreign exchange retranslation election where differing income and accounting years  

    230-260(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year ); and


    (b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year ); and


    (c) your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and


    (d) both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:


    (i) prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-255(2)(a) ; and

    (ii) audited in accordance with paragraph 230-255(2)(b) ; and


    (e) the auditor ' s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

    230-260(2)    
    Treat yourself as eligible to make an election for the income year under subsection 230-255(2).

    230-260(3)    
    Work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the income year as follows:


    (a) firstly, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the first year in accordance with section 230-280 (treating the first year as an income year);


    (b) next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (a) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);


    (c) next, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the second year in accordance with section 230-280 (treating the second year as an income year);


    (d) next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (c) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);


    (e) next:


    (i) if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both gains - add them together to work out the gain from the arrangement for the income year; or

    (ii) if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both losses - add them together to work out the loss from the arrangement for the income year; or

    (iii) if one of the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) is a loss and the other is a gain - subtract the loss from the gain. If the result is positive, this is the gain from the arrangement for the income year. If the result is negative, this is the loss from the arrangement for the income year.

    230-260(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (d), work out how much of the gain or loss is attributable to the income year by:


    (a) using a methodology that is reasonable; and


    (b) using the same methodology for the first and second years.

    230-260(5)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (4)(a), treat a methodology that attributes the gain or loss on a pro-rata basis as not being reasonable.

    SECTION 230-265   Financial arrangements to which general election applies  

    230-265(1)    
    A *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) applies to each of your *financial arrangements:


    (a) that are Division 230 financial arrangements; and


    (b) that are recognised in financial reports of a kind referred to in paragraph 230-255(2)(a) that are audited, or required to be audited, as referred to in paragraph 230-255(2)(b) ; and


    (c) in relation to which you are required by:


    (i) *accounting standard AASB 121 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph); or

    (ii) if that standard does not apply to the preparation of the financial report - a comparable accounting standard that applies to the preparation of the financial report under a *foreign law;
    to recognise, in the financial reports, amounts in profit or loss (if any) that are attributable to changes in currency exchange rates; and


    (d) that you start to have in the income year in which you make the election or in a later income year.

    This subsection has effect subject to section 230-270 .

    Note:

    The election also has consequences under Subdivision 775-F for arrangements that are not Division 230 financial arrangements.


    230-265(2)    
    If, but for this subsection, paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) would not be satisfied in relation to a *financial arrangement because the arrangement is an intra-group transaction for the purposes of:


    (a) *accounting standard AASB 127 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph); or


    (b) if that standard does not apply to the preparation of the financial report - a comparable accounting standard that applies to the preparation of the financial report under a *foreign law;

    paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.

    Note:

    Financial arrangements between members of a consolidated group or MEC group are not covered by this subsection because the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) operates to treat them as not being financial arrangements for the purposes of this Division.


    230-265(3)    
    If:


    (a) the *financial arrangement would not be a financial arrangement if the following provisions were disregarded:


    (i) Division 9A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which deals with offshore banking units);

    (ii) Part IIIB of that Act (which deals with Australian branches of foreign banks etc); and


    (b) paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) would be satisfied in relation to the financial arrangement if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities; and


    (c) the *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) is made by:


    (i) if section 121EB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies - the OBU mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section); or

    (ii) if section 160ZZW of that Act applies - the bank mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section);

    paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.


    SECTION 230-270   Financial arrangements to which general election does not apply  

    230-270(1)    
    For the purposes of this Division, a *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) does not apply to a *financial arrangement if the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc).

    230-270(2)    
    For the purposes of this Division, a *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you are:


    (i) an individual; or

    (ii) an entity (other than an individual) that satisfies subsection 230-455(2) , (3) or (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and


    (b) the arrangement is a *qualifying security; and


    (c) you have not made an election under subsection 230-455(7) .

    230-270(3)    
    A *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the election is made by the *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group; and


    (b) the election specifies that the election is not to apply to financial arrangements in relation to *life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group; and


    (c) the arrangement is one that relates to the life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group.

    230-270(4)    
    A *foreign exchange retranslation election does not apply to a *financial arrangement if the arrangement is associated with a business of a kind specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

    SECTION 230-275   Balancing adjustment for election in relation to qualifying forex accounts  

    230-275(1)    


    If you make a *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(3) in relation to a *financial arrangement after you start to have the arrangement, you must make a balancing adjustment under subsection (2).

    230-275(2)    


    The balancing adjustment under this subsection is the balancing adjustment you would make under Subdivision 230-G if you ceased to have the arrangement for its fair value at the time when the election started to apply to the arrangement (but only to the extent to which the balancing adjustment is reasonably attributable to a *currency exchange rate effect).

    SECTION 230-280   Applying foreign exchange retranslation method to gains and losses  


    General election

    230-280(1)    
    You make a gain or loss from a *financial arrangement for an income year if:


    (a) a *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) applies to the arrangement; and


    (b) any of the following subparagraphs apply:


    (i) the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) requires you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year;

    (ii) if subsection 230-265(2) applies to the arrangement - the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) would have required you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(2)(b) ;

    (iii) if subsection 230-265(3) applies to the arrangement - the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) would have required you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss for the year that is attributable to currency exchange rates mentioned in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities.

    The amount of the gain or loss is the amount the standard requires, or would have required, you to recognise.

    Note:

    See subsection 230-40(6) .



    Election in relation to qualifying forex accounts

    230-280(2)    
    You make a gain or loss from a *financial arrangement for an income year if:


    (a) a *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(3) applies to the arrangement; and


    (b) the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) :


    (i) requires you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year; or

    (ii) would require you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year if that standard applied to the arrangement; or

    (iii) would require you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(2)(b) ; or

    (iv) would require you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(2)(b) and if that standard applied to the arrangement.

    The amount of the gain or loss is the amount the standard requires, or would require, you to recognise.



    Subsidiary leaving group

    230-280(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies if:


    (a) a *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group has a *financial arrangement; and


    (b) a *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) or (3) applies to the arrangement; and


    (c) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the leaving time ); and


    (d) immediately after the leaving time, the head company no longer has the arrangement because the subsidiary member ceased to be a member of the group.

    230-280(4)    
    The gain or loss the group makes from the *financial arrangement for the income year in which the leaving time occurs is taken to be the gain or loss that the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) would require the group to recognise in profit or loss in relation to the arrangement for that income year if:


    (a) the circumstances that existed in relation to the arrangement (including its value) immediately before the leaving time had continued to exist until the end of the income year; and


    (b) any circumstances that arise in relation to the arrangement after the leaving time were disregarded.

    SECTION 230-285   When election ceases to apply  


    General election

    230-285(1)    
    A *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) ceases to have effect from the start of an income year if you cease to be eligible under subsection 230-255(2) to make a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) for that income year.

    230-285(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not prevent you from making a new *foreign exchange retranslation election at a later time if you become, at that later time, eligible under subsection 230-255(2) , to make a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) for that income year.

    Note:

    The new election will only apply to financial arrangements you start to have after the start of the income year in which the new election is made.


    230-285(3)    
    A *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) ceases to apply to a *financial arrangement from the start of an income year if the arrangement ceases to satisfy a requirement of paragraph 230-265(1)(b) or (c) during that income year.

    230-285(4)    
    If the election ceases to apply to a particular *financial arrangement under subsection (3), the election cannot subsequently reapply to that arrangement (even if the requirements of paragraphs 230-265(1)(b) and (c) are satisfied once more in relation to the arrangement).

    Election in relation to qualifying forex accounts

    230-285(5)    
    A *foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(3) ceases to apply to a *financial arrangement from the start of an income year if the arrangement ceases to satisfy a requirement of subsection 230-255(3) during that income year.

    230-285(6)    
    If the election ceases to apply to a particular *financial arrangement under subsection (5), the election cannot subsequently reapply to that arrangement (even if the requirements of subsection 230-255(3) are satisfied once more in relation to the arrangement).

    SECTION 230-290   Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply  

    230-290(1)    


    You must make balancing adjustments under subsection (2) if a * foreign exchange retranslation election ceases to have effect under subsection 230-285(1) .

    230-290(2)    
    The balancing adjustments under this subsection are the balancing adjustments you would make under Subdivision 230-G for each of the *financial arrangements to which the election applied if you disposed of the arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to have effect (but only to the extent to which the balancing adjustment is reasonably attributable to a *currency exchange rate effect).

    230-290(3)    


    You must make a balancing adjustment under this section if a * foreign exchange retranslation election ceases to apply to a particular *financial arrangement under subsection 230-285(3) or (5) .

    230-290(4)    
    The balancing adjustment under this subsection is the balancing adjustment you would make under Subdivision 230-G if you disposed of the *financial arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to apply to the arrangement (but only to the extent to which the balancing adjustment is reasonably attributable to a *currency exchange rate effect).

    230-290(5)    
    If a balancing adjustment is made under subsection (2) or (4) in relation to a *financial arrangement, you are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have reacquired the arrangement at its fair value immediately after the election ceased to have effect or ceased to apply to the arrangement.

    Subdivision 230-E - Hedging financial arrangements method  

    SECTION 230-295  

    230-295   Objects of this Subdivision  


    The objects of this Subdivision are:


    (a) to facilitate the efficient management of financial risk by reducing after-tax mismatches and better aligning tax treatment where hedging takes place; and


    (b) to minimise tax deferral and tax motivated practices (including tax deferral arising from such practices as tax advantaged selection from among possible hedges and inappropriate selection of tax treatment).

    SECTION 230-300   Applying hedging financial arrangement method to gains and losses  

    230-300(1)    
    If you have a *hedging financial arrangement to which a *hedging financial arrangement election applies, the gain or loss you make for an income year from the arrangement is worked out under this section and section 230-310 instead of under Subdivision 230-B , 230-C , 230-D , 230-F or 230-G .

    230-300(2)    
    Except where subsection (5) applies, the gain or loss you make from the *hedging financial arrangement is equal to the overall gain or loss you make from the arrangement.

    230-300(3)    
    The gain or loss you make from the *hedging financial arrangement is allocated over income years according to the determination referred to in subsection 230-360(1) .

    Note 1:

    The allocation is capable of extending to income years after you cease to have the hedging financial arrangement (see subsection 230-360(3) ).

    Note 2:

    The determination must be included in the record made under section 230-355 .


    230-300(4)    
    If the *hedging financial arrangement is a *foreign currency hedge and is a *debt interest, split a gain or loss you make from the arrangement as follows:


    (a) to the extent to which the gain or loss represents a *currency exchange rate effect attributable to the outstanding balance in relation to the debt interest, treat it as a separate gain or loss to which subsections (1) and (2) apply;


    (b) to the extent that it does not represent that effect, treat it as a separate gain or loss from the financial arrangement that is allocated under Subdivision 230-B , 230-F or 230-G .

    230-300(5)    
    If an event listed in the table in subsection 230-305(1) occurs:


    (a) the gain or loss you make from the *hedging financial arrangement is equal to any gain or loss that you would have made:


    (i) while the arrangement was hedging the *hedged item or items; and

    (ii) on ceasing to have the arrangement;
    if you ceased to have the arrangement for its fair value at the time of the event; and


    (b) this Division further applies as if, just after the event, you had acquired the arrangement for its fair value at the time of the event.

    Despite subsection (3), the gain or loss referred to in paragraph (a) is allocated over income years according to the table.


    230-300(6)    
    (Repealed by No 136 of 2010 )


    230-300(7)    
    Subsection (8) applies if the *hedging financial arrangement:


    (a) is a *financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc); and


    (b) is a *foreign currency hedge; and


    (c) is one that you issue.

    230-300(8)    
    Split a gain or loss you make from the arrangement as follows:


    (a) to the extent to which the gain or loss represents a *currency exchange rate effect, treat it as a separate gain or loss to which subsections (1) and (2) apply;


    (b) to the extent that it does not represent that effect, treat it as a separate gain or loss from the financial arrangement to which this Division does not apply.

    230-300(9)    
    Subsections (10) and (11) apply if:


    (a) a *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group has a *hedging financial arrangement; and


    (b) a *hedging financial arrangement election applies to the arrangement; and


    (c) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the leaving time ); and


    (d) immediately after the leaving time:


    (i) the head company no longer has the arrangement because the subsidiary member ceased to be a member of the group; and

    (ii) the head company no longer has the *hedged item (or all of the hedged items) because the subsidiary member ceased to be a member of the group.

    230-300(10)    
    The gain or loss the group makes from the arrangement for the income year in which the leaving time occurs is taken to be the gain or loss that would be allocated to the group in accordance with this section (disregarding subsection (5)) if:


    (a) the circumstances that existed in relation to the arrangement (including its value) immediately before the leaving time had continued to exist until the end of the income year; and


    (b) any circumstances that arise in relation to the *financial arrangement after the leaving time were disregarded.

    230-300(11)    


    For the purposes of applying paragraph (5)(a) to the *head company of the group at the leaving time, disregard item 2 of the table in subsection 230-305(1) .

    SECTION 230-305   Table of events and allocation rules  

    230-305(1)    
    For the purposes of paragraph 230-300(5)(a) , the following table lists events and their consequences:


    Table of events and allocation rules
    Item If this event occurs … Your gain or loss is allocated …
    1 (a) you revoke the hedging designation; or
    (b) you redesignate your * hedging financial arrangement; or
    (c) you cease to meet the requirement of section 230-365 in relation to your hedging financial arrangement
    over income years according to the basis determined under subsection 230-360(1).
    2 (a) you cease to have the * hedged item or all of the hedged items; or
    (b) you cease to expect that the hedged item or items will come into existence; or
    (c) you cease to expect that you will have the hedged item or items
    to the income year in which the event occurs.
    2A (a) you cease to have one or more (but not all) of the * hedged items; or
    (b) you cease to expect that one or more (but not all) of the hedged items will come into existence; or
    (c) you cease to expect that you will have one or more (but not all) of the hedged items
    (a) to the extent to which the gain or loss is reasonably attributable to those one or more hedged items - to the income year in which the event occurs; and
    (b) to the extent to which the gain or loss is reasonably attributable to the remaining hedged item or items - over income years according to the basis determined under subsection 230-360(1).
    3 a risk being hedged by your * hedging financial arrangement ceases to exist to the income year in which the risk ceases to exist.


    230-305(2)    


    For the purposes of item 2A of the table in subsection (1), determine the extent to which the gain or loss is reasonably attributable to a particular *hedged item having regard to the following:


    (a) the fair value of the hedged item;


    (b) the length of the period over which you have held the hedged item;


    (c) commercially accepted valuation principles;


    (d) any other relevant factors.


    SECTION 230-310   Aligning tax classification of gain or loss from hedging financial arrangement with tax classification of hedged item  

    230-310(1)    
    The object of this section is to better align, in particular circumstances, the tax classification of a gain or loss you make from a *hedging financial arrangement with the tax classification of the *hedged item.

    230-310(2)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you make a gain or loss from a *hedging financial arrangement for an income year; and


    (b) a *hedging financial arrangement election applies to the arrangement.

    230-310(3)    
    Subject to subsection (4):


    (a) if you make a gain from the arrangement - your assessable income includes the gain in accordance with subsection 230-15(1) ; and


    (b) if you make a loss from the arrangement - you may deduct the loss in accordance with subsections 230-15(2) and (3) .

    Note:

    Section 230-300 tells you how to allocate the gain or loss to an income year or years.


    230-310(4)    


    A gain or loss you make from a *hedging financial arrangement, to the extent to which it is reasonably attributable to a *hedged item referred to in the following table, is dealt with in the way indicated in that item:


    Special tax classification for gains and losses
    Item For a hedged item that is or produces … the gain … the loss …
    1 a * CGT asset any * net capital gain in relation to which would be assessable under Parts 3-1 and 3-3 in relation to which a * CGT event (the hedged item CGT event ) occurs is treated as a * capital gain from a CGT event (but only to the extent to which the gain is reasonably attributable to the hedged item CGT event) is treated as a * capital loss from a CGT event (but only to the extent to which the loss is reasonably attributable to the hedged item CGT event)
    2 a * CGT asset that is * taxable Australian property is treated as a * capital gain from a * CGT event for a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property is treated as a * capital loss from a CGT event for a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property
    3 a * CGT asset your capital gains and losses in relation to which are disregarded, or reduced by a particular percentage, under Division 855 is disregarded or reduced by the same percentage is disregarded or reduced by the same percentage
    4 * exempt income is treated as exempt income is not deductible
    5 * non-assessable non-exempt income of an Australian resident is treated as non-assessable non-exempt income is not deductible
    6 a share in a company that is a foreign resident if the capital gain or loss you make from a * CGT event that happens to the share is reduced by a particular percentage under Subdivision 768-G is treated as a * capital gain from a CGT event that is reduced by the same percentage is treated as a * capital loss from a CGT event that is reduced by the same percentage
    7 * ordinary income or * statutory income from an * Australian source is treated as ordinary income or statutory income from an Australian source is treated as a loss incurred in gaining or producing ordinary income or statutory income from an Australian source
    8 * ordinary income or * statutory income from a source out of Australia is treated as ordinary income or statutory income from a source out of Australia is treated as a loss incurred in gaining or producing ordinary income or statutory income from a source out of Australia
    9 a loss or outgoing incurred in gaining or producing * ordinary income or * statutory income from a source out of Australia is treated as ordinary income or statutory income from a source out of Australia is treated as a loss incurred in gaining or producing ordinary income or statutory income from a source out of Australia
    10 a loss or outgoing incurred in gaining or producing * ordinary income or * statutory income from an * Australian source is treated as ordinary income or statutory income from an Australian source is treated as a loss incurred in gaining or producing ordinary income or statutory income from an Australian source
    11 a loss or outgoing that is not allowed as a deduction is treated as * non-assessable non-exempt income is treated as a loss that is not allowed as a deduction
    12 a net investment in a foreign operation (within the meaning of the * accounting principles) that is not carried on through:
    (a) a company in which you hold shares; or
    (b) a company that is a subsidiary of yours (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ).
    (a) to the extent that the net investment would give rise to income that is * non-assessable non-exempt income under section 23AH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 - is treated as non-assessable non-exempt income; and
    (b) otherwise - is treated in accordance with the item or items in this table that are applicable to the gain.
    (a) to the extent that the net investment would give rise to income that is non-assessable non-exempt income under section 23AH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 - is not deductible; and
    (b) otherwise - is treated in accordance with the item or items in this table that are applicable to the loss.


    230-310(5)    


    Subsection (6) applies if:


    (a) a * hedged item is your net investment in a foreign operation (within the meaning of the * accounting principles); and


    (b) the foreign operation is carried on through:


    (i) a company in which you hold * shares; or

    (ii) a company that is a subsidiary of yours (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ).

    230-310(6)    


    The table in subsection (4) has effect as if:


    (a) to the extent that the * hedging financial arrangement hedges a risk or risks in relation to * shares you hold in the company - the reference in that table to the * hedged item were a reference to your interest in those shares; and


    (b) to the extent that the hedging financial arrangement hedges a risk or risks in relation to another interest you have in the company - the reference in that table to the hedged item were a reference to that interest.


    SECTION 230-315   Hedging financial arrangement election  


    Election

    230-315(1)    
    You can make a hedging financial arrangement election if you are eligible under subsection (2) to make the election for the income year in which you make the election.

    Eligibility to make hedging financial arrangement election for an income year

    230-315(2)    
    You are eligible to make a hedging financial arrangement election for an income year if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for that income year in accordance with:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report - comparable standards for accounting made under a *foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law; and


    (b) the financial report is audited in accordance with:


    (i) the *auditing principles; or

    (ii) if the auditing principles do not apply to the auditing of the financial report - comparable standards for auditing made under a foreign law.
    Note:

    Section 230-500 allows regulations to be made specifying particular foreign accounting and auditing standards as ones that are to be treated as comparable with Australian accounting and auditing principles for the purposes of this Division.



    Election irrevocable

    230-315(3)    
    The *hedging financial arrangement election is irrevocable.

    Note:

    The election may cease to apply under section 230-385 .


    SECTION 230-320   Hedging financial arrangement election where differing income and accounting years  

    230-320(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year ); and


    (b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year ); and


    (c) your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and


    (d) both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:


    (i) prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-315(2)(a) ; and

    (ii) audited in accordance with paragraph 230-315(2)(b) ; and


    (e) the auditor ' s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

    230-320(2)    
    Treat yourself as eligible to make an election for the income year under subsection 230-315(2) .

    SECTION 230-325  

    230-325   Hedging financial arrangements to which election applies  


    A * hedging financial arrangement election applies to a * hedging financial arrangement:


    (a) that you start to have in the income year in which you make the election or in a later income year; and


    (b) that is not excluded from the application of the election by section 230-330 .

    Note:

    Subject to a determination by the Commissioner, the hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a financial arrangement you start to have after you fail to comply with the requirements in sections 230-355 and 230-360 and paragraph 230-365(c) in relation to a hedging financial arrangement to which the election does apply: see section 230-385 . See also subsection 230-305(1) .

    SECTION 230-330   Hedging financial arrangements to which election does not apply  

    230-330(1)    
    A *hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a *financial arrangement if the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc).

    230-330(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to a *hedging financial arrangement if:


    (a) the hedging financial arrangement is a *foreign currency hedge; and


    (b) you issue the hedging financial arrangement.

    230-330(3)    
    A *hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you are:


    (i) an individual; or

    (ii) an entity (other than an individual) that satisfies subsection 230-455(2) , (3) or (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and


    (b) the arrangement is a *qualifying security; and


    (c) you have not made an election under subsection 230-455(7) .

    230-330(4)    
    A *hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the election is made by the *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group; and


    (b) the election specifies that the election is not to apply to financial arrangements in relation to *life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group; and


    (c) the arrangement is one that relates to the life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group.

    230-330(5)    
    A *hedging financial arrangement election does not to apply to a *financial arrangement if the arrangement is associated with a business of a kind specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

    SECTION 230-335   Hedging financial arrangement and hedged item  


    Hedging financial arrangement

    230-335(1)    
    A *financial arrangement that you have that is a *derivative financial arrangement, or is not a derivative financial arrangement but is a *foreign currency hedge, is a hedging financial arrangement if:


    (a) you create, acquire or apply the arrangement for the purpose of hedging a risk or risks in relation to a *hedged item or items;and


    (b) at the time you create, acquire or apply the arrangement, the arrangement satisfies the requirements of the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a) to be a hedging instrument; and


    (c) the arrangement is recorded as a hedging instrument in:


    (i) your financial report (including documents and records on which the report is based); or

    (ii) if the arrangement hedges a risk in relation to *foreign currency - your financial report or the financial report of a consolidated entity in which you are included (including documents and records on which the report is based);
    for the income year in which the rights and/or obligations are created, acquired or applied.
    Note:

    For document and record , see section 2B of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901 .


    230-335(2)    
    If:


    (a) the *financial arrangement would not be a financial arrangement if the following provisions were disregarded:


    (i) Division 9A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which deals with offshore banking units);

    (ii) Part IIIB of that Act (which deals with Australian branches of foreign banks etc); and


    (b) paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) would be satisfied in relation to the financial arrangement if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities;

    paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.


    230-335(3)    
    A *financial arrangement that is a *derivative financial arrangement, or is not a derivative financial arrangement but is a *foreign currency hedge, is a hedging financial arrangement if:


    (a) you create, acquire or apply the arrangement for the purpose of hedging a risk or risks in relation to something; and


    (b) one or more of subsections (4), (5), (6) or (7) is satisfied; and


    (c) the requirements of paragraphs (1)(b) or (c) are not able to be satisfied:


    (i) because of the requirements of the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a) ; and

    (ii) not because of any act or omission on your part to deliberately fail to satisfy those requirements; and


    (d) in a case in which none of subsections (5), (6) and (7) are satisfied - you satisfy the additional recording requirements of subsection 230-355(5) ; and


    (e) in any case - you satisfy the requirements (if any) prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.


    230-335(3A)    


    Disregard paragraph (3)(d) if subsection (4) is satisfied and:


    (a) a * hedging financial arrangement election applies to the * financial arrangement (because you previously satisfied the additional recording requirements mentioned in that paragraph at a time when the election applied); or


    (b) all of the following subparagraphs apply:


    (i) a hedging financial arrangement election would apply to the financial arrangement if you satisfied the additional recording requirements mentioned in paragraph (3)(d);

    (ii) the election and subsection (3) apply to another financial arrangement;

    (iii) subsection (4) is or was satisfied in relation to that other arrangement at a time when the election applied to that other arrangement.

    230-335(4)    
    This subsection is satisfied if:


    (a) the *financial arrangement hedges a foreign currency risk in relation to an anticipated *foreign equity distribution from a *connected entity; and


    (b) the distribution is *non-assessable non-exempt income under section 768-5 .


    230-335(5)    
    This subsection is satisfied if:


    (a) you enter into a *financial arrangement with a *connected entity; and


    (b) the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a) require that a consolidated financial report be prepared that deals with both your affairs and the affairs of the connected entity; and


    (c) the report properly reflects your affairs; and


    (d) the arrangement satisfies the requirements of paragraph (1)(a); and


    (e) the arrangement would satisfy the requirements of paragraph (1)(b) or (c) but for the fact that the consolidated report disregards the arrangement.


    230-335(6)    
    This subsection is satisfied if:


    (a) the period for which the risk or risks are hedged does not straddle 2 or more income years; and


    (b) the *financial arrangement satisfies the requirements of paragraph (1)(a); and


    (c) the arrangement would satisfy the requirements of paragraph (1)(c) if the period for which the risk or risks that are hedged did straddle 2 or more income years.

    230-335(7)    
    This subsection is satisfied if the requirements prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection are satisfied.

    Financial arrangement hedging more than one type of risk

    230-335(8)    


    A *financial arrangement that hedges more than one type of risk may only be a hedging financial arrangement if the principles or standards referred to in paragraph (1)(b) allow the arrangement to be designated as a hedge of those risks.

    More than one financial arrangement hedging the same risk or risks

    230-335(9)    


    If 2 or more *financial arrangements hedge the same risk or risks, each of the arrangements may only be a hedging financial arrangement if the principles or standards referred to in paragraph (1)(b) allow those arrangements to be viewed in combination and jointly designated as hedging that risk or those risks.

    Hedged item

    230-335(10)    
    If a *financial arrangement that you have hedges a risk in relation to:


    (a) an asset or a part of an asset; or


    (b) a liability or a part of a liability; or


    (c) a firm commitment (within the meaning of the *accounting principles) or a part of such a commitment; or


    (d) a highly probable forecast transaction (within the meaning of the accounting principles) or a part of such a transaction; or


    (e) a net investment in a foreign operation (within the meaning of the accounting principles) or a part of such an investment; or


    (f) something prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph;

    the asset (or that part of the asset), the liability (or that part of the liability), the commitment (or that part of the commitment), the transaction (or that part of the transaction) or the investment (or that part of the investment) is a hedged item for the arrangement.


    230-335(11)    
    If a *financial arrangement is a *hedging financial arrangement because of paragraph (4)(a), the anticipated dividend referred to in that subparagraph is a hedged item for the arrangement even if subsection (10) is not satisfied in relation to the anticipated dividend.

    SECTION 230-340   Generally whole arrangement must be hedging financial arrangement  

    230-340(1)    
    Subject to subsections (2), (3) and (4), the whole of a *financial arrangement must satisfy the requirements of subsection 230-335(1) or (3) for the arrangement to be a hedging financial arrangement .

    Partial hedges

    230-340(2)    
    If a *financial arrangement:


    (a) is an options contract; and


    (b) hedges risk only in part by reference to changes in the intrinsic value of the options contract;

    the arrangement may be treated as a hedging financial arrangement to the extent to which the part of the arrangement referred to in paragraph (b) satisfies the requirements of subsection 230-335(1) or (3) .


    230-340(3)    
    If a *financial arrangement:


    (a) is a forward contract; and


    (b) has a spot price element and an interest element;

    the arrangement may be treated as a hedging financial arrangement to the extent to which the spot price element satisfies the requirements of subsection 230-335(1) or (3) .



    Proportionate hedges

    230-340(4)    
    A specified proportion of a *financial arrangement may be treated as a hedging financial arrangement to the extent to which that proportion of the arrangement satisfies the requirements of subsection 230-335(1) or (3) .

    Separate financial arrangements if partial or proportionate hedge

    230-340(5)    
    If a part (or parts), or a proportion (or proportions), of a *financial arrangement is (or are) treated as a *hedging financial arrangement under subsection (2), (3) or (4):


    (a) the part (or each of the parts), or the proportion (or each of the proportions), of the arrangement that is (or are) treated as a hedging financial arrangement is taken to be a separate financial arrangement for the purposes of this Division; and


    (b) the remaining part or proportion (if any) of the arrangement is taken to be a separate financial arrangement for the purposes of this Division.

    230-340(6)    
    Subsection (5) has effect even if there would not be separate *arrangements under subsection 230-55(4) .

    SECTION 230-345  

    230-345   Requirements not satisfied because of honest mistake or inadvertence  


    If a *derivative financial arrangement, or a *foreign currency hedge, that you have would not be a *hedging financial arrangement only because the requirements of paragraph 230-335(1)(b) or (c), or both, are not satisfied because of an honest mistake or inadvertence, it is nevertheless a hedging financial arrangement if the Commissioner considers this appropriate having regard to:


    (a) your documented risk management practices and policies; and


    (b) your record keeping practices; and


    (c) your accounting systems and controls; and


    (d) your internal governance processes; and


    (e) the circumstances surrounding the mistake or inadvertence (including the steps (if any) taken to correct or address the mistake or inadvertence and the steps (if any) taken to prevent a recurrence); and


    (f) the extent to which the requirements of paragraphs 230-335(1)(b) and (c) have been met; and


    (g) the objects of this Subdivision.

    SECTION 230-350   Derivative financial arrangement and foreign currency hedge  


    Derivative financial arrangement

    230-350(1)    
    A derivative financial arrangement is a *financial arrangement that you have where:


    (a) its value changes in response to changes in a specified variable or variables; and


    (b) there is no requirement for a net investment, or there is such a requirement but the net investment is smaller than would be required for other types of financial arrangement that would be expected to have a similar response to changes in market factors.

    Note:

    Paragraph (a) - a specified variable includes an interest rate, foreign exchange rate, credit rating, index or commodity or financial instrument price.



    Foreign currency hedge

    230-350(2)    
    A foreign currency hedge is a *financial arrangement that you have if:


    (a) paragraph (1)(a) is satisfied but paragraph (1)(b) is not; and


    (b) the arrangement hedges a risk in relation to movements in currency exchange rates.

    SECTION 230-355   Recording requirements  

    230-355(1)    
    The requirement of this section is that you must make, or have in place, a record that:


    (a) contains a description of the following:


    (i) the *hedging financial arrangement in relation to which the election is made;

    (ii) the nature of the risk or risks being hedged;

    (iii) the *hedged item or items;

    (iv) how you will assess the effectiveness of hedging the risk in reducing your exposure to changes in the fair value of the hedged item or items or cash flows or foreign currency exposure attributable to them;

    (v) the risk management objective for, and the risk management strategy to be followed in, acquiring, creating or applying the arrangement; and


    (b) contains any further details that the *accounting principles require, by way of documentation, for an arrangement to be recorded in a financial report as a hedging instrument; and


    (c) sets out the terms of the determinations you make under section 230-360 .

    To avoid doubt, paragraph (b) applies even if the arrangement is not recorded in your financial report as a hedging instrument.


    230-355(2)    
    To avoid doubt, the record may consist of a single document or 2 or more documents.

    230-355(3)    
    The record must be made or in place:


    (a) at, or soon after, the time when you create, acquire or apply the *hedging financial arrangement; or


    (b) at such other time as is provided for in the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

    230-355(4)    
    The description must be sufficiently precise and detailed that the following are clear:


    (a) that the risk in respect of the particular *hedged item or items was the one hedged by the *hedging financial arrangement;


    (b) the extent to which the risk was hedged;


    (c) that the rights and/or obligations comprising the hedging financial arrangement were in fact those created, acquired or applied for the purpose of hedging the risk.

    230-355(5)    
    If a *financial arrangement is a *hedging financial arrangement under subsection 230-335(2) or (3) , the following requirements must be met in addition to the requirements of subsections (1), (3) and (4):


    (a) you must make or have in place, at, or soon before or soon after, the time when you create, acquire or apply the arrangement, a record that sets out:


    (i) a statement of why, and the way in which, the arrangement operates commercially or economically as a hedge of the *hedged item or items; and

    (ii) the reasons why the arrangement does not satisfy the requirements of the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a) to be a hedging instrument;


    (b) you must, at the end of each income year during which you have the arrangement, make a record of the accumulated gains and/or losses (whether realised or unrealised) as at the end of that income year from the arrangement or arrangements relating to the hedged item or items that are yet to be included in your assessable income or allowed to you as deductions;


    (c) you must have, at the time when you create, acquire or apply the arrangement, a record that sets out your risk management policies and practices;


    (d) you must have in place, at the time when you create, acquire or apply the arrangement, internal risk management systems and controls that record the arrangement and the hedged item or items.


    230-355(6)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (5)(b), you must assume that:


    (a) all the gains from the *financial arrangement would be assessable income; and


    (b) all the losses from the financial arrangement would be allowed to you as deductions.

    SECTION 230-360   Determining basis for allocating gain or loss  

    230-360(1)    
    A requirement of this section is that you must determine the basis on which your gain or loss from the *hedging financial arrangement is to be allocated to an income year, or over 2 or more income years, for the purposes of this Division.

    230-360(2)    
    It is also a requirement of this section that the basis that you determine must:


    (a) fairly and reasonably correspond with the basis on which gains, lossesor other amounts in relation to the *hedged item or items are recognised or allocated under this Act; and


    (b) be objective; and


    (c) be sufficiently precise and detailed that, when your gain, loss or other amount from the *hedged item or items is taken into account for the purposes of this Act, the following will be clear from the record made under section 230-355 :


    (i) the time at which the gain or loss from the *hedging financial arrangement is to be taken into account for the purposes of this Division;

    (ii) the way in which that gain or loss will be dealt with under section 230-310 .
    Note:

    Paragraph (a) refers to an amount in relation to the hedged item or items being recognised or allocated under this Act. This would include an amount being allowed as a deduction or an amount being included in assessable income. If the hedged item were an asset, an amount referable to a part of the cost of the asset might, for example, be allowed as a deduction for a particular income year.


    230-360(3)    
    To avoid doubt, the income years over which your gain or loss is to be allocated may include an income year that starts after you cease to have the *hedging financial arrangement.

    SECTION 230-365  

    230-365   Effectiveness of the hedge  


    The requirement of this section is that:


    (a) hedging the risk must be expected to be effective (within the meaning of the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a) ), for the period for which you expect to have the *hedging financial arrangement, in reducing your exposure to changes in the fair value of the *hedged item or items or cash flows attributable to your hedged risk; and


    (b) the fair value of the hedged item or items or cash flows relating to them and the fair value of the arrangement must be able to be reliably measured; and


    (c) you must assess the hedging of the risk by the arrangement:


    (i) on a regular basis in accordance with the *accounting principles; and

    (ii) at least once in each 12 month period; and


    (d) your assessment must be that the hedging of the risk will be effective (within the meaning of the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a) ) in reducing your exposure to changes in the fair value of the hedged item or items or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk throughout the remainder of the period for which you expect to have the arrangement.

    SECTION 230-370   When election ceases to apply  

    230-370(1)    
    A *hedging financial arrangement election ceases to have effect from the start of an income year if you cease to be eligible under subsection 230-315(2) to make the election for that income year.

    230-370(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not prevent you from making a new *hedging financial arrangement election at a later time if you become, at that later time, eligible under subsection 230-315(2) to make an election for an income year.

    Note:

    The new election will only apply to financial arrangements you start to have after the start of the income year in which the new election is made.


    SECTION 230-375   Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply  

    230-375(1)    
    This section applies if a *hedging financial arrangement election ceases to have effect under subsection 230-370(1) .

    230-375(2)    
    You are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have:


    (a) disposed of each *hedging financial arrangement to which the election applies for its fair value immediately before the election ceases to have effect; and


    (b) reacquired the arrangement at its fair value immediately after the election ceases to have effect.

    230-375(3)    
    To avoid doubt, this Subdivision applies, for the purposes of working out the consequences of the disposal referred to in paragraph (2)(a), as if the *hedging financial arrangement were one to which the *hedging financial arrangement election applied at the time of the disposal.

    SECTION 230-380   Commissioner may determine that requirement met  


    Commissioner may determine that requirement met

    230-380(1)    


    If (apart from this section) the requirements of sections 230-355 to 230-365 are not met in relation to a *hedging financial arrangement that you have, treat those requirements as having been so met if the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (1A) in relation to the arrangement.

    230-380(1A)    


    The Commissioner may make the determination if the Commissioner considers that this is appropriate, having regard to:


    (a) the respects in which the arrangement does not meet those requirements; and


    (b) the extent to which it does not meet those requirements; and


    (c) the reasons why it does not meet those requirements; and


    (d) if the Commissioner is considering whether to impose conditions under subsection (2) - the likelihood that you will comply with those conditions; and


    (e) the objects of this Subdivision.



    Commissioner may impose additional record keeping requirements

    230-380(2)    


    The Commissioner may make a determination under subsection (1A) conditional on your keeping records in addition to those required by section 230-355 .

    230-380(3)    


    A determination under subsection (1A) ceases to have effect if you breach a condition imposed under subsection (2).

    230-380(4)    
    Subsection (3) ceases to apply to you if the Commissioner determines that that subsection ceases to apply to you. The determination takes effect from the date specified in the determination.

    230-380(5)    
    In deciding whether to make the determination under subsection (4), the Commissioner must have regard to:


    (a) your record keeping practices; and


    (b) your compliance history; and


    (c) any changes that have been made to:


    (i) your accounting systems and controls; and

    (ii) your internal governance processes;
    to ensure that breaches of the kind referred to in subsection (3) do not happen again; and


    (d) any other relevant matter.

    Commissioner may determine matter under section 230-360

    230-380(6)    


    If:


    (a) the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (1A) in relation to a *hedging financial arrangement; and


    (b) either or both of the following applies:


    (i) you fail to determine a matter in relation to the arrangement under section 230-360 ;

    (ii) you determine a matter in relation to the arrangement under section 230-360 but the determination does not satisfy the requirements of subsection 230-360(2) ;

    the Commissioner may determine that matter, in a way that satisfies the requirements of section 230-360 . The Commissioner ' s determination has effect as if you had made the determination and recorded it under that section.


    SECTION 230-385   Consequences of failure to meet requirements  


    When this section applies

    230-385(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) your * hedging financial arrangement election applies to a * hedging financial arrangement; and


    (b) you do not meet a requirement of section 230-355 or 230-360 or paragraph 230-365(c) in relation to the arrangement.

    230-385(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), treat the requirement in paragraph 230-365(c) as being met even if you do not assess the hedging of the risk mentioned in that paragraph, but you can demonstrate that you intend to do so.

    Commissioner may determine matter under section 230-360

    230-385(3)    
    If:


    (a) you fail to determine a matter in relation to the * hedging financial arrangement under section 230-360 ; or


    (b) you determine a matter in relation to the arrangement under section 230-360 but the determination does not satisfy the requirements of subsection 230-360(2) ;

    the Commissioner may determine that matter, in a way that satisfies the requirements of section 230-360 . A reference in this Division to a determination made under that section is treated as including a reference to a determination under this subsection.



    Election does not apply to hedging financial arrangements you start to have after failing to comply with requirements

    230-385(4)    
    Your * hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a * hedging financial arrangement you start to have:


    (a) after you fail to meet the requirement mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) in relation to the arrangement mentioned in that paragraph; and


    (b) before a date (if any) determined by the Commissioner.

    230-385(5)    
    The Commissioner may make a determination under paragraph (4)(b) only if satisfied that you are unlikely to fail again to meet a requirement of section 230-355 or 230-360 or paragraph 230-365(c) in relation to a * hedging financial arrangement.

    230-385(6)    
    In deciding whether to make a determination under paragraph (4)(b), the Commissioner must have regard to:


    (a) your record keeping practices; and


    (b) your compliance history; and


    (c) any changes that have been made to:


    (i) your accounting systems and controls; and

    (ii) your internal governance processes;
    to ensure that failures of the kind mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) do not happen again; and


    (d) any other relevant matter.

    Commissioner may still exercise powers under section 230-380

    230-385(7)    
    This section does not prevent the Commissioner from exercising the Commissioner ' s powers under section 230-380 in relation to the * hedging financial arrangement mentioned in subsection (1).

    Subdivision 230-F - Reliance on financial reports  

    SECTION 230-390  

    230-390   Objects of this Subdivision  


    The objects of this Subdivision are:


    (a) to reduce administration and compliance costs by allowing you to align the tax treatment of your gains and losses from a *financial arrangement with the accounting treatment that applies to the arrangement; and


    (b) to achieve those objects without your obtaining inappropriate tax benefits.

    SECTION 230-395   Election to rely on financial reports  


    Election

    230-395(1)    
    You may make an election to rely on financial reports if you are eligible under subsection (2) to make the election for the income year in which you make the election.

    Eligibility to make election

    230-395(2)    
    You are eligible to make an election to rely on financial reports for an income year if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for that income year in accordance with:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report - comparable standards for accountingmade under a *foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law; and


    (b) the financial report is audited in accordance with:


    (i) the *auditing principles; or

    (ii) if the auditing principles do not apply to the auditing of the financial report - comparable standards for auditing made under a foreign law; and


    (c) your auditor has not qualified the auditor ' s report on your financial report for that income year or any of the last 4 financial years in a respect that is relevant to the taxation treatment of *financial arrangements; and


    (d) your accounting systems and controls and your internal governance processes are reliable; and


    (e) no report of an audit or review conducted in the income year, or any of the preceding 4 income years, has included an adverse assessment of your accounting systems in a respect that is relevant to the taxation treatment of financial arrangements.

    Note 1:

    Paragraph (b) - section 230-500 allows regulations to be made specifying particular foreign accounting and auditing standards as ones that are to be treated as comparable with Australian accounting and auditing principles for the purposes of this Division.

    Note 2:

    For the purposes of paragraphs (c) and (e), a qualification or assessment may be relevant to the taxation treatment of financial arrangements even though it does not deal with the amount or timing of recognition of gains or losses (but relates, for example, to the reliability of the accounting systems through which information about financial arrangements is recorded).


    230-395(3)    
    Paragraph (2)(e) does not apply to a report of:


    (a) an internal audit or review that you conduct; or


    (b) an audit or review of a kind prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

    Election irrevocable

    230-395(4)    
    An election under subsection (1) is irrevocable.

    Note:

    The election may cease to apply under section 230-425 .


    SECTION 230-400   Financial reports election where differing income and accounting years  

    230-400(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year ); and


    (b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year ); and


    (c) your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and


    (d) both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:


    (i) prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-395(2)(a) ; and

    (ii) audited in accordance with paragraph 230-395(2)(b) ; and


    (e) the auditor ' s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

    230-400(2)    
    Treat yourself as eligible to make an election for the income year under subsection 230-395(2) .

    230-400(3)    
    Work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the income year as follows:


    (a) firstly, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the first year in accordance with section 230-420 (treating the first year as an income year);


    (b) next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (a) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);


    (c) next, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the second year in accordance with section 230-420 (treating the second year as an income year);


    (d) next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (c) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);


    (e) next:


    (i) if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both gains - add them together to work out the gain from the arrangement for the income year; or

    (ii) if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both losses - add them together to work out the loss from the arrangement for the income year; or

    (iii) if one of the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) is a loss and the other is a gain - subtract the loss from the gain. If the result is positive, this is the gain from the arrangement for the income year. If the result is negative, this is the loss from the arrangement for the income year.

    230-400(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (d), work out how much of the gain or loss is attributable to the income year by:


    (a) using a methodology that is reasonable; and


    (b) using the same methodology for the first and second years.

    230-400(5)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (4)(a), treat a methodology that attributes the gain or loss on a pro-rata basis as not being reasonable.

    SECTION 230-405   Commissioner discretion to waive requirements in paragraphs 230-395(2)(c) and (e)  

    230-405(1)    
    Paragraph 230-395(2)(c) or (e) does not apply in relation to your *election to rely on financial reports for a particular income year or income years if the Commissioner determines that the paragraph does not apply to the election for that income year or those income years.

    230-405(2)    
    In deciding whether to make the determination under subsection (1), the Commissioner must have regard to:


    (a) the reasons for the non-compliance with the principles or standards concerned; and


    (b) the remedial action (if any) that you have undertaken to ensure that non-compliance with those principles or standards does not occur in future (such as changes to your accounting systems and controls or to your internal governance structures); and


    (c) if you, or your activities, are subject to regulatory oversight or review - any opinions expressed by the regulator about the adequacy of remedial action of the kind referred to in paragraph (b); and


    (d) any other relevant matter.


    SECTION 230-410   Financial arrangements to which the election applies  

    230-410(1)    
    An *election to rely on financial reports applies in relation to a *financial arrangement that you have if:


    (a) the arrangement is a *Division 230 financial arrangement; and


    (b) you start to have the arrangement in the income year in which you make the election or in a later income year; and


    (c) the arrangement is recognised in financial reports of the kind referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) that are audited as referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(b) ; and


    (d) if the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 - the arrangement is an asset or liability that you are required (whether or not as a result of a choice you make) by:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report - comparable standards for accounting that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a *foreign law;
    to classify or designate, in the financial reports, as at fair value through profit or loss; and


    (e) it is reasonably expected that the following is, or will be, the same:


    (i) the amount of the overall gain or loss you make from the arrangement (as determined in accordance with the financial reports);

    (ii) the amount of the overall gain or loss you make from the arrangement (as determined in accordance with the provisions of this Division if the election under this subsection did not apply to the arrangement); and


    (f) the differences between the results of the following methods would reasonably be expected not to be substantial:


    (i) the method used in your financial reports to work out the amounts of the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for each income year;

    (ii) the method that would be applied by this Division to work out the amounts of those gains or losses if the election did not apply to the arrangement.

    This subsection has effect subject to section 230-415 .


    230-410(2)    


    In applying paragraph (1)(f) at the time when you start to have the *financial arrangement, disregard any differences between the results of the methods referred to in subparagraphs (1)(f)(i) and (ii) that are attributable solely to the provision for the possible impairment of debts required by the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) .

    230-410(3)    
    Subsections (4), (5) and (6) apply if, but for this subsection, paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) would not be satisfied in relation to a *financial arrangement because the arrangement is an intra-group transaction for the purposes of:


    (a) *accounting standard AASB 127 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph); or


    (b) if that standard does not apply to the preparation of the financial report - a comparable accounting standard that applies to the preparation of the financial report under a *foreign law.

    Note:

    Financial arrangements between members of a consolidated group or MEC group are not covered by this subsection because the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) operates to treat them as not being financial arrangements for the purposes of this Division.


    230-410(4)    
    Paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the *financial arrangement.

    230-410(5)    


    Paragraph (1)(e) applies as if the reference in subparagraph (1)(e)(i) to the amount of the overall gain or loss you make from the *financial arrangement (as determined in accordance with the financial reports) were a reference to the amount of that overall gain or loss (as would be determined in accordance with the financial reports if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in subsection (3)).

    230-410(6)    


    Paragraph (1)(f) applies as if the reference in subparagraph (1)(f)(i) to the method used in your financial reports to work out the amounts of the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for each income year were a reference to the method that would be used in your financial reports to work out those amounts if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in subsection (3).

    230-410(7)    
    For the purposes of applying subparagraphs (1)(e)(ii) and (f)(ii) to a *financial arrangement, assume that you had made any election that:


    (a) you could make under Subdivision 230-C or 230-D ; and


    (b) could apply to the arrangement.

    230-410(8)    
    If:


    (a) the *financial arrangement would not be a financial arrangement if the following provisions were disregarded:


    (i) Division 9A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which deals with offshore banking units);

    (ii) Part IIIB of that Act (which deals with Australian branches of foreign banks etc); and


    (b) paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) would be satisfied in relation to the financial arrangement if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities; and


    (c) the *election to rely on financial reports is made by:


    (i) if section 121EB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies - the OBU mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section); or

    (ii) if section 160ZZW of that Act applies - the bank mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section);

    paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.


    SECTION 230-415   Financial arrangements not covered by election  

    230-415(1)    
    An *election to rely on financial reports does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the arrangement is an *equity interest; and


    (b) you are the issuer of the equity interest.

    230-415(2)    
    An *election to rely on financial reports does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you are:


    (i) an individual; or

    (ii) an entity (other than an individual) that satisfies subsection 230-455(2) , (3) or (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and


    (b) the arrangement is a *qualifying security; and


    (c) you have not made an election under subsection 230-455(7) .

    230-415(3)    
    An *election to rely on financial reports does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the election is made by the *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group; and


    (b) the election specifies that the election is not to apply to financial arrangements in relation to *life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group; and


    (c) the arrangement is one that relates to the life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group.

    230-415(4)    
    An *election to rely on financial reports does not apply to a *financial arrangement if the arrangement is associated with a business of a kind specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

    SECTION 230-420   Effect of election to rely on financial reports  

    230-420(1)    
    If an *election to rely on financial reports applies to a *financial arrangement, the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for an income year is:


    (a) the gain or loss that the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) require you to recognise in profit or loss from that arrangement for that income year; or


    (b) if subsection 230-410(3) applies to the arrangement - the gain or loss that the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) would have required you to recognise in profit or loss from that arrangement for that income year if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in paragraph 230-410(3)(b) ; or


    (c) if subsection 230-410(8) applies to the arrangement - the gain or loss that the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-410(1)(d) would have required you to recognise in profit or loss for the year from the asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-410(1)(d) if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities.

    Note:

    Subsection 230-40(7) provides that this Subdivision does not apply to a gain or loss from a financial arrangement to the extent to which Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies to the arrangement.


    230-420(2)    
    Subsection (3) applies if:


    (a) a *head company of a *consolidated group or *MEC group has a *financial arrangement; and


    (b) an *election to rely on financial reports applies to the arrangement; and


    (c) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the leaving time ); and


    (d) immediately after the leaving time, the subsidiary member has the arrangement.

    230-420(3)    


    The gain or loss the group makes from the *financial arrangement for the income year in which the leaving time occurs is taken to be the gain or loss that the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) would require the group to recognise in profit or loss from the arrangement for that income year if:


    (a) the circumstances that existed in relation to the arrangement (including its value) immediately before the leaving time had continued to exist until the end of the income year; and


    (b) any circumstances that arise in relation to the arrangement after the leaving time were disregarded.


    SECTION 230-425   When election ceases to apply  

    230-425(1)    
    An election under subsection 230-395(1) ceases to have effect from the start of an income year if you cease to be eligible to make an *election to rely on financial reports for that income year.

    230-425(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not prevent you from making a new election under subsection 230-395(1) at a later time if you become, at that later time, eligible to make an *election to rely on financial reports for an income year.

    Note:

    The new election will only apply to financial arrangements you start to have after the start of the income year in which the new election is made.


    230-425(3)    
    An election under subsection 230-395(1) ceases to apply to a *financial arrangement from the start of an income year if the arrangement ceases to satisfy a requirement of paragraph 230-410(1)(c) , (d), (e) or (f) during that income year.

    230-425(4)    
    If the election ceases to apply to a particular *financial arrangement under subsection (3), the election cannot subsequently apply to that arrangement (even if the requirements of paragraphs 230-410(1)(c) , (d), (e) and (f) are satisfied once more in relation to the arrangement).

    SECTION 230-430   Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply  

    230-430(1)    
    You must make balancing adjustments under subsection (2) if an election under subsection 230-395(1) ceases to have effect under subsection 230-425(1) .

    230-430(2)    
    The balancing adjustments under this subsection are the balancing adjustments you would make under Subdivision 230-G in relation to each of the *financial arrangements to which the election applied if you disposed of the arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to have effect.

    230-430(3)    
    You must make balancing adjustments under subsection (5) if an election under subsection 230-395(1) ceases to apply to a particular *financial arrangement under subsection 230-425(3) .

    230-430(4)    
    Subsection (3) does not apply to a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the arrangement is not one that you are required (whether or not as a result of a choice you make) by the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) to classify or designate, in your financial reports, as at fair value through profit or loss; and


    (b) the election under subsection 230-395(1) ceases to apply to the arrangement because the arrangement fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 230-410(1)(e) or (f); and


    (c) the arrangement ceases to satisfy the requirements of that paragraph because the arrangement becomes impaired for the purposes of those principles or standards.


    230-430(5)    
    The balancing adjustment under this subsection is the balancing adjustment you would make under Subdivision 230-G if you disposed of the *financial arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to apply to the arrangement.

    230-430(6)    
    If a balancing adjustment is made under subsection (2) or (5) in relation to a *financial arrangement, you are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have reacquired the arrangement at its fair value immediately after the election ceased to have effect or ceased to apply to the arrangement.

    Subdivision 230-G - Balancing adjustment on ceasing to have a financial arrangement  

    SECTION 230-435   When balancing adjustment made  


    When balancing adjustment made

    230-435(1)    
    A balancing adjustment is made under this Subdivision if:


    (a) you transfer to another entity all of your rights and/or obligations under a *financial arrangement; or


    (b) all of your rights and/or obligations under a financial arrangement otherwise cease; or


    (c) you transfer to another entity:


    (i) a proportionate share of all of your rights and/or obligations under a financial arrangement; or

    (ii) a right or obligation that you have under a financial arrangement to a specifically identified *financial benefit; or

    (iii) a proportionate share of a right or obligation that you have under a financial arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit; or


    (d) an *arrangement that is a *Division 230 financial arrangement ceases to be a financial arrangement.

    230-435(2)    
    Paragraphs (1)(a), (b) and (c) do not apply to a right or obligation under a *financial arrangement unless that right or obligation is one of the rights or obligations that constitute the financial arrangement.

    Note:

    See subsections 230-45(1) and 230-50(1) and (2) for the rights and/or obligations that constitute a financial arrangement.



    Modifications for arrangements that are assets

    230-435(3)    
    If the *financial arrangement is an asset of yours at the time the event referred to in subsection (1) occurs, paragraphs (1)(a) and (c) do not apply unless the effect of the transfer is to transfer to the other entity substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the interest transferred.

    230-435(4)    
    If a *financial arrangement is an asset of yours, for the purposes of applying this Subdivision to the arrangement, you are treated as transferring a right under the arrangement to another entity if:


    (a) you retain the right but assume a new obligation; and


    (b) your assumption of the new obligation has the same effect, in substance, as transferring the right to another entity; and


    (c) the new obligation arises only to the extent to which the right to *financial benefits under the arrangement is satisfied; and


    (d) you cannot sell or pledge the right (other than as security in relation to the new obligation); and


    (e) you must, under the new obligation, provide financial benefits you receive in relation to the right to the entity to which you owe the new obligation without delay.

    Historic rate rollover of derivative financial arrangement

    230-435(5)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), all of your rights and/or obligations under a *financial arrangement that is a *derivative financial arrangement are taken to cease if there is an historic rate rollover of the arrangement.

    SECTION 230-440   Exceptions  


    Equity interests etc.

    230-440(1)    
    A balancing adjustment is not made under this Subdivision in relation to a *financial arrangement at a time if:


    (a) the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc); and


    (b) neither Subdivision 230-C nor Subdivision 230-F apply to the arrangement immediately before that time.

    Financial arrangements to which hedging financial arrangement elections apply

    230-440(2)    
    Balancing adjustments are not made under this Subdivision in relation to a *financial arrangement in relation to which a *hedging financial arrangement election applies.

    Bad debts, margining and conversion into, or exchange for, ordinary shares

    230-440(3)    
    A balancing adjustment is not made under this Subdivision in relation to the following events:


    (a) a *financial arrangement being written off in whole or part as a bad debt;


    (b) a financial arrangement that is a *derivative financial arrangement being settled or closed out for margining purposes;


    (c) the ceasing of obligations or rights under a financial arrangement that is a *traditional security if:


    (i) the ceasing occurs because the traditional security is converted into ordinary shares in, or transferred to, a company that is the issuer of the traditional security or a *connected entity; and

    (ii) the traditional security was issued on the basis that it will or may convert into ordinary shares in, or be transferred to, the issuer of the traditional security or the connected entity;


    (d) the ceasing of obligations or rights under a financial arrangement that is a traditional security if:


    (i) the ceasing occurs because the traditional security is exchanged for ordinary shares in a company that is neither the issuer of the traditional security nor a connected entity; and

    (ii) if the ceasing of the obligations or rights occurs because of a disposal - the disposal is to the issuer of the traditional security or a connected entity; and

    (iii) the traditional security was issued on the basis that it will or may be exchanged for ordinary shares in the company.
    Note:

    Paragraph (a) - for the treatment of bad debts, see paragraph 230-190(3)(c) .



    Subsidiary member leaving consolidated group or MEC group

    230-440(4)    
    A balancing adjustment is not made under this Subdivision in relation to a subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group that has a *financial arrangement ceasing to be a member of the group.

    SECTION 230-445   Balancing adjustment  


    Complete cessation or transfer

    230-445(1)    
    Use the following method statement to make the balancing adjustment if paragraph 230-435(1)(a) , (b) or (d) applies: Method statement for balancing adjustment


    Step 1.

    Add up the following:

  • (a) the total of all the *financial benefits you have received under the *financial arrangement;
    Note:

    This would include financial benefits you receive in relation to the transfer or cessation (see paragraph 230-60(2)(c) ).

  • (b) the total of the amounts that have been allowed to you as deductions, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, for losses from the arrangement;
  • (c) the total of the other amounts that would have been allowed to you as deductions, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, for losses from the arrangement if all your losses from the arrangement were allowable as deductions;
    Note:

    The losses from the arrangement here include losses made in gaining or producing exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

  • (d) the total of the amounts that will be allowed to you as deductions after the transfer or cessation because of a balancing adjustment under subitems 104(12) to (18) of the Tax Laws Amendment (Taxation of Financial Arrangements) Act 2009 to the extent to which those amounts are attributable to the arrangement;
  • (e) the total of the amounts that will be allowed to you as deductions after the transfer or cessation because of sections 230-160 and 230-165 to the extent to which those amounts are attributable to the arrangement.

  • Step 2.

    Add up the following:

  • (a) the total of all the *financial benefits you have provided under the *financial arrangement;
    Note:

    This would include financial benefits you provide in relation to the transfer or cessation (see paragraph 230-60(1)(c) ).

  • (b) the total of the amounts that have been included in your assessable income, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, as gains from the arrangement;
  • (c) the total of the other amounts that would have been included in your assessable income, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, as gains from the arrangement if all your gains from the arrangement were assessable;
    Note:

    The gains from the arrangements here include amounts of exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

  • (d) the total of the amounts that will be included in your assessable income after the transfer or cessation because of a balancing adjustment under subitems 104(12) to (18) of the Tax Laws Amendment (Taxation of Financial Arrangements) Act 2009 to the extent to which those amounts are attributable to the arrangement;
  • (e) the total of the amounts that will be included in your assessable income after the transfer or cessation because of sections 230-160 and 230-165 to the extent to which those amounts are attributable to the arrangement.

  • Step 3.

    Compare the amount obtained under step 1 (the step 1 amount ) with the amount obtained under step 2 (the step 2 amount ). If the step 1 amount exceeds the step 2 amount, an amount equal to the excess is taken, as a balancing adjustment, to be a gain you make from the *financial arrangement for the purposes of this Division. If the step 2 amount exceeds the step 1 amount, an amount equal to the excess is taken, as a balancing adjustment, to be a loss that you make from the arrangement. If the step 1 amount and the step 2 amount are equal, no balancing adjustment is made.



    Proportionate transfer of all rights and/or obligations under financial arrangement

    230-445(2)    
    If subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(i) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement in subsection (1) but reduce:


    (a) the amounts referred to in step 1; and


    (b) the amounts referred to in step 2;

    by applying the proportion referred to in subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(i) to them.



    Transfer of specifically identified right or obligation under financial arrangement

    230-445(3)    
    If subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(ii) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement in subsection (1) as if the references to:


    (a) the amounts referred to in step 1; and


    (b) the amounts referred to in step 2;

    were references to those amounts to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the right or obligation referred to in subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(ii) .



    Proportionate transfer of specifically identified right or obligation under financial arrangement

    230-445(4)    
    If subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(iii) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement:


    (a) as if the references to:


    (i) the amounts referred to in step 1; and

    (ii) the amounts referred to in step 2;
    were references to those amounts to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the right or obligation referred to in subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(iii) ; and


    (b) by reducing those amounts by applying the proportion referred to in subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(iii) to them.

    Attribution must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles

    230-445(5)    
    Any attribution made under subsection (3) or paragraph (4)(a) must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles that properly take into account:


    (a) the nature of the rights and obligations under the *financial arrangement; and


    (b) the risks associated with each *financial benefit, right and obligation under the arrangement; and


    (c) the time value of money.

    Income year for which gain or loss is made

    230-445(6)    
    The gain or loss you are taken to make under subsection (1), (2), (3) or (4) is a gain or loss for the income year in which the event referred to in subsection 230-435(1) occurs.

    Treatment of bad debts in relation to financial arrangements

    230-445(7)    
    For the purposes of applying paragraph (b) of step 1 of the method statement in subsection (1) to a *financial arrangement, a bad debt deduction in relation to the arrangement to which subsection 230-25(3) applies is taken to be a deduction for a loss from the arrangement.

    Subdivision 230-H - Exceptions  

    SECTION 230-450  

    230-450   Short-term arrangements where non-money amount involved  


    This Division does not apply in relation to your gains and losses from a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-45 ; and


    (b) either:


    (i) you acquired goods or other property (other than goods that are, or property that is, money or a *money equivalent) or services (other than services that are a money equivalent) from another entity and the *financial benefits you are to provide under the arrangement are consideration for those goods, that property, or those services; or

    (ii) you provided goods or other property (other than goods that are, or other property that is, money or a money equivalent) or services (other than services that are a money equivalent) to another entity and the financial benefits you are to receive under the arrangement are consideration for those goods, that property or those services; and


    (c) the period between the following is not more than 12 months:


    (i) the time when you are to provide or receive the consideration (or a substantial proportion of it);

    (ii) the time when you acquired or provided the property, goods or services (or a substantial proportion of them); and


    (d) the arrangement is not a *derivative financial arrangement for any income year; and


    (e) a *fair value election does not apply to the arrangement.

    SECTION 230-455   Certain taxpayers where no significant deferral  

    230-455(1)    
    This Division does not apply in relation to your gains or losses from a *financial arrangement for any income year if:


    (a) you are:


    (i) an individual; or

    (ii) a superannuation entity (within the meaning of section 10 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ), a *superannuation fund that is not such an entity, a managed investment scheme (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ) or an entity with a similar status to such a scheme under a *foreign law relating to corporate regulation; or

    (iii) an *ADI, a *securitisation vehicle, an entity that is required to register under the Financial Sector (Collection of Data) Act 2001 or an entity that would be required to register under that Act if it were a corporation; or

    (iv) an entity other than an entity of a kind mentioned in subparagraph (i), (ii) or (iii); and


    (b) where subparagraph (a)(ii) applies - you satisfy subsection (2) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and


    (c) where subparagraph (a)(iii) applies - you satisfy subsection (3) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and


    (d) where subparagraph (a)(iv) applies - you satisfy subsection (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and


    (e) either:


    (i) the arrangement is to end not more than 12 months after you start to have it; or

    (ii) the arrangement is not a *qualifying security.

    230-455(2)    
    An entity satisfies this subsection for an income year if:


    (a) the value of the entity ' s assets (see subsection (5)) for the income year (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is the one in which the entity comes into existence; or


    (b) the value of the entity ' s assets for the immediately preceding income year (worked out at the end of that immediately preceding income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is an income year after the one in which the entity comes into existence.

    230-455(3)    
    An entity satisfies this subsection for an income year if:


    (a) the entity ' s *aggregated turnover for the income year (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $20 million if the income year is the one in which the entity comes into existence; or


    (b) the entity ' s aggregated turnover for the immediately preceding income year (worked out at the end of that immediately preceding income year) is less than $20 million if the income year is an income year after the one in which the entity comes into existence.

    230-455(4)    
    An entity satisfies this subsection for an income year if:


    (a) either:


    (i) the entity ' s *aggregated turnover for the income year (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is the one in which the entity comes into existence; or

    (ii) the entity ' s aggregated turnover for the immediately preceding income year (worked out at the end of that immediately preceding income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is an income year after the one in which the entity comes into existence; and


    (b) either:


    (i) the value of the entity ' s financial assets (see subsection (5)) for the income year (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is the one in which the entity comes into existence; or

    (ii) the value of the entity ' s financial assets for the immediately preceding income year (worked out at the end of that immediately preceding income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is an income year after the one in which the entity comes into existence; and


    (c) either:


    (i) the value of the entity ' s assets (see subsection (5)) for the income year (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $300 million if the income year is the one in which the entity comes into existence; or

    (ii) the value of the entity ' s assets for the immediately preceding income year (worked out at the end of that immediately preceding income year) is less than $300 million if the income year is an income year after the one in which the entity comes into existence.

    230-455(5)    
    For the purposes of subsections (2) and (4), the value of the entity ' s assets or financial assets is to be determined in accordance with:


    (a) if the entity applies *accounting standard AAS 25 in preparation of its financial reports - that accounting standard or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph; or


    (b) if paragraph (a) does not apply and the entity prepares its financial reports in accordance with the *accounting principles - the entity ' s financial reports; or


    (c) if paragraphs (a) and (b) do not apply and the entity prepares its financial reports in accordance with an accounting standard comparable to accounting standard AAS 25 under a *foreign law - that comparable standard; or


    (d) if paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) do not apply - commercially accepted valuation principles.


    230-455(6)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to your gains or losses from a *financial arrangement for an income year if:


    (a) you have made an election under subsection (7) in that income year or an earlier income year; and


    (b) you start to have the arrangement after the beginning of the income year in which you make the election.

    230-455(7)    
    An election under this subsection is an election to have this Division apply to all of the *financial arrangements that you start to have in the income year in which the election is made or a later income year.

    230-455(8)    
    An election under subsection (7) is irrevocable.

    230-455(9)    
    This section does not apply in relation toyour gains or losses from a *financial arrangement that you start to have after a time if you are not an individual and you failed to satisfy subsection (2), (3) or (4) (as the case may be) for an income year ending before that time.

    SECTION 230-460   Various rights and/or obligations  


    Rights and/or obligations subject to an exception

    230-460(1)    
    This Division does not apply to your gains and losses from a *financial arrangement for any income year to the extent that your rights and/or obligations under the arrangement are the subject of an exception under any of the following subsections.

    Note:

    Further exceptions are also provided for in section 230-475 .



    Leasing or property arrangement

    230-460(2)    
    A right or obligation arising under:


    (a) an *arrangement to which Division 242 (about luxury car leases) applies; or


    (b) an arrangement to which Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan) applies; or


    (c) an arrangement that relates to an asset to which Division 250 (about assets put to tax preferred use) applies; or


    (d) an arrangement that, in substance or effect, depends on the use of a specific asset that is:


    (i) real property; or

    (ii) goods or a personal chattel (other than money or a *money equivalent); or

    (iii) intellectual property;
    and gives a right to control the use of the asset; or


    (e) an arrangement that is a licence to use:


    (i) real property; or

    (ii) goods or a personal chattel (other than money or a money equivalent); or

    (iii) intellectual property;

    is the subject of an exception.



    Interest in partnership or trust

    230-460(3)    
    A right carried by an interest in a partnership or a trust, or an obligation that corresponds to such a right, is the subject of an exception if:


    (a) there is only one class of interest in the partnership or trust; or


    (b) the interest is an *equity interest in the partnership or trust; or


    (c) for a right or obligation relating to a trust - the trust is managed by a funds manager or custodian, or a responsible entity (as defined in the Corporations Act 2001 ) of a registered scheme (as so defined).

    230-460(4)    


    Subsection (3) does not apply if, assuming that the *financial arrangement were a *Division 230 financial arrangement, a *fair value election, or an *election to rely on financial reports, would apply to it.

    Certain insurance policies

    230-460(5)    
    A right or obligation under a *life insurance policy is the subject of an exception unless:


    (a) you are not a *life insurance company that is the insurer under the policy; and


    (b) the policy is an annuity that is a *qualifying security.

    230-460(6)    
    A right or obligation under a *general insurance policy is the subject of an exception unless:


    (a) you are not a *general insurance company; and


    (b) the policy is a *derivative financial arrangement.

    Certain workers ' compensation arrangements

    230-460(7)    


    A right or obligation in relation to a liability for workers ' compensation claims to which Subdivision 321-C applies is the subject of an exception.

    Certain guarantees and indemnities

    230-460(8)    
    A right or obligation under a guarantee or indemnity is the subject of an exception unless:


    (a) assuming that the *financial arrangement were a *Division 230 financial arrangement, it would be the subject of a *fair value election or an *election to rely on financial reports; or


    (b) the financial arrangement is a *derivative financial arrangement; or


    (c) the guarantee or indemnity is given in relation to a financial arrangement.



    Personal arrangements and personal injury

    230-460(9)    
    The following rights and obligations are the subject of an exception:


    (a) a right to receive, or an obligation to provide, consideration for providing personal services;


    (b) a right, or obligation, arising from the administration of a deceased person ' s estate;


    (c) a right to receive, or an obligation to provide, a gift under a deed;


    (d) a right to receive, or an obligation to provide, a *financial benefit by way of maintenance:


    (i) to an individual who is or has been the *spouse of the person liable to provide the benefit; or

    (ii) to or for the benefit of an individual who is or has been a child of the person liable to provide the benefit; or

    (iii) to or for the benefit of an individual who is or has been a child of an individual who is or has been a spouse of the person liable to provide the benefit;


    (e) a right to receive, or an obligation to provide, a financial benefit in relation to personal injury to an individual;


    (f) a right to receive, or an obligation to provide, a financial benefit in relation to an injury to an individual ' s reputation.

    230-460(10)    
    Without limiting paragraph (9)(e), that paragraph applies:


    (a) even if the person to whom the *financial benefit is to be provided is not the individual who was injured; and


    (b) even if the personal injury to the individual takes the form of:


    (i) a wrong to the individual; or

    (ii) illness of the individual.
    Note:

    The person referred to in paragraph (a) may, for example, be a relative of the individual who was injured.



    Superannuation and pension benefits

    230-460(11)    
    A right to receive, or an obligation to provide, *financial benefits is the subject of an exception if the right or obligation arises from a person ' s membership of a superannuation or pension scheme, including:


    (a) a right of a dependant of a member to receive financial benefits or an obligation to provide financial benefits to a dependant of a member; and


    (b) a right or obligation arising from an interest in:


    (i) a *complying superannuation entity; or

    (ii) a *non-complying superannuation fund or *non-complying approved deposit fund; or

    (iii) an *RSA.


    Interest in controlled foreign companies

    230-460(12)    


    A right or obligation that arises under a *direct participation interest of an *attributable taxpayer in a *controlled foreign company is the subject of an exception.

    Proceeds from certain business sales

    230-460(13)    


    A right to receive, or an obligation to provide, *financial benefits arising from the sale of:


    (a) a business; or


    (b) shares in a company that operates a business; or


    (c) interests in a trust that operates a business;

    is the subject of an exception if the amounts, or the values, of those benefits are only *contingent on aspects of the economic performance of the business after the sale.



    Infrastructure borrowings

    230-460(14)    
    (Repealed by No 4 of 2018)



    Farm management deposits

    230-460(15)    


    A right to receive, or an obligation to provide, *financial benefits is the subject of an exception if:


    (a) the right or obligation is the right or obligation of an *owner of a *farm management deposit; and


    (b) the right or obligation relates to the deposit.



    Rights and obligations to which section 121EK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies

    230-460(16)    
    A right or obligation that arises because of a payment of an amount to which section 121EK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies is the subject of an exception.

    Forestry managed investment scheme interests

    230-460(17)    
    A right or obligation under a *forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme in relation to which you can claim deductions under Division 394 is the subject of an exception.

    Exploration benefits

    230-460(17A)    


    A right or obligation that arises because of the provision of an *exploration benefit under a *farm-in farm-out arrangement is the subject of an exception.

    Regulations may provide for exceptions

    230-460(18)    
    A right or obligation of a kind specified in the regulations for the purposes of this subsection is the subject of an exception.

    SECTION 230-465   Ceasing to have a financial arrangement in certain circumstances  

    230-465(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you cease to have a *financial arrangement (or part of a financial arrangement); and


    (b) you make a loss from ceasing to have the arrangement (or that part of the arrangement); and


    (c) if the arrangement is a marketable security (within the meaning of section 70B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ):


    (i) you did not acquire the arrangement in the ordinary course of trading on a securities market (within the meaning of that section); and

    (ii) at the time you acquired the arrangement, it was not open to you to acquire an identical financial arrangement in the ordinary course of trading on a securities market; and


    (d) if the arrangement is a marketable security - you did not dispose of the arrangement in the course of trading on a securities market; and


    (e) it would be concluded that you ceased to have the arrangement wholly or partly because there was an apprehension or belief that the other party or other parties to the arrangement were, or would be likely to be, unable or unwilling to discharge all their liabilities to pay amounts under the arrangement.

    230-465(2)    
    The amount of the loss is reduced by so much of that amount as is a loss of capital or a loss of a capital nature.

    Note:

    However, the amount by which the loss is reduced is a capital loss.


    230-465(3)    
    In applying paragraph (1)(e), you must have regard to:


    (a) the financial position of the other party or parties to the *financial arrangement; and


    (b) the perceptions of the financial position of the other party or parties to the arrangement; and


    (c) other relevant matters.

    SECTION 230-470  

    230-470   Forgiveness of commercial debts  


    If a gain that you make from a *financial arrangement arises from the *forgiveness of a debt to which Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G apply, the gain is reduced by:


    (a) if section 245-90 (about agreements to forgo capital losses or deductions) applies - the debt's provisional net forgiven amount mentioned in that section; or


    (b) if that section does not apply - the debt's *net forgiven amount.

    Note:

    Section 51AAA (about a net capital gains limit) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 also has the effect of preventing you from deducting losses.

    SECTION 230-475   Clarifying exceptions  


    Exceptions

    230-475(1)    
    To avoid doubt, this Division does not apply to your gains and losses from a *financial arrangement for any income year to the extent that your rights and/or obligations are the subject of an exception under any of the following subsections.

    230-475(2)    
    This section is not intended to limit, expand or otherwise affect the operation of sections 230-45 to 230-55 (which tell you what is covered by the concept of financial arrangement ) in relation to rights and/or obligations other than those dealt with in this section.

    Retirement village and residential or flexible care arrangements

    230-475(3)    
    The following rights and obligations are the subject of an exception:


    (a) a right or obligation arising under a *retirement village residence contract;


    (b) a right or obligation arising under a *retirement village services contract;


    (c) a right or obligation arising under an *arrangement under which *residential care or *flexible care is provided.

    230-475(4)    
    For the purposes of subsection (3):


    (a) a retirement village residence contract is a contract that gives rise to a right to occupy *residential premises in a *retirement village; and


    (b) a retirement village services contract is a contract under which a resident of a retirement village is provided with general or personal services in the retirement village.

    SECTION 230-480   Treatment of gains in form of franked distribution etc.  

    230-480(1)    
    This section applies if a gain you make from a *financial arrangement is in the form of:


    (a) a *franked distribution (including a franked distribution that *flows indirectly to you); or


    (b) a right to receive a franked distribution (including a franked distribution that will flow indirectly to you).

    230-480(2)    
    This Division does not apply to the gain to the extent that the *franked distribution has a *franked part.

    SECTION 230-481  

    230-481   Registered emissions units  


    A *registered emissions unit is exempt from this Division.

    Subdivision 230-I - Other provisions  

    SECTION 230-485   Effect of change of residence - rules for particular methods  

    230-485(1)    
    The object of this section is to deal with your gains and losses for an income year in which you change residence by:


    (a) allocating the gains and losses to your periods of Australian and foreign residence in that income year; and


    (b) determining the assessability of the gains and the deductibility of the losses according to:


    (i) your residency in each period; and

    (ii) the sources of the gains and the connection of the losses with your assessable income.

    230-485(2)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you are a foreign resident for part of an income year (the foreign residency period ) and an Australian resident for the other part of the income year (the Australian residency period ); and


    (b) section 230-490 does not apply in respect of the change of residence.

    Note:

    See section 230-490 if you change residence, and after the change the gains and losses you make from the arrangement are not assessable or deductible under this Division.



    Realisation method

    230-485(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies if:


    (a) you have a *financial arrangement at the time (the residence change time ):


    (i) you cease to be an Australian resident; or

    (ii) you become an Australian resident; and


    (b) you apply the realisation method to determine the amount of a gain or loss you make from the arrangement.

    230-485(4)    
    You are taken for the purposes of this Division:


    (a) to have disposed of the arrangement just before the residence change time for its fair value just before that time; and


    (b) to have acquired the arrangement again at the residence change time for its fair value at that time.

    Accruals and hedging financial arrangement methods

    230-485(5)    
    Subsection (6) applies if:


    (a) assuming that you disregarded this section and subsection 230-40(2) , you would apply the accruals or hedging financial arrangement method to determine the amount of:


    (i) a gain included in your assessable income under section 230-15 for the income year; or

    (ii) a loss you can deduct under section 230-15 for the income year; and


    (b) subsection (4) does not apply in relation to any gain or loss under the arrangement.

    230-485(6)    
    Apply that method by apportioning the gain or loss on a reasonable basis between those periods so as to work out:


    (a) a gain or loss from the arrangement for the foreign residency period; and


    (b) a gain or loss from the arrangement for the Australian residency period.

    Fair value, foreign exchange retranslation and financial reports methods

    230-485(7)    
    Subsection (8) applies if:


    (a) assuming that you disregarded this section and subsection 230-40(2) , you would apply the fair value or foreign exchange retranslation method or the method of relying on your financial reports to determine the amount of:


    (i) a gain included in your assessable income under section 230-15 for the income year; or

    (ii) a loss you can deduct under section 230-15 for the income year; and


    (b) subsection (4) does not apply in relation to any gain or loss under the arrangement.

    230-485(8)    
    Apply that method to work out:


    (a) a gain or loss from the arrangement for the foreign residency period; and


    (b) a gain or loss from the arrangement for the Australian residency period.

    SECTION 230-490   Effect of change of residence - disposal and reacquisition etc. after ceasing to be Australian resident where no further recognised gains or losses from arrangement  

    230-490(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you cease to be an Australian resident at a particular time (the residence change time ); and


    (b) you have a *financial arrangement at the residence change time; and


    (c) at the residence change time you expect that any gains and losses you make from the arrangement after that time will not be assessable or deductible under this Division.

    230-490(2)    
    You are taken for the purposes of this Division:


    (a) to have disposed of the arrangement just before that time for its fair value just before that time; and


    (b) to have acquired the arrangement again at the residence change time for its fair value at that time.

    SECTION 230-495   Effect of change of accounting principles or standards  

    230-495(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) one of these methods apply to take account of a gain or loss you make from a *financial arrangement:


    (i) the fair value method provided for in Subdivision 230-C ; or

    (ii) the foreign exchange retranslation method provided for in Subdivision 230-D ; or

    (iii) the method of relying on your financial reports provided for in Subdivision 230-F ; and


    (b) there is a change in, or in the application of, the relevant principles or standards (as mentioned in section 230-230 (fair value method), 230-280 (foreign exchange retranslation method) or 230-420 (method of relying on financial reports)) that apply in relation to the arrangement; and


    (c) that change applies to a particular income year and later years; and


    (d) as a result of the change, those principles or standards require you to recognise in your statement of financial position an amount (the equity amount ), in order to avoid the need to increase or decrease gains or losses recognised in profit or loss from the financial arrangement in respect of previous income years.


    230-495(2)    
    If the equity amount is positive, include in your assessable income for the particular income year mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) so much of it as relates to the *financial arrangement mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

    230-495(3)    
    If the equity amount is negative, you are entitled to a deduction for the particular income year mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) equal to so much of it as relates to the *financial arrangement mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

    SECTION 230-500  

    230-500   Comparable foreign accounting and auditing standards  


    The regulations may:


    (a) specify that particular standards that apply under a *foreign law are to be taken for the purposes of this Division to be comparable to the *accounting principles; and


    (b) specify that particular standards that apply under a foreign law are to be taken for the purposes of this Division to be comparable to the *auditing principles.

    SECTION 230-505   Financial arrangement as consideration for provision or acquisition of a thing  

    230-505(1)    
    This section applies if you start or cease to have a *Division 230 financial arrangement as consideration for the provision or acquisition of a thing.

    230-505(2)    
    Work out the *market value of the thing at the time at which you (in fact) provide or acquire it. For the purposes of applying this Act to you, treat the amount:


    (a) you obtain for providing the thing; or


    (b) you provide for acquiring the thing;

    as being that market value.

    Note 1:

    The amount may be relevant, for example, for the purposes of applying the provisions of this Act dealing with capital gains, capital allowances or trading stock to the thing.

    Note 2:

    This subsection does not affect the financial benefits received or provided under the financial arrangement from you starting or ceasing to have it (except in the circumstances described in Note 3). However:

  • (a) the market value of the thing will be, or form part of, those financial benefits for the purposes of section 230-445 ; and
  • (b) in the case of a non arm ' s length transaction, the amount of those financial benefits may be affected by section 230-510 .
  • Note 3:

    If the thing is itself a Division 230 financial arrangement and subsection (3) does not apply, this subsection will determine the financial benefits received or provided under the financial arrangement from you starting or ceasing to have it.


    230-505(3)    
    Subsection (2) does not apply if:


    (a) you start or cease to have the *financial arrangement as mentioned in subsection (1) under an arrangement (the starting or ceasing arrangement ); and


    (b) the thing is itself a *Division 230 financial arrangement; and


    (c) the starting or ceasing arrangement is not itself a Division 230 financial arrangement.

    Example:

    An arrangement for exchanging a share subject to Subdivision 230-C for another share subject to Subdivision 230-C , where the arrangement itself is not a Division 230 financial arrangement.


    230-505(4)    
    For the purposes of this section:


    (a) treat yourself as providing a thing to another entity if:


    (i) you have provided, or are to provide, the thing to the other entity; or

    (ii) you cease to have, have ceased to have or are to cease to have, the thing; or

    (iii) the other entity starts to have, has started having or is to start to have, the thing; and


    (b) treat yourself as acquiring a thing if:


    (i) another entity has provided, or is to provide, the thing to you; or

    (ii) another entity ceases to have, has ceased to have or is to cease to have, the thing; or

    (iii) you start to have, have started to have or are to start to have, the thing.

    230-505(5)    
    For the purposes of this section, treat part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement as a Division 230 financial arrangement.

    230-505(6)    
    Without limiting subsection (1), the thing provided, or the thing acquired, need not be a tangible thing and may take the form of services, conferring a right, incurring an obligation or extinguishing or varying a right or obligation.

    230-505(7)    
    To avoid doubt, this section applies even if your starting or ceasing to have the *financial arrangement mentioned in subsection (1) is only part of the consideration for the provision or acquisition of the thing.

    230-505(8)    
    For the purposes of this section, treat your starting or ceasing to have the *financial arrangement mentioned in subsection (1) as consideration for the provision or acquisition of the thing if that starting or ceasing is, in substance or effect, done for the provision or acquisition of the thing.

    Example:

    Starting to have a financial arrangement in satisfaction of an obligation, where the obligation itself was incurred as consideration for the thing.


    SECTION 230-510   Non-arm ' s length dealings in relation to financial arrangement  

    230-510(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a balancing adjustment is made under Subdivision 230-G in relation to a *Division 230 financial arrangement you have; and


    (b) if the balancing adjustment was made because of paragraph 230-435(1)(b) or (d) (cessations without transfer) - the arrangement is not a *debt interest or loan.

    Non-arm ' s length transaction resulting in you starting to have the arrangement

    230-510(2)    
    Subsection (3) applies if the parties to the dealing that resulted in you starting to have the arrangement were not dealing at *arm ' s length in relation to the dealing.

    230-510(3)    
    For the purposes of this Division:


    (a) disregard the amount of the *financial benefit (if any) that you provided or received in relation to you starting to have the arrangement; and


    (b) instead, treat yourself as having provided or received a financial benefit in relation to you starting to have the arrangement that is equal to the amount of the financial benefit that you would have provided or received if the parties to the dealing mentioned in subsection (2) were dealing at *arm ' s length in relation to the dealing.

    Non-arm ' s length transaction resulting in change of an amount of a financial benefit that you provided or received under the financial arrangement

    230-510(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies if the parties to a dealing that resulted in a change of an amount of a *financial benefit that you provide or receive under the *financial arrangement were not dealing at *arm ' s length in relation to the dealing.

    230-510(5)    
    For the purposes of this Division:


    (a) disregard the amount of the *financial benefit (if any) that you provide or receive under the *financial arrangement as a result of the dealing; and


    (b) instead, treat yourself as providing or receiving a financial benefit under the financial arrangement as a result of the dealing that is equal to the amount of the financial benefit that you would have provided or received if the parties to the dealing were dealing at *arm ' s length in relation to the dealing.

    Non-arm ' s length transaction resulting in balancing adjustment

    230-510(6)    
    Subsection (7) applies if the parties to the dealing that resulted in the balancing adjustment mentioned in subsection (1) being made were not dealing at *arm ' s length in relation to the dealing.

    230-510(7)    
    For the purposes of this Division:


    (a) disregard the amount of the *financial benefit (if any) that you provide or receive in relation to the balancing adjustment; and


    (b) instead, treat yourself as providing or receiving a financial benefit in relation to the balancing adjustment that is equal to the amount of the financial benefit that you would have provided or received if the parties to the dealing mentioned in subsection (6) were dealing at *arm ' s length in relation to the dealing.

    SECTION 230-515   Arm ' s length dealings in relation to financial arrangement - adjustment to gain or loss in certain situations  

    230-515(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) disregarding this Division, a provision mentioned in subsection (2) makes an adjustment to an amount (including a nil amount) (the relevant amount ); and


    (b) the relevant amount is relevant in determining the amount of a gain or loss you make from a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

    230-515(2)    
    The provisions are as follows:


    (a) section 52A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;


    (b) (Repealed by No 93 of 2011)


    (c) Division 16J of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;


    (d) Division 16K of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;


    (e) item 3 of the table in subsection 245-65(1) of this Act;


    (f) section 775-40 of this Act.


    230-515(3)    
    In determining the amount of the gain or loss, treat the relevant amount as having been adjusted by the provision mentioned in subsection (2).

    230-515(4)    
    However, if the circumstances that gave rise to the adjustment result in section 230-510 having the effect of altering the amount of the gain or loss, do not treat the relevant amount as having been adjusted under subsection (3) to the extent of that alteration.

    SECTION 230-520   Disregard gains or losses covered by value shifting regime  

    230-520(1)    
    Disregard a gain or loss under this Division from a *financial arrangement to the extent that it is attributable to:


    (a) a shifting of value that has consequences under Division 723 ; or


    (b) a *direct value shift that has consequences under Division 725 ; or


    (c) an *indirect value shift that has consequences under Division 727 ; or


    (d) a shifting of value that has consequences analogous to those under Division 725 or 727 under a repealed provision of this Act or of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    230-520(2)    


    Determine whether a shifting of value has the consequences mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) on the assumption that a *realisation event in respect of all or part of the *financial arrangement happens in the income year for the gain or loss.

    SECTION 230-522   Adjusting a gain or loss that gives rise to a hybrid mismatch  

    230-522(1)    
    This section applies if a provision of Division 832 would, apart from section 832-785 , apply to make not allowable an amount (the relevant amount ) that is all or a part of the deduction for:


    (a) a loss from a *Division 230 financial arrangement; or


    (b) an amount treated under section 832-790 as a separate loss from a Division 230 financial arrangement.

    230-522(2)    
    The following have effect:


    (a) if (disregarding section 832-790 ) you made a loss from the *financial arrangement, and the relevant amount does not exceed the amount of the loss - the amount of the loss you made is reduced by the relevant amount;


    (b) if (disregarding section 832-790 ) you made a loss from the financial arrangement, and the relevant amount exceeds the amount of the loss:


    (i) you do not make a loss from the financial arrangement; and

    (ii) instead, you make a gain from the financial arrangement equal to the amount of the excess;


    (c) if (disregarding section 832-790 ) you made a gain from the financial arrangement - the amount of the gain is increased by the relevant amount.

    230-522(3)    
    The effect of subsection (2) is to be disregarded for the purposes of paragraph (c) of step 1 and paragraph (c) of step 2 of subsection 230-445(1) (about balancing adjustments).

    SECTION 230-525  

    230-525   Consolidated financial reports  


    For the purposes of this Division, treat a financial report prepared by another entity as being prepared by you if:


    (a) the other entity is a *connected entity of yours; and


    (b) the report is a consolidated financial report that deals with both your affairs and the affairs of the connected entity; and


    (c) the report properly reflects your affairs.

    SECTION 230-527   Elections - reporting documents of foreign ADIs  

    230-527(1)    
    So much of a Statement of Financial Performance and a Statement of Financial Position, given to * APRA by a foreign ADI (within the meaning of the Banking Act 1959 ) as required under section 13 of the Financial Sector (Collection of Data) Act 2001 , as:


    (a) cover the activities of an * Australian permanent establishment of the foreign ADI for the year; and


    (b) are prepared in accordance with the recognition and measurement standards under the * accounting principles; and


    (c) are audited in accordance with the * auditing principles;

    are treated, for the purposes of the provisions mentioned in subsection (2), as being a financial report for a year:


    (d) prepared by the foreign ADI in accordance with the accounting principles; and


    (e) audited in accordance with the auditing principles.

    230-527(2)    
    The provisions are as follows:


    (a) sections 230-150 to 230-165 (election for portfolio treatment of fees);


    (b) sections 230-210 to 230-220 (fair value election);


    (c) sections 230-255 to 230-265 (foreign exchange retranslation election);


    (d) sections 230-315 to 230-335 (hedging financial arrangement election);


    (e) sections 230-395 , 230-400 , 230-410 and 230-430 (election to rely on financial reports).


    Subdivision 230-J - Additional operation of Division  

    SECTION 230-530   Additional operation of Division  


    Foreign currency

    230-530(1)    


    This Division also applies to *foreign currency as if the currency were a right that constituted a *financial arrangement.

    Non-equity shares

    230-530(2)    
    This Division also applies to a *non-equity share in a company as if the share were a right that constituted a *financial arrangement.

    Commodities held by traders

    230-530(3)    
    This Division also applies to a commodity that you hold as if the commodity were a right that constituted a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you are an entity that trades or deals both in:


    (i) that commodity; and

    (ii) financial arrangements whose values change in response to changes in the price or value of that commodity; and


    (b) you hold that commodity for the purposes of dealing in the commodity; and


    (c) a *fair value election or an *election to rely on financial reports applies to financial arrangements that you start to have when you start to have the commodity; and


    (d) the commodity is an asset that you are required (whether or not as a result of a choice you make) by:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report - comparable standards for accounting that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a *foreign law;
    to classify or designate, in your financial reports, as at fair value through profit or loss.

    Offsetting commodity contracts held by traders

    230-530(4)    
    This Division also applies to a contract to which you are a party as if the contract were a *financial arrangement if:


    (a) you have a right to receive or an obligation to provide a commodity under the contract; and


    (b) you have a practice of dealing in the commodity through the performance of offsetting contracts to receive and provide the commodity; and


    (c) you do not have, as your sole or dominant purpose for entering into the contract, the purpose of receiving or delivering the commodity as part of your expected purchase, sale or usage requirements; and


    (d) a *fair value election or an *election to rely on financial reports applies to financial arrangements that you start to have when you enter into the contract; and


    (e) the contract is an asset or liability that you are required (whether or not as a result of a choice you make) by:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report - comparable standards for accounting that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a *foreign law;
    to classify or designate, in your financial reports, as at fair value through profit or loss.

    Division 235 - Particular financial transactions  

    Guide to Division 235  

    SECTION 235-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division is about the tax treatment of particular kinds of financial transactions.

    Subdivision 235-I - Instalment trusts  

    Guide to Subdivision 235-I

    SECTION 235-805   What this Subdivision is about  


    An entity that invests in an asset through an instalment warrant, instalment receipt, or other similar arrangement, is treated for most income tax purposes as if it had invested in the asset directly.

    A regulated superannuation fund that invests in an asset through a limited recourse borrowing is treated in the same way.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    235-810 Object of this Subdivision
    235-815 Application of Subdivision
    235-820 Look-through treatment for instalment trusts
    235-825 Meaning of instalment trust and instalment trust asset
    235-830 What trusts are covered - instalment trust arrangements
    235-835 Requirement for underlying investments to be listed or widely held
    235-840 What trusts are covered - limited recourse borrowings by regulated superannuation funds
    235-845 Interactions with other provisions

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 235-810  

    235-810   Object of this Subdivision  


    The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that, for most income tax purposes, the consequences of ownership of an *instalment trust asset flow to the entity that has the beneficial interest in the asset, instead of to the trustee.

    SECTION 235-815   Application of Subdivision  

    235-815(1)    
    This Subdivision applies to:


    (a) the entity that has the beneficial interest in an *instalment trust asset as the beneficiary of an *instalment trust; and


    (b) the trustee of the instalment trust.

    235-815(2)    
    This Subdivision applies for the purposes of this Act, apart from:


    (a) Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which is about tax file numbers); and


    (b) Subdivisions 12-E , 12-F and 12-H in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (which are about PAYG withholding).

    Joint investments

    235-815(3)    
    This Subdivision applies in relation to 2 or more entities that hold an interest in a trust as joint tenants, or as tenants in common, in the same way it applies in relation to a single entity that holds such an interest.

    Note:

    Each investor that is treated by this Subdivision as jointly owning an instalment trust asset is treated for CGT purposes as owning a separate asset: see section 108-7 .


    SECTION 235-820   Look-through treatment for instalment trusts  

    235-820(1)   
    If an entity (the investor ) has a beneficial interest in an *instalment trust asset under an *instalment trust, the asset is treated as being the investor ' s asset (instead of being an asset of the trust).

    Example:

    A dividend in respect of the asset is paid to the trustee. It is treated (but not for the purposes of the PAYG withholding provisions mentioned in paragraph 235-815(2)(b) ) as if it had been paid directly to the investor.


    235-820(2)    
    An act done in relation to an *instalment trust asset of an *instalment trust by the trustee of the trust is treated as if the act had been done by the investor (instead of by the trustee).

    Example:

    A trustee disposes of the asset. Any capital gain or loss is made by the investor, not by the trustee.


    235-820(3)    
    The investor is treated as having the *instalment trust asset in the same circumstances as the investor actually has the interest in the *instalment trust.

    235-820(4)    
    Without limiting subsection (3), the circumstances include:


    (a) whether the interest is held on capital account or on revenue account; and


    (b) whether the interest is held as a joint tenant or tenant in common.

    235-820(5)    
    Any consequence arising under the *GST Act for the trustee of the *instalment trust, as a result of anything done in relation to the *instalment trust asset, is treated as if it had arisen for the investor (instead of for the trustee), even if that consequence would not have arisen had the thing been done by or to the investor.

    Example:

    If the trustee has a net input tax credit under the GST Act, the investor must apply the credit to reduce the investor ' s cost base for the instalment trust asset (even if the investor is not registered or required to be registered for GST purposes): see section 103-30 .


    SECTION 235-825   Meaning of instalment trust and instalment trust asset  

    235-825(1)    
    A trust is an instalment trust if:


    (a) the trust is covered by section 235-830 (about instalment trust arrangements) and satisfies the requirements in section 235-835 (about requirements for underlying investments to be listed or widely held); or


    (b) the trust is covered by section 235-840 (about limited recourse borrowings by *regulated superannuation funds).

    235-825(2)    
    An instalment trust asset is an asset that is, or is part of, the underlying investment of an *instalment trust (as mentioned in section 235-830 or 235-840 , as the case requires).

    SECTION 235-830   What trusts are covered - instalment trust arrangements  

    235-830(1)    
    This section covers a trust if, under an *arrangement:


    (a) an entity (the investor ) makes a *borrowing, or is provided with credit; and


    (b) to secure the borrowing or provision of credit, the trustee of the trust acquires an asset or assets (the underlying investment ); and


    (c) the investor has a beneficial interest in the underlying investment as the sole beneficiary of the trust; and


    (d) for a provision of credit - the credit was provided to the investor to acquire the asset, or one of the assets, that comprises the underlying investment; and


    (e) the investor is entitled to the benefit of all income from the underlying investment; and


    (f) the investor is entitled to acquire legal ownership of the underlying investment on discharging its obligations relating to the borrowing or provision of credit.

    Note:

    For paragraph (c), the sole beneficiary of the trust may be 2 or more entities that have an interest in the trust as joint tenants or tenants in common: see subsection 235-815(3) .


    235-830(2)    
    However, this section does not cover a trust if the investor is a trustee of a *regulated superannuation fund and the *arrangement includes a *borrowing.

    235-830(3)    
    This section does not cover a trust if the underlying investment is subject to any charge, security or other encumbrance (apart from any charge securing the obligations relating to the *borrowing or provision of credit).

    SECTION 235-835   Requirement for underlying investments to be listed or widely held  

    235-835(1)    
    A trust satisfies the requirements in this section if:


    (a) each asset that is, or is part of, the underlying investment is:


    (i) a *share, a unit in a unit trust or a stapled security; or

    (ii) an interest in an entity that holds an interest in a share, a unit in a unit trust or a stapled security either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities; and


    (b) each such share, unit or stapled security:


    (i) is listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange; or

    (ii) meets the widely held requirement set out in the applicable item of the following table.


    Widely held requirements
    Item Column 1
    Type of asset
    Column 2
    Widely held requirement
    1 A *share in a company The company is a *widely held company
    2 A unit in a unit trust The unit trust is a widely held unit trust as defined in section 272-105 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
    3 A stapled security All companies involved are *widely held companies and all trusts involved are such widely held unit trusts


    235-835(2)    
    A *share, unit in a unit trust or a stapled security that fails the widely held requirement set out in the table in subsection (1) is treated as satisfying that requirement if the failure:


    (a) is of a temporary nature only; and


    (b) is caused by circumstances outside the investor ' s control.

    235-835(3)    
    In applying subsection (1), disregard an asset, or the cash proceeds from disposing of an asset, if:


    (a) the trustee became entitled to the asset in respect of a *share, unit or stapled security that was, or was part of, the underlying investment just before the entitlement arose; and


    (b) the asset is not a *share, unit in a unit trust, or stapled security; and


    (c) if the asset is an interest in an entity, or a right, option or similar interest that gives the holder an entitlement to acquire an interest in an entity:


    (i) an interest in the entity is listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange; or

    (ii) the entity meets a widely held requirement set out in column 2 of item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection (1); and


    (d) the underlying investment comprises one or more other assets that are not disregarded under this subsection.

    Example:

    Examples of the types of assets disregarded by this subsection are:

  • (a) assets that represent distributions and capital payments in respect of the underlying investment; and
  • (b) bonus rights issued in respect of the underlying investment.

  • 235-835(4)    
    Despite subsections (1) to (3), the underlying investment does not satisfy the requirement in this section if an asset that is, or is part of, the underlying investment is an *ESS interest to which Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies.

    SECTION 235-840  

    235-840   What trusts are covered - limited recourse borrowings by regulated superannuation funds  


    This section covers a trust if:


    (a) under an *arrangement, an asset or assets (the underlying investment ) is acquired by the trustee of the trust for the benefit of a trustee of a *regulated superannuation fund to secure a *borrowing; and


    (b) until the borrowing is repaid, the arrangement is covered by:


    (i) the exception in subsection 67A(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (which is about limited recourse borrowing arrangements); or

    (ii) the exception in former subsection 67(4A) of that Act (which was about instalment warrants).

    SECTION 235-845   Interactions with other provisions  

    235-845(1)    
    Section 106-50 (about absolutely entitled beneficiaries) does not apply to an *instalment trust asset.

    235-845(2)    
    Section 106-60 (about securities, charges and encumbrances) does not apply to an *instalment trust asset.

    235-845(3)    
    Nothing in this Subdivision limits Division 247 (which is about capital protected borrowings).

    Note:

    Division 247 may apply to an arrangement to which this Subdivision applies.


    Division 240 - Arrangements treated as a sale and loan  

    Guide to Division 240  

    SECTION 240-1   What this Division is about  


    For income tax purposes, some arrangements (such ashire purchase agreements) are recharacterised as a sale of property, combined with a loan, by the notional seller to the notional buyer, to finance the purchase price.

    SECTION 240-3   How the recharacterisation affects the notional seller  


    Effect of notional sale

    240-3(1)    
    The consideration for the notional sale is either the price stated as the cost or value of the property or its arm's length value. If the notional seller is disposing of the property as trading stock, the normal consequences of disposing of trading stock follow. In particular, the notional seller will be assessed on the sale price.

    240-3(2)    
    Where the property is not trading stock the notional seller's assessable income will include any profit made by the notional seller on the notional sale or on the sale of the property after a notional re-acquisition.

    Effect of notional loan

    240-3(3)    
    The notional seller's assessable income will include notional interest over the period of the loan.

    Other effects

    240-3(4)    
    These effects displace the income tax consequences that would otherwise arise from the arrangement. For example, the actual payments to the notional seller are not included in its assessable income. Also, the notional seller loses the right to deduct amounts under Division 40 (about capital allowances).


    SECTION 240-7   How the recharacterisation affects the notional buyer  


    Effect of notional purchase

    240-7(1)    
    The cost of the acquisition is either the price stated as the cost or value of the property or its arm's length value. If the notional buyer is acquiring the property as trading stock, the normal consequences of acquiring trading stock follow. In particular, the notional buyer can usually deduct the purchase price.

    240-7(2)    
    If the property is not trading stock, the notional buyer may be able to deduct amounts for the expenditure under Division 40 (about capital allowances).



    Effect of notional loan

    240-7(3)    
    The notional buyer may be able to deduct notional interest payments over the period of the loan.

    Other effects

    240-7(4)    
    These effects displace the income tax consequences that would otherwise arise from the arrangement. For example, the notional buyer cannot deduct the actual payments to the notional seller.

    Subdivision 240-A - Application and scope of Division  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 240-10  

    240-10   Application of this Division  


    An *arrangement is treated as a notional sale and notional loan if:


    (a) the arrangement is listed in the table below; and


    (b) the arrangement relates to the kind of property listed in the table; and


    (c) any conditions listed in the table are satisfied.

    Special provisions that apply to particular arrangements are also listed in the table.


    Table
    Table
    This Division applies to:
    *Arrangements of this kind: That relate to this kind of property: If these conditions are satisfied: Special provisions:
    1 *Hire purchase agreement Any goods None See Subdivision 240-I

    SECTION 240-15  

    240-15   Scope of Division  


    This Division has effect for the purposes of this Act and for the purposes of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 other than:


    (a) Parts 3-1 and 3-3 of this Act (capital gains tax); and


    (b) Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (certain payments to non-residents etc.).

    Subdivision 240-B - The notional sale and notional loan  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 240-17   Who is the notional seller and the notional buyer?  

    240-17(1)    
    An entity is the notional seller if it is a party to the *arrangement and:


    (a) actually owns the property; or


    (b) is the owner of the property because of a previous operation of this Division.

    240-17(2)    
    An entity is the notional buyer if it is a party to the *arrangement and, under the arrangement, has the *right to use the property.

    Example:

    If the arrangement is a hire purchase agreement, the finance provider will be the notional seller and the hirer will be the notional buyer.


    SECTION 240-20   Notional sale of property by notional seller and notional acquisition of property by notional buyer  

    240-20(1)    
    The *notional seller is taken to have disposed of the property by way of sale to the *notional buyer, and the notional buyer is taken to have acquired it, at the start of the *arrangement.

    240-20(2)    
    The *notional buyer is taken to own the property until:


    (a) the *arrangement ends; or


    (b) the notional buyer becomes the *notional seller under a later arrangement to which this Division applies.


    SECTION 240-25   Notional loan by notional seller to notional buyer  

    240-25(1)    
    On entering into the *arrangement, the *notional seller is taken to have made a loan (the notional loan ) to the *notional buyer.

    240-25(2)    
    The notional loan is for a period:


    (a) starting at the start of the *arrangement; and


    (b) ending on the day on which the arrangement is to cease to have effect or, if the arrangement is of indefinite duration, on the day on which it would be reasonable to conclude, having regard to the terms and conditions of the arrangement, that the arrangement will cease to have effect.

    240-25(3)    
    The notional loan is of an amount (the notional loan principal ) equal to the consideration for the sale of the property less any amount paid, or credited by the *notional seller as having been paid, by the *notional buyer to the notional seller, at or before the start of the *arrangement, for the cost of the property.

    Note:

    Section 240-80 affects the amount of the notional loan principal where the arrangement is an extension or renewal of another arrangement.


    240-25(4)    


    The notional loan is subject to payment of interest.

    240-25(5)    
    The consideration for the sale of the property by the *notional seller, and the cost of the acquisition of the property by the *notional buyer, are each taken to have been:


    (a) if an amount is stated to be the cost or value of the property for the purposes of the *arrangement and the notional seller and the notional buyer were dealing with each other at *arm's length in connection with the arrangement - the amount so stated; or


    (b) otherwise - the amount that could reasonably have been expected to have been paid by the notional buyer for the purchase of the property if:


    (i) the notional seller had actually sold the property to the notional buyer at the start of the arrangement; and

    (ii) the notional seller and the notional buyer were dealing with each other at arm's length in connection with the sale.

    240-25(6)    


    The notional loan principal is taken to be repaid, and the interest is taken to be paid, by the making of the payments under the *arrangement.

    Subdivision 240-C - Amounts to be included in notional seller ' s assessable income  

    SECTION 240-30   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision provides for the inclusion in the notional seller ' s assessable income of:

  • (a) amounts (notional interest) on account of the interest for the notional loan that the notional seller is taken to have made to the notional buyer; and
  • (b) any profit made by the notional seller:
  • (i) on the notional sale of the property to the notional buyer; or
  • (ii) on a sale of the property after any notional re-acquisition of the property by the notional seller.
  • Operative provisions

    SECTION 240-35   Amounts to be included in notional seller's assessable income  


    Notional interest

    240-35(1)    
    The *notional seller's assessable income of an income year includes the *notional interest for *arrangement payment periods, and parts of arrangement payment periods, in the income year.

    Profit on notional sale

    240-35(2)    
    If the property is not *trading stock of the *notional seller and the consideration for the notional sale of the property exceeds the cost of the acquisition of the property by the notional seller, the excess is included in the notional seller's assessable income of the income year of the notional sale.

    Profit on actual sale after notional re-acquisition

    240-35(3)    
    If:


    (a) the *notional seller is taken under this Division to have re-acquired the property from the *notional buyer; and


    (b) the notional seller afterwards sells the property; and


    (c) the consideration for the sale exceeds the cost of the re-acquisition;

    the excess is included in the notional seller's assessable income of the income year in which the sale occurred.


    SECTION 240-40   Arrangement payments not to be included in notional seller's assessable income  

    240-40(1)    
    The *arrangement payments that the *notional seller receives, or is entitled to receive, under the *arrangement:


    (a) are not to be included in the *notional seller's assessable income of any income year; but


    (b) are not taken to be *exempt income of the notional seller.

    240-40(2)    
    However, those *arrangement payments are taken into account in calculating *notional interest that is included in the *notional seller's assessable income under section 240-35 .

    240-40(3)    
    A loss or outgoing incurred by the *notional seller in deriving any such *arrangement payments is not taken to be a loss or outgoing incurred by the notional seller in relation to gaining or producing *exempt income.


    Subdivision 240-D - Deductions allowable to notional buyer  

    SECTION 240-45   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision provides that the notional buyer may, in certain circumstances, be entitled to deductions for the notional interest for the notional loan that the notional seller is taken to have made to the notional buyer.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 240-50   Extent to which deductions are allowable to notional buyer  

    240-50(1)    
    The *notional buyer is only entitled to deduct *notional interest for an income year to the extent that the notional buyer would, apart from this Division, have been entitled to deduct *arrangement payments for that income year if no part of those payments were capital in nature.

    240-50(2)    
    The *notional buyer is entitled to deduct *notional interest for *arrangement payment periods, and parts of arrangement payment periods, in the income year.


    SECTION 240-55  

    240-55   Arrangement payments not to be deductions  


    The *notional buyer is not entitled to deduct *arrangement payments that the *notional buyer makes under the *arrangement, but those payments are taken into account in calculating *notional interest that may be deducted under section 240-50 .

    Subdivision 240-E - Notional interest and arrangement payments  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 240-60   Notional interest  

    240-60(1)    


    The * notional interest for an *arrangement payment period is worked out as follows: Calculating * notional interest

    Step 1.

    Add the *notional interest from previous *arrangement payment periods to the notional loan principal.


    Step 2.

    Subtract any *arrangement payments that have already been made or that are due but that have not been made. The result is the outstanding notional loan principal as at the start of the *arrangement payment period.


    Step 3.

    Work out the implicit interest rate for the *arrangement payment period, taking into account the *arrangement payments payable by the *notional buyer under the *arrangement and any *termination amounts.


    Step 4.

    Multiply the outstanding notional loan principal by the implicit interest rate. The result is the notional interest for the *arrangement payment period.


    240-60(2)    
    If only part of an *arrangement payment period occurs during an income year, the *notional interest for that part of the arrangement payment period is so much of the notional interest for that arrangement payment period as may appropriately be related to that income year in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

    240-60(3)    
    In calculating the implicit interest rate, if any of the relevant amounts are not known at the start of the *arrangement, a reasonable estimate of the amount is to be made and is to be used for the purposes of calculating the implicit interest rate for each income year of the *notional seller.

    240-60(4)    
    If a reasonable estimate cannot be made at that time, an estimate of the amount is to be made at the end of each income year of the *notional seller for the purposes of calculating the implicit interest rate for each income year of the notional seller.


    SECTION 240-65  

    240-65   Arrangement payments  


    An arrangement payment is an amount that the *notional buyer is required to pay under the *arrangement but does not include:


    (a) an amount in the nature of a penalty payable for failure to make a payment on time; or


    (b) a *termination amount.

    SECTION 240-70   Arrangement payment periods  

    240-70(1)    
    An * arrangement payment period is a period for which a payment under the *arrangement is allocated or expressed to be payable.

    240-70(2)    
    However, if a period exceeds 6 months, the period is not an *arrangement payment period but each of the following parts of the period is a separate arrangement payment period:


    (a) the part of the period beginning at the start of that period and ending 6 months later;


    (b) each part of the period:


    (i) beginning immediately after a part of the period that is an arrangement payment period under paragraph (a) or under a previous application of this paragraph; and

    (ii) ending 6 months after the start of that later part or at the end of the period, whichever first occurs.

    Subdivision 240-F - The end of the arrangement  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 240-75   When is the end of the arrangement?  

    240-75(1)    
    If the *arrangement is stated to cease to have effect at a particular time, it is taken for the purposes of this Division to end (even if it is extended or renewed) at the earlier of:


    (a) that time; or


    (b) the time at which the arrangement ceases to have effect (whether because the arrangement is terminated or for any other reason).

    Note:

    Section 240-80 deals with extensions and renewals.


    240-75(2)    
    An *arrangement is taken to have ended if it is extended or renewed.

    240-75(3)    
    If the *arrangement is of indefinite duration, it ends at the time at which the arrangement ceases to have effect even if the *arrangement is renewed.

    Note:

    Section 240-80 deals with extensions and renewals.


    240-75(4)    
    An *arrangement is taken to have ended if it is reasonable to conclude, having regard to the terms and conditions of the *arrangement, that the arrangement has ceased to have effect.

    240-75(5)    
    An *arrangement is also taken to have ended if the property has been lost or destroyed.


    240-78   (Repealed) SECTION 240-78 Termination amounts  
    (Repealed by No 79 of 2010 )

    SECTION 240-80   What happens if the arrangement is extended or renewed  

    240-80(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if, after the end of the *arrangement, the *notional buyer and *notional seller extend or renew the *arrangement.

    240-80(2)    
    This Division applies as if the original *arrangement has ended and the extended arrangement or renewed arrangement is a separate arrangement (the new arrangement ).

    240-80(3)    
    There is not, however, taken to be any disposal or acquisition as a result of the original arrangement ending or of the new arrangement starting and the *notional buyer does not cease to own the property.

    240-80(4)    


    Also, the notional loan principal for the new loan is:


    (a) if the *arrangement as extended or renewed states an amount as the cost or value of the property for the purposes of the extension or renewal and the *notional seller and the *notional buyer were dealing with each other at *arm's length in connection with the extension or renewal - the amount so stated; or


    (b) otherwise - the amount that could reasonably have been expected to have been paid by the notional buyer for the purchase of the property if:


    (i) the notional seller had actually sold the property to the notional buyer when the arrangement was extended or renewed; and

    (ii) the notional seller and notional buyer were dealing with each other at arm's length in connection with the sale.

    240-80(5)    


    Subdivision 240-G applies to the notional loan for the original arrangement. For that purpose, the notional loan principal for the new arrangement is taken to be a *termination amount paid to the *notional seller under the original arrangement.

    SECTION 240-85  

    240-85   What happens if an amount is paid by or on behalf of the notional buyer to acquire the property  


    If, at or after the end of the *arrangement, an amount is paid to the *notional seller by, or on behalf of, the *notional buyer to acquire the property, the following provisions have effect:


    (a) the amount paid is not included in the notional seller's assessable income;


    (b) the notional buyer cannot deduct the payment;


    (c) the notional buyer is taken to continue to own the property;


    (d) the transfer to the notional buyer of legal title to the property is not taken to be a disposal of the property by the notional seller.

    SECTION 240-90   What happens if the notional buyer ceases to have the right to use the property  

    240-90(1)    
    This section applies if, at the end of the *arrangement:


    (a) the arrangement is not extended or renewed in the way mentioned in subsection 240-80(1) ; and


    (b) no amount is paid to the *notional seller by, or on behalf of, the *notional buyer to acquire the property; and


    (c) the property is not lost or destroyed.

    240-90(2)    
    The property is taken to have been disposed of by the *notional buyer by way of sale back to the *notional seller, and to have been acquired by the *notional seller, at the end of the *arrangement.

    240-90(3)    


    The consideration for the sale of the property by the *notional buyer, and the cost of the acquisition of the property by the *notional seller, are each taken to be equal to the *market value of the property at the end of the *arrangement.

    240-90(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies where the property is a *car and if it:


    (a) had been bought from the notional seller, when this Division first applied to an *arrangement in respect of the car, by the *notional buyer for a price equal to the notional loan principal; and


    (b) had been first used by the notional buyer for any purpose in the *financial year in which that time occurred;

    the cost of the car, for the purpose of working out its decline in value for that person under Division 40 , would have been limited by section 40-230 .


    240-90(5)    
    Where an associate of the *notional buyer acquires the *car, the *cost of the car for the purposes of the application of Division 40 to the associate is taken to be whichever is the lesser of:


    (a) the sum of:


    (i) the amount that would have been the *adjustable value of the car at that time for the purposes of the application of that Division to the notional buyer if the notional buyer were not taken under this Division to have disposed of the car; and

    (ii) any amount that is included in the notional buyer's assessable income under section 40-285 because the notional buyer is taken to have disposed of the car; or


    (b) the cost of the acquisition of the car by the associate.


    Subdivision 240-G - Adjustments if total amount assessed to notional seller differs from amount of interest  

    SECTION 240-100   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision provides for adjustments if the sum of the amounts included in the notional seller ' s assessable income are greater or less than the interest, worked out at the end of the arrangement, for the notional loan.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 240-105   Adjustments for notional seller  

    240-105(1)    
    This section applies at the end of the *arrangement.

    240-105(2)    
    If the sum of:


    (a) all amounts (other than *termination amounts) that were paid or payable to the *notional seller under the *arrangement; and


    (b) any termination amounts paid or payable to the notional seller;

    exceeds the amount worked out using the formula in subsection (4), the excess is included in the notional seller ' s assessable income of the income year in which the arrangement ends.

    Note:

    Subsection 240-80(5) provides that the amount of a notional loan that is taken to be made by an extended or renewed arrangement is a termination amount paid under the previous arrangement.


    240-105(3)    
    If the amount worked out using the formula in subsection (4) exceeds:


    (a) all amounts (other than *termination amounts) that were paid or payable to the *notional seller under the *arrangement; and


    (b) any termination amounts paid or payable to the notional seller;

    the notional seller is entitled to deduct the excess in the income year in which the arrangement ends.

    Note:

    Subsection 240-80(5) provides that the amount of a notional loan that is taken to be made by an extended or renewed arrangement is a termination amount paid under the previous arrangement.


    240-105(4)    


    The formula for the purposes of subsections (2) and (3) is:

    Notional loan principal + Assessed notional interest

    where:

    assessed notional interest
    means the *notional interest that has been or is to be included in the *notional seller ' s assessable income of any income year.


    SECTION 240-110   Adjustments for notional buyer  

    240-110(1)    
    If:


    (a) an amount is included in the *notional seller's assessable income of an income year under subsection 240-105(2) ; or


    (b) an amount would have been so included if the notional seller had been subject to tax on assessable income;

    the *notional buyer is entitled to deduct a corresponding amount in the notional buyer's income year.


    240-110(2)    
    If:


    (a) the *notional seller is entitled to deduct an amount for an income year under subsection 240-105(3) ; or


    (b) the notional seller would have been so entitled if the *notional seller had been subject to tax on assessable income;

    a corresponding amount is included in the notional buyer's assessable income for the notional buyer's income year.


    240-110(3)    
    The *notional buyer is entitled to a deduction, and is required to include an amount in his or her assessable income only to the extent (if any) that the notional buyer would, apart from this Division, have been entitled to deduct *arrangement payments if no part of those payments were capital in nature.


    Subdivision 240-H - Application of Division 16E to certain arrangements  

    SECTION 240-112   Division 16E applies to certain arrangements  

    240-112(1)    
    Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to an arrangement (the assignment arrangement ) between the notional seller and another person (the holder ) to transfer the right to payments (the Division 240 payments ) under an arrangement that is treated as a sale and loan by this Division (the sale and loan arrangement ).

    240-112(2)    
    In applying Division 16E, the following assumptions are to be made:


    (a) the assignment arrangement is the qualifying security;


    (b) the notional seller is the issuer;


    (c) the qualifying security is issued when the assignment arrangement is entered into;


    (d) the issue price is consideration provided to the notional seller under the assignment arrangement;


    (e) the Division 240 payments are payments made by the notional seller under the assignment arrangement;


    (f) no part of the payments represent periodic interest.

    240-112(3)    
    This Subdivision does not apply if the assignment arrangement gives rise to a termination of the sale and loan arrangement for the purposes of this Division.

    240-112(4)    
    To avoid doubt, Division 6A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply to an assignment arrangement to which this Subdivision applies.


    Subdivision 240-I - Provisions applying to hire purchase agreements  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 240-115   Another person, or no person taken to own property in certain cases  

    240-115(1)    
    This section sets out special modifications of the effect of this Division that apply in relation to a *hire purchase agreement unless:


    (a) the notional buyer would have been the owner or the *quasi-owner of the property if the *arrangement had been a sale of the property; and


    (b) it is reasonably likely that the right, obligation or contingent obligation to acquire the property will be exercised by, or in respect of, the notional buyer.

    Note:

    An example of a contingent obligation is a put option.


    240-115(2)    
    The modifications also apply if the *notional buyer:


    (a) disposes of his or her interest in the property; or


    (b) enters into alease covered by Division 242 (about luxury car leases) under which he or she leases the property to another person.



    Modifications

    240-115(3)    
    For the purpose of the *capital allowance provisions, if, apart from the operation of this Division, an entity other than the *notional seller would own the property that is the subject of an agreement covered by this section, that entity is taken to be the owner of the property.

    240-115(4)    
    For the purpose of the *capital allowance provisions, if, apart from the operation of this Division, the *notional seller would own the property that is the subject of an agreement covered by this section, no entity is taken to be the owner of the property.

    Division 242 - Leases of luxury cars  

    Guide to Division 242  

    SECTION 242-1  

    242-1   What this Division is about  


    A luxury car is one whose market value exceeds the car limit set for a car's capital allowance deductions by section 40-230 .

    If the lessor of a luxury car is tax exempt, or taxed at a lower rate than the lessee, the lease could be structured to give both parties a better after-tax outcome than if the lessee had bought the car. The lessee could fully deduct the lease payments, thereby avoiding the capital allowance limit for luxury cars, and the lessor would receive higher lease payments.

    This Division removes the tax benefit for the lessee by putting both parties in the same position as if the lessor had sold the car to the lessee and lent the lessee the purchase price.

    Subdivision 242-A - Notional sale and loan  

    Guide to Subdivision 242-A

    SECTION 242-5  

    242-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    A leased luxury car is treated for income tax purposes as if it had been sold by the lessor to the lessee for the car ' s market value. The lessor is treated as having lent the lessee the money to buy the car, and the lease payments are treated as payments of the principal and interest on that notional loan.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    242-10 Application
    242-15 Notional sale and acquisition
    242-20 Consideration for notional sale, and cost, of car
    242-25 Notional loan by lessor to lessee

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 242-10   Application  

    242-10(1)    
    This Division applies to a *car that:


    (a) is leased (but not under a *short-term hire agreement or a *hire purchase agreement) for consideration; and


    (b) was a *luxury car when the lessor first leased it; and


    (c) is not *trading stock of the lessee; and


    (d) is not a car covered by subsection 40-230(2) (about cars modified to carry individuals with a disability).

    242-10(2)    
    The provisions of this Division do not have effect for the purposes of Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about withholding tax on dividends, interest and royalties.

    Note:

    This subsection prevents interest on the notional loan that this Division creates being subject to withholding tax under Division 11A .


    242-10(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the question whether an agreement is a *short-term hire agreement is determined on the basis that an employee or employer of an entity is an *associate of the entity.

    Note:

    Under the definition of short-term hire agreement in subsection 995-1(1) , successive agreements for the hire of the same asset to an entity or its associates are not short-term hire agreements if they result in substantial continuity of hiring.


    SECTION 242-15   Notional sale and acquisition  

    242-15(1)    
    This Act has effect as if:


    (a) the *car had been disposed of (the notional sale ) by the lessor to the lessee; and


    (b) the car had been acquired by the lessee;

    at the start of the term of the lease.

    Note:

    This Act will apply as it would have if the lessor had actually disposed of the car to the lessee. For example, if the lessor had been deducting an amount for the car ' s decline in value, the notional disposal will activate the balancing adjustment rules in Subdivision 40-D because the lessor would be treated as no longer holding the car.


    242-15(2)    
    This Act also has effect as if the lessee owns the *car until:


    (a) the lease (not including any extension or renewal of the lease) ends; or


    (b) the lessee enters into a sublease of the car and this Division applies to the car in relation to the sublease.

    Note 1:

    This means that the lessee (and not the lessor) may be able to deduct amounts for the decline in value of the car under Division 40 .

    Note 2:

    The lessee will be treated as continuing to own the car until the end of any extension or renewal: see section 242-80 .


    SECTION 242-20   Consideration for notional sale, and cost, of car  

    242-20(1)    
    The consideration for the notional sale by the lessor, and the first element of the *cost of the *car for the lessee, are the car ' s *market value at the start of the term of the lease.

    242-20(2)    
    If:


    (a) the lease is a sublease; and


    (b) the lessee is one or more of the following:


    (i) an *associate of the lessor;

    (ii) an employer of the lessor;

    (iii) an employee of the lessor;

    the first element of the *cost of the *car to the lessee is the sum of:


    (c) the amount that would have been the car ' s *adjustable value at the start of the term of the lease for the purposes of applying this Act to the lessor if the lessor were not taken under this Division to have disposed of the car; and


    (d) any amount that is included in the lessor ' s assessable income under section 40-285 as a balancing adjustment because the lessor is treated as having disposed of the car.

    Note:

    Section 242-20 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 extends paragraph (2)(d) to cover amounts included in assessable income under former provisions corresponding to section 40-285 .


    SECTION 242-25   Notional loan by lessor to lessee  

    242-25(1)    
    This Act has effect as if, on the grant of the lease, the lessor had made a loan (the notional loan ) to the lessee:


    (a) for a period equal to the term of the lease (not including the term of any extension or renewal); and


    (b) of an amount (the notional loan principal ) equal to the consideration for the notional sale of the *car less any amount paid, or credited by the lessor as having been paid, by the lessee to the lessor, at or before the start of the term of the lease, for the first element of the *cost of the car to the lessee; and


    (c) subject to payment of interest.

    Note:

    There is a further notional loan if the lease is extended or renewed: see section 242-80 .


    242-25(2)    
    This Act has effect as if the notional loan principal were repaid, and the interest were paid, by the making of the *luxury car lease payments.

    Subdivision 242-B - Amount to be included in lessor ' s assessable income  

    Guide to Subdivision 242-B

    SECTION 242-30  

    242-30   What this Subdivision is about  


    The lessor ' s assessable income includes the interest on the notional loan.

    The lease payments to the lessor are non-assessable non-exempt income.

    Note:

    If the consideration for a notional sale of a car exceeds the adjustable value of the car to the lessor, the excess will be included in the lessor ' s assessable income under section 40-285 .

    There would be a similar result if the lessor is treated as having reacquired the car and then sells the car for more than the cost of reacquisition.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
       
    242-35 Amount to be included in lessor ' s assessable income
    242-40 Treatment of lease payments

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 242-35   Amount to be included in lessor ' s assessable income  


    Accrual amounts

    242-35(1)    
    The lessor ' s assessable income for an income year includes:


    (a) if a *luxury car lease payment period for the lease of a *car occurs wholly during that income year - the amount (an accrual amount ) worked out under subsection (2) for that luxury car lease payment period; and


    (b) if part of a luxury car lease payment period for the lease of a car occurs during that income year - so much of the amount (also an accrual amount ) worked out under subsection (2) for that luxury car lease payment period as may appropriately be related to that income year in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

    242-35(2)    
    The amount is:


    Outstanding notional loan principal
    at the start of the lease payment period
    × Implicit interest rate

    where:

    implicit interest rate
    is the implicit interest rate under the lease for the *luxury car lease payment period, taking into account the payments to be made by the lessee under the lease and any *termination amounts.

    outstanding notional loan principal at the start of the lease payment period
    is:


    (a) the sum of the notional loan principal and the accrual amounts for earlier *luxury car lease payment periods; less


    (b) the sum of the *luxury car lease payments that the lessee was required to make before the start of the relevant luxury car lease payment period.



    Excessive periods

    242-35(3)    
    If, apart from this subsection, a *luxury car lease payment period for the lease of a *car would exceed 6 months, this Division applies as if each of the following were a separate luxury car lease payment period:


    (a) the first 6 months of the original luxury car lease payment period;


    (b) if the original luxury car lease payment period was not longer than 12 months - the remaining part of the original luxury car lease payment period;


    (c) if the original luxury car lease payment period was longer than 12 months - each successive 6 month period in the original luxury car lease payment period;


    (d) the period (if any) after the end of the last of the periods to which paragraph (c) applies.

    SECTION 242-40   Treatment of lease payments  

    242-40(1)    
    The *luxury car lease payments under the lease are not assessable income and are not *exempt income of the lessor.

    Note:

    Those lease payments are instead taken into account in calculating accrual amounts that are included in the lessor ' s assessable income under section 242-35 .


    242-40(2)    
    In working out the amounts the lessor can deduct for any income year, ignore the fact that subsection (1) makes the *luxury car lease payments *non-assessable non-exempt income.

    Note:

    This allows the lessor to continue to deduct amounts related to earning the lease payments (such as interest on an amount the lessor borrowed to acquire the car), just as if the amounts related to earning interest on the notional loan to the lessee.


    Subdivision 242-C - Deductions allowable to lessee  

    Guide to Subdivision 242-C

    SECTION 242-45  

    242-45   What this Subdivision is about  


    The lessee is entitled to deduct the interest on the notional loan to the same extent that the lessee would have been able to deduct the lease payments apart from this Division.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    242-50 Extent to which deductions are allowable to lessee
    242-55 Lease payments not deductible

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 242-50   Extent to which deductions are allowable to lessee  

    242-50(1)    
    If a *luxury car lease payment period for the lease of a *car occurs wholly during an income year of the lessee, the lessee can deduct the accrual amount for that period for that income year.

    Note 1:

    If a luxury car lease payment period would otherwise be longer than 6 months, subsection 242-35(3) divides the original period into periods of no longer than 6 months.

    Note 2:

    For accrual amount , see subsection 242-35(1) .


    242-50(2)    
    If part of a *luxury car lease payment period for the lease of a *car occurs during an income year of the lessee, the lessee can deduct so much of the accrual amount for that period as many appropriately be related to that income year in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

    242-50(3)    
    The lessee can deduct an accrual amount, or part of an accrual amount, for a *luxury car lease payment period under subsection (1) or (2) for an income year only to the extent that the lessee could deduct the luxury car lease payments made for that year apart from this Division.

    SECTION 242-55  

    242-55   Lease payments not deductible  


    The lessee cannot deduct the *luxury car lease payments that the lessee makes under the lease for any income year.
    Note:

    Those payments are instead taken into account in calculating accrual amounts that are deductible under section 242-50 .

    Subdivision 242-D - Adjustments if total amount assessed to lessor differs from amount of interest  

    Guide to Subdivision 242-D

    SECTION 242-60   What this Subdivision is about  


    When a luxury car lease is extended, renewed or ends, the overall nominal gain to the lessor is compared to the nominal interest so far paid under the lease.

    If the overall nominal gain is greater, the difference is assessable income of the lessor, and the lessee may be able to deduct it.

    If the overall nominal gain is less, the lessor can deduct the difference, which may also be assessable income of the lessee.

    This process ensures that the right amount has been taxed over the term of the lease.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    242-65 Adjustments for lessor
    242-70 Adjustments for lessee

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 242-65   Adjustments for lessor  

    242-65(1)    
    This section applies at the following times:


    (a) if the term of the lease is extended - when the extension takes effect;


    (b) if the lease is renewed - when the renewal takes effect;


    (c) when the lease (including any extension or renewal of the lease) ends.

    242-65(2)    
    If the sum of all amounts (whether *luxury car lease payments, a *termination amount or any other payments) that were paid or payable to the lessor under the lease exceeds the amount worked out under subsection (4), the excess is included in the lessor ' s assessable income for the income year in which the relevant time occurs.

    Note:

    Subsection 242-80(8) treats the amount of a notional loan is taken to be made by an extended or renewed lease to be a termination amount paid under the previous lease.


    242-65(3)    
    If the sum of all amounts (whether *luxury car lease payments, a *termination amount or any other payments) that were paid or payable to the lessor under the lease is less than the amount worked out under subsection (4), the lessor can deduct the difference for the income year in which the relevant time occurs.

    242-65(4)    
    The amount for the purposes of subsections (2) and (3) is the sum of:


    (a) the notional loan principal; and


    (b) the sum of the accrual amounts that have been or are to be included in the lessor ' s assessable income of any income year.

    Note:

    For accrual amount , see subsection 242-35(1) .


    SECTION 242-70   Adjustments for lessee  

    242-70(1)    
    If:


    (a) an amount is included in the lessor ' s assessable income for an income year under subsection 242-65(2) ; or


    (b) an amount would have been so included if the lessor had been subject to tax on assessable income;

    the lessee can deduct a corresponding amount for the same income year.


    242-70(2)    
    If:


    (a) the lessor can deduct an amount for an income year under subsection 242-65(3) ; or


    (b) the lessor could have deducted an amount under that subsection if the lessor had been subject to tax on assessable income;

    a corresponding amount is included in the lessee ' s assessable income for the same income year.


    242-70(3)    
    The lessee cannot deduct an amount for any income year under subsection (1), and an amount is not included in the lessee ' s assessable income of any income year under subsection (2), except to the extent (if any) that the lessee could deduct the *luxury car lease payments made apart from this Division.

    Subdivision 242-E - Extension, renewal and final ending of the lease  

    Guide to Subdivision 242-E

    SECTION 242-75   What this Subdivision is about  


    When a luxury car lease ends (whether it expires or is terminated before its expiry date), one of 3 things will happen:

  • (a) if the lease is extended or renewed - the original notional loan is treated as having been repaid and the lessor is treated as having made a new loan to the lessee; or
  • (b) if the lessee acquires the car from the lessor - the lessee continues to own the car for tax purposes, and the actual transfer and the termination payment to acquire the car are ignored for tax purposes; or
  • (c) if the lessee ' s right to use the car ends - the lessee is treated as having sold the car back to the lessor.
  • In each case, there may be adjustments under Subdivision 242-D to ensure that the right amount has been taxed over the term of the lease.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    242-80 What happens if the term of the lease is extended or the lease is renewed
    242-85 What happens if an amount is paid by the lessee to acquire the car
    242-90 What happens if the lessee stops having the right to use the car

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 242-80   What happens if the term of the lease is extended or the lease is renewed  

    242-80(1)    
    The rules in this section have effect if, after the end of the lease (or the end of any extension of the lease term or renewal of the lease), the lessee continues to have the *right to use the *car because the term of the lease is extended (or further extended) or the lease is renewed (or further renewed).

    242-80(2)    
    This Act has effect as if the lessee continued to be the owner of the *car until the end of the lease as extended or renewed.

    242-80(3)    
    However, this Act has effect as if the lessee stopped being the owner of the *car if:


    (a) the lessee enters into a sublease in respect of the car; and


    (b) this Division applies to the car in respect of that sublease.

    242-80(4)    
    This Act has effect as if the notional loan that arose because of the grant of the lease, or because of the previous extension or renewal, had been repaid.

    Note:

    Also, Subdivision 242-D (about balancing adjustments) will apply to the ending, extension or renewal.


    242-80(5)    
    This Act has effect as if, on the grant of the extension or renewal, the lessor had made a new loan (the notional loan ) to the lessee:


    (a) for the period of the extension of the term of the lease or the period of the renewed lease, as the case may be; and


    (b) of an amount (the notional loan principal ) equal to the *car ' s *market value when the extension of renewal is granted; and


    (c) subject to the payment of interest.

    242-80(6)    
    This Act has effect as if the notional loan principal were repaid, and the interest were paid, by the making of the *luxury car lease payments under the lease as extended or renewed (or further extended or renewed).

    242-80(7)    
    In determining whether subsection (1) applies to the lessee, disregard any period after the end of the lease (or the end of any extension of the lease term or renewal of the lease) and before the extension of renewal (or further extension or renewal) is granted and during which the lessee did not have the *right to use the *car if the extension or renewal (or further extension or renewal):


    (a) has effect from the time immediately after the end of that term, extension or renewal; or


    (b) otherwise results in substantial continuity of the leasing of the car to the lessee.

    242-80(8)    
    The amount of the notional loan is treated, for the purposes of section 242-65 (about the lessor ' s balancing adjustments), as a *termination amount paid to the lessor under the lease or under the previous extension or renewal.

    SECTION 242-85  

    242-85   What happens if an amount is paid by the lessee to acquire the car  


    If, at the end of the lease or, if it is extended or renewed, at the end of any extension or renewal (the end time ), an amount is paid to the lessor by, or on behalf of, the lessee to acquire the *car, the following provisions have effect:


    (a) the amount paid is not included in the lessor ' s assessable income;


    (b) the lessee cannot deduct the payment;


    (c) this Act has effect as if:


    (i) the lessee continued to be the owner of the car until the lessee disposes of it; and

    (ii) the transfer to the lessee of legal title to the car were not a disposal of the car by the lessor.

    SECTION 242-90   What happens if the lessee stops having the right to use the car  

    242-90(1)    
    If, at the end time:


    (a) the lessee stops having the *right to use the *car; and


    (b) no amount is paid to the lessor by, or on behalf of, the lessee to acquire the car;

    the following provisions have effect.

    Note:

    For end time , see section 242-85 .


    242-90(2)    
    This Act has effect as if the *car:


    (a) were sold by the lessee to the lessor; and


    (b) were acquired by the lessor;

    at the end time.


    242-90(3)    
    The consideration for the sale of the *car by the lessee, and the first element of the *cost of the car to the lessor, are the *market value of the car at the end time.

    242-90(4)    
    If the *car is afterwards acquired by an *associate of the lessee or an employer or employee of the lessee, this Act has effect as if the first element of the *cost of the car as a *depreciating asset were the lesser of:


    (a) the sum of:


    (i) the amount that would have been the *adjustable value of the car at that time for the purposes of applying this Act to the lessee if the lessee were not treated under this Division as having disposed of the car; and

    (ii) any amount that is included in the lessee ' s assessable income under section 40-285 as a balancing adjustment because the lessee is treated as having disposed of the car; and


    (b) the cost of the acquisition of the car by the associate, employer or employee.

    Note:

    Section 242-20 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 extends subparagraph (a)(ii) to cover amounts included in assessable income under former provisions corresponding to section 40-285 .


    242-90(5)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the lessee is not treated as having stopped to have the *right to use the *car if:


    (a) the term of the lease is extended (or further extended), or the lease is renewed (or further renewed), at a time after, but not immediately after, the end of that term, extension or renewal with effect from the time immediately after that end; or


    (b) the extension or renewal (or further extension or renewal) otherwise results in substantial continuity of the leasing of the car to the lessee.

    Division 243 - Limited recourse debt  

    Guide to Division 243  

    SECTION 243-10   What this Division is about  


    This Division tells you when you must include an additional amount in your assessable income at the termination of a limited recourse debt arrangement. It also tells you what the additional amount is.

    Basically, the Division applies where the capital allowance deductions that have been obtained for expenditure that is funded by the debt and the deductions are excessive having regard to the amount of the debt that was repaid.

    The reason for the adjustment is to ensure that, where you have not been fully at risk in relation to an amount of expenditure, you do not get a net deduction if you fail to pay that amount.

    Subdivision 243-A - Circumstances in which Division operates  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 243-15   When does this Division apply?  

    243-15(1)    
    This Division applies if:


    (a) *limited recourse debt has been used to wholly or partly finance or refinance expenditure; and


    (b) at the time that the debt *arrangement is terminated, the debt has not been paid in full by the debtor; and


    (c) the debtor can deduct an amount as a *capital allowance for the income year in which the termination occurs, or has deducted or can deduct an amount for an earlier income year, in respect of the expenditure or the *financed property.

    Note:

    This Division does not apply to certain limited recourse debts that are used to refinance limited recourse debt to which this Division has applied (see subsection 243-50(4) ).


    243-15(2)    
    However, unless the net *capital allowance deductions have been excessive having regard to the amount of the debt that remains unpaid (see section 243-35 ), no amount is included in the debtor ' s assessable income under this Division although future deductions may be reduced.

    243-15(3)    
    In working out if the debt has been paid in full, and in working out the unpaid amount of the debt, the following amounts are to be treated as if they were not payments in respect of the debt:


    (a) any reduction in the debt as a result of the *financed property being surrendered or returned to the creditor at the termination of the debt;


    (b) any payment to reduce the debt that is funded directly or indirectly by *non-arm ' s length limited recourse debt or by proceeds from the disposal of the debtor ' s interest in the financed property.

    However, any amounts accrued that are interest, *notional interest or in the nature of interest are taken not to be unpaid.


    243-15(4)    
    In working out if the debt has been paid in full, and in working out the unpaid amount of the debt, payments are to be attributed first to the payment of any accrued amounts that are interest, *notional interest or in the nature of interest.

    243-15(5)    


    A notional loan arising because of Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan) is taken to be a debt that has been used to wholly or partly finance or refinance expenditure.

    SECTION 243-20   What is limited recourse debt?  

    243-20(1)    
    A limited recourse debt is an obligation imposed by law on an entity (the debtor ) to pay an amount to another entity (the creditor ) where the rights of the creditor as against the debtor in the event of default in payment of the debt or of interest are limited wholly or predominantly to any or all of the following:


    (a) rights (including the right to money payable) in relation to any or all of the following:


    (i) the *debt property or the use of the debt property;

    (ii) goods produced, supplied, carried, transmitted or delivered, or services provided, by means of the debt property;

    (iii) the loss or disposal of the whole or a part of the debt property or of the debtor ' s interest in the debt property;


    (b) rights in respect of a mortgage or other security over the debt property or other property;


    (c) rights that arise out of any *arrangement relating to the financial obligations of an end-user of the *financed property towards the debtor, and are financial obligations in relation to the financed property.

    243-20(2)    


    An obligation imposed by law on an entity (the debtor ) to pay an amount to another entity (the creditor ) is also a limited recourse debt if it is reasonable to conclude that the rights of the creditor as against the debtor in the event of default in payment of the debt or of interest:


    (a) are capable of being limited in the way mentioned in subsection (1); or


    (b) are in substance or effect limited wholly or predominantly to rights (including the right to money payable) in relation to any or all of the following:


    (i) the *debt property or the use of the debt property;

    (ii) goods produced, supplied, carried, transmitted or delivered, or services provided, by means of the debt property;

    (iii) the loss or disposal of the whole or a part of the debt property or of the debtor ' s interest in the debt property.
    Note:

    Paragraph (b) could apply to a special purpose entity. For example, an entity ' s only significant asset is one that it financed by way of a bank loan. The bank ' s rights to recover the debt (if the entity defaults) are not contractually limited, however they are in effect limited to rights in relation to the asset.


    243-20(3)    


    An obligation imposed by law on an entity (the debtor ) to pay an amount to another entity (the creditor ) is also a limited recourse debt if there is no *debt property and it is reasonable to conclude that the rights of the creditor as against the debtor in the event of default in payment of the debt or of interest are capable of being limited.

    243-20(3A)    


    In reaching a conclusion for the purposes of subsection (2) or (3), have regard to the following:


    (a) the debtor ' s assets (other than assets that are indemnities or guarantees provided in relation to the debt);


    (b) any *arrangement to which the debtor is a party;


    (c) except for the purposes of paragraph (2)(b) - whether all of the debtor ' s assets would be available for the purpose of discharging the debt (other than assets that are security for other debts of the debtor or any other entity);


    (d) whether the debtor and creditor are dealing at *arm ' s length in relation to the debt.


    243-20(4)    


    A notional loan arising because of Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan) under a *hire purchase agreement is also a limited recourse debt .

    243-20(5)    
    However, an obligation that is covered by subsection (1) is not a limited recourse debt if the creditor ' s recourse is not in practice limited due to the creditor ' s rights in respect of a mortgage or other security over property of the debtor (other than the financed property) the value of which exceeds, or is likely to exceed, the amount of the debt.

    243-20(6)    
    Also, an obligation that is covered by subsection (1), (2) or (3) is not a limited recourse debt if, having regard to all relevant circumstances, it would be unreasonable for the obligation to be treated as limited recourse debt.

    243-20(7)    


    A *limited recourse debt is a non-arm ' s length limited recourse debt if the debtor and creditor do not deal with each other at *arm ' s length in relation to the debt.

    SECTION 243-25   When is a debt arrangement terminated?  

    243-25(1)    
    A debt arrangement is taken to have terminated if:


    (a) it is actually terminated; or


    (b) the debtor ' s obligation to repay the debt is waived, novated or otherwise varied so as to reduce, transfer or extinguish the debt; or


    (c) an agreement is entered into to waive, novate or otherwise vary the debtor ' s obligation to repay the debt so as to reduce, transfer or extinguish the debt; or


    (d) the creditor ceases to have an entitlement to recover the debt from the debtor (other than as a result of an *arm ' s length assignment of some or all of the creditor ' s rights under the debt arrangement); or


    (e) the debtor ceases to be the owner or the *quasi-owner of some or all of the *debt property because that property is surrendered to the creditor because of the debtor ' s failure to pay the whole or a part of the debt; or


    (f) the debtor ceases to be the owner of a beneficial interest in some or all of the debt property because the interest is surrendered to the creditor because of the debtor ' s failure to pay the whole or a part of the debt; or


    (g) the debt becomes a bad debt.


    243-25(2)    


    However, a debt arrangement that is a notional loan arising because of Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan) is not taken to have terminated merely because it has been renewed or extended.
    Note:

    Under Division 240 , notional loans are taken to have ended if the relevant arrangement is renewed or extended.


    243-25(3)    
    Where a debt is terminated under paragraph (1)(b) or (c) as a result of the debt being reduced, the remaining debt is taken to be a new debt to which section 243-15 applies.


    SECTION 243-30   What is the financed property and the debt property?  

    243-30(1)    
    Property is the financed property if the expenditure referred to in paragraph 243-15(1)(a) is on the property, is on the acquisition of the property, results in the creation of the property or is otherwise connected with the property.

    243-30(2)    


    If the debt agreement is a notional loan arising under Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan), the property that is the subject of the agreement is the financed property .

    243-30(3)    
    Property is the debt property if:


    (a) it is the *financed property; or


    (b) the property is provided as security for the debt.

    Subdivision 243-B - Working out the excessive deductions  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 243-35   Working out the excessive deductions  

    243-35(1)    
    The *capital allowance deductions have been excessive having regard to the amount of the debt that remains unpaid if the amount worked out under subsection (2) exceeds the amount worked out under subsection (4).

    243-35(2)    


    This is how to work out the total net *capital allowance deductions: Working out the total net capital allowance deductions

    Step 1.

    Add up all of the debtor ' s *capital allowance deductions in respect of the expenditure or the *financed property (including deductions because of balancing adjustments) for the income year in which the termination occurs or an earlier income year.

    Note:

    The amount of a capital allowance deduction may be reduced under section 707-415 .


    Step 2.

    Deduct from that any amount that is included in the assessable income of the debtor of any income year by virtue of a provision of this Act (other than this Division) as a result of the disposal of the *financed property the effect of which is to reverse a deduction covered by Step 1.


    Step 3.

    Deduct from the result an amount equal to the sum of any amounts included in the entity ' s assessable income as a result of an earlier application of this Division to the debt.


    Step 4.

    Add to the result an amount equal to the sum of any deductions to which the entity is entitled under section 243-45 (repayments of the original debt after termination) or 243-50 (repayments of the replacement debt) because of payments in respect of the debt.


    243-35(3)    
    The reference in step 2 of the method statement in subsection (2) to an amount that is included in the assessable income of a taxpayer as a result of the disposal of the *financed property includes a reference to an amount that is included under section 26AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as a result of the disposal of the financed property.

    Note:

    Division 20 deals with amounts included to reverse the effect of past deductions.


    243-35(4)    
    This is how to work out the total net capital allowance deductions that would otherwise be allowable taking into account the amount of the debt that is unpaid: Working out the total net capital allowance deductions that would otherwise be allowable

    Work out the amount that would be worked out under subsection (2) if the deductions and the amounts included in assessable income had been calculated using the following assumptions:


    (1)

    The original expenditure in respect of which deductions were calculated was reduced by the amount of the debt that was unpaid by the debtor when the debt was terminated. (In calculating the amount unpaid the following are to be disregarded:

  • (a) any reduction in the amount as a result of the *financed property being surrendered or returned to the creditor at the termination of the debt;
  • (b) any reduction in the amount to the extent that it is funded directly or indirectly by *non-arm ' s length limited recourse debt or by the consideration for the disposal of the debtor ' s interest in the financed property.)

  • (2)

    Deductions for income years after the income year in which the termination occurred were also taken into account.


    (3)

    The original expenditure in respect of which deductions were calculated was increased by any amount that is paid by the debtor as consideration for another person assuming a liability under the debt. (This assumption does not apply to the extent that the consideration is funded directly or indirectly by *non-arm ' s length limited recourse debt or by the consideration for the disposal of the debtor ' s interest in the *financed property.)


    (4)

    Step 2 were omitted from subsection (2).


    Subdivision 243-C - Amounts included in assessable income and deductions  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 243-40  

    243-40   Amount included in debtor's assessable income  


    The debtor's assessable income for the income year in which the termination occurs is to include the excess referred to in subsection 243-35(1) .
    Note:

    Section 243-60 applies in relation to certain partnership debts.

    SECTION 243-45   Deduction for later payments in respect of debt  

    243-45(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) an amount was included in the debtor's assessable income under section 243-40 or a deduction was reduced under section 243-55 ; and


    (b) the debtor makes a payment to the creditor, after the termination of the debt arrangement, in respect of the debt (other than an amount to the extent to which it is a payment of interest, of *notional interest or in the nature of interest).

    243-45(2)    
    This is how to work out the amount of the deduction: Working out the amount of the deduction


    Step 1.

    Work out the amount that would be worked out under subsection 243-35(2) if the debt were terminated immediately before the payment.


    Step 2.

    Work out the amount that would have been worked out under subsection 243-35(4) at that time if the payment had been taken into account.


    Step 3.

    The amount of the deduction is the amount (if any) by which the amount worked out under Step 2 exceeds the amount worked out under Step 1.


    243-45(3)    
    The amount can be deducted for the income year in which the payment is made.

    Limit on deductions

    243-45(4)    
    The total amounts deducted under this section in respect of a debt, and under section 243-50 in respect of a replacement debt, cannot exceed the sum of:


    (a) any amounts included in the debtor's assessable income under this Division in respect of the original debt; and


    (b) any amount by which deductions in respect of the original debt were reduced under section 243-55 .

    SECTION 243-50   Deduction for payments for replacement debt  


    Payments where debt refinanced

    243-50(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) an amount was included in the debtor's assessable income under section 243-40 or a deduction was reduced under section 243-55 ; and


    (b) an amount funded by a *non-arm's length limited recourse debt (the replacement debt ) was disregarded in calculations under subsection 243-35(4) ; and


    (c) the debtor makes a payment, after the termination of the original debt arrangement, in respect of the replacement debt (other than to the extent to which it is a payment of interest, of *notional interest or in the nature of interest).

    243-50(2)    
    This is how to work out the amount of the deduction: Working out the amount of the deduction


    Step 1.

    Work out the amount that would be worked out under subsection 243-35(2) if the replacement debt were terminated immediately before the payment.


    Step 2.

    Work out the amount that would have been worked out under subsection 243-35(4) at that time if the payment had been made in respect of the original debt and it had been taken into account.


    Step 3.

    The amount of the deduction is the amount (if any) by which the amount worked out under Step 2 exceeds the amount worked out under Step 1.


    243-50(3)    
    The amount can be deducted for the income year in which the payment is made.

    Division not to apply to termination of replacement debt

    243-50(4)    
    This Division does not apply to termination of the replacement debt referred to in paragraph (1)(b).

    Limit on deductions

    243-50(5)    
    The total amounts deducted under section 243-45 in respect of the original debt, or under this section in respect of the replacement debt, cannot exceed the sum of:


    (a) any amounts included in the debtor's assessable income under this Division in respect of the original debt; and


    (b) any amount by which deductions in respect of the original debt were reduced under section 243-55 .

    SECTION 243-55   Effect of Division on later capital allowance deductions  

    243-55(1)    


    This section applies where this Division (other than section 243-65 ) has applied in relation to a debt and the debtor is entitled to a *capital allowance deduction in respect of the expenditure or the *financed property in relation to a time or period after the termination of the debt.

    243-55(2)    
    The *capital allowance deduction is reduced if the amount that would have been worked out under subsection 243-35(2) would have exceeded the amount worked out under subsection 243-35(4) if the following assumptions were applied in both subsections: Assumptions to be applied


    (1)

    That the debt was terminated at the time, or at the end of the period, referred to in subsection (1) of this section.


    (2)

    That the amount unpaid at the time, or at the end of the period, is reduced by any amounts paid under a replacement debt.


    (3)

    The debtor's *capital allowance deductions in respect of the expenditure or the *financed property were increased by the amount of the capital allowance deduction referred to in subsection (1) of this section.


    243-55(3)    
    The deduction is to be reduced by the amount of the excess.


    SECTION 243-57   Effect of Division on later capital allowance balancing adjustments  

    243-57(1)    
    This section applies where this Division (other than section 243-65 ) has applied in relation to a debt and an amount is later included in the assessable income of an entity by virtue of a provision of this Act (other than this Division) as a result of the disposal of the *financed property the effect of which is to reverse a deduction covered by Step 1 in subsection 243-35(2) .

    243-57(2)    
    Any amount that would be included in the debtor's assessable income is reducedif the amount that would have been worked out under subsection 243-35(4) would have exceeded the amount worked out under subsection 243-35(2) if the following assumptions were applied in both subsections: Assumptions to be applied


    (1)

    That the debt was terminated at the time of the disposal of the *financed property, referred to in subsection (1) of this section.


    (2)

    The amount in Step 2 in subsection 243-35(2) were increased by the amount that would otherwise be included in the debtor's assessable income.


    (3)

    The amount worked out under subsection 243-35(4) were reduced by any amount by which:

  • (a) the amount arising as a result of the disposal that is taken into account for the purposes of the provision mentioned in subsection (1);
  • exceeds:

  • (b) the unpaid amount of the debt immediately before the time of the disposal of the *financed property, referred to in subsection (1).

  • 243-57(3)    
    The amount is to be reduced by the amount of the excess.


    SECTION 243-58  

    243-58   Adjustment where debt only partially used for expenditure  


    If the debt is only partially used to finance the expenditure, or the property, in respect of which the *capital allowance deductions referred to in Step 1 in subsection 243-35(2) are allowed, the amount of any deduction, any reduction in a deduction or any amount included in assessable income is to be so much as is reasonable taking into account the proportion of the debt that is used for that purpose.

    Subdivision 243-D - Special provisions  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 243-60  

    243-60   Application of Division to partnerships  


    This Division applies to a partnership in respect of the partnership's debts and in respect of debts of a partner, and references to a debtor include a reference to a partnership.

    SECTION 243-65   Application where partner reduces liability  

    243-65(1)    
    This section applies to a debt in relation to a partner in a partnership if:


    (a) in connection with an *arrangement, the partner's liability to pay the debt is reduced or eliminated and the partner's interest in the partnership ceases or is varied or transferred; and


    (b) an excess would have been worked out under subsection 243-35(1) if, at the time when the debt is reduced or eliminated, the debt had been terminated and remained unpaid and this section had not applied.

    243-65(2)    
    If this section applies to a debt in relation to a partner in a partnership, an amount is to be included in his or her assessable income.

    243-65(3)    


    This is how to work out the amount to be included: Working out the amount included

    Step 1.

    Work out which income years the partner was a member of the partnership and the partnership was entitled to a *capital allowance deduction in respect of the expenditure or the *financed property (including deductions because of balancing adjustments).


    Step 2.

    For each of those income years, work out the proportion of net income of the partnership or the partnership loss (as the case requires) that was included in the assessable income of the partner or which the partner could deduct.


    Step 3.

    For each of those income years, multiply the *capital allowance deductions in respect of the expenditure or the *financed property (including deductions because of balancing adjustments) of the partnership by the corresponding proportion worked out under Step 2. Sum all of the amounts.


    Step 4.

    Divide the sum by the total of the *capital allowance deductions in respect of the expenditure or the *financed property (including deductions because of balancing adjustments) of the partnership for all of those income years.


    Step 5.

    Work out the amount that would have been included in the partnership's assessable income under section 243-40 if the debt had been terminated and remained unpaid and this section had not applied.


    Step 6.

    Multiply the amount worked out in Step 5 by the factor worked out in Step 4. The result is the amount to be included in the partner's assessable income.


    SECTION 243-70   Application of Division to companies ceasing to be 100% subsidiary  

    243-70(1)    
    This section applies to a company if:


    (a) the company ceases to be a *100% subsidiary in relation to at least one other company; and


    (b) at that time, the company is the debtor for a *limited recourse debt that has not been paid in full by the company; and


    (c) the creditor's rights under the debt are transferred or assigned to another entity.

    243-70(2)    
    If this section applies, this Division applies as if the debt were terminated, and refinanced with *non-arm's length limited recourse debt, at the time the company ceased to be a *100% subsidiary of that other company.


    SECTION 243-75   Application of Division where debt forgiveness rules also apply  

    243-75(1)    


    This section is to remove doubt about how this Division and Division 245 apply where both apply to the same debt.

    243-75(2)    
    Where both apply:


    (a) this Division is to be applied first and is to be applied disregarding any operation of Division 245 ; and


    (b) any amounts included in assessable income under this Division are taken into account under paragraph 245-85(1)(a) .


    Division 245 - Forgiveness of commercial debts  

    Guide to Division 245  

    SECTION 245-1   What this Division is about  


    When a creditor forgives a commercial debt you owe, you make a gain. This is usually not included in your assessable income. Instead, this Division offsets the forgiven amount against amounts that could otherwise reduce your taxable income in the same or a later income year. Those amounts are:

  • (a) your tax losses and net capital losses; and
  • (b) capital allowances and some similar deductions; and
  • (c) the cost bases of your CGT assets.
  • SECTION 245-2   Simplified outline of this Division  

    245-2(1)    
    This Division applies to any commercial debt (or part of a commercial debt) you owe that is forgiven.

    Note:

    This Division does not apply if:

  • (a) the debt is waived and the waiver constitutes a fringe benefit; or
  • (b) the amount of the debt has been, or will be, included in your assessable income in any income year; or
  • (c) the debt is forgiven under an Act relating to bankruptcy; or
  • (d) the debt is forgiven by will; or
  • (e) the debt is forgiven for reasons of natural love and affection; or
  • (f) the debt is a tax-related liability.

  • 245-2(2)    
    The net forgiven amount of a debt is worked out by reducing the value of your forgiven debt by:

  • (a) any consideration you provided for the forgiveness; and
  • (b) any amounts that this Act already brings to account because of the forgiveness.

  • 245-2(3)    
    The net forgiven amounts of all your forgiven debts in an income year are added up. This total net forgiven amount is applied to reduce the following amounts (in the following order):


    (a) your tax losses from previous income years;


    (b) your net capital losses from previous income years;


    (c) the deductions you would otherwise get in the income year, or in a later year, because of expenditure from a previous year (e.g. the capital allowance deductions you would get for the cost of a depreciating asset);


    (d) the cost bases of your CGT assets.

    245-2(4)    
    Any unapplied total net forgiven amount is disregarded.

    245-2(5)    
    Special rules apply to debts of partnerships.

    Subdivision 245-A - Debts to which operative rules apply  

    Guide to Subdivision 245-A

    SECTION 245-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Division applies to a debt if you can deduct interest payable on the debt.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Application of Division
    245-10 Commercial debts
    245-15 Non-equity shares
    245-20 Parts of debts

    Application of Division

    SECTION 245-10  

    245-10   Commercial debts  


    Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G apply to a debt of yours if:
  • (a) the whole or any part of interest, or of an amount in the nature of interest, paid or payable by you in respect of the debt has been deducted, or can be deducted, by you; or
  • (b) interest, or an amount in the nature of interest, is not payable by you in respect of the debt but, had interest or such an amount been payable, the whole or any part of the interest or amount could have been deducted by you; or
  • (c) interest or an amount mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b) could have been deducted by you apart from the operation of a provision of this Act (other than paragraphs 8-1(2) (a), (b) and (c)) that has the effect of preventing a deduction.
  • Note:

    Paragraphs 8-1(2) (a), (b) and (c) prevent deductions for capital, private or domestic outgoings and for outgoings relating to exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

    SECTION 245-15  

    245-15   Non-equity shares  


    This Division applies to a *non-equity share issued by a company as if it were a debt to which section 245-10 applies that is owed by the company to the relevant shareholder.

    SECTION 245-20  

    245-20   Parts of debts  


    This Division applies to part of a debt in the same way as it applies to a whole debt.
    Note:

    This Division treats interest, or an amount in the nature of interest, payable on a debt as being a separate debt if the interest or amount has accrued but has not been paid.

    Subdivision 245-B - What constitutes forgiveness of a debt  

    Guide to Subdivision 245-B

    SECTION 245-30   What this Subdivision is about  


    A debt is forgiven if you no longer have to pay it.

    However, this Division does not apply to some cases of forgiveness, such as bankruptcy.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    245-35 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt
    245-36 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt if the debt is assigned
    245-37 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt if a subscription for shares enables payment of the debt
    245-40 Forgivenesses to which operative rules do not apply
    245-45 Application of operative rules if forgiveness involves an arrangement

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 245-35  

    245-35   What constitutes forgiveness of a debt  


    A debt is forgiven if and when:


    (a) the debtor ' s obligation to pay the debt is released or waived, or is otherwise extinguished other than by repaying the debt in full; or


    (b) the period within which the creditor is entitled to sue for the recovery of the debt ends, because of the operation of a statute of limitations, without the debt having been paid.

    SECTION 245-36  

    245-36   What constitutes forgiveness of a debt if the debt is assigned  


    A debt is forgiven if and when the creditor assigns the right to receive payment of the debt to another entity (the new creditor ) and the following conditions are met:


    (a) either the new creditor is the debtor ' s *associate or the assignment occurred under an *arrangement to which the new creditor and debtor were parties;


    (b) the right to receive payment of the debt was not acquired by the new creditor in the ordinary course of *trading on a market, exchange or other place on which, or facility by means of which, offers to sell, buy or exchange securities (within the meaning of Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) are made or accepted.

    Note 1:

    Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 brings to account gains and losses on some securities on an accruals basis.

    Note 2:

    This Division also applies if an assigned debt is subsequently forgiven by the new creditor. Section 245-61 tells you how to work out the value of the debt in that case.

    SECTION 245-37  

    245-37   What constitutes forgiveness of a debt if a subscription for shares enables payment of the debt  


    If an entity subscribes for *shares in a company to enable the company to make a payment in or towards discharge of a debt it owes to the entity, the debt is forgiven when, and to the extent that, the company applies any of the money subscribed in or towards payment of the debt.

    SECTION 245-40  

    245-40   Forgivenesses to which operative rules do not apply  


    Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G do not apply to a *forgiveness of a debt if:


    (a) the debt is waived and the waiver constitutes a *fringe benefit; or

    Note:

    The waiver by an employer of a debt owed by an employee is usually a fringe benefit: see section 14 of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986 .


    (b) the amount of the debt has been, or will be, included in the assessable income of the debtor in any income year; or


    (c) the forgiveness is effected under an Act relating to bankruptcy; or


    (d) the forgiveness is effected by will; or


    (e) the forgiveness is for reasons of natural love and affection; or


    (f) the debt is a *tax-related liability or a civil penalty under Division 290 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (about penalties for promoters and implementers of tax avoidance schemes).

    Note:

    If the forgiveness of your debt involved an arrangement which was entered into before 28 June 1996, see section 245-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    SECTION 245-45   Application of operative rules if forgiveness involves an arrangement  

    245-45(1)    
    If:


    (a) the debtor and the creditor in relation to a debt enter into an *arrangement; and


    (b) under the arrangement, the debtor ' s obligation to pay the debt is to cease at a particular future time; and


    (c) the cessation of the obligation is to occur without the debtor incurring any financial or other obligation (other than an obligation that, having regard to the debtor ' s circumstances, is of a nominal or insignificant amount or kind);

    Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G apply as if the debt were *forgiven when the arrangement is entered into.


    245-45(2)    
    If, after the arrangement is entered into, the debt is forgiven, the later forgiveness is disregarded for the purposes of those Subdivisions.

    Subdivision 245-C - Calculation of gross forgiven amount of a debt  

    Guide to Subdivision 245-C

    SECTION 245-48   What this Subdivision is about  


    The amount of forgiveness (called the gross forgiven amount) for the debtor reflects the loss that the creditor makes for tax purposes. It is worked out in 2 steps:

  • (a) the value of the debt when it was forgiven is worked out on the basis that you were solvent both then and when you incurred the debt; and
  • (b) the value of the debt is then offset by any consideration given for the forgiveness of the debt.
  • The difference between the value of the debt and the amount offset is the gross forgiven amount.

    If the debt was owed by several debtors, the gross forgiven amount is divided between them equally.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Working out the value of a debt
    245-50 Extent of forgiveness if consideration is given
    245-55 General rule for working out the value of a debt
    245-60 Special rule for working out the value of a non-recourse debt
    245-61 Special rule for working out the value of a previously assigned debt
    Working out if an amount is offset against the value of the debt
    245-65 Amount offset against amount of debt
    Working out the gross forgiven amount
    245-75 Gross forgiven amount of a debt
    245-77 Gross forgiven amount shared between debtors

    Working out the value of a debt

    SECTION 245-50  

    245-50   Extent of forgiveness if consideration is given  


    If any consideration is paid or given in respect of the *forgiveness of a debt, the debt that is forgiven is:


    (a) the obligation that existed before the forgiveness to pay so much of the debt as is expressed, or is taken, to be forgiven; and


    (b) the obligation that existed before the forgiveness to pay any part of the debt to which paragraph (a) does not apply but which ceases to be payable as a result of the payment or giving of the consideration.

    Example:

    Daniel owes Samara $100. Samara agrees to accept $60 in full payment of the debt.

    If their agreement specifies that Samara forgives the whole debt in return for $60, paragraph (a) provides that the forgiven debt is $100.

    If their agreement instead requires Daniel to repay $60 and specifies that Samara forgives the remaining $40, paragraph (a) would deal with the $40 and paragraph (b) would add the remaining $60, again producing a forgiven amount of $100.

    In either case, the $60 Daniel pays is offset against the forgiven amount of $100 in working out the gross forgiven amount of the debt: see sections 245-65 and 245-75 .

    SECTION 245-55   General rule for working out the value of a debt  

    245-55(1)    
    The value of your debt at the time (the forgiveness time ) when it is *forgiven is the amount that would have been its *market value (considered as an asset of the creditor) at the forgiveness time, assuming that:


    (a) when you incurred the debt, you were able to pay all your debts (including that one) as and when they fell due; and


    (b) your capacity to pay the debt is the same at the forgiveness time as when you incurred it.

    245-55(2)    
    However, the value of the debt at the forgiveness time is the sum of the following amounts, if that sum is less than the amount applicable under subsection (1):


    (a) what would have been the amount applicable under subsection (1) if there had been no change, from the time the debt was incurred until the forgiveness time, in any rate of interest, or rate of exchange between currencies, that affects the *market value of the debt;


    (b) each amount:


    (i) that you have deducted or can deduct as a result of the *forgiveness of the debt; and

    (ii) that is attributable to such a change.

    245-55(3)    
    Paragraph (1)(a) does not apply to the debt if:


    (a) either:


    (i) the creditor was an Australian resident at the forgiveness time; or

    (ii) the *forgiveness of the debt was a *CGT event involving a *CGT asset that was *taxable Australian property; and


    (b) you and the creditor were not dealing with each other at *arm ' s length in respect of you incurring the debt; and


    (c) the debt was not a *moneylending debt.

    Note:

    This subsection reduces your gross forgiven amount to reflect the reduction in the creditor ' s loss on the forgiven debt under the capital gains tax regime.


    245-55(4)    
    This section has effect subject to sections 245-60 and 245-61 (about non-recourse and assigned debts).

    SECTION 245-60   Special rule for working out the value of a non-recourse debt  

    245-60(1)    
    The value of a debt when it is *forgiven is the lesser of:


    (a) the amount of the debt outstanding at that time; and


    (b) the *market value at that time of the creditor ' s rights mentioned in paragraph (2)(b).

    245-60(2)    
    Subsection (1) applies to a debt if:


    (a) you incurred the debt directly in respect of financing:


    (i) the acquisition of property by you; or

    (ii) the construction or development of property by you;
    (but not including the manufacture of goods); and


    (b) the creditor ' s rights against you in the event of default in the payment of the debt or interest were, just before the debt was forgiven, limited to all or any of the following:


    (i) rights (including the right to money payable) in relation to all or any of the matters mentioned in subsection (3);

    (ii) rights in respect of a mortgage or other security over the property;

    (iii) rights arising out of any *arrangement relating to the financial obligations, in relation to the property, of the *end user of the property to you.

    245-60(3)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(b)(i), the matters are as follows:


    (a) the property or the use of the property;


    (b) goods produced, supplied, carried, transmitted or delivered by means of the property;


    (c) services provided by means of the property;


    (d) the loss or *disposal of the whole or a part of the property or of your interest in the property.

    SECTION 245-61  

    245-61   Special rule for working out the value of a previously assigned debt  


    If your debt has been assigned as mentioned in section 245-36 and is later *forgiven by the new creditor, the value of that debt when it is later forgiven is:


    (a) if the debt was not a *moneylending debt and the creditor and the new creditor were not dealing with each other at *arm ' s length in connection with the assignment - the *market value of the debt at the time of the assignment; or


    (b) in any other case - the sum of:


    (i) the amount or market value of the consideration (if any) you paid or gave, or are required to pay or give, to the creditor in respect of the assignment; and

    (ii) the amount or market value of the consideration (if any) the new creditor paid or gave in respect of the assignment.

    Working out if an amount is offset against the value of the debt

    SECTION 245-65   Amount offset against amount of debt  

    245-65(1)    
    The table explains how to work out the amount (if any) that is offset against the value of a debt when it is forgiven (calculated under section 245-55 , 245-60 or 245-61 ) in working out the *gross forgiven amount of the debt.


    Amount offset against value of debt
    Item Column 1
    In this case:
    Column 2
    the amount offset is:
    1 the debt is a * moneylending debt, and neither of items 4 and 6 applies the sum of:
    (a) each amount that the debtor has paid; and
    (b) the * market value, at the time of the * forgiveness, of each item of property (other than money) that the debtor has given; and
    (c) the market value, at that time, of each obligation of the debtor to pay an amount, or to give such an item of property;
    as a result of, or in respect of, the forgiveness of the debt.
    2 the debt is not a * moneylending
    debt, and none of items 3, 4, 5 and 6 applies
    the sum of:
    (a) each amount that the debtor has paid, or is required to pay; and
    (b) the * market value, at the time of the * forgiveness, of each item of property (other than money) that the debtor has given, or is required to give;
    as a result of, or in respect of, the forgiveness of the debt.
    3 the debt is not a * moneylending debt, the conditions in subsection (2) are met and none of items 4, 5 and 6 applies the * market value of the debt at the time of the * forgiveness.
    4 the debt is assigned as mentioned in section 245-36, and item 5 does not apply the sum of:
    (a) the amount or * market value of the consideration (if any) that the debtor has paid or given, or is required to pay or give, in respect of the assignment; and
    (b) the amount or market value of the consideration (if any) paid or given by the new creditor in respect of the assignment.
    5 the debt is assigned as mentioned in section 245-36, and:
    (a) the debt is not a * moneylending debt; and
    (b) the creditor and the new creditor were not dealing with each other at * arm ' s length in connection with the assignment
    the * market value of the debt at the time of the assignment.
    6 the debt is * forgiven by subscribing for * shares in a company as mentioned in section 245-37 the amount worked out using the formula in subsection (3).


    245-65(2)    
    The conditions for the purposes of item 3 of the table in subsection (1) are:


    (a) at least one of the following is satisfied:


    (i) at the time when the debt was *forgiven, the creditor was an Australian resident;

    (ii) the forgiveness of the debt was a *CGT event involving a *CGT asset that was *taxable Australian property; and


    (b) at least one of the following is satisfied:


    (i) there is no amount, and no property, covered by column 2 of item 2 of the table;

    (ii) the amount worked out under item 2 of the table is greater or less than the *market value of the debt at the time of the forgiveness and the debtor and creditor did not deal with each other at *arm ' s length in connection with the forgiveness.

    245-65(3)    
    The formula for the purposes of item 6 of the table in subsection (1) is:


    Amount applied × Market value of shares subscribed for
    Amount subscribed

    where:

    amount applied
    means the amount applied by the company as mentioned in section 245-37 .

    amount subscribed
    means the amount subscribed as mentioned in section 245-37 .

    market value of shares subscribed for
    means the *market value of all the shares in the company that were subscribed for as mentioned in section 245-37 , immediately after those shares were issued.


    Working out the gross forgiven amount

    SECTION 245-75   Gross forgiven amount of a debt  

    245-75(1)    
    The gross forgiven amount of a debt is:


    (a) if section 245-65 does not apply to the debt - the value of the debt when it was *forgiven (worked out under section 245-55 , 245-60 or 245-61 ); or


    (b) if the value of the debt when it was forgiven exceeds the amount offset under section 245-65 in relation to the debt - the excess.

    245-75(2)    
    If the value of the debt when it was *forgiven is equal to or less than the amount offset:


    (a) there is no gross forgiven amount in respect of the debt; and


    (b) Subdivisions 245-D to 245-F (about how to work out the net forgiven amount of a debt and how to treat it) do not apply in respect of the debt.

    SECTION 245-77  

    245-77   Gross forgiven amount shared between debtors  


    If 2 or more entities were liable (except as partners in a partnership) to pay a debt, whether their liability was joint or several, or joint and several, this Subdivision applies as if each entity had a *gross forgiven amount worked out using the formula:


    * Gross forgiven amount in relation to the debt
    Number of entities liable to pay the debt
     

    Subdivision 245-D - Calculation of net forgiven amount of a debt  

    Guide to Subdivision 245-D

    SECTION 245-80   What this Subdivision is about  

    The net forgiven amount of a debt is worked out by subtracting, from the gross forgiven amount of the debt, any amount that this Act already takes into account for the debtor because the debt was forgiven (for example, if some part of the forgiven amount is treated as the debtor ' s ordinary income).

    If the debtor and creditor were companies under common ownership, they may agree to transfer some of the net forgiven amount from the debtor to the creditor. The creditor must apply that amount to reduce the capital loss or deduction it has because of the forgiveness.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    245-85 Reduction of gross forgiven amount
    245-90 Agreement between companies under common ownership for creditor to forgo capital loss or deduction

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 245-85   Reduction of gross forgiven amount  

    245-85(1)    
    The *gross forgiven amount of your debt is reduced by the sum of the following amounts:


    (a) any amount that, under a provision of this Act other than this Division, has been, or will be, included in your assessable income for any income year as a result of the *forgiveness of the debt;


    (b) any amount by which, under a provision of this Act other than this Division, an amount you could otherwise have deducted for any income year has been, or will be, reduced as a result of the forgiveness of the debt (except a reduction under Division 727 (about indirect value shifting));


    (c) any amount by which the *cost base of any of your *CGT assets has been, or will be, reduced under Part 3-1 or 3-3 as a result of the forgiveness of the debt.

    Note:

    Paragraph (1)(c) does not cover a reduction under Division 727 (indirect value shifting) because that Division is not in Part 3-1 or 3-3.


    245-85(2)    
    Subject to section 245-90 , the amount remaining after reducing the *gross forgiven amount under subsection (1) is the net forgiven amount of the debt.

    SECTION 245-90   Agreement between companies under common ownership for creditor to forgo capital loss or deduction  

    245-90(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a debt owed by a company to another company is *forgiven; and


    (b) from the time when the debt was incurred until the time when the debt is forgiven, the companies were *under common ownership.

    245-90(2)    
    If, apart from this subsection, the creditor would have made a *capital loss as a result of the *forgiveness of the debt:


    (a) the debtor and creditor may agree that the creditor is to forgo so much of the loss as is stated in the agreement and does not exceed the amount that would be the net forgiven amount of the debt apart from this section (the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt); and


    (b) if such an agreement is made:


    (i) the creditor ' s capital loss is reduced by the agreed amount; and

    (ii) the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt is also reduced by the agreed amount; and

    (iii) the amount remaining after the reduction of the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt under subparagraph (ii) is the net forgiven amount of the debt.

    245-90(3)    
    If, apart from this subsection, the creditor could deduct an amount in respect of the debt under section 8-1 (about general deductions) or section 25-35 (about bad debts) for the *forgiveness income year:


    (a) the debtor and creditor may agree that the creditor is to forgo so much of the deduction as is stated in the agreement and does not exceed the amount that would be the net forgiven amount of the debt apart from this section (the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt); and


    (b) if such an agreement is made:


    (i) the amount the creditor can deduct is reduced by the agreed amount; and

    (ii) the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt is also reduced by the agreed amount; and

    (iii) the amount remaining after the reduction of the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt under subparagraph (ii) is the net forgiven amount of the debt.

    245-90(4)    
    Neither subsection (2) nor (3) applies in relation to an agreement unless the agreement:


    (a) is in writing and signed by the public officer of each company; and


    (b) is made before:


    (i) the first of those companies lodges its *income tax return for the *forgiveness income year; or

    (ii) any later day that the Commissioner determines in writing.

    245-90(5)    
    A determination made under subparagraph (4)(b)(ii) is not a legislative instrument.

    Subdivision 245-E - Application of net forgiven amounts  

    Guide to Subdivision 245-E

    SECTION 245-95   What this Subdivision is about  


    The total of the net forgiven amounts of all your debts forgiven in an income year is applied to reduce 4 classes of amounts that could otherwise reduce your taxable income in the same or a later income year. It is applied in the following order:

  • (a) to your tax losses from previous income years;
  • (b) to your net capital losses from previous income years;
  • (c) to the deductions you would otherwise get in the income year, or in a later income year, because of expenditure from a previous year (for example, the capital allowance deductions you would get for expenditure on acquiring a depreciating asset);
  • (d) to the cost bases of your CGT assets.
  • You can choose the order in which the net forgiven amounts reduce the amounts within each class.

    If all the amounts in the 4 classes are reduced to nil, any remaining net forgiven amounts are disregarded.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    General operative provisions
    245-100 Subdivision not to apply to calculation of attributable income
    245-105 How total net forgiven amount is applied
    Reduction of tax losses
    245-115 Total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of tax losses
    245-120 Allocation of total net forgiven amount in respect of tax losses
    Reduction of net capital losses
    245-130 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of net capital losses
    245-135 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amountin respect of net capital losses
    Reduction of expenditure
    245-145 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of expenditure
    245-150 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount in respect of expenditures
    245-155 How expenditure is reduced - straight line deductions
    245-157 How expenditure is reduced - diminishing balance deductions
    245-160 Amount applied in reduction of expenditure included in assessable income in certain circumstances
    Reduction of cost bases of assets
    245-175 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of cost bases of CGT assets
    245-180 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount among relevant cost bases of CGT assets
    245-185 Relevant cost bases of investments in associated entities are reduced last
    245-190 Reduction of the relevant cost bases of a CGT asset
    Unapplied total net forgiven amount
    245-195 No further consequences if there is any remaining unapplied total net forgiven amount

    General operative provisions

    SECTION 245-100  

    245-100   Subdivision not to apply to calculation of attributable income  


    This Subdivision does not apply to the calculation of:


    (a) attributable income of a non-resident trust estate within the meaning of section 102AAB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or


    (b) *attributable income of a *CFC.

    SECTION 245-105   How total net forgiven amount is applied  

    245-105(1)    
    Your total net forgiven amount for the *forgiveness income year is the total of the *net forgiven amounts of all your debts that are *forgiven in that year.

    Note 1:

    The total net forgiven amount may be reduced under section 707-415 .

    Note 2:

    The total net forgiven amount of a partner in a partnership is affected by section 245-215 .


    245-105(2)    
    Your *total net forgiven amount is applied, in accordance with sections 245-115 to 245-195 , for the *forgiveness income year.

    Reduction of tax losses

    SECTION 245-115  

    245-115   Total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of tax losses  


    The *total net forgiven amount is applied first, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction, in accordance with section 245-120 , of your *tax losses (if any) for any income years, if the tax losses could, if you had enough assessable income, be deducted in:


    (a) the *forgiveness income year; or


    (b) a later income year.

    SECTION 245-120   Allocation of total net forgiven amount in respect of tax losses  

    245-120(1)    
    You may choose:


    (a) the order in which your *tax losses are reduced; and


    (b) the amount applied to reduce each of those losses;

    so long as the *total net forgiven amount is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction of those losses.


    245-120(2)    
    If you do not make a choice for the purposes of subsection (1), the Commissioner may make the choice on your behalf in a reasonable way.

    Reduction of net capital losses

    SECTION 245-130   Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of net capital losses  

    245-130(1)    
    The *total net forgiven amount (if any) remaining after being applied under section 245-115 is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction, in accordance with section 245-135 , of your *net capital losses (if any) specified in subsection (2).

    245-130(2)    
    Those *net capital losses are your net capital losses for income years before the *forgiveness income year that you could apply in working out your *net capital gain for the forgiveness income year if you had enough capital gains.

    SECTION 245-135   Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount in respect of net capital losses  

    245-135(1)    
    You may choose:


    (a) the order in which your *net capital losses are reduced; and


    (b) the amount applied in reduction of each of those losses;

    so long as the *total net forgiven amount remaining is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction of those losses.


    245-135(2)    
    If you do not make a choice for the purposes of subsection (1), the Commissioner may make the choice on your behalf in a reasonable way.

    Reduction of expenditure

    SECTION 245-145   Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of expenditure  

    245-145(1)    


    The *total net forgiven amount (if any) remaining after being applied under sections 245-115 and 245-130 is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction, in accordance with sections 245-150 , 245-155 and 245-157 , of your expenditure that:


    (a) is mentioned in the following table (other than expenditure covered by subsection (2)) and was incurred by you before the *forgiveness income year; and


    (b) apart from this Subdivision, could be deducted by you for the forgiveness income year or a later income year if no event or circumstance (other than a *recoupment of the expenditure by you in the forgiveness income year) occurred that would affect its deductibility.


    Table of expenditure
    Item Column 1
    General description of expenditure
    Column 2
    Provision under which a deduction is available for the expenditure
    1 Expenditure deductible under Division 40 (Capital allowances) Division 40 of this Act
    2 Expenditure incurred in * borrowing money to produce assessable income Section 25-25 of this Act
    3 Expenditure on scientific research Subsection 73A(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
    4 Expenditure deductible under Division 355 (R & D) Division 355 of this Act
    5 Advance revenue expenditure Subdivision H of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
    6 Expenditure on acquiring a unit of industrial property to produce assessable income Subsection 124M(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
    7 Expenditure on Australian films Section 124ZAFA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
    8 Expenditure on assessable income-producing buildings and other capital works Section 43-10 of this Act

    Note:

    If the asset to which the expenditure relates was disposed of, lost or destroyed before 28 June 1996 or the expenditure was recouped before 28 June 1996, see section 245-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    245-145(2)    
    Expenditure is covered by this subsection if:


    (a) it was incurred in respect of an asset you *disposed of to an entity that you dealt with at *arm ' s length in respect of the disposal; and


    (b) the disposal occurred during the *forgiveness income year before the *forgiveness of any debt owed by you, and the forgiveness resulted in a *net forgiven amount; and


    (c) no provision of this Act includes an amount in your assessable income, or allows you a deduction, as a result of the disposal.

    SECTION 245-150   Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount in respect of expenditures  

    245-150(1)    
    You may choose:


    (a) the order in which your expenditures are reduced; and


    (b) the amount applied in reduction of each of those expenditures;

    so long as that the *total net forgiven amount remaining is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction of your expenditures.


    245-150(2)    
    If you do not make a choice for the purposes of subsection (1), the Commissioner may make the choice on your behalf in a reasonable way.

    SECTION 245-155   How expenditure is reduced - straight line deductions  

    245-155(1)    
    This section applies in respect of the reduction under section 245-145 of an expenditure of yours, if:


    (a) the amount that you could deduct, apart from this Subdivision, in respect of the expenditure is a percentage, fraction or proportion of an amount (the base amount ); and


    (b) the base amount is worked out without regard to any amount or amounts you previously deducted in respect of that expenditure.

    245-155(2)    
    The amount of the reduction of the expenditure must not exceed:


    (a) the base amount; less


    (b) the amount of that part of the expenditure in respect of which you have deducted (disregarding subsection (4)), or can deduct, an amount for any income year before the *forgiveness income year.

    245-155(3)    
    For the purpose of working out your deductions for the *forgiveness income year and later income years, any amount that is applied in reduction of your expenditure is taken to reduce the base amount.

    245-155(4)    
    You are taken to have deducted the amount of the reduction in respect of the expenditure:


    (a) before the *forgiveness income year; and


    (b) for the purposes of any provision of this Act that includes an amount in your assessable income or allows you a deduction:


    (i) because of the *disposal, loss or destruction of the asset in respect of which the expenditure was incurred; or

    (ii) because of the *recoupment of any of the expenditure; or

    (iii) because use of the asset for a particular purpose has been otherwise terminated; or

    (iv) because a *balancing adjustment event occurs for that asset.

    245-155(5)    
    The amount of that part of the expenditure in respect of which you have deducted (disregarding subsection (4), or can deduct, an amount for all income years (including income years before the *forgiveness income year) must not exceed the base amount as reduced under subsection (3).

    SECTION 245-157  

    245-157   How expenditure is reduced - diminishing balance deductions  


    Any amount applied in reduction under section 245-145 of an expenditure of yours is taken to have been deducted by you in respect of the expenditure before the *forgiveness income year, if the amount you could deduct, apart from this Subdivision, in respect of the expenditure is a percentage, fraction or proportion of an amount that is worked out after taking into account any amount previously deducted by you in respect of the expenditure.

    SECTION 245-160  

    245-160   Amount applied in reduction of expenditure included in assessable income in certain circumstances  


    If:


    (a) after the *forgiveness income year you *recoup an amount of expenditure that is subject to reduction under section 245-145 ; and


    (b) as a result of the recoupment, this Act applies to disallow any amount you have deducted in respect of the expenditure;

    an amount equal to the amount, or the sum of the amounts, applied under this Subdivision in reduction of the expenditure is included in your assessable income in the income year in which the expenditure is recouped.

    Reduction of cost bases of assets

    SECTION 245-175   Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of cost bases of CGT assets  

    245-175(1)    
    The *total net forgiven amount (if any) remaining after being applied under sections 245-115 , 245-130 and 245-145 is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction, in accordance with sections 245-180 to 245-190 , of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of your *CGT assets.

    245-175(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to the following *CGT assets:


    (a) a *pre-CGT asset;


    (b) a CGT asset you *acquire after the start of the *forgiveness income year;


    (c) a *personal use asset;


    (d) a *dwelling that was your main residence at any time before the forgiveness income year;


    (e) goodwill;


    (f) a right of yours covered by section 118-305 (which exempts from CGT certain rights relating to a superannuation fund or approved deposit fund);


    (g) a CGT asset that, throughout the period before the forgiveness income year when it was owned by you, was your *trading stock;


    (h) a CGT asset if:


    (i) expenditure by you (of a kind which is subject to reduction under section 245-145 ) relates to the asset; and

    (ii) a *CGT event in relation to the asset would result in an amount being included in your assessable income, or in you being able to deduct an amount;


    (i) if you are a foreign resident at the beginning of the forgiveness income year - an asset of yours that is not *taxable Australian property.

    SECTION 245-180   Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount among relevant cost bases of CGT assets  

    245-180(1)    
    Subject to section 245-185 , you may choose:


    (a) your *CGT assets whose *cost base and *reduced cost base are subject to reduction under section 245-175 ; and


    (b) the amount applied in reduction of the cost base and reduced cost base of each of those assets;

    so long as the *total net forgiven amount remaining is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction of the cost base and reduced cost base of such assets.


    245-180(2)    
    If you do not make a choice for the purposes of subsection (1), the Commissioner may make the choice on your behalf in a reasonable way.

    SECTION 245-185  

    245-185   Relevant cost bases of investments in associated entities are reduced last  


    If your *CGT assets that are subject to reduction under section 245-175 include investments in, or in relation to, an *associate of yours (including *membership interests, or *debt interests, in your associate), the:


    (a) *cost base; and


    (b) *reduced cost base;

    of those assets are not subject to reduction under section 245-175 until the *total net forgiven amount (if any) remaining has been applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction of the cost bases of your other CGT assets.

    SECTION 245-190   Reduction of the relevant cost bases of a CGT asset  

    245-190(1)    
    Subject to subsection (3), if you choose to apply an amount in reduction of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a particular *CGT asset, the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset, as at any time on or after the beginning of the *forgiveness income year, are reduced by that amount.

    245-190(2)    
    The reduction by a particular amount of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a particular *CGT asset is, for the purpose of working out the amount by which the *total net forgiven amount remaining is applied, taken to be a reduction by the particular amount (and not by the sum of the amounts by which those cost bases are reduced).

    245-190(3)    
    The maximum amount by which the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a *CGT asset may be reduced is the amount that, apart from sections 245-175 to 245-185 , would be the reduced cost base of the asset calculated as if a *CGT event had happened to the asset:


    (a) subject to paragraph (b), on the first day of the *forgiveness income year; or


    (b) if, after the beginning of that income year, an event occurred that would cause the reduced cost base of the asset to be reduced - on the day on which the event occurred;

    and the asset had been *disposed of at its *market value on the day concerned.


    Unapplied total net forgiven amount

    SECTION 245-195   No further consequences if there is any remaining unapplied total net forgiven amount  

    245-195(1)    
    If any part of the *total net forgiven amount remains after the application of that amount in making reductions under the preceding provisions of this Subdivision, the remaining part is disregarded.

    245-195(2)    
    This section has effect subject to section 245-215 (about partnerships and transferring the remaining part to the partners).

    Subdivision 245-F - Special rules relating to partnerships  

    Guide to Subdivision 245-F

    SECTION 245-200   What this Subdivision is about  


    Any part of a partnership ' s total net forgiven amount left over after applying it under Subdivision 245-E is divided between the partners. Each partner treats the partner ' s share as a net forgiven amount the partner has for the income year.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    245-215 Unapplied total net forgiven amount of a partnership is transferred to partners

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 245-215   Unapplied total net forgiven amount of a partnership is transferred to partners  

    245-215(1)    
    This section applies if any part (the residual amount ) of the *total net forgiven amount in relation to a partnership in respect of the *forgiveness income year remains after the total net forgiven amount has been applied in accordance with Subdivision 245-E .

    245-215(2)    
    If there is a *net income in relation to the partnership in respect of the *forgiveness income year:


    (a) each partner is taken to have had a debt *forgiven during the forgiveness income year; and


    (b) there is taken to be, in respect of the debt of each partner, a *net forgiven amount worked out in accordance with the following formula:


    Partner ' s share of net income × Residual amount
    Net income

    where:

    partner ' s share of net income
    means the part of the net income of the partnership for the forgiveness income year that is included in the partner ' s assessable income.


    245-215(3)    
    If there is a *partnership loss in relation to the partnership in respect of the *forgiveness income year:


    (a) each partner is taken to have had a debt *forgiven during the forgiveness income year; and


    (b) there is taken to be, in respect of the debt of each partner, a *net forgiven amount worked out in accordance with the following formula:


    Partner ' s share of partnership loss × Residual amount
    Partnership loss

    where:

    partner ' s share of partnership loss
    means the part of the partnership loss that the partner has deducted or can deduct.


    245-215(4)    
    The *total net forgiven amount of a partner for the *forgiveness income year as worked out under subsection 245-105(1) includes the *net forgiven amount worked out in relation to the partner under this section.

    245-215(5)    
    This section has effect in relation to a partnership irrespective of any agreement between the partners as to the operation of this section.

    Subdivision 245-G - Record keeping  

    SECTION 245-265   Keeping and retaining records  

    245-265(1)    
    If you incur a debt, you must keep any records that are necessary to enable the following matters to be readily found out:


    (a) the date on which you incurred the debt;


    (b) the identity of the creditor;


    (c) the amount of the debt;


    (d) the terms of repayment of the debt;


    (e) if the debt is not a *moneylending debt and you and the creditor were not dealing with each other at arm ' s length in respect of the incurring of the debt - your capacity at the time when the debt was incurred to pay the debt when it falls due;


    (f) if your debt is *forgiven - the date of the forgiveness and the amount offset under section 245-65 (if any) in respect of the debt.

    Note:

    There is an administrative penalty if you do not keep or retain records as required by this section: see section 288-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    245-265(2)    
    If a company and another company that are *under common ownership cease to be under common ownership, each company must keep any records that are necessary to enable the following matters to be readily found out:


    (a) the date on which the companies ceased to be under common ownership;


    (b) the identity of each entity that was a *controller (for CGT purposes) of the company immediately before the companies ceased to be under common ownership;


    (c) the identity of each entity that was a controller (for CGT purposes) of the company immediately after the companies ceased to be under common ownership.

    245-265(3)    
    You must keep the records required by subsection (1) or (2) in writing in the English language or so as to enable them to be readily accessible and convertible into writing in the English language.

    245-265(4)    
    Subject to subsection (5), you must keep the records required by subsection (1) until:


    (a) if paragraph (b) does not apply - the end of 5 years after the debt was *forgiven; or


    (b) if the period within which the Commissioner may, under section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , amend your assessment for the income year to which the records relate, or in which a transaction or act to which the records relate was completed, is extended under subsection 170(7) of that Act - the later of:


    (i) the end of the assessment period as so extended; and

    (ii) the end of the period of 5 years mentioned in paragraph (a).

    245-265(5)    
    Subsection (4) does not require you to keep records after the debt is paid.

    245-265(6)    
    Subject to subsection (7), each company that keeps any records required by subsection (2) must retain the records until the end of the second income year after the income year in which the companies ceased to be *under common ownership.

    245-265(7)    
    If a debt of one of the companies mentioned in subsection (2) was *forgiven at any time after the companies ceased to be *under common ownership and before the end of the second income year after the income year in which the cessation occurred, each company that keeps records required by that subsection must retain the records until the time specified in subsection (4).

    245-265(8)   
    You commit an offence if you fail to comply with a provision of this section.

    Penalty: 30 penalty units.


    245-265(9)    
    An offence against subsection (8) is an offence of strict liability.

    Note:

    For strict liability, see section 6.1 of the Criminal Code .


    245-265(10)    
    This section does not limit the application of any other provision of this Act relating to the keeping or retention of records.

    Division 247 - Capital protected borrowings  

    SECTION 247-1   What this Division is about  


    Capital protection provided under a relevant capital protected borrowing to the extent that it is not provided by an explicit put option is treated (for the borrower) as if it were a put option.

    An amount attributable to capital protection under any relevant capital protected borrowing is treated (for the borrower) as a payment for a put option.

    Operative provisions  

    SECTION 247-5  

    247-5   Object of Division  


    The object of this Division is to ensure that amounts for *capital protection under all relevant *capital protected borrowings are treated (for the borrower) under this Act as a payment for a put option.

    SECTION 247-10   What capital protected borrowing and capital protection are  

    247-10(1)    
    An *arrangement under which a *borrowing is made, or credit is provided, is a capital protected borrowing if the borrower is wholly or partly protected against a fall in the *market value of a thing (the protected thing ) to the extent that:


    (a) the borrower uses the amount borrowed or credit provided to acquire the protected thing; or


    (b) the borrower uses the protected thing as security for the borrowing or provision of credit.

    247-10(2)    
    That protection is called capital protection .

    SECTION 247-15   Application of this Division  

    247-15(1)    
    This Division applies to a *capital protected borrowing only if the protected thing is a beneficial interest in:


    (a) a *share, a unit in a unit trust or a stapled security; or


    (b) an entity that holds a beneficial interest in a share, unit in a unit trust or stapled security either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities.

    247-15(2)    
    This Division applies only to borrowers under *capital protected borrowings.

    247-15(3)    


    This Division does not apply to a *capital protected borrowing if:


    (a) an *ESS interest is acquired under the borrowing; and


    (b) Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the ESS interest.


    247-15(4)    
    This Division does not apply to a *capital protected borrowing entered into before 1 July 2007 (except to the extent that it is extended on or after that day) unless the *share, unit in a unit trust or stapled security is listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange.

    247-15(5)    
    This Division does not apply to a *capital protected borrowing entered into on or after 1 July 2007 if:


    (a) the protected thing is a beneficial interest in:


    (i) a *share, unit or stapled security that is not listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange; or

    (ii) an entity that holds a beneficial interest in a share, unit in a unit trust or stapled security either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, that is not so listed; and


    (b) one of these conditions is satisfied:


    (i) for a non-listed share - the company is not a *widely held company;

    (ii) for a non-listed unit - the trust is not a widely held unit trust as defined in section 272-105 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;

    (iii) for a non-listed stapled security - any company involved is not a widely held company and any trust involved is not such a widely held unit trust.

    SECTION 247-20   Treating capital protection as a put option  

    247-20(1)    
    This section applies to a borrower if:


    (aa) the borrower has an excess using the method statement in subsection (3) for:


    (i) a *capital protected borrowing entered into after 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 2008 (the 2008 Budget time ); or

    (ii) an extension of the capital protected borrowing; or


    (a) the borrower has an amount that is reasonably attributable to the *capital protection as mentioned in subsection (2) for a capital protected borrowing entered into or extended on or after 1 July 2007 and at or before the 2008 Budget time; or


    (b) the borrower has an amount that is reasonably attributable to the capital protection as mentioned in subsection (2) for a capital protected borrowing entered into or extended at or after 9.30 am, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 16 April 2003 and before 1 July 2007.

    Note:

    If a capital protected borrowing covered by paragraph (1)(a) or (b) is extended or otherwise changed after the 2008 Budget time, section 247-85 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 applies to the capital protected borrowing.


    247-20(2)    


    For paragraphs (1)(a) and (b), the amount that is reasonably attributable to the *capital protection is worked out under Division 247 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    247-20(3)    


    This is the method statement. Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out the total amount incurred by the borrower under or in respect of the *capital protected borrowing for the income year, ignoring amounts that are not in substance for *capital protection or interest.


    Step 2.

    Work out the total interest that would have been incurred for the income year on a *borrowing or provision of credit of the same amount as under the *capital protected borrowing at the rate applicable under either or both of subsections (4) and (5A).


    Step 3.

    If the step 1 amount exceeds the step 2 amount, the excess is reasonably attributable to the *capital protection for the income year.

    Example:

    Amounts that would be ignored under step 1 include amounts that are in substance the repayment of a loan or credit, the payment of an application fee or brokerage commission and the payment of stamp duty or other tax.


    247-20(4)    


    If:


    (a) the *capital protected borrowing is at a fixed rate for all or part of the term of the capital protected borrowing; and


    (b) that fixed rate is applicable to the capital protected borrowing for all or part of the income year;

    use the rate worked out under subsection (5) at the first time an amount covered by step 1 of the method statement in subsection (3) was incurred, in any income year, during the term of the capital protected borrowing or that part of the term.


    247-20(5)    


    The rate (the adjusted loan rate ), at a particular time, is the sum of:


    (a) the Reserve Bank of Australia ' s Indicator Lending Rate for Standard Variable Housing Loans at that time; and


    (b) 100 basis points.

    S 247-20(5) substituted by No 61 of 2011, s 3 and Sch 2 item 7, effective 29 June 2011. S 247-20(5) formerly read:


    247-20(5)
    If the *capital protected borrowing is at a variable rate for all or part of the term of the *borrowing, use the average of the benchmark rates published by the Reserve Bank of Australia during the term of the borrowing or the relevant part of the term.


    247-20(5A)    


    If:


    (a) the *capital protected borrowing is at a variable rate for all or part of the term of the capital protected borrowing; and


    (b) a variable rate is applicable to the capital protected borrowing for all or part of the income year;

    use the average of the adjusted loan rates applicable during those parts of the income year when the capital protected borrowing is at a variable rate.


    247-20(6)    
    If this section applies to a borrower, this Act applies as if:


    (a) the borrower ' s excess from the method statement in subsection (3); or


    (b) the amount that is reasonably attributable to *capital protection as mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) or (b);

    (reduced by any amount the borrower incurred under or in respect of the *capital protected borrowing for an explicit put option) were incurred only for a put option granted by the lender or by another entity under the *arrangement.


    SECTION 247-25   Number of put options  

    247-25(1)    
    If a *capital protected borrowing specifies more than one occasion on which the *capital protection can be invoked, this Act applies as if there were a separate put option for each of those occasions. So much of the amount to which subsection 247-20(6) applies as is reasonably attributable to each option is taken to have been incurred for that option.

    247-25(2)    
    However, if a borrower may invoke the *capital protection under a *capital protected borrowing at any time up to the end of a period, or only at the end of a period, for which there is capital protection, this Act applies as if there were a single put option for that period.

    SECTION 247-30   Exercise or expiry of option  

    247-30(1)    
    If the *capital protection under a *capital protected borrowing is invoked:


    (a) the borrower is taken to have exercised the put option; and


    (b) any interest in a *share, unit in a unit trust or stapled security that is acquired by the lender or another entity under the *arrangement as a result of that capital protection being invoked is taken to have been disposed of by the borrower as a result of the exercise of the option.

    247-30(2)    
    If the *capital protection under a *capital protected borrowing is not invoked on or before the last occasion on which it could have been, the put option is taken to have expired.

    Note:

    If a borrower under a capital protected borrowing holds the protected things on capital account, the exercise or expiry of the put option may give rise to a capital gain or capital loss: see sections 104-25 (CGT event C2) and 134-1 (exercise of options).


    Division 250 - Assets put to tax preferred use  

    Guide to Division 250  

    SECTION 250-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division denies or reduces certain capital allowance deductions that would otherwise be available to you in relation to an asset if the asset is put to a tax preferred use in certain circumstances.

    If the capital allowance deductions are denied or reduced, certain financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset are assessed only to the extent of a notional gain component. This component is worked out on the basis of treating the arrangements under which the asset is put to a tax preferred use, and financial benefits are provided in relation to that tax preferred use, as a loan. Subdivision 250-E then applies to determine the amounts that are to be assessed.

    Subdivision 250-A - Objects  

    SECTION 250-5  

    250-5   Main objects  


    The main objects of this Division are:


    (a) to deny or reduce your *capital allowance deductions in respect of an asset if the asset is put to a *tax preferred use and you have insufficient economic interest in the asset; and


    (b) if your capital allowance deductions are denied or reduced, to treat the *arrangement for the tax preferred use of the asset as a loan that is taxed as a financial arrangement (on a compounding accruals basis).

    Subdivision 250-B - When this Division applies to you and an asset  

    Overall test

    SECTION 250-10  

    250-10   When this Division applies to you and an asset  


    This Division applies to you and an asset at a particular time if:


    (a) the general test in section 250-15 is satisfied in relation to you and the asset; and


    (b) none of the exclusions in sections 250-20 , 250-25 , 250-30 , 250-40 and 250-45 apply.

    SECTION 250-15  

    250-15   General test  


    This Division applies to you and an asset at a particular time if:


    (a) the asset is being *put to a tax preferred use; and


    (b) the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset is greater than 12 months; and


    (c) *financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset have been, will be or can reasonably be expected to be, *provided to you (or a *connected entity) by:


    (i) a *tax preferred end user (or a connected entity); or

    (ii) any *tax preferred entity (or a connected entity); or

    (iii) any entity that is a foreign resident; and


    (d) disregarding this Division, you would be entitled to a *capital allowance in relation to:


    (i) a decline in the value of the asset; or

    (ii) expenditure in relation to the asset; and


    (e) you lack a *predominant economic interest in the asset at that time.

    SECTION 250-20  

    250-20   First exclusion - small business entities  


    This Division does not apply to you and an asset if:


    (a) you are a *small business entity for the income year in which the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset starts; and


    (b) you choose to deduct amounts under Subdivision 328-D for the asset for that income year.

    SECTION 250-25   Second exclusion - financial benefits under minimum value limit  

    250-25(1)    
    This Division does not apply to you and an asset that is being *put to a tax preferred use under a particular *arrangement if, at the start of the *arrangement period, the total of the nominal values of all the *financial benefits that have been, or will be or can reasonably be expected to be, provided to you (or a *connected entity):


    (a) by *members of the tax preferred sector; and


    (b) in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset or any other asset that is being, or is to be, put to a tax preferred use under the arrangement;

    does not exceed $5 million.


    250-25(2)    
    The amount referred to in subsection (1) is indexed annually.

    Note:

    Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts.


    SECTION 250-30   Third exclusion - certain short term or low value arrangements  


    Certain short term or low value arrangements generally excluded

    250-30(1)   
    This Division does not apply to you and an asset that is being *put to a tax preferred use under a particular *arrangement if:


    (a) the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset does not exceed:


    (i) 5 years if the asset is real property and the tax preferred use of the asset is a lease; or

    (ii) 3 years in any other case; or


    (b) at the start of the arrangement period, the total of the nominal values of all the *financial benefits that have been, will be or can reasonably be expected to be, provided to you (or a *connected entity):


    (i) by *members of the tax preferred sector; and

    (ii) in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset or any other asset that is being, or is to be, put to a tax preferred use under the arrangement;
    does not exceed:

    (iii) $50 million if the asset is real property and the tax preferred use of the asset is a lease; or

    (iv) $30 million in any other case; or


    (c) at the start of the arrangement period, the total of the values of all the assets that are put to a tax preferred use under the arrangement does not exceed:


    (i) $40 million if the asset is real property and the tax preferred use of the asset is a lease; or

    (ii) $20 million in any other case.

    This subsection has effect subject to section 250-35 .


    250-30(2)    
    The amounts referred to in paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are indexed annually.

    Note:

    Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts.


    SECTION 250-35   Exceptions to section 250-30  


    Debt interests

    250-35(1)    
    Section 250-30 does not apply if the *arrangement (either alone or together with any arrangement in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset or the provision of *financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset) is a *debt interest.

    250-35(2)    
    In applying subsection (1), disregard subsection 974-130(4) .

    Member of tax preferred sector having certain rights in relation to the asset

    250-35(3)    
    Section 250-30 does not apply if:


    (a) a *member of the tax preferred sector has:


    (i) a right, obligation or contingent obligation to purchase or acquire the asset or a legal or equitable interest in the asset; or

    (ii) a right to require the transfer of the asset or a legal or equitable interest in the asset; or

    (iii) a residual or reversionary interest in the asset that will arise or become exercisable at or after the end of the *arrangement period; and


    (b) the consideration for the purchase, acquisition or transfer of the right, obligation or interest is not fixed as the *market value of the asset at the time of the purchase, acquisition or transfer.

    To avoid doubt, this subsection does not apply to the asset merely because your interest in the asset is one that ceases to exist after the passage of a particular period of time.



    Member of tax preferred sector providing financing

    250-35(4)    
    Section 250-30 does not apply if a *member of the tax preferred sector provides financing, or support for financing, in relation to your interest in the asset (including by way of a loan, a guarantee, an indemnity, a security, hedging or undertaking to provide *financial benefits in the event of the termination of an *arrangement).

    Finance leases, non-cancellable operating leases, service concessions and similar arrangements

    250-35(5)    
    Section 250-30 does not apply if an *arrangement in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset, or the provision of *financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset, is or involves:


    (a) a finance lease; or


    (b) a non-cancellable operating lease; or


    (c) a service concession or similar arrangement;

    that generally accepted accounting principles, as in force at the start of the *arrangement period, require to be included as an asset or a liability in your balance sheet.



    Financial benefits irregular, not based on comparable market-based rates or not reflecting value of tax preferred use of asset

    250-35(6)    
    Section 250-30 does not apply if the *financial benefits that have been, or are to be provided, to you (or a *connected entity) by *members of the tax preferred sector in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset:


    (a) are not provided on a regular periodic basis (and at least annually); or


    (b) are not based on comparable market-based rates, or


    (c) do not reflect the value of the tax preferred use of the asset.

    Special rules if tax preferred use is a lease or hire of the asset

    250-35(7)    
    If the *tax preferred use of the asset is a lease or hire of the asset (or the use of the asset under a lease or hire arrangement), section 250-30 does not apply if:


    (a) the asset is so specialised that the *end user could not carry out one or more of its functions effectively without the asset; and


    (b) you would be unlikely to be able to re-lease, re-hire or resell the asset to another person who is not a *member of the tax preferred end user group.

    Note:

    For particular arrangements that are treated as leases, see section 250-80 .



    Special rules if tax preferred use is not a lease or hire of the asset

    250-35(8)    
    If the *tax preferred use of the asset is not the lease or hire of the asset (or the use of the asset under a lease or hire arrangement), section 250-30 does not apply if:


    (a) a *member of the tax preferred sector has a right, if particular circumstances occur, to manage, or to assume control over, the asset (other than temporarily for the purpose of ensuring public health or safety, protecting the environment or continuing the supply of an essential service); or


    (b) the asset is so specialised that it is unlikely that it could effectively be put to any use other than the tax preferred use; or


    (c) neither you (nor a *connected entity) has effective day to day control and physical possession of the asset.

    Note:

    For particular arrangements that are treated as leases, see section 250-80 .


    SECTION 250-40   Fourth exclusion - sum of present values of financial benefits less than amount otherwise assessable  

    250-40(1)    
    This Division does not apply to you and an asset that is being *put to a tax preferred use under a particular *arrangement if, when that *tax preferred use of the asset starts, the Division 250 assessable amount is less than the alternative assessable amount.

    250-40(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), the Division 250 assessable amount is the sum of the present values of all the amounts that would be likely to be included in your assessable income under this Divison in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset if this Division applied to you and the asset.

    250-40(3)    
    This is how to work out the alternative assessable amount for the purposes of subsection (1): Method statement


    Step 1.

    Add up the present values of the amounts that would be included in your assessable income in relation to the *financial benefits *provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset during the *arrangement period if this Division did not apply to you and the asset.


    Step 2.

    Add up the present values of the amounts that you would be able to deduct in relation to the asset, or expenditure in relation to the asset, under Division 40 or Division 43 in relation to the *arrangement period if this Division did not apply to you and the asset.


    Step 3.

    Deduct the amount obtained in Step 2 from the amount obtained in Step 1. The result is the alternative assessable amount .


    250-40(4)    
    To avoid doubt, the amounts referred to in subsections (2) and (3) are all the amounts that would be likely to be included in your assessable income, or deducted, for all the income years during the whole, or a part, of which the asset is *put to the tax preferred use.

    250-40(5)    
    The point in time to be used in determining, for the purposes of this section:


    (a) the present value of an amount that is included in your assessable income for an income year; or


    (b) the present value of an amount that you would be able to deduct for an income year;

    is the end of the income year.


    SECTION 250-45  

    250-45   Fifth exclusion - Commissioner determination  


    This Division does not apply to you and an asset at a particular time if:


    (a) you request the Commissioner to make a determination under this subsection; and


    (b) the Commissioner determines that it is unreasonable that the Division should apply to you and the asset at that time, having regard to:


    (i) the circumstances because of which this Division would apply to you and the asset; and

    (ii) any other relevant circumstances.

    Tax preferred use of asset

    SECTION 250-50   End user of an asset  

    250-50(1)    
    An entity (other than you) is an end user of an asset if the entity (or a *connected entity):


    (a) uses, or effectively controls the use of, the asset; or


    (b) will use, or effectively control the use of, the asset; or


    (c) is able to use, or effectively control the use of, the asset; or


    (d) will be able to use, or effectively control the use of, the asset.

    250-50(2)    
    The control referred to in subsection (1) may be direct or indirect.

    250-50(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard any temporary control of the asset that is for the purpose of ensuring public health or safety, protecting the environment or continuing the supply of an essential service.

    250-50(4)    
    To avoid doubt, an entity is taken to be an end user of an asset if the entity (or a *connected entity) holds rights as a lessee under a lease of the asset.

    Note:

    For particular arrangements that are treated as leases, see section 250-80 .


    SECTION 250-55  

    250-55   Tax preferred end user  


    An *end user of an asset is a tax preferred end user if:


    (a) the end user (or a *connected entity) is a *tax preferred entity; or


    (b) the end user is:


    (i) an entity that is a foreign resident; or

    (ii) an entity that is an Australian resident, to the extent that the entity carries on * business in a foreign country at or through a * permanent establishment of the entity in that country.

    SECTION 250-60   Tax preferred use of an asset  

    250-60(1)    
    An asset is put to a tax preferred use at a particular time if:


    (a) an *end user (or a *connected entity) holds, at that time, rights as lessee under a lease of the asset; and


    (b) either or both of the following subparagraphs is satisfied at that time:


    (i) the asset is, or is to be, used by or on behalf of an end user who is a *tax preferred end user because of paragraph 250-55(a) (tax preferred entity);

    (ii) the asset is, or is to be, used wholly or principally outside Australia and an end user of the asset is a tax preferred end user because of paragraph 250-55(b) (foreign resident or business).

    If this subsection applies, the tax preferred use of the asset is the lease referred to in paragraph (a).

    Note:

    For particular arrangements that are treated as leases, see section 250-80 .


    250-60(2)    
    An asset is also put to a tax preferred use at a particular time if:


    (a) at that time the asset is, or is to be, used (whether or not by you) wholly or partly in connection with:


    (i) the production, supply, carriage, transmission or delivery of goods; or

    (ii) the provision of services or facilities; and


    (b) either or both of the following subparagraphs is satisfied at that time:


    (i) some or all of the goods, services or facilities are, or are to be, produced for or supplied, carried, transmitted or delivered to or for an *end user who is a *tax preferred end user because of paragraph 250-55(a) (tax preferred entity) but is not an *exempt foreign government agency;

    (ii) the asset is, or is to be, used wholly or principally outside Australia and an end user of the asset is a tax preferred end user because of paragraph 250-55(b) (foreign resident or business).

    If this subsection applies, the tax preferred use of the asset is the production, supply, carriage, transmission, delivery or provision referred to in paragraph (a).


    250-60(3)    


    To avoid doubt, the facilities referred to in subsection (2) include:


    (a) hospital or medical facilities; or


    (b) prison facilities; or


    (c) educational facilities; or


    (d) (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)


    (e) transport facilities; or


    (f) the supply of water, gas or electricity; or


    (g) housing or accommodation; or


    (h) premises from which to operate a *business or other undertaking.


    250-60(4)    
    If the asset is being *put to a tax preferred use:


    (a) the members of the tax preferred end user group are:


    (i) the *tax preferred end user; and

    (ii) the *connected entities of the tax preferred end user; and


    (b) the members of the tax preferred sector are:


    (i) the tax preferred end user (and connected entities); and

    (ii) any *tax preferred entity (or a connected entity); and

    (iii) any entity that is a foreign resident.

    SECTION 250-65   Arrangement period for tax preferred use  


    Start of the arrangement period

    250-65(1)    
    The arrangement period for a particular *tax preferred use of an asset starts when that tax preferred use of the asset starts.

    End of the arrangement period

    250-65(2)    
    Subject to subsection (3), the arrangement period for a particular *tax preferred use of an asset is taken to end on the day that is the date on which the tax preferred use of the asset may reasonably be expected, or is likely, to end.

    250-65(3)    
    The arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends when this Division ceases to apply to you and the asset if that happens before the day referred to in subsection (2).

    250-65(4)    
    In determining when a particular *tax preferred use of an asset is likely to end:


    (a) regard must be had to:


    (i) the terms of, and any other circumstances relating to, any *arrangement dealing with that tax preferred use of the asset; and

    (ii) the terms of, and any other circumstances relating to, any arrangement dealing with the *provision of *financial benefits in relation to that tax preferred use of the asset; and


    (b) it must be assumed that any right that an entity has to renew or extend such an arrangement will not be exercised (unless it is reasonable to assume that the right will be exercised because of the commercial consequences for the entity (or a *connected entity) of not exercising the right).

    Tax preferred uses of asset by entity and connected entity

    250-65(5)    
    For the purposes of this section:


    (a) the *tax preferred use of an asset by an entity; and


    (b) the tax preferred use of the asset by a *connected entity of that entity;

    are taken to constitute a single tax preferred use of the asset.


    SECTION 250-70  

    250-70   New tax preferred use at end of arrangement period if tax preferred use continues  


    If:


    (a) this Division applies to you and an asset because the asset is *put to a tax preferred use; and


    (b) the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends on a particular date (the termination date ); and


    (c) the asset continues to be put to the tax preferred use after the termination date;

    the tax preferred use of the asset after the termination date is taken to be a separate and distinct tax preferred use of the asset from the tax preferred use of the asset before the termination date.

    Note:

    This means, among other things, that there is a new arrangement period for the tax preferred use after the termination date and that the arrangement is retested under section 250-15 against circumstances as they stand immediately after the termination date.

    SECTION 250-75   What constitutes a separate asset for the purposes of this Division  

    250-75(1)    
    This Division applies to:


    (a) an improvement to land; or


    (b) a fixture on land;

    whether the improvement or fixture is removable or not, as if it were an asset separate from the land.


    250-75(2)    
    Whether a particular composite item is itself an asset or whether its components are separate assets is a question of fact and degree which can only be determined in the light of all the circumstances of the particular case. EXAMPLES

    Example 1:

    A car is made up of many separate components, but usually the car is an asset rather than each component.

    Example 2:

    A floating restaurant consists of many separate components (like the ship itself, stoves, fridges, furniture, crockery and cutlery), but usually these components are treated as separate assets.


    250-75(3)    
    This Division applies to a renewal or extension of an asset that is a right as if the renewal or extension were a continuation of the original right.

    250-75(4)    
    This Division applies to an asset (the underlying asset ) in which:


    (a) you have an interest; and


    (b) one or more other entities also have an interest;

    as if your interest in the underlying asset were itself the underlying asset.


    SECTION 250-80  

    250-80   Treatment of particular arrangements in the same way as leases  


    This Division applies to an *arrangement that:


    (a) in substance or effect, depends on the use of a specific asset that is:


    (i) real property; or

    (ii) goods or a personal chattel (other than money or a money equivalent); and


    (b) gives a right to control the use of the asset (other than temporarily for the purpose of ensuring public health or safety, protecting the environment or continuing the supply of an essential service); and


    (c) is not a lease;

    in the same way as it applies to a lease.

    Note:

    Even if this section applies to treat an arrangement in relation to an asset as a lease, the requirements in section 250-50 still need to be satisfied before an entity can be an end user of the asset.

    Financial benefits in relation to tax preferred use

    SECTION 250-85   Financial benefits in relation to tax preferred use of an asset  

    250-85(1)    
    For the purposes of this Division, the *financial benefits provided in relation to a tax preferred use of an asset include (but are not limited to):


    (a) a financial benefit provided in relation to:


    (i) bringing the asset into a state, condition or location in which it can be *put to the tax preferred use; or

    (ii) the start of the *tax preferred use of the asset; and


    (b) a financial benefit provided in relation to the end of the tax preferred use of the asset; and


    (c) a financial benefit provided in relation to the termination or expiration of an *arrangement that deals with:


    (i) the tax preferred use of the asset; or

    (ii) the provision of financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset; and


    (d) a financial benefit provided in relation to the purchase or acquisition of the asset by, or transfer of the asset to, the *tax preferred end user (or a *connected entity).

    250-85(2)    
    Without limiting paragraph (1)(b), if the asset has a *guaranteed residual value:


    (a) the amount of the guaranteed residual value is taken to be a *financial benefit provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset ; and


    (b) that financial benefit is taken to be provided when the relevant payment is made in relation to the guaranteed residual value.

    250-85(3)    
    The asset has a guaranteed residual value if there is an *arrangement that provides to the effect that if:


    (a) on or after the end of the *arrangement period, you (or a *connected entity) sell or otherwise dispose of the asset to any person; and


    (b) you (or a connected entity) receives in respect of the sale or disposal:


    (i) no consideration; or

    (ii) consideration that is less than an amount (the guaranteed amount ) specified in, or ascertainable under, the provision;

    a *member of the tax preferred sector will pay to you (or a connected entity), or to someone else for your benefit (or for the benefit of a connected entity), an amount equal to:


    (c) the guaranteed amount if subparagraph (b)(i) applies; or


    (d) the amount by which the guaranteed amount exceeds the consideration if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies.

    The amount of the guaranteed residual value is taken to be the guaranteed amount.


    250-85(4)    
    If:


    (a) an asset is *put to a tax preferred use; and


    (b) an entity is an *end user of the asset because the entity manages the asset or the use to which the asset is put;

    any *financial benefit that the entity (or a *connected entity) provides that is calculated by reference to the receipts, revenue or income generated by the use of the asset is also taken to be a financial benefit provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset .


    250-85(5)    
    For the purposes of this Division (other than this subsection), a *financial benefit provided by a *member of the tax preferred sector is taken not to be provided in relation to the tax preferred use of an asset to the extent to which the financial benefit merely passes on, or represents:


    (a) financial benefits provided in relation to the use of the asset; or


    (b) something derived from the use of the asset;

    by someone who is not a member of the tax preferred sector.


    250-85(6)    
    For the purposes of this Division, disregard a *financial benefit *provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset to the extent to which it consists solely of routine maintenance of the asset.

    250-85(7)    
    For the purposes of this Division, if a *financial benefit is provided in relation to the use of a number of assets, a separate financial benefit of an amount or value that is reasonably attributable to each asset is taken to be provided in relation to each asset.

    250-85(8)    
    To avoid doubt, a *financial benefit may be provided in relation to a tax preferred use of an asset even though it is provided before the *tax preferred use of the asset starts.

    250-85(9)    
    For the purposes of this Division:


    (a) a *financial benefit that is not an amount:


    (i) is taken to become due and payable when the entity providing the financial benefit becomes liable to provide the financial benefit; and

    (ii) is taken to be paid when it is provided; and


    (b) a financial benefit that is paid without becoming due and payable is taken to have become due and payable on the day on which it was paid.

    SECTION 250-90  

    250-90   Financial benefit provided directly or indirectly  


    For the purposes of this Division, a person (the provider ) is taken to provide a *financial benefit to a person (the recipient ) in relation to a *tax preferred use of an asset whether the financial benefit is provided to the recipient:


    (a) directly; or


    (b) indirectly (including indirectly through an entity that is not a *connected entity of the recipient and is not a connected entity of the provider).

    SECTION 250-95  

    250-95   Expected financial benefits in relation to an asset put to tax preferred use  


    For the purposes this Division, the expected financial benefits at a particular time in relation to an asset that is *put to a tax preferred use are the *financial benefits that, at that time:


    (a) have been; or


    (b) will, assuming normal operating conditions, be; or


    (c) can, assuming normal operating conditions, reasonably be expected to be;

    *provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset by a *member of the tax preferred sector to someone who is not a member of the tax preferred sector.

    Note:

    Paragraphs 250-85(1)(b) , (c) and (d) provide for certain benefits provided in relation to the end of the tax preferred use of the asset or in relation to the purchase, disposal or transfer of the asset to be treated as financial benefits provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset.

    SECTION 250-100  

    250-100   Present value of financial benefit that has already been provided  


    For the purposes of this Division, the present value of a *financial benefit at a particular time is the nominal amount or value of the financial benefit if the financial benefit has been provided before that time.

    Discount rate to be used in working out present values

    SECTION 250-105   Discount rate to be used in working out present values  

    250-105(1)    
    For the purposes of section 250-40 , the discount rate to be used in working out the present value of a future amount is the *long term bond rate for the *financial year in which the relevant *arrangement period starts.


    250-105(2)    
    For the purposes of section 250-135 and Subdivisions 250-C and 250-D , the discount rate to be used in working out the present value of a future amount is a rate that reflects a constant periodic rate of return (worked out on a compounding basis) on the investment in:


    (a) the asset referred to in subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) if that subparagraph applies; or


    (b) the expenditure referred to in paragraph 250-15(d)(ii) if that subparagraph applies;

    that is implicit in the *arrangements under which the asset is *put to a tax preferred use and *financial benefits are *provided in relation to that tax preferred use.


    Predominant economic interest

    SECTION 250-110  

    250-110   Predominant economic interest  


    You lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time only if one or more of the following sections apply to you and the asset at that time:


    (a) section 250-115 (limited recourse debttest);


    (b) section 250-120 (right to acquire asset test);


    (c) section 250-125 (effectively non-cancellable, long term arrangement test);


    (d) section 250-135 (level of expected financial benefits test).

    SECTION 250-115   Limited recourse debt test  

    250-115(1)    
    You lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if more than the allowable percentage of the cost of your acquiring or constructing the asset is financed (directly or indirectly) by a *limited recourse debt or debts.

    250-115(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1):


    (a) the amount of a *limited recourse debt is to be reduced by the value of any *debt property (other than the *financed property) that is provided as security for the debt; and


    (b) if the limited recourse debt finances the acquisition or construction of 2 or more assets, only the amount of the debt that is reasonably attributable to the asset referred to in subsection (1) is to be taken into account.

    250-115(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), the allowable percentage is:


    (a) 80% if the asset is taken to be *put to a tax preferred use because of subparagraph 250-60(1)(b)(i) or (2)(b)(i) (end use by *tax preferred entities); or


    (b) 55% if the asset is taken to be put to a tax preferred use because of subparagraph 250-60(1)(b)(ii) or (2)(b)(ii) (end use by foreign residents or businesses).


    250-115(4)    
    This section does not apply to the asset if:


    (a) you are a *corporate tax entity; and


    (b) the *tax preferred use of the asset is not the lease or hire of the asset (and is not the use of the asset under a lease or hire arrangement); and


    (c) the asset is *put to the tax preferred use wholly or principally in Australia; and


    (d) no *member of the tax preferred sector provides financing, or support for financing, in relation to your interest in the asset (including by way of a loan, a guarantee, an indemnity, a security, hedging or undertaking to provide *financial benefits in the event of the termination of an *arrangement).

    250-115(5)    
    Paragraph (4)(b) does not apply if:


    (a) the asset is real property (or an interest in real property); and


    (b) the *tax preferred use of the asset is a lease; and


    (c) the space within the property that is occupied by tenants who are *members of the tax preferred sector is less than half of the total space within the property that is either occupied by tenants or available to be occupied by tenants.

    250-115(6)    
    This section also does not apply to the asset if:


    (a) you hold the asset as a trustee; and


    (b) the asset is real property (or an interest in real property); and


    (c) the *tax preferred use of the asset is a lease; and


    (d) the space within the property that is occupied by tenants who are *members of the tax preferred sector is less than half of the total space within the property that is either occupied by tenants or available to be occupied by tenants; and


    (e) the asset is *put to the tax preferred use wholly or principally in Australia; and


    (f) no member of the tax preferred sector provides financing, or support for financing, in relation to your interest in the asset (including by way of a loan, a guarantee, an indemnity, a security, hedging or undertaking to provide *financial benefits in the event of the termination of an *arrangement).

    SECTION 250-120   Right to acquire asset test  

    250-120(1)    
    You lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if, at that time:


    (a) the asset is to be transferred to a *member of the tax preferred sector after the end of the *arrangement period; and


    (b) the consideration for the transfer is not fixed as the *market value of the asset at the time of the transfer.

    250-120(2)    
    You also lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if, at that time:


    (a) a *member of the tax preferred end user group has, or will have:


    (i) a right, obligation or contingent obligation to purchase or acquire the asset or a legal or equitable interest in the asset; or

    (ii) a right to require the transfer of the asset or a legal or equitable interest in the asset; and


    (b) the consideration for the purchase, acquisition or transfer is not fixed as the *market value of the asset at the time of the purchase, acquisition or transfer.

    To avoid doubt, this section does not apply to the asset merely because your interest in the asset is one that ceases to exist after the passage of a particular period of time.


    SECTION 250-125   Effectively non-cancellable, long term arrangement test  

    250-125(1)    
    You lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if:


    (a) any *arrangement that relates to:


    (i) the *tax preferred use of the asset; or

    (ii) the *financial benefits to be *provided by the *members of the tax preferred sector in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset;
    is *effectively non-cancellable (see section 250-130 ); and


    (b) the *arrangement period for the tax preferred use of the asset is:


    (i) greater than 30 years; or

    (ii) if the arrangement period is less than or equal to 30 years - 75% or more of that part of the asset's *effective life that remains when the tax preferred use of the asset starts.

    250-125(2)    
    Disregard section 40-102 in working out the asset's *effective life for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(ii).

    SECTION 250-130   Meaning of effectively non-cancellable arrangement  

    250-130(1)    
    An *arrangement that relates to *financial benefits to be *provided by a *member of the tax preferred sector in relation to the tax preferred use of an asset is effectively non-cancellable if:


    (a) the arrangement can be cancelled only with:


    (i) your permission; or

    (ii) the permission of a *connected entity of yours; or

    (iii) an agent or entity acting on your behalf (or on behalf of a connected entity of yours); or


    (b) the arrangement can be cancelled without the permission of an entity referred to in paragraph (a) but, if the arrangement were cancelled, the member of the tax preferred sector or another member of the tax preferred sector:


    (i) would be required to enter into a new arrangement for the *provision of financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset; or

    (ii) would incur a penalty and the magnitude of the penalty would be such as to discourage cancellation.

    250-130(2)    
    For these purposes, if a *member of the tax preferred sector defaults under an *arrangement and the arrangement is cancelled, the arrangement is to be taken to have been cancelled without the permission of an entity referred to in paragraph (1)(a).

    SECTION 250-135   Level of expected financial benefits test  


    Effective guarantee or indemnity for value of asset

    250-135(1)    
    You lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if the asset has a *guaranteed residual value at that time.

    Likely financial benefits exceeding 70% limit

    250-135(2)    
    You also lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if, at that time:


    (a) the *arrangement under which the asset is *put to the tax preferred use (either alone or together with any other arrangement in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset or the *provision of *financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset) is a *debt interest; or


    (b) the sum of the present values of the *expected financial benefits that *members of the tax preferred sector have provided, or are reasonably likely to provide, to you (or a *connected entity) in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset exceeds 70% of:


    (i) the *market value of the asset if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or

    (ii) so much of the market value of the asset as is attributable to the expenditure referred to subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) if that subparagraph applies.

    SECTION 250-140   When to retest predominant economic interest under section 250-135  


    Purpose for applying section

    250-140(1)    
    This section applies for the purposes of working out whether this Division applies to you and to an asset that is *put to a tax preferred use.

    No need to keep retesting if section 250-135 does not apply at start of tax preferred use of asset

    250-140(2)    
    If section 250-135 does not apply to you and the asset at the time when the *tax preferred use of the asset starts, that section is taken, subject to subsection (4), to continue not to apply to you and the asset.

    Note:

    This subsection means that if section 250-135 does not apply to the arrangement when the tax preferred use of the asset starts, the arrangement does not need to be retested against section 250-135 until a change of the kind referred to in subsection (4) occurs.



    No need to keep retesting if section 250-135 does not apply when you do something to increase value of expected financial benefits

    250-140(3)    
    If:


    (a) you (or a *connected entity), or a *member of the tax preferred sector, do something, or omit to do something, at a particular time that increases the value of the *expected financial benefits in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset; and


    (b) section 250-135 does not apply to the asset at that time;

    that section is taken, subject to subsection (4), to continue not to apply to you and the asset.

    Note:

    This subsection means that if the arrangement is retested against section 250-135 at a particular time and section 250-135 does not apply to the arrangement on that retesting, the arrangement does not need to be again retested against section 250-135 until a change of the kind referred to in subsection (4) occurs.



    Retesting when you do something to increase the value of expected financial benefits

    250-140(4)    
    Subsection (2) or (3) ceases to apply to you and the asset if you (or a *connected entity), or a *member of the tax preferred sector, do something, or omit to do something, that increases the value of the *expected financial benefits in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset.

    Certain financial benefits ignored when retesting

    250-140(5)    
    For the purposes of reapplying section 250-135 to the asset, disregard *financial benefits provided before subsection (2) or (3) of this section ceased to apply to the asset.

    Note:

    If:

  • (a) subsection (2) or (3) ceases to apply to the asset at a particular time under this subsection; and
  • (b) the asset is retested at that time against section 250-135 ; and
  • (c) on the retesting, that section is found to apply to the asset at that time;
  • subsection (3) will start to apply to the asset again from that time because paragraph (3)(b) will have been satisfied.



    Clarification that retesting only required if you do something to increase value of expected benefits

    250-140(6)    
    To avoid doubt, subsection (2) or (3) does not cease to apply merely because the value of the *expected financial benefits in relation to the asset increase because of something other than action taken, or an omission made, by you (or a *connected entity) or a *member of the tax preferred sector.

    Note:

    This subsection means that retesting under subsection (4) is not triggered by an increase in the value of expected financial benefits that happens because of external circumstances (circumstances external to activities and omissions of yours, your connected entities and members of the tax preferred sector).


    Subdivision 250-C - Denial of, or reduction in, capital allowance deductions  

    SECTION 250-145   Denial of capital allowance deductions  

    250-145(1)    
    If this Division applies to you and an asset at a particular time, any condition that needs to be satisfied for you to be able to deduct an amount under a *capital allowance provision in relation to:


    (a) a decline in the value of the asset; or


    (b) expenditure in relation to the asset;

    is taken not to be satisfied at that time.


    250-145(2)    
    This section has effect subject to section 250-150 .

    SECTION 250-150   Apportionment rule  

    250-150(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) this Division applies to you and an asset that is *put to a tax preferred use; and


    (b) it is reasonable to expect that, during the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset, particular *financial benefits will be provided to you (or a *connected entity); and


    (c) it is reasonable to expect that those financial benefits:


    (i) will be provided in relation to a use of the asset that is not that tax preferred use and is not a private use; or

    (ii) will be *provided in relation to that tax preferred use of the asset but will not be attributable, directly or indirectly, to financial benefits that are provided by *members of the tax preferred sector; and


    (d) the amount or value of those financial benefits is known or can reasonably be estimated; and


    (e) you choose to have this section apply to the asset.

    In applying paragraph (c), disregard financial benefits that are provided under an *arrangement that is a *debt interest.


    250-150(2)    
    A choice under paragraph (1)(e) in relation to an asset:


    (a) must be made before the due date for you to lodge your *income tax return for the income year in which the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset starts; and


    (b) must be made for the whole of the arrangement period for the tax preferred use of the asset; and


    (c) must extend to all assets that are, or are to be, *put to a tax preferred use under the *arrangement under which the asset is put to that use; and


    (d) is irrevocable.

    The choice may extend to an asset referred to in paragraph (c) even if it is likely that paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) will not apply to that asset.


    250-150(3)    
    If this section applies, section 250-145 applies to you and the asset only to the extent of the *disallowed capital allowance percentage.

    250-150(4)    
    Subject to subsection (6), the disallowed capital allowance percentage is the following ratio (expressed as a percentage):


      Sum of present values of financial benefits
    that are subject to deemed loan treatment
     
      Market value of asset  


    250-150(5)    
    The Commissioner may, before the due date for you to lodge your *income tax return for the income year to which the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset starts, approve an alternative method for working out the *disallowed capital allowance percentage for you and the asset.

    250-150(6)    
    If the Commissioner approves an alternative method under subsection (5), the disallowed capital allowance percentage is the percentage worked out in accordance with that alternative method.

    Subdivision 250-D - Deemed loan treatment of financial benefits provided for tax preferred use  

    SECTION 250-155   Arrangement treated as loan  


    Loan with characteristics provided for in this section taken to exist

    250-155(1)    
    If this Division applies to you and an asset at a particular time in an income year, a *financial arrangement in the form of a loan (with the characteristics provided for in this section) is taken to exist at that time for the purposes of working out your taxable income for that income year.

    Note:

    See Subdivision 250-E for the taxation treatment of the financial arrangement.



    Lender

    250-155(2)    
    You are taken to be the lender in relation to the loan.

    Amount lent and unpaid at the start of the arrangement period

    250-155(3)    
    The amount worked out under subsection (4) is taken to be the amount that you have lent, and that the borrower has not repaid, at the start of the *arrangement period.

    250-155(4)    
    The amount is worked out by taking:


    (a) the amount that, at the start of the *arrangement period, is:


    (i) the *adjustable value of the asset if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or

    (ii) the amount worked out under subsection (5) if subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) applies; or


    (b) if section 250-150 applies - the amount that, at the start of the arrangement period, is the *disallowed capital allowance percentage of:


    (i) the adjustable value of the asset if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or

    (ii) the amount worked out under subsection (5) if subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) applies;

    and deducting the sum of all *financial benefits that are *subject to deemed loan treatment and that have become due and payable before the start of the arrangement period.


    250-155(5)    
    If subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) applies, the amount worked out under this subsection for the purposes of subsection (4) is:


    Item If the expenditure referred to in that subparagraph is … the amount is …
    1 capital expenditure under Division 40 the amount of the capital expenditure in respect of which a deduction has not been allowed (disregarding this Division) under the relevant Subdivision of Division 40
    2 capital expenditure under Division 43 the * undeducted construction expenditure in relation to the capital expenditure



    Amounts paid to you by borrower under the loan

    250-155(6)    
    Any *financial benefit that:


    (a) a person provides; and


    (b) is *subject to deemed loan treatment;

    is taken to be an amount that the borrower pays you under the loan.

    Note 1:

    Section 250-160 tells you which financial benefits are subject to the deemed loan treatment.

    Note 2:

    These benefits may be ones that are provided either to you or to a connected entity.



    Period of the loan

    250-155(7)    
    The *arrangement period is taken to be the period of the loan.

    Applying Subdivision 250-E to the loan

    250-155(8)    
    For the purposes of applying Subdivision 250-E to the loan:


    (a) you are taken to have an overall gain from the loan and that overall gain is taken to be sufficiently certain at the time when you start to have the loan; and


    (b) the amount of that overall gain is taken to be the sum of the *financial benefits that are *subject to the deemed loan treatment less the amount worked out under subsection (4); and


    (c) you are taken:


    (i) to start to have the loan at the start of the *arrangement period; and

    (ii) to cease to have the loan at the end of the arrangement period; and


    (d) any right that you (or a connected entity) have to a financial benefit that is subject to deemed loan treatment is taken to be a right that you have under the loan; and


    (e) if a *connected entity transfers to another person a right to a financial benefit subject to deemed loan treatment:


    (i) you are taken to transfer the right to that other person; and

    (ii) any consideration that the connected entity receives in relation to the transfer is taken to be consideration that you receive in relation to the transfer; and


    (f) if a right that a connected entity has to a financial benefit subject to deemed loan treatment ceases and the connected entity receives consideration in relation to that cessation - you are taken to receive that consideration in relation to the cessation; and


    (g) you are taken to start to have the loan, or to cease to have the loan, as consideration for something if you start to have the rights to the financial benefits that are subject to deemed loan treatment, or cease to have those rights, as consideration for that thing; and


    (h) in applying sections 250-265 to 250-275 :


    (i) the amount that you are taken, under subsections (3), (4) and (5), to have lent are the only financial benefits that you provide under the loan; and

    (ii) the financial benefits you have received under the loan are taken to include financial benefits that are subject to deemed loan treatment that a person is, at the end of the arrangement period, liable to provide to you.

    250-155(9)    
    If, under subsection 250-160(2) , a particular percentage of a reasonable estimate of the *end value of the asset was taken to be a *financial benefit that is *subject to the deemed loan treatment, subsection 250-275(1) applies to the loan at the end of the *arrangement period as if you had received under the loan a financial benefit equal to the relevant percentage of the end value of the asset.

    SECTION 250-160   Financial benefits that are subject to deemed loan treatment  


    General rule

    250-160(1)    
    Subject to subsections (3) and (4), a *financial benefit is subject to deemed loan treatment if:


    (a) the financial benefit:


    (i) has been; or

    (ii) will, assuming normal operating conditions, be; or

    (iii) can, assuming normal operating conditions, reasonably be expected to be;
    provided to you (or a *connected entity); and


    (b) the financial benefit has been, will be or can reasonably be expected to be *provided directly or indirectly by a *member of the tax preferred sector in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset; and


    (c) the right to receive, or the obligation to provide, the financial benefit is *cash settlable; and


    (d) the financial benefit has not been, will not be or can be expected not to be provided by one of your connected entities.

    Note:

    Paragraph (d) stops a financial benefit passing between you and any of your connected entities from being counted twice.



    End value also taken to be financial benefit subject to deemed loan treatment

    250-160(2)    
    The relevant percentage of a reasonable estimate of the *end value of the asset is also taken to be a *financial benefit that is subject to deemed loan treatment if:


    (a) the asset is not to be purchased or acquired by, or transferred to, a *member of the tax preferred sector at the end of the *arrangement period under a legally enforceable *arrangement; or


    (b) the asset:


    (i) is, or is to become, a *privatised asset; or

    (ii) would be, or would become, a privatised asset if it were a *depreciating asset; or

    (iii) would be a privatised asset if the asset were a depreciating asset and paragraphs 58-5(2)(a) and 58-5(4)(a) were not limited to acquisitions of depreciating assets that occurred on or after 1 July 2001.

    The relevant percentage is the *disallowed capital allowance percentage if section 250-150 applies. Otherwise it is 100%.

    Note:

    See section 250-180 for how to work out the end value of the asset.



    Financial benefits only subject to deemed loan treatment to the extent to which they represent a return on investment

    250-160(3)    
    The *financial benefit is subject to deemed loan treatment only to the extent to which it reasonably represents a return of, or on, an investment in the asset (as distinct, for example, from representing consideration for the provision of services or the recovery of production costs), having regard to:


    (a) the *market value of the asset; and


    (b) the discount rate applicable under subsection 250-105(2) ; and


    (c) your costs in relation to funding your interest in the asset; and


    (d) any other relevant matter.

    The regulations may provide rules to be applied in determining the extent to which a financial benefit reasonably represents a return of or on an investment in the asset.



    Only financial benefits provided after Division starts applying to you and the asset

    250-160(4)    
    If the *tax preferred use of the asset starts before this Division starts applying to you and the asset, only *financial benefits provided after this Division starts applying to you and the asset are subject to deemed loan treatment .

    250-165   (Repealed) SECTION 250-165 Financial arrangement  
    (Repealed by No 15 of 2009 )

    250-170   (Repealed) SECTION 250-170 Financial arrangement (equity interest or right or obligation in relation to equity interest)  
    (Repealed by No 15 of 2009 )

    250-175   (Repealed) SECTION 250-175 Rights, obligations and arrangements (grouping and disaggregation rules)  
    (Repealed by No 15 of 2009 )

    SECTION 250-180   End value of asset  

    250-180(1)    
    The end value of an asset is worked out in accordance with this section.

    250-180(2)    
    If the asset has a *guaranteed residual value, the end value of the asset is:


    (a) the amount of the guaranteed residual amount if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or


    (b) so much of the amount referred to in paragraph (a) as is attributable to the expenditure referred to in subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) if that subparagraph applies.

    250-180(3)    
    If the asset does not have a *guaranteed residual value and is a *depreciating asset, the end value of the asset is:


    (a) if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies - the amount that would have been the *adjustable value of the asset at the end of the *arrangement period if:


    (i) this Division had not applied to you and the asset; and

    (ii) the decline in the asset ' s value were worked out on the basis of the asset ' s *effective life and using the *prime cost method; or


    (b) if subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) applies - so much of the amount referred to in paragraph (a) as is attributable to the expenditure referred to in that subparagraph.

    250-180(4)    
    Disregard section 40-102 in working out the asset ' s *effective life for the purposes of subparagraph (3)(a)(ii).

    250-180(5)    
    If neither subsection (2) nor subsection (3) applies and an estimate of the value of the asset is recognised for accounting purposes, the end value of the asset is:


    (a) the value of the relevant asset at the end of the *arrangement period that would be recognised for accounting purposes if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or


    (b) so much of the value of referred to in paragraph (a) as is attributable to the expenditure referred to subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) if that subparagraph applies.

    The end value must not, however, exceed the amount worked out under subsections 250-155(4) and (5) (amount taken to have been lent).


    250-180(6)    
    If none of subsections (2), (3) and (5) apply to the asset, the end value of the asset is:


    (a) a reasonable estimate of the *market value of the asset at the end of the *arrangement period if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or


    (b) so much of the estimate referred to in paragraph (a) as is attributable to the expenditure referred to in subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) if that subparagraph applies.

    The end value must not, however, exceed the amount worked out under subsections 250-155(4) and (5) (amount taken to have been lent).


    SECTION 250-185  

    250-185   Financial benefits subject to deemed loan treatment not assessed  


    A *financial benefit is not included in your assessable income if the financial benefit:


    (a) is *provided to you in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset; and


    (b) is provided directly or indirectly by a *member of the tax preferred sector; and


    (c) is *subject to deemed loan treatment.

    The financial benefit is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

    Subdivision 250-E - Taxation of deemed loan  

    Guide to Subdivision 250-E

    SECTION 250-190   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision is about the tax treatment of gains and losses from the financial arrangement that you are taken to have under section 250-155 .

    You recognise gains and losses from the financial arrangement, as appropriate, over the life of the financial arrangement and ignore distinctions between income and capital. You use a compounding accruals method to recognise the gain or loss.

    A change in circumstances may cause a re-estimation of gains and losses that the accruals method is being applied to.

    A balancing adjustment is made if you transfer particular rights or obligations or particular rights or obligations cease.

    Application and objects of Subdivision

    SECTION 250-195  

    250-195   Application of Subdivision  


    This Subdivision applies for the purposes of working out the amount of the gain or loss that is to be included in your assessable income or allowed as a deduction in relation to the *financial arrangement that is taken to exist under section 250-155 .

    SECTION 250-200  

    250-200   Objects of this Subdivision  


    The objects of this Subdivision are:


    (a) to properly recognise gains and losses from the *financial arrangement by allocating them to appropriate periods of time; and


    (b) to minimise tax deferral.

    Tax treatment of gains and losses from financial arrangements

    SECTION 250-205   Gains are assessable and losses deductible  


    Gains

    250-205(1)    
    Your assessable income includes a gain you make from the *financial arrangement.

    Losses

    250-205(2)    
    You can deduct a loss you make from the *financial arrangement, but only to the extent that:


    (a) you make it in gaining or producing your assessable income; or


    (b) you necessarily make it in carrying on a *business for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable income.

    SECTION 250-210   Gain or loss to be taken into account only once under this Act  


    Purpose of this section

    250-210(1)    
    The purpose of this section is to ensure that your gains that are assessable under this Subdivision, and your losses that are deductible under this Subdivision, are taken into account only once under this Act in working out your taxable income.

    Gain or loss

    250-210(2)    
    If a gain or loss is, or is to be, included in your assessable income or allowable as a deduction to you for an income year under this Subdivision, the gain or loss is not to be (to any extent):


    (a) included in your assessable income; or


    (b) allowable as a deduction to you;

    under any other provisions of this Act for the same or any other income year.



    Associated financial benefits

    250-210(3)    
    If the amount or value of a *financial benefit is taken into account in working out whether you make, or the amount of, a gain or loss that is, or is to be, included in your assessable income or allowable as a deduction for you for an income year under this Subdivision, the benefit is not to be (to any extent):


    (a) included in your assessable income; or


    (b) allowable as a deduction to you;

    under any other provision of this Act for the same or any other income year.


    Method to be applied to take account of gain or loss

    SECTION 250-215  

    250-215   Methods for taking gain or loss into account  


    The methods that can be applied to take account of a gain or loss you make from the *financial arrangement you have are:


    (a) the accruals method provided for in sections 250-235 to 250-255 ; or


    (b) a balancing adjustment provided for in sections 250-265 to 250-275 .

    A gain or loss is not taken into account under the method referred to in paragraph (a) to the extent to which the gain or loss is taken intoaccount under sections 250-265 to 250-275 .

    General rules

    SECTION 250-220   Consistency in working out gains or losses (integrity measure)  


    Object of section

    250-220(1)    
    The object of this section is to stop you obtaining an inappropriate tax benefit from not working out your gains and losses in a consistent manner.

    Consistent treatment for particular financial arrangement

    250-220(2)    
    If:


    (a) this Subdivision provides that a particular method applies to gains or losses you make from the *financial arrangement; and


    (b) that method allows you to choose the particular manner in which you apply that method;

    you must use that manner consistently for the arrangement for all income years.



    Consistent treatment for financial arrangements of essentially the same nature

    250-220(3)    
    If:


    (a) this Subdivision provides that a particular method applies to gains or losses you make from 2 or more *financial arrangements; and


    (b) that method allows you to choose the particular manner in which you apply that method;

    you must use that same manner consistently for all of those financial arrangements that are essentially of the same nature.


    SECTION 250-225  

    250-225   Rights and obligations include contingent rights and obligations  


    To avoid doubt:


    (a) a right is treated as a right for the purposes of this Division even it is subject to a contingency; and


    (b) an obligation is treated as an obligation for the purpose of this Division even if it is subject to a contingency.

    The accruals method

    SECTION 250-230  

    250-230   Application of accruals method  


    The accruals method provided for in sections 250-235 to 250-255 applies to a gain or loss you make from the *financial arrangement if:


    (a) the gain or loss is an overall gain or loss from the arrangement; and


    (b) the gain or loss is sufficiently certain at the time when you start to have the arrangement.

    SECTION 250-235  

    250-235   Overview of the accruals method  


    If the accruals method applies to a gain or loss you make from the *financial arrangement:


    (a) you use section 250-240 to work out the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread; and


    (b) you use section 250-245 to work out how to allocate the gain or loss to particular intervals within the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread; and


    (c) if an interval to which part of the gain or loss is allocated straddles 2 income years, you use section 250-250 to work out how to allocate that part of the gain or loss allocated between those 2 income years.

    SECTION 250-240  

    250-240   Applying accruals method to work out period over which gain or loss is to be spread  


    If you have a sufficiently certain overall gain or loss from the *financial arrangement, the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread is the period that:


    (a) starts when you start to have the arrangement; and


    (b) ends when you will cease to have the arrangement.

    In applying paragraph (b), you mustassume that you will continue to have the arrangement for the rest of its life.

    SECTION 250-245   How gain or loss is spread  


    How to spread gain or loss

    250-245(1)    
    This section tells you how to spread a gain or loss to which the accruals method applies.

    Compounding accruals or approximation

    250-245(2)    
    The gain or loss is to be spread using:


    (a) compounding accruals (with the intervals to which parts of the gain or loss are allocated complying with subsection (3)); or


    (b) a method whose results approximate those obtained using the method referred to in paragraph (a) (having regard to the length of the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread).

    Intervals to which parts of gain or loss allocated

    250-245(3)    
    The intervals to which parts of the gain or loss are allocated must:


    (a) not exceed 12 months; and


    (b) all be of the same length.

    Paragraph (b) does not apply to the first and last intervals. These may be shorter than the other intervals.



    Assumption of continuing hold arrangement for the rest of its life

    250-245(4)    
    The gain or loss is to be spread assuming that you will continue to have the *financial arrangement for the rest of its life.

    SECTION 250-250   Allocating gain or loss to income years  

    250-250(1)    
    You are taken, for the purposes of section 250-205 , to make, for an income year, a gain or loss equal to a part of a gain or loss if:


    (a) that part of the gain or loss is allocated to an interval under section 250-245 ; and


    (b) that interval falls wholly within that income year.

    250-250(2)    
    If:


    (a) a part of a gain or loss is allocated to an interval under section 250-245 ; and


    (b) that interval straddles 2 income years;

    you are taken, for purposes of section 250-205 , to make a gain or loss equal to so much of that part of the gain or loss as is allocated between those income years on a reasonable basis.


    250-250(3)    
    If:


    (a) a *consolidated group or *MEC group has a *financial arrangement; and


    (b) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the exit time ); and


    (c) immediately after the exit time, the subsidiary member has the financial arrangement;

    an income year of the group is taken, for the purposes of applying this section to the group and the financial arrangement, to end at the exit time.


    SECTION 250-255   When to re-estimate  


    When re-estimation necessary

    250-255(1)    
    You re-estimate a gain or loss from the *financial arrangement under subsection (4) if circumstances arise that materially affect:


    (a) the amount or value; or


    (b) the timing;

    of *financial benefits that were taken into account in working out the amount of the gain or loss. You must re-estimate the gain or loss as soon as reasonably practicable after you become aware of the circumstances referred to in paragraph (b).


    250-255(2)    
    Without limiting subsection (1), the following are circumstances of the kind referred to in paragraph (1)(b):


    (a) a material change in market conditions that are relevant to the amount or value of the *financial benefits to be received or provided under the *financial arrangement;


    (b) cash flows that were previously estimated becoming known and the difference between the cash flows that become known and the cash flows that were previously estimated is not insignificant;


    (c) a right to, or a part of a right to, a financial benefit under the arrangement is written off as a bad debt.

    250-255(3)    
    You do not re-estimate a gain or loss from a *financial arrangement under subsection (4) merely because of any one or more of the following:


    (a) a change in the credit rating, or the creditworthiness, of a party or parties to the financial arrangement;


    (b) the impairment (within the meaning of the *accounting standards) of the arrangement or a debt that forms part of the arrangement.

    Nature of re-estimation

    250-255(4)    
    Making a re-estimation in relation to a gain or loss under this subsection involves:


    (a) afresh determination of the amount of the gain or loss; and


    (b) a reapplication of the accruals method to the redetermined gain or loss to make a fresh allocation of the part of the redetermined gain or loss that has not already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made to intervals ending after the re-estimation is made.

    Basis for re-estimation

    250-255(5)    
    You may make the fresh allocation of the gain or loss under subsection (4) on either of the following bases:


    (a) by maintaining the rate of return being used and adjusting the amount to which you apply the rate of return to the present value of the estimated future cash flows discounted at the maintained rate of return;


    (b) adjusting the rate of return and maintaining the amount to which you apply the rate of return.

    The object to be achieved by both bases is allow you to bring the remainder of the gain or loss based on the new estimates properly to account over the remainder of the period over which you spread the gain or loss.


    250-255(6)    
    If you adopt a particular basis under subsection (5) for a gain or loss from the *financial arrangement, you must use the same basis for all the re-estimations you make under this section in relation to your gains and losses from all your financial arrangements.

    Balancing adjustment if rate of return maintained

    250-255(7)    
    If you make a fresh allocation of the gain or loss on the basis referred to in paragraph (5)(a), you must make the following balancing adjustment:


    (a) if you re-estimate a gain and the amount to which you apply the rate of return increases - you make a gain from the *financial arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the increase;


    (b) if you re-estimate a gain and the amount to which you apply the rate of return decreases - you make a loss from the arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the decrease;


    (c) if you re-estimate a loss and the amount to which you apply the rate of return increases - you make a loss from the arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the increase;


    (d) if you re-estimate a loss and the amount to which you apply the rate of return decreases - you make a gain from the arrangement, the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the decrease.

    SECTION 250-260   Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal  


    Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal

    250-260(1)    
    You also re-estimate a gain or loss from a *financial arrangement under subsection (2) if a balancing adjustment is made in relation to the financial arrangement under sections 250-265 to 250-275 because you transfer to another person:


    (a) a proportionate share of all of your rights and/or obligations under a *financial arrangement; or


    (b) a right or obligation that you have under a financial arrangement to a specifically identified *financial benefit; or


    (c) a proportionate share of a right or obligation that you have under a financial arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit.

    You must re-estimate the gain or loss as soon as reasonably practicable after the transfer occurs.



    Nature of re-estimation

    250-260(2)    
    Making a re-estimation in relation to a gain or loss under this subsection involves:


    (a) a fresh determination of the amount of the gain or loss disregarding:


    (i) *financial benefits; and

    (ii) amounts of the gain or loss that have already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made;
    to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the proportionate share, or the right or obligation, referred to in paragraph (1)(b); and


    (b) a reapplication of the accruals method to the redetermined gain or loss to make a fresh allocation of the part of that gain or loss that has not already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made to intervals ending after the re-estimation is made.

    Basis for re-estimation

    250-260(3)    
    You make the fresh allocation of the gain or loss under subsection (2) by maintaining the rate of return being used and adjusting the amount to which you apply the rate of return to the present value of the estimated future cash flows discounted at the maintained rate of return. The object to be achieved by the fresh allocation is allow you to bring the remainder of the redetermined gain or loss properly to account over the remainder of the period over which you spread the gain or loss.

    Balancing adjustment

    SECTION 250-265   When balancing adjustment made  


    When balancing adjustment made

    250-265(1)    
    A balancing adjustment is made under section 250-275 if:


    (a) you transfer to another person all of your rights and/or obligations under the *financial arrangement; or


    (b) all of your rights and/or obligations under the financial arrangement otherwise substantially cease; or


    (c) you transfer to another person:


    (i) a proportionate share of all of your rights and/or obligations under the financial arrangement; or

    (ii) a right or obligation that you have under the financial arrangement to a specifically identified *financial benefit; or

    (iii) a proportionate share of a right or obligation that you have under the financial arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit.


    Modifications for arrangements that are assets

    250-265(2)    
    The following modifications are made if the *financial arrangement is an asset of yours at the time the event referred to in subsection (1) occurs:


    (a) paragraphs (1)(a) and (c) do not apply unless the effect of the transfer is to transfer to the other person substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the interest transferred;


    (b) for the purposes of applying section 250-275 to the arrangement, you are treated as transferring a right under the arrangement to another person if:


    (i) you retain the right but assume a new obligation; and

    (ii) your assumption of the new obligation has the same effect, in substance, as transferring the right to another person; and

    (iii) the new obligation arises only to the extent to which the right to *financial benefits under the financial arrangement is satisfied; and

    (iv) you cannot sell or pledge the right (other than as security in relation to the new obligation); and

    (v) you must, under the new obligation, provide financial benefits you receive in relation to the right to the person to whom you owe the new obligation without delay.

    SECTION 250-270  

    250-270   Exception for subsidiary member leaving consolidated group  


    A balancing adjustment is not made under section 250-275 in relation to a subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group that has the *financial arrangement ceasing to be a member of the group.

    SECTION 250-275   Balancing adjustment  


    Complete cessation or transfer

    250-275(1)    
    Use the following method statement to make the balancing adjustment if paragraph 250-265(1)(a) or (b) applies. Method statement for balancing adjustment


    Step 1.

    Add up the following:

  • (a) the total of all the *financial benefits provided to you under the *financial arrangement;
  • (b) the amount or value of any other consideration you receive in relation to the transfer or cessation referred to in subsection 250-265(1) ;
  • (c) the total of the amounts that have been allowed to you as deductions, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, for losses from the arrangement;
  • (d) the total of the other amounts that would have been allowed to you as deductions, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, for losses from the arrangement if all your losses from the arrangement were allowable as deductions.

  • Step 2.

    Add up the following:

  • (a) the total of all the *financial benefits you have provided under the *financial arrangement;
  • (b) the amount or value of any other consideration you provide in relation to the transfer or cessation referred to in subsection 250-265(1) ;
  • (c) the total of the amounts that have been included in your assessable income, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, as gains from the arrangement;
  • (d) the total of the other amounts that would have been included in your assessable income, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, as gains from the arrangement if all your gains from the arrangement were assessable.

  • Step 3.

    Compare the amount obtained under Step 1 (the Step 1 amount ) with the amount obtained under Step 2 (the Step 2 amount ). If the Step 1 amount exceeds the Step 2 amount, an amount equal to the excess is taken, as a balancing adjustment, to be a gain you make from the *financial arrangement for the purposes of this Subdivision. If the Step 2 amount exceeds the Step 1 amount, an amount equal to the excess is taken, as a balancing adjustment, to be a loss that you make from the arrangement. If the Step 1 amount and the Step 2 amount are equal, no balancing adjustment is made.



    Proportionate transfer of all rights and/or obligations under financial arrangement

    250-275(2)    
    If subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(i) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement in subsection (1) but reduce:


    (a) the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 1; and


    (b) the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 2;

    by applying the proportion referred to in subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(i) to them.



    Transfer of specifically identified right or obligation under financial arrangement

    250-275(3)    
    If subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(ii) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement in subsection (1) as if the references to:


    (a) the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 1; and


    (b) the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 2;

    were references to those amounts to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the right or obligation referred to in subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(ii) .



    Proportionate transfer of specifically identified right or obligation under financial arrangement

    250-275(4)    
    If subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(iii) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement:


    (a) as if the references to:


    (i) the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 1; and

    (ii) the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 2;
    were references to those amounts to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the right or obligation referred to in subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(iii) ; and


    (b) by reducing those amounts by applying the proportion referred to in subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(iii) to them.

    Attribution must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles

    250-275(5)    
    Any attribution made under subsection (3) or paragraph (4)(a) must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles that properly take into account:


    (a) the nature of the rights and obligations under the *financial arrangement; and


    (b) the risks associated with each *financial benefit, right and obligation under the arrangement; and


    (c) the time value of money.

    Income year for which gain or loss is made

    250-275(6)    
    The gain or loss you are taken to make under subsection (1), (2), (3) or (4) is a gain or loss for the income year in which the event referred to in subsection 250-265(1) occurs.

    Other provisions

    SECTION 250-280   Financial arrangement received or provided as consideration  

    250-280(1)    
    If:


    (a) this Subdivision applies in relation to your gains and losses from the *financial arrangement; and


    (b) you start to have the financial arrangement (or a part of the financial arrangement) as consideration (or as part of the consideration) for:


    (i) something (the thing provided ) that you provided, or are to provide, to someone else; or

    (ii) something (the thing acquired ) that someone else has provided, or is to provide, to you; and


    (c) the thing provided or the thing acquired is not money;

    the amount of the benefit (or that part of the benefit) that you obtained for the thing provided, or gave for the thing acquired, is taken, for the purposes of applying this Act to you, to be the *market value of the financial arrangement (or that part of the financial arrangement) at the time when you start to have the financial arrangement.

    Note 1:

    This amount may be relevant, for example, for the purposes of applying the provisions of this Act dealing with capital gains, capital allowances or trading stock to the thing provided or the thing acquired.

    Note 2:

    The market value is to be used instead of the nominal value of the financial benefits to be provided under the financial arrangement.


    250-280(2)    
    If subsection (1) applies, you are taken to have received, or provided, as consideration for starting to have the *financial arrangement (or the part of the financial arrangement), *financial benefits whose value is equal to the market value of the financial arrangement (or that part of the financial arrangement) at the time when you started to have the financial arrangement.

    250-280(3)    
    If, but for this subsection:


    (a) subsection (2) would apply to your starting to have a *financial arrangement; and


    (b) subsection (1) or (4) would also apply to your starting to have the financial arrangement;

    subsection (2) applies to your starting to have the financial arrangement and subsection (1) or (4) does not.


    250-280(4)    
    If:


    (a) this Subdivision applies in relation to your gains and losses from the *financial arrangement; and


    (b) you cease to have the financial arrangement (or a part of the financial arrangement) as consideration (or as part of the consideration) for:


    (i) something (the thing acquired ) that someone else provides, or is to provide, to you; or

    (ii) something (the thing provided ) that you provided, or are to provide, to someone else; and


    (c) the thing acquired or the thing provided is not money;

    the amount of the benefit (or that part of the benefit) that you provided for the thing acquired, or obtained for the thing provided, is taken, for the purposes of applying this Act to you, to be the *market value of the financial arrangement (or that part of the financial arrangement) at the time when you cease to have the financial arrangement (or that part of the financial arrangement).

    Note 1:

    This amount may be relevant, for example, for the purposes of applying the provisions of this Act dealing with capital gains, capital allowances or trading stock to the thing acquired or the thing provided.

    Note 2:

    The market value is to be used instead of the nominal value of the financial benefits to be provided under the financial arrangement.


    250-280(5)    
    If subsection (4) applies, you are taken to have provided, or received, as consideration for ceasing to have the *financial arrangement (or the part of the financial arrangement), *financial benefits whose value is equal to the market value of the financial arrangement (or that part of the financial arrangement) at the time when you ceased to have the financial arrangement.

    250-280(6)    
    If, but for this subsection:


    (a) subsection (5) would apply to your ceasing to have a *financial arrangement; and


    (b) subsection (1) or (4) would also apply to your ceasing to have the financial arrangement;

    subsection (5) applies to your ceasing to have the financial arrangement and subsection (1) or (4) does not.


    250-280(7)    
    Without limiting subsections (1) and (4), the thing provided, or the thing acquired, need not be a tangible thing and may take the form of services, conferring a right, incurring an obligation or extinguishing or varying a right or obligation.

    Subdivision 250-F - Treatment of asset when Division ceases to apply to the asset  

    SECTION 250-285   Treatment of asset after Division ceases to apply to the asset  

    250-285(1)    
    For the purposes of Division 40 , if:


    (a) this Division applies to you and an asset; and


    (b) the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends at a particular time; and


    (c) the asset would have had an *adjustable value at that time, for the purposes of Division 40 , if this Division had never applied to the asset;

    the adjustable value of the asset, immediately after the end of the arrangement period, is taken to be equal to the amount worked out using the following method statement:

    Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out whether section 250-150 applies.


    Step 2.

    If section 250-150 does not apply, the amount is the *end value of the asset at the end of the arrangement period.


    Step 3.

    If section 250-150 does apply, the amount is worked out by:

  • (a) multiplying the *end value of the asset at the end of the *arrangement period by the *disallowed capital percentage; and
  • (b) then multiplying the adjustable value of the asset at the end of the arrangement period (worked out under section 40-85 ) by 100% minus the disallowed capital percentage); and
  • (c) then adding the amount obtained under paragraph (a) and the amount obtained under paragraph (b).

  • 250-285(2)    
    If:


    (a) this Division applies to you and an asset; and


    (b) the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends; and


    (c) a net amount is included in your assessable income in relation to the *financial benefits that are *subject to the deemed loan treatment (taking into account the adjustments under Subdivision 250-E in relation to the financial benefits that are subject to the deemed loan treatment);

    the *cost base, and the *reduced cost base, of the asset are each taken to be reduced at the end of the arrangement period by an amount equal to the difference between:


    (d) the total amounts or values of the financial benefits that were subject to deemed loan treatment; and


    (e) the net amount referred to in paragraph (c).

    Note:

    See subsection (6) in relation to the application of paragraph (d).


    250-285(3)    
    If:


    (a) this Division applies to you and an asset; and


    (b) the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends; and


    (c) a net amount is allowed to you as a deduction in relation to the *financial benefits that are *subject to the deemed loan treatment (taking into account the adjustments under Subdivision 250-E in relation to the financial benefits that are subject to the deemed loan treatment);

    the *cost base, and the *reduced cost base, of the asset are each taken to be reduced at the end of the arrangement period by an amount equal to the sum of:


    (d) the total amounts or values of the financial benefits that were subject to deemed loan treatment; and


    (e) the net amount referred to in paragraph (c).

    Note:

    See subsection (6) in relation to the application of paragraph (d).


    250-285(4)    
    If:


    (a) this Division applies to you and an asset; and


    (b) the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends; and


    (c) a net amount is included in your assessable income in relation to the *financial benefits that are *subject to the deemed loan treatment (taking into account the adjustments under Subdivision 250-E in relation to the financial benefits that are subject to the deemed loan treatment);

    then, in determining the profit or loss on the sale of the asset, a deduction equal to the difference between the following is taken to have been allowed for expenditure by you in connection with the asset:


    (d) the total amounts or values of the financial benefits that were subject to deemed loan treatment; and


    (e) the net amount referred to in paragraph (c).

    Note:

    See subsection (6) in relation to the application of paragraph (d).


    250-285(5)    
    If:


    (a) this Division applies to you and an asset; and


    (b) the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends; and


    (c) a net amount is allowed to you as a deduction in relation to the *financial benefits that are *subject to the deemed loan treatment (taking into account the adjustments under Subdivision 250-E in relation to the financial benefits that are subject to the deemed loan treatment);

    then, in determining the profit or loss on the sale of the asset, a deduction equal to the sum of the following is taken to have been allowed for expenditure by you in connection with the asset:


    (d) the total amounts or values of the financial benefits that were subject to deemed loan treatment; and


    (e) the net amount referred to in paragraph (c).

    Note:

    See subsection (6) in relation to the application of paragraph (d).


    250-285(6)    
    In applying paragraphs (2)(d), (3)(d), (4)(d) and (5)(d), disregard subsection 250-160(2) (reasonable estimate of end value treated as financial benefit subject to deemed loan treatment).

    SECTION 250-290   Balancing adjustment under Subdivision 40-D in some circumstances  

    250-290(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) this Division applies to you and an asset; and


    (b) the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends because a particular event happens; and


    (c) the event would have been a *balancing adjustment event for the asset for the purposes of Subdivision 40-D if this Division had not applied to you and the asset when the event happened.

    250-290(2)    
    A balancing adjustment is made under Subdivision 40-D as if:


    (a) the event were a *balancing adjustment event for the asset; and


    (b) the *adjustable value of the asset, just before the event happened, were the adjustable value worked out under subsection 250-285(1) ; and


    (c) sections 40-290 , 40-291 , 40-292 and 40-293 did not apply.


    Subdivision 250-G - Objections against determinations and decisions by the Commissioner  

    SECTION 250-295   Objections against determinations and decisions by the Commissioner  

    250-295(1)    
    This section applies to a determination by the Commissioner under section 250-45 .

    250-295(2)    
    This section also applies to a decision by the Commissioner under subsection 250-150(5) .

    250-295(3)    
    A person who is dissatisfied with a determination or decision to which this section applies may object against the determination or decision in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Division 253 - Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs  

    Subdivision 253-A - Tax treatment of entitlements under financial claims scheme  

    Guide to Subdivision 253-A

    SECTION 253-1   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Act applies to a payment of an entitlement under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 as if the payment were made by the ADI under the agreement for the account concerned.

    Special rules prevent the arising and payment of such an entitlement from creating inappropriate capital gains or losses affecting assessable income.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    253-5 Payment of entitlement under financial claims scheme treated as payment from ADI
    253-10 Disposal of rights against ADI to APRA and meeting of financial claims scheme entitlement have no CGT effects
    253-15 Cost base of financial claims scheme entitlement and any remaining part of account that gave rise to entitlement

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 253-5   Payment of entitlement under financial claims scheme treated as payment from ADI  

    253-5(1)    
    This Act applies to you as if an amount paid to you, or applied for your benefit, to meet your entitlement under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 connected with an account with an *ADI had been paid to you by the ADI under the terms and conditions of the agreement for keeping the account.

    Note:

    This section has effect subject to more detailed provisions about:

  • (a) entitlements relating to retirement savings accounts (see section 306-25 ); and
  • (b) entitlements relating to farm management deposits (see Subdivision 393-C ).

  • 253-5(2)    
    To avoid doubt, subsection (1) does not affect the operation of Part 2-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note:

    Division 21 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains special provisions about how Part 2-5 in that Schedule operates in relation to the meeting of entitlements under Division 2AA of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 .


    SECTION 253-10  

    253-10   Disposal of rights against ADI to APRA and meeting of financial claims scheme entitlement have no CGT effects  


    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss you make:


    (a) because of the operation of section 16AI of the Banking Act 1959 ; or


    (b) because your entitlement under Subdivision C of Division 2AA of Part II of that Act is met.

    Note:

    Section 16AI of the Banking Act 1959 reduces the right of an account-holder who has a protected account with a declared ADI to be paid an amount by the ADI, by the account-holder's entitlement under Subdivision C of Division 2AA of Part II of that Act to be paid an amount by APRA in connection with the account.

    SECTION 253-15   Cost base of financial claims scheme entitlement and any remaining part of account that gave rise to entitlement  

    253-15(1)    
    This section applies if an entitlement arises under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 in connection with an account-holder's account with an *ADI.

    253-15(2)    
    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *CGT asset consisting of the entitlement are each the amount of the entitlement.

    253-15(3)    
    The *cost base of the *CGT asset representing the part (if any) of the account-holder's right to be paid an amount by the *ADI in connection with the account that remains after the reduction of that right by section 16AI of the Banking Act 1959 (by the amount of the entitlement) is the difference (if any) between:


    (a) the cost base of the right as it was immediately before the reduction; and


    (b) the amount of the entitlement.

    The *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.


    253-15(4)    
    This section has effect despite:


    (a) Division 110 (Cost base and reduced cost base); and


    (b) subsections 112-30(2) , (3) , (4) and (5) (which are about apportioning a *cost base if a *CGT event happens to only part of a *CGT asset).

    PART 3-25 - PARTICULAR KINDS OF TRUSTS  

    Division 275 - Australian managed investment trusts: general  

    Guide to Division 275  

    SECTION 275-1   What this Division is about  


    The trustee of certain Australian managed investment trusts may make a choice that certain assets of the trust be dealt with under CGT rules. If the trustee does not make such a choice, those assets will be treated as revenue assets (see Subdivision 275-B ).

    Gains and profits from carried interests held in entities that are or were Australian managed investment trusts (or certain other trusts) are included in the assessable income of the holder of the interests. The holder is entitled to a deduction from losses from such interests (see Subdivision 275-C ).

    Subdivision 275-A - Meaning of managed investment trust  

    Guide to Subdivision 275-A

    SECTION 275-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision sets out the requirements for a trust to be a managed investment trust in relation to an income year.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    275-10 Meaning of managed investment trust
    275-15 Trusts with wholesale membership
    275-20 Widely-held requirements - ordinary case
    275-25 Widely-held requirements for registered MIT - special case for entities covered by subsection 275-20(4)
    275-30 Closely-held restrictions
    275-35 Licensing requirements for unregistered MIS
    275-40 MIT participation interest
    275-45 Meaning of managed investment trust - every member of trust is a managed investment trust etc.
    275-50 Extended definition of managed investment trust - no fund payment made in relation to the income year
    275-55 Extended definition of managed investment trust - temporary circumstances outside the control of the trustee

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 275-10   Meaning of managed investment trust  

    275-10(1)    
    A trust is a managed investment trust in relation to an income year if any of the following requirements are met:

    (a)    the trust is covered under subsection (3) of this section in relation to the income year (ordinary case);

    (b)    the trust is covered under section 275-45 in relation to the income year (only members of trust are managed investment trusts etc.).

    275-10(2)    
    A trust is also a managed investment trust in relation to an income year if any of the following requirements are met:

    (a)    the trust is covered under section 275-50 in relation to the income year (no fund payment made in relation to the income year);

    (b)    the trust is covered under section 275-55 in relation to the income year (temporary circumstances outside the control of the trustee).

    275-10(3)    
    A trust is covered under this subsection in relation to an income year if:

    (a)    at the time the trustee of the trust makes the first *fund payment in relation to the income year, or at an earlier time in the income year:


    (i) the trustee of the trust was an Australian resident; or

    (ii) the central management and control of the trust was in Australia; and

    (b)    the trust is not a trust covered by subsection (4) (trading trust etc.) in relation to the income year; and

    (c)    at the time the payment is made, the trust is a managed investment scheme (within the meaning of section 9 of the Corporations Act 2001 ); and

    (d)    at the time the payment is made:


    (i) the trust is covered by section 275-15 (trusts with wholesale membership); or

    (ii) if the trust is not covered by section 275-15 - the trust is registered under section 601EB of the Corporations Act 2001 ; and

    (e)    the trust satisfies, in relation to the income year:


    (i) if, at the time the payment is made, the trust is registered under section 601EB of the Corporations Act 2001 and is covered by section 275-15 - either or both of the widely-held requirements in subsections 275-20(1) and 275-25(1) ; or

    (ii) if, at the time the payment is made, the trust is so registered and is not covered by section 275-15 - either or both of the widely-held requirements in subsections 275-20(2) and 275-25(1) ; or

    (iii) if, at the time the payment is made, the trust is not so registered and is covered by section 275-15 - the widely-held requirements in subsection 275-20(1) ; and

    (f)    the trust satisfies the closely-held restrictions in subsection 275-30(1) in relation to the income year; and

    (g)    if the trust is covered by section 275-15 at the time the payment is made - it satisfies the licensing requirements in section 275-35 in relation to the income year.

    Trading unit trust or other trust carrying on trading business etc. cannot be managed investment trust

    275-10(4)    
    A trust is covered by this subsection in relation to an income year if:

    (a)    in the case of a unit trust - the trust is a trading trust for the purposes of Division 6C of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the income year; or

    (b)    in any other case - the trust at any time in the income year:


    (i) carried on a trading business (within the meaning of that Division); or

    (ii) controlled, or was able to control, directly or indirectly, the affairs or operations of another person in respect of the carrying on by that other person of a trading business (within the meaning of that Division).

    275-10(4A)    


    In determining whether a trust is covered by subsection (4) , disregard any interest that the trust has in an *AFOF, an *ESVCLP or a *VCLP unless:

    (a)    the trust is a *general partner of the AFOF, ESVCLP or VCLP; or

    (b)    the trust has *committed capital in the partnership that, taken together with the sum of the amounts of committed capital in the partnership of any of that partner ' s *associates (other than associates to whom subsection (4B) applies), exceeds 30% of the partnership ' s committed capital.


    275-10(4B)    


    This subsection applies to:

    (a)    an *ADI; or

    (b)    a *life insurance company; or

    (c)    a public authority:


    (i) that is constituted by a law of a State or internal Territory; and

    (ii) that carries on life insurance business within the meaning of section 11 of the Life Insurance Act 1995 ; or

    (d)    a widely-held complying superannuation fund within the meaning of section 4A of the Pooled Development Funds Act 1992 ; or

    (e)    a *widely held foreign venture capital fund of funds.



    Crown entities etc.

    275-10(5)    


    For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(d) and (e) , treat an entity as registered under section 601EB of the Corporations Act 2001 at the time the payment is made if at that time the trust is operated by:

    (a)    an entity that would, but for subsection 5A(4) of that Act (about the Crown not being bound by Chapter 6CA or 7 of that Act), be required under that Act to be a financial services licensee (within the meaning of that Act) whose licence would cover operating such a managed investment scheme; or

    (b)    an entity that:


    (i) is a *wholly-owned subsidiary of an entity of a kind mentioned in paragraph (a) ; and

    (ii) would, but for any instrument issued by ASIC under that Act that has effect in relation to the entity and operation of the scheme mentioned in paragraph (3)(c) , be required under that Act to be a financial services licensee (within the meaning of that Act) whose licence would cover operating such a managed investment scheme.


    Start-up and wind-down phases

    275-10(6)    
    Treat the requirements in paragraphs (3)(e) and (f) as being satisfied if:

    (a)    the trust is created during the period:


    (i) starting 12 months before the start of the income year; and

    (ii) ending at the end of the income year; or

    (b)    the trust ceases to exist during the income year, and was a *managed investment trust (disregarding paragraph (a) of this section) in relation to the previous income year.

    SECTION 275-15  

    275-15   Trusts with wholesale membership  


    A trust is covered by this section at a time if, at that time:

    (a)    the trust is not required to be registered in accordance with section 601ED of the Corporations Act 2001 (whether or not it is actually so registered) because of subsection 601ED(2) of that Act (no product disclosure statement required) or because it is operated or managed by an entity covered by subsection 275-35(2) (Crown entities); and

    (b)    

    the total number of entities that had become a *member of the trust because a financial product or a financial service was provided to, or acquired by, the entity as a retail client (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ) is no more than 20; and

    (c)    the entities mentioned in paragraph (b) have a total *MIT participation interest in the trust of no more than 10%.

    SECTION 275-20   Widely-held requirements - ordinary case  

    275-20(1)    
    The trust satisfies the requirements in this subsection in relation to the income year if, at the time the payment mentioned in paragraph 275-10(3)(a) is made, the trust has at least 25 *members.

    275-20(2)    
    The trust satisfies the requirements in this subsection in relation to the income year if, at the time the payment mentioned in paragraph 275-10(3)(a) is made:

    (a)    units in the trust are listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange in Australia; or

    (b)    the trust has at least 50 *members (ignoring objects of a trust).

    275-20(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1) and paragraph (2)(b) , determine the number of *members of the trust as follows:

    (a)    first, by applying the rules in subsection (5) , identify:


    (i) the members of the trust that are not entities covered by subsection (4) ; and

    (ii) the members of the trust that are entities covered by subsection (4) ;

    (b)    next, work out the number of members mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i) ;

    (c)    next:


    (i) work out the *MIT participation interest in the trust of each entity mentioned in subparagraph (a)(ii); and

    (ii) for each of those entities, multiply the total of its MIT participation interest in the trust by 50 and round the result upwards to the nearest whole number; and

    (iii) work out the total of the results of subparagraph (ii) for all of those entities;

    (d)    next, work out the total of the results of paragraphs (b) and (c) .

    275-20(4)    
    This subsection covers the following kinds of entity:

    (a)    a *life insurance company;

    (b)    a *foreign life insurance company that is regulated under a *foreign law;

    (c)    a *complying superannuation fund, a *complying approved deposit fund or a *foreign superannuation fund, being a fund that has at least 50 *members;

    (d)    a *pooled superannuation trust that has at least one member that is a complying superannuation fund that has at least 50 members;

    (e)    a *managed investment trust in relation to the income year;

    (f)    an entity:


    (i) that is recognised under a foreign law as being used for collective investment by pooling the contributions of its members as consideration to acquire rights to benefits produced by the entity; and

    (ii) that has at least 50 members; and

    (iii) the contributing members of which do not have day-to-day control over the entity ' s operation;

    (g)    an entity, the principal purpose of which is to fund pensions (including disability and similar benefits) for the citizens or other contributors of a foreign country, if:


    (i) the entity is a fund established by an *exempt foreign government agency; or

    (ii) the entity is established under a foreign law for an exempt foreign government agency; or

    (iii) the entity is a *wholly-owned subsidiary of an entity mentioned in subparagraph (i) or (ii) ;

    (h)    an investment entity that satisfies all of these requirements:


    (i) the entity is wholly-owned by one or more *foreign government agencies, or is a wholly-owned subsidiary of one or more foreign government agencies;

    (ii) the entity is established using only the public money or public property of the foreign government concerned;

    (iii) all economic benefits obtained by the entity have passed, or are expected to pass, to the foreign government concerned;

    (i)    an entity established and wholly-owned by an *Australian government agency, if the capital of the entity, and returns from the investment of that capital, are used for the primary purpose of meeting statutory government liabilities or obligations (such as superannuation liabilities and liabilities arising from compensation or workcover claims);

    (ia)    

    the *Future Fund Board;

    (j)    a *limited partnership, if, throughout the income year:


    (i) at least 95% of the *membership interests in the limited partnership are owned by entities mentioned in the preceding paragraphs of this subsection, or by entities that are wholly-owned by entities so mentioned; and

    (ii) the remaining membership interests (if any) in the limited partnership are owned by a *general partner of the limited partnership that habitually exercises the management power of the limited partnership;

    (k)    an entity, all the membership interests in which are owned by any of the following:


    (i) entities mentioned in the preceding paragraphs of this subsection;

    (ii) entities that are wholly-owned by entities mentioned in the preceding paragraphs of this subsection;

    (iii) entities that are covered under this subsection because of a previous operation of this paragraph;

    (l)    an entity of a kind similar to an entity mentioned in the preceding paragraphs of this subsection as specified in the regulations.


    275-20(4A)    


    Any financial assets (within the meaning of the Future Fund Act 2006 ) held by the *Future Fund Board are taken, for the purposes of subparagraph (4)(k)(ii) , to be held by the Future Fund Board in its own right.

    275-20(5)    
    The rules are as follows:

    (a)    if an entity that is not a trust holds interests in the trust indirectly, through a *chain of trusts:


    (i) treat the entity as a member of the trust; and

    (ii) do not treat a trust in the chain of trusts as a member of the trust;

    (b)    do not treat an object of the trust as a member of the trust;

    (c)    

    if the trust is mentioned in subparagraph 275-10(3)(d)(i) (trusts with wholesale membership) - do not treat an individual as a member of the trust (other than an individual who became a member of the trust because a financial product or a financial service was provided to, or acquired by, the individual as a wholesale client (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 );

    (d)    the rules in subsection (7) .


    275-20(6)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (5)(a) , treat an entity covered by subsection (4) as an entity that is not a trust.

    275-20(7)    
    The rules are as follows:

    (a)    treat the following entities as together being one entity:


    (i) an individual;

    (ii) each of his or her *relatives;

    (iii) each entity acting in the capacity of nominee of an individual mentioned in subparagraph (i) or (ii) ;

    (b)    treat the following entities as together being one entity (the notional entity ):


    (i) an entity that is not an individual;

    (ii) each entity acting in the capacity of nominee of the entity mentioned in subparagraph (i) .

    275-20(8)    
    For the purposes of subsection (5) , if the entity mentioned in subparagraph (7)(b)(i) is an entity covered by subsection (4) , treat the notional entity as an entity covered by subsection (4) .

    SECTION 275-25   Widely-held requirements for registered MIT - special case for entities covered by subsection 275-20(4)  

    275-25(1)    
    The trust satisfies the requirements in this subsection in relation to the income year if:


    (a) one or more entities covered by subsection 275-20(4) have a total *MIT participation interest in the trust of more than 25% at the time the payment mentioned in paragraph 275-10(3)(a) is made; and


    (b) at no time in the income year does an entity (other than an entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) ) have a MIT participation interest in the trust of more than 60%.

    275-25(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(a) and (b):


    (a) if:


    (i) an entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) has a *MIT participation interest (the first interest ) in the trust; and

    (ii) another entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) also has a MIT participation interest (the second interest ) in the trust;
    disregard the second interest to the extent that it arises through the existence of the first interest; and


    (b) if an entity that is not a trust has a MIT participation interest in the trust because it holds interests in the trust indirectly, through a *chain of trusts - do not treat a trust in the chain of trusts as having a MIT participation interest in the trust.

    275-25(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), treat an entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) as an entity that is not a trust.

    275-25(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(a) and (b), apply the rules in subsection 275-20(7) .

    SECTION 275-30   Closely-held restrictions  

    275-30(1)    
    The trust satisfies the requirements in this subsection in relation to the income year unless, at any time in the income year, any of the following situations exist:


    (a) for a trust mentioned in subparagraph 275-10(3)(d)(i) (trusts with wholesale membership) - 10 or fewer persons have a total *MIT participation interest in the trust of 75% or more;


    (b) if paragraph (a) does not apply - 20 or fewer persons have a total MIT participation interest in the trust of 75% or more;


    (c) a foreign resident individual has a MIT participation interest in the trust of 10% or more.

    275-30(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(a) and (b):


    (a) if an entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) has a *MIT participation interest in the trust - treat that entity as not having a MIT participation interest in the trust; and


    (b) if an entity that is not a trust has a MIT participation interest in the trust because it holds interests in the trust indirectly, through a *chain of trusts:


    (i) if the entity is covered by subsection 275-20(4) - do not treat it as having a MIT participation interest in the trust; and

    (ii) do not treat a trust in the chain of trusts as having a MIT participation interest in the trust.

    275-30(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), treat an entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) as an entity that is not a trust.

    275-30(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(a) and (b), apply the rules in subsection 275-20(7) .

    SECTION 275-35   Licensing requirements for unregistered MIS  

    275-35(1)    
    The trust satisfies the requirements in this section in relation to the income year if, at the time the payment mentioned in paragraph 275-10(3)(a) is made (the time of the first fund payment for the income year):

    (a)    

    the trust is operated or managed by:

    (i) a financial services licensee (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ) holding an Australian financial services licence whose licence covers it providing financial services (within the meaning of that Act) to wholesale clients (within the meaning of that Act); or

    (ii) an authorised representative (within the meaning of that Act) of such a financial services licensee; or

    (b)    the trust is operated or managed by an entity covered by subsection (2) ; or

    (c)    the trust is operated or managed by an entity that:


    (i) is a *wholly-owned subsidiary of an entity covered by subsection (2) ; and

    (ii) is an entity covered by subsection (3) .

    275-35(2)    


    An entity is covered by this subsection if it would, but for subsection 5A(4) of the Corporations Act 2001 (about the Crown not being bound by Chapter 6CA or 7 of that Act), be required under that Act to be a financial services licensee (within the meaning of that Act).

    275-35(3)    


    An entity is covered by this subsection if it would, but for any instrument issued by ASIC under the Corporations Act 2001 that has effect in relation to the entity and the operation of the scheme mentioned in paragraph 275-10(3)(c) , be required under that Act to be a financial services licensee (within the meaning of that Act).

    SECTION 275-40   MIT participation interest  

    275-40(1)    
    An entity has a MIT participation interest in a trust if the entity, directly or indirectly:


    (a) holds, or has the right to *acquire, interests representing a percentage of the value of the interests in the trust; or


    (b) has the control of, or the ability to control, a percentage of the rights attaching to *membership interests in the trust; or


    (c) has the right to receive a percentage of any distribution of income that the trust may make.

    275-40(2)    
    The MIT participation interest of the entity in the trust is the greatest of the percentages mentioned in paragraphs (1)(a), (b) and (c).

    SECTION 275-45   Meaning of managed investment trust - every member of trust is a managed investment trust etc.  

    275-45(1)    
    A trust is covered under this section in relation to an income year if:


    (a) the condition in paragraph 275-10(3)(a) is satisfied; and


    (b) the condition in paragraph 275-10(3)(b) is satisfied; and


    (c) either:


    (i) the only *members of the trust are entities that are covered by subsection 275-20(4) (other than entities mentioned in paragraph 275-20(4)(f) ); or

    (ii) the only members of the trust are entities that are *managed investment trusts in relation to the income year because of subsection 275-10(2) ; and


    (d) the trust satisfies the licensing requirements in section 275-35 in relation to the income year.

    275-45(2)    
    A requirement in paragraph (1)(a) is satisfied if, and only if, it is satisfied:


    (a) at the time the trustee of the trust makes the first *fund payment in relation to the income year; or


    (b) if the trustee does not make such a payment in relation to the income year - at both the start and the end of the income year.

    SECTION 275-50  

    275-50   Extended definition of managed investment trust - no fund payment made in relation to the income year  
    A trust is covered under this section in relation to an income year if:


    (a) the trustee of the trust does not make a *fund payment in relation to the income year; and


    (b) the trust would be a *managed investment trust in relation to the income year if the trustee of the trust had made the first fund payment in relation to the income year on the first day of the income year when it was in existence; and


    (c) the trust would be a managed investment trust in relation to the income year if the trustee of the trust had made the first fund payment in relation to the income year on the last day of the income year on which it was in existence.

    SECTION 275-55  

    275-55   Extended definition of managed investment trust - temporary circumstances outside the control of the trustee  
    A trust is covered under this section in relation to an income year if:


    (a) apart from a particular circumstance, the trust would be a *managed investment trust in relation to the income year; and


    (b) the circumstance is temporary; and


    (c) the circumstance arose outside the control of the trustee of the trust; and


    (d) it is fair and reasonable to treat the trust as a managed investment trust in relation to the income year, having regard to the following matters:


    (i) the matters in paragraphs (a) and (b);

    (ii) the nature of the circumstance;

    (iii) the actions (if any) taken by the trustee of the trust to address or remove the circumstance, and the speed with which such actions are taken;

    (iv) the extent to which treating the trust as a managed investment trust in relation to the income year would increase or reduce the amount of tax otherwise payable by the trustee, the *members of the trust or any other entity;

    (v) any other relevant matter.

    Subdivision 275-B - Choice for capital treatment of managed investment trust gains and losses  

    SECTION 275-100   Consequences of making choice - CGT to be primary code for calculating MIT gains or losses  

    275-100(1)    
    The modifications in subsection (2) apply if:


    (a) a *CGT event happens at a time involving a *CGT asset; and


    (b) the CGT asset is owned at that time by an entity that is a *managed investment trust in relation to the income year in which the time occurs; and


    (c) the CGT event happensbecause the managed investment trust *disposes of, ceases to own or otherwise realises the asset; and


    (d) the asset is covered by section 275-105 ; and


    (e) the entity meets the requirement in section 275-110 at the time; and


    (f) a choice under section 275-115 covering the entity is in force for the income year in which the time occurs.

    275-100(1A)    


    Without limiting paragraph (1)(b), if:


    (a) a *VCLP or an *ESVCLP owns a *CGT asset at the time referred to in that paragraph; and


    (b) at that time, the *managed investment trust has an interest in the asset as a *limited partner of the VCLP or ESVCLP;

    for the purposes of that paragraph, the managed investment trust is taken to own the asset to the extent of that interest.


    275-100(2)    
    These provisions do not apply to the *CGT event:


    (a) sections 6-5 (about *ordinary income), 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct), and 15-15 and 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans);


    (b) sections 25A and 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about profit-making undertakings or schemes);


    (c) section 118-20 (about reducing capital gains if amount otherwise assessable);


    (d) Division 70 and section 118-25 (about trading stock).

    General exceptions

    275-100(3)    
    The provisions referred to in subsection (2) can apply to the *CGT event if a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event is disregarded because of one of the provisions in this table:


    Where gain or loss disregarded because of CGT provision
    Item Provision Brief description
    1 Paragraph 104-15(4)(a) Title in a CGT asset does not pass when a hire purchase or similar agreement ends
    2 Section 118-13 Shares in a PDF
    3 Section 118-60 Certain gifts



    Trading stock and profit-making undertakings or plans involving land etc.

    275-100(4)   
    The provisions referred to in subsection (2) can also apply to the *CGT event if:


    (a) where the *CGT asset is land (including an interest in land), or a right or option to *acquire or *dispose of land (including an interest in land):


    (i) the CGT asset is *trading stock; or

    (ii) the circumstances existing at the time of the event would, disregarding this Subdivision, give rise to an amount being included in the assessable income of the entity under section 15-15 or to a deduction for the entity under section 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans); or


    (b) where paragraph (a) does not apply:


    (i) the *managed investment trust acquired the CGT asset in an income year for which the choice mentioned in paragraph (1)(f) was not in force; and

    (ii) the CGT asset was treated as trading stock in the managed investment trust ' s financial report for the most recent income year ending before the start of the income year in which that choice first came into force; and

    (iii) the CGT asset was treated as trading stock in the *income tax return for the managed investment trust for the most recent income year ending before the start of the income year in which that choice first came into force; and

    (iv) the CGT asset was treated as trading stock in the managed investment trust ' s financial report for the most recent income year ending before the time of the event; and

    (v) the CGT asset was treated as trading stock in the income tax return for the managed investment trust for the most recent income year ending before the time of the event.


    Treatment of outgoings to acquire trading stock

    275-100(5)    
    The modifications in subsection (6) apply if:


    (a) an entity that is a *managed investment trust in relation to the income year *acquires a *CGT asset at a time in that income year; and


    (b) the CGT asset is an item of *trading stock; and


    (c) the CGT asset is not land (including an interest in land), or a right or option to acquire or *dispose of land (including an interest in land); and


    (d) the entity incurs an outgoing in connection with acquiring the asset; and


    (e) the asset is covered by section 275-105 ; and


    (f) the entity meets the requirement in section 275-110 at the time; and


    (g) a choice under section 275-115 covering the entity is in force for the income year in which the time occurs.

    275-100(6)    
    The modifications are as follows:


    (a) section 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct) does not apply to the *acquisition;


    (b) Division 70 (about trading stock) does not apply in relation to the asset in respect of:


    (i) the income year in which the time occurs; and

    (ii) any later income year in relation to which the entity is a *managed investment trust and throughout which the entity meets the requirement in section 275-110 .

    SECTION 275-105   Covered assets  

    275-105(1)    
    An asset is covered by this section if it is any of the following:


    (a) a *share in a company (including a share in a *foreign hybrid company);


    (b) a *non-share equity interest in a company;


    (c) a unit in a unit trust;


    (d) land (including an interest in land);


    (e) a right or option to *acquire or *dispose of an asset of a kind mentioned in paragraph (a), (b), (c) or (d).

    275-105(2)    
    However, the asset is not covered by this section if it is any of the following:


    (a) a *Division 230 financial arrangement;


    (b) a *debt interest.

    SECTION 275-110   MIT not to be trading trust  

    275-110(1)    


    An entity that is a trust meets the requirement in this section at a time if the entity is not, at that time, a trading trust for the purposes of Division 6C of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to that income year.

    275-110(2)    


    If, apart from a particular circumstance, a trust would meet the requirement in subsection (1) at a time, the trust also meets the requirement in this section at a time if:


    (a) the circumstance is temporary; and


    (b) the circumstance arose outside the control of the trustee of the trust; and


    (c) the trustee of the trust is not liable to pay income tax on the net income of the trust under section 102S of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the income year in which the time occurs; and


    (d) it is fair and reasonable to treat the trust as meeting the requirement in this section at that time, having regard to the following matters:


    (i) the matters in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c);

    (ii) the nature of the circumstance;

    (iii) the actions (if any) taken by the trustee of the trust to address or remove the circumstance, and the speed with which such actions are taken;

    (iv) the extent to which treating the trust as meeting the requirement in this section at that time would increase or reduce the amount of tax otherwise payable by the trustee, the beneficiaries of the trust or any other entity;

    (v) any other relevant matter.

    SECTION 275-115   MIT CGT choices  

    275-115(1)    
    The trustee of an entity that is a *managed investment trust may make a choice under this section that covers the managed investment trust.

    275-115(2)    
    The choice must be made in the *approved form.

    275-115(3)    
    The choice can be made only:


    (a) if the entity became a *managed investment trust in the 2009-10 income year or a later income year (whether or not the entity existed before it became a managed investment trust) - on or before the latest of the following days:


    (i) the day it is required to lodge its *income tax return for the income year in which it became a managed investment trust;

    (ii) if the Commissioner allows a later day for the managed investment trust - that later day; or


    (b) otherwise - on or before the latest of the following days:


    (i) the last day in the 3 month period starting on the day on which this section commences;

    (ii) the last day of the 2009-10 income year;

    (iii) if the Commissioner allows a later day for the managed investment trust - that later day.

    275-115(4)    
    The choice, once made, cannot be revoked.

    275-115(5)    
    The choice is in force:


    (a) in the circumstances mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) - for the income year in which the entity became a *managed investment trust (whether or not the entity existed before it became a managed investment trust) and later income years; or


    (b) in the circumstances mentioned in paragraph (3)(b) - for the 2008-09 income year and later income years.

    SECTION 275-120   Consequences of not making choice - revenue account treatment  

    275-120(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the requirements in subsection 275-100(1) are met in relation to a *CGT asset held by a *managed investment trust, apart from the requirement in paragraph 275-100(1)(f) ; and


    (b) the CGT asset is not:


    (i) land (including an interest in land); or

    (ii) a right or option to *acquire or *dispose of land (including an interest in land); and


    (c) the managed investment trust disposes of, ceases to own or otherwise realises the asset; and


    (d) disregarding this section:


    (i) the net proceeds (if any) from the disposal, cessation or realisation would not be reflected in an amount being included in the assessable income of the managed investment trust (other than under Part 3-1 or 3-3 ); and

    (ii) the gain or profit (if any) on the disposal, cessation or realisation would not be reflected in an amount being included in the assessable income of the managed investment trust (other than under Part 3-1 or 3-3 ); and

    (iii) the loss (if any) on the disposal, cessation or realisation would not be reflected in an amount being deductible by the managed investment trust.

    275-120(2)    
    For the purpose of this Act, treat the disposal, cessation of ownership of or realisation of the asset in the same way as the disposal, cessation of ownership of or realisation of a *revenue asset.

    Subdivision 275-C - Carried interests in managed investment trusts  

    SECTION 275-200   Gains and losses etc. from carried interests in managed investment trusts reflected in assessable income or deduction  

    275-200(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you hold a *CGT asset in an income year that carries an entitlement to a distribution from an entity; and


    (b) the entitlement to such a distribution is contingent upon the attainment of profits by the entity; and


    (c) the entity satisfies any of these requirements:


    (i) it is a *managed investment trust in relation to the income year;

    (ii) it was a managed investment trust in relation to a previous income year; and


    (d) you acquired the asset because of services you or your *associate provided, or will provide, to the entity; and


    (e) you or your associate provided, or will provide, those services:


    (i) as a manager of the entity; or

    (ii) as an associate of a manager of the entity; or

    (iii) as an employee of a manager of the entity; or

    (iv) as an associate of an employee of a manager of the entity; and


    (f) any of the following apply:


    (i) you become entitled in the income year to such a distribution (regardless of whether the distribution is made immediately, or is to be made in the future);

    (ii) a *CGT event happens in relation to the asset in the income year.

    275-200(1A)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), in determining whether the entity satisfies any of the requirements mentioned in that paragraph:


    (a) disregard paragraph 275-10(3)(b) (requirement of not being a trading trust etc.); and


    (b) disregard subsection 102T(16) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (exclusion of public trading trust etc.).


    275-200(2)    
    Include in your assessable income for the income year:


    (a) the amount of the distribution (except to the extent that it represents a return of capital that you or your associate contributed in order for you to *acquire the asset); or


    (b) the amount of your gain or profit (if any) on the *CGT event.

    275-200(3)    
    Subsection (2) does not apply to the extent that the amount is included in your assessable income as:


    (a) *ordinary income under section 6-5 ; or


    (b) *statutory income under a section of this Act, other than a provision in Part 3-1 or 3-3 .

    275-200(4)    
    An amount to which subsection (2) applies is taken, for the purposes of the *income tax laws, to have a source in Australia. For the purposes of this subsection, disregard subsection (3).

    275-200(5)    
    You are entitled to a deduction for the income year for the amount of your loss (if any) on the *CGT event.

    275-200(6)    
    Subsection (5) does not apply to the extent that you can deduct the amount under another provision of this Act.

    275-200(7)    
    Subdivision 115-C does not apply to the amount of a distribution mentioned in subparagraph (1)(f)(i) if:


    (a) that amount is included in your assessable income under subsection (2); or


    (b) an amount referable to that amount is included in your assessable income under Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Subdivision 275-L - Modification for non-arm ' s length income  

    Guide to Subdivision 275-L

    SECTION 275-600   What this Subdivision is about  


    The trustee of a managed investment trust in relation to an income year is taxed on amounts related to the managed investment trust ' s non-arm ' s length income for the income year.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    275-605 Trustee taxed on amount of non-arm ' s length income of managed investment trust
    275-610 Non-arm ' s length income
    275-615 Commissioner ' s determination in relation to amount of non-arm ' s length income

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 275-605   Trustee taxed on amount of non-arm ' s length income of managed investment trust  

    275-605(1)    
    Subsections (2), (3) and (4) apply if the Commissioner has made a determination under section 275-615 that specifies an amount of *non-arm ' s length income for a specified *managed investment trust in relation to a specified income year.

    Excess amount to be taxed

    275-605(2)    
    The trustee of the *managed investment trust is liable to pay income tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount mentioned in subsection (5).

    Note:

    The rate is set out in subsection 12(10) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 .



    Excess amount to be adjusted

    275-605(3)    
    If the trust is an *AMIT for the income year:


    (a) if paragraph (b) does not apply - treat the trust as having an *over in the income year in which the determination is made, for the specified income year, of a character relating to *ordinary income, or *statutory income, from an *Australian source, equal to the amount mentioned in subsection (5); or


    (b) if the trust already has such an over in the income year in which the determination is made, for the specified income year - increase the amount of that over by the amount mentioned in subsection (5).

    275-605(4)    
    If the trust is not an *AMIT for the income year, reduce the trust ' s *net income for the income year in which the determination is made by the amount mentioned in subsection (5), to the extent that the net income is attributable to that amount.

    Excess amount

    275-605(5)    
    The amount is the excess mentioned in paragraph 275-610(1)(b) in respect of the *non-arm ' s length income, reduced by deductions (if any) that:


    (a) are reflected in:


    (i) if the trust is an *AMIT for the income year - the amounts of its *trust components for the income year (disregarding subsection (3)); or

    (ii) otherwise - its *net income for the income year (disregarding subsection (4)); and


    (b) are attributable only to the amount of non-arm ' s length income.

    SECTION 275-610   Non-arm ' s length income  

    275-610(1)    
    An amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income is non-arm ' s length income of a *managed investment trust if:


    (a) it is derived from a *scheme the parties to which were not dealing with each other at *arm ' s length in relation to the scheme; and


    (b) that amount exceeds the amount that the entity might have been expected to derive if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm ' s length in relation to the scheme; and


    (c) the amount is none of the following:


    (i) a distribution from a *corporate tax entity;

    (ii) a distribution from a trust that is not a party to the scheme mentioned in paragraph (a);

    (iii) a *return covered by subsection (2).

    275-610(1A)    


    Disregard subparagraph (1)(c)(ii) if the amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income is *excepted MIT CSA income.

    275-610(2)    
    This subsection covers a *return that an entity pays or provides on a *debt interest, if the rate (expressed on an annual basis) of the return does not exceed the greater of:


    (a) the *benchmark rate of return for the interest; and


    (b) the *base interest rate for the day on which the return is paid or provided, plus 3 percentage points.

    275-610(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies if:


    (a) an amount would be *non-arm ' s length income of the *managed investment trust (disregarding that subsection); and


    (b) the amount is a distribution from a trust, or a share of the *net income of a trust, if the trust is a party to the scheme mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

    275-610(4)    
    The amount is *non-arm ' s length income of the *managed investment trust only to the extent that the distribution or share of *net income is attributable to non-arm ' s length income of the trust mentioned in paragraph (3)(b) (on that assumption that the trust were a managed investment trust) because of another operation of this section.

    275-610(5)    
    Subsection (6) applies if:


    (a) an amount (the first amount ) of *ordinary income or *statutory income of the *managed investment trust that would be *non-arm ' s length income of the managed investment trust (disregarding that subsection) is:


    (i) a distribution from a trust that is a party to the scheme mentioned in paragraph (1)(a); or

    (ii) a share of the *net income of a trust that is a party to that scheme; and


    (b) another amount (the second amount ) of ordinary income or statutory income of the managed investment trust is:


    (i) a distribution from another trust (whether or not the other trust is a party to that scheme); or

    (ii) a share of the net income of another trust (whether or not the other trust is a party to that scheme); and


    (c) it is reasonable to conclude that the second amount would have been higher but for the first amount.

    275-610(6)    
    The first amount is not *non-arm ' s length income of the *managed investment trust to the extent that the second amount would have been higher as mentioned in paragraph (5)(c).

    SECTION 275-615   Commissioner ' s determination in relation to amount of non-arm ' s length income  

    275-615(1)    
    The Commissioner may make a determination in writing that specifies an amount of *non-arm ' s length income for a specified *managed investment trust in relation to a specified income year if the Commissioner is satisfied that:


    (a) the amount of non-arm ' s length income for the managed investment trust in relation to the income year is reflected in:


    (i) if the trust is an *AMIT for the income year - one or more of its *trust components for the income year; or

    (ii) otherwise - its *net income for the income year; and


    (b) the managed investment trust is a party to the *scheme mentioned in paragraph 275-610(1)(a) at a time in the income year in which the amount is derived; and


    (c) at least one the parties to that scheme is not a managed investment trust in relation to the income year.

    275-615(1A)    


    Disregard paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) if the amount of *non-arm ' s length income is *excepted MIT CSA income.

    Determination does not form part of assessment

    275-615(2)    
    A determination under subsection (1) does not form part of an assessment.

    Notice by Commissioner of determination

    275-615(3)    


    If the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (1), the Commissioner must give a copy of the determination to the *managed investment trust concerned.

    Evidence of determination

    275-615(4)    
    The production of:


    (a) a notice of a determination; or


    (b) a document signed by the Commissioner, a Second Commissioner or a Deputy Commissioner purporting to be a copy of a determination;

    is:


    (c) conclusive evidence of the due making of the determination; and


    (d) conclusive evidence that the determination is correct (except in proceedings under Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 on an appeal or review relating to the determination).

    Objections

    275-615(5)    
    If an entity to whom a determination relates is dissatisfied with the determination, the entity may object against it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Division 276 - Australian managed investment trusts: attribution managed investment trusts  

    Guide to Division 276  

    SECTION 276-1   What this Division is about  


    A managed investment trust in relation to an income year is an attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT) for the income year if certain criteria are satisfied. In particular, for the trust to be an AMIT, the interests of the members of the trust need to be clearly defined at all times during which the trust is in existence in the income year (see Subdivision 276-A ).

    An AMIT for an income year is treated as a fixed trust. A member of the AMIT in respect of the income year is treated as having a vested and indefeasible interest in a share of the income and capital of the AMIT throughout the income year (see Subdivision 276-B ).

    Amounts related to income and tax offsets of an AMIT, determined by the trustee to be of a particular tax character, are attributed to members, generally retaining that tax character (see Subdivision 276-C ).

    Underestimates and overestimates of amounts at the trust level are carried forward and dealt with in later years. This is done on a character-by-character basis. An underestimate in an income year of a particular character results in an under of that character. An overestimate results in an over of that character. Unders and overs arise, and are dealt with, in the income year in which they are discovered (see Subdivision 276-F ).

    The trustee of an AMIT is liable to pay income tax on certain amounts reflecting under-attribution of income or over-attribution of tax offsets (see Subdivision 276-G ).

    Special rules apply to a trust that ceases to be an AMIT (see Subdivision 276-K ).

    Subdivision 276-A - What is an attribution managed investment trust?  

    Guide to Subdivision 276-A

    SECTION 276-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    A managed investment trust in relation to an income year is an attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT ) for the income year if certain criteria are satisfied. In particular:

  • (a) the interests of the members of the trust need to be clearly defined at all times when the trust is in existence in the income year; and
  • (b) the trustee of the trust needs to have made a choice for the trust to be an AMIT in respect of that income year or an earlier income year.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    276-10 Meaning of attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT )
    276-15 Clearly defined interests
    276-20 Trust with classes of membership interests - each class treated as separate AMIT

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 276-10   Meaning of attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT )  

    276-10(1)    
    A trust is an attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT ) for an income year if:


    (a) the trust is a *managed investment trust in relation to the income year; and


    (b) the rights to income and capital arising from each of the *membership interests in the trust are clearly defined (see section 276-15 ) at all times when the trust is in existence in the income year; and


    (c) (Repealed by No 15 of 2019)


    (d) if the regulations specify criteria for the purposes of this paragraph - those criteria are satisfied in relation to the trust; and


    (e) either:


    (i) the trustee of the trust has made a choice for the purposes of this subparagraph in respect of that income year; or

    (ii) the trust was an AMIT for an earlier income year.

    276-10(2)    
    A choice for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(e)(i) cannot be revoked.

    SECTION 276-15   Clearly defined interests  

    276-15(1)    
    Without limiting the circumstances in which the rights to income and capital arising from the *membership interests in a trust are clearly defined for the purposes of paragraph 276-10(1)(b) , treat such rights as being clearly defined at a particular time for those purposes if any of the following conditions are satisfied at that time:


    (a) the trust is registered under section 601EB of the Corporations Act 2001 ;


    (b) the rights to income and capital arising from each of the membership interests in the trust are the same.

    276-15(2)    
    For the purposes of working out whether the condition in paragraph (1)(b) is satisfied, disregard the following:


    (a) fees or charges imposed by the trustee on the *members of the trust;


    (b) issue and redemption prices of *membership interests in the trust;


    (c) exposure of the membership interests in the trust to foreign exchange gains and losses.

    SECTION 276-20   Trust with classes of membership interests - each class treated as separate AMIT  

    276-20(1)    
    Subsections (2) and (3) apply if:


    (a) the *membership interests in an *AMIT for an income year are divided into classes; and


    (b) the rights arising from each of those membership interests in a particular class are the same as the rights arising from every other of those membership interests in that class; and


    (c) each of those membership interests in a particular class is distinct from each of those membership interests in another class; and


    (d) the trustee of the AMIT has made a choice for the purposes of this paragraph that applies to the income year.

    276-20(2)    
    For the purposes of this Division (other than this Subdivision), treat each class of those *membership interests in the *AMIT as being a separate AMIT for that income year.

    276-20(3)    
    For the purposes of this Division, allocate assessable income, *exempt income, *non-assessable non-exempt income, *tax losses, *net capital losses and other similar amounts in respect of the *AMIT between each of the separate classes mentioned in subsection (1) on a fair and reasonable basis.

    Making of choice by trustee

    276-20(4)    
    A choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(d) applies to the income year for which it is made and every subsequent income year.

    276-20(5)    
    A choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(d) cannot be revoked.

    Subdivision 276-B - Member ' s vested and indefeasible interest in share of income and capital of AMIT  

    Guide to Subdivision 276-B

    SECTION 276-50   What this Subdivision is about  


    An AMIT for an income year is treated as a fixed trust. A member of the AMIT in respect of the income year istreated as having a vested and indefeasible interest in a share of the income and capital of the AMIT throughout the income year.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    276-55 AMIT taken to be fixed trust and member taken to have vested and indefeasible interest in income and capital

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 276-55  

    276-55   AMIT taken to be fixed trust and member taken to have vested and indefeasible interest in income and capital  


    For the purposes of this Act:


    (a) treat an *AMIT for an income year as a *fixed trust; and


    (b) treat an entity that is a *member of the AMIT in respect of the income year as having a vested and indefeasible interest in a share of the income and capital of the AMIT throughout the income year.

    Subdivision 276-C - Taxation etc. of member components  

    Guide to Subdivision 276-C

    SECTION 276-75   What this Subdivision is about  


    Amounts related to income and tax offsets of an AMIT, of a particular tax character, are attributed to members of the AMIT on the basis of their determined member components of that tax character.

    This attribution does not apply to the extent that amounts have been withheld etc. in relation to those components under Subdivision 12-F , 12-H or 12A-C in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    The trustee of an AMIT that is not a withholding MIT may be liable to pay income tax in respect of a determined member component of a foreign resident member (including where that member is acting in the capacity of a trustee). As a result, the member may be entitled to a tax offset.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Taxation etc. of member on determined member components
    276-80 Member ' s assessable income or tax offsets for determined member components - general rules
    276-85 Member ' s assessable income or tax offsets for determined member components - specific rules
    276-90 Commissioner ' s determination as to status of member as qualified person
    276-95 Relationship between section 276-80 and withholding rules
    276-100 Relationship between section 276-80 and other charging provisions in this Act
    Foreign resident members - taxation of trustee and corresponding tax offset for members
    276-105 Trustee taxed on foreign resident ' s determined member components
    276-110 Refundable tax offset for foreign resident member - member that is not a trustee
    Special rule for interposed custodian
    276-115 Custodian interposed between AMIT and member

    Taxation etc. of member on determined member components

    SECTION 276-80   Member ' s assessable income or tax offsets for determined member components - general rules  


    Components of income character

    276-80(1)    
    Subsection (2) applies if a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year has, for the income year, a *determined member component of:


    (a) a character relating to assessable income; or


    (b) a character relating to *exempt income; or


    (c) a character relating to *non-assessable non-exempt income.

    276-80(2)    
    For the purpose of working out the effects mentioned in subsection (3) for the *member, treat the member as having derived, received or made the amount reflected in the *determined member component:


    (a) in the member ' s own right (rather than as a member of a trust); and


    (b) in the same circumstances as the *AMIT derived, received or made that amount, to the extent that those circumstances gave rise to the particular character of that component.

    276-80(3)    
    The effects are as follows:


    (a) including an amount in the assessable income of the *member;


    (b) including an amount in the *exempt income of the member;


    (c) including an amount in the *non-assessable non-exempt income of the member;


    (d) determining whether the member has made a *capital gain from a *CGT event;


    (e) determining the extent to which the member ' s *net capital loss has been *utilised.

    Components of tax offset character

    276-80(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies if a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year has, for the income year, a *determined member component of a character relating to a *tax offset.

    276-80(5)    
    For the purpose of working out the effects mentioned in subsection (6) for the *member, treat the member as having paid or received the amount reflected in the *determined member component:


    (a) in the member ' s own right (rather than as a member of a trust); and


    (b) in the same circumstances as the *AMIT paid or received that amount.

    276-80(6)    
    The effects are as follows:


    (a) entitling the member to a *tax offset;


    (b) entitling the member to a credit under Division 18 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 276-85   Member ' s assessable income or tax offsets for determined member components - specific rules  

    276-85(1)    
    This section makes clarifications and modifications of the operation of section 276-80 in respect of a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year.

    276-85(2)    
    For the purposes of this Act, if an amount is included in the *member ' s assessable income because of the operation of this section, treat that amount as being so included because of the operation of subsection 276-80(2) .

    Discount capital gains

    276-85(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies if the *member has, for the income year, a *determined member component of the character of:


    (a) a *discount capital gain from a *CGT asset that is *taxable Australian property; or


    (b) a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

    276-85(4)    
    For the purposes of section 276-80 and this section, treat the amount of the component as being double what it would be apart from this subsection.

    Franking credit gross-up

    276-85(5)    
    Subsection (6) applies if the *member has, for the income year, a *determined member component (the franking credit gross-up component ) of the character of assessable income under subsection 207-20(1) (franking credit gross-up).

    276-85(6)    
    For the purposes of subsection 207-20(1) (franking credit gross-up), treat the reference in that subsection to the amount of the *franking credit on the distribution as instead being a reference to the amount of the franking credit gross-up component.

    Limitation on circumstances in paragraph 276-80(2)(b)

    276-85(7)    
    The circumstances mentioned in paragraph 276-80(2)(b) or (5)(b) do not include the following:


    (a) the residence of the trustee of the *AMIT;


    (b) the place of the central management and control of the AMIT.

    SECTION 276-90   Commissioner ' s determination as to status of member as qualified person  

    276-90(1)    
    Subsection (2) applies to a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year if:


    (a) the AMIT is specified in a determination under subsection (3); and


    (b) the income year is specified in the determination; and


    (c) the member:


    (i) is specified in the determination; or

    (ii) is included in a class of members specified in the determination.

    276-90(2)    
    Treat the *member as not being a qualified person in relation to a distribution in relation to the *AMIT for the income year, for the purposes of Division 1A of former Part IIIAA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    276-90(3)    
    For the purposes of this section, the Commissioner may make a determination in writing that identifies any of the following:


    (a) a specified *member of a specified *AMIT;


    (b) a specified class of members of a specified AMIT.

    276-90(4)    
    The determination may specify one or more income years.

    276-90(5)    
    In deciding whether to make a determination under subsection (3), the Commissioner may have regard to any of the following:


    (a) arrangements (if any) entered into by the *member that directly or indirectly reduce the economic exposure of the member to changes in the value of the *membership interests held by the member in the *AMIT;


    (b) the lack of such arrangements;


    (c) the length of time that the member has been a member of the AMIT;


    (d) any other matter that the Commissioner considers relevant.

    276-90(6)    
    A determination under subsection (3) is not a legislative instrument.

    276-90(7)    
    If an entity to whom a determination relates is dissatisfied with the determination, the entity may object against it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 276-95   Relationship between section 276-80 and withholding rules  

    276-95(1)    
    Subsection 276-80(2) does not apply to the extent that the *determined member component is reflected in an *AMIT DIR payment or a *fund payment, if an amount in respect of the payment:


    (a) has been withheld from the payment under Subdivision 12-F or 12-H in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 ; or


    (b) would be so withheld apart from an exemption from a requirement to withhold under Subdivision 12-F in that Schedule; or


    (c) has been paid under Division 12A in that Schedule; or


    (d) would be so paid apart from an exemption from a requirement to withhold under Subdivision 12-F in that Schedule.

    276-95(2)    
    However, if the *determined member component is reflected in a *fund payment, subsection (1) applies only to the extent to which an amount attributable to the fund payment is treated under section 840-815 as not assessable income and not *exempt income.

    276-95(3)    
    Subsection 276-80(2) does not affect the operation of the following:


    (a) Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;


    (b) Subdivision 840-M of this Act;


    (c) Division 12 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note:

    See Division 12A in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for provisions about withholding tax that apply specifically to AMITs.


    SECTION 276-100   Relationship between section 276-80 and other charging provisions in this Act  

    276-100(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) an amount is included in the assessable income of a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year in respect of the member ' s interest in the AMIT; and


    (b) that amount is so included otherwise than because of the operation of subsection 276-80(2) .

    276-100(2)    
    Reduce the amount included in the assessable income of the *member as mentioned in subsection (1) to the extent (if any) that a corresponding amount is included in the assessable income of the member in respect of the member ' s interest in the *AMIT because of the operation of subsection 276-80(2) .

    276-100(3)    
    To avoid doubt, this section is subject to section 230-20 (financial arrangements).

    Foreign resident members - taxation of trustee and corresponding tax offset for members

    SECTION 276-105   Trustee taxed on foreign resident ' s determined member components  

    276-105(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year has, for the income year, a *determined member component of a character relating to assessable income in respect of the AMIT; and


    (b) either:


    (i) unless subparagraph (ii) applies - the member is a foreign resident at the end of the income year; or

    (ii) if the member is, in respect of that determined member component, a beneficiary in the capacity of a trustee of another trust - a trustee of the other trust is a foreign resident at the end of the income year; and


    (c) the AMIT is not a *withholding MIT.

    276-105(2)    
    The trustee of the *AMIT is to be assessed and is liable to pay income tax:


    (a) if subparagraph (1)(b)(i) applies and the *member is not a company - in respect of the amount mentioned in subsection (3) as if it were the income of an individual and were not subject to any deduction; or


    (b)if subparagraph (1)(b)(i) applies and the member is a company - in respect of the amount mentioned in subsection (3) at the rate declared by the Parliament for the purposes of this paragraph; or


    (c) if subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) applies - in respect of the amount mentioned in subsection (4) or (5) at the rate declared by the Parliament for the purposes of this paragraph.

    Note:

    The rates are set out in the following provisions:

  • (a) for paragraph (a) - subsection 12(6A) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 and Schedule 10A to that Act;
  • (b) for paragraph (b) - paragraph 28A(a) of that Act;
  • (c) for paragraph (c) - paragraph 28A(b) of that Act.

  • 276-105(3)    
    The amount is the *determined member component, to the extent that the component:


    (a) is attributable to a period when the *member was an Australian resident; or


    (b) is attributable to a period when the member was not an Australian resident and is attributable to sources in Australia.

    276-105(4)    
    The amount is the *determined member component, to the extent that the component is attributable to sources in Australia.

    276-105(5)    
    For the purposes of subsection (4), treat the entire amount of the *determined member component as not being attributable to sources in Australia if it is of the character of:


    (a) a *discount capital gain from a *CGT asset that is not *taxable Australian property; or


    (b) a *capital gain (other than a discount capital gain) from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

    Exception for component reflected in AMIT DIR payment or fund payment

    276-105(6)    
    Subsection (2) does not apply to the extent that the *determined member component is reflected in an *AMIT DIR payment or a *fund payment, if an amount in respect of the payment:


    (a) has been withheld from the payment under Subdivision 12-F or 12-H in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 ; or


    (b) would be so withheld apart from an exemption from a requirement to withhold under Subdivision 12-F in that Schedule; or


    (c) has been paid under Division 12A in that Schedule; or


    (d) would be so paid apart from an exemption from a requirement to withhold under Subdivision 12-F in that Schedule.

    Gross-up for discount capital gain

    276-105(7)    
    Subsection (8) applies if a *determined member component is of the character of:


    (a) a *discount capital gain from a *CGT asset that is *taxable Australian property; or


    (b) a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

    276-105(8)    
    For the purposes of this section, treat the amount of the component as being double what it would be apart from this subsection.

    SECTION 276-110   Refundable tax offset for foreign resident member - member that is not a trustee  

    276-110(1)    
    This section applies if a trustee is assessed and liable to pay income tax under section 276-105 in respect of a *member because of paragraph 276-105(2)(a) or (b).

    276-110(2)    
    The *member is entitled to a *tax offset for the income year equal to the tax paid by the trustee in accordance with subsection 276-105(2) .

    Note:

    The tax offset is subject to the refundable tax offset rules: see section 67-23 .


    Special rule for interposed custodian

    SECTION 276-115   Custodian interposed between AMIT and member  

    276-115(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a trust that is a *custodian is a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year; and


    (b) the custodian has, for the income year, a *determined member component of a particular character for the AMIT; and


    (c) the custodian is interposed between the AMIT and another entity (the subsequent recipient ); and


    (d) the subsequent recipient:


    (i) starts to have, at a time in the income year, an entitlement to an amount that is reasonably attributable to all or part of the determined member component; or

    (ii) would start to have, at a time in the income year, such an entitlement if the determined member component were an actual payment of an amount.

    276-115(2)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, reduce the *custodian ' s *determined member component by the amount of the entitlement mentioned in subparagraph (1)(d)(i) or (ii).

    Note:

    This subsection may operate to reduce the amount of the determined member component multiple times if there is more than one subsequent recipient in respect of which the requirements in paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) are satisfied.


    276-115(3)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision:


    (a) treat the subsequent recipient as being a *member of the *AMIT in respect of the income year; and


    (b) treat the subsequent recipient as having, for the income year, a *determined member component for the AMIT that:


    (i) is of the character mentioned in paragraph (1)(b); and

    (ii) is equal to the amount of the entitlement mentioned in subparagraph (1)(d)(i) or (ii).

    Subdivision 276-D - Member components  

    Guide to Subdivision 276-D

    SECTION 276-200   What this Subdivision is about  


    A member ' s member component of a particular character is so much of an AMIT ' s determined trust component of that character (see Subdivision 276-E ) as is attributable to membership interests held by the member, worked out in accordance with certain requirements.

    A member ' s determined member component of a particular character is the amount stated to be the member ' s member component of that character in an AMMA statement (see Subdivision 276-H ).


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Member-level concepts
    276-205 Meaning of determined member component
    276-210 Meaning of member component

    Member-level concepts

    SECTION 276-205   Meaning of determined member component  

    276-205(1)    
    The determined member component of a particular character for an income year of a *member of an *AMIT in respect of the income year is the amount of the member ' s *member component of that character as reflected in the AMIT ' s latest *AMMA statement for the member for the income year.

    276-205(2)    
    Subsection (3) applies if:


    (a) the *member makes a choice for the purposes of this paragraph that complies with subsection (5); and


    (b) the member gives a copy of the choice to the Commissioner within 4 months after:


    (i) unless subparagraph (ii) applies - the end of the member ' s income year; or

    (ii) if the *AMIT gives the member a revised *AMMA statement for the income year at a time after the end of that income year - that time; and


    (c) the member gives a notice of the choice, in accordance with subsection (7), to the trustee of the AMIT within those 4 months.

    276-205(3)    
    Despite subsection (1), if the *determined member component of that character for the income year (disregarding this subsection) does not accord with subsections 276-210(2) , (3) and (4) , that determined member component is instead the member ' s *member component of that character for the income year.

    276-205(4)    
    For the purposes of subsection (3), in working out the member ' s *member component of that character for the income year, if the *trust component of that character differs from the *determined trust component of that character, treat the references in section 276-210 to determined trust component as instead being references to trust component.

    Example:

    The determined trust component exceeds the trust component because of an unintentional mistake by the trustee of the AMIT. As a result, a member ' s corresponding determined member component under subsection (1) exceeds what it would have been if the trustee had not made the mistake.

    If the member makes a choice under subsection (2), the amount of the determined member component will be determined according to the amount of the trust component.


    276-205(5)    
    The choice must:


    (a) be in writing; and


    (b) state the following matters:


    (i) the income year to which the choice relates;

    (ii) what the *member considers to be the member ' s *member component of that character for the income year;

    (iii) the reason why the member considers that the *determined member component of that character for the income year does not accord with subsections 276-210(2) , (3) and (4) .

    276-205(6)    
    The way the *member ' s *income tax return is prepared is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

    276-205(7)    
    The notice must:


    (a) be in writing; and


    (b) state the matters mentioned in paragraph (5)(b).

    SECTION 276-210   Meaning of member component  

    276-210(1)    
    This section applies to a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year and sets out how to work out the member ' s *member components for the year.

    Meaning of member component

    276-210(2)    
    The *member ' s member component of a character is so much of the *AMIT ' s *determined trust component of that character as is attributable to the *membership interests in the AMIT held by the member, worked out in accordance with the requirements in subsections (3) and (4).

    Attribution must be fair and reasonable and accord with constituent documents

    276-210(3)    
    The attribution must be worked out on a fair and reasonable basis, in accordance with the constituent documents of the *AMIT. This requirement is subject to the requirement in subsection (4).

    Attribution must not involve streaming of character amounts

    276-210(4)    
    The attribution must not attribute any part of a *determined trust component of a particular character to a *member ' s *membership interests because of the tax characteristics of the member.

    Safe harbour rules

    276-210(5)    
    Without limiting the scope of the requirements in subsection (3) and (4), an amount does not fail to be worked out in accordance with those requirements as mentioned in subsection (2) merely because the amount reflects the fact that:


    (a) the constituent documents of the *AMIT give the trustee of the AMIT the power to direct an amount arising from the sale of an asset to a particular *member, if:


    (i) the member redeems one or more *membership interests in the AMIT; and

    (ii) the direction of the amount is made to fund the redemption; and


    (b) the trustee exercises that power.

    276-210(6)    
    Without limiting the scope of the requirements in subsection (3) and (4), an amount does not fail to be worked out in accordance with those requirements as mentioned in subsection (2) merely because the amount reflects the fact that:


    (a) either:


    (i) an amount of an *under, relating to a base year (as mentioned in subsection 276-345(1) ) increases a *trust component of the *AMIT for a later income year under section 276-305 ; or

    (ii) an amount of an *over, relating to a base year (as mentioned in subsection 276-345(1) ) decreases a trust component of the AMIT for a later income year under section 276-305 ; and


    (b) an entity is a *member of the AMIT at a time in the later income year, but was not a member of the AMIT in respect of the base year.

    276-210(7)    
    Without limiting the scope of the requirements in subsection (3) and (4), an amount does not fail to be worked out in accordance with those requirements as mentioned in subsection (2) merely because the amount reflects the fact that:


    (a) the trustee made a *capital gain or *capital loss in an income year (for the purposes of working out the amount of a *trust component of the *AMIT for an income year in accordance with the rules in section 276-265 ); and


    (b) an entity was a *member of the AMIT in respect of the income year, but was not a member of the AMIT at the time the capital gain or capital loss was made.

    Subdivision 276-E - Trust components  

    Guide to Subdivision 276-E

    SECTION 276-250   What this Subdivision is about  


    An AMIT ' s trust component of a particular character is worked out on the basis of the AMIT ' s assessable income, exempt income, non-assessable non-exempt income and tax offsets (on the assumption that the AMIT were an Australian resident liable to pay tax).

    An AMIT ' s determined trust component of a particular character is the amount stated to be its trust component of that character in a document that meets certain requirements.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Trust-level concepts
    276-255 Meaning of determined trust component
    276-260 Meaning of trust component
    276-265 Rules for working out trust components - general rules
    276-270 Rules for working out trust components - allocation of deductions

    Trust-level concepts

    SECTION 276-255   Meaning of determined trust component  

    276-255(1)    
    An *AMIT ' s determined trust component of a particular character for an income year is the amount stated to be its *trust component of that character in a document that meets the requirements in subsection (2).

    276-255(2)    
    The requirements are as follows:


    (a) the document was created by the *AMIT;


    (b) the document states expressly the amount of the *trust component;


    (c) at a time after the document was created, the AMIT sent *AMMA statements for the income year to entities that were *members of the AMIT in respect of the income year;


    (d) the amount of the trust component stated in the document reflects the amount of the *determined member components reflected in those AMMA statements.

    276-255(3)    
    If, apart from this subsection, there are 2 or more documents that meet the requirements in subsection (2), treat the most recently created of those documents as being the only document that meets those requirements.

    Example:

    The income year for the AMIT ends on 30 June. The trustee creates a document stating the amount for the income year on 1 July. It sends all AMMA statements on 10 July. The trustee creates another document stating a different amount for the income year on 1 September. It sends revised AMMA statements reflecting that amount on 10 September. The document created on 1 September is the only document that meets the requirements in this section in respect of the amount for the income year.


    SECTION 276-260   Meaning of trust component  

    276-260(1)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that an *AMIT ' s amounts of assessable income, *exempt income, *non-assessable non-exempt income and *tax offsets for an income year are allocated, according to their character, into separate components for the purposes of this Act.

    276-260(2)    
    An *AMIT ' s trust component for an income year:


    (a) of a character relating to assessable income; or


    (b) of a character relating to *exempt income; or


    (c) of a character relating to *non-assessable non-exempt income; or


    (d) of a character relating to a *tax offset;

    is the amount of that character for the income year worked out for the AMIT in accordance with the rules in sections 276-265 and 276-270 .


    276-260(3)    
    This section is subject to Subdivision 276-F (which deals with the effect of *unders and *overs).

    276-260(4)    
    The rules in sections 276-265 and 276-270 apply only for the purposes of determining the amounts of *trust components.

    SECTION 276-265   Rules for working out trust components - general rules  


    General taxability and residence assumptions to be made

    276-265(1)    
    Work out the amount of the *trust component of each character in relation to the *AMIT assuming that the AMIT ' s trustee:


    (a) was liable to pay *tax; and


    (b) was an Australian resident.

    Trust components of assessable income character are net of deductions

    276-265(2)    
    The sum of all of the *trust components of a character relating to assessable income of the *AMIT for the income year equals the total assessable income of the AMIT for the income year, reduced by all deductions of the AMIT for the year. To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this subsection, apply subsection (1).

    276-265(3)    
    However, if that total assessable income does not exceed those deductions, the amount of each *trust component of a character relating to assessable income of the *AMIT for the income year is nil.

    SECTION 276-270   Rules for working out trust components - allocation of deductions  

    276-270(1)    
    An amount of a deduction that relates directly only to one or more amounts of assessable income can be deducted only against that amount or those amounts of assessable income. If there are 2 or more such amounts of assessable income, the amount of the deduction is allocated against those amounts on a reasonable basis.

    276-270(2)    
    If an amount of a deduction remains after applying the rules in subsection (1), the remainder can be deducted against other amounts of assessable income. The amount of the remainder is allocated against those amounts on a reasonable basis.

    276-270(3)    
    For the purposes of this section, determine whether a deduction relates directly to an amount of assessable income on a reasonable basis.

    Subdivision 276-F - Unders and overs  

    Guide to Subdivision 276-F

    SECTION 276-300   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision sets out how underestimates and overestimates of amounts at the trust level are carried forward and dealt with in later years. This is generally done on a character-by-character basis.

    An underestimate in an income year of a particular character results in an under of that character. An overestimate results in an over of that character.

    Unders and overs arise, and are dealt with, in the income year in which they are discovered.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Adjustment of trust component for unders and overs etc.
    276-305 Adjustment of trust component for unders and overs
    276-310 Rounding adjustment deficit increases trust component
    276-315 Rounding adjustment surplus decreases trust component
    276-320 Meaning of trust component deficit
    276-325 Trust component of character relating to assessable income - adjustment for cross-character allocation amount, carry-forward trust component deficit and FITO allocation amount
    276-330 Meaning of cross-character allocation amount and carry-forward trust component deficit
    276-335 Meaning of FITO allocation amount
    276-340 Trust component character relating to tax offset - taxation of trust component deficit
    Unders and overs
    276-345 Meaning of under and over of a character
    276-350 Limited discovery period for unders and overs

    Adjustment of trust component for unders and overs etc.

    SECTION 276-305   Adjustment of trust component for unders and overs  


    Object

    276-305(1)    
    The object of this section is to adjust an *AMIT ' s *trust component of a particular character for an income year to take account of any *unders or *overs of that character that the AMIT has in the income year.

    Unders increase trust component

    276-305(2)    
    If the *AMIT has an *under of that character in the income year (relating to any earlier income year), increase the amount of the *trust component by that under.

    Note:

    Those earlier income years are referred to in section 276-345 as base years.



    Overs decrease trust component

    276-305(3)    
    If the *AMIT has an *over of that character in the income year (relating to any earlier income year), decrease the amount of the *trust component by that over.

    Note:

    Those earlier income years are referred to in section 276-345 as base years.


    SECTION 276-310   Rounding adjustment deficit increases trust component  

    276-310(1)    
    If the *AMIT has a *rounding adjustment deficit of that character for the income year, increase the amount of the *trust component by the amount of that rounding adjustment deficit.

    276-310(2)    
    The *AMIT has a rounding adjustment deficit of a particular character for an income year if:


    (a) the AMIT has a shortfall for the previous income year under subsection 276-415(1) ; and


    (b) the shortfall results wholly or partly from the trustee of the AMIT rounding down amounts in working out *determined member components for the previous income year.

    The amount of the rounding adjustment deficit is the amount of the shortfall, to the extent that it results from that rounding down.


    SECTION 276-315   Rounding adjustment surplus decreases trust component  

    276-315(1)    
    If the *AMIT has a *rounding adjustment surplus of that character for the income year, decrease the amount of the *trust component by the amount of that rounding adjustment surplus.

    276-315(2)    
    The *AMIT has a rounding adjustment surplus of a particular character for an income year if:


    (a) the AMIT has an excess for the previous income year under subsection (3); and


    (b) the excess results wholly or partly from the trustee of the AMIT rounding up amounts in working out *determined member components for the previous income year.

    The amount of the rounding adjustment surplus is the amount of the excess, to the extent that it results from that rounding up.


    276-315(3)    
    The *AMIT has an excess under this subsection for an income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) the sum of all the *determined member components of all the *members of the AMIT of a particular character relating to assessable income, *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income for the income year;

    exceeds:


    (b) the *determined trust component of that character of the AMIT for the income year.

    276-315(4)    
    (Repealed by No 15 of 2019)


    276-315(5)    
    (Repealed by No 15 of 2019)


    SECTION 276-320  

    276-320   Meaning of trust component deficit  


    If the amount of the *trust component, worked out after applying sections 276-305 , 276-310 and 276-315 (and, if applicable, section 276-325 ), falls short of nil:


    (a) despite those provisions, the *trust component of that character is nil; and


    (b) the shortfall is the *AMIT ' s trust component deficit of that character for the income year.

    SECTION 276-325   Trust component of character relating to assessable income - adjustment for cross-character allocation amount, carry-forward trust component deficit and FITO allocation amount  


    Section applies to trust component of assessable income character

    276-325(1)    
    This section applies if the *trust component is of a character relating to assessable income.

    Cross-character allocation amount decreases trust component

    276-325(2)    
    If the *AMIT has a *cross-character allocation amount of that character for the income year, decrease the amount of the *trust component by that amount.

    Note:

    A cross-character allocation amount of a character for the income year is allocated from a trust component deficit of another character for the income year in accordance with subsections 276-330(2) , (3) and (4) .



    Carry-forward trust component deficit decreases trust component

    276-325(3)    
    If the *AMIT has a *carry-forward trust component deficit of that character for the income year, decrease the amount of the *trust component by the amount of that deficit.

    Note:

    A carry-forward trust component deficit for the income year is worked out in respect of the previous income year under subsection 276-330(5) .



    FITO allocation amount increases trust component with the character of foreign source income

    276-325(4)    
    If:


    (a) the character of the *trust component is a character relating to *ordinary income, or *statutory income, from a source other than an *Australian source; and


    (b) the *AMIT has a *FITO allocation amount for the income year;

    increase the amount of the trust component by that FITO allocation amount.

    Note:

    A FITO allocation amount for the income year is worked out in accordance with section 276-335 .


    SECTION 276-330   Meaning of cross-character allocation amount and carry-forward trust component deficit  


    Section applies to trust component of assessable income character

    276-330(1)    
    This section applies if the *trust component is of a character relating to assessable income.

    Cross-character allocation amount

    276-330(2)    
    The trustee may, in accordance with subsection (3), allocate a *trust component deficit (if any) of that character for the income year against the *AMIT ' s other trust components for that income year that are also of a character relating to assessable income.

    276-330(3)    
    For the trustee to make an allocation under subsection (2) the trustee:


    (a) must allocate that *trust component deficit between those other *trust components on a reasonable basis; and


    (b) cannot allocate more to a trust component than the amount of that trust component.

    276-330(4)    
    If the trustee allocates an amount under subsection (2) to a *trust component of a character for that income year, the amount allocated is a cross-character allocation amount of that character for that income year.

    Carry-forward trust component deficit

    276-330(5)    
    If there is an amount of that *trust component deficit remaining after allocating it in accordance with subsection (2), the remaining amount is the *AMIT ' s carry-forward trust component deficit of the character mentioned in subsection (1) for the next income year.

    SECTION 276-335   Meaning of FITO allocation amount  

    276-335(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the *AMIT has a *trust component of the character of *foreign income tax paid that counts towards a *tax offset under Division 770 ; and


    (b) the AMIT has a *trust component deficit for the income year of that character.

    276-335(2)    
    The *AMIT has a FITO allocation amount for the income year equal to the sum of:


    (a) that *trust component deficit; and


    (b) the product of:


    (i) that trust component deficit; and

    (ii) the *corporate tax gross-up rate.

    SECTION 276-340   Trust component character relating to tax offset - taxation of trust component deficit  

    276-340(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the *AMIT has a *trust component of a character relating to a *tax offset; and


    (b) the character of the trust component is not the character of *foreign income tax paid that counts towards a tax offset under Division 770 ; and


    (c) the AMIT has a *trust component deficit for the income year of that character.

    Offset trust component deficit (other than FITO character) taxed

    276-340(2)    
    The trustee of the *AMIT is liable to pay tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount of the *trust component deficit.

    Note:

    The tax is imposed by the Income Tax (Attribution Managed Investment Trusts - Offsets) Act 2016 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.


    Unders and overs

    SECTION 276-345   Meaning of under and over of a character  

    276-345(1)    
    This section sets out how to work out the amount (if any) of an *AMIT ' s *under or *over of a particular character for an income year (the base year ) in a later income year (the discovery year ).

    276-345(2)    
    The time (the discovery time ) at which this is worked out for the discovery year is just before the trustee works out the *determined trust component of that character for the discovery year.

    Note:

    This allows unders and overs to be included in the determined trust component for the discovery year: see section 276-305 .


    276-345(3)    
    Compare the following amounts:


    (a) the *AMIT ' s *trust component of that character for the base year, worked out on the basis of the trustee ' s knowledge at the discovery time (the discovery year amount );


    (b) this amount (the base year runningbalance ):


    (i) if the discovery year is the first income year after the base year - the AMIT ' s *determined trust component of that character for the base year; or

    (ii) otherwise - the discovery year amount worked out under a previous operation of this section for the most recent income year before the discovery year.


    A shortfall is an under

    276-345(4)    
    If the base year running balance falls short of the discovery year amount, the amount of the shortfall is an under of that character, for the base year, that the *AMIT has in the discovery year.

    An excess is an over

    276-345(5)    
    If the base year running balance exceeds the discovery year amount, the amount of the excess is an over of that character, for the base year, that the *AMIT has in the discovery year.

    SECTION 276-350  

    276-350   Limited discovery period for unders and overs  


    Despite section 276-345 , an *AMIT does not have an *under or an *over of a particular character for an income year (the base year ) if:


    (a) assuming the Commissioner made an assessment of the *trust component of that character on the day on which the document stating the AMIT ' s *determined trust component of that character for the base year was created; and


    (b) assuming the assessment had not been amended at the discovery time mentioned in subsection 276-345(2) for the under or over;

    section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 would prevent the assessment from being amended to take account of the under or over.

    Note:

    Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 specifies the usual period within which assessments may be amended.

    Subdivision 276-G - Shortfall and excess taxation  

    Guide to Subdivision 276-G

    SECTION 276-400   What this Subdivision is about  


    The trustee of an AMIT is liable to pay income tax on certain amounts reflecting under-attribution of income or over-attribution of tax offsets.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Ensuring determined trust components are properly taxed
    276-405 Trustee taxed on shortfall in determined member component (character relating to assessable income)
    276-410 Trustee taxed on excess in determined member component (character relating to tax offset)
    276-415 Trustee taxed on amounts of determined trust component that are not reflected in determined member components
    Ensuring unders and overs are properly taxed
    276-420 Trustee taxed on amounts of under of character relating to assessable income not properly carried forward
    276-425 Trustee taxed on amounts of over of character relating to tax offset not properly carried forward
    Commissioner may remit tax under this Subdivision
    276-430 Commissioner may remit tax under this Subdivision

    Ensuring determined trust components are properly taxed

    SECTION 276-405   Trustee taxed on shortfall in determined member component (character relating to assessable income)  


    Income character shortfall

    276-405(1)    
    An *AMIT has a shortfall under this subsection for an income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) the *determined member component of a *member of the AMIT of a character relating to assessable income for the income year;

    falls short of:


    (b) the *member component of the member of that character for the income year.

    Liability to tax

    276-405(2)    
    The trustee is liable to pay income tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount that is the sum of each shortfall of the *AMIT under subsection (1) for the income year.

    Note:

    The rate is set out in subsection 12(11) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 .


    SECTION 276-410   Trustee taxed on excess in determined member component (character relating to tax offset)  

    276-410(1)    
    An *AMIT has an excess under this subsection for an income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) the *determined member component of a *member of the AMIT of a character relating to a *tax offset for the income year;

    exceeds:


    (b) the *member component of the member of that character for the income year.

    Liability to tax

    276-410(2)    
    The trustee is liable to pay tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount that is the sum of each excess of the *AMIT under subsection (1) for the income year.

    Note:

    The tax is imposed by the Income Tax (Attribution Managed Investment Trusts - Offsets) Act 2016 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.


    SECTION 276-415   Trustee taxed on amounts of determined trust component that are not reflected in determined member components  

    276-415(1)    
    An *AMIT has a shortfall under this subsection for an income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) the sum of all the *determined member components of all the *members of the AMIT of a particular character relating to assessable income, *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income for the income year;

    falls short of:


    (b) the *determined trust component of that character of the AMIT for the income year.

    Liability to tax

    276-415(2)    
    The trustee is liable to pay income tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount worked out as follows:


    (a) first, work out the sum of each shortfall of the *AMIT under subsection (1) for the income year;


    (b) next, work out the extent (if any) to which each of those shortfalls gives rise to a *rounding adjustment deficit (see subsection 276-310(2) );


    (c) next, subtract the result of paragraph (b) from the result of paragraph (a);


    (d) next, work out the extent (if any) to which the result of paragraph (c) is referable toone or more shortfalls under subsection 276-405(1) ;


    (e) next, subtract the result of paragraph (d) from the result of paragraph (c).

    Note:

    The rate is set out in subsection 12(12) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 .



    Gross-up for discount capital gain

    276-415(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies if a *determined member component is of the character of:


    (a) a *discount capital gain from a *CGT asset that is *taxable Australian property; or


    (b) a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

    276-415(4)    


    For the purposes of subsection (2), treat the amount of the shortfall under subsection (1) relating to the component as being double what it would be apart from this subsection.

    Ensuring unders and overs are properly taxed

    SECTION 276-420   Trustee taxed on amounts of under of character relating to assessable income not properly carried forward  

    276-420(1)    
    An *AMIT for an income year has a shortfall under this subsection for the income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) an *under of the AMIT of a character relating to assessable income in the income year for an earlier income year (the base year ) (as worked out by the trustee on the basis of the trustee ' s knowledge at the discovery time mentioned in subsection 276-345(2) );

    falls short of:


    (b) what the under would have been if it had been worked out on the basis of what the trustee should have known at that time.

    Liability to tax

    276-420(2)    
    The trustee is liable to pay income tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount that is the sum of each shortfall of the *AMIT under subsection (1) for the income year.

    Note:

    The rate is set out in subsection 12(13) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 .



    Adjustment for later unders relating to the samebase year

    276-420(3)    
    If there is a shortfall under subsection (1) for a particular character for an income year, for the purposes of applying paragraph 276-345(3)(b) (base year running balance) to a later income year, increase the amount mentioned in subparagraph 276-345(3)(b)(ii) (previous discovery year amount) for that character by the amount of the shortfall.

    276-420(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies if:


    (a) there is a shortfall under subsection (1) for a particular character for an income year; and


    (b) the *AMIT has an *under of that character in a later income year for the base year mentioned in subsection (1); and


    (c) the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) is reflected (in whole or in part) in the amount of the under.

    276-420(5)    
    Reduce the shortfall by the extent to which the *under in the later income year reflects the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

    SECTION 276-425   Trustee taxed on amounts of over of character relating to tax offset not properly carried forward  

    276-425(1)    
    An *AMIT for an income year has a shortfall under this subsection for the income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) an *over of the AMIT of a character relating to a *tax offset in the income year relating to an earlier income year (the base year ) (as worked out by the trustee on the basis of the trustee ' s knowledge at the discovery time mentioned in subsection 276-345(2) );

    falls short of:


    (b) what the over would have been if it had been worked out on the basis of what the trustee should have known at that time.

    Liability to tax

    276-425(2)    
    The trustee is liable to pay tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount that is the sum of each shortfall of the *AMIT under subsection (1) for the income year.

    Note:

    The tax is imposed by the Income Tax (Attribution Managed Investment Trusts - Offsets) Act 2016 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.



    Adjustment for later overs relating to the same base year

    276-425(3)    
    If there is a shortfall under subsection (1) for a particular character for an income year, for the purposes of applying paragraph 276-345(3)(b) (base year running balance) to a later income year, decrease the amount mentioned in subparagraph 276-345(3)(b)(ii) (previous discovery year amount) for that character by the amount of the shortfall.

    276-425(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies if:


    (a) there is a shortfall under subsection (1) of a particular character relating to a *tax offset for an income year; and


    (b) the *AMIT has an *over of that character in a later income year relating to the base year mentioned in subsection (1); and


    (c) the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) is reflected (in whole or in part) in the amount of the over.

    276-425(5)    
    Reduce the shortfall by the extent to which the *over in the later income year reflects the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

    Commissioner may remit tax under this Subdivision

    SECTION 276-430  

    276-430   Commissioner may remit tax under this Subdivision  


    The Commissioner may remit the whole or any part of income tax for which a liability arises under this Subdivision if the Commissioner is satisfied that doing so does not result in a detriment to the revenue.

    Subdivision 276-H - AMMA statements  

    Guide to Subdivision 276-H

    SECTION 276-450   What this Subdivision is about  


    An AMIT for an income year must give each member of the AMIT in respect of the income year an AMIT member annual statement (or AMMA statement) for the income year.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    276-455 Obligation to give an AMMA statement
    276-460 AMIT member annual statement (or AMMA statement )

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 276-455   Obligation to give an AMMA statement  

    276-455(1)    
    An *AMIT for an income year must give each *member of the AMIT in respect of the income year an *AMMA statement for the income year.

    Note:

    Section 286-75 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 provides an administrative penalty for breach of this subsection.


    276-455(2)    
    The statement must be given no later than 3 months after the end of the income year.

    276-455(3)    
    However, the *AMIT need not give an *AMMA statement under subsection (1) to a *member if:


    (a) all of the member ' s *determined member components for the AMIT for the income year are nil; and


    (b) all of the member ' s *membership interests in the AMIT have an *AMIT cost base net amount for the income year of nil.

    276-455(4)    
    To avoid doubt, the *AMIT does not fail to comply with subsection (1) merely because:


    (a) the AMIT gives *AMMA statements for the income year to *members in accordance with subsection (1) by the time required under subsection (2); and


    (b) after that time, the AMIT gives those members further AMMA statements for the income year that replace the AMMA statements mentioned in paragraph (a).

    SECTION 276-460   AMIT member annual statement (or AMMA statement )  

    276-460(1)    
    An AMIT member annual statement (or AMMA statement ) is a statement made by an *AMIT for an income year in accordance with this section.

    276-460(2)    
    The statement must:


    (a) include information that reflects the amount and character of each *member component of the *member for the income year; and


    (b) state what the trustee reasonablyestimates to be the amount of the excess or shortfall mentioned in section 104-107C (AMIT cost base net amount) for the income year in respect of the *CGT asset that is the member ' s unit or interest in the *AMIT.

    276-460(3)    
    The statement is not an AMMA statement if the *AMIT fails to give it to the *member to whom it is addressed within 4 years after the end of the income year.

    Note:

    The AMIT must give each member an AMMA statement for the income year no later than 3 months after the end of the income year (see section 276-455 ).


    Subdivision 276-J - Debt-like trust instruments  

    Guide to Subdivision 276-J

    SECTION 276-500   What this Subdivision is about  


    A debt-like trust instrument in an AMIT is treated as a debt interest in the AMIT. A distribution in relation to the instrument is treated as interest for the purposes of provisions relating to interest withholding tax, and may be treated as a deduction in working out the trust components of the AMIT.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    276-505 Meaning of debt-like trust instrument
    276-510 Debt-like trust instruments treated as debt interests etc.
    276-515 Distribution on debt-like trust instrument could be deductible in working out trust components

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 276-505   Meaning of debt-like trust instrument  

    276-505(1)    
    An instrument that gives rise to an interest in a trust is a debt-like trust instrument in relation to the trust if:


    (a) the amount of any distribution relating to the interest is fixed, at the time the interest is created, by reference to the amount subscribed for the interest; and


    (b) any distribution relating to the interest is made solely at the discretion of the trustee of the trust; and


    (c) rights to distributions of capital or profits arising from all interests in the trust that are in the same *class as the interest, rank above all such rights arising from other interests in the trust (other than those covered under subsection (2)) if:


    (i) the trust ceases to exist; or

    (ii) where the trust is a *managed investment scheme - the scheme is under administration or is being wound up; and


    (d) in a case where, in relation to a particular period, the trustee of the trust does not make a distribution relating to the interest - making a distribution of any of the following kinds, in relation to that period, is prohibited by the constituent documents of the trust:


    (i) a distribution relating to any membership interest in the trust;

    (ii) a distribution relating to a membership interest in another entity, if that interest is stapled together with a membership interest in the trust.

    276-505(2)    
    This subsection covers an interest in the trust that:


    (a) is not a *membership interest in the trust; or


    (b) satisfies the requirements in paragraphs (1)(a) and (b).

    SECTION 276-510   Debt-like trust instruments treated as debt interests etc.  

    276-510(1)    
    For the purposes of this Act:


    (a) treat a *debt-like trust instrument in relation to an *AMIT as a *debt interest in the AMIT; and


    (b) treat a distribution on a debt-like trust instrument in relation to an AMIT as a cost incurred by the AMIT in relation to a debt interest issued by the AMIT.

    276-510(2)    
    If a trust is an *AMIT for an income year (disregarding this subsection), paragraph (1)(a) applies for the purposes of:


    (a) determining whether the trust is a *managed investment trust in relation to the income year; and


    (b) determining whether the trust is an AMIT for the income year.

    276-510(3)    
    For the purposes of Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , if an entity is the holder of a *debt-like trust instrument in an *AMIT, treat a distribution to the entity in accordance with the instrument as interest.

    SECTION 276-515   Distribution on debt-like trust instrument could be deductible in working out trust components  

    276-515(1)    
    If an entity is the holder of a *debt-like trust instrument in relation to an *AMIT, for the purposes of sections 276-265 and 276-270 , treat a distribution to the entity in accordance with the instrument as a *return that the AMIT pays or provides on a *debt interest.

    276-515(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard the distribution to the extent (if any) that it is referable to any of the following:


    (a) *exempt income of the *AMIT;


    (b) *non-assessable non-exempt income of the AMIT.

    Subdivision 276-K - Ceasing to be an AMIT  

    Guide to Subdivision 276-K

    SECTION 276-800   What this Subdivision is about  


    If a trust ceases to be an AMIT, and discovers an under or over from an income year when it was an AMIT, the under or over will have taxation consequences for the trust in the discovery year.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    276-805 Application of Subdivision to former AMIT
    276-810 Continue to work out trust components, unders, overs etc.
    276-815 Effect of increase
    276-820 Effect of decrease

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 276-805  

    276-805   Application of Subdivision to former AMIT  


    This Subdivision applies if:


    (a) a trust was an *AMIT for an income year; and


    (b) the trust is not an AMIT for a later income year (the discovery year ).

    SECTION 276-810   Continue to work out trust components, unders, overs etc.  

    276-810(1)    
    For the purposes of this section, assume that the trust is an *AMIT for the discovery year.

    276-810(2)    
    If the trust has an *under or *over of a character in the discovery year for an earlier income year when the trust was an *AMIT, work out the extent to which the under or over:


    (a) increases the amount of the AMIT ' s *trust component of that character for the discovery year; or


    (b) decreases the amount of the AMIT ' s trust component of that character for the discovery year.

    SECTION 276-815   Effect of increase  

    276-815(1)    
    This section applies if there is an increase as mentioned in paragraph 276-810(2)(a) .

    276-815(2)    
    If the character mentioned in subsection 276-810(2) relates to assessable income, treat the amount of the increase as assessable income of the trust for the discovery year.

    276-815(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies if the character mentioned in subsection 276-810(2) is the character of:


    (a) a *discount capital gain from a *CGT asset that is *taxable Australian property; or


    (b) a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

    276-815(4)    
    For the purposes of subsection (2), treat the amount of the increase as being double what it would be apart from this subsection.

    276-815(5)    
    If that character relates to *exempt income, treat the amount of the increase as exempt income of the trust for the discovery year.

    276-815(6)    
    If that character relates to *non-assessable non-exempt income, treat the amount of the increase as non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust for the discovery year.

    276-815(7)    
    If that character relates to a *tax offset, treat the amount of the increase as a tax offset of the trust for the discovery year of a kind corresponding to that character (in addition to any other tax offsets of that kind that the trust may have for the discovery year).

    SECTION 276-820   Effect of decrease  

    276-820(1)    
    This section applies if there is a decrease as mentioned in paragraph 276-810(2)(b) .

    276-820(2)    
    If the character mentioned in subsection 276-810(2) relates to assessable income:


    (a) in the case of a character of:


    (i) a *discount capital gain from a *CGT asset that is *taxable Australian property; or

    (ii) a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property;

    treat half the amount of the decrease as a *capital loss of the trust for the discovery year; or


    (b) in the case of a character of:


    (i) a *capital gain (other than a discount capital gain) from a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property; or

    (ii) a capital gain (other than a discount capital gain) from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property;

    treat the amount of the decrease as a capital loss of the trust for the discovery year; or


    (c) in any other case - treat the amount of the decrease as a deduction of the trust for the discovery year.

    276-820(3)    
    If that character relates to *exempt income, treat the amount of the decrease as reducing the exempt income of the trust for the discovery year.

    276-820(4)    
    If that character relates to *non-assessable non-exempt income, treat the amount of the decrease as reducing the non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust for the discovery year.

    276-820(5)    
    If that character relates to a *tax offset, treat the amount of the decrease as reducing the tax offset or offsets (the existing offset or offsets ) of the trust for the discovery year of a kind corresponding to that character.

    276-820(6)    
    If that character relates to a *tax offset and exceeds the total of the existing offset or offsets (before the reduction under subsection (5)):


    (a) unless paragraph (b) applies - the trustee is liable to pay tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the excess; or

    Note:

    The tax is imposed by the Income Tax (Attribution Managed Investment Trusts - Offsets) Act 2016 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.


    (b) if that character is the character of *foreign income tax paid that counts towards a tax offset under Division 770 - subsection (7) applies.

    276-820(7)    
    Increase the trust ' s assessable income for the discovery year by the sum of:


    (a) the excess mentioned in subsection (6); and


    (b) the product of:


    (i) that excess; and

    (ii) the *corporate tax gross-up rate.

    Treat the amount of that increase as assessable income from a source other than an *Australian source.


    PART 3-30 - SUPERANNUATION  

    Division 280 - Guide to the superannuation provisions  

    SECTION 280-1   Effect of this Division  

    280-1(1)    
    This Division is a *Guide.

    280-1(2)    
    Tax concessions in this Part are intended to encourage Australians to save in order to make provision for their retirement, recognising that superannuation investments, and the income from them, are quarantined for retirement.

    SECTION 280-5   Overview  

    280-5(1)    
    There are 3 phases in the tax treatment of superannuation, as follows:


    (a) the contributions phase;


    (b) the investment phase;


    (c) the benefits phase.

    280-5(2)    
    In the contributions phase, contributions are made to a superannuation plan in respect of a member of the plan.

    280-5(3)    
    In the investment phase, these contributions are invested by the superannuation provider.

    280-5(4)    
    In the benefits phase, these contributions, plus earnings from investing them, are usually paid as benefits to the member when he or she retires after reaching preservation age. In the event of death, the benefits are usually paid to the member's dependants.

    280-5(5)    
    There is also a regulatory scheme outside this Act that is relevant to the taxation treatment of superannuation. For example, other Acts set out prudential and operating standards for superannuation providers.

    Contributions phase  

    SECTION 280-10   Contributions phase - deductibility  


    Contributions that can be deducted

    280-10(1)    


    Employers can usually deduct contributions they make in respect of their employees. Individuals can usually deduct contributions they make in respect of themselves to most complying superannuation funds.

    Other contributions cannot be deducted

    280-10(2)    


    Other contributions cannot be deducted. These include contributions made by others in respect of individuals (such as contributions by a spouse or family member, or Government co-contributions).

    SECTION 280-15   Contributions phase - limits on superannuation tax concessions  

    280-15(1)    


    There is a limit to contributions that can be made in respect of an individual in a year that receive favourable tax treatment.

    280-15(2)    


    If concessional contributions exceed an indexed cap, the excess is included in the individual ' s assessable income and gives rise to a tax offset. The individual can release the excess concessional contributions from his or her superannuation interests. Unused cap can be carried forward for 5 years.

    280-15(3)    


    If non-concessional contributions exceed an indexed cap, the individual can request the release of either:


    (a) nothing; or


    (b) an amount equal to the sum of that excess and 85% of the associated earnings on that excess;

    from the individual ' s superannuation interests. Whether or not such a request is made, an amount relating to those associated earnings may be included in the individual ' s assessable income and may give rise to a tax offset.


    280-15(4)    


    In the absence of such a request, the Commissioner may require the relevant superannuation fund to release the amount described in paragraph (3)(b).
    Note:

    This can be done under subsection 131-15(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    280-15(5)    


    The individual is taxed:


    (a) on any shortfall between the amount released as described in subsection (3) or (4) and the excess referred to in subsection (3); or


    (b) on that excess, if the individual requested that nothing be released from the individual ' s superannuation interests.


    280-15(6)    


    The Commissioner may require the release of an amount equal to this tax liability from the individual ' s superannuation interests.
    Note:

    This can be done under subsection 131-15(3) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    Investment phase  

    SECTION 280-20   Investment phase  

    280-20(1)    
    Contributions that can be deducted are assessable income of the superannuation provider. Contributions that cannot be deducted are not assessable income of the superannuation provider. (There are some exceptions.)

    280-20(2)    
    Earnings on the investment of amounts in a superannuation plan are assessable income of the superannuation provider.

    280-20(3)    
    The superannuation provider's taxable income is generally taxed at the concessional rate of 15%.

    280-20(4)    
    However, superannuation providers pay no tax on earnings from the assets that support the payment of benefits in the form of income streams, once the income streams have commenced.

    Benefits phase  

    SECTION 280-25  

    280-25   Benefits phase - different types of superannuation benefit  


    Superannuation benefits can be drawn down as lump sums, income streams (such as pensions or annuities), or combinations of both. Different tax treatment may apply depending on whether a lump sum or income stream is paid.

    SECTION 280-30   Benefits phase - taxation varies with age of recipient and type of benefit  

    280-30(1)    
    The taxation of superannuation benefits depends primarily on the age of the member.

    280-30(2)    
    If the member is aged 60 or over, superannuation benefits (both lump sums and income streams) are tax free if the benefits have already been subject to tax in the fund (that is, where the benefits comprise a taxed element). This covers the great majority of superannuation members.

    280-30(3)    
    Where a superannuation benefit contains an amount that has not been subject to tax in the fund (an untaxed element), this element is subject to tax for those aged 60 or over, though at concessional rates. This is relevant generally to those people (for example, public servants), who are members of a superannuation fund established by the Australian Government or a state government.

    280-30(4)    
    If the member is less than 60, superannuation benefits may receive concessional taxation treatment, though the treatment is less concessional than for those aged 60 and over.

    280-30(5)    
    Superannuation benefits may also include a " tax free component " ; this component of the benefit is always paid tax free.

    280-30(6)    
    Additional tax concessions may apply when superannuation benefits are paid after a member's death.

    SECTION 280-35  

    280-35   Benefits phase - roll-overs  


    A member can " roll over " their superannuation benefits from one complying superannuation plan to another, or between different interests in the same plan. This is usually done to keep the benefits invested in the superannuation system, or to convert a lump sum to a superannuation income stream. No tax is generally payable until the benefits are finally drawn down.

    The regulatory scheme outside this Act  

    SECTION 280-40   Other relevant legislative schemes  

    280-40(1)    
    The Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 and the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 regulate the prudential and operating standards for superannuation providers. Concessional tax treatment is generally available only if providers comply with these standards.

    280-40(2)    
    Other legislative schemes relevant to superannuation include the following:


    (a) the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 , which requires that employers provide a minimum level of superannuation contributions for each of their eligible employees;


    (b) the Superannuation (Government Co-contribution for Low Income Earners) Act 2003 , which provides for Government co-contributions to low income earners' superannuation;


    (c) the Small Superannuation Accounts Act 1995 , which provides a facility to accept payments of superannuation guarantee shortfalls;


    (d) the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 , which provides for the payment of unclaimed superannuation money, and the maintenance of a register of lost members.

    Division 285 - General concepts relating to superannuation  

    SECTION 285-5   Transfers of property  

    285-5(1)    
    Any of the following payments covered by this Part can be or include a transfer of property:


    (a) a contribution;


    (b) a *superannuation lump sum.

    285-5(2)    
    The amount of the payment is or includes the *market value of the property.

    285-5(3)    
    The *market value is reduced by the value of any consideration given for the transfer of the property.

    Division 290 - Contributions to superannuation funds  

    Guide to Division 290  

    SECTION 290-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division sets out the rules for deductions and tax offsets for superannuation contributions.

    Subdivision 290-A - General rules  

    SECTION 290-5  

    290-5   Non-application to roll-over superannuation benefits etc.  


    This Division does not apply to a contribution that is any of the following:


    (a) a *roll-over superannuation benefit;


    (b) a *superannuation lump sum that is paid from a *foreign superannuation fund;


    (c) an amount transferred to a *complying superannuation fund or an *RSA from a scheme for the payment of benefits in the nature of superannuation upon retirement or death that:


    (i) is not, and never has been, an *Australian superannuation fund or a *foreign superannuation fund; and

    (ii) was not established in Australia; and

    (iii) is not centrally managed or controlled in Australia.


    (d) - (e) (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    SECTION 290-10   No deductions other than under this Division  

    290-10(1)    
    You cannot deduct under this Act an amount you pay as a contribution to a *complying superannuation fund or *RSA, except as provided by this Division.

    290-10(2)    
    You cannot deduct under this Act an amount you pay as a contribution to a *non-complying superannuation fund, except as provided by this Division.

    Note:

    Under Subdivision 290-B (Deduction of employer contributions and other employment-connected contributions), you may be able to deduct contributions you make to a non-complying fund that you believe to be a complying fund.


    Subdivision 290-B - Deduction of employer contributions and other employment-connected contributions  

    Deducting employer contributions

    SECTION 290-60   Employer contributions deductible  

    290-60(1)    
    You can deduct a contribution you make to a *superannuation fund, or an *RSA, for the purpose of providing *superannuation benefits for another person who is your employee when the contribution is made (regardless whether the benefits are payable to a *SIS dependant of the employee if the employee dies before or after becoming entitled to receive the benefits).

    Note:

    Other provisions of this Act and the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 may reduce, increase or deny the deduction in certain circumstances. For example, see sections 85-25 and 86-75 of this Act.


    290-60(2)    
    However, the conditions in sections 290-70 , 290-75 and 290-80 must also be satisfied for you to deduct the contribution.

    290-60(3)    
    You can deduct the contribution only for the income year in which you made the contribution.

    290-60(4)    


    You cannot deduct the contribution if it is an amount paid by you, as mentioned in regulations under the Family Law Act 1975 , to a *regulated superannuation fund, or to an *RSA, to be held for the benefit of your *non-member spouse in satisfaction of his or her entitlement in respect of the *superannuation interest concerned.

    SECTION 290-65   Application to employees etc.  

    290-65(1)    
    At a time when an individual is an employee of an entity within the expanded meaning of employee given by section 12 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 , this Subdivision applies as if the individual were an employee of the entity.

    290-65(2)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision:


    (a) in relation to a contribution by a partnership in respect of an employee of the partnership - treat the employee as an employee of the partnership; and


    (b) in relation to a contribution by a partner in a partnership in respect of an employee of the partnership - treat the employee as an employee of the partner.

    Conditions for deducting an employer contribution

    SECTION 290-70  

    290-70   Employment activity conditions  


    To deduct the contribution, the employee must be:


    (aa) your employee (within the expanded meaning of employee given by section 12 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 ); or


    (a) engaged in producing your assessable income; or


    (b) an Australian resident who is engaged in your business.

    SECTION 290-75   Complying fund conditions  

    290-75(1)    
    If the contribution was made to a *superannuation fund, at least one of these conditions must be satisfied:


    (a) the fund was a *complying superannuation fund for the income year of the fund in which you made the contribution;


    (b) at the time you made the contribution, you had reasonable grounds to believe that the fund was a complying superannuation fund for that income year;


    (c) at or before the time you made the contribution, you obtained a written statement (given by or on behalf of the trustee of the fund) that the fund:


    (i) was a resident regulated superannuation fund (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ); and

    (ii) was not subject to a direction under section 63 of that Act (which prevents a fund from accepting employer contributions).

    290-75(2)    
    However, the condition in paragraph (1)(b) or (c) cannot be satisfied if, when the contribution was made:


    (a) you were:


    (i) the trustee or the manager of the fund; or

    (ii) an *associate of the trustee or the manager of the fund; and


    (b) you had reasonable grounds to believe that:


    (i) the fund was not a resident regulated superannuation fund (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ); or

    (ii) the fund was operating in contravention of a regulatory provision (within the meaning of section 38A of that Act).

    290-75(3)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(b)(ii), a contravention of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 or regulations made under it is to be ignored unless the contravention is:


    (a) an offence; or


    (b) a contravention of a civil penalty provision of that Act or those regulations.

    290-75(4)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(b)(ii), it is sufficient if a contravention is established on the balance of probabilities.

    SECTION 290-80   Age related conditions  

    290-80(1)    


    To deduct the contribution:


    (a) you must have made the contribution on or before the day that is 28 days after the end of the month in which the employee turns 75; or


    (b) you must have been required to make the contribution by an industrial award, determination or notional agreement preserving State awards (within the meaning of the Fair Work (Transitional Provisions and Consequential Amendments) Act 2009 ) that is in force under an *Australian law; or


    (c) the contribution must reduce your charge percentage under section 22 or 23 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 in respect of the employee.


    290-80(2)    
    If only paragraph (1)(b) applies, you can deduct only the amount of the contribution that is required by the industrial award, determination or notional agreement preserving State awards.

    Note:

    An industrial agreement, such as an enterprise agreement within the meaning of the Fair Work Act 2009 , or a similar agreement made under a State law, is not an award or determination.


    290-80(2A)    


    If only paragraph (1)(c) applies, you can deduct only the amount of the contribution that reduces your charge percentage under section 22 or 23 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 in respect of the employee.

    290-80(2B)    


    If both paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) apply and paragraph (1)(a) does not apply, you can deduct only the greater of the following amounts (or only one of them if they are equal):


    (a) the amount of the contribution that is required by the industrial award, determination or notional agreement preserving State awards;


    (b) the amount of the contribution that reduces your charge percentage under section 22 or 23 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 in respect of the employee.

    Note:

    If paragraph (1)(a) applies, you can deduct the whole of the contribution (whether or not paragraph (1)(b) or (1)(c) also applies).


    290-80(3)    


    For the purposes of this section, a reference to a determination does not include a reference to a workplace determination made under the Fair Work Act 2009 or the Workplace Relations Act 1996 .

    Other employment-connected deductions

    SECTION 290-85   Contributions for former employees etc.  

    290-85(1)    
    Section 290-60 applies as modified by this section if a contribution you make in respect of another person:


    (a) reduces your charge percentage under sections 22 or 23 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 in respect of the other person because of section 15B of that Act; or


    (b) is a one-off payment in lieu of salary or wages that relate to a period of service during which the other person was your employee;


    (c) (Repealed by No 117 of 2010)


    290-85(1AA)    


    Section 290-60 also applies as modified by this section if:


    (a) a contribution you make in respect of another person relates to a period of service during which the other person was your employee; and


    (b) you make the contribution within 4 months after the person stops being your employee; and


    (c) you would have been entitled to a deduction in relation to the contribution if:


    (i) you had made it at a time when the other person was your employee; and

    (ii) the law that applied to your entitlement to the deduction at that time had been the same as it was at the time you actually made the contribution.

    290-85(1AB)    


    Section 290-60 also applies as modified by this section if:


    (a) a contribution you make in respect of another person relates to a period of service during which the other person was your employee; and


    (b) the contribution relates to a *defined benefit interest of the other person; and


    (c) you are at *arm ' s length with the other person in relation to the contribution; and


    (d) you obtain an *actuary ' s certificate that:


    (i) complies with the requirements (if any) specified by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph; and

    (ii) is to the effect that the contribution does not exceed the amount required by the relevant *superannuation fund to meet the fund ' s liabilities in connection with defined benefit interests; and


    (e) you would have been entitled to a deduction in relation to the contribution if:


    (i) you had made it at a time when the other person was your employee; and

    (ii) the law that applied to your entitlement to the deduction at that time had been the same as it was at the time you actually made the contribution.

    290-85(1A)    


    Section 290-60 also applies as modified by this section if:


    (a) you make a contribution in respect of another person at a time; and


    (b) the other person had been employed by a company or other entity before that time; and


    (c) section 290-90 would apply in relation to the contribution if the other person were employed by the company or entity at that time; and


    (d) the contribution:


    (i) reduces the company ' s or entity ' s charge percentage under section 22 or 23 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 in respect of the other person because of section 15B of that Act; or

    (ii) is a one-off payment in lieu of salary or wages that relate to a period of service during which the other person was the company ' s or entity ' s employee; or

    (iii) if subsection (1B) or (1C) applies - relates to a period of service during which the other person was the company ' s or entity ' s employee.

    290-85(1B)    


    This subsection applies if:


    (a) you make the contribution within 4 months after the person stops being the company ' s or entity ' s employee; and


    (b) you would have been entitled to a deduction in relation to the contribution if you had made it while the other person was the company ' s or entity ' s employee.


    290-85(1C)    


    This subsection applies if:


    (a) the contribution relates to a *defined benefit interest of the other person; and


    (b) you and the company are at *arm ' s length with the other person in relation to the contribution; and


    (c) you obtain an *actuary ' s certificate that:


    (i) complies with the requirements (if any) specified by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph; and

    (ii) is to the effect that the contribution does not exceed the amount required by the relevant *superannuation fund or *RSA to meet the fund ' s or RSA ' s liabilities in connection with defined benefit interests; and


    (d) you would have been entitled to a deduction in respect of the contribution if you had made it while the other person was the company ' s or entity ' s employee.


    290-85(2)    
    Treat the other person as your employee for the purposes of subsection 290-60(1) .

    290-85(3)    


    Despite subsection 290-60(2) :


    (a) if subsection (1) or (1AA) applies - the condition in section 290-70 must be satisfied at the most recent time when the other person was your employee (apart from subsection (2) of this section); or


    (b) if subsection (1A) applies:


    (i) the condition in section 290-70 need not be satisfied; and

    (ii) instead, the condition in subsection 290-90(4) must be satisfied at the most recent time when the other person was the company ' s or entity ' s employee.

    SECTION 290-90   Controlling interest deductions  

    290-90(1)    
    Section 290-60 applies as modified by this section if you make a contribution in respect of another person at a time, and at that time:


    (a) the other person is an employee of a company in which you have a controlling interest; or


    (b) you are connected to the other person in the circumstances set out in subsection (5); or


    (c) you are a company connected to the other person in the circumstances described in subsection (6).

    290-90(2)    
    Treat the other person as your employee at that time for the purposes of subsection 290-60(1) .

    Note 1:

    A deduction may be denied by section 85-25 if the employee is your associate.

    Note 2:

    Section 86-60 (read together with section 86-75 ) limits the extent to which superannuation contributions by personal service entities are deductions.


    290-90(3)    
    Despite subsection 290-60(2) , for you to deduct the contribution the condition in subsection (4) needs to be satisfied instead of the condition in section 290-70 .

    290-90(4)    


    The other person must be:


    (aa) an employee (within the expanded meaning of employee given by section 12 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 ) of the other person ' s employer; or


    (a) engaged in producing the assessable income of the other person ' s employer; or


    (b) an Australian resident engaged in the business of the other person ' s employer.


    290-90(5)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), the circumstances are:


    (a) you are the beneficial owner of shares in a company of which the other person is an employee, but you do not have a controlling interest in the company; and


    (b) you are at *arm ' s length with the other person in relation to the contribution; and


    (c) neither the other person, nor a *relative of the other person:


    (i) has set apart an amount as a fund, or has made a contribution to a fund, for the purpose of providing *superannuation benefits for you or a relative of yours; or

    (ii) has made an *arrangement under which the other person or relative will or may do so.


    Company controlling interest deductions

    290-90(6)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), the circumstances are:


    (a) the other person is an employee of an entity that has a controlling interest in the company; or


    (b) an entity that has a controlling interest in the company also has a controlling interest in a company of which the other person is an employee.

    SECTION 290-95   Amounts offset against superannuation guarantee charge  

    290-95(1)    
    You cannot deduct a contribution under this Act if you elect under subsection 23A(1) of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 that the contribution be offset against your liability to pay superannuation guarantee charge.

    Note:

    Section 26-95 restricts deductions for charges imposed by the Superannuation Guarantee Charge Act 1992 .


    290-95(2)    


    However, this section does not apply to such a contribution that is made during the amnesty period (within the meaning of subsection 74(3) of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992) , to the extent that the charge relates to a *superannuation guarantee shortfall for which you qualify for an amnesty under section 74 of that Act.

    Returned contributions

    SECTION 290-100   Returned contributions assessable  

    290-100(1)    
    Your assessable income includes a payment, or the value of a benefit, you receive in the income year so far as it reasonably represents the direct or indirect return of:


    (a) a contribution for which you or another entity have deducted or can deduct an amount for any income year; or


    (b) earnings on a contribution of that kind.

    Note:

    An example of an indirect return of a contribution is if the fund to which it was made transfers to another fund assets that include the contribution, and the other fund returns the contribution to the person who made it.


    290-100(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply if you receive the payment, or the value of the benefit, as a *superannuation benefit.

    Subdivision 290-C - Deducting personal contributions  

    SECTION 290-150   Personal contributions deductible  

    290-150(1)    
    You can deduct a contribution you make to a *superannuation fund, or an *RSA, for the purpose of providing *superannuation benefits for yourself (regardless whether the benefits are payable to your *SIS dependants if you die before or after becoming entitled to receive the benefits).

    Note:

    Other provisions of this Act and the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 may reduce, increase or deny the deduction in certain circumstances. For example, see section 26-55 of this Act.


    290-150(2)    


    However, the conditions in sections 290-155 , 290-165 , 290-167 , 290-168 , 290-169 and 290-170 must also be satisfied for you to deduct the contribution.

    290-150(3)    
    You can deduct the contribution only for the income year in which you made the contribution.

    290-150(4)    


    If the contribution is attributable in whole or part to a *capital gain from a *CGT event:

    (a)    if you disregarded all or part of the capital gain from the CGT event under subsection 152-305(1) and you were under 55 just before you made the choice mentioned in that subsection - you cannot deduct the contribution to the extent that it is attributable to the capital gain; or

    (b)    if a company or trust disregarded all or part of the capital gain from the CGT event under subsection 152-305(2) and you were under 55 just before the contribution was made - you cannot deduct the contribution to the extent that it is attributable to the capital gain.


    Conditions for deducting a personal contribution

    SECTION 290-155   Complying superannuation fund condition  

    290-155(1)    
    If the contribution is made to a *superannuation fund:


    (a) the fund must be a *complying superannuation fund, for the income year of the fund in which you made the contribution, that is not:


    (i) a *Commonwealth public sector superannuation scheme in which you have a *defined benefit interest; or

    (ii) a superannuation fund that would not include the contribution in its assessable income under section 295-190 ; or

    (iii) a superannuation fund of a kind prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subparagraph; and


    (b) the contribution must not be a contribution of a kind prescribed by the regulations that is made to a superannuation fund of a kind prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

    290-155(2)    
    In determining for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(a)(ii) whether section 295-190 would apply in relation to a contribution, disregard Subdivision 295-D .

    290-155(3)    
    The Commissioner may publish, in such manner as the Commissioner thinks fit, lists of:


    (a) the *superannuation funds to which subparagraph (1)(a)(i), (ii) or (iii) applies for an income year; and


    (b) the kinds of contributions to which paragraph (1)(b) applies for an income year, and the superannuation funds to which those contributions have been or would be made.

    290-160   (Repealed) SECTION 290-160 Maximum earnings as employee condition  
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)

    SECTION 290-165   Age-related conditions  


    Condition if you are under 18

    290-165(1)    
    If you were under the age of 18 at the end of the income year in which you made the contribution, you must have *derived income in the income year:

    (a)    from the carrying on of a *business; or

    (b)    

    attributable to activities, or circumstances, that result in you being treated as an employee for the purposes of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 (assuming that subsection 12(11) of that Act had not been enacted).

    Work test condition for ages 67 to 75

    290-165(1A)    


    If you made the contribution during the period starting on the day you turn 67 and ending on the day that is 28 days after the end of the month in which you turn 75:

    (a)    you must have been *gainfully employed for at least 40 hours in any period of 30 consecutive days during the income year in which the contribution was made; or

    (b)    if you do not satisfy paragraph (a) - you must satisfy the following requirements:


    (i) you were gainfully employed for at least 40 hours in any period of 30 consecutive days during the income year (the previous income year ) ending before the income year in which the contribution was made;

    (ii) you had a *total superannuation balance of less than $300,000 at the end of the previous income year;

    (iii) you have not deducted a contribution in the previous income year or any earlier income years on the basis of satisfying the requirements in this paragraph;

    (iv) no contribution made by you, or in respect of you, in the previous income year or any earlier income years, was accepted by a *superannuation fund or an *RSA under a prescribed provision of regulations made for the purposes of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 or the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 .


    Maximum age condition

    290-165(2)    


    You cannot deduct the contribution if it is made after the day that is 28 days after the end of the month in which you turn 75.

    SECTION 290-167  

    290-167   Contribution must not be a downsizer contribution  


    You cannot deduct the contribution if it is a contribution that is covered under section 292-102 (about downsizer contributions).

    SECTION 290-168  

    290-168   Contribution must not be a re-contribution under the first home super saver scheme  


    You cannot deduct the contribution if you notified the Commissioner about the contribution under section 313-50 (about contributing amounts to superannuation that were previously released under the *first home super saver scheme).

    SECTION 290-169  

    290-169   Contribution must not be a COVID-19 re-contribution  


    You cannot deduct the contribution if it is a contribution that is covered under section 292-103 (about COVID-19 re-contributions).

    SECTION 290-170   Notice of intent to deduct conditions  


    Deductibility of contributions

    290-170(1)    
    To deduct the contribution, or a part of the contribution:


    (a) you must give to the trustee of the fund or the *RSA provider a valid notice, in the *approved form, of your intention to claim the deduction; and


    (b) the notice must be given before:


    (i) if you have lodged your *income tax return for the income year in which the contribution was made on a day before the end of the next income year - the end of that day; or

    (ii) otherwise - the end ofthe next income year; and


    (c) the trustee or provider must have given you an acknowledgment of receipt of the notice.

    Validity of notices

    290-170(2)    
    The notice is not valid if at least one of these conditions is satisfied:


    (a) the notice is not in respect of the contribution;


    (b) the notice includes all or a part of an amount covered by a previous notice;


    (c) when you gave the notice:


    (i) you were not a member of the fund or the holder of the *RSA; or

    (ii) the trustee or *RSA provider no longer holds the contribution; or

    (iii) the trustee or RSA provider has begun to pay a *superannuation income stream based in whole or part on the contribution;


    (d) before you gave the notice:


    (i) you had made a contributions-splitting application (within the meaning given by the regulations) in relation to the contribution; and

    (ii) the trustee or RSA provider to which you made the application had not rejected the application;


    (e) if the contribution is made to a *superannuation fund - the condition in section 290-155 is not satisfied in relation to the fund and the contribution.



    Acknowledgment of notice

    290-170(3)    
    The trustee or provider must, without delay, give you an acknowledgment of a valid notice, subject to subsection (4).

    290-170(4)    


    The trustee or provider may refuse to give you an acknowledgment of receipt of a valid notice if the *value of the *superannuation interest to which the notice relates, at the end of the day on which the trustee or *RSA provider received the notice, is less than the tax that would be payable in respect of your contribution (or part of the contribution) if the trustee or provider were to acknowledge receipt of the notice.

    Application to successor funds

    290-170(5)    


    Subsections (1) to (4) and section 290-180 apply as if:


    (a) references in those provisions to the fund or *RSA were references to a *successor fund; and


    (b) references in those provisions to the trustee or *RSA provider were references to the trustee or RSA provider of the successor fund;

    if:


    (c) after making your contribution, all of the *superannuation interest to which the notice relates is transferred to the successor fund; and


    (d) you have not previously given a valid notice under this section to any *superannuation provider in relation to the contribution.


    290-170(6)    
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)


    SECTION 290-175  

    290-175   Deduction limited by amount specified in notice  


    You cannot deduct more for the contribution (or a part of the contribution) than the amount stated in the notice.

    SECTION 290-180   Notice may be varied but not revoked or withdrawn  

    290-180(1)    
    You cannot revoke or withdraw a valid notice in relation to the contribution (or a part of the contribution).

    290-180(2)    
    You can vary a valid notice, but only so as to reduce the amount stated in relation to the contribution (including to nil). You do so by giving notice to the trustee or the *RSA provider in the *approved form.

    290-180(3)    
    However, you cannot vary a valid notice after:


    (a) if you have lodged your *income tax return for the income year in which the contribution was made on a day before the end of the next income year - the end of that day; or


    (b) otherwise - the end of the next income year.

    290-180(3A)    


    The variation is not effective if, when you make it:


    (a) you were not a member of the fund or the holder of the *RSA; or


    (b) the trustee or *RSA provider no longer holds the contribution; or


    (c) the trustee or RSA provider has begun to pay a *superannuation income stream based in whole or part on the contribution.


    290-180(4)    
    Subsection (3) does not apply to a variation if:


    (a) you claimed a deduction for the contribution (or a part of the contribution); and


    (b) the deduction is not allowable (in whole or in part); and


    (c) the variation reduces the amount stated in relation to the contribution by the amount not allowable as a deduction.

    Application to successor funds

    290-180(5)    


    Subsections (2) and (3A) apply as if:


    (a) the reference in subsection (3A) to the fund or *RSA were a reference to a *successor fund; and


    (b) references in those subsections to the trustee or *RSA provider were references to the trustee or RSA provider of the successor fund;

    if, after a valid notice is given under section 290-170 in relation to the contribution, all of the *superannuation interest to which the notice relates is transferred to the successor fund.


    290-180(6)    
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)


    Subdivision 290-D - Tax offsets for spouse contributions  

    SECTION 290-230   Offset for spouse contribution  

    290-230(1)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset for an income year for a contribution you make in the income year to a *superannuation fund, or an *RSA, for the purpose of providing *superannuation benefits for your *spouse (regardless whether the benefits are payable to your spouse ' s *SIS dependants if your spouse dies before or after becoming entitled to receive the benefits).

    290-230(2)    
    You are entitled to the *tax offset only if:


    (a) he or she was your *spouse when you made the contribution; and


    (b) both you and your spouse were Australian residents when you made the contribution; and


    (c) the total of your spouse ' s:


    (i) assessable income, disregarding your spouse ' s *assessable FHSS released amount for the income year; and

    (ii) *reportable fringe benefits total; and

    (iii) *reportable employer superannuation contributions;
    for the income year is less than $40,000; and


    (d) you have not deducted and cannot deduct an amount for the contribution under section 290-60 (employer contributions); and


    (e) if the contribution is made to a *superannuation fund - it is a *complying superannuation fund for the income year of the fund in which you make the contribution.


    290-230(3)    
    You are not entitled to the *tax offset if, when you make the contribution, you are living separately and apart from your *spouse on a permanent basis.

    290-230(4)    


    You are not entitled to the *tax offset for an amount paid by you, as mentioned in regulations under the Family Law Act 1975 , to a *regulated superannuation fund, or to an *RSA, to be held for the benefit of your *non-member spouse in satisfaction of his or her entitlement in respect of the *superannuation interest concerned.

    290-230(4A)    


    You are not entitled to the *tax offset for an income year if:


    (a) your *spouse ' s *non-concessional contributions for the *financial year corresponding to the income year exceed your spouse ' s *non-concessional contributions cap for the financial year; or


    (b) immediately before the start of the financial year, your spouse ' s *total superannuation balance equals or exceeds the *general transfer balance cap for the financial year.


    290-230(5)    


    For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(c)(iii), reduce (but not below zero) the * reportable employer superannuation contributions by the amount of any * excess concessional contributions your * spouse has for the * financial year corresponding to the income year.

    SECTION 290-235   Limit on amount of tax offsets  

    290-235(1)    
    The total of the amounts of *tax offset to which you are entitled for contributions you make for an income year cannot exceed 18% of the lesser of the following:


    (a) $3,000 reduced by the amount (if any) by which the total mentioned in paragraph 290-230(2)(c) for the income year exceeds $37,000;


    (b) the sum of the *spouse contributions you make in the income year.


    290-235(2)    
    The maximum *tax offset to which you are entitled for an income year is $540, even if you are entitled to a tax offset for more than 1 *spouse.

    SECTION 290-240  

    290-240   Tax file number  


    If you are entitled to the *tax offset for the contribution, you may, with your *spouse's consent, quote your spouse's *tax file number to the trustee (or *RSA provider) of the *superannuation fund (or *RSA) to which the contribution is made.

    Division 291 - Excess concessional contributions  

    Guide to Division 291  

    SECTION 291-1   What this Division is about  


    There is a cap on the amount of superannuation contributions that may receive concessional tax treatment for an individual in a financial year.

    You can carry forward unused concessional contributions cap from the previous 5 financial years and use it to increase your cap in a later financial year (unless your total superannuation balance equals or exceeds $500,000).

    Superannuation contributions that exceed your concessional contributions cap are included in your assessable income for the corresponding income year.

    A tax offset compensates for the tax that generally applies to the contributions in the superannuation fund.

    Note:

    Part 2-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains rules about releasing the excess concessional contributions from superannuation.

    Subdivision 291-A - Object of this Division  

    SECTION 291-5  

    291-5   Object of this Division  


    The object of this Division is to ensure, in relation to concessional contributions to superannuation, that the amount of concessionally taxed * superannuation benefits that an individual receives results from contributions that have been made gradually over the course of the individual ' s life.
    Note:

    Division 292 has the same object, in relation to non-concessional contributions.

    Subdivision 291-B - Excess concessional contributions  

    Guide to Subdivision 291-B

    SECTION 291-10   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision includes excess concessional contributions in your assessable income and provides a tax offset.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    291-15 Excess concessional contributions - assessable income, 15 % tax offset
    291-20 Your excess concessional contributions for a financial year
    291-25 Your concessional contributions for a financial year

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 291-15  

    291-15   Excess concessional contributions - assessable income, 15 % tax offset  


    If you have * excess concessional contributions for a * financial year:

    (a)    an amount equal to the excess concessional contributions is included in your assessable income for your corresponding income year; and

    (b)    you are entitled to a * tax offset for that income year equal to 15 % of the excess concessional contributions.

    Note 1:

    This offset cannot be refunded, transferred or carried forward: see item 20 of the table in subsection 63-10(1) .

    Note 3:

    You can request the release of excess concessional contributions from superannuation: see Division 131 in that Schedule.

    SECTION 291-20   Your excess concessional contributions for a financial year  

    291-20(1)    
    You have excess concessional contributions for a * financial year if the amount of your * concessional contributions for the year exceeds your * concessional contributions cap for the year. The amount of the excess concessional contributions is the amount of the excess.

    291-20(2)    


    Your concessional contributions cap is:


    (a) for the 2017-2018 financial year - $25,000; or


    (b) for the 2018-2019 financial year or a later financial year - the amount worked out by indexing annually the amount mentioned in paragraph (a).

    Note:

    Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the amount of the cap: see section 960-285 .



    Five year carry forward of unused concessional contributions cap

    291-20(3)    


    However, your concessional contributions cap for the *financial year is increased in accordance with subsection (4) if:


    (a) your *concessional contributions for the year would otherwise exceed your concessional contributions cap for the year; and


    (b) your *total superannuation balance just before the start of the financial year is less than $500,000; and


    (c) you have previously unapplied *unused concessional contributions cap for one or more of the previous 5 financial years.


    291-20(4)    


    Apply your unapplied *unused concessional contributions cap for each of the previous 5 *financial years to increase your *concessional contributions cap (but not by more than the excess from paragraph (3)(a)).

    291-20(5)    


    For the purposes of increasing your *concessional contributions cap under subsection (4), apply amounts of *unused concessional contributions cap for previous *financial years in order from the earliest year to the most recent year.

    Your unused concessional contributions cap

    291-20(6)    


    You have unused concessional contributions cap for a *financial year if the amount of your *concessional contributions for the year falls short of your *concessional contributions cap for the year. The amount of the unused concessional contributions cap is the amount of the shortfall.

    291-20(7)    


    However, you do not have unused concessional contributions cap for a *financial year earlier than the 2018-2019 financial year.

    SECTION 291-25   Your concessional contributions for a financial year  

    291-25(1)    
    The amount of your concessional contributions for a * financial year is the sum of:


    (a) each contribution covered under subsection (2) ; and


    (b) each amount covered under subsection (3) .

    Note:

    For rules about defined benefit interests, see Subdivision 291-C .


    291-25(2)    
    A contribution is covered under this subsection if:

    (a)    it is made in the * financial year to a * complying superannuation plan in respect of you; and

    (b)    

    it is included in the assessable income of the * superannuation provider in relation to the plan, or, by way of a * roll-over superannuation benefit, in the assessable income of a * complying superannuation fund or * RSA provider in the circumstances mentioned in subsection 290-170(5) (about successor funds); and

    (c)    it is not an amount mentioned in subsection 295-200(2) ; and

    (d)    it is not an amount mentioned in item 2 of the table in subsection 295-190(1) ; and

    (e)    

    it is not an amount mentioned in subsection 99G(6) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 that is refunded in accordance with that subsection.

    291-25(3)    
    An amount in a * complying superannuation plan is covered under this subsection if it is allocated by the * superannuation provider in relation to the plan for you for the year in accordance with conditions specified in the regulations.

    291-25(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b) , disregard:

    (a)    table item 5.3 in section 50-25 (about income tax exemption for constitutionally protected funds); and

    (b)    Subdivision 295-D (about excluded contributions).


    Subdivision 291-C - Modifications for defined benefit interests  

    Guide to Subdivision 291-C

    SECTION 291-155   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision modifies the meaning of concessional contributions relating to defined benefits interests.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    291-160 Application
    291-165 Concessional contributions - special rules for defined benefit interests
    291-170 Notional taxed contributions
    291-175 Defined benefit interest

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 291-160  

    291-160   Application  


    This Subdivision applies if, in a * financial year, you have:


    (a) a * superannuation interest that is or includes a * defined benefit interest; or


    (b) more than one superannuation interest that is or includes a defined benefit interest.

    291-160(2)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    SECTION 291-165   Concessional contributions - special rules for defined benefit interests  

    291-165(1)    
    Despite section 291-25 , the amount of your concessional contributions for the * financial year is the sum of:


    (a) the contributions covered by subsection 291-25(2) , and the amounts covered by subsection 291-25(3) , to the extent to which they do not relate to the * defined benefit interest or interests; and


    (b) your * notional taxed contributions for the financial year in respect of the defined benefit interest or interests; and


    (c) the amount (if any) by which your *defined benefit contributions for the financial year in respect of the defined benefit interest or interests exceed those notional taxed contributions.

    Note:

    Section 291-370 prevents some contributions from causing your concessional contributions for a financial year to exceed the concessional contributions cap.


    291-165(2)    


    In working out your *defined benefit contributions for the *financial year for the purposes of paragraph (1)(c):


    (a) if Subdivision 293-E applies to you for the income year corresponding to the financial year - disregard subsection 293-150(3) ; and


    (b) if Subdivision 293-F applies to you - disregard subsection 293-195(2) .

    Note:

    Section 291-370 prevents some contributions from causing your concessional contributions for a financial year to exceed the concessional contributions cap.


    SECTION 291-170   Notional taxed contributions  

    291-170(1)    
    Your notional taxed contributions for a * financial year in respect of a * defined benefit interest has the meaning given by the regulations.

    Note:

    For transitional provisions about notional taxed contributions that were previously in former subsections 292-170(6) to (9) , see Subdivision 291-C of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    291-170(2)    
    Regulations made for the purposes of subsection (1) may provide for a method of determining the amount of the notional taxed contributions .

    291-170(3)    
    Regulations made for the purposes of subsection (1) may define the * notional taxed contributions, and the amount of notional taxed contributions, in different ways depending on any of the following matters:


    (a) the individual who has the * superannuation interest that is or includes the * defined benefit interest;


    (b) the * superannuation plan in which the superannuation interest exists;


    (c) the * superannuation provider in relation to the superannuation plan;


    (d) any other matter.

    291-170(4)    
    Regulations made for the purposes of subsection (1) may specify circumstances in which the amount of * notional taxed contributions for a * financial year is nil.

    291-170(5)    
    Subsections (2), (3) and (4) do not limit the regulations that may be made for the purposes of this section.

    SECTION 291-175   Defined benefit interest  

    291-175(1)    
    An individual ' s * superannuation interest is a defined benefit interest to the extent that it defines the individual ' s entitlement to * superannuation benefits payable from the interest by reference to one or more of the following matters:


    (a) the individual ' s salary, or allowance in the nature of salary, at a particular date or averaged over a period;


    (b) another individual ' s salary, or allowance in the nature of salary, at a particular date or averaged over a period;


    (c) a specified amount;


    (d) specified conversion factors.

    291-175(2)    
    However, an individual ' s * superannuation interest is not a defined benefit interest if it defines that entitlement solely by reference to one or more of the following:


    (a) * disability superannuation benefits;


    (b) * superannuation death benefits;


    (c) payments of amounts mentioned in paragraph 307-10(a) (temporary disability payments).

    Subdivision 291-CA - Contributions that do not result in excess contributions  

    Guide to Subdivision 291-CA

    SECTION 291-365   What this Subdivision is about  


    Some contributions and other amounts are treated as always being within your concessional contributions cap, and therefore cannot be excess concessional contributions.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    291-370 Contributions that do not result in excess contributions

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 291-370   Contributions that do not result in excess contributions  

    291-370(1)    
    In working out your *concessional contributions for a *financial year, treat the sum of the following as an amount equal to your *concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(2) for the financial year:


    (a) contributions made in respect of you for the financial year to a *constitutionally protected fund that would (disregarding this section) be concessional contributions;


    (b) if any of your *notional taxed contributions for the financial year:


    (i) are worked out under section 291-170 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ; or

    (ii) are not worked out under that section, but only because those notional taxed contributions did not meet the requirements of paragraph 291-170(2)(b) or (4)(b) of that Act;
    the amount of those notional taxed contributions;


    (c) if your *defined benefit contributions for the financial year (worked out excluding contributions and amounts covered by paragraph (a)) exceed your notional taxed contributions for the financial year (also worked out excluding contributions and amounts covered by paragraph (a)) - the amount of that excess;

    if that sum would otherwise exceed your concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(2) for the financial year.

    Note:

    This subsection does not take into account any increase in your concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(4).


    291-370(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), treat any amounts covered by subsection 291-25(3) or paragraph 291-165(1)(b) or (c) for the *financial year that relate to a *superannuation interest of yours in the fund as if they were contributions made in respect of you for the financial year to the fund.

    291-370(3)    
    This section has effect despite sections 291-25 and 291-165 of this Act and section 291-170 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Subdivision 291-D - Other provisions  

    Guide to Subdivision 291-D

    SECTION 291-460   What this Subdivision is about  


    The Commissioner has a discretion to disregard concessional contributions or allocate them to a different financial year.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    291-465 Commissioner ' s discretion to disregard contributions etc. in relation to a financial year

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 291-465   Commissioner ' s discretion to disregard contributions etc. in relation to a financial year  

    291-465(1)    
    The Commissioner may make a written determination that, for the purposes of working out the amount of your * excess concessional contributions for a * financial year, all or part of your * concessional contributions for a financial year is to be:


    (a) disregarded; or


    (b) allocated instead for the purposes of another financial year specified in the determination.

    Conditions for making of determination

    291-465(2)    
    The Commissioner may make the determination only if:


    (a) you apply for the determination in accordance with this section; and


    (b) the Commissioner considers that:


    (i) there are special circumstances; and

    (ii) making the determination is consistent with the object of this Division and Division 292 .

    291-465(2A)    


    Paragraph (2)(a) does not apply if:


    (a) the determination relates to a contribution that is an amount the Commissioner pays for your benefit under Part 8 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 ; and


    (b) the amount represents an amount of a charge payment (within the meaning of section 63A of that Act) paid as a result of a disclosure to which paragraph 74(1)(a) of that Act applies; and


    (c) the entity making the disclosure qualified, under section 74 of that Act, for an amnesty in relation to the *superannuation guarantee shortfall to which the charge payment relates.



    Matters to which regard may be had

    291-465(3)    
    In making the determination the Commissioner may have regard to the following:


    (a) whether a contribution made in the relevant * financial year would more appropriately be allocated towards another financial year instead;


    (b) whether it was reasonably foreseeable, when a relevant contribution was made, that you would have * excess concessional contributions or * excess non-concessional contributions for the relevant financial year, and in particular:


    (i) if the relevant contribution is made in respect of you by another individual - the terms of any agreement or arrangement between you and that individual as to the amount and timing of the contribution; and

    (ii) the extent to which you had control over the making of the contribution;


    (c) any other relevant matters.

    Requirements for application

    291-465(4)    
    The application:


    (a) must be in the * approved form; and


    (b) can only be made after all of the contributions sought to be disregarded or reallocated have been made; and


    (c) if you receive an * excess concessional contributions determination for the * financial year - must be given to the Commissioner within:


    (i) 60 days after receiving the determination; or

    (ii) a further period allowed by the Commissioner.


    Notification

    291-465(5)    
    The Commissioner must give you:


    (a) a copy of the determination; or


    (b) if the Commissioner decides not to make a determination - notice of that decision.

    291-465(6)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)



    Review

    291-465(7)    
    If you are dissatisfied with:


    (a) a determination made under this section in relation to you; or


    (b) a decision the Commissioner makes not to make such a determination;

    you may object against the determination, or the decision, as the case requires, in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    291-465(8)    
    To avoid doubt:


    (a) subject to subsection 14ZVB(3) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , you may also object, on the ground that you are dissatisfied with such a determination or decision, relating to all or part of your * concessional contributions for a * financial year:


    (i) under section 175A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 against an assessment made in relation to you for the corresponding income year; or

    (ii) under section 97-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 against an * excess concessional contributions determination made in relation to you for the financial year; and


    (b) for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977 , the making of a determination under this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax, and making a calculation of charge, under this Act.

    Division 292 - Excess non-concessional contributions  

    Guide to Division 292  

    SECTION 292-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division limits the superannuation contributions made in a financial year that receive concessional tax treatment.

    You become liable for tax if:

  • (a) your non-concessional contributions exceed an indexed cap; and
  • (b) a corresponding amount is not released from your superannuation interests.
  • An amount may be included in your assessable income, and you may become entitled to a tax offset, if your non-concessional contributions exceed that indexed cap.

    Subdivision 292-A - Object of this Division  

    SECTION 292-5  

    292-5   Object of this Division  


    The object of this Division is to ensure, in relation to non-concessional contributions to superannuation, that the amount of concessionally taxed * superannuation benefits that an individual receives results from contributions that have been made gradually over the course of the individual ' s life.
    Note:

    Division 291 has the same object, in relation to concessional contributions.

    Subdivision 292-B - Assessable income and tax offset  

    SECTION 292-15   What this Subdivision is about  


    An amount is included in your assessable income, and you are entitled to a tax offset, if:

  • (a) your non-concessional contributions exceed an indexed cap; and
  • (b) you are not liable to pay excess non-concessional contributions tax for the financial year on the full amount of the excess.
  • This amount included in your assessable income relates to:

  • (a) your associated earnings on those excess contributions; and
  • (b) any amounts that have been released from your superannuation interests.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    292-20 Amount in assessable income, and tax offset, relating to your non-concessional contributions
    292-25 Amount included in assessable income
    292-30 Amount of the tax offset

    SECTION 292-20  

    292-20   Amount in assessable income, and tax offset, relating to your non-concessional contributions  


    Your assessable income for an income year includes an amount, and you are entitled to a *tax offset for the income year, if:


    (a) you receive one or more *excess non-concessional contributions determinations for a *financial year that corresponds to the income year; and


    (b) you are not liable to pay *excess non-concessional contributions tax for the financial year on the full amount of the excess stated in the most recent of those determinations.

    SECTION 292-25   Amount included in assessable income  

    292-25(1)    
    The amount included in your assessable income for the income year is equal to the amount of associated earnings stated in the most recent of those determinations.

    292-25(2)    
    However, if:


    (a) the sum of any amounts paid in response to release authorities issued in relation to those determinations (the total amount ) is less than the amount of the excess stated in the most recent of those determinations; and


    (b) section 292-467 does not apply to you for the *financial year;

    the amount included in your assessable income for the income year is equal to the amount of associated earnings that would have been stated in that most recent determination if the total amount had been the amount of the excess stated in that determination.

    Note 1:

    The release authorities are issued under Division 131 , or former Division 96 , in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note 2:

    Any amounts paid in response to the release authorities are non-assessable non-exempt income (see section 303-15 or former sections 303-15 and 303-17 ).


    SECTION 292-30  

    292-30   Amount of the tax offset  


    The *tax offset is equal to 15% of the amount included in your assessable income for the income year under section 292-25 .
    Note 1:

    This tax offset compensates for any tax liability of the superannuation provider on earnings from investments made with the contributions making up the excess amount stated in the most recent determination.

    Note 2:

    This offset cannot be refunded, transferred or carried forward (see item 20 of the table in subsection 63-10(1) ).

    Subdivision 292-C - Excess non-concessional contributions tax  

    SECTION 292-75   What this Subdivision is about  

    This Subdivision defines non-concessional contributions and excess non-concessional contributions , and sets liability to pay excess non-concessional contributions tax.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    292-80 Liability for excess non-concessional contributions tax
    292-85 Your excess non-concessional contributions for a financial year
    292-90 Your non-concessional contributions for a financial year
    292-95 Contributions arising from structured settlements or orders for personal injuries
    292-100 Contribution relating to some CGT small business concessions
    292-102 Downsizer contributions
    292-103 COVID-19 re-contributions
    292-105 CGT cap amount

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 292-80  

    292-80   Liability for excess non-concessional contributions tax  


    You are liable to pay *excess non-concessional contributions tax imposed by the Superannuation (Excess Non-concessional Contributions Tax) Act 2007 if you have *excess non-concessional contributions for a *financial year.
    Note:

    The amount of the tax is set out in that Act.

    SECTION 292-85   Your excess non-concessional contributions for a financial year  


    Your excess non-concessional contributions

    292-85(1)    


    You have excess non-concessional contributions for a *financial year if:

    (a)    you receive one or more *excess non-concessional contributions determinations for the financial year; and

    (b)    

    the excess amount stated in the most recent of those determinations exceeds the sum of any amounts paid in response to release authorities issued in relation to those determinations; and

    (c)    section 292-467 of this Act does not apply to you for the financial year.

    Note:

    The release authorities are issued under Division 131 , or former Division 96 , in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    292-85(1A)    
    The amount of your excess non-concessional contributions is:

    (a)    

    if no amounts were paid as described in paragraph (1)(b) - the excess amount stated in that most recent determination; or

    (b)    otherwise - the amount of the excess worked out under paragraph (1)(b) .

    Note:

    Any excess non-concessional contributions determination you receive after the firstone for a financial year is an amended determination.



    Your non-concessional contributions cap - general rule

    292-85(2)    


    Your non-concessional contributions cap for a *financial year is:

    (a)    unless paragraph (b) applies - the amount (the general non-concessional contributions cap for the year) that is 4 times your *concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(2) for the year; or

    (b)    if, immediately before the start of the year, your *total superannuation balance equals or exceeds the *general transfer balance cap for the year - nil.

    Note:

    This subsection does not take into account any increase in your concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(4) .



    When you can bring forward your non-concessional contributions cap

    292-85(3)    


    Despite subsection (2) , work out your non-concessional contributions cap for a *financial year (the first year ) under subsection (5) , and your non-concessional contributions caps for the following 2 financial years (the second year and third year ) under subsections (6) and (7) , if:

    (a)    your *non-concessional contributions for the first year exceed the general non-concessional contributions cap for that year; and

    (b)    paragraph (2)(b) does not apply to you in relation to the first year; and

    (c)    

    you are under 75 years at any time in the first year; and

    (d)    a previous operation of subsection (6) or (7) does not determine your non-concessional contributions cap for the first year; and

    (e)    the difference (the first year cap space ) between the *general transfer balance cap for the first year and your *total superannuation balance immediately before the start of the first year exceeds the general non-concessional contributions cap for the first year.


    292-85(4)    


    However, do not work out your *non-concessional contributions cap for the third year under subsection (7) if the first year cap space does not exceed an amount equal to twice the general non-concessional contributions cap for the first year.
    Note:

    If this subsection applies, your non-concessional contributions cap for the third year will be worked out under subsection (2) (unless the third year becomes a new first year under a further application of subsection (3) ).



    First year of bring forward

    292-85(5)    


    Your non-concessional contributions cap for the first year is an amount equal to:

    (a)    if the first year cap space does not exceed an amount equal to twice the general non-concessional contributions cap for the first year - twice the general non-concessional contributions cap for the first year; or

    (b)    otherwise - 3 times the general non-concessional contributions cap for the first year.



    Second year of bring forward

    292-85(6)    


    Your non-concessional contributions cap for the second year is:

    (a)    if:


    (i) your *total superannuation balance immediately before the start of the second year is less than the *general transfer balance cap for the second year; and

    (ii) your *non-concessional contributions for the first year fall short of your cap for the first year (worked out under subsection (5) );
    that shortfall; or

    (b)    otherwise - nil.



    Third year of bring forward

    292-85(7)    


    Your non-concessional contributions cap for the third year is:

    (a)    if:


    (i) your *total superannuation balance immediately before the start of the third year is less than the *general transfer balance cap for the third year; and

    (ii) your *non-concessional contributions for the second year fall short of your cap for the second year (worked out under subsection (6) );
    that shortfall; or

    (b)    if:


    (i) your total superannuation balance immediately before the start of the third year is less than the general transfer balance cap for the third year; and

    (ii) your cap for the second year is nil; and

    (iii) your non-concessional contributions for the first year fall short of your cap for the first year (worked out under subsection (5) );
    that shortfall; or

    (c)    otherwise - nil.


    SECTION 292-90   Your non-concessional contributions for a financial year  

    292-90(1)    
    The amount of your non-concessional contributions for a *financial year is the sum of:

    (a)    each contribution covered under subsection (2) ; and

    (aa)    

    each amount covered under subsection (4) ; and

    (b)    the amount of your *excess concessional contributions (if any) for the financial year.



    Modification for released excess concessional contributions

    292-90(1A)    
    However, if:

    (a)    

    you make a valid request under section 131-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to * excess concessional contributions you have for the * financial year; and

    (b)    

    a * superannuation provider pays an amount in relation to the release authority issued under section 131-15 in that Schedule in relation to that request;

    the amount paid is first increased, by dividing it by 85 % , and the increased amount is applied to reduce the amount of excess concessional contributions mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) of this section.



    Non-concessional contributions and amounts

    292-90(2)    
    A contribution is covered under this subsection if:

    (a)    it is made in the *financial year to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you; and

    (b)    

    it is not included in the assessable income of the *superannuation provider in relation to the *superannuation plan, or, by way of a *roll-over superannuation benefit, in the assessable income of any *complying superannuation fund or *RSA provider in the circumstances mentioned in subsection 290-170(5) (about successor funds); and

    (c)    

    it is not any of the following:

    (i) a Government co-contribution made under the Superannuation (Government Co-contribution for Low Income Earners) Act 2003 ;

    (ii) a contribution covered under section 292-95 (payments that relate to structured settlements or orders for personal injuries);

    (iii) a contribution covered under section 292-100 (certain CGT-related payments), to the extent that it does not exceed your *CGT cap amount when it is made;

    (iiia) a contribution covered under section 292-102 (downsizer contributions);

    (iiib) a contribution covered by section 292-103 (COVID-19 re-contributions);

    (iv) a contribution made to a *constitutionally protected fund (other than a contribution included in the *contributions segment of your *superannuation interest in the fund);

    (v) contributions not included in the assessable income of the superannuation provider in relation to the superannuation plan because of a choice made under section 295-180 ;

    (vi) a contribution that is a *roll-over superannuation benefit.

    292-90(3)    
    Disregard Subdivision 295-D for the purposes of paragraph (2)(b) .

    292-90(4)    


    An amount is covered under this subsection if it is any of the following:

    (a)    an amount in a *complying superannuation plan that is allocated by the *superannuation provider in relation to that plan for you for the year in accordance with conditions specified in the regulations;

    (b)    the amount of any contribution made to that plan in respect of you in the year that is covered by a valid and acknowledged notice under section 290-170 , to the extent that it is not allowable as a deduction for the person making the contribution;

    (c)    the sum of each contribution made to that plan in respect of you at a time on or after 10 May 2006 when that plan was not a complying superannuation plan (other than a contribution covered under this paragraph in relation to a previous financial year).


    SECTION 292-95   Contributions arising from structured settlements or orders for personal injuries  

    292-95(1)    
    A contribution is covered under this section if:


    (a) the contribution arises from:


    (i) the settlement of a claim that satisfies the conditions in subsection (3); or

    (ii) the settlement of a claim in relation to a personal injury suffered by you under a law of the Commonwealth or of a State or Territory relating to workers compensation; or

    (iii) the order of a court that satisfies the conditions in subsection (4); and


    (b) the contribution is made within 90 days, or such longer period as the Commissioner allows, after the later of the following:


    (i) the day of receipt of the payment from which the contribution is made; or

    (ii) in relation to subparagraph (a)(i) or (iii) - the day mentioned in subsection (2); and


    (c) 2 legally qualified medical practitioners have certified that, because of the personal injury, it is unlikely that you can ever be *gainfully employed in a capacity for which you are reasonably qualified because of education, experience or training; and


    (d) no later than the time the contribution is made to a *superannuation plan, you or your *legal personal representative notify the *superannuation provider in relation to the plan, in the *approved form, that this section is to apply to the contribution.


    292-95(2)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(ii), the day is:


    (a) for a settlement mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i):


    (i) the day on which the agreement mentioned in paragraph (3)(c) was entered into; or

    (ii) if that agreement depends, for its effectiveness, on being approved (however described) by an order of a court, or on being embodied in a consent order made by a court - the day on which that order was made; or


    (b) for an order mentioned in subparagraph (1)(a)(iii) - the day on which the order was made.

    292-95(3)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(a)(i), the conditions are as follows:


    (a) the claim:


    (i) is for compensation or damages for, or in respect of, personal injury suffered by you; and

    (ii) is made by you or your *legal personal representative;


    (b) the claim is based on the commission of a wrong, or on a right created by statute;


    (c) the settlement takes the form of a written agreement between the parties to the claim (whether or not that agreement is approved by an order of a court, or is embodied in a consent order made by a court).

    292-95(4)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(a)(iii), the conditions are as follows:


    (a) the order is made in respect of a claim that:


    (i) is for compensation or damages for, or in respect of, personal injury suffered by you; and

    (ii) is made by you or your *legal personal representative;


    (b) the claim is based on the commission of a wrong, or on a right created by statute;


    (c) the order is not an order approving or endorsing an agreement as mentioned in paragraph (3)(c).

    292-95(5)    
    If a claim is both:


    (a) for compensation or damages for personal injury suffered by you; and


    (b) for some other remedy (for example, compensation or damages for loss of, or damage to, property);

    subsections (3) and (4) apply to the claim, but only to the extent that it relates to the compensation or damages referred to in paragraph (a), and only to amounts that, in the settlement agreement, or in the order, are identified as being solely in payment of that compensation or those damages.


    292-95(6)    


    If:


    (a) you requested the Commissioner to allow a longer period under paragraph (1)(b); and


    (b) you are dissatisfied with:


    (i) a decision under that paragraph allowing a longer period; or

    (ii) a decision the Commissioner makes not to allow a longer period;

    you may object against the decision in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    292-95(7)    


    To avoid doubt:


    (a) subject to subsection 14ZVC(3) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , you may also object, on the ground that you are dissatisfied with such a decision, relating to all or part of your contributions for a *financial year:


    (i) under section 175A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 against an assessment made inrelation to you for the corresponding income year; or

    (ii) under section 97-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 against an *excess non-concessional contributions determination made in relation to you for the financial year; and


    (b) for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977 , the making of a decision under paragraph (1)(b) of this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax, and making a calculation of charge, under this Act.


    SECTION 292-100   Contribution relating to some CGT small business concessions  

    292-100(1)    
    A contribution is covered under this section if:


    (a) the contribution is made by you to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you in a *financial year; and


    (b) the requirement in subsection (2), (4), (7) or (8) is met; and


    (c) you choose, in accordance with subsection (9), to apply this section to an amount that is all or part of the contribution.

    292-100(2)    
    The requirement in this subsection is met if:


    (a) the contribution is equal to all or part of the *capital proceeds from a *CGT event for which you can disregard any *capital gain under section 152-105 (or would be able to do so, assuming that a capital gain arose from the event); and


    (b) the contribution is made on or before the later of the following days:


    (i) the day you are required to lodge your *income tax return for the income year in which the CGT event happened;

    (ii) 30 days after the day you receive the capital proceeds.

    292-100(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), ignore the requirement in paragraph 152-105(b) if you are permanently incapacitated at the time of the *CGT event but were not permanently incapacitated at the time the relevant *CGT asset was acquired.

    292-100(4)    
    The requirement in this subsection is met if:


    (a) just before a *CGT event, you were a *CGT concession stakeholder of an entity that could, under section 152-110 , disregard any *capital gain arising from the CGT event (or would be able to do so, assuming that a capital gain arose from the event); and


    (b) the entity makes a payment to you before the later of:


    (i) 2 years after the CGT event; and

    (ii) if the CGT event happened because the entity *disposed of the relevant *CGT asset - 6 months after the latest time a possible *financial benefit becomes or could become due under a *look-through earnout right relating to that CGT asset and the disposal; and


    (c) the contribution is equal to all or part of your stakeholder's participation percentage (within the meaning of subsection 152-125(2) ) of the *capital proceeds from the CGT event (but not exceeding the amount of the payment mentioned in paragraph (b)); and


    (d) the contribution is made within 30 days after the payment mentioned in paragraph (b).


    292-100(5)    
    In determining whether the conditions in subsection (2) or (4) are satisfied for a *CGT event in relation to a *pre-CGT asset, treat the asset as a *post-CGT asset.

    292-100(6)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (4)(a), ignore the requirement in paragraph 152-110(1)(b) if a *significant individual was permanently incapacitated at the time of the *CGT event but was not permanently incapacitated when the relevant *CGT asset was acquired.

    292-100(7)    
    The requirement in this subsection is met if:


    (a) the contribution is equal to all or part of the *capital gain from a *CGT event that you disregarded under subsection 152-305(1) ; and


    (b) the contribution is made on or before the later of the following days:


    (i) the day you are required to lodge your *income tax return for the income year in which the CGT event happened;

    (ii) 30 days after the day you receive the *capital proceeds from the CGT event.

    292-100(8)    
    The requirement in this subsection is met if:


    (a) just before a *CGT event, you were a *CGT concession stakeholder of an entity that could, under subsection 152-305(2) , disregard all or part of a *capital gain arising from the CGT event; and


    (b) the entity makes a payment to you that satisfies the conditions in section 152-325 ; and


    (c) the contribution is equal to all or part of the capital gain arising from the CGT event (but not exceeding the amount of the payment mentioned in paragraph (b)); and


    (d) the contribution is made within 30 days after the payment mentioned in paragraph (b).

    292-100(9)    
    To make a choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), you must:


    (a) make the choice in the *approved form; and


    (b) give it to the *superannuation provider in relation to the *complying superannuation plan on or before the time when the contribution is made.

    SECTION 292-102   Downsizer contributions  


    Criteria for a downsizer contribution

    292-102(1)    
    A contribution is covered under this section if:

    (a)    

    the contribution is made to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you when you are aged 55 years or over; and

    (b)    the contribution is an amount equal to all or part of the *capital proceeds received from the *disposal of an *ownership interest (the old interest ) in a *dwelling; and

    (c)    you or your *spouse held the old interest just before the disposal; and

    (d)    any *capital gain or *capital loss from the disposal of the old interest:


    (i) for the case where you held it just before the disposal - is wholly or partially disregarded under Subdivision 118-B (or would have been if you had *acquired it on or after 20 September 1985); or

    (ii) otherwise - would have been wholly or partially disregarded under Subdivision 118-B had you *acquired the old interest on or after 20 September 1985 and held it for a period before the disposal; and

    (e)    the condition in subsection (2) is met for the disposal; and

    (f)    the dwelling is located in *Australia, and is not a caravan, houseboat or other mobile home; and

    (g)    the contribution is made within 90 days, or such longer period as the Commissioner allows, after the time the change of ownership occurs as a result of the disposal; and

    (h)    you choose, in accordance with subsection (8) , to apply this section to the contribution; and

    (i)    there is not already a contribution covered under this section, and made to a complying superannuation plan in respect of you, from an earlier choice you made in relation to the disposal of:


    (i) another ownership interest in the dwelling that was not a related spousal interest to the old interest; or

    (ii) an ownership interest in another dwelling.
    Note 1:

    Subparagraph (i)(i) does not prevent another contribution, made for you from the capital proceeds from the disposal of the same interest, from also being a contribution covered under this section.

    Note 2:

    That subparagraph also does not prevent another contribution, made for you from the capital proceeds from the disposal of a related spousal interest, from being a contribution covered under this section.



    10-year ownership condition

    292-102(2)    
    The condition in this subsection is met for the *disposal of the old interest if either or both of the following paragraphs applies:

    (a)    at all times during the 10 years ending just before the disposal:


    (i) the old interest was held by you, your *spouse or your former spouse; or

    (ii) an *ownership interest in the land on which the *dwelling is situated was held by you, your spouse or your former spouse;

    (b)    if subsection 118-147(1) :


    (i) applies because the old interest was a substitute property interest (within the meaning of that subsection) for an old dwelling referred to in paragraph 118-147(1)(a) ; or

    (ii) would have applied as described in subparagraph (i) if paragraph 118-147(1)(a) were modified to refer to a dwelling (the old dwelling ) that was your main residence;
    you, your spouse or your former spouse *acquired an ownership interest in that old dwelling at least 10 years before the disposal.
    Note:

    Section 118-147 deals with a dwelling replacing an earlier dwelling that was compulsorily acquired or destroyed etc.



    Cap on the amount of a downsizer contribution

    292-102(3)    
    Despite subsection (1) , the contribution is covered under this section only to the extent that it does not exceed the lesser of:

    (a)    $300,000, less any other contribution that is already covered under this section and made to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you; and

    (b)    the sum of the *capital proceeds from the disposals of:


    (i) the old interest; and

    (ii) any *related spousal interest to the old interest;
    less the sum of all other contributions that are already covered under this section, in relation to the disposal of the old interest or any related spousal interest to the old interest, and made to complying superannuation plans in respect of you or your *spouse.

    Market value substitution rule

    292-102(3A)    
    In working out *capital proceeds for the purposes of paragraph (1)(b) or (3)(b) , disregard section 116-30 to the extent that it has the effect of increasing those capital proceeds.



    Meaning of related spousal interest

    292-102(4)    
    A related spousal interest , to an *ownership interest in a *dwelling, is another ownership interest in the dwelling if:

    (a)    both ownership interests are *disposed of under the same contract; and

    (b)    just before the disposal, you *held one of the ownership interests and your *spouse held the other.

    When interest held by trustee of deceased estate

    292-102(5)    
    For the purposes of determining whether an individual held an interest at a particular time, if the interest was held at the particular time by the trustee of the deceased estate of an individual who was your *spouse when the individual died, the interest is taken to be held at the particular time by that individual.

    Review of the period for making the contribution

    292-102(6)    
    If:

    (a)    you requested the Commissioner to allow a longer period under paragraph (1)(g) ; and

    (b)    you are dissatisfied with:


    (i) a decision under that paragraph allowing a longer period; or

    (ii) a decision the Commissioner makes not to allow a longer period;

    you may object against the decision in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    292-102(7)    
    To avoid doubt:

    (a)    subject to subsection 14ZVC(3) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , you may also object, on the ground that you are dissatisfied with such a decision, relating to all or part of your contributions for a *financial year:


    (i) under section 175A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 against an assessment made in relation to you for the corresponding income year; or

    (ii) under section 97-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 against an *excess non-concessional contributions determination made in relation to you for the financial year; and

    (b)    for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977 , the making of a decision under paragraph (1)(g) of this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax, and making a calculation of charge, under this Act.

    Requirements for choices

    292-102(8)    
    To make a choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(h) , you must:

    (a)    make the choice in the *approved form; and

    (b)    give it to the *superannuation provider in relation to the *complying superannuation plan at or before the time when the contribution is made.

    Commissioner to notify providers if contributions are not downsizer contributions

    292-102(9)    
    The Commissioner must, in writing, notify a *superannuation provider that all, or a specified part, of a contribution is not covered under this section if:

    (a)    the Commissioner is aware that a choice referred to in subsection (8) has been given to the superannuation provider for the contribution; and

    (b)    the Commissioner is satisfied that the contribution, or that part of the contribution, (as applicable) is not covered under this section.

    The Commissioner may give a copy of the notification to *APRA.


    SECTION 292-103   COVID-19 re-contributions  

    292-103(1)    
    A contribution is covered by this section if:

    (a)    the contribution is made by you to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you in a *financial year; and

    (b)    the contribution is made in the financial year beginning on 1 July 2021, or a later financial year ending on or before 30 June 2030; and

    (c)    one or more amounts (the COVID-19 early release amounts ) have been paid to you from a complying superannuation plan, in either or both of the financial years beginning on 1 July 2019 or 1 July 2020, because you satisfied:


    (i) a condition of release specified in item 107A or 207AA of the table in Schedule 1 to the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 ; or

    (ii) a condition of release specified in item 109AA of the table in Schedule 2 to the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997 ; and

    (d)    the amount of the contribution is not more than the total of your COVID-19 early release amounts; and

    (e)    if you made one or more previous contributions covered by this section - the sum of:


    (i) the amount of the contribution; and

    (ii) the amounts of those previous contributions;
    is not more than the total of your COVID-19 early release amounts; and

    (f)    you choose, in accordance with subsection (2) , to apply this section to the contribution.

    292-103(2)    
    To make a choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(f) , you must:

    (a)    make the choice in the *approved form; and

    (b)    give it to the *superannuation provider in relation to the *complying superannuation plan on or before the time when the contribution is made.

    SECTION 292-105   CGT cap amount  

    292-105(1)    
    Your CGT cap amount at the start of the 2007-2008 *financial year is $1,000,000.

    Note:

    For transitional rules about contributions made in the period from 10 May 2006 to 30 June 2007, see section 292-80 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .



    Reductions and increases

    292-105(2)    
    If a contribution covered by section 292-100 is made in respect of you at a time, reduce your CGT cap amount just after that time:


    (a) if the contribution falls short of your *CGT cap amount at that time - by the amount of the contribution; or


    (b) otherwise - to nil.

    292-105(3)    
    At the start of each *financial year after the 2007-2008 financial year, increase your CGT cap amount by the amount (if any) by which the index amount for that financial year exceeds the index amount for the previous financial year.

    292-105(4)    
    For the purposes of subsection (3), the index amount for the 2007-2008 *financial year is $1,000,000. The index amount is then indexed annually.

    Note:

    Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the index amount: see section 960-285 .


    (Repealed) Subdivision 292-D - Modifications for defined benefit interests  

    292-155   (Repealed) SECTION 292-155 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    (Repealed) Operative provisions

    292-160   (Repealed) SECTION 292-160 Application  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    292-165   (Repealed) SECTION 292-165 Concessional contributions - special rules for defined benefit interests  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    292-170   (Repealed) SECTION 292-170 Notional taxed contributions  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    292-175   (Repealed) SECTION 292-175 Defined benefit interest  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    Subdivision 292-E - Excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments  

    Guide to Subdivision 292-E

    SECTION 292-225   What this Subdivision is about  


    The Commissioner may make an assessment of a person ' s liability to pay excess non-concessional contributions tax, and the excess non-concessional contributions on which that liability is based.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    292-230 Commissioner must make an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment
    292-235 (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)
    292-240 Validity of assessment
    292-245 Objections
    292-250 (Repealed by No 2 of 2015)

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 292-230   Commissioner must make an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment  

    292-230(1)    
    The Commissioner must make an assessment (an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment ) of:


    (a) if a person has * excess non-concessional contributions for a * financial year - the amount of the excess non-concessional contributions; and


    (b) the amount (if any) of * excess non-concessional contributions tax which the person is liable to pay in relation to the financial year.

    292-230(2)    
    The Commissioner must give the person notice in writing of an * excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment as soon as practicable after making the assessment.

    292-230(3)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    292-235   (Repealed) SECTION 292-235 Part-year assessment  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    SECTION 292-240  

    292-240   Validity of assessment  


    The validity of an *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment is not affected because any of the provisions of this Act have not been complied with.

    SECTION 292-245  

    292-245   Objections  


    If a person is dissatisfied with an *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment made in relation to the person, the person may object against the assessment in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    292-250   (Repealed) SECTION 292-250 Evidence  
    (Repealed by No 2 of 2015)

    Subdivision 292-F - Amending excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments  

    Guide to Subdivision 292-F

    SECTION 292-300   What this Subdivision is about  


    The Commissioner may amend excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments within certain time limits.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    292-305 Amendments within 4 years of the original assessment
    292-310 Amended assessments are treated as excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments
    292-315 Later amendments - on request
    292-320 Later amendments - fraud or evasion
    292-325 Further amendment of an amended particular
    292-330 Amendment on review etc.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 292-305   Amendments within 4 years of the original assessment  

    292-305(1)    


    The Commissioner may amend an *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment for a person for a *financial year at any time during the period of 4 years after the *original excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment day for the person for that year.

    292-305(2)    


    The original excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment day for a person for a * financial year is the day on which the Commissioner gives the first * excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment to the person for the financial year.

    SECTION 292-310   Amended assessments are treated as excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments  

    292-310(1)    
    Once an amended * excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment for a person for a * financial year is made, it is taken to be an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment for the person for the year.

    292-310(2)    
    If the Commissioner amends a person ' s * excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment, the Commissioner must give the person notice in writing of the amendment as soon as practicable after making the amendment.

    292-310(3)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    SECTION 292-315  

    292-315   Later amendments - on request  


    The Commissioner may amend an *excess contributions non-concessional tax assessment for a person for a *financial year after the end of the period of 4 years after the *original excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment day for the person for the year if, within that 4 year period:


    (a) the person applies for the amendment in the *approved form; and


    (b) the person gives the Commissioner all the information necessary for making the amendment.

    SECTION 292-320   Later amendments - fraud or evasion  

    292-320(1)    
    If:


    (a) a person (or a *superannuation provider covered under subsection (2)) does not make a full and true disclosure to the Commissioner of the information necessary for an *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment for the person for a *financial year; and


    (b) in making the assessment, the Commissioner makes an under-assessment; and


    (c) the Commissioner is of the opinion that the under-assessment is due to fraud or evasion;

    the Commissioner may amend the assessment at any time.


    292-320(2)    
    A *superannuation provider is covered under this subsection if any of the following conditions are satisfied:


    (a) contributions have been made to a *superannuation plan of the provider on behalf of the person in the *financial year;


    (b) an amount is included in the person's *concessional contributions for the financial year under subsection 291-25(3) because the superannuation provider allocated it to the person;


    (c) *notional taxed contributions are included in the person's concessional contributions for the financial year under section 291-165 because of the person's *defined benefit interest in a superannuation plan of the provider.


    SECTION 292-325  

    292-325   Further amendment of an amended particular  


    If:


    (a) an *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment has been amended (the earlier amendment ) in any particular; and


    (b) the Commissioner is of the opinion that it would be just to further amend the assessment in that particular;

    the Commissioner may do so within a period of 4 years after the earlier amendment.

    SECTION 292-330  

    292-330   Amendment on review etc.  


    Nothing in this Subdivision prevents the amendment of an *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment:

    (a)    to give effect to a decision on a review or appeal; or

    (b)    

    as a result of an objection or pending an appeal or review.
    Note:

    If a person is dissatisfied with a statement given to the Commissioner by a superannuation provider under section 390-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , the person may make a complaint under the AFCA scheme (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ).

    Subdivision 292-G - Collection and recovery  

    Guide to Subdivision 292-G

    SECTION 292-380   What this Subdivision is about  


    Excess non-concessional contributions tax is due and payable at the end of 21 days after notice of assessment and the general interest charge applies to unpaid amounts. Money may be released from a superannuation plan to pay the tax.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    292-385 Due date for payment of excess non-concessional contributions tax
    292-390 General interest charge
    292-395 Refunds of amounts overpaid
    292-400 (Repealed by No 79 of 2010 )
    292-405 (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)
    292-410 (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)
    292-415 (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)
    292-420 (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)
    292-425 (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 292-385  

    292-385   Due date for payment of excess non-concessional contributions tax  


    *Excess non-concessional contributions tax assessed for a person for a *financial year is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the Commissioner gives the person notice of the *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment.

    SECTION 292-390  

    292-390   General interest charge  


    If *excess non-concessional contributions tax or *shortfall interest charge payable by a person remains unpaid after the time by which it is due and payable, the person is liable to pay the *general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:


    (a) starts at the beginning of the day on which the excess non-concessional contributions tax or shortfall interest charge was due to be paid; and


    (b) ends at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:


    (i) the excess non-concessional contributions tax or shortfall interest charge;

    (ii) general interest charge on any of the excess non-concessional contributions tax or shortfall interest charge.
    Note:

    The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 292-395  

    292-395   Refunds of amounts overpaid  


    Section 172 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the purposes of this Part as if references in that section to tax included references to *excess non-concessional contributions tax.

    292-400   (Repealed) SECTION 292-400 Security for payment of tax  
    (Repealed by No 79 of 2010 )

    292-405   (Repealed) SECTION 292-405 Release authority  
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)

    292-410   (Repealed) SECTION 292-410 Giving a release authority to a superannuation provider  
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)

    292-415   (Repealed) SECTION 292-415 Superannuation provider given release authority must pay amount  
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)

    292-420   (Repealed) SECTION 292-420 Release authorities for refunded excess concessional contributions  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    292-425   (Repealed) SECTION 292-425 Interest for late payments of money received by the Commissioner in accordance with release authority  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    Subdivision 292-H - Other provisions  

    SECTION 292-465   Commissioner ' s discretion to disregard contributions etc. in relation to a financial year  

    292-465(1)    


    If you make an application in accordance with subsection (2), the Commissioner may make a written determination that, for the purposes of this Division and Subdivision 97-B in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , all or part of your * non-concessional contributions for a * financial year is to be:


    (a) disregarded; or


    (b) allocated instead for the purposes of another financial year specified in the determination.


    292-465(2)    


    You may apply to the Commissioner in the *approved form for a determination under subsection (1). The application can only be made:


    (a) after all of the contributions sought to be disregarded or reallocated have been made; and


    (b) if you receive one or more *excess non-concessional contributions determinations for the *financial year - before the end of:


    (i) the period of 60 days starting on the day you receive the most recent of those determinations; or

    (ii) a longer period allowed by the Commissioner.

    292-465(3)    


    The Commissioner may make a determination under subsection (1) only if he or she considers that:


    (a) there are special circumstances; and


    (b) making the determination is consistent with the object of this Division.


    292-465(4)    


    In making a determination under subsection (1) the Commissioner may have regard to the matters in subsections (5) and (6) and any other relevant matters.

    292-465(5)    
    The Commissioner may have regard to whether a contribution made in the relevant *financial year would more appropriately be allocated towards another financial year instead.

    292-465(6)    
    The Commissioner may have regard to whether it was reasonably foreseeable, when a relevant contribution was made, that you would have *excess concessional contributions or *excess non-concessional contributions for the relevant *financial year, and in particular:


    (a) if the relevant contribution is made in respect of you by another person - the terms of any agreement or arrangement between you and that person as to the amount and timing of the contribution; and


    (b) the extent to which you had control over the making of the contribution.

    292-465(7)    


    The Commissioner must give you a copy of a determination made under subsection (1).

    292-465(8)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)



    Review

    292-465(9)    


    If you are dissatisfied with:


    (a) a determination made under this section in relation to you; or


    (b) a decision the Commissioner makes not to make such a determination;

    you may object against the determination, or the decision, as the case requires, in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    292-465(10)    


    To avoid doubt:


    (a) subject to subsection 14ZVC(3) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , you may also object, on the ground that you are dissatisfied with such a determination or decision, relating to all or part of your *non-concessional contributions for a *financial year:


    (i) under section 175A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 against an assessment made in relation to you for the corresponding income year; or

    (ii) under section 97-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 against an *excess non-concessional contributions determination made in relation to you for the financial year; and


    (b) for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977 , the making of a determination under this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax, and making a calculation of charge, under this Act.


    SECTION 292-467   Direction that the value of superannuation interests is nil  

    292-467(1)    
    The Commissioner must, by writing, direct that this section applies to you for a *financial year if:


    (a) you receive one or more *excess non-concessional contributions determinations for the financial year; and


    (b) (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    (c) the sum of any amounts paid in response to release authorities issued in relation to those determinations is less than the excess amount stated in the most recent of those determinations; and


    (d) the Commissioner is satisfied that the *value of all of your remaining *superannuation interests is nil.

    Note 1:

    The direction means you have no excess non-concessional contributions for the financial year (see paragraph 292-85(1)(c) ), even though not all of the excess amount has been released in response to release authorities issued under Division 131 , or former Division 96 , in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note 2:

    The direction does not prevent an amount from being included in your assessable income (see Subdivision 292-B ).

    Note 3:

    Any excess non-concessional contributions determination you receive after the first one for a financial year is an amended determination.


    292-467(2)    
    The Commissioner must give you a copy of the direction.

    292-467(3)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    292-467(4)    
    To avoid doubt:


    (a) you may object under section 292-245 against an *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment made in relation to you on the ground that a direction was not made under this section; and


    (b) for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977 , not making a direction under this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax under this Act.


    292-468   (Repealed) SECTION 292-468 Variations etc. of refunded excess concessional contributions determinations  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    292-469   (Repealed) SECTION 292-469 Objections against determinations etc.  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    292-470   (Repealed) SECTION 292-470 Power of Commissioner to obtain information  
    (Repealed by No 2 of 2015)

    Division 293 - Sustaining the superannuation contribution concession  

    Guide to Division 293  

    SECTION 293-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division reduces the concessional tax treatment of certain superannuation contributions made for high income individuals.

    The high income threshold is $250,000.

    There are special rules for defined benefit interests, constitutionally protected State higher level office holders, certain Commonwealth justices and temporary residents who depart Australia.

    Note:

    Part 3-20 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains rules about the administration of the Division 293 tax.

    Subdivision 293-A - Object of this Division  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 293-5  

    293-5   Object of this Division  


    The object of this Division is to reduce the concessional tax treatment of superannuation contributions for high income individuals.

    Subdivision 293-B - Sustaining the superannuation contribution concession  

    Guide to Subdivision 293-B

    SECTION 293-10   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision reduces the superannuation tax concession for high income earners.

    An individual ' s income is added to certain superannuation contributions and compared to the high income threshold of $250,000. A tax is payable on the excess, or on the superannuation contributions (whichever is less).

    The tax is not payable in respect of excess concessional contributions.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Liability for tax
    293-15 Liability for tax
    293-20 Your taxable contributions
    Low tax contributions
    293-25 Your low tax contributions
    293-30 Low tax contributed amounts
    293-35 (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    Liability for tax

    SECTION 293-15  

    293-15   Liability for tax  


    You are liable to pay * Division 293 tax if you have * taxable contributions for an income year.
    Note:

    The amount of the tax is set out in the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013 .

    SECTION 293-20   Your taxable contributions  

    293-20(1)    


    If the sum of:


    (a) your * income for surcharge purposes for an income year (disregarding your * reportable superannuation contributions); and


    (b) your * low tax contributions for the corresponding * financial year;

    exceeds $250,000, you have taxable contributions for the income year equal to the lesser of the low tax contributions and the amount of the excess.


    293-20(2)    
    However, you do not have taxable contributions for an income year if the amount of your * low tax contributions is nil.

    Low tax contributions

    SECTION 293-25  

    293-25   Your low tax contributions  


    The amount of your low tax contributions for a * financial year is:


    (a) the low tax contributed amounts covered by section 293-30 for the financial year; less


    (b) your * excess concessional contributions for the financial year (if any).

    Note 1:

    Low tax contributions are modified for defined benefit interests (see Subdivision 293-D ).

    Note 2:

    Modifications in Subdivision 293-E (about constitutionally protected State higher level office holders) and Subdivision 293-F (about Commonwealth justices) affect the amount of low tax contributions.

    SECTION 293-30   Low tax contributed amounts  

    293-30(1)    
    The low tax contributed amounts covered by this section for a * financial year are the sum of the contributions covered by subsection (2) and the amounts covered by subsection (5) for the financial year.

    Note:

    Low tax contributed amounts covered by this section are modified for State higher level office holders (see Subdivision 293-E ).



    Contributions to complying superannuation plans

    293-30(2)    
    A contribution is covered under this section for a * financial year if:


    (a) it is made in the financial year to a * complying superannuation plan in respect of you; and


    (b) it is included:


    (i) in the assessable income of the * superannuation provider in relation to the plan; or

    (ii) by way of a * roll-over superannuation benefit, in the assessable income of a * complying superannuation fund or * RSA provider in the circumstances mentioned in subsection 290-170(5) (about successor funds).

    293-30(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), disregard:


    (a) table item 5.3 in section 50-25 (about income tax exemption for constitutionally protected funds); and


    (b) Subdivision 295-D (about excluded contributions).

    Exceptions

    293-30(4)    
    Despite subsection (2), a contribution is not covered under this section if it is any of the following:


    (a) an amount mentioned in subsection 295-200(2) (about amounts transferred from foreign superannuation funds);


    (b) an amount mentioned in item 2 of the table in subsection 295-190(1) (about certain roll-over superannuation benefits);


    (c) an amount that the Commissioner pays for your benefit under Part 8 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 , if:


    (i) the amount represents an amount of a charge payment (within the meaning of section 63A of that Act) paid as a result of a disclosure to which paragraph 74(1)(a) of that Act applies; and

    (ii) the entity making the disclosure qualified, under section 74 of that Act, for an amnesty in relation to the *superannuation guarantee shortfall to which the charge payment relates;


    (d) an amount that an entity contributes for your benefit that is offset, under section 23A of that Act, against the entity ' s liability to pay superannuation guarantee charge (within the meaning of that Act), if:


    (i) the amount represents an amount of a superannuation guarantee charge covered by a disclosure to which paragraph 74(1)(a) of that Act applies; and

    (ii) the entity qualified, under section 74 of that Act, for an amnesty in relation to the superannuation guarantee shortfall to which the superannuation guarantee charge relates.


    Amounts allocated in relation to a complying superannuation plan

    293-30(5)    


    An amount in a * complying superannuation plan is covered under this section if it is allocated by the * superannuation provider in relation to the plan for you for the * financial year in accordance with conditions specified by a regulation made for the purposes of subsection 291-25(3) .

    293-35   (Repealed) SECTION 293-35 Effect of determination relating to refunded excess concessional contributions  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    Subdivision 293-C - When tax is payable  

    Guide to Subdivision 293-C

    SECTION 293-60   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision has rules about payment of Division 293 tax.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    293-65 When tax is payable - original assessments
    293-70 When tax is payable - amended assessments
    293-75 General interest charge

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 293-65   When tax is payable - original assessments  

    293-65(1)    
    Your * assessed Division 293 tax for an income year is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the Commissioner gives you notice of the assessment of the amount of the * Division 293 tax.

    Exception for tax deferred to a debt account

    293-65(2)    
    However, subsection (1) does not apply to an amount of * assessed Division 293 tax that is * deferred to a debt account for a * superannuation interest.

    Note 1:

    For assessments of Division 293 tax, see Division 155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note 2:

    For deferred to a debt account , see Division 133 in that Schedule.

    Note 3:

    For release of money from a superannuation plan to pay these amounts, see Division 135 in that Schedule.


    SECTION 293-70   When tax is payable - amended assessments  

    293-70(1)    
    If the Commissioner amends your assessment, any extra * assessed Division 293 tax resulting from the amendment is due and payable 21 days after the day the Commissioner gives you notice of the amended assessment.

    Exception for tax deferred to a debt account

    293-70(2)    
    However, subsection (1) does not apply to an amount of extra * assessed Division 293 tax that is * deferred to a debt account for a * superannuation interest.

    Note 1:

    For deferred to a debt account , see Division 133 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note 2:

    For release of money from a superannuation plan to pay these amounts, see Division 131 in that Schedule.


    SECTION 293-75  

    293-75   General interest charge  


    If an amount of * assessed Division 293 tax or * shortfall interest charge on assessed Division 293 tax that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the * general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:


    (a) begins on the day on which the amount was due to be paid; and


    (b) ends on the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:


    (i) the assessed Division 293 tax or the shortfall interest charge;

    (ii) general interest charge on any of the assessed Division 293 tax or the shortfall interest charge.
    Note 1:

    The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note 2:

    Shortfall interest charge is worked out under Division 280 in Schedule 1 to that Act.

    Note 3:

    See section 5-10 of this Act for when the amount of shortfall interest charge becomes due and payable.

    Subdivision 293-D - Modifications for defined benefit interests  

    Guide to Subdivision 293-D

    SECTION 293-100   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision modifies the meaning of low tax contributions for individuals who have a defined benefit interest or interests in a financial year.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    293-105 Low tax contributions - modification for defined benefit interests
    293-110 (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)
    293-115 Defined benefit contributions

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 293-105  

    293-105   Low tax contributions - modification for defined benefit interests  


    Despite section 293-25 , if you have a * defined benefit interest or interests in a * financial year, the amount of your low tax contributions for the financial year is worked out as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Start with the low tax contributed amounts covered by section 293-30 for the * financial year, to the extent to which they do not relate to the * defined benefit interest or interests.


    Step 2.

    Subtract your * excess concessional contributions for the * financial year (if any).

    Note:

    The result of step 2 could be nil, or a negative amount.


    Step 3.

    Add your * defined benefit contributions for the * financial year in respect of the * defined benefit interest or interests.

    The result (but not less than nil) is the amount of your low tax contributions for the financial year.

    Note:

    Modifications in Subdivision 293-E (about constitutionally protected State higher level office holders) and Subdivision 293-F (about Commonwealth justices) affect the amount of low tax contributions.

    293-110   (Repealed) SECTION 293-110 Effect of determination relating to refunded excess concessional contributions  
    (Repealed by No 118 of 2013)

    SECTION 293-115   Defined benefit contributions  

    293-115(1)    
    Your defined benefit contributions , for a * financial year in respect of a * defined benefit interest, has the meaning given by regulation.

    Note:

    There are modifications in sections 293-150 (about constitutionally protected State higher level office holders) and 293-195 (about Commonwealth justices).


    293-115(2)    
    A regulation made for the purposes of subsection (1) may provide for a method of determining the amount of the defined benefit contributions .

    293-115(3)    
    A regulation made for the purposes of subsection (1) may define the * defined benefit contributions, and the amount of defined benefit contributions, in different ways depending on any of the following matters:

    (a)    the person who has the * superannuation interest that is or includes the * defined benefit interest;

    (b)    the * superannuation plan in which the superannuation interest exists;

    (c)    the * superannuation provider in relation to the superannuation plan;

    (d)    any other matter.

    293-115(4)    
    A regulation made for the purposes of subsection (1) may specify circumstances in which the amount of * defined benefit contributions for a * financial year is nil.

    293-115(5)    
    Subsections (2) , (3) and (4) do not limit a regulation that may be madefor the purposes of this section.

    293-115(6)    
    (Repealed by No 127 of 2021)


    293-115(7)    
    (Repealed by No 127 of 2021)


    Subdivision 293-E - Modifications for constitutionally protected State higher level office holders  

    Guide to Subdivision 293-E

    SECTION 293-140   What this Subdivision is about  


    Constitutionally protected State higher level office holders do not pay Division 293 tax in respect of contributions to constitutionally protected funds, unless the contributions are made as part of a salary package.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    293-145 Who this Subdivision applies to
    293-150 Low tax contributions - modification for CPFs
    293-155 High income threshold - effect of modification
    293-160 Salary packaged contributions

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 293-145   Who this Subdivision applies to  

    293-145(1)    
    This Subdivision applies to an individual for an income year if:

    (a)    the individual has a * superannuation interest in a * constitutionally protected fund in the corresponding * financial year; and

    (b)    at any time in the income year, the individual is declared by regulation to be an individual to whom this Subdivision applies.

    293-145(2)    
    (Repealed by No 127 of 2021)


    293-145(2A)    
    (Repealed by No 127 of 2021)


    293-145(3)    
    Nothing in this Subdivision limits section 6 of the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013 .

    Note:

    Section 6 of the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013 provides that Division 293 tax is not imposed in relation to a person if the imposition would exceed the legislative power of the Commonwealth.


    SECTION 293-150   Low tax contributions - modification for CPFs  

    293-150(1)    
    This section applies for the purpose of working out under section 293-25 or 293-105 the amount of the individual ' s * low tax contributions for the * financial year corresponding to the income year.

    Modified low tax contributed amounts in CPFs

    293-150(2)    
    Despite section 293-30 , the low tax contributed amounts covered by that section for the * financial year do not include any contributions to a * constitutionally protected fund, other than contributions covered by section 293-160 (about salary packaged contributions).

    Modified defined benefit contributions in CPFs

    293-150(3)    
    Despite section 293-115 , the individual ' s defined benefit contributions for the * financial year in respect of a * defined benefit interest in a * constitutionally protected fund are equal to:


    (a) unless paragraph (b) applies - nil; or


    (b) if, having regard to subsection (2) of this section, the low tax contributed amounts covered by section 293-30 for the year include contributions in respect of the defined benefit interest - the amount of those contributions.

    SECTION 293-155   High income threshold - effect of modification  

    293-155(1)    


    For the purpose of working out the extent (if any) to which the sum mentioned in subsection 293-20(1) for the individual exceeds the $250,000 threshold mentioned in that subsection, disregard section 293-150 .

    293-155(2)    
    To avoid doubt, the effect of subsection (1) is that the amount of the individual ' s * taxable contributions for an income year is the lesser of:


    (a) the excess (if any) mentioned in subsection 293-20(1) (worked out disregarding section 293-150 ) for the income year; and


    (b) the individual ' s * low tax contributions for the corresponding * financial year (worked out having regard to section 293-150 ).

    SECTION 293-160   Salary packaged contributions  

    293-160(1)    
    A contribution made to a * complying superannuation plan in respect of an individual is covered by this section if it is made because the individual agreed with an entity, or an * associate of an entity:


    (a) for the contribution to be made; and


    (b) in return, for the * withholding payments covered by subsection (2) that are to be made to the individual by the entity to be reduced (including to nil).

    293-160(2)    
    This subsection covers a * withholding payment covered by any of the provisions in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 listed in the table.


    Withholding payments covered
    Item Provision Subject matter
    1 Section 12-35 Payment to employee
    2 Section 12-40 Payment to company director
    3 Section 12-45 Payment to office holder
    4 Section 12-55 Voluntary agreement to withhold
    5 Section 12-60 Payment under labour hire arrangement, or specified by regulations


    Subdivision 293-F - Modifications for Commonwealth justices  

    Guide to Subdivision 293-F

    SECTION 293-185   What this Subdivision is about  


    Division 293 tax is not payable by Commonwealth justices and judges in respect of contributions to a defined benefit interest established under the Judges ' Pensions Act 1968 .


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    293-190 Who this Subdivision applies to
    293-195 Defined benefit contributions - modified treatment of contributions under the Judges ' Pensions Act 1968
    293-200 High income threshold - effect of modification

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 293-190   Who this Subdivision applies to  

    293-190(1)    
    This Subdivision applies to an individual if the individual is a Justice of the High Court, or a justice or judge of a court created by the Parliament, at any time on or after the start of the individual ' s 2012-13 income year.

    293-190(2)    
    Nothing in this Subdivision limits section 6 of the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013 .

    Note:

    Section 6 of the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013 provides that Division 293 tax is not imposed in relation to a person if the imposition would exceed the legislative power of the Commonwealth.


    SECTION 293-195   Defined benefit contributions - modified treatment of contributions under the Judges ' Pensions Act 1968  

    293-195(1)    
    This section applies for the purpose of working out under section 293-105 the amount of the individual ' s * low tax contributions for any * financial year.

    293-195(2)    
    Despite section 293-115 and subsection 293-150(3) , the individual ' s defined benefit contributions for a * financial year for a * defined benefit interest in a * superannuation fund established under the Judges ' Pensions Act 1968 are nil.

    SECTION 293-200   High income threshold - effect of modification  

    293-200(1)    


    For the purpose of working out the extent (if any) to which the sum mentioned in subsection 293-20(1) for the individual exceeds the $250,000 threshold mentioned in that subsection, disregard section 293-195 .

    293-200(2)    
    To avoid doubt, the effect of subsection (1) is that the amount of the individual ' s * taxable contributions for an income year is the lesser of:


    (a) the excess (if any) mentioned in subsection 293-20(1) (worked out disregarding section 293-195 ) for the income year; and


    (b) the individual ' s * low tax contributions for the corresponding * financial year (worked out having regard to section 293-195 ).

    Subdivision 293-G - Modifications for temporary residents who depart Australia  

    Guide to Subdivision 293-G

    SECTION 293-225   What this Subdivision is about  


    If you receive a departing Australia superannuation payment, you are entitled to a refund of any Division 293 tax you have paid.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    293-230 Who is entitled to a refund
    293-235 Amount of the refund
    293-240 Entitlement to refund stops all Division 293 tax liabilities

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 293-230  

    293-230   Who is entitled to a refund  


    You are entitled to a refund if:


    (a) you have made payments of any of the following:


    (i) * assessed Division 293 tax;

    (ii) a voluntary payment made under section 133-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for the purpose of reducing the amount by which a debt account for a * superannuation interest is in debit;

    (iii) * debt account discharge liability; and


    (b) you receive a * departing Australia superannuation payment; and


    (c) you apply to the Commissioner in the * approved form for the refund.

    Note:

    How the refund is applied is set out in Part IIB of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 293-235   Amount of the refund  

    293-235(1)    
    The amount of the refund to which you are entitled is the sum of the payments mentioned in paragraph 293-230(a) that you have made.

    293-235(2)    
    However, the amount of the refund is reduced by the amount of any refunds to which you are entitled under a previous application of this Subdivision.

    Exception - Division 293 tax attributable to period when you are an Australian resident

    293-235(3)    
    Despite subsection (1), if:


    (a) at any time in your 2012-13 income year, or a later income year, you are an Australian resident (but not a * temporary resident); and


    (b) a payment mentioned in paragraph 293-230(a) that you have made relates, or is reasonably attributable, to that income year;

    the payment is to be disregarded in working out under subsection (1) of this section the amount of the refund to which you are entitled.


    SECTION 293-240   Entitlement to refund stops all Division 293 tax liabilities  

    293-240(1)    
    The Commissioner may decide to release you from any existing or future liability to pay * Division 293 tax or * debt account discharge liability if:


    (a) you become entitled to a refund under section 293-230 ; or


    (b) you would become entitled to such a refund, if you were to pay the liability and paragraph 293-230(c) were disregarded.

    293-240(2)    
    The Commissioner may take such action as is necessary to give effect to a decision under subsection (1).

    Division 294 - Transfer balance cap  

    Guide to Division 294  

    SECTION 294-1   What this Division is about  


    There is a cap on the total amount you can transfer into the retirement phase of superannuation (where earnings are exempt from taxation).

    Credits are added to a transfer balance account when you transfer amounts.

    If the balance in your account exceeds the cap, you will be required to remove the excess from the retirement phase, and you will be liable to pay excess transfer balance tax.

    Note:

    Division 136 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains rules about excess transfer balance determinations and commutation authorities.

    Subdivision 294-A - Object of this Division  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 294-5  

    294-5   Object of this Division  


    The object of this Division is to limit the total amount of an individual ' s *superannuation income streams that receive an earnings tax exemption.

    Subdivision 294-B - Transfer balance account  

    Guide to Subdivision 294-B

    SECTION 294-10   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision creates a transfer balance account for you, and credits it, if you have a superannuation income stream in the retirement phase.

    It also provides for a transfer balance cap and identifies when you have excess transfer balance.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    294-15 When you have a transfer balance account
    294-20 Meaning of retirement phase recipient
    294-25 Transfer balance credits
    294-30 Excess transfer balance
    294-35 Your transfer balance cap
    294-40 Proportionally indexed transfer balance cap
    294-45 Transfer balance account ends
    294-50 Assumptions about income streams
    294-55 Repayment of limited recourse borrowing arrangement

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 294-15   When you have a transfer balance account  

    294-15(1)    
    You have a transfer balance account if you are, or have at any time been, the *retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream.

    294-15(2)    
    You start to have the *transfer balance account on the later of:


    (a) 1 July 2017; and


    (b) the day you first start to be a *retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream.

    SECTION 294-20   Meaning of retirement phase recipient  

    294-20(1)    
    You are the retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream at a time if:


    (a) the superannuation income stream is in the *retirement phase at that time; and


    (b) a *superannuation income stream benefit from the superannuation income stream is payable to you at that time.

    294-20(2)    
    You are also the retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream at a time if:


    (a) the superannuation income stream is in the *retirement phase at that time; and


    (b) the superannuation income stream is a *deferred superannuation income stream; and


    (c) a *superannuation income stream benefit from the superannuation income stream will be payable to you after that time.

    SECTION 294-25   Transfer balance credits  

    294-25(1)    


    The following table sets out when a credit arises in your *transfer balance account and the amount of the credit. The credit is called a transfer balance credit .


    Credits in the transfer balance account
    Item If: A credit of: Arises:
    1 just before 1 July 2017, you are the *retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream the *value, just before 1 July 2017, of the *superannuation interest that supports the superannuation income stream on the later of:
    (a) 1 July 2017; and
    (b) if you are a reversionary beneficiary - the last day of the period of 12 months beginning on the day a *superannuation income stream benefit first becomes payable from the income stream
    2 on a day (the starting day ) on or after 1 July 2017, you start to be the *retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream the *value on the starting day of the *superannuation interest that supports the superannuation income stream (a) on the starting day, unless paragraph (b) applies; or
    (b) if you are a reversionary beneficiary - at the end of the period of 12 months beginning on the starting day
    3 you have *excess transfer balance at the end of a day your *excess transfer balance earnings for that day at the start of the next day
    4 a *transfer balance credit arises under section 294-55 because of a repayment of a limited recourse borrowing arrangement the amount of the credit specified in section 294-55 at the time provided by section 294-55
    5 a *transfer balance credit arises under regulations made for the purposes of this item the amount of the credit worked out in accordance with the regulations at the time specified in the regulations

    Note 1:

    The amount of the transfer balance credit is modified for certain capped defined benefit income streams: see Subdivision 294-D .

    Note 2:

    For the meaning of excess transfer balance earnings , see section 294-235 .

    Note 3:

    If a payment split applies to payments from the superannuation income stream, a debit arises under section 294-90 .



    No crediting of earnings if determination issued

    294-25(2)    
    Despite item 3 of the table in subsection (1), no credit arises in your *transfer balance account under that item because of *excess transfer balance at the end of a day if the day is in the period:


    (a) starting on the day the Commissioner makes an *excess transfer balance determination in respect of you; and


    (b) ending on:


    (i) unless subparagraph (ii) applies - the first day on which the sum of all *transfer balance debits arising in your *transfer balance account since the determination was issued equals or exceeds the *crystallised reduction amount; or

    (ii) if a *transfer balance credit arises in your transfer balance account before the day mentioned in subparagraph (i) - the day on which that credit arises.
    Note:

    For provisions about excess transfer balance determinations, see Division 136 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .



    Regulations may provide for exceptions

    294-25(3)    


    The regulations may provide that an item of the table in subsection (1) does not apply to a class of *superannuation income streams specified in the regulations.

    SECTION 294-30   Excess transfer balance  

    294-30(1)    
    You have excess transfer balance at a particular time if, at that time, the *transfer balance in your *transfer balance account exceeds your *transfer balance cap at that time. The amount of the excess transfer balance is the amount of the excess.

    Note:

    There is a modification for certain capped defined benefit income streams: see Subdivision 294-D .


    294-30(2)    
    The transfer balance in your *transfer balance account at a time equals:


    (a) the sum of the *transfer balance credits in the account at that time; less


    (b) the sum of the *transfer balance debits (if any) in the account at that time.

    Note 1:

    For transfer balance debits , see Subdivision 294-C .

    Note 2:

    There is no consequence for having a negative transfer balance.


    SECTION 294-35   Your transfer balance cap  

    294-35(1)    
    Your transfer balance cap for the *financial year in which you first start to have a *transfer balance account is equal to the *general transfer balance cap for that financial year.

    Note:

    The amount of the transfer balance cap is modified for child recipients: see Subdivision 294-E .


    294-35(2)    
    Your transfer balance cap for a later *financial year is equal to your transfer balance cap for the previous year, subject to section 294-40 (which is about proportional indexation).

    294-35(3)    
    The general transfer balance cap is:


    (a) for the 2017-2018 *financial year - $1,600,000; or


    (b) for the 2018-2019 financial year or a later financial year - the amount worked out by indexing annually the amount mentioned in paragraph (a).

    Note:

    Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the amount of the cap: see section 960-285 .


    SECTION 294-40   Proportionally indexed transfer balance cap  

    294-40(1)    
    This section applies to increase your transfer balance cap for a *financial year (other than the financial year in which you first start to have a *transfer balance account) if:


    (a) the *general transfer balance cap is increased as a result of indexation for the financial year; and


    (b) at no time before the start of that financial year has the *transfer balance in your transfer balance account at the end of a day exceeded your transfer balance cap.

    294-40(2)    
    Your transfer balance cap is increased for the *financial year by the amount worked out using the following formula:

    Unused cap percentage × Indexation increase

    where:

    indexation increase
    means the amount by which the *general transfer balance cap for the *financial year increased as a result of indexation.

    unused cap percentage
    is worked out by:


    (a) identifying the highest *transfer balance in your *transfer balance account at the end of any day up to the end of the previous *financial year; and


    (b) identifying the day on which the transfer balance account had that transfer balance at the end of the day, or, if your transfer balance account had that transfer balance at the end of more than one day, the earliest of those days; and


    (c) expressing the transfer balance identified in paragraph (a) as a percentage (rounded down to the nearest whole number) of your *transfer balance cap on the day identified in paragraph (b); and


    (d) subtracting the result of paragraph (c) from 100%.


    294-40(3)    
    However, if the highest *transfer balance mentioned in paragraph (a) of the definition of unused cap percentage in subsection (2) is less than nil, that unused cap percentage is taken to be 100%.

    SECTION 294-45  

    294-45   Transfer balance account ends  


    The *transfer balance account ceases when the *retirement phase recipient dies.

    SECTION 294-50   Assumptions about income streams  

    294-50(1)    
    Subsections (2) and (3) apply for the purposes of working out the following matters at a time:


    (a) whether you have a *transfer balance account;


    (b) the *transfer balance in your transfer balance account.

    294-50(2)    
    In working out whether there is a superannuation income stream at a time:


    (a) have regard only to facts and circumstances that exist at that time; and


    (b) assume a requirement will be met, to the extent (if any) that:


    (i) the requirement arises under a provision of the *taxation law or under any rules or standards under which a benefit is, or is purported to be, provided; and

    (ii) meeting the requirement is a condition for there to be a superannuation income stream at that time; and

    (iii) it is not possible to determine, having regard only to facts and circumstances that exist at that time, whether or not the requirement has been met.

    294-50(3)    
    In working out whether a *superannuation income stream is in the retirement phase at a time, disregard the operation of subsection 307-80(4) , if the time is before the end of the 60-day period mentioned in paragraph (c) of that subsection.

    SECTION 294-55   Repayment of limited recourse borrowing arrangement  

    294-55(1)    
    A *transfer balance credit arises in your *transfer balance account if:

    (a)    a *superannuation provider makes a payment in respect of a *borrowing under an *arrangement that is covered by the exception in subsection 67A(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (which is about limited recourse borrowing arrangements); and

    (b)    as a result, there is an increase in the *value of a *superannuation interest that supports a *superannuation income stream of which you are the *retirement phase recipient; and

    (c)    

    the superannuation interest is in a *small superannuation fund at the time of the payment.

    294-55(2)    
    The amount of the credit is the amount of the increase in *value.

    294-55(3)    
    The credit arises at the time of the payment.

    294-55(4)    
    (Repealed by No 47 of 2021)


    Subdivision 294-C - Transfer balance debits  

    Guide to Subdivision 294-C

    SECTION 294-75   What this Subdivision is about  


    A debit arises in your transfer balance account when superannuation income streams that were previously credited (because they receive the earnings tax exemption) are reduced (other than by draw-downs or investment losses) or lose the earnings tax exemption.

    A debit also arises in your transfer balance account when you make a contribution relating to a structured settlement or personal injury, or where certain events occur that result in you having reduced superannuation.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    294-80 Transfer balance debits
    294-85 Certain events that result in reduced superannuation
    294-90 Payment splits
    294-95 Payment splits - no double debiting

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 294-80   Transfer balance debits  

    294-80(1)    


    The following table sets out when a debit arises in your *transfer balance account and the amount of the debit. The debit is called a transfer balance debit .


    Debits in the transfer balance account
    Item If: A debit of: Arises:
    1 you receive a *superannuation lump sum because a *superannuation income stream of which you are a *retirement phase recipient is commuted, in full or in part the amount of the superannuation lump sum at the time you receive the superannuation lump sum
    2 a *structured settlement contribution is made in respect of you the amount of the contribution at the later of:
    (a) the time the contribution is made; and
    (b) the start of the day you first start to have a *transfer balance account
    3 a *transfer balance debit arises under section 294-85 because of an event that results in reduced superannuation the amount of the debit specified in section 294-85 at the time provided by section 294-85
    4 a *transfer balance debit arises under section 294-90 because of a payment split the amount of the debit specified in section 294-90 at the time provided by section 294-90
    5 a *superannuation income stream of which you are a *retirement phase recipient stops being in the *retirement phase under subsection 307-80(4) the *value of the *superannuation interest that supports the superannuation income stream at the end of the period within which the commutation authority mentioned in that subsection was required to be complied with at the end of the period within which the commutation authority mentioned in that subsection was required to be complied with
    6 a *superannuation income stream of which you were a *retirement phase recipient stops being a superannuation income stream that is in the *retirement phase at a time (the stop time ), but items 1 and 5 do not apply the *value of the *superannuation interest that supported the superannuation income stream just before the stop time at the stop time
    7 the Commissioner gives you a notice under section 136-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (about non-commutable excess transfer balance) the amount of the *excess transfer balance stated in the notice at the time the Commissioner issues the notice
    8 a *transfer balance debit arises under regulations made for the purposes of this item the amount of the debit worked out in accordance with the regulations at the time specified in the regulations



    Structured settlement contributions

    294-80(2)    
    Each of the following is a structured settlement contribution in respect of you:


    (a) a contribution to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you that is covered under section 292-95 (about structured settlements or orders for personal injuries);


    (b) a contribution to a complying superannuation plan in respect of you that would be covered under section 292-95 if:


    (i) the section applied to contributions made before 10 May 2006; and

    (ii) paragraphs 292-95(1)(b) and (d) were disregarded.


    Regulations may provide for exceptions

    294-80(3)    


    The regulations may provide that an item of the table in subsection (1) does not apply to a class of *superannuation income streams specified in the regulations.

    SECTION 294-85   Certain events that result in reduced superannuation  

    294-85(1)    
    A *transfer balance debit arises in your *transfer balance account if:


    (a) subsection (2) or (5) provides that the debit arises; and


    (b) you notify the Commissioner in the *approved form that the debit has arisen.

    Fraud or dishonesty

    294-85(2)    
    A debit arises if:


    (a) a loss is suffered by a *superannuation income stream provider; and


    (b) as a result, the *value of the *superannuation interest that supports a *superannuation income stream of which you are the *retirement phase recipient is reduced; and


    (c) the loss is a result of fraud or dishonesty; and


    (d) an individual has been convicted of an offence involving that fraud or dishonesty.

    294-85(3)    
    The amount of the debit equals the amount by which the *value of the *superannuation interest is reduced as a result of the loss.

    294-85(4)    
    The debit arises at the time of the loss.

    Payments under section 139ZQ of the Bankruptcy Act 1966

    294-85(5)    
    A debit arises if:


    (a) an amount is paid in compliance with a notice given under section 139ZQ of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 ; and


    (b) as a result, the *value of a *superannuation interest that supports a *superannuation income stream of which you are the *retirement phase recipient is reduced.

    294-85(6)    
    The amount of the debit is the amount paid to the trustee in bankruptcy.

    294-85(7)    
    The debit arises at the time of the payment.

    SECTION 294-90   Payment splits  

    294-90(1)    
    A *transfer balance debit arises in your *transfer balance account if:

    (a)    subsection (2) provides that the debit arises; and

    (b)    the Commissioner is notified in the *approved form that the debit has arisen.

    Payment splits

    294-90(2)    
    A debit arises if:

    (a)    a *superannuation interest is subject to a *payment split but remains an interest of the *member spouse; and

    (b)    the superannuation interest supports a *superannuation income stream that is in the *retirement phase; and

    (c)    as a result of the payment split, a proportion of all *superannuation income stream benefits from the income stream is to be paid to a *non-member spouse; and

    (d)    as a result, the member spouse and the non-member spouse are both *retirement phase recipients of the superannuation income stream.

    294-90(3)    
    The amount of the debit is:

    (a)    if you are the *member spouse - the proportion mentioned in paragraph (2)(c) ; and

    (b)    if you are the *non-member spouse - the remaining proportion;

    of the *value, on the day the debit arises, of the *superannuation interest that supports the *superannuation income stream affected by the *payment split.


    294-90(4)    
    The debit arises at the later of:

    (a)    

    the operative time (within the meaning of Part VIIIB or VIIIC (as the case may be) of the Family Law Act 1975 ) for the *payment split; and

    (b)    at the start of the day you first start to have a *transfer balance account.


    SECTION 294-95  

    294-95   Payment splits - no double debiting  


    If a *transfer balance debit, worked out by reference to a particular proportion, arises in your *transfer balance account because a *superannuation interest is subject to a *payment split, each of the following debits arising in your account at a later time in respect of the same interest is to be reduced by the same proportion:


    (a) a debit that arises under item 1 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) (about commutations), but only if the commuted income stream is a *capped defined benefit income stream;


    (b) a debit that arises under item 3 of that table (about events that result in reduced superannuation);


    (c) a debit that arises under item 5 or 6 of that table (about income streams that stop being in the retirement phase).

    Subdivision 294-D - Modifications for certain defined benefit income streams  

    Guide to Subdivision 294-D

    SECTION 294-120   What this Subdivision is about  


    Certain defined benefit lifetime pensions that are subject to commutation restrictions cannot result in excess transfer balance (instead, Subdivision 303-A applies to the superannuation income stream benefits).

    Certain commutation-restricted income streams started before 1 July 2017 are covered by the same modification.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    294-125 When this Subdivision applies
    294-130 Meaning of capped defined benefit income stream
    294-135 Transfer balance credit - special rule for capped defined benefit income streams
    294-140 Excess transfer balance - special rule for capped defined benefit income streams
    294-145 Transfer balance debits - special rules for capped defined benefit income streams

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 294-125  

    294-125   When this Subdivision applies  


    This Subdivision applies to you if you are the *retirement phase recipient of a *capped defined benefit income stream.

    SECTION 294-130   Meaning of capped defined benefit income stream  

    294-130(1)    
    A *superannuation income stream is a capped defined benefit income stream if it is:


    (a) covered by an item of the following table; and


    (b) if it is covered by any of items 2 to 7 of that table - it is in the *retirement phase just before 1 July 2017.


    Capped defined benefit income streams
    Item Topic A superannuation income stream is covered if:
    1 Lifetime pension it is a pension for the purposes of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (the SIS Act ) that is provided under rules that meet the standards of subregulation 1.06(2) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 (the SIS Regulations )
    2 Lifetime annuity it is an annuity for the purposes of the SIS Act that is provided under a contract that meets the standards of subregulation 1.05(2) of the SIS Regulations
    3 Life expectancy pension it is a pension for the purposes of the SIS Act that is provided under rules that meet the standards of subregulation 1.06(7) of the SIS Regulations
    4 Life expectancy annuity it is an annuity for the purposes of the SIS Act that is provided under a contract that meets the standards of subregulation 1.05(9) of the SIS Regulations
    5 Market linked pension it is a pension for the purposes of the SIS Act that is provided under rules that meet the standards of subregulation 1.06(8) of the SIS Regulations
    6 Market linked annuity it is an annuity for the purposes of the SIS Act that is provided under a contract that meets the standards of subregulation 1.05(10) of the SIS Regulations
    7 Market linked pension (RSA) it is a pension for the purposes of the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 that is provided under terms and conditions that meet the standards of subregulation 1.07(3A) of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997


    294-130(2)    
    A *superannuation income stream is also a capped defined benefit income stream if the income stream is prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection.

    SECTION 294-135   Transfer balance credit - special rule for capped defined benefit income streams  

    294-135(1)    
    Section 294-25 applies in relation to a *capped defined benefit income stream as if a reference in that section to the *value of a *superannuation interest were a reference to the *special value of the superannuation interest.

    Meaning of special value - lifetime products

    294-135(2)    
    The special value , at a particular time, of a *superannuation interest that supports an income stream that is, or was at any time, a *capped defined benefit income stream covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 294-130(1) , is the amount worked out using the formula:

    Annual entitlement × 16

    where:

    annual entitlement
    is worked out by:


    (a) dividing the amount of the first *superannuation income stream benefit you are entitled to receive from the income stream just after that time by the number of whole days to which that benefit relates; and


    (b) multiplying the result by 365.



    Meaning of special value - life expectancy and market linked products

    294-135(3)    
    The special value , at a particular time, of a *superannuation interest that supports an income stream that is, or was at any time, a *capped defined benefit income stream covered by any of items 3 to 7 of thetable in subsection 294-130(1) , is the amount worked out using the formula:

    Annual entitlement × Remaining term

    where:

    annual entitlement
    has the same meaning as in subsection (2) of this section.

    remaining term
    means the number of years remaining at that time in the period throughout which *superannuation income stream benefits are payable under the income stream, rounded up to the next whole number.



    Regulations

    294-135(4)    
    The regulations may specify a method for determining the special value of a *superannuation interest that supports a *superannuation income stream prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of subsection 294-130(2) .

    SECTION 294-140   Excess transfer balance - special rule for capped defined benefit income streams  

    294-140(1)    
    Despite section 294-30 , you have excess transfer balance at a particular time if, at that time, the *transfer balance in your *transfer balance account:


    (a) exceeds your *transfer balance cap at that time; and


    (b) exceeds your capped defined benefit balance from subsection (3) of this section at that time.

    294-140(2)    
    The amount of the excess transfer balance is the lesser of the 2 excesses.

    Note:

    For modifications of the tax treatment of benefits paid from capped defined benefit income streams, see Subdivision 303-A .



    Your capped defined benefit balance

    294-140(3)    
    You have an amount under this subsection (a capped defined benefit balance ) at a time equal to:


    (a) the sum of the *transfer balance credits in your *transfer balance account at that time in respect of *capped defined benefit income streams; less


    (b) the sum of the *transfer balance debits (if any) in your transfer balance account at that time in respect of capped defined benefit income streams.

    SECTION 294-145   Transfer balance debits - special rules for capped defined benefit income streams  


    Debit for commutation

    294-145(1)    
    Item 1 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) applies in relation to a *capped defined benefit income stream as if the reference in column 2 of that item to the amount of the *superannuation lump sum were a reference to:


    (a) in a case where the commutation mentioned in column 1 of that item is a commutation in full - the *debit value, just before the commutation takes place, of the *superannuation interest that supports the capped defined benefit income stream; or


    (b) in a case where that commutation is a commutation in part:


    (i) if the capped defined benefit income stream is, or was at any time, covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 294-130(1) - the debit value mentioned in paragraph (a), multiplied by the fraction mentioned in subsection (1A); or

    (ii) if the capped defined benefit income stream is, or was at any time, covered by any of items 3 to 7 of the table in subsection 294-130(1) - the amount mentioned in subsection (1B).

    294-145(1A)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(i), the fraction is:


    1 SV just after commutation  
    SV just before commutation  

    where:

    SV just after commutation
    means the *special value, just after the commutation takes place, of the *superannuation interest that supports the *capped defined benefit income stream.

    SV just before commutation
    means the *special value, just before the commutation takes place, of the *superannuation interest that supports the *capped defined benefit income stream.


    294-145(1B)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(ii), the amount is the lesser of the following:


    (a) the *debit value mentioned in paragraph (1)(a);


    (b) the amount (disregarding this section) of the *superannuation lump sum you received because of the commutation (as mentioned in item 1 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) ).



    Debit for events that result in reduced superannuation

    294-145(2)    
    Item 3 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) (about events that result in reduced superannuation) applies in relation to a *capped defined benefit income stream as if the amount of the debit provided for in section 294-85 was the *debit value, just before the loss or payment reduces the *value of the *superannuation interest that supports the capped defined benefit income stream, multiplied by the amount worked out using the following formula:


    1 SV just after event  
    SV just before event  

    where:

    SV just after event
    means the *special value, worked out just after the loss or payment reduces the *value of the *superannuation interest that supports the *capped defined benefit income stream.

    SV just before event
    means the *special value, worked out just before the loss or payment reduces the *value of the *superannuation interest that supports the *capped defined benefit income stream.



    Debit for payment split

    294-145(3)    
    Item 4 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) (about a debit for a payment split) applies in relation to a *capped defined benefit income stream as if the reference in section 294-90 to the *value of the *superannuation interest were a reference to the *debit value of the superannuation interest.

    Debits for loss of earnings exemption

    294-145(4)    
    Items 5 and 6 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) apply in relation to an income stream that is, or was, a *capped defined benefit income stream as if the reference in the item to the *value of a *superannuation interest were a reference to the *debit value of the superannuation interest.

    Meaning of debit value

    294-145(5)    
    The debit value , at a particular time, of a *superannuation interest that supports an income stream that is, or was at any time, a *capped defined benefit income stream covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 294-130(1) , is:


    (a) the amount of the *transfer balance credit that arose in your *transfer balance account in respect of the income stream; less


    (b) the amount of any *transfer balance debits (apart from debits arising under item 4 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) ) that have arisen in your transfer balance account in respect of the income stream before that time.

    294-145(6)    
    The debit value , at a particular time, of a *superannuation interest that supports an income stream that is, or was at any time, a *capped defined benefit income stream covered by any of items 3 to 7 of the table in subsection 294-130(1) is:


    (a) the amount of the *transfer balance credit that arose in your *transfer balance account in respect of the income stream; less


    (b) the sum of the following:


    (i) the amount of any *transfer balance debits (apart from debits arising under item 4 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) ) that have arisen in your transfer balance account in respect of the income stream before that time;

    (ii) if item 1 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) applies in relation to the income stream because the income stream is commuted - the amount worked out under subsection (6A).

    294-145(6A)    
    The amount is the sum of the following:


    (a) the total amount of *superannuation income stream benefits that you were entitled to receive from the income stream before the start of the financial year in which the commutation takes place;


    (b) if regulation 1.07B of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 applies to the income stream - the greater of the following:


    (i) the minimum amount under subregulation 1.07B(4) of those regulations for the income stream for that financial year;

    (ii) the total amount of superannuation income stream benefits that you received from the income stream in that financial year (other than superannuation income stream benefits that you were entitled to receive from the income stream before the start of that financial year);


    (c) if regulation 1.07C of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 applies to the income stream - the greater of the following:


    (i) the minimum amount under subregulation 1.07C(3) of those regulations for the income stream for that financial year;

    (ii) the total amount of superannuation income stream benefits that you received from the income stream in that financial year (other than superannuation income stream benefits that you were entitled to receive from the income stream before the start of that financial year);


    (d) if regulation 1.08 of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997 applies to the income stream - the greater of the following:


    (i) the minimum amount under regulation 1.08 of those regulations for the income stream for that financial year;

    (ii) the total amount of superannuation income stream benefits that you received from the income stream in that financial year (other than superannuation income stream benefits that you were entitled to receive from the income stream before the start of that financial year).


    Regulations

    294-145(7)    
    The regulations may specify a method for determining the debit value of a *superannuation interest that supports a *superannuation income stream prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of subsection 294-130(2) .

    Subdivision 294-E - Modifications for death benefits dependants who are children  

    Guide to Subdivision 294-E

    SECTION 294-170   What this Subdivision is about  


    If you are a death benefits dependant, and a child, you are not required to use your retirement transfer balance cap to receive a death benefits income stream.

    However, there is a cap on the total amount of your death benefits income streams that receives the earnings tax exemption.

    This cap is based on the deceased ' s superannuation interests in the retirement phase, or, if the deceased did not have any superannuation interests in the retirement phase, on the transfer balance cap.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    294-175 When this Subdivision applies
    294-180 Transfer balance account ends
    294-185 Transfer balance cap - special rule for child recipient
    294-190 Cap increment - child recipient just before 1 July 2017
    294-195 Cap increment - child recipient on or after 1 July 2017, deceased had no transfer balance account
    294-200 Cap increment - child recipient on or after 1 July 2017, deceased had transfer balance account

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 294-175   When this Subdivision applies  

    294-175(1)    
    This Subdivision applies to you if you are a *child recipient of a *superannuation income stream.

    294-175(2)    
    You are a child recipient of a *superannuation income stream if:


    (a) because of the death of a person, you are a *retirement phase recipient of the superannuation income stream; and


    (b) you are a *child, and a *death benefits dependant, of the deceased; and


    (c) you are covered by paragraph 6.21(2A)(b) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 or paragraph 4.24(3A)(b) of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997 (which are about children who are under age 18, or under age 25 and financially dependent or who have a disability).

    SECTION 294-180   Transfer balance account ends  

    294-180(1)    
    Despite sections 294-15 and 294-45 , your *transfer balance account ceases at a time if:


    (a) just before that time, you were a *child recipient of one or more *superannuation income streams; and


    (b) just after that time, you are no longer a child recipient of any superannuation income stream; and


    (c) no *transfer balance credits arose in the transfer balance account in respect of a superannuation income stream of which you were a *retirement phase recipient, but not a child recipient.

    294-180(2)    
    If you again start to have a *transfer balance account at a later time, this Division applies in relation to that later transfer balance account as if it were the only transfer balance account you have had.

    SECTION 294-185   Transfer balance cap - special rule for child recipient  

    294-185(1)    
    Despite section 294-35 , your transfer balance cap on a day is the sum of the cap increments that have arisen under this Subdivision on and before that day.

    Note:

    Your transfer balance cap is not worked out on a financial year basis and it is not indexed.


    294-185(2)    
    However, if there are one or more *superannuation income streams of which you are, on that day, a *retirement phase recipient but not a *child recipient, your transfer balance cap on that day is the sum of:


    (a) the sum of the cap increments that have arisen under this Subdivision on and before that day; and


    (b) your transfer balance cap for the *financial year in which the day falls, worked out disregarding:


    (i) any cap increments that arise under this Subdivision; and

    (ii) any *transfer balance credits or *transfer balance debits that have arisen in your *transfer balance account in respect of superannuation income streams of which you are a child recipient.
    Note:

    Paragraph (b) is the transfer balance cap you would have if you were not a child recipient of any income stream. Disregarding credits, debits and cap increments allows this cap to be indexed appropriately under section 294-40 (which is about proportional indexation).


    SECTION 294-190   Cap increment - child recipient just before 1 July 2017  

    294-190(1)    
    A cap increment arises if, just before 1 July 2017, you are the *child recipient of a *superannuation income stream.

    294-190(2)    
    The amount of the cap increment is the *general transfer balance cap.

    294-190(3)    
    The cap increment arises on 1 July 2017.

    SECTION 294-195   Cap increment - child recipient on or after 1 July 2017, deceased had no transfer balance account  

    294-195(1)    
    A cap increment arises if:


    (a) on a day (the starting day ) on or after 1 July 2017, you start to be the *child recipient of a *superannuation income stream; and


    (b) the deceased did not have a *transfer balance account just before death.

    294-195(2)    
    The amount of the cap increment is:


    (a) the *general transfer balance cap, unless paragraph (b) applies; or


    (b) if you are not the only person to receive a *superannuation death benefit because of the death of the person - the proportion of the general transfer balance cap that corresponds to your share of the deceased ' s *superannuation interests.

    294-195(3)    
    The cap increment arises on the starting day.

    SECTION 294-200   Cap increment - child recipient on or after 1 July 2017, deceased had transfer balance account  

    294-200(1)    
    A cap increment arises if:


    (a) on a day (the starting day ) on or after 1 July 2017, you start to be the *child recipient of a *superannuation income stream; and


    (b) the deceased had a *transfer balance account just before death.

    Income stream fully funded by deceased ' s retirement phase interests

    294-200(2)    
    If the *superannuation interest that supports the *superannuation income stream is wholly attributable to one or more superannuation interests of the deceased that were in the *retirement phase, the amount of the cap increment equals the amount of the *transfer balance credit that arises in your *transfer balance account in respect of the *superannuation income stream.

    Income stream fully funded by deceased ' s accumulation phase interests

    294-200(3)    
    If the *superannuation interest that supports the *superannuation income stream is wholly attributable to one or more superannuation interests of the deceased that were not in the *retirement phase, the amount of the cap increment is nil.

    Note:

    A superannuation income stream covered by this subsection will generally result in excess transfer balance. The exceptions are: where you have additional cap increments under section 294-190 or 294-195 , or where you have a higher cap under subsection 294-185(2) because you also receive a non-death benefit income stream.



    Income stream partly funded by deceased ' s accumulation interests

    294-200(4)    
    If the *superannuation interest that supports the *superannuation income stream is:


    (a) in part (the retirement phase part ) attributable to a superannuation interest of the deceased that was in the *retirement phase; and


    (b) in part attributable to a superannuation interest of the deceased that was not in the retirement phase;

    the amount of the cap increment is so much of the *transfer balance credit that arises in your *transfer balance account in respect of the superannuation income stream as represents the retirement phase part.

    Note:

    A superannuation income stream covered by this subsection will generally result in excess transfer balance. The exceptions are: where you have additional cap increments under section 294-190 or 294-195 , or where you have a higher cap under subsection 294-185(2) because you also receive a non-death benefit income stream.



    Reduced increment for excess transfer balance

    294-200(5)    
    Despite subsections (2) and (4), the cap increment is reduced if there was *excess transfer balance in the deceased ' s *transfer balance account just before death. The amount of the reduction is:


    (a) the proportion of the excess transfer balance that corresponds to your share of the deceased ' s *superannuation interests that were in the *retirement phase; less


    (b) the amount of any *superannuation lump sum paid to you, because of the death of the person from a superannuation interest of the deceased that was in the retirement phase.

    When cap increment arises

    294-200(6)    
    The cap increment arises:


    (a) on the starting day, unless paragraph (b) applies; or


    (b) if you are a reversionary beneficiary - at the end of the period of 12 months beginning on the starting day.

    Treatment of investment earnings after death

    294-200(7)    
    For the purposes of working out under this section the extent to which a *superannuation interest is attributable to another superannuation interest, if:


    (a) a superannuation interest of the deceased was in the *retirement phase; and


    (b) on or after the death of the deceased, an amount of investment earnings is added to the superannuation interest;

    the superannuation interest is taken to include that amount of investment earnings, except to the extent that the amount of investment earnings includes an amount paid under a policy of insurance on the life of the deceased or an amount arising from self-insurance.


    Subdivision 294-F - Excess transfer balance tax  

    Guide to Subdivision 294-F

    SECTION 294-225   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision neutralises the earnings tax exemption on retirement phase income streams that result in excess transfer balance.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    294-230 Excess transfer balance tax
    294-235 Your excess transfer balance earnings
    294-240 When tax is payable - original assessments
    294-245 When tax is payable - amended assessments
    294-250 General interest charge

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 294-230   Excess transfer balance tax  

    294-230(1)    
    If there is an *excess transfer balance period for your *transfer balance account, you are liable to pay *excess transfer balance tax imposed by the Superannuation (Excess Transfer Balance Tax) Imposition Act 2016 for the period.

    Note:

    The amount of the tax is set out in the Superannuation (Excess Transfer Balance Tax) Imposition Act 2016 .


    294-230(2)    
    An excess transfer balance period for a *transfer balance account is a continuous period of one or more days during which, at the end of each day, there is *excess transfer balance in the account.

    294-230(3)    
    Your *excess transfer balance tax is worked out by reference to the sum of:


    (a) your *excess transfer balance earnings for each day in the *excess transfer balance period; and


    (b) for each day in the excess transfer balance period that is also a day in the period mentioned in subsection 294-25(2) (the determination period ) - the amount worked out bymultiplying the rate mentioned in subsection 294-235(2) for the day by the sum of your excess transfer balance earnings for each previous day in the determination period.

    SECTION 294-235   Your excess transfer balance earnings  

    294-235(1)    
    Your excess transfer balance earnings for a day is worked out by multiplying the rate mentioned in subsection (2) for that day by the amount of your *excess transfer balance at the end of that day.

    294-235(2)    
    The rate is the lower of:


    (a) the rate worked out under subsection 8AAD(1) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for the day; and


    (b) a rate determined under subsection (3) for the day.

    294-235(3)    
    The Minister may, by legislative instrument, determine a rate for a day.

    SECTION 294-240  

    294-240   When tax is payable - original assessments  


    Your *assessed excess transfer balance tax is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the Commissioner gives you notice of the assessment of the amount of the *excess transfer balance tax.
    Note:

    For assessments of excess transfer balance tax, see Division 155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 294-245  

    294-245   When tax is payable - amended assessments  


    If the Commissioner amends your assessment, any extra *assessed excess transfer balance tax resulting from the amendment is due and payable 21 days after the day the Commissioner gives you notice of the amended assessment.

    SECTION 294-250  

    294-250   General interest charge  


    If an amount of *assessed excess transfer balance tax that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the *general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:


    (a) begins on the day on which the amount was due to be paid; and


    (b) ends on the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:


    (i) the assessed excess transfer balance tax;

    (ii) general interest charge on any of the assessed excess transfer balance tax.
    Note:

    The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Division 295 - Taxation of superannuation entities  

    Guide to Division 295  

    SECTION 295-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out special rules about the taxation of superannuation entities.

    It sets out how to calculate the taxable income of those entities and to identify the components of that taxable income for the purpose ofapplying the appropriate tax rate.

    It sets out how to calculate the no-TFN contributions income of relevant entities for an income year for the purpose of applying the appropriate tax rate.

    Subdivision 295-A - Provisions of general operation  

    SECTION 295-5   Entities to which Division applies  

    295-5(1)    
    This Division applies to these entities:


    (a) a *complying superannuation fund;


    (b) a *non-complying superannuation fund;


    (c) a *complying approved deposit fund;


    (d) a *non-complying approved deposit fund;


    (e) a *pooled superannuation trust;

    whether they are established by an *Australian law, by a public authority constituted by or under such a law or in some other way.


    295-5(2)    
    The *superannuation provider in relation to an entity referred to in paragraph (1)(a) to (d) is liable to pay tax on the taxable income of the entity.

    Note:

    A superannuation provider in relation to an entity referred to in paragraphs (1)(a) and (b) or in relation to an RSA is liable to pay tax on the no-TFN contributions income of the entity: see section 295-605 .


    295-5(3)    
    The trustee of a *pooled superannuation trust is liable to pay tax on the taxable income of the trust.

    295-5(4)    
    This Division also applies to an *RSA provider that is not a *life insurance company.

    Note 1:

    Division 320 deals with RSA providers that are life insurance companies.

    Note 2:

    However, Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to RSA providers that are life insurance companies: see section 320-155 .


    SECTION 295-10   How to work out the tax payable by superannuation entities  

    295-10(1)    
    Use this method for *superannuation funds, *approved deposit funds and *pooled superannuation trusts: Method statement


    Step 1.

    For a *superannuation fund, work out the *no-TFN contributions income. Apply the applicable rates as set out in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 to that income.


    Step 2.

    Work out the entity ' s assessable income and deductions taking account of the special rules in this Division. The special rules modify some provisions of this Act. They also include amounts in assessable income, allow deductions and exempt amounts from income tax.


    Step 3.

    Work out the entity ' s taxable income as if its trustee:

  • (a) were an Australian resident (except where paragraph (b) applies); or
  • (b) for a *non-complying superannuation fund that is a *foreign superannuation fund for the income year - were not an Australian resident.

  • Step 4.

    For a *complying superannuation entity, work out the *low tax component and *non-arm ' s length component of the entity ' s taxable income.


    Step 5.

    Apply the applicable rates as set out in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 to:

  • (a) if step 4 applies to the entity - the components worked out under that step; or
  • (b) otherwise - the entity ' s taxable income.

  • Step 6.

    Subtract the entity ' s *tax offsets from the step 5 amount or, for a *superannuation fund, from the sum of the fund ' s step 1 and step 5 amounts.


    295-10(2)    


    Use this method for *RSA providers: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out the entity ' s *no-TFN contributions income. Apply the applicable rates as set out in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 to that income.


    Step 2.

    Work out the entity ' s assessable income and deductions taking account of the special rules in this Division.


    Step 3.

    Work out the *RSA component and *standard component of the entity ' s taxable income.


    Step 4.

    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)


    Step 5.

    Apply the applicable rates as set out in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 to the components. The *RSA component is taxed at a concessional rate.


    Step 6.

    Subtract the entity ' s *tax offsets from the sum of the entity ' s step 1 and step 5 amounts.


    SECTION 295-15  

    295-15   Division does not impose a tax on property of a State  


    This Division does not impose a tax on property of any kind belonging to a State (within the meaning of section 114 of the Constitution).

    SECTION 295-20  

    295-20   Exempting laws ineffective  


    A *Commonwealth law (other than this Act) does not have the effect of exempting the trustee of an entity to which this Division applies from the liability to pay tax unless it does so expressly.

    SECTION 295-25   Assessments on basis of anticipated SIS Act notice  

    295-25(1)    
    The Commissioner may make an assessment for a fund or trust that is not a *complying superannuation entity for the income year as if it were such an entity if the Commissioner considers it likely that a notice will be given under section 40 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 having the effect that it will become such an entity.


    295-25(2)    
    However, the grounds for making an assessment under subsection (1) are taken never to have existed if:


    (a) the Commissioner becomes satisfied that the notice will not be given; or


    (b) *APRA does not receive the documents referred to in subsection 36(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 about the fund or trust before the end of 12 months after the assessment is made.

    SECTION 295-30  

    295-30   Effect of revocation etc. of SIS Act notices  


    This Division has effect as if a notice given under section 342 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (about pre-1 July 88 funding credits) or under regulations made for the purposes of that section had never been given if:


    (a) the notice is revoked; or


    (b) the decision to give the notice is set aside.

    SECTION 295-35  

    295-35   Acronyms used in tables  


    In tables in this Division, these acronyms are used for these entities:


    Acronyms used in tables
    Item Entity Acronym
    1 * Complying superannuation fund CSF
    2 * Non-complying superannuation fund N-CSF
    3 * Complying approved deposit fund CADF
    4 * Non-complying approved deposit fund N-CADF
    5 * Pooled superannuation trust PST

    Subdivision 295-B - Modifications of provisions of this Act  

    SECTION 295-85   CGT to be primary code for calculating gains or losses  

    295-85(1)    
    The modifications in subsection (2) apply if a *CGT event happens involving a *CGT asset that was owned by a *complying superannuation entity just before the time of the event.


    295-85(2)    
    These provisions do not apply to the *CGT event:


    (a) sections 6-5 (about *ordinary income), 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct), and 15-15 and 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans);


    (aa) section 230-15 (about financial arrangements);


    (b) sections 25A and 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about profit-making undertakings or schemes).



    Exceptions

    295-85(3)    
    The provisions referred to in subsection (2) can apply to the *CGT event if:


    (a) any *capital gain or *capital loss from the event is attributable to currency exchange rate fluctuations; or


    (b) the *CGT asset is one of these:


    (i) debenture stock, a bond, *debenture, certificate of entitlement, bill of exchange, promissory note or other security;

    (ii) a deposit with a bank, building society or other financial institution;

    (iii) a loan (secured or not);

    (iv) some other contract under which an entity is liable to pay an amount (whether the liability is secured or not).

    295-85(4)    


    The provisions referred to in subsection (2) can also apply to the *CGT event if a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event is disregarded because of one of the provisions in this table:


    Where gain or loss disregarded because of CGT provision
    Item Provision Brief description
    1 Paragraph 104-15(4)(a) Title in a CGT asset does not pass when a hire purchase or similar agreement ends
    2 Section 118-5 Cars, motor cycles and valour decorations
    3 Section 118-10 Collectables and personal use assets
    4 Section 118-13 Shares in a PDF
    5 Section 118-25 Trading stock
    6 Section 118-30 Film copyright
    7 Section 118-35 R & D
    8 Section 118-55 Foreign currency hedging gains and losses
    9 Section 118-60 Certain gifts
    10 Subsection 118-300(1), for general insurance policies covered by table item 2 in that subsection General insurance policies for property
    11 Section 118-305 Superannuation
    12 Section 118-310 CGT event happens to right to, or part of, RSA

    Note:

    For item 5, certain assets (particularly shares, units in a unit trust, and land) are not trading stock when owned by the entity (see paragraph 70-10(2)(b) ).


    SECTION 295-90   CGT rules for pre-30 June 1988 assets  

    295-90(1)    
    This section applies to the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity.


    295-90(2)    
    Parts 3-1 and 3-3 (about capital gains and losses) apply to a *CGT asset that:


    (a) the trustee or a former trustee owned at the end of 30 June 1988; and


    (b) the trustee owned at the commencement of this section;

    as if the trustee had *acquired the asset on 30 June 1988.


    295-90(3)    
    Subsection (2) does not affect how to work out the asset's *cost base or *reduced cost base.

    Note:

    See Subdivision 295-B of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 for rules about cost base.


    295-90(4)    
    Subsection 104-30(5) applies to an option granted by the trustee as if the reference in that subsection to 20 September 1985 were a reference to 1 July 1988.

    SECTION 295-95   Deductions related to contributions  

    295-95(1)    
    Provisions of this Act about deducting amounts apply to these entities as if all contributions made to them were included in their assessable income:


    (a) *complying superannuation funds;


    (b) *non-complying superannuation funds that are *Australian superannuation funds;


    (c) *complying approved deposit funds;


    (d) *non-complying approved deposit funds;


    (e) *RSA providers.

    Note 1:

    This means that the entities can deduct amounts incurred in obtaining the contributions.

    Note 2:

    Examples of contributions that are not assessable are:

  • • contributions which the contributor cannot deduct;
  • • contributions excluded from assessable income under Subdivision 295-D .

  • 295-95(2)    
    A *superannuation fund is an Australian superannuation fund at a time, and for the income year in which that time occurs, if:


    (a) the fund was established in Australia, or any asset of the fund is situated in Australia at that time; and


    (b) at that time, the central management and control of the fund is ordinarily in Australia; and


    (c) at that time either the fund had no member coveredby subsection (3) (an active member ) or at least 50% of:


    (i) the total *market value of the fund ' s assets attributable to *superannuation interests held by active members; or

    (ii) the sum of the amounts that would be payable to or in respect of active members if they voluntarily ceased to be members;
    is attributable to superannuation interests held by active members who are Australian residents.

    295-95(3)    
    A member is covered by this subsection at a time if the member is:


    (a) a contributor to the fund at that time; or


    (b) an individual on whose behalf contributions have been made, other than an individual:


    (i) who is a foreign resident; and

    (ii) who is not a contributor at that time; and

    (iii) for whom contributions made to the fund on the individual ' s behalf after the individual became a foreign resident are only payments in respect of a time when the individual was an Australian resident.

    295-95(4)    


    To avoid doubt, the central management and control of a *superannuation fund is ordinarily in Australia at a time even if that central management and control is temporarily outside Australia for a period of not more than 2 years.

    SECTION 295-100   Deductions for investing in PSTs and life policies  

    295-100(1)    
    Provisions of this Act about deducting amounts apply to *complying superannuation funds and *complying approved deposit funds as if *ordinary income and *statutory income received from these investments were included in their assessable income:


    (a) units in a *pooled superannuation trust;


    (b) *life insurance policies issued by a *life insurance company;


    (c) an interest in a trust whose assets consist only of life insurance policies issued by a life insurance company.

    Note:

    Income from these investments is not assessable: see for example sections 295-105 and 118-350 .


    295-100(2)    


    A *complying superannuation fund cannot deduct an amount (otherwise than under section 295-465 ) for fees or charges incurred for:


    (a) *complying superannuation life insurance policies; or


    (b) *exempt life insurance policies; or


    (c) units in a *pooled superannuation trust that are *segregated current pension assets of the fund.


    SECTION 295-105  

    295-105   Distributions to PST unitholders  


    The assessable income of a *complying superannuation entity does not include amounts *derived by the entity because it holds units in a *pooled superannuation trust.
    Note:

    The entity will not be subject to any tax liability when it disposes of the units: see subsection 295-85(2) and section 118-350 .

    Subdivision 295-C - Contributions included  

    Guide to Subdivision 295-C

    SECTION 295-155   What this Subdivision is about  


    There are basically 3 types of assessable contributions:

  • (a) those made by a contributor (for example, an employer) on behalf of someone else(for example, an employee); and
  • (b) those made on the contributor ' s own behalf for which the contributor is entitled to a deduction; and
  • (c) those transferred from a foreign superannuation fund to an Australian superannuation fund.
  • There are some additions and exceptions.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Contributions and payments
    295-160 Contributions and payments
    295-165 Exception - spouse contributions
    295-170 Exception - Government co-contributions and contributions for a child
    295-171 (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)
    295-173 Exception - trustee contributions
    295-175 Exception - payments by a member spouse
    295-180 Exception - choice to exclude certain contributions
    295-185 Exception - temporary residents
    Personal contributions and roll-over amounts
    295-190 Personal contributions and roll-over amounts
    295-195 Exclusion of personal contributions - contributions
    295-197 Exclusion of personal contributions - successor funds
    Transfers from foreign funds
    295-200 Transfers from foreign superannuation funds
    Application of tables to RSA providers
    295-205 Application of tables to RSA providers
    Former constitutionally protected funds
    295-210 Former constitutionally protected funds

    Contributions and payments

    SECTION 295-160  

    295-160   Contributions and payments  


    The assessable income of an entity includes contributions or payments as set out in this table for the income year in which the contributions or payments are received.
    Note:

    For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35 .


    Contributions and payments included in assessable income
    Item Assessable income of this entity: Includes:
    1 CSF
    N-CSF that is an * Australian superannuation fund for the income year
    * RSA provider
    Contribution to provide * superannuation benefits for someone else (except a contribution that is a * roll-over superannuation benefit)
    2 N-CSF that is a * foreign superannuation fund for the income year Contribution to provide * superannuation benefits for someone else to the extent that it relates to a period when that person was:
        (a) an Australian resident; or
        (b) a foreign resident who * derives * withholding payments covered by subsection 900-12(3)
        (except a contribution that is a * roll-over superannuation benefit)
    3 CSF
    CADF
    * RSA provider
    Payment under section 65 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992
    4 CSF
    * RSA provider
    Payment under section 61 or 61A of the Small Superannuation Accounts Act 1995

    SECTION 295-165   Exception - spouse contributions  

    295-165(1)    
    Item 1 of the table in section 295-160 does not include in assessable income a contribution made by an individual to a *complying superannuation fund or an *RSA:


    (a) to provide *superannuation benefits for the individual's *spouse (regardless whether the benefits are payable to the individual's spouse's *SIS dependants if the individual's spouse dies before or after becoming entitled to receive the benefits); and


    (b) that the individual cannot deduct under Subdivision 290-B .

    295-165(2)    
    Paragraph (1)(a) does not apply to *superannuation benefits for a *spouse living permanently separately and apart from the individual.

    SECTION 295-170   Exception - Government co-contributions and contributions for a child  

    295-170(1)    
    Item 1 of the table in section 295-160 does not include in assessable income a contribution:


    (a) that is a Government co-contribution made under the Superannuation (Government Co-contribution for Low Income Earners) Act 2003 ; or


    (b) for the benefit of a person under 18 that is not made by or on behalf of the person's employer.

    295-170(2)    
    Item 4 of the table in section 295-160 does not include in assessable income a payment to the extent to which it represents a Government co-contribution or co-contributions made under the Superannuation (Government Co-contribution for Low Income Earners) Act 2003 .

    295-171   (Repealed) SECTION 295-171 Exception - payments from FHSAs and Government FHSA contributions  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    SECTION 295-173  

    295-173   Exception - trustee contributions  


    Item 1 of the table in section 295-160 does not include in assessable income:


    (a) a contribution made by an entity that was, when the contribution was made, the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity; or


    (b) a contribution made out of the *complying superannuation assets, or out of the *segregated exempt assets, of a *life insurance company.

    SECTION 295-175  

    295-175   Exception - payments by a member spouse  


    Contributions are not included in assessable income under section 295-160 if they are an amount paid by a member spouse, as mentioned in regulations under the Family Law Act 1975 , to a *regulated superannuation fund, or to an *RSA provider, to be held for the benefit of the *non-member spouse in satisfaction of the non-member spouse's entitlement in respect of the *superannuation interest concerned.

    SECTION 295-180   Exception - choice to exclude certain contributions  

    295-180(1)    


    Item 1 of the table in section 295-160 does not include an amount in the assessable income of a *public sector superannuation scheme for an income year to the extent that the trustee chooses that it not be included.

    295-180(2)    
    The entity that made the contributions must consent to the choice.

    Note:

    Making this choice effectively shifts the liability for tax on the contributions to the recipient of the benefit. The benefit is treated as an element untaxed in the fund: see Subdivision 301-C .


    295-180(3)    
    However, the choice cannot be made for an income year for an amount that exceeds the sum of amounts covered by notices given by the trustee under section 307-285 for *superannuation benefits paid in the income year.

    295-180(4)    
    A choice under this section cannot be revoked or withdrawn.

    295-180(5)    


    A choice under this section cannot be made in relation to a *public sector superannuation scheme that comes into operation after 5 September 2006.

    SECTION 295-185  

    295-185   Exception - temporary residents  


    Item 2 of the table in section 295-160 does not include a contribution in the assessable income of an entity if the individual (for whom it was made) is a *temporary resident at the end of the income year to which the contribution relates.

    Personal contributions and roll-over amounts

    SECTION 295-190   Personal contributions and roll-over amounts  

    295-190(1)    


    The assessable income of an entity includes amounts as set out in this table.
    Note:

    For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35 .


    Personal contributions and roll-over amounts included in assessable income
    Item Assessable income of this entity: Includes:
    1 CSF
    * RSA provider
    A contribution:
    (a) made to the CSF or *RSA; and
    (b) covered by a valid and acknowledged notice given to the *superannuation provider of the CSF or RSA under section 290-170
    2 CSF
    CADF
    N-CADF
    * RSA provider
    A * roll-over superannuation benefit that an individual is taken to receive under section 307-15 to the extent that:
      (a) it consists of an * element untaxed in the fund (other than an element untaxed in the fund under subsection 307-290(4) ); and
      (b) is not an * excess untaxed roll-over amount for that individual
    2A CSF
    * RSA provider
    A *roll-over superannuation benefit that an individual is taken to receive under section 307-15 to the extent that:
    (a) the CSF or *RSA is a *successor fund; and
    (b) the benefit relates to a contribution that, before it was transferred to the successor fund, was not covered by a valid and acknowledged notice given to any *superannuation provider under section 290-170 ; and
    (c) while the benefit is held in the successor fund, the contribution becomes covered by a valid and acknowledged notice given to the superannuation provider of the successor fund under that section
    3 CSF
    CADF
    * RSA provider
    The * taxable component of a directed termination payment (within the meaning of section 82-10F of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 )


    295-190(1A)    


    Items 2 and 2A of the table in subsection (1) do not apply to a *roll-over superannuation benefit that is a *departing Australia superannuation payment made under subsection 20H(2) , (2AA) or (2A) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 .

    Income years in which amounts are included in assessable income

    295-190(2)    
    A contribution referred to in item 1 is included in the income year in which it is received if the notice is received by the *superannuation provider by the day the provider lodges its *income tax return for that income year.

    295-190(3)    
    Otherwise it is included in the income year in which the notice is received.

    295-190(4)    
    A payment referred to in item 2 or 3 is included in the income year in which it is received by the *superannuation provider.

    295-190(5)    


    A benefit referred to in item 2A is included in the income year in which it is received if the notice is received by the *superannuation provider by the day the provider lodges its *income tax return for that income year.

    295-190(6)    


    Otherwise it is included in the income year in which the notice is received.

    SECTION 295-195   Exclusion of personal contributions - contributions  


    Variation notice received before return lodged

    295-195(1)    


    A contribution is not included in the assessable income of a *complying superannuation fund or *RSA provider under item 1 of the table in subsection 295-190(1) to the extent that it has been reduced by a notice under section 290-180 if the notice is received by the *superannuation provider before it has lodged its *income tax return for the income year in which the contribution was made.

    Variation notice received after return lodged

    295-195(2)    


    A contribution is not included in the assessable income of a *complying superannuation fund or *RSA provider under item 1 of the table in subsection 295-190(1) for the income year in which the contribution was made to the extent that it has been reduced by a notice under section 290-180 if:


    (a) the notice is received by the *superannuation provider after it has lodged its *income tax return for the income year; and


    (b) the provider exercises the option mentioned in subsection (3).


    295-195(3)    
    An amount referred to in subsection (2) may, at the option of the provider, be excluded from the assessable income of the fund or *RSA provider for the income year referred to in subsection (2) if excluding it would result in a greater reduction in tax for that year than the reduction that would occur for the income year in which the notice is received if a deduction were allowed under item 2 of the table in subsection 295-490(1) .

    Note:

    The exclusion is an alternative to the fund deducting the amount under item 2 of the table in subsection 295-490(1) .


    SECTION 295-197   Exclusion of personal contributions - successor funds  


    Scope

    295-197(1)    
    This section applies to the *superannuation provider (the successor provider ) of a *complying superannuation fund or *RSA if, apart from this section, a *roll-over superannuation benefit would be included in the assessable income of the fund or *RSA provider under item 2A of the table in subsection 295-190(1) .

    Variation notice received before return lodged

    295-197(2)    
    The benefit is not so included, to the extent that the relevant contribution has been reduced by a notice under section 290-180 , if the notice is received by the successor provider before the successor provider has lodged its *income tax return for the income year in which the benefit was transferred.

    Variation notice received after return lodged

    295-197(3)    
    The benefit is not so included in the assessable income for the income year in which the benefit was transferred, to the extent that the relevant contribution has been reduced by a notice under section 290-180 , if:


    (a) the notice is received by the successor provider after the successor provider has lodged its *income tax return for the income year; and


    (b) the successor provider exercises the option mentioned in subsection (4).

    295-197(4)    
    An amount referred to in subsection (3) may, at the option of the successor provider, be excluded from the assessable income of the fund or *RSA provider for the income year referred to in subsection (3) if excluding it would result in a greater reduction in tax for that year than the reduction that would occur for the income year in which the notice is received if a deduction were allowed under item 2B of the table in subsection 295-490(1) .

    Note:

    The exclusion is an alternative to the fund deducting the amount under item 2B of the table in subsection 295-490(1) .


    Transfers from foreign funds

    SECTION 295-200   Transfers from foreign superannuation funds  

    295-200(1)    
    The assessable income of a fund that is an *Australian superannuation fund for the income year includes an amount transferred to the fund from a fund that was a *foreign superannuation fund for the income year in relation to a member of the foreign fund to the extent that the amount transferred exceeds amounts vested in the member at the time of the transfer.

    295-200(2)    
    The assessable income of a fund that is a *complying superannuation fund for the income year includes so much of an amount transferred to the fund from a fund that was a *foreign superannuation fund for the income year as is specified in a choice made by a former member of the foreign fund under section 305-80 .

    295-200(3)    
    The amount is included in the income year in which the transfer happens.

    295-200(4)    


    This section also applies to an amount transferred from a scheme for the payment of benefits in the nature of superannuation upon retirement or death that:


    (a) is not, and never has been, an *Australian superannuation fund or a *foreign superannuation fund; and


    (b) was not established in Australia; and


    (c) is not centrally managed or controlled in Australia.


    Application of tables to RSA providers

    SECTION 295-205  

    295-205   Application of tables to RSA providers  


    The tables in this Subdivision apply to *RSA providers only to the extent that amounts are paid to *RSAs they provide.

    Former constitutionally protected funds

    SECTION 295-210   Former constitutionally protected funds  

    295-210(1)    
    This section applies to a *complying superannuation fund for an income year if the fund ceased to be a *constitutionally protected fund during the year or at the end of the previous year.

    295-210(2)    
    The assessable income of the fund for the income year includes the sum of the *roll-over superannuation benefits to the extent that they consist of the *element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component that would be included in that assessable income if all contributions and earnings accumulated in the fund when the fund ceased to be a *constitutionally protected fund:


    (a) had been paid out of the fund immediately before it ceased to be a constitutionally protected fund; and


    (b) were paid to the fund as roll-over superannuation benefits immediately after that time.

    Subdivision 295-D - Contributions excluded  

    SECTION 295-260   Transferof liability to investment vehicle  

    295-260(1)    
    The *superannuation provider in relation to a *complying superannuation fund or a *complying approved deposit fund (the transferor ) may reduce the amount that would otherwise be included in the fund ' s assessable income for an income year under Subdivision 295-C by agreement with another entity (the transferee ) in which it holds investments.

    What the transferee must be

    295-260(2)    
    The transferee must be a *life insurance company or a *pooled superannuation trust.

    Note:

    Amounts transferred are included in the transferee ' s assessable income: see section 295-320 (for PSTs) and paragraph 320-15(1)(i) (for life insurance companies).



    Agreement requirements

    295-260(3)    
    The transferor may make one agreement only for an income year with a particular transferee.

    295-260(4)    
    An agreement:


    (a) must be in writing, and must be signed by or for the transferor and transferee; and


    (b) must be made by the day the transferor lodges its *income tax return for its income year to which the agreement relates; and


    (c) cannot be revoked.

    Limits on transfer

    295-260(5)    
    The total amount covered by the agreements cannot exceed the amount that would otherwise be included in the transferor ' s assessable income under Subdivision 295-C for that income year.

    295-260(6)    
    The amount covered by an agreement with a particular transferee cannot exceed this amount:


            Greatest equity value        
    Transferor ' s low tax component tax rate

    where:

    greatest equity value
    is the greatest of these amounts during the transferor ' s income year:


    (a) if the transferee is a *pooled superannuation trust - the *market value of the transferor ' s investment in units in the trust;


    (b) if not - the market value of the transferor ' s investment in:


    (i) *life insurance policies issued by the transferee; or

    (ii) a trust whose assets consist only of life insurance policies issued by the transferee.

    transferor ' s low tax component tax rate
    is the rate of tax imposed on the *low tax component of the fund ' s taxable income for the income year.


    SECTION 295-265   Application of pre-1 July 88 funding credits  


    Choice to reduce contributions included in assessable income

    295-265(1)    
    The *superannuation provider in relation to a *complying superannuation fund can choose to reduce the amount of contributions that would otherwise be included in the fund ' s assessable income for an income year under item 1 of the table in section 295-160 if it has pre-1 July 88 funding credits available for the income year.

    When funding credits are available

    295-265(2)    
    Use this method to work out whether a fund has pre-1 July 88 funding credits available for an income year: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Identify the amount of pre-1 July 88 funding credits unused at the end of the previous income year.


    Step 2.

    Index that amount.

    Note:

    Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts.


    Step 3.

    Add any pre-1 July 88 funding credits transferred to the fund in the income year under regulations made for the purposes of subsection 342(7) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 .


    Step 4.

    Deduct from the step 3 amount:

  • (a) pre-1 July 88 funding credits transferred from the fund in the income year under regulations made for the purposes of subsection 342(7) of that Act; and
  • (b) amounts specified in a notice given to the *superannuation provider in relation to the fund under subsection 342(6) of that Act for the income year.

  • Step 5.

    The result is the pre-1 July 88 funding credits available to the fund for the income year.

    That amount, reduced by any amount specified in a choice made under subsection (1) for the income year, is the amount of pre-1 July 88 funding credits unused at the end of the income year.

    Note 1:

    Regulations under subsection 342(7) of the SIS Act allow APRA to approve transfers of pre-1 July 88 funding credits between funds.

    Note 2:

    Subsection 342(6) of that Act covers the situation where the fund's rules are changed to produce a reduction in pre-1 July 88 funding credits and the trustee notifies APRA of the change.


    295-265(3)    
    If a notice is given to the *superannuation provider in relation to the fund under subsection 342(2) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 granting the trustee a pre-1 July 88 funding credit, this section applies as if the pre-1 July 88 funding credit had arisen at the beginning of the income year in which 1 July 1988 occurred.

    295-265(4)    
    However, if a notice is given to the *superannuation provider in relation to the fund under subsection 342(4) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 for the income year, the fund has no pre-1 July 88 funding credits.

    Note:

    Subsection 342(4) of that Act covers the situation where the fund ' s rules are changed to produce a reduction in pre-1 July 88 funding credits and the provider fails to notify APRA of the change.



    Limit on choice

    295-265(5)    
    The total amount covered by the choice cannot exceed the pre-1 July 88 funding credits available to the fund for the income year.

    295-265(6)    
    The total amount covered by the choice also cannot exceed the amount of contributions that would otherwise be included in the fund ' s assessable income for the income year under item 1 of the table in section 295-160 that are used to fund liabilities that accrued before 1 July 1988.

    295-265(7)    
    The regulations may prescribe either or both of the following:


    (a) the manner in which the *superannuation provider in relation to a *superannuation fund is to work out the amount applicable to the fund under subsection (6) for an income year;


    (b) methods (other than the method specified in subsection (6)) of working out how the provider of a superannuation fund can apply pre-1 July 88 funding credits.

    295-265(8)    
    Methods prescribed under paragraph (7)(b) may be applicable to particular *superannuation funds or to a class or classes of superannuation funds.

    SECTION 295-270   Anticipated funding credits  

    295-270(1)    
    Subsection (2) has effect if the *superannuation provider in relation to a *complying superannuation fund expects a notice to be given under subsection 342(2) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 or under regulations made for the purposes of subsection 342(7) of that Act to the effect that pre-1 July 88 funding credits of a particular amount will be available to the fund for the income year.

    295-270(2)    
    Section 295-265 applies to the fund as if pre-1 July 88 funding credits of the anticipated amount were available to the fund for the income year (in addition to any other pre-1 July 88 funding credits available to the fund for the year).

    295-270(3)    
    However, section 295-265 applies to the fund for the income year as if pre-1 July 88 funding credits of the anticipated amount were not available to the fund for the income year if:


    (a) it becomes clear that the expected notice will not be given or that the specified amount of pre-1 July 88 funding credits will not be available; or


    (b) *APRA does not receive the things referred to in subsection 342(3) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (for a notice expected under subsection 342(2) of that Act) or the things required to be given under regulations made for the purposes of subsection 342(7) of that Act (for a notice under those regulations) before the earlier of:


    (i) the end of 12 months after the fund's assessment is made for the income year; and

    (ii) the time the things are required to be given by the regulations.

    Subdivision 295-E - Other income amounts  

    Amounts included

    SECTION 295-320  

    295-320   Other amounts included in assessable income  


    The assessable income of an entity includes the amounts as set out in this table.
    Note:

    For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35 .


    Amounts included in assessable income
    Item Assessable income of this entity: Includes: For the income year:
    1 PST Amount transferred to it by a CSF or CADF under section 295-260 Of the PST that includes the last day of the transferor ' s income year to which the agreement relates
    2 N-CSF that was a CSF for the previous income year * Ordinary income and * statutory income from previous years worked out under section 295-325 Following the income year in which it was a CSF
    3 CSF; or
    N-CSF that is an * Australian superannuation fund for the income year and that was a * foreign superannuation fund for the previous income year
    * Ordinary income and * statutory income from previous years worked out under section 295-330 Following the income year in which it was a foreign superannuation fund
    4 CSF The part of a rebate or refund of an insurance premium that is attributable to an amount deducted under an item of the table in subsection 295-465(1) In which the rebate or refund is received
    5 * RSA provider The part of a rebate or refund of an insurance premium that is attributable to an amount deducted under section 295-475 In which the rebate or refund is received

    SECTION 295-325  

    295-325   Previously complying funds  
    The amount of *ordinary income and *statutory income from previous years included in the assessable income of a fund in an income year under item 2 of the table in section 295-320 is:


    Sum of the * market values of the fund ' s assets just before the start of the income year Sum of the part of the * crystallised undeducted contributions that relates to the period after 30 June 1983 and the * contributions segment for current members at that time so far as they have not been, and cannot be, deducted

    SECTION 295-330  

    295-330   Previously foreign funds  
    The amount of *ordinary income and *statutory income from previous years included in the assessable income of a fund in an income year under item 3 of the table in section 295-320 is:


    Sum of the * market values of the fund ' s assets just before the start of the income year - Amount in the fund at that time representing contributions made by current members

    Amounts excluded

    SECTION 295-335  

    295-335   Amounts excluded from assessable income  


    The assessable income of an entity does not include the amounts set out in this table.
    Note:

    For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35 .


    Amounts excluded from assessable income
    Item This entity: Does not include this in assessable income:
    1 CSF
    CADF
    PST
    A bonus on a * life insurance policy (except a reversionary bonus)
    2 PST Amount attributable to amounts received from a * constitutionally protected fund
    3 * RSA provider A bonus on a * life insurance policy that is an * RSA (except a reversionary bonus)

    Subdivision 295-F - Exempt income  

    SECTION 295-385   Income from assets set aside to meet current pension liabilities  

    295-385(1)    
    The *ordinary income and *statutory income of a *complying superannuation fund for an income year is exempt from income tax to the extent that:

    (a)    it would otherwise be assessable income; and

    (b)    it is from *segregated current pension assets.

    Exception

    295-385(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to:

    (a)    *non-arm ' s length income; or

    (b)    amounts included in assessable income under Subdivision 295-C .

    Meaning of segregated current pension assets

    295-385(3)    
    Assets of a *complying superannuation fund are segregated current pension assets at a time if:

    (a)    

    the assets are invested, held in reserve or otherwise dealt with at that time solely to enable the fund to discharge all or part of its liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund at that time; and

    (b)    the trustee of the fund obtains an *actuary ' s certificate before the date for lodgment of the fund ' s *income tax return for the income year to the effect that the assets and the earnings that the actuary expects will be made from them would provide the amount required to discharge in full those liabilities, or that part of those liabilities, as they fall due.


    295-385(4)    
    Assets of a *complying superannuation fund are also segregated current pension assets of the fund at a time if the assets are invested, held in reserve or otherwise being dealt with at that time for the sole purpose of enabling the fund to discharge all or part of its liabilities (contingent or not), as they become due, in respect of *superannuation income stream benefits:

    (a)    

    that are *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund at that time; and

    (b)    prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this section.


    295-385(5)    


    Subsection (4) does not apply unless, at all times during the income year, the liabilities of the fund (contingent or not) to pay *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund were liabilities in respect of superannuation income stream benefits that are prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this section.

    295-385(6)    


    However, assets of a *complying superannuation fund that are supporting a *superannuation income stream benefit that is prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this section are not segregated current pension assets to the extent that the *market value of the assets exceeds the account balance supporting the benefit.

    295-385(7)    


    Also, *disregarded small fund assets are not segregated current pension assets.

    Meaning of segregated current pension assets - trustee choice

    295-385(8)    


    Despite subsections (3) to (6) , none of the assets of a *complying superannuation fund are segregated current pension assets of the fund at any time in an income year if the trustee of the fund chooses under subsection (9) to treat all of the assets as not being segregated current pension assets for the year.

    295-385(9)    


    The trustee of a *complying superannuation fund may choose to treat all of the assets of the fund as not being *segregated current pension assets of the fund for an income year if, at one or more times in the year, all *superannuation interests in the fund are in the *retirement phase.

    295-385(10)    


    Subsections (8) and (9) do not apply if:

    (a)    at all times in the year, all *superannuation interests in the fund are in the *retirement phase; or

    (b)    the assets of the fund are *disregarded small fund assets at all times in the year.


    SECTION 295-387   Disregarded small fund assets  

    295-387(1)    
    The assets of a *complying superannuation fund are disregarded small fund assets at all times in an income year if the fund is covered by subsection (2) for the income year.

    295-387(2)    
    A *complying superannuation fund is covered by this subsection for an income year if:

    (a)    

    the fund is a *small superannuation fund at a time during the income year; and

    (b)    at a time during the income year, there is at least one *superannuation interest in the fund that is in the *retirement phase; and

    (c)    just before the start of the income year:


    (i) a person has a *total superannuation balance that exceeds $1.6 million; and

    (ii) the person is the *retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream (whether or not the fund is the *superannuation income stream provider for the superannuation income stream); and

    (d)    at a time during the income year, the person has a superannuation interest in the fund (whether or not the superannuation interest is the superannuation interest mentioned in paragraph (b) ).


    295-387(3)    


    However, the fund is not covered by subsection (2) for an income year if, at all times during the income year, all of the assets of the superannuation fund would, apart from subsection 295-385(7) , be *segregated current pension assets.

    SECTION 295-390   Income from other assets used to meet current pension liabilities  

    295-390(1)    
    A proportion of the *ordinary income and *statutory income of a *complying superannuation fund that would otherwise be assessable income is exempt from income tax under this section. The proportion is worked out under subsection (3).

    Exception

    295-390(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to:


    (a) *non-arm ' s length income; or


    (b) amounts included in assessable income under Subdivision 295-C ; or


    (c) income *derived from *segregated non-current assets; or


    (d) income that is exempt from income tax under section 295-385 .

    Formula

    295-390(3)    


    The proportion is:


      Average value of current pension liabilities  
      Average value of superannuation liabilities  

    where:

    average value of current pension liabilities
    is the average value for the income year of the fund ' s current liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund at any time in that year. This does not include liabilities for which *segregated current pension assets are held.

    average value of superannuation liabilities
    is the average value for the income year of the fund ' s current and future liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *superannuation benefits in respect of which contributions have, or were liable to have, been made. This does not include liabilities for which *segregated current pension assets or *segregated non-current assets are held.



    Actuary ' s certificate

    295-390(4)    
    The value of particular liabilities of the fund at a particular time is the amount of the fund ' s assets, together with future contributions in respect of the benefits concerned and expected earnings on the assets and contributions after that time, that would provide the amount required to discharge those liabilities as they fall due. This must be specified in an *actuary ' s certificate obtained by the trustee of the fund before the date for lodgment of the fund ' s *income tax return forthe income year.

    295-390(5)    
    The expected earnings are worked out at the rate the actuary expects will be the rate of the fund ' s earnings on its assets (except *segregated current pension assets or *segregated non-current assets).

    Superannuation liabilities where no current certificate

    295-390(6)    
    The superannuation liabilities do not have to be valued by an actuary for the income year if the fund has no *segregated current pension assets or *segregated non-current assets for the income year. Instead, the value can be worked out using this formula:


      Last value of superannuation liabilities × Current value of assets  
      Last value of assets  

    where:

    current value of assets
    is the value of all of the fund ' s assets at a time in the income year, as specified in an *actuary ' s certificate obtained by the trustee of the fund before the date for lodgment of the fund ' s *income tax return for the income year.

    last value of assets
    is the most recent value of all of the fund ' s assets specified in an *actuary ' s certificate.

    last value of superannuation liabilities
    is the value, at the time of that most recent valuation, of the fund ' s superannuation liabilities specified in an *actuary ' s certificate.

    Note:

    This allows a fund to avoid the expense of an actuarial valuation of its superannuation liabilities, except in those years that a valuation is required by the SIS Act in order for the fund to continue to be complying.


    295-390(7)    


    Subsections (4), (5) and (6) do not apply in working out the amounts to be used in the formula in subsection (3) if, at all times during the income year, the liabilities of the fund in respect of *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund at those times were liabilities in respect of superannuation income stream benefits that are prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection.

    SECTION 295-395   Meaning of segregated non-current assets  

    295-395(1)    
    Assets of a *complying superannuation fund are segregated non-current assets at a time in an income year if:


    (a) the assets are invested, held in reserve or otherwise dealt with at that time solely to enable the fund to discharge all or part of its current and future liabilities (contingent or not) to pay benefits in respect of which contributions have, or were liable to have, been made; and


    (b) the trustee of the fund obtains an *actuary's certificate before the date for lodgment of the fund's *income tax return for the income year to the effect that the amount of the assets, together with any future contributions, and the earnings that the actuary expects will be made from them will provide the amount required to discharge in full those liabilities, or that part of those liabilities, as they fall due.

    295-395(2)    


    The liabilities referred to in paragraph (1)(a) do not include liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund at that time.

    295-395(3)    


    However, *disregarded small fund assets are not segregated non-current assets.

    SECTION 295-400   Income of a PST attributable to current pension liabilities  

    295-400(1)    
    This proportion of the *ordinary income and *statutory income that would otherwise be assessable income of a *pooled superannuation trust is *exempt income:


      Average number of units in the trust during the income year that are * segregated current pension assets of unitholders that are * complying superannuation funds  
      Average number of units in the trust duringthe income year  



    Exceptions

    295-400(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to:


    (a) *non-arm's length income; or


    (b) amounts included in assessable income under item 1 of the table in section 295-320 .

    Alternative exemption

    295-400(3)    
    However, the trustee of the *pooled superannuation trust can choose that a different amount be *exempt income of the trust under this section if a percentage of the assessable income of the trust would have been exempt income under section 295-385 or 295-390 if it had been *derived instead by the unitholders in the trust in proportion to their holdings.

    295-400(4)    
    That percentage of the trust's *ordinary income and *statutory income is then *exempt income.

    SECTION 295-405  

    295-405   Other exempt income  


    The *ordinary income or *statutory income of an entity is exempt from income tax as set out in this table.
    Note:

    For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35 .


    Exempt income
    Item For this entity: This is exempt:
    1 CSF
    N-CSF
    CADF
    N-CADF
    A grant of financial assistance under Part 23 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993
    2 *RSA provider Amount credited to the *RSA where a *superannuation income stream covered by section 295-407 was paid from the RSA for all of the period in the income year that the RSA existed
    3 *RSA provider Part of an amount credited to the *RSA (worked out under section 295-410 ) where a *superannuation income stream covered by section 295-407 was paid from the RSA for part of the period in the income year that the RSA existed

    SECTION 295-407  

    295-407   Covered superannuation income streams - RSAs  


    A *superannuation income stream is covered by this section if:


    (a) it is a pension (within the meaning of the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 ); and


    (b) it is in the *retirement phase.

    SECTION 295-410  

    295-410   Amount credited to RSA  


    For item 3 of the table in section 295-405 , the part of the amount credited to the *RSA that is *exempt income is worked out by:


    (a) multiplying the amount by the number of days in the income year for which the pension covered by section 295-407 was paid; and


    (b) dividing the result by the number of days in the income year that the RSA existed.

    Subdivision 295-G - Deductions  

    Death or disability benefits

    SECTION 295-460  

    295-460   Benefits for which deductions are available  


    Sections 295-465 (about deductions for complying funds for insurance premiums), 295-470 (about deductions for complying funds for future liability to pay benefits) and 295-475 (about deductions for *RSA providers for insurance premiums) apply to these benefits:


    (a) a *superannuation death benefit;


    (aa) a benefit consisting of an amount payable to an individual because a *terminal medical condition exists in relation to the individual;


    (b) a *disability superannuation benefit;


    (c) a benefit consisting of an amount payable to an individual under an income stream because of the individual ' s temporary inability to engage in *gainful employment, that is payable for no longer than:


    (i) 2 years; or

    (ii) if an approval under section 62 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 is in force for benefits of that kind and the approval specifies a longer maximum period - that longer period; or

    (iii) if there is no such approval in force - a longer period allowed by the Commissioner.
    Note 1:

    The fund can deduct amounts in relation to these benefits under either section 295-465 or 295-470 , but not both.

    Note 2:

    The taxable component of the superannuation lump sums will contain an element untaxed in the fund: see section 307-290 .

    SECTION 295-465   Complying funds - deductions for insurance premiums  


    Deductions for insurance premiums

    295-465(1)    


    A *complying superannuation fund can deduct the proportions specified in this table of premiums it pays for insurance policies that are (wholly or partly) for current or contingent liabilities of the fund to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460 for its members. It can deduct the amounts for the income year in which the premiums are paid.


    Deductions of * complying superannuation funds
    Item The fund can deduct this amount:
    1 30 % of the premium for a * whole of life policy if all individuals whose lives are insured are members of the fund
    2 10 % of the premium for an * endowment policy if all individuals whose lives are insured are members of the fund
    3 30 % of the part of an insurance policy premium (for a policy that is not a * whole of life policy or an * endowment policy) that is specified in the policy as being for a distinct part of the policy, if that part would have been a whole of life policy had it been a separate policy
    4 10 % of the part of an insurance policy premium (for a policy that is not a * whole of life policy or an * endowment policy) that is specified in the policy as being for a distinct part of the policy, if that part would have been an endowment policy had it been a separate policy
    5 The part of a premium that is specified in the policy as being wholly for the liability to provide certain benefits, if those benefits are benefits referred to in section 295-460
    6 So much of other insurance policy premiums as are attributable to the liability to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460

    Note:

    If the fund receives a rebate or refund of an insurance premium, the amount may be included in its assessable income: see table item 4 in section 295-320 .


    295-465(1A)    


    If item 5 of the table applies to part, but not all, of an insurance policy premium, item 6 of the table applies to the rest of the premium as if item 5 did not apply to the premium.

    295-465(1B)    


    For the purposes of item 6 of the table, the regulations may provide that a specified proportion of a specified insurance policy premium may be treated as being attributable to the *complying superannuation fund ' s liability to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460 .
    Note:

    The fund may deduct a proportion other than that specified in the regulations for the premium, but must obtain an actuary ' s certificate in accordance with subsection (3) in order to do so. The same applies if the insurance policy premium is not specified in the regulations.



    Deductions for self-insurance

    295-465(2)    
    A *complying superannuation fund can also deduct the amount it could reasonably be expected to pay in an *arm's length transaction to obtain an insurance policy to cover it for that part of its current or contingent liabilities to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460 for which it does not have insurance coverage. It can deduct the amount for the income year when it has the liability.

    295-465(2A)    


    For the purposes of subsection (2), the regulations may provide that a specified proportion of an amount mentioned in subsection (2B) may be treated as being the amount the fund could reasonably be expected to pay in an *arm ' s length transaction to obtain an insurance policy to cover it for its current or contingent liabilities to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460 .
    Example:

    If:

  • (a) an actuary certifies the amount a fund could reasonably be expected to pay in an arm ' s length transaction to obtain an insurance policy; and
  • (b) the insurance policy covers liabilities of the fund to provide a class of total and permanent disability benefits broader than that covered by section 295-460 ; and
  • (c) the insurance policy is specified in the regulations; and
  • (d) the fund does not have insurance coverage for the liabilities;
  • the fund may deduct, under subsection (2), so much of that certified amount as is specified in the regulations.


    295-465(2B)    


    The amount is the amount a *complying superannuation fund could reasonably be expected to pay in an *arm ' s length transaction to obtain an insurance policy specified in the regulations.

    Actuary's certificate

    295-465(3)    
    The trustee must obtain an *actuary's certificate before the date for lodgment of the fund's *income tax return for the income year in order to deduct an amount referred to in item 6 of the table or in subsection (2).


    295-465(3A)    


    Subsection (3) does not apply to an amount referred to in item 6 of the table in relation to an insurance policy premium, if the trustee deducts, under that item, only the proportion (if any) of the premium specified in the regulations made for the purposes of subsection (1B).

    Choice not to deduct amounts under this section

    295-465(4)    
    The trustee may choose not to deduct amounts under this section for an income year and to deduct instead (under section 295-470 ) amounts based on the fund's future liability to pay the benefits.

    295-465(5)    
    The choice applies also to future income years unless the Commissioner decides that it should not.

    SECTION 295-470   Complying funds - deductions for future liability to pay benefits  

    295-470(1)    
    A *complying superannuation fund can deduct an amount under this section for an income year if:


    (a) the trustee of the fund makes a choice under subsection 295-465(4) and the choice applies to the income year; and


    (b) the trustee pays:


    (i) a benefit referred to in paragraph 295-460 (a), (aa) or (b) for the income year in consequence of the termination of a member's employment; or

    (ii) a benefit referred to in paragraph 295-460(c) .

    295-470(2)    


    The amount the fund can deduct is:


    Benefit amount × Future service days  
    Total service days  

    where:

    benefit amount
    is:


    (a) for a benefit that is a *superannuation lump sum - the amount of the lump sum; or


    (b) for a benefit that is a *superannuation income stream - the *value of the *superannuation interest supporting the income stream; or


    (c) for a benefit referred to in paragraph 295-460(c) - the total of the amounts paid during the income year.

    future service days
    is the number of days in the period starting when:


    (a) the termination happened; or


    (b) for a benefit referred to in paragraph 295-460(c) - the member became unable to engage in *gainful employment;

    and ending on the member's *last retirement day.

    total service days
    is the sum of future service days and the number of days in:


    (a) for a benefit that is a *superannuation lump sum - the *service period for the superannuation lump sum; or


    (b) for another benefit - the period ending on the first day of the period to which the first payment of the benefit relates and starting on the earliest of:


    (i) the day on which the member joined the relevant *superannuation fund; and

    (ii) the first day of the period of employment to which the benefit relates(including a qualifying period before the member could join the fund and any period when the member was not a member of the fund); and

    (iii) the day applicable under subsection (3).


    295-470(3)    
    The applicable day is the first day of the *service period for a *superannuation lump sum that is a *roll-over superannuation benefit if all or part of the *value of the other benefit is attributable to the roll-over superannuation benefit.

    SECTION 295-475  

    295-475   RSA providers - deductions for insurance premiums  


    An *RSA provider can deduct premiums it pays for insurance policies that are wholly for its liability to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460 for its *RSA holders. It can deduct the amounts for the income year in which the premiums are paid.
    Note:

    If the RSA provider receives a rebate or refund of an insurance premium, the amount may be included in its assessable income: see table item 5 in section 295-320 .

    SECTION 295-480   Meaning of whole of life policy and endowment policy  

    295-480(1)    
    A whole of life policy is an insurance policy:


    (a) that includes an investment component; and


    (b) the premiums for which are not dissected; and


    (c) where the sum insured (and any bonuses) are payable on:


    (i) the death of the individual insured; or

    (ii) the earlier of the death of the individual insured and the individual attaining the age specified in the policy (being at least the age of 85).

    295-480(2)    
    An endowment policy is an insurance policy:


    (a) that includes an investment component; and


    (b) the premiums for which are not dissected; and


    (c) where the sum insured (and any bonuses) are payable on:


    (i) a day specified in, or worked out under, the policy; or

    (ii) the death of the individual insured if that happens before that day;

    but does not include a *whole of life policy.


    295-485   (Repealed) SECTION 295-485 Deductions for increased amount of superannuation lump sum death benefit  
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)

    Other deductions

    SECTION 295-490   Other deductions  

    295-490(1)    


    An entity can deduct amounts as set out in this table.
    Note:

    For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35 .


    Other deductions
    Item This entity: Can deduct: For the income year in which:
    1 CSF
    N-CSF
    CADF
    N-CADF
    PST
    An amount included in the entity ' s assessable income under Subdivision 295-C that is a * fringe benefit The contribution is included in assessable income
    2 CSF
    * RSA provider
    Contributions made to the CSF or *RSA to the extent they have been reduced by a notice under section 290-180 received by the *superannuation provider of the CSF or RSA after it lodged its *income tax return for the income year in which the contributions were made, but only if the provider has not exercised the option mentioned in subsection 295-195(3) The notice is received
    2A CSF
    *RSA provider
    A *roll-over superannuation benefit, to the extent that:
    (a) the CSF or *RSA is a *successor fund; and
    (b) the benefit relates to a contribution that, before it was transferred to the successor fund, was covered by a valid and acknowledged notice given to any *superannuation provider under section 290-170 ; and
    (c) the contribution is reduced by a notice under section 290-180 received by the superannuation provider of the successor fund (whether or not the contribution has previously been reduced by a notice given to any superannuation provider under that section)
    The notice mentioned in paragraph (c) is received
    2B CSF
    *RSA provider
    A *roll-over superannuation benefit, to the extent that:
    (a) the benefit is included in the assessable income of the CSF or RSA provider under item 2A of the table in subsection 295-190(1) ; and
    (b) the relevant contribution has been reduced by a notice under section 290-180 received by the *superannuation provider of the CSF or *RSA after it lodged its *income tax return for the income year in which the transfer occurred; and
    (c) the provider has not exercised the option mentioned in subsection 295-197(4)
    The notice mentioned in paragraph (b) is received
    3 CSF
    N-CSF
    CADF
    N-CADF
    A levy imposed by regulations under section 6 of the Superannuation (Financial Assistance Funding) Levy Act 1993 The levy is incurred
    4 Entity that is a N-CSF and has been since 1 July 1988, or since it came into existence if that was later An amount paid to an entity who includes it in assessable income under section 290-100 It is included in the entity ' s assessable income


    295-490(2)    
    A fund cannot deduct an amount under item 3 of the table for a levy imposed by regulations under section 6 of the Superannuation (Financial Assistance Funding) Levy Act 1993 to the extent that:


    (a) the levy is remitted; or


    (b) there is a refund or other application of an overpayment of the levy.

    295-490(3)    


    No other provision of this Act affects a fund ' s *income tax liability in relation to the levy.

    Certain amounts cannot be deducted

    SECTION 295-495  

    295-495   Amounts that cannot be deducted  


    These entities cannot deduct anything for these amounts:
    Note:

    For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35 .


    Amounts that cannot be deducted
    Item This entity Cannot deduct anything for:
    1 CSF * Superannuation benefits
    2 N-CSF * Superannuation benefits (except amounts paid as mentioned in item 4 of the table in section 295-490)
    3 * RSA provider * Superannuation benefits paid from, or amounts withdrawn from, * RSAs
    4 * RSA provider Amounts credited to * RSAs
    4A (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)  
    5 CSF
    N-CSF
    CADF
    N-CADF
    A repayment of a grant of financial assistance under Part 23 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993
    6 CSF
    N-CSF
    *RSA provider
    An amount payable to a person under an income stream because of the person ' s temporary inability to engage in *gainful employment

    Subdivision 295-H - Components of taxable income  

    SECTION 295-545   Components of taxable income - complying superannuation funds, complying ADFs and PSTs  

    295-545(1)    
    The taxable income of a *complying superannuation entity is split into a *non-arm ' s length component and a *low tax component.

    Note:

    A concessional rate applies to the low tax component, while the non-arm ' s length component is taxed at the highest marginal rate. The rates are set out in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 .


    295-545(2)    
    The non-arm's length component for an income year is the entity's *non-arm's length income for that year less any deductions to the extent that they are attributable to that income.

    295-545(3)    
    The low tax component is any remaining part of the entity's taxable income for the income year.

    SECTION 295-550   Meaning of non-arm ' s length income  

    295-550(1)    


    An amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income is non-arm ' s length income of a *complying superannuation entity if, as a result of a *scheme the parties to which were not dealing with each other at *arm ' s length in relation to the scheme, one or more of the following applies:


    (a) the amount of the income is more than the amount that the entity might have been expected to derive if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm ' slength in relation to the scheme;


    (b) in gaining or producing the income, the entity incurs a loss, outgoing or expenditure of an amount that is less than the amount of a loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm ' s length in relation to the scheme;


    (c) in gaining or producing the income, the entity does not incur a loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm ' s length in relation to the scheme.

    This subsection does not apply to an amount to which subsection (2) applies or an amount *derived by the entity in the capacity of beneficiary of a trust.


    295-550(2)    
    An amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income is also non-arm ' s length income of the entity if it is:


    (a) a *dividend paid to the entity by a *private company; or


    (b) ordinary income or statutory income that is reasonably attributable to such a dividend;

    unless the amount is consistent with an *arm ' s length dealing.


    295-550(3)    
    In deciding whether an amount is consistent with an *arm ' s length dealing under subsection (2), have regard to:


    (a) the value of *shares in the company that are assets of the entity; and


    (b) the cost to the entity of the shares on which the *dividend was paid; and


    (c) the rate of that dividend; and


    (d) whether the company has paid a dividend on other shares in the company and, if so, the rate of that dividend; and


    (e) whether the company has issued any shares to the entity in satisfaction of a dividend paid by the company (or part of it) and, if so, the circumstances of the issue; and


    (f) any other relevant matters.

    295-550(4)    
    Income *derived by the entity as a beneficiary of a trust, other than because of holding a fixed entitlement to the income, is non-arm ' s length income of the entity.

    295-550(5)    


    Other income *derived by the entity as a beneficiary of a trust through holding a fixed entitlement to the income of the trust is non-arm ' s length income of the entity if, as a result of a *scheme the parties to which were not dealing with each other at *arm ' s length in relation to the scheme, one or more of the following applies:


    (a) the amount of the income is more than the amount that the entity might have been expected to derive if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm ' s length in relation to the scheme;


    (b) in acquiring the entitlement or in gaining or producing the income, the entity incurs a loss, outgoing or expenditure of an amount that is less than the amount of a loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm ' s length in relation to the scheme;


    (c) in acquiring the entitlement or in gaining or producing the income, the entity does not incur a loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm ' s length in relation to the scheme.


    295-550(6)    
    This section:


    (a) applies to a *non-share equity interest in the same way as it applies to a *share; and


    (b) applies to an *equity holder in a company in the same way as it applies to a shareholder in the company; and


    (c) applies to a *non-share dividend in the same way as it applies to a *dividend.

    295-550(7)    


    Paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) and (5)(b) and (c) apply to a loss, outgoing or expenditure whether or not it is of capital or of a capital nature.

    SECTION 295-555   Components of taxable income - RSA providers  

    295-555(1)    


    The taxable income of an *RSA provider is split into:


    (a) an *RSA component; and


    (b) (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)


    (c) a *standard component.

    Note:

    The RSA component is taxed at the same concessional rate that applies to the low tax component of complying superannuation entities (see section 23 of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 ). The standard component is taxed at the standard company rate.


    295-555(2)    
    The RSA component for an income year is worked out in this way: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Add these amounts included in the provider ' s assessable income for the income year:

  • (a) amounts included under Subdivision 295-C ; and
  • (b) other amounts credited during the year to *RSAs that it provides.

  • Step 2.

    Subtract from the step 1 amount amounts paid from those *RSAs (except benefits for the RSA holders or tax).


    Step 3.

    The result is the RSA component .


    295-555(3)    


    However, if the *RSA component is more than the *RSA provider ' s taxable income:


    (a) the provider ' s taxable income is equal to that sum; and


    (b) this Act applies to the provider as if it had a *tax loss for the income year of an amount that would have been that loss if the RSA component were not *ordinary income or *statutory income.


    295-555(4)    


    The standard component is the remaining part (if any) of the *RSA provider ' s taxable income for the income year after subtracting the *RSA component.

    Subdivision 295-I - No-TFN contributions  

    SECTION 295-605   Liability for tax on no-TFN contributions income  

    295-605(1)    
    A *superannuation provider in relation to a *complying superannuation fund is liable to pay tax on the *no-TFN contributions income of the fund for an income year.

    295-605(2)    
    A *superannuation provider in relation to a *non-complying superannuation fund is liable to pay tax on the *no-TFN contributions income of the fund for an income year.

    295-605(3)    
    An *RSA provider is liable to pay tax on its *no-TFN contributions income for an income year.

    Note 1:

    The tax is imposed by the Income Tax Act 1986 .

    Note 2:

    The no-TFN contributions income is subject to a special rate of tax under the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 .

    Note 3:

    The Commissioner may make an assessment of the amount of income tax on the no-TFN contributions income: see section 169 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    SECTION 295-610   No-TFN contributions income  

    295-610(1)    
    An amount included by Subdivision 295-C in the assessable income of a *complying superannuation fund, a *non-complying superannuation fund or an *RSA provider for an income year is no-TFN contributions income for the year if:


    (a) it is included by that Subdivision in the assessable income of the income year of the fund or RSA provider in which 1 July 2007 occurs, or a later income year; and


    (b) it is a contribution made to the fund or *RSA on or after 1 July 2007 to provide *superannuation benefits for an individual; and


    (c) by the end of the income year, the individual has not *quoted (for superannuation purposes) his or her *tax file number to the *superannuation provider.

    Exception

    295-610(2)    
    However, an amount is not no-TFN contributions income if:


    (a) the contribution was made in relation to a *superannuation interest or an *RSA of the individual that existed prior to 1 July 2007; and


    (b) the total contributions made in relation to the superannuation interest or RSA for the income year that are included in assessable income under Subdivision 295-C did not exceed $1,000.

    SECTION 295-615   Meaning of quoted (for superannuation purposes)  

    295-615(1)    
    An individual has quoted (for superannuation purposes) a *tax file number to an entity at a time if the individual:


    (a) quotes his or her tax file number to the entity at that time; or


    (b) is taken by the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 , the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 or this Act to quote his or her tax file number to the entity at that time;

    in connection with the operation or the possible future operation of one or more of the following Acts:


    (c) the Superannuation Acts (within the meaning of Part 25A of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 );


    (d) the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 .


    (e) (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)


    295-615(2)    


    An individual is taken to have quoted (for superannuation purposes) a *tax file number to an entity at a time if the Commissioner gives notice of the individual ' s tax file number to the entity at that time.

    SECTION 295-620  

    295-620   No reduction under Subdivision 295-D  


    There is no reduction of the amount of *no-TFN contributions income by Subdivision 295-D .
    Note:

    Subdivision 295-D can reduce an amount that would otherwise be included in assessable income. It does not reduce the amount of no-TFN contributions income . An amount is still no-TFN contributions income even if, because of Subdivision 295-D , the amount (or part of it) is not included in assessable income.

    SECTION 295-625   Assessments  

    295-625(1)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    295-625(2)    
    If the conditions in subsection (3) are met, the Commissioner is taken to have made an assessment of a kind set out in subsection (4).

    295-625(3)    
    The conditions are:


    (a) one of the following gives the Commissioner an *income tax return for an income year on a particular day (the return day ):


    (i) a *superannuation provider in relation to a *complying superannuation fund;

    (ii) a superannuation provider in relation to a *non-complying superannuation fund;

    (iii) an *RSA provider; and


    (b) the return is the first income tax return given by the provider for the year; and


    (c) the Commissioner has not already made an assessment of a kind set out in subsection (4) for the provider for the year.

    295-625(4)    
    The assessment is taken to have been made for the provider for the income year on the return day, and to be an assessment, in accordance with the information stated in the return, of the amount of income tax payable on the *no-TFN contributions income (if any) of the provider (or to be an assessment that no tax is payable).

    295-625(5)    
    The return is taken to be notice of the assessment signed by the Commissioner and given to the provider on the return day.

    Note:

    The return may also be taken to be a notice of another assessment: see section 166A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    Subdivision 295-J - Tax offset for no-TFN contributions income (TFN quoted within 5 years)  

    SECTION 295-675   Entitlement to a tax offset  

    295-675(1)    


    A *superannuation provider in relation to a *superannuation fund or an *RSA provider is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year of the provider (the current year ) commencing on or after 1 July 2007 for amounts of tax that count towards the offset for the provider for the current year.
    Note:

    In certain circumstances the superannuation provider or RSA provider can get a refund of the tax offset under Division 67 .


    295-675(2)    


    An amount of tax counts towards the offset for the provider for the current year if subsection (3), (4) or (5) applies for the provider and the tax.

    Superannuation providers and RSA providers - main case

    295-675(3)    


    This subsection applies for the provider and the tax if:

    (a)    the tax was payable by the provider in one of the most recent 3 income years of the provider ending before the current year; and

    (b)    the tax was payable on an amount of *no-TFN contributions income of the fund or *RSA provider; and

    (c)    the amount of no-TFN contributions income was a contribution made to the fund or provider to provide *superannuation benefits for an individual who, in the current year, has *quoted (for superannuation purposes) the individual ' s *tax file number to the provider for the first time.



    Superannuation providers of successor funds

    295-675(4)    


    This subsection applies for the provider (the current provider ) and the tax if:

    (a)    the tax was payable on an amount of *no-TFN contributions income that:


    (i) was no-TFN contributions income of another *superannuation fund (the previous fund ); and

    (ii) was a contribution made to the previous fund to provide *superannuation benefits for an individual; and

    (b)    the tax was so payable by the *superannuation provider (the previous provider ) of the previous fund; and

    (c)    the tax was so payable in:


    (i) one of the most recent 3 income years of the previous provider ending before the current year; or

    (ii) an income year of the previous provider ending or starting in the current year; and

    (d)    the current provider is the superannuation provider of a *successor fund in relation to the individual and the previous fund; and

    (e)    the individual:


    (i) never *quoted (for superannuation purposes) the individual ' s *tax file number to the previous provider; but

    (ii) has, in the current year, done so to the current provider for the first time.


    RSA providers of successor funds

    295-675(5)    


    This subsection applies for the provider (the current provider ) and the tax if:

    (a)    the tax was payable on an amount of *no-TFN contributions income that:


    (i) was no-TFN contributions income of another *RSA provider (the previous provider ); and

    (ii) was a contribution made to the previous provider to provide *superannuation benefits for an individual; and

    (b)    the tax was so payable by the previous provider; and

    (c)    the tax was so payable in:


    (i) one of the most recent 3 income years of the previous provider ending before the current year; or

    (ii) an income year of the previous provider ending or starting in the current year; and

    (d)    the current provider is the *superannuation provider of a *successor fund in relation to the individual and an *RSA of the previous provider; and

    (e)    the individual:


    (i) never *quoted (for superannuation purposes) the individual ' s *tax file number to the previous provider but

    (ii) has, in the current year, done so to the current provider for the first time.

    SECTION 295-680  

    295-680   Amount of the tax offset  


    The amount of the *tax offset is the sum of each amount of tax that counts towards the offset for the provider for the current year.

    Division 301 - Superannuation member benefits paid from complying plans etc.  

    Guide to Division 301  

    SECTION 301-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division sets out the tax treatment of superannuation benefits received by members of complying plans etc. This treatment varies depending on the age of the member when they receive the benefit. This Division also sets out the tax treatment of departing Australia superannuation payments and certain payments less than $200.

    Subdivision 301-A - Application  

    SECTION 301-5  

    301-5   Division applies to superannuation member benefits paid from complying plans etc.  


    This Division applies to:


    (a) *superannuation member benefits that are paid from a *complying superannuation plan; and


    (b) *superannuation guarantee payments; and


    (c) *small superannuation account payments; and


    (d) *unclaimed money payments; and


    (e) *superannuation co-contribution benefit payments; and


    (f) *superannuation annuity payments.

    Note:

    For the tax treatment of superannuation death benefits paid from complying plans, see Division 302 . Superannuation benefits paid from superannuation plans that are not complying superannuation plans are dealt with in Division 305 .

    Subdivision 301-B - Member benefits: general rules  

    Member benefits - recipient aged 60 or above

    SECTION 301-10  

    301-10   All superannuation benefits are tax free  


    If you are 60 years or over when you receive a *superannuation benefit, the benefit is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.
    Note 1:

    Your superannuation benefit may be a superannuation lump sum or a superannuation income stream benefit: see sections 307-65 and 307-70 .

    Note 2:

    If your superannuation benefit includes an element untaxed in the fund, see Subdivision 301-C .

    Note 3:

    If your superannuation benefit is a superannuation income stream benefit that is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A .

    Member benefits - recipient aged over preservation age and under 60

    SECTION 301-15  

    301-15   Tax free status of tax free component  


    If you are under 60 years but have reached your *preservation age when you receive a *superannuation benefit, the *tax free component of the benefit is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.
    Note 1:

    Your superannuation benefit may be a superannuation lump sum or a superannuation income stream benefit: see sections 307-65 and 307-70 .

    Note 2:

    For tax free component , see Subdivision 307-C .

    SECTION 301-20   Superannuation lump sum - taxable component taxed at 0% up to low rate cap amount, 15% on remainder  

    301-20(1)    
    If you are under 60 years but have reached your *preservation age when you receive a *superannuation lump sum, the *taxable component of the lump sum is assessable income.

    Note 1:

    For taxable component , see Subdivision 307-C .

    Note 2:

    If your lump sum includes an element untaxed in the fund, see Subdivision 301-C.


    301-20(2)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount mentioned in subsection (3) does not exceed 0%.

    301-20(3)    
    The amount is so much of the total of the *taxable components included in your assessable income for the income year under subsection (1) as does not exceed your *low rate cap amount (see section 307-345 ) for the income year.

    301-20(4)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount mentioned in subsection (5) does not exceed 15%.

    301-20(5)    
    The amount is so much of the total of the *taxable components included in your assessable income for an income year under subsection (1) as exceeds your *low rate cap amount for the income year.

    Note:

    This amount will be nil if the total of the taxable components falls short of your low rate cap amount for the income year.


    SECTION 301-25   Superannuation income stream - taxable component attracts 15% offset  

    301-25(1)    
    If you are under 60 years but have reached your *preservation age when you receive a *superannuation income stream benefit, the *taxable component of the benefit is assessable income.

    301-25(2)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset equal to 15% of the *taxable component of the benefit.

    Note 1:

    For taxable component , see Subdivision 307-C .

    Note 2:

    If your superannuation income stream benefit includes an element untaxed in the fund, see Subdivision 301-C .

    Member benefits - recipient aged under preservation age

    SECTION 301-30  

    301-30   Tax free status of tax free component  


    If you are under your *preservation age when you receive a *superannuation benefit, the *tax free component of the benefit is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.
    Note 1:

    Your superannuation benefit may be a superannuation lump sum or a superannuation income stream benefit: see sections 307-65 and 307-70 .

    Note 2:

    For tax free component , see Subdivision 307-C .

    SECTION 301-35   Superannuation lump sum - taxable component taxed at 20%  

    301-35(1)    
    If you are under your *preservation age when you receive a *superannuation lump sum, the *taxable component of the lump sum is assessable income.

    Note:

    For taxable component , see Subdivision 307-C .


    301-35(2)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the *taxable component of the lump sum does not exceed 20%.

    Note:

    If your lump sum includes an element untaxed in the fund, see Subdivision 301-C .


    SECTION 301-40   Superannuation income stream - taxable component is assessable income, 15% offset for disability benefit  

    301-40(1)    
    If you are under your *preservation age when you receive a *superannuation income stream benefit, the *taxable component of the benefit is assessable income.

    Note:

    For taxable component , see Subdivision 307-C .



    Offset for disability benefit

    301-40(2)    
    If the benefit is a *superannuation income stream benefit and a *disability superannuation benefit, you are entitled to a *tax offset equal to 15% of the *taxable component of the benefit.

    Subdivision 301-C - Member benefits: elements untaxed in fund  

    SECTION 301-90  

    301-90   Tax free component and element taxed in fund dealt with under Subdivision 301-B, but element untaxed in the fund dealt with under this Subdivision  


    If you receive a *superannuation benefit that includes an *element untaxed in the fund:


    (a) the *tax free component (if any) of the benefit is treated in the same way as the tax free component of a superannuation benefit under Subdivision 301-B ; and


    (b) the *element taxed in the fund (if any) included in the benefit is treated in the same way as the taxable component of a superannuation benefit under Subdivision 301-B ; and


    (c) the element untaxed in the fund is treated in accordance with this Subdivision.

    Note:

    If your superannuation benefit is a superannuation income stream benefit that is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A .

    Member benefits (element untaxed in fund) - recipient aged 60 or above

    SECTION 301-95   Superannuation lump sum - element untaxed in fund taxed at 15% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder  

    301-95(1)    
    If you are 60 years or over when you receive a *superannuation lump sum from a *superannuation plan, the *element untaxed in the fund of the lump sum is assessable income.

    301-95(2)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount mentioned in subsection (3) does not exceed 15%.

    Note:

    The remainder of the element untaxed in the fund is taxed at the top marginal rate in accordance with the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 .


    301-95(3)    
    The amount is so much of the *element untaxed in the fund as does not exceed your *untaxed plan cap amount for the *superannuation plan at the time you receive the benefit.

    SECTION 301-100   Superannuation income stream - element untaxed in fund attracts 10% offset  

    301-100(1)    
    If you are 60 years or over when you receive a *superannuation income stream benefit, the *element untaxed in the fund of the benefit is assessable income.

    301-100(2)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset equal to 10% of the *element untaxed in the fund of the benefit.

    Note:

    If your superannuation income stream benefit is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A .

    Member benefits (element untaxed in fund) - recipient aged over preservation age and under 60

    SECTION 301-105   Superannuation lump sum - element untaxed in fund taxed at 15% up to low rate cap amount, 30% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder  

    301-105(1)    
    If you are under 60 years but have reached your *preservation age when you receive a *superannuation lump sum from a *superannuation plan, the *element untaxed in the fund of the lump sum is assessable income.

    301-105(2)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount worked out under subsection (3) does not exceed 30%.

    301-105(3)    
    The amount is so much of the *element untaxed in the fund as does not exceed your *untaxed plan cap amount for the *superannuation plan at the time you receive the benefit.

    Note:

    To the extent that the element untaxed in the fund exceeds the amount worked out under this subsection, it is taxed at the top marginal rate in accordance with the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 .


    301-105(4)    
    If you are entitled to one or more *tax offsets under subsection (2) for *superannuation benefits that you receive in an income year, you are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount worked out under subsection (5) does not exceed 15%.

    301-105(5)    
    The amount is so much of the total of the one or more amounts worked out under subsection (3) as does not exceed your *low rate cap amount for the income year.

    301-105(6)    
    If you are also entitled to a *tax offset under subsection 301-20(2) for the income year, reduce your *low rate cap amount for the purposes of subsection (5) of this section for the income year by the amount mentioned in subsection 301-20(3) .

    SECTION 301-110  

    301-110   Superannuation income stream - element untaxed in fund is assessable income  


    If you are under 60 years but have reached your *preservation age when you receive a *superannuation income stream benefit, the *element untaxed in the fund of the benefit is assessable income.

    Member benefits (element untaxed in fund) - recipient aged under preservation age

    SECTION 301-115   Superannuation lump sum - element untaxed in fund taxed at 30% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder  

    301-115(1)    
    If you are under your *preservation age when you receive a *superannuation lump sum from a *superannuation plan, the *element untaxed in the fund of the lump sum is assessable income.

    301-115(2)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount mentioned in subsection (3) does not exceed 30%.

    Note:

    The remainder of the element untaxed in the fund is taxed at the top marginal rate in accordance with the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 .


    301-115(3)    
    The amount is so much of the *element untaxed in the fund as does not exceed your *untaxed plan cap amount for the *superannuation plan at the time you receive the benefit.

    SECTION 301-120  

    301-120   Superannuation income stream - element untaxed in fund is assessable income  


    If you are under your *preservation age when you receive a *superannuation income stream benefit, the *element untaxed in the fund of the benefit is assessable income.

    Miscellaneous

    SECTION 301-125  

    301-125   Unclaimed money payments by the Commissioner  


    For the purposes of this Subdivision, treat a *superannuation lump sum paid by the Commissioner under subsection 17(2) , 20H(2) , (2AA) , (2A) or (3) , 20QF(2) , 21E(2) , 22B(2) or 24G(2) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 as if it were paid from a *superannuation plan.

    Subdivision 301-D - Departing Australia superannuation payments  

    SECTION 301-170   Departing Australia superannuation payments  

    301-170(1)    
    A *superannuation lump sum is a departing Australia superannuation payment if it:

    (a)    is paid to a person who has departed Australia; and

    (b)    is paid:


    (i) in accordance with regulations under the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 or the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 that are specified in regulations made for the purposes of this definition; or

    (ii) in accordance with section 67A of the Small Superannuation Accounts Act 1995 ; or

    (iii) by an exempt public sector superannuation scheme (within the meaning of section 10 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ) and is made in accordance with rules of the fund that are substantially similar to the regulations specified as mentioned in subparagraph (i) .

    301-170(2)    


    Also, a *superannuation lump sum is a departing Australia superannuation payment if it is paid under subsection 20H(2) , (2AA) , (2A) or (3) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 .

    301-170(3)    


    Despite subsection (2) , a *superannuation lump sum paid under subsection 20H(2) , (2AA) , (2A) or (3) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 because a person has been identified in a notice under section 20C of that Act is not a departing Australia superannuation payment if, when it is paid, the Commissioner is satisfied that:

    (a)    the person has not been, under the Migration Act 1958 , the holder of a temporary visa that ceased to be in effect at least 6 months ago; or

    (b)    the person has been the holder of such a visa but has not left Australia (within the meaning of that Act) at least 6 months ago but after starting to be the holder of the visa.


    301-170(4)    


    Despite subsection (2) , a *superannuation lump sum that is paid under subsection 20H(2) , (2AA) , (2A) or (3) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 and is prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection is not a departing Australia superannuation payment .

    SECTION 301-175   Treatment of departing Australia superannuation benefits  

    301-175(1)    
    Despite anything else in this Division, if you receive a *superannuation benefit that is a *departing Australia superannuation payment, the benefit is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

    301-175(2)    
    However, you are liable to pay income tax on that payment at the rate declared by the Parliament in respect of *departing Australia superannuation payments.

    Note 1:

    The tax is imposed in the Superannuation (Departing Australia Superannuation Payments Tax) Act 2007 and the amount of the tax is set out in that Act.

    Note 2:

    See the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for provisions dealing with the payment of the tax.


    Subdivision 301-E - Superannuation lump sum member benefits less than $200  

    SECTION 301-225   Superannuation lump sum member benefits less than $200 are tax free  

    301-225(1)    
    Despite anything else in this Division (apart from Subdivision 301-D ), a *superannuation member benefit that you receive is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if:

    (a)    the benefit is a *superannuation lump sum; and

    (b)    the amount of the benefit is less than $200; and

    (c)    the *value of the *superannuation interest from which the benefit is paid is nil just after the benefit is paid; and

    (d)    the requirements (if any) specified in the regulations in relation to the benefit are satisfied.

    301-225(2)    


    Despite anything else in this Division (apart from Subdivision 301-D ), a *superannuation member benefit that you receive is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if:

    (a)    the benefit is a *superannuation lump sum; and

    (b)    

    the benefit is paid to you:

    (i) under subsection 20QF(2) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in a case covered by paragraph (d) of that subsection; or

    (ia) under subsection 21E(2) of that Act in a case covered by paragraph (d) of that subsection; or

    (ib) under subsection 22B(2) of that Act in a case covered by paragraph (d) of that subsection; or

    (ii) under subsection 24G(2) of that Act in a case covered by paragraph (d) of that subsection; and

    (c)    the amount of the benefit is less than $200.


    Subdivision 301-F - Veterans ' superannuation (invalidity pension) tax offset  

    SECTION 301-275   Veterans ' superannuation (invalidity pension) tax offset  

    301-275(1)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset for an income year if:

    (a)    you are an individual; and

    (b)    during the income year, you receive one or more *superannuation lump sums that are payments of:


    (i) invalidity pay within the meaning of the Defence Force Retirement and Death Benefits Act 1973 ; or

    (ii) an invalidity pension under the superannuation scheme established under the Military Superannuation and Benefits Act 1991 ; or

    (iii) a pension mentioned in a paragraph of subsection 307-70.02(1A) of the Income Tax Assessment (1997 Act) Regulations 2021 .

    301-275(2)    
    The amount of your *tax offset is worked out as follows:

    (a)    first, work out the amount by which your basic income tax liability exceeds the total of the amount of your tax offsets (if any) for the income year under:


    (i) this Division (other than this Subdivision); and

    (ii) Subdivision AB of Division 17 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;

    (b)    next, work out the total of:


    (i) the amount worked out under paragraph (a) ; and

    (ii) the amounts (if any) of *Medicare levy and *Medicare levy (fringe benefits) surcharge you are liable to pay for the income year;

    (c)    next, work out the total of:


    (i) the amount worked out under paragraph (a) ; and

    (ii) the amounts (if any) of Medicare levy and Medicare levy (fringe benefits) surcharge you are liable to pay for the income year;
    on the assumptions mentioned in subsection (3) ;

    (d)    next, work out the amount (if any) by which the total worked out under paragraph (b) exceeds the total worked out under paragraph (c) .

    301-275(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(c) , the assumptions are that:

    (a)    each *superannuation lump sum mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) were a *superannuation income stream benefit; and

    (b)    for the purposes of section 307-125 (proportioning rule), the invalidity pay, invalidity pension or pension mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) of this section were a *superannuation income stream.

    Division 302 - Superannuation death benefits paid from complying plans etc.  

    Guide to Division 302  

    SECTION 302-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out the tax treatment of superannuation death benefits received by members of complying plans etc. This treatment varies depending on the age of the deceased when they died (and in some cases on the age of the recipient of the benefit).

    Subdivision 302-A - Application  

    SECTION 302-5  

    302-5   Division applies to superannuation death benefits paid from complying plans etc.  


    This Division applies to *superannuation death benefits that:


    (a) are paid from a *complying superannuation plan; or


    (b) are *superannuation guarantee payments, *small superannuation account payments, *unclaimed money payments, *superannuation co-contribution benefit payments or *superannuation annuity payments.

    Note:

    For the tax treatment of superannuation member benefits paid from complying plans, see Division 301 . Superannuation benefits paid from superannuation plans that are not complying superannuation plans are dealt with in Division 305 .

    SECTION 302-10   Superannuation death benefits paid to trustee of deceased estate  

    302-10(1)    
    This section applies to you if:


    (a) you are the trustee of a deceased estate; and


    (b) you receive a *superannuation death benefit in your capacity as trustee.

    302-10(2)    
    To the extent that 1 or more beneficiaries of the estate who were *death benefits dependants of the deceased have benefited, or may be expected to benefit, from the *superannuation death benefit:


    (a) the benefit is treated as if it had been paid to you as a person who was a death benefits dependant of the deceased; and


    (b) the benefit is taken to be income to which no beneficiary is presently entitled.

    302-10(3)    
    To the extent that 1 or more beneficiaries of the estate who were not *death benefits dependants of the deceased have benefited, or may be expected to benefit, from the *superannuation death benefit:


    (a) the benefit is treated as if it had been paid to you as a person who was not a death benefits dependant of the deceased; and


    (b) the benefit is taken to be income to which no beneficiary is presently entitled.

    Subdivision 302-B - Death benefits to dependant  

    Lump sum death benefits to dependants are tax free

    SECTION 302-60  

    302-60   All of superannuation lump sum is tax free  


    A *superannuation lump sum that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a *death benefits dependant is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

    Superannuation income stream - either deceased died aged 60 or above or dependant aged 60 or above

    SECTION 302-65  

    302-65   Superannuation income stream benefits are tax free  


    A *superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person ofwhom you are a *death benefits dependant is not assessable income and is not *exempt income in either or both of the following cases:


    (a) you are 60 years or over when you receive the benefit;


    (b) the deceased died aged 60 or over.

    Note 1:

    If your superannuation income stream benefit includes an element untaxed in the fund, see section 302-85 .

    Note 2:

    If your superannuation income stream benefit is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A .

    Superannuation income stream - deceased died aged under 60 and dependant aged under 60

    SECTION 302-70  

    302-70   Superannuation income stream - tax free status of tax free component  


    The *tax free component of a *superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a *death benefits dependant is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if:


    (a) you are under 60 when you receive the benefit; and


    (b) the deceased died aged under 60.

    Note:

    For tax free component , see Subdivision 307-C .

    SECTION 302-75   Superannuation income stream - taxable component attracts 15% offset  

    302-75(1)    
    The *taxable component of a *superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a *death benefits dependant is assessable income if:


    (a) you are under 60 when you receive the benefit; and


    (b) the deceased died aged under 60.

    Note:

    For taxable component , see Subdivision 307-C .


    302-75(2)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset equal to 15% of the *taxable component of the benefit.

    Death benefits to dependant - elements untaxed in fund

    SECTION 302-80  

    302-80   Treatment of element untaxed in the fund of superannuation income stream death benefit to dependant  


    If a *superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a *death benefits dependant includes an *element untaxed in the fund:


    (a) the *tax free component (if any) of the benefit is treated in the same way as the tax free component of a superannuation income stream benefit under section 302-65 or 302-70 ; and


    (b) the *element taxed in the fund (if any) of the benefit is treated in the same way as the *taxable component of a superannuation income stream benefit under section 302-65 or 302-75 ; and


    (c) the element untaxed in the fund is treated in accordance with section 302-85 or 302-90 .

    Note:

    If your superannuation income stream benefit is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A .

    SECTION 302-85   Deceased died aged 60 or above or dependant aged 60 years or above - superannuation income stream: element untaxed in fund attracts 10% offset  

    302-85(1)    
    The *element untaxed in the fund of a *superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a *death benefits dependant is assessable income in either or both of the following cases:


    (a) you are 60 years or over when you receive the benefit;


    (b) the deceased died aged 60 or above.

    302-85(2)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset equal to 10% of the *element untaxed in the fund of the benefit.

    Note:

    If your superannuation income stream benefit is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A .

    SECTION 302-90  

    302-90   Deceased died aged under 60 and dependant aged under 60 - superannuation income stream: element untaxed in fund is assessable income  


    The *element untaxed in the fund of a *superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a *death benefits dependant is assessable income if:


    (a) you are aged under 60 when you receive the benefit; and


    (b) the deceased died aged under 60.

    Subdivision 302-C - Death benefits to non-dependant  

    Superannuation lump sum

    SECTION 302-140  

    302-140   Superannuation lump sum - tax free status of tax free component  


    The *tax free component of a *superannuation lump sum that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are not a *death benefits dependant is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.
    Note:

    For tax free component , see Subdivision 307-C .

    SECTION 302-145   Superannuation lump sum - element taxed in the fund taxed at 15%, element untaxed in the fund taxed at 30%  

    302-145(1)    
    If you receive a *superannuation lump sum because of the death of a person of whom you are not a *death benefits dependant, the *taxable component of the lump sum is assessable income.

    Note:

    For taxable component , see Subdivision 307-C .


    302-145(2)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the *element taxed in the fund of the lump sum does not exceed 15%.

    302-145(3)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the *element untaxed in the fund of the lump sum does not exceed 30%.

    Subdivision 302-D - Definitions relating to dependants  

    SECTION 302-195   Meaning of death benefits dependant  

    302-195(1)    
    A death benefits dependant , of a person who has died, is:


    (a) the deceased person ' s *spouse or former spouse; or


    (b) the deceased person ' s *child, aged less than 18; or


    (c) any other person with whom the deceased person had an interdependency relationship under section 302-200 just before he or she died; or


    (d) any other person who was a dependant of the deceased person just before he or she died.

    302-195(2)    


    For the purposes of this Division, treat an individual who receives a *superannuation lump sum because of the death of another person as a death benefits dependant of the deceased person in relation to the lump sum if the deceased person *died in the line of duty (see subsection (3)) as:


    (a) a member of the Defence Force; or


    (b) a member of the Australian Federal Police or the police force of a State or Territory; or


    (c) a protective service officer (within the meaning of the Australian Federal Police Act 1979 ).


    302-195(3)    


    For the purposes of subsection (2), a person died in the line of duty if the person died in the circumstances specified in the regulations.

    SECTION 302-200   What is an interdependency relationship ?  

    302-200(1)    
    Two persons (whether or not related by family) have an interdependency relationship under this section if:


    (a) they have a close personal relationship; and


    (b) they live together; and


    (c) one or each of them provides the other with financial support; and


    (d) one or each of them provides the other with domestic support and personal care.

    302-200(2)    
    In addition, 2 persons (whether or not related by family) also have an interdependency relationship under this section if:


    (a) they have a close personal relationship; and


    (b) they do not satisfy one or more of the requirements of an interdependency relationship mentioned in paragraphs (1)(b), (c) and (d); and


    (c) the reason they do not satisfy those requirements is that either or both of them suffer from a physical, intellectual or psychiatric disability.

    302-200(3)    
    The regulations may specify:


    (a) matters that are, or are not, to be taken into account in determining under subsection (1) or (2) whether 2 persons have an interdependency relationship under this section; and


    (b) circumstances in which 2 persons have, or do not have, an interdependency relationship under this section.

    Division 303 - Superannuation benefits paid in special circumstances  

    Guide to Division 303  

    SECTION 303-1   What this Division is about  


    Under Subdivision 303-A , the tax treatment of superannuation income stream benefits that are defined benefit income can be less favourable to you if that income exceeds your defined benefit income cap.

    Subdivision 303-B sets out special circumstances in which superannuation benefits are neither assessable income nor exempt income.

    Subdivision 303-A - Modifications for defined benefit income  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 303-2   Effect of exceeding defined benefit income cap on assessable income  

    303-2(1)    
    Despite sections 301-10 and 302-65 , if:


    (a) during a *financial year, you receive one or more *superannuation income stream benefits:


    (i) that are *defined benefit income; and

    (ii) to which either section 301-10 or 302-65 applies; and


    (b) the sum of all of those benefits (other than any *elements untaxed in the fund of those benefits) exceeds your *defined benefit income cap for the financial year;

    50% of that excess is assessable income.


    303-2(2)    
    Defined benefit income is a *superannuation income stream benefit that is paid from a *capped defined benefit income stream.

    SECTION 303-3  

    303-3   Effect of exceeding defined benefit income cap on tax offsets  


    Despite sections 301-100 and 302-85 , if:


    (a) during a *financial year, you receive one or more *superannuation income stream benefits:


    (i) that are *defined benefit income; and

    (ii) in relation to which you are entitled, or apart from this section you would be entitled, to one or more *tax offsets under section 301-100 or 302-85 ; and


    (b) the sum of all of the superannuation income stream benefits you receive during the financial year:


    (i) that are defined benefit income; and

    (ii) to which section 301-10 , 301-100 , 302-65 or 302-85 applies;
    exceeds your *defined benefit income cap for the financial year;

    the sum of those tax offsets is reduced (but not below zero) by an amount equal to 10% of that excess.

    SECTION 303-4   Meaning of defined benefit income cap  

    303-4(1)    
    Your defined benefit income cap for a *financial year is the following amount (rounded up to the nearest dollar):


      The *general transfer balance cap for the *financial year
      16


    303-4(2)    
    Despite subsection (1) of this section, if a particular day in a *financial year is the first day in relation to which section 301-10 , 301-100 , 302-65 or 302-85 :


    (a) applies to you in respect of an amount of *defined benefit income; or


    (b) would apart from this Subdivision apply to you in respect of an amount of defined benefit income;

    your defined benefit income cap for the financial year is the following amount (rounded up to the nearest dollar):


    The *general transfer balance cap for the *financial year × 1 + Number of days remaining in the *financial year after that day
    16 Number of days in the *financial year


    303-4(3)    
    Despite subsections (1) and (2) of this section, if:


    (a) in a case where subsection (1) applies - during the *financial year, you receive any amounts of *defined benefit income to which none of sections 301-10 , 301-100 , 302-65 and 302-85 apply; or


    (b) in a case where subsection (2) applies - during the financial year, you receive after the day mentioned in that subsection any amounts of defined benefit income to which none of sections 301-10 , 301-100 , 302-65 and 302-85 apply;

    your defined benefit income cap for the financial year under subsection (1) or (2) (as the case requires) is reduced by the sum of those amounts.


    Subdivision 303-B - Other special circumstances  

    SECTION 303-5   Commutation of income stream if you are under 25 etc.  

    303-5(1)    
    A *superannuation lump sum that you receive from a *complying superannuation plan is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if:


    (a) the superannuation lump sum arises from the commutation of a *superannuation income stream; and


    (b) any of these conditions are satisfied:


    (i) you are under 25 when you receive the superannuation lump sum;

    (ii) the commutation takes place because you turn 25;

    (iii) you are permanently disabled when you receive the superannuation lump sum; and


    (c) you had received one or more *superannuation income stream benefits from the superannuation income stream before the commutation because of the death of a person of whom you are a *death benefits dependant.

    303-5(2)    
    Subsection (1) applies despite Divisions 301 and 302 .

    SECTION 303-10   Superannuation lump sum member benefit paid to member having a terminal medical condition  

    303-10(1)    
    This section applies to a *superannuation member benefit that:


    (a) is a *superannuation lump sum; and


    (b) is:


    (i) paid from a *complying superannuation plan; or

    (ii) a *superannuation guarantee payment, a *small superannuation account payment, an *unclaimed money payment, a *superannuation co-contribution benefit payment or a *superannuation annuity payment.

    303-10(2)    
    The lump sum is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if a *terminal medical condition exists in relation to you when you receive the lump sum or within 90 days after you receive it.

    Note:

    For a lump sum you receive in the 2007-08 financial year, the period of 90 days may be extended until 30 June 2008: see section 303-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    SECTION 303-15  

    303-15   Payments from release authorities - general  


    A *superannuation benefit that you receive (or are taken to receive) is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if it is paid in response to a release authority issued under section 131-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to you.
    Note:

    In some cases, a related amount may still be included in your assessable income (see Subdivision 292-B and sections 304-20 and 313-20 ).

    303-17   (Repealed) SECTION 303-17 Payments from release authorities etc. - released non-concessional contributions and associated earnings  
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)

    SECTION 303-20  

    303-20   Payments from release authorities - paying debt account discharge liability for a superannuation interest  


    A * superannuation benefit that you receive (or are taken to receive), paid in relation to a release authority issued to you in respect of a * release entitlement you have, is not assessable income and is not * exempt income.
    Note:

    However, payments that exceed the release entitlement are assessable: see section 304-20 .

    Division 304 - Superannuation benefits in breach of legislative requirements etc.  

    Guide to Division 304  

    SECTION 304-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division overrides the tax treatment in Divisions 301 and 302 if payments from complying superannuation plans etc. are in breach of payment and other rules.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    304-5 Application
    304-10 Superannuation benefits in breach of legislative requirements etc.
    304-15 (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)
    304-20 Excess payments from release authorities - paying debt account discharge liability for a superannuation interest

    Operative provisions  

    SECTION 304-5  

    304-5   Application  


    This Division applies despite Divisions 301 , 302 and 303 .

    SECTION 304-10   Superannuation benefits in breach of legislative requirements etc.  

    304-10(1)    
    Include in your assessable income the amount of a *superannuation benefit if:


    (a) any of the following applies:


    (i) you received the benefit from a *complying superannuation fund or from a *superannuation fund that was previously a complying superannuation fund;

    (ii) the benefit is attributable to the assets of a complying superannuation fund or from a superannuation fund that was previously a complying superannuation fund; and


    (b) any of the following applies:


    (i) the fund was not (when you received the benefit) maintained as required by section 62 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ;

    (ii) you received the benefit otherwise than in accordance with payment standards prescribed under subsection 31(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 .

    304-10(2)    
    Include in your assessable income the amount of a *superannuation benefit if:


    (a) any of the following applies:


    (i) you received the benefit from a *complying approved deposit fund or from an *approved deposit fund that was previously a complying approved deposit fund;

    (ii) the benefit is attributable to the assets of a complying approved deposit fund or from an approved deposit fund that was previously a complying approved deposit fund; and


    (b) you received the benefit otherwise than in accordance with payment standards prescribed under subsection 32(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 .

    304-10(3)    
    Include in your assessable income the amount of a *superannuation benefit you receive from an *RSA in breach of the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 , regulations under that Act or payment standards prescribed under subsection 38(2) of that Act.

    304-10(4)    
    However, you do not have to include the amount in your assessable income to the extent that the Commissioner is satisfied that it is unreasonable that it be included having regard to:


    (a) for subsection (1) or (2) - the nature of the fund; and


    (b) any other matters that the Commissioner considers relevant.

    304-10(5)    


    For the purposes of this section, treat your receipt of a benefit (other than a *superannuation benefit) out of, or attributable to, the assets of a *superannuation plan as your receipt of a superannuation benefit.

    304-15   (Repealed) SECTION 304-15 Excess payments from release authorities  
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)

    SECTION 304-20   Excess payments from release authorities - paying debt account discharge liability for a superannuation interest  

    304-20(1)    
    Despite section 303-20 , a * superannuation benefit that you receive (or are taken to receive), paid in relation to a release authority issued to you in respect of a * release entitlement you have, is assessable income to the extent (if any) that it exceeds the amount mentioned in subsection (2).

    Note:

    Section 303-20 makes superannuation benefits received under a release authority non-assessable non-exempt income.


    304-20(2)    
    The amount is the amount of the * release entitlement, reduced (but not below zero) by the amount of any * superannuation benefit that was not assessable income and not * exempt income under a previous operation of section 303-20 of this Act in relation to that release entitlement.

    Division 305 - Superannuation benefits paid from non-complying superannuation plans  

    Guide to Division 305  

    SECTION 305-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division sets out the tax treatment of superannuation benefits received by members of non-complying plans (including foreign superannuation funds).

    Subdivision 305-A - Superannuation benefits from Australian non-complying superannuation funds  

    SECTION 305-5  

    305-5   Tax treatment of superannuation benefits from certain Australian non-complying superannuation funds  


    A *superannuation benefit that you receive from a *non-complying superannuation fund that is an *Australian superannuation fund (for the income year in which the benefit is paid) is *exempt income if:


    (a) the fund:


    (i) has never been a *complying superannuation fund; or

    (ii) last stopped being a complying superannuation fund for the income year in which 1 July 1995 occurred or a later income year; and


    (b) the fund:


    (i) has never been a *foreign superannuation fund; or

    (ii) last stopped being a foreign superannuation fund for the income year in which 1 July 1995 occurred or a later income year.

    Subdivision 305-B - Superannuation benefits from foreign superannuation funds  

    Application of Subdivision

    SECTION 305-55   Restriction to lump sums received from certain foreign superannuation funds  

    305-55(1)    
    This Subdivision applies if:


    (a) you receive a *superannuation lump sum from a *foreign superannuation fund; and


    (b) the fund is an entity mentioned in item 4 of the table in subsection 295-490(1) (which deals with deductions for superannuation entities).

    305-55(2)    


    This Subdivision also applies if you receive a payment, other than a pension payment, from a scheme for the payment of benefits in the nature of superannuation upon retirement or death that:


    (a) is not, and never has been, an *Australian superannuation fund or a *foreign superannuation fund; and


    (b) was not established in Australia; and


    (c) is not centrally managed or controlled in Australia.


    305-55(3)    


    This Subdivision applies to a payment mentioned in subsection (2) from a scheme mentioned in that subsection in the same way as it applies to a *superannuation lump sum from a *foreign superannuation fund.

    Lump sums received within 6 months after Australian residency or termination of foreign employment etc.

    SECTION 305-60  

    305-60   Lump sums tax free - foreign resident period  


    A *superannuation lump sum you receive from a *foreign superannuation fund is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if:


    (a) you receive it within 6 months after you become an Australian resident; and


    (b) it relates only to a period:


    (i) when you were not an Australian resident; or

    (ii) starting after you became an Australian resident and ending before you receive the payment; and


    (c) it does not exceed the amount in the fund that was vested in you when you received the payment.

    Note:

    If you received the lump sum after that period of 6 months, or the lump sum exceeds the vested amount, the payment will fall within section 305-70 .

    SECTION 305-65   Lump sums tax free - Australian resident period  

    305-65(1)    
    A *superannuation lump sum you receive is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if:


    (a) you receive it in consequence of:


    (i) the termination of your employment as an employee, or as the holder of an office, in a foreign country; or

    (ii) the termination of your engagement on qualifying service on an approved project (within the meaning of section 23AF of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ), in relation to a foreign country; and


    (b) it relates only to the period of that employment, holding of office, or engagement; and


    (c) you were an Australian resident during the period of the employment, holding of office or engagement; and


    (d) you receive the lump sum within 6 months after the termination; and


    (e) the lump sum is not exempt from taxation under the law of the foreign country; and


    (f) for a period of employment or holding an office - your foreign earnings from the employment or office are exempt from income tax under section 23AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and


    (g) for a period of engagement on qualifying service on an approved project - your eligible foreign remuneration from the service is exempt from income tax under section 23AF of that Act.

    Note:

    If you received the lump sum after that period of 6 months, the lump sum will fall within section 305-70 .


    305-65(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), treat the termination of employment, holding of office, or engagement as including:


    (a) retirement from the employment, office or engagement; and


    (b) cessation of the employment, office or engagement because of death.

    Lump sums to which sections 305-60 and 305-65 do not apply

    SECTION 305-70   Lump sums received more than 6 months after Australian residency or termination of foreign employment etc.  


    Superannuation lump sums to which section applies

    305-70(1)    
    This section applies to a *superannuation lump sum you receive from a *foreign superannuation fund if:


    (a) you are an Australian resident when you receive the lump sum; and


    (b) sections 305-60 and 305-65 do not apply to the lump sum.

    Assessable part

    305-70(2)    
    Include in your assessable income so much of the lump sum (excluding any amount mentioned in subsection (4)) as equals:


    (a) your *applicable fund earnings (worked out under section 305-75 ); or


    (b) if you have made a choice under section 305-80 - your applicable fund earnings, less the amount covered by the choice.

    Note:

    Under section 305-80 , if your lump sum is paid into a complying superannuation plan, you can choose to have some or all of the applicable fund earnings excluded from your assessable income. The amount you choose is included in the assessable income of the plan: see section 295-200 .



    Non-assessable, non-exempt part

    305-70(3)    
    The remainder of the lump sum is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

    Amount paid into another foreign superannuation fund

    305-70(4)    
    Any part of the lump sum that is paid into another *foreign superannuation fund is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

    Note:

    However, your applicable fund earnings under section 305-75 in relation to a later lump sum payment out of the other foreign superannuation fund may include an amount ( previously exempt fund earnings ) attributable to the lump sum.


    SECTION 305-75   Lump sums - applicable fund earnings  

    305-75(1)    
    This section applies if you need to work out an amount (your applicable fund earnings ) in relation to a *superannuation lump sum to which section 305-70 applies that you receive from a *foreign superannuation fund.

    If you were an Australian resident at all times

    305-75(2)    
    If you were an Australian resident at all times during the period to which the lump sum relates, the amount of your applicable fund earnings is the amount (not less than zero) worked out as follows:


    (a) work out the total of the following amounts:


    (i) the part of the lump sum that is attributable to contributions made by or in respect of you on or after the day when you became a member of the fund (the start day );

    (ii) the part of the lump sum (if any) that is attributable to amounts transferred into the fund from any other *foreign superannuation fund during the period;


    (b) subtract that total amount from the amount in the fund that was vested in you when the lump sum was paid (before any deduction for *foreign income tax);


    (c) add the total of all your previously exempt fund earnings (if any) covered by subsections (5) and (6).



    If you were not an Australian resident at all times

    305-75(3)    
    If you become an Australian resident after the start of the period to which the lump sum relates (but before you received it) the amount of your applicable fund earnings is the amount (not less than zero) worked out as follows:


    (a) work out the total of the following amounts:


    (i) the amount in the fund that was vested in you just before the day (the start day ) you first became an Australian resident during the period;

    (ii) the part of the payment that is attributable to contributions to the fund made by or in respect of you during the remainder of the period;

    (iii) the part of the payment (if any) that is attributable to amounts transferred into the fund from any other *foreign superannuation fund during the remainder of the period;


    (b) subtract that total amount from the amount in the fund that was vested in you when the lump sum was paid (before any deduction for *foreign income tax);


    (c) multiply the resulting amount by the proportion of the total days during the period when you were an Australian resident;


    (d) add the total of all previously exempt fund earnings (if any) covered by subsections (5) and (6).



    Previous lump sums from the fund

    305-75(4)    
    If the lump sum is not the first lump sum from the fund you have received to which this section applies, for subsections (2) and (3) the start day is the day after you received the most recent such lump sum.

    Previously exempt fund earnings

    305-75(5)    
    You have an amount of previously exempt fund earnings in respect of the lump sum if:


    (a) part or all of the amount in the fund that was vested in you when the lump sum was paid (before any deduction for *foreign income tax) is attributable to the amount; and


    (b) the amount is attributable to a payment received from a *foreign superannuation fund; and


    (c) the amount would have been included in your assessable income under subsection 305-70(2) by the application of this section, but for the payment having been received by another foreign superannuation fund.


    305-75(6)    
    The amount of your previously exempt fund earnings is the amount mentioned in paragraph (5)(c) (disregarding the addition of previously exempt fund earnings under subsection (2) or (3) of this section).

    SECTION 305-80   Lump sums paid into complying superannuation plans - choice  

    305-80(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) section 305-70 applies to a *superannuation lump sum that is paid from a *foreign superannuation fund; and


    (b) you are taken to receive the lump sum under section 307-15 ; and


    (c) all of the lump sum is paid into a *complying superannuation fund; and


    (d) immediately after the lump sum is paid into the complying superannuation fund, you no longer have a *superannuation interest in the foreign superannuation fund.

    305-80(2)    
    You may choose for all or part of your *applicable fund earnings worked out under section 305-75 (but not exceeding the amount of the lump sum) to be included in the assessable income of the *complying superannuation plan.

    Note:

    Section 295-200 provides for the amount specified in the choice to be included in the assessable income of the complying superannuation plan.


    305-80(3)    
    Your choice:


    (a) must be in writing; and


    (b) must comply with the requirements (if any) specified in the regulations.

    Division 306 - Roll-overs etc.  

    Guide to Division 306  

    SECTION 306-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out the tax treatment of payments made from one superannuation plan to another superannuation plan, and of similar payments.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    306-5 Effect of a roll-over superannuation benefit
    306-10 Roll-over superannuation benefit
    306-12 Involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit
    306-15 Tax on excess untaxed roll-over amounts
    306-20 Effect of payment to government of unclaimed superannuation money
    306-25 Payments connected with financial claims scheme to RSAs

    Operative provisions  

    SECTION 306-5  

    306-5   Effect of a roll-over superannuation benefit  


    A *roll-over superannuation benefit that you are taken to receive under section 307-15 is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.
    Note:

    Roll-over superannuation benefits are paid into a complying superannuation plan or are used to purchase a superannuation annuity on your behalf. However, you are taken to receive the benefit under subsection 307-15(1) .

    SECTION 306-10  

    306-10   Roll-over superannuation benefit  


    A *superannuation benefit is a roll-over superannuation benefit if:

    (a)    

    the benefit is a *superannuation lump sum and a *superannuation benefit; and

    (b)    the benefit is not a superannuation benefit of a kind specified in the regulations; and

    (c)    

    the benefit satisfies any of the following conditions:

    (i) it is paid from a *complying superannuation plan;

    (ii) it is an *unclaimed money payment;

    (iii) it arises from the commutation of a *superannuation annuity; and

    (d)    the benefit satisfies any of the following conditions:


    (i) it is paid to a complying superannuation plan;

    (ii) it is paid to an entity to purchase a superannuation annuity from the entity.
    Note 1:

    A superannuation benefit may be paid from one superannuation plan of a superannuation provider to another superannuation plan of the same provider.

    Note 2:

    For the treatment of amounts transferred within a superannuation plan, see subsection 307-5(8) .

    SECTION 306-12  

    306-12   Involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit  


    A *roll-over superannuation benefit is an involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit if it is:


    (a) a payment transferring a *superannuation interest of:


    (i) a member of a *superannuation fund; or

    (ii) a depositor with an *approved deposit fund; or

    (iii) a holder of an *RSA;
    to a *successor fund (other than a *self managed superannuation fund) without the consent of the member, depositor or holder; or


    (b) a payment transferring an *accrued default amount of a member (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ) of a *complying superannuation fund to another complying superannuation fund:


    (i) as a result of an election under paragraph 29SAA(1)(b) of that Act; or

    (ii) under section 388 of that Act;
    if:

    (iii) that member becomes a member (within the meaning of that Act) of the other fund immediately after the transfer; and

    (iv) the transfer happens during the period beginning on 1 July 2015 and ending on 1 July 2017; or


    (c) a payment of consideration for the issue to a person of a beneficial interest in an eligible rollover fund (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ) in accordance with an application on behalf of that person under section 243 of that Act.

    SECTION 306-15   Tax on excess untaxed roll-over amounts  

    306-15(1)    
    This section applies to a *superannuation benefit if:


    (a) it is a *roll-over superannuation benefit that is paid into a *superannuation plan; and


    (b) you are taken to receive the benefit under section 307-15 ; and


    (c) the benefit consists of, or includes, an amount that is an *element untaxed in the fund; and


    (d) the amount mentioned in paragraph (c) exceeds your *untaxed plan cap amount (see section 307-350 ), for the superannuation plan from which the benefit is paid, just before you are taken to receive the benefit.

    Note:

    To work out your untaxed plan cap amount in relation to an unclaimed money payment from the Commissioner, see subsection 307-350(2B) .


    306-15(1A)    


    However, this section does not apply to a *roll-over superannuation benefit that is transferred from one *superannuation interest in a *superannuation plan to another superannuation interest in the same plan.
    Note 1:

    A superannuation benefit may be paid from one superannuation plan of a superannuation provider to another superannuation plan of the same provider. Such a benefit may be a roll-over superannuation benefit: see section 306-10 .

    Note 2:

    For the treatment of amounts transferred within the same superannuation plan, see subsection 307-5(8) .


    306-15(2)    
    The excess untaxed roll-over amount is the amount of the excess mentioned in paragraph (1)(d).

    306-15(3)    
    You are liable to pay income tax on the *excess untaxed roll-over amount at the rate declared by the Parliament in respect of such amounts.

    Note 1:

    The tax is imposed in the Superannuation (Excess Untaxed Roll-over Amounts Tax) Act 2007 , and the amount of tax is set out in that Act.

    Note 2:

    See the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for provisions dealing with the payment of the tax.


    SECTION 306-20  

    306-20   Effect of payment to government of unclaimed superannuation money  


    An *unclaimed money payment that you are taken to receive under section 307-15 because it is paid in accordance with the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 , or because it is paid as mentioned in subsection 18(4) of that Act, to the Commissioner or a State or Territory authority (within the meaning of that Act) is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

    SECTION 306-25   Payments connected with financial claims scheme to RSAs  

    306-25(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a person is the holder of an *RSA (the old RSA ) of which an *ADI is the *RSA provider; and


    (b) an entitlement of the person arises under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 in connection with the old RSA; and


    (c) either:


    (i) the entitlement, so far as it relates to the old RSA, is met wholly or partly by the making of a payment to another RSA (the new RSA ) that the person is the holder of (whether or not the new RSA was established under section 16AH of the Banking Act 1959 ); or

    (ii) a liquidator of the ADI pays a distribution from the liquidation of the ADI, so far as the distribution is attributable to the old RSA, to another RSA (also the new RSA ) that the person is the holder of (whether or not the new RSA was established under section 16AR of the Banking Act 1959 ).

    306-25(2)    
    This Part (except this section), and the other provisions of this Act (except this section) so far as they relate to this Part, apply in relation to the payment to the new RSA as if:


    (a) the payment were made from the old RSA to the new RSA; and


    (b) the entity that made the payment (rather than the *ADI) were the *RSA provider of the old RSA.

    Note:

    The effects of this include:

  • (a) the payment is a superannuation member benefit of the person (because of sections 307-5 and 307-15 ); and
  • (b) the payment is a superannuation lump sum under Subdivision 307-B (unless regulations prevent this); and
  • (c) the payment is a roll-over superannuation benefit under section 306-10 (unless regulations prevent this); and
  • (d) reporting obligations (such as those in section 390-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 ) apply to the entity that made the payment as if it were the RSA provider of the old RSA.

  • 306-25(3)    
    However, for the purposes of section 307-125 , determine the *value of the *superannuation interest, and the amount of each of the *tax free component and the *taxable component of the interest:


    (a) when the entitlement arose; or


    (b) if a *superannuation income stream benefit had been paid from the old RSA before that time - at the time the relevant *superannuation income stream commenced.

    306-25(4)    
    Subsection (3) has effect despite:


    (a) subsection 307-125(3) (as it applies because of subsection (2) of this section); and


    (b) paragraph 307-125(3)(a) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    306-25(5)    
    This section has effect despite:


    (a) Division 253 ; and


    (b) Division 21 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Division 307 - Key concepts relating to superannuation benefits  

    Guide to Division 307  

    SECTION 307-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division defines concepts used in Divisions 301 to 306 , such as superannuation benefit , and the tax free component and taxable component of such benefits. To work out those components, it is often necessary to work out the corresponding components of the superannuation interest from which the benefit is paid (see Subdivision 307-D ).

    This Division also defines the element taxed in the fund and the element untaxed in the fund of superannuation benefits, which are relevant to superannuation benefits paid from untaxed funds etc. (see Subdivision 307-D ).

    Subdivision 307-F defines the concessional limits used in Division 301 known as the low rate cap amount and untaxed plan cap amount.

    Subdivision 307-A - Superannuation benefits generally  

    SECTION 307-5   What is a superannuation benefit?  

    307-5(1)    


    A superannuation benefit is a payment described in the table.


    Types of superannuation benefits
    Item Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
    Superannuation benefit type Superannuation member benefit Superannuation death benefit
    1 superannuation fund payment A payment to you from a * superannuation fund because you are a fund member. A payment to you from a superannuation fund, after another person ' s death, because the other person was a fund member.
    2 RSA payment A payment to you from an * RSA because you are the holder of the RSA. A payment to you from an RSA, after another person ' s death, because the other person was the holder of the RSA.
    3 approved deposit fund payment A payment to you from an * approved deposit fund because you are a depositor with the fund. A payment to you from an approved deposit fund after another person ' s death, because the other person was a depositor with the fund.
    4 small superannuation account payment A payment to you under section 63 , 64 , 65 , 65A , 66 , 67 or 67A , or subsection 76(6) , of the Small Superannuation Accounts Act 1995 .
    (These provisions authorise payment of money held under the Act.)
    A payment to you under section 68 or subsection 76(7) of the Small Superannuation Accounts Act 1995 .
    (These provisions authorise payment of money held under the Act to the legal personal representative of the deceased.)
    5 unclaimed money payment A payment to you:
    (a) under subsection 17(1) , (2) or (2AB) , 20F(1) or 20H(2) , (2AA) or (2A), section 20QD or subsection 20QF(2) or (5) , section 21C or subsection 21E(2) or (5) , section 22 or subsection 22B(2) or (5) , section 24E or subsection 24G(2) or (3A) or 24NA(2) , (3) or (4) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 ; or
    (b) as mentioned in subsection 18(4) or (5) of that Act;
    otherwise than because of another person ' s death.
    A payment to you:
    (a) under subsection 17(1) , (2) , (2AB) or (2AC) , 20H(2) , (2AA) , (2A) or (3) , 20QF(2) , (5) or (6) , 21E(2) , (5) or (6) , 22B(2) , (5) or (6) or 24G(2) , (3A) or (3B) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 ; or
    (b) as mentioned in subsection 18(4) or (5) of that Act;
    because of another person ' s death.
    6 superannuation co-contribution benefit payment A payment to you under paragraph 15(1)(c) of the Superannuation (Government Co-contribution for Low Income Earners) Act 2003 . A payment to you under paragraph 15(1)(d) of the Superannuation (Government Co-contribution for Low Income Earners) Act 2003 .
    7 superannuation guarantee payment A payment to you under section 65A , 66 or 66A of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 .
    (This provides for money collected under the Act to be paid to a person who retires because of incapacity or invalidity, or who has a terminal medical condition.)
    A payment to you under section 67 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 .
    (This provides for money collected under the Act to be paid to the legal personal representative of the deceased.)
    8 superannuation annuity payment A payment to you:
    (a) from a * superannuation annuity; or
    (b) arising from the commutation of a superannuation annuity;
    because you are the annuitant.
    A payment to you:
    (a) from a superannuation annuity; or
    (b) arising from the commutation of a superannuation annuity;
    because of the death of the annuitant.


    307-5(2)    
    A superannuation member benefit is a payment described in column 2 of the table.

    307-5(3)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    307-5(3A)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    307-5(3B)    
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)


    307-5(4)    
    A superannuation death benefit is a payment described in column 3 of the table.

    307-5(5)    
    Subsection (6) applies if a *contributions-splitting superannuation benefit or a *family law superannuation payment is paid to you because another person is a member of a *superannuation fund, holder of an *RSA or depositor with an *approved deposit fund, or the annuitant under a *superannuation annuity.

    307-5(6)    
    For the purposes of this section (and despite section 307-15 ):

    (a)    treat yourself as a member of the fund, holder of the *RSA, depositor with the fund or annuitant under the *superannuation annuity; and

    (b)    do not treat the other person as a member of the fund, holder of the RSA, depositor with the fund or annuitant under the superannuation annuity.

    Note:

    This means that the benefit is a superannuation benefit for you but not for the other person.


    307-5(7)    
    A family law superannuation payment is a payment that:

    (a)    

    is a payment of any of the following kinds:

    (i) a payment in accordance with Part VIIIB or VIIIC of the Family Law Act 1975 ;

    (ii) a payment in accordance with prescribed regulations made under the Family Law Act 1975 ;

    (iii) a payment in accordance with Part 7A of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 ;

    (iv) a payment in accordance with Part 4A of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997 ;

    (v) a payment specified in the regulations; and

    (b)    satisfies the requirements (if any) specified in the regulations.



    Treatment of amounts transferred within a superannuation plan

    307-5(8)    
    If an amount is transferred from one *superannuation interest in a *superannuation plan to another superannuation interest in the same plan, treat the transfer as a payment in determining whether the transfer of the amount is a superannuation benefit or a roll-over superannuation benefit.

    SECTION 307-10  

    307-10   Payments that are not superannuation benefits  


    A payment of any of the following kinds is not a superannuation benefit :


    (a) an amount payable to a person under an income stream because of the person's temporary inability to engage in *gainful employment;


    (aa) a benefit to which subsection 26AF(1) or 26AFA(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies;


    (ab) an amount required by the Bankruptcy Act 1966 to be paid to a trustee;


    (b) an amount:


    (i) received by you, or to which you are entitled, as the result of the commutation of a pension payable from a *constitutionally protected fund; and

    (ii) wholly applied in paying any superannuation contributions surcharge (as defined in section 38 of the Superannuation Contributions Tax (Members of Constitutionally Protected Superannuation Funds) Assessment and Collection Act 1997 );


    (c) an amount:


    (i) received by you, or to which you are entitled, as the result of the commutation of a pension payable by a superannuation provider (within the meaning of the Superannuation Contributions Tax (Assessment and Collection) Act 1997 ) and;

    (ii) wholly applied in paying any superannuation contributions surcharge (as defined in section 43 of that Act);


    (d) a payment of a pension or an *annuity from a *foreign superannuation fund.

    SECTION 307-15   Payments for your benefit or at your direction or request  

    307-15(1)    
    This section applies for the purposes of:


    (a) determining whether a payment is a superannuation benefit ; and


    (b) determining whether a *superannuation benefit is made to you, or received by you.

    307-15(2)    
    A payment is treated as being made to you, or received by you, if it is made:


    (a) for your benefit; or


    (b) to another person or to an entity at your direction or request.

    Note:

    Paragraph (b) would cover, for example, a direction by you that a payment be rolled over from your original superannuation fund into another superannuation fund.


    Subdivision 307-B - Superannuation lump sums and superannuation income stream benefits  

    SECTION 307-65   Meaning of superannuation lump sum  

    307-65(1)    
    A superannuation lump sum is a *superannuation benefit that is not a *superannuation income stream benefit (see section 307-70 ).


    307-65(2)    


    Treat a lump sum payment arising from a partial commutation of a *superannuation income stream as a superannuation lump sum for the purposes of this Act (other than Subdivision 295-F ).

    SECTION 307-70   Meaning of superannuation income stream and superannuation income stream benefit  

    307-70(1)    
    A superannuation income stream benefit is a *superannuation benefit specified in the regulations that is paid from a *superannuation income stream.

    307-70(2)    
    A superannuation income stream has the meaning given by the regulations.

    Note:

    For the purposes of the transfer balance cap, the meaning of superannuation income stream is affected by subsection 294-50(2) .

    SECTION 307-75   Meaning of retirement phase superannuation income stream benefit  

    307-75(1)    
    A *superannuation income stream benefit is a retirement phase superannuation income stream benefit (or RP superannuation income stream benefit ) of a *superannuation fund at a time if it is payable by the fund at that time from a *superannuation income stream that is in the *retirement phase at that time.

    307-75(2)    
    A *superannuation income stream benefit is also a retirement phase superannuation income stream benefit (or RP superannuation income stream benefit ) of a *superannuation fund at a time if it is payable by the fund after that time from a *superannuation income stream that:


    (a) is a *deferred superannuation income stream; and


    (b) is in the *retirement phase at that time.

    SECTION 307-80   When a superannuation income stream is in the retirement phase  

    307-80(1)    
    A *superannuation income stream is in the retirement phase at a time if a *superannuation income stream benefit is payable from it at that time.

    307-80(2)    
    A *superannuation income stream is also in the retirement phase at a time if:


    (a) it is a *deferred superannuation income stream; and


    (b) a *superannuation income stream benefit will be payable from it to a person after that time; and


    (c) the person has satisfied (whether at or before that time) a condition of release specified in any of the following items of the table in Schedule 1 to the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 :


    (i) 101 (retirement);

    (ii) 102A (terminal medical condition);

    (iii) 103 (permanent incapacity);

    (iv) 106 (attaining age 65).

    307-80(3)    


    However, a *superannuation income stream from which a*superannuation income stream benefit is payable is not in the retirement phase at a time if:


    (a) the superannuation income stream is any of the following:


    (i) a transition to retirement income stream (within the meaning of Part 6 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 );

    (ii) a non-commutable allocated annuity (within the meaning of those regulations);

    (iii) a non-commutable allocated pension (within the meaning of those regulations);

    (iv) a transition to retirement pension (within the meaning of Part 4 of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997 );

    (v) a non-commutable allocated pension (within the meaning of those regulations); and


    (aa) the person to whom the benefit is payable is not a reversionary beneficiary; and


    (b) at or before that time, the person to whom the benefit is payable:


    (i) has not satisfied a condition of release specified in paragraph (2)(c); or

    (ii) has satisfied a condition of release specified in subparagraph (2)(c)(i), (ii) or (iii), but has not notified the *superannuation income stream provider for the superannuation income stream of that fact.

    307-80(4)    
    A *superannuation income stream is also not in the retirement phase in an income year if:


    (a) the superannuation income stream is specified in a commutation authority issued by the Commissioner under Subdivision 136-B in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 to a *superannuation income stream provider; and


    (b) the superannuation income stream provider is required by section 136-80 in that Schedule to pay a *superannuation lump sum but fails to do so within the 60-day period mentioned in that section; and


    (c) the income year is the income year in which the 60-day period ended, or a later income year.

    Note:

    The operation of this subsection in relation to the part of the income year before the end of the 60-day period is modified for the purposes of the transfer balance cap: see section 294-50 .

    Subdivision 307-C - Components of a superannuation benefit  

    SECTION 307-120   Components of superannuation benefit  

    307-120(1)    
    Work out the following components of a *superannuation benefit under this Subdivision:

    (a)    the tax free component ;

    (b)    the taxable component .

    307-120(2)    
    Work out those components under:

    (a)    

    if the benefit is not mentioned in paragraph (b) , (c) , (d) or (e) - section 307-125 ; or

    (b)    if the benefit is a *superannuation guarantee payment - section 307-130 ; or

    (c)    if the benefit is a *superannuation co-contribution benefit payment - section 307-135 ; or

    (d)    if the benefit is a *contributions-splitting superannuation benefit - section 307-140 ; or

    (e)    

    if the benefit is a payment under subsection 17(2) , (2AB) or (2AC) , 20H(2) , (2AA) , (2A) or (3) , 20QF(2) , (5) or (6) , 21E(2) , (5) or (6) , 22B(2) , (5) or (6) , 24G(2) , (3A) or (3B) or 24NA(2) , (3) or (4) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 - section 307-142 .

    307-120(3)    
    Those components may be modified under sections 307-145 (which deals with certain disability benefits) and 307-150 (which deals with certain *elements untaxed in fund).

    SECTION 307-125   Proportioning rule  

    307-125(1)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that the *tax free component and *taxable component of a *superannuation benefit are calculated by:

    (a)    first, determining the proportions of the *value of the *superannuation interest that those components represent; and

    (b)    next, applying those proportions to the benefit.

    307-125(2)    
    The *superannuation benefit is taken to be paid in a way such that each of those components of the benefit bears the same proportion to the amount of the benefit that the corresponding component of the *superannuation interest bears to the *value of the superannuation interest.

    Example:

    The amount of a superannuation lump sum is $100. Just before the benefit is paid, the value of the superannuation interest was $1000 (of which $200 was the tax free component and $800 was the taxable component). For the lump sum, the tax free component is $20 and the taxable component is $80.


    307-125(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (2) , determine the *value of the *superannuation interest, and the amount of each of those components of the interest, at whichever of the following times is applicable:

    (a)    if the *superannuation benefit is a *superannuation income stream benefit - when the relevant *superannuation income stream commenced;

    (b)    if the superannuation benefit is a *superannuation lump sum - just before the benefit is paid;

    (c)    

    despite paragraphs (a) and (b) , if the superannuation benefit arises from the commutation of a superannuation income stream:

    (i) if subparagraph (ii) does not apply - when the relevant superannuation income stream commenced; or

    (ii) if the superannuation income stream is a *deferred superannuation income stream that had not commenced before the time the commutation happened - just before the time the commutation happened;

    (d)    

    despite paragraphs (a) and (b) , if:

    (i) the superannuation benefit is an *involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit paid from a superannuation interest; and

    (ii) that interest was supporting a superannuation income stream immediately before that benefit was paid;
    when that superannuation income stream commenced.

    307-125(4)    
    Subsection (2) does not apply to a *superannuation benefit if any of the following applies:

    (a)    the regulations specify an alternative method for determining those components of the benefit;

    (b)    a determination under subsection (5) specifies an alternative method for determining those components of the benefit;

    (c)    the Commissioner consents in writing to the use of another method for determining those components of the benefit.

    If so, use that method to determine those components of the benefit.


    307-125(5)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (4)(b) , the Commissioner may determine, by legislative instrument, one or more alternative methods for determining those components of a *superannuation benefit.


    307-125(6)    
    If the *superannuation benefit is an *unclaimed money payment or a *small superannuation account payment, for the purposes of this section:

    (a)    treat the benefit as a superannuation benefit paid from a *superannuation interest; and

    (b)    treat the amount of the benefit as the *value of that superannuation interest just before the time the benefit is paid.

    SECTION 307-130  

    307-130   Superannuation guarantee payment consists entirely of taxable component  


    The components of a *superannuation benefit that is a *superannuation guarantee payment are as follows:


    (a) the *tax free component is nil;


    (b) the *taxable component is the amount of the benefit.

    SECTION 307-135  

    307-135   Superannuation co-contribution benefit payment consists entirely of tax free component  


    The components of a *superannuation benefit that is a *superannuation co-contribution benefit payment are as follows:


    (a) the *tax free component is the amount of the benefit;


    (b) the *taxable component is nil.

    SECTION 307-140  

    307-140   Contributions-splitting superannuation benefit consists entirely of taxable component  


    The components of a *superannuation benefit that is a *contributions-splitting superannuation benefit are as follows:


    (a) the *tax free component is nil;


    (b) the *taxable component is the amount of the benefit.

    SECTION 307-142   Components of certain unclaimed money payments  


    Preliminary

    307-142(1)    


    This section explains how to work out the *tax free component, and the *taxable component, of a *superannuation benefit that is a payment by the Commissioner under subsection 17(2) , (2AB) or (2AC) , 20H(2) , (2AA) , (2A) or (3) , 20QF(2) , (5) or (6) , 21E(2) , (5) or(6) , 22B(2) , (5) or (6) , 24G(2) , (3A) or (3B) or 24NA(2) , (3) or (4) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 , or by a State or Territory authority as mentioned in subsection 18(5) of that Act, in respect of a person.

    Tax free component

    307-142(2)    


    Work out the *tax free component as follows (unless subsection (3B) or (3C) applies): Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out the amount (the unclaimed amount ) (or amounts), set out in column 1 of the table in subsection (3) , to which the *superannuation benefit is attributable.

    Note:

    A payment made under subsection 17(2) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 1 or 2 of the table.

    A payment under subsection 20H(2) or (3) of that Act may be attributable to more than one unclaimed amount.

    A payment under subsection 20QF(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3A of the table.

    A payment under subsection 21E(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3B of the table.

    A payment under subsection 22B(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3C of the table.

    A payment made under subsection 24G(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 4 of the table.

    A payment under subsection 24NA(2) or (3) of that Act may be attributable to more than one unclaimed amount.


    Step 2.

    Assume that the unclaimed amount (or each unclaimed amount), instead of being paid to the Commissioner, had been paid to the person as the payment (the claimed equivalent ) set out in column 2 of the table.


    Step 3.

    The *tax free component of the *superannuation benefit consists of so much of the superannuation benefit as is attributable to the amount set out in column 3 of the table for the claimed equivalent (or as is attributable to the amounts set out in that column for the claimed equivalents).


    307-142(3)    


    This is the table mentioned in subsection (2) :


    Tax free component
    Item Column 1
    Unclaimed amount
    Column 2
    Claimed equivalent
    Column 3
    Tax free component of claimed equivalent
    1 an amount paid, on or after 1 July 2007, to:
    (a) the Commissioner under subsection 17(1) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 ; or
    (b) a State or Territory authority, as mentioned in subsection 18(4) of that Act;
    in respect of the person
    a * superannuation benefit paid from a * superannuation plan the * tax free component of that superannuation benefit
    2 an amount paid, before 1 July 2007, to:
    (a) the Commissioner under subsection 17(1) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 ; or
    (b) a State or Territory authority, as mentioned in subsection 18(4) of that Act;
    in respect of the person
    an eligible termination payment (within the meaning of subsection 27A(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , as in force just before 1 July 2007) the total of the components, of that eligible termination payment, referred to in subsection 307-225(2) of this Act
    3 an amount paid to the Commissioner under subsection 20F(1) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person (other than an amount referred to in section 65AA of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 ) a * superannuation benefit paid from a * superannuation plan the * tax free component of that superannuation benefit
    3A an amount paid to the Commissioner under section 20QD of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person a *superannuation benefit paid from a *superannuation plan the *tax free component of that superannuation benefit
    3B an amount paid to the Commissioner under section 21C of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person a *superannuation benefit paid from a *superannuation plan the *tax free component of that superannuation benefit
    3C an amount paid to the Commissioner under section 22 of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person a *superannuation benefit paid from a *superannuation plan the *tax free component of that superannuation benefit
    4 an amount paid to the Commissioner under section 24E of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person a * superannuation benefit paid from a * superannuation plan the * tax free component of that superannuation benefit

    Note 1:

    Section 65AA of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 requires certain shortfall components to be treated as amounts paid to the Commissioner under subsection 20F(1) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 .

    The effect of excluding such shortfall components from item 3 of the table in this subsection is that the taxable component includes so much of the superannuation benefit as is attributable to such a shortfall component.

    Note 2:

    The table in this subsection does not cover interest paid by the Commissioner under subsection 20H(2A) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 .

    The effect of this is that the taxable component includes so much of the superannuation benefit as is attributable to such interest.


    307-142(3A)    


    Treat the amount set out in column 3 of an item of the table in subsection (3) as being nil, if:

    (a)    

    the unclaimed amount set out in column 1 of the item is an amount paid to the Commissioner by a State or Territory authority (within the meaning of theSuperannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 ) in the circumstances mentioned in section 18AA , 20JA , 20QH or 24HA of that Act; and

    (b)    the Commissioner does not have sufficient information to work out the amount set out in column 3 of the item.


    307-142(3B)    


    The * tax free component is the amount of the benefit, if the * superannuation benefit is paid under subsection 17(2AB) or (2AC) , 20H(2AA) , 20QF(5) or (6) , 21E(5) or (6) , 22B(5) or (6) , 24G(3A) or (3B) or 24NA(4) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 (interest).

    307-142(3C)    


    Despite subsection (3B), the * tax free component is nil, if the * superannuation benefit is paid under subsection 20H(2AA) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 (interest) in respect of a person who:

    (a)    is a former temporary resident (within the meaning of that Act) when the payment is made; or

    (b)    if the person died before the payment is made - was a former temporary resident just before dying.



    Taxable component

    307-142(4)    
    The *taxable component is so much (if any) of the *superannuation benefit as is not the *tax free component.

    SECTION 307-145   Modification for disability benefits  

    307-145(1)    
    Work out the tax free component of the *superannuation benefit under subsection (2) if the benefit is a *superannuation lump sum and a *disability superannuation benefit.

    Note:

    This section does not apply to an unclaimed money payment.


    307-145(2)    
    The tax free component is the sum of:


    (a) the *tax free component of the benefit worked out apart from this section; and


    (b) the amount worked out under subsection (3).

    However, the tax free component cannot exceed the amount of the benefit.


    307-145(3)    
    Work out the amount by applying the following formula:


    Amount of benefit     ×         Days to retirement        
    Service days   +   Days to retirement

    where:

    days to retirement
    is the number of days from the day on which the person stopped being capable of being *gainfully employed to his or her *last retirement day.

    service days
    is the number of days in the *service period for the lump sum.


    307-145(4)    
    The balance of the *superannuation benefit is the taxable component of the benefit.

    SECTION 307-150   Modification in respect of superannuation lump sum with element untaxed in fund  

    307-150(1)    
    This section applies to a *superannuation lump sum if:


    (a) it is not a *roll-over superannuation benefit; or


    (b) it is a roll-over superannuation benefit that includes an *element untaxed in the fund, all or part of which will be includedin the assessable income of the *superannuation provider in relation to the *superannuation fund into which the benefit is paid.

    307-150(2)    
    However, this section applies to the *superannuation lump sum only to the extent that it is attributable to a *superannuation interest that existed just before 1 July 2007.

    307-150(3)    
    If the *superannuation lump sum includes an *element untaxed in the fund:


    (a) increase the *tax free component of the benefit by the amount that is the lesser of these amounts:


    (i) the amount worked out under subsection (4); and

    (ii) the amount of the element untaxed in the fund (apart from this section); and


    (b) reduce the element untaxed in the fund by the lesser of those amounts.

    307-150(4)    
    Work out the amount by applying the following formula:


    Original tax free component and untaxed element × Number of days in the *service period for the lump sum that occurred before 1 July 1983
    Number of days in the *service period for the lump sum

    where:

    original tax free component and untaxed element
    is the sum of:


    (a) the *tax free component of the *superannuation benefit (apart from this section); and


    (b) the *element untaxed in the fund of the superannuation benefit (apart from this section).


    307-150(5)    
    If the benefit is in part attributable to a *crystallised pre-July 83 amount, in working out the *tax free component of the *superannuation benefit (apart from this section) for the purposes of subsection (4), disregard the amount of the benefit that is attributable to the *crystallised segment of the *superannuation interest from which the benefit is paid.

    Subdivision 307-D - Superannuation interests  

    SECTION 307-200   Regulations relating to meaning of superannuation interests  

    307-200(1)    
    In the circumstances specified in the regulations, treat a superannuation interest as two or more superannuation interests in the way specified in the regulations.

    307-200(2)    
    In the circumstances specified in the regulations, treat 2 or more superannuation interests as one superannuation interest in the way specified in the regulations.

    307-200(3)    
    Regulations for the purposes of this section may specify a way of treating a *superannuation interest in relation to one or more of the following aspects of the interest:


    (a) the *tax free component (and the *contributions segment and *crystallised segment relating to that component);


    (b) the *taxable component;


    (c) the *element taxed in the fund of the taxable component;


    (d) the *element untaxed in the fund of the taxable component.

    307-200(4)    
    Regulations for the purposes of subsection (1) may specify a way of allocating an amount relating to a *superannuation interest treated as two or more superannuation interests in accordance with those regulations to those interests.

    307-200(5)    
    Subsections (3) and (4) do not limit the regulations that may be made for the purposes of this section.

    SECTION 307-205   Value of superannuation interest  

    307-205(1)    


    The value of a *superannuation interest at a particular time is:


    (a) if the regulations specify a method for determining the value of the superannuation interest - that value; or


    (b) otherwise - the total amount of all the *superannuation lump sums that could be payable from the interest at that time.


    307-205(2)    


    The accumulation phase value of an individual ' s *superannuation interest, at a particular time when the interest is not in the *retirement phase, is:


    (a) if the regulations specify that value or a method for determining that value - that value; or


    (b) otherwise - the total amount of the *superannuation benefits that would become payable if the individual voluntarily caused the interest to cease at that time.


    SECTION 307-210   Tax free component of superannuation interest  

    307-210(1)    
    The tax free component of a *superannuation interest is so much of the *value of the interest as consists of:


    (a) the *contributions segment of the interest; and


    (b) the *crystallised segment of the interest.



    Tax free component reduces if a benefit is paid

    307-210(2)    


    If a *superannuation benefit is paid from the *superannuation interest:


    (a) the *crystallised segment of the interest is reduced (but not below zero) by an amount equal to the *tax free component of the benefit; and


    (b) if any of that amount remains, the *contributions segment of the interest is reduced (but not below zero) by that remaining amount.

    Note:

    This has the effect of reducing the interest ' s tax free component by the amount of the benefit ' s tax free component.


    SECTION 307-215  

    307-215   Taxable component of superannuation interest  


    The taxable component of a *superannuation interest is the *value of the interest less the *tax free component of the interest.

    SECTION 307-220   What is the contributions segment ?  

    307-220(1)    


    The contributions segment of a *superannuation interest is the total amount of the contributions to the interest:


    (a) that were made after 30 June 2007; and


    (b) to the extent that they have not been and will not be included in the assessable income of the *superannuation provider in relation to the *superannuation plan in which the interest is held.

    This section has effect subject to subsection 307-210(2) .

    Note:

    This segment may be reduced if a superannuation benefit is paid from the superannuation interest: see subsection 307-210(2) .


    307-220(2)    
    For the purposes of this section:


    (a) in determining whether contributions are included in the contributions segment under subsection (1):


    (i) disregard the *taxable component of a *roll-over superannuation benefit paid into the interest; and

    (ia) disregard the *tax free component of an *involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit paid into the interest from another superannuation interest (the earlier interest ) (other than an earlier interest that was supporting a *superannuation income stream immediately before that benefit was paid); and

    (ib) if subparagraph (ia) applies - include as a contribution an amount equal to the amount referred to in subsection (5); and

    (ii) for a *superannuation plan that is a *constitutionally protected fund - treat the superannuation plan as if it were not a constitutionally protected fund; and


    (b) disregard section 295-180 and Subdivision 295-D .


    307-220(3)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(a)(i), treat the *excess untaxed roll-over amount (if any) of the *roll-over superannuation benefit as part of the *tax free component of the benefit instead of the *taxable component of the benefit.

    307-220(4)    


    Subparagraph (2)(a)(i) does not apply to a *roll-over superannuation benefit that is a *departing Australia superannuation payment made under subsection 20H(2), (2AA) or (2A) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 .
    Note 1:

    The whole departing Australia superannuation payment is included in the contributions segment of the superannuation interest, as none of the payment has been or will be included in the superannuation provider ' s assessable income.

    Note 2:

    Including the whole payment in that segment, and thus the tax free component, of the superannuation interest ensures that the amount of the payment, which is taxed by the Superannuation (Departing Australia Superannuation Payments Tax) Act 2007 , does not attract more tax when paid as a superannuation benefit from the interest.


    307-220(5)    


    For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(a)(ib), the amount is:


    (a) if the *involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit is covered by paragraph 306-12(a) or (c) - the sum of the contributions segment, and crystallised segment, of the earlier interest immediately before the benefit was paid; or


    (b) if the benefit is covered by paragraph 306-12(b) - the proportion of that sum that the benefit was to the *value of the earlier interest immediately before the benefit was paid.


    SECTION 307-225   What is the crystallised segment ?  

    307-225(1)    
    To work out the crystallised segment of a *superannuation interest, first assume that:


    (a) an eligible termination payment had been made in respect of the holder of the interest just before 1 July 2007; and


    (b) the amount of the eligible termination payment had been equal to the *value of the interest at that time.

    307-225(2)    


    The crystallised segment of the *superannuation interest is the total amount of the following components of the eligible termination payment:


    (a) the concessional component;


    (b) the post-June 1994 invalidity component;


    (c) the undeducted contributions;


    (d) the CGT exempt component;


    (e) the pre-July 83 component.

    This section has effect subject to subsection 307-210(2) .

    Note:

    This segment may be reduced if a superannuation benefit is paid from the superannuation interest: see subsection 307-210(2) .


    307-225(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(e), disregard the *value of the interest just before 1 July 2007 to the extent that it would consist, apart from this subsection, of the *element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component of a *superannuation benefit constituted by the eligible termination payment.

    307-225(4)    
    In this section, the following terms have the same meaning as in subsection 27A(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (as in force just before 1 July 2007):


    (a) concessional component ;


    (b) post-June 1994 invalidity component ;


    (c) undeducted contributions ;


    (d) CGT exempt component ;


    (e) pre-July 83 component ;


    (f) eligible termination payment .

    SECTION 307-230   Total superannuation balance  

    307-230(1)    
    Your total superannuation balance , at a particular time, is the sum of the following:


    (a) if you have one or more *superannuation interests that are not in the *retirement phase - the *accumulation phase values, at that time, of each such interest;


    (b) if you have a *transfer balance account - the *transfer balance of the account at that time (but not less than nil);


    (c) the amount of each *roll-over superannuation benefit:


    (i) paid at or before that time; and

    (ii) received by the *complying superannuation plan, or the entity from which the *superannuation annuity is being purchased, after that time; and

    (iii) not reflected in the value in paragraph (a) or the balance in paragraph (b);


    (d) if you have an LRBA amount under section 307-231 (about limited recourse borrowing arrangements) in relation to one or more *regulated superannuation funds - the LRBA amounts for each such regulated superannuation fund.



    Modification for structured settlement contributions

    307-230(2)    
    However, if a *structured settlement contribution is made at or before a time in respect of you, yourtotal superannuation balance at that time is modified by:


    (a) if you do not have a *transfer balance account - reducing the sum worked out under subsection (1) by the sum of any such structured settlement contributions; and


    (b) if you have a transfer balance account:


    (i) first, working out the *transfer balance mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) disregarding the operation of item 2 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) ; and

    (ii) then, reducing the sum worked out under subsection (1) (having regard to subparagraph (i) of this paragraph) by the sum of any such structured settlement contributions.


    Modification for account-based income streams

    307-230(3)    
    For the purposes of working out the *transfer balance mentioned in paragraph (1)(b):


    (a) if a *transfer balance credit has arisen, at or before that time, in your *transfer balance account in respect of a *superannuation income stream covered by subsection (4) - disregard the operation of the following provisions in relation to the superannuation income stream:


    (i) items 1 and 2 of the table in subsection 294-25(1) ;

    (ii) items 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) ; and


    (b) if, at that time, you have a *superannuation interest that supports a superannuation income stream covered by subsection (4) of this section - increase the amount of that balance by the total amount of the *superannuation benefits that would become payable if:


    (i) you had the right to cause the superannuation interest to cease at that time; and

    (ii) you voluntarily caused the superannuation interest to cease at that time.

    307-230(4)    
    This subsection covers a *superannuation income stream that is any of the following:


    (a) an *allocated annuity;


    (b) an *allocated pension;


    (c) an allocated pension (within the meaning of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997 );


    (d) an *account-based annuity;


    (e) an account-based pension (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 );


    (f) an account based pension (within the meaning of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997 );


    (g) a market linked annuity (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 );


    (h) a market linked pension (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 );


    (i) a market linked pension (within the meaning of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997 ).

    SECTION 307-231   Limited recourse borrowing arrangements  

    307-231(1)    
    You have an amount under this section (an LRBA amount ), in relation to a *regulated superannuation fund in which you have one or more *superannuation interests, if:

    (a)    the *superannuation provider in relation to the fund has a *borrowing under an *arrangement that is covered by the exception in subsection 67A(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (which is about limited recourse borrowing arrangements); and

    (b)    the borrowing has not been repaid at the time of working out your *total superannuation balance; and

    (c)    at that time, the asset or assets that secure the borrowing support, to an extent, a superannuation interest of yours; and

    (d)    

    the fund is a *small superannuation fund at that time; and

    (e)    either:


    (i) you have satisfied (whether at or before that time) a condition of release specified in paragraph 307-80(2)(c) ; or

    (ii) the lender is an *associate of the superannuation provider.
    Note:

    Subsection 318(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 sets out when an entity is an associate of a trustee.


    307-231(2)    
    The amount of your LRBA amount in relation to the *regulated superannuation fund is the sum of the amounts worked out under subsection (3) for:

    (a)    if subparagraph (1)(e)(i) applies - each *borrowing that satisfies paragraphs (1)(a) , (b) and (c) ; or

    (b)    if subparagraph (1)(e)(i) does not apply - each borrowing that satisfies paragraphs (1)(a) , (b) and (c) and subparagraph (1)(e)(ii) .

    307-231(3)    
    The amount under this subsection, in respect of a *borrowing, is worked out using the following formula:


      Outstanding balance × Value of your supported super interests  
      Value of all supported super interests  

    where:

    outstanding balance
    means the outstanding balance on the *borrowing at the time of working out your *total superannuation balance.

    value of all supported super interests
    means the sum of the *values at that time of all *superannuation interests in the *regulated superannuation fund that are supported by the asset or assets that secure the *borrowing.

    value of your supported super interests
    means the sum of the *values at that time of each *superannuation interest of yours that is supported by the asset or assets that secure the *borrowing.


    307-231(4)    
    (Repealed by No 47 of 2021)


    Subdivision 307-E - Elements taxed and untaxed in the fund of the taxable component of superannuation benefit  

    SECTION 307-275   Element taxed in the fund and element untaxed in the fund of superannuation benefits  

    307-275(1)    
    The *taxable component of a *superannuation benefit consists of an element taxed in the fund or an element untaxed in the fund , or both.

    307-275(2)    
    The *taxable component of a *superannuation benefit consists wholly of an element taxed in the fund except as provided in a later section of this Subdivision.

    307-275(3)    
    Despite subsection (2), the *taxable component of any of the following kinds of *superannuation benefit consists wholly of an element untaxed in the fund :


    (a) a *small superannuation account payment;


    (b) a *superannuation guarantee payment.

    SECTION 307-280   Superannuation benefits from constitutionally protected funds etc.  

    307-280(1)    
    The *taxable component of a *superannuation benefit paid from a *superannuation fund that is a *constitutionally protected fund consists wholly of an element untaxed in the fund .

    307-280(2)    
    Despite subsection (1), if:


    (a) the benefit is a *superannuation lump sum; and


    (b) the benefit is attributable to one or more *roll-over superannuation benefits that consisted of, or included, an *element taxed in the fund;

    the *taxable component of the benefit has an element taxed in the fund equal to the total of those elements taxed in the fund.


    307-280(3)    
    The *taxable component of a *superannuation income stream benefit consists wholly of an element untaxed in the fund if it is paid from a *superannuation fund that was a *constitutionally protected fund on the first day of the period to which the *superannuation income stream relates.

    SECTION 307-285   Trustee can choose to convert element taxed in the fund to element untaxed in the fund  

    307-285(1)    
    If:


    (a) you receive a *superannuation benefit from a *public sector superannuation scheme; and


    (b) the trustee of the scheme gives you written notice specifying an amount as the *element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component of the benefit; and


    (c) the notice is given within the time and in the manner approved by the Commissioner in writing; and


    (d) the scheme came into operation on or before 5 September 2006;

    the taxable component consists of an element untaxed in the fund equal to the specified amount.


    307-285(2)    


    The trustee of the scheme can give only one notice under subsection (1) in relation to a particular *superannuation lump sum.

    SECTION 307-290   Taxed and untaxed elements of death benefit superannuation lump sums  

    307-290(1)    
    This section applies to a *superannuation death benefit that is a *superannuation lump sum, in relation to which a deduction has been, or is to be, claimed under section 295-465 or 295-470 .

    Note 1:

    Those sections allow deductions for insurance premiums that have been paid, and for liability for future benefits.

    Note 2:

    Deductions made under former section 279 or 279B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are treated for the purposes of this section as having been made under section 295-465 or 295-470 (see section 307-290 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ).


    307-290(2)    
    The *taxable component of the *superannuation lump sum includes an element taxed in the fund worked out as follows:


    (a) first, work out the amount under the formula in subsection (3);


    (b) next, reduce that amount (but not below zero) by the *tax free component (if any) of the superannuation lump sum.

    307-290(3)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), the formula is:


      Amount of *superannuation lump sum ×           Service days          
    Service days + Days to retirement
     

    where:

    days to retirement
    is the number of days from the day on which the deceased died to the deceased ' s *last retirement day.

    service days
    is the number of days in the *service period for the lump sum.


    307-290(4)    
    The element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component is the balance of the taxable component.

    SECTION 307-295   Superannuation benefits from public sector superannuation schemes may include untaxed element  

    307-295(1)    
    This section applies to a *superannuation benefit that is paid from a *public sector superannuation scheme that is not a *constitutionally protected fund.

    307-295(2)    
    If the *superannuation benefit paid is not sourced to any extent from contributions made into a *superannuation fund or earnings on such contributions, the *taxable component of the superannuation benefit consists wholly of an element untaxed in the fund .

    307-295(3)    


    If the benefit is a *superannuation lump sum that is partly sourced from contributions made into a *superannuation fund or earnings on such contributions, the element taxed in the fund and the element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component of the benefit are worked out as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Subdivide the *taxable component of the *superannuation lump sum (the original benefit ) into 2 notional superannuation lump sums as follows:

  • (a) the amount sourced from contributions made into a *superannuation fund or earnings on such contributions (the fund benefit );
  • (b) the remainder of the taxable component of the lump sum (the non-fund benefit ).

  • Step 2.

    The fund benefit consists of an element taxed in the fund , an element untaxed in the fund , or both, as worked out under this Subdivision.


    Step 3.

    The non-fund benefit consists wholly of an element untaxed in the fund .


    Step 4.

    The element taxed in the fund of the original benefit equals the element taxed in the fund of the fund benefit.


    Step 5.

    The element untaxed in the fund of the original benefit is the sum of the elements untaxed in the fund worked out under steps 2 and 3.


    SECTION 307-297   Public sector superannuation schemes - elements set by regulations  

    307-297(1)    
    This section applies to a *superannuation benefit that is paid from a *public sector superannuation scheme that is not a *constitutionally protected fund.

    307-297(2)    
    Despite any other provision of this Subdivision, the *taxable component of the *superannuation benefit consists of an element untaxed in the fund equal to the amount (if any) specified by the regulations in relation to the benefit for the purposes of this section.

    307-297(3)    
    The amount specified must not be less than the amount that would be the *element untaxed in the fund under the other provisions of this Subdivision.

    SECTION 307-300   Certain unclaimed money payments  


    Preliminary

    307-300(1)    


    This section explains how to work out the *element taxed in the fund, and the *element untaxed in the fund, of the *taxable component of a *superannuation benefit that is a payment by the Commissioner under subsection 17(2) , 20H(2) , (2AA), (2A) or (3) , 20QF(2) , 21E(2) , 22B(2) , 24G(2) or 24NA(2) or (3) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 .

    Element taxed in the fund

    307-300(2)    


    Work out the element taxed in the fund as follows (unless subsection (3A) applies): Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out the amount (the unclaimed amount ) (or amounts), set out in column 1 of the table in subsection (3), to which the *taxable component is attributable.

    Note:

    A payment made under subsection 17(2) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 1 or 2 of the table.

    A payment under subsection 20H(2) or (3) of that Act may be attributable to more than one unclaimed amount.

    A payment under subsection 20QF(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3A of the table.

    A payment under subsection 21E(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3B of the table.

    A payment under subsection 22B(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3C of the table.

    A payment made under subsection 24G(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 4 of the table.

    A payment under subsection 24NA(2) or (3) of that Act may be attributable to more than one unclaimed amount.


    Step 2.

    Assume that the unclaimed amount (or each unclaimed amount), instead of being paid to the Commissioner, had been paid to the person as the payment (the claimed equivalent ) set out in column 2 of the table.


    Step 3.

    The element taxed in the fund of the *taxable component consists of so much of the taxable component as is attributable to the amount set out in column 3 of the table for the claimed equivalent (or as is attributable to the amounts set out in that column for the claimed equivalents).


    307-300(3)    


    This is the table mentioned in subsection (2):


    Element taxed in the fund
    Item Column 1
    Unclaimed amount
    Column 2
    Claimed equivalent
    Column 3
    Taxed element of claimed equivalent
    1 an amount paid, on or after 1 July 2007, to the Commissioner under subsection 17(1) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person a * superannuation benefit paid from a * superannuation plan the * element taxed in the fund of the * taxable component of that superannuation benefit
    2 an amount paid, before 1 July 2007, to the Commissioner under subsection 17(1) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person an eligible termination payment (within the meaning of subsection 27A(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , as in force just before 1 July 2007) the taxed element of the post-June 83 component of that eligible termination payment under Subdivision AA of Division 2 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , as in force just before 1 July 2007
    3 an amount paid to the Commissioner under subsection 20F(1) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person (other than an amount referred to in section 65AA of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 ) a * superannuation benefit paid from a * superannuation plan the * element taxed in the fund of the * taxable component of that superannuation benefit
    3A an amount paid to the Commissioner under section 20QD of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person a *superannuation benefit paid from a *superannuation plan the *element taxed in the fund of the *taxable component of that superannuation benefit
    3B an amount paid to the Commissioner under section 21C of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person a *superannuation benefit paid from a *superannuation plan the *element taxed in the fund of the *taxable component of that superannuation benefit
    3C an amount paid to the Commissioner under section 22 of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person a *superannuation benefit paid from a *superannuation plan the *element taxed in the fund of the *taxable component of that superannuation benefit
    4 an amount paid to the Commissioner under section 24E of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in respect of the person a * superannuation benefit paid from a * superannuation plan the * element taxed in the fund of the * taxable component of that superannuation benefit

    Note 1:

    Section 65AA of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 requires certain shortfall components to be treated as amounts paid to the Commissioner under subsection 20F(1) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 .

    The effect of excluding such shortfall components from item 3 of the table in this subsection is that the element untaxed in the fund includes so much of the superannuation benefit as is attributable to such a shortfall component.

    Note 2:

    The table in this subsection does not cover interest paid by the Commissioner under subsection 20H(2A) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 .

    The effect of this is that the element untaxed in the fund of the taxable component includes so much of the superannuation benefit as is attributable to such interest.


    307-300(3A)    


    The element taxed in the fund is nil, if the * superannuation benefit is paid under subsection 20H(2AA) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 (interest).
    Note:

    The taxable component of a superannuation benefit paid by the Commissioner under subsection 17(2AB) or (2AC) , 20QF(5) or (6) , 21E(5) or (6) , 22B(5) or (6) or 24G(3A) or (3B) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 , or under subsection 20H(2AA) in respect of a person who is not a former temporary resident, is nil: see subsections 307-142(3B) and (4) of this Act.



    Element untaxed in the fund

    307-300(4)    
    The element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component is so much (if any) of the taxable component as is not the element taxed in the fund.

    Subdivision 307-F - Low rate cap and untaxed plan cap amounts  

    SECTION 307-345   Low rate cap amount  


    Starting amount

    307-345(1)    
    Your low rate cap amount for the 2007-2008 income year is $140,000.

    Note:

    However, if you became entitled to a rebate under the corresponding provision of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , see section 307-345 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .



    Reductions and increases

    307-345(2)    
    If you receive one or more *superannuation member benefits that are *superannuation lump sums in an income year, reduce your low rate cap amount for the next income year (but not below zero) by the total of the amounts that:


    (a) are included in your assessable income for the first year in respect of those lump sums; and


    (b) are counted towards your entitlement to a *tax offset under subsection 301-20(2) or 301-105(4) for the first year.

    307-345(3)    
    At the start of each income year after the 2007-2008 income year, increase your low rate cap amount by the amount (if any) by which the index amount for that income year exceeds the index amount for the previous income year.

    307-345(4)    
    For the purposes of subsection (3), the index amount for the 2007-2008 income year is $140,000. The index amount is then indexed annually.

    Note:

    Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the index amount: see section 960-285 .


    SECTION 307-350   Untaxed plan cap amount  

    307-350(1)    
    Your untaxed plan cap amount for a *superannuation plan at the start of the 2007-2008 income year is $1,000,000.

    Reductions and increases

    307-350(1A)    


    Subsection (2) applies if:

    (a)    you receive one or more *superannuation member benefits from a *superannuation plan at a time; and

    (b)    the benefit, or one or more of the benefits:


    (i) is a *superannuation lump sum; and

    (ii) includes an *element untaxed in the fund.

    307-350(2)    


    Reduce your untaxed plan cap amount just after that time:

    (a)    if the total of the *elements untaxed in the fund of the *superannuation member benefits to which paragraph (1A)(b) applies falls short of your untaxed plan cap amount at that time - by that total; or

    (b)    otherwise - to nil.


    307-350(2A)    


    For the purposes of subsections (1A) and (2), disregard subsection 307-5(8) .

    307-350(2B)    


    For the purposes of the application of this section in relation to *superannuation lump sums paid by the Commissioner under subsections 17(2) , 20H(2) , (2AA) , (2A) and (3) , 20QF(2) , 21E(2) , 22B(2) and 24G(2) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 , treat all such lump sums as if they were paid from a single *superannuation plan.

    307-350(3)    
    At the start of each income year after the 2007-2008 income year, increase your untaxed plan cap amount for the *superannuation plan by the amount (if any) by which the index amount for that income year exceeds the index amount for the previous income year.

    307-350(4)    
    For the purposes of subsection (3), the index amount for the 2007-2008 income year is $1,000,000. The index amount is then indexed annually.

    Note:

    Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the index amount: see section 960-285 .


    Subdivision 307-G - Other concepts  

    SECTION 307-400   Meaning of service period for a superannuation lump sum  

    307-400(1)    
    The service period for a *superannuation lump sum consists of each day that is in the period worked out under the table or a period covered by subsection (2).


    Service period for superannuation lump sum types
    Item For this superannuation lump sum type: The service period includes:
    1 * Superannuation fund payment The following:
    (a) if some or all of the * superannuation lump sum accrued while you were, or the deceased was, a member of the * superannuation fund - the period of membership;
    (b) if some or all of the superannuation lump sum accrued while you were, or the deceased was, employed (or you or the deceased held office) - each period of employment (or of holding office) to which the lump sum relates.
    2 * approved deposit fund payment The period starting when you or the deceased first made a deposit to the * approved deposit fund and ending when the payment is made.
    3 * RSA payment The following:
    (a) if some or all of the * superannuation lump sum accrued while you were, or the deceased was, the holder of the * RSA - the period during which you were, or the deceased was, the holder of the RSA;
    (b) if some or all of the superannuation lump sum accrued while you were, or the deceased was, employed (or you or the deceased held office) - each period of employment (or of holding office) to which the lump sum relates.


    307-400(2)    
    The service period for the *superannuation lump sum (the later lump sum ) also includes each day that is in the *service period for an earlier superannuation lump sum if some or all of the later lump sum is attributable, directly or indirectly, to some or all of the earlier lump sum through the payment of one or more *roll-over superannuation benefits.

    Division 310 - Loss relief for merging superannuation funds  

    Guide to Division 310  

    SECTION 310-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out special rules for certain merging superannuation funds. These rules relate to the transfer of losses, the treatment of CGT events related to the merger and the treatment of assets related to the merger.

    Note:

    This Division applies to mergers happening between 24 December 2008 and 30 June 2011 (or, in certain cases, 30 September 2011), or mergers happening on or after 1 October 2011 (see Part 3 of Schedule 2 to the Tax Laws Amendment (2009 Measures No. 6) Act 2010 ).

    Operative provisions  

    Subdivision 310-A - Object of this Division

    SECTION 310-5  

    310-5   Object  


    The main object of this Division is to facilitate the consolidation of the superannuation industry by allowing certain merging *superannuation funds to retain the value, for income tax purposes, of certain losses that might otherwise cease to be able to be utilised as a result of the merger.

    Subdivision 310-B - Choice to transfer losses  

    SECTION 310-10   Original fund ' s assets extend beyond life insurance policies and units in pooled superannuation trusts  

    310-10(1)    


    A trustee of:


    (a) a *complying superannuation fund (other than a *self managed superannuation fund) (the transferring entity or the original fund ); or


    (b) a *complying approved deposit fund (the transferring entity or the original fund );

    can choose to transfer losses if an *arrangement is made for which the conditions in this section are satisfied.



    Transferring entity ' s assets include other assets

    310-10(2)    
    The first condition is satisfied if, just before the *arrangement was made, the transferring entity ' s assets included assets other than:


    (a) a *complying superannuation life insurance policy; or


    (b) units in a *pooled superannuation trust.

    Note:

    Other entities may also choose under this Subdivision to transfer losses, for the same arrangement, if the transferring entity holds a complying superannuation life insurance policy or units in a pooled superannuation trust.



    Original fund ' s members transfer to a continuing fund

    310-10(3)    
    The second condition is satisfied if, under the *arrangement:


    (a) the transferring entity ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ) at a particular time (the completion time ); and


    (b) the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of the transferring entity become members (within the meaning of that Act) of one or more *complying superannuation funds (the continuing funds ).

    Continuing funds will usually not be able to be small funds

    310-10(4)    
    The third condition is satisfied if either:


    (a) none of the continuing funds was a *small superannuation fund, and all existed, just before the *arrangement was made; or


    (b) the following subparagraphs apply:


    (i) only one of the continuing funds either was a small superannuation fund, or did not exist, just before the arrangement was made;

    (ii) under the arrangement, a *complying superannuation fund or *complying approved deposit fund, other than the original fund, ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 );

    (iii) under the arrangement, the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of that other fund become members (within the meaning of that Act) of the continuing fund;

    (iv) either the other fund or the original fund was not a small superannuation fund just before the arrangement was made;

    (v) the continuing fund is not a small superannuation fund just after the earliest time when both the other fund and the original fund cease to have any members (within the meaning of that Act).


    Ignore members who cannot transfer to a continuing fund

    310-10(5)    
    For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), ignore an individual who remains a member of a *complying superannuation fund or *complying approved deposit fund because of circumstances beyond the control of the trustee of that fund.

    SECTION 310-15   Original fund ' s assets include a complying superannuation life insurance policy  

    310-15(1)    
    A *life insurance company (the transferring entity ) can choose to transfer losses if an *arrangement is made for which the conditions in this section are satisfied.

    Original fund holds a complying superannuation life insurance policy

    310-15(2)    


    The first condition is satisfied if, just before the *arrangement was made, a *complying superannuation life insurance policy issued by the transferring entity was held by:


    (a) a *complying superannuation fund (the original fund ); or


    (b) a *complying approved deposit fund (the original fund ).

    Note:

    Other entities may also choose under this Subdivision to transfer losses, for the same arrangement, if the original fund holds other assets.



    Original fund ' s members transfer to a continuing fund

    310-15(3)    
    The second condition is satisfied if, under the *arrangement:


    (a) the original fund ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ) at a particular time (the completion time ); and


    (b) the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of the original fund become members (within the meaning of that Act) of one or more *complying superannuation funds (the continuing funds ).

    Continuing funds will usually not be able to be small funds

    310-15(4)    
    The third condition is satisfied if either:


    (a) none of the continuing funds was a *small superannuation fund, and all existed, just before the *arrangement was made; or


    (b) the following subparagraphs apply:


    (i) only one of the continuing funds either was a small superannuation fund, or did not exist, just before the arrangement was made;

    (ii) under the arrangement, a *complying superannuation fund or *complying approved deposit fund, other than the original fund, ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 );

    (iii) under the arrangement, the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of that other fund become members (within the meaning of that Act) of the continuing fund;

    (iv) either the other fund or the original fund was not a small superannuation fund just before the arrangement was made;

    (v) the continuing fund is not a small superannuation fund just after the earliest time when both the other fund and the original fund cease to have any members (within the meaning of that Act).


    Ignore members who cannot transfer to a continuing fund

    310-15(5)    
    For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), ignore an individual who remains a member of a *complying superannuation fund or *complying approved deposit fund because of circumstances beyond the control of the trustee of that fund.

    SECTION 310-20   Original fund ' s assets include units in a pooled superannuation trust  

    310-20(1)    
    A trustee of a *pooled superannuation trust (the transferring entity ) can choose to transfer losses if an *arrangement is made for which the conditions in this section are satisfied.

    Units in the trust were held by the original fund

    310-20(2)    
    The first condition is satisfied if, just before the *arrangement was made, units in the transferring entity were held by:


    (a) a *complying superannuation fund (the original fund ); or


    (b) a *complying approved deposit fund (the original fund ).

    Note:

    Other entities may also choose under this Subdivision to transfer losses, for the same arrangement, if the original fund holds other assets.



    Original fund ' s members transfer to a continuing fund

    310-20(3)    
    The second condition is satisfied if, under the *arrangement:


    (a) the original fund ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ) at a particular time (the completion time ); and


    (b) the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of the original fund become members (within the meaning of that Act) of one or more *complying superannuation funds (the continuing funds ).

    Continuing funds will usually not be able to be small funds

    310-20(4)    
    The third condition is satisfied if either:


    (a) none of the continuing funds was a *small superannuation fund, and all existed, just before the *arrangement was made; or


    (b) the following subparagraphs apply:


    (i) only one of the continuing funds either was a small superannuation fund, or did not exist, just before the arrangement was made;

    (ii) under the arrangement, a *complying superannuation fund or *complying approved deposit fund, other than the original fund, ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 );

    (iii) under the arrangement, the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of that other fund become members (within the meaning of that Act) of the continuing fund;

    (iv) either the other fund or the original fund was not a small superannuation fund just before the arrangement was made;

    (v) the continuing fund is not a small superannuation fund just after the earliest time when both the other fund and the original fund cease to have any members (within the meaning of that Act).


    Ignore members who cannot transfer to a continuing fund

    310-20(5)    
    For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), ignore an individual who remains a member of a *complying superannuation fund or *complying approved deposit fund because of circumstances beyond the control of the trustee of that fund.

    Subdivision 310-C - Consequences of choosing to transfer losses  

    SECTION 310-25  

    310-25   Who losses can be transferred to  


    An entity choosing under Subdivision 310-B to transfer losses can choose to transfer any or all of the transferring entity ' s losses set out in section 310-30 , in whole or in part, to one or more of the following entities (a receiving entity ):


    (a) a continuing fund for the choice;


    (b) a *pooled superannuation trust in which units are held by a continuing fund for the choice just after the completion time;


    (c) a *life insurance company with which a *complying superannuation life insurance policy is held by a continuing fund for the choice just after the completion time.

    SECTION 310-30   Losses that can be transferred  

    310-30(1)    
    The transferring entity ' s losses that can be transferred are:


    (a) any of its *net capital losses for income years earlier than the income year for the transferring entity that includes the completion time (the transfer year ), to the extent that it was not *utilised before the completion time (an earlier year net capital loss ); and


    (b) any net capital loss it would have made for the transfer year were the transfer year to have ended at the completion time (a transfer year net capital loss ); and


    (c) any of its *tax losses for income years earlier than the transfer year, to the extent that it was not utilised before the completion time (an earlier year tax loss ); and


    (d) any tax loss it would have incurred for the transfer year were the transfer year to have ended at the completion time (a transfer year tax loss );

    worked out subject to the modifications set out in this section.

    Note:

    If the entity choosing to transfer losses also chooses an asset roll-over under Subdivision 310-D for the same arrangement, none of the transfer events for the roll-over will contribute towards a loss transferred under this Subdivision (see subsections 310-55(1) , 310-60(3) , 310-65(1) and 310-70(1) ).


    310-30(2)    


    For a choice under section 310-15 (life insurance companies), work out those losses by only considering the following to the extent that they relate to assets reasonably attributable to a *complying superannuation life insurance policy issued by the transferring entity and held by the original fund:


    (a) *capital gains from *complying superannuation assets;


    (b) *capital losses from complying superannuation assets;


    (c) assessable income covered by subsection 320-137(2) (about complying superannuation assets);


    (d) deductions covered by subsection 320-137(4) (about complying superannuation assets).


    310-30(3)    
    For a choice under section 310-20 (pooled superannuation trusts), work out those losses by only considering *capital gains, *capital losses, assessable income and deductions to the extent that they relate to assets reasonably attributable to units in the transferring entity held by the original fund.

    SECTION 310-35   Effect of transferring a net capital loss  

    310-35(1)    
    To the extent that an earlier year net capital loss is transferred to a receiving entity:


    (a) the transferring entity is taken not to have made the loss for that earlier income year; and


    (b) an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be:


    (i) if the receiving entity is a *life insurance company - a *capital loss from *complying superannuation assets made by the receiving entity for the transfer year; and

    (ii) otherwise - a capital loss made by the receiving entity for the transfer year.

    310-35(2)    
    To the extent that a transfer year net capital loss is transferred to a receiving entity:


    (a) if the transferring entity is a *life insurance company - the sum of the transferring entity ' s *capital losses from *complying superannuation assets for the transfer year is reduced by an amount equal to the transferred amount; and


    (b) if the transferring entity is not a life insurance company - the sum of the transferring entity ' s capital losses for the transfer year is reduced by an amount equal to the transferred amount; and


    (c) if the receiving entity is a life insurance company - an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be a capital loss from complying superannuation assets made by the receiving entity for the transfer year; and


    (d) if the receiving entity is not a life insurance company - an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be a capital loss made by the receiving entity for the transfer year.


    SECTION 310-40   Effect of transferring a tax loss  

    310-40(1)    
    To the extent that an earlier year tax loss is transferred to a receiving entity:


    (a) the transferring entity is taken not to have incurred the loss for that earlier income year; and


    (b) for the purposes of section 36-15, an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be:


    (i) if the receiving entity is a *life insurance company - a *tax loss of the *complying superannuation class incurred by the receiving entity for the income year immediately prior to the transfer year; and

    (ii) otherwise - a tax loss incurred by the receiving entity for the income year immediately prior to the transfer year; and


    (c) for all other purposes of this Act, an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be:


    (i) if the receiving entity is a life insurance company - a tax loss of the complying superannuation class incurred by the receiving entity for the transfer year; and

    (ii) otherwise - a tax loss incurred by the receiving entity for the transfer year.

    310-40(2)    
    To the extent that a transfer year tax loss is transferred to a receiving entity:


    (a) if the transferring entity is a *life insurance company - the sum of the transferring entity ' s deductions covered by subsection 320-137(4) (about complying superannuation assets) for the transfer year is reduced by an amount equal to the transferred amount; and


    (b) if the transferring entity is not a life insurance company - the sum of the transferring entity ' s deductions for the transfer year is reduced by an amount equal to the transferred amount; and


    (c) if the receiving entity is a life insurance company - an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be a *tax loss of the *complying superannuation class incurred by the receiving entity for the transfer year; and


    (d) if the receiving entity is not a life insurance company - an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be a tax loss incurred by the receiving entity for the transfer year.


    Subdivision 310-D - Choice for assets roll-over  

    SECTION 310-45   Choosing the assets roll-over  

    310-45(1)    
    An entity can choose a roll-over under this Subdivision if:


    (a) the entity makes or could make a choice under Subdivision 310-B (the losses choice ) to transfer the losses of an entity (the transferring entity ); and


    (b) the conditions in this section are satisfied for the *arrangement to which the losses choice relates.

    310-45(2)    
    The first condition is that, under the *arrangement, one or more *CGT events (the transfer events ) happen in relation to the following assets (the original assets ) of the transferring entity with the result that it ceases to own those assets:


    (a) for a losses choice under section 310-10 (original funds) - all of its *CGT assets;


    (b) for a losses choice under section 310-15 (life insurance companies) - all of its CGT assets reasonably attributable to the *complying superannuation life insurance policy held by the original fund for the losses choice just before the arrangement was made;


    (c) for a losses choice under section 310-20 (pooled superannuation trusts) - all of its CGT assets reasonably attributable to the units in that entity held by the original fund for the losses choice just before the arrangement was made.


    310-45(3)    
    The second condition is that the transfer events all happen in the income year (the transfer year ) for the transferring entity that includes the completion time for the losses choice.


    310-45(4)    
    The third condition is that, for each transfer event, an asset (the received asset ) becomes an asset of one of the following (the receiving entity ) as a result of the event:


    (a) a continuing fund for the losses choice;


    (b) a *pooled superannuation trust in which units are held by a continuing fund for the losses choice just after the completion time;


    (c) a *life insurance company with which a *complying superannuation life insurance policy is held by a continuing fund for the losses choice just after the completion time.


    310-45(5)    
    For the purposes of subsection (2), ignore any *CGT assets retained by the transferring entity:


    (a) to pay its existing or expected debts relating to the *arrangement; or


    (b) to meet its liabilities relating to individuals who have remained members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 ) of the original fund because of circumstances beyond the control of the trustee of that fund.

    SECTION 310-50   Choosing the form of the assets roll-over  

    310-50(1)    
    An entity that chooses a roll-over under this Subdivision must choose the form of the roll-over that applies to each of the following:


    (a) the original assets that are not *revenue assets;


    (b) the original assets that are revenue assets.

    310-50(2)    
    In respect of original assets that are not *revenue assets, the entity choosing the roll-over must choose either section 310-55 (global asset approach) or 310-60 (individual asset approach) to apply to the original assets and the corresponding received assets.

    310-50(3)    
    In respect of original assets that are *revenue assets, the entity choosing the roll-over must choose either section 310-65 (global asset approach) or 310-70 (individual asset approach) to apply to the original assets and the corresponding received assets.

    Note:

    The entity choosing the form of the roll-over may choose different forms of roll-over for its CGT assets and revenue assets.


    Subdivision 310-E - Consequences of choosing assets roll-over  

    SECTION 310-55   CGT assets - if global asset approach chosen  


    Consequences for transferring entity

    310-55(1)    
    For each of the original assets to which this section applies, the transferring entity ' s *capital proceeds from the relevant transfer event are taken to be an amount equal to:


    (a) if, apart from this subsection, the event would result in a *capital gain - the asset ' s *cost base just before the event; or


    (b) if, apart from this subsection, the event would result in a *capital loss - the asset ' s *reduced cost base just before the event.

    Note:

    This section only applies if it is chosen to apply under subsection 310-50(2) .



    Consequences for receiving entity

    310-55(2)    
    For each of the received assets to which this section applies, the first element of the *cost base of the asset (in the hands of the receiving entity) is taken to be an amount equal to the cost base of the corresponding original asset just before the relevant transfer event.

    310-55(3)    
    For each of the received assets to which this section applies, the first element of the *reduced cost base of the asset (in the hands of the receiving entity) is taken to be an amount equal to the reduced cost base of the corresponding original asset just before the relevant transfer event.

    SECTION 310-60   CGT assets - individual asset approach  


    Consequences for transferring entity

    310-60(1)    


    The transferring entity may disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss for a transfer event relating to an original asset to which this section applies.
    Note:

    This section only applies if it is chosen to apply under subsection 310-50(2) .


    310-60(2)    


    Subsections (3), (4) and (5) apply if under subsection (1) the transferring entity disregards a *capital gain or *capital loss for a transfer event relating to an original asset.

    310-60(3)    
    The transferring entity ' s *capital proceeds from the transfer event are taken to be an amount equal to:


    (a) if, apart from this subsection, the event would result in a *capital gain - the asset ' s *cost base just before the event; or


    (b) if, apart from this subsection, the event would result in a *capital loss - the asset ' s *reduced cost base just before the event.



    Consequences for receiving entity

    310-60(4)    
    The first element of the *cost base of the corresponding received asset (in the hands of the receiving entity) is taken to be an amount equal to the cost base of the original asset just before the event.

    310-60(5)    
    The first element of the *reduced cost base of the corresponding received asset (in the hands of the receiving entity) is taken to be an amount equal to the reduced cost base of the original asset just before the event.

    SECTION 310-65   Revenue assets - if global asset approach chosen  


    Consequences for transferring entity

    310-65(1)    
    For each of the original assets to which this section applies, the transferring entity ' s gross proceeds for the relevant transfer event are taken to be the amount (the deemed proceeds ) the transferring entity would need to have received in order to have a nil profit and nil loss for the event.

    Note:

    This section only applies if it is chosen to apply under subsection 310-50(3) .



    Consequences for receiving entity

    310-65(2)    
    For each of the received assets to which this section applies, the receiving entity is taken, for the purposes of this Act, to have paid an amount for that asset at the time of the transfer event that is equal to the deemed proceeds for the corresponding original asset.

    SECTION 310-70   Revenue assets - individual asset approach  


    Consequences for transferring entity

    310-70(1)    
    If the transferring entity derives assessable income (other than a *capital gain) or incurs a *tax loss for a transfer event relating to an original asset to which this section applies, the entity choosing the roll-over can choose for the transferring entity ' s gross proceeds for the event to be taken to be the amount (the deemed proceeds ) the transferring entity would need to have received in order to have a nil profit and nil loss for the event.

    Note:

    This section only applies if it is chosen to apply under subsection 310-50(3) .



    Consequences for receiving entity

    310-70(2)    
    If a choice is made under subsection (1), the receiving entity is taken to have paid an amount for the corresponding received asset at the time of the transfer event that is equal to the deemed proceeds for the event.

    S 310-70 inserted by No 19 of 2010, s 3 and Sch 2 item 1, effective 25 March 2010. For application provisions see note under Div 310 heading.

    SECTION 310-75   Further consequences for roll-overs involving life insurance companies  

    310-75(1)    


    Section 320-200 (about consequences of transferring assets to or from a complying superannuation asset pool) does not apply for a transfer event for the roll-over if either the transferring entity or the receiving entity is a *life insurance company.

    310-75(2)    
    If the receiving entity for the roll-over is a *life insurance company, each received asset of that entity is taken:


    (a) to be a *complying superannuation asset of that entity; and


    (b) not to be, in whole or in part, a *life insurance premium.


    Subdivision 310-F - Choices  

    SECTION 310-85   Choices  

    310-85(1)    
    A choice under this Division must be made:


    (a) by the day the transferring entity ' s *income tax return is lodged for the transfer year for the entity; or


    (b) within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

    310-85(2)    
    The way the transferring entity ' s *income tax return is prepared is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

    (Repealed) Division 311 - Loss relief and asset roll-over for transfer of amounts to a MySuper product  

    (Repealed) Guide to Division 311  

    311-1   (Repealed) SECTION 311-1 What this Division is about  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    (Repealed) Operative provisions  

    (Repealed) Subdivision 311-A - Object of this Division

    311-5   (Repealed) SECTION 311-5 Object  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 311-B - Choosing loss transfers and asset roll-overs  

    311-10   (Repealed) SECTION 311-10 Certain entities can choose transfer of losses, asset roll-overs, or both for transfers between funds  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    311-12   (Repealed) SECTION 311-12 Certain entities can choose asset roll-overs for transfers within a fund  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 311-C - Consequences of choosing to transfer losses  

    311-15   (Repealed) SECTION 311-15 Who losses can be transferred to  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    311-20   (Repealed) SECTION 311-20 Losses that can be transferred  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    311-25   (Repealed) SECTION 311-25 Effect of transferring a net capital loss  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    311-30   (Repealed) SECTION 311-30 Effect of transferring a tax loss  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    311-35   (Repealed) SECTION 311-35 Realisation of certain assets after completion time  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 311-D - Consequences of choosing asset roll-over  

    311-40   (Repealed) SECTION 311-40 Assets roll-over - transfers between funds  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    311-42   (Repealed) SECTION 311-42 Assets roll-over - transfers within a fund  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    311-45   (Repealed) SECTION 311-45 CGT assets  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    311-50   (Repealed) SECTION 311-50 Revenue assets  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    311-55   (Repealed) SECTION 311-55 Further consequences for roll-overs involving life insurance companies  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 311-E - Choices  

    311-60   (Repealed) SECTION 311-60 Choices  
    (Repealed by No 89 of 2013)

    Division 312 - Trans-Tasman portability of retirement savings  

    Guide to Division 312  

    SECTION 312-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division deals with amounts transferred between KiwiSaver schemes and complying superannuation funds. This Division also deals with amounts paid by the Commissioner to KiwiSaver schemes.

    Subdivision 312-A - Preliminary  

    SECTION 312-5  

    312-5   Division implements Arrangement with New Zealand  


    This Division, together with the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 and regulations made under the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 , implement the Arrangement between the Government of Australia and the Government of New Zealand on Trans-Tasman Retirement Savings Portability, signed at Brisbane on 16 July 2009.

    Subdivision 312-B - Amounts contributed to complying superannuation funds from KiwiSaver schemes  

    SECTION 312-10   Amounts contributed to complying superannuation funds from KiwiSaver schemes  


    Treat amount as a contribution

    312-10(1)    
    An amount transferred from a * KiwiSaver scheme to a * complying superannuation fund in relation to you is treated as being a contribution you made to the complying superannuation fund for the purpose of providing * superannuation benefits for yourself.

    Note 1:

    The contribution will not be included in the assessable income of the trustee of the complying superannuation fund: see Division 295 .

    Note 2:

    The contribution is not included in your concessional contributions: see section 291-25 . Some of the contribution may be included in your non-concessional contributions: see subsection (3) of this section.


    312-10(2)    
    Division 290 (Contributions to superannuation funds), section 295-200 (Transfers from foreign superannuation funds) and Subdivision 305-B (Superannuation benefits from foreign superannuation funds) do not apply to the contribution.

    Australian-sourced amount and returning New Zealand-sourced amount not non-concessional

    312-10(3)    
    For the purposes of Subdivision 292-C (Excess non-concessional contributions tax), disregard so much of the contribution as you or the * KiwiSaver scheme provider informs, in accordance with the regulations mentioned in section 312-5 , the trustee of the * complying superannuation fund is:


    (a) an * Australian-sourced amount ; or


    (b) a * returning New Zealand-sourced amount .

    Note:

    The effect of subsection (3) is that the amounts mentioned in paragraphs (3)(a) and (b) are not included in your non-concessional contributions. The rest of the contribution is included in your non-concessional contributions: see subsection 292-90(2) .



    Assessable income and capital gains

    312-10(4)    
    The contribution is not assessable income of yours and is not *exempt income of yours.

    312-10(5)    
    Section 118-305 (capital gain or capital loss disregarded) applies in relation to the amount transferred as if the * KiwiSaver scheme were a * superannuation fund .

    Tax free and taxable components of superannuation interest

    312-10(6)    
    Section 307-220 (Contributions segment) only applies to so much (if any) of the contribution as you or the * KiwiSaver scheme provider inform, in accordance with the regulations mentioned in section 312-5 , the trustee of the * complying superannuation fund is:


    (a) a * New Zealand-sourced amount ; or


    (b) the * tax free component of an * Australian-sourced amount .

    Note:

    So much of the value of an interest in the fund as consists of the amounts mentioned in paragraphs (6)(a) and (b) is included in the contributions segment and tax free component of the interest. So much of the value of that interest as consists of the rest of the contribution is not included in the contributions segment of the interest and is included in the taxable component of the interest. (The value of the interest may also consist of amounts other than the contribution.)


    Subdivision 312-C - Superannuation benefits paid to KiwiSaver scheme providers  

    SECTION 312-15  

    312-15   Superannuation benefits paid from complying superannuation funds to KiwiSaver schemes  


    A * superannuation benefit paid to a * KiwiSaver scheme provider by the trustee of a * complying superannuation fund in respect of you is not assessable income of yours and is not * exempt income of yours.

    SECTION 312-20  

    312-20   Superannuation benefits paid by Commissioner to KiwiSaver schemes  
    An *unclaimed money payment that you are taken to receive under section 307-15 because it is paid to a KiwiSaver scheme provider by the Commissioner in accordance with the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

    Division 313 - First home super saver scheme  

    Guide to Division 313  

    SECTION 313-1   What this Division is about  


    If an amount is released from your superannuation interests under the first home super saver scheme, an amount may be included in your assessable income and you may become entitled to a tax offset.

    You also have a limited period within which to enter into a contract to purchase or construct a residential premises or re-contribute an amount to your superannuation. If you do not notify the Commissioner that you have done one of those things, you become liable for tax.

    Subdivision 313-A - Preliminary  

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 313-5  

    313-5   Object of this Division  


    The object of this Division is to provide an individual with concessional tax treatment for amounts released from superannuation for the purposes of purchasing or constructing the individual ' s first home.

    SECTION 313-10  

    313-10   Application of this Division  


    This Division applies to you if one or more amounts (the FHSS released amounts ) are paid in response to a release authority issued under Division 131 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to a *first home super saver determination made in relation to you.

    Subdivision 313-B - Assessable income and tax offset  

    Guide to Subdivision 313-B

    SECTION 313-15   What this Subdivision is about  


    An amount is included in your assessable income, and you are entitled to a tax offset, if an amount is paid in response to a release authority issued in respect of you.

    The amount included in your assessable income relates to the concessional contributions and total associated earnings that are stated in the relevant first home super saver determination.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    313-20 Amount included in assessable income
    313-25 Amount of the tax offset

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 313-20   Amount included in assessable income  

    313-20(1)    
    Your assessable income, for the income year that corresponds to the *financial year for which you requested the release authority, includes an amount that is equal to the sum of the following amounts stated in the *first home super saver determination:


    (a) your *concessional contributions;


    (b) your associated earnings.

    313-20(2)    
    However, if the sum of the *FHSS released amounts is less than the *FHSS maximum release amount stated in the determination, the amount included in your assessable income for the income year is:


    (a) the amount worked out under subsection (1); less


    (b) the difference between the FHSS maximum release amount and the sum of the FHSS released amounts.

    313-20(3)    
    If the amount worked out under subsection (2) is negative, the amount included in your assessable income for the income year is nil.

    Note 1:

    The release authorities are issued under Division 131 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note 2:

    Any amounts paid in response to the release authorities are non-assessable non-exempt income (see section 303-15).


    SECTION 313-25  

    313-25   Amount of the tax offset  


    You are entitled, for the income year mentioned in section 313-20 , to a *tax offset that is equal to 30% of your *assessable FHSS released amount for the income year.
    Note:

    This offset cannot be refunded, transferred or carried forward (see item 20 of the table in subsection 63-10(1) ).

    Subdivision 313-C - Purchasing or constructing a residential premises  

    Guide to Subdivision 313-C

    SECTION 313-30   What this Subdivision is about  


    If an amount is released from your superannuation interests under the first home super saver scheme, and you enter into a contract within a particular period to purchase or construct a residential premises, you must notify the Commissioner of that contract.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    313-35 Purchasing or constructing a residential premises
    313-40 Notifying Commissioner

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 313-35   Purchasing or constructing a residential premises  

    313-35(1)    


    Section 313-40 applies to you if:

    (a)    a *first home super saver determination is made in relation to you; and

    (b)    

    you make a valid request under section 131-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to that determination that is your first such request; and

    (c)    

    you enter into a contract to purchase or construct a *CGT asset that is a *residential premises in Australia within the period:

    (i) beginning 14 days before the day you make the valid request; and

    (ii) ending 12 months (or if extended under subsection (2) , that longer period) after the day you make the valid request; and

    (d)    

    the price for the purchase or construction of the premises is at least equal to the total amount to be released that is stated in the valid request; and

    (e)    you have occupied the premises, or intend to occupy the premises as soon as practicable; and

    (f)    you intend to occupy the premises for at least 6 months of the first 12 months after it is practicable to occupy the premises.


    313-35(2)    
    The Commissioner may extend the period for entering into a contract by up to 12 months.

    Note:

    If you request an extension of the period, you may object against a decision of the Commissioner under this section (see section 313-85 ).


    SECTION 313-40   Notifying Commissioner  

    313-40(1)    


    You must notify the Commissioner in the *approved form of the matters set out in paragraphs 313-35(1)(a) to (f) .

    313-40(2)    


    The notification must be made within 28 days, or such longer period as the Commissioner allows, after you enter into the contract to purchase or construct the *residential premises.
    Note:

    If you request an extension of the period, you may object against a decision of the Commissioner under this subsection (see section 313-85 ).


    313-40(3)    
    Subsection (1) does not limit the information that the *approved form may require the notification to contain.

    Subdivision 313-D - Contributing amounts to superannuation  

    Guide to Subdivision 313-D

    SECTION 313-45   What this Subdivision is about  


    If an amount is released from your superannuation interests under the first home super saver scheme, and you do not enter into a contract within a particular period to purchase or construct a residential premises, you may make one or more non-concessional contributions. If you do not notify the Commissioner that you have made the contributions, you may be liable for tax under Subdivision 313-E .


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    313-50 Contributing amounts to superannuation

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 313-50   Contributing amounts to superannuation  

    313-50(1)    
    This section applies to you if:


    (a) you do not notify the Commissioner in accordance with section 313-40 (about purchasing or constructing a *residential premises); and


    (b) you make one or more *non-concessional contributions the sum of which is at least equal to:


    (i) your *assessable FHSS released amount for an income year; less

    (ii) the amount withheld by the Commissioner from your *FHSS released amounts under section 12-460 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 ; and


    (c) you make the contributions within the period mentioned in paragraph 313-35(1)(c) .

    Note:

    Paragraph 313-35(1)(c) sets out the period in which you must have entered into a contract to purchase or construct a residential premises.


    313-50(2)    
    You may notify the Commissioner in the *approved form that you have made the contributions mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

    Note 1:

    If you notify the Commissioner, you cannot deduct the contribution (see section 290-168 ).

    Note 2:

    If you do not notify the Commissioner, you may be liable for tax (see Subdivision 313-E ).


    313-50(3)    


    The notification must be made within the period mentioned in paragraph 313-35(1)(c) or such longer period as the Commissioner allows under this subsection.
    Note:

    If you request an extension of the period, you may object against a decision of the Commissioner under this subsection (see section 313-85 ).


    313-50(4)    
    Subsection (2) does not limit the information that the *approved form may require the notification to contain.

    Subdivision 313-E - First home super saver tax  

    Guide to Subdivision 313-E

    SECTION 313-55   What this Subdivision is about  


    If an amount is released from your superannuation interests under the first home super saver scheme, you are liable for tax if you do not, within a particular period, do either of the following:

  • (a) enter into a contract to purchase or construct a residential premises, and notify the Commissioner of that contract;
  • (b) make one or more non-concessional contributions, and notify the Commissioner of the contributions.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    313-60 First home super saver tax
    313-65 When tax is payable - original assessments
    313-70 When tax is payable - amended assessments
    313-75 General interest charge

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 313-60  

    313-60   First home super saver tax  


    You are liable to pay *first home super saver tax if:


    (a) neither of section 313-40 or 313-50 applies to you; or


    (b) section 313-40 applies to you and you do not notify the Commissioner in accordance with that section; or


    (c) section 313-50 applies to you and you do not notify the Commissioner in accordance with that section.

    Note 1:

    The amount of the tax is set out in the First Home Super Saver Tax Act 2017 .

    Note 2:

    Section 313-40 is about purchasing or constructing a residential premises. Section 313-50 is about making one or more non-concessional contributions.

    SECTION 313-65  

    313-65   When tax is payable - original assessments  


    Your *assessed first home super saver tax is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the Commissioner gives you notice of the assessment of the amount of the *first home super saver tax.
    Note:

    For assessments of first home super saver tax, see Division 155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 313-70  

    313-70   When tax is payable - amended assessments  


    If the Commissioner amends your assessment, any extra *assessed first home super saver tax resulting from the amendment is due and payable 21 days after the day the Commissioner gives you notice of the amended assessment.

    SECTION 313-75  

    313-75   General interest charge  


    If an amount of *assessed first home super saver tax that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the *general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:


    (a) begins on the day on which the amount was due to be paid; and


    (b) ends on the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:


    (i) the assessed first home super saver tax;

    (ii) general interest charge on any of the assessed first home super saver tax.
    Note:

    The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Subdivision 313-F - Review of decisions  

    Guide to Subdivision 313-F

    SECTION 313-80   What this Subdivision is about  


    You may object against particular decisions made under this Division.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    313-85 Review rights for decisions made under this Division

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 313-85   Review rights for decisions made under this Division  

    313-85(1)    
    If:


    (a) you requested the Commissioner to allow a longer period under:


    (i) subsection 313-35(2) (for entering into a contract to purchase or construct a *residential premises); or

    (ii) subsection 313-40(2) or 313-50(3) (for notifying the Commissioner of matters); and


    (b) you are dissatisfied with:


    (i) a decision under that subsection allowing a longer period; or

    (ii) a decision the Commissioner makes not to allow a longer period;

    you may object against the decision in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    313-85(2)    
    To avoid doubt, for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977 , the making of a decision under a subsection mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) of this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax, and making a calculation of charge, under this Act.

    PART 3-32 - CO-OPERATIVES AND MUTUAL ENTITIES  

    Division 315 - Demutualisation of private health insurers  

    Guide to Division 315  

    SECTION 315-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out the taxation consequences of the demutualisation of private health insurers.

    Policy holders, demutualising health insurers and certain other entities can disregard capital gains and losses arising under a demutualisation (see Subdivision 315-A ).

    Shares and rights issued under the demutualisation are given a cost base based on the market value of the demutualising health insurer at the time of issue (see Subdivisions 315-B and 315-D ).

    Assets held by a lost policy holders trust are given roll-over relief if transferred to the lost policy holder, or if the lost policy holder becomes absolutely entitled to them. Otherwise the trustee of the lost policy holders trust is taxed on any capital gains (see Subdivision 315-C ).

    A legal personal representative can disregard capital gains and losses made when passing an asset to a beneficiary of a policy holder's estate (see Subdivision 315-E ).

    Shares, rights or cash received under a demutualisation are not assessable income and not exempt income (see Subdivision 315-F ).

    Subdivision 315-A - Capital gains and losses connected with a demutualisation of a private health insurer to be disregarded  

    Rules for policy holders

    SECTION 315-5  

    315-5   Policy holders to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation of private health insurer  


    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of an individual from a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset if:


    (a) the CGT event happens under a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and


    (b) the individual is, or has been, a policy holder (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 ) of, or another person insured through, the demutualising entity (the demutualising health insurer ); and


    (c) the CGT asset is covered by section 315-20 .

    SECTION 315-10  

    315-10   Effect on the legal personal representative or beneficiary  


    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of an entity from a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset if:


    (a) the CGT asset forms part of the estate of a deceased individual who is mentioned in paragraph 315-5(b) ; and


    (b) the entity is the deceased individual's *legal personal representative or a beneficiary in the deceased individual's estate; and


    (c) the CGT asset devolves to the entity or *passes to the entity; and


    (d) the CGT event happens under a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and


    (e) the CGT asset is covered by section 315-20 .

    SECTION 315-15  

    315-15   Demutualisations to which this Division applies  


    This Division applies to a demutualisation of an entity if:


    (a) the entity:


    (i) is an entity to which item 6.3 of the table in section 50-30 applies; and

    (ii) is not registered under Part 3 of the Life Insurance Act 1995 ; and

    (iia) is not an entity to whose demutualisation Division 316 applies; and

    (iii) does not have capital divided into shares; and
    Note:

    Item 6.3 of the table in section 50-30 applies to a private health insurer within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 that is not carried on for the profit or gain of its individual members.


    (b) an application by the entity to convert to being registered as a for profit insurer (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 ) is approved under subsection 20(5) of that Act; and


    (c) consistently with the conversion scheme mentioned in paragraph 20(2)(a) of that Act, the entity becomes registered as a for profit insurer (within the meaning of that Act).

    SECTION 315-20  

    315-20   What assets are covered  


    These *CGT assets are covered:


    (a) an interest in the demutualising health insurer as a policy holder;


    (b) a membership interest in the demutualising health insurer;


    (c) a right or interest of another kind in the demutualising health insurer;


    (d) a right or interest of another kind that arises under the demutualisation.

    Rules for demutualising health insurer

    SECTION 315-25  

    315-25   Demutualising health insurers to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation  


    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of an entity from a *CGT event if:


    (a) the CGT event happened under a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and


    (b) the entity is the demutualising health insurer.

    Rules for other entities

    SECTION 315-30  

    315-30   Other entities to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation  


    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of an entity from a *CGT event if:


    (a) the entity is established solely for the purpose of participating in a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and


    (b) the entity is not a trust covered by Subdivision 315-C (about lost policy holders); and


    (c) the CGT event:


    (i) happened under a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and

    (ii) happened before or at the same time as the allocation or distribution (in the form of shares or cash) of the accumulated surplus of the demutualising health insurer; and

    (iii) was connected to that allocation or distribution.
    Note:

    The allocation or distribution of the accumulated surplus could happen through an arrangement involving more than one transaction.

    Subdivision 315-B - Cost base of certain shares and rights in private health insurers  

    SECTION 315-80   Cost base and acquisition time of demutualisation assets  


    Cost base adjustment

    315-80(1)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a *CGT asset is its *market value on the day it is issued if:


    (a) the asset is covered by section 315-85 (a demutualisation asset ); and


    (b) the asset is issued to an entity (a participating policy holder ) covered by section 315-90 .

    Note:

    There is an exception to this rule in Subdivision 315-D where the asset is a share or right in a holding company with other assets.



    Acquisition rule

    315-80(2)    
    The participating policy holder is taken to have *acquired the demutualisation asset at the time it is issued.

    SECTION 315-85   Demutualisation asset  

    315-85(1)    
    This section covers an asset if:


    (a) the asset is:


    (i) a share in the demutualising health insurer; or

    (ii) a right to *acquire a share in the demutualising health insurer; or

    (iii) a share in an entity that owns all of the shares in the demutualising health insurer; or

    (iv) a right to acquire a share in an entity mentioned in subparagraph (iii); and


    (b) the share or right is issued under a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and


    (c) the share or right is issued in connection with:


    (i) the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of a *CGT asset covered by section 315-20 ; or

    (ii) the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of such a CGT asset.


    Exclusion for rights with an exercise price

    315-85(2)    
    Despite subsection (1), this section does not cover a right to *acquire a share in an entity if the holder of the right must pay an amount to exercise the right.

    Exclusion where assets not issued simultaneously

    315-85(3)    
    Despite subsection (1), an asset is not covered by this section unless all of the assets covered by subsection (1) for the demutualisation in question are issued:


    (a) at the same time; and


    (b) to an entity that is either:


    (i) a participating policy holder (see section 315-90 ); or

    (ii) the trustee of a trust covered by Subdivision 315-C (about the lost policy holders trust).

    SECTION 315-90   Participating policy holders  

    315-90(1)    
    This section covers an individual who:


    (a) is, or has been, a policy holder (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 ) of, or another person insured through, the demutualising health insurer; and


    (b) is entitled, under the demutualisation, to an allocation of demutualisation assets.


    315-90(2)    
    This section also covers an entity who became entitled to an allocation of demutualisation assets because of the death of an individual mentioned in subsection (1).

    Subdivision 315-C - Lost policy holders trust  

    SECTION 315-140  

    315-140   Lost policy holders trust  


    This Subdivision covers a trust (a lost policy holders trust ) in relation to a demutualisation to which this Division applies if:


    (a) the conversion scheme mentioned in paragraph 20(2)(a) of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 for the demutualisation provides for the trust; and


    (b) under the demutualisation, demutualisation assets (see section 315-85 ) are issued to the trustee of the trust; and


    (c) the trust exists solely for the purpose of holding shares or rights to *acquire shares on behalf of:


    (i) individuals ( lost policy holders ) who are, or have been, policy holders (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 ) of, or other persons insured through, the demutualising health insurer; or

    (ii) if the lost policy holder has died - the *legal personal representative of the lost policy holder or a beneficiary in the estate of the lost policy holder.
    Example:

    An example of an individual on whose behalf the trust might hold assets would be an individual who has not completed a formal step required for them to be issued with demutualisation assets directly. Another example might be an individual living overseas.

    SECTION 315-145   CGT treatment of demutualisation assets in lost policy holders trust  


    Cost base adjustment

    315-145(1)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a demutualisation asset issued to the trustee of a lost policy holders trust is its *market value on the day it is issued.

    Note:

    There is an exception to this rule in Subdivision 315-D where the asset is a share or right in a holding company with other assets.



    Acquisition rule

    315-145(2)    
    The trustee is taken to have *acquired the demutualisation asset at the time it is issued.

    SECTION 315-150   Roll-over where assets transferred to lost policy holder  

    315-150(1)    
    This section applies in relation to a *CGT event if:


    (a) the CGT event happens in relation to an asset held by the trustee of a lost policy holders trust on behalf of a lost policy holder; and


    (b) the CGT event happens because the lost policy holder (or, if the lost policy holder has died, the *legal personal representative of the lost policy holder or a beneficiary in the estate of the lost policy holder) either:


    (i) is transferred the asset by the trustee; or

    (ii) becomes absolutely entitled to the asset.
    Note:

    The asset may be a demutualisation asset, or some other asset.



    Consequence for trustee

    315-150(2)    
    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes from the *CGT event.

    Consequence for lost policy holder

    315-150(3)    
    The *cost base of the asset in the hands of the trustee of the lost policy holders trust just before the *CGT event becomes the first element of the cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the lost policy holder, *legal personal representative or beneficiary.

    315-150(4)    
    The lost policy holder, *legal personal representative or beneficiary is taken to have *acquired the asset when the trustee of the lost policy holders trust acquired it.

    SECTION 315-155   Trustee assessed if assets dealt with not for benefit of lost policy holder  

    315-155(1)    
    This section applies in relation to a *capital gain from a *CGT event if:


    (a) the CGT event happens in relation to an asset held by the trustee of a lost policy holders trust; and


    (b) section 315-150 does not apply to the CGT event.

    315-155(2)    


    If this section applies:


    (a) sections 115-215 and 115-220 do not apply in relation to the *capital gain; and


    (b) for the purposes of this Act, the trustee is taken to be *specifically entitled to all of the capital gain.


    SECTION 315-160  

    315-160   Subdivision 126-E does not apply to lost policy holders trust  


    Subdivision 126-E does not apply in relation to a demutualisation to which this Division applies.

    Subdivision 315-D - Special cost base rules for certain shares and rights in holding companies  

    SECTION 315-210   Cost base for shares and rights in certain holding companies  

    315-210(1)    
    This section applies in relation to a *CGT asset that is a demutualisation asset if:


    (a) the demutualisation asset is:


    (i) a share in an entity mentioned in subparagraph 315-85(1)(a)(iii) ; or

    (ii) a right to *acquire a share in an entity mentioned in that subparagraph; and


    (b) the entity owns other assets in addition to the shares in the demutualising health insurer; and


    (c) the share or right is issued to a participating policy holder or the trustee of a lost policy holders trust.

    This section applies despite sections 315-80 and 315-145 .



    Cost base adjustment

    315-210(2)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *CGT asset is worked out under the method statement. Method statement


    Step 1.

    Start with the *market value of the demutualising health insurer on the day the asset is issued.


    Step 2.

    Divide the result of step 1 by the sum of:

  • (a) the number of shares in the entity that are issued under the demutualisation; and
  • (b) the number of shares in the entity that can be *acquired under rights that are demutualisation assets issued under the demutualisation.

  • Step 3.

    The result of step 2 is the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset, unless the asset is a right.


    Step 4.

    If the asset is a right, multiply the result of step 2 by the number of shares that can be *acquired under the right. The result is the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset.

    Example:

    Wellbeing Health demutualises on 1 April 2008 and has a market value of $400 million on that day. It distributes its accumulated mutual surplus in the form of rights to acquire shares in its holding company Healthiness Insurance Ltd (Healthiness). The rights do not have an exercise price.

    A total of 800 million shares can be acquired in Healthiness under rights issued under the demutualisation. Each right allows the holder to acquire 50 shares. No shares in Healthiness are issued.

    Under the method statement, the first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of each right is worked out by dividing the market value of Wellbeing Health (step 1) by the number of shares in Healthiness that can be acquired under the demutualisation (step 2) and multiplying the result by the number of shares that can be acquired under the right (step 4):


    $ 400 million
    800 million
    ×   50 = $ 25



    Acquisition rule

    315-210(3)    
    The participating policy holder or trustee is taken to have *acquired the *CGT asset at the time it is issued.

    Subdivision 315-E - Special CGT rule for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries  

    SECTION 315-260   Special CGT rule for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries  

    315-260(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if a *CGT asset:


    (a) is a demutualisation asset; and


    (b) forms part of the estate of a participating policy holder mentioned in subsection 315-90(1) who has died, but was not owned by the policy holder just before dying; and


    (c) *passes to a beneficiary in the policy holder's estate because the asset is transferred to the beneficiary by the policy holder's *legal personal representative.

    Note:

    Division 128 deals with the effect of death in relation to CGT assets a person owns just before dying.


    315-260(2)    
    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss the *legal personal representative makes if the asset *passes to a beneficiary in the policy holder's estate.

    Consequence for beneficiary

    315-260(3)    
    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the *legal personal representative just before the asset *passes to the beneficiary becomes the first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the beneficiary.

    315-260(4)    
    The beneficiary is taken to have *acquired the asset when the *legal personal representative acquired it.

    Subdivision 315-F - Non-CGT consequences of demutualisation  

    SECTION 315-310   General taxation consequences of issue of demutualisation assets etc.  

    315-310(1)    
    An amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income of an entity to which subsection (2) applies is not assessable and not *exempt income if:


    (a) the amount would otherwise be included in the ordinary income or statutory income of the entity only because a demutualisation asset was issued to the entity; or


    (b) the amount is a payment made to the entity, under a demutualisation to which this Division applies, in connection with:


    (i) the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of a *CGT asset covered by section 315-20 ; or

    (ii) the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of such a CGT asset.

    315-310(2)    
    This subsection applies to an entity that:


    (a) is, or has been, a policy holder (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 ) of, or another person insured through, the demutualising health insurer; or


    (b) is issued with the demutualisation asset, or receives the payment, because of the death of a policy holder mentioned in paragraph (a).


    Division 316 - Demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurers  

    Guide to Division 316  

    SECTION 316-1   What this Division is about  

    Special tax consequences follow the demutualisation of a friendly society that provides health insurance or life insurance, or has a wholly-owned subsidiary that does.

    Subdivision 316-A - Application  

    SECTION 316-5  

    316-5   Application of this Division  


    This Division applies in relation to a demutualisation of a *friendly society if:


    (a) the society is, or has a *wholly-owned subsidiary (a health/life insurance subsidiary ) that is:


    (i) a private health insurer as defined in the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 ; or

    (ii) a company registered under section 21 of the Life Insurance Act 1995 ; and


    (b) the society does not have capital divided into *shares held by its *members; and


    (c) after the demutualisation the society is to be carried on for the object of securing a profit or pecuniary gain for its *members.

    Subdivision 316-B - Capital gains and losses connected with the demutualisation  

    Guide to Subdivision 316-B

    SECTION 316-50   What this Subdivision is about  


    Disregard capital gains and losses made by any entity from a CGT event happening under the demutualisation, unless the entity:

  • (a) is or has been a member of the friendly society or insured through the society or any of its wholly-owned subsidiaries; and
  • (b) receives money for the event.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Gains and losses of members, insured entities and successors
    316-55 Disregarding capital gains and losses, except some involving receipt of money
    316-60 Taking account of some capital gains and losses involving receipt of money
    316-65 Valuation factor for sections 316-60, 316-105 and 316-165
    316-70 Value of the friendly society
    Friendly society ' s gains and losses
    316-75 Disregarding friendly society ' s capital gains and losses
    Other entities ' gains and losses
    316-80 Disregarding other entities ' capital gains and losses

    Gains and losses of members, insured entities and successors

    SECTION 316-55   Disregarding capital gains and losses, except some involving receipt of money  

    316-55(1)    
    Disregard an entity ' s *capital gain or *capital loss from a *CGT event that happens under the demutualisation to a *CGT asset if:


    (a) the entity:


    (i) is or has been a *member of the *friendly society; or

    (ii) is or has been insured through the friendly society or a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; and


    (b) the CGT asset is one of these (an interest affected by demutualisation ):


    (i) an interest in the friendly society as the owner or holder of a policy of insurance with the friendly society or health/life insurance subsidiary;

    (ii) a *membership interest in the friendly society;

    (iii) a right or interest of another kind in the friendly society;

    (iv) a right or interest of another kind that arises under the demutualisation, except an interest in a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155 ).
    Note:

    Subdivision 316-D deals with the effects of CGT events happening to interests in lost policy holders trusts.


    316-55(2)    
    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of an entity (the successor ) from a *CGT event that happens under the demutualisation to a *CGT asset if:


    (a) the successor is the *legal personal representative, or beneficiary in the estate, of a deceased individual who was:


    (i) a *member of the *friendly society; or

    (ii) insured through the friendly society or a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; and


    (b) the CGT asset:


    (i) forms part of the deceased individual ' s estate; and

    (ii) devolves or *passes to the successor; and

    (iii) is an interest affected by demutualisation (see paragraph (1)(b)).

    SECTION 316-60   Taking account of some capital gains and losses involving receipt of money  

    316-60(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a *CGT event happens under the demutualisation to an entity ' s interest affected by demutualisation (see section 316-55 ); and


    (b) the event involves:


    (i) the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of the interest; or

    (ii) the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of the interest; and


    (c) either:


    (i) the entity is one described in paragraph 316-55(1)(a) ; or

    (ii) the entity is one described in paragraph 316-55(2)(a) and the interest is a *CGT asset described in paragraph 316-55(2)(b) ; and


    (d) the *capital proceeds from the event include or consist of money received by the entity.

    316-60(2)    
    Work out whether the entity makes a *capital gain or *capital loss from the *CGT event, and the amount of the gain or loss, assuming that:


    (a) the *capital proceeds from the CGT event were the amount they would be if they did not include any *market value of property other than money; and


    (b) the *cost base and *reduced cost base for the interest were the amount worked out using the formula:


    * Capital proceeds from the * CGT event × Valuation factor worked out
    under section 316-65

    Example:

    Assume the entity receives $50 in money and 10 shares with a market value of $4 each in respect of CGT event C2 happening, and that the valuation factor worked out under section 316-65 is 0.9. The entity makes a capital gain from the event of $5, worked out as follows:

    $ 50 − ( $ 50 × 0.9)

    This ignores the market value of the shares because they are property other than money.

    Note:

    Division 114 (Indexation of cost base) is not relevant, because this section provides exhaustively for working out the amount of the cost base.


    316-60(3)    
    The *capital gain or *capital loss is not to be disregarded, despite:


    (a) section 316-55 ; and


    (b) any provision of this Act for disregarding the *capital gain or *capital loss because the interest affected by demutualisation was *acquired before 20 September 1985.

    Note:

    The capital gain is not a discount capital gain: see section 115-55 .

    SECTION 316-65   Valuation factor for sections 316-60, 316-105 and 316-165  

    316-65(1)    


    For the purposes of section 316-60 , 316-105 and 316-165 , the valuation factor is the amount worked out using the formula:


    Market value of the friendly society ' s health insurance business (if any) + Embedded value of the friendly society ' s other business (if any)
    Total * capital proceeds for all entities from * CGT events happening under the demutualisation to interests affected by demutualisation (except those described in subparagraph 316-55(1)(b)(iv))

    where:

    embedded value of the friendly society ' s other business (if any)
    means the amount that would be the value of the *friendly society worked out under section 316-70 assuming that neither the friendly society, nor any health/life insurance subsidiary of it, carried on any health insurance business within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 .

    market value of the friendly society ' s health insurance business (if any)
    means the total *market value of every health insurance business, within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 , carried on by either or both of the *friendly society and its health/life insurance subsidiaries (if any), taking account of any consideration paid to the society or subsidiary for disposal or control of that business.


    316-65(2)    
    Disregard paragraph 316-60(2)(a) for the purposes of the formula in subsection (1) of this section.

    SECTION 316-70   Value of the friendly society  

    316-70(1)    
    The value of the *friendly society is the sum, worked out in accordance with this section, of the friendly society ' s existing business value and its adjusted net worth on the day (the applicable accounting day ) identified under subsection (3).

    Eligible actuary and Australian actuarial practice

    316-70(2)    
    The sum is to be worked out, according to Australian actuarial practice, by an *actuary who is not an employee of:


    (a) the *friendly society; or


    (b) a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; or


    (c) an entity of which the friendly society is to become a *wholly-owned subsidiary under the demutualisation.

    Applicable accounting day

    316-70(3)    
    The applicable accounting day is:


    (a) if an accounting period of the *friendly society ends on the day (the demutualisation resolution day ) identified under subsection (4) - that day; or


    (b) in any other case - the last day of the most recent accounting period of the friendly society ending before the demutualisation resolution day.

    Demutualisation resolution day

    316-70(4)    
    The demutualisation resolution day is:


    (a) the day on which the resolution to proceed with the demutualisation is passed; or


    (b) if, under the demutualisation, the whole of the *life insurance business of the *friendly society or of a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society is transferred to another company under a scheme confirmed by the Federal Court of Australia - the day (or the last day) on which the transfer takes place.

    Adjustment for changes after applicable accounting day

    316-70(5)    
    In a case covered by paragraph (3)(b), if any significant change in the amount of the existing business value or adjusted net worth occurs between the applicable accounting day and the demutualisation resolution day, the amount is to be adjusted to take account of the change.

    Continued business assumption

    316-70(6)    
    In working out the existing business value or the adjusted net worth, assume:


    (a) that after the applicable accounting day the *friendly society, and any health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society, will continue to conduct *business and any other activity in the same way as before that day, and will not conduct any different business or other activity; and


    (b) that the demutualisation will not occur; and


    (c) that any health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society will continue to be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the friendly society.

    Expenditure assumption

    316-70(7)    
    In working out the existing business value, assume that expenditure that the *friendly society and any of its health/life insurance subsidiaries will incur, in conducting *business, on recurring items after the demutualisation resolution day will be of the same kinds and amounts (increased to take account of any inflation) as it incurred in the accounting period, or part of an accounting period, ending on the demutualisation resolution day.

    Friendly society ' s gains and losses

    SECTION 316-75  

    316-75   Disregarding friendly society ' s capital gains and losses  


    Disregard the *friendly society ' s *capital gain or *capital loss from a *CGT event that happens under the demutualisation.

    Other entities ' gains and losses

    SECTION 316-80  

    316-80   Disregarding other entities ' capital gains and losses  


    Disregard an entity ' s *capital gain or *capital loss from a *CGT event that happens under the demutualisation if:


    (a) the entity is established solely for the purpose of participating in the demutualisation and is not a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155 ); and


    (b) the CGT event:


    (i) happens before or at the same time as the allocation or distribution of the accumulated surplus of the *friendly society; and

    (ii) is connected to that allocation or distribution.
    Note:

    The allocation or distribution of the accumulated surplus could happen through an arrangement involving more than one transaction.

    Subdivision 316-C - Cost base of shares and rights issued under the demutualisation  

    Guide to Subdivision 316-C

    SECTION 316-100   What this Subdivision is about  


    The value of the friendly society and its business affects cost bases of shares and certain rights issued under the demutualisation to:

  • (a) entities that are or were members of the friendly society; or
  • (b) entities insured through the society or its subsidiaries; or
  • (c) successors of such entities; or
  • (d) the trustee of the lost policy holders trust.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    316-105 Cost base and time of acquisition of shares and certain rights issued under demutualisation
    316-110 Demutualisation assets
    316-115 Entities to which section 316-105 applies

    SECTION 316-105   Cost base and time of acquisition of shares and certain rights issued under demutualisation  


    First element of cost base

    316-105(1)    
    The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a *CGT asset is the amount worked out using the formula in subsection (2) if:


    (a) the asset is a CGT asset (a demutualisation asset ) covered by section 316-110 ; and


    (b) the asset is issued to an entity covered by section 316-115 .

    316-105(2)    
    The formula is:


    Value of the * CGT asset
    when it was issued
    × Valuation factor worked out
    undersection 316-65



    Time of acquisition

    316-105(3)    
    The entity is taken to have *acquired the *CGT asset at the time it is issued.

    SECTION 316-110   Demutualisation assets  

    316-110(1)    
    This section covers a *CGT asset that:


    (a) is:


    (i) a *share in the *friendly society; or

    (ii) a right to *acquire a share in the friendly society; or

    (iii) a share in an entity that owns all of the shares in the friendly society; or

    (iv) a right to acquire a share in an entity mentioned in subparagraph (iii); and


    (b) is issued under the demutualisation; and


    (c) is issued in connection with:


    (i) the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of an interest affected by demutualisation (see paragraph 316-55(1)(b) ); or

    (ii) the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of an interest affected by demutualisation.


    Exclusion for rights with an exercise price

    316-110(2)    
    Despite subsection (1), this section does not cover a right to *acquire a *share in an entity if the holder of the right must pay an amount to exercise the right.

    Exclusion where assets not issued simultaneously

    316-110(3)    
    Despite subsection (1), a *CGT asset is not covered by this section unless all of the CGT assets covered by subsection (1) for the demutualisation are issued:


    (a) at the same time; and


    (b) to entities that are covered by section 316-115 .

    SECTION 316-115   Entities to which section 316-105 applies  

    316-115(1)    
    This section covers an entity that:


    (a) either:


    (i) is or has been a *member of the *friendly society; or

    (ii) is or has been insured through the friendly society or a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; and


    (b) is entitled under the demutualisation to an allocation of demutualisation assets.

    316-115(2)    
    This section also covers an entity that has become entitled to an allocation of demutualisation assets because of the death of an individual who was an entity described in subsection (1).

    316-115(3)    
    This section also covers the trustee of a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155 ).

    Subdivision 316-D - Lost policy holders trust  

    Guide to Subdivision 316-D

    SECTION 316-150   What this Subdivision is about  


    If the demutualisation creates a trust just to hold shares, rights to acquire shares or money for entities that were members of the friendly society or insured through the society or its subsidiary, or are successors of such entities, then:

  • (a) capital gains or losses from CGT events happening to beneficiaries ' interests in the trust are disregarded, except where the capital proceeds include money; and
  • (b) when a CGT event happens involving the transfer of the shares or rights to a beneficiary, or a beneficiary ' s absolute entitlement to them, the trustee ' s capital gain or loss is disregarded and the beneficiary has the same cost base and time of acquisition as the trustee; and
  • (c) the trustee is assessed on any capital gains from other CGT events happening to the shares or rights.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Application
    316-155 Lost policy holders trust
    Effects of CGT events happening to interests and assets in trust
    316-160 Disregarding beneficiaries ' capital gains and losses, except some involving receipt of money
    316-165 Taking account of some capital gains and losses involving receipt of money by beneficiaries
    316-170 Roll-over where shares or rights to acquire shares transferred to beneficiary of lost policy holders trust
    316-175 Trustee assessed if shares or rights dealt with not for benefit of beneficiary of lost policy holders trust
    316-180 Subdivision 126-E does not apply

    Application

    SECTION 316-155   Lost policy holders trust  

    316-155(1)    
    This Subdivision applies if the conditions in subsections (2) and (5) are met.

    First condition

    316-155(2)    


    The first condition is that, under the demutualisation, a trust (the lost policy holders trust ) exists solely for one or both of the purposes that are described in subsection (3) in relation to persons ( beneficiaries of the lost policy holders trust ) covered by subsection (4).

    316-155(3)    
    The purposes are as follows:


    (a) holding demutualisation assets (see section 316-110 ) that are *shares or rights to *acquire shares, or proceeds from disposal of those assets, on behalf of one or more beneficiaries of the lost policy holders trust and transferring those assets or proceeds to those beneficiaries;


    (b) holding on behalf of one or more beneficiaries of the lost policy holders trust, and paying to them, money payable to them for:


    (i) the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of the beneficiaries ' interests affected by demutualisation (see paragraph 316-55(1)(b) ); or

    (ii) the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of those interests.

    316-155(4)    
    This subsection covers:


    (a) a person who is or has been a *member of the friendly society or is or has been insured through the *friendly society or a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; and


    (b) a *legal personal representative, or beneficiary in the estate, of such a person who has died.

    Second condition

    316-155(5)    
    The second condition is that, under the demutualisation, the trustee of the lost policy holders trust is:


    (a) issued with demutualisation assets that are *shares, or rights to *acquire shares; or


    (b) paid money described in paragraph (3)(b) to hold and pay to beneficiaries of the lost policy holders trust.

    Effects of CGT events happening to interests and assets in trust

    SECTION 316-160  

    316-160   Disregarding beneficiaries ' capital gains and losses, except some involving receipt of money  


    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of a beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust from a *CGT event that happens to the beneficiary ' s interest in the trust.

    SECTION 316-165   Taking account of some capital gains and losses involving receipt of money by beneficiaries  

    316-165(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a *CGT event happens to an interest of a beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust in that trust; and


    (b) the *capital proceeds from the event include or consist of money received by the beneficiary.

    316-165(2)    
    Work out whether the beneficiary makes a *capital gain or *capital loss from the *CGT event, and the amount of the gain or loss, assuming that:


    (a) the *capital proceeds from the CGT event were the amount they would be if they did not include any *market value of property other than money; and


    (b) the *cost base and *reduced cost base for the interest were the amount worked out using the formula:


    * Capital proceeds from the * CGT event × Valuation factor worked out
    under section 316-65

    Example:

    Assume that the beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust is paid $50 in money by the trustee to satisfy the beneficiary ' s interest in the trust so that a CGT event happens, and that the valuation factor worked out under section 316-65 is 0.9. The beneficiary makes a capital gain from the event of $5, worked out as follows:

    $ 50 − ( $ 50 × 0.9)

    Note:

    Division 114 (Indexation of cost base) is not relevant, because this section provides exhaustively for working out the amount of the cost base.


    316-165(3)    
    The *capital gain or *capital loss is not to be disregarded, despite sections 316-55 and 316-160 .

    Note:

    The capital gain is not a discount capital gain: see section 115-55 .


    SECTION 316-170   Roll-over where shares or rights to acquire shares transferred to beneficiary of lost policy holders trust  

    316-170(1)    
    This section applies in relation to a *CGT event if:


    (a) the CGT event happens in relation to an asset that:


    (i) is a *share or a right to *acquire one or more shares; and

    (ii) is held by the trustee of the lost policy holders trust on behalf of a beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust; and


    (b) the CGT event happens because the beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust either:


    (i) is transferred the asset by the trustee; or

    (ii) becomes absolutely entitled to the asset.


    Consequence for trustee

    316-170(2)    
    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes from the *CGT event.

    Consequences for beneficiary

    316-170(3)    
    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the trustee of the lost policy holders trust just before the *CGT event becomes the first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust.

    Note:

    Section 316-105 affects the cost base of the asset in the hands of the trustee of the lost policy holders trust if the asset is covered by section 316-110 .


    316-170(4)    
    The beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust is taken to have *acquired the asset when the trustee acquired it.

    SECTION 316-175   Trustee assessed if shares or rights dealt with not for benefit of beneficiary of lost policy holders trust  

    316-175(1)    
    This section applies in relation to a *capital gain from a *CGT event if:


    (a) the CGT event happens in relation to a demutualisation asset that:


    (i) is a *share or a right to *acquire a share; and

    (ii) is held by the trustee of a lost policy holders trust; and


    (b) section 316-170 does not apply to the CGT event.

    316-175(2)    


    If this section applies:


    (a) sections 115-215 and 115-220 do not apply in relation to the *capital gain; and


    (b) for the purposes of this Act, the trustee is taken to be *specifically entitled to all of the capital gain.


    316-175(3)    
    (Repealed by No 62 of 2011)


    SECTION 316-180  

    316-180   Subdivision 126-E does not apply  


    Subdivision 126-E does not apply in relation to the demutualisation.
    Note:

    Subdivision 126-E is about an entitlement to shares after demutualisation and scrip for scrip roll-over.

    Subdivision 316-E - Special CGT rules for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries  

    SECTION 316-200   Demutualisation assets not owned by deceased but passing to beneficiary in deceased estate  

    316-200(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if a *CGT asset:


    (a) is a demutualisation asset (see section 316-110 ); and


    (b) forms part of the estate of an individual who is an entity described in subsection 316-115(1) and has died; and


    (c) was not owned by the individual just before dying; and


    (d) *passes to a beneficiary in the individual ' s estate because the asset is transferred to the beneficiary by the individual ' s *legal personal representative.

    Note:

    Division 128 deals with the effect of death in relation to CGT assets a person owns just before dying.



    Consequence for legal personal representative

    316-200(2)    
    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss the *legal personal representative makes because the asset *passes to the beneficiary.

    Consequence for beneficiary

    316-200(3)    
    The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the *legal personal representative just before the asset *passes to the beneficiary becomes the first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the beneficiary.

    316-200(4)    
    The beneficiary is taken to have *acquired the asset when the *legal personal representative acquired it.

    SECTION 316-205   Interest in lost policy holders trust not owned by deceased but passing to beneficiary in deceased estate  

    316-205(1)    
    This section sets out what happens if a *CGT asset:


    (a) is an interest in a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155 ); and


    (b) forms part of the estate of an individual who is an entity described in subsection 316-115(1) and has died; and


    (c) was not owned by the individual just before dying; and


    (d) *passes to a beneficiary in the individual ' s estate because the asset is transferred to the beneficiary by the individual ' s *legal personal representative.

    Note:

    Division 128 deals with the effect of death in relation to CGT assets a person owns just before dying.



    Consequence for legal personal representative

    316-205(2)    
    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss the *legal personal representative makes because the asset *passes to the beneficiary.

    Subdivision 316-F - Non-CGT consequences of the demutualisation  

    Guide to Subdivision 316-F

    SECTION 316-250   What this Subdivision is about  


    In many cases, income from demutualisation is assessed through the CGT provisions rather than as ordinary income or other statutory income.

    Franking debits arise for the friendly society and its subsidiaries to ensure they do not enjoy a franking surplus. Franking debits and credits arise to negate credits and debits from things attributable to the time before demutualisation.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    316-255 General taxation consequences of issue of demutualisation assets etc.
    316-260 Franking debits to stop the friendly society and its subsidiaries having franking surpluses
    316-265 Franking debits to negate franking credits from some distributions to friendly society and subsidiaries
    316-270 Franking debits to negate franking credits from post-demutualisation payments of pre-demutualisation tax
    316-275 Franking credits to negate franking debits from refunds of tax paid before demutualisation

    SECTION 316-255   General taxation consequences of issue of demutualisation assets etc.  

    316-255(1)    
    An amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income (other than a *net capital gain) of an entity covered by subsection (2) is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if:


    (a) the amount would otherwise be included in the ordinary income or statutory income of the entity only because a demutualisation asset (see section 316-110 ) was issued to the entity; or


    (b) the amount is a payment made to the entity, under the demutualisation, in connection with:


    (i) the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of an interest affected by demutualisation (see paragraph 316-55(1)(b) ); or

    (ii) the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of an interest affected by demutualisation; or


    (c) the amount would otherwise be included in the ordinary income or statutory income of the entity only because a *share or a right to *acquire one or more shares was transferred to the entity by the trustee of a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155 ); or


    (d) the amount is a payment made to the entity from a lost policy holders trust in connection with:


    (i) the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of an interest affected by demutualisation; or

    (ii) the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of an interest affected by demutualisation.

    316-255(2)    
    This subsection covers an entity that:


    (a) is or has been a *member of the *friendly society; or


    (b) is or has been insured through the friendly society or a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; or


    (c) is issued with the demutualisation asset, or receives the payment, because of the death of a person covered by paragraph (a) or (b); or


    (d) is a beneficiary of a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155 ).

    SECTION 316-260   Franking debits to stop the friendly society and its subsidiaries having franking surpluses  

    316-260(1)    
    A *franking debit arises in the *franking account of the *friendly society or a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the society if the account is in *surplus immediately before the demutualisation resolution day identified under subsection 316-70(4) .

    316-260(2)    
    The amount of the *franking debit equals the *surplus.

    316-260(3)    
    The *franking debit arises at the start of that day.

    SECTION 316-265   Franking debits to negate franking credits from some distributions to friendly society and subsidiaries  

    316-265(1)    
    This section applies if a *franking credit arises in the *franking account of the *friendly society or a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the society because a *distribution declared before the demutualisation resolution day identified under subsection 316-70(4) is made to the society or subsidiary on or after that day.

    316-265(2)    
    A *franking debit arises in that account.

    316-265(3)    
    The amount of the *franking debit equals the amount of the *franking credit.

    316-265(4)    
    The *franking debit arises at the same time as the *franking credit arises.

    SECTION 316-270   Franking debits to negate franking credits from post-demutualisation payments of pre-demutualisation tax  

    316-270(1)    
    This section applies if a *franking credit arises in the *franking account of the *friendly society or a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the society because, on or after the demutualisation resolution day identified under subsection 316-70(4) , the society or subsidiary *pays a PAYG instalment, or *pays income tax, that is wholly or partly attributable to a period before that day.

    316-270(2)    
    A *franking debit arises in that account.

    316-270(3)    
    The amount of the *franking debit is so much of the *franking credit as is attributable to the period before that day.

    316-270(4)    
    The *franking debit arises at the same time as the *franking credit arises.

    SECTION 316-275   Franking credits to negate franking debits from refunds of tax paid before demutualisation  

    316-275(1)    
    This section applies if a *franking debit arises in the *franking account of the *friendly society or a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the society because, on or after the demutualisation resolution day identified under subsection 316-70(4) , the society or subsidiary *receives a refund of income tax that is wholly or partly attributable to a period before that day.

    316-275(2)    
    A *franking credit arises in that account.

    316-275(3)    
    The amount of the *franking credit is so much of the *franking debit as is attributable to the period before that day.

    316-275(4)    
    The *franking credit arises at the same time as the *franking debit arises.

    PART 3-35 - INSURANCE BUSINESS  

    Division 320 - Life insurance companies  

    Guide to Division 320  

    SECTION 320-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division provides for the taxation of life insurance companies in a broadly comparable way to other entities that derive similar kinds of income.

    Because of the nature of the business of life insurance companies, the Division contains special rules for working out their taxable income.

    Those rules:

  • • include certain amounts in assessable income;
  • • identify certain amounts of exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income;
  • • identify specific deductions.
  • Life insurance companies can have one or both of these taxable incomes for any income year for the purposes of working out their income tax for that year:

  • • a taxable income of the complying superannuation class, which consists of taxable income that relates to complying superannuation business, and is taxed at the rate of tax that applies to complying superannuation funds;
  • • a taxable income of the ordinary class, which consists of taxable income that relates to other businesses and is taxed at the corporate tax rate.
  • Life insurance companies can also have tax losses that correspond to those 2 classes. The Division provides that tax losses of a particular class can be deducted only from incomes in respect of that class.

    The Division ensures that the income tax worked out on the basis of these taxable incomes and tax losses is a single amount of income tax on one taxable income.

    The Division also contains rules for segregating the assets of life insurance companies into:

  • • assets that relate to complying superannuation business;
  • • assets that relate to immediate annuity and other exempt business.
  • This Division also ensures that life insurance companies that are RSA providers are liable to pay tax on no-TFN contributions income.

    Operative provisions  

    Subdivision 320-A - Preliminary

    SECTION 320-5   Object of Division  

    320-5(1)    


    The object of this Division is to provide for the taxation of *life insurance companies in a broadly comparable way to other entities that *derive similar kinds of income.

    320-5(2)    


    To achieve this object, the Division:


    (a) identifies certain amounts that are included in the assessable income, or are *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income, of a *life insurance company; and


    (b) identifies certain amounts that a life insurance company can deduct; and


    (c) enables a life insurance company to have taxable incomes and *tax losses of the following classes for the purposes of working out its income tax for an income year:


    (i) the *complying superannuation class;

    (ii) the *ordinary class; and


    (d) contains other provisions necessary to enable the income tax on the taxable income of a life insurance company to be worked out.


    (e) (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    Note:

    Section 320-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides that the tax consequences of certain transfers of assets of a life insurance company that is a friendly society to a complying superannuation fund are to be disregarded.


    Subdivision 320-B - What is included in a life insurance company ' s assessable income  

    Guide to Subdivision 320-B

    SECTION 320-10   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision provides for certain amounts to be included in a life insurance company ' s assessable income and for certain other amounts to be exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    320-15 Assessable income - various amounts
    320-30 Assessable income - special provision for certain income years
    320-35 Exempt income
    320-37 Non-assessable non-exempt income
    320-40 (Repealed by No 101 of 2006 )
    320-45 Tax treatment of gains or losses from CGT events in relation to complying superannuation assets

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 320-15   Assessable income - various amounts  

    320-15(1)    


    A *life insurance company ' s assessable income includes:


    (a) the total amount of the *life insurance premiums paid to the company in the income year; and


    (b) amounts received or recovered under *contracts of reinsurance (except amounts that relate to a risk, or part of a risk, in relation to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies) to the extent to which they relate to the *risk components of claims paid under *life insurance policies; and


    (c) any amount received or recovered that is a refund, or in the nature of a refund, of the life insurance premium paid under a contract of reinsurance (except any amount that relates to a risk, or part of a risk, in relation to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies); and


    (ca) any reinsurance commission received or recovered by the company in respect of a contract of reinsurance (except any commission that relates to a risk, or part of a risk, in relation to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies); and


    (d) any amount received under a profit-sharing arrangement contained in, or entered into in relation to, a contract of reinsurance; and


    (da) the *transfer values of assets transferred by the company from a *complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or 320-195(3) ; and


    (db) the transfer values of assets transferred by the company to a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(3) or 320-185(1) ; and


    (e) if an asset (other than money) is transferred from or to a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or (3), to a complying superannuation asset pool under section 320-185 or from a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-195(2) or (3) - the amount (if any) that is included in the company ' s assessable income of the income year in which the asset was transferred because of section 320-200 ; and


    (f) the transfer values of assets transferred by the company from the company ' s *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(1) or 320-250(2) ; and


    (g) if an asset (other than money) is transferred to the company ' s segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(3) or section 320-240 - the amount (if any) that is included in the company ' s assessable income because of section 320-255 ; and


    (h) subject to subsection (2), if the *value, at the end of the income year, of the company ' s liabilities under the *net risk components of life insurance policies is less than the value, at the end of the previous income year, of those liabilities - an amount equal to the difference; and

    Note:

    Where the value at the end of the income year exceeds the value at the end of the previous income year, the excess can be deducted: see section 320-85 .


    (i) amounts specified in agreements under section 295-260 ; and


    (j) *specified roll-over amounts paid to the company; and


    (ja) amounts imposed by the company in respect of risk riders for *ordinary investment policies in an income year in which the company did not receive any life insurance premiums for those policies; and


    (k) fees and charges (not otherwise included in, or taken into account in working out, the company ' s assessable income) imposed by the company in respect of life insurance policies; and


    (l) if the company is an *RSA provider - contributions made to *RSAs provided by the company that would be included in the company ' s assessable income under Subdivision 295-C if that Subdivision applied to the company.


    320-15(2)    


    Paragraph (1)(h) does not cover any liabilities under:


    (a) a *life insurance policy that provides for *participating benefits or *discretionary benefits; or


    (b) an *exempt life insurance policy; or


    (c) a *funeral policy.


    320-15(3)    


    An amount included in assessable income under paragraph (1)(i) is included for the income year of the *life insurance company that includes the last day of the transferor ' s income year to which the agreement referred to in section 295-260 relates.

    SECTION 320-30   Assessable income - special provision for certain income years  

    320-30(1)    
    This section applies to a *life insurance company for each of the following income years (each a relevant income year ):


    (a) the income year in which 1 July 2000 occurs;


    (b) the 4 following income years.

    Note:

    The effect of this section is modified when the life insurance business of a life insurance company is transferred to another life insurance company: see section 320-340 .


    320-30(2)    
    If:


    (a) the *value of the company ' s liabilities at the end of 30 June 2000 under its *continuous disability policies (being the value used by the company for the purposes of its *income tax return);

    exceeds


    (b) the value of the company ' s liabilities at the end of 30 June 2000 under the *net risk components of its continuous disability policies as calculated under subsection 320-85(4) ;

    the company ' s assessable income for each relevant income year includes an amount equal to one-fifth of the excess.


    320-30(3)    
    However, if a *life insurance company ceases in a relevant income year to carry on *life insurance business or to have any liabilities under the *net risk components of *continuous disability policies, subsection (2) does not apply for that income year or any future income years but the company ' s assessable income for that income year includes so much of the excess referred to in subsection (2) as has not been included in the company ' s assessable income for any previous relevant income years.


    SECTION 320-35  

    320-35   Exempt income  


    These amounts *derived by a *life insurance company are exempt from income tax:


    (a) amounts of *ordinary income and *statutory income accrued before 1 July 1988 that were derived from assets that have become *complying superannuation assets;


    (b) if the company is an *RSA provider - any amounts that are disregarded because of paragraph 320-137(3)(d) or (e) in working out the companys taxable income of the *complying superannuation class.

    SECTION 320-37   Non-assessable non-exempt income  

    320-37(1)    


    These amounts *derived by a *life insurance company are not assessable income and are not *exempt income:


    (a) amounts of ordinary income and statutory income derived from *segregated exempt assets, being income that relates to the period during which the assets were segregated exempt assets;


    (b) amounts of ordinary income and statutory income derived from the *disposal of units in a *pooled superannuation trust;


    (c) if an *Australian/overseas fund or an *overseas fund established by the company derived foreign establishment amounts - the foreign resident proportion of the foreign establishment amounts;


    (d) if the company is a *friendly society:


    (i) amounts derived before 1 July 2001 that are exempt from income tax under section 50-1 ; and

    (ii) amounts derived on or after 1 July 2001 but before 1 January 2003, that are attributable to *income bonds, *funeral policies or *sickness policies; and

    (iii) amounts derived on or after 1 July 2001 but before 1 January 2003, that are attributable to *scholarship plans and would have been exempt from income tax under section 50-1 if they had been received before 1 July 2001; and

    (iv) amounts derived on or after 1 January 2003 that are attributable to income bonds, funeral policies or *sickness policies, that were issued before 1 January 2003; and

    (v) amounts derived on or after 1 January 2003 that are attributable to scholarship plans issued before 1 January 2003 and that would have been exempt from income tax if they had been received before 1 July 2001.
    Note:

    The effect of this section is modified when the life insurance business of a life insurance company is transferred to another life insurance company: see section 320-325 .


    320-37(1A)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), foreign establishment amounts for the *life insurance company means the total amount of assessable income that was *derived in the income year:


    (a) in the course of the carrying on by the company of a business in a foreign country at or through a *permanent establishment of the company in that country; and


    (b) from sources in that or any other foreign country; and


    (c) from assets that:


    (i) are attributable to the permanent establishment; and

    (ii) are held to meet the liabilities under the *life insurance policies issued by the company at or through the permanent establishment.

    320-37(2)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), the foreign resident proportion of the *foreign establishment amounts is the amount worked out using the formula:


      Foreign
    establishment
    amounts
    × Foreign resident foreign
    establishment policy liabilities
    All foreign establishment
    policy liabilities
     

    where:

    all foreign establishment policy liabilities
    means the average value for the income year (as calculated by an *actuary) of the policy liabilities (as defined in the *Valuation Standard) for all *life insurance policies that:


    (a) were included in the class of *life insurance business to which the company ' s *Australian/overseas fund or *overseas fund relates; and


    (b) were issued by the company at or through the *permanent establishment to which the foreign establishment amounts relate.

    foreign resident foreign establishment policy liabilities
    means the average value for the income year (as calculated by an *actuary) of the policy liabilities (as defined in the *Valuation Standard) for all *life insurance policies that:


    (a) are *foreign resident life insurance policies; and


    (b) were issued by the company at or through the *permanent establishment to which the foreign establishment amounts relate.


    SECTION 320-45   Tax treatment of gains or losses from CGT events in relation to complying superannuation assets  

    320-45(1)    


    If a *CGT event happens in respect of a *CGT asset that is a *complying superannuation asset of a *life insurance company, section 295-85 and 295-90 applies for the purpose of working out the amount of any *capital gain or *capital loss that arises from the event.
    Note:

    See Subdivision 295-B of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 for rules about cost base for assets owned by superannuation entities at the end of 30 June 1988.


    320-45(2)    


    Subsection (1) has effect despite anything in Division 230 .

    Subdivision 320-C - Deductions and capital losses  

    Guide to Subdivision 320-C

    SECTION 320-50   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision specifies particular deductions that are available to a life insurance company, specifies particular amounts that a life insurance company cannot deduct and contains provisions relating to a life insurance company ' s capital losses.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    320-55 Deduction for life insurance premiums where liabilities under life insurance policies are to be discharged from complying superannuation assets
    320-60 Deduction for life insurance premiums where liabilities under life insurance policies are to be discharged from segregated exempt assets
    320-65 Deduction for life insurance premiums in respect of life insurance policies that provide for participating or discretionary benefits
    320-70 No deduction for life insurance premiums in respect of certain life insurance policies payable only on death or disability
    320-75 Deduction for ordinary investment policies
    320-80 Deduction for certain claims paid under life insurance policies
    320-85 Deduction for increase in value of liabilities under net risk components of life insurance policies
    320-87 Deduction for assets transferred from or to complying superannuation asset pool
    320-100 Deduction for life insurance premiums paid under certain contracts of reinsurance
    320-105 Deduction for assets transferred to segregated exempt assets
    320-107 (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)
    320-110 Deduction for interest credited to income bonds
    320-111 Deduction for funeral policy payout
    320-112 Deduction for scholarship plan payout
    320-115 No deduction for amounts credited to RSAs
    320-120 Capital losses from assets other than complying superannuation assets or segregated exempt assets
    320-125 Capital losses from complying superannuation assets

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 320-55   Deduction for life insurance premiums where liabilities under life insurance policies are to be discharged from complying superannuation assets  

    320-55(1)    


    This section applies to a *life insurance company in respect of *life insurance policies where the company ' s liabilities under the policies are to be discharged out of *complying superannuation assets.

    320-55(2)    
    The company can deduct:


    (a) the amounts of the *life insurance premiums received in respect of the policies that are transferred to its *complying superannuation assets in the income year;

    less:


    (b) so much of those amounts as relate to the company ' s liability to pay amounts on the death or disability of a person.


    320-55(3)    


    For the purposes of subsection (2) only, the amount of a *life insurance premium that relates to the company ' s liability to pay amounts on the death or disability of a person is:


    (a) if the policy provides for *participating benefits or *discretionary benefits - nil; or


    (b) if paragraph (a) does not apply and the policy states that the whole or a specified part of the premium is payable in respect of such a liability - the whole or that part of the premium, as appropriate; or


    (c) if neither paragraph (a) nor (b) applies:


    (i) if the policy is an *endowment policy - 10% of the premium; or

    (ii) if the policy is a *whole of life policy - 30% of the premium; or

    (iii) otherwise - so much of the premium as an *actuary determines to be attributable to such a liability.

    SECTION 320-60  

    320-60   Deduction for life insurance premiums where liabilities under life insurance policies are to be discharged from segregated exempt assets  


    A *life insurance company can deduct the amounts of *life insurance premiums transferred in the income year to its *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-240(3) .

    SECTION 320-65  

    320-65   Deduction for life insurance premiums in respect of life insurance policies that provide for participating or discretionary benefits  


    A *life insurance company can deduct the amounts of *net premiums received in respect of *life insurance policies (other than *complying superannuation life insurance policies or *exempt life insurance policies) that provide for *participating benefits or *discretionary benefits.

    SECTION 320-70   No deduction for life insurance premiums in respect of certain life insurance policies payable only on death or disability  

    320-70(1)    
    A *life insurance company cannot deduct any part of the amounts of *life insurance premiums received in respect of *life insurance policies under which amounts are to be paid only on the death or disability of a person.

    320-70(2)    


    This section does not apply to:


    (a) *life insurance policies that provide for *participating benefits or *discretionary benefits; or


    (b) funeral policies.


    SECTION 320-75   Deduction for ordinary investment policies  

    320-75(1)    
    This section applies to a *life insurance company in respect of *ordinary investment policies issued by the company.

    320-75(2)    


    The company can deduct, in respect of *life insurance premiums received in the income year for those policies:


    (a) the sum of the *net premiums;

    less:


    (b) so much of the net premiums as an *actuary determines to be attributable to fees and charges charged in that income year.

    320-75(3)    


    In making a determination under subsection (2), an *actuary is to have regard to:


    (a) the changes over the income year in the sum of the *net current termination values of the policies; and


    (b) the movements in those values during the income year.

    320-75(4)    


    In addition, if an *actuary determines that:


    (a) there has been a reduction in the income year (the current year ) of exit fees that were imposed in respect of those policies in a previous income year; and


    (b) the reduction (or a part of it) has not been taken into account in a determination under subsection (2) for the current year;

    the company can deduct so much of that reduction as has not been so taken into account.


    SECTION 320-80   Deduction for certain claims paid under life insurance policies  

    320-80(1)    
    A *life insurance company can deduct the amounts paid in respect of the *risk components of claims paid under *life insurance policies during the income year.

    320-80(2)    
    The risk component of a claim paid under a *life insurance policy is:


    (a) if:


    (i) the policy does not provide for *participating benefits or *discretionary benefits; and

    (ii) the policy is neither an *exempt life insurance policy nor a *funeral policy; and

    (iii) an amount is payable under the policy only on the death or disability of the insured person;
    the amount paid under the policy as a result of the occurrence of that event; or


    (b) if the policy provides for participating benefits or discretionary benefits or is an exempt life insurance policy or a funeral policy - nil; or


    (c) otherwise - the amount paid under the policy as a result of the death or disability of the insured person less the *current termination value of the policy (calculated by an *actuary) immediately before the death, or the occurrence of the disability, of the person.


    320-80(3)    
    Except as provided by subsection (1), a *life insurance company cannot deduct amounts paid in respect of claims under *life insurance policies.

    SECTION 320-85   Deduction for increase in value of liabilities under net risk components of life insurance policies  

    320-85(1)    
    A *life insurance company can deduct the amount (if any) by which the *value, at the end of the income year, of its liabilities under the *net risk components of *life insurance policies exceeds the value, at the end of the previous income year, of those liabilities.

    Note 1:

    Where the value at the end of the income year is less than the value at the end of the previous income year, the difference is included in assessable income: see paragraph 320-15(1)(h) .

    Note 2:

    Section 320-85 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 makes special provision in respect of the calculation of the value of a life insurance company ' s liabilities under the net risk components of life insurance policies at the end of the income year immediately preceding the income year in which 1 July 2000 occurs.


    320-85(2)    


    Subsection (1) does not cover any liabilities under:


    (a) a *life insurance policy that provides for *participating benefits or *discretionary benefits; or


    (b) an *exempt life insurance policy; or


    (ba) (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)


    (c) a *funeral policy.


    320-85(3)    
    If a *life insurance policy is a *disability policy (other than a *continuous disability policy), the value at a particular time of the liabilities of the *life insurance company under the *net risk component of the policy is the *current termination value of the component at that time (calculated by an *actuary).

    320-85(4)    
    In the case of *life insurance policies other than policies to which subsection (3) applies, the value at a particular time of the liabilities of the *life insurance company under the *net risk components of the policies is the amount calculated by an *actuary to be:


    (a) the sum of the policy liabilities (as defined in the *Valuation Standard) in respect of the net risk components of the policies at that time;

    less


    (b) the sum of any cumulative losses (as defined in the Valuation Standard) for the net risk components of the policies at that time.

    SECTION 320-87   Deduction for assets transferred from or to complying superannuation asset pool  

    320-87(1)    


    A *life insurance company can deduct the *transfer values of assets that are transferred by the company in the income year from a *complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or 320-195(3) .

    320-87(2)    


    A *life insurance company can deduct the *transfer values of assets that are transferred by the company in the income year to a *complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(3) or 320-185(1) .

    320-87(3)    
    If an asset (other than money) is transferred by a *life insurance company:


    (a) from a *complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or 320-195(2) or (3); or


    (b) to a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(3) or section 320-185 ;

    the company can deduct the amount (if any) that it can deduct because of section 320-200 .


    SECTION 320-100  

    320-100   Deduction for life insurance premiums paid under certain contracts of reinsurance  


    A *life insurance company can deduct amounts that:


    (a) were paid by the company in the income year as *life insurance premiums under *contracts of reinsurance; and


    (b) do not relate to a risk, or part of a risk, in relation to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies.

    SECTION 320-105   Deduction for assets transferred to segregated exempt assets  

    320-105(1)    
    A *life insurance company can deduct the *transfer values of assets transferred in the income year to the company's *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(3) or 320-240(1) .

    320-105(2)    
    If an asset (other than money) is transferred to a *life insurance company's *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(3) or section 320-240 , the company can deduct the amount (if any) that it can deduct because of section 320-255 .


    320-107   (Repealed) SECTION 320-107 Deductions for increased amount of lump sum death benefit  
    (Repealed by No 81 of 2016)

    SECTION 320-110   Deduction for interest credited to income bonds  

    320-110(1)    
    A *life insurance company that is a *friendly society can deduct interest credited in the income year to the holders of *income bonds issued after 31 December 2002 where the interest accrued on or after 1 January 2003.


    320-110(2)    


    This section has effect despite subsection 320-80(3) .

    SECTION 320-111   Deduction for funeral policy payout  

    320-111(1)    
    A *life insurance company that is a *friendly society can deduct the amount of a benefit provided in the income year by the company under a *funeral policy issued after 31 December 2002, reduced by so much of the sum of the amounts deducted or deductible by the company under section 320-75 for any income year as is reasonably related to the benefit.

    320-111(2)    
    This section has effect despite subsection 320-80(3) .


    SECTION 320-112   Deduction for scholarship plan payout  

    320-112(1)    
    A *life insurance company that is a *friendly society can deduct the amount of a benefit it provides in the income year and on or after 1 January 2003:


    (a) under a *scholarship plan covered by subsection (2) or (3); and


    (b) to, or on behalf of, a person nominated in the plan as a beneficiary whose education is to be helped by the benefit;

    reduced by so much of the sum of the amounts deducted or deductible by the company under section 320-75 for any income year as is reasonably related to the benefit.


    320-112(2)    
    This subsection covers a *scholarship plan issued by the *life insurance company after 31 December 2002.

    320-112(3)    
    This subsection covers a *scholarship plan if:


    (a) the plan was issued by the *life insurance company before 1 January 2003; and


    (b) no amount received by the company on or after 1 January 2003 and attributable to the plan is *non-assessable non-exempt income of the company under paragraph 320-37(1)(d) .


    320-112(4)    
    This section has effect despite subsection 320-80(3) .


    SECTION 320-115  

    320-115   No deduction for amounts credited to RSAs  


    A *life insurance company that is an *RSA provider cannot deduct amounts credited to *RSAs.

    SECTION 320-120   Capital losses from assets other than complying superannuation assets or segregated exempt assets  

    320-120(1)    


    This section applies to assets ( ordinary assets ) of a *life insurance company other than:


    (a) *complying superannuation assets; or


    (b) *segregated exempt assets.


    320-120(2)    
    In working out a *life insurance company ' s *net capital gain or *net capital loss for the income year, *capital losses from ordinary assets can be used only to reduce *capital gains from ordinary assets.

    320-120(3)    
    If some or all of a *capital loss from an ordinary asset cannot be applied in an income year, the unapplied amount can be applied in the next income year in which the company ' s *capital gains from ordinary assets exceed the company ' s capital losses (if any) from ordinary assets.

    320-120(4)    
    If the company has 2 or more unapplied *net capital losses from ordinary assets, the company must apply them in the order in which they were made.

    Note:

    This section affects the amount of assessable income that is to be taken into account in working out a taxable income or tax loss of the ordinary class: see sections 320-139 and 320-143 .


    SECTION 320-125   Capital losses from complying superannuation assets  

    320-125(1)    


    In working out a *life insurance company ' s *net capital gain or *net capital loss for the income year, *capital losses from *complying superannuation assets can be used only to reduce *capital gains from complying superannuation assets.

    320-125(2)    


    If some or all of a *capital loss from a *complying superannuation asset cannot be applied in an income year, the unapplied amount can be applied in the next income year in which the company ' s *capital gains from *complying superannuation assets exceed the company ' s capital losses (if any) from complying superannuation assets.

    320-125(3)    


    If the company has 2 or more unapplied *net capital losses from *complying superannuation assets, the company must apply them in the order in which they were made.
    Note:

    This section affects the amount of assessable income that is to be taken into account in working out a taxable income or tax loss of the complying superannuation class: see sections 320-137 and 320-141 .


    Subdivision 320-D - Income tax, taxable income and tax loss of life insurance companies  

    Guide to Subdivision 320-D

    SECTION 320-130   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision explains how a life insurance company ' s income tax is worked out.

    For that purpose, this Subdivision enables a life insurance company to have taxable incomes and tax losses of the following classes:

  • • the complying superannuation class;
  • • the ordinary class.
  • SECTION 320-131   Overview of Subdivision  


    Working out the income tax

    320-131(1)    


    In any income year, a life insurance company can have:


    (a) a taxable income of the complying superannuation class and/or a taxable income of the ordinary class; or


    (b) a tax loss of the complying superannuation class and/or a tax loss of the ordinary class; or


    (c) a taxable income of one class and a tax loss of the other class.

    Note:

    The taxable incomes mentioned in paragraph (a) are taxed at different rates: see section 23A of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 .


    320-131(2)    
    Taxable incomes and tax losses of both classes are taken into account in working out the amount of income tax that the company has to pay for the income year (see section 320-134 ). That amount is then taken to be the income tax on the company's taxable income for that income year.

    Working out taxable income and tax loss of each class

    320-131(3)    
    In general, the rules in this Act about working out a company's taxable income or tax loss, or deducting a company's tax loss, apply to a life insurance company in relation to:


    (a) working out a taxable income or tax loss of a particular class; or


    (b) deducting a tax loss of a particular class.

    320-131(4)    
    However, that general rule is subject to the following:


    (a) sections 320-137 to 320-143 , which allocate amounts of incomes and deductions for the purposes of working out a taxable income or tax loss of a particular class;


    (b) subsections 320-141(2) and 320-143(2) , which provide that tax losses of a particular class can be deducted only from incomes in respect of that class;


    (c) section 320-149 , which sets out the provisions in this Act that have effect only in relation to a taxable income or tax loss of the ordinary class.




    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    General rules
    320-133 Object of Subdivision
    320-134 Income tax of a life insurance company
    320-135 Taxable income and tax loss of each of the 2 classes
    Taxable income and tax loss of life insurance companies
    320-137 Taxable income - complying superannuation class
    320-139 Taxable income - ordinary class
    320-141 Tax loss - complying superannuation class
    320-143Tax loss - ordinary class
    320-149 Provisions that apply only in relation to the ordinary class

    General rules

    SECTION 320-133   Object of Subdivision  

    320-133(1)    
    The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that:


    (a) for the purposes of working out the amount of a *life insurance company ' s income tax for an income year:


    (i) the company ' s taxable income or *tax loss of one *class is worked out separately from its taxable income or tax loss of the other class; and

    (ii) the company ' s tax losses of a particular class can be deducted only from its incomes in respect of that class; and


    (b) for the purposes of this Act, that amount of income tax is treated as the company ' s income tax on its taxable income for that income year.

    320-133(2)    


    In subsection (1), a class means the *complying superannuation class or the *ordinary class.

    SECTION 320-134   Income tax of a life insurance company  


    Working out the income tax

    320-134(1)    
    Work out a *life insurance company ' s income tax for an income year under section 4-10 as follows:


    (a) apply steps 1 and 2 of the method statement in subsection 4-10(3) to work out separately the amount that would be the company ' s basic income tax liability for its taxable income of each *class for that year;


    (b) treat the sum of these amounts as the company ' s basic income tax liability for that year and apply step 4 of the method statement to subtract its *tax offsets from that sum.

    320-134(2)    
    For the purposes of this Act:


    (a) the income tax worked out in accordance with subsection (1) is taken to be the company' s income tax on its taxable income for the income year; and


    (b) except as provided by subsection (1) of this section and sections 320-135 to 320-149 , the company ' s taxable income for that year is taken to be equal to the sum of the company ' s taxable incomes of the 2 *classes for that year.

    Note:

    This means that there is only one assessment in respect of the company ' s taxable income for the income year and that the income tax constitutes only one debt to the Commonwealth.



    Working out the income tax on certain assumptions

    320-134(3)    
    Subsection (1) also has effect in relation to working out an amount that would be the company ' s income tax if certain assumptions were made. It has that effect in the same way as it has effect in relation to working out the company ' s income tax under section 4-10 (except in regard to those assumptions).

    Note:

    This means, for example, subsection (1) also has effect in relation to working out the amount of a life insurance company ' s income tax on the basis of the tax offset priority rules in Division 63 .


    SECTION 320-135   Taxable income and tax loss of each of the 2 classes  

    320-135(1)    
    Subject to the other provisions in this Subdivision:


    (a) this Act has effect for a *life insurance company in relation to working out a taxable income of a particular *class in the same way as it has effect in relation to working out a taxable income of any other company; and


    (b) this Act has effect for a life insurance company in relation to working out or deducting a *tax loss of a particular class in the same way as it has effect in relation to working out or deducting a tax loss of any other company.

    320-135(2)    
    Sections 320-137 to 320-143 have effect in addition to other provisions in this Act that relate to working out a taxable income or *tax loss, or deducting a tax loss (as appropriate).

    320-135(3)    
    Nothing in this Subdivision prevents a *life insurance company from:


    (a) having taxable incomes, or *tax losses, of both *classes for the same income year; or


    (b) having a taxable income of one class and a tax loss of the other class for the same income year.

    Note:

    In certain circumstances, a life insurance company can have a taxable income and a tax loss of the same class in an income year (see Subdivision 165-B as it has effect under this Subdivision).


    Taxable income and tax loss of life insurance companies

    SECTION 320-137   Taxable income - complying superannuation class  

    320-137(1)    


    A *life insurance company ' s taxable income of the complying superannuation class is a taxable income worked out under this Act on the basis of only:


    (a) assessable income of the company that is covered by subsection (2); and


    (b) deductions of the company that are covered by subsection (4); and


    (c) *tax losses of the company that are of the *complying superannuation class.

    Note:

    For the usual way of working out a taxable income: see subsection 4-15(1) . For other ways of working out a taxable income: see subsection 4-15(2) .



    Relevant assessable income

    320-137(2)    
    This subsection covers the following assessable income of a *life insurance company:


    (a) assessable income *derived by the company from the investment of its *complying superannuation assets in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets;


    (b) so much of the amount that is included in the company ' s assessable income because of paragraph 320-15(1)(a) as is equal to the total *transfer value of assets transferred in the income year by the company to a *complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-185(3) ;


    (c) if an asset (other than money) is transferred by the company from a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or 320-195(2) or (3) - amounts that are included in the company ' s assessable income because of section 320-200 ;


    (d) amounts that are included in the company ' s assessable income because of paragraph 320-15(1)(db) , (i) or (j);


    (e) amounts that are included in the company ' s assessable income under subsection 115-280(4) ;


    (f) subject to subsection (3), so much of the company ' s assessable income for the income year as is:


    (i) the total amount credited during that year to the *RSAs provided by the company; less

    (ii) the total amount debited during that year from the RSAs.


    Amounts disregarded for RSAs

    320-137(3)    
    In working out the amount mentioned in paragraph (2)(f), disregard the following amounts:


    (a) contributions credited to the *RSAs that would not be included in the company ' s assessable income under Subdivision 295-C if that Subdivision applied to the company;


    (b) amounts debited from the RSAs that are benefits paid to, or in respect of, the holders of the RSAs;


    (c) income tax debited from the RSAs;


    (d) if an *annuity covered by subsection (3A) was paid from an RSA in respect of the whole of the income year, or the whole of the part of the income year in which the RSA existed, the total amount credited to the RSA during the income year;


    (e) if an annuity covered by subsection (3A) was paid from an RSA in respect of a part, but not the whole, of the portion of the income year in which the RSA existed, so much of the total amount credited to the RSA during the income year as is equal to the amount worked out using the following formula:


      Total amount credited to the *RSA during the income year × Number of days in the part of the income year in which the *annuity covered by subsection (3A) was paid  
      Number of days in the income year in which the RSA existed  


    320-137(3A)    


    An *annuity is covered by this subsection if it is a *superannuation income stream that is in the *retirement phase.

    Relevant deductions

    320-137(4)    
    This subsection covers the following deductions of a *life insurance company:


    (a) amounts that the company can deduct under section 320-55 ;


    (b) amounts that the company can deduct (other than any *tax losses) in respect of the investment of the company ' s *complying superannuation assets in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets;


    (c) amounts that the company can deduct under section 320-87 because of subsection (1) or paragraph (3)(a) of that section;


    (d) amounts that the company can deduct under subsection 115-280(1) .


    (e) (Repealed by No 62 of 2011)


    SECTION 320-139  

    320-139   Taxable income - ordinary class  


    A *life insurance company's taxable income of the ordinary class is a taxable income worked out under this Act on the basis of only:


    (a) assessable income of the company that is not covered by subsection 320-137(2) ; and


    (b) amounts (other than *tax losses) that the company can deduct and are not covered by subsection 320-137(4) ; and


    (c) tax losses of the company that are of the *ordinary class.

    Note:

    For the usual way of working out a taxable income: see subsection 4-15(1) . For other ways of working out a taxable income: see subsection 4-15(2) .

    SECTION 320-141   Tax loss - complying superannuation class  


    Working out a tax loss of the complying superannuation class

    320-141(1)    


    A *life insurance company ' s *tax loss of the complying superannuation class is a tax loss worked out under this Act on the basis of only:


    (a) assessable income of the company that is covered by subsection 320-137(2) ; and


    (b) deductions of the company that are covered by subsection 320-137(4) ; and


    (c) *net exempt income of the company that is attributable to *exempt income *derived:


    (i) from the company ' s *complying superannuation assets; and

    (ii) in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets.
    Note:

    For the usual way of working out a tax loss: see section 36-10 . For other ways of working out a tax loss: see section 36-25 .



    Deducting a tax loss of the complying superannuation class

    320-141(2)    


    A *life insurance company ' s *tax loss of the complying superannuation class can be deducted under this Act only from:


    (a) *net exempt income of the company that is attributable to *exempt income *derived:


    (i) from the company ' s *complying superannuation assets; and

    (ii) in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets; and


    (b) assessable income of the company that is covered by subsection 320-137(2) , reduced by deductions of the company that are covered by subsection 320-137(4) .

    Note:

    For the usual way of deducting a tax loss: see section 36-17 . For other ways of deducting a tax loss: see section 36-25 .


    SECTION 320-143   Tax loss - ordinary class  


    Working out a tax loss of the ordinary class

    320-143(1)    
    A *life insurance company ' s *tax loss of the ordinary class is a tax loss worked out under this Act on the basis of only:


    (a) assessable income of the company that is not covered by subsection 320-137(2) ; and


    (b) amounts (other than tax losses) that the company can deduct and are not covered by subsection 320-137(4) ; and


    (c) *net exempt income of the company that is not attributable to *exempt income *derived:


    (i) from the company ' s *complying superannuation assets; and

    (ii) in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets.
    Note:

    For the usual way of working out a tax loss: see section 36-10 . For other ways of working out a tax loss: see section 36-25 .



    Deducting a tax loss of the ordinary class

    320-143(2)    
    A *life insurance company ' s *tax loss of the ordinary class can be deducted under this Act only from:


    (a) *net exempt income of the company that is not attributable to *exempt income *derived:


    (i) from the company ' s *complying superannuation assets; and

    (ii) in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets; and


    (b) assessable income of the company that is not covered by subsection 320-137(2) , reduced by amounts (other than tax losses) that the company can deduct and are not covered by subsection 320-137(4) .

    Note:

    For the usual way of deducting a tax loss: see section 36-17 . For other ways of deducting a tax loss: see section 36-25 .


    SECTION 320-149   Provisions that apply only in relation to the ordinary class  

    320-149(1)    
    The provisions covered by subsection (2) :

    (a)    have effect as provided by section 320-135 in relation to a *life insurance company ' s taxable income, or *tax loss, of the *ordinary class; but

    (b)    

    have no effect in relation to the company ' s taxable income, or tax loss, of the *complying superannuation class.

    320-149(2)    


    This subsection covers these provisions:

    (a)    section 36-55 ;

    (aa)    

    Division 160 (Corporate loss carry back tax offset for 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 for businesses with turnover under $5 billion);

    (b)    Division 165 (except Subdivision 165-CD ).

    Example 1:

    A life insurance company that has an amount of excess franking offsets will need to recalculate its tax loss of the ordinary class under section 36-55 . But its tax loss of the complying superannuation class is unaffected by that section.

    Example 2:

    A life insurance company that fails to meet the relevant tests of Division 165 will need to recalculate the ordinary class of its taxable income and tax loss under Subdivision 165-B . But the complying superannuation class of its taxable income and tax loss are unaffected by that Subdivision.


    Subdivision 320-E - No-TFN contributions of life insurance companies that are RSA providers  

    Guide to Subdivision 320-E

    SECTION 320-150   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision makes Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to life insurance companies that are RSA providers.

    The consequence is that those life insurance companies are liable to pay tax on no-TFN contributions income under Subdivision 295-I . They may also be entitled to a tax offset under Subdivision 295-J .


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    320-155 Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to companies that are RSA providers

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 320-155   Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to companies that are RSA providers  

    320-155(1)    
    Despite subsection 295-5(4) , Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to a *life insurance company that is an *RSA provider.

    320-155(2)    
    For the purposes of the application of those Subdivisions to a *life insurance company, a contribution included in the assessable income of the company under paragraph 320-15(1)(l) is taken to have been included under Subdivision 295-C .

    Subdivision 320-F - Complying superannuation asset pool  

    Guide to Subdivision 320-F

    SECTION 320-165   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision explains how a life insurance company can segregate assets (to be known as a complying superannuation asset pool ) to be used for the sole purpose of discharging its complying superannuation liabilities.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    320-170 Establishment of complying superannuation asset pool
    320-175 Valuations of complying superannuation assets and complying superannuation liabilities for each valuation time
    320-180 Consequences of a valuation under section 320-175
    320-185 Transfer of assets to complying superannuation asset pool otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-175
    320-190 Complying superannuation liabilities
    320-195 Transfer of assets and payment of amounts from a complying superannuation asset pool otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-175
    320-200 Consequences of transfer of assets to or from complying superannuation asset pool
    320-205 (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 320-170   Establishment of complying superannuation asset pool  

    320-170(1)    


    A *life insurance company may, on or after 1 July 2000, segregate in accordance with subsections (2) and (3) any of its assets for the sole purpose of discharging its *complying superannuation liabilities out of those assets.

    320-170(1A)    


    Except as provided by section 320-170 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 , an asset is taken not to be included in the *complying superannuation assets unless the whole of the asset is included among those assets.

    320-170(2)    


    The assets segregated must, at the time of the segregation, be a representative sample of all the company ' s assets that support its *complying superannuation liabilities immediately before the segregation.

    320-170(3)    


    The assets segregated must have, as at the time of the segregation, a total *transfer value that does not exceed the sum of:


    (a) the company ' s *complying superannuation liabilities as at that time; and


    (b) any reasonable provision made by the company at that time in its accounts for liability for income tax in respect of the assets segregated.


    320-170(4)    
    A *life insurance company that segregates assets as mentioned in subsections (1) to (3) at a time after 1 July 2000 but before 1 October 2000 is taken to have segregated those assets in accordance with those subsections on 1 July 2000.

    320-170(5)    


    If a segregation of assets is made in accordance with the above subsections, the company must use the segregated assets, and any other assets afterwards included among the segregated assets, only for the purpose of discharging its *complyingsuperannuation liabilities.

    320-170(6)    


    The assets from time to time segregated are together to be known as the complying superannuation asset pool and each asset from time to time included among those assets is to be known as a complying superannuation asset .

    320-170(7)    
    In this Subdivision:


    (a) a reference to the transfer of an asset to, or from, the *complying superannuation asset pool:


    (i) is a reference to the inclusion of the asset among the segregated assets, or the exclusion of an asset from the segregated assets, as the case may be; and

    (ii) includes a reference to the transfer of money to, or from, the complying superannuation asset pool, as the case may be; and


    (b) if an asset transferred to or from the complying superannuation asset pool is money, a reference to the *transfer value of the asset transferred is a reference to the amount of the money.


    SECTION 320-175   Valuations of complying superannuation assets and complying superannuation liabilities for each valuation time  

    320-175(1)    


    A *life insurance company that has established a *complying superannuation asset pool must cause the following amounts to be calculated within the period of 60 days starting immediately after each *valuation time:


    (a) the total *transfer value of the company ' s *complying superannuation assets as at the valuation time;


    (b) the company ' s *complying superannuation liabilities as at the valuation time.

    Note:

    The time when a life insurance company joins or leaves a consolidated group is also a valuation time: see section 713-525 .


    320-175(2)    
    These are the valuation times :


    (a) the end of the income year in which the *complying superannuation asset pool was established;


    (b) the end of each later income year.

    Note 1:

    The time when a life insurance company joins or leaves a consolidated group is also a valuation time: see sections 713-525 and 713-585 .

    Note 2:

    A life insurance company that fails to comply with this section is liable to an administrative penalty: see section 288-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    SECTION 320-180   Consequences of a valuation under section 320-175  


    Transfer from the complying superannuation asset pool

    320-180(1)    


    If the total *transfer value of the company ' s *complying superannuation assets as at a *valuation time exceeds the sum of:


    (a) the company ' s *complying superannuation liabilities as at that time; and


    (b) any reasonable provision made by the company at that time in its accounts for liability for income tax in respect of those assets;

    the company must transfer, from the *complying superannuation asset pool, assets of any kind having a total transfer value equal to the excess.


    320-180(2)    
    A transfer under subsection (1) must be made within the period of 30 days starting immediately after:


    (a) the day on which the total *transfer value and the *complying superannuation liabilities (as at the *valuation time) were calculated; or


    (b) if those amounts were calculated on different days - the later of those days.

    The transfer, once made, is taken to have been made at the valuation time (whether or not the transfer is made within those 30 days).

    Note:

    A life insurance company that fails to comply with subsections (1) and (2) is liable to an administrative penalty: see section 288-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .



    Transfer to the complying superannuation asset pool

    320-180(3)    


    If the total *transfer value of the company ' s *complying superannuation assets as at a *valuation time is less than the sum of:


    (a) the company ' s *complying superannuation liabilities as at that time; and


    (b) any reasonable provision made by the company at that time in its accounts for liability for income tax in respect of those assets;

    the company can transfer, to the *complying superannuation asset pool, assets of any kind having a total transfer value not exceeding the difference.


    320-180(4)    
    A transfer under subsection (3) is taken to have been made at the *valuation time if it is made within the period of 30 days starting immediately after:


    (a) the day on which the total *transfer value and the *complying superannuation liabilities (as at the valuation time) were calculated; or


    (b) if those amounts were calculated on different days - the later of those days.


    SECTION 320-185   Transfer of assets to complying superannuation asset pool otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-175  

    320-185(1)    


    If a *life insurance company determines, at a time other than a *valuation time, that the total *transfer value of the company ' s *complying superannuation assets as at that time is less than the sum of:


    (a) the company ' s *complying superannuation liabilities as at that time; and


    (b) any reasonable provision made by the company at that time in its accounts for liability for income tax in respect of those assets;

    the company can transfer, to the *complying superannuation asset pool, assets of any kind having a total transfer value not exceeding the difference.


    320-185(2)    


    A *life insurance company can at any time transfer an asset of any kind to a *complying superannuation asset pool in exchange for an amount of money equal to the *transfer value of the asset at the time of the transfer.

    320-185(3)    


    A *life insurance company can transfer to a *complying superannuation asset pool in an income year assets of any kind having a total *transfer value not exceeding the total amount of the *life insurance premiums paid to the company in that income year for the purchase of *complying superannuation life insurance policies.

    320-185(4)    


    Except as provided by this section and subsections 320-180(3) and 320-250(1A) , a *life insurance company cannot transfer an asset to a *complying superannuation asset pool.

    SECTION 320-190   Complying superannuation liabilities  

    320-190(1)    


    The amount of the*complying superannuation liabilities of a *life insurance company is to be worked out in accordance with subsection (2) in respect only of *life insurance policies issued by the company:


    (a) that are *complying superannuation life insurance policies; and


    (b) the liabilities under which are to be discharged out of the company ' s *complying superannuation assets.


    320-190(2)    


    The amount of the complying superannuation liabilities of a *life insurance company at a particular time is the sum of the following amounts at that time, as calculated by an *actuary:


    (a) for policies providing for *participating benefits or *discretionary benefits:


    (i) the values of supporting assets, as defined in the *Valuation Standard; and

    (ii) the *policy owners ' retained profits;


    (b) for other policies - the *current termination values.


    SECTION 320-195   Transfer of assets and payment of amounts from a complying superannuation asset pool otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-175  

    320-195(1)    


    If:


    (a) a *life insurance policy issued by a *life insurance company becomes an *exempt life insurance policy; and


    (b) immediately before the policy became an exempt life insurance policy, the policy was a policy referred to in subsection 320-190(1) ;

    the company can transfer from a *complying superannuation asset pool, to its *segregated exempt assets, assets of any kind whose total *transfer value does not exceed the company ' s liabilities in respect of the policy.


    320-195(2)    


    A *life insurance company can at any time transfer an asset from a *complying superannuation asset pool in exchange for an amount of money equal to the *transfer value of the asset at the time of the transfer.

    320-195(3)    


    If a *life insurance company:


    (a) imposes any fees or charges in respect of *complying superannuation assets; or


    (b) imposes any fees or charges in respect of *complying superannuation life insurance policies other than policies:


    (i) that provide *superannuation death benefits, *disability superannuation benefits or temporary disability benefits of a kind referred to in paragraph 295-460(c) , that are *participating benefits; and

    (ii) the liabilities under which are to be discharged out of the company ' s *complying superannuation asset pool; or


    (c) determines, at a time other than a *valuation time, that the total *transfer value of the company ' s complying superannuation assets as at that time exceeds the sum of:


    (i) the company ' s *complying superannuation liabilities at that time; and

    (ii) any reasonable provision made by the company at that time in its accounts for liability for income tax in respect of those assets;

    the company must, when the fees or charges are imposed or the excess is determined, as the case may be, transfer, from the *complying superannuation asset pool, assets havinga total transfer value equal to the fees, charges or excess, as the case may be.


    320-195(4)    


    If:


    (a) any liabilities arise for the discharge of which a *life insurance company ' s *complying superannuation asset pool is established; or


    (b) any expenses are incurred by a life insurance company directly in respect of *complying superannuation assets in relation to a period during which the assets are complying superannuation assets; or


    (c) any liabilities to pay *PAYG instalments, or income tax, that are attributable to the company ' s *complying superannuation assets;

    the life insurance company must pay, from the complying superannuation asset pool, any amounts required to discharge the liabilities, or amounts equal to the expenses (as appropriate).


    SECTION 320-200   Consequences of transfer of assets to or from complying superannuation asset pool  

    320-200(1)    


    This section applies if:


    (a) an asset (other than money) is transferred from a *complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or 320-195(2) or (3); or


    (b) an asset (other than money) is transferred to a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(3) or section 320-185 .


    320-200(2)    
    In determining:


    (a) for the purposes of this Act (other than Parts 3-1 and 3-3) whether an amount is included in, or can be deducted from, the assessable income of a *life insurance company in respect of the transfer of the asset; or


    (b) for the purposes of Parts 3-1 and 3-3:


    (i) whether the company made a *capital gain in respect of the transfer of the asset; or

    (ii) whether the company made a *capital loss in respect of the transfer of the asset;

    the company is taken:


    (c) to have sold, immediately before the transfer, the asset transferred for a consideration equal to its *market value; and


    (d) to have purchased the asset again at the time of the transfer for a consideration equal to its market value.

    320-200(2A)    


    Without limiting subsection (2), where the asset transferred is a *depreciating asset, Division 40 has effect for the company as if:


    (a) in relation to the sale of the asset that is taken to have occurred under paragraph (2)(c):


    (i) the sale were a *balancing adjustment event; and

    (ii) the *termination value of the asset for that event were equal to the consideration for the sale under that paragraph; and

    (iii) the company had stopped *holding the asset at the time of the sale; and


    (b) in relation to the purchase of the asset that is taken to have occurred under paragraph (2)(d):


    (i) the company had only begun to hold the asset after the purchase; and

    (ii) the first element of the asset ' s *cost were equal to the consideration for the purchase under that paragraph; and

    (iii) the company had acquired the asset from an *associate of the company.
    Note:

    This means that, amongst other things, as a result of the transfer:

  • • the asset ' s cost for the purposes of working out a deduction under Division 40 is reset; and
  • • the company ' s assessable income might be adjusted under section 40-285 .

  • 320-200(3)    


    If, apart from this subsection and section 320-55 , a *life insurance company could deduct an amount or make a *capital loss as a result of a transfer of an asset to or from its *complying superannuation asset pool, the deduction or capital loss is disregarded until:


    (a) the asset ceases to exist; or


    (b) the asset, or a greater than 50% interest in it, is *acquired by an entity other than an entity that is an *associate of the company immediately after the transfer.


    320-200(4)    


    Subsection (3) does not apply in relation to an amount that the company can deduct under a provision in Division 40 .

    320-205   (Repealed) SECTION 320-205 What is the virtual PST component  
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    Subdivision 320-G - Specified roll-over component of complying superannuation class  

    320-210   (Repealed) SECTION 320-210 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    320-215   (Repealed) SECTION 320-215 What is the specified roll-over component  
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    Subdivision 320-H - Segregation of assets to discharge exempt life insurance policy liabilities  

    SECTION 320-220   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision explains how a life insurance company can segregate assets to be used for the sole purpose of discharging its liabilities under life insurance policies where the income derived by the company from those policies is exempt from income tax.

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 320-225   Segregation of assets for purpose of discharging exempt life insurance policy liabilities  

    320-225(1)    
    A *life insurance company may, on or after 1 July 2000, segregate in accordance with subsections (2) and (3) any of its assets for the sole purpose of discharging its *exempt life insurance policy liabilities out of those assets.

    Note:

    Section 320-225 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides that a life insurance company may transfer a part of an asset to its segregated exempt assets before 1 October 2000.


    320-225(1A)    
    Except as provided by section 320-225 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 , an asset is taken not to be included in the segregated assets under this Subdivision unless the whole of the asset is included among the segregated assets.

    320-225(2)    
    The assets segregated must, at the time of the segregation, be a representative sample of all the company ' s assets that support its *exempt life insurance policy liabilities immediately before the segregation.

    320-225(3)    


    The assets segregated must have, as at the time of the segregation, a total *transfer value that does not exceed the amount of the company ' s *exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at that time.

    320-225(4)    
    A *life insurance company that segregates assets as mentioned in subsections (1) to (3) at a time after 1 July 2000 but before 1 October 2000 is taken to have segregated those assets in accordance with those subsections on 1 July 2000.

    320-225(5)    
    If a segregation of assets is made in accordance with the above subsections, the company must use the *segregated exempt assets, and any other assets afterwards included among the segregated assets, only for the purpose of discharging its *exempt life insurance policy liabilities.

    320-225(6)    
    In this Subdivision:


    (a) a reference to the transfer of an asset to, or from, a *life insurance company ' s *segregated exempt assets:


    (i) is a reference to the inclusion of an asset among the segregated exempt assets, or the exclusion of an asset from the segregated exempt assets, as the case may be; and

    (ii) includes a reference to the transfer of money to, or from, those assets, as the case may be; and


    (b) if an asset transferred to or from those assets is money, a reference to the *transfer value of the asset transferred is a reference to the amount of the money.


    SECTION 320-230   Valuations of segregated exempt assets and exempt life insurance policy liabilities for each valuation time  

    320-230(1)    
    A *life insurance company that has segregated any of its assets in accordance with section 320-225 must cause the following amounts to be calculated within the period of 60 days starting immediately after each *valuation time:


    (a) the total *transfer value of the company ' s *segregated exempt assets as at the valuation time;


    (b) the amount of the company ' s *exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at the valuation time.

    320-230(2)    
    These are the valuation times :


    (a) the end of the income year in which the segregation occurred;


    (b) the end of each later income year.

    Note 1:

    The time when a life insurance company joins or leaves a consolidated group is also a valuation time: see sections 713-525 and 713-585 .

    Note 2:

    A life insurance company that fails to comply with this section is liable to an administrative penalty: see section 288-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    SECTION 320-235   Consequences of a valuation under section 320-230  


    Transfer from the segregated exempt assets

    320-235(1)    
    If:


    (a) the total *transfer value of the company ' s *segregated exempt assets as at a *valuation time;

    exceeds


    (b) the amount of the company ' s *exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at that time;

    the company must transfer, from the segregated exempt assets, assets of any kind having a total transfer value equal to the excess.


    320-235(2)    
    A transfer under subsection (1) must be made within the period of 30 days starting immediately after:


    (a) the day on which the total *transfer value and the *exempt life insurance policy liabilities (as at the *valuation time) were calculated; or


    (b) if those amounts were calculated on different days - the later of those days.

    The transfer, once made, is taken to have been made at the valuation time (whether or not the transfer is made within those 30 days).

    Note:

    A life insurance company that fails to comply with subsections (1) and (2) is liable to an administrative penalty: see section 288-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .



    Transfer to the segregated exempt assets

    320-235(3)    
    If:


    (a) the total *transfer value of the company ' s *segregated exempt assets as at a *valuation time;

    is less than


    (b) the amount of the company ' s *exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at that time;

    the company can transfer, to the segregated exempt assets, assets of any kind having a total transfer value not exceeding the difference.


    320-235(4)    
    A transfer under subsection (3) is taken to have been made at the *valuation time if it is made within the period of 30 days starting immediately after:


    (a) the day on which the total *transfer value and the *exempt life insurance policy liabilities (as at the valuation time) were calculated; or


    (b) if those amounts were calculated on different days - the later of those days.

    SECTION 320-240   Transfer of assets to segregated exempt assets otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-230  

    320-240(1)    


    If a *life insurance company determines, at a time other than a *valuation time, that:


    (a) the total *transfer value of the company's *segregated exempt assets as at that time;

    is less than


    (b) the company's *exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at that time;

    the company can transfer, to the segregated exempt assets, assets of any kind having a total transfer value not exceeding the difference.


    320-240(2)    
    A *life insurance company can at any time transfer an asset of any kind to its *segregated exempt assets in exchange for an amount of money equal to the *transfer value of the asset at the time of the transfer.

    320-240(3)    
    A *life insurance company can transfer, to its *segregated exempt assets in an income year, assets of any kind having a total *transfer value not exceeding the total amount of the *life insurance premiums paid to the company in that income year for the purchase of *exempt life insurance policies.

    320-240(4)    


    Except as provided by this section and subsections 320-195(1) and 320-235(3) , a *life insurance company cannot transfer an asset to its *segregated exempt assets.

    SECTION 320-245   Exempt life insurance policy liabilities  

    320-245(1)    
    The amount of the *exempt life insurance policy liabilities of a *life insurance company is to be worked out in accordance with subsection (2) in respect only of *life insurance policies issued by the company:


    (a) that are *exempt life insurance policies; and


    (b) the liabilities under which are to be discharged out of the company's *segregated exempt assets.

    320-245(2)    
    The amount of the exempt life insurance policy liabilities of a *life insurance company at a particular time is the sum of the following amounts at that time, as calculated by an *actuary:


    (a) for policies providing for allocated benefits (other than *participating benefits or *discretionary benefits) - the *current termination values;


    (b) for policies providing for participating benefits or discretionary benefits:


    (i) the values of supporting assets, as defined in the *Valuation Standard; and

    (ii) the *policy owner's retained profits;


    (c) for other policies - the policy liabilities, as defined in the Valuation Standard.

    320-245(3)    
    An *exempt life insurance policy provides for allocated benefits if:


    (a) the policy:


    (i) is held by the trustee of a *complying superannuation fund; and

    (ii) (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    (iii) provides for an *allocated pension; or


    (b) the policy:


    (i) is held by a *life insurance company other than the life insurance company that issued the policy; and

    (ii) is a *segregated exempt asset of the life insurance company that issued the policy; and

    (iii) provides for an allocated pension; or


    (c) the policy provides for an *allocated annuity.


    SECTION 320-246   Exempt life insurance policy  

    320-246(1)    
    An exempt life insurance policy is a *life insurance policy (other than an *RSA):


    (a) that is held by the trustee of a *complying superannuation fund and provides solely for the discharge of the fund ' s liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *superannuation income stream benefits that are currently *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund; or


    (b) that is held by the trustee of a *pooled superannuation trust, where:


    (i) the policy provides solely for the discharge of the liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *superannuation income stream benefits that are currently *RP superannuation income stream benefits of complying superannuation funds; and

    (ii) the funds are unit holders of the trust; or


    (c) that is held by another *life insurance company and is a *segregated exempt asset of that other company; or


    (d) that is held by the trustee of a *constitutionally protected fund; or


    (e) that provides for an *immediate annuity that:


    (i) was purchased on or before 9 December 1987; or

    (ii) is a *superannuation income stream that is in the *retirement phase; or

    (iii) satisfies whichever of the conditions in subsection (3) are applicable; or


    (ea) that provides for an *annuity that:


    (i) is not an *immediate annuity; and

    (ii) is a superannuation income stream that is in the retirement phase; or


    (f) that provides for either or both of the following:


    (i) a *personal injury annuity, payments of which are exempt from income tax under Division 54 ;

    (ii) a *personal injury lump sum, payment of which is exempt from income tax under Division 54 .
    Note:

    A part of a life insurance policy may be taken to be an exempt life insurance policy under section 320-247 .


    320-246(2)    
    (Repealed by No 15 of 2007)


    320-246(3)    


    The following table sets out the conditions mentioned in subparagraph (1)(e)(iii):


    Annuity conditions
    Item Column 1
    The condition in column 2 applies in the following circumstances …
    Column 2
    The condition is that …
    1 there is a residual capital value (within the meaning of section 27H of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) in relation to the * immediate annuity. the contract under which the annuity is payable does not permit the residual capital value to exceed the annuity ' s purchase price (within the meaning of that section).
    2 the contract under which the * immediate annuity is payable provides that the annuity is payable until the end of a term of years certain. the contract does not permit the total of the amounts paid for the annuity ' s commutation (whether in whole or in part) to exceed the annuity ' s purchase price (within the meaning of that section), reduced by the sum of the deductible amounts excluded from assessable income under that section.
    3 the contract under which the * immediate annuity is payable:
    (a) provides that the annuity is payable until the later of:
    (i) the death of a person (or the death of the last of 2 or more persons to die); or
    (ii) the end of a term of years certain; and
    (b) permits one or more amounts ( commutation payments ) to become payable before the end of the term of years certain for the annuity ' s commutation (whether in whole or in part).
    the contract does not permit the total of the commutation payments that may become payable before the end of the term of years certain to exceed the annuity ' s purchase price (within the meaning of that section), reduced by the sum of the deductible amounts excluded from assessable income under that section.
    4 all circumstances. there is no unreasonable deferral of the payments of the * immediate annuity, having regard to:
    (a) to the extent to which the payments depend on the returns of the investment of the assets of the * life insurance company paying the annuity - when the payments are made and when those returns are * derived; and
    (b) to the extent to which the payments do not depend on those returns - the relative sizes of the annual totals of the payments from year to year; and
    (c) any other relevant factors.


    320-246(4)    
    (Repealed by No 19 of 2010)


    320-246(5)    
    (Repealed by No 19 of 2010)


    SECTION 320-247   Policy split into an exempt life insurance policy and another life insurance policy  


    When is a part of a policy taken to be an exempt life insurance policy?

    320-247(1)    
    A part of a *life insurance policy (the original policy ) is taken to be an *exempt life insurance policy for the purposes of this Act if:


    (a) the part provides solely for the discharge of the liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *superannuation income stream benefits that are currently *RP superannuation income stream benefits of a *complying superannuation fund; and


    (b) the trustee of the fund holds the original policy.


    320-247(2)    
    A part of a *life insurance policy (the original policy ) is taken to be an exempt life insurance policy for the purposes of this Act if:


    (a) the part provides solely for the discharge of liabilities that are attributable to the liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *superannuation income stream benefits that are currently *RP superannuation income stream benefits of *complying superannuation funds; and


    (b) the trustee of a *pooled superannuation trust holds the original policy; and


    (c) the funds are unit holders of the trust.



    What happens to the rest of the policy?

    320-247(3)    
    If a part of a policy (the original policy ) is taken to be an *exempt life insurance policy under subsection (1) or (2), the rest of the original policy is taken to be another *life insurance policy for the purposes of this Act.

    SECTION 320-250   Transfer of assets and payment of amounts from segregated exempt assets otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-230  

    320-250(1A)    


    If:


    (a) a *life insurance policy issued by a *life insurance company becomes a policy referred to in subsection 320-190(1) ; and


    (b) immediately before the policy became a policy referred to in subsection 320-190(1) , the policy was an *exempt life insurance policy;

    the company can transfer from its *segregated exempt assets, to a *complying superannuation asset pool, assets of any kind whose total *transfer value does not exceed the company ' s liabilities in respect of the policy.


    320-250(1)    
    A *life insurance company can at any time transfer an asset from its*segregated exempt assets in exchange for an amount of money equal to the *transfer value of the asset at the time of the transfer.

    320-250(2)    
    If a *life insurance company:


    (a) imposes any fees or charges in respect of *segregated exempt assets; or


    (b) imposes any fees or charges in respect of *exempt life insurance policies where the liabilities under the policies are to be discharged out of the company's segregated exempt assets; or


    (c) determines, at a time other than a *valuation time, that the total *transfer value of the company's segregated exempt assets as at that time exceeds the amount of the company's *exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at that time;

    the company must, when the fees or charges are imposed or the excess is determined, as the case may be, transfer from the segregated exempt assets, assets having a total transfer value equal to the fees, charges or excess, as the case may be.


    320-250(3)    
    If:


    (a) any liabilities arise for the discharge of which a *life insurance company has *segregated exempt assets; or


    (b) any expenses are incurred by a life insurance company directly in respect of segregated exempt assets in relation to a period during which the assets are segregated exempt assets;

    the life insurance company must pay from the segregated exempt assets any amounts required to discharge the liabilities or amounts equal to the expenses, as the case may be.


    320-250(4)    
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)

    SECTION 320-255   Consequences of transfer of assets to or from segregated exempt assets  

    320-255(1)    


    This section applies if:


    (a) an asset (other than money) is transferred from the company ' s *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(1) or 320-250(1A) , (1) or (2) ; or


    (b) an asset (other than money) is transferred to the company ' s *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(3) or section 320-240 .


    320-255(2)    
    In determining:


    (a) for the purposes of this Act (other than Division 40 and Parts 3-1 and 3-3 ) whether an amount is included in, or can be deducted from, the assessable income of a *life insurance company in respect of the transfer of the asset; or


    (b) for the purposes of Parts 3-1 and 3-3 :


    (i) whether the company made a *capital gain in respect of the transfer; or

    (ii) whether the company made a *capital loss in respect of the transfer;

    the company is taken:


    (c) to have sold, immediately before the transfer, the asset transferred for a consideration equal to its *market value; and


    (d) to have purchased the asset again at the time of the transfer for a consideration equal to its market value.


    320-255(3)    
    If, apart from this subsection, section 320-60 and subsection 320-105(1) , a *life insurance company could deduct an amount or apply a *capital loss as a result of the transfer of an asset to its *segregated exempt assets, the deduction or capital loss is disregarded until:


    (a) the asset ceases to exist; or


    (b) the asset, or a greater than 50% interest in it, is *acquired by an entity other than an entity that is an *associate of the company, immediately after the acquisition.

    320-255(3A)    


    Subsection (3) does not apply in relation to an amount that the company can deduct under a provision in Division 40.

    320-255(4)    
    A *life insurance company cannot deduct an amount or apply a *capital loss as a result of the transfer of an asset from its *segregated exempt assets.

    320-255(5)    
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2004)


    320-255(6)    


    If a *depreciating asset is transferred to the *segregated exempt assets of a *life insurance company, then, in determining for the purposes of Division 40 whether an amount is included in, or can be deducted from, the company ' s assessable income as a result of the transfer, the company is taken:


    (a) to have, at the time immediately before the transfer, sold the asset for a consideration equal to its *market value at that time; and


    (b) to have, at the time of the transfer, purchased the asset again for a consideration equal to its market value at that time.


    320-255(7)    


    If a *depreciating asset that has been included in the *segregated exempt assets of a *life insurance company since the asset was acquired by the company or the initial segregation of those assets took place is transferred from those assets, then the company must assume for the purposes of Division 40 that:


    (a) if the asset ' s *market value at the time of the transfer is greater than its *adjustable value at that time, the company:


    (i) had, at the time immediately before the transfer, sold the asset for a consideration equal to its adjustable value at that time; and

    (ii) had, at the time of the transfer, purchased the asset again for a consideration equal to its adjustable value at that time; or


    (b) if the asset ' s market value at the time of the transfer is equal to or less than its adjustable value at that time, the company:


    (i) had, at the time immediately before the transfer, sold the asset for a consideration equal to its market value at that time; and

    (ii) had, at the time of the transfer, purchased the asset again for a consideration equal to its market value at that time.

    320-255(8)    


    If a *depreciating asset that was previously transferred to the *segregated exempt assets of a *life insurance company is transferred from those assets, then, the company must assume, for the purposes of Division 40 that:


    (a) if the asset ' s *market value at the time of its transfer from those assets is greater than its market value at the time when it was transferred to those assets, the company:


    (i) had, at the time immediately before the transfer from those assets, sold the asset for a consideration equal to its market value at the time when it was transferred to those assets; and

    (ii) had, at the time of the transfer from those assets, purchased the asset again for a consideration equal to its market value at the time when it was transferred to those assets; or


    (b) if the asset ' s market value at the time of its transfer from those assets is equal to or less than its market value at the time when it was transferred to those assets, the company:


    (i) had, at the time immediately before the transfer from those assets, sold the asset for a consideration equal to its market value at that time; and

    (ii) had, at the time of the transfer from those assets, purchased the asset again for a consideration equal to its market value at that time.

    320-255(9)    


    Division 40 has effect in relation to an asset covered by subsection (6), (7) or (8) as if:


    (a) in relation to the sale of the asset that is taken to have occurred under that subsection:


    (i) the sale were a *balancing adjustment event; and

    (ii) the *termination value of the asset for that event were equal to the consideration for the sale under that subsection; and

    (iii) the company had stopped *holding the asset at the time of the sale; and


    (b) in relation to the purchase of the asset that is taken to have occurred under that subsection:


    (i) the company had only begun to hold the asset after the purchase; and

    (ii) the first element of the asset ' s *cost were equal to the consideration for the purchase under that subsection; and

    (iii) the company had acquired the asset from an *associate of the company.
    Note:

    This means that, amongst other things, as a result of the transfer:

  • • the asset ' s cost for the purposes of working out a deduction under Division 40 is reset; and
  • • the company ' s assessable income might be adjusted under section 40-285 if the transfer is a transfer to the company ' s segregated exempt assets.

  • Subdivision 320-I - Transfers of business  

    Guide to Subdivision 320-I

    SECTION 320-300   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision contains special rules that apply when all or part of the life insurance business of a life insurance company is transferred to another life insurance company under the Life Insurance Act 1995 or the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999 .


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    320-305 When this Subdivision applies
    320-310 Special deductions and amounts of assessable income
    320-315 Complying superannuation asset pool and segregated exempt assets
    320-320 Certain amounts treated as life insurance premiums
    320-325 Friendly societies
    320-330 Immediate annuities
    320-335 Parts of assets treated as separate assets
    320-340 Continuous disability policies
    320-345 Exemption of management fees

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 320-305  

    320-305   When this Subdivision applies  


    The rules in this Subdivision have effect if all or part of the *life insurance business of a *life insurance company (the originating company ) is transferred to another life insurance company (the recipient company ):


    (a) in accordance with a scheme confirmed by the Federal Court of Australia under Part 9 of the Life Insurance Act 1995 ; or


    (b) under the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999 .

    SECTION 320-310   Special deductions and amounts of assessable income  


    Deduction for originating company

    320-310(1)    
    If the originating company pays an amount to the recipient company in respect of liabilities under the *net risk components of *life insurance policies transferred to the recipient company, the originating company can deduct that amount for the income year in which the transfer took place.

    Amount included in originating company ' s assessable income

    320-310(2)    
    If the originating company receives an amount from the recipient company in respect of liabilities under the *net risk components of *life insurance policies transferred to the recipient company, that amount is included in the assessable income of the originating company for the income year in which the transfer took place.

    Deduction for recipient company

    320-310(3)    
    If the recipient company pays an amount to the originating company in respect of liabilities under the *net risk components of *life insurance policies transferred to the recipient company, the recipient company can deduct that amount for the income year in which the transfer took place.

    SECTION 320-315   Complying superannuation asset pool and segregated exempt assets  

    320-315(1)    


    Assets that were *complying superannuation assets of the originating company just before the transfer took place and that are transferred to the recipient company become complying superannuation assets of the recipient company.

    320-315(2)    
    Assets that were *segregated exempt assets of the originating company just before the transfer took place and that are transferred to the recipient company become segregated exempt assets of the recipient company.

    SECTION 320-320   Certain amounts treated as life insurance premiums  

    320-320(1)    
    This Division applies to the recipient company as if the amount or value of any consideration received by the recipient company in respect of liabilities under *life insurance policies transferred to the company were *life insurance premiums paid to the company at the time the transfer took place.

    320-320(2)    


    However, subsection (1) does not apply to consideration:


    (a) that relates to liabilities that, just before the transfer took place, were discharged out of the originating company ' s *complying superannuation assets or *segregated exempt assets; or


    (b) that relates to the part of a *life insurance policy that has been reinsured under a *contract of reinsurance (except consideration that relates to a risk, or part of a risk, in relation to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies).


    SECTION 320-325   Friendly societies  

    320-325(1)    
    This section has effect if the originating company and the recipient company were *friendly societies just before the transfer took place.

    320-325(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph 320-37(1) (d), an *income bond, *funeral policy, *sickness policy or *scholarship plan issued by the recipient company in substitution for an income bond, funeral policy, sickness policy or scholarship plan (the original policy ) transferred from the originating company is taken to have been issued at the time the original policy was issued if the terms of the substituted policy are not materially different from those of the original policy.


    SECTION 320-330  

    320-330   Immediate annuities  


    For the purposes of section 320-246 , a *life insurance policy that provides for an *immediate annuity issued by the recipient company in substitution for a policy (also the original policy ) transferred from the originating company is taken to have been issued at the time the original policy was issued if the terms of the substituted policy are not materially different from those of the original policy.

    SECTION 320-335  

    320-335   Parts of assets treated as separate assets  


    If:


    (a) an asset is transferred to the recipient company from the originating company; and


    (b) parts of that asset were, under section 320-170 or 320-225 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 , treated as separate assets of the originating company just before the transfer took place;

    those parts of that asset are also treated as separate assets of the recipient company.

    SECTION 320-340   Continuous disability policies  

    320-340(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) the originating company and the recipient company were members of the same *wholly-owned group just before the transfer took place; and


    (b) all of the liabilities under the *continuous disability policies of the originating company are transferred to the recipient company; and


    (c) the transfer took place before the income year in which 1 July 2005 occurs; and


    (d) an amount (the section 320-30 amount ) would have been included in the assessable income of the originating company under section 320-30 for the income year in which the transfer took place if the transfer had not taken place.

    320-340(2)    
    Section 320-30 does not apply to the originating company for the income year in which the transfer took place or a later income year.

    320-340(3)    
    The amount worked out using this formula is included in the assessable income of the originating company for the income year in which the transfer took place:


      Section 320-30 amount   × Continuous disability policy days
    365
     

    where:

    continuous disability policy days
    means the number of days during the income year in which the transfer took place that the originating company held *continuous disability policies.


    320-340(4)    
    The section 320-30 amount, reduced by the amount included in the assessable income of the originating company under subsection (3), is included in the assessable income of the recipient company for the income year in which the transfer took place.

    320-340(5)    
    For each income year after the year in which the transfer took place and that is a relevant income year for the purposes of section 320-30 , the recipient company ' s assessable income includes the amount that would have been included in the originating company ' s assessable income under that section for that year if the transfer had not taken place.


    SECTION 320-345   Exemption of management fees  

    320-345(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) the originating company and the recipient company were members of the same *wholly-owned group just before the transfer took place; and


    (b) a *life insurance policy (also the original policy ):


    (i) is constituted by a contract made with the originating company before 1 July 2000; and

    (ii) is transferred to the recipient company before 1 July 2005.

    320-345(2)    
    For the purposes of section 320-40 , a *life insurance policy issued by the recipient company in substitution for the original policy is taken to have been constituted by a contract made with the recipient company before 1 July 2000 if the terms of the substituted policy are not materially different from those of the original policy.

    320-345(3)    
    Subsection 320-40(4) applies to so much of the sum of the amounts applicable in respect of the substituted policy under subsections 320-40(5) , (6) and (7) as does not exceed any fees or charges made by the recipient company that the originating company would have been entitled to make under the terms of the original policy as applying just before 1 July 2000.


    Division 321 - General insurance companies and companies that self-insure in respect of workers ' compensation liabilities  

    Subdivision 321-A - Provision for, and payment of, claims by general insurance companies  

    SECTION 321-10  

    321-10   Assessable income to include amount for reduction in outstanding claims liability  


    A *general insurance company's assessable income for the *current year includes an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) the value, at the end of the previous income year, of the company's liability for *outstanding claims under *general insurance policies; exceeds


    (b) the value, at the end of the current year, of that liability.

    Note:

    Those values are worked out under section 321-20 .

    SECTION 321-15  

    321-15   Deduction for increase in outstanding claims liability  


    A *general insurance company can deduct for the *current year an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) the value, at the end of the current year, of the company's liability for *outstanding claims under *general insurance policies; exceeds


    (b) the value, at the end of the previous income year, of that liability.

    Note:

    Those values are worked out under section 321-20 .

    SECTION 321-20  

    321-20   How value of outstanding claims liability is worked out  


    Work out the value, at the end of an income year, of a *general insurance company ' s liability for *outstanding claims under *general insurance policies in this way: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Add up the amounts that, at the end of the income year, the company determines, based on proper and reasonable estimates, to be appropriate to set aside and invest in order to meet:

  • (a) liabilities for outstanding claims under those policies; and
  • (b) direct settlement costs associated with those outstanding claims.

  • Step 2.

    Reduce the step 1 amount by so much of it as the company expects at the end of the income year to recover:

  • (a) under a contract of reinsurance; or
  • (b) in any other way;
  • other than under a contract of reinsurance to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about reinsurance with non-residents) applies.

    SECTION 321-25  

    321-25   Deduction for claims paid during current year  


    A *general insurance company can deduct for the *current year amounts paid during that year in respect of claims under *general insurance policies.

    Subdivision 321-B - Premium income of general insurance companies  

    SECTION 321-45  

    321-45   Assessable income to include gross premiums  


    A *general insurance company's assessable income for the *current year includes the gross premiums received or receivable by the company during the current year in respect of *general insurance policies.

    SECTION 321-50  

    321-50   Assessable income to include amount for reduction in value of unearned premium reserve  


    A *general insurance company's assessable income for the *current year includes an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) the value, at the end of the previous income year, of the company's unearned premium reserve; exceeds


    (b) the value, at the end of the current year, of that reserve.

    Note:

    Those values are worked out under section 321-60 .

    SECTION 321-55  

    321-55   Deduction for increase in value of unearned premium reserve  


    A *general insurance company can deduct for the *current year an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which;


    (a) the value, at the end of the current year, of the company's unearned premium reserve; exceeds


    (b) the value, at the end of the previous income year, of that reserve.

    Note:

    Those values are worked out under section 321-60 .

    SECTION 321-60  

    321-60   How value of unearned premium reserve is worked out  


    Work out the value, at the end of an income year, of a *general insurance company's unearned premium reserve in this way: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Add up the gross premiums received or receivable by the company, in relation to *general insurance policies issued in the course of carrying on *insurance business, in that or an earlier income year.


    Step 2.

    Reduce the step 1 amount by so much of the costs incurred by the company in connection with the issue of those policies as relate to the gross premiums, including, for example, costs such as:

  • (a) commission and brokerage fees; and
  • (b) administration costs of processing insurance proposals and renewals; and
  • (c) administration costs of collecting premiums; and
  • (d) selling and underwriting costs; and
  • (e) fire brigade charges; and
  • (f) stamp duty; and
  • (g) other charges, levies and contributions imposed by governments or governmental authorities that directly relate to general insurance policies.

  • Step 3.

    Reduce the step 2 amount by any premiums (the relevant reinsurance premiums ) paid or payable by the company, in that or an earlier income year, for the reinsurance of risks covered by those policies, except:

  • (a) reinsurance premiums that the company cannot deduct because of subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about reinsurance with non-residents); and
  • (b) reinsurance premiums that were paid or payable in respect of a particular class of *insurance business where, under the contract of reinsurance, the reinsurer agreed to pay, in respect of a loss incurred by the company that is covered by the relevant policy, some or all of the excess over an agreed amount.

  • Step 4.

    Add to the step 3 amount any reinsurance commissions received or receivable by the company that relate to the relevant reinsurance premiums.


    Step 5.

    The value, at the end of an income year, of the unearned premium reserve is so much of the step 4 amount as the company determines, based on proper and reasonable estimates, to relate the risks covered by the policies in respect of later income years.

    Subdivision 321-C - Companies that self-insure in respect of workers ' compensation liabilities  

    SECTION 321-80  

    321-80   Assessable income to include amount for reduction in outstanding claims liability  


    The assessable income for the *current year of a company that is not required by law to insure, and does not insure, against liability for workers' compensation claims includes an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) the value, at the end of the previous income year, of the company's liability for such claims that:


    (i) arose from events that occurred in that or an earlier income year; and

    (ii) were not paid in full before the end of the previous income year; exceeds


    (b) the value, at the end of the current year, of that liability.

    Note:

    Those values are worked out under section 321-90 .

    SECTION 321-85  

    321-85   Deduction for outstanding claims liability  


    A company that is not required by law to insure, and does not insure, against liability for workers' compensation claims can deduct for the *current year an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:


    (a) the value, at the end of the current year, of the company's liability for such claims that:


    (i) arose from events that occurred in the current or an earlier income year; and

    (ii) were not paid in full before the end of the current year; exceeds


    (b) the value, at the end of the previous income year, of that liability.

    Note:

    Those values are worked out under section 321-90 .

    SECTION 321-90  

    321-90   How value of outstanding claims liability is worked out  


    Work out the value, at the end of an income year, of a company's liability for claims covered by section 321-80 or 321-85 by adding up the amounts that, at the end of that income year, the company determines, based on proper and reasonable estimates, to be appropriate to set aside and invest in order to meet:


    (a) liabilities for those claims; and


    (b) direct settlement costs associated with those claims.

    SECTION 321-95  

    321-95   Deductions for claims paid during current year  
    A company that is not required by law to insure, and does not insure, against liability for workers' compensation claims can deduct for the *current year amounts paid during that year in respect of such claims.

    Division 322 - Assistance for policyholders with insolvent general insurers  

    SECTION 322-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out special measures to assist in the rescue package provided in response to the collapse of the HIH group and deals with the tax treatment of entitlements under Part VC (Financial claims scheme for policyholders with insolvent general insurers) of the Insurance Act 1973 .

    Subdivision 322-A - HIH rescue package  

    SECTION 322-5   Rescue payments treated as insurance payments by HIH  

    322-5(1)    
    This Act applies to you as if a payment you receive from the Commonwealth, the *HIH Trust or a prescribed entity for assignment of your rights under or in relation to a *general insurance policy you held with an *HIH company:


    (a) had been made by the HIH company; and


    (b) had been made under the terms and conditions of the general insurance policy you held with the HIH company.

    322-5(2)    
    The HIH Trust is the HIH Claims Support Trust (established on 6 July 2001).

    322-5(3)    
    An HIH company is:


    (a) CIC Insurance Limited; or


    (b) FAI General Insurance Company Limited; or


    (c) FAI Reinsurances Pty Limited; or


    (d) FAI Traders Insurance Company Pty Limited; or


    (e) HIH Casualty and General Insurance Limited; or


    (f) HIH Underwriting and Insurance (Australia) Pty Limited; or


    (g) World Marine and General Insurances Pty Limited; or


    (h) another related company specified in writing by the Commissioner.


    SECTION 322-10  

    322-10   HIH Trust exempt from tax  


    The total *ordinary income and *statutory income of:


    (a) the HIH Trust; and


    (b) an entity prescribed for the purposes of this Division;

    is exempt from income tax.

    SECTION 322-15  

    322-15   Certain capital gains and capital losses disregarded  


    A *capital gain or *capital loss you make because you assign a right under or in relation to a *general insurance policy you held with an *HIH company to the Commonwealth, the trustee of the *HIH Trust or a prescribed entity is disregarded.

    Subdivision 322-B - Tax treatment of entitlements under financial claims scheme  

    Guide to Subdivision 322-B

    SECTION 322-20   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Act applies to a payment of an entitlement under Part VC (Financial claims scheme for policyholders with insolvent general insurers) of the Insurance Act 1973 as if the payment were made by the insurer under the insurance policy concerned.

    Disregard a capital gain or loss from:

  • (a) the disposal to APRA under that Part of rights against the insurer under an insurance policy; or
  • (b) the payment of an entitlement under that Part.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    322-25 Payment of entitlement under financial claims scheme treated as payment from insurer
    322-30 Disposal of rights against insurer to APRA and meeting of financial claims scheme entitlement have no CGT effects

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 322-25   Payment of entitlement under financial claims scheme treated as payment from insurer  

    322-25(1)    
    This Act applies to you as if an amount paid to you, or applied for your benefit, to meet your entitlement under Part VC (Financial claims scheme for policyholders with insolvent general insurers) of the Insurance Act 1973 relating to a *general insurance policy issued by a *general insurance company had been paid to you by the company under the terms and conditions of the policy.

    322-25(2)    
    To avoid doubt, subsection (1) does not affect the operation of Part 2-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note:

    Division 21 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains special provisions about how Part 2-5 in that Schedule operates in relation to the meeting of entitlements under Part VC of the Insurance Act 1973 .


    SECTION 322-30  

    322-30   Disposal of rights against insurer to APRA and meeting of financial claims scheme entitlement have no CGT effects  


    Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss you make because:


    (a) under section 62ZZL of the Insurance Act 1973 , you *dispose of a *CGT asset consisting of your rights against a *general insurance company to *APRA; or


    (b) your entitlement under section 62ZZF , 62ZZFA , 62ZZG or 62ZZGA of that Act is met.

    Note 1:

    Section 62ZZL of the Insurance Act 1973 causes you to cease to be the owner, and APRA to become the owner, of rights against a general insurance company relating to a general insurance policy when your entitlement arises under Part VC of that Act in relation to the policy.

    Note 2:

    Sections 62ZZF , 62ZZFA , 62ZZG and 62ZZGA of the Insurance Act 1973 entitle persons with valid claims based on general insurance policies issued by certain general insurance companies that have since become insolvent to be paid the amount of those claims by APRA.

    PART 3-45 - RULES FOR PARTICULAR INDUSTRIES AND OCCUPATIONS  

    Division 328 - Small business entities  

    Guide to Division 328  

    SECTION 328-5   What this Division is about  


    This Division explains the meaning of the terms small business entity , annual turnover , aggregated turnover and related concepts (Subdivision 328-C ).

    If you are a small business entity, this Division allows you to change the way the income tax law applies to you in these ways:

  • (a) you can choose to put your depreciating assets into a general pool and treat the pool as a single asset (Subdivision 328-D );
  • (b) you can choose not to account for annual changes in trading stock value that are not more than $5,000 (Subdivision 328-E ).
  • In usual circumstances, these changes will simplify the working out of your taxable income, and so reduce your compliance costs.

    You may be entitled to a tax offset for any small business income included in your assessable income, if you are an individual (Subdivision 328-F ).


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    328-10 Concessions available to small business entities

    SECTION 328-10   Concessions available to small business entities  

    328-10(1)    


    If you are a small business entity for an income year, you can choose to take advantage of the concessions set out in the following table. Some of the concessions have additional, specific conditions that must also be satisfied.


    Item Concession Provision
    1A Immediate deductibility for small business start-up expenses Subsection 40-880(2A) of this Act
    1 CGT 15-year asset exemption Subdivision 152-B of this Act
    2 CGT 50 % active asset reduction Subdivision 152-C of this Act
    3 CGT retirement exemption Subdivision 152-D of this Act
    4 CGT roll-over Subdivision 152-E of this Act
    5 Simpler depreciation rules Subdivision 328-D of this Act
    6 Simplified trading stock rules Subdivision 328-E of this Act
    6A Small business income tax offset Subdivision 328-F of this Act
    6B Restructures of small businesses Subdivision 328-G of this Act
    7 Deducting certain prepaid business expenses immediately Sections 82KZM and 82KZMD of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
    8 Accounting for GST on a cash basis Section 29-40 of the GST Act
    9 Annual apportionment of input tax credits for acquisitions and importations that are partly creditable Section 131-5 of the GST Act
    10 Paying GST by quarterly instalments Section 162-5 of the GST Act
    11 FBT car parking exemption Section 58GA of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986
    12 PAYG instalments based on GDP-adjusted notional tax Section 45-130 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953

    Note 1:

    The CGT concessions mentioned in items 1, 2, 3 and 4 of the table apply only if you are a CGT small business entity (see section 152-10 ).

    Note 2:

    The small business income tax offset mentioned in item 6A of the table applies only if you are a small business entity as defined for the purposes of Subdivision 328-F (see section 328-357 ).

    Note 3:

    Some of these concessions are also available to medium businesses (for example, see subsection 328-285(2) ).


    328-10(2)    
    Also, if you are a small business entity for an income year, the standard 2-year period for amending your assessment applies to you (section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ).



    Subdivision 328-B - Objects of this Division  

    SECTION 328-50   Objects of this Division  

    328-50(1)    
    The main object of this Division is to offer eligible small businesses the choice of a new platform to deal with their tax. The platform is designed to benefit those businesses in one or more of these ways:

  • • reducing their tax;
  • • providing simpler rules for determining their income and deductions;
  • • providing simpler capital allowances and trading stock requirements;
  • • reducing their compliance costs.

  • 328-50(2)    
    This Division also provides rules that are intended to prevent other businesses from taking advantage of those benefits.


    Subdivision 328-C - What is a small business entity  

    Guide to Subdivision 328-C

    SECTION 328-105   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision explains the meaning of the terms small business entity , annual turnover , aggregated turnover and related concepts.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    328-110 Meaning of small business entity
    328-115 Meaning of aggregated turnover
    328-120 Meaning of annual turnover
    328-125 Meaning of connected with an entity
    328-130 Meaning of affiliate

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 328-110   Meaning of small business entity  


    General rule: based on aggregated turnover worked out as at the beginning of the current income year

    328-110(1)    
    You are a small business entity for an income year (the current year ) if:

    (a)    you carry on a *business in the current year; and

    (b)    

    one or both of the following applies:

    (i) you carried on a business in the income year (the previous year ) before the current year and your *aggregated turnover for the previous year was less than $10 million;

    (ii) your aggregated turnover for the current year is likely to be less than $10 million.
    Note 1:

    The $10 million thresholds in this subsection and in subsections (3) and (4) have been increased to $50 million for certain concessions (for example, see subsection 328-285(2) ).

    Note 2:

    If you are or would (if the $10 million thresholds in this subsection and subsection (3) were increased to $50 million) be a small business entity for an income year, you may apply for permission:

  • (a)under section 61C of the Excise Act 1901 to deliver goods for home consumption (without entering them for that purpose) in respect of a calendar month or a quarter; or
  • (b) under section 69 of the Customs Act 1901 to deliver like customable goods or excise-equivalent goods into home consumption (without entering them for that purpose) in respect of a calendar month or, for excise-equivalent goods, a quarter.

  • 328-110(2)    
    You work out your *aggregated turnover for the current year for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) :

    (a)    as at the first day of the current year; or

    (b)    if you start to carry on a *business during the current year - as at the day you start to carry on the business.

    Note:

    Subsection 328-120(5) provides for how to work out your annual turnover (which is relevant to working out your aggregated turnover) if you do not carry on a business for the whole of an income year.



    Exception: aggregated turnover for 2 previous income years was $10 million or more

    328-110(3)    
    However, you are not a small business entity for an income year (the current year ) because of subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) if:

    (a)    you carried on a *business in each of the 2 income years before the current year; and

    (b)    

    your *aggregated turnover for each of those income years was $10 million or more.
    Note:

    Section 328-110 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 affects the operation of this subsection in relation to the 2007-08 and 2008-09 income years.



    Additional rule: based on aggregated turnover worked out as at the end of the current income year

    328-110(4)    
    You are also a small business entity for an income year (the current year ) if:

    (a)    you carry on a *business in the current year; and

    (b)    

    your *aggregated turnover for the current year, worked out as at the end of that year, is less than $10 million.
    Note:

    If you are a small business entity only because of subsection (4) , you cannot choose any of the following concessions:

  • (a) paying PAYG instalments based on GDP-adjusted notional tax: see section 45-130 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 ;
  • (b) accounting for GST on a cash basis: see section 29-40 of the GST Act;
  • (c) making an annual apportionment of input tax credits for acquisitions and importations that are partly creditable: see section 131-5 of the GST Act;
  • (d) paying GST by quarterly instalments: see section 162-5 of the GST Act;
  • (e) applying for permission under the Excise Act 1901 to deliver goods for home consumption (without entering them for that purpose) in respect of a calendar month or a quarter: see section 61C of that Act;
  • (f) applying for permission under the Customs Act 1901 to deliver like customable goods or excise-equivalent goods for home consumption (without entering them for that purpose) in respect of a calendar month or, for excise-equivalent goods, a quarter: see section 69 of that Act.


  • Winding up a business previously carried on

    328-110(5)    
    This Subdivision applies to you as if you carried on a *business in an income year if:

    (a)    in that year you were winding up a business you previously carried on; and

    (b)    you were a *small business entity for the income year in which you stopped carrying on that business.

    Note 1:

    Subsection 328-120(5) provides for how to work out your annual turnover (which is relevant to working out your aggregated turnover) if you do not carry on a business for the whole of an income year.

    Note 2:

    A special rule applies if you were an STS taxpayer under this Division (as in force immediately before the commencement of this section) in the income year in which you stopped carrying on the business: see section 328-111 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .



    Partners in a partnership

    328-110(6)    


    A person who is a partner in a partnership in an income year is not, in his or her capacity as a partner, a small business entity for the income year.

    SECTION 328-115   Meaning of aggregated turnover  

    328-115(1)    
    Your aggregated turnover for an income year is the sum of the relevant annual turnovers (see subsection (2)) excluding any amounts covered by subsection (3).

    Note:

    For small business CGT relief purposes, additional entities may be treated as being connected with you or your affiliate under sections 152-48 and 152-78 .


    328-115(2)    
    The relevant annual turnovers are:


    (a) your *annual turnover for the income year; and


    (b) the annual turnover for the income year of any entity (a relevant entity ) that is *connected with you at any time during the income year; and


    (c) the annual turnover for the income year of any entity (a relevant entity ) that is an *affiliate of yours at any time during the income year.

    328-115(3)    
    Your aggregated turnover for an income year does not include the following amounts:


    (a) amounts *derived in the income year by you or a relevant entity from dealings between you and the relevant entity while the relevant entity is *connected with you or is your *affiliate;


    (b) amounts derived in the income year by a relevant entity from dealings between the relevant entity and another relevant entity while each relevant entity is connected with you or is your affiliate;


    (c) amounts derived in the income year by a relevant entity while the relevant entity is not connected with you and is not your affiliate.

    SECTION 328-120   Meaning of annual turnover  


    General rule

    328-120(1)    
    An entity's annual turnover for an income year is the total *ordinary income that the entity *derives in the income year in the ordinary course of carrying on a *business.

    Exclusion of amounts relating to GST

    328-120(2)    
    In working out an entity's *annual turnover for an income year, do not include any amount that is *non-assessable non-exempt income under section 17-5 (which is about GST).

    Exclusion of amounts derived from sales of retail fuel

    328-120(3)    
    In working out an entity's *annual turnover for an income year, do not include any amounts of *ordinary income the entity *derives from sales of *retail fuel.

    Amounts derived from dealings with associates

    328-120(4)    
    In working out an entity's *annual turnover for an income year, the amount of *ordinary income the entity *derives from any dealing with an *associate of the entity is the amount of ordinary income the entity would derive from the dealing if it were at *arm's length.

    Note:

    Amounts derived in an income year from any dealings between an entity and an associate that is a relevant entity within the meaning of section 328-115 are not included in the entity's aggregated turnover for that year: see subsection 328-115(3) .



    Business carried on for part of income year only

    328-120(5)    
    If an entity does not carry on a *business for the whole of an income year, the entity's *annual turnover for the income year must be worked out using a reasonable estimate of what the entity's annual turnover for the income year would be if the entity carried on a business for the whole of the income year.

    Regulations may provide for different calculation of annual turnover

    328-120(6)    
    The regulations may provide that an entity's *annual turnover for an income year is to be calculated in a different way, but only so that it would be less than the amount worked out under this section.

    SECTION 328-125   Meaning of connected with an entity  

    328-125(1)    
    An entity is connected with another entity if:


    (a) either entity controls the other entity in a way described in this section; or


    (b) both entities are controlled in a way described in this section by the same third entity.

    Note 1:

    See Subdivision 106-B if a CGT asset of yours is vested in a trustee in bankruptcy or a liquidator.

    Note 2:

    See Subdivision 106-C if you are absolutely entitled to a CGT asset as against the trustee of a trust.

    Note 3:

    See Subdivision 106-D if you provided security over an asset to another entity.



    Direct control of an entity other than a discretionary trust

    328-125(2)    
    An entity (the first entity ) controls another entity if the first entity, its *affiliates, or the first entity together with its affiliates:


    (a) except if the other entity is a discretionary trust - own, or have the right to acquire the ownership of, interests in the other entity that carry between them the right to receive a percentage (the control percentage ) that is at least 40% of:


    (i) any distribution of income by the other entity; or

    (ii) if the other entity is a partnership - the net income of the partnership; or

    (iii) any distribution of capital by the other entity; or


    (b) if the other entity is a company - own, or have the right to acquire the ownership of, *equity interests in the company that carry between them the right to exercise, or control the exercise of, a percentage (the control percentage ) that is at least 40% of the voting power in the company.



    Direct control of a discretionary trust

    328-125(3)    
    An entity (the first entity ) controls a discretionary trust if a trustee of the trust acts, or could reasonably be expected to act, in accordance with the directions or wishes of the first entity, its *affiliates, or the first entity together with its affiliates.

    328-125(4)    
    An entity (the first entity ) controls a discretionary trust for an income year if, for any of the 4 income years before that year:


    (a) the trustee of the trust paid to, or applied for the benefit of:


    (i) the first entity; or

    (ii) any of the first entity ' s *affiliates; or

    (iii) the first entity and any of its affiliates;
    any of the income or capital of the trust; and


    (b) the percentage (the control percentage ) of the income or capital paid or applied is at least 40% of the total amount of income or capital paid or applied by the trustee for that year.

    Note:

    Section 328-112 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 affects the operation of this subsection in relation to the 2007-08, 2008-09, 2009-10 and 2010-11 income years.


    328-125(5)    
    An entity does not control a discretionary trust because of subsection (4) if the entity is:


    (a) an *exempt entity; or


    (b) a *deductible gift recipient.

    Commissioner may determine that an entity does not control another entity

    328-125(6)    
    If the control percentage referred to in subsection (2) or (4) is at least 40%, but less than 50%, the Commissioner may determine that the first entity does not control the other entity if the Commissioner thinks that the other entity is controlled by an entity other than, or by entities that do not include, the first entity or any of its *affiliates.

    Indirect control of an entity

    328-125(7)    
    This section applies to an entity (the first entity ) that directly controls another entity (the second entity ) as if the first entity also controlled any other entity that is directly, or indirectly by any other application or applications of this section, controlled by the second entity.

    328-125(8)    
    However, subsection (7) does not apply if the second entity is an entity of any of the following kinds:


    (a) a company *shares in which (except shares that carry the right to a fixed rate of *dividend) are listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange;


    (b) a *publicly traded unit trust;


    (c) a *mutual insurance company;


    (d) a *mutual affiliate company;


    (e) a company (other than one covered by paragraph (a)) all the shares in which are owned by one or more of the following:


    (i) a company covered by paragraph (a);

    (ii) a publicly traded unit trust;

    (iii) a mutual insurance company;

    (iv) a mutual affiliate company.

    SECTION 328-130   Meaning of affiliate  

    328-130(1)    
    An individual or a company is an affiliate of yours if the individual or company acts, or could reasonably be expected to act, in accordance with your directions or wishes, or in concert with you, in relation to the affairs of the *business of the individual or company.

    328-130(2)    
    However, an individual or a company is not your affiliate merely because of the nature of the business relationship you and the individual or company share.

    Note:

    For small business relief purposes, a spouse or a child under 18 years may also be an affiliate under section 152-47 .

    Example:

    A partner in a partnership would not be an affiliate of another partner merely because the first partner acts, or could reasonably be expected to act, in accordance with the directions or wishes of the second partner, or in concert with the second partner, in relation to the affairs of the partnership.

    Directors of the same company, or the company and a director of that company, would be in a similar position.


    Subdivision 328-D - Capital allowances for small business entities  

    Guide to Subdivision 328-D

    SECTION 328-170   What this Subdivision is about  


    If you are a small business entity, you can choose to deduct amounts for most of your depreciating assets on a diminishing value basis using a pool that is treated as a single depreciating asset.

    Broadly, the pool is made up of the costs of the depreciating assets that are allocated to it or, in some cases, a proportion of those costs.

    The pool rate is 30%.

    There is a deduction for assets whose cost is less than $1,000 in the income year in which you start to use the asset or have it installed ready for use.

    This Subdivision sets out how to calculate the pool deductions, and also sets out the consequences of:

  • (a) disposal of depreciating assets; and
  • (b) not choosing to use this Subdivision for an income year after having chosen to do so for an earlier income year; and
  • (c) changing the business use of depreciating assets.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    328-175 Calculations for depreciating assets
    328-180 Assets costing less than $1,000
    328-185 Pooling
    328-190 Calculation
    328-195 Opening pool balance
    328-200 Closing pool balance
    328-205 Estimate of taxable use
    328-210 Low pool value
    328-215 Disposal etc. of depreciating assets
    328-220 What happens if you are not a small business entity or do not choose to use this Subdivision for an income year
    328-225 Change in business use
    328-230 Estimate where deduction denied
    328-235 Interaction with Divisions 85 and 86
    328-237 (Repealed by No 96 of 2014)
    328-240 (Repealed by No 41 of 2005)
    Special rules about roll-overs
    328-243 Roll-over relief
    328-245 Consequences of roll-over
    328-247 Pool deductions
    328-250 Deductions for assets first used in BAE year
    328-253 Deductions for cost addition amounts
    328-255 Closing pool balance etc. below zero
    328-257 Taxable use

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 328-175   Calculations for depreciating assets  

    328-175(1)    


    You can choose to calculate your deductions and some amounts of assessable income under this Subdivision instead of under Division 40 for an income year for all the *depreciating assets that you *hold if:


    (a) you are a *small business entity for the income year; and


    (b) you started to use the assets or have them *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose during or before that income year.

    This subsection has effect subject to subsections (2) to (10).

    Note:

    If you choose to use this Subdivision for an income year, you continue to use this Subdivision for your general small business pool for a later income year even if you are not a small business entity, or do not choose to use this Subdivision, for the later year: see section 328-220 .



    Exception: assets to which Division 40 does not apply

    328-175(2)    
    This Subdivision does not apply to a * depreciating asset to which Division 40 does not apply because of section 40-45 .

    Exception: primary production

    328-175(3)    


    If you are a *small business entity for the income year, for each * depreciating asset you use to carry on a * primary production business and for which you could deduct amounts under Subdivision 40-F (about primary production depreciating assets) or Subdivision 40-G (about capital expenditure of primary producers and other landholders) apart from subsection (1), you can choose:


    (a) to deduct amounts for it under Subdivision 40-F or 40-G ; or


    (b) to calculate your deductions for it under this Subdivision.

    Note:

    A choice made by a transferor under this subsection for an asset applies also to the transferee if roll-over relief under subsection 40-340(1) or (3) is chosen: see section 328-245 .


    328-175(4)    


    You must make the choice under subsection (3) for each *depreciating asset of the kind referred to in that subsection for the later of:


    (a) the first income year for which you are, or last were, a *small business entity; or


    (b) the income year in which you started to use the asset, or have it * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose.

    Once you have made the choice for an asset, you cannot change it.



    Exception: horticultural plants

    328-175(5)    
    You cannot deduct amounts for * horticultural plants (including grapevines) under this Subdivision.

    Exception: asset let on depreciating asset lease

    328-175(6)    


    You cannot deduct amounts for a * depreciating asset under this Subdivision if the asset is being or might reasonably be expected to be let predominantly on a * depreciating asset lease.

    Exception: assets in a low-value or software development pool

    328-175(7)    
    You cannot deduct amounts for a * depreciating asset under this Subdivision if:


    (a) the asset was allocated to your low-value pool under Subdivision 40-E , or to your pool under the former Subdivision 42-L, during an income year for which you were not a *small business entity or had not chosen to use this Subdivision; or


    (b) the asset is * in-house software and expenditure on the asset is allocated to a software development pool under that Subdivision.

    Note:

    You will have to continue deducting amounts for these assets under Division 40 .


    328-175(8)    


    A * depreciating asset referred to in subsection (7) is not allocated to your *general small business pool under this Subdivision and does not qualify for a deduction under section 328-180 .

    Exception: assets for which previously entitled to a tax offset under the R & D provisions

    328-175(9)    


    You cannot deduct amounts for a *depreciating asset for any period under this Subdivision if you are entitled under section 355-100 to a *tax offset for a deduction under section 355-305 for the asset for the same or an earlier period.

    Exception: second-hand assets used in residential property

    328-175(9A)    


    You cannot deduct amounts for a *depreciating asset under this Subdivision to the extent that section 40-27 prevents you from deducting amounts under subsection 40-25(1) for the asset.

    Exception: restriction on choosing to use this Subdivision

    328-175(10)    


    If:


    (a) you choose to use this Subdivision to deduct amounts for your *depreciating assets for an income year; and


    (b) you do not choose to use this Subdivision for a later income year for which you satisfy the conditions to make this choice (see subsection (1));

    you cannot choose to use this Subdivision until at least 5 years after the first later income year for which you satisfied the conditions to make this choice but did not do so.

    Note 1:

    Your ability to choose to use this Subdivision may also be restricted by section 328-440 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Note 2:

    If you choose to use this Subdivision for an income year, you continue to use it for assets that have been allocated to your general small business pool for a later income year even if you are not a small business entity, or do not choose to use this Subdivision, for the later year: see section 328-220.

    Note 3:

    Subsections 328-180(2) and (3) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 affect the operation of this subsection in relation to income years ending on or after 12 May 2015.


    SECTION 328-180   Assets costing less than $1,000  

    328-180(1)    


    You deduct the *taxable purpose proportion of the *adjustable value of a *depreciating asset for the income year in which you start to use the asset, or have it *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose if:


    (a) you were a *small business entity for that year and the year in which you started to *hold it; and


    (ab) you chose to use this Subdivision for each of those years; and


    (b) the asset is a depreciating asset whose *cost as at the end of the income year in which you start to use it, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose is less than $1,000.

    Note:

    This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    328-180(2)    


    You can also deduct, for an income year for which you are a *small business entity and you choose to use this Subdivision, the *taxable purpose proportion of an amount included in the second element of the *cost of an asset for which you have deducted an amount under subsection (1) if:


    (a) the amount so included is less than $1,000; and

    Note:

    This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    (b) you started to use the asset, or have it *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose during an earlier income year.

    Note:

    Paragraph (b) may not apply for costs included after 31 December 2020 for assets you first acquire between 12 May 2015 and 31 December 2020: see subsection 328-180(5A) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    328-180(3)    


    An asset for which you have deducted an amount under this section is allocated to your *general small business pool if:


    (a) an amount of $1,000 or more is included in the second element of the asset ' s *cost; or

    Note:

    This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    (b) any amount is included in the second element of the asset ' s cost and you have deducted or can deduct an amount under subsection (2) for an amount previously included in the second element of the asset ' s cost.


    328-180(4)    


    This Division applies to the asset as if its *adjustable value were the amount included in the second element of its *cost as mentioned in subsection (3).

    328-180(5)    


    Subsection (3) applies even if the amount is included in the second element of the asset ' s *cost during an income year for which you are not a *small business entity or do not choose to use this Subdivision.

    SECTION 328-185   Pooling  

    328-185(1)    


    If you are a *small business entity for an income year and you have chosen to use this Subdivision for that year, you deduct amounts for your * depreciating assets (except assets for which you have deducted or can deduct an amount under section 328-180 ) through a pool, which allows you to deduct amounts for them as if they were a single asset, thereby simplifying your calculations. You use one rate for the pool.

    328-185(2)    


    There is a general small business pool to which *depreciating assets are allocated.

    Allocating assets to a pool

    328-185(3)    


    A * depreciating asset:


    (a) that you * hold just before, and at the start of, the first income year for which you are, or last were, a *small business entity; and


    (b) for which you calculate your deductions under this Subdivision instead of under Division 40 ; and


    (c) that has not previously been allocated to your * general small business pool; and


    (d) that you have started to use, or have * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose;

    is automatically allocated to your general small business pool.


    328-185(4)    


    A * depreciating asset that you start to use, or have * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose during an income year for which you are a *small business entity and you choose to use this Subdivision is allocated to the *general small business pool at the end of that year.
    Note:

    The allocation happens even if you no longer hold the asset at the end of that income year.



    Exception for assets used or installed before 1 July 2001

    328-185(5)    


    You can choose not to have a * depreciating asset allocated to the *general small business pool if you started to use it, or have it * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose before 1 July 2001.
    Note:

    If you make this choice, you would continue to deduct amounts for the asset under Division 40 .


    328-185(6)    


    You must make that choice for the first income year for which you are a *small business entity and you choose to use this Subdivision. Once you have made the choice for an asset, you cannot change it.

    No re-allocation

    328-185(7)    


    Once a * depreciating asset is allocated to your * general small business pool, it is not re-allocated, even if you are not a *small business entity for a later income year or you do not choose to use this Subdivision for that later year.
    Note:

    If you chose to use this Subdivision for an income year, you continue to use it for your general small business pool for a later income year even if you are not a small business entity, or do not choose to use this Subdivision, for the later year: see section 328-220 .


    SECTION 328-190   Calculation  

    328-190(1)    


    You calculate your deduction for your *general small business pool for an income year using this formula:

    *Opening pool balance × 30%

    Note:

    You use section 328-210 instead if the pool has a low pool value.


    328-190(2)    


    Your deduction for each *depreciating asset that you start to use, or have *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose during an income year for which you are a *small business entity and choose to use this Subdivision is 15% of the *taxable purpose proportion of its *adjustable value.

    328-190(2A)    
    (Repealed by No 96 of 2014)


    328-190(3)    


    You can also deduct for an income year for which you are a *small business entity and choose to use this Subdivision the amount worked out under subsection (4) for an amount (the cost addition amount ) included in the second element of the * cost of a * depreciating asset for that year if you started to use the asset, or have it * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose during an earlier income year.
    Note:

    The second element of cost is worked out under section 40-190 .


    328-190(4)    


    The amount you can deduct is 15% of the *taxable purpose proportion of the cost addition amount.
    Note:

    The amounts that a transferor and transferee can deduct under this section are modified if roll-over relief under section 40-340 is chosen: see sections 328-243 and 328-247 .


    SECTION 328-195   Opening pool balance  

    328-195(1)    


    For the first income year for which you are a *small business entity and choose to use this Subdivision, the opening pool balance of your *general small business pool is the sum of the * taxable purpose proportions of the * adjustable values of * depreciating assets allocated to the pool under subsection 328-185(3) .

    328-195(2)    


    For a later income year, the opening pool balance of your *general small business pool is that pool's * closing pool balance for the previous income year, reduced or increased by any adjustment required under section 328-225 (about change in the business use of an asset).
    Note:

    You continue to deduct amounts using your general small business pool even if you are not a small business entity, or do not choose to use this Subdivision, for a later income year: see section 328-220 .


    328-195(3)    


    However, if:


    (a) you are not a *small business entity for an income year or you do not choose to use this Subdivision for that year; but


    (b) you are a small business entity for a later income year and you choose to use this Subdivision for the later year;

    the opening pool balance of your *general small business pool includes the sum of the *taxable purpose proportions of the *adjustable values of *depreciating assets allocated to the pool under subsection 328-185(3) for that year

    .

    SECTION 328-200  

    328-200   Closing pool balance  


    You work out the closing pool balance of your *general small business pool for an income year in this way: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Add to the * opening pool balance of the pool for the income year:

  • (a) the sum of the * taxable purpose proportions of the * adjustable values of * depreciating assets you started to use, or have * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose during the income year and that are allocated to the pool; and
  • (b) the taxable purpose proportion of any cost addition amounts (see subsection 328-190(3) ) for the income year for assets allocated to the pool.

  • Step 2.

    Subtract from the step 1 amount:

  • (a) the * taxable purpose proportions of the * termination values of * depreciating assets allocated to the pool and for which a * balancing adjustment event occurred during the income year; and
  • (b) your deduction under subsection 328-190(1) for the pool for the income year; and
  • (c) your deductions under subsection 328-190(2) for * depreciating assets you started to use, or have * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose during the income year and that are allocated to the pool; and
  • (d) your deductions under subsection 328-190(3) for the income year for cost addition amounts for assets allocated to the pool.

  • Step 3.

    The result is the closing pool balance of the pool for the income year.

    Note:

    A transferor does not subtract anything for certain balancing adjustment events under paragraph (a) of step 2 if roll-over relief under section 40-340 is chosen: see sections 328-243 and 328-245 .

    SECTION 328-205   Estimate of taxable use  

    328-205(1)    


    You must, for the first income year for which you are, or last were, a *small business entity, make a reasonable estimate for that year of the proportion you will use, or have * installed ready for use, each * depreciating asset that you * held just before, and at the start of, that year for a * taxable purpose if:


    (a) the asset has not previously been allocated to your * general small business pool; and


    (b) you have started to use it, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose; and


    (c) you have chosen to calculate your deductions for it under this Subdivision.

    Note 1:

    That proportion will be 100% for an asset that you expect to use, or have installed ready for use, solely for a taxable purpose.

    Note 2:

    Your estimate will be zero for an income year if another provision of this Act denies a deduction for that year: see section 328-230 .

    Note 3:

    This subsection does not apply to a transferee for certain assets if roll-over relief under section 40-340 is chosen: see sections 328-243 and 328-257 .


    328-205(2)    


    You must also make this estimate for each * depreciating asset that you * hold and start to use, or have * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose during an income year for which you are a *small business entity and you choose to use this Subdivision. You must make the estimate for the income year in which you start to use it, or have it installed ready for use, for such a purpose.

    328-205(3)    
    The taxable purpose proportion of a * depreciating asset ' s * adjustable value, or of an amount included in the second element of its * cost, is that part of that amount that represents:


    (a) the proportion you estimated under subsection (1) or (2); or


    (b) if you have had to make an adjustment under section 328-225 for the asset - the proportion most recently applicable to the asset under that section.

    Note:

    An amount included in the second element of the cost of a depreciating asset is referred to in this Division as a cost addition amount: see subsection 328-190(3) .


    328-205(4)    


    The taxable purpose proportion of a * depreciating asset ' s * termination value is that part of that amount that represents:


    (a) if you have not had to make an adjustment under section 328-225 for the asset - the proportion you estimated under subsection (1) or (2); or


    (b) if you have had to make at least one such adjustment - the average of:


    (i) the proportion you estimated under subsection (1) or (2); and

    (ii) the proportion applicable to the asset for each of the 3 income years you * held the asset after the one in which the asset was allocated to the pool.


    (c) (Repealed by No 23 of 2012)

    Example:

    When Bria ' s computer was allocated to her general small business pool for the 2012-13 income year, she estimated that it would be used 50% for her florist business. Due to increasing business, Bria estimates the computer ' s use to be 70% for the 2013-14 year, and 90% for the 2014-15 year. She makes an adjustment under section 328-225 for both those years.

    Bria sells the computer for $1,000 at the start of the 2016-17 income year. She must now average the business use estimates for the computer for the year it was allocated to the pool and the next 3 years to work out the taxable purpose proportion of its termination value. The average is worked out as follows:

  • • 50% (original estimate); plus
  • • 70% (2013-14 estimate); plus
  • • 90% (2014-15 estimate); plus
  • • 90% (no change on previous year);
  • = 300% ÷ 4 = 75%

    The taxable purpose proportion of the computer ' s termination value is, therefore:

    75% of $1,000 = $750


    SECTION 328-210   Low pool value  

    328-210(1)    


    Your deduction for a *general small business pool for an income year is the amount worked out under subsection (2) (instead of an amount calculated under section 328-190 ) if that amount is less than $1,000 but more than zero.
    Note 1:

    See section 328-215 for the result when the amount is less than zero.

    Note 2:

    This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    328-210(2)    


    The amount is the sum of:


    (a) the pool ' s *opening pool balance for the income year; and


    (b) the *taxable purpose proportion of the *adjustable value of each *depreciating asset you started to use, or have *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose during the income year and that is allocated to the pool; and


    (c) the taxable purpose proportion of any cost addition amounts (see subsection 328-190(3) ) for the income year for assets allocated to the pool;

    less the sum of the taxable purpose proportion of the *termination values of depreciating assets allocated to the pool and for which a *balancing adjustment event occurred during the income year.


    328-210(3)    


    In that case, the * closing pool balance of the pool for that income year then becomes zero.
    Example:

    Amanda ' s Graphics is a small business entity for the 2014-15 income year and chooses to use this Subdivision for that year. The business has an opening pool balance of $8,500 for its general small business pool for that year.

    During that year, Amanda acquired a new computer for $2,000. The taxable purpose proportion of its adjustable value is:

    $2,000 × 80% business use estimate = $1,600

    Amanda also sold her business car for $9,600 during that year. The car was used 100% in the business.

    To work out whether she can deduct an amount under this section, Amanda uses this calculation:

    $8,500 + $1,600 − $9,600 = $500

    Because the result is less than $1,000, Amanda can deduct the $500 for the income year. The pool ' s closing balance for the year is zero.


    SECTION 328-215   Disposal etc. of depreciating assets  

    328-215(1)    
    This section sets out adjustments you may have to make if a * balancing adjustment event occurs for a * depreciating asset for which you calculate your deductions under this Subdivision.

    328-215(2)    


    If the asset is allocated to your *general small business pool and:


    (a) the * closing pool balance of the pool for the income year in which the event occurred is less than zero; or


    (b) the amount worked out under subsection 328-210(2) for that income year is less than zero;

    the amount by which that balance or amount is less than zero is included in your assessable income for that year.


    328-215(3)    
    In that case, the * closing pool balance of the pool for that income year then becomes zero.

    328-215(4)    


    If the asset was one for which you deducted an amount under section 328-180 (about assets costing less than $1,000), you include the * taxable purpose proportion of the asset ' s * termination value in your assessable income.

    SECTION 328-220   What happens if you are not a small business entity or do not choose to use this Subdivision for an income year  

    328-220(1)    


    If you are not a *small business entity for an income year or you do not choose to use this Subdivision for that year, this Subdivision continues to apply to your *general small business pool for that year and later income years.

    328-220(2)    


    However, *depreciating assets you started to use, or have *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose during an income year for which you are not a *small business entity or do not choose to use this Subdivision cannot be allocated to your *general small business pool under this Subdivision until an income year for which you are a small business entity and you choose to use this Subdivision.

    328-220(3)    


    This section applies to a transferee referred to in subsection 328-243(1) or (1A) who:


    (a) was not a *small business entity for the income year in which the relevant *balancing adjustment events occurred; or


    (b) did not choose to use this Subdivision for that year;

    as if the transferee had been a small business entity for an earlier income year and had chosen to use this Subdivision for the earlier year. This rule applies even if roll-over relief is not chosen.


    SECTION 328-225   Change in business use  

    328-225(1)    
    You must, for each income year (the present year ) after the year in which a * depreciating asset is allocated to a pool, make a reasonable estimate of the proportion you use the asset, or have it * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose in that year.

    Note:

    This section is modified in its application to a transferee for certain assets if roll-over relief under section 40-340 is chosen: see sections 328-243 and 328-257 .


    328-225(1A)    
    You must make an adjustment for the present year if your estimate for that year under subsection (1) is different by more than 10 percentage points from:


    (a) your original estimate (see section 328-205 ); or


    (b) if you have made an adjustment under this section - the most recent estimate you made under subsection (1) that resulted in an adjustment under this section.

    328-225(2)    


    The adjustment is made to the * opening pool balance of the * general small business pool to which the asset was allocated, and it must be made before you calculate your deduction under this Subdivision for the present year.
    Note:

    The opening pool balance will be reduced if the adjustment worked out under subsection (3) is a negative amount. It will be increased if the adjustment is positive.


    328-225(3)    


    The adjustment is:

    where:

    asset value
    is:


    (a) for a * depreciating asset you started to use, or have * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose during an income year for which you were a *small business entity and chose to use this Subdivision - the asset ' s * adjustable value at that time; or


    (b) for an asset you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you were not a *small business entity or did not choose to use this Subdivision - its adjustable value at the start of the income year for which it was allocated to a * general small business pool;

    increased by any amounts included in the second element of the asset ' s * cost from the time mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b) until the beginning of the income year for which you are making the adjustment.

    last estimate
    is:


    (a) your original estimate of the proportion you use, or have * installed ready for use, a * depreciating asset for a * taxable purpose (see section 328-205 ); or


    (b) if you have made an adjustment under this section - the latest estimate taken into account under this section.

    present year estimate
    is your reasonable estimate of the proportion you use the asset, or have it * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose during the present year.

    reduction factor
    is the number worked out under subsection (4).


    328-225(4)    
    The reduction factor in the formula in subsection (3) is:


    (a) for a * depreciating asset you started to use, or have * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose during an income year for which you were a *small business entity and chose to use this Subdivision:



    (b) for an asset you started to use, or have * installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you were not a *small business entity or did not choose to use this Subdivision:


    where:

    n
    is the number of income years (counting part of an income year as a whole year) before the present year for which you have deducted or can deduct an amount for the * depreciating asset under this Subdivision.

    rate
    is the rate applicable to the pool to which the asset is allocated.

    Note:

    The reduction factor for a depreciating asset in your general small business pool which you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you were not a small business entity or did not choose to use this Subdivision is:

  • • 0.7 for the income year after it is allocated to the pool; and
  • • 0.49 for the income year after that; and
  • • 0.343 for the income year after that.
  • The reduction factor for a depreciating asset in your general small business pool which you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you were a small business entity and chose to use this Subdivision is:

  • • 0.85 for the income year after it is allocated to the pool; and
  • • 0.595 for the income year after that; and
  • • 0.417 for the income year after that.


  • Exceptions

    328-225(5)    
    However:


    (a) you do not need to make an estimate or an adjustment under this section for a *depreciating asset for an income year that is at least 3 income years after the income year in which the asset was allocated; and


    (b) you cannot make an adjustment for a depreciating asset if your reasonable estimate of the proportion you use a depreciating asset, or have it * installed ready for use, for a * taxable purpose changes in a later income year by the 10 percentage points mentioned in subsection (1) or less.


    SECTION 328-230  

    328-230   Estimate where deduction denied  


    This Subdivision applies to you as if you had estimated that you will not use, or have * installed ready for use, a * depreciating asset at all for a * taxable purpose during an income year if a provision of this Act outside this Division denies a deduction for the asset for that year.

    SECTION 328-235   Interaction with Divisions 85 and 86  

    328-235(1)    


    Despite sections 85-10 and 86-60 , if you are a *small business entity for an income year you can deduct amounts for * depreciating assets under this Subdivision.

    328-235(2)    


    However, you cannot deduct an amount for a * car under this Subdivision if, had you not been a *small business entity and chosen to use this Subdivision, sections 86-60 and 86-70 would have prevented you deducting an amount for it.

    328-237   (Repealed) SECTION 328-237 Special deduction for certain motor vehicles  
    (Repealed by No 96 of 2014)

    328-240   (Repealed) SECTION 328-240 Roll-over relief for partnership changes  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2005)

    Special rules about roll-overs

    SECTION 328-243   Roll-over relief  

    328-243(1A)    


    There is roll-over relief under subsection 40-340(1) (as affected by subsection 40-340(2) ) if:


    (a) *balancing adjustment events occur for *depreciating assets on a day (the BAE day ) because an entity (the transferor ) disposes of the assets in an income year to another entity (the transferee ); and


    (b) the disposal involves a *CGT event; and


    (c) the conditions in item 1, 2, 3 or 8 of the table in subsection 40-340(1) are satisfied; and


    (d) deductions for the assets are calculated under this Subdivision; and


    (e) the transferor and the transferee jointly choose the roll-over relief; and


    (f) the condition in subsection (2) is met.


    328-243(1)    


    Roll-over relief can be chosen under subsection 40-340(3) if:


    (a) *balancing adjustment events occur for *depreciating assets on a day (the BAE day ) because of subsection 40-295(2) ; and


    (b) deductions for the assets are calculated under this Subdivision; and


    (c) the entity or entities that had an interest in the assets just before the balancing adjustment events occurred (the transferor ) and the entity or entities that have an interest in the assets just after the events occurred (the transferee ) jointly choose the roll-over relief; and


    (d) the condition in subsection (2) is met.


    328-243(2)    
    All of the *depreciating assets that, just before the *balancing adjustment events occurred, were:


    (a) *held by the transferor; and


    (b) allocated to the transferor ' s *general small business pool;

    must be held by the transferee just after those events occurred.


    SECTION 328-245   Consequences of roll-over  

    328-245(1)    
    The transferor does not subtract anything for the * balancing adjustment events under:


    (a) paragraph (a) of step 2 in the method statement in section 328-200 ; or


    (b) subsection 328-210(2) .

    328-245(2)    
    Subsection 328-215(4) does not apply to the * balancing adjustment events for the transferor.

    328-245(3)    
    A choice made by the transferor for a * depreciating asset under subsection 328-175(3) (about primary production assets) applies to the transferee as if it had been made by the transferee.

    328-245(4)    
    Sections 328-247 to 328-257 have effect.

     View history note

    SECTION 328-247   Pool deductions  

    328-247(1)    


    The amount that can be deducted for the transferor ' s * general small business pool for the income year (the BAE year ) in which the * balancing adjustment events occurred under subsection 328-190(1) or section 328-210 for the BAE year is split equally between:


    (a) the transferor and the transferee; or


    (b) if there are 2 or more occurrences of balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence - the entities concerned.

    Example:

    John and Dave operate a dry cleaning business in partnership (the transferor). The transferor is a small business entity for the relevant income year and has chosen to use this Subdivision for that year. On the 90th day of an income year, Jonathan joins the partnership. The new partnership (the transferee) is a small business entity for the income year and chooses to use this Subdivision for that year. Had there been no partnership change, a deduction of $6,600 would have been available for the transferor ' s general small business pool. The transferor and transferee jointly choose the roll-over.

    The deduction available to the transferor and the transferee for the pool under section 328-210 is $3,300 each.


    328-247(2)    


    The transferor cannot deduct any amount for the transferor ' s * general small business pool for an income year after the BAE year.

    SECTION 328-250   Deductions for assets first used in BAE year  

    328-250(1)    


    This section applies in working out the amount that the transferor or transferee can deduct for the BAE year under subsection 328-180(1) (assets costing less than $1,000) or subsection 328-190(2) (assets that will be pooled) for a *depreciating asset that the transferor or transferee started to use, or have *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose during the BAE year.
    Note:

    This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .



    Asset first used by transferor

    328-250(2)    


    If the asset was first used or *installed ready for use by the transferor, the amount that can be deducted under subsection 328-180(1) or 328-190(2) for the asset for the BAE year is split equally between:


    (a) the transferor and the transferee; or


    (b) if there are 2 or more occurrences of *balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence - the entities concerned.



    Asset first used by transferee

    328-250(3)    


    If the asset was first used or *installed ready for use by the transferee:


    (a) the transferor cannot deduct anything for the asset for the BAE year; and


    (b) the amount that can be deducted under subsection 328-180(1) or 328-190(2) for the asset for the BAE year is:


    (i) deductible by the transferee; or

    (ii) if there are 2 or more occurrences of *balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence - split equally between the entities concerned (except ones that did not use the asset or have it installed ready for use).
    Example:

    To continue the example from section 328-247 , the transferee buys an asset on the 150th day of the BAE year for $800.

    On the 250th day of the year, Evan joins the transferee partnership. The new transferee partnership is a small business entity for the BAE year, and chooses to use this Subdivision for that year, and a further roll-over is chosen.

    The original transferor cannot deduct anything for the asset. The original transferee (now a transferor) and the new transferee can deduct $400 each.



    Special rule for assets costing less than $1,000

    328-250(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies if:


    (a) the transferor started to use, or have *installed ready for use, an asset of a kind mentioned in paragraph 328-180(1)(b) during the BAE year; and


    (b) a *balancing adjustment event occurs for that asset before the BAE day.

    Note:

    This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    328-250(5)    
    The transferee cannot deduct anything for the asset for the BAE year, and subsection 328-215(4) does not apply to the transferee in relation to the asset.

    SECTION 328-253   Deductions for cost addition amounts  

    328-253(1)    
    This section applies in working out the amount that the transferor or transferee can deduct for the BAE year under subsection 328-180(2) or 328-190(3) for expenditure incurred by the transferor or transferee during the BAE year that is included in the second element of the *cost of a depreciating asset.

    Expenditure incurred by transferor

    328-253(2)    
    If the expenditure was incurred by the transferor, the amount that can be deducted under subsection 328-180(2) or 328-190(3) for the BAE year is split equally between:


    (a) the transferor and the transferee; or


    (b) if there are 2 or more occurrences of *balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence - the entities concerned.



    Expenditure incurred by transferee

    328-253(3)    
    If the expenditure was incurred by the transferee:


    (a) the transferor cannot deduct anything for the expenditure for the BAE year; and


    (b) the amount that can be deducted under subsection 328-180(2) or 328-190(3) for the expenditure for the BAE year is:


    (i) deductible by the transferee; or

    (ii) if there are 2 or more occurrences of * balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence - split equally between the entities concerned.


    Special rule for expenditure on assets costing less than $1,000

    328-253(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies if:


    (a) the transferor incurred the expenditure in relation to an asset of a kind mentioned in paragraph 328-180(1)(b) ; and


    (b) a *balancing adjustment event occurs for that asset before the BAE day.

    Note:

    This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    328-253(5)    
    The transferee cannot deduct anything for the expenditure for the BAE year, and subsection 328-215(4) does not apply to the transferee in relation to the asset.

    SECTION 328-255   Closing pool balance etc. below zero  

    328-255(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the * closing pool balance of the transferor ' s * general small business pool for the BAE year is less than zero; or


    (b) the amount worked out under subsection 328-210(2) for the pool for the BAE year is less than zero;

    because a * balancing adjustment event occurred for an asset allocated to that pool during that year.


    328-255(2)    
    The amount included in assessable income under subsection 328-215(2) is split equally between:


    (a) the transferor and transferee; or


    (b) if there are 2 or more occurrences of * balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence - the entities concerned.


    SECTION 328-257   Taxable use  

    328-257(1)    
    This section applies to * depreciating assets (the previously held assets ) that were * held by the transferor just before the * balancing adjustment events occurred.

    328-257(2)    
    Subsection 328-205(1) (about estimates of taxable use) does not apply to previously held assets in the hands of the transferee for the BAE year. Instead, the transferee uses for the BAE year:


    (a) the estimate made by the transferor under that subsection for the asset; or


    (b) if the transferor had made one or more estimates for the asset under subsection 328-255(1) that resulted in an adjustment under section 328-225 (about change in business use) - that estimate or the most recent of those estimates.

    328-257(3)    
    Section 328-225 applies to the transferee for each previously held asset for income years after the BAE year as if:


    (a) the transferee had * held the asset during the period that the transferor held it; and


    (b) estimates applicable to the transferor for the asset under that section were also applicable to the transferee.


    Subdivision 328-E - Trading stock for small and medium business entities  

    Guide to Subdivision 328-E

    SECTION 328-280   What this Subdivision is about  


    Small and medium business entities can choose not to account for their trading stock in some circumstances. This Subdivision modifies the rules in Division 70 about trading stock for those entities.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    328-285 Trading stock for small and medium business entities
    328-290 (Repealed by No 80 of 2007 )
    328-295 Value of trading stock on hand

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 328-285   Trading stock for small and medium business entities  

    328-285(1)    


    You can choose not to account for changes in the * value of your *trading stock for an income year if:


    (a) you are a *small business entity, or an entity covered by subsection (2), for that year; and


    (b) the difference between the value of all your trading stock on hand at the start of that year and the value you reasonably estimate of all your trading stock on hand at the end of that year is not more than $5,000.

    Note 1:

    As a result, sections 70-35 and 70-45 (about comparing the value of each item of trading stock on hand at the start and end of an income year) will not apply to you for the income year.

    Note 2:

    When making a reasonable estimate of the value of trading stock on hand:

  • (a) special valuation rules may be used, for example, obsolete stock, natural increase of live stock, horse breeding stock; and
  • (b) the estimated value disregards an amount equal to the amount of input tax credits (if any) to which you would be entitled for an item if the acquisition of the item had been solely for a creditable purpose: see subsection 70-45(1A) .
  • Note 3:

    If you choose to account for changes in the value of your trading stock for an income year, you will have to do a stocktake and account for the change in the value of all your trading stock: see Subdivision 70-C .


    328-285(2)    


    An entity is covered by this subsection for an income year if:

    (a)    the entity is not a *small business entity for the income year; and

    (b)    the entity would be a small business entity for the income year if:


    (i) each reference in Subdivision 328-C (about what is a small business entity) to $10 million were instead a reference to $50 million; and

    (ii) the reference in paragraph 328-110(5)(b) to a small business entity were instead a reference to an entity covered by this subsection.

    328-290   (Repealed) SECTION 328-290 Adjustments in certain cases  
    (Repealed by No 80 of 2007 )

    SECTION 328-295   Value of trading stock on hand  

    328-295(1)    


    If you make a choice under section 328-285 for an income year, the * value of all your * trading stock on hand at the start of the income year is:


    (a) the same amount as was taken into account under this Act at the end of the previous income year; or


    (b) zero if no item of trading stock was taken into account under this Act at the end of the previous income year.

    Note:

    The amount taken into account at the end of the previous income year is worked out under either section 70-45 or subsection (2) of this section.


    328-295(2)    


    If you make a choice under section 328-285 for an income year, this Act applies to you as if the * value of all your * trading stock on hand at the end of the year were equal to the value of all your trading stock on hand at the start of the year.
    Note:

    If you do not make a choice under section 328-285 , the value of trading stock on hand at the end of the year is worked out using section 70-45 .

    Example:

    Angela operates a riding school, and also sells riding gear. Her business is a small business entity for the 2008-09 income year and makes a choice under section 328-285 for that year.

    At the start of the 2008-09 income year, the opening value of Angela ' s trading stock is $30,000. Using her reliable inventory system, she estimates the closing value to be $34,000.

    The closing value for the 2008-09 income year, and the opening value for the 2009-10 income year, will be $30,000.


    Subdivision 328-F - Small business income tax offset  

    Guide to Subdivision 328-F

    SECTION 328-350   What this Subdivision is about  


    You may be entitled to a tax offset if you are an individual:

  • (a) who is a small business entity; or
  • (b) whose assessable income includes a share of the net small business income of an unincorporated small business entity; or
  • (c) whose assessable income includes an amount because you are a partner in a partnership, or a beneficiary in a trust, that is a small business entity.
  • In working out whether you are or another entity is a small business entity, a special $5 million turnover threshold applies (see section 328-357 ).


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    328-355 Entitlement to the small business income tax offset
    328-357 Special meaning of small business entity for the purposes of this Subdivision - $5 million turnover threshold
    328-360 Amount of your tax offset
    328-365 Net small business income
    328-370 Relevant attributable deductions
    328-375 Modification if you are under 18 years old

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 328-355  

    328-355   Entitlement to the small business income tax offset  


    You are entitled to a *tax offset for an income year if you are an individual:


    (a) who is a *small business entity for the income year; or


    (b) whose assessable income for the income year includes an amount that is a share of the *net small business income, for the income year, of a small business entity that is not a *corporate tax entity; or


    (c) whose assessable income for the income year includes an amount that:


    (i) would not have been so included if you had not been a partner in a partnership, or a beneficiary in a trust, that is a small business entity for the income year; and

    (ii) is not included in the partnership ' s or trust ' s assessable income for an income year; and

    (iii) would have formed part of the partnership ' s or trust ' s net small business income for an income year if the amount were included in the partnership ' s or trust ' s assessable income for an income year.
    Note:

    This section does not apply to an individual in his or her capacity as the trustee of a trust(see subsection 960-100(4) ).

    SECTION 328-357  

    328-357   Special meaning of small business entity for the purposes of this Subdivision - $5 million turnover threshold  


    For the purposes of this Subdivision, in working out whether you are a *small business entity for an income year, assume that each reference in section 328-110 to $10 million were a reference to $5 million.

    SECTION 328-360   Amount of your tax offset  

    328-360(1)    


    The amount of your *tax offset is equal to 16% of the following:


    Your total net small business income for the income year
    ×

    Your basic income tax liability for the income year
    Your taxable income for the income year

    where:

    your total net small business income for the income year
    means so much of the sum of the following as does not exceed your taxable income for the income year:


    (a) your *net small business income for the income year, if you are a *small business entity for the income year;


    (b) an amount referred to in paragraph 328-355(b) or (c) that is included in your assessable income for the income year, reduced (but not below zero) by your deductions to the extent that they are attributable to that amount and covered by section 328-370 .

    Note:

    If you are under 18 years old, your total net small business income will probably be worked out under section 328-375 .


    328-360(2)    
    However, the amount of your *tax offset is $1,000 if the amount worked out under subsection (1) exceeds $1,000.

    Note:

    Your tax offset is capped at $1,000 regardless of the number of small business entities that cause you to be entitled to the tax offset for the income year.


    SECTION 328-365   Net small business income  

    328-365(1)    
    A *small business entity ' s net small business income for an income year is the result of:


    (a) working out the entity ' s assessable income for the income year to the extent that it relates to the entity carrying on a *business, but disregarding:


    (i) any *net capital gain; and

    (ii) any *personal services income not produced from conducting a *personal services business; and


    (b) subtracting the entity ' s deductions to the extent that they are attributable to that assessable income and covered by section 328-370 .

    328-365(2)    
    However, the entity ' s net small business income for the income year is zero if that result is less than zero.

    SECTION 328-370  

    328-370   Relevant attributable deductions  


    For the purposes of this Subdivision, this section covers all attributable deductions other than any under:


    (a) section 25-5 (about tax-related expenses); or


    (b) Division 30 (about gifts or contributions); or


    (c) Subdivision 290-C (about personal superannuation contributions).

    SECTION 328-375   Modification if you are under 18 years old  

    328-375(1)    
    Despite subsection 328-360(1) , your total net small business income for the income year is worked out under this section if you are a prescribed person (within the meaning of section 102AC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) for the income year.

    328-375(2)    


    Your total net small business income for the income year is the result of:


    (a) working out your business income (within the meaning of subsection 102AE(5) of that Act) for the income year to the extent that it relates to you carrying on:


    (i) a *business as a *small business entity for the income year; or

    (ii) a business as a partner in a partnership, if the partnership is a small business entity for the income year; and


    (b) subtracting your deductions, and each partnership ' s deductions, to the extent that they are attributable to that business income and covered by section 328-370 .

    328-375(3)    


    However, your total net small business income for the income year is:


    (a) zero if that result is less than zero; or


    (b) equal to your taxable income for the income year if that result exceeds that taxable income.

    Subdivision 328-G - Restructures of small businesses  

    Guide to Subdivision 328-G

    SECTION 328-420   What this Subdivision is about  


    There are tax-neutral consequences for a small business entity that restructures the ownership of the assets of the business, without changing the ultimate economic ownership of the assets.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Object of this Subdivision
    328-425 Object of this Subdivision
    Requirements of a roll-over under this Subdivision
    328-430 When a roll-over is available
    328-435 Genuine restructures - safe harbour rule
    328-440 Ultimate economic ownership - discretionary trusts
    328-445 Residency requirement
    Consequences of a roll-over under this Subdivision
    328-450 Small business transfers not to affect income tax positions
    328-455 Effect of small business restructures on transferred cost of assets
    328-460 Effect of small business restructures on acquisition times of pre-CGT assets
    328-465 New membership interests as consideration for transfer of assets
    328-470 Membership interests affected by transfers of assets
    328-475 Small business restructures involving assets already subject to small business roll-over

    Object of this Subdivision

    SECTION 328-425  

    328-425   Object of this Subdivision  


    The object of this Subdivision is to facilitate flexibility for owners of small business entities to restructure their businesses, and the way their business assets are held, while disregarding tax gains and losses that would otherwise arise.

    Requirements for a roll-over under this Subdivision

    SECTION 328-430   When a roll-over is available  

    328-430(1)    
    A roll-over under this Subdivision is available in relation to an asset that, under a transaction, an entity (the transferor ) transfers to one or more other entities ( transferees ) if:


    (a) the transaction is, or is a part of, a genuine restructure of an ongoing *business; and


    (b) each party to the transfer is an entity to which any one or more of the following applies:


    (i) it is a *small business entity for the income year during which the transfer occurred;

    (ii) it has an *affiliate that is a small business entity for that income year;

    (iii) it is *connected with an entity that is a small business entity for that income year;

    (iv) it is a partner in a partnership that is a small business entity for that income year; and


    (c) the transaction does not have the effect of materially changing:


    (i) which individual has, or which individuals have, the ultimate economic ownership of the asset; and

    (ii) if there is more than one such individual - each such individual ' s share of that ultimate economic ownership; and


    (d) the asset is a *CGT asset (other than a *depreciating asset) that is, at the time the transfer takes effect:


    (i) if subparagraph (b)(i) applies - an *active asset; or

    (ii) if subparagraph (b)(ii) or (iii) applies - an active asset in relation to which subsection 152-10(1A) is satisfied in that income year, or would be satisfied in that income year if paragraph 152-10(1AA)(b) were disregarded; or

    (iii) if subparagraph (b)(iv) applies - an active asset and an interest in an asset of the partnership referred to in that subparagraph; and


    (e) the transferor and each transferee meet the residency requirement in section 328-445 for an entity; and


    (f) the transferor and each transferee choose to apply a roll-over under this Subdivision in relation to the assets transferred under the transaction.

    Note:

    The roll-over of a depreciating asset transferred in the restructuring of a small business is addressed in item 8 of the table in subsection 40-340(1) .


    328-430(2)    
    However, a roll-over under this Subdivision is not available if the transferor, or any transferee, is either an *exempt entity or a *complying superannuation entity.

    SECTION 328-435  

    328-435   Genuine restructures - safe harbour rule  


    For the purposes of paragraph 328-430(1)(a) (but without limiting that paragraph), a transaction is, or is a part of, a genuine restructure of an ongoing *business if, in the 3 year period after the transaction takes effect:


    (a) there is no change in ultimate economic ownership of any of the significant assets of the business (other than *trading stock) that were transferred under the transaction; and


    (b) those significant assets continue to be *active assets; and


    (c) there is no significant or material use of those significant assets for private purposes.

    SECTION 328-440  

    328-440   Ultimate economic ownership - discretionary trusts  


    For the purposes of paragraph 328-430(1)(c) , a transaction does not have the effect of changing the ultimate economic ownership of an asset, or any individual ' s share of that ultimate economic ownership, if:


    (a) either or both of the following applies:


    (i) just before the transaction took effect, the asset was included in the property of a *non-fixed trust that was a *family trust;

    (ii) just after the transaction takes effect, the asset is included in the property of a non-fixed trust that is a family trust; and


    (b) every individual who, just before the transfer took effect, had the ultimate economic ownership of the asset was a member of the family group (within the meaning of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) relating to the trust or trusts referred to in paragraph (a); and


    (c) every individual who, just after the transfer takes effect, has the ultimate economic ownership of the asset is a member of that family group.

    SECTION 328-445  

    328-445   Residency requirement  


    For the purposes of paragraph 328-430(1)(e) , the residency requirement for an entity is that:


    (a) if the entity is an individual or a company - the entity is an Australian resident; or


    (b) if the entity is a trust - it is a *resident trust for CGT purposes; or


    (c) if the entity is a partnership (other than a *corporate limited partnership) - at least one of the partners is an Australian resident; or


    (d) if the entity is a corporate limited partnership - it is, under section 94T of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , a resident for the purposes of the *income tax law.

    Consequences of a roll-over under this Subdivision

    SECTION 328-450   Small business transfers not to affect income tax positions  

    328-450(1)    
    Except as provided by this Subdivision, a transfer of an asset has no direct consequences under the *income tax law if:


    (a) the transfer occurs under a transaction in relation to which section 328-430 applies; and


    (b) a roll-over under this Subdivision is available under that section in relation to the asset.

    Example:

    If the transfer were a transfer of the asset from a company to a shareholder, it would not be treated as a payment of a dividend under Division 7A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    328-450(2)    
    To avoid doubt, this section does not affect the application of the *income tax law in relation to:


    (a) anything that happens in relation to the asset that does not directly relate to the transfer; or


    (b) the ownership of the asset at any time.

    SECTION 328-455   Effect of small business restructures on transferred cost of assets  

    328-455(1)    
    The *income tax law applies to an entity in relation to the transfer of an asset by the entity, or to the entity, as if the transfer takes place for the asset ' s *roll-over cost if:


    (a) the transfer occurs under a transaction in relation to which section 328-430 applies; and


    (b) a roll-over under this Subdivision is available under that section in relation to the asset.

    328-455(2)    
    The asset ' s roll-over cost is whichever of the following amounts is applicable in relation to the transfer:


    (a) in relation to the application of subsection (1) to the asset as a *CGT asset (other than *trading stock, a *revenue asset or a *depreciating asset) - the transferor ' s *cost base for the asset just before the transfer takes effect;


    (b) in relation to the application of subsection (1) to the asset as trading stock - the amount equal to:


    (i) the *cost of the item for the transferor; or

    (ii) if the transferor held the item as trading stock at the start of the income year - the *value of the item for the transferor then;


    (c) in relation to the application of subsection (1) to the asset as a revenue asset - the amount that would give rise to the transferor not making a profit or a loss on the transfer.

    SECTION 328-460  

    328-460   Effect of small business restructures on acquisition times of pre-CGT assets  


    For the purposes of applying subsection 328-455(1) to the asset as a *CGT asset (other than a *revenue asset) that is a *pre-CGT asset, a transferee is taken to have *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

    SECTION 328-465   New membership interests as consideration for transfer of assets  

    328-465(1)    
    If:


    (a) section 328-455 applies in relation to the transfer of an asset under a transaction; and


    (b) the transaction provides for *membership interests to be issued; and


    (c) the membership interests constitute all or part of the consideration provided for the transfer of assets ( transferred assets ) under the transaction;

    then:


    (d) the first element of the membership interests ' *cost base is the sum of:


    (i) the *roll-over costs of the transferred assets that are neither *depreciating assets nor *pre-CGT assets; and

    (ii) the *adjustable values of the transferred assets that are depreciating assets;
    (less any liabilities that a transferee of any of the transferred assets undertakes to discharge in respect of the transferred assets) divided by the number of membership interests; and


    (e) the first element of the membership interests ' *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

    328-465(2)    
    However, if the *membership interests constituted only a part of the total consideration provided for the transfer of the transferred assets, reduce accordingly the amounts worked out under paragraphs (1)(d) and (e).

    SECTION 328-470  

    328-470   Membership interests affected by transfers of assets  


    If:


    (a) section 328-455 applies in relation to the transfer of an asset under a transaction; and


    (b) an entity holds, either directly or indirectly:


    (i) a *membership interest in the transferor or a transferee; or

    (ii) a membership interest that was issued as provided for by the transaction;

    disregard a *capital loss from a *CGT event that arises in relation to the membership interest after the transaction takes effect, except to the extent that the entity can demonstrate that the loss is attributable to a matter other than the transaction.

    SECTION 328-475  

    328-475   Small business restructures involving assets already subject to small business roll-over  


    If:


    (a) section 328-455 applies in relation to the transfer of an asset (the transferred asset ) of the transferor ' s business to one or more transferees; and


    (b) the transferor has previously chosen a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E for a *CGT event that happened in relation to a *CGT asset for which the transferred asset is a replacement asset (within the meaning of sections 104-185 , 104-190 , 104-197 and 104-198 );

    sections 104-185 , 104-190 , 104-197 and 104-198 apply to each transferee (to the extent of the transferee ' s interest in the asset) as if the transferee, and not the transferor, made that choice.

    Note:

    Sections 104-185 , 104-190 , 104-197 and 104-198 provide for capital gains to arise under CGT events J2, J5 and J6, after the choice of a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E has deferred the making of a capital gain.

    (Repealed) Division 330 - Mining and quarrying  

    (Repealed) Division 345 - FHSAs  

    (Repealed) Guide to Division 345  

    345-1   (Repealed) SECTION 345-1 What this Division is about  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 345-A - Treatment of FHSA providers  

    345-5   (Repealed) SECTION 345-5 FHSA provider that is trustee of FHSA trust - tax payable  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    345-10   (Repealed) SECTION 345-10 FHSA provider that is trustee of FHSA trust - CGT to be primary code for calculating gains or losses  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    345-15   (Repealed) SECTION 345-15 FHSA provider that is an ADI (other than RSA provider) - taxable income and standard component of taxable income  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    345-20   (Repealed) SECTION 345-20 FHSA provider that is an ADI - FHSA component of taxable income  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    345-25   (Repealed) SECTION 345-25 FHSA provider that is an ADI (other than an RSA provider) - amounts that cannot be deducted  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    345-30   (Repealed) SECTION 345-30 Amounts of tax paid by FHSA providers that are ADIs  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 345-B - Treatment of FHSA holders  

    345-50   (Repealed) SECTION 345-50 Credits to and payments from FHSAs etc.  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 345-C - FHSA misuse tax  

    345-100   (Repealed) SECTION 345-100 Liability for FHSA misuse tax  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    345-110   (Repealed) SECTION 345-110 Due date for payment of FHSA misuse tax  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    345-115   (Repealed) SECTION 345-115 General interest charge  
    (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    Division 355 - Research and Development  

    Guide to Division 355  

    SECTION 355-1   What this Division is about  


    An R & D entity may be entitled to a tax offset for R & D activities. The tax offset may be a refundable tax offset if the R & D entity ' s aggregated turnover is less than $20 million.

    To be entitled to the tax offset, the R & D entity needs one or more notional deductions under this Division.

    There are 2 main kinds of notional deductions. One is for expenditure on R & D activities. The other is for the decline in value of tangible depreciating assets used for R & D activities.

    Note:

    All of these notional deductions require the R & D entity to be registered for the R & D activities under Part III of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 .

    Subdivision 355-A - Object  

    SECTION 355-5   Object  

    355-5(1)    
    The object of this Division is to encourage industry to conduct research and development activities that might otherwise not be conducted because of an uncertain return from the activities, in cases where the knowledge gained is likely to benefit the wider Australian economy.

    355-5(2)    
    This object is to be achieved by providing a tax incentive for industry to conduct, in a scientific way, experimental activities for the purpose of generating new knowledge or information in either a general or applied form (including new knowledge in the form of new or improved materials, products, devices, processes or services).

    Subdivision 355-B - Meaning of R & D activities and other terms  

    SECTION 355-20  

    355-20   R & D activities  


    R & D activities are *core R & D activities or *supporting R & D activities.

    SECTION 355-25   Core R & D activities  

    355-25(1)    
    Core R & D activities are experimental activities:


    (a) whose outcome cannot be known or determined in advance on the basis of current knowledge, information or experience, but can only be determined by applying a systematic progression of work that:


    (i) is based on principles of established science; and

    (ii) proceeds from hypothesis to experiment, observation and evaluation, and leads to logical conclusions; and


    (b) that are conducted for the purpose of generating new knowledge (including new knowledge in the form of new or improved materials, products, devices, processes or services).

    355-25(2)    
    However, none of the following activities are core R & D activities :


    (a) market research, market testing or market development, or sales promotion (including consumer surveys);


    (b) prospecting, exploring or drilling for minerals or *petroleum for the purposes of one or more of the following:


    (i) discovering deposits;

    (ii) determining more precisely the location of deposits;

    (iii) determining the size or quality of deposits;


    (c) management studies or efficiency surveys;


    (d) research in social sciences, arts or humanities;


    (e) commercial, legal and administrative aspects of patenting, licensing or other activities;


    (f) activities associated with complying with statutory requirements or standards, including one or more of the following:


    (i) maintaining national standards;

    (ii) calibrating secondary standards;

    (iii) routine testing and analysis of materials, components, products, processes, soils, atmospheres and other things;


    (g) any activity related to the reproduction of a commercial product or process:


    (i) by a physical examination of an existing system; or

    (ii) from plans, blueprints, detailed specifications or publically available information;


    (h) developing, modifying or customising computer software for the dominant purpose of use by any of the following entities for their internal administration (including the internal administration of their business functions):


    (i) the entity (the developer ) for which the software is developed, modified or customised;

    (ii) an entity *connected with the developer;

    (iii) an *affiliate of the developer, or an entity of which the developer is an affiliate.

    SECTION 355-30   Supporting R & D activities  

    355-30(1)    
    Supporting R & D activities are activities directly related to *core R &D activities.

    355-30(2)    
    However, if an activity:


    (a) is an activity referred to in subsection 355-25(2) ; or


    (b) produces goods or services; or


    (c) is directly related to producing goods or services;

    the activity is a supporting R & D activity only if it is undertaken for the dominant purpose of supporting *core R & D activities.


    SECTION 355-35   R & D entities  

    355-35(1)    
    Each of the following is an R & D entity :


    (a) a body corporate incorporated under an *Australian law;


    (b) a body corporate incorporated under a *foreign law that is an Australian resident.

    Note:

    Each of the above paragraphs extends to a body corporate acting in its capacity as trustee of a public trading trust (see subsection 102T(9) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ).


    355-35(2)    
    A body corporate incorporated under a *foreign law that:


    (a) is a resident of a foreign country for the purposes of an agreement in force between that country and Australia that:


    (i) is a double tax agreement (as defined in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ); and

    (ii) includes a definition of permanent establishment ; and


    (b) carries on business in Australia through a permanent establishment (within the meaning of that definition) of the body corporate in Australia;

    is an R & D entity to the extent that it carries on business through that permanent establishment.


    355-35(3)    
    However, an *exempt entity cannot be an R & D entity .

    Subdivision 355-C - Entitlement to tax offset  

    SECTION 355-100   Entitlement to tax offset  


    If notional deductions are between $20,000 and $150 million

    355-100(1)    


    An *R & D entity is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year equal to the percentage, set out in the table, of the total of the amounts (if any) that the entity can deduct for the income year under any or all of the following provisions:


    (a) section 355-205 (R & D expenditure);


    (b) section 355-305 (decline in value of R & D assets);


    (c) (Repealed by No 92 of 2020)


    (d) section 355-480 (earlier year associate R & D expenditure);


    (e) section 355-520 (decline in value of R & D partnership assets);


    (f) (Repealed by No 92 of 2020)


    (g) section 355-580 (CRC contributions).


    Rate of R & D tax offset
    Item In this case: The percentage is:
    1 the *R & D entity ' s *aggregated turnover for the income year is less than $20 million (and item 2 of this table does not apply) the R & D entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the income year, plus 18.5 percentage points
    2 at any time during the income year an *exempt entity, or combination of exempt entities, would control the *R & D entity in a way described in section 328-125 (connected entities) if:
    (a) references in section 328-125 to 40% were references to 50%; and
    (b) subsection 328-125(6) were ignored
    the R & D entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the income year
    3 any other case the R & D entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the income year

    Note 1:

    The tax offset will be a refundable tax offset if item 1 of the table applies (see section 67-30 ).

    Note 2:

    The tax offset is increased under subsection (1A) of this section if item 2 or 3 of the table applies.



    R & D premium

    355-100(1A)    


    If item 2 or 3 of the table in subsection (1) applies to the *R & D entity, the amount of the *tax offset for the income year is increased by the sum of the amounts (if any) worked out for each item of the following table for that entity:


    Tiered offset rates
    Item Work out the part of the total amount mentioned in subsection 355-100(1) that: Multiply that part by this percentage:
    1 exceeds nil but does not exceed 2% of the *R & D entity ' s total expenses for the income year worked out under section 355-115 8.5%
    2 exceeds 2% of the *R & D entity ' s total expenses for the income year worked out under section 355-115 16.5%



    If notional deductions are less than $20,000

    355-100(2)    


    However, if the total amount mentioned in subsection (1) is less than $20,000, the *R & D entity is instead entitled to a *tax offset for the income year, worked out in accordance with subsections (1) and (1A), as if that amount were instead the total of the following kinds of expenditure (if any):


    Expenditure not subject to $20,000 threshold
    Item Kind of expenditure
    1 Expenditure:
    (a) that the *R & D entity can deduct under section 355-205 (R & D expenditure) for the income year; and
    (b) that was incurred to a research service provider (within the meaning of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 ) that is not an *associate of the R & D entity or of the relevant *R & D partnership (as appropriate); and
    (c) that was for the provider to provide services, within a research field for which the provider is registered under Division 4 of Part III of that Act, applicable to one or more of the *R & D activities to which the deduction relates
    2 Expenditure that the *R & D entity can deduct under section 355-580 (CRC contributions) for the income year



    If notional deductions exceed $150 million

    355-100(3)    


    Despite subsections (1) and (1A) , if the total amount mentioned in subsection (1) exceeds $150 million, the *R & D entity is instead entitled to a *tax offset for the income year equal to the sum of:

    (a)    the amount worked out in accordance with those subsections as if that amount were $150 million; and

    (b)    the product of the excess and the R & D entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the income year.


    SECTION 355-105   Deductions under this Division are notional only  

    355-105(1)    
    An amount (the notional amount ) that an *R & D entity can deduct under this Division is disregarded except for the purposes of:


    (a) working out whether the R & D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to a *tax offset; and


    (b) a provision (of this Act or any other Act) that refers to an entitlement of the R & D entity under section 355-100 to a tax offset; and


    (c) a provision (of this Act or any other Act) that:


    (i) prevents some or all of the notional amount from being deducted; or

    (ii) changes the income year for which some or all of the notional amount can be deducted; and
    Note:

    Examples are Divisions 26 and 27 of this Act, Subdivision H of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 and Part IVA of that Act.


    (d) a provision (of this Act or any other Act) that includes an amount in assessable income wholly or partly because of the notional amount; and

    Note:

    An example is Subdivision 20-A , which may include in assessable income a recoupment of a loss or outgoing if the entity can deduct an amount for the loss or outgoing.


    (e) a provision (of this Act or any other Act) that excludes expenditure from:


    (i) the *cost base or *reduced cost base of a *CGT asset; or

    (ii) an element of that cost base or reduced cost base.
    Note:

    An example is section 110-45 , which may exclude deductible expenditure from elements of the cost base of an asset.


    355-105(2)    


    Subsection (1) does not apply to amounts that the *R & D entity can deduct under the following:

    (a)    subsection 355-315(2) ;

    (b)    subsection 355-475(1) ;

    (c)    subsection 355-525(2) .


    SECTION 355-110  

    355-110   Notional deductions include prepaid expenditure  


    For the purposes of this Division, if:


    (a) apart from Subdivision H (prepaid expenditure) of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , an *R & D entity can deduct an amount under section 355-205 or 355-480 for an income year (the present year ) or an earlier income year; and


    (b) that Subdivision applies to the calculation of that amount; and


    (c) the entity can deduct an amount, as a result of that application of that Subdivision, for the present year;

    the entity is taken to be able to deduct under section 355-205 or 355-480 (as appropriate) the amount referred to in paragraph (c) for the present year.

    Note:

    Section 355-205 is about deductions for R & D expenditure. Section 355-480 is about deductions for earlier year associate R & D expenditure.

    SECTION 355-115   Working out an R & D entity ' s total expenses  

    355-115(1)    
    For the purposes of subsection 355-100(1A) , an *R & D entity ' s total expenses for an income year is the sum of the amounts covered by subsection (2).

    355-115(2)    
    The following amounts are covered by this subsection:

    (a)    the *R & D entity ' s total expenses for the income year worked out in accordance with:


    (i) the *accounting principles; or

    (ii) if accounting principles do not apply in relation to the R & D entity - commercially accepted principles relating to accounting;

    (b)    any amount the R & D entity can deduct for the income year as mentioned in subsection 355-100(1) , to the extent the amount is not covered by paragraph (a) for the income year.

    Amounts counted once only

    355-115(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (2):

    (a)    disregard an amount to which paragraph (2)(a) otherwise applies if paragraph (2)(b) has previously applied in relation to the amount; and

    (b)    disregard an amount to which paragraph (2)(b) otherwise applies if paragraph (2)(a) has previously applied in relation to the amount.

    Subdivision 355-D - Notional deductions for R & D expenditure  

    SECTION 355-200   What this Subdivision is about  


    An R & D entity can notionally deduct its expenditure on registered R & D activities for which certain conditions are met.

    There are special conditions for R & D activities conducted for foreign residents.

    SECTION 355-205   When notional deductions for R & D expenditure arise  

    355-205(1)    
    An *R & D entity can deduct for an income year (the present year ) expenditure it incurs during that year to the extent that the expenditure:


    (a) is incurred on one or more *R & D activities:


    (i) for which the R & D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for an income year; and

    (ii) that are activities to which section 355-210 (conditions for R & D activities) applies; and


    (b) if the expenditure is incurred to the R & D entity's *associate - is paid to that associate during the present year.

    Note 1:

    If the matters in subparagraphs (a)(i) and (ii) are not satisfied until a later income year, the R & D entity will need to wait until then before it can deduct the expenditure for the present year.

    Note 2:

    The R & D activities will need to be conducted during the income year the R & D entity is registered for those activities (see sections 27A and 27J of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 ).

    Note 3:

    The entity may also be able to deduct expenditure incurred to an associate in an earlier income year (see section 355-480 ).

    Note 4:

    Expenditure incurred in income years starting on or after 1 July 2011 may be deductible for activities registered for income years starting before 1 July 2011 (see section 355-200 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ).


    355-205(2)    
    This section has effect subject to section 355-225 (excluded expenditure), Subdivision 355-F (integrity rules) and subsection 355-580(3) (CRC contributions).

    SECTION 355-210   Conditions for R & D activities  

    355-210(1)    
    An *R & D activity covered by one or more of the following paragraphs is an activity to which this section applies:


    (a) the R & D activity is conducted for the *R & D entity solely within Australia;


    (b) if the R & D entity is a body corporate carrying on business through a permanent establishment (as described in subsection 355-35(2) ) - the R & D activity is conducted:


    (i) for the body corporate; but

    (ii) not for the purposes of that permanent establishment;
    and the conditions in section 355-215 (activities conducted for a body corporate by its permanent establishment) are met for the R & D activity;


    (c) the R & D activity is conducted for one or more foreign residents who are each:


    (i) incorporated under a *foreign law; and

    (ii) a resident of a foreign country for the purposes of an agreement of a kind described in subsection 355-35(2) ;
    and the conditions in section 355-220 (activities conducted for a foreign entity) are met for the R & D activity;


    (d) the R & D activity is:


    (i) conducted for the R & D entity solely outside Australia; and

    (ii) covered by a finding in force under paragraph 28C(1)(a) of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 ;


    (e) the R & D activity consists of several parts, with:


    (i) some parts being conducted for the R & D entity solely within Australia; and

    (ii) the other parts being conducted for the R & D entity outside Australia while covered by a finding in force under paragraph 28C(1)(a) of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 .
    Note:

    An activity can be covered by a finding under paragraph 28C(1)(a) of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 if the activity cannot be conducted in Australia.


    355-210(2)    
    However, an *R & D activity is not an activity to which this section applies if the activity is conducted, to a significant extent, for one or more other entities not covered by any paragraph of subsection (1).

    Note:

    An entity would not be covered by, for example, paragraph (1)(c) if the conditions in section 355-220 were not met for the R & D activity in relation to that entity.


    SECTION 355-215  

    355-215   R & D activities conducted by a permanent establishment for other parts of the body corporate 


    For the purposes of paragraph 355-210(1)(b) , the conditions for an *R & D activity are as follows:


    (a) the R & D activity is conducted solely within Australia;


    (b) if the R & D activity is a *supporting R & D activity, each corresponding *core R & D activity must be:


    (i) an activity conducted, or to be conducted, solely within Australia; and

    (ii) an activity for which the *R & D entity is or has been registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 , or could be registered for an income year if that core R & D activity were conducted during the income year;


    (c) there is written evidence that the R & D activity is conducted for the body corporate but not for the purposes of that permanent establishment.

    Note:

    The body corporate is the R & D entity to the extent that it carries on business through that permanent establishment (see subsection 355-35(2) ).

    SECTION 355-220   R & D activities conducted for a foreign entity  

    355-220(1)    
    For the purposes of paragraph 355-210(1)(c) , the conditions for an *R & D activity conducted for one or more foreign residents are as follows:


    (a) the R & D activity is conducted solely within Australia;


    (b) if the R & D activity is a *supporting R & D activity, each corresponding *core R & D activity must be:


    (i) an activity conducted, or to be conducted, solely within Australia; and

    (ii) an activity for which the *R & D entity is or has been registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 , or could be registered for an income year if that core R & D activity were conducted during the income year;


    (c) when the R & D activity is conducted:


    (i) each foreign resident is *connected with the R & D entity; or

    (ii) for each foreign resident - either the foreign resident is an *affiliate of the R & D entity or the R & D entity is an affiliate of the foreign resident;


    (d) the R & D activity is conducted:


    (i) in accordance with a written agreement binding on only the R & D entity and each foreign resident; and

    (ii) either directly by the R & D entity, or indirectly by another entity under an agreement binding on the R & D entity;


    (e) the R & D activity is not conducted in connection with an agreement covered by subsection (2).

    Note:

    An example of conducting an R & D activity indirectly under a contract is conducting the R & D activity under a subcontract, or one of a chain of subcontracts, under the contract.


    355-220(2)    
    An agreement is covered by this subsection if:


    (a) the agreement is binding on the R & D entity (the first entity ) and an R & D entity that:


    (i) is *connected with the first entity; or

    (ii) has the first entity as an *affiliate, or is an affiliate of the first entity;
    while the *R & D activity is conducted; and


    (b) the R & D activity is to be conducted under the agreement by the first entity or by an entity:


    (i) who is not bound by the agreement; and

    (ii) who is to conduct the R & D activity directly or indirectly under another agreement to which the first entity is, or will become, bound.
    Note:

    One effect of this subsection is that, even if the R & D entity has an agreement with the foreign resident for conducting the R & D activity, the R & D entity cannot deduct expenditure incurred:

  • (a) for conducting the R & D activity as a subcontractor under a subcontract with an affiliated R & D entity; or
  • (b) if the R & D entity is a subcontractor to an affiliated R & D entity - for further subcontracting the conducting of the R & D activity.

  • SECTION 355-225   Expenditure that cannot be notionally deducted  


    Expenditure on buildings, certain assets and interest

    355-225(1)    
    Sections 355-205 (deductions for R & D expenditure) and 355-480 (deductions for earlier year associate R & D expenditure) do not apply to the following expenditure:


    (a) expenditure incurred to acquire or construct:


    (i) a building or a part of a building; or

    (ii) an extension, alteration or improvement to a building;


    (b) expenditure included in the *cost of a tangible *depreciating asset for the purposes of Division 40 (as that Division applies as described in section 355-310 or otherwise);


    (c) expenditure incurred for interest (within the meaning of Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) payable to an entity.

    Note 1:

    Expenditure covered by paragraph (a) may be deductible under Division 43 (capital works).

    Note 2:

    The decline in value of an asset covered by paragraph (b) may be notionally deductible under section 355-305 .

    Note 3:

    Expenditure covered by paragraph (c) may be deductible under section 8-1 .



    Expenditure on core technology

    355-225(2)    
    Sections 355-205 (deductions for R & D expenditure) and 355-480 (deductions for earlier year associate R & D expenditure) do not apply to expenditure incurred in acquiring, or in acquiring the right to use, technology wholly or partly for the purposes of one or more *R & D activities if:


    (a) a purpose of the R & D activities was or is:


    (i) to obtain new knowledge based on that technology; or

    (ii) to create new or improved materials, products, devices, processes, techniques or services to be based on that technology; or


    (b) the R & D activities were or are an extension, continuation, development or completion of the activities that produced that technology.

    Subdivision 355-E - Notional deductions etc. for decline in value of depreciating assets used for R & D activities  

    SECTION 355-300   What this Subdivision is about  


    An R & D entity can notionally deduct the decline in value of a tangible depreciating asset used for R & D activities.

    If a balancing adjustment event later happens for the asset, the R & D entity may be able to actually deduct a further amount. Alternatively, an amount may be included in the R & D entity's assessable income.

    SECTION 355-305   When notional deductions for decline in value arise  

    355-305(1)    
    If:


    (a) an *R & D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for an income year (the present year ) for one or more *R & D activities that are activities to which section 355-210 (conditions for R & D activities) applies; and


    (b) while a tangible *depreciating asset is *held by the R & D entity during the present year, the asset is used for the purpose of conducting one or more of those R & D activities; and


    (c) the R & D entity could deduct an amount under section 40-25 for the asset for the present year if Division 40 applied with the changes described in section 355-310 ; and


    (d) the R & D entity cannot deduct an amount for the asset for:


    (i) an earlier income year under Subdivision 328-D (capital allowances for small business entities); or

    (ii) an earlier income year under Division 40 (as that Division applies apart from this Division), in a case where section 40-440 (low-value pools) applied;

    the R & D entity can deduct the amount referred to in paragraph (c) for the present year.


    355-305(2)    
    This section has effect subject to subsection 355-580(4) (CRC contributions).

    SECTION 355-310   Notional application of Division 40  

    355-310(1)    
    In addition to its application apart from this section, Division 40 also applies with the changes set out in this section for the purposes of:


    (a) paragraph 355-225(1)(b) (excluded expenditure); and


    (b) paragraph 355-305(1)(c) ; and


    (c) section 355-315 (balancing adjustments).

    355-310(2)    
    Firstly, substitute the following for references to a *taxable purpose in Subdivisions 40-A to 40-D (other than for the purposes of sections 40-100 , 40-105 and 40-110 ):


    Replacing references to a taxable purpose
    Item If this application of Division 40 is for the purposes of: Substitute a reference to:
    1 paragraph 355-225(1)(b) or 355-305(1)(c) the purpose of conducting one or more of the *R & D activities covered by paragraph 355-305(1)(b)
    2 section 355-315 the purpose of conducting one or more of the *R & D activities to which the R & D deductions (within the meaning of that section) relate

    Note:

    Sections 40-100 , 40-105 and 40-110 are about working out an asset ' s effective life. Those sections already refer to the use of the asset for R & D activities.


    355-310(3)    
    Secondly, assume that Division 40 does not apply to a building, nor to an extension, alteration or improvement to a building, (the building works ) for which the *R & D entity:


    (a) can deduct amounts under Division 43 (capital works); or


    (b) could deduct amounts under Division 43 :


    (i) apart from expenditure being incurred, or the building works being started, before a particular day; or

    (ii) had the R & D entity used the building works for a purpose relevant to those building works under section 43-140 (using an area in a deductible way).

    355-310(4)    
    Finally, assume that the following provisions had not been enacted:


    (a) subsection 40-25(7) (meaning of taxable purpose);


    (b) subsection 40-45(2) (assets to which Division 40 does not apply);


    (c) section 40-425 (low-value pools);


    (d) Subdivision 328-D (capital allowances for small business entities).

    Note:

    Subsection (3) and paragraph (4)(b) mean that deductions under section 355-305 may be available for capital works other than building works.


    SECTION 355-315   Balancing adjustments - assets only used for R & D activities  

    355-315(1)    
    This section applies to an *R & D entity if:


    (a) a *balancing adjustment event happens in an income year (the event year ) for an asset *held by the R & D entity; and


    (b) the R & D entity cannot deduct an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from:


    (i) this Division; and

    (ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;
    for the asset for an income year; and


    (c) the R & D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions (the R & D deductions ) under section 355-305 for the asset; and


    (d) the entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R & D activities for the event year; and


    (e) if Division 40 applied with the changes described in section 355-310 :


    (i) the entity could deduct for the event year an amount under subsection 40-285(2) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event; or

    (ii) an amount would be included in the entity's assessable income for the event year under subsection 40-285(1) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.
    Note 1:

    This section applies in a modified way if the entity also has deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 355-320 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ).

    Note 2:

    Section 40-292 applies if the entity can deduct an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from this Division and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    355-315(2)    
    If the *R & D entity could deduct for the event year an amount under subsection 40-285(2) for the asset and the event if Division 40 applied as described in paragraph (1)(e), the R & D entity can deduct that amount for the event year.

    Note 1:

    A deduction under this subsection is not a notional deduction (see subsection 355-105(2) ).

    Note 2:

    A deduction under this subsection results in a catch up amount for the R & D entity (see section 355-465 ).


    355-315(3)    


    If an amount would be included in the *R & D entity ' s assessable income for the event year under subsection 40-285(1) for the asset and the event if Division 40 applied as described in paragraph (1)(e), that amount is included in the R & D entity ' s assessable income for the event year.
    Note:

    Some or all of the amount included in the R & D entity ' s assessable income may result in a clawback amount for the R & D entity (see section 355-446 ).


    Subdivision 355-F - Integrity Rules  

    SECTION 355-400  

    355-400   Expenditure incurred while not at arm ' s length  


    If:


    (a) an *R & D entity incurs expenditure to another entity on all or part of an *R & D activity; and


    (b)either:


    (i) when the R & D entity incurs the expenditure, the R & D entity and the other entity do not deal with each other at *arm ' s length; or

    (ii) the other entity is the R & D entity ' s *associate; and


    (c) the expenditure exceeds the *market value of the relevant R & D activity or part (as appropriate);

    for the purposes of this Division, the R & D entity is treated as if the amount of expenditure it incurred on the relevant R & D activity or part (as appropriate) were equal to that market value.

    Note:

    For the purposes of a deduction under section 355-305 or 355-520 for an asset ' s decline in value, the arm ' s length rules in Division 40 apply as part of the notional application of that Division under that section.

    SECTION 355-405   Expenditure not at risk  

    355-405(1)    
    An *R & D entity cannot deduct expenditure under section 355-205 or 355-480 if:


    (a) when it incurs the expenditure, the R & D entity or its *associate had received, or could reasonably be expected to receive, consideration:


    (i) as a direct or indirect result of the expenditure being incurred; and

    (ii) regardless of the results of the activities on which the expenditure is incurred; and


    (b) that consideration is equal to or greater than the expenditure.

    Note:

    Section 355-205 is about deductions for R & D expenditure. Section 355-480 is about deductions for earlier year associate R & D expenditure.


    355-405(2)    
    If:


    (a) when an *R & D entity incurs expenditure, the R & D entity or its *associate had received, or could reasonably be expected to receive, consideration:


    (i) as a direct or indirect result of the expenditure being incurred; and

    (ii) regardless of the results of the activities on which the expenditure is incurred; and


    (b) that consideration is less than the expenditure;

    the R & D entity cannot deduct under section 355-205 or 355-480 so much of the expenditure as is equal to the consideration.


    355-405(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(a) and (2)(a), have regard to:


    (a) anything that happened or existed before or at the time the expenditure is incurred; and


    (b) anything that is likely to happen or exist after that time.

    355-405(4)    
    This section does not apply to expenditure incurred on *R & D activities covered by paragraph 355-210(1)(b) or (c).

    Note:

    Those paragraphs cover R & D activities conducted for foreign residents.


    SECTION 355-410   Disposal of R & D results  

    355-410(1)    
    This section applies to an *R & D entity if:


    (a) the R & D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to a *tax offset because it can:


    (i) deduct under section 355-205 or 355-480 expenditure incurred on *R & D activities; or

    (ii) deduct under section 355-305 or 355-520 an amount for an asset (the R & D asset ) used for the purpose of conducting one or more R & D activities; and


    (b) the R & D entity receives or becomes entitled to receive one or more of the following amounts (the results amounts ) in an income year (the results year ):


    (i) an amount for the results of any of the R & D activities;

    (ii) an amount from granting access to, or the right to use, any of those results;

    (iii) an amount attributable to the R & D entity having incurred the expenditure, including an amount it is entitled to receive regardless of the results of the R & D activities;

    (iv) an amount attributable to the R & D asset being used for the purpose mentioned in subparagraph (a)(ii), including an amount the R & D entity is entitled to receive regardless of the results of the R & D activities;

    (v) an amount from *disposing of a *CGT asset, or from granting a right to occupy or use a CGT asset, where the disposal or grant resulted in another person acquiring a right to access or use any of those results.
    Note:

    This section also applies with changes to the partners of an R & D partnership (see section 355-535 ).


    355-410(2)    
    For each results amount, the following amount is included in the *R & D entity ' s assessable income for the results year:


    (a) if the results amount is only a results amount because of subparagraph (1)(b)(v), and the asset referred to in that subparagraph is a *depreciating asset - an amount equal to the extent (if any) that the results amount exceeds the asset ' s *cost just before the disposal or grant;


    (b) if the results amount is only a results amount because of subparagraph (1)(b)(v), and the asset referred to in that subparagraph is not a depreciating asset - an amount equal to the extent (if any) that the results amount exceeds the asset ' s *cost base just before the disposal or grant;


    (c) otherwise - the results amount.

    355-410(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), assume that subsection 40-45(2) did not, except in the case of buildings and extensions, alterations and improvements to buildings, prevent Division 40 from applying to certain capital works.

    SECTION 355-415   Reducing deductions to reflect mark-ups within groups  

    355-415(1)    
    This section applies to an *R & D entity if:


    (a) the R & D entity can deduct an amount under section 355-205 or 355-480 for an income year for one or more *R & D activities; and


    (b) one or more other entities (the grouped entities ) incurred expenditure during the income year, or an earlier income year, on one or more of those *R & D activities; and


    (c) when each grouped entity incurred the expenditure:


    (i) the grouped entity was *connected with the R & D entity; or

    (ii) the grouped entity was an *affiliate of the R & D entity or the R & D entity was an affiliate of the grouped entity.
    Note:

    Section 355-205 is about deductions for R & D expenditure. Section 355-480 is about deductions for earlier year associate R & D expenditure.



    Reducing deductions by group mark-ups

    355-415(2)    
    The amount the *R & D entity can deduct, apart from this section, under section 355-205 or 355-480 for the income year is reduced by the amount (the reduction amount ) worked out as follows: Method statement


    Step 1.

    For each grouped entity, work out the sum of the amounts derived during the income year, or an earlier income year, by the grouped entity for goods or services relating to one or more of the *R & D activities while:

  • (a) the grouped entity was *connected with the *R & D entity; or
  • (b) the grouped entity was an *affiliate of the R & D entity or the R & D entity was an affiliate of the grouped entity.

  • Step 2.

    From the sum of those amounts, subtract the actual cost to each grouped entity of providing the goods or services that correspond to those amounts.



    If R & D entity has deductions for both R & D expenditure and earlier year associate R & D expenditure

    355-415(3)    
    However, if the *R & D entity can deduct amounts under both sections 355-205 and 355-480 for the income year, those amounts are reduced as follows:


    (a) apply the reduction amount to reduce the amount otherwise deductible under section 355-205 (but not below zero); and


    (b) then apply any remainder of the reduction amount to reduce the amount otherwise deductible under section 355-480 (but not below zero).

    Disregard mark-ups already taken into account

    355-415(4)    
    For the purposes of step 1 of the method statement in subsection (2), disregard any of the amounts from that step that have already been taken into account under this section for the *R & D entity and the *R & D activities for an earlier income year.

    Subdivision 355-G - Clawback of R & D recoupments, feedstock adjustments and balancing adjustments  

    Guide to Subdivision 355-G

    SECTION 355-430   What this Subdivision is about  


    An amount is included in an R & D entity ' s assessable income if:

  • (a) the R & D entity receives a recoupment from government of expenditure on R & D activities for which it has obtained tax offsets under this Division; or
  • (b) the R & D entity can deduct under this Division expenditure on goods, materials or energy used during R & D activities to produce marketable products or products applied to the R & D entity ' s own use; or
  • (c) a balancing adjustment event happens for an asset held by the R & D entity (or an R & D partnership in which the R & D entity is a partner) for which tax offsets have been obtained under this Division and for which an amount is otherwise included in the R & D entity ' s (or R & D partnership ' s) assessable income.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    355-435 When this Subdivision applies
    355-440 R & D recoupments
    355-445 Feedstock adjustments
    355-446 Balancing adjustments for assets only used for R & D activities
    355-447 Balancing adjustments for assets partially used for R & D activities
    355-448 Balancing adjustments for R & D partnership assets only used for R & D activities
    355-449 Balancing adjustments for R & D partnership assets partially used for R & D activities
    355-450 Amount to be included in assessable income

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 355-435  

    355-435   When this Subdivision applies  


    This Subdivision applies to an *R & D entity for an income year (the present year ) if:

    (a)    the R & D entity has an amount (a clawback amount ) under section 355-440 , 355-445 , 355-446 , 355-447 , 355-448 or 355-449 for the present year; and

    (b)    the R & D entity has received, or is entitled to receive, a *tax offset under section 355-100 for one or more income years (each an offset year ) in relation to that clawback amount.

    SECTION 355-440   R & D recoupments  

    355-440(1)    
    The *R & D entity has an amount under this section if:

    (a)    the entity, or another entity mentioned in subsection (5), receives or becomes entitled to receive a *recoupment from either of the following (otherwise than under the *CRC program):


    (i) an *Australian government agency;

    (ii) an STB (within the meaning ofDivision 1AB of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ); and

    (b)    the recoupment is received, or the entitlement to receive the recoupment arises, during the present year; and

    (c)    either:


    (i) the recoupment is of expenditure incurred on or in relation to certain activities; or

    (ii) the recoupment requires expenditure (the project expenditure ) to have been incurred, or to be incurred, on certain activities.
    Note:

    Paragraph (c) includes expenditure incurred in purchasing a tangible depreciating asset to be used when conducting R & D activities.


    355-440(2)    
    The amount is equal to the sum of:

    (a)    so much of the expenditure referred to in subsection (1) that is deducted under this Division; and

    (b)    for each asset (if any) for which expenditure referred to in subsection (1) is included in the asset ' s *cost - each amount (if any) equal to the asset ' s decline in value that is deducted under this Division;

    that is taken into account in working out *tax offsets under section 355-100 obtained by the *R & D entity for one or more income years.

    Note:

    Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this subsection refer to amounts notionally deducted under this Division (see section 355-105 ).



    Amount is reduced by any repayments of the recoupment

    355-440(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (2), reduce the expenditure referred to in subparagraph (1)(c)(i) by any repayments of the *recoupment during an income year.

    Cap on extra income tax if recoupment relates to a project

    355-440(4)    
    Despite subsection (2), if the *recoupment is covered by subparagraph (1)(c)(ii), the amount mentioned in subsection (2) for the present year cannot exceed the amount worked out using the following formula:


    Net amount of the recoupment × R & D expenditure
    Project expenditure

    where:

    net amount of the recoupment
    means the total amount of the *recoupment, less any repayments of the recoupment during an income year.

    R & D expenditure
    means the amount mentioned in subsection (2), disregarding subsection (3).



    Related entities

    355-440(5)    
    The other entities for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a) are as follows:

    (a)    an entity *connected with the *R & D entity;

    (b)    an *affiliate of the R & D entity or an entity of which the R & D entity is an affiliate.

    SECTION 355-445   Feedstock adjustments  

    355-445(1)    
    The *R & D entity has an amount under this section if:

    (a)    it incurs expenditure in one or more income years in acquiring or producing goods, or materials, (the feedstock inputs ) transformed or processed during *R & D activities in producing one or more tangible products (the feedstock outputs ); and

    (b)    it obtains under section 355-100 *tax offsets for one or more income years (each an offset year ) for deductions under this Division:


    (i) for the expenditure; or

    (ii) for expenditure it incurs on any energy input directly into the transformation or processing; or

    (iii) for the decline in value of assets used in acquiring or producing the feedstock inputs; and

    (c)    during the present year, a feedstock output, or a transformed feedstock output, (the marketable product ), is:


    (i) *supplied by the R & D entity to another entity; or

    (ii) applied by the R & D entity to the R & D entity ' s own use, other than use for the purpose of transforming that product for supply.

    355-445(2)    
    The amount is equal to the lesser of:

    (a)    the *feedstock revenue for the feedstock output; and

    (b)    so much of the total of the amounts deducted as described in paragraph (1)(b) as is reasonably attributable to the production of the feedstock output.

    355-445(3)    
    Subsection (2) does not apply to the feedstock output if:

    (a)    it becomes, or is transformed into, a feedstock input; or

    (b)    that subsection already applies to the feedstock output because of the application of paragraph (1)(c) to:


    (i) an earlier time during the present year; or

    (ii) an earlier income year.

    355-445(4)    
    The feedstock revenue , for the feedstock output, is worked out using the following formula:


    Market value of the marketable product × Cost of producing the feedstock output
    Cost of producing the marketable product

    where:

    market value of the marketable product
    means the marketable product ' s *market value at the time it is:


    (a) *supplied by the *R & D entity to the other entity; or


    (b) first applied by the R & D entity to the R & D entity ' s own use, other than use for the purpose of transforming that product for supply.


    355-445(5)    
    This section applies to a *supply or use of the marketable product by:

    (a)    an entity *connected with the *R & D entity; or

    (b)    an *affiliate of the R & D entity or an entity of which the R & D entity is an affiliate;

    as if it were by the R & D entity.


    SECTION 355-446   Balancing adjustments for assets only used for R & D activities  

    355-446(1)    
    The *R & D entity has an amount under this section if:

    (a)    a *balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the R & D entity; and

    (b)    the R & D entity cannot deduct, for the asset for an income year, an amount under section 40-25 as that section applies apart from:


    (i) this Division; and

    (ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and

    (c)    the R & D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-305 for the asset; and

    (d)    the R & D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R & D activities for the present year; and

    (e)    an amount (the section 40-285 amount ) is included in the R & D entity ' s assessable income for the present year under subsection 355-315(3) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

    Note 1:

    This section applies in a modified way if the entity also has deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 355-320 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ).

    Note 2:

    Section 40-292 applies if the entity can deduct an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from this Division and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    355-446(2)    
    The amount is so much of an amount equal to the section 40-285 amount as does not exceed the difference between:

    (a)    the asset ' s *cost; and

    (b)    the asset ' s *adjustable value, worked out under Division 40 as if that Division applied with the changes described in section 355-310 .

    SECTION 355-447   Balancing adjustments for assets partially used for R & D activities  

    355-447(1)    
    The *R & D entity has an amount under this section if:

    (a)    a *balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the R & D entity and for which:


    (i) the R & D entity can deduct, for an income year, an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from Division 355 and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) the R & D entity could have deducted, for an income year, an amount as described in subparagraph (i) if the R & D entity had used the asset; and

    (b)    the R & D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions (the R & D deductions ) under section 355-305 for the asset; and

    (c)    an amount (the section 40-285 amount ) is included in the R & D entity ' s assessable income for the asset under section 40-285 (after applying subsection 40-292(2) ) for the present year.

    Note:

    This section applies in a modified way if you have deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 40-292 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ).


    355-447(2)    
    The amount is worked out as follows:


    Total R & D deductions
    Total decline in value
      × Adjusted section 40-285 amount

    where:

    adjusted section 40-285 amount
    means so much of an amount equal to the section 40-285 amount as does not exceed the total decline in value.

    total decline in value
    means the *cost of the asset less its *adjustable value.


    SECTION 355-448   Balancing adjustments for R & D partnership assets only used for R & D activities  

    355-448(1)    
    The *R & D entity (the partner ) has an amount under this section if:

    (a)    the partner is a partner in an *R & D partnership; and

    (b)    a *balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the R & D partnership; and

    (c)    the R & D partnership cannot deduct, for the asset for an income year, an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from:


    (i) this Division; and

    (ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and

    (d)    the partner is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-520 for the asset; and

    (e)    the partner is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R & D activities for the present year; and

    (f)    an amount (the section 40-285 amount ) would, as mentioned in subsection 355-525(3) , be included in the R & D partnership ' s assessable income for the present year for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

    Note 1:

    This section applies in a modified way if the partner has deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 355-325 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ).

    Note 2:

    Section 40-293 applies if the R & D partnership can deduct an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from this Division and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    355-448(2)    
    The amount is the partner ' s proportion of the amount that is so much of an amount equal to the section 40-285 amount as does not exceed the difference between:

    (a)    the asset ' s *cost; and

    (b)    the asset ' s *adjustable value, worked out under Division 40 as if that Division applied with the changes described in section 355-310 .

    SECTION 355-449   Balancing adjustments for R & D partnership assets partially used for R & D activities  

    355-449(1)    
    The *R & D entity (the partner ) has an amount under this section if:

    (a)    the partner is a partner in an *R & D partnership; and

    (b)    a *balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for a *depreciating asset *held by the R & D partnership and for which:


    (i) the R & D partnership can deduct, for an income year, an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from Division 355 and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) the R & D partnership could have deducted, for an income year, an amount as described in subparagraph (i) if it had used the asset; and

    (c)    one or more partners (including the partner) in the R & D partnership are entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-520 for the asset; and

    (d)    an amount (the section 40-285 amount ) is included in the R & D partnership ' s assessable income for the asset under section 40-285 (after applying subsection 40-293(2) ) for the present year.

    355-449(2)    
    The amount is the partner ' s proportion of the amount worked out as follows:


    Total R & D deductions
    Total decline in value
    ×   Adjusted section 40-285 amount

    where:

    adjusted section 40-285 amount
    means so much of an amount equal to the section 40-285 amount as does not exceed the total decline in value.

    total decline in value
    means the *cost of the asset less its *adjustable value.

    total R & D deductions
    means the sum of each partner ' s deductions mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) of this section.


    SECTION 355-450   Amount to be included in assessable income  

    355-450(1)    
    The *R & D entity must include, in the entity ' s assessable income for the present year, the sum of the following amounts for each offset year relating to the clawback amount:


      Starting offset − Adjusted offset − Deduction amount  
      R & D entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the present year  

    where:

    adjusted offset
    means the *tax offset the R & D entity would have received under section 355-100 for the offset year if the total amount mentioned in subsection 355-100(1) for that tax offset were reduced by the portion of the clawback amount that is attributable to the offset year.

    deduction amount
    means the portion of the clawback amount that is attributable to the offset year, multiplied by the R & D entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the offset year.

    starting offset
    means the amount of the *tax offset the R & D entity has received, or is entitled to receive, under section 355-100 for the offset year.


    355-450(2)    
    However, if this section, or section 355-475 , has previously applied (whether in the present year or an earlier income year) in relation to another clawback amount, or catch up amount, the *R & D entity has that relates to the offset year, subsection (1) of this section applies as if:

    (a)    the starting offset were the *tax offset the R & D entity would have received under section 355-100 for the offset year if the total amount mentioned in subsection 355-100(1) were:


    (i) decreased by the sum of the portions of any such other clawback amounts that are attributable to the offset year; and

    (ii) increased by the sum of the portions of any such other catch up amounts that are attributable to the offset year; and

    (b)    the reference to the " total amount " in the definition of adjusted offset were a reference to that amount as so adjusted.

    Subdivision 355-H - Catch up deductions for balancing adjustment events for assets used for R & D activities  

    Guide to Subdivision 355-H

    SECTION 355-455   What this Subdivision is about  


    An R & D entity can deduct an amount under this Subdivision if:

  • (a) a balancing adjustment event happens for an asset held by the R & D entity (or an R & D partnership in which the R & D entity is a partner); and
  • (b) tax offsets have been obtained under this Division for deductions for the asset; and
  • (c) the R & D entity (or the R & D partnership) can otherwise deduct an amount for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    355-460 When this Subdivision applies
    355-465 Assets only used for R & D activities
    355-466 Assets partially used for R & D activities
    355-467 R & D partnership assets only used for R & D activities
    355-468 R & D partnership assets partially used for R & D activities
    355-470 (Repealed by No 92 of 2020)
    355-475 Amount that can be deducted

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 355-460  

    355-460   When this Subdivision applies  


    This Subdivision applies to an *R & D entity for an income year (the present year ) if:

    (a)    the R & D entity has an amount (a catch up amount ) under section 355-465 , 355-466 , 355-467 or 355-468 for an asset for the present year; and

    (b)    the R & D entity has received, or is entitled to receive, a *tax offset under section 355-100 for one or more income years (each an offset year ) in relation to the asset.

    SECTION 355-465   Assets only used for R & D activities  

    355-465(1)    
    The *R & D entity has an amount under this section if:

    (a)    a *balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the R & D entity; and

    (b)    the R & D entity cannot deduct, for the asset for an income year, an amount under section 40-25 as that section applies apart from:


    (i) this Division; and

    (ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and

    (c)    the R & D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-305 for the asset; and

    (d)    the R & D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R & D activities for the present year; and

    (e)    the R & D entity can deduct, for the present year, an amount under subsection 355-315(2) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

    Note 1:

    This section applies in a modified way if the entity also has deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 355-320 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997) .

    Note 2:

    Section 40-292 applies if the entity can deduct an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from this Division and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    355-465(2)    
    The amount is an amount equal to the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(e).

    SECTION 355-466   Assets partially used for R & D activities  

    355-466(1)    
    The *R & D entity has an amount under this section if:

    (a)    a *balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the R & D entity for which:


    (i) the R & D entity can deduct, for an income year, an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from Division 355 and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) the R & D entity could have deducted, for an income year, an amount as described in subparagraph (i) if the R & D entity had used the asset; and

    (b)    the R & D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions (the R & D deductions ) under section 355-305 for the asset; and

    (c)    the R & D entity can deduct an amount (the section 40-285 amount ) for the asset under section 40-285 (after applying subsection 40-292(2) ) for the present year.

    Note:

    This section applies in a modified way if you have deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 40-292 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997) .


    355-466(2)    
    The amount is worked out as follows:


    Total R & D deductions
    Total decline in value
    ×   Section 40-285 amount

    where:

    total decline in value
    means the *cost of the asset less its *adjustable value.


    SECTION 355-467   R & D partnership assets only used for R & D activities  

    355-467(1)    
    The *R & D entity (the partner ) has an amount under this section if:

    (a)    the partner is a partner in an *R & D partnership; and

    (b)    a *balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the *R & D partnership; and

    (c)    the R & D partnership cannot deduct, for the asset for an income year, an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from:


    (i) this Division; and

    (ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and

    (d)    the partner is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-520 for the asset; and

    (e)    the partner is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R & D activities for the present year; and

    (f)    the partner can deduct an amount under subsection 355-525(2) for the present year for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

    355-467(2)    
    The amount is an amount equal to the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(f).

    SECTION 355-468   R & D partnership assets partially used for R & D activities  

    355-468(1)    
    The *R & D entity (the partner ) has an amount under this section if:

    (a)    the partner is a partner in an *R & D partnership; and

    (b)    a *balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for a *depreciating asset *held by the R & D partnership and for which:


    (i) the R & D partnership can deduct, for an income year, an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from Division 355 and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) the R & D partnership could have deducted, for an income year, an amount as described in subparagraph (i) if it had used the asset; and

    (c)    one or more partners (including the partner) in the R & D partnership are entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-520 for the asset; and

    (d)    the R & D partnership can deduct an amount (the section 40-285 amount ) for the asset under section 40-285 (after applying subsection 40-293(2) ) for the present year.

    Note:

    This section applies in a modified way if the partners have deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 40-293 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997) .


    355-468(2)    
    The amount is the partner ' s proportion of the amount worked out as follows:


    Total R & D deductions
    Total decline in value
    ×   Section 40-285 amount

    where:

    total decline in value
    means the *cost of the asset less its *adjustable value.

    total R & D deductions
    means the sum of each partner ' s deductions mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) of this section.


    355-470   (Repealed) SECTION 355-470 Feedstock revenue  
    (Repealed by No 92 of 2020)

    SECTION 355-475   Amount that can be deducted  

    355-475(1)    
    The *R & D entity can deduct, for the present year, the sum of the following amounts for each offset year relating to the catch up amount:


      Adjusted offset − Starting offset − Deduction amount  
      R & D entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the present year  

    where:

    adjusted offset
    means the *tax offset the R & D entity would have received under section 355-100 for the offset year if the total amount mentioned in subsection 355-100(1) for that tax offset were increased by the portion of the catch up amount that is attributable to the offset year.

    deduction amount
    means the portion of the catch up amount that is attributable to the offset year, multiplied by the R & D entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the offset year.

    starting offset
    means the amount of the *tax offset the R & D entity has received, or is entitled to receive, under section 355-100 for the offset year.

    Note:

    A deduction under this subsection is not a notional deduction: see subsection 355-105(2) .


    355-475(2)    
    However, if this section, or section 355-450 , has previously applied (whether in the present year or an earlier income year) in relation to another catch up amount, or clawback amount, the *R & D entity has that relates to the offset year, subsection (1) of this section applies as if:

    (a)    the starting offset were the *tax offset the R & D entity would have received under section 355-100 for the offset year if the total amount mentioned in subsection 355-100(1) were:


    (i) increased by the sum of the portions of any such other catch up amounts that are attributable to the offset year; and

    (ii) decreased by the sum of the portions of any such other clawback amounts that are attributable to the offset year; and

    (b)    the reference to the " total amount " in the definition of adjusted offset were a reference to that amount as so adjusted.

    Subdivision 355-I - Application to earlier income year R & D expenditure incurred to associates  

    SECTION 355-480   Notional deductions for expenditure incurred to associate in earlier income years  


    Notional deductions for earlier year associate expenditure

    355-480(1)    
    An *R & D entity can deduct for an income year (the present year ) expenditure it incurred to its *associate during an earlier income year to the extent that:


    (a) the expenditure was incurred on one or more *R & D activities:


    (i) for which the R & D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for an income year; and

    (ii) that are activities to which section 355-210 (conditions for R & D activities) applies; and


    (b) the expenditure is paid to that associate during the present year; and


    (c) subsection (2) applies to the expenditure.

    Note 1:

    This section applies in a modified way to R & D partnership expenditure (see sections 355-510 and 355-515 ).

    Note 2:

    Expenditure paid in income years starting on or after 1 July 2011 may be deductible for activities registered for income years starting before 1 July 2011 (see section 355-200 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ).



    Expenditure cannot have been otherwise deducted etc.

    355-480(2)    
    This subsection applies to the expenditure if:


    (a) the *R & D entity can deduct the expenditure, or is entitled to a *tax offset for the expenditure, under any other Division of this Act for an earlier income year; and


    (b) by the time of lodging its *income tax return for the most recent income year before the present year, the R & D entity had neither:


    (i) deducted the expenditure; nor

    (ii) obtained a tax offset for the expenditure;
    as described in paragraph (a).

    355-480(3)    
    The entitlement to the deduction, or *tax offset, described in paragraph (2)(a) ceases to the extent that subsection (2) applies to the expenditure.

    Example:

    If, by the time mentioned in paragraph (2)(b), an R & D entity chose to deduct only a third of the expenditure it could have deducted under another Division, then the remaining 2 thirds of that expenditure:

  • (a) can be deducted under this section; but
  • (b) can no longer be deducted under the other Division.


  • Notional deduction is subject to integrity rules etc.

    355-480(4)    
    This section has effect subject to section 355-225 (excluded expenditure), Subdivision 355-F (integrity rules) and subsection 355-580(3) (CRC contributions).

    Subdivision 355-J - Application to R & D partnerships  

    SECTION 355-500   What this Subdivision is about  


    This Subdivision modifies the rules in this Division for partners of R & D partnerships.

    In particular, the rules about deducting R & D expenditure are modified to allow a partner to deduct the partner's proportion of the R & D partnership's expenditure on R & D activities.

    A partner of an R & D partnership may also be able to deduct under this Subdivision the decline in value of partnership assets used for R & D activities.

    SECTION 355-505   Meaning of R & D partnership and partner's proportion  

    355-505(1)    
    A partnership is an R & D partnership at a particular time if, at that time, each of the partners is an *R & D entity.

    355-505(2)    
    For an amount attributable to an *R & D partnership for an income year, each partner of the R & D partnership is taken to bear or be entitled to (as appropriate) this proportion (the partner's proportion ) of the amount:


    (a) the proportion the partners agreed the partner should bear or be entitled to (as appropriate); or


    (b) if there is no such agreement - the proportion of the partner's interest in the *net income or *partnership loss of the R & D partnership for the income year.

    SECTION 355-510  

    355-510   R & D partnership expenditure on R & D activities  


    If an *R & D partnership incurs expenditure on one or more R & D activities during an income year, this Division applies in relation to each *R & D entity that is a partner of the R & D partnership at some time during the income year as if:


    (a) the partner incurred the partner's proportion of that expenditure when the R & D partnership incurred that expenditure; and


    (b) neither the R & D partnership, nor any other partner of the R & D partnership, incurred expenditure during the income year on the R & D activities; and


    (c) such other changes were made to this Division as are appropriate having regard to that partner's proportion of amounts attributable to the R & D partnership.

    Note:

    This section and section 355-515 may result in:

  • (a) the partner being able to deduct the partner's proportion of the partnership expenditure under section 355-205 (R & D expenditure) or 355-480 (earlier year associate R & D expenditure) for the R & D activities; and
  • (b) the partner being affected by the integrity rules in Subdivisions 355-F , 355-G and 355-H .
  • SECTION 355-515  

    355-515   R & D activities conducted by or for an R & D partnership  


    If one or more *R & D activities are conducted by or for an *R & D partnership during an income year, this Division applies in relation to each *R & D entity that is a partner of the R & D partnership at some time during the income year as if:


    (a) the R & D activities were conducted by or for the partner in a corresponding way to the way the R & D activities were conducted by or for the R & D partnership; and


    (b) the partner had relationships with other entities in relation to the R & D activities that corresponded to the relationships the R & D partnership had with those other entities in relation to the R & D activities; and


    (c) a thing done by, or in relation to, the R & D partnership in relation to the R & D activities were a thing done by, or in relation to, the partner; and


    (d) the R & D activities were neither:


    (i) conducted by or for the R & D partnership; nor

    (ii) conducted by or for any other partner of the R & D partnership; and


    (e) such other changes were made to this Division as are appropriate having regard to that partner's proportion of amounts attributable to the R & D partnership.

    Note 1:

    For the purposes of this Division, entities that are associates or affiliates of, or connected with, the R & D partnership are taken to be associates or affiliates of, or connected with, the partner (see paragraph (b)).

    Note 2:

    For the purposes of this Division, payments and agreements made by the R & D partnership for the R & D activities are taken to be made by the partner (see paragraph (c)).

    SECTION 355-520   When notional deductions arise for decline in value of depreciating assets of R & D partnerships  


    When notional deductions arise

    355-520(1)    
    If:


    (a) an *R & D entity is a partner of an *R & D partnership at some time during an income year (the present year ); and


    (b) the partner is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for the present year for one or more *R & D activities that are activities to which section 355-210 (conditions for R & D activities) applies; and

    Note:

    Section 355-210 applies with changes for this paragraph (see section 355-515 ).


    (c) while a tangible *depreciating asset is *held by the R & D partnership during the present year, the asset is used for the purpose of conducting one or more of those R & D activities; and


    (d) the R & D partnership could deduct an amount under section 40-25 for the asset for the present year if Division 40 applied with the changes described in section 355-310 ; and

    Note:

    Section 355-310 applies with changes for this paragraph (see subsection (2) of this section).


    (e) the R & D partnership cannot deduct an amount for the asset for:


    (i) an earlier income year under Subdivision 328-D (capital allowances for small business entities); or

    (ii) an earlier income year under Division 40 (as that Division applies apart from this Division), in a case where section 40-440 (low-value pools) applied;

    the partner can deduct the partner ' s proportion of the amount referred to in paragraph (d) for the present year.



    Changed application of Division 40 for this Subdivision

    355-520(2)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, section 355-310 applies as if the following changes were made:


    Changes to be made
    Item For a reference in section 355-310 to … substitute a reference to …
    1 paragraph 355-305(1)(c) paragraph 355-520(1)(d)
    2 section 355-315 section 355-525
    3 paragraph 355-305(1)(b) paragraph 355-520(1)(c)
    4 *R & D entity *R & D partnership



    Disregard certain assets held because of CRC contributions

    355-520(3)    
    This section has effect subject to subsection 355-580(4) (CRC contributions).

    SECTION 355-525   Balancing adjustments for R & D partnership assets only used for R & D activities  

    355-525(1)    
    This section applies to an *R & D entity (the partner ) if:


    (a) a *balancing adjustment event happens in an income year (the event year ) for an asset *held by an *R & D partnership; and


    (b) the R & D partnership cannot deduct an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from:


    (i) this Division; and

    (ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;
    for the asset for an income year; and


    (c) the partner is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions (the R & D deductions ) under section 355-520 for the asset; and


    (d) the partner is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R & D activities for the event year; and


    (e) if Division 40 applied with the changes described in section 355-310 (as affected by subsection 355-520(2) ):


    (i) the R & D partnership could deduct for the event year an amount under subsection 40-285(2) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event; or

    (ii) an amount would be included in the R & D partnership ' s assessable income for the event year under subsection 40-285(1) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.
    Note 1:

    This section applies in a modified way if the partner has deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 355-325 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ).

    Note 2:

    Section 40-293 applies if the R & D partnership can deduct an amount under section 40-25 , as that section applies apart from this Division and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    355-525(2)    
    If the *R & D partnership could deduct for the event year an amount under subsection 40-285(2) for the asset and the event if Division 40 applied as described in paragraph (1)(e), the partner can deduct the partner ' s proportion of that amount for the event year.

    Note 1:

    A deduction under this subsection is not a notional deduction (see subsection 355-105(2) ).

    Note 2:

    A deduction under this subsection will result in a catch up amount for the partner (see section 355-467 ).


    355-525(3)    


    If an amount would be included in the *R & D partnership ' s assessable income for the event year under subsection 40-285(1) for the asset and the event if Division 40 applied as described in paragraph (1)(e), the partner ' s proportion of that amount is included in the partner ' s assessable income for the event year.
    Note:

    Some or all of the amount included in the partner ' s assessable income may result in a clawback amount for the partner (see section 355-448 ).


    355-525(4)    
    (Repealed by No 92 of 2020)


    355-525(5)    
    (Repealed by No 92 of 2020)


    355-525(6)    
    (Repealed by No 92 of 2020)


    355-525(7)    
    (Repealed by No 92 of 2020)


    SECTION 355-530  

    355-530   Implications for partner ' s aggregated turnover  


    For the purposes of section 355-100 (tax offsets for R & D), if:


    (a) an *R & D entity is a partner of an *R & D partnership at some time during an income year; and


    (b) the partner ' s *aggregated turnover for the income year does not include the R & D partnership ' s *annual turnover for the income year;

    the partner ' s aggregated turnover for the income year includes the *partner ' s proportion of the R & D partnership ' s annual turnover for the income year.

    SECTION 355-535  

    355-535   Disposal of R & D results for R & D partnerships  


    In addition to its application apart from this section, section 355-410 (disposal of R & D results) also applies to each partner of an *R & D partnership with such changes as are appropriate having regard to:


    (a) amounts (the results amounts ) of a kind set out in subparagraphs 355-410(1)(b)(i) to (v) that the R & D partnership receives or becomes entitled to receive in an income year; and


    (b) the principle that any amount to be included in the partner ' s assessable income for the income year for a results amount should be the partner ' s proportion of the amount arising under subsection 355-410(2) for the results amount.

    Note:

    The ordinary application of section 355-410 will apply to any of the partner ' s deductions under this Division that do not relate to the R & D partnership.

    SECTION 355-540   Application of recoupment rules  

    355-540(1)    
    If:


    (a) an *R & D partnership incurs expenditure (the partnership expenditure ) on *R & D activities; and


    (b) an *R & D entity (the partner ) is entitled under section 355-100 to a *tax offset because it can, under section 355-205 or 355-480 , deduct some or all of that expenditure; and


    (c) the R & D partnership receives an amount as a *recoupment of any or all of the partnership expenditure;

    the partner is taken, for the purposes of Subdivisions 20-A and 355-G :


    (d) to have incurred the partner ' s proportion of the partnership expenditure when the R & D partnership incurred that expenditure; and


    (e) to have received the partner ' s proportion of the recoupment when the R & D partnership received the recoupment.

    355-540(2)    
    If:


    (a) an *R & D entity (the partner ) is entitled under section 355-100 to a *tax offset because it can, under section 355-520 , deduct an amount for an income year for an asset; and


    (b) the applicable *R & D partnership receives an amount as a *recoupment of any or all of the R & D partnership ' s expenditure included in the *cost of the asset for the purposes of the application of Division 40 as described in paragraph 355-520(1)(d) ;

    the partner is taken, for the purposes of Subdivisions 20-A and 355-G :


    (c) to have incurred the partner ' s proportion of that expenditure when the R & D partnership incurred that expenditure; and


    (d) to have received the partner ' s proportion of the recoupment when the R & D partnership received the recoupment.

    SECTION 355-545  

    355-545   Relevance for net income, and losses, of the R & D partnership  


    For an *R & D entity that is a partner of an *R & D partnership, none of the following:


    (a) any expenditure the R & D entity is taken to have incurred because of this Subdivision;


    (b) any amount the R & D entity can deduct under this Subdivision;


    (c) any *recoupment the R & D entity is taken to have received because of this Subdivision;

    are to be taken into account in determining the *net income of the R & D partnership, or any *partnership loss of the R & D partnership, for an income year.

    Subdivision 355-K - Application to Cooperative Research Centres  

    SECTION 355-580   When notional deductions for CRC contributions arise  


    Monetary contributions are deductible

    355-580(1)    
    An *R & D entity can deduct for an income year expenditure it incurs during that year to the extent that:


    (a) the expenditure is in the form of monetary contributions under the *CRC program; and


    (b) the contributions have been or will be spent under the CRC program on one or more *R & D activities for which the R & D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for an income year.

    Note 1:

    The R & D activities will need to be conducted during the income year the R & D entity is registered for those activities (see sections 27A and 27J of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 ).

    Note 2:

    Expenditure incurred in income years starting on or after 1 July 2011 may be deductible for activities registered for income years starting before 1 July 2011 (see section 355-200 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ).


    355-580(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to expenditure to the extent that it is incurred out of Commonwealth funding.

    No other deductions arise for monetary contributions etc.

    355-580(3)    
    Neither:


    (a) a contribution an *R & D entity can deduct under subsection (1); nor


    (b) expenditure incurred under the *CRC program, to the extent that the expenditure is incurred out of:


    (i) a contribution an R & D entity can deduct under subsection (1); or

    (ii) Commonwealth funding;

    can be deducted by any R & D entity under any other provision of this Division for any income year.


    355-580(4)    
    If an asset' s *cost includes expenditure incurred under the *CRC program out of:


    (a) a contribution an *R & D entity can deduct under subsection (1); or


    (b) Commonwealth funding;

    an amount equal to the asset ' s decline in value cannot be deducted under this Division by any R & D entity for any income year.


    Subdivision 355-W - Other matters  

    355-700   (Repealed) SECTION 355-700 Objecting to assessment of refundable tax offset  
    (Repealed by No 88 of 2013)

    SECTION 355-705   Effect of findings by Industry Innovation and Science Australia  


    Findings about registration or core technology

    355-705(1)    
    If:

    (a)    a certificate given to the Commissioner under the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 sets out:


    (i) a finding under section 27B of that Act about an *R & D entity ' s application for registration under section 27A of that Act for an income year; or

    (ii) a finding under section 27J of that Act about an R & D entity ' s registration under section 27A of that Act for an income year; or

    (iii) a finding under section 28E of that Act about an R & D entity and one or more *R & D activities conducted or to be conducted during one or more income years; and

    (b)    the finding was made within 4 years after the end of the income year or the last of the income years (as appropriate);

    the finding binds the Commissioner for the purposes of assessments of the R & D entity for the income year or years (as appropriate).

    Note:

    Section 28E of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 deals with findings that technology is core technology for particular R & D activities. Expenditure incurred in acquiring such technology is not deductible under this Division (see subsection 355-225(2) ).



    Advance findings about activities yet to be completed

    355-705(2)    


    If:

    (a)    an activity is being conducted, or is yet to be conducted, in an income year; and

    (b)    an *R & D entity applies in the income year for a finding under section 28A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 about the activity; and

    (c)    

    Industry Innovation and Science Australia makes the finding and gives the Commissioner a certificate under that Act setting out the finding;

    the finding binds the Commissioner for the purposes of assessments of the R & D entity for the income year and the next 2 income years.



    Advance findings about completed activities

    355-705(3)    


    However, if:

    (a)    an activity is completed during an income year; and

    (b)    an *R & D entity applies in the income year for a finding under section 28A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 about the activity; and

    (c)    

    Industry Innovation and Science Australia makes the finding and gives the Commissioner a certificate under that Act setting out the finding;

    the finding binds the Commissioner for the purposes of assessments of the R & D entity for the income year.


    SECTION 355-710   Amendment of assessments  


    Dealing with findings of Industry Innovation and Science Australia

    355-710(1)    
    If:

    (a)    a certificate given to the Commissioner under the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 sets out:


    (i) a finding under section 27B of that Act about an *R & D entity ' s application for registration under section 27A of that Act for an income year; or

    (ii) a finding under section 27J of that Act about an R & D entity ' s registration under section 27A of that Act for an income year; or

    (iii) a finding under section 28A or 28C of that Act made on application by an R & D entity during an income year; or

    (iv) a finding under section 28E of that Act about an R & D entity and one or more R & D activities conducted or to be conducted during one or more income years; and

    (b)    the finding was made within 4 years after the end of the income year or the last of the income years (as appropriate);

    despite section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , the Commissioner may amend the R & D entity ' s assessment for an income year affected by the finding at any time for the purposes of giving effect to the finding.


    355-710(2)    


    However, the Commissioner may only do so within 2 years after the Commissioner is given the certificate if giving effect to the finding would increase the R & D entity ' s liability.

    Dealing with key decisions of Industry Innovation and Science Australia and others

    355-710(3)    
    If:

    (a)    an internal review decision (the key decision ) under subsection 30D(2) of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 relates to an *R & D entity; or

    (b)    a decision (also the key decision ) under the Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 :


    (i) varies a decision covered by paragraph (a) ; or

    (ii) sets aside a decision covered by paragraph (a) , whether or not that key decision also includes a decision made in substitution for the decision covered by paragraph (a) ; or

    (c)    a decision (also the key decision ) of a court is about:


    (i) a decision under Part III of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 relating to an R & D entity; or

    (ii) a decision covered by paragraph (b) ;

    despite section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , the Commissioner may amend the R & D entity ' s assessment for an income year affected by the key decision at any time for the purposes of giving effect to that decision.


    SECTION 355-715   Implications for other deductions and tax offsets  

    355-715(1)    
    If an *R & D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to a *tax offset for an income year for expenditure it can deduct under section 355-205 , 355-480 or 355-580 , that expenditure:


    (a) cannot be taken into account by any entity in working out a deduction under any other Division of this Act for any income year; and


    (b) cannot be taken into account by any entity in working out a tax offset under any other Division of this Act for any income year.

    Note:

    Section 355-205 is about R & D expenditure, section 355-480 is about earlier year associate R & D expenditure, and section 355-580 is about CRC contributions.


    355-715(2)    


    If an *R & D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to a *tax offset for an income year for a deduction under section 355-305 or 355-520 of an amount equal to the decline in value of an asset, that decline in value:


    (a) cannot be taken into account by any entity in working out a deduction under any other Division of this Act (other than section 40-292 or 40-293 ) for any income year; and


    (b) cannot be taken into account by any entity in working out a tax offset under any other Division of this Act for any income year;

    to the extent that the decline in value is attributable to the use of the asset for the purpose of conducting one or more of the *R & D activities to which the deduction relates.

    Note 1:

    A deduction may be available under section 40-25 to the extent that the asset ' s decline in value is attributable to another purpose. If so, that deduction under section 40-25 will not take into account the asset ' s decline in value to the extent that it is attributable to the R & D activities (see also subsection 40-25(2) ).

    Note 2:

    Section 355-305 is about the decline in value of R & D assets and section 355-520 is about the decline in value of R & D partnership assets.

    Note 3:

    Sections 40-292 and 40-293 deal with balancing adjustments when deductions have been available for the asset ' s decline in value both under this Division and section 40-25 .


    355-720   (Repealed) SECTION 355-720 Certain related amounts may be reduced if notional deductions exceeded $100 million  
    (Repealed by No 92 of 2020)

    355-750   (Repealed) SECTION 355-750 Review of rate when notional deductions exceed $100 million  
    (Repealed by No 92 of 2020)

    Division 360 - Early stage investors in innovation companies  

    Subdivision 360-A - Tax incentives for early stage investors in innovation companies  

    Guide to Subdivision 360-A

    SECTION 360-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    You may be entitled to a tax offset if you are, or a trust or partnership of which you are a member is, issued with certain kinds of equity interests in a small Australian company with high-growth potential that is engaging in innovative activities.

    A modified CGT treatment may also apply to those equity interests.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    360-10 Object of this Subdivision
    360-15 Entitlement to the tax offset
    360-20 Limited entitlement for certain kinds of investors
    360-25 Amount of the tax offset - general case
    360-30 Amount of the tax offset - members of trusts or partnerships
    360-35 Amount of the tax offset - trustees
    360-40 Early stage innovation companies
    360-45 100 point innovation test
    360-50 Modified CGT treatment
    360-55 Modified CGT treatment - partnerships
    360-60 Modified CGT treatment - not affected by certain roll-overs
    360-65 Separate modified CGT treatment for roll-overs about wholly-owned companies or scrip for scrip roll-overs

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 360-10  

    360-10   Object of this Subdivision  


    The object of this Subdivision is to encourage new investment in small Australian innovation companies with high-growth potential by providing qualifying investors with a tax offset and a modified CGT treatment.

    SECTION 360-15   Entitlement to the tax offset  


    General case

    360-15(1)    
    You are entitled to a *tax offset for an income year if:


    (a) you are none of the following:


    (i) a trust or a partnership;

    (ia) an *ESVCLP;

    (ii) a *widely held company or a *100% subsidiary of a widely held company; and


    (b) at a particular time during the income year, a company issues you with *equity interests that are *shares in the company; and


    (c) subsection 360-40(1) (about early stage innovation companies) applies to the company immediately after that time; and


    (d) neither you nor the company is an *affiliate of each other at that time; and


    (e) the issue of those shares is not an *acquisition of *ESS interests under an *employee share scheme; and


    (f) immediately after the issue of those shares, you do not hold equity interests in the company, or in an entity *connected with the company, that carry the right to:


    (i) receive more than 30% of any distribution of income by the company or the entity; or

    (ii) receive more than 30% of any distribution of capital by the company or the entity; or

    (iii) exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 30% of the total voting power in the company or the entity.


    Members of trusts or partnerships

    360-15(2)    
    A *member of a trust or partnership (other than a partnership that is an *ESVCLP) at the end of an income year is entitled to a *tax offset for the income year if:


    (a) the trust or partnership would be entitled to a tax offset, under this section, for the income year if the trust or partnership were an individual; and


    (b) the member is not a *widely held company or a *100% subsidiary of a widely held company.



    Trustees

    360-15(3)    
    A trustee of a trust is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year if:


    (a) the trustee would be entitled to a tax offset, under subsection (1), for the income year if the trustee were an individual; and


    (b) the trustee is liable to be assessed or has been assessed, and is liable to pay *tax, on a share of, or all or a part of, the trust ' s *net income under section 98 , 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the income year.

    SECTION 360-20   Limited entitlement for certain kinds of investors  

    360-20(1)    
    You do not satisfy paragraph 360-15(1)(b) if:


    (a) for each offer resulting in *equity interests that are *shares in the company being issued to you during the income year, none of subsections 708(8) , (10) or (11) of the Corporations Act 2001 removed the need for a disclosure document; and


    (b) a total of more than $50,000 was paid for the issue to you of the shares resulting from all of those offers.

    360-20(2)    
    For the purposes of this section, assume that Chapter 6D of the Corporations Act 2001 applies to those offers.

    SECTION 360-25   Amount of the tax offset - general case  

    360-25(1)    
    If subsection 360-15(1) applies, the amount of your *tax offset is 20% of the sum of the following:


    (a) an amount equal to any money received, or entitled to be received, by the company referred to in paragraph 360-15(1)(b) for the issue to you of the *shares as described in that paragraph;


    (b) an amount equal to the *market value of any *non-cash benefit received, or entitled to be received, by the company referred to in paragraph 360-15(1)(b) for the issue to you of the shares as described in that paragraph, as at the time the shares were issued to you.


    360-25(2)    
    However, reduce this amount to the extent necessary to ensure that the sum of the following does not exceed $200,000:


    (a) the sum of the *tax offsets under this Subdivision for the income year for which you and your *affiliates (if any) are entitled;


    (b) the sum of the tax offsets under this Subdivision that you and your affiliates (if any) carry forward to the income year.

    SECTION 360-30   Amount of the tax offset - members of trusts or partnerships  

    360-30(1)    
    If subsection 360-15(2) applies, the amount of the *member ' s *tax offset for the income year is as follows:

    Determined share of notional tax offset × Notional tax offset amount

    where:

    determined share of notional tax offset
    is the percentage determined under subsection (2) for the *member.

    notional tax offset amount
    is what would, under section 360-25 , have been the amount of the trust ' s or partnership ' s *tax offset (the notional tax offset ) if the trust or partnership had been an individual.


    360-30(1A)    
    However, reduce the amount worked out under subsection (1) to the extent necessary to ensure that the sum of the following does not exceed $200,000:


    (a) the sum of the *tax offsets under this Subdivision for the income year for which the member and the member ' s *affiliates (if any) are entitled;


    (b) the sum of the tax offsets under this Subdivision that the member and the member ' s affiliates (if any) carry forward to the income year.


    360-30(2)    
    The trustee or partnership may determine the percentage of the notional tax offset that is the *member ' s share of the notional tax offset.

    360-30(3)    
    If, under the terms and conditions under which the trust or partnership operates, the *member would be entitled to a fixed proportion of any *capital gain from a *disposal:


    (a) relating to the trust or partnership; and


    (b) of the *shares that gave rise to the notional tax offset; and


    (c) happening at the end of the income year to which the notional tax offset relates;

    the percentage determined under subsection (2) must be equivalent to that fixed proportion, and a determination of any other percentage has no effect.


    360-30(4)    
    The trustee or partnership must give the *member written notice of the determination. The notice:


    (a) must enable the member to work out the amount of the member ' s *tax offset by including enough information to enable the member to work out the member ' s share of the notional tax offset; and


    (b) must be given to the member within 3 months after the end of the income year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows.

    360-30(5)    
    The sum of all the percentages determined under subsection (2) in relation to the *members of the trust or partnership must not exceed 100%.

    SECTION 360-35  

    360-35   Amount of the tax offset - trustees  


    If subsection 360-15(3) applies, the amount of the *tax offset is the difference between:


    (a) what would, under section 360-25 , have been the amount of the tax offset to which the trustee would have been entitled if the trustee had been an individual; and


    (b) if *members of the trust are entitled to tax offsets under subsection 360-15(2) arising from the same *shares to which the trustee ' s entitlement arises under subsection 360-15(3) - the sum of the amounts worked out under section 360-30 (disregarding any reductions under subsection 360-30(1A) ) for those tax offsets.

    SECTION 360-40   Early stage innovation companies  

    360-40(1)    
    This subsection applies to a company at a particular time (the test time ) in an income year (the current year ) if:


    (a) the company was:


    (i) incorporated in Australia within the last 3 income years (the latest being the current year); or

    (ii) incorporated in Australia within the last 6 income years (the latest being the current year), and across the last 3 of those income years before the current year it and its *100% subsidiaries (if any) incurred total expenses of $1 million or less; or

    (iii) registered in the *Australian Business Register within the last 3 income years (the latest being the current year); and


    (b) the company and its 100% subsidiaries (if any) incurred total expenses of $1 million or less in the income year before the current year; and


    (c) the company and its 100% subsidiaries (if any) had a total assessable income of $200,000 or less in the income year before the current year; and


    (d) at the test time, none of the company ' s *equity interests are listed for quotation in the official list of any stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country; and


    (e) at the test time, the company has at least 100 points under section 360-45 , or:


    (i) the company is genuinely focussed on developing for commercialisation one or more new, or significantly improved, products, processes, services or marketing or organisational methods; and

    (ii) the business relating to those products, processes, services or methods has a high growth potential; and

    (iii) the company can demonstrate that it has the potential to be able to successfully scale that business; and

    (iv) the company can demonstrate that it has the potential to be able to address a broader than local market, including global markets, through that business; and

    (v) the company can demonstrate that it has the potential to be able to have competitive advantages for that business; and


    (f) at the test time, the company is not a foreign company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ).

    Note:

    For the purposes of paragraph (e), one way a company can demonstrate something is by engaging the services of another entity.


    360-40(2)    


    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), disregard any of the following:

    (a)    an Accelerating Commercialisation Grant under the program administered by the Commonwealth known as the Entrepreneurs ' Programme;

    (b)    an amount required to be included in the company ' s assessable income under subsection 355-450(1) .


    360-40(3)    
    Subparagraphs (1)(e)(i) to (v) cannot be satisfied for:


    (a) a product, process, service or method; or


    (b) an improvement to a product, process, service or method;

    that is of a kind prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.


    360-40(4)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to a company if, before the test time, the company engaged in an activity of a kind prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

    SECTION 360-45   100 point innovation test  

    360-45(1)    
    At a particular time (the test time ) in an income year (the current year ), a company has the points mentioned in an item of the following table if that item applies to the company at that time.


    Innovation points potentially available at that time in the current year
    Column 1 Column 2
    Item Points Innovation criteria
    1 75 At least 50% of the company ' s total expenses for the previous income year is expenditure that the company can notionally deduct for that income year under section 355-205 (about R & D expenditure).
    2 75 The company has received an Accelerating Commercialisation Grant under the program administered by the Commonwealth known as the Entrepreneurs ' Programme.
    3 50 At least 15%, but less than 50%, of the company ' s total expenses for the previous income year is expenditure that the company can notionally deduct for that income year under section 355-205 (about R & D expenditure).
    4 50 (a) the company has completed or is undertaking an accelerator program that:
          (i) provides time-limited support for entrepreneurs with start-up businesses; and
          (ii) is provided to entrepreneurs that are selected in an open, independent and competitive manner; and
        (b) the entity providing that program has been providing that, or other accelerator programs for entrepreneurs, for at least 6 months; and
        (c) such programs have been completed by at least one cohort of entrepreneurs.
    5 50 (a) a total of at least $50,000 has been paid for *equity interests that are *shares in the company; and
        (b) the company issued those shares to one or more entities that:
          (i) were not *associates of the company immediately before the issue of those shares; and
          (ii) did not *acquire those shares primarily to assist another entity become entitled to a *tax offset (or a modified CGT treatment) under this Subdivision; and
        (c) the company issued those shares at least one day before the test time.
    6 50 (a) the company has rights (including equitable rights) under a *Commonwealth law as:
          (i) the patentee, or a licensee, of a standard patent; or
          (ii) the owner, or a licensee, of a plant breeder ' s right;
        granted in Australia within the last 5 years (ending at the test time); or
        (b) the company has equivalent rights under a *foreign law.
    7 25 Unless item 6 applies to the company at the test time:
        (a) the company has rights (including equitable rights) under a *Commonwealth law as:
          (i) the patentee, or a licensee, of an innovation patent granted and certified in Australia; or
          (ii) the owner, or a licensee, of a registered design registered in Australia;
        within the last 5 years (ending at the test time); or
        (b) the company has equivalent rights under a *foreign law.
    8 25 The company has a written agreement with:
        (a) an institution or body listed in Schedule 1 to the Higher Education Funding Act 1988 (about institutions or bodies eligible for special research assistance); or
        (b) an entity registered under section 29A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 (about research service providers);
        to co-develop and commercialise a new, or significantly improved, product, process, service or marketing or organisational method.


    360-45(2)    
    At the test time, the company also has the points prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this subsection if the prescribed innovation criteria for those points apply to the company at that time.

    SECTION 360-50   Modified CGT treatment  

    360-50(1)    
    This section applies if the issuing of a *share to an entity gives rise to an entitlement to a *tax offset under this Subdivision.

    Note:

    This section applies to any share that gives rise to the entitlement, regardless of whether subsection 360-25(2) reduces the amount of the tax offset.


    360-50(2)    
    The entity is taken to hold the *share on capital account.

    360-50(3)    
    The entity must disregard any *capital loss it makes from any *CGT event happening in relation to the *share if:


    (a) the entity has continuously held the share since its issue; and


    (b) the CGT event happens before the tenth anniversary of the issue of the share.

    360-50(4)    
    The entity may disregard any *capital gain it makes from any *CGT event happening in relation to the *share if:


    (a) the entity has continuously held the share since its issue; and


    (b) the CGT event happens on or after the first anniversary, but before the tenth anniversary, of the issue of the share.

    360-50(5)    
    If the entity has continuously held the *share since its issue, the *first element of its *cost base and *reduced cost base becomes, on the tenth anniversary of its issue, its *market value on that anniversary.

    SECTION 360-55   Modified CGT treatment - partnerships  

    360-55(1)    
    The purpose of this section is to ensure that the modifications made by section 360-50 apply to each partner in a partnership in a case where the partnership is the entity that is issued with the *share mentioned in subsection 360-50(1) .

    360-55(2)    
    In such a case, subsections 360-50(2) to (4) apply as if:


    (a) the first reference in those subsections to the entity were a reference to each partner in the partnership; and


    (b) the first reference in those subsections to the *share were a reference to the partner ' s interest in the share.

    Note:

    The references to the entity and the share in the paragraphs of subsections 360-50(3) and (4) continue to apply unchanged.


    360-55(3)    
    In such a case, treat subsection 360-50(5) as if it read as follows:

    If the partnership has continuously held the *share since its issue, on the tenth anniversary of its issue:

  • (a) the *first element of the *cost base for a partner ' s interest in the share becomes so much of the share ' s *market value on that anniversary as is calculated by reference to the partnership agreement, or partnership law if there is no agreement; and
  • (b) the *first element of the *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

  • SECTION 360-60   Modified CGT treatment - not affected by certain roll-overs  

    360-60(1)    
    The purpose of this section is to ensure that the modifications made by section 360-50 are not affected merely because of one or more *same-asset roll-overs or *replacement-asset roll-overs (other than roll-overs under Division 122 or Subdivision 124-M ).

    360-60(2)    
    If, apart from those roll-overs, the entity (the original entity ) mentioned in subsection 360-50(1) would continue to hold the *share (the original share ) mentioned in that subsection, then subsections 360-50(2) to (5) apply as if:


    (a) the following asset were the original share:


    (i) if the last roll-over is a *same-asset roll-over - the asset for the roll-over;

    (ii) if the last roll-over is a *replacement-asset roll-over - the replacement asset for the roll-over; and
    Note:

    The asset for subparagraph (i) will be the original share unless a replacement-asset roll-over happened beforehand.


    (b) that asset was issued when the original share was issued; and


    (c) the entity that *acquired that asset for the roll-over had continuously held that asset since the original share was issued; and


    (d) that entity were the original entity; and


    (e) in a case where that entity is a partnership - paragraphs (a) to (d) modify subsections 360-50(2) to (5) as they apply with the modifications in section 360-55 ; and


    (f) in a case where that entity is not a partnership but the entity that owned the original asset for the roll-over is - paragraphs (a) to (d) modify subsections 360-50(2) to (5) as they apply without the modifications in section 360-55 .

    Note:

    A roll-over under Division 122 (about wholly-owned companies) or Subdivision 124-M (about scrip for scrip roll-overs) will stop the modified CGT treatment under section 360-50 from continuing to apply.


    SECTION 360-65   Separate modified CGT treatment for roll-overs about wholly-owned companies or scrip for scrip roll-overs  

    360-65(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *share mentioned in subsection 360-50(1) has been continuously held by the entity mentioned in that subsection; and


    (b) then:


    (i) the share, or interests in the share, are *disposed of in a way that gives rise to a trigger event (see section 122-15 or 122-125 ) for a roll-over under Division 122 ; or

    (ii) the share becomes the original interest (see paragraph 124-780(1)(a) ) for a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M ; and


    (c) the roll-over happens on or after the first anniversary, but before the tenth anniversary, of the issue of the share;

    the *first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share just before the roll-over is taken to be its *market value at that time.

    Note:

    This subsection is a separate modified CGT treatment, and not a continuation of the modifications made by section 360-50 .


    360-65(2)    
    If:


    (a) an asset mentioned in paragraph 360-60(2)(a) for a roll-over has been continuously held by the entity that *acquired that asset for that roll-over; and


    (b) then:


    (i) that asset, or interests in that asset, are *disposed of in a way that gives rise to a trigger event (see section 122-15 or 122-125 ) for a roll-over under Division 122 ; or

    (ii) that asset becomes the original interest (see paragraph 124-780(1)(a) ) for a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M ; and


    (c) the later roll-over happens on or after the first anniversary, but before the tenth anniversary, of the issue of the original share (see subsection 360-60(2) for the earlier roll-over;

    the *first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of that asset just before the later roll-over is taken to be its *market value at that time.

    Note:

    This subsection is a separate modified CGT treatment, and not a continuation of the modifications made by section 360-50 .


    (Repealed) Division 373 - Intellectual property  

    (Repealed) Division 375 - Australian films  

    (Repealed) Subdivision 375-G - Film losses  

    375-800   (Repealed) SECTION 375-800 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    (Repealed) Operative provisions

    375-805   (Repealed) SECTION 375-805 Does your tax loss have a film component?  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    375-810   (Repealed) SECTION 375-810 What is a film loss?  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    375-815   (Repealed) SECTION 375-815 Deductibility of film losses  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    375-820   (Repealed) SECTION 375-820 Order in which tax losses are to be deducted  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 375-H - Deductions for shares in a film licensed investment company  

    375-850   (Repealed) SECTION 375-850 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    (Repealed) Provisions affecting you if you own shares in a film licensed investment company

    375-855   (Repealed) SECTION 375-855 What can you deduct?  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    375-860   (Repealed) SECTION 375-860 When can you claim the deduction?  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    375-865   (Repealed) SECTION 375-865 How can you lose your entitlement?  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    375-870   (Repealed) SECTION 375-870 How this Subdivision applies to partners and partnerships  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    375-872   (Repealed) SECTION 375-872 Distribution of FLIC concessional capital is instead taken to be a dividend  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    (Repealed) Provisions affecting film licensed investment companies

    375-875   (Repealed) SECTION 375-875 Tax losses cannot be transferred to or from FLICs  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    375-880   (Repealed) SECTION 375-880 FLIC cannot claim deductions for concessional capital  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007)

    Division 376 - Films generally (tax offsets for Australian production expenditure)  

    Subdivision 376-A - Guide to Division 376  

    SECTION 376-1   What this Division is about  


    Companies may be entitled to 1 of 3 refundable tax offsets in relation to Australian expenditure incurred in making films. The offsets are designed to support and develop the Australian screen media industry by providing concessional tax treatment for Australian expenditure.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    376-2 Key features of the tax offsets for Australian production expenditure on films
    376-5 Structure of this Division

    SECTION 376-2   Key features of the tax offsets for Australian production expenditure on films  

    376-2(1)    
    The 3 tax offsets are:

    (a)    a refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making an Australian film (the producer offset); and

    (b)    a refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making any film (the location offset); and

    (c)    a refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure on post, digital and visual effects production for any film (the PDV offset).

    376-2(2)    
    A company is only entitled to one of these offsets in relation to a film.

    376-2(3)    
    The amount of the offset is determined as a percentage of certain Australian expenditure incurred by a company in producing the film:

    (a)    

    the amount of the producer offset is:

    (i) if the film is a feature film that was produced for commercial exhibition to the public in cinemas - 40% of the company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film; and

    (ii) otherwise - 30% of the company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film; and

    (b)    

    the amount of the location offset is 16.5% of the company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film; and

    (c)    

    the amount of the PDV offset is 30% of the company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film that relates to post, digital and visual effects production for the film.

    376-2(4)    
    One of the requirements for entitlement to these offsets is that a company must be issued with a certificate for the film. The certificate will state the amount of Australian expenditure on which the offset will be determined.

    376-2(5)    
    The offset is claimed by a company in its income tax return.

    SECTION 376-5   Structure of this Division  

    376-5(1)    
    Subdivision 376-B tells you about the different tax offsets available for films, who can get each offset and what conditions must be met to get each offset. It also tells you how to work out the amount of each offset.

    376-5(2)    
    Subdivision 376-C explains what is meant by:


    (a) production expenditure on a film; and


    (b) qualifying Australian production expenditure on a film.

    It also contains some rules for quantifying expenditure.


    376-5(3)    
    Subdivision 376-D deals with a number of administrative matters:


    (a) applying for a certificate for a film; and


    (b) the issue and revocation of a certificate for a film; and


    (c) the making of rules by the Arts Minister (including rules for the establishment of the Film Certification Advisory Board) and the film authority; and


    (d) review of decisions of the Arts Minister and the film authority; and


    (e) amendment of assessments following the revocation of a certificate for a film.

    Subdivision 376-B - Tax offsets for Australian expenditure in making a film  

    Refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making a film (location offset)

    SECTION 376-10   Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making a film (location offset)  

    376-10(1)    
    A company is entitled to a * tax offset under this section (the location offset ) for an income year in respect of a * film if:


    (a) (Repealed by No 61 of 2011)


    (b) the company ' s *qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film ceased being incurred in the income year; and


    (c) the Arts Minister has issued a certificate to the company for the film under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset); and


    (d) the company claims the offset in its * income tax return for the income year; and


    (e) the company:


    (i) is an Australian resident; or

    (ii) is a foreign resident but does have a * permanent establishment in Australia and does have an * ABN;
    when the company lodges the income tax return and when the tax offset is due to be credited to the company.

    The claim referred to in paragraph (d) is irrevocable.

    Note:

    The location offset is a refundable tax offset: see section 67-23 .


    376-10(2)    
    The company is not entitled to the location offset if:


    (a) the company or someone else claims a deduction in relation to a unit of industrial property that relates to copyright in the * film under former Division 10B of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or


    (b) a final certificate for the film has been issued at any time under former Division 10BA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or


    (c) a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or


    (d) a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force).


    S 376-10 substituted by No 164 of 2007 , s 3 and Sch 10 item 1, effective 25 September 2007. For former wording and savings provisions see note under Div 376 heading.

    SECTION 376-15  

    376-15   Amount of the location offset  


    The amount of the location offset is 16.5% of the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the * film (as determined by the * Arts Minister under section 376-30 ).

    SECTION 376-20   Minister must issue certificate for a film for the location offset  

    376-20(1)    
    The * Arts Minister must issue a certificate to a company for a * film in relation to the location offset if the Minister is satisfied that the conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (5) are met.

    Type of film

    376-20(2)    
    The conditions in this subsection are that:


    (a) the * film was produced for:


    (i) exhibition to the public in cinemas or by way of television broadcasting (including broadcasting by way of the delivery of a television program by a broadcasting service within the meaning of the Broadcasting Services Act 1992 ); or

    (ii) distribution to the public as a video recording (whether on video tapes, digital video disks or otherwise); and


    (b) the film is:


    (i) a * feature film or a film of a like nature; or

    (ii) a mini-series of television drama; or

    (iii) a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (i) or (ii); and


    (c) the film is not, or is not to a substantial extent:


    (i) if the film is covered by subparagraph (b)(i) or (ii) - a * documentary; or

    (ii) a film for exhibition as an advertising program or a commercial; or

    (iii) a film for exhibition as a discussion program, a quiz program, game show, a panel program, a variety program or a program of a like nature; or

    (iv) a film of a public event; or

    (v) if the film is covered by subparagraph (b)(i) or (ii) - a film forming part of a drama program series that is, or is intended to be, of a continuing nature; or

    (vi) a training film; or

    (vii) a computer game (within the meaning of the Classification (Publications, Films and Computer Games) Act 1995 ).


    Television series

    376-20(3)    
    The conditions in this subsection are that:


    (a) if the * film is a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (2)(b)(i) or (ii), it is made up of 2 or more episodes that:


    (i) are produced wholly or principally for exhibition to the public on television under a single title; and

    (ii) contain a common theme or themes; and

    (iii) contain dramatic elements that form a narrative structure; and

    (iv) are produced wholly or principally for exhibition together, for a national market or national markets; and
    Note:

    A documentary can be a television series.


    (b) if the film is a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (2)(b)(i) or (ii):


    (i) for a television series that is predominantly a digital animation or other animation - the * making of the television series (other than a pilot episode, if any, or activities mentioned in paragraph 376-125(3)(a) ) takes place within a period of not longer than 36 months; or

    (ii) otherwise - all principal photography for the television series (other than a pilot episode, if any) takes place within a period of not longer than 12 months; and


    (c) if the film is a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (2)(b)(i) or (ii) - the amount worked out for the film under subsection (6) is at least $ 1 million.

    376-20(4)    
    To avoid doubt, and without limiting subparagraph (3)(a)(iii), a * film satisfies the requirement in that subparagraph if:


    (a) the sole or dominant purpose of the film is to depict actual events, people or situations; and


    (b) the film depicts those events, people or situations in a dramatic or entertaining way, with a heavy emphasis on dramatic impact or entertainment value.

    Conditions relating to expenditure thresholds

    376-20(5)    
    The conditions in this subsection are that:


    (a) the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the * film (as determined by the * Arts Minister under section 376-30 ) is at least $ 15 million; and


    (b) (Repealed by No 61 of 2011)


    (c) the company either carried out, or made the arrangements for the carrying out of, all the activities in Australia that were necessary for the making of the film.

    Note:

    The operation of paragraph (c) is affected by paragraph 376-180(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the making of a film from another company).


    376-20(6)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (3)(c), the amount for a * film is worked out by using the formula:


      Total QAPE  
      Duration of film in hours  

    where:

    duration of film in hours
    means the total length of the * film, measured in hours.

    total QAPE
    means the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the * film (as determined by the * Arts Minister under section 376-30 ).


    SECTION 376-25   Meaning of documentary  


    Meaning of documentary

    376-25(1)    
    A * film is a documentary if the film is a creative treatment of actuality, having regard to:


    (a) the extent and purpose of any contrived situation featured in the film; and


    (b) the extent to which the film explores an idea or a theme; and


    (c) the extent to which the film has an overall narrative structure; and


    (d) any other relevant matters.

    Exclusion of infotainment or lifestyle programs and magazine programs

    376-25(2)    
    However, a * film is not a documentary if it is:


    (a) an infotainment or lifestyle program (within the meaning of Schedule 6 to the Broadcasting Services Act 1992 ); or


    (b) a film that:


    (i) presents factual information; and

    (ii) has 2 or more discrete parts, each dealing with a different subject or a different aspect of the same subject; and

    (iii) does not contain an over-arching narrative structure or thesis.

    SECTION 376-30   Minister to determine a company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the location offset  

    376-30(1)    
    If a company applies to the * Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate to the company for a * film under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset), the Arts Minister must, as soon as practicable after receiving the application, determine in writing the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film for the purposes of the location offset.

    376-30(2)    
    In making a determination under subsection (1), the * Arts Minister must have regard to the matters in Subdivision 376-C .

    376-30(3)    
    The * Arts Minister must give the company written notice of the determination.

    376-30(4)    
    A determination made under subsection (1) is not a legislative instrument.

    Refundable tax offset for post, digital and visual effects production for a film (PDV offset)

    SECTION 376-35   Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for post, digital and visual effects production for a film (PDV offset)  

    376-35(1)    
    A company is entitled to a * tax offset under this section (the PDV offset ) for an income year in respect of a * film if:


    (a) the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film, to the extent that it relates to * post, digital and visual effects production for the film, ceased being incurred in the income year; and


    (b) the * Arts Minister has issued a certificate to the company for the post, digital and visual effects production for the film under section 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset); and


    (c) the company claims the offset in its * income tax return for the income year; and


    (d) the company:


    (i) is an Australian resident; or

    (ii) is a foreign resident but does have a * permanent establishment in Australia and does have an * ABN;
    when the company lodges the income tax return and when the tax offset is due to be credited to the company.

    The claim referred to in paragraph (c) is irrevocable.

    Note:

    The PDV offset is a refundable tax offset: see section 67-23 .


    376-35(2)    


    Post, digital and visual effects production for a * film means:


    (a) the creation of audio or visual elements (other than principal photography, pick ups or the creation of physical elements such as sets, props or costumes) for the film; and


    (b) the manipulation of audio or visual elements (other than pick ups or physical elements such as sets, props or costumes) for the film; and


    (c) activities that are necessarily related to the activities mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b).

    Note:

    3D animation, digital compositing and music composition and recording are examples of post, digital and visual effects production.


    376-35(3)    
    The company is not entitled to the PDV offset if:


    (a) the company or someone else claims a deduction in relation to a unit of industrial property that relates to copyright in the * film under former Division 10B of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or


    (b) a final certificate for the film has been issued at any time under former Division 10BA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or


    (c) a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or


    (d) a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force).


    SECTION 376-40  

    376-40   Amount of the PDV offset  


    The amount of the PDV offset is 30% of the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure (as determined by the * Arts Minister under section 376-50 ) on a * film, to the extent that it relates to * post, digital and visual effects production for the film.

    SECTION 376-45   Minister must issue certificate for a film for the PDV offset  

    376-45(1)    
    The * Arts Minister must issue a certificate to a company for the * post, digital and visual effects production for a * film in relation to the PDV offset if the Minister is satisfied that the conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (5) are met.

    Type of film

    376-45(2)    
    The conditions in this subsection are that:


    (a) the * film was produced for:


    (i) exhibition to the public in cinemas or by way of television broadcasting (including broadcasting by way of the delivery of a television program by a broadcasting service within the meaning of the Broadcasting Services Act 1992 ); or

    (ii) distribution to the public as a video recording (whether on video tapes, digital video disks or otherwise); and


    (b) the film is:


    (i) a * feature film or a film of a like nature; or

    (ii) a mini-series of television drama; or

    (iii) a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (i) or (ii); and


    (c) the film is not, or is not to a substantial extent:


    (i) if the film is covered by subparagraph (b)(i) or (ii) - a * documentary; or

    (ii) a film for exhibition as an advertising program or a commercial; or

    (iii) a film for exhibition as a discussion program, a quiz program, game show, a panel program, a variety program or a program of a like nature; or

    (iv) a film of a public event; or

    (v) if the film is covered by subparagraph (b)(i) or (ii) - a film forming part of a drama program series that is, or is intended to be, of a continuing nature; or

    (vi) a training film; or

    (vii) a computer game (within the meaning of the Classification (Publications, Films and Computer Games) Act 1995 ).


    Television series

    376-45(3)    
    The condition in this subsection is that, if the * film is a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (2)(b)(i) or (ii), it is made up of 2 or more episodes that:


    (a) are produced wholly or principally for exhibition to the public on television under a single title; and


    (b) contain a common theme or themes; and


    (c) contain dramatic elements that form a narrative structure; and


    (d) are produced wholly or principally for exhibition together, for a national market or national markets.

    Note:

    A documentary can be a television series.


    376-45(4)    
    To avoid doubt, and without limiting paragraph (3)(c), a * film satisfies the requirement in that paragraph if:


    (a) the sole or dominant purpose of the film is to depict actual events, people or situations; and


    (b) the film depicts those events, people or situations in a dramatic or entertaining way, with a heavy emphasis on dramatic impact or entertainment value.

    Conditions relating to expenditure thresholds

    376-45(5)    
    The conditions of this subsection are that:


    (a) the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the * film (as determined by the * Arts Minister under section 376-50 ), to the extent that it relates to * post, digital and visual effects production for the film, is at least $500,000; and


    (b) the company either carried out, or made the arrangements for the carrying out of, all the activities in Australia that were necessary for the post, digital and visual effects production for the film.

    Note:

    The operation of paragraph (b) is affected by paragraph 376-180(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the making of a film from another company).


    SECTION 376-50   Minister to determine a company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the PDV offset  

    376-50(1)    
    If a company applies to the * Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate to the company for the * post, digital and visual effects production for a * film under section 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset), the Arts Minister must, as soon as practicable after receiving the application, determine in writing the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure, to the extent that it relates to post, digital and visual effects production for the film, for the purposes of the PDV offset.

    376-50(2)    
    In making a determination under subsection (1), the * Arts Minister must have regard to the matters in Subdivision 376-C .

    376-50(3)    
    The * Arts Minister must give the company written notice of the determination.

    376-50(4)    
    A determination made under subsection (1) is not a legislative instrument.

    Refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making an Australian film (producer offset)

    SECTION 376-55   Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making an Australian film (producer offset)  

    376-55(1)    
    A company is entitled to a * tax offset under this section (the producer offset ) for an income year in respect of a * film if:

    (a)    the film was * completed in the income year; and

    (b)    the * film authority has issued a certificate to the company under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) for the film; and

    (c)    the company claims the offset in its * income tax return for the income year; and

    (d)    the company:


    (i) is an Australian resident; or

    (ii) is a foreign resident but does have a * permanent establishment in Australia and does have an * ABN;
    when the company lodges the income tax return and when the tax offset is due to be credited to the company.

    The claim referred to in paragraph (c) is irrevocable.

    Note:

    The producer offset is a refundable tax offset: see section 67-23 .


    376-55(2)    
    A * film is completed :

    (a)    

    for a film that is not covered by paragraph (b) or (c) - when it is first in a state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be distributed, broadcast or exhibited to the general public; or

    (b)    

    for a series other than a drama series - at the earlier of:

    (i) the time when the episode in which the 65th commercial hour is reached is first in a state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be distributed, broadcast or exhibited to the general public; and

    (ii) the time when the series other than a drama series is first in such a state; and

    (c)    

    for a season of a series other than a drama series - at the earlier of:

    (i) the time when the episode in which the 65th commercial hour is reached is first in a state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be distributed, broadcast or exhibited to the general public; and

    (ii) the time when the season is first in such a state.

    376-55(3)    


    Film authority means Screen Australia.

    376-55(4)    
    The company is not entitled to the producer offset if:

    (a)    

    the company or someone else claims a deduction in relation to a unit of industrial property that relates to copyright in the * film under former Division 10B of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (b)    

    a final certificate for the film has been issued at any time under former Division 10BA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or

    (c)    a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or

    (d)    a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or

    (e)    

    (Repealed by No 136 of 2012)

    (f)    production assistance (other than * development assistance) for the film has been received by the company or anyone else before 1 July 2007 from any of the following bodies:


    (i) the Film Finance Corporation Australia Limited;

    (ii) Film Australia Limited;

    (iii) the Australian Film Commission;

    (iv) the Australian Film, Television and Radio School; or

    (g)    

    the *film authority ' s Producer Equity Program has provided financial assistance to the company or anyone else for the making of the film.

    376-55(5)    
    Development assistance for a * film means financial assistance provided to assist with meeting the development costs for the film, and includes assistance to the extent to which it is provided in relation to any of the following:

    (a)    location surveys and other activities undertaken to assess locations for possible use in the film;

    (b)    storyboarding for the film;

    (c)    scriptwriting for the film;

    (d)    research for the film;

    (e)    casting actors for the film;

    (f)    developing a budget for the film;

    (g)    developing a shooting schedule for the film.

    SECTION 376-60  

    376-60   Amount of the producer offset  


    The amount of the producer offset is:

    (a)    

    if the *film is a *feature film that was produced for commercial exhibition to the public in cinemas - 40%; or

    (b)    

    otherwise - 30%;

    of the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film (as determined by the * film authority under section 376-75 ).

    SECTION 376-65   Film authority must issue certificate for an Australian film for the producer offset  

    376-65(1)    
    The * film authority must issue a certificate to a company for a * film in relation to the producer offset if the film authority is satisfied that:

    (a)    the company either carried out, or made the arrangements for the carrying out of, all the activities that were necessary for the * making of the film; and

    (b)    the conditions in subsections (2) to (6) are met.

    Note:

    The operation of paragraph (a) is affected by paragraph 376-180(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the making of a film from another company).



    Type of film

    376-65(2)    
    The conditions in this subsection are that:

    (a)    the * film:


    (i) has a significant Australian content (see section 376-70 ); or

    (ii) has been made under an * arrangement entered into between the Commonwealth or an authority of the Commonwealth and a foreign country or an authority of the foreign country; and

    (b)    the film was produced for:


    (i) exhibition to the public in cinemas or by way of television broadcasting (including broadcasting by way of the delivery of a television program by a broadcasting service within the meaning of the Broadcasting Services Act 1992 ); or

    (ii) distribution to the public as a video recording (whether on video tapes, digital video disks or otherwise); and

    (c)    

    the film is:

    (i) a * feature film; or

    (ii) a single episode program; or

    (iii) a series; or

    (iv) a season of a series; or

    (v) a short form animated film that is not covered by subparagraph (i) , (ii) , (iii) or (iv) ; and

    (d)    

    the film is not, or is not to a substantial extent:

    (i) a film for exhibition as an advertising program or a commercial; or

    (ii) a film for exhibition as a discussion program, a quiz program, game show, a panel program, a variety program or a program of a like nature; or

    (iii) a film of a public event (other than a *documentary); or

    (iv) a training film; or

    (v) a computer game (within the meaning of the Classification (Publications, Films and Computer Games) Act 1995 ); or

    (vi) a news or current affairs program; or

    (vii) a reality program (other than a documentary).


    Single episode programs

    376-65(3)    
    The conditions in this subsection are that, if the * film is a single episode program, it:

    (a)    is of a like nature to a * feature film; and

    (b)    is produced for:


    (i) exhibition to the public by way of television broadcasting (including broadcasting by way of the delivery of a television program by a broadcasting service within the meaning of the Broadcasting Services Act 1992 ); or

    (ii) distribution to the public as a video recording (whether on video tapes, digital video disks or otherwise); and

    (c)    

    if the program is a * documentary - is of at least one half of a commercial hour in duration; and

    (d)    if the program is not a documentary - is of at least one commercial hour in duration.



    Short form animated film

    376-65(4)    
    The conditions in this subsection are that, if the * film is a short form animated film, it:

    (a)    is a program comprising one or more episodes which are produced wholly or principally for exhibition together, for a national market or national markets under a single title; and

    (b)    is predominantly made using cell, stop motion, digital or other animation; and

    (c)    contains a common theme or themes; and

    (d)    is of at least one quarter of a commercial hour in duration.



    Series and seasons of series

    376-65(5)    
    The conditions in this subsection are that:

    (a)    

    if the application for the certificate is for a * film that is a series and not for a film that is a season of that series:

    (i) the series is made up of at least 2 episodes; and

    (ii) each episode of the series is at least one half of a commercial hour in duration, except where the film is predominantly made using cell, stop motion, digital or other animation, in which case each episode is at least one quarter of a commercial hour in duration; and

    (iii) in the case of a series other than a drama series - the series has a new creative concept (see section 376-70 ); and

    (b)    

    if the application for the certificate is for a film that is a season of a series:

    (i) the season is made up of at least 2 episodes; and

    (ii) each episode of the series is at least one half of a commercial hour in duration, except where the film is predominantly made using cell, stop motion, digital or other animation, in which case each episode is at least one quarter of a commercial hour in duration; and

    (iii) in the case of a series other than a drama series - the series has a new creative concept (see section 376-70 ).


    Expenditure thresholds

    376-65(6)    


    The conditions in this subsection are as set out in the table.


    Expenditure thresholds
    Item For this type of film … The total of the company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film (as determined by the film authority under section 376-75) is at least … and the amount for the film worked out under subsection (7) is at least …
    1 A * feature film $500,000 not applicable
    2 A single episode program other than a * documentary $500,000 not applicable
    3 A single episode program that is a * documentary $500,000 $ 250,000
    4 A short form animated film that is not a * feature film, a single episode program, a series or a season of a series $ 250,000 $ 1,000,000
    5 A * film where the application for the certificate is for a series and not for a season of that series, and the series is not a * documentary $ 1 million $ 500,000
    6 A * film where the application for the certificate is for a series and not for a season of that series, and the series is a * documentary $500,000 $ 250,000
    7 A * film where the application for the certificate is for a season of a series, and the series is not a * documentary $ 1 million $ 500,000
    8 A * film where the application for the certificate is for a season of a series, and the series is a * documentary $500,000 $ 250,000


    376-65(7)    
    The amount worked out for a * film under this subsection is the amount worked out using the formula:


      Total QAPE  
      Duration of film in hours  

    where:

    duration of film in hours
    means the total length of the * film, measured in hours.

    total QAPE
    means the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the * film (as determined by the * film authority under section 376-75 ).


    SECTION 376-70   Determination of content of film  

    376-70(1)    
    In determining for the purposes of section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) whether a * film has a significant Australian content, the * film authority must have regard to the following:


    (a) the subject matter of the film;


    (b) the place where the film was made;


    (c) the nationalities and places of residence of the persons who took part in the * making of the film;


    (d) the details of the * production expenditure incurred in respect of the film;


    (e) any other matters that the film authority considers to be relevant.

    376-70(2)    
    In determining for the purposes of section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) whether a * film that is a series has a new creative concept, the * film authority must have regard to the following:


    (a) the title of the series;


    (b) whether the series has substantially different characters, settings, production locations and individuals involved in the * making of the series than any other series;


    (c) any other matters that the film authority considers to be relevant.

    SECTION 376-75   Film authority to determine a company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the producer offset  

    376-75(1)    
    If a company applies to the * film authority for the issue of a certificate to the company for a * film under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset), the film authority must, as soon as practicable after receiving the application, determine in writing the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film for the purposes of the producer offset.

    376-75(2)    
    In making a determination under subsection (1), the * film authority must have regard tothe matters in Subdivision 376-C .

    376-75(3)    
    The * film authority must give the company written notice of the determination.

    376-75(4)    
    A determination made under subsection (1) is not a legislative instrument.

    Subdivision 376-C - Production expenditure and qualifying Australian production expenditure  

    Production expenditure - common rules

    SECTION 376-125   Production expenditure - general test  

    376-125(1)    
    A company ' s production expenditure on a * film is expenditure that the company incurs to the extent to which it:


    (a) is incurred in, or in relation to, the * making of the film; or


    (b) is reasonably attributable to:


    (i) the use of equipment or other facilities for; or

    (ii) activities undertaken in;
    the making of the film.

    376-125(2)    
    The making of a * film means the doing of the things necessary for the production of the first copy of the film.

    376-125(3)    
    The making of a * film includes:


    (a) pre-production activities in relation to the film; and


    (b) post-production activities in relation to the film; and


    (c) any other activities undertaken to bring the film up to the state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be distributed, broadcast or exhibited to the general public.

    376-125(4)    
    The making of a * film does not include:


    (a) developing the proposal for the * making of the film; or


    (b) arranging or obtaining finance for the film; or


    (c) distributing the film (other than the activities listed in paragraphs (a) to (e) of item 7 of the table in subsection 376-170(2) ); or


    (d) promoting the film.


    376-125(5)    
    Without limiting subsection (1), a company ' s production expenditure on a * film:


    (a) may be expenditure that is incurred in the income year for which the * tax offset is sought or in an earlier income year; and


    (b) may be expenditure of either a capital or a revenue nature; and


    (c) may be expenditure that gives rise to a deduction.

    Paragraph (c) has effect subject to item 10 of the table in section 376-135 (which deals with capital allowances).


    376-125(6)    
    If:


    (a) a company:


    (i) * holds a * depreciating asset; and

    (ii) uses the asset, while held, in the * making of a * film; and


    (b) deductions in relation to the asset are available under Division 40 (which deals with capital allowances);

    the production expenditure of the company on the film includes an amount equal to the decline in the value of the asset to the extent to which that decline is reasonably attributable to the use of the asset in the making of the film (the film proportion ). The decline in value of the asset is to be worked out using Division 40 .

    Note:

    Under item 10 of the table in section 376-135 , expenditure that sets or increases the cost of the asset does not count as production expenditure.


    376-125(7)    
    If a * balancing adjustment event occurs for the asset before the film is * completed:


    (a) if the asset ' s * termination value is more than its * adjustable value just before the event occurred - the production expenditure of the company on the film is reduced by the film proportion of the difference; or


    (b) if the asset ' s termination value is less than its adjustable value just before the event occurred - the production expenditure of the company on the film includes the film proportion of the difference.

    SECTION 376-130  

    376-130   Production expenditure - special qualifying Australian production expenditure  


    Expenditure of a company is also production expenditure of the company on a * film if it is * qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on the film under section 376-150 or 376-165 .
    Note:

    This means that the special qualifying Australian production expenditure in sections 376-150 and 376-165 is taken into account both in working out the total amount of the company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure and in working out the total amount of all the company ' s production expenditure on the film.

    SECTION 376-135  

    376-135   Production expenditure - specific exclusions  


    Despite sections 376-125 and 376-130 , the following expenditure of a company is not production expenditure of the company on a * film, except to the extent, if any, as mentioned in column 3 of the table:


    Expenditure that does not count as production expenditure on a film
    Item This kind of expenditure by the company is not production expenditure … except to the extent to which the expenditure is …
    1 Financing expenditure
    expenditure incurred by way of, or in relation to, the financing of the * film (including returns payable on amounts invested in the film and expenditure in relation to raising and servicing finance for the film)
    *qualifying Australian production expenditure under item 6 of the table in subsection 376-150(1) and paragraph (a) of item 5 of the table in subsection 376-170(2)
    2 Development expenditure
    * development expenditure on the * film
    * qualifying Australian production expenditure under item 1 of the table in subsection 376-150(1)
    3 Copyright acquisition expenditure
    expenditure incurred in acquiring copyright, or a licence in relation to copyright, in a pre-existing work for use in the * film
    * qualifying Australian production expenditure under item 2 of the table in subsection 376-150(1)
    4 General business overheads
    expenditure incurred to meet the general business overheads of the company that:
    (a) are not incurred in, or in relation to, the * making of the * film; and
    (b) are notreasonably attributable to:
        (i) the use of equipment or other
        facilities for; or
        (ii) activities undertaken in;
    the making of the film
    * qualifying Australian production expenditure under item 1 of the table in subsection 376-165(1) or item 1 of the table in subsection 376-170(2)
    5 Publicity and promotion expenditure
    expenditure incurred in publicising or otherwise promoting the * film (including press expenses, still photography, videotapes, public relations and other similar expenses)
    *qualifying Australian production expenditure under item 3 or 4 of the table in subsection 376-150(1) or item 6 of the table in subsection 376-170(2)
    6 Deferments
    amounts that are payable only out of the receipts, earnings or profits from the * film
     
    7 Profit participation
    amounts that:
    (a) depend on the receipts, earnings or profits from the * film; or
    (b) are otherwise dependent on the commercial performance of the film
     
    8 Residuals
    amounts payable in satisfaction of the residual rights of a person who is a member of the cast
    paid out by the company before the * film is * completed
    9 Advances
    amounts paid by way of advance on a payment to which item 6, 7 or 8 applies to the extent to which it may become repayable by the person to whom it is paid
     
    10 Acquisition of depreciating asset
    expenditure to the extent to which it sets, or increases, the * cost of a * depreciating asset
    This item has effect subject to subsections 376-125(6) and (7) .
    * qualifying Australian production expenditure under item 2 of the table in subsection 376-150(1)
    11 Regulations
    expenditure specified in regulations
     

    Production expenditure - special rules for the location offset

    SECTION 376-140  

    376-140   Production expenditure - special rules for the location offset  


    Despite sections 376-125 and 376-130 , the expenditure of a company is not production expenditure of the company on a * film in relation to the location offset if:


    (a) the film is a television series that is not a * feature film or a mini-series of television drama; and


    (b) the expenditure is reasonably attributable to the production of a pilot episode to the television series; and


    (c) the expenditure, apart from this subsection, would be production expenditure that was not * qualifying Australian production expenditure.

    Qualifying Australian production expenditure - common rules

    SECTION 376-145  

    376-145   Qualifying Australian production expenditure - general test  


    A company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure on a * film is the company ' s * production expenditure on the film to the extent to which it is incurred for, or is reasonably attributable to:


    (a) goods and services provided in Australia; or


    (b) the use of land located in Australia; or


    (c) the use of goods that are located in Australia at the time they are used in the * making of the film.

    SECTION 376-150   Qualifying Australian production expenditure - specific inclusions  

    376-150(1)    


    The following expenditure of a company is also qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on a * film:


    Special Australian expenditure
    Item Type of expenditure
    1 Australian development expenditure
    * development expenditure on the * film to the extent to which it is incurred for, or is reasonably attributable to:
    (a) goods and services provided in Australia; or
    (b) the use of land located in Australia; or
    (c) the use of goods that are located in Australia at the time they are used in the * making of the film
    [ see subsection (2) ]
    2 Expenditure incurred in acquiring Australian copyright
    expenditure incurred to acquire copyright, or a licence in relation to copyright, in a pre-existing work for use in the * film if the copyright is held by an individual or a company that is an Australian resident
    3 Expenditure incurred in producing Australian copyrighted promotional material
    expenditure incurred in producing material for use in publicising or otherwise promoting the * film if the copyright in the material is held by an individual or a company that is an Australian resident
    4 Expenditure incurred in producing additional content
    expenditure incurred in producing audio or visual content for the * film otherwise than for use in the first copy of the film, to the extent that the expenditure is incurred in Australia prior to the * completion of the film
    5 Regulations
    expenditure prescribed by the regulations
    6 Certain financing expenditure
    expenditure incurred in Australia prior to the end of the income year in which *completion of the *film occurs in respect of any of the following:
    (a) insurance related to making the film;
    (b) fees for audit services and legal services provided in Australia in relation to raising and servicing the financing of the film which are incurred by the company that makes, or is responsible for making, the film;
    (c) fees for incorporation and liquidation of the company that makes or is responsible for making the film.


    376-150(2)    
    Legal costs are covered by item 1 of the table in subsection (1) only if they relate to:


    (a) writers ' contracts; or


    (b) chain of title and other copyright issues.

    SECTION 376-155  

    376-155   Qualifying Australian production expenditure - specific exclusions  


    Despite sections 376-145 , 376-150 , 376-165 and 376-170 , the following expenditure of a company is not qualifying Australian production expenditure of a company on a * film:


    (a) expenditure that is incurred when:


    (i) the company is a foreign resident; and

    (ii) the company does not have both a * permanent establishment in Australia and an * ABN;


    (b) expenditure in relation to:


    (i) remuneration and other benefits provided to an individual for the individual ' s services in relation to the * making of the film; or

    (ii) travel and other costs associated with the services an individual provides in relation to the making of the film;
    if the individual:

    (iii) is not a member of the cast; and

    (iv) enters Australia to work on the film for less than 2 consecutive calendar weeks;


    (c) expenditure prescribed by the regulations.

    SECTION 376-160  

    376-160   Qualifying Australian production expenditure - treatment of services embodied in goods  


    If:


    (a) a company incurs expenditure for the provision of what is essentially a service; and


    (b) the results of the service are provided to the company by being embodied in goods that are delivered to the company; and


    (c) the service that is embodied in the goods was predominantly performed outside Australia;

    the service is not provided to the company in Australia merely because the goods are delivered to the company in Australia.

    Note:

    Paragraph (b) - a document, for example, might set out legal or other professional advice or a computer disk might contain a program that has been made or data that has been compiled.

    Qualifying Australian production expenditure - special rules for the location offset and the PDV offset

    SECTION 376-165   Qualifying Australian production expenditure - special rules for the location offset and the PDV offset  

    376-165(1)    
    For the purposes of the location offset and the PDV offset, the following expenditure of a company is also qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on a * film:


    Special Australian expenditure - location offset and PDV offset
    Item Type of expenditure
    1 Australian business overheads
    general business overheads of the company that:
    (a) are not incurred in, or in relation to, the * making of the * film; and
    (b) are not reasonably attributable to:
      (i) the use of equipment or other facilities for; or
      (ii) activities undertaken in;
        the making of the film;
    to the extent to which they:
    (c) are incurred for, or are reasonably attributable to:
      (i) goods and services provided in Australia; or
      (ii) the use of land located in Australia; or
      (iii) the use of goods that are located in Australia at the time they are used in the
          making of the film; and
    (d) represent a reasonable apportionment of those overheads between
        the making of the film and the other activities undertaken by the company
    This item has effect subject to subsection (2).
    2 Travel to Australia
    expenditure of the company in relation to an individual ' s travel to Australia to undertake activities in Australia in relation to the * making of the * film, if the remuneration paid to the individual for those activities is * qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company
    3 Expenditure incurred in freighting goods to Australia
    expenditure incurred in freighting goods to Australia, to the extent that the goods will be used in the * making of the * film


    376-165(2)    
    General business overheads of the company are covered by item 1 of the table in subsection (1) only to the extent to which they do not exceed the lesser of:


    (a) 2 % of the total of all the company ' s * production expenditure on the * film; and


    (b) $ 500,000.

    Qualifying Australian production expenditure - special rules for the producer offset

    SECTION 376-170   Qualifying Australian production expenditure - special rules for the producer offset  


    Expenditure that is qualifying Australian production expenditure

    376-170(1)    
    For the purposes of subsections 376-65(6) and (7) , expenditure on a * film incurred in a foreign country is qualifying Australian production expenditure of a company on the film if:

    (a)    the expenditure is incurred by the company claiming the offset, or by another entity that is involved in the * making of the film; and

    (b)    the expenditure would be qualifying Australian production expenditure if it had been incurred for, or reasonably attributable to:


    (i) goods and services provided in Australia; or

    (ii) the use of land located in Australia; or

    (iii) the use of goods that are located in Australia at the time they are used in the * making of the film; and

    (c)    the film is made under an * arrangement entered into between the Commonwealth or an authority of the Commonwealth and the foreigncountry or an authority of the foreign country.

    Note:

    This means that such expenditure is taken into account for the purposes of determining whether to issue a certificate for the producer offset to the company under section 376-65 . It is not taken into account in working out the amount of the producer offset to which the company is entitled.


    376-170(2)    


    For the purposes of the producer offset, the following expenditure of a company is also qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on a * film:


    Special Australian expenditure - producer offset
    Item Type of expenditure
    1 Australian business overheads
    general business overheads of the company that:
    (a) are not incurred in, or in relation to, the * making of the * film; and
    (b) are not reasonably attributable to:
      (i) the use of equipment or other facilities for; or
      (ii) activities undertaken in;
        the making of the film;
    to the extent to which they:
    (c) are incurred for, or are reasonably attributable to:
      (i) goods and services provided in Australia; or
      (ii) the use of land located in Australia; or
      (iii) the use of goods that are located in Australia at the time they are used in the making
        of the film; and
    (d) represent a reasonable apportionment of those overheads between the making of the film and the other activities undertaken by the company
    This item has effect subject to subsection (3) .
    2 Travel to Australia and other countries
    expenditure of the company in relation to an individual ' s travel:
    (a) to Australia, to undertake activities in relation to the * making of the * film; and
    (b) to or within any other country, to undertake activities in relation to the making of the film, if the remuneration paid to the individual for those activities would be * qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company under item 4 of this table.
    3 Expenditure incurred in freighting goods within and between countries
    expenditure incurred in freighting goods within and between countries, to the extent that the goods will be used in the * making of the * film.
    4 Expenditure incurred in other countries
    expenditure incurred outside Australia:
    (a) for the remuneration of an Australian resident, or the purchase of goods or services from companies or * permanent establishments that have an * ABN; and
    (b) during the period in which principal photography for the film takes place outside Australia
    if the subject matter of the film reasonably requires the location in which the expenditure is incurred to be used for principal photography.
    5 Other expenditure
    expenditure incurred in Australia in respect of any of the following:
    (a) obtaining an independent opinion of the amount of a film ' s *qualifying Australian production expenditure required for use in relation to the financing of the film;
    (b) offset carbon emissions created during the making of the film.
    6 Expenditure incurred in producing Australian copyright promotional material
    expenditure incurred in Australia in the income year of the *completion of the *film or an earlier year in respect of any of the following:
    (a) producing material for publicising or otherwise promoting the film where the copyright in the material is held or partially held by a company that is an Australian resident;
    (b) unit publicist fees.
    7 Expenditure incurred in delivering or distributing the film
    expenditure incurred by the applicant company in delivering or distributing the film prior to the end of the income year in which the *film is complete to the extent to which it is incurred for, or reasonably attributable to, any of the following:
    (a) acquiring Australian classification certificates;
    (b) sound mix mastering licenses;
    (c) re-versioning the film in Australia;
    (d) freight services provided by a company in Australia for delivery of contracted deliverables in relation to the film;
    (e) storing the film in a film vault in Australia.


    376-170(3)    
    General business overheads of the company are covered by item 1 of the table in subsection (2) only to the extent to which they do not exceed the lesser of:

    (a)    5 % of the total of all the company ' s * total film expenditure on the * film; and

    (b)    $ 500,000.

    376-170(3A)    
    Expenditure incurred for the purchase of services is not covered by item 4 of the table in subsection (2) if the services are, to any extent, performed by an individual who is not an Australian resident.



    Expenditure that is not qualifying Australian production expenditure

    376-170(4)    
    For the purposes of the producer offset, the following expenditure of a company is not qualifying Australian production expenditure of a company on a * film:

    (a)    

    expenditure on the film that is paid for with * development assistance received from any of the following bodies:

    (i) (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    (ii) Film Australia Limited;

    (iii) the Australian Film Commission;

    (iv) the Australian Film, Television and Radio School;

    (v) Screen Australia;
    unless the amount or value of the assistance has been repaid;

    (b)    subject to subsection (4A) , the following expenditure:


    (i) * development expenditure on the film;

    (ii) remuneration provided to the principal director, producers and principal cast associated with the film;
    to the extent that such expenditure comprises greater than 20 % of the company ' s * total film expenditure on the film;

    (c)    

    for a series other than a drama series, or a season of a series other than a drama series - expenditure on an episode beyond the episode in which the 65th commercial hour of the series is reached.

    376-170(4A)    


    Paragraph (4)(b) does not apply to a *film that is a * documentary.

    376-170(5)    


    In applying paragraph (4)(c) , episodes completed before 1 July 2011 count towards the limit in that paragraph.

    376-170(6)    
    Total film expenditure on a film means:

    (a)    expenditure covered by sections 376-125 , 376-130 , 376-150 and 376-170 ; and

    (b)    expenditure mentioned in column 2 of the table in section 376-135 , to the extent that it is not covered by paragraph (a) .

    Expenditure generally - common rules

    SECTION 376-175  

    376-175   Expenditure to be worked out on an arm ' s length basis  


    For the purposes of this Division, if any 2 or more parties to:


    (a) an * arrangement under which a company incurs expenditure in relation to a * film; or


    (b) any act or transaction directly or indirectly connected with expenditure that a company incurs in relation to a film;

    do not deal with each other at * arm ' s length in relation to the arrangement, or in relation to the act or transaction, the expenditure is taken to be only so much (if any) of the expenditure as would have been incurred if they had been dealing with each other at arm ' s length in relation to the arrangement, or in relation to the act or transaction.

    SECTION 376-180   Expenditure incurred by prior production companies  

    376-180(1)    
    For the purposes of this Division, if a company (the incoming company ) takes over the * making of a * film from another company (the outgoing company ):


    (a) expenditure incurred in relation to the film by the outgoing company is taken to have been incurred in relation to the film by the incoming company; and


    (b) for the purposes of determining the extent to which that expenditure is * qualifying Australian production expenditure of the incoming company, the incoming company is taken:


    (i) to have been an Australian resident at any time when the outgoing company was an Australian resident; and

    (ii) to have had a * permanent establishment in Australia at any time when the outgoing company had a permanent establishment in Australia; and

    (iii) to have had an * ABN at any time when the outgoing company had an ABN; and


    (c) expenditure that the incoming company incurs in order to be able to take over the making of the film is to be disregarded for the purposes of this Division; and


    (d) any activities carried out, and arrangements made, by the outgoing company in relation to the film are taken, for the purposes of paragraphs 376-20(5)(c) , 376-45(5)(b) and 376-65(1)(a) , to have been carried out or made by the incoming company in relation to the film.


    376-180(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1):


    (a) expenditure incurred on the * film by the outgoing company includes expenditure that the outgoing company is itself taken to have incurred on the film because of the operation of subsection (1); and


    (b) the outgoing company is taken:


    (i) to have been an Australian resident at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have been an Australian resident because of the operation of subsection (1); and

    (ii) to have had a * permanent establishment in Australia at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have had a permanent establishment in Australia because of the operation of subsection (1); and

    (iii) to have had an * ABN at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have had an ABN because of the operation of subsection (1); and


    (c) activities carried out by the outgoing company in relation to the film include activities that the outgoing company is taken to have carried out in relation to the film because of the operation of subsection (1); and


    (d) arrangements made by the outgoing company for the carrying out of activities in relation to the film include arrangements that the outgoing company is taken to have made because of the operation of subsection (1).

    Example:

    If Uncle Carty Ltd starts out making a film and then Mr Grouble Ltd takes over the making of the film, Mr Grouble Ltd is taken to have incurred the expenditure that Uncle Carty Ltd incurred on the film. If Lousie Ltd subsequently takes over the making of the film from Mr Grouble Ltd, Lousie Ltd is taken to have incurred the expenditure that Mr Grouble Ltd incurred on the film (including the expenditure of Uncle Carty Ltd that is attributed to Mr Grouble Ltd).


    SECTION 376-185  

    376-185   Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST  
    In determining an amount of expenditure for the purpose of this Division, the expenditure is taken to exclude *GST.

    Subdivision 376-D - Certificates for films and other matters  

    SECTION 376-230   Production company may apply for certificate  

    376-230(1)    


    A company may apply to the *Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate to the company for a *film under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) when all of the company ' s *qualifying Australian production expenditure for the film has been incurred.

    Application for PDV offset certificate

    376-230(2)    
    Once all of a company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on a * film, to the extent that it relates to * post, digital and visual effects production for the film, has been incurred, the company may apply to the * Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate to the company for the film under section 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset).

    Application for producer offset certificate

    376-230(3)    
    Once a * film is * completed, a company may apply to the * film authority for the issue of a certificate to the company for the film under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset).

    Form of application

    376-230(4)    
    An application under subsection (1) or (2) must be made in accordance with the rules determined by the * Arts Minister under section 376-260 so far as they relate to the requirements for applications.

    376-230(5)    
    An application under subsection (3) must be made in accordance with the rules determined by the * film authority under section 376-265 so far as they relate to the requirements for applications.

    SECTION 376-235   Notice of refusal to issue certificate  

    376-235(1)    
    If the * Arts Minister decides not to issue a certificate under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) or 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset) for a * film, the Minister must give the applicant written notice of the decision (including reasons for the decision).

    376-235(2)    
    If the * film authority decides not to issue a certificate under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) for a * film, the authority must give the applicant written notice of the decision (including reasons for the decision).

    SECTION 376-240   Issue of certificate  

    376-240(1)    
    A certificate issued to a company under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset), 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset) or 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) must:


    (a) be in writing; and


    (b) specify the company ' s * ABN; and


    (c) specify the date of issue of the certificate; and


    (d) if the certificate is issued under section 376-20 - specify the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the * film, as determined by the * Arts Minister under section 376-30 ; and


    (e) if the certificate is issued under section 376-45 - specify the total of the company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film, to the extent that it relates to * post, digital and visual effects production for the film, as determined by the Arts Minister under section 376-50 ; and


    (f) if the certificate is issued under section 376-65 - specify the total of the company ' s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film, as determined by the * film authority under section 376-75 .

    376-240(2)    
    If the certificate is issued under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) or 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset), the * Arts Minister must give the Commissioner notice of the issue of a certificate for a * film within 30 days after issuing the certificate.

    376-240(3)    
    The notice under subsection (2) must specify:


    (a) the company ' s name; and


    (b) the company ' s address; and


    (c) the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the * film, as determined by the * Arts Minister under section 376-30 or 376-50 , as the case may be; and


    (d) other matters agreed to between the Arts Minister and the Commissioner.

    The notice must be accompanied by a copy of the certificate.


    376-240(4)    
    If the certificate is issued under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset), the * film authority must give the Commissioner notice of the issue of a certificate for a * film within 30 days after issuing the certificate.

    376-240(5)    
    The notice under subsection (4) must specify:


    (a) the company ' s name; and


    (b) the company ' s address; and


    (c) the total of the company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure on the * film, as determined by the * film authority under section 376-75 ; and


    (d) other matters agreed to between the film authority and the Commissioner.

    The notice must be accompanied by a copy of the certificate.


    SECTION 376-245   Revocation of certificate  

    376-245(1)    
    The * Arts Minister may revoke a certificate issued to a company for a * film under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) or 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset) if:


    (a) the Minister is satisfied that the issue of the certificate was obtained by fraud or serious misrepresentation; or


    (b) the company does not provide a copy of the film to the Minister within 30 days of when the film is * completed.

    376-245(2)    
    If the * Arts Minister revokes a certificate under subsection (1), the Minister must give the company to whom the certificate was issued written notice of the revocation (including reasons for the decision to revoke the certificate).

    376-245(3)    
    The * film authority may revoke a certificate issued to a company for a * film under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) if the authority is satisfied that the issue of the certificate was obtained by fraud or serious misrepresentation.

    376-245(4)    
    If the * film authority revokes a certificate under subsection (3), the authority must give the company to whom the certificate was issued written notice of the revocation (including reasons for the decision to revoke the certificate).

    376-245(5)    
    If a certificate is revoked under subsection (1) or (3), it is taken, for the purposes of this Division, never to have been issued.

    Note:

    This means that if an assessment of a company ' s income tax is issued on the basis that the company is entitled to a tax offset for a film and the certificate for the film is then revoked, the assessment will be amended to take account of the fact that the company was never entitled to the tax offset: see section 376-270 .


    376-245(6)    
    Subsection (5) does not apply for the purposes of:


    (a) the operation of this section or section 376-250 ; or


    (b) a review by a court or the * AAT of the decision to revoke the certificate.

    SECTION 376-247   Delegation by Arts Minister  

    376-247(1)    
    The *Arts Minister may, in writing, delegate all or any of the Arts Minister ' s powers under the provisions mentioned in subsection (2) to:

    (a)    the *Arts Secretary; or

    (b)    an SES employee, or acting SES employee, in the Department administered by the Arts Minister.

    376-247(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), the provisions are as follows:

    (a)   section 376-20 (issue of certificate for location offset);

    (b)    section 376-30 (determination of qualifying Australian production expenditure for location offset);

    (c)    section 376-45 (issue of certificate for PDV offset);

    (d)    section 376-50 (determination of qualifying Australian production expenditure for PDV offset);

    (e)    section 376-235 (notice of refusal to issue certificate for location offset or PDV offset);

    (f)    section 376-245 (revocation of certificate for location offset or PDV offset).

    376-247(3)    
    In exercising powers under a delegation, the delegate must comply with any directions of the Arts Minister.

    SECTION 376-250   Notice of decision or determination  

    376-250(1)    
    This section applies to a notice of a decision given under section 376-235 (refusal to issue a certificate) or 376-245 (revocation of a certificate), and to a notice of a determination given under section 376-30 (determination of qualifying Australian production expenditure for location offset), 376-50 (determination of qualifying Australian production expenditure for PDV offset) or 376-75 (determination of qualifying Australian production expenditure for producer offset).

    376-250(2)    
    The notice of the decision or determination is to include the statements set out in subsections (3) and (4).

    376-250(3)    
    There must be a statement to the effect that, subject to the Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 , an application may be made to the * AAT, by (or on behalf of) any entity whose interests are affected by the decision or determination, for review of the decision or determination.

    376-250(4)    
    There must also be a statement to the effect that a request may be made under section 28 of the Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 by (or on behalf of) such an entity for a statement:


    (a) setting out the findings on material questions of fact; and


    (b) referring to the evidence or other material on which those findings were based; and


    (c) giving the reasons for the decision or determination;

    except where subsection 28(4) of that Act applies.


    376-250(5)    
    If the * Arts Minister or the * film authority fails to comply with subsection (3) or (4), that failure does not affect the validity of the decision or determination.

    SECTION 376-255  

    376-255   Review of decisions by the Administrative Appeals Tribunal  


    Applications may be made to the * AAT for review of:


    (a) a decision made by the * Arts Minister to refuse an application for a certificate under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) or 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset); or


    (b) a decision made by the Arts Minister under section 376-245 to revoke a certificate; or


    (c) a decision made by the * film authority to refuse an application for a certificate under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset); or


    (d) a decision made by the film authority under section 376-245 to revoke a certificate; or


    (e) a determination by the Arts Minister in relation to the total of a company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure under section 376-30 or 376-50 ; or


    (f) a determination by the film authority in relation to the total of a company ' s * qualifying Australian production expenditure under section 376-75 .

    SECTION 376-260   Minister may make rules about the location offset and the PDV offset  


    Rules establishing the Film Certification Advisory Board

    376-260(1)    
    The * Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules:


    (a) establishing a Film Certification Advisory Board to:


    (i) consider applications under subsection 376-230(1) (application for a certificate for the location offset) or (2) (application for a certificate for the PDV offset) and advise the Minister on whether to issue certificates under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) or 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset); and

    (ii) perform such other functions in relation to the operation of this Division as are specified in the rules; and


    (b) specifying the membership of the Board and the terms and conditions ofappointment to the Board; and


    (c) specifying procedures to be followed by the Board in performing its functions.

    Rules providing for provisional certificates in relation to location offset and the PDV offset

    376-260(2)    
    The * Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules providing for the issue of provisional certificates in relation to the location offset or the PDV offset.

    Rules about applications for certificates in relation to the location offset and the PDV offset

    376-260(3)    
    The * Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules specifying how applications for certificates (including provisional certificates) in relation to the location offset or the PDV offset are to be made, including:


    (a) the form in which applications are to be made; and


    (b) the information to be provided in applications; and


    (c) methods for verifying such information; and


    (d) procedures for providing, at the Minister ' s request, additional information in support of an application.

    376-260(4)    
    Rules under paragraph (3)(c) can include rules requiring reports by auditors or independent line producers.

    SECTION 376-265   Film authority may make rules about the producer offset  


    Rules providing for provisional certificates in relation to the producer offset

    376-265(1)    
    The * film authority may, by legislative instrument, make rules providing for the issue of provisional certificates in relation to the producer offset.

    Rules about applications for certificates in relation to the producer offset

    376-265(2)    
    The * film authority may, by legislative instrument, make rules specifying how applications for certificates (including provisional certificates) in relation to the producer offset are to be made, including:


    (a) the form in which applications are to be made; and


    (b) the information to be provided in applications; and


    (c) methods for verifying such information; and


    (d) procedures for providing, at the authority ' s request, additional information in support of an application.

    376-265(3)    
    Rules under paragraph (2)(c) can include rules requiring reports by auditors or independent line producers.

    SECTION 376-270  

    376-270   Amendment of assessments  


    Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purposes of giving effect to this Division for an income year if:


    (a) a certificate issued to a company for a * film is revoked under section 376-245 after the time the company lodged its * income tax return for an income year; and


    (b) the amendment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after the revocation of the certificate.

    Note:

    Section 170 of that Act specifies the periods within which assessments may be amended.

    SECTION 376-275  

    376-275   Review in relation to certain production levels  


    The Minister must, before the end of 12 months after the commencement of this Division, initiate a review of the effect of this Division in relation to levels of production by the Australian independent production sector compared to levels of production by Australian television broadcasters.

    Division 378 - Digital games (tax offset for Australian expenditure on digital games)  

    Guide to Division 378  

    SECTION 378-1   What this Divisionis about  


    Companies may be entitled to a refundable tax offset in relation to qualifying Australian development expenditure incurred in completing or porting a digital game, or carrying on ongoing development of digital games in an income year.

    This offset is designed to support the growth of the digital games industry in Australia by providing concessional tax treatment for Australian expenditure.

    One of the requirements for entitlement to the digital games tax offset is that the company must be issued with a certificate in respect of the completion, porting or ongoing development of a digital game. The certificate specifies the amount of qualifying Australian development expenditure determined by the Arts Minister in respect of the completion, porting or ongoing development of the digital game.

    The amount of the refundable tax offset for an income year for a company is up to 30% of the sum of the determined totals of qualifying Australian development expenditure specified in certificates issued to the company for the income year.

    Subdivision 378-A - Tax offset for Australian expenditure in developing digital games  

    SECTION 378-10   Company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure incurred in developing digital games  

    378-10(1)    
    A company is entitled to a *tax offset under this section (the digital games tax offset ) for an income year if:

    (a)    the *Arts Minister has issued one or more certificates to the company for the income year under section 378-25 (certificate for the digital games tax offset); and

    (b)    the company claims the offset in its *income tax return for the income year; and

    (c)    the company:


    (i) is an Australian resident that has an *ABN; or

    (ii) is a foreign resident that has a *permanent establishment in Australia and an ABN;
    when the company lodges the income tax return and when the tax offset is due to be credited to the company.
    Note:

    The digital games tax offset is a refundable tax offset: see section 67-23 .


    378-10(2)    
    The claim referred to in paragraph (1)(b) may be varied to take account of a variation under subsection 378-15(5) of a notice given under subsection 378-15(3) by the company in relation to the income year. Otherwise, the claim is irrevocable.

    SECTION 378-15   Amount of digital games tax offset  

    378-15(1)    
    Subject to subsection (2) , the amount of the digital games tax offset for a company for an income year is the lower of:

    (a)    30% of the sum of all the amounts determined by the *Arts Minister under section 378-30 that are specified in certificates issued to the company for the income year under section 378-25 ; and

    (b)    $20,000,000.

    378-15(2)    
    If the sum of the amounts of the digital games tax offset for an income year worked out under subsection (1) for:

    (a)    the company; and

    (b)    each other company (each of which is a related company ) that is *connected with or is an *affiliate of the company;

    is greater than $20,000,000, the amount of the digital games tax offset for the company is:

    (c)    if the requirements of subsections (3) and (4) are satisfied - the amount specified in the notice given by the company under subsection (3) ; or

    (d)    otherwise - nil.

    378-15(3)    
    The requirements of this subsection are:

    (a)    the company gives the Commissioner a notice in the *approved form specifying an amount that is not more than 30% of the sum of all the amounts determined by the *Arts Minister under section 378-25 that are specified in certificates issued to the company for the income year under section 378-30 ; and

    (b)    one or more of the related companies also give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form specifying an amount that is not more than 30% of the sum of all the amounts determined by the Arts Minister under section 378-25 that are specified in certificates issued to the related company for the income year under section 378-30 ; and

    (c)    the sum of all the amounts specified in the notices given by the company and those related companies does not exceed $20,000,000.

    Example:

    Bilby Co is primarily responsible for developing a digital game. Wombat Co, a company connected with Bilby Co, is also primarily responsible for developing a digital game. The amount worked out under subsection (1) is $15,000,000 for the income year for each company. Since the sum of these amounts exceeds $20,000,000, the companies must coordinate with one another to ensure that the amount collectively claimed stays under the $20,000,000 cap. Bilby Co and Wombat Co agree that for the income year, they will each give the Commissioner a notice specifying $10,000,000 in notices. If they both do so, each will receive an offset of $10,000,000 for the income year.


    378-15(4)    
    A notice given under subsection (3) by a companyin relation to an income year must be given at the same time as the company claims the digital games *tax offset in its *income tax return for the income year.

    378-15(5)    
    A company may vary the amount specified in a notice given under subsection (3) in relation to an income year if:

    (a)    in specifying the amount in the notice:


    (i) the company made an inadvertent error in determining whether another company is a related company; and

    (ii) as a result the company did not take account of the amount of the digital games tax offset for the other company for the income year; and

    (b)    the company gives the Commissioner a notice in the *approved form specifying the varied amount.

    Otherwise, the notice is irrevocable.


    SECTION 378-20   Meaning of digital game  

    378-20(1)    
    A digital game is a game in electronic form that is capable of generating a display on:

    (a)    a portable electronic device; or

    (b)    a computer monitor, television screen, liquid crystal display or similar medium;

    that allows for the playing of an interactive game.


    378-20(2)    
    A component of a *digital game is taken to be a digital game if:

    (a)    a company that:


    (i) is a foreign resident that does not have a *permanent establishment in Australia; and

    (ii) owns or controls the rights to develop the digital game;
    engages another company (the Australian developer ) to develop the component of the digital game; and

    (b)    the Australian developer:


    (i) is an Australian resident that has an *ABN, or is a foreign resident that has a *permanent establishment in Australia and an ABN; and

    (ii) is primarily responsible for undertaking activities necessary for the development of the digital game in Australia.

    SECTION 378-25   Arts Minister must issue certificate for the digital games tax offset  


    Completion certificate

    378-25(1)    
    The *Arts Minister must issue a certificate (a completion certificate ) to a company for an income year in relation to a *digital game if:

    (a)    the game is *completed in the income year; and

    (b)    the company has made an application for a completion certificate in relation to the game; and

    (c)    the total of the company ' s *qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in completing the game is at least $500,000; and

    (d)    the Arts Minister is satisfied that the conditions in subsection (7) (about the type of game) are met for the game; and

    (e)    the Arts Minister is satisfied that the company:


    (i) has developed the game as an original game; and

    (ii) is primarily responsible for undertaking activities necessary for the development of the game in Australia.
    Note:

    The operation of paragraph (e) is affected by paragraph 378-45(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the development of a digital game from another company).


    378-25(2)    
    A *digital game is completed on the earlier of:

    (a)    when the game is first released to the general public (other than for testing purposes); or

    (b)    if the game is developed by a company under a contract entered into at *arm ' s length with another entity - when the company first provides a version of the game to the entity in a state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be released to the general public.

    Porting certificate

    378-25(3)    
    The *Arts Minister must issue a certificate (a porting certificate ) to a company for an income year in relation to a *digital game if:

    (a)    the game is *ported in the income year; and

    (b)    the company has made an application for a porting certificate in relation to the game; and

    (c)    the total of the company ' s *qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in porting the game is at least $500,000; and

    (d)    the Arts Minister is satisfied that the conditions in subsection (7) (about the type of game) are met for the game; and

    (e)    the Arts Minister is satisfied that the company:


    (i) either owns or controls the rights to develop the game or has been engaged to develop the game by the entity who owns or controls the rights to develop the game; and

    (ii) is primarily responsible for undertaking activities necessary for the development of the game in Australia.
    Note:

    The operation of subparagraph (e)(ii) is affected by paragraph 378-45(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the development of a digital game from another company).


    378-25(4)    
    A *digital game that has been *completed is ported on the earlier of:

    (a)    when the game is first made available to the general public (other than for testing purposes) on a new platform; or

    (b)    if the company developed the game under a contract entered into at *arm ' s length with another entity - when the company first provides a version of the game to the entity in a state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be made available to the general public on a new platform.

    Ongoing development certificate

    378-25(5)    
    The *Arts Minister must issue a certificate (an ongoing development certificate ) to a company for an income year in relation to one or more *digital games if:

    (a)    *ongoing development on the games occurs in the income year; and

    (b)    the company has made an application for the ongoing development certificate; and

    (c)    the total of the company ' s *qualifying Australian development expenditure on the games incurred in the income year on the ongoing development of the games in the income year is at least $500,000; and

    (d)    the Arts Minister is satisfied that the conditions in subsection (7) (about the type of game) are met for each of the games; and

    (e)    the Arts Minister is satisfied that the company:


    (i) either owns or controls the rights to develop each of the games or has been engaged to develop the games by the entities who own or control the rights to develop the games; and

    (ii) is primarily responsible for undertaking activities necessary for the development of each of the games in Australia.
    Note:

    The operation of subparagraph (e)(ii) is affected by paragraph 378-45(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the development of a digital game from another company).


    378-25(6)    
    Ongoing development on a *digital game means activities undertaken to update, improve or maintain the game after it has been *completed.

    Type of digital game

    378-25(7)    
    The conditions in this subsection that must be met for a *digital game are:

    (a)    the game is primarily developed to be made available to the general public for entertainment or educational purposes; and

    (b)    any of the following apply to the game:


    (i) the game is made available for use over the internet;

    (ii) the game is primarily played through the internet;

    (iii) the game operates only when a player is connected to the internet; and

    (c)    the game is not any of the following:


    (i) a game that is a gambling service (within the meaning of the Interactive Gambling Act 2001 ), or is substantially comprised of gambling or gambling-like practices;

    (ii) a game that contains material likely to lead to the game being refused classification under the Classification (Publications, Films and Computer Games) Act 1995 ;

    (iii) a game that is primarily developed for industrial, corporate or institutional purposes;

    (iv) a game that is primarily developed to advertise or promote a product, entity or service.
    Example 1:

    A slot machine simulator game would fail to satisfy the condition that the digital game must not be a gambling service or substantially comprise of gambling or gambling-like practices, even if the game did not involve any real money or money equivalent. However, an adventure game in which a player may advance to a higher level by winning a game of poker could still meet this condition.

    Example 2:

    An interactive corporate training program would fail to satisfy the condition that the digital game must not be primarily developed for corporate purposes.


    SECTION 378-30   Arts Minister to determine a company ' s qualifying Australian development expenditure for the digital games tax offset  

    378-30(1)    
    The *Arts Minister must, as soon as practicable after deciding to issue a certificate under section 378-25 to a company, determine for the purposes of the digital games tax offset:

    (a)    if the certificate is to be issued under subsection 378-25(1) (completion certificate) to the company for an income year in relation to a *digital game - the total of the company ' s *qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in *completing the game, whether incurred in that income year or in an earlier income year; or

    (b)    if the certificate is to be issued under subsection 378-25(3) (porting certificate) to the company for an income year in relation to a digital game - the total of the company ' s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in *porting the game, whether incurred in that income year or in an earlier income year; or

    (c)    if the certificate is to be issued under subsection 378-25(5) (ongoing development certificate) to the company for an income year in relation to one or more digital games - the total of the company ' s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the games incurred in the income year on the *ongoing development of the games in the income year.

    378-30(2)    
    The determination must be in writing, but is not a legislative instrument.

    378-30(3)    
    In making the determination, the *Arts Minister must have regard to the matters in Subdivision 378-B .

    378-30(4)    
    The *Arts Minister must give the company written notice of the determination (including reasons for the determination).

    Subdivision 378-B - Qualifying Australian development expenditure  

    SECTION 378-35   Development expenditure  

    378-35(1)    
    A company ' s development expenditure on a *digital game is expenditure that the company incurs in, or in relation to, the development of the game.

    Specific inclusions

    378-35(2)    
    Without limiting subsection (1) , the following expenditure of the company in relation to the *digital game is development expenditure on the game:

    (a)    remuneration provided to persons (including independent contractors but excluding persons of a kind referred to in subsection (5) ) who perform work or services directly for the company that are attributable to the development of the game, including the following:


    (i) project managers and artistic, creative and design directors;

    (ii) game designers;

    (iii) software developers and programmers;

    (iv) engineers (including for audio, graphics, physics and software);

    (v) user experience designers and testers;

    (vi) behaviour analysts;

    (vii) quality assurance testers;

    (viii) writers;

    (ix) artists, animators and performers (for music, voice and motion capture);

    (x) songwriters, composers, musicians and sound designers;

    (xi) persons performing roles that are broadly similar to those described in subparagraphs (i) to (x) ;

    (b)    expenditure on research for the game;

    (c)    expenditure on prototyping for the game;

    (d)    expenditure on underlying game infrastructure (for example, game engines and anti-cheating controls);

    (e)    expenditure on user testing, debugging and collecting user data for the game;

    (f)    expenditure on updating the game;

    (g)    expenditure on obtaining or maintaining a classification under the Classification (Publications, Films and Computer Games) Act 1995 ;

    (h)    expenditure on adapting the game for use on particular platforms.

    Specific exclusions

    378-35(3)    
    Despite subsections (1) and (2) , the following expenditure of the company in relation to the *digital game is not development expenditure on the game:

    (a)    the company ' s general business overheads including, for example:


    (i) expenditure incurred in relation to insurance, audit services, accounting services, human resources, recruitment services and legal services; and

    (ii) expenditure on travel, accommodation, catering, entertaining or hospitality; and

    (iii) expenditure on visas or work permits; and

    (iv) expenditure incurred by way of, or in relation to, the financing of the game or company;

    (b)    expenditure on, or in connection with, the following persons:


    (i) employees and independent contractors whose roles are not related to, or are incidental and not directly attributable to, the development of the game (including for example, administrative employees, social media managers, sales and marketing professionals, community managers and forum administrators and moderators);

    (ii) employees and independent contractors who were not Australian residents at the time the expenditure was incurred;

    (c)    expenditure on the use of land or premises;

    (d)    expenditure on computer hardware or servers, or the rights to access computer hardware or servers;

    (e)    expenditure on acquiring or licensing software;

    (f)    expenditure on marketing, advertising, publicity or promotion for the game or company;

    (g)    expenditure on activities that are incidental to, but not directly attributable to, the development of the game (including, for example, expenditure on externally provided training, conferences, hiring equipment, release events and trade show demonstrations);

    (h)    expenditure incurred to acquire copyright or a trade mark, or a licence in relation to copyright or a trade mark (other than in relation to acquiring a licence for employees or contractors);

    (i)    expenditure on obtaining permission to use the image, likeness or name of a person or entity, or obtaining an endorsement by a person or entity;

    (j)    expenditure on distributing the game;

    (k)    expenditure on acquiring users for the game;

    (l)    any expenditure claimed for the purposes of another *tax offset, including for the purposes of section 355-100 (tax offsets for R & D);

    (m)    expenditure that gives rise to notional deductions for the purposes of section 355-205 (deductions for R & D expenditure);

    (n)    expenditure funded directly or indirectly by:


    (i) a Commonwealth grant or subsidy to which Australian businesses are generally eligible; or

    (ii) a State or Territory grant or subsidy to which Australian business in that State or Territory are generally eligible.


    Expenditure incurred in relation to another entity

    378-35(4)    
    Despite subsections (1) and (2) , the following expenditure of the company in relation to the *digital game is not development expenditure on the game:

    (a)    expenditure on contracting another entity (the first contractor ) to perform work or services for the company where the first contractor contracts for another entity (the second contractor ) to perform the work or services and either:


    (i) the second contractor is not a natural person (including an independent contractor); or

    (ii) the second contractor contracts for another entity to perform the work or services;

    (b)    expenditure incurred in relation to an entity that is an *associate of the company, other than an associate of a kind referred to in subsection (5) ;

    (c)    expenditure incurred in connection with a transaction in which the company and another party to the transaction did not deal with each other at *arm ' s length.

    Remuneration of influential employees

    378-35(5)    
    If a natural person (an influential employee ):

    (a)    is an *associate of the company because of subparagraph 318(2)(d)(i) or (ii) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and

    (b)    performs work or services directly for the company that are attributable to the development of the *digital game in an income year;

    then, despite subsection (1) , only the first $65,000 of remuneration provided by the company to the influential employee for the income year is development expenditure on the digital game.

    Note:

    A minor voting interest is not sufficient for a person to be an associate of the company.



    Decline in value not development expenditure

    378-35(6)    
    To avoid doubt, the decline in the value of a *depreciating asset is not development expenditure on a *digital game.

    SECTION 378-40   Qualifying Australian development expenditure  

    378-40(1)    
    A company ' s qualifying Australian development expenditure on a *digital game is the company ' s *development expenditure on the game to the extent to which the expenditure:

    (a)    satisfies subsection (2) ; and

    (b)    is incurred for, or is reasonably attributable to, goods and services provided or acquired in Australia.

    The relevance test

    378-40(2)    
    An item of a company ' s *development expenditure on a *digital game:

    (a)    if the item of expenditure is substantially attributable to developing the game - satisfies this subsection in full; and

    (b)    if the item of expenditure is not substantially attributable to developing the game - satisfies this subsection to the extent that the expenditure is attributable to developing the game.

    Expenditure that does not qualify

    378-40(3)    
    For the purposes of a *digital game in respect of which a company applies for a certificate under subsection 378-25(1) (completion certificate), an item of the company ' s *development expenditure on the game is not qualifying Australian development expenditure to the extent it is incurred after the earliest of the following:

    (a)    the day on which the game is *completed;

    (b)    the day on which the company applies for the certificate;

    (c)    the day on which the game has been available to the general public for the purposes of conducting testing for one year.

    378-40(4)    
    For the purposes of a *digital game in respect of which a company applies for a certificate under subsection 378-25(3) (porting certificate), an item of the company ' s *development expenditure on the game is not qualifying Australian development expenditure to the extent it is incurred after the earlier of the following:

    (a)    the day on which the game is *ported;

    (b)    the day on which the company applies for the certificate.

    378-40(5)    
    You cannot count the same expenditure as *qualifying Australian development expenditure for the purposes of more than one certificate under section 378-25 .

    Example:

    Expenditure on porting a digital game that is claimed as qualifying Australian development expenditure for the purposes of a certificate under subsection 378-25(3) (porting certificate) cannot be claimed for the purposes of a certificate under subsection 378-25(5) (ongoing development certificate).


    SECTION 378-45   Expenditure incurred by prior companies in completing or porting a digital game  


    Expenditure incurred by outgoing company attributed to incoming company

    378-45(1)    
    For the purposes of this Division, if a company (the incoming company ) takes over the development of a *digital game from another company (the outgoing company ):

    (a)    expenditure incurred by the outgoing company in relation to *completing or *porting the game is taken to have been incurred by the incoming company; and

    (b)    for the purposes of determining the extent to which that expenditure is *qualifying Australian development expenditure of the incoming company, the incoming company is taken:


    (i) to have been an Australian resident at any time when the outgoing company was an Australian resident; and

    (ii) to have been a foreign resident at any time when the outgoing company was a foreign resident; and

    (iii) to have had a *permanent establishment in Australia at any time when the outgoing company had a permanent establishment in Australia; and

    (iv) to have had an *ABN at any time when the outgoing company had an ABN; and

    (c)    expenditure that the incoming company incurs in order to be able to take over the development of the game is to be disregarded for the purposes of this Division; and

    (d)    any activities carried out by the outgoing company in relation to the game are taken, for the purposes of paragraph 378-25(1)(e) and subparagraphs 378-25(3)(e)(ii) and (5)(e)(ii) , to have been carried out by the incoming company in relation to the game.

    Expenditure previously attributed to outgoing company attributed to incoming company

    378-45(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1) :

    (a)    expenditure incurred by the outgoing company in relation to *completing or *porting the *digital game includes expenditure that the outgoing company is itself taken to have incurred on the digital game because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection; and

    (b)    the outgoing company is taken:


    (i) to have been an Australian resident at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have been an Australian resident because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection; and

    (ii) to have been a foreign resident at any time when the outgoing company was a foreign resident because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection; and

    (iii) to have had a *permanent establishment in Australia at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have had a permanentestablishment in Australia because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection; and

    (iv) to have had an *ABN at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have had an ABN because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection; and

    (c)    activities carried out by the outgoing company in relation to the digital game include activities that the outgoing company is taken to have carried out in relation to the digital game because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection.

    Example:

    If Uncle Carty Ltd starts out developing a digital game and then Mr Grouble Ltd takes over the development of the digital game, Mr Grouble Ltd is taken to have incurred the expenditure that Uncle Carty Ltd incurred on the digital game. If Lousie Ltd subsequently takes over the development of the digital game from Mr Grouble Ltd, Lousie Ltd is taken to have incurred the expenditure that Mr Grouble Ltd incurred on the digital game (including the expenditure of Uncle Carty Ltd that is attributed to Mr Grouble Ltd).


    SECTION 378-50  

    378-50   Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST  


    In determining an amount of expenditure for the purpose of this Division, the expenditure is taken to exclude *GST.

    Subdivision 378-C - Certificates for digital games tax offset  

    SECTION 378-55   Single company or head company may apply for certificate  

    378-55(1)    
    A company or, if the company is a *member of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group, the *head company of the consolidated group or MEC group may:

    (a)    if all the company ' s *qualifying Australian developmentexpenditure on a *digital game has been incurred in *completing the game - apply to the *Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate under subsection 378-25(1) (completion certificate) in relation to the game; or

    (b)    if all the company ' s qualifying Australian development expenditure on a digital game has been incurred in *porting the game - apply to the Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate under subsection 378-25(3) (porting certificate) in relation to the game; or

    (c)    if all the company ' s qualifying Australian development expenditure on a digital game or games has been incurred in an income year on the *ongoing development of the games in the income year - apply to the Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate under subsection 378-25(5) (ongoing development certificate) in relation to the games for the income year.

    378-55(2)    
    The application must:

    (a)    specify which certificate is sought; and

    (b)    specify the company ' s *ABN; and

    (c)    specify whether the company is an Australian resident or a foreign resident with a *permanent establishment in Australia; and

    (d)    contain sufficient detail to enable the *Arts Minister to determine whether an item of expenditure incurred by the company is *qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game or on the games in the income year; and

    (e)    be made in accordance with the rules made under section 378-100 by the Arts Minister, so far as they relate to the requirements for applications.

    SECTION 378-60  

    378-60   Notice of refusal to issue certificate  


    If:

    (a)    an application is made under subsection 378-55(1) for the issue of a certificate; and

    (b)    the *Arts Minister decides under section 378-25 not to issue the certificate;

    the Arts Minister must give the applicant written notice of the decision (including reasons for the decision).

    SECTION 378-65   Issue of certificate  

    378-65(1)    
    A certificate issued to a company under section 378-25 must:

    (a)    be in writing; and

    (b)    specify the company ' s *ABN; and

    (c)    specify the date of issue of the certificate; and

    (d)    specify the total of the company ' s *qualifying Australian development expenditure on the relevant *digital game or games, as determined by the *Arts Minister under section 378-30 ; and

    (e)    if the certificate is issued under subsection 378-25(1) (completion certificate) or (3) (porting certificate) - specify:


    (i) the name of the digital game to which the certificate relates; and

    (ii) the income year in which the digital game was *completed or *ported (as applicable); and

    (f)    if the certificate is issued under subsection 378-25(5) (ongoing development certificate) - specify:


    (i) the name of the digital game, or digital games, to which the certificate relates; and

    (ii) the income year for which the digital games tax offset is being sought.

    378-65(2)    
    The *Arts Minister must give the Commissioner notice of the issue of the certificate within 30 days after issuing the certificate.

    378-65(3)    
    The notice under subsection (2) must specify:

    (a)    the company ' s name; and

    (b)    the company ' s address; and

    (c)    the amount specified under paragraph (1)(d) in the certificate; and

    (d)    other matters agreed to between the Arts Minister and the Commissioner.

    SECTION 378-70   Revocation of certificate  

    378-70(1)    
    The *Arts Minister may revoke a certificate issued under section 378-25 if the Arts Minister is satisfied that:

    (a)    the issue of the certificate was based on inaccurate information; or

    (b)    the certificate was obtained by fraud or serious misrepresentation; or

    (c)    if the certificate is issued under subsection 378-25(1) (completion certificate) to a company for an income year in relation to a *digital game - the total of the company ' s *qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in *completing the game is less than $500,000; or

    (d)    if the certificate is issued under subsection 378-25(3) (porting certificate) to a company for an income year in relation to a digital game - the total of the company ' s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in *porting the game is less than $500,000; or

    (e)    if the certificate is issued under subsection 378-25(5) (ongoing development certificate) to a company for an income year in relation to one or more digital games - the total of the company ' s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the games incurred in the income year on the *ongoing development of the games in the income year is less than $500,000.

    378-70(2)    
    If the *Arts Minister revokes a certificate under subsection (1) , the Arts Minister must, within 30 days after the date of revocation, give written notice of the revocation to:

    (a)    the company to whom the certificate was issued, including reasons for the decision to revoke the certificate; and

    (b)    the Commissioner.

    378-70(3)    
    If a certificate is revoked under subsection (1) , it is taken, for the purposes of this Division, never to have been issued.

    Note:

    This means that if an assessment of a company ' s income tax is issued on the basis that the company is entitled to the digital games tax offset and a certificate on which the entitlement is based is then revoked, the assessment will be amended to take account of the fact that the company was never entitled to the offset or was entitled to the offset to a lesser amount: see section 378-80 .


    378-70(4)    
    Subsection (3) does not apply for the purposes of:

    (a)    the operation of this section or section 378-85 ; or

    (b)    a review by a court or the *AAT of the decision to revoke the certificate.

    SECTION 378-75   Amendment of certificate  

    378-75(1)    
    The *Arts Minister may amend a certificate issued under section 378-25 at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after the certificate is issued if:

    (a)    the company to whom the certificate is issued requests, in writing, an amendment to the certificate; or

    (b)    the Arts Minister decides to amend the certificate on the Arts Minister ' s own initiative.

    378-75(2)    
    In deciding whether to amend a certificate under subsection (1) , the *Arts Minister:

    (a)    must have regard to the matters prescribed by the regulations; and

    (b)    may have regard to any other matter that the Arts Minister considers relevant.

    378-75(3)    
    If the *Arts Minister amends a certificate under subsection (1) , the Arts Minister must, within 30 days after the date of amendment, give written notice of the amendment (including reasons for the decision) to:

    (a)    the company to whom the certificate was issued; and

    (b)    the Commissioner.

    378-75(4)    
    If the *Arts Minister refuses to amend a certificate upon a request by a company under paragraph (1)(a) , the Arts Minister must give the company written notice of the decision (including reasons for the decision).

    SECTION 378-80  

    378-80   Amendment of assessments  


    Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment given to a company for the purposes of giving effect to this Division for an income year if:

    (a)    after the Commissioner gave notice of the assessment to the company, a certificate issued under section 378-25 of this Act to the company is either:


    (i) amended under section 378-75 of this Act; or

    (ii) revoked under section 378-70 of this Act; and

    (b)    the amendment of the assessment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after the amendment or revocation of the certificate.

    Note:

    Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 specifies the periods within which assessments may be amended.

    Subdivision 378-D - Review and other matters  

    SECTION 378-85   Notice of decision or determination  

    378-85(1)    
    This section applies to:

    (a)    a notice given under section 378-60 (refusal to issue a certificate); and

    (b)    a notice of a determination given under section 378-30 (determination of qualifying Australian development expenditure); and

    (c)    a notice given under section 378-70 (revocation of a certificate); and

    (d)    a notice given under section 378-75 (amendment or refusal to amend a certificate).

    378-85(2)    
    The notice of the decision or determination is to include the statements set out in subsections (3) and (4) .

    378-85(3)    
    There must be a statement to the effect that, subject to the Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 , an application may be made to the *AAT, by (or on behalf of) any entity whose interests are affected by the decision or determination, for review of the decision or determination.

    378-85(4)    
    There must also be a statement to the effect that a request may be made under section 28 of the Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 by (or on behalf of) such an entity for a statement:

    (a)    setting out the findings on material questions of fact; and

    (b)    referring to the evidence or other material on which those findings were based; and

    (c)    giving the reasons for the decision or determination;

    except where subsection 28(4) of that Act applies.


    378-85(5)    
    If the *Arts Minister fails to comply with subsection (3) or (4) , that failure does not affect the validity of the decision or determination.

    SECTION 378-90  

    378-90  Review of decisions by the Administrative Appeals Tribunal  


    Applications may be made to the *AAT for review of:

    (a)    a decision made by the *Arts Minister under section 378-25 to refuse an application for a certificate; or

    (b)    a determination made by the Arts Minister under section 378-30 (total of a company ' s *qualifying Australian development expenditure); or

    (c)    a decision made by the Arts Minister under section 378-70 to revoke a certificate; or

    (d)    a decision made by the Arts Minister under section 378-75 to amend or refuse to amend a certificate.

    SECTION 378-95  

    378-95   Copy of digital game to be made available to the National Film and Sound Archive of Australia  


    The company to whom a certificate is issued under section 378-25 must make available to the National Film and Sound Archive of Australia:

    (a)    a copy of each *digital game named in the certificate; and

    (b)    a copy of any materials provided to the general public in connection with each of those games.

    SECTION 378-100  

    378-100   Arts Minister may make rules about the digital games tax offset  


    The *Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules:

    (a)    specifying how applications for certificates in relation to the digital games tax offset are to be made, including:


    (i) the form in which applications are to be made; and

    (ii) the information to be provided in applications; and

    (iii) methods for verifying such information; and

    (iv) procedures for providing, at the Arts Minister ' s request, additional information in support of an application; and

    (b)    specifying the form and contents of certificates in relation to the digital games tax offset; and

    (c)    specifying how amendments of certificates in relation to the digital games tax offset are to be made, including:


    (i) the form in which the request for an amendment may be made; and

    (ii) circumstances in which an amendment may be requested, or made on the Arts Minister ' s own initiative; and

    (iii) the information to be provided in a request for an amendment; and

    (iv) methods for verifying such information; and

    (v) procedures for providing, at the Arts Minister ' s request, additional information in support of a request for an amendment; and

    (d)    providing for provisional certificates (including in relation to a matter referred to in paragraph (a) , (b) or (c) ).

    SECTION 378-105  

    378-105   Arts Minister may make rules establishing a Digital Games Tax Offset Advisory Board  


    The *Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules:

    (a)    establishing a Digital Games Tax Offset Advisory Board to:


    (i) consider applications under subsection 378-55(1) for certificates under section 378-25 ; and

    (ii) advise the Arts Minister on whether to issue certificates under section 378-25 ; and

    (iii) perform other functions in relation to the operation of this Division (including the operation of rules made under section 378-100 ) as are specified in rules made under this section; and

    (b)    specifying the membership of the Board and the terms and conditions of appointment to the Board; and

    (c)    specifying procedures to be followed by the Board in performing its functions.

    SECTION 378-110   Delegation by Arts Minister  

    378-110(1)    
    The *Arts Minister may, in writing, delegate all or any of the Arts Minister ' s powers under this Division, other than under section 378-100 or section 378-105 , to:

    (a)    the *Arts Secretary; or

    (b)    an SES employee, or acting SES employee, in the Department administered by the Arts Minister.

    378-110(2)    
    In exercising powers under a delegation, the delegate must comply with any directions of the *Arts Minister.

    SECTION 378-115   Review of operation of this Division  

    378-115(1)    
    The *Arts Minister must cause a review of the operation of this Division to be undertaken as soon as possible after the end of 5 years after the commencement of this Division.

    378-115(2)    
    The review must include:

    (a)    the effectiveness of this Division in supporting the growth of the digital games industry in Australia; and

    (b)    the fiscal sustainability of the concessional tax treatment provided by this Division.

    378-115(3)    
    A written report of the review must be given to the *Arts Minister. The report must not include information that is commercially sensitive.

    378-115(4)    
    The *Arts Minister must cause a copy of the report of the review to be tabled in each House of the Parliament within 15 sitting days of that House after the report is given to the Arts Minister.

    Division 380 - National Rental Affordability Scheme  

    Guide to Division 380  

    SECTION 380-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division provides a tax offset to certain entities as a result of certificates issued under the National Rental Affordability Scheme Act 2008 .

    It also ensures that payments made, and non-cash benefits provided, by a State or Territory governmental body in relation to the National Rental Affordability Scheme are not assessable income and not exempt income.

    Subdivision 380-A - National Rental Affordability Scheme Tax Offset  

    NRAS certificates issued to individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds

    SECTION 380-5   Claims by individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds  


    Entitlement

    380-5(1)    
    An entity is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year if:


    (a) the *Housing Secretary issues an *NRAS certificate in relation to an *NRAS year to the entity (other than in the entity ' s capacity (if any) as the *NRAS approved participant of an *NRAS consortium); and


    (b) the income year begins in the NRAS year; and


    (c) the entity is an individual, a *corporate tax entity or a *superannuation fund.

    Amount

    380-5(2)    
    The amount of the entity ' s *tax offset is the amount stated in the *NRAS certificate.

    NRAS certificates issued to NRAS approved participants

    SECTION 380-10   Members of NRAS consortiums - individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds  


    Entitlement

    380-10(1)    
    A *member of an *NRAS consortium is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year if:


    (a) the *Housing Secretary issues an *NRAS certificate in relation to an *NRAS year to the *NRAS approved participant of the NRAS consortium; and


    (b) the income year commences in the NRAS year; and


    (c) the member is an individual, a *corporate tax entity or a *superannuation fund.

    Amount

    380-10(2)    
    The amount of the *tax offset is the total of the amounts worked out using the following formula for each *NRAS dwelling:


    (a) covered by the *NRAS certificate; and


    (b) from which the *member *derives *NRAS rent during the *NRAS year:


    Amount stated in the *NRAS certificate for the *NRAS dwelling × *NRAS rent *derived by the *member from
    the *NRAS dwelling during the *NRAS year
    Total *NRAS rent *derived from the
    *NRAS dwelling during the *NRAS year


    380-10(3)    
    Treat the references in subsection (2) to the *NRAS year as being references to a period that occurs during the NRAS year, if the *NRAS certificate is apportioned for the period.

    SECTION 380-11   Elections by NRAS approved participants  


    Scope

    380-11(1)    
    This section and sections 380-12 and 380-13 apply if:


    (a) a *member (the electing member ) of an *NRAS consortium would, apart from subsection 380-12(3) , be entitled to a *tax offset under section 380-10 for an income year because of:


    (i) an *NRAS certificate in relation to an *NRAS year; and

    (ii) an *NRAS dwelling covered by the NRAS certificate; and


    (b) the electing member was the *NRAS approved participant of the NRAS consortium at any time during the NRAS year; and


    (c) the electing member elects to have this section apply to the NRAS certificate and NRAS dwelling for the income year.

    Requirements for an election

    380-11(2)    
    The election must be made:


    (a) in the *approved form; and


    (b) within 30 days after the day the *Housing Secretary issues the *NRAS certificate.

    380-11(3)    
    The Commissioner may require a copy or copies of the election to be given, within the 30 day period mentioned in paragraph (2)(b):


    (a) to the Commissioner; or


    (b) to each *member of the *NRAS consortium who may be entitled to a *tax offset under section 380-12 as a result of the election; or


    (c) both to the Commissioner and to each such member.

    380-11(4)    
    The election may not be revoked.

    SECTION 380-12   Elections by NRAS approved participants - tax offsets  


    Entitlement to tax offset

    380-12(1)    
    A *member of the *NRAS consortium (other than the electing member) is entitled to a *tax offset for the income year if the member is an individual, a *corporate tax entity or a *superannuation fund.

    Amount of tax offset

    380-12(2)    
    The amount of the *tax offset is the amount worked out using the following formula:


    Amount of the *tax offset to which the electing member would
    be entitled under section 380-10 because of the *NRAS certificate
    and the *NRAS dwelling, if the election were disregarded
    × Member ' s rent
    Total rent

    where:

    member ' s rent
    means:


    (a) if *NRAS rent was payable for the *NRAS dwelling in relation to the whole of the *NRAS year - the rent *derived by the *member from the NRAS dwelling during the NRAS year; or


    (b) if NRAS rent was payable for the NRAS dwelling in relation to only part of the NRAS year - the rent derived by the member from the NRAS dwelling during that part of the NRAS year.

    total rent
    means:


    (a) if *NRAS rent was payable for the *NRAS dwelling in relation to the whole of the *NRAS year - the rent *derived from the NRAS dwelling during the NRAS year; or


    (b) if NRAS rent was payable for the NRAS dwelling in relation to only part of the NRAS year - the rent derived from the NRAS dwelling during that part of the NRAS year.


    380-12(3)    
    The *tax offset to which the electing member would otherwise be entitled under section 380-10 for the income year because of the *NRAS certificate and the *NRAS dwelling is reduced by the same amount.

    380-12(4)    
    Treat the references in subsection (2) to the *NRAS year as being references to a period that occurs during the NRAS year, if the *NRAS certificate is apportioned for the period.

    Amount of tax offset - rent that passes through NRAS approved participant

    380-12(5)    
    For the purposes of the references in the definitions in subsection (2) to rent *derived from the *NRAS dwelling during the *NRAS year, disregard *NRAS rent derived by a *member of the *NRAS consortium from the NRAS dwelling during a period in the NRAS year, to the extent that another member derives rent from the NRAS dwelling during the period because:


    (a) the first member is the *NRAS approved participant of the NRAS consortium throughout the period; and


    (b) the first member, in accordance with the contractual *arrangements that established the NRAS consortium, passes the NRAS rent on to the other member.

    Note:

    There may be more than one NRAS approved participant during an NRAS year. The electing member may be the NRAS approved participant for only part of the NRAS year.


    380-12(6)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (5)(b), treat any *NRAS rent retained by the first *member under the *arrangements as management fees or commission as having been passed on to the other member.

    SECTION 380-13  

    380-13   Elections by NRAS approved participants - special rule for partnerships and trustees  


    For the purposes of sections 380-14 to 380-30 (which apply if a partnership or the trustee of a trust derives NRAS rent), for each *NRAS dwelling:


    (a) from which the electing member *derived *NRAS rent during the *NRAS year; and


    (b) that is covered by the *NRAS certificate; and


    (c) from which a partnership, or the trustee of a trust, that is a *member of the *NRAS consortium derived rent during the NRAS year;

    treat the following proportion of the NRAS rent as being NRAS rent derived during the NRAS year by the member mentioned in paragraph (c):


      Member ' s rent
    Total rent
     

    where:

    member ' s rent
    has the same meaning as in subsection 380-12(2) .

    total rent
    has the same meaning as in subsection 380-12(2) .

    SECTION 380-14   Members of NRAS consortiums - partnerships and trustees  

    380-14(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the *Housing Secretary issues an *NRAS certificate in relation to an *NRAS year to the *NRAS approved participant of an *NRAS consortium; and


    (b) the NRAS certificate covers one or more *NRAS dwellings; and


    (c) a *member of the NRAS consortium, other than the NRAS approved participant, *derives *NRAS rent during the NRAS year from any of those NRAS dwellings; and


    (d) the member is a partnership or a trustee of a trust.

    380-14(2)    


    For the purposes of sections 380-15 to 380-20 , assume that:


    (a) the *member has been issued with an *NRAS certificate in relation to the *NRAS year; and


    (b) the NRAS certificate covers each *NRAS dwelling:


    (i) covered by the NRAS certificate mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) of this section; and

    (ii) from which the member *derives *NRAS rent during the NRAS year; and


    (c) the amount stated in the NRAS certificate for each of those NRAS dwellings is the amount worked out using the formula in subsection 380-10(2) in relation to the NRAS dwelling for the NRAS year for the member.


    NRAS certificates issued to partnerships and trustees

    SECTION 380-15   Entities to whom NRAS rent flows indirectly  

    380-15(1)    
    An entity is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year (the offset year ) if:


    (a) the *Housing Secretary issues an *NRAS certificate in relation to an *NRAS year to a partnership or a trustee of a trust; and


    (b) *NRAS rent *derived:


    (i) from any of the *NRAS dwellings covered by the NRAS certificate; and

    (ii) during the NRAS year;
    *flows indirectly to the entity in any income year; and


    (c) the offset year of the partnership or trustee begins in the NRAS year; and


    (d) the entity is:


    (i) an individual; or

    (ii) a *corporate tax entity when the NRAS rent flows indirectly to it; or

    (iii) the trustee of a trust that is liable to be assessed on a share of, or all or a part of, the trust ' s *net income under section 98 , 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the offset year; or

    (iv) (Repealed by No 70 of 2015)

    (v) a *superannuation fund, an *approved deposit fund or a *pooled superannuation trust.
    Note:

    The entities covered by this section are the ultimate recipients of the NRAS rent because the NRAS rent does not flow indirectly through them to other entities.


    380-15(2)    
    The amount of the *tax offset is the sum of the amounts worked out using the following formula for each *NRAS dwelling from which there is *NRAS rent covered by paragraph (1)(b):


    Amount stated in the *NRAS certificate × The entity ' s *share of the *NRAS rent for the
    *NRAS dwelling *derived during the *NRAS year
    Total *NRAS rent *derived during the *NRAS
    year from *NRAS dwellings covered
    by the *NRAS certificate


    380-15(3)    
    Treat the references in subsection (2) to the *NRAS year as being references to a period that occurs during the NRAS year, if the *NRAS certificate is apportioned for the period.

    SECTION 380-16   Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees  


    Scope

    380-16(1)    
    This section and sections 380-17 and 380-18 apply if:


    (a) an entity (the indirect entity ) is entitled to a *tax offset under section 380-15 or 380-20 for an income year because *NRAS rent *derived:


    (i) from any of the *NRAS dwellings covered by an *NRAS certificate issued by the *Housing Secretary in relation to an *NRAS year to a *member (the electing member ) of an *NRAS consortium; and

    (ii) during the NRAS year;
    *flows indirectly to the indirect entity in any income year (or would otherwise flow indirectly to the indirect entity, as mentioned in paragraph 380-20(1)(d) ); and


    (b) the electing member was the *NRAS approved participant of the NRAS consortium at any time during the NRAS year; and


    (c) the electing member elects to have this section apply to the NRAS certificate and NRAS dwelling for the income year.

    Requirements for an election

    380-16(2)    
    The election must be made:


    (a) in the *approved form; and


    (b) within 30 days after the day the *Housing Secretary issues the *NRAS certificate.

    380-16(3)    
    The Commissioner may require a copy or copies of the election to be given, within the 30 day period mentioned in paragraph (2)(b):


    (a) to the Commissioner; or


    (b) to each *member of the *NRAS consortium who may be entitled to a *tax offset under section 380-17 as a result of the election; or


    (c) both to the Commissioner and to each such member.

    380-16(4)    
    The election may not be revoked.

    SECTION 380-17   Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees - tax offsets  


    Entitlement to tax offset

    380-17(1)    
    A *member of the *NRAS consortium (other than the electing member) is entitled to a *tax offset for the income year if the member is an individual, a *corporate tax entity or a *superannuation fund.

    Amount of tax offset

    380-17(2)    
    The amount of the *tax offset is the amount worked out using the following formula:


      Total tax offsets × Member's rent
    Total rent
     

    where:

    member ' s rent
    means:


    (a) if *NRAS rent was payable for the *NRAS dwelling in relation to the whole of the *NRAS year - the rent *derived by the *member from the NRAS dwelling during the NRAS year; or


    (b) if NRAS rent was payable for the NRAS dwelling in relation to only part of the NRAS year - the rent derived by the member from the NRAS dwelling during that part of the NRAS year.

    total rent
    means:


    (a) if *NRAS rent was payable for the *NRAS dwelling in relation to the whole of the *NRAS year - the rent *derived from the NRAS dwelling during the NRAS year; or


    (b) if NRAS rent was payable for the NRAS dwelling in relation to only part of the NRAS year - the rent derived from the NRAS dwelling during that part of the NRAS year.

    total tax offsets
    means the total of the *tax offsets to which entities would be entitled under section 380-15 or 380-20 because of *NRAS rent *derived:


    (a) from any of the *NRAS dwellings covered by the *NRAS certificate; and


    (b) during the *NRAS year;

    that *flows indirectly to them from the electing member (or would otherwise flow indirectly to them from the electing member, as mentioned in paragraph 380-20(1)(d) ).


    380-17(3)    
    The *tax offset to which the indirect entity would otherwise be entitled under section 380-15 for the income year because of the *NRAS certificate and the *NRAS dwelling is reduced by the amount worked out using the following formula:


    Amount worked out under subsection (2) × Amount of the *tax offset to
    which the indirect entity would
    otherwise be entitled under section 380-15
    Total tax offsets

    where:

    total tax offsets
    has the same meaning as in subsection (2).


    380-17(4)    
    Treat the references in subsection (2) to the *NRAS year as being references to a period that occurs during the NRAS year, if the *NRAS certificate is apportioned for the period.

    Amount of tax offset - rent that passes through NRAS approved participant

    380-17(5)    
    For the purposes of the references in the definitions in subsection (2) to rent *derived from the *NRAS dwelling during the *NRAS year, disregard *NRAS rent derived by a *member of the *NRAS consortium from the NRAS dwelling during a period in the NRAS year, to the extent that another member derives rent from the NRAS dwelling during the period because:


    (a) the first member is the *NRAS approved participant of the NRAS consortium throughout the period; and


    (b) the first member, in accordance with the contractual *arrangements that established the NRAS consortium, passes the NRAS rent on to the other member.

    Note:

    There may be more than one NRAS approved participant during an NRAS year. The electing member may be the NRAS approved participant for only part of the NRAS year.


    380-17(6)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (5)(b), treat any *NRAS rent retained by the first *member under the *arrangements as management fees or commission as having been passed on to the other member.

    SECTION 380-18  

    380-18   Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees - special rule for partnerships and trustees  


    For the purposes of sections 380-15 and 380-20 to 380-30 (which apply if a partnership or the trustee of a trust derives NRAS rent), for each *NRAS dwelling:


    (a) from which the electing member *derived *NRAS rent during the *NRAS year; and


    (b) that is covered by the *NRAS certificate; and


    (c) from which a partnership or trust that is a *member of the *NRAS consortium derived rent during the NRAS year;

    treat the following proportion of the NRAS rent as being NRAS rent derived during the NRAS year by the member mentioned in paragraph (c):


      Member ' s rent
    Total rent
     

    where:

    member ' s rent
    has the same meaning as in subsection 380-14B(2) .

    total rent
    has the same meaning as in subsection 380-14B(2) .

    SECTION 380-20   Trustee of a trust that does not have net income for an income year  

    380-20(1)    
    An entity is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year (the offset year ) if:


    (a) the *Housing Secretary issues an *NRAS certificate in relation to an *NRAS year to a partnership or a trustee of a trust; and


    (b) the entity is a trustee of a trust; and


    (c) the trust mentioned in paragraph (b) does not have a *net income for an income year; and


    (d) *NRAS rent *derived during the NRAS year from an *NRAS dwelling covered by the NRAS certificate would otherwise *flow indirectly to the entity in the income year mentioned in paragraph (c) as if:


    (i) the trust did have a net income for the income year; and

    (ii) for the purposes of paragraph 380-25(4)(b) , the entity has a share amount, being the net income referred to in subparagraph (i) of this paragraph; and

    (iii) the entity ' s *share of the NRAS rent under section 380-30 was a positive amount; and


    (e) the offset year of the partnership or trustee begins in the NRAS year.

    380-20(2)    
    The amount of the *tax offset is the amount worked out in accordance with subsection 380-15(2) , as if the reference in the formula to the *NRAS certificate were a reference to the NRAS certificate mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) of this section.

    380-20(3)    
    For the purposes of working out the entity ' s *share of *NRAS rent for an *NRAS dwelling, assume subparagraphs (1)(d)(i), (ii) and (iii) of this section apply.

    380-20(4)    
    If the trustee of a trust is entitled to a *tax offset under this section:


    (a) a beneficiary of the trust; or


    (b) a subsequent entity to whom *NRAS rent for an *NRAS dwelling mentioned in paragraph (1)(d) *flows indirectly;

    is not entitled to a tax offset under this Subdivision in relation to the NRAS rent *derived during the *NRAS year from for the NRAS dwelling.


    SECTION 380-25   When NRAS rent flows indirectly to or through an entity  

    380-25(1)    
    This section sets out the circumstances in which *NRAS rent:


    (a) flows indirectly to an entity (subsection (2), (3) or (4)); or


    (b) flows indirectly through an entity (subsection (5)).

    Partners

    380-25(2)    
    *NRAS rent flows indirectly to a partner in a partnership in an income year if, and only if:


    (a) during that income year, the NRAS rent is *derived by the partnership, or *flows indirectly to the partnership as a beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (3); and


    (b) the partner has an individual interest:


    (i) in the partnership ' s *net income for that income year that is covered by paragraph 92(1)(a) or (b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) in a *partnership loss of the partnership for that income year that is covered by paragraph 92(2)(a) or (b) of that Act;
    (whether or not that individual interest becomes assessable income in the hands of the partner); and


    (c) the partner ' s *share of the NRAS rent under section 380-30 is a positive amount (whether or not the partner actually receives any of that share).

    Beneficiaries

    380-25(3)    
    *NRAS rent flows indirectly to a beneficiary of a trust in an income year if, and only if:


    (a) during that income year, the NRAS rent is *derived by the trustee of the trust, or *flows indirectly to the trustee as a partner or beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (2) or this subsection; and


    (b) the beneficiary has this amount for that income year (the share amount ):


    (i) a share of the trust ' s *net income for that income year that is covered by paragraph 97(1)(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) an individual interest in the trust ' s net income for that income year that is covered by section 98A or 100 of that Act;
    (whether or not the share amount becomes assessable income in the hands of the beneficiary); and


    (c) the beneficiary ' s *share of the NRAS rent under section 380-30 is a positive amount (whether or not the beneficiary actually receives any of that share).

    Trustees

    380-25(4)    
    *NRAS rent flows indirectly to the trustee of a trust in an income year if, and only if:


    (a) during that income year, the NRAS rent is *derived by the trustee, or *flows indirectly to the trustee as a partner or beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (2) or (3); and


    (b) the trustee is liable or, but for another provision in this Act, would be liable, to be assessed in respect of an amount (the share amount ) that is:


    (i) a share of the trust ' s *net income for that income year under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    (ii) all or a part of the trust ' s net income for that income year under section 99 or 99A of that Act;
    (whether or not the share amount becomes assessable income in the hands of the trustee); and


    (c) the trustee ' s *share of the NRAS rent under section 380-30 is a positive amount (whether or not the trustee actually receives any of that share).

    Note:

    A trustee to whom NRAS rent flows indirectly under this subsection is entitled to a tax offset under section 380-15 and the NRAS rent does not flow indirectly through the trustee to another entity.


    380-25(5)    
    *NRAS rent flows indirectly through an entity (the first entity ) to another entity if, and only if:


    (a) the other entity is the focal entity in an item of the table in section 380-30 in relation to the NRAS rent; and


    (b) that focal entity ' s *share of the NRAS rent is based on the first entity ' s share of the NRAS rent as an intermediary entity in that or another item of the table.

    SECTION 380-30   Share of NRAS rent  


    Object of section

    380-30(1)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that:


    (a) *NRAS rent derived by a partnership or the trustee of a trust is allocated notionally amongst entities who *derive benefits from that NRAS rent; and


    (b) that allocation corresponds with the way in which those benefits were derived.

    380-30(2)    
    An entity ' s share of *NRAS rent is an amount notionally allocated to the entity as its share of the NRAS rent, whether or not the entity actually receives any of that NRAS rent.

    380-30(3)    
    That amount is equal to the entity ' s share of the *NRAS rent as the focal entity in column 3 of an item of the table.

    Note:

    An entity ' s share of the NRAS rent is based on the share of the NRAS rent of each preceding intermediary entity through which the NRAS rent flows, starting from the intermediary entity to whom the NRAS rent is paid.

    This means that in some cases (see items 2 and 4 of the table), more than one item of the table will need to be applied to work out the share of the NRAS rent of an ultimate recipient of the NRAS rent.


    Share of NRAS rent
    Item Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
    For this intermediary entity and this focal entity: The intermediary entity ' s share of the NRAS rent is: The focal entity ' s share of the NRAS rent is:
    1 a partnership is the intermediary entity and a partner in that partnership is the focal entity if:
    (a) * NRAS rent is * derived by the partnership; and
    (b) the partner has, in respect of the partnership, an individual interest mentioned in subsection 380-25(2)
    the NRAS rent so much of the NRAS rent as is taken into account in working out the amount of that individual interest
    2 a partnership is the intermediary entity and a partner in that partnership is the focal entity if:
    (a) * NRAS rent * flows indirectly to the partnership as a beneficiary of a trust; and
    (b) the partner has, in respect of the partnership, an individual interest mentioned in subsection 380-25(2)
    the amount worked out under column 3 of item 3 or 4 of this table where the partnership, as a beneficiary, is the focal entity in that item so much of the amount worked out under column 2 of this item as is attributable to the partner, having regard to the partnership agreement and any other relevant circumstances
    3 the trustee of a trust is the intermediary entity and the trustee or a beneficiary of the trust is the focal entity if:
    (a) * NRAS rent is * derived by the trustee; and
    (b) the trustee or beneficiary has, in respect of the trust, a share amount mentioned in subsection 380-25(3) or (4)
    (a) if the trust has a positive amount of * net income for that year - the NRAS rent; or
    (b) otherwise - nil
    so much of the amount worked out under column 2 of this item as is taken into account in working out that share amount
    4 the trustee of a trust is the intermediary entity and the trustee or a beneficiary of the trust is the focal entity if:
    (a) * NRAS rent * flows indirectly to the trustee as a partner in a partnership or as a beneficiary of another trust; and
    (b) the trustee or beneficiary has, in respect of the trust, a share amount mentioned in subsection 380-25(3) or (4)
    the amount worked out under column 3 of:
    (a) item 1 or 2 of this table where the trustee, as a partner, is the focal entity in that item; or
    (b) item 3 or a previous application of this item where the trustee, as a beneficiary, is the focal entity in that item
    so much of the amount worked out under column 2 of this item as is attributable to the focal entity in this item, having regard to the trust deed and any other relevant circumstances

    Note:

    In item 3 or 4 of the table, the trustee of a trust can be both the intermediary entity and the focal entity in the same item.


    Miscellaneous

    SECTION 380-32  

    380-32   Amended certificates  


    A reference in this Subdivision to an *NRAS certificate in relation to an *NRAS year is to be treated as a reference to an amended NRAS certificate in relation to the NRAS year, if the *Housing Secretary issues such an amended certificate.

    Subdivision 380-B - Payments made in relation to the National Rental Affordability Scheme etc.  

    SECTION 380-35  

    380-35   Payments made and non-cash benefits provided in relation to the National Rental Affordability Scheme  


    A payment made to you, or a *non-cash benefit provided to you, (whether directly or indirectly, such as through an *NRAS consortium of which you are a *member) by:


    (a) a Department of a State or Territory; or


    (b) a body (whether incorporated or not) established for a public purpose by or under a law of a State or Territory;

    in relation to your participation in the *National Rental Affordability Scheme is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

    Division 385 - Primary production  

    Guide to Division 385  

    SECTION 385-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division contains rules that are specific to primary producers.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    385-5 Where to find some other rules relevant to primary producers

    SECTION 385-5   Where to find some other rules relevant to primary producers  



    Rules relevant to primary producers
    Item For rules about this topic: See:
    1 The rules about assessable income arising from disposals of trading stock apply to live stock, because live stock is trading stock. Subdivision 70-D
    .
    2 The rules about assessable income arising from disposals of trading stock apply to: Subdivision 70-D
      (a) standing or growing crops; and  
      (b) crop-stools; and  
      (c) trees planted and tended for sale.  
    .
    3 There are some capital allowances for primary producers and some other land-holders. Subdivisions 40-F and 40-G
    .
    4 Long-term averaging of some primary producers' tax liability (by tax offsets and extra income tax) Division 392

    Subdivision 385-E - Primary producer can elect to spread or defer tax on profit from forced disposal or death of live stock  

    Guide to Subdivision 385-E

    SECTION 385-90   What this Subdivision is about  


    You can elect to exclude from your assessable income the profit on a forced disposal or death of live stock that you held as assets of a primary production business you carry on in Australia.

    The excluded profit is then brought into your assessable income over a 5 year period in one of 2 ways.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    385-95 Basic principles for elections under this Subdivision
    Operative provisions
    385-100 Cases where you can make an election
    385-105 Election to spread tax profit over 5 years
    385-110 Alternative election to defer tax profit and reduce cost of replacement live stock
    385-115 Your assessable income includes an amount for replacement live stock you breed
    385-120 Purchase price of replacement live stock is reduced
    385-125 Alternative election because of bovine tuberculosis has effect over 10 years not 5

    SECTION 385-95   Basic principles for elections under this Subdivision  

    385-95(1)    
    You can elect:

  • • to spread the profit on the disposal or death over the income year of the disposal or death and the next 4 income years ( election to spread ); or
  • • to defer including the profit in your assessable income, if you will use the proceeds of the disposal or death mainly to replace the live stock ( election to defer ).

  • 385-95(2)    


    If you make an election to defer, the profit is ``used'' over the next 5 income years:
  • • by reducing the amount for which you are taken to have bought replacement stock (as a result, your tax profit on the disposal of the replacement stock is increased); and
  • • by including in your assessable income amounts for replacement stock that you breed.
  • Any unused part of the profit is included in your assessable income for the fifth income year.


    Operative provisions

    SECTION 385-100   Cases where you can make an election  

    385-100(1)    
    You can make an election if:


    (a) you dispose of * live stock, or they die, because:


    (i) land is compulsorily acquired or resumed under an Act; or

    (ii) a State or Territory leases land for a cattle tick eradication campaign; or

    (iii) pasture or fodder is destroyed by fire, drought or flood and you will use the * proceeds of the disposal or death mainly to buy replacement stock or to maintain breeding stock for the purpose of replacing the live stock; or

    (iv) they are compulsorily destroyed under an * Australian law for the control of a * disease or they die of such a * disease; or

    (v) you receive an official notification under an * Australian law dealing with contamination of property; and


    (b) you held the live stock as assets of a * primary production business you carry on in Australia; and


    (c) apart from this Subdivision, your assessable income for any income year would include the * proceeds of the disposal or death.

    385-100(2)    
    The proceeds of the disposal or death are:


    (a) if you dispose of the * live stock or their carcases in the ordinary course of * business - the total of:


    (i) any amount you receive as payment for the live stock or carcases; and

    (ii) any compensation you receive for the death or destruction, or a reduction in * market value, of the live stock or their carcases from an * Australian government agency; or


    (b) if you dispose of the * live stock or their carcases outside the ordinary course of * business - the total of:


    (i) the market value of the live stock or their carcases, at the time of disposal; and

    (ii) any compensation you receive for the death or destruction, or a reduction in market value, of the live stock or their carcases from an * Australian government agency; or


    (c) if the * live stock die, and you do not dispose of their carcases to someone else - any compensation you receive for their death or destruction from an * Australian government agency.


    SECTION 385-105   Election to spread tax profit over 5 years  

    385-105(1)    
    You can elect:


    (a) to include in your assessable income for the * disposal year the * proceeds of the disposal or death, reduced by the * tax profit on the disposal or death; and


    (b) to include 20% of the tax profit on the disposal or death in your assessable income for the disposal year; and


    (c) to include 20% of the tax profit on the disposal or death in your assessable income for each of the next 4 income years.

    For rules about the making and effect of an election, see Subdivision 385-H .


    385-105(2)    
    The disposal year is the income year in which you dispose of the * live stock, or they die, as mentioned in subsection 385-100(1).

    385-105(3)    
    The tax profit on the disposal or death is any amount remaining after subtracting from the * proceeds of the disposal or death the sum of:


    (a) the amount paid or payable for the purchase of as many of the * live stock as you purchased during the income year; and


    (b) the * value of the rest of the live stock as * trading stock on hand at the start of the income year.


    SECTION 385-110   Alternative election to defer tax profit and reduce cost of replacement live stock  

    385-110(1)    
    Alternatively, you can elect:


    (a) to include in your assessable income for the * disposal year the * proceeds of the disposal or death, reduced by the * tax profit on the disposal or death; and


    (b) to reduce the cost of replacement * live stock you buy in the disposal year (or any of the next 5 income years) by amounts totalling not more than the tax profit on the disposal or death; and


    (c) to include in your assessable income for the last of the 5 income years following the disposal year any * unused tax profit on the disposal or death on the last day of that year.

    Note:

    If the election is made because of bovine tuberculosis, it has effect over 10 income years instead of 5: see section 385-125.

    For rules about the making and effect of an election, see Subdivision 385-H .


    385-110(2)    
    However, you can only make this election if you will use the * proceeds of the disposal or death mainly to buy replacement * live stock, or to maintain breeding stock for the purpose of replacing the live stock that were disposed of or died.

    385-110(3)    
    The unused tax profit on the disposal or death is the * tax profit on the disposal or death less the total of:


    (a) the amounts included in your assessable income under section 385-115 for replacement animals you breed; and


    (b) the amounts by which the amount paid or payable for the purchase of replacement animals is reduced under section 385-120.


    SECTION 385-115  

    385-115   Your assessable income includes an amount for replacement live stock you breed  


    If you make the election in section 385-110 , then for the * disposal year and each of the next 5 income years, your assessable income includes any amount you choose for each replacement animal you breed during that income year. (However, you can choose not to include an amount.)

    SECTION 385-120   Purchase price of replacement live stock is reduced  

    385-120(1)    


    If you make the election in section 385-110 , then the amount paid or payable for the purchase of each replacement animal you buy in the * disposal year, or in the next 5 income years, is treated as if it were reduced by the * reduction amount.

    Meaning of reduction amount

    385-120(2)    
    The reduction amount is:

  • • so much of the * tax profit on the disposal or death as is attributable to live stock of the species you are replacing;
  • divided by:

  • • the number of animals of that species that you disposed of or that died.

  • 385-120(3)    
    However, if:


    (a) you purchase a replacement animal of a different species from the * live stock it replaces; and


    (b) you pay substantially more for it than you could have paid for a replacement animal of the same species;

    the reduction amount for the animal is any reasonable amount at least equal to the amount worked out under subsection (2).



    Exception to avoid reducing unused tax profit to less than nil

    385-120(4)    


    However, if applying subsection (1) to a particular purchase would reduce the * unused tax profit on the disposal or death to less than nil, instead reduce the amount paid or payable for the purchase of each replacement animal in that purchase by:
  • • the * unused tax profit on the disposal or death;
  • divided by:

  • • the number of animals in the purchase.

  • SECTION 385-125  

    385-125   Alternative election because of bovine tuberculosis has effect over 10 years not 5  


    If you can make an election under this Subdivision because:


    (a) * live stock are compulsorily destroyed under an * Australian law for the control of bovine tuberculosis; or


    (b) * live stock die of that * disease;

    sections 385-110 to 385-120 apply as if they referred to 10 income years instead of 5 years.

    Subdivision 385-F - Insurance for loss of live stock or trees  

    SECTION 385-130  

    385-130   Insurance for loss of live stock or trees  


    If your assessable income for an income year would otherwise include an insurance recovery for a loss of * live stock, or for a loss by fire of trees, that you hold as assets of a * primary production business you carry on in Australia, you can elect:


    (a) to include only 20% of the insurance recovery in your assessable income for that income year; and


    (b) to include 20% of the insurance recovery in your assessable income for each of the next 4 income years.

    For rules about the making and effect of an election, see Subdivision 385-H.

    Subdivision 385-G - Double wool clips  

    SECTION 385-135   Election to defer including profit on second wool clip  

    385-135(1)    
    If your assessable income for an income year would otherwise include the * proceeds of the sale of 2 wool clips because fire, drought or flood causes you to shear your sheep earlier than normal, you can elect to include in your assessable income for the next income year the * profit on the sale of the earlier than normal wool clip.

    For rules about the making and effect of an election, see Subdivision 385-H.


    385-135(2)    
    However, at the time the wool was shorn, the sheep must have been assets of a * primary production business you carried on in Australia. Also, the fire, drought or flood must have been in an area of Australia where you carried on that business at that time.

    385-135(3)    
    The proceeds of the sale of 2 wool clips are:


    (a) the proceeds of the sale of the earlier than normal wool clip; and


    (b) an amount covered by one or more of the following:


    (i) proceeds of the sale of another wool clip in the income year;

    (ii) proceeds of the sale of wool shorn in the previous income year that you hold at the start of the income year and that you took into account at cost in working out the * value of your * trading stock under Division 60 at the end of the previous income year;

    (iii) an amount for wool shorn in the previous income year that is included in your assessable income of the income year because of a previous election under this section.

    385-135(4)    
    The profit on the sale of the earlier than normal wool clip is the proceeds of the sale of the wool clip that would otherwise be included in your assessable income for the income year, less the expenses you incur in the income year that are directly attributable to the earlier shearing and sale.


    Subdivision 385-H - Rules that apply to all elections made under Subdivisions 385-E, 385-F and 385-G  

    SECTION 385-145  

    385-145   Partnerships and trusts  


    If a partnership or trustee carries on a * primary production business, only the partnership or trustee can make an election under Subdivision 385-E , 385-F or 385-G .

    SECTION 385-150  

    385-150   Time for making election  


    You can only make an election under Subdivision 385-E , 385-F or 385-G before you lodge your * income tax return for the last income year for which your assessable income would (apart from the election) include any of:


    (a) the * proceeds of the disposal or death of * live stock; or


    (b) the insurance recovery for the loss of * live stock or trees; or


    (c) the * proceeds of the sale of the 2 wool clips.

    The Commissioner may allow you further time to make the election.

    SECTION 385-155  

    385-155   Amounts are assessable income from carrying on the primary production business  


    The following are taken to be assessable income from carrying on a * primary production business in Australia:


    (a) an amount included in your assessable income because of an election under Subdivision 385-E , 385-F or 385-G ; or


    (b) an amount included in your assessable income because of section 385-160 (Effect of certain events on election).

    SECTION 385-160   Effect of certain events on election  

    385-160(1)    
    You cannot make an election under Subdivision 385-E , 385-F or 385-G after a * disentitling event happens.

    385-160(2)    
    If a * disentitling event happens after you make an election under Subdivision 385-E , 385-F or 385-G , your assessable income for the income year in which the event happens includes:


    (a) the * proceeds of the disposal or death of * live stock; or


    (b) the insurance recovery for the loss of * live stock or trees; or


    (c) the * proceeds of the sale of 2 wool clips;

    reduced by each amount that, because of the election, is included in your assessable income for that or an earlier income year.


    385-160(3)    
    However, if a * disentitling event happens after you make an election under section 385-110 (Alternative election to defer tax profit and reduce cost of replacement livestock), your assessable income for the income year in which the event happens includes any * unused tax profit on the disposal or death on the last day of that income year.


    SECTION 385-163   Disentitling events  

    385-163(1)    
    A disentitling event happens when:


    (a) you die; or


    (b) you become bankrupt, insolvent, commence to be wound up, apply to take the benefit of a law for the relief of bankrupt or insolvent debtors, compound with creditors, or make an assignment of any property for the benefit of creditors; or


    (c) you leave Australia permanently, or it appears to the Commissioner that you are about to do so; or


    (d) you cease to carry on the * primary production business to which the election relates.

    385-163(2)    
    In the case of a partnership, a disentitling event happens when:


    (a) a partner in the partnership becomes bankrupt, insolvent, commences to be wound up, applies to take the benefit of a law for the relief of bankrupt or insolvent debtors, compounds with creditors, or makes an assignment of any property for the benefit of creditors; or


    (b) a partner leaves Australia permanently, or it appears to the Commissioner that a partner is about to do so; or


    (c) the partnership ceases to carry on the * primary production business to which the election relates; or


    (d) there is a variation in the constitution of the partnership or the interests of the partners.

    385-163(3)    
    In the case of a trust, a disentitling event happens when:


    (a) (Repealed by No 136 of 2011)


    (b) an order for the administration of the trust estate is made under a law relating to bankruptcy; or


    (c) a beneficiary becomes bankrupt, insolvent, commences to be wound up, applies to take the benefit of a law for the relief of bankrupt or insolvent debtors, compounds with creditors, or makes an assignment of any property for the benefit of creditors; or


    (d) the trustee or a beneficiary leaves Australia permanently, or it appears to the Commissioner that the trustee or a beneficiary is about to do so; or


    (e) the trustee ceases to carry on the * primary production business to which the election relates.


    385-163(4)    


    However, in the case of a trust, a disentitling event does not happen if:


    (a) either:


    (i) the disentitling event is covered by paragraph 3(c); or

    (ii) the disentitling event is covered by paragraph 3(d) and a beneficiary leaves Australia permanently, or it appears to the Commissioner that a beneficiary is about to do so; and


    (b) the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (5).


    385-163(5)    


    The Commissioner may make a determination for the purpose of subsection (4) if it is fair and reasonable to do so having regard to:


    (a) the nature of the *disentitling event to which subsection (3) applies; and


    (b) any relevant circumstances relating to the beneficiary mentioned in paragraph (3)(c) or (d); and


    (c) any other relevant circumstances relating to the trust; and


    (d) any other matters the Commissioner considers relevant.


    385-163(6)    


    A determination made under subsection (5) must be made in writing.

    385-163(7)    


    The Commissioner must give the trustee of the trust a copy of the determination.

    SECTION 385-165   New partnership can elect to be treated as same entity as old partnership  

    385-165(1)    
    Under Subdivision 385-E , 385-F or 385-G a new partnership can elect to be treated as a continuation of an old partnership that would otherwise cease to exist if:


    (a) it immediately takes over the relevant * primary production business of the old partnership; and


    (b) partners, together entitled to at least 25% of the income of the new partnership, were also partners in the old partnership.

    385-165(2)    
    The new partnership must make this election before it lodges its * income tax return for the income year in which it takes over the * business.


    SECTION 385-170   New partnership can elect to take advantage of election made by former owner of the business  

    385-170(1)    
    If an entity (except a partnership):


    (a) has made an election under Subdivision 385-E , 385-F or 385-G ; and


    (b) transfers the relevant * primary production business to a partnership; and


    (c) is entitled to at least 25% of the income of that partnership;

    the partnership may elect to apply the Subdivision under which the entity made the election to all future events as if it were that entity.


    385-170(2)    
    The partnership must make this election before it lodges its * income tax return for the income year in which the * business is transferred to it.


    (Repealed) Subdivision 385-J - Refundable tax offset for conservation tillage  

    (Repealed) Division 387 - Capital allowances for primary producers and some land-holders  

    (Repealed) Division 388 - Tax offsets for primary producers and some land-holders  

    Division 392 - Long-term averaging of primary producers ' tax liability  

    Guide to Division 392  

    SECTION 392-1   What this Division is about  

    If you are a primary producer for 2 or more years in a row, this Division evens out your income tax liability from year to year. (It does so by reducing the effect that fluctuations in your taxable income have on the marginal rates of tax that apply to you from year to year.)


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    392-5 Overview of averaging process

    SECTION 392-5   Overview of averaging process  
    How averaging adjustments work

    392-5(1)    
    This Division reduces or increases your income tax liability to bring it closer to what it would have been if worked out using a special rate of income tax. That rate (the comparison rate) is based on the income tax that you would pay for the current year on the average of your taxable income for up to the last 5 income years.

    Example:

    The graph shows how averaging taxable income reduces the effect of variations in taxable income (giving a fairly steady comparison rate from year to year).




    Tax offset as averaging adjustment

    392-5(2)    
    You may be entitled to a tax offset if the income tax you would pay on your basic taxable income for the current year at the comparison rate is less than the income tax you would pay on that income (apart from this Division and certain other provisions).

    See the examples of years 5, 6, 7 and 9 in the graph in subsection (4).



    Extra income tax as averaging adjustment

    392-5(3)    
    You may be liable to extra income tax on some or all of your basic taxable income for the current year if the income tax you would pay on your basic taxable income for the current year at the comparison rate is more than the income tax on that income (apart from this Division and certain other provisions).

    See the examples of years 8 and 10 in the graph in subsection (4).



    Example of the effect of averaging

    392-5(4)    
    The graph shows an example of the effect of averaging, using the same income figures as the graph in the example in subsection (1).


    Note:

    The example assumes that all the basic taxable income was from a primary production business.



    Effect of non-primary production income on averaging adjustment

    392-5(5)    
    Your income from sources other than your primary production business may affect the adjustment of your income tax. If more than $5,000 of your basic taxable income is attributable to those sources, your averaging adjustment will be reduced to reflect the proportion of your basic taxable income attributable to primary production. (There are special shading-out arrangements if your taxable income from other sources is between $5,000 and $10,000.)

    No adjustment in certain cases

    392-5(6)    


    Your income tax will not be adjusted under this Division in certain cases. In particular, you can choose not to have your income tax adjusted under this Division for 10 income years.

    Subdivision 392-A - Is your income tax affected by averaging?  

    SECTION 392-10   Individuals who carry on a primary production business  

    392-10(1)    
    This Division applies to your assessment for the * current year if:


    (a) you are an individual; and


    (b) you have carried on a * primary production business in Australia for 2 or more income years in a row (the last of which is the current year); and


    (c) for at least one of those income years your * basic taxable income is less than or equal to your basic taxable income for the next of those income years.

    Note 1:

    It follows that this Division does not apply if your basic taxable income has decreased every income year since you started carrying on a primary production business.

    Note 2:

    In working out whether this Division applies to your assessment for an income year, you may need to take account of income years before the 1998-99 income year: see section 392-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .



    Continued application of this Division after you stop carrying on a primary production business

    392-10(2)    
    This Division also applies to your assessment for the * current year if:


    (a) this Division applied to your assessment for an earlier income year during which you carried on a * primary production business in Australia; and


    (b) you do not carry on that business during the current year; and


    (c) at least one of the following conditions is met for each income year (including the current year) after the income year in which you stopped carrying on that business:


    (i) your assessable income for the income year included assessable income that was * derived from, or resulted from, your having carried on that business;

    (ii) you carried on a * primary production business in Australia during the income year.
    Note:

    In working out whether this Division applies to your assessment for an income year, you may need to take account of income years before the 1998-99 income year. See section 392-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.


    392-10(3)    


    This section applies as if you did not carry on a *primary production business during a particular income year if, because you made a choice under section 392-25 , this Division did not apply to your assessment for that income year.
    Note:

    A choice that you make under section 392-25 has the effect that this Division does not apply to your assessments for 10 income years. None of these income years can be taken into account in applying this section after the 10 year opt-out period.


    SECTION 392-15   Meaning of basic taxable income  

    392-15(1)    


    Work out your basic taxable income for an income year as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Work out what would have been your taxable income for the income year if your assessable income for the income year:

  • (a) had not included any amount under section 82-65 , 82-70 or 302-145 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 (certain superannuation benefits and employment termination payments); and
  • Note:

    This means that certain deductions will also be excluded.

  • (b) had not included any * net capital gain for the income year.

  • Step 2.

    Subtract from the Step 1 amount any * above-average special professional income included in your taxable income for the income year under Division 405 .


    392-15(2)    
    However, your basic taxable income for an income year is nil if:


    (a) you do not have a taxable income for the income year; or


    (b) the amount worked out under subsection (1) for the income year is less than nil.


    SECTION 392-20   Trust beneficiaries taken to be carrying on primary production business  

    392-20(1)    


    You are taken to carry on a * primary production business carried on by a trust during an income year if you satisfy the requirements in subsection (2), (3) or (4).

    Primary production business carried on by a trust with beneficiary presently entitled to income of the trust

    392-20(2)    


    You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if:


    (a) you are a beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (1); and


    (b) you are presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust for the income year; and


    (c) if you are presently entitled to less than $1,040 of the income of the trust for the income year - the Commissioner is satisfied that your interest in the trust was not acquired or granted wholly or primarily to enable your income tax to be adjusted under this Division.



    Primary production business carried on by a fixed trust with no income of the trust

    392-20(3)    


    You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if:


    (a) you are a beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (1); and


    (b) at all times during the income year, the manner or extent to which each beneficiary of the trust can benefit from the trust is not capable of being significantly affected by the exercise, or non-exercise, of a power; and


    (c) the trust does not have any income of the trust for the income year to which a beneficiary of the trust could be presently entitled; and


    (d) if the trust had income of the trust for the income year, you would have been presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust.



    Primary production business carried on by a non-fixed trust with no income of the trust

    392-20(4)    


    You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if you do not satisfy the requirements in subsection (3) and you are a chosen beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (1) for the purposes of section 392-22 for the income year.

    Public trading trusts

    392-20(5)    


    You are not taken to carry on a *primary production business carried on by the trustee of a public trading trust (as defined in section 102R of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , which deals with public trading trusts).

    SECTION 392-22   Trustee may choose that a beneficiary is a chosen beneficiary of the trust  

    392-22(1)    
    The trustee of a trust may choose that a beneficiary of the trust is a chosen beneficiary of the trust for an income year if the trust does not have income of the trust for the income year to which a beneficiary of the trust could be presently entitled.

    392-22(2)    
    The maximum number of choices that the trustee may make in respect of the trust for an income year is the higher of:


    (a) the number of individuals that were taken to be carrying on a *primary production business carried on by the trust under subsection 392-20(1) in the income year immediately before the current income year; and


    (b) 12.

    392-22(3)    
    A choice made under subsection (1) must be:


    (a) in writing; and


    (b) signed by the trustee and the person chosen.

    392-22(4)    
    The trustee can make the choice no later than the time it lodges the trust ' s *income tax return for the income year to which the choice relates. However, the Commissioner can allow the trustee to make a choice at a later time.

    392-22(5)    
    A choice cannot be revoked or varied.

    SECTION 392-25   Choosing not to have your income tax averaged  

    392-25(1)    


    You can choose that this Division (except this section) not apply to your assessment for an income year. If you make this choice, this Division (except this section) does not apply to your assessment for the income year or any of the next 9 income years.

    392-25(1A)    


    Your choice must not cover any income year that a previous choice of yours has already covered.

    392-25(2)    
    You must make your choice in writing and give it to the Commissioner by the time you lodge your * income tax return for the income year to which your choice relates. However, the Commissioner may allow you to give the choice later.

    392-25(3)    
    Your choice cannot be revoked after it is given to the Commissioner.


    Subdivision 392-B - What kind of averaging adjustment must you make?  

    Guide to Subdivision 392-B

    SECTION 392-30   What this Subdivision is about  

    This Subdivision explains how to work out whether you are entitled to a tax offset for the current year or whether you must pay extra income tax for the current year.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Tax offset or extra income tax
    392-35 Will you get a tax offset or have to pay extra income tax?
    How to work out the comparison rate
    392-40 Identify income years for averaging your basic taxable income
    392-45 Work out your average income for those years
    392-50 Work out the income tax on your average income at basic rates
    392-55 Work out the comparison rate

    Tax offset or extra income tax

    SECTION 392-35   Will you get a tax offset or have to pay extra income tax?  

    392-35(1)    
    Compare:


    (a) the amount (the income tax you would pay at the comparison rate ) worked out using the formula:


      *Basic taxable income
    for *current year
    ×   *Comparison rate


    (b) the amount of income tax that you would pay on your * basic taxable income for the * current year at * basic rates.

    Note:

    You must disregard some provisions of this Act in working out amounts of income tax for the purposes of this subsection: see subsection (5).



    Tax offset

    392-35(2)    
    You are entitled to a * tax offset equal to the * averaging adjustment worked out under Subdivision 392-C if the income tax you would pay at the comparison rate is less than the amount of income tax you would pay at * basic rates.

    Extra income tax

    392-35(3)    
    You must pay extra income tax on the * averaging component of your * basic taxable income if the income tax you would pay at the comparison rate is more than the amount of income tax you would pay at * basic rates.

    Note 1:

    Section 12A of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 sets the rate at which you must pay extra income tax on the averaging component of your basic taxable income.

    Note 2:

    It does so in such a way that, generally, the extra income tax you must pay equals the averaging adjustment worked out under Subdivision 392-C .



    Meaning of basic rates

    392-35(4)    
    The basic rates at which you would pay income tax are:


    (a) if you are a resident taxpayer as defined in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 - the rates of income tax in paragraph (1)(b) of Part I of Schedule 7 to that Act, taking into account the way it would apply with any changes to your tax-free threshold under section 20 of that Act; or


    (b) if you are a non-resident taxpayer as defined in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 - the rates of income tax in paragraph 1(b) of Part II of Schedule 7 to that Act.



    Disregard certain provisions in working out amounts

    392-35(5)    
    Work out the amount of income tax mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) as if:


    (a) the following provisions did not apply:


    (i) this Division;

    (ii) section 94 (Partner not having control and disposal of share in partnership income) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;

    (iii) Division 6AA (Income of certain children) of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;

    (iv) Part VIIB (Medicare levy) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and


    (b) you were not entitled to any rebate or credit under the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or to any * tax offset under this Act.

    No adjustment

    392-35(6)    
    This Division does not affect your income tax for the * current year if the income tax you would pay at the * comparison rate equals the amount of income tax you would pay at * basic rates.

    Note:

    The 2 amounts will be equal if:

  • • your basic taxable income and your average income are both below the tax-free threshold; or
  • • your average income equals your basic taxable income for the current year.

  • How to work out the comparison rate

    SECTION 392-40  

    392-40   Identify income years for averaging your basic taxable income  
    The income years over which you must average your * basic taxable income are:


    (a) if this Division has applied to your assessment for at least 4 income years in a row (including the * current year) - the current year and the 4 previous income years; or


    (b) if this Division has applied to your assessment for less than 4 income years in a row (including the * current year) - those income years and the last income year before them.

    Note:

    You may need to average your basic taxable income for one or more income years before the 1998-99 income year. See section 392-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

    SECTION 392-45   Work out your average income for those years  

    392-45(1)    
    Work out your average income in this way: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Add up your * basic taxable income for each of the income years over which you must average your basic taxable income.


    Step 2.

    Divide the sum by the number of those income years.


    Step 3.

    Round the result down to the nearest whole dollar if the result is not already a number of whole dollars.


    392-45(2)    
    Your basic assessable income for an income year is your assessable income for the income year, less:

    (a)    

    any amount included in your assessable income under section 82-65 , 82-70 or 302-145 (certain employment termination payments and superannuation benefits); and

    (b)    any *net capital gain included in your assessable income under Division 102 .


    SECTION 392-50  

    392-50   Work out the income tax on your average income at basic rates  
    Work out the amount of income tax that you would pay on your * average income for the * current year at * basic rates.

    SECTION 392-55  

    392-55   Work out the comparison rate  
    Work out the comparison rate using the formula:


    Income tax on *average income, as
        worked out under section 392-50    
    *Average income

    Subdivision 392-C - How big is your averaging adjustment?  

    Guide to Subdivision 392-C

    SECTION 392-60   What this Subdivision is about  

    This Subdivision explains how to work out the amount of the averaging adjustment of your income tax for the current year (whether it is a tax offset or is used by the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 to set the rate at which you must pay extra income tax).


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    392-65 What your averaging adjustment reflects
    Your gross averaging amount
    392-70 Working out your gross averaging amount
    Your averaging adjustment
    392-75 Working out your averaging adjustment
    How to work out your averaging component
    392-80 Work out your taxable primary production income
    392-85 Work out your taxable non-primary production income
    392-90 Work out your averaging component

    SECTION 392-65   What your averaging adjustment reflects  

    392-65(1)    
    Your averaging adjustment is a proportion of your gross averaging amount, taking account of:


    (a) your taxable primary production income (the part of your basic taxable income from your primary production business); and


    (b) your taxable non-primary production income (the part of your basic taxable income from other sources).

    Your averaging component is the means of taking into account the different parts of your basic taxable income in working out your averaging adjustment.


    392-65(2)    
    If your taxable non-primary production income is less than or equal to $5,000, your averaging component equals the whole of your basic taxable income. (In other words, your averaging component includes all of your taxable primary production income and all of your taxable non-primary production income.)

    392-65(3)    
    If your taxable non-primary production income is between $5,000 and $10,000, a shading-out system applies so that your averaging component includes some of your taxable non-primary production income as well as all of your taxable primary production income.

    392-65(4)    
    If your taxable non-primary production income is $10,000 or more, your averaging component equals your taxable primary production income. Your averaging component does not include any of your taxable non-primary production income.

    392-65(5)    
    The following diagram shows examples of these relationships.


    The second and third columns show that as taxable non-primary production income increases above $5,000 (up to a maximum of $10,000), less of it is counted in the averaging component.


    Your gross averaging amount

    SECTION 392-70  

    392-70   Working out your gross averaging amount  
    Your gross averaging amount is the amount of the difference between the following amounts worked out under section 392-35 :


    (a) the income tax you would pay at the comparison rate;


    (b) the amount of income tax that you would pay on your * basic taxable income for the * current year at * basic rates.

    Youraveraging adjustment

    SECTION 392-75  

    392-75   Working out your averaging adjustment  
    Work out your averaging adjustment for the * current year using the formula:


    *Gross averaging
    amount
    × *Averaging component
    *Basic taxable income

    How to work out your averaging component

    SECTION 392-80   Work out your taxable primary production income  

    392-80(1)    
    Work out your taxable primary production income for the * current year in this way: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Compare your * assessable primary production income for the * current year with your * primary production deductions for the current year.


    Step 2.

    If your assessable primary production income is larger than your primary production deductions, your taxable primary production income is the difference between them.


    Step 3.

    If your primary production deductions are larger than (or equal to) your assessable primary production income, your taxable primary production income is nil.



    Assessable primary production income

    392-80(2)    
    Your assessable primary production income for the *current year is the sum of:

    (a)    any amount of your *basic assessable income for the current year that was *derived from, or resulted from, your carrying on a *primary production business; and

    (b)    any amount included in your assessable income under section 420-25 for the current year because you cease to *hold a *primary producer registered emissions unit; and

    (c)    any amount of your basic assessable income for the current year to the extent that:


    (i) you are a beneficiary of a trust that is carrying on a primary production business; and

    (ii) the amount is your share of the trust ' s *net income that is attributable to, or resulted from, an amount being included in the trust ' s assessable income under section 420-25 because the trust ceases to hold an *Australian carbon credit unit; and

    (iii) the unit would have been a primary producer registered emissions unit if you had started to hold, held and ceased to hold the unit instead of the trust; and

    (d)    any amount of your basic assessable income for the current year to the extent that:


    (i) you are a partner in a partnership that is carrying on a primary production business; and

    (ii) the amount is your share of the partnership ' s net income that is attributable to, or resulted from, an amount being included in the partnership ' s assessable income under section 420-25 because a partner (the holding partner ) in the partnership ceases to hold a primary producer registered emissions unit; and

    (iii) the unit would still have been a primary producer registered emissions unit if each other partner in the partnership had started to hold, held and ceased to hold the unit instead of the holding partner; and

    (e)    any amount of your basic assessable income for the current year that was derived from, or resulted from, an *arrangement with a *carbon service provider to the extentthat:


    (i) the arrangement relates to the provider starting to hold, holding or ceasing to hold an Australian carbon credit unit; and

    (ii) the unit would have been a primary producer registered emissions unit if you were starting to hold, holding or ceasing to hold the unit (as applicable) instead of the provider; and

    (iii) the amount does not relate to you giving the provider a *quasi-ownership right over land.


    Primary production deductions

    392-80(3)    


    Your primary production deductions for the *current year are:

    (a)    all amounts you can deduct that relate exclusively to the amount referred to in paragraph (2)(a) ; and

    (b)    so much of any other amounts you can deduct (other than *apportionable deductions) to the extent that they reasonably relate to the amount referred to in paragraph (2)(a) ; and

    (c)    so much of any other amounts you can deduct for the current year in relation to expenditure you incur in:


    (i) starting to *hold a *primary producer registered emissions unit; or

    (ii) holding such a unit; or

    (iii) ceasing to hold such a unit; and

    (d)    so much of any other amounts you can deduct for the current year in relation to expenditure you incur under an *arrangement with a *carbon service provider to the extent that:


    (i) the arrangement relates to the provider starting to hold, holding or ceasing to hold an *Australian carbon credit unit; and

    (ii) the unit would have been a primary producer registered emissions unit if you were starting to hold, holding or ceasing to hold the unit (as applicable) instead of the provider; and

    (iii) the expenditure does not relate to you giving the provider a *quasi-ownership right over land.
    Note 1:

    For the expenditure covered by subparagraph (c)(i) , see subsections 420-15(1) and (4) and 420-65(4) .

    Note 2:

    For the expenditure covered by subparagraph (c)(iii) , see subsection 420-42(1) .


    SECTION 392-85   Work out your taxable non-primary production income  

    392-85(1)    
    Work out your taxable non-primary production income for the * current year in this way: Method statement


    Step 1.

    Compare your * assessable non-primary production income for the * current year with your * non-primary production deductions for the current year.


    Step 2.

    If your assessable non-primary production income is larger than your non-primary production deductions, your taxable non-primary production income is the difference between them.


    Step 3.

    If your non-primary production deductions are larger than (or equal to) your assessable non-primary production income, your taxable non-primary production income is nil.



    Assessable non-primary production income

    392-85(2)    
    Your assessable non-primary production income for the * current year is the difference between:


    (a) your * basic assessable income for the current year; and


    (b) your * assessable primary production income for the current year.

    Non-primary production deductions

    392-85(3)    
    Your non-primary production deductions for the * current year are the difference between:


    (a) the sum of your deductions for the current year; and


    (b) your * primary production deductions for the current year.

    SECTION 392-90   Work out your averaging component  

    392-90(1)    
    Work out your averaging component for the * current year using the following table, taking into account:


    (a) your * taxable primary production income for the current year; and


    (b) your * taxable non-primary production income for the current year.


    Averaging component
    The averaging component equals:
    Item If *taxable non-primary production income: for *taxable primary production income > 0 for *taxable primary production income = 0
    1 is nil *Basic taxable income Nil
    .
    2 is more than nil but does not exceed $5,000 *Basic taxable income *Basic taxable income
    .
    3 exceeds $5,000 but does not exceed $10,000 *Taxable primary production income plus *non-primary production shade-out amount *Non-primary production shade-out amount
    .
    4 is $10,000 or more *Taxable primary production income Nil

    Note:

    Subsections (2) and (3) explain how to work out your non-primary production shade-out amount if your taxable non-primary production income is between $5,000 and $10,000.



    Non-primary production shade-out amount if your taxable primary production income is more than nil

    392-90(2)    
    If your * taxable primary production income is more than nil, your non-primary production shade-out amount is the amount worked out using the formula:


    $10,000 Taxable non-PP income



    Non-primary production shade-out amount if your taxable primary production income is nil

    392-90(3)    
    If your * taxable primary production income is nil, your non-primary production shade-out amount is the amount worked out using the formula:


    However, if that amount is less than nil, your non-primary production shade-out amount is nil.


    392-90(4)    
    In this section:

    Assessable PP income
    means your * assessable primary production income for the * current year.

    PP deductions
    means your * primary production deductions for the * current year.

    Taxable non-PP income
    your * taxable non-primary production income for the * current year.


    Subdivision 392-D - Effect of permanent reduction of your basic taxable income  

    SECTION 392-95   You are treated as if you had not carried on business before  
    Choosing to discontinue and restart averaging

    392-95(1)    


    You can choose that this Division not affect your *income tax liability for an income year (the reduction year ) if you show the Commissioner that, because of retirement from your occupation or from any other cause, your * basic taxable income for the reduction year is permanently reduced during that year to less than two thirds of your * average income for that year.

    392-95(1A)    
    You must make the choice by notifying the Commissioner in writing by the day you lodge your * income tax return for the reduction year. However, the Commissioner can allow you to make it later.

    392-95(1B)    
    If you make a choice under subsection (1), this Division applies to assessments for later income years as if you had never carried on a * primary production business before the reduction year.

    Working out the extent of the permanent reduction

    392-95(2)    
    In working out the extent of the permanent reduction, you must work out your * average income for the reduction year on the basis that your * basic assessable income for an income year taken into account in working out your average income did not include any assessable income from sources from which you do not usually receive assessable income.

    392-95(3)    
    In working out the extent of the permanent reduction, disregard a reduction in * basic taxable income to the extent that it results from a change of assets from which assessable income was * derived into assets from which you derive income that is not assessable income.

    Division 393 - Farm management deposits  

    Guide to Division 393  

    SECTION 393-1   What this Division is about  


    You can deduct a farm management deposit you make, if:

  • (a) you are an individual carrying on a primary production business (including a primary production business you carry on as a partner in a partnership or as a beneficiary of a trust); and
  • (b) you hold the deposit for at least 12 months; and
  • (c) you meet some other tests.
  • The amount of the deposit withdrawn is included in your assessable income in the income year in which it is repaid. Special rules apply if the deposit is repaid in the event of a severe drought or an applicable natural disaster.

    Farm management deposits allow you to carry over income from years of good cash flow and to draw down on that income in years when you need the cash. This enables you to defer the income tax on your taxable primary production income from the income year in which you make the deposit until the income year in which the deposit is repaid.

    Note:

    An FMD provider must, every calendar month, give certain information to the Agriculture Secretary about farm management deposits: see section 398-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Subdivision 393-A - Tax consequences of farm management deposits  

    SECTION 393-5   Deduction for making farm management deposit  


    Entitlement to deduction

    393-5(1)    
    You can deduct the amount of a *farm management deposit for an income year if:


    (a) you are the *owner of the deposit; and


    (b) the deposit is made at a time during the year when you are an individual carrying on a *primary production business in Australia; and


    (c) if during the year, at a time after the deposit was made, you stopped carrying on a primary production business in Australia - you started carrying on such a business again within 120 days (whether or not during the year); and


    (d) your *taxable non-primary production income for the year is not more than $100,000; and


    (e) you do not die or become bankrupt during the year.

    Note 1:

    This section does not apply if a deposit is reinvested, the term of a deposit is extended, or a deposit is transferred at the depositor's request: see sections 393-15 and 393-16 .

    Note 2:

    This Division applies to certain partners and beneficiaries as if they were individuals who carried on a primary production business: see subsections 393-25(2) , (3) , (4) , (5) and (6) .



    Sum of deductions not to exceed taxable primary production income

    393-5(2)    
    The sum of the deductions that you would otherwise be entitled to under this section for *farm management deposits made in the income year must not exceed your *taxable primary production income for the income year.

    Amounts to be deducted in order of deposits

    393-5(3)    
    If you are entitled to deduct amounts in respect of 2 or more deposits, deduct the amounts in the order in which the deposits were made (until you reach the limit imposed by subsection (2)).

    SECTION 393-10   Assessability on repayment of deposit  


    Amount assessable

    393-10(1)    
    Your assessable income for an income year includes the amount worked out using the following formula, if:


    (a) you are the *owner of a *farm management deposit; and


    (b) the deposit is repaid in full or in part in the year; and


    (c) the amount worked out using the formula is greater than nil:


    * Unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the deposit just before the repayment   Amount (if any) of the deposit that remains just after the repayment
     

    Note 1:

    This subsection does not apply if the deposit is reinvested, the term of the deposit is extended, or the deposit is transferred at the depositor ' s request: see sections 393-15 and 393-16 .

    Note 2:

    In a case where not all of the deposit is deductible under section 393-5 , repayment of the non-deductible amount can take place without the amount being assessable. Once that amount is repaid, the remainder is assessable when it is repaid, so that the deduction is recouped.

    Example:

    Matt makes a farm management deposit of $120,000 on 1 April 2011. His taxable primary production income for the 2010-11 income year is $50,000; therefore, the deposit is only partly deductible in the year because it exceeds his taxable primary production income. Matt makes the following withdrawals from the deposit: $45,000 on 1 May 2013, $40,000 on 1 March 2014 and $35,000 on 1 September 2015.

    The unrecouped FMD deduction immediately before the first repayment of $45,000 is $50,000. No amount is included in his assessable income for the 2012-2013 income year because the difference between the unrecouped FMD deduction ($50,000) and the amount of the deposit remaining after the repayment ($75,000) is less than nil.

    The unrecouped FMD deduction immediately before the second repayment of $40,000 is $50,000. $15,000 is included in Matt ' s assessable income for the 2013-2014 income year because the difference between the unrecouped FMD deduction ($50,000) and the amount of the deposit remaining after the second repayment ($35,000) is $15,000, which is greater than nil.

    The unrecouped FMD deduction immediately before the third repayment of $35,000 is $35,000; that is, $50,000 less $15,000. $35,000 is included in Matt ' s assessable income for the 2015-2016 income year; that is, the difference between the unrecouped FMD deduction ($35,000) and the amount of the deposit remaining after the third repayment ($0).



    Unrecouped FMD deduction

    393-10(2)    
    The unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of a *farm management deposit at a particular time is:


    (a) if no part of the deposit has been repaid before that time - the amount of the deduction under section 393-5 for making the deposit; or


    (b) if one or more parts of the deposit have been repaid before that time - the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the deposit just before the most recent such repayment, reduced byany amount included in the *owner ' s assessable income under this section as a result of that repayment.

    Example:

    Mia makes a deposit of $3,000, all of which is deductible. The deposit ' s unrecouped FMD deduction just before a first repayment of $1,000 is the amount of the deduction (that is, $3,000 - see paragraph (2)(a)). The deposit ' s unrecouped FMD deduction just before a second repayment is $2,000 (that is, according to paragraph (2)(b), the unrecouped FMD deduction immediately before the first repayment ($3,000) reduced by the $1,000 included in Mia ' s assessable income as a result of the first repayment).

    Note 1:

    If the deposit was originally an income equalisation deposit, see section 393-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Note 1A:

    Subsection 393-16(3) affects the unrecouped FMD deduction of a consolidated farm management deposit.

    Note 2:

    Section 393-55 affects the unrecouped FMD deduction of a new deposit linked to an old deposit affected by Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 .



    Application of Division to transfer, reinvestment or other dealing

    393-10(3)    
    This Division applies to a transfer, reinvestment or other dealing with a *farm management deposit as if it were a repayment of the deposit, if:


    (a) you are the depositor; and


    (b) the transfer, reinvestment or other dealing is on your behalf or at your request.

    Note:

    Section 393-15 modifies the application of the deduction, assessment and 12 month rules to certain transfers, reinvestments and other dealings.



    Deemed repayment because of death, bankruptcy etc.

    393-10(4)    
    This section applies as if a *farm management deposit had been repaid when it became repayable, rather than when it is actually repaid, if the deposit became repayable because of the requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in item 11 of the table in section 393-35 (death, bankruptcy etc.).

    Note 1:

    This means that the amount of the deposit is included in your assessable income for the income year when the death, bankruptcy etc occurs, rather than for any later year in which the deposit might be repaid.

    Note 2:

    This also means that, under subsection 45-120(5) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (about Pay as you go (PAYG) instalments), the amount of the deposit is included in your instalment income for the period in which the death, bankruptcy etc. occurs.

    However, under section 12-140 in that Schedule, an amount may also be required to be withheld from the actual payment if you do not quote your tax file number or ABN to the relevant FMD provider.

    Note 3:

    Section 393-60 of this Act may limit the operation of subsection (4) if the farm management deposit is with an ADI that becomes a declared ADI under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 .


    SECTION 393-15   Transactions to which the deduction, assessment and 12 month rules have modified application  

    393-15(1)    
    The provisions mentioned in subsection (2) do not apply in relation to the following transactions:


    (a) the immediate reinvestment of a *farm management deposit as a farm management deposit with the same *FMD provider;


    (b) the extension of the term of a farm management deposit (even if other terms such as those relating to interest payable are also varied);


    (c) the transfer of a farm management deposit in accordance with a requirement of the relevant agreement as set out in item 13 of the table in section 393-35 (which allows for transfers of deposits at the request of the depositor).

    Note:

    This means that these transactions:

  • (a) will not result in assessable income for the owner; and
  • (b) will not give rise to a deduction; and
  • (c) will not, if the transaction occurs within 12 months after the end of the day the deposit is made, result in the deposit losing its status as a farm management deposit.

  • 393-15(2)    
    The provisions are:


    (a) section 393-5 (about deductions for making a farm management deposit); and


    (b) subsection 393-10(1) (about assessability of the repayment of a farm management deposit); and


    (c) subsections 393-40(1) and (2) (about repayment of a farm management deposit within the first 12 months); and


    (ca) subsection 393-40(3) (about repayment of a farm management deposit in the event of severe drought); and


    (d) subsections 393-40(3A) and (4) (about repayment of a farm management deposit in the event of an applicable natural disaster).


    393-15(3)    
    For the purposes of working out the *unrecouped FMD deduction for a deposit that is subject to a transaction mentioned in subsection (1), the transaction does not cause the deposit to be a different deposit.

    Note:

    This ensures that the unrecouped FMD deduction (which affects how much income tax is assessed in the event of a repayment) equals the deduction for the original deposit, less any amountincluded in your assessable income because of a previous repayment of the deposit.


    SECTION 393-16   Consolidation of farm management deposits  

    393-16(1)    
    The provisions mentioned in subsection (2) do not apply in relation to the immediate reinvestment of 2 or more *farm management deposits ( original deposits ) if:


    (a) just before the reinvestment occurs the balance of each of the original deposits is equal to the *unrecouped FMD deduction for the deposit; and


    (b) the original deposits are immediately reinvested as a single farm management deposit with the same *FMD provider, or with a different FMD provider; and


    (c) just before the reinvestment occurs the original deposits have each been held for a period of at least 12 months.

    Note:

    This means that the reinvestment:

  • (a) will not result in assessable income for the owner; and
  • (b) will not give rise to a deduction.

  • 393-16(2)    
    The provisions are:


    (a) section 393-5 (about deductions for making a farm management deposit); and


    (b) subsection 393-10(1) (about assessability of the repayment of a farm management deposit).

    393-16(3)    
    Despite paragraph 393-10(2)(a) , the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the *farm management deposit at a time before any part of the deposit has been repaid is the sum of the unrecouped FMD deductions in respect of each of the original deposits just before the reinvestment occurred.

    393-16(4)    
    Section 393-40 (about the repayment of farm management deposits within 12 months) applies as if the new *farm management deposit was made on the same day that the most recent of the original deposits was made.

    SECTION 393-17   Tax consequences of liabilities reducing because of farm management deposits  

    393-17(1)    
    To avoid doubt, if amounts of interest payable by the *owner of a *farm management deposit, or by a partnership of which the owner is a partner, to the *FMD provider in respect of loans or other debts of the owner or partnership fall short of what they otherwise would be because the owner holds the farm management deposit, then:


    (a) any income of the owner or partnership comprising the shortfall is neither assessable income nor *exempt income of the owner or partnership; and


    (b) any amount that any person:


    (i) is not liable to pay because of the shortfall; and

    (ii) could have, apart from this section, deducted under this Act;
    is not deductible.

    393-17(2)    
    However, this section applies only to the extent that the loans or other debts relate to a *primary production business that the *owner or partnership carries on.

    Subdivision 393-B - Meaning of farm management deposit and owner  

    SECTION 393-20   Farm management deposits  


    Meaning of farm management deposit

    393-20(1)    
    A deposit with an *FMD provider is a farm management deposit if:


    (a) the depositor applies to make the deposit in accordance with subsection (2); and


    (b) the deposit is made under an agreement between the FMD provider and the depositor that:


    (i) describes the deposit as a farm management deposit; and

    (ii) at all times while the deposit is with the FMD provider, contains requirements to the effect set out in the table in section 393-35 .

    The agreement may also contain additional requirements that are not inconsistent with those set out in that table.



    Depositor to provide information in application form

    393-20(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the depositor must apply to the *FMD provider to make the deposit by completing and signing a form that:


    (a) permits the depositor to state the *owner ' s *tax file number in the form; and


    (b) requires the depositor to provide any other information required by regulations for the purposes of this paragraph; and


    (c) contains any statements, required by regulations for the purposes of this paragraph, that are to be read by the depositor when completing the form.

    Note 1:

    A depositor who makes a false or misleading statement in such a form commits an offence against section 8K or 8N of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Note 2:

    If the owner does not quote his or her tax file number or ABN to the FMD provider, the Pay as you go (PAYG) withholding required under section 12-140 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 from a repayment of the deposit is at the highest marginal tax rate.

    Note 3:

    Division 4A of Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 sets out rules for quoting tax file numbers in connection with farm management deposits.



    Meaning of FMD provider

    393-20(3)    
    In this Act:

    FMD provider
    means an entity that:


    (a) is an *ADI; or


    (b) carries on in Australia the *business of banking, so long as the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory guarantees the repayment of any deposit taken in the course of that business; or


    (c) carries on in Australia a business that consists of or includes taking money on deposit, so long as the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory guarantees the repayment of any deposit taken in the course of that business.


    SECTION 393-25   Owners of farm management deposits  


    Meaning of owner

    393-25(1)    
    The owner of a *farm management deposit is:


    (a) if paragraph (b) does not apply - the individual who made or is making the deposit; or


    (b) in the case of a deposit made or being made by the trustee of a trust on behalf of a beneficiary who is an individual - the beneficiary.

    Primary production business carried on by a partnership

    393-25(2)    
    This Division applies to you as if you were an individual who is carrying on a *primary production business that is actually carried on by a partnership, if you are an individual who is a partner in the partnership.

    Primary production business carried on by a trust

    393-25(3)    


    This Division (other than subsection 393-17(2) and paragraph 393-37(b) ), and section 97A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about beneficiaries who are owners of farm management deposits), apply to you as if you were an individual who is carrying on a *primary production business that is actually carried on by a trust, if you satisfy the requirements in subsection (4), (5) or (6).

    Primary production business carried on by a trust with beneficiary presently entitled to income of the trust

    393-25(4)    


    You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if:


    (a) you are an individual and a beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (3); and


    (b) you are presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust for the income year.



    Primary production business carried on by a fixed trust with no income of the trust

    393-25(5)    


    You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if:


    (a) you are an individual and a beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (3); and


    (b) at all times during the income year, the manner or extent to which each beneficiary of the trust can benefit from the trust is not capable of being significantly affected by the exercise, or non-exercise, of a power; and


    (c) the trust does not have any income of the trust for the income year to which a beneficiary of the trust could be presently entitled; and


    (d) if the trust had income of the trust for the income year, you would have been presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust.



    Primary production business carried on by a non-fixed trust with no income of the trust

    393-25(6)    


    You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if you do not satisfy the requirements in subsection (5) and you are an individual and a chosen beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (3) for the purposes of section 393-27 for the income year.

    SECTION 393-27   Trustee may choose that a beneficiary is a chosen beneficiary of the trust  

    393-27(1)    
    The trustee of a trust may choose that a beneficiary of the trust is a chosen beneficiary of the trust for an income year if the trust does not have any income of the trust for the income year to which a beneficiary of the trust could be presently entitled.

    393-27(2)    
    The maximum number of choices that the trustee may make in respect of the trust for an income year is the higher of:


    (a) the number of individuals to which subsection 393-25(3) applied in the income year immediately before the current income year; and


    (b) 12.

    393-27(3)    
    A choice made under subsection (1) must be:


    (a) in writing; and


    (b) signed by the trustee and the person chosen.

    393-27(4)    
    The trustee can make the choice no later than the time it lodges the trust ' s *income tax return for the income year to which the choice relates. However, the Commissioner can allow the trustee to make a choice at a later time.

    393-27(5)    
    A choice cannot be revoked or varied.

    SECTION 393-28  

    393-28   Application of Division to beneficiary no longer under legal disability  


    If:


    (a) a *farm management deposit was made by a trustee on behalf of a beneficiary of a trust; and


    (b) the beneficiary was under a legal disability when the deposit was made; and


    (c) the beneficiary is no longer under a legal disability;

    then this Division, and Division 4A of Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , apply as if the beneficiary had made the deposit.

    Note:

    Division 4A of Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is about quotation of tax file numbers in connection with farm management deposits.

    SECTION 393-30   Effect of contravening requirements  

    393-30(1)    
    A deposit is not a farm management deposit if, when the deposit was accepted, a requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in items 1 to 6 of the table in section 393-35 was contravened.

    393-30(2)    


    A deposit is not, and is taken never to have been, a farm management deposit if a requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in items 7 and 9 of the table in section 393-35 is contravened at any time in relation to the deposit.

    393-30(3)    
    So much of a deposit as causes a requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in item 10 of the table in section 393-35 to be contravened is not a farm management deposit .

    Note:

    There is an administrative penalty if a requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in item 8 of the table in section 393-35 is contravened: see section 288-120 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 393-35  

    393-35   Requirements of agreement for a farm management deposit  


    An agreement mentioned in paragraph 393-20(1)(b) must contain requirements to the effect of those set out in the following table:


    Requirements of agreement for a farm management deposit
    Item Requirement
    1 The * owner must be an individual who is carrying on a * primary production business in Australia when the deposit is made.
    Note: This Division applies to certain partners and beneficiaries as if they were individuals who carried on a primary production business: see subsections 393-25(2), (3), (4), (5) and (6).
    2 The deposit:
    (a) must not be made by 2 or more individuals jointly; and
    (b) must not be made on behalf of 2 or more individuals.
    3 The deposit must not be made by a trustee on behalf of a beneficiary unless the beneficiary is:
    (a) under a legal disability; and
    (b) presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust.
    4 The deposit must be $ 1,000 or more when it is made, unless the deposit is:
    (a) the immediate reinvestment of a * farm management deposit as a farm management deposit with the same * FMD provider; or
    (b) the extension of the term of a farm management deposit (even if other terms such as those relating to interest payable are also varied).
    5 (Repealed by No 147 of 2011)
    6 Rights of the depositor in respect of the deposit must not be transferable to another entity.
    7 The deposit must not be the subject of a charge or other encumbrance to secure any amount.
    8 The fact that the *owner is the owner of the deposit must not be the reason why, or one of the reasons why, amounts of interest that are or will be payable to the *FMD provider in respect of loans or other debts of the owner, or of a partnership of which the owner is a partner, are or will be less than they would otherwise be.
    9 Interest or other earnings on the deposit must not be invested as a * farm management deposit with the * FMD provider without having first been paid to the depositor.
    10 The deposit must not be more than $800,000, and the sum of the balances from time to time of the deposit and all other * farm management deposits of the * owner with *FMD providers must not be more than $800,000.
    11 The deposit must be repaid if:
    (a) the * owner dies or becomes bankrupt; or
    (b) the owner ceases to carry on a * primary production business in Australia and does not start carrying on such a business again within 120 days.
    12 The amount of any repayment of the deposit must be $ 1,000 or more, except if the entire amount of the deposit is repaid.
    13 The * FMD provider must transfer the deposit by electronic means to another FMD provider that agrees to accept the deposit as a * farm management deposit, if the first FMD provider is:
    (a) requested in writing by the depositor to do so; and
    (b) given any information or other assistance from the depositor necessary for the purpose.
    14 The * FMD provider must not deduct from the deposit (whether at the time it is made, while it is with the FMD provider or at the time of its repayment) any administration fee or other amount required by the FMD provider to be paid in respect of the deposit or otherwise.

    SECTION 393-37  

    393-37   Agreements for a farm management deposit may allow for some offsets of a depositor ' s liabilities  


    An agreement mentioned in paragraph 393-20(1)(b) does not contravene the requirements of item 8 of the table in section 393-35 to the extent that:


    (a) it provides for amounts of interest to be payable to the *FMD provider in respect of a loan or other debt of the *owner of the *farm management deposit, or of a partnership of which the owner is a partner, to be reduced; and


    (b) that loan or other debt relates to a *primary production business that the owner or partnership carries on.

    SECTION 393-40   Repayment of deposit within first 12 months  


    Partial repayment within first 12 months

    393-40(1)    


    Any part of a deposit repaid before the last day of the 12 months after the day the deposit is made is not, and is taken never to have been, part of a farm management deposit .
    Note 1:

    A repayment covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (5) is disregarded in applying this subsection. The normal rules in sections 393-5 (about deductions for making a farm management deposit) and 393-10 (about assessability of the repayment of a farm management deposit) apply instead.

    Note 2:

    This subsection does not apply if a deposit is reinvested, the term of a deposit is extended, or a deposit is transferred at the depositor ' s request: see section 393-15 .



    Deposit not to be reduced to less than $1,000 within first 12 months

    393-40(2)    


    A deposit is not, and is taken never to have been, a farm management deposit if the amount of the deposit is reduced to less than $1,000 because of one or more repayments before the last day of the 12 months after the day the deposit is made.
    Note 1:

    A repayment covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (5) is disregarded in applying this subsection.

    Note 2:

    This subsection does not apply if a deposit is reinvested, the term of a deposit is extended, or a deposit is transferred at the depositor ' s request: see section 393-15 .



    Repayment in the event of severe drought

    393-40(3)    


    Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a repayment of the whole or a part of a *farm management deposit if:


    (a) the *owner of the deposit carries on a *primary production business that satisfies one or more of paragraphs (a), (b), (c) and (f) of the definition of primary production business in subsection 995-1(1) ; and


    (b) any of the land on which the owner of the deposit carries on any primary production business that satisfies one or more of those paragraphs has, for the period specified in subsection (3AA), had rainfall that:


    (i) is deficient to an extent prescribed by the regulations; or

    (ii) if there are no such regulations - is within the lowest 5% of rainfall for that land according to records held by the Commonwealth Bureau of Meteorology; and


    (c) for the period specified in subsection (3AA):


    (i) the owner of the deposit has carried on, on that land, a primary production business that satisfies one or more of those paragraphs; and

    (ii) the amount of the repayment has been held in that farm management deposit.

    393-40(3AA)    


    For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (c), the period is:


    (a) a period prescribed by the regulations; or


    (b) if there are no such regulations - the most recent period of 6 consecutive months:


    (i) that precede the repayment; and

    (ii) for which rainfall records held by the Commonwealth Bureau of Meteorology are publicly available at the time of the repayment.


    Repayment in the event of an applicable natural disaster

    393-40(3A)    


    Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a repayment of the whole or a part of a *farm management deposit if:


    (a) natural disaster relief and recovery arrangements made by or on behalf of the Commonwealth apply, in a way specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection, to a *primary production business of the *owner of the deposit; and


    (b) all of the other circumstances specified in those regulations are satisfied.



    Any later deposit not a farm management deposit

    393-40(4)    


    If subsection (3) or (3A) applies to an *owner and a repayment, any later deposit that is made by, or on behalf of, the owner in the income year in which the repayment is made is not, and is taken never to have been, a farm management deposit .

    Repayment in the case of death, bankruptcy or ceasingto carry on a primary production business

    393-40(5)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a repayment of a *farm management deposit because of the requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in item 11 of the table in section 393-35 (death, bankruptcy etc.).

    Certain transactions do not affect the day the deposit was made

    393-40(6)    
    Subsections (1) to (4) apply as if a *farm management deposit that:


    (a) is made as a result of a transaction mentioned in subsection 393-15(1) (about reinvesting a deposit, extending the term of a deposit and transferring a deposit at the depositor ' s request); or


    (b) is affected by such a transaction;

    were made on the day on which the original deposit was made.

    Example:

    A farm management deposit is made on 1 July 2010 for a term of 6 months, but is extended in December 2010 for another 6 months. For the purposes of subsections (1) to (4), the day the extended deposit was made remains as 1 July 2010.

    Note:

    Section 393-40 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides for a special rule for deposits transferred under the repealed Loan (Income Equalization Deposits) Act 1976 .


    SECTION 393-45  

    393-45   Partly repaid farm management deposits  


    A reference to a farm management deposit is a reference to so much of the deposit as has not been repaid.

    Subdivision 393-C - Special rules relating to financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs  

    Guide to Subdivision 393-C

    SECTION 393-50   What this Subdivision is about  


    A deposit (the new deposit ) arising from:

  • (a) an entitlement under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 relating to a farm management deposit (the old deposit ); or
  • (b) a distribution from liquidation of an ADI that is attributable to a farm management deposit (also the old deposit );
  • is treated as a transfer of the old deposit and does not give rise to new assessable income or deductions.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Operative provisions
    393-55 Farm management deposits arising from farm management deposits with ADIs subject to financial claims scheme
    393-60 Repayment if owner of farm management deposit with insolvent ADI dies, is bankrupt or ceases to be a primary producer

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 393-55   Farm management deposits arising from farm management deposits with ADIs subject to financial claims scheme  


    Application

    393-55(1)    
    This section applies if an entitlement arises under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 in connection with an account containing a *farm management deposit (the old deposit ) with an *ADI (the old ADI ) and either:


    (a) an amount (the new deposit ) is deposited into either of the following to meet, in whole or part, so much of the entitlement as relates to the old deposit:


    (i) an existing account for a farm management deposit;

    (ii) an account established under section 16AH of that Act for the purposes of meeting (in whole or part) the entitlement; or


    (b) an amount (also the new deposit ) is deposited by a liquidator of the old ADI into either of the following as so much of a distribution from the liquidation of the old ADI as relates to the old deposit:


    (i) an existing account for a farm management deposit;

    (ii) an account established under section 16AR of that Act for the payment of the distribution.
    Note:

    If an amount is deposited in connection with an account with the old ADI containing 2 or more old deposits, the amount is to be apportioned between each old deposit, so that so much of the amount as is attributable to a particular old deposit is regarded as a distinct new deposit relating to that old deposit.



    New deposit is a farm management deposit

    393-55(2)    
    This Division (except this section) applies to the new deposit as if the new deposit were a transfer of the old deposit in accordance with a requirement contained in the relevant agreement for the old deposit as set out in item 13 of the table in section 393-35 (which allows for transfers of deposits at the request of the depositor). To avoid doubt, this Division applies in that way as if the amount transferred were the amount of the new deposit, even if that is more or less than the amount of the old deposit.

    Note 1:

    The effects of this include the following:

  • (a) section 393-5 (about deductions for making a farm management deposit) does not apply in relation to the making of the new deposit (see paragraphs 393-15(1)(c) and (2)(a) );
  • (b) subsection 393-10(1) (about assessability of the repayment of a farm management deposit) can only apply to the extent of any difference between the amount transferred and the amount of the old deposit (see paragraphs 393-15(1)(c) and (2)(b) );
  • (c) subsections 393-40(1) , (2) and (4) (about repayment of a farm management deposit within the first 12 months) can only apply to the extent of any difference between the amount transferred and the amount of the old deposit (see paragraphs 393-15(1)(c) and (2)(c) and (d));
  • (d) the day the old deposit was made, for the purposes of subsections 393-40(1) and (2) (about repayment of a farm management deposit within the first 12 months) and (3A) and (4) (about repayment in the event of an applicable natural disaster), is maintained for the new deposit (see subsection 393-40(6) ).
  • Note 2:

    Also, the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the new deposit is the same as the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the old deposit (see subsection 393-15(3) ), unless subsection (6) or (7) of this section applies because the new deposit is less than the old deposit.


    393-55(3)    
    In determining whether either of the following is a *farm management deposit, disregard a requirement contained in an agreement as set out in item 4 of the table in section 393-35 (requiring the deposit to be $1,000 or more):


    (a) the new deposit;


    (b) a deposit made later directly by the transfer of the new deposit in accordance with a requirement of the relevant agreement for the new deposit as mentioned in item 13 of that table.

    393-55(4)    
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2011)


    393-55(5)    
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2011)



    Unrecouped FMD deduction for new deposit less than old deposit

    393-55(6)    
    Despite subsection (2) and subsection 393-15(3) , if the new deposit is less than the old deposit at the time (the declaration time ) the old ADI became a declared ADI under the Banking Act 1959 , the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the new deposit is the amount worked out using the following formula:


    Unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of old deposit just before declaration time × New deposit
    Old deposit just before declaration time

    Note:

    The new deposit could be less than the old deposit if the entitlement is paid in instalments (each of which will be a separate new deposit).


    393-55(7)    
    However, if the amount worked out under subsection (6) is more than the difference (if any) between:


    (a) the *unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the old deposit just before the declaration time; and


    (b) the total of the amounts worked out under all previous applications of subsection (6) in relation to that old deposit;

    the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the new deposit is equal to the difference (if any).

    Note:

    This ensures that when new deposits linked to the old deposit are repaid, the total amount included in assessable income will not exceed the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the old deposit.



    Relationship with other provisions

    393-55(8)    
    This section has effect despite Division 253 (about tax treatment of entitlements under the financial claims scheme for insolvent ADIs).

    SECTION 393-60  

    393-60   Repayment if owner of farm management deposit with insolvent ADI dies, is bankrupt or ceases to be a primary producer  


    Subsection 393-10(4) does not apply in relation to so much of a *farm management deposit with an *ADI as is equal to the sum of the amounts described in subparagraphs (d)(i) and (ii) of this section if:


    (a) you are the *owner of the deposit; and


    (b) the deposit becomes repayable during an income year because of the requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in item 11 of the table in section 393-35 (death, bankruptcy etc.); and


    (c) during the income year, the ADI becomes a declared ADI under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 ; and


    (d) at the end of the income year, you have either or both of the following:


    (i) an unmet entitlement under that Division connected with the account for the farm management deposit;

    (ii) an unmet claim against the ADI, or an unpaid debt owed to you by the ADI, in the winding up of the ADI connected with the account for the deposit.
    Note:

    Subsection 393-10(4) makes the repayment of a farm management deposit assessable in the income year when the death, bankruptcy etc occurs, rather than in any later year in which it might be repaid.

    Division 394 - Forestry managed investment schemes  

    SECTION 394-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out rules about deductions for contributions to forestry managed investment schemes. It also sets out the tax treatment of proceeds from the sale of interests in such schemes, and of proceeds from harvesting trees under such schemes.

    SECTION 394-5  

    394-5   Object of this Division  


    The object of this Division is to encourage the expansion of commercial plantation forestry in Australia through the establishment and tending of new plantations for felling. This is achieved by:


    (a) permitting investors to deduct amounts paid under a forestry scheme in the year of payment, if certain conditions are met (for example, that it is reasonable to expect that the manager of the scheme will spend at least 70% of investors' contributions, on a market value basis, on activities that establish, tend, fell and harvest trees); and


    (b) allowing secondary market trading of interests in such schemes, while minimising tax arbitrage and providing tax certainty for investors.

    SECTION 394-10   Deduction for amounts paid under forestry managed investment schemes  

    394-10(1)    
    You can deduct an amount if:


    (a) you hold a *forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme; and


    (b) you pay the amount under the scheme; and


    (c) the scheme satisfies the *70% DFE rule (see section 394-35 ) on 30 June in the income year in which a *participant in the scheme first pays an amount under the scheme; and


    (d) you do not have day to day control over the operation of the scheme (whether or not you have the right to be consulted or give directions); and


    (e) at least one of these conditions is satisfied:


    (i) there is more than one participant in the scheme;

    (ii) the *forestry manager of the scheme, or an *associate of the forestry manager, manages, arranges or promotes similar schemes; and


    (f) the condition in subsection (4) is satisfied.

    394-10(2)    
    You deduct the amount for the income year in which you pay it.

    394-10(3)    
    For the purposes of this Division, do not treat an amount as being paid under a *forestry managed investment scheme if:


    (a) you pay the amount in connection with a *CGT event in relation to a *forestry interest in the scheme; and


    (b) as a result of the CGT event:


    (i) another *participant in the scheme no longer holds the forestry interest; and

    (ii) you start to hold the forestry interest.

    394-10(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(f), the condition in this subsection is satisfied unless:


    (a) 18 months haveelapsed since the end of the income year in which an amount is first paid under the *forestry managed investment scheme by a *participant in the scheme; and


    (b) the trees intended to be established in accordance with the scheme have not all been established before the end of those 18 months.

    394-10(5)    
    You cannot deduct an amount under subsection (1) if:


    (a) you hold the *forestry interest mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) as an *initial participant; and


    (b) a *CGT event happens in relation to the forestry interest within 4 years after the end of the income year in which you first pay an amount under the scheme.

    If you have already deducted it, your assessment may be amended to disallow the deduction.


    394-10(5A)    


    Paragraph (5)(b) does not apply to a * CGT event if:


    (a) the CGT event happens because of circumstances outside your control; and

    Example:

    The forestry interest is compulsorily acquired.


    (b) when you acquired the * foresty interest, you could not reasonably have foreseen the CGT event happening.


    394-10(6)    
    Despite section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , the Commissioner may amend your assessment at any time within 2 years after the *CGT event, for the purpose of giving effect to subsection (5).

    394-10(7)    
    Sections 82KZMD and 82KZMF of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 do not affect the timing of a deduction under this section.

    SECTION 394-15   Forestry managed investment schemes and related concepts  

    394-15(1)    
    A *scheme is a forestry managed investment scheme if the purpose of the scheme is for establishing and tending trees for felling in Australia.

    394-15(2)    
    The entity that manages, arranges or promotes a *forestry managed investment scheme is the forestry manager of the scheme.

    394-15(3)    
    A forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme is a right to benefits produced by the scheme (whether the right is actual, prospective or contingent and whether it is enforceable or not).

    394-15(4)    
    An entity that holds a *forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme (other than the *forestry manager of the scheme) is a participant in the scheme.

    394-15(5)    
    A *participant in a *forestry managed investment scheme holds a *forestry interest in the scheme as an initial participant if:


    (a) the participant obtains the forestry interest from the *forestry manager of the scheme; and


    (b) the payment by the participant to obtain the forestry interest results in the establishment of trees.

    SECTION 394-20  

    394-20   Payments on behalf of participant in forestry managed investment scheme  


    For the purposes of this Division, treat a payment to the *forestry manager of a *forestry managed investment on behalf of a *participant in the scheme as a payment by the participant to the forestry manager.

    SECTION 394-25   CGT event in relation to forestry interest in forestry managed investment scheme - initial participant  

    394-25(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you hold a *forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme as an *initial participant in the scheme; and


    (b) at least one of these conditions is satisfied:


    (i) you can deduct or have deducted an amount for an income year under section 394-10 in relation to the forestry interest;

    (ii) the condition in subparagraph (i) would be satisfied if subsection 394-10(5) were disregarded; and


    (c) a *CGT event happens in relation to the forestry interest, other than a CGT event that happens in respect of thinning.

    394-25(2)    
    Your assessable income for the income year in which the *CGT event happens includes:


    (a) if, as a result of the CGT event, you no longer hold the *forestry interest - the *market value of the forestry interest (worked out as at the time of the event); or


    (b) otherwise - the decrease (if any) in the market value of the forestry interest as a result of the CGT event.

    394-25(3)    
    Any amount that you actually receive because of the *CGT event is not included in your assessable income (nor is it *exempt income).

    SECTION 394-30   CGT event in relation to forestry interest in forestry managed investment scheme - subsequent participant  

    394-30(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you hold a *forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme otherwise than as an *initial participant in the scheme; and


    (b) at least one of these conditions is satisfied:


    (i) you can deduct or have deducted an amount for an income year under section 394-10 in relation to the forestry interest;

    (ii) you could deduct an amount for an income year under section 394-10 if you had paid the amount under the scheme in that year; and


    (c) a *CGT event happens in relation to the forestry interest, other than a CGT event that happens in respect of thinning.

    394-30(2)    
    Your assessable income for the income year in which the *CGT event happens includes the lesser of the following:


    (a) the *market value of the forestry interest (worked out as at the time of the event);


    (b) the amount (if any) by which the *total forestry scheme deductions in relation to the forestry interest exceeds the *incidental forestry scheme receipts in relation to the forestry interest.

    394-30(3)    
    The total forestry scheme deductions in relation to the *forestry interest is the total of each amount that you can deduct or have deducted under section 394-10 for each income year in relation to the forestry interest.

    394-30(4)    
    The incidental forestry scheme receipts in relation to the *forestry interest is the total of each amount that you have received under the scheme in each income year in relation to the forestry interest for a reason otherwise than because of the *CGT event.

    394-30(5)    
    However, if you still hold the forestry interest despite the *CGT event, work out the amount included in your assessable income under subsection (2) using this formula (instead of using the amount worked out under subsection (2)):


    Amount worked out under subsection (2) × Decrease (if any) in the *market value of the *forestry interest as a result of the CGT event  
    *Market value of the *forestry interest just before the CGT event


    394-30(6)    
    If this section has operated previously in relation to the *forestry interest, disregard an amount for the purposes of subsections (3) and (4) to the extent that it has already been reflected in your assessable income under that previous operation in relation to the forestry interest.

    394-30(7)    
    These provisions do not apply to the *CGT event:


    (a) section 6-5 (about *ordinary income);


    (b) any other provision that includes an amount in assessable income, other than the following:


    (i) a provision in Part 3-1 or 3-3 ;

    (ii) subsection (2) of this section;


    (c) section 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct);


    (d) any other provision that allows you to deduct an amount from your assessable income;


    (e) section 118-20 .

    394-30(8)    
    However, the provisions referred to in subsection (7) can apply to the *CGT event if a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event is disregarded because of section 118-25 .

    394-30(9)    
    Just before the *CGT event, increase the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *forestry interest by the amount included in your assessable income under subsection (2).

    SECTION 394-35   70% DFE rule  

    394-35(1)    
    A *forestry managed investment scheme satisfies the 70% DFE rule on 30 June in an income year if it is reasonable to expect on that 30 June that the amount of DFE under the scheme (see subsection (2)) is no less than 70% of the amount of the payments under the scheme (see subsection (3)).

    394-35(2)    
    The amount of DFE under the scheme is the amount of the net present value (on that 30 June) of all *direct forestry expenditure under the scheme that the *forestry manager of the scheme has paid or will pay under the scheme.

    394-35(3)    
    The amount of payments under the scheme is the amount of the net present value (on that 30 June) of all amounts that all current and future *participants in the scheme have paid or will pay under the scheme.

    394-35(4)    
    In working out the net present value of an amount paid before that 30 June:


    (a) unless paragraph (b) applies - treat the amount as having been paid on that 30 June; or


    (b) if the amount was paid in an income year ending before that 30 June - treat the amount as having been paid on the 30 June in that income year.

    394-35(5)    
    In working out the net present value of an amount expected to be paid after that 30 June, treat the amount as having been paid on 1 January in the incomeyear in which it is expected to be paid.

    394-35(6)    
    Reduce an amount worked out under subsection (2) or (3) to the extent (if any) to which that amount can reasonably be expected to be recouped.

    394-35(7)    
    In working out the net present value of an amount for the purposes of this section, use the yield on Australian Government Treasury Bonds with the maturity closest to 10 years (as published by the Reserve Bank of Australia).

    394-35(8)    
    For the purposes of subsection (2), if:


    (a) the *forestry manager of the scheme has paid or will pay an amount under the scheme in a transaction; and


    (b) the forestry manager and at least one other party to the transaction did not or will not deal at *arm's length in relation to the transaction; and


    (c) the amount is or will be more or less than the *market value of what it is for;

    treat the amount as that market value.


    SECTION 394-40  

    394-40   Payments under forestry managed investment scheme  


    For the purposes of this Division, do not treat the following payments as payments under a *forestry managed investment scheme by a *participant in the scheme:


    (a) payments for *borrowing money;


    (b) payments of interest and payments in the nature of interest;


    (c) payments of stamp duty;


    (d) payments of *GST;


    (e) payments that relate to one or more of the matters mentioned in paragraphs 394-45(4)(a), (b) or (c) .

    SECTION 394-45   Direct forestry expenditure  

    394-45(1)    
    Direct forestry expenditure under a *forestry managed investment scheme means:


    (a) an amount paid under the scheme that is attributable to establishing, tending, felling and harvesting trees; and


    (b) notional amounts reflecting the *market value of goods, services or the use of land, provided by the *forestry manager of the scheme, for establishing, tending, felling and harvesting trees. EXAMPLES

    Example 1:

    Notional amounts reflecting the value of the use of land owned by the forestry manager that is provided for establishing, tending, felling and harvesting trees.

    Example 2:

    Notional amounts reflecting the value of tree felling services provided by the forestry manager.


    394-45(2)    
    Treat *direct forestry expenditure covered by paragraph (1)(b) as paid annually for each income year of the *forestry manager of the scheme based on the *market value of the goods, services, or the use of the land. Treat the day on which it is paid as:


    (a) unless paragraph (b) or (c) applies - 1 January in the income year; or


    (b) if the first time an amount is paid under the scheme is later than the first day of the income year - the last day of the income year; or


    (c) if the scheme comes to an end on a day before the end of the income year - that day.

    Exclusions - general

    394-45(3)    
    However, direct forestry expenditure under the scheme does not include amounts paid under the scheme to the extent that they relate to any of the following:


    (a) marketing of the scheme;

    Example:

    Advertising, sales, sponsorship and entertainment.


    (b) insurance, contingency funds or provisions (other than provisions for employee entitlements);


    (c) financing;


    (d) lobbying;


    (e) general business overheads (but not overheads directly related to forestry);


    (f) subscriptions to industry bodies;


    (g) commissions for financial planners or financial advisers;


    (h) compliance with requirements related to the structure and operations of the *forestry manager of the scheme;

    Example:

    Product design and preparation of product disclosure statements.


    (i) supervision and auditing of contracts, other than direct supervision of direct forestry activities (such as establishing trees for felling);


    (j) legal fees relating to any matter mentioned in this subsection.

    Exclusions - expenditure after harvest etc.

    394-45(4)    
    Also, direct forestry expenditure under the scheme does not include amounts paid under the scheme to the extent that they relate to any of the following:


    (a) transportation and handling of felled trees that happens after the earliest of the following:


    (i) sale of the trees;

    (ii) arrival of the trees at the mill door;

    (iii) arrival of the trees at the port;

    (iv) arrival of the trees at the place of processing (other than where processing happens in-field);


    (b) processing;


    (c) stockpiling (other than in-field stockpiling);


    (d) marketing and sale of forestry produce.

    (Repealed) Division 396 - Land transport facilities borrowings  

    396-5   (Repealed) SECTION 396-5 What this Division is about  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 396-A - Key operative provisions  

    396-10   (Repealed) SECTION 396-10 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    (Repealed) Operative provisions

    396-15   (Repealed) SECTION 396-15 Tax offset for LTF interest on land transport facilities borrowings  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-20   (Repealed) SECTION 396-20 Maximum cost to Commonwealth  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-25   (Repealed) SECTION 396-25 Borrower cannot deduct LTF interest for which lender has tax offset  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 396-B - What LTF interest is covered?  

    (Repealed) Operative provisions

    396-30   (Repealed) SECTION 396-30 What is LTF interest?  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-35   (Repealed) SECTION 396-35 Interest covered by land transport facilities borrowings agreement  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-40   (Repealed) SECTION 396-40 Interest ceasing to be covered by a land transport facilities borrowings agreement  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 396-C - Projects, borrowers and lenders  

    (Repealed) Operative provisions

    396-45   (Repealed) SECTION 396-45 What projects can be approved?  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-50   (Repealed) SECTION 396-50 Who can be approved as a borrower?  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-55   (Repealed) SECTION 396-55 Who can be a lender?  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 396-D - Application, approval and agreement process  

    (Repealed) Operative provisions

    396-60   (Repealed) SECTION 396-60 Applications  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-65   (Repealed) SECTION 396-65 Minister or Commissioner may seek more information  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-70   (Repealed) SECTION 396-70 Transport Minister to consider applications  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-75   (Repealed) SECTION 396-75 Selection criteria  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-80   (Repealed) SECTION 396-80 Land transport facilities borrowings agreements  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-85   (Repealed) SECTION 396-85 Conditions to be in all agreements  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-90   (Repealed) SECTION 396-90 Variation of agreements  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 396-E - Miscellaneous  

    396-95   (Repealed) SECTION 396-95 Provision of information  
    (Repealed by No 145 of 2010)

    396-100   (Repealed) SECTION 396-100 Publication of information about approvals and agreements  
    (Repealed by No 145 of 2010)

    396-105   (Repealed) SECTION 396-105 Delegation by Transport Minister  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    396-110   (Repealed) SECTION 396-110 Decision by Transport Minister not reviewable by AAT  
    (Repealed by No 41 of 2011)

    (Repealed) Division 400 - Environmental impact assessment and environmental protection  

    (Repealed) Division 402 - Environment protection expenditure  

    (Repealed) Guide to Division 402  

    402-1   (Repealed) SECTION 402-1 What this Division is about  
    (Repealed by No 84 of 2013)

    (Repealed) Subdivision 402-W - Urban water tax offset  

    (Repealed) Guide to Subdivision 402-W

    402-750   (Repealed) SECTION 402-750 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 84 of 2013)

    402-755   (Repealed) SECTION 402-755 Entitlement to urban water tax offset  
    (Repealed by No 84 of 2013)

    402-760   (Repealed) SECTION 402-760 Certificates  
    (Repealed by No 84 of 2013)

    402-765   (Repealed) SECTION 402-765 Amount of urban water tax offset  
    (Repealed by No 84 of 2013)

    402-770   (Repealed) SECTION 402-770 Revoking certificates  
    (Repealed by No 84 of 2013)

    402-775   (Repealed) SECTION 402-775 AAT review  
    (Repealed by No 84 of 2013)

    402-780   (Repealed) SECTION 402-780 Guidelines  
    (Repealed by No 84 of 2013)

    Division 405 - Above-average special professional income of authors, inventors, performing artists, production associates and sportspersons  

    Guide to Division 405  

    SECTION 405-1   What this Division is about  

    Significant fluctuations can occur in the professional incomes of authors, inventors, performing artists, production associates and sportspersons.

    To lessen the impact of these fluctuations on your marginal tax rates, special tax rates apply if your professional income is above your average.

    This Division explains how the scheme works and sets out the rules for working out your above-average special professional income.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    405-5 Special rate of income tax on your above-average special professional income
    405-10 Overview of the Division

    SECTION 405-5   Special rate of income tax on your above-average special professional income  

    405-5(1)    
    If you have above-average special professional income, the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 generally sets a special rate so that the amount of income tax you pay on the top 4/5 of your above-average special professional income is effectively 4 times what you would pay on the bottom 1/ 5 of that income at basic rates.

    Note:

    Your overall income tax will be less only if 2 marginal rates of income tax would apply to your above-average special professional income if it were treated as the top slice of your taxable income.


    405-5(2)    
    The following diagram illustrates how the special rate works.



    SECTION 405-10   Overview of the Division  
    For which income years do you have above-average special professional income?

    405-10(1)    
    The first income year for which you have above-average special professional income is the first income year (professional year 1):


    (a) for which your taxable professional income is more than $2,500; and


    (b) during all or part of which you are an Australian resident.

    405-10(2)    
    After professional year 1, you have above-average special professional income for any income year for all or part of which you are an Australian resident.

    Note:

    You need not have been an Australian resident for every income year since professional year 1.



    What is above-average special professional income?

    405-10(3)    
    Your above-average special professional income for the current year is the amount (if any) by which your taxable professional income exceeds your average taxable professional income.

    See Subdivision 405-A .



    What is taxable professional income?

    405-10(4)    
    Your taxable professional income depends on your assessable professional income.

    See section 405-45 .


    405-10(5)    
    Your assessable professional income is assessable income from your work as an author, inventor, performing artist, production associate or sportsperson.

    See Subdivision 405-B .



    How do you work out your average taxable professional income?

    405-10(6)    
    Generally, your average taxable professional income for the current year is the average of your taxable professional income for the last 4 income years.

    See section 405-50 .


    405-10(7)    
    However, special phasing-in arrangements apply to work out your average taxable professional income for an income year that is less than 4 income years after professional year 1.

    These arrangements favour people who were Australian residents for at least part of the income year before professional year 1.

    See section 405-50 .


    Subdivision 405-A - Above-average special professional income  

    SECTION 405-15   When do you have above-average special professional income?  

    405-15(1)    
    Your taxable income for the * current year includes above-average special professional income if and only if:


    (a) you are an individual; and


    (b) you have been an Australian resident for all or part of the current year; and


    (c) your * taxable professional income for the current year exceeds your * average taxable professional income for the current year; and


    (d) either:


    (i) your * taxable professional income for the current year is more than $2,500; or

    (ii) your * taxable professional income for an earlier income year was more than $2,500 and you were an Australian resident for all or part of that income year.


    How much above-average special professional income do you have?

    405-15(2)    
    The amount of * above-average special professional income in your taxable income for the * current year is the difference between:


    (a) your * taxable professional income for the current year; and


    (b) your * average taxable professional income for the current year.

    Subdivision 405-B - Assessable professional income  

    SECTION 405-20   What you count as assessable professional income  

    405-20(1)    
    Work out your assessable professional income for an income year by adding up all your assessable income for the income year that you count under this Subdivision.

    Note 1:

    Section 405-30 may stop you counting an amount.

    Note 2:

    Subsection 405-35(1) stops you counting an amount more than once, even if it is described in more than one subsection of this section.

    Note 3:

    Subsection 405-35(2) may affect the amount you count.



    Assessable income from professional services

    405-20(2)    
    You count any assessable income that you * derive as a reward for providing services relating to your activities as a * special professional.

    Assessable income from prizes

    405-20(3)    
    You also count any assessable income that you * derive as a prize for your activities as a * special professional.

    Assessable income from promotions and commentary

    405-20(4)    
    You also count any assessable income that you * derive, because you are or were a * special professional, for:


    (a) endorsing or promoting goods or services; or


    (b) appearing or participating in an advertisement; or


    (c) appearing or participating in an interview; or


    (d) providing services as a commentator; or


    (e) providing similar services.

    Assessable income from assigning copyright or granting a licence

    405-20(5)    
    You also count any assessable income that you * derive:


    (a) as consideration for:


    (i) assigning all or part of the copyright in a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work of which you are the author; or

    (ii) granting an interest in the copyright in such a work by granting a licence; or


    (b) as an advance on account of royalties relating to such a copyright.

    Assessable income from assigning or granting patent rights

    405-20(6)    
    You also count any assessable income that you * derive:


    (a) as consideration for:


    (i) assigning all or part of the patent for an invention that you invented; or

    (ii) granting an interest in the patent for such an invention by granting a licence; or

    (iii) assigning the right to apply for a patent for such an invention; or


    (b) as an advance on account of royalties relating to such a patent.

    Other assessable income from works or inventions

    405-20(7)    
    You also count any assessable income that you * derive (as * royalties or otherwise):


    (a) for a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work of which you are the author; or


    (b) in relation to copyright in such a work; or


    (c) for an invention that you invented; or


    (d) in relation to a patent for such an invention.

    SECTION 405-25   Meaning of special professional , performing artist , production associate , sportsperson and sporting competition  
    Special professional

    405-25(1)    
    You are a special professional if you are:


    (a) the author of a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work; or

    Note:

    The expression ``author'' is a technical term from copyright law. In general, the ``author'' of a musical work is its composer and the ``author'' of an artistic work is the artist, sculptor or photographer who created it.


    (b) the inventor of an invention; or


    (c) a * performing artist; or


    (d) a * production associate; or


    (e) a * sportsperson.

    Performing artist

    405-25(2)    
    You are a performing artist if you exercise intellectual, artistic, musical, physical or other personal skills in the presence of an audience by performing or presenting:


    (a) music; or


    (b) a play; or


    (c) dance; or


    (d) an entertainment; or


    (e) an address; or


    (f) a display; or


    (g) a promotional activity; or


    (h) an exhibition; or


    (i) any similar activity.

    405-25(3)    


    You are also a performing artist if you perform or appear in or on a *film, tape, disc or television or radio broadcast.

    Production associate

    405-25(4)    
    You are a production associate if you provide * artistic support for:


    (a) an activity described in subsection (2); or


    (b) the activity of making a *film, tape, disc or television or radio broadcast.


    405-25(5)    
    You provide artistic support for an activity if:


    (a) you provide services relating to the activity as:


    (i) an art director; or

    (ii) a choreographer; or

    (iii) a costume designer; or

    (iv) a director; or

    (v) a director of photography; or

    (vi) a film editor; or

    (vii) a lighting designer; or

    (viii) a musical director; or

    (ix) a producer; or

    (x) a production designer; or

    (xi) a set designer; or


    (b) you provide similar services relating to the activity.

    Sportsperson

    405-25(6)    
    You are a sportsperson if you compete in a * sporting competition.

    405-25(7)    
    A sporting competition is a sporting activity to the extent that:


    (a) human beings are the only competitors in it, or it is one in which human beings:


    (i) compete by riding animals or exercising other skills in relation to animals; or

    (ii) compete by driving, piloting or crewing * motor vehicles, boats, aircraft or other forms of transport; or

    (iii) compete with natural obstacles or natural forces, or by overcoming them; and


    (b) participation in it by human competitors involves primarily their exercising physical prowess, physical strength or physical stamina.

    405-25(8)    
    However, the participation:


    (a) of a navigator in the activity of car rallying; or


    (b) of a coxswain in the activity of rowing; or


    (c) of a competitor in a similar role in some other activity;

    need not involve primarily exercising physical prowess, physical strength or physical stamina for the activity to be a sporting competition .


    SECTION 405-30   What you cannot count as assessable professional income  
    Assessable income from continuous service as author or inventor

    405-30(1)    
    You cannot count as * assessable professional income any assessable income you * derive for meeting your obligations under a * scheme to provide services to another person by engaging in activities as the author of a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work, or as the inventor of an invention, unless:


    (a) the scheme was entered into solely to require you to provide services by:


    (i) making one or more specified literary, dramatic, musical or artistic works; or

    (ii) inventing one or more specified inventions; and


    (b) you have not been providing services, and may not reasonably be expected to provide services, to that person or his or her * associates under successive * schemes that result in substantial continuity of your providing services.

    Assessable income from certain activities

    405-30(2)    
    You cannot count as * assessable professional income any assessable income that you * derive for:


    (a) coaching or training * sportspersons; or


    (b) umpiring or refereeing a * sporting competition; or


    (c) administering a * sporting competition; or


    (d) being a member of the pit crew in motor sport; or


    (e) being a theatrical or sports entrepreneur; or


    (f) owning or training animals.

    Payments at end of employment, and capital gains

    405-30(3)    
    You cannot count as * assessable professional income:


    (a) a *superannuation lump sum or an *employment termination payment; or


    (b) an *unused annual leave payment or an *unused long service leave payment; or


    (c) a *net capital gain.



    This section prevails over section 405-20

    405-30(4)    
    You cannot count particular assessable income as * assessable professional income if this section says you cannot, even if section 405-20 says you count it.

    SECTION 405-35   Limits on counting amounts as assessable professional income  
    No double-counting

    405-35(1)    
    You cannot count the same amount as * assessable professional income more than once, even if it is described in more than one subsection of section 405-20 .

    Amounts that are partly assessable professional income

    405-35(2)    
    If:


    (a) you * derive assessable income under or as a result of a * scheme; and


    (b) the assessable income consists of a part that is counted as * assessable professional income and another part that cannot be; and


    (c) one component is unreasonably large and the other component is unreasonably small, for reasons that are directly or indirectly related to one another;

    you must work out your * assessable professional income as if the unreasonably large component were reduced by a reasonable amount and the unreasonably small component were increased by the same amount.


    405-35(3)    
    Subsection (2) affects your * assessable professional income:


    (a) whether you * derived the assessable income directly or indirectly under or as a result of the * scheme; and


    (b) whether or not a reason mentioned in paragraph (2)(c) is the only reason why a component is unreasonably large or small.

    SECTION 405-40   Joint author or inventor treated as sole author or inventor  

    405-40(1)    
    If you are a joint author of a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work, work out your * assessable professional income as if you were the author of that work.

    Note:

    This section means that you are treated as a special professional, even if you have never been the sole author of a work.


    405-40(2)    
    If you are a joint inventor of an invention, work out your * assessable professional income as if you were the inventor of that invention.

    Note:

    This section means that you are treated as a special professional, even if you have never been the sole inventor of an invention.


    Subdivision 405-C - Taxable professional income and average taxable professional income 

    SECTION 405-45  

    405-45   Working out your taxable professional income  


    Your taxable professional income for an income year is the amount (if any) by which your * assessable professional income for that year exceeds the amount of your deductions for that year worked out as follows: Method statement

    Step 1.

    Add up any amounts you can deduct for that year (except * apportionable deductions), so far as they reasonably relate to your * assessable professional income for the year.


    Step 2.

    Work out the amount using the formula:


    *Apportionable
    deductions
    ×     (*Assessable professional income − Sum from Step 1)    
    Taxable income + *Apportionable deductions

    Note:

    The result may be greater than the apportionable deductions. Also, it may be negative.


    Step 3.

    Add the sum from Step 1 to the result from Step 2. If the result is more than nil, it is the amount of your deductions to be subtracted from your * assessable professional income.

    SECTION 405-50   Working out your average taxable professional income  
    It is generally a 4-year average

    405-50(1)    
    Work out your average taxable professional income for the * current year by:


    (a) adding up your * taxable professional income for each of the last 4 income years before the current year; and


    (b) dividing the total by 4.

    Phasing-in arrangements for new professionals

    405-50(2)    
    However, if the * current year is less than 4 income years after * professional year 1, work out your average taxable professional income using the table in subsection (5).

    405-50(3)    
    Professional year 1 is the first income year:


    (a) during which you were an Australian resident (for all or part of the income year); and


    (b) for which your * taxable professional income was more than $2,500.

    405-50(4)    
    Professional year 2 , professional year 3 and professional year 4 are respectively the next 3 income years after * professional year 1.

    405-50(5)    


    The table is as follows:


    Average taxable professional income during phase-in period
    Item Current year Average taxable professional income if you were an Australian resident for all or part of the income year immediately before professional year 1 Average taxable professional income if you were a foreign resident for any of the income year immediately before professional year 1
    1 Professional year 1 Nil Your *taxable professional income for *professional year 1
    .
    2 Professional year 2 ⅓ of your *taxable professional income for *professional year 1 Your *taxable professional income for *professional year 1
    .
    3 Professional year 3 ¼ of the sum of your *taxable professional income for each of *professional years 1 and 2 ½ of the sum of your *taxable professional income for each of *professional years 1 and 2
    .
    4 Professional year 4 ¼ of the sum of your *taxable professional income for each of *professional years 1, 2 and 3 ⅓ of the sum of your *taxable professional income for each of *professional years 1, 2 and 3

    Note:

    If you were a foreign resident for any part of the income year immediately before professional year 1, the effect of item 1 of the table is that your taxable income for professional year 1 will not include above-average special professional income.


    Division 410 - Copyright and resale royalty collecting societies  

    Guide to Division 410  

    SECTION 410-1  What this Division is about  


    This Division sets out rules that apply whenever:

  • (a) a copyright collecting society to which section 51-43 applies makes a payment to a member of the society; or
  • (b) the resale royalty collecting society pays a resale royalty.
  • Subdivision 410-A - Notice of payments  

    SECTION 410-5   Copyright collecting society must give notice to member of society  

    410-5(1)    
    A *copyright collecting society must give a *member of the society notice of any payment it makes to the member, if section 51-43 applies to the society.

    410-5(2)    
    The society must give the notice at the time of the payment.

    410-5(3)    
    The notice must be in the *approved form.

    Note:

    Under section 288-75 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 a society is liable to an administrative penalty for failing to give a notice required under this section.


    SECTION 410-50   Resale royalty collecting society must give notice to holder of resale royalty right  

    410-50(1)    
    The *resale royalty collecting society must give an entity notice of any payment it makes to the entity under section 26 of the Resale Royalty Right for Visual Artists Act 2009 , if section 51-45 of this Act applies to the society.

    410-50(2)    
    The society must give the notice at the time of the payment.

    410-50(3)    
    The notice must be in the *approved form.

    Note:

    Under section 288-75 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 the society is liable to an administrative penalty for failing to give a notice required under this section.


    Division 415 - Designated infrastructure projects  

    Guide to Division 415  

    SECTION 415-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division provides for special treatment for tax losses and bad debts for certain entities (called " designated infrastructure project entities " ) that carry on infrastructure projects that the Infrastructure CEO designates under Subdivision 415-C .

    Subdivision 415-A - Object of this Division  

    SECTION 415-5  

    415-5   Object of this Division  


    The object of this Division is to reduce the disincentives for private expenditure on nationally significant infrastructure that result from the long lead times between incurring deductions for, and earning assessable income from, such expenditure.

    Subdivision 415-B - Tax losses and bad debts  

    Guide to Subdivision 415-B

    SECTION 415-10   What this Subdivision is about  


    The unutilised amounts of a designated infrastructure project entity ' s tax losses are increased each year by the long term bond rate. A designated infrastructure project entity is a fixed trust or company that:

  • (a) carries on an infrastructure project designated under Subdivision 415-C ; and
  • (b) only engages, and has only ever engaged, in activities for the purposes of carrying on that designated infrastructure project.
  • The tests that apply in relation to tax losses and bad debts if there is a change of ownership of an entity are modified so that periods during which the entity is a designated infrastructure project entity are not tested.

    The loss utilisation rules in Subdivision 707-C do not apply if the head company of a consolidated group is a designated infrastructure project entity after another designated infrastructure project entity joins the group.

    Note:

    The transfer rules in subsection 707-120(1A) do not apply if a designated infrastructure project entity joins a consolidated group: see subsection 707-120(5) .


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Uplift of tax losses
    415-15 Uplift of tax losses of designated infrastructure project entities
    415-20 Designated infrastructure project entity
    Change of ownership of trusts and companies
    415-25 Tax losses of trusts
    415-30 Bad debts written off etc. by trusts
    415-35 Tax losses of companies
    415-40 Bad debts written off by companies
    Consolidated groups
    415-45 Losses transferred to head companies of consolidated groups

    Uplift of tax losses

    SECTION 415-15   Uplift of tax losses of designated infrastructure project entities  

    415-15(1)    
    The amount of a * tax loss of a * loss year of an entity is increased, at the end of each later income year (and before any * utilisation of the tax loss by the entity in the later income year), by the amount worked out using the following formula:


    Amount of the * tax loss, to the extent it has not been * utilised × * Long term bond rate for the later income year × Eligible portion of the later income year

    where:

    eligible portion of the later income year
    means the amount worked out using the following formula:


    Number of days in the later income year on which subsection (2) applies to the entity
    Number of days in the later income year


    415-15(2)    
    This subsection applies to the entity on a day in the later income year if:


    (a) the entity is a * designated infrastructure project entity on that day; and


    (b) on the day mentioned in subsection (3), the entity has notified the Commissioner (whether before, during or after the later income year) in the * approved form that the entity was, at any time, a designated infrastructure project entity.

    415-15(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), the day is the day after the latest of the following days:


    (a) the day before which the entity:


    (i) is required to lodge its * income tax return for the later income year with the Commissioner; or

    (ii) if the entity is not required to lodge an income tax return for the later income year - would be required to lodge its income tax return for the later income year were the entity required to lodge such a return;


    (b) the 28th day after the first day the entity carries on the infrastructure project mentioned in paragraph 415-20(1)(b) ;


    (c) the 28th day after the day the *Infrastructure CEO designates the infrastructure project under section 415-70 ;


    (d) a later day allowed by the Commissioner.

    Note:

    The increase under this section can occur at the end of an income year even if, at the end of the year, the entity does not know the entity is a designated infrastructure project entity (e.g. because the Infrastructure CEO has not yet designated the infrastructure project that the entity carries on, but the Infrastructure CEO does so later).



    Consolidated groups

    415-15(4)    
    Disregard paragraph 701-30(3)(a) for the purposes of the denominator in the formula in the definition of eligible portion of the later income year in subsection (1) of this section.

    Note:

    Paragraph 701-30(3)(a) applies if the entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group duringthe later income year.


    415-15(5)    
    For the purposes of applying this section to a * tax loss the * head company of a * consolidated group makes as mentioned in subsection 707-140(1) :


    (a) the head company is treated as having made the loss in the income year before the income year in which the transfer mentioned in that subsection occurs; and


    (b) subsection (2) of this section is treated as not applying to the head company on or before the day the transfer occurs;

    unless the transferred loss was a non-membership period loss (within the meaning of subsection 701-30(3) ) in relation to the group.

    Note:

    Subsection 707-140(1) treats the head company of a consolidated group as having made a loss in an income year in which a loss is transferred to the head company from an entity that joins the group.


    415-15(6)    
    (Repealed by No 124 of 2013)


    SECTION 415-20   Designated infrastructure project entity  


    Designated infrastructure project entity

    415-20(1)    
    An entity is a designated infrastructure project entity at a time (the relevant time ) if:


    (a) at the relevant time, the entity is a * fixed trust or a company; and


    (b) at or after the relevant time, the entity carries on a single * designated infrastructure project; and


    (c) the entity does not, at or before the relevant time, carry on any other designated infrastructure project; and


    (d) the only activities in which the entity engages at the relevant time, or engaged before the relevant time, are or were for the purposes of the entity carrying on the single designated infrastructure project.


    415-20(2)    
    For the purposes of this section:


    (a) an * enterprise that becomes a * designated infrastructure project at a time is treated as having been a designated infrastructure project at all earlier times; and


    (b) if the entity carries on (whether or not at the same time) one or more parts, but not the whole, of a single designated infrastructure project - the parts are treated as being a single designated infrastructure project; and


    (c) in any case - the following are treated as being a single designated infrastructure project:


    (i) a single designated infrastructure project (the listed infrastructure project ) that is included on an Infrastructure Priority List;

    (ii) any designated infrastructure projects that the entity carries on (whether or not at the same time) and that are part of the listed infrastructure project; and
    Note:

    For Infrastructure Priority Lists, see paragraph 5(b) of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008 .


    (d) in any case - any designated infrastructure projects that the entity carries on (whether or not at the same time) and that are part of a single infrastructure project that:


    (i) is included on an Infrastructure Priority List; and

    (ii) is not a designated infrastructure project;
    are treated as being a single designated infrastructure project.

    Partnerships

    415-20(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies to an entity if:


    (a) the entity is a * fixed trust or a company; and


    (b) the person that is the trustee of the trust, or the person that is the company, is a partner in a partnership.

    415-20(4)    
    For the purposes of subsections (1) and (2), the entity:


    (a) is treated as carrying on any * designated infrastructure project carried on by the partnership; and


    (b) is treated as engaging in any activity engaged in by the partnership; and


    (c) if the partnership engages in an activity for the purpose of the partnership carrying on a designated infrastructure project - is treated as engaging in that activity for the purpose of the entity carrying on that designated infrastructure project.



    Consolidated groups

    415-20(5)    
    For the purposes of working out whether the * head company of a * consolidated group was a * designated infrastructure project entity at a time (whether before or after the group consolidates), section 701-5 (Entry history rule) is treated as not applying to the head company in relation to an entity that was not a * member of the consolidated group at that time.

    415-20(6)    
    For the purposes of working out whether an entity is a * designated infrastructure project entity at a time after the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, section 701-40 (Exit history rule) is treated as not applying to the entity in relation to the group.

    Change of ownership of trusts and companies

    SECTION 415-25   Tax losses of trusts  


    Scope

    415-25(1)    
    This section applies to a * tax loss of a * trust if the trust is a * designated infrastructure project entity at a time (the status time ) in the * loss year.

    Modifications of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

    415-25(2)    
    Despite paragraph 266-25(1)(b) , 266-30(a) , 266-75(1)(b) or (2)(b) , 266-80(1)(a) or (2)(a) , 266-110(1)(b) , 266-115(a) , 266-150(2)(a) , 266-155(2)(a) , 267-20(1)(b) or 267-60(a) in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , for the purposes of sections 266-40 and 266-45 , section 266-90 , subsections 266-125(1) and (2) , subsections 266-165(1) and (2) , sections 267-40 and 267-45 or sections 267-70 and 267-75 in that Schedule (whichever are applicable), the test period starts at the first time:


    (a) that occurs after the status time; and


    (b) at which the trust is not a * designated infrastructure project entity;

    if, apart from this subsection, the test period would start earlier.


    415-25(3)    
    For the purposes of section 267-30 in that Schedule, disregard any part of an income year during which the trust is a * designated infrastructure project entity.

    415-25(4)    
    For the purposes of working out, under subsection 268-10(3) , 268-15(3) or 268-20(3) in that Schedule, the end of the first period, disregard any part of the income year mentioned in that subsection during which the trust is a * designated infrastructure project entity.

    Note:

    A trust does not calculate its net income and tax loss under Division 268 in that Schedule if the trust was a designated infrastructure project entity during the whole of the income year: see paragraphs 266-30(c) , 266-80(1)(d) and (2)(c) , 266-115(b) , 266-155(2)(b) , 267-60(b) and 272-100(f) in that Schedule.


    415-25(5)    
    For the purposes paragraph 268-20(4)(b) in that Schedule, disregard any part of the first of the successive periods during which the trust is a * designated infrastructure project entity.

    SECTION 415-30   Bad debts written off etc. by trusts  


    Scope

    415-30(1)    
    This section applies to a debt to which paragraph 266-35(1)(a) , 266-85(1)(a) or (2)(a), 266-120(1)(a), 266-160(1)(a) or (b), 267-25(1)(a) or 267-65(1)(a) in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies, if the trust is a * designated infrastructure project entity at a time (the status time ) in the income year in which the debt was incurred.

    Modifications of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

    415-30(2)    
    Despite paragraph 266-35(1)(b) , 266-85(1)(b) or (2)(b) , 266-120(1)(b) , 266-160(2)(a) , 267-25(1)(b) or 267-65(1)(a) in that Schedule, for the purposes of sections 266-40 and 266-45 , section 266-90 , subsections 266-125(1) and (2) , subsections 266-165(1) and (2) , sections 267-40 and 267-45 or sections 267-70 and 267-75 in that Schedule (whichever are applicable), the test period starts at the first time:


    (a) that occurs after the status time; and


    (b) at which the trust is not a * designated infrastructure project entity.

    415-30(3)    
    For the purposes of section 267-30 in that Schedule, disregard any part of an income year during which the trust is a * designated infrastructure project entity.

    SECTION 415-35   Tax losses of companies  


    Scope

    415-35(1)    
    This section applies to a * tax loss of a company if the company is a * designated infrastructure project entity at a time (the status time ) in the * loss year.

    Modifications of Divisions 165 and 166

    415-35(2)    
    Despite subsection 165-12(1) , 166-5(2) or 166-20(1) , the * ownership test period or * test period under that subsection starts at the earlier of:


    (a) the first time:


    (i) that occurs after the status time; and

    (ii) at which the company is not a * designated infrastructure project entity; and


    (b) the end of the income year referred to in that subsection as the income year.

    415-35(3)    
    In a case to which paragraph (2)(b) applies, the company is treated as meeting the conditions in section 165-12 .

    415-35(4)    


    Despite subsection 165-13(2) , 166-5(5) , 165-15(2) or 166-20(4) , the *business continuity test period under that subsection starts at the start of the * ownership test period or * test period (whichever is applicable) if, apart from this subsection, the business continuity test period would start earlier.

    415-35(5)    
    Despite subsection 165-13(2) , 165-15(3) , 166-5(6) or 166-20(4) , the * test time under that subsection occurs just after the start of the * ownership test period or * test period (whichever is applicable) if, apart from this subsection, the test time would occur earlier.

    415-35(6)    
    A reference in subsection 165-15(1) to the * loss year is treated as being a reference to the period:


    (a) starting at the start of the * ownership test period; and


    (b) ending at the end of the income year in which the ownership test period starts.

    415-35(7)    
    For the purposes of working out, under paragraph 165-45(3)(a) or (b) or subsection 165-45(4) , the end of the first period, disregard any part of the income year mentioned in section 165-45 during which the company is a * designated infrastructure project entity.

    Note:

    A company does not calculate its taxable income and tax loss under Subdivision 165-B if the company was a designated infrastructure project entity during the whole of the income year: see paragraph 165-35(c) .



    Exceptions

    415-35(8)    
    Disregard this section for the purposes of Subdivisions 165-CA and 165-CB (about net capital losses) and 175-A and 175-CA (about tax benefits).

    SECTION 415-40   Bad debts written off by companies  


    Scope

    415-40(1)    
    This section applies to a debt that a company writes off as bad, if the company is a * designated infrastructure project entity at a time (the status time ) in the income year in which the debt was incurred.

    Modifications of Divisions 165 and 166

    415-40(2)    
    Despite subsection 165-123(1) or 166-40(2), the * ownership test period or * test period under that subsection starts at the earlier of:


    (a) the first time that occurs after the status time and on or after:


    (i) in the case of subsection 165-123(1) - the start of the * first continuity period; or

    (ii) in the case of subsection 166-40(2) - the time the company chooses under that subsection;
    and at which the company is not a * designated infrastructure project entity; and


    (b) the end of the * second continuity period.

    415-40(3)    
    In a case to which paragraph (2)(b) applies, the company is treated as meeting the conditions in section 165-123.

    415-40(4)    


    Despite subsection 165-126(2) , 165-129(2) , 165-132(1) or 166-40(5) , the *business continuity test period under that subsection starts at the start of the * ownership test period or * test period (whichever is applicable) if, apart from this subsection, the business continuity test period would start earlier.

    415-40(5)    
    Despite subsection 165-126(2) , 165-129(3) or 166-40(6) , the * test time under that subsection occurs just after the start of the * ownership test period or * test period (whichever is applicable) if, apart from this subsection, the test time would occur earlier.

    415-40(6)    
    A reference in subsection 165-129(1) to the * first continuity period is treated as being a reference to the period:


    (a) starting at the start of the * ownership test period; and


    (b) ending at the end of the income year in which the ownership test period starts.

    Exception

    415-40(7)    
    Disregard this section for the purposes of Subdivision 175-C (about tax benefits).

    Consolidated groups

    SECTION 415-45  

    415-45   Losses transferred to head companies of consolidated groups  


    Subdivision 707-C (Amount of transferred losses that can be utilised) does not apply to a loss transferred under Subdivision 707-A (Transfer of previously unutilised losses to head company), if:


    (a) just before the transfer, the transferor of the loss was a * designated infrastructure project entity; and


    (b) just after the transfer, the transferee of the loss is a designated infrastructure project entity.

    Subdivision 415-C - Designating infrastructure projects  

    Guide to Subdivision 415-C

    SECTION 415-50  

    415-50   What this Subdivision is about  


    To receive the special treatment for tax losses and bad debts under Subdivision 415-B , an entity must only engage in activities for the purposes of carrying on an infrastructure project designated by the Infrastructure CEO under this Subdivision.

    Designation is dependent on:

  • (a) criteria prescribed by the Minister; and
  • (b) a cap on the total estimated private capital expenditure that would be incurred for all provisionally designated and designated infrastructure projects.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Designating infrastructure projects
    415-55 Applications for designation
    415-60 Dealing with applications
    415-65 Provisional designation
    415-70 Designation
    Infrastructure project capital expenditure cap
    415-75 Infrastructure project capital expenditure cap
    415-80 Acceptance of estimates of infrastructure project capital expenditure
    Miscellaneous
    415-85 Review of decisions
    415-90 Information to be made public
    415-95 Delegation
    415-100 Infrastructure project designation rules

    Designating infrastructure projects

    SECTION 415-55   Applications for designation  

    415-55(1)    


    An entity may apply to the *Infrastructure CEO to have the Infrastructure CEO designate an * enterprise (the infrastructure project ) that is a proposed investment in, or enhancement to, infrastructure as being an infrastructure project in relation to which Subdivision 415-B applies.
    Note:

    The Infrastructure CEO holds office under the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008 .


    415-55(2)    
    The application must include an estimate of the * infrastructure project capital expenditure that would be incurred for the purpose of the infrastructure project.

    415-55(3)    
    Subsection (2) does not apply to * infrastructure project capital expenditure to the extent that the infrastructure project capital expenditure would be:


    (a) incurred by an * Australian government agency; or


    (b) funded by a grant from an Australian government agency.

    415-55(4)    
    The application must:


    (a) be in a form (if any) approved by the *Infrastructure CEO; and


    (b) be accompanied by the fee (if any) prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules.


    415-55(5)    


    A fee prescribed as mentioned in paragraph (4)(b) is payable to the *Infrastructure CEO, on behalf of the Commonwealth.

    SECTION 415-60   Dealing with applications  


    Dealing with applications

    415-60(1)    


    The *Infrastructure CEO must deal with applications made under this Division:


    (a) in accordance with the requirements prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules; or


    (b) if the infrastructure project designation rules do not prescribe any requirements - in the order in which the applications are made.


    415-60(2)    
    Without limiting paragraph (1)(a), the requirements the * infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that paragraph include:


    (a) requirements relating to the time at which or by which the *Infrastructure CEO must deal with an application; and


    (b) requirements relating to applications that, in the opinion of the Infrastructure CEO, are incomplete or do not contain sufficient information for the Infrastructure CEO to deal with the applications.


    415-60(3)    


    For the purposes of subsection (1), the *Infrastructure CEO deals with an application by:


    (a) designating the infrastructure project provisionally under section 415-65 , or deciding not to designate the infrastructure project provisionally under that section; or


    (b) designating the infrastructure project under section 415-70 or deciding not to designate the infrastructure project under that section (whether or not the Infrastructure CEO has previously dealt with the application by designating the infrastructure project provisionally under section 415-65 ).


    415-60(4)    


    Paragraph (1)(b) does not apply to the *Infrastructure CEO deciding whether to designate a * provisionally designated infrastructure project under section 415-70 .

    No designation after 30 June 2017 or later prescribed day

    415-60(5)    


    Despite anything else in this Subdivision, the *Infrastructure CEO must not provisionally designate the infrastructure project under section 415-65 , or designate the infrastructure project under section 415-70 , after:


    (a) 30 June 2017; or


    (b) a later day (if any) prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules.


    SECTION 415-65   Provisional designation  


    Provisional designation

    415-65(1)    


    The *Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, designate the infrastructure project provisionally for the purposes of this Division if:


    (a) the entity applies to have the Infrastructure CEO designate the infrastructure project in accordance with section 415-55 ; and


    (b) the Infrastructure CEO accepts the estimate of the * infrastructure project capital expenditure under section 415-80 ; and


    (c) the provisional designation would not breach the infrastructure project capital expenditure cap under section 415-75 ; and


    (d) the following conditions are satisfied:


    (i) the conditions prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules;

    (ii) if the infrastructure project designation rules do not prescribe any conditions - in the opinion of the Infrastructure CEO, the infrastructure is nationally significant infrastructure (within the meaning of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008 ); and


    (e) the infrastructure project is not a * designated infrastructure project.


    415-65(2)    
    The instrument of provisional designation must contain any details prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules.

    Amendment of instruments of provisional designation

    415-65(3)    


    The *Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, amend the instrument of provisional designation in accordance with any requirements prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules. The Infrastructure CEO must not amend the instrument in any other circumstances.

    415-65(4)    
    Without limiting subsection (3), the requirements the * infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that subsection include requirements relating to when an amendment must take effect, which may be a time before the amendment is made.

    Revocation of instruments of provisional designation

    415-65(5)    


    The *Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, revoke the instrument of provisional designation:


    (a) if the Infrastructure CEO has designated the project under section 415-70 , or decides not to designate the project; or


    (b) if the Infrastructure CEO has revoked the instrument of acceptance of the estimate under section 415-80 ; or


    (c) in the circumstances (if any) prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules.

    The Infrastructure CEO must not revoke the instrument in any other circumstances.


    415-65(6)    
    Without limiting paragraph (5)(c), the circumstances the * infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that paragraph include:


    (a) circumstances involving a failure by a prescribed entity to give prescribed information to the *Infrastructure CEO; and


    (b) circumstances involving a breach of conditions set by the Infrastructure CEO for the * provisionally designated infrastructure project to remain provisionally designated.


    415-65(7)    


    The * infrastructure project designation rules must prescribe matters to which the *Infrastructure CEO must have regard in setting conditions for a * provisionally designated infrastructure project to remain provisionally designated, if the infrastructure project designation rules provide for the Infrastructure CEO to set such conditions, as mentioned in paragraph (6)(b).

    SECTION 415-70   Designation  


    Designation

    415-70(1)    


    The *Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, designate the infrastructure project for the purposes of this Division if:


    (a) the entity applies to have the Infrastructure CEO designate the infrastructure project in accordance with section 415-55 ; and


    (b) the Infrastructure CEO accepts the estimate of the * infrastructure project capital expenditure under section 415-80 ; and


    (c) the designation would not breach the infrastructure project capital expenditure cap under section 415-75 ; and


    (d) the following conditions are satisfied:


    (i) the conditions prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules;

    (ii) if the infrastructure project designation rules do not prescribe any conditions - the conditions mentioned in subsection (2);

    (whether or not the infrastructure project is a * provisionally designated infrastructure project).


    415-70(2)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), the following are the conditions:


    (a) in the opinion of the *Infrastructure CEO, the infrastructure is nationally significant infrastructure (within the meaning of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008 );


    (b) in the opinion of the Infrastructure CEO, financial close on the infrastructure project has occurred or is imminent.


    415-70(3)    
    The instrument of designation must contain any details prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules.

    Amendment of instruments of designation

    415-70(4)    


    The *Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, amend the instrument of designation in accordance with any requirements prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules. The Infrastructure CEO must not amend the instrument in any other circumstances.

    415-70(5)    
    Without limiting subsection (4), the requirements the * infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that subsection include requirements relating to when an amendment must take effect, which may be a time before the amendment is made.

    Revocation of instruments of designation

    415-70(6)    


    The *Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, revoke the instrument of designation in the circumstances prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules. The Infrastructure CEO must not revoke the instrument in any other circumstances.

    415-70(7)    
    Without limiting subsection (6), the circumstances the * infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that subsection include:


    (a) circumstances involving a failure by a prescribed entity to give prescribed information to the *Infrastructure CEO; and


    (b) circumstances involving a breach of conditions set by the Infrastructure CEO for the * designated infrastructure project to remain designated.


    415-70(8)    


    The * infrastructure project designation rules must prescribe matters to which the *Infrastructure CEO must have regard in setting conditions for a * designated infrastructure project to remain designated, if the infrastructure project designation rules provide for the Infrastructure CEO to set such conditions, as mentioned in paragraph (7)(b).

    Infrastructure CEO must notify Commissioner

    415-70(9)    


    The *Infrastructure CEO must notify the Commissioner of a decision made by the Infrastructure CEO:


    (a) to designate the infrastructure project; or


    (b) to amend or to revoke the instrument of designation;

    within 28 days after making the decision.


    Infrastructure project capital expenditure cap

    SECTION 415-75   Infrastructure project capital expenditure cap  

    415-75(1)    
    Provisional designation, or designation, of the infrastructure project would breach the * infrastructure project capital expenditure cap under this section if, were the provisional designation or designation to occur, the total of the estimates accepted under section 415-80 for each infrastructure project that, just after the provisional designation or designation, would be:


    (a) a * provisionally designated infrastructure project; or


    (b) a * designated infrastructure project;

    would exceed the amount mentioned in subsection (2).


    415-75(2)    
    The amount is:


    (a) $ 25 billion; or


    (b) if the * infrastructure project designation rules prescribe a greater amount - that prescribed amount.

    415-75(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard so much of the amount of an estimate for an infrastructure project (the listed infrastructure project ) as relates to a part of the listed infrastructure project, if:


    (a) that part of the listed project is (or would be, were the provisional designation or designation mentioned in that subsection to occur):


    (i) a * provisionally designated infrastructure project; or

    (ii) a * designated infrastructure project; and


    (b) the listed infrastructure project is included on an Infrastructure Priority List.

    Note:

    For Infrastructure Priority Lists, see paragraph 5(b) of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008 .


    415-75(4)    
    In this Act:

    infrastructure project capital expenditure
    :


    (a) has the meaning given by the * infrastructure project designation rules; or


    (b) if the infrastructure project designation rules do not give infrastructure project capital expenditure a meaning - means capital expenditure.


    SECTION 415-80   Acceptance of estimates of infrastructure project capital expenditure  


    Acceptance of estimates

    415-80(1)    


    The *Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, accept the estimate of * infrastructure project capital expenditure if the following conditions are satisfied:


    (a) the conditions prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules;


    (b) if the infrastructure project designation rules do not prescribe any conditions - in the opinion of the Infrastructure CEO, the estimate is acceptable.



    Revocation of instruments of acceptance

    415-80(2)    


    The *Infrastructure CEO must not revoke the instrument of acceptance if the infrastructure project is a * designated infrastructure project.

    415-80(3)    


    Subject to subsection (2), the *Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, revoke the instrument of acceptance in the circumstances prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules. The Infrastructure CEO must not revoke the instrument in any other circumstances.

    415-80(4)    
    Without limiting subsection (3), the circumstances the * infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that subsection include:


    (a) circumstances involving a failure by a prescribed entity to give prescribed information to the *Infrastructure CEO; and


    (b) circumstances involving a failure by the applicant to amend the estimate in accordance with a request made by the Infrastructure CEO.


    415-80(5)    


    The * infrastructure project designation rules must prescribe matters to which the *Infrastructure CEO must have regard in requesting the applicant to amend the estimate, if the infrastructure project designation rules provide for the Infrastructure CEO to make such requests as mentioned in paragraph (4)(b).

    415-80(6)    
    If:


    (a) the * infrastructure project designation rules provide for the *Infrastructure CEO to request the applicant to amend the estimate; and


    (b) the applicant amends the estimate in accordance with such a request;

    the acceptance is treated, from the time the amendment is made, as being an acceptance of the amended estimate.


    Miscellaneous

    SECTION 415-85  

    415-85   Review of decisions  


    Applications may be made to the * AAT for review of the following decisions of the *Infrastructure CEO:


    (a) a decision not to designate the infrastructure project provisionally under section 415-65 ;


    (b) a decision to amend or revoke the instrument of provisional designation under section 415-65 ;


    (c) a decision not to designate the infrastructure project under section 415-70 ;


    (d) a decision to amend or revoke the instrument of designation under section 415-70 .

    SECTION 415-90  

    415-90   Information to be made public  


    The *Infrastructure CEO must comply with any requirements prescribed by the * infrastructure project designation rules in relation to the publication of information about:


    (a) * provisionally designated infrastructure projects and * designated infrastructure projects; and


    (b) the * infrastructure project capital expenditure cap under section 415-75 .

    SECTION 415-95  

    415-95   Delegation  


    The *Infrastructure CEO may, by instrument in writing, delegate any of the Infrastructure CEO ' s powers or functions under this Subdivision to an SES employee, or acting SES employee, referred to in paragraph 39(1)(a) or 39A(1)(a) of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008 .

    SECTION 415-100   Infrastructure project designation rules  

    415-100(1)    
    The Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules (the infrastructure project designation rules ) prescribing matters:


    (a) required or permitted by this Subdivision to be prescribed by the rules; or


    (b) necessary or convenient to be prescribed for carrying out or giving effect to this Subdivision.

    415-100(2)    


    Despite subsection 14(2) of the Legislation Act 2003 , the * infrastructure project designation rules may make provision in relation to a matter by applying, adopting or incorporating any matter contained in an instrument, or other writing, made by Infrastructure Australia as in force or existing from time to time.

    Division 417 - Timor Sea petroleum  

    Guide to Division 417  

    SECTION 417-1   What this Division is about  

    This Division alters the operation of this Act on several topics (outlined in the table of Subdivisions above) to address how the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty could affect the tax treatment, under Australian income tax law, of entities that undertake petroleum activities in the affected area.

    Subdivision 417-A - Introduction  

    SECTION 417-5  

    417-5   Object  
    The object of this Division is to give effect to Australia ' s obligations under the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty to provide, in relation to *transitioned petroleum activities, equivalent tax treatment to the tax treatment previously applying in relation to those activities.

    SECTION 417-10   Meaning of transitioned petroleum activities  

    417-10(1)    
    Transitioned petroleum activities are petroleum activities (within the meaning of the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty) that are undertaken:


    (a) pursuant to the terms of any of the following *production sharing contracts:


    (i) Production Sharing Contract JPDA 03-12;

    (ii) Production Sharing Contract JPDA 03-13;

    (iii) Production Sharing Contract JPDA 06-105;

    (iv) Production Sharing Contract JPDA 11-106; or


    (b) pursuant to the terms of a production sharing contract that:


    (i) comes into force after, or when, that treaty entered into force; and

    (ii) has the effect of replacing, and relates to the same area as, a production sharing contract mentioned in paragraph (a); or


    (c) in a part of the *Petroleum Exploration Permit WA-523-P permit area that, as a result of that treaty entering into force, ceased to be within the continental shelf of Australia.

    Note:

    This part of the Petroleum Exploration Permit WA-523-P permit area includes the Buffalo Oil Field.


    417-10(2)    
    The Petroleum Exploration Permit WA-523-P permit area is the area that, just before the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, was the subject of Petroleum Exploration Permit WA-523-P, granted under Part 2.2 of the Offshore Petroleum and Greenhouse Gas Storage Act 2006 on 27 May 2016.

    Subdivision 417-B - Capital allowances  

    SECTION 417-25   Deducting amounts for depreciating assets  

    417-25(1)    
    If:


    (a) you use a *depreciating asset, or you have it *installed ready for use, for a purpose of undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities; and


    (b) before the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, you or another entity used the asset, or you or another entity had it installed ready for use, for a purpose of undertaking transitioned petroleum activities;

    to the extent that you use the asset, or you have it installed ready for use,for that purpose, you are taken to use the asset, or to have it installed ready for use, entirely for a *taxable purpose.


    417-25(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection 40-25(2) , if:


    (a) you can deduct an amount for a decline in value of the asset; and


    (b) apart from subsection (1), you would not be able to deduct an amount, or would only be able to deduct a lesser amount, for that decline in value; and


    (c) the *transitioned petroleum activities are wholly or partly undertaken, or to be undertaken, in relation to the *JPDA;

    to the extent that the activities are so undertaken, or so to be undertaken, the part of the asset ' s decline in value that is attributable to your use of the asset, or your having it *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose is reduced to 10% of what it would be apart from this subsection.


    417-25(3)    
    For the purposes of Subdivision 40-C , if:


    (a) you can deduct an amount for a decline in value of the asset; and


    (b) apart from subsection (1), you would not be able to deduct an amount, or would only be able to deduct a lesser amount, for that decline in value;

    in working out the second element of the *cost of the asset, disregard any amount that you pay, and any expenditure that you incur, on or after the day on which the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force.


    SECTION 417-30   Balancing adjustments  

    417-30(1)    
    If:


    (a) before the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, you *held a *depreciating asset that you used, or had *installed ready for use, for a purpose of undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities; and


    (b) you stopped holding the asset when that treaty entered into force, because the asset ceased to exist at that time; and


    (c) the cessation occurred in connection with the entry into force of that treaty;

    the cessation is taken, for the purposes of this Act, not to be a *balancing adjustment event.


    417-30(2)    
    Section 40-285 does not apply in relation to a *depreciating asset you *held if:


    (a) before the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, you or another entity used the asset, or you or another entity had it *installed ready for use, for a purpose of undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities; and


    (b) on or after the day on which that treaty entered into force, a *balancing adjustment event occurs for the asset.

    Note:

    The effect of this subsection is to prevent an amount being included in your assessable income, or a deduction arising, because of a balancing adjustment event. The balancing adjustment event still occurs, so the operation of a section such as section 118-24 is unaffected.


    417-30(3)    
    It does not matter, for the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), whether the asset is also used, or *installed ready for use, for a purpose other than the purpose of undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities.

    417-30(4)    
    If, as a result of the *balancing adjustment event mentioned in paragraph (2)(b), another entity *holds the asset, the *cost of the asset tothe other entity is taken to be the asset ' s *adjustable value to you just before the balancing adjustment event occurs.

    SECTION 417-35   Allocating assets to a project pool  

    417-35(1)    
    You may choose to allocate to a project pool all the *depreciating assets (the pooled assets ) that:


    (a) you *held when the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force; and


    (b) before that treaty entered into force, you used, or had *installed ready for use, for a purpose of undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities.

    417-35(2)    
    You must choose by the day you lodge your *income tax return for the income year (the initial income year ) in which that treaty entered into force.

    417-35(3)    
    The choice is irrevocable.

    417-35(4)    
    If you make the choice, for the purposes of Division 40 and section 417-30 :


    (a) the pooled assets are taken to be a single *depreciating asset that you *hold; and


    (b) the single asset is taken to be used, or *installed ready for use, for the same purpose as the purpose for which the pooled assets were used, or installed ready for use, when the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force; and


    (c) the *cost of the single asset is taken to be an amount equal to the sum of the *adjustable values of all of the pooled assets when that treaty entered into force; and


    (d) the decline in value of the single asset is taken to be:


    (i) for the initial income year - 40% of its cost; and

    (ii) for the next income year - 40% of its cost; and

    (iii) for the income year after that next income year - 20% of its cost; and


    (e) a *balancing adjustment event cannot occur for the single asset; and


    (f) a *CGT event cannot occur for the single asset; and


    (g) amounts are not deductible, by you or any other entity, for declines in value of any of the assets allocated to the pool for:


    (i) the part of the initial income year occurring on or after the entry into force of that treaty; or

    (ii) any subsequent income year.

    417-35(5)    
    The transfer of a pooled asset to another entity does not affect the operation of subsection (4) in relation to the single asset.

    SECTION 417-40   Deduction for expenditure on mining site rehabilitation  

    417-40(1)    
    You can deduct, for an income year, 10% of expenditure on *mining site rehabilitation that you incur in that year if the rehabilitation relates to the undertaking (by you or another entity) of *transitioned petroleum activities in relation to the *JPDA.

    417-40(2)    
    However, expenditure on these things is not deductible under this section:


    (a) acquiring land or an interest in land or a right, power or privilege to do with land;


    (b) a bond or security, however described, for performing *mining site rehabilitation;


    (c) *housing and welfare.

    SECTION 417-45   Capital expenditure  

    417-45(1)    
    For the purposes of section 40-835 , if:


    (a) a *project amount was allocated to a project pool before the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force; and


    (b) the project amount was expenditure for a purpose of undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities in relation to the *JPDA;

    to the extent that the operation of the project in an income year relates to that expenditure, 10% of the project is taken to operate, in the year, for a *taxable purpose.


    417-45(2)    
    For the purposes of section 40-835 , if:


    (a) a *project amount was allocated to a project pool before the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force; and


    (b) the project amount was expenditure for a purpose of undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities otherwise than in relation to the *JPDA;

    to the extent that the operation of the project in an income year relates to that expenditure, the project is taken to operate, in the year, for a *taxable purpose.


    417-45(3)    
    If subsection (1) or (2) applies to one or more *project amounts allocated to a project pool, for the income year (the initial income year ) in which the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force or a later income year, calculate your deduction under section 40-830 or 40-832 for the project pool as follows:


    (a) calculate the amount of the deduction as if none of those project amounts had been allocated to the project pool;


    (b) add to that amount the following:


    (i) for the initial income year - 40% of the sum of those project amounts;

    (ii) for the next income year - 40% of that sum;

    (iii) for the income year after that next income year - 20% of that sum.

    SECTION 417-50   Transferring entitlement to deductions relating to a project pool  

    417-50(1)    
    You may choose to transfer, to a *corporate tax entity, either or both of the following:


    (a) all or part of your entitlement to deductions under Division 40 in relation to the declines in value of the single asset mentioned in subsection 417-35(4) (including future declines in value but not including declines in value that have already been deducted under that Division);


    (b) all or part of so much of your entitlement to deductions under section 40-830 or 40-832 as arises because of the operation of section 417-45 .

    417-50(2)    
    The choice:


    (a) must be in the *approved form; and


    (b) must be made no later than the day you lodge your *income tax return for the first income year for which all or part of your entitlement is to be transferred.

    417-50(3)    
    The choice cannot be revoked.

    417-50(4)    
    Only one choice can be made under this section in relation to the same part of the entitlement.

    417-50(5)    
    If you choose under this section to transfer to another entity all or part of your entitlement:


    (a) the other entity can make deductions arising from that entitlement or part; and


    (b) at the time of the choice, a *franking credit arises in the *franking account of the other entity; and


    (c) you can no longer make deductions arising from that entitlement or part.

    417-50(6)    
    The amount of the *franking credit under paragraph (5)(b) is an amount equal to the amount of the deduction transferred multiplied by the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ).

    Subdivision 417-C - Capital gains tax  

    SECTION 417-65  

    417-65   CGT events not created by Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entering into force  
    If:


    (a) before the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, you owned an intangible *CGT asset connected with undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities; and


    (b) your ownership of the asset ended when that treaty entered into force; and


    (c) the ending of your ownership occurred in connection with the entry into force of that treaty;

    the ending of your ownership is not a *CGT event.

    SECTION 417-70   Tax treatment of consideration for transferred entitlement to deductions or tax loss  

    417-70(1)    
    If:


    (a) you choose to transfer to another entity:


    (i) under section 417-50 , an entitlement to deductions; or

    (ii) under Subdivision 417-D , an amount of a *tax loss for an income year; and


    (b) you receive any consideration from the other entity for the entitlement to deductions or for the amount of the tax loss;

    then:


    (c) so much of the consideration as is given for the entitlement to deductions or for the amount of the tax loss is not included in your assessable income or your exempt income; and


    (d) a *capital gain does not accrue to you because of the receipt of the consideration.

    417-70(2)    
    If:


    (a) you choose to transfer to another entity:


    (i) under section 417-50 , an entitlement to deductions; or

    (ii) under Subdivision 417-D , an amount of a *tax loss for an income year; and


    (b) the other entity gives you any consideration for the entitlement to deductions or for the amount of the tax loss;

    then:


    (c) the other entity cannot deduct the amount or value of the consideration; and


    (d) the other entity does not incur a *capital loss because of the giving of the consideration.

    SECTION 417-75  

    417-75   Membership interests affected by transfer of entitlement to deductions or tax loss  
    If:


    (a) an entity chooses to transfer:


    (i) under section 417-50 , an entitlement to deductions; or

    (ii) under Subdivision 417-D , an amount of a *tax loss for an income year; and


    (b) another entity *holds, either directly or indirectly, a *membership interest in that entity:

    disregard a *capital loss from a *CGT event that arises in relation to the membership interest after the transfer takes effect, except to the extent that the entity can demonstrate that the loss is attributable to a matter other than the transfer.

    Subdivision 417-D - Transferring or applying tax losses  

    SECTION 417-90   Tax losses from transitioned petroleum activities  
    Transferring tax losses attributable to activities undertaken before the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force

    417-90(1)    
    If:


    (a) you have a *tax loss for the income year in which the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, or for an earlier income year; and


    (b) some or all of the tax loss is attributable to you undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities before that treaty entered into force;

    you may, for that income year or a later income year, choose to transfer all or any part of the amount of the tax loss that is so attributable to a *corporate tax entity (the transferee ) that is your *associate and either is an Australian resident or has a *permanent establishment in Australia.



    Transferring or applying other tax losses

    417-90(2)    
    If:


    (a) you have a *tax loss for an income year (the loss year ); and


    (b) some or all of the tax loss is attributable to you undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities; and


    (c) paragraph (1)(b) does not apply to those activities;

    you may, for that income year or a later income year:


    (d) choose to transfer all or any part of the amount of the tax loss that is so attributable to a *corporate tax entity (the transferee ) that either is an Australian resident or has a *permanent establishment in Australia; or


    (e) choose to apply all or any part of the amount of the tax loss that is so attributable as a deduction from your assessable income for any of the 4 income years preceding the income year for which you make the choice.

    417-90(3)    
    However:


    (a) the total amount chosen to be transferred or applied under subsection (2) for an income year must not exceed 10% of the total amount:


    (i) on which your liability for *foreign income tax under the law of Timor-Leste is required to be worked out; and

    (ii) that relates to undertaking those *transitioned petroleum activities during that year; and


    (b) you cannot make a choice under paragraph (2)(e) for an income year if you do not have a *franking surplus at the end of that year; and


    (c) the total amount chosen to be applied under paragraph (2)(e) for an income year must not exceed the sum of:


    (i) the amount of your franking surplus at the end of that year; and

    (ii) the product of the amount of that surplus and the *corporate tax gross-up rate.

    417-90(4)    
    In working out for the purposes of paragraph (3)(a) the total amount chosen to be transferred or applied under subsection (2) for an income year, disregard:


    (a) any part of the *tax loss attributable to deductions for assets allocated to a project pool under section 417-35 ; and


    (b) any part of the *tax loss attributable to deductions for assets allocated to a project pool under Subdivision 40-I , to the extent that the deductions relate to *project amounts to which subsection 417-45(1) or (2) applies.

    417-90(5)    
    In working out for the purposes of paragraph (3)(a) the total amount on which your liability for *foreign income tax under the law of Timor-Leste is required to be worked out, disregard the amounts of any deductions for tax paid under the law of Timor-Leste.

    417-90(6)    
    Paragraphs (3)(b) and (c) do not apply if you were a foreign resident (other than a *NZ franking company) for more than half of the income year for which the choice was made.

    SECTION 417-95   How choices are made  

    417-95(1)    
    A choice under section 417-90 :


    (a) must be in the *approved form; and


    (b) must be made no later than:


    (i) the day you lodge your *income tax return for the income year for which the choice is made; or

    (ii) a later time allowed by the Commissioner; and


    (c) must be given to the Commissioner within 30 days after you make the choice.

    417-95(2)    
    The choice cannot be revoked.

    417-95(3)    
    Only one choice can be made under this Subdivision in relation to the same part of a *tax loss.

    SECTION 417-100   The effect of choosing to transfer losses  

    417-100(1)    
    If you choose under this Subdivision to transfer an amount of a *tax loss for an income year (the loss year ):


    (a) the amount is taken to be a tax loss incurred by the transferee in the loss year; and


    (b) the transferee can deduct the amount in accordance with section 36-17 (which is about how to deduct a tax loss); and


    (c) at the time of the choice, a *franking credit arises in the *franking account of the transferee; and


    (d) you can no longer *utilise the amount, and you are taken not to have incurred the tax loss to the extent of the amount.

    417-100(2)    
    Despite paragraph (1)(a), if the loss year is the same as the income year of the transfer, the transferee is taken to have incurred the *tax loss in the income year before the loss year.

    Note:

    This rule is needed because Division 36 allows a tax loss to be deducted only if it was incurred in an earlier income year.


    417-100(3)    
    The amount of the *franking credit under paragraph (1)(c) is an amount equal to the amount of the *tax loss transferred multiplied by the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ).

    417-100(4)    
    Paragraph (1)(c) does not apply if you are not, and have never been, a *corporate tax entity.

    SECTION 417-105  

    417-105   The effect of choosing to apply losses to earlier income years  
    If you choose under this Subdivision to apply an amount of a *tax loss for an income year as a deduction from your assessable income for an earlier income year:


    (a) you can deduct the amount from your assessable income for the earlier income year; and


    (b) you can no longer *utilise the amount, and you are taken not to have incurred the tax loss to the extent of the amount.

    SECTION 417-110  

    417-110   Continuity of ownership and business continuity tests  
    Section 165-10 does not apply to a *tax loss that meets the requirements of:


    (a) paragraphs 417-90(1)(a) and (b); or


    (b) paragraphs 417-90(2)(a) and (b).

    Subdivision 417-E - Foreign income tax offset  

    SECTION 417-125   Foreign income tax offset  

    417-125(1)    
    If:


    (a) you are entitled to a *tax offset under Subdivision 770-A for an income year for *foreign income tax; and


    (b) the foreign income tax is payable on income you earned as an employee in relation to *transitioned petroleum activities undertaken, or to be undertaken, in relation to the *JPDA;

    the amount of the offset is to be worked out in accordance with the Taxation Code in Annex G under Article 13(b) of the Treaty (within the meaning of that Act), as if that Taxation Code applied in relation to the income.


    417-125(2)    
    Subdivision 770-B does not apply in relation to the amount of the offset.

    Subdivision 417-F - Transfer pricing  

    SECTION 417-140   Transfer pricing benefits relating to transitioned petroleum activities  
    Acquisitions of Timor Sea petroleum

    417-140(1)    
    An entity is taken, for the purposes of Division 815 , not to get a *transfer pricing benefit from conditions that operate between the entity and another entity in connection with their commercial or financial relations just because the entity acquires petroleum (within the meaning of the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty) from the other entity if:


    (a) the petroleum was produced by undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities in the Bayu-Undan Gas Field (within the meaning of that treaty); and


    (b) the price for the acquisition is the price that is used by, or agreed with, a *foreign government agency of Timor-Leste in relation to the acquisition for the purposes of administering the law of Timor-Leste relating to taxation.

    Supplies of goods and services

    417-140(2)    
    An entity is taken, for the purposes of Division 815 , not to get a *transfer pricing benefit from conditions that operate between the entity and another entity in connection with their commercial or financial relations just because the entity supplies goods or services to the other entity if:


    (a) the supply occurred pursuant to the terms of an *arrangement, connected with undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities, that:


    (i) was in force just before the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty was made; or

    (ii) is substantially similar to an arrangement that was in force just before that time; and


    (b) the price for the supply is the price that is used by, or agreed with, a *foreign government agency of Timor-Leste in relation to the supply for the purposes of administering the law of Timor-Leste relating to taxation.

    Division 418 - Exploration for minerals  

    Guide to Division 418  

    SECTION 418-1   What this Division is about  


    Generally, you are entitled to a tax offset for an income year for exploration credits issued to you for the income year.

    A greenfields minerals explorer can create exploration credits for an income year. Before creating exploration credits, the explorer must obtain an allocation of exploration credits from the Commissioner for the year. Exploration credits cannot be created for the 2025-26 income year or later income years.

    The exploration credits created for an income year cannot exceed an amount based on the explorer ' s greenfields minerals expenditure or tax loss for the year. If the explorer ' s exploration credits allocation for the year is smaller than that amount, the amount of exploration credits that the explorer can create will be reduced to sit within the allocation. However, any unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year generally would be carried over and so would increase the amount of exploration credits that the explorer can create.

    An exploration credit created by a greenfields minerals explorer can be issued to you if you have invested in the explorer. While the tax offset you receive for the exploration credit issued to you for an income year will apply to that income year, generally the investment that gives rise to that offset may have been made in that or the preceding income year.

    There are rules to ensure that exploration credits are not streamed to some investors rather than others. There are also rules to ensure that the total of the exploration credits you receive because of an investment (whether those credits are issued to you for the year in which you invest or the subsequent year) do not exceed the corporate tax that might be paid by the greenfields minerals explorer on that investment.

    The explorer is liable to pay excess exploration credit tax if the explorer issues exploration credits in breach of these rules.

    There is a cap on total allocations made by the Commissioner for each income year, but if part of the cap from the preceding year is unallocated it generally will be carried over. Allocations are made in the order in which applications for an allocation are made.

    If an exploration credit is issued to a corporate tax entity, it will give rise to a franking credit (rather than a tax offset).

    Note:

    Excess exploration credit tax is imposed by the Excess Exploration Credit Tax Act 2015 , and the amount of the tax is set out in that Act.

    Subdivision 418-A - Object of this Division  

    SECTION 418-5  

    418-5   Object of this Division  


    The object of this Division is to encourage investment in minerals exploration in Australia by allowing the benefit of losses from minerals exploration to flow to shareholders who share in the risk of the exploration.

    Subdivision 418-B - Junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset  

    Entitlement to junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset

    SECTION 418-10  

    418-10   Who is entitled to the tax offset - ordinary case  


    You are entitled to a *tax offset for an income year if:


    (a) an *exploration credit is issued to you under Subdivision 418-E for the income year; and


    (b) you are not:


    (i) a *corporate tax entity; or

    (ii) a trust (other than a trust in relation to which some or all of the liability of the trustee to tax is provided under subsection 98(1) or (2) or 99(2) or (3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ); or

    (iii) a partnership; or

    (iv) an *exemptentity (other than an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund); and


    (c) you are an Australian resident during the whole of that income year.

    SECTION 418-15   Who is entitled to the tax offset - life insurance company  

    418-15(1)    
    An entity is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year if:


    (a) the entity is a *life insurance company; and


    (b) an *exploration credit is issued to the entity under Subdivision 418-E for the income year; and


    (c) the entity is an Australian resident during the whole of that income year; and


    (d) were the exploration credit to be a *franked distribution made:


    (i) by the same entity that issued the credit; and

    (ii) in the same circumstances in which the credit was issued;
    the exploration credit would give rise to a *tax offset for the entity that would be subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of paragraph 67-25(1C)(b) or (1D)(b) .

    418-15(2)    
    If:


    (a) an *exploration credit is issued to a *life insurance company; and


    (b) paragraph (1)(d) applies in relation to only part of the exploration credit;

    this Division applies as if that part of the exploration credit, and the part of the exploration credit in relation to which that paragraph does not apply, were 2 separate exploration credits issued to the life insurance company.


    SECTION 418-20   Entitlement of member of a trust or partnership to a share of exploration credits  


    Members taken to be issued with exploration credits

    418-20(1)    
    If:


    (a) you are a *member of a trust or partnership during the income year; and


    (b) an *exploration credit is issued to the trust or partnership under Subdivision 418-E for the income year; and


    (c) the trust or partnership is not a *corporate tax entity; and


    (d) the trustee of the trust, or the partnership, determines that you are entitled to a share of the exploration credits issued to the trust or partnership for the income year; and


    (e) the trustee of the trust, or the partnership, gives you a statement, in accordance with subsection (4), informing you of that entitlement;

    you are taken, for the purposes of this Subdivision, to have been issued with an exploration credit under Subdivision 418-E , for the income year, of an amount equal to your share of the exploration credits issued to the trust or partnership for the income year.



    Effect of restrictions on distributions

    418-20(2)    
    Despite subsection (1), you are not taken, under that subsection, to have been issued with an *exploration credit under Subdivision 418-E to the extent that, if the exploration credit referred to in paragraph (1)(b) were a *franked distribution of the same amount made:


    (a) at the time of the determination referred to in paragraph (1)(d); and


    (b) in relation to the interest, held by the trust or partnership, in relation to which the exploration credit referred to in paragraph (1)(b) is issued to the trust or partnership during the income year;

    the terms and conditions under which the trust or partnership operates would not permit you to be paid the amount, or the proportion, of the franked distribution that would reflect your entitlement referred to in paragraph (1)(d).



    Anti-avoidance

    418-20(3)    
    Despite subsection (1), you are not taken, under that subsection, to have been issued with an *exploration credit under Subdivision 418-E to the extent that, if the exploration credit were a distribution to you, from the trust or partnership, of a *franked distribution that:


    (a) was of the same amount as the amount of your share, referred to in paragraph (1)(d), of the exploration credit referred to in paragraph (1)(b); and


    (b) was made:


    (i) by the same entity that issued that exploration credit; and

    (ii) in relation to the same interest in that entity; and

    (iii) in the same circumstances in which that exploration credit was issued; and


    (c) *flowed indirectly through one or more trusts or partnerships that were the same as the one or more trusts or partnerships that, apart from subparagraphs 418-10(b)(ii) and (iii) , would have been entitled to a *tax offset under this Subdivision in relation to:


    (i) that exploration credit; or

    (ii) another exploration credit from which that exploration credit is directly or indirectly derived;

    you would not be entitled to a tax offset under Division 207 in relation to the franked distribution.



    Statements to members

    418-20(4)    
    A statement referred to in paragraph (1)(e) must:


    (a) be in the *approved form; and


    (b) be given to you on or before the due date:


    (i) if the trust or partnership is an *investment body for *Part VA investments - for giving to the Commissioner an *annual investment income report in respect of the *financial year corresponding to the income year; or

    (ii) otherwise - for the trust or partnership to lodge its *income tax return for the income year.


    Reports to the Commissioner

    418-20(5)    
    A trust or partnership that has given one or more statements under paragraph (1)(e) relating to *exploration credits for an income year must give to the Commissioner, on or before the due date referred to in paragraph (4)(b) in relation to that income year, a report that:


    (a) relates to all the statements that the trust or partnership has given under paragraph (1)(e) relating to exploration credits for that income year; and


    (b) is in the *approved form.

    Amount of junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset

    SECTION 418-25  

    418-25   The amount of the tax offset  


    The amount of your *tax offset under this Subdivision for an income year is the sum of:


    (a) all the *exploration credits issued to you under Subdivision 418-E ; and


    (b) all the exploration credits taken under section 418-20 to have been issued to you;

    for the income year.

    SECTION 418-30   Reduced amount of the tax offset for certain trusts  

    418-30(1)    
    If an entity is a trust in relation to which some, but not all, of the liability of the trustee to tax is provided under subsection 98(1) or (2) or 99(2) or (3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , the amount of the entity ' s *tax offset under this Subdivision for an income year is:


    The amount of the entity ' s *tax
    offset apart from this section
    × Income taxed under subsection 98(1) or
                      (2) or 99(2) or (3)                  
    The *net income of the trust for the
    income year
     

    where:

    income taxed under subsection 98(1) or (2) or 99(2) or (3)
    is the amount of the *net income of the trust, for the income year, in relation to which the trustee is liable to tax under subsection 98(1) or (2) or 99(2) or (3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    418-30(2)    
    If:


    (a) an entity is a trust; and


    (b) one or more *members of the trust are taken under section 418-20 to have been issued with one or more *exploration credits for an income year;

    the amount of the entity ' s *tax offset, under section 418-25 or subsection (1) of this section, for the income year is reduced by the sum of amounts of the exploration credits taken to be issued to those members.


    Subdivision 418-C - Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit  

    SECTION 418-50   Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit - ordinary case  

    418-50(1)    
    A *franking credit arises in the *franking account of a *corporate tax entity (other than a *life insurance company) if:


    (a) an *exploration credit is issued to the entity under Subdivision 418-E during an income year; and


    (b) if the entity were not a corporate tax entity, the entity would be entitled to a *tax offset under Subdivision 418-B in relation to the exploration credit.

    418-50(2)    
    The amount of the *franking credit is the amount of the *tax offset to which the entity would be entitled under Subdivision 418-B if:


    (a) the entity were not a *corporate tax entity; and


    (b) no other *exploration credits were issued to the entity during the income year.

    418-50(3)    
    The *franking credit arises at the same time the *exploration credit is issued.

    SECTION 418-55   Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit - life insurance company  

    418-55(1)    
    A *franking credit arises in the *franking account of a *life insurance company if:


    (a) an *exploration credit is issued to the life insurance company under Subdivision 418-E during an income year; and


    (b) paragraph 418-15(1)(d) does not apply in relation to the exploration credit; and


    (c) if that paragraph were to apply in relation to the credit, the life insurance company would be entitled to a *tax offset under Subdivision 418-B in relation to the exploration credit.

    418-55(2)    
    The amount of the *franking credit is the amount of the *tax offset to which the *life insurance company would be entitled under Subdivision 418-B if no other *exploration credits were issued to the life insurance company during the income year.

    418-55(3)    
    The *franking credit arises at the same time the *exploration credit is issued.

    Subdivision 418-D - Creating exploration credits  

    SECTION 418-70   Entities that may create exploration credits  

    418-70(1)    
    An entity may create exploration credits for an income year if:

    (a)    the entity was a *greenfields minerals explorer in the income year; and

    (b)    the entity has an *exploration credits allocation for the income year or an *unused allocation of exploration credits from the immediately preceding income year.

    Note:

    The entity cannot have an unused allocation of exploration credits from the 2020-21 income year: see subsection 418-82(3A) .


    418-70(2)    
    The entity cannot create *exploration credits for an income year before income tax is assessed for the entity for the year.

    418-70(3)    


    The entity cannot create *exploration credits for the 2025-26 income year or a later income year.

    418-70(4)    
    A failure to comply with subsection (1) or (2) does not invalidate the creation of an *exploration credit.

    418-70(5)    
    An *exploration credit is to be expressed as an amount.

    418-70(6)    
    The entity cannot make more than one decision to create *exploration credits for an income year, and the decision is final and irrevocable.

    SECTION 418-75   Meaning of greenfields minerals explorer  

    418-75(1)    
    An entity is a greenfields minerals explorer in an income year if:


    (a) the entity has *greenfields minerals expenditure for the income year; and


    (b) during the income year, the entity is a disclosing entity (within the meaning of section 111AC of the Corporations Act 2001 ); and


    (c) during the income year, the entity is a *constitutional corporation; and


    (d) during the income year, and during the immediately preceding income year, neither:


    (i) the entity; nor

    (ii) any other entity that is *connected with or is an *affiliate of the entity;
    carried on any mining operations on a mining property for extracting *minerals (except *petroleum) from their natural site, for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

    418-75(2)    
    However, an entity is not a greenfields minerals explorer in an income year in which either or both of the following happens, or in any subsequent income year:


    (a) the entity fails to comply with a request of the Commissioner under subsection 418-80(5) ;


    (b) a determination under section 418-185 has effect.

    Note 1:

    Under subsection 418-80(5) , the Commissioner may request a report on an area in relation to which an entity has greenfields minerals expenditure.

    Note 2:

    Under section 418-185 , the Commissioner may determine that an entity that is, or has been, liable to excess exploration credit tax is not to be treated as a greenfields minerals explorer.


    SECTION 418-80   Meaning of greenfields minerals expenditure  

    418-80(1)    
    An entity ' s greenfields minerals expenditure for an income year is the sum of:


    (a) the amounts of any deductions to which the entity is entitled under section 40-25 for that income year in relation to declines in value that:


    (i) are declines in value of *depreciating assets used for *exploration or prospecting for *minerals in an area to which subsection (3) of this section applies; and

    (ii) are worked out under subsection 40-80(1) ; and


    (b) the amounts of any deductions for that income year to which the entity is entitled in relation to expenditure:


    (i) that is of a kind referred to in subsection 40-730(1) ; and

    (ii) in relation to which the entity satisfies one or more of paragraphs 40-730(1)(a) to (c) ; and

    (iii) that is expenditure on exploration or prospecting for minerals in an area to which subsection (3) of this section applies.

    418-80(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard a deduction to the extent that it relates to:


    (a) matters other than:


    (i) declines in value of *depreciating assets used for; or

    (ii) expenditure on;
    *exploration or prospecting for *minerals in an area to which subsection (3) of this section applies; or


    (b) exploration or prospecting for *petroleum or oil shale; or


    (c) activities (such as feasibility studies) undertaken to identify the viability of a mineral resource rather than its existence.

    418-80(3)    
    This subsection applies to an area:


    (a) that is in Australia; and


    (b) in relation to which the entity *holds a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right at the time of incurring the expenditure, or is the transferee under a *farm-in farm-out arrangement; and


    (c) that has not been identified as containing a mineral resource that is at least inferred in a report prepared in accordance with the requirements of:


    (i) unless subparagraph (ii) applies - the document that is known as the Australasian Code for Reporting of Exploration Results, Minerals Resources and Ore Reserves and that took effect on 20 December 2012; or
    Note:

    This document is commonly referred to as the JORC Code (2012 Edition).


    (ii) such other document as the regulations prescribe; and


    (d) that is not, and is not in, any of the following:


    (i) the coastal sea of Australia (within the meaning of subsection 15B(4) of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901 );

    (ii) an area referred to in subsection 960-505(2) .

    418-80(4)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (3)(c), disregard any mineral resource, identified in a report of a kind referred to in that paragraph, that does not include *minerals the *exploration or prospecting for which involved:


    (a) use of assets referred to in paragraph (1)(a); or


    (b) expenditure referred to in paragraph (1)(b).

    418-80(5)    
    The Commissioner may request an entity that is a *greenfields minerals explorer in an income year to prepare, within the period specified in the request, a report that:


    (a) is of the kind referred to in paragraph (3)(c); and


    (b) relates to an area in relation to which the entity has *greenfields minerals expenditure for the income year.

    The request may specify the manner in which, and the form in which, the report is to be prepared.


    SECTION 418-81   Meaning of exploration credits allocation for an income year  

    418-81(1)    
    An entity has an exploration credits allocation for an income year if the Commissioner makes a determination under section 418-101 allocating the entity *exploration credits for the income year.

    418-81(2)    
    The amount of the entity ' s exploration credits allocation for the income year is the amount of *exploration credits allocated to the entity under the determination.

    418-81(2A)    


    However, if no *exploration investment is made in the entity in the income year, the amount of the entity ' s exploration credits allocation for the income year is nil.
    Note:

    The entity must notify the Commissioner if no exploration investment is made in the entity in the income year: see section 418-135 .


    418-81(3)    
    If no determination is made allocating *exploration credits to the entity for the income year, the amount of the entity ' s exploration credits allocation for the year is nil.

    SECTION 418-82   When does an entity have an unused allocation of exploration credits from an income year  

    418-82(1)    
    An entity has an unused allocation of exploration credits from an income year if each of the following:

    (a)    the entity ' s *exploration credits allocation for the income year;

    (b)    the total credits issue for investment in the entity for the income year;

    exceeds the total amount of all *exploration credits created by the entity for the income year.


    418-82(2)    
    The amount of the unused allocation of exploration credits from the income year is the lesser of:

    (a)    the amount by which the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) exceeds the total amount of all *exploration credits created by the entity for the income year; and

    (b)    the amount by which the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) exceeds the total amount of all *exploration credits created by the entity for the income year.

    418-82(3)    
    If neither the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) nor (1)(b) exceeds the total amount of all *exploration credits created by the entity for the income year, there is no unused allocation of exploration credits from the income year, and the amount of any unused allocation of exploration credits from the income year is nil.

    418-82(3A)    


    Despite subsections (1) and (2) , the entity cannot have an unused allocation of exploration credits from the 2020-21 income year.

    418-82(4)    
    In this section:

    total credits issue for investment
    in the entity (the minerals explorer ) for an income year means the total of all *exploration credits that may be issued by the minerals explorer to all other entities in relation to *exploration investment made by those other entities in the minerals explorer in the income year if section 418-120 is complied with.


    SECTION 418-85   Exploration credits must not exceed maximum exploration credit amount  

    418-85(1)    
    An entity must not create *exploration credits for an income year of a total amount that exceeds the entity ' s *maximum exploration credit amount for the income year.

    418-85(2)    
    An entity ' s maximum exploration credit amount for an income year (the credit year ) is the smallest of the following amounts:

    (a)    the entity ' s *greenfields minerals expenditure for the credit year multiplied by the entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the credit year;

    (b)    the entity ' s *tax loss for the credit year multiplied by the entity ' s corporate tax rate for the credit year;

    (c)    the sum of:


    (i) the entity ' s *exploration credits allocation for the credit year; and

    (ii) the entity ' s *unused allocation of exploration credits from the income year immediately preceding the credit year.
    Note:

    The entity cannot have an unused allocation of exploration credits from the 2020-21 income year: see subsection 418-82(3A) .


    418-85(3)    
    In working out the entity ' s *greenfields minerals expenditure for the credit year for the purposes of paragraph (2)(a) , reduce that greenfields minerals expenditure by the sum of:

    (a)    all *recoupments that the entity receives in relation to the entity ' s greenfields minerals expenditure for the credit year; and

    (b)    if:


    (i) an amount has been included in the entity ' s assessable income because a *balancing adjustment event occurs for a *depreciating asset; and

    (ii) all or part of the amount of the deduction to which the entity is entitled under section 40-25 for the credit year in relation to the decline in value of the asset is included in the entity ' s greenfields minerals expenditure for that year;
    so much of the amount of that deduction as was included in that greenfields minerals expenditure.

    418-85(4)    
    In working out the entity ' s *tax loss for the credit year for the purposes of paragraph (2)(b) , reduce that tax loss by the sum of:

    (a)    all *recoupments that the entity receives in relation to the entity ' s *greenfields minerals expenditure for the credit year; and

    (b)    any part of the entity ' s tax loss for the credit year that would not be deductible in the income year immediately following the credit year; and

    (c)    if:


    (i) an amount has been included in the entity ' s assessable income because a *balancing adjustment event occurs for a *depreciating asset; and

    (ii) all or part of the amount of the deduction to which the entity is entitled under section 40-25 for the credit year in relation to the decline in value of the asset is included in the entity ' s greenfields minerals expenditure for that year;
    so much of the amount of that deduction as was included in that greenfields minerals expenditure.

    418-85(5)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (4)(b) , assume that the entity ' s assessable income for the income year immediately following the credit year is sufficient to allow the entity to utilise the whole of that *tax loss in relation to the credit year.

    418-85(6)    
    A failure to comply with this section does not invalidate the creation of an *exploration credit.

    418-90   (Repealed) SECTION 418-90 Modulation factors  
    (Repealed by No 15 of 2018)

    SECTION 418-95   Effect on tax losses of creating exploration credits  

    418-95(1)    
    If an entity creates any *exploration credits for a *loss year, the amount of the entity ' s *tax loss for the loss year is reduced by the amount worked out as follows:


      The sum of all the *exploration credits the entity creates for the *loss year  
      The entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the loss year  


    418-95(2)    
    However, if the amount worked out under subsection (1) equals or exceeds what would (apart from this section) be the entity ' s *tax loss for the *loss year, that tax loss is taken to be nil.

    Subdivision 418-DA - Exploration credits allocation  

    SECTION 418-100   Applying for an exploration credits allocation  

    418-100(1)    
    An entity may apply to the Commissioner for a determination under section 418-101 allocating *exploration credits to the entity for an income year.

    418-100(2)    
    The application must be made within 1 month before the start of the *financial year corresponding to the income year for which the allocation is sought.

    418-100(3)    
    The application must:


    (a) be *lodged electronically; and


    (b) be in the *approved form; and


    (c) include an estimate of:


    (i) the entity ' s *greenfields minerals expenditure for the income year; and

    (ii) the entity ' s *tax loss for the income year; and

    (iii) the entity ' s *corporate tax rate for the income year.

    418-100(4)    
    The Commissioner must give the entity:


    (a) if the Commissioner makes a determination under section 418-101 - a copy of the determination; or


    (b) if the Commissioner decides to refuse the application - notice of that decision.

    SECTION 418-101   Determination by the Commissioner  


    Determination allocating exploration credits

    418-101(1)    
    The Commissioner may make a written determination allocating *exploration credits of an amount specified in the determination to an entity for an income year.

    Circumstances in which the Commissioner must not make a determination

    418-101(2)    
    The Commissioner must not make a determination allocating *exploration credits to an entity for an income year if the Commissioner is not satisfied that:


    (a) there is a reasonable possibility that the entity will have:


    (i) *greenfields minerals expenditure of the amount estimated by the entity in the application, or greater; and

    (ii) a *tax loss of the amount estimated by the entity in the application, or greater; and

    (iii) the *corporate tax rate estimated by the entity in the application; and


    (b) the entity meets any other requirement prescribed under the regulations.

    Amount of the exploration credits allocated

    418-101(3)    
    The amount of the *exploration credits specified in the determination must be the smallest of the following amounts:


    (a) the entity ' s estimated *greenfields minerals expenditure for the income year multiplied by the entity ' s estimated *corporate tax rate for the income year;


    (b) the entity ' s estimated *tax loss for the income year multiplied by the entity ' s estimated corporate tax rate for the income year;


    (c) either:


    (i) 5% of an amount equal to the *annual exploration cap for the income year; or

    (ii) if another amount, or a method for working out another amount, is prescribed - the other amount.


    Determination not a legislative instrument

    418-101(4)    
    A determination made under subsection (1) is not a legislative instrument.

    SECTION 418-102   General allocation rules  

    418-102(1)    
    The total amount of *exploration credits allocated to entities for an income year by the Commissioner must not exceed the *annual exploration cap for the year.

    418-102(2)    
    The Commissioner must consider applications for *exploration credits from entities for an income year in the order in which the Commissioner receives the applications.

    418-102(3)    
    If the Commissioner receives more than one application at the same time, the Commissioner may decide the order in which the Commissioner considers the applications.

    418-102(4)    
    If the Commissioner would contravene this section by allocating *exploration credits to an entity for an income year of an amount worked out under subsection 418-101(3) then, despite that subsection, the amount of exploration credits allocated to that entity for the income year is to be the difference between the *annual exploration cap for the year and the total amount of exploration credits already allocated to other entities for the year.

    SECTION 418-103   Meaning of annual exploration cap  

    418-103(1)    
    The annual exploration cap for an income year is the following amount:

    (a)    for the 2017-18 income year - $15 million;

    (b)    for the 2018-19 income year - $25 million, plus the *exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year;

    (c)    for the 2019-20 income year - $30 million, plus the exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year and any other amount prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph;

    (d)    for the 2020-21 income year - $30 million, plus the exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year and any other amount prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph;

    (e)    

    for the 2021-22 income year - $25 million;

    (f)    

    for the 2022-23 income year - $25 million, plus the exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year;

    (g)    

    for the 2023-24 income year - $25 million, plus the exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year and any other amount prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph;

    (h)    

    for the 2024-25 income year - $25 million, plus the exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year and any other amount prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph.

    418-103(2)    
    If the total amount of *exploration credits allocated by the Commissioner for an income year is less than the *annual exploration cap for the year, the difference is the exploration credits remainder for the income year.

    SECTION 418-104  

    418-104   Failure to comply with this Subdivision does not affect allocation  


    A failure by the Commissioner to comply with this Subdivision does not invalidate a determination allocating *exploration credits to an entity for an income year.

    Subdivision 418-E - Issuing exploration credits  

    SECTION 418-110   Issuing exploration credits  

    418-110(1)    
    An entity that has created *exploration credits for an income year (the minerals explorer ) may issue an exploration credit for that income year to another entity (the investor ).

    418-110(2)    
    The *exploration credit issued to the investor for the income year may relate to:


    (a) *exploration investment made by the investor in the minerals explorer in the income year; or


    (b) exploration investment made by the investor in the minerals explorer in the immediately preceding income year.

    However, this rule is subject to the limitations imposed under sections 418-115 , 418-116 and 418-120 .


    418-110(3)    
    An *exploration credit is issued to an entity by giving the entity a statement in the *approved form.

    SECTION 418-111   Working out whether an exploration investment has been made in an income year  

    418-111(1)    
    An entity (the investor ) makes an exploration investment in another entity (the minerals explorer ) in an income year if:


    (a) *shares in the minerals explorer are issued to the investor by the minerals explorer:


    (i) on or after the day on which the Commissioner makes a determination under section 418-101 allocating *exploration credits to the minerals explorer for the income year; and

    (ii) before the end of the income year; and


    (b) those shares are *equity interests.

    418-111(2)    
    The amount of the exploration investment made by the investor in the minerals explorer in the income year is equal to the total amount paid up by the investor on the shares during the period mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

    SECTION 418-115   Who may receive an exploration credit and what is the pool from which the credit may be issued  

    418-115(1)    
    If *exploration credits are to be issued by an entity (the minerals explorer ) for an income year (the credit year ), work out each of the following by identifying whether scenario 1, 2 or 3 applies, and applying the rules for that scenario:


    (a) whether the minerals explorer can issue an exploration credit to another entity in relation to *exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year;


    (b) whether the minerals explorer can issue an exploration credit to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the income year immediately preceding the credit year (the preceding year );


    (c) the pool of exploration credits from which an exploration credit may be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year (this is called the issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the credit year);


    (d) the pool of exploration credits from which an exploration credit may be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the preceding year (this is called the issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the preceding year).

    Scenario 1 - no unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year

    418-115(2)    
    If there is no *unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year:


    (a) *exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to *exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year; and


    (b) no exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the preceding year.

    418-115(3)    
    In this scenario:


    (a) the issue pool for *exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the credit year is equal to the total amount of *exploration credits created by the minerals explorer for the credit year; and


    (b) the issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the preceding year is nil.

    Scenario 2 - exploration credits for the credit year exceed unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year

    418-115(4)    
    If the amount of the *exploration credits created by the minerals explorer for the credit year is more than the *unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year:


    (a) exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to *exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year; and


    (b) exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the preceding year.

    418-115(5)    
    In this scenario:


    (a) the issue pool for *exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the credit year is equal to the difference between the *unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year and the total amount of *exploration credits created by the minerals explorer for the credit year; and


    (b) the issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the preceding year is equal to the unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year.

    418-115(6)    
    However, no *exploration credit can be issued to another entity in relation to *exploration investment made by the entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year unless the *issue pool for exploration investment in the preceding year is exhausted.

    Scenario 3 - exploration credits for the credit year are equal to or less than the unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year

    418-115(7)    
    If the amount of the *exploration credits created by the minerals explorer for the credit year is equal to or less than the *unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year:


    (a) no exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to *exploration investment made by the entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year; and


    (b) exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the preceding year.

    418-115(8)    
    In this scenario:


    (a) the issue pool for *exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the credit year is nil; and


    (b) the issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the preceding year is equal to the total amount of *exploration credits created by the minerals explorer for the credit year.

    SECTION 418-116  

    418-116   Exploration credits issued must be in proportion to exploration investment  


    If an *exploration credit is issued by an entity (the minerals explorer ) for an income year to another entity (the investor ) in relation to *exploration investment made by the investor in the minerals explorer in an income year (the investment year ):


    (a) the proportion of the *issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the investment year that is issued to the investor as an exploration credit must be the same as the proportion of the total exploration investment in the minerals explorer in the investment year that is represented by the investor ' s exploration investment in the minerals explorer in the investment year; and


    (b) the minerals explorer must issue an exploration credit to every entity who made an exploration investment in the minerals explorer in the investment year.

    SECTION 418-120  

    418-120   The total of all exploration credits issued in relation to exploration investment  


    The total amount of all *exploration credits issued by an entity (the minerals explorer ) to another entity (the investor ) in relation to *exploration investment made by the investor in the minerals explorer in an income year (the investment year ) must not exceed the amount worked out using the following formula:


    The corporate tax rate for the minerals explorer for the investment year × The amount of the investor ' s *exploration investment in the minerals explorer in the investment year

    SECTION 418-125  

    418-125   Expiry of exploration credits  


    An *exploration credit created by an entity for an income year (the credit year ) expires if the entity does not issue the credit under this Subdivision on or before 30 June in the financial year that corresponds to the income year that immediately follows the credit year.

    SECTION 418-130   Notifying the Commissioner of issuing or expiry of exploration credits  

    418-130(1)    
    An entity that has created *exploration credits for an income year (the credit year ) must notify the Commissioner of the issuing or expiry of the credits.

    418-130(2)    
    The notice must:


    (a) be in the *approved form; and


    (b) be given to the Commissioner on or before the due date:


    (i) if the entity is an *investment body for *Part VA investments - for giving to the Commissioner an *annual investment income report in respect of the *financial year corresponding to the year immediately following the credit year; or

    (ii) otherwise - for the entity to lodge its *income tax return for the income year that immediately follows the credit year.

    SECTION 418-135   Notifying the Commissioner if no exploration investment in income year for which credits allocated  

    418-135(1)    
    An entity must notify the Commissioner if:

    (a)    the Commissioner has made a determination under section 418-101 allocating the entity *exploration credits for an income year; and

    (b)    no *exploration investment is made in the entity in the income year.

    418-135(2)    
    The notice must:

    (a)    be in the *approved form; and

    (b)    be given to the Commissioner within 30 days after the end of the income year.

    Subdivision 418-F - Excess exploration credits  

    SECTION 418-150  

    418-150   Excess exploration credit tax  


    An entity is liable to pay *excess exploration credit tax for an income year if the sum of the *exploration credits it issues for the income year exceeds the amount worked out under section 418-151 for the income year (the complying exploration credit amount ).
    Note:

    The tax is imposed by the Excess Exploration Credit Tax Act 2014 , and the amount of the tax is set out in that Act.

    SECTION 418-151   Complying exploration credit amount  

    418-151(1)    
    The complying exploration credit amount (which may be nil) for an income year is worked out by:


    (a) starting with the sum of the *exploration credits the entity issues for the income year; and


    (b) subtracting from the result of paragraph (a) the sum of any of those exploration credits covered by subsection (2); and


    (c) if the result of paragraph (b) exceeds the entity ' s *maximum exploration credit amount for the income year - subtracting from that result the amount of the excess.

    Note:

    The complying exploration credit amount is the sum of issued exploration credits that were issued (and created) in compliance with this Division. A liability arises under section 418-150 if the sum of all issued exploration credits exceeds this amount.


    418-151(2)    
    This subsection covers an *exploration credit to the extent to which either or both of the following apply to the credit:


    (a) the credit was issued in contravention of a requirement in this Division;


    (b) the credit was created in contravention of a requirement in Subdivision 418-D (other than section 418-85 ).

    Note:

    Because the maximum exploration credit amount from section 418-85 is taken into account in paragraph (1)(c) of this section, it is disregarded here.


    SECTION 418-155  

    418-155   Due date for payment of excess exploration credit tax  


    An entity ' s *excess exploration credit tax for an income year, as assessed under Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , is due and payable at the end of the day by which the entity is required under section 418-160 to give the return relating to the income year.
    Note:

    For assessments of excess exploration credit tax, see Division 155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 418-160  

    418-160   Returns  


    An entity that is liable to pay *excess exploration credit tax for an income year (the credit year ) must give the Commissioner a return relating to excess exploration credit tax, in the *approved form, within 21 days after the end of the *financial year corresponding to the income year that immediately follows the credit year.

    SECTION 418-165  

    418-165   When shortfall interest charge is payable  


    An amount of *shortfall interest charge that an entity is liable to pay is due and payable 21 days after the day on which the Commissioner gives the entity notice of the charge.
    Note:

    Shortfall interest charge is imposed if the Commissioner amends an assessment and the amended assessment results in an increase in some tax payable. For provisions about liability for shortfall interest charge, see Division 280 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 418-170  

    418-170   General interest charge  


    If:


    (a) *excess exploration credit tax or *shortfall interest charge payable by an entity remains unpaid after the time by which it is due and payable; and


    (b) the Commissioner has not allocated the unpaid amount to an *RBA;

    the entity is liable to pay the *general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:


    (c) starts at the beginning of the day on which the excess exploration credit tax or shortfall interest charge was due to be paid; and


    (d) ends at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:


    (i) the excess exploration credit tax or shortfall interest charge;

    (ii) general interest charge on any of the excess exploration credit tax or shortfall interest charge.
    Note:

    The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    SECTION 418-175  

    418-175   Refunds of amounts overpaid  


    Section 172 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the purposes of this Division as if references in that section to tax included references to *excess exploration credit tax.

    SECTION 418-180  

    418-180   Record keeping  


    Section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the purposes of this Division as if:


    (a) the reference in that section to a person carrying on a business were a reference to a *corporate tax entity; and


    (b) the reference in paragraph (2)(a) of that section to the person ' s income and expenditure were a reference to the entity ' s liability to pay *excess exploration credit tax; and


    (c) paragraph (5)(a) of that section were omitted.

    SECTION 418-185   Determining an entity not to be a greenfields minerals explorer  

    418-185(1)    
    The Commissioner may determine, by written notice given to an entity that is, or has been, liable to pay *excess exploration credit tax for an income year, that the entity is no longer to be treated as a *greenfields minerals explorer.

    418-185(2)    
    The determination takes effect from:


    (a) if, at the time the notice is given, the entity has not issued any *exploration credits for the income year (the credit year ) immediately preceding the income year in which the notice is given - the credit year; or


    (b) otherwise - the next income year.


    418-185(3)    
    If the entity or a *member of the entity is dissatisfied with a determination under subsection (1), the entity or member may object to it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .

    Subdivision 418-G - Other matters  

    SECTION 418-190   Annual impact assessments of this Division  

    418-190(1)    
    As soon as practicable after the end of each income year referred to in subsection (2), the Minister must cause to be conducted an impact assessment of the operation of this Division during that income year. The objective of the impact assessment should be to measure the additional *exploration or prospecting attributable to the Division.

    418-190(2)    
    The income years are as follows:


    (a) the 2017-2018 income year;


    (b) the 2018-2019 income year;


    (c) the 2019-2020 income year;


    (d) the 2020-2021 income year.

    418-190(3)    
    Each impact assessment must make provision for public consultation, including consultation with the industry.

    418-190(4)    
    The Minister must cause to be prepared a report of each impact assessment. The report must include any information made publicly available by the Commissioner under section 3F of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to *exploration credits allocated for the income year.

    418-190(5)    
    The Minister must cause a copy of a report of an impact assessment to be published on the Australian Taxation Office website as soon as practicable after the completion of the preparation of the report.

    PART 3-50 - CLIMATE CHANGE  

    Division 420 - Registered emissions units  

    Guide to Division 420  

    SECTION 420-1   What this Division is about  


    This Division deals with amounts you can deduct, and amounts included in your assessable income, because of these situations:

  • • you acquire a registered emissions unit;
  • • you hold a registered emissions unit at the start or the end of the income year;
  • • you dispose of a registered emissions unit.

  • TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    420-5 The 4 key features of tax accounting for registered emissions units

    SECTION 420-5  

    420-5   The 4 key features of tax accounting for registered emissions units  


    The purpose of income tax accounting for registered emissions units is to produce the same tax treatment, irrespective of your purpose in acquiring or holding the registered emissions units.

    There are 4 key features:

  • (1) You bring your gross expenditure and gross proceeds to account, not your net profits and losses on disposal of a registered emissions unit.
  • (2) The gross expenditure is deductible.
  • (3) The gross proceeds are assessable income.
  • (4) You must bring to account any difference between the value of your registered emissions units held at the start and at the end of the income year. This is done in such a way that:
  • (a) any increase in value is included in assessable income; and
  • (b) any decrease in value is a deduction.
  • Subdivision 420-A - Registered emissions units  

    SECTION 420-10  

    420-10   Meaning of registered emissions unit  


    A registered emissions unit is:


    (a) (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)

    (b)    a *Kyoto unit; or


    (c) (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)

    (d)    

    an *Australian carbon credit unit; or

    (e)    

    a *safeguard mechanism credit unit;

    for which there is an entry in a Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ).

    SECTION 420-12   Meaning of hold a registered emissions unit  

    420-12(1)    
    You hold a *registered emissions unit if you are the entity in whose Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) there is an entry for the unit.

    420-12(2)    
    However, if the entity (the nominee entity ) in whose Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) there is an entry for a *registered emissions unit holds the unit as nominee for another entity:


    (a) the other entity is taken to hold the unit; and


    (b) the nominee entity is taken not to hold the unit.

    SECTION 420-13  

    420-13   Meaning of primary producer registered emissions unit  
    A *registered emissions unit you start to *hold, hold or cease to hold is a primary producer registered emissions unit if:

    (a)    the unit is an *Australian carbon credit unit; and

    (b)    you are an individual; and

    (c)    your holding of the unit starts on or after 1 July 2022 because the unit:


    (i) is issued to you under the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 in relation to an eligible offsets project (within the meaning of that Act); or

    (ii) is transferred to you by a *carbon service provider that was holding the unit because the unit was issued to the provider on or after 1 July 2022 under that Act in relation to such a project; and

    (d)    at all times while the project is carried on, a *primary production business is carried on:


    (i) in the same area as the project; or

    (ii) in an area connected to an area in which the project is carried on; and

    (e)    at all times while the project is carried on, you are:


    (i) carrying on a primary production business covered by paragraph (d) ; or

    (ii) a beneficiary of a trust that is carrying on a primary production business covered by paragraph (d); or

    (iii) a partner in a partnership that is carrying on a primary production business covered by paragraph (d).
    Note 1:

    If you cease to hold the registered emissions unit, the unit is not a primary producer registered emissions unit for any new holder of the unit (see paragraph (c) ).

    Note 2:

    A consequence of paragraph (c) is that the unit will not be a primary producer registered emissions unit for you for a subsequent holding of it. That is, if after disposing of the unit you later reacquire it.

    Note 3:

    Different subparagraphs of paragraph (e) may apply to you at different times.

    Subdivision 420-B - Acquiring registered emissions units  

    SECTION 420-15   What you can deduct  

    420-15(1)    
    You can deduct expenditure to the extent that you incur it in becoming the *holder of a *registered emissions unit.



    Timing

    420-15(2)    
    You deduct the expenditure in the income year in which you start to *hold the *registered emissions unit.

    420-15(3)    
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)



    Australian carbon credit units

    420-15(4)    
    You cannot deduct under this section expenditure you incur in becoming the *holder of an *Australian carbon credit unit issued to you in accordance with the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 unless you incur the expenditure in preparing or lodging:


    (a) an application for a certificate of entitlement (within the meaning of that Act); or


    (b) an offsets report (within the meaning of that Act).

    No deduction if sale proceeds would not be assessable

    420-15(5)    
    You cannot deduct under this section expenditure you incur in becoming the *holder of a *registered emissions unit if, assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately after you started to *hold the unit, the proceeds of the sale would not have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25 .

    Note:

    Under the International Tax Agreements Act 1953 , for some foreign residents, the proceeds of the sale of a registered emissions unit are not assessable income in Australia.


    SECTION 420-20   Non-arm ' s length transactions and transactions with associates  

    420-20(1)    
    If:


    (a) an entity becomes the *holder of a *registered emissions unit; and


    (b) either:


    (i) the entity and the previous holder of the unit did not deal with each other at *arm ' s length; or

    (ii) the previous holder is the entity ' s *associate; and


    (c) the entity did not pay or give consideration equal to the *market value of the unit for becoming the holder of the unit;

    the entity is treated as if:


    (d) the entity had incurred expenditure in becoming the holder of the unit; and


    (e) the amount of the expenditure were equal to that market value.


    420-20(2)    
    This section does not apply if a *registered emissions unit *held by an individual just before the individual ' s death:


    (a) devolves to the individual ' s *legal personal representative; or


    (b) *passes to a beneficiary in the individual ' s estate.

    420-20(3)    


    This section does not apply to the issue of an *Australian carbon credit unit under the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 .

    SECTION 420-21   Incoming international transfers of emissions units  


    Unit held as trading stock or as a revenue asset

    420-21(1)    


    If:


    (a) any of the following conditions is satisfied:


    (i) - (ii) (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)

    (iii) a *Kyoto unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

    (iv) a Kyoto unit is transferred from your nominee ' s foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

    (v) an *Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 );

    (vi) an Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your nominee ' s foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ); and


    (b) as a result of the transfer, you start to *hold the unit as a *registered emissions unit; and


    (c) just before the transfer, the unit was your *trading stock or *revenue asset;

    you are treated as if:


    (d) just before the transfer, you had sold the unit to someone else for its *cost; and


    (e) you had, immediately after the sale, bought it back as a registered emissions unit for the same amount.

    Example:

    An Australian resident company carries on a business of trading in emissions units. The units are trading stock. The company owns 10,000 emission reduction units (a type of Kyoto unit) that are registered in New Zealand. 5,000 of those emission reduction units are transferred from the company ' s New Zealand registry account to the company ' s Australian registry account.

    The company is treated as having sold each unit to someone else at its cost just before it became a registered emissions unit. As the unit was previously held as trading stock, the unit ceases to be trading stock (section 70-12 ). The cost of the unit just before it became a registered emissions unit is included in the company ' s assessable income.

    The company is also treated as having bought 5,000 registered emissions units for the same amount. The company is entitled to a deduction for that amount (section 420-15 ).



    Unit held otherwise than as trading stock or as a revenue asset

    420-21(2)    
    If:


    (a) any of the following conditions is satisfied:


    (i) - (ii) (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)

    (iii) a *Kyoto unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

    (iv) a Kyoto unit is transferred from your nominee ' s foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

    (v) an *Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 );

    (vi) an Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your nominee ' s foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 ) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) or your nominee ' s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ); and


    (b) as a result of the transfer, you start to *hold the unit as a *registered emissions unit; and


    (c) just before the transfer, the unit was neither your *trading stock nor your *revenue asset;

    you are treated as if:


    (d) just before the transfer, you had sold the unit to someone else for its *market value just before the transfer; and


    (e) you had, immediately after the sale, bought it back as a registered emissions unit for the same amount.


    SECTION 420-22  

    420-22   Becoming taxable in Australia on the proceeds of sale of registered emissions units  


    If:


    (a) you start to *hold a *registered emissions unit at a particular time; and


    (b) assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately after you started to hold the unit, the proceeds of the sale would not have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25 ; and


    (c) you hold the unit until a later time (the taxable status commencement time ), where the following conditions are satisfied:


    (i) assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately before the taxable status commencement time, the proceeds of the sale would not have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25 ;

    (ii) assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else at the taxable status commencement time, the proceeds of the sale would have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25 ;

    you are treated as if:


    (d) immediately after the taxable status commencement time, you had bought the unit from someone else for its *market value; and


    (e) you had started to hold the unit immediately after the taxable status commencement time instead of at the time mentioned in paragraph (a).

    Note:

    Under the International Tax Agreements Act 1953 , for some foreign residents, the proceeds of the sale of a registered emissions unit are not assessable income in Australia.

    Subdivision 420-C - Disposing of registered emissions units etc.  

    SECTION 420-25   Assessable income on disposal of registered emissions units  

    420-25(1)    
    Your assessable income includes an amount that you are entitled to receive because you cease to *hold a *registered emissions unit.

    Timing

    420-25(2)    
    The amount is included in your assessable income for the income year in which you cease to *hold the unit.

    Source

    420-25(3)    
    An amount included in your assessable income under subsection (1) is taken, for the purposes of the *income tax laws, to have a source in Australia.

    SECTION 420-30  

    420-30   Non-arm ' s length transactions and transactions with associates  


    If:


    (a) an entity (the transferor ) ceases to *hold a *registered emissions unit; and


    (b) the cessation is because of the transfer of the unit to:


    (i) a Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ); or

    (ii) a foreign account (within the meaning of that Act);
    kept by another entity (the transferee ); and


    (c) either:


    (i) the transferor and the transferee did not deal with each other at *arm ' s length; or

    (ii) the transferee is the transferor ' s *associate; and


    (d) the transferee did not pay or give consideration equal to the *market value of the unit for the transfer of the unit;

    the transferor is treated as if the transferor were entitled to receive an amount equal to that market value because the transferor ceased to be the holder of the unit.

    SECTION 420-35  

    420-35   Outgoing international transfers of emissions units  


    If:


    (a) you stop *holding a *registered emissions unit; and


    (b) you do so as a result of the transfer of the unit to:


    (i) (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)

    (ii) if the unit is a *Kyoto unit - your foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) or your nominee ' s foreign account (within the meaning of that Act); or

    (iii) if the unit is an *Australian carbon credit unit - your foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 ) or your nominee ' s foreign account (within the meaning of that Act);

    you are treated as if:


    (c) just before the transfer, you had sold the unit to someone else for its *market value just before the transfer; and


    (d) you had, immediately after the sale, bought it back for the same amount.

    Example:

    An Australian resident company carries on a business of trading in emission units. The company owns 10,000 emission reduction units (a type of Kyoto unit) that are registered in Australia. 5,000 of those units are transferred from the company ' s Australian registry account to the company ' s New Zealand registry account.

    The company is treated as having sold each unit to someone else at its market value just before it stopped being a registered emissions unit. As the unit was a registered emissions unit, the market value is included in the company ' s assessable income (section 420-25 ).

    The company is also treated as having bought 5,000 emission reduction units for the same amount. As those units are trading stock, the company may be able to deduct that amount under section 8-1 .

    SECTION 420-40   Disposal of registered emissions units for a purpose other than gaining assessable income  

    420-40(1)    
    If:


    (a) an entity (the first entity ) incurs expenditure in:


    (i) becoming the *holder of a *registered emissions unit; or

    (ii) ceasing to hold a registered emissions unit; and


    (b) the first entity has deducted or can deduct the expenditure under section 420-15 or 420-42 ; and


    (c) the first entity ceases to hold the unit in a particular income year; and


    (d) the cessation is neither:


    (i) in gaining or producing the first entity ' s assessable income; nor

    (ii) in carrying on a *business for the purpose of gaining or producing the first entity ' s assessable income; and


    (e) section 420-30 (non-arm's length transactions and transactions with associates) did not apply to the first entity ceasing to hold the unit;

    the first entity ' s assessable income for that income year includes an amount equal to the amount the first entity has deducted or can deduct.



    Death

    420-40(2)    
    If:


    (a) the first entity is an individual; and


    (b) the cessation is because of the first entity ' s death; and


    (c) the *registered emissions unit devolves to the first entity ' s *legal personal representative;

    then:


    (d) the first entity ' s legal personal representative is treated as having bought the unit for the amount included in the first entity ' s assessable income under subsection (1); and


    (e) if the unit *passes to a beneficiary in the first entity ' s estate:


    (i) the first entity ' s legal personal representative is treated as having disposed of the unit for the amount included in the first entity ' s assessable income under subsection (1); and

    (ii) the beneficiary is treated as having bought the unit for the amount included in the first entity ' s assessable income under subsection (1).

    420-40(3)    
    If:


    (a) the first entity is an individual; and


    (b) the cessation is because of the first entity ' s death; and


    (c) the *registered emissions unit *passes to a beneficiary in the first entity ' s estate without devolving to the first entity ' s *legal personal representative;

    the beneficiary is treated as having bought the unit for the amount included in the first entity ' s assessable income under subsection (1).



    Transfer - treatment of acquirer

    420-40(4)    
    If:


    (a) the cessation is because of the transfer of the unit to another entity; and


    (b) neither subsection (2) nor (3) applies;

    the other entity is treated as having bought the unit for the amount included in the first entity ' s assessable income under subsection (1).


    420-40(5)    
    If subsection (4) applies to the transfer of the unit to another entity:


    (a) the first entity must inform the other entity that, as a result of subsection (4) applying, the other entity is treated as having bought the unit for a particular amount; and


    (b) the first entity must do so:


    (i) at, or as soon as practicable after, the time of the transfer; or

    (ii) by a later time allowed by the Commissioner.


    Source

    420-40(6)    
    An amount included in the first entity ' s assessable income under subsection (1) is taken, for the purposes of the *income tax laws, to have a source in Australia.

    SECTION 420-41  

    420-41   Ceasing to be taxable in Australia on the proceeds of sale of registered emissions units  


    If:


    (a) you start to *hold a *registered emissions unit; and


    (b) assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately after you started to hold the unit, the proceeds of sale would have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25 ; and


    (c) you hold the unit until a later time (the taxable status cessation time ), where the following conditions are satisfied:


    (i) assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately before the taxable status cessation time, the proceeds of the sale would have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25 ;

    (ii) assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else at the taxable status cessation time, the proceeds of sale would not have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25 ;

    you are treated as if:


    (d) just before the taxable status cessation time, you had sold the unit to someone else for its *market value; and


    (e) you had, at the taxable status cessation time, bought it back for the same amount.

    Note:

    Under the International Tax Agreements Act 1953 , for some foreign residents, the proceeds of the sale of a registered emissions unit are not assessable income in Australia.

    SECTION 420-42   Deduction for expenses incurred in ceasing to hold a registered emissions unit  

    420-42(1)    
    You can deduct expenditure to the extent that you incur it in ceasing to *hold a *registered emissions unit.

    Timing

    420-42(2)    
    You deduct the expenditure in the income year in which you cease to *hold the *registered emissions unit.

    420-43   (Repealed) SECTION 420-43 Deduction for charge imposed on the surrender of an eligible international emissions unit  
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)

    Subdivision 420-D - Accounting for registered emissions units you hold at the start or end of the income year  

    SECTION 420-45   You include the value of your registered emissions units in working out your assessable income and deductions  

    420-45(1)    
    You compare:


    (a) the *value of all *registered emissions units you *held at the start of the income year; and


    (b) the value of all registered emissions units you held at the end of the income year.

    Increase in value is included in assessable income

    420-45(2)    
    Your assessable income includes any excess of the *value at the end of the income year over the value at the start of the income year.

    Decrease in value is a deduction

    420-45(3)    
    On the other hand, you can deduct any excess of the *value at the start of the income year over the value at the end of the income year.

    Source

    420-45(4)    
    An amount included in your assessable income under subsection (2) is taken, for the purposes of the *income tax laws, to have a source in Australia.

    Disregard value of unit if sale proceeds would not be assessable

    420-45(5)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, disregard the *value of a *registered emissions unit you *held at the end of the income year if, assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately after you started to *hold the unit, the proceeds of the sale would not have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25 .

    Note:

    Under the International Tax Agreements Act 1953 , for some foreign residents, the proceeds of the sale of a registered emissions unit are not assessable income in Australia.


    SECTION 420-50   Value of registered emissions units at start of income year  

    420-50(1)    
    The value of a *registered emissions unit you *held at the start of an income year is the same amount at which it was taken into account under this Subdivision at the end of the last income year.

    420-50(2)    
    The value of the unit is a nil amount if the unit was not taken into account under this Subdivision at the end of the last income year.

    SECTION 420-51  

    420-51   Valuation methods  


    The value of a *registered emissions unit you *held at the end of an income year is worked out using one of the following methods:


    (a) the *FIFO cost method;


    (b) the *actual cost method;


    (c) the *market value method.

    Sections 420-55 and 420-57 tell you which method applies.

    420-51(2)    
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)


    SECTION 420-52  

    420-52   FIFO cost method of working out the value of units  


    The FIFO cost method for working out the *value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of an income year means that the value of the units is the *cost of the registered emissions units, and, for the purposes of the application of this Subdivision to you for the income year:

    (a)    

    if any of the registered emissions units are:

    (i) (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)

    (ii) eligible international emissions units (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ); or

    (iii) *Australian carbon credit units; or

    (iv) *safeguard mechanism credit units;
    you must account for those units on a first-in first-out basis; and


    (b) (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)

    (c)    if any of the registered emissions units are *Kyoto units that are not eligible international emissions units (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011 ) - you must account for those units on a first-in first-out basis.

    SECTION 420-53  

    420-53   Actual cost method of working out the value of units  


    The actual cost method for working out the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the income year means that the value of the units is the *cost of the units, and, for the purposes of the application of this Subdivision to you for the income year, you must not account for any of those units on a first-in first-out basis.

    SECTION 420-54  

    420-54   Market value method of working out the value of units  


    The market value method for working out the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the income year means that the value of the units is the *market value of the units at the end of the income year.

    SECTION 420-55   Valuation method for first income year at the end of which you held registered emissions units  


    Scope

    420-55(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you *held one or more *registered emissions units at the end of an income year; and


    (b) the income year is the first income year at the end of which you held one or more registered emissions units.

    Choice of method

    420-55(2)   
    You may choose one of the following methods:


    (a) the *FIFO cost method;


    (b) the *actual cost method;


    (c) the *market value method;

    for working out the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the income year.



    FIFO cost method applies if no choice made

    420-55(3)    
    If you do not make a choice under subsection (2) for the income year, the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the income year is worked out using the *FIFO cost method.

    Time for making choice

    420-55(4)    
    You must make a choice under subsection (2) before you lodge your *income tax return for the income year for which you make the choice.

    No revocation of choice

    420-55(5)    
    A choice made under subsection (2) cannot be revoked.

    420-55(6)    
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)


    SECTION 420-57   Valuation method for later income years at the end of which you held registered emissions units  


    Scope

    420-57(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) you *held one or more *registered emissions units at the end of an income year (the current income year ); and


    (b) the current income year is not the first income year at the end of which you held one or more registered emissions units.

    Choice of method

    420-57(2)    
    You may choose one of the following methods:


    (a) the *FIFO cost method;


    (b) the *actual cost method;


    (c) the *market value method;

    for working out the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the current income year.



    Previous method applies if no choice made

    420-57(3)    
    If you do not make a choice under subsection (2) for the current income year, the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the current income year is worked out using the method that applied to the most recent income year at the end of which you held one or more registered emissions units.

    Limitation on choice - before 2015-16 income year

    420-57(4)    
    If the current income year is before the 2015-16 income year, you must not make a choice under subsection (2) for the current income year if you have previously made a choice under that subsection for an earlier income year.

    Limitation on choice - 2015-16 income year or a later income year

    420-57(5)    
    If the current income year is:


    (a) the 2015-16 income year; or


    (b) a later income year;

    you must not make a choice under subsection (2) for the current income year unless:


    (c) the same method applied for each of the 4 most recent income years at the end of which you *held one or more *registered emissions units; and


    (d) the method mentioned in paragraph (c) is different from the method to which your choice for the current income year relates.

    Limitation on choice - change from FIFO cost method to actual cost method

    420-57(6)    
    You must not choose under subsection (2) the *actual cost method for the current income year if the *FIFO cost method applied for the most recent income year at the end of which you *held one or more *registered emissions units.

    Time for making choice

    420-57(7)    
    You must make a choice under subsection (2) before you lodge your *income tax return for the income year for which you make the choice.

    No revocation of choice

    420-57(8)    
    A choice made under subsection (2) cannot be revoked.

    420-57(9)    
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)


    420-58   (Repealed) SECTION 420-58 Value of registered emissions units at end of income year - certain free carbon units  
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)

    SECTION 420-60   Cost of registered emissions units  

    420-60(1)    
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)


    420-60(2)    
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)



    Australian carbon credit units

    420-60(3)    
    If an *Australian carbon credit unit was issued to you under the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 , the cost of the unit is its *market value immediately after you began to *hold the unit.

    Other registered emissions units

    420-60(4)    


    The cost of a *registered emissions unit (other than an *Australian carbon credit unit to which subsection (3) applies) is the total of the expenditure that you:


    (a) incurred in becoming the *holder of the unit; and


    (b) can deduct under section 420-15 .


    SECTION 420-62  

    420-62   Primary producer registered emissions units  
    This Subdivision (other than section 420-60 ) does not apply to you in relation to a *primary producer registered emissions unit.

    Subdivision 420-E - Exclusivity of Division  

    SECTION 420-65   Exclusivity of deductions etc.  


    Expenditure incurred in becoming the holder of a registered emissions unit

    420-65(1)    
    You cannot deduct under any provision of this Act outside this Division any expenditure to the extent that you incur it in becoming the *holder of a *registered emissions unit.

    420-65(2)    
    To the extent you incur expenditure in becoming the *holder of a *registered emissions unit, the expenditure is not to be taken into account in working out:

    (a)    an amount you can deduct; or

    (b)    an amount included in your assessable income;

    under any provision of this Act outside this Division.


    420-65(3)    
    (Repealed by No 83 of 2014)



    Australian carbon credit units

    420-65(4)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) do not affect the application of a provision of this Act outside this Division to expenditure you incur in becoming the *holder of an *Australian carbon credit unit issued to you in accordance with the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 if you do not incur the expenditure in preparing or lodging:

    (a)    an application for a certificate of entitlement (within the meaning of that Act); or

    (b)    an offsets report (within the meaning of that Act).

    420-65(5)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) do not affect the operation of Division 30 (deductions for gifts and contributions).

    Note:

    If you make a gift or contribution, Division 30 applies in the normal way to determine whether you can deduct the amount of the gift or contribution.



    Expenditure incurred in ceasing to hold a registered emissions unit

    420-65(6)    
    You cannot deduct under any provision of this Act outside this Division any expenditure to the extent that you incur it in ceasing to *hold a *registered emissions unit.

    Primary producer registered emissions units

    420-65(7)    
    Subsections (1) , (2) and (6) do not affect the application of:

    (a)    Division 392 (long-term averaging of primary producers ' tax liability); or

    (b)    Division 393 (farm management deposits);

    to expenditure to the extent that you incur it in becoming the *holder of, or ceasing to hold, a *primary producer registered emissions unit.


    SECTION 420-70   Exclusivity of assessable income etc.  

    420-70(1)    
    An amount that you are entitled to receive because you ceased to *hold a *registered emissions unit is not to be:

    (a)    included in your assessable income; or

    (b)    taken into account in working out your assessable income; or

    (c)    taken into account in working out an amount you can deduct;

    under any provision of this Act outside this Division.


    420-70(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not affect the operation of Division 6 so far as that Division provides for the significance of residence or source for the assessability of ordinary and statutory income.

    Note:

    An amount included in your assessable income under this Division may be ordinary or statutory income for the purposes of Division 6 .


    420-70(3)    


    Subsections (1) and (4) do not affect the application of:

    (a)    Division 392 (long-term averaging of primary producers ' tax liability); or

    (b)    Division 393 (farm management deposits);

    to an amount that you are entitled to receive because you ceased to *hold a *primary producer registered emissions unit.



    Australian carbon credit units

    420-70(4)    
    An amount is not to be included in your assessable income under any provision of this Act outside this Division because an *Australian carbon credit unit was issued to you in accordance with the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 .

    Note 1:

    A capital gain or capital loss you make from a registered emissions unit is disregarded (subsection 118-15(1) ).

    Note 2:

    A capital gain or capital loss you make from a right to receive an Australian carbon credit unit is disregarded (subsection 118-15(3) ).


    PART 3-80 - ROLL-OVERS APPLYING TO ASSETS GENERALLY  

    Division 615 - Roll-overs for business restructures  

    Guide to Division 615  

    SECTION 615-1   What this Division is about  


    You can choose for transactions under a scheme to restructure a company ' s or unit trust ' s business to be tax neutral if, under the scheme:

  • (a) you cease to own shares in the company or units in the trust; and
  • (b) in exchange, you become the owner of new shares in another company.
  • Subdivision 615-A - Choosing to obtain roll-overs  

    SECTION 615-5   Disposing of interests in one entity for shares in a company  

    615-5(1)    
    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:


    (a) you are a *member of a company or a unit trust (the original entity ); and


    (b) you and at least one other entity (the exchanging members ) own all the *shares or units in it; and


    (c) under a *scheme for reorganising its affairs, the exchanging members *dispose ofall their shares or units in it to a company (the interposed company ) in exchange for shares in the interposed company (and nothing else); and


    (d) the requirements in Subdivision 615-B are satisfied.

    Note 1:

    For paragraph (c), see section 124-20 if an exchanging member uses a share sale facility.

    Note 2:

    After the completion of the scheme, later dealings between the interposed company and the original entity may be subject to the rules for consolidated groups (see Part 3-90 ).


    615-5(2)    
    You are taken to have chosen to obtain the roll-over if:


    (a) immediately before the completion time (see section 615-15 ), the original entity is the *head company of a *consolidated group; and


    (b) immediately after the completion time, the interposed company is the head company of the group.

    Note:

    The consolidated group continues in existence because of section 703-70 .


    SECTION 615-10   Redeeming or cancelling interests in one entity for shares in a company  

    615-10(1)    
    You can choose to obtain a roll-over if you are a *member of a company or a unit trust (the original entity ), and under a *scheme for reorganising its affairs:


    (a) a company (the interposed company ) *acquires one or more, but not all, of the *shares or units in the original entity; and


    (b) these are the first shares or units that the interposed company acquires in the original entity; and


    (c) you and at least one other entity (the exchanging members ) own all the remaining shares or units in the original entity; and


    (d) those remaining shares or units are redeemed or cancelled; and


    (e) each exchanging member receives shares (and nothing else) in the interposed company in return for their shares or units in the original entity being redeemed or cancelled;

    and the requirements in Subdivision 615-B are satisfied.

    Note:

    For paragraph (e), see section 124-20 if an exchanging member uses a share sale facility.


    615-10(2)    
    You are taken to have chosen to obtain the roll-over if:


    (a) immediately before the completion time (see section 615-15 ), the original entity is the *head company of a *consolidated group; and


    (b) immediately after the completion time, the interposed company is the head company of the group.

    Note:

    The consolidated group continues in existence because of section 703-70 .


    615-10(3)    
    The original entity, or its trustee if it is a unit trust, can issue other *shares or units to the interposed company as part of the *scheme.

    Note:

    Some of the interposed company ' s shares or units in the original entity may be taken to be acquired before 20 September 1985: see section 615-65 .


    Subdivision 615-B - Further requirements for choosing to obtain roll-overs  

    SECTION 615-15  

    615-15   Interposed company must own all the original interests  


    The interposed company must own all the *shares or units in the original entity immediately after the time (the completion time ) all the exchanging members have had their shares or units in the original entity disposed of, redeemed or cancelled under the *scheme.

    SECTION 615-20   Requirements relating to your interests in the original entity  

    615-20(1)    
    Immediately after the completion time, each exchanging member must own:


    (a) a whole number of *shares in the interposed company; and


    (b) a percentage of the shares in the interposed company that were issued to all the exchanging members that is equal to the percentage of the shares or units in the original entity that were:


    (i) owned by the member; and

    (ii) disposed of, redeemed or cancelled under the *scheme.

    615-20(2)    
    The following ratios must be equal:


    (a) the ratio of:


    (i) the *market value of each exchanging member ' s *shares in the interposed company; to

    (ii) the market value of the shares in the interposed company issued to all the exchanging members (worked out immediately after the completion time);


    (b) the ratio of:


    (i) the market value of that member ' s shares or units in the original entity that were disposed of, redeemed or cancelled under the *scheme; to

    (ii) the market value of all the shares or units in the original entity that were disposed of, redeemed or cancelled under the scheme (worked out immediately before the first disposal, redemption or cancellation).
    Example 1:

    There are 100 shares in A Pty Ltd (the original entity), all having the same rights. B Pty Ltd (the interposed company) acquires all the shares in A by issuing each shareholder in A 10 shares in itself for each share they have in A. All shares in B have the same rights. Bill owned 15 shares in A and received 150 shares in B in exchange.

    Example 2:

    There are 1,000 units in the A unit trust (the original entity), all having the same rights. 2 new units in A are issued to B Pty Ltd (the interposed company), and all other units in A are cancelled. Each unitholder in A is issued 10 shares in B for each 100 units they have in A. All shares in B have the same rights. Alison owned 200 units in A and received 20 shares in B in exchange.


    615-20(3)    
    Either:


    (a) you are an Australian resident at the time your *shares or units in the original entity are disposed of, redeemed or cancelled under the *scheme; or


    (b) if you are a foreign resident at that time:


    (i) your shares or units in the original entity were *taxable Australian property immediately before that time; and

    (ii) your shares in the interposed company are taxable Australian property immediately after the completion time.

    SECTION 615-25   Requirements relating to the interposed company  

    615-25(1)    
    The *shares issued in the interposed company must not be *redeemable shares.

    615-25(2)    
    Each exchanging member who is issued *shares in the interposed company must own the shares from the time they are issued until at least the completion time.

    615-25(3)    
    Immediately after the completion time:


    (a) the exchanging members must own all the *shares in the interposed company; or


    (b) entities other than those members must own no more than 5 shares in the interposed company, and the *market value of those shares expressed as a percentage of the market value of all the shares in the interposed company must be such that it is reasonable to treat the exchanging members as owning all the shares.

    SECTION 615-30   Interposed company must make a particular choice  

    615-30(1)    
    Unless subsection (2) applies, the interposed company must choose that section 615-65 applies.

    615-30(2)    
    The interposed company must choose that a *consolidated group continues in existence at and after the completion time with the interposed company as its *head company, if:


    (a) immediately before the completion time, the consolidated group consisted of the original entity as head company and one or more other members (the other group members ); and


    (b) immediately after the completion time, the interposed company is the head company of a *consolidatable group consisting only of itself and the other group members.

    Note:

    Sections 703-65 to 703-80 deal with the effects of the choice for the consolidated group.


    615-30(3)    
    A choice under subsection (1) or (2) must be made:


    (a) within 2 months after the completion time, if the choice is under subsection (1); or


    (b) within 28 days after the completion time, if the choice is under subsection (2); or


    (c) within such further time as the Commissioner allows.

    The choice cannot be revoked.


    615-30(4)    
    The way the interposed company prepares its *income tax returns is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

    SECTION 615-35  

    615-35   ADI restructures - disregard certain preference shares  


    For the purposes of this Division, disregard any *shares in the original entity that can be disregarded under subsection 703-37(4) if:


    (a) the interposed company is a non-operating holding company within the meaning of the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999 ; and


    (b) a restructure instrument under Part 4A of that Act is in force in relation to the interposed company; and


    (c) because of the restructure to which the instrument relates, an *ADI becomes a subsidiary (within the meaning of that Act) of the interposed company; and


    (d) the original entity is:


    (i) the ADI; or

    (ii) part of an extended licensed entity (within the meaning of the *prudential standards) that includes the ADI.

    Subdivision 615-C - Consequences of roll-overs  

    SECTION 615-40  

    615-40   CGT consequences  


    The consequences set out in Subdivision 124-A also apply to a roll-over under this Division as if that roll-over were a roll-over covered by Division 124 (about replacement-asset roll-overs).
    Note:

    Those consequences generally involve:

  • (a) disregarding a capital gain or capital loss you make from the disposal, redemption or cancellation of your shares or units in the original entity; and
  • (b) working out the first element of the cost base of each of your new shares in the interposed entity by reference to the cost bases of your shares or units in the original entity.
  • SECTION 615-45  

    615-45   Additional consequences - deferral of profit or loss  


    The additional consequences in sections 615-50 and 615-55 apply if:


    (a) under this Division:


    (i) you are taken to have chosen to obtain the roll-over; or

    (ii) you otherwise choose to obtain the roll-over; and


    (b) if subparagraph (a)(ii) applies to you, you choose for these additional consequences to apply; and


    (c) some or all of your *shares or units in the original entity at the time immediately before they were:


    (i) disposed of as described in paragraph 615-5(1)(c) ; or

    (ii) redeemed or cancelled as described in paragraph 615-10(1)(d) ;
    had the character of being your *trading stock or *revenue assets; and


    (d) the shares in the interposed company that you acquired in return for those shares or units have the same character.

    Note 1:

    Apply this section separately for assets of each character.

    Note 2:

    The CGT exemption for trading stock does not prevent you obtaining the roll-over (see section 615-60 ).

    SECTION 615-50   Trading stock  

    615-50(1)    
    The amount included in your assessable income because of the disposal, redemption or cancellation of each of your *shares or units described in paragraph 615-45(c) that was your *trading stock at the time mentioned in that paragraph is equal to:


    (a) if the share or unit had been your trading stock ever since the start of the income year that included that time - the total of:


    (i) its *value as trading stock at the start of the income year; and

    (ii) the amount (if any) by which its cost had increased since the start of the income year; or


    (b) otherwise - its cost at that time.

    615-50(2)    
    For each of the *shares that you acquired as described in paragraph 615-45(d) that is your *trading stock, you are taken to have paid:


      Total included in your assessable income under subsection (1) for your corresponding *shares or units in the original entity  
      Number of your shares acquired as described in paragraph 615-45(d) that are your *trading stock  


    615-50(3)    
    For the purposes of Division 70 (about trading stock), you, the original entity and the interposed company are taken to have dealt with each other in the ordinary course of *business and at *arm ' s length for each of the transactions referred to in paragraph 615-5(1)(c) or 615-10(1)(d) or (e) .

    SECTION 615-55   Revenue assets  

    615-55(1)    
    For each of your *shares or units that:


    (a) is described in paragraph 615-45(c) ; and


    (b) was a *revenue asset immediately before its disposal, redemption or cancellation;

    your gross proceeds for that disposal, redemption or cancellation are taken to be the amount you would have needed to have received in order to have a nil profit and nil loss for that disposal, redemption or cancellation.


    615-55(2)    
    For the purpose of calculating any profit or loss on a future disposal, cessation of ownership, or other realisation of a *share that:


    (a) you acquired as described in paragraph 615-45(d) ; and


    (b) is a *revenue asset;

    you are taken to have paid the following for your acquisition of that share


      Total worked out under subsection (1) for your corresponding *shares or units in the original entity  
      Number of your shares acquired as described in paragraph 615-45(d) that are *revenue assets  


    SECTION 615-60  

    615-60   Disregard CGT exemption for trading stock  


    For the purposes of this Division, disregard section 118-25 (which gives a CGT exemption for trading stock).

    Subdivision 615-D - Consequences for the interposed company  

    SECTION 615-65   Consequences for the interposed company  

    615-65(1)    
    This section applies if the interposed company so chooses under subsection 615-30(1) .

    615-65(2)    
    A number of the *shares or units that the interposed company owns in the original entity (immediately after the completion time) are taken to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 if any of the original entity ' s assets as at the completion time were acquired by it before that day.

    Note:

    Generally, a capital gain or capital loss you make from a CGT asset that you acquired before 20 September 1985 can be disregarded: see Division 104 .


    615-65(3)    
    That number (worked out as at the completion time) is the greatest possible whole number that (when expressed as a percentage of all the *shares or units) does not exceed:


    (a) the *market value of the original entity ' s assets that it *acquired before 20 September 1985; less


    (b) its liabilities (if any) in respect of those assets;

    expressed as a percentage of the market value of all the original entity ' s assets less all of its liabilities.


    615-65(4)    
    The first element of the *cost base of the interposed company ' s *shares or units in the original entity that are not taken to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 is:


    (a) the total of the cost bases (as at the completion time) of the original entity ' s assets that it acquired on or after that day; less


    (b) its liabilities (if any) in respect of those assets.

    The first element of the *reduced cost base of those shares or units is worked out similarly.


    615-65(5)    
    A liability of the original entity that is not a liability in respect of a specific asset or assets of the original entity is taken to be a liability in respect of all the assets of the original entity.

    Note:

    An example is a bank overdraft.


    615-65(6)    
    If a liability is in respect of 2 or more assets, the proportion of the liability that is in respect of any one of those assets is equal to:


      The *market value of the asset  
      Total market value of all the assets that the liability is in respect of  


    Division 620 - Assets of wound-up corporation passing to corporation with not significantly different ownership  

    Subdivision 620-A - Corporations covered by Subdivision 124-I  

    Guide to Subdivision 620-A

    SECTION 620-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    There are tax-neutral consequences of a body, that is incorporated under one law and ceases to exist, disposing of an asset to a company incorporated under another law, if the ownership of the company is not significantly different from the ownership of the body.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Application and object of this Subdivision
    620-10 Application
    620-15 Object
    CGT consequences
    620-20 Disregard body ' s capital gains and losses from CGT assets
    620-25 Cost base and pre-CGT status of CGT asset for company
    Consequences for depreciating assets
    620-30 Roll-over relief for balancing adjustment events
    Consequences for trading stock
    620-40 Body taken to have sold trading stock to company
    Consequences for revenue assets
    620-50 Body taken to have sold revenue assets to company

    Application and object of this Subdivision

    SECTION 620-10  

    620-10   Application  


    This Subdivision applies to a body that is incorporated under one law and ceases to exist, and to a company incorporated under another law, if section 124-525 applies in relation to the body and the company.
    Note:

    That section applies if the ownership of the company is not significantly different from the ownership of the body and rights relating to the body.

    SECTION 620-15  

    620-15   Object  


    The object of this Subdivision is to ensure tax-neutral consequences when the body ceases to hold an asset and also if the asset becomes held by the company.

    CGT consequences

    SECTION 620-20   Disregard body ' s capital gains and losses from CGT assets  

    620-20(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the body *disposes of a *CGT asset to the company because the body ceases to exist; or


    (b) another *CGT event happens to a CGT asset of the body because the body ceases to exist.

    620-20(2)    
    A *capital gain or a *capital loss the body makes from the *CGT asset is disregarded.

    SECTION 620-25   Cost base and pre-CGT status of CGT asset for company  

    620-25(1)    
    This section applies to a *CGT asset if the body *disposes of it to the company because the body ceases to exist.

    620-25(2)    
    The first element of the *CGT asset ' s *cost base for the company is equal to the asset ' s cost base for the body in connection with the *disposal.

    620-25(3)    
    The first element of the *CGT asset ' s *reduced cost base for the company is worked out similarly.

    620-25(4)    
    If the body *acquired the *CGT asset before 20 September 1985, the company is taken to have acquired the CGT asset before that day.

    Consequences for depreciating assets

    SECTION 620-30   Roll-over relief for balancing adjustment events  

    620-30(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) there is a *balancing adjustment event because the body disposes of a *depreciating asset in an income year to the company because the body ceases to exist; and


    (b) the disposal involves a *CGT event.

    620-30(2)    
    This Act applies as if:


    (a) there were roll-over relief under subsection 40-340(1) for the *balancing adjustment event; and


    (b) the body were the transferor mentioned in that subsection and subsection 328-243(1A) ; and


    (c) the company were the transferee mentioned in that subsection and subsection 328-243(1A) .

    Note:

    Some effects of this are as follows:

  • (a) the balancing adjustment event does not affect the body ' s assessable income or deductions (see subsection 40-345(1) );
  • (b) the company can deduct for the decline in value of the asset on the same basis as the body did (see subsection 40-345(2) );
  • (c) Division 45 (Disposal of leases and leased plant) applies to the company as if it had done the things the body did (see subsection 40-350(1) ).

  • 620-30(3)    
    Disregard paragraph 328-243(1A)(c) in determining whether subsection 328-243(1A) applies.

    Consequences for trading stock

    SECTION 620-40   Body taken to have sold trading stock to company  

    620-40(1)    
    This subsection applies to each item of *trading stock that the body disposes of to the company because the body ceases to exist.

    620-40(2)    


    The body is taken to have sold, and the company is taken to have bought, the item (in the ordinary course of *business and dealing with each other at *arm ' s length), at the time of the disposal (or just before that time if the disposal occurred when the body ceased to exist), for:


    (a) the *cost of the item for the body; or


    (b) if the body held the item as *trading stock at the start of the income year, the *value of the item for the body then.


    620-40(3)    
    The company is taken to have held the item as *trading stock when it bought the item.

    Consequences for revenue assets

    SECTION 620-50   Body taken to have sold revenue assets to company  


    Disposal

    620-50(1)    
    Subsections (2) and (3) apply to a *CGT asset:


    (a) that the body *disposes of to the company because the body ceases to exist; and


    (b) that is a *revenue asset of the body just before the disposal.

    Note:

    Trading stock and depreciating assets are not revenue assets. See section 977-50 .


    620-50(2)    
    The body is taken to have disposed of the *revenue asset to the company for an amount such that the body would not make a profit or a loss on the disposal.

    620-50(3)    
    For the purpose of calculating any profit or loss on a future disposal of, cessation of owning, or other realisation of, the *revenue asset, the company is taken to have paid the body that amount for the disposal of the revenue asset to the company.

    Ceasing to own or other realising

    620-50(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies to a *CGT asset:


    (a) that the body ceases to own, or otherwise realises, because the body ceases to exist; and


    (b) that is a *revenue asset of the body just before the cessation or realisation.

    Note:

    Trading stock and depreciating assets are not revenue assets. See section 977-50 .


    620-50(5)    
    The body is taken to have disposed of the *revenue asset for an amount such that the body would not make a profit or a loss on the disposal.

    PART 3-90 - CONSOLIDATED GROUPS  

    Division 700 - Guide and objects  

    Guide  

    SECTION 700-1   What this Part is about  


    This Part allows certain groups of entities to be treated as single entities for income tax purposes.

    Following a choice to consolidate, subsidiary members are treated as part of the head company of the group rather than as separate income tax identities. The head company inherits their income tax history when they become subsidiary members of the group. On ceasing to be subsidiary members, they take with them an income tax history that recognises that they are different from when they became subsidiary members.

    This is supported by rules that:

  • (a) set the cost for income tax purposes of assets that subsidiary members bring into the group; and
  • (b) determine the income tax history that is taken into account when entities become, or cease to be, subsidiary members of the group; and
  • (c) deal with the transfer of tax attributes such as losses and franking credits to the head company when entities become subsidiary members of the group.
  • SECTION 700-5   Overview of this Part  

    700-5(1)    
    The single entity rule determines how the income tax liability of a consolidated group will be ascertained. The basic principle is contained in the Core Rules in Division 701 .

    700-5(2)    
    Essentially, a consolidated group consists of an Australian resident head company and all of its Australian resident wholly-owned subsidiaries (which may be companies, trusts or partnerships). Special rules apply to foreign-owned groups with no single Australian resident head company.

    700-5(3)    
    An eligible wholly-owned group becomes a consolidated group after notice of a choice to consolidate is given to the Commissioner.

    700-5(4)    
    This Part also contains rules which set the cost for income tax purposes of assets of entities when they become subsidiary members of a consolidated group and of membership interests in those entities when they cease to be subsidiary members of the group.

    700-5(5)    
    Certain tax attributes (such as losses and franking credits) of entities that become subsidiary members of a consolidated group are transferred under this Part to the head company of the group. These tax attributes remain with the group after an entity ceases to be a subsidiary member.


    Objects  

    SECTION 700-10  

    700-10   Objects of this Part  


    The objects of this Part are:


    (a) to prevent double taxation of the same economic gain realised by a consolidated group; and


    (b) to prevent a double tax benefit being obtained from an economic loss realised by a consolidated group; and


    (c) to provide a systematic solution to the prevention of such double taxation and double tax benefits that will:


    (i) reduce the cost of complying with this Act; and

    (ii) improve business efficiency by removing complexities and promoting simplicity in the taxation of wholly-owned groups.

    Division 701 - Core rules  

    Common rule  

    SECTION 701-1   Single entity rule  

    701-1(1)    
    If an entity is a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group for any period, it and any other subsidiary member of the group are taken for the purposes covered by subsections (2) and (3) to be parts of the * head company of the group, rather than separate entities, during that period.

    Head company core purposes

    701-1(2)    
    The purposes covered by this subsection (the head company core purposes ) are:


    (a) working out the amount of the * head company's liability (if any) for income tax calculated by reference to any income year in which any of the period occurs or any later income year; and


    (b) working out the amount of the head company's loss (if any) of a particular * sort for any such income year.

    Note:

    The single entity rule would affect the head company's income tax liability calculated by reference to income years after the entity ceased to be a member of the group if, for example, assets that the entity held when it became a subsidiary member remained with the head company after the entity ceased to be a subsidiary member.



    Entity core purposes

    701-1(3)    
    The purposes covered by this subsection (the entity core purposes ) are:


    (a) working out the amount of the entity's liability (if any) for income tax calculated by reference to any income year in which any of the period occurs or any later income year; and


    (b) working out the amount of the entity's loss (if any) of a particular * sort for any such income year.

    Note:

    An assessment of the entity's liability calculated by reference to income tax for a period when it was not a subsidiary member of the group may be made, and that tax recovered from it, even while it is a subsidiary member.



    What is a sort of loss?

    701-1(4)    
    Each of these paragraphs identifies a sort of loss:


    (a) * tax loss;


    (b) * film loss;


    (c) * net capital loss.


    (d) (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )


    (e) (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )


    (f) (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )


    (g) (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )

    This subsection lists all the sorts of loss.


    Head company rules  

    SECTION 701-5  

    701-5   Entry history rule  


    For the head company core purposes in relation to the period after the entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group, everything that happened in relation to it before it became a subsidiary member is taken to have happened in relation to the * head company.
    Note 1:

    Other provisions of this Part may affect the tax history that is inherited (e.g. asset cost base history is affected by section 701-10 and tax loss history is affected by Division 707 ).

    Note 3:

    Section 165-212E overrides this rule for the purposes of the business continuity test.

    SECTION 701-10   Cost to head company of assets of joining entity  

    701-10(1)    
    This section has effect for the head company core purposes when the entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group.

    Assets to which section applies

    701-10(2)    


    This section applies in relation to each asset that would be an asset of the entity at the time it becomes a * subsidiary member of the group, assuming that subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) did not apply.
    Note:

    See subsection 705-35(3) for the treatment of a goodwill asset resulting from the head company's ownership and control of the joining entity.



    Object

    701-10(3)    
    The object of this section (and Division 705 which relates to it) is to recognise the cost to the * head company of such assets as an amount reflecting the group's cost of acquiring the entity.

    Setting tax cost of assets

    701-10(4)    
    Each asset's * tax cost is set at the time the entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at the asset's * tax cost setting amount.

    Multiple setting of tax cost for same trading stock or registered emissions unit

    701-10(5)    
    However, if:


    (a) the asset is * trading stock or a *registered emissions unit; and


    (b) the asset's * tax cost is set by this section at more than one time (each of which is a setting time ) for the same income year;

    then, except where subsection (6) applies, only the amount at which the tax cost is set at the last of the setting times is to be taken into account.


    701-10(6)    


    If:


    (a) the * head company's * terminating value for the asset; or


    (b) the * value of the asset at the start of the income year;

    is required to be worked out for one or more occasions when an entity (whether or not the same entity) ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group in the income year, then the amount at which the asset's * tax cost is set by this section at a particular setting time is only taken into account in working out the head company's terminating value for a particular occasion if:


    (c) the setting time occurs before the occasion; and


    (d) there is no intervening setting time or occasion.


    701-10(7)    
    (Repealed by No 99 of 2012)



    SECTION 701-15   Cost to head company of membership interests in entity that leaves group  

    701-15(1)    


    If the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the head company core purposes, so far as they relate to the income year in which the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member or any later income year.
    Note:

    This section could have effect, for example, if an entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group because:

  • (a) it ceases to satisfy the requirements to be a subsidiary member; or
  • (b) the head company ceases to satisfy the requirements to be a head company (thereby bringing the group to an end).


  • Object

    701-15(2)    
    The object of this section is to preserve the alignment of the * head company's costs for * membership interests in each entity and its assets by recognising, when an entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group, the cost of those interests as an amount equal to the cost of the entity's assets at that time reduced by the amount of its liabilities.

    Note:

    The head company's costs for membership interests in entities was aligned with the costs of their assets when the entities became subsidiary members of the group.



    Setting tax cost of membership interests

    701-15(3)    
    For each * membership interest that the * head company of the group holds in an entity that ceases to be a * subsidiary member, the interest's * tax cost is set just before the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member at the interest's * tax cost setting amount.

    Note 1:

    The membership interests would include those that are actually held by subsidiary members of the group, but which are treated as those of the head company under the single entity rule.

    Note 2:

    If the entity is a partnership, Subdivision 713-E sets the tax cost of interests in partnership assets, rather than membership interests in the partnership.


    SECTION 701-20   Cost to head company of assets consisting of certain liabilities owed by entity that leaves group  

    701-20(1)    
    If the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the head company core purposes, so far as they relate to the income year in which the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member or any later income year.

    Assets to which section applies

    701-20(2)    
    This section applies in relation to each asset, consisting of a liability owed by the entity, that becomes an asset of the * head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity when it ceases to be a * subsidiary member. This is a liability that, ignoring that subsection, is owed to a * member of the group.

    Object

    701-20(3)    
    The object of this section is to set a cost for the asset to enable income tax consequences for the * head company in respect of the asset to be determined.

    Setting tax cost of assets

    701-20(4)    
    The asset's * tax cost is set at the time the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group at the asset's * tax cost setting amount.

    Note:

    If the entity is a partnership, Subdivision 713-E sets the tax cost of assets consisting of a partner's share of a liability owed by the partnership to a member of the group.


    SECTION 701-25   Tax-neutral consequence for head company of ceasing to hold assets when entity leaves group  

    701-25(1)    
    If the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the head company core purposes, so far as they relate to the income year in which the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member or any later income year.

    Assets to which section applies

    701-25(2)    
    This section applies in relation to an asset if:


    (a) either:


    (i) the asset is *trading stock of the *head company; or

    (ii) the asset is a *registered emissions unit and an asset of the head company; and


    (b) the asset becomes an asset of the entity because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity when it ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group; and


    (c) the asset is not again an asset of the head company at or before the end of the income year.



    Object

    701-25(3)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that there is no income tax consequence for the *head company in respect of the asset.

    Note:

    In the case of assets other than trading stock or registered emissions units, the fact that the head company ceases to hold them when the single entity rules ceases to apply to them would not constitute a disposal or other event having tax consequences for the head company.



    Setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount

    701-25(4)    


    If subparagraph (2)(a)(i) applies, the asset is taken to be *trading stock of the *head company at the end of the income year (but not at the start of the next income year) and its *value at that time is taken to be equal to:


    (a) if the asset was trading stock of the head company at the start of the income year (including as a result of its *tax cost being set) - the asset's value at that time; or


    (b) if paragraph (a) does not apply and the asset is *live stock that was acquired by natural increase - the *cost of the asset; or


    (c) in any other case - the amount of the outgoing incurred by the head company in connection with the acquisition of the asset;

    increased by the amount of any outgoing forming part of the cost of the asset that was incurred by the head company during its current holding of the asset.

    Note:

    As a consequence of fixing the trading stock's value at the end of the income year under this subsection, no election would be available under section 70-45 to value the trading stock at that time.



    Setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount

    701-25(5)    


    If subparagraph (2)(a)(ii) applies, the asset is taken to be an asset of the *head company at the end of the income year (but not at the start of the next income year) and the head company ' s *value for the asset at that time is taken to be equal to:


    (a) if the asset was *held by the head company at the start of the income year - the value of the asset at the start of the income year; or


    (b) otherwise - the expenditure incurred by the head company in becoming the holder of the asset.


    Entity rules  

    SECTION 701-30   Where entity not subsidiary member for whole of income year  


    Object

    701-30(1)    
    The object of this section is to provide for a method of working out how the entity core rules apply to the entity for periods in the income year when the entity is not part of the group. The method involves treating each period separately with no netting off between them.

    When section has effect

    701-30(2)    
    This section has effect for the entity core purposes if:


    (a) the entity is a * subsidiary member of the group for some but not all of an income year; and


    (b) there are one or more periods in the income year (each of which is a non-membership period ) during which the entity is not a subsidiary member of any * consolidated group.

    Tax position of each non-membership period to be worked out

    701-30(3)    


    For every non-membership period, work out the entity ' s taxable income (if any) for the period, the income tax (if any) payable on that taxable income and the entity ' s loss (if any) (a non-membership period loss ) of each * sort for the period. Work them out:


    (a) as if the start and end of the period were the start and end of the income year; and


    (b) ignoring the operation of this section in relation to each other non-membership period (if any); and


    (c) so that each relevant item is either:


    (i) allocated to only one of the non-membership periods or to a period that is all or part of the rest of the income year; or

    (ii) apportioned among such periods (for example, by Subdivision 716-A (see note to this subsection)).
    Note:

    Other provisions of this Part are to be applied in working out the taxable income or loss, for example:

  • • section 701-40 (Exit history rule); and
  • • Subdivision 716-A (about assessable income and deductions spread over several membership or non-membership periods); and
  • • section 716-850 (about grossing up threshold amounts for periods of less than 365 days).
  • Subdivision 716 also affects the tax position of the head company of a group of which the entity has been asubsidiary member for some but not all of the income year.


    701-30(3A)    


    For the purposes of working out the entity ' s taxable income (if any) for the non-membership period, determine:


    (a) whether the entity can * utilise a loss of any * sort transferred to the entity in the period; and


    (b) if the period started at the start of the income year - whether the entity can utilise a loss of any sort:


    (i) made by the entity, without a transfer, for an earlier income year; or

    (ii) transferred to the entity in an earlier income year;

    as if the time just after the end of the period were the end of the income year and the entity carried on at that time the same business that it carried on just before that time. Paragraph (3)(a) has effect subject to this subsection.

    Note:

    This means that things that happen in relation to the entity at the time it becomes a subsidiary member of the group are taken into account in determining whether the entity can utilise such a loss to affect its taxable income for the non-membership period.



    Income tax for the financial year

    701-30(4)    
    The entity ' s income tax (if any) for the * financial year concerned is the total of every amount of income tax worked out for the entity under subsection (3).

    Taxable income for the income year

    701-30(5)    
    The entity ' s taxable income for the income year is the total of every amount of taxable income worked out for the entity under subsection (3).

    701-30(6)    
    The entity ' s income tax worked out under subsection (4) is taken to be payable on the entity ' s taxable income for the income year worked out under subsection (5), even if the amount of the tax differs from the amount that would be worked out by reference to that taxable income apart from subsection (5).

    Loss for the income year

    701-30(7)    
    The entity has a loss of a particular * sort for the income year if and only if it has a non-membership period loss of that sort for the non-membership period (if any) ending at the end of the income year. The amount of the loss for the income year is the amount of the non-membership period loss.

    Utilisation and transfer of non-membership period loss

    701-30(8)    


    However, the provisions of this Act relating to transfer or * utilisation of a loss of any * sort have effect in relation to a non-membership period loss of that sort for any non-membership period as if the non-membership period loss were the entity ' s loss for an income year that:


    (a) started at the start of the period; and


    (b) ended at the end of the period.


    701-30(9)    
    Subsection (8) has effect not only for the entity core purposes, but also (despite subsection (2)) for other purposes.



    Excess franking deficit tax offset for the income year

    701-30(10)    


    For the purposes of applying section 205-70 in relation to an income year after the income year (the current income year ) to which this section applies, the entity has an excess mentioned in paragraph 205-70(1)(c) (about excess franking deficit tax offsets) for the current income year only if it has such an excess for the non-membership period (if any) ending at the end of the current income year. The amount of the excess for the current income year is the amount of the excess for the non-membership period.

    SECTION 701-35   Tax-neutral consequence for entity of ceasing to hold assets when it joins group  

    701-35(1)    
    When the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the entity core purposes.

    Assets to which section applies

    701-35(2)    


    This section applies in relation to an asset if:


    (a) the asset is *trading stock of the entity just before it becomes a *subsidiary member of the group; or


    (b) the asset is:


    (i) a *registered emissions unit; and

    (ii) an asset of the entity;
    just before it becomes a subsidiary member of the group.

    Object

    701-35(3)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that there is no income tax consequence for the entity in respect of the asset.

    Note:

    In the case of assets other than trading stock or registered emissions units, the fact that the entity ceases to hold them when the single entity rule begins to apply to them would not constitute a disposal or other event having tax consequences for the entity.



    Setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount

    701-35(4)    


    If paragraph (2)(a) applies, the *value of the *trading stock at the end of the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30 applies, of the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, when the entity becomes a *subsidiary member is taken to be equal to:


    (a) if the asset was trading stock of the entity at the start of the income year - the asset ' s value at that time; or


    (b) if paragraph (a) does not apply and the asset is *live stock that was acquired by natural increase - the *cost of the asset; or


    (c) in any other case - the amount of the outgoing incurred by the entity in connection with the acquisition of the asset;

    increased by the amount of any outgoing forming part of the cost of the asset that was incurred by the entity during its current holding of the asset.

    Note:

    As a consequence of fixing the trading stock ' s value at the end of the income year under this subsection, no election would be available under section 70-45 to value the trading stock at that time.



    Setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount

    701-35(5)    


    If paragraph (2)(b) applies, the *value of the *registered emissions unit at the end of the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30 applies, of the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, when the entity becomes a *subsidiary member is taken to be equal to:


    (a) if the unit was *held by the joining entity at the start of the income year - the value of the unit at the start of the income year; or


    (b) otherwise - the expenditure incurred by the joining entity in becoming the holder of the unit.

    Note:

    See also section 701A-7 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .


    SECTION 701-40   Exit history rule  

    701-40(1)    
    If the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the entity core purposes, so far as they relate to any thing covered by subsection (2) (an eligible asset etc. ) after it becomes that of the entity because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity.



    Assets, liabilities and businesses covered

    701-40(2)    
    This subsection covers the following:


    (a) any asset;


    (b) any liability or other thing that, in accordance with * accounting principles, is a liability;


    (c) any business;


    (d) (Repealed by No 93 of 2011)

    that becomes that of the entity because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity when it ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group.



    Head company history inherited

    701-40(3)    
    Everything that happened in relation to any eligible asset etc. while it was that of the * head company, including because of any application of section 701-5 (the entry history rule), is taken to have happened in relation to it as if it had been an eligible asset etc. of the entity.

    Note 1:

    If the eligible asset etc. was brought into the group when an entity became a subsidiary member, section 701-5 (the entry history rule) would have had the effect that things happening to the eligible asset etc. while it was that of the entity would be taken to have happened as if it was that of the head company. Such things will in turn be taken by this subsection to have happened in relation to the eligible asset etc. as if it were that of the entity that takes the asset out of the group.

    Note 2:

    Other provisions of this Part may affect the tax history that is inherited (e.g. asset cost base history is affected by section 701-45 ).


    SECTION 701-45   Cost of assets consisting of liabilities owed to entity by members of the group  

    701-45(1)    
    If the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the entity core purposes, so far as they relate to the income year in which the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member or any later income year.

    Assets to which section applies

    701-45(2)    
    This section applies in relation to an asset if:


    (a) it becomes an asset of the entity because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity when it ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group; and


    (b) the asset consists of a liability owed to the entity by a * member of the group.

    Object

    701-45(3)    


    The object of this section is to set the cost of the asset to enable income tax consequences for the entity in respect of the asset to be determined.
    Note:

    In the case of other assets, the fact that the entity inherits their history under section 701-40 when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group means that the assets would be treated as having the same cost as they would for the head company at that time. However, assets consisting of liabilities do not have such a history because they are only recognised when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member and the single entity rule ceases to apply.



    Setting the asset's tax cost

    701-45(4)    


    The asset's * tax cost is set at the time the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group at the asset's * tax cost setting amount.
    Note 1:

    If section 701-30 (Where entity not subsidiary member for whole of income year) applies, the time the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member will be treated as the start of an income year.

    Note 2:

    If the entity is a partnership, Subdivision 713-E sets the tax cost of a partner's interest in an asset consisting of a liability that a member of the group owes to the partnership.


    SECTION 701-50   Cost of certain membership interests of which entity becomes holder on leaving group  

    701-50(1)    
    If:


    (a) the entity and one or more other entities cease to be * subsidiary members of the group at the same time because of an event happening in relation to one of them; and


    (b) when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member, it holds an asset consisting of a * membership interest in any of the other entities;

    this section has effect for the entity core purposes.



    Object

    701-50(2)    
    The cost of any * membership interest that one of the entities holds in another is to be treated in the same way as membership interests held by the * head company. In both cases the object is to preserve the alignment of costs for membership interests and assets (that was established when each entity became a * subsidiary member) by recognising the cost of those interests, when it ceases to be a subsidiary member, as an amount equal to the cost of the entity's assets at that time reduced by the amount of its liabilities.

    Setting tax cost of membership interests

    701-50(3)    
    The asset's * tax cost is set just before the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group at the asset's * tax cost setting amount.

    Note:

    If the asset consists of a membership interest in a partnership, Subdivision 713-E sets the tax cost of interests in partnership assets, rather than membership interests in the partnership.


    Supporting provisions  

    SECTION 701-55   Setting the tax cost of an asset  

    701-55(1)    
    This section states the meaning of the expression an asset ' s tax cost is set at a particular time at the asset ' s * tax cost setting amount.

    Depreciating asset provisions

    701-55(2)    


    If any of Subdivisions 40-A to 40-D, sections 40-425 to 40-445 and Subdivisions 328-D and 355-E is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the provisions apply as if:


    (a) the asset were * acquired at the particular time for a payment equal to its * tax cost setting amount; and


    (b) at that time the same method of working out the decline in value were chosen for the asset as applied to it just before that time; and


    (c) where just before that time the prime cost method applied for working out the asset ' s decline in value and the asset ' s tax cost setting amount does not exceed the joining entity ' s * terminating value for the asset - at that time an * effective life were chosen for the asset equal to the remainder of the effective life of the asset just before that time; and


    (d) where just before that time the prime cost method applied for working out the asset ' s decline in value and the asset ' s *tax cost setting amount exceeds the joining entity ' s terminating value for the asset - either:


    (i) the *head company were required to choose at that time an effective life for the asset in accordance with subsections 40-95(1) and (3) , and any choice of an effective life determined by the Commissioner were limited to one in force at that time; or

    (ii) an effective life for the asset were worked out under subsection 40-95(7) , (8) , (9) or (10) at that time; and


    (e) where neither paragraph (c) nor (d) applies - at that time an effective life were chosen for the asset equal to the asset ' s effective life just before that time.



    Trading stock provisions

    701-55(3)    


    If Division 70 (other than Subdivision 70-E ) is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the Division applies as if the asset were * trading stock at the start of the income year in which the particular time occurs and its * value at that time were equal to its * tax cost setting amount.

    Registered emissions unit provisions

    701-55(3A)    


    If Division 420 is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the Division applies as if the asset were a *registered emissions unit at the start of the income year in which the particular time occurs, and its *value at that time were equal to the asset ' s *tax cost setting amount.

    Qualifying security provisions

    701-55(4)    
    If Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the Division applies as if the asset were acquired at the particular time for a payment equal to the asset ' s * tax cost setting amount.

    Capital gain and loss provisions

    701-55(5)    


    If Part 3-1 or 3-3 is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the Part applies as if the asset ' s * cost base or * reduced cost base were increased or reduced so that the cost base or reduced cost base at the particular time equals the asset ' s * tax cost setting amount.

    Division 230 (financial arrangements)

    701-55(5A)    


    If Division 230 is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the Division applies as if the asset were acquired at the particular time for a payment equal to:


    (a) unless paragraph (b) applies - the asset ' s *tax cost setting amount; or


    (b) if the asset ' s tax cost is set because an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group, and Subdivision 230-C (fair value method), Subdivision 230-D (foreign exchange retranslation method) or Subdivision 230-F (reliance on financial reports method) is to apply in relation to the asset - the asset ' s *Division 230 starting value at the particular time.


    701-55(5B)    


    To avoid doubt, for the purposes of paragraph (5A)(b), determine the asset ' s *Division 230 starting value by reference to the relevant standards (as mentioned in section 230-230 , 230-280 or 230-420 ) that apply in relation to the *head company ' s financial report for the income year in which the entity becomes a subsidiary member of the group.

    WIP amount assets

    701-55(5C)    


    If:


    (a) the asset ' s tax cost is set because an entity becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at the particular time; and


    (b) the asset is a * WIP amount asset;

    the expression means that section 25-95 applies as if the * head company had paid a * work in progress amount for the income year in which the particular time occurs equal to the * tax cost setting amount of the asset.



    Consumable stores

    701-55(5D)    


    If:


    (a) the asset ' s tax cost is set because an entity becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at the particular time; and


    (b) the asset is consumable stores;

    the expression means that, for the purposes of section 8-1, the * head company of the group is taken to have incurred an outgoing at the particular time in acquiring the asset equal to the asset ' s * tax cost setting amount.



    Other provisions

    701-55(6)    


    If any provision of this Act that is not mentioned above is to apply in relation to the asset by including an amount in assessable income, or by allowing an amount as a deduction, in a way that brings into account (directly or indirectly) any of the following amounts:


    (a) the cost of the asset;


    (b) outgoings incurred, or amounts paid, in respect of the asset;


    (c) expenditure in respect of the asset;


    (d) an amount of a similar kind in respect of the asset;

    the expression means that the provision applies, for the purpose of determining the amount included in assessable income or the amount of the deduction, as if the cost, outgoing, expenditure or other amount had been incurred or paid to acquire the asset at the particular time for an amount equal to its * tax cost setting amount.

    Note 2:

    For specific clarifications of the operation of this subsection in relation to bad debts, see Subdivision 716-S .


    SECTION 701-56   Application of subsection 701-55(6)  

    701-56(1)    


    Subsection (2) applies in relation to each asset that would be an asset of an entity at the time (the joining time ) it becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, assuming that subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) did not apply.

    701-56(1A)    


    Subsection (2) applies only to the extent necessary for the purposes of subsection 701-55(6) to determine whether a provision of this Act is to apply in relation to each of those assets on and after the joining time.

    701-56(1B)    


    Subsection (2) applies despite section 701-5 (the entry history rule).

    701-56(2)    


    Treat the * head company as having acquired each of those assets at the joining time as part of acquiring the business of the joining entity as a going concern.

    Certain depreciating assets etc

    701-56(3)    
    Subsection 701-55(6) does not apply in relation to an asset if any of the following provisions are to apply in relation to the asset:


    (a) Subdivision 40-F (Primary production depreciating assets);


    (b) Subdivision 40-G (Capital expenditure of primary producers and other landholders);


    (c) Subdivision 40-H (Capital expenditure that is immediately deductible);


    (d) Subdivision 40-I (Capital expenditure that is deductible over time);


    (e) Subdivision 40-J (Capital expenditure for the establishment of trees in carbon sink forests);


    (f) Division 41 (Additional deduction for certain new business investment);


    (g) Division 43 (Deductions for capital works).


    SECTION 701-58   Effect of setting the tax cost of an asset that the head company does not hold under the single entity rule  

    701-58(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the * tax cost of an asset was set at the time (the joining time ) an entity became a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, at the asset ' s * tax cost setting amount; and


    (b) ignoring the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the entity held the asset at the joining time; and


    (c) taking into account the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the * head company of the group did not hold the asset at the joining time.

    Example:

    A debt owed by a member of the group to the joining entity at the joining time.


    701-58(2)    


    To avoid doubt, the asset ' s * tax cost setting amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) is not to be taken into account in applying the provisions mentioned in subsections 701-55(2) , (3) , (3A) , (4) , (5) , (5A) , (5C) , (5D) , and (6) in relation to the asset at and after the joining time.

    SECTION 701-60  

    701-60   Tax cost setting amount  


    The asset ' s tax cost setting amount is worked out using this table.


    Graphic
    Graphic
    Tax cost setting amount
    Item If the asset ' s tax cost is set by: The asset ' s tax cost setting amount is:
    1 section 701-10 (Cost to head company of assets of joining entity) the amount worked out in accordance with Division 705
    2 section 701-15 (Cost to head company of membership interests in entity that leaves group) the amount worked out in accordance with section 711-15 or 711-55
    3 section 701-20 (Cost to head company of assets consisting of certain liabilities owed by entity that leaves group) the *market value of the asset
    3A section 701-45 (Cost of assets consisting of liabilities owed to entity by members of the group) the amount worked out in accordance with section 701-60A
    4 section 701-50 (Cost of certain membership interests of which entity becomes holder on leaving group) the amount worked out in accordance with section 711-55

    Note 1:

    The tax cost setting amount of certain interests in partnership assets is worked out under Subdivision 713-E .

    Note 2:

    The tax cost setting amount of certain assets of a life insurance company is worked out under Subdivision 713-L .

    SECTION 701-60A   Tax cost setting amount for asset emerging when entity leaves group  

    701-60A(1)    
    This section applies for the purpose of working out the *tax cost setting amount of an asset if:


    (a) an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group (the old group ) at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) the asset ' s tax cost is set under section 701-45 because it consists of a liability (the corresponding liability ) owed to the leaving entity.

    701-60A(2)    
    The *tax cost setting amount is:


    (a) unless subsection (3) or (4) applies - the *market value of the asset at the leaving time; or


    (b) if subsection (3) applies - nil; or


    (c) if subsection (4) applies - the least of the following amounts:


    (i) the tax cost setting amount mentioned in paragraph (4)(c);

    (ii) if the *head company of the old group was entitled to a deduction in respect of the asset for an income year ending on or before the leaving time - the tax cost setting amount mentioned in paragraph (4)(c) reduced by the amount of the deduction;

    (iii) the market value of the asset at the leaving time.

    701-60A(3)    
    This subsection applies if:


    (a) the corresponding liability is not a debt; and


    (b) either:


    (i) at the time the corresponding liability arose, the entity to whom the corresponding liability was owed and the entity owing the corresponding liability were both *members of the old group; or

    (ii) if subparagraph (i) does not apply - after the time the corresponding liability arose, a member of the old group *acquired the asset or started to have the corresponding liability.

    701-60A(4)    
    This subsection applies if:


    (a) the corresponding liability is not a debt; and


    (b) at the time the corresponding liability arose, the entity to whom the corresponding liability was owed and the entity owing the corresponding liability were not both members of the old group; and


    (c) the *tax cost of the asset was set under section 701-10 at the time an entity became a *subsidiary member of the old group, at the asset ' s *tax cost setting amount (whether or not section 701-58 applied in relation to the setting of that tax cost).

    SECTION 701-61   Assets in relation to Division 230 financial arrangement - head company's assessable income or deduction  

    701-61(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group; and


    (b) paragraph 701-55(5A)(b) applies in relation to one or more assets of the joining entity.

    701-61(2)    
    Work out if the total of the *Division 230 starting values for those assets exceeds or falls short of the total of their *tax cost setting amounts.

    701-61(3)    
    If there is an excess, an amount equal to 25% of that excess is included in the *head company's assessable income for:


    (a) the income year in which the particular time mentioned in subsection 701-55(5A) occurs; and


    (b) each of the 3 subsequent income years.

    701-61(4)    
    If there is a shortfall, the *head company is entitled to a deduction equal to 25% of that shortfall for:


    (a) the income year in which the particular time mentioned in subsection 701-55(5A) occurs; and


    (b) each of the 3 subsequent income years.

    SECTION 701-63   Right to future income and WIP amount asset  

    701-63(5)    
    A right to future income is a valuable right (including a contingent right) to receive an amount if:


    (a) the valuable right forms part of a contract or agreement; and


    (b) the * market value of the valuable right (taking into account all the obligations and conditions relating to the right) is greater than nil; and


    (c) the valuable right is neither a * Division 230 financial arrangement nor a part of a Division 230 financial arrangement; and


    (d) it is reasonable to expect that an amount attributable to the right will be included in the assessable income of any entity at a later time.

    701-63(6)    
    WIP amount asset means an asset that is in respect of work (but not goods) that has been partially performed by a recipient mentioned in paragraph 25-95(3)(b) for a third entity but not yet completed to the stage where a recoverable debt has arisen in respect of the completion or partial completion of the work.

    SECTION 701-65   Net income and losses for trusts and partnerships  


    Net income of partnerships and trusts

    701-65(1)    
    If:


    (a) another provision of this Division applies for the purpose of:


    (i) working out the amount of the entity's liability (if any) for income tax calculated by reference to an income year; or

    (ii) working out the amount of the entity's taxable income for an income year; and


    (b) the entity is a trust or partnership;

    the provision instead applies in a corresponding way for the purpose of working out the amount of the entity's net income, as defined in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , (if any) for the income year.

    Note:

    Subsection 701-30(3) requires non-membership periods mentioned in that subsection to be treated as the start and end of an income year. This section would therefore also apply to those periods.



    Partnership losses

    701-65(2)    
    If:


    (a) another provision of this Division applies for the purpose of working out the amount of the entity's loss (if any) of a particular * sort for an income year; and


    (b) the entity is a partnership;

    the provision instead applies in a corresponding way for the purpose of working out the amount of an entity's partnership loss, as defined in section 90 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , (if any) for the income year.

    Note:

    The provision applies normally to a trust, as it can have a loss of any sort worked out in the same way as a loss of the same sort for an entity of another kind.


    SECTION 701-67  

    701-67   Assets in this Part are CGT assets, etc.  


    This Part applies to an asset only if the asset is one or more of the following:


    (a) a * CGT asset;


    (b) a * revenue asset;


    (c) a * depreciating asset;


    (d) * trading stock;


    (e) a thing that is or is part of a * Division 230 financial arrangement.

    Exceptions  

    SECTION 701-70   Adjustments to taxable income where identities of parties to arrangement merge on joining group  


    Section applies to certain arrangements

    701-70(1)    
    This section applies for the head company core purposes and the entity core purposes if, just before the time (the joining time ) when the entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group, an * arrangement is in force under which:


    (a) expenditure is to be, or has been, incurred in return for the doing of some thing; and


    (b) the persons incurring the expenditure and *deriving the corresponding amount (each of which is a combining entity ) are the entity and either:


    (i) another entity that became a subsidiary member at the same time; or

    (ii) the * head company.
    Note 1:

    If expenditure incurred under an arrangement consists of a payment of loan interest or a payment of a similar kind, the expenditure would be incurred in return for the making available or continued making available of the loan principal, or other amount of a similar kind, under the arrangement.

    Note 2:

    If expenditure incurred under an arrangement consists of a payment of rent, a lease payment or a payment of a similar kind, the expenditure would be incurred in return for the making available or continued making available of the thing rented or leased, or other thing of a similar kind, under the arrangement.

    Note 3:

    If expenditure incurred under an arrangement consists of a payment of an insurance premium or a payment of a similar kind, the expenditure would be incurred in return for the provision or continued provision of insurance against the risk concerned, or of a thing of a similar kind, under the arrangement.



    Object

    701-70(2)    
    The object of this section is to align the income tax position of the combining entities at the joining time, because after that time they lose their separate tax identities under the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) and this would preserve any imbalance.

    Adjustment for disproportionate deductibility

    701-70(3)    
    If the total of a combining entity ' s deductions that are allowable for:


    (a) the following income year (the joining adjustment year ):


    (i) if the combining entity is the *head company and the joining time occurs at the start of an income year - the income year before that income year;

    (ii) if the combining entity is the head company and subparagraph (i) does not apply - the income year in which the joining time occurs;

    (iii) in any other case - the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30 applies, the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, at the joining time; and


    (b) all earlier income years;

    is not equal to the amount worked out under subsection (4), then:


    (c) if the total is less - the entity is entitled to deduct the difference for the joining adjustment year; and


    (d) if it is more - the entity ' s assessable income for the joining adjustment year includes the difference.



    Pre-joining time proportion of total arrangement deductions

    701-70(4)    
    The amount is worked out using the formula:


    Pre-joining time
    services proportion
    × Total arrangement
    deductions

    where:

    pre-joining time services proportion
    means the proportion of all things to be done under the arrangement in return for the incurring of the expenditure represented by those things that were done before the joining time.

    total arrangement deductions
    means the total of the deductions that, ignoring this Part (other than subsection (7) of this section), would be allowable for expenditure incurred by the combining entity under the arrangement for all income years.



    Adjustment for disproportionate assessability

    701-70(5)    


    If the total of the amounts included in a combining entity ' s assessable income in respect of amounts *derived under the arrangement for the joining adjustment year and all earlier income years is not equal to the amount worked out under subsection (6):


    (a) if the total is less - the entity ' s assessable income for the joining adjustment year includes the difference; and


    (b) if it is more - the entity is entitled to deduct the difference for the joining adjustment year.



    Pre-joining time proportion of total arrangement assessable income

    701-70(6)    


    The amount is worked out using the formula:


    Pre-joining time
    services proportion
    × Total arrangement
    assessable income

    where:

    pre-joining time services proportion
    has the same meaning as in subsection (4).

    total arrangement assessable income
    means the total of the amounts that, ignoring this Part (other than subsection (7) of this section), would be included in the combining entity ' s assessable income for amounts *derived by it under the arrangement for all income years.



    Modified application of section if combining entities previously members of same group

    701-70(7)    
    If the combining entities were * members of the same * consolidated group (whether or not the group to which this section applies) on one or more previous occasions, this section applies in relation to the entities as if:


    (a) the only things to be done under the arrangement in return for the incurring of the expenditure were those things to be done after the entities ceased to be members of the same group on the previous occasion or the last of the previous occasions; and


    (b) the only deductions allowable to an entity for expenditure incurred by it under the arrangement, and the only amounts included in an entity ' s assessable income in respect of amounts *derived under the arrangement, were:


    (i) if the entity was the * head company of the consolidated group of which the combining entities were members on the previous occasion or last of the previous occasions - those for the income year, in which the previous occasion or the last of the previous occasions occurred, that are attributable to the period after that occasion and those for all later income years; and

    (ii) in any other case - those for the income year that started, or, if section 701-30 applies, the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to have started, when the entity ceased to be a * subsidiary member of the group on the previous occasion or the last of the previous occasions and those for all later income years.

    SECTION 701-75   Adjustments to taxable income where identities of parties to arrangement re-emerge on leaving group  


    Section applies to certain arrangements

    701-75(1)    
    This section applies for the head company core purposes and the entity core purposes if the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group and, just before the time (the leaving time ) when it does so, an * arrangement is in force under which:


    (a) expenditure is to be, or has been, incurred in return for the doing of some thing; and


    (b) the persons incurring the expenditure and *deriving the corresponding amount (each of which is a separating entity ) are the entity and either:


    (i) another entity that ceases to be a subsidiary member at the same time; or

    (ii) the * head company.
    Note:

    The notes to subsection 701-70(1) on the application of that subsection to expenditure under certain kinds of arrangements are equally applicable for the purposes of this subsection.



    Object

    701-75(2)    
    The object of this section is to align the income tax position of the separating entities at the leaving time, because from that time they have separate tax identities as a result of the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) ceasing to apply, and this may create an imbalance.

    Adjustment for disproportionate deductibility

    701-75(3)    


    If the total of the deductions that are or will be allowable for expenditure incurred by the separating entity under the arrangement for:


    (a) the following income year (the leaving adjustment year ):


    (i) if the separating entity is the * head company - the income year in which the leaving time occurs;

    (ii) in any other case - the income year that starts, or, if section 701-30 applies, the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to start, at the leaving time; and


    (b) all later income years;

    is not equal to the amount worked out under subsection (4), the deductions are adjusted so that they do equal the amount.



    Post-leaving time proportion of total arrangement deductions

    701-75(4)    
    The amount is worked out using the formula:


    Post-leaving time
    services proportion
    × Total arrangement
    deductions

    where:

    post-leaving time services proportion
    means the proportion of all things to be done under the arrangement in return for the incurring of the expenditure represented by those things that are to be done after the leaving time.

    total arrangement deductions
    means the total of the deductions that, ignoring this Part, would be allowable for expenditure incurred by the separating entity under the arrangement for all income years.



    Adjustment for disproportionate assessability

    701-75(5)    


    If the total of the amounts that are or will be included in its assessable income in respect of amounts *derived under the arrangement for the leaving adjustment year and all later income years is not equal to the amount worked out under subsection (6), the amounts that are or will be included in its assessable income are adjusted so that they do equal the amount worked out under subsection (6).

    Post-leaving time proportion of total arrangement assessable income

    701-75(6)    


    The amount is worked out using the formula:


    Post-leaving time
    services proportion
    × Total arrangement
    assessable income

    where:

    post-leaving time services proportion
    has the same meaning as in subsection (4).

    total arrangement assessable income
    means the total of the amounts that, ignoring this Part, would be included in the separating entity ' s assessable income for amounts *derived by it under the arrangement for all income years.



    SECTION 701-80   Accelerated depreciation  

    701-80(1)    
    This section has effect for the head company core purposes when the entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group.

    Object

    701-80(2)    
    The object of this section is to preserve any entitlement to accelerated depreciation for assets that become those of the * head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies when the entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group. This is only to apply where the asset's * tax cost setting amount is not more than the entity's * terminating value for the asset.

    Section applies to certain depreciating assets

    701-80(3)    


    This section applies if:


    (a) a * depreciating asset to which Division 40 applies becomes that of the * head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies when the entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group; and


    (b) just before the entity became a subsidiary member, subsection 40-10(3) or 40-12(3) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 applied for the purpose of the entity working out the asset's decline in value under Division 40 ; and

    Note:

    The effect of those subsections was to preserve an entitlement to accelerated depreciation.


    (c) the * tax cost setting amount that applies in relation to the asset for the purposes of section 701-10 when it becomes an asset of the head company is not more than the entity's * terminating value for the asset.



    Preservation of accelerated depreciation

    701-80(4)    
    While the asset is held by the * head company under subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the decline in its value under Division 40 is worked out by replacing the component in the formula in subsection 40-70(1) or 40-75(1) that includes the asset's * effective life with the rate that would apply under subsection 42-160(1) or 42-165(1) of this Act if it had not been amended by the New Business Tax System (Capital Allowances) Act 2001 .


    SECTION 701-85  

    701-85   Other exceptions etc. to the rules  


    The operation of each provision of this Division is subject to any provision of this Act that so requires, either expressly or impliedly.
    Note:

    An example of such a provision is Division 707 (about the transfer of certain losses to the head company of a consolidated group). That Division modifies the effect that the inheritance of history rule in section 701-5 would otherwise have.

    701-90   (Repealed) SECTION 701-90 Right to future income treated as separate asset  
    (Repealed by No 99 of 2012)

    Division 703 - Consolidated groups and their members  

    SECTION 703-1   What this Division is about  


    A consolidated group and a consolidatable group each consists of a head company and all the companies, trusts and partnerships that:

  • (a) are resident in Australia; and
  • (b) are wholly-owned subsidiaries of the head company (either directly or through other companies, trusts and partnerships).
  • A consolidatable group becomes consolidated at a time chosen by the company that was the head company at the time.

    Basic concepts  

    SECTION 703-5   What is a consolidated group ?  

    703-5(1)    
    A consolidated group comes into existence:


    (a) on the day specified in a choice by a company under section 703-50 as the day on and after which a * consolidatable group is taken to be consolidated; or


    (b) as described in section 703-55 (about creating a consolidated group from a * MEC group).

    Note:

    The day specified in a choice under section 703-50 as the day on and after which a consolidatable group is taken to be consolidated may be a day before the choice is made.


    703-5(2)    
    The consolidated group continues to exist until the * head company of the group:


    (a) ceases to be a head company; or


    (b) becomes a member of a * MEC group.

    The consolidated group ceases to exist when one of those events happens to the head company.

    Note:

    The group does not cease to exist in some cases where a shelf company is interposed between the head company and its former members: see subsection 615-30(2) and section 703-70 .


    703-5(3)    
    At any time while it is in existence, the consolidated group consists of the * head company and all of the * subsidiary members (if any) of the group at the time.

    Note:

    A consolidated group continues to exist despite one or more entities ceasing to be subsidiary members of the group or becoming subsidiaries of the group, as long as the events described in subsection (2) do not happen to the head company. Thus a consolidated group may come to consist of a head company alone at various times.


    SECTION 703-10   What is a consolidatable group ?  

    703-10(1)    
    A consolidatable group consists of:


    (a) a single * head company; and


    (b) all the * subsidiary members of the group.

    703-10(2)    
    To avoid doubt, a consolidatable group cannot consist of a * head company alone.


    SECTION 703-15   Members of a consolidated group or consolidatable group  

    703-15(1)    
    An entity is a member of a * consolidated group or * consolidatable group while the entity is:


    (a) the * head company of the group; or


    (b) a * subsidiary member of the group.

    703-15(2)    


    At a particular time in an income year, an entity is:


    (a) a head company if all the requirements in item 1 of the table are met in relation to the entity; or


    (b) a subsidiary member of a * consolidated group or * consolidatable group if all the requirements in item 2 of the table are met in relation to the entity:


    Head companies and subsidiary members of groups
    Column 1
    Entity ' s role in relation to group
    Column 2
    Income tax treatment requirements
    Column 3
    Australian residence requirements
    Column 4
    Ownership requirements
    1 Head company The entity must be a company (but not one covered by section 703-20) that has all or some of its taxable income (if any) taxed at a rate that is or equals the * corporate tax rate The entity must be an Australian resident (but not a * prescribed dual resident) The entity must not be a * wholly-owned subsidiary of another entity that meets the requirements in columns 2 and 3 of this item or, if it is, it must not be a subsidiary member of a * consolidatable group or * consolidated group
    2 Subsidiary member The requirements are that:

    (a) the entity must be a company, trust or partnership (but not one covered by section 703-20); and

    (b) if the entity is a company - all or some of its taxable income (if any) must be taxable apart from this Part at a rate that is or equals the * corporate tax rate; and

    (c) the entity must not be a non-profit company (as defined in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 )
    The entity must:

    (a) be an Australian resident (but not a * prescribed dual resident), if it is a company; or

    (b) comply with section 703-25, if it is a trust; or

    (c) be a partnership
    The entity must be a * wholly-owned subsidiary of the head company of the group and, if there are interposed between them any entities, the set of requirements in section 703-45, section 701C-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 or section 701C-15 of that Act must be met


    SECTION 703-20   Certain entities that cannot be members of a consolidated group or consolidatable group  

    703-20(1)    
    The object of this section is to specify certain entities that cannot be * members of a * consolidated group because of the way their income is treated for income tax purposes.

    703-20(2)    


    An entity of a kind specified in an item of the table cannot be a * member of a * consolidated group or a * consolidatable group at a time in an income year if the conditions specified in the item exist:


    Certain entities that cannot be members of a consolidated or consolidatable group
    Item An entity of this kind: Cannot be a member of a consolidated group or consolidatable group if:
    1 An entity of any kind At the time, the total * ordinary income and * statutory income of the entity is exempt from income tax under Division 50
    2 A company The company is a recognised medium credit union (as defined in section 6H of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) for the income year
    3 A company The company:
        (a) is an approved credit union for the income year for the purposes of section 23G of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and
        (b) is not a recognised medium credit union (as defined in section 6H of that Act) or a recognised large credit union (as defined in that section) for the income year
    4 A company The company is a *CCIV at any time during the income year
    5 A company The company is a * PDF at the end of the income year
    6 (Repealed by No 136 of 2012)  
    7 A trust The trust is:
        (a) a * complying superannuation entity for the income year; or
        (b) a * non-complying approved deposit fund or a * non-complying superannuation fund for the income year
    8 A trust The trust is a *CCIV sub-fund trust

    Note:

    A subsidiary of a life insurance company cannot be a member of a consolidated group or consolidatable group in certain circumstances: see section 713-510 .


    703-20(3)    


    Item 8 of the table in subsection (2) of this section has effect despite section 713-130 (which enables a public trading trust to form a consolidated group).

    SECTION 703-25  

    703-25   Australian residence requirements for trusts  


    A trust described in an item of the table must meet the requirements specified in the item to be able to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group or a * consolidatable group at a time in an income year:


    Australian residence requirements for trusts
    Item A trust of this kind: Can be a member of a consolidated group or consolidatable group only if these requirements are met:
    1 A trust (except a unit trust) The trust must be a resident trust estate for the income year for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
    2 A unit trust (except a *public trading trust for the income year) The trust must be:

    (a) a resident trust estate for the income year for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and

    (b) a *resident trust for CGT purposes for the income year
    3 A *public trading trust for the income year The trust must be a *resident unit trust for the income year

    SECTION 703-30   When is one entity a wholly-owned subsidiary of another?  

    703-30(1)    
    One entity (the subsidiary entity ) is a wholly-owned subsidiary of another entity (the holding entity ) if all the * membership interests in the subsidiary entity are beneficially owned by:


    (a) the holding entity; or


    (b) one or more wholly-owned subsidiaries of the holding entity; or


    (c) the holding entity and one or more wholly-owned subsidiaries of the holding entity.

    703-30(2)    
    An entity (other than the subsidiary entity) is a wholly-owned subsidiary of the holding entity if, and only if:


    (a) it is a wholly-owned subsidiary of the holding entity; or


    (b) it is a wholly-owned subsidiary of a wholly-owned subsidiary of the holding entity;

    because of any other application or applications of this section.

    Note:

    This Part also operates in some cases as if an entity were a wholly-owned subsidiary of another entity, even though the entity is not covered by the definition in this section because of:

  • (a) ownership of shares under certain arrangements for employee shareholding (see section 703-35 ); or
  • (aa) ownership of certain preference shares following an ADI restructure (see section 703-37 ); or
  • (b) interposed trusts that are not fixed trusts (see section 703-40 ).

  • 703-30(3)    


    For the purposes of this section, one entity is not prevented from being the beneficial owner of a * membership interest in another entity merely because the first entity is or becomes:


    (a) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 ; or


    (b) an entity with a status under a * foreign law similar to the status of a Chapter 5 body corporate under the Corporations Act 2001 .


    SECTION 703-33   Transfer time for sale of shares in company  

    703-33(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) under a contract:


    (i) a person (the seller ) stops being entitled to be registered as the holder of a * share in a company at a time (the transfer time ); and

    (ii) another person (the buyer ) becomes entitled to be registered as the holder of the share in the company at the transfer time; and


    (b) as a result of the contract, the seller stops being the beneficial owner of the share, and the buyer becomes the beneficial owner of the share; and


    (c) the seller and the buyer dealt with each other at * arm's length in relation to the contract; and


    (d) the seller and the buyer were not * associates of one another at any time during the period:


    (i) starting when the contract was entered into; and

    (ii) ending at the transfer time.

    703-33(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection 703-30(1) :


    (a) the seller is taken to have stopped being the beneficial owner of the share at the transfer time; and


    (b) the buyer is taken to have become the beneficial owner of the share at the transfer time.


    SECTION 703-35   Treating entities as wholly-owned subsidiaries by disregarding employee shares  

    703-35(1)    


    The object of this section is to ensure that an entity (the first entity ) is not prevented from being a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *consolidatable group just because there are minor holdings of *membership interests in an entity (the employee share scheme entity ) issued under *arrangements for employee shareholdings. (It does not matter whether the employee share scheme entity is the first entity or is interposed between the first entity and a *member of the group).
    Note:

    A company that is prevented from being a subsidiary member of a consolidated group may be a head company (so there could be 2 consolidated or consolidatable groups, instead of the one that this section ensures exists).


    703-35(2)    


    This Part (except Division 719 ) operates as if an entity that meets the requirement of subsection (3) at a particular time were a *wholly-owned subsidiary of an entity (the holding entity ) at the time.

    703-35(3)    


    The entity must be one that would be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the holding entity at the time if the *membership interests in the entity that are to be disregarded under subsection (4) did not exist.

    703-35(4)    


    Disregard:


    (a) each of the *shares described in subsection (5) if the total number of those shares is not more than 1% of the number of ordinary shares in the company; and


    (b) each of the *membership interests in an entity described in subsection (5) if the total number of those membership interests is not more than 1% of the number of membership interests of that kind in the entity.


    703-35(5)    


    A *share or *membership interest in a company may be disregarded under subsection (4) if:


    (a) the entity who holds the beneficial interest in the share or membership interest acquired that beneficial interest:


    (i) under an *employee share scheme; or

    (ii) by exercising a right, a beneficial interest in which was acquired under an employee share scheme; and


    (b) paragraphs 83A-105(1)(a) and (b) and subsection 83A-105(2) apply to the beneficial interest acquired under the scheme; and


    (c) in the case of a membership interest - the interest is part of a stapled security.


    703-35(6)    
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)


    703-35(7)    
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)


    SECTION 703-37   Disregarding certain preference shares following an ADI restructure  

    703-37(1)    


    The object of this section is to ensure that, following an *ADI restructure to which Part 4A of the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999 applies, a body corporate is not prevented from being a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *consolidatable group just because the body (or another body corporate) has issued, or issues, certain preference *shares.

    703-37(2)    
    This Part (except Division 719 ) operates as if a body corporate that meets the requirement of subsection (3) at a particular time were a *wholly-owned subsidiary of another body corporate (the holding body ) at the time.

    703-37(3)    
    The body corporate (the preference-share issuing body ) must be one that would be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the holding body at the time if the *shares in the preference share-issuing body that are to be disregarded under subsection (4) did not exist.

    703-37(4)    
    Disregard a *share in the preference-share issuing body if:


    (a) a restructure instrument under Part 4A of the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999 is in force in relation to a non-operating holding company within the meaning of that Act; and


    (b) because of the restructure to which the instrument relates, an *ADI becomes a subsidiary (within the meaning of that Act) of the non-operating holding company; and


    (c) the preference share-issuing body is:


    (i) the ADI; or

    (ii) part of an extended licensed entity (within the meaning of the *prudential standards) that includes the ADI; and


    (d) the shares are covered by subsection (5).


    703-37(5)    
    A *share is covered by this subsection if:


    (a) the share is a preference share; and


    (b) any *return on the share is fixed at the time of issue by reference to the amount subscribed; and


    (c) the share is not a *voting share; and


    (d) either:


    (i) the share is Tier 1 capital (within the meaning of the *prudential standards); or

    (ii) the share would be Tier 1 capital (within the meaning of the prudential standards) were it not for a limit, imposed by those standards, on the proportion of Tier 1 capital that can be made up of such shares.

    703-37(6)    
    Paragraph (5)(a) covers a preference share if it is issued:


    (a) by itself; or


    (b) in combination with one or more *schemes that are *related schemes in relation to a scheme under which a preference share is issued.

    703-37(7)    
    If subsection (5) has covered a *share, but would (apart from this subsection) stop covering the share from a particular time, then for a period of 180 days after that time the subsection is taken to continue to cover the share.


    SECTION 703-40   Treating entities held through non-fixed trusts as wholly-owned subsidiaries  

    703-40(1)    
    This section operates to ensure that an entity (the test entity ) is not prevented from being a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group or * consolidatable group just because there is a trust that is not a * fixed trust interposed between the test entity and the * head company of the group.

    703-40(2)    
    This Part (except Division 719 ) operates as if the test entity were a * wholly-owned subsidiary of the * head company if the test entity would have been a wholly-owned subsidiary of the head company had the interposed trust been a * fixed trust and all its objects been beneficiaries.


    SECTION 703-45   Subsidiary members or nominees interposed between the head company and a subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a consolidatable group  

    703-45(1)    
    This section describes, for the purposes of item 2, column 4 of the table in subsection 703-15(2) , a set of requirements that must be met for an entity (the test entity ) to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group or a * consolidatable group at a particular time (the test time ).

    703-45(2)    
    At the test time, each of the interposed entities must either:


    (a) be a * subsidiary member of the group; or


    (b) hold * membership interests in:


    (i) the test entity; or

    (ii) a subsidiary member of the group interposed between the * head company of the group and the test entity;
    only as a nominee of one or more entities each of which is a * member of the group.

    Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group  

    SECTION 703-50   Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group  

    703-50(1)    


    A company may make a choice in writing that a * consolidatable group is taken to be consolidated on and after a day that is specified in the choice and is after 30 June 2002, if the company was the * head company of the group on the day specified.
    Note:

    The head company of the group must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing information about the group (see sections 703-58 and 703-60 ).



    Choice is irrevocable

    703-50(2)    
    The choice cannot be revoked, and the specification of the day cannot be amended, after the choice is made under subsection (1).

    703-50(3)    


    The choice can be made no later than:


    (a) if the company is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which the specified day mentioned in subsection (1) occurs - the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which the company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.



    Choice has no effect after consolidated group ceases to exist

    703-50(4)    
    The choice does not have effect after the * consolidated group that came into existence because of the choice ceases to exist. To avoid doubt, this subsection does not prevent the choice from:


    (a) being made by the company at a time when it is not a head company; or


    (b) having effect in relation to a time before the consolidated group ceased to exist, even if that time is before the choice is made.

    703-50(5)    
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)


    703-50(6)    
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)



    Choice does not have effect if company is a member of a MEC group

    703-50(7)    
    The choice does not have effect (and is taken not to have had effect) if, on the day specified, the company was a member of a * MEC group.


    Consolidated group created when MEC group ceases to exist  

    SECTION 703-55   Creating consolidated groups from certain MEC groups  

    703-55(1)    
    A * consolidated group comes into existence at the time a * MEC group ceases to exist if:


    (a) the MEC group included only one * eligible tier-1 company just before the time; and


    (b) the MEC group ceases to exist only because the company ceases to be an eligible tier-1 company; and


    (c) the company is a * head company as defined in section 703-15 at the time.

    703-55(2)    
    To avoid doubt, the * consolidated group consists at the time of:


    (a) the company (as the * head company of the consolidated group); and


    (b) every entity (if any) that was a * subsidiary member of the * MEC group just before that time (as a subsidiary member of the consolidated group).


    Notice of events affecting consolidated group  

    SECTION 703-58   Notice of choice to consolidate  

    703-58(1)    
    If a *consolidated group comes into existence on the day specified in a choice under section 703-50 , the *head company of the group must give the Commissioner a notice in the *approved form containing the following information:


    (a) the identity of the head company;


    (b) the day specified in the choice on which the *consolidatable group is taken to be consolidated;


    (c) the identity of each *subsidiary member of the group on that day;


    (d) the identity of each entity that was a subsidiary member of the group on that day but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;


    (e) the identity of each entity that was not a subsidiary member of the group on that day but was such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;


    (f) the identity of each entity that became a subsidiary member of the group after that day but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given.

    703-58(2)    
    The notice must be given no later than:


    (a) if the *head company is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which that day occurs - the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which the head company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

    SECTION 703-60   Notice of events affecting consolidated group  

    703-60(1)    
    Within 28 days of an event described in an item of the table, the entity described in column 3 of the item must give the Commissioner notice in the * approved form of the event.


    Notice of events
    Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
    Item If this event happens: Notice must be given by:
    1 An entity becomes a *member of a *consolidated group The *head company of the consolidated group
    2 An entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group The *head company of the group, or the person who was its public officer just before it ceased to exist if the former subsidiary member ceases to be a *member of the group because the head company ceases to exist
    3 A *consolidated group ceases to exist The company that was the *head company of the group, or the person who was its public officer just before it ceased to exist if it ceases to be the head company of the group because it ceases to exist


    703-60(2)    


    Despite subsection (1), if:


    (a) an event described in subsection (1) happens in relation to a * consolidated group that comes into existence on the day specified in a choice under section 703-50 ; and


    (b) the event happens before the relevant notice is given to the Commissioner under section 703-58 (notice of choice to consolidate);

    the * head company of the consolidated group must give the Commissioner notice in the * approved form of the event.


    703-60(2A)    


    The notice must be given no later than:


    (a) if the *head company is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which that day occurs - the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which the head company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.


    703-60(3)    


    Despite subsection (1), if:


    (a) an event described in subsection (1) happens in relation to a * consolidated group that comes into existence at a time under subsection 703-55(1) because a * MEC group ceased to exist at that time; and


    (b) the * MEC group came into existence under paragraph 719-5(1)(a) because a choice under section 719-50 is made after that time; and


    (c) the event happens before the relevant notice is given to the Commissioner under section 719-76 (notice of choice to consolidate);

    the * head company of the consolidated group must give the Commissioner notice in the * approved form of the event.


    703-60(4)    


    The notice must be given no later than:


    (a) if the *head company is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which that day occurs - the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which the head company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.


    Effects of choice to continue group after shelf company becomes new head company  

    SECTION 703-65  

    703-65   Application  


    Sections 703-70 to 703-80 set out the effects if a company (the interposed company ) chooses under subsection 615-30(2) that a * consolidated group is to continue in existence at and after the time referred to in that subsection as the completion time.
    Note:

    The choice is one of the conditions for a compulsory roll-over under Division 615 on an exchange of shares in the head company of a consolidated group for shares in the interposed company.

    SECTION 703-70   Consolidated group continues in existence with interposed company as head company and original entity as a subsidiary member  

    703-70(1)    


    The * consolidated group is taken not to have ceased to exist under subsection 703-5(2) because the company referred to in subsection 615-30(2) as the original entity ceases to be the * head company of the group.

    703-70(2)    


    To avoid doubt, the interposed company is taken to have become the * head company of the * consolidated group at the completion time, and the original entity is taken to have ceased to be the head company at that time.
    Note:

    A further result is that the original entity is taken to have become a subsidiary member of the group at that time. Section 703-80 deals with the original entity ' s tax position for the income year that includes the completion time.


    703-70(3)    
    A provision of this Part that applies on an entity becoming a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group does not apply to an entity being taken to have become such a member as a result of this section, unless the provision is expressed to apply despite this subsection.

    Note:

    An example of the effect of this subsection is that there is no resetting under section 701-10 of the tax cost of assets of the original entity that become assets of the interposed company because of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).


    703-70(4)    
    To avoid doubt, subsection (3) does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).


    SECTION 703-75   Interposed company treated as substituted for original entity at all times before the completion time  

    703-75(1)    


    Everything that happened in relation to the original entity before the completion time:


    (a) is taken to have happened in relation to the interposed company instead of in relation to the original entity; and


    (b) is taken to have happened in relation to the interposed company instead of what would (apart from this section) be taken to have happened in relation to the interposed company before that time;

    just as if, at all times before the completion time:


    (c) the interposed company had been the original entity; and


    (d) the original entity had been the interposed company.

    Note:

    This section treats the original entity and the interposed company as having in effect exchanged identities throughout the period before the completion time, but without affecting any of the original entity ' s other attributes.


    703-75(2)    


    To avoid doubt, subsection (1) also covers everything that, immediately before the completion time, was taken, because of:


    (a) section 701-1 (Single entity rule); or


    (b) section 701-5 (Entry history rule); or


    (c) one or more previous applications of this section; or


    (d) section 719-90 (about the effects of a change of head company of a MEC group); or


    (e) section 719-125 (about the effects of a group conversion involving a MEC group);

    to have happened in relation to the original entity.


    703-75(3)    


    Subsections (1) and (2) have effect:


    (a) for the head company core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the completion time; and


    (b) for the entity core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the completion time; and


    (c) for the purposes of determining the respective balances of the * franking accounts of the original entity and the interposed company at and after the completion time.


    (d) (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)


    703-75(4)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) have effect subject to:


    (a) section 701-40 (Exit history rule); and


    (b) a provision of this Act to which section 701-40 is subject because of section 701-85 (about exceptions to the core rules in Division 701 ).

    Note:

    An example of provisions covered by paragraph (b) of this subsection is Subdivision 717-E (about transferring to a company leaving a consolidated group various surpluses under the CFC rules in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ).


    SECTION 703-80  

    703-80   Effects on the original entity ' s tax position  


    In applying section 701-30 to the original entity for the income year that includes the completion time, disregard a non-membership period that starts before the completion time.
    Note 1:

    Section 701-30 is about working out an entity ' s tax position for a period when it is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group. Its application can also affect the entity's tax position in later income years.

    Note 2:

    Under section 703-75 the interposed company inherits the original entity ' s tax position for the part of the income year that ends before the completion time, with the consequence that the original entity ' s taxable income, income tax payable, and losses of any sort, for that part are each nil.

    Because of section 703-75 and this section, the only tax payable by the original entity for the income year arises because of the application of section 701-30 to non-membership periods in the income year after the completion time.

    Division 705 - Tax cost setting amount for assets where entities become subsidiary members of consolidated groups  

    SECTION 705-1   What this Division is about  


    When an entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group, the tax cost of its assets is set at a tax cost setting amount that is worked out in accordance with this Division.

    Subdivision 705-A - Basic case: a single entity joining an existing consolidated group  

    Guide to Subdivision 705-A

    SECTION 705-5   What this Subdivision is about  


    When an entity becomes a subsidiary member of an existing consolidated group, the tax cost setting amount for its assets reflects the cost to the group of acquiring the entity.


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Application and object
    705-10 Application and object of this Subdivision
    705-15 Cases where this Subdivision does not have effect
    Tax cost setting amount for assets that joining entity brings into joined group
    705-20 Tax cost setting amount worked out under this Subdivision
    705-25 Tax cost setting amount for retained cost base assets
    705-27 Reduction in tax cost setting amount that exceeds market value of certain retained cost base assets
    705-30 What is the joining entity ' s terminating value for an asset?
    705-35 Tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets
    705-40 Tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets held on revenue account etc.
    705-45 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for accelerated depreciation assets
    705-47 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for some privatised assets
    705-50 (Repealed By No 56 of 2010 )
    705-55 Order of application of sections 705-40, 705-45 and 705-47
    705-56 Modification for tax cost setting in relation to leases
    705-56A (Repealed by No 99 of 2012)
    705-57 Adjustment to tax cost setting amount where loss of pre-CGT status of membership interests in joining entity
    705-58 Assets and liabilities not set off against each other
    705-59 Exception: treatment of linked assets and liabilities
    How to work out the allocable cost amount
    705-60 What is the joined group ' s allocable cost amount for the joining entity?
    705-62 No double counting of amounts in allocable cost amount
    705-65 Cost of membership interests in the joining entity - step 1 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-70 Liabilities of the joining entity - step 2 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-75 Liabilities of the joining entity - reductions for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-76 Liability arising from transfer or assignment of securitised assets
    705-80 Liabilities of the joining entity - reductions/increases for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-85 Liabilities of the joining entity - increases for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-90 Undistributed, taxed profits accruing to joined group before joining time - step 3 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-93 If pre-joining time roll-over from foreign resident company or head company - step 3A in working out allocable cost amount
    705-95 Pre-joining time distributions out of certain profits - step 4 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-100 Losses accruing to joined group before joining time - step 5 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-105 Continuity of holding membership interests - steps 3 to 5 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-110 If joining entity transfers a loss to the head company - step 6 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-115 If head company becomes entitled to certain deductions - step 7 in working out allocable cost amount
    705-120 (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)
    How to work out a pre-CGT factor for assets of joining entity
    705-125 Pre-CGT proportion for joining entity

    Application and object

    SECTION 705-10   Application and object of this Subdivision  


    Application

    705-10(1)    
    This Subdivision has effect, subject to section 705-15 , for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) if an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group (the joined group ) at a particular time (the joining time ).

    Object

    705-10(2)    
    The object of this Subdivision is to recognise the * head company ' s cost of becoming the holder of the joining entity ' s assets as an amount reflecting the group ' s cost of acquiring the entity. That amount consists of the cost of the group ' s * membership interests in the joining entity, increased by the joining entity ' s liabilities and adjusted to take account of the joining entity ' s retained profits, distributions of profits, deductions and losses.

    705-10(3)    
    The reason for recognising the * head company ' s cost in this way is to align the costs of assets with the costs of * membership interests, and to allow for the preservation of this alignment until the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member, in order to:


    (a) prevent double taxation of gains and duplication of losses; and


    (b) remove the need to adjust costs of membership interests in response to transactions that shift value between them, as the required adjustments occur automatically.

    Note:

    Under Division 711 , the alignment is preserved by recognising the head company's cost of membership interests in the entity if it ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group as the cost of its assets reduced by its liabilities.


    SECTION 705-15  

    705-15   Cases where this Subdivision does not have effect  


    This Subdivision does not have effect if any of the following exceptions applies:


    (a) the first exception is where the joining entity becomes a * member of the joined group because it is a member of that group at the time it comes into existence as a * consolidated group;

    Note:

    See Subdivision 705-B for rules about the treatment of assets if entities become members in circumstances covered by this exception.


    (b) the second exception is where all of the members of another consolidated group become members of the joined group as a result of the * acquisition of * membership interests in the * head company of the joining group;

    Note:

    See Subdivision 705-C for rules about the treatment of assets if entities become members in circumstances covered by this exception.


    (c) the third exception is where:


    (i) the joining entity and one or more other entities become members of the joined group at the same time as a result of an event that happens in relation to one of them; and

    (ii) the case is not covered by the second exception;
    Note:

    See Subdivision 705-D for rules about the treatment of assets if entities become members in circumstances covered by this exception.


    (d) (Repealed by No 16 of 2003)

    Tax cost setting amount for assets that joining entity brings into joined group

    SECTION 705-20  

    705-20   Tax cost setting amount worked out under this Subdivision  


    If this Subdivision has effect, for the purposes of item 1 in the table in section 701-60 (Tax cost setting amount) the * tax cost setting amount for an asset whose * tax cost is set at the time the joining entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the joined group is worked out under this Subdivision.

    SECTION 705-25   Tax cost setting amount for retained cost base assets  

    705-25(1)    
    This section states what the * tax cost setting amount is for a * retained cost base asset.

    Australian currency

    705-25(2)    


    If the * retained cost base asset is covered by paragraph (a), (b) or (ba) of the definition of that expression and is not covered by another subsection of this section, its * tax cost setting amount is equal to the amount of the Australian currency concerned.

    Qualifying securities

    705-25(3)    
    If the * retained cost base asset is a qualifying security (within the meaning of Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ), the * tax cost setting amount for the qualifying security is instead equal to the joining entity ' s * terminating value for the asset.

    Entitlements to pre-paid services etc.

    705-25(4)    
    If the * retained cost base asset is covered by paragraph (c) of the definition of that expression, its * tax cost setting amount is equal to the amount of the deductions to which the * head company is entitled under section 701-5 (the entry history rule) in respect of the expenditure that gave rise to the entitlement.

    Note:

    If the total amount to be treated as tax cost setting amounts for retained cost base assets exceeds the joined group ' s allocable cost amount for the joining entity, the head company makes a capital gain equal to the excess: see CGT event L3.



    Financial arrangements to which Subdivision 250-E applies

    705-25(4A)    


    The *tax cost setting amount is instead equal to the joining entity ' s *terminating value for the *retained cost base asset if the asset is a *financial arrangement to which Subdivision 250-E applies immediately before the joining time.

    Rights to payments in respect of uncompleted work etc

    705-25(4B)    


    If the *retained cost base asset is covered by paragraph (d) or (e) of the definition of that expression, its *tax cost setting amount is equal to the joining entity ' s *terminating value for the asset.

    Retained cost base asset

    705-25(5)    
    A retained cost base asset is:

    (a)    Australian currency, other than * trading stock or * collectables of the joining entity; or

    (b)    a right to receive a specified amount of such Australian currency, other than a right that is a marketable security within the meaning of section 70B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; or

    Example:

    A debt or a bank deposit.

    (ba)    

    a unit in a *cash management trust, if:

    (i) the redemption value of the unit is expressed in Australian dollars; and

    (ii) the redemption value of the unit cannot increase; or

    (c)    

    a right to have something done under an * arrangement under which:

    (i) expenditure has been incurred in return for the doing of the thing; and

    (ii) the thing is required or permitted to be done, or to cease being done, after the expenditure is incurred; or

    (d)    

    a * right to future income (other than a * WIP amount asset); or

    (e)    a *depreciating asset that the joining entity *holds as a result of a *balancing adjustment event mentioned in paragraph 417-30(2)(b) .

    Note 1:

    There are some additional retained cost base assets for a joining entity that is a life insurance company: see Subdivision 713-L . The tax cost setting amount for those assets is worked out under that Subdivision.

    Note 2:

    The joining entity ' s right to receive lease payments under a lease is treated as a retained cost base asset in some circumstances (see paragraph 705-56(3)(b) ).


    SECTION 705-27   Reduction in tax cost setting amount that exceeds market value of certain retained cost base assets  

    705-27(1)    
    If:


    (a) a *retained cost base asset of the joining entity is a right to receive a specified amount of such Australian currency, covered by paragraph 705-25(5)(b) ; and


    (b) the *market value of the asset is less than the *tax cost setting amount of the asset; and


    (c) the head company makes a *capital gain under *CGT event L3 (disregarding this subsection) as a result of the joining entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the group;

    reduce the tax cost setting amount of the asset by the amount of the gain (but not below zero).

    Note:

    Reducing the tax cost setting amount of the asset will also reduce the amount of the capital gain (see paragraph 104-510(1)(b) ). The amount of the capital gain might be reduced to nil.


    705-27(2)    
    If:


    (a) the requirements in subsection 701-58(1) (intra-group assets) are satisfied in relation to the asset; and


    (b) the joining entity has been entitled to a deduction for an income year ending on or before the joining time because of the *market value of the asset being less than the specified amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(a); and


    (c) the accounting liability that corresponds to the asset has not been reduced under subsection 705-75(2) ;

    reduce the amount of the reduction under subsection (1) by the amount of the deduction (but not below zero).


    705-27(3)    
    If the *tax cost setting amount of 2 or more of the joining entity's assets could be reduced in accordance with subsections (1) and (2):


    (a) subsections (1) and (2) apply sequentially to each of those assets; and


    (b) the *head company may choose the sequence of assets to which subsections (1) and (2) apply; and


    (c) if the head company does not make such a choice - subsections (1) and (2) apply sequentially to each of those assets according to the time at which they were created, from earliest to latest.

    Note:

    Once the amount of the capital gain is reduced to nil as a result of the application of subsections (1) and (2), no further reductions of tax cost setting amount can be made under those subsections.


    705-27(4)    
    A choice the *head company can make under paragraph (3)(b) must be made:


    (a) by the day the head company lodges its *income tax return for the income year in which the *CGT event happened; or


    (b) within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

    705-27(5)    
    The way the *head company prepares its *income tax return is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

    SECTION 705-30   What is the joining entity ' s terminating value for an asset ?  


    Trading stock

    705-30(1)    
    If an asset of the joining entity is *trading stock, the joining entity ' s terminating value for the asset is:


    (a) if the asset was on hand at the start of the income year in which the joining time occurs (including because of the operation of Division 701 ) - its *value at that time; or


    (b) if paragraph (a) does not apply and the asset is *live stock that was acquired by natural increase - the *cost of the asset; or


    (c) in any other case - the amount of the outgoing incurred by the joining entity in connection with the acquisition of the asset;

    increased by the amount of any outgoing forming part of the cost of the asset that is incurred by the joining entity during its current holding of the asset.



    Registered emissions units

    705-30(1A)    
    If an asset of the joining entity is a *registered emissions unit, the joining entity ' s terminating value for the unit is equal to:


    (a) if the unit was *held by the joining entity at the start of the income year - the *value of the unit at the start of the income year; or


    (b) otherwise - the expenditure incurred by the joining entity in becoming the holder of the unit.



    Qualifying securities

    705-30(2)    
    If an asset of the joining entity is a qualifying security (within the meaning of Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) that is not *trading stock, the joining entity ' s terminating value for the asset is equal to the amount of consideration that the joining entity would need to receive, if it were to dispose of the asset just before the joining time, without an amount being assessable income of, or deductible to, the joining entity under section 159GS of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Depreciating assets

    705-30(3)    


    If an asset of the joining entity is a *depreciating asset to which Division 40 applies, the joining entity ' s terminating value for the asset is equal to the asset ' s *adjustable value just before the joining time.

    Financial arrangements to which Subdivision 250-E applies

    705-30(3A)    


    If an asset of the joining entity is a *financial arrangement to which Subdivision 250-E applies, the joining entity ' s terminating value for the asset is equal to the amount of consideration that the joining entity would need to receive, if it were to dispose of the asset just before the joining time, without an amount being assessable income of, or deductible to, the joining entity under Subdivision 250-E .

    Division 230 financial arrangements

    705-30(3B)    


    If an asset of the joining entity is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement, the joining entity's terminating value for the asset is equal to the amount of consideration that the joining entity would need to receive, if it were to dispose of the asset just before the joining time, without an amount being assessable income of, or deductible to, the joining entity under Division 230 .

    Other CGT assets

    705-30(4)    
    If an asset of the joining entity is a *CGT asset that is not covered by any of the above subsections, the joining entity ' s terminating value for the asset is equal to the asset ' s *cost base just before the joining time.

    Other assets

    705-30(5)    
    The joining entity ' s terminating value for any other asset that it holds is the amount that would be the asset ' s *cost base just before the joining time if it were an asset covered by subsection (4).

    SECTION 705-35   Tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets  

    705-35(1)    


    For each asset of the joining entity (a reset cost base asset ) that is not a * retained cost base asset, the asset ' s * tax cost setting amount is worked out by:


    (a) first working out the joined group ' s * allocable cost amount for the joining entity in accordance with section 705-60 ; and


    (b) then reducing that amount by the total of the * tax cost setting amounts for each retained cost base asset (but not below zero); and


    (c) finally, allocating the result to each of the joining entity ' s reset cost base assets in proportion to their * market values.

    Note 1:

    For an asset consisting of an entitlement to receive an amount that will be included in assessable income, the market value of the asset would take into account the tax payable on the amount.

    Note 1A:

    If a set of linked assets and liabilities includes one or more reset cost base assets, section 705-59 may affect how this section applies. In particular, that section may exclude the application of paragraph 705-35(1)(b) to retained cost base assets in the set; this in turn may affect the application of CGT event L3.

    Note 2:

    If there are no reset cost base assets, the result is instead treated as a capital loss of the head company: see CGT event L4.


    705-35(2)    
    (Repealed by No 99 of 2012)



    Goodwill resulting from ownership and control of the joining entity

    705-35(3)    
    If, just after the joining time, the * head company has, because of its ownership and control of the joining entity, a goodwill asset associated with assets or businesses of the joined group:


    (a) for the head company core purposes, the asset ' s * tax cost is set at the joining time at its * tax cost setting amount; and


    (b) for the purpose of doing so:


    (i) the asset is taken to be anasset of the joining entity that becomes an asset of the head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies; and

    (ii) it is taken to have a * market value just before the joining time of an amount equal to its market value just after the joining time.

    SECTION 705-40   Tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets held on revenue account etc.  

    705-40(1)    


    The * tax cost setting amount for a reset cost base asset that is * trading stock, a * depreciating asset, a * registered emissions unit or a * revenue asset must not exceed the greater of:


    (a) the asset ' s * market value; and


    (b) the joining entity ' s * terminating value for the asset.


    705-40(2)    


    If subsection (1) reduces the asset ' s * tax cost setting amount, the amount of the reduction is allocated among the other reset cost base assets (including other * trading stock, * depreciating assets, *registered emissions units and * revenue assets), so as to increase their tax cost setting amounts, in accordance with the principles set out in subsection (3).
    Note:

    If any of the amount of the reduction cannot be allocated, it is instead treated as a capital loss of the head company: see CGT event L8.


    705-40(3)    
    These are the principles:


    (a) the allocation is to be in proportion to the * market values of the assets;


    (b) the amount allocated to an item of * trading stock, to a * depreciating asset, to a *registered emissions unit or to a * revenue asset must not cause its * tax cost setting amount to contravene subsection (1);


    (c) any of the amount that cannot be allocated is to be reallocated, to the maximum extent possible, among the remaining reset cost base assets by applying this subsection a further one or more times.


    SECTION 705-45   Reduction in tax cost setting amount for accelerated depreciation assets  

    705-45(1)    
    If:


    (a) an asset of the joining entity is a * depreciating asset to which Division 40 applies; and


    (aa) just before the entity became a subsidiary member, subsection 40-10(3) or 40-12(3) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 applied for the purposes of the joining entity working out the asset's decline in value under Division 40 ; and

    Note:

    The effect of those subsections was to preserve an entitlement to accelerated depreciation.


    (b) the asset's * tax cost setting amount would be greater than the joining entity's * terminating value for the asset; and


    (c) the * head company chooses to apply this section to the asset;

    the asset's tax cost setting amount is reduced so that it equals the terminating value.

    Note 1:

    A consequence of the choice is that accelerated depreciation will apply to the asset: see section 701-80 .

    Note 2:

    Unlike the position with a reduction in tax cost setting amount under section 705-40 , the amount of the reduction is not re-allocated among other assets.


    705-45(2)    


    If:


    (a) an asset of the joining entity is a *depreciating asset to which Division 40 applies; and


    (b) any of the following has applied before the joining entity became a *subsidiary member for the purposes of working out the asset ' s decline in value under Division 40 :


    (i) section 40-82 ;

    (ii) Subdivision 40-BA of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ;

    (iii) Subdivision 40-BB of that Act; and


    (c) the asset ' s *tax cost setting amount would be greater than the joining entity ' s *terminating value for the asset;

    the asset ' s tax cost setting amount is reduced so that it equals the terminating value.

    Note 1:

    The provisions referred to in paragraph (b) provide for an accelerated decline in value of certain assets.

    Note 2:

    Unlike the position with a reduction in tax cost setting amount under section 705-40 , the amount of the reduction is not re-allocated among other assets.


    SECTION 705-47   Reduction in tax cost setting amount for some privatised assets  


    Object

    705-47(1)    
    The object of this section is to limit appropriately the amount the * head company of the joined group can deduct for a * depreciating asset it starts to * hold because the joining entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group, by reference to the direct or indirect effect of the following provisions on the amount the joining entity could deduct for the asset:


    (a) former section 61A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about depreciation deductions for tax-exempt entities that become taxable);


    (b) former Subdivision 57-I, and Subdivision 57-J, in Schedule 2D to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about depreciation and capital allowance deductions);


    (c) Division 58 of this Act (as that Division applies to a transition time or acquisition time mentioned in that Division before, on or after 1 July 2001).



    Reduction of tax cost setting amount

    705-47(2)    
    The * tax cost setting amount for a * depreciating asset is reduced to the joining entity ' s * terminating value for the asset if:


    (a) at a time before the joining entity became a * subsidiary member of the joined group, the asset was * held by an entity (whether the joining entity or another entity) that, at that time, was:


    (i) an * exempt Australian government agency; or

    (ii) another entity whose * ordinary income and * statutory income were exempt from income tax; and


    (b) any of the following provisions directly or indirectly affected the amount the joining entity could deduct for the asset:


    (i) former section 61A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about depreciation deductions for tax-exempt entities that become taxable);

    (ii) former Subdivision 57-I, and Subdivision 57-J, in Schedule 2D to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about depreciation and * capital allowance deductions);

    (iii) Division 58 of this Act (as that Division applies to a transition time or acquisition time mentioned in that Division before, on or after 1 July 2001); and


    (c) apart from this section, the tax cost setting amount for the asset would exceed the joining entity ' s terminating value for the asset.

    Note 1:

    Unlike the position with a reduction in tax cost setting amount under section 705-40 , the amount of the reduction is not re-allocated among other assets.

    Note 2:

    Former section 61A of, or former Subdivision 57-I or Subdivision 57-J in Schedule 2D to, the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or Division 58 of this Act may, for example, have indirectly affected the amount the joining entity could deduct for the asset because:

  • (a) that section, Subdivision or Division affected the amount that could be deducted by an entity that held the asset before the joining entity and that effect extended to the joining entity because of a previous application of this subsection, roll-over relief or section 701-40 (the exit history rule); or
  • (b) this subsection affected the amount the joining entity could deduct for the asset (either directly or because of section 701-40 ).
  • Note 3:

    Subsection (2) has effect even if, just before the joining time, the joining entity was:

  • (a) an exempt Australian government agency; or
  • (b) another entity whose ordinary income and statutory income were exempt from income tax.
  • This is because section 715-900 causes Division 58 to apply as if, just before the joining time, the joining entity ' s ordinary income or statutory income had become assessable income to some extent.



    Exception to reduction of tax cost setting amount

    705-47(3)    
    Subsection (2) does not apply if:


    (a) just before the joining time, the joining entity was neither an * exempt Australian government agency nor another entity whose * ordinary income and * statutory income were exempt from income tax; and


    (b) a condition in subsection (4) or (5) is met in relation to the period (the pre-joining taxable period ) between the last time for which the condition in paragraph (2)(a) is met and the joining time.

    705-47(4)    
    One condition for subsection (2) not to apply is that an amount was included in an entity ' s assessable income, or an entity could deduct an amount, because of a * balancing adjustment event that occurred for the asset during the pre-joining taxable period.

    705-47(5)    
    Another condition for subsection (2) not to apply is that:


    (a) for at least some of the pre-joining taxable period, the asset was * held by the * head company of a * consolidated group (the earlier group ) for the period (the earlier group period ):


    (i) starting when (and because) an entity that had previously held the asset became a * subsidiary member of the earlier group or when the asset started to be held by that company because of an asset sale situation described in subsection 58-5(4) involving a * member of the earlier group as the purchaser mentioned in that subsection; and

    (ii) ending when (and because) an entity ceased to be a subsidiary member of the earlier group or when the earlier group ceased to exist; and


    (b) the company that was the head company of the earlier group just before the end of the earlier group period was not :


    (i) an * associate of the head company of the joined group just before the joining time; or

    (ii) the same company as the head company of the joined group; and


    (c) the earlier group period was at least 24 months.

    705-50   (Repealed) SECTION 705-50 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for over-depreciated assets  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

    SECTION 705-55  

    705-55   Order of application of sections 705-40, 705-45 and 705-47  


    If more than one of sections 705-40 , 705-45 and 705-47 apply:


    (a) the * head company may choose the order in which the sections are to apply; and


    (b) if it does not, the order is as follows:


    (i) first, section 705-40 ;

    (ii) second, section 705-45 ;

    (iii) third, section 705-47 .

    (iv) (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

    SECTION 705-56   Modification for tax cost setting in relation to leases  


    Application of this section

    705-56(1)    


    This section applies if, just before the joining time, the joining entity is the lessor or lessee under a lease of a *depreciating asset (the underlying asset ) to which Division 40 applies.

    Joining entity is lessor

    705-56(2)    
    If the joining entity is the lessor under the lease and * holds the underlying asset just before the joining time, subsection (5) applies, in relation to the joining entity, to the asset that is the joining entity ' s right to receive lease payments.

    Note:

    In this situation, the underlying asset will have its tax cost set at the joining time because it would be an asset of the joining entity at that time if the single entity rule did not apply (see section 701-10 ).


    705-56(3)    
    If the joining entity is the lessor under the lease and does not * hold the underlying asset just before the joining time:

    (a)    subsection (5) applies to the underlying asset in relation to the joining entity; and

    (b)    for the purposes of this Division:


    (i) the joining entity ' s right to receive lease payments is taken to be a * retained cost base asset; and

    (ii) the * tax cost setting amount of that retained cost base asset is taken to be equal to its * market value just before the joining time.
    Note:

    In this situation, the asset that is the joining entity ' s right to receive lease payments will have its tax cost set at the joining time because it would be an asset of the joining entity at that time if the single entity rule did not apply (see section 701-10 ).



    Joining entity is lessee

    705-56(4)    
    If the joining entity is the lessee under the lease and does not * hold the underlying asset just before the joining time:

    (a)    subsection (5) applies to the underlying asset in relation to the joining entity; and

    (b)    the liability that is the lessee ' s obligation to make lease payments is not taken into account under subsection 705-70(1) .

    Note:

    If the joining entity is the lessee under the lease and holds the underlying asset just before the joining time:

  • (a) the underlying asset will have its tax cost set at the joining time because it would be an asset of the joining entity at that time if the single entity rule did not apply (see section 701-10 ); and
  • (b) the liability that is the lessee ' s obligation to make lease payments is taken into account under subsection 705-70(1) .


  • Tax cost of certain assets set at nil

    705-56(5)    
    If this subsection applies to an asset, in relation to the joining entity:

    (a)    the asset is not taken into account under paragraph 705-35(1)(b) or (c) ; and

    (b)    the asset ' s * tax cost setting amount is taken to be nil.


    705-56A   (Repealed) SECTION 705-56A Modification for tax cost setting in relation to certain rights to future income  
    (Repealed by No 99 of 2012)

    SECTION 705-57   Adjustment to tax cost setting amount where loss of pre-CGT status of membership interests in joining entity  


    Object

    705-57(1)    


    The object of this section is to ensure that provisions that cause * membership interests in the joining entity to stop being * pre-CGT assets, with a resultant increase in their * cost base and * reduced cost base, do not increase * tax cost setting amounts for * trading stock, * depreciating assets, *registered emissions units or * revenue assets of the joining entity, where those amounts are above the joining entity ' s * terminating values for the assets.

    When section applies

    705-57(2)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a * membership interest that a * member of the joined group holds in the joining entity at the joining time had previously stopped being a * pre-CGT asset in the circumstances covered by any of subsections (3) to (5); and


    (b) the * cost base or * reduced cost base of the membership interest just after it stopped being a pre-CGT asset exceeded (the excess being the loss of pre-CGT status adjustment amount ) its cost base or reduced cost base just before it stopped being a pre-CGT asset; and


    (c) an asset (a revenue etc. asset ) that is * trading stock, a * depreciating asset, a *registered emissions unit or a * revenue asset becomes that of the * head company of the joined group because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies when the joining entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group; and


    (d) the revenue etc. asset ' s * tax cost setting amount (after any application of section 705-40 , 705-45 or 705-47 ) exceeds the joining entity ' s * terminating value for the asset.



    Loss of pre-CGT status because Division 149 etc. applied while interest held by member

    705-57(3)    


    The first circumstance for the purpose of paragraph (2)(a) is where Division 149 of this Act, former subsection 160ZZS(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or Subdivision C of Division 20 of former Part IIIA of that Act applied to cause the * membership interest to stop being a * pre-CGT asset while the * member held the membership interest.

    Loss of pre-CGT status because Division 149 etc. applied before current holding by member

    705-57(4)    
    The second circumstance for the purpose of paragraph (2)(a) is where:


    (a) either:


    (i) the * member * acquired the * membership interest directly from another entity; or

    (ii) the member acquired the membership interest indirectly from another entity or from itself as a result of 2 or more acquisitions; and


    (b) Division 149 of this Act, former subsection 160ZZS(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or Subdivision C of Division 20 of former Part IIIA of that Act applied to cause the membership interest to stop being a * pre-CGT asset while the other entity held the membership interest or while the member held the membership interest on the previous occasion; and


    (c) if subparagraph (a)(i) applies - at the time of the acquisition, the member * controlled (for value shifting purposes) the other entity, or vice versa, or a third entity controlled (for value shifting purposes) the member and the other entity; and


    (d) if subparagraph (a)(ii) applies - the same entity:


    (i) was a party to each acquisition and at the time of the acquisition controlled (for value shifting purposes) the other party; or

    (ii) was a party to each acquisition and at the time of the acquisition was controlled (for value shifting purposes) by the other party; or

    (iii) was not a party to each acquisition but, at the time of the acquisition, controlled (for value shifting purposes) the parties to the acquisition;

    or any combination of subparagraphs (i) to (iii) occurred in relation to different acquisitions.



    Loss of pre-CGT status because of acquisition from another entity

    705-57(5)    
    The third circumstance for the purpose of paragraph (2)(a) is where:


    (a) either:


    (i) the * member acquired the * membership interest after 16 May 2002 directly from another entity; or

    (ii) the member acquired the membership interest indirectly from another entity or from itself as a result of 2 or more acquisitions, all of which took place after 16 May 2002; and


    (b) the membership interest stopped being a * pre-CGT asset because of the acquisition from the other entity or from the member while the member held the membership interest on a previous occasion; and


    (c) if subparagraph (a)(i) applies - at the time of the acquisition, the member * controlled (for value shifting purposes) the other entity, or vice versa, or a third entity controlled (for value shifting purposes) the member and the other entity; and


    (d) if subparagraph (a)(ii) applies - the same entity:


    (i) was a party to each acquisition and at the time of the acquisition controlled (for value shifting purposes) the other parties; or

    (ii) was a party to each acquisition and at the time of the acquisition was controlled (for value shifting purposes) by the other party; or

    (iii) was not a party to each acquisition but, at the time of the acquisition, controlled (for value shifting purposes) the parties to the acquisition;
    or any combination of subparagraphs (i) to (iii) occurred in relation to different acquisitions.

    Reduction in revenue etc. asset ' s tax cost setting amount

    705-57(6)    


    The revenue etc. asset ' s * tax cost setting amount (after any application of section 705-40 , 705-45 or 705-47 ) is instead the amount that would apply if, in working out the step 1 amount in the table in section 705-60 , the * cost base and * reduced cost base of the * membership interest were reduced by the sum of the loss of pre-CGT status adjustment amounts for the membership interest and all other membership interests that have loss of pre-CGT status adjustment amounts.

    Limit on reduction

    705-57(7)    


    However, the reduction only takes place to the extent that it does not result in the asset ' s * tax cost setting amount being less than the joining entity ' s * terminating value for the asset.
    Note:

    The reduction under this section is converted into a capital loss available over a period of 5 income years starting with the income year in which the joining time occurs: see CGT event L1.



    SECTION 705-58   Assets and liabilities not set off against each other  

    705-58(1)    


    This Part applies separately to each asset and liability even if, in accordance with * accounting principles, they are required to be set off against each other.

    705-58(2)    
    This section has effect subject to section 705-59 .


    SECTION 705-59   Exception: treatment of linked assets and liabilities  

    705-59(1)    
    This section applies to each set of * linked assets and liabilities that the joining entity has immediately before the joining time.

    705-59(2)    


    One or more assets, and one or more liabilities, that an entity has constitute a set of linked assets and liabilities of the entity if, and only if, in accordance with the entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting:


    (a) the total of the one or more assets is to be set off against the total of the one or more liabilities in preparing statements of the entity ' s financial position; and


    (b) the net amount after the set-off is to be recognised in those statements.


    705-59(3)    
    If the set consists only of one reset cost base asset for the purposes of section 705-35 , and one or more liabilities:


    (a) first, work out the total (the available amount ) that, apart from this section and the accounting requirement referred to in subsection (2) of this section, would be taken into account under subsection 705-70(1) (about step 2 in working out the allocable cost amount) for the one or more liabilities; and


    (b) next, work out the consequences under this table.


    Treatment of linked assets and liabilities: single reset cost base asset case
    Item If the asset ' s * market value at the joining time: This is the result for the asset: This is the result for the one or more liabilities:
    1 is less than or equal to the available amount its * tax cost setting amount is that market value (and the asset is not taken into account under paragraph 705-35(1)(c)) only the difference (if any) is taken into account under subsection 705-70(1) for the one or more liabilities
    2 is greater than the available amount its * tax cost setting amount is:

    (a) the available amount; plus

    (b) the amount worked out for the asset under section 705-35 on the basis that the asset ' s * market value is reduced by the available amount
    the one or more liabilities are not taken into account under subsection 705-70(1)

    Note:

    Paragraph 705-35(1)(c) allocates the allocable cost amount (as reduced by the tax cost setting amounts of retained cost base assets) among the joining entity ' s reset cost base assets.


    705-59(4)    
    If the set consists only of one or more * retained cost base assets and one or more liabilities, this section does not affect their treatment.

    Note:

    This is because the tax cost setting amount for a retained cost base asset is worked out without regard to the allocable cost amount.


    705-59(5)    
    In any other case:


    (a) first, work out the available amount under paragraph (3)(a); and


    (b) next, work out the consequences under this table.


    Treatment of linked assets and liabilities: all other cases
    Item In this case: This is the result for the one or more assets in the set: This is the result for the one or more liabilities in the set:
    1 there is no * retained cost base asset in the set, and the total of the respective * market values (at the joining time) of the assets in the set is less than or equal to the available amount the * tax cost setting amount of each of the assets is that asset ' s market value at the joining time (and none of them is taken into account under paragraph 705-35(1)(c)) only the difference (if any) is taken into account under subsection 705-70(1)
    2 there is no * retained cost base asset in the set, and the total of the respective * market values (at the joining time) of the assets in the set is greater than the available amount the * tax cost setting amount of each of the assets is the sum of:

    (a) a share of the available amount that is proportionate to that asset ' s market value at the joining time; and

    (b) the amount worked out for the asset under section 705-35 on the basis that the asset ' s market value at the joining time is reduced by the share referred to in paragraph (a)
    none is taken into account under subsection 705-70(1)
    3 there are one or more * retained cost base assets in the set, and the total of their respective * tax cost setting amounts is greater than or equal to the available amount this section does not affect the treatment of the one or more assets in the set this section does not affect the treatment of the one or more liabilities in the set
    4 there are one or more * retained cost base assets in the set, and the total (the retained cost base total ) of their respective * tax cost setting amounts is less than the available amount the one or more retained cost base assets are not taken into account under paragraph 705-35(1)(b);

    the * tax cost setting amount of each remaining asset in the set is worked out by applying item 1 or 2, as appropriate, of this table on the basis that:

    (a) the available amount is reduced by the retained cost base total; and

    (b) the one or more retained cost base assets are otherwise ignored
    the available amount is reduced by the retained cost base total

    Note 1:

    Paragraph 705-35(1)(b) reduces the allocable cost amount by the tax cost setting amounts of retained cost base assets. Item 4 of the table in this subsection excludes the application of paragraph 705-35(1)(b)to retained cost base assets in the set; this in turn may affect the application of CGT event L3.

    Note 2:

    Paragraph 705-35(1)(c) then allocates the reduced allocable cost amount among the joining entity ' s reset cost base assets.


    705-59(6)    
    In applying subsections (3), (4) and (5) of this section, disregard an asset covered by subsection 705-35(2) (assets that do not have a tax cost setting amount).

    705-59(7)    


    This section does not affect the application of sections 705-40 , 705-45 and 705-47 (which adjust the tax cost setting amount for a reset cost base asset).

    How to work out the allocable cost amount

    SECTION 705-60  

    705-60   What is the joined group ' s allocable cost amount for the joining entity?  


    Work out the joined group ' s allocable cost amount for the joining entity in this way:


    Working out the joined group ' s allocable cost amount for the joining entity
    Step What the step requires Purpose of the step
    1 Start with the step 1 amount worked out under section 705-65, which is about the cost of * membership interests in the joining entity held by * members of the joined group To ensure that the allocable cost amount includes the cost of * acquiring the membership interests
    2 Add to the result of step 1 the step 2 amount worked out under section 705-70, which is about the value of the joining entity ' s liabilities To ensure that the joining entity ' s liabilities at the joining time, which are part of the joined group ' s cost of acquiring the joining entity, are reflected in the allocable cost amount
    3 Add to the result of step 2 the step 3 amount worked out under:
    (a) section 705-90, which is about undistributed, taxed profits accruing to the joined group before the joining time; or
    (b) if the joining entity is a trust (and not a * corporate tax entity) - section 713-25, which is about undistributed, realised profits accruing to the joined group before the joining timethat could be distributed tax free
    To increase the allocable cost amount:
    (a) to reflect the undistributed, taxed profits and so prevent double taxation; or
    (b) if the joining entity is a trust - to reflect the undistributed, realised profits that could be distributed tax free
    3A For each step 3A amount (if any) under section 705-93 (which is about pre-joining time roll-overs):
    (a) if the step 3A amount is a *deferred roll-over loss - add to the result of step 3 (as affected by any previous application of this step) the step 3A amount; or
    (b) if the step 3A amount is a *deferred roll-over gain - subtract from the result of step 3 (as affected by any previous application of this step) the step 3A amount
    To adjust for certain roll-overs before the joining time affecting deferred gains and losses
    4 Subtract from the result of step 3A the step 4 amount worked out under section 705-95, which is about pre-joining time distributions out of certain profits To prevent the allocable cost amount reflecting return of part of the amount paid to * acquire the * membership interests in the joining entity
    5 Subtract from the result of step 4 the step 5 amount worked out under section 705-100, which is about certain losses accruing to the joined group before the joining time To prevent:

    (a) a double benefit arising from the losses; and

    (b) losses that cannot be transferred to the * head company, or are cancelled by the head company, under Subdivision 707-A being reinstated in an unrealised form or reducing unrealised gains.
    6 Subtract from the result of step 5 the step 6 amount worked out under section 705-110, which is about losses that the joining entity transferred to the * head company under Subdivision 707-A To stop the joined group getting benefits both through higher * tax cost setting amounts for the joining entity ' s assets and through losses transferred to the head company
    7 Subtract from the result of step 6 the step 7 amount worked out under section 705-115, which is about certain deductions to which the * head company is entitled To stop the joined group getting benefits both through the * tax cost of the joining entity ' s assets being set and through certain tax deductions of the joining entity being inherited by the head company
    8 If the remaining amount is positive, it is the joined group ' s allocable cost amount. Otherwise the joined group ' s allocable cost amount is nil.  

    Note:

    The head company may be taken to have made a capital gain, depending on the amount remaining after applying step 3A: see CGT event L2.

    SECTION 705-62   No double counting of amounts in allocable cost amount  

    705-62(1)    
    The object of this section is to prevent a particular amount from being taken into account more than once in calculating the *allocable cost amount for the joining entity, in order to promote the object of this Subdivision set out in section 705-10 .

    705-62(2)    
    Subsection (3) applies if, apart from this section, 2 or more provisions of this Act operate with the result of altering:


    (a) the *allocable cost amount for the joining entity; or


    (b) the allocable cost amount for another entity that becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at the joining time;

    because of a particular economic attribute of the joining entity (see subsection (6)).


    705-62(3)    
    Only one of those alterations is to be made, as follows:


    (a) if the *head company of the group makes a choice in accordance with subsections (4) and (5) - the alteration specified in the choice is to be made;


    (b) otherwise - the alteration that is most appropriate (in the light of the object of this Subdivision) is to be made.

    705-62(4)    
    A choice mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) must be made:


    (a) by the day the *head company of the group lodges its *income tax return for the income year in which the joining time occurs; or


    (b) within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

    705-62(5)    
    A choice mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) must be made in writing.

    705-62(6)    
    The economic attributes of the joining entity mentioned in subsection (2) include the following:


    (a) the joining entity's retained profits;


    (b) the joining entity's distributions of profits to other entities;


    (c) the joining entity's realised and unrealised losses;


    (d) the joining entity's deductions;


    (e) the joining entity's accounting liabilities (within the meaning of subsection 705-70(1) );


    (f) consideration received by the joining entity for issuing *membership interests in itself.

    SECTION 705-65   Cost of membership interests in the joining entity - step 1 in working out allocable cost amount  

    705-65(1)    
    For the purposes of step 1 in the table in section 705-60 , the step 1 amount is the sum of the following amounts for each * membership interest that * members of the joined group hold in the joining entity at the joining time:

    Note:

    If the joining entity is a trust, the step 1 amount may be increased by section 713-20 for settled capital that could be distributed tax free in respect of discretionary interests in the trust.


    Working out the step 1 amount
    Item If the market value of the membership interest is … The amount is …
    1 equal to or greater than its *cost base its cost base
    2 less than its *cost base but greater than its *reduced cost base its *market value
    3 less than or equal to its *reduced cost base its reduced cost base

    Note:

    Under section 716-855 , if membership interests are pre-CGT assets that have been subject to certain roll-overs, the cost base and reduced cost base are worked out in the same way as if they were post-CGT assets.



    No indexation of cost base of pre-CGT membership interests

    705-65(2)    
    If the * membership interest is a * pre-CGT asset, in working out its * cost base for the purposes of subsection (1) no element is indexed.

    Adjustment if value shifting or loss transfer provision could apply

    705-65(3)    


    If, on the assumption that a * CGT event had happened just before the joining time in relation to the * membership interest, the * cost base or the * reduced cost base of the membership interest would have been changed by a provision of this Act, then the cost base or reduced cost base of the membership interest that is to be used in subsection (1) of this section is instead:


    (a) the cost base as it would have been so changed; or


    (b) the reduced cost base, as it would have been so changed, but ignoring the amount of any reduction resulting from the application of former subsection 160ZK(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    Note:

    For example, a change in the cost base or reduced cost base may be required under provisions that apply where a loss transfer or value shift involving the joining entity has occurred.


    705-65(3AA)    


    If, on the assumption that:


    (a) the * members of the joined group had, just before the joining time, * disposed of their * membership interest in the joining entity; and


    (b) the consideration received by the members for the disposal were equal to the * market value of the membership interest at that time;

    they would have made a * capital loss that section 727-615 would have reduced (because of an indirect value shift), then the * reduced cost base of the membership interest that is to be used in subsection (1) of this section is reduced by the amount of that reduction.



    Reduction if section 165-115ZD could apply

    705-65(3A)    


    If, on the assumption that:


    (a) the * members of the joined group had, just before the joining time, * disposed of their * membership interest in the joining entity; and


    (b) the consideration received by the members for the disposal were equal to the * market value of the membership interest at that time;

    the * reduced cost base of the membership interest would have been reduced as a result of the operation of section 165-115ZD of this Act or the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 , then the reduced cost base of the membership interest that is to be used in subsection (1) of this section is reduced by the amount of that reduction.



    Certain provisions not to apply after joining time

    705-65(4)    


    Also, if a provision mentioned in subsection (3), (3AA) or (3A) would, because of events that happened before the joining time, apply to a * CGT event or a * realisation event that happens after the joining time in relation to the * members ' * membership interests in the joining entity, the provision does not so apply.

    Reduction in cost base under subsection 110-55(7) to be added back

    705-65(5)    
    If, in working out the * reduced cost base of the * membership interest for the purposes of subsection (1), a reduction has taken place under subsection 110-55(7) (about certain distributions of pre-acquisition profits), the reduced cost base is increased by the amount of that reduction.

    Reduction in reduced cost base under subsection 165-115ZA(3) to be added back

    705-65(5A)    


    If:


    (a) in working out the * reduced cost base of the * membership interest for the purposes of subsection (1), a reduction has taken place under subsection 165-115ZA(3) (about alterations in ownership or control of loss companies); and


    (b) the reduction is to some extent attributable to so much of an amount that was taken into account both in working out the amount of the reduction and in working out:


    (i) the step 5 amount under section 705-100 ; or

    (ii) the step 6 amount under section 705-110 ;

    the reduced cost base is, to the extent mentioned in paragraph (b), increased by:


    (c) if subparagraph (b)(i) applies - the amount of that reduction; or


    (d) if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies - the amount of that reduction multiplied by the * corporate tax rate.


    705-65(5B)    


    For the purposes of working out the * cost base or * reduced cost base of a * membership interest under subsection (1), if:


    (a) either or both of the following things happen after the joining time:


    (i) money is paid, or becomes required to be paid, in respect of * acquiring the membership interest;

    (ii) property is given, or becomes required to be given, in respect of acquiring the membership interest; and


    (b) because the thing happened after the joining time, it was not taken into account in working out the first element of the cost base or reduced cost base of the membership interest;

    Note:

    This would be the case if the money was only to be paid etc. if a contingency happened after the joining time.

    the thing is nevertheless so taken into account, and taken always to have been so taken into account.



    Non-membership equity interests

    705-65(6)    


    For the purposes of this section, if at the joining time a *member of the joined group holds a *non-membership equity interest in the joining entity, that non-membership equity interest is treated as if it were a *membership interest in the joining entity.

    SECTION 705-70   Liabilities of the joining entity - step 2 in working out allocable cost amount  

    705-70(1)    


    For the purposes of step 2 in the table in section 705-60 , the step 2 amount is worked out by adding up the amounts of each thing (an accounting liability ) that, in accordance with the joining entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, is a liability of the joining entity at the joining time.
    Note:

    Certain liabilities of a life insurance company are worked out under Subdivision 713-L : see section 713-520 .


    705-70(1A)    
    (Repealed by No 14 of 2018)



    Exclusion for deferred tax liability

    705-70(1B)    


    An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability that is an amount recorded in a deferred tax liability account in accordance with the joining entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting.

    705-70(1C)    


    Subsection (1B) does not apply to an accounting liability that relates to an asset mentioned in paragraph 713-515(1)(a) or (b) (certain assets of life insurance company).

    Exclusion for deductible liability

    705-70(1AA)    


    Subsection (1AB) applies if:


    (a) the accounting liability is covered by subsection (1AC); and


    (b) assuming that the *head company had made a payment to discharge the accounting liability to the extent that it is covered under that subsection just after the joining time, that payment would result in an amount equal to all or part of the accounting liability being a deduction to the head company of the group.


    705-70(1AB)    


    An amount is not to be added for the accounting liability under subsection (1) to the extent of that deduction.

    705-70(1AC)    


    A liability is covered by this subsection except to the extent that:


    (a) any of the following provisions apply in relation to the liability:


    (i) section 713-520 (certain liabilities etc. of life insurance company that joins a consolidated group);

    (ii) section 715-375 (accounting liabilities that are, or are part of, a Division 230 financial arrangement held by an entity that joins a consolidated group); or


    (b) section 713-515 (certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where lifeinsurance company joins a consolidated group) applies in relation to an asset to which the liability relates; or


    (c) the liability is any of the following:


    (i) the outstanding claims liability of a *general insurance company, or a private health insurer (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 ), under *general insurance policies;

    (ii) the unearned premium liability of a general insurance company, or a private health insurer (within the meaning of that Act), under general insurance policies;

    (iii) the unexpired risk liability of a general insurance company, or a private health insurer (within the meaning of that Act), under general insurance policies; or


    (d) the liability arises under any of the following:


    (i) a *retirement village residence contract;

    (ii) a *retirement village services contract.

    705-70(1AD)    


    To avoid doubt, for the purposes of paragraph (1AC)(c), section 713-710 (certain liabilities, reserves, costs etc. of general insurance company that joins or leaves a consolidated group) does not affect the amount of the liability.

    Exclusion where transfer of accounting liability

    705-70(2)    
    An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability that arises because of the joining entity ' s ownership of an asset if, on *disposal of the asset, the accounting liability will transfer to the new owner.

    Example:

    A liability to rehabilitate a mine site, where, under legislation or a licence, the liability will be transferred to the new owner on disposal of the mine.

    Note:

    Adjustments reducing or increasing the amount under this section are made by sections 705-75 to 705-85 .



    Joining entity ' s accounting principles for tax cost setting

    705-70(3)    


    The joining entity ' s accounting principles for tax cost setting are the *accounting principles that the entity would use if it were to prepare its financial statements just before the joining time.

    Exclusion of amounts for certain securitisation liabilities

    705-70(4)    


    An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability of the joining entity under subsection (1) if the accounting liability is covered under section 705-76 (securitisation liabilities).

    SECTION 705-75   Liabilities of the joining entity - reductions for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount  


    Reduction for future deduction

    705-75(1A)    


    Subsection (1) applies to an accounting liability to the extent that it is a liability of a kind described in:


    (a) paragraph 705-70(1AC)(c) ; or


    (b) paragraph 705-70(1AC)(d) .


    705-75(1)    


    If some or all of an accounting liability will result in a deduction to the *head company, the amount to be added for the accounting liability under subsection 705-70(1) is reduced by the following amount:


    [ Deduction × *Corporate tax rate] Double-counting adjustment

    where:

    double-counting adjustment
    means the amount of any reduction that has already occurred in the accounting liability under subsection 705-70(1) to take account of the future availability of the deduction.



    Reduction for intra-group liabilities

    705-75(2)    
    If the amount of an accounting liability of the joining entity that is owed to a *member of the joined group is more than the amount applicable under the following table, the amount to be added for the accounting liability under subsection 705-70(1) instead equals the amount applicable under the table.


    Graphic
    Graphic
    Amount applicable
    Item If the market value of the member ' s asset constituted by the accounting liability is … The amount applicable is …
    1 equal to or greater than the asset ' s *cost base the asset ' s cost base
    2 less than the asset ' s *cost base but greater than its *reduced cost base the asset ' s *market value
    3 less than or equal to the asset ' s *reduced cost base the asset ' s reduced cost base



    Application of subsections 705-65(2), (3), (3AA) and (3A)

    705-75(3)    


    Subsections 705-65(2) , (3), (3AA) and (3A) apply in relation to references in subsection (2) of this section to an asset ' s *cost base or *reduced cost base in a corresponding way to that in which they apply in relation to references in the table in subsection 705-65(1) to a *membership interest ' s cost base or reduced cost base.

    Application of subsection 705-65(4)

    705-75(4)    


    Subsection 705-65(4) applies in relation to assets mentioned in subsection (2) of this section in a corresponding way to that in which it applies in relation to members ' *membership interests.

    Reduction in reduced cost base under subsection 165-115ZA(3) to be added back

    705-75(5)    


    If:


    (a) in working out the *reduced cost base of a *member ' s asset for the purposes of subsection (2), a reduction has taken place under subsection 165-115ZA(3) (about alterations in ownership or control of loss companies); and


    (b) the reduction is to some extent attributable to so much of an amount that was taken into account both in working out the amount of the reduction and in working out:


    (i) the step 5 amount under section 705-100 ; or

    (ii) the step 6 amount under section 705-110 ;

    the reduced cost base is, to the extent mentioned in paragraph (b), increased by:


    (c) if subparagraph (b)(i) applies - the amount of that reduction; or


    (d) if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies - the amount of that reduction multiplied by the *corporate tax rate.


    SECTION 705-76  

    705-76   Liability arising from transfer or assignment of securitised assets  


    This section covers an accounting liability (the securitisation liability ) if the following circumstances exist:


    (a) (Repealed by No 14 of 2018)


    (b) in working out the step 2 amount mentioned in subsection 705-70(1) in relation to the joining entity, an amount would be added under that subsection for the securitisation liability (disregarding subsection 705-70(4) );


    (c) the joining entity transferred or equitably assigned one or more assets (the underlying securitised assets ) to another entity before the joining time;


    (d) the securitisation liability:


    (i) arose from the transfer or equitable assignment of the underlying securitised assets; and

    (ii) is a liability of the joining entity at the joining time (according to the joining entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting);


    (e) the other entity was established for the purpose of securitising assets;


    (f) the underlying securitised assets were securitised in accordance with that purpose before the joining time;


    (g) at the joining time the *market value of the joining entity ' s interest in the underlying securitised assets is nil, or is substantially less than the amount of the securitisation liability.

    SECTION 705-80   Liabilities of the joining entity - reductions/increases for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount  


    Application

    705-80(1A)    


    This section applies to an accounting liability to the extent that it is a liability of a kind described in:


    (a) paragraph 705-70(1AC)(c) ; or


    (b) paragraph 705-70(1AC)(d) .



    Adjustment for unrealised gains and losses

    705-80(1)    
    If:


    (a) for income tax purposes, an accounting liability, or a change in the amount of an accounting liability, (other than one owed to a *member of the joined group) is taken into account at a later time than is the case in accordance with the joining entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting; and


    (b) assuming that, for income tax purposes the accounting liability or change were taken into account at the same time as is the case in accordance with those standards or statements, the joined group ' s allocable cost amount would be different;

    Note:

    The difference would arise because subsection 705-70(1) includes income tax liabilities and steps 3 and 5 of the table in section 705-60 are affected by the time at which changes in liabilities are taken into account for income tax purposes.

    then the amount to be added under subsection 705-70(1) for the accounting liability is:


    (c) if the difference is an increase - increased by the amount of the increase; and


    (d) if the difference is a decrease - decreased by the amount of the decrease.



    Use of reliable estimate

    705-80(2)    
    In working out for the purposes of subsection (1) an amount at a particular time or in respect of a particular period, use the most reliable basis for estimation that is available.

    Example:

    The amount of a change in liability for employee leave entitlements over a period.


    SECTION 705-85   Liabilities of the joining entity - increases for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount  


    Increase in step 2 amount for employee share interests

    705-85(1)    
    If any * membership interest (an employee share interest ) in the joining entity needed to be disregarded under section 703-35 in order for the joining entity to be a * wholly-owned subsidiary of the * head company at the joining time, the step 2 amount worked out under section 705-70 is increased by the sum of the * market values of those interests, reduced in each case by the reduction amount (if any) worked out under subsection (2) of this section.

    Reduction amount

    705-85(2)    
    There is a reduction amount if the * market value of the employee share interest at the time it was * acquired by the employee is more than the consideration paid or given for its acquisition. The reduction amount is worked out by multiplying the market value of the employee share interest at that time by the factor worked out using the formula:


    where:

    market value of all membership interests
    means the * market value of all * membership interests in the joining entity just before the employee share interest was * acquired.

    market value of head company's membership interests
    means the * market value, just before the employee share interest was * acquired, of any * membership interests that the * head company held, directly or indirectly in the joining entity, continuously from that time until the joining time.



    Increase to cover certain non-membership equity interests and certain equity interests

    705-85(3)    
    The step 2 amount worked out under section 705-70 is increased by:


    (a) the amount that would be the balance of the joining entity's *non-share capital account, assuming that:


    (i) if the joining entity is not a company - the joining entity were a company; and

    (ii) each *non-membership equity interest (if any) in the joining entity held at the joining time by a person other than a *member of the joined group were a *non-share equity interest in the joining entity; and

    (iii) the non-share equity interests (if any) mentioned in subparagraph (ii) were the only non-share equity interests in the joining entity; and


    (b) the *market value of each thing that, in accordance with the joining entity's * accounting principles for tax cost setting, is equity in the joining entity at the joining time, where the thing is also a * debt interest.



    Increase to cover ADI restructure preference share interests

    705-85(4)    


    If any *share in the joining entity needed to be disregarded under section 703-37 in order for the joining entity to be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *head company at the joining time, the step 2 amount worked out under section 705-70 is increased by the sum of the *market values of those shares.

    SECTION 705-90   Undistributed, taxed profits accruing to joined group before joining time - step 3 in working out allocable cost amount  

    705-90(1)    


    For the purposes of step 3 in the table in section 705-60 , the step 3 amount is worked out in accordance with this section unless the joining entity is a trust that is not a *corporate tax entity at the joining time.
    Note:

    If the joining entity is such a trust, the step 3 amount is instead worked out in accordance with section 713-25 .



    Undistributed profits

    705-90(2)    


    First work out the undistributed profits of the joining entity at the joining time. These are the amounts that, in accordance with the joining entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, are retained profits of the joining entity.

    705-90(2A)    


    However, if a loss that did not accrue to the joined group before the joining time (subsection (8) states what it means for a loss to accrue to the joined group before the joining time) would be taken into account in working out the undistributed profits, the loss is not so taken into account.

    705-90(2B)    


    Also, if an amount is not added under subsection 705-70(1) for an accounting liability to an extent because of subsection 705-70(1AB) , the accounting liability is not to be taken into account, to that extent, in working out the undistributed profits.

    Extent to which tax paid on undistributed profits

    705-90(3)    


    Then work out how much of the undistributed profits does not exceed the amount worked out using the following formula as at the joining time:


      Balance of *franking account (worked out on assumptions in subsection (4)) × Applicable gross-up rate

    where:

    applicable gross-up rate
    means the joining entity ' s *corporate tax gross-up rate for the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30 applies, for the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, at the joining time.



    Assumptions for purposes of subsection (3)

    705-90(4)    
    The assumptions are that the joining entity ' s franking account balance at the end of the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30 applies, of the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, at the joining time had been adjusted to take account of franking credits or franking debits that would arise if the following were paid just before the joining time:


    (a) the income tax, or refund of income tax, on the joining entity ' s taxable income for that income year; and


    (b) any income tax, or refund of income tax, that has not yet been paid (regardless of whether it has become payable or due for payment) on the joining entity ' s taxable income for any earlier income year, other than one excluded by subsection (5).



    Exclusion of certain income years where previous membership of a consolidated group

    705-90(5)    
    If the joining entity was previously a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group, any income year earlier than the one that started, or, if section 701-30 applies, the one that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to have started, when the joining entity ceased to be a subsidiary member of that group is excluded for the purposes of paragraph (4)(b) of this section.

    Undistributed profits must have accrued to joined group

    705-90(6)    


    Next, work out the extent to which the undistributed profits that satisfy the requirements of subsection (3) accrued to the joined group before the joining time (subsection (7) states what it means for a profit to accrue to the joined group before the joining time). The result is the step 3 amount.

    Profit accruing to the joined group before the joining time

    705-90(7)    
    A profit accrued to the joined group before the joining time if, on the following assumptions:


    (a) that it was distributed to holders of *membership interests as it accrued; and


    (b) that entities interposed between the *head company and the joining entity successively distributed any of it immediately after receiving it;

    it would have been received by the entity that is the head company at the joining time, in respect of membership interests that it held continuously until that time either directly or indirectly through interposed entities.

    Note:

    If an entity interposed between the head company and the joining entity is a non-fixed trust, this subsection may involve determining how a power of appointment would have been exercised. Section 713-50 lists matters to have regard to in determining this.



    Loss accruing to the joined group before the joining time

    705-90(8)    
    A loss accrued to the joined group before the joining time if and to the extent that, assuming that as it arose it were instead a profit that was accruing, a distribution of that profit would have been a distribution made to the joined group out of profits that accrued to the joined group before the joining time.

    Use of reliable estimates

    705-90(9)    
    In working out:


    (a) for the purposes of subsection (4), the amount of income tax, or refund of income tax, on the joining entity ' s taxable income for a particular income year and the extent to which it has not yet been paid; or


    (b) for the purposes of subsection (7), the amount of a profit that accrued to the joined group during a particular period; or


    (c) for the purposes of subsection (8), the amount of a loss that accrued to the joined group during a particular period;

    use the most reliable basis for estimation that is available.


    705-90(10)    


    Without limiting paragraph (9)(b), a way in which, for the purposes of subsection (7), the amount of a profit that accrued to the joined group during a particular period may be worked out is by:


    (a) assuming that profits of income years were distributed in order from the most recent to the earliest; and


    (b) assuming that, for any income year for which distributions were paid out of profits in accordance with paragraph (a), they were, to the extent they were not *franked distributions, paid out of profits of that income year that were not subject to income tax before they were paid out of such profits that were subject to income tax.

    SECTION 705-93   If pre-joining time roll-over from foreign resident company or head company - step 3A in working out allocable cost amount  


    When there is a step 3A amount

    705-93(1)    
    For the purposes of step 3A in the table in section 705-60 , there is a step 3A amount if:


    (a) before the joining time:


    (i) there was a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B (a Subdivision 126-B roll-over ) in relation to a * CGT event that happened in relation to an asset (the roll-over asset ); or

    (ii) former section 160ZZO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied in relation to a disposal (a section 160ZZO roll-over ) of an asset (also the roll-over asset ); and


    (aa) at the joining time, as a result of the Subdivision 126-B roll-over or the section 160ZZO roll-over, the roll-over asset has:


    (i) a *deferred roll-over gain; or

    (ii) a *deferred roll-over loss; and


    (b) the originating company in relation to the Subdivision 126-B roll-over, or the transferor in relation to the section 160ZZO roll-over:


    (i) was a foreign resident; or

    (ii) is the *head company in relation to the joined group; and


    (c) the recipient company in relation to the Subdivision 126-B roll-over, or the transferee in relation to the section 160ZZO roll-over:


    (i) was an Australian resident; and

    (ii) is a *spread entity in relation to the joined group; and


    (d) if the recipient company was previously a *subsidiary member of another consolidated group - the conditions in section 104-182 were not satisfied at any time in relation to the other group between the Subdivision 126-B roll-over, or the section 160ZZO roll-over, and the joining time; and


    (e) the roll-over asset is not a * pre-CGT asset at the joining time; and


    (f) the roll-over asset becomes that of the head company of the joined group because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies when the joining entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group.




    705-93(2)    


    The step 3A amount is the amount of the *deferred roll-over gain or the *deferred roll-over loss mentioned in paragraph (1)(aa).

    SECTION 705-95  

    705-95   Pre-joining time distributions out of certain profits - step 4 in working out allocable cost amount  


    For the purposes of step 4 in the table in section 705-60 , the step 4 amount is the sum of all distributions made by the joining entity before the joining time that:


    (a) the * head company receives directly, or would receive indirectly if entities interposed between the head company and the joining entity successively distributed any distribution they received immediately after receiving it; and


    (b) were made out of profits:


    (i) that did not accrue to the joined group before the joining time (see subsection 705-90(7) ); or

    (ii) that accrued to the joined group before the joining time and recouped losses of any * sort that accrued to the joined group before that time (see subsection 705-90(8) ).
    Note:

    As well as subsection 705-90(7) , paragraph 705-90(9) (b) and subsection 705-90(10) are relevant to working out whether or not profits accrued to the joined group before the joining time.

    SECTION 705-100   Losses accruing to joined group before joining time - step 5 in working out allocable cost amount  

    705-100(1)    
    For the purposes of step 5 in the table in section 705-60 , the step 5 amount is the sum of all losses of any * sort of the joining entity that:


    (a) had not been * utilised by the joining entity for the income year in which the joining time occurred or any earlier income year; and


    (b) accrued to the joined group before the joining time (see subsection 705-90(8) ).


    705-100(2)    


    However, a loss is not to be taken into account under subsection (1) to the extent that it reduced the undistributed profits comprising the step 3 amount in the table in section 705-60 .

    SECTION 705-105  

    705-105   Continuity of holding membership interests - steps 3 to 5 in working out allocable cost amount  


    If:


    (a) a * membership interest that a * member of the joined group held in the joining entity at the joining time was taken under this Act to have been * acquired by the member for its * market value at a particular time (the market value time ); or


    (b) the * cost base and * reduced cost base of a membership interest that a member of the joined group held in the joining entity at the joining time were, before that time, changed on one or more occasions by this Act so that they equalled the market value of the membership interest at a particular time (the last of which times is also the market value time );

    then, for the purpose of sections 705-90 , 705-95 , 705-100 and 713-25 , the * head company is taken not to have held that membership interest, either directly or indirectly, before the market value time.

    SECTION 705-110   If joining entity transfers a loss to the head company - step 6 in working out allocable cost amount  

    705-110(1)    


    For the purposes of step 6 in the table in section 705-60 , the step 6 amount is worked out by multiplying the sum of the losses mentioned in subsection (2) by the * corporate tax rate.

    705-110(2)    
    The losses are the joining entity's losses of any * sort that:


    (a) were not * utilised by the joining entity for the income year in which the joining time occurred or any earlier income year; and


    (b) did not accrue to the joined group before the joining time (see subsection 705-90(8) ); and


    (c) are transferred to the * head company under Subdivision 707-A ; and


    (d) are not cancelled under section 707-145 .


    SECTION 705-115   If head company becomes entitled to certain deductions - step 7 in working out allocable cost amount  

    705-115(1)    


    For the purposes of step 7 in the table in section 705-60 , the step 7 amount is worked out using the following formula:


      Owned
    deductions
    +   [ Acquired deductions × *Corporate tax rate ]  

    where:

    acquired deductions
    means all deductions covered by subsection (2) that are not owned deductions.

    owned deductions
    means the sum of all deductions for which the following requirements are satisfied:


    (a) the deduction is covered by subsection (2);


    (b) assuming the expenditure that gave rise to the deduction were instead a profit that accrued at the time the expenditure was incurred, a distribution of that profit would have been a distribution made to the joined group out of profits that accrued to the joined group before the joining time (see subsection 705-90(7) ).


    705-115(2)    
    This subsection covers any deduction to which the * head company becomes entitled under section 701-5 as a result of the joining entity becoming a * subsidiary member of the joined group, other than a deduction for expenditure:


    (a) that is, forms part of or reduces, the cost of an asset of the joining entity that becomes an asset of the head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies; or


    (b) to which section 110-40 (about expenditure on assets acquired before 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997) applies; or


    (c) to the extent that the expenditure reduced the undistributed profits comprising the step 3 amount in the table in section 705-60 .


    705-115(3)    


    Subsection (2) does not cover a deduction under section 43-15 (which relates to *undeducted construction expenditure) if the joining entity *acquired the asset to which the deduction relates at or before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997.

    705-120   (Repealed) SECTION 705-120 Preservation of application of subdivision 165-CC (about unrealised losses)  
    (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)

    How to work out a pre-CGT factor for assets of joining entity

    SECTION 705-125   Pre-CGT proportion for joining entity  


    Object

    705-125(1)    


    Because intra-group * membership interests in the joining entity are disregarded under subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the object of this section is to provide a mechanism to ensure that the benefit of the pre-CGT status of those interests is not lost. Thatmechanism involves:


    (a) working out the proportion (measured by market value) of the membership interests in the joining entity that have pre-CGT status; and


    (b) if the joining entity later ceases being a member of the group, attaching pre-CGT status to that proportion of membership interests in it (see section 711-65 ), subject to integrity rules (see section 711-70 ).



    How to work out pre-CGT proportion

    705-125(2)    


    The pre-CGT proportion is the amount worked out by dividing:


    (a) the sum of the *market value of each *membership interest in the joining entity that is:


    (i) held by a *member of the group at the joining time; and

    (ii) is a *pre-CGT asset;

    by:


    (b) the sum of the market value of each membership interest in the joining entity that is held by a member of the group at the joining time.


    705-125(3)    
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)



    Modification if joining entity is a trust

    705-125(4)    


    If the joining entity is a trust, a * membership interest in it is not taken into account under subsection (2) unless the membership interest is either a unit or an interest in the trust.

    Subdivision 705-B - Case of group formation  

    SECTION 705-130   What this Subdivision is about  


    When a consolidated group comes into existence, the tax cost setting amount for the assets of each entity that becomes a subsidiary member is worked out by modifying the rules in Subdivision 705-A , so that the amount reflects the cost to the group of acquiring the entity.

    Application and object

    SECTION 705-135   Application and object of this Subdivision  


    Application

    705-135(1)    
    This Subdivision has effect for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) if one or more entities become * subsidiary members of a * consolidated group at the time (the formation time ) it comes into existence as a consolidated group.

    Note:

    This is the first exception to Subdivision 705-A : see paragraph 705-15(a) .



    Object

    705-135(2)    
    The object of this Subdivision is to modify the rules in Subdivision 705-A (which basically determine the tax cost setting amount for assets of an entity joining an existing * consolidated group) so that they have effect, and take account of different circumstances that apply, when a consolidated group comes into existence.

    Note:

    The main circumstance is where one of the entities has membership interests in another. In such a case, the order in which the rules in Subdivision 705-A are applied will affect the tax cost setting amounts for the assets of the entities.


    Modified application of Subdivision 705-A

    SECTION 705-140   Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications  

    705-140(1)    
    Subdivision 705-A has effect in relation to each entity becoming a * subsidiary member of the * consolidated group at the formation time in the same way as that Subdivision has effect in relation to an entity becoming a subsidiary member of a consolidated group in circumstances covered by that Subdivision.

    705-140(2)    
    However, that effect of Subdivision 705-A is subject to modifications set out in this Subdivision.


    SECTION 705-145   Order in which tax cost setting amounts are to be worked out where subsidiary members have membership interests in other subsidiary members  


    Object

    705-145(1)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that where, on becoming * subsidiary members, entities hold assets consisting of * membership interests in other subsidiary members, the * head company's cost of becoming the holder of the assets of all of the entities that become subsidiary members correctly reflects the group's cost of acquiring the entities.

    Tax cost setting amounts to be worked out from top down

    705-145(2)    
    If, on becoming * subsidiary members, entities hold * membership interests in any other entities that become subsidiary members, the * tax cost setting amounts for the assets of entities holding membership interests must be worked out before the tax cost setting amounts for the assets of the entities in which the membership interests are held.

    Note:

    The tax cost setting amount in respect of assets of any subsidiary member in which the head company, but no other subsidiary member, holds membership interests can be worked out in any order in relation to the calculations for other subsidiary members.



    Tax cost setting amount for higher entity's membership interests to be used in working out lower entity's tax cost setting amount

    705-145(3)    
    The tax cost setting amount worked out for assets of an entity mentioned in subsection (2) consisting of * membership interests in another such entity is to be used as the amount for those interests under subsection 705-65(1) (step 1 of allocable cost amount) in working out the tax cost setting amount for assets of that other entity.

    Note 1:

    Subsection 705-65(1) adds together amounts worked out in accordance with section 705-65 representing the cost of the membership interests that each member of the group holds in the entity. If any of those membership interests is held by another subsidiary member, subsection (3) above will replace the amount otherwise applicable with the tax cost setting amount that will have been worked out for the interests in accordance with subsection (2) above.

    Note 2:

    The tax cost setting amount worked out for the membership interests has no relevance other than for the purpose mentioned in subsection (3). This is because, under the single entity principle, intra group membership interests are ignored while entities are members of the group. If an entity ceases to be a member, section 701-15 and Division 711 set the tax cost of membership interests in the entity at that time.



    Value shifting etc. provisions not to apply to later CGT events involving membership interests

    705-145(4)    
    However, despite subsection (3), subsection 705-65(4) (which prevents the later operation of value shifting etc. provisions) still applies to the * membership interests.

    Non-membership equity interests

    705-145(5)    


    For the purposes of this section, if, on becoming a *subsidiary member, an entity holds a *non-membership equity interest in another entity that becomes a subsidiary member at the same time, that non-membership equity interest is treated as if it were a *membership interest in that other entity.

    SECTION 705-147   Adjustment in working out step 3A of allocable cost amount to take account of membership interests held by subsidiary members in other such members  


    Object

    705-147(1)    
    The object of this section is to modify the effect that section 705-93 (step 3A of allocable cost amount) has in accordance with this Subdivision so that it takes account of * membership interests that entities that become * subsidiary members hold in other such entities.

    Apportionment of step 3A amount among first level interposed entities

    705-147(2)    


    If:


    (a) under section 705-93 , in its application in accordance with this Subdivision, there is a step 3A amount for the purpose of working out the group ' s * allocable cost amount for an entity (the subject entity ) that becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; and


    (b) at that time one or more entities (the first level entities ), that become subsidiary members of the group and in which the * head company holds * membership interests, are interposed between the head company and the subject entity;

    then the step 3A amount is apportioned among the first level entities and the subject entity on the following basis:


    (c) each first level entity has the following proportion of the step 3A amount:


      *Market value of first level entity ' s
    direct and indirect membership
                    interests in subject entity                
    *Market value of all membership
    interests in subject entity
     

    where:

    market value of all membership interests in subject entity
    means the * market value, at the formation time, of all * membership interests in the subject entity that are held by entities that become * members of the group at that time.

    market value of first level entity ' s direct and indirect membership interests in subject entity
    means so much of the *market value of all membership interests in the subject entity (as defined above) as is attributable to * membership interests that the first level entity holds directly, or indirectly through other interposed entities that become * subsidiary members of the group at the formation time; and


    (d) the subject entity has the remainder of the step 3A amount.



    Membership interests in subsidiary members of group

    705-147(3)    


    In applying section 705-93 for the purposes of this Subdivision, disregard paragraph 705-93(1)(f) if:


    (a) the rollover asset mentioned in that section is a *membership interest in an entity that becomes a *subsidiary member at the formation time; and


    (b) the rollover asset is not held at that time by the entity that becomes the *head company of the group.

    Note:

    The step 3A amount is worked out under section 705-93 .


    705-147(4)    
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)


    705-147(5)    
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)



    705-150   (Repealed) SECTION 705-150 Adjustment to result of step 3A in working out allocable cost amount where pre-formation time roll-over from head company to member of wholly-owned group  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

    SECTION 705-155   Adjustments to restrict step 4 reduction of allocable cost amount to effective distributions to head company in respect of direct membership interests  


    Object

    705-155(1)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that, in working out the group's * allocable cost amount for entities that become * subsidiary members of the group at the formation time, the reduction under step 4 in the table in section 705-60 (about pre-formation time distributions out of certain profits) is made only for profits that have been effectively distributed to the * head company in respect of its direct * membership interests in the entities. This ensures consistency with the ordering rule in section 705-145 .

    When section applies

    705-155(2)    
    This section applies to a distribution (the subject distribution ) to the extent that the following conditions are satisfied:


    (a) the distribution is made by an entity (the subject entity ) that becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at the formation time;


    (b) in working out the group's * allocable cost amount for the subject entity there would, apart from this section, be a reduction under step 4 in the table in section 705-60 for the distribution.

    Step 4 reduction only if subject distribution is made to head company etc.

    705-155(3)    
    There is no reduction as mentioned in paragraph (2)(b) for the subject distribution unless:


    (a) the subject distribution is made to the * head company of the group; or


    (b) the reduction is in accordance with subsection (5).

    Step 4 reduction for effective distribution to head company

    705-155(4)    
    If:


    (a) at the formation time, the * head company of the group has a direct * membership interest in the subject entity; and


    (b) the head company acquired the membership interest directly from another entity, or indirectly as a result of one or more acquisitions from other entities, where:


    (i) former section 160ZZO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied to each acquisition; or

    (ii) there was a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B for each acquisition;
    or a combination of these happened; and


    (c) while it held the membership interest, the entity, or one of the entities, mentioned in paragraph (b) (the recipient of the further distribution ) received a distribution (the further distribution ) of some of the subject distribution from the subject entity;

    the consequences in subsections (5) and (6) apply.



    Reduction for further distribution that remains with recipient

    705-155(5)    
    If:


    (a) the following happen:


    (i) by the formation time, any of the further distribution (the eligible reduction amount ) had not again been distributed by the recipient of the further distribution;

    (ii) the recipient of the further distribution does not become a * subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; or


    (b) the following happen:


    (i) by the formation time, any of the further distribution (the eligible reduction amount ) had been distributed by the recipient of the further distribution to another entity directly, or indirectly though successive distributions by interposed entities;

    (ii) that other entity does not become a subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; or


    (c) both of the above paragraphs apply;

    then, in working out the group's * allocable cost amount for the subject entity, the reduction under step 4 in the table in section 705-60 for the subject distribution only takes place to the extent that it equals the sum of all eligible reduction amounts.



    Step 1 reduced cost base adjustment to reverse effect of reduction for further distribution

    705-155(6)    


    Also, if former subsection 160ZK(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or subsection 110-55(7) of this Act applied to the further distribution, then for the purposes of step 1 in the table in section 705-60 in working out the group's * allocable cost amount for the subject entity:


    (a) the reference in subsection 705-65(3) to a reduction resulting from the application of former subsection 160ZK(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and


    (b) the reference in subsection 705-65(5) to a reduction that has taken place under subsection 110-55(7) ;

    include a reference to the reduction in the * reduced cost base of the membership interest in the subject entity resulting from the application of former subsection 160ZK(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , or subsection 110-55(7) of this Act, to the further distribution.



    SECTION 705-160   Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount to take account of owned profits or losses of certain entities that become subsidiary members  


    Object

    705-160(1)    
    The object of this section is to prevent a distortion under section 705-35 in the allocation of * allocable cost amount to an entity that becomes a * subsidiary member of the group where that entity has direct or indirect * membership interests in another entity that has certain profits or tax losses when it becomes a subsidiary member.

    Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount where direct interest in entity with profits/losses

    705-160(2)    
    If:


    (a) an entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; and


    (b) the entity has * membership interests in a second entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the group at that time; and


    (c) in working out the group ' s * allocable cost amount for the second entity:


    (i) an amount is required to be added (the second entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount ) under step 3 in the table in section 705-60 (about profits accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

    (ii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the second entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount ) under step 5 in the table in section 705-60 (about losses accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group);

    then, for the purposes of working out under section 705-35 the * tax cost setting amount for the assets of the first entity, the * market value of the first entity ' s membership interests in the second entity is reduced (in a subparagraph (c)(i) case) or increased (in a subparagraph (c)(ii) case) by the first entity ' s interest in the second entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount (seesubsection (3)).



    First entity ' s interest in second entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount

    705-160(3)    
    The first entity ' s interest in the second entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount is worked out using the formula:


    *Market value of first
    entity ' s *membership interests
                            in second entity                                  
    *Market value of all *membership
    interests in second entity
    × Second entity ' s profit/loss
    adjustment amount



    Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount for indirect interest in entity with profits/losses

    705-160(4)    
    If:


    (a) an entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; and


    (b) the entity has * membership interests in a second entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the group at that time; and


    (c) the second entity has, directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities that become subsidiary members of the group at the formation time, membership interests in a third entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the group at that time; and


    (d) in working out the group ' s * allocable cost amount for the third entity:


    (i) an amount is required to be added (the third entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount ) under step 3 in the table in section 705-60 (about profits accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

    (ii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the third entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount ) under step 5 in the table in section 705-60 (about losses accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group);

    then, for the purposes of working out under section 705-35 the * tax cost setting amount for the assets of the first entity, the * market value of the first entity ' s membership interests in the second entity is reduced (in a subparagraph (d)(i) case) or increased (in a subparagraph (d)(ii) case) by the first entity ' s interest in the third entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount (see subsection 5)).



    First entity ' s interest in third entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount

    705-160(5)    


    The first entity ' s interest in the third entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount is worked out using the formula:


    *Market value of first entity ' s
    membership interests in third
    entity held through second entity
    *Market value of all *membership
    interests in third entity
    × Third entity ' s
    profit/loss
    adjustment amount

    where:

    market value of first entity ' s membership interests in third entity held through second entity
    means the * market value of all * membership interests in the third entity that the first entity holds indirectly through the second entity (including through that entity and one or more other entities that become * subsidiary members of the group and are interposed between the second entity and the third entity).


    S 705-160 substituted by No 16 of 2003, s 3 and Sch 1 item 9, effective 24 October 2002 and applicable on and after 1 July 2002 (see sec 700-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ). S 705-160 formerly read:

    Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount to take account of owned losses of certain entities that become subsidiary members

    Object


    705-160(1)
    The object of this section is to prevent a distortion under section 705-35 in the allocation of * allocable cost amount to an entity that becomes a * subsidiary member of the group where that entity has * membership interests in another entity that has certain tax losses when it becomes a subsidiary member.

    Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount



    705-160(2)
    If:


    (a) an entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; and


    (b) the entity has * membership interests in a second entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the group at that time; and


    (c) in working out the group ' s * allocable cost amount for the second entity an amount is required to be subtracted (the loss subtraction amount ) under step 5 in the table in section 705-60 (about losses accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group);

    then, for the purposes of working out under section 705-35 the * tax cost setting amount for the assets of the first entity, the * market value of the first entity ' s membership interests in the second entity is increased by the first entity ' s interest in the loss subtraction amount (see subsection (3)).

    First entity ' s interest in loss subtraction amount



    705-160(3)
    The first entity ' s interest in the loss subtraction amount is worked out using the formula:


    *Market value of first entity ' s
    *membership interests
        in second entity    
    *Market value of all *membership
    interests in second entity
    × Loss subtraction amount


    S 705-160 inserted by No 90 of 2002, s 3 and Sch 3 item 2, effective 24 October 2002 and applicable on and after 1 July 2002 (see sec 700-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ).

    SECTION 705-163   Modified application of section 705-57  

    View history reference

    Object

    705-163(1)    

    View history reference

    The object of this section is to ensure that, in working out * tax cost setting amounts for * trading stock, * depreciating assets, *registered emissions units or * revenue assets of entities that become * subsidiary members of the group at the formation time, section 705-57 (about loss of pre-CGT status of certain * membership interests) only applies if the * membership interests held directly by the * head company of the group are affected.
     View history note


    Modified application of section 705-57 - basic modification

    705-163(2)    
    For the purposes of applying section 705-57 in accordance with this Subdivision, a reference in that section to a * membership interest that a * member of the joined group holds in the joining entity at the joining time is taken to be a reference to a * membership interest that the * head company of the * consolidated group holds directly in an entity becoming a * subsidiary member at the formationtime.

    Modified application of section 705-57 - additional modifications where section 705-145 applies

    705-163(3)    
    Also, if an entity (the first entity ) that becomes a * subsidiary member holds a * membership interest (the subject membership interest ) in another entity (the second entity ) that becomes a subsidiary member, section 705-57 (as modified in accordance with subsection (2)) is to be applied in relation to the subject membership interest as follows.

    705-163(4)    
    First work out whether there would be a reduction under that section in the * tax cost setting amount for the subject membership interest that is used as mentioned in subsection 705-145(3) (the subsection 705-145(3) tax cost setting amount ) if:


    (a) the subject membership interest, if it is not a revenue etc. asset of the first entity, were taken to be such an asset; and


    (b) paragraphs 705-57(2)(c) and (d) and subsection 705-57(7) did not apply to the subject membership interest.

    705-163(5)    
    Next, if there would be such a reduction (whose amount is the notional section 705-57 reduction amount ):


    (a) apply section 705-57 to reduce the * tax cost setting amount for any revenue etc. asset of the second entity; and


    (b) if the second entity holds a * membership interest in another entity that becomes a * subsidiary member - apply section 705-57 in relation to that interest in accordance with subsection (3) of this section;

    and for those purposes:


    (c) the subject membership interest is taken to be a membership interest that the * head company of the group holds directly in the second entity at the formation time; and


    (d) the requirements of paragraphs 705-57(2)(a) and (b) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the subject membership interest; and


    (e) the subject membership interest is taken to have a * cost base and * reduced cost base equal to the subsection 705-145(3) tax cost setting amount; and


    (f) the subject membership interest is taken to have a loss of pre-CGT status adjustment amount equal to the notional section 705-57 reduction amount.

    Note:

    If the head company actually held any membership interests in the second entity, or if other entities becoming subsidiary members held membership interests in the second entity to which this subsection also applied, those membership interests would also be taken into account in working out the reduction under paragraph (a) and in applying paragraph (b).



    Section 705-57 not to apply where membership interests effectively acquired on normal market basis

    705-163(6)    
    If:


    (a) apart from this subsection, subsection 705-57(6) would apply in accordance with this Subdivision to the revenue etc. assets of an entity (the subject entity ) that becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; and


    (b) at the formation time, the * head company of the group holds all of the * membership interests in the subject entity; and


    (c) subsection 705-57(6) would apply because a circumstance covered by subsection 705-57(4) (about loss of pre-CGT status because Division 149 etc. applied) existed; and


    (d) the application of Division 149 of this Act, or the provision of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , as mentioned in paragraph 705-57(4)(b) of this Act happened because the entity that became the * head company of the group (the potential head entity ) * acquired all of the * membership interests in the other entity mentioned in that paragraph directly or indirectly from another entity (the vendor ); and


    (e) at the time of the acquisition, the potential head entity did not control (for value shifting purposes) the vendor, and vice-versa, and another entity did not control (for value shifting purposes) the potential head entity and the vendor; and


    (f) the acquisition, or each of the acquisitions, mentioned in subsection 705-57(4) was a * same asset roll-over or was one to which any of former sections 160ZZN to 160ZZOC , 160ZZPA and 160ZZPJ of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied;

    View history reference

    then subsection 705-57(6) does not apply as mentioned in paragraph (a) of this subsection.

     View history note


     View history note

    705-165   (Repealed) SECTION 705-165 Working out pre-CGT factors where subsidiary members have membership interests in other subsidiary members  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    Subdivision 705-C - Case where a consolidated group is acquired by another  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 705-170   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    When a consolidated group is acquired by another consolidated group, modifications are made to the operation of Division 701 (the core rules) and Subdivision 705-A (tax cost setting amount where a single entity joins a consolidated group) basically to ensure that the tax cost setting amount for assets of the acquired group that become those of the acquiring group reflects the cost to the latter group of acquiring the former.

     View history note

    Application and object

    SECTION 705-175   Application and object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    Application

    705-175(1)    
    This Subdivision applies if all of the * members of a * consolidated group (the acquired group ) become members of another consolidated group (the acquiring group ) at a particular time (the acquisition time ) as a result of the * acquisition of * membership interests in the * head company of the acquired group.

    Object

    705-175(2)    
    The object of this Subdivision is:


    (a) to modify the rules in Division 701 (the core rules) to complement the treatment of the acquired group as a single entity that applied before the acquisition time; and


    (b) to modify Subdivision 705-A (which basically determines the tax cost setting amount for assets of an entity joining a consolidated group) to ensure that the * tax cost setting amount for assets of the acquired group that become those of the acquiring group reflects the cost to the latter group of acquiring the former.

     View history note

    Modified application of Division 701 in relation to acquired group etc.

    SECTION 705-180   Modifications of Division 701  

    View history reference

    Certain provisions of Division 701 not to apply

    705-180(1)    
    If, because an entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the acquired group when this Subdivision applies, a provision of Division 701 (other than section 701-25 ) would otherwise apply, in relation to the acquired group for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) or for the entity core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(3) , the provision does not so apply.

    Modified application of section 701-5

    705-180(2)    
    Section 701-5 (the entry history rule) applies in relation to the acquiring group for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) as if entities that are or have been the * subsidiary members of the acquired group were or had been parts of the * head company of the acquired group.

    Modified application of section 701-25

    705-180(3)    
    The application of section 701-25 (which ensures tax-neutral consequences for a head company ceasing to hold assets when an entity leaves a group), in relation to the acquired group for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) and for the entity core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(3) , is modified as follows:


    (a) the reference in subsection (4) of that section to the end of the income year is taken to be a reference to the end of the income year that ends or, if subsection 701-30(3) as modified by subsection (4) of this section applies, of the income year that is taken to end, when the entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the acquired group;


    (b) the section applies (as modified by paragraph (a) of this subsection) to the entity that is the * head company of the acquired group ceasing to be a * member of that group in the same way as it applies to an entity that is a subsidiary member of that group ceasing to be a subsidiary member.

    Modified application of section 701-30

    705-180(4)    
    If the acquired group only exists for part of the income year, section 701-30 (about an entity not being a subsidiary member of a group for a whole income year) applies in relation to the acquired group for the head company core purposes in the same way as it applies to work out the taxable income, tax payable on that taxable income and loss of each * sort for an entity for a non-membership period.

     View history note

    Modified application of Subdivision 705-A in relation to acquiring group

    SECTION 705-185   Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications  

    View history reference

    705-185(1)    
    Subdivision 705-A has effect in relation to the acquiring group for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) as if:


    (a) the only * member of the acquired group that is a joining entity of the acquiring group were the entity that, just before the acquisition time, was the * head company of the acquired group; and


    (b) the operation of this Part for the head company core purposes in relation to the head company and the entities that were * subsidiary members of the acquired group continued to have effect for the purposes of Subdivision 705-A .

    Note 1:

    This means that for Subdivision 705-A purposes the subsidiary members of the acquired group are treated as part of the head company of that group, and as a result their assets (other than e.g. internal membership interests) have their tax costs set at the acquisition time.

    Note 2:

    It also means e.g. that for Subdivision 705-A purposes the terminating values of the assets of those subsidiary members are worked out as if the assets were those of the head company at the acquisition time, and hence will be based (if applicable) on the tax cost setting amounts for assets that were set at the time entities became subsidiary members of the acquired group.


    705-185(2)    
    However, that effect of Subdivision 705-A is subject to modifications set out in this Subdivision.

    Note:

    The modifications of Subdivision 705-A made in this Subdivision constitute the second exception to Subdivision 705-A : see paragraph 705-15(b) .

     View history note

    Modifications of Subdivision 705-A for the purposes of this Subdivision

    705-190   (Repealed) SECTION 705-190 Modified application of section 705-50  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    SECTION 705-195   Modified application of subsection 705-65(6)  

    View history reference

    Object

    705-195(1)    

    View history reference

    The object of this section is to ensure that certain *non-membership equity interests held by * members of the acquiring group that are part of the cost of acquiring the acquired group are taken into account in working out the acquiring group's * allocable cost amount for the acquired group.
     View history note


    Non-membership equity interests

    705-195(2)    

    View history reference

    Subsection 705-65(6) has effect as if it also treated as a *membership interest in the *head company of the acquired group a *non-membership equity interest in a *subsidiary member of the acquired group, where that interest was held at the acquisition time by a *member of the acquiring group.
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 705-200   Modified application of section 705-85  

    View history reference

    Object

    705-200(1)    

    View history reference

    The object of this section is to ensure that if any of the following are not held by * members of either group:


    (a) certain employee share interests in * subsidiary members of the acquired group;


    (b) certain *non-membership equity interests in subsidiary members of the acquired group;

    View history reference


    (c) certain preference share interests in subsidiary members of the acquired group;

    View history reference

    and are therefore part of the cost of acquiring the acquired group, they increase the acquiring group's * allocable cost amount for the acquired group.

     View history note


    Increase for certain membership interests in subsidiary members of acquired group

    705-200(2)    

    View history reference

    Subsections 705-85(1) , (2) and (4) have effect as if a * membership interest in a * subsidiary member of the acquired group were a membership interest in the * head company of that group.
     View history note


    Non-membership equity interests

    705-200(3)    

    View history reference

    Paragraph 705-85(3)(a) has effect as if it also increased the step 2 amount worked out under section 705-70 by the amount that would be the sum of the balances of the *non-share capital accounts of the *subsidiary members of the acquired group, assuming that:


    (a) for a subsidiary member that is not a company - the subsidiary member were a company; and


    (b) each *non-membership equity interest (if any) in a subsidiary member held at the acquisition time by a person other than a *member of the acquiring group or acquired group were a *non-share equity interest in the subsidiary member; and


    (c) the non-share equity interests (if any) mentioned in paragraph (b) were the only non-share equity interests in the subsidiary member.

     View history note

     View history note

    705-205   (Repealed) SECTION 705-205 Modified application of section 705-125  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    Subdivision 705-D - Where multiple entities are linked by membership interests  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 705-210   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    When entities that are linked by membership interests join a consolidated group, the tax cost setting amount for the assets of each entity that becomes a subsidiary member is worked out by modifying the rules in Subdivision 705-A , so that the amount reflects the cost to the group of acquiring the entities.

     View history note

    Application and object

    SECTION 705-215   Application and object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    Application

    705-215(1)    
    This Subdivision has effect for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) if:


    (a) 2 or more entities (each of which is a linked entity ) become members of a * consolidated group at the same time as a result of an event that happens in relation to one of them; and


    (b) the case is not covered by Subdivision 705-C .

    Note:

    This is the third exception to Subdivision 705-A : see paragraph 705-15(c) . In order for this Subdivision to have effect, one of the entities would need to hold directly or indirectly, just before the joining time, membership interests in all of the other entities.

    Example:

    Entities A and B are not members of a consolidated group, but members of such a group, together with entity A, jointly hold all the membership interests in entity B. Members of the group then acquire all the membership interests in entity A and as a result of this event both entities, which are linked by the membership interests that one holds in the other, become members of the group.



    Object

    705-215(2)    
    The object of this Subdivision is to modify the rules in Subdivision 705-A (which basically determine the tax cost setting amount for assets of an entity joining an existing consolidated group) so that they take account of the different circumstances that apply where linked entities join.

     View history note

    Modified application of Subdivision 705-A

    SECTION 705-220   Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications  

    View history reference

    705-220(1)    
    Subdivision 705-A has effect in relation to each linked entity becoming a * subsidiary member of the * consolidated group in the same way as that Subdivision operates in relation to an entity becoming a subsidiary member of a consolidated group in circumstances covered by that Subdivision.

    705-220(2)    
    However, that effect of Subdivision 705-A is subject to modifications set out in this Subdivision.

     View history note

    SECTION 705-225   Order in which tax cost setting amounts are to be worked out where linked entities have membership interests in other linked entities  

    View history reference

    Object

    705-225(1)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that where, on becoming * subsidiary members, linked entities hold assets consisting of * membership interests in other linked entities, the * head company ' s cost of becoming the holder of the assets of all of the linked entities correctly reflects the group ' s cost of acquiring the linked entities.

    Tax cost setting amounts to be worked out from top down

    705-225(2)    
    The * tax cost setting amounts for the assets of linked entities holding * membership interests must be worked out before the tax cost setting amounts for the assets of the linked entities in which the membership interests are held.

    Note:

    The tax cost setting amount in respect of assets of any linked entity in which members of the group, but no linked entity, hold membership interests can be worked out in any order in relation to the calculations for other linked entities.



    Tax cost setting amount for higher linked entity ' s membership interests to be used in working out lower linked entity ' s tax cost setting amount

    705-225(3)    
    The * tax cost setting amount worked out for assets of a linked entity mentioned in subsection (2) consisting of * membership interests in another such entity is to be used as the amount for those interests under subsection 705-65(1) (step 1 of allocable cost amount) in working out the tax cost setting amount for assets of that other linked entity.

    Note 1:

    Subsection 705-65(1) adds together amounts worked out in accordance with section 705-65 representing the cost of the membership interests that each member of the group holds in the linked entity. If any of those membership interests is held by another linked entity, subsection (3) of this section will replace the amount otherwise applicable with the tax cost setting amount that will have been worked out for the interests in accordance with subsection (2) of this section.

    Note 2:

    The tax cost setting amount worked out for the membership interests has no relevance other than for the purpose mentioned in subsection (3) of this subsection. This is because, under the single entity principle, intra group membership interests are ignored while entities are members of the group. If an entity ceases to be a member, section 701-15 and Division 711 set the tax cost of membership interests in the entity at that time.



    Value shifting etc. provisions not to apply to later CGT events involving membership interests

    705-225(4)    
    However, despite subsection (3), subsection 705-65(4) (which prevents the later operation of value shifting etc. provisions) still applies to the * membership interests.

    Non-membership equity interests

    705-225(5)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of this section, if, on becoming a *subsidiary member, a linked entity holds a *non-membership equity interest in another linked entity, that interest is treated as if it were a *membership interest in that other linked entity.
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 705-227   Adjustment in working out step 3A of allocable cost amount to take account of membership interests held by linked entities in other linked entities  

    View history reference

    Object

    705-227(1)    
    The object of this section is to modify the effect that section 705-93 (step 3A of allocable cost amount) has in accordance with this Subdivision so that it takes account of * membership interests that linked entities hold in other linked entities at the time (the linked entity joining time ) when the linked entities become * subsidiary members of the group.

    Apportionment of step 3A amount among first level interposed entities

    705-227(2)    

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) under section 705-93 , in its application in accordance with this Subdivision, there is a step 3A amount for the purpose of working out the group's * allocable cost amount for a particular linked entity (the subject entity ); and


    (b) at the linked entity joining time, one or more of the linked entities (the first level entities ) in which the * head company holds * membership interests are interposed between the head company and the subject entity;

    then the step 3A amount is apportioned among the first level entities and the subject entity on the following basis:


    (c) each first level entity has the following proportion of the step 3A amount:


      *Market value of first level entity's
    direct and indirect membership
                    interests in subject entity                
    *Market value of all membership
    interests in subject entity
     

    where:

    market value of all membership interests in subject entity
    means the * market value, at the linked entity joining time, of all * membership interests in the subject entity that are held by entities that become * members of the group at that time.

    market value of first level entity's direct and indirect membership interests in subject entity
    means so much of the *market value of all membership interests in the subject entity (as defined above) as is attributable to * membership interests that the first level entity holds directly, or indirectly through other linked entities; and


    (d) the subject entity has the remainder of the step 3A amount.



    Membership interests in subsidiary members of group

    705-227(3)    

    View history reference

    In applying section 705-93 for the purposes of this Subdivision, disregard paragraph 705-93(1)(f) if:


    (a) the rollover asset mentioned in that section is a *membership interest in an entity that becomes a *subsidiary member at the linked entity joining time; and

    View history reference


    (b) the rollover asset is not held at that time by the entity that becomes the *head company of the group.

    Note:

    The step 3A amount is worked out under section 705-93 .

     View history note

    705-227(4)    
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    705-227(5)    
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note


     View history note

    SECTION 705-230   Adjustments to restrict step 4 reduction of allocable cost amount to effective distributions to head company in respect of direct membership interests  

    View history reference

    Object

    705-230(1)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that, in working out the group's * allocable cost amount for the linked entities, the reduction under step 4 in the table in section 705-60 (about pre-formation time distributions out of certain profits) is made only for profits that have been effectively distributed to the * head company in respect of its direct * membership interests in the entities. This ensures consistency with the ordering rule in section 705-225 .

    When section applies

    705-230(2)    
    This section applies to a distribution to the extent that the following conditions are satisfied:


    (a) the distribution is made by a linked entity;


    (b) in working out the group's * allocable cost amount for the linked entity there would, apart from this section, be a reduction under step 4 in the table in section 705-60 for the distribution.

    Step 4 reduction only if subject distribution is made to head company

    705-230(3)    
    There is no reduction as mentioned in subsection (2) for the distribution unless it is made to the * head company of the group.

     View history note

    SECTION 705-235   Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount to take account of owned profits or losses of certain linked entities  

    View history reference

    Object

    705-235(1)    
    The object of this section is to prevent a distortion under section 705-35 in the allocation of * allocable cost amount to a linked entity where that entity has direct or indirect * membership interests in another linked entity that has certain profits or tax losses.

    Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount where direct interest in linked entity with profits/losses

    705-235(2)    
    If:


    (a) a linked entity has * membership interests in a second linked entity; and


    (b) in working out the group ' s * allocable cost amount for the second linked entity:


    (i) an amount is required to be added (the second linked entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount ) under step 3 in the table in section 705-60 (about profits accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

    (ii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the second linked entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount ) under step 5 in the table in section 705-60 (about losses accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group);

    then, for the purposes of working out under section 705-35 the * tax cost setting amount for the assets of the first linked entity, the * market value of the first linked entity ' s membership interests in the second linked entity is reduced (in a subparagraph (b)(i) case) or increased (in a subparagraph (b)(ii) case) by the first linked entity ' s interest in the second linked entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount (see subsection (3)).



    First linked entity ' s interest in second linked entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount

    705-235(3)    
    The first linked entity ' s interest in the second linked entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount is worked out using the formula:


    *Market value of first linked
    entity ' s *membership interests
                        in second linked entity                    
    *Market value of all *membership
    interests in second linked entity
    × Second linked entity ' s
    profit/loss adjustment
    amount



    Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount for indirect interest in linked entity with profits/losses

    705-235(4)    
    If:


    (a) a linked entity has * membership interests in a second linked entity; and


    (b) the second linked entity has, directly or indirectly through one or more interposed linked entities, membership interests in a third linked entity; and


    (c) in working out the group ' s * allocable cost amount for the third linked entity:


    (i) an amount is required to be added (the third linked entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount ) under step 3 in the table in section 705-60 (about profits accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

    (ii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the third linked entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount ) under step 5 in the table in section 705-60 (about losses accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group);

    then, for the purposes of working out under section 705-35 the * tax cost setting amount for the assets of the first linked entity, the * market value of the first linked entity ' s membership interests in the second linked entity is reduced (in a subparagraph (c)(i) case) or increased (in a subparagraph (c)(ii) case) by the first linked entity ' s interest in the third linked entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount (see subsection (5)).



    First linked entity ' s interest in third linked entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount

    705-235(5)    

    View history reference

    The first linked entity ' s interest in the third linked entity ' s profit/loss adjustment amount is worked out using the formula:


    *Market value of first linked
    entity ' s membership interests
    in third linked entity held
                through second linked entity            
    *Market value of all *membership
    interests in third linked entity
    × Third linked entity ' s
    profit/loss
    adjustment amount

    where:

    market value of first linked entity ' s membership interests in third linked entity held through second linked entity
    means the * market value of all * membership interests in the third linked entity that the first linked entity holds indirectly through the second linked entity (including through that entity and one or more other linked entities that are interposed between the second linked entity and the third linked entity).

     View history note

    SECTION 705-240   Modified application of section 705-57  

    View history reference

    Object

    705-240(1)    

    View history reference

    The object of this section is to ensure that, in working out * tax cost setting amounts for * trading stock, * depreciating assets, *registered emissions units or * revenue assets of the linked entities, section 705-57 (about loss of pre-CGT status of certain membership interests) only applies if the * membership interests held directly by the * head company of the group are affected.
     View history note


    Modified application of section 705-57 - basic modification

    705-240(2)    
    For the purposes of applying section 705-57 in accordance with this Subdivision, a reference in that section to a * membership interest that a * member of the joined group holds in the joining entity at the joining time is taken to be a reference to a membership interest that the * head company of the * consolidated group holds directly in a linked entity at the time the linked entity becomes a * subsidiary member.

    Modified application of section 705-57 - additional modifications where section 705-225 applies

    705-240(3)    
    Also, if a linked entity (the first linked entity ) holds a * membership interest (the subject membership interest ) in another linked entity (the second linked entity ), section 705-57 (as modified in accordance with subsection (2)) is to be applied in relation to the subject membership interest as follows.

    705-240(4)    
    First work out whether there would be a reduction under that section in the * tax cost setting amount for the subject membership interest that is used as mentioned in subsection 705-225(3) (the subsection 705-225(3) tax cost setting amount ) if:


    (a) the subject membership interest, if it is not a revenue etc. asset of the first linked entity, were taken to be such an asset; and


    (b) paragraphs 705-57(2)(c) and (d) and subsection 705-57(7) did not apply to the subject membership interest.

    705-240(5)    
    Next, if there would be such a reduction (whose amount is the notional section 705-57 reduction amount ):


    (a) apply section 705-57 to reduce the * tax cost setting amount for any revenue etc. asset of the second linked entity; and


    (b) if the second linked entity holds a * membership interest in another linked entity - apply section 705-57 in relation to that interest in accordance with subsection (3) of this section;

    and for those purposes:


    (c) the subject membership interest is taken to be a membership interest that the * head company of the group holds directly in the second linked entity; and


    (d) the requirements of paragraphs 705-57(2)(a) and (b) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the subject membership interest; and


    (e) the subject membership interest is taken to have a * cost base and * reduced cost base equal to the subsection 705-225(3) tax cost setting amount; and


    (f) the subject membership interest is taken to have a loss of pre-CGT status adjustment amount equal to the notional section 705-57 reduction amount.

    Note:

    If the head company actually held any membership interests in the second linked entity, or if other linked entities held membership interests in the second linked entity to which this subsection also applied, those membership interests would also be taken into account in working out the reduction under paragraph (a) and in applying paragraph (b).


     View history note

    705-245   (Repealed) SECTION 705-245 Working out pre-CGT factors where subsidiary members have membership interests in other subsidiary members  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    Subdivision 705-E - Adjustments for errors etc.  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 705-300   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    Errors in making tax cost setting amount calculations are reversed by means of an immediate capital gain or loss if it would be unreasonable to require the calculations to be re-done.

     View history note

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 705-305  

    705-305   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    The object of this Subdivision is to avoid the time and expense involved in correcting errors affecting * tax cost setting amount calculations. This is done by providing for * capital gains or * capital losses to reverse the errors.
     View history note

    SECTION 705-310  

    705-310   Operation of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936  

    View history reference

    To avoid doubt, this Subdivision does not limit the operation of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .
     View history note

    SECTION 705-315   Errors that attract special adjustment action  

    View history reference

    705-315(1)    
    Section 705-320 (about later adjustments to correct * tax cost setting amount calculation errors) applies if the conditions in this section are satisfied.

    Tax cost setting amount taken into account

    705-315(2)    
    The first condition is that the * head company of a * consolidated group worked out a * tax cost setting amount, in purported compliance with this Division, for an asset of an entity that becomes a * subsidiary member of the group that is an asset of a kind referred to in section 705-35 as a reset cost base asset.

    Error in calculation

    705-315(3)    
    The second condition is that:


    (a) the * head company made one or more errors in working out the * tax cost setting amount; and


    (b) those errors caused the tax cost setting amount to differ from its correct amount.

    If the errors caused the tax cost setting amount to be more, the difference is an overstated amount . If the errors caused the tax cost setting amount to be less, the difference is an understated amount .



    Unreasonable to require recalculation

    705-315(4)    
    The third condition is that, having regard to the following factors:


    (a) the net size of the errors compared to the size of the * allocable cost amount for the joining entity;


    (b) the number of * tax cost setting amounts that would have to be recalculated, and the difficulty of making the recalculations;


    (c) the number of adjustments, in assessments that could be amended and in future * income tax returns, that would be necessary to correct the errors;


    (d) the difficulty in obtaining any necessary information;

    it is not reasonable to require a recalculation of the amounts involved.



    Exception where error due to fraud or evasion

    705-315(5)    
    However, the conditions in this section are not satisfied if the errors were to any extent due to fraud or evasion.

    Requirement to notify

    705-315(6)    
    The * head company of the * consolidated group must, as soon as practicable after becoming aware that it made one or more errors in working out the * tax cost setting amount, notify the Commissioner in the * approved form:


    (a) that it had made the errors; and


    (b) of the amount of the overstated amount or understated amount.

     View history note

    SECTION 705-320   Tax cost setting amounts taken to be correct  

    View history reference

    705-320(1)    
    For the purposes of this Act (other than this Subdivision) and for the purposes of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , any * tax cost setting amounts that were worked out by the * head company, so far as they were due to the errors, are taken to have been correct if the conditions in section 705-315 are satisfied.

    Note 1:

    If the conditions in section 705-315 are satisfied, CGT event L6 happens (see section 104-525 ).

    Note 2:

    Subsection (1) means that the Commissioner cannot amend any assessments necessary to correct the errors, and that (except as mentioned in subsection (2)) no offences or administrative penalties arise in respect of the errors.


    705-320(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply for the purposes of determining whether there is an offence against section 8N of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , or an administrative penalty under section 284-75 or 284-145 in Schedule 1 to that Act, in relation to statements made before the Commissioner became aware of the errors.

    Note 1:

    Section 8N of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 deals with false or misleading statements. Sections 284-75 and 284-145 in Schedule 1 to that Act set out the circumstances in which an entity is liable for an administrative penalty.

    Note 2:

    The offence and administrative penalty provisions however apply on a modified basis - see subsection 8W(1C) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , and subsections 284-80(2) and 284-150(2) in Schedule 1 to that Act.

     View history note

    Division 707 - Losses for head companies when entities become members etc.  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Subdivision 707-A - Transfer of losses to head company  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 707-100   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    A loss made by an entity before the time it becomes a member of a consolidated group is transferred to the head company of the group at that time if the entity could have utilised the loss had the entity not become a member of the group.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-105   Who can utilise the loss?  

    View history reference

    707-105(1)    
    If the loss is transferred, the head company is treated for income years ending after the transfer as having made the loss, so the head company can utilise the loss for those income years to the extent permitted by:


    (a) the general rules (outside this Part) about an entity utilising a loss it has made; and


    (b) the special rules about transferred losses in the other Subdivisions of this Division that supplement and modify those general rules.

    Note:

    If the entity from which the loss was transferred became a subsidiary member of the consolidated group, the entity cannot utilise the loss for those income years because of section 701-1 (single entity rule) and section 707-140 .


    707-105(2)    
    If the loss is not transferred, then, for an income year ending after the time the entity became a member of the consolidated group, the loss cannot be utilised by any entity.

    Note:

    The loss will not be transferred if the entity would not have been able to utilise it or if the transfer is cancelled under section 707-145 .

     View history note

    Objects

    SECTION 707-110  

    707-110   Objects of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    The main objects of this Subdivision are:


    (a) to provide for the transfer of a loss from an entity (the joining entity ) becoming a * member of a * consolidated group to the * head company of the group (so the head company may be able to * utilise it), if the joining entity could have utilised the loss if it had not become a member of the group; and


    (b) to prevent the utilisation by any entity of a loss made by the joining entity, if the joining entity could not have utilised the loss if it had not become a member of the group.

     View history note

    707-110(2)    
    (Repealed by No 88 of 2013)

     View history note

    Application

    SECTION 707-115  

    707-115   What losses this Subdivision applies to  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision applies to a loss of any * sort if:


    (a)an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a * member of a * consolidated group (the joined group ) at a time (the joining time ) in an income year (the joining year ); and


    (b) the loss was made by the joining entity for an income year ending before the joining time.

    Note 1:

    If the joining entity had a loss transferred to it by a previous operation of this Subdivision (when the entity was the head company of a consolidated group), this Subdivision operates later as if the joining entity had made the loss. See section 707-140 .

    Note 2:

    Section 707-405 may affect the income year for which the joining entity is treated as having made the loss, if the joining entity made the loss and the loss is referable to part of an income year.

     View history note

    707-115(2)    
    (Repealed by No 88 of 2013)

     View history note

    Transfer of loss from joining entity to head company

    SECTION 707-120   Transfer of loss from joining entity to head company  

    View history reference

    Transfer of loss from joining entity to head company

    707-120(1)    

    View history reference

    Subject to subsection (1A), the loss is transferred at the joining time from the joining entity to the * head company of the joined group (even if they are the same entity).
     View history note

    707-120(1A)    
    The loss is transferred under subsection (1) only to the extent (if any) that the loss could have been * utilised by the joining entity for an income year consisting of the * trial year if:


    (a) at the joining time, the joining entity had not become a * member of the joined group (but had been a * wholly-owned subsidiary of the * head company if the joining entity is not the head company); and


    (b) the amount of the loss that could be utilised for the trial year were not limited by the joining entity ' s income or gains for the trial year.

     View history note


    What is the trial year ?

    707-120(2)    
    The trial year is the period:


    (a) starting at the latest of these times:


    (i) the time 12 months before the joining time;

    (ii) the time the joining entity came into existence;

    (iii) the time the joining entity last ceased to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, if the joining entity had been a member of a consolidated group before the joining time but was not a * member of a consolidated group just before the joining time; and


    (b) ending just after the joining time.

    Business continuity test involving trial year

    707-120(3)    

    View history reference

    When working out whether the joining entity carried on, throughout the *trial year (or a period including the trial year):


    (a) the same business as the business it carried on at a particular time; or


    (b) a similar business to the business it carried on at that time;

    assume that the entity carried on at and just after the joining time the same business that it carried on just before the joining time.

     View history note


    Transfer of loss for income year overlapping trial year

    707-120(4)    
    If the loss was made by the joining entity for an income year all or part of which occurs in the * trial year, the transfer of the loss under subsection (1) is not prevented by the fact that the loss was made for that income year.

    Designated infrastructure project entities

    707-120(5)    

    View history reference

    Despite subsection (1A), the loss is transferred under subsection (1) to the full extent if:


    (a) the loss is a * tax loss; and


    (b) the joining entity is a * designated infrastructure project entity:


    (i) at a time in the * loss year; and

    (ii) just before the joining time.
     View history note

    SECTION 707-125   Modified business continuity test for companies ' post-1999 losses  

    View history reference

    707-125(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) the joining entity made the loss for an income year starting after 30 June 1999; and


    (b) section 165-13 or subsection 165-15(2) or (3) or 166-5(5) or (6) is relevant to working out (under section 707-120 ) whether the loss is transferred from the joining entity.

    View history reference
     View history note

    707-125(2)    

    View history reference

    Work out whether the loss is transferred on the basis that section 165-13 required the joining entity to satisfy the *business continuity test for:


    (a) the period (the business continuity test period ) consisting of:


    (i) the * trial year; and

    (ii) the income year that included the * test time worked out for section 165-13 for the joining entity (disregarding paragraph (b) of this subsection), if that income year started before the trial year; and
    View history reference


    (b) the time (the test time ) just before the end of the income year for which the loss was made by the joining entity.

     View history note

    707-125(3)    
    Work out whether the loss is transferred on the basis that:


    (a) subsection 165-15(2) specified that the period (the business continuity test period ) for the *business continuity test consisted of:


    (i) the * trial year; and

    (ii) the income year in which the person began to control, or became able to control, the voting power in the company, if that income year started before the trial year; and
    View history reference


    (b) subsection 165-15(3) required the business continuity test to be applied to the company ' s business immediately before the time (the test time ) just before the end of the income year for which the loss was made by the joining entity.

    View history reference
     View history note

    707-125(4)    
    If Subdivision 166-A would apply to the joining entity for an income year consisting of the * trial year, work out whether the loss is transferred on the basis that:


    (a) subsection 166-5(5) treated the joining entity as having satisfied the condition in section 165-13 if the joining entity satisfied the *business continuity test for the period (the business continuity test period ) consisting of:


    (i) the trial year; and

    (ii) the income year described in subsection (5) of this section, if that income year started before the trial year; and
    View history reference


    (b) subsection 166-5(6) required the business continuity test to be applied to the * business that the joining entity carried on at the time (the test time ) just before the end of the income year for which the loss was made by the joining entity.

    View history reference
    Note:

    Subdivision 166-A applies to widely held companies and eligible Division 166 companies unless they choose that Subdivision 165-A apply to them without the modifications made by Subdivision 166-A .

     View history note

    707-125(5)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (4)(a)(ii), the income year is:


    (a) the income year in which occurred the first time mentioned in subsection 166-5(6) ; or

    View history reference


    (b) the income year of the joining entity containing the time at which the joining entity is taken under subsection 707-210(5) to fail to meet the condition in section 165-12 , if that subsection is relevant to working out whether the joining entity can * utilise the loss.

    Note 1:

    Section 707-205 affects the start of the test period if the joining entity made the loss under a previous operation of this Subdivision.

    Note 2:

    Section 707-210 is about whether a company can utilise certain losses transferred to it under this Subdivision from a company.

     View history note

    707-125(6)    
    Subsection (4) of this section has effect despite subsection 707-210(6) .

    Note:

    Subsection 707-210(6) modifies section 166-5 for working out whether a company can utilise certain losses transferred to it under this Subdivision from a company.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-130   Modified pattern of distributions test  

    View history reference

    707-130(1)    

    View history reference

    This section operates for the purpose of working out (under section 707-120 ) whether the loss is transferred from the joining entity, if section 267-20 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is relevant for that purpose.
    Note 1:

    That section is relevant if the joining entity has been a non-fixed trust at any time in the period from the start of the income year in which the entity made the loss until the time it became a subsidiary member of the joined group (and was not an excepted trust at all times in the period).

    Note 2:

    That section prevents an entity from utilising a tax loss unless the entity meets the conditions in subsection 267-30(2) (if applicable) and section 267-35 in that Schedule by passing the pattern of distributions test for certain income years.

     View history note

    707-130(2)    
    Section 267-30 in that Schedule has effect as if the income year mentioned in that section were the joining year, and not the * trial year.

    Note:

    Section 267-30 in that Schedule requires the joining entity to pass the pattern of distributions test for the income year mentioned in that section if that entity distributed income or capital in that income year or within 2 months after the end of that income year.


    707-130(3)    
    Section 267-35 in that Schedule has effect as if the reference in that section to an earlier income year were to an income year earlier than the joining year.

    707-130(4)    
    Disregard each distribution (if any) of income or capital (within the meaning of that Schedule) made by the joining entity after the joining time, so far as it was made from an amount of the entity ' s income or capital attributable to a time after the joining time, in working out:


    (a) whether section 267-30 in that Schedule requires the joining entity to pass the pattern of distributions test (as defined in that Schedule); and


    (b) whether the joining entity passes that test as required by section 267-30 or 267-35 in that Schedule.

    Note:

    Disregarding that percentage of a distribution may affect a test year distribution of income or a test year distribution of capital, as those terms are defined in section 269-65 in that Schedule, and thus affect whether the joining entity passes the pattern of distributions test under section 269-60 in that Schedule.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-135   Transferring loss transferred to joining entity because business continuity test was satisfied  

    View history reference

    707-135(1)    

    View history reference

    This section operates if the loss had been transferred to the joining entity (by a previous operation of this Subdivision) because the entity from which the loss was transferred carried on during a particular period:


    (a) the same business as it carried on at a particular time; or


    (b) if section 165-211 applies in relation to the loss - a business similar to the business it carried on at a particular time.

    Note:

    Section 165-211 enables an entity to satisfy the business continuity test by carrying on a similar business.

     View history note

    707-135(2)    

    View history reference

    The loss is not transferred from the joining entity to the * head company of the joined group (despite section 707-120 ), unless the joining entity satisfies the *business continuity test for:


    (a) the * trial year (the business continuity test period ); and

    View history reference


    (b) the time (the test time ) just before the end of the income year in which the loss was transferred to the joining entity.

     View history note

     View history note

    Effect of transfer of loss

    SECTION 707-140   Effect of transfer of loss  

    View history reference

    707-140(1)    
    To the extent that the loss is transferred under section 707-120 from the joining entity to the * head company of the joined group, this Act operates (except so far as the contrary intention appears) for the purposes of income years ending after the transfer as if:


    (a) the head company had made the loss for the income year in which the transfer occurs; and


    (b) the joining entity had not made the loss for the income year for which the joining entity actually made the loss.

    707-140(1A)    

    View history reference

    However, subsection (1) does not affect the operation of paragraph 165-211(1)(a) or (c).
    Note:

    This subsection ensures that the head company can only apply the version of the business continuity test in section 165-211 if the loss of the joining entity was incurred on or after 1 July 2015.

     View history note


    Head company may utilise loss for income year of transfer

    707-140(2)    
    The * head company is not prevented from * utilising the loss for the income year in which the transfer occurs merely because this Act operates as if the head company had made the loss (to the extent of the transfer) for that year.

    Debt forgiveness in income year for which loss is made

    707-140(3)    

    View history reference

    If a debt of the * head company of the joined group is *forgiven in the income year in which the transfer occurs, sections 245-115 and 245-130 operate as if the head company had made the loss for an earlier income year.
    Note:

    This subsection has the effect that the loss may be reduced in accordance with one of those subsections by applying the total net forgiven amount for the income year in which the transfer occurs.

     View history note

     View history note

    Cancelling the transfer of the loss

    SECTION 707-145   Cancelling the transfer of the loss  

    View history reference

    707-145(1)    
    The * head company of the joined group may choose to cancel the transfer of the loss.

    707-145(2)    
    If the * head company of the joined group does so, this Act (except this section) operates for all income years ending after the transfer as if it had not occurred under section 707-120 .

    707-145(3)    
    The choice cannot be revoked.

     View history note

    What happens if the loss is not transferred?

    SECTION 707-150  

    707-150   Loss cannot be utilised for income year ending after the joining time  

    View history reference

    To the extent that the loss is not transferred under section 707-120 from the joining entity to the * head company of the joined group, the loss cannot be * utilised by any entity for an income year ending after the joining time.
     View history note

    Subdivision 707-B - Can a transferred loss be utilised?  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 707-200   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision modifies rules about a company maintaining the same ownership to be able to utilise a loss transferred to it under Subdivision 707-A , and specifies what things happening before the transfer are to be taken into account in working out whether the company can utilise the loss.

     View history note

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 707-205   Modified period for test for maintaining same ownership  

    View history reference

    707-205(1)    

    View history reference

    This section modifies Divisions 165 , 166 and 167 for the purposes of working out whether a company can *utilise a loss of any *sort that it made because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A .
     View history note

    707-205(2)    

    View history reference

    Subdivision 165-A and Divisions 166 and 167 operate for those purposes as if the *loss year started at the time of the transfer.
    Note 1:

    This means that the ownership test period defined by subsection 165-12(1) and the test period defined by subsection 166-5(2) start at the time of the transfer.

    Note 2:

    Without this section, those periods would start at the start of the income year in which the transfer occurred, so events occurring before the transfer (such as changes in holdings of voting power, rights to dividends or rights to capital) could affect whether the company could utilise the tax loss or net capital loss.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-210   Utilisation of certain losses transferred from a company depends on company that made the losses earlier  

    View history reference

    707-210(1)    

    View history reference

    This section has effect for the purposes of working out whether a company (the latest transferee ) can * utilise for an income year a loss it made because of a * COT transfer from a company (the latest transferor ).
     View history note

    707-210(1A)    

    View history reference

    A transfer of a loss under Subdivision 707-A from a company to a company is a COT transfer of the loss if the transfer occurs because:


    (a) the transferor meets the conditions in section 165-12 ; and


    (b) the conditions in one or more of paragraphs 165-15(1)(a) , (b) and (c) do not exist in relation to the transferor.

     View history note


    Meeting conditions in section 165-12

    707-210(2)    
    The latest transferee is taken to meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the income year in relation to the loss if and only if the company (the test company ) described in subsection (3) would have met those conditions for the income year had the circumstances described in subsection (4) existed.

    Note 1:

    The latest transferee and the test company may be the same company.

    Note 2:

    Section 707-405 may affect the income year for which the test company is treated as having made the loss, if the loss is referable to part of an income year.


    707-210(3)    
    The test company is the first company to make the loss. However, if:


    (a) the loss was made by the latest transferor because of one or more earlier transfers of the loss under Subdivision 707-A from a company to a company; and


    (b) one or more of those earlier transfers was not a * COT transfer;

    View history reference

    the test company is the company to which the loss was transferred in the most recent transfer described in paragraph (b).

     View history note

    707-210(4)    
    The circumstances are that:


    (a) the test company was not treated by Subdivision 707-A for the income year as not having made the loss; and


    (b) if the test company made the loss apart from that Subdivision and transferred the loss to itself under that Subdivision - the test company was not treated by that Subdivision for the income year as having made the loss for the income year in which the transfer occurred; and


    (c) nothing happened, after the time the loss was transferred from the test company to the * head company of a * consolidated group, to * membership interests or voting power:


    (i) in an entity that was at that time a * subsidiary member of the group; or

    (ii) in an entity that was at that time interposed between the test company and the head company;
    that would affect whether the test company would meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the income year; and
    View history reference


    (d) if the loss has later been transferred under that Subdivision to the head company of another consolidated group - nothing happened, after the time of the later transfer, to membership interests or voting power:


    (i) in the later transferor; or

    (ii) in an entity that was at that time interposed between the latertransferor and the head company;
    that would affect whether the test company would meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the income year.
    View history reference
     View history note


    Failing to meet conditions in section 165-12

    707-210(5)    
    The latest transferee is taken to fail to meet a condition in section 165-12 only at:


    (a) the first time the test company would have failed to meet the condition had the circumstances described in subsection (4) existed; or


    (b) the test time described in subsection 166-5(6) for the test company, if Division 166 is relevant to working out whether the test company could have * utilised the loss had the circumstances described in subsection (4) existed.

    View history reference
     View history note


    Business continuity test applying to latest transferee under Division 166

    707-210(6)    

    View history reference

    If subsection 166-5(5) affects whether the latest transferee can * utilise the loss for the income year because the latest transferee is a * widely held company or an * eligible Division 166 company, or both, during the year, subsection 166-5(6) operates as if it required the *business continuity test to be applied to the * business the latest transferee carried on just before the time described in subsection (5) of this section.
     View history note


    If the test company made the loss because of a transfer

    707-210(7)    
    If the test company made the loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A from another entity, Divisions 165 and 166 operate in relation to the test company for the purposes of subsection (2) as if the test company ' s * loss year started at the time of the transfer.

     View history note

    Subdivision 707-C - Amount of transferred losses that can be utilised  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 707-300   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    Losses transferred to the head company of a consolidated group under Subdivision 707-A can be utilised for an income year only against a fraction of the income or gains remaining after the company has utilised other losses and deductions.

    Note:

    This Subdivision does not apply if the joining entity is a designated infrastructure project entity just before the transfer and the head company is a designated infrastructure project entity just after the transfer: see section 415-45 .

     View history note

    Object

    SECTION 707-305   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    707-305(1)    
    The main object of this Subdivision is to limit, in a way that gives effect to the principles in subsections (2) and (3), the amount of losses transferred under Subdivision 707-A that can be * utilised for an income year by the transferee.

    707-305(2)    
    One principle is that the transferee is to * utilise the transferred losses for an income year only to the extent to which it has income or gains for the income year remaining after reduction by its other losses and deductions.

    707-305(3)    
    The other principle is that the amount of a transferred loss that the transferee can * utilise is to reflect the amount of the loss that the transferor could have * utilised for the income year if the transferor of the loss (whether the original maker of the loss or not) had not become a * member of a * consolidated group at the time of the transfer.

    707-305(4)    
    To give effect to those principles, this Subdivision operates on the assumption that, if each transferor of a loss to the transferee had not become a * member of a * consolidated group at the time of the transfer:


    (a) all the transferors of transferred losses to the transferee would have made income or gains for the year whose total did not exceed the transferee's income or gains for the year remaining after reduction by its other losses and deductions; and


    (b) a particular transferor's income or gains for the year would have equalled a fraction of the transferee's income or gains for the year remaining after reduction by its other losses and deductions.

    707-305(5)    

    View history reference

    The fraction is worked out by reference to the transferor's *market value at the time of the transfer (on the assumption that market value reflects capacity to generate income or gains in future).
     View history note

    How much of a transferred loss can be utilised?

    SECTION 707-310   How much of a transferred loss can be utilised?  

    View history reference

    707-310(1)    
    This section limits theamount of losses in a particular * bundle of losses transferred under Subdivision 707-A that can be * utilised by the transferee. The limit is set by reference to the * available fraction for the bundle.

    Note:

    Section 707-335 of this Act and section 707-350 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 set different limits on utilising losses in a bundle of losses in certain circumstances.



    Basic rule

    707-310(2)    
    The transferee cannot * utilise more of the losses in the * bundle than the transferee would have been able to utilise (apart from this section) under the conditions in subsections (3), (4) and (5).

    707-310(3)    

    View history reference

    The first condition is that the only amount of the transferee ' s *ordinary income, *statutory income or gains (if any) of a kind described in column 1 of an item of the table for the income year is the * available fraction of the amount worked out as described in column 2 of the item having regard to:


    (a) the transferee ' s *ordinary income, *statutory income or gains for the income year apart from this section; and


    (b) the transferee ' s deductions for the income year and losses, except losses transferred to the transferee under Subdivision 707-A .


    Graphic
    Graphic
    Income and gains
    Column 1 Column 2
    The transferee ' s ordinary income, statutory income or gains of this kind: Are worked out by reference to this amount:
    1 *Capital gains The result of:

    (a) step 2 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1); or

    (b) step 3 of the method statement in section 165-111;

    (as appropriate) for the transferee and the income year
    2 (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )  
    3 *Exempt film income The transferee ' s *net exempt film income for the income year remaining after deduction of the transferee ' s *film losses (if any)
    4 *Assessable film income The transferee ' s *net assessable film income for the income year remaining after deduction of the transferee ' s *film losses (if any)
    5 *Exempt income other than *exempt film income The amount of the transferee ' s *net exempt income for the income year that would have remained after deducting from it the transferee ' s *tax losses (if any), assuming the amount of that income were what it would have been had the transferee not had *exempt film income for the year
    6 Assessable income that is not attributable to *capital gains and is not *assessable film income The amount (if any) that would have been the transferee ' s taxable income (if any) for the income year if the transferee had not had for the income year:
    (a) any *net capital gain; or
    (b) any *net assessable film income;
    reduced by the amount (the transferee ' s grossed-up franking offset amount ) worked out in accordance with paragraph (3A)(c)

     View history note

    707-310(3A)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of subsection (3):


    (a) the transferee ' s * tax losses to which paragraph (b) of, or the table in, that subsection applies are to be worked out on the assumption that the transferee chooses to deduct under subsection 36-17(2) all of the tax losses and that subsection 36-17(5) does not apply to that choice; and


    (b) except as mentioned in paragraph (a) of this subsection, amounts worked out as described in column 2 of an item of the table in subsection (3) are to be worked out making the same choices as the transferee actually makes in working out its taxable income as stated in its * income tax return for the income year; and


    (c) the transferee ' s grossed-up franking offset amount mentioned in column 2 of item 6 in the table is the amount worked out using the formula:


      1      
      Transferee ' s *corporate tax rate for imputation purposes for the income year × Franking offsets  


    where:

    franking offsets
    means the total amount of * tax offsets to which the transferee is entitled for the income year under Division 207 and Subdivision 210-H (except those that are subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of section 67-25 ).

    View history reference
     View history note

    707-310(4)    
    The second condition is that once the amounts of the transferee ' s income or gains have been worked out under subsection (3) they are not reduced by:


    (a) deductions, or losses, other than losses in the * bundle; or


    (b) taxes or expenses described in subsection 375-805(4) (which is about * net exempt film income).

    Note:

    One of the effects of subsection (4) is that, for working out how much of a film loss in the bundle can be deducted from the transferee ' s net exempt film income or net assessable film income:

  • (a) the transferee ' s net exempt film income will be the same as its exempt film income worked out under subsection (3); and
  • (b) the transferee ' s net assessable film income will be the same as its assessable film income worked out under subsection (3).

  • 707-310(5)    
    The third condition is that once the amounts of the transferee ' s * exempt income have been worked out under subsection (3), assume that the transferee had no losses, outgoings or taxes described in subsection 36-20(1) (which is about * net exempt income), in working out how much of a * tax loss in the * bundle can be deducted from the transferee ' s net exempt income.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-315   What is a bundle of losses?  

    View history reference

    707-315(1)    
    A bundle of losses comes into existence at the time (the initial transfer time ) a loss of any * sort that has not previously been transferred under Subdivision 707-A is transferred under that Subdivision from an entity (the real loss-maker ) to the * head company of a * consolidated group (the joined group ).

    707-315(2)    
    At the initial transfer time, the bundle consists of every loss (regardless of its * sort) that:


    (a) is transferred at that time under that Subdivision from the real loss-maker to the * head company of the joined group; and


    (b) has not been transferred under that Subdivision before that time.

    Note:

    For certain purposes, section 707-327 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 treats the bundle as including certain other losses too.


    707-315(3)    
    The bundle still exists at a later time if it includes at that later time at least one loss of any * sort that could be * utilised or otherwise reduced by an entity for an income year ending after that time (even if one or more losses have ceased to be included in the bundle before that later time).

    Note:

    A bundle continues to exist even if the losses in it are transferred again under Subdivision 707-A after the initial transfer time.


    707-315(4)    
    A loss ceases to be included in a * bundle at the first time for which it is true that the loss cannot be * utilised or otherwise reduced by any entity for an income year ending after that time.

    707-315(5)    

    View history reference

    If, had a loss been made by a company as assumed under a provision of Division 170 , the loss would have been transferred under Subdivision 707-A , this Subdivision and other provisions that relate to or may affect the * available fractions for one or more * bundles of losses (including sections 707-140 and 719-325 ) operate as if the transfer had occurred.
    Note:

    Section 707-140 provides for a choice to cancel a transfer under Subdivision 707-A . Section 719-325 provides for a choice to cancel all losses in certain bundles of losses. A choice under one of those sections may result in a bundle not coming into existence, or not being in existence after a certain time.

     View history note

    707-315(6)    

    View history reference

    To avoid doubt, a choice under section 707-145 or 719-325 , as it operates because of subsection (5) of this section, relating to the loss does not affect or prevent:


    (a) a transfer of the loss that would have occurred under Subdivision 707-A as described in another application of that subsection involving a different company; or


    (b) * utilisation of the loss by the company that actually made the loss and is different from the company assumed under Division 170 to have made the loss.

    Note:

    Therefore a choice under section 707-145 or 719-325 , as operating because of subsection (5) of this section, will be able to cause only one bundle not to exist, and will not affect the existence of other bundles that are treated as existing because of other operations of that subsection.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-320   What is the available fraction for a bundle of losses?  

    View history reference

    707-320(1)    

    View history reference

    The available fraction for a * bundle of losses at a time is:


      *Modified market value of the real
            loss-maker at the initial transfer time        
    Transferee ' s adjusted market value at the
    initial transfer time
     

    where:

    transferee ' s adjusted market value at the initial transfer time
    means the amount that would be the *market value, at the initial transfer time, of the transferee to which the losses in the * bundle were transferred at that time if:


    (a) the transferee did not have a loss of any * sort for an income year ending before that time; and


    (b) the balance of the transferee ' s * franking account were nil at that time.

    Note:

    The value for the transferee will be worked out on the basis that subsidiary members of the consolidated group headed by the transferee are part of the transferee, because of section 701-1 (the single entity rule).


    707-320(2)    

    View history reference

    However, if an event described in an item of the table happens, the available fraction for the * bundle is reduced or maintained just after the event by multiplying it by the factor identified in the item:


    Factors affecting the available fraction
    Item Event Factor
    1 One or more losses in the *bundle are transferred for the second or subsequent time The lesser of 1 and this fraction:
        *Market value of the transferor at
                                the time of the transfer                            
    *Market value of the transferee at
    the time of the transfer
    .
    2 At the same time as the losses in the *bundle were most recently transferred, losses in one or more other bundles were transferred from the same transferor to the same transferee, and the losses in the bundle or one of the other bundles had not been transferred before The result of dividing the lesser of:
     (a) the available fraction (apart from this subsection) for the bundle of losses that had not been transferred before; and
      (b) 1;
        by the sum of the available fractions for all the bundles (apart from this item applying to transfers at the time)
    .
    3 The company to which the losses in the *bundle were most recently transferred has transferred to it at a later time losses in one or more other bundles 1 Total of the available fractions for the other bundles just after the later time
    .
    4 There is an increase in the *market value of the company to which the losses in the *bundle were most recently transferred, because of an event described in subsection 707-325(4) (but not covered by subsection 707-325(5)) *Market value of the company
                                                    just before the event                                          
      *Market value of the company just before the event + Amount of the increase
    .
    5 The available fractions (apart from this item) for all the *bundles of losses most recently made by the company that most recently made the losses in the bundle total more than 1.000                     1                
    The total
     


    707-320(3)    
    If the transfer under Subdivision 707-A of one or more losses in a * bundle causes events described in 2 or more items of the table in subsection (2) to happen and require calculations of the available fraction for that bundle and for one or more other bundles:


    (a) make the calculations required by those items in the order in which the items appear in the table; and


    (b) take account of the results of a calculation under an earlier item in making a calculation under a later item.

    707-320(4)    
    For a * bundle of losses:


    (a) subject to paragraph (b) - the available fraction is worked out to 3 decimal places, rounding up if the fourth decimal place is 5 or more; or


    (b) if the available fraction worked out under paragraph (a) is 0.000 and, if it were worked out to more decimal places, it would include one or more non-zero digits - the available fraction is worked out to the number of decimal places that includes the first or only such digit, rounding up if the next decimal place is 5 or more.

    Examples:

    For 0.000328, the available fraction is 0.0003. For 0.000086, the available fraction is 0.00009.

     View history note

    707-320(4A)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) have effect subject to subsection (4).

     View history note

    707-320(5)    
    If, apart from this subsection, the available fraction for a * bundle of losses would need to be worked out by dividing a number by 0, work out the available fraction by dividing the number by 1.

    707-320(6)    
    The available fraction for a * bundle of losses is 0 if, apart from this subsection, it would be negative.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-325   Modified market value of an entity becoming a member of a consolidated group  

    View history reference

    Basic rule

    707-325(1)    

    View history reference

    The modified market value of an entity that becomes a * member of a * consolidated group at a particular time is the amount that would be the * market value of the entity at that time if:


    (a) the entity had no loss of any * sort for any income year, and the balance of its * franking account at that time were nil; and


    (b) the * subsidiary members of the group at that time were separate entities and not just parts of the * head company of the group; and


    (c) the entity ' s market value did not include an amount attributable (directly or indirectly) to a * membership interest in a member of the group (other than the entity):


    (i) that is a * corporate tax entity; or

    (ii) that transferred a loss under Subdivision 707-A to the head company of the group at or before that time; and


    (d) the contribution to the entity ' s market value made by a trust (other than one that is a member described in paragraph (c)) were limited to the amount attributable to the entity ' s * fixed entitlements (if any) at that time to income or capital of the trust that is not attributable (directly or indirectly) to a membership interest in such a member.

    Note 1:

    Section 707-330 affects the modified market value of an entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the consolidated group, if the entity was the head company of another consolidated group just beforehand.

    Note 2:

    Section 707-325 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides for an entity ' s modified market value to be increased in certain circumstances for the purposes of working out the available fraction for a bundle of losses transferred from the entity.



    Ruleto prevent inflation of modified market value

    707-325(2)    
    However, if:


    (a) one or more of the events described in subsection (4) occurred in the 4 years before the time; and


    (b) the amount worked out under subsection (1) exceeds what it would have been if none of those events had occurred;

    the modified market value of the entity at the time is the amount worked out under subsection (1), reduced by the amount worked out under subsection (3).


    707-325(3)    
    The amount of the reduction is the lesser of:


    (a) the excess described in paragraph (2)(b); and


    (b) the total increase in the *market value of the entity that occurred immediately after each event mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) because of the event.

    View history reference

    707-325(4)    
    These are the events:


    (a) an injection of capital into the entity or an entity that was an * associate of the entity (or of the trustee of the entity, if the entity is a trust) at the time of the injection;


    (b) a transaction that:


    (i) did not take place at *arm ' s length; and

    (ii) involved the entity or an entity that was an associate of the entity (or of the trustee of the entity, if the entity is a trust) at the time of the transaction.
    View history reference
     View history note

    707-325(5)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), disregard an injection of capital if, and only if, it is made:


    (a) into a * listed public company through a * dividend reinvestment * scheme involving the issue of a * share in the company to an entity that held a share in the company before the injection; or


    (b) in association with the acquisition of a *share in a company in relation to which the conditions in subsection 703-35(5) are met; or

    View history reference


    (c) in association with the acquisition of a * share, in a body corporate, in relation to which the conditions in subsection 703-37(4) are met.

    View history reference
    Note 1:

    Section 703-35 of this Act deals with shares acquired under arrangements for employee shareholdings.

    Note 2:

    Section 703-37 of this Act deals with certain preference shares following an ADI restructure.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-330   Losses transferred from former head company  

    View history reference

    707-330(1)    
    This section has effect for working out the * available fraction for a * bundle of losses if:


    (a) an entity (the ex-head company ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group (the bigger group ) at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) just before the joining time the ex-head company was the * head company of another consolidated group (the old group ); and


    (c) at the joining time the losses are transferred under Subdivision 707-A from the ex-head company to the head company of the bigger group.

    707-330(2)    

    View history reference

    Work out the ex-head company's * modified market value or *market value as if each * member of the bigger group that had been a * subsidiary member of the old group just before the joining time were a part of the ex-head company, and not a separate member of the bigger group, when the transfer occurred.

    707-330(3)    
    Also, work out the ex-head company's * modified market value as if each * subsidiary member of the old group had been a part of the ex-head company while it was a subsidiary member of the old group.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-335   Limit on utilising transferred losses if circumstances change during income year  

    View history reference

    707-335(1)    
    This section limits the amount of losses in a particular * bundle of losses transferred under Subdivision 707-A that can be * utilised by the transferee for an income year if:


    (a) the losses in the bundle are transferred to the transferee after the start of the income year; or

    View history reference


    (b) the value of the * available fraction for the bundle changes at a time within the period (the transferee's loss-holding period ) described in subsection (2).

     View history note

    707-335(2)    
    The transferee's loss-holding period:


    (a) starts at the start of the income year or, if the losses in the * bundle were transferred to the transferee from another entity during the income year, at the time of the transfer; and


    (b) ends when one of these events occurs:


    (i) the income year ends;

    (ii) the transferee becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group.

    707-335(3)    
    The transferee cannot * utilise for the income year more of the losses than is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) the method in section 707-310 for working out the maximum amount of the losses the transferee could utilise for the income year (apart from this section); and


    (b) the number of days in the transferee's loss-holding period; and


    (c) the value or values of the * available fraction for the * bundle during the transferee's loss-holding period; and


    (d) the number of days in the transferee's loss-holding period for which the available fraction for the bundle has a particular value; and


    (e) the principle that, if the transferee transferred the losses to itself under Subdivision 707-A after the start of the income year, the amount of the losses it can utilise for the income year should be worked out as if:


    (i) the losses had been included in the bundle from the start of the income year; and

    (ii) the available fraction for the bundle had been 1 from the start of the income year until the time of the transfer; and
    View history reference


    (f) any other relevant matters.

     View history note

    707-335(4)    
    Section 707-310 has effect subject to this section.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-340   Utilising transferred losses while exempt income remains  

    View history reference

    Transferred film losses and net exempt film income

    707-340(1)    
    If:


    (a) the transferee of * film losses in a * bundle of losses has deducted from its * net exempt film income for an income year an amount of those losses that:


    (i) is equal to the amount of * exempt film income worked out under subsection 707-310(3) for the transferee and the bundle; or

    (ii) if section 707-335 affects the transferee's utilisation of losses in the bundle - is reasonable, having regard to that section; and


    (b) the transferee still has net exempt film income for the year and film losses remaining in the bundle;

    the fact the transferee still has net exempt film income does not stop it deducting film losses remaining in the bundle from its * net assessable film income for the year.



    Transferred tax losses and net exempt income

    707-340(2)    
    If:


    (a) the transferee of * tax losses (other than * film losses) in a * bundle of losses has deducted from its * net exempt income for an income year an amount of its tax losses (other than film losses) in the bundle that:


    (i) is equal to the amount of * exempt income worked out under subsection 707-310(3) for the transferee and the bundle; or

    (ii) if section 707-335 affects the transferee's utilisation of losses in the bundle - is reasonable, having regard to that section; and


    (b) the transferee still has net exempt income for the year and tax losses (other than film losses) remaining in the bundle;

    the fact the transferee still has net exempt income does not stop it deducting tax losses (other than film losses) remaining in the bundle from its assessable income for the year.



    Limit on deduction

    707-340(3)    
    This section does not allowthe deduction for an income year of an amount of losses in a * bundle so as to exceed the limit set by section 707-310 or 707-335 on * utilisation for the year of losses of that * sort in the bundle.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-345  

    707-345   Other provisions are subject to this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    The rules in this Subdivision are additional to the provisions of this Act about * utilising losses that are outside this Subdivision. Those provisions have effect subject to this Subdivision.
     View history note

    Subdivision 707-D - Special rules about losses  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 707-400   Head company's business before and after consolidation not compared  

    View history reference

    707-400(1)    

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) the *business continuity test applies to a company that becomes a * head company of a * consolidated group at a time; and

    View history reference


    (b) apart from this section, the business continuity test period would start before that time and end after it;

    View history reference

    thebusiness continuity test period starts at that time (and ends when it would end apart from this section), for the purposes of that application of the business continuity test.

     View history note

    707-400(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply for the purposes of working out whether the company can transfer to itself a loss under section 707-120 .

     View history note

    707-405   (Repealed) SECTION 707-405 Modified operation of other provisions  
    (Repealed by No 16 of 2003)

     View history note

    SECTION 707-410   Exit history rule does not treat entity as having made a loss  

    View history reference

    707-410(1)    
    To avoid doubt, if the * head company of a * consolidated group makes a loss of a particular * sort and an entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group, the entity is not taken because of section 701-40 (the exit history rule):


    (a) to have made the loss; or


    (b) to have made another loss of the same sort because of the circumstances that caused the head company to make the loss.

    707-410(2)    
    It does not matter whether the * head company makes the loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A (whether from the entity or another entity) or because of another provision.

     View history note

    SECTION 707-415   Application of losses with nil available fraction for certain purposes  

    View history reference

    707-415(1)    
    Subsection (2) applies if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a *member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) a *tax loss or a *net capital loss was transferred from the joining entity to the *head company of the group at the joining time under Subdivision 707-A ; and


    (c) that loss is included in a *bundle of losses for which the *available fraction is 0.

    707-415(2)    

    View history reference

    The *head company can choose to apply the loss as shown in the table:


    Item If … the head company can choose to apply the loss in reduction of … for the purposes of …
    1 (a) the joining entity owed a debt just before the joining time to an entity that was not a * member of the group at the joining time; and the *total net forgiven amount applying that total net forgiven amount in accordance with sections 245-115, 245-130, 245-145 and 245-175
      (b) the loss is wholly or partly attributable to the debt; and    
      (c) Subdivision 245-E (about applying the total net forgiven amount to reduce other amounts) applies in relation to the debt (or another debt that is reasonably connected to the debt) because the debt is *forgiven after the joining time    
    2 (a) the joining entity owed a * limited recourse debt just before the joining time to an entity that was not a * member of the group at the joining time; and the deduction working out the excess referred to in subsection 243-35(1).
      (b) Division 243 applies in relation to the debt; and    
      (c) the loss is wholly or partly attributable to a deduction mentioned in paragraph 243-15(1)(c) for an income year ending before the joining time    
    3 (a) the joining entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group at a time (the leaving time ) after the joining time; and the amount remaining mentioned in paragraph 104-520(1)(b) working out whether * CGT event L5 happens at the leaving time, and if so, the amount of any * capital gain under subsection 104-520(3).
      (b) the entity ' s liabilities at the leaving time are the same as, or are reasonably connected to, the liabilities that it had at the joining time    

     View history note


    Limits on application of loss

    707-415(3)    
    The loss can be applied under subsection (2) in relation to an income year only to the extent that it could be *utilised by the *head company for the income year, on the assumption that the *available fraction for the *bundle of losses was 1.

    707-415(4)    

    View history reference

    The amount of the loss that may be applied in accordance with item 1 of the table in subsection (2) cannot exceed the *gross forgiven amount of the debt to which the loss is attributable.
     View history note

    707-415(5)    
    The amount of the loss that may be applied in accordance with item 2 of the table in subsection (2) cannot exceed the amount of the loss that is attributable to the deduction mentioned in that item.

    707-415(6)    
    For the purposes of item 3 of the table in subsection (2), if:


    (a) assuming that the joining entity ceased to be a *subsidiary member of the *consolidated group just after the joining time, the *head company of the group would make a *capital gain because of *CGT event L5; and


    (b) the sum of the losses in the *bundle of losses mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) exceeds the amount of the capital gain;

    the total amount of those losses that may be applied in accordance with that item cannot exceed the amount of the capital gain.


    707-415(7)    
    To avoid doubt, a loss can be applied under this section only to the extent that it has not already been applied.

     View history note

    Division 709 - Other rules applying when entities become subsidiary members etc.  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Subdivision 709-A - Franking accounts  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 709-50   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    Only the head company of a consolidated group has an operating franking account. The subsidiary members ' franking accounts do not operate while they are subsidiary members. Debits or credits that would otherwise arise in subsidiary members ' franking accounts arise instead in the head company ' s franking account.

     View history note

    Object

    SECTION 709-55  

    709-55   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    The object of this Subdivision is for each * consolidated group to operate what is in substance a single * franking account, by ensuring that:


    (a) there is a nil balance in the franking accounts of entities becoming * subsidiary members of the group; and


    (b) the franking accounts of those subsidiary members do not operate while they are subsidiary members; and


    (c) debits or credits that would otherwise arise in the franking accounts of the subsidiary members arise instead in the franking account of the * head company of the group; and


    (d) the head company is the only * member of the group that can frank distributions.

     View history note

    Treatment of franking accounts at joining time

    SECTION 709-60   Nil balance franking account for joining entity  

    View history reference

    709-60(1)    
    This section operates if an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ).

    709-60(2)    
    If the joining entity's * franking account is in surplus just before the joining time:


    (a) a debit equal to the * franking surplus arises at the joining time in the joining entity's franking account; and


    (b) a credit equal to the franking surplus arises at the joining time in the franking account of the * head company of the group.

    709-60(3)    
    If the joining entity's * franking account is in deficit just before the joining time:


    (a) a credit equal to the * franking deficit arises at the joining time in the joining entity's franking account; and


    (b) the joining entity is liable to pay * franking deficit tax as if the joining entity's income year had ended just before the joining time; and


    (c) despite item 5 of the table in section 205-15 , a credit does not arise under that item in the joining entity's franking account because of that liability.

    View history reference
     View history note

    Treatment of subsidiary member's franking account

    SECTION 709-65  

    709-65   Subsidiary member ' s franking account does not operate  

    View history reference

    The * franking account of an entity that is a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group does not operate during the period:


    (a) beginning just after the entity becomes a subsidiary member of the group; and


    (b) ending when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group.

     View history note

    Treatment of head company's franking account

    SECTION 709-70   Credits arising in head company's franking account  

    View history reference

    709-70(1)    
    This section operates if a credit would arise in the * franking account of a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the crediting time ) apart from section 709-65 .

    709-70(2)    
    A credit arises in the * franking account of the * head company of the group at the crediting time.

    Note:

    A credit can also arise in the head company's franking account at any time under section 205-15 .

     View history note

    709-70(3)    
    The amount of the credit is the same as the amount of the credit that would arise in the * franking account of the * subsidiary member.

    709-70(4)    
    This section does not apply to a credit arising in the * subsidiary member's * franking account under paragraph 709-60(3)(a) .

    Note:

    Such a credit arises if the entity that became the subsidiary member had a deficit in its franking account just before the time it became the subsidiary member. The credit equals the deficit, creating a nil balance in the account from that time.

     View history note

    SECTION 709-75   Debits arising in head company's franking account  

    View history reference

    709-75(1)    
    This section operates if a debit would arise in the * franking account of a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the debiting time ) apart from section 709-65 .

    709-75(2)    
    A debit arises in the * franking account of the * head company of the group at the debiting time.

    Note:

    A debit can also arise in the head company's franking account at any time under section 205-30 .

     View history note

    709-75(3)    
    The amount of the debit is the same as the amount of the debit that would arise in the * franking account of the * subsidiary member.

    709-75(4)    
    This section does not apply to a debit arising in the * subsidiary member's * franking account under paragraph 709-60(2)(a) .

    Note:

    Such a debit arises if the entity that became the subsidiary member had a surplus in its franking account just before the time it became the subsidiary member. The debit equals the surplus, creating a nil balance in the account from that time.

     View history note

    Franking distributions by subsidiary member

    SECTION 709-80   Subsidiary member ' s distributions on employee shares and certain preference shares taken to be distributions by the head company  

    View history reference

    709-80(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group makes a * frankable distribution; and


    (b) the distribution is made because an entity (the shareholder ) owns a * share in the subsidiary member; and


    (c) the share must be disregarded under subsection 703-35(4) or 703-37(4) ; and

    View history reference


    (d) the distribution is made to the shareholder, or to another entity because the shareholder owns the share; and


    (e) the entity to which the distribution is made is not a * member of the group.

    Note 1:

    Subsection 703-35(4) requires certain shares acquired under employee share schemes to be disregarded.

    Note 2:

    Subsection 703-37(4) requires certain preference shares to be disregarded following an ADI restructure.

     View history note

    709-80(2)    
    Part 3-6 operates as if the * distribution were a * frankable distribution made by the * head company of the group to a * member of the head company.

    Note:

    Part 3-6 deals with imputation.


     View history note

    SECTION 709-85   Non-share distributions by subsidiary members taken to be distributions by head company  

    View history reference

    709-85(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) an entity holds a * non-share equity interest in a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group; and


    (b) the subsidiary member makes a * non-share distribution to the entity as holder of the interest; and


    (c) the distribution is a * frankable distribution; and


    (d) the entity to which the distribution is made is not a * member of the group.

    709-85(2)    
    Part 3-6 operates as if the * distribution were a * frankable distribution made by the * head company of the group to a * member of the head company.

    Note:

    Part 3-6 deals with imputation.

     View history note

    SECTION 709-90  

    709-90   Subsidiary member ' s distributions to foreign resident taken to be distributions by head company  

    View history reference

    Part 3-6 operates as if a * frankable distribution made by a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group (the foreign-held subsidiary ) were a frankable distribution made by the * head company of the group to a * member of the head company if:


    (a) the foreign-held subsidiary meets the set of requirements in section 703-45 , section 701C-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 or section 701C-15 of that Act; and


    (b) the frankable distribution is made to a foreign resident.

    Note:

    Part 3-6 deals with imputation.

     View history note

    Payment of group liability by former subsidiary member

    SECTION 709-95   Payment of group liability by former subsidiary member  

    View history reference

    709-95(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) an entity (the former subsidiary ) ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group (the old group ) at a particular time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) at or after the leaving time, the former subsidiary:


    (i) * pays a PAYG instalment for which it was jointly and severally liable under subsection721-15(1) because it was a subsidiary member of the old group; or

    (ii) * pays income tax for which it was jointly and severally liable under that subsection because it was a subsidiary member of the old group; and


    (c) apart from this section, a * franking credit would arise under section 205-15 in the * franking account of the former subsidiary at a time (the crediting time ) because of that payment.

    709-95(2)    
    The credit:


    (a) does not arise at the crediting time in the * franking account of the former subsidiary; and


    (b) instead, arises at the crediting time in the franking account of the entity that was the * head company of the old group at the leaving time.

     View history note

    SECTION 709-100   Refund of income tax to former subsidiary member  

    View history reference

    709-100(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) an entity (the former subsidiary ) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group (the old group ) at a particular time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) at or after the leaving time, the former subsidiary *receives a refund of income tax or *receives a refund of diverted profits tax, for which it was jointly and severally liable under subsection 721-15(1) because it was a subsidiary member of the old group; and

    View history reference


    (c) apart from this section, a *franking debit would arise under section 205-30 in the *franking account of the former subsidiary at a time (the debiting time ) because of that payment.

     View history note

    709-100(2)    
    The debit:


    (a) does not arise at the debiting time in the *franking account of the former subsidiary; and


    (b) instead, arises at the debiting time in the franking account of the entity that was the *head company of the old group at the leaving time.

     View history note

    Subdivision 709-B - Imputation issues  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 709-150   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision modifies the way Division 208 (exempting entities and former exempting entities) operates in relation to consolidated groups.

     View history note

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 709-155   Testing consolidated groups  

    View history reference

    709-155(1)    
    To determine whether a * consolidated group is an * exempting entity or * former exempting entity, the tests in Division 208 are applied to the * head company of the group.

    709-155(2)    
    However, there are some additional rules that can alter the way that Division 208 applies to a * consolidated group. These are set out in sections 709-160 to 709-175 .

    709-155(3)    
    In applying those rules to an entity that is a * member of a * consolidated group:


    (a) Division 208 is to be applied before those rules; and


    (b) that Division is to be applied just after the entity became a member of the group but, for a * subsidiary member, it is to be applied on the assumption that the subsidiary was not a member of the group at that time.

    709-155(4)    
    Except as mentioned in paragraph (3)(b), Division 208 has no application to a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group.

     View history note

    SECTION 709-160   Subsidiary member is exempting entity  

    View history reference

    709-160(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) the * head company of a * consolidated group is neither an exempting entity nor a * former exempting entity; and


    (b) a * corporate tax entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (c) the entity is an * exempting entity at the joining time.

    709-160(2)    
    These rules apply to the * consolidated group.


    Rules applying to *consolidated group
    Item Rule
    1 The *head company becomes a *former exempting entity at the joining time
    2 The *head company has both a *franking account and an *exempting account
    3 If the *subsidiary member ' s *franking account has a *franking surplus at the joining time:
      (a) a debit equal to that surplus arises in that account at the joining time; and
      (b) a credit equal to that surplus arises in the *exempting account of the *head company at the joining time
    4 Subsection 709-60(2) (about franking surplus) does not apply to the *subsidiary member
    5 Item 1 of the table in section 208-115 does not apply to the *head company
    6 Item 1 of the table in section 208-120 does not apply to the *head company
    7 Item 1 of the table in section 208-130 does not apply to the *head company
    8 Item 1 of the table in section 208-145 does not apply to the *head company

    Note 1:

    If the subsidiary ' s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3) .

    Note 2:

    The subsidiary ' s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65 .

     View history note

    SECTION 709-165   Subsidiary member is former exempting entity  

    View history reference

    709-165(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) the * head company of a * consolidated group is neither an exempting entity nor a * former exempting entity; and


    (b) a * corporate tax entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at a time (also the joining time ); and


    (c) the entity is a * former exempting entity at the joining time.

    709-165(2)    
    These rules apply to the * consolidated group.


    Rules applying to *consolidated group
    Item Rule
    1 The *head company becomes a *former exempting entity at the joining time
    2 The *head company has both a *franking account and an *exempting account
    3 If the *subsidiary member ' s *exempting account has an *exempting surplus at the joining time:
      (a) a debit equal to that surplus arises in that account at the joining time; and
      (b) a credit equal to that surplus arises in the exempting account of the *head company at the joining time
    4 If the *subsidiary member ' s *exempting account has an *exempting deficit at the joining time:
      (a) a credit equal to that deficit arises in that account at the joining time; and
      (b) a debit equal to that deficit arises in the subsidiary ' s *franking account just before the joining time
    5 The *subsidiary member ' s *exempting account does not operate during the period:
      (a) starting just after the joining time; and
      (b) ending when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group
    6 Item 1 of the table in section 208-115 does not apply to the *head company
    7 Item 1 of the table in section 208-120 does not apply to the *head company
    8 Item 1 of the table in section 208-130 does not apply to the *head company
    9 Item 1 of the table in section 208-145 does not apply to the *head company

    Note 1:

    Any surplus in the subsidiary ' s franking account will be transferred to the head company ' s franking account: see subsection 709-60(2).

    Note 2:

    If the subsidiary ' s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3) . This deficit may be increased by item 4 in the table in subsection (2).

    Note 3:

    The subsidiary ' s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65 .

     View history note

    SECTION 709-170  

    709-170   Head company and subsidiary are exempting entities  

    View history reference

    There is no change to the status of the * head company of a * consolidated group if:


    (a) the head company is an * exempting entity; and


    (b) a * corporate tax entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at a time (also the joining time ); and


    (c) the entity is an exempting entity at the joining time.

    Note 1:

    If the subsidiary ' s franking account is in surplus, that surplus will be transferred to the head company ' s franking account: see subsection 709-60(2) .

    Note 2:

    If the subsidiary ' s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3) .

    Note 3:

    The subsidiary ' s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65 .

     View history note

    SECTION 709-175   Head company is former exempting entity  

    View history reference

    709-175(1)    
    Subsection (2) operates if:


    (a) the * head company of a * consolidated group is a * former exempting entity; and


    (b) a * corporate tax entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at a time (also the joining time ); and


    (c) the entity is an * exempting entity at the joining time.

    709-175(2)    
    These rules apply to the * consolidated group.


    Rules applying to *consolidated group
    Item Rule
    1 There is no change to the status of the *head company
    2 If the subsidiary member ' s *franking account has a *franking surplus at the joining time:
      (a) a debit equal to that surplus arises in that account at the joining time; and
      (b) a credit equal to that surplus arises in the *exempting account of the *head company at the joining time
    3 Subsection 709-60(2) (about franking surplus) does not apply to the *subsidiary member

    Note 1:

    If the subsidiary ' s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3) .

    Note 2:

    The subsidiary ' s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65 .


    709-175(3)    
    Subsection (4) operates if:


    (a) the * head company of a * consolidated group is a * former exempting entity; and


    (b) a * corporate tax entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at a time (also the joining time ); and


    (c) the entity is a * former exempting entity at the joining time.

    709-175(4)    
    These rules apply to the * consolidated group.


    Rules applying to *consolidated group
    Item Rule
    1 There is no change to the status of the *head company
    2 If the *subsidiary member ' s *exempting account has an *exempting surplus at the joining time:
      (a) a debit equal to that surplus arises in that account at the joining time; and
      (b) a credit equal to that surplus arises in the exempting account of the *head company at the joining time
    3 If the *subsidiary member ' s *exempting account has an *exempting deficit at the joining time:
      (a) a credit equal to that deficit arises in that account at the joining time; and
      (b) a debit equal to that deficit arises in the subsidiary ' s *franking account just before the joining time
    4 The *subsidiary member ' s *exempting account does not operate during the period:
      (a) starting just after the joining time; and
      (b) ending when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group

    Note 1:

    If the subsidiary ' s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3) . This deficit may be increased by item 3 in the table in subsection (4).

    Note 2:

    The subsidiary ' s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65 .


    709-175(5)    
    There is no change to the status of the * head company of a * consolidated group if:


    (a) the head company is a * former exempting entity; and


    (b) a * corporate tax entity becomes a * subsidiary member of the group; and


    (c) the entity is neither an * exempting entity nor a former exempting entity at the joining time.

    Note 1:

    If the subsidiary ' s franking account is in surplus, that surplus will be transferred to the head company ' s franking account: see subsection 709-60(2) .

    Note 2:

    If the subsidiary ' s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3) .

    Note 3:

    The subsidiary ' s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65 .

     View history note

    Subdivision 709-C - Treatment of excess franking deficit tax offsets when entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 709-180   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision provides that any excess in the tax offset arising from a franking deficit tax liability of an entity that becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group is transferred to the head company of the group.

     View history note

    SECTION 709-185   Joining entity ' s excess franking deficit tax offsets transferred to head company  

    View history reference

    709-185(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) the joining entity is entitled to a * tax offset under section 205-70 for the income year that ends or, if subsection 701-30(3) applies, that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, at the joining time; and


    (c) an amount (the joining entity ' s excess ) of the offset remains after applying section 63-10 (about the tax offset priority rules) to the joining entity ' s basic income tax liability for that income year.

    View history reference
     View history note


    Transfer of excess to head company

    709-185(2)    

    View history reference

    For the purpose of applying subsection 205-70(1) to the *head company of the *consolidated group for the income year in which the joining time occurs:


    (a) if, as described in paragraph 205-70(1)(c) , an amount of a *tax offset remains after applying section 63-10 - that amount is taken to be increased by the amount of the joining entity ' s excess; or


    (b) otherwise:


    (i) paragraph 205-70(1)(c) is taken to apply to the head company; and

    (ii) the remaining amount of a tax offset covered by that paragraph is taken to be the amount of the joining entity ' s excess.
    Note:

    Paragraph 205-70(1)(c) refers to tax offsets under section 205-70 .

     View history note

    709-185(2A)    

    View history reference

    In working out whether paragraph (2)(a) applies, take into account any application of this section to any other entity that became a *subsidiary member of the group before the joining time.
     View history note


    Joining entity prevented from utilising excess in later income years

    709-185(3)    
    For the purpose of applying subsection 205-70(1) to the joining entity for any income year after that in which the joining time occurs, the joining entity ' s excess is disregarded.

     View history note

    SECTION 709-190  

    709-190   Exit history rule not to treat leaving entity as having a franking deficit tax offset excess  

    View history reference

    To avoid doubt, if:


    (a) the * head company of a * consolidated group is entitled to a * tax offset under section 205-70 for an income year; and


    (b) an amount (the excess ) of the offset remains after applying section 63-10 (about the tax offset priority rules) to the head company ' s basic income tax liability for that income year; and

    View history reference


    (c) an entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group in the income year;

    the entity is not taken because of section 701-40 (the exit history rule):


    (d) to have the excess; or

    View history reference


    (e) to have another excess of that kind because of the circumstances that caused the head company to have the excess.

     View history note

    Subdivision 709-D - Deducting bad debts  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 709-200   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    An entity can deduct a bad debt that:

  • (a) has for a period been owed to a member of a consolidated group; and
  • (b) has for another period been owed to an entity that was not a member of that group;
  • only if each entity that has been owed the debt for such a period could have deducted the debt had it been written off as bad at the end of the period. This applies even if the debt is owed to the same entity for different periods.

     View history note

    Application and object

    SECTION 709-205   Application of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    709-205(1)    
    This Subdivision affects whether an entity (the claimant ) that is or has been a * member of a * consolidated group and writes off a debt, or part of a debt, as bad may deduct the debt or part if the conditions in subsection (2) exist.

    Note:

    This Subdivision affects similarly whether an entity that is or has been a member of a consolidated group and extinguishes a debt as part of a debt/equity swap may deduct a loss resulting from the swap. See section 709-220 .

     View history note

    709-205(2)    
    The conditions are that, in the time starting when the debt was incurred (whether to the claimant or another entity) and ending when the claimant wrote off the debt or part:


    (a) the debt was owed to an entity (whether the claimant or another entity) for a period (a debt test period ) when the entity was a * member of a * consolidated group; and


    (b) the debt was owed to an entity (whether the claimant or another entity) for a period (also a debt test period ) when the entity was not a member of that group.

    Note 1:

    The debt must have been owed to the claimant for at least one of the debt test periods for the claimant to have been able to write it off.

    Note 2:

    One effect of section 701-1 (Single entity rule) is that a debt is taken to be owed to the head company of a consolidated group while the debt is owed to a subsidiary member of the group.


    709-205(3)    
    Ignore section 701-5 (Entry history rule) and section 701-40 (Exit history rule) in identifying a debt test period.

    Note:

    Subsection (3) does not affect sections 701-5 and 701-40 so far as they operate to treat the debt, or part of the debt, as having been included in the claimant ' s assessable income. That inclusion is generally a condition under section 25-35 for the claimant to be able to deduct the debt.


    709-205(4)    
    This Subdivision does not apply in relation to a debt merely because it is assigned:


    (a) from an entity that is a * member of a * consolidated group to an entity that is not a member of that group; or


    (b) from an entity that is not a member of a consolidated group to an entity that is a member of a consolidated group; or


    (c) from an entity that is a member of a consolidated group to an entity that is a member of another consolidated group.

    This subsection has effect despite subsections (1) and (2).

    Note:

    There is not an assignment of a debt from one entity to another merely because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) starts or ceases to apply in relation to the entities so that the debt ceases to be a debt owed to one entity and becomes a debt owed to the other entity.

     View history note

    SECTION 709-210  

    709-210   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    The main object of this Subdivision is to ensure that the claimant can deduct the debt, or part of it, only if each entity that was owed the debt for a debt test period could have deducted the debt if it had been written off as bad at the end of the period.
     View history note

    Limit on deduction of bad debt

    SECTION 709-215   Limit on deduction of bad debt  

    View history reference

    709-215(1)    
    The claimant can deduct the debt, or part of the debt, if, and only if:


    (a) section 8-1 or 25-35 permits the deduction (ignoring subsection 25-35(5) and the provisions mentioned in that subsection); and


    (b) the condition in subsection (2) is met for each debt test period.

    709-215(2)    
    The condition is that the entity that was owed the debt for the debt test period could have deducted the debt for an income year (the debt test income year ) starting and ending at the times identified in subsection (3) if:


    (a) the entity had written off the debt as bad at the end of the period; and


    (b) these provisions (the modified provisions ) had effect as described in this section:


    (i) sections 165-123 and 165-126 (which are about conditions that must be met for a company to be able to deduct a bad debt);

    (ii) sections 266-35 , 266-85 , 266-120 , 266-160 and 267-25 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which are about conditions that must be met for certain kinds of trusts to be able to deduct a bad debt);

    (iii) other provisions of this Act so far as they relate to a section listed in subparagraph (i) or (ii); and


    (c) these provisions did not apply:


    (i) subsections 165-120(2) and (3) ;

    (ii) section 63G of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ;

    (iii) section 267-65 in Schedule 2F to that Act.
    View history reference
    Note 1:

    Some of the other provisions of this Act that relate to a section listed in subparagraph (2)(b)(i) are sections 165-120 , 165-129 and 165-132 and Subdivision 166-C .

    Note 2:

    Some of the other provisions of this Act that relate to a section listed in subparagraph (2)(b)(ii) are sections 266-40 , 266-45 , 266-90 , 266-125 , 266-165 , 267-30 , 267-35 , 267-40 and 267-45 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

     View history note


    Debt test income year

    709-215(3)    
    The table shows when the debt test income year starts and ends.


    Start and end of debt test income year
    If: The start of the debt test income year is: The end of the debt test income year is:
    1 Both these conditions are met:

    (a) the entity that is owed the debt for the debt test period is the claimant;

    (b) the period ends at the time (the write-off time ) the claimant actually writes off the debt or part of the debt
    The later of these times (or either of them if they are the same):

    (a) the start of the income year in which the write-off time occurs;

    (b) the start of the debt test period
    The end of the income year in which the write-off time occurs
    2 Either:

    (a) the entity that is owed the debt for the debt test period is not the claimant; or

    (b) that entity is the claimant but that period ends before the claimant actually writes off the debt or part of the debt
    The later of these times (or either of them if they are the same):

    (a) 12 months before the end of the debt test period;

    (b) the start of the debt test period
    The end of the debt test period



    Continuity periods, ownership test periods and test periods

    709-215(4)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of subsection (2), the modified provisions have effect as if:


    (a) the * first continuity period started at the start time shown in the table and ended at the start of the debt test income year; and


    (b) the * second continuity period were the debt test income year or, for the purposes of section 165-123 and Subdivision 166-C defining periods by reference to the second continuity period, the period:


    (i) starting at the start of the debt test income year; and

    (ii) ending at the end time shown in the table; and


    (c) each section listed in subparagraph (2)(b)(ii) specified that the test period identified in the section:


    (i) started at the start time shown in the table; and

    (ii) ended at the end time shown in the table.


    Start time and end time
    If: The start time is: The end time is:
    1 All these conditions are met:

    (a) the entity that is owed the debt for the debt test period is the claimant;

    (b) the period ends at the time (the write-off time ) the claimant actually writes off the debt or part of the debt;

    (c) the claimant is the *head company of a *consolidated group at the write-off time
    The start of the debt test period The end of the income year in which the write-off time occurs
    2 All these conditions are met:

    (a) the entity that is owed the debt for the debt test period is the claimant;

    (b) the period ends at the time (the write-off time ) the claimant actually writes off the debt or part of the debt;

    (c) the claimant is not the *head company of a *consolidated group at the write-off time
    Just before the start of the debt test period The end of the income year in which the write-off time occurs
    3 The debt test period:

    (a) starts at a time other than a time when the entity that is owed the debt for the period ceases to be a *member of a *consolidated group; and

    (b) ends when the entity becomes a member of such a group;

    (whether or not the entity was the *head company of another such group during the period)
    The start of the debt test period Just after the end of the debt test period
    4 Both these conditions are met:

    (a) the entity that is owed the debt for the debt test period is the *head company of a *consolidated group;

    (b) the period ends when:

    (i) a *subsidiary member of the group becomes a *member of another consolidated group; or

    (ii) the entity ceases to be the head company of the group without becoming a member of another consolidated group
    The start of the debt test period The end of the debt test period
    4A Both these conditions are met:

    (a) the entity that is owed the debt for the debt test period is the *head company of a *consolidated group;

    (b) the period ends when a *subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a *member of the group without becoming a member of another consolidated group
    The start of the debt test period The end of the debt test period
    5 The debt test period:

    (a) starts when the entity that is owed the debt for the period ceases to be a *member of a *consolidated group; and

    (b) ends later when the entity becomes a member of a consolidated group
    Just before the start of the debt test period Just after the end of the debt test period

     View history note

    709-215(5)    
    For the purposes of subsection (2), the modified provisions have effect as if section 267-25 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied in relation to debts whether they were incurred in the income year or an earlier income year.

    Test time for business continuity test under section 165-126

    709-215(6)    
    For the purposes of subsection (2), the modified provisions have effect as if subsection 165-126(2) specified that the test time were the later of these times (or either of them if they are the same):


    (a) the first time at which it is not practicable to show that the company will meet the conditions in section 165-123 (as modified by this section);


    (b) the time just after the start of the debt test period.

    Business at and just after the end of the debt test period

    709-215(7)    
    If:


    (a) the debt test period ends when the entity that was owed the debt for the period becomes a * member of a * consolidated group; and


    (b) under the modified provisions, the * business that the entity carried on at or just after the end of the period is relevant to the question whether the entity could have deducted the debt as described in subsection (2);

    those provisions have effect for the purposes of that subsection as if the entity carried on at those times the business it carried on just before the end of the period.

     View history note

    Extension of Subdivision to debt/equity swap loss

    SECTION 709-220   Limit on deduction of swap loss  

    View history reference

    Object

    709-220(1)    
    The object of this section is to limit the circumstances in which an entity can deduct a swap loss (as defined in section 63E of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) resulting from a debt/equity swap (as defined in that section) to circumstances similar to those in which this Subdivision lets an entity deduct a debt it writes off as bad.

    Modified operation of sections 709-205, 709-210 and 709-215

    709-220(2)    
    Sections 709-205 , 709-210 and 709-215 (except subsection 709-215(2) ) apply in relation to the extinction (however described) of a debt as part of a debt/equity swap in the same way as they apply in relation to the writing off of a debt as bad.

    709-220(3)    
    Subsection 709-215(1) :


    (a) applies in relation to a swap loss from a debt/equity swap in the same way as it applies in relation to a debt, or part of a debt; and


    (b) applies as if paragraph 709-215(1)(a) referred to subsection 63E(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 instead of sections 8-1 and 25-35 .

    709-220(4)    
    This section has effect despite subsection 63E(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

     View history note

    Division 711 - Tax cost setting amount for membership interests where entities cease to be subsidiary members of consolidated groups  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 711-1   What this Division is about  

    View history reference

    If an entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group, the tax cost setting amount for the group ' s membership interests in the entity reflects the group ' s cost for the entity ' s net assets.

     View history note

    Application and object of this Division  

    SECTION 711-5   Application and object of this Division  

    View history reference

    Application

    711-5(1)    

    View history reference

    This Division has effect:


    (a) for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) ; and


    (b) for the entity core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(3) ;

    if an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group (the old group ) at a particular time (the leaving time ).

     View history note


    Object

    711-5(2)    
    The object of this Division is, when entities cease to be * subsidiary members, to preserve the alignment of the * head company's costs for * membership interests in entities and their assets that is established when entities become subsidiary members.

    Note:

    The reasons for preserving this alignment are set out in subsection 705-10(3) .


    711-5(3)    
    This is achieved by recognising the * head company's cost for those interests, just before the leaving time, as an amount equal to the cost of the leaving entity's assets at the leaving time reduced by the amount of its liabilities.

    711-5(4)    
    If multiple entities cease to be * subsidiary members at the same time, the cost of any * membership interests that one holds in another is treated in a similar way.

     View history note

    Tax cost setting amount for membership interests etc.  

    SECTION 711-10  

    711-10   Tax cost setting amount worked out under this Division  

    View history reference

    If this Division applies, the amount of the following is worked out under the Division:


    (a) the * tax cost setting amount for the purposes of item 2 in the table in section 701-60 for each * membership interest in the leaving entity that * members of the old group held; and


    (b) if 2 or more entities cease to be * subsidiary members of the group at the same time because of an event happening in relation to one of them - the tax cost setting amount for the purposes of item 4 in the table in that section for each membership interest that the leaving entity holds in any of the other entities.

     View history note

    SECTION 711-15   Tax cost setting amount where no multiple exit  

    View history reference

    711-15(1)    

    View history reference

    The * tax cost setting amount for each * membership interest in the leaving entity that * members of the old group held, where paragraph 711-10(b) does not apply, is worked out by:


    (a) first, working out the old group's * allocable cost amount for the leaving entity in accordance with section 711-20 ; and


    (b) next, if there is more than one class of membership interests in the leaving entity - allocating the allocable cost amount to each class in proportion to the * market value of all of the membership interests in the class; and


    (c) next, allocating the result under paragraph (a) or (b) to each of the membership interests, or membership interests in the class, by dividing the result by the number of those membership interests; and

    View history reference


    (d) finally, if the leaving entity is a trust - for each membership interest in the trust that satisfies these conditions:


    (i) it is neither a unit nor an interest in the trust;

    (ii) the member of the old group that held it began to hold it only because money or property was settled on the trust;

    (iii) it either had no * cost base or it had a cost base of nil;
    reducing the result under paragraph (c) to nil.
    Note:

    Compare the treatment of such interests when an entity joins a group: see section 713-20 .

    View history reference
     View history note


    Non-membership equity interests

    711-15(2)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of this section, if at the leaving time a *member of the old group holds a *non-membership equity interest in the leaving entity, that non-membership equity interest is treated as if:


    (a) it were a *membership interest in the leaving entity; and


    (b) it were of a different class than any other membership interest in the leaving entity.

     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 711-20   What is the old group ' s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity?  

    View history reference

    711-20(1)    

    View history reference

    Work out the old group ' s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity in this way:


    Working out the old group ' s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity
    Step What the step requires Purpose of the step
    1 Start with the step 1 amount worked out under section 711-25, whichis about the *terminating values of the leaving entity ' s assets just before the leaving time. To ensure that the allocable cost amount includes the cost of the assets.
    2 Add to the result of step 1 the step 2 amount worked out under section 711-35, which is about the value of deductions inherited by the leaving entity that are not reflected in the *terminating value of the leaving entity ' s assets just before the leaving time. To ensure that the value of the deductions is reflected in the allocable cost amount.
    3 Add to the result of step 2 the step 3 amount worked out under section 711-40, which is about liabilities owed by *members of the old group to the leaving entity at the leaving time. To ensure that the liabilities, which are not recognised while the leaving entity is taken to be part of the *head company by subsection 701-1(1), are reflected in the allocable cost amount.
    4 Subtract from the result of step 3 the step 4 amount worked out under section 711-45, which is about:

    (a) the leaving entity ' s liabilities just before the leaving time; and
    (b) *membership interests in the leaving entity that are not held by *members of the old group.
    To ensure that the allocable cost amount is reduced to reflect the liabilities and the value of the membership interests.
    5 If the amount remaining after step 4 is positive, it is the old group ' s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity. Otherwise the old group ' s allocable cost amount is nil.  
    6 (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)  

    Note:

    If the amount remaining after step 4 is negative, the head company is taken to have made a capital gain equal to the amount: see CGT event L5.

     View history note


    Recalculation in order to work out amount of capital loss

    711-20(2)    
    If it is necessary to work out whether the * head company makes a capital loss for a * CGT event that happens at or after the leaving time in relation to any of the * membership interests, the old group ' s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity is instead worked out as if the head company ' s * terminating value for any asset covered by subsection 705-30(4) (as it applies for the purposes of section 711-30 ) were instead equal to the asset ' s * reduced cost base just before the leaving time.

     View history note

    SECTION 711-25   Terminating values of the leaving entity's assets - step 1 in working out allocable cost amount  

    View history reference

    711-25(1)    
    For the purposes of step 1 in the table in subsection 711-20(1) , the step 1 amount is worked out by adding up the * head company ' s * terminating values of all the assets that the head company holds at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) to be a part of the head company.

    Goodwill

    711-25(2)    
    If loss of control and ownership of the leaving entity by the * head company would decrease the * market value of the goodwill associated with assets or businesses of the old group (other than those of the leaving entity), the head company ' s * cost base of the asset consisting of goodwill that it holds at the leaving time because of its control and ownership of the leaving entity is added to the step 1 amount.

    Note:

    If the asset arose because the head company acquired control and ownership of a joining entity, subsection 705-35(3) would have applied in relation to the joining entity. The asset could also have arisen e.g. because the head company acquired a business from an entity without acquiring the entity.



    Increase in step 1 amount for certain former privatised assets

    711-25(3)    

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) the * head company of the old group * holds a * depreciating asset at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) to be a part of the head company; and


    (b) the asset ' s * tax cost was set at the * tax cost setting amount when an entity (whether the leaving entity or another entity) became a * subsidiary member of the old group; and


    (c) the tax cost setting amount for the asset was reduced because of section 705-47 (which is about certain assets that were * privatised assets);

    the amount of the reduction is added to the step 1 amount.

     View history note


    Increase in step 1 amount for certain privatised assets

    711-25(4)    

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) the * head company of the old group * holds a * depreciating asset at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) to be a part of the head company; and


    (b) the first element of the * cost of the asset was worked out by reference to subsection 58-70(5) because a * member of the old group acquired the asset as described in subsection 58-5(4) on or after 1 July 2002; and


    (c) the amount of the first element of the cost of the asset is less than the amount it would have been apart from item 11 of the table in subsection 40-180(2) (which makes subsection 58-70(5) relevant to working out that element);

    the difference between the amounts is added to the step 1 amount.


     View history note

    SECTION 711-30   What is the head company ' s terminating value for an asset?  

    View history reference

    711-30(1)    
    The * head company ' s terminating value for an asset that it holds at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) to be a part of the head company is worked out as follows.

    711-30(2)    
    The amount is worked out by applying section 705-30 in a corresponding way to the way that section applies to work out the * terminating value for an asset that a joining entity holds at the joining time.

    711-30(3)    

    View history reference

    However, that amount is the asset ' s * market value at the leaving time if:


    (a) the asset is a right to receive lease payments under a lease; and


    (b) the asset 's * tax cost was set when an entity (whether the leaving entity or another entity) became a * subsidiary member of the old group; and


    (c) the asset was taken to be a * retained cost base asset for the purposes of Division 705 when its tax cost was set, because of paragraph 705-56(3) (b).

     View history note

    SECTION 711-35   If head company becomes entitled to certain deductions - step 2 in working out allocable cost amount  

    View history reference

    711-35(1)    

    View history reference

    Work out the step 2 amount for the purposes of the table in subsection 711-20(1) by multiplying all deductions covered by subsection (2) by the *corporate tax rate.
     View history note

    711-35(2)    
    This subsection covers any deduction to which the leaving entity becomes entitled under section 701-40 as a result of the leaving entity ceasing to be a * subsidiary member of the old group, other than a deduction for expenditure:


    (a) that is, forms part of or reduces, the cost of an asset that becomes an asset of the leaving entity because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply; or


    (b) to which section 110-40 (about expenditure on assets acquired before 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997) applies.

    711-35(3)    

    View history reference

    Subsection (2) does not cover a deduction under section 43-15 (which relates to *undeducted construction expenditure) if, because of section 701-40 (the exit history rule), the leaving entity is taken to have *acquired the asset to which the deduction relates at or before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997.
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 711-40  

    711-40   Liabilities owed to the leaving entity by members of the old group - step 3 in working out allocable cost amount  

    View history reference

    For the purposes of step 3 in the table in subsection 711-20(1) , the step 3 amount is the total, for all liabilities owed by *members of the old group to the leaving entity at the leaving time, of the *tax cost setting amounts of the corresponding assets of the leaving entity.
    Note:

    The tax cost of a corresponding asset of the leaving entity is set under section 701-45 . The tax cost setting amount of the corresponding asset is determined under section 701-60A .

     View history note

    SECTION 711-45   Liabilities etc. owed by the leaving entity - step 4 in working out allocable cost amount  

    View history reference

    711-45(1)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of step 4 in the table in subsection 711-20(1) , the step 4 amount is worked out by adding up the amounts of each thing (an accounting liability ) that, in accordance with the leaving entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, is a liability of the leaving entity just before the leaving time.
     View history note


    Leaving entity ' s accounting principles for tax cost setting

    711-45(1A)    

    View history reference

    The leaving entity ' s accounting principles for tax cost setting are the *accounting principles that the group would use if it were to prepare its financial statements just before the leaving time (disregarding subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)).
     View history note


    Exclusion for deferred tax liability

    711-45(1B)    

    View history reference

    An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability that is an amount recorded in a deferred tax liability account in accordance with the leaving entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting.
     View history note

    711-45(1C)    

    View history reference

    Subsection (1B) does not apply to an accounting liability that relates to an asset mentioned in paragraph 713-575(2)(a) or (b) (certain assets of life insurance company).
     View history note


    Exclusion where transfer of accounting liability

    711-45(2)    
    An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability that arises because of the leaving entity ' s ownership of an asset if, on *disposal of the asset, the accounting liability will transfer to the new owner.

    Example:

    A liability to rehabilitate a mine site, where, under legislation or a licence, the liability will be transferred to the new owner on disposal of the mine.



    Exclusion where liability is obligation to make lease payments

    711-45(2A)    

    View history reference

    An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability that is the leaving entity ' s obligation as lessee to make lease payments under a lease, if:

    (a)    subsection 705-56(4) applied in relation to the liability, at a time when an entity (whether the leaving entity or another entity) became a *subsidiary member of the old group; and

    (b)    the liability was not taken into account under subsection 705-70(1) at that time, because of paragraph 705-56(4)(b) .

     View history note


    Reduction for future deduction

    711-45(3)    

    View history reference

    If some or all of an accounting liability will result in a deduction to the leaving entity, the amount to be added for the accounting liability is reduced by the following amount:


      [ Deduction × *Corporate tax rate ] −   Double-counting adjustment  

    where:

    double-counting adjustment
    means the amount of any reduction that has already occurred in the accounting liability under subsection (1) to take account of the future availability of the deduction.

     View history note


    Amount for intra-group liabilities

    711-45(4)    

    View history reference

    If an accounting liability of the leaving entity is owed to a *member of the old group, the amount to be added for the liability is the *tax cost setting amount of the corresponding asset of the member.
     View history note


    Adjustment for unrealised gains and losses

    711-45(5)    

    View history reference

    If, for income tax purposes, an accounting liability, or a change in the amount of an accounting liability, (other than one owed to a *member of the old group) is taken into account at a later time than is the case in accordance with the leaving entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, the amount to be addedfor the accounting liability is equal to the payment that would be necessary to discharge the liability just before the leaving time without an amount being included in the assessable income of, or allowable as a deduction to, the *head company.
    Note:

    An example is accrued employee leave entitlements or foreign exchange gains and losses.

     View history note


    Increase in step 4 amount for employee share interests

    711-45(6)    
    If any *membership interest (an employee share interest ) in the leaving entity needed to be disregarded under section 703-35 in order for the leaving entity to be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *head company at the leaving time, the step 4 amount is increased by the sum of the *market values of those interests.

    Increase to cover ADI restructure preference share interests

    711-45(6A)    

    View history reference

    If any *share in the leaving entity needed to be disregarded under section 703-37 in order for the leaving entity to be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *head company at the leaving time, the step 4 amount is increased by the sum of the *market values of those shares.
     View history note


    Increase for non-share capital account balance

    711-45(6B)    

    View history reference

    The step 4 amount is increased by the amount that would be the balance of the leaving entity ' s *non-share capital account, assuming that:

    (a)    if the leaving entity is not a company - the leaving entity were a company; and

    (b)    each *non-membership equity interest (if any) in the leaving entity held at just before the leaving time by a person other than a *member of the old group were a *non-share equity interest in the leaving entity; and

    (c)    the non-share equity interests (if any) mentioned in paragraph (b) were the only non-share equity interests in the leaving entity.

     View history note


    Increase to cover certain equity interests

    711-45(7)    

    View history reference

    The step 4 amount is increased by the *market value of each thing that, in accordance with the leaving entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, is equity in the leaving entity at the leaving time, where the thing is also a *debt interest.
     View history note


    Adjustment where amount of liability differed for purpose of calculating allocable cost amount on entry

    711-45(8)    

    View history reference

    Subsection (10) applies if:

    (a)    either:


    (i) an amount (the exit liability amount ) was added for a particular liability under subsection (5); or

    (ii) a particular liability is covered by subsection (5), but no amount was added for it under that subsection (in which case the exit liability amount is zero); and

    (b)    the liability was taken into account in working out the *allocable cost amount (the original entry ACA ) for a *subsidiary member (whether or not the leaving entity) of the old group in accordance with Division 705 ; and

    (c)    the exit liability amount is not the same as the amount (the entry liability amount ) of the liability that was taken into account in working out the original entry ACA, after any adjustments made under:


    (i) section 705-70 , 705-75 or 705-80 ; and

    (ii) subsection (9) of this section; and

    (d)    if the liability is a provision for annual leave or long service leave, or a provision for a liability contingent on a future event:


    (i) in the case of a liability that was, in accordance with the *accounting principles that the entity would have used if it had prepared its financial statements just before the time it became a subsidiary member of the group, a current liability of the entity at that time - the leaving time occurs less than 1 year after that time; or

    (ii) otherwise - the leaving time occurs less than 4 years after that time.
     View history note

    711-45(9)    

    View history reference

    Make these adjustments to the entry liability amount if, at a time when the leaving entity was a *subsidiary member of the old group, the *head company of the group paid an amount that reduced the liability:

    (a)    reduce the entry liability amount by the amount of the reduction; and

    (b)    if the payment gave rise to an amount being included in the assessable income of the head company - after making the reduction in paragraph (a), further reduce the entry liability amount by the product of:


    (i) the amount included in assessable income; and

    (ii) the *corporate tax rate; and

    (c)    if the payment gave rise to a deduction for the head company - after making the reduction in paragraph (a), increase the entry liability amount by the product of:


    (i) the amount deducted; and

    (ii) the corporate tax rate.
     View history note

    711-45(10)    

    View history reference

    The step 4 amount is altered by:

    (a)    if the entry liability amount exceeds the exit liability amount - increasing the step 4 amount by the excess; or

    (b)    if the entry liability amount falls short of the exit liability amount - decreasing the step 4 amount by the shortfall.

     View history note


    Exclusion of amounts for certain securitisation liabilities

    711-45(11)    

    View history reference

    An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability of the leaving entity if the accounting liability is covered under section 711-46 (securitisation liabilities).
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 711-46  

    711-46   Liability arising from transfer or assignment of securitised assets  

    View history reference

    This section covers an accounting liability (the securitisation liability ) if the following circumstances exist:


    (a) (Repealed by No 14 of 2018)

    View history reference


    (b) in working out the step 4 amount mentioned in subsection 711-45(1) in relation to the leaving entity, an amount would be added under that subsection for the securitisation liability (disregarding subsection 711-45(11) );


    (c) a member of the old group transferred or equitably assigned one or more assets (the underlying securitised assets ) to another entity before the leaving time;


    (d) the securitisation liability:


    (i) arose from the transfer or equitable assignment of the underlying securitised assets; and

    (ii) is a liability of the leaving entity at the leaving time (according to the leaving entity ' s *accounting principles for tax cost setting);


    (e) the other entity was established for the purpose of securitising assets;


    (f) the underlying securitised assets were securitised in accordance with that purpose before the leaving time;


    (g) at the leaving time the *market value of the leaving entity ' s interest in the underlying securitised assets is nil, or is substantially less than the amount of the securitisation liability.

     View history note

    711-50   (Repealed) SECTION 711-50 Adjustment to allocable cost amount to ensure effect of Subdivision 165-CC not avoided - step 5 in working out allocable cost amount  
    (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)

     View history note

    SECTION 711-55   Tax cost setting amount for membership interests where multiple exit  

    View history reference

    711-55(1)    
    If 2 or more entities cease to be * subsidiary members of the old group at the same time because of an event happening in relation to one of them, the * tax cost setting amount for each * membership interest mentioned in paragraphs 711-10(a) and (b) is worked out in accordance with this section.

    Object

    711-55(2)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that the * tax cost setting amount for * membership interests that each entity holds in another entity reflects a proportion of the other entity's cost for its net assets.

    Tax cost setting amounts to be worked out for certain membership interests in all of the entities

    711-55(3)    
    A * tax cost setting amount must be worked out for each * membership interest (the subject interest ) that one of the entities holds in another of the entities just before the leaving time, and this must be done:


    (a) by applying section 711-15 to the subject interest as if:


    (i) a reference in that section, or any provision of this Division that relates to it, to any membership interest that * members of the old group hold in the leaving entity were a reference to the subject interest; and

    (ii) a reference in that section, or any provision of this Division that relates to it, to liabilities owed by members of the old group included a reference to liabilities owed by any of the entities that cease to be * subsidiary members of the old group at the leaving time; and


    (b) by working out the tax cost setting amount for membership interests in entities that are held by other entities before working out the tax cost setting amount for membership interests in those other entities.

    Tax cost setting amount for membership interests acquired by head company

    711-55(4)    
    Then work out the * tax cost setting amount mentioned in paragraph 711-10(a) for the * membership interests held by the * head company in the same way as under section 711-15 .

    Note:

    In doing so, tax cost setting amounts worked out under subsection (3) of this section for membership interests held by the leaving entity in other entities will be taken into account in working out the allocable cost amount for the leaving entity. Those tax cost setting amounts will in turn have been affected by any other tax cost setting amounts worked out under subsection (3) for membership interests in other entities.



    Tax cost setting amount for membership interests acquired by leaving entity

    711-55(5)    
    The * tax cost setting amount mentioned in paragraph 711-10(b) for * membership interests of which the leaving entity becomes the holder will be one of the tax cost setting amounts worked out under subsection (3) of this section.

    Example:

    Companies A, B, C, D and E are all subsidiary members that leave the old group at the same time. Just before the leaving time, company A owned shares in company B and company C, and company B owned shares in companies D and E.

    First, work out company A's tax cost setting amount for membership interests in company C and company B's tax cost setting amount for membership interests in companies D and E by applying section 711-15 in accordance with paragraph (3)(a) above.

    Next, work out company A's tax cost setting amount for membership interests in company B under that section as so applied, taking into account the tax cost setting amount just worked out for company B's assets consisting of shares in companies D and E.

    Finally, work out the head company's tax cost setting amount for membership interests in company A under section 711-15 in accordance with subsection (4) above, taking into account the tax cost setting amounts worked out for companies B and C.


     View history note

    711-60   (Repealed) SECTION 711-60 Membership interests treated as potentially subject to Subdivision 165-CC (about unrealised losses)  
    (Repealed by No 90 of 2002)

     View history note

    SECTION 711-65   Membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985  

    View history reference

    When this section applies

    711-65(1)    

    View history reference

    This section applies unless:


    (a) Subdivision 705-C (about one group joining another consolidated group) applies in relation to the old group; and

    View history reference


    (b) the leaving entity is a *subsidiary member of the old group.

    View history reference
     View history note

    711-65(1A)    

    View history reference

    To avoid doubt, this section applies regardless of whether the leaving entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the old group at the leaving time because another entity also ceases to be a subsidiary member of the old group at the leaving time.
     View history note


    Interests treated as if purchased before 20 September 1985

    711-65(2)    
    If this section applies, a number of the * membership interests in the leaving entity that * members of the old group hold are taken to have been acquired before 20 September 1985.

     View history note


    Number of pre-CGT membership interests

    711-65(3)    
    The number is the result of the formula in subsection (4), rounded down to:


    (a) the nearest whole number if the result is not already a whole number; or


    (b) zero if the result is a number more than zero but less than one.

    Formula

    711-65(4)    

    View history reference

    The formula is:


      Number of *membership interests in leaving
    entity held by *members of old group
    × Leaving entity's
    pre-CGT proportion
     

    where:

    leaving entity's pre-CGT proportion
    is the amount worked out under section 705-125 .

     View history note

    711-65(5)    
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note


    Dealing with classes of membership interests

    711-65(6)    
    If there are 2 or more classes of * membership interests in the leaving entity, this section operates separately in relation to each class as if the interests in that class were all the interests in the entity.

    Allocation of the number to particular membership interests

    711-65(7)    
    The * head company must choose which particular * membership interests comprise the number worked out under subsection (2).

    Modification if leaving entity is a trust

    711-65(8)    

    View history reference

    If the leaving entity is a trust, a * membership interest in it is not taken into account under this section unless the membership interest is either a unit or an interest in the trust.
     View history note

    SECTION 711-70   Additional integrity rule if membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985 under section 711-65 - application of Division 149 to head company  

    View history reference

    711-70(1)    

    View history reference

    This section applies if:


    (a) the leaving entity held assets at the time it became a *subsidiary member of the old group (disregarding subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)); and


    (b) some or all of the assets:


    (i) stopped being *pre-CGT assets under Division 149 at a time (the Division 149 time ) when the *head company of the group held them under subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule); or

    (ii) would have stopped being pre-CGT assets under Division 149 at a time (also the Division 149 time ) when the head company of the group held them under subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) if they had been pre-CGT assets just before that time; and


    (c) the leaving entity was a subsidiary member of the group at that time.

    711-70(2)    
    The *pre-CGT proportion of the leaving entity at the leaving time is taken to be nil.

    711-70(3)    
    Adjust the old group's *allocable cost amount for the leaving entity as follows:


    (a) if the amount under subsection (4) exceeds the amount under subsection (6) - increase the allocable cost amount by the excess;


    (b) if the amount under subsection (4) falls short of the amount under subsection (6) - reduce the allocable cost amount by the shortfall.

    711-70(4)    
    Subject to subsection (5), the amount under this subsection is:


    (a) if Subdivision 705-A applied in relation to the leaving entity at the time it became a *subsidiary member of the old group - the total of the amounts that were taken into account under subsection 705-65(1) for *membership interests in the leaving entity at that time; or


    (b) otherwise - assuming that Subdivision 705-A had applied in relation to the leaving entity at the time it became a subsidiary member of the old group, the total of the amounts that would have been taken into account under subsection 705-65(1) for membership interests in the leaving entity at that time.

    711-70(5)    
    For the purposes of subsection (4), if a *membership interest in the leaving entity was covered under paragraph 705-125(2)(a) (pre-CGT interests) when it became a *subsidiary member of the old group, treat the amount that was taken into account for the membership interest under subsection 705-65(1) as the interest's *market value just after the Division 149 time.

    711-70(6)    
    The amount under this subsection is the old group's *allocable cost amount for the leaving entity, worked out on the assumption that the leaving entity ceased to be a *subsidiary member of the old group just after the Division 149 time.

     View history note

    SECTION 711-75   Additional integrity rule if membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985 under section 711-65 - application of CGT event K6  

    View history reference

    711-75(1)    
    This section applies if the leaving entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the old group because of a situation giving rise to *CGT event A1, C2, E1, E2 or E8 in relation to one or more *membership interests in the leaving entity.

    711-75(2)    
    For the purposes of applying subsections 104-230(2) and (8) in relation to those *membership interests:


    (a) disregard subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) in working out the *net value of the leaving entity; and


    (b) treat the reference in subsection 104-230(2) to " Just before the other event happened " as a reference to " Just before the leaving time " .

    Note 1:

    The single entity rule will continue to apply in determining whether the property mentioned in subsection 104-230(2) for the leaving entity was acquired on or after 20 September 1985.

    Note 2:

    However, in a case of multiple exit from a consolidated group (see section 711-55 ), the property mentioned in subsection 104-230(2) for the leaving entity may include membership interests in another entity leaving the group at the leaving time. To determine which of those membership interests were acquired on or after 20 September 1985 for the purposes of applying subsection 104-230(2) to the leaving entity, see section 711-65 .


    711-75(3)    
    In determining the sum of the *cost bases of the property mentioned in subsection 104-230(6) , treat the cost base of an asset that is included in that property as:


    (a) if the asset has its *tax cost set at the leaving time under section 701-50 - its *tax cost setting amount; or


    (b) if the *terminating value of the asset is taken into account in working out the step 1 amount under section 711-25 for the leaving entity - that terminating value; or


    (c) if the asset is taken into account in working out the step 3 amount under section 711-40 for the leaving entity - the value of the asset that is so taken into account.

     View history note

    Division 713 - Rules for particular kinds of entities  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Subdivision 713-A - Trusts  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Working out a joined group's allocable cost amount for a joining trust

    SECTION 713-20   Increasing the step 1 amount for settled capital that could be distributed tax free in respect of discretionary interests  

    View history reference

    713-20(1)    
    The object of this section is to increase the step 1 amount worked out under section 705-65 (for the purpose of working out the joined group ' s allocable cost amount) if:


    (a) the joining entity is a trust; and


    (b) some or all of the * membership interests in the trust are neither units nor interests in the trust; and


    (c) some or all of the trust capital is settled capital that could be distributed tax free at the joining time.

    The increase in the step 1 amount takes account of the settled capital that could be distributed tax free.

    Note 1:

    As a result, the settled capital that could be distributed tax free is treated in a way that is analogous to the group ' s cost of acquiring the trust: see subsection 705-10(2) .

    Note 2:

    Paragraph (1)(b) reflects the position that a distribution in respect of a unit or interest in the trust is generally covered by CGT event E4 and so is not tax-free: see section 104-70 .


    713-20(2)    
    The step 1 amount worked out under section 705-65 is increased by the amount worked out under the following method statement if, at the joining time, there are * membership interests (the discretionary interests ) in the trust each of which satisfies these conditions:


    (a) it is neither a unit nor an interest in the trust;


    (b) the entity that owned it at the joining time began to own it only because money or property was settled on the trust;


    (c) it either has no * cost base or it has a cost base of nil.

    Note:

    If a membership interest has a cost base greater than nil, the cost base is already taken into account in working out the step 1 amount under section 705-65 .

    Method statement

    Step 1.

    Add up:

  • (a) each amount settled on the trust before or at the joining time; and
  • (b) the * market value of each item of property settled on the trust before or at the joining time, worked out as at when the item was settled;
  • except to the extent that that amount or market value forms part of the * cost base of a * membership interest in the trust that was taken into account in working out the step 1 amount under section 705-65 .


    Step 2.

    Work out how much of the step 1 amount would have been paid in respect of the discretionary interests if, at the joining time:

  • (a) the entire trust capital and trust income had been realised and distributed; and
  • (b) the trust had ended.
  • Note:

    This may involve determining how a power of appointment would have been exercised. Section 713-50 lists matters to have regard to in determining this.


    Step 3.

    Reduce the step 2 amount by so much of it as:

  • (a) would have been included in the assessable income of any * member of the trust who owned any of the discretionary interests at the joining time; or
  • (b) would have been taken into account in working out a * capital gain or * capital loss made by such a member.

  • Step 4.

    Work out how much of the step 1 amount consists of one or more of these:

  • (a) an amount settled on the trust directly by the * head company of the * consolidated group (whether or not the group was in existence when the amount or item was settled on the trust);
  • (b) an amount settled on the trust directly by any other entity not excluded by subsection (3) (which covers entities that are not independent and unconnected donors to the trust);
  • (c) the * market value of an item of property settled on the trust directly by the head company;
  • (d) the market value of an item of property settled on the trust directly by any other entity not excluded by subsection (3).

  • Step 5.

    The step 1 amount worked out under section 705-65 is increased by the lesser of:

  • (a) the step 3 amount worked out under this method statement; and
  • (b) the step 4 amount worked out under this method statement.

  • 713-20(3)    
    This subsection excludes these entities for the purposes of step 4 of the method statement in subsection (2):


    Entities that are not independent and unconnected donors to the trust
    Item This entity is excluded:
    1 An entity that is a *member of the *consolidated group at the joining time
    2 An entity that has been a *member of the *consolidated group at any time before the joining time, even if it was not such a member when it settled the amount or item of property on the joining entity
    3 An entity that, because of a *scheme, will or may become a *member of the *consolidated group at some time after the joining time
    4 An entity that, when the amount or item of property was settled on the joining entity, was an *associate of an entity covered by item 1, 2 or 3
    5 An entity that, in settling the amount or item of property on the joining entity, acted in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of one or more entities, at least one of which is covered by item 1, 2, 3 or 4 (whether those directions, instructions or wishes were communicated directly or indirectly, including through interposed entities)
    6 A company or trust that an entity covered by item 1, 2 or 3 would be taken to *control (for value shifting purposes) when the company or trust settled the amount or item of property on the joining entity, if each entity covered by item 1, 2, 3 or 4 had been at that time an *associate of every other entity covered by item 1, 2, 3 or 4
    7 A partnership if, when the partnership settled the amount or item of property on the joining entity, a *member of the partnership was anentity covered by item 1, 2, 3, 4 or 6

     View history note

    SECTION 713-25   Undistributed, realised profits that accrue to joined group before joining time and could be distributed tax free - step 3 in working out allocable cost amount  

    View history reference

    713-25(1)    
    For the purposes of step 3 in the table in section 705-60 , if the joining entity is a trust, the step 3 amount is the sum of the trust ' s realised profits, to the extent that:


    (a) they accrued to the joined group before the joining time (as defined in subsection 705-90(7) ); and


    (b) as at the joining time, they have not been distributed to * members of the trust; and


    (c) if each of them were distributed as mentioned in paragraphs 705-90(7)(a) and (b):


    (i) they would be distributed otherwise than in respect of a unit or an interest in the trust; or

    (ii) their non-assessable parts for the purposes of section 104-70 would be disregarded in working out whether or not a * capital gain had been made because of CGT event E4;
    View history reference

    except to the extent that they recouped losses of any * sort that accrued to the joined group before the joining time (as defined in subsection 705-90(8) ).

    Note:

    If the joining entity, or an entity interposed between the head company and the joining entity, is a non-fixed trust, this section may involve determining how a power of appointment would have been exercised. Section 713-50 lists matters to have regard to in determining this.

     View history note


    Trusts not covered

    713-25(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not apply to a trust that is a * corporate tax entity at the joining time.

    Note:

    This excludes corporate unit trusts and public trading trusts, which are covered by the imputation system.


     View history note

    Determining destination of distribution by non-fixed trust

    SECTION 713-50  

    713-50   Factors to consider  

    View history reference

    In working out, for the purposes of this Part, how much of something a * non-fixed trust would have distributed to an entity, or in respect of a * membership interest in the trust, have regard to all relevant factors, including:


    (a) the pattern of any previous distributions by the trust; and


    (b) by whom the trust has from time to time been * controlled (for value shifting purposes).

     View history note

    Subdivision 713-C - Some unit trusts treated like head companies of consolidated groups  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 713-120   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    A public trading trust can sometimes choose to form a consolidated group and be treated like a company and head company of the group. The treatment affects the trust, the trustee and other entities connected with the trust (such as members of the trust and entities the trustee holds membership interests in).

     View history note

    Object of this Subdivision

    SECTION 713-125   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    713-125(1)    
    The main object of this Subdivision is to provide, by the means described in subsections (2) and (3), for certain unit trusts to be treated like companies, and therefore like *head companies of *consolidated groups, with consequent effects on other entities including:


    (a) the trustees; and


    (b) *members of the trusts; and


    (c) entities the trustees hold *membership interests in.

    713-125(2)    

    View history reference

    The first means is letting a *public trading trust, that could become the *head company of a *consolidated group if the trust were a company, choose to form such a group (with other entities as *subsidiary members).
     View history note

    713-125(3)    
    The second means is changing the way in which the law relating to income tax applies on and after the time the choice takes effect, so that law (with some modifications) applies in relation to the trust or the trustee (as appropriate) in a way corresponding to the way in which that law applies in relation to a company.

    Note:

    The law relating to income tax includes legislation relating to associated imposts (such as those connected with the imputation system).


     View history note

    Choice to form a consolidated group

    SECTION 713-130  

    713-130   Choosing to form a consolidated group  

    View history reference

    A trust may make a choice under section 703-50 (Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group), as if the trust were a company (the assumed company ), but only if:


    (a) the assumed company could make the choice, if it beneficially owned the *membership interests in other entities that are legally owned by the trustee; and


    (b) the day specified in the choice is the first day of an income year for which the trust is a *public trading trust.

    View history reference
    Note:

    Assuming that a trust is a company also involves assuming:

  • (a) that the company has characteristics of the trust, such as the location of the central management and control (which is relevant to residence), the business of the trust, not being incorporated etc.; and
  • (b) that membership interests in the trust are membership interests in the company (owned by the same persons and in the same way as membership interests in the trust are owned); and
  • (c) that the company ' s taxable income is taxed at the same rate as the trust ' s net income.
  •  View history note

    Effects of choice

    SECTION 713-135   Effects of choice  

    View history reference

    713-135(1)    
    If the trust makes the choice, the law (the applied law ) described in subsection (2) applies in relation to the trust in a way corresponding to the way in which that law applies to a company. The applied law applies in that way in relation to the trust or trustee (as appropriate):


    (a) with the appropriate modifications (including those described in section 713-140 , so far as they are appropriate); and


    (b) in relation to all times at or after the start of the day specified in the choice; and


    (c) so far as it is relevant to the operation of the applied law in relation to the trust and a time at or after the start of that day - in relation to a time when the trust existed before the start of that day.

    Note 1:

    The application of the applied law in this way affects not only the trust and the trustee but also other entities connected with the trust, such as members of the trust and entities in which the trustee holds membership interests. Some examples of that effect are that:

  • (a) a consolidated group comes into existence on the day specified in the choice; and
  • (b) there may be a scrip for scrip roll-over for an entity exchanging its shares in a company for membership interests in the trust.
  • Note 2:

    The application of the applied law in this way involves treatment of characteristics, things and persons relating to the trust corresponding to the treatment by the applied law of analogous characteristics, things and persons relating to a company (as envisaged in the note to section 713-130 ). These are some examples of analogous things and analogous persons:

  • (a) units in the trust and shares in a company;
  • (b) unitholders in the trust and shareholders in a company;
  • (c) trust voting interests and voting shares in a company.

  • 713-135(2)    
    The applied law is:


    (a) this Act (other than this Subdivision); and


    (b) an Act that imposes any impost payable under this Act; and


    (c) the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 ; and


    (d) the Taxation Administration Act 1953 , so far as it relates to an Act covered by paragraph (a), (b) or (c); and


    (e) any other Act, so far as it relates to an Act covered by paragraph (a), (b), (c) or (d); and


    (f) regulations and other legislative instruments under an Act covered by any of the preceding paragraphs.

    713-135(3)    
    Subsection (1) does not make an entity liable to a criminal, civil or administrative penalty.

    Note:

    An entity is liable to such a penalty under the applied law only if that law, as it applies apart from subsection (1), makes the entity liable.

     View history note

    SECTION 713-140   Modifications of the applied law  

    View history reference

    Overview

    713-140(1)    
    This section describes modifications of the applied law in its application in relation to a trust or trustee under section 713-135 , but does not limit the modifications of that law that are appropriate for the purposes of that section.

    General modifications

    713-140(2)    
    A reference in the applied law to a thing or person described in column 2 of an item of the table includes a reference to a thing or person described in column 3 of the item.


    General modifications
    Column 1
    Item
    Column 2
    A reference in the applied law to:
    Column 3
    Includes a reference to:
    1 A body corporate The trust or trustee (as appropriate)
    2 A dividend A distribution from the trust, so far as the distribution is from profits
    3 A share capital account The amount of the trust estate that is not attributable to profits
    4 A director (of a company, body corporate or corporation) The trustee or, if the trustee is a body corporate, a director of the trustee (as appropriate)

    Note:

    An expression in column 2 of an item of the table has the meaning that the expression has in the provision of the applied law containing the reference.


    713-140(3)    
    The trust is not covered by a reference in the applied law to a trust.

    Note:

    Subsections (3) and (4) of this section do not affect an entity ' s liability for criminal, civil and administrative penalties under the applied law, as those subsections modify (so far as appropriate) the applied law as it applies because of subsection 713-135(1) , and that subsection does not affect liability for such penalties (see subsection 713-135(3) ).


    713-140(4)    
    The trustee is not covered by a reference in the applied law to a trustee (except a reference in section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ).

    Note:

    Section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 deals with obligations and liabilities of trustees.



    Modifications of specific provisions

    713-140(5)    

    View history reference

    A provision of an Act identified in an item of the table is modified as set out in the item.


    Modifications of specific provisions
    Item Act(s) Provision Modification
    1 (Repealed by No 23 of 2018)
    2 (Repealed by No 23 of 2018)
    3 Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 Division 83A The Division does not apply in relation to an *ESS interest acquired under an *employee share scheme before the day specified in the choice if the Division did not apply in relation to the interest before that day.
    4 Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 and Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 Part 3-90 (of each Act) The Part has effect as if an entity were a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the trust if the entity would have been one had the trustee owned beneficially *membership interests in the entity that the trustee owned legally.

     View history note

    Subdivision 713-E - Partnerships  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Guide to Subdivision 713-E

    SECTION 713-200   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision modifies tax cost setting rules in Divisions 701 , 705 and 711 so that they take account of the special characteristics of partnerships. The modifications apply in these situations:

  • (a) an entity that is a partner in a partnership becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group;
  • (b) a partnership becomes, or ceases to be, a subsidiary member of a consolidated group.
  •  View history note


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Objects
    713-205 Objects of this Subdivision
    Partnership cost setting interests etc.
    713-210 Partnership cost setting interests
    713-215 Terminating value for partnership cost setting interest
    Setting tax cost of partnership cost setting interests
    713-220 Set tax cost of partnership cost setting interests if partner joins consolidated group
    713-225 Tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interest
    713-230 (Repealed by No 56 of 2010 )
    Special rules where partnership joins consolidated group
    713-235 Partnership joins group - set tax cost of partnership assets
    713-240 Partnership joins group - tax cost setting amount for partnership asset
    713-245 (Repealed by No 56 of 2010 )
    Special rules where partnership leaves consolidated group
    713-250 Partnership leaves group - standard provisions modified
    713-255 Partnership leaves group - tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interests
    713-260 Partnership leaves group - tax cost setting amount for assets consisting of being owed certain liabilities
    713-265 Partnership leaves group - adjustments to allocable cost amount of partner who also leaves group
    713-270 (Repealed by No 56 of 2010 )

    Objects

    SECTION 713-205   Objects of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    713-205(1)    
    The first object of this Subdivision is to ensure that if:


    (a) an entity that is a partner in a partnership becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group; and


    (b) the partnership does not become a * subsidiary member of the group;

    the provisions mentioned in subsection (3) operate as if the * partnership cost setting interests of the entity in the partnership were the entity ' s only assets relating to the partnership.

    Note:

    In general, the head company of the consolidated group is treated as a partner in the partnership, in accordance with section 701-1 (the single entity rule).


    713-205(2)    
    The second object of this Subdivision is to ensure that where a partnership becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, the provisions mentioned in subsection (3) operate:


    (a) as if the group became the holder of the assets of the partnership; and


    (b) to set the * tax cost of the assets of the partnership at an appropriate amount, taking into account the taxation treatment of partnerships.

    Note:

    While the partnership is a subsidiary member of the group, it loses its separate tax identity (under the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) ). Therefore, in general, the assets of the partnership are treated as assets of the head company of the group and partnership cost setting interests in the partnership are ignored.


    713-205(3)    
    The provisions are:


    (a) section 701-10 (about setting the tax cost of assets of an entity joining a group); and

    View history reference


    (b) Subdivision 705-A ; and


    (c) any other provision of this Act giving Subdivision 705-A a modified effect in circumstances other than those covered by that Subdivision.

    Note:

    An example of provisions covered by paragraph (c) are the provisions of Subdivision 705-B giving Subdivision 705-A a modified effect when a consolidated group is formed.

     View history note

    713-205(4)    

    View history reference

    The third object of this Subdivision is to ensure that, where a partnership ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, the provisions mentioned in subsection (5) operate:


    (a) as if the group ' s * partnership cost setting interests were the group ' s only assets relating to the partnership; and


    (b) to set the * tax cost of those interests at an appropriate amount, taking into account the fact that the group ceases to be the holder of the assets of the partnership.

     View history note

    713-205(5)    

    View history reference

    The provisions are:


    (a) sections 701-15 and 701-50 (about setting the tax cost of membership interests in an entity that leaves the group); and


    (b) sections 701-20 and 701-45 (about the cost of assets consisting of certain liabilities owed by or to an entity that leaves the group); and


    (c) Division 711 .

     View history note

    Partnership cost setting interests etc.

    SECTION 713-210  

    713-210   Partnership cost setting interests  

    View history reference

    A partnership cost setting interest in a partnership is the asset that is comprised of:


    (a) an interest in an asset of the partnership; or


    (b) an interest in the partnership that is not covered by paragraph (a);

    but does not include an asset that is comprised of a * membership interest in the partnership.

    Note 1:

    A partner may have more than one partnership cost setting interest that relates to an asset of the partnership (see section 106-5 ).

    Note 2:

    A partnership cost setting interest may relate to an asset of the partnership, but the asset of the partnership is not a partnership cost setting interest in the partnership.

     View history note

    SECTION 713-215   Terminating value for partnership cost setting interest  

    View history reference

    713-215(1)    
    This section modifies the way in which the * terminating value of a * partnership cost setting interest in a partnership is worked out under section 705-30 .

    713-215(2)    
    For the purposes of this Subdivision, the * terminating value of the * partnership cost setting interest at a time is:


    (a) if the interest relates to an asset of the partnership - the interest's individual share of the terminating value of that asset (worked out in accordance with subsection (3)) at that time; or


    (b) otherwise - the terminating value of the interest at that time worked out under section 705-30 .

    713-215(3)    
    To work out the amount of the * terminating value of the asset of the partnership mentioned in paragraph (2)(a), apply section 705-30 as if:


    (a) the time mentioned in subsection (2) were the joining time mentioned in that section; and


    (b) the partnership were, at the time mentioned in subsection (2), the joining entity mentioned in that section.

     View history note

    Setting tax cost of partnership cost setting interests

    SECTION 713-220   Set tax cost of partnership cost setting interests if partner joins consolidated group  

    View history reference

    713-220(1)    
    This section applies if an entity (the joining entity ) that is a partner in a partnership becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ).

    Note:

    If the partnership becomes a subsidiary member of the group at the joining time, the application of this section is affected by section 713-235 .


    713-220(2)    
    In applying the provisions mentioned in subsection 713-205(3) in relation to the joining entity:


    (a) work out the * tax cost setting amount for each * partnership cost setting interest in the partnership that the joining entity holds at the joining time, in accordance with section 713-225 ; and


    (b) except for the purposes of section 713-235 (which applies only if the partnership joins the group), do not work out tax cost setting amounts for the assets of the partnership; and


    (c) do not work out tax cost setting amounts for the * membership interests in the partnership held by the joining entity.

    Note 1:

    Because of paragraphs (b) and (c), no amount of allocable cost amount for the joining entity is allocated to the assets of the partnership, or to membership interests in the partnership held by the joining entity.

    Note 2:

    If assets of the partnership are held on revenue account, the related partnership cost setting interests held by the joining entity have their tax cost set at the joining time. However, that tax cost does not alter calculations of the net income or exempt income of the partnership, or of a partnership loss, for the purposes of section 92 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

     View history note

    SECTION 713-225   Tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interest  

    View history reference

    713-225(1)    
    This section modifies the way in which the * tax cost setting amounts are worked out under Division 705 for the * partnership cost setting interests mentioned in paragraph 713-220(2)(a) .

    Partnership cost setting interest takes character of partnership asset - general

    713-225(2)    
    Work out the * tax cost setting amounts for those * partnership cost setting interests as if any partnership cost setting interest that relates to an asset (the underlying partnership asset ) of the partnership were an asset of the same kind as the underlying partnership asset.

    Note:

    The kinds of assets mentioned in subsection (2) include the following:

  • (a) retained cost base assets;
  • (b) reset cost base assets that are held on revenue account (however, if such assets are trading stock or depreciating assets, the special rule in subsection (4) will apply) or on capital account;
  • (c) excluded assets (see subsection (3));
  • (d) current assets (within the meaning of subsection 705-125(2) ).
  • Example:

    The partnership has an asset that is Australian currency (which is a retained cost base asset). A partnership cost setting interest of the joining entity in that asset is treated as a retained cost base asset for the purpose of working out the tax cost setting amounts for the joining entity ' s partnership cost setting interests in the partnership.



    Partnership cost setting interest takes character of partnership asset - excluded assets

    713-225(3)    
    If:


    (a) tax cost setting amounts were to be worked out for the assets of the partnership under Division 705 ; and


    (b) in working out those amounts, the underlying partnership asset mentioned in subsection (2) would be an excluded asset for the purposes of section 705-35 ;

    then subsection (2) operates so that the * tax cost setting amounts for those * partnership cost setting interests are worked out as if any partnership cost setting interest that relates to the underlying partnership asset were an excluded asset for the purposes of section 705-35 .



    Special character of partnership cost setting interest in partnership asset that is trading stock, a depreciating asset or a registered emissions unit

    713-225(4)    

    View history reference

    Despite subsection (2), if an asset of the partnership is * trading stock, a *depreciating asset or a *registered emissions unit, work out the * tax cost setting amounts for those * partnership cost setting interests as if:


    (a) a partnership cost setting interest relating to that asset were a * retained cost base asset; and


    (b) the tax cost setting amount for that partnership cost setting interest were equal to its * terminating value (worked out in accordance with section 713-215 ).

     View history note


    Reduction in allocable cost amount for over-depreciated partnership assets

    713-225(5)    
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note


    Partnership liabilities - working out allocable cost amount

    713-225(6)    
    If:


    (a) in accordance with the *accounting principles that the partnership would use if it were to prepare its financial statements just before the joining time, a thing (the partnership liability ) is a liability of the partnership at the joining time; and

    View history reference


    (b) for that reason, the partnership liability is not an accounting liability of the joining entity at the joining time for the purposes of section 705-70 ;

    then sections 705-70 , 705-75 and 705-80 operate as if the partnership liability were an accounting liability of the joining entity at the joining time, to the extent of the joining entity ' s individual share of the partnership liability.

     View history note

    713-225(6A)    
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )

     View history note


    Partnership deductions - working out allocable cost amount

    713-225(7)    
    Section 705-115 operates as if:


    (a) a deduction to which the partnership is entitled (the partnership deduction ) were a deduction to which the joining entity was entitled, to the extent of the joining entity ' s individual share of the partnership deduction; and


    (b) the deduction to which the joining entity was entitled were of the same kind as the partnership deduction.

    Note:

    These kinds of deductions include acquired deductions and owned deductions (within the meaning of section 705-115 ).


     View history note

    713-230   (Repealed) SECTION 713-230 Reduction in allocable cost amount if partnership asset is over-depreciated  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    Special rules where partnership joins consolidated group

    SECTION 713-235   Partnership joins group - set tax cost of partnership assets  

    View history reference

    713-235(1)    
    This section applies if a partnership becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ).

    713-235(2)    
    In applying the provisions mentioned in subsection 713-205(3) in relation to the partnership:


    (a) do not work out an allocable cost amount for the partnership; and


    (b) work out the * tax cost setting amount for each asset of the partnership covered by subsection (3), in accordance with section 713-240 .

    Note:

    If a partner in the partnership becomes a subsidiary member of the group at the joining time, tax cost setting amounts are worked out for the assets of the partner (including partnership cost setting interests) before tax cost setting amounts are worked out for the assets of the partnership.


    713-235(3)    
    An asset of the partnership at the joining time is covered by this subsection, unless it would be an excluded asset for the purposes of section 705-35 on the assumption that tax cost setting amounts were worked out for the assets of the partnership under Division 705 (instead of section 713-240 ).

     View history note

    SECTION 713-240   Partnership joins group - tax cost setting amount for partnership asset  

    View history reference

    713-240(1)    
    Work out the * tax cost setting amounts for the assets covered by subsection 713-235(3) as follows:


    (a) firstly, add up the subsection (2) amounts for all the partnership cost setting interests in the partnership at the joining time (the result is the partnership cost pool );

    Note 1:

    Partnership cost setting interests held by a partner that becomes a subsidiary member of the group at the joining time are included in the calculation in paragraph (a). The operation of the cost setting rules in relation to that partner at the joining time may affect the subsection (2) amounts for those interests.

    Note 2:

    Partnership cost setting interests are included in the calculation in paragraph (a), even if the cost setting rules have not applied in relation to the interests (for example, if the interests were acquired directly by the head company).


    (b) secondly, work out the tax cost setting amounts for the assets covered by subsection 713-235(3) that are * retained cost base assets, in accordance with section 705-25 ;


    (c) thirdly, work out the tax cost setting amounts for the rest of the assets covered by subsection 713-235(3) , in accordance with subsection (3).

    Subsection (2) amount for a partnership cost setting interest

    713-240(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the subsection (2) amount for a * partnership cost setting interest is the amount specified in the following table:


    Working out the subsection (2) amount
    Item If the market value of the partnership cost setting interest is … the subsection (2) amount for the partnership cost setting interest is …
    1 equal to or greater than its *cost base its cost base
    2 less than its *cost base but greater than its *reduced cost base its *market value
    3 less than or equal to its *reduced cost base its reduced cost base



    Allocating partnership cost pool to partnership assets that are not retained cost base assets

    713-240(3)    

    View history reference

    Work out the * tax cost setting amounts for the assets mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) by applying sections 705-35 , 705-40 , 705-45 and 705-47 to those assets, as if:


    (a) the partnership were, at the joining time, the joining entity mentioned in those sections; and


    (b) the assets of the partnership were the assets covered by subsection 713-235(3) ; and


    (c) the allocable cost amount mentioned in paragraph 705-35(1)(a) were the partnership cost pool.

     View history note

    713-240(4)    
    For the purposes of this section, section 104-510 (CGT event L3) applies as if the group ' s allocable cost amount for the entity mentioned in that section were the partnership cost pool.

     View history note

    713-245   (Repealed) SECTION 713-245 Partnership joins group - pre-CGT factor for partnership asset  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    Special rules where partnership leaves consolidated group

    SECTION 713-250   Partnership leaves group - standard provisions modified  

    View history reference

    713-250(1)    
    This section applies if a partnership ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ).

    Note:

    The section applies whether or not any partner that is a subsidiary member of the group also ceases to be a subsidiary member at the leaving time.


    713-250(2)    
    Apply the provisions mentioned in subsection 713-205(5) subject to the modifications in the provisions that follow under this * group heading.

     View history note

    SECTION 713-255   Partnership leaves group - tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interests  

    View history reference

    Overview

    713-255(1)    
    Instead of working out * tax cost setting amounts for * membership interests in the partnership, a special rule requires * partnership cost setting interests in the partnership to be worked out. Where other entities cease to be * subsidiary members at the same time, the normal tax cost setting amount rules are applied for membership interests in the other entities, but the special rule is applied for partnership cost setting interests in the partnership.

    Tax cost setting amounts for membership interests in partnership not to be worked out

    713-255(2)    
    Do not work out * tax cost setting amounts for * membership interests in the partnership.

    Partnership is only entity that exits - tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interests

    713-255(3)    
    Except where the partnership ceases to be a * subsidiary member in circumstances covered by subsection (5), work out in accordance with subsection (4) the * tax cost setting amount just before the leaving time for each * partnership cost setting interest in the partnership held by a partner that is a * member of the group just before the leaving time.

    Tax cost setting amount

    713-255(4)    
    The * tax cost setting amount is equal to the partner's individual share of the * terminating value of the partnership asset to which the * partnership cost setting interest relates.

    Note:

    For income tax purposes there is no disposal by the head company of any assets of the partnership when it ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group.



    Multiple exit case - tax cost setting amounts for both partnership cost setting interests in partnership and membership interests in other entities

    713-255(5)    
    If the partnership is one of 2 or more entities that cease to be * subsidiary members of the old group at the same time because of an event happening in relation to one of them, apply section 711-55 as if:


    (a) except in paragraph 711-55(3)(a) , a reference to * membership interests in an entity, or to the * tax cost setting amount for such interests, where the entity is the partnership, were a reference to * partnership cost setting interests in the partnership, or to the tax cost setting amount for such interests; and


    (b) paragraph 711-55(3)(a) were replaced by a requirement that, where the entity in which the membership interests mentioned in subsection 711-55(3) are held is the partnership, subsection (4) of this section is to be applied in working out the tax cost setting amount of the partnership cost setting interests in the partnership.

     View history note

    SECTION 713-260   Partnership leaves group - tax cost setting amount for assets consisting of being owed certain liabilities  

    View history reference

    713-260(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) when the partnership ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group, a partner remains a * member of the group; and


    (b) an asset becomes an asset of the * head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the partnership when it ceases to be a subsidiary member; and


    (c) the asset is, ignoring that subsection:


    (i) the partner's interest in an asset of the partnership consisting of a liability of a member of the group owed to the partnership; or

    (ii) the partner's share of a liability of the partnership owed to a member of the group.

    713-260(2)    
    The asset's * tax cost is set at the leaving time at a * tax cost setting amount equal to the * market value of the asset.

     View history note

    SECTION 713-265   Partnership leaves group - adjustments to allocable cost amount of partner who also leaves group  

    View history reference

    713-265(1)    
    This section has effect in working out the group ' s * allocable cost amount for a partner in the partnership, if the partner ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group at the leaving time.

    713-265(2)    
    Section 711-35 operates as if:


    (a) a deduction to which the partnership becomes entitled (the partnership deduction ) were a deduction to which the partner becomes entitled, to the extent of the partner ' s individual share of the partnership deduction; and


    (b) the deduction to which the partner becomes entitled were of the same kind as the partnership deduction.

    Note:

    These kinds of deductions include acquired deductions and owned deductions (within the meaning of section 711-35 ).


    713-265(3)    
    Section 711-40 operates as if a liability owed by * members of the group to the partnership at the leaving time were a liability owed by members of the group to the partner at that time, to the extent of the partner ' s individual share of the liability.

    713-265(4)    

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) in accordance with the *accounting principles that the partnership would use if it were to prepare its financial statements just before the leaving time (disregarding subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)), a thing (the partnership liability ) is a liability of the partnership just before the leaving time; and

    View history reference


    (b) for that reason, the partnership liability is not an accounting liability of the partner just before the leaving time for the purposes of section 711-45 ;

    View history reference

    then section 711-45 operates as if the partnership liability were an accounting liability of the partner just before the leaving time, to the extent of the partner ' s individual share of the partnership liability.

     View history note

    713-270   (Repealed) SECTION 713-270 Partnership leaves group - certain partnership cost setting interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    Subdivision 713-L - Life insurance companies  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Guide to Subdivision 713-L

    SECTION 713-500   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision sets out special rules for:

  • (a) a life insurance company that becomes, or ceases to be, a member of a consolidated group; and
  • (b) the head company of a consolidated group where a life insurance company is a subsidiary member of the group.
  •  View history note


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    General modifications for life insurance companies
    713-505 Head company treated as a life insurance company
    713-510 Certain subsidiaries of life insurance companies cannot be members of consolidated group
    713-510A Disregard single entity rule in working out certain amounts in respect of life insurance company
    Life insurance companies ' liabilities on joining consolidated group
    713-511 Treatment of certain liabilities for income year when life insurance company joins consolidated group
    Tax cost setting rules for life insurance companies joining consolidated group
    713-515 Certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where life insurance company joins group
    713-520 Valuing certain liabilities where life insurance company joins group
    713-525 Obligation to value certain assets and liabilities at joining time
    Losses of life insurance companies joining consolidated group
    713-530 Treatment of certain losses of life insurance company
    Losses of life insurance companies ' subsidiaries joining consolidated group
    713-535 Losses of entities whose membership interests are complying superannuation assets of life insurance company
    713-540 Losses of entities whose membership interests are segregated exempt assets of life insurance company
    Imputation rules for life insurance companies joining consolidated group
    713-545 Treatment of franking surplus in franking account of life insurance subsidiary joining group
    713-550 Treatment of head company ' s franking account after joining
    [ Annuity payable by life insurance company to another member of a consolidated group]
    713-553 (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)
    713-555 (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)
    713-560 (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)
    Liabilities for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group
    713-565 Treatment of certain liabilities for income year when life insurance company leaves consolidated group
    Losses for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group
    713-570 Certain losses transferred to leaving company
    Tax cost setting rules for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group
    713-575 Terminating value of certain assets where life insurance company leaves group
    713-580 Valuing certain liabilities where life insurance company leaves group
    713-585 Obligation to value certain assets and liabilities at leaving time

    General modifications for life insurance companies

    SECTION 713-505  

    713-505   Head company treated as a life insurance company  

    View history reference

    This Act, and the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 , apply to the * head company of a * consolidated group as if it were a * life insurance company for an income year if one or more life insurance companies are * subsidiary members of the group at any time during that year.
     View history note

    SECTION 713-510   Certain subsidiaries of life insurance companies cannot be members of consolidated group  

    View history reference

    713-510(1)    

    View history reference

    An entity cannot be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group or * consolidatable group of which a * life insurance company is a * member if:


    (a) the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, all the * membership interests in the entity and either:


    (i) some, but not all, of the membership interests described in subsection (3) (the key interests ) are * complying superannuation assets of the life insurance company; or

    (ii) some, but not all, of the key interests are * segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company; or
    View history reference


    (b) the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, only some of the membership interests in the entity and any of the key interests are complying superannuation assets or segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company.

    View history reference
    Note:

    The entity could, however, be a member of another consolidated group or consolidatable group.

     View history note

    713-510(2)    
    An entity cannot continue to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group of which a * life insurance company is a * member if:


    (a) the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, all the * membership interests in the entity and, had the entity not been a subsidiary member of the group, either:


    (i) some, but not all, of the membership interests described in subsection (3) (the key interests ) would be * complying superannuation assets of the life insurance company; or

    (ii) some, but not all, of the key interests would be * segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company; or
    View history reference


    (b) the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, only some of the membership interests in the entity and, had the entity not been a subsidiary member of the group, any of the key interests would be complying superannuation assets or segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company.

    View history reference
     View history note

    713-510(3)    
    The key interests are the * membership interests the * life insurance company owns directly in:


    (a) the entity; or


    (b) an interposed entity.

     View history note

    SECTION 713-510A   Disregard single entity rule in working out certain amounts in respect of life insurance company  

    View history reference

    713-510A(1)    
    This section applies if a *life insurance company is a *member of a *consolidated group.

    713-510A(2)    
    However, if the *life insurance company is a *subsidiary member of the group, this section does not apply:


    (a) for the purposes of working out the *tax cost setting amount of an asset of the life insurance company when it becomes a subsidiary member of the group; and


    (b) for the purposes of working out the tax cost setting amount of a *membership interest in the life insurance company if it ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group.

    713-510A(3)    

    View history reference

    Disregard section 701-1 (the single entity rule) in working out any of the following for the purposes of Division 320 in relation to the *life insurance company:


    (a) amounts of the *head company ' s ordinary income and statutory income derived from *segregated exempt assets that are not assessable income and are not *exempt income under paragraph 320-37(1)(a) ;


    (b) the head company ' s taxable income of the *complying superannuation class (see section 320-137 );

    View history reference


    (c) the head company ' s *tax loss of the complying superannuation class (see section 320-141 );

    View history reference


    (d) the total *transfer value of the head company ' s *complying superannuation assets (see paragraph 320-175(1)(a) );

    View history reference


    (e) the amount of the head company ' s *complying superannuation liabilities (see paragraph 320-175(1)(b) );

    View history reference


    (f) the total transfer value of the head company ' s segregated exempt assets (see paragraph 320-230(1)(a) );


    (g) the amount of the head company ' s *exempt life insurance policy liabilities (see paragraph 320-230(1)(b) ).

     View history note

     View history note

    Life insurance companies' liabilities on joining consolidated group

    SECTION 713-511   Treatment of certain liabilities for income year when life insurance company joins consolidated group  

    View history reference

    713-511(1)    
    This section affects how paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 apply if:


    (a) a * life insurance company becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) just before the joining time, the life insurance company had one or more liabilities under the * net risk components of life insurance policies.

    Note:

    Paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 both operate on the basis of a comparison of the value of the company ' s liabilities under the net risk components of life insurance policies at the end of the current year with the value of those liabilities at the end of the previous year, so that:

  • (a) that paragraph includes an amount in the company ' s assessable income for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is less than the value at the end of the previous income year; and
  • (b) that section allows a deduction for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is more than the value at the end of the previous income year.

  • 713-511(2)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that the * head company of the * consolidated group bears the income tax consequences relating to a change in * value of the liabilities only after the joining time.

    Note:

    The life insurance company bears the income tax consequences relating to a change in value of the liabilities before the joining time, because section 701-30 ensures that paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 apply in relation to a part of the income year before that time when the company was not a subsidiary member of a consolidated group as if that part were an income year.


    713-511(3)    
    Paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 apply for the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) as if the * value of the liabilities at the end of the last income year ending before the joining time were the value of the liabilities (for the * life insurance company) just before the joining time.

     View history note

    Tax cost setting rules for life insurance companies joining consolidated group

    SECTION 713-515   Certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where life insurance company joins group  

    View history reference

    713-515(1)    
    If an entity that becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ) is a * life insurance company, these assets are retained cost base assets :


    (a) a * complying superannuation asset, or a * segregated exempt asset, of the company; and

    View history reference


    (b) another asset of the company that is held by the company for the purpose of discharging its liabilities under the * net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies (except policies that provide for * participating benefits or * discretionary benefits under * life insurance business carried on in Australia); and


    (c) for a life insurance company that has demutualised under Division 9AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 where, in the period starting just after the company demutualises and ending at the joining time, all of the * membership interests in the company were owned by the same group - a goodwill asset of the company.

     View history note

    713-515(2)    
    If the * retained cost base asset is covered by paragraph(1)(a) or (b), its * tax cost setting amount is:


    (a) for the purposes of working out the tax cost setting amounts for reset cost base assets (see section 705-35 ) - the asset ' s * transfer value just before the joining time; and


    (b) for all other purposes - the asset ' s * terminating value.

    713-515(3)    
    If the * retained cost base asset is covered by paragraph (1)(c), its * tax cost setting amount is the embedded value (see subsection 121AM(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) on the applicable accounting day (see subsection 121AM(3) of that Act) of the * life insurance company concerned reduced by the net value of shareholders ' assets held by the company on that day.

    713-515(4)    

    View history reference

    The net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies is the component of * life insurance policies (except * exempt life insurance policies and * complying superannuation life insurance policies) that:


    (a) is the component in respect of the part of those policies that has not been reinsured under a * contract of reinsurance; and


    (b) is not the * net risk component of those policies.

     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 713-520   Valuing certain liabilities where life insurance company joins group  

    View history reference

    713-520(1)    
    Despite section 705-70 , if the joining entity mentioned in step 2 in the table in section 705-60 is a * life insurance company, the joining entity ' s liabilities mentioned in this section are to be valued as mentioned in this section.

    713-520(2)    

    View history reference

    The value of the joining entity ' s * complying superannuation liabilities (if any) is the amount worked out under section 320-190 at the joining time.
     View history note

    713-520(3)    
    The value of the joining entity ' s * exempt life insurance policy liabilities (if any) is the amount worked out under section 320-245 at the joining time.

    713-520(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies to a liability of the joining entity if:


    (a) the liability is under the * net risk component of a * life insurance policy; and


    (b) the joining entity could deduct under section 320-80 an amount for the * risk component of claims paid under the policy had it not become a * member of the * consolidated group.

    713-520(5)    
    The value of that liability is the * current termination value of the * net risk component of the * life insurance policy at the joining time (calculated by an * actuary).

    713-520(6)    

    View history reference

    The value of the joining entity ' s liabilities under the * net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies is the amount worked out for those liabilities under subsection 320-190(2) as if those liabilities were * complying superannuation liabilities.
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 713-525  

    713-525   Obligation to value certain assets and liabilities at joining time  

    View history reference

    Division 320 has effect as if the time when a * life insurance company becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group were a * valuation time for the purposes of sections 320-175 and 320-230 .
    Note:

    This means that there must be a valuation of the complying superannuation assets and complying superannuation liabilities under section 320-175 (with the consequences set out in section 320-180 ), and a valuation of the segregated exempt assets and exempt life insurance policy liabilities under section 320-230 (with the consequences set out in section 320-235 ), as at that time.

     View history note

    Losses of life insurance companies joining consolidated group

    SECTION 713-530   Treatment of certain losses of life insurance company  

    View history reference

    713-530(1)    

    View history reference

    This section applies if:


    (a) a * life insurance company becomes a * member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) just before the joining time, the life insurance company had either:


    (i) a * tax loss of the * complying superannuation class; or

    (ii) a * net capital loss from * complying superannuation assets.
    View history reference
     View history note

    713-530(2)    
    This Act operates (except so far as the contrary intention appears) for the purposes of income years ending after the joining time as if:


    (a) the * head company of the * consolidated group had made the loss for the income year in which the joining time occurs; and


    (b) the * life insurance company had not made the loss for the income year for which it made the loss.

    713-530(3)    
    The * head company is not prevented from * utilising the loss for the income year in which the joining time occurs merely because this Act operates as if the head company had made the loss for that year.

    713-530(4)    
    Division 707 does not apply in relation to the * net capital loss or the * tax loss at the joining time.

     View history note

    Losses of life insurance companies' subsidiaries joining consolidated group

    SECTION 713-535   Losses of entities whose membership interests are complying superannuation assets of life insurance company  

    View history reference

    713-535(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a * life insurance company becomes a * member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) at the joining time, the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, all the * membership interests in yet another entity (the life insurance subsidiary ) that becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at that time; and


    (c) all the following membership interests are * complying superannuation assets of the life insurance company:


    (i) the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the life insurance subsidiary;

    (ii) the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the interposed entities; and
    View history reference


    (d) the * head company of the group makes a * tax loss or * net capital loss under Subdivision 707-A because of a transfer from the life insurance subsidiary.

     View history note

    713-535(2)    
    This Act operates for the purposes of income years ending after the transfer as if:


    (a) the * tax loss were of the * complying superannuation class; or

    View history reference


    (b) the * net capital loss were from * complying superannuation assets.

    View history reference
     View history note

    713-535(3)    
    Subdivisions 707-B , 707-C and 707-D do not affect the * utilisation of the loss by the * head company of the * consolidated group.

     View history note

    SECTION 713-540   Losses of entities whose membership interests are segregated exempt assets of life insurance company  

    View history reference

    713-540(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a * life insurance company becomes a * member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) at the joining time, the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, all the * membership interests in yet another entity (the life insurance subsidiary ) that becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at that time; and


    (c) all the following membership interests are * segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company:


    (i) the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the life insurance subsidiary;

    (ii) the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the interposed entities.

    713-540(2)    
    A * tax loss or * net capital loss of the life insurance subsidiary for an income year ending before the joining time cannot be * utilised by the life insurance subsidiary for an income year ending after that time.

    Note:

    This prevents the loss from being transferred to the head company of the consolidated group under Subdivision 707-A (because it means the life insurance subsidiary could not have utilised the loss for the trial year). As a result, section 707-150 prevents any other entity from utilising the loss for an income year ending after the joining time.

     View history note

    Imputation rules for life insurance companies joining consolidated group

    SECTION 713-545   Treatment of franking surplus in franking account of life insurance subsidiary joining group  

    View history reference

    713-545(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a * life insurance company becomes a * member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) at the joining time, the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, * membership interests in yet another entity (the life insurance subsidiary ) that becomes a * subsidiary member of the group at that time; and


    (c) the life insurance subsidiary ' s * franking account is in surplus just before the joining time.

    713-545(2)    
    Paragraph 709-60(2)(b) does not apply in relation to the life insurance subsidiary.

    713-545(3)    
    A * franking credit arises at the joining time in the * franking account of the * head company of the group. The amount of the credit is the amount worked out under subsection (4).

    713-545(4)    
    The amount is equal to the amount of the * franking credit that would arise in the * life insurance company ' s * franking account just before the joining time under item 5 of the table in subsection 219-15(2) if:


    (a) the life insurance subsidiary made a * franked distribution to the life insurance company just before the joining time; and


    (b) the amount of the franking credit on the distribution were equal to the surplus mentioned in paragraph (1)(c).

    713-545(5)    
    The * head company of the group is entitled to a * tax offset for the income year in which the joining time occurs. The amount of the tax offset is:


    (a) if all the * membership interests (if any) that the * life insurance company owns directly in the life insurance subsidiary, and all the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in interposed entities, are * segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company - the surplus mentioned in paragraph (1)(c), reduced by the amount worked out under subsection (4); or


    (b) if all the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the life insurance subsidiary, and all the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in interposed entities, are * complying superannuation assets of the life insurance company - the amount worked out under subsection (6); or

    View history reference


    (c) otherwise - nil.

     View history note

    713-545(6)    

    View history reference

    The amount is worked out using the following formula (or is nil if it would otherwise be negative):

    where:

    complying superannuation class tax rate
    means the rate of tax in respect of the *complying superannuation class of the taxable income of a *life insurance company for the income year in which the joining time occurs (see paragraph 23A(b) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 ).

    ordinary class tax rate
    means the rate of tax in respect of the * ordinary class of the taxable income of a life insurance company for the income year in which the joining time occurs (see paragraph 23A(a) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 ).

     View history note

    SECTION 713-550  

    713-550   Treatment of head company ' s franking account after joining  

    View history reference

    Sections 709-70 and 709-75 do not apply in relation to a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group if:


    (a) the subsidiary member is a * life insurance company; or


    (b) a life insurance company that is a * member of the group owns * membership interests, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, in the subsidiary member.

     View history note

    (Repealed) Heading repealed by No 56 of 2010

    713-553   (Repealed) SECTION 713-553 Special rules relating to segregated exempt assets  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    713-555   (Repealed) SECTION 713-555 Transfer from segregated exempt assets because policyholder and life insurance company are in group  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    713-560   (Repealed) SECTION 713-560 If valuation of segregated exempt assets is delayed  
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    Liabilities for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group

    SECTION 713-565   Treatment of certain liabilities for income year when life insurance company leaves consolidated group  

    View history reference

    713-565(1)    
    This section affects how paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 apply if:


    (a) a * life insurance company ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) at the leaving time, the * life insurance company has one or more liabilities under the * net risk components of life insurance policies.

    Note:

    Paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 both operate on the basis of a comparison of the value of a life insurance company ' s liabilities under the net risk components of life insurance policies at the end of the current year with the value of those liabilities at the end of the previous year, so that:

  • (a) that paragraph includes an amount in the company ' s assessable income for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is less than the value at the end of the previous income year; and
  • (b) that section allows a deduction for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is more than the value at the end of the previous income year.

  • 713-565(2)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that:


    (a) the * head company of the * consolidated group bears the income tax consequences relating to a change in * value of the liabilities before the leaving time; and


    (b) the * life insurance company bears the income tax consequences relating to a change in value of the liabilities after the leaving time.

    Head company ' s income or deduction from liabilities

    713-565(3)    
    For the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to the income year in which the leaving time occurs (but not later income years), paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 have effect as if:


    (a) the * head company of the * consolidated group had the liabilities at the end of that income year; and


    (b) the * value of the liabilities at the end of that income year had been the amount that was actually the value of the liabilities (for the * life insurance company) at the leaving time.

    Life insurance company ' s income or deduction from liabilities

    713-565(4)    
    For the entity core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to the * life insurance company and the income year in which the leaving time occurs, paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 have effect as if the * value of the liabilities at the end of the previous income year had been the amount that was actually the value of the liabilities (for the life insurance company) at the leaving time.

     View history note

    Losses for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group

    SECTION 713-570   Certain losses transferred to leaving company  

    View history reference

    713-570(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a * life insurance company ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) ignoring section 713-505 , at the leaving time, no other * member of the group is a life insurance company that has a * complying superannuation asset pool; and

    View history reference


    (c) at the leaving time, the * head company has either:


    (i) a * tax loss of the * complying superannuation class; or

    (ii) a * net capital loss from * complying superannuation assets.
    View history reference
     View history note

    713-570(2)    
    This Act operates (except so far as the contrary intention appears) for the purposes of income years ending after the leaving time as if:


    (a) the * life insurance company had made the loss for the income year in which the leaving time occurs; and


    (b) the * head company had not made the loss for the income year for which it made the loss.

    Note:

    Section 707-410 (Exit history rule does not treat entity as having made a loss) does not prevent the life insurance company from having the loss under this section, because that section merely states that the company is not taken under section 701-40 (Exit history rule) to have made a loss.


    713-570(3)    
    The * life insurance company is not prevented from * utilising the loss for the income year in which the leaving time occurs merely because this Act operates as if the life insurance company had made the loss for that year.

     View history note

    Tax cost setting rules for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group

    SECTION 713-575   Terminating value of certain assets where life insurance company leaves group  

    View history reference

    713-575(1)    
    This section applies if a * life insurance company (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ).

    713-575(2)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of applying section 711-25 in relation to the leaving entity, the * head company ' s terminating value for an asset that it holds at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) to be a part of the head company is the * transfer value of the asset at the leaving time, if the asset is:


    (a) a * complying superannuation asset, or a * segregated exempt asset, of the head company; or

    View history reference


    (b) held by the head company for the purpose of discharging its liabilities under the * net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies (except policies that provide for * participating benefits or * discretionary benefits under * life insurance business carried on in Australia).

     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 713-580   Valuing certain liabilities where life insurance company leaves group  

    View history reference

    713-580(1)    
    Despite section 711-45 , if the leaving entity mentioned in step 4 in the table in section 711-20 is a * life insurance company, the leaving entity ' s liabilities mentioned in this section are to be valued as mentioned in this section.

    713-580(2)    
    To avoid doubt, those liabilities are the liabilities that become those of the leaving entity because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) ceases to apply to the leaving entity when it ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group.

    713-580(3)    

    View history reference

    The value of the leaving entity ' s * complying superannuation liabilities (if any) is the amount worked out under section 320-190 at the leaving time.
     View history note

    713-580(4)    
    The value of the leaving entity ' s * exempt life insurance policy liabilities (if any) is the amount worked out under section 320-245 at the leaving time.

    713-580(5)    
    Subsection (6) applies to a liability of the leaving entity if:


    (a) the liability is under the * net risk component of a * life insurance policy; and


    (b) the leaving entity could deduct under section 320-80 an amount for the * risk component of claims paid under the policy on or after the time it ceased to be a * member of the * consolidated group.

    713-580(6)    
    The value of that liability is the * current termination value of the * net risk component of the * life insurance policy at the leaving time (calculated by an * actuary).

    713-580(7)    

    View history reference

    The value of the leaving entity ' s liabilities under the * net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies is the amount worked out for those liabilities under subsection 320-190(2) as if those liabilities were * complying superannuation liabilities.
     View history note

    SECTION 713-585  

    713-585   Obligation to value certain assets and liabilities at leaving time  

    View history reference

    Division 320 has effect as if the time when a * life insurance company ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group were a * valuation time for the purposes of sections 320-175 and 320-230 .
    Note:

    This means that there must be a valuation of the complying superannuation assets and complying superannuation liabilities under section 320-175 (with the consequences set out in section 320-180 ), and a valuation of the segregated exempt assets and exempt life insurance policy liabilities under section 320-230 (with the consequences set out in section 320-235 ), as at that time.

     View history note

    Subdivision 713-M - General insurance companies  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 713-700   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision sets out special rules for a general insurance company becoming or ceasing to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group.

     View history note

    Tax cost setting rules for general insurance companies joining consolidated group

    SECTION 713-705   Certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where general insurance company joins group  

    View history reference

    713-705(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a * general insurance company becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) that company has demutualised under Division 9AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ; and


    (c) in the period starting just after the company demutualises and ending at the joining time, all of the * membership interests in the company were owned by the same group.

    713-705(2)    
    A goodwill asset of the company just before the joining time is a retained cost base asset .

    713-705(3)    
    The goodwill asset ' s * tax cost setting amount is its amount (worked out in accordance with subsection 121AN(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) on the applicable accounting day (see subsection 121AN(4) of that Act).

     View history note

    Liabilities and reserves of general insurance companies joining and leaving consolidated groups

    SECTION 713-710  

    713-710   Treatment of liabilities and reserves for income year when general insurance company joins or leaves group  

    View history reference

    Sections 713-715 and 713-720 affect how sections 321-10 , 321-15 , 321-50 and 321-55 (the affected sections ) apply in relation to these values (the affected values ):


    (a) the value of the outstanding claims liability of a * general insurance company under * general insurance policies that is worked out under section 321-20 ;


    (b) the value of the unearned premium reserve of a general insurance company under general insurance policies that is worked out under section 321-60 .

    View history reference
    Note 1:

    Sections 321-10 and 321-15 both operate on the basis of a comparison of the value of the outstanding claims liability of a general insurance company at the end of the current year with the value of that liability at the end of the previous income year, so that:

  • (a) section 321-10 includes an amount in the company ' s assessable income for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is less than the value at the end of the previous income year; and
  • (b) section 321-15 allows a deduction for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is more than the value at the end of the previous income year.
  • Note 2:

    Sections 321-50 and 321-55 both operate on the basis of a comparison of the value of the unearned premium reserve of a general insurance company at the end of the current year with the value of that reserve at the end of the previous income year, so that:

  • (a) section 321-50 includes an amount in the company ' s assessable income for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is less than the value at the end of the previous income year; and
  • (b) section 321-55 allows a deduction for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is more than the value at the end of the previous income year.
  •  View history note

    SECTION 713-715   If general insurance company joins consolidated group  

    View history reference

    713-715(1)    
    This section applies if a * general insurance company becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ).

    713-715(2)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that the * head company of the * consolidated group bears the income tax consequences relating to changes after the joining time in the affected values.

    Note:

    The general insurance company bears the income tax consequences relating to a change in the affected values before the joining time, because section 701-30 ensures that the affected sections apply in relation to a part of the income year before that time when the company was not a subsidiary member of a consolidated group as if that part were an income year.


    713-715(3)    
    The affected sections apply for the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) as if each of the affected values at the end of the last income year ending before the joining time were the amount that would have been that value had that income year ended just before the joining time.

     View history note

    SECTION 713-720  If general insurance company leaves consolidated group  

    View history reference

    713-720(1)    
    This section applies if a * general insurance company ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ) in an income year (the leaving year ).

    713-720(2)    
    The object of this section is to ensure that:


    (a) the * head company of the * consolidated group bears the income tax consequences relating to changes before the leaving time in the affected values; and


    (b) the * general insurance company bears the income tax consequences relating to changes after the leaving time in the affected values.

    Head company ' s income or deduction

    713-720(3)    
    For the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to the leaving year (but not later income years), the affected sections have effect as if each of the affected values at the end of the leaving year for the * head company of the * consolidated group were increased by the relevant value for the * general insurance company at the end of the previous income year worked out under subsection (5).

    General insurance company ' s income or deduction

    713-720(4)    
    For the entity core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to the * general insurance company and the leaving year, the affected sections have effect as if each of the affected values for the general insurance company at the end of the previous income year were worked out under subsection (5).

    Working out affected values at the end of the previous income year

    713-720(5)    
    Work out each of the affected values for the * general insurance company at the end of the previous income year as if it had ended at the leaving time.

     View history note

    SECTION 713-725   Treatment of certain assets and liabilities of general insurance companies  

    View history reference

    713-725(1)    
    This section applies if a *general insurance company becomes or ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group.

    713-725(2)    
    If the *general insurance company becomes a *subsidiary member of the group:


    (a) in working out the step 2 amount for the purposes of the table in section 705-60 , reduce that amount by the sum of the amount of each thing mentioned in subsection (4); and


    (b) in working out the *tax cost setting amount of a thing mentioned in subsection (4) for the purposes of section 705-35 , treat the *market value of the thing as zero.

    713-725(3)    
    If the *general insurance company ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group:


    (a) in working out the step 4 amount for the purposes of the table in section 711-20 , reduce that amount by the sum of the amount of each thing mentioned in subsection (4); and


    (b) for the purposes of section 711-25 , treat the *terminating value of a thing mentioned in subsection (4) as zero.

    713-725(4)    
    The things are the *general insurance company's:


    (a) deferred acquisition costs in relation to the company's unearned premium reserve; and


    (b) deferred reinsurance expenses in relation to the company's unearned premium reserve; and


    (c) recoveries receivable in relation to the company's *outstanding claims.

     View history note

    Division 715 - Interactions between this Part and other areas of the income tax law  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Subdivision 715-A - Treatment of unrealised losses existing when ownership or control of a company changes before or during consolidation  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Object

    SECTION 715-15   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    715-15(1)    
    The object of this Subdivision is to give effect to the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC (about change of ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss) in these cases:


    (a) on formation of a * consolidated group, a * CGT asset held directly by the * head company is affected by that Subdivision, and the *business continuity test is failed;

    View history reference


    (b) on an entity becoming a * subsidiary member of a consolidated group, an asset consisting of:


    (i) a * membership interest that a * member of the group (including a chosen transitional entity under Division 701 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ) holds in the entity; or

    (ii) a liability that the entity owes to such a member;
    is affected by that Subdivision, and the business continuity test is failed;
    View history reference


    (c) on a company becoming a subsidiary member:


    (i) a CGT asset of the company that becomes an asset of the head company is affected by that Subdivision; and

    (ii) because the company is a chosen transitional entity, the asset does not have its tax cost reset; and

    (iii) the business continuity test is failed;
    View history reference


    (d) on an entity ceasing to be a subsidiary member, a CGT asset of the head company that becomes an asset of the entity is affected by that Subdivision, and the business continuity test is failed.

    View history reference
    Note:

    Subdivision 165-CC also affects an entity that has deferred losses under Subdivision 170-D on assets that it formerly owned. Subdivision 715-D gives effect to the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC if such an entity becomes a member of a consolidated group.

     View history note

    715-15(2)    
    This Subdivision achieves its object by supplementing and modifying the application of Subdivision 165-CC to take account of how the rest of this Part treats * members of a * consolidated group (in particular the provisions about entities becoming or ceasing to be members).

     View history note

    Effect on Subdivision 165-CC of a company becoming a member of a consolidated group

    SECTION 715-25   Subdivision 165-CC stops applying to earlier changeover time  

    View history reference

    715-25(1)    
    At and after the time (the membership time ) when a company becomes a * member of a * consolidated group, Subdivision 165-CC does not apply to the company in relation to a * changeover time that happened before the membership time, except for the purposes of section 715-30 (which defines 165-CC tagged asset ).

    Note 1:

    Subdivision 165-CC is about change of ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss.

    Note 2:

    If the company has 165-CC tagged assets at the membership time, there are further consequences under this Subdivision and Subdivision 715-D .

    Also, Subdivision 165-CC can apply to the head company of the group in relation to a changeover time that happens for it at or after the membership time. See section 715-75 .


    715-25(2)    
    Subsection (1) continues to have effect even if the company later stops being a * member of the group.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-30  

    715-30   Meaning of 165-CC tagged asset  

    View history reference

    A * CGT asset is a 165-CC tagged asset of a company at a particular time if, and only if:


    (a) that time is at or after the most recent * changeover time (if any) for the company; and


    (b) at that changeover time, the company had an unrealised net loss under section 165-115E ; and


    (c) the asset is covered by subsection 165-115A(1A) as applying to that changeover time; and


    (d) the company would not, at that changeover time, satisfy the maximum net asset value test under section 152-15 ; and


    (e) if the company has chosen under subsection 165-115A(1B) in relation to that changeover time - the company * acquired the asset for $10,000 or more.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-35  

    715-35   Meaning of final RUNL  

    View history reference

    A company ' s final RUNL at a particular time (the test time ) is the amount that would have been the company ' s * residual unrealised net loss at the time of:


    (a) if no event that subsection 165-115BB(2) refers to as a relevant event actually happens at the test time - a notional event of that kind happening at the test time; or


    (b) otherwise - a notional event of that kind that happens at the test time, and that the company determines under paragraph 165-115BB(1)(b) to have happened later than each event that actually happened at that time.

    Note:

    This Subdivision reduces a company ' s final RUNL as amounts of it are applied for various purposes.

     View history note

    165-CC tagged assets that affect tax cost setting amounts

    SECTION 715-50   Step 1 amount is reduced if membership interest in subsidiary member is 165-CC tagged asset and business continuity test is failed  

    View history reference

    715-50(1)    
    The amount taken into account under subsection 705-65(1) (about the cost of membership interests in the joining entity) for a * membership interest that a * member of the joined group holds in the joining entity at the joining time is reduced if:


    (a) apart from this section, the amount would be the membership interest ' s * reduced cost base (if appropriate, as modified by a later provision of section 705-65 ); and


    (b) the membership interest is at that time a * 165-CC tagged asset of that member, and that member owned it at the * changeover time for that member; and


    (c) that member ' s * final RUNL just before the joining time was greater than nil; and


    (d) that member does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:


    (i) the period (the business continuity test period ) consisting of the * head company ' s * trial year; and

    (ii) the time (the test time ) just before the * changeover time.
    View history reference
     View history note

    715-50(2)    
    If at the joining time that * member holds:


    (a) 2 or * more membership interests in the joining entity; or


    (b) at least one membership interest in the joining entity, and at least one membership interest in another member of the joined group;

    this section applies to each such membership interest in whichever order that member determines.



    Amount of reduction

    715-50(3)    
    The amount taken into account under subsection 705-65(1) is reduced to the * membership interest ' s * market value at the joining time.

    715-50(4)    
    However, if that member ' s * final RUNL (as reduced by any previous reductions under this section) is less than the difference between:


    (a) the * reduced cost base referred to in paragraph (1)(a); and


    (b) the * market value referred to in subsection (3);

    the amount taken into account under subsection 705-65(1) is instead reduced by that final RUNL.


    715-50(5)    
    That * final RUNL is reduced by the amount of the reduction under subsection (3) or (4).

    Non-membership equity interests

    715-50(6)    

    View history reference

    Subsection 705-65(6) (which treats *non-membership equity interests as *membership interests) also applies for the purposes of this section.
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 715-55   Step 2 amount is affected if liability of subsidiary member is 165-CC tagged asset of another group member and business continuity test is failed  

    View history reference

    715-55(1)    
    The amount (the comparison amount ) applicable under the table in subsection 705-75(2) (about reduction of the step 2 amount) for an accounting liability of the joining entity that is owed to a * member of the joined group at the joining time is reduced if:


    (a) apart from this section, the comparison amount would be the * reduced cost base (if appropriate, as modified by a later provision of section 705-75 ) of the asset of that member that is constituted by the accounting liability; and


    (b) the asset is at that time a * 165-CC tagged asset of that member, and that member owned it at the * changeover time; and


    (c) that member ' s * final RUNL just before the joining time (as reduced by any reductions under section 715-50 ) was greater than nil; and


    (d) that member does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:


    (i) the period (the business continuity test period ) consisting of the * head company ' s * trial year; and

    (ii) the time (the test time ) just before the * changeover time.
    View history reference
    Note:

    Paragraph (1)(c) has the effect that if both this section and section 715-50 apply to the same member of the joined group, section 715-50 is applied before this section.

     View history note

    715-55(2)    
    If at the joining time that * member holds:


    (a) 2 or * more assets constituted by accounting liabilities of the joining entity; or


    (b) at least one asset constituted by an accounting liability of the joining entity, and at least one asset constituted by an accounting liability of another member of the group;

    this section applies to each such asset in whichever order that member determines.



    Amount of reduction

    715-55(3)    
    The comparison amount is reduced to the asset ' s * market value at the joining time.

    715-55(4)    
    However, if that member ' s * final RUNL (as reduced by any previous reductions under section 715-50 or this section) is less than the difference between:


    (a) the * reduced cost base referred to in paragraph (1)(a); and


    (b) the asset ' s * market value at the joining time;

    the comparison amount is instead reduced by that final RUNL.


    715-55(5)    
    That * final RUNL is reduced by the amount of the reduction under subsection (3) or (4).

     View history note

    165-CC tagged assets that form loss denial pools of head company when consolidated group is formed

    SECTION 715-60   Assets that the head company already owns  

    View history reference

    715-60(1)    
    At the time (the formation time ) when a * consolidated group comes into existence under paragraph 703-5(1)(a) , a loss denial pool of the * head company is created if:


    (a) the formation time is not a * changeover time for the head company; and


    (b) at the formation time, the head company owns a * CGT asset:


    (i) that is a * 165-CC tagged asset of the head company at that time; and

    (ii) that it owned at the * changeover time; and

    (iii) that is not a * membership interest in a * member of the group; and

    (iv) that is not a right or option (including a contingent right or option), created or issued by a member of the group, to acquire such a membership interest; and

    (v) that is not constituted by a liability owed to the head company by a member of the group;
    or 2 or more such assets; and


    (c) the head company ' s * final RUNL just before the formation time (as reduced by any reductions under section 715-50 or 715-55 ) was greater than nil; and


    (d) the head company does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:


    (i) the period (the business continuity test period ) consisting of the head company ' s * trial year; and

    (ii) the time (the test time ) just before the * changeover time.
    View history reference
    Note:

    Paragraph (1)(c) has the effect that if the head company has165-CC tagged assets that are affected by section 715-50 or 715-55 (because they are membership interests in, or accounting liabilities owed by, another group member), those sections are applied before this section.

     View history note

    715-60(2)    
    When it is created, the pool consists of the one or more * CGT assets referred to in paragraph (1)(b), and its loss denial balance is equal to the * final RUNL referred to in paragraph (1)(c).

    Note 1:

    The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the head company, for example, one created at the formation time under section 715-70 .

    Note 2:

    170-D deferred losses on 165-CC tagged assets of the head company may be added to the pool by subsection 715-355(1) .

     View history note

    SECTION 715-70   Assets of subsidiary member that become those of head company  

    View history reference

    715-70(1)    
    At the time (the formation time ) when an entity becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, a loss denial pool of the * head company of the group is created if:


    (a) the formation time is not a * changeover time for the head company; and


    (b) the entity is a chosen transitional entity under Division 701 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 ; and


    (c) subsection (2) or (4) of this section is satisfied.

    Note 1:

    If the entity is a chosen transitional entity, section 701-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 prevents:

  • • section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity); and
  • • subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount);
  • of this Act from applying to the entity ' s assets in relation to the formation time.

    Note 2:

    The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the head company, for example, one created under this section because another entity becomes a subsidiary member of the group at the formation time.

     View history note


    Joining entity has 165-CC tagged assets

    715-70(2)    
    This subsection is satisfied if:


    (a) a * CGT asset of the entity, or each of 2 or more CGT assets of the entity:


    (i) is a * 165-CC tagged asset of the entity at the formation time; and

    (ii) was owned by the entity at the * changeover time; and

    (iii) is not a * membership interest in a * member of the group; and

    (iv) is not a right or option (including a contingent right or option), created or issued by a member of the group, to acquire such a membership interest; and

    (v) is not constituted by a liability owed to the entity by a member of the group at the formation time; and


    (b) the entity ' s * final RUNL just before the formation time (as reduced by any reductions under section 715-50 or 715-55 ) was greater than nil; and


    (c) the entity does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:


    (i) the period (the business continuity test period ) consisting of the entity ' s * trial year; and

    (ii) the time (the test time ) just before the * changeover time.
    View history reference
    Note:

    Paragraph (2)(b) has the effect that if the entity has 165-CC tagged assets that are affected by section 715-50 or 715-55 (because they are membership interests in, or accounting liabilities owed by, another group member), those sections are applied before this section.

     View history note

    715-70(3)    
    When it is created because of subsection (2), the pool consists of the one or more * CGT assets referred to in paragraph (2)(a), and its loss denial balance is equal to the * final RUNL referred to in paragraph (2)(b).

    Note:

    170-D deferred losses on 165-CC tagged assets of the head company may be added to the pool by subsection 715-355(2) .



    Entity has loss denial pool

    715-70(4)    
    This subsection is satisfied if, just before the formation time, the entity had a * loss denial pool.

    715-70(5)    
    When it is created because of subsection (4), the * head company ' s loss denial pool:


    (a) consists of the one or more * CGT assets of which the entity ' s * loss denial pool consisted; and


    (b) has a loss denial balance equal to the * loss denial balance of the entity ' s loss denial pool;

    just before the formation time.

     View history note

    How Subdivision 165-CC applies to consolidated groups

    SECTION 715-75   Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule  

    View history reference

    715-75(1)    
    Subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) and section 701-5 (Entry history rule) also have effect for all the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC (about change of ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss).

    Note:

    One consequence of this is that the head company is the only member of a consolidated group that can have a changeover time and be subject to consequences under Subdivision 165-CC . The head company is treated as owning all CGT assets owned by group members, and as making relevant losses.


    715-75(2)    
    This section is not intended to limit the effect that subsection 701-1(1) and section 701-5 have apart from this section.

     View history note

    Effect on Subdivision 165-CC of entity leaving consolidated group

    SECTION 715-80  

    715-80   Application of sections 715-85 to 715-110  

    View history reference

    Sections 715-85 to 715-110 apply if, at a particular time (the leaving time ), an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group.
    Note 1:

    If a changeover time happened to the head company at or after the group came into existence and before the leaving time, Subdivision 165-CC does not apply to the head company at and after the leaving time, in respect of assets that leave with the leaving entity, in relation to the changeover time.

    This is because the head company can no longer make a capital loss, or become entitled to a deduction, in respect of a CGT event happening to any of those assets.

    Note 2:

    If, just before the leaving time, the head company had a loss denial pool, see section 715-120 .

     View history note

    SECTION 715-85  

    715-85   First changeover time for leaving company at or after leaving time  

    View history reference

    If the leaving entity is a company, its first * changeover time at or after the leaving time is determined:


    (a) on the basis that the reference time under subsection 165-115A(2A) is the one that would be used in determining whether the leaving time was a changeover time for the head company ; and


    (b) making the additional assumptions in section 715-290 .

    Note:

    If the leaving entity is a trust, it cannot have a changeover time (because Subdivision 165-CC applies only to companies), so section 715-95 applies to it instead: see subsection 715-95(2) .

     View history note

    SECTION 715-90   How business continuity test applies if leaving time is changeover time for leaving company  

    View history reference

    715-90(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the leaving entity is a company; and


    (b) the leaving time is a * changeover time for the leaving entity.

    715-90(2)    

    View history reference

    In applying to the leaving entity for the * changeover time that is the leaving time, subsection 165-115B(3) and paragraph 165-115BA(5)(c) have effect as if they provided that the time just after the changeover time were the test time for applying section 165-13 to the company.
    Note:

    This ensures that the business continuity test is applied to the business that the leaving entity carries on at the leaving time.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-95   If ownership and control of leaving entity have not changed since head company ' s last changeover time  

    View history reference

    715-95(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the leaving entity is a company; and


    (b) the leaving time is not a * changeover time for the leaving entity; and


    (c) just before the leaving time, the * head company owned at least one * CGT asset:


    (i) that was a * 165-CC tagged asset just before the leaving time; and

    (ii) that it owned at the latest changeover time for the head company at or after the group came into existence and before the leaving time; and


    (d) at least one asset covered by paragraph (c) is an asset (a leaving asset ) that becomes an asset of the leaving entity at the leaving time because subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity; and


    (e) the head company ' s * final RUNL at the leaving time is greater than nil.

    715-95(2)    
    This section also applies if the leaving entity is a trust.

    715-95(3)    

    View history reference

    If the * head company does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:


    (a) the period (the business continuity test period ) starting at the earlier of:


    (i) the time 12 months before the leaving time; and

    (ii) when the head company came into existence;
    and ending just before the leaving time; and
    View history reference


    (b) the time (the test time ) just before the * changeover time;

    the head company must make one of the choices for which sections 715-100 , 715-105 and 715-110 provide.

    Note:

    For provisions about making one of these choices, see sections 715-175 to 715-185 .

     View history note

    SECTION 715-100  

    715-100   First choice: adjustable values of leaving assets reduced to nil  

    View history reference

    The first choice is to reduce the * adjustable value of each leaving asset to nil. The choice has effect accordingly, just before the leaving time. The * head company ' s * final RUNL is not reduced because of it.
    Note:

    The consequences of the choice are worked out under section 715-145 .

     View history note

    SECTION 715-105   Second choice: head company's final RUNL applied in reducing adjustable values of leaving assets that are loss assets  

    View history reference

    715-105(1)    
    The second choice is to reduce under this section the * adjustable value of each leaving asset (a loss asset ) for which the * head company would have had a notional capital loss, or notional revenue loss, under section 165-115F at the time (the test time ) just before the leaving time if the test time had been a * changeover time for the head company. The choice has effect accordingly.

    Note:

    The consequences of the choice are worked out under this section and section 715-145 .


    715-105(2)    
    If:


    (a) 2 or more entities cease to be * subsidiary members of the * consolidated group at the leaving time; and


    (b) 2 or more of them make the second choice;

    the choices have effect in whichever order the * head company determines.


    715-105(3)    
    This section applies to each of the loss assets in order, according to their respective * adjustable values (apart from this section) at the test time: from largest to smallest. (If an asset has more than one such adjustable value, use the greater or greatest of them.)

    715-105(4)    
    At the test time, the * adjustable value of the loss asset is reduced to the asset's * market value at that time.

    715-105(5)    
    However, if the * head company's * final RUNL at the leaving time (as reduced by any previous reductions under this section) is less than the difference between:


    (a) the * adjustable value of the loss asset (apart from this section) at the test time; and


    (b) the asset's * market value at the test time;

    the adjustable value is instead reduced at the test time by that final RUNL.


    715-105(6)    
    That * final RUNL is reduced by the amount of the reduction under subsection (4) or (5). If 2 or more such reductions are made for the same asset (because it has 2 or more different characters), that final RUNL is reduced by the greater or greatest of the reductions.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-110   Third choice: loss denial pool of leaving entity created  

    View history reference

    715-110(1)    
    The third choice can be made only if every asset covered by paragraph 715-95(1)(c) is a leaving asset. The choice is to have a loss denial pool of the leaving entity created at the leaving time, consisting of every leaving asset. (To avoid doubt, the choice can be made even if the leaving entity is not a company.)

    715-110(2)    
    A choice under this section has effect accordingly. The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the leaving entity.

    715-110(3)    
    Whenthe pool is created, its loss denial balance is equal to the * head company ' s * final RUNL at the leaving time.

    Note:

    If the head company makes this choice, the leaving entity can choose to cancel the loss denial pool by reducing reduced cost bases of assets in the pool: see section 715-185 .

     View history note

    Effect of assets in loss denial pool of head company becoming assets of leaving entity

    SECTION 715-120   What happens  

    View history reference

    715-120(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) at a particular time (the leaving time ), an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group; and


    (b) just before the leaving time, the * head company had a * loss denial pool; and


    (c) at the leaving time, at least one * CGT asset (a leaving asset ) that was in the pool just before that time becomes a CGT asset of the leaving entity because subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity.

    715-120(2)    
    Each leaving asset leaves the * loss denial pool at the leaving time.

    715-120(3)    
    If:


    (a) the leaving entity is a company and the leaving time is not a * changeover time for the leaving entity; or


    (b) the leaving entity is a trust;

    the * head company must make one of the choices for which sections 715-125 , 715-130 and 715-135 provide.

    For provisions about making one of these choices, see sections 715-175 to 715-185 .

     View history note

    SECTION 715-125  

    715-125   First choice: adjustable values of leaving assets reduced to nil  

    View history reference

    The first choice is to reduce the * adjustable value of each leaving asset to nil. The choice has effect accordingly, just before the leaving time. The * loss denial balance of the * head company's * loss denial pool is not reduced because of it.
    Note:

    The consequences of the choice are worked out under section 715-145 .

     View history note

    SECTION 715-130   Second choice: pool's loss denial balance applied in reducing adjustable values of leaving assets that are loss assets  

    View history reference

    715-130(1)    
    The second choice is to reduce under this section the * adjustable value of each leaving asset (a loss asset ) for which the * head company would have had a notional capital loss, or notional revenue loss, under section 165-115F at the time (the test time ) just before the leaving time if the test time had been a * changeover time for the head company. The choice has effect accordingly.

    Note:

    The consequences of the choice are worked out under this section and section 715-145 .


    715-130(2)    
    If:


    (a) 2 or more entities cease to be * subsidiary members of the * consolidated group; and


    (b) 2 or more of them make the second choice;

    the choices have effect in the same order as the entities cease being subsidiary members. If 2 or more of the entities ceased at the same time, their choices have effect in whichever order the * head company determines.


    715-130(3)    
    This section applies to each of the loss assets in order, according to their respective * adjustable values (apart from this section) at the test time: from largest to smallest. (If an asset has more than one such adjustable value, use the greater or greatest of them.)

    715-130(4)    
    At the test time, the * adjustable value of the loss asset is reduced to the asset's * market value at that time.

    715-130(5)    
    However, if the * loss denial balance (as reduced by any previous reductions under this section or section 715-160 ) of the * head company ' s * loss denial pool is less than the difference between:


    (a) the * adjustable value of the loss asset (apart from this section) at the test time; and


    (b) the asset's * market value at the test time;

    the adjustable value is instead reduced at the test time by that loss denial balance.


    715-130(6)    
    That * loss denial balance is reduced at the leaving time by the amount of the reduction under subsection (3) or (4). If 2 or more such reductions are made for the same asset (because it has 2 or more different characters), that loss denial balance is reduced by the greater or greatest of the reductions.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-135   Third choice: loss denial pool of leaving entity created  

    View history reference

    715-135(1)    
    The third choice can be made only if every asset that was in the * loss denial pool just before the leaving time is a leaving asset. The choice is to have a loss denial pool of the leaving entity created at the leaving time, consisting of every leaving asset. (To avoid doubt, the choice can be made even if the leaving entity is not a company.)

    715-135(2)    
    A choice under this section has effect accordingly. The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the leaving entity.

    715-135(3)    
    When the leaving entity's loss denial pool is created, its loss denial balance equals the loss denial balance of the head company's loss denial pool (as reduced by any previous reductions under section 715-130 or 715-160 ).

    Note:

    If the head company makes this choice, the leaving entity can choose to cancel the loss denial pool by reducing reduced cost bases of assets in the pool: see section 715-185 .


    715-135(4)    
    The head company's * loss denial pool ceases to exist when the leaving entity's loss denial pool is created.

     View history note

    Effect of first and second choices on various kinds of assets

    SECTION 715-145   Effect of choice on adjustable value of leaving asset  

    View history reference

    715-145(1)    
    This section has effect for the purposes of determining the consequences of a choice under any of sections 715-100 , 715-105 , 715-125 , 715-130 and 715-185 (the choice provisions ) for a leaving asset.

    715-145(2)    

    View history reference

    The asset ' s adjustable value at the time (the test time ) just before the leaving time is worked out under this table. (If the asset is covered by 2 or more items, there are consequences for it under the choice provisions and this section in respect of each of the items.)


    Adjustable value at the test time
    Item If: Its adjustable value is:
    1 the asset is a *CGT asset its *reduced cost base
    2 the asset is an item of *trading stock of the *head company at the test time, and became part of the *head company ' s trading stock in the income year (the test year ) in which the test time occurs its *cost
    3 the asset is an item of *trading stock of the *head company at the test time, item 2 does not apply, and at the end of the last income year before the test year, the item was *valued at its *cost its *cost
    4 the asset is an item of *trading stock of the *head company at the test time and neither of items 2 and 3 applies its *value as trading stock of the head company on hand at the start of the income year in which the test time occurs
    5 the asset is a *depreciating asset worked out under section 40-85
    6 the asset is a *revenue asset the total of the amounts that would be subtracted from the gross disposal proceeds in calculating any profit or loss on disposal of the asset by the head company

     View history note

    715-145(3)    
    If any of the choice provisions reduces at the test time the asset ' s * adjustable value, the thing identified for the asset under the table in subsection (2) of this section is reduced by the same amount.

    715-145(4)    
    Subsection (3) has effect for the purposes of working out under section 711-30 the * head company ' s * terminating value for the asset at the leaving time.

     View history note

    General provisions about loss denial pools

    SECTION 715-155  

    715-155   When asset leaves pool  

    View history reference

    A * CGT asset leaves a * loss denial pool:


    (a) just after a * realisation event happens to the asset, unless the realisation event is the ending of an income year (in the case of an item of * trading stock); or


    (b) as mentioned in subsection 715-120(2) (when it becomes an asset of the leaving entity).

     View history note

    SECTION 715-160   How loss denial balance is applied to losses realised on assets in pool  

    View history reference

    715-160(1)    
    If, apart from this section, a loss would be * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event that happens to a * CGT asset when it is in a * loss denial pool of an entity, the loss is reduced by the lesser of:


    (a) the amount of the loss; and


    (b) the pool's * loss denial balance (as reduced by any previous reductions under section 715-130 or this subsection);

    and the loss denial balance is reduced by the same amount.


    715-160(2)    
    Subsection (1) applies to * realisation events in the order in which they happen. If 2 or more happen at the same time, it applies to them in whichever order the entity determines.

    715-160(3)    
    Subsection (1) reduces a * loss denial balance after section 715-130 does, unless the * realisation event happens before the leaving time referred to in that section.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-165   When pool ceases to exist  

    View history reference

    715-165(1)    
    A * loss denial pool of a company ceases to exist when there is a * changeover time for the company.

    Note:

    The CGT assets in the pool then become subject to the application of Subdivision 165-CC (about change of ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss).


    715-165(2)    
    A * loss denial pool of any entity ceases to exist:


    (a) when there are no * CGT assets, and no * 170-D deferred losses, in the pool; or


    (b) just after the * loss denial balance becomes nil; or


    (c) when the entity becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group; or


    (d) as mentioned in subsection 715-135(4) .

     View history note

    Choices under this Subdivision

    SECTION 715-175   When choice must be made  

    View history reference

    715-175(1)    
    A choice under section 715-95 or 715-120 must be made within 6 months after the leaving time, or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner.

    715-175(2)    
    After that 6 months, or that further period, the head company is taken to have made the first choice under section 715-100 or 715-125 unless it is established that the head company made a different choice within that 6 months or further period.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-180   Head company to notify leaving entity of choice  

    View history reference

    715-180(1)    
    Within one month after making a choice under section 715-95 or 715-120 , or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner, the head company must give the leaving entity written notice of the choice.

    715-180(2)    
    If the choice is to have a * loss denial pool of the leaving entity created at the leaving time, the notice must also specify the pool's * loss denial balance at that time.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-185   Leaving entity may choose to cancel loss denial pool by reducing adjustable values of assets in the pool  

    View history reference

    715-185(1)    
    Within 6 months after a * loss denial pool is created under section 715-110 or 715-135 , or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner, the leaving entity may choose to be treated as if the * head company had instead made:


    (a) the first choice under section 715-100 or 715-125 ; or


    (b) the second choice under section 715-105 or 715-130 ;

    as specified by the leaving entity in its choice.


    715-185(2)    
    If the leaving entity makes a choice under subsection (1):


    (a) the * loss denial pool ceases to exist just after the leaving time; and


    (b) at the leaving time, the * adjustable value of each * CGT asset in the pool is reduced to what it would have been at that time if the head company had instead made the choice specified by the leaving entity in its choice.

    715-185(3)    
    The choice by the leaving entity does not affect how subsection 715-135(4) applies to the * head company.

    Note:

    This means that the head company's loss denial pool still ceases to exist.

     View history note

    Subdivision 715-B - How Subdivision 165-CD applies to consolidated groups and leaving entities  

    View history reference
     View history note

    How Subdivision 165-CD applies to consolidated groups

    SECTION 715-215   Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule  

    View history reference

    715-215(1)    
    Subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) and section 701-5 (Entry history rule) also have effect for all the purposes of Subdivision 165-CD (about reductions after alterations in ownership or control of loss company).

    Note:

    One consequence of this is that the head company is the only member of a consolidated group that can have an alteration time and be subject to reductions or other consequences under Subdivision 165-CD . The head company is treated as owning all CGT assets owned by group members, and as making relevant losses.

    Another consequence is for working out who has a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in a company that has an alteration time at which it is a loss company but not a member of a consolidated group. Interests in the loss company that are owned by subsidiary members of the group are treated as being owned by the head company.


    715-215(2)    
    This section is not intended to limit the effect that subsection 701-1(1) and section 701-5 have apart from this section.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-225   Working out adjusted unrealised loss using individual asset method  

    View history reference

    715-225(1)    
    For the purposes of:


    (a) using the * individual asset method to work out whether the * head company of a * consolidated group has an adjusted unrealised loss under section 165-115U at an * alteration time; or


    (b) working out under section 165-115W whether the head company of a consolidated group has a trading stock decrease at an alteration time;

    step 1 of the method statement in subsection 165-115U(1) , or step 2 of the method statement in subsection 165-115W(1) , does not apply to an amount that was counted in respect of a * CGT asset at an earlier time if:


    (c) at the time (the joining time ) when an entity became a * subsidiary member of the group, the asset became an asset of the head company because of subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule); and


    (d) the earlier time is an * alteration time that happened in respect of the entity before the joining time;

    unless the entity is a chosen transitional entity under Division 701 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

    Note:

    If the joining entity is a chosen transitional entity, section 701-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 prevents:

  • • section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity); and
  • • subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount);
  • of this Act from applying to the assets of the joining entity in relation to the joining time.

    If the joining entity is not a chosen transitional entity, it is assumed that the process of resetting the tax costs of its assets will bring their tax costs into closer alignment to their market values, and so remove the need to consider unrealised losses on those assets that existed before the joining time.

     View history note

    715-225(2)    
    This section has effect despite section 701-5 (Entry history rule).

     View history note

    SECTION 715-230  

    715-230   No reductions or other consequences for interests subject to loss cancellation under Subdivision 715-H  

    View history reference

    If section 715-610 reduces a loss that would otherwise be * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event that happens to an interest in, or a debt owed by, a company, sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB do not apply (and are taken never to have applied) to the interest or debt, in relation to an * alteration time that happened for the company during the ownership period referred to in subsection 715-610(2) .
    Note 1:

    Section 715-610 is about cancelling a loss on a realisation event for certain kinds of interests in a member of a consolidated group.

    Note 2:

    Sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB are about the consequences that an alteration time for a loss company has for relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests in the company.

     View history note

    How Subdivision 165-CD applies to leaving entity that is a company

    SECTION 715-240  

    715-240   Application of sections 715-245 to 715-260  

    View history reference

    Sections 715-245 to 715-260 affect how Subdivision 165-CD (about reductions after alterations in ownership or control of loss company) applies to a company (the leaving entity ) at and after the time (the leaving time ) when it ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group that came into existence at a particular time (the formation time ).
    Note:

    If a trust ceases to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group: see section 715-270 .

     View history note

    SECTION 715-245   If ownership or control of leaving entity has altered since head company's last alteration time or formation of group  

    View history reference

    715-245(1)    
    This section applies if the leaving time would be an * alteration time for the leaving entity if:


    (a) the reference time under subsection 165-115L(2) or 165-115M(2) were:


    (i) if at least one alteration time has occurred in relation to the * head company of the * consolidated group since the formation time and before the leaving time - the time just after the most recent such alteration time; or

    (ii) otherwise - the formation time; and


    (b) the additional assumptions in section 715-290 were made.

    715-245(2)    
    The leaving time is an alteration time for the leaving entity.

    Note:

    One consequence of this is that the reference time for working out the leaving entity's next alteration time is the time just after the leaving time.


    715-245(3)    
    The leaving entity is a loss company at that * alteration time if, and only if, it has an * adjusted unrealised loss at that time. If so, that adjusted unrealised loss is the leaving entity's overall loss at that time.

    Note 1:

    Subsection (4) affects how the leaving entity works out its adjusted unrealised loss at the leaving time in some cases.

    Note 2:

    If the leaving entity is a loss company at the leaving time, section 715-255 provides for the consequences.


    715-245(4)    
    If the leaving entity uses the * individual asset method of working out its * adjusted unrealised loss at that * alteration time, then for the purposes of:


    (a) step 1 of the method statement in subsection 165-115U(1) ; and


    (b) the method statement in subsection 165-115W(1) ;

    the leaving entity is taken to have had no earlier alteration time.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-250   If head company has had an alteration time but ownership and control of leaving entity have not altered since  

    View history reference

    715-250(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) at least one * alteration time has occurred in relation to the * head company of the * consolidated group since the formation time and before the leaving time; and


    (b) the leaving time is not an * alteration time for the leaving entity under subsection 715-245(2) .

    715-250(2)    
    The leaving time is an alteration time for the leaving entity.

    715-250(3)    
    However, for the purposes of determining when the leaving entity's next * alteration time happens, the reference time under subsection 165-115L(2) or 165-115M(2) is the time just after the most recent alteration time for the * head company before the leaving time.

    715-250(4)    
    The leaving entity is a loss company at the leaving time if, and only if, the * head company would have had an * adjusted unrealised loss at the most recent * alteration time (the head company alteration time ) for the head company before the leaving time if that adjusted unrealised loss (if any) were worked out on the basis that:


    (a) the head company chooses whether the * individual asset method or the * global method is used; and


    (b) a * CGT asset is taken into account only if:


    (i) the head company owned it at the head company alteration time; and

    (ii) it becomes a CGT asset of the leaving entity at the leaving time because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity; and


    (c) if the individual asset method is used, then for the purposes of:


    (i) step 1 of the method statement in subsection 165-115U(1) ; and

    (ii) the method statement in subsection 165-115W(1) ;
    the head company had no earlier alteration time.

    715-250(5)    
    If the leaving entity is a * loss company at the leaving time, its overall loss at that time is the * adjusted unrealised loss worked out under subsection (4).

     View history note

    SECTION 715-255   Consequences if leaving entity is a loss company at the leaving time  

    View history reference

    715-255(1)    
    If:


    (a) section 715-245 or 715-250 applies; and


    (b) the leaving entity is a * loss company at the leaving time; and


    (ba) the *head company has a relevant equity interest under section 165-115X in the leaving entity at the leaving time;

    View history reference

    the head company must choose whether subsection (2) or (3) of this section has effect for the purposes of applying, to each * membership interest in the leaving entity, in relation to the time just before the leaving time, whichever of these provisions is appropriate:


    (c) subsection 701-55(3) (about trading stock);


    (d) subsection 701-55(5) , but only so far as it relates to working out the * reduced cost base of a * membership interest that was * acquired on or after 20 September 1985;


    (e) subsection 701-55(6) (about revenue assets).

    Note:

    Section 701-55 is about setting the tax cost of an asset.

     View history note

    715-255(1A)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(ba), in determining whether the *head company has the relevant equity interest, disregard the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) in applying subsections 165-115X(2C) and 165-115X(4) .
     View history note

    715-255(2)    
    If the * head company chooses this subsection, the interest ' s * tax cost setting amount (apart from this section) just before the leaving time is reduced to nil.

    715-255(3)    
    If the * head company chooses this subsection, the interest ' s * tax cost setting amount (apart from this section) just before the leaving time is reduced by the adjustment amount under section 165-115ZB , which is calculated on the basis that:


    (a) just before the leaving time, all the * membership interests in the leaving entity constituted a single relevant equity interest under section 165-115X that the head company had in the leaving entity; and


    (b) the adjustment amount is worked out and applied in accordance with subsection 165-115ZB(6) , but disregarding the paragraphs of that subsection except paragraphs 165-115ZB(6)(a) and (d).

    715-255(4)    
    The * head company ' s choice must be made within 6 months after the leaving time, or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner.

    715-255(5)    
    After that 6 months, or that further period, the head company is taken to have chosen subsection (2) unless it is established that the head company made a different choice within that 6 months or further period.

    Non-membership equity interests

    715-255(6)    

    View history reference

    Subsection 711-15(2) (which treats *non-membership equity interests as *membership interests) also applies for the purposes of this section, on the basis that the *consolidated group referred to in section 715-240 is the old group referred to in that subsection.
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 715-260   If neither of sections 715-245 and 715-250 applies  

    View history reference

    715-260(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) no * alteration time has occurred in relation to the * head company of the * consolidated group since the formation time and before the leaving time; and


    (b) the leaving time is not an * alteration time for the leaving entity under subsection 715-245(2) .

    715-260(2)    
    The leaving entity's first * alteration time after the leaving time is determined:


    (a) on the basis that the reference time under subsection 165-115L(2) or 165-115M(2) is the time just after the formation time; and


    (b) making the additional assumptions in section 715-290 .

    715-260(3)    
    If the leaving entity uses the * individual asset method of working out its * adjusted unrealised loss at that first * alteration time, then for the purposes of:


    (a) step 1 of the method statement in subsection 165-115U(1) ; and


    (b) the method statement in subsection 165-115W(1) ;

    the leaving entity is taken to have had no earlier alteration time.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-265   Head company does not have relevant equity or debt interest in a loss company if widely held top company does not have such an interest  

    View history reference

    715-265(1)    
    For the purposes of Subdivision 165-CD , treat the *head company of a *consolidated group as not having a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at a particular time if:


    (a) the head company is an *eligible tier 1 company of a *top company at that time; and


    (b) the top company is a *widely held company at that time; and


    (c) because of subsections 165-115X(2A), (2B) and (2C) , the top company does not have a relevant equity interest under section 165-115X in the loss company at that time.

    715-265(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), disregard the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) in determining whether subsection 165-115X(2C) has the effect that the *top company has the relevant equity interest mentioned in that paragraph.

    715-265(3)    
    For the purposes of Subdivision 165-CD , treat the *head company of a *consolidated group as not having a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time if:


    (a) the head company is an *eligible tier-1 company of a *top company at that time; and


    (b) the top company is a *widely held company at that time; and


    (c) because of subsections 165-115Y(3A), (3B) and (3C) , the top company does not have a relevant debt interest under section 165-115Y in the loss company at that time.

     View history note

    How Subdivision 165-CD applies to leaving entity that is a trust

    SECTION 715-270   Subdivision 165-CD applies  

    View history reference

    715-270(1)    
    At and after the time (the leaving time ) when a trust ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, Subdivision 165-CD (about reductions after alterations in ownership or control of loss company) applies to the trust on the basis set out in this section.

    715-270(2)    
    The trust is taken to be a company.

    715-270(3)    
    The leaving time is the only alteration time in respect of the trust.

    715-270(4)    
    The trust is a loss company at that time if, and only if, it has an * adjusted unrealised loss at that time. If so, that adjusted unrealised loss is its overall loss at that time.

    715-270(5)    

    View history reference

    If the trust is a * loss company at the leaving time and the * head company has a relevant equity interest under section 165-115X in the leaving entity at the leaving time, the head company must choose whether subsection (6) or (7) of this section has effect for the purposes of applying, to each * membership interest in the trust, in relation to the time just before the leaving time, whichever of these provisions is appropriate:


    (a) subsection 701-55(3) (about trading stock);

    View history reference


    (b) subsection 701-55(5) , but only so far as it relates to working out the * reduced cost base of a * membership interest that was * acquired on or after 20 September 1985;

    View history reference


    (c) subsection 701-55(6) (about revenue assets).

    View history reference
    Note:

    Section 701-55 is about setting the tax cost of an asset.

     View history note

    715-270(5A)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of subsection (5), in determining whether the *head company has the relevant equity interest, disregard the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) in applying subsections 165-115X(2C) and 165-115X(4) .
     View history note

    715-270(6)    
    If the * head company chooses this subsection, the interest ' s * tax cost setting amount (apart from this section) just before the leaving time is reduced to nil.

    715-270(7)    
    If the * head company chooses this subsection, the interest ' s * tax cost setting amount (apart from this section) just before the leaving time is reduced by the adjustment amount under section 165-115ZB , which is calculated on the basis that:


    (a) just before the leaving time:


    (i) all the * membership interests in the leaving entity constituted a single relevant equity interest under section 165-115X that the * head company had in the leaving entity; and

    (ii) each of those interests was an equity under section 165-115X that the * head company had in the leaving entity; and


    (b) the adjustment amount is worked out and applied in accordance with subsection 165-115ZB(6) , but disregarding the paragraphs of that subsection except paragraphs 165-115ZB(6)(a) and (d).

    715-270(8)    
    The * head company ' s choice must be made within 6 months after the leaving time, or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner.

    715-270(9)    
    After that 6 months, or that further period, the head company is taken to have chosen subsection (6) unless it is established that the head company made a different choice within that 6 months or further period.

    Non-membership equity interests

    715-270(10)    

    View history reference

    Subsection 711-15(2) (which treats *non-membership equity interests as *membership interests) also applies for the purposes of this section, on the basis that the *consolidated group is the old group referred to in that subsection.
     View history note


     View history note

    Subdivision 715-C - Common rules for the purposes of Subdivisions 715-A and 715-B  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 715-290  

    715-290   Additional assumptions to be made when using reference time  

    View history reference

    The additional assumptions to be made are that, throughout the period starting at the reference time and ending just before the leaving time:


    (a) the leaving entity was in existence; and


    (b) the * head company held and beneficially owned all the * membership interests in the leaving entity (instead of whoever actually did); and


    (c) those membership interests remained the same; and


    (d) the head company directly controlled the voting power in the leaving entity.

     View history note

    Subdivision 715-D - Treatment of company's deferred losses under Subdivision 170-D on joining a consolidated group  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Key terminology

    SECTION 715-310   What is a 170-D deferred loss , and when it revives  

    View history reference

    715-310(1)    
    A * capital loss, deduction, or partner's share of a deduction, that section 170-270 (about transactions within linked groups) requires to be disregarded is a 170-D deferred loss made:


    (a) by the company that paragraph 170-255(1)(a) refers to as the originating company; and


    (b) at the time of the event that paragraph refers to as the deferral event; and


    (c) on the * CGT asset * acquired by the other entity referred to in that paragraph.

    715-310(2)    
    The * 170-D deferred loss revives at the time when section 170-275 (as applying in relation to the deferral event) treats the originating company as having made a * capital loss, or having become entitled to a deduction, in respect of that asset.

     View history note

    Deferred loss on 165-CC tagged asset

    SECTION 715-355   Head company ' s own deferred losses at formation time  

    View history reference

    715-355(1)    
    This section applies if, at the time (the formation time ) when a * consolidated group comes into existence, the * head company has (otherwise than because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule)) a * 170-D deferred loss that:


    (a) it made on a * CGT asset that is a * 165-CC tagged asset of the head company because of paragraph 165-115A(1A)(b) (which covers CGT assets on which it has 170-D deferred losses); and


    (b) has not * revived.

    715-355(2)    
    If a * loss denial pool of the * head company is created under section 715-60 at the formation time, each * 170-D deferred loss of that kind that the head company has at that time is added to the loss denial pool at that time.

    715-355(3)    
    Otherwise, a loss denial pool of the * head company is created at the formation time if:


    (a) the formation time is not a * changeover time for the head company; and


    (b) the head company ' s * final RUNL just before the formation time (as reduced by any reductions under section 715-50 or 715-55 ) was greater than nil; and


    (c) the head company does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:


    (i) the period (the business continuity test period ) consisting of the head company ' s * trial year; and

    (ii) the time (the test time ) just before the * changeover time.
    View history reference
    Note:

    Paragraph (3)(b) has the effect that if the head company has 165-CC tagged assets that are affected by section 715-50 or 715-55 (because they are membership interests in, or accounting liabilities owed by, another group member), those sections are applied before this section.

     View history note

    715-355(4)    
    When it is created because of subsection (3), the pool consists of each * 170-D deferred loss covered by subsection (2), and its loss denial balance is equal to the * final RUNL referred to in paragraph (3)(b).

    Note:

    The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the head company, for example, one created at the formation time under section 715-360 .

     View history note

    SECTION 715-360   Deferred losses brought in by subsidiary member  

    View history reference

    715-360(1)    
    This section applies if, just before the time (the membership time ) when a company (the deferred loss company ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, it had a * 170-D deferred loss that:


    (a) it made on a * CGT asset that is a * 165-CC tagged asset of the company at the membership time because of paragraph 165-115A(1A)(b) (which covers CGT assets on which it has 170-D deferred losses); and


    (b) as at the membership time has not * revived.

    715-360(2)    
    If a * loss denial pool of the * head company is created under subsection 715-70(2) because of the deferred loss company becoming a * subsidiary member of the group, each * 170-D deferred loss of that kind that the deferred loss company had just before the membership time is added to the loss denial pool at that time.

    715-360(3)    
    Otherwise, a loss denial pool of the * head company is created at the membership time if:


    (a) the membership time is not a * changeover time for the head company; and


    (b) the deferred loss company ' s * final RUNL just before the membership time (as reduced by any reductions under section 715-50 or 715-55 ) was greater than nil; and


    (c) the deferred loss company does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:


    (i) the period (the business continuity test period ) consisting of the deferred loss company ' s * trial year; and

    (ii) the time (the test time ) just before the * changeover time.
    View history reference
    Note 1:

    The 170-D deferred losses become those of the head company at the formation time because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule).

    Note 2:

    Paragraph (3)(b) has the effect that if the deferred loss company has other 165-CC tagged assets affected by section 715-50 or 715-55 (because the membership time is when the group comes into existence, and the other 165-CC tagged assets are membership interests in, or accounting liabilities owed by, another group member), those sections are applied before this section.

     View history note

    715-360(4)    
    When it is created because of subsection (3), the pool consists of each 170-D deferred loss covered by subsection (2), and its loss denial balance is equal to the * final RUNL referred to in paragraph (3)(b).

    Note:

    The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the head company, for example, one created under this section because another entity becomes a subsidiary member of the group at the membership time.


     View history note

    SECTION 715-365   How loss denial balance is applied when 170-D deferred loss revives  

    View history reference

    715-365(1)    
    If a * 170-D deferred loss on a * CGT asset is in a * loss denial pool of an entity when the loss * revives, the * capital loss or deduction that section 170-275 would, apart from this section, treat the entity as having made or become entitled to at that time in respect of the asset is reduced by the lesser of:


    (a) the amount of the capital loss or deduction; and


    (b) the pool's * loss denial balance (as reduced by any previous reductions under section 715-130 , subsection 715-160(1) or this subsection);

    and the loss denial balance is reduced by the same amount.


    715-365(2)    
    Subsection (1) applies to * 170-D deferred losses in the order in which they * revive. If 2 or more revive at the same time, it applies to them in whichever order the entity determines.

    715-365(3)    
    Subsection (1) reduces a * loss denial balance before section 715-130 does, unless the * realisation event happens after the leaving time referred to in that section.

     View history note

    Subdivision 715-E - Interactions with Division 775 (Foreign currency gains and losses)  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 715-370   Cost setting - reference time for determining currency exchange rate effect  

    View history reference

    715-370(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) taking into account the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the *head company of the group held an asset at the joining time because the joining entity became a subsidiary member of the group; and


    (c) the asset is a reset cost base asset at the joining time (within the meaning of section 705-35 ); and


    (d) in working out the asset's *tax cost setting amount, the currency exchange rate of a particular *foreign currency is taken into account in determining the *market value of the asset.

    715-370(2)    
    For the purposes of Division 775 , determine the extent of any *currency exchange rate effect after the joining time in relation to the asset, by reference to the currency exchange rate for the *foreign currency at the joining time.

     View history note

    Subdivision 715-F - Interactions with Division 230 (financial arrangements)  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 715-375   Cost setting on joining - amount of liability that is Division 230 financial arrangement  

    View history reference

    715-375(1)    
    Subsection (2) applies if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) a thing (the accounting liability ) is, in accordance with *accounting standards, or statements of accounting concepts made by the Australian Accounting Standards Board, a liability of the joining entity at the joining time (disregarding subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)) that can or must be recognised in the entity ' s statement of financial position; and

    View history reference


    (c) the accounting liability is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement of the head company at the joining time (because of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)).

    View history reference
     View history note

    715-375(2)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of Division 230 and Schedule 1 to the Tax Laws Amendment (Taxation of Financial Arrangements) Act 2009 , treat the * head company of the group as starting to have the accounting liability at the joining time for receiving a payment equal to:


    (a) if the liability is or is part of a * Division 230 financial arrangement of the head company at the joining time (because of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)):


    (i) to which Subdivision 230-B (accruals method or realisation method) applies; or

    (ii) to which Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies;
    the amount of the liability, as determined in accordance with:

    (iii) the joining entity ' s * accounting principles for tax cost setting; or

    (iv) if the amount of the liability cannot be determined in accordance with the joining entity ' s accounting principles for tax cost setting - comparable standards for accounting made under a * foreign law; or


    (b) otherwise - the liability ' s * Division 230 starting value at the joining time.

     View history note

    715-375(3)    
    (Repealed by No 99 of 2012)

     View history note

    715-375(4)    
    (Repealed by No 99 of 2012)

     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 715-378   Cost setting on joining - head company ' s right to receive or obligation to provide payment  

    View history reference

    715-378(1)    
    This section applies in relation to an asset or a liability if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) the asset or liability becomes that of the head company of the group because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies at the joining time; and


    (c) in the case of an asset - subsection 701-55(5A) applies in relation to the asset at the joining time; and


    (d) in the case of a liability - subsection 715-375(2) applies in relation to the liability at the joining time.

    715-378(2)    
    In the case of an asset, for the purposes of section 230-60 , assume that the * head company of the group acquired the asset at the joining time (as mentioned in subsection 701-55(5A) ) in return for the head company starting to have an obligation to provide the payment mentioned in that subsection.

    715-378(3)    
    In the case of a liability, for the purposes of section 230-60 , assume that the * head company of the group started to have the liability at the joining time (as mentioned in subsection 715-375(2) ) in return for the head company starting to have a right to receive the payment mentioned in that subsection.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-379   Cost setting on leaving - amount of intragroup liability that is Division 230 financial arrangement  

    View history reference

    715-379(1)    
    Subsection (2) applies if:


    (a) an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) a thing (the accounting liability ) is, in accordance with *accounting standards, or statements of accounting concepts made by the Australian Accounting Standards Board:


    (i) a liability of the leaving entity at the leaving time that can or must be recognised in the entity ' s statement of financial position; or

    (ii) a liability of the *head company of the group at the leaving time that can or must be recognised in the head company ' s statement of financial position; and


    (c) because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the leaving entity at the leaving time:


    (i) if subparagraph (b)(i) applies - the accounting liability becomes a liability of the leaving entity, and an asset (the corresponding asset ) that consists of the liability becomes an asset of the head company; or

    (ii) if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies - the accounting liability becomes a liability of the head company, and an asset (the corresponding asset ) that consists of the liability becomes an asset of the leaving entity; and


    (d) the corresponding asset ' s *tax cost is set at the leaving time under:


    (i) if subparagraph (b)(i) applies - section 701-20 ; or

    (ii) if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies - section 701-45 ; and


    (e) the accounting liability is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

    715-379(2)    
    For the purposes of Division 230 of this Act and Schedule 1 to the Tax Laws Amendment (Taxation of Financial Arrangements) Act 2009 :


    (a) if subparagraph (1)(b)(i) applies - treat the leaving entity as starting to have the accounting liability at the leaving time for receiving a payment equal to the *tax cost setting amount of the corresponding asset; or


    (b) if subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) applies - treat the *head company as starting to have the accounting liability at the leaving time for receiving a payment equal to the tax cost setting amount of the corresponding asset.

    Note:

    The tax cost setting amount of the corresponding asset is determined under sections 701-60 and 701-60A .


     View history note

    SECTION 715-379A   Cost setting on leaving - head company ' s or leaving entity ' s right to receive or obligation to provide payment  

    View history reference

    715-379A(1)    
    This section applies in relation to an asset or a liability if:


    (a) an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the leaving entity at the leaving time, the asset or liability becomes the asset or liability of:


    (i) the leaving entity; or

    (ii) the *head company of the group; and


    (c) if subparagraph (b)(i) applies:


    (i) in the case of an asset - subsection 701-55(5A) applies in relation to the asset at the leaving time because of section 701-45 ; or

    (ii) in the case of a liability - subsection 715-379(2) applies in relation to the liability at the leaving time; and


    (d) if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies:


    (i) in the case of an asset - subsection 701-55(5A) applies in relation to the asset at the leaving time because of section 701-20 ; and

    (ii) in the case of a liability - subsection 715-379(2) applies in relation to the liability at the leaving time; and


    (e) the asset or liability is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

    715-379A(2)    
    If subparagraph (1)(b)(i) applies:


    (a) in the case of an asset - for the purposes of section 230-60 , assume that the leaving entity acquired the asset (as mentioned in subsection 701-55(5A) ) at the leaving time in return for the leaving entity starting to have an obligation to provide the payment mentioned in that subsection; and


    (b) in the case of a liability - for the purposes of section 230-60 , assume that the leaving entity started to have the liability at the leaving time in return for the leaving entity starting to have a right to receive the payment mentioned in subsection 715-379(2) .

    715-379A(3)    
    If subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) applies:


    (a)in the case of an asset - for the purposes of section 230-60 , assume that the head company acquired the asset (as mentioned in subsection 701-55(5A) ) at the leaving time in return for the head company starting to have an obligation to provide the payment mentioned in that subsection; and


    (b) in the case of a liability - for the purposes of section 230-60 , assume that the head company started to have the liability at the leaving time in return for the head company starting to have a right to receive the payment mentioned in subsection 715-379(2) .

     View history note

    SECTION 715-380   Exit history rule not to affect certain matters related to Division 230 financial arrangements  

    View history reference

    Spreading fees gain or loss

    715-380(1)    
    Subsection (2) applies if:


    (a) an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) but for the cessation of membership and section 701-40 (the exit history rule), the *head company of the group would spread a fees gain or loss mentioned in section 230-160 over a period that ended after the leaving time.

    715-380(2)    
    Despite section 701-40 (the exit history rule), the *head company of the *consolidated group continues to spread the fees gain or loss over that period, in accordance with section 230-160 .

    Assessable income and deductions under section 701-61

    715-380(3)    
    Subsection (4) applies if:


    (a) an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) but for the cessation of membership and section 701-40 (the exit history rule):


    (i) an amount would be included in the assessable income of the *head company of the group under section 701-61 for an income year ending after the leaving time; or

    (ii) the head company of the group would be entitled to a deduction under section 701-61 for an income year ending after the leaving time.

    715-380(4)    
    Despite section 701-40 (the exit history rule), the amount is included in the assessable income of the *head company for the income year, or the head company is entitled to the deduction for the income year.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-385   Exit history rule and elective methods applying to Division 230 financial arrangements  

    View history reference

    715-385(1)    
    Subsection (2) applies if:


    (a) an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) the *head company of the group has a *Division 230 financial arrangement at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) to be a part of the head company; and


    (c) after the leaving time, the leaving entity makes an election of a kind mentioned in section 230-220 (fair value method), 230-265 (foreign exchange retranslation method), 230-325 (hedging method) or 230-410 (reliance on financial reports method).

    715-385(2)    
    For the purposes of determining whether the election applies to the financial arrangement, disregard paragraphs 230-220(1)(d) , 230-265(1)(d) , 230-325(a) and 230-410(1)(b).

     View history note

    Subdivision 715-G - How value shifting rules apply to a consolidated group  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 715-410   Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule  

    View history reference

    715-410(1)    
    Subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) and section 701-5 (Entry history rule) also have effect for all the purposes of Part 3-95 (Value shifting).

    Note:

    One consequence of this for the operation of Division 727 (about indirect value shifting affecting interests in companies and trusts, and arising from non-arm ' s length dealings) is that economic benefits provided by or to a subsidiary member of a consolidated group are treated as provided by or to the head company of the group. As a result:

  • • the head company is the only group member that can be a losing entity or gaining entity for an indirect value shift; and
  • • economic benefits provided by one group member to another are treated as provided by the head company to itself, and so have no relevance to Division 727 .
  • Another consequence is that the head company is treated as owning all interests owned by group members in a losing entity or gaining entity that is not a group member.


    715-410(2)    
    This section is not intended to limit the effect that subsection 701-1(1) and section 701-5 have apart from this section.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-450  

    715-450   No reductions or other consequences for interests subject to loss cancellation under Subdivision 715-H  

    View history reference

    If section 715-610 reduces a loss that would otherwise be * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event that happens to an * equity or loan interest in an entity:


    (a) the loss is not subject to reduction under Division 723 (Direct value shifting by creating right over non-depreciating asset) or 727 (Indirect value shifting); and


    (b) the interest ' s * adjustable value is not, and is taken never to have been, reduced under Division 725 because of a * direct value shift during the ownership period referred to in subsection 715-610(2) ; and


    (c) the interest ' s * adjustable value is not, and is taken never to have been, reduced under Division 727 because of an * indirect value shift during that period.

    Note:

    Section 715-610 is about cancelling a loss on a realisation event for certain kinds of interests in a member of a consolidated group.

     View history note

    Subdivision 715-H - Cancelling loss on realisation event for direct or indirect interest in a member of a consolidated group  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 715-610   Cancellation of loss  

    View history reference

    715-610(1)    
    This section reduces to nil a loss that would otherwise be * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event that happens to an * equity or loan interest (the realised interest ) in an entity (the first entity ) when it is owned by another entity (the owner ), if the conditions in subsections (2) and (4) are met.

    715-610(2)    
    The first condition is that, at some time during the period (the ownership period ) when the owner owned the realised interest:


    (a) the first entity was a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, and the owner was not a * member of the group; or


    (b) the realised interest was an * external indirect equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a consolidated group; or


    (c) the realised interest was an * equity or loan interest in an entity that, at that time:


    (i) owned an equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

    (ii) was not a member of the group; or


    (d) the realised interest was an * equity or loan interest in an entity that owned at that time an external indirect equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a consolidated group; or

    View history reference


    (e) all of these conditions are satisfied at that time:


    (i) the realised interest was an equity or loan interest, an *indirect equity or loan interest or an external indirect equity or loan interest, in the *head company of a consolidated group;

    (ii) the owner was not a member of the group;

    (iii) the head company was an *eligible tier 1 company of a *top company.
    View history reference
     View history note

    715-610(3)    

    View history reference

    An * equity or loan interest in an entity (the test entity ) is an external indirect equity or loan interest in a member of a * consolidated group if, and only if, neither the owner of the interest nor the test entity is a member of the group and:


    (a) the test entity owns an equity or loan interest in the member; or


    (b) the test entity owns an equity or loan interest that is an external indirect equity or loan interest in the member because of one or more other applications of this subsection.

     View history note

    715-610(4)    
    The second condition is that, at the same or a different time during the ownership period:


    (a) the owner was, or * controlled (for value shifting purposes), the * head company of a * consolidated group because of which the first condition is satisfied; or


    (b) the owner was an * associate of an entity that, at the same or a different time during the ownership period, was, or controlled (for value shifting purposes), the head company of such a consolidated group.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-615   Exception for interests in entity leaving consolidated group  

    View history reference

    Membership interests in leaving entity

    715-615(1)    

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) the realised interest is a * membership interest; and


    (b) during the ownership period the first entity ceased to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group;

    the first condition in section 715-610 cannot be satisfied, because of that consolidated group, at a time when the first entity was a member of the group, unless the interest needed to be disregarded under section 703-35 (about employee shares), or section 703-37 (about ADI restructures), in order for the first entity to be a member of the group at that time.

     View history note


    Liabilities owed by leaving entity

    715-615(2)    
    If the realised interest:


    (a) consists of a liability owed by the first entity to the owner; and


    (b) became an asset of the owner because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceased to apply to the first entity when it ceased to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group;

    the first condition in section 715-610 cannot be satisfied, because of that consolidated group, at a time when the first entity was a member of the group.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-620   Exception if loss attributable to certain matters  

    View history reference

    715-620(1)    
    The loss is not reduced if all of it can be shown to be attributable to things other than these:


    (a) something that would be reflected in what would, apart from this Part, be an overall loss under section 165-115R or 165-115S , of a * member of a * consolidated group (an excluded group ) because of which the first condition in section 715-610 is satisfied, at an * alteration time for that member;


    (b) an * indirect value shift for which, apart from this Part, a member of an excluded group would be the * losing entity or the * gaining entity.

    715-620(2)    
    If only part of the loss can be shown to be attributable to things other than the ones listed in subsection (1), the loss is reduced to the amount of that part.

     View history note

    Subdivision 715-J - Entry history rule and choices  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Head company's choice overriding entry history rule

    SECTION 715-660   Head company ' s choice overriding entry history rule  

    View history reference

    Application

    715-660(1)    

    View history reference

    This section has effect if an entity becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ) and either:


    (a) the question whether the entity had made a choice (however described) under a provision (the choice provision ) listed in the table was relevant to working out the entity ' s liability (if any) for income tax, or the entity ' s loss (if any) of a particular * sort, calculated by reference to an income year starting before the joining time; or


    (b) before the joining time, the entity made a choice that:


    (i) is described in paragraph (a); and

    (ii) would, if the entity had not become a subsidiary member of a consolidated group, have started to have effect for working out the entity ' s liability (if any) for income tax, or the entity ' s loss (if any) of a particular * sort, calculated by reference to the first income year starting after the joining time.


    List
    Item Provision Subject of provision
    1 A provision of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for an irrevocable declaration, election, choice or selection Attribution of income in respect of controlled foreign companies
    2 A provision of Subdivision 420-D that provides for a choice Valuing *registered emissions units
    3 Item 1 of the table in subsection 960-60(1) Choosing to use an *applicable functional currency
    3A section 230-210 , 230-255 , 230-315 or 230-395 Choice about treatment of gains and losses from *Division 230 financial arrangement
    4 A provision that: Choice about a matter described in the regulations
      (a) provides for a choice (however described); and  
      (b) is a provision of regulations made for the purposes of this Act, other than this item; and  
      (c) is prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this item  

    Note:

    Declarations, elections and selections made under the choice provision by the entity are all examples of choices under that provision (even though the provision does not call them choices), because the entity has chosen to make them.

     View history note


    Objects

    715-660(2)    
    The main objects of this section are:


    (a) to override section 701-5 (Entry history rule) in relation to a choice (however described) by the entity under the choice provision or the absence of such a choice; and


    (b) to extend, in some cases, the time for the * head company of the * consolidated group to make a choice (however described) under the choice provision after the joining time; and


    (c) to modify, in some cases, the time at which such a choice by the head company starts to have effect.

    Overriding the entry history rule

    715-660(3)    
    For the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule), ignore a choice (however described) made by the entity under the choice provision or the absence of such a choice.

    Extension of time for head company to make choice

    715-660(4)    
    If:


    (a) because of:


    (i) the fact that the entity became a * subsidiary member of the * consolidated group; and

    (ii) section 701-1 (Single entity rule);
    the question whether the * head company of the group has made a choice (however described) under the choice provision becomes relevant for the head company core purposes set out in that section; and


    (b) there is a limit (outside this section) on the period within which the head company may make such a choice;

    the head company has until the later of these times to make such a choice:


    (c) the last time the head company may make the choice (apart from this subsection);


    (d) the end of 90 days after the Commissioner is given notice under Division 703 that the entity has become a * member of the group or, if the Commissioner allows a later time for the purposes of this paragraph, that later time.

    When head company ' s choice starts to have effect

    715-660(5)    
    If the * head company of the * consolidated group makes a choice (however described) under the choice provision as a result of becoming able to make the choice because the entity became a * subsidiary member of the group at the joining time, the choice starts to have effect:


    (a) at the joining time; or


    (b) if the choice relates (explicitly or implicitly) to one or more whole income years - for the income year in which the joining time occurs.

    Note:

    Subsection (5) has effect whether or not subsection (4) contributed to the head company becoming able to make the choice.



    Relationship with other provisions

    715-660(6)    
    Section 701-5 (Entry history rule) and the choice provision have effect subject to this section.

     View history note

    Choices head company can make ignoring entry history rule to override inconsistencies

    SECTION 715-665   Head company ' s choice to override inconsistency  

    View history reference

    Application

    715-665(1)    

    View history reference

    This section has effect if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) for each of the following entities, the question whether the entity had made a choice (however described) under a provision (the choice provision ) listed in the table was relevant to working out the entity ' s liability (if any) for income tax, or the entity ' s loss (if any) of a particular * sort, calculated by reference to an income year starting before the joining time:


    (i) the joining entity;

    (ii) another entity that was a * member of the group at the joining time; and


    (c) there was an inconsistency because, just before the joining time, such a choice had effect for one of the entities but not for the other.


    List
    Item Provision Subject of provision
    1 Section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 Reinsurance with non-residents
    1A section 230-210 , 230-255 , 230-315 or 230-395 Choice about treatment of gains and losses from *Division 230 financial arrangement
    2 Section 775-80 Choosing not to have sections 775-70 and 775-75 apply to deal with *forex realisation gains and *forex realisation losses
    3 A provision that: Choice about a matter described in the regulations
      (a) provides for a choice (however described); and  
      (b) is a provision of regulations made for the purposes of this Act, other than this item; and  
      (c) is prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this item  

    Note 1:

    The other entity mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) may have become a member of the group either before or at the joining time. That other entity may be either another subsidiary member of the group or the head company of the group.

    Note 2:

    An election by an entity under section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is an example of a choice under that provision (even though that section does not call the election a choice) because the entity has chosen to make the election.

     View history note


    Object

    715-665(2)    
    The main objects of this section are:


    (a) to override the inconsistency; and


    (b) to displace section 701-5 (Entry history rule), so far as it relates to the inconsistency; and


    (c) to allow the * head company of the * consolidated group to make a choice (however described) under the choice provision.

    Overriding the inconsistency

    715-665(3)    
    Neither of these things relating to an entity that becomes a * member of the * consolidated group at the joining time has effect for the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule):


    (a) a choice (however described) by the entity having effect under the choice provision before that time;


    (b) the absence of such a choice.

    Note:

    This affects all entities that become members of the consolidated group at the joining time, including the head company if the joining time is the time at which the group comes into existence.


    715-665(4)    
    However, if the choice provision is section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (Reinsurance with non-residents):


    (a) subsection (3) of this section does not apply in relation to reinsurance under contracts made before the joining time (but does apply in relation to reinsurance under contracts made at or after that time); and


    (b) that section applies for the head company core purposes in relation to reinsurance under a contract made before the joining time by an entity (the contracting party ) that became a * member of the * consolidated group at or before the joining time:


    (i) as if the * head company of the consolidated group had made an election under that section, if the contracting party had made such an election that was relevant to working out the party ' s liability (if any) for income tax, or the party ' s * tax loss (if any), for an income year in connection with the contract; or

    (ii) as if the head company had not made such an election, if the contracting party had not made such an election that was relevant to working out the party ' s liability (if any) for income tax, or the party ' s tax loss (if any), for an income year in connection with the contract.


    Choice replacing inconsistency

    715-665(5)    
    If:


    (a) the question whether the * head company of the * consolidated group has made a choice (however described) under the choice provision is relevant for the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule); and


    (b) there is a limit (outside this section) on the period within which the head company may make such a choice;

    the head company has until the later of these times to make such a choice:


    (c) the last time the head company may make the choice (apart from this subsection);


    (d) the end of 90 days after the Commissioner is given notice under Division 703 that the joining entity has become a * member of the group or, if the Commissioner allows a later time for the purposes of this paragraph, that later time.

    Note:

    If the joining time is when the consolidated group is formed, the Commissioner should be given notice under Division 703 that the joining entity has become a member of the group when the approved form of the choice to form the group is given to the Commissioner.



    When head company ' s choice starts to have effect

    715-665(6)    
    If the * head company of the * consolidated group makes a choice (however described) under the choice provision as a result of becoming able to make the choice because the joining entity became a * member of the group, the choice starts to have effect:


    (a) at the joining time; or


    (b) if the choice relates (explicitly or implicitly) to one or more whole income years - for the income year in which the joining time occurs.

    715-665(7)    
    However, if:


    (a) the * head company of the * consolidated group makes a choice as described in subsection (6); and


    (b) the choice is an election under section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (Reinsurance with non-residents);

    the election has effect only for the purposes of that section applying in relation to reinsurance under contracts made after the joining time and in an income year for which the election applies under that section.

    Note:

    Subsection (4) explains how section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to reinsurance under contracts made before the joining time.



    Relationship with other provisions

    715-665(8)    
    Section 701-5 (Entry history rule) and the choice provision have effect subject to this section.

     View history note

    Choices with ongoing effect

    SECTION 715-670   Ongoing effect of choices made by entities before joining group  

    View history reference

    715-670(1)    
    This section has effect if the question whether the * head company of a * consolidated group has made a choice (however described) under a provision listed in the table is relevant for the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) because of something happening in relation to a thing:


    (a) that is an asset, right, liability or obligation of the head company; and


    (b) that the head company started to have, at the time (the joining time ) an entity (the joining entity ) became a * subsidiary member of the group, because of that section and the fact that (ignoring that section) the entity had the thing at the joining time.


    List
    Item Provision Subject of provision
    1 Section 775-150 Choice to apply rules about disregarding certain *forex realisation gains and *forex realisation losses


    715-670(2)    
    The * head company is taken to have made such a choice if the joining entity had one in effect before the joining time.

    715-670(3)    
    The * head company is taken not to have made the choice if the joining entity did not have one in effect before the joining time.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-675   Head company adopting choice with ongoing effect  

    View history reference

    715-675(1)    
    This section has effect, despite section 715-670 , if:


    (a) an entity that becomes a * member of a * consolidated group had a choice (however described) in effect under a provision (the choice provision ) listed in that section before becoming a member of the group; and


    (b) the time at which the entity becomes a member of the group is the first time at which an entity that had a choice (however described) in effect under the choice provision before becoming a member of the group became a member of the group; and


    (c) the * head company of the group chooses in writing, before:


    (i) the end of 90 days after the Commissioner is given notice under Division 703 that the entity has become a member of the group; or

    (ii) a later time allowed by the Commissioner;
    to be treated as if the head company had made a choice under the choice provision.

    715-675(2)    
    The * head company is taken to have made a choice under the choice provision for these purposes:


    (a) the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule);


    (b) the purposes of the application of section 715-670 and paragraph (1)(a) in relation to another * consolidated group of which the company later becomes a * subsidiary member.

     View history note

    Subdivision 715-K - Exit history rule and choices  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule

    SECTION 715-700   Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule  

    View history reference

    Application

    715-700(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) an entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) the question whether the * head company of the group had made a choice (however described) under a provision (the choice provision ) listed in the table in subsection 715-660(1) was relevant to working out that company ' s liability (if any) for income tax, or the entity ' s loss (if any) of a particular * sort, calculated by reference to an income year starting before the leaving time.

    Note:

    Declarations, elections and selections made under the choice provision at the option of a company are all examples of choices under that provision (even though it does not call them choices) because the company has chosen to make them.



    Objects

    715-700(2)    
    The main objects of this section are:


    (a) to override section 701-40 (Exit history rule) and let the entity make a choice (however described) under the choice provision with effect after the leaving time; and


    (b) to extend, in some cases, the time for the entity to make such a choice after the leaving time; and


    (c) to modify, in some cases, the rules about when such a choice by the entity starts to have effect.

    Overriding the exit history rule

    715-700(3)    
    For the entity core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to income years ending after the leaving time, ignore a choice (however described) made by the * head company of the * consolidated group under the choice provision or the absence of such a choice.

    Fresh choice by the entity

    715-700(4)    
    The entity may make a choice (however described) under the provision if the question whether the entity has made such a choice is relevant to working out the entity ' s liability (if any) for income tax, or loss (if any) of a particular * sort, calculated by reference to an income year ending after the leaving time.

    Extension of time for fresh choice by the entity

    715-700(5)    
    If there is a time limit (apart from this subsection) on the entity making such a choice, the entity has until the later of these times to make the choice:


    (a) the last time it may make the choice under the provision (apart from this section);


    (b) the end of 90 days after the leaving time or, if the Commissioner allows a later time for the purposes of this paragraph, that later time.

    Start of effect of choice

    715-700(6)    
    If the entity makes a choice because of this section, the choice starts to have effect:


    (a) at the leaving time; or


    (b) if the choice relates (explicitly or implicitly) to one or more whole income years- for the income year in which the leaving time occurs.

    Relationship with other provisions

    715-700(7)    
    Section 701-40 (Exit history rule) and the choice provision have effect subject to this section.

     View history note

    Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule to overcome inconsistencies

    SECTION 715-705   Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule to overcome inconsistencies  

    View history reference

    Application

    715-705(1)    
    This section has effect if an entity ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ) and there is an inconsistency because either:


    (a) both of these conditions are met:


    (i) a choice (however described) under a provision (the choice provision ) listed in the table in subsection 715-665(1) by the entity had effect just before the entity became a * member of the group;

    (ii) there was not such a choice by the * head company of the group having effect just before the leaving time; or


    (b) both of these conditions are met:


    (i) there was not a choice (however described) under the choice provision by the entity having effect just before the entity became a member of the group;

    (ii) such a choice by the head company had effect just before the leaving time.
    Note:

    An election by the entity or head company under the choice provision is an example of a choice under that provision (even though the provision does not call the election a choice) because the entity or company has chosen to make the election.



    Object

    715-705(2)    
    The main objects of this section are:


    (a) to displace section 701-40 (Exit history rule), so far as it relates to the inconsistency; and


    (b) to allow the entity to make a choice (however described) under the choice provision with effect after the leaving time.

    Displacing the exit history rule

    715-705(3)    
    For the entity core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to income years ending after the leaving time, ignore a choice (however described) made by the * head company of the * consolidated group under the choice provision or the absence of such a choice.

    715-705(4)    
    However, if the choice provision is section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (Reinsurance with non-residents):


    (a) subsection (3) of this section does not apply in relation to reinsurance under contracts made before the leaving time (but does apply in relation to reinsurance under contracts made at or after that time); and


    (b) that section applies, for the entity core purposes relating to income years ending after the leaving time, in relation to reinsurance under a contract made before the leaving time:


    (i) as if the entity had made an election under that section, if the * head company of the * consolidated group made, or was treated as having made, such an election that was relevant to working out that company ' s liability (if any) for income tax, or that company ' s * tax loss (if any), for an income year in connection with the contract; or

    (ii) as if the entity had not made such an election, if the head company had not made, and was not treated as having made, such an election that was relevant to working out that company ' s liability (if any) for income tax, or that company ' s tax loss (if any), for an income year in connection with the contract.
    Note:

    In some cases, subsection 715-665(4) treats the head company of a consolidated group as having made an election under section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to reinsurance under contracts made before an entity becomes a member of the group.



    Fresh choice by the entity

    715-705(5)    
    The entity may make a choice (however described) under the choice provision if the question whether the entity has made such a choice is relevant to working out the entity ' s liability (if any) for income tax, or loss (if any) of a particular * sort, calculated by reference to an income year ending after the leaving time.

    Extension of time for fresh choice by the entity

    715-705(6)    
    If there is a time limit (apart from this subsection) on the entity making such a choice, the entity has until the later of these times to make the choice:


    (a) the last time it may make the choice under the choice provision (apart from this section);


    (b) the end of 90 days after the leaving time or, if the Commissioner allows a later time for the purposes of this paragraph, that later time.

    Start of effect of choice

    715-705(7)    
    If the entity makes a choice because of this section, the choice starts to have effect:


    (a) at the leaving time; or


    (b) if the choice relates (explicitly or implicitly) to one or more whole income years - for the income year in which the leaving time occurs.

    715-705(8)    
    However, if:


    (a) the entity makes a choice because of this section; and


    (b) the choice is an election under section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (Reinsurance with non-residents);

    the election has effect only for the purposes of that section applying in relation to reinsurance under contracts made at or after the leaving time and in an income year for which the election applies under that section.

    Note:

    Subsection (4) explains how section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to reinsurance under contracts made before the joining time.



    Relationship with other provisions

    715-705(9)    
    Section 701-40 (Exit history rule) and the choice provision have effect subject to this section.

     View history note

    Subdivision 715-U - Effect on conduit foreign income  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 715-875   Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule  

    View history reference

    715-875(1)    
    Subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) and section 701-5 (Entry history rule) also have effect for all the purposes of Subdivision 802-A (about conduit foreign income).

    715-875(2)    
    This section is not intended to limit the effect that subsection 701-1(1) and section 701-5 have apart from this section.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-880  

    715-880   No CFI for leaving entity  

    View history reference

    Despite section 701-40 (the exit history rule), an entity that ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time has no * conduit foreign income at that time.
     View history note

    Subdivision 715-V - Entity ceasing to be exempt from income tax on becoming subsidiary member of consolidated group  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 715-900  Transition time taken to be just before joining time  

    View history reference

    715-900(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) an entity becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) the entity ' s * ordinary income and * statutory income were not (to any extent) assessable income just before the joining time.

    715-900(2)    
    Division 57 in Schedule 2D to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 and Division 58 of this Act have effect as if the entity ' s * ordinary income or * statutory income had become to some extent assessable income just before the joining time.

    Note 1:

    Those Divisions deal with entities whose ordinary income and statutory income were previously exempt from income tax.

    Note 2:

    The operation of Division 58 just before the joining time can affect the basis on which the tax cost is set for a depreciating asset that becomes an asset of the head company of the consolidated group at the joining time because of section 701-1 (the single entity rule). That Division provides the basis for working out under Division 40 the asset ' s adjustable value. This is the entity ' s terminating value for the asset, which in turn can affect the tax cost setting amount for the asset under sections 705-40 , 705-45 and 705-47 .

     View history note

    Subdivision 715-W - Effect on arrangements where CGT roll-overs are obtained  

     View history note

    SECTION 715-910   Effect on restructures - original entity becomes a subsidiary member  

    715-910(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) as a result of an *arrangement to which section 124-784A applies, an original entity (within themeaning of that section) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group; and


    (b) section 715-920 does not apply.

    Note 1:

    Section 715-920 applies if the original entity was the head company of another consolidated group before the arrangement was completed.

    Note 2:

    Sections 124-784A and 124-784B apply to arrangements for restructures.


    715-910(2)    
    For the purposes of section 124-784B :


    (a) the completion time (within the meaning of that section) for the *arrangement is taken to be the time the original entity becomes a member of the group; and


    (b) disregard Division 701 (Core rules) in relation to the original entity becoming a member of the group.

    715-910(3)    
    The *head company of the group may choose for:


    (a) section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity); and


    (b) subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount); and

    View history reference


    (c) subsection 701-35(5) (setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount);

    View history reference

    not to apply to the original entity's assets in respect of the original entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the group.

    Note:

    This subsection does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 715-915  

    715-915   Effect on restructures - original entity is a head company  
    If:


    (a) section 124-784A applies in relation to an *arrangement; and


    (b) the original entity (within the meaning of that section) for the arrangement is the *head company of a *consolidated group just before the arrangement was completed; and


    (c) section 715-920 does not apply;

    then, for the purposes of section 124-784B , subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) and section 701-5 (the entry history rule) apply in respect of the group.

    Note 1:

    This section does not otherwise affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) or section 701-5 .

    Note 2:

    Sections 124-784A and 124-784B apply to arrangements for restructures.

     View history note

    SECTION 715-920   Effect on restructures - original entity is a head company that becomes a subsidiary member of another group  

    715-920(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) section 124-784A applies in relation to an *arrangement; and


    (b) the original entity (within the meaning of that section) for the arrangement is the *head company of a *consolidated group (the acquired group ) just before the arrangement was completed; and


    (c) as a result of the arrangement:


    (i) the original entity; and

    (ii) the *subsidiary members of the acquired group just before the arrangement was completed;
    become subsidiary members of another consolidated group.
    Note:

    Sections 124-784A and 124-784B apply to arrangements for restructures.


    715-920(2)    
    For the purposes of section 124-784B :


    (a) the original entity is taken to be the *head company of the acquired group at the completion time (within the meaning of that section) for the *arrangement; and


    (b) the operation of this Part for the head company core purposes (mentioned in subsection 701-1(2) ) in relation to:


    (i) the original entity; and

    (ii) the entities that were *subsidiary members of the acquired group just before the arrangement was completed;
    continue to have effect at the completion time for the arrangement; and


    (c) the completion time for the arrangement is taken to be the time the original entity becomes a member of the other group; and


    (d) disregard Division 701 (Core rules) in relation to the original entity becoming a member of the other group.

    Note:

    Paragraph (b) means that, for the purposes of section 124-784B , the subsidiary members of the acquired group are treated as part of the original entity.


    715-920(3)    
    The *head company of the other group may choose for:


    (a) section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity); and


    (b) subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount); and

    View history reference


    (c) subsection 701-35(5) (setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount);

    View history reference

    not to apply to the original entity's assets in respect of the original entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the other group.

    Note:

    This subsection does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 715-925  

    715-925   Effect on restructures - original entity ceases being a subsidiary member  
    If, as a result of an *arrangement to which section 124-784A applies, an original entity (within the meaning of that section):


    (a) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group after the completion time (within the meaning of that section) for the arrangement; and


    (b) does not become a member of another consolidated group;

    then, for the purposes of section 124-784B , the completion time for the arrangement is taken to happen at the time of the cessation.

    Note:

    Sections 124-784A and 124-784B apply to arrangements for restructures.

     View history note

    Division 716 - Miscellaneous special rules  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Subdivision 716-A - Assessable income and deductions spread over several membership or non-membership periods  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 716-1   What this Division is about  

    View history reference

    Some items of assessable income, and some deductions, are in effect spread over 2 or more income years. This Division apportions the assessable income or deduction for each of those income years among periods within the income year when an entity is, or is not, a subsidiary member of a consolidated group.

    This Division also apportions in a similar way some items of assessable income, and some deductions, for a single income year.

     View history note

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 716-15   Assessable income spread over 2 or more income years  

    View history reference

    716-15(1)    
    This section applies if, apart from this Part, a provision of this Act would spread an amount (the original amount ) over 2 or more income years (whether or not because of a choice) by including part of the original amount in the same entity ' s assessable income for each of those income years.

    Head company ' s assessable income

    716-15(2)    
    If:


    (a) for some but not all of an income year, an entity is a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group; and


    (b) a part of the original amount:


    (i) would have been included in the assessable income of the * head company of the group for that income year if the entity had been a subsidiary member of the group throughout that income year; but

    (ii) would have been included in the entity ' s assessable income for that income year if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any * consolidated group;

    the head company ' s assessable income for that income year includes a proportion of that part.

    Note 1:

    Examples of when paragraph (2)(b) could be satisfied are:

  • • the head company is the entity referred to in subsection (1), but its connection with the original amount passes to the entity when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group (see section 701-40 (Exit history rule));
  • • the entity is the entity referred to in subsection (1) but joins a consolidated group part way through the income year, so that its connection with the original amount passes to the head company of the group (see section 701-5 (Entry history rule)).
  • Note 2:

    If the entity is a subsidiary member of the group throughout the income year, the part of the original amount will be included in the head company ' s assessable income for the income year, either:

  • • because the head company is the entity referred to in subsection (1); or
  • • because of section 701-1 (Single entity rule); or
  • • because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule).

  • 716-15(3)    
    The proportion is worked out by multiplying that part of the original amount by:

  • • the number of days that are in both the income year and the * spreading period, and on which the entity was a * subsidiary member of the group;
  • divided by:

  • • the number of days that are in both the income year and the spreading period.


  • Entity ' s assessable income for a non-membership period

    716-15(4)    
    If:


    (a) for some but not all of an income year, an entity is a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group; and


    (b) a part of the original amount would have been included in the entity ' s assessable income for that income year if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any * consolidated group;

    the assessable income of the entity for a part of the income year that is a non-membership period for the purposes of section 701-30 includes a proportion of that part.

    Note 1:

    Section 701-30 is about working out an entity ' s tax position for a period when it is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group.

    Note 2:

    If throughout the income year the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group, this section does not affect the part of the original amount that is assessable income of the entity for the income year either:

  • • because the entity is the entity referred to in subsection (1); or
  • • because of section 701-40 (Exit history rule).

  • 716-15(5)    
    The proportion is worked out by multiplying that part of the original amount by:

  • • the number of days that are in both the non-membership period and the * spreading period;
  • divided by:

  • • the number of days that are in both the income year and the spreading period.


  • Spreading period

    716-15(6)    
    The spreading period for the original amount is the period by reference to which the respective parts of the original amount that, apart from this Part, would be included in an entity ' s assessable income for the 2 or more income years are worked out.

     View history note

    SECTION 716-25   Deductions spread over 2 or more income years  

    View history reference

    716-25(1)    
    This section applies if, apart from this Part, a provision of this Act would spread an amount (the original amount ) over 2 or more income years (whether or not because of a choice) by entitling the same entity to deduct part of the original amount for each of those income years.

    716-25(2)    
    However, this section does not apply if the deductions would be for the decline in value of a * depreciating asset.

    Note:

    Such deductions arise under Division 40 (Capital allowances) and Division 328 (Small business entities).

     View history note


    Head company's deduction

    716-25(3)    
    If for some but not all of an income year an entity is a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group, and:


    (a) the * head company of the group could have deducted for that income year a part of the original amount if the entity had been a subsidiary member of the group throughout that income year; but


    (b) the entity could have deducted that part for that income year if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any * consolidated group;

    the head company can deduct for that income year a proportion of that part.

    Note 1:

    Examples of when paragraphs (3)(a) and (b) could be satisfied are set out in note 1 to subsection 716-15(2) .

    Note 2:

    If the entity is a subsidiary member of the group throughout the income year, the head company can deduct that part for the income year, either:

  • • because the head company is the entity referred to in subsection (1) of this section; or
  • • because of section 701-1 (Single entity rule); or
  • • because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule).

  • 716-25(4)    
    The proportion is worked out by multiplying that part of the original amount by:

  • • the number of days that are in both the income year and the * spreading period, and on which the entity was a * subsidiary member of the group;
  • divided by:

  • • the number of days that are in both the income year and the spreading period.


  • Entity's deduction for a non-membership period

    716-25(5)    
    If:


    (a) for some but not all of an income year, an entity is a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group; and


    (b) the entity could have deducted for that income year a part of the original amount if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any * consolidated group;

    the entity can deduct a proportion of that part for a part of the income year that is a non-membership period for the purposes of section 701-30 .

    Note 1:

    Section 701-30 is about working out an entity's tax position for a period when it is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group.

    Note 2:

    If throughout the income year the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group, this section does not affect the part of the original amount that the entity can deduct for the income year either:

  • • because the entity is the entity referred to in subsection (1); or
  • • because of section 701-40 (Exit history rule).

  • 716-25(6)    
    The proportion is worked out by multiplying that part of the original amount by:

  • • the number of days that are in both the non-membership period and the * spreading period;
  • divided by:

  • • the number of days that are in both the income year and the spreading period.


  • Spreading period

    716-25(7)    
    The spreading period for the original amount is the period by reference to which the respective parts of the original amount that, apart from this Part, an entity could deduct for the 2 or more income years are worked out.

    Note:

    For example, under section 82KZMD of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 an item of expenditure on something is spread over the period over which that thing is to be provided, which is called the eligible service period. Deductions for the item for a sequence of income years are worked out by reference to how much of that period falls within each of those income years.


     View history note

    SECTION 716-70   Capital expenditure that is fully deductible in one income year  

    View history reference

    716-70(1)    
    This section applies if, apart from this Part, an entity could deduct for a single income year the whole of an amount (the original amount ) of capital expenditure by the entity.

    716-70(2)    
    If for some but not all of an income year an entity is a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group or * MEC group, and:


    (a) the * head company of the group could have deducted the original amount for that income year if the entity had been a subsidiary member of the group throughout that income year; but


    (b) the entity could have deducted the original amount for that income year if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group;

    the head company can deduct for that income year a proportion of the original amount.

    Note 1:

    Examples of when paragraphs (2)(a) and (b) could be satisfied are set out in note 1 to subsection 716-15(2) .

    Note 2:

    If the entity is a subsidiary member of the group throughout the income year, the head company can deduct the original amount for the income year, either:

  • • because the head company is the entity referred to in subsection (1) of this section; or
  • • because of section 701-1 (Single entity rule); or
  • • because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule).

  • 716-70(3)    
    The proportion is worked out by multiplying the original amount by:

  • • the number of days that are in the * spreading period, and on which the entity was a * subsidiary member of the group;
  • divided by:

  • • the number of days that are in the spreading period.


  • Entity ' s deduction for a non-membership period

    716-70(4)    
    If:


    (a) for some but not all of an income year, an entity is a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group or * MEC group; and


    (b) the entity could have deducted the original amount for that income year if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group;

    the entity can deduct a proportion of the original amount for a part of the income year that is a non-membership period for the purposes of section 701-30 .

    Note 1:

    Section 701-30 is about working out an entity ' s tax position for a period when it is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group.

    Note 2:

    If throughout the income year the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group, this section does not affect the entity ' s ability to deduct the original amount for the income year either:

  • • because the entity is the entity referred to in subsection (1); or
  • • because of section 701-40 (Exit history rule).

  • 716-70(5)    
    The proportion is worked out by multiplying the original amount by:

  • • the number of days that are in both the non-membership period and the * spreading period;
  • divided by:

  • • the number of days that are in the spreading period.


  • Spreading period

    716-70(6)    
    The spreading period for the original amount:


    (a) starts when, apart from this Part, an entity would become entitled to deduct the amount for an income year; and


    (b) ends at the end of the income year.

     View history note

    Assessable income and deductions arising from share of net income of a partnership or trust, or from share of partnership loss

    SECTION 716-75  

    716-75   Application  

    View history reference

    Sections 716-80 to 716-100 apply if, apart from this Part:


    (a) an amount would be included in an entity's assessable income for an income year under section 92 (about income and deductions of partner) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in respect of a partnership; or


    (b) an entity could deduct an amount for an income year under section 92 of that Act in respect of a partnership; or


    (c) an amount would be included in an entity's assessable income for an income year under section 97 (Beneficiary of a trust estate who is not under a legal disability) of that Act in respect of a trust; or


    (d) an amount would be included in an entity's assessable income for an income year under section 98A (Non-resident beneficiaries assessable in respect of certain income) of that Act in respect of a trust.

     View history note

    SECTION 716-80   Head company ' s assessable income and deductions  

    View history reference

    716-80(1)    
    If for some but not all of the income year the entity is a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group or * MEC group:


    (a) the assessable income for that income year of the head company of the group includes the entity ' s share (worked out under section 716-90 ) of each of these:


    (i) the total assessable income of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as it is reasonably attributable to a period, during the income year, throughout which the entity was a * subsidiary member of the group but the partnership or trust was not ;

    (ii) a proportion (worked under subsection (2) of this section) of the total assessable income of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as it is not reasonably attributable to a particular period within the income year; and


    (b) the head company of the group can deduct for that income year the entity ' s share (worked out under section 716-90 ) of each of these:


    (i) the total deductions of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as they are reasonably attributable to a period covered by subparagraph (a)(i) of this subsection;

    (ii) a proportion (worked under subsection (2) of this section) of the total deductions of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as they are not reasonably attributable to a particular period within the income year.
    Note 1:

    If the entity is a subsidiary member of the group throughout the income year, the amount referred to in section 716-75 will be included in the head company ' s assessable income, or the head company can deduct that amount, for the income year because of section 701-1 (Single entity rule).

    Note 2:

    While the entity, and the partnership or trust, are both subsidiary members of the group, section 701-1 (Single entity rule) attributes to the head company all assessable income and deductions giving rise to the amount referred to in section 716-75 .


    716-80(2)    
    The proportion is worked out by multiplying the amount concerned by:

  • • the number of days that are in the * spreading period, and on which the entity was a * subsidiary member of the group but the partnership or trust was not ;
  • divided by:

  • • the number of days that are in the spreading period.
  •  View history note

    SECTION 716-85   Entity ' s assessable income and deductions for a non-membership period  

    View history reference

    716-85(1)    
    The assessable income of the entity for a part of the income year that is a non-membership period for the purposes of section 701-30 includes the entity ' s share (worked out under section 716-90 ) of each of these:


    (a) the total assessable income of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as it is reasonably attributable to the non-membership period;


    (b) a proportion (worked under subsection (3) of this section) of the total assessable income of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as it is not reasonably attributable to a particular period within the income year.

    Note 1:

    Section 701-30 is about working out an entity ' s tax position for a period when it is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group.

    Note 2:

    If throughout the income year the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group, this section does not affect the amount referred to in section 716-75 being assessable income of the entity for the income year.


    716-85(2)    
    For a part of the income year that is a non-membership period for the purposes of section 701-30 , the entity can deduct the entity ' s share (worked out under section 716-90 ) of each of these:


    (a) the total deductions of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as they are reasonably attributable to the non-membership period;


    (b) a proportion (worked under subsection (3) of this section) of the total deductions of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as they are not reasonably attributable to a particular period within the income year.

    Note:

    If throughout the income year the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group, this section does not affect the entity ' s ability to deduct for the income year the amount referred to in section 716-75 .


    716-85(3)    
    The proportion is worked out by multiplying the amount concerned by:

  • • the number of days that are in both the non-membership period and the * spreading period;
  • divided by:

  • • the number of days that are in the spreading period.
  •  View history note

    SECTION 716-90   Entity's share of assessable income or deductions of partnership or trust  

    View history reference

    716-90(1)    
    If paragraph 716-75(a) or (b) applies, the entity's share is worked out by dividing:

  • • the entity's individual interest as a partner in the net income of the partnership or in the partnership loss;
  • by:

  • • the amount of that net income or partnership loss;
  • and expressing the result as a percentage.


    716-90(2)    
    If paragraph 716-75(c) or (d) applies, the entity's share is worked out by dividing:

  • • the share of the income of the trust to which the entity is presently entitled;
  • by:

  • • the amount of that income;
  • and expressing the result as a percentage.

     View history note

    SECTION 716-95   Special rule if not all partnership or trust's assessable income or deductions taken into account in working out amount  

    View history reference

    716-95(1)    
    To the extent that the assessable income of the partnership or trust for the income year was not taken into account in working out the amount referred to in section 716-75 , it is disregarded in applying paragraph 716-80(1)(a) or subsection 716-85(1) .

    Note:

    For example, if a trust's net income for an income year must be worked out under section 268-45 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , the trust's assessable income attributed to a period (in the income year) for which it has a notional loss under section 268-30 of that Act is not taken into account.


    716-95(2)    
    To the extent that the deductions of the partnership or trust for the income year were not taken into account in working out the amount referred to in section 716-75 , they are disregarded in applying paragraph 716-80(1)(b) or subsection 716-85(2) .

    Note:

    For example, in the case described in the note to subsection (1) of this section, the trust's deductions attributed to that period are not taken into account in working out the trust's net income for the income year.

     View history note

    SECTION 716-100  

    716-100   Spreading period  

    View history reference

    The spreading period for the amount referred to in section 716-75 is made up of each period:


    (a) that is all or part of the income year; and


    (b) throughout which the entity is a partner in the partnership or a beneficiary of the trust, as appropriate.

     View history note

    Subdivision 716-E - Tax cost setting for exploration and prospecting assets  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 716-300   Prime cost method of working out decline in value  

    View history reference

    716-300(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) because of subsection 40-80(1) , the joining entity could (or did) deduct for a period before the joining time the * cost of a * depreciating asset that became an asset of the * head company of the group at the joining time because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) applied to the joining entity; and

    View history reference


    (c) the joining entity could not deduct an amount under Subdivision 40-B (except because of subsection 40-80(1) ) for the income year that includes the joining time for that cost.

    View history reference
    Note:

    Subdivision 40-B allows deductions for the decline in value of depreciating assets. Subsection 40-80(1) , which is in that Subdivision, provides that the decline in value of certain assets used for exploration and prospecting equals their cost.

     View history note

    716-300(2)    
    Subsection 701-55(2) has effect as if the * prime cost method for working out the decline in value of the * depreciating asset applied just before the joining time.

    Note:

    This may affect both the method of working out the decline in value of the asset and the asset ' s effective life.

     View history note

    Subdivision 716-G - Low-value and software development pools  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Assets in joining entity's low-value pool

    SECTION 716-330   Head company ' s deductions for decline in value of assets in joining entity ' s low-value pool  

    View history reference

    716-330(1)    
    This section modifies the operation of sections 40-430 , 40-435 , 40-440 , 40-445 , 701-10 and 701-60 and Division 705 for the head company core purposes mentioned in section 701-1 if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) there are one or more * depreciating assets (the previous pool assets ) that:


    (i) were allocated to the joining entity ' s low-value pool; and

    (ii) become assets of the * head company of the group at the joining time because section 701-1 applies to the joining entity; and


    (c) none of the previous pool assets was an asset to which Division 58 applied to affect the joining entity ' s deductions relating to the asset.

    Note 1:

    Sections 40-430 , 40-435 and 40-440 are relevant to allocating depreciating assets to a low-value pool and to working out the decline in value of assets allocated to a low-value pool. Section 40-445 affects the closing pool balance, and may give rise to assessable income, if a balancing adjustment event happens to such an asset.

    Note 2:

    Section 701-10 provides that, for each asset the joining entity has at the joining time, the asset ' s tax cost is set at the joining time at the asset ' s tax cost setting amount, which is defined by section 701-60 as the amount worked out under Division 705 .

    Note 3:

    Division 58 is about capital allowances for depreciating assets previously owned by an exempt entity.



    Objects

    716-330(2)    
    The main objects of this section are:


    (a) to clarify how sections 40-430 , 40-435 and 40-440 operate in relation to the previous pool assets; and


    (b) to reduce compliance costs by providing that the * tax cost is set for all the previous pool assets in one operation, rather than individually for each such asset.

    Time of allocation of assets to head company ' s low-value pool

    716-330(3)    
    Sections 40-430 , 40-435 , 40-440 and 40-445 operate as if the * head company of the * consolidated group allocated the previous pool assets to a low-value pool for the income year that includes the joining time. Section 701-5 has effect subject to this subsection.

    Note 1:

    Under section 40-435 , the head company must make a reasonable estimate of the taxable use percentage for each asset.

    Note 2:

    This subsection affects the percentages and amounts to be taken into account for working out under section 40-440 the decline in value of assets in the pool and the closing pool balance.



    Allocating other low-cost assets to head company ' s low-value pool

    716-330(4)    
    Subsection 40-430(1) operates as if the previous pool assets were * low-cost assets.

    Note:

    This has the effect that the head company must allocate to the low-value pool each low-cost asset it starts to hold in the income year that includes the joining time or a later income year, whether or not the head company starts to hold the asset because of section 701-1 .



    If joining time was in first day of joining entity ' s income year

    716-330(5)    
    If the joining time was in the first day of the joining entity ' s income year, section 40-440 operates as if:


    (a) all the previous pool assets were * low-value assets; and


    (b) the sum of the previous pool assets ' * opening adjustable values for the income year that includes the joining time equalled the * tax cost setting amount for the hypothetical asset worked out on the basis described in subsections (7), (8) and (9) of this section.

    If joining time was not in first day of joining entity ' s income year

    716-330(6)    
    If the joining time was not in the first day of the joining entity ' s income year, section 40-440 operates as if:


    (a) all the previous pool assets were * low-cost assets; and


    (b) the sum of the previous pool assets ' * costs equalled the total of:


    (i) the * tax cost setting amount for the hypothetical asset worked out on the basis described in subsections (7), (8) and (9) of this section; and

    (ii) the expenditure (if any) that was incurred after the joining time (but in the income year that includes that time) and included in the second element of the costs (ignoring this paragraph) of the previous pool assets.


    Tax cost is set for assets collectively not individually

    716-330(7)    
    Sections 701-10 and 701-60 and Division 705 operate as if all the previous pool assets formed a single * depreciating asset (the hypothetical asset ), and were not separate assets.

    Modified operation of Division 705 for hypothetical asset

    716-330(8)    
    Sections 705-40 and 705-57 operate as if the joining entity ' s * terminating value for the hypothetical asset were the amount worked out using the table:


    Modification of basis on which sections 705-40 and 705-57 operate
    If the joining time is: Sections 705-40 and 705-57 operate as if the joining entity ' s terminating value for the hypothetical asset were:
    1 In the first day of an income year of the joining entity The *closing pool balance for the joining entity ' s low-value pool for the previous income year
    2 In another day The *closing pool balance for the joining entity ' s low-value pool for the non-membership period described in section 701-30 that ends just before the joining time

    Note:

    Sections 705-40 and 705-57 are about reduction of an asset ' s tax cost setting amount to an amount that may be affected by the joining entity ' s terminating value for the asset.


    716-330(9)    
    (Repealed by No 56 of 2010)

     View history note

    Entity leaving group with asset allocated to head company's low-value pool

    SECTION 716-335   Entity leaving group with asset allocated to head company ' s low-value pool  

    View history reference

    716-335(1)    
    This section sets out rules affecting the * head company of a * consolidated group and an entity (the leaving entity ) that ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group at a time (the leaving time ) in an income year (the leaving year ), if:


    (a) a * depreciating asset becomes an asset of the leaving entity at the leaving time because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) ceases to apply to the leaving entity; and


    (b) the asset was in the head company ' s low-value pool.

    Note:

    Section 701-40 (Exit history rule) treats the asset as having been allocated to the leaving entity ' s low-value pool, with the taxable use percentage estimated by the head company, for the income year for which the head company allocated the asset to the head company ' s low-value pool.



    Objects

    716-335(2)    
    The main objects of this section are:


    (a) to ensure that the decline in value of assets in the * head company ' s low-value pool and the decline in value of assets in the leaving entity ' s low-value pool are worked out so that:


    (i) for the leaving year, the * depreciating asset is taken into account in working out the decline in value of assets in the head company ' s low-value pool only; and

    (ii) for later income years, the depreciating asset is taken into account in working out the decline in value of assets in the leaving entity ' s low-value pool only; and


    (b) to specify the * adjustable value of the depreciating asset just before and at the leaving time.

    Reduced decline in value for leaving entity for leaving year

    716-335(3)    
    The decline in value worked out for the leaving year under subsection 40-440(1) for assets in the leaving entity ' s low-value pool is reduced by such amount as is reasonable to prevent duplication of deductions for the leaving year in respect of the * depreciating asset by the * head company and the leaving entity.

    Reduced closing pool balance for head company ' s pool for leaving year

    716-335(4)    
    The * closing pool balance of the * head company ' s low-value pool for the leaving year is reduced by so much of the balance as reasonably relates to the * depreciating asset.

    Cost of head company ' s membership interests in leaving entity etc.

    716-335(5)    
    Sections 701-15 , 701-40 and 701-60 and Division 711 have effect as if the * adjustable value of the * depreciating asset for the * head company just before and at the leaving time were such amount as is reasonable, having regard to:


    (a) the reduction described in subsection (4) of this section; and


    (b) the taxable use percentage estimated for the depreciating asset by the head company under section 40-435 .

    Note 1:

    Section 701-15 provides that, for each membership interest the head company holds in the leaving entity, the interest ' s tax cost is set just before the leaving time at the interest ' s tax cost setting amount, which is defined by section 701-60 as the amount worked out under certain sections of Division 711 .

    Note 2:

    Division 711 sets the interest ' s tax cost setting amount by reference to the head company ' s terminating value of the asset, which is to be worked out under section 711-30 by reference to the adjustable value of the asset for the head company just before the leaving time.

    Note 3:

    Section 701-40 has the effect that the adjustable value of the asset for the leaving entity at the leaving time is the same as the adjustable value of the asset for the head company then.

     View history note

    Depreciating assets arising from expenditure in joining entity's software development pool

    SECTION 716-340   Depreciating assets arising from expenditure in joining entity ' s software development pool  

    View history reference

    716-340(1)    
    This section modifies the basis on which Subdivision 40-B and sections 40-455 , 701-10 , 701-55 and 701-60 and Division 705 operate if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) the joining entity had incurred before the joining time expenditure that it allocated to a software development pool; and


    (c) some or all of the expenditure is reasonably related to * in-house software that:


    (i) is a * depreciating asset; and

    (ii) became an asset of the * head company of the consolidated group at the joining time because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) applied to the joining entity.
    Note 1:

    Subdivision 40-B allows deductions for the decline in value of a depreciating asset, but only if expenditure on the asset has not been allocated to a software development pool. Section 40-455 provides for deduction of expenditure allocated to such a pool. Section 701-5 (Entry history rule) treats the head company as having incurred the expenditure that was allocated to the pool.

    Note 2:

    Section 701-10 provides that, for each asset the joining entity has at the joining time, the asset ' s tax cost is set at the joining time at the asset ' s tax cost setting amount, which is defined by section 701-60 as the amount worked out under Division 705 , which in turn depends on the adjustable value of the asset worked out under section 40-85 .

    Note 3:

    Section 701-55 affects matters relevant to working out the head company ' s deductions for the decline in value of depreciating assets that became assets of the head company at the joining time because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) applied to the joining entity.

    Note 4:

    This section operates whether or not the joining entity ' s deductions under section 40-455 for the period before the joining time for expenditure allocated to the pool total 100% of the expenditure allocated to the pool.



    Object

    716-340(2)    
    The main object of this section is to ensure that:


    (a) the * head company ' s deductions for the * in-house software:


    (i) are not worked out under section 40-455 on the basis of section 701-5 (Entry history rule) treating the expenditure relating to the software as being the head company ' s expenditure; and

    (ii) are instead worked out under Subdivision 40-B , using the * prime cost method with the * effective life given by subsection 40-95(7) and taking account of the * tax cost setting amount for the software; and


    (b) the tax cost setting amount is worked out in a way that takes account of deductions for the period before the joining time for the expenditure reasonably related to the in-house software.

    Joining entity taken not to have incurred certain expenditure

    716-340(3)    
    Subdivision 40-B and section 40-455 operate for the head company core purposes mentioned in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) as if the expenditure reasonably related to the * in-house software had not been incurred by the joining entity.

    Note 1:

    This has the effects that:

  • (a) subsection 40-50(2) does not apply because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule) to deny the head company deductions under Subdivision 40-B for the decline in value of the software; and
  • (b) the head company cannot deduct the expenditure under section 40-455 as it operates because of section 701-5 .
  • Note 2:

    This does not prevent the head company from deducting under section 40-455 expenditure that is not reasonably related to the in-house software and that the head company is treated by section 701-5 as having incurred and allocated to a software development pool because the joining entity did.



    Prime cost method of working out decline in value of software

    716-340(4)    
    Subsection 701-55(2) operates as if the * prime cost method of working out the decline in value of the * in-house software applied just before the joining time.

    Note:

    This affects the method of working out the decline in value of the software for the head company of the consolidated group.



    Effective life of software

    716-340(5)    
    Subdivision 40-B operates as if the * effective life of the * in-house software were the period specified for in-house software in subsection 40-95(7) . Subsection 701-55(2) is subject to this subsection.

    Cost of in-house software

    716-340(6)    
    Sections 701-10 and 701-60 and Division 705 (and section 40-85 , so far as it affects that Division) operate as if the * cost of the * in-house software were the total amount of the joining entity ' s expenditure that reasonably related to the software and was allocated to a software development pool.

    Earlier decline in value of the in-house software

    716-340(7)    
    Sections 701-10 and 701-60 and Division 705 (and section 40-85 , so far as it affects that Division) operate as if the decline in value, and deductions for the decline in value, of the * in-house software for a period before the joining time were the amount worked out under subsection (8).

    716-340(8)    
    Work out the amount by:


    (a) working out, for each software development pool to which expenditure relating to the * in-house software was allocated, the amount of the joining entity ' s deductions under section 40-455 that reasonably relates to the software; and


    (b) adding up each of those amounts if there are 2 or more such pools.

    Note:

    Subsections (6), (7) and (8) can affect the working out of the tax cost setting amount for the in-house software, by affecting the joining entity ' s terminating value for the software, which section 705-30 defines as being the adjustable value of the software just before the joining time, and which is relevant to sections 705-40 and 705-57 (which may reduce the tax cost setting amount for the software).

     View history note

    Software development pools if entity leaves consolidated group

    SECTION 716-345   Head company taken not to have incurred expenditure  

    View history reference

    716-345(1)    
    This section has effect if:


    (a) an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time in an income year (the leaving year ); and


    (b) under section 701-40 (Exit history rule), expenditure is taken to have been allocated by the leaving entity to a software development pool.

    Note:

    Section 701-40 treats expenditure incurred by the head company of the consolidated group and allocated by that company to a software development pool as having been incurred by the leaving entity and allocated by it to a software development pool.


    716-345(2)    
    Work out deductions of the * head company of the * consolidated group for income years after the leaving year as if the head company had not incurred the expenditure.

    716-345(3)    
    The leaving entity cannot deduct an amount for the leaving year for the expenditure it is taken to have allocated to the software development pool.

     View history note

    Subdivision 716-S - Miscellaneous consequences of tax cost setting  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 716-400   Tax cost setting and bad debts  

    View history reference

    716-400(1)    
    The object of this section is to clarify the effect of section 701-5 (entry history rule) and subsection 701-55(6) in relation to an asset that may give rise to a bad debt. It achieves this object by clarifying that certain things are taken to have happened in relation to the asset through the operation of section 701-5 and subsection 701-55(6) .

    716-400(2)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) the tax cost of an asset was set at the time (the joining time ) an entity (the joining entity ) became a subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at the asset's tax cost setting amount; and


    (b) the asset is a debt; and


    (c) any of the following apply:


    (i) the debt was included in the joining entity's assessable income before the joining time;

    (ii) the debt was in respect of money that the joining entity lent before the joining time in the ordinary course of a business of lending money;

    (iii) the joining entity bought the debt before the joining time in the ordinary course of a business of lending money; and


    (d) the requirements in subsection 701-58(1) (intra-group assets) are not satisfied in relation to the asset.

    716-400(3)    
    To avoid doubt, in determining the extent to which the *head company of the group can deduct an amount under section 25-35 (bad debts) in relation to the asset, section 701-5 (entry history rule) and subsection 701-55(6) have the effect that, before the joining time:


    (a) in a case covered by subparagraph (2)(c)(i) - the head company included an amount equal to the tax cost setting amount in its assessable income in respect of the debt; or


    (b) in a case covered by subparagraph (2)(c)(ii) - the head company lent an amount of money in respect of the debt equal to the tax cost setting amount in the ordinary course of a business of lending money; or


    (c) in a case covered by subparagraph (2)(c)(iii) - the head company incurred expenditure equal to the tax cost setting amount in buying the debt in the ordinary course of a business of lending money.

     View history note

    716-405   (Repealed) SECTION 716-405 Tax cost setting and rights to future income - deduction  
    (Repealed by No 99 of 2012)

     View history note

    716-410   (Repealed) SECTION 716-410 Rights to amounts that are expected to be included in assessable income after joining time  
    (Repealed by No 99 of 2012)

     View history note

    SECTION 716-440   Membership interests in joining entity not subject to CGT under Division 855 - foreign entity ceasing to hold interests  

    View history reference

    716-440(1)    
    Subsection (3) applies if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) another entity (the disposing entity ) ceased to hold *membership interests in the joining entity during the period that:


    (i) started 12 months before the joining time; and

    (ii) ended immediately after the joining time; and


    (c) a *CGT event happened because the disposing entity ceased to hold the membership interests; and


    (d) either:


    (i) a *capital gain or *capital loss of the disposing entity from the CGT event was disregarded because of the operation of Division 855 ; or

    (ii) if there had been a capital gain or capital loss of the disposing entity from the CGT event, the capital gain or capital loss would have been disregarded because of the operation of Division 855 ; and


    (e) section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity) applies to the joining entity ' s assets in respect of the joining entity becoming a subsidiary member of the group (disregarding subsection (3) of this section); and


    (f) it is reasonable to conclude that, throughout the period mentioned in paragraph (b), the sum of the *total participation interests held by an entity (the control entity ) and its *associates in the joining entity was 50% or more; and


    (g) in a case where the control entity is not the disposing entity - it is reasonable to conclude that the sum of the total participation interests held by the control entity and its associates in the disposing entity was 50% or more at the time the CGT event happened.

     View history note

    716-440(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(f) and (g), in working out the sum of the *total participation interests held by the control entity and its *associates in another entity, take into account:


    (a) a particular *direct participation interest; or


    (b) a particular *indirect participation interest;

    held in the other entity only once if it would otherwise be counted more than once because the entity holding it is an associate of the control entity.


    716-440(3)    
    The following provisions do not apply to the joining entity ' s assets in respect of the joining entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the group:


    (a) section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity);


    (b) subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount);


    (c) subsection 701-35(5) (setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount).

    Note:

    This subsection does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).


    716-440(4)    
    Subsection (5) applies if:


    (a) an entity (the higher level entity ) holds *membership interests in the joining entity (whether directly or through one or more interposed entities) at a time during the period mentioned in paragraph (1)(b); and


    (b) the higher level entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the *consolidated group at the joining time; and


    (c) the requirement in paragraph (1)(b) is not satisfied (disregarding subsection (5)); and


    (d) the requirement in paragraph (1)(b) would be satisfied if the reference in paragraph (1)(b) to membership interests in the joining entity included a reference to membership interests in the higher level entity.

    716-440(5)    
    Treat the reference in paragraph (1)(b) to *membership interests in the joining entity as including a reference to membership interests in the higher level entity.

     View history note

    Subdivision 716-V - Research and Development  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 716-500  

    716-500   Head company bound by agreements binding on subsidiary members  

    View history reference

    Section 355-220 (about R & D activities conducted for a foreign entity) applies to the *head company of a *consolidated group as if the head company were bound by an agreement during any period that a *subsidiary member of the group is bound by the agreement.
     View history note

    SECTION 716-505  

    716-505   History for entitlement to tax offset: joining entity  

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) a company becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group; and


    (b) apart from this section, things happening in relation to the company before it became a subsidiary member would, because of section 701-5 (the entry history rule), be taken into account as things happening in relation to the *head company for working out the head company's *aggregated turnover for the purposes of section 355-100 (tax offsets for R & D);

    the things happening are not to be taken into account as mentioned in paragraph (b).

     View history note

    SECTION 716-510  

    716-510   History for entitlement to tax offset: leaving entity  

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) a company ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group; and


    (b) while the company was a subsidiary member, things happened in relation to an entity which, if section 701-1 (the single entity rule) were disregarded:


    (i) would be *connected with the company; or

    (ii) would be an *affiliate of the company; or

    (iii) would have the company as an affiliate; and


    (c) those things would, if section 701-1 were disregarded, have been taken into account in working out the company's *aggregated turnover for the purposes of section 355-100 (tax offsets for R & D); and


    (d) the things are not also things that, because of section 701-40 (the exit history rule), are taken into account as things happening in relation to an eligible asset etc. (within the meaning of that section) of the company in working out for the entity core purposes the company's aggregated turnover for the purposes of section 355-100 ;

    the things are to be taken into account in working out the company's aggregated turnover for the purposes of section 355-100 .

     View history note

    Subdivision 716-Z - Other  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 716-800   Allocating amounts to periods if head company and subsidiary member have different income years  

    View history reference

    716-800(1)    
    The principles in this section apply if:


    (a) an entity becomes, or stops being, a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group; and


    (b) the entity has an income year that starts and ends at a different time from when the income year of the * head company of the group starts and ends.

    716-800(2)    
    Items are to be allocated to, or apportioned among, periods (whether consisting of all or part of an income year of the entity or * head company):


    (a) in the most appropriate way having regard to the objects of this Part, and of particular provisions of this Part; and


    (b) in particular, so as to ensure that what is in substance the same item is recognised only once for what is in substance the same purpose.

     View history note

    716-805   (Repealed) SECTION 716-805 Some companies cannot satisfy the same business test  
    (Repealed by No 164 of 2007 )

     View history note

    SECTION 716-850   Grossing up threshold amounts for periods of less than 365 days  

    View history reference

    716-850(1)    

    View history reference

    Under some provisions of this Act, something that is relevant to working out:


    (a) an entity ' s taxable income (if any); or


    (b) the income tax (if any) payable on an entity ' s taxable income; or


    (c) an entity ' s loss (if any) of a particular * sort;

    is determined on the basis of a comparison between an amount worked out for an income year, or an amount *derived from 2 or more such amounts, and another amount.

    Note:

    The other amount assumes an income year of 365 days.

     View history note

    716-850(2)    
    This section affects how such a provision (the threshold provision ) operates for the purposes of subsection 701-30(3) , which requires each thing covered by paragraph (1)(a), (b) or (c) of this section to be worked out for an entity for a non-membership period (under section 701-30 ) during an income year.

    Note:

    A non-membership period is a period (of less than an income year) when the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group.


    716-850(3)    
    An amount that would otherwise be worked out for the non-membership period, for the purposes of the comparison under the threshold provision, is instead:


    (a) to be worked out by reference to the period (the reference period ) starting at the start of the income year and ending at the end of the non-membership period; and


    (b) then to be grossed up by multiplying it by this fraction:


                                                        365                                                  
    Number of days in reference period
     

     View history note

    SECTION 716-855  

    716-855   Working out the cost base or reduced cost base of a pre-CGT asset after certain roll-overs  

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) it is necessary for the purposes of this Part to work out the * cost base or * reduced cost base of a * pre-CGT asset owned at a particular time; and


    (b) before that time:


    (i) the owner was the recipient company involved in a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B in relation to a * CGT event that happened in relation to the CGT asset; or

    (ii) the owner was the transferee in relation to a disposal of the CGT asset to which former section 160ZZO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied;
    View history reference

    the cost base or reduced cost base is worked out as if, in applying former Subdivision 126-B or former section 160ZZO in relation to the CGT event or the disposal, the provisions of that Subdivision or section applying to CGT assets * acquired on or after 20 September 1985 replaced those that applied to CGT assets acquired on or before that date.

    Note:

    The effect is that the owner ' s cost base or reduced cost base will be the same as that of the originating company or transferor, as is the case with post-CGT assets.

     View history note

    SECTION 716-860   CGT event straddling joining or leaving time  

    View history reference

    716-860(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) an entity (the joining entity ) becomes a subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a particular time (the joining time ); and


    (b) disregarding the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the joining entity held a *CGT asset at the joining time; and


    (c) taking into account the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the *head company of the group held the CGT asset at the joining time; and


    (d) a *CGT event happened in relation to the asset at a time before the joining time (disregarding this section), but the circumstances that gave rise to the CGT event first existed at a time on or after the joining time.

    716-860(2)    
    This section also applies if:


    (a) an entity (the leaving entity ) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a particular time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) taking into account the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the *head company of the group held a *CGT asset at the leaving time; and


    (c) disregarding the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the leaving entity held the CGT asset at the leaving time; and


    (d) a *CGT event happened in relation to the asset at a time before the leaving time (disregarding this section), but the circumstances that gave rise to the CGT eventfirst existed at a time on or after the leaving time.

    716-860(3)    
    For the purposes of this Act, treat the *CGT event as happening at the time when the circumstances that gave rise to the CGT event first existed.

     View history note

    Division 717 - International tax rules  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Subdivision 717-A - Foreign income tax offsets  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 717-1   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    If an entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group, the head company receives any tax offsets under section 770-10 that arise because the entity pays foreign income tax while it is a subsidiary member of the group.

     View history note


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    Object
    717-5 Object of this Subdivision
    Foreign income tax on amounts in head company ' s assessable income
    717-10 Head company taken to be liable for subsidiary member ' s foreign income tax

    Object

    SECTION 717-5  

    717-5   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    The object of this Subdivison is to allow the *head company of a *consolidated group to get the benefit of *foreign income tax paid in respect of amounts included in the head company ' s assessable income because another entity is or was a *subsidiary member of the group.
     View history note

    Foreign income tax on amounts in head company ' s assessable income

    SECTION 717-10   Head company taken to be liable for subsidiary member ' s foreign income tax  

    View history reference

    717-10(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) an entity was a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group for all or part of an income year; and


    (b) an amount was included in the *ordinary income or *statutory income of the *head company of the group for that income year; and


    (c) the entity paid *foreign income tax (except *credit absorption tax or *unitary tax) in respect of the amount.

    717-10(2)    
    Division 770 operates as if:


    (a) the *head company had paid the *foreign income tax; and


    (b) the entity had not paid the foreign income tax.

    Note:

    Division 770 provides a tax offset for foreign income tax paid.


    717-10(3)    
    This section does not limit the operation of Division 770 .

     View history note

    Subdivision 717-D - Transfer of certain surpluses under CFC provisions and former FIF and FLP provisions: entry rules  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 717-200   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    Each attribution surplus and post FIF abolition surplus relating to a company that becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group is transferred to the head company of the group.

     View history note

    Object

    SECTION 717-205  

    717-205   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    The main object of this Subdivision is to avoid double taxation by transferring from a company (the joining company ) that becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ) to the * head company of the group the benefit of each of these:


    (a) the attribution surplus (if any) for an attribution account entity (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) in relation to the joining company just before the joining time;


    (b) the post FIF abolition surplus (if any) (within the meaning of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) for a FIF attribution account entity (within the meaning of former Part XI of that Act) in relation to the joining company just before the joining time.

    View history reference


    (c) (Repealed by No 114 of 2010)

    View history reference


    (d) (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )

    View history reference
     View history note

    Transfers

    SECTION 717-210   Attribution surpluses  

    View history reference

    717-210(1)    
    This section operates for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:


    (a) a company (the joining company ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) just before the joining time there was an attribution surplus for an attribution account entity in relation to the joining company for the purposes of that Part; and


    (c) just before the joining time the joining company's attribution account percentage in relation to the attribution account entity for the purposes of that Part was more than nil.

    Credit in relation to the head company

    717-210(2)    
    An attribution credit arises at the joining time for the attribution account entity in relation to the * head company of the group. The credit is equal to the attribution surplus.

    Debit in relation to the joining company

    717-210(3)    
    An attribution debit arises at the joining time for the attribution account entity in relation to the joining company. The debit is equal to the attribution surplus.

     View history note

    717-215   (Repealed) SECTION 717-215 Attributed tax account surpluses  
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )

     View history note

    SECTION 717-220   FIF surpluses  

    View history reference

    717-220(1)    
    This section operates for the purposes of sections 23AK and 23B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:


    (a) a company (the joining company ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) just before the joining time there was a post FIF abolition surplus for a FIF attribution account entity in relation to the joining company for the purposes of those sections; and


    (c) just before the joining time, the joining company ' s FIF attribution account percentage in relation to the FIF attribution account entity for the purposes of those sections was more than nil.

    Credit in relation to the head company

    717-220(2)    
    A post FIF abolition credit arises at the joining time for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to the * head company of the group. The credit is equal to the post FIF abolition surplus.

    Debit in relation to the joining company

    717-220(3)    
    A post FIF abolition debit arises at the joining time for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to the joining company. The debit is equal to the post FIF abolition surplus.

    Definitions

    717-220(4)    
    In this section:

    FIF attribution account entity
    has the same meaning as in former Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    FIF attribution account percentage
    has the same meaning as in former Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    post FIF abolition credit
    has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    post FIF abolition debit
    has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    post FIF abolition surplus
    has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


     View history note

    717-225   (Repealed) SECTION 717-225 FIF attributed tax account surpluses  
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )

     View history note

    SECTION 717-227   Deferred attribution credits  

    View history reference

    717-227(1)    
    This section operates for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:


    (a) a company (the joining company ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the joining time ); and


    (b) assuming the joining company had not done so, an attribution credit would have arisen under subsection 371(8) of that Act at a later time for an attribution account entity in relation to the joining company for the purposes of that Part.

    Credit in relation to the head company

    717-227(2)    
    The attribution credit arises instead at the later time for the attribution account entity in relation to the * head company of the group.

     View history note

    717-230   (Repealed) SECTION 717-230 Calculating FIF income where a company joins the group  
    (Repealed by No 114 of 2010)

     View history note

    Subdivision 717-E - Transfer of certain surpluses under CFC provisions and former FIF and FLP provisions: exit rules  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 717-235   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    Each attribution surplus and post FIF abolition surplus relating to a company that ceases to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group is transferred to that company from the head company of the group.

     View history note

    Object

    SECTION 717-240  

    717-240   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    The main object of this Subdivision is to avoid double taxation by transferring from the * head company of a * consolidated group to a company (the leaving company ) that ceases to be a * subsidiary member of the group at a time (the leaving time ) the benefit of each of these surpluses (to the extent that each surplus can be attributed to the leaving company):


    (a) the attribution surplus (if any) for an attribution account entity (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) in relation to the head company just before the leaving time;


    (b) the post FIF abolition surplus (if any) (within the meaning of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ) for a FIF attribution account entity (within the meaning of former Part XI of that Act) in relation to the head company just before the leaving time.

    View history reference


    (c) (Repealed by No 114 of 2010)

    View history reference


    (d) (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )

    View history reference
     View history note

    Transfers

    SECTION 717-245   Attribution surpluses  

    View history reference

    717-245(1)    
    This section operates for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:


    (a) a company (the leaving company ) ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) just before the leaving time there was, for the purposes of that Part, an attribution surplus for an attribution account entity in relation to the * head company of the group; and


    (c) at the leaving time the leaving company's attribution account percentage in relation to the attribution account entity for the purposes of that Part is more than nil.

    Credit in relation to leaving company

    717-245(2)    
    An attribution credit arises at the leaving time for the attribution account entity in relation to the leaving company. The credit is the amount worked out under subsection (4).

    Debit in relation to head company

    717-245(3)    
    An attribution debit arises at the leaving time for the attribution account entity in relation to the company that was the * head company of the group just before the leaving time. The debit is the amount worked out under subsection (4).

    Amount of credit and debit

    717-245(4)    
    The amount of the credit and debit is worked out using the formula:


    Leaving company's attribution account
    percentage in relation to the attribution
                account entity at the leaving time            
    *Head company's attribution account
    percentage in relation to the attribution
    account entity just before the leaving time
    × Attribution surplus for
    the attribution account
    entity in relation to
    the *head company
    just before the leaving
    time


     View history note

    717-250   (Repealed) SECTION 717-250 Attributed tax account surpluses  
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )

     View history note

    SECTION 717-255   FIF surpluses  

    View history reference

    717-255(1)    
    This section operates for the purposes of sections 23AK and 23B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (the 1936 Act ) if:


    (a) a company (the leaving company ) ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) just before the leaving time, there was a post FIF abolition surplus for a FIF attribution account entity in relation to the * head company of the group for the purposes of those sections; and


    (c) at the leaving time, the leaving company ' s FIF attribution account percentage in relation to the FIF attribution account entity for the purposes of those sections is more than nil.

    Credit in relation to the leaving company

    717-255(2)    
    A post FIF abolition credit arises at the leaving time for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to the leaving company. The credit is the amount worked out under subsection (4).

    Debit in relation to head company

    717-255(3)    
    A post FIF abolition debit arises at the leaving time for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to the company that was the *head company of the group just before the leaving time. The debit is the amount worked out under subsection (4).

    Amount of credit and debit

    717-255(4)    
    The amount of the credit and debit is worked out using the formula:


    Leaving company ' s FIF attribution account percentage in relation to the FIF attribution account entity at the leaving time × Post FIF abolition surplus for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to the * head company just before the leaving time
    *Head company ' s FIF attribution account percentage in relation to the FIF attribution account entity just before the leaving time



    Definitions

    717-255(5)    
    In this section:

    FIF attribution account entity
    has the same meaning as in former Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    FIF attribution account percentage
    has the same meaning as in former Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    post FIF abolition credit
    has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    post FIF abolition debit
    has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

    post FIF abolition surplus
    has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


     View history note

    717-260   (Repealed) SECTION 717-260 FIF attributed tax account surpluses  
    (Repealed by No 143 of 2007 )

     View history note
     View history note

    SECTION 717-262   Deferred attribution credits  

    View history reference

    717-262(1)    
    This section operates for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:


    (a) a company (the leaving company ) ceases to be a * subsidiary member of a * consolidated group at a time (the leaving time ); and


    (b) disregarding this section, an attribution credit (the original credit ) will arise under subsection 371(8) of that Act at a later time for an attribution account entity in relation to the * head company of the group (including because of the operation of section 717-227 ) for the purposes of that Part; and


    (c) at the leaving time the leaving company's attribution account percentage in relation to the attribution account entity for the purposes of that Part is more than nil.

    Credit in relation to the leaving company

    717-262(2)    
    An attribution credit arises at the later time for the attribution account entity in relation to the leaving company. The credit is the amount worked out under subsection (3).

    Amount of credit

    717-262(3)    
    The amount of the credit is worked out using the formula:


    Leaving company's attribution
    account percentage in relation to
    the attribution account entity
                          at the leaving time                      
    *Head company's attribution
    account percentage in relation to
    the attribution account entity
    just before the leaving time
    ×   Original credit



    Reduction in credit in relation to the head company

    717-262(4)    
    The attribution credit that arises at the later time for the attribution account entity in relation to the * head company is reduced by the amount of the attribution credit that arises under subsection (2) in relation to the leaving company.

     View history note

    717-265   (Repealed) SECTION 717-265 Calculating FIF income where a company leaves the group  
    (Repealed by No 114 of 2010)

     View history note

    Subdivision 717-F - Elections etc. relating to CFCs, FIFs and FLPs: entry rules  

    View history reference
     View history note

    717-270   (Repealed) SECTION 717-270 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    Application and object

    717-275   (Repealed) SECTION 717-275 Application  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-280   (Repealed) SECTION 717-280 Object of this Subdivision  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    Elections etc.

    717-285   (Repealed) SECTION 717-285 Pre-joining-time irrevocable elections etc. by joining entity not inherited by head company  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-290   (Repealed) SECTION 717-290 Pre-joining-time actions of joining entity do not prevent head company from electing to apply the calculation method  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-292   (Repealed) SECTION 717-292 Entry history rule does not affect when head company may elect to value trading stock at market value  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    Subdivision 717-G - Elections etc. relating to CFCs, FIFs and FLPs: exit rules  

    View history reference
     View history note

    717-295   (Repealed) SECTION 717-295 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    Application and object

    717-300   (Repealed) SECTION 717-300 Application  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-305   (Repealed) SECTION 717-305 Object of this Subdivision  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    Elections etc.

    717-310   (Repealed) SECTION 717-310 Pre-leaving-time irrevocable declarations, elections, choices and selections by head company not inherited by leaving entity  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-315   (Repealed) SECTION 717-315 Pre-leaving-time actions of head company do not prevent leaving entity from electing to apply the calculation method  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-320   (Repealed) SECTION 717-320 Exit history rule does not affect when leaving entity may elect to value trading stock at market value  
    (Repealed by No 23 of 2005)

     View history note

    Subdivision 717-J - Foreign dividend accounts  

    View history reference
     View history note

    717-500   (Repealed) SECTION 717-500 What this Subdivision is about  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-505   (Repealed) SECTION 717-505 Object of this Subdivision  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-510   (Repealed) SECTION 717-510 No FDA surplus for joining company  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-515   (Repealed) SECTION 717-515 Single entity rule for FDA credits and FDA debits  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-520   (Repealed) SECTION 717-520 Head company may make FDA declaration  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-525   (Repealed) SECTION 717-525 Multiple FDA declarations for dividends paid on same day  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

     View history note

    717-530   (Repealed) SECTION 717-530 Extended operation of sections 717-520 and 717-525  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

     View history note

    Subdivision 717-O - Offshore banking units  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 717-700   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    The head company of a consolidated group is treated for certain purposes as an offshore banking unit at a time when a subsidiary member of the group is an offshore banking unit.

     View history note

    SECTION 717-705  

    717-705   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that certain rules in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 relating to offshore banking units interact properly with the consolidation regime in this Part.
     View history note

    SECTION 717-710   Head company treated as OBU  

    View history reference

    717-710(1)    
    Division 9A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the * head company of a * consolidated group as if the head company were an OBU (within the meaning of that Division) at a time when a * subsidiary member of the group is an OBU (within the meaning of that Division).

    717-710(2)    
    Subsection (1) operates for the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2) .

     View history note

    Division 719 - MEC groups  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Subdivision 719-A - Modified application of Part 3-90 to MEC groups  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 719-2   Modified application of Part 3-90 to MEC groups  

    View history reference

    719-2(1)    
    This Part (other than Division 703 and this Division) has effect in relation to a * MEC group in the same way in which it has effect in relation to a * consolidated group.

    Note:

    A provision in this Part (other than in Division 703 or in this Division) mentioning 2 separate consolidated groups will, under subsection (1), have an additional operation when the groups are both MEC groups or when one is a MEC group and the other is a consolidated group.


    719-2(2)    
    However, that effect is subject to the modifications set out in this Division.

    719-2(3)    
    For the purposes of subsection (1), a reference in this Part (other than in Division 703 or this Division) to a provision in Division 703 applies as if it referred instead to that provision or the corresponding provision in Subdivision 719-B (as appropriate).

     View history note

    Subdivision 719-B - MEC groups and their members  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 719-4   What this Subdivision is about  

    A MEC group and a potential MEC group each consist of certain Australian-resident entities that are wholly-owned subsidiaries of a foreign top company.

    A company that is a first-tier subsidiary of the top company is a tier-1 company.

    A MEC group cannot be formed unless there are at least 2 tier-1 companies of the top company that are eligible to be members of the group.

    A MEC group becomes consolidated at a time chosen by the eligible tier-1 companies.

    One of the eligible tier-1 companies becomes the head company of the group.

    The remaining members of the group are the subsidiary members.

     View history note

    Basic concepts

    SECTION 719-5   What is a MEC group ?  

    View history reference

    When MEC group comes into existence

    719-5(1)    
    A MEC (multiple entry consolidated) group comes into existence when:


    (a) a choice, by 2 or more * eligible tier-1 companies of a * top company, that the * potential MEC group derived from those companies be consolidated starts to have effect under section 719-55 ; or


    (b) a * special conversion event happens to a potential MEC group derived from an eligible tier-1 company of a top company.

    Original members of a MEC group that results from a choice

    719-5(2)    
    A MEC group that results from a choice by 2 or more companies under section 719-50 consists of the potential MEC group derived from time to time from whichever one or more of those companies continue to be eligible tier-1 companies of the top company. This subsection has effect subject to subsection (4) (which deals with new eligible tier-1 members).

    Original members of a MEC group that results from a special conversion event

    719-5(3)    
    A MEC group that results from a special conversion event consists of the potential MEC group derived from time to time from whichever one or more of the following companies continue to be eligible tier-1 companies of the top company:


    (a) the company mentioned in paragraph 719-40(1)(b) ;


    (b) the companies specified in the notice under paragraph 719-40(1)(e) .

    This subsection has effect subject to subsection (4) (which deals with new eligible tier-1 members).



    New eligible tier-1 members of a MEC group

    719-5(4)    
    If:


    (a) a MEC group consists of the members of a potential MEC group derived from one or more eligible tier-1 companies of a top company; and


    (b) at a particular time after the MEC group came into existence, one or more other companies become eligible tier-1 companies of the top company; and


    (c) the *provisional head company of the MEC group makes a choice in writing no later than the day mentioned in subsection (6):


    (i) specifyingone or more of the companies mentioned in paragraph (b); and

    (ii) stating that the specified companies are to become members of the MEC group with effect from that time; and
    View history reference


    (d) if:


    (i) a company specified in the choice was a member of another MEC group immediately before that time; and

    (ii) all of the eligible tier-1 companies in that other MEC group became eligible tier-1 companies of the top company at that time;
    each eligible tier-1 company in that other MEC group is specified in the choice;
    View history reference

    then, with effect from that time, the MEC group mentioned in paragraph (a) is taken to consist of the potential MEC group derived from time to time from whichever one or more of the following companies continue to be eligible tier-1 companies of the top company:


    (e) the companies mentioned in paragraph (a);


    (f) the companies specified in the choice.

    View history reference
    Note:

    The provisional head company of the group must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing information about each entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the group on that day because of the choice (see sections 719-77 and 719-80 ).

     View history note

    719-5(5)    
    To avoid doubt, paragraph (4)(a) applies to a MEC group even if the composition of the group has been worked out because of one or more previous applications of subsection (4).

    719-5(6)    

    View history reference

    The day mentioned in paragraph (4)(c) is:


    (a) if the company mentioned in subsection (6A) is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which the time mentioned in paragraph (4)(b) occurs - the day on which that company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which that company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

     View history note

    719-5(6A)    

    View history reference

    The company is:


    (a) in a case where subsection 719-75(1) or (2) applies - the company that will be the *head company of the group as at the end of the income year; and


    (b) in a case where subsection 719-75(3) applies - the company that will be the head company of the group immediately before the group ceased to exist.

     View history note


    Continued existence of MEC group

    719-5(7)    
    If a MEC group (the first MEC group ) consists of the members of a potential MEC group derived from one or more eligible tier-1 companies of a top company, the first MEC group continues to exist until:


    (a) the potential MEC group ceases to exist; or


    (b) there is a change in the identity of the top company, and the eligible tier-1 companies that were members of the first MEC group immediately before the change become members of another MEC group immediately after the change; or


    (c) there ceases to be a provisional head company of the first MEC group.

    The first MEC group ceases to exist when one of those events happens.

    Note:

    Subsection 719-10(7) sets out the circumstances in which the potential MEC group ceases to exist.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-10   What is a potential MEC group?  

    View history reference

    719-10(1)    

    View history reference

    A potential MEC group derived from one or more * eligible tier-1 companies of a * top company consists of the following members:


    (a) those eligible tier-1 companies;


    (b) all of the other entities (if any) which:


    (i) meet the requirements of the table; or

    (ii) are entities for which the requirements in section 701C-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 are met; or

    (iii) are entities for which the requirements in section 701C-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 are met.
    View history reference


    Graphic
    Graphic
    Requirements for other entities
    Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
    Income tax treatment requirements Australian residence requirements Ownership requirements
    The entity must be a company, trust or partnership and, if it is a company, all or some of its taxable income (if any) must have been taxable at a rate that is or equals the *corporate tax rate apart from this Part

    The entity must not be covered by an item in the table in section 703-20

    The entity must not be a non-profit company (as defined in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 )
    The entity must:

    (a) be an Australian resident (but not a *prescribed dual resident), if it is a company; or

    (b) meet the conditions in item 1, 2 or 3 of the table in section 703-25, if it is a trust; or

    (c) be a partnership
    The entity must be:

    (a) a *wholly-owned subsidiary of any of those *eligible tier-1 companies; or

    (b) an entity that would be covered by paragraph (a), if it were assumed that all of the membership interests that are beneficially owned by any of those eligible tier-1 companies were owned by a single one of those eligible tier-1 companies

     View history note

    719-10(2)    
    For the purposes of column 3 of the table, if there are one or more entities interposed between an entity (the test entity ) and an eligible tier-1 company, the test entity can be a wholly-owned subsidiary of the eligible tier-1 company only if each of the interposed entities:


    (a) meets the conditions in columns 1 and 2 of the table; or


    (b) holds membership interests only as a nominee of one or more entities each of which is:


    (i) an eligible tier-1 company of the top company; or

    (ii) a wholly-owned subsidiary of an eligible tier-1 company of the top company, being a subsidiary that meets the conditions in columns 1 and 2 of the table.

    719-10(3)    
    For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(b)(ii), in determining whether an entity is a wholly-owned subsidiary of an eligible * tier-1 company of the * top company, assume that all of the * membership interests that are beneficially owned by eligible tier-1 companies of the top company were owned by a single eligible tier-1 company of the top company.

    719-10(4)    
    (Repealed by No 67 of 2003)

     View history note

    719-10(5)    

    View history reference

    (Repealed by No 67 of 2003)
     View history note


    Only one eligible tier-1 company in a potential MEC group

    719-10(6)    
    To avoid doubt, if:


    (a) there is only one * eligible tier-1 company of a * top company; and


    (b) there are no entities which meet the requirements of the table in subsection (1); and


    (c) there are no entities for which the requirements mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) are met; and

    View history reference


    (d) there are no entities for which the requirements mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(iii) are met;

    View history reference

    the * potential MEC group derived from the eligible tier-1 company consists of the eligible tier-1 company alone.

     View history note


    When potential MEC group ceases to exist

    719-10(7)    
    If a * potential MEC group is derived from one or more * eligible tier-1 companies of a * top company, the potential MEC group ceases to exist when:


    (a) none of those companies are eligible tier-1 companies of the top company; or


    (b) there is a change in the identity of the top company, and the eligible tier-1 companies that were members of the group immediately before the change are not the same as the eligible tier-1 companies that are members of the group immediately after the change.

    Continuity of potential MEC group

    719-10(8)    
    If:


    (a) a * potential MEC group is derived from one or more * eligible tier-1 companies of a * top company; and


    (b) there is a change in the identity of the top company in relation to the potential MEC group; and


    (c) the eligible tier-1 companies that were members of the group immediately before the change are the same as the eligible tier-1 companies that are members of the group immediately after the change;

    the change does not affect the continuity of:


    (d) the group; or


    (e) the status of any of those companies as eligible tier-1 companies of the top company.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-15   What is an eligible tier-1 company ?  

    View history reference

    719-15(1)    
    A * tier-1 company of a * top company is an eligible tier-1 company if subsection (2) does not apply to the tier-1 company.

    719-15(2)    
    This subsection applies to a * tier-1 company if:


    (a) there are one or more entities interposed between the tier-1 company and the * top company; and


    (b) the conditions in subsection (3) are satisfied in relation to at least one of those interposed entities.

    719-15(3)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), the conditions are as follows:


    (a) the interposed entity must be one of the following:


    (i) a company that is a foreign resident;

    (ii) a * prescribed dual resident;

    (iii) a trust that does not meet the conditions in item 1, 2 or 3 of the table in section 703-25 ;

    (iv) a trust that meets the conditions in item 1, 2 or 3 of the table in section 703-25 and is not a * wholly-owned subsidiary of another * tier-1 company of the * top company;

    (v) an entity covered by an item in the table in section 703-20 ;

    (vi) a company that is an Australian resident, where no part of its taxable income (if any) would be taxable at a rate that is or equals the * general company rate;

    (vii) a non-profit company (as defined in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 ) that is a wholly-owned subsidiary of another tier-1 company of the top company;


    (b) the interposed entity must not hold * membership interests only as nominee of one or more entities each of which is:


    (i) another tier-1 company of the top company; or

    (ii) an entity that is a wholly-owned subsidiary of another tier-1 company of the top company;


    (c) at least one of the following entities must hold a membership interest in the interposed entity:


    (i) another tier-1 company of the top company;

    (ii) a wholly-owned subsidiary of another tier-1 company of the top company;

    (iii) an entity that holds membership interests only as a nominee of one or more entities each of which is mentioned in subparagraph (i) or (ii).

    719-15(4)    
    For the purposes of subparagraphs (3)(a)(iv)and (vii) and paragraphs (3)(b) and (c), in determining whether an entity is a wholly-owned subsidiary of another * tier-1 company of the * top company, assume that all of the * membership interests that are beneficially owned by tier-1 companies of the top company were owned by a single tier-1 company of the top company.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-20   What is a top company and a tier-1 company ?  

    View history reference

    719-20(1)    

    View history reference

    At a particular time, a company is:


    (a) a top company if the requirements in item 1 of the table are met; or


    (b) a tier-1 company of the top company if the requirements in item 2 of the table are met.


    Graphic
    Graphic
    Top companies and tier-1 companies
    Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4
    Kind of entity Income tax treatment requirements Residence requirements Ownership requirements
    1 Top company No specific requirements The company must be a foreign resident The company must not be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of another company (other than a company that is a *prescribed dual resident, or a company that is an Australian resident that fails to meet a condition in column 2 of item 2)
    2 Tier-1 company The company must have all or some of its taxable income (if any) taxed at a rate that is or equals the *corporate tax rate apart from this Part

    The company must not be covered by an item in the table in section 703-20
    The company must be an Australian resident (but not a *prescribed dual resident) The company:

    (a) must be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *top company; and

    (b) must not be a wholly-owned subsidiary of a company that is an Australian resident (other than a company that fails to meet a condition in column 2 or 3)

     View history note

    719-20(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (b) of column 4 of item 2 of the table, in determining whether a company (the test company) is a * tier-1 company, if 2 or more other companies beneficially own all of the * membership interests in the test company, and each of those other companies:


    (a) is a * wholly-owned subsidiary of the * top company; and


    (b) meets the conditions in columns 2 and 3 of item 2 of the table;

    the test company is taken to be a wholly-owned subsidiary of one of those other companies.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-25   Head company, subsidiary members and members of a MEC group  

    View history reference

    719-25(1)    
    The head company of a * MEC group is worked out under section 719-75 .

    719-25(2)    
    The remaining members of the group are the subsidiary members of the group.

    719-25(3)    

    View history reference

    The members of a *MEC group are the *head company of the group and the *subsidiiary members of the group.
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 719-30   Treating entities as wholly-owned subsidiaries by disregarding employee shares  

    View history reference

    719-30(1)    

    View history reference

    The object of this section is to ensure that an entity is not prevented from being a * wholly-owned subsidiary of another entity, just because there are minor holdings of * membership interests in an entity issued under * arrangements for employee shareholdings.
     View history note

    719-30(2)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of this Division, in determining whether an entity is a *wholly-owned subsidiary of another entity, disregard:


    (a) particular *shares in a company if the shares are covered by subsection (3) and the total number of those shares is not more than 1% of the number of ordinary shares in the company; and


    (b) particular *membership interests in an entity if the membership interests are covered by subsection (5) and the total number of those membership interests is not more than 1% of the number of membership interests of that kind in the entity.

     View history note

    719-30(3)    

    View history reference

    A *share or *membership interest in a company is covered by this subsection if:


    (a) the entity who holds the beneficial interest in the share or membership interest acquired that beneficial interest:


    (i) under an *employee share scheme; or

    (ii) by exercising a right, a beneficial interest in which was acquired under an employee share scheme; and


    (b) paragraphs 83A-105(1)(a) and (b) and subsection 83A-105(2) apply to the beneficial interest acquired under the scheme; and


    (c) in the case of a membership interest - the interest is part of a stapled security.

     View history note

    719-30(4)    
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)

     View history note

    719-30(5)    
    (Repealed by No 133 of 2009)

     View history note

    SECTION 719-35   Treating entities held through non-fixed trusts as wholly-owned subsidiaries  

    View history reference

    719-35(1)    
    This section operates to ensure that an entity (the test entity ) is not prevented from being a * wholly-owned subsidiary of a company, just because there is a trust that is not a * fixed trust interposed between the test entity and the company.

    719-35(2)    
    For the purposes of this Division, in determining whether the test entity is a * wholly-owned subsidiary of the company, assume that the interposed trust is a * fixed trust and all its objects are beneficiaries.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-40   Special conversion event - potential MEC group  

    View history reference

    719-40(1)    
    A special conversion event happens at a particular time to a * potential MEC group derived from an * eligible tier-1 company of a * top company if:


    (a) at that time, the group is not a * MEC group as a result of a choice under section 719-50 ; and


    (b) immediately before that time, a company is:


    (i) that eligible tier-1 company; and

    (ii) the * head company of a * consolidated group; and


    (c) at that time, one or more other companies become eligible tier-1 companies of the top company; and


    (d) immediately after that time, no * membership interests in the company mentioned in paragraph (b) are beneficially owned by another member of the potential MEC group derived from:


    (i) the company mentioned in paragraph (b); and

    (ii) the companies mentioned in paragraph (c); and


    (e) the company mentioned in paragraph (b) makes a choice in writing no later than the day mentioned in subsection (2):


    (i) specifying one or more of the companies mentioned in paragraph (c); and

    (ii) stating that a MEC group is to come into existence at that time as a result of the specified companies becoming eligible tier-1 companies of the top company; and
    View history reference


    (f) if:


    (i) a company specified in the choice was a member of another MEC group immediately before that time; and

    (ii) all of the eligible tier-1 companies in that other MEC group became eligible tier-1 companies of the top company at that time;
    each eligible tier-1 company in that other MEC group is specified in the choice.
    View history reference
    Note:

    The company mentioned in paragraph (b) must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing information about the special conversion event (see sections 719-78 and 719-80 ).

     View history note

    719-40(2)    

    View history reference

    The day mentioned in paragraph (1)(e) is:


    (a) if the company is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which that time occurs - the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which the company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 719-45   Application of sections 703-20 and 703-25  

    View history reference

    719-45(1)    
    For the purposes of this Division, if an item in section 703-20 refers to an income year, an entity is covered by that item at a particular time if, and only if, that time is in that income year.

    719-45(2)    
    For the purposes of this Division, if a condition in item 1, 2 or 3 of the table in section 703-25 refers to an income year, an entity meets that condition at a particular time if, and only if, that time is in that income year.

     View history note

    Choice to consolidate a potential MEC group

    SECTION 719-50   Eligible tier-1 companies may choose to consolidate a potential MEC group  

    View history reference

    Making a choice to consolidate

    719-50(1)    

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) a *potential MEC group (the first group ) derived from 2 or more *eligible tier-1 companies of a *top company is in existence at the start of a particular day; and


    (b) that day is after 30 June 2002; and


    (c) none of those eligible tier-1 companies is already a member of a *MEC group or a *consolidated group;

    those eligible tier-1 companies, jointly, may make a choice in writing that the first group be consolidated on and after that day. If they do so, the choice must specify that day.

    Note:

    The provisional head company must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing information about the group (see sections 719-76 and 719-80 ).

     View history note


    Choice cannot be revoked or specified day amended

    719-50(2)    
    A choice cannot be revoked and the specification of the day cannot be amended.

    719-50(3)    

    View history reference

    A choice can be made no later than:


    (a) if the company mentioned in subsection (3A) is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which that day occurs - the day on which that company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which that company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

     View history note

    719-50(3A)    

    View history reference

    The company is:


    (a) in a case where subsection 719-75(1) or (2) applies - the company that will be the *head company of the group as at the end of the income year; and


    (b) in a case where subsection 719-75(3) applies - the company that will be the head company of the group immediately before the group ceased to exist.

     View history note


    Company ceases to be an eligible tier-1 company before choice is given to the Commissioner

    719-50(4)    
    If:


    (a) as a result of a choice:


    (i) subsection 719-75(1) , (2) or (3) would apply to the * MEC group concerned in relation to the * income year of a company in which the specified day occurred; and

    (ii) in a case where subsection 719-75(1) or (2) applies - the company will be the * head company of the group as at the end of the income year; and

    (iii) in a case where subsection 719-75(3) applies - the company will be the * head company of the group immediately before the group ceased to exist; and


    (b) another company (the other company ) that was an eligible tier-1 company at the start of the specified day ceased to exist at a time before:


    (i) the day on which the company mentioned in paragraph (a) gives the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which the day specified in the choice occurs; or

    (ii) the last day in the period within which the company mentioned in paragraph (a) would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return; and
    View history reference


    (c) having regard to all relevant circumstances, it would be reasonable to conclude that the other company would have been a party to the choice if the other company had continued to exist;

    the other company is taken to have authorised the company that will be the head company as mentioned in subparagraph (a)(ii) or (iii):


    (d) to make the choice on behalf of the other company; and


    (e) to do, on behalf of the other company, anything else under:


    (i) subsection (1) of this section; or

    (ii) subsection 719-60(1) or (3).
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 719-55  

    719-55   When choice starts to have effect  

    View history reference

    A choice under section 719-50 is taken to have started to have effect on the day specified in the choice.
     View history note

    Provisional head company

    SECTION 719-60   Appointment of provisional head company  

    View history reference

    Appointment on formation of group - choice

    719-60(1)    

    View history reference

    If companies make a choice under section 719-50 , the choice must include an appointment, made jointly by the companies, of one of those companies to be the provisional head company of the * MEC group concerned. The appointment comes, or is taken to have come, into force at the time when the choice starts or started to have effect.
     View history note


    Appointment on formation of group - special conversion event

    719-60(2)    
    If a * special conversion event happens to a * potential MEC group, the * eligible tier-1 companies that were the members of the MEC group that resulted from the event are taken to have appointed the company mentioned in paragraph 719-40(1)(b) as the provisional head company of the * MEC group. The appointment is taken to have come into force when the event happened.

    Appointment after formation of group

    719-60(3)    

    View history reference

    If a *cessation event happens to the *provisional head company of a *MEC group, the *eligible tier-1 companies that are or were members of the MEC group immediately after the cessation event may make a choice in writing, jointly appointing one of those companies to be the provisional head company of the group. The appointment is taken to have come into force immediately after the cessation event.
     View history note


    Qualifications for provisional head company

    719-60(4)    
    An appointment of a company under subsection (1) or (3) as the * provisional head company of a * MEC group has no effect unless, at the time the appointment comes into force, the company is qualified to be the * provisional head company of the MEC group under section 719-65 .

    Appointment remains in force until cessation event

    719-60(5)    
    The appointment of a company as the * provisional head company of a * MEC group remains in force until a * cessation event happens to the company.

    What is a cessation event?

    719-60(6)    
    A cessation event happens to a * provisional head company of a * MEC group if:


    (a) the company ceases to be qualified to be the * provisional head company of the group under section 719-65 ; or


    (b) the company ceases to exist.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-65   Qualifications for the provisional head company of a MEC group  

    View history reference

    Qualifications for the provisional head company

    719-65(1)    
    A company is qualified to be the * provisional head company of a * MEC group if:


    (a) the company is an * eligible tier-1 company of the * top company; and


    (b) no * membership interests in the company are beneficially owned by another member of the group.

    719-65(2)    
    Subsection (1) has effect subject to subsection (3).

    Period during which new provisional head company must have been a member of the group

    719-65(3)    
    If:


    (a) a company (the new company ) is to be appointed as the * provisional head company of a * MEC group under subsection 719-60(3) ; and


    (b) the appointment will come into force immediately after a * cessation event happens to the former provisional head company of the group; and


    (c) a company (the original company ) (which may be the former provisional head company) was appointed as the provisional head company of the group under subsection 719-60(1) or (2);

    the new company is not qualified to be the provisional head company of the group unless the new company has been a member of the group at all times during the period:


    (d) beginning at whichever of the following times is applicable:


    (i) if the cessation event happened in the income year of the original company in which the group came into existence - the time when the group came into existence;

    (ii) in any other case - the start of the income year of the former provisional head company in which the cessation event happened; and
    View history reference


    (e) ending when the cessation event happened.

     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 719-70  

    719-70   Income year of new provisional head company to be the same as that of former provisional head company  

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) a company (the new company ) is appointed as the * provisional head company of a * MEC group under subsection 719-60(3) ; and


    (b) the appointment comes into force immediately after a * cessation event happens to the former provisional head company of the group;

    then:


    (c) if, for the income year in which the cessation event happened, the former provisional head company had not adopted an accounting period in place of the financial year concerned - the new company is taken not to have adopted an accounting period in place of that financial year; or


    (d) if, for the income year in which the cessation event happened, the former provisional head company had adopted an accounting period in place of the financial year concerned - the new company is taken to have adopted an accounting period in place of that financial year that is the same as the accounting period adopted by the former provisional head company.

     View history note

    Head company

    SECTION 719-75   Head company  

    View history reference

    Group in existence throughout income year

    719-75(1)    
    If:


    (a) a company is the * provisional head company of a * MEC group at the end of the income year of the company; and


    (b) the group was in existence throughout the income year;

    the company is the head company of the group at all times during the income year.



    Group comes into existence in income year

    719-75(2)    
    If:


    (a) a company is the * provisional head company of a * MEC group at the end of the income year of the company; and


    (b) the group is in existence at the end of the income year; and


    (c) the group came into existence in the income year;

    that company is the head company of the group at all times during the period:


    (d) beginning when the group came into existence; and


    (e) ending at the end of the income year.

    Group ceases to exist in income year

    719-75(3)    
    If:


    (a) a * MEC group ceases to exist in an income year of a company; and


    (b) the company was the * provisional head company of the group immediately before the group ceased to exist;

    that company is the head company of the group at all times during the period:


    (c) beginning at whichever is the later of:


    (i) the start of the income year; and

    (ii) the time the group came into existence; and


    (d) ending at the time when the group ceased to exist.

     View history note

    Notice of events affecting group

    SECTION 719-76   Notice of choice to consolidate  

    View history reference

    719-76(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a *MEC group comes into existence on the day specified in a choice under section 719-50 ; and


    (b) subsection 719-75(1) , (2) or (3) would apply to the MEC group in relation to the *income year of a company in which the specified day occurred; and


    (c) in a case where subsection 719-75(1) or (2) applies - the company will be the *head company of the group as at the end of the income year; and


    (d) in a case where subsection 719-75(3) applies - the company will be the head company of the group immediately before the group ceased to exist.

    719-76(2)    
    The company must give the Commissioner a notice in the *approved form containing the following information:


    (a) the identity of the company;


    (b) the day specified in the choice on which the *MEC group comes into existence;


    (c) the identity of each *eligible tier-1 company of the *top company in relation to the MEC group on that day;


    (d) the identity of each *subsidiary member of the group on that day;


    (e) the identity of each entity that was a subsidiary member of the group on that day but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;


    (f) the identity of each entity that was not a subsidiary member of the group on that day but was such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;


    (g) the identity of each entity that became a subsidiary member of the group after that day but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given.

    719-76(3)    
    The notice must be given no later than:


    (a) if the company is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which that day occurs - the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which the company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-77   Notice in relation to new eligible tier-1 members etc  

    View history reference

    719-77(1)    
    This section applies if:


    (a) a *MEC group consists of the members of a *potential MEC group derived from one or more *eligible tier-1 companies of a *top company; and


    (b) one or more other companies become eligible tier-1 companies of the top company at a time because of a choice under subsection 719-5(4) .

    719-77(2)    
    The *head company of the *MEC group must give the Commissioner a notice in the *approved form containing the following information:


    (a) the identity of the head company;


    (b) the time mentioned in paragraph (1)(b);


    (c) the identity of each entity that became an *eligible tier-1 company of the *top company in relation to the MEC group at that time because of the choice;


    (d) the identity of each entity that became a *subsidiary member of the group at that time because of the choice;


    (e) the identity of each entity that was a subsidiary member of the group at that time but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given.

    719-77(3)    
    The notice must be given no later than:


    (a) if the *head company is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which that time occurs - the day on which the head company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which the head company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-78   Notice of special conversion event  

    View history reference

    719-78(1)    
    This section applies if a *MEC group comes into existence at the time because of a choice under paragraph 719-40(e) .

    719-78(2)    
    The company mentioned in paragraph 719-40(b) must give the Commissioner a notice in the *approved form containing the following information:


    (a) the identity of the company;


    (b) the time at which the *MEC group comes into existence;


    (c) the identity of each *eligible tier-1 company of the *top company in relation to the MEC group on that day;


    (d) the identity of each *subsidiary member of the group at that time;


    (e) the identity of each entity that was a subsidiary member of the group at that time but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;


    (f) the identity of each entity that was not a subsidiary member of the group at that time but was such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;


    (g) the identity of each entity that became a subsidiary member of the group after that time but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given.

    719-78(3)    
    The notice must be given no later than:


    (a) if the company is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which that time occurs - the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which the company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-79   Notice of appointment of provisional head company after formation of group  

    View history reference

    719-79(1)    
    This section applies if an entity is appointed to be the *provisional head company of a *MEC group because of a choice under subsection 719-60(3) .

    719-79(2)    
    The *provisional head company must give the Commissioner a notice in the *approved form containing the following information:


    (a) the identity of the provisional head company;


    (b) the day on which the choice was made;


    (c) the day on which the *cessation event mentioned in subsection 719-60(3) occurs.

    719-79(3)    
    The notice must be given no later than:


    (a) if:


    (i) the group came into existence because of a choice under section 719-50 ; and

    (ii) the event happens more than 28 days before a notice under section 719-76 in relation to the choice is given;
    the day on which the notice mentioned in subparagraph (ii) is given; or


    (b) in any other case - 28 days after the *cessation event.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-80   Notice of events affecting MEC group  

    View history reference

    719-80(1)    
    If an event (the notifiable event ) described in column 2 of an item of the table happens in relation to a * MEC group, the entity described in column 3 of the item must give the Commissioner notice in the * approved form of the notifiable event.


    Graphic
    Graphic
    Notice of events
    Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
    Item If this event happens: Notice must be given by:
    1. An entity becomes a member of a *MEC group The *provisional head company of the group
    2. An entity ceases to be a member of a MEC group The provisional head company of the group
    3. A *cessation event happens to the *provisional head company of a MEC group The company, or the person (if any) who was its public officer just before it ceased to exist if the company ceased to be the provisional head company because it ceases to exist


    719-80(2)    
    The entity described in column 3 of the relevant item must give notice of the notifiable event:


    (a) if:


    (i) the group came into existence because of a choice under section 719-50 ; and

    (ii) the notifiable event happens before the relevant notice is given to the Commissioner under section 719-76 (notice of choice to consolidate);
    no later than the day mentioned in subsection (3); or
    View history reference


    (b) if:


    (i) the group results from a * special conversion event; and

    (ii) a choice under section 703-50 is made in relation to the * consolidated group mentioned in paragraph 719-40(1)(b) ; and

    (iii) the notifiable event happens before the relevant notice is given to the Commissioner under section 703-58 (notice of choice to consolidate);
    no later than the day mentioned in subsection (3); or
    View history reference


    (c) in any other case - within 28 days after the notifiable event.

     View history note

    719-80(3)    

    View history reference

    The day is:


    (a) if the entity is required to give the Commissioner its *income tax return for the income year during which the notifiable event happens - the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or


    (b) otherwise - the last day in the period within which the entity would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

     View history note

     View history note

    Effects of change of head company

    SECTION 719-85  

    719-85   Application  

    View history reference

    Sections 719-90 to 719-95 set out the effects if:


    (a) a company (the old head company ) is the * head company of a * MEC group at the end of an income year; and


    (b) a different company (the new head company ) is the head company of the group at the start of the next income year (the transition time ).

    Note:

    This case can arise from the operation of section 719-75 , which treats an entity that is the provisional head company of the group at a certain time in the income year as being the group ' s head company at all times in the income year when the group is in existence.

    The old head company is also taken to become a subsidiary member of the group at the transition time, and the new head company is taken to cease being a subsidiary member at that time. Section 719-95 ensures that these results do not change the tax position of the group.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-90   New head company treated as substituted for old head company at all times before the transition time  

    View history reference

    719-90(1)    
    Everything that happened in relation to the old head company before the transition time is taken to have happened in relation to the new head company instead, just as if the new head company had been the old head company at all times before the transition time.

    Note:

    This section treats the new head company as having in effect assumed the identity of the old head company throughout the period before the transition time, but without affecting any of the other attributes of the old head company.


    719-90(2)    
    To avoid doubt, subsection (1) also covers everything that, immediately before the transition time, was taken, because of:


    (a) section 701-1 (Single entity rule); or


    (b) section 701-5 (Entry history rule); or


    (c) section 703-75 (about the effects of choice to continue consolidated group after shelf company becomes new head company); or


    (ca) section 719-125 (about the effects of a group conversion involving a MEC group); or

    View history reference


    (d) one or more previous applications of this section;

    to have happened in relation to the old head company.

     View history note

    719-90(3)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) have effect:


    (a) for the head company core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the transition time; and


    (b) for the entity core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the transition time.

    719-90(4)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) have effect subject to:


    (a) section 701-40 (Exit history rule); and


    (b) a provision of this Act to which section 701-40 is subject because of section 701-85 (about exceptions to the core rules in Division 701 ).

    Note:

    An example of provisions covered by paragraph (b) of this subsection is section 707-410 , which ensures that section 701-40 (Exit history rule) does not result in a leaving entity inheriting a loss of any sort.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-95   No consequences of old head company becoming, and new head company ceasing to be, subsidiary member of the group  

    View history reference

    719-95(1)    
    A provision of this Part that applies on an entity becoming a * subsidiary member of a * MEC group does not apply to an entity being taken to have become such a member because the entity stopped being the * head company of the group as mentioned in section 719-85 , unless the provision is expressed to apply despite this subsection.

    Note:

    An example of the effect of this subsection is that section 701-5 (Entry history rule) does not apply. See instead section 719-90 .


    719-95(2)    
    To avoid doubt, subsection (1) does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

    719-95(3)    
    A provision of this Part that applies on an entity ceasing to be a * subsidiary member of a * MEC group does not apply to an entity being taken to cease being such a member because the entity became the * head company of the group as mentioned in section 719-85 , unless the provision is expressed to apply despite this subsection.

    Note:

    An example of the effect of this subsection is that section 701-40 (Exit history rule) does not apply. See instead section 719-90 .

     View history note

    Subdivision 719-BA - Group conversions involving MEC groups  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 719-120   Application  

    View history reference

    719-120(1)    
    This Subdivision applies if, at a particular time (the conversion time ):


    (a) a *consolidated group (the new group ) is *created from a *MEC group (the old group ); or


    (b) a MEC group (the new group ) is created from a consolidated group (the old group ).

    719-120(2)    
    However, sections 719-130 and 719-135 apply only in relation to entities that:


    (a) were *members of the old group just before the conversion time; and


    (b) are members of the new group at that time.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-125   Head company of new group retains history of head company of old group  

    View history reference

    719-125(1)    
    Everything that happened in relation to the *head company of the old group before the conversion time is taken instead to have happened in relation to:


    (a) if the head company of the old group is the same entity as the head company of the new group - that entity in its role as head company of the new group; or


    (b) otherwise - the head company of the new group (just as if the head company of the new group had been the head company of the old group at all times before the conversion time).

    719-125(2)    
    To avoid doubt, subsection (1) also covers everything that, immediately before the conversion time, was taken to have happened in relation to the *head company of the old group because of:


    (a) section 701-1 (the single entity rule); or


    (b) section 701-5 (the entry history rule); or


    (c) section 703-75 (about the effects of choice to continue *consolidated group after shelf company becomes new head company); or


    (d) section 719-90 (about the effects of a change of head company of a *MEC group); or


    (e) one or more previous applications of this Division.

    719-125(3)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) have effect:


    (a) for the *head company core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the conversion time; and


    (b) for the entity core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the conversion time; and


    (c) for the purposes of determining the balance of the *franking account of the head company of the new group at and after the conversion time.

    719-125(4)    
    Subsections (1) and (2) have effect subject to:


    (a) section 701-40 (Exit history rule); and


    (b) a provision of this Act to which section 701-40 is subject because of section 701-85 (about exceptions to the core rules in Division 701 ).

    Note:

    An example of provisions covered by paragraph (b) of this subsection is Subdivision 717-E (about transferring to a company leaving a consolidated group various surpluses under the CFC rules in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 ).


     View history note

    SECTION 719-130   Provisions of this Part not to apply to conversion  

    View history reference

    719-130(1)    
    A provision mentioned in subsection (5) that applies on an entity becoming a *member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group does not apply to an entity becoming such a member because of a situation described in subsection 719-120(1) , unless the provision is expressed to apply despite this subsection.

    Note 1:

    An example of the effect of this subsection is that section 701-5 (entry history rule) does not apply. See instead section 719-125 .

    Note 2:

    Further examples of the effect of this subsection are that Division 705 (cost setting on entry) and Division 707 (losses) do not apply.


    719-130(2)    
    Subsection (1) does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

    719-130(3)    
    A provision mentioned in subsection (5) that applies on an entity ceasing to be a *member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group does not apply to an entity ceasing being such a member because of a situation described in subsection 719-120(1) , unless the provision is expressed to apply despite this subsection.

    Note 1:

    An example of the effect of this subsection is that section 701-40 (Exit history rule) does not apply. See instead section 719-125 .

    Note 2:

    Another example of the effect of this subsection is that Division 711 (cost setting on exit) does not apply.


    719-130(4)    
    Subsection (3) does not apply if:


    (a) the old group mentioned in subsection 719-120(1) is a *consolidated group; and


    (b) the new group mentioned in subsection 719-120(1) is a *MEC group; and


    (c) the entity ceasing to be a *member of the old group becomes an *eligible tier-1 company in respect of the new group.

    719-130(5)    
    The provisions are as follows:


    (a) Subdivision 104-L ;


    (b) section 165-212E ;


    (c) this Part (other than this Subdivision);


    (d) Part 3-90 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 .

     View history note

    SECTION 719-135   Provisions of this Part applying to conversion despite section 719-130  

    View history reference

    719-135(1)    
    This section applies despite subsections 719-130(1) and (3) .

    719-135(2)    
    If the new group is a *consolidated group, the following provisions may apply on an entity ceasing to be a *member of the old group:


    (a) Subdivision 719-K ;


    (b) any other provision of this Part, to the extent that the application of the provision is necessary for the application of Subdivision 719-K .

     View history note

    SECTION 719-140  

    719-140   Other provisions of this Part not applying to conversion  

    View history reference

    If the new group is a *consolidated group, the following provisions do not apply merely because the old group ceases to exist at the conversion time (or merely because the *potential MEC group of which the old group consisted ceases to exist at that time):


    (a) section 719-280 ;


    (b) section 719-465 ;


    (c) section 719-705 ;


    (d) section 719-725 ;


    (e) any other provision of this Part, to the extent that the application of the provision is necessary for the application of any of those sections.

     View history note

    Subdivision 719-C - MEC group cost setting rules: joining cases  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 719-150   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    When an entity (other than an eligible tier-1 company) becomes a subsidiary member of a MEC group, the tax cost of its assets is set at a tax cost setting amount that is worked out in accordance with Divisions 701 and 705 as modified by this Subdivision. Assets of eligible tier-1 companies becoming members of a MEC group do not have their tax cost set.

     View history note

    Application and object

    SECTION 719-155  

    719-155   Object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    The object of this Subdivision is to modify the tax cost setting rules in Divisions 701 and 705 so that they take account of the special characteristics of * MEC groups.
     View history note

    Modified application of tax cost setting rules for joining

    SECTION 719-160   Tax cost setting rules for joining have effect with modifications  

    View history reference

    719-160(1A)    

    View history reference

    This section applies if an entity (the MEC joining entity ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * MEC group at a time (the MEC joining time ).
     View history note

    719-160(1)    
    This section has effect for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) .

    General modifying rule

    719-160(2)    
    The provisions mentioned in subsection (3) operate, for the purposes of setting the * tax cost of an asset of the MEC joining entity, as if each * subsidiary member of the group (including the MEC joining entity) that is an * eligible tier-1 company at the MEC joining time were a part of the * head company of the group, rather than a separate entity.

    Note 1:

    This subsection means that references in those provisions to matters internal to the group operate as if eligible tier-1 companies in the group were parts of the head company of the group. For example:

  • (a) provisions operating if the head company holds (whether directly or indirectly) membership interests in another entity operate even if an eligible tier-1 company actually holds those interests; and
  • (b) provisions operating if the head company owns or controls another entity operate even if one or more eligible tier-1 companies actually own or control that other entity; and
  • (c) provisions operating if an entity is interposed between the head company and another entity operate even if the first entity is actually interposed between an eligible tier-1 company and the other entity.
  • Note 2:

    If the MEC joining entity is an eligible tier-1 company, this subsection means the assets of the entity do not have their tax cost reset at the MEC joining time. This is because Subdivision 705-A (and related provisions) reset the tax cost of assets of subsidiary members of a group, but not assets of the head company.


    719-160(3)    
    The provisions are:


    (a) section 701-10 (about setting the tax cost of assets of an entity joining a group); and

    View history reference


    (b) Subdivision 705-A ; and


    (c) any other provision of this Act giving Subdivision 705-A a modified effect in circumstances other than those covered by that Subdivision.

    Note:

    An example of provisions covered by paragraph (c) are the provisions of Subdivision 705-B giving Subdivision 705-A a modified effect when a consolidated group is formed.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-165   Trading stock value and registered emissions unit value not set for assets of eligible tier-1 companies  

    View history reference

    719-165(1)    
    This section applies if an entity (the MEC joining entity ) becomes a * subsidiary member of a * MEC group at a time (the MEC joining time ).

    719-165(2)    
    Subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount) does not apply to the assets of the MEC joining entity if it is an * eligible tier-1 company at the MEC joining time.

    719-165(3)    

    View history reference

    Subsection 701-35(5) (setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount) does not apply to the assets of the MEC joining entity if it is an *eligible tier-1 company at the MEC joining time.
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 719-170   Modified effect of subsections 705-175(1) and 705-185(1)  

    View history reference

    719-170(1)    
    This section applies if all of the * members of a * MEC group (the acquired group ) become members of another MEC group, or of a * consolidated group, at a particular time (the acquisition time ) as a result of the * acquisition of * membership interests in:


    (a) the * head company of the acquired group; and


    (b) other entities that were * eligible tier-1 companies of the acquired group just before the acquisition time.

    719-170(2)    
    Subsections 705-175(1) and 705-185(1) have effect as if a * membership interest in an entity mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) of this section were a membership interest in the * head company of the acquired group.

    Note 1:

    If the acquiring group is a MEC group, and the head company of the acquired group becomes an eligible tier-1 company of the acquiring group, the assets of the members of the acquired group do not have their tax cost reset at the acquisition time. This is because:

  • (a) section 719-160 treats an entity becoming an eligible tier-1 company of the acquiring group as if it were a part of the head company of that group; and
  • (b) section 705-185 treats the subsidiary members of the acquired group as part of the head company of the acquired group.
  • Note 2:

    If:

  • (a) the acquiring group is a MEC group, but the head company of the acquired group does not become an eligible tier-1 company of the acquiring group; or
  • (b) the acquiring group is a consolidated group and the acquired group is a MEC group;
  • the assets of the members of the acquired group have their tax cost reset at the acquisition time (section 719-160 does not preclude tax cost resetting in these cases). For the purposes of resetting the tax cost of those assets, section 705-185 treats the subsidiary members of the acquired group as part of the head company of the acquired group.

     View history note

    Subdivision 719-F - Losses  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 719-250   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision modifies the rules about transferring and utilising losses so the rules operate appropriately in relation to MEC groups, taking account of the special characteristics of those groups. The modifications mainly affect:

  • (a) rules about maintaining the same ownership to be able to utilise a loss; and
  • (b) rules for working out how much of a loss can be utilised by reference to bundles of losses and their available fractions.
  •  View history note

    Maintaining the same ownership to be able to utilise loss

    SECTION 719-255   Special rules  

    View history reference

    719-255(1)    
    This section and section 719-260 have effect for the purposes of working out whether a loss can be * utilised for an income year (the claim year ) by a company (the focal company ) that made the loss if:


    (a) section 165-12 is relevant to the question whether the focal company can utilise the loss; and


    (b) the focal company is the * head company of a * MEC group at any time in its * ownership test period for the loss (as affected by section 707-205 , if relevant).

    Note:

    If the focal company made the loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A , section 707-205 has the effect that the ownership test period starts for the focal company at the time of the transfer.



    Section 707-210 does not have effect

    719-255(2)    
    Section 707-210 does not have effect for the purposes of working out whether the focal company can * utilise the loss for the claim year.

    Note:

    Section 707-210 is about whether a company can utilise a loss it made because the loss was transferred to it under Subdivision 707-A because the transferor met the conditions in section 165-12 .

     View history note

    SECTION 719-260   Special test for utilising a loss because a company maintains the same owners  

    View history reference

    Meeting the conditions in section 165-12

    719-260(1)    
    The focal company is taken to meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the claim year and the loss if and only if the company (the test company ) identified in relation to the focal company in accordance with section 719-265 would have met those conditions for that year on the relevant assumptions in:


    (a) section 719-270 (which is about assuming the test company made the loss for a particular income year); and


    (b) section 719-275 (which is about assuming that nothing happened in relation to certain things that would affect whether the test company would meet those conditions); and


    (c) section 719-280 (which is about assuming that the test company would have failed to meet those conditions in certain circumstances).

    Focal company ' s failure to meet conditions in section 165-12

    719-260(2)    
    The focal company is taken to fail to meet a condition in section 165-12 only at:


    (a) the first time the test company would have failed to meet the condition on the relevant assumptions mentioned in subsection (1); or


    (b) the * test time described in subsection 166-5(6) for the test company, if:


    (i) Division 166 is relevant to working out whether the test company could have * utilised the loss for the claim year on the relevant assumptions mentioned in paragraphs (1)(a) and (b); and

    (ii) the test company is not assumed under section 719-280 to fail to meet the condition before the test time.
    View history reference
    Note:

    If the focal company is taken to fail to meet a condition in section 165-12 , the focal company will not be able to utilise the loss for the claim year unless the focal company meets the condition in section 165-13 by satisfying the business continuity test. That test applies to the focal company (and not the test company).

     View history note


    Business continuity test for focal company under Division 166

    719-260(3)    

    View history reference

    If subsection 166-5(5) affects whether the focal company can * utilise the loss for the claim year because the focal company is a * widely held company or an * eligible Division 166 company, or both, during the year, subsection 166-5(6) operates as if it required the *business continuity test to be applied to the * business the focal company carried on just before the time described in subsection (2) of this section.
     View history note


    Business continuity test for focal company to transfer loss

    719-260(4)    
    If subsection 707-125(4) is relevant to working out whether the focal company can transfer the loss to a company under Subdivision 707-A , that subsection:


    (a) has effect as if subsection 707-125(5) described the focal company ' s income year containing the time at which the focal company is taken under subsection (2) of this section to fail to meet a condition in section 165-12 ; and


    (b) has effect despite subsection (3) of this section.

    Note:

    For working out whether certain losses can be transferred under Subdivision 707-A , subsection 707-125(4) modifies the operation of subsection 166-5(6) by extending the business continuity test period to include the income year described in subsection 707-125(5) .

     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 719-265   What is the test company?  

    View history reference

    719-265(1)    
    To identify for the purposes of section 719-260 the company that is the test company for the focal company for the loss:


    (a) first, identify the test company for the focal company by applying whichever one of subsections (2), (3), (3A), (4) and (6) is relevant; and

    View history reference


    (b) then, if the condition in column 1 of an item of the table is met, apply this section again to identify the test company as if the company described in column 2 of the item were the focal company, taking account only of things that happened before the event described in column 3 of the item.


    Repeated application of this section
    Column 1
    If the test company for the focal company is identified:
    Column 2
    Apply this section again as if this company were the focal company:
    Column 3
    Take account only of things that happened before this event:
    1 Under subsection (2) as the company that is the test company for the transferor The transferor mentioned in subsection (2) The transfer mentioned in subsection (2)
    2 Under subsection (6) as the company that is the test company for the first head company The first head company mentioned in subsection (6) The first head company ceasing to be the *head company of the *MEC group mentioned in subsection (6)

    Note:

    More than 2 applications of this section may be needed to identify the test company for the focal company.

     View history note


    COT transfer of loss to focal company

    719-265(2)    
    The test company for the focal company is the company described in column 2 of the relevant item of the table if the focal company made the loss because of a * COT transfer to the focal company.


    Test company for the focal company
    Column 1
    If:
    Column 2
    The test company for the focal company is:
    1 The focal company and the transferor are the same company The focal company
    2 The focal company and the transferor are different companies The company that is the test company for the transferor



    Loss transferred because business continuity test satisfied

    719-265(3)    

    View history reference

    The test company for the focal company is the company described in column 2 of the relevant item of the table if the focal company made the loss because the loss was transferred under Subdivision 707-A to the focal company from a company because it satisfied the *business continuity test for:


    (a) the *business continuity test period; and

    View history reference


    (b) the * test time specified in Division 165 or 166 or section 707-125 .


    Test company for the focal company
    Column 1
    If:
    Column 2
    The test company for the focal company is:
    1 The focal company was the *head company of a *MEC group at the time of the transfer The company that was the *top company for the MEC group at the time of the transfer
    2 The focal company was not the *head company of a *MEC group at the time of the transfer The focal company

     View history note


    Transfer of tax loss from designated infrastructure project entity

    719-265(3A)    

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) the focal company made the loss because the loss was transferred under Subdivision 707-A to the focal company as the * head company of a * MEC group; and


    (b) subsection 707-120(5) (about designated infrastructure project entities joining consolidated groups) applies to the transfer;

    the test company for the focal company is the company that was the * top company for the MEC group at the time of a transfer.

     View history note


    Loss not transferred from a company

    719-265(4)    
    The test company for the focal company is the company described in column 2 of the relevant item of the table if the focal company made the loss apart from a transfer of the loss under Subdivision 707-A from a company.


    Test company for the focal company
    Column 1
    If:
    Column 2
    The test company for the focal company is:
    1 The focal company made the loss apart from Subdivision 707-A and was the *head company of a *MEC group at the start of the income year for which it made the loss The company that was the *top company for the MEC group at the start of the income year
    2 The focal company made the loss because it was transferred under Subdivision 707-A to the focal company as the *head company of a *MEC group from an entity other than a company The company that was the *top company for the MEC group at the time of the transfer
    3 Neither item 1 nor item 2 applies The focal company



    Relationship between subsections (2), (3) and (4)

    719-265(5)    
    Subsection (2) or (3), and not subsection (4), is relevant for identifying the test company for the focal company if the focal company made the loss apart from a transfer under Subdivision 707-A , and later transferred the loss to itself under that Subdivision.

    Change of head company

    719-265(6)    
    If, under section 719-90 , the focal company is taken to have made the loss because:


    (a) a company (the first head company ) other than the focal company made the loss apart from that section and either:


    (i) was the * head company of a * MEC group at any time during the income year for which it made the loss; or

    (ii) became the head company of a MEC group after that income year (without having been a * subsidiary member of the group before becoming the head company); and


    (b) the focal company was later the head company of the MEC group;

    the test company for the focal company is the company that is the test company for the first head company.

    Note:

    Section 719-90 applies if there is a change in the head company of a MEC group, treating the later head company as if what had happened to the earlier head company had happened to the later head company.


    719-265(7)    

    View history reference

    Subsections (2), (3), (3A) and (4) and section 719-90 have effect subject to subsection (6) of this section.
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 719-270   Assumptions about the test company having made the loss for an income year  

    View history reference

    If test company was top company for focal company ' s MEC group

    719-270(1)    
    If the test company was the * top company for a * MEC group and the focal company is or was the * head company of that MEC group, assume that the test company made the loss for an income year starting at the relevant time shown in the table.


    Start of income year for which test company is assumed to have made loss
    If: The relevant time is:
    1 The focal company made the loss apart from Subdivision 707-A The start of the income year for which the focal company made the loss
    2 The focal company made the loss because it was transferred to the focal company under Subdivision 707-A The time of the transfer

    Note:

    Subsection (1) applies even if the test company is still the top company for the MEC group at the end of the claim year.



    If test company is focal company or first head company

    719-270(2)    
    If the test company is:


    (a) the focal company; or


    (b) the first head company identified in subsection 719-265(6) by reference to the focal company;

    assume that the test company made the loss for an income year starting at the relevant time shown in the table.


    Start of income year for which test company is assumed to have made loss
    If: The relevant time is:
    1 The test company made the loss apart from Subdivision 707-A (even if the test company later transferred the loss to itself in a *COT transfer) The start of the income year for which the test company made the loss
    2 The test company made the loss because it was transferred to the test company under Subdivision 707-A in a transfer other than a *COT transfer (even if the test company first made the loss apart from that Subdivision) The time of the transfer


    719-270(3)    
    If the test company is the first head company, disregard section 719-90 for the purposes of working out the relevant time using the table in subsection (2) of this section.

    Note:

    This ensures that section 719-90 does not make the items in the table inapplicable by treating the test company as if another company had made the loss instead of the test company.



    If subsections (1) and (2) do not apply

    719-270(4)    
    If neither subsection (1) nor subsection (2) applies, assume that the test company made the loss for an income year starting at the relevant time shown in the table.


    Start of income year for which test company is assumed to have made loss
    If: The relevant time is:
    1 The test company made the loss apart from Subdivision 707-A (even if the test company later transferred the loss to itself in a *COT transfer) The start of the income year for which the test company made the loss
    2 The test company made the loss because it was transferred to the test company under Subdivision 707-A in a transfer other than a *COT transfer (even if the test company first made the loss apart from that Subdivision) The time of the transfer
    3 The test company is the test company for the focal company for the loss because the test company was the *top company for a *MEC group whose *head company made the loss before it was transferred to the focal company under Subdivision 707-A The time that was the relevant time under subsection (1) for the test company as the test company for the first company for which the test company was the test company for the loss

    Note:

    Subsection (4) applies if the focal company made the loss because of a COT transfer of the loss to the focal company from another company.


    719-270(5)    
    Disregard section 719-90 for the purposes of items 1 and 2 of the table in subsection (4) of this section if the test company was identified using subsection 719-265(6) .

    Note:

    This ensures that section 719-90 does not make those items inapplicable by treating the test company as if another company had made the loss instead of the test company.



    Other events do not override assumption

    719-270(6)    
    If the test company transferred the loss to itself or another company under Subdivision 707-A , assume that the transfer did not affect, for income years ending after the transfer:


    (a) the fact that the test company made the loss; or


    (b) the income year for which the test company is assumed (under subsection (1), (2) or (4)) to have made the loss.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-275   Assumptions about nothing happening to affect direct and indirect ownership of the test company  

    View history reference

    719-275(1)    
    This section sets out an assumption that must be made whenever an event described in subsection (2) occurs:


    (a) after the time assumed under section 719-270 to be the start of the income year for which the test company made the loss; and


    (b) before the end of the claim year;

    (whether or not the test company or the focal company is one of the companies mentioned in the description of the event).


    719-275(2)    
    Assume that, after an event described in an item of the table, nothing happens in relation to * membership interests or voting power in an entity described in the item that would affect whether the test company would meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the claim year and the loss.


    Assumption about nothing happening to membership interests or voting power
    If this event occurs: Assume that nothing happens in relation to membership interests or voting power in:
    1 There is a *COT transfer of the loss to the *head company of a *MEC group (but not from a company that was the head company of another MEC group just before the transfer) The transferor or an entity that was at the time of the transfer interposed between the transferor and the *top company for the MEC group
    2 There is a *COT transfer of the loss to the *head company of a *MEC group from a company that was the head company of another MEC group just before the transfer The company that was just before the transfer the *top company for the other MEC group, or an entity that was at the time of the transfer interposed between that company and the top company of the MEC group to whose head company the loss was transferred
    3 There is a change in the identity of the *top company for a *MEC group whose *head company has made the loss The company that ceased to be the top company for the MEC group as part of the change or an entity that was at the time of the change interposed between that company and the company that became the top company for the MEC group as part of the change
    4 A company that has made the loss becomes at a time the *head company of a *MEC group (as the first company to be the head company of the group) and has not before that time transferred the loss to another company under Subdivision 707-A The company or an entity that was at the time interposed between the company and the *top company for the MEC group
    5 There is a *COT transfer of the loss to the *head company of a *consolidated group from another company The other company or an entity that was at the time of the transfer interposed between the other company and the head company


    719-275(3)    
    For the purposes of this section, a company is taken to make a loss:


    (a) at the start of the income year for which the company makes the loss, if it makes the loss apart from a transfer under Subdivision 707-A (even if the company later transfers the loss to itself under that Subdivision); or


    (b) at the time the loss is transferred to the company under that Subdivision, if the company makes the loss because of that transfer.

    719-275(4)    
    Disregard section 719-90 for the purposes of making an assumption on the basis of item 1 of the table in subsection (2) of this section if (apart from that section):


    (a) the * COT transfer mentioned in that item was from the * head company of the * MEC group to itself; and


    (b) for an income year starting after the transfer, another company was the head company of the group.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-280  Assumptions about the test company failing to meet the conditions in section 165-12  

    View history reference

    719-280(1)    
    Assume that the test company fails to meet the conditions in section 165-12 at the time an event described in subsection (2), (3) or (4) happens after the start of the * ownership test period for the focal company in relation to:


    (a) the * MEC group whose * head company was the focal company; or


    (b) the * potential MEC group whose membership was the same as the membership of that MEC group.

    Note:

    If the test company is assumed to fail to meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the claim year and the loss, the focal company is taken (under section 719-260 ) to have failed to meet those conditions.


    719-280(2)    
    One event is the * potential MEC group ceasing to exist.

    719-280(3)    
    Another event is something happening that meets these conditions:


    (a) the thing happens at a time in relation to * membership interests in one or more of these entities:


    (i) a company that was just before that time a * member of the * MEC group and an * eligible tier-1 company of the * top company for the MEC group;

    (ii) an entity interposed between a company described in subparagraph (i) and the company that was the top company for the group just before that time;


    (b) the thing does not cause the * potential MEC group to cease to exist but does cause a change in the identity of the top company for the potential MEC group.

    719-280(4)    
    Another event is the * MEC group ceasing to exist because there ceases to be a * provisional head company of the group.

    Other causes of failure to meet conditions in section 165-12

    719-280(5)    
    To avoid doubt, this section does not limit the circumstances in which the test company would have failed to meet the conditions in section 165-12 on the relevant assumptions set out in sections 719-270 and 719-275 .

     View history note

    Business continuity test and change of head company

    SECTION 719-285  

    719-285   Business continuity test and change of head company  

    View history reference

    In working out whether the *business continuity test is satisfied by a company that, after the * test time, became the * head company of a * MEC group that existed before that time, disregard what happened in relation to the company before it became a * member of the group. Section 719-90 has effect subject to this section.
    Note 1:

    The business continuity test is to be applied on the basis that the company's business at the test time was the business that section 719-90 treats the company as having carried on at that time, except to the extent that section 719-90 attributes to the company its actual history before it became a member of the MEC group.

    Note 2:

    Section 719-90 applies if there is a change in the head company of a MEC group, treating the later head company as if what had happened to the earlier head company had happened to the later head company.

     View history note

    Bundles of losses and their available fractions

    SECTION 719-300   Application  

    View history reference

    719-300(1)    
    Sections 719-305 , 719-310 , 719-315 , 719-320 and 719-325 operate only if:


    (a) a company (the ongoing head company ) is the * head company of a * MEC group for an income year or a period in an income year; and


    (b) an event (the application event ) described in subsection (2) or (3) happens at a time in the income year in relation to the group.

    719-300(2)    
    One application event is that another company (the new tier-1 member ) becomes both a * member of the * MEC group and an * eligible tier-1 company of the * top company for the group.

    719-300(3)    
    The other application event is that the * MEC group comes into existence as a result of a * special conversion event happening to the * potential MEC group derived from the ongoing head company.

    Note:

    This application event happens only if the ongoing head company was the head company of a consolidated group just before the special conversion event.



    Exceptions for events involving subsidiary members of group

    719-300(4)    
    Those sections do not operate because of the event described in subsection (2) if the new tier-1 member was a * subsidiary member of the * MEC group immediately before the event.

    719-300(5)    
    Those sections do not operate because of the event described in subsection (3) if all the other companies that are described in paragraph 719-40(1)(c) and are involved in the * special conversion event were * subsidiary members of the * consolidated group just before the event.

    719-300(6)    
    Subsections (4) and (5) have effect despite subsection (1).

     View history note

    SECTION 719-305   Subdivision 707-C affects utilisation of losses made by ongoing head company while it was head company  

    View history reference

    719-305(1)    
    For income years ending after the application event happened, Subdivision 707-C affects the * utilisation of all losses (the prior group losses ) of any * sort that the ongoing head company made (apart from Subdivision 707-A ) for an income year that:


    (a) was an income year during which the * MEC group was in existence (or, if the application event involved the MEC group coming into existence because of a * special conversion event involving a * consolidated group, the consolidated group was in existence); and


    (b) was before the income year in which the event happened.

    Prior group losses taken to have been transferred at time of event

    719-305(2)    
    The ongoing head company is taken to have transferred the prior group losses to itself under Subdivision 707-A at the time of the application event, for the purposes of:


    (a) the application of Subdivision 707-C in relation to the * utilisation of the prior group losses and other losses; and


    (b) future applications of this section and section 719-310 .

    Available fraction for bundle of losses

    719-305(3)    
    For the purpose of working out the * available fraction for the * bundle of the prior group losses at the time of the transfer, work out the ongoing head company's * modified market value at the time of the application event as if:


    (a) the ongoing head company had become a * member of a * consolidated group at the time; and


    (b) each * subsidiary member of the MEC group or consolidated group of which the ongoing head company was the * head company just before the event were a part of the ongoing head company (and not a separate entity) at the time of the event; and


    (c) each subsidiary member of that group at an earlier time had been a part of the ongoing head company (and not a separate entity) at the earlier time.

    Deemed transfer does not affect year of loss

    719-305(4)    
    Subdivision 707-C affects the * utilisation as if each of the prior group losses had been made by the ongoing head company for the income year for which the company actually made the loss (and not the income year in which the application event happened). Subsection (2) has effect subject to this subsection.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-310   Adjustment of available fractions for bundles of losses previously transferred to ongoing head company  

    View history reference

    719-310(1)    
    This section affects the * available fraction for each * bundle of losses that were transferred to the ongoing head company under Subdivision 707-A before the application event.

    719-310(2)    

    View history reference

    The available fraction for the * bundle is reduced or maintained just after the event by multiplying it by this fraction:


    *Market value of the ongoing head company
                      just before the application event                  
    *Market value of the ongoing head company
    just after the application event

    Note:

    The market value of the ongoing head company at the time just before or just after the application event will be worked out on the basis that subsidiary members of the MEC group or consolidated group headed by the ongoing head company at that time are part of the ongoing head company, because of section 701-1 (the single entity rule).


    719-310(3)    
    Item 3 of the table in subsection 707-320(2) does not apply to affect the * available fraction for the * bundle because of:


    (a) the transfer mentioned in section 719-305 ; or


    (b) the transfer (if any) to the ongoing head company of a loss of any * sort under Subdivision 707-A at the time of the application event from an entity that became a * subsidiary member of the * MEC group as a result of the event.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-315   Further adjustment of available fractions for all bundles  

    View history reference

    719-315(1)    
    If, because of the application event:


    (a) there is under section 719-305 an * available fraction for the * bundle of prior group losses; and


    (b) section 719-310 affects the available fraction for one or more other bundles of losses;

    this section affects the available fraction for every one of those bundles.


    719-315(2)    
    The available fraction (as affected by section 719-305 or 719-310 ) is reduced by multiplying it by this fraction:


      *Available fraction for the *bundle of prior group losses  
    Sum of the *available fraction for every *bundle of
    losses whose available fraction is affected by this section


    719-315(3)    
    For the purposes of working out the fraction in subsection (2), use the value of an * available fraction for a * bundle of losses apart from:


    (a) this section; and


    (b) if item 5 of the table in subsection 707-320(2) would apply as a result of the calculation of the available fraction in accordance with section 719-305 or 719-310 - that item.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-320   Limit on utilising losses other than the prior group losses  

    View history reference

    719-320(1)    
    This section has effect for the purposes of working out how much of the losses, other than prior group losses, in a * bundle the ongoing head company can * utilise for the income year in which the application event happens.

    719-320(2)    
    For the purposes of subsection 707-310(3) , the prior group losses are to be treated as if they had not been transferred under Subdivision 707-A , to the extent to which the ongoing head company can * utilise them for the income year because they are treated as being included in a * bundle whose available fraction was 1 from the start of the income year until the time of the application event.

    719-320(3)    
    This section is a matter that is relevant for the purposes of paragraph 707-335(3)(f) , if section 707-335 applies to the ongoing head company's * utilisation of the losses in the * bundle for the income year.

    Note:

    That section applies to a company's utilisation for an income year of losses in a bundle if the losses are transferred under Subdivision 707-A after the start of the year or if the value of the available fraction for the bundle changes during the year while the company is treated as having made the losses because of that Subdivision.


    719-320(4)    
    Section 719-305 has effect subject to this section.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-325   Cancellation of all losses in a bundle 

    View history reference

    719-325(1)    
    The ongoing head company:


    (a) may choose to cancel all the losses in the * bundle of prior group losses; and


    (b) may choose to cancel all the losses in a * bundle of losses to which section 719-310 applies.

    719-325(2)    
    If the ongoing head company chooses to cancel all the losses in a * bundle, subsections (3), (4), (5), (6) and (7) operate.

    719-325(3)    
    The ongoing head company cannot * utilise for the income year in which the application event happened more of the losses than it would have been able to utilise under Subdivision 707-C assuming:


    (a) if the losses are prior group losses:


    (i) the losses were in a * bundle for the income year; and

    (ii) the * available fraction for the bundle were 1 for the period from the start of the income year until the event happened; and


    (b) in any case - the available fraction for the bundle including the losses were 0 from the time of the event until the end of the income year.

    Note:

    Section 707-335 is relevant to working out how much of the losses could be utilised, because the value of the available fraction for the bundle changes during the period described in that section.


    719-325(4)    
    The ongoing head company cannot:


    (a) transfer the losses to another company under Division 170 for an income year ending after the application event; or


    (b) transfer the losses to another company under Subdivision 707-A after the application event.

    This subsection has effect despite subsection (3).


    719-325(5)    
    Disregard the existence of the * bundle at and after the time of the application event for the purposes of working out the * available fraction for another * bundle of losses.

    719-325(6)    
    The losses cannot be * utilised by any entity for an income year starting after the application event.

    719-325(7)    
    The choice cannot be revoked.

     View history note

    Subdivision 719-H - Imputation issues  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 719-425   Guide to Subdivision 719-H  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision deals with some imputation issues in relation to MEC groups.

     View history note

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 719-430   Transfer of franking account balance on cessation event  

    View history reference

    719-430(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) a * cessation event happens to the * provisional head company of a * MEC group (the former head company ); and


    (b) another company (the new head company ) is appointed as the provisional head company of the group under subsection 719-60(3) .

    719-430(2)    
    When the new head company is appointed:


    (a) the * franking account of the former head company ceases to operate; and


    (b) the new head company has a franking account; and


    (c) any * franking surplus or * franking deficit in the franking account of the former head company just before the * cessation event happened becomes that of the new head company.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-435   Distributions by subsidiary members of MEC group taken to be distributions by head company  

    View history reference

    719-435(1)    
    Part 3-6 operates as if a * frankable distribution made by an* eligible tier-1 company that:


    (a) is a member of a * MEC group; and


    (b) is not the * provisional head company of the group;

    had been made by the provisional head company of the group to a * member of the provisional head company.

    Note:

    Part 3-6 deals with imputation.


    719-435(2)    
    Part 3-6 operates as if a * frankable distribution made by a * subsidiary member of a * MEC group (the foreign-held subsidiary ) that is not an * eligible tier-1 company were a frankable distribution made by the * head company of the group to a * member of the head company if:


    (a) the foreign-held subsidiary meets the set of requirements in section 703-45 , section 701C-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 or section 701C-15 of that Act; and


    (b) the frankable distribution is made to a foreign resident.

     View history note

    Subdivision 719-I - Bad debts  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 719-450   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    The head company of a MEC group is taken to meet the conditions in section 165-123 (about maintaining the same ownership in an ownership test period to be able to deduct a bad debt) if and only if the top company for the group at the start of the period meets those conditions for the period.

     View history note

    Maintaining the same ownership to be able to deduct bad debt

    SECTION 719-455   Special test for deducting a bad debt because a company maintains the same owners  

    View history reference

    719-455(1)    
    This section has effect for the purposes of working out whether the * head company of a * MEC group:


    (a) can deduct a debt it writes off as bad; or


    (b) could have deducted a debt as described in subsection 709-215(2) .

    Note:

    Whether the head company of the MEC group could have deducted a debt as described in subsection 709-215(2) is relevant under Subdivision 709-D to:

  • (a) the question whether the head company can deduct the debt it writes off as bad, or the swap loss it makes in extinguishing the debt as part of a debt/equity swap, after the debt was owed to an entity while the entity was not a member of the MEC group; and
  • (b) the question whether an entity that was owed the debt after it was owed to the head company can deduct the amount of the debt the entity writes off as bad or the swap loss the entity makes in extinguishing the debt as part of a debt/equity swap.

  • 719-455(2)    
    The * head company is taken to meet the conditions in section 165-123 (about the company maintaining the same owners) for the * ownership test period if and only if the company (the test company ) that was the * top company for the * MEC group at the start of the same period would have met those conditions for that period on the assumptions in the following sections (if applicable):


    (a) section 719-460 (which is about assuming that nothing happened in relation to certain things that would affect whether the test company would meet those conditions);


    (b) section 719-465 (which is about assuming that the test company would have failed to meet those conditions in certain circumstances).

    Note 1:

    Even though subsection (2) of this section raises the issue whether the test company meets the conditions in section 165-123 , that is determined by reference to:

  • (a) the ownership test period for the head company of the MEC group; and
  • (b) the debt owed to the head company.
  • Note 2:

    If this section is applying for the purposes of working out whether the head company could have deducted a debt as described in subsection 709-215(2) , section 709-215 affects what is the ownership test period for the purposes of section 165-123 as it applies for those purposes.



    Head company ' s failure to meet conditions in section 165-123

    719-455(3)    
    The * head company is taken to fail to meet a condition in section 165-123 only at:


    (a) the first time the test company would have failed to meet the condition on the relevant assumptions mentioned in subsection (2); or


    (b) the * test time described in section 166-40 for the test company, if:


    (i) Division 166 is relevant to working out whether the test company met the conditions in section 165-123 on the relevant assumption mentioned in paragraph (2)(a); and

    (ii) the test company is not assumed under section 719-465 to fail to meet the condition before the test time.
    Note 1:

    If the head company is taken to fail to meet a condition in section 165-123 , the head company will not be able to deduct the debt unless that company meets the condition in section 165-126 by satisfying the business continuity test. That test applies to the head company (and not the test company).

    Note 2:

    Section 719-285 may affect whether the head company satisfies the business continuity test if there has been a change in the identity of the head company of the group during the ownership test period.

     View history note


    Business continuity test for head company under Division 166

    719-455(4)    

    View history reference

    If section 166-40 directly affects whether the * head company can deduct the debt, the subsection of that section that requires the *business continuity test to be applied to a particular * business operates as if it required that test to be applied to the business the head company carried on just before the time described in subsection (3) of this section.
    Note:

    Section 166-40 has an indirect effect on whether the head company can deduct the debt so far as that section affects whether the test company meets the conditions in section 165-123 and therefore whether the head company is taken to meet those conditions.

     View history note
     View history note

    SECTION 719-460   Assumptions about nothing happening to affect direct and indirect ownership of the test company  

    View history reference

    719-460(1)    
    This section sets out an assumption that must be made whenever there is a change in the identity of the * top company for the * MEC group during the * ownership test period.

    719-460(2)    
    Assume that after the change nothing happens in relation to * membership interests or voting power in the following entities that would affect whether the test company would meet the conditions in section 165-123 :


    (a) the company that was the * top company for the * MEC group before the change;


    (b) an entity (if any) that at the time of the change was interposed between:


    (i) the company that was the top company for the MEC group before the change; and

    (ii) the company that became the top company for the MEC group as part of the change.
     View history note

    SECTION 719-465   Assumptions about the test company failing to meet the conditions in section 165-123  

    719-465(1)    
    Assume that the test company fails to meet the conditions in section 165-123 at the time an event described in subsection (2), (3) or (4) happens after the start of the * ownership test period in relation to:


    (a) the * MEC group; or


    (b) the * potential MEC group whose membership was the same as the membership of the MEC group.

    Note:

    If the test company is assumed to fail to meet the conditions in section 165-123 , the head company of the MEC group is taken (under section 719-455 ) to have failed to meet those conditions.


    719-465(2)    
    One event is the * potential MEC group ceasing to exist.

    719-465(3)    
    Another event is something happening that meets these conditions:


    (a) the thing happens at a time in relation to * membership interests in one or more of these entities:


    (i) a company that was just before that time a * member of the * MEC group and an * eligible tier-1 company of the * top company for the MEC group;

    (ii) an entity interposed between a company described in subparagraph (i) and the company that was the top company for the group just before that time;


    (b) the thing does not cause the * potential MEC group to cease to exist but does cause a change in the identity of the top company for the potential MEC group.

    719-465(4)    
    Another event is the * MEC group ceasing to exist because there ceases to be a * provisional head company of the group.

    Other causes of failure to meet conditions in section 165-123

    719-465(5)    
    To avoid doubt, this section does not limit the circumstances in which the test company would have failed to meet the conditions in section 165-123 .

     View history note

    Subdivision 719-J - MEC group cost setting rules: leaving cases  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 719-500   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    When an entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of a MEC group, the tax cost setting amount for the group's membership interests in the entity is worked out in accordance with Division 711 as modified by this Division.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-505   Application and object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    Application

    719-505(1)    
    This Subdivision applies if the old group mentioned in subsection 711-5(1) is a * MEC group.

    Object

    719-505(2)    
    The object of this Subdivision is to modify the rules in Division 711 so that they take account of the special characteristics of * MEC groups.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-510   Modified operation of paragraphs 711-15(1)(b) and (c)  

    View history reference

    719-510(1)    
    This section applies if the leaving entity mentioned in subsection 711-15(1) is a * subsidiary member of the old group that is an * eligible tier-1 company.

    719-510(2)    
    Paragraphs 711-15(1)(b) and (c) apply as if the membership interests mentioned in those paragraphs included * pooled interests in the * eligible tier-1 company.

    Note:

    This subsection means that, in working out tax cost setting amounts for internal interests in the eligible tier-1 company, section 711-15 will allocate part of the old group's allocable cost amount for the eligible tier-1 company to the pooled interests in the company. However, the tax cost of the pooled interests is not set according to section 711-15 . Subdivision 719-K contains rules that set the cost of the pooled interests.

     View history note

    Subdivision 719-K - MEC group cost setting rules: pooling cases  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 719-550   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision contains cost setting rules for membership interests in eligible tier-1 companies that are members of a MEC group, where those interests are not held by members of the group.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-555   Application and object of this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    Application

    719-555(1)    
    This Subdivision applies if:


    (a) one or more entities hold * pooled interests (the reset interests ) in * eligible tier-1 companies that are members of a * MEC group, just before a particular time (the trigger time ); and


    (b) at the trigger time, either or both of these things happen to one or more of those eligible tier-1 companies (the trigger companies ):


    (i) the company ceases to be a member of the group;

    (ii) a * CGT event happens in relation to one or more reset interests in the company; and


    (c) the * market value of the reset interests as a whole (including the market value of synergies arising from the combination of those interests) just before the trigger time is more than nil.

    Object

    719-555(2)    
    The object of this Subdivision is to set the cost of all reset interests:


    (a) first, by allocating to each reset interest held in a trigger company so much of the total cost of all reset interests held in members of the group that the * market value of the interest bears to the group's market value; and


    (b) then, by allocating the remainder of that total cost to all reset interests held in other * eligible tier-1 companies, by dividing that remainder by the number of those interests.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-560   Pooled interests  

    View history reference

    719-560(1)    
    A pooled interest in an * eligible tier-1 company that is a member of a * MEC group is a * membership interest in the eligible tier-1 company that is held by an entity that is not a member of the group.

    Note:

    A membership interest in the head company of a MEC group can be a pooled interest.


    719-560(2)    
    Despite subsection (1), a * membership interest is not a pooled interest if it is:


    (a) a * share that is disregarded under subsection 719-30(2) ; or


    (b) held by an entity only as a nominee of one or more other entities each of which is a member of the group.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-565   Setting cost of reset interests  

    View history reference

    CGT provisions - cost base

    719-565(1)    
    If Part 3.1 or 3.3 is to apply in relation to a reset interest, the Part applies as if the interest's * cost base were increased or reduced so that the cost base just before the trigger time equals the cost setting amount worked out under section 719-570 .

    CGT provisions - reduced cost base

    719-565(2)    
    If Part 3.1 or 3.3 is to apply in relation to a reset interest, the Part applies as if the interest's * reduced cost base were increased or reduced so that the reduced cost base just before the trigger time equals the cost setting amount worked out under section 719-570 .

    Other provisions

    719-565(3)    
    If a provision of this Act (other than Part 3.1 or 3.3) is to apply in relation to a reset interest, the provision applies as if the interest's cost just before the trigger time were equal to the cost setting amount worked out under section 719-570 .

     View history note

    SECTION 719-570   Cost setting amount  

    View history reference

    Reset interests held in trigger companies - cost setting amount for cost base etc.

    719-570(1)    

    View history reference

    Work out the cost setting amount for the purposes of subsections 719-565(1) and (3) for a reset interest in a trigger company using the formula:


      *Market value of the reset interest
    *Market value of the group
    ×   Pooled cost amount  

    where:

    market value of the group
    is:


    (a) if every * eligible tier-1 company that is a member of the group just before the trigger time is a trigger company - the sum of the * market value (just before the trigger time) of all reset interests in each of those companies; or


    (b) otherwise - the amount mentioned in paragraph 719-555(1)(c).

    market value of the reset interest
    is the *market value (just before the trigger time) of all reset interests in that trigger company, in the same class as the interest, divided by the number of reset interests in that company in that class.

    pooled cost amount
    is the sum of the * cost bases (just before the trigger time) of all reset interests.



    Reset interests held in other eligible tier-1 companies - cost setting amount for cost base etc.

    719-570(2)    
    Work out the cost setting amount for the purposes of subsections 719-565 (1) and (3) for a reset interest that is not in a trigger company, using the formula:


      Pooled cost amount − Amount allocated to trigger company interests
    Number of non-trigger company interests
     

    where:

    amount allocated to trigger company interests
    is the sum of all cost setting amounts worked out under subsection (1) for the reset interests covered by that subsection.

    number of non-trigger company interests
    is the number of reset interests, other than those covered by subsection (1).

    pooled cost amount
    has the same meaning as in subsection (1).



    Cost setting amount for reduced cost base

    719-570(3)    
    Work out the cost setting amount for the purposes of subsection 719-565(2) for a reset interest by applying subsections (1) and (2) of this section in relation to the interest, as if every reference in those subsections to * cost base were a reference to * reduced cost base.

     View history note

    Subdivision 719-T - Interactions between this Part and other areas of the income tax law: special rules for MEC groups  

    View history reference
     View history note

    How Subdivision 165-CC applies to MEC groups

    SECTION 719-700   Changeover times under section 165-115C or 165-115D  

    View history reference

    719-700(1)    
    This section has effect for the purposes of determining whether a time (the test time ) is a * changeover time under section 165-115C (about changes in ownership) or 165-115D (about changes in control) in respect of the * head company of a * MEC group.

    Modified meaning of reference time

    719-700(2)    
    The reference time is:


    (a) if no * changeover time has occurred in respect of the head company since the group came into existence and before the test time - when the group came into existence; or


    (b) otherwise - the time just after the last such changeover time.

    719-700(3)    
    Subsection (2) of this section has effect despite subsection 165-115A(2A).

    Assumptions to make

    719-700(4)    
    Assume that, while the * MEC group exists:


    (a) the * top company for the group holds and beneficially owns all the * membership interests in the * head company (instead of whoever actually does); and


    (b) those membership interests remain the same; and


    (c) the top company directly controls the voting power in the head company.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-705   Additional changeover times for head company of MEC group  

    View history reference

    719-705(1)    
    The time when a * potential MEC group ceases to exist is a changeover time in respect of the * head company of a * MEC group if, just before that time, the potential MEC group's membership was the same as the membership of the MEC group.

    Note:

    The changeover times in subsections (1), (2) and (3) are based on the events described in subsections 719-280(2) , (3) and (4), each of which causes the test company referred to in section 719-280 to be assumed to fail the continuity of ownership test in section 165-12 .


    719-705(2)    
    If something:


    (a) happens at a time in relation to * membership interests in one or more of these entities:


    (i) a company that was just before that time a * member of a * MEC group and an * eligible tier-1 company of the * top company for the MEC group;

    (ii) an entity interposed between a company described in subparagraph (i) and the company that was the top company for the group just before that time; and


    (b) does not cause the * potential MEC group whose membership is the same as the membership of the MEC group to cease to exist, but does cause a change in the identity of the top company for the potential MEC group;

    that time is a changeover time in respect of the * head company of the * MEC group.


    719-705(3)    
    The time when a * MEC group ceases to exist because there ceases to be a * provisional head company of the group is a changeover time in respect of the * head company of the * MEC group.

     View history note

    How Subdivision 165-CD applies to MEC groups

    SECTION 719-720   Alteration times under section 165-115L or 165-115M  

    View history reference

    719-720(1)    
    This section has effect for the purposes of determining whether a time (the test time ) is an * alteration time under section 165-115L (about alterations in ownership) or 165-115M (about alterations in control) in respect of the * head company of a * MEC group.

    Modified meaning of reference time

    719-720(2)    
    The reference time is:


    (a) if no * alteration time has occurred in respect of the head company since the group came into existence and before the test time - when the group came into existence; or


    (b) otherwise - the time just after the last such alteration time.

    719-720(3)    
    In applying subsection (2), disregard an * alteration time arising under subsection 719-725(4) .

    719-720(4)    
    Subsection (2) of this section has effect despite subsections 165-115L(2) and 165-115M(2) .

    Assumptions to make

    719-720(5)    
    Assume that, while the * MEC group exists:


    (a) the * top company for the group holds and beneficially owns all the * membership interests in the * head company (instead of whoever actually does); and


    (b) those membership interests remain the same; and


    (c) the top company directly controls the voting power in the head company.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-725   Additional alteration times for head company of MEC group  

    View history reference

    Additional alteration times based on section 719-280

    719-725(1)    
    The time when a * potential MEC group ceases to exist is an alteration time in respect of the * head company of a * MEC group if, just before that time, the potential MEC group's membership was the same as the membership of the MEC group.

    Note:

    The alteration times in subsections (1), (2) and (3) are based on the events described in subsections 719-280(2) , (3) and (4), each of which causes the test company referred to in section 719-280 to be assumed to fail the continuity of ownership test in section 165-12 .


    719-725(2)    
    If something:


    (a) happens at a time in relation to * membership interests in one or more of these entities:


    (i) a company that was just before that time a * member of a * MEC group and an * eligible tier-1 company of the * top company for the MEC group;

    (ii) an entity interposed between a company described in subparagraph (i) and the company that was the top company for the group just before that time; and


    (b) does not cause the * potential MEC group whose membership is the same as the membership of the MEC group to cease to exist, but does cause a change in the identity of the top company for the potential MEC group;

    that time is an alteration time in respect of the * head company of the * MEC group.


    719-725(3)    
    The time when a * MEC group ceases to exist because there ceases to be a* provisional head company of the group is an alteration time in respect of the * head company of the * MEC group.

    Additional alteration times based on Subdivision 719-K

    719-725(4)    
    If Subdivision 719-K (MEC group cost setting rules: pooling cases) applies, the time just before the trigger time referred to in paragraph 719-555(1)(a) is an alteration time in respect of the * head company of the * MEC group.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-730   Some alteration times only affect interests in top company  

    View history reference

    719-730(1)    
    This section applies if an * alteration time (except one arising under subsection 719-725(4) ) happens for the * head company of a * MEC group.

    719-730(2)    
    Sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB apply, in relation to the alteration time, to an interest or debt that is, or is part of, a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest that an entity has in the * head company just before the * alteration time, only if the interest or debt is:


    (a) an * equity or loan interest in the * top company for the MEC group; or


    (b) an * indirect equity or loan interest in the top company.

    Note:

    Sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB are about the consequences that an alteration time for a loss company has for relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests in the company.


    719-730(3)    
    In determining what is a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest that an entity has in the * head company just before the * alteration time, make the assumptions in subsection 719-720(5) .

     View history note

    SECTION 719-735   Some alteration times affect only pooled interests  

    View history reference

    719-735(1)    
    Sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB do not apply in relation to an * alteration time that happens for the * head company of a * MEC group because of subsection 719-725(4) (trigger time for MEC group cost setting rules: pooling cases).

    719-735(2)    
    Instead, Subdivision 719-K applies to the * MEC group, in relation to the trigger time, on the basis that:


    (a) what would, apart from this section, be the pooled cost amount for the purposes of the formulas in subsections 719-570(1) and (2) is reduced by the amount of the * head company's overall loss under section 165-115R or 165-115S at that alteration time; but


    (b) paragraph (a) of this subsection only affects the application of those formulas because of subsection 719-570(3) (to work out the * reduced cost base of a * membership interest).

     View history note

    SECTION 719-740   Head company does not have relevant equity or debt interest in a loss company if widely held top company does not have such an interest  

    View history reference

    719-740(1)    
    For the purposes of Subdivision 165-CD , treat the *head company of a *MEC group as not having a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at a particular time if:


    (a) the *top company of the group is a *widely held company at that time; and


    (b) because of subsections 165-115X(2A) , (2B) and (2C) , the top company does not have a relevant equity interest under section 165-115X in the loss company at that time.

    719-740(2)    
    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), disregard the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) in determining whether subsection 165-115X(2C) has the effect that the *top company has the relevant equity interest mentioned in that paragraph.

    719-740(3)    
    For the purposes of Subdivision 165-CD , treat the *head company of a *MEC group as not having a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time if:


    (a) the *top company of the group is a *widely held company at that time; and


    (b) because of subsections 165-115Y(3A) , (3B) and (3C) , the top company does not have a relevant debt interest under section 165-115Y in the loss company at that time.

     View history note

    How indirect value shifting rules apply to a MEC group

    SECTION 719-755   Effect on MEC group cost setting rules if head company is losing entity or gaining entity for indirect value shift  

    View history reference

    719-755(1)    
    This section has effect for the purposes of working out the consequences (if any) of an * indirect value shift if the * losing entity or * gaining entity is the * head company of a * MEC group. (Subsection (3) has effect in addition to section 727-455 .)

    719-755(2)    
    An * equity or loan interest can be an * affected interest in the * head company only if it is:


    (a) an * equity or loan interest in the * top company for the MEC group; or


    (b) an * indirect equity or loan interest in the top company.

    719-755(3)    
    Subdivision 719-K (MEC group cost setting rules: pooling cases) applies to the * MEC group, in relation to the first time referred to in that Subdivision as a trigger time that happens at or after the * IVS time, on the basis that:


    (a) what would, apart from this section, be the pooled cost amount for the purposes of the formulas in subsections 719-570(1) and (2) is:


    (i) if the * head company is the * losing entity - reduced; or

    (ii) if the head company is the gaining entity - increased;
    by the amount of the indirect value shift; and


    (b) paragraph (a) of this subsection also affects the application of those formulas because of subsection 719-570(3) (to work out the * reduced cost base of a * membership interest).

     View history note

    Cancelling loss on realisation event for direct or indirect interest in a subsidiary member of a MEC group

    SECTION 719-775   Cancellation of loss  

    View history reference

    719-775(1)    
    This section reduces to nil a loss that would otherwise be * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event that happens to an * equity or loan interest (the realised interest ) in an entity (the first entity ) when it is owned by another entity (the owner ), if the conditions in subsections (2) and (4) are met.

    719-775(2)    
    The first condition is that, at some time during the period (the ownership period ) when the owner owned the realised interest:


    (a) the first entity was a * subsidiary member of a * MEC group (except an * eligible tier-1 company), and the owner was not a * member of the group; or


    (b) the realised interest was an * external indirect equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a MEC group (except an eligible tier-1 company); or


    (c) the realised interest was an * equity or loan interest in an entity that, at that time:


    (i) owned an equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a MEC group (except an eligible tier-1 company); and

    (ii) was not a member of the group; or


    (d) the realised interest was an equity or loan interest in an entity that owned at that time an external indirect equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a MEC group (except an eligible tier-1 company); or


    (e) the realised interest was an equity or loan interest, or an * indirect equity or loan interest, in an eligible tier-1 company that was a member of a MEC group at that time.

    719-775(3)    
    An * equity or loan interest in an entity (the test entity ) is an external indirect equity or loan interest in a * subsidiary member of a * MEC group if, and only if, neither the owner of the interest nor the test entity is a member of the group and:


    (a) the test entity owns an equity or loan interest in the subsidiary member; or


    (b) the test entity owns an equity or loan interest that is an external indirect equity or loan interest in the subsidiary member because of one or more other applications of this subsection.

    719-775(4)    
    The second condition is that, at the same or a different time during the ownership period:


    (a) the owner was, or * controlled (for value shifting purposes), the * head company of a * MEC group because of which the first condition is satisfied; or


    (b) the owner was an * associate of an entity that, at the same or a different time during the ownership period, was, or controlled (for value shifting purposes), the head company of such a MEC group.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-780  

    719-780   Exception for pooled interests in eligible tier-1 companies  

    View history reference

    The first condition in section 719-775 cannot be satisfied, because of a * MEC group, at a time when the realised interest was a * pooled interest in an * eligible tier-1 company that is a member of the group.
     View history note

    SECTION 719-785  

    719-785   Exception for interests in top company  

    View history reference

    The first condition in section 719-775 cannot be satisfied, because of a * MEC group, at a time when:


    (a) the first entity was the * top company for the MEC group; or


    (b) the realised interest was an * indirect equity or loan interest in the top company for the MEC group.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-790   Exception for interests in entity leaving MEC group  

    View history reference

    Membership interests in leaving entity

    719-790(1)    
    If:


    (a) the realised interest is a * membership interest; and


    (b) during the ownership period the first entity ceased to be a * subsidiary member of a * MEC group;

    the first condition in section 719-775 cannot be satisfied, because of that MEC group, at a time when the first entity was a member of the group, unless the interest needed to be disregarded under section 719-30 (about employee shares) in order for the first entity to be a member of the group at that time.



    Liabilities owed by leaving entity

    719-790(2)    
    If the realised interest:


    (a) consists of a liability owed by the first entity to the owner; and


    (b) became an asset of the owner because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceased to apply to the first entity when it ceased to be a * subsidiary member of a * MEC group;

    the first condition in section 719-775 cannot be satisfied, because of that MEC group, at a time when the first entity was a member of the group.

     View history note

    SECTION 719-795   Exception if loss attributable to certain matters  

    View history reference

    719-795(1)    
    The loss is not reduced if all of it can be shown to be attributable to things other than these:


    (a) something that would be reflected in what would, apart from this Part, be an overall loss under section 165-115R or 165-115S , of a * member of a * MEC group (an excluded group ) because of which the first condition in section 719-775 is satisfied, at an * alteration time for that member;


    (b) an * indirect value shift for which, apart from this Part, a member of an excluded group would be the * losing entity or the * gaining entity.

    719-795(2)    
    If only part of the loss can be shown to be attributable to things other than the ones listed in subsection (1), the loss is reduced to the amount of that part.

     View history note

    Subdivision 719-X - International tax rules  

    View history reference
     View history note

    719-900   (Repealed) SECTION 719-900 General rules about foreign dividend accounts  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

     View history note

    719-903   (Repealed) SECTION 719-903 Special rules for certain FDA credits and FDA debits  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

     View history note

    719-905   (Repealed) SECTION 719-905 Transfer of balance of foreign dividend accounts on change in identity of provisional head company  
    (Repealed by No 147 of 2005)

     View history note

    Division 721 - Liability for payment of tax where head company fails to pay on time  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 721-1   What this Division is about  

    View history reference

    If the head company of a consolidated group fails to meet an income tax related liability by the time it becomes due and payable, entities that were subsidiary members of the group during the period to which the liability relates can also be responsible for all or part of the liability.

     View history note

    Object  

    SECTION 721-5  

    721-5   Object of this Division  

    View history reference

    The object of this Division is to secure the payment of certain tax liabilities of the * head company of a * consolidated group where the head company fails to meet all of those liabilities by the time they become due and payable. Accordingly:


    (a) if a relevant liability is not covered by a tax sharing agreement - this Division provides for a process to make certain entities that were * subsidiary members of the group for at least part of the period to which each tax liability relates jointly and severally liable with the head company for those liabilities; or


    (b) if a relevant liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement - this Division:


    (i) provides for a process to make each of those entities liable for the amount determined under the agreement in relation to the liability; but

    (ii) exempts an entity from a liability determined under the agreement if it leaves the group in certain circumstances.
     View history note

    When this Division operates  

    SECTION 721-10   When this Division operates  

    View history reference

    721-10(1)    
    This Division operates if:


    (a) a *tax-related liability mentioned in subsection (2) (a group liability ) of the *head company of a *consolidated group was not paid or otherwise discharged in full by the time the liability became due and payable (the head company ' s due time ); and


    (b) one or more entities (the contributing members ) were *subsidiary members of the group for at least part of the period to which the group liability relates.

    Note:

    This Division operates even if some or all of the contributing members were no longer members of the group at the head company ' s due time.


    721-10(2)    

    View history reference

    The following table lists the *tax-related liabilities for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a) and the periods to which each of those liabilities relate:


    Tax-related liabilities of the head company and the periods to which they relate
    Item The tax-related liability of the head company that becomes due and payable as specified in this provision … … relates to this period
    3 section 5-5 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 (income tax, and other amounts treated in the same way as income tax under that section) the *financial year to which the income tax etc relates
    5 section 197-70 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 (untainting tax) the *franking period of the *head company in which the *untainting tax became due and payable
    10 subsection 214-150(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 (frankingtax) the income year to which the *franking tax relates
    15 subsection 214-150(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 (franking tax - part year assessment) the particular period mentioned in subsection 214-70(1) to which the *franking tax relates
    20 subsection 214-150(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 (franking tax - amended assessments otherwise than because of deficit deferral) the income year (or particular period mentioned in subsection 214-70(1)) to which the *franking tax relates
    22 subsection 214-150(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 (franking tax - deficit deferral) the income year (or particular period mentioned in subsection 214-70(1)) to which the *franking deficit tax relates
    25 (Repealed by No 79 of 2010 )  
    30 section 45-61 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (quarterly *PAYG instalment) the *instalment quarter to which the *instalment relates
    32 section 45-67 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (monthly * PAYG instalment) the * instalment month to which the * instalment relates
    35 section 45-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (annual *PAYG instalment) the income year to which the *instalment relates
    40 section 8AAE of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (general interest charge) the period provided for in this table for the *tax-related liability to which the general interest charge relates
    45 subsection 45-230(4) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (general interest charge on shortfall in instalment worked out on basis of varied rate) the * instalment quarter or * instalment month to which the general interest charge relates
    50 subsection 45-232(5) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (general interest charge on shortfall in quarterly instalment worked out on basis of estimated benchmark tax) the *instalment quarter to which the general interest charge relates
    55 subsection 45-235(5) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (general interest charge on shortfall in annual instalment) the income year to which the general interest charge relates
    60 subsection 45-875(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (head company ' s liability to GIC on shortfall in instalment) the * instalment quarter or * instalment month to which the general interest charge relates
    65 if an administrative penalty of a kind mentioned in section 284-75, 284-145, 286-75 or 288-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 relates only to another *tax-related liability mentioned in this table - section 298-15 in that Schedule the period provided for in this table for the *tax-related liability to which the penalty relates
    70 Division 280 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (shortfall interest charge) the period provided for in this table for the *tax-related liability to which the shortfall interest charge relates
    75 (Repealed by No 96 of 2014)  
    80 (Repealed by No 96 of 2014)  
    85 (Repealed by No 96 of 2014)  
    95 (Repealed by No 43 of 2019)  
    100 (Repealed by No 43 of 2019)  
    105 (Repealed by No 43 of 2019)  
    110 (Repealed by No 43 of 2019)  
    115 Subsection 177P(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (diverted profits tax) the income year to which the diverted profits tax relates

    Note:

    The other amounts referred to in item 3 of the table are interest payable under section 102AAM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (distributions from certain non-resident trust estates).

     View history note

    721-10(3)    

    View history reference

    Item 30 of the table in subsection (2) is taken not to include a *PAYG instalment of the *head company if the Commissioner gave the head company its *initial head company instalment rate after the end of the *instalment quarter of the head company to which the PAYG instalment relates.
     View history note

    721-10(3A)    

    View history reference

    Item 32 of the table in subsection (2) is taken not to include a * PAYG instalment of the * head company if the Commissioner gave the head company its * initial head company instalment rate on or after the start of the * instalment month of the head company to which the PAYG instalment relates.
     View history note

    721-10(4)    
    (Repealed by No 96 of 2014)

     View history note

    721-10(5)    
    (Repealed by No 43 of 2019)

     View history note

    721-10(6)    
    (Repealed by No 43 of 2019)

     View history note

     View history note

    Joint and several liability of contributing member  

    SECTION 721-15   Head company and contributing members jointly and severally liable to pay group liability  

    View history reference

    721-15(1)    
    The following are jointly and severally liable to pay the group liability:


    (a) the * head company; and


    (b) each contributing member (other than a contributing member excluded by subsection (2)).

    Note:

    A group liability is a tax-related liability in relation to the head company and each contributing member. For rights of contribution in respect of such a liability, see subsection 265-45(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 .


    721-15(2)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), a contributing member is excluded by this subsection if it is, at the head company ' s due time, prohibited according to the effect of an * Australian law from entering into any arrangement under which the entity becomes subject to a liability referred to in subsection (1).
     View history note

    721-15(3)    
    Subsection (1) does not operate if the group liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement (see section 721-25 ).

    721-15(3A)    

    View history reference

    Subsection (1) is taken never to have made a particular contributing member jointly and severally liable to pay the group liability if:


    (a) the group liability was taken never to have been covered by the tax sharing agreement because of subsection 721-25(3) ; and

    Note:

    Subsection 721-25(3) provides for this to happen if the Commissioner did not receive a copy of the tax sharing agreement within 14 days after the Commissioner gave the head company the notice under that subsection.


    (b) the Commissioner gave the contributing member written notice of the group liability under subsection (5); and


    (c) apart from the operation of subsection 721-25(3) , the contributing member left the group clear of the group liability in accordance with section 721-35 ; and


    (d) the contributing member gave the Commissioner a copy of the tax sharing agreement (that is, the relevant agreement mentioned in paragraph 721-25(1)(a) ) in the * approved form; and


    (e) if the Commissioner gave the contributing member written notice of the group liability under subsection (5) (ignoring subsection 721-17(2) ) - the contributing member gave that copy of the agreement to the Commissioner within 14 days after that notice was given.  View history note


    721-15(4)    
    The joint and several liability of the contributing members under subsection (1) arises just after the * head company ' s due time.

    721-15(5)    
    The joint and several liability of a particular contributing member under subsection (1) becomes due and payable by the member 14 days after the Commissioner gives the member written notice under this subsection of the liability.

    Note 1:

    If the Commissioner gives this notice to one contributing member, and gives this notice to another contributing member on another day, the 2 contributing members will have different due and payable dates for the same liability.

    Note 2:

    This section does not affect the time at which the group liability arose for, or became due and payable by, the head company.


    721-15(5A)    

    View history reference

    Despite subsection (5), if the group liability is * general interest charge for a day, the joint and several liability of a particular contributing member under subsection (1) becomes due and payable by the member at the end of the day on which the Commissioner gives the member written notice of the liability under subsection (5).
     View history note

    721-15(6)    
    To the extent that the contributing members ' liability under subsection (1) is not a liability for income tax, that liability is to be treated as a liability for income tax for the purposes of section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

     View history note

    SECTION 721-17   Notice of joint and several liability for general interest charge  

    View history reference

    721-17(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) the group liability is * general interest charge for a day in relation to another liability (the primary liability ); and


    (b) the Commissioner gives a particular contributing member written notice under subsection 721-15(5) of the group liability; and


    (c) general interest charge arises for a subsequent day in relation to the primary liability; and


    (d) the general interest charge for the subsequent day has not been paid or otherwise discharged in full by the time it became due and payable.

    721-17(2)    
    The Commissioner is taken to have given the contributing member written notice under subsection 721-15(5) of the * general interest charge for the subsequent day. The notice is taken to have been given on that day.

     View history note

    SECTION 721-20   Limit on liability where group first comes into existence  

    View history reference

    721-20(1)    
    This section operates if the group came into existence during the period to which a group liability relates.

    721-20(2)    
    The contributing members' liability under subsection 721-15(1) to pay the group liability is limited to the proportion of the group liability that is reasonably attributable to the period:


    (a) beginning at the time the group came into existence; and


    (b) ending at the time when the period to which the group liability relates ends.

     View history note

    Tax sharing agreements  

    SECTION 721-25   When a group liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement  

    View history reference

    721-25(1)    
    For the purposes of this Division, a group liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement if, just before the head company ' s due time:


    (a) an agreement existed between the * head company of the group and one or more of the contributing members (the TSA contributing members ); and


    (b) a particular amount (the contribution amount ) could be determined under the agreement for each TSA contributing member in relation to the group liability; and


    (c) the contribution amounts for each of the TSA contributing members in relation to the group liability, as determined under the agreement, represented a reasonable allocation of the total amount of the group liability among the head company and the TSA contributing members; and


    (d) the agreement complied with the requirements (if any) set out in the regulations.

    721-25(1A)    

    View history reference

    The requirement in paragraph (1)(c) is taken to be satisfied if:


    (a) the group liability is a * tax-related liability mentioned in item 3 of the table in subsection 721-10(2) in relation to an income year; and

    View history reference


    (b) before, at or after the head company ' s due time, the * head company of the group became entitled to either or both of the following:


    (i) a credit under section 45-30 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for that income year;

    (ii) a credit under section 45-865 in Schedule 1 to that Act for that income year; and


    (c) just before the head company ' s due time, the contribution amounts for each of the TSA contributing members in relation to the group liability, as determined under the agreement, represented a reasonable allocation among the head company and the TSA contributing members of the difference between:


    (i) the total amount of the group liability; and

    (ii) the amount of the credit, or the sum of the credits, mentioned in paragraph (b).
     View history note

    721-25(1AA)    
    (Repealed by No 96 of 2014)

     View history note

    721-25(1B)    

    View history reference

    Despite subsections (1) and (1A), the group liability is not covered by a tax sharing agreement for the purposes of this Division if, apart from this subsection, the requirements in those subsections in relation to the group liability would be satisfied in relation to 2 or more agreements.
     View history note

    721-25(2)    

    View history reference

    Despite subsections (1) and (1A), the group liability is not covered by a tax sharing agreement for the purposes of this Division if:


    (a) the agreement mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) was entered into as part of an arrangement; and


    (b) a purpose of the arrangement was to prejudice the recovery by the Commissioner of some or all of the amount of the group liability or liabilities of that kind.

     View history note

    721-25(3)    

    View history reference

    Despite subsections (1) and (1A), the group liability is taken never to have been covered by a tax sharing agreement for the purposes of this Division if:


    (a) the Commissioner gives the * head company of the group written notice under this subsection (whether before, at or after the head company ' s due time) in relation to the group liability; and


    (b) the notice requires the head company to give the Commissioner a copy of the agreement mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) in the * approved form within 14 days after the notice is given; and

    View history reference


    (c) the Commissioner does not receive a copy of the agreement by the time required.

    Note:

    If this subsection operates, joint and several liability can arise under section 721-15 in relation to the group liability.

     View history note

    SECTION 721-30   TSA contributing members liable for contribution amounts  

    View history reference

    721-30(1)    
    This section operates if a group liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement.

    721-30(2)    
    Each TSA contributing member is liable to pay to the Commonwealth an amount equal to the contribution amount for that member in relation to the group liability.

    721-30(3)    
    Despite subsection (2), a TSA contributing member is not liable under that subsection if the member left the group clear of the group liability (see section 721-35 ).

    721-30(4)    
    The liability of a TSA contributing member under subsection (2) arises just after the * head company's due time.

    721-30(5)    
    The liability of a TSA contributing member under subsection (2) becomes due and payable by the member 14 days after the Commissioner gives the member written notice under this subsection of the liability.

    Note:

    This section does not affect the time at which the group liability arose for, or became due and payable by, the head company.


    721-30(5A)    

    View history reference

    Despite subsection (5), if the group liability is * general interest charge for a day, the liability of a TSA contributing member under subsection (2) becomes due and payable by the member at the end of the day on which the Commissioner gives the member written notice of the liability under subsection (5).
     View history note

    721-30(6)    
    The liability of a TSA contributing member under subsection (2) is to be treated as a liability for income tax for the purposes of section 254of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .

     View history note

    SECTION 721-32   Notice of general interest charge liability under TSA  

    View history reference

    721-32(1)    
    This section operates if:


    (a) the group liability is * general interest charge for a day in relation to another liability (the primary liability ); and


    (b) the Commissioner gives a particular TSA contributing member written notice under subsection 721-30(5) of its liability under subsection 721-30(2) in relation to the general interest charge for that day; and


    (c) general interest charge arises for a subsequent day in relation to the primary liability; and


    (d) the TSA contributing member is liable under subsection 721-30(2) for an amount in relation to the general interest charge for the subsequent day.

    721-32(2)    
    The Commissioner is taken to have given the TSA contributing member written notice under subsection 721-30(5) of the amount in relation to the * general interest charge for the subsequent day. The notice is taken to have been given on that day.

     View history note

    SECTION 721-35  

    721-35   When a TSA contributing member has left the group clear of the group liability  

    View history reference

    For the purposes of subsection 721-30(3) , a TSA contributing member left the group clear of the group liability if:


    (a) the TSA contributing member ceased to be a member of the group at a time (the leaving time ) before the * head company's due time; and


    (b) the cessation of membership was not part of an arrangement, a purpose of which was to prejudice the recovery by the Commissioner of some or all of the amount of the group liability or liabilities of that kind; and


    (c) before the leaving time, the TSA contributing member had paid to the head company:


    (i) if the contribution amount for that member in relation to the group liability could be determined before the leaving time - an amount equal and attributable to that amount; or

    (ii) otherwise - an amount that is a reasonable estimate of, and attributable to, that amount.
     View history note

    SECTION 721-40   TSA liability and group liability are linked  

    View history reference

    721-40(1)    
    The liability of a TSA contributing member under subsection 721-30(2) (the TSA liability ) is separate and distinct for all purposes from the group liability to which it relates (the linked group liability ). For example, the Commissioner may take proceedings to recover the unpaid amount of the TSA liability, proceedings to recover the unpaid amount of the linked group liability, or both.

    Note:

    The TSA contributing member will not be jointly and severally liable for the linked group liability under section 721-15 (see subsection 721-15(3) ). However, the head company of the group remains liable for the linked group liability.



    Payment or discharge of TSA liability

    721-40(2)    
    If an amount is paid or applied at a particular time towards discharging the TSA liability, the linked group liability is discharged at that time to the extent of the same amount.

    Payment or discharge of linked group liability

    721-40(3)    
    If:


    (a) an amount is paid or applied at a particular time towards discharging the linked group liability; and


    (b) as a result, the amount unpaid on the TSA liability at that time (apart from this section) exceeds the amount unpaid on the linked group liability at that time;

    the TSA liability is discharged at that time to the extent of the excess.


    721-40(4)    
    Subsections (2) and (3) operate in relation to a liability under a judgment (the judgment liability ):


    (a) if the judgment liability is for the entire amount unpaid on the TSA liability - as if the judgment liability were the TSA liability; and


    (b) if the judgment liability is for the entire amount unpaid on the linked group liability - as if the judgment liability were the linked group liability.

    721-40(5)    
    This section does not discharge a liability to a greater extent than the amount of the liability.

     View history note

    PART 3-95 - VALUE SHIFTING  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Division 723 - Direct value shifting by creating right over non-depreciating asset  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Subdivision 723-A - Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 723-1  

    723-1   Object  

    View history reference

    The purpose of this Division is to reduce a loss that would otherwise be * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event happening to an asset (except a * depreciating asset), to the extent that:


    (a) value has been shifted out of the asset by the owner creating in an associate a right over the asset; and


    (b) the value shifted was not brought to tax when the right was created and has not since been brought to tax on a realisation of the right.

     View history note

    SECTION 723-10   Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset over which right has been created  

    View history reference

    723-10(1)    
    A loss that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by a *realisation event is reduced by the amount worked out under subsections (3) and (4) if:

    (a)    the event happens to a * CGT asset (the underlying asset ) you own that, at the time of the event (the realisation time ):


    (i) is not a * depreciating asset; or

    (ii) is an item of your * trading stock; or

    (iii) is a * revenue asset of yours; and

    (b)    before the realisation time:


    (i) you created in an * associate of yours; or

    (ii) an entity covered by subsection (2) (about previous owners of the underlying asset) created in an associate of the entity;
    a right in respect of the underlying asset; and

    (c)    immediately before the realisation time, the right is still in existence and is owned by an associate of yours; and

    (d)    

    View history reference
    a decrease in the underlying asset ' s *market value is reasonably attributable to the creating of the right; and

    (e)    creating the right involved a * CGT event:


    (i) whose * capital proceeds are less than the market value of the right when created (the difference between those capital proceeds and that market value is called the shortfall on creating the right ); and

    (ii) that is not a CGT event that happens to some part of the underlying asset but not to the remainder of it; and

    (f)    the shortfall on creating the right is more than $50,000; and

    (g)    the market value of the underlying asset at the realisation time is less than it would have been if the right no longer existed at that time (the difference is called the deficit on realisation ).

    Note:

    If subparagraph (1)(e)(ii) applies, the cost base and reduced cost base of the underlying asset is apportioned under section 112-30 , so there is no need for this section to apply to the right.


    723-10(2)    
    This subsection covers an entity if:

    (a)    the entity * acquired the underlying asset before you did; and

    (b)    there has been a roll-over for each * CGT event (if any) as a result of which an entity (including you) acquired the asset after the first entity acquired it, and before the realisation time; and

    (c)    for each such CGT event (if any), the entity (including you) that acquired the underlying asset as a result of the event was, immediately after the event, an * associate of the entity that last acquired the asset before the event.

    723-10(3)    
    The amount by which this section reduces the loss is the lesser of:

    (a)    the shortfall on creating the right; and

    (b)    the deficit on realisation.

    However, that amount is reduced by each gain that:

    (c)    is * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event that happens to the right:


    (i) before or at the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

    (ii) at a time when the right is owned by an entity that is your * associate immediately before the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

    (d)    is not disregarded.

    Note:

    To work out a gain realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to the right, see sections 977-15 , 977-35 , 977-40 and 977-55 . If more than one of those sections applies to the right, see section 723-50 .


    723-10(4)    
    For each gain that:

    (a)    is * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event that happens to the right:


    (i) within 4 years after the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

    (ii) at a time when the right is owned by an entity that is your * associate immediately before the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

    (b)    is not disregarded;

    the amount worked out under subsection (3) is taken to have been reduced by the amount of that gain.

    Note:

    This subsection may result in amendment of an assessment for the income year in which the realisation time happens.


     View history note

    SECTION 723-15   Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset at the same time as right is created over it  

    View history reference

    723-15(1)    
    A loss that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event is reduced by the amount worked out under subsections (2) and (3) if:

    (a)    the event happens to a * CGT asset (the underlying asset ) you own that, at the time of the event (the realisation time ):


    (i) is not a * depreciating asset; or

    (ii) is an item of your * trading stock;

    (iii) is a * revenue asset of yours; and

    (b)    at the realisation time, you create in an * associate of yours a right in respect of the underlying asset; and

    (c)    

    View history reference
    creating the right involves a * CGT event:

    (i) whose * capital proceeds are less than the *market value of the right when created (the difference between those capital proceeds and that market value is called the shortfall on creating the right ); and

    (ii) that is not a CGT event that happens to some part of the underlying asset but not to the remainder of it; and

    (d)    the shortfall on creating the right is more than $50,000; and

    (e)    the market value of the underlying asset at the realisation time is less than it would have been if the right had not been created (the difference is called the deficit on realisation ).

    Note:

    If subparagraph (1)(c)(ii) applies, the cost base and reduced cost base of the underlying asset isapportioned under section 112-30 , so there is no need for this section to apply to the right.


    723-15(2)    
    The amount by which this section reduces the loss is the lesser of:

    (a)    the shortfall on creating the right; and

    (b)    the deficit on realisation.

    723-15(3)    
    For each gain that:

    (a)    is * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event that happens to the right:


    (i) within 4 years after the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

    (ii) at a time when the right is owned by an entity that is your * associate immediately before the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

    (b)    is not disregarded;

    the amount worked out under subsection (2) is taken to have been reduced by the amount of that gain.

    Note 1:

    To work out a gain realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to the right, see sections 977-15 , 977-35 , 977-40 and 977-55 . If more than one of those sections applies to the right, see section 723-50 .

    Note 2:

    This subsection may require amendment of an assessment for the income year in which the realisation time happens.


     View history note

    SECTION 723-20   Exceptions  

    View history reference

    Conservation covenant over land

    723-20(1)    
    Section 723-10 or 723-15 does not reduce a loss if:

    (a)    the underlying asset is land; and

    (b)    the right referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(b) or 723-15(1)(b) is a * conservation covenant over the land.

    Right created on death of owner

    723-20(2)    
    Section 723-10 or 723-15 does not reduce a loss if the right referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(b) or 723-15(1)(b) is created by:

    (a)    a will or codicil; or

    (b)    an order of a court varying or modifying a will or codicil; or

    (c)    a total or partial intestacy; or

    (d)    an order of a court varying or modifying the application of the law about distributing the estate of someone who dies intestate.

     View history note

    SECTION 723-25   Realisation event that is only a partial realisation  

    View history reference

    723-25(1)    
    Section 723-10 or 723-15 applies differently if:

    (a)    a * realisation event happens to some part of a * CGT asset (the underlying asset ) you own that, at the time of the event:


    (i) is not a * depreciating asset; or

    (ii) is an item of your * trading stock; or

    (iii) is a * revenue asset of yours;
    but not to the remainder of the underlying asset; or

    (b)    a realisation event consists of creating an interest in a CGT asset (also the underlying asset ) you own that, at the time of the event, is covered by subparagraph (a)(i) , (ii) or (iii) .

    723-25(2)    

    View history reference

    The section applies on the basis that:

    (a)    the * realisation event happens to the underlying asset; and

    (b)    the shortfall on creating the right referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(e) or 723-15(1)(c) ; and

    (c)    the deficit on realisation referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(g) or 723-15(1)(e) ;

    are each reduced by multiplying its amount by this fraction:


                        *Market value of part                  
    *Market value of underlying asset
     


    723-25(3)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of the formula in subsection (2) :

    market value of part
    means the *market value, at the time of the * realisation event, of the part referred to in paragraph (1)(a) or the interest referred to in paragraph (1)(b) , as appropriate.

    market value of underlying asset
    means the *market value, immediately before the * realisation event, of the underlying asset.


     View history note

    SECTION 723-35   Multiple rights created to take advantage of the $50,000 threshold  

    View history reference

    723-35(1)    
    Sections 723-10 and 723-15 apply differently if, having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that the sole or main reason why a right was created as a different right from one or more other rights created in respect of the same thing was so that paragraph 723-10(1)(f) or 723-15(1)(d) would not be satisfied for one or more of the rights mentioned in this subsection.

    723-35(2)    
    Those sections:

    (a)    apply to that thing, in relation to each of the rights mentioned in subsection (1) of this section, as if paragraphs 723-10(1)(f) and 723-15(1)(d) were omitted; and

    (b)    are taken always to have so applied.

     View history note

    SECTION 723-40  

    723-40   Application to CGT asset that is also trading stock or revenue asset  

    View history reference

    If a * CGT asset you own is also an item of your * trading stock or a * revenue asset, this Division applies to the asset once in its character as a CGT asset and again in its character as trading stock or a revenue asset.
     View history note

    SECTION 723-50   Effects if right created over underlying asset is also trading stock or a revenue asset  

    View history reference

    723-50(1)    
    Subsection 723-10(3) or (4) or 723-15(3) applies differently if the right created in respect of the underlying asset is also * trading stock or a * revenue asset at the time of a * realisation event that happens to the right.

    723-50(2)    
    The gain that is taken into account for the purposes of that subsection is:

    (a)    

    View history reference
    if the right is also *trading stock - worked out under section 977-35 or 977-40 (about realisation events for trading stock); or

    (b)    

    View history reference
    if the right is also a *revenue asset - the greater of:

    (i) the gain worked out under section 977-15 (about realisation events for CGT assets); and

    (ii) the gain worked out under section 977-55 (about realisation events for revenue assets).
     View history note

     View history note

    Subdivision 723-B - Reducing reduced cost base of interests in entity that acquires non-depreciating asset under roll-over  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 723-105   Reduced cost base of interest reduced when interest realised at a loss  

    View history reference

    723-105(1)    
    The * reduced cost base of a * primary equity interest, * secondary equity interest, or * indirect primary equity interest, in a company or trust is reduced just before a * realisation event that is a * CGT event happens to the interest if:


    (a) apart from this Division, a loss would be * realised for income tax purposes by the CGT event; and


    (b) apart from this Division, a loss would have been * realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event if the event had happened, just before the CGT event, to a * CGT asset (the underlying asset ) that the company or trust then owned and that:


    (i) was not then a * depreciating asset; or

    (ii) was then an item of * trading stock of the company or trust; or

    (iii) was then a * revenue asset of the company or trust; and


    (c) the loss referred to in paragraph (b) would have been reduced under Subdivision 723-A by an amount (the underlying asset loss reduction ); and


    (d) for the entity (the transferor ) that owned the interest just before the CGT event, the interest was a * direct roll-over replacement or * indirect roll-over replacement for the underlying asset.

    723-105(2)    
    If the interest was a * direct roll-over replacement, its * reduced cost base is reduced by the amount worked out using this formula, unless that amount does not appropriately reflect the matters referred to in subsection (4):


                  RCB of interest            
    Total of RCBs of direct
    roll-over replacements
    ×   Underlying asset loss reduction  


    723-105(3)    
    For the purposes of the formula in subsection (2):

    RCB of interest
    means the interest ' s * reduced cost base when the transferor * acquired it.

    total of RCBs of direct roll-over replacements
    means the total of the * reduced cost bases of all * direct roll-over replacements for the underlying asset when the transferor * acquired them.


    723-105(4)    
    If:


    (a) the interest was an * indirect roll-over replacement; or


    (b) the amount worked out under subsection (2) does not appropriately reflect the matters referred to in this subsection;

    the interest ' s * reduced cost base is reduced by an amount that is appropriate having regard to these matters:


    (c) the underlying asset loss reduction; and


    (d) the quantum of the interest relative to all * direct roll-over replacements and indirect roll-over replacements that the transferor owns or has previously owned.

     View history note

    SECTION 723-110   Direct and indirect roll-over replacement for underlying asset  

    View history reference

    723-110(1)    
    For an entity (the transferor ) that owns a * CGT asset, the CGT asset is a direct roll-over replacement for something (the underlying asset ) that another entity owns if, and only if:


    (a) a * CGT event happened to the underlying asset while the transferor owned it; and


    (b) the other entity * acquired the underlying asset as a result of that CGT event; and


    (c) there was a * replacement-asset roll-over for the CGT event; and


    (d) the transferor received the CGT asset (or CGT assets including it) in respect of the CGT event as the replacement asset (or the replacement assets).

    723-110(2)    

    View history reference

    For an entity (the transferor ) that owns a * CGT asset, the CGT asset is an indirect roll-over replacement for something (the underlying asset ) that another entity owns if, and only if:


    (a) a * CGT event happened to another CGT asset at a time when the transferor owned it and the other entity already owned the underlying asset; and


    (b) for the transferor, the other CGT asset was at that time:


    (i) a * direct roll-over replacement for the underlying asset; or

    (ii) an indirect roll-over replacement for the underlying asset because of any other application or applications of this subsection; and


    (c) there was a * replacement-asset roll-over for the CGT event; and


    (d) the transferor received the first CGT asset (or CGT assets including it) in respect of the CGT event as the replacement asset (or the replacement assets).

     View history note

    Division 725 - Direct value shifting affecting interests in companies and trusts  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Guide to Division 725  

    SECTION 725-1   What this Division is about  

    View history reference

    If, under a scheme, value is shifted from equity or loan interests in a company or trust to other equity or loan interests in the same company or trust (including interests issued at a discount), this Division:

  • (a) adjusts the value of those interests for income tax purposes to take account of material changes in market value that are attributable to the value shift; and
  • (b) treats the value shift as a partial realisation to the extent that value is shifted between interests held by different owners, and in some other cases.
  • However, it does so only for interests that are owned by entities involved in the value shift.

     View history note

    Subdivision 725-A - Scope of the direct value shifting rules  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 725-45   Main object  

    View history reference

    725-45(1)    
    The main object of this Division is:


    (a) to prevent inappropriate losses from arising on the realisation of * equity or loan interests from which value has been shifted to other equity or loan interests in the same entity; and


    (b) to prevent inappropriate gains from arising on the realisation of equity or loan interests in the same entity to which the value has been shifted;

    so far as those interests are owned by entities involved in the value shift.


    725-45(2)    
    This is done by:


    (a) adjusting the value of those interests for income tax purposes to take account of changes in *market value that are attributable to the value shift; and

    View history reference


    (b) treating the value shift as a partial realisation to the extent that value is shifted:


    (i) between interests held by different owners; or

    (ii) in the case of interests in their character as CGT assets - from post-CGT assets to pre-CGT assets; or

    (iii) between interests of different characters.
     View history note

    SECTION 725-50  

    725-50   When a direct value shift has consequences under this Division  

    View history reference

    A * direct value shift under a * scheme involving * equity or loan interests in an entity (the target entity ) has consequences for you under this Division if, and only if:


    (a) the target entity is a company or trust at some time during the * scheme period; and


    (b) section 725-55 (Controlling entity test) is satisfied; and


    (c) section 725-65 (Cause of the value shift) is satisfied; and


    (d) you are an * affected owner of a * down interest, or an * affected owner of an * up interest, or both; and


    (e) neither of sections 725-90 and 725-95 (about direct value shifts that are reversed) applies.

    Note:

    For a down interest of which you are an affected owner, the direct value shift has consequences under this Division only if section 725-70 (about material decrease in market value) is satisfied.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-55  

    725-55   Controlling entity test  

    View history reference

    An entity (the controller ) must * control (for value shifting purposes) the target entity at some time during the period starting when the * scheme is entered into and ending when it has been carried out. (That period is the scheme period .)

    For the concept of control (for value shifting purposes) , see sections 727-355 to 727-375 .

     View history note

    SECTION 725-65   Cause of the value shift  

    View history reference

    725-65(1)    
    It must be the case that one or more of the following:


    (a) the target entity;


    (b) the controller;


    (c) an entity that was an * associate of the controller at some time during or after the * scheme period;


    (d) an * active participant in the * scheme;

    (either alone or together with one or more other entities) did under the scheme the one or more things:


    (e) to which the decrease in the *market value of the * down interests is reasonably attributable; and

    View history reference


    (f) to which the increase in the market value of the * up interests, or the issue of up interests at a * discount, is reasonably attributable, or that is or include the issue of up interests at a * discount.

    Active participants (if target entity is closely held)

    725-65(2)    
    An entity (the first entity ) is an active participant in the * scheme if, and only if:


    (a) at some time during the * scheme period, the target entity has fewer than 300 members (in the case of a company) or fewer than 300 beneficiaries (in the case of a trust); and


    (b) the first entity has actively participated in, or directly facilitated, the entering into or carrying out of the * scheme (whether or not it did so at the direction of some other entity); and


    (c) the first entity:


    (i) owns a * down interest at the * decrease time; or

    (ii) owns an * up interest at the * increase time or has an up interest issued to it at a * discount because of the * direct value shift.


    When an entity has 300 or more members or beneficiaries

    725-65(3)    
    Section 124-810 (under which certain companies and trusts are not regarded as having 300 or more members or beneficiaries) also applies for the purposes of this Division.

    725-65(4)    
    In addition, this Division applies to a * non-fixed trust as if it did not have 300 or more beneficiaries.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-70   Consequences for down interest only if there is a material decrease in its market value  

    View history reference

    725-70(1)    

    View history reference

    For a * down interest of which you are an * affected owner, the * direct value shift has consequences under this Division only if the sum of the decreases in the *market value of all down interests because of direct value shifts under the same * scheme as the direct value shift is at least $150,000.
    Note:

    In working out the sum of the decreases in market value of all down interests, it will be necessary to include decreases not only in your down interests, but also in those of other affected owners and of entities that are not affected owners.


    725-70(2)    
    However, if, having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that the sole or main reason why a * direct value shift happened under a different scheme from one or more other direct value shifts was so that subsection (1) would not be satisfied for one or more of the direct value shifts mentioned in this subsection, subsection (1) does not apply (and is taken never to have applied) to any of the direct value shifts.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-80  

    725-80   Who is an affected owner of a down interest? 

    View history reference

    An entity is an affected owner of a * down interest if, and only if, the entity owns the down interest at the * decrease time and at least one of these paragraphs is satisfied:


    (a) the entity is the controller;


    (b) the entity was an * associate of the controller at some time during or after the * scheme period;


    (c) the entity is an * active participant in the * scheme.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-85  

    725-85   Who is an affected owner of an up interest?  

    View history reference

    An entity is an affected owner of an * up interest if, and only if:


    (a) there is at least one * affected owner of * down interests; and


    (b) the entity owns the up interest at the * increase time, or the interest is an up interest because it was issued to the entity at a * discount;

    and at least one of these paragraphs is satisfied:


    (c) the entity is the controller;


    (d) the entity was an * associate of the controller at some time during or after the * scheme period;


    (e) at some time during or after the scheme period, the entity was an associate of an entity that is an affected owner of down interests because it was an associate of the controller at some time during or after that period;


    (f) the entity is an * active participant in the * scheme.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-90   Direct value shift that will be reversed  

    View history reference

    725-90(1)    
    The * direct value shift does not have consequences for you under this Division if:


    (a) the one or more things referred to in paragraph 725-145(1)(b) brought about a state of affairs, but for which the direct value shift would not have happened; and


    (b) as at the time referred to in that paragraph, it is more likely than not that, because of the * scheme, that state of affairs will cease to exist within 4 years after that time.

    Example:

    Under a scheme, the voting rights attached to a class of shares in a company are changed. As a result, the market value of shares in that class decreases, and the market value of other classes of shares in the company increases. The company ' s constitution provides that the change is to last for only 3 years.


    725-90(2)    
    However, this section stops applying if the state of affairs referred to in paragraph (1)(a) still exists:


    (a) at the end of those 4 years; or


    (b) when a * realisation event happens to * down interests or * up interests of which you are, or any other entity is, an * affected owner;

    whichever happens sooner.


    725-90(3)    
    If this section stops applying, it is taken never to have applied to the * direct value shift.

    Note:

    This may result in an assessment for an earlier income year having to be amended to give effect to the consequences that the direct value shift would have had for you under this Division if this section hadn ' t applied.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-95   Direct value shift resulting from reversal  

    View history reference

    725-95(1)    
    A * direct value shift does not have consequences for any entity under this Division if:


    (a) section 725-90 applies, and the state of affairs referred to in paragraph 725-90(1)(a) ceases to exist; and


    (b) the direct value shift would not have happened but for that state of affairs ceasing to exist.

    725-95(2)    
    However, if section 725-90 stops applying, this section is taken never to have applied to the later direct value shift.

     View history note

    Subdivision 725-B - What is a direct value shift?  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 725-145   When there is a direct value shift  

    View history reference

    725-145(1)    
    There is a direct value shift under a * scheme involving * equity or loan interests in an entity (the target entity ) if:

    (a)    

    View history reference
    there is a decrease in the *market value of one or more equity or loan interests in the target entity; and

    (b)    the decrease is reasonably attributable to one or more things done under the scheme, and occurs at or after the time when that thing, or the first of those things, is done; and

    (c)    either or both of subsections (2) and (3) are satisfied.

    Examples of something done under a scheme are issuing new shares at a * discount, buying back shares or changing the voting rights attached to shares.


    725-145(2)    
    One or more * equity or loan interests in the target entity must be issued at a * discount. The issue must be, or must be reasonably attributable to, the thing, or one or more of the things, referred to in paragraph (1)(b) . It must also occur at or after the time referred to in that paragraph.

    Example:

    A company runs a family business. There are 2 shares originally issued for $2 each. They are owned by husband and wife. The market value of the shares is much greater (represented by the value of the assets of the company less its liabilities). The company issues one more share for $2 to their son.

    Caution is needed in such a situation. The example would result in a large CGT liability for the husband and wife under this Division, because they have shifted 1/3 of the value of their own shares to their son. No such liability would arise if the share had been issued for its market value.


    725-145(3)    

    View history reference

    Or, there must be an increase in the *market value of one or more * equity or loan interests in the target entity. The increase must be reasonably attributable to the thing, or to one or more of the things, referred to in paragraph (1)(b) . It must also occur at or after the time referred to in that paragraph.
     View history note

    SECTION 725-150   Issue of equity or loan interests at a discount  

    View history reference

    725-150(1)    

    View history reference

    An * equity or loan interest is issued at a discount if, and only if, the *market value of the interest when issued exceeds the amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives. The excess is the amount of the discount .

    725-150(2)    

    View history reference

    The payment that the issuing entity receives can include property. If it does, use the *market value of the property in working out the amount of the payment.

    Amounts for which bonus equities are treated as being issued

    725-150(3)    
    If:

    (a)    a * primary equity interest is issued as mentioned in subsection 130-20(1) (about bonus equities issued in relation to original equities); and

    (b)    subsection 130-20(3) does not apply (about bonus equities that are a dividend or otherwise assessable income);

    subsection (1) of this section applies to the interest as if the amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives were equal to the * cost base of the interest when issued (as worked out under section 130-20 ).


    725-150(4)    
    If:

    (a)    a * primary equity interest is issued as mentioned in subsection 6BA(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about bonus shares issued in relation to original shares); and

    (b)    subsection 6BA(2) of that Act applies (about bonus shares that are a dividend);

    subsection (1) of this section applies to the interest as if the amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives were equal to the consideration worked out under subsection 6BA(2) of that Act.


    725-150(5)    
    If both of subsections (3) and (4) apply to the issue of the same * primary equity interest, subsection (1) of this section applies to the interest as if the amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives were equal to the greater of the amounts worked out under subsections (3) and (4) .

    Application of subsections (3), (4) and (5)

    725-150(6)    

    View history reference

    Subsection (3) does not apply if, for the income year in which the interest is issued, the issuing entity is a public trading trust within the meaning of section 102R of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .
     View history note

    725-150(7)    
    Subsections (3) , (4) and (5) have effect only for the purposes of working out whether a * direct value shift has happened and, if so, its consequences (if any) under this Division.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-155   Meaning of down interests, decrease time, up interests and increase time  

    View history reference

    725-155(1)    

    View history reference

    An * equity or loan interest in the target entity is a down interest if a decrease in its *market value is reasonably attributable to the one or more things referred to in paragraph 725-145(1)(b) , and occurs at or after the time referred to in that paragraph. The time when the decrease happens is called the decrease time for that interest.

    725-155(2)    

    View history reference

    An * equity or loan interest in the target entity is an up interest if subsection 725-145(2) or (3) is satisfied for the interest. The time when the interest is issued at a * discount, or the increase in *market value happens, is called the increase time for that interest.
     View history note

    SECTION 725-160   What is the nature of a direct value shift?  

    View history reference

    725-160(1)    
    The * direct value shift has 2 aspects.

    725-160(2)    
    Overall, it consists of:


    (a) the decreases in *market value of the down interests; and

    View history reference


    (b) the issue at a * discount of the up interests covered by subsection 725-145(2) ; and


    (c) the increases in market value of the up interests covered by subsection 725-145(3) .

    725-160(3)    
    This Division also proceeds on the basis that the * direct value shift is from each of the * down interests to each of the * up interests.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-165  

    725-165   If market value decrease or increase is only partly attributable to the scheme  

    View history reference

    If it is reasonable to conclude that an increase or decrease in *market value, or the issuing of an * equity or loan interest at a * discount, is only partly caused by the doing of the one or more things under the * scheme, this Division applies to the increase, decrease, or issue at a discount, to that extent only.
     View history note

    Subdivision 725-C - Consequences of a direct value shift  

    View history reference
     View history note

    General

    SECTION 725-205   Consequences depend on character of down interests and up interests  

    View history reference

    725-205(1)    
    The consequences for you of the * direct value shift depend on the character of the * down interests and * up interests of which you are an * affected owner.

    725-205(2)    
    There are consequences for all your * down interests and * up interests in their character as * CGT assets. However, some of them may also be * trading stock or * revenue assets. There are additional consequences for those interests in their character as trading stock or revenue assets.

    Note:

    For example, you may own a down interest that is a CGT asset and a revenue asset.

    Sections 725-240 to 725-255 set out the consequences for you of a shift in value from that interest in its character as a CGT asset. The cost base of the asset will be decreased, which will affect the calculation of a capital gain when a CGT event happens to the interest.

    Section 725-320 sets out the consequences for you of a shift in value from that interest in its character as a revenue asset. The adjustment made under that section will affect the calculation of any profit on the sale of the interest.

    Any overlap between the capital gain and the profit realised on the sale of the interest is then dealt with under section 118-20 .

    In some instances, the direct value shift may result in a taxing event generating a gain for you in the income year in which the shift happens. That gain will be both a capital gain (because the down interest can be characterised as a CGT asset) and an increase in your assessable income (because the down interest can be characterised as a revenue asset). Again, any overlap is dealt with under section 118-20 .

     View history note

    SECTION 725-210   Consequences for down interests depend on pre-shift gains and losses  

    View history reference

    725-210(1)    
    The consequences for a * down interest also depend on whether it has a * pre-shift gain or a * pre-shift loss.

    725-210(2)    

    View history reference

    It has a pre-shift gain if, immediately before the * decrease time, its *market value was greater than its * adjustable value.

    725-210(3)    

    View history reference

    It has a pre-shift loss if, immediately before the * decrease time, its *market value was equal to or less than its * adjustable value.
     View history note

    Special cases

    SECTION 725-220   Neutral direct value shifts  

    View history reference

    725-220(1)    

    View history reference

    The consequences are different if the total decrease in *market value of your * down interests is equal to the sum of:


    (a) the total increase in market value of your * up interests; and


    (b) the total * discounts given to you on the issue of your up interests.

    725-220(2)    

    View history reference

    In that case, this Subdivision and Subdivisions 725-D to 725-F apply to you as if the * direct value shift:


    (a) consisted only of:


    (i) the decreases in *market value of your * down interests; and

    (ii) the issue at a * discount of your * up interests covered by subsection 725-145(2) ; and

    (iii) the increases in market value of your up interests covered by subsection 725-145(3) ; and


    (b) were from each of your down interests to each of your up interests.

    725-220(3)    
    This section has effect despite section 725-160 .

     View history note

    SECTION 725-225   Issue of bonus shares or units  

    View history reference

    725-225(1)    
    The consequences are different if you are an * affected owner of * up interests (the bonus interests ) that the target entity issues to you, at a * discount, under the * scheme, in relation to * down interests (the original interests ) of which you are an affected owner.

    Effect of treatment under subsection 130-20(3)

    725-225(2)    
    To the extent that the * direct value shift is to the bonus interests from original interests in relation to which the target entity issued bonus interests to which:


    (a) subsection 130-20(3) applies (because none of them is a dividend or otherwise assessable income); and


    (b) item 1 of the table in that subsection applies (because the original interests are post-CGT assets);

    these paragraphs apply:


    (c) the respective * cost bases and * reduced cost bases of those original interests are not reduced;


    (d) the bonus interests referred to in subsection (1) do not give rise to a * taxing event generating a gain for you under the table in section 725-245 on any of those original interests.

    725-225(3)    
    To the extent that the * direct value shift is from the original interests to bonus interests to which subsection 130-20(3) applies (because none of them is a dividend or otherwise assessable income) and:


    (a) item 1 of the table in that subsection applies (because the original interests are post-CGT assets); or


    (b) item 2 of that table applies (because the original interests are pre-CGT assets and an amount has been paid for the bonus interests that you were required to pay);

    the respective * cost bases and * reduced cost bases of those bonus interests are not uplifted.



    Effect of treatment under subsection 6BA(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

    725-225(4)    
    To the extent that the * direct value shift is to the bonus interests from original interests in relation to which the target entity issued bonus interests to which subsection 6BA(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies (either because they are shares issued for no consideration and none of them is a dividend or because they qualify for the intercorporate dividend rebate):


    (a) the respective * adjustable values of those original interests, in their character as * trading stock or * revenue assets, are not reduced; and


    (b) the bonus interests referred to in subsection (1) do not give rise to a * taxing event generating a gain for you under the table in section 725-335 on any of those original interests.

    725-225(5)    
    To the extent that the * direct value shift is from the original interests to bonus interests to which subsection 6BA(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies, the respective * adjustable values of those bonus interests of which you are an affected owner, in their character as * trading stock or * revenue assets, are not uplifted.

     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 725-230   Off-market buy-backs  

    View history reference

    725-230(1)    
    The consequences are different if:


    (a) a decrease in the *market value of a * down interest of which you are an * affected owner is reasonably attributable to the target entity proposing to buy back that interest for less than its market value; and

    View history reference


    (b) the target entity does buy back that down interest; and


    (c) subsection 159GZZZQ(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 treats you as having received the down interest ' s market value worked out as if the buy-back had not occurred and was never proposed to occur.

    725-230(2)    
    The * adjustable value of the * down interest is not reduced, and there is no * taxing event generating a gain.

    Note:

    The down interest is not dealt with here because it is already dealt with in Division 16K of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 .


    725-230(3)    
    Also, to the extent that the * direct value shift is from the * down interest to * up interests of which you are an * affected owner, uplifts in the * adjustable value of the up interests are worked out under either or both of:


    (a) item 8 of the table in subsection 725-250(2) ; and


    (b) item 9 of the table in subsection 725-335(3) ;

    as if the down interest were one owned by another affected owner.

     View history note

    Subdivision 725-D - Consequences for down interest or up interest as CGT asset  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 725-240   CGT consequences; meaning of adjustable value  

    View history reference

    725-240(1)    
    The CGT consequences for you of a * direct value shift are of one or more of these 3 kinds:

    (a)    there are one or more * taxing events generating a gain for * down interests of which you are an affected owner (see subsection (2) );

    (b)    the * cost base and * reduced cost base of down interests of which you are an * affected owner are reduced (see subsection (3) );

    (c)    the cost base and reduced cost base of * up interests of which you are an affected owner are uplifted (see subsection (4) ).

    Note:

    If there is a taxing event generating a gain, CGT event K8 happens. See section 104-250 .

     View history note


    Taxing event generating a gain

    725-240(2)    
    To work out:

    (a)    whether under the table in section 725-245 there is a * taxing event generating a gain for you on a * down interest; and

    (b)    if so, the amount of the gain;

    assume that the adjustable value from time to time of that or any other * equity or loan interest in the * target entity is its * cost base.

    Note:

    For example, for that purpose the question whether the interest has a pre-shift gain or a pre-shift loss is determined on the basis that the interest ' s adjustable value is its cost base.



    Reduction or uplift of cost base and reduced cost base

    725-240(3)    
    The * cost base and the * reduced cost base of a * down interest are reduced at the * decrease time to the extent that section 725-250 provides for the * adjustable value of the interest to be reduced.

    725-240(4)    
    The * cost base and the * reduced cost base of an * up interest are uplifted at the * increase time to the extent that section 725-250 provides for the * adjustable value of the interest to be uplifted.

    725-240(5)    

    View history reference

    However, the * cost base or * reduced cost base is uplifted only to the extent that the amount of the uplift is still reflected in the *market value of the interest when a later * CGT event happens to the interest.

    725-240(6)    
    To work out:

    (a)    whether the * cost base or * reduced cost base of the interest is reduced or uplifted; and

    (b)    if so, by how much;

    assume that:

    (c)    the adjustable value from time to time of that or any other * equity or loan interest in the * target entity is its cost base or reduced cost base, as appropriate; and

    (d)    if the interest is an * up interest because it was issued at a * discount - the adjustable value of the interest immediately before it was issued was its cost base or reduced cost base, as appropriate, when it was issued.

    Note:

    For example, for that purpose the question whether the interest has a pre-shift gain or a pre-shift loss is determined on the basis that the interest ' s adjustable value is its cost base or reduced cost base, as appropriate.



    Reductions and uplifts also apply to pre-CGT assets

    725-240(7)    
    A reduction or uplift occurs regardless of whether the entity that owns the interest * acquired it before, on or after 20 September 1985.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-245  

    725-245   Table of taxing events generating a gain for interests as CGT assets  

    View history reference

    To the extent that the * direct value shift is from * down interests of which you are an * affected owner, and that are specified in an item in the table, to * up interests specified in that item, those up interests give rise to a taxing event generating a gain for you on each of those down interests. The gain is worked out under section 725-365 .


    Taxing events generating a gain for down interests as CGT assets
    Item Down interests: Up interests:
    1 *down interests that:

    (a) are owned by you ; and

    (b) are neither your *revenue assets nor your *trading stock ; and

    (c) have *pre-shift gains ; and

    (d) are *post-CGT assets
    *up interests owned by you that:

    (a) are neither your revenue assets nor your trading stock ; and

    (b) are *pre-CGT assets
    2 *down interests that:

    (a) are owned by you ; and

    (b) are neither your *revenue assets nor your *trading stock ; and

    (c) have *pre-shift gains
    *up interests owned by you that are your trading stock or revenue assets
    3 *down interests owned by you that:

    (a) are of the one kind (either your *trading stock or your *revenue assets ); and

    (b) have *pre-shift gains
    *up interests owned by you that:

    (a) are of the other kind (either your revenue assets or your trading stock ); or

    (b) are neither your *revenue assets nor your *trading stock
    4 *down interests owned by you that have *pre-shift gains up interests owned by other *affected owners

    Note:

    If there is a taxing event generating a gain on a down interest, CGT event K8 happens: see section 104-250 . However, a capital gain you make under CGT event K8 is disregarded if the down interest:

  • • is your trading stock (see section 118-25 ); or
  • • is a pre-CGT asset (see subsection 104-250(5) ).
  •  View history note

    SECTION 725-250   Table of consequences for adjustable values of interests as CGT assets  

    View history reference

    725-250(1)    
    The table in subsection (2) sets out consequences of the * direct value shift for the * adjustable values of * down interests and * up interests of which you are an * affected owner, in their character as * CGT assets.

    725-250(2)    
    To the extent that the * direct value shift is from * down interests specified in an item in the table to * up interests specified in that item:


    (a) the * adjustable value of each of those down interests is decreased by the amount worked out under the section (if any) specified for the down interests in the last column of that item; and


    (b) the adjustable value of each of those * up interests is uplifted by the amount worked out under the section (if any) specified for the up interests in that column.


    Consequences of the direct value shift for adjustable values of CGT assets
    Item To the extent that the direct value shift is from: To: The decrease or uplift is worked out under:
    1 *down interests that:

    (a) are owned by you ; and

    (b) have *pre-shift gains ; and

    (c) are *post-CGT assets
    *up interests owned by you that do not give rise to a *taxing event generating a gain for you on those down interests under section 725-245 for the down interests: section 725-365; and

    for the up interests: section 725-370
    2 *down interests that:

    (a) are owned by you ; and

    (b) have *pre-shift gains ; and

    (c) are *pre-CGT assets
    *up interests owned by you that are *pre-CGT assets for the down interests: section 725-365; and

    for the up interests: section 725-370
    3 *down interests that:

    (a) are owned by you ; and

    (b) have *pre-shift gains ; and

    (c) are *pre-CGT assets
    *up interests owned by you that are *post-CGT assets for the down interests: section 725-365; and

    for the up interests: section 725-375
    4 *down interests owned by you that have *pre-shift gains *up interests owned by you that give rise to a *taxing event generating a gain on those down interests under section 725-245 for the down interests: section 725-365; and

    for the up interests: section 725-375
    5 *down interests owned by you that have *pre-shift losses *up interests owned by you for the down interests: section 725-380; and

    for the up interests: section 725-375
    6 *down interests owned by you that have *pre-shift gains *up interests owned by other *affected owners for the down interests: section 725-365
    7 *down interests owned by you that have *pre-shift losses *up interests owned by other *affected owners for the down interests: section 725-380
    8 *down interests owned by other *affected owners *up interests owned by you for the up interests: section 725-375
    9 *down interests owned by you *up interests owned by entities that are not *affected owners (there are no decreases or uplifts)
    10 *down interests owned by entities that are not *affected owners *up interests owned by you (there are no decreases or uplifts)



    Reducing uplift to prevent double increase in cost base etc.

    725-250(3)    

    View history reference

    However, if, apart from paragraph (2)(b), an amount is included in the *cost base or *reduced cost base of an *up interest as a result of the *scheme under which the *direct value shift happens, the uplift in the *adjustable value of the interest under that paragraph is reduced by that amount.
     View history note

     View history note

    SECTION 725-255   Multiple CGT consequences for the same down interest or up interest  

    View history reference

    725-255(1)    
    A * down interest or * up interest of which you are an * affected owner may be covered by 2 or more items in the table in subsection 725-250(2) .

    725-255(2)    
    If the * cost base or * reduced cost base of the same * down interest or * up interest is decreased or uplifted under 2 or more items, it is decreased or uplifted by the total of the amounts worked out under those items.

    Note:

    If subsection 725-250(3) is relevant, it will affect all the uplifts worked out under all those items.

     View history note

    725-255(3)    
    If for a particular * down interest there is a * taxing event generating a gain under an item in the table in section 725-245 , that taxing event is in addition to:

    (a)    each taxing event generating a gain for that interest under any other item in that table; and

    (b)    each decrease in the * cost base or * reduced cost base of the interest under an item in the table in subsection 725-250(2) .

     View history note

    Subdivision 725-E - Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock or a revenue asset  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 725-310   Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock  

    View history reference

    725-310(1)    
    The consequences of the * direct value shift for your * trading stock are of one or more of these 3 kinds:


    (a) the * adjustable values of * down interests of which you are an * affected owner are reduced (see subsection (2));


    (b) the adjustable values of * up interests of which you are an affected owner are uplifted (see subsection (3));


    (c) there are one or more * taxing events generating a gain for down interests of which you are an affected owner (see subsection (5)).

    Effect of reduction or uplift of adjustable value

    725-310(2)    

    View history reference

    If the * adjustable value of a * down interest that is your *trading stock is reduced under section 725-335 , you are treated as if:


    (a) * immediately before the * decrease time, you had sold the interest to someone else (at * arm ' s length and in the ordinary course of business) for its * adjustable value immediately before the decrease time; and


    (b) immediately after the decrease time, you had bought the interest back for the reduced adjustable value.

     View history note

    725-310(3)    
    If the * adjustable value of an * up interest that is your * trading stock is uplifted under section 725-335 , you are treated as if:


    (a) * immediately before the * increase time, you had sold the interest to someone else (at * arm ' s length and in the ordinary course of business) for its * adjustable value immediately before the increase time; and


    (b) immediately after the increase time, you had bought the interest back for the uplifted adjustable value.

    725-310(4)    

    View history reference

    However, the increase in the cost of an * up interest because of paragraph (3)(b) is taken into account from time to time only to the extent that the amount of the increase is still reflected in the *market value of the interest.
    Note:

    The situations where the increase in cost would be taken into account include:

  • • in working out your deductions for the cost of trading stock acquired during the income year in which the increase time happens; and
  • • the end of an income year if the interest ' s closing value as trading stock is worked out on the basis of its cost; and
  • • the start of the income year in which the interest is disposed of, if that happens in a later income year and the interest ' s closing value as trading stock at the end of the previous income year was worked out on the basis of its cost.
  • If the interest stops being trading stock, section 70-110 treats you as having disposed of it.



    Taxing event generating a gain

    725-310(5)    
    For each * taxing event generating a gain under an item in the table in subsection 725-335(3) , the gain is included in your assessable income for the income year in which the * decrease time happens.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-315  

    725-315   Adjustable value of trading stock  

    View history reference

    If a * down interest or * up interest is your *trading stock, its adjustable value at a particular time is:


    (a) if the interest has been trading stock of yours ever since the start of the income year in which that time occurs - its * value as trading stock at the start of the income year; or

    View history reference


    (b) otherwise - its cost.

    Note 1:

    If an interest has been affected by an earlier direct value shift during the same income year, it will be treated as having already been sold and repurchased (because of an earlier application of section 725-310 ). As a result, the cost on repurchase becomes its adjustable value immediately before the decrease time or increase time for the later direct value shift.

    Note 2:

    The adjustable value of an interest that is an up interest because it was issued at a discount is worked out under paragraph (b).

     View history note

    SECTION 725-320   Consequences for down interest or up interest as a revenue asset  

    View history reference

    725-320(1)    
    The consequences of the * direct value shift for your * revenue assets are of one or more of these 3 kinds:


    (a) the * adjustable values of * down interests of which you are an * affected owner are reduced (see subsection (2));


    (b) the adjustable values of * up interests of which you are an affected owner are uplifted (see subsection (3));


    (c) one or more * taxing events generating a gain for down interests of which you are an affected owner (see subsection (5)).

    Effect of reduction or uplift of adjustable value

    725-320(2)    
    If the * adjustable value of a * down interest that is your * revenue asset is decreased under section 725-335 , you are treated as if:


    (a) * immediately before the * decrease time, you had sold the interest to someone else for its * adjustable value immediately before the decrease time; and


    (b) immediately afterwards, you had bought the interest back for the reduced adjustable value; and


    (c) from the time when you bought it back, the interest continued to be a revenue asset, for the same reasons as it was a revenue asset before you sold it.

    725-320(3)    
    If the * adjustable value of an * up interest that is your * revenue asset is uplifted under section 725-335 , you are treated as if:


    (a) * immediately before the * increase time, you had sold the interest to someone else for its * adjustable value immediately before the increase time; and


    (b) immediately afterwards, you had bought the interest back for the uplifted adjustable value; and


    (c) from the time when you bought it back, the interest continued to be a revenue asset, for the same reasons as it was a revenue asset before you sold it.

    725-320(4)    

    View history reference

    However, the uplift in * adjustable value is taken into account only to the extent that the amount of the uplift is still reflected in the *market value of the interest when it is disposed of or otherwise realised.

    Taxing event generating a gain

    725-320(5)    
    For each * taxing event generating a gain under an item in the table in subsection 725-335(3) , the gain is included in your assessable income for the income year in which the * decrease time happens.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-325   Adjustable value of revenue asset  

    View history reference

    725-325(1)    
    If a * down interest is your * revenue asset, its adjustable value immediately before the * decrease time is the total of the amounts that would be subtracted from the gross disposal proceeds in calculating any profit or loss on disposal of the interest if you disposed of it immediately before the decrease time.

    725-325(2)    

    View history reference

    If an * up interest is your * revenue asset and it increases in *market value because of the * direct value shift, its adjustable value immediately before the * increase time is the total of the amounts that would be subtracted from the gross disposal proceeds in calculating any profit or loss on disposal of the interest if you disposed of it immediately before the increase time.

    725-325(3)    
    If an * up interest is your * revenue asset and it is issued at a * discount, it is taken to have an adjustable value immediately before it is issued equal to the consideration paid or given by you for the interest.

    Note:

    If an interest has been affected by an earlier direct value shift during the same income year, it will be treated as having already been sold and repurchased (because of an earlier application of section 725-320 ). As a result, the cost on repurchase becomes its adjustable value immediately before the decrease time or increase time for the later direct value shift.

     View history note

    SECTION 725-335   How to work out those consequences  

    View history reference

    725-335(1)    
    This section sets out the consequences of the * direct value shift for a * down interest or * up interest as * trading stock or a * revenue asset.

    725-335(2)    

    View history reference

    If you have both *trading stock and *revenue assets, items 1 and 2 of the table in subsection (3) can apply once to the trading stock and again to the revenue assets. The other items apply (if at all) to the trading stock and revenue assets together.
     View history note


    Decreases and uplifts in adjustable value

    725-335(3)    

    View history reference

    To the extent that the * direct value shift is from * down interests specified in an item in the table to * up interests specified in that item:


    (a) the * adjustable value of each of those down interests is decreased by the amount worked out under the section (if any) specified for the down interests in the last column of that item; and


    (b) the adjustable value of each of those * up interests is uplifted by the amount worked out under the section (if any) specified for the up interests in that column.


    Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock or revenue asset
    Item To the extent that the direct value shift is from: To: The decrease or uplift is worked out under:
    1 *down interests owned by you that:

    (a) are of the one kind (either your *trading stock or your *revenue assets ); and

    (b) have *pre-shift gains
    *up interests owned by you that are of that same kind for the down interests: section 725-365; and

    for the up interests: section 725-370
    2 *down interests owned by you that:

    (a) are of the one kind (either your *trading stock or your *revenue assets ); and

    (b) have *pre-shift gains
    *up interests owned by you that are of the other kind (either your revenue assets or your trading stock ) for the down interests: section 725-365; and

    for the up interests: section 725-375
    3 *down interests owned by you that:

    (a) are your *trading stock or *revenue assets ; and

    (b) have *pre-shift losses
    *up interests owned by you that are of that same kind or of the other kind for the down interests: section 725-380; and

    for the up interests: section 725-375
    4 *down interests owned by you that:

    (a) are your *trading stock or *revenue assets ; and

    (b) have *pre-shift gains
    *up interests owned by you that are neither your revenue assets nor your trading stock for the down interests: section 725-365
    5 *down interests owned by you that:

    (a) are your *trading stock or *revenue assets ; and

    (b) have *pre-shift losses
    *up interests owned by you that are neither your revenue assets nor your trading stock for the down interests: section 725-380
    6 *down interests owned by you that are neither your *revenue assets nor your *trading stock *up interests owned by you that are your trading stock or revenue assets for the up interests: section 725-375
    7 *down interests owned by you that:

    (a) are your *trading stock or *revenue assets ; and

    (b) have *pre-shift gains
    up interests owned by other *affected owners for the down interests: section 725-365
    8 *down interests owned by you that:

    (a) are your *trading stock or *revenue assets ; and

    (b) have *pre-shift losses
    *up interests owned by other *affected owners for the down interests: section 725-380
    9 *down interests owned by other *affected owners *up interests owned by you that are your *trading stock or *revenue assets for the up interests: section 725-375
    10 *down interests owned by you that are your *trading stock or *revenue assets *up interests owned by entities that are not *affected owners (there are no decreases or uplifts)
    11 *down interests owned by entities that are not *affected owners *up interests owned by you that are your *trading stock or * revenue assets (there are no decreases or uplifts)

     View history note


    Reducing uplift to prevent double increase in adjustable value

    725-335(3A)    

    View history reference

    However, if, apart from paragraph (3)(b), an amount is included, as a result of the *scheme under which the *direct value shift happens, in the *adjustable value of an *up interest that is your *trading stock or *revenue asset, the uplift in the adjustable value of the interest under that paragraph is reduced by that amount.
     View history note


    Taxing events generating a gain

    725-335(4)    
    To the extent that the * direct value shift is from * down interests:


    (a) of which you are an * affected owner; and


    (b) that are specified in item 2, 4 or 7 in the table in subsection (3);

    to * up interests specified in that item, those up interests give rise to a taxing event generating a gain for you under that item on each of those down interests. The gain is worked out under section 725-365.


     View history note

    SECTION 725-340   Multiple trading stock or revenue asset consequences for the same down interest or up interest  

    View history reference

    725-340(1)    
    A * down interest or * up interest of which you are an * affected owner may be covered by 2 or more items in the table in subsection 725-335(3) .

    725-340(2)    
    If the * adjustable value of the same * down interest or * up interest is decreased or uplifted under 2 or more items, it is decreased or uplifted by the total of the amounts worked out under those items.

    Note:

    If subsection 725-335(3A) is relevant, it will affect all the uplifts worked out under all those items.

     View history note

    725-340(3)    
    If for a particular * down interest there is a * taxing event generating a gain under an item, that taxing event is in addition to:


    (a) each taxing event generating a gain for that interest under any other item in the table; and


    (b) each decrease in the * adjustable value of the interest under that or any other item in the table.

     View history note

    Subdivision 725-F - Value adjustments and taxed gains  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 725-365  

    725-365   Decreases in adjustable values of down interests (with pre-shift gains), and taxing events generating a gain  

    View history reference

    Use the following method statement:


    (a) to work out the amount of the gain for a * taxing event generating a gain under:


    (i) section 725-245 ; or

    (ii) item 2, 4 or 7 of the table in subsection 725-335(3) ; and


    (b) to work out the decrease in * adjustable value of a * down interest under:


    (i) item 1, 2, 3, 4 or 6 of the table in subsection 725-250(2) ; or

    (ii) item 1, 2, 4 or 7 of the table in subsection 725-335(3) .
    Method statement

    Step 1.

    Group together all * down interests that:

  • (a) are of the kind referred to in the relevant item; and
  • (b) immediately before the * decrease time, had the same * adjustable value as the down interest; and
  • (c) immediately before that time had the same *market value as the down interest; and
  • (d) sustained the same decrease in market value as the down interest because of the * direct value shift.

  • Step 2.

    Work out the value shifted from that group of * down interests to the * up interests referred to in the relevant item using the following formula:


      Sum of the decreases in *market value of all *down interests in the group because of the *direct value shift × Sum of the increases in *market value
    of, and *discounts on the issue of,
    those *up interests because of the
                                    *direct value shift                                
    Sum of the increases in *market value
    of, and *discounts given on the issue
    of, all *up interests because of the
    *direct value shift
     


    Step 3.

    Work out the notional adjustable value of the value shifted from that group of * down interests to those * up interests using the formula:


      Sum of the *adjustable values, immediately before the *decrease time, of all *down interests in the group ×                             Value shifted                            
    Sum of the *market values,
    immediately before the
    *decrease time, of all *down
    interests in the group
     


    Step 4.

    The decrease in the * adjustable value of the * down interest under the relevant item is equal to:


                            Notional adjustable value                      
    Number of *down interests in the group
     


    Step 5.

    For a * taxing event generating a gain under the relevant item, the amount of the gain is equal to:


      Value shifted − Notional adjustable value
    Number of *down interests in the group
     

     View history note

    SECTION 725-370  

    725-370   Uplifts in adjustable values of up interests under certain table items  

    View history reference

    Use the following method statement to work out the uplift in * adjustable value of an * up interest under:


    (a) item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 725-250(2) ; or


    (b) item 1 of the table in subsection 725-335(3) . Method statement


    Step 1.

    If the *market value of the * up interest increases because of the * direct value shift, group together all up interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that:

  • (a) immediately before the * increase time, had the same * adjustable value as the up interest; and
  • (b) sustained the same increase in market value as the up interest because of the * direct value shift.
  • If the * up interest is issued at a * discount, group together all * up interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that:

  • (c) immediately before the * increase time, had the same * adjustable value as the up interest; and
  • (d) because of the direct value shift, are issued at the same discount as the up interest.

  • Step 2.

    The notional adjustable value of the value shifted from the * down interests referred to in the relevant item to all the * up interests referred to in that item has already been worked out under one or more applications of step 3 of the method statement in section 725-365 .


    Step 3.

    Use the following formula to work out how much of that notional adjustable value is attributable to the value shifted to the group of * up interests referred to in step 1 of this method statement:


      Notional
    adjustable value
    × Sum of the *market values,
    immediately after the *increase
    time, of all *up interests in the group
    Sum of the *market values,
    immediately after the *increase time,
    of all *up interests referred to
    in the relevant item
     


    Step 4.

    The uplift in the * adjustable value of the * up interest under the relevant item is equal to:


      The amount worked out under step 3
    Number of interests in that group of
    *up interests
     

     View history note

    SECTION 725-375  

    725-375   Uplifts in adjustable values of up interests under other table items  

    View history reference

    Use the following method statement to work out the uplift in * adjustable value of an * up interest under:


    (a) item 3, 4, 5 or 8 of the table in subsection 725-250(2) ; or


    (b) item 2, 3, 6 or 9 of the table in subsection 725-335(3) . Method statement


    Step 1.

    If the *market value of the * up interest increases because of the direct value shift, group together all * up interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that sustained the same increase in market value as the up interest because of the direct value shift.

    If the up interest is issued at a * discount, group together all up interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that are issued at a discount of the same amount as the up interest because of the direct value shift.


    Step 2.

    The value shifted to that group of * up interests from the * down interests referred to in the relevant item is the amount worked out using the formula:


      Sum of the group
    increases or
    discounts
    × Sum of the decreases
    in *market value of
    those *down interests
     
      Total value of the *direct value shift  

    where:

    sum of the group increases or discounts means (as appropriate):

  • (a) the sum of the increases in *market value of all * up interests in the group because of the * direct value shift; or
  • (b) the sum of the * discounts at which all * up interests in the group were issued because of the * direct value shift.
  • total value of the direct value shift means:

  • (a) if the sum of the decreases in *market value of all * down interests because of the * direct value shift is equal to or greater than the sum of the increases in market value of all * up interests and all * discounts given because of the shift - the sum of the decreases; or
  • (b) if the sum of the decreases in market value of all down interests because of the direct value shift is less than the sum of the increases in market value of all up interests and all discounts given because of the shift - the sum of the increases and discounts.

  • Step 3.

    The uplift in the * adjustable value of the * up interest under the relevant item is equal to:


                                          Value shifted                                    
    Number of *up interests in the group
     

     View history note

    SECTION 725-380  

    725-380   Decreases in adjustable value of down interests (with pre-shift losses)  

    View history reference

    Use the following method statement to work out the decrease in * adjustable value of a * down interest under:


    (a) item 5 or 7 of the table in subsection 725-250(2) ; or


    (b) item 3, 5 or 8 of the table in subsection 725-335(3) . Method statement


    Step 1.

    Group together all * down interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that:

  • (a) immediately before the * decrease time, had the same * adjustable value as the down interest; and
  • (b) immediately before that time had the same *market value as the down interest; and
  • (c) sustained the same decrease in market value as the down interest because of the * direct value shift.

  • Step 2.

    Work out the value shifted from that group of * down interests to the * up interests referred to in the relevant item using the formula:


      Sum of the decreases in *market
    value of all *down interests in
    the group because of the *direct
    value shift
    × Sum of the increases in *market value
    of, and *discounts on the issue of,
    those *up interests because of the
                                    *direct value shift                                
    Sum of the increases in *market value
    of, and *discounts given on the issue
    of, all *up interests because of the
    *direct value shift
     


    Step 3.

    The decrease in * adjustable value of the * down interest under the relevant item is equal to:


                                          Value shifted                                    
    Number of *down interests in the
    group
     

     View history note

    Division 727 - Indirect value shifting affecting interests in companies and trusts, and arising from non-arm ' s length dealings  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Guide to Division 727  

    SECTION 727-1   What this Division is about  

    View history reference

    If there is a net shift of value between 2 related entities because of a non-arm ' s length dealing, this Division:

  • (a) prevents losses from arising, because of the value shift, on realisation of direct or indirect equity or loan interests in the losing entity; and
  • (b) within limits, prevents gains from arising, because of the value shift, on realisation of direct or indirect equity or loan interests in the gaining entity.
  • However, it does so only for interests that are owned by entities involved in the value shift.

     View history note


    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    TABLE OF SECTIONS
    727-5 What is an indirect value shift?
    727-10 How does this Division deal with indirect value shifts?
    727-15 When does an indirect value shift have consequences under this Division?
    727-25 Effect of this Division on realisations at a loss that occur before the nature or extent of an indirect value shift can be fully determined

    SECTION 727-5   What is an indirect value shift?  

    View history reference

    727-5(1)    
    An indirect value shift arises when there is a net shift of value from one entity to another.

    Example:

    Company A transfers property to company B in return for a cash payment. If the market value of the property is $180 million but the cash payment is only $50 million, there is a net shift of value from company A to company B of $130 million.


    727-5(2)    
    It is called indirect because the transaction will have the indirect effect of shifting value from equity or loan interests in the losing entity to equity or loan interests in the gaining entity.

    This is because the net shift in value between the entities will usually decrease the market value of interests in the losing entity and increase the market value of interests in the gaining entity.

    Example:

    Assume that company C owns all the shares in company A and company D owns all the shares in company B. The net shift of value from company A to company B will reduce the value of company C ' s shares in company A and increase the value of company D ' s shares in company B.


    727-5(3)    
    It will also produce corresponding effects further up a chain of entities.

    Example:

    Assume that company E owns all the shares in company C and company D. The net shift of value from company A to company B will also reduce the value of company E ' s shares in company C and increase the value of its shares in company D.



    727-5(4)    
    This Division is not concerned with the tax treatment of the net shift in value between the entities at the bottom of the chains. Instead, it deals with the effects on the market value of interests (both direct and indirect) in those entities.

    727-5(5)    
    An indirect value shift distorts the relationship between the market value of an equity or loan interest and its value for income tax purposes. When the interest is realised, this can produce an inappropriate loss for income tax purposes, or an inappropriate gain.

    Example:

    If company E sold its shares in company C, the indirect value shift could (apart from this Division) result in a loss for income tax purposes. Company E could defer the corresponding gain on its shares in company D by not selling these.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-10   How does this Division deal with indirect value shifts?  

    View history reference

    727-10(1)    
    To prevent an inappropriate loss or gain from arising on realisation of an interest, this Division reduces the amount of the loss or gain (realisation time method). However, a choice can be made to adjust the interest ' s value for income tax purposes in a way that takes account of the indirect value shift (adjustable value method).

    727-10(2)    
    This Division does not create taxing events giving rise to gains or losses.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-15   When does an indirect value shift have consequences under this Division?  

    View history reference

    727-15(1)    
    Indirect value shift is defined very broadly, but the application of this Division is limited in various ways.

    727-15(2)    
    The losing entity must be a company or trust (except a superannuation entity). However, the gaining entity can be any kind of entity, including an individual.

    727-15(3)    
    This Division does not apply if entities deal with each other at arm ' s length, or provide economic benefits in return for full market value.

    727-15(4)    
    The losing entity and the gaining entity must be connected by having had the same ultimate controller . In the case of closely held entities, they may instead be connected by having had a high level of common ownership .

    727-15(5)    
    The only interests affected are those owned by entities involved in the indirect value shift or by their associates.

    727-15(6)    
    There are a range of exclusions, such as:


    (a) exclusions for minor indirect value shifts; and


    (b) a series of rules designed to provide safe harbour treatment for common transactions relating to services; and


    (c) anti-overlap provisions to prevent double-counting.

    727-15(7)    
    Rules of thumb are included to make it easier to determine the market value of some kinds of economic benefits.

    727-15(8)    
    To reduce compliance costs for:


    (a) *small business entities; and

    View history reference


    (b) entities that meet the CGT small business net asset threshold ($6 million);

    View history reference

    interests owned by those entities are not affected by this Division.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-25   Effect of this Division on realisations at a loss that occur before the nature or extent of an indirect value shift can be fully determined  

    View history reference

    727-25(1)    
    To determine whether a scheme gives rise to an indirect value shift, it must be possible to identify all the economic benefits under the scheme, and the providers and recipients of those benefits.

    727-25(2)    
    Before then, interests that might be affected by the scheme may be realised at a loss. Subdivision 727-K contains special rules that apply if that happens.

     View history note

    Subdivision 727-A - Scope of the indirect value shifting rules  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 727-95  

    727-95   Main object  

    View history reference

    The main object of this Division is:


    (a) to prevent inappropriate losses from arising on the realisation of direct or indirect equity or loan interests in an entity from which there has been anet shift of value because of a dealing that is not at * arm ' s length; and

    View history reference


    (b) to prevent inappropriate gains from arising on the realisation of *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests in the entity to which that value has been shifted;

    View history reference

    in cases where the 2 entities are related as set out in this Division.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-100  

    727-100   When an indirect value shift has consequences under this Division  

    View history reference

    An * indirect value shift (see Subdivision 727-B ) has consequences under this Division if, and only if:


    (a) the * losing entity is at the time of the indirect value shift a company or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)); and


    (b) in relation to either or both of the following:


    (i) the losing entity * providing one or more economic benefits to the gaining entity * in connection with the * scheme from which the indirect value shift results;

    (ii) the gaining entity providing one or more economic benefits to the losing entity in connection with the scheme;
    the 2 entities are not dealing with each other at * arm ' s length; and


    (c) either or both of sections 727-105 and 727-110 are satisfied; and


    (d) no exclusion in Subdivision 727-C applies.

    Note 1:

    The consequences for direct and indirect interests in the losing entity or in the gaining entity are set out in Subdivision 727-F . If those consequences are to be worked out using the realisation time method (under Subdivision 727-G ), there are further exclusions for certain 95% services indirect value shifts: see section 727-700 .

    Note 2:

    An indirect value shift does not have consequences for interests in the losing entity or gaining entity owned immediately before the IVS time by an entity that:

  • • is a small business entity for each income year that includes any of the IVS period; or
  • • would satisfy the maximum net asset value test in section 152-15 throughout the IVS period.
  • See subsection 727-470(2) .

     View history note

    SECTION 727-105  

    727-105   Ultimate controller test  

    View history reference

    It must be the case that, at some time during the * IVS period:


    (a) the * losing entity and the * gaining entity have the same * ultimate controller; or


    (b) the ultimate controller of the losing entity is the same entity that was the ultimate controller of the gaining entity at a different time during that period; or


    (c) the gaining entity is the ultimate controller of the losing entity; or


    (d) the losing entity is the ultimate controller of the gaining entity.

    For the concept of IVS period , see section 727-150 .

    For the concept of ultimate controller , see section 727-350 .

     View history note

    SECTION 727-110   Common-ownership nexus test (if both losing and gaining entities are closely held)  

    View history reference

    727-110(1)    
    Or, it must be the case that:


    (a) at some time during the * IVS period, neither the * losing entity nor the * gaining entity has 300 or more members (in the case of a company) or 300 or more beneficiaries (in the case of a trust); and


    (b) the losing entity and the gaining entity have a * common-ownership nexus within the IVS period.

    For the concept of IVS period , see section 727-150 .

    For the concept of common-ownership nexus , see section 727-400 .


    727-110(2)    
    Section 124-810 (under which certain companies and trusts are not regarded as having 300 or more members or beneficiaries) also applies for the purposes of this Division.

    727-110(3)    
    In addition, this Division applies to a * non-fixed trust as if it did not have 300 or more beneficiaries.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-125  

    727-125   No consequences if losing entity is a complying superannuation entity etc.  

    View history reference

    An *indirect value shift has no consequences under this Division if the *losing entity is one of the following in relation to the income year in which the indirect value shift happens:


    (a) a *complying superannuation entity;


    (b) a *non-complying superannuation fund;


    (c) a *non-complying approved deposit fund.

     View history note

    Subdivision 727-B - What is an indirect value shift  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 727-150   How to determine whether a scheme results in an indirect value shift  

    View history reference

    727-150(1)    
    A * scheme can result in one or more * indirect value shifts only if one or more economic benefits have been, are being, or are to be, * provided * in connection with the scheme.

    727-150(2)    
    The question whether the * scheme has that result must be determined by reference to the facts and circumstances that exist at the earliest time (either when the scheme is entered into or later) when it is reasonable to conclude that:


    (a) all the economic benefits that have been, are being, or are to be, * provided * in connection with the scheme can be identified; and


    (b) for each of those economic benefits:


    (i) the entity that has provided, is providing, or is to provide, the economic benefit can be identified; and

    (ii) the entity to which the economic benefit has been, is being, or is to be, provided can be identified; and

    (iii) if the economic benefit is to be provided - those entities are in existence, and the providing of the economic benefit is not contingent; and


    (c) there are no other economic benefits that are to be provided in connection with the scheme if some contingency is met.

    That time is called the IVS time for the scheme.

    Note:

    In most cases, the IVS time will be at or soon after the scheme is entered into. However, if:

  • • direct or indirect interests in a company or trust are realised at a loss when the IVS time for the scheme has not yet happened (even if it never happens); and
  • • the company or trust has provided, is providing, is to provide, or might provide, economic benefits in connection with the scheme;
  • there may be consequences for those interests similar to those of an indirect value shift resulting from the scheme. See Subdivision 727-K .


    727-150(3)    

    View history reference

    The * scheme results in an indirect value shift from one entity (the losing entity ) to another entity (the gaining entity ) if the total *market value of the one or more economic benefits (the greater benefits ) that the losing entity has * provided, is providing, or is to provide, to the gaining entity * in connection with the scheme exceeds:


    (a) the total market value of the one or more economic benefits ( lesser benefits ) that the gaining entity has provided, is providing, or is to provide, to the losing entity in connection with the scheme; or


    (b) if there are no economic benefits covered by paragraph (a) - nil.

    That excess is the amount of the indirect value shift.


    727-150(4)    

    View history reference

    The *market value of an economic benefit is to be determined as at the earliest time when it is reasonable to conclude that:


    (a) the economic benefit can be identified; and


    (b) paragraph (2)(b) is satisfied for that benefit.

    For more rules affecting how the market value of an economic benefit is determined, see Subdivision 727-D .


    727-150(5)    
    Neither the * losing entity nor the * gaining entity needs to be a party to the * scheme. A benefit can be provided by act or omission.

    727-150(6)    
    The indirect value shift happens at the * IVS time.

    727-150(7)    
    The IVS period for a * scheme starts immediately before the scheme is entered into and ends at the * IVS time.

    727-150(8)    
    A contingency that is artificial, or is virtually certain to be met, is treated under this Division as if it had been met.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-155   Providing economic benefits  

    View history reference

    Examples

    727-155(1)    
    These are some examples of an entity providing an economic benefit to another entity:


    (a) the first entity pays an amount to the other entity (in this case the *market value of the benefit is the amount of the payment);

    View history reference


    (b) the first entity provides an asset or services to the other entity;


    (c) the first entity does something that creates an asset in the hands of the other entity (for example, a company issues shares to its members);


    (d) the first entity incurs a liability to the other entity, or increases a liability it already owes to the other entity;


    (e) the first entity terminates all or part of a liability owed by the other entity;


    (f) the first entity does something that increases the market value of an asset that the other entity holds.

    727-155(2)    
    These examples are not intended to limit the meaning of providing an economic benefit.

    Things treated as economic benefits

    727-155(3)    
    This Division applies as if the ending of:


    (a) a * primary equity interest or * secondary equity interest in an entity; or


    (b) a right that the owner of a * primary equity interest or * secondary equity interest in an entity has because of owning the interest;

    were an economic benefit that the owner of the interest provides to that entity.


     View history note

    SECTION 727-160   When an economic benefit is provided in connection with a scheme  

    View history reference

    727-160(1)    
    An economic benefit has been, is being, is to be, or might be, * provided by an entity to another entity in connection with a * scheme if, and only if:


    (a) the benefit has been, is being, is to be, or might be, provided under the scheme; or


    (b) the providing of the benefit is reasonably attributable to:


    (i) something that has been, is being, is to be, or might be, done or omitted under the scheme (whether before, at the time of, or after, the providing of the benefit) by an entity that is either of those entities or a third entity; or

    (ii) 2 or more such things.

    727-160(2)    
    An entity referred to in paragraph (1)(b) need not be a party to the * scheme. A benefit can be provided by act or omission.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-165   Preventing double-counting of economic benefits  

    View history reference

    Rights to have economic benefits provided

    727-165(1)    
    If an economic benefit that has been, is being, is to be, or might be, * provided as mentioned in subsection 727-150(3) or 727-855(1) consists of a right to have economic benefits provided, that subsection applies to the right but does not also apply to those economic benefits.

    Example:

    Acme Ltd enters into an agreement with Paragon Pty Ltd under which Acme is to provide services to Paragon over a 5 year period in return for payments.

    Paragon ' s rights under the agreement are economic benefits that Acme provides to Paragon when the agreement is made. The services are economic benefits that Acme is to provide to Paragon.

    Because of this subsection, the market value of the rights is taken into account in working out whether there has been an indirect value shift, but the market value of the services is not.



    Effect of an economic benefit on interests in the entity to which it is provided

    727-165(2)    
    If an economic benefit has been, is being, or is to be, * provided to an entity, then, for the purposes of subsection 727-150(3) or 727-855(1) , disregard an economic benefit to the extent that:


    (a) it consists of an increase in the *market value of:


    (i) an * equity or loan interest in the entity; or

    (ii) an * indirect equity or loan interest in the entity; and
    View history reference


    (b) the increase is reasonably attributable to the first-mentioned benefit.

     View history note

    Subdivision 727-C - Exclusions  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 727-200   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    Some indirect value shifts do not have consequences under this Division.

    Note 1:

    If the consequences of an indirect value shift are to be worked out using the realisation time method (under Subdivision 727-G ), there are further exclusions for certain 95% services indirect value shifts: see section 727-700 .

    Note 2:

    For cases where there may be both a direct value shift and an indirect value shift, see Subdivision 727-L .

     View history note

    General

    SECTION 727-215   Amount does not exceed $50,000  

    View history reference

    727-215(1)    
    An * indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if the amount of it does not exceed $50,000.

    727-215(2)    
    However, subsection (1) does not apply to an * indirect value shift (and is taken never to have applied to it) if:


    (a) before, at the same time as, or after it, another indirect value shift happens for which the same entity is the losing entity as for the first indirect value shift; and


    (b) having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that the sole or main reason why one of the indirect value shifts happened under a different * scheme from the other was so that its amount would not exceed $50,000.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-220   Disposal of asset at cost, or at undervalue if full value is not reflected in adjustable values of equity or loan interests in the losing entity  

    View history reference

    727-220(1)    
    An * indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if the conditions in this section are met.

    727-220(2)    
    The * greater benefits must consist entirely of:


    (a) the * losing entity transferring a * CGT asset to the * gaining entity; or


    (b) a right to have the losing entity transfer an asset to the gaining entity.

    727-220(3)    

    View history reference

    There must be * lesser benefits and, as at the * IVS time, the total *market value of the lesser benefits must not be less than the greatest of these amounts:


    (a) the asset ' s * cost base at that time;


    (b) the asset ' s cost;


    (c) the asset ' s market value immediately before the most recent time (if any), since the * losing entity * acquired the asset, when an * affected owner has acquired:


    (i) a * primary equity interest in the losing entity; or

    (ii) an * indirect primary equity interest in the losing entity.

    727-220(4)    
    A * primary equity interest in an entity is an indirect primary equity interest in another entity if, and only if:


    (a) the first entity owns a primary equity interest in the other entity; or


    (b) the first entity owns a primary equity interest that is an indirect primary equity interest in the other entity because of one or more other applications of this subsection.

     View history note

    Indirect value shifts involving services

    SECTION 727-230  

    727-230   Services provided by losing entity to gaining entity for at least their direct cost  

    View history reference

    An * indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if:

    (a)    

    View history reference
    to the extent of at least 95% of their total *market value, the * greater benefits consist entirely of:

    (i) a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240 provided directly by the losing entity to the gaining entity; or

    (ii) services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are being, or are to be, so provided;
    or both; and

    (b)    there are * lesser benefits and, as at the * IVS time, the total market value of the lesser benefits is not less than the total of:


    (i) the present value of the direct cost to the losing entity of providing the services; and

    (ii) the present value of a reasonable allocation of the total direct cost to the losing entity of providing services that include the first-mentioned services (so far as it is not already covered by subparagraph (i)).

    To work out the costs and present values referred to in paragraph (b) , see section 727-245 .

     View history note

    SECTION 727-235   Services provided by gaining entity to losing entity for no more than a commercially realistic price  

    View history reference

    727-235(1)    
    An * indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if:

    (a)    

    View history reference
    there are * lesser benefits and, to the extent of at least 95% oftheir total *market value, the lesser benefits consist entirely of:

    (i) a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240 provided directly by the gaining entity to the losing entity; or

    (ii) services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are being, or are to be, so provided;
    or both; and

    (b)    as at the * IVS time, the total market value of the greater benefits is not more than the total of:


    (i) the present value of the direct cost to the gaining entity of providing the services; and

    (ii) the present value of a reasonable allocation of the total direct cost to the gaining entity of providing services that include the first-mentioned services (so far as it is not already covered by subparagraph (i)); and

    (iii) the present value of a reasonable allocation of the indirect cost to the gaining entity of providing the first-mentioned services; and

    (iv) the mark-up worked out under subsection (2) or (3) of this section.

    To work out the costs and present values referred to in paragraph (1)(b) , see section 727-245 .


    727-235(2)    
    If it is reasonable to estimate that an entity providing the same quantity of services of the same kind in the same market would charge for them on the basis of a particular percentage mark-up, or on the basis of a percentage mark-up within a particular range, the mark-up for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(iv) is:

  • • the total of the respective present values of the costs mentioned in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i) , (ii) and (iii) ;
  • multiplied by:

  • • that percentage mark-up, or the highest percentage in that range.

  • 727-235(3)    
    Otherwise, the mark-up for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(iv) is 10% of the total of the respective present values of the costs mentioned in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i) , (ii) and (iii) .

     View history note

    SECTION 727-240   What services certain provisions apply to  

    View history reference

    727-240(1)    
    Sections 727-230 , 727-235 , 727-700 and 727-725 apply only to services consisting of:


    (a) doing work (including professional work and giving professional advice or any other kind of advice); or

    Note:

    Examples include accounting or legal services; advertising services and financial management services.


    (b) providing (including allowing use of) facilities for entertainment, recreation or instruction; or


    (c) leasing, renting, hiring, or allowing the use of, any asset; or


    (d) packaging, transporting or storing any property; or


    (e) providing insurance; or


    (f) services provided, by a banker to a customer, in the course of the banker carrying on the business of banking; or


    (g) lending money or providing any other form of financial accommodation.

    727-240(2)    
    It does not matter whether services covered by paragraph (1)(a) also involve supplying property.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-245   How to work out certain amounts for the purposes of sections 727-230 and 727-235  

    View history reference

    727-245(1)    
    The costs mentioned in paragraph 727-230(b) or 727-235(1)(b) are to be worked out:

    (a)    in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices; and

    (b)    to the extent that the services are to be provided in the future, on the basis of a reasonable estimate of those costs.

    727-245(2)    
    To avoid doubt, the direct cost or indirect cost mentioned in paragraph 727-230(b) or 727-235(1)(b) does not include:

    (a)    to the extent that the services consist of or include lending money or providing any other form of financial accommodation - the amount of the loan or other accommodation; or

    (b)    to the extent that the services consist of or include leasing, renting, hiring, or allowing the use of, any asset:


    (i) the cost of acquiring the asset; or

    (ii) the cost of acquiring an interest in, or right in respect of, the asset in order to provide the services.
    Example:

    Acme Ltd is the holding company of Group Financier Pty Ltd. Group Financier Pty Ltd borrows $20 million at 7% per annum, and on lends it to other subsidiaries of Acme Ltd at 8% per annum.

    The $20 million does not form part of Group Financier Pty Ltd ' s direct cost of the services it provides to the other subsidiaries in the form of the on lending. However, the 7% interest that Group Financier Pty Ltd pays on the $20 million does form part of that direct cost.


    727-245(3)    
    The present values mentioned in paragraph 727-230(b) or 727-235(1)(b) are to be worked out using a discount rate equal to the rate that, for the purposes of section 109N of Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , is the benchmark interest rate for the income year in which the * IVS time occurs.

    Note:

    That section is about distributions to entities connected with a private company.


     View history note

    Anti-overlap provisions

    SECTION 727-250   Distribution by an entity to a member or beneficiary  

    View history reference

    727-250(1)    
    An * indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if:


    (a) the * greater benefits consist entirely of:


    (i) a distribution of income or capital that the * losing entity makes to the * gaining entity; or

    (ii) a right to a distribution of income or capital that the losing entity is to make to the gaining entity;
    because the gaining entity holds * primary equity interests in the losing entity; and


    (b) either:


    (i) an amount covered by one or more of subsections (2), (3) and (4); or

    (ii) the total of 2 or more such amounts;
    equals or exceeds the amount of the distribution.

    Conditions

    727-250(2)    
    This subsection covers an amount that the assessable income or exempt income of the gaining entity for any income year includes because of the distribution or right.

    727-250(3)    
    This subsection covers an amount by which the * cost base or * reduced cost base (or both) of some or all of the * primary equity interests referred to in subsection (1) changes because of the distribution or right.

    727-250(4)    
    This subsection covers an amount that, because of the distribution or right, is taken into account:


    (a) under section 116-20 in working out the * capital proceeds of a * CGT event that happens during any income year to some or all of the * primary equity interests referred to in subsection (1); or


    (b) in working out a * capital gain that an entity makes from CGT event E4 or G1 happening during any income year to some or all of those primary equity interests; or


    (c) in working out whether a loss or gain is * realised for income tax purposes by a * realisation event that happens to some or all of those primary equity interests (in their character as * trading stock or * revenue assets).

    Application of section to deemed dividend

    727-250(5)    
    If a * corporate tax entity makes a * distribution that is not otherwise a distribution of income or capital, this section applies as if the distribution were a distribution of income or capital the entity made.

    Note:

    Subsection (5) extends this section to cover something that is taken to be a dividend paid by a company. Compare item 1 of the table in subsection 960-120(1) .


     View history note

    Miscellaneous

    SECTION 727-260   Shift down a wholly-owned chain of entities  

    View history reference

    727-260(1)    
    An * indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if the * gaining entity is a * wholly-owned subsidiary of the * losing entity throughout the * IVS period.

    Exception: impact on market value of primary loan interest

    727-260(2)    

    View history reference

    However, subsection (1) does not apply if the * indirect value shift has produced a * disaggregated attributable decrease, in the *market value of an * affected interest in the * losing entity that is also a * primary loan interest in an entity covered by subsection (3), for the owner of the interest.

    727-260(3)    
    This subsection covers:


    (a) the * losing entity; and


    (b) an entity that owns * primary equity interests in an entity that this subsection covers because of one or more previous applications of it.

     View history note

    Subdivision 727-D - Working out the market value of economic benefits  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 727-300  

    727-300   What the rules in this Subdivision are for  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision is used in determining whether there has been an * indirect value shift and, if so:


    (a) whether it has consequences under this Division; and


    (b) if it does, the amount of it.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-315   Transfer, for its adjustable value, of depreciating asset acquired for less than $1,500,000  

    View history reference

    727-315(1)    

    View history reference

    This Division applies to an economic benefit consisting of:


    (a) an entity transferring to another entity a * depreciating asset (except a building or structure) for which the transferring entity has deducted or can deduct an amount under Division 40 ; or


    (b) a right to have an entity transfer such a depreciating asset to another entity;

    as if the economic benefit ' s *market value were equal to the greater (the residual value ) of:


    (c) the asset ' s * adjustable value at the time when the economic benefit was or is * provided; and


    (d) the value assigned to the asset at that time in the transferring entity ' s books;

    but only if:


    (e) as at that time, the * cost of the unit to the transferring entity is less than $1,500,000; and


    (f) it is reasonable for the transferring entity to conclude that the unit ' s actual market value at that time was, is, or will be, not less than 80%, and not more than 120%, of the residual value; and


    (g) both the transferring entity and the other entity choose to have the market value of that economic benefit treated as being equal to the residual value.

    727-315(2)    
    If:


    (a) each of 2 or more economic benefits of the kind mentioned in subsection (1) has been, is being, is to be, or might be, provided by the same transferring entity, to the same other entity, * in connection with the same * scheme; and


    (b) it is reasonable for the transferring entity to conclude that the total of the * depreciating assets ' actual *market values at the respective times when the economic benefits were or are * provided was, is, or will be, not less than 80%, and not more than 120%, of the total of their respective residual values under subsection (1);

    View history reference

    paragraph (1)(f) is taken to be satisfied for each of the economic benefits.

     View history note

    Subdivision 727-E - Key concepts  

    View history reference
     View history note

    Ultimate controller

    SECTION 727-350  

    727-350   Ultimate controller  

    View history reference

    An entity is an ultimate controller of another entity if, and only if:

    (a)    the first entity * controls (for value shifting purposes) the other entity; and

    (b)    there is no entity that controls (for value shifting purposes) both the first entity and the other entity.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-355   Control (for value shifting purposes) of a company  

    View history reference

    50% stake test

    727-355(1)    
    An entity controls (for value shifting purposes) a company if the entity, or the entity and its * associates between them:


    (a) can exercise, or can control the exercise of, at least 50% of the voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or


    (b) have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 50% of any dividends that the company may pay; or


    (c) have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 50% of any distribution of capital of the company.

    View history reference
     View history note


    40% stake test

    727-355(2)    
    An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a company if the entity, or the entity and its * associates between them:


    (a) can exercise, or can control the exercise of, at least 40% of the voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or


    (b) have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 40% of any dividends that the company may pay; or


    (c) have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 40% of any distribution of capital of the company;

    unless an entity (other than the first entity and its associates) either alone or together with its associates in fact controls the company.



    Actual control test

    727-355(3)    
    An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a company if the entity, either alone or together with its * associates, in fact controls the company.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-360   Control (for value shifting purposes) of a fixed trust  

    View history reference

    40% stake test

    727-360(1)    
    An entity controls (for value shifting purposes) a * fixed trust if the entity, or the entity and its * associates between them, have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 40% of any distribution of trust income, or trust capital, to beneficiaries of the trust.

    Other tests

    727-360(2)    
    An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a * fixed trust if:


    (a) the entity, or an * associate of the entity, whether alone or with other associates (the relevant entity ), has the power to obtain the beneficial enjoyment of the trust ' s capital or income (whether or not by exercising its power of appointment or revocation, and whether with or without another entity ' s consent); or


    (b) the relevant entity is able to control the application of the trust ' s capital or income in any manner (whether directly or indirectly); or


    (c) the relevant entity is able to do a thing mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b) under a * scheme; or


    (d) a trustee of the trust is accustomed or is under an obligation (whether formally or informally), or might reasonably be expected, to act in accordance with the relevant entity ' s directions, instructions or wishes; or


    (e) the relevant entity is able to remove or appoint a trustee of the trust.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-365   Control (for value shifting purposes) of a non-fixed trust  

    View history reference

    Trustee tests

    727-365(1)    
    An entity controls (for value shifting purposes) a * non-fixed trust if:


    (a) the entity or an * associate of the entity is a trustee of the trust; or


    (b) the entity, or the entity and its * associates between them, can remove or appoint the trustee, or one or more of the trustees, of the trust; or


    (c) a trustee of the trust is accustomed to act, is under an obligation (whether formally or informally) to act, or might reasonably be expected to act, in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of:


    (i) the entity or an * associate of the entity; or

    (ii) 2 or more entities, at least one of which is the entity or an associate of the entity.


    Tests based on control of the trust income or capital

    727-365(2)    
    An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a * non-fixed trust if the entity, or the entity and its * associates between them:


    (a) have the power to obtain the beneficial enjoyment of trust income or capital; or


    (b) can control in any way at all, whether directly or indirectly, the application of trust income or capital; or


    (c) can, under a * scheme, gain the enjoyment or control referred to in paragraph (a) or (b).

    727-365(3)    
    An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a * non-fixed trust if:


    (a) the entity, or any of its * associates, can benefit under the trust otherwise than because of a * fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the trust; or


    (b) if the entity, or the entity and its * associates between them, have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 40% of any distribution of trust income, or trust capital.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-370  

    727-370   Preventing double counting for percentage stake tests  

    View history reference

    If an interest giving an entity, or an entity and its * associates:


    (a) the ability to exercise, or control the exercise of, any of the voting power in a company; or


    (b) the right to receive dividends that a company may pay; or


    (c) the right to receive a distribution of capital of a company; or


    (d) the right to receive a distribution of trust income or trust capital;

    is both direct and indirect, and (apart from this section) would be counted more than once in applying subsection 727-355(1) or (2) or section 727-360 , only the direct interest is to be counted.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-375  

    727-375   Tests in this Subdivision are exhaustive  

    View history reference

    An entity does not control (for value shifting purposes) a company or trust except as provided in this Subdivision.
     View history note

    Common-ownership nexus and ultimate stake of a particular percentage

    SECTION 727-400   When 2 entities have a common-ownership nexus within a period  

    View history reference

    727-400(1)    
    2 entities have a common-ownership nexus within a period if, and only if, they satisfy the test in any of the one or more items in the table applicable to them.


    Common-ownership nexus within a period
    Item If the entities are: This is the test:
    1 both companies There must be 2 or more *ultimate owners who:

    (a) at some time during that period, because of the same test in section 727-405, have *ultimate stakes, of percentages totalling at least 80%, in one of the companies; and
        (b) at that or a different time during that period, because of that same test, have *ultimate stakes, of percentages totalling at least 80%, in the other company
        Also, subsection (2) of this section must be satisfied
    2 both *fixed trusts There must be 2 or more *ultimate owners who:

    (a) at some time during that period, because of the same test in section 727-410, have *ultimate stakes, of percentages totalling at least 80%, in one of the trusts; and
        (b) at that or a different time during that period, because of that same test, have * ultimate stakes, of percentages totalling at least 80%, in the other trust
        Also, subsection (2) of this section must be satisfied
    3 a company and a *fixed trust There must be 2 or more *ultimate owners who:

    (a) at some time during that period, because of the same test in section 727-405, have *ultimate stakes, of percentages totalling at least 80%, in the company; and
        (b) at that or a different time during that period, because of the same test in section 727-410, have * ultimate stakes, of percentages totalling at least 80%, in the trust
        Also, subsection (2) of this section must be satisfied
    4 a company and a *non-fixed trust There must be 2 or more *ultimate owners:

    (a) each of whom *controls (for value shifting purposes) the non-fixed trust because of section 727-365 at the same time during that period; and
        (b) who, at that or a different time during that period, have *ultimate stakes, of percentages totalling at least 80%, in the company because of the same test in section 727-405
    5 a *fixed trust and a *non-fixed trust There must be 2 or more *ultimate owners:

    (a) each of whom *controls (for value shifting purposes) the non-fixed trust because of section 727-365 at the same time during that period; and
        (b) who, at that or a different time during that period, have *ultimate stakes, of percentages totalling at least 80%, in the fixed trust because of the same test in section 727-410



    Additional condition about profile of percentage ultimate stakes held by 2 or more ultimate owners

    727-400(2)    
    In order to satisfy the test in item 1, 2 or 3 in the table in subsection (1), at least one of subsections (3), (4) and (5) must be satisfied.

    727-400(3)    
    For at least one of the * ultimate owners referred to in that item, the percentage of the * ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in paragraph (a) in the last column of that item must be at least 40%, and so must the percentage of the ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in paragraph (b) in the last column of that item.

    727-400(4)    
    Alternatively, for each of those * ultimate owners, the percentage of the * ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in that paragraph (a) must be the same as the percentage of the ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in that paragraph (b).

    727-400(5)    
    Alternatively, the number of those * ultimate owners must not exceed 16.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-405   Ultimate stake of a particular percentage in a company  

    View history reference

    727-405(1)    
    This section sets out 3 tests of whether an entity has an ultimate stake of a particular percentage (the test percentage ) in a company.

    Note:

    In applying the tests, follow the rules in section 727-415 .



    Voting power

    727-405(2)    
    The first test is that, after tracing, to the * ultimate owners who ultimately hold it, the direct and indirect ownership of all * shares in the company that carry the right to exercise voting power in the company, that ownership is held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of that voting power.

    Dividends

    727-405(3)    
    The second test is that, after tracing, to the * ultimate owners who ultimately hold it, the direct and indirect ownership of all * shares in the company that carry the right to receive any dividends that the company may pay, that ownership is held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of those dividends.

    Capital distributions

    727-405(4)    
    The third test is that, after tracing, to the * ultimate owners who ultimately hold it, the direct and indirect ownership of all * shares in the company that carry the right to receive any distribution of capital of the company, that ownership is held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of the distribution.

    Certain shares ignored

    727-405(5)    
    In tracing the ownership of * shares in a company, ignore * shares whose * dividends can reasonably be regarded as being equivalent to the payment of interest on a loan having regard to:


    (a) how the dividends are calculated; and


    (b) the conditions applying to the payment of the dividends; and


    (c) any other relevant matters.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-410   Ultimate stake of a particular percentage in a fixed trust  

    View history reference

    727-410(1)    
    This section sets out 2 tests of whether an entity has an ultimate stake of a particular percentage (the test percentage ) in a * fixed trust.

    Note:

    In applying the tests, follow the rules in section 727-415 .



    Income distributions

    727-410(2)    
    The first test is that, after tracing, to the * ultimate owners who ultimately hold them, the direct and indirect rights to receive distributions of trust income, those rights are held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of each such distribution.

    Capital distributions

    727-410(3)    
    The second test is that, after tracing, to the * ultimate owners who ultimately hold them, the direct and indirect rights to receive distributions of trust capital, those rights are held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of each such distribution.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-415   Rules for tracing  

    View history reference

    727-415(1)    
    In applying sections 727-400 , 727-405 and 727-410 , follow the rules in this section.

    Interposed entities

    727-415(2)    
    Tracing is to be done through any interposed entities.

    Ownership or rights held jointly

    727-415(3)    
    If some of the ownership or rights of a particular kind in relation to a company or trust are held by 2 or more entities jointly or in common, each of the entities is treated as holding a proportion of the ownership or rights so held. The proportion is to be worked out on a reasonable basis, so that the total of the proportions equals the total of the ownership or rights so held.

    Ownership or rights held by associate

    727-415(4)    
    If, at a particular time:


    (a) an * ultimate owner is an * associate of another ultimate owner; and


    (b) the associate ultimately holds some of the ownership or rights of a particular kind in relation to a company or trust;

    then, in determining whether the other ultimate owner is one of 2 or more ultimate owners because of whom the conditions in an item in the table in section 727-400 are satisfied, the ownership or rights of that kind in relation to the company or trust held by the associate at that time:


    (c) to the extent of a particular percentage, may be treated as being instead held by the other ultimate owner; and


    (d) to the extent so treated, cannot be treated as being instead held by any other ultimate owner of whom the first ultimate owner is an associate.

    727-415(5)    
    If one or more applications of subsection (4) are necessary to establish that an * ultimate owner is one of 2 or more ultimate owners because of whom the conditions in an item in the table in section 727-400 are satisfied, that subsection must be applied accordingly.

     View history note

    Subdivision 727-F - Consequences of an indirect value shift  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 727-450   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    This Subdivision tells you:

  • • which method to use to work out the consequences of an indirect value shift for equity or loan interests, and indirect equity or loan interests, in the losing entity and in the gaining entity; and
  • • which interests, and which owners, are affected.
  •  View history note

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 727-455  

    727-455   Consequences of the indirect value shift  

    View history reference

    The consequences (if any) of an * indirect value shift must be worked out using the * realisation time method unless the * adjustable value method is chosen in accordance with section 727-550 .
    Note:

    Later provisions of this Subdivision set out the interests to which those consequences apply (see sections 727-460 to 727-525 ), which are in turn determined by who are the affected owners (see section 727-530 ).

     View history note

    Affected interests

    SECTION 727-460  

    727-460   Affected interests in the losing entity  

    View history reference

    These are the affected interests in the * losing entity:


    (a) each * equity or loan interest that an * affected owner owns in the losing entity immediately before the * IVS time; and


    (b) each equity or loan interest that:


    (i) an affected owner owns in another affected owner immediately before the IVS time; and

    (ii) is an * indirect equity or loan interest in the losing entity;

    (except one covered by an exception in section 727-470 ).

     View history note

    SECTION 727-465  

    727-465   Affected interests in the gaining entity  

    View history reference

    If immediately before the * IVS time the * gaining entity is a company or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)), these are the affected interests in the gaining entity:


    (a) each * equity or loan interest that an * affected owner owns in the gaining entity immediately before the * IVS time; and


    (b) each equity or loan interest that:


    (i) an affected owner owns in another affected owner immediately before the IVS time; and

    (ii) is an * indirect equity or loan interest in the gaining entity;
    View history reference

    (except one covered by an exception in section 727-470 ).

     View history note

    SECTION 727-470   Exceptions  

    View history reference

    Mere active participants

    727-470(1)    
    An * equity or loan interest that an * active participant in the * scheme owns in another active participant immediately before the * IVS time is not an * affected interest in the * losing entity or in the * gaining entity unless one of the active participants is also covered by 1, 2, 3 or 4 in the table in subsection 727-530(1) (about who is an affected owner).

    Entity that is a small business entity, or satisfies the maximum net asset value test for small business relief

    727-470(2)    
    An * equity or loan interest that an entity (the owner ) owns immediately before the * IVS time is not an * affected interest in the * losing entity or in the * gaining entity if the owner:


    (a) is a *small business entity for each income year that includes any of the * IVS period; or

    View history reference


    (b) would satisfy the maximum net asset value test in section 152-15 throughout the * IVS period.

     View history note

    727-470(3)    
    If the owner is not in existence for part of the * IVS period, disregard that part in applying subsection (2).

    Interests in superannuation entities not covered

    727-470(4)    
    An * equity or loan interest in an * affected owner is not an * affected interest in the * losing entity or in the * gaining entity if the affected owner is an entity listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities) in relation to the income year in which the * IVS time happens.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-520   Equity or loan interest and related terms  

    View history reference

    727-520(1)    
    An equity or loan interest in an entity is a * primary interest, or a * secondary interest, in the entity.

    727-520(2)    
    A primary interest in an entity is a * primary equity interest, or a * primary loan interest, in the entity.

    727-520(3)    
    The meaning of primary equity interest in an entity is set out in the table.


    Primary equity interests
    Item In the case of this kind of entity: Primary equity interest means:
    1 a company a *share in the company; or
        an interest as joint owner (including as tenant in common) of a *share in the company
    2 a trust any of these:
        (a) an interest in the trust income or trust capital; or
        (b) any other interest in the trust; or
        (c) an interest as joint owner (including as tenant in common) of an interest covered by paragraph (a) or (b)


    727-520(4)    
    A primary loan interest in an entity is:


    (a) a loan to the entity; or

    View history reference


    (b) an interest as joint owner (including as tenant in common) of a loan to the entity.

     View history note

    727-520(5)    
    A secondary interest in an entity is a * secondary equity interest, or a * secondary loan interest, in the entity.

    727-520(6)    
    A secondary equity interest in an entity is a right or option:


    (a) to * acquire an existing * primary equity interest in the entity; or


    (b) to have the entity issue a new primary equity interest.

    727-520(7)    
    A secondary loan interest in an entity is a right or option:


    (a) to * acquire an existing * primary loan interest in the entity; or


    (b) to have the entity issue a new primary loan interest.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-525  

    727-525   Indirect equity or loan interest  

    View history reference

    An * equity or loan interest in an entity is an indirect equity or loan interest in another entity if, and only if:


    (a) the first entity owns an equity or loan interest in the other entity; or


    (b) the first entity owns an equity or loan interest that is an indirect equity or loan interest in the other entity because of one or more other applications of this section.

     View history note

    Affected owners

    SECTION 727-530   Who are the affected owners  

    View history reference

    727-530(1)    
    The table sets out the affected owners for the * indirect value shift.


    Affected owners
    Item In this case: The affected owners include:
    1 At least one condition in section 727-105 (ultimate controller test) is satisfied each *ultimate controller because of which a condition in that section is satisfied; and
    each entity that, at a time during the *IVS period when such an ultimate controller *controlled (for value shifting purposes) the losing entity, was an *intermediate controller of the losing entity; and
        each entity that, at a time during the IVS period when such an ultimate controller controlled (for value shifting purposes) the gaining entity, was an intermediate controller of the gaining entity
    2 The conditions in section 727-110 (common-ownership nexus test) are satisfied in respect of:

    (a) one or more times; or
    (b) one or more sets of 2 times
    each *ultimate owner who is one of 2 or more ultimate owners because of whom the condition in the applicable item of that table is satisfied in respect of any of those times; and

    each entity through which ownership or rights are traced to such an ultimate owner in applying the applicable item of that table in respect of any of those times
    3 Any case the *losing entity and the *gaining entity
    4 Any case each entity that, at any time after the *scheme was entered into, is an *associate of an entity that is an affected owner because of item 1, 2 or 3 of this table
    5 Any case each *active participant in the *scheme


    727-530(2)    
    An entity is an intermediate controller of another entity if, and only if:


    (a) the first entity * controls (for value shifting purposes) the other entity; and


    (b) the first entity is * controlled (for value shifting purposes) by an * ultimate controller of the other entity.

    Active participants (if both losing and gaining entities are closely held)

    727-530(3)    
    An entity (the first entity ) is an active participant in the * scheme if:


    (a) at some time during the * IVS period, neither the losing entity nor the gaining entity has 300 or more members (in the case of a company) or 300 or more beneficiaries (in the case of a trust); and


    (b) the first entity:


    (i) actively participated in, or directly facilitated, the entering into of the * scheme; or

    (ii) at some time during the * IVS period actively participated in, or directly facilitated, the carrying out of the scheme;
    (whether or not it did so at the direction of some other entity); and


    (c) at some time during the * IVS period, the first entity owned:


    (i) an * equity or loan interest in the losing entity or in the gaining entity; or

    (ii) an * indirect equity or loan interest in the losing entity or in the gaining entity; and


    (d) the first entity is neither the losing entity nor the gaining entity.

    Note:

    Subsections 727-110(2) and (3) contain rules about when an entity is treated as having or not having 300 or more members or beneficiaries.


     View history note

    Choices about method to be used

    SECTION 727-550   Choosing the adjustable value method  

    View history reference

    727-550(1)    
    This section sets out rules for:


    (a) choosing to use the * adjustable value method to work out the consequences of an * indirect value shift; or


    (b) choosing (when using the adjustable value method) not to work out on a * loss-focussed basis the reductions in the * adjustable values of * affected interests.

    Who makes the choice

    727-550(2)    
    The choice must be made in accordance with the table.


    Who makes the choice
    Item In this case: The choice must be made by:
    1 If the conditions in section 727-110 (common-ownership nexus test) are satisfied jointly by the *ultimate owners because of whom the condition in the applicable item of the table in section 727-400 is satisfied
    2 Item 1 does not apply, and there is an entity: that entity
      (a) who is the sole *ultimate controller because of whom the conditions in section 727-105 (ultimate controller test) are satisfied; or  
      (b) who would be that sole ultimate controller if sections 727-355 to 727-375 were applied ignoring that entity ' s *associates  
    3 Neither of items 1 and 2 applies jointly by the 2 or more *ultimate controllers because of whom the conditions in section 727-105 (ultimate controller test) are satisfied



    When choice must be made

    727-550(3)    
    The choice must be made within 2 years after the first * realisation event that happens to an * affected interest at or after the IVS time.

    Choice binds all affected owners

    727-550(4)    
    The choice binds all * affected owners for the * indirect value shift.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-555   Giving other affected owners information about the choice  

    View history reference

    727-555(1)    
    An entity that makes a choice under section 727-550 (including a choice made jointly with one or more other entities) must inform all entities that it knows to be * affected owners for the * indirect value shift about the content of the choice. The entity must do so in writing within one month after making the choice.

    Penalty: 30 penalty units.


    727-555(2)    
    If:


    (a) a choice under section 727-550 is made jointly by 2 or more entities; and


    (b) one of the entities complies with subsection (1);

    no other entity need comply with that subsection in relation to that choice.


    727-555(3)    
    If an * affected owner for an * indirect value shift has reason to believe that an entity may have made a choice under section 727-550 (including a choice made jointly with one or more other entities), the affected owner may give the entity a written notice asking whether the entity has made such a choice.

    727-555(4)    
    Within one month after receiving a notice under subsection (3), an entity must inform the * affected owner in writing whether the entity has made a choice under section 727-550 and, if so, about the content of the choice.

    Penalty: 30 penalty units.


    727-555(5)    
    The Commissioner may extend the period for complying with a provision of this section.

     View history note

    Subdivision 727-G - The realisation time method  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 727-600   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    Under the realisation time method:

  • • losses on realisation of affected interests in the losing entity are reduced; and
  • • gains on realisation of affected interests in the gaining entity are reduced, within limits worked out by reference to the reductions in losses on affected interests in the losing entity; and
  • • certain 95% services indirect value shifts are disregarded.
  • This Subdivision also explains how its reduction of a loss or gain affects CGT assets, trading stock and revenue assets.

     View history note

    Operative provisions

    SECTION 727-610   Consequences of indirect value shift  

    View history reference

    727-610(1)    
    This Subdivision sets out the realisation time method of working out the consequences (if any) of an * indirect value shift.

    727-610(2)    
    If those consequences are to be worked out using that method, this Subdivision applies to each * realisation event:


    (a) by which a loss would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes; and


    (b) that happens to an * affected interest in the * losing entity; and


    (c) that is the first realisation event that happens to that interest at or after the * IVS time; and


    (d) that happens:


    (i) if the amount of the indirect value shift is $500,000 or more - at any time after the IVS time; or

    (ii) otherwise - within 4 years after the IVS time.

    727-610(3)    
    If:


    (a) those consequences are to be worked out using that method; and


    (b) the * gaining entity is a company or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)) immediately before the * IVS time;

    this Subdivision applies to each * realisation event:


    (c) by which a gain would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes; and


    (d) that happens to an * affected interest in the * gaining entity; and


    (e) that is the first realisation event that happens to that interest at or after the IVS time.

    727-610(4)    
    The consequences for the * affected interest depend on its character. There are consequences for the interest in its character as a * CGT asset. However, if the interest is also * trading stock or a * revenue asset, there are additional consequences for it in that character.

    727-610(5)    
    In working out the consequences for an * affected interest in the * losing entity or * gaining entity, in the interest ' s character as * trading stock, a * realisation event is disregarded for the purposes of identifying under paragraph (2)(c) or (3)(e) the first realisation event that happens to that interest at or after the * IVS time, if:


    (a) the realisation event consists of the ending of an income year; and


    (b) the * value of the interest as trading stock on hand of an entity at the end of the income year is the interest ' s * cost; and


    (c) the interest became part of the entity ' s trading stock on hand during that income year, or the value of the interest as trading stock of the entity on hand at the start of the income year was also the interest ' s cost.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-615  

    727-615   Reduction of loss on realisation event for affected interest in losing entity  

    View history reference

    If this Subdivision applies to a * realisation event that happens to an * affected interest in the * losing entity, a loss that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the event is reduced by an amount that is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) a reasonable estimate of the amount (if any) by which the * indirect value shift has reduced the interest ' s *market value; and

    View history reference


    (b) if the interest is also an affected interest in the * gaining entity - a reasonable estimate of the extent (if any) to which the interest ' s market value at the time of the realisation event still reflects the effect of the indirect value shift on the market value of * equity or loan interests in the gaining entity.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-620  

    727-620   Reduction of gain on realisation event for affected interest in gaining entity  

    View history reference

    If this Subdivision applies to a * realisation event that happens to an * affected interest in the * gaining entity, a gain that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the event is reduced by an amount that is reasonable having regard to:


    (a) a reasonable estimate of the amount (if any) by which the * indirect value shift has increased the interest ' s *market value; and

    View history reference


    (b) a reasonable estimate of the extent (if any) to which the interest ' s market value at the time of the realisation event still reflects the effect of the indirect value shift on the market value of * equity or loan interests in the gaining entity.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-625   Total gain reductions not to exceed total loss reductions  

    View history reference

    727-625(1)    
    This section ensures that the total ( total gain reductions ) of the amounts by which section 727-620 reduces gains * realised for income tax purposes by * realisation events happening at the same time does not exceed the total ( total loss reductions ) of:


    (a) the amounts by which section 727-615 reduces losses that:


    (i) would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by * realisation events happening before or at that time; and

    (ii) have not already been taken into account in a previous application of this section; and


    (b) the amounts by which section 727-850 (as applying to the * scheme from which the * indirect value shift results) reduces losses that:


    (i) would, apart from this Division, be realised for income tax purposes by realisation events happening before the * IVS time to * equity or loan interests, or * indirect equity or loan interests, in the * losing entity; and

    (ii) have not already been taken into account in a previous application of this section.

    727-625(2)    
    If, apart from this section, the total gain reductions would exceed the total loss reductions, the amount by which section 727-620 reduces each of the gains is itself reduced by the amount worked out using this formula:


      (Total gain reductions − Total loss reductions)
    Number of interests
     


    727-625(3)    
    For the purposes of the formula:

    number of interests
    means the number of * affected interests in the * gaining entity to which * realisation events happened at that time.

     View history note


    SECTION 727-630   How cap in section 727-625 applies if affected interest is also trading stock or a revenue asset  

    View history reference

    727-630(1)    
    This section affects how to work out the total gain reductions and the total loss reductions for the purposes of section 727-625 if:


    (a) a * realisation event covered by that section happens to an * equity or loan interest, or to an * indirect equity or loan interest, in the * losing entity or in the * gaining entity; and


    (b) the interest is also * trading stock or a * revenue asset at the time of the event.

    Trading stock

    727-630(2)    
    In the case of an * equity or loan interest, or an * indirect equity or loan interest, in the * losing entity that is * trading stock at that time:


    (a) the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a loss worked out under section 977-25 or 977-30 (about realisation events for trading stock) that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the event is taken into account; and


    (b) the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a loss worked out under section 977-10 (about realisation events for CGT assets) that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the event is not taken into account;

    in working out the total loss reductions.


    727-630(3)    
    In the case of an * affected interest in the * gaining entity that is * trading stock at that time:


    (a) the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain worked out under section 977-35 or 977-40 (about realisation events for trading stock) that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the event is taken into account; and


    (b) the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain worked out under section 977-15 (about realisation events for CGT assets) that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the event is not taken into account;

    in working out the total gain reductions.



    Revenue asset

    727-630(4)    
    In the case of an * equity or loan interest, or an * indirect equity or loan interest, in the * losing entity that is a * revenue asset at that time, the greater of the following is taken into account in working out the total loss reductions:


    (a) the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a loss worked out under section 977-55 (about realisation events for revenue assets) that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the event;


    (b) the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a loss worked out under section 977-10 (about realisation events for CGT assets) that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the event.

    727-630(5)    
    In the case of an * affected interest in the * gaining entity that is a * revenue asset at that time, the greater of the following amounts is taken into account in working out the total gain reductions:


    (a) the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain worked out under section 977-55 (about realisation events for revenue assets) that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the event;


    (b) the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain worked out under section 977-15 (about realisation events for CGT assets) that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the event.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-635  

    727-635   Splitting an equity or loan interest  

    View history reference

    If an * equity or loan interest in the * losing entity or in the * gaining entity is split into 2 or more equity or loan interests at or after the * IVS time:


    (a) each of the 2 or more interests inherits whatever characteristics would have been relevant to applying this Subdivision to the first interest if the split had not happened; and


    (b) those characteristics include characteristics the first interest has inherited because of any other application or applications of this section or section 727-640 ; and


    (c) if a characteristic of the first interest involves an amount or quantity, the amount or quantity for that characteristic as inherited by each of the 2 or more interests is a reasonable proportion of the amount or quantity for that characteristic of the first interest.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-640  

    727-640   Merging equity or loan interests  

    View history reference

    If 2 or more * equity or loan interests (the original interests ) in the * losing entity or in the * gaining entity are merged into 1 or more * equity or loan interests (the new interests ) at or after the * IVS time:


    (a) each of the new interests inherits whatever characteristics would have been relevant to applying this Subdivision to the original interests if the merging had not happened; and


    (b) those characteristics include characteristics inherited by any of the original interests because of any other application or applications of this section or section 727-635 ; and


    (c) if a characteristic of any of the original interests involves an amount or quantity, the amount or quantity for that characteristic as inherited by any of the new interests is a reasonable proportion of the amount or quantity for that characteristic of the original interest.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-645   Effect of CGT roll-over  

    View history reference

    727-645(1)    
    If:


    (a) this Subdivision applies to a * realisation event that is a * CGT event that happens to an * affected interest in the * losing entity; and


    (b) section 727-615 reduces a loss that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the CGT event; and


    (c) there is a roll-over for the CGT event;

    the interest ' s * reduced cost base at the time of the CGT event is taken to have been reduced by the amount by which section 727-615 reduces that loss, but is so taken only for the purposes of working out:


    (d) the interest ' s reduced cost base, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that * acquired the interest because of the CGT event; and


    (e) in the case of a * replacement-asset roll-over - the reduced cost base of the replacement CGT asset, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that * disposed of the interest.

    Note:

    Because of the roll-over, the loss reduction under section 727-615 will have no tax effect. This subsection ensures that the loss reduction is passed on, through the reduction in reduced cost base, to prevent or reduce a loss arising on a later CGT event.


    727-645(2)    
    If:


    (a) this Subdivision applies to a * realisation event that is a * CGT event that happens to an * affected interest in the * gaining entity; and


    (b) section 727-620 reduces a gain that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the CGT event; and


    (c) there is a roll-over for the CGT event;

    the interest ' s * cost base at the time of the CGT event is taken to have been uplifted by the amount by which section 727-620 reduces that gain, but is so taken only for the purposes of working out:


    (d) the interest ' s cost base, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that * acquired the interest because of the CGT event; and


    (e) in the case of a * replacement-asset roll-over - the cost base of the replacement CGT asset, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that * disposed of the interest.

    Note:

    Because of the roll-over, the gain reduction under section 727-620 will have no tax effect. This subsection ensures that the gain reduction is passed on, through the uplift in cost base, to prevent or reduce a gain arising on a later CGT event.

     View history note

    Further exclusion for certain 95% services indirect value shifts if realisation time method must be used

    SECTION 727-700   When 95% services indirect value shift is excluded  

    View history reference

    727-700(1)    
    If the * indirect value shift is a * 95% services indirect value shift, this Subdivision does not apply to a * realisation event that:


    (a) happens to an * affected interest in the * losing entity that is owned by an entity (the owner ); and


    (b) is covered by subsection 727-610(2) ;

    unless:


    (c) the conditions in section 727-705 are met for the indirect value shift; or


    (d) the conditions in section 727-710 , 727-715 or 727-720 are met for the indirect value shift and for that realisation event.

    727-700(2)    

    View history reference

    An * indirect value shift is a 95% services indirect value shift if, and only if, to the extent of at least 95% of their total *market value, the * greater benefits consist entirely of:


    (a) a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240 provided directly by the * losing entity to the * gaining entity; or


    (b) services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are being, or are to be, so provided;

    or both.


    727-700(3)    
    This section does not limit any other exclusion in this Subdivision or in Subdivision 727-C .

     View history note

    95% services indirect value shifts that are not excluded

    SECTION 727-705  

    727-705   Another provision of the income tax law affects amount related to services by at least $100,000  

    View history reference

    The conditions in this section are met if:


    (a) the * losing entity or the * gaining entity lodges an * income tax return for an income year during some or all of which the owner owned the interest; and


    (b) a provision of this Act:


    (i) reduces or excludes an amount that is included in the return; or

    (ii) increases an amount that is so included; or

    (iii) includes an amount not included in the return;
    for the purposes of working out the taxable income, a * tax loss, or a * net capital loss, of that entity for that income year; and


    (c) the amount is related to the right mentioned in paragraph 727-700(2)(a) , or to some or all of the services mentioned in paragraph 727-700(2)(a) or (b), from the point of view of the losing entity providing the services or of the gaining entity receiving them; and


    (d) if the amount is so reduced or increased - the reduction or increase is at least $100,000; and


    (e) if the amount is so excluded or included - the amount is at least $100,000; and


    (f) at some time after the return is lodged, the entity that lodged it is aware, or ought reasonably to be aware, of the reduction, exclusion, increase or inclusion.

    Example:

    If the Commissioner has notified an entity affected by a determination under Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 , the entity ought reasonably to be aware of the effect of the determination.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-710   Ongoing or recent service arrangement reduces value of losing entity by at least $100,000  

    View history reference

    727-710(1)    
    Either or both of these must be true:


    (a) when the * realisation event mentioned in subsection 727-700(1) happens, some or all of the services mentioned in paragraph 727-700(2)(a) or (b) have not yet been provided; or


    (b) some or all of those services have been provided in the income year (of the * losing entity) in which the realisation event happens, or in the previous income year.

    727-710(2)    

    View history reference

    It must be reasonable to conclude that the total (the total market value ) of the * market values, immediately before the * realisation event, of * primary interests in the * losing entity then owned by * affected owners is less than it would have been if none of the following had happened:


    (a) the * 95% services indirect value shift; and


    (b) all other * predominantly-services indirect value shifts that satisfy subsection (1) (or that would satisfy it if they were * 95% services indirect value shifts).

    727-710(3)    

    View history reference

    It must also be reasonable to conclude that the total * market value is less than it would have been by at least:


    (a) $100,000, if the total of the * adjustable values, immediately before the * realisation event, of the * primary interests referred to in subsection (2) is less than or equal to $2,000,000; or


    (b) 5% of the total of those * adjustable values, if that total is greater than $2,000,000 and less than or equal to $10,000,000; or


    (c) $500,000, if that total is greater than $10,000,000.

    727-710(4)    
    For the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), disregard an * indirect value shift referred to in paragraph (2)(a) or (b) if services are provided directly by the * losing entity to the * gaining entity under the * scheme before the income year (of the losing entity) before the one in which the * realisation event happened.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-715   Service arrangements reduce value of losing entity that is a group service provider by at least $500,000  

    View history reference

    727-715(1)    
    At some time during the period (the ownership period ) when the owner owned the interest, the sole or dominant activity of the * losing entity must consist of providing services directly to one or more entities (the group entities ) each of which is covered by one or more of the following paragraphs:


    (a) the * gaining entity;


    (b) an * affected owner;


    (c) an entity that has at that time the same * ultimate controller as the losing entity or the gaining entity;


    (d) if the conditions in section 727-110 (common-ownership nexus test) are satisfied for the * indirect value shift - an entity that has with the losing entity or with the gaining entity a * common-ownership nexus within that period.

    727-715(2)    

    View history reference

    It must be reasonable to conclude that the total (the total market value ) of the * market values, immediately before the * realisation event, of * primary interests in the * losing entity then owned by * affected owners is less than it would have been if none of the following had happened:


    (a) the * 95% services indirect value shift; and


    (b) each * predominantly-services indirect value shift for which the same entity is the losing entity as for the 95% services indirect value shift, and that happened:


    (i) if the amount of the * indirect value shift is $500,000 or more - at any time during the ownership period; or

    (ii) otherwise - during the ownership period but within 4 years before the realisation event, or at the same time as the realisation event.


    Thresholds for reduction of the total market value

    727-715(3)    

    View history reference

    It must also be reasonable to conclude that the total * market value is less than it would have been by at least $500,000, and by at least the lesser of:


    (a) 5% of the total of the * adjustable values of * primary interests in the * losing entity owned by * affected owners at:


    (i) if subsection (4) applies - the time determined under that subsection; or

    (ii) otherwise - the start of the income year in which the * realisation event happens; and


    (b) the amount worked out under the table.


    Alternative threshold for reduction of the total market value
    Item In this case: The amount is:
    1 The ownership period is 4 years or less worked out using this formula:
        $5,000,000 × Number of days in that period
    365
    2 The ownership period is more than 4 years $25,000,000    


    727-715(3A)    

    View history reference

    If at the time referred to in subsection (3) a * primary interest covered by that subsection was * trading stock or a * revenue asset, its * adjustable value taken into account under that subsection is the greater of its adjustable value as a * CGT asset and its adjustable value as trading stock or a revenue asset.
     View history note

    727-715(4)    
    If the owner of the interest is an * affected owner because of item 1, 2, 3 or 4 in the table in subsection 727-530(1) (about who is an affected owner), the time for the purposes of subparagraph (3)(a)(i) of this section is the latest of:


    (a) the start of the income year in which the * realisation event happens; and


    (b) the start of the most recent period (if any):


    (i) that ended before or at the time of the * realisation event; and

    (ii) throughout which at least one of the group entities had the same * ultimate controller as the losing entity or the gaining entity; and
    View history reference


    (c) the start of the most recent period (if any):


    (i) that ended before or at the time of the realisation event; and

    (ii) within which at least one of the group entities has with the losing entity or with the gaining entity a * common-ownership nexus.
     View history note

    SECTION 727-720   Abnormal service arrangement reduces value of losing entity that is not a group service provider by at least $500,000  

    View history reference

    727-720(1)    
    It must be the case that at no time during the period when the owner owned the interest did the sole or dominant activity of the * losing entity consist of providing services as mentioned in subsection 727-715(1) .

    727-720(2)    

    View history reference

    It must be reasonable to conclude that the total (the total market value ) of the *market values, immediately before the * realisation event, of * primary interests in the * losing entity then owned by * affected owners is less than it would have been if none of the following had happened:


    (a) the * 95% services indirect value shift;


    (b) each * predominantly-services indirect value shift that meets either of these conditions:


    (i)its amount was less than $500,000 and it happened within 4 years before the realisation event, or at the same time as the realisation event;

    (ii) its amount was $500,000 or more and it happened at any time before the realisation event, or at the same time as the realisation event;
    and that meets all of these conditions:

    (iii) the same entity is the losing entity for it as for the 95% services indirect value shift;

    (iv) it happened under a different * scheme from the 95% services indirect value shift; and

    (v) having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that the sole or main reason why it happened under a different scheme was to prevent the conditions in section 727-705 , 727-710 , 727-715 or this section from being met.

    727-720(3)    

    View history reference

    It must also be reasonable to conclude that the total *market value is less than it would have been by at least:


    (a) $500,000, if the total of the * adjustable values, immediately before the * realisation event, of the * primary interests referred to in subsection (2) is less than or equal to $10,000,000; or


    (b) 5% of the total of those * adjustable values, if that total is greater than $10,000,000 and less than or equal to $100,000,000; or


    (c) $5,000,000, if that total is greater than $100,000,000.

    727-720(4)    
    The providing of the services mentioned in paragraph 727-700(2)(a) or (b) by the losing entity must not be in the ordinary course of its business.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-725  

    727-725   Meaning of predominantly-services indirect value shift  

    View history reference

    An * indirect value shift is a predominantly-services indirect value shift if, and only if, the * greater benefits consist entirely or predominantly of:


    (a) a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240 provided directly by the * losing entity to the * gaining entity; or


    (b) services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are being, or are to be, so provided;

    or both.

     View history note

    Subdivision 727-H - The adjustable value method  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 727-750   What this Subdivision is about  

    View history reference

    Under the adjustable value method:

  • • the adjustable values of affected interests in the losing entity are reduced; and
  • • the adjustable values of affected interests in the gaining entity are uplifted, within limits worked out by references to the reductions in the adjustable values of affected interests in the losing entity.
  • The consequences of that are:

  • • the cost base and reduced cost base of the interests are reduced or uplifted (or both); and
  • • if the interests are also trading stock or revenue assets, there are further consequences for them in their character as such.
  •  View history note

    SECTION 727-755   Consequences of indirect value shift  

    View history reference

    727-755(1)    
    This Subdivision sets out the adjustable value method of working out the consequences (if any) of an * indirect value shift.

    727-755(2)    
    If those consequences are to be worked out using that method:


    (a) the * adjustable value of each * affected interest in the * losing entity is reduced as provided in this Subdivision; and


    (b) if the * gaining entity is a company or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)) immediately before the * IVS time, the * adjustable value of each * affected interest in the * gaining entity is uplifted as provided in this Subdivision.

    727-755(3)    
    The consequences for the * affected interest depend on its character. There are consequences for the interest in its character as a * CGT asset. However, if the interest is also * trading stock or a * revenue asset, there are additional consequences for it in that character.

     View history note

    Reductions of adjustable value

    SECTION 727-770   Reduction under the adjustable value method  

    View history reference

    727-770(1)    
    This section sets out how to work out the amount (if any) by which the * adjustable value of an * affected interest in the * losing entity is reduced.

    727-770(2)    

    View history reference

    First, work out under section 727-775 whether the * indirect value shift has produced for the owner of the interest a * disaggregated attributable decrease in the *market value of the interest.

    727-770(3)    
    If it has not, the interest ' s * adjustable value is not reduced because of the * indirect value shift.

    727-770(4)    
    If it has, the amount (if any) by which the interest ' s * adjustable value is reduced is worked out on a * loss-focussed basis under section 727-780 .

    727-770(5)    
    However, if a choice is made in accordance with section 727-550 for the reduction not to be worked out on a * loss-focussed basis, the reduction is equal to the * disaggregated attributable decrease.

    Reduction not to exceed reasonable amount

    727-770(6)    
    If the reduction worked out as provided in subsection (4) or (5) is not reasonable in the circumstances, having regard to the objects of this Division, the interest ' s * adjustable value is instead reduced by so much of that reduction as is reasonable in the circumstances, having regard to those objects.

    Note:

    The main object of this Division is set out in section 727-95.


     View history note

    SECTION 727-775   Has there been a disaggregated attributable decrease?  

    View history reference

    727-775(1)    

    View history reference

    This section sets out how to determine whether an * indirect value shift has produced, for the owner of an * equity or loan interest, a disaggregated attributable decrease in the *market value of the interest and, if so, the amount of it.

    727-775(2)    

    View history reference

    Work out the *market value of the interest at the * IVS time, but disregarding:


    (a) all effects on the market value of the interest during the * IVS period, except effects that are reasonably attributable to the * indirect value shift; and


    (b) the effects (if any) of the indirect value shift on the market value of * equity or loan interests, or * indirect equity or loan interests, in the gaining entity.

    (This result is called the notional resulting market value .)

    Note:

    Paragraph (2)(b) is necessary because the market value of the interest may also have been affected by the increase in the market value of interests in the gaining entity, because the entity in which the interest is held had direct or indirect interests in both the losing entity and the gaining entity.

    In such a case, the reductionin adjustable value under this Division will usually be offset by an uplift under this Division.


    727-775(3)    

    View history reference

    If the notional resulting *market value is less than the market value (the old market value ) of the interest:


    (a) at the start of the * IVS period; or


    (b) if the owner last began to own the interest during that period - when the owner last began to own the interest;

    the difference is the disaggregated attributable decrease .


    727-775(4)    

    View history reference

    The * indirect value shift has not produced a disaggregated attributable decrease for the owner of the interest if the notional resulting *market value is greater than or equal to the old market value.

    727-775(5)    

    View history reference

    The *market value of the interest at a particular time may be worked out under subsection (2) or (3) by making a reasonable estimate of that market value.
     View history note

    SECTION 727-780   Working out the reduction on a loss-focussed basis  

    View history reference

    727-780(1)    
    Use the table in subsection (2) of this section to work out on a loss-focussed basis the amount (if any) by which the interest ' s * adjustable value is reduced.

    727-780(2)    

    View history reference

    This involves comparing the old * market value, and the notional resulting market value, with the interest ' s * adjustable value (the old adjustable value ) immediately before the * IVS time.


    Reduction under the attributable decrease method
    Item If the old market value: And the notional resulting market value: This is the result:
    1 is greater than or equal to the old adjustable value is less than the old adjustable value the *adjustable value is reduced to the notional resulting market value
    2 is greater than or equal to the old adjustable value is greater than or equal to the old adjustable value the *adjustable value is not reduced because of the *indirect value shift
    3 is less than the old adjustable value is less than the old adjustable value the *adjustable value is reduced by the amount of the *disaggregated attributable decrease

    Note 1:

    Because of item 1, the indirect value shift cannot cause a loss to arise on disposal of the interest.

    Note 2:

    Because of item 3 the loss already embedded in the interest is preserved, but the indirect value shift does not increase it.

     View history note

    Uplifts of adjustable value

    SECTION 727-800   Uplift under the attributable increase method  

    View history reference

    727-800(1)    
    This section sets out how to work out the amount (if any) by which the * adjustable value of an * affected interest in the * gaining entity is uplifted.

    727-800(2)    

    View history reference

    First, work out under section 727-805 whether the * indirect value shift has produced for the owner of the interest a * disaggregated attributable increase in the *market value of the interest.

    727-800(3)    
    If it has not, the interest ' s * adjustable value is not uplifted because of the * indirect value shift.

    727-800(4)    
    If it has, the * adjustable value is uplifted by the amount worked out using the scaling-down formula in section 727-810 , subject to the rest of this section.

    Note:

    The uplift will be less than or equal to the disaggregated attributable increase.



    Cap if interest has both a disaggregated attributable increase and a disaggregated attributable decrease

    727-800(5)    

    View history reference

    If the * indirect value shift has also produced for the owner of the interest a * disaggregated attributable decrease in the *market value of the interest, the interest ' s * adjustable value:


    (a) is not uplifted if it is not also reduced under this Division because of the indirect value shift; and


    (b) if it is also reduced under this Division because of the indirect value shift - is not uplifted by more than the reduction.

    Cap based on notional distribution by gaining entity of dividends or capital equal to total reductions in adjustable value of affected interests in losing entity

    727-800(6)    
    However, the interest ' s * adjustable value is not uplifted by more than the greater of these amounts:


    (a) the amount (if any) that the * affected owner of the interest would receive (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) in respect of the interest if:


    (i) the * gaining entity were to pay as * dividends, at the time (the payment time ) immediately before the * IVS time, an amount (the total reduction amount ) equal to the total of the amounts by which the * adjustable values of * equity or loan interests in the * losing entity are reduced under this Subdivision because of the * indirect value shift; and

    (ii) those dividends were successively paid or distributed at the payment time by each entity interposed between the gaining entity and that affected owner; and


    (b) the amount (if any) that the * affected owner of the interest would receive (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) in respect of the interest if:


    (i) the gaining entity were to pay the total reduction amount at the payment time as a distribution of capital; and

    (ii) that capital was successively paid or distributed at the payment time by each entity interposed between the gaining entity and that affected owner.

    727-800(6A)    

    View history reference

    The reduction of * adjustable value that is to be taken into account under subparagraph (6)(a)(i) for an * equity or loan interest in the * losing entity is:


    (a) if the interest is * trading stock immediately before the * IVS time - the one worked out on the basis of the interest ' s adjustable value under subsection 727-835(2) ; or


    (b) otherwise - the greater or greatest of these:


    (i) the reduction of the interest ' s * cost base;

    (ii) the reduction of the interest ' s * reduced cost base;

    (iii) the reduction (if any) worked out on the basis of the interest ' s adjustable value under subsection 727-840(2) (about revenue assets).
     View history note


    Uplift not to exceed reasonable amount

    727-800(7)    
    If the uplift worked out as provided in subsections (4), (5) and (6) is not reasonable in the circumstances, having regard to the objects of this Division, the interest ' s * adjustable value is instead uplifted by an amount that is reasonable in the circumstances, having regard to those objects.

    Note:

    The main object of this Division is set out in section 727-95 .


     View history note

    SECTION 727-805   Has there been a disaggregated attributable increase?  

    View history reference

    727-805(1)    

    View history reference

    This section sets out how to determine whether an * indirect value shift has produced, for the owner of an * equity or loan interest, a disaggregated attributable increase in the *market value of the interest and, if so, the amount of it.

    727-805(2)    

    View history reference

    Make a reasonable estimate of the *market value of the interest at the * IVS time, but disregarding:


    (a) all effects on the market value of the interest during the * IVS period, except effects that are reasonably attributable to the * indirect value shift; and


    (b) the effects (if any) of the indirect value shift on the market value of * equity or loan interests, or * indirect equity or loan interests, in the losing entity.

    (This result is called the notional resulting market value .)

    Note:

    Paragraph (2)(b) is necessary because the market value of the interest may also have been affected by the decrease in the market value of interests in the losing entity, because the entity in which the interest is held had direct or indirect interests in both the losing entity and the gaining entity.

    In such a case, the increase in adjustable value under this Division will usually be offset by a reduction under this Division.


    727-805(3)    

    View history reference

    If the notional resulting market value is greater than a reasonable estimate of the *market value (the old market value ) of the interest:


    (a) at the start of the * IVS period; or


    (b) if the owner last began to own the interest during that period - when the owner last began to own the interest;

    the difference is the disaggregated attributable increase .


    727-805(4)    
    The * indirect value shift has not produced a disaggregated attributable increase for the owner of the interest if the notional resulting market value is less than or equal to the old market value.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-810   Scaling-down formula  

    View history reference

    727-810(1)    
    The scaling-down formula for the purposes of section 727-800 is:


      The *disaggregated
    attributable increase
    × Total reductions
    for affected interests
    Total *disaggregated
    attributable decreases
     

    Note:

    The numerator in the fraction can never exceed the denominator. This means that the fraction can never exceed 1, so the uplift will never exceed the disaggregated attributable increase.


    727-810(2)    

    View history reference

    For the purposes of the formula:

    total disaggregated attributable decreases
    means the total of:


    (a) all * disaggregated attributable decreases that the * indirect value shift has produced, in the *market values of * affected interests in the * losing entity, for the entities that owned those interests immediately before the * IVS time; and


    (b) if:


    (i) section 727-850 (as applying to the * scheme from which the indirect value shift results) reduces losses that are * realised for income tax purposes by * realisation events happening before the * IVS time to * equity or loan interests, or to * indirect equity or loan interests, in the losing entity; and

    (ii) the indirect value shift is the only indirect value shift, or is the greater or greatest of 2 or more indirect value shifts, that results from the scheme and for which the losing entity is the losing entity;
    for each of those realisation events, the amounts that would, if:

    (iii) the * presumed indirect value shift were an indirect value shift; and

    (iv) the IVS time for the presumed indirect value shift were the time of that realisation event;
    be the disaggregated attributable decreases that the presumed indirect value shift has produced, in the market value of the equity or loan interests to which that realisation event happened, for the entities that owned those interests immediately before the time of that realisation event.

    total reductions for affected interests
    means the total of:


    (a) all reductions under this Division, because of the indirect value shift, of * adjustable values of affected interests in the losing entity; and


    (b) if paragraph (b) of the definition of total disaggregated attributable decreases applies - the amounts by which section 727-850 reduces the losses (if any) referred to in that paragraph.

     View history note


    Consequences of the method for various kinds of assets

    SECTION 727-830   CGT assets  

    View history reference

    727-830(1)    
    The * cost base of an * equity or loan interest is reduced or uplifted immediately before the * IVS time to the extent that this Division provides for the * adjustable value of the interest to be reduced or uplifted.

    727-830(2)    
    The * reduced cost base of an * equity or loan interest is reduced or uplifted immediately before the * IVS time to the extent that this Division provides for the * adjustable value of the interest to be reduced or uplifted.

    727-830(3)    

    View history reference

    However, the * cost base or * reduced cost base is uplifted only to the extent that the amount of the uplift is still reflected in the *market value of the interest when a later * CGT event happens to the interest.

    727-830(4)    
    To work out:


    (a) whether the * cost base or * reduced cost base of the interest is reduced or uplifted; and


    (b) if so, by how much;

    assume that the adjustable value from time to time of that or any other * equity or loan interest is its cost base or reduced cost base, as appropriate.


    727-830(5)    
    If this Division provides for the * adjustable value of an * equity or loan interest to be both reduced and uplifted:


    (a) the reduction and uplift for which subsection (1) or (2) of this section provides offset each other to the extent of whichever of them is the lesser; but


    (b) if subsection (3) of this section cancels or reduces the uplift, this subsection is taken always to have applied on that basis.

    Reductions and uplifts also apply to pre-CGT assets

    727-830(6)    
    A reduction or uplift occurs regardless of whether the entity that owns the interest * acquired it before, on or after 20 September 1985.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-835   Trading stock  

    View history reference

    727-835(1)    
    This section deals with:


    (a) how this Division applies to an * equity or loan interest that is * trading stock of an entity at the time (the adjustment time ) immediately before the * IVS time; and


    (b) the income tax consequences of this Division reducing or uplifting the * adjustable value of the interest.

    727-835(2)    
    The interest ' s adjustable value at a particular time is:


    (a) if the interest has been * trading stock of the entity ever since the start of the income year of the entity in which that time occurs - its * value as trading stock at the start of the income year; or


    (b) otherwise - its cost.

    727-835(3)    
    If this Division reduces or uplifts the interest ' s * adjustable value, the entity is treated as if:


    (a) immediately before the adjustment time, the entity had sold the interest to someone else (at * arm ' s length and in the ordinary course of business) for its * adjustable value immediately before that time; and


    (b) immediately after the adjustment time, the entity had bought the interest back for the reduced or uplifted adjustable value.

    Note:

    The notional sale and repurchase are separated in time. As a result, if this section is applied to another indirect value shift that happens later in the same income year, the interest ' s adjustable value will be the cost on the notional repurchase: see paragraph (2)(b).


    727-835(4)    

    View history reference

    However, the increase in the cost of an interest because of paragraph (3)(b) is taken into account from time to time only to the extent that the amount of the increase is still reflected in the * market value of the interest.
    Note:

    The situations where the increase in cost would be taken into account include:

  • • in working out your deductions for the cost of trading stock acquired during the income year in which the increase happens; and
  • • the end of an income year if the interest ' s closing value as trading stock is worked out on the basis of its cost; and
  • • the start of the income year in which the interest is disposed of, if that happens in a later income year and the interest ' s closing value as trading stock at the end of the previous income year was worked out on the basis of its cost.

  • 727-835(5)    
    If this Division provides for the * adjustable value of the interest to be both reduced and uplifted:


    (a) the reduction and uplift offset each other to the extent of whichever of them is the lesser, and subsection (3) of this section applies accordingly; but


    (b) to the extent that the amount of the uplift is no longer reflected in the *market value of the interest, this section is taken always to have applied on the basis that the amount of the uplift was reduced to the same extent.

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 727-840   Revenue assets  

    View history reference

    727-840(1)    
    This section deals with:


    (a) how this Division applies to an * equity or loan interest that is a * revenue asset of an entity at the time (the adjustment time ) immediately before the * IVS time; and


    (b) the income tax consequences of this Division reducing or uplifting the * adjustable value of the interest.

    727-840(2)    
    The interest ' s adjustable value at a particular time is the total of the amounts that would be subtracted from the gross disposal proceeds in calculating any profit or loss on disposal of the interest if the entity disposed of it at that time.

    727-840(3)    
    If this Division reduces or uplifts the interest ' s * adjustable value, the entity is treated as if:


    (a) immediately before the adjustment time, the entity had sold the interest to someone else (at * arm ' s length and in the ordinary course of business) for its adjustable value immediately before that time; and


    (b) immediately after the adjustment time, the entity had bought the interest back for the reduced or uplifted adjustable value.

    Note:

    The notional sale and repurchase are separated in time. As a result, if this section is applied to another indirect value shift that happens later in the same income year, the interest ' s adjustable value will be based on the cost on the notional repurchase: see subsection (2).


    727-840(4)    

    View history reference

    However, an uplift in the * adjustable value of the interest is taken into account only to the extent that the amount of the uplift is still reflected in the *market value of the interest when it is disposed of or otherwise realised.

    727-840(5)    
    If this Division provides for the * adjustable value of the interest to be both reduced and uplifted:


    (a) the reduction and uplift offset each other to the extent of whichever of them is the lesser, and subsection (3) of this section applies accordingly; but


    (b) to the extent that the amount of the uplift is no longer reflected in the *market value of the interest, this section is taken always to have applied on the basis that the amount of the uplift was reduced to the same extent.

    View history reference
     View history note

    Subdivision 727-K - Reduction of loss on equity or loan interests realised before the IVS time  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 727-850   Consequences of scheme under this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    727-850(1)    

    View history reference

    If:


    (a) as at the time when a * scheme is entered into, or a later time, an entity (the prospective losing entity ) has * provided, is providing, is to provide, or might provide, one or more economic benefits * in connection with the scheme; and


    (b) the prospective losing entity is a company or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)); and


    (c) a * realisation event happens to an * equity or loan interest, or to an * indirect equity or loan interest, in the prospective losing entity at a time when no * IVS time for the scheme has yet happened (whether or not one happens later); and


    (d) apart from this Division, a loss would be * realised for income tax purposes by the realisation event; and


    (e) because of section 727-855 , the scheme results in a * presumed indirect value shift affecting the realisation event; and


    (f) section 727-860 (about prospective gaining entities) is satisfied; and


    (g) no exclusion in Subdivision 727-C applies to the presumed indirect value shift because of section 727-865 ; and


    (h) on the assumptions set out in subsection 727-865(3) , the interest would be an * affected interest in the prospective losing entity;

    the loss is reduced by an amount that is reasonable having regard to a reasonable estimate of the amount (if any) by which the scheme has reduced the interest ' s *market value during the period that ends at the time of the realisation event and started at the later of:


    (i) when the scheme was entered into; and


    (j) the time of the last realisation event that happened to the interest.

    Note 1:

    This Subdivision does not reduce gains from realisation events, but loss reductions under this Subdivision are taken into account in working out:

  • • gain reductions under Subdivision 727-G for interests in a gaining entity that are realised after the IVS time for the scheme (see section 727-625 ); or
  • • uplifts under Subdivision 727-H in the adjustable values of interests in a gaining entity (see section 727-810 ).
  • Note 2:

    Section 727-865 provides for how other provisions of this Division apply for the purposes of this Subdivision.



    Further exclusion for certain 95% services indirect value shifts

    727-850(2)    
    The loss is not reduced if the * presumed indirect value shift is a * 95% services indirect value shift because of subsection 727-865(2), unless:


    (a) the conditions in section 727-705 (as applying because of that subsection) are met for the presumed indirect value shift; or


    (b) the conditions in section 727-710 , 727-715 or 727-720 (as applying because of that subsection) are met for the presumed indirect value shift and for the realisation event.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-855   Presumed indirect value shift  

    View history reference

    727-855(1)    

    View history reference

    The * scheme results in a presumed indirect value shift affecting the * realisation event if, and only if, as at the time of the realisation event, it is reasonable to conclude that the total *market value of the economic benefits (the greater benefits ) that:


    (a) the * prospective losing entity has * provided, is providing, is to provide, or might provide, * in connection with the * scheme, to another entity, or to each of 2 or more other entities; and


    (b) can be identified (even if the other entity or entities cannot be identified or are not all in existence, or the provision of some or all of the economic benefits is contingent);

    exceeds:


    (c) the total market value of the economic benefits (the lesser benefits ) that:


    (i) have been, are being, are to be, or might be, provided to the prospective losing entity in connection with the scheme; and

    (ii) can be identified (even if the entity or entities providing the benefits cannot be identified or are not all in existence, or the provision of some or all of the economic benefits is contingent); or


    (d) if there are no economic benefits covered by paragraph (c) - nil.

    That excess is the amount of the presumed indirect value shift, which happens at the time of the realisation event.


    727-855(2)    

    View history reference

    The *market value of an economic benefit is to be determined as at the earliest time when it is reasonable to conclude that:


    (a) the economic benefit can be identified; and


    (b) paragraph 727-150(2)(b) is satisfied for that benefit;

    if that time is before the * realisation event.


    727-855(3)    

    View history reference

    Otherwise, the *market value of the economic benefit is to be determined as at the time immediately before the * realisation event, taking account of any contingency to which provision of the benefit is subject at that time.

    For more rules affecting how the market value of an economic benefit is determined, see Subdivision 727-D (as applying because of subsection 727-865(1) ).


    727-855(4)    
    An entity referred to in paragraph (1)(a) need not be a party to the * scheme. A benefit can be provided by act or omission.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-860   Conditions about the prospective gaining entity  

    View history reference

    727-860(1)    
    By the deadline set out in subsection (5), the conditions in subsections (2) and (3) must be satisfied for at least one of these entities:


    (a) the entity or entities referred to in paragraph 727-855(1)(a) ;


    (b) if at the time of the * realisation event it is reasonable to conclude that the entity, or at least one of the entities, referred to in paragraph 727-855(1)(a) will be one of 2 or more entities, but it cannot be determined which - those 2 or more entities.

    727-860(2)    
    Enough must be known about the identity of an entity covered by subsection (1) for it to be reasonable to conclude that, if:


    (a) the * presumed indirect value shift were an * indirect value shift resulting from the * scheme; and


    (b) the * IVS period for the scheme ended at the time of the * realisation event; and


    (c) that entity were the * gaining entity for the indirect value shift;


    (d) the * prospective losing entity were the * losing entity for the indirect value shift; and

    either or both of these would be satisfied for the indirect value shift:


    (e) section 727-105 (Ultimate controller test); and


    (f) section 727-110 (Common-ownership nexus test).

    727-860(3)    
    Enough must be known about the identity of the entity referred to in subsection (2) for it also to be reasonable to conclude that, in relation to either or both of the following:


    (a) the * prospective losing entity * providing one or more economic benefits to that entity * in connection with the * scheme; or


    (b) that entity providing one or more economic benefits to the prospective losing entity in connection with the scheme;

    that entity and the prospective losing entity were not, are not, will not be, or would not be, dealing with each other at * arm ' s length.


    727-860(4)    
    Each entity that is covered by subsection (1), and for which subsections (2) and (3) are satisfied, is called a prospective gaining entity for the * scheme.

    727-860(5)    
    The deadline is:


    (a) if the entity that owned the * equity or loan interest immediately before the * realisation event must lodge an * income tax return for the income year in which the event happens - the time by which the return must be lodged; or


    (b) otherwise - the end of the 6 months immediately after that income year.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-865   How other provisions of this Division apply to support this Subdivision  

    View history reference

    727-865(1)    
    To avoid doubt, these provisions apply for the purposes of working out whether there has been a * presumed indirect value shift and, if so, the amount of it:


    (a) sections 727-155 , 727-160 and 727-165 (about economic benefits);


    (b) section 727-315 (Transfer, for its adjustable value, of depreciating asset acquired for less than $1,500,000).

    727-865(2)    
    For the purposes of section 727-850 , these provisions:


    (a) Subdivision 727-C (Exclusions), except section 727-260 (about a shift down a wholly-owned chain of entities);


    (b) sections 727-700 to 727-725 (about 95% services indirect value shifts), except subsection 727-700(1) ;

    apply to the * presumed indirect value shift on the assumptions set out in subsection (3).


    727-865(3)    
    The assumptions are:


    (a) the * presumed indirect value shift is an * indirect value shift resulting from the * scheme; and


    (b) the * prospective losing entity for the scheme is the * losing entity for that indirect value shift; and


    (c) each * prospective gaining entity for the scheme is the * gaining entity for that indirect value shift; and


    (d) the * greater benefits under the presumed indirect value shift are the greater benefits under that indirect value shift; and


    (e) the * lesser benefits (if any) under the presumed indirect value shift are the lesser benefits under that indirect value shift; and


    (f) the time of the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c) is the * IVS time for the scheme; and


    (g) the * IVS period for the scheme ends at the time of the realisation event; and


    (h) section 727-105 (Ultimate controller test) is satisfied for that indirect value shift according to what it is reasonable to conclude under subsection 727-860(2) as applying to the presumed indirect value shift; and


    (i) section 727-110 (Common-ownership nexus test) is satisfied for that indirect value shift according to what it is reasonable to conclude under subsection 727-860(2) as applying to the presumed indirect value shift; and


    (j) a reference to the realisation event mentioned in subsection 727-700(1) were a reference to the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c) ; and


    (k) the interest to which the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c) happens were the interest referred to in paragraph 727-700(1)(a) ; and


    (l) a reference in any of sections 727-700 to 727-725 (about 95% services indirect value shifts), except subsection 727-700(1) , to the owner were a reference to the entity that, at the time of the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c) , owns the interest to which the event happens.

    727-865(4)    
    Sections 727-635 and 727-640 affect how this Subdivision applies to * equity or loan interests, and * indirect equity or loan interests, in the * prospective losing entity that are split or merged during the period:


    (a) starting when the * scheme is entered into; and


    (b) ending at the time of the * realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c) ;

    in the same way as those sections affect how Subdivision 727-G would apply to those interests on the assumptions set out in subsection (3) of this section.


    727-865(5)    
    The application of a provision because of this section is additional to, and is not intended to limit, any other application of the provision.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-870   Effect of CGT roll-over  

    View history reference

    727-870(1)    
    If:


    (a) the * realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c) is a * CGT event; and


    (b) section 727-850 reduces a loss that would, apart from this Division, be * realised for income tax purposes by the CGT event; and


    (c) there is a roll-over for the CGT event;

    the interest ' s * reduced cost base at the time of the CGT event is taken to have been reduced by the amount by which section 727-850 reduces that loss, but is so taken only for the purposes of working out:


    (d) the interest ' s reduced cost base, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that * acquired the interest because of the CGT event; and


    (e) in the case of a * replacement-asset roll-over - the reduced cost base of the replacement CGT asset, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that * disposed of the interest.

    Note:

    Because of the roll-over, the loss reduction under section 727-850 will have no tax effect. This subsection ensures that the loss reduction is passed on, through the reduction in reduced cost base, to prevent or reduce a loss arising on a later CGT event.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-875  

    727-875   Application to CGT asset that is also trading stock or revenue asset  

    View history reference

    If an * equity or loan interest is also an item of * trading stock or a * revenue asset, this Subdivision applies to the interest once in its character as a CGT asset and again in its character as trading stock or a revenue asset.
     View history note

    Subdivision 727-L - Indirect value shift resulting from a direct value shift  

    View history reference
     View history note

    SECTION 727-905   How this Subdivision affects the rest of this Division  

    View history reference

    727-905(1)    
    This Subdivision affects how the rest of this Division applies to a * scheme (the IVS scheme ) that is or includes a scheme (the DVS scheme ) under which there is a * direct value shift.

    727-905(2)    
    If the * direct value shift:


    (a) has consequences under Division 725 for an entity as an * affected owner of * down interests (or would do so apart from section 725-90 (about direct value shifts that will be reversed)); and


    (b) also has consequences under that Division for another entity as an affected owner of * up interests (or would do so apart from section 725-90 );

    the rest of this Subdivision has effect, for the purposes of Subdivisions 727-A to 727-K, in order to determine:


    (c) whether the IVS scheme results in an * indirect value shift, from the first entity to the other entity, that has consequences under this Division; and


    (d) whether the IVS scheme has consequences under Subdivision 727-K because it results in a * presumed indirect value shift affecting a * realisation event happening to * equity or loan interests, or to * indirect equity or loan interests, in the first entity; and


    (e) those consequences.

    Note:

    Section 725-50 sets out when a direct value shift has consequences under Division 725 .


    727-905(3)    
    If:


    (a) the IVS scheme is the DVS scheme; and


    (b) subsection 725-145(2) is satisfied for the * direct value shift (because one or more equity or loan interests in the target entity are issued at a discount); but


    (c) subsection 725-145(3) (about an increase in the market value of one or more equity or loan interests in the target entity) is not satisfied for the direct value shift;

    Subdivisions 727-A to 727-K apply to the IVS scheme only as provided in this section.


    727-905(4)    
    Otherwise, those Subdivisions apply to the IVS scheme as provided in this section in addition to any other application they have to the scheme.

     View history note

    SECTION 727-910   Treatment of value shifted under the direct value shift  

    View history reference

    727-910(1)    

    View history reference

    The first entity is treated as * providing economic benefits to the other entity, * in connection with the IVS scheme, at the time of a decrease (or future decrease) in the *market value of any of the * down interests, to the extent that the decrease is (or will be) covered by subsection 725-155(1) .

    727-910(2)    

    View history reference

    Despite subsections 727-150(4) and 727-855(2) and (3), the *market value of all economic benefits that subsection (1) of this section treats the first entity as providing to the other entity:


    (a) is to be determined as at the time immediately before the * IVS time, or immediately before the * realisation event, as appropriate; and


    (b) is equal to the total value shifted from the * down interests to the * up interests, as worked out under one or more applications of step 2 of the method statement in section 725-365 or 725-380 .

    727-910(3)    
    The 2 entities are treated as not dealing with each other at * arm ' s length in relation to the providing of those benefits.

    727-910(4)    
    None of those benefits is treated as consisting of, or including, services provided or a right to have services provided.

    Note:

    This means that the exclusions in Subdivisions 727-C and 727-G for indirect value shifts involving services will not apply.


    727-910(5)    
    Except as provided in this section, none of the following is treated as the * providing of economic benefits * in connection with the IVS scheme:


    (a) a decrease (or future decrease) in the *market value of * down interests owned by the first entity or the other entity, to the extent that the decrease is (or will be) covered by subsection 725-155(1) ;

    View history reference


    (b) an increase (or future increase) in the market value of * up interests owned by the first entity or the other entity, to the extent that the increase is (or will be) covered by subsection 725-145(3) ;


    (c) an issue of * up interests at a * discount to the first entity or the other entity, to the extent that the issue is (or will be) covered by subsection 725-145(2) .

    Note:

    Value shifted from down interests owned by the other entity to up interests owned by the first entity are dealt with by a separate application of this Subdivision to those interests (because of paragraphs 727-905(2)(a) and (b)).

     View history note